From 1fded6e8175e92c1eaa1e85db7c3f8187e47e602 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?utf8?q?Uwe=20St=C3=B6hr?= Date: Sun, 12 May 2013 12:57:14 +0200 Subject: [PATCH] UserGuide.lyx: next revision step - sec. 6.7 - 6.13 --- lib/doc/UserGuide.lyx | 91311 +++++++++++++++++------------------ lib/doc/de/UserGuide.lyx | 92007 +++++++++++++++++------------------ lib/doc/es/UserGuide.lyx | 92362 +++++++++++++++++------------------ lib/doc/fr/UserGuide.lyx | 95586 +++++++++++++++++++------------------ lib/doc/ja/UserGuide.lyx | 74937 ++++++++++++++--------------- 5 files changed, 223662 insertions(+), 222541 deletions(-) diff --git a/lib/doc/UserGuide.lyx b/lib/doc/UserGuide.lyx index 5bf26377ed..7b085a23d9 100644 --- a/lib/doc/UserGuide.lyx +++ b/lib/doc/UserGuide.lyx @@ -1,45543 +1,45768 @@ -#LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ -\lyxformat 469 -\begin_document -\begin_header -\textclass scrbook -\begin_preamble -% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!! -% -% This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints -% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble, -% parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you -% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact -% the documentation team -% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org - -\usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle -\ifpdf % if pdflatex is used - - % set fonts for nicer pdf view - \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} - -\fi % end if pdflatex is used - -% for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float -\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} - -% the pages of the TOC is numbered roman -% and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added -\let\myTOC\tableofcontents -\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \frontmatter - \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} - \myTOC - \mainmatter } - -% define a short command for \textvisiblespace -\newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace} - -% macro for italic page numbers in the index -\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} - -% for customized page headers/footers -% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document -\usepackage{fancyhdr} -% change header rule width -\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} - -% workaround for a makeindex bug, -% see sec. "Index Entry Order" -% only uncomment this when you are using makindex -%\let\OrgIndex\index -%\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}} -\end_preamble -\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading -\use_default_options false -\begin_modules -customHeadersFooters -enumitem -\end_modules -\maintain_unincluded_children false -\language english -\language_package default -\inputencoding auto -\fontencoding global -\font_roman default -\font_sans default -\font_typewriter default -\font_math auto -\font_default_family default -\use_non_tex_fonts false -\font_sc false -\font_osf false -\font_sf_scale 100 -\font_tt_scale 100 -\graphics default -\default_output_format default -\output_sync 0 -\bibtex_command default -\index_command default -\paperfontsize 12 -\spacing single -\use_hyperref true -\pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide" -\pdf_author "LyX Team" -\pdf_subject "LyX" -\pdf_keywords "LyX" -\pdf_bookmarks true -\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true -\pdf_bookmarksopen false -\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 -\pdf_breaklinks false -\pdf_pdfborder false -\pdf_colorlinks true -\pdf_backref false -\pdf_pdfusetitle false -\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" -\papersize default -\use_geometry false -\use_package amsmath 1 -\use_package amssymb 1 -\use_package cancel 0 -\use_package esint 1 -\use_package mathdots 1 -\use_package mathtools 0 -\use_package mhchem 1 -\use_package stackrel 0 -\use_package stmaryrd 0 -\use_package undertilde 0 -\cite_engine basic -\cite_engine_type numerical -\biblio_style plain -\use_bibtopic false -\use_indices false -\paperorientation portrait -\suppress_date false -\justification true -\use_refstyle 0 -\notefontcolor #0000ff -\branch Question -\selected 1 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #00ff00 -\end_branch -\branch Answer -\selected 0 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #aa55ff -\end_branch -\index Index -\shortcut idx -\color #008000 -\end_index -\secnumdepth 3 -\tocdepth 2 -\paragraph_separation indent -\paragraph_indentation default -\quotes_language english -\papercolumns 1 -\papersides 2 -\paperpagestyle default -\tracking_changes true -\output_changes false -\html_math_output 0 -\html_css_as_file 0 -\html_be_strict true -\author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller" -\author 5863208 "ab" -\author 2090807402 "usti" -\end_header - -\begin_body - -\begin_layout Title -The LyX User's Guide -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Author -by the LyX Team -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please - send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Version 2.0.x -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset toc -LatexCommand tableofcontents - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Getting Started -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -What is LyX? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX is a document preparation system. - It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \- -scripts, publishable books, business - letters and proposals, and even poetry. - It is unlike most other -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -word processors -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core - editing style. - That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Section -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, not as -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Bold, 17 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt type, left justified, 5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mm space below -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts, - not with mechanics. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the -\emph on -Introduction -\emph default -manual. - If you haven't read it yet, you need to. - Yes, we mean now. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\emph on -Introduction -\emph default - manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important -ly, the format of all of the manuals. - If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual. - You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead - of this one. - The -\emph on -Introduction -\emph default - manual describes that, too. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -How LyX Looks -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of - its window. - Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons. - There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing - documents. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar. - This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional. - When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the - next line. - Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for - only a vertical scrollbar. - There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar. - The first case is large images. - To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the - image and use the option -\family sans -Scale on Screen -\family default - in the tab -\family sans -LaTeX and LyX options -\family default -. - The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than - the LyX window. - You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but - this doesn't work for equations yet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look - at Appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:The-User-Interface" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -HELP -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The help system consists of the LyX manuals. - You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX. - Just select the manual you want to read from the -\family sans -Help -\family default - menu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Basic LyX Setup -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Preferences -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document - classes and LaTeX packages are available. - It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences - settings. - Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed - on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX. - To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reconfigure -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration of LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LaTeX Setup -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:LaTeX-Setup" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will - not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it - installed. - However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce - PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain - text or as XHTML. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes - or packages. - Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required - files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file - you can view from the menu -\family sans -Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Configuration -\family default -. - If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then - reconfigure LyX (menu -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reconfigure -\family default -). -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - from being printed with sub- and superscript letters. - More about TeX Code is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:TeX-Code" - -\end_inset - -, the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration of LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - See section 5.1 of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -How to work with LyX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Basic File Operations -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -File Operations -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Under the -\family sans -File -\family default - menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor - in addition to some more advanced operations: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -New -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-new" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -New -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -from -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Template -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Open -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "file-open" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Close -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Save -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-write" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Save -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -As -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Revert -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -to -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -saved -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Version -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Control -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Import -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Export -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Print -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Exit -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with - a few minor differences. - The -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -New -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -from -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Template -\family default - command lists the available templates. - Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for - the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually. - They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters - (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Document-Classes" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - There is no -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -default file -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - or document named -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Untitled -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - or -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -scratch. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank - space is just that — a big, blank space. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Revert -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -to -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -saved -\family default - and -\family sans -Version -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Control -\family default - are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature - in LyX also. - Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@. - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Revert -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -to -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -saved -\family default - will reload the document from disk. - You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document - and want to restore it to the last save. - With -\family sans - Version -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Control -\family default -you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify - them as your changes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Basic Editing Features -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Editing -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations - on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can - delete whole words as well as individual characters. - The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to - access them. - We will start with cut and paste. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As you might expect, the -\family sans -Edit -\family default - menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with - various other editing features. - Some of these are special and covered in later sections. - The basic ones are: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Cut -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "cut" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Copy -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "copy" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Paste -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "paste" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Paste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Recent -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Paste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Special -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Find -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Replace -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show findreplace" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The first three are self-explanatory. - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste. - The submenu of -\family sans -Paste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Recent -\family default - shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Plain -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text, -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Join -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Lines -\family default - will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted - as one paragraph. - A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file. - Without -\family sans -Join -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Lines -\family default -, the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text - will start a new paragraph. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Replace -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Find -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -The -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Find -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Replace -\family default - item opens the -\family sans -Find -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Replace -\family default - dialog. - Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it. - Hitting the -\family sans -Replace -\family default - button replaces the selected text with the contents of the -\family sans -Replace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -with -\family default - field. - You can click the -\family sans -Find -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Next -\family default - button to skip the current word. - Hit -\family sans -Replace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -All -\family default - to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically. - The -\family sans -Case -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sensitive -\family default - option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search - word. - If the toggle is set, searching for -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -Test -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - will not match the word -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -test -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The -\family sans -Match whole words only -\family default - option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g., searching for -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -star -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - will not match -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -starlet -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - LyX offers also an advanced -\family sans -Find -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Replace -\family default - feature that is described in sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Things like notes, floats, etc. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(the so called -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -insets -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) can be dissolved. - This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal - text. - Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an - inset and pressing -\family sans -Backspace -\family default - or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing -\family sans -Delete -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "inset-select-all" -\end_inset - -, the shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select" -\end_inset - - selects the whole document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Undo and Redo -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Redo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Undo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Undo-and-Redo" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it. - LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer. - Select -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Undo -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "undo" -\end_inset - - to undo some mistake. - If you accidentally undo too much, use -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Redo -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "redo" -\end_inset - - to -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -undo the undo. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -steps to minimize memory overhead. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it - was last saved, the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -changed -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - status of the document is unfortunately not reset. - This is a consequence of the 100 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -step undo limit mentioned above. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Undo -\family default - and -\family sans -Redo -\family default - work on almost everything in LyX. - But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks - of text. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Mouse Operations -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mouse Operations -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -These are the most basic mouse operations. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Motion -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Click the -\emph on -left mouse button -\emph default - once anywhere in the edit window. - The cursor moves to the text under the mouse. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Selecting Text -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Hold down the -\emph on -left mouse button -\emph default - and drag the mouse. - LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions. - Use -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Copy -\family default - to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paste -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.) -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Right-click on them to set their properties. - Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Section -Navigating -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Navigating" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Navigating -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -The -\family sans -Navigate -\family default - menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can - click to jump to the corresponding document part. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Outline -\family default - or by the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle toc" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -You can set bookmarks in your document under -\family sans -Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bookmarks -\family default - and use the same menu to return to them. - Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - - (also -\family sans -Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Navigate -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Back -\family default -) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something. - This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled - to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to - your last editing position. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -By pressing the -\family sans -F5 -\family default - key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -The Outliner -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:The-Outliner" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between - several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists - of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen -ces (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Cross-References" - -\end_inset - -), or notes, or citations (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliography" - -\end_inset - -). - Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your - document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context - menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements. - For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation - dialog and to modify the citation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear - in the Outline. - For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and - wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -sub: -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow - you further to control the display. - The -\family sans -Sort -\family default - option sorts the current list alphabetically. - Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the - document. - The -\family sans -Keep -\family default - option keeps it in the current view state. - Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 and 4 displayed and click on section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3, the subsections of sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 and 4 will still be displayed. - Without the -\family sans -Keep -\family default - option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3. - Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -depth -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../images/reload.png - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary). - Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections - in your document. - The -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../images/down.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../images/up.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - buttons move sections up and down in the document. - So, for example, you can move section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 before section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.4 or after section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.6. - LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order. - With the buttons -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../images/promote.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../images/demote.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - (or the corresponding key bindings -\family sans -Tab -\family default - and -\family sans -Shift-Tab -\family default -) you can change the level of sections. - So you can for example make section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 chapter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 or subsection -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.4.1. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Input/Word Completion -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Input-Completion" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Input completion -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Word completion|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Input completion -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently - opened. - Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that - is used to propose completions. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences -\family default -) in the section -\family sans -Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Input Completion -\family default -. - With the option -\family sans -Automatic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -inline -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -completion -\family default - the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor. - With the option -\family sans -Automatic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -popup -\family default - the completions are always shown in a popup. - The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option - -\family sans -Cursor -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -indicator -\family default -. - With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and - popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there - are completions available. - Press the -\family sans -Tab -\family default - key to accept a proposed completion. - If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them. - You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys, - and accept the chosen completion by pressing -\family sans -Return -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond -ing options for text. - The special math option -\family sans -Autocorrection -\family default - enables characters to be composed. - If, for example, you want to insert the character -\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ -\end_inset - -, you can then input the characters -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -=> -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to a formula to get it. - So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use - of the math toolbar. - A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file -\family typewriter -autocorrect -\family default - that is in LyX's installation folder. - Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation - mark key “!”. - Pressing -\family sans -Space -\family default - turns it off. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Basic Key Bindings -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Key Bindings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bindings|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Key Bindings -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Shortcuts|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Key Bindings -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are at least two different primary binding maps: -\family typewriter -cua -\family default - and -\family typewriter -emacs -\family default -. - LyX's default is -\family typewriter -cua -\family default -, which can be changed in the LyX preferences under -\family sans -Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Shortcuts -\family default -. - (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts" - -\end_inset - -.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Some keys, like -\family sans -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Up -\family default -, -\family sans -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Down -\family default -, -\family sans -Left -\family default -, -\family sans -Right -\family default -, -\family sans -Up -\family default - and -\family sans -Down -\family default -, do exactly what you expect them to do. - Other keys don't: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tab -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Tab" -description "Tabulator key" - -\end_inset - - -\family default - There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX. - If you do not understand this, go read sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Par-indent-intro" - -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments" - -\end_inset - -, especially section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Lists" - -\end_inset - -, right now. - Yes, right now. - If you are still confused, look in the -\emph on -Tutorial -\emph default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -In LyX the -\family sans -Tab -\family default - key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor - in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or - Enumerate. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Esc -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Esc" -description "Escape key" - -\end_inset - - -\family default - This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -cancel key. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - It is used, generically, to cancel operations. - Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Home -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -End -\family default - These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line, - unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning - or end of the file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are three modifier keys: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Control -\family default - (Denoted by -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Ctrl -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Ctrl" -description "Control key" - -\end_inset - - in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending - on which keys it is used in combination with: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Backspace -\family default - or -\family sans -Delete -\family default -, it deletes an entire word instead of a single character. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Left -\family default - and -\family sans -Right -\family default -, it moves by words instead of characters. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Home -\family default - and -\family sans -End -\family default -, it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Shift -\family default - (Denoted by -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Shift -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Shift" -description "Shift key" - -\end_inset - - in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select - the text between the old and new cursor positions. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Alt -\family default - (Denoted by -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Alt -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Alt" -description "Alt or Meta key" - -\end_inset - - in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless - your keyboard has a distinct Meta key. - If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs - the -\family sans -Alt+ -\family default - function. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -This key does many different things, but it also activates the -\emph on -menu accelerator keys -\emph default -. - If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a - menu or menu item, it selects that menu item. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -For example, the sequence -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Alt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -e -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -s -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -c -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - brings up the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Text Style -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - dialog. - Typing -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Alt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -f -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - opens the -\family sans -File -\family default - menu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\emph on -Shortcuts -\emph default - manual lists all other things bound to the -\family sans -Alt -\family default - key. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use - LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar - at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action - you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action. - The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings. - The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used - in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding - it. - However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Alt+P Shift+A -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - means -\family sans -Alt+P -\family default - followed by a capital -\family sans -A -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -LyX Basics -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Basics -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Document Types -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Types -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you - need to decide what type of document you want to edit. - Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings, - numbering schemes, and so on. - Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments, - and format the title of your document differently. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A -\emph on -document class -\emph default - describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents. - By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties, - making it easier to create the type of document you want. - If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default. - So it is up to you to change the class of your document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Document Classes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Classes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Document-Classes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can select a class using the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Document Class -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dialog. - Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options - you may need. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Overview -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are four standard document classes in LyX. - They are: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Article for basic articles -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Report for basic reports -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Book for writing a book -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Letter for US-style letters -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have - installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions - will include many of these. - Here are some of the classes. - The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter -\emph on -Special Document Classes -\emph default - in the -\emph on -Additional Features -\emph default - manual: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry - Society -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical - Union -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American - Mathematical Society (AMS). - There are three article layouts available. - The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that - prepends the section number to the number of the result. - All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced - together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence. - The -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -sequential numbering -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers - them throughout the article in a single sequence. - Each type of result gets its own sequence. - There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Beamer Layout for presentations -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Broadway Layout for writing plays. - It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed - with LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chess Layout to write about chess games -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Curriculum -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vitae classes to create curriculum vitae -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Foils Used to make transparencies -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry. - It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed - with LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical - and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features - like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc. - (Is used by this document.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Memoir another replacement for the standard classes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Powerdot Layout for presentations -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -REVTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical - Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society - of America (OSA). - This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Slides Used to make transparencies -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -SPIE -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society - for Optical Engineering (SPIE) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes - here. - You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the - -\emph on -Additional Features -\emph default - manual. - Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all - of the document classes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Availability -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Document Class -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -are marked as -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Unavailable -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning - saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are - not installed. - So it may seem that something is wrong. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nothing is wrong. - LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, - and some of them, like -\family sans -IOP -\family default -, are highly specialized. - LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, - and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing - number. - No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed - by some document class. - There are just too many of them. - That is why some of the document classes are unavailable. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -Unavailable -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, you just need to install the appropriate package files. - The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that - document class for a new file. - LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files. - See section -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Installing new LaTeX files -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual for information on how to install them. -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it - does not include support for every document class people might want to - use. - For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for - dissertations submitted to those universities. - The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these. - There are too many. - Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have - done so. - Chapter -\emph on -Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual contains information on how to create layout files. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Modules -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Modules" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Modules -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the - chosen document class. - For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document. - This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond -ing module in the -\family sans -Modules -\family default - section of the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dialog. - Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what - it does. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not - always installed by default. - LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and - it will tell you what exactly you are missing. - You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not - be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be - able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites. - If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to - install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting - -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reconfigure -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration of LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - See section -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Installing new LaTeX files -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual for more information on installing required packages. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible. - LyX will advise you about these things. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Local Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Local-Layout" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Local Layout -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be - used in a variety of different documents. - If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different - documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose. - Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you - need a specific inset or character style only that one time. - You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble. - What you want is LyX's -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Local Layout -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - See section -\emph on -Local Layout -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual for information on how to use it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Properties -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Each class has a default set of options. - Here's a quick table describing them: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Page style -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Sides -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Columns -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Max. - sectioning level -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -article -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Plain -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -One -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -One -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Section -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -report -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Plain -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -One -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -One -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Chapter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -book -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Headings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Two -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -One -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Chapter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -letter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Plain -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -One -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -One -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -none -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You're probably also wondering what -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Max. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sectioning level -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - means. - There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings. - Different document classes allow different types of section headings. - Only two use the -\family sans -Chapter -\family default - heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the -\family sans -Section -\family default - heading. - Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section - headings. - In addition to -\family sans -Chapter -\family default - and -\family sans -Section -\family default - headings, there are also -\family sans -Subsection -\family default - headings, -\family sans -Subsubsection -\family default - headings, and so on. - We will describe these headings fully in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Headings" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Document Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Document-Layout" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Layout -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default -. - There in the -\family sans -Class -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -options -\family default - field under -\family sans -Documents -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Class -\family default -, you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated - list. - This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want - to use for your document. - To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have - to read its manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The drop box -\family sans -Headings -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -style -\family default - in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog under -\family sans -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default - controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page. - You can choose between the following five options: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Default -\family default - Use default page style of current class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -empty -\family default - No page numbers or headings. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -plain -\family default - Page numbers only. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -headings -\family default - Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number. - Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on - the maximum sectioning level of the class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -fancy -\family default - This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you - have the LaTeX-package -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installed. - How they are defined is explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The separation of paragraphs is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Paper Size and Orientation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paper size -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can find the following options in the menu -\family sans -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default - of the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog: -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Paper -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Format -\family default - What size paper to print on. - The choices are -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Default -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -A0 - A6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -B0 - B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -C0 - C6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -US letter, US legal, US executive -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -JIS B0 - JIS B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Custom -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Orientation -\family default - To choose whether to output as -\family sans -Landscape -\family default - or as -\family sans -Portrait -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Two-sided -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -document -\family default - Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper. - That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Margins -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Margins" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Margins -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margins -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Paper margins are set in the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings - because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking - the paper format and the font size into account. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Important Note -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you change a document class, LyX has to convert -\emph on -everything -\emph default - into the new class. - That includes the paragraph environments. - Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document - classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments. - If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the - paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -unknown -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to - the old class. - But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you - will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph -s manually to a style present in your new document class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Paragraph Indentation and Separation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph ! Indentation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Par-indent-intro" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to - say a word or two about paragraph indentation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs. - Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph. - Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs. - If you choose indentation for paragraphs the -\emph on -first -\emph default - paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list, - etc., is -\emph on -not -\emph default - indented. - Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented. - Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document - language than English. - LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language - used. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings - and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded - into LyX. - As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what. - LyX takes care of that. - In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a - range. - That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure - figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom - of a page, and so on. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them. - LyX gives you the ability globally to change -\emph on -all -\emph default - these pre-coded spacings. - We will explain more later. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Paragraph Separation -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Paragraph-Separation" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph ! Separation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Select -\family sans -Indentation -\family default - or -\family sans -Vertical -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -space -\family default - in the submenu -\family sans -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default - of the dialog -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fine-Tuning -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph. - Open the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - dialog and toggle the -\family sans -Indent -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Paragraph -\family default - option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle" -\end_inset - -). - If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this - button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling - this). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph - if you need to do some fine-tuning. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Line Spacing -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph ! Line spacing -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\noun on - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -\noun default - dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu - -\family sans -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default -. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -You need to have the LaTeX-package -\series bold -setspace -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! setspace -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installed to use this feature. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - You can set it for a single paragraph in the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing - is normally defined in the environment's style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Paragraph Environments -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Paragraph-Environments" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph ! Environments -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph environments|( -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Overview -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Paragraph environments correspond to the -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -begin{ -\emph on -environment -\emph default -} ... - -\backslash -end{ -\emph on -environment -\emph default -} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -command sequence in LaTeX files. - If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally - alien to you, we urge you to read the -\emph on -Tutorial -\emph default -. - The -\emph on -Tutorial -\emph default - also contains many more examples than this section does. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A paragraph environment is simply a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -container -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties. - This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering - scheme, labels, and so on. - Additionally, you can -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -nest -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment - to inherit some of the properties of another. - The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy - tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days - of typewriters. - There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular - document type. - We will only be covering the most common ones here. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png - scale 70 - clip - -\end_inset - - at the left end of the toolbar. - LyX will change the environment of the -\emph on -entire -\emph default - paragraph in which the cursor sits. - You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if - you select them before choosing the new environment. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note that entering -\family sans -Return -\family default - will -\emph on -typically -\emph default - create a new paragraph using the -\family sans -Standard -\family default - paragraph environment. - We say -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -typically -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - because if you are in one of these environments: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Quote -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Quotation -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Verse -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Itemize -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Enumerate -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Description -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -List -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter -\family sans -Return -\family default -, rather than resetting it to -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nesting" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Standard -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The default paragraph environment is -\family sans -Standard -\family default - for most classes. - It creates a plain paragraph. - If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses. - In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in - this manual) are in the -\family sans -Standard -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can nest a paragraph using the -\family sans -Standard -\family default - environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything - in a -\family sans -Standard -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Document Title -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Title -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the - author(s) and a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -footnote -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - for thanks or contact information. - For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate - page along with today's date. - For other types of documents, the title -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - goes at the top of the first page of the document. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph - environments -\family sans -Title -\family default -, -\family sans -Author -\family default -, and -\family sans -Date -\family default -. - Here's how you use them: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Put the title of your document in the -\family sans -Title -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Put the author name in the -\family sans -Author -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date, - or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in - the -\family sans -Date -\family default - environment. - Note that using this environment is optional. - If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date. - If you don't want a date, use the option -\family sans -Suppress default date on front page -\family default - in the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -class -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can use footnotes to insert -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -thanks -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - or contact information. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Headings -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Section headings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Headings" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings. - LyX takes care of the numbering for you. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Numbered Headings -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Section headings ! Numbered -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are 7 numbered types of section headings. - They are: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Part -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Chapter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Section -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Subsection -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Subsubsection -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Paragraph -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Subparagraph -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods. - The numbers describe where in the document you are. - Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text. - For example, suppose you're writing a book. - You group the book into chapters. - LyX does a similar grouping: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Part -\family default - is divided into either -\family sans -Chapter -\family default -s or -\family sans -Section -\family default -s -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Chapter -\family default -s are divided into -\family sans -Section -\family default -s -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Section -\family default -s are divided into -\family sans -Subsection -\family default -s -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsection -\family default -s are divided into -\family sans -Subsubsection -\family default -s -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsubsection -\family default -s are divided into -\family sans -Paragraph -\family default -s -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Paragraph -\family default -s are divided into -\family sans -Subparagraph -\family default -s -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Not all document types use the -\family sans -Chapter -\family default - heading as the maximum sectioning level. - In that case the -\family sans -Section -\family default - is the top-level heading. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -So, if you use the -\family sans -Subsubsection -\family default - environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number, - along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter - that it's in. - For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the - label -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -2.5 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Unnumbered Headings -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Section headings ! Unnumbered -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The unnumbered section headings have a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -* -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - at the end of their name. - They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in - the table of contents, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:toc" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Changing the Numbering -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Numbering-depth" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear - in the Table of Contents. - Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document - class. - Just as certain classes start with -\family sans -Chapter -\family default - and go down to the -\family sans -Subparagraph -\family default - level. - Others start at -\family sans -Section -\family default -. - Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels. - Most don't number -\family sans -Paragraph -\family default - or -\family sans -Subparagraph -\family default -. - This is something you can change. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Open the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Under -\family sans -Numbering -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TOC -\family default - you will see two counters. - The one named -\family sans -Numbering -\family default - controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section - heading. - The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table - of contents. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Short Titles of Headings -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Section headings ! Short titles -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Short Titles -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Short-Titles" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long. - This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space. - For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section - title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings. - This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents, - avoiding the problem mentioned. - To specify a short title, use the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Short -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Title -\family default -. - This will insert a box labeled -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -opt -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (stands for -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -optional -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) which you can use to enter the short title text. - This also works for captions inside floats. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The title of this section is a good example of using this feature. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Special Information -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The following information applies to all section headings: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -You cannot do any nesting with these environments. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -You can only use inline math in these environments. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Quotes and Poetry line spacing -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations. - They are -\family sans -Quote -\family default -, -\family sans -Quotation -\family default -, and -\family sans -Verse -\family default -. - Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins. - These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in. - They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below - the text they contain. - They also allow nesting, so you can put a -\family sans -Verse -\family default - in a -\family sans -Quotation -\family default -, as well as in some other paragraph environments. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do - -\emph on -not -\emph default - reset to -\family sans -Standard -\family default - when you start a new paragraph. - So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter -\family sans -Return -\family default - without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you. - Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you - have to change back to the -\family sans -Standard -\family default - environment yourself. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Quote -\family default - and -\family sans -Quotation -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Quote" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Quotation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's - time for the differences. - -\family sans -Quote -\family default - and -\family sans -Quotation -\family default - are identical except for one difference: -\family sans -Quote -\family default - uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line. - -\family sans -Quotation -\family default - -\emph on -always -\emph default - indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here's an example of the -\family sans -Quote -\family default - environment: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -This is in the -\family sans -Quote -\family default - environment. - I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it - wraps. - See – no indentation! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Here's the second paragraph of this quote. - Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and - the other paragraph. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here's another example, this time in the -\family sans -Quotation -\family default - environment: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -This is in the -\family sans -Quotation -\family default - environment. - If I keep writing, you will see the indentation. - If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting - the first line, then -\family sans -Quotation -\family default - is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it -\emph on -if -\emph default - you were quoting other text. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Here's a new paragraph. - I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time. - If I did that, though, you'd get bored. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As the examples show, -\family sans -Quote -\family default - is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs. - They should put quotes in the -\family sans -Quote -\family default - environment. - Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the -\family sans -Quotation -\family default - paragraph environment for quoted text. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Verse -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph ! Verse -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Poetry -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Verse" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Verse -\family default - is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on. - Here's an example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -This is in Verse -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Which I did not rehearse! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -It could be much worse. - This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps - around. - It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are - indented a bit more than the first. - Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore. - So sue me. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -To break a line -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -And make things look fine -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Use -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As you can see, -\family sans -Verse -\family default - does not indent both margins. - Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph. - To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default - function -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Lists -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Lists" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds - of lists. - In the -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - and -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively. - In the -\family sans -Description -\family default - and -\family sans -List -\family default - environments, LyX lets you provide your own label. - We will present the individual details of each type of list next after - describing some general features of all four of them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -General Features -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments - in several ways. - First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item. - Hitting -\family sans -Return -\family default - does -\emph on -not -\emph default - reset the environment to -\family sans -Standard -\family default - but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item. - The nesting depth is thereby kept. - If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting - depth, you can use -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -. - If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the -\family sans -Standard -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can nest lists of any type inside one another. - In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it - is nested. - If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest - you read all of section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nesting" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists ! Itemize -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Itemize" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The first type of list we will describe in detail is the -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - paragraph environment. - It has the following properties: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -The items can have any length. - LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item. - The offset is always relative to whatever environment the -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - list may be in. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -If you nest an -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environment inside another -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environment, the label changes to a new symbol. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -LyX always shows the same symbol on screen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -See section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nesting" - -\end_inset - - for a full explanation of nesting. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Of course, that explanation was also an example of an -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - list. - The -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We said that different levels use different symbols as their label. - Here's an example of all four possible symbols. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -The label for the first level -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - is a large black dot, or bullet. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -The label for the second level is a dash. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -The label for the third is an asterisk. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -The label for the fourth is a centered dot. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Back out to the third level. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Back to the second level. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Back to the outermost level. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -These are the default labels for an -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - list. - You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog in the submenu -\family sans -Bullets -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - These customizations are not displayed in LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth. - We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths - in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nesting" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists ! Enumerate -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Enumerate" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines. - It has these properties: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Each item has a numeral as its label. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -The label type depends on the nesting depth. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Each new -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment resets the counter to one. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Like the -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environment, the -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Offsets the items relative to the left margin. - Items can have any length. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Allows up to a four-fold nesting. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Unlike the -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environment, -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - shows the different labels for each item in LyX. - Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -The first level of an -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - uses Arabic numerals followed by a period. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth - increases. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Back to the third level -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Back to the second level. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Back to the outermost level. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can customize the type of numbering used in the -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Customized-Lists" - -\end_inset - -. - Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There is more to nesting -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environments than we've stated here. - You should read section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nesting" - -\end_inset - - to learn more about nesting. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Description -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists ! Description -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Unlike the previous two environments, the -\family sans -Description -\family default - list has no fixed label. - Instead, LyX uses the first -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -word -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - of the first line as the label. - Here's an example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Example: This is an example of the -\family sans -Description -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the - rest of the line. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With the first -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -word -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - it is meant that the first usage of the -\family sans -Space -\family default - key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an - item. - If you need to use more than one word in a label use a -\family sans -Protected Space -\family default -. - (Use either -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - - or the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Protected -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space -\family default -; see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Protected-Space" - -\end_inset - - for more information.) Here is an example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Second -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Example: This one shows how to use a -\family sans -Protected -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space -\family default - in the label of a -\family sans -Description -\family default - list item. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Usage: You should use the -\family sans -Description -\family default - environment for things like definitions and theorems. - Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text - that describes it. - It's not a good idea to use a -\family sans -Description -\family default - environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe. - You're better off using -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - or -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - and nesting several -\family sans -Standard -\family default - paragraphs into them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Nesting: You can nest -\family sans -Description -\family default - environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and - so on. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting - them from the first line. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Labeling -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists ! Labeling -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Labeling -\family default - environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Like the -\family sans -Description -\family default - list the -\family sans -Labeling -\family default - list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional - features. - Here are its properties: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -item -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -labels LyX uses the first -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -word -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - of each line as the item label. - The first -\family sans -Space -\family default - after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label. - If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected - space as described above. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and - the body of the item text. - The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default - label width plus a little extra space. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -label -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is - larger. - If the label width is larger, the label -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -extends -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - into the first line. - In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left - margin of the rest of the item text. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -default -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all - items in a -\family sans -Labeling -\family default - environment has the same left margin. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -To change the default width, select all items in the list. - Now open the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - dialog (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). - The text in the box -\family sans -Longest -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -label -\family default - determines the default label width. - You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the - letter -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -M -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - multiple times instead. - M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX. - By using -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -M -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of -\family sans -Longest -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -label -\family default - every time you alter a label in a -\family sans -List -\family default - environment. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -The predefined default width is the length of -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -00.00.0000 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (equal to 6 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -M). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You should use the -\family sans -Labeling -\family default - list the same way as the -\family sans -Description -\family default - list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes - it. - The -\family sans -Labeling -\family default - environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall - layout. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can nest -\family sans -Labeling -\family default - lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on. - They work just like the other list paragraph environments. - Read section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nesting" - -\end_inset - - to learn about nesting. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There is yet another feature of the -\family sans -Labeling -\family default - list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels - by default. - You can use additional -\family sans -HFills -\family default - to change how LyX justifies the item label. - -\family sans -Hfills -\family default - are documented in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Horizontal-Space" - -\end_inset - -. - Here are some examples: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -Left The default for -\family sans -Labeling -\family default - item labels. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Right One -\family sans -HFill -\family default - at the beginning of the label right justifies it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Center -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - One -\family sans -HFill -\family default - at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Customized Lists -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Customized-Lists" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists ! Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The features described in this section require that the module -\family sans -Customisable Lists (enumitem) -\family default - is loaded in the document settings. - The module uses the LaTeX-package -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Custom Enumerate Lists -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional - argument (menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Short Title -\family default -) to the first item of each level in the list. - There you add the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -roman{enumi} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -in TeX Code (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -For more about TeX Code, look at section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:TeX-Code" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\emph on - enumi -\emph default - is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration. - The command -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default - outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral. - For capital Roman numerals replace -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default - with -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman -\series default - in the command above. - For Arabic numerals use -\series bold - -\backslash -arabic -\series default -. - To -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -number -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - items with capital or small Latin letters use -\series bold - -\backslash -Alph -\series default - or -\series bold - -\backslash -alph -\series default -, respectively. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - You can only number 26 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command - by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here is a list with custom numbering: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Level 1 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Level 2 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Level 2 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Level 3 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Level 4 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -For this list these commands were used: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -where the command -\series bold - -\backslash -emph{} -\series default - makes the label emphasized and -\series bold - -\backslash -bf{} -\series default - makes it bold. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following - lists until you change the definition. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Resumed Enumeration -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -arabic{enumi}. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -first -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -goes back to default numbering -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -second -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -regular text -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume -resumed -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To resume an enumeration, use the style -\family sans -Enumerate-Resume -\family default -. - Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed - list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the - next one. - Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number. - This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item - of a normal enumeration. - There, insert the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -start=number -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -where -\emph on -number -\emph default - is the number with which you want to resume the list. - An example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -first item -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -second item -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enumeration starting at a given value: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -start=4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -This enumeration starts at 4 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -List Spacing -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists ! Spacing -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items - of a list. - For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -A bullet list -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -with standard spacing -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item - of the list. - Add there the command -\series bold -nolistsep -\series default - to get no additional list space like in this example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -nolistsep -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -A bullet list -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -without additional -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -vertical space -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package - -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - For more information see its documentation, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing - and indentation. - Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs - in the document and the label separation was set to 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm so that the number is in the page margin: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent= -\backslash -parindent, labelsep=2cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -An enumeration -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -with negative indentation -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Further Customization -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lists ! Customization -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also change the style of description lists. - The command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font=definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -changes the description label font, the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -style=definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -sets the list style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -An example where the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -is used: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ionizing -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -radiation: -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are - energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore - ionizing them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Reference -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing - the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an - object, block of memory, disk space or other resource. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package - -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - For more information see its documentation -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Letters -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Letters -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Address -\family default - and -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default -: An Overview -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph - environments called -\family sans -Address -\family default - and -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default -. - To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments - in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document. - In contrast, you can use the -\family sans -Address -\family default - and -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default - paragraph environments anywhere with no problem. - You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest - anything in them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Of course, you're not limited to using -\family sans -Address -\family default - and -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default - for letters only. - -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default -, in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in - some European academic papers. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Usage -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Address-Usage" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Address -\family default - environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used - for the opening and signature in some countries. - Similarly, the -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default - environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which - is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries. - Here's an example of each: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Address -Right Address -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Who I am -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Where I am -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -When is it? What is today? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -That was -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default -. - Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to - fit the largest block of text on a single line. - Here's an example of the -\family sans -Address -\family default - environment: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Who are you -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Where do I send this -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Your post office and country -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As you can see, both -\family sans -Address -\family default - and -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default - add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph. - If you enter -\family sans -Return -\family default - in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets - the environment to -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - This makes sense, since -\family sans -Return -\family default - is the -\family typewriter -break-paragraph -\family default - function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs. - Thus, you have to use -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - or -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ragged -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Line -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Break -\family default -) to start a new line in an -\family sans -Address -\family default - or -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Academic Writing -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography - or list of references. - LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Abstract -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Abstracts -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Abstract -\family default - environment is used for the abstract of an article. - Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should - only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title. - Also, don't bother trying to nest -\family sans -Abstract -\family default - in anything else or -\emph on -vice versa -\emph default -. - It will not work. - The -\family sans -Abstract -\family default - environment is only useful in the article and report document classes. - The book document classes ignores the -\family sans -Abstract -\family default - completely, and it's utterly silly to use -\family sans -Abstract -\family default - in a letter document class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Abstract -\family default - environment does several things for you. - First, it puts the centered label -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Abstract -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - above the text. - The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical - space. - Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect. - Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and - the subsequent text. - Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen. - The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are - using. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Starting a new paragraph by entering -\family sans -Return -\family default - does not reset the paragraph environment. - The new paragraph will still be in the -\family sans -Abstract -\family default - environment. - So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you - finish entering the abstract of your document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/Abstract.pdf - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Paragraph-in-the" - -\end_inset - -Paragraph in the -\family sans -Abstract -\family default - environment -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We would love to demonstrate the -\family sans -Abstract -\family default - environment, but since this document is in the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -book -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - class, we can't do this. - We inserted it therefore as figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the" - -\end_inset - -. - If you have never heard of an -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -abstract -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - before, you can safely ignore this environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliography -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Biblio_environment" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default - environment is used to list references. - Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should - only use it at the end of the document. - Nesting -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default - in anything else or -\emph on -vice versa -\emph default - will not work. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When you first open a -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default - environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Bibliography -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - or -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -References, -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - depending on the document class. - The heading is in a large boldface font. - Each paragraph of the -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default - environment is a bibliography entry. - Thus, entering -\family sans -Return -\family default - does not reset the paragraph environment. - Each new paragraph is still in the -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There is another, usually better way to include references in your document - by using a BibTeX database. - For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra -phy handling, have a look at section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliography" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LyX -\family sans --Code -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph ! LyX code -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LyX-Code" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default - environment is another LyX extension. - It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font. - It also treats the -\family sans -Space -\family default - key as a fixed whitespace; -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -In the -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default - environment, the -\family sans -Space -\family default - key is treated as a -\family sans -Protected -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Blank -\family default - instead of an end-of-word marker. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX. - If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - (the -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default - function). - -\family sans -Return -\family default - breaks paragraphs. - Note, however, that -\family sans -Return -\family default - does not reset the paragraph environment. - So, when you finish using the -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default - environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself. - Also, you can nest the -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default - environment inside of others. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are a few quirks with this environment: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -You cannot use -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - at the beginning of a new paragraph (i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -you can't follow -\family sans -Return -\family default - with a -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -You can't follow a -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - with a -\family sans -Space -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Use a -\family sans -Return -\family default - to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a -\family sans -Space -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Or: use -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - - instead. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line. - You must put at least one -\family sans -Space -\family default - in any line you want blank. - Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing -\family sans -" -\family default - since that will insert -\emph on -real -\emph default - quotes. - You get the typewriter double quotes with -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "self-insert \"" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here is an example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -#include -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -int main(void) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -{ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - printf("Hello World! -\backslash -n"); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - return 0; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This is just the standard -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Hello world! -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - program. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default - has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts, - rc-files, and so on. - Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text - as if you used a typewriter. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph environments|) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described - in the chapter -\emph on -Program Code Listings -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Nesting Environments -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nesting ! Environments -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Nesting" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific - properties. - This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of - another block. - For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also - has two subpoints. - In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner - list -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -attached -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to item #2: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -one -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -two -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -sublist – item #1 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -sublist – item #2 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -three -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other. - Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Increase -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -List -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Depth -\family default - or -\family sans -Decrease -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -List -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Depth -\family default - to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are - nested). - Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - or the key bindings -\family sans -Tab -\family default - and -\family sans -Shift+Tab -\family default - or -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -. - The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing - you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current - paragraph. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can. - If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth. - Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the - depth of every paragraph nested inside of it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nesting isn't limited to lists. - In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're - about to find out. - This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -What You Can and Can't Nest -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell - you a little bit more about how nesting works. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated - than a simple yes or no. - There are three types of paragraph environments: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Completely unnestable -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other - things inside them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest - anything into them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph - environments have them: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unnestable Can't nest them. - Can't nest into them. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Bibliography -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Abstract -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Title -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Author -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Date -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -Fully -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Nestable You can nest them. - You can nest other things into them. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Verse -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Quote -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Quotation -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Itemize -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Enumerate -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Description -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -List -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -LyX-Code -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things. - You can't nest anything into them. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Standard -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Part -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Chapter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Section -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsection -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsubsection -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Paragraph -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subparagraph -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Part* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Chapter* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Section* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsection* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsubsection* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Address -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings - like -\family sans -Chapter -\family default -, -\family sans -Section -\family default -, etc. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to - create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas - nested section headings violate this. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nesting ! Tables etc. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are - affected by nesting anyhow. - They are: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -equations -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -tables -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -figures -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -( -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Figures and tables in -\family sans -Floats -\family default - are not affected by this. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Have a look at section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Floats" - -\end_inset - - for more information about -\family sans -Floats -\family default -.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph. - If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph - it is in goes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -paragraph -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - of its own, it behaves just like a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -nestable-inside -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - paragraph environment. - You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything - into it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here's an example with a table: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Item One -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is (a) and it's nested. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is (b). - The table is actually nested inside (a). -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Back out again. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Item One -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is (a) and it's nested. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is (b). - The table is -\emph on -not -\emph default - nested inside (a). - In fact, it's not nested at all. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Back out again. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first - item of a new list! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going - deep enough. - LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Item One -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is (a) and it's nested. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is (b). - The table is actually nested inside Item One, but -\emph on -not -\emph default - inside (a). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Back out again. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a - new list -\emph on -inside -\emph default - item 1. - The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation. - So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right - depth! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Usage and General Features -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting. - In other words, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -level #6 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is the innermost possible depth. - Here's an example to illustrate what we mean: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -level #1 – outermost -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -level #2 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -level #3 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -level #4 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -level #5 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -level #6 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see - both of them in the example. - Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold - nesting with the -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - and -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environments. - For example, if we tried to nest another -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - list inside item -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -A. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, we would get errors. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Some Examples -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nesting ! Examples -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration. - We have several examples of nested environments. - In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce - them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#1-a This is the outermost level. - It's a -\family sans -List -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#2-a This is level #2. - We created it by using -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - followed by -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#3-a This is level #3. - This time, we just enter -\family sans -Return -\family default -, then used -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - twice in a row. - We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level, - by entering -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - followed by -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -This is actually a -\family sans -Standard -\family default - environment, nested inside of -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -#3-a -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - So, it's at level #4. - We did this by entering -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -, then -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -, then changing the paragraph environment to -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works - for the -\family sans -Description -\family default -, -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default -, and -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environments! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here's another -\family sans -Standard -\family default - paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#4-a This is level #4. - We enter -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - and changed the paragraph environment back to -\family sans -List -\family default -. - Remember — we can't nest anything inside a -\family sans -Standard -\family default - environment, which is why we're still at level #4. - However, we -\emph on -can -\emph default - keep nesting things inside -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -#3-a -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{} -and this is level #6. - By now, you should know how we made these two. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#5-b Back to level #5. - Just enter -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - followed by a -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#4-b After another -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - followed by a -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -, we're back at level #4. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#3-b Back to level #3. - By now it should be obvious how we did this. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#2-b Back to level #2. - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1. - After this sentence, we will enter -\family sans -Return -\family default - and change the paragraph environment back to -\family sans -Standard -\family default - to end the list. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We could have also used the -\family sans -Description -\family default -, -\family sans -Quote -\family default -, -\family sans -Quotation -\family default -, or even the -\family sans -Verse -\family default - environment in place of the -\family sans -List -\family default - environment. - The example would have worked exactly the same. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Example 2: Inheritance -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -level. - Now we will enter -\family sans -Return -\family default -, then -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -, after -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -which, we will change to the -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is the -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment, at level #2. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Notice how the nested -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - not only inherits its margins from its parent environment ( -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default -), but also inherits its font and spacing! -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -We ended this example by entering -\family sans -Return -\family default -. - After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to -\family sans -Standard -\family default - and reset the nesting depth by using -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - once. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - and -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - Environments -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is level #1, in an -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - paragraph environment. - We're actually going to nest a bunch of these. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is level #2. - We used -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - followed by -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -. - Now, what happens if we nest an -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its - label be? An asterisk? -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -No! It's a bullet. - This is the -\emph on -first -\emph default - -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environment, even though it's at level #3. - So, its label is a bullet. - (We got here by using -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -, then -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -, then changing the environment to -\family sans -Itemize -\family default -.) -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Here's level #4, produced using -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -, then -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -. - We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\SpecialChar \ldots{} -to get to level #5. - This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default -. - Notice the type of numbering, it is -\emph on -lowercase Roman -\emph default -, because we are in the -\emph on -thirdfold -\emph default - -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment (that is, it is an -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - inside an -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - inside an -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -What happens if we -\emph on -don't -\emph default - change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What - type of numbering does LyX use? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Let's use -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - to decrease the depth after the next -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is level #4. - Look what type of label LyX is using! -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -This is level #3. - Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman - numeral as the label.Why? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is -\emph on -still -\emph default - a thirdfold -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment. - Notice, however, that LyX -\emph on -did -\emph default - reset the counter for the label. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Another -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - sequence, and we're back to level #2. - This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back - into the twofold-nested -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -The same thing happens if we do another -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Lastly, we reset the environment to -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling - LyX uses for the -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - and -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environments. - The number of other -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for - an -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - item. - The same rule applies for the -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - environment, as well. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Example 4: Going Bonkers -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -We're going to go totally nuts now. - We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into - the same detail with how we did it. - (level #1: -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -( -\family sans -Return, -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, Standard -\family default -: level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created - the example in parentheses someplace. - For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth. - The environment name is the name of the current environment. - Either before or after this, we will put in the level. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -( -\family sans -Return, Enumerate -\family default -: level #1) This is the next item in the list. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Verse -Now we will add verse. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -It will get much worse. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -( -\family sans -Return, -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, Verse -\family default -: level #2) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Bippitey boppitey boo! -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - -\family sans -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Here comes a table: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -one-fish -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -two-fish -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -red-fish -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -blue-fish -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Verse -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, Table, -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - 3 times, -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, Verse, -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -( -\family sans -Return, Enumerate -\family default -: level #1) This is another item. - Note that selecting a -\family sans -Table -\family default - resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth - 3 times to put the table inside the -\family sans -Verse -\family default - environment. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -We're now ending the -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - list and changing to -\family sans -Quotation -\family default -. - We're still at level #1. - We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments. - The next set of paragraphs is a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -quoted letter. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - We will nest both the -\family sans -Address -\family default - and -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default - environments inside of this one, then use another nested -\family sans -Quotation -\family default - for the letter body. - We will use -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - to preserve the depth. - Remember that you need to use -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - to create multiple lines inside the -\family sans -Address -\family default - and -\family sans -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Address -\family default - environments. - Here it goes: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Right Address -1234 Nowhere Rd. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Moosegroin, MT 00100 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -9-6-96 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Dear Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Fizlewitz: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control. - Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating - a backlog in our orders for methane. - We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order - as soon as possible. - In the meantime, we thank you for your patience. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -We do, however, now have a special on beef. - If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form - with your order, along with payment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -We thank you again for your patience. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Sincerely, -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Bill Hick -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Quotation -That ends that example! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with - just a few keystrokes. - We could have easily nested an -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - list inside of a -\family sans -Quotation -\family default - or -\family sans -Quote -\family default -, or put a -\family sans -Quote -\family default - inside of an -\family sans -Itemize -\family default - list. - You have a huge variety of options at your disposal. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Spacing, pagination and line breaks -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spacing -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime - you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers - you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot - be broken at the end of a line. - The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are - useful. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Protected Space -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Protected-Space" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spaces ! Protected -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the - line at that point. - This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Further documentation is given in section -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliography" - -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -section -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliography" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - A protected space is set with -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Protected -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space -\family default - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Horizontal Space -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Horizontal-Space" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spacing ! Horizontal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Horizontal Space -\family default -. - The length units are listed in Appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Units-available-in" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Inter-word Space -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Inter-word-Space" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spaces ! Inter-word -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries - to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters - at the ends of sentences. - There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this. - However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation - followed by a period; see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Abbreviations" - -\end_inset - - for examples. - To insert a normal space, select -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Interword -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space -\family default - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "space-insert normal" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Thin Space -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Thin-Space" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spaces ! Thin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -thin space -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -protected -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -). - The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of - thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance, - inside abbreviations: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -D. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -E. - Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -or between values and units. - Compare for example this: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -10 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -kg (thin space) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -10 kg (normal space -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can insert thin spaces with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Thin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space -\family default - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "space-insert thin" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -More Spaces -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also insert the following space types: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Negative -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -thin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -space A line with a -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - negative thin space between the arrows. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Enspace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) A line with an -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \enskip{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - enspace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) space between the arrows. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Quad -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) A line with a -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \quad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - Quad -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) space between the arrows. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -QQuad -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) A line with a -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \qquad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - QQuad -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) space between the arrows. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Custom -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -space A line with -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hspace{} -\length 2cm -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm space between the arrows. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Width-of-the" - -\end_inset - - lists the different space sizes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Width-of-the" - -\end_inset - -Width of the different horizontal spaces. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Space -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Width -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Normal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Protected -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Thin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Negative thin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout --1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Enspace (0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Quad (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -QQuad (2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Horizontal Fills -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spacing ! Fills -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space - in a uniform fashion. - An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals - the remaining space between the left and right margins. - If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space - equally between themselves. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here are a few examples of what you can do with them: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -This is on the left side -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -This is on the right -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Left -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Middle -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Right -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Left -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -1/3 Left -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Right -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -That was an example in the -\family sans -Quote -\family default - environment. - Here -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - -is one in a standard paragraph. - It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it -\emph on -is -\emph default - sitting in-between the two arrows. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the -\family sans -Fill -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Pattern -\family default -s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dots: -\begin_inset space \dotfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Rule: -\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Left arrow: -\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Right arrow: -\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Up brace: -\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Down brace: -\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and -\emph on -not -\emph default - in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it. - This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line. - If you need space in this case anyway, set the -\family sans -Protect -\family default - option in the space dialog. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Phantom Space -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Phantom-Space" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spacing ! Phantom -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase. - For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -What is correct English?: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge would have been jumps the gun. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mr. - Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -has to be jumped -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mr. - Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -jumps -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Phantom -\family default -. - In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two - lines and insert -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - into the phantom inset (note the space after -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -). - A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder). - That is why it is named -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -phantom -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space, - while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding - dimension. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Vertical Space -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Vertical-Space" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spacing ! Vertical -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Vertical -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space -\family default - dialog. - There you find the following sizes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -SmallSkip -\family default -, -\family sans -MedSkip -\family default - and -\family sans -BigSkip -\family default - are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document. - -\family sans -DefSkip -\family default - is the skip adjusted in the dialog -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - for the paragraph separation. - If you use indentation to separate paragraphs -\family sans -DefSkip -\family default - is equal to -\family sans -MedSkip -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -VFill -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spacing ! Fills -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page. - An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a -\family sans -Vfill -\family default - between them. - Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second - one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal. - -\family sans -VFill -\family default -s work like -\family sans -HFill -\family default -s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -HFill -\family default -s are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Horizontal-Space" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - If there are several -\family sans -VFill -\family default -s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves. - You can therefore use -\family sans -VFill -\family default -s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Custom -\family default - are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Units-available-in" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - -\series medium -If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of - a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option -\family sans -Protect -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Paragraph Alignment -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph ! Alignment -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can change the paragraph alignment with the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph Settings -\family default - dialog (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). - There are five possibilities: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Justified -\family default - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align block" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Left -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align left" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Right -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align right" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Center -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align center" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Default -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align default" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word - spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between - the left and right margins. - The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align right -This paragraph is right aligned, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -this one is centered, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align left -this one is left aligned. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Forced Page Breaks -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Page breaks ! Forced -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you - can force a page break where you want one. - Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking. - Only if you use a lot of -\family sans -Floats -\family default -, LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished - and you have checked in the preview to see if you -\emph on -really -\emph default - have to change the page breaking. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special - action. - This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -New -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Page -\family default -. - The second type, that is inserted via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Break -\family default -, ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out - the complete page. - This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page - on which only the last few lines are absent. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears - at the top of a page. - This is, of course, the wrong way to do it. - LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables - appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without - having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table. - See chapter -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes" - -\end_inset - - to learn more about -\family sans -Floats -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Clear Page Breaks -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Page breaks ! Clear -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed - directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them. - That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including - unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after - it, if necessary by adding pages. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can insert a clear page break with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Clear -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Page -\family default -. - When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Clear -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Double -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Page -\family default - to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand - page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Forced Line Breaks -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Line breaks -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks - the line. - You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ragged -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Line -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Break -\family default - or with -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -. - Another type that is inserted via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Justified -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Line -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Break -\family default - or with -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert linebreak" -\end_inset - - breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between - the page margins. - This is useful to avoid -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -fringes -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as - LaTeX is very good at line breaking. - There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively - to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Quote" - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Verse" - -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Address-Usage" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Horizontal Lines -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Horizontal-Lines" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Horizontal lines -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -In the dialog -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Horizontal -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Line -\family default - you can insert horizontal lines. - The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline - of the current text line or the paragraph. - The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Characters and Symbols -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard. - You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example, - characters needed for French with an English keyboard. - See section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping" - -\end_inset - - for information on how this is done. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you - can use the -\family sans -Symbols -\family default - dialog via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Symbols -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed - when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences. - But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Fonts and Text Styles -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Fonts-and-Text" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Font Types -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Font ! Types -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are two types of fonts: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Vector -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fonts -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fonts ! Vector- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. - characters) in the font. - This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are - well suited for scaling to any requested size. - This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the - curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph. - This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes. - Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed - to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them. - But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes. - That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font - sizes than at small ones. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -The font types -\family typewriter -TrueType -\family default -, -\family typewriter -OpenType -\family default -, and -\family typewriter -Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\family default - are vector fonts. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Bitmap -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fonts -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fonts ! Bitmap- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they - will look good at all the sizes they are meant for. - However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each - pixel is enlarged into several pixels. - It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an - image manipulation program. - In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in - several fixed sizes typically from around 8 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pixels high up to 34 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful. - The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary - to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than - scalable fonts. - The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have - to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Bitmap fonts are named -\family typewriter -Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\family default - in PostScript- and PDF-documents. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are - designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes. - So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts. - That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs - use scalable fonts. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards - specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font. - For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current - font to emphasize text, you use an -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -emphasized style -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - instead. - This concept fits in perfectly with LyX. - In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting - details. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaTeX font support -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts. - That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your - operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX - distribution. - The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts, - which have to be provided by additional files and packages. - The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared - to a word processor. - On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts - are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable - across different machines. - Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a - lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial - fonts. - In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface - (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Document-Font" - -\end_inset - - for details). - However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code - in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired - font). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly - to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX - and LuaTeX. - Both engines are supported by LyX. - By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font - that is installed on your system. - The next section describes how to use these fonts. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci -es; so you might have to experiment. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature - as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Document Font and Font size -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Document-Font" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Font ! Size -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Font -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can set the document fonts in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dialog. - In the -\family sans -Fonts -\family default - section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the - three different font shapes — roman (serif), -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif -\family default - and -\family typewriter -typewriter -\family default - (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors - for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit - with the roman font. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you select -\family sans -Use non-T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX fonts -\family default -, you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system. - This requires that you use -\family sans -PDF (XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF (LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - or -\family sans -DVI (LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - as the output format, i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - -). - You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts. - Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists - (roman, sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family. - Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due - to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{} -or font failures. - LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the - font include -\family sans -Default -\family default - and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution. - If you select -\family sans -Default, -\family default - the font that is preset by the current document class is used. - In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -Computer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - ( -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -) or -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -European Computer Modern -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - ( -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -), but some classes preset different default fonts. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - and -\family typewriter -ec -\family default - are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when - you read the PDF in a zoomed size. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in -\family typewriter -Adobe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Reader -\family default - version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font - renderer. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font. - Depending on how your document should look, you can either: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -select the -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of - -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -/ -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -. - -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - as the default font. - It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes. - Except for some details, where the appearance was improved, -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - looks identical to -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -One difference is improved kerning. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -or select the -\family sans -AE -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Almost -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European) -\family default - fonts in (the rare) case that -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate - the look of -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -/ -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -. - -\family typewriter -AE -\family default - is a virtual font. - Virtual means that it -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -steals -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - outline -\family typewriter -cm -\family default --glyphs from other fonts. - This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French - guillemets ( -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -« -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -» -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Loading the LaTeX-package -\series bold -aeguill -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! aeguill -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - with the document preamble line -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[ec]{aeguill} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series default -will fix the guillemet problem. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - and that accented characters are not -\emph on -one -\emph default - glyph, but built of -\emph on -two -\emph default - characters, the accent and the letter. - Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents - using the -\family typewriter -AE -\family default - fonts. - If you search for example for the French word -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -rève -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches - for the glyph -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - è -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and not for the glyph -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - e + -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - ̀ -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -If you do not like the look of -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -/ -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -, you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - or -\family typewriter - Palatino -\family default -. - Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif and typewriter fonts, -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g., -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - selects -\family sans -Helvetica -\family default - for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -a real font -\emph on -family -\emph default - (e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -in case of -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - oder -\family sans -Computer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - but you can also select your own. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -The differences between roman, -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif -\family default - and -\family typewriter -typewriter -\family default - fonts are explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -The font -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - was originally designed for newspapers. - Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit - into the small newspaper columns. - Therefore -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For the font size there are generally four possible values: -\family sans -Default, 10 -\family default -, -\family sans -11 -\family default - and -\family sans -12 -\family default -. - Some classes provide additional sizes. - The size of -\family sans -Default -\family default - depends on the class you are using. - In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note that the font size is the -\emph on -base size -\emph default -. - That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those - used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value. - You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the -\family sans -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style -\family default - dialog if needed. - The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Default -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Family -\family default - selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should - be roman, sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif or typewriter. - The -\family sans -Default -\family default - selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override - this. - In most cases, -\family sans -Default -\family default - is equal to -\family sans -roman -\family default -, but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family typewriter - -\family sans -LaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X font encoding -\family default - selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to - the LaTeX-package -\series bold -fontenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! fontenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (see also sec. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" - -\end_inset - -). - Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this. - Unless you have specific reasons, use -\family sans -Default -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With some fonts, the checkboxes -\family sans -Use Old Style Figures -\family default - and -\family sans -Use True Small Caps -\family default - are available. - These are extra features some fonts provide. - If -\family sans -Use Old Style Figures -\family default - is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) - are used. - Old style figures are the numerals (0 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - --- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase - letters. - -\family sans -Use True Small Caps -\family default - determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made - of scaled capitals. - Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look - better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The field -\family sans -CJK -\family default - allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify - a font to display the script characters. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -CJK -\series default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - So this has no effect for the document language -\family sans -Japanese -\family default - that does not use -\series bold -CJK -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does -\emph on -not -\emph default - change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output; - this is part of the WYSIWYM concept. - LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences -\family default - dialog, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Screen-Fonts" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Using Different Character Styles -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Character Styles -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Text Style -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for - certain paragraph environments. - LyX supports two character styles, -\family sans -Emphasized -\family default - and -\family sans -Noun -\family default -. - You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the - toolbar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To activate the -\family sans -Noun -\family default - style, do one of the following: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -click on the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -use the key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -These commands are all toggles. - That is, if -\family sans -Noun -\family default - style is already active, they deactivate it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -One typically uses the -\family sans -Noun -\family default - style for proper names. - For example: -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\noun on -Matthias Ettrich -\noun default - is the original author of LyX. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A more widely used character style is the -\family sans -Emphasized -\family default - style. - You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the -\family sans -Emphasized -\family default - style by: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -clicking on the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -using the keybindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normally the -\family sans -Emphasized -\family default - style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag -es use a different font. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We've been using the -\family sans -Emphasized -\family default - style all over the place in this document. - Here's one more example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation - -\emph on -Do not overuse character styles! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -It's also a warning in addition to an example. - One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation. - Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid - the common tendency to overuse character styles. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can always reset to the default font using the key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-default" -\end_inset - - or the dialog -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Customized -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fine-Tuning with the -\family sans -Text Style -\family default - dialog -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Text Style -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so - LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style. - For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet - requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations. - Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts - from ordinary dialog. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a - warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles! -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and - tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To use custom character styles, open the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Customized -\family default - dialog or press the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -. - There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different - font property that you can choose. - You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select -\family sans -No -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -change -\family default -, which keeps the current state of that property. - The item -\family sans -Reset -\family default - will reset the property to whatever is the default. - You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph - environments all at once. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The font properties, and their options (in addition to -\family sans -No -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -change -\family default - and -\family sans -Reset -\family default -) are: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Family -\family default - The -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -overall look -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - of the font. - The possible options are: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Roman -\family default - This is the Roman font family. - Normally a serif font. - It's also the default family. - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-roman" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Serif -\family default - -\family sans -This is the Sans Serif font family. - -\family default - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-sans" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Typewriter -\family default - -\family typewriter -This is the Typewriter font family. - -\family default - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-typewriter" -\end_inset - - -\family sans -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Series -\family default - This corresponds to the print weight. - Options are: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Medium -\family default - This is the Medium font series. - It's also the default series. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Bold -\family default - -\series bold -This is the Bold font series. - -\series default - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-bold" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Shape -\family default - As the name implies. - Options are: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Upright -\family default - This is the Upright font shape. - It's also the default shape. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Italic -\family default - -\shape italic -This -\shape default - -\family sans -\shape italic -i -\family default -s the Italic font shape -\shape default -\emph on -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Slanted -\family default - -\shape slanted -This is the Slanted font shape -\shape default - (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Small -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Caps -\family default - -\shape smallcaps -This is the Small caps font shape -\shape default -\noun on -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Color -\family default - Alters the text color. - Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors. - Besides -\family sans -No -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -color -\family default -, which means that the document default color set in -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Color -\family default - for -\family sans -Main -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\family default - is used, you can choose between -\family sans -Black -\family default -, -\family sans -White -\family default -, -\family sans -Red -\family default -, -\family sans -Green -\family default -, -\family sans -Blue -\family default -, -\family sans -Cyan -\family default -, -\family sans -Magenta -\family default - and -\family sans -Yellow -\family default - text. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! Text -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Language -\family default - This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from - the language of the document. - Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change - (only within LyX). -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document, - LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically. - When using the spell checking (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Spellchecking" - -\end_inset - -) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Size -\family default - Alters the size of the font. - You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually - proportional to the document font size. - Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of - what you want to do. - The options are: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tiny -\family default - -\size tiny -This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Tiny -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size. - -\size default - (key bindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size tiny" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Smallest -\family default - -\size scriptsize -This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Smallest -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size -\size default -. - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size scriptsize" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Smaller -\family default - -\size footnotesize -This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Smaller -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size. - -\size default - (key bindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size footnotesize" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Small -\family default - -\size small -This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Small -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size. - -\size default - (key bindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size small" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Normal -\family default - This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Normal -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size. - It's also the default size. - (key bindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size normal" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Large -\family default - -\size large -This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Large -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size. - -\size default - (key bindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size large" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Larger -\family default - -\size larger -This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Larger -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size. - -\size default - (key bindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size larger" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Largest -\family default - -\size largest -This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Largest -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size. - -\size default - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size largest" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Huge -\family default - -\size huge -This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Huge -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size. - -\size default - (key bindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size huge" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Huger -\family default - -\size giant -This is the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Huger -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font size. - -\size default - (key bindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size giant" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Increase -\family default - This increases the size by one step (for instance, from -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Largest -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Huge -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -). - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size increase" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Decrease -\family default - This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Normal -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Small -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -). - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size decrease" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -We warn you -\emph on -yet again -\emph default -: don't go crazy with this feature. - You should almost never need to change the font size. - LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments - — use those instead. - This is here for fine-tuning only! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Misc -\family default - Here you can change a few other things at the character level. - Options are: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Emph -\family default - -\emph on -This is text with emphasize on -\emph default -. - This might seem like the same as -\shape italic -Italic -\shape default -, but it is actually a bit different. - Emphasized is a -\emph on -logical -\emph default - attribute. - That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized - text. - Normally this font is equal to italic. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Underbar -\family default - -\bar under -This is text with Underbar on. - -\bar default - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-underline" -\end_inset - - -\family sans -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family default -Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days, - when you could not change fonts. - One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters. - This is only possible in LyX because some people -\emph on -may -\emph default - need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Double -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -underbar -\family default - -\uuline on -This is text with Double underbar on. - -\uuline default - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-underunderline" -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think - about double underbar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Wavy -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -underbar -\family default - -\uwave on -This is text with Wavy underbar on. - -\uwave default - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-underwave" -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it. - Keep antinausea pills handy. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Strikeout -\family default - -\strikeout on -This is text with Strikeout on. - -\strikeout default - (key binding -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-strikeout" -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been - changed in the meantime. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Noun -\family default - -\noun on -This is text with Noun on. - -\noun default - Like -\family sans -Emph -\family default -, this is a logical attribute. - Normally it's equivalent to -\family sans -Small -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Caps -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from. - Once you have chosen a new character style via the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Customized -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -) dialog, the settings are saved. - You can activate them by using the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "textstyle-apply" -\end_inset - -. - The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog - isn't visible. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To completely reset the character style to the default, use -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-default" -\end_inset - -. - If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed - (suppose you just set the shape to -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -slanted -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and the series to -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -bold -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -), set the -\family sans -Toggle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -all -\family default - switch and press -\family sans -Apply -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You should also know something about the differences between the three main - font types -\family sans -serif -\family default -, -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif -\family default -, and -\family sans -typewriter -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Typewriter -\family default - is a so called -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -monospaced -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - font, which means every character has the same width; the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -i -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is as wide as the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -m -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - Here is an example -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -no -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -typewriter text -\family default - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -For more on phantoms see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Phantom-Space" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -no typewriter text -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Serif -\family default - fonts use characters with serifs. - These are the small -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -appendices -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - at the ends of the strokes that form the character. - The following example shows the difference: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -text with serifs -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -text without serifs -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading. - These fonts are therefore used as default (named -\family sans -roman -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Sans serif -\family default - is not recommended for use as a base type. - This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts. - We use it in this document to highlight menu names. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Toggling -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - refers to applying or removing font properties. - When a property is marked for toggling in the -\family sans -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style -\family default - dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause - the property to be removed. - If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that - currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle - and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and - G. - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Never toggled -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -always toggled -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - mean that you do not control the toggling behavior. - For the properties on the left side of the dialog ( -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Family -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - etc.), toggling behavior is up to you. - If -\family sans -Toggle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -all -\family default - is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none - of them are. - Finally, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Reset -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is never toggled. - If you, for example, set -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Series -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Reset -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and select -\family sans -Toggle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -all -\family default -, then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default - series ( -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Medium -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -), no matter how many times you apply the style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! - They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Printing and Previewing -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Overview -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation - using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece. - Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what - goes on behind-the-scenes. - We cover this information in much greater detail in the -\emph on -Additional Features -\emph default - manual as well. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend. - LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent - confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX. - LyX is what you use to do your actual writing. - Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output. - This happens in two stages: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX, - generating a file with the extension, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default - file to produce printable output. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Output file formats -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -File formats -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Output-file-formats" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Simple text (ASCII) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -File formats ! ASCII -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This file type has the extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.txt -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -American Standard Code for Information Interchange -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (ASCII). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can export your document to ASCII with the menu -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Plain -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\family default -. - However, this will not export any externally generated material such as - a BibTeX bibliography (section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bibliography-databases" - -\end_inset - -). - If your document includes such material, use -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator -More -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formats -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Options -\family default - and then select -\family sans -Plain -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii) -\family default -. - This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating - thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -LaTeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -File formats ! LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This file type has the extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process - your document. - If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process - it manually with console commands. - The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever - you view or export your document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. - The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Export" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -DVI -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -File formats ! DVI -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This file type has the extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.dvi -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - It is called -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -device-independent -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine - to another without needing to do any sort of conversion. - DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats, - like PostScript. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them. - So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs. - Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make - them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer - when you view the DVI. - So we recommend using PDF for files with many images. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can export your document to DVI by the menus -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\family default - or -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X). - -\family default - The latter option uses the program -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -. - -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct - font access (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - -). - LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next - standard TeX processor. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PostScript -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -File formats ! PostScript -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This file type has the extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.ps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - PostScript was developed by the company -\family typewriter -Adobe -\family default - as a printer language. - The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the - file. - PostScript can be seen as a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -programming language -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack -age -\series bold -pstricks -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! pstricks -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PostScript can only contain images in the format -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Encapsulated PostScript -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (EPS, file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.eps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -). - As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has - to convert them in the background to EPS. - If, for example, you have 50 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -images in your document, LyX has to do 50 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -conversions when you view or export your document the first time. - This might slow down your workflow with LyX. - So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as - EPS to avoid this problem. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can export to PostScript using the menu -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator -PostScript -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PDF -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -File formats ! PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This file type has the extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.pdf -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Portable Document Format -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (PDF) developed by -\family typewriter -Adobe -\family default - was derived from PostScript. - It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript. - As the name -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -portable -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output - looks exactly the same. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Joint Photographic Experts Group -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (JPG, file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - or -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpeg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Portable Network Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (PNG, file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.png -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -). - You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the - background to one of these formats. - But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion - will slow down your workflow. - So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can export your document to PDF via the menu -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export -\family default - in different ways: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) This uses the program -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default - which converts your file directly to PDF. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) This uses the program -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - which converts your file directly to PDF. - -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - is a new engine, derived from -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -, that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font - access (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - -). - LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next - standard TeX processor. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) This uses the program -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default - that converts your file directly to PDF. - -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default - is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct - font access (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - -). - It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example, - vertically written Japanese. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) This uses the program -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default - that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to - PDF. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) This uses the program -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default - that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file. - The PostScript-version is produced by the program -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step. - So this export variant consists of three conversions. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We recommend using -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - because -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default - supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and - works without problems. - If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{} -or specific OpenType fonts, you might - want to try out -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - or -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature - as -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -XHTML -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -FileFormats ! XHTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -HTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This file type has the extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.xhtml -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers. - It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them. - When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats - suitable for the purpose. - For the math output you can choose in the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Output -\family default - between different formats, which are described in section -\emph on -Math Output in XHTML -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Additional -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Features -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -XHTML output remains -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -under development -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, and not all LyX features are supported yet. - See the chapter -\emph on -LyX and the World Wide Web -\emph default -, in the -\emph on -Additional Features -\emph default - manual, for more information. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LyXHTML -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Previewing -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Preview -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page - breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu - -\family sans -\bar under -V -\bar default -iew -\family default - and choose -\family sans -\bar under -V -\bar default -iew -\family default - or use the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - -. - A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default - output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:File-Formats" - -\end_inset - -) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings - (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - -). - Further output formats can be selected via -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -View (Other Formats) -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same - viewer window using the menu -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Update -\family default - or -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Update (Other Formats) -\family default -, respectively. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary - directory. - To have a real output, export your document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Printing the File from within LyX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Printing-the-File" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print - it directly from within LyX. - To print a file, select the menu -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Print -\family default - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - -) or click on the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - -. - LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI. - This file is then processed by the program -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program -\family typewriter -Ghostscript -\family default -. - Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can set the following print parameters in the -\family sans -Print -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Destination -\family default - box: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Printer -\family default - This is the name of the printer to print to. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Note that this printer name is for the program -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -. - That means -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - has to be configured for this printer name. - The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Printer" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - The printer should understand PostScript. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -File -\family default - The name of a file to print to. - The output will be a PostScript file. - It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full - path. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only - odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options - are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer: - you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side. - Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down. - By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack - of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -A few Words about Typography -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typography -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hyphens -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dashes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In LyX, the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - character comes in four lengths: the -\emph on -hyphen -\emph default -, the -\emph on -en dash -\emph default -, the -\emph on -em dash -\emph default -, and the minus sign: -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -name -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -output -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -inserted with -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -hyphen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in text -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -en dash -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -– -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Special -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Symbols -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -em dash -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -— -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Special -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Symbols -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -minus sign -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $-$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in math mode -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - character multiple times in a row. - They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in - the final output, but not in LyX. - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - gives a en dash, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - a em dash. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in - math mode and has a length of its own. - Here are some examples: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -line- and page-breaks -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -hyphen -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -From A–Z -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -en dash -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Oh — there's a dash. -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -em dash -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -minus sign -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hyphenation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hyphenation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Hyphenation" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output. - Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - following the rules of the document language. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the - -\family sans -typewriter -\family default - font and with unusual constructs, like -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -h3knix/m0n0wall -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points - manually. - This is done with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Hyphenation -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Point -\family default -. - These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX. - If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated. - Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document - in the form -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -A-b c -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - LaTeX would then see the hyphen -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - as a hyphenation possibility. - Hyphenating at this point would look ugly. - To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox - as described in section -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Prevent Hyphenation -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Punctuation Marks -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Punctuation marks -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Abbreviations and End of Sentence -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Abbreviations" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX - automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations. - LaTeX then adds the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -appropriate amount of space. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and - the next word. - Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word - gets after another word. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does - not work in all cases. - If a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -. -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's - at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here are some examples of -\emph on -correct -\emph default - abbreviations and of the end of a sentence: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -M. - Butterfly -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Don't worry. - Be happy. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. - this is too much space! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -This is I. - It's okay. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To fix this problem, use one of the following: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Use an -\family sans -Inter-word -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space -\family default - after lowercase abbreviations (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Inter-word-Space" - -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spaces ! inter-word -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Use a -\family sans -Thin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space -\family default - between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Thin-Space" - -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spaces ! thin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Use an -\family sans -End -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -of -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sentence -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -period -\family default - found under the -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Special -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Character -\family default - menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing. - This function is also bound to -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence" -\end_inset - - for easy access. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -this is too much space! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -This is I\SpecialChar \@. - It's okay. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences. - If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX - will take care of this. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors: - Check out the -\family sans -Check -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TeX -\family default - feature described in the section -\emph on -Checking TeX -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Additional Features -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Quotes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typography ! Quotes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Quotes | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Typography -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX usually sets quotes correctly. - Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text, - and use a closing quote at the end. - For example, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -open close -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The keyboard character, -\family sans -" -\family default -, generates this automatically. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can specify what character the -\family sans -" -\family default - key produces using the submenu -\family sans -Language -\family default - of the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dialog in the box -\family sans -Quote Style -\family default -. - There are six choices: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Use quotes like -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Use quotes like -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Use quotes like -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Use quotes like -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Use quotes like -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes ald -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes ard -\end_inset - - -\family default - Use quotes like -\begin_inset Quotes ald -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes ard -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For single quotes you have to use the shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "quote-insert single" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ligatures -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typography ! Ligatures -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ligatures | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Typography -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Ligatures" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and - print them as single characters. - These groups are known as -\emph on -ligatures -\emph default -. - Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too - in the output. - Here are the standard ligatures: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ff -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -fi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -fl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ffi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ffl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word. - While a ligature may be okay in the word, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -graffiti, -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - it looks really weird in compound words, such as -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -cufflink -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - or the German -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Dorffest. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - To break a ligature, use -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ligature -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Break. - -\family default - This changes -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -cufflinks -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -links -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Dorffest -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -fest -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LyX's Proper Names -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Proper names -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with - characters in different sizes and heights. - LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized - as a proper name when you type it in LyX as -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -command -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section. - To create proper names omit the TeX Code. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the - following proper names: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LyX The name of the game, write -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to produce it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -TeX The program used by LaTeX, write -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to produce it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeX The program used by LyX, write -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to produce it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX2e -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to produce it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -2 -\begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers. - For example the version number of TeX converges to the number -\begin_inset Formula $\pi$ -\end_inset - -: The actual version is -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -TeX-3.141592 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, the previous one was -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -TeX-3.14159 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings, - you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word. - In LyX this will look like -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/LaTeX.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -For more about TeX Code, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:TeX-Code" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Units -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typography ! Units -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal - space between two words. - As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is - smaller. - To get such a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -half space -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - for units use the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Thin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space -\family default - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "space-insert thin" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here is an example to show the differences: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -space between number and unit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -half space between number and unit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Widows and Orphans -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typography ! Widows and orphans -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page - happened to end. - There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text. - You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading - for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line - of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line - of a paragraph at the top of a new page. - These bits of text became known as -\emph on -widows -\emph default - and -\emph on -orphans -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading. - That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments. - But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line - of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules - built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there - specifically to prevent widows and orphans. - This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can - tweak that behavior. - Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - or -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -) may have more information. - You will almost never need to worry about this, however. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:Floats-and-Notes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. - There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Notes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Notes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LyX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as - a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(xxx) -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Comment -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Greyed -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can - set in the document settings under -\family sans -Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Greyed-out -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -notes -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -This is the text -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -This is an example footnote within a greyed out note. - In this document the color of this note type is set to blue. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - of a comment that appears in the output. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notes are inserted with the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - or the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note -\family default -. - Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Footnotes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Footnotes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Footnotes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the - menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Footnote -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "footnote-insert" -\end_inset - -, -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -you will see -\family default -\series default -\bar default - a box like this: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - - -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no - This box is LyX's representation of your footnote. - If you -\family default -\series default -\bar default - left-click on -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -foot -\family roman - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -\bar default - -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -label, the box will -\family default -\series default -\bar default - be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it. - Clicking on the box label again will close -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -the -\family default -\series default -\bar default - box -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -. - If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it - and click on the footnote -\family default -\series default -\bar default - toolbar -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -button -\family default -\series default -\bar default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here is an example footnote: -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text - position where the footnote box is placed. - The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page. - The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class. - LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get - other schemes using special LaTeX-commands. - T -\family roman -h -\family default -ey are described in the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Marginal Notes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Marginal notes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Marginal-Notes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX. - When you insert a margin note via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marginal -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Note -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "marginalnote-insert" -\end_inset - -, you will see -\family roman -\series medium -a -\family default -\series default - -\family roman -\series medium -box with the -\family default -\series default - -\family roman -\series medium -label -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -margin -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - appearing within your text. - This box is LyX's representation of your margin -\family default -\series default -al -\family roman -\series medium -note. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note. -\family roman -\series medium - -\begin_inset Marginal -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align left -This is a marginal note. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents. - In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even - pages, right on odd pages. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For further information about marginal notes see the section -\emph on -Margin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Notes -\emph default - in the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Graphics and Images -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Images -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Graphics -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Graphics" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position - you want and click on the toolbar icon -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - or select -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Graphics -\family default - from the menu. - Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters. - The -\family sans -\bar under -G -\bar default -raphics -\family default - tab allows you to choose your image file. - The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling - factor. - The scaling units are explained in Appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Units-available-in" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the tab -\family sans -Clipping -\family default - it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width - of the image in the output. - The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button - -\family sans -Get -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -from -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -file -\family default -. - The option -\family sans -Clip -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -to -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bounding -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -box -\family default - will only print the image region within the given coordinates. - Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore - the tab -\family sans -Clipping -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X options -\family default - tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options. - In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX. - The option -\family sans -Draft -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mode -\family default - has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame - with the image size is printed. - The option -\family sans -Don't -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -unzip -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -export -\family default - is explained in the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual in section -\emph on -Graphics Dialog -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image. - Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are - in the text. - This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/mobius.eps - scale 70 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put - the image into a float, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Figure-Floats" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Image Formats -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Images ! Formats -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Image-Formats" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can insert images in any known file format. - But as we explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Output-file-formats" - -\end_inset - -, every output document format allows only a few image formats. - LyX therefore uses the program -\family typewriter -ImageMagick -\family default - in the background to convert the images to the right format. - To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background, - use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Output-file-formats" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Bitmap -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form. - They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms. - Well-known bitmap image formats are -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Graphics Interchange Format -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (GIF, file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.gif -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -GIF|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Image formats -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Portable Network Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (PNG, file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.png -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PNG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Image formats -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Joint Photographic Experts Group -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (JPG, file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - or -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpeg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -JPG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Image formats -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Scalable -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without - data loss. - The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because - presentations are always scaled by the beamer. - Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Scalable image formats can be -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Scalable Vector Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (SVG, file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.svg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -SVG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Image formats -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Encapsulated PostScript -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (EPS, file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.eps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -EPS|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Image formats -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Portable Document Format -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (PDF, file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.pdf -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - We say -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -can be -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the - result will not be scalable. - In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original - image. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only -\emph on -vice versa -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Grouping of Image Settings -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Images ! Settings grouping -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing - group. - Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image - of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in - the same way. - So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the - need to manually change each of them. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A new group can be set by pressing the button -\family sans -Open -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -new -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -group -\family default - in the -\family sans - Graphics -\family default - dialog in the -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X options -\family default - tab. - Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image - and checking the name of the desired group. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Tables -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tables -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Tables" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can insert a table using either the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "tabular-insert" -\end_inset - - or the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Table -\family default -. - A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns. - The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated - from the rest of the table. - This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row - have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above - them. - Here is an example table: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -A -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -B -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\size normal -\noun off -\color none - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -C -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -The Table dialog -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and - then choosing -\family sans -More\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default -. - This brings up the table dialog. - Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the - cursor is placed currently. - Most of the dialog options also work on selections. - This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is - done on all of your selection. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In addition to the table dialog, the -\family sans -table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -toolbar -\family default - helps you in setting table properties. - It appears if the cursor is inside a table. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the tab -\family sans -Table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row. - If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the - current cell respectively. - The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width - is given. - A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs - of text, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Table-Cells" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell - using the check box -\family sans -Multicolumn -\family default - or -\family sans -Multirow -\family default -. - This will merge the cells to -\emph on -one -\emph default - cell, spread over more than one column/row. - Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width, - and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell. - Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one - in the last row without the upper border: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -abc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -def ghi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -jkl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -A -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -B -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -C -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -D -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table. - They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells, - explained in the chapter -\emph on -Tables -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. - You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -degrees counterclockwise. - These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Most DVI-viewers are -\emph on -not -\emph default - able to display rotations. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Borders -\family default - tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column. - The button -\family sans -Default -\family default - adds lines for all cell borders. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Longtables -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tables ! Longtables -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Longtables -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option -\family sans -Use -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -long -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -table -\family default - in the tab -\family sans -Longtable -\family default - of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages. - Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Header -\family default -: The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options - defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable. - except for the first page, if -\family sans -First -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -header -\family default - is defined. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -First -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -header -\family default -: The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options - defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Footer -\family default -: The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options - defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable, - except for the last page, if -\family sans -Last -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -footer -\family default - is defined. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Last -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -footer -\family default -: The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options - defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Caption: The first row is reset as a single column. - You can now insert there the table caption via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Caption -\family default -. - More about longtable captions can be found in the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also specify a row where the table is split. - If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware - that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as - -\emph on -empty -\emph default -. - In this context, first means first in this order: -\family sans -Footer, Last -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -footer, -\family default - -\family sans -Header, -\family default - -\family sans -First -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -header -\family default -; see the following longtable to see how it works: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Example Phone List (ignore the names) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -NAME -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Example Phone List -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -NAME -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -continue ... -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -999 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -End -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Table Cells -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tables ! Cells -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Table-Cells" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table. - All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell. - Font sizes and shapes can also be altered. - But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like -\family sans -Section* -\family default -, etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width - for the column in the table dialog. - Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell - is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width. - An example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -This is a multi-line entry in a table. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -5 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -6 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -This is longer now. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -7 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -8 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -This is a multi-line entry in a table. - This is longer now. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -9 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well. - You can even cut and paste more than one row. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not - be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3. - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Selection with the mouse or with -\family sans -Shift -\family default - plus the arrow keys works as usual. - You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting - the selection from outside the table. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Floats -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Floats -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Floats" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't - have a fixed location. - It can -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -float -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best. - -\family sans -Footnotes -\family default - and -\family sans -Margin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Notes -\family default - are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are - too many notes on the current page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout. - Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace - and pages without text. - As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and - the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text. - Floats are therefore numbered. - Referencing is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Cross-References" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To insert a float, use the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Float -\family default -. - A box with a caption will be inserted into your document. - The label will automatically be translated to the document language in - the output. - After the label you can insert the caption text. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Floats ! Captions -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate - paragraph within the float. - To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box - by left-clicking on the box label. - A closed float box looks like this: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/floatQt4.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - - – a gray button with a red label. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors - that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Examples -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Figure Floats -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Figure-Floats" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Floats ! Figure floats -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Platypus-distorted" - -\end_inset - - was created using the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Figure -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert figure" -\end_inset - -). - The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and - using the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Graphics -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - -). - The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor - to the left or right of the image and using the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/platypus.eps - lyxscale 50 - width 50col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Platypus-distorted" - -\end_inset - -A severely distorted platypus in a float. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference - to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Label -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - -) and refer to it using the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cross-Reference -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -). - It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using - vague references like -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -the figure above -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it - might not be -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -above -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - at all. - For more about cross-references, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Cross-References" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you - might want to use two images with separate subcaptions. - This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats. - Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures - as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:List-of-Figures" - -\end_inset - -. - Figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" - -\end_inset - - is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side. - You can also set the images one below the other. - Figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Undefinable" - -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Platypus" - -\end_inset - - are the subfigures. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Undefinable" - -\end_inset - -Undefinable -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Platypus" - -\end_inset - -Platypus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/platypus.eps - lyxscale 60 - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Two-distorted-images" - -\end_inset - -Two distorted images. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Table Floats -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Floats ! Table floats -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Table floats can be inserted using the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Table -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert table" -\end_inset - -. - They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in - the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures - and that the label begins with “tab:”. - Table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Table-float" - -\end_inset - - is a table float. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Table-float" - -\end_inset - -A table float. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Joe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Mary -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Ted -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -a & b\\ -c & d -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -More Information -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Floats ! Details -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats. - It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the - float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float - caption. - All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter - -\emph on -Floats -\emph default - in the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Minipages -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Minipages -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Minipages" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, - called a minipage. - Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -apply. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Box -\family default -. - Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage - and its alignment within the page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "30col%" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -This is a minipage. - The text is set in an italic style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs - another formatting. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use -\family sans -Horizontal Fills -\family default - as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Horizontal-Space" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text. - This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text. - This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another - box type. - All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter -\emph on -Boxes -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Mathematical Formulas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formulas | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Math -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. - There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Basic Math Editing -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Basics -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-mode on" -\end_inset - - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-mode" -\end_inset - -). - That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its - corners. - That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate - what level of nesting within the formula you are at. - You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math -\family default - menu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done - with the -\family sans -math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -toolbar -\family default -, that appears if the cursor is in a formula. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas. - Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This is a line with an inline formula -\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ -\end_inset - - in it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate - paragraph, like this one: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -A=B -\] - -\end_inset - -You can only number and reference displayed formulas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands. - For example, typing -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -alpha -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ -\end_inset - -. - Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Navigating in Formulas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Navigating -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is - achieved with the arrow keys. - LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted. - The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula. - Pressing -\family sans -Space -\family default - will leave a formula construct (a square root -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ -\end_inset - -, or parentheses -\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ -\end_inset - -, or a matrix -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - -). - Pressing -\family sans -Escape -\family default - will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula. - -\family sans -Tab -\family default - can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the - cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Space -\family default -, printed in this document as -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting - the space character (visible space). -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between - characters, but it does exit a nested structure. - For this reason, you have to be careful about using -\family sans -Space -\family default -. - For example, if you want -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ -\end_inset - -, type -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -2x+1 -\series default - and not -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -2x -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -+1 -\series default -, since in the latter case only the -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Formula $2x$ -\end_inset - - -\family default - will be under the square root sign: -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled - in, such as: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -\lambda_{1}\\ - & \ddots\\ - & & \lambda_{n} -\end{array}\right) -\] - -\end_inset - -If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing - in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Selecting Text -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can select text within a formula in two different ways. - Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press -\family sans -Shift -\family default - and a cursor movement key to select text. - It will be highlighted as with regular text selection. - Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way. - That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula, - but not in a normal text region in LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Exponents and Subscripts -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Exponents -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Subscripts -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-superscript" -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-subscript" -\end_inset - -), but it is often much easier to use a command. - To get -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - -, type in a formula -\series bold -x^2 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default -. - The final -\family sans -Space -\family default - puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression. - If you type -\series bold -x^2y -\series default -, you will get -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ -\end_inset - -, to get -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ -\end_inset - -, type -\series bold -x^2 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -y -\series default -. - If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the - circumflex -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -^ -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, you have to use an extra -\family sans -Space -\family default - to separate the circumflex and the character. - For example, if you want -\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ -\end_inset - -, type -\series bold -x^ -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -a -\series default -. - Subscripts are similar: To get -\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ -\end_inset - -, type -\series bold -a_1 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fractions -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Fractions -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Create a fraction either with the command -\series bold - -\backslash -frac -\series default - or by using the icon -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\frac" -\end_inset - - in the -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default -. - You will be presented with an empty fraction. - The cursor is above the fraction line. - To move it to the bottom, simply press -\family sans -Down -\family default -. - To move back up, press -\family sans -Up -\family default -. - Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} -2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 -\end{array}\right)}\right] -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Roots -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Roots -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Roots can be created using the -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default - buttons -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\sqrt" -\end_inset - - or -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\root" -\end_inset - - or the commands -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default - or -\series bold - -\backslash -root -\series default -. - With the command -\series bold - -\backslash -root -\series default - you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default - always produces a square root. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Operators with Limits -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Sums -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Integrals -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Operators-with-Limits" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sum ( -\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ -\end_inset - -) and integral ( -\begin_inset Formula $\int$ -\end_inset - -) operators are very often decorated with limits. - These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter - a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol. - The sum operator will automatically place its -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -limits -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline - formulas, as in -\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ -\end_inset - -, versus -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e -\] - -\end_inset - -Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula - types. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in - display mode. - The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly - behind the operator and using the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Limits -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Type -\family default - or entering -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-limits" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certain other mathematical expressions also have this -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -moving limits -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - feature, such as -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Limits -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x), -\] - -\end_inset - -which will place the -\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ -\end_inset - - underneath the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -lim -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in display mode. - In inline formulas it looks like this: -\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro -\series bold - -\backslash -lim -\series default -. - Have a look at section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Functions" - -\end_inset - - for an explanation of function macros. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Math Symbols -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Symbols -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Most math symbols can be found in the -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default - under one of several categories; including -\family sans -Greek -\family default -, -\family sans -Operators -\family default -, -\family sans -Relations -\family default -, -\family sans -Arrows -\family default -. - There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical - Society (AMS). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, - you don't have to use the -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default -; you can type the command directly into the formula. - LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Altering Spacing -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Spaces -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that - LaTeX provides. - To do this, press -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - - or use the -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default - button -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\space" -\end_inset - - -\family default -. - This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen. - For example, the sequence -\series bold -a Ctrl+Space b -\series default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ -\end_inset - - appears in LyX as -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png - -\end_inset - -. - You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind - the space marker and enter space again several times. - With every space enter the size will be changed. - Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative - spaces. - Here are two examples: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Ctrl+Space b -\series default - and 3× -\family sans -Space -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Ctrl+Space b -\series default - and 5× -\family sans -Space -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Functions -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Functions -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Functions" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default - contains under the button -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\functions" -\end_inset - - -\family default - a number of function macros, such as -\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ -\end_inset - -, -\emph on -etc -\emph default -. - (you can also insert them in a formula by typing -\series bold - -\backslash -sin -\series default - etc.). - Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to - avoid confusions, because -\begin_inset Formula $sin$ -\end_inset - - does normally mean -\begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function: - -\begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$ -\end_inset - - is different from -\begin_inset Formula $asinx$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts - are placed, as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Accents -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Accents -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text - mode. - This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use. - You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - - even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled. - Our example is entered by typing -\series bold - -\backslash -hat -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -a -\series default - in a formula. - Table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Accent-names-and" - -\end_inset - - shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Accent-names-and" - -\end_inset - -Accent names and the corresponding commands. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Name -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Command -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -E -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -xample -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -circumflex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -hat -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -acute -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -acute -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -umlaut -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -ddot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -dot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -dot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -breve -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -breve -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -caron -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -check -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -macron -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -bar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -vector -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -vec -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the -\family sans -Frame -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -decorations -\family default - symbol set button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\hat" -\end_inset - - in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within - a formula too. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Brackets and Delimiters -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Brackets -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Delimiters -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are several brackets available through LyX. - For some purposes, using just the keys -\family typewriter -[]{}()|<> -\family default - should suffice. - But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction, - or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math - toolbar delimiter icon -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" -\end_inset - -. - For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right] -\] - -\end_inset - -it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses. - Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" -\end_inset - - and the expression on the right was entered using the -\family typewriter -() -\family default - keys. - -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from - that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is - inside. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the - left side and right side. - If you use the option -\family sans -Keep -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -matched -\family default -, the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side. - The selection will be shown below the button field. - If you want one side not to have a bracket, use the blank button. - It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root, - you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to - go inside the brackets. - Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on -\family sans -Insert -\family default -. - The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure. - The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and - braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts. - For example, to insert a pair of flexible parentheses on both sides, select - the structure and enter -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-delim ( )" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Arrays and Multi-line Equations -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Arrays -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Matrices -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Multi-line Equations -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Matrices are entered in LyX using the -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default - matrix button -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" -\end_inset - - -\family default -. - It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns. - Here is an example: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -1 & 2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 & 6\\ -7 & 8 & 9 -\end{array}\right) -\] - -\end_inset - -The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters" - -\end_inset - -. - When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries - will be left-, right-, or center-justified. - This alignment is set in the box -\family sans -Horizontal -\family default - with the letters -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -l -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -r -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -c -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - LyX proposes a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -c -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - for every column as default. - For example, the sequence -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -lcr -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be - centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter - corresponds to the relevant column. - The result will look like this: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\begin{array}{lcr} -this & this\, column & this\, column\\ -column & has & has\, right\\ -has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment -\end{array}. -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - while the cursor is in the matrix. - Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math -\family default - or the math toolbar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases. - It can be created with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cases -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Environment -\family default - or the command -\series bold - -\backslash -cases -\series default -. - Here is an example: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\begin{cases} --1 & x<0\\ -0 & x=0\\ -1 & x>0 -\end{cases} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - -Multi-line formulas are created when you press -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - within a formula. - In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each - column. - When you press -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -= -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign - is in the second column, and the rest in the third column. - A new row is created by every further entry of -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -. - Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas. - Here is an example: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\ -a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared} -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures - in this column will be printed in a smaller size: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray*} -\frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} -\end{eqnarray*} - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The multi-line formula type described here is called -\family typewriter -\series medium -eqnarray -\family default -\series default -. - There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations, - for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand eqref -reference "eq:asquared" - -\end_inset - -. - The other types are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Formula Numbering and Referencing -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Formula numbering -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Referencing formulas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Number -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Whole -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formula -\family default - or the shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - -. - The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses. - The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated. - The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on - the document class. - In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number, - separated by a dot: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{equation} -1+1=2 -\end{equation} - -\end_inset - -Using -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - - in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering. - You can only number displayed formulas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Number -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -This -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Line -\family default - or the shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-line-toggle" -\end_inset - - will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -1 & = & 3-2\\ -2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ -4 & \leq & 7 -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -To number all lines use the shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - -Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label. - A label is inserted with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Label -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - -) when the cursor is in the formula. - This opens a dialog to enter the label. - It is recommended that you use the suggested -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eq: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the - label type when you have many labels in your document. - We inserted in the following example the label -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -eq:tanhExp -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in the second line: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ - & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -Every labeled line is automatically numbered. - Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number. - You can reference a labeled formula using the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cross -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Reference -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -). - A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to. - The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output - as the formula number: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This is a cross-reference to equation ( -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "eq:tanhExp" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Cross-References" - -\end_inset - -. - To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and - press -\family sans -Del -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -User defined math macros -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Macros -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you - have equations of the same form in a document several times. - Math macros are explained in section -\emph on -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Macros -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Fine-Tuning -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Typefaces -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Typefaces -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman. - To set a font in a formula, use the -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default - button -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\font" -\end_inset - - -\family default -, or enter its command, listed in table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the" - -\end_inset - -, directly. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Typefaces-and-the" - -\end_inset - -Typefaces and the corresponding commands. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Font -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Command -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape up -\size normal -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathrm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape up -\size normal -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathtt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbb -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathfrak -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape up -\size normal -\emph on -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathcal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathsf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - You can only print capital letters in the typefaces -\family sans -Blackboard -\family default - and -\family sans -Calligraphic -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula. - Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface. - Pressing -\family sans -Space -\family default - within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected - space when you need a space in the box. - Here is an example where -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -N -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in -\family sans -Blackboard -\family default - denotes the set of numbers: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion. - You can, for example, put a character in -\family sans -Fraktur -\family default - in a box for -\family sans -Typewriter -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -So it is better not to use this feature. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters: -\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -You can only print them emboldened using the command -\series bold - -\backslash -boldsymbol -\series default -, which works like the other typeface commands: -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -boldsymbol -\series default - works for all symbols, letters, and numbers. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Math Text -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Text -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but - not for text. - For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using - the entry -\family sans -Normal -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mode -\family default - of the -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panel -\family default - button -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\font" -\end_inset - - -\family default - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-default" -\end_inset - -). - Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue. - You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text. - Here is an example: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\begin{cases} -x & \mbox{if I say so}\\ --x & \mbox{under Umständen} -\end{cases} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Font Sizes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Font sizes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are - automatically chosen in most situations. - These are called -\family sans -textstyle -\family default -, -\family sans -displaystyle -\family default -, -\family sans -scriptstyle -\family default -, and -\family sans -scriptscriptstyle -\family default -. - For most characters, -\family sans -textstyle -\family default - and -\family sans -displaystyle -\family default - are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts, - and certain other structures, are set larger in -\family sans -displaystyle -\family default -. - Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various - situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat -e. - These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\style" -\end_inset - - -\family default -. - A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure. - For example, you can set -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ -\end_inset - -, which is normally in -\family sans -textstyle -\family default -, larger in -\family sans -displaystyle -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ -\end_inset - -. - The four styles are used in the following example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset - is set in a particular size with the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style -\family default -, all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size. - Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts - will be adjusted to correspond. - As an example here is a formula in the font size -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -largest -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family roman -\size largest -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -AMS-LaTeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -AMS math -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! AMS -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society - (AMS) that are in common use. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Enabling AMS-Support -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in - the document by selecting the checkbox -\family sans -Use -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -AMS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -package -\family default - in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dialog under -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Options -\family default -. - AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in - formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -AMS-Formula Types -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Multi-line Equations -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types. - LyX allows you to choose between -\family typewriter -align -\family default -, -\family typewriter -alignat -\family default -, -\family typewriter -flalign -\family default -, -\family typewriter -gather -\family default -, and -\family typewriter -multline -\family default -. - We refer you to the AMS-documentation, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - -, for an explanation of these formula types. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -More Tools -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Cross-References -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cross references -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Cross-References" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -One of LyX's strengths is cross-references. - You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in - the document. - To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it. - The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference. - We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -First item -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "enu:Second-item" - -\end_inset - -Second item -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Third item -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -First we insert a label into the second item with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Label -\family default - or by pressing the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - -. - A gray label box like this: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/labelQt4.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text. - LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case - the text -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -enu:Second-item -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The prefix -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -enu: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - stands for -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -enumerate -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for - example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix - will be -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -sec: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cross-Reference -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -. - A gray cross-reference box like this: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/referenceQt4.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels - in the document. - We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -enu:Second-item -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear - in the output. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As an alternative to -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cross-Reference -\family default -, you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select -\family sans -Copy as Reference -\family default -. - The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted - to the actual cursor position via the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paste -\family default - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paste" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here is our cross-reference: Item -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "enu:Second-item" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -It is recommended to use a protected space -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Protected-Space" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly - line breaks between them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are six formats of cross-references: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -: prints the number, this is the default: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -(): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style - normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Equation -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is omitted: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand eqref -reference "eq:tanhExp" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -: prints the page number: Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand pageref -reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -: prints the text “on page” and the page number: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vpageref -reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label - is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”; - if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on - the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page, - it prints “on the next page”. - The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like -\family sans -\series bold - -\family default -\series default -; otherwise it behaves like -\family sans -\series bold -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Formatted -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - or -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installed. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting - the option -\family sans -Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references -\family default - in the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Document Class -\family default -. - The package -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - is the default and preferred because -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - supports only English documents. - The format is specified by using the command -\series bold - -\backslash -newrefformat -\series default - (prettyref) or -\series bold - -\backslash -newref -\series default - (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document. - For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label - shortcut -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -fig -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) can be done with this command -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page -\backslash -pageref{#1}}} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "prettyref,refstyle" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Textual -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand nameref -reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output - is automatically calculated by LaTeX. - The varieties are adjusted in the field -\family sans -Format -\family default - of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen -ce. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can only use the style -\family sans - -\family default - to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style -\family sans - -\family default - is always possible. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading; - for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in - it. - Referencing formulas is explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu. - The entry -\family sans -Go -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -to -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Label -\family default - sets the cursor before the referenced label. - This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to -\family sans -Go -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Back -\family default - so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference. - You can also go back with the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can change labels at any time. - References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you - do not need to think about this. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX - “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output - instead of the reference. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -References are described in detail in the section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Referencing Floats -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Table of Contents and other Listings -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Table of contents -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Outline -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:toc" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Table of Contents -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Table-of-Contents" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -of -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Contents -\family default -. - It is displayed in LyX as a gray box. - If you click on it, the -\family sans -Outline -\family default - window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you - to move and rearrange sections in your documents. - So this operation is an alternative to the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Outline -\family default - that is described in sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:The-Outliner" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically. - If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described - in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Short-Titles" - -\end_inset - -, it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading. - Section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Numbering-depth" - -\end_inset - - describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are - listed in the TOC. - Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:List-of-Figures" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents. - You can insert them via the -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -List/TOC -\family default - submenus. - The list entries are the float captions and the float number. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -URLs and Hyperlinks -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -URLs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hyperlinks -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URLs -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:URLs" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -URL -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage: -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be - in the style -\family typewriter -Typewriter -\family default -. - To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next - subsection. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hyperlinks -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Hyperlinks" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Hyperlink -\family default - or with the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "href-insert" -\end_inset - -. - The appearing dialog has two fields: -\family sans -Target -\family default - and -\family sans -Name -\family default -. - The name is the printed text for the hyperlink. - The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "LyX's homepage" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - -, an Email address like this: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "lyx-docs mailing list" -target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - -, or a link to a file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by - adding the prefix -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -run: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to the link target. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output, - and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output. - To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use - the text style dialog. - This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text: -\family sans -\series bold - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "LyX's homepage" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The link text color can be changed, when the option -\family sans -Color links -\family default - is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -PDF Properties -\family default -). - The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the - option -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -urlcolor=blue -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -to the field -\family sans -Additional options -\family default - in the PDF Properties dialog. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Appendices -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Appendix -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Appendices" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Appendices are created with the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Start -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Here -\family default -. - This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end - as the appendix part of the book. - This part is marked with a red borderline. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix, - numbered with a capital Latin letter. - The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot - and the subsection number. - All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections, - here two examples: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Credits" - -\end_inset - -; Appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Export" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Bibliography -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliography -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Bibliography" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document. - You can include a bibliography database, -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Known under the name -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -BibTeX-database -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography - manually, using the paragraph environment -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default -, which was described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Biblio_environment" - -\end_inset - -. - If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in - this document, like author-year citations, then you must -\emph on - -\emph default -use a bibliography database. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -The Bibliography Environment -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Within the -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default - environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled - with a number. - If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a -\family sans -Key -\family default - and a -\family sans -Label -\family default -. - The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography - entry. - For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX - and we used -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -latexcompanion -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, a short form of its title, as the key. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Citation -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" -\end_inset - -. - A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear - containing the available citations. - Select one or more keys from the list and -\family sans -Add -\family default - them. - Then press -\family sans -OK -\family default -. - The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s). - If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change - the reference. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography - entry with surrounding brackets. - If you set a -\family sans -Label -\family default - for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number. - Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Credits -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Have a look at the -\family sans -LaTeX Companion Second Edition -\family default -: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest - label via the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). - All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Bibliography databases (BibTeX) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliography ! Databases -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliography ! BibTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Bibliography-databases" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different - documents. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning - them. - Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations - and reviews along with bibliographical information. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography - entries. - You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of - your working field in a database. - This database can be used for different documents, and by default only - the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography - list for that document. - This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books - you have cited. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The database is a text file with the file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -.bib -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, containing the bibliography in a special format. - The format is explained in -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "BibTeX-2" - -\end_inset - - and in the LaTeX books ( -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" - -\end_inset - -). - The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a - special program to create and edit the entries in the database. - A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To use a database, use the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -List -\family default -/ -\family sans -TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator -BibT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Bibliography -\family default -. - A gray box will be inserted and a window appears. - In this window you can add one or more databases and select a -\family sans -style -\family default - file. - The option -\family sans -Add bibliography to TOC -\family default - adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography. - In the -\family sans -Content -\family default - drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database - in the document or just the cited references. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The style file is a text file with the file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -.bst -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - that controls how the bibliography entries will appear. - Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers - provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the - layout. - It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something - for experts. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -For information on how this is done, have a look at -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX. - You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the -\family sans -Processor -\family default - either in -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bibliography -\family default - or in -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. - The following variants are possible: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work - with other bibliography packages (e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\series bold -natbib -\series default -), only with the package -\series bold -biblatex -\series default -; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin - letters -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries - that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works - with all bibliography packages, except -\series bold -biblatex -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding, - larger memory than -\family sans -bibtex -\family default -, works with all bibliography packages -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification - of the variants. - Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual - of -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When you select the option -\family sans -Sectioned bibliography -\family default - in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bibliography -\family default - dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies. - This and other options are explained in detail in section -\emph on -Customizing Bibliographies -\emph default - -\emph on -with BibTeX -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Additional Features -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between - the two methods of creating them. - As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists - only the database entries that are referenced in the document. - We used the style file -\family sans -alphadin.bst -\family default - to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Bibliography layout -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliography ! Layout -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format. - For this feature you need to enable the option -\family sans -Natbib -\family default - in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dialog under -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default -. - Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default. - For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained - in the previous section. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in - the citation reference window. - Here is an example where the text -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Chapter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - appears after the reference: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Have a look at -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "Chapter 3" -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Index -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index generation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Index" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -An index entry is created if you use the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Index -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Entry -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "index-insert" -\end_inset - -. - A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index. - The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed - by LyX as the index entry. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The index list is inserted in the document with the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Index -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -List -\family default -. - A light blue box labeled -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Index -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - will show the place where the index is printed in the output. - The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections. - For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one - of the LaTeX books -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Grouping Index Entries -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Grouping -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the - index. - We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated - lists under the entry -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Lists -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - First we create the entry -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Lists -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Lists" - -\end_inset - -. - In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Itemize" - -\end_inset - -, we insert the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Lists ! Itemize -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -and the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Lists ! Enumerate -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -for the enumerated list in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Enumerate" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The exclamation mark -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -! -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - marks the grouping levels. - You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more. - An index entry for the higher levels is not required. - If we don't have an index entry for -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Lists -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, it will be printed anyway, but without a page number. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Page Ranges -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Page ranges -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed - section. - But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry. - For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create - an index entry in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments" - -\end_inset - - with the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Paragraph environments|( -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -and another entry at the end of section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LyX-Code" - -\end_inset - - with the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Paragraph environments|) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The commands -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|( -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|) -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - respectively start and end the index range. - You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document. - They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of - the pages of the indexed document parts. - An example is the index entry -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Document ! Settings -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cross referencing -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Cross referencing -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -It is also possible to refer to another index entry. - We referred for example in the index entry -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -GIF -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Image-Formats" - -\end_inset - -) to the index entry -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Image formats -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in the same section using the entry -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -GIF|see{Image formats} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code. - The text within the braces is the referenced entry. - The reference will appear in the output without a page number. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Index Entry Order -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Entry order -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not - follow the rules for the index order. - The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see - section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Index-Program" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - does not know how to sort accents in different languages. - We have created as an example the three dummy index entries -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -maison -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -maïs -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -maître -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dummy entries ! maïs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dummy entries ! maître -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dummy entries ! maïs@maison -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order - maïs, maison, maître. - To achieve this, we use the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -previous entry@current entry -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In our case we want to have -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -maison -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - after -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -maïs -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and write therefore for the index entry of maison: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -maïs@maison -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The previous entry need not be a real existing entry. - You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order. - See the next subsection for an example. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the - program -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -to generate the index (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Index-Program" - -\end_inset - -). - -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in - sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Document-Font" - -\end_inset - - after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these - index commands start with -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -LaTeX-packages ! -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote. - To fix this -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -let -\backslash -OrgIndex -\backslash -index -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand*{ -\backslash -index}[1]{ -\backslash -OrgIndex{#1}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Index Entry Layout -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Entry layout -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dummy entries ! -\shape italic -This is an italic dummy entry -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - You can also format the page number using the character -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -| -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash. - We can write for example -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -italic page number:|textit -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -to get the page number in italic. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special - case -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|command -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - means -\series bold - -\backslash -command{page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -number} -\series default -. - Have a look at section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - - to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -to generate the index, see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Index-Program" - -\end_inset - -. - If you use -\family sans -xindy -\family default -, this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text. - This is because -\family sans -xindy -\family default - requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "p. 678 ff." -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - for details. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown - above. - Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that. - Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of - the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions. - If so, put the following in the preamble -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -IndexDef}[1]{ -\backslash -textit{#1}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -and write -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -my entry|IndexDef -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -in the index entry. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher - insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to - change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also change the layout for the whole index. - For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get - a bold font for all index entries. - For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called -\emph on -Index Style File -\emph default -, see the -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - or -\family sans -xindy -\family default - documentation for details, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Index Program -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Program -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Index-Program" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If the index generation program -\family sans -xindy -\family default - is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -, the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Makeindex -\family default - is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably - that it was developed with only the English language in mind. - So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly. - We have shown above how to fix this sorting. - However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider - to use -\family sans -xindy -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences - dialog, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" - -\end_inset - -. - The available options are listed and explained in -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -. - In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate - the index. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a - given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{} -or the options in -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Indexes -\family default -. - This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options - to the index program or if you need a specific layout style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Multiple Indexes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In many fields it is common to have more than one index. - For instance, you might need to set up a separate -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Index of Names -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - next to the standard index. - LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages - that add this feature. - LyX uses the -\series bold -splitidx -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! splitidx -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - package to generate multiple indexes. - The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -. - Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also - includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well. - Please consult the package's manual for details. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Indexes -\family default - and select the option -\family sans -Use multiple Indexes -\family default -. - Note that the list -\family sans -Available Indexes -\family default - already contains the standard index -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Index -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should - also appear as a heading) to the -\family sans -New -\family default - input field and press the -\family sans -Add -\family default - button. - The new index now also appears in the list. - If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new - index. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index - list in -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -List/TOC -\family default - and the -\family sans -Insert -\family default - menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes. - The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there - are additional features: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking - on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type. - Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Subindex. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level. - For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading - is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can - thus be nested to the non-subindexes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Nomenclature / Glossary -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclature -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glossary|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Nomenclature -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Nomenclature" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sometimes you need to compile a list of symbols that are mentioned in your - document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or - glossary. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To be able to create nomenclatures, you need the LaTeX package -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installed. - You find it in the TeX-catalogue, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry - and then use the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family default -N -\family sans -omenclature -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Entry -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "nomencl-insert" -\end_inset - -. - A gray box labeled -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Nom -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries. - The first is the symbol that you want to refer to. - The second is the description of the symbol. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenclature Definition and Layout -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclature ! Layout -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the -\family sans -Symbol -\family default - field as LaTeX-formulas. - For example to get -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, insert this: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series default -The -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -$ -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - character starts/ends the formula. - The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning - with a backslash -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\backslash - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter, - like -\series bold - -\backslash -Sigma -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -(A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - -.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You cannot use the -\family sans -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style -\family default - dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands. - For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in this document is: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -dummy entry for the character -\backslash -textsf{sigma} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -The command -\series bold - -\backslash -textsf -\series default - sets the fonts to -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif -\family default -. - To get -\series bold -bold -\series default - font use the command -\series bold - -\backslash -textbf -\series default -, for -\family typewriter -typewriter -\family default - use -\series bold - -\backslash -texttt -\series default -, for -\emph on -emphasized -\emph default - use -\series bold - -\backslash -emph -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If the characters | -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -! -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -, @ and -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -" -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding - a quote character in front of them. -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\"" -description "The quote sign is output by writing ' \"\"\"\" '" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclature ! Sort order -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of - the symbol definition. - This leads to undesired results when you for example have symbols in formulas. - Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols -\emph on -a -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "a" -description "dummy entry for the character \"a\"" - -\end_inset - - -\emph default - and -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -prefix "sigma" -symbol "$\\sigma$" -description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}" - -\end_inset - -. - They will be sorted by -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -a -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - – the -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - will be sorted before the -\emph on -a -\emph default - since the character -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -$ -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is considered in sorting. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To control the sort order, you can edit the -\family sans -Sort -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -as -\family default - field of the nomenclature dialog. - Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol - definition. - For the example given, you can insert -\family typewriter -sigma -\family default - in this field for the -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -, then -\emph on -a -\emph default - will be located before -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - documentation, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenclature Options -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclature ! Options -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature. - Here are some of its options, for more have a look at its documentation: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refeq Appends the phrase -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, see equation ( -\emph on -eq -\emph default -) -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to every nomenclature entry, where -\family sans -\emph on -eq -\family default -\emph default - is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refpage Appends the phrase -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, page ( -\emph on -page -\emph default -) -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to every nomenclature entry, where -\family sans -\emph on -page -\family default -\emph default - is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document - class options list in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog. - In this document the options -\series bold -refpage, intoc -\series default - are used. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature - entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the - -\family sans -Description -\family default - field in the nomenclature dialog: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeq Like the -\series bold -refeq -\series default - option -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefpage Like the -\series bold -refpage -\series default - option -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeqpage Short notation of -\series bold - -\backslash -nomrefeq -\backslash -nomrefpage -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomnorefeq, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefpage, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Words like -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - are automatically translated for some document languages. - If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation -\backslash -nobreakspace(#1)} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -pagedeclaration}[1]{, page -\backslash -nobreakspace{}#1} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -and replace -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -see equation -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - by their translation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Printing the Nomenclature -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclature ! Printing -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To print the nomenclature, use the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Lists -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nomenclature -\family default -. - A box labeled -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Nomenclature -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output. - By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered. - You can choose between these settings: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Default a space of 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm is used -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Longest -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -label -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Custom custom space -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Nomenclature -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the - command -\series bold - -\backslash -nomname -\series default - in the preamble. - For example, in order to change the name to -\emph on -List of Symbols -\emph default -, add the following line to the preamble: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family roman -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -nomname}{List of Symbols} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenclature Program -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclature ! Program -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Nomenclature-Program" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX uses the program -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -, that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature. - LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control - -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - by adding options, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" - -\end_inset - -. - The available options are listed and explained in -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl,makeindex" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Branches -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Branches -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Branches -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Branches" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output. - For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the - pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same - document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches. - The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated. - To create a branch, either select the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Insert New Branch -\family default - (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog to -\family sans -Branches -\family default -, where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation - state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not), - its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should - be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active - (see below for an example). - Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch - to the name of the other) and to add -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -unknown branches -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents -, without having been defined) to the document's branch list. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes. - These boxes are inserted via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Branch -\family default - where you can choose a branch. - You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking - on them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch - is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Question -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner? -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Answer -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you activate -\family sans -Filename Suffix -\family default - in -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Branches -\family default -, the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export. - Consider for example a file -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Exam.lyx -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - which has the above branches. - If -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Filename Suffix -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is active, the PDF export file would be called -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Exam.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - if both the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Question -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Answer -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - branch were inactive, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Exam-Question.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - if only the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Question -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - branch was active, likewise -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Exam-Answer.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - if only the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Answer -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - branch was active, and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Exam-Question-Answer.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - if both branches were active. - This helps you to easily export different versions of your document without - much hassle. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets, - like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each - branch. - For example you can define for the question branch -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -answer}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -and for the answer branch -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -answer}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Question -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -answer}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Answer -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -answer}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Now it is possible to use the commands -\series bold - -\backslash -question{\SpecialChar \ldots{} -} -\series default - and -\series bold - -\backslash -answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{} -} -\series default - to obtain conditional output. - Here is an example formula where only the -\series bold - -\backslash -question -\series default - part appears: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}. -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the - -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. -\change_inserted 5863208 1334492666 - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\change_inserted 5863208 1334493356 -Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout - files (e.g. - any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.). - For this advanced usage, please study Customization manual (in particular - section -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Flex insets and InsetLayout -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -). -\change_unchanged - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -PDF Properties -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:PDF-Properties" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF properties -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Document Settings -\family default - dialog allows you in the -\family sans -PDF Properties -\family default - to set up special options for the PDF output of your document. - All options there are provided by the LaTeX-package -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Using -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output. - This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a - table of contents entry or on a reference and he is shown the referenced - document part. - You can specify in the dialog tab -\family sans -Hyperlinks -\family default - how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences - are created. - The backreferences will appear in the bibliography behind the different - entries, showing the number of the section, slide, or page where the entry - is referenced. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the dialog tab -\family sans -Bookmarks -\family default - you can set if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of your - document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document. - You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections - or not. - With the open bookmarks level you can specify what sectioning level should - be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF. - For example level -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 will display all sections and subsections, while level -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 will only display the sections. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The header information in the dialog tab -\family sans -General -\family default - are saved together with the PDF as file properties. - Many programs are able to extract this information to e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -automatically recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about. - This is very useful to sort, classify, or use PDFs for bibliography issues. - When the option -\family sans -Automatic fill header -\family default - is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document - title and author settings. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The option -\family sans -Load in fullscreen mode -\family default - will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF properties are also used in this document. - When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional - -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - options are used. - For an explanation of them we refer you to the hyperref manual -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:TeX-Code" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -TeX Code Boxes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -TeX Code -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and - constructs, but not all. - LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands. - All the time packages are being updated and new ones added. - This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there - is for every problem a LaTeX-package. - But LyX can of course not be up to date and support all packages and their - commands. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the - TeX Code box. - A TeX Code box is created by the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -TeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Code -\family default - or by the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - -). - The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on - it and selecting -\family sans -Close Inset -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code. - Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text. - For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore - using the LaTeX-command -\series bold - -\backslash -fbox -\series default -, you can write the command part -\series bold - -\backslash -fbox{ -\series default - in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace -\series bold -} -\series default - in a second TeX Code box behind the word. - The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in - the following example: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ERT.png - scale 89 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -gives -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This is a line with a -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fbox{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -framed -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - word. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space - to let LaTeX know that the command is finished. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The LaTeX Syntax -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX Syntax -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something - about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background. - Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -program -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - your text. - This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at - any time if you know the right commands. - E. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the - end of the day. - Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have - all caption labels bold. - But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels - in your manual. - Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one - day. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Now LaTeX comes into play. - As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package. - First you have to find out which and therefore look into the LaTeX package - database, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Catalogue" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -As result you find that the package -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - is what you need. - To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default -) with the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[options]{package name} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within - two braces and the options are set within two brackets. - Note that not all commands have an argument and options. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In your case the package name is -\series bold -caption -\series default -. - After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option - -\series bold -labelfont=bf -\series default - will change the font of all caption labels to bold. - So you add the command -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -to the preamble and the problem is solved. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -For more commands provided by the -\series bold -caption -\series default - package, have a look at its documentation, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "caption" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems - like your case. - For example if you use a -\family sans -KOMA-Script -\family default - class, you don't need the package -\series bold -caption -\series default -, you can instead write -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont{captionlabel}{ -\backslash -bfseries} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -in the preamble and the problem is solved. - So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the - documentation of the document class you want to use. - ( -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont -\series default - is an example of a command with more than one argument.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the - text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command - argument. - To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in - the previous section. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the - LaTeX-books -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexguide" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{fancy} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Header -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rightmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -defines the header line as described below -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Header -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Header -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leftmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Footer -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -thepage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Footer -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -LyX's user guide -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Magic code: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Footer -\begin_inset Argument 1 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Customized Page Headers and Footers -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Header/Footer line -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Header/Footer line -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need - to set the headings style to -\family sans -Fancy -\family default - in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog under -\family sans -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default -. - As a second step add in the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Modules -\family default - the module -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Custom Header/Footerlines -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - This module offers the following 6 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -styles: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Left -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Header, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Center -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Header, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Header -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Left -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Footer, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Center -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Footer, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Footer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -for the different positions in the header/footer. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normally, headers and footers are set up in the beginning of the document. - But you can change them anywhere you want to. - Figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Page-layout" - -\end_inset - - shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Left Header -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Center Header -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Right Header -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The normal text on the page goes here. - The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including - footnotes). - Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of - the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Left Footer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Center Footer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Right Footer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Page-layout" - -\end_inset - -Page layout with custom header and footer line. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To define your header line, add all 3 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -header styles. - The things you add to the styles appear on uneven pages, the things in - the optional arguments on even pages. - For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and - can be omitted. - If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output. - Defining the footer line works similar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted - as TeX code (menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Code -\family default -): -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -thepage prints the current page number -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -leftmark prints the current section number and title. - If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and - title instead. - It is called -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -leftmark -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - because it usually goes in a left header. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -rightmark prints the current subsection number and title. - If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and - title instead. - It is normally used in the right header. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Default header/footer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The custom header/footer is not empty by default. - The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center - footer has the page number. - In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the - relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank. - So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank -\family sans -Center -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Footer -\family default - style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Appearance -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The header and footer will appear on normal pages. - Some pages are different. - The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts - a new part or chapter in your book. - Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal. - There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on - the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Header and footer decoration line -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -By default, you get a 0.4 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt thick line below the header and no footer line. - This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands -\series bold - -\backslash -headrulewidth -\series default - and -\series bold - -\backslash -footrulewidth -\series default - in the following scheme: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -headrulewidth}{thickness} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Where thickness is a size in standard units like -\family sans -pt -\family default - or -\family sans -mm -\family default -. - If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX. - If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -4.4 of the book -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Several header/footer lines -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do - this by adding a normal line break in the style definition. - However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one - text line. - To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length -\series bold - -\backslash -headheight -\series default - or -\series bold - -\backslash -footheight -\series default - in this scheme in your document preamble: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -headheight}{height} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Where height is a size in standard units. - If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define - your header/footer and preview your document as PDF. - Then open the LaTeX logfile via the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -La -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -TeX Log -\family default - and look via the button -\family sans -Next -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Warning -\family default - if you find a warning of the package -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least - for your header/footer. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -This example -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers. - Don't use it for your document as it is just an example. - This example consists of the following definition: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Left -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Header -\series bold - -\backslash -rightmark -\series default -, empty optional argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Center -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Header empty, empty optional argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Header empty, -\series bold - -\backslash -leftmark -\series default - in the optional argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Left -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Footer empty, -\series bold - -\backslash -thepage -\series default - in the optional argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Center -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Footer -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -LyX's user guide -\family default -\series default -\color inherit -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Magic code: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in the optional argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Right -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Footer -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\series default -, empty optional argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -headrulewidth set to 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats. - For more special things like e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -thumb-indexes, see the manual of the -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - package, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage clearpage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{headings} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -switches back to page style with the default headings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Previewing Snippets of your Document -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Instant preview -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Preview -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the - fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having - to break your train of thought with viewing the output. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Prerequisites -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package -\series bold -preview-latex -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (on some systems named simply -\series bold -preview -\series default -) installed. - If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue, - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system. - You obtain prettier results if you install the program -\family typewriter -pnmcrop -\family default - from the -\family typewriter -netpbm -\family default - package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are - automatically installed together with LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Enabling previews -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by - LaTeX, activate the option -\family sans -Display -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Graphics -\family default - in the -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences -\family default -dialog under -\family sans -Look -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Display -\family default -. - Then set -\family sans -Instant -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Preview -\family default - to -\family sans -On -\family default -. - The -\family sans -Preview -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Size -\family default - is the multiplication factor for the size. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish - editing an inset. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately - generated by activating the option -\family sans -Display -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Graphics -\family default -. - Reopening the documents will fix such problems. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Selected document parts -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview, - for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things - that are not yet supported by LyX. - To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preview -\family default -. - Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset. - The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset. - If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default - which is not yet supported by LyX. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default - is explained in section -\emph on -Rotated and Scaled Boxes -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated - boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding - text. - Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated - boxes into it. - Here is the result: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -This is a line -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Doublebox -position "c" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 0 -inner_pos "c" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1in" -special "width" -height "1in" -height_special "totalheight" -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -with rotated -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - framed text -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - and a formula. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Previewing works also for colors. - In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX - command -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default -: -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default - is explained in section -\emph on -Colored Boxes -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fboxrule 1mm -\backslash -fboxsep 1mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -This is text within a colored, framed box. -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described - above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and - that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required - by the TeX Code. - If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able - to view your document due to LaTeX errors. - So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the - preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the - whole document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaTeX source code -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it. - Use the menu -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -View -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Source -\family default - and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code. - The window shows the source of the whole paragraph where the cursor is - currently in. - You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this - selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code. - To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in - the source view window. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Advanced Find and Replace -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Advanced-Find-and" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Replace -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Find -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex, - format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents. - It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature. - The key-features are: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the - latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire - mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex - formulas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in - any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics -), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with - a section heading will only be found within section headings -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Search may be widened to a specific -\emph on -scope -\emph default -, i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited, - all the open files, or all the manuals available from the -\family sans -Help -\family default - menu -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text - capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Basic usage -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Find & Replace -\noun on - ( -\noun default -Advanced -\noun on -) -\family default -\noun default - (shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - -) or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - -. - This opens the -\family sans -Advanced Find and Replace -\family default - dialog. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Searching for text -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enter into the -\family sans -Find -\family default - LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking - on the -\family sans -Find Next -\family default - button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph" -\end_inset - - key). - The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized -, bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text. - Pressing repeatedly -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph" -\end_inset - - keeps searching forward while pressing -\family sans -Shift+Return -\family default - searches backwards. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Case sensitive -\family default - option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the - -\family sans -Find -\family default - editor. - The -\family sans -Whole words -\family default - option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Searching for mathematics -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mathematical formulas may be searched for by typing them the -\family sans -Find -\family default - editor, such as -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - - or also something more complex like -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - -. - When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when - it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas. - For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Style-aware search -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -It is also possible to search for text with specific styles. - This is done by switching to the -\family sans -Settings -\family default - tab of the dialog and unchecking the -\family sans -Ignore format -\family default - option. - This way, entering in the -\family sans -Find -\family default - editor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -a plain word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring - in emphasized or boldface. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective - instances with same face only, and within the same text style only. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -a plain word in a section heading, and searching for it, finds occurrences - of if only within section headings. - Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition - to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same - style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also - displayed formulas (and not inline formulas). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Replace -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The document segments entered in the -\family sans -Find -\family default - editor can be replaced with the text segments entered in the -\family sans -Replace -\family default -\noun on - -\noun default -editor. - In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the -\family sans -Replace -\family default - button or alternatively -\noun on - -\noun default -press -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph" -\end_inset - - or -\family sans -Shift+Return -\family default - while the cursor is in the -\family sans -Replace -\family default -\noun on - -\noun default -editor. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can replace with full-featured formatted LyX segments. - Typical scenarios in which to use this capability may be (just to mention - a few): -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the - same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -func() -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - with its typewriter version -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -func() -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing - occurrences of -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $R$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - with -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (you may want to enable the -\family sans -Whole words -\family default - and -\family sans -Case sensitive -\family default - options and disable the -\family sans -Ignore format -\family default - option in the -\family sans -Settings -\family default - tab, in order to avoid replacing all -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -R -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of -\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ -\end_inset - - with -\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$ -\end_inset - -, or occurrences of -\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ -\end_inset - - with -\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Advanced usage -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry: - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - You can search for regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into - the -\family sans -Find -\family default - editor. - This is done via the menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Insert Regular Expression -\family default - while the cursor is in the -\family sans -Find -\family default - editor. - Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular - expression matching rules -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX - segment, i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed - to match expressions. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the - same text in the document. - It is allowed to cut and paste regexp-mode insets as usual. - Examples of using such a feature may be: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering - in the -\family sans -Find -\family default - editor the fraction -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - - (where the -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all - fractions with the given denominator. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking - the -\family sans -Ignore format -\family default - option from the -\family sans -Settings -\family default - tab, entering a -\series bold - -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - -\series default - regular expression and adding for it an emphasized or bold face, finds - all emphasized and bold face text, respectively. - Also, inserting a -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading, - you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual: - Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces -\begin_inset Formula $()$ -\end_inset - -, and referring back to them through -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ -\end_inset - -, etc.. - For example, try searching for the regexp -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -[[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]] -\backslash -1[[:space:]] -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -in order to find word repetitions, if there are any. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -\color none -Note: -\series default - Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when - occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced - sub-expressions is absolute. - I. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - - always refers to the first occurrence of -\begin_inset Formula $()$ -\end_inset - - in all entered regexps. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Spell Checking -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Spellchecking" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spell checking -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX has a built-in spell checker. - The menu -\family sans - Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Spellchecker -\family default -, the key -\family sans -F7 -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show spellchecker" -\end_inset - - starts the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the - beginning of the currently selected text. - A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing - you to edit and replace it in a second line. - Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text - scrolled so that it is visible. - In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio -n, if any could be found. - Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the -\family sans -Replacement -\family default - field, double-click directly invokes the replacement. - Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language - that is set in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog. - You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing - a different one at the top of the dialog. - LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages. - This works if you have marked the different languages appropriately and - have the spell checker dictionaries installed. - LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -There are 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files for each language. - To install a dictionary, copy the 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files into LyX's installation subfolder -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -dicts -\family default - and restart LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Further Settings -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In LyX's preferences dialog under -\family sans -Language -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Setting\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Spellchecker -\family default - you can set the following things: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Spellchecker -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking. - Depending on your platform, -\family typewriter -aspell -\family default -, -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default - or -\family typewriter -enchant -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends. - Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - are available. - On Windows only -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default - is available. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Alternative -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language - for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Escape -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker - should escape, e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -German umlauts. - This should normally not be needed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Accept -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -compound -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words - like -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -passthrough -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Spellcheck -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -continuously Check the spelling of your document as you type it. - Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line. - By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker - appear in the context menu. - Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested - word. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Spellcheck -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -notes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document contents is checked - as well. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Thesaurus -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Thesaurus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Thesaurus" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus. - It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox - (namely the -\family typewriter -MyThes -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - thesaurus library, which is included in LyX). - Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which - are available for many languages. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for - the use with LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Setting up the thesaurus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family typewriter -MyThes -\family default -\emph on -/ -\emph default -OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix - -\emph on -*.dat -\emph default - containing the data and an index file with the suffix -\emph on -*.idx -\emph default -. - The standardized file names include the language code for the given language - (e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -en_US -\family default - for US English). - For instance, the US English files are named: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_en_EN_v2.idx -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_en_EN_v2.dat -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed on a Linux - system, these files should be already on your system. - On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be - installed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -To install a dictionary, copy the 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files into LyX's installation subfolder -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -thes -\family default - and restart LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Using the thesaurus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To start the thesaurus, use the menu -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Thesaurus -\family default - or the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "thesaurus-entry" -\end_inset - - while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is - selected. - A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as - a replacement. - The proposals are grouped into categories. - Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not - only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as - -\emph on -organism -\emph default - for -\emph on -plant -\emph default -), related terms (such as -\emph on -political -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -theory -\emph default - for -\emph on -anarchistic -\emph default -), compounds (such as -\emph on -tree -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -diagram -\emph default -, if you look for -\emph on -tree -\emph default -) and opposites (antonyms) (such as -\emph on -girl -\emph default - for -\emph on -boy -\emph default -). - Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but - you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look - up directly there. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in - the dictionary, such as the above -\emph on -tree diagram -\emph default -), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person - singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs). - For example looking up the word form -\change_deleted 2090807402 1338765333 -s -\emph on -reports -\emph default - or -\change_unchanged - -\emph on -reporting -\emph default - yields no results, while results are shown for the word form -\emph on -report -\emph default -. - -\change_inserted 2090807402 1338765282 -The thesuarus is able to resolve inflected forms (so if you enter -\emph on -reports -\emph default -, it will resolve it to the form -\emph on -report -\emph default - which is in the dictionary). - However, this may not always work. - So if you do not get any results for inflected forms, try the lemma form. - -\change_unchanged - Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant parts of such word (e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\emph on -report -\emph default - in -\emph on -report -\emph default -s), then you get proposals without adjusting the query in the dialog, and - also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted - part will be replaced, thus the ending remains). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Change Tracking -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Change Tracking -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Change Tracking -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Change-Tracking" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be - able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document. - You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not. - This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Track -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Changes -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors: - -\bar under -\color blue -underlined text -\bar default -\color inherit - is an addition, -\strikeout on -\color blue -canceled text -\strikeout default -\color inherit - is a deletion. - The color depends on the author that made the change. - You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under -\family sans -Look -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -feel -\family default -, -\family sans -Colors -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! Change tracking -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when - the cursor is in changed text. - The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX: -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toolbar ! Review -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png - scale 90 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The review toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following - buttons: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-track" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Track -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Changes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-output" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Show -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Changes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -in -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Output -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jumps to the next change -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Accept -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Change -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reject -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Change -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Merge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Changes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Accept -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -All -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Changes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reject -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -All -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Changes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LyX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Note -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Next -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Note -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight - the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons. - When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about - the next change after the current cursor position. - So you don't need to highlight a certain change. - Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and - step to the next change. - This way you can jump through all the changes in the document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important - to describe a change. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To show the made changes in the output you need the LaTeX package -\series bold -dvipost -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! dvipost -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installed. - You will find it in the TeX Catalogue, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Comparison of Documents -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Comparison of documents -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can compare two different LyX files via the menu -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Compare -\family default -. - The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing - the differences. - In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should - take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option - -\family sans -Copy -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -from -\family default -. - The option -\family sans -Enable -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -change -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tracking -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -features -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -in -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -the -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -output -\family default - enables the change tracking option -\family sans -Show -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Changes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -in -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Output -\family default - to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -International Support -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -International support -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want. - For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set - up LyX to use them: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Special-Character" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Language Options -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Language ! Options -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Language -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Language -\family default - dialog lets you set -\family roman -the language, the quote style and character encoding -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Under -\family sans -Encoding -\family default - you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export. - The option -\family sans -Language -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Default -\family default - is the preferred choice and works well in most cases. - For details about the different encoding options see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Language-encodings" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Keyboard mapping configuration -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Keyboard-mapping" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you have for example a U. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you - can use an alternate keymap. - For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to - use an Italian keymap. - The -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Keyboard/Mouse -\family default - dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Keyboard-Map" - -\end_inset - -. - You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select - which one you want to use. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely - different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance). - You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German. - In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing - one to support the characters you want. - This and many other customizations are explained in the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -\start_of_appendix -The User Interface -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:The-User-Interface" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality. - It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special - topic inside the user's guide. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -The File Menu -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! File -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Under the -\family sans -File -\family default - menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -New -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Creates a new document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -New from Template -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu entry prompts you for a template to use. - Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for - the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Open -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Opens a document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Open Recent -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files. - Click there on a file to open it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Close -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Closes the current document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Close All -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Closes all opened documents. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Save -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Saves the actual document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Save As -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Save All -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Saves all opened documents. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Revert to saved -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Reloads the actual document from disk. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Version Control -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when - one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes. - It is described in the section -\emph on -Version Control in LyX -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Additional Features -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Import -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files, - NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files - (CSV). - The files will be imported as a new LyX-document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -When using the menu entry -\family sans -Plain -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text -\family default -, line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu - entry -\family sans -Plain -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text, Join -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Lines -\family default -, consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph. - A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Export -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Export" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can export your document to various file formats. - The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file. - The menu entries are not the same on all installations. - They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail - in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Output-file-formats" - -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -CJK -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX format of the special LyX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated into LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup - language -\family typewriter -DocBook -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DocBook -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup - language -\family typewriter -DocBook -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format. - This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in - files paths or file names in your document. - LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to -\family sans -DVI -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces - in files paths or file names -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) DVI-format using the program -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts; -\series bold - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Graphviz -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Dot text file with code in the programming language -\family typewriter -Dot -\family default - which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program -\family typewriter -Graphviz -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not - work in all cases) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -HTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(MS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to -\family sans -MS Word -\family default -; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and - not in the format -\family sans -MathML -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -( -\family default -LuaT -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -eX -\family sans -) -\family default -text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document - will be converted to a format that is readable by the -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default - program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(plain) -\family default - text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the - document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable - by the -\family typewriter -latex -\family default - program -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -( -\family default -XeT -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -eX -\family sans -) -\family default -text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LilyPond -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -book -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(La -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the - music notation software -\family typewriter -LilyPond -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -yX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Archive -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon - your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary - to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -yX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x ( -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -z -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -y -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - represent the version number) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language -\family typewriter - NoWeb -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with -\family sans -LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword -\family default -, etc. - (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in - all cases) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) -\family default - PDF-format using the program -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default -, produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - PDF-format using the program -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -, produces PDF-files directly -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - PDF-format using the program -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -, produces PDF-files directly -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) -\family default - PDF-format using the program -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default -, produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - PDF-format using the program -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -, produces PDF-files directly -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Plain -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\family default - text format -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Plain -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii) -\family default - text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format - and then exported as text using the program -\family sans -ps2ascii -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Postscript -\family default - PostScript format using the program -\family typewriter -dvips -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical - programming language -\family typewriter -R -\family default -. - Using the -\family typewriter -R -\family default --function -\family typewriter -Sweave -\family default - it is possible to use -\family typewriter -R -\family default --commands in LaTeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If one of the menu entries -\family sans -DVI -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - or -\family sans -Postscript -\family default - is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation. - After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration of LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Print -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript - format or send it to a printer. - The printer will also use the document in PostScript format. - The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the - program -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -. - For more information have a look at section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Printing-the-File" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fax -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on - Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH - prefix, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Paths" - -\end_inset - -). - With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like -\family typewriter -hylapex -\family default - or -\family typewriter -kdeprintfax -\family default -. - The default format of the sent file is PostScript. - The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Converters" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -New and Close Window -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Opens or closes a new instance of LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Exit -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -The Edit Menu -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Edit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Undo and Redo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Select Whole Inset -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Selects the content of the inset where the cursor is currently in. - If the cursor is outside of an inset, the whole document will be selected. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Select All -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Selects the whole document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Find & Replace (Quick) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Find & Replace (Advanced) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Move Paragraph Up/Down -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph - up or down. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Text Style -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Paragraph Settings -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width. - These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently - in. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you - have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog under -\family sans -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Table Settings and Math -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or - a formula. - Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas. - The properties of tables are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tables" - -\end_inset - -, the properties of formulas in chapter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Increase / Decrease List Depth -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that - can be nested. - They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nesting" - -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Numbering-depth" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -The View Menu -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! View -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -At the bottom of the -\family sans -View -\family default - menu the opened documents are listed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Open/Close all Insets -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Opens/closes all insets in your document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Unfold/Fold Math Macros -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Unfolds/folds the current math macro. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Math macros are described in the -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -View Source -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described - in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -View Messages -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Opens a window showing console messages. - This is useful for debugging LyX (i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background - while LaTeX is processing the document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -View -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as - default output format either in the preferences (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:File-Formats" - -\end_inset - -) or in the document settings (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - -) and opens it in an appropriate viewer. - The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:File-Formats" - -\end_inset - -. - The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured. - The default output format is -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -View (Other Formats) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With this submenu you can view your document in alternative output formats. - The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the - actual document with an external program. - The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on - the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured. - All possible formats are listed in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Export" - -\end_inset - -. - You should at least see the menu entry -\family sans -DVI -\family default -. - If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation. - After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration of LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Invoking a menu will start a viewer program. - The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:File-Formats" - -\end_inset - -. - The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Update -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in - the default output format) without opening a new viewer window. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Update (Other Formats) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With this submenu you can update the view of alternative output formats - of your document without opening a new viewer window. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -View Master Document -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document, - which is then its -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -master -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (see section -\emph on -Child Documents -\emph default - in the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual for more information on this topic). - This item allows you to view the master document from within its child. - That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a - book, -\family sans -View Master -\family default - generates the output of the whole book, while -\family sans -View -\family default - will just output the chapter alone. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The format used by this function is the default output format as specified - in the preferences (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:File-Formats" - -\end_inset - -) or in the document settings (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Update Master Document -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document, - which is then its -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -master -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (see section -\emph on -Child Documents -\emph default - in the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual for more information on this topic). - This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within - its child without the need to switch to the master document itself. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The format used by this function is the default output format as specified - in the preferences (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:File-Formats" - -\end_inset - -) or in the document settings (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Split View -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally. - This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or - to view the same document, but at different positions. - You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3 - or more documents at the same time. - To return to an unsplit view, use the menu -\family sans -Close Current View -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Close Current View -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Closes a split view. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fullscreen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars - so that you will see nothing but your text. - It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen. - To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click - and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Toolbars -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Toolbars" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toolbar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars. - All toolbars and the -\family sans -Command -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Buffer -\family default - can be turned on and off. - The -\emph on -on -\emph default - state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark. - The -\family sans -Review -\family default -, -\family sans -Table -\family default -, -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Panels -\family default -, -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Macros -\family default - and -\family sans -Math -\family default - toolbars can be additionally set to the state -\emph on -automatic -\emph default - that is denoted in the menu with the suffix -\family sans -(auto) -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In the -\emph on -on -\emph default - state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the -\emph on -automatic -\emph default - state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment - or when a certain feature is enabled. - That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking - is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor - is inside a formula or table, respectively. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Toolbars" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -The Insert Menu -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Insert -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Math -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas" - -\end_inset - - and the -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Special Character -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Special-Character" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can insert the following characters: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system. - Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available - characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Not all characters will be visible in the -\family sans -Symbols -\family default - dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences - dialog (see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Screen-Fonts" - -\end_inset - -) can display every character. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -End -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -of -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Abbreviations" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ordinary -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog under -\family sans -Language -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Single -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Quote Inserts -\change_deleted -712698321 1345809482 -this -\change_inserted -712698321 1345809484 -a single -\change_unchanged - quote -\change_deleted -712698321 1345809487 -: -\begin_inset Quotes ers -\end_inset - - -\change_inserted -712698321 1345809513 - in the quotation marks style selected in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog under -\family sans -Language -\family default -. -\change_unchanged - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Protected -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash- - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Breakable -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Menu -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Phonetic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Symbols -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Phonetic symbols -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Language ! Phonetic symbols -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\change_deleted -712698321 1345808954 -Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset -\change_inserted -712698321 1345808969 -Inserts a box where -\change_deleted -712698321 1345809001 -. - Here -\change_unchanged - you can insert -\change_deleted -712698321 1345809047 -commands to create IPA phonetic -\change_unchanged -symbols -\change_inserted -712698321 1345809189 - from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which - provides a large set of these symbols -\change_unchanged -. - -\change_deleted -712698321 1345809068 -For -\change_inserted -712698321 1345809068 -To use -\change_unchanged - this feature -\change_inserted -712698321 1345809224 -with traditional LaTeX -\change_unchanged -you must have the LaTeX-package -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installed. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\change_deleted -712698321 1345809282 -For m -\change_inserted -712698321 1345809283 -M -\change_unchanged -ore information about this feature -\change_deleted -712698321 1345809286 -we refer you to the documentation of -\series bold -tipa, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "tipa" - -\end_inset - - -\series default - and this Wiki-page: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\change_inserted -712698321 1345809397 -can be found in the Linguistics manual ( -\family sans -Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Specific Manuals\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Linguistics Manual -\family default -). -\change_unchanged - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formatting -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can insert the following format constructs: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Superscript Inserts a superscript: test -\begin_inset script superscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -a, b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Subscript Inserts a subscript: test -\begin_inset script subscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3x -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Protected -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Protected-Space" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Inter-word -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Inter-word-Space" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Thin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Thin-Space" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Horizontal -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space Inserts horizontal space, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Horizontal-Space" - -\end_inset - - for a description. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Horizontal -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines" - -\end_inset - - for a description. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Vertical -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Space Inserts vertical space, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Vertical-Space" - -\end_inset - - for a description. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Phantom-Space" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hyphenation -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Hyphenation" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ligature -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Break Inserts a ligature break, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ligatures" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ragged -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Line -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Break Inserts a forced line break, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Justified -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken - text line to the page border, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -New -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken - text page to the page border, described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Clear -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Clear -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Double -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -List / TOC -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry. - The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described - in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:toc" - -\end_inset - -. - The index list is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Index" - -\end_inset - -, the nomenclature in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nomenclature" - -\end_inset - - and the BibTeX bibliography in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bibliography-databases" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Float -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To insert floats, described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Floats" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Note -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To insert notes, described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Notes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Branch -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts branch insets as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Branches" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Custom Insets -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts document class-specific insets. - Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain - document class. - An example is the document class -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -article (Elsevier) -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - with three custom insets. - The section -\emph on -Flex insets and InsetLayout -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual explains how custom insets are defined. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -File -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -External Material -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files - in your document. - How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter -\emph on -External Stuff -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Box -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Boxes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a minipage box that is described section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Minipages" - -\end_inset - -. - All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter -\emph on -Boxes -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Citation -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a citation as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliography" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cross-Reference -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a cross-reference as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Cross-References" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Label -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a label as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Cross-References" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Caption -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Captions -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Longtables ! Caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a caption in a float or longtable. - Floats are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Floats" - -\end_inset - -, captions in longtables are described in the section -\emph on -Longtable Captions -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Index Entry -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts an index entry as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Index" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenclature Entry -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nomenclature" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Table -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a table. - Tables are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tables" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Graphics -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a graphic. - Graphics are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Graphics" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URL -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a URL as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:URLs" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hyperlinks -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a hyperlink as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Hyperlinks" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Footnote -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a footnote, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Footnotes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Marginal Note -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a marginal note, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Marginal-Notes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Short Title -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a short title, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Short-Titles" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -TeX Code -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a TeX Code box, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes" - -\end_inset - - for a description. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Program Listing -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Program listings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a program listings box. - Program listings are explained in the chapter -\emph on -Program Code Listings -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Date -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts the actual date. - The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for - LyX's menus. - LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared - in the section -\emph on -External Material -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Preview -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserts a preview inset, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of" - -\end_inset - - for a description. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -The Navigate Menu -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Navigate -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -of the current document. - This allows you to navigate easily through your document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Bookmarks -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks. - This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have - to jump e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -between section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 and 6.3. - To create bookmarks for this example, go to section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 and use the submenu -\family sans -Save -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Bookmark -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\family default -. - Then go to section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -6.3 and use -\family sans -Save -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Bookmark -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -2. - Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by - the key bindings -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "bookmark-goto 1" -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "bookmark-goto 2" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents. - The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Next Note, Change, Cross-reference -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current - cursor position. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Go to Label -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference. - Sets the cursor before the referenced label. - (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use - -\family sans -Go -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -to -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Label) -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Forward Search -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part - in the output, see section -\emph on -Forward -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -search -\emph default - in the -\emph on -Additional -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Features -\emph default - manual for a detailed description. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -The Document Menu -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Change Tracking -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Change Tracking is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Change-Tracking" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX Log -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be - enabled. - It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background. - -\emph on -Experts -\emph default - will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Outline -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Navigating" - -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Table-of-Contents" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Start Appendix Here -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor - position as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Appendices" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Compressed -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un/compresses the current document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Settings -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The document settings are described in appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:The-Document-Settings" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -The Tools Menu -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Tools -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Spellchecker -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Spell checking is explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Spellchecking" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Thesaurus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The thesaurus is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Thesaurus" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Statistics -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Word count -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Character count -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted - document part. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -TeX Information -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -TeX Information -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst -em. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Reconfigure -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Reconfigure|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Reconfiguration of LyX -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration of LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages - and programs it needs; see also section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Preferences -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -The Help Menu -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Help -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's - menus. - If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be - listed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The menu -\family sans -LaTeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Configuration -\family default - shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes - found by LyX (see also section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Toolbars -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Toolbars" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Toolbars" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -It is also possible to define custom toolbars. - This is described in the -\emph on -Additional Features -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Standard Toolbar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toolbar ! Standard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following - buttons: -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -LTleft}{0pt} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -This is necessary to left align the following longtables. - See the -\emph on -Embedded Objects -\emph default - manual for more information. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png - clip - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pull-down box for the environments -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace -10mm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align left -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-new" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -New -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "file-open" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Open -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-write" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Save -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Print -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show spellchecker" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Spellchecker -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "undo" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Undo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "redo" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Redo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "cut" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cut -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "copy" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Copy -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "paste" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show findreplace" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Find -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Replace -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -(Quick) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Find -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Replace -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -(Advanced) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Navigate Back -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Emphasize text, function of the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Customized -\family default - dialog -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Set text to noun style, function of the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Customized -\family default - dialog -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "textstyle-apply" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Format text using the current settings in the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Customized -\family default - dialog -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-mode" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Inline -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formula -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Graphics -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "tabular-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Table -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle toc" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toggle outline window on/off, -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Outline -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "toolbar-toggle math" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toggle math toolbar on/off -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "toolbar-toggle table" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toggle table toolbar on/off -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Extra Toolbar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toolbar ! Extra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following - buttons: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Default -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Enumerate" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Numbered list -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Itemize" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Itemized list -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout List" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -List -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Description" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Description list -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Increase -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -List -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Depth -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Decrease -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -List -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Depth -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert figure" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Figure -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert table" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Table -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Label -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cross-Reference -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Citation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "index-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Index -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Entry -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "nomencl-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nomenclature -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Entry -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "footnote-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Footnote -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "marginalnote-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marginal -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Note -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Note -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "box-insert Frameless" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Box -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "href-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Hyperlink -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -T -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Code -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Macro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset include" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Child -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "thesaurus-entry" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Thesaurus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -View/Update Toolbar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toolbar ! View / Update -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following - buttons: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -View -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Update -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Master -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Update -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Master -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Synchronize with Output -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -View (Other Formats) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../images/update-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -View\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Update (Other Formats) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -* These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default - icon set. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Other Toolbars -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The change tracking toolbar is explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Change-Tracking" - -\end_inset - -, the table toolbar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toolbar ! Table -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - in the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual and the math macro toolbar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toolbar ! Macro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - in the -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -The Document Settings -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:The-Document-Settings" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the - whole document and is called with the menu -\family sans - Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default -. - You can save your document settings as default with the -\family sans - Save as Document Defaults -\family default - button in the dialog. - This will create a template named -\family typewriter -defaults.lyx -\family default - which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without - using a template. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The button -\family sans -Use Class Defaults -\family default - resets the document settings to the default of the document class. - This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Document Class -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a - master document. - Document classes are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Document-Classes" - -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With the button -\family sans -Local -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default - you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's -\emph on -layouts -\emph default - folder and thus not recognized by LyX as layout for a document class. - For more about layout-files, see the chapter -\emph on -Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - Handbook. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Some classes use special class options by default. - If this is the case, they are listed in the field -\family sans -Predefined -\family default - and you can decide to use them or not. - If you do not exactly know what the default class options are for, it is - recommended to leave them untouched. - The -\family sans -Graphics driver -\family default - is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages. - If using -\family sans -Default -\family default -, the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used. - It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are - doing. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -When you want to use one of the following drivers -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section - -\emph on -Driver support -\emph default - in -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Specifying a master document is necessary if the current document is a child - or subdocument. - The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child - document is opened without its master. - This way child documents are always compilable. - More about master and child documents is explained in the section -\emph on -Child Documents -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package - -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - instead of -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - for cross-references, see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Cross-References" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Child Documents -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents. - Please refer to the section -\emph on -Child -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Documents -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual for details. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Modules -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Modules are explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Modules" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Local Layout -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -See section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Local-Layout" - -\end_inset - - for a description. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Fonts -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The document font settings are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Text Layout -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical - skips. - The line spacing and the number of text columns can also be specified here. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen. - That would be impractical, often unreadable and is not part of the WYSIWYM - concept. - However, it will be as you specified it in the output. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Page Layout -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A description of this menu is given in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation" - -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Document-Layout" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Page Margins -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Margins" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Language -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Language-encodings" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Language ! Encoding -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The document language and quote styles are set here. - The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the - LyX file is always encoded in utf8). - All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will - be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not - known for a particular character). -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The known commands are defined in a text file ( -\emph on -unicodesymbols -\emph default -). - You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the - -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual for details. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you use the option -\family sans -Language Default -\family default -, LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text. - If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more - than one encoding in the LaTeX file. - If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use - exactly one encoding. - Checking this option is the preferred setting. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need - lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively. - If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode), - choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below. - Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete, - so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine - with -\family sans -Language Default -\family default - (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with - a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used, - because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8). - The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative - engines to standard LaTeX. - Both engines support Unicode natively. - LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - and -\family sans -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTeX) -\family default -, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Output-file-formats" - -\end_inset - -). - So if you are using many special or accented characters and -\family sans -Language Default -\family default - fails, you might try out one of these new engines. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Language -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -package -\family default - determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation - of strings like -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Part -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The possible settings are: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Default uses the language package that is selected in -\family sans - Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Language Settings -\family default - (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Prefs-Language" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export - format you will use. - In many cases this will be -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - If the newer package -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts), - this package will be used instead of -\series bold -babel -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Always -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Babel uses -\series bold -babel -\series default - even if -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - would be more appropriate. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice. - For example if you want to use a language-specific package like -\series bold -ngerman -\series default - (for German texts), type in -\series bold - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\backslash -usepackage{ngerman} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -None will not use a language package. - This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here is a list with the important encodings: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Language -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Default -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(no -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -inputenc) Same as -\family sans -Language Default -\family default -, but the LaTeX-package -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - is not used. - When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually - in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign - languages in TeX code. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII). - LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result - in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Arabic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Arabic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Armenian -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ArmSCII8) for Armenian -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Baltic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same - as the ISO-8859-13 encoding -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Baltic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4 - encoding -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Baltic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the - ISO-8859-13 encoding -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Central -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1250) MS Windows code page for ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2 (latin2) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Central -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish, - Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chinese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(simplified) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001 - this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 - is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chinese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(simplified) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 - except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially - replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX - you should try to use the encoding Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chinese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(traditional) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillic -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -154) Cyrillic for Kazakh -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Greek -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-7) for Greek -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hebrew -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hebrew -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-8) for Hebrew -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, when using this, set the document language to -\family sans -Japanese (CJK) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package -\series bold -CJK -\series default -, when using this, set the document language to -\family sans -Japanese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(non-CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package -\series bold -japanese -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, when using this, set the document language to -\family sans -Japanese -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(non-CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package -\series bold -japanese -\series default -, when using this, set the document language to -\family sans -Japanese -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(non-CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package -\series bold -japanese -\series default -, when using this, set the document language to -\family sans -Japanese -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Korean -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-KR) for Korean -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Southern -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -South-Eastern -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German, - Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed - to cover many languages and characters with diacritics -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Thai -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(TIS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -620-0) for Thai -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Turkish -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the - Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTeX) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with -\family sans -XeTeX -\family default - and -\family sans -LuaTeX -\family default -, which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -inputenc -\series default -. - LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX - or LuaTeX. - Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ucs-extended) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package -\series bold -ucs -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! ucs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) - is supported. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Western -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1252) MS Windows code page for ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1 (latin1) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Western -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch, - English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish, - Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15 - encoding instead -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Western -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency - sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the - current document. - See sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Prefs-Language" - -\end_inset - - for more information on the language package. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Colors -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! main text -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! background -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and - for Greyed -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -out notes (default: light grey). - The button -\family sans -Reset -\family default - sets the color back to the default. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white) - and for Shaded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -boxes (default: red). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output. - (This Greyed -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -out note appears blue in the output.) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option -\family sans -Color -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -links -\family default - in the document settings under -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -properties -\family default -, you probably also need to change the link font color by using -\family sans -Additional -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -options -\family default - in the -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -properties -\family default -. - For example the option -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -linkcolor=black -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -sets the link text color to black. - For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every - page in your document if you use these commands as TeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Code behind a forced page break: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -For the page color: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -pagecolor{color name} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -For the text color: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -color{color name} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The color name can hereby be one of these: -\series bold -black -\series default -, -\series bold -blue -\series default -, -\series bold -cyan -\series default -, -\series bold -green -\series default -, -\series bold -magenta -\series default -, -\series bold -red -\series default -, -\series bold -white -\series default -, -\series bold -yellow -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the - following names: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -For the page background color: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -page_backgroundcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -For the main text color: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -document_fontcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -For the Shaded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -box background color: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -shadecolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -For the Greyed -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -out note text color: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -note_fontcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To see how to define and use custom colors, see section -\emph on -Colored -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Cells -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Numbering & TOC -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can adjust the numbering depth of section headings and the section - depth in the table of contents as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Numbering-depth" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Bibliography -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages -\series bold -natbib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! natbib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - or -\series bold -jurabib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! jurabib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package -\series bold -bibtopic -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being - generated. - For a further description see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliography" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Indexes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated - and you can define additional indexes. - Please refer to section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Index" - -\end_inset - - for details. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -PDF Properties -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The PDF properties are explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:PDF-Properties" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Math Options -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages -\series bold -amsmath -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! amsmath -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\series bold -esint -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! esint -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\series bold -mathdots -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! mathdots -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und -\series bold -mhchem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! mhchem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - or to use them automatically when they are needed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas, - ensure that you have enabled -\family sans -AMS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -math -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -esint is used for special integral characters, see section -\emph on -Big -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Operators -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section -\emph on -Ellipses -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section -\emph on -Chemical Symbols and Equations -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Float Placement -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The float placement options are described in section -\emph on -Float -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Placement -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Listings -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The listings settings are explained in chapter -\emph on -Program Code Listings -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Embedded -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objects -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Bullets -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels. - The itemize environment is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Itemize" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Branches -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Branches are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Branches" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Output -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can define some output specifics for the current document: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Default -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Output -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Format: The format that is used when you hit -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -View -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Update -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -View Master Document -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Update Master Document -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in the -\family sans -View -\family default - menu or the toolbar. - The default is set in -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator -File Formats -\family default -, see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:File-Formats" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Synchronize -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -with -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Output settings for the menu -\family sans -Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Forward -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -search -\family default -. - For a detailed description see section -\emph on -Reverse DVI/PDF search -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Additional -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Features -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -XHTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Output -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Options settings for the export format -\family sans -LyXHTML -\family default -. - -\family sans -Strict XHTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.1 -\family default - will assure that the output follows exactly version -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.1 of the XHTML standard. - The different -\family sans -Math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -output -\family default - settings are described in detail in section -\emph on -Math Output in XHTML -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Additional -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Features -\emph default - manual. - The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX Preamble -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages - or to define LaTeX-commands. - The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts. - You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are - doing. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -The -\family sans -Preferences -\family default - Dialog -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Preferences -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The preferences dialog is called with the menu -\family sans -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences -\family default -. - It has the following submenus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Look and Feel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -User Interface -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -User Interface File -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Customization ! of toolbars -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Customization ! of menus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user - interface (ui) file. - A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed. - The file -\emph on -default.ui -\emph default - loads three files: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdmenus.inc -\shape italic - -\emph on -specifies the menu entries for the standard menus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdcontext.inc -\shape italic -\emph on -specifies -\shape default -\emph default - the menu entries in popup context menus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdtoolbars.inc -\shape italic - -\emph on -specifies the toolbar buttons -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files - and edit the entries. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the -\family sans -Menubar -\family default -, -\family sans -Menu -\family default - and -\family sans -Toolbar -\family default - entries must be finished with an explicit -\family sans -End -\family default -. - They may contain -\family sans -Submenu -\family default -, -\family sans -Item -\family default -, -\family sans -OptItem -\family default -, -\family sans -Separator -\family default -, -\family sans -Icon, -\family default - and in the case of the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -file_lastfiles -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - menu a -\family sans -Lastfiles -\family default - entry. - The syntax for the entries is: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Item -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -menu -\series default -or -\series bold - button name -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -LyX-function -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - -All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu -\family sans -Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Functions -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For example, assuming you use the menu -\family sans -Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bookmarks -\family default - quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the - line -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Item -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Save Bookmark 6 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -bookmark-save 6 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - -to the -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -navigate_bookmarks -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - menu in -\emph on -stdmenus.inc -\emph default - to have the sixth bookmark. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Icon -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Set -\family default - allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons. - The currently available icon sets are compared in -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "this image" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Automatic help -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The option -\family sans -Enable tool tips in main work area -\family default - enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries - or footnotes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Session -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With the option -\family sans -Restore window layouts and geometries -\family default - LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used - in the last LyX session. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The option -\family sans -Restore cursor positions -\family default - sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of - the last session. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The option -\family sans -Load opened files from last session -\family default - opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The button -\family sans -Clear all session information -\family default - deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names - of last opened documents, etc.). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Documents -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Backup documents" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Backup ! Documents -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Backup original documents when saving -\family default - creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when - it was saved the last time. - It is stored in the -\family sans -Backup -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directory -\family default - (see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Paths" - -\end_inset - -) or in the same folder as your document if no -\family sans -Backup -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directory -\family default - is specified. - The backup file has the file extension -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -.lyx~ -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With the option -\family sans -Backup documents, every -\family default -, you can specify the time between backup saves. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Save documents compressed by default -\family default - always saves files in a compressed format. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Maximum last files -\family default - is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu - -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Open -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Recen -\bar under -t -\family default -\bar default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If the option -\family sans -Open documents in tabs -\family default - is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The option -\family sans -Single instance -\family default - is only active if a LyXServer pipe -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -See sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Paths" - -\end_inset - - for information about LyXServer pipes. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - is specified. - If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance - of LyX. - Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If the option -\family sans -Single close-tab button -\family default - is checked, there will only be one close button ( -\family sans - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../images/closetab.png - scale 75 - -\end_inset - - -\family default -) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs. - Otherwise every document tab has its own close button. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Screen Fonts -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Font ! Screen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Screen-Fonts" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - This section only deals with the fonts -\emph on -inside -\emph default - the LyX window. - The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and - set in the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fonts -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -By default, LyX uses -\family typewriter -Times -\family default - as its -\family sans -Roman -\family default - (serif) font, -\family typewriter -Arial -\family default - or -\family typewriter -Helvetica -\family default - (depends on the system) as its -\family sans -Sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Serif -\family default - font and -\family typewriter -Courier -\family default - as its -\family typewriter -Typewriter -\family default - font. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can change the font size with the -\family sans -Zoom -\family default - setting. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Font Sizes -\family default - are calculated as letter height in units of points. - 72.27 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -points have the size of 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -inch, see Appendix -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Units-available-in" - -\end_inset - -. - The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt were used. - The sizes are explained in detail in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Document-Font" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -With the option -\family sans -Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering -\family default - enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often. - This results in better performance, especially on slow systems. - On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen. - So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over - aesthetics. - Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -OS and Windows. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Colors -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! LyX screen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Color -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in - the list and selecting the -\family sans -Alter -\family default - button. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -By checking the option -\family sans -Use system colors -\family default - the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used. - The colors -\family sans -cursor, selection, table line, text, URL -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -label and URL -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\family default - are then not customizable and thus not listed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Display -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Display -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Instant Preview -\family default - enables previewing snippets of your document. - This feature is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Checking the option -\family sans -Mark -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -end -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -of -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paragraphs -\family default - displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Editing -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Editing -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Control -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Editing -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The option -\family sans -Cursor follows scrollbar -\family default - sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when - scrolling. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can adjust the width of the cursor. - If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative - to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Scroll below end of document -\family default - is self-explanatory. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing -\family sans -Ctrl+arrow key -\family default -. - With the option -\family sans - Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words -\family default - the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word. - Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The option -\family sans -Sort environments alphabetically -\family default - sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The option -\family sans -Group environments by their category -\family default - groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The -\family sans -Edit math macros -\family default - options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section -\emph on -Math Macros -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Math -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Fullscreen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode. - With the option -\family sans -Limit text width -\family default - you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode. - This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then - appears centered. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Shortcuts -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Key Bindings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Shortcuts -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Bind File -\family default - specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key. - Several binding files are available, among them: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -(x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs - -\family sans -Emacs -\family default - ( -\family sans -XEmacs -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mac.bind a set of bindings for -\family sans -Mac -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -OS -\family default - systems. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like - -\shape italic -broadway.bind -\shape default -, and binding files for special languages. - The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -pt -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - for Portuguese. - If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate - binding file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Some binding files, like -\shape italic -math.bind -\shape default -, only have a limited scope. - When looking at the end of the file -\shape italic -cua.bind -\shape default -, you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The field -\family sans -Show -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ke -\bar under -y -\bar default --bindings -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -containing -\family default - allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function - in the selected key binding file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Editing Shortcuts -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Key Bindings ! Editing -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use - the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts. - To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog - provides the field -\family sans -Show key-bindings containing -\family default -. - In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit. - Insert there for example as keyword -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -paste -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different - functions that contain -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -paste -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - in their name. - As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut. - All LyX-functions are also listed in the file -\family sans -LyX Functions -\family default - that you will find in the -\family sans -Help -\family default - menu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -For example, to add the shortcut -\family sans -Alt+Q -\family default - for the function -\family sans -textstyle-apply -\family default -, select the function and press the -\family sans -Modify -\family default - button. - A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it. - So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way. - You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX - Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the - different function names as a semicolon separated list. - LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document - part. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with - a text editor. - The syntax of the entries is: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -bind -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -key combination -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -LyX-function -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Keyboard/Mouse -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Keyboard-Map" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Keyboard Map -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Keyboard Map -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system. - For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps. - If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it - is a Romanian one, you can enable -\family sans -Use -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -keyboard -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -map -\family default - and select the keyboard map file named -\shape italic -romanian.kmap -\shape default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can specify a -\family sans -First -\family default - and a -\family sans -Second -\family default - keyboard map and, if you use the -\emph on -cua -\emph default - bindings, you can select the first and second with -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-primary" -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-secondary" -\end_inset - - respectively or toggle between them with -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-toggle" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all - systems. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also specify the mouse -\family sans -Wheel scrolling speed -\family default -. - The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones - slow it down. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If you -\family sans -Enable -\family default - -\family sans -Scroll -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -wheel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -zoom, -\family default - you can select a key for zooming. - When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Input Completion -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Input completion is described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Input-Completion" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Paths -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Paths" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paths -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Paths -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during - the installation. - But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Working -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directory This is LyX's working directory. - It is the default when you -\family sans -Open -\family default -, -\family sans -Save -\family default - or -\family sans -Save -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -As -\family default - files. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -New -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -from -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Template -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Example -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files This directory will be opened when you use the button -\family sans -Examples -\family default - in the -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Open -\family default - dialog. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - The -\family sans -Examples -\family default - button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Backup -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directory -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Backup ! Directory -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Backup copies will be saved to this directory. - If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Backup documents" - -\end_inset - -, the -\family sans -Working directory -\family default - will be used to save the backups. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Backup files have the ending -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -.lyx~ -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -XServer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe. - This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Example: -\series default - You add a BibTeX-database -\emph on -test.bib -\emph default - to your document. - You can edit this file with the program -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default -. - In -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under -\family sans -External -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -programs -\family default -. - If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in - -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - and click on the LyX-symbol. - The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position - in your LyX file. - Of course, -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - and LyX need to be running the same time. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -The pipe is also used for the -\family sans -S -\bar under -i -\bar default -ngle instance -\family default - feature, see sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Backup documents" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash - -\backslash -. -\backslash -pipe -\backslash -lyxpipe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Temporary -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Thesaurus -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located. - You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want - to use custom/alternative dictionaries. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hunspell -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program - -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - are located. - You only need to specify it if you are using -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative - dictionaries. - For LyX on Windows -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying - a directory. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PATH -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs. - When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see - where to find it on the system. - The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX - is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it. - On Unix -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external - programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -TEXINPUTS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files - which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the - document preamble. - This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by - a single dot '.'). - The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator - of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows). - If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be - scanned for the input files. - Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered - to be relative to the directory of your LyX file. - It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise - compilation may fail for some documents. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Identity -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can insert your -\family sans -Name -\family default - and -\family sans -E-mail -\family default - address. - These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described - in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Change-Tracking" - -\end_inset - -, to mark changes you make as yours. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Language Settings -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Language ! Settings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Language -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Language -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Prefs-Language" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -User -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -interface -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus. - You can find its actual translation status here: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Language -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language - issues. - Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation - as well as localization of dates and text strings such as -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Chapter -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - and -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Table -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The most widespread language package is -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX. - More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the - alternative language package -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines. - Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not - covered by -\series bold -babel -\series default -. - The available selections are described in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Language-encodings" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Command -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document - language, you can here specify the command to start the package. - An example is the start command -\family sans - -\backslash -begin{arabtext} -\family default - that is needed to write Arabic using the package -\series bold -ArabTeX -\series default -, see -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - -. - The default is the -\series bold -babel -\series default - command -\family sans - -\backslash -selectlanguage{$$lang} -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Command -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -end Counterpart to -\family sans -Command start -\family default -. - Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start - command toggles the package on and off. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Default -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Decimal -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point - alignment). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Set -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -languages -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will - be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be - used by all LaTeX-packages. - Otherwise they will only be used as options for the -\series bold -babel -\series default - package. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Auto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document - language. - When this option is not set, the -\family sans -Command -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -start -\family default - is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output. - This assures that the correct language is used when you use another -\family sans -Command -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -start -\family default - than the default. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Auto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -end Counterpart to -\family sans -Auto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -begin -\family default -. - When it is not set, the -\family sans -Command -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -end -\family default - is set to the end of the document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Mark -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -foreign -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document - language will be underlined in blue. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Enable -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -RTL -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL), - like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cursor -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys - move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically. - Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right - arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Spellchecker -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The spellchecker settings are explained in section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Spellchecking" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Outputs -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -General -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Output -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -line -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using - the menu -\family sans -File\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Plain -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\family default -. - Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Date -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -format -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Date Format -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Date format -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -For example the format -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -%d/%m/%y -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -prints the date as day/month/year. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Overwrite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Forward -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -search Commands that will be used for the menu -\family sans -Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Forward -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -search -\family default -. - For a detailed description see section -\emph on -Reverse DVI/PDF search -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Additional -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Features -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Printer -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Printer" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Printer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Printer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Default -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -printer Here you can specify the name of your -\family sans -Default printer -\family default -. - The name will be used when the -\family sans -Printer command -\family default - is executed. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Printer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -command is the command LyX -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -LaTeX uses for printing. - The default is -\family sans -dvips -\family default - on most systems. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Printer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Command -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Options Here you can specify printer options. - A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation - of the program that provides the -\family sans -Printer command -\family default - you are using. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Adapt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -output -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -to -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -printer This option works only for the -\family sans -Printer command -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -dvips -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - It activates a configuration file for dvips. - This is an option only for dvips experts. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-settings" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Use -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -font -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -encoding This is the default encoding of the document font. - -\family sans -T1 -\family default - is the default and covers western languages and symbols. - -\family sans -T2A -\family default -, -\family sans -T2B -\family default -, -\family sans -T2C -\family default -, -\family sans -LCY -\family default - and -\family sans -X2 -\family default - are used for Cyrillic. - Combinations of the encodings are possible, like -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -T1, T2B -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages - LyX sets up in the background. - So there is no need to change the default encoding. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Default -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paper -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -size This is the paper size that is used for new documents. - The -\family sans -Default -\family default - value depends on your LaTeX-system setup. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -viewer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paper -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -size -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -options They only have an effect when the program -\family sans -xdvi -\family default - is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors. - But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the - manuals of the applications. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Bibliography -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bibliography-databases" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Index -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Index-Program" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Nomenclature -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -CheckTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -command Command for the program -\family sans -CheckTeX -\family default - that is described in the section -\emph on -Checking TeX -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Additional Features -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are additionally the following options: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Use -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Windows-style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paths -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -in -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\backslash - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - is used instead of -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - to separate folders. - This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paths -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Settings ! Paths -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Reset -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -class -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -options -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -when -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -class -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -changes Removes all manually set -\family sans -Class options -\family default - in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Class -\family default - dialog when changing the document class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -File -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Handling -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -File handling -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Converters -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Converters" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Converters -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material - from one format to another. - You can modify converters or create new ones. - To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the -\family sans -Converter -\family default - and/or -\family sans -Extra -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -flag -\family default - field and press the -\family sans -Modify -\family default - button. - To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format - in the -\family sans -To -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -format -\family default - drop-down list, modify the -\family sans -Converter -\family default - field and press the -\family sans -Add -\family default - button. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -If the -\family sans -Converter File Cache -\family default - is -\family sans -Enabled -\family default -, conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field -\family sans -Maximum Age (in days -\family default -). - This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen - a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter - definition, is described in the section -\emph on -Converters -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -File Formats -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:File-Formats" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -File formats -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Copiers -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle. - You can modify the -\family sans -Editor -\family default - and -\family sans -Viewer -\family default - programs that should be used for certain formats. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -You can also define the -\family sans -Default output format -\family default - that is used when you use -\family sans -View, Update, View Master Document -\family default - or -\family sans -Update Master Document -\family default - in the -\family sans -View -\family default - menu or the toolbar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -More about formats and their options is described in the section -\emph on -Formats -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary - directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it - to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed. - This is done by specifying a -\family sans -Copier -\family default -. - More about this is described in the section -\emph on -Copiers -\emph default - of the -\emph on -Customization -\emph default - manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Units available in LyX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Units -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:Units-available-in" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Units" - -\end_inset - - explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption Standard - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Units" - -\end_inset - -Units -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -unit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -name/description -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -millimeter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -centimeter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -in -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -inch -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -point (72.27 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pica (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pc = 12 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -sp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -scaled point (65536 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -sp = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -bp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -big point (72 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -bp = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -dd -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -didot (72 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -dd -\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ -\end_inset - - 37.6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mm) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cicero (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cc = 12 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -dd) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Scale% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% of original image width -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -text% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% of text width -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -col% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% of column width -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -page% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% of paper width -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -line% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% of line width -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -theight% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% of text height -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pheight% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% of paper height -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -height of letter -\emph on -x -\emph default - in current font -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -width of letter -\emph on -M -\emph default - in current font -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mu -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -math unit (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mu = 1/18 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Credits -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:Credits" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people - (and we would encourage people to contribute!). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Alejandro Aguilar Sierra -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Amir Karger -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -David Johnson -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Hartmut Haase -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Ignacio García -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Ivan Schreter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -John Raithel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -John Weiss -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Lars Gullik Bjønnes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Matthias Ettrich -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Matthias Zenker -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Rich Fields -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Pascal André -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Paul Evans -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Paul Russel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Robin Socha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Uwe Stöhr -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -The LyX Team: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - -The bibliography on the following page was created with the -\family sans -Bibliography -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -label "Credits" -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - -The LyX Team: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Credits" -target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org/Credits -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens: -\emph on -The LaTeX Companion Second Edition. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 2004 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. - Daly: -\emph on -A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 2003 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexbook" - -\end_inset - -Leslie Lamport: -\emph on -LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "texbook" - -\end_inset - -Donald E. - Knuth. - -\emph on -The TeXbook. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 1984 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -The TeX Catalogue: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "LaTeXFAQ" - -\end_inset - -The LaTeX FAQ: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" - -\end_inset - - of the program -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX-2" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" - -\end_inset - - how to use the program -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "makeindex" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" - -\end_inset - - of the program -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "xindy" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" - -\end_inset - - of the program -\family sans -xindy -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" - -\end_inset - - of the AMS LaTeX-packages: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "caption" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf" - -\end_inset - - of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" - -\end_inset - - of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" - -\end_inset - - of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" - -\end_inset - - of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" - -\end_inset - - of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "prettyref" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" - -\end_inset - - of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "refstyle" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" - -\end_inset - - of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "tipa" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" - -\end_inset - - of the LaTeX-package -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-packages ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Arabic: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Armenian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Armenian: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Farsi" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Farsi: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Hebrew" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Hebrew: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Japanese" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Japanese: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Latvian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Latvian: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Lithuanian: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Mongolian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Mongolian: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - how to set up LyX for Vietnamese: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "NewInLyX20" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-page" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" - -\end_inset - - about new features in -\family sans -LyX 2.0 -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -let -\backslash -mybibname -\backslash -bibname -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -bibname}{ -\backslash -mybibname -\backslash -; 2} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -The command -\series bold - -\backslash -bibname -\series default - is the name of the bibliography in the current document language. - It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following - bibliography is the second one: -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex -LatexCommand bibtex -bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs" -options "biblio/alphadin" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print -LatexCommand printnomenclature -set_width "auto" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset index_print -LatexCommand printindex -type "idx" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_body -\end_document +#LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ +\lyxformat 469 +\begin_document +\begin_header +\textclass scrbook +\begin_preamble +% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!! +% +% This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints +% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble, +% parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you +% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact +% the documentation team +% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org + +\usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle +\ifpdf % if pdflatex is used + + % set fonts for nicer pdf view + \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} + +\fi % end if pdflatex is used + +% for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float +\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} + +% the pages of the TOC is numbered roman +% and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added +\let\myTOC\tableofcontents +\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% + \frontmatter + \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} + \myTOC + \mainmatter } + +% define a short command for \textvisiblespace +\newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace} + +% macro for italic page numbers in the index +\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} + +% for customized page headers/footers +% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document +\usepackage{fancyhdr} +% change header rule width +\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} + +% workaround for a makeindex bug, +% see sec. "Index Entry Order" +% only uncomment this when you are using makindex +%\let\OrgIndex\index +%\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}} +\end_preamble +\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading +\use_default_options false +\begin_modules +customHeadersFooters +enumitem +\end_modules +\maintain_unincluded_children false +\language english +\language_package default +\inputencoding auto +\fontencoding global +\font_roman default +\font_sans default +\font_typewriter default +\font_math auto +\font_default_family default +\use_non_tex_fonts false +\font_sc false +\font_osf false +\font_sf_scale 100 +\font_tt_scale 100 +\graphics default +\default_output_format default +\output_sync 0 +\bibtex_command default +\index_command default +\paperfontsize 12 +\spacing single +\use_hyperref true +\pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide" +\pdf_author "LyX Team" +\pdf_subject "LyX" +\pdf_keywords "LyX" +\pdf_bookmarks true +\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true +\pdf_bookmarksopen false +\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 +\pdf_breaklinks false +\pdf_pdfborder false +\pdf_colorlinks true +\pdf_backref false +\pdf_pdfusetitle false +\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" +\papersize default +\use_geometry false +\use_package amsmath 1 +\use_package amssymb 1 +\use_package cancel 0 +\use_package esint 1 +\use_package mathdots 1 +\use_package mathtools 0 +\use_package mhchem 1 +\use_package stackrel 0 +\use_package stmaryrd 0 +\use_package undertilde 0 +\cite_engine basic +\cite_engine_type numerical +\biblio_style plain +\use_bibtopic false +\use_indices false +\paperorientation portrait +\suppress_date false +\justification true +\use_refstyle 0 +\notefontcolor #0000ff +\branch Question +\selected 1 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #00ff00 +\end_branch +\branch Answer +\selected 0 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #aa55ff +\end_branch +\index Index +\shortcut idx +\color #008000 +\end_index +\secnumdepth 3 +\tocdepth 2 +\paragraph_separation indent +\paragraph_indentation default +\quotes_language english +\papercolumns 1 +\papersides 2 +\paperpagestyle default +\tracking_changes true +\output_changes false +\html_math_output 0 +\html_css_as_file 0 +\html_be_strict true +\author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller" +\author 2090807402 "usti" +\end_header + +\begin_body + +\begin_layout Title +The LyX User's Guide +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Author +by the LyX Team +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please + send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Version 2.0.x +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset toc +LatexCommand tableofcontents + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Getting Started +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +What is LyX? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX is a document preparation system. + It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \- +scripts, publishable books, business + letters and proposals, and even poetry. + It is unlike most other +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +word processors +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core + editing style. + That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Section +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, not as +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Bold, 17 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt type, left justified, 5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mm space below +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts, + not with mechanics. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the +\emph on +Introduction +\emph default +manual. + If you haven't read it yet, you need to. + Yes, we mean now. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\emph on +Introduction +\emph default + manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important +ly, the format of all of the manuals. + If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual. + You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead + of this one. + The +\emph on +Introduction +\emph default + manual describes that, too. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +How LyX Looks +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of + its window. + Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons. + There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing + documents. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar. + This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional. + When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the + next line. + Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for + only a vertical scrollbar. + There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar. + The first case is large images. + To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the + image and use the option +\family sans +Scale on Screen +\family default + in the tab +\family sans +LaTeX and LyX options +\family default +. + The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than + the LyX window. + You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but + this doesn't work for equations yet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look + at Appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:The-User-Interface" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +HELP +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The help system consists of the LyX manuals. + You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX. + Just select the manual you want to read from the +\family sans +Help +\family default + menu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Basic LyX Setup +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Preferences +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document + classes and LaTeX packages are available. + It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences + settings. + Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed + on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX. + To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reconfigure +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration of LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LaTeX Setup +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:LaTeX-Setup" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will + not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it + installed. + However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce + PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain + text or as XHTML. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes + or packages. + Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required + files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file + you can view from the menu +\family sans +Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Configuration +\family default +. + If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then + reconfigure LyX (menu +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reconfigure +\family default +). +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + from being printed with sub- and superscript letters. + More about TeX Code is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:TeX-Code" + +\end_inset + +, the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration of LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + See section 5.1 of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +How to work with LyX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Basic File Operations +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +File Operations +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Under the +\family sans +File +\family default + menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor + in addition to some more advanced operations: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +New +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-new" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +New +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +from +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Template +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Open +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "file-open" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Close +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Save +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-write" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Save +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +As +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Revert +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +to +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +saved +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Version +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Control +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Import +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Export +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Print +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Exit +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with + a few minor differences. + The +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +New +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +from +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Template +\family default + command lists the available templates. + Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for + the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually. + They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters + (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Document-Classes" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + There is no +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +default file +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + or document named +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Untitled +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + or +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +scratch. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank + space is just that — a big, blank space. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Revert +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +to +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +saved +\family default + and +\family sans +Version +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Control +\family default + are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature + in LyX also. + Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@. + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Revert +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +to +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +saved +\family default + will reload the document from disk. + You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document + and want to restore it to the last save. + With +\family sans + Version +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Control +\family default +you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify + them as your changes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Basic Editing Features +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Editing +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations + on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can + delete whole words as well as individual characters. + The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to + access them. + We will start with cut and paste. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As you might expect, the +\family sans +Edit +\family default + menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with + various other editing features. + Some of these are special and covered in later sections. + The basic ones are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Cut +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "cut" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Copy +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "copy" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Paste +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "paste" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Paste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Recent +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Paste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Special +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Find +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Replace +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show findreplace" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The first three are self-explanatory. + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste. + The submenu of +\family sans +Paste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Recent +\family default + shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Plain +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text, +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Join +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Lines +\family default + will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted + as one paragraph. + A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file. + Without +\family sans +Join +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Lines +\family default +, the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text + will start a new paragraph. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Replace +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Find +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +The +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Find +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Replace +\family default + item opens the +\family sans +Find +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Replace +\family default + dialog. + Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it. + Hitting the +\family sans +Replace +\family default + button replaces the selected text with the contents of the +\family sans +Replace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +with +\family default + field. + You can click the +\family sans +Find +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Next +\family default + button to skip the current word. + Hit +\family sans +Replace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +All +\family default + to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically. + The +\family sans +Case +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sensitive +\family default + option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search + word. + If the toggle is set, searching for +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +Test +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + will not match the word +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +test +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The +\family sans +Match whole words only +\family default + option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g., searching for +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +star +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + will not match +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +starlet +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + LyX offers also an advanced +\family sans +Find +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Replace +\family default + feature that is described in sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Things like notes, floats, etc. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(the so called +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +insets +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) can be dissolved. + This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal + text. + Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an + inset and pressing +\family sans +Backspace +\family default + or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing +\family sans +Delete +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "inset-select-all" +\end_inset + +, the shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select" +\end_inset + + selects the whole document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Undo and Redo +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Redo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Undo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Undo-and-Redo" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it. + LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer. + Select +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Undo +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "undo" +\end_inset + + to undo some mistake. + If you accidentally undo too much, use +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Redo +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "redo" +\end_inset + + to +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +undo the undo. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +steps to minimize memory overhead. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it + was last saved, the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +changed +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + status of the document is unfortunately not reset. + This is a consequence of the 100 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +step undo limit mentioned above. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Undo +\family default + and +\family sans +Redo +\family default + work on almost everything in LyX. + But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks + of text. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Mouse Operations +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mouse Operations +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +These are the most basic mouse operations. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Motion +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Click the +\emph on +left mouse button +\emph default + once anywhere in the edit window. + The cursor moves to the text under the mouse. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Selecting Text +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Hold down the +\emph on +left mouse button +\emph default + and drag the mouse. + LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions. + Use +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Copy +\family default + to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paste +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.) +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Right-click on them to set their properties. + Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Section +Navigating +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Navigating" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Navigating +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +The +\family sans +Navigate +\family default + menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can + click to jump to the corresponding document part. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Outline +\family default + or by the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle toc" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +You can set bookmarks in your document under +\family sans +Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bookmarks +\family default + and use the same menu to return to them. + Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + + (also +\family sans +Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Navigate +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Back +\family default +) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something. + This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled + to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to + your last editing position. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +By pressing the +\family sans +F5 +\family default + key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +The Outliner +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:The-Outliner" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between + several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists + of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen +ces (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Cross-References" + +\end_inset + +), or notes, or citations (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliography" + +\end_inset + +). + Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your + document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context + menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements. + For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation + dialog and to modify the citation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear + in the Outline. + For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and + wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +sub: +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow + you further to control the display. + The +\family sans +Sort +\family default + option sorts the current list alphabetically. + Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the + document. + The +\family sans +Keep +\family default + option keeps it in the current view state. + Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 and 4 displayed and click on section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3, the subsections of sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 and 4 will still be displayed. + Without the +\family sans +Keep +\family default + option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3. + Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +depth +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../images/reload.png + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary). + Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections + in your document. + The +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../images/down.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../images/up.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + buttons move sections up and down in the document. + So, for example, you can move section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 before section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.4 or after section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.6. + LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order. + With the buttons +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../images/promote.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../images/demote.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + (or the corresponding key bindings +\family sans +Tab +\family default + and +\family sans +Shift-Tab +\family default +) you can change the level of sections. + So you can for example make section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 chapter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 or subsection +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.4.1. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Input/Word Completion +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Input-Completion" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Input completion +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Word completion|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Input completion +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently + opened. + Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that + is used to propose completions. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences +\family default +) in the section +\family sans +Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Input Completion +\family default +. + With the option +\family sans +Automatic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +inline +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +completion +\family default + the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor. + With the option +\family sans +Automatic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +popup +\family default + the completions are always shown in a popup. + The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option + +\family sans +Cursor +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +indicator +\family default +. + With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and + popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there + are completions available. + Press the +\family sans +Tab +\family default + key to accept a proposed completion. + If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them. + You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys, + and accept the chosen completion by pressing +\family sans +Return +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond +ing options for text. + The special math option +\family sans +Autocorrection +\family default + enables characters to be composed. + If, for example, you want to insert the character +\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ +\end_inset + +, you can then input the characters +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +=> +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to a formula to get it. + So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use + of the math toolbar. + A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file +\family typewriter +autocorrect +\family default + that is in LyX's installation folder. + Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation + mark key “!”. + Pressing +\family sans +Space +\family default + turns it off. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Basic Key Bindings +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Key Bindings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bindings|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Key Bindings +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Shortcuts|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Key Bindings +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are at least two different primary binding maps: +\family typewriter +cua +\family default + and +\family typewriter +emacs +\family default +. + LyX's default is +\family typewriter +cua +\family default +, which can be changed in the LyX preferences under +\family sans +Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Shortcuts +\family default +. + (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts" + +\end_inset + +.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Some keys, like +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Up +\family default +, +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Down +\family default +, +\family sans +Left +\family default +, +\family sans +Right +\family default +, +\family sans +Up +\family default + and +\family sans +Down +\family default +, do exactly what you expect them to do. + Other keys don't: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tab +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Tab" +description "Tabulator key" + +\end_inset + + +\family default + There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX. + If you do not understand this, go read sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Par-indent-intro" + +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments" + +\end_inset + +, especially section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Lists" + +\end_inset + +, right now. + Yes, right now. + If you are still confused, look in the +\emph on +Tutorial +\emph default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +In LyX the +\family sans +Tab +\family default + key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor + in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or + Enumerate. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Esc +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Esc" +description "Escape key" + +\end_inset + + +\family default + This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +cancel key. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + It is used, generically, to cancel operations. + Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Home +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +End +\family default + These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line, + unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning + or end of the file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are three modifier keys: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Control +\family default + (Denoted by +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Ctrl +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Ctrl" +description "Control key" + +\end_inset + + in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending + on which keys it is used in combination with: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Backspace +\family default + or +\family sans +Delete +\family default +, it deletes an entire word instead of a single character. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Left +\family default + and +\family sans +Right +\family default +, it moves by words instead of characters. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Home +\family default + and +\family sans +End +\family default +, it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Shift +\family default + (Denoted by +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Shift +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Shift" +description "Shift key" + +\end_inset + + in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select + the text between the old and new cursor positions. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Alt +\family default + (Denoted by +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Alt +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Alt" +description "Alt or Meta key" + +\end_inset + + in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless + your keyboard has a distinct Meta key. + If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs + the +\family sans +Alt+ +\family default + function. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +This key does many different things, but it also activates the +\emph on +menu accelerator keys +\emph default +. + If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a + menu or menu item, it selects that menu item. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +For example, the sequence +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Alt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +e +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +s +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +c +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + brings up the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Text Style +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + dialog. + Typing +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Alt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +f +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + opens the +\family sans +File +\family default + menu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\emph on +Shortcuts +\emph default + manual lists all other things bound to the +\family sans +Alt +\family default + key. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use + LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar + at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action + you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action. + The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings. + The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used + in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding + it. + However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Alt+P Shift+A +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + means +\family sans +Alt+P +\family default + followed by a capital +\family sans +A +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +LyX Basics +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Basics +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Document Types +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Types +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you + need to decide what type of document you want to edit. + Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings, + numbering schemes, and so on. + Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments, + and format the title of your document differently. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A +\emph on +document class +\emph default + describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents. + By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties, + making it easier to create the type of document you want. + If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default. + So it is up to you to change the class of your document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Document Classes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Classes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Document-Classes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can select a class using the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Document Class +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dialog. + Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options + you may need. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Overview +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are four standard document classes in LyX. + They are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Article for basic articles +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Report for basic reports +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Book for writing a book +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Letter for US-style letters +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have + installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions + will include many of these. + Here are some of the classes. + The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter +\emph on +Special Document Classes +\emph default + in the +\emph on +Additional Features +\emph default + manual: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry + Society +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical + Union +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American + Mathematical Society (AMS). + There are three article layouts available. + The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that + prepends the section number to the number of the result. + All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced + together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence. + The +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +sequential numbering +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers + them throughout the article in a single sequence. + Each type of result gets its own sequence. + There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Beamer Layout for presentations +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Broadway Layout for writing plays. + It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed + with LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chess Layout to write about chess games +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Curriculum +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vitae classes to create curriculum vitae +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Foils Used to make transparencies +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry. + It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed + with LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical + and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features + like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc. + (Is used by this document.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Memoir another replacement for the standard classes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Powerdot Layout for presentations +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +REVTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical + Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society + of America (OSA). + This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Slides Used to make transparencies +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +SPIE +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society + for Optical Engineering (SPIE) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes + here. + You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the + +\emph on +Additional Features +\emph default + manual. + Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all + of the document classes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Availability +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Document Class +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +are marked as +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Unavailable +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning + saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are + not installed. + So it may seem that something is wrong. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nothing is wrong. + LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, + and some of them, like +\family sans +IOP +\family default +, are highly specialized. + LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, + and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing + number. + No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed + by some document class. + There are just too many of them. + That is why some of the document classes are unavailable. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +Unavailable +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, you just need to install the appropriate package files. + The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that + document class for a new file. + LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files. + See section +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Installing new LaTeX files +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual for information on how to install them. +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it + does not include support for every document class people might want to + use. + For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for + dissertations submitted to those universities. + The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these. + There are too many. + Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have + done so. + Chapter +\emph on +Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual contains information on how to create layout files. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Modules +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Modules" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Modules +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the + chosen document class. + For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document. + This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond +ing module in the +\family sans +Modules +\family default + section of the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dialog. + Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what + it does. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not + always installed by default. + LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and + it will tell you what exactly you are missing. + You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not + be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be + able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites. + If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to + install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting + +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reconfigure +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration of LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + See section +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Installing new LaTeX files +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual for more information on installing required packages. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible. + LyX will advise you about these things. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Local Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Local-Layout" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Local Layout +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be + used in a variety of different documents. + If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different + documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose. + Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you + need a specific inset or character style only that one time. + You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble. + What you want is LyX's +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Local Layout +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + See section +\emph on +Local Layout +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual for information on how to use it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Properties +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Each class has a default set of options. + Here's a quick table describing them: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Page style +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Sides +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Columns +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Max. + sectioning level +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +article +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Plain +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +One +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +One +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Section +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +report +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Plain +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +One +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +One +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Chapter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +book +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Headings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Two +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +One +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Chapter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +letter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Plain +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +One +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +One +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +none +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You're probably also wondering what +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Max. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sectioning level +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + means. + There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings. + Different document classes allow different types of section headings. + Only two use the +\family sans +Chapter +\family default + heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the +\family sans +Section +\family default + heading. + Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section + headings. + In addition to +\family sans +Chapter +\family default + and +\family sans +Section +\family default + headings, there are also +\family sans +Subsection +\family default + headings, +\family sans +Subsubsection +\family default + headings, and so on. + We will describe these headings fully in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Headings" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Document Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Document-Layout" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Layout +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default +. + There in the +\family sans +Class +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +options +\family default + field under +\family sans +Documents +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Class +\family default +, you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated + list. + This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want + to use for your document. + To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have + to read its manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The drop box +\family sans +Headings +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +style +\family default + in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog under +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default + controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page. + You can choose between the following five options: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Default +\family default + Use default page style of current class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +empty +\family default + No page numbers or headings. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +plain +\family default + Page numbers only. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +headings +\family default + Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number. + Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on + the maximum sectioning level of the class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +fancy +\family default + This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you + have the LaTeX-package +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installed. + How they are defined is explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The separation of paragraphs is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Paper Size and Orientation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paper size +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can find the following options in the menu +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default + of the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog: +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Paper +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Format +\family default + What size paper to print on. + The choices are +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Default +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +A0 - A6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +B0 - B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +C0 - C6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +US letter, US legal, US executive +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +JIS B0 - JIS B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Custom +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Orientation +\family default + To choose whether to output as +\family sans +Landscape +\family default + or as +\family sans +Portrait +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Two-sided +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +document +\family default + Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper. + That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Margins +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Margins" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Margins +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margins +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Paper margins are set in the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings + because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking + the paper format and the font size into account. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Important Note +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you change a document class, LyX has to convert +\emph on +everything +\emph default + into the new class. + That includes the paragraph environments. + Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document + classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments. + If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the + paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +unknown +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to + the old class. + But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you + will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph +s manually to a style present in your new document class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Paragraph Indentation and Separation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph ! Indentation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Par-indent-intro" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to + say a word or two about paragraph indentation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs. + Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph. + Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs. + If you choose indentation for paragraphs the +\emph on +first +\emph default + paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list, + etc., is +\emph on +not +\emph default + indented. + Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented. + Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document + language than English. + LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language + used. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings + and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded + into LyX. + As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what. + LyX takes care of that. + In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a + range. + That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure + figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom + of a page, and so on. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them. + LyX gives you the ability globally to change +\emph on +all +\emph default + these pre-coded spacings. + We will explain more later. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Paragraph Separation +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Paragraph-Separation" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph ! Separation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Select +\family sans +Indentation +\family default + or +\family sans +Vertical +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +space +\family default + in the submenu +\family sans +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default + of the dialog +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fine-Tuning +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph. + Open the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + dialog and toggle the +\family sans +Indent +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Paragraph +\family default + option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle" +\end_inset + +). + If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this + button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling + this). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph + if you need to do some fine-tuning. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Line Spacing +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph ! Line spacing +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\noun on + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +\noun default + dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu + +\family sans +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default +. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +You need to have the LaTeX-package +\series bold +setspace +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! setspace +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installed to use this feature. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + You can set it for a single paragraph in the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing + is normally defined in the environment's style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Paragraph Environments +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Paragraph-Environments" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph ! Environments +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph environments|( +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Overview +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Paragraph environments correspond to the +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +begin{ +\emph on +environment +\emph default +} ... + +\backslash +end{ +\emph on +environment +\emph default +} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +command sequence in LaTeX files. + If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally + alien to you, we urge you to read the +\emph on +Tutorial +\emph default +. + The +\emph on +Tutorial +\emph default + also contains many more examples than this section does. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A paragraph environment is simply a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +container +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties. + This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering + scheme, labels, and so on. + Additionally, you can +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +nest +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment + to inherit some of the properties of another. + The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy + tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days + of typewriters. + There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular + document type. + We will only be covering the most common ones here. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png + scale 70 + clip + +\end_inset + + at the left end of the toolbar. + LyX will change the environment of the +\emph on +entire +\emph default + paragraph in which the cursor sits. + You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if + you select them before choosing the new environment. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note that entering +\family sans +Return +\family default + will +\emph on +typically +\emph default + create a new paragraph using the +\family sans +Standard +\family default + paragraph environment. + We say +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +typically +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + because if you are in one of these environments: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Quote +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Quotation +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Verse +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Itemize +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Enumerate +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Description +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +List +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter +\family sans +Return +\family default +, rather than resetting it to +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nesting" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Standard +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The default paragraph environment is +\family sans +Standard +\family default + for most classes. + It creates a plain paragraph. + If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses. + In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in + this manual) are in the +\family sans +Standard +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can nest a paragraph using the +\family sans +Standard +\family default + environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything + in a +\family sans +Standard +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Document Title +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Title +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the + author(s) and a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +footnote +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + for thanks or contact information. + For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate + page along with today's date. + For other types of documents, the title +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + goes at the top of the first page of the document. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph + environments +\family sans +Title +\family default +, +\family sans +Author +\family default +, and +\family sans +Date +\family default +. + Here's how you use them: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Put the title of your document in the +\family sans +Title +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Put the author name in the +\family sans +Author +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date, + or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in + the +\family sans +Date +\family default + environment. + Note that using this environment is optional. + If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date. + If you don't want a date, use the option +\family sans +Suppress default date on front page +\family default + in the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +class +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can use footnotes to insert +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +thanks +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + or contact information. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Headings +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Section headings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Headings" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings. + LyX takes care of the numbering for you. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Numbered Headings +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Section headings ! Numbered +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are 7 numbered types of section headings. + They are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Part +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Chapter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Section +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Subsection +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Subsubsection +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Paragraph +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Subparagraph +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods. + The numbers describe where in the document you are. + Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text. + For example, suppose you're writing a book. + You group the book into chapters. + LyX does a similar grouping: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Part +\family default + is divided into either +\family sans +Chapter +\family default +s or +\family sans +Section +\family default +s +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Chapter +\family default +s are divided into +\family sans +Section +\family default +s +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Section +\family default +s are divided into +\family sans +Subsection +\family default +s +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsection +\family default +s are divided into +\family sans +Subsubsection +\family default +s +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsubsection +\family default +s are divided into +\family sans +Paragraph +\family default +s +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Paragraph +\family default +s are divided into +\family sans +Subparagraph +\family default +s +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Not all document types use the +\family sans +Chapter +\family default + heading as the maximum sectioning level. + In that case the +\family sans +Section +\family default + is the top-level heading. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +So, if you use the +\family sans +Subsubsection +\family default + environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number, + along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter + that it's in. + For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the + label +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +2.5 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Unnumbered Headings +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Section headings ! Unnumbered +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The unnumbered section headings have a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +* +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + at the end of their name. + They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in + the table of contents, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:toc" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Changing the Numbering +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Numbering-depth" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear + in the Table of Contents. + Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document + class. + Just as certain classes start with +\family sans +Chapter +\family default + and go down to the +\family sans +Subparagraph +\family default + level. + Others start at +\family sans +Section +\family default +. + Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels. + Most don't number +\family sans +Paragraph +\family default + or +\family sans +Subparagraph +\family default +. + This is something you can change. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Open the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Under +\family sans +Numbering +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TOC +\family default + you will see two counters. + The one named +\family sans +Numbering +\family default + controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section + heading. + The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table + of contents. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Short Titles of Headings +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Section headings ! Short titles +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Short Titles +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Short-Titles" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long. + This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space. + For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section + title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings. + This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents, + avoiding the problem mentioned. + To specify a short title, use the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Short +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Title +\family default +. + This will insert a box labeled +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +opt +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (stands for +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +optional +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) which you can use to enter the short title text. + This also works for captions inside floats. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The title of this section is a good example of using this feature. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Special Information +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The following information applies to all section headings: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +You cannot do any nesting with these environments. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +You can only use inline math in these environments. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Quotes and Poetry line spacing +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations. + They are +\family sans +Quote +\family default +, +\family sans +Quotation +\family default +, and +\family sans +Verse +\family default +. + Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins. + These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in. + They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below + the text they contain. + They also allow nesting, so you can put a +\family sans +Verse +\family default + in a +\family sans +Quotation +\family default +, as well as in some other paragraph environments. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do + +\emph on +not +\emph default + reset to +\family sans +Standard +\family default + when you start a new paragraph. + So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter +\family sans +Return +\family default + without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you. + Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you + have to change back to the +\family sans +Standard +\family default + environment yourself. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Quote +\family default + and +\family sans +Quotation +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Quote" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Quotation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's + time for the differences. + +\family sans +Quote +\family default + and +\family sans +Quotation +\family default + are identical except for one difference: +\family sans +Quote +\family default + uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line. + +\family sans +Quotation +\family default + +\emph on +always +\emph default + indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here's an example of the +\family sans +Quote +\family default + environment: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +This is in the +\family sans +Quote +\family default + environment. + I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it + wraps. + See – no indentation! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Here's the second paragraph of this quote. + Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and + the other paragraph. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here's another example, this time in the +\family sans +Quotation +\family default + environment: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +This is in the +\family sans +Quotation +\family default + environment. + If I keep writing, you will see the indentation. + If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting + the first line, then +\family sans +Quotation +\family default + is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it +\emph on +if +\emph default + you were quoting other text. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Here's a new paragraph. + I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time. + If I did that, though, you'd get bored. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As the examples show, +\family sans +Quote +\family default + is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs. + They should put quotes in the +\family sans +Quote +\family default + environment. + Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the +\family sans +Quotation +\family default + paragraph environment for quoted text. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Verse +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph ! Verse +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Poetry +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Verse" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Verse +\family default + is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on. + Here's an example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +This is in Verse +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Which I did not rehearse! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +It could be much worse. + This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps + around. + It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are + indented a bit more than the first. + Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore. + So sue me. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +To break a line +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +And make things look fine +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Use +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As you can see, +\family sans +Verse +\family default + does not indent both margins. + Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph. + To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default + function +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Lists +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Lists" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds + of lists. + In the +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + and +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively. + In the +\family sans +Description +\family default + and +\family sans +List +\family default + environments, LyX lets you provide your own label. + We will present the individual details of each type of list next after + describing some general features of all four of them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +General Features +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments + in several ways. + First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item. + Hitting +\family sans +Return +\family default + does +\emph on +not +\emph default + reset the environment to +\family sans +Standard +\family default + but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item. + The nesting depth is thereby kept. + If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting + depth, you can use +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +. + If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the +\family sans +Standard +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can nest lists of any type inside one another. + In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it + is nested. + If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest + you read all of section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nesting" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists ! Itemize +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Itemize" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The first type of list we will describe in detail is the +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + paragraph environment. + It has the following properties: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +The items can have any length. + LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item. + The offset is always relative to whatever environment the +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + list may be in. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +If you nest an +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environment inside another +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environment, the label changes to a new symbol. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +LyX always shows the same symbol on screen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +See section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nesting" + +\end_inset + + for a full explanation of nesting. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Of course, that explanation was also an example of an +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + list. + The +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We said that different levels use different symbols as their label. + Here's an example of all four possible symbols. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +The label for the first level +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + is a large black dot, or bullet. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +The label for the second level is a dash. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +The label for the third is an asterisk. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +The label for the fourth is a centered dot. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Back out to the third level. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Back to the second level. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Back to the outermost level. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +These are the default labels for an +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + list. + You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog in the submenu +\family sans +Bullets +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + These customizations are not displayed in LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth. + We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths + in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nesting" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists ! Enumerate +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Enumerate" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines. + It has these properties: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Each item has a numeral as its label. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +The label type depends on the nesting depth. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Each new +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment resets the counter to one. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Like the +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environment, the +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Offsets the items relative to the left margin. + Items can have any length. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Allows up to a four-fold nesting. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Unlike the +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environment, +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + shows the different labels for each item in LyX. + Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +The first level of an +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + uses Arabic numerals followed by a period. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth + increases. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Back to the third level +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Back to the second level. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Back to the outermost level. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can customize the type of numbering used in the +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Customized-Lists" + +\end_inset + +. + Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There is more to nesting +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environments than we've stated here. + You should read section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nesting" + +\end_inset + + to learn more about nesting. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Description +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists ! Description +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Unlike the previous two environments, the +\family sans +Description +\family default + list has no fixed label. + Instead, LyX uses the first +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +word +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + of the first line as the label. + Here's an example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Example: This is an example of the +\family sans +Description +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the + rest of the line. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With the first +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +word +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + it is meant that the first usage of the +\family sans +Space +\family default + key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an + item. + If you need to use more than one word in a label use a +\family sans +Protected Space +\family default +. + (Use either +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + + or the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Protected +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space +\family default +; see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Protected-Space" + +\end_inset + + for more information.) Here is an example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Second +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Example: This one shows how to use a +\family sans +Protected +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space +\family default + in the label of a +\family sans +Description +\family default + list item. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Usage: You should use the +\family sans +Description +\family default + environment for things like definitions and theorems. + Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text + that describes it. + It's not a good idea to use a +\family sans +Description +\family default + environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe. + You're better off using +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + or +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + and nesting several +\family sans +Standard +\family default + paragraphs into them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Nesting: You can nest +\family sans +Description +\family default + environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and + so on. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting + them from the first line. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Labeling +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists ! Labeling +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Labeling +\family default + environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Like the +\family sans +Description +\family default + list the +\family sans +Labeling +\family default + list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional + features. + Here are its properties: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +item +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +labels LyX uses the first +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +word +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + of each line as the item label. + The first +\family sans +Space +\family default + after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label. + If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected + space as described above. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and + the body of the item text. + The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default + label width plus a little extra space. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +label +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is + larger. + If the label width is larger, the label +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +extends +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + into the first line. + In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left + margin of the rest of the item text. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +default +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all + items in a +\family sans +Labeling +\family default + environment has the same left margin. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +To change the default width, select all items in the list. + Now open the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + dialog (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). + The text in the box +\family sans +Longest +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +label +\family default + determines the default label width. + You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the + letter +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +M +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + multiple times instead. + M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX. + By using +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +M +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of +\family sans +Longest +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +label +\family default + every time you alter a label in a +\family sans +List +\family default + environment. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +The predefined default width is the length of +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +00.00.0000 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (equal to 6 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +M). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You should use the +\family sans +Labeling +\family default + list the same way as the +\family sans +Description +\family default + list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes + it. + The +\family sans +Labeling +\family default + environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall + layout. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can nest +\family sans +Labeling +\family default + lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on. + They work just like the other list paragraph environments. + Read section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nesting" + +\end_inset + + to learn about nesting. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There is yet another feature of the +\family sans +Labeling +\family default + list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels + by default. + You can use additional +\family sans +HFills +\family default + to change how LyX justifies the item label. + +\family sans +Hfills +\family default + are documented in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Horizontal-Space" + +\end_inset + +. + Here are some examples: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +Left The default for +\family sans +Labeling +\family default + item labels. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Right One +\family sans +HFill +\family default + at the beginning of the label right justifies it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Center +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + One +\family sans +HFill +\family default + at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Customized Lists +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Customized-Lists" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists ! Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The features described in this section require that the module +\family sans +Customisable Lists (enumitem) +\family default + is loaded in the document settings. + The module uses the LaTeX-package +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Custom Enumerate Lists +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional + argument (menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Short Title +\family default +) to the first item of each level in the list. + There you add the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +roman{enumi} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +in TeX Code (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +For more about TeX Code, look at section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:TeX-Code" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\emph on + enumi +\emph default + is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration. + The command +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default + outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral. + For capital Roman numerals replace +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default + with +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman +\series default + in the command above. + For Arabic numerals use +\series bold + +\backslash +arabic +\series default +. + To +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +number +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + items with capital or small Latin letters use +\series bold + +\backslash +Alph +\series default + or +\series bold + +\backslash +alph +\series default +, respectively. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + You can only number 26 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command + by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here is a list with custom numbering: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Level 1 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Level 2 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Level 2 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Level 3 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Level 4 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +For this list these commands were used: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +where the command +\series bold + +\backslash +emph{} +\series default + makes the label emphasized and +\series bold + +\backslash +bf{} +\series default + makes it bold. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following + lists until you change the definition. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Resumed Enumeration +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +arabic{enumi}. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +first +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +goes back to default numbering +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +second +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +regular text +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume +resumed +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To resume an enumeration, use the style +\family sans +Enumerate-Resume +\family default +. + Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed + list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the + next one. + Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number. + This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item + of a normal enumeration. + There, insert the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +start=number +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +where +\emph on +number +\emph default + is the number with which you want to resume the list. + An example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +first item +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +second item +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enumeration starting at a given value: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +start=4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +This enumeration starts at 4 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +List Spacing +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists ! Spacing +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items + of a list. + For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +A bullet list +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +with standard spacing +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item + of the list. + Add there the command +\series bold +nolistsep +\series default + to get no additional list space like in this example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +nolistsep +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +A bullet list +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +without additional +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +vertical space +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package + +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + For more information see its documentation, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing + and indentation. + Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs + in the document and the label separation was set to 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm so that the number is in the page margin: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent= +\backslash +parindent, labelsep=2cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +An enumeration +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +with negative indentation +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Further Customization +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lists ! Customization +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also change the style of description lists. + The command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font=definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +changes the description label font, the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +style=definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +sets the list style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +An example where the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +is used: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ionizing +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +radiation: +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are + energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore + ionizing them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Reference +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing + the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an + object, block of memory, disk space or other resource. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package + +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + For more information see its documentation +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Letters +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Letters +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Address +\family default + and +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default +: An Overview +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph + environments called +\family sans +Address +\family default + and +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default +. + To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments + in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document. + In contrast, you can use the +\family sans +Address +\family default + and +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default + paragraph environments anywhere with no problem. + You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest + anything in them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Of course, you're not limited to using +\family sans +Address +\family default + and +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default + for letters only. + +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default +, in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in + some European academic papers. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Usage +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Address-Usage" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Address +\family default + environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used + for the opening and signature in some countries. + Similarly, the +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default + environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which + is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries. + Here's an example of each: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Address +Right Address +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Who I am +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Where I am +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +When is it? What is today? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +That was +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default +. + Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to + fit the largest block of text on a single line. + Here's an example of the +\family sans +Address +\family default + environment: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Who are you +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Where do I send this +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Your post office and country +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As you can see, both +\family sans +Address +\family default + and +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default + add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph. + If you enter +\family sans +Return +\family default + in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets + the environment to +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + This makes sense, since +\family sans +Return +\family default + is the +\family typewriter +break-paragraph +\family default + function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs. + Thus, you have to use +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + or +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ragged +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Line +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Break +\family default +) to start a new line in an +\family sans +Address +\family default + or +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Academic Writing +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography + or list of references. + LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Abstract +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Abstracts +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Abstract +\family default + environment is used for the abstract of an article. + Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should + only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title. + Also, don't bother trying to nest +\family sans +Abstract +\family default + in anything else or +\emph on +vice versa +\emph default +. + It will not work. + The +\family sans +Abstract +\family default + environment is only useful in the article and report document classes. + The book document classes ignores the +\family sans +Abstract +\family default + completely, and it's utterly silly to use +\family sans +Abstract +\family default + in a letter document class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Abstract +\family default + environment does several things for you. + First, it puts the centered label +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Abstract +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + above the text. + The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical + space. + Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect. + Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and + the subsequent text. + Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen. + The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are + using. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Starting a new paragraph by entering +\family sans +Return +\family default + does not reset the paragraph environment. + The new paragraph will still be in the +\family sans +Abstract +\family default + environment. + So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you + finish entering the abstract of your document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/Abstract.pdf + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Paragraph-in-the" + +\end_inset + +Paragraph in the +\family sans +Abstract +\family default + environment +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We would love to demonstrate the +\family sans +Abstract +\family default + environment, but since this document is in the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +book +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + class, we can't do this. + We inserted it therefore as figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the" + +\end_inset + +. + If you have never heard of an +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +abstract +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + before, you can safely ignore this environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliography +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Biblio_environment" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default + environment is used to list references. + Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should + only use it at the end of the document. + Nesting +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default + in anything else or +\emph on +vice versa +\emph default + will not work. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When you first open a +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default + environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Bibliography +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + or +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +References, +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + depending on the document class. + The heading is in a large boldface font. + Each paragraph of the +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default + environment is a bibliography entry. + Thus, entering +\family sans +Return +\family default + does not reset the paragraph environment. + Each new paragraph is still in the +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There is another, usually better way to include references in your document + by using a BibTeX database. + For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra +phy handling, have a look at section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliography" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LyX +\family sans +-Code +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph ! LyX code +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LyX-Code" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default + environment is another LyX extension. + It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font. + It also treats the +\family sans +Space +\family default + key as a fixed whitespace; +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +In the +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default + environment, the +\family sans +Space +\family default + key is treated as a +\family sans +Protected +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Blank +\family default + instead of an end-of-word marker. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX. + If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + (the +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default + function). + +\family sans +Return +\family default + breaks paragraphs. + Note, however, that +\family sans +Return +\family default + does not reset the paragraph environment. + So, when you finish using the +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default + environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself. + Also, you can nest the +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default + environment inside of others. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are a few quirks with this environment: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +You cannot use +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + at the beginning of a new paragraph (i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +you can't follow +\family sans +Return +\family default + with a +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +You can't follow a +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + with a +\family sans +Space +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Use a +\family sans +Return +\family default + to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a +\family sans +Space +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Or: use +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + + instead. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line. + You must put at least one +\family sans +Space +\family default + in any line you want blank. + Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing +\family sans +" +\family default + since that will insert +\emph on +real +\emph default + quotes. + You get the typewriter double quotes with +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "self-insert \"" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here is an example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +#include +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +int main(void) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +{ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + printf("Hello World! +\backslash +n"); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + return 0; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This is just the standard +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Hello world! +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + program. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default + has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts, + rc-files, and so on. + Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text + as if you used a typewriter. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph environments|) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described + in the chapter +\emph on +Program Code Listings +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Nesting Environments +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nesting ! Environments +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Nesting" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific + properties. + This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of + another block. + For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also + has two subpoints. + In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner + list +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +attached +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to item #2: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +one +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +two +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +sublist – item #1 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +sublist – item #2 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +three +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other. + Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Increase +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +List +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Depth +\family default + or +\family sans +Decrease +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +List +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Depth +\family default + to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are + nested). + Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + or the key bindings +\family sans +Tab +\family default + and +\family sans +Shift+Tab +\family default + or +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +. + The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing + you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current + paragraph. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can. + If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth. + Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the + depth of every paragraph nested inside of it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nesting isn't limited to lists. + In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're + about to find out. + This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +What You Can and Can't Nest +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell + you a little bit more about how nesting works. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated + than a simple yes or no. + There are three types of paragraph environments: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Completely unnestable +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other + things inside them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest + anything into them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph + environments have them: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unnestable Can't nest them. + Can't nest into them. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Bibliography +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Abstract +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Title +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Author +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Date +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +Fully +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Nestable You can nest them. + You can nest other things into them. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Verse +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Quote +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Quotation +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Itemize +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Enumerate +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Description +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +List +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +LyX-Code +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things. + You can't nest anything into them. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Standard +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Part +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Chapter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Section +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsection +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsubsection +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Paragraph +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subparagraph +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Part* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Chapter* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Section* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsection* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsubsection* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Address +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings + like +\family sans +Chapter +\family default +, +\family sans +Section +\family default +, etc. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to + create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas + nested section headings violate this. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nesting ! Tables etc. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are + affected by nesting anyhow. + They are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +equations +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +tables +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +figures +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +( +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Figures and tables in +\family sans +Floats +\family default + are not affected by this. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Have a look at section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Floats" + +\end_inset + + for more information about +\family sans +Floats +\family default +.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph. + If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph + it is in goes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +paragraph +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + of its own, it behaves just like a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +nestable-inside +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + paragraph environment. + You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything + into it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here's an example with a table: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Item One +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is (a) and it's nested. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is (b). + The table is actually nested inside (a). +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Back out again. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Item One +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is (a) and it's nested. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is (b). + The table is +\emph on +not +\emph default + nested inside (a). + In fact, it's not nested at all. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Back out again. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first + item of a new list! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going + deep enough. + LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Item One +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is (a) and it's nested. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is (b). + The table is actually nested inside Item One, but +\emph on +not +\emph default + inside (a). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Back out again. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a + new list +\emph on +inside +\emph default + item 1. + The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation. + So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right + depth! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Usage and General Features +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting. + In other words, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +level #6 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is the innermost possible depth. + Here's an example to illustrate what we mean: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +level #1 – outermost +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +level #2 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +level #3 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +level #4 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +level #5 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +level #6 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see + both of them in the example. + Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold + nesting with the +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + and +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environments. + For example, if we tried to nest another +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + list inside item +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +A. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, we would get errors. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Some Examples +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nesting ! Examples +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration. + We have several examples of nested environments. + In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce + them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#1-a This is the outermost level. + It's a +\family sans +List +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#2-a This is level #2. + We created it by using +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + followed by +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#3-a This is level #3. + This time, we just enter +\family sans +Return +\family default +, then used +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + twice in a row. + We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level, + by entering +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + followed by +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +This is actually a +\family sans +Standard +\family default + environment, nested inside of +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +#3-a +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + So, it's at level #4. + We did this by entering +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +, then +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +, then changing the paragraph environment to +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works + for the +\family sans +Description +\family default +, +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default +, and +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environments! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here's another +\family sans +Standard +\family default + paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#4-a This is level #4. + We enter +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + and changed the paragraph environment back to +\family sans +List +\family default +. + Remember — we can't nest anything inside a +\family sans +Standard +\family default + environment, which is why we're still at level #4. + However, we +\emph on +can +\emph default + keep nesting things inside +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +#3-a +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{} +and this is level #6. + By now, you should know how we made these two. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#5-b Back to level #5. + Just enter +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + followed by a +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#4-b After another +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + followed by a +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +, we're back at level #4. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#3-b Back to level #3. + By now it should be obvious how we did this. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#2-b Back to level #2. + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1. + After this sentence, we will enter +\family sans +Return +\family default + and change the paragraph environment back to +\family sans +Standard +\family default + to end the list. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We could have also used the +\family sans +Description +\family default +, +\family sans +Quote +\family default +, +\family sans +Quotation +\family default +, or even the +\family sans +Verse +\family default + environment in place of the +\family sans +List +\family default + environment. + The example would have worked exactly the same. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Example 2: Inheritance +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +level. + Now we will enter +\family sans +Return +\family default +, then +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +, after +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +which, we will change to the +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is the +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment, at level #2. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Notice how the nested +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + not only inherits its margins from its parent environment ( +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default +), but also inherits its font and spacing! +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +We ended this example by entering +\family sans +Return +\family default +. + After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to +\family sans +Standard +\family default + and reset the nesting depth by using +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + once. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + and +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + Environments +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is level #1, in an +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + paragraph environment. + We're actually going to nest a bunch of these. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is level #2. + We used +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + followed by +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +. + Now, what happens if we nest an +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its + label be? An asterisk? +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +No! It's a bullet. + This is the +\emph on +first +\emph default + +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environment, even though it's at level #3. + So, its label is a bullet. + (We got here by using +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +, then +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +, then changing the environment to +\family sans +Itemize +\family default +.) +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Here's level #4, produced using +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +, then +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +. + We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\SpecialChar \ldots{} +to get to level #5. + This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default +. + Notice the type of numbering, it is +\emph on +lowercase Roman +\emph default +, because we are in the +\emph on +thirdfold +\emph default + +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment (that is, it is an +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + inside an +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + inside an +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +What happens if we +\emph on +don't +\emph default + change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What + type of numbering does LyX use? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Let's use +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + to decrease the depth after the next +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is level #4. + Look what type of label LyX is using! +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +This is level #3. + Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman + numeral as the label.Why? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is +\emph on +still +\emph default + a thirdfold +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment. + Notice, however, that LyX +\emph on +did +\emph default + reset the counter for the label. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Another +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + sequence, and we're back to level #2. + This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back + into the twofold-nested +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +The same thing happens if we do another +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Lastly, we reset the environment to +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling + LyX uses for the +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + and +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environments. + The number of other +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for + an +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + item. + The same rule applies for the +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + environment, as well. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Example 4: Going Bonkers +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +We're going to go totally nuts now. + We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into + the same detail with how we did it. + (level #1: +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +( +\family sans +Return, +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, Standard +\family default +: level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created + the example in parentheses someplace. + For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth. + The environment name is the name of the current environment. + Either before or after this, we will put in the level. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +( +\family sans +Return, Enumerate +\family default +: level #1) This is the next item in the list. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Verse +Now we will add verse. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +It will get much worse. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +( +\family sans +Return, +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, Verse +\family default +: level #2) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Bippitey boppitey boo! +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + +\family sans +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Here comes a table: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +one-fish +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +two-fish +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +red-fish +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +blue-fish +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Verse +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, Table, +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + 3 times, +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, Verse, +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +( +\family sans +Return, Enumerate +\family default +: level #1) This is another item. + Note that selecting a +\family sans +Table +\family default + resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth + 3 times to put the table inside the +\family sans +Verse +\family default + environment. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +We're now ending the +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + list and changing to +\family sans +Quotation +\family default +. + We're still at level #1. + We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments. + The next set of paragraphs is a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +quoted letter. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + We will nest both the +\family sans +Address +\family default + and +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default + environments inside of this one, then use another nested +\family sans +Quotation +\family default + for the letter body. + We will use +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + to preserve the depth. + Remember that you need to use +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + to create multiple lines inside the +\family sans +Address +\family default + and +\family sans +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Address +\family default + environments. + Here it goes: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Right Address +1234 Nowhere Rd. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Moosegroin, MT 00100 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +9-6-96 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Dear Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Fizlewitz: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control. + Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating + a backlog in our orders for methane. + We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order + as soon as possible. + In the meantime, we thank you for your patience. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +We do, however, now have a special on beef. + If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form + with your order, along with payment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +We thank you again for your patience. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Sincerely, +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Bill Hick +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Quotation +That ends that example! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with + just a few keystrokes. + We could have easily nested an +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + list inside of a +\family sans +Quotation +\family default + or +\family sans +Quote +\family default +, or put a +\family sans +Quote +\family default + inside of an +\family sans +Itemize +\family default + list. + You have a huge variety of options at your disposal. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Spacing, pagination and line breaks +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spacing +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime + you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers + you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot + be broken at the end of a line. + The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are + useful. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Protected Space +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Protected-Space" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spaces ! Protected +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the + line at that point. + This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Further documentation is given in section +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliography" + +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +section +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliography" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + A protected space is set with +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Protected +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space +\family default + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Horizontal Space +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Horizontal-Space" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spacing ! Horizontal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Horizontal Space +\family default +. + The length units are listed in Appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Units-available-in" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Inter-word Space +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Inter-word-Space" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spaces ! Inter-word +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries + to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters + at the ends of sentences. + There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this. + However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation + followed by a period; see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Abbreviations" + +\end_inset + + for examples. + To insert a normal space, select +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Interword +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space +\family default + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "space-insert normal" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Thin Space +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Thin-Space" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spaces ! Thin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +thin space +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +protected +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). + The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of + thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance, + inside abbreviations: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +D. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +E. + Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +or between values and units. + Compare for example this: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +10 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +kg (thin space) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +10 kg (normal space +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can insert thin spaces with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Thin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space +\family default + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "space-insert thin" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +More Spaces +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also insert the following space types: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Negative +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +thin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +space A line with a +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + negative thin space between the arrows. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Enspace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) A line with an +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \enskip{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + enspace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) space between the arrows. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Quad +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) A line with a +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \quad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + Quad +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) space between the arrows. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +QQuad +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) A line with a +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \qquad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + QQuad +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) space between the arrows. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Custom +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +space A line with +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hspace{} +\length 2cm +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm space between the arrows. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Width-of-the" + +\end_inset + + lists the different space sizes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Width-of-the" + +\end_inset + +Width of the different horizontal spaces. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Space +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Width +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Normal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Protected +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Thin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Negative thin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +-1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Enspace (0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Quad (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +QQuad (2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Horizontal Fills +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spacing ! Fills +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space + in a uniform fashion. + An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals + the remaining space between the left and right margins. + If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space + equally between themselves. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here are a few examples of what you can do with them: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +This is on the left side +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +This is on the right +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Left +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Middle +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Right +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Left +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +1/3 Left +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Right +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +That was an example in the +\family sans +Quote +\family default + environment. + Here +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + +is one in a standard paragraph. + It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it +\emph on +is +\emph default + sitting in-between the two arrows. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the +\family sans +Fill +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Pattern +\family default +s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dots: +\begin_inset space \dotfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Rule: +\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Left arrow: +\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Right arrow: +\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Up brace: +\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Down brace: +\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and +\emph on +not +\emph default + in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it. + This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line. + If you need space in this case anyway, set the +\family sans +Protect +\family default + option in the space dialog. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Phantom Space +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Phantom-Space" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spacing ! Phantom +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase. + For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +What is correct English?: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge would have been jumps the gun. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mr. + Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +has to be jumped +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mr. + Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +jumps +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Phantom +\family default +. + In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two + lines and insert +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + into the phantom inset (note the space after +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). + A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder). + That is why it is named +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +phantom +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space, + while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding + dimension. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Vertical Space +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Vertical-Space" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spacing ! Vertical +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Vertical +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space +\family default + dialog. + There you find the following sizes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +SmallSkip +\family default +, +\family sans +MedSkip +\family default + and +\family sans +BigSkip +\family default + are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document. + +\family sans +DefSkip +\family default + is the skip adjusted in the dialog +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + for the paragraph separation. + If you use indentation to separate paragraphs +\family sans +DefSkip +\family default + is equal to +\family sans +MedSkip +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +VFill +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spacing ! Fills +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page. + An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a +\family sans +Vfill +\family default + between them. + Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second + one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal. + +\family sans +VFill +\family default +s work like +\family sans +HFill +\family default +s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +HFill +\family default +s are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Horizontal-Space" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + If there are several +\family sans +VFill +\family default +s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves. + You can therefore use +\family sans +VFill +\family default +s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Custom +\family default + are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Units-available-in" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + +\series medium +If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of + a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option +\family sans +Protect +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Paragraph Alignment +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph ! Alignment +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can change the paragraph alignment with the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph Settings +\family default + dialog (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). + There are five possibilities: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Justified +\family default + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align block" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Left +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align left" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Right +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align right" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Center +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align center" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Default +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align default" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word + spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between + the left and right margins. + The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align right +This paragraph is right aligned, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +this one is centered, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align left +this one is left aligned. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Forced Page Breaks +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Page breaks ! Forced +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you + can force a page break where you want one. + Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking. + Only if you use a lot of +\family sans +Floats +\family default +, LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished + and you have checked in the preview to see if you +\emph on +really +\emph default + have to change the page breaking. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special + action. + This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +New +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Page +\family default +. + The second type, that is inserted via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Break +\family default +, ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out + the complete page. + This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page + on which only the last few lines are absent. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears + at the top of a page. + This is, of course, the wrong way to do it. + LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables + appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without + having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table. + See chapter +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes" + +\end_inset + + to learn more about +\family sans +Floats +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Clear Page Breaks +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Page breaks ! Clear +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed + directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them. + That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including + unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after + it, if necessary by adding pages. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can insert a clear page break with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Clear +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Page +\family default +. + When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Clear +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Double +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Page +\family default + to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand + page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Forced Line Breaks +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Line breaks +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks + the line. + You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ragged +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Line +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Break +\family default + or with +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +. + Another type that is inserted via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Justified +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Line +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Break +\family default + or with +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert linebreak" +\end_inset + + breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between + the page margins. + This is useful to avoid +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +fringes +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as + LaTeX is very good at line breaking. + There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively + to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Quote" + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Verse" + +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Address-Usage" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Horizontal Lines +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Horizontal-Lines" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Horizontal lines +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +In the dialog +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Horizontal +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Line +\family default + you can insert horizontal lines. + The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline + of the current text line or the paragraph. + The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Characters and Symbols +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard. + You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example, + characters needed for French with an English keyboard. + See section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping" + +\end_inset + + for information on how this is done. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you + can use the +\family sans +Symbols +\family default + dialog via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Symbols +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed + when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences. + But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Fonts and Text Styles +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Fonts-and-Text" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Font Types +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Font ! Types +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are two types of fonts: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Vector +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fonts +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fonts ! Vector- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. + characters) in the font. + This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are + well suited for scaling to any requested size. + This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the + curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph. + This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes. + Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed + to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them. + But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes. + That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font + sizes than at small ones. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +The font types +\family typewriter +TrueType +\family default +, +\family typewriter +OpenType +\family default +, and +\family typewriter +Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\family default + are vector fonts. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Bitmap +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fonts +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fonts ! Bitmap- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they + will look good at all the sizes they are meant for. + However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each + pixel is enlarged into several pixels. + It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an + image manipulation program. + In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in + several fixed sizes typically from around 8 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pixels high up to 34 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful. + The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary + to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than + scalable fonts. + The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have + to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Bitmap fonts are named +\family typewriter +Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\family default + in PostScript- and PDF-documents. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are + designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes. + So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts. + That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs + use scalable fonts. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards + specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font. + For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current + font to emphasize text, you use an +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +emphasized style +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + instead. + This concept fits in perfectly with LyX. + In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting + details. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaTeX font support +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts. + That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your + operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX + distribution. + The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts, + which have to be provided by additional files and packages. + The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared + to a word processor. + On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts + are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable + across different machines. + Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a + lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial + fonts. + In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface + (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Document-Font" + +\end_inset + + for details). + However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code + in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired + font). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly + to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX + and LuaTeX. + Both engines are supported by LyX. + By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font + that is installed on your system. + The next section describes how to use these fonts. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci +es; so you might have to experiment. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature + as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Document Font and Font size +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Document-Font" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Font ! Size +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Font +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can set the document fonts in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dialog. + In the +\family sans +Fonts +\family default + section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the + three different font shapes — roman (serif), +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif +\family default + and +\family typewriter +typewriter +\family default + (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors + for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit + with the roman font. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you select +\family sans +Use non-T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX fonts +\family default +, you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system. + This requires that you use +\family sans +PDF (XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF (LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + or +\family sans +DVI (LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + as the output format, i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + +). + You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts. + Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists + (roman, sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family. + Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due + to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{} +or font failures. + LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the + font include +\family sans +Default +\family default + and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution. + If you select +\family sans +Default, +\family default + the font that is preset by the current document class is used. + In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +Computer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + ( +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +) or +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +European Computer Modern +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + ( +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +), but some classes preset different default fonts. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + and +\family typewriter +ec +\family default + are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when + you read the PDF in a zoomed size. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in +\family typewriter +Adobe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Reader +\family default + version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font + renderer. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font. + Depending on how your document should look, you can either: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +select the +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of + +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +/ +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +. + +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + as the default font. + It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes. + Except for some details, where the appearance was improved, +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + looks identical to +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +One difference is improved kerning. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +or select the +\family sans +AE +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Almost +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European) +\family default + fonts in (the rare) case that +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate + the look of +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +/ +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +. + +\family typewriter +AE +\family default + is a virtual font. + Virtual means that it +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +steals +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + outline +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +-glyphs from other fonts. + This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French + guillemets ( +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +« +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +» +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Loading the LaTeX-package +\series bold +aeguill +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! aeguill +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + with the document preamble line +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[ec]{aeguill} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series default +will fix the guillemet problem. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + and that accented characters are not +\emph on +one +\emph default + glyph, but built of +\emph on +two +\emph default + characters, the accent and the letter. + Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents + using the +\family typewriter +AE +\family default + fonts. + If you search for example for the French word +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +rève +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches + for the glyph +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + è +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and not for the glyph +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + e + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + ̀ +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +If you do not like the look of +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +/ +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +, you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + or +\family typewriter + Palatino +\family default +. + Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif and typewriter fonts, +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g., +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + selects +\family sans +Helvetica +\family default + for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +a real font +\emph on +family +\emph default + (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +in case of +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + oder +\family sans +Computer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + but you can also select your own. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +The differences between roman, +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif +\family default + and +\family typewriter +typewriter +\family default + fonts are explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +The font +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + was originally designed for newspapers. + Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit + into the small newspaper columns. + Therefore +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For the font size there are generally four possible values: +\family sans +Default, 10 +\family default +, +\family sans +11 +\family default + and +\family sans +12 +\family default +. + Some classes provide additional sizes. + The size of +\family sans +Default +\family default + depends on the class you are using. + In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note that the font size is the +\emph on +base size +\emph default +. + That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those + used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value. + You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the +\family sans +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style +\family default + dialog if needed. + The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Default +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Family +\family default + selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should + be roman, sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif or typewriter. + The +\family sans +Default +\family default + selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override + this. + In most cases, +\family sans +Default +\family default + is equal to +\family sans +roman +\family default +, but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family typewriter + +\family sans +LaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X font encoding +\family default + selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to + the LaTeX-package +\series bold +fontenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! fontenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (see also sec. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" + +\end_inset + +). + Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this. + Unless you have specific reasons, use +\family sans +Default +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With some fonts, the checkboxes +\family sans +Use Old Style Figures +\family default + and +\family sans +Use True Small Caps +\family default + are available. + These are extra features some fonts provide. + If +\family sans +Use Old Style Figures +\family default + is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) + are used. + Old style figures are the numerals (0 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +-- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase + letters. + +\family sans +Use True Small Caps +\family default + determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made + of scaled capitals. + Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look + better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The field +\family sans +CJK +\family default + allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify + a font to display the script characters. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +CJK +\series default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + So this has no effect for the document language +\family sans +Japanese +\family default + that does not use +\series bold +CJK +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does +\emph on +not +\emph default + change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output; + this is part of the WYSIWYM concept. + LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences +\family default + dialog, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Screen-Fonts" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Using Different Character Styles +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Character Styles +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Text Style +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for + certain paragraph environments. + LyX supports two character styles, +\family sans +Emphasized +\family default + and +\family sans +Noun +\family default +. + You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the + toolbar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To activate the +\family sans +Noun +\family default + style, do one of the following: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +click on the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +use the key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +These commands are all toggles. + That is, if +\family sans +Noun +\family default + style is already active, they deactivate it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +One typically uses the +\family sans +Noun +\family default + style for proper names. + For example: +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\noun on +Matthias Ettrich +\noun default + is the original author of LyX. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A more widely used character style is the +\family sans +Emphasized +\family default + style. + You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the +\family sans +Emphasized +\family default + style by: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +clicking on the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +using the keybindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normally the +\family sans +Emphasized +\family default + style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag +es use a different font. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We've been using the +\family sans +Emphasized +\family default + style all over the place in this document. + Here's one more example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation + +\emph on +Do not overuse character styles! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +It's also a warning in addition to an example. + One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation. + Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid + the common tendency to overuse character styles. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can always reset to the default font using the key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-default" +\end_inset + + or the dialog +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Customized +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fine-Tuning with the +\family sans +Text Style +\family default + dialog +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Text Style +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so + LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style. + For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet + requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations. + Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts + from ordinary dialog. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a + warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles! +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and + tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To use custom character styles, open the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Customized +\family default + dialog or press the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +. + There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different + font property that you can choose. + You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +change +\family default +, which keeps the current state of that property. + The item +\family sans +Reset +\family default + will reset the property to whatever is the default. + You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph + environments all at once. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The font properties, and their options (in addition to +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +change +\family default + and +\family sans +Reset +\family default +) are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Family +\family default + The +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +overall look +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + of the font. + The possible options are: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Roman +\family default + This is the Roman font family. + Normally a serif font. + It's also the default family. + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-roman" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Serif +\family default + +\family sans +This is the Sans Serif font family. + +\family default + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-sans" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Typewriter +\family default + +\family typewriter +This is the Typewriter font family. + +\family default + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-typewriter" +\end_inset + + +\family sans +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Series +\family default + This corresponds to the print weight. + Options are: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Medium +\family default + This is the Medium font series. + It's also the default series. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Bold +\family default + +\series bold +This is the Bold font series. + +\series default + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-bold" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Shape +\family default + As the name implies. + Options are: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Upright +\family default + This is the Upright font shape. + It's also the default shape. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Italic +\family default + +\shape italic +This +\shape default + +\family sans +\shape italic +i +\family default +s the Italic font shape +\shape default +\emph on +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Slanted +\family default + +\shape slanted +This is the Slanted font shape +\shape default + (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Small +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Caps +\family default + +\shape smallcaps +This is the Small caps font shape +\shape default +\noun on +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Color +\family default + Alters the text color. + Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors. + Besides +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +color +\family default +, which means that the document default color set in +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Color +\family default + for +\family sans +Main +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\family default + is used, you can choose between +\family sans +Black +\family default +, +\family sans +White +\family default +, +\family sans +Red +\family default +, +\family sans +Green +\family default +, +\family sans +Blue +\family default +, +\family sans +Cyan +\family default +, +\family sans +Magenta +\family default + and +\family sans +Yellow +\family default + text. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! Text +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Language +\family default + This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from + the language of the document. + Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change + (only within LyX). +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document, + LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically. + When using the spell checking (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Spellchecking" + +\end_inset + +) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Size +\family default + Alters the size of the font. + You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually + proportional to the document font size. + Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of + what you want to do. + The options are: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tiny +\family default + +\size tiny +This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Tiny +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size. + +\size default + (key bindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size tiny" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Smallest +\family default + +\size scriptsize +This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Smallest +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size +\size default +. + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size scriptsize" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Smaller +\family default + +\size footnotesize +This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Smaller +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size. + +\size default + (key bindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size footnotesize" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Small +\family default + +\size small +This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Small +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size. + +\size default + (key bindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size small" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Normal +\family default + This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Normal +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size. + It's also the default size. + (key bindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size normal" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Large +\family default + +\size large +This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Large +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size. + +\size default + (key bindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size large" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Larger +\family default + +\size larger +This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Larger +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size. + +\size default + (key bindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size larger" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Largest +\family default + +\size largest +This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Largest +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size. + +\size default + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size largest" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Huge +\family default + +\size huge +This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Huge +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size. + +\size default + (key bindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size huge" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Huger +\family default + +\size giant +This is the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Huger +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font size. + +\size default + (key bindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size giant" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Increase +\family default + This increases the size by one step (for instance, from +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Largest +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Huge +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size increase" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Decrease +\family default + This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Normal +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Small +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size decrease" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +We warn you +\emph on +yet again +\emph default +: don't go crazy with this feature. + You should almost never need to change the font size. + LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments + — use those instead. + This is here for fine-tuning only! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Misc +\family default + Here you can change a few other things at the character level. + Options are: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Emph +\family default + +\emph on +This is text with emphasize on +\emph default +. + This might seem like the same as +\shape italic +Italic +\shape default +, but it is actually a bit different. + Emphasized is a +\emph on +logical +\emph default + attribute. + That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized + text. + Normally this font is equal to italic. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Underbar +\family default + +\bar under +This is text with Underbar on. + +\bar default + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-underline" +\end_inset + + +\family sans +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family default +Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days, + when you could not change fonts. + One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters. + This is only possible in LyX because some people +\emph on +may +\emph default + need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Double +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +underbar +\family default + +\uuline on +This is text with Double underbar on. + +\uuline default + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-underunderline" +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think + about double underbar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Wavy +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +underbar +\family default + +\uwave on +This is text with Wavy underbar on. + +\uwave default + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-underwave" +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it. + Keep antinausea pills handy. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Strikeout +\family default + +\strikeout on +This is text with Strikeout on. + +\strikeout default + (key binding +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-strikeout" +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been + changed in the meantime. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Noun +\family default + +\noun on +This is text with Noun on. + +\noun default + Like +\family sans +Emph +\family default +, this is a logical attribute. + Normally it's equivalent to +\family sans +Small +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Caps +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from. + Once you have chosen a new character style via the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Customized +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +) dialog, the settings are saved. + You can activate them by using the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "textstyle-apply" +\end_inset + +. + The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog + isn't visible. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To completely reset the character style to the default, use +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-default" +\end_inset + +. + If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed + (suppose you just set the shape to +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +slanted +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and the series to +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +bold +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +), set the +\family sans +Toggle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +all +\family default + switch and press +\family sans +Apply +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You should also know something about the differences between the three main + font types +\family sans +serif +\family default +, +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif +\family default +, and +\family sans +typewriter +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Typewriter +\family default + is a so called +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +monospaced +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + font, which means every character has the same width; the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +i +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is as wide as the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +m +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + Here is an example +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +no +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +typewriter text +\family default + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +For more on phantoms see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Phantom-Space" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +no typewriter text +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Serif +\family default + fonts use characters with serifs. + These are the small +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +appendices +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + at the ends of the strokes that form the character. + The following example shows the difference: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +text with serifs +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +text without serifs +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading. + These fonts are therefore used as default (named +\family sans +roman +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Sans serif +\family default + is not recommended for use as a base type. + This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts. + We use it in this document to highlight menu names. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Toggling +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + refers to applying or removing font properties. + When a property is marked for toggling in the +\family sans +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style +\family default + dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause + the property to be removed. + If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that + currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle + and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and + G. + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Never toggled +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +always toggled +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + mean that you do not control the toggling behavior. + For the properties on the left side of the dialog ( +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Family +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + etc.), toggling behavior is up to you. + If +\family sans +Toggle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +all +\family default + is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none + of them are. + Finally, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Reset +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is never toggled. + If you, for example, set +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Series +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Reset +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and select +\family sans +Toggle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +all +\family default +, then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default + series ( +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Medium +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +), no matter how many times you apply the style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! + They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Printing and Previewing +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Overview +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation + using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece. + Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what + goes on behind-the-scenes. + We cover this information in much greater detail in the +\emph on +Additional Features +\emph default + manual as well. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend. + LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent + confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX. + LyX is what you use to do your actual writing. + Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output. + This happens in two stages: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX, + generating a file with the extension, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default + file to produce printable output. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Output file formats +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +File formats +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Output-file-formats" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Simple text (ASCII) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +File formats ! ASCII +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This file type has the extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.txt +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +American Standard Code for Information Interchange +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (ASCII). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can export your document to ASCII with the menu +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Plain +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\family default +. + However, this will not export any externally generated material such as + a BibTeX bibliography (section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bibliography-databases" + +\end_inset + +). + If your document includes such material, use +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator +More +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formats +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Options +\family default + and then select +\family sans +Plain +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii) +\family default +. + This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating + thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +LaTeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +File formats ! LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This file type has the extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process + your document. + If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process + it manually with console commands. + The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever + you view or export your document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. + The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Export" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +DVI +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +File formats ! DVI +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This file type has the extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.dvi +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + It is called +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +device-independent +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine + to another without needing to do any sort of conversion. + DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats, + like PostScript. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them. + So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs. + Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make + them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer + when you view the DVI. + So we recommend using PDF for files with many images. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can export your document to DVI by the menus +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\family default + or +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X). + +\family default + The latter option uses the program +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +. + +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct + font access (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + +). + LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next + standard TeX processor. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PostScript +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +File formats ! PostScript +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This file type has the extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.ps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + PostScript was developed by the company +\family typewriter +Adobe +\family default + as a printer language. + The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the + file. + PostScript can be seen as a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +programming language +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack +age +\series bold +pstricks +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! pstricks +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PostScript can only contain images in the format +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Encapsulated PostScript +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (EPS, file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.eps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). + As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has + to convert them in the background to EPS. + If, for example, you have 50 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +images in your document, LyX has to do 50 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +conversions when you view or export your document the first time. + This might slow down your workflow with LyX. + So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as + EPS to avoid this problem. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can export to PostScript using the menu +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator +PostScript +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PDF +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +File formats ! PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This file type has the extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.pdf +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Portable Document Format +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (PDF) developed by +\family typewriter +Adobe +\family default + was derived from PostScript. + It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript. + As the name +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +portable +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output + looks exactly the same. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Joint Photographic Experts Group +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (JPG, file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + or +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpeg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Portable Network Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (PNG, file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.png +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). + You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the + background to one of these formats. + But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion + will slow down your workflow. + So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can export your document to PDF via the menu +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export +\family default + in different ways: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) This uses the program +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default + which converts your file directly to PDF. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) This uses the program +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + which converts your file directly to PDF. + +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + is a new engine, derived from +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +, that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font + access (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + +). + LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next + standard TeX processor. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) This uses the program +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default + that converts your file directly to PDF. + +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default + is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct + font access (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + +). + It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example, + vertically written Japanese. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) This uses the program +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default + that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to + PDF. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) This uses the program +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default + that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file. + The PostScript-version is produced by the program +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step. + So this export variant consists of three conversions. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We recommend using +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + because +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default + supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and + works without problems. + If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{} +or specific OpenType fonts, you might + want to try out +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + or +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature + as +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +XHTML +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +FileFormats ! XHTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +HTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This file type has the extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.xhtml +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers. + It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them. + When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats + suitable for the purpose. + For the math output you can choose in the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Output +\family default + between different formats, which are described in section +\emph on +Math Output in XHTML +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Additional +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Features +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +XHTML output remains +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +under development +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, and not all LyX features are supported yet. + See the chapter +\emph on +LyX and the World Wide Web +\emph default +, in the +\emph on +Additional Features +\emph default + manual, for more information. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LyXHTML +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Previewing +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Preview +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page + breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu + +\family sans +\bar under +V +\bar default +iew +\family default + and choose +\family sans +\bar under +V +\bar default +iew +\family default + or use the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + +. + A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default + output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:File-Formats" + +\end_inset + +) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings + (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + +). + Further output formats can be selected via +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +View (Other Formats) +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same + viewer window using the menu +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Update +\family default + or +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Update (Other Formats) +\family default +, respectively. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary + directory. + To have a real output, export your document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Printing the File from within LyX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Printing-the-File" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print + it directly from within LyX. + To print a file, select the menu +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Print +\family default + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + +) or click on the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + +. + LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI. + This file is then processed by the program +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program +\family typewriter +Ghostscript +\family default +. + Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can set the following print parameters in the +\family sans +Print +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Destination +\family default + box: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Printer +\family default + This is the name of the printer to print to. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Note that this printer name is for the program +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +. + That means +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + has to be configured for this printer name. + The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Printer" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + The printer should understand PostScript. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +File +\family default + The name of a file to print to. + The output will be a PostScript file. + It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full + path. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only + odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options + are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer: + you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side. + Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down. + By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack + of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +A few Words about Typography +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typography +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hyphens +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dashes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In LyX, the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + character comes in four lengths: the +\emph on +hyphen +\emph default +, the +\emph on +en dash +\emph default +, the +\emph on +em dash +\emph default +, and the minus sign: +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +name +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +output +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +inserted with +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +hyphen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in text +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +en dash +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +– +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Special +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Symbols +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +em dash +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +— +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Special +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Symbols +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +minus sign +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $-$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in math mode +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + character multiple times in a row. + They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in + the final output, but not in LyX. + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + gives a en dash, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + a em dash. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in + math mode and has a length of its own. + Here are some examples: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +line- and page-breaks +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +hyphen +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +From A–Z +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +en dash +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Oh — there's a dash. +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +em dash +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +minus sign +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hyphenation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hyphenation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Hyphenation" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output. + Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + following the rules of the document language. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the + +\family sans +typewriter +\family default + font and with unusual constructs, like +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +h3knix/m0n0wall +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points + manually. + This is done with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Hyphenation +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Point +\family default +. + These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX. + If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated. + Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document + in the form +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +A-b c +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + LaTeX would then see the hyphen +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + as a hyphenation possibility. + Hyphenating at this point would look ugly. + To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox + as described in section +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Prevent Hyphenation +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Punctuation Marks +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Punctuation marks +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Abbreviations and End of Sentence +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Abbreviations" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX + automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations. + LaTeX then adds the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +appropriate amount of space. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and + the next word. + Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word + gets after another word. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does + not work in all cases. + If a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +. +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's + at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here are some examples of +\emph on +correct +\emph default + abbreviations and of the end of a sentence: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +M. + Butterfly +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Don't worry. + Be happy. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. + this is too much space! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +This is I. + It's okay. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To fix this problem, use one of the following: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Use an +\family sans +Inter-word +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space +\family default + after lowercase abbreviations (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Inter-word-Space" + +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spaces ! inter-word +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Use a +\family sans +Thin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space +\family default + between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Thin-Space" + +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spaces ! thin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Use an +\family sans +End +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +of +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sentence +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +period +\family default + found under the +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Special +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Character +\family default + menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing. + This function is also bound to +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence" +\end_inset + + for easy access. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +this is too much space! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +This is I\SpecialChar \@. + It's okay. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences. + If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX + will take care of this. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors: + Check out the +\family sans +Check +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TeX +\family default + feature described in the section +\emph on +Checking TeX +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Additional Features +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Quotes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typography ! Quotes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Quotes | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Typography +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX usually sets quotes correctly. + Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text, + and use a closing quote at the end. + For example, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +open close +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The keyboard character, +\family sans +" +\family default +, generates this automatically. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can specify what character the +\family sans +" +\family default + key produces using the submenu +\family sans +Language +\family default + of the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dialog in the box +\family sans +Quote Style +\family default +. + There are six choices: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Use quotes like +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Use quotes like +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Use quotes like +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Use quotes like +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Use quotes like +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes ald +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes ard +\end_inset + + +\family default + Use quotes like +\begin_inset Quotes ald +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes ard +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For single quotes you have to use the shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "quote-insert single" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ligatures +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typography ! Ligatures +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ligatures | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Typography +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Ligatures" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and + print them as single characters. + These groups are known as +\emph on +ligatures +\emph default +. + Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too + in the output. + Here are the standard ligatures: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ff +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +fi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +fl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ffi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ffl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word. + While a ligature may be okay in the word, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +graffiti, +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + it looks really weird in compound words, such as +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +cufflink +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + or the German +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Dorffest. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + To break a ligature, use +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ligature +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Break. + +\family default + This changes +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +cufflinks +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +links +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Dorffest +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +fest +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LyX's Proper Names +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Proper names +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with + characters in different sizes and heights. + LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized + as a proper name when you type it in LyX as +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +command +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section. + To create proper names omit the TeX Code. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the + following proper names: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LyX The name of the game, write +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to produce it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +TeX The program used by LaTeX, write +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to produce it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeX The program used by LyX, write +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to produce it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX2e +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to produce it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +2 +\begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers. + For example the version number of TeX converges to the number +\begin_inset Formula $\pi$ +\end_inset + +: The actual version is +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +TeX-3.141592 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, the previous one was +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +TeX-3.14159 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings, + you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word. + In LyX this will look like +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/LaTeX.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +For more about TeX Code, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:TeX-Code" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Units +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typography ! Units +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal + space between two words. + As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is + smaller. + To get such a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +half space +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + for units use the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Thin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space +\family default + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "space-insert thin" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here is an example to show the differences: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +space between number and unit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +half space between number and unit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Widows and Orphans +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typography ! Widows and orphans +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page + happened to end. + There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text. + You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading + for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line + of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line + of a paragraph at the top of a new page. + These bits of text became known as +\emph on +widows +\emph default + and +\emph on +orphans +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading. + That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments. + But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line + of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules + built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there + specifically to prevent widows and orphans. + This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can + tweak that behavior. + Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + or +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +) may have more information. + You will almost never need to worry about this, however. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:Floats-and-Notes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. + There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Notes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Notes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LyX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as + a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(xxx) +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Comment +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Greyed +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can + set in the document settings under +\family sans +Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Greyed-out +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +notes +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +This is the text +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +This is an example footnote within a greyed out note. + In this document the color of this note type is set to blue. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + of a comment that appears in the output. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notes are inserted with the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + or the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note +\family default +. + Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Footnotes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Footnotes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Footnotes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the + menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Footnote +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "footnote-insert" +\end_inset + +, +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +you will see +\family default +\series default +\bar default + a box like this: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + + +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no + This box is LyX's representation of your footnote. + If you +\family default +\series default +\bar default + left-click on +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +foot +\family roman + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +\bar default + +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +label, the box will +\family default +\series default +\bar default + be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it. + Clicking on the box label again will close +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +the +\family default +\series default +\bar default + box +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +. + If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it + and click on the footnote +\family default +\series default +\bar default + toolbar +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +button +\family default +\series default +\bar default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here is an example footnote: +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text + position where the footnote box is placed. + The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page. + The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class. + LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get + other schemes using special LaTeX-commands. + T +\family roman +h +\family default +ey are described in the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Marginal Notes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Marginal notes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Marginal-Notes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX. + When you insert a margin note via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marginal +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Note +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "marginalnote-insert" +\end_inset + +, you will see +\family roman +\series medium +a +\family default +\series default + +\family roman +\series medium +box with the +\family default +\series default + +\family roman +\series medium +label +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +margin +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + appearing within your text. + This box is LyX's representation of your margin +\family default +\series default +al +\family roman +\series medium +note. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note. +\family roman +\series medium + +\begin_inset Marginal +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align left +This is a marginal note. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents. + In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even + pages, right on odd pages. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For further information about marginal notes see the section +\emph on +Margin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Notes +\emph default + in the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Graphics and Images +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Images +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Graphics +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Graphics" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position + you want and click on the toolbar icon +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + or select +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Graphics +\family default + from the menu. + Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters. + The +\family sans +\bar under +G +\bar default +raphics +\family default + tab allows you to choose your image file. + The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling + factor. + The scaling units are explained in Appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Units-available-in" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the tab +\family sans +Clipping +\family default + it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width + of the image in the output. + The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button + +\family sans +Get +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +from +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +file +\family default +. + The option +\family sans +Clip +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +to +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bounding +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +box +\family default + will only print the image region within the given coordinates. + Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore + the tab +\family sans +Clipping +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X options +\family default + tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options. + In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX. + The option +\family sans +Draft +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mode +\family default + has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame + with the image size is printed. + The option +\family sans +Don't +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +unzip +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +export +\family default + is explained in the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual in section +\emph on +Graphics Dialog +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image. + Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are + in the text. + This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/mobius.eps + scale 70 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put + the image into a float, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Figure-Floats" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Image Formats +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Images ! Formats +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Image-Formats" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can insert images in any known file format. + But as we explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Output-file-formats" + +\end_inset + +, every output document format allows only a few image formats. + LyX therefore uses the program +\family typewriter +ImageMagick +\family default + in the background to convert the images to the right format. + To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background, + use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Output-file-formats" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Bitmap +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form. + They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms. + Well-known bitmap image formats are +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Graphics Interchange Format +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (GIF, file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.gif +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +GIF|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Image formats +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Portable Network Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (PNG, file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.png +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PNG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Image formats +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Joint Photographic Experts Group +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (JPG, file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + or +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpeg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +JPG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Image formats +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Scalable +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without + data loss. + The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because + presentations are always scaled by the beamer. + Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Scalable image formats can be +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Scalable Vector Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (SVG, file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.svg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +SVG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Image formats +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Encapsulated PostScript +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (EPS, file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.eps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +EPS|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Image formats +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Portable Document Format +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (PDF, file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.pdf +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + We say +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +can be +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the + result will not be scalable. + In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original + image. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only +\emph on +vice versa +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Grouping of Image Settings +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Images ! Settings grouping +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing + group. + Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image + of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in + the same way. + So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the + need to manually change each of them. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A new group can be set by pressing the button +\family sans +Open +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +new +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +group +\family default + in the +\family sans + Graphics +\family default + dialog in the +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X options +\family default + tab. + Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image + and checking the name of the desired group. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Tables +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tables +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Tables" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can insert a table using either the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "tabular-insert" +\end_inset + + or the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Table +\family default +. + A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns. + The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated + from the rest of the table. + This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row + have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above + them. + Here is an example table: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +A +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +B +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\size normal +\noun off +\color none + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +C +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +The Table dialog +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and + then choosing +\family sans +More\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default +. + This brings up the table dialog. + Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the + cursor is placed currently. + Most of the dialog options also work on selections. + This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is + done on all of your selection. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In addition to the table dialog, the +\family sans +table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +toolbar +\family default + helps you in setting table properties. + It appears if the cursor is inside a table. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the tab +\family sans +Table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row. + If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the + current cell respectively. + The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width + is given. + A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs + of text, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Table-Cells" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell + using the check box +\family sans +Multicolumn +\family default + or +\family sans +Multirow +\family default +. + This will merge the cells to +\emph on +one +\emph default + cell, spread over more than one column/row. + Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width, + and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell. + Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one + in the last row without the upper border: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +abc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +def ghi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +jkl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +A +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +B +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +C +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +D +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table. + They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells, + explained in the chapter +\emph on +Tables +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. + You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +degrees counterclockwise. + These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Most DVI-viewers are +\emph on +not +\emph default + able to display rotations. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Borders +\family default + tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column. + The button +\family sans +Default +\family default + adds lines for all cell borders. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Longtables +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tables ! Longtables +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Longtables +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option +\family sans +Use +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +long +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +table +\family default + in the tab +\family sans +Longtable +\family default + of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages. + Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Header +\family default +: The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options + defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable. + except for the first page, if +\family sans +First +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +header +\family default + is defined. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +First +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +header +\family default +: The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options + defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Footer +\family default +: The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options + defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable, + except for the last page, if +\family sans +Last +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +footer +\family default + is defined. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Last +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +footer +\family default +: The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options + defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Caption: The first row is reset as a single column. + You can now insert there the table caption via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Caption +\family default +. + More about longtable captions can be found in the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also specify a row where the table is split. + If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware + that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as + +\emph on +empty +\emph default +. + In this context, first means first in this order: +\family sans +Footer, Last +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +footer, +\family default + +\family sans +Header, +\family default + +\family sans +First +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +header +\family default +; see the following longtable to see how it works: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Example Phone List (ignore the names) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +NAME +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Example Phone List +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +NAME +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +continue ... +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +999 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +End +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Table Cells +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tables ! Cells +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Table-Cells" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table. + All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell. + Font sizes and shapes can also be altered. + But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like +\family sans +Section* +\family default +, etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width + for the column in the table dialog. + Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell + is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width. + An example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +This is a multi-line entry in a table. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +5 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +6 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +This is longer now. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +7 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +8 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +This is a multi-line entry in a table. + This is longer now. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +9 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well. + You can even cut and paste more than one row. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not + be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3. + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Selection with the mouse or with +\family sans +Shift +\family default + plus the arrow keys works as usual. + You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting + the selection from outside the table. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Floats +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Floats +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Floats" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't + have a fixed location. + It can +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +float +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best. + +\family sans +Footnotes +\family default + and +\family sans +Margin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Notes +\family default + are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are + too many notes on the current page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout. + Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace + and pages without text. + As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and + the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text. + Floats are therefore numbered. + Referencing is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Cross-References" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To insert a float, use the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Float +\family default +. + A box with a caption will be inserted into your document. + The label will automatically be translated to the document language in + the output. + After the label you can insert the caption text. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Floats ! Captions +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate + paragraph within the float. + To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box + by left-clicking on the box label. + A closed float box looks like this: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/floatQt4.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + + – a gray button with a red label. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors + that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Examples +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Figure Floats +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Figure-Floats" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Floats ! Figure floats +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Platypus-distorted" + +\end_inset + + was created using the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Figure +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert figure" +\end_inset + +). + The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and + using the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Graphics +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + +). + The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor + to the left or right of the image and using the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/platypus.eps + lyxscale 50 + width 50col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Platypus-distorted" + +\end_inset + +A severely distorted platypus in a float. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference + to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Label +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + +) and refer to it using the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cross-Reference +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +). + It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using + vague references like +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +the figure above +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it + might not be +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +above +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + at all. + For more about cross-references, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Cross-References" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you + might want to use two images with separate subcaptions. + This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats. + Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures + as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:List-of-Figures" + +\end_inset + +. + Figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" + +\end_inset + + is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side. + You can also set the images one below the other. + Figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Undefinable" + +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Platypus" + +\end_inset + + are the subfigures. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Undefinable" + +\end_inset + +Undefinable +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Platypus" + +\end_inset + +Platypus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/platypus.eps + lyxscale 60 + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Two-distorted-images" + +\end_inset + +Two distorted images. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Table Floats +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Floats ! Table floats +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Table floats can be inserted using the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Table +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert table" +\end_inset + +. + They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in + the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures + and that the label begins with “tab:”. + Table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Table-float" + +\end_inset + + is a table float. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Table-float" + +\end_inset + +A table float. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Joe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Mary +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Ted +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +a & b\\ +c & d +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +More Information +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Floats ! Details +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats. + It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the + float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float + caption. + All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter + +\emph on +Floats +\emph default + in the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Minipages +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Minipages +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Minipages" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, + called a minipage. + Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +apply. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Box +\family default +. + Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage + and its alignment within the page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "30col%" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +This is a minipage. + The text is set in an italic style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs + another formatting. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use +\family sans +Horizontal Fills +\family default + as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Horizontal-Space" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text. + This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text. + This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another + box type. + All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter +\emph on +Boxes +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Mathematical Formulas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formulas | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Math +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. + There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Basic Math Editing +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Basics +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-mode on" +\end_inset + + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-mode" +\end_inset + +). + That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its + corners. + That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate + what level of nesting within the formula you are at. + You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math +\family default + menu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done + with the +\family sans +math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +toolbar +\family default +, that appears if the cursor is in a formula. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas. + Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This is a line with an inline formula +\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ +\end_inset + + in it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate + paragraph, like this one: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +A=B +\] + +\end_inset + +You can only number and reference displayed formulas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands. + For example, typing +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +alpha +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ +\end_inset + +. + Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Navigating in Formulas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Navigating +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is + achieved with the arrow keys. + LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted. + The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula. + Pressing +\family sans +Space +\family default + will leave a formula construct (a square root +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ +\end_inset + +, or parentheses +\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ +\end_inset + +, or a matrix +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + +). + Pressing +\family sans +Escape +\family default + will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula. + +\family sans +Tab +\family default + can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the + cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Space +\family default +, printed in this document as +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting + the space character (visible space). +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between + characters, but it does exit a nested structure. + For this reason, you have to be careful about using +\family sans +Space +\family default +. + For example, if you want +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ +\end_inset + +, type +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +2x+1 +\series default + and not +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +2x +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + ++1 +\series default +, since in the latter case only the +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Formula $2x$ +\end_inset + + +\family default + will be under the square root sign: +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled + in, such as: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +\lambda_{1}\\ + & \ddots\\ + & & \lambda_{n} +\end{array}\right) +\] + +\end_inset + +If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing + in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Selecting Text +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can select text within a formula in two different ways. + Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press +\family sans +Shift +\family default + and a cursor movement key to select text. + It will be highlighted as with regular text selection. + Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way. + That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula, + but not in a normal text region in LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Exponents and Subscripts +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Exponents +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Subscripts +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-superscript" +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-subscript" +\end_inset + +), but it is often much easier to use a command. + To get +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + +, type in a formula +\series bold +x^2 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default +. + The final +\family sans +Space +\family default + puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression. + If you type +\series bold +x^2y +\series default +, you will get +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ +\end_inset + +, to get +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ +\end_inset + +, type +\series bold +x^2 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +y +\series default +. + If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the + circumflex +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +^ +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, you have to use an extra +\family sans +Space +\family default + to separate the circumflex and the character. + For example, if you want +\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ +\end_inset + +, type +\series bold +x^ +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +a +\series default +. + Subscripts are similar: To get +\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ +\end_inset + +, type +\series bold +a_1 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fractions +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Fractions +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Create a fraction either with the command +\series bold + +\backslash +frac +\series default + or by using the icon +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\frac" +\end_inset + + in the +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default +. + You will be presented with an empty fraction. + The cursor is above the fraction line. + To move it to the bottom, simply press +\family sans +Down +\family default +. + To move back up, press +\family sans +Up +\family default +. + Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} +2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 +\end{array}\right)}\right] +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Roots +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Roots +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Roots can be created using the +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default + buttons +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\sqrt" +\end_inset + + or +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\root" +\end_inset + + or the commands +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default + or +\series bold + +\backslash +root +\series default +. + With the command +\series bold + +\backslash +root +\series default + you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default + always produces a square root. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Operators with Limits +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Sums +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Integrals +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Operators-with-Limits" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sum ( +\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ +\end_inset + +) and integral ( +\begin_inset Formula $\int$ +\end_inset + +) operators are very often decorated with limits. + These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter + a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol. + The sum operator will automatically place its +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +limits +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline + formulas, as in +\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ +\end_inset + +, versus +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e +\] + +\end_inset + +Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula + types. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in + display mode. + The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly + behind the operator and using the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Limits +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Type +\family default + or entering +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-limits" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certain other mathematical expressions also have this +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +moving limits +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + feature, such as +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Limits +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x), +\] + +\end_inset + +which will place the +\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ +\end_inset + + underneath the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +lim +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in display mode. + In inline formulas it looks like this: +\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro +\series bold + +\backslash +lim +\series default +. + Have a look at section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Functions" + +\end_inset + + for an explanation of function macros. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Math Symbols +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Symbols +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Most math symbols can be found in the +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default + under one of several categories; including +\family sans +Greek +\family default +, +\family sans +Operators +\family default +, +\family sans +Relations +\family default +, +\family sans +Arrows +\family default +. + There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical + Society (AMS). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, + you don't have to use the +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default +; you can type the command directly into the formula. + LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Altering Spacing +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Spaces +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that + LaTeX provides. + To do this, press +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + + or use the +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default + button +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\space" +\end_inset + + +\family default +. + This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen. + For example, the sequence +\series bold +a Ctrl+Space b +\series default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ +\end_inset + + appears in LyX as +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png + +\end_inset + +. + You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind + the space marker and enter space again several times. + With every space enter the size will be changed. + Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative + spaces. + Here are two examples: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Ctrl+Space b +\series default + and 3× +\family sans +Space +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Ctrl+Space b +\series default + and 5× +\family sans +Space +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Functions +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Functions +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Functions" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default + contains under the button +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\functions" +\end_inset + + +\family default + a number of function macros, such as +\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ +\end_inset + +, +\emph on +etc +\emph default +. + (you can also insert them in a formula by typing +\series bold + +\backslash +sin +\series default + etc.). + Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to + avoid confusions, because +\begin_inset Formula $sin$ +\end_inset + + does normally mean +\begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function: + +\begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$ +\end_inset + + is different from +\begin_inset Formula $asinx$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts + are placed, as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Accents +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Accents +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text + mode. + This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use. + You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + + even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled. + Our example is entered by typing +\series bold + +\backslash +hat +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +a +\series default + in a formula. + Table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Accent-names-and" + +\end_inset + + shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Accent-names-and" + +\end_inset + +Accent names and the corresponding commands. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Name +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Command +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +E +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +xample +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +circumflex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +hat +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +acute +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +acute +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +umlaut +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +ddot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +dot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +dot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +breve +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +breve +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +caron +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +check +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +macron +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +bar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +vector +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +vec +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the +\family sans +Frame +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +decorations +\family default + symbol set button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\hat" +\end_inset + + in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within + a formula too. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Brackets and Delimiters +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Brackets +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Delimiters +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are several brackets available through LyX. + For some purposes, using just the keys +\family typewriter +[]{}()|<> +\family default + should suffice. + But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction, + or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math + toolbar delimiter icon +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" +\end_inset + +. + For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right] +\] + +\end_inset + +it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses. + Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" +\end_inset + + and the expression on the right was entered using the +\family typewriter +() +\family default + keys. + +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from + that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is + inside. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the + left side and right side. + If you use the option +\family sans +Keep +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +matched +\family default +, the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side. + The selection will be shown below the button field. + If you want one side not to have a bracket, use the blank button. + It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root, + you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to + go inside the brackets. + Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on +\family sans +Insert +\family default +. + The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure. + The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and + braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts. + For example, to insert a pair of flexible parentheses on both sides, select + the structure and enter +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-delim ( )" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Arrays and Multi-line Equations +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Arrays +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Matrices +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Multi-line Equations +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Matrices are entered in LyX using the +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default + matrix button +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" +\end_inset + + +\family default +. + It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns. + Here is an example: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +1 & 2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 & 6\\ +7 & 8 & 9 +\end{array}\right) +\] + +\end_inset + +The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters" + +\end_inset + +. + When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries + will be left-, right-, or center-justified. + This alignment is set in the box +\family sans +Horizontal +\family default + with the letters +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +l +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +r +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +c +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + LyX proposes a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +c +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + for every column as default. + For example, the sequence +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +lcr +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be + centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter + corresponds to the relevant column. + The result will look like this: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\begin{array}{lcr} +this & this\, column & this\, column\\ +column & has & has\, right\\ +has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment +\end{array}. +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + while the cursor is in the matrix. + Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math +\family default + or the math toolbar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases. + It can be created with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cases +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Environment +\family default + or the command +\series bold + +\backslash +cases +\series default +. + Here is an example: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\begin{cases} +-1 & x<0\\ +0 & x=0\\ +1 & x>0 +\end{cases} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + +Multi-line formulas are created when you press +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + within a formula. + In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each + column. + When you press +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + += +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign + is in the second column, and the rest in the third column. + A new row is created by every further entry of +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +. + Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas. + Here is an example: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\ +a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared} +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures + in this column will be printed in a smaller size: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray*} +\frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} +\end{eqnarray*} + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The multi-line formula type described here is called +\family typewriter +\series medium +eqnarray +\family default +\series default +. + There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations, + for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand eqref +reference "eq:asquared" + +\end_inset + +. + The other types are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Formula Numbering and Referencing +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Formula numbering +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Referencing formulas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Number +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Whole +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formula +\family default + or the shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + +. + The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses. + The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated. + The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on + the document class. + In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number, + separated by a dot: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{equation} +1+1=2 +\end{equation} + +\end_inset + +Using +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + + in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering. + You can only number displayed formulas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Number +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +This +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Line +\family default + or the shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-line-toggle" +\end_inset + + will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +1 & = & 3-2\\ +2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ +4 & \leq & 7 +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +To number all lines use the shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + +Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label. + A label is inserted with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Label +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + +) when the cursor is in the formula. + This opens a dialog to enter the label. + It is recommended that you use the suggested +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eq: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the + label type when you have many labels in your document. + We inserted in the following example the label +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +eq:tanhExp +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in the second line: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ + & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +Every labeled line is automatically numbered. + Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number. + You can reference a labeled formula using the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cross +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Reference +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +). + A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to. + The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output + as the formula number: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This is a cross-reference to equation ( +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "eq:tanhExp" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Cross-References" + +\end_inset + +. + To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and + press +\family sans +Del +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +User defined math macros +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Macros +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you + have equations of the same form in a document several times. + Math macros are explained in section +\emph on +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Macros +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Fine-Tuning +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Typefaces +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Typefaces +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman. + To set a font in a formula, use the +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default + button +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\font" +\end_inset + + +\family default +, or enter its command, listed in table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the" + +\end_inset + +, directly. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Typefaces-and-the" + +\end_inset + +Typefaces and the corresponding commands. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Font +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Command +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape up +\size normal +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathrm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape up +\size normal +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathtt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbb +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathfrak +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape up +\size normal +\emph on +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathcal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathsf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + You can only print capital letters in the typefaces +\family sans +Blackboard +\family default + and +\family sans +Calligraphic +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula. + Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface. + Pressing +\family sans +Space +\family default + within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected + space when you need a space in the box. + Here is an example where +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +N +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in +\family sans +Blackboard +\family default + denotes the set of numbers: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion. + You can, for example, put a character in +\family sans +Fraktur +\family default + in a box for +\family sans +Typewriter +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +So it is better not to use this feature. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters: +\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +You can only print them emboldened using the command +\series bold + +\backslash +boldsymbol +\series default +, which works like the other typeface commands: +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +boldsymbol +\series default + works for all symbols, letters, and numbers. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Math Text +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Text +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but + not for text. + For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using + the entry +\family sans +Normal +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mode +\family default + of the +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panel +\family default + button +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\font" +\end_inset + + +\family default + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-default" +\end_inset + +). + Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue. + You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text. + Here is an example: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\begin{cases} +x & \mbox{if I say so}\\ +-x & \mbox{under Umständen} +\end{cases} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Font Sizes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Font sizes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are + automatically chosen in most situations. + These are called +\family sans +textstyle +\family default +, +\family sans +displaystyle +\family default +, +\family sans +scriptstyle +\family default +, and +\family sans +scriptscriptstyle +\family default +. + For most characters, +\family sans +textstyle +\family default + and +\family sans +displaystyle +\family default + are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts, + and certain other structures, are set larger in +\family sans +displaystyle +\family default +. + Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various + situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat +e. + These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\style" +\end_inset + + +\family default +. + A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure. + For example, you can set +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ +\end_inset + +, which is normally in +\family sans +textstyle +\family default +, larger in +\family sans +displaystyle +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ +\end_inset + +. + The four styles are used in the following example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset + is set in a particular size with the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style +\family default +, all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size. + Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts + will be adjusted to correspond. + As an example here is a formula in the font size +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +largest +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family roman +\size largest +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +AMS-LaTeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +AMS math +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! AMS +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society + (AMS) that are in common use. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Enabling AMS-Support +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in + the document by selecting the checkbox +\family sans +Use +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +AMS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +package +\family default + in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dialog under +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Options +\family default +. + AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in + formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +AMS-Formula Types +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Multi-line Equations +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types. + LyX allows you to choose between +\family typewriter +align +\family default +, +\family typewriter +alignat +\family default +, +\family typewriter +flalign +\family default +, +\family typewriter +gather +\family default +, and +\family typewriter +multline +\family default +. + We refer you to the AMS-documentation, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + +, for an explanation of these formula types. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +More Tools +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Cross-References +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cross references +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Cross-References" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +One of LyX's strengths is cross-references. + You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in + the document. + To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it. + The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference. + We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +First item +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "enu:Second-item" + +\end_inset + +Second item +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Third item +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +First we insert a label into the second item with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Label +\family default + or by pressing the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + +. + A gray label box like this: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/labelQt4.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text. + LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case + the text +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +enu:Second-item +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The prefix +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +enu: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + stands for +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +enumerate +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for + example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix + will be +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +sec: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cross-Reference +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +. + A gray cross-reference box like this: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/referenceQt4.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels + in the document. + We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +enu:Second-item +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear + in the output. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As an alternative to +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cross-Reference +\family default +, you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select +\family sans +Copy as Reference +\family default +. + The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted + to the actual cursor position via the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paste +\family default + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paste" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here is our cross-reference: Item +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "enu:Second-item" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +It is recommended to use a protected space +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Protected-Space" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly + line breaks between them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are six formats of cross-references: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +: prints the number, this is the default: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +(): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style + normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Equation +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is omitted: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand eqref +reference "eq:tanhExp" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +: prints the page number: Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand pageref +reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +: prints the text “on page” and the page number: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vpageref +reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label + is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”; + if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on + the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page, + it prints “on the next page”. + The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like +\family sans +\series bold + +\family default +\series default +; otherwise it behaves like +\family sans +\series bold +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Formatted +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + or +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installed. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting + the option +\family sans +Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references +\family default + in the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Document Class +\family default +. + The package +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + is the default and preferred because +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + supports only English documents. + The format is specified by using the command +\series bold + +\backslash +newrefformat +\series default + (prettyref) or +\series bold + +\backslash +newref +\series default + (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document. + For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label + shortcut +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +fig +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) can be done with this command +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page +\backslash +pageref{#1}}} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "prettyref,refstyle" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Textual +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand nameref +reference "fig:Two-distorted-images" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output + is automatically calculated by LaTeX. + The varieties are adjusted in the field +\family sans +Format +\family default + of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen +ce. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can only use the style +\family sans + +\family default + to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style +\family sans + +\family default + is always possible. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading; + for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in + it. + Referencing formulas is explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu. + The entry +\family sans +Go +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +to +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Label +\family default + sets the cursor before the referenced label. + This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to +\family sans +Go +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Back +\family default + so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference. + You can also go back with the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can change labels at any time. + References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you + do not need to think about this. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX + “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output + instead of the reference. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +References are described in detail in the section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Referencing Floats +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Table of Contents and other Listings +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Table of contents +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Outline +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:toc" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Table of Contents +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Table-of-Contents" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +of +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Contents +\family default +. + It is displayed in LyX as a gray box. + If you click on it, the +\family sans +Outline +\family default + window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you + to move and rearrange sections in your documents. + So this operation is an alternative to the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Outline +\family default + that is described in sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:The-Outliner" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically. + If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described + in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Short-Titles" + +\end_inset + +, it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading. + Section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Numbering-depth" + +\end_inset + + describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are + listed in the TOC. + Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:List-of-Figures" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents. + You can insert them via the +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +List/TOC +\family default + submenus. + The list entries are the float captions and the float number. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +URLs and Hyperlinks +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +URLs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hyperlinks +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URLs +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:URLs" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +URL +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage: +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be + in the style +\family typewriter +Typewriter +\family default +. + To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next + subsection. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hyperlinks +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Hyperlinks" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Hyperlink +\family default + or with the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "href-insert" +\end_inset + +. + The appearing dialog has two fields: +\family sans +Target +\family default + and +\family sans +Name +\family default +. + The name is the printed text for the hyperlink. + The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "LyX's homepage" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + +, an Email address like this: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "lyx-docs mailing list" +target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + +, or a link to a file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by + adding the prefix +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +run: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to the link target. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output, + and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output. + To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use + the text style dialog. + This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text: +\family sans +\series bold + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "LyX's homepage" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The link text color can be changed, when the option +\family sans +Color links +\family default + is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +PDF Properties +\family default +). + The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the + option +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +urlcolor=blue +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +to the field +\family sans +Additional options +\family default + in the PDF Properties dialog. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Appendices +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Appendix +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Appendices" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Appendices are created with the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Start +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Here +\family default +. + This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end + as the appendix part of the book. + This part is marked with a red borderline. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix, + numbered with a capital Latin letter. + The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot + and the subsection number. + All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections, + here two examples: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Credits" + +\end_inset + +; Appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Export" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Bibliography +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliography +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Bibliography" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document. + You can include a bibliography database, +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Known under the name +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +BibTeX-database +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography + manually, using the paragraph environment +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default +, which was described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Biblio_environment" + +\end_inset + +. + If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in + this document, like author-year citations, then you must +\emph on + +\emph default +use a bibliography database. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +The Bibliography Environment +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Within the +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default + environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled + with a number. + If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a +\family sans +Key +\family default + and a +\family sans +Label +\family default +. + The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography + entry. + For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX + and we used +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +latexcompanion +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, a short form of its title, as the key. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Citation +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" +\end_inset + +. + A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear + containing the available citations. + Select one or more keys from the list and +\family sans +Add +\family default + them. + Then press +\family sans +OK +\family default +. + The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s). + If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change + the reference. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography + entry with surrounding brackets. + If you set a +\family sans +Label +\family default + for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number. + Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Credits +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Have a look at the +\family sans +LaTeX Companion Second Edition +\family default +: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest + label via the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). + All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Bibliography databases (BibTeX) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliography ! Databases +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliography ! BibTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Bibliography-databases" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different + documents. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning + them. + Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations + and reviews along with bibliographical information. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography + entries. + You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of + your working field in a database. + This database can be used for different documents, and by default only + the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography + list for that document. + This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books + you have cited. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The database is a text file with the file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +.bib +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, containing the bibliography in a special format. + The format is explained in +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "BibTeX-2" + +\end_inset + + and in the LaTeX books ( +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" + +\end_inset + +). + The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a + special program to create and edit the entries in the database. + A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To use a database, use the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +List +\family default +/ +\family sans +TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator +BibT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Bibliography +\family default +. + A gray box will be inserted and a window appears. + In this window you can add one or more databases and select a +\family sans +style +\family default + file. + The option +\family sans +Add bibliography to TOC +\family default + adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography. + In the +\family sans +Content +\family default + drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database + in the document or just the cited references. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The style file is a text file with the file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +.bst +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + that controls how the bibliography entries will appear. + Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers + provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the + layout. + It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something + for experts. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +For information on how this is done, have a look at +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX. + You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the +\family sans +Processor +\family default + either in +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bibliography +\family default + or in +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. + The following variants are possible: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work + with other bibliography packages (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\series bold +natbib +\series default +), only with the package +\series bold +biblatex +\series default +; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin + letters +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries + that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works + with all bibliography packages, except +\series bold +biblatex +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding, + larger memory than +\family sans +bibtex +\family default +, works with all bibliography packages +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification + of the variants. + Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual + of +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When you select the option +\family sans +Sectioned bibliography +\family default + in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bibliography +\family default + dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies. + This and other options are explained in detail in section +\emph on +Customizing Bibliographies +\emph default + +\emph on +with BibTeX +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Additional Features +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between + the two methods of creating them. + As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists + only the database entries that are referenced in the document. + We used the style file +\family sans +alphadin.bst +\family default + to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Bibliography layout +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliography ! Layout +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format. + For this feature you need to enable the option +\family sans +Natbib +\family default + in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dialog under +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default +. + Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default. + For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained + in the previous section. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in + the citation reference window. + Here is an example where the text +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Chapter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + appears after the reference: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Have a look at +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "Chapter 3" +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Index +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index generation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Index" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +An index entry is created if you use the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Index +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Entry +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "index-insert" +\end_inset + +. + A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index. + The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed + by LyX as the index entry. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The index list is inserted in the document with the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Index +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +List +\family default +. + A light blue box labeled +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Index +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + will show the place where the index is printed in the output. + The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections. + For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one + of the LaTeX books +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Grouping Index Entries +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Grouping +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the + index. + We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated + lists under the entry +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Lists +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + First we create the entry +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Lists +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Lists" + +\end_inset + +. + In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Itemize" + +\end_inset + +, we insert the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Lists ! Itemize +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +and the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Lists ! Enumerate +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +for the enumerated list in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Enumerate" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The exclamation mark +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +! +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + marks the grouping levels. + You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more. + An index entry for the higher levels is not required. + If we don't have an index entry for +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Lists +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, it will be printed anyway, but without a page number. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Page Ranges +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Page ranges +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed + section. + But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry. + For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create + an index entry in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments" + +\end_inset + + with the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Paragraph environments|( +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +and another entry at the end of section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LyX-Code" + +\end_inset + + with the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Paragraph environments|) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The commands +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|( +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|) +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + respectively start and end the index range. + You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document. + They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of + the pages of the indexed document parts. + An example is the index entry +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Document ! Settings +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cross referencing +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Cross referencing +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +It is also possible to refer to another index entry. + We referred for example in the index entry +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +GIF +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Image-Formats" + +\end_inset + +) to the index entry +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Image formats +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in the same section using the entry +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +GIF|see{Image formats} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code. + The text within the braces is the referenced entry. + The reference will appear in the output without a page number. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Index Entry Order +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Entry order +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not + follow the rules for the index order. + The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see + section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Index-Program" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + does not know how to sort accents in different languages. + We have created as an example the three dummy index entries +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +maison +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +maïs +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +maître +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dummy entries ! maïs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dummy entries ! maître +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dummy entries ! maïs@maison +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order + maïs, maison, maître. + To achieve this, we use the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +previous entry@current entry +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In our case we want to have +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +maison +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + after +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +maïs +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and write therefore for the index entry of maison: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +maïs@maison +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The previous entry need not be a real existing entry. + You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order. + See the next subsection for an example. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the + program +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +to generate the index (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Index-Program" + +\end_inset + +). + +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in + sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Document-Font" + +\end_inset + + after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these + index commands start with +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +LaTeX-packages ! +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote. + To fix this +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +let +\backslash +OrgIndex +\backslash +index +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand*{ +\backslash +index}[1]{ +\backslash +OrgIndex{#1}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Index Entry Layout +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Entry layout +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dummy entries ! +\shape italic +This is an italic dummy entry +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + You can also format the page number using the character +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +| +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash. + We can write for example +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +italic page number:|textit +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +to get the page number in italic. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special + case +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|command +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + means +\series bold + +\backslash +command{page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +number} +\series default +. + Have a look at section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + + to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +to generate the index, see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Index-Program" + +\end_inset + +. + If you use +\family sans +xindy +\family default +, this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text. + This is because +\family sans +xindy +\family default + requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "p. 678 ff." +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + for details. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown + above. + Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that. + Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of + the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions. + If so, put the following in the preamble +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +IndexDef}[1]{ +\backslash +textit{#1}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +and write +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +my entry|IndexDef +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +in the index entry. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher + insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to + change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also change the layout for the whole index. + For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get + a bold font for all index entries. + For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called +\emph on +Index Style File +\emph default +, see the +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + or +\family sans +xindy +\family default + documentation for details, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Index Program +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Program +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Index-Program" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If the index generation program +\family sans +xindy +\family default + is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +, the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Makeindex +\family default + is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably + that it was developed with only the English language in mind. + So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly. + We have shown above how to fix this sorting. + However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider + to use +\family sans +xindy +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences + dialog, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" + +\end_inset + +. + The available options are listed and explained in +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +. + In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate + the index. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a + given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{} +or the options in +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Indexes +\family default +. + This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options + to the index program or if you need a specific layout style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Multiple Indexes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In many fields it is common to have more than one index. + For instance, you might need to set up a separate +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Index of Names +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + next to the standard index. + LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages + that add this feature. + LyX uses the +\series bold +splitidx +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! splitidx +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + package to generate multiple indexes. + The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +. + Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also + includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well. + Please consult the package's manual for details. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Indexes +\family default + and select the option +\family sans +Use multiple Indexes +\family default +. + Note that the list +\family sans +Available Indexes +\family default + already contains the standard index +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Index +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should + also appear as a heading) to the +\family sans +New +\family default + input field and press the +\family sans +Add +\family default + button. + The new index now also appears in the list. + If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new + index. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index + list in +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +List/TOC +\family default + and the +\family sans +Insert +\family default + menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes. + The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there + are additional features: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking + on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type. + Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Subindex. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level. + For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading + is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can + thus be nested to the non-subindexes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Nomenclature/Glossary +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclature +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glossary|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Nomenclature +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Nomenclature" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that + are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so + called nomenclature or glossary. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package + +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installed. + You find it in the TeX-catalogue, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry + and then use the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family default +N +\family sans +omenclature +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Entry +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "nomencl-insert" +\end_inset + +. + A gray box labeled +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Nom +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries. + The first is the term or +\family sans +Symbol +\family default + that you wish to define. + The second is the +\family sans +Description +\family default + of the term or symbol. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenclature Definition and Layout +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclature ! Layout +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the +\family sans +Symbol +\family default + field as LaTeX-formulas. + For example to get +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, insert this: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series default +The +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +$ +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + character starts/ends the formula. + The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning + with a backslash +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\backslash + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter, + like +\series bold + +\backslash +Sigma +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +(A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + +.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You cannot use the +\family sans +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style +\family default + dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands. + For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in this document is: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +dummy entry for the character +\backslash +textsf{sigma} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +The command +\series bold + +\backslash +textsf +\series default + sets the fonts to +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif +\family default +. + To get +\series bold +bold +\series default + font use the command +\series bold + +\backslash +textbf +\series default +, for +\family typewriter +typewriter +\family default + use +\series bold + +\backslash +texttt +\series default +, for +\emph on +emphasized +\emph default + use +\series bold + +\backslash +emph +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If the characters | +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +! +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +, @ and +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +" +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding + a quote character in front of them. +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\"" +description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclature ! Sort order +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of + the symbol definition. + This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in + formulas. + Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols +\emph on +a +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "a" +description "dummy entry for the character \"a\"" + +\end_inset + + +\emph default + and +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +prefix "sigma" +symbol "$\\sigma$" +description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}" + +\end_inset + +. + They will be sorted by +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +a +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + – the +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + will be sorted before the +\emph on +a +\emph default + since the character +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +$ +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is considered in sorting. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To control the sort order, you can edit the +\family sans +Sort +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +as +\family default + field of the nomenclature dialog. + Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol + definition. + For the example given, you can insert +\family typewriter +sigma +\family default + in this field for the +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +, then +\emph on +a +\emph default + will be located before +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + documentation, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenclature Options +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclature ! Options +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature. + Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refeq Appends the phrase +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, see equation ( +\emph on +eq +\emph default +) +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to every nomenclature entry, where +\family sans +\emph on +eq +\family default +\emph default + is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refpage Appends the phrase +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, page ( +\emph on +page +\emph default +) +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to every nomenclature entry, where +\family sans +\emph on +page +\family default +\emph default + is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document + class options list in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog. + In this document the options +\series bold +refpage, intoc +\series default + are used. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature + entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the + +\family sans +Description +\family default + field in the nomenclature dialog: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeq Like the +\series bold +refeq +\series default + option +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefpage Like the +\series bold +refpage +\series default + option +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeqpage Short notation of +\series bold + +\backslash +nomrefeq +\backslash +nomrefpage +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomnorefeq, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefpage, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Words like +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + are automatically translated for some document languages. + If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation +\backslash +nobreakspace(#1)} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +pagedeclaration}[1]{, page +\backslash +nobreakspace{}#1} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +and replace +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +see equation +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + by their translation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Printing the Nomenclature +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclature ! Printing +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To print the nomenclature, use the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nomenclature +\family default +. + A box labeled +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Nomenclature +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output. + By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered. + You can choose between these settings: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Default a space of 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm is used +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Longest +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +label +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Custom custom space +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Nomenclature +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the + command +\series bold + +\backslash +nomname +\series default + in the preamble. + For example, in order to change the name to +\emph on +List of Symbols +\emph default +, add the following line to the preamble: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family roman +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +nomname}{List of Symbols} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenclature Program +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclature ! Program +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Nomenclature-Program" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX uses the program +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +, that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature. + LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control + +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + by adding options, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" + +\end_inset + +. + The available options are listed and explained in +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl,makeindex" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Branches +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Branches +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Branches +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Branches" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output. + For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the + pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same + document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches. + The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated. + To create a branch, either select the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Insert New Branch +\family default + (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog to +\family sans +Branches +\family default +, where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation + state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not), + its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should + be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active + (see below for an example). + Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch + to the name of the other) and to add +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +unknown branches +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents +, without having been defined) to the document's branch list. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes. + These boxes are inserted via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Branch +\family default + where you can choose a branch. + You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking + on them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch + is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Question +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner? +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Answer +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard +Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you activate +\family sans +Filename Suffix +\family default + in +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Branches +\family default +, the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export. + Consider for example a file +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Exam.lyx +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + which has the above branches. + If +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Filename Suffix +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is active, the PDF export file would be called +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Exam.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + if both the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Question +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Answer +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + branch were inactive, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Exam-Question.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + if only the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Question +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + branch was active, likewise +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Exam-Answer.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + if only the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Answer +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + branch was active, and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Exam-Question-Answer.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + if both branches were active. + This helps you to export different versions of your document easily. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets, + like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each + branch. + For example you can define for the question branch +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +answer}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +and for the answer branch +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +answer}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Question +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +answer}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Answer +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +answer}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Now it is possible to use the +\series bold + +\backslash +question{\SpecialChar \ldots{} +} +\series default + and +\series bold + +\backslash +answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{} +} +\series default + commands to obtain conditional output. + Here is an example formula where only the +\series bold + +\backslash +question +\series default + part appears: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}. +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the + +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout + files (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.). + For this advanced usage, see the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual, section +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Flex insets and InsetLayout +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +PDF Properties +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:PDF-Properties" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF properties +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +PDF Properties +\family default + dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your + document. + All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output. + This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a + table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced + part of the document. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The header information in the dialog tab +\family sans +General +\family default + is saved together with the PDF as file properties. + Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically + to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about. + This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues. + When the option +\family sans +Automatically +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fill +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +header +\family default + is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document + title and author entries. + The option +\family sans +Load +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +in +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fullscreen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mode +\family default + will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can specify in the dialog tab +\family sans +Hyperlinks +\family default + how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences + are created. + The +\family sans +Break +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +over +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +lines +\family default + option allows long links to be split; +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +frames +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +around +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + and +\family sans +Color +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames; +\family sans +Color +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + colors the different links. + The default colors are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color magenta +magenta +\color inherit + for hyperlinks and URLs +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color red +red +\color inherit + for links +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color green +green +\color inherit + for citations +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +but you can change these in the field +\family sans +Additional options +\family default +. + For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If the option +\family sans +Backreferences +\family default + is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different + entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section, + slide or page where the entry is referenced. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the dialog tab +\family sans +Bookmarks +\family default + you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of + your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document. + You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections + or not. + With the +\family sans +Open bookmarks +\family default + +\family sans +Level +\family default + you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks + when opening the PDF. + For example level +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 will display all sections and subsections, while level +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 will only display the sections. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF properties are also used in this document. + When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional + +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + options are used. + For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:TeX-Code" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +TeX Code Boxes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +TeX Code +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and + constructs, but not all. + LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands. + All the time packages are being updated and new ones added. + This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there + is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages + and their commands. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the + TeX Code box. + A TeX Code box is created by the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Code +\family default + or by the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + +). + The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on + it and selecting +\family sans +Close Inset +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code. + Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text. + For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore + using the LaTeX-command +\series bold + +\backslash +fbox +\series default +, you can write the command part +\series bold + +\backslash +fbox{ +\series default + in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace +\series bold +} +\series default + in a second TeX Code box behind the word. + The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in + the following example: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ERT.png + scale 89 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +gives +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This is a line with a +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fbox{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +framed +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + word. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space + to let LaTeX know that the command is finished. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The LaTeX Syntax +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX Syntax +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something + about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background. + Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +program +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + your text. + This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at + any time if you know the right commands. + For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline + is the end of the day. + Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have + all caption labels bold. + But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels + in your manual. + Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one + day. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Now LaTeX comes into play. + As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package. + First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package + database, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Catalogue" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +As result you find that the package +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + is what you need. + To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preamble +\family default +) with the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[options]{package name} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within + two braces and the options are set within two brackets. + Note that not all commands have an argument and options. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In your case the package name is +\series bold +caption +\series default +. + After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option + +\series bold +labelfont=bf +\series default + will change the font of all caption labels to bold. + So you add the command +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +to the preamble and the problem is solved. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +For more commands provided by the +\series bold +caption +\series default + package, have a look at its documentation, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "caption" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems + like your case. + For example if you use a +\family sans +KOMA-Script +\family default + class, you don't need the package +\series bold +caption +\series default +, you can instead write +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont{captionlabel}{ +\backslash +bfseries} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +in the preamble and the problem is solved. + So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the + documentation of the document class you want to use. + ( +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont +\series default + is an example of a command with more than one argument.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the + text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command + argument. + To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in + the previous section. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the + LaTeX-books +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexguide" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{fancy} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Header +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rightmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +defines the header line as described below +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Header +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Header +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leftmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Footer +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +thepage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Footer +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +LyX's user guide +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Magic code: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Footer +\begin_inset Argument 1 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Customized Page Headers and Footers +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Header/Footer line +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Header/Footer line +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need + to set the +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +style +\family default + to +\family sans +Fancy +\family default + in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog under +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default +. + As a second step add in the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Modules +\family default + the module +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Custom Header/Footerlines +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + This module offers the following 6 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +styles: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Left +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Header, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Center +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Header, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Header +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Left +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Footer, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Center +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Footer, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Footer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +for the different positions in the header/footer. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document. + But you can change them anywhere you want to. + Figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Page-layout" + +\end_inset + + shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Left Header +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Center Header +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Right Header +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The normal text on the page goes here. + The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including + footnotes). + Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of + the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Left Footer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Center Footer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Right Footer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Page-layout" + +\end_inset + +Page layout with custom header and footer line. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note +\series default +: some document classes implement their own customized page headers and + footers if +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +style +\family default + is set to “Default”. + Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers + and footers. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To define your header line, add all three header styles. + The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things + in the optional arguments on even numbered pages. + For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and + can be omitted. + If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output. + Defining the footer line works similarly. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted + as TeX code (menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Code +\family default +): +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +thepage prints the current page number +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +leftmark prints the current section number and title. + If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and + title instead. + It is called +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +leftmark +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + because it usually goes in a left header. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +rightmark prints the current subsection number and title. + If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and + title instead. + It is normally used in the right header. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Default header/footer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The custom header/footer is not empty by default. + The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center + footer has the page number. + In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the + relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank. + So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank +\family sans +Center +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Footer +\family default + style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Appearance +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The header and footer will appear on normal pages. + Some pages are different. + The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts + a new part or chapter in your book. + Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal. + There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on + the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Header and footer decoration line +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +By default, you get a 0.4 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt thick line below the header and no footer line. + This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands +\series bold + +\backslash +headrulewidth +\series default + and +\series bold + +\backslash +footrulewidth +\series default + in the following way: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +headrulewidth}{thickness} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +where thickness is a size in standard units like +\family sans +pt +\family default + or +\family sans +mm +\family default +. + If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX. + If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +4.4 of the book +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Several header/footer lines +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do + this by adding a normal line break in the style definition. + However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one + text line. + To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length +\series bold + +\backslash +headheight +\series default + or +\series bold + +\backslash +footheight +\series default + in this entry in +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Lat +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preamble +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +headheight}{height} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +where height is a size in standard units. + If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define + your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF. + Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +La +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +TeX Log +\family default + and use the button +\family sans +Next +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Warning +\family default + to see if you can find a warning about the package +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least + for your header/footer. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +This example +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers. + Don't use it for your document as it is just an example. + This example consists of the following definition: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Left +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Header +\series bold + +\backslash +rightmark +\series default +, empty optional argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Center +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Header empty, empty optional argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Header empty, +\series bold + +\backslash +leftmark +\series default + in the optional argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Left +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Footer empty, +\series bold + +\backslash +thepage +\series default + in the optional argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Center +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Footer +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +LyX's user guide +\family default +\series default +\color inherit +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Magic code: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in the optional argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Right +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Footer +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\series default +, empty optional argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +headrulewidth set to 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats. + For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual + of the +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + package, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage clearpage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{headings} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +switches back to page style with the default headings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Previewing Snippets of your Document +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Instant preview +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Preview +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the + fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having + to break your train of thought with viewing the output. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Prerequisites +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package +\series bold +preview-latex +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (on some systems named simply +\series bold +preview +\series default +) installed. + If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue, + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system. + You obtain prettier results if you install the program +\family typewriter +pnmcrop +\family default + from the +\family typewriter +netpbm +\family default + package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are + automatically installed together with LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Enabling previews +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by + LaTeX, activate the option +\family sans +Display +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Graphics +\family default + in the +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences +\family default +dialog under +\family sans +Look +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Display +\family default +. + Then set +\family sans +Instant +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preview +\family default + to +\family sans +On +\family default +. + The +\family sans +Preview +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Size +\family default + is the multiplication factor for the size. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX, + set +\family sans +Instant +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preview +\family default + to +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +math +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish + editing an inset. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately + generated by activating the option +\family sans +Display +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Graphics +\family default +. + Reopening the document will fix such problems. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Selected document parts +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview, + for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things + that are not yet supported by LyX. + To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preview +\family default +. + Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset. + The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset. + If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default + which is not yet supported by LyX. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default + is explained in section +\emph on +Rotated and Scaled Boxes +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated + boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding + text. + Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated + boxes into it. + Here is the result: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +This is a line +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Doublebox +position "c" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 0 +inner_pos "c" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1in" +special "width" +height "1in" +height_special "totalheight" +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +with rotated +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + framed text +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + and a formula. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Previewing works also for colors. + In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX + command +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default +: +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default + is explained in section +\emph on +Colored Boxes +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fboxrule 1mm +\backslash +fboxsep 1mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +This is text within a colored, framed box. +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described + above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and + that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required + by the TeX Code. + If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able + to view your document due to LaTeX errors. + So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the + preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the + whole document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaTeX source code +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it. + Use the menu +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +View +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Source +\family default + and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code. + The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor + currently sits. + You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this + selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code. + To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in + the source view window. + If you check +\family sans +Automatic update +\family default +, you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you + have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates + them all, not just the one which is open at the time. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Advanced Find and Replace +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Advanced-Find-and" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Replace +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Find +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex, + format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents. + It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature. + The key-features are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the + latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire + mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex + formulas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in + any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics +), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with + a section heading will only be found within section headings +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Search may be widened to a specific +\emph on +scope +\emph default +, i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited, + all the open files, or all the manuals available from the +\family sans +Help +\family default + menu +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text + capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Basic usage +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Find & Replace +\noun on + ( +\noun default +Advanced +\noun on +) +\family default +\noun default + (shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + +) or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + +. + This opens the +\family sans +Advanced Find and Replace +\family default + dialog. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Searching for text +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enter into the +\family sans +Find +\family default + LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking + on the +\family sans +Find +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Next +\family default + button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph" +\end_inset + + key). + The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized +, bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text. + Pressing +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph" +\end_inset + + repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing +\family sans +Shift+Return +\family default + searches backwards. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Case +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sensitive +\family default + option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the + +\family sans +Find +\family default + editor. + The +\family sans +Whole +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +words +\family default + option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Searching for mathematics +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mathematical formulas, such as +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + + or something more complex like +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + +, may be searched for by typing them in the +\family sans +Find +\family default + editor. + When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when + it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas. + For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Style-aware search +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +It is also possible to search for text with specific styles. + This is done by switching to the +\family sans +Settings +\family default + tab of the dialog and unchecking the +\family sans +Ignore format +\family default + option. + This way, entering in the +\family sans +Find +\family default + editor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word + occurring in emphasized or boldface. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective + instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences + of it only within section headings. + Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition + to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same + style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also + displayed formulas (and not inline formulas). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Replace +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The entries made in the +\family sans +Find +\family default + editor can be replaced with entries made in the +\family sans +Replace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +with +\family default + editor. + In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the +\family sans +Replace +\family default + button or alternatively press +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph" +\end_inset + + or +\family sans +Shift+Return +\family default + while the cursor is in the +\family sans +Replace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +with +\family default + editor. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries. + Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention + two): +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the + same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +func() +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + with its typewriter version +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +func() +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing + occurrences of +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $R$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + with +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (you may want to enable the +\family sans +Whole +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +words +\family default + and +\family sans +Case +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sensitive +\family default + options and disable the +\family sans +Ignore format +\family default + option in the +\family sans +Settings +\family default + tab, in order to avoid replacing all +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +R +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of +\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ +\end_inset + + with +\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$ +\end_inset + +, or occurrences of +\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ +\end_inset + + with +\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Advanced usage +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry: + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into + the +\family sans +Find +\family default + editor. + This is done with the context menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Insert Regular Expression +\family default + while the cursor is in the +\family sans +Find +\family default + editor. + Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular + expression matching rules +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX + segment, i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed + to match expressions. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the + same text in the document. + You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets. + Examples of using such a feature may be: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering + in the +\family sans +Find +\family default + editor the fraction +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + + (where the +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all + fractions with the given denominator. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking + the +\family sans +Ignore format +\family default + option from the +\family sans +Settings +\family default + tab, entering a +\series bold + +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + +\series default + regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all + emphasized or bold face text respectively. + Also, by inserting a +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading, + you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual: + Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces +\begin_inset Formula $()$ +\end_inset + +, and referring back to them through +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ +\end_inset + +, etc.. + For example, try searching with the regexp +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +[[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]] +\backslash +1[[:space:]] +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +in order to find word repetitions, if there are any. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when + occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced + sub-expressions is absolute. + That is, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + + always refers to the first occurrence of +\begin_inset Formula $()$ +\end_inset + + in all entered regexps. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Spell Checking +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Spellchecking" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spell checking +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX has a built-in spell checker. + The menu +\family sans + Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Spellchecker +\family default +, the key +\family sans +F7 +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show spellchecker" +\end_inset + + starts the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the + beginning of the currently selected text. + A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing + you to edit and replace it in a second line. + Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text + scrolled so that it is visible. + In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio +n, if any could be found. + Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the +\family sans +Replacement +\family default + field, double-click directly invokes the replacement. + Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language + that is set in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog. + You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing + a different one at the top of the dialog. + LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages. + This works if you have marked the different languages appropriately and + have the spell checker dictionaries installed. + LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +There are 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files for each language. + To install a dictionary, copy the 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files into LyX's installation subfolder +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +dicts +\family default + and restart LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Further Settings +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In LyX's preferences dialog under +\family sans +Language +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Setting\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Spellchecker +\family default + you can set the following things: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Spellchecker +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking. + Depending on your platform, +\family typewriter +aspell +\family default +, +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default + or +\family typewriter +enchant +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends. + Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + are available. + On Windows only +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default + is available. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Alternative +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language + for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Escape +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker + should escape, e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +German umlauts. + This should normally not be needed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Accept +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +compound +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words + like +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +passthrough +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Spellcheck +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +continuously Check the spelling of your document as you type it. + Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line. + By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker + appear in the context menu. + Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested + word. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Spellcheck +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +notes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document contents is checked + as well. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Thesaurus +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Thesaurus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Thesaurus" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus. + It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox + (namely the +\family typewriter +MyThes +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + thesaurus library, which is included in LyX). + Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which + are available for many languages. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for + the use with LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Setting up the thesaurus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family typewriter +MyThes +\family default +\emph on +/ +\emph default +OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix + +\emph on +*.dat +\emph default + containing the data and an index file with the suffix +\emph on +*.idx +\emph default +. + The standardized file names include the language code for the given language + (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +en_US +\family default + for US English). + For instance, the US English files are named: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_en_EN_v2.idx +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_en_EN_v2.dat +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed on a Linux + system, these files should be already on your system. + On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be + installed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +To install a dictionary, copy the 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files into LyX's installation subfolder +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +thes +\family default + and restart LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Using the thesaurus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To start the thesaurus, use the menu +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Thesaurus +\family default + or the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "thesaurus-entry" +\end_inset + + while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is + selected. + A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as + a replacement. + The proposals are grouped into categories. + Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not + only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as + +\emph on +organism +\emph default + for +\emph on +plant +\emph default +), related terms (such as +\emph on +political +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +theory +\emph default + for +\emph on +anarchistic +\emph default +), compounds (such as +\emph on +tree +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +diagram +\emph default +, if you look for +\emph on +tree +\emph default +) and opposites (antonyms) (such as +\emph on +girl +\emph default + for +\emph on +boy +\emph default +). + Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but + you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look + up directly there. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in + the dictionary, such as the above +\emph on +tree diagram +\emph default +), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person + singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs). + For example looking up the word form +\change_deleted 2090807402 1338765333 +s +\emph on +reports +\emph default + or +\change_unchanged + +\emph on +reporting +\emph default + yields no results, while results are shown for the word form +\emph on +report +\emph default +. + +\change_inserted 2090807402 1338765282 +The thesuarus is able to resolve inflected forms (so if you enter +\emph on +reports +\emph default +, it will resolve it to the form +\emph on +report +\emph default + which is in the dictionary). + However, this may not always work. + So if you do not get any results for inflected forms, try the lemma form. + +\change_unchanged + Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant parts of such word (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\emph on +report +\emph default + in +\emph on +report +\emph default +s), then you get proposals without adjusting the query in the dialog, and + also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted + part will be replaced, thus the ending remains). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Change Tracking +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Change Tracking +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Change Tracking +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Change-Tracking" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be + able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document. + You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not. + This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Track +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Changes +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors: + +\bar under +\color blue +underlined text +\bar default +\color inherit + is an addition, +\strikeout on +\color blue +canceled text +\strikeout default +\color inherit + is a deletion. + The color depends on the author that made the change. + You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under +\family sans +Look +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +feel +\family default +, +\family sans +Colors +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! Change tracking +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when + the cursor is in changed text. + The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX: +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toolbar ! Review +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png + scale 90 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The review toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following + buttons: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-track" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Track +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Changes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-output" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Show +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Changes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +in +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Output +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jumps to the next change +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Accept +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Change +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reject +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Change +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Merge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Changes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Accept +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +All +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Changes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reject +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +All +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Changes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LyX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Note +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Next +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Note +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight + the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons. + When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about + the next change after the current cursor position. + So you don't need to highlight a certain change. + Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and + step to the next change. + This way you can jump through all the changes in the document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important + to describe a change. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To show the made changes in the output you need the LaTeX package +\series bold +dvipost +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! dvipost +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installed. + You will find it in the TeX Catalogue, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Comparison of Documents +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Comparison of documents +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can compare two different LyX files via the menu +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Compare +\family default +. + The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing + the differences. + In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should + take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option + +\family sans +Copy +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +from +\family default +. + The option +\family sans +Enable +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +change +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tracking +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +features +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +in +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +the +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +output +\family default + enables the change tracking option +\family sans +Show +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Changes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +in +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Output +\family default + to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +International Support +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +International support +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want. + For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set + up LyX to use them: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Special-Character" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Language Options +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Language ! Options +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Language +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Language +\family default + dialog lets you set +\family roman +the language, the quote style and character encoding +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Under +\family sans +Encoding +\family default + you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export. + The option +\family sans +Language +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Default +\family default + is the preferred choice and works well in most cases. + For details about the different encoding options see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Language-encodings" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Keyboard mapping configuration +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Keyboard-mapping" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you have for example a U. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you + can use an alternate keymap. + For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to + use an Italian keymap. + The +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Keyboard/Mouse +\family default + dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Keyboard-Map" + +\end_inset + +. + You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select + which one you want to use. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely + different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance). + You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German. + In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing + one to support the characters you want. + This and many other customizations are explained in the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +\start_of_appendix +The User Interface +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:The-User-Interface" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality. + It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special + topic inside the user's guide. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +The File Menu +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! File +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Under the +\family sans +File +\family default + menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +New +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Creates a new document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +New from Template +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu entry prompts you for a template to use. + Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for + the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Open +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Opens a document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Open Recent +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files. + Click there on a file to open it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Close +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Closes the current document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Close All +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Closes all opened documents. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Save +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Saves the actual document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Save As +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Save All +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Saves all opened documents. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Revert to saved +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Reloads the actual document from disk. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Version Control +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when + one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes. + It is described in the section +\emph on +Version Control in LyX +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Additional Features +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Import +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files, + NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files + (CSV). + The files will be imported as a new LyX-document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +When using the menu entry +\family sans +Plain +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text +\family default +, line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu + entry +\family sans +Plain +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text, Join +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Lines +\family default +, consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph. + A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Export +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Export" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can export your document to various file formats. + The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file. + The menu entries are not the same on all installations. + They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail + in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Output-file-formats" + +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +CJK +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX format of the special LyX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated into LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup + language +\family typewriter +DocBook +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DocBook +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup + language +\family typewriter +DocBook +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format. + This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in + files paths or file names in your document. + LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to +\family sans +DVI +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces + in files paths or file names +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) DVI-format using the program +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts; +\series bold + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Graphviz +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Dot text file with code in the programming language +\family typewriter +Dot +\family default + which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program +\family typewriter +Graphviz +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not + work in all cases) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +HTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(MS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to +\family sans +MS Word +\family default +; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and + not in the format +\family sans +MathML +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +( +\family default +LuaT +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +eX +\family sans +) +\family default +text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document + will be converted to a format that is readable by the +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default + program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(plain) +\family default + text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the + document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable + by the +\family typewriter +latex +\family default + program +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +( +\family default +XeT +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +eX +\family sans +) +\family default +text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LilyPond +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +book +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(La +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the + music notation software +\family typewriter +LilyPond +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +yX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Archive +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon + your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary + to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +yX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x ( +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +z +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +y +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + represent the version number) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language +\family typewriter + NoWeb +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with +\family sans +LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword +\family default +, etc. + (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in + all cases) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) +\family default + PDF-format using the program +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default +, produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + PDF-format using the program +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +, produces PDF-files directly +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + PDF-format using the program +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +, produces PDF-files directly +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) +\family default + PDF-format using the program +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default +, produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + PDF-format using the program +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +, produces PDF-files directly +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Plain +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\family default + text format +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Plain +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii) +\family default + text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format + and then exported as text using the program +\family sans +ps2ascii +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Postscript +\family default + PostScript format using the program +\family typewriter +dvips +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical + programming language +\family typewriter +R +\family default +. + Using the +\family typewriter +R +\family default +-function +\family typewriter +Sweave +\family default + it is possible to use +\family typewriter +R +\family default +-commands in LaTeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If one of the menu entries +\family sans +DVI +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + or +\family sans +Postscript +\family default + is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation. + After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration of LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Print +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript + format or send it to a printer. + The printer will also use the document in PostScript format. + The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the + program +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +. + For more information have a look at section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Printing-the-File" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fax +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on + Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH + prefix, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Paths" + +\end_inset + +). + With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like +\family typewriter +hylapex +\family default + or +\family typewriter +kdeprintfax +\family default +. + The default format of the sent file is PostScript. + The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Converters" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +New and Close Window +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Opens or closes a new instance of LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Exit +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +The Edit Menu +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Edit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Undo and Redo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Select Whole Inset +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Selects the content of the inset where the cursor is currently in. + If the cursor is outside of an inset, the whole document will be selected. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Select All +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Selects the whole document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Find & Replace (Quick) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Find & Replace (Advanced) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Move Paragraph Up/Down +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph + up or down. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Text Style +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Paragraph Settings +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width. + These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently + in. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you + have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog under +\family sans +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Table Settings and Math +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or + a formula. + Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas. + The properties of tables are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tables" + +\end_inset + +, the properties of formulas in chapter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Increase / Decrease List Depth +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that + can be nested. + They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nesting" + +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Numbering-depth" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +The View Menu +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! View +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +At the bottom of the +\family sans +View +\family default + menu the opened documents are listed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Open/Close all Insets +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Opens/closes all insets in your document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Unfold/Fold Math Macros +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Unfolds/folds the current math macro. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Math macros are described in the +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +View Source +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described + in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +View Messages +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Opens a window showing console messages. + This is useful for debugging LyX (i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background + while LaTeX is processing the document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +View +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as + default output format either in the preferences (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:File-Formats" + +\end_inset + +) or in the document settings (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + +) and opens it in an appropriate viewer. + The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:File-Formats" + +\end_inset + +. + The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured. + The default output format is +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +View (Other Formats) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With this submenu you can view your document in alternative output formats. + The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the + actual document with an external program. + The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on + the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured. + All possible formats are listed in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Export" + +\end_inset + +. + You should at least see the menu entry +\family sans +DVI +\family default +. + If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation. + After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration of LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Invoking a menu will start a viewer program. + The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:File-Formats" + +\end_inset + +. + The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Update +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in + the default output format) without opening a new viewer window. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Update (Other Formats) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With this submenu you can update the view of alternative output formats + of your document without opening a new viewer window. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +View Master Document +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document, + which is then its +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +master +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (see section +\emph on +Child Documents +\emph default + in the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual for more information on this topic). + This item allows you to view the master document from within its child. + That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a + book, +\family sans +View Master +\family default + generates the output of the whole book, while +\family sans +View +\family default + will just output the chapter alone. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The format used by this function is the default output format as specified + in the preferences (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:File-Formats" + +\end_inset + +) or in the document settings (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Update Master Document +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document, + which is then its +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +master +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (see section +\emph on +Child Documents +\emph default + in the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual for more information on this topic). + This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within + its child without the need to switch to the master document itself. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The format used by this function is the default output format as specified + in the preferences (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:File-Formats" + +\end_inset + +) or in the document settings (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Split View +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally. + This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or + to view the same document, but at different positions. + You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3 + or more documents at the same time. + To return to an unsplit view, use the menu +\family sans +Close Current View +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Close Current View +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Closes a split view. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fullscreen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars + so that you will see nothing but your text. + It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen. + To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click + and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Toolbars +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Toolbars" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toolbar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars. + All toolbars and the +\family sans +Command +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Buffer +\family default + can be turned on and off. + The +\emph on +on +\emph default + state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark. + The +\family sans +Review +\family default +, +\family sans +Table +\family default +, +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Panels +\family default +, +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Macros +\family default + and +\family sans +Math +\family default + toolbars can be additionally set to the state +\emph on +automatic +\emph default + that is denoted in the menu with the suffix +\family sans +(auto) +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In the +\emph on +on +\emph default + state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the +\emph on +automatic +\emph default + state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment + or when a certain feature is enabled. + That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking + is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor + is inside a formula or table, respectively. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Toolbars" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +The Insert Menu +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Insert +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Math +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas" + +\end_inset + + and the +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Special Character +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Special-Character" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can insert the following characters: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system. + Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available + characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Not all characters will be visible in the +\family sans +Symbols +\family default + dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences + dialog (see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Screen-Fonts" + +\end_inset + +) can display every character. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +End +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +of +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Abbreviations" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ordinary +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog under +\family sans +Language +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Single +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Quote Inserts +\change_deleted -712698321 1345809482 +this +\change_inserted -712698321 1345809484 +a single +\change_unchanged + quote +\change_deleted -712698321 1345809487 +: +\begin_inset Quotes ers +\end_inset + + +\change_inserted -712698321 1345809513 + in the quotation marks style selected in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog under +\family sans +Language +\family default +. +\change_unchanged + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Protected +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash- + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Breakable +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Menu +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Phonetic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Symbols +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Phonetic symbols +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Language ! Phonetic symbols +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\change_deleted -712698321 1345808954 +Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset +\change_inserted -712698321 1345808969 +Inserts a box where +\change_deleted -712698321 1345809001 +. + Here +\change_unchanged + you can insert +\change_deleted -712698321 1345809047 +commands to create IPA phonetic +\change_unchanged +symbols +\change_inserted -712698321 1345809189 + from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which + provides a large set of these symbols +\change_unchanged +. + +\change_deleted -712698321 1345809068 +For +\change_inserted -712698321 1345809068 +To use +\change_unchanged + this feature +\change_inserted -712698321 1345809224 +with traditional LaTeX +\change_unchanged +you must have the LaTeX-package +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installed. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\change_deleted -712698321 1345809282 +For m +\change_inserted -712698321 1345809283 +M +\change_unchanged +ore information about this feature +\change_deleted -712698321 1345809286 +we refer you to the documentation of +\series bold +tipa, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "tipa" + +\end_inset + + +\series default + and this Wiki-page: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\change_inserted -712698321 1345809397 +can be found in the Linguistics manual ( +\family sans +Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Specific Manuals\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Linguistics Manual +\family default +). +\change_unchanged + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formatting +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can insert the following format constructs: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Superscript Inserts a superscript: test +\begin_inset script superscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +a, b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Subscript Inserts a subscript: test +\begin_inset script subscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3x +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Protected +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Protected-Space" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Inter-word +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Inter-word-Space" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Thin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Thin-Space" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Horizontal +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space Inserts horizontal space, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Horizontal-Space" + +\end_inset + + for a description. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Horizontal +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines" + +\end_inset + + for a description. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Vertical +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Space Inserts vertical space, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Vertical-Space" + +\end_inset + + for a description. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Phantom-Space" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hyphenation +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Hyphenation" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ligature +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Break Inserts a ligature break, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ligatures" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ragged +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Line +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Break Inserts a forced line break, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Justified +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken + text line to the page border, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +New +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken + text page to the page border, described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Clear +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Clear +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Double +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +List / TOC +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry. + The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described + in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:toc" + +\end_inset + +. + The index list is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Index" + +\end_inset + +, the nomenclature in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nomenclature" + +\end_inset + + and the BibTeX bibliography in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bibliography-databases" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Float +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To insert floats, described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Floats" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Note +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To insert notes, described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Notes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Branch +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts branch insets as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Branches" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Custom Insets +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts document class-specific insets. + Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain + document class. + An example is the document class +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +article (Elsevier) +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + with three custom insets. + The section +\emph on +Flex insets and InsetLayout +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual explains how custom insets are defined. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +File +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +External Material +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files + in your document. + How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter +\emph on +External Stuff +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Box +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Boxes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a minipage box that is described section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Minipages" + +\end_inset + +. + All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter +\emph on +Boxes +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Citation +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a citation as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliography" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cross-Reference +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a cross-reference as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Cross-References" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Label +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a label as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Cross-References" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Caption +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Captions +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Longtables ! Caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a caption in a float or longtable. + Floats are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Floats" + +\end_inset + +, captions in longtables are described in the section +\emph on +Longtable Captions +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Index Entry +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts an index entry as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Index" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenclature Entry +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nomenclature" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Table +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a table. + Tables are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tables" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Graphics +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a graphic. + Graphics are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Graphics" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URL +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a URL as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:URLs" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hyperlinks +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a hyperlink as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Hyperlinks" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Footnote +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a footnote, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Footnotes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Marginal Note +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a marginal note, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Marginal-Notes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Short Title +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a short title, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Short-Titles" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +TeX Code +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a TeX Code box, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes" + +\end_inset + + for a description. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Program Listing +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Program listings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a program listings box. + Program listings are explained in the chapter +\emph on +Program Code Listings +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Date +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts the actual date. + The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for + LyX's menus. + LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared + in the section +\emph on +External Material +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Preview +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserts a preview inset, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of" + +\end_inset + + for a description. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +The Navigate Menu +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Navigate +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +of the current document. + This allows you to navigate easily through your document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Bookmarks +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks. + This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have + to jump e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +between section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 and 6.3. + To create bookmarks for this example, go to section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 and use the submenu +\family sans +Save +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Bookmark +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\family default +. + Then go to section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +6.3 and use +\family sans +Save +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Bookmark +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +2. + Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by + the key bindings +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "bookmark-goto 1" +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "bookmark-goto 2" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents. + The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Next Note, Change, Cross-reference +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current + cursor position. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Go to Label +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference. + Sets the cursor before the referenced label. + (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use + +\family sans +Go +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +to +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Label) +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Forward Search +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part + in the output, see section +\emph on +Forward +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +search +\emph default + in the +\emph on +Additional +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Features +\emph default + manual for a detailed description. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +The Document Menu +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Change Tracking +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Change Tracking is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Change-Tracking" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX Log +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be + enabled. + It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background. + +\emph on +Experts +\emph default + will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Outline +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Navigating" + +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Table-of-Contents" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Start Appendix Here +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor + position as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Appendices" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Compressed +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un/compresses the current document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Settings +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The document settings are described in appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:The-Document-Settings" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +The Tools Menu +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Tools +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Spellchecker +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Spell checking is explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Spellchecking" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Thesaurus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The thesaurus is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Thesaurus" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Statistics +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Word count +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Character count +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted + document part. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +TeX Information +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +TeX Information +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst +em. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Reconfigure +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Reconfigure|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Reconfiguration of LyX +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration of LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages + and programs it needs; see also section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Preferences +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +The Help Menu +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Help +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's + menus. + If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be + listed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The menu +\family sans +LaTeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Configuration +\family default + shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes + found by LyX (see also section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Toolbars +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Toolbars" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Toolbars" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +It is also possible to define custom toolbars. + This is described in the +\emph on +Additional Features +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Standard Toolbar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toolbar ! Standard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following + buttons: +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +LTleft}{0pt} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +This is necessary to left align the following longtables. + See the +\emph on +Embedded Objects +\emph default + manual for more information. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png + clip + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pull-down box for the environments +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace -10mm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align left +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-new" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +New +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "file-open" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Open +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-write" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Save +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Print +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show spellchecker" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Spellchecker +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "undo" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Undo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "redo" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Redo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "cut" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cut +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "copy" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Copy +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "paste" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show findreplace" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Find +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Replace +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +(Quick) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Find +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Replace +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +(Advanced) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Navigate Back +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Emphasize text, function of the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Customized +\family default + dialog +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Set text to noun style, function of the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Customized +\family default + dialog +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "textstyle-apply" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Format text using the current settings in the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Customized +\family default + dialog +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-mode" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Inline +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formula +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Graphics +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "tabular-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Table +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle toc" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toggle outline window on/off, +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Outline +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "toolbar-toggle math" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toggle math toolbar on/off +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "toolbar-toggle table" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toggle table toolbar on/off +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Extra Toolbar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toolbar ! Extra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following + buttons: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Default +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Enumerate" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Numbered list +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Itemize" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Itemized list +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout List" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +List +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Description" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Description list +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Increase +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +List +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Depth +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Decrease +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +List +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Depth +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert figure" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Figure +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert table" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Table +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Label +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cross-Reference +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Citation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "index-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Index +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Entry +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "nomencl-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nomenclature +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Entry +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "footnote-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Footnote +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "marginalnote-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marginal +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Note +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Note +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "box-insert Frameless" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Box +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "href-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Hyperlink +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +T +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Code +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Macro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset include" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Child +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "thesaurus-entry" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Thesaurus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +View/Update Toolbar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toolbar ! View / Update +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following + buttons: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +View +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Update +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Master +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Update +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Master +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Synchronize with Output +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +View (Other Formats) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../images/update-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +View\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Update (Other Formats) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +* These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default + icon set. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Other Toolbars +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The change tracking toolbar is explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Change-Tracking" + +\end_inset + +, the table toolbar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toolbar ! Table +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + in the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual and the math macro toolbar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toolbar ! Macro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + in the +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +The Document Settings +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:The-Document-Settings" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the + whole document and is called with the menu +\family sans + Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default +. + You can save your document settings as default with the +\family sans + Save as Document Defaults +\family default + button in the dialog. + This will create a template named +\family typewriter +defaults.lyx +\family default + which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without + using a template. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The button +\family sans +Use Class Defaults +\family default + resets the document settings to the default of the document class. + This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Document Class +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a + master document. + Document classes are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Document-Classes" + +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With the button +\family sans +Local +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default + you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's +\emph on +layouts +\emph default + folder and thus not recognized by LyX as layout for a document class. + For more about layout-files, see the chapter +\emph on +Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + Handbook. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Some classes use special class options by default. + If this is the case, they are listed in the field +\family sans +Predefined +\family default + and you can decide to use them or not. + If you do not exactly know what the default class options are for, it is + recommended to leave them untouched. + The +\family sans +Graphics driver +\family default + is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages. + If using +\family sans +Default +\family default +, the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used. + It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are + doing. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +When you want to use one of the following drivers +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section + +\emph on +Driver support +\emph default + in +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Specifying a master document is necessary if the current document is a child + or subdocument. + The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child + document is opened without its master. + This way child documents are always compilable. + More about master and child documents is explained in the section +\emph on +Child Documents +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package + +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + instead of +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + for cross-references, see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Cross-References" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Child Documents +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents. + Please refer to the section +\emph on +Child +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Documents +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual for details. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Modules +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Modules are explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Modules" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Local Layout +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +See section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Local-Layout" + +\end_inset + + for a description. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Fonts +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The document font settings are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Text Layout +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical + skips. + The line spacing and the number of text columns can also be specified here. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen. + That would be impractical, often unreadable and is not part of the WYSIWYM + concept. + However, it will be as you specified it in the output. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Page Layout +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A description of this menu is given in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation" + +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Document-Layout" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Page Margins +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Margins" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Language +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Language-encodings" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Language ! Encoding +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The document language and quote styles are set here. + The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the + LyX file is always encoded in utf8). + All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will + be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not + known for a particular character). +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The known commands are defined in a text file ( +\emph on +unicodesymbols +\emph default +). + You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the + +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual for details. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you use the option +\family sans +Language Default +\family default +, LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text. + If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more + than one encoding in the LaTeX file. + If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use + exactly one encoding. + Checking this option is the preferred setting. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need + lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively. + If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode), + choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below. + Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete, + so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine + with +\family sans +Language Default +\family default + (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with + a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used, + because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8). + The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative + engines to standard LaTeX. + Both engines support Unicode natively. + LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + and +\family sans +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTeX) +\family default +, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Output-file-formats" + +\end_inset + +). + So if you are using many special or accented characters and +\family sans +Language Default +\family default + fails, you might try out one of these new engines. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Language +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +package +\family default + determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation + of strings like +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Part +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The possible settings are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Default uses the language package that is selected in +\family sans + Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Language Settings +\family default + (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Prefs-Language" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export + format you will use. + In many cases this will be +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + If the newer package +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts), + this package will be used instead of +\series bold +babel +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Always +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Babel uses +\series bold +babel +\series default + even if +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + would be more appropriate. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice. + For example if you want to use a language-specific package like +\series bold +ngerman +\series default + (for German texts), type in +\series bold + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\backslash +usepackage{ngerman} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +None will not use a language package. + This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here is a list with the important encodings: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Language +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Default +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(no +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +inputenc) Same as +\family sans +Language Default +\family default +, but the LaTeX-package +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + is not used. + When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually + in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign + languages in TeX code. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII). + LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result + in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Arabic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Arabic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Armenian +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ArmSCII8) for Armenian +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Baltic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same + as the ISO-8859-13 encoding +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Baltic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4 + encoding +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Baltic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the + ISO-8859-13 encoding +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Central +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1250) MS Windows code page for ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2 (latin2) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Central +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish, + Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chinese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(simplified) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001 + this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 + is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chinese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(simplified) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 + except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially + replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX + you should try to use the encoding Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chinese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(traditional) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillic +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +154) Cyrillic for Kazakh +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Greek +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-7) for Greek +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hebrew +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hebrew +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-8) for Hebrew +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, when using this, set the document language to +\family sans +Japanese (CJK) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package +\series bold +CJK +\series default +, when using this, set the document language to +\family sans +Japanese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(non-CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package +\series bold +japanese +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, when using this, set the document language to +\family sans +Japanese +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(non-CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package +\series bold +japanese +\series default +, when using this, set the document language to +\family sans +Japanese +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(non-CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package +\series bold +japanese +\series default +, when using this, set the document language to +\family sans +Japanese +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Korean +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-KR) for Korean +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Southern +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +South-Eastern +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German, + Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed + to cover many languages and characters with diacritics +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Thai +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(TIS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +620-0) for Thai +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Turkish +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the + Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTeX) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with +\family sans +XeTeX +\family default + and +\family sans +LuaTeX +\family default +, which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +inputenc +\series default +. + LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX + or LuaTeX. + Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ucs-extended) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package +\series bold +ucs +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! ucs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) + is supported. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Western +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1252) MS Windows code page for ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1 (latin1) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Western +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch, + English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish, + Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15 + encoding instead +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Western +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency + sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the + current document. + See sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Prefs-Language" + +\end_inset + + for more information on the language package. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Colors +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! main text +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! background +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and + for Greyed +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +out notes (default: light grey). + The button +\family sans +Reset +\family default + sets the color back to the default. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white) + and for Shaded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +boxes (default: red). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output. + (This Greyed +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +out note appears blue in the output.) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option +\family sans +Color +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + in the document settings under +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +properties +\family default +, you probably also need to change the link font color by using +\family sans +Additional +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +options +\family default + in the +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +properties +\family default +. + For example the option +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +sets the link text color to black. + For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every + page in your document if you use these commands as TeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Code behind a forced page break: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +For the page color: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +pagecolor{color name} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +For the text color: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +color{color name} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The color name can hereby be one of these: +\series bold +black +\series default +, +\series bold +blue +\series default +, +\series bold +cyan +\series default +, +\series bold +green +\series default +, +\series bold +magenta +\series default +, +\series bold +red +\series default +, +\series bold +white +\series default +, +\series bold +yellow +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the + following names: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +For the page background color: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +page_backgroundcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +For the main text color: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +document_fontcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +For the Shaded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +box background color: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +shadecolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +For the Greyed +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +out note text color: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +note_fontcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To see how to define and use custom colors, see section +\emph on +Colored +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Cells +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Numbering & TOC +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can adjust the numbering depth of section headings and the section + depth in the table of contents as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Numbering-depth" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Bibliography +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages +\series bold +natbib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! natbib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + or +\series bold +jurabib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! jurabib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package +\series bold +bibtopic +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being + generated. + For a further description see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliography" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Indexes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated + and you can define additional indexes. + Please refer to section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Index" + +\end_inset + + for details. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +PDF Properties +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The PDF properties are explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:PDF-Properties" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Math Options +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages +\series bold +amsmath +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! amsmath +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\series bold +esint +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! esint +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\series bold +mathdots +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! mathdots +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und +\series bold +mhchem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! mhchem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + or to use them automatically when they are needed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas, + ensure that you have enabled +\family sans +AMS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +math +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +esint is used for special integral characters, see section +\emph on +Big +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Operators +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section +\emph on +Ellipses +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section +\emph on +Chemical Symbols and Equations +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Float Placement +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The float placement options are described in section +\emph on +Float +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Placement +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Listings +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The listings settings are explained in chapter +\emph on +Program Code Listings +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Embedded +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objects +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Bullets +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels. + The itemize environment is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Itemize" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Branches +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Branches are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Branches" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Output +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can define some output specifics for the current document: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Default +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Output +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Format: The format that is used when you hit +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +View +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Update +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +View Master Document +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Update Master Document +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in the +\family sans +View +\family default + menu or the toolbar. + The default is set in +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator +File Formats +\family default +, see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:File-Formats" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Synchronize +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +with +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Output settings for the menu +\family sans +Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Forward +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +search +\family default +. + For a detailed description see section +\emph on +Reverse DVI/PDF search +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Additional +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Features +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +XHTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Output +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Options settings for the export format +\family sans +LyXHTML +\family default +. + +\family sans +Strict XHTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.1 +\family default + will assure that the output follows exactly version +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.1 of the XHTML standard. + The different +\family sans +Math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +output +\family default + settings are described in detail in section +\emph on +Math Output in XHTML +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Additional +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Features +\emph default + manual. + The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX Preamble +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages + or to define LaTeX-commands. + The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts. + You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are + doing. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +The +\family sans +Preferences +\family default + Dialog +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Preferences +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The preferences dialog is called with the menu +\family sans +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences +\family default +. + It has the following submenus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Look and Feel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +User Interface +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +User Interface File +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Customization ! of toolbars +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Customization ! of menus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user + interface (ui) file. + A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed. + The file +\emph on +default.ui +\emph default + loads three files: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdmenus.inc +\shape italic + +\emph on +specifies the menu entries for the standard menus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdcontext.inc +\shape italic +\emph on +specifies +\shape default +\emph default + the menu entries in popup context menus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdtoolbars.inc +\shape italic + +\emph on +specifies the toolbar buttons +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files + and edit the entries. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the +\family sans +Menubar +\family default +, +\family sans +Menu +\family default + and +\family sans +Toolbar +\family default + entries must be finished with an explicit +\family sans +End +\family default +. + They may contain +\family sans +Submenu +\family default +, +\family sans +Item +\family default +, +\family sans +OptItem +\family default +, +\family sans +Separator +\family default +, +\family sans +Icon, +\family default + and in the case of the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +file_lastfiles +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + menu a +\family sans +Lastfiles +\family default + entry. + The syntax for the entries is: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Item +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +menu +\series default +or +\series bold + button name +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +LyX-function +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + +All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu +\family sans +Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Functions +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For example, assuming you use the menu +\family sans +Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bookmarks +\family default + quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the + line +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Item +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Save Bookmark 6 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +bookmark-save 6 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + +to the +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +navigate_bookmarks +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + menu in +\emph on +stdmenus.inc +\emph default + to have the sixth bookmark. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Icon +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Set +\family default + allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons. + The currently available icon sets are compared in +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "this image" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Automatic help +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The option +\family sans +Enable tool tips in main work area +\family default + enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries + or footnotes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Session +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With the option +\family sans +Restore window layouts and geometries +\family default + LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used + in the last LyX session. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The option +\family sans +Restore cursor positions +\family default + sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of + the last session. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The option +\family sans +Load opened files from last session +\family default + opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The button +\family sans +Clear all session information +\family default + deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names + of last opened documents, etc.). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Documents +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Backup documents" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Backup ! Documents +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Backup original documents when saving +\family default + creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when + it was saved the last time. + It is stored in the +\family sans +Backup +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directory +\family default + (see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Paths" + +\end_inset + +) or in the same folder as your document if no +\family sans +Backup +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directory +\family default + is specified. + The backup file has the file extension +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +.lyx~ +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With the option +\family sans +Backup documents, every +\family default +, you can specify the time between backup saves. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Save documents compressed by default +\family default + always saves files in a compressed format. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Maximum last files +\family default + is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu + +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Open +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Recen +\bar under +t +\family default +\bar default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If the option +\family sans +Open documents in tabs +\family default + is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The option +\family sans +Single instance +\family default + is only active if a LyXServer pipe +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +See sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Paths" + +\end_inset + + for information about LyXServer pipes. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + is specified. + If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance + of LyX. + Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If the option +\family sans +Single close-tab button +\family default + is checked, there will only be one close button ( +\family sans + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../images/closetab.png + scale 75 + +\end_inset + + +\family default +) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs. + Otherwise every document tab has its own close button. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Screen Fonts +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Font ! Screen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Screen-Fonts" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + This section only deals with the fonts +\emph on +inside +\emph default + the LyX window. + The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and + set in the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fonts +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +By default, LyX uses +\family typewriter +Times +\family default + as its +\family sans +Roman +\family default + (serif) font, +\family typewriter +Arial +\family default + or +\family typewriter +Helvetica +\family default + (depends on the system) as its +\family sans +Sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Serif +\family default + font and +\family typewriter +Courier +\family default + as its +\family typewriter +Typewriter +\family default + font. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can change the font size with the +\family sans +Zoom +\family default + setting. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Font Sizes +\family default + are calculated as letter height in units of points. + 72.27 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +points have the size of 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +inch, see Appendix +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Units-available-in" + +\end_inset + +. + The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt were used. + The sizes are explained in detail in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Document-Font" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +With the option +\family sans +Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering +\family default + enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often. + This results in better performance, especially on slow systems. + On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen. + So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over + aesthetics. + Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +OS and Windows. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Colors +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! LyX screen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Color +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in + the list and selecting the +\family sans +Alter +\family default + button. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +By checking the option +\family sans +Use system colors +\family default + the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used. + The colors +\family sans +cursor, selection, table line, text, URL +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +label and URL +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\family default + are then not customizable and thus not listed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Display +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Display +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Instant Preview +\family default + enables previewing snippets of your document. + This feature is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Checking the option +\family sans +Mark +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +end +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +of +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paragraphs +\family default + displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Editing +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Editing +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Control +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Editing +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The option +\family sans +Cursor follows scrollbar +\family default + sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when + scrolling. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can adjust the width of the cursor. + If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative + to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Scroll below end of document +\family default + is self-explanatory. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing +\family sans +Ctrl+arrow key +\family default +. + With the option +\family sans + Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words +\family default + the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word. + Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The option +\family sans +Sort environments alphabetically +\family default + sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The option +\family sans +Group environments by their category +\family default + groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The +\family sans +Edit math macros +\family default + options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section +\emph on +Math Macros +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Math +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Fullscreen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode. + With the option +\family sans +Limit text width +\family default + you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode. + This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then + appears centered. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Shortcuts +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Key Bindings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Shortcuts +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Bind File +\family default + specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key. + Several binding files are available, among them: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +(x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs + +\family sans +Emacs +\family default + ( +\family sans +XEmacs +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mac.bind a set of bindings for +\family sans +Mac +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +OS +\family default + systems. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like + +\shape italic +broadway.bind +\shape default +, and binding files for special languages. + The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +pt +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + for Portuguese. + If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate + binding file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Some binding files, like +\shape italic +math.bind +\shape default +, only have a limited scope. + When looking at the end of the file +\shape italic +cua.bind +\shape default +, you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The field +\family sans +Show +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ke +\bar under +y +\bar default +-bindings +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +containing +\family default + allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function + in the selected key binding file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Editing Shortcuts +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Key Bindings ! Editing +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use + the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts. + To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog + provides the field +\family sans +Show key-bindings containing +\family default +. + In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit. + Insert there for example as keyword +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +paste +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different + functions that contain +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +paste +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + in their name. + As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut. + All LyX-functions are also listed in the file +\family sans +LyX Functions +\family default + that you will find in the +\family sans +Help +\family default + menu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +For example, to add the shortcut +\family sans +Alt+Q +\family default + for the function +\family sans +textstyle-apply +\family default +, select the function and press the +\family sans +Modify +\family default + button. + A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it. + So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way. + You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX + Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the + different function names as a semicolon separated list. + LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document + part. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with + a text editor. + The syntax of the entries is: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +bind +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +key combination +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +LyX-function +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Keyboard/Mouse +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Keyboard-Map" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Keyboard Map +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Keyboard Map +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system. + For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps. + If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it + is a Romanian one, you can enable +\family sans +Use +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +keyboard +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +map +\family default + and select the keyboard map file named +\shape italic +romanian.kmap +\shape default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can specify a +\family sans +First +\family default + and a +\family sans +Second +\family default + keyboard map and, if you use the +\emph on +cua +\emph default + bindings, you can select the first and second with +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-primary" +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-secondary" +\end_inset + + respectively or toggle between them with +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-toggle" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all + systems. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also specify the mouse +\family sans +Wheel scrolling speed +\family default +. + The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones + slow it down. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If you +\family sans +Enable +\family default + +\family sans +Scroll +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +wheel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +zoom, +\family default + you can select a key for zooming. + When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Input Completion +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Input completion is described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Input-Completion" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Paths +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Paths" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paths +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Paths +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during + the installation. + But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Working +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directory This is LyX's working directory. + It is the default when you +\family sans +Open +\family default +, +\family sans +Save +\family default + or +\family sans +Save +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +As +\family default + files. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +New +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +from +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Template +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Example +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files This directory will be opened when you use the button +\family sans +Examples +\family default + in the +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Open +\family default + dialog. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + The +\family sans +Examples +\family default + button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Backup +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directory +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Backup ! Directory +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Backup copies will be saved to this directory. + If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Backup documents" + +\end_inset + +, the +\family sans +Working directory +\family default + will be used to save the backups. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Backup files have the ending +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +.lyx~ +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +XServer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe. + This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Example: +\series default + You add a BibTeX-database +\emph on +test.bib +\emph default + to your document. + You can edit this file with the program +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default +. + In +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under +\family sans +External +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +programs +\family default +. + If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in + +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + and click on the LyX-symbol. + The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position + in your LyX file. + Of course, +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + and LyX need to be running the same time. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +The pipe is also used for the +\family sans +S +\bar under +i +\bar default +ngle instance +\family default + feature, see sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Backup documents" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash + +\backslash +. +\backslash +pipe +\backslash +lyxpipe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Temporary +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Thesaurus +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located. + You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want + to use custom/alternative dictionaries. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hunspell +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program + +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + are located. + You only need to specify it if you are using +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative + dictionaries. + For LyX on Windows +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying + a directory. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PATH +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs. + When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see + where to find it on the system. + The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX + is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it. + On Unix +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external + programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +TEXINPUTS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files + which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the + document preamble. + This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by + a single dot '.'). + The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator + of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows). + If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be + scanned for the input files. + Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered + to be relative to the directory of your LyX file. + It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise + compilation may fail for some documents. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Identity +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can insert your +\family sans +Name +\family default + and +\family sans +E-mail +\family default + address. + These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described + in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Change-Tracking" + +\end_inset + +, to mark changes you make as yours. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Language Settings +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Language ! Settings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Language +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Language +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Prefs-Language" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +User +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +interface +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus. + You can find its actual translation status here: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Language +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language + issues. + Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation + as well as localization of dates and text strings such as +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Chapter +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + and +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Table +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The most widespread language package is +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX. + More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the + alternative language package +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines. + Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not + covered by +\series bold +babel +\series default +. + The available selections are described in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Language-encodings" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Command +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document + language, you can here specify the command to start the package. + An example is the start command +\family sans + +\backslash +begin{arabtext} +\family default + that is needed to write Arabic using the package +\series bold +ArabTeX +\series default +, see +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + +. + The default is the +\series bold +babel +\series default + command +\family sans + +\backslash +selectlanguage{$$lang} +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Command +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +end Counterpart to +\family sans +Command start +\family default +. + Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start + command toggles the package on and off. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Default +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Decimal +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point + alignment). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Set +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +languages +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will + be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be + used by all LaTeX-packages. + Otherwise they will only be used as options for the +\series bold +babel +\series default + package. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Auto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document + language. + When this option is not set, the +\family sans +Command +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +start +\family default + is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output. + This assures that the correct language is used when you use another +\family sans +Command +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +start +\family default + than the default. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Auto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +end Counterpart to +\family sans +Auto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +begin +\family default +. + When it is not set, the +\family sans +Command +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +end +\family default + is set to the end of the document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Mark +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +foreign +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document + language will be underlined in blue. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Enable +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +RTL +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL), + like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cursor +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys + move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically. + Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right + arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Spellchecker +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The spellchecker settings are explained in section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Spellchecking" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Outputs +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +General +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Output +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +line +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using + the menu +\family sans +File\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Plain +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\family default +. + Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Date +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +format +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Date Format +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Date format +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +For example the format +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +%d/%m/%y +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +prints the date as day/month/year. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Overwrite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Forward +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +search Commands that will be used for the menu +\family sans +Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Forward +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +search +\family default +. + For a detailed description see section +\emph on +Reverse DVI/PDF search +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Additional +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Features +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Printer +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Printer" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Printer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Printer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Default +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +printer Here you can specify the name of your +\family sans +Default printer +\family default +. + The name will be used when the +\family sans +Printer command +\family default + is executed. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Printer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +command is the command LyX +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +LaTeX uses for printing. + The default is +\family sans +dvips +\family default + on most systems. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Printer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Command +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Options Here you can specify printer options. + A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation + of the program that provides the +\family sans +Printer command +\family default + you are using. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Adapt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +output +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +to +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +printer This option works only for the +\family sans +Printer command +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +dvips +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + It activates a configuration file for dvips. + This is an option only for dvips experts. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-settings" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Use +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +font +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +encoding This is the default encoding of the document font. + +\family sans +T1 +\family default + is the default and covers western languages and symbols. + +\family sans +T2A +\family default +, +\family sans +T2B +\family default +, +\family sans +T2C +\family default +, +\family sans +LCY +\family default + and +\family sans +X2 +\family default + are used for Cyrillic. + Combinations of the encodings are possible, like +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +T1, T2B +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages + LyX sets up in the background. + So there is no need to change the default encoding. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Default +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paper +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +size This is the paper size that is used for new documents. + The +\family sans +Default +\family default + value depends on your LaTeX-system setup. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +viewer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paper +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +size +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +options They only have an effect when the program +\family sans +xdvi +\family default + is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors. + But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the + manuals of the applications. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Bibliography +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bibliography-databases" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Index +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Index-Program" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Nomenclature +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +CheckTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +command Command for the program +\family sans +CheckTeX +\family default + that is described in the section +\emph on +Checking TeX +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Additional Features +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are additionally the following options: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Use +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Windows-style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paths +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +in +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\backslash + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + is used instead of +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + to separate folders. + This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paths +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Settings ! Paths +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Reset +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +class +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +options +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +when +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +class +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +changes Removes all manually set +\family sans +Class options +\family default + in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Class +\family default + dialog when changing the document class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +File +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Handling +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +File handling +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Converters +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Converters" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Converters +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material + from one format to another. + You can modify converters or create new ones. + To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the +\family sans +Converter +\family default + and/or +\family sans +Extra +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +flag +\family default + field and press the +\family sans +Modify +\family default + button. + To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format + in the +\family sans +To +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +format +\family default + drop-down list, modify the +\family sans +Converter +\family default + field and press the +\family sans +Add +\family default + button. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +If the +\family sans +Converter File Cache +\family default + is +\family sans +Enabled +\family default +, conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field +\family sans +Maximum Age (in days +\family default +). + This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen + a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter + definition, is described in the section +\emph on +Converters +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +File Formats +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:File-Formats" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +File formats +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Copiers +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle. + You can modify the +\family sans +Editor +\family default + and +\family sans +Viewer +\family default + programs that should be used for certain formats. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +You can also define the +\family sans +Default output format +\family default + that is used when you use +\family sans +View, Update, View Master Document +\family default + or +\family sans +Update Master Document +\family default + in the +\family sans +View +\family default + menu or the toolbar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +More about formats and their options is described in the section +\emph on +Formats +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary + directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it + to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed. + This is done by specifying a +\family sans +Copier +\family default +. + More about this is described in the section +\emph on +Copiers +\emph default + of the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Units available in LyX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Units +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:Units-available-in" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Units" + +\end_inset + + explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption Standard + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Units" + +\end_inset + +Units +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +unit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +name/description +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +millimeter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +centimeter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +in +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +inch +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +point (72.27 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pica (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pc = 12 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +sp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +scaled point (65536 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +sp = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +bp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +big point (72 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +bp = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +dd +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +didot (72 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +dd +\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ +\end_inset + + 37.6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mm) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cicero (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cc = 12 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +dd) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Scale% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% of original image width +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +text% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% of text width +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +col% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% of column width +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +page% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% of paper width +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +line% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% of line width +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +theight% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% of text height +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pheight% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% of paper height +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +height of letter +\emph on +x +\emph default + in current font +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +width of letter +\emph on +M +\emph default + in current font +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mu +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +math unit (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mu = 1/18 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Credits +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:Credits" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people + (and we would encourage people to contribute!). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Alejandro Aguilar Sierra +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Amir Karger +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +David Johnson +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Hartmut Haase +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Ignacio García +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Ivan Schreter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +John Raithel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +John Weiss +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Lars Gullik Bjønnes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Matthias Ettrich +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Matthias Zenker +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Rich Fields +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Pascal André +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Paul Evans +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Paul Russel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Robin Socha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Uwe Stöhr +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +The LyX Team: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + +The bibliography on the following page was created with the +\family sans +Bibliography +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +label "Credits" +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + +The LyX Team: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Credits" +target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org/Credits +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens: +\emph on +The LaTeX Companion Second Edition. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 2004 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. + Daly: +\emph on +A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 2003 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexbook" + +\end_inset + +Leslie Lamport: +\emph on +LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "texbook" + +\end_inset + +Donald E. + Knuth. + +\emph on +The TeXbook. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 1984 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +The TeX Catalogue: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "LaTeXFAQ" + +\end_inset + +The LaTeX FAQ: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" + +\end_inset + + of the program +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX-2" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" + +\end_inset + + how to use the program +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "makeindex" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" + +\end_inset + + of the program +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "xindy" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" + +\end_inset + + of the program +\family sans +xindy +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" + +\end_inset + + of the AMS LaTeX-packages: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "caption" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf" + +\end_inset + + of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" + +\end_inset + + of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" + +\end_inset + + of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" + +\end_inset + + of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" + +\end_inset + + of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "prettyref" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" + +\end_inset + + of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "refstyle" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" + +\end_inset + + of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "tipa" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" + +\end_inset + + of the LaTeX-package +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-packages ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Arabic: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Armenian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Armenian: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Farsi" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Farsi: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Hebrew" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Hebrew: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Japanese" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Japanese: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Latvian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Latvian: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Lithuanian: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Mongolian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Mongolian: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + how to set up LyX for Vietnamese: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "NewInLyX20" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-page" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" + +\end_inset + + about new features in +\family sans +LyX 2.0 +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +let +\backslash +mybibname +\backslash +bibname +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +bibname}{ +\backslash +mybibname +\backslash +; 2} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +The command +\series bold + +\backslash +bibname +\series default + is the name of the bibliography in the current document language. + It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following + bibliography is the second one: +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex +LatexCommand bibtex +bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs" +options "biblio/alphadin" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print +LatexCommand printnomenclature +set_width "auto" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset index_print +LatexCommand printindex +type "idx" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_body +\end_document diff --git a/lib/doc/de/UserGuide.lyx b/lib/doc/de/UserGuide.lyx index 1e5d1d53b8..5c7028356b 100644 --- a/lib/doc/de/UserGuide.lyx +++ b/lib/doc/de/UserGuide.lyx @@ -1,45903 +1,46104 @@ -#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ -\lyxformat 413 -\begin_document -\begin_header -\textclass scrbook -\begin_preamble -% Präambel nicht verändern!!! -% -% Die Präambel stellt sicher, dass das Benutzerhandbuch korrekt -% in die Formate pdf, ps und dvi exportiert werden kann. -% Wenn Probleme beim Exportieren auftreten, können Sie sich -% an das LyX-Dokumentationsteam wenden. -% EMail: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org - -% wenn pdflatex benutzt wird: -\usepackage{ifpdf} -\ifpdf - -% Fonts fuer huebschere PDF-Ansichten -\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} - -\fi % Ende von: wenn pdflatex benutzt wird - -% Setzt den Link fuer Spruenge zu Gleitabbildungen -% auf den Anfang des Gelitobjekts und nicht aufs Ende -\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} - -% Ein PDF-Lesezeichen für das Inhaltsverzeichnis wird hinzugefügt -\let\myTOC\tableofcontents -\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \frontmatter - \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} - \myTOC - \mainmatter } - -% Damit der Index den Namen "Stichwortverzeichnis" erhält -\addto\captionsngerman{\renewcommand{\indexname}{Stichwortverzeichnis}} - -% define a short command for \textvisiblespace -\newcommand{\leer}{\textvisiblespace} - -% macro for italic page numbers in the index -\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} - -% for customized page headers/footers -% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document -\usepackage{fancyhdr} -% change header rule width -\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} - -%für deutsche Nomenlatur -\renewcommand{\eqdeclaration}[1]{, siehe Gleichung\nobreakspace(#1)} -\renewcommand{\pagedeclaration}[1]{, Seite\nobreakspace{}#1} -\renewcommand{\nomname}{Nomenklatur} - -% workaround for a makeindex bug, -% see sec. "Index Entry Order" -% only uncomment this when you are using makindex -%\let\OrgIndex\index -%\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}} -\end_preamble -\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading -\use_default_options false -\begin_modules -customHeadersFooters -enumitem -\end_modules -\maintain_unincluded_children false -\language ngerman -\language_package default -\inputencoding auto -\fontencoding global -\font_roman default -\font_sans default -\font_typewriter default -\font_default_family default -\use_non_tex_fonts false -\font_sc false -\font_osf false -\font_sf_scale 100 -\font_tt_scale 100 - -\graphics default -\default_output_format default -\output_sync 0 -\bibtex_command default -\index_command default -\paperfontsize 12 -\spacing single -\use_hyperref true -\pdf_title "Das LyX-Benutzerhandbuch" -\pdf_author "LyX Team, Übersetzung und Bearbeitung : Hartmut Haase (HHa), Uwe Stöhr" -\pdf_subject "LyX" -\pdf_keywords "LyX" -\pdf_bookmarks true -\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true -\pdf_bookmarksopen false -\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 -\pdf_breaklinks true -\pdf_pdfborder false -\pdf_colorlinks true -\pdf_backref false -\pdf_pdfusetitle false -\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" -\papersize default -\use_geometry false -\use_amsmath 1 -\use_esint 1 -\use_mhchem 1 -\use_mathdots 1 -\cite_engine basic -\use_bibtopic false -\use_indices false -\paperorientation portrait -\suppress_date false -\use_refstyle 0 -\notefontcolor #0000ff -\branch Frage -\selected 1 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #00ff00 -\end_branch -\branch Antwort -\selected 0 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #aa55ff -\end_branch -\index Stichwortverzeichnis -\shortcut idx -\color #008000 -\end_index -\secnumdepth 3 -\tocdepth 2 -\paragraph_separation indent -\paragraph_indentation default -\quotes_language german -\papercolumns 1 -\papersides 2 -\paperpagestyle default -\tracking_changes false -\output_changes false -\html_math_output 0 -\html_css_as_file 0 -\html_be_strict false -\end_header - -\begin_body - -\begin_layout Title -Das LyX-Benutzerhandbuch -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Author -vom LyX-Team -\size normal - -\begin_inset Foot -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Übersetzung und Bearbeitung : Hartmut Haase ( -\noun on -HHa -\noun default -, bis März 2010), Uwe Stöhr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\size default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -Wenn Sie Anmerkungen oder Korrekturvorschläge machen wollen, schreiben Sie - bitte an: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" -target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX-Benutzerhandbuch" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Version 2.0.x -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Die neueste PDF-Version dieses Dokuments kann von hier heruntergeladen werden: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset toc -LatexCommand tableofcontents - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Einleitung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Was ist LyX? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX ist ein System zur Druckvorbereitung von Dokumenten. - Es ist ein Werkzeug, mit dem man schöne Manuskripte, verlegbare Bücher, - Geschäftsbriefe und -vorschläge und sogar Lyrik schreiben kann. - Anders als die meisten anderen -\emph on -Textverarbeitungen -\emph default - verhält es sich eher wie eine Auszeichnungssprache. - Das heißt, wenn Sie eine Abschnittsüberschrift schreiben, bezeichnen Sie - sie als -\family sans -Abschnitt -\family default -, aber nicht als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Fett, Schriftgröße 17, linksbündig, 5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mm Leerraum darunter -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - LyX kümmert sich für Sie um die Druckaufbereitung, Sie beschäftigen sich - nur mit dem Entwurf, nicht mit der Ausführung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Diese Philosophie wird viel ausführlicher in der -\emph on -Einführung -\emph default - erläutert. - Wenn Sie sie noch nicht gelesen haben, sollten Sie das jetzt tun. - Ja, wir meinen -\emph on -jetzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\emph on -Einführung -\emph default - beschreibt außerdem einige zusätzliche Dinge: das wichtigste ist das Format - der Handbücher. - Wenn Sie sie nicht lesen, werden Sie viel Zeit brauchen, um in diesem Handbuch - zu suchen. - Ihnen ist vielleicht auch mehr damit gedient, in andere Handbücher als - dieses zu schauen. - Die -\emph on -Einführung -\emph default - beschreibt das auch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Wie LyX aussieht -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie die meisten Anwendungen hat auch LyX die bekannte Menüleiste am oberen - Rand des Fensters. - Darunter befindet sich eine Werkzeugleiste mit einer Auswahlbox und verschieden -en Knöpfen. - Es gibt natürlich einen vertikalen Rollbalken und ein Hauptarbeitsbereich - um die Dokumente zu bearbeiten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt keinen vertikalen Rollbalken. - Dies ist kein Fehler, sondern Absicht. - Wenn man ein Buch liest, erwartet man, dass die Zeilen am Rand umgebrochen - werden. - Der Text rutscht dabei automatisch auf die nächste Seite, daher ist ein - horizontaler Rollbalken nicht notwendig. - Es gibt drei Fälle, bei denen Sie dennoch einen Rollbalken erwarten. - Der erste Fall sind große Bilder. - Um zu verhindern, dass sie größer als der Bildschirm dargestellt werden, - kann man in den Bildeinstellungen die Option -\family sans -Skalierung auf Bildschirm -\family default - im Tab -\family sans -LaTeX- und LyX-Optionen -\family default - verwenden. - Der zweite und dritte Fall sind Tabellen und Gleichungen, die breiter als - LyXs Hauptarbeitsbereich sind. - Man kann die Pfeiltasten benutzen um horizontal durch Tabellen zu navigieren. - Dies funktioniert leider noch nicht für Gleichungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Für eine detaillierte Beschreibung aller LyX Menüs und Werkzeugleistenknöpfe, - siehe Anhang -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Die-Benutzeroberfläche" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -HILFE -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Hilfesystem besteht aus den LyX -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Handbüchern, -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mehr über den Befehl -\series bold -"= -\series default - siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "Zusammengesetzte-Worte" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - die Sie alle direkt in LyX lesen können. - Wählen Sie einfach das gewünschte Dokument aus dem Menü -\family sans -Hilfe -\family default - aus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LyX-Grundeinstellungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Grundeinstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "LyX-Grundeinstellungen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nahezu alle Features von LyX können über das Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - konfiguriert werden. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Grundeinstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - LyX kann Ihr System inspizieren, um zu sehen welche Programme, LaTeX-Dokumentkl -assen und LaTeX-Pakete verfügbar sind. - Diese Informationen werden verwendet, um sinnvolle Voreinstellungen für - die LyX-Grundeinstellungen festzulegen. - Die Konfiguration wird bereits bei der Installation durchgeführt. - Allerdings können später installierte Dinge wie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B, LaTeX-Klassen nicht detektiert werden. - In diesem Fall muss LyX über das Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Neu -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -konfigurieren -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Neukonfiguration von LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - neu konfiguriert werden. - Sie sollten dann LyX neu starten um sicherzustellen, dass die Änderungen - verwendet werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LaTeX-Einstellung -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:LaTeX-Einstellung" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX ! -Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können Dokumente in LyX bearbeiten ohne LaTeX installiert zu haben, - aber sie können dann keine PDFs erzeugen oder drucken. - Einige LyX-Dokumente benutzen jedoch z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - DocBook als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Backend -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - das PDFs erzeugen kann. - Des Weiteren können Sie LyX-Dokumente jederzeit als reine Textdatei oder - XHTML ausgeben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Manche Dokumentklassen benötigen spezielle LaTeX- oder DocBook-Pakete. - Wenn sie nicht installiert sind, können Sie diese Dokumentklassen trotzdem - verwenden, nur keine Ausgabe erzeugen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die LaTeX-Pakete die LyX auf Ihrem System gefunden hat, sind in einer Datei - aufgelistet, die Sie über das Menü -\family sans -Hilfe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Konfiguration -\family default - anschauen können. - Wenn sie Pakete vermissen, die sie benötigen, müssen Sie das fehlende Paket - installieren und LyX anschließend über das Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Neu -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -konfigurieren -\family default - neu konfigurieren. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Neukonfiguration von LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Installation eines neuen LaTeX-Paketes -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs für mehr Informationen wie man Pakete installiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Mit LyX arbeiten -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Einfache Datei-Befehle -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Menü -\family sans -Datei -\family default - finden Sie die 10 einfachen Datei-Befehle einer jeden Textverarbeitung - und einige fortgeschrittene: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Neu (Strg+N) -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/buffer-new.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Neu von -\family default - -\family sans -Vorlage (Strg+Umschalt+N) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Öffnen (Strg+O) -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/file-open.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Schließen (Strg+W) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Speichern (Strg+S) -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/buffer-write.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Speichern -\family default - -\family sans -unter (Strg+Umschalt+S) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Alles speichern -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Speicherung wieder herstellen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Drucken (Strg+P) -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show_print.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Beenden (Strg+Q) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bis auf ein paar kleine Unterschiede machen sie dasselbe wie bei jeder anderen - Textverarbeitung. - Der Menüpunkt -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Neu -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -von -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Vorlage -\family default - listet alle verfügbaren Vorlagen auf. - Mit der Auswahl einer Vorlagedatei werden automatisch verschiedene Layout-Einst -ellungen aktiviert, die Sie sonst von Hand verändern müssten. - Derartige Vorlagen können für alle möglichen Textklassen verwendet werden, - sie bieten sich aber vor allem für Briefe an (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sub:Dokumentklassen" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Hinweis: -\series default - Es gibt keine Standarddatei oder ein Dokument -\emph on -unbenannt -\emph default -, das automatisch geladen wird. - Solange Sie nicht selber eine Datei öffnen oder neu anlegen, ist der leere - Bereich auf dem Bildschirm genau das – ein großer, leerer Bereich. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Befehl -\family sans -Speicherung -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -wieder -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -herstellen -\family default - lädt das aktuelle Dokument neu von der Festplatte. - Damit können Sie einen Text, den Sie aus Versehen editiert haben, wieder - in den Originalzustand bringen, außerdem ist er hilfreich, wenn mehrere - Personen an einem Text arbeiten. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Wenn Sie das vorhaben, sollten Sie sich die Unterstützung für Versionskontrolle - im Dokument -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - ansehen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der letzte Hinweis betrifft die Menüpunkte -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Schließen -\family default - und -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Beenden -\family default -. - Wenn Sie eine bearbeitete Datei schließen oder LyX beenden wollen, werden - Sie gefragt, ob Sie vorher geänderte Dateien speichern wollen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Einfache Bearbeitungsfunktionen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Einfache-Bearbeitungsfunktionen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie bei den meisten gängigen Textverarbeitungen können Sie auch bei LyX - Textblöcke ausschneiden und kopieren, sich zeichen-, wort- oder seitenweise - durch den Text bewegen und ganze Worte oder auch einzelne Zeichen löschen. - In den folgenden vier Abschnitten werden diese Funktionen beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie zu erwarten, finden Sie diese Befehle im Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten -\family default -, zusammen mit einigen weiteren Funktionen zur Textbearbeitung. - Einige von ihnen sind von besonderer Bedeutung und werden später gesondert - behandelt. - Die grundlegenden Befehle sind: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Ausschneiden -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ausschneiden -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, Strg+X -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/cut.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Kopieren -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Kopieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, Strg+C -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/copy.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einfugen@Einfügen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\family sans -Strg+V -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/paste.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Einfügen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(vorherige -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Auswahl) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Einfügen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(speziell) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Suchen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Ersetzen, -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Suchen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ersetzen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans - Strg+F -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show_findreplace.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die ersten drei sind selbsterklärend. - Unter -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einfügen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(vorherige -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Auswahl) -\family default - finden Sie eine Liste der letzten eingefügten Textstücke. - Durch anklicken können Sie eins davon an der momentanen Cursorposition - einfügen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einfügen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(speziell) -\family default -fügt ausgewählten Text mit allen Sonderzeichen, Formatierungen und Umgebungen - ( -\family sans -Einfacher -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Text -\family default -) oder ohne sie ( -\family sans -Auswahl -\family default -) ein. - Außerdem bleibt das Eingefügte im ersten Fall markiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Tasten -\family sans -Entf -\family default - und -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - - arbeiten ebenfalls wie der Befehl -\family sans -Ausschneiden -\family default -. - Auch müssen Sie aufpassen, wenn Sie Textstellen markiert haben. - Wenn Sie in diesem Moment eine Taste drücken, wird der markierte Text gelöscht - und durch den neu eingegebenen Text ersetzt. - Sie müssen dann den gelöschten Text mit dem Befehl -\family sans -Rückgängig -\family default - ( -\family sans -Strg+Z -\family default -) zurückholen (siehe auch Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sec:Rückgängig-Wiederholen" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suchen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ersetzen -\family default - öffnet das Dialogfenster -\family sans -Suchen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -und -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Ersetzen -\family default -. - Den zu suchenden Text tragen Sie im Feld -\family sans -Suchen: -\family default - ein. - Mit der Schaltfläche -\family sans -Nächstes -\family default - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\family sans -suchen -\family default - wird der Text gesucht. - Die Suchrichtung ist normalerweise vorwärts, es sei denn, -\family sans -Rückwärts -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -suchen -\family default - ist aktiviert. - Wurde der Suchbegriff gefunden, wird er markiert. - Wenn Sie das Fenster schließen, können Sie mit der -\family sans -F3 -\family default --Taste weiter suchen, aber nur vorwärts und ohne Unterscheidung zwischen - groß und klein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie dann -\family sans -Ersetzen -\family default - anklicken, wird der markierte Begriff durch den Inhalt des Feldes -\family sans -Ersetzen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -durch: -\family default - ersetzt. - Dann können Sie weiter suchen. - Wenn Sie -\family sans -Alles -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ersetzen -\family default - anklicken, werden unabhängig davon, wo der Cursor im Dokument gerade steht, - wirklich ALLE Suchbegriffe ersetzt. - Ist das Feld -\family sans -Ersetzen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -durch: -\family default - leer, wird der Suchbegriff gelöscht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Über den Umschaltknopf -\family sans -Groß-/Kleinschreibung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -beachten -\family default - können Sie festlegen, ob bei der Suche die Schreibweise berücksichtigt - werden soll. - Ist sie aktiv, wird zum Beispiel bei der Suche nach -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Treffen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - das Wort -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -treffen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - nicht gefunden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Umschaltknopf -\family sans -Nur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ganze -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Wörter -\family default - schaltet den Modus -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -nur ganze Worte suchen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - ein und aus. - Dann wird beispielsweise bei der Suche nach -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Treff -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - das Wort -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Treffer -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - nicht gefunden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX bietet außerdem ein fortgeschrittenes Suchen&Ersetzen, das in Kap. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Fortgeschrittenes-Suchen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dinge wie Notizen, Gleitobjekte, usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(sogenannte Einfügungen) können aufgelöst werden. - Das bedeutet, dass sie gelöscht werden, ihr Inhalt jedoch als normaler - Text erhalten bleibt. - Um etwas aufzulösen, setzt man den Cursor an den Anfang des Objekts und - drückt die -\family sans -Rücktaste -\family default - oder setzt den Cursor an das Ende und drückt die -\family sans -Entfernen -\family default --Taste der Tastatur. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Inhalt von Einfügungen wird mit dem Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+Alt+A -\family default - ausgewählt, das Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+A -\family default - wählt das komplette Dokument aus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -R -\family sans -ückgängig -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ruckgangig@Rückgängig -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - machen und W -\family sans -iederholen -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Wiederholen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Rückgängig-Wiederholen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie einen Fehler machen, können Sie diesen leicht ungeschehen machen, - denn LyX verfügt über einen sehr großen Speicher für Änderungen. - Wählen Sie die Funktion -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rückgängig -\family default - ( -\family sans -Strg+Z -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/undo.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -), um einen falschen Arbeitsschritt zurückzunehmen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie dabei versehentlich zu weit zurückgehen, können Sie mit -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Wiederho\SpecialChar \- -len -\family default - ( -\family sans -Strg+Y -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/redo.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -) das Rückgängigmachen schrittweise wieder zurücknehmen. - Derzeit ist die Anzahl der zurücknehmbaren Schritte auf 100 beschränkt, - um den Speicherverbrauch zu verringern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Auf diese Weise lassen sich Änderungen natürlich nur bis zu dem Zeitpunkt - zurücknehmen, als Sie das Dokument geöffnet haben, ebenso funktioniert - -\family sans -Wiederholen -\family default - nur bis zur letzten gemachten Änderung. - Sonst sind die entsprechenden Menüpunkte grau unterlegt und nicht wählbar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bitte beachten Sie auch, dass, wenn Sie in einem Dokument alle gemachten - Änderungen zurücknehmen, trotzdem der Status des Dokumentes als -\emph on -geändert -\emph default - erhalten bleibt. - Dies ist mit der oben erwähnten Beschränkung auf 100 Änderungsschritte - verbunden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Funktionen -\family sans -Rückgängig -\family default - und -\family sans -Wiederholen -\family default - sind auf fast alle Bearbeitungsschritte anwendbar, jedoch gibt es ein paar - Eigenheiten. - So arbeiten sie beispielsweise nicht zeichenorientiert, sondern textblockweise; - das kann anfangs etwas gewöhnungsbedürftig sein. - Probieren Sie ein wenig mit diesen Funktionen herum, um ein Gefühl dafür - zu bekommen, wie viel Text in einem solchen Block enthalten ist, und Sie - werden sich hoffentlich bald daran gewöhnt haben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Außerdem funktioniert -\family sans -Wiederholen -\family default - nicht im Mathematikmodus. - Ein Tipp dazu: Wenn Sie in den Mathematikmodus wechseln, dort eine Gleichung - ändern und dann den Mathematikmodus verlassen, stellt ein -\family sans -Rückgängig -\family default - die Gleichung so wieder her, wie sie war, bevor Sie in den Mathematikmodus - gewechselt sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Mausfunktionen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mausfunktionen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -An dieser Stelle werden nur die grundlegenden Operationen beschrieben, die - mit der Maus durchgeführt werden können. - In anderen Abschnitten dieses Dokumentes werden Sie weitere, spezielle - Funktionen kennenlernen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Positionieren -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Einfaches Klicken mit der -\emph on -linken -\emph default - Maustaste positioniert den Textcursor unter den Mauszeiger. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Der Rollbalken funktioniert so wie in anderen Programmen, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -das Mausrad auch -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Querverweise: Ein Klick mit der -\emph on -rechten -\emph default - Maustaste springt zu der Stelle, auf die verwiesen wird. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Text markieren -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Halten Sie die -\emph on -linke -\emph default - Maustaste gedrückt und bewegen Sie die Maus. - LyX markiert den Text zwischen der alten und der neuen Position des Mauszeigers. - Mit -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Kopieren, Strg+C -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/copy.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - übernehmen Sie den markierten Text in den internen Kopierspeicher von LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Positionieren Sie den Textcursor neu und fügen Sie die Auswahl mit -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einfügen, Strg+V -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/paste.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - in den Text ein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Wenn Sie die Auswahl durch Klicken mit der -\emph on -mittleren -\emph default - Maustaste in den Text einzufügen, verwendet LyX anstelle des eigenen Kopierspei -chers den X-Puffer. - Der Text wird derselbe sein, jedoch gehen dabei sämtliche Formatierungen - verloren. - Dennoch ist dieser Mechanismus praktisch, wenn Sie Textabschnitte aus anderen - X-Anwendungen in ein Dokument einfügen wollen. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Fußnoten, Randnotizen, Gleitobjekte (Abbildungen und Tabellen) usw. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Ein einfaches Klicken mit der -\emph on -linken -\emph default - Maustaste öffnet oder schließt jedes dieser Objekte. - Beachten Sie außerdem die entsprechenden Abschnitte dieses Handbuches. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Section -Navigieren -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Navigieren" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Navigieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX bietet Ihnen verschiedene Möglichkeiten in Dokumenten zu navigieren: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Das Menü -\family sans -Navigieren -\family default - enthält alle Überschriften des Dokuments als Untermenüs, deren Anklicken - Sie zu dem entsprechenden Dokumentteil führt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Gliederung -\family default - (Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle toc" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - - springt zu der Position im Dokument, wo zuletzt etwas geändert wurde. - Das ist z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - nützlich bei großen Dokumenten, wenn man zu einer anderen Position im Dokument - navigiert oder gescrollt hat, um etwas nachzuschauen und anschließend zur - Position zurückspringen möchte, wo man zuletzt etwas geschrieben hat. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit der -\family sans -F5 -\family default - -Taste wird der Cursor vertikal in LyXs Hauptfenster zentriert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Gliederung -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Gliederung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hiermit schalten Sie die Gliederung an, die dann im linken Teil des LyX-Fensters - erscheint. - Ein weiterer Klick auf den Knopf lässt die Gliederung wieder verschwinden. - Das Navigieren selber erfolgt wie im Menü -\family sans -Navigieren -\family default -. - Die Gliederung zeigt zunächst das Inhaltsverzeichnis, aber Sie können durch - einen Klick auf -\family sans -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\family default - auch andere Listen auswählen, z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - Fußnoten, oder Marken und Querverweise (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Querverweise" - -\end_inset - -), oder Notizen, oder Literaturverweise (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - -). - Es hängt vom Dokumenttyp ab, welche Listen vorhanden sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Rechts-klicken auf Elemente in der Gliederung öffnet in vielen Fällen ein - Kontextmenü mit dem Elemente direkt verändert werden können. - Zum Beispiel erlaubt das Kontextmenü für Literaturverweise den Literaturverweis --Dialog zu öffnen um den Verweis zu bearbeiten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Feld `Filter' erlaubt es, die angezeigten Einträge einzugrenzen. - Wenn zum Beispiel die Liste der Marken und Querverweise angezeigt ist und - Sie nur Verweise auf Unterabschnitte sehen wollen, geben Sie den Text -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -sub: -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - in den Filter ein und nur Einträge mit diesem Text werden angezeigt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Unten in der Gliederung gibt es verschiedene Knöpfe und Optionen zur Kontrolle - der Gliederung. - Die Option -\family sans -Sortieren -\family default - sortiert die aktuelle Liste alphabetisch. - Ansonsten erscheinen die Elemente in der Reihenfolge, in der sie im Dokument - erscheinen. - Die Option -\family sans -Behalten -\family default - behält die aktuelle Ansicht bei. - Behalten bedeutet, dass wenn z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - die Unterabschnitte von Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 und 4 angezeigt sind und man auf Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 klickt, die Unterabschnitte von Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 und 4 weiterhin angezeigt bleiben. - Ohne die Option -\family sans -Behalten -\family default - würde nur die Unterabschnitte von Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 angezeigt. - Des Weiteren gibt es einen Schieberegler, mit dem Sie die Anzeigetiefe - ändern können. - Außerdem sind dort fünf Knöpfe mit folgender Bedeutung: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/reload.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - : aktualisiert das Verzeichnis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/promote.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - : schiebt das ausgewählte Gliederungs-Element um eine Stufe nach oben (zum - Beispiel von 1.2.3 nach 1.3). - Alle folgenden Gliederungs-Elemente werden angepasst. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/demote.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - : schiebt das ausgewählte Gliederungs-Element um eine Stufe nach unten - (zum Beispiel von 1.2 nach 1.2.1). - Alle folgenden Gliederungs-Elemente werden angepasst. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/down.png - scale 70 - -\end_inset - - : schiebt das ausgewählte Gliederungs-Element nach unten. - Die Gliederung wird angepasst. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/up.png - scale 70 - -\end_inset - - : schiebt das ausgewählte Gliederungs-Element nach oben. - Die Gliederung wird angepasst. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die letzten vier Knöpfe erleichtern das Verschieben von Textteilen, sofern - es sich um ganze Abschnitte und ähnliches handelt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Gliederung erhalten Sie auch, wenn Sie am Anfang des Dokuments ein Inhalts-, - Tabellen- oder Abbildungsverzeichnis angelegt haben und darauf klicken. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Eingabevervollständigung -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Eingabevervollständigung-general" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Eingabevervollständigung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX bietet eine Eingabevervollständigung an, indem alle geöffneten Dokumente - gescannt werden. - Jedes gefundene Wort wird in eine Datenbank eingetragen, die für die Vervollstä -ndigungsvorschläge verwendet wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Eingabevervollständigung wird in dem LyX-Grundeinstellungen (Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default -) unter -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Eingabevervollständigung -\family default - aktiviert werden. - Mit der Option -\family sans -Automatische -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Wortvervollständigung -\family default - wird der Vervollständigungsvorschlag direkt hinter dem Cursor angezeigt. - Mit der Option -\family sans -Automatisches -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Popup -\family default - werden die Vorschläge immer in einem Popup angezeigt. - Der Vervollständigungsindikator kann mit der Option -\family sans -Cursor -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Markierung -\family default - abgeschaltet werden. - Mit den allgemeinen Optionen kann die Verzögerungszeit für die Popups und - für die Vervollständigung eingestellt werden und man kann wählen, ob lange - Vervollständigungen abgekürzt werden sollen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX verwendet ein kleines Dreieck hinter dem Cursor als Indikator dass es - Vervollständigungen gibt. - Um eine Vervollständigung zu akzeptieren, drückt man die -\family sans -Tab -\family default - Taste. - Falls mehrere Vervollständigungen verfügbar sind, wird ein Popup geöffnet, - das diese anzeigt. - Man kann eine Vervollständigung im Popup mit der Maus oder den Pfeiltasten - auswählen, und akzeptieren, indem man -\family sans -Enter -\family default - drückt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Vervollständigungsoptionen für Mathe in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen bewirken - dasselbe wie die entsprechenden Optionen für Text. - Die spezielle Mathe-Option -\family sans -Automatische Korrektur -\family default - erlaubt es, Zeichen aus anderen zusammenzusetzen. - Wenn man z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - das Zeichen -\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - einfügen will, kann man dann die Zeichen -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -=> -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - in eine Formel eingeben um es zu erhalten. - Dies ist also eine schnelle Alternative zur Eingabe von Befehlen oder der - Verwendung der Mathe-Werkzeugleiste. - Eine Liste mit allen unterstützten Zeichenkombinationen ist in der Datei - -\family typewriter -autocorrect -\family default - zu finden, die sich irgendwo in LyXs Installationsordner befindet. - Die Automatische Korrektur kann jederzeit angeschaltet werden in dem man - das Ausrufezeichen drückt '!'. - Durch Drücken der Leertaste wird sie ausgeschaltet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Grundlegende Tastaturfunktionen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tastatur!-funktionen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt mindestens zwei verschiedene grundlegende Sätze von Tastenkürzeln: - -\family typewriter -cua -\family default - und -\family typewriter -emacs -\family default -. - LyXs Voreinstellung ist -\family typewriter -cua -\family default -, die in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen unter -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tastenkürzel -\family default - geändert werden kann. - (Man kann dort auch alle Tastenkürzel auflisten oder ändern, wie es in - Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tastenkürzel-bearbeiten" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einige Tasten wie -\family sans -Bild -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Hoch -\family default -, -\family sans -Bild -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Runter -\family default -, -\family sans -Links -\family default -, -\family sans -Rechts -\family default -, -\family sans -Hoch -\family default - und -\family sans -Runter -\family default - machen genau das, was man erwartet, andere nicht: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tabulator -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Tab" -description "Tabulator key" - -\end_inset - -Es gibt in LyX keine Tabulatoren. - Wenn Sie das nicht verstehen, lesen Sie die Abschnitte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Einleitung-Absatzeinrückung" - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Absatzumgebungen" - -\end_inset - -, speziell Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Listen" - -\end_inset - -, jetzt sofort. - Ja, jetzt sofort. - Wenn Sie immer noch verwirrt sind, schauen Sie in das LyX -\emph on -Tutorium -\emph default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -In LyX wird die Tabulatortaste nur verwendet, um Vorschläge der Eingabevervollst -ändigung zu übernehmen, um den Cursor in Tabellen oder Matrizen zu bewegen - oder um die Schachtelungstiefe in Aufzählungen der Listen zu ändern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Esc -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Esc" -description "Escape key" - -\end_inset - -Wird verwendet, um Operationen abzubrechen. - Andere Teile des Handbuchs gehen detaillierter darauf ein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Pos1 -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -und -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Ende -\family default - Diese setzen den Cursor an den Anfang oder das Ende einer Zeile. - Verwenden Sie die Emacs-Tastenkürzel, wird der Cursor an den Anfang oder - das Ende des Dokuments gesetzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt drei Hilfstasten: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Steuerung -\family default - (in der Dokumentation als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Strg -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Strg" -description "Steuerung-Taste" - -\end_inset - - bezeichnet) Diese hat verschiedene Funktionen, abhängig mit welcher Taste - es in Kombination verwendet wird: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Mit -\family sans -Rücktaste -\family default - oder -\family sans -Entf -\family default - löscht es ein ganzes Wort statt nur einem Zeichen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Mit -\family sans -Links -\family default - und -\family sans -Rechts -\family default - springt es über Wörter statt Zeichen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Mit -\family sans -Pos1 -\family default - und -\family sans -Ende -\family default - springt es Richtung Anfang bzw. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ende des Dokuments. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Umschalt -\family default - (in der Dokumentation als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Umschalt -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Umschalt" -description "Umschalt-Taste" - -\end_inset - - bezeichnet) Verwenden Sie diese zusammen mit den Pfeiltasten, wird der - Text zwischen der alten und neuen Cursorposition markiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Alt -\family default - (in der Dokumentation als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Alt -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Alt" -description "Alt oder Meta-Taste" - -\end_inset - - bezeichnet) Dies ist auf den meisten Tastaturen die Alt Taste, es sei denn - dass die Tastatur eine spezielle -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Meta -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Taste besitzt. - Haben Sie beide Tasten, müssen Sie herausfinden welche die Funktion der - Alt Taste hat. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Diese Taste macht verschiedene Dinge und aktiviert zudem die Menü Schnellauswahl. - Wenn man sie in Kombination mit einem unterstrichenen Buchstaben eines - Menüeintrags verwendet, wird dieses Menü ausgewählt. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Zum Beispiel öffnet die Sequenz -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Alt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -b -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -t -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -b -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - den -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Textstil -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Dialog. - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Alt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - öffnet das -\family sans -Datei -\family default - Menü. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Handbuch -\emph on -Tastenkürzel -\emph default - listet alle Kürzel mit der -\family sans -Alt -\family default - Taste auf. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Mit der zeit werden Sie mehr und mehr Tastenkürzel von LyX lernen und verwenden, - denn meist wird das Kürzel zu einer Aktion in der Statusleiste von LyX - angezeigt. - Die LyX Menüeinträge listen zudem die entsprechenden Tastenkürzel auf. - Die Schreibweise der Kürzel ist sehr ähnlich, meist sogar dieselbe wie - in der LyX Dokumentation. - Beachten Sie, dass die -\family sans -Umschalt -\family default - Taste explizit erwähnt wird; -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Alt+A Umschalt+A -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - bedeutet -\family sans -Alt+P -\family default - gefolgt von einem großen A. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann im Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - unter -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tastenkürzel -\family default - alle Tastenkürzel auflisten oder ändern, wie es in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tastenkürzel-bearbeiten" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -LyX-Grundlagen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Dokumenttypen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einleitung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bevor Sie anfangen, ein Dokument zu schreiben, müssen Sie entscheiden, was - für eine -\emph on -Art -\emph default - von Dokument Sie wollen. - Unterschiedliche Dokumentarten benutzen unterschiedliche Typen für Zwischenräum -e, Überschriften, Nummerierungen, usw. - Außerdem benutzen unterschiedliche Dokumente unterschiedliche Absatzumgebungen - und formatieren Dokumenttitel unterschiedlich. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine -\emph on -Dokumentklasse -\emph default - beschreibt eine Gruppe von Eigenschaften, die eine bestimmte Menge von - Dokumenten gemeinsam haben. - Durch die Wahl der Dokumentklasse legt man diese Eigenschaften automatisch - fest und erleichtert die Erschaffung des gewünschten Dokumentes. - Wenn Sie keine Dokumentklasse wählen, nimmt LyX die Standardklasse. - Dann aber müssen Sie eventuell die Dokumentklasse ändern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Dokumentklassen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Dokumentklassen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! -klassen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können eine Klasse über D -\family sans -okument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dokumentklasse -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - auswählen. - Danach können Sie die benötigten Optionen feineinstellen. - Wenn Sie ans Ende der Auswahl gehen, sehen Sie einige Dokumentklassen, - die LyX zwar unterstützt, die aber bei Ihnen nicht installiert sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Übersicht -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In LyX gibt es vier Standarddokumentklassen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Article für Standardartikel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Book für Bücher -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Letter für Briefe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Report für Standardberichte -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt auch noch andere Klassen, die LyX aber nur benutzt, wenn LaTeX entsprech -end eingerichtet ist. - Die vollständige Liste finden Sie im Anhang der -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default -. - Hier sind einige: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -A&A Journal-Artikel in Stil und Format von Astronomy & Astrophysics. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ACS Layout für Journale der American Chemistry Society -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -AGU Layout für Journale der American Geophysical Union -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -AMS Artikel im Stil und Format der AMS (American Mathematical Society). - Es gibt drei amsart-Layouts. - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Das Standardlayout benutzt das normale Nummerierungsschema für Sätze usw., - das die Abschnittsnummer voranstellt. - Alle Behauptungen (Sätze, Korollare usw.) werden gemeinsam nummeriert, aber - Definitionen, Beispiele und Ähnliches haben ihre eigene Nummerierungsreihenfolg -e. - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -sequential numbering -\series default - stellt keine Abschnittsnummer voran, sondern nummeriert alles fortlaufend. - Jeder Typ (Sätze, Definitionen usw.) erhält eine eigene Nummerierungsreihenfolge. - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -unnumbered -\series default - verzichtet vollständig auf die Nummerierung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Beamer Layout für Präsentationen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Broadway Layout zum Schreiben von Theaterstücken. - Dies ist keine LaTeX -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Dokumentklasse -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -siehe -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "Zusammengesetzte-Worte" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, sondern eine, die zusammen mit LyX ausgeliefert wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chess Layout um über Schachspiele zu schreiben -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Curiculum -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vitae für Lebensläufe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Elsarticle Layout für Journale der Elsevier-Gruppe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Foils um Präsentationsfolien zu erstellen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hollywood für spezielle Filmskripte der US-Filmindustrie. - Dies ist keine LaTeX -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Dokumentklasse, sondern eine, die zusammen mit LyX ausgeliefert wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -IEEEtran Layout für Journale des Institute of Electrical and Electronics - Engineers (IEEE) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -IOP Layout für Journale des Institute of Physics -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kluwer Layout für Journale der Kluwer-Gruppe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -\series bold -KOMA-Script -\family default -\series default - ersetzt die Standardklassen und bietet viele nützliche Funktionen wie das - Formatieren von Beschriftungen, automatische Druckgrößen-Berechnung usw. - (Wird von diesem Dokument benutzt.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Memoir ein weiterer Ersatz für die Standardklassen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Powerdot Layout für Präsentationen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -REVTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X Artikel für Veröffentlichungen der APS (American Physical Society), des - AIP (American Institute of Physics) und der OSA (Optical Society of America). - Diese Klasse ist nicht mit allen LyX-Funktionen kompatibel. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Slides um Präsentationsfolien zu erstellen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -SPIE -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Proceedings Layout für Journale der International Society for Optical Engineerin -g (SPIE) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Springer Layouts für Journale der Springer-Gruppe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wir wollen hier nicht im Einzelnen beschreiben, wie man diese verschiedenen - Dokumentklassen benutzen kann. - Einzelheiten über die Nicht-Standard-Klassen finden Sie in den -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default -. - Hier wollen wir uns mit Eigenschaften befassen, die allen Dokumentklassen - gemeinsam sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Verfügbarkeit -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Neue Benutzer sind manchmal verwundert, dass viele Dokumentklassen, die - im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dokumentklasse -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - gelistet sind, als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -nicht verfügbar -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - markiert sind. - Oder sie sind überrascht wenn sie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - die Vorlage -\family sans -iop-article -\family default - öffnen und eine Warnung erhalten, dass das Dokument Dateien benötigt, die - nicht installiert sind. - Daher könnte man meinen, dass etwas nicht stimmt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aber alles ist in Ordnung. - LyX enthält weit mehr Dokumentklassen als man jemals benutzen wird. - Die meisten, wie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - -\family sans -IOP -\family default -, sind sehr speziell. - LyX versucht so viele Klassen wie möglich zu unterstützen und enthält annähernd - hundert verschiedene Layout-Dateien, Tendenz steigend. - Keine LaTeX-Distribution wird standardmäßig alle Dateien installieren, - die von irgend einer Dokumentklasse benötigt werden. - Es sind einfach zu viele. - Das ist der Grund warum einige Dokumentklassen nicht verfügbar sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Falls es eine Dokumentklasse gibt, die Sie benutzen möchten, die aber als - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -nicht verfügbar -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - gekennzeichnet ist, müssen Sie die entsprechenden Paketdateien installieren. - Der einfachste Weg herauszufinden welche Dateien Sie installieren müssen, - ist es, die Dokumentklasse für eine neue Datei zu verwenden. - LyX wird dann einen Dialog zeigen, der die fehlenden Dateien auflistet. - In Abschnitt -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Installation eines neuen LaTeX-Paketes -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs ist beschrieben, wie man diese installiert. -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Obwohl LyX viele verschiedenen Dokumenttypen unterstützt, kann es nicht - alle unterstützen, die man vielleicht benutzen möchte. - Zum Beispiel stellen viele Universitäten LaTeX-Dokumentklassen bereit, - die man für Dissertationen verwenden muss. - Das LyX-Team kann nicht für jede davon eine Layout-Datei schreiben, da - es zu viele davon gibt, die sich auch noch oft ändern. - Glücklicherweise kann man sich aber sein eigenes Layout schreiben, und - viele LyX-Nutzer haben das schon getan. - Kapitel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -5 des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs enthält Informationen wie man Layout-Dateien erstellt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Module -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Module" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Module -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Module ergänzen ein Dokument um zusätzliche Funktionen, die nicht standardmäßig - zur gewählten Dokumentklasse gehören. - Wenn Sie zum Beispiel Brailleschrift benutzen wollen, gibt es das natürlich - in keiner Dokumentklasse, also müssen Sie ein entsprechendes Modul im Abschnitt - -\family sans -Dokumentklasse -\family default - von -\family sans -Dokument -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - laden. - Wenn Sie auf einen Namen klicken, erscheint im unteren Feld eine Erklärung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einige Module benötigen LaTeX-Pakete die nicht standardmäßig installiert - sind. - LyX wird Sie warnen falls das benötigte Paket nicht installiert ist. - Sie können das Modul dann trotzdem verwenden um das Dokument zu bearbeiten, - nur keine Ausgabe erzeugen oder es als PDF ansehen, da LyX ohne das Paket - nicht kompilieren kann. - Um eine Ausgabe erzeugen zu können müssen Sie das fehlende Paket installieren - und LyX anschließend über das Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Neu -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -konfigurieren -\family default - neu konfigurieren. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Neukonfiguration von LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Installation eines neuen LaTeX-Paketes -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs für mehr Informationen wie man Pakete installiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Einige Module benötigen andere Module und manche Module sind miteinander - inkompatibel. - LyX wird Sie darauf hinweisen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Lokales Format -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Lokales-Format" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! lokales Format -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Module funktionieren bei LyX wie Pakete bei LaTeX: Sie sind dazu gedacht - in verschiedenem Dokumenten verwendet zu werden. - Wenn Sie oft dieselbe Sache in verschiedenen Dokumenten benötigen, sollten - Sie es in Betracht ziehen, dafür ein Modul zu schreiben. - Manchmal jedoch braucht man für ein bestimmtes Dokument ein Format, aber - nur in diesem einen Dokument. - Also so etwas wie einen dokumentspezifischen LaTeX-Vorspann: LyXs sogenanntes - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Lokales -\emph on - -\emph default -Format -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Siehe Abschnitt -\emph on -Lokales Layout -\emph default - des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs für Informationen wie man es benutzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Eigenschaften -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Jede Dokumentklasse hat Standardwerte, diese Tabelle beschreibt sie: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Seitenstil -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Seiten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Spalten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -höchste Abschnittsstufe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -article -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfach -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einseitig -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Eine -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Abschnitt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -report -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfach -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einseitig -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Eine -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Kapitel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -book -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -mit Überschriften -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Zweiseitig -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Eine -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Kapitel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -letter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfach -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einseitig -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Eine -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -keine -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Sie werden sich wahrscheinlich fragen, was -\family sans -höchste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Abschnittsstufe -\family default - bedeutet. - Es gibt mehrere Absatzumgebungen, um Abschnittsüberschriften zu erzeugen. - Unterschiedliche Dokumentklassen gestatten unterschiedliche Abschnittsüberschri -ften. - Nur zwei benutzen die -\family sans -Kapitel -\family default --Überschrift; der Rest beginnt stattdessen mit der -\family sans -Abschnitt -\family default --Überschrift. - Einige Dokumentklassen wie die für Briefe benutzen überhaupt keine Überschrifte -n. - Außer -\family sans -Kapitel -\family default -- und -\family sans -Abschnitt -\family default --Überschriften gibt es auch -\family sans -Unterabschnitt -\family default --Überschriften, -\family sans -Unterunterabschnitt -\family default --Überschriften usw.. - Wir werden diese Überschriften ausführlich in Abschnitt -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sub:Überschriften" - -\end_inset - - beschreiben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Dokumentlayout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Dokumentlayout" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Layout -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die wichtigsten Eigenschaften von Dokumentklassen werden im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - gesetzt. - Dort können Sie im Feld -\family sans -Klassenoptionen -\family default - unter -\family sans -Dokumentklasse -\family default - spezielle Optionen für Ihre Dokumentklasse als mit Kommas unterteilte Liste - angeben. - Dies ist nur notwendig wenn LyX spezielle Optionen nicht unterstützt, die - Sie verwenden wollen. - Um mehr über Ihre bevorzugte LaTeX-Klasse zu lernen, müssen deren Handbuch - lesen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Box -\family sans -Seiten-Stil -\family default - im -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - Dialog unter -\family sans -Seitenlayout -\family default - legt fest welche Kopfzeilen und Seitennummern auf den Seiten erscheinen. - Man kann zwischen den folgenden fünf Optionen wählen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Standard -\family default - der Standard-Stil der aktuellen Klasse -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -leer -\family default - keine Seitennummern oder Kopfzeilen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -einfach -\family default - nur Seitennummern -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -mit -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Überschriften -\family default - Seitennummern und entweder das aktuelle Kapitel oder Abschnittstitel und - -nummer. - Ob LyX das aktuelle Kapitel oder den Abschnitt verwendet, hängt von der - maximalen Abschnittsstufe der Klasse ab. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -ausgefallen -\family default - Dies erlaubt es, eigene Kopf- und Fußzeilen zu erstellen, wenn das LaTeX-Paket - -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installiert ist. - Wie diese erstellt werden, ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Benutzerdefinierte-Kopf/Fußzeile" - -\end_inset - - erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Trennung von Absätzen ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Globale-Absatztrennung" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Seitengröße und Orientierung -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Seitengröße-und-Orientierung" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Seitengröße -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie finden die folgenden Optionen im Menü -\family sans -Seitenlayout -\family default - des -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - Dialogs: -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Papierformat -\family default - Auf welche Papiergröße ausgegeben werden soll. - Die Größen sind -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Standard -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -A0 - A6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -B0 - B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -C0 - C6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -US letter, US legal, US executive -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -JIS B0 - JIS B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Benutzerdefiniert -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Orientierung -\family default - Ob es als -\family sans -Hochformat -\family default - oder -\family sans -Querformat -\family default - ausgegeben werden soll. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Doppelseitiges -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Dokument -\family default - Verändert den Textbereich um beide Seiten des Papiers zu bedrucken. - Dies bedeutet, dass der Textbereich für gerade und ungerade Seiten verschieden - ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Seitenränder -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Seitenränder" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Seitenränder -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Seitenränder -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Seitenränder werden im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - eingestellt. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie eine KOMA-Script Dokumentklasse verwenden, können Sie die Standard-Ränd -er beibehalten. - Denn KOMA-Script berechnet den Textbereich automatisch unter Berücksichtigung - des Papierformats und der Schriftgröße. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Wichtiger Hinweis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie die Dokumentklasse ändern, muss LyX -\emph on -alles -\emph default - in die neue Klasse umwandeln, einschließlich der Absatzumgebungen. - Einige Absatzumgebungen sind Standard; alle Dokumentklassen haben sie. - Einige Klassen jedoch haben besondere Absatzumgebungen. - Wenn Sie in so einem Fall die Dokumentklasse ändern, markiert LyX die Absätze, - deren Umgebungen es nicht mehr kennt, als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -unbekannt -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Der Name der Umgebung wird beibehalten für den Fall, dass Sie zur vorigen - Dokumentklasse zurück wechseln wollen. - Absätze mit unbekannter Umgebung werden ohne spezielle Formatierung ausgegeben, - so dass Sie entweder eine eigene Formatierung festlegen oder für den Absatz - eine bekannte Umgebung der aktuellen Dokumentklasse ändern müssen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Absatzeinrückung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Absatz!-einruckung@-einrückung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Absatztrennung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Absatz!-trennung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einleitung -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Einleitung-Absatzeinrückung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bevor wir die verschiedenen Absatzumgebungen beschreiben, wollen wir etwas - über die Absatzeinrückung sagen. - Jeder scheint eigene Vorstellungen darüber zu haben, wie Absätze zu trennen - sind. - Die meisten Amerikaner rücken die erste Zeile eines Absatzes ein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die deutsche LyX-Version benutzt diese Konvention. - Die englische (amerikanische) Version rückt den -\emph on -ersten -\emph default - Absatz eines Abschnittes, oder nach einem Bild, einer Gleichung, einer - Liste usw. -\emph on - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -nicht -\emph default - ein. - Nur die folgenden Absätze werden eingerückt. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Die Unterschiede erkennt man am besten, wenn man sich die Dokumentation - in den verschiedenen Sprachen ansieht. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Manch einer mag diese Konvention nicht, aber wenn Sie eingerückte Absätze - benutzen wollen, müssen Sie damit leben. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Man kann LaTeX nicht zwingen, -\emph on -alle -\emph default - Absätze einzurücken. - LyX zeigt es natürlich nicht und LaTeX wird es auch nicht so drucken. - Sie benötigen ein Spezialpaket und einen entsprechenden Befehl im LaTeX-Vorspan -n. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Andere machen das nicht, sondern fügen stattdessen einen größeren Abstand - zwischen zwei Absätzen ein. - Der Abstand zwischen zwei Absätzen, der Zeilenabstand, der Abstand zwischen - Überschrift und Text – alle Abstände zwischen irgendwelchen Objekten sind - in LyX in der Tat vordefiniert. - Wie wir sagten, Sie müssen sich nicht um Zwischenräume kümmern, LyX passt - darauf auf. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Tatsächlich sind die vordefinierten vertikalen Abstände keine feste Zahl, - sondern ein Bereich. - Auf diese Weise kann LyX den Platz zwischen Zeilen verringern oder dehnen - um sicherzustellen, dass Bilder zusammen mit Text auf eine Seite passen, - dass Abschnitte nicht am Fuß einer Seite beginnen usw. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Eigentlich macht LaTeX das, wenn LyX die Druckdatei erzeugen will. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Aber vordefiniert bedeutet nicht, dass Sie das nicht ändern können. - LyX lässt Sie -\emph on -alle -\emph default - vordefinierten Abstände global ändern. - Wir werden das später erklären. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Globale Absatztrennung -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Globale-Absatztrennung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um eine Standardmethode für die Absatztrennung festzulegen, wählen Sie das - Menü -\family sans -Doku\SpecialChar \- -ment\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, um das Dialogfenster -\family sans -Textformat -\family default - anzuzeigen. - Dann wählen Sie bei -\family sans -Absätze -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -trennen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -durch -\family default - entweder -\family sans -Einrückung -\family default - oder -\family sans -Vertikaler -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Abstand -\family default -, um Absätze einzurücken oder einen größeren Abstand zwischen den Absätzen - einzufügen. - Außerdem können Sie verschiedene Abstände auswählen oder Ihren eigenen - festlegen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Feineinstellung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können die Art der Absatztrennung auch für einzelne Absätze festlegen. - Wählen Sie -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Absatz -\family default -- -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default - oder klicken Sie auf -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -, um das Menü -\family sans -Absatz-Einstellun\SpecialChar \- -gen -\family default - anzuzeigen. - Dort können Sie den -\family sans -Absatz -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -einrücken -\family default --Knopf anklicken (Tastenkürzel -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle" -\end_inset - -), um die Einrückart des aktuellen Absatzes zu ändern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Absätze standardmäßig nicht eingerückt werden, sondern durch zusätzlichen - Leerraum getrennt werden, wird dieser Knopf völlig ignoriert (das heißt - Sie können ihn auch nicht verwenden, um einen einzelnen Absatz einzurücken). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Absatztrennung werden Sie nur für die Feineinstellung eines einzelnen - Absatzes ändern müssen. - Normalerweise wählt man -\family sans -Einrückung -\family default - oder -\family sans -Vertikaler -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Abstand -\family default - für das gesamte Dokument. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Zeilenabstände ändern -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Den Zeilenabstand können Sie für das gesamte Dokument im Menü -\family sans -Doku\SpecialChar \- -ment\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - unter -\family sans -Textformat -\family default -einstellen. - Für einzelne Absätze kann er im Dialog -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Absatz -\family default -- -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default - eingestellt werden; jedoch sollte dies nur in Ausnahmefällen geschehen, - da der Zeilenabstand normalerweise im Absatzstil definiert ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Absatzumgebungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Absatz!-umgebungen|( -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Absatzumgebungen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Überblick -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Absatzumgebungen entsprechen in einer normalen LaTeX-Datei -\family typewriter - -\backslash -begin{ -\emph on -Umgebung -\emph default -} -\family default -\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\family typewriter - -\backslash -end{ -\emph on -Umgebung -\emph default -} -\family default -. - Alles zwischen den beiden Befehlen ist ein Absatz. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Anmerkung -\series default -: Wie Sie in der Vorschau sehen können, wird die obige Zeile nicht richtig - umgebrochen. - LaTeX hat Probleme, Zeichenketten, die aus Worten und Sonderzeichen bestehen, - richtig umzubrechen, siehe auch -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latex-einführung" - -\end_inset - -, S. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -21 und S. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -101. - Wie man das korrigieren kann, finden Sie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Manueller-Zeilenumbruch" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine Absatzumgebung ist eine Art -\emph on -Behälter -\emph default - für einen Absatz, der für ihn gewisse Eigenschaften enthält. - Diese können Stil, Schriftart, Ränder, Nummerierungsart, Marken usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -betreffen. - Außerdem kann man die verschiedenen Umgebungen -\emph on -schachteln -\emph default -, wobei eine Umgebung Eigenschaften einer anderen erbt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die verschiedenen Absatzumgebungen machen den Gebrauch unsauberer Tabstops, - das Ausrichten von Rändern im Vorübergehen und andere unnütze Dinge aus - den Tagen der Schreibmaschine überflüssig. - Es gibt mehrere Absatzumgebungen für spezielle Dokumentarten. - Wir werden hier nur die gebräuchlichsten beschreiben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine Absatzumgebung wählt man mit dem -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -pull-down -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - --Menü am Anfang der Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Werkzeugleiste. - Was für Einträge Sie dort finden, hängt von der gewählten Dokumentklasse - ab. - Das Menü öffnen Sie durch einen Klick auf den beschrifteten Balken oder - das kleine Dreieck oder mit -\family sans -Alt+A+Leertaste -\family default -. - Wenn das Menü geöffnet ist, können Sie die Einträge einschränken, wenn - Sie Buchstaben eingeben, die in dem von Ihnen gesuchten Eintrag vorkommen. - Geben Sie zum Beispiel -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -abs -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - ein, werden alle Einträge angezeigt, die mit Abschnitten zu tun haben. - Mit der -\family sans -Esc -\family default --Taste wird der Filter wieder zurückgesetzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Für einige gibt es am Anfang der Extra -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Werkzeugleiste eigene Schalter ( -\family sans -Standard -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -, -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout_Enumerate.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -, -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout_Itemize.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -, -\family sans -Liste -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout_List.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -, -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout_Description.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -). - LyX wird die Umgebung des -\emph on -gesamten -\emph default - Absatzes, in dem der Cursor sitzt, ändern. - Eine Gruppe von Absätzen kann man ändern, indem man sie vorher markiert. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn man -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - drückt, wird -\emph on -normalerweise -\emph default - ein neuer Absatz des Typs -\family sans -Standard -\family default - begonnen. - Wir sagen -\emph on -normalerweise -\emph default -, weil das nicht immer stimmt. - Wenn Sie in einer der folgenden Umgebungen sind: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Zitat (kurz) -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zitat!(kurz) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Zitat (lang) -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zitat!(lang) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Gedicht -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gedicht -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -listung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Auf -\family sans -\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} - -\family default -listung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Aufzählung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Aufzahlung@Aufzählung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Beschreibung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Beschreibung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Liste -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -wird LyX die bisherige Absatzumgebung beibehalten, wenn Sie -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - drücken, anstatt nach -\family sans -Standard -\family default - zurückzukehren. - Es wird außerdem die Schachtelungstiefe beibehalten (mehr über Schachtelungen - siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Standard -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Standard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die normale Absatzumgebung ist -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - Sie hat keine besonderen Eigenschaften. - Wenn LyX eine Absatzumgebung zurücksetzt, wird diese genommen. - Der Absatz, den Sie gerade lesen – und die meisten dieses Handbuches – - haben die -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Umgebung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können einen Absatz schachteln, indem Sie in fast jeder anderen Umgebung - die -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Umgebung wählen, aber in einer -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Umgebung können Sie so gut wie nichts schachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Dokumenttitel -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument!titel@-titel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine LaTeX-Titelseite hat drei Teile: den Titel selber, die Autorennamen - und das Datum. - Außerdem können Sie eine -\emph on -Fußnote -\emph default - für Danksagungen oder Kontaktinformation schreiben. - Bei einigen Dokumenttypen druckt LaTeX dies alles auf einer eigenen Seite - zusammen mit dem Druckdatum. - Bei anderen Dokumenttypen wird die -\emph on -Titelseite -\emph default - zum Beginn der ersten Seite gedruckt. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX stellt mit den Absatzumgebungen -\family sans -Titel -\family default -, -\family sans -Autor -\family default - und -\family sans -Datum -\family default - eine Schnittstelle zu den Titelsei\SpecialChar \- -tenkommandos zur Verfügung. - So benutzen Sie sie: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Schreiben Sie den Titel Ihres Dokumentes mit der -\family sans -Titel -\family default --Umgebung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Titel!Umgebung@-Umgebung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Schreiben Sie den Autorennamen mit der -\family sans -Autor -\family default --Umgebung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Autor!-Umgebung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Wenn Sie wollen, dass das Datum ein bestimmtes Format hat, wenn Sie ein - festes Datum wollen oder wenn Sie einen Text anstelle des Datums wollen, - benutzen Sie die -\family sans -Datum -\family default --Umgebung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Datum-Umgebung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Der Gebrauch dieser Umgebung ist optional. - Wenn Sie sie nicht benutzen, wird LaTeX automatisch das Druckdatum einfügen. - Wenn Sie kein Datum haben wollen, verwenden Sie die Option -\family sans -Datum af der Titelseite nicht anzeigen -\family default - im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dokumentklasse -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Passen Sie auf, dass Sie dies am Beginn des Dokuments machen. - Sie können auch Fußnoten benutzen, um -\emph on -Danksagungen -\emph default - oder Kontaktinformation einzufügen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Überschriften -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Uberschriften@Überschriften -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Überschriften" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt neun Absatzumgebungen für Abschnittsüberschriften. - LyX übernimmt für Sie die Nummerierung. - Sie müssen nur festlegen, wie Abschnitt x von Kapitel y heißen soll. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Nummerierte Überschriften -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt 6 nummerierte Abschnittsüberschriften: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Kapitel -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Kapitel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Abschnitt -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Abschnitt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Unterabschnitt -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unterabschnitt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Unterunterabschn. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unterunterabschnitt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Paragraph -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Unterparagraph -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unterparagraph -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX markiert jede Überschrift mit einer Reihe von Zahlen, die durch Punkte - getrennt werden. - Die Zahlen beschreiben, wo im Dokument Sie sich befinden. - Die Überschriften unterteilen Ihr Dokument in unterschiedliche Textstücke. - Nehmen wir zum Beispiel an, Sie schreiben ein Buch. - Sie unterteilen das Buch in Kapitel. - LyX macht eine ähnliche Unterteilung: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Die höchste Abschnittsstufe ist entweder -\family sans -Kapitel -\family default - oder -\family sans -Abschnitt -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Kapitel -\family default - wird in -\family sans -Abschnitt -\family default -e unterteilt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Abschnitt -\family default - wird in -\family sans -Unterabschnitt -\family default -e unterteilt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Unterabschnitt -\family default - wird in -\family sans -Unterunterabschn. -\family default -e unterteilt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Unterunterabschn. - -\family default - wird in -\family sans -Paragraph -\family default -en unterteilt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Paragraph -\family default - wird in -\family sans -Unterparagraph -\family default -en unterteilt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bemerkung -\series default -: Nicht alle Dokumenttypen benutzen -\family sans -Kapitel -\family default - als höchste Abschnittsstufe, sondern -\family sans -Abschnitt -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Also, wenn Sie die -\family sans -Unterunterabschn. -\family default --Umgebung benutzen, um einen neuen Unter-Unterabschnitt zu markieren, markiert - LyX die Überschrift mit der zugehörigen Nummer und den Nummern des Unterabschni -ttes -\family sans -, -\family default - des Abschnittes und, falls möglich, des Kapitels, in dem der Unter-Unterabschni -tt steht. - Beispiel: der fünfte Abschnitt des zweiten Kapitels dieses Handbuches hat - die Marke -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -2.5 -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Unnummerierte Überschriften -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die unnummerierten Überschriftarten haben ein -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -* -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - am Ende des Namens. - Sie funktionieren so wie ihre nummerierten Entsprechungen aber erscheinen - nicht im Inhaltsverzeichnis, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Inhaltsverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ändern der Nummerierung -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Nummerierung-aendern" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können auch wählen, welche Abschnittsstufen nummeriert und welche im - Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen werden sollen. - Dadurch werden ihre Stufen nicht entfernt, weil das in der Dokumentklasse - festgelegt wird. - Einige Klassen beginnen mit -\family sans -Kapitel -\family default - und gehen hinunter bis zur -\family sans -Unterparagraph -\family default --Stufe. - Andere beginnen mit -\family sans -Abschnitt -\family default -. - Auf ähnliche Weise nummerieren nicht alle Dokumentklassen alle Abschnittsstufen. - Die meisten nummerieren weder -\family sans -Paragraph -\family default - noch -\family sans -Unterparagraph -\family default -. - Das können Sie ändern: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Öffnen Sie das Dialogfenster -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Unter -\family sans -Nummerierung -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\family default - können Sie mit den beiden Schiebereglern festlegen, wie viele Hierarchiestufen - LyX nummerieren soll und wievielte im Inhaltsverzeichnis erscheinen sollen. - In der Tabelle darunter sehen Sie die Auswirkung der Reglerstellungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Kurztitel -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Titel ! Kurztitel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - mit optionalen Argumenten definieren -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Kurztitel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Kurztitel" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einige Kapitel oder Abschnittsüberschriften wie diese können sehr lang werden. - Wenn sie als Seitenüberschriften benutzt werden, können sie über den Blattrand - ragen, was sehr hässlich aussieht. - Deswegen kann man mit -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Kurztitel -\family default - eine alternative Überschrift definieren, die dann benutzt wird, wenn die - lange nicht in die Zeile passt. - Dieser Kurztitel wird im Inhaltsverzeichnis und in Gleitobjekten benutzt, - wenn es nötig ist. - Im Dokument selber wird immer die lange Überschrift benutzt und nötigenfalls - umgebrochen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Spezielle Informationen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die folgenden Bemerkungen gelten für alle Überschriften: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Innerhalb dieser Umgebungen können Sie keine Randnotiz einfügen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Sie können -\emph on -eingefügte Formeln -\emph default - (siehe -\emph on -Tutorium -\emph default -) schreiben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Diese Umgebungen können Sie nicht schachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Sie können Marken und Querverweise benutzen, um auf ihre Nummern zu verweisen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beispiele für diese Absatzumgebungen finden Sie überall in unseren Handbüchern. - Schauen Sie sich nur um! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Überschrift (Inhaltsverz.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn hinter einem Überschriftstyp -\family sans -(Inhaltsverz.) -\family default - steht, wird auf der gleichen Stufe die Nummerierung fortgesetzt. - Außerdem erscheinen solchermaßen gekennzeichnete Überschriften -\emph on -immer -\emph default - im Inhaltsverzeichnis. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Zitate -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zitat -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Lyrik -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lyrik -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX hat drei Absatzumgebungen, um Zitate und Lyrik zu schreiben. - Es sind -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default -, -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default - und -\family sans -Gedicht -\family default -. - Vergessen Sie die Zeiten, wo Sie Zeilenabstände ändern und an Rändern drehen - mussten. - Diese drei Absatzumgebungen haben dies bereits eingebaut. - Sie alle vergrößern den linken Rand und fügen ober- und unterhalb des Textes - zusätzlichen Leerraum ein. - Sie erlauben auch zu schachteln, das heißt Sie können ein -\family sans -Gedicht -\family default - in ein -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default - setzen, ebenso wie in einige andere Absatzumgebungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Diese drei Absatzumgebungen haben noch eine Eigenschaft: sie kehren -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - nach -\family sans -Standard -\family default - zurück, wenn Sie -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - drücken. - So können Sie das Gedicht schreiben und fröhlich -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - drücken, ohne fürchten zu müssen, dass die Absatzumgebung sich ändert. - Das bedeutet natürlich, dass Sie am Ende die -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Umgebung von Hand setzen müssen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Zitat (kurz) -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zitat!(kurz) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und -\family sans -Zitat (lang) -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zitat!(lang) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Zitate" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nachdem wir die Gemeinsamkeiten dieser drei Umgebungen beschrieben haben, - ist es Zeit für die Unterschiede. - -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default - und -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default - besitzen nur einen Unterschied: -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default - benutzt zusätzlichen Leerraum zwischen Absätzen und rückt die erste Zeile - niemals ein. - -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default - rückt die erste Zeile eines Absatzes -\emph on -immer -\emph default - ein und hat konstante Zeilenabstände. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist ein Beispiel für eine -\family sans -Zitat (kurz) -\family default --Umgebung: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Dies ist die -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default --Umgebung. - Wenn ich schreibe, wird die Zeile immer länger, bis sie umgebrochen wird. - Sehen Sie – keine Einrückung! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Hier ist der zweite Absatz dieses Zitats. - Wieder gibt es keine Einrückung, aber zwischen beiden Absätzen ist zusätzlicher - Leerraum. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Beispiel ist zu Ende. - Hier ist ein weiteres, diesmal für die -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default --Umgebung: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Dies ist die -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default --Umgebung. - Beim Schreiben sehen Sie die Einrückung. - Wenn es in Ihrem Land üblich ist, die erste Zeile eines neuen Absatzes - einzurücken, dann ist -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default - die richtige Umgebung für Sie, das heißt Sie sollten sie benutzen, -\emph on -wenn -\emph default - Sie anderen Text zitieren würden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Hier ist ein neuer Absatz. - Ich könnte wie ein Politiker (nicht nur zur Wahlzeit) weiter schwafeln, - aber es würde Sie langweilen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das war das andere Beispiel. - Also: -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default - ist geeignet für diejenigen, die zur Absatztrennung zusätzlichen Leerraum - verwenden. - Sie sollten Zitate in einer -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default --Umgebung schreiben. - Diejenigen, die Absätze durch Einrückung trennen, sollten die -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default --Absatzumgebung für zitierten Text benutzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Gedicht -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lyrik -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Gedicht" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Gedicht -\family default - ist eine Absatzumgebung für Lyrik. - Hier ist ein Beispiel (ich glaube, es ist von -\noun on -Wilhelm Busch -\noun default -): -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -gekrochen ist auf einen Baum, -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -schon meint, dass er ein Vöglein wär' -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -so irrt sich der. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Es folgt ein viel schlechteres Beispiel. - Diese Zeile wird länger, immer länger, sehr lang, endlich bricht sie um. - Hier sieht es nicht schlecht aus, aber im gedruckten Dokument sind die - Folgezeilen ein wenig weiter eingerückt als die erste. - Nun, es ist Prosa geworden und reimt sich nicht mehr. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Um eine Zeile umzubrechen -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -und es gut aussehen zu lassen -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -benutze man -\family sans -Strg+Eingabe -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie Sie sehen, rückt -\family sans -Gedicht -\family default - nur den linken Rand ein. - Jede Strophe ist ein eigener Absatz. - Zum Trennen der Zeilen einer Strophe benutze man die -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default --Funktion -\family sans -Strg+Eingabe -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Listen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Listen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX hat vier verschiedene Absatzumgebungen, um unterschiedliche Listen zu - erzeugen. - In den -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default -- und -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebungen markiert LyX Ihre Listeneinträge mit Aufzählungszeichen oder - Zahlen. - In den -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default -- und -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebungen lässt LyX Sie Ihre eigenen Marken verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Allgemeine Eigenschaften -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die vier Absatzumgebungen unterscheiden sich von anderen Umgebungen in vielerlei - Hinsicht. - Zunächst einmal behandelt LyX jeden Absatz als Listenelement. - Wenn Sie -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - drücken, wird die Umgebung -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - auf -\family sans -Standard -\family default - zurückgesetzt, sondern bleibt gleich und erzeugt ein neues Listenelement. - Die Schachtelungstiefe bleibt ebenfalls erhalten. - Wenn Sie die Absatzumgebung behalten wollen, aber die Schachtelungstiefe - zurücksetzen wollen, können Sie -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default - benutzen. - Macht man das in der höchsten Ebene einer Liste, erhält man eine -\family sans -Standard -\family default - Umgebung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können Listen jeden Typs ineinander schachteln. - LyX ändert die Aufzählungszeichen abhängig von der Schachtelung. - Wenn Sie eine der Listenumgebungen benutzen wollen, sollten Sie -\emph on -unbedingt -\emph default - den gesamten Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - -ff lesen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Auf -\family default -\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} - -\family sans -listung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste ! Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -listung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Auflistung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der erste Listentyp, den wir genauer beschreiben werden, ist die -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Absatz\SpecialChar \- -umgebung. - Sie hat folgende Eigenschaften: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Jedes Element besitzt ein bestimmtes Aufzählungszeichen als Marke. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -LyX benutzt für alle Elemente derselben Stufe dasselbe Symbol. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Das Symbol erscheint am Anfang der Zeile. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Die Elemente können beliebig lang sein. - LyX rückt den linken Rand jedes Elements automatisch ein. - Die Einrückung ist immer relativ zu der Umgebung, in der die -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default - sich befindet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Wenn Sie -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebungen schachteln, bekommt jede Stufe ein neues Symbol als Markierung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Es gibt vier verschiedene Symbole, um maximal vierfach schachteln zu können. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - - beschreibt die Schachtelung vollständig. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Natürlich war diese Erklärung auch ein Beispiel für eine -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default -. - Die -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebung eignet sich am besten für Listen, bei denen die Reihenfolge keine - Rolle spielt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wir sagten, dass unterschiedliche Stufen unterschiedliche Symbole als Markierung - benutzen würden. - Hier ist ein Beispiel für alle vier Symbole. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Die Marke für die erste Stufe von -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default - ist ein schwarzer Kreis. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Die Marke für die zweite Stufe ist ein Gedankenstrich. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Die Marke für die dritte Stufe ist ein Stern. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Die Marke für die vierte Stufe ist ein zentrierter Punkt. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Zurück zu Stufe drei. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Zurück zu Stufe zwei. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Und zurück zu Stufe eins. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses sind die Standardmarken für eine -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default -. - Sie können diese Marken Ihren Wünschen anpassen, indem Sie im Dialogfenster - -\family sans -Dokument-Einstellungen -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - unter -\family sans -Auflistungszeichen -\family default - die -\family sans -Ebene -\family default - anklicken, dann eins der Felder -\family sans -Standard -\family default - bis -\family sans -Dings -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -4 -\family default - und schließlich eins der Symbole auswählen. - Das Symbol wird dann angezeigt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie -\family sans -Benutzerdef -\family default -. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Zeichen -\family default - ankreuzen, können Sie -\family sans - -\family default -rechts davon den LaTeX-Befehl für ein Zeichen Ihrer Wahl eingeben. - Außerdem können Sie die Größe des Aufzählungszeichens im Feld -\family sans -Größe -\family default - für jede Ebene festlegen. - In LyX werden (zur Zeit) nur die oben erwähnten vier Standardzeichen verwendet. - Alle Anpassungen erscheinen nur im gedruckten Dokument. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beachten Sie, wie der Abstand zwischen den Elementen mit ansteigender Schachtelu -ng abnimmt. - Wir werden Schachtelungen und alle Tricks für verschiedene Stufen in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - -ff ausführlich beschreiben. - Lesen Sie ihn auf jeden Fall! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Aufzählung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste ! Aufzahlung@Aufzählung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Aufzählung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung benutzt man, um nummerierte Listen und Aufzählungen zu erstellen. - Sie hat folgende Eigenschaften: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Jedes Element hat eine Ziffer als Marke. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Die Ziffernart hängt von der Schachtelungstiefe ab. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Wie die Ziffern gedruckt werden, hängt von der Dokumentklasse ( -\family sans -Doku\SpecialChar \- -ment\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dokumentklasse -\family default -) ab. - Bei der hier verwendeten ( -\family sans -book -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(KOMA-Script) -\family default -) wird das (b) als b) gedruckt. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -LyX zählt die Elemente automatisch für Sie und erneuert die Marken, wenn - nötig. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Jede neue -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung fängt mit 1 an. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Ebenso wie die -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebung macht die -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung folgendes: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -LyX rückt den linken Rand jedes Elements automatisch ein. - Die Elemente können beliebig lang sein. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -der Abstand zwischen den Elementen nimmt mit ansteigender Schachtelung ab. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -abhängig von der Schachtelungstiefe werden unterschiedliche Marken benutzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -maximal vier Schachtelungsstufen sind erlaubt. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Anders als bei der -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebung sind die verschiedenen Marken von -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default - in LyX -\emph on -zu erkennen -\emph default -. - So markiert LyX die vier Stufen von -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Die erste Stufe von -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default - benutzt arabische Ziffern, gefolgt von einem Punkt. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Die zweite Stufe benutzt Kleinbuchstaben in runden Klammern. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Die dritte Stufe benutzt kleingeschriebene römische Ziffern, gefolgt von - einem Punkt. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Die vierte Stufe benutzt Großbuchstaben, gefolgt von einem Punkt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Beachten Sie wieder, wie der Abstand zwischen den Elementen mit ansteigender - Schachtelung abnimmt. - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Zurück zu Stufe drei. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Zurück zu Stufe zwei. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Und zurück zu Stufe eins. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Auch in der -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung können Sie diese Marken Ihren Wünschen durch entsprechende Befehle - im LaTeX-Vorspann anpassen, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Benutzerdefinierte-Listen" - -\end_inset - -. - Solche Anpassungen erscheinen nur im gedruckten Dokument, nicht im LyX-Fenster. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Über Schachtelungen von -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebungen gibt es mehr als hier beschrieben. - Sie sollten -\emph on -wirklich -\emph default - Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - -ff lesen, um mehr darüber zu erfahren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Beschreibung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste ! Beschreibung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Beschreibung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Anders als die beiden vorigen Umgebungen hat die -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default - keine festen Marken. - Stattdessen benutzt LyX das erste -\emph on -Wort -\emph default - der ersten Zeile als Marke. - Hier ist ein Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Beispiel: Dies ist ein Beispiel für die -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --Umgebung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX setzt die Marke fett und fügt zusätzlichen Leerraum zwischen der Marke - und dem Rest der Zeile ein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie mehr als ein Wort als Marke wollen oder benötigen, benutzen Sie - ein normales oder geschütztes Leerzeichen ( -\family sans -Strg+Alt+Leertaste -\family default - / -\family sans -Strg+Leer\SpecialChar \- -taste -\family default - oder -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Geschütztes -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Leerzeichen -\family default -). - Lesen Sie auch Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Variabler-horiz-Abstand" - -\end_inset - - für weitere Hinweise. - Hier ist ein Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Zweites -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Beispiel: Hier sehen Sie, wie man ein geschütztes Leerzeichen in einer Marke - eines -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --Ele\SpecialChar \- -men\SpecialChar \- -tes benutzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Gebrauch: Sie sollten die -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --Umgebung für Dinge wie Definitionen oder Theoreme benutzen. - Benutzen Sie sie, wenn ein beschreibendes Wort besonders hervorgehoben - werden soll. - Sie sollten die -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --Umgebung aber nicht benutzen, wenn Sie einen ganzen Satz hervorheben wollen. - Dann benutzt man besser -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default - oder -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default - und schachtelt mehrere -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Absätze hinein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Schachteln: Sie können natürlich -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --Umgebungen ineinander oder mit anderen Typen schachteln. - Lesen Sie Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - -ff, um mehr darüber zu erfahren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beachten Sie, dass LyX auch hier ab der zweiten Zeile einrückt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Liste -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste ! Liste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebung ist eine LyX-Erweiterung von LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebung hat ebenso wie die -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --Umgebung benutzerdefinierte Marken für jedes Listenelement. - Es gibt aber einige gravierende Unterschiede zwischen der -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebung und den anderen drei: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -Marken -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Marken -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - LyX benutzt das erste -\emph on -Wort -\emph default - der ersten Zeile als Marke. - Sie wird wie bei der -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --Umgebung behandelt (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Beschreibung" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -Ränder -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Rander@Ränder -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Wie Sie sehen, benutzt LyX unterschiedliche Ränder für die Marke und den - Rest des Listenelementes. - Der Text hat einen größeren linken Rand, der sich aus einem Standardwert - plus ein wenig extra Leerraum ergibt. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -Breite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Marken -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Marken!-breite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Dafür benutzt LyX das Maximum aus wirklicher Markenbreite und einem Standardwer -t. - Ist die wirkliche Breite größer als der Standardwert, wird die Marke in - die erste Zeile -\emph on -ausgedehnt -\emph default -. - Das bedeutet, dass der linke Rand der ersten Textzeile dann nicht mit dem - Rand des Restes übereinstimmt, so wie bei diesem Element. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -Standardbreite -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Standardbreite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Diese können Sie sehr leicht setzen und damit sicherstellen, dass die Texte - aller Elemente der -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebung denselben linken Rand haben. - Um die Standardmarkenbreite zu ändern, markieren Sie die Elemente, die - Sie ändern wollen. - Wenn Sie nur die Markenbreite eines Elementes ändern wollen, bewegen Sie - den Cursor einfach in dieses Element. - Dann öffnen Sie das Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Absatz -\family default -- -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default - oder drücken -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). - Der Text im Feld -\family sans -Längste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Marke -\family default - bestimmt die Standardmarkenbreite. - Wenn Sie wollen, können Sie hier den Text Ihrer breitesten Marke eintragen - oder stattdesse den Buchstaben -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -M -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - mehrfach hintereinander verwenden. - Das M ist der breiteste Buchstabe und eine Standard-Einheit von Längen - in LaTeX. - Verwendet man -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -M -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - als Einheit der Breite, muss man die -\family sans -Längste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Marke -\family default - nicht jedes Mal anpassen, wenn man eine Marke in einer -\family sans -Liste -\family default - ändert. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Die voreingestellte Breite ist die Länge von -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -00.00.0000 -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (entspricht 6 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -M). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebung sollten Sie wie die -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --Umgebung benutzen, wenn Sie wollen, dass ein Begriff, der den Text beschreibt, - hervorgehoben wird. - Mit der -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebung haben Sie eine weitere Möglichkeit, das zu tun, aber mit einem - anderen Aussehen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebungen ineinander oder in andere schachteln usw., wie bei den anderen - Listen-Umgebungen auch. - In Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - - erfahren Sie mehr darüber. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt noch eine weitere Funktion der -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebung. - Wie Sie in den Beispielen sehen können, richtet LyX die Marken standardmäßig - linksbündig aus. - Man kann zusätzliche variable horizontale Abstände benutzen, damit LyX - die Marken anders ausrichtet. - Variable horizontale Abstände sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Variabler-horiz-Abstand" - -\end_inset - - erläutert. - Hier sind einige Beispiele: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -Links Die Standardausrichtung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Rechts Ein variabler horizontaler Abstand am Anfang der Marke richtet sie - nach rechts aus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Zentriert -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - Je ein variabler horizontaler Abstand am Anfang und am Ende zentriert die - Marke. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Benutzerdefinierte Listen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Benutzerdefinierte-Listen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste ! Benutzerdefiniert -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um die Features nutzen zu können, die in diesem Abschnitt vorgestellt werden, - müssen Sie das Modul -\family sans -Flexible Listen (enumitem) -\family default - in den Dokumenteinstellungen laden. - Dies lädt die Features des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Benutzerdefinierte Aufzählungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste ! Aufzahlung@Aufzählung ! Benutzerdefiniert -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Die voreingestellte Nummerierung von Aufzählungen kann geändert werden, - indem man ein optionales Argument (Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Kurztitel -\family default -) zum ersten Eintrag jeder Stufe der Liste hinzufügt. - Darin fügt man den Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -roman{enumi} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -als TeX-Code (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+L -\family default -) ein. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Für mehr über TeX-Code, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:TeX-Code" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\emph on - enumi -\emph default - ist hierbei der Zähler der Nummerierung der ersten Stufe. - Der Befehl -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default - gibt den Zähler als kleine römische Zahl aus. - Für große römische Zahlen ersetzen Sie in obigem Befehl -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default - durch -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman -\series default -. - Für arabische Zahlen verwenden Sie -\series bold - -\backslash -arabic -\series default -. - Um Punkte mit großen oder kleinen Buchstaben zu -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -nummerieren -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, verwenden Sie die Befehle -\series bold - -\backslash -Alph -\series default - oder -\series bold - -\backslash -alph -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Mit Buchstaben können höchstens 26 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Punkte nummeriert werden, weil nur -\emph on -ein -\emph default - Buchstabe verwendet wird. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um die Nummerierung für die anderen Stufen der Liste zu ändern, ersetzen - Sie im Befehl das 'i' jeweils durch die kleine römische Zahl der Stufe - (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Als Beispiel eine Liste mit benutzerdefinierter Nummerierung: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Stufe 1 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Stufe 2 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Level 2 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Stufe 3 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Stufe 4 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Für diese Liste wurden diese Befehle verwendet: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -wobei der Befehl -\series bold - -\backslash -emph{} -\series default - die Nummerierung hervorhebt und -\series bold - -\backslash -bf{} -\series default - sie fett druckt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Wenn Sie die Nummerierung einer Listenstufe geändert haben, wird sie von - allen weiteren Listen verwendet, bis Sie die Definition wieder ändern. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Unterbrochene Aufzählungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste ! Aufzahlung@Aufzählung ! Unterbrochen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aufzählungen können nach Unterbrechungen fortgesetzt werden: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -arabic{enumi}. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Erstens -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -geht zurück auf Standard-Nummerierung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Zweitens -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normaler Text -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume -Fortgesetzt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um eine Aufzählung fortzusetzen, verwendet man den Stil -\family sans -Aufzählung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fortführen -\family default -. - Dessen Nummerierung erscheint in blau in LyX um zu zeigen, das es eine - fortgesetzte Liste ist und die Nummerierung in LyX nicht korrekt ist, aber - in der Ausgabe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Falls es keine vorhergehende Liste gibt, die fortgesetzt werden kann, bekommt - man einen LaTeX-Fehler. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vielleicht wollen Sie die Liste mit einer anderen Nummer als die eigentlich - folgende fortsetzen. - Oder Sie wollen eine neue Aufzählung starten, die mit einer bestimmten - Nummer beginnen soll. - Dies ist möglich, indem Sie in einer neuen, normalen Liste ein optionales - Argument im ersten Listeneintrag einfügen und darin den Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -start=Nummer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -verwenden. - Dabei ist -\emph on -Nummer -\emph default - die Nummer, mit der Sie die Liste fortsetzen wollen. - Ein Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Erstens -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Zweitens -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aufzählung startet bei gegebenem Wert: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -start=4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Diese Aufzählung startet bei 4 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Abstände in Listen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste ! Abstände -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In manchen Fällen wollen Sie vielleicht weniger vertikalen Abstand zwischen - den Listeneinträgen haben. - Z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - ist ihrer Meinung nach zu viel Abstand in dieser Liste: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Eine Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -listung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -mit Standard-Abstand -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Abstand kann verkleinert werden, indem man ein optionales Argument im - ersten Listeneintrag verwendet. - Darin fügt man den Befehl -\series bold -nolistsep -\series default - ein, der den zusätzlichen Listenabstand entfernt, wie in diesem Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -nolistsep -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Eine Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -listung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ohne zusätzlichen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -vertikalen Abstand -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um Abstand hinzuzufügen, können Sie verschiedene andere Befehle des LaTeX-Pakets - -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - verwenden. - Für mehr Informationen siehe dessen Dokumentation, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt zudem viele Befehle mit denen horizontale Abstände und der Einzug - eingestellt werden kann. - Hier ist ein Beispiel bei dem der Einzug auf den Einzug der Absätze des - Dokuments gesetzt wurde und der Abstand zwischen Nummer und Text auf 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm, so dass sich die Nummer im Seitenrand befindet: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent= -\backslash -parindent, labelsep=2cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Eine Aufzählung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -mit negativem Einzug -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Weitere Anpassungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste ! Anpassungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können auch den Stil von Beschreibungen ändern. - Der Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font=Definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ändert den Beschreibungstitel, der Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -style=Definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -legt den Listenstil fest. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein Beispiel bei dem der Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -verwendet wird: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\lang english -Ionizing -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -radiation: -\lang ngerman - -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\lang english -Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are - energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore - ionizing them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\lang english -Reference -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing - the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an - object, block of memory, disk space or other resource. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt viele weitere Befehle und Features des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Für mehr Informationen siehe dessen Dokumentation, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Briefe -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Briefe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Adresse -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Adresse -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - und -\family sans -Adress -\family default -e -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -rechts -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Adresse!rechte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: Ein Überblick -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX (LaTeX) hat Dokumentklassen für Briefe, die Sie unter -\family sans -Dokument -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Dokumentklasse -\family default - auswählen können. - Wie diese Klassen zu benutzen sind, sehen Sie zum einen in den Beispielen, - die Sie unter -\family sans -Strg+O -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Beispiele -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -de -\family default - finden, oder in der Dokumentation der jeweiligen Klasse. - Das Wichtigste dabei ist meistens, die angebotenen Absatzumgebungen in - der richtigen Reihenfolge zu benutzen, damit LaTeX damit klarkommt. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Außerdem wurden speziell für LyX zwei Absatzumgebungen -\family sans -Adresse -\family default - und -\family sans -Adress -\family default -e -\family sans - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -rechts -\family default - geschaffen. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anmerkung von -\noun on -Matthias -\noun default -: Ich bin ein wenig stolz auf das Aussehen der rechten Adresse. - Versuchen Sie einmal, dasselbe mit einer normalen Textverarbeitung zu erreichen. - Sie müssten einen Rahmen definieren und ihn von Hand mit der Maus oder - wie auch immer positionieren. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Sie können die -\family sans -Adresse -\family default -- und -\family sans -Adress -\family default -e -\family sans - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -rechts -\family default --Absatzumgebungen überall problemlos benutzen. - Sie können sie sogar in anderen Umgebungen schachteln, obwohl Sie nicht - alles in ihnen schachteln können. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Natürlich können Sie -\family sans -Adresse -\family default - und -\family sans -Adress -\family default -e -\family sans - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -rechts -\family default - nicht nur für Briefe benutzen. - -\family sans -Adresse -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -rechts -\family default - eignet sich insbesondere für Artikelüberschriften, wie sie in europäischen - wissenschaftlichen Zeitschriften benutzt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Gebrauch -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Adresse-verwenden" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Adresse -\family default --Umgebung formatiert Text wie eine Adresse, was in einigen Ländern auch - für die Eröffnung und die Unterschrift benutzt wird. - Entsprechend formatiert die -\family sans -Adress -\family default -e -\family sans - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -rechts -\family default --Umgebung Text im Stile einer rechtsbündigen Adresse, was in einigen Ländern - für den Absender und das Datum benutzt wird. - Hier ist für beides ein Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Address -Absender -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Straße -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -PLZ Ort -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Ort, Datum -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das war eine -\family sans -Adresse -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -rechts -\family default -. - Beachten Sie, dass alle Zeilen linksbündig sind. - LyX setzt den linken Rand so, dass der längste Text auf eine Zeile passt. - Hier ist ein Beispiel für die -\family sans -Adresse -\family default --Umgebung: -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Empfänger -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Straße -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -PLZ Ort -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie Sie sehen, ist zwischen -\family sans -Adresse -\family default - und -\family sans -Adresse -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -rechts -\family default - und dem nächsten Absatz ein größerer Abstand als normal. - Wenn Sie -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - drücken, setzt LyX die Schachtelungstiefe zurück und kehrt zur -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Umgebung zurück. - Wollen Sie innerhalb von -\family sans -Adresse -\family default - oder -\family sans -Adresse -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -rechts -\family default - eine neue Zeile beginnen, müssen Sie -\family sans -Strg+Eingabe -\family default - oder -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Normaler Zeilenumbruch -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zeilenumbruch -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - benutzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Wissenschaftliche Texte -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Wissenschaftliche Texte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die meisten wissenschaftlichen Texte beginnen mit einer kurzen Zusammenfassung - (oft als Abstract bezeichnet) und enden mit einem Literaturverzeichnis. - LyX hat dafür Absatzumgebungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Zusammenfassung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zusammenfassung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Zusammenfassung -\family default --Umgebung kann man nur in den -\family sans -article -\family default -- und -\family sans -report -\family default --Dokumentklassen benutzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Zusammenfassung -\family default --Umgebung wird für die Zusammenfassung benutzt. - Technisch gesehen -\emph on -könnten -\emph default - Sie diese Umgebung überall benutzen, aber Sie -\emph on -sollten -\emph default - es nur am Anfang eines Dokumentes, nach dem Titel, tun. - Versuchen Sie auch nicht, die -\family sans -Zusammenfassung -\family default --Umgebung in eine andere zu schachteln oder umgekehrt. - Es geht nicht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Zusammenfassung -\family default --Umgebung erledigt einige Dinge für Sie. - Erstens wird die Marke -\series bold -Zusammenfassung -\series default - zentriert über den Text gesetzt (allerdings nicht bei der -\family sans -KOMA-Script -\family default --Version). - Die Marke und der Text werden durch zusätzlichen Leerraum getrennt. - Zweitens ist die Schriftart etwas kleiner, gerade so wie Sie es erwarten. - Drittens ist die Zusammenfassung ein wenig eingerückt und vom restlichen - Text durch zusätzlichen Leerraum getrennt. - So jedenfalls wird es in LyX aussehen. - Wenn Ihr Dokument die -\family sans -report -\family default --Klasse benutzt, wird die Zusammenfassung im Ausdruck auf einer eigenen - Seite erscheinen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn man -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - drückt, wird die -\family sans -Zusammenfassung -\family default --Umgebung -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - zurückgesetzt. - Der neue Absatz wird weiterhin in der -\family sans -Zusammenfassung -\family default --Umgebung sein. - Sie müssen also am Ende der Zusammenfassung die Absatzumgebung von Hand - ändern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wir würden Ihnen gern ein Beispiel zeigen, aber das geht nicht, weil dieses - Dokument eine Buch-Klasse benutzt. - Wenn Sie noch nie von einer Zusammenfassung gehört haben, können Sie diese - Umgebung ruhig ignorieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Literaturverzeichnis -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Literaturverzeichnis!-Umgebung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Literaturverzeichnis-Umgebung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default --Umgebung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Literaturverzeichnis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - wird für Literaturangaben benutzt. - Technisch gesehen -\emph on -könnten -\emph default - Sie diese Umgebung überall benutzen, aber Sie -\emph on -sollten -\emph default - es nur am Ende eines Dokumentes tun. - Versuchen Sie auch nicht, die -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default --Umgebung in eine andere zu schachteln oder umgekehrt. - Es geht nicht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie eine -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default --Umgebung das erste Mal öffnen, fügt LyX einen großen Leerraum ein, gefolgt - von der großen fetten Überschrift -\family sans -\series bold -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default -\series default - oder einen kleineren, gefolgt von -\emph on -Referenzen -\emph default - in Großbuchstaben, abhängig von der Dokumentklasse. - Jeder Absatz der -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default --Umgebung ist ein Eintrag in das Literaturverzeichnis. - Das Drücken von -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - setzt die Absatzumgebung -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - zurück. - Jeder neue Absatz bleibt in der -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default --Umgebung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine ausführliche Beschreibung der -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default --Umgebung finden Sie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - -. - Dort finden Sie auch einiges über BibTeX -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Literaturverzeichnisse. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Besondere Umgebungen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt drei Absatzumgebungen, die einfach in keine Kategorie passen, weil - sie für besondere Zwecke benutzt werden. - Wir werden das Wichtigste von ihnen und ihren Gebrauch erklären. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Legende, Legende oben, Legende unten -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Legende -\family default --Umgebung ist die Standard-Paragraph-Umgebung für Gleitobjekt-Ab\SpecialChar \- -bil\SpecialChar \- -dungen - und -Tabellen. - In LyX sehen Sie die Marke -\emph on -Abbildung -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Nr: -\emph default - oder -\emph on -Tabelle -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Nr: -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann in die -\family sans -Legende -\family default --Umgebung nichts schachteln. - Außerdem setzt -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - die Absatzumgebung auf -\family sans -Standard -\family default - zurück, sodass die -\family sans -Legende -\family default -nur aus einem Absatz besteht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Außerhalb von Gleitobjekten kann man die -\family sans -Legende -\family default --Umgebung nicht benutzen. - Siehe auch die Abschnitte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Abbildungen" - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tabellen" - -\end_inset - - für weitere Informationen über Gleitobjekt-Abbildungen und -Tabellen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Legende -\family default - wird in der normalen -\family sans -book -\family default --Dokumentklasse benutzt, L -\family sans -egende oben -\family default - und -\family sans -Legende unten -\family default - in der -\family sans -KOMA-Script -\family default --Version. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -L -\family default -yX-Code -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X!-Code -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LyX-Code" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default --Umgebung ist noch eine LyX-Erweiterung von LaTeX. - Sie setzt Text in einem Schreibmaschinenschriftart. - Außerdem kann die Leertaste mehrfach hintereinander benutzt werden; -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -In der -\family sans -LyX -\family default -- -\family sans -Code -\family default --Umgebung wird die Leertaste als geschütztes Leerzeichen behandelt anstatt - als -\family typewriter -end-of-word -\family default --Markierung. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dies ist einer der wenigen Fälle in LyX. - Für Leerzeilen muss man -\family sans -Strg+Eingabe -\family default - eingeben (die -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default --Funktion). - -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - beendet Absätze. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beachten Sie aber, dass -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - die Absatzumgebung zurücksetzt. - Wenn man also die -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default --Umgebung verlassen will, muss man das durch Wahl einer anderen Umgebung - machen. - -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default --Umgebungen kann man auch in andere schachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Diese Umgebung hat ein paar Marotten: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Am Anfang eines neuen Absatzes kann man -\family sans -Strg+Eingabe -\family default - nicht benutzen (das heißt auf -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - kann kein -\family sans -Strg+Eingabe -\family default - folgen). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -In der Druckausgabe gibt es keine leeren Absätze und keine leeren Zeilen. - Sie müssen in jeder leeren Zeile mindestens einmal die Leertaste drücken. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Anführungszeichen erreichen Sie nicht durch Eingabe von -\family sans -", -\family default - weil das ` -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -` erzeugt. - Die Anführungszeichen erhalten Sie durch -\family sans -Strg+", -\family default -eigentlich -\family sans - Strg+Umschalt+2 -\family default - (oder -\family sans -Strg+Q -\family default -, wenn Sie die Emacs-Tastaturbelegung verwenden). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist ein Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -#include -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -int main(void) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -{ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - printf("Hallo Welt! -\backslash -n"); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - return 0; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das ist das Standard- -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Hallo Welt! -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - --C-Programm. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default - hat einen Zweck: Code zu schreiben, zum Beispiel Quellprogramme, Shell-Skripte, - rc-Dateien usw. - Benutzen Sie diese Umgebung nur in diesen Spezialfällen, wenn der Text - aussehen soll, als wäre er mit einer Schreibmaschine geschrieben worden. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Absatz!-umgebungen|) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Für längeren Programmcode verwenden Sie Programmlistings, die in Kapitel - -\emph on -Programm-Code-Listen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Umgebungen schachteln -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Umgebungen schachteln -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einleitung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Während der vorangegangenen Abschnitte haben wir Ihnen empfohlen, Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - - zu lesen. - Deswegen fragen Sie sich sicher, worum es eigentlich geht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX unterscheidet sich vom normalen Konzept der -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Textverarbeitung-als-Super\SpecialChar \- -schreib\SpecialChar \- -ma\SpecialChar \- -schine -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - sehr stark. - Mit einer Schreibmaschine ist Text bloß Tinte auf Papier. - Bei einigen Textverarbeitungen ist das auch heute noch das Hauptproblem. - LyX dagegen behandelt Text als einen zusammengehörigen Block in einem spezielle -n Kontext und mit speziellen Eigenschaften. - Aber was ist, wenn Sie möchten, dass ein Block einige Eigenschaften eines - anderen Blocks erben soll? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein gutes Beispiel dafür sind Aufzählungen. - Nehmen wir an, Sie haben drei Hauptpunkte in Ihrer Aufzählung, aber Punkt - 2 hat auch noch zwei Unterpunkte. - Mit anderen Worten, Sie haben eine Liste -\emph on -innerhalb -\emph default - einer anderen, wobei die innere Liste zu Punkt 2 -\emph on -gehört -\emph default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -eins -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -zwei -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Unterliste - Punkt 1 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Unterliste - Punkt 2 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -drei -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Umgebungen schachteln ist einfach: Verwenden Sie das Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listentiefe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -erhöhen -\family default -oder -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listentiefe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -verringern -\family default - um die Schachtelungstiefe zu verändern. - (In der Statusleiste ist die Schachtelungsebene angegeben.) Statt des Menüs - können Sie auch die Werkzeugleistenknöpfe -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - oder die Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Tab -\family default - und -\family sans -Umschalt+Tab -\family default - oder -\family sans -Alt+Umschalt+Rechts -\family default - und -\family sans -Alt+Umschalt+Links -\family default - verwenden. - Die Änderung betrifft nur die aktuelle Auswahl, falls Sie eine haben (erlaubt - es die Schachtelungstiefe von mehreren Absätzen auf einmal zu ändern), - oder den aktuellen Absatz. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beachten Sie, dass LyX die Schachtelungstiefe nur ändert, wenn das möglich - ist, ansonsten passiert nichts. - Beachten Sie außerdem, dass wenn Sie die Schachtelungstiefe eines Absatzes - ändern, die Tiefe der darin geschachtelten Objekte ebenfalls entsprechend - angepasst wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Schachteln ist nicht auf Listen beschränkt. - In LyX kann man fast alles ineinander schachteln, wie Sie bald feststellen - werden. - Das ist die wirkliche Stärke des Schachtelns von Absatzumgebungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Was Sie schachteln können und was nicht -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bevor wir Sie mit einer Liste von Absatzumgebungen konfrontieren, müssen - wir Ihnen etwas mehr darüber sagen, wie schachteln arbeitet. - Die Frage, ob man schachteln kann oder nicht, ist nicht einfach mit ja - oder nein zu beantworten. - Die Frage ist auch noch: wie? Kann man diese Umgebung in irgendeine andere - schachteln? Kann man eine andere Umgebung in diese schachteln? Ein -\emph on -Ja -\emph default - auf die erste Frage garantiert noch kein -\emph on -Ja -\emph default - auf die zweite. - Die Absatzumgebungen in LyX können bezüglich schachteln eins von drei Dingen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Eine Umgebung kann überhaupt kein Schachteln erlauben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Es gibt Umgebungen, die vollständig schachtelbar sind. - Man kann sie in andere Dinge schachteln und auch andere Dinge in sie. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Es gibt Umgebungen, die man in andere schachteln kann, aber in sie selber - kann man nichts schachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist eine Aufstellung der drei Schachteltypen und der zugehörigen Absatzumge -bungen: -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Seltsamerweise erlaubt LyX, -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default - und -\family sans -Zusammenfassung -\family default - vollständig zu schachteln. - Ebenso kann man -\family sans -Titel -\family default -, -\family sans -Autor -\family default - und -\family sans -Datum -\family default - in andere Umgebungen schachteln. - Wir bitten Sie dringend, das nicht zu tun. - LaTeX könnte meckern – oder auch nicht. - Wir wissen es nicht genau. - Aber da es vom Kontext her keinen Sinn macht, diese Umgebungen in andere - zu schachteln, warum sollten Sie es dann tun? -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Nicht -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -schachtelbar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -schachtelbar!nicht -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Man kann sie nicht schachteln. - Man kann nichts in sie hineinschachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Literaturverzeichnis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Zusammenfassung, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zusammenfassung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Titel, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Titel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Autor, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Autor -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Datum. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Datum -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -Vollständig -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -schachtelbar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -schachtelbar!vollstandig@vollständig -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Man kann sie schachteln. - Man kann andere Dinge in sie hineinschachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Gedicht, Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(kurz), Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(lang), Auflistung, Aufzählung, Beschreibung, Liste, LyX-Code -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -Teilweise -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -schachtelbar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -schachtelbar!teilweise -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Man kann sie in andere Dinge schachteln. - Man kann nichts in sie hineinschachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Standard, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Standard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, Teil -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Teil -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, Kapitel, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Kapitel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Abschnitt, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Abschnitt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Unterabschnitt, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unterabschnitt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Unterunterabschn., -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unterunterabschn. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Paragraph, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraph -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Unterparagraph, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unterparagraph -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Teil*, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Teil* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Kapitel*, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Kapitel* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Abschnitt*, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Abschnitt* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Unterabschnitt*, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unterabschnitt* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Unterunterabschn.*, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unterunterabschn.* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Adresse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -rechts, -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Rechte Adresse -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Adresse. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Adresse -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Anmerkung: -\series default - Obwohl es möglich ist, nummerierte Gliederungen wie -\family sans -Kapitel -\family default -, -\family sans -Abschnitt -\family default -, usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -in zum Beispiel Listen zu schachteln, wird dringend davon abgeraten. - Denn das Ziel ist es, gut strukturierte Dokumente zu erzeugen, die den - gängigen Normen des Schriftsatzes folgen, aber geschachtelte Gliederungen - verstoßen dagegen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Andere Dinge schachteln: Tabellen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tabellen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, Mathematik -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mathematik -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, Gleitobjekte -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gleitobjekte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - usw. -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Andere Dinge schachteln -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt einige Dinge, die zwar keine Absatzumgebungen, aber trotzdem vom - schachteln betroffen sind: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Gleichungen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Tabellen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Bilder -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Anmerkung -\series default -: Bilder und Tabellen in Gleitobjekten sind davon nicht betroffen. - Lesen Sie weiter unten oder in den Abschnitten -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Abbildungen" - -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tabellen" - -\end_inset - - weitere Einzelheiten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX kann diese drei Objekte entweder als Wort oder als Absatz behandeln. - Nun, eine Tabelle kann man nicht in eine Zeile schreiben, aber Formeln - und Bilder. - Wenn ein Bild oder eine Gleichung -\emph on -inline -\emph default - ist, folgt sie dem Absatz überall hin. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie aber eine Gleichung, ein Bild oder eine Tabelle in einem eigenen - -\emph on -Absatz -\emph default - haben, verhalten sie sich wie teilweise schachtelbare Absatzumgebungen. - Man kann sie in jede Umgebung schachteln, aber man kann natürlich nichts - in sie schachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist ein Beispiel mit einer Tabelle: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Punkt eins -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist (a) und geschachtelt. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Address -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist (b). - Die Tabelle ist in a) geschachtelt. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Wieder zurück. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn wir die Tabelle nicht geschachtelt hätten, würde die Liste wie folgt - aussehen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Punkt eins -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist (a) und geschachtelt. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist (b). - Die Tabelle ist -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - in (a) geschachtelt. - Sie ist überhaupt nicht geschachtelt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Wieder zurück. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beachten Sie, dass b) nicht nur nicht mehr geschachtelt ist, sondern auch - der erste Punkt einer neuen Liste! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt noch eine Falle, in die man leicht geht: man schachtelt zwar die - Tabelle, geht aber nicht tief genug. - LyX verwandelt dann alles nach der Tabelle in eine neue (Unter)liste. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Punkt eins -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist (a) und geschachtelt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist (b). - Die Tabelle ist in 1. - geschachtelt, aber -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - in (a). -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Wieder zurück. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie Sie sehen, wurde b) zum ersten Punkt einer neuen Liste, aber -\emph on -innerhalb -\emph default - von Punkt 1. - Dasselbe würde mit einem Bild oder einer Gleichung geschehen. - Wenn Sie also Tabellen, Bilder oder Gleichungen schachteln, passen Sie - auf die richtige Tiefe auf! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dann sind da die so genannten Gleitobjekte. - Ein Gleitobjekt ist ein Textblock, der mit einer Art Marke versehen ist, - aber keinen festen Platz hat. - Er kann eine Seite oder zwei vorwärts oder rückwärts -\emph on -gleiten -\emph default -, je nachdem, wohin er am besten passt. - -\family sans -Fußnote -\family default -n und -\family sans -Randnotiz -\family default -en sind Gleitobjekte, ebenso Gleitobjekt-Abbildung, Gleitobjekt-Tabelle - und Gleitobjekt-Algorithmus. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -In zweispaltigen Dokumenten können sich Gleitobjekte über zwei Spalten anstatt - über eine erstrecken. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Weil ein Gleitobjekt keinen festen Platz im fertigen Text hat, wirkt sich - Schachteln auf seinen momentanen Platz nicht aus, nachdem Sie es an LaTeX - weitergereicht haben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Gebrauch und allgemeine Eigenschaften -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nachdem wir Ihnen gesagt haben, was Sie schachteln können und was nicht, - ist es an der Zeit zu erklären, -\emph on -wie -\emph default - man schachtelt. - Die Schachtelungstiefe -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schachtelungs!-tiefe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - können Sie mit der Tastenkombination -\family sans -Umschalt+Alt+ -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\emph on -erhöhen -\emph default - und mit -\family sans -Umschalt+Alt+ -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\emph on -verringern -\emph default -. - Sie können dafür auch die Werkzeugleistenknöpfe -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - benutzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten, Text zu schachteln. - Man kann den zu schachtelnden Text markieren oder den Cursor einfach in - den Absatz bewegen, dessen Tiefe man ändern möchte. - Mit der ersten Methode kann man mehrere Absätze auf einmal ändern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beachten Sie, dass LyX die Schachtelungstiefe nur dann ändert, wenn es möglich - ist. - Sonst passiert nichts, wenn Sie versuchen, die Tiefe zu ändern. - Die beiden Werkzeugleistenknöpfe -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - sind dann auch deaktiviert. - Wenn Sie die Tiefe eines Absatzes ändern, werden außerdem alle darin geschachte -lten Absätze betroffen. - Es ist schwer zu beschreiben, was LyX in diesem Fall genau tut. - Das hängt insbesondere davon ab, wie Ihr Text aussieht. - Das Beste, was Sie tun können, ist ausprobieren und sehen, was passiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Zuletzt sollten Sie noch folgendes beachten: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Wenn Sie die Tiefe mehrmals -\emph on -verringern -\emph default - (das heißt wiederholt -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - drücken), hält LyX auf der äußersten Stufe an. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Wenn Sie die Tiefe -\emph on -zu oft -\emph default - -\emph on -erhöhen -\emph default - (das heißt wiederholt -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - drücken), hört LyX -\emph on - -\emph default -irgendwann auf. - Es kann aber sein, dass LaTeX nicht so viele Schachtelungen erlaubt. - Sie bekommen dann bei der DVI-Ansicht eine Fehlermeldung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beachten Sie, dass die -\emph on -niedrigste Stufe -\emph default - nicht die niedrigst mögliche bedeutet. - Sie können nicht beliebig schachteln, wie Sie es bereits bei der -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung und anderen gesehen haben, und auch LaTeX setzt eine Grenze. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX kann maximal sechsmal schachteln, ohne dass LaTeX meckert. - Hier ist ein Beispiel, das zeigt, was wir meinen: -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Wenn Sie dies in LyX lesen, erkennen Sie die Schachtelungen auch an den - roten Klammer am linken Rand. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Stufe 1 - außen -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Stufe 2 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Stufe 3 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Stufe 4 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Stufe 5 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Stufe 6 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Noch einmal: LyX hat maximal 6 sinnvolle Stufen, unabhängig davon, welche - Absatzumgebung Sie auf einer bestimmten Stufe benutzen. - Das bedeutet, dass Sie eine sechsfach geschachtelte -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default -- oder -\family sans -Gedicht -\family default --Umgebung usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -erzeugen können. - Sie können auch sechs Umgebungen mischen, wie wir später sehen werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt zwei Ausnahmen für das sechsfache Schachteln, und Sie können beide - im obigen Beispiel sehen. - Anders als die anderen vollständig schachtelbaren Umgebungen können Sie - die -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung und die -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebung nur vierfach schachteln. - Wenn wir zum Beispiel eine weitere -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default - innerhalb von -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -A. -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - erstellen wollten, würden wir Fehlermeldungen erhalten. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Noch einmal: LyX kümmert sich nicht um die Grenze, sondern LaTeX produziert - Fehlermeldungen, wenn Sie Ihr Dokument für den Druck aufbereiten wollen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einige Beispiele -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der beste Weg zu erklären, was Sie mit schachteln erreichen können, sind - Beispiele. - Wir haben mehrere mit geschachtelten Umgebungen. - Darin erklären wir, wie wir sie erzeugt haben, so dass Sie sie reproduzieren - können. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Beispiel 1: Sechsfache und gemischte Schachtelung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schachtelungs!-beispiele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -1-a Dies ist die äußerste Stufe. - Es ist eine -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebung. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -2-a Dies ist Stufe 2. - Wir haben -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default - gedrückt, gefolgt von -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -3-a Dies ist Stufe 3. - Diesmal haben wir nur -\family sans -Ein\SpecialChar \- -gabe -\family default - gedrückt, dann -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - zweimal nacheinander. - Wir hätten es aber auch wie bei 2-a machen können: -\family sans -Alt+Ein\SpecialChar \- -gabe -\family default - drücken, gefolgt von -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Dies ist eine -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Umgebung, in -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -3-a -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - geschachtelt. - Also ist sie auf Stufe 4. - Wir haben dies durch -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default -, dann -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - und schließlich durch Ändern der Umgebung auf -\family sans -Standard -\family default - erreicht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -So erhalten Sie Listeneinträge mit mehr als einem Absatz – es funktioniert - auch mit den -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --, -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default -- und -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebungen! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist ein weiterer -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Absatz, auch auf Stufe 4, nur mit einem -\family sans -Alt+Ein\SpecialChar \- -gabe -\family default - erzeugt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -4-a Dies ist Stufe 4. - Wir haben -\family sans -Alt+Ein\SpecialChar \- -gabe -\family default - gedrückt und die Absatz\SpecialChar \- -umgebung auf -\family sans -Liste -\family default - zurückgesetzt. - Denken Sie daran – innerhalb einer -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Umge\SpecialChar \- -bung kann man nichts schachteln, deswegen sind wir noch auf 4. - Aber wir -\emph on -können -\emph default - innerhalb von -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -3-a -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - weiterschachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -5-a Dies ist Stufe 5\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{} -und dies ist Stufe 6. - Inzwischen sollten Sie wissen, wie wir diese beiden erzeugt haben. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -5-b Zurück zu Stufe 5. - Drü\SpecialChar \- -cken Sie nur -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default -, gefolgt von -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -4-b Nach noch einem -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default -, gefolgt von -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -, sind wir zurück auf Stufe 4. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -3-b Zurück zu Stufe 3. - Inzwischen sollte klar sein, wie wir das taten. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -2-b Zurück zu Stufe 2. - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -1-b Und schließlich zurück zur äußersten Stufe 1. - Nach diesem Satz drücken wir -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - und ändern die Absatzumgebung zurück nach -\family sans -Standard -\family default -, um die Liste zu beenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Das war es! Übrigens hätten wir auch die -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default --, -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default --, -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(lang)- -\family default - und sogar die -\family sans -Gedicht -\family default --Umgebung anstatt der -\family sans -Liste -\family default --Umgebung benutzen können. - Das Beispiel hätte sehr ähnlich ausgesehen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Beispiel 2: Vererbung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schachtelungs!-beispiele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -Dies ist die -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default --Umgebung auf Stufe 1, der äußersten Stufe. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -Jetzt werden wir Eingabe drücken, dann -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -; danach werden wir zur -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung wechseln. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist die -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung auf Stufe 2. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Sehen Sie, wie die geschachtelte -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung nicht nur die Rand\SpecialChar \- -ein\SpecialChar \- -stel\SpecialChar \- -lung der Elternumgebung ( -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default -) erbt, sondern auch Schriftart und Leerzeichen! -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Wir haben dies Beispiel beendet, indem wir -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - gedrückt haben. - Danach mussten wir die Absatzumgebung auf -\family sans -Standard -\family default - und die Schachtelungstiefe mit einmal -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - zurücksetzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Beispiel 3: Marken, Stufen und -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default -- und -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schachtelungs!-beispiele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Beispiel 3: Marken, Stufen \SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist Stufe 1 in einer -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Absatzumgebung. - Wir wollen einige davon schachteln. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist Stufe 2. - Wir haben -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default - gedrückt, gefolgt von -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -. - Was wird passieren, wenn wir eine -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebung hier hinein schachteln? Sie wird auf Stufe 3 sein, aber welche - Marke wird es sein? Ein Stern? -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Nein! Es ist ein schwarzer Kreis. - Dies ist die -\emph on -erste -\emph default - -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Stufe, obwohl wir auf Stufe 3 sind. - Deswegen ist die Marke ein schwarzer Kreis. - (Bemerkung: wir kamen hierher durch -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default -, dann -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -, dann der Umgebungswechsel auf -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default -.) -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Hier ist Stufe 4, produziert mit -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default -, dann -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -. - -\family default - Wir werden das noch einmal machen \SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\SpecialChar \ldots{} - um zu Stufe 5 zu gelangen. - Diesmal aber haben wir auch die Absatz\SpecialChar \- -umgebung auf -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default - zurückgesetzt. - Beachten Sie die Nummerierung! Sie ist jetzt eine -\emph on -kleingeschriebene römische Zahl -\emph default -, weil wir auf der -\emph on -dritten -\emph default - Stufe der -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung sind (das heißt dies ist eine -\family sans -Aufzählung- -\family default - in einer -\family sans -Aufzählung- -\family default - in einer -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Was passiert, wenn wir die Absatzumgebung -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - ändern, sondern die Schachtelungstiefe verringern? Welche Nummerierung - wird LyX benutzen? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Oh, als wenn Sie das nicht bereits geraten hätten. - Wir benutzen nur -\family sans -Alt+Ein\SpecialChar \- -gabe -\family default -, um die Umgebung und die Tiefe beizubehalten und einen neuen Eintrag zu - erzeugen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Wir wollen -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - benutzen, um nach dem nächsten -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default - die Tiefe zu verringern. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist Stufe 4. - Sehen Sie, was für eine Marke LyX benutzt! -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dies ist Stufe 3. - Obwohl wir die Stufen geändert haben, benutzt LyX immer noch kleingeschriebene - römische Zahlen für die Marken. - Warum? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Weil der Absatz trotz der Tiefenänderung -\emph on -immer noch -\emph default - die dritte Stufe der -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung ist. - Beachten Sie aber, dass LyX den Zähler für die Marke -\emph on -zurückgesetzt -\emph default - hat. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Eine weitere Folge -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe+ -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - und wir sind zurück auf Stufe 2. - Diesmal haben wir nicht nur die Schachtelungstiefe zurückgesetzt, sondern - sind auch in der -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebung eine Stufe zurückgegangen. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dasselbe passiert nach einer weiteren Folge -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe+ -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -. - Wir sind zurück auf Stufe 1, der äußersten Stufe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Schließlich haben wir die Umgebung auf -\family sans -Standard -\family default - zurückgesetzt. - Wie Sie sehen, korrespondiert die Stufennummer nicht mit dem Markentyp, - den LyX für die -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default -- und -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebungen benutzt. - Die Anzahl von -\emph on -anderen -\emph default - -\family sans -\emph on -Aufzählung -\family default --Umgebun\SpecialChar \- -gen -\emph default -, die sie umgeben, bestimmen die Marke, die LyX für einen -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default --Eintrag benutzt. - Dasselbe gilt auch für die -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default --Umgebung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Beispiel 4: Übergeschnappt -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schachtelungs!-beispiele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Jetzt werden wir völlig verrückt. - Wir werden weder so tief wie in den anderen Beispielen schachteln noch - so ausführlich erklären, wie wir es machen. - (Stufe 1: -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -( -\family sans -Eingabe, -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, Standard -\family default -: Stufe 2) Wir werden eine kurze Beschreibung in runden Klammern irgendwo - platzieren. - Zum Beispiel besagen die beiden Tastenkombinationen, wie wir die Tiefe - änderten. - Der Umgebungsname bezeichnet natürlich die Umgebung, in der wir uns befinden. - Entweder davor oder danach werden wir die Stufe schreiben. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -( -\family sans -Eingabe, Aufzählung -\family default -: Stufe 1) Dies ist der nächste Eintrag in der Liste. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Verse -Jetzt dichten wir. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Es wird noch schlechter. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -( -\family sans -Eingabe, -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, Gedicht -\family default -: Stufe 2) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Wir wollen ein Bier. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Das wäre gerechter! -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -( -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Hier kommt eine Tabelle: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ein Fisch -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -zwei Fische -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -rote Fische -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -blaue Fische -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Verse - -\family sans -(Alt+Eingabe, Tabelle, -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - 3mal, -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe, Gedicht, -\family default - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -( -\family sans -Eingabe, Aufzählung -\family default -: Stufe 1) Dies ist ein weiterer Eintrag. - Beachten Sie, dass die Wahl einer -\family sans -Tabelle -\family default - die Schachtelungstiefe auf Stufe 1 zurücksetzt, so dass wir sie dreimal - erhöhen mussten, damit die Tabelle in die -\family sans -Gedicht -\family default --Umgebung kommt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Wir beenden nun die -\family sans -Aufzählung -\family default - und wechseln nach -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default -. - Wir sind immer noch auf Stufe 1. - Wir wollen Ihnen einige Dinge zeigen, die Sie mit dem Mischen von Umgebungen - machen können. - Die nächsten Absätze sind ein -\emph on -zitierter Brief -\emph default -. - Wir werden die -\family sans -Adresse -\family default -- und die -\family sans -Adresse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -rechts -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Umgebung hier hineinschachteln, dann ein weiteres geschachteltes -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default - für den Brief selber benutzen. - Wir werden -\family sans -Alt+Eingabe -\family default - benutzen, um die Tiefe beizubehalten. - Denken Sie daran, dass Sie -\family sans -Strg+Ein\SpecialChar \- -ga\SpecialChar \- -be -\family default - benötigen, um innerhalb von -\family sans -Adresse -\family default -- und -\family sans -Adresse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -rechts -\family default --Umgebungen mehrere Zeilen schreiben zu können. - Hier ist das Ergebnis: -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Right Address -Franz Meier -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Nirgendwostr. - 1234 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -54321 Irgendwo -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -18. - Feb. - 1999 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Sehr geehrter Herr Soundso, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -wir bedauern, Ihnen mitteilen zu müssen, dass wir Ihre Bestellung über 50 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Liter komprimiertes Methangas wegen widriger Umstände nicht liefern können. - Unglücklicherweise sind einige unserer Kühe auf merkwürdige Weise explodiert, - so dass wir nicht mehr genügend Methan haben. - Wir werden Sie auf die Warteliste setzen und Ihre Bestellung so schnell - wie möglich liefern. - In der Zwischenzeit danken wir Ihnen für Ihre Geduld. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Wir haben aber jetzt ein Sonderangebot für Rindfleisch. - Wenn Sie interessiert sind, schicken Sie bitte das beigefügte Bestellformular - zusammen mit einem Scheck an uns zurück. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Wir danken Ihnen nochmals für Ihre Geduld. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Hochachtungsvoll, -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Franz Meier -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Quotation -Ende des Beispiels! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie Sie sehen können, erreichen Sie mit dem Schachteln von Umgebungen in - LyX eine ganze Menge mit nur wenigen Tastendrücken. - Wir hätten leicht eine -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default - innerhalb von -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(lang) -\family default - oder -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default - schachteln können oder ein -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default - innerhalb von einer -\family sans -Auflistung -\family default -. - Sie haben jede Menge Möglichkeiten zur Auswahl. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Abstände, Seiten- und Zeilenumbrüche -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Was ist ein Abstand? Während es andere Programme erleuben, mehrfach hintereinand -er Leerzeichen zu verwenden, bietet LyX stattdessen verschiedene Leerräume/Abstä -nde an: Abstände mit verschiedener Breite und Leerzeichen, die am Zeilenende - umgebrochen werden können oder davor geschützt sind. - Der folgende Abschnitt zeigt einige Beispiele wo solche Abstände nützlich - sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Geschütztes Leerzeichen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Geschütztes-Leerzeichen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Leerzeichen ! geschutztes@geschütztes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es wird benutzt, um LyX (bzw. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTeX) mitzuteilen, die Zeile -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - zwischen den beiden Worten umzubrechen. - Das ist manchmal nötig, um unschöne Zeilenumbrüche zu vermeiden, wie hier: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Weitere Informationen finden Sie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family roman -\series medium -Offensic -\family default -\series default -htlich sollte zwischen -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Abschnitt -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - ein geschütztes Leerzeichen stehen. - Dieses wird über das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Formatierung -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Ge\SpecialChar \- -schütz\SpecialChar \- -tes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Leer\SpecialChar \- -zei\SpecialChar \- -chen -\family default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+Leertaste -\family default -) eingefügt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Horizontaler Leerraum -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Horizontaler-Leerraum" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Leerraum ! horizontaler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alle horizontalen Leerräume können über das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Horizontaler -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Abstand -\family default - eingefügt werden. - Die Längeneinheiten sind in Anhang -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Maßeinheiten" - -\end_inset - - aufgelistet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Normales Leerzeichen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Normales-Leerzeichen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einige Sprachen fügen nach einem Punkt einen etwas größeren Abstand ein, - und LyX befolgt diese Konvention; siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Abkürzungen-und-Satzendepunkt" - -\end_inset - - für Beispiele. - Nach Punkten in Abkürzungen folgt jedoch meist ein normaler Abstand. - Diesen können Sie mit -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Normales -\family default - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Leerzeichen -\family default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+Alt+Leertaste -\family default -) einfügen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Halbes Leerzeichen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Halbes-Leerzeichen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Leerzeichen ! halbes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein -\family sans -Halbes -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Leerzeichen -\family default - ist nur halb so breit wie das normale und -\emph on -geschützt -\emph default -. - Die typographischen Konventionen vieler Sprachen benutzen es dort, wo ein - normales Leerzeichen zu breit sein würde, zum Beispiel in Abkürzungen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote - -\noun on -D. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -E -\noun default -. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\noun on -Knuth -\noun default - hat unser geliebtes Schriftsatzprogramm entwickelt, d. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -h. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -TeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einen halbes Leerzeichen können Sie mit -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Formatierung -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Halbes -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Leerzeichen -\family default - oder -\family sans -Strg+Umschalt+Leertaste -\family default - einfügen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Weitere Leerräume -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt des Weiteren die folgenden Leerräume: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Negatives -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Halbes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Leerzeichen Eine Zeile mit einem -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - Negatives, halbes Leerzeichen zwischen den Pfeilen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Halbgeviert -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) Eine Zeile mit einem -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \enskip{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - Halbgeviert -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) zwischen den Pfeilen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Geviert -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) Eine Zeile mit einem -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \quad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - Geviert -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) zwischen den Pfeilen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Doppelgeviert -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) Eine Zeile mit einem -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \qquad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - Doppelgeviert -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) zwischen den Pfeilen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Benutzerdefiniert Eine Zeile mit -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hspace{} -\length 2cm -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm Leerraum zwischen den Pfeilen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Tabelle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Breite-der-verschiedenen" - -\end_inset - - listet die verschiedenen Breiten der Lerräume auf. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Breite-der-verschiedenen" - -\end_inset - -Breite der verschiedenen horizontalen Lerräume. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Leerraum -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Breite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Normal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Geschützt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Halb -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Negativ Halb -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout --1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Halbgeviert (0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Geviert (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Doppelgeviert (2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Variabler horizontaler Abstand -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Variabler-horiz-Abstand" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein variabler horizontaler Abstand ( -\family sans -HFill -\family default -) ist eine besondere Funktion, um zusätzlichen Leerraum gleichmäßig einzufügen. - Er ist ein Leerraum mit variabler Länge, der dem verbleibenden zwischen - dem linken und dem rechten Rand entspricht. - Gibt es in einer Zeile mehrere variable horizontale Abstände, teilen sie - sich den freien Leerraum gleichmäßig. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier sind ein paar Beispiele: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Dieser Teil ist links -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Dieser Teil ist rechts -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Links -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Mitte -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Rechts -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Links -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -1/3 Links -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Rechts -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das waren Beispiele in der -\family sans -Zitat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(kurz) -\family default --Umgebung. - Hier -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - ist ein variabler horizontaler Abstand in einem -\family sans -Standard -\family default - Absatz. - Egal ob er im Ausdruck erscheint oder nicht, er befindet sich zwischen - den Pfeilen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -HFills können sichtbar gemacht werden, wenn Sie ein -\family sans -Füllmuster -\family default - in den Abstand-Einstellungen wählen. - Folgende Füllmuster sind verfügbar: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Punkte: -\begin_inset space \dotfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Linie: -\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Linkspfeil: -\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Rechtspfeil: -\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Klammer oben: -\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Klammer unten: -\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bemerkung: -\series default - Wenn ein HFill am Beginn einer Zeile aber nicht in der ersten Zeile eines - Absatzes ist, wird er von LyX ignoriert. - Das verhindert, dass HFills aus Versehen auf die nächste Zeile gesetzt - werden. - Wenn Sie in diesem Fall trotzdem den Abstand brauchen, setzen Sie die Option - -\family sans -Schützen -\family default - in den Abstand Einstellungen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Phantom-Leerraum -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Phantom-Leerraum" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Leerraum ! Phantom -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Manchmal benötigt man Leerraum mit exakt der Länge eines Ausdrucks. - Angenommen Sie wollen die folgende Multiple-Choice Frage stellen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -Was ist korrektes Englisch?: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge would have been jumps the gun. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang ngerman - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mr. - Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\lang english -has to be jumped -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang ngerman - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mr. - Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\lang english -jumps -\lang ngerman - -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -So dass die Antwortmöglichkeiten exakt nach dem Ausdruck -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - beginnen. - Dafür können Sie die Phantom-Einfügung im Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Phantom -\family default - verwenden. - In unserem Fall fügen Sie ein horizontales Phantom am Anfang der letzten - beiden Zeilen ein und schreiben -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - in das Phantom (beachten sie das Leerzeichen nach -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -). - Eine Phantom-Einfügung gibt nur den Leerraum ihres Inhalts aus (so wie - ein Platzhalter). - Das ist der Grund warum es -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Phantom -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - genannt wird. - Das normale Phantom gibt die Höhe und Breite des Inhalts als Leerraum aus, - während die horizontale und vertikale Variante nur die entsprechende Dimension - ausgibt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Vertikaler Leerraum -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Vertikaler-Leerraum" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Leerraum ! vertikaler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Zusätzlichen senkrechten Leerraum über oder unter einem Absatz fügt man - mit dem Dialog -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Vertikaler -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Abstand -\family default - hinzu. - Dort kann man aus den folgenden Größen wählen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -SmallSkip -\family default -, -\family sans -MedSkip -\family default - und -\family sans -BigSkip -\family default - sind LaTeX-Größen, die von der Schriftgröße des Dokuments abhängen. - -\family sans -DefSkip -\family default - ist der Abstand, der im Dialog -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Textformat -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - für die Absatztrennung eingestellt ist. - Wenn Sie Absätze per Einrückung voneinander trennen, ist -\family sans -DefSkip -\family default - gleich -\family sans -MedSkip -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der -\family sans -Abstand -\family default - wird dort eingefügt, wo der Cursor steht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wir werden kein Beispiel für -\family sans -Variabel -\family default - zeigen, weil es Papierverschwendung ist. - Er arbeitet so wie die anderen Fülltypen, einschließlich variabler horizontaler - Abstand: er füllt den restlichen senkrechten Raum einer Seite mit Leerraum. - Gibt es mehrere -\family sans -VFill -\family default -s auf einer Seite, teilen sie sich den restlichen Leerraum gleichmäßig. - -\family sans -VFill -\family default -s kann man deshalb benutzen, wenn man Text auf einer Seite zentrieren will - oder ihn 2/3 oder 1/4 usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -nach unten platzieren will. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bemerkung: -\series default - Falls der vertikale Leerraum in der Ausgabe am oberen/unteren Seitenrand - erscheinen würde, wird er nur hinzugefügt, wenn die Option -\family sans -Schützen -\family default - gesetzt ist. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Absatz -\family sans --Ausrichtung -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Absatz ! -ausrichtung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit dem Menü -\family sans -Absatz-Einstellungen -\family default - ( -\family sans -Bearbeiten -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Absatz-Einstellungen -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -) können Sie die Ausrichtung ändern. - Normalerweise ist -\family sans -Voreinstellung -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Absatztyps -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -(xyz) -\family default - aktiviert, meistens ist xyz Blocksatz, was bedeutet, dass der Leerraum - zwischen den Worten variabel ist und jede Zeile des Absatzes den Platz - zwischen den beiden Rändern ausfüllt. - Wenn Sie eine der vier Möglichkeiten -\family sans - Blocksatz, Links, Zentriert -\family default - und -\family sans -Rechts -\family default - aktivieren, wird die Voreinstellung deaktiviert. - Diese Ausrichtungen sind selbsterklärend und sehen wie folgt aus: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align left -Dieser Absatz ist linksbündig, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -dieser ist zentriert, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align right -und dieser ist rechtsbündig. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\emph on -Anmerkung -\emph default -: Bei diesen drei Absatzausrichtungen wird ober- und unterhalb ein zusätzlicher - vertikaler Abstand eingefügt. - Will man zum Beispiel mehrere kurze Zeilen zentriert setzen, sollte man - nach jeder Zeile -\family sans -Strg+Eingabe -\family default - statt -\family sans -Eingabe -\family default - benutzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Manueller Seitenumbruch -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Seitenumbruch!manuell -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Manueller-Seitenumbruch" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Ihnen nicht gefällt, wie LaTeX die Seiten Ihres Dokumentes umbricht, - können Sie manuelle Seitenumbrüche einfügen. - Im allgemeinen ist das -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - nötig, weil LaTeX Seitenumbrüche gut gestaltet, wie bereits in Abschnitt - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Schusterjungen-und-Hurenkinder" - -\end_inset - - erwähnt. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wir empfehlen -\emph on -sehr -\emph default -, -\emph on -keine -\emph default - manuellen Seitenumbrüche einzufügen, -\emph on -bevor -\emph default - das Dokument endgültig fertig ist und Sie sich in der Druckvorschau überzeugt - haben, dass Sie die Seitenumbrüche -\emph on -wirklich -\emph default - ändern müssen. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Natürlich können Sie das auch kapitelweise tun, da ein Kapitel immer auf - einer neuen Seite beginnt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Dann können Sie einen manuellen Seitenumbruch an der Stelle, wo der Cursor - gerade steht, mit -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Formatierung -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Neue -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Seite -\family default - einfügen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einen manuellen Seitenumbruch werden Sie vielleicht einfügen wollen, damit - eine Abbildung oder eine Tabelle auf einer neuen Seite beginnen. - Das ist natürlich der falsche Weg. - Mit LyX können Sie festlegen, dass Ihre Abbildungen und Tabellen automatisch - auf den Beginn einer neuen Seite kommen (oder ans Ende oder auf eine eigene - Seite), ohne dass Sie sich darum kümmern müssen, was vor oder nach Ihrer - Abbildung oder Tabelle steht. - In den Abschnitten -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Abbildungen" - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tabellen" - -\end_inset - - erfahren Sie mehr über Gleitobjekte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Leerender Seitenumbruch -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Leerender-Seitenumbruch" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Seitenumbruch!leerend -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enthält eine Seite auch Gleitobjekte, wird mit dem Befehl -\family sans - Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seite -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -leeren -\family default - die Seite umgebrochen, und alle noch nicht gedruckten Gleitobjekte kommen - auf die neue Seite oder folgende. - Bei doppelseitigem Druck macht der Befehl -\family sans - Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Doppelseite -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -leeren -\family default - dasselbe, aber die neue Seite ist auf jeden Fall eine ungerade, eventuell - mit einer Leerseite dazwischen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Manueller Zeilenumbruch -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Manueller-Zeilenumbruch" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zeilenumbruch ! manuell -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Analog zu Seitenumbrüchen gibt es zwei Typen von Zeilenumbrüchen: Einen - der einfach die Zeile umbricht. - Dieser Zeilenumbruch kann in einem Absatz mit dem Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Normaler -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Zeilenumbruch -\family default - oder mit -\family sans -Strg+Enter -\family default - erzwungen werden. - Der andere Typ, der über das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rechtsbündiger -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Zeilenumbruch -\family default - oder mit -\family sans -Strg+Umschalt+Enter -\family default -eingefügt wird, bricht die Zeile um und dehnt sie dabei so, dass sie den - kompletten Raum zwischen den Seitenrändern einnimmt. - Dies ist nützlich um -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Fransen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - in Blocksatz-Absätzen zu verhindern, die eventuell durch Leerraum aufgrund - eines Zeilenumbruchs entstehen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie sollten keine manuellen Zeilenumbrüche verwenden um LaTeXs Zeilenumbruchmech -anismus zu korrigieren, denn LaTeX ist sehr gut bei Zeilenumbrüchen. - Es gibt dennoch einige Situationen wo es notwendig ist, einen Zeilenumbruch - zu setzen, z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - in einem Gedicht oder einer Adresse (siehe die Abschnitte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Zitate" - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Gedicht" - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Adresse-verwenden" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Horizontale Linien -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Horizontale-Linien" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -horizontale Linien -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Horizontale Linien können Sie mit -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Formatierung -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Horizontale -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Linie -\family default - einfügen. - Der Linienversatz ist der vertikale Abstand zwischen Linien und Grundlinie - der aktuellen Textzeile oder des Absatzes. - Die Linieneinstellungen können geändert werden, indem man mit links auf - die Linie klickt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Zeichen und Symbole -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alle Zeichen Ihrer Tastatur können Sie direkt eingeben. - Sie können auch besondere Tastaturtabellen benutzen, wenn Sie zum Beispiel - französische Zeichen mit einer deutschen Tastatur eingeben wollen. - In Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sub:Tastaturtabellen" - -\end_inset - - finden Sie weitere Informationen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie Zeichen benutzen wollen, die nicht auf Ihrer Tastatur sind, gibt - es das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Sonderzeichen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Symbole -\family default -. - Hiermit öffnen Sie ein Fenster mit Symbolen, von denen Sie eins oder mehrere - auswählen können. - Außerdem können Sie auch aus anderen Kategorien als der angezeigten auswählen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Anmerkung: -\series default - Eventuell werden nicht alle eingefügten Symbole von LyX angezeigt. - Das hängt von Ihrer Bildschirmschriftart ab, aber -\emph on -alle -\emph default - Symbole werden gedruckt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Schrift -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Textstile -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Text ! -stil -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Schrift-und-Textstile" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Schrifttypen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften ! Typen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt zwei Schrifttypen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Skalierbare -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Schriften -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften ! skalierbare -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (auch Vektorschriften -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften ! Vektor- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - genannt)werden aus den Umrissen der einzelnen Zeichen mit Hilfe von mathematisc -hen Funktionen erstellt. - Damit die Darstellung der Zeichen für verschiedene Größen immer gut aussieht, - werden mehrere Funktionen benutzt. - Zum Darstellen oder Drucken eines Zeichens berechnet ein Renderer, welche - Pixel in den Umriss gepackt werden müssen. - Die Vektorschriften sind für jede Zeichengröße bestens geeignet. - Nur bei sehr kleinen Zeichengrößen kann es schwer sein, die Pixel richtig - zu berechnen, damit das Zeichen noch gut aussieht. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Die Schriftarttypen -\family typewriter -TrueType -\family default -, -\family typewriter -OpenType -\family default - und -\family typewriter -Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -PostScript -\family default - sind Vektorschriftarten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Bitmap-Schriften -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften ! Bitmap- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - werden aus Bitmap-Bildern der einzelnen Zeichen erstellt. - Sie sehen deshalb für alle Größen gut aus, für die ein Bitmap-Bild vorhanden - ist. - Das sind meist Zeichengrößen von 8 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -34 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Pixel. - Vergrößerungen sehen deshalb nicht besonders gut aus. - Der Vorteil von Bitmap-Schriften ist, dass keine aufwendigen Berechnungen - durchgeführt werden müssen. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -In PostScript und PDF-Dokumenten sind -\family typewriter -Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\family default --Schriftarten Bitmap-Schriften. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Weil also skalierbare Schriften für fast alle Zeichengrößen gute Ergebnisse - liefern, werden sie von fast allen Text-Render- und Drucksatz-Programmen - benutzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie wissen wollen, welche Schriftarten in einem PDF-Dokument benutzt - werden, sollten Sie sich dessen Eigenschaften anschauen. - Beim -\family typewriter -Adobe Reader -\family default - sind sie unter -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dokumenteigenschaften\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Schriften -\family default - zu finden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Viele moderne Drucksetz- und Textauszeichnungs-Programme haben damit begonnen, - Schriftstile an Stelle von verschiedenen Schriftarten zu benutzen. - Anstatt zum Beispiel die Kursivform einer bestimmten Schriftart zu benutzen, - wird ein -\emph on -Hervorhebungsstil -\emph default - benutzt. - So wird das auch in LyX gemacht, wo kontextabhängig gearbeitet wird, damit - Sie sich nicht auf die Einzelheiten des Drucksatzes konzentrieren müssen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaTeX Schriftunterstützung -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Traditionell verwendet LaTeX seine eigenen Schriften. - Daher kann man die Schriften, die im Betriebssystem installiert sind nicht - verwenden, sondern muss spezielle LaTeX-Schriften benutzen. - Der Grund ist, dass LaTeX besondere Informationen von den Schriften benötigt, - die von zusätzlichen Dateien und Paketen bereit gestellt werden. - Die Schattenseite ist, dass daher die Auswahl an Schriften im Vergleich - zu anderen Textprogrammen etwas eingeschränkt ist. - Auf der anderen Seite hat man den Vorteil dass die LaTeX-Schriften generell - eine exzellente Qualität haben und auf allen Betriebssystemen exakt gleich - aussehen. - Mittlerweile gibt es eine recht große Zahl an LaTeX-Schriften, freie und - kommerzielle. - In LyX sind nur einige davon direkt über die Dokumenteinstellungen auswählbar - (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Dokumentschrift-und-Schriftgröße" - -\end_inset - - für Details). - Es sind dennoch alle verfügbar wenn man den entsprechenden LaTeX-Code in - den LaTeX-Vorspann einfügt (bitte lesen Sie dazu die Dokumentation der - gewünschten Schrift). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die neuesten Entwicklungen sind LaTeX-Interpreter, die es erlauben die Schriften -, die auf Ihrem Betriebssystem installiert sind, direkt zu verwenden. - Dies sind die Interpreter XeTeX und LuaTeX. - Beine werden von LyX unterstützt. - Damit kann man theoretisch jede installierte OpenType oder TrueType Schrift - verwenden. - Der nächste Abschnitt beschreibt wie man diese Schriften verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Es kann sein, dass einige Schriften aufgrund schlechter Zeichendefinitionen - ein schlechtes Ergebnis in der Ausgabe bringen; daher muss man manchmal - experimentieren. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - XeTeX und besonders LuaTeX sind immer noch relativ neu und daher noch nicht - ganz so stabil wie das traditionelle LaTeX oder PDFTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Dokumentschrift -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Schrift@-schrift -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Schriftgröße -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften ! Größe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Dokumentschrift-und-Schriftgröße" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können die Dokumentschrift im Dialog -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Schriften -\family default - festlegen. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Dort kann eingestellt werden, welche Schriftfamilie verwendet wird — Serifensch -rift, -\family sans -Serifenlos -\family default - oder -\family typewriter -Schreibmaschine -\family default - — und wie groß die Grundschriftgröße und der Skalierungsfaktor für (einige) - Serifenlos- und Schreibmaschine-Schriften ist, damit deren Größe zur Größe - der Serifenschrift passt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie die Option -\family sans -Nicht-T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX-Schriften verwenden -\family default - benutzen, haben Sie Zugriff auf die in Ihrem Betriebssystem installierten - Schriften. - Dies setzt voraus, dass Sie -\family sans -PDF (XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF (LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - oder -\family sans -DVI (LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - als Ausgabeformat verwenden. - Das bedeutet daher auch, dass entweder XeTeX oder LuaTeX installiert sein - müssen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" - -\end_inset - -). - Die TeX-Schriften sind dann allerdings nicht verfügbar. - Es ist zu beachten, dass LyX dann alle verfügbaren Schriften in jeder der - drei Listen (Serifenschrift, Serifenlose, und Schreibmaschine) aufführt, - da LyX die Familie nicht bestimmen kann. - Des Weiteren kann die Ausgabe mit einigen der Schriften fehlschlagen, entweder - durch inkompatible Kodierungen der Schriften oder Fehler in den Schriftdefiniti -onen. - LyX kann dies nicht im Voraus prüfen, so dass Sie eventuell experimentieren - müssen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie TeX-Schriften verwenden (dies ist die Voreinstellung), sind die - möglichen Optionen für die Schriften -\family sans -Standard -\family default - und eine Liste von in Ihrer LaTeX-Distribution verfügbaren Schriften. - -\family sans -Standard, -\family default - verwendet die Schrift, die die aktuelle Dokumentklasse als Standard hat. - In den meisten Fällen ist dies die Standard-TeX-Schrift, die als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -Computer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - ( -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -) oder -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -European Computer Modern -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - ( -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -) bekannt ist. - Einige spezielle Klassen verwenden eine andere Schrift als Standard. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Weil -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - und -\family typewriter -ec -\family default - Bitmap-Schriften sind, können sie in manchen PDF-Betrachtern bei großer - Vergrößerung treppenförmig aussehen. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Der Adobe Reader ab Version 6 glättet sie mit einem speziellen Renderer - für Bitmap-Schriften. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Um das zu vermeiden, können Sie skalierbare Schriften benutzen. - Es gibt drei Möglichkeiten: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Wählen Sie die -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - Schriften, was empfohlen ist, wenn Sie die das Aussehen der -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -/ -\family typewriter -ec -\family default - Schriften behalten wollen. - -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - wurde für die LaTeX-Gemeinde entwickelt, um die -\family typewriter -cm -\family default --Schriften als Standard abzulösen. - Sie enthält eine riesige Anzahl an Glyphen und verschiedene Schriftschnitte. - Außer einigen Details, in denen das Aussehen verbessert wurde, schaut -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - identisch zu -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - aus; -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ein Unterschied ist eine bessere Unterschneidung. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -oder wählen Sie -\family sans -AE -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Almost -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European) -\family default - für den (seltenen) Fall dass -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - nicht verfügbar ist oder nicht funktioniert, Sie aber das Aussehen der - Schrift -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -/ -\family typewriter -ec -\family default - emulieren wollen. - -\family typewriter -AE -\family default - sind virtuelle Schriften in dem Sinne, dass sie das Aussehen der -\family typewriter -cm -\family default --Schriften von anderen Schriften -\emph on -stehlen -\emph default -. - Der Nachteil ist, dass einige Zeichen fehlen, zum Beispiel die französischen - -\emph on -Guillemets -\emph default - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -« -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -» -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Wenn Sie im LaTeX-Vorspann das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -aeguill -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! aeguill -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - mit der Zeile -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[ec]{aeguill} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series default -laden, wird dieses Problem beseitigt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und dass Zeichen mit Akzenten nicht -\emph on -ein -\emph default - Zeichen sind, sondern aus -\emph on -zwei -\emph default - bestehen, dem Buchstaben und dem Akzent. - Deswegen kann man Dokumente nicht nach Worten mit solchen Zeichen durchsuchen. - Wenn Sie zum Beispiel das französische Wort -\emph on -brève -\emph default - in einer PDF-Datei suchen, werden Sie es nicht finden, weil der PDF-Betrachter - nach -\emph on - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\emph default -è -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - sucht und nicht nach -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -e + -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - ̀ -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Wenn Sie das Aussehen von -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -/ -\family typewriter -ec -\family default - nicht mögen, können Sie natürlich eine der anderen angebotenen Vektorschriftart -en verwenden, z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - oder -\family typewriter - -\family sans -Palatino -\family default -. - Die meisten Vektorschriftarten mit Serifen wählen automatisch eine passende - serifenlose und eine Schreibmaschine-Schriftart aus -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dies sind entweder einfach passende andere Schriftarten (z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - verwendet -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman die Schrift -\family default - -\family sans -Helvetica -\family default - für serifenlosen Text), oder verschiedene Schnitte der selben Schrift, - d. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -h. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -eine echte -\emph on -Schriftfamilie -\emph default - (z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - im Fall von -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - oder -\family sans -Computer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, aber Sie könne auch eigene explizit festlegen. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Die Unterschiede zwischen Serifenschrift, -\family sans -Serifenlos -\family default - und -\family typewriter -Schreibmaschine -\family default - werden in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Textstil-Dialog" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Die Schrift -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - wurde ursprünglich für Zeitungen entwickelt. - Das bedeutet, dass ihre Zeichen kleiner als die von anderen Schriften sind, - damit sie in die schmalen Zeitungsspalten passen. - Deshalb ist diese Schrift für große Dokumente wie Bücher nicht geeignet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Für die Schriftgröße gibt es generell vier mögliche Werte: Standard, 10, - 11 und 12. - Einige Klassen bieten zusätzliche Größen an. - Die Größe von Standard hängt von der Klasse ab, die Sie benutzen. - Bei den Standard-Klassen ist sie gleich der Schriftgröße 10. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Für die -\family sans -Grundgröße -\family default - gibt es die Werte -\family sans -Standard -\family default -, -\family sans -10 -\family default -, -\family sans -11 -\family default - und -\family sans -12 -\family default -. - Einige Dokumentklassen bieten weitere Größen an. - Die -\family sans -Standard -\family default --Größe hängt von der Klasse ab, die Sie verwenden. - Bei den Standardklassen ist sie gleich -\family sans -10 -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es ist zu beachten dass die Schriftgröße eine -\emph on -Grundgröße -\emph default - ist. - Das heißt dass LyX alle anderen möglichen Schriftgrößen, zum Beispiel für - Fußnoten, hoch- und tiefgestellt usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -an dieser Größe ausrichtet. - Die Schriftgröße von Teilen des Texts kann im -\family sans -Textstil -\family default --Dialog geändert werden. - Die möglichen Schriftgrößen sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Textstil-Dialog" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Über die -\family sans -Standard-Familie -\family default - kann der Standard-Schriftfamilie eingestellt werden; Serifenschrift, Serifenlos - oder Schreibmaschine. - In den meisten Fällen ist -\family sans -Standard -\family default - gleichbedeutend mit -\family sans -Serifenschrift -\family default -. - Einige Dokumentklassen (wie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B.Präsentationsklassen) verwenden jedoch einen anderen Standard. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family typewriter - -\family sans -LaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Fontkodierung -\family default - ist eine Einstellung für Experten, mit der der Wert geändert kann, der - an das LaTeX-Paket -\emph on - -\series bold -\emph default -fontenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! fontenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - übergeben wird (siehe auch Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Einstellungen" - -\end_inset - -). - Normalerweise müssen Sie nichts ändern (und diese Einstellung auch nicht - verstehen). - Verwenden Sie daher -\family sans -Benutzerdefiniert -\family default -, es sei denn, Sie haben Ihre Gründe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit einigen Schriften sind die Optionen -\family sans -Mediävalziffern verwenden -\family default - und -\family sans -Echte Kapitälchen verwenden -\family default - aktiviert. - Dies sind spezielle Features, die einige Schriften anbieten. - Wenn Sie die Option -\family sans -Mediävalziffern verwenden -\family default - auswählen, werden Ziffern mit Ober- und Unterlängen (sogenannte Mediäval- - oder Minuskelziffern) verwendet, die sich besonders gut in den Fließtext - einfügen. - -\family sans -Echte Kapitälchen verwenden -\family default - bewirkt, dass echte Kapitälchen verwendet werden, und nicht Großbuchstaben, - die skaliert werden. - Echte Kapitälchen sind Teil von hochwertigen Schriften und sehen besser - aus als skalierte, müssen jedoch oft extra gekauft werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im CJK-Feld können die Benutzer von Chinesisch, Japanisch oder Koreanisch - (CJK) eine Schrift festlegen, mit dem die Schriftzeichen dargestellt werden - sollen. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Die Schrift wird als Argument für die Befehle des LaTeX-Paketes -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - verwendet. - Das wirkt sich aber nicht auf die Dokumentsprache -\family sans -Japanisch -\family default - aus, die -\series bold -CJK -\series default - nicht benutzt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Wenn Sie eine andere Schrift oder Schriftgröße verwenden, verändert LyX - -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - die Bildschirmschrift! Die Änderung ist nur in der Ausgabe sichtbar; dies - ist Teil des WYSIWYM Konzeptes. - LyXs Bildschirmschriften können im Dialog -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - eingestellt werden, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bildschirmschriften" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Gebrauch unterschiedlicher Buchstabenstile -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Buchstabenstile -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie wir bereits gesehen haben, ändert LyX automatisch den -\color black -Buchstabenstil -\color inherit - für gewisse Absatzumgebungen. - Wir haben bereits den Buchstabenstil -\family sans -Hervorhebung -\family default - erwähnt. - Es gibt auch -\family sans -Eigenname -\family default - (meistens ist das -\family sans -Kapitälchen -\family default -). - Beide kann man mit Tastenkürzeln, über die Menüs oder die Werkzeugleiste - auswählen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um -\family sans -Kapitälchen -\family default - zu aktivieren, machen Sie folgendes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Sie klicken auf den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - -, oder Sie drücken -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -K. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Diese Befehle sind Umschalter: ist -\family sans -Eigenname/Kapitälchen -\family default - aktiviert, so wird es durch den Befehl deaktiviert und umgekehrt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine typische Anwendung für -\family sans -Eigenname/Kapitälchen -\family default --Stil sind Namen, zum Beispiel -\noun on - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Matthias Ettrich -\noun default - ist der LyX-Erfinder. -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der -\family sans -Hervorhebung -\family default -sstil wird häufiger benutzt. - Man kann ihn folgendermaßen (de)ak\SpecialChar \- -ti\SpecialChar \- -vie\SpecialChar \- -ren – es sind ebenfalls Umschalter: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Sie klicken auf den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - -, oder Sie drücken -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -H -\family default -. - oder -\family sans -Strg+E -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Zur Zeit ist der -\family sans -Hervorhebung -\family default -sstil gleichbedeutend mit einer kursiven Schrift. - Wir wollen dem Benutzer in Zukunft ermöglichen, eine andere Zuordnung zu - treffen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Den -\family sans -Hervorhebung -\family default -sstil haben wir überall in diesem Dokument benutzt. - Hier ist noch ein Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation - -\emph on -Übertreiben Sie den Gebrauch von Buchstabenstilen nicht! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Über das Beispiel hinaus ist es eine Warnung. - Man sollte in etwa so schreiben, wie man sich unterhält. - Da man sich ja nicht dauernd anschreit, sollte man vermeiden, Dinge zu - oft hervorzuheben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann den Buchstabenstil auf die Voreinstellung zurücksetzen, indem man - entweder das Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Leerzeichen -\family default - oder den Dialog -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Textstil\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Benutzerdefiniert -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -) verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Feineinstellung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Feineinstellung!der Zeichen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - mit dem Textstil-Dialog -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Textstil-Dialog" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt immer Situationen, in denen man Feineinstellungen vornehmen muss. - Deshalb hat LyX Möglichkeiten, den Buchstabenstil zu verändern. - Zum Beispiel schreiben ein wissenschaftliches Journal oder eine Firma vor, - dass eine Schrift ohne Serifen in gewissen Situationen zu benutzen ist. - Schriftsteller benutzen manchmal eine andere Schrift, um die Gedanken einer - Person von einem gewöhnlichen Dialog abzuheben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bevor wir beschreiben, wie man Buchstabenstile ändern kann, wollen wir eine - Warnung wiederholen: Übertreiben Sie den Gebrauch von Buchstabenstilen - nicht. - Viele moderne Textverarbeitungen bieten viele Schriften an, womit Sie die - Stärke der Presse besitzen. - Unglücklicherweise gibt es eine Tendenz, damit zu verschwenderisch umzugehen. - Es hat etwas von -\emph on -mit Kanonen auf Spatzen schießen -\emph default -. - Außerdem sieht ein Dokument, das sehr viele Schriften und Größen benutzt, - wirklich so aus, als hätte jemand Löcher hinein geschossen. - – Aber genug gejammert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um Schriften zu verändern, wählen Sie -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Textstil -\family default - oder klicken Sie auf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -, um das Dialogfenster -\family sans -Textstil -\family default - angezeigt zu bekommen. - Dieses Menü hat sieben Schaltflächen für die verschiedenen Schrifteigenschaften -, die man auswählen kann. - Klickt man auf eine Schaltfläche, kann man eine Einstellung wählen oder - mit -\family sans -Keine -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Änderung -\family default - alles beim alten lassen. - Mit -\family sans -Zurücksetzen -\family default - wird die Eigenschaft auf ihren Standardwert in der gerade benutzten Absatzumgeb -ung zurückgesetzt. - Damit kann man auf einen Schlag Attribute für verschiedene Absatzumgebungen - zurücksetzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die sieben Schrifteigenschaften und ihre möglichen Werte (plus -\family sans -Keine -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Änderung -\family default - und -\family sans -Zurücksetzen -\family default -) sind: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Familie -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften ! Familie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - Das -\emph on -allgemeine Aussehen -\emph default - der Schrift. - Es gibt folgende Möglichkeiten: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Roman -\family default - Dies ist die Schriftfamilie Roman. - Es ist auch die Standardfamilie. - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -R -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Serifenfrei -\family default - -\family sans -Dies ist die Schriftfamilie Sans Serif. - -\family default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -S -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Schreibmaschine -\family default - -\family typewriter -Dies ist die Schriftfamilie Schreibmaschine -\family default - (Tas\SpecialChar \- -ten\SpecialChar \- -kürzel -\family sans -Alt+Z C -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Strichstärke -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Strichstärke -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - Dies ist die Druckstärke -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Druckstärke -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - mit folgenden Optionen: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Mittel -\family default - Dies ist die Druckstärke mittel. - Es ist auch die Standardstärke. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Fett -\family default - -\series bold -Dies ist die Druckstärke fett. - -\series default - Fettdruck kann man mit -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -F -\family default - oder -\family sans -Strg+B -\family default - (de)aktivieren. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Schnitt -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schnitt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - Wie der Name schon sagt mit folgenden Optionen: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Normal -\family default - Dies ist die Standardform. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Kursiv -\family default - -\shape italic -Dies -\shape default - -\family sans -\shape italic -i -\family default -st die kursive Form -\shape default -\emph on -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Geneigt -\family default - -\shape slanted -Dies ist die geneigte Form -\shape default - (obwohl man es auf dem Bildschirm vielleicht nicht sieht, ist die Form - anders als kursiv). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Kapitälchen -\family default - -\shape smallcaps -Dies ist die Kapitälchenform -\shape default -\noun on -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Farbe -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften ! Farbe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Farbe ! Text -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Hiermit können Sie eine Textfarbe auswählen. - Neben -\family sans -Keine -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Farbe -\family default -, was bedeutet, dass die Farbe verwendet wird, die im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Farbe -\family default - für den -\family sans -Haupttext -\family default - eingestellt ist, können Sie zwischen -\family sans -Schwarz -\family default -, -\family sans -Weiß -\family default -, -\family sans -Rot -\family default -, -\family sans -Grün -\family default -, -\family sans -Blau -\family default -, -\family sans -Cyan -\family default -, -\family sans -Magenta -\family default - und -\family sans -Gelb -\family default - wählen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Sprache -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sprache (ändern) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -Hiermit können Sie einem markierten Textteil eine andere Sprache zuordnen. - Dieser Text wird (nur in LyX) blau unterstrichen, um die Sprachänderung - zu anzuzeigen. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Wenn Sie zum Beispiel längeren englischen Text in Ihrem Dokument haben, - berücksichtigt LaTeX für diesen Teil automatisch die englische Silbentrennung. - Wenn Sie die Rechtschreibprüfung benutzen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rechtschreibprüfung" - -\end_inset - -), werden dann englisch markierten Wörter nach dem englischen Wörterbuch - geprüft. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Größe -\family default - Ändert die Schriftgröße -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften ! Größe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Sie werden hier keine Zahlenwerte finden; alle möglichen Größen sind proportion -al zur Standardschriftgröße. - Noch einmal, Sie füttern LyX nicht mit Details, sondern mit einer Beschreibung - von dem, was Sie machen wollen. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Die Optionen sind: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Winzig -\family default - -\size tiny -Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -winzige -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Schriftgröße. - -\size default - (Tastenkürzel: -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -T -\family default - oder -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Sehr -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Klein -\family default - -\size scriptsize -Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -sehr kleine -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Schriftgröße. - -\size default - (Tastenkürzel: -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Fußnote -\family default - -\size footnotesize -Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Fußnoten -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - --Schriftgröße. - -\size default - ( -\size small -Tastenkürzel -\size default -: -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Klein -\family default - -\size small -Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -kleine -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - Schriftgröße. - -\size default - ( -\size small -Tastenkürzel: -\size default - -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Umschalt+S -\family default - oder -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -4 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Normal -\family default - Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -normale -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - Schriftgröße. - Dies ist auch die Standardgröße (Tastenkürzel: -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -N -\family default - oder -\family sans -Alt+S 5 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Groß -\family default - -\size large -Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -große -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Schriftgröße. - -\size default - (Tastenkürzel: -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\family default - oder -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -6 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Größer -\family default - -\size larger -Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -größere -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Schriftgröße. - -\size default -(Tastenkürzel: -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Umschalt+L -\family default - oder -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -7 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Noch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Größer -\family default - -\size largest -Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -noch größere -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Schriftgröße. - -\size default - (Tastenkürzel: -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Riesig -\family default - -\size huge -Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -riesige -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Schriftgröße. - -\size default - (Tastenkürzel: -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -H -\family default - oder -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -9 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Gigantisch -\family default - -\size giant -Dies ist die -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -gigantische -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Schriftgröße. - -\size default - (Tastenkürzel: -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Umschalt+H -\family default - oder -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -0 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Vergrößern -\family default - vergrößert den markierten Text schrittweise -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Verkleinern -\family default - verkleinert den markierten Text schrittweise -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Wir warnen Sie -\emph on -noch einmal -\emph default -: spielen Sie mit dieser Funktion nicht verrückt. - Die Schriftgröße müssen Sie so gut wie nie ändern. - LyX ändert die Schriftgröße für verschiedene Absatzumgebungen automatisch - – das sollten Sie benutzen. - Dies ist nur für Feineinstellungen! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Diverses -\family default - Hier können Sie auf Buchstabenniveau noch ein paar andere Dinge ändern: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Hervorgehoben -\family default - -\emph on -Dies ist hervorgehobener Text -\emph default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Dies mag wie -\shape italic -kursiv -\shape default - aussehen, aber es ist ein wenig anders. - Wenn Sie bei kursivem Text hervorheben benutzen, wird es normaler Text. - Bei zukünftigen LyX-Versionen können Sie diese -\emph on -logische -\emph default - Eigenschaft hoffentlich Ihren Wünschen entsprechend anpassen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Unterstrichen -\family default - -\bar under -Dies ist unterstrichener Text. - -\bar default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -U -\family default - oder -\family sans -Strg+U -\family default -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Vermeiden Sie unterstrichenen Text wo immer es geht! Dies ist ein Überbleibsel - aus der Zeit der Schreibmaschine, als man Schriften nicht ändern konnte. - Man muss heutzutage Text nicht mehr durch Unterstreichung hervorheben. - Dies ist in LyX nur verfügbar, da einige Leute dies brauchen um Stilvorschrifte -n von Journalen einzuhalten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Doppelt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -unterstrichen -\family default - -\uuline on -Dies ist doppelt unterstrichener Text. - -\uuline default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -D -\family default -) -\lang english - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang ngerman -Da wir Sie eben vor unterstrichenem Text gewarnt haben, können Sie sich - sicher denken, was wir von doppelt unterstrichenem Text halten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Wellig -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -unterstrichen -\family default - -\uwave on -Dies ist wellig unterstrichener Text. - -\uwave default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -W -\family default -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Verwenden Sie dies nur wenn ein Journal unbedingt darauf besteht. - halten Sie Tabletten gegen Übelkeit parat. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Durchgestrichen -\family default -\bar under - -\bar default -\strikeout on -Dies ist durchgestrichener Text. - -\strikeout default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+Umschalt+O -\family default -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Dies wird oft verwendet um eine alte Version eines Textes zu kennzeichnen, - der inzwischen geändert wurde. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Eigenname/Kapitälchen -\family default - -\noun on -Dies ist Text mit Kapitälchen. -\noun default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Dies ist ebenso wie -\family sans -Hervorgehoben -\family default - ein logisches Attribut. - Zur Zeit ist es -\family sans -Kapitälchen -\family default -, aber es wird eines Tages wählbar sein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vermeiden Sie zu unterstreichen, wenn Sie können! Es ist ein Überbleibsel - aus den Schreibmaschinentagen, als man Schriften nicht wechseln konnte. - Wir brauchen auf das Unterstreichen nicht mehr zurückzugreifen, um etwas - hervorzuheben. - Es ist nur deshalb in LyX, weil es auch in LaTeX ist und weil einige es - -\emph on -möglicherweise -\emph default - benötigen, um Stilvorschriften zu genügen. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Sie können aus einer großen Zahl von Kombinationsmöglichkeiten wählen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nachdem Sie mit Hilfe des Dialogs -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Textstil\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Benutzerdefiniert -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -) einen neuen Buchstabenstil gewählt haben, -\shape italic -\emph on -können -\shape default -\emph default - Sie ihn mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "textstyle-apply" -\end_inset - - aktivieren. - (Sie können natürlich auch die Knöpfe -\family sans -Übernehmen -\family default - und -\family sans -Schließen -\family default - benutzen.) Mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf kann man auch dann umschalten, -\color black -wenn -\color inherit - das -\color black -Menü -\color inherit - -\family sans -Zeichenformat -\family default - nicht zu sehen ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um den Buchstabenstil komplett auf die Voreinstellung zurückzusetzen, drückt - man -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Leertaste -\family default -. - Will man nur die Einstellungen umschalten, die man gerade geändert hat - (angenommen man hat gerade den Schnitt auf -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -geneigt -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und die Strichstärke auf -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -fett -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - gesetzt), verwendet man die Option -\family sans -Alle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -umschalten -\family default - und drückt -\family sans -Übernehmen -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie sollten den Unterschied zwischen den drei Hauptschrifttypen kennen -\family sans -Serifenschrift -\family default -, -\family sans -Serifenlos -\family default -, und -\family typewriter -Schreibmaschine -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family typewriter -Schreibmaschine -\family default - ist eine sogenannte -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -nichtproportionale -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - Schriftart, was bedeutet, dass jedes Zeichen dieselbe Breite hat; das -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -i -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - ist so breit wie das -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -m -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Hier ist ein Beispiel -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -kein -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -Schreibmaschine-Text -\family default - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Für mehr über Phantom-Leerräume, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Phantom-Leerraum" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -kein Schreibmaschine-Text -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Serifenschrift -\family default - Schriftarten verwenden Zeichen mit Serifen. - Dies sind die kleinen -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Anhängsel -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - am Ende der Striche, die ein Zeichen bilden. - Das folgende Beispiel zeigt den Unterschied: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Text mit Serifen -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Text ohne Serifen -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Serifen ermöglichen ein schnelles und leichtes Lesen. - Diese Schriften werden daher als Standardschrift verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Serifenlos -\family default - wird nicht als Grundtyp empfohlen. - Diese Schrift wird daher oft nur für Abschnittsüberschriften und Kurztexte - verwendet. - In diesem Dokument wird er zur Hervorhebung von Menünamen verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Umschalten -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - bezieht sich auf das Setzen oder Entfernen von Schrifteigenschaften. - Wenn eine Eigenschaft fürs Umschalten im Textstil-Dialog ausgewählt ist, - wird sie vom ausgewählten Text entfernt, wenn dieser schon die Eigenschaft - besitzt. - Wenn man z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - einen Stil mit den Eigenschaften A, B und C für Text anwendet, der aktuell - die Schrifteigenschaften B, C, F und G hat, und wenn B auf umschalten, - C auf nicht umschalten gesetzt ist, wird der Text danach die Eigenschaften - A, C, F und G haben. - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Niemals Umschalten -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Immer Umschalten -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - bedeutet, dass man die Umschalt-Eigenschaft nicht kontrolliert. - Für die Eigenschaften der linken Seite des Dialogs ( -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Familie -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - usw.) entscheidet man selbst über das Umschalten. - Wenn -\family sans -Alle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -umschalten -\family default - gewählt ist, werden alle Eigenschaften der linken Dialogseite umgeschaltet; - standardmäßig werden sie nicht umgeschaltet. - Die Einstellung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Zurücksetzen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - wird nie umgeschaltet. - Wenn man z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B: -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Strichstärke -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - auf -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Zurücksetzen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - setzt, -\family sans -Alle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -umschalten -\family default - wählt und dies auf fett gesetzten Text anwendet, wird auf die Voreinstellung - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Mittel -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - zurückgesetzt, egal wie oft man den Stil anwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es wird zum Schluss nochmal gewarnt: Übertreiben Sie den Gebrauch von -\emph on - -\emph default -Schriften nicht! Sie sind ansonsten nur ein vorgetäuschter Ersatz für gutes - Schreiben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Druckvorschau -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Druckvorschau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Drucken -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -drucken -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Überblick -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nachdem wir nun einige Grundfunktionen von LyX zur Dokumentbearbeitung erläutert - haben, wollen Sie sicherlich wissen, wie Sie Ihr Meisterstück ausdrucken - können. - Vorher wollen wir Ihnen jedoch einen kurzen Überblick über das geben, was - sich im Hintergrund abspielt. - Wir werden dies ausführlicher in den -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - behandeln. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX benutzt das Programm LaTeX zur Druckaufbereitung. - (Eigentlich ist LaTeX nur ein Makropaket für das Druckaufbereitungssystem - TeX, aber um Sie nicht zu verwirren, werden wir das Ganze nur LaTeX nennen.) - Sehen Sie es so: LyX benutzen Sie zum Schreiben. - Dann ruft LyX LaTeX auf, um daraus etwas Druckbares zu machen. - Das passiert in mehreren Schritten: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -LyX wandelt Ihr Dokument in eine Reihe von Textbefehlen für LaTeX um und - erzeugt eine Datei mit der Erweiterung -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -LaTeX benutzt die Befehle der -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default --Datei, um eine druckbare Ausgabe zu erzeugen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ausgabe-Dateiformate -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dateiformate -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Ausgabe-Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -ASCII -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dateiformate ! ASCII -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.txt -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - Es enthält Ihr Dokument als reinen Text bezüglich den Regeln des ASCII-Formats - (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können ihr Dokument nach ASCII über das Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Einfacher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text -\family default -. - Dies exportiert jedoch nicht Material, das extern generiert wird, wie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - BibTeX-Bibliographien (Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken" - -\end_inset - -). - Falls Ihr Dokument solches Material enthält, verwenden Sie das Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Weitere Formate und Optionen -\family default - und wählen dann -\family sans -Einfacher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii) -\family default -. - Dies exportiert das Dokument intern zuerst nach PostScript (erzeugt dabei - das externe Material) und dann nach ASCII. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -LaTeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dateiformate ! LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - und enthält alle Befehle, die von LaTeX benötigt werden um das Dokument - zu prozessieren. - Wenn die LaTeX verstehen, können Sie so die Ursache von LaTeX-Fehler ergründen - oder die Datei mittels Konsolenbefehlen bearbeiten. - Die LaTeX-Datei wird automatisch in LyXs temporärem Verzeichnis erstellt, - wann immer Sie Ihr Dokument ansehen oder exportieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können ihr Dokument als LaTeX-Datei über das Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default - exportieren. - Die verschiedenen LaTeX-Export-Varianten sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub: Exportieren" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -DVI -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dateiformate ! DVI -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.dvi -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Diese bedeutet -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -device-independent -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (geräteunabhängig) da dieses Format genau das ist: Man kann es auf allen - Computern ohne irgend welche Konvertierungen einsetzen. - DVIs eignen sich für schnelle Voransicht für andere Ausgabeformate wie - PostScript. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -DVI-Dateien enthalten keine Bilder, sie verlinken diese nur. - Daher darf man nicht vergessen, die Bilder zusammen mit den DVIs weiterzugeben. - Da der DVI-Betrachter die Bilder im Hintergrund konvertieren muss um sie - darstellen zu können, kann das beim Scrollen im DVI den Computer verlangsamen. - Daher wird empfohlen PDF für Dateien mit vielen Bildern zu verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können ihr Dokument als DVI über das Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\family default - oder -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - exportieren. - Die zweite Möglichkeit verwendet das Programm -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -. - Dieses bietet direkte Unterstützung für Unicode und für die Direktwahl - von Schriften (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" - -\end_inset - -). - LuaTeX ist noch in der Entwicklung, könnte aber der nächste Standard TeX-Prozes -sor werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PostScript -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dateiformate ! PostScript -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.ps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - PostScript wurde von der Firma -\family typewriter -Adobe -\family default - als Druckersprache entwickelt. - Das Format enthält daher Befehle, die Drucker verwenden um die Datei zu - drucken. - PostScript kann als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Programmiersprache -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - angesehen werden; man kann damit Berechnungen durchführen und Diagramme - und Bilder zeichnen. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Falls Sie interessiert sind, mehr darüber zu erfahren, sollten Sie sich - das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -pstricks -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! pstricks -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - ansehen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Durch diese Fähigkeit sind die Dateien oft größer als PDFs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PostScript kann nur Bilder im Format -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Encapsulated PostScript -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (EPS, Dateiendung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.eps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -) enthalten. - Da LyX es erlaubt jedes bekannte Bildformat in Dokumente einzufügen, muss - es diese im Hintergrund in EPS konvertieren. - Wenn Sie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - 50 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Bilder in Ihrem Dokument haben, muss LyX 50 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Konvertierungen durchführen, wenn Sie Ihr Dokument zum ersten Mal in der - Ausgabe ansehen oder exportieren. - Dies kann Ihren Arbeitsfluss mit LyX verlangsamen. - Wenn Sie also planen, PostScript für die Ausgabe zu verwenden, sollten - Sie alle Bilder direkt als EPS einfügen und das Problem zu vermeiden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können ihr Dokument als PostScript über das Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -PostScript -\family default - exportieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PDF -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dateiformate ! PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.pdf -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Das -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Portable Document Format -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (PDF) wurde von -\family typewriter -Adobe -\family default - von PostScript abgeleitet. - Es ist komprimierter und verwendet weniger befehle als PostScript. - Wie der Name -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -portable -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (übertragbar) impliziert, kann es auf jedem Computersystem dargestellt - werden und der Ausdruck wird exakt gleich aussehen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF kann Bilder in seinem eigenen PDF-Format sowie in den Formaten -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Joint Photographic Experts Group -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (JPG, Dateiendung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpeg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -) und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Portable Network Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (PNG, Dateiendung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.png -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -) enthalten. - Sie können jedoch auch jedes andere Bildformat verwenden, denn LyX konvertiert - diese in eine der möglichen Formate. - Jedoch kann, wie im Abschnitt über PostScript beschrieben, die Bildkonvertierun -g den Arbeitsfluss verlangsamen. - Daher wird empfohlen, Bilder direkt in einem der drei erwähnten Formate - einzufügen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können ihr Dokument als PDF über das Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren -\family default - in verschiedenen Arten exportieren: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) Diese verwendet das Programm -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default -, das Ihr Dokument direkt in ein PDF konvertiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) Diese verwendet das Programm -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -, das Ihr Dokument direkt in ein PDF konvertiert. - -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - ist ein neuer Prozessor, der aus -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default - weiter entwickelt wurde und direkte Unterstützung für Unicode und für die - Direktwahl von Schriften bietet (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" - -\end_inset - -). - LuaTeX ist noch in der Entwicklung, könnte aber der nächste Standard TeX-Prozes -sor werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) Diese verwendet das Programm -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -, das Ihr Dokument direkt in ein PDF konvertiert. - -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default - ist ein neuer Prozessor, der direkte Unterstützung für Unicode und für - die Direktwahl von Schriften bietet (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" - -\end_inset - -). - Er ist besonders geeignet für die Verwendung verschiedener Schriftsysteme - (Arabisch, Lateinisch, Japanisch, usw.). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) Diese verwendet das Programm -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default -, das Ihr Dokument im Hintergrund erst in ein DVI und anschließend in ein - PDF konvertiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) Diese verwendet das Programm -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default -, das ein PDF aus einer Post\SpecialChar \- -Script-Version Ihres Dokuments erstellt. - Die PostScript-Version wird vom Programm -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - erzeugt, das wiederum eine DVI-Version als Zwischenschritt erstellt. - Diese Art besteht also aus drei Konvertierungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wir empfehlen -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - zu verwenden, denn -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default - unterstützt alle Funktionen von aktuellen PDF-Versionen, ist schnell, stabil - und arbeitet ohne Probleme. - Wenn Sie verschiedene Schriftsysteme und\SpecialChar \slash{} -oder spezielle OpenType Schriften - verwenden, sollten Sie stattdessen -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - oder -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - ausprobieren auch wenn sie noch nicht so ausentwickelt wie -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default - sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -XHTML -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dateiformate ! XHTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -HTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.xhtml -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und eignet sich besonders für die Ansicht in Webbrowsern. - Es enthält keine Bilder, sondern verlinkt sie nur. - Wenn LyX XHTML erzeugt, werden Teile des Dokuments wenn nötig in Bilder - umgewandelt. - Für die Ausgabe von Mathe können Sie im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ausgabe -\family default - zwischen verschiedenen Formaten wählen, die in Abschnitt -\emph on -Mathe-Ausgabe in XHTML -\emph default - der -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - beschrieben sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die XHTML-Ausgabe ist noch -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -unter Entwicklung -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - so dass noch nicht alle Funktionen von LyX unterstützt werden. - Siehe das Kapitel -\emph on -LyX und das World Wide Web -\emph default - in den -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - für weitere Informationen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können Ihr Dokument mit dem Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LyX-HTML -\family default - als XHTML-Datei exportieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Vorschau -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Vorschau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um das fertige Dokument mit allen Seitenumbrüchen, Fußnoten usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -anzusehen, verwenden Sie das Menü -\family sans -Ansicht -\family default - und wählen -\family sans -Ansehen -\family default -oder drücken den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - -. - Es wird sich dann ein Betrachtungsprogramm öffnen und das Dokument im voreinges -tellten Ausgabeformat anzeigen. - Für mehr über die globale Voreinstellung siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - - für die dokumentspezifische Einstellung siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" - -\end_inset - -. - Weitere Ausgabeformate können über -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Andere Formate ansehen -\family default - oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - ausgewählt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie Ihr Dokument geändert haben, können Sie die Ansicht mit dem Menü - -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Aktualisieren -\family default - bzw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Andere Formate aktualisieren -\family default - aktualisieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beim Vorschauen eines Dokuments wird die Ausgabedatei nur in LyXs temporärem - Verzeichnis erzeugt. - Für eine permanente Ausgabe muss das Dokument exportiert werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Die Datei von LyX aus ausdrucken -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Datei-ausdrucken" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Statt Ihre Dokument zu exportieren und dann zu drucken, können Sie es auch - direkt von LyX aus drucken. - Um eine Datei zu drucken, wählen Sie das Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Drucken -\family default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+P -\family default -) oder drücken Sie den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - -. - LyX ruft dann intern LaTeX auf um ein DVI zu erzeugen. - Diese Datei wird dann vom Programm -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - in eine PostScript-Datei gewandelt und anschließend mit dem Programm -\family typewriter -Ghostscript -\family default - gedruckt. - Durch diese Schritte im Hintergrund ist diese Methode nicht die schnellste. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann folgende Druckparameter in der -\family sans -Druckziel -\family default - Box festlegen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Drucker -\family default - Dies ist der Name des Druckers, auf dem ausgedruckt werden soll. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Man beachte, dass dies der Druckername für das Programm -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - ist. - Das bedeutet, dass -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - für diesen Druckernamen konfiguriert sein muss. - Der Standard-Drucker kann in LyXs Einstellungen-Dialog festgelegt werden, - siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Drucker" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Der Drucker sollte PostScript verarbeiten können. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Datei -\family default - Der Name einer Datei in die ausgegeben werden soll. - Die Ausgabe wird eine PostScript-Datei sein. - Sie wird in LyXs Arbeitsverzeichnis erstellt, falls kein Pfad angegeben - wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können wählen einen Bereich, nur gerade oder ungerade Seiten oder Seiten - in umgekehrter Reihenfolge zu drucken — Letztere sind für zweiseitigen - Druck ohne Duplexer nützlich: Man kann die Seiten nach dem einseitigen - Drucken je nach Drucker neu einlegen um anschließend die Rückseite zu bedrucken. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Ein paar Worte über Typographie -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Bindestriche, Gedankenstriche und Minuszeichen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bindestriche -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gedankenstriche -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In LyX hat das -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - --Zeichen vier Längen -\emph on -: -\emph default - -\emph on -Bindestrich, Gedankenstrich -\emph default -, -\emph on -langer Gedankenstrich -\emph default - und -\emph on -Minuszeichen -\emph default -: -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bindestrich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ein -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gedankenstrich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -– -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -eingefügt mit -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Sonderzeichen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Symbole -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -langer Gedankenstrich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -— -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -eingefügt mit -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Sonderzeichen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Symbole -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Minuszeichen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $-$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ein -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - im Mathematikmodus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alternativ können Sie die Gedankenstriche erzeugen, indem Sie das -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - --Zeichen mehrmals hintereinander schreiben. - LyX konvertiert sie automatisch in die richtige Länge. - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - gibt einen Gedankenstrich, -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - einen langen Gedankenstrich. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die drei Strichtypen unterscheiden sich vom Minuszeichen, das im Mathematikmodus - erscheint und eine eigene Länge hat. - Hier sind einige Beispiele für den Gebrauch von -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Zeilen- und Seitenumbrüche ( -\emph on -Bindestrich -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Von A – Z ( -\emph on -Gedankenstrich -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Oh — da ist ein -\emph on -langer Gedankenstrich. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ -\end_inset - - ( -\emph on -Minuszeichen -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie dies in LyX lesen, sehen Sie keine Unterschiede, aber in der gedruckten - Version erkennen Sie es. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Silbentrennung -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Silbentrennung" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silbentrennung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Allgemein -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In LyX gibt es keine Silbentrennung, erst in der Druckausgabe, und zwar - automatisch. - Das macht das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, und zwar in -\emph on -einigen -\emph default - Sprachen, nach den Regeln der Dokumentsprache. - Die LaTeX-Silbentrennung ist fast perfekt, sie hat nur Probleme mit dem - Schriftstil -\family sans -Schreibmaschine -\family default -, manchmal auch bei serifenfreiem Text, bei unüblichen Begriffen wie -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -h3knix/m0n0wand -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und zusammengesetzten Worten mit Bindestrich. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Falls LaTeX ein Wort nicht oder nicht richtig trennen kann, können Sie manuell - Trennhilfen einfügen. - Dazu wählen Sie -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Trenn\SpecialChar \- -möglichkeit -\family default - an der Stelle im Wort, an der Sie trennen möchten, oder einfach -\family sans -Strg+ -\family default - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - --. - Beachten Sie, dass diese Trennhilfen nur Empfehlungen für LaTeX sind. - Wenn keine Silbentrennung notwendig ist, wird LaTeX die Trennhilfen ignorieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Manchmal will man verhindern, dass etwas getrennt wird. - Dann schreibt man den Begriff am besten in eine Makebox wie in Abschnitt - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Silbentrennung unterbinden -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Bemerkung: Wenn Sie manuelle Trennhilfen innerhalb einer -\family sans -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Code -\family default --Umgebung benötigen, müssen Sie statt -\family sans -Strg+ -\family default - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\backslash -- -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -"- -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - als TeX-Code benutzen, weil LyX mit -\family sans -Strg+ -\family default - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- in -\family sans -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Code -\family default --Umgebungen (noch) nicht klarkommt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Eigenheiten der deutschen Sprache -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Paragraph -Zusammengesetzte Worte -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "Zusammengesetzte-Worte" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Deutschen werden zusammengesetzte Worte entweder zusammengeschrieben - wie eben oder mit einem Bindestrich zusammengefügt wie bei dem Ungetüm - Programmiersprachen-Handbücher. - In der Druckansicht werden Sie erkennen, dass dieses Wort über den Rand - gedruckt wird. - Das liegt daran, dass LaTeX solche Worte nur am Bindestrich trennen kann. - Zum Korrigieren gibt es mehrere Möglichkeiten: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Sie fügen Trennmöglichkeiten ein ( -\family sans -Strg+ -\family default - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - --), und zwar an jeder infrage kommenden Stelle, weil Sie ja nicht wissen - können, wo genau das zusammengesetzte Wort im Laufe der Bearbeitung landen - wird: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Im Deutschen werden zusammengesetzte Worte entweder zusammengeschrieben - wie eben oder mit einem Bindestrich zusammengefügt wie bei Pro\SpecialChar \- -gram\SpecialChar \- -mier\SpecialChar \- -spra\SpecialChar \- -chen- -Hand\SpecialChar \- -bü\SpecialChar \- -cher\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Sie benutzen statt des Bindestrichs -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -"= -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - als TeX-Code (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:TeX-Code-Kästchen" - -\end_inset - -). - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -"= -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - wird in der Druckansicht durch den Bindestrich ersetzt, und LaTeX wendet - seine Silbentrennregeln auf beide Teile an: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Im Deutschen werden zusammengesetzte Worte entweder zusammengeschrieben - wie eben oder mit einem Bindestrich zusammengefügt wie bei Programmiersprachen -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Handbücher\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Sie benutzen den rechtsbündigen Zeilenumbruch ( -\family sans -Strg+Umschalt+Eingabe -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Paragraph -Weggelassene Wortteile -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie einen Satz wie den folgenden schreiben: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Weil LyX LaTeX im Hintergrund benutzt, unterstützt es viele LaTeX-Befehle - und -Konstrukte, aber nicht alle. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -kann es wie hier vorkommen, dass die Zeile nach dem -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - --Zeichen umgebrochen wird, was natürlich Unsinn ist. - Dann verwendet man am besten den geschützten Trennstrich -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Trennstrich ! geschützter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - ( -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Sonderzeichen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Geschützter -\family default - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Trennstrich -\family default - oder -\family sans -Strg+Alt+ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\family default -): -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Weil LyX LaTeX im Hintergrund benutzt, unterstützt es viele LaTeX-Befehle - und \SpecialChar \nobreakdash- -Konstrukte, aber nicht alle. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Satzzeichen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Satzzeichen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Abkürzungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Abkurzungen@Abkürzungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Satzendepunkt -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Satzendepunkt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Abkürzungen-und-Satzendepunkt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn LyX LaTeX aufruft, um die endgültige Version Ihres Dokumentes zu erzeugen, - unterscheidet LaTeX automatisch zwischen Worten, Sätzen und Abkürzungen. - LaTeX fügt dann -\emph on -geeigneten Leerraum -\emph default - ein: zwischen dem Punkt am Ende eines Satzes und dem ersten Wort des nächsten - kommt ein wenig mehr Leerraum. - Abkürzungen bekommen hinter dem Punkt genauso viel Leerraum wie normale - Worte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Unglücklicherweise ist der Algorithmus zur Bestimmung einer Abkürzung und - eines Satzendes ein wenig dumm. - Wenn ein Punkt auf einen klein geschriebenen Buchstaben folgt, wird auf - Satzende entschieden; folgt der Punkt auf einen groß geschriebenen Buchstaben, - wird auf Abkürzung entschieden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier sind einige Beispiele von -\emph on -richtigen -\emph default - Abkürzungen und Satzenden: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -B. - Traven -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Ärgere Dich nicht. - Sei glücklich. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\SpecialChar \ldots{} - und hier sind welche, bei denen der Algorithmus falsch arbeitet: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -hier z. - B. - ist zu viel Leerraum! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Dies bin ICH. - Hier ist zu wenig. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Fehler sehen Sie erst in der gedruckten Version Ihres Dokumentes. - Um das Problem zu beheben, können Sie folgendes tun: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Benutzen Sie ein -\family sans -Normales -\bar under - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\bar default -Leerzeichen -\family default - ( -\family sans -Strg+Alt+Leertaste -\family default -) nach klein geschriebenen Abkürzungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Benutzen Sie einen kleinen Zwischenraum -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - ( -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latex-einführung" - -\end_inset - -, S. - 405) innerhalb von Abkürzungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Benutzen Sie einen -\family sans -Satzendepunkt -\family default - ( -\family sans -Strg+ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -. -\family default -), den Sie auch unter -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Son\SpecialChar \- -der\SpecialChar \- -zei\SpecialChar \- -chen -\family default - finden, um einen Leerraum wie zwischen Sätzen zu erzwingen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit den Korrekturen sehen die obigen Beispiele so aus: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -hier z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - ist zu viel Leerraum! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Dies bin ICH\SpecialChar \@. - Hier ist zu wenig. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Anführungszeichen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie ! Anführungszeichen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anfuhrungszeichen@Anführungszeichen | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Typographie -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX setzt Anführungszeichen normalerweise richtig. - Insbesondere wird es unterschiedliche Anführungszeichen für den Beginn - und das Ende des eingeschlossenen Textes benutzen. - Zum Beispiel -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Anfang Ende -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Das Tastaturzeichen -\family sans -" -\family default - (= -\family sans -Umschalt+2) -\family default - wird sie automatisch erzeugen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können das Verhalten der -\family sans -" -\family default --Taste im Dialogfenster -\family sans -Dokument-Einstellungen -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - unter -\family sans -Sprache\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Stil -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Anführungszeichen -\family default - einstellen. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Über -\family sans -Anführungszeichen -\family default - können Sie sechs verschiedene Anführungszeichen auswählen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\family default - benutzt die Anführungszeichen: -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -doppelt -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - -\family default - benutzt die Anführungszeichen: -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -doppelt -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\family default - benutzt die Anführungszeichen: -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -doppelt -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - -\family default - benutzt die Anführungszeichen: -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -doppelt -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - benutzt die Anführungszeichen: -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -doppelt -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes ald -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes ard -\end_inset - - -\family default - benutzt die Anführungszeichen: -\begin_inset Quotes ald -\end_inset - -doppelt -\begin_inset Quotes ard -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um ein einfaches Anführungszeichens zu schreiben wollen, benutzen Sie -\family sans -Alt+ -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ligaturen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Ligaturen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie ! Ligaturen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ligaturen | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Typographie -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es ist eine Schriftsetzpraxis, gewisse Buchstaben zusammenzuziehen und sie - wie einen zu drucken. - Diese Kombinationen nennt man -\emph on -Ligaturen -\emph default -. - Da sich LaTeX mit Ligaturen auskennt, werden Ihre mit LyX geschriebenen - Dokumente sie auch haben. - Hier sind die möglichen Ligaturen: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -ff -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -fi -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -fl -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -ffi -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -ffl -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Manchmal aber möchte man keine Ligaturen in einem Wort. - Während eine Ligatur in einem Wort wie -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Graffiti -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - vielleicht in Ordnung ist, sieht es in zusammengesetzten Worten seltsam - aus, zum Beispiel -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Stofflappen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Dorffest -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Um die Ligatur aufzuheben benutzt man den LaTeX-Befehl -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -| -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - zwischen den Buchstaben ( -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ligaturtrenner -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ligatur!-trenner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - oder -\family sans -Strg+Umschalt+L -\family default -). - Dies macht aus -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Stofflappen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Stoff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -lappen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und aus -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Dorffest -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -fest -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einheiten -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie ! Einheiten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Allgemeinen ist der Abstand zwischen Zahl und Einheit kleiner als ein - normales Leerzeichen zwischen zwei Wörtern. - Wie man im Beispiel sehen kann, sieht es besser aus, wenn der Abstand kleiner - ist. - Um solch ein -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -halbes Leerzeichen -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - für Einheiten einzufügen, verwendet man das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Halbes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Leerzeichen -\family default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+Umschalt+Leerzeichen -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist ein Beispiel, das den Unterschied verdeutlicht: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Leerzeichen zwischen Zahl und Einheit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -halbes Leerzeichen zwischen Zahl und Einheit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Schusterjungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie ! Schusterjungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Hurenkinder -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie ! Hurenkinder -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Schusterjungen-und-Hurenkinder" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In den frühen Tagen der Textverarbeitungen passierten Seitenumbrüche genau - dort, wo die Seiten zu Ende waren. - Es spielte keine Rolle, worum es im Text eigentlich ging. - Sie werden sich sicher erinnern, dass Sie nach dem Drucken eines Dokumentes - feststellten, dass die Überschrift eines neuen Abschnittes oder die erste - Zeile eines neuen Absatzes allein auf der letzten Zeile einer Seite standen, - oder dass die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes die erste Zeile einer neuen Seite - bildete. - Diese Dinge nennt man -\emph on -Schusterjungen -\emph default - und -\emph on -Hurenkinder -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Klar, dass LyX vermeiden kann, eine Seite direkt nach der Abschnittsüberschrift - umzubrechen. - Das ist ein Vorteil von Absatzumgebungen. - Aber was ist mit Schusterjungen und Hurenkindern? LaTeX hat Regeln, um - mit Seitenumbrüchen fertig zu werden, und einige von ihnen sind speziell - dazu da, um Schusterjungen und Hurenkinder zu verhindern. - Das ist -\emph on -ein -\emph default - Vorteil, dass LyX LaTeX im Hintergrund hat. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wir können es nicht näher erläutern, wie TeX und LaTeX Seitenumbrüche festlegen - oder wie man das Verhalten beeinflussen kann. - Einige LaTeX-Bücher im Literaturverzeichnis (zum Beispiel -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -) mögen mehr darüber enthalten. - Auf jeden Fall müssen Sie sich fast nie darum kümmern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Notizen, Abbildungen, Tabellen und Gleitobjekte -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Notizen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notizen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Notizen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX bietet die folgenden Typen für Notizen an: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LyX-Notiz Dieser Notiz-Typ ist für interne Notizen gedacht, die nicht in - der Ausgabe erscheinen. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dies ist Text in einer Notiz-Box der nicht in der Ausgabe erscheint. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kommentar Dieser Notiz-Typ erscheint ebenfalls nicht in der Ausgabe, aber - als LaTeX-Kommentar wenn man das Dokument als LaTeX über das Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaTeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(xxx) -\family default - exportiert. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Comment -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dies ist Text in einer Notiz-Box der nur als Kommentar in der LaTeX-Datei - erscheint. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Grauschrift Dieser Notiz-Typ erscheint in der Ausgabe in einer Farbe, die - man in den Dokumenteinstellungen unter -\family sans -Farben\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Grauschrift-Notizen -\family default - einstellen kann. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dies ist Text -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dies ist eine Beispiel-Fußnote in einer Grauschrift-Notiz. - In diesem Dokument ist die Farbe dieses Notiz-Typs auf blau gesetzt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - eines Kommentars, der in der Ausgabe erscheint. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Wie man am Beispiel sehen kann, können Grauschrift-Notizen Fußnoten haben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notizen werden mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - oder dem Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Notiz -\family default - eingefügt. - Durch Rechts-Klicken auf die Notiz-Box kann der Typ eingestellt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Fußnoten -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Fußnoten" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fusnoten@Fußnoten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX verwendet Boxen, um Fußnoten darzustellen: Wenn man eine Fußnote mit - dem Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fußnote -\family default - oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "footnote-insert" -\end_inset - - einfügt, wird man die folgende Box sehen: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/FussnoteQt4.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - - Diese Box ist LyXs Darstellung einer Fußnote. - Klickt man mit links auf die Marke -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Fußnote -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, wird die Box geöffnet und man kann den Fußnotentext hineinschreiben. - Nochmaliges Klicken auf die Marke schließt die Box. - Will man bestehenden Text als Fußnote setzen, markiert man ihn einfach - und klickt dann auf den Fußnoten-Werkzeugleistenknopf. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist eine Beispiel-Fußnote: -\begin_inset Foot -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Um eine Fußnote zu schließen, klickt man auf die Marke der Fußnoten-Box. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Fußnote erscheint in der Ausgabe als tiefgestellte Nummer an der Position - im Text, an der die Fußnoten-Box eingefügt wurde. - Der Fußnotentext wird an das Ende der aktuellen Seite gesetzt. - Die Fußnotennummer wird von LyX entsprechend der Dokumentklasse berechnet. - LyX unterstützt noch keine speziellen Nummerierungsschemata, aber man kann - sie mit speziellen LaTeX-Befehlen erhalten. - Diese sind im Handbuch -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Randnotizen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Randnotizen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Randnotizen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Innerhalb von LyX erscheint und verhält sich eine Randnotiz genau wie eine - Fußnote. - Wenn Sie über das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Randnotiz -\family default - oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "marginalnote-insert" -\end_inset - - eine Randnotiz einfügen, erscheint eine Box mit der Beschriftung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Rand -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Diese Box repräsentiert in LyX eine Randnotiz. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -An der Seite ist eine Beispiel-Randnotiz. -\begin_inset Marginal -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dies ist eine Randnotiz. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Randnotizen erscheinen auf der rechten Seite in einseitigen Dokumenten. - In doppelseitigen Dokumenten erscheinen sie im Außenrand – links auf geraden - Seiten, rechts auf ungeraden Seiten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Für weitere Informationen über die Formatierung von Randnotizen, siehe Abschnitt - -\emph on -Randnotizen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Abbildungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Abbildungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und eingebundene Grafiken -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Grafiken -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Abbildungen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um ein Bild einzufügen, setzt man den Cursor an die gewünschte Position - und klickt auf den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - oder verwendet das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Grafik -\family default -. - Es erscheint dann ein Dialog in dem man das zu ladende Bild auswählt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieser Dialog bietet eine Vielzahl an selbsterklärenden Parametern. - In der Karteikarte -\family sans -Grafik -\family default - wählt man die Bilddatei aus. - Das Bild kann skaliert und rotiert werden. - Die Einheiten der Skalierung sind in Anhang -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:In-LyX-verfügbare" - -\end_inset - - erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In der Karteikarte -\family sans -Ausschnitt -\family default - können Bildkoordinaten angegeben werden um das Bild in der Ausgabe zuzuschneide -n. - Koordinaten können außerdem automatisch mit dem Knopf -\family sans -Lese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -aus -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Datei -\family default - berechnet werden. - Die Option -\family sans -Auf -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Begrenzungsbox -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -zuschneiden -\family default - druckt nur die Bildregion innerhalb der angegebenen Koordinaten. - Normalerweise muss man sich nicht um Bildkoordinaten kümmern und kann die - Karteikarte -\family sans -Ausschnitt -\family default -ignorieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In der Karteikarte -\family sans -LaTeX und LyX-Optionen -\family default - können LaTeX-Experten zusätzliche LaTeX-Optionen angeben. - Man kann zudem angeben wie das Bild innerhalb von LyX angezeigt wird. - Die Option -\family sans -Entwurfsmodus -\family default - hat den Effekt dass das Bild nicht in der Ausgabe erscheint, sondern nur - ein Rahmen in der Größe des Bildes. - Die Option -\family sans -Beim Exportieren nicht entpacken -\family default - ist im Handbuch -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - im Abschnitt -\emph on -Grafik-Dialog -\emph default - erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Grafikdialog kann jederzeit durch Klicken auf ein Bild geöffnet werden. - Bilder erscheinen in der Ausgabe genau an der Stelle, an der sie sich im - Text befinden. - Dies ist ein Beispielbild in einem separaten, horizontal zentrierten Absatz: - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/mobius.eps - scale 70 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn man Bildbeschriftungen benötigt und Bilder referenzieren will, muss - man das Bild in ein Gleitobjekt setzen, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Grafikformate -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Grafikformate -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Grafikformate" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können Grafiken in allen bekannten Formaten einfügen, aber weil jedes - Druckausgabe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Format nur bestimmte Grafikformate zulässt, benutzt LyX das Programm -\family typewriter -ImageMagick -\family default - im Hintergrund, um die Bilder ins richtige Format zu konvertieren. - In den Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ausgabe-Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - - ist beschrieben, welche Grafikformate Sie benutzen sollten. - Ähnlich wie bei Schriften gibt es zwei Hauptarten: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Pixelbilder -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Bitmaps) bestehen aus einzelnen Pixeln, oft in komprimierter Form. - Bei starker Vergrößerung sind diese Pixel sichtbar – man spricht vom -\emph on -Treppeneffekt -\emph default - (oder von -\emph on -Aliasing -\emph default -). - Bekannte Formate sind -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Graphics Interchange Format -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (GIF, Dateiendung -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.gif -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -GIF|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Grafikformate -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Portable Network Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (PNG, Dateiendung -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.png -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PNG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Grafikformate -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, und -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Joint Photographic Experts Group -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (JPG, Dateiendung -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpeg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -JPG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Grafikformate -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Skalierbare -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Grafiken -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Vektor-) bestehen aus Vektoren, die das Bild beschreiben, und lassen sich - ohne Datenverlust beliebig vergrößern. - Das ist bei Präsentationen wichtig, weil dort die Bilder durch den Projektor - skaliert werden. - Hilfreich sind sie auch bei Online-Dokumenten, um den Benutzer in Diagramme - hineinzoomen zu lassen. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Skalierbare Grafikformate können -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Scalable Vector Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (SVG, Dateiendung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.svg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -SVG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Grafikformate -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Encapsulated PostScript -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (EPS, Dateiendung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.eps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -EPS|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Grafikformate -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Portable Document Format -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (PDF, Dateiendung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.pdf -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - sein. - Wir sagen sie können, da man jedes Pixel-Grafikformat in ein PDF oder EPS - konvertieren kann und das Ergebnis trotzdem nicht skalierbar sein wird. - In diesen Fällen wird nur ein Vorspann mit dem Bildeigenschaften zum Originalbi -ld hinzugefügt. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Im Fall von PDF wird das Originalbild zusätzlich komprimiert. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Abbildungseinstellungen gruppieren -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Abbildungen!Einstellungen gruppieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Jede Abbildung kann eine neue Gruppe von Abbildungseinstellungen definieren - oder zu einer vorhandenen hinzugefügt werden. - Abbildungen einer Gruppe haben dieselben Einstellungen, so dass die Änderung - der Einstellungen einer Abbildung automatisch die Einstellungen aller Abbildung -en dieser Gruppe ändert. - Das erleichtert das Bearbeiten ähnlicher Abbildungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine neue Gruppe definieren Sie, indem Sie den Knopf -\family sans -Neue -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Gruppe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -eröffnen -\family default - im Grafik-Dialogfenster in der Karteikarte -\family sans -LaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X- -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -und -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Optionen -\family default - drücken. - Wenn Sie dann im Grafik-Dialogfenster einer anderen Abbildung denselben - Namen eintragen, gehört auch diese Abbildung zur Gruppe. - Wenn es schon Gruppennamen gibt, können Sie diese im Kontextmenü (Rechtsklick - auf die Abbildung) auswählen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Tabellen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tabellen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Tabellen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann Tabellen entweder über den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "tabular-insert" -\end_inset - - oder das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tabelle -\family default - einfügen. - Es erscheint dann ein Dialog, der nach der Anzahl an Spalten und Zeilen - fragt. - Die voreingestellte Tabelle besitzt Linien um jede Zelle und die erste - Zeile erscheint von der restlichen Tabelle etwas abgesetzt. - Dies kommt durch eine doppelte Linie zustande: Die Zellen der ersten Zeile - haben eine untere Linie und die Zellen der zweiten Zeile eine obere Linie. - Hier ist eine Beispieltabelle: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -A -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -B -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -C -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Der Tabellendialog -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tabellen ! -dialog -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann Tabellen verändern, indem man mit der rechten Maustaste auf sie - klickt und dann -\family sans -Mehr\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - wählt. - Dies öffnet den Tabellendialog. - Hier kann man die Einstellungen für Zellen, Zeilen und/oder Spalten vornehmen, - in denen sich gerade der Cursor befindet. - Die meisten der Dialogoptionen funktionieren auch für Auswahlen. - Das bedeutet dass wenn mehrere Zellen, Spalten oder Zeilen ausgewählt sind, - die Aktion für alle in der Auswahl durchgeführt wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Zusätzlich zum Tabellendialog hilft die -\family sans -Tabellen-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - um Tabelleneigenschaften zu verändern. - Sie erscheint wenn sich der Cursor in einer Tabelle befindet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In der Karteikarte -\family sans -Tabellen-Einstellungen -\family default - des Tabellendialogs kann man die Ausrichtung der aktuellen Zeile festlegen. - Wenn man eine Zeile oder Spalte einfügt, wird diese rechts neben bzw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -unter der aktuellen Zelle eingefügt. - Die vertikale Ausrichtung einer Spalte kann nur eingestellt werden wenn - eine Spaltenbreite angegeben ist. - Eine angegebene Spaltenbreite erlaubt es in der Zelle Zeilenumbrüche und - mehrere Absätze zu haben, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tabellenzellen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann mehrere Zellen einer Zeile/Spalte als Mehrfachspalten-/Mehrfachzeilenze -lle markieren, indem man die Option -\family sans -Mehrfachspalte -\family default - oder -\family sans -Mehrfachzeile -\family default - verwendet. - Dies vereint die Zellen zu -\emph on -einer -\emph default - Zelle, die sich über mehrere Zeilen/Spalten erstreckt. - Mehrfachspaltenzellen werden als eigene Zeilen behandelt, so dass die Ausrichtu -ngs-, Breiten-, und Linieneinstellungen nur die Mehrfachspaltenzelle betrifft. - Hier ist eine Beispieltabelle mit einer Mehrfachspaltenzelle in der ersten - Zeile und einer in der letzten Zeile ohne obere Linie: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -abc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -def ghi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -jkl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -A -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -B -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -C -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -D -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Versierte Nutzer können spezielle LaTeX-Argumente für die Tabelle angeben. - Diese sind für besondere Formatierungen wie Mehrfachzellen nötig, die im - Kapitel -\emph on -Tabellen -\emph default - des Handbuchs -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - erklärt sind. - Man kann außerdem die aktuelle Zelle oder die ganze Tabelle um 90 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Grad gegen den Uhrzeigersinn drehen. - Diese Rotationen sind in LyX nicht sichtbar, aber in der Ausgabe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Viele DVI-Betrachter können -\emph on -keine -\emph default - Rotationen darstellen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In der Karteikarte -\family sans -Rahmenlinien -\family default - können Linien für die aktuelle Zeile/Spalte hinzugefügt und entfernt werden. - Der Knopf -\family sans -Festlegen -\family default - fügt Linien um alle Zellen ein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Lange Tabellen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tabellen ! lange -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn eine Tabelle zu lang ist, um auf eine Seite zu passen, können Sie im - Dialogfenster -\family sans -Tabellen-Einstellungen -\family default - auf der Karteikarte -\family sans -Lange -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tabelle -\family default - die Option -\family sans -Lange -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tabelle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -verwenden -\family default - aktivieren, damit die Tabelle automatisch auf mehrere Seiten verteilt wird. - Wird dies gemacht, werden folgende Optionen freigeschaltet: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kopfzeile: Die aktuelle Zeile wird als eine Überschrifts-Zeile aller Seiten - festgelegt; mit Ausnahme der ersten, wenn -\family sans -Erste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Kopfzeile -\family default - aktiviert ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Erste -\lang english - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\lang ngerman -Kopfzeile: Die aktuelle Zeile wird als eine Überschrifts-Zeile der ersten - Seite einer mehrseitigen Tabelle definiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fußzeile: Die aktuelle Zeile wird als eine Fußzeile aller Seiten festgelegt; - mit Ausnahme der letzten, wenn -\family sans -Letzte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Fußzeile -\family default - aktiviert ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Letzte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Fußzeile: Die aktuelle Zeile wird als eine die Fußzeile der letzten Seite - einer mehrseitigen Tabelle definiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Legende: Die aktuelle Zeile enthält die Legende. - Sie wird als einzelne Spalte zurückgesetzt und eine Beschriftung wird über - das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Legende -\family default - eingefügt. - Mehr über Beschriftungen langer Tabellen ist im Handbuch -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können zudem eine Zeile angeben, an der die Tabelle gebrochen wird. - Wenn Sie mehr als eine Option für eine Tabellenzeile verwenden, sollten - Sie sich bewusst sein, dass dann nur die erste angegebene Option verwendet - wird, die anderen Optionen werden als -\emph on -leer -\emph default - definiert. - In diesem Zusammenhang bedeutet zuerst das Zuerst in dieser Reihenfolge: - -\family sans -Fußzeile, Letzte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Fußzeile, -\family default - -\family sans -Kopfzeile, -\family default - -\family sans -Erste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Kopfzeile -\family default -; siehe die folgende Lange Tabelle als Beispiel wie es funktioniert: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Telefonliste (ignoriere die Namen) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -NAME -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Telefonliste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -NAME -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -wird fortgesetzt -\series default - \SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -999 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -End -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tabellenzellen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Tabellenzellen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tabellen ! zellen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine Tabellenzelle kann Text, eingebettete Formeln, ein Bild oder eine andere - Tabelle enthalten. - All diese Arten von Objekten können in dieselbe Zelle gepackt werden. - Schriftgrößen und -schnitte können ebenfalls eingestellt werden. - Man kann aber keine speziellen Umgebungen (wie -\family sans -Abschnitt* -\family default -, u. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Ä.) einfügen oder Ausrichtungsoptionen für den Absatz der Zelle festlegen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um mehrzeilige Einträge in Tabellenzellen zu erstellen, muss man eine feste - Breite für die Spalte im Tabellendialog angegeben haben. - Der Text wird dann automatisch in mehrere Zeilen aufgeteilt und die Zelle - vertikal vergrößert, wenn die angegebene Breite überschritten wird. - Ein Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dies ist ein mehrzeiliger Eintrag in einer Tabelle. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -5 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -6 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dieser ist nun länger. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -7 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -8 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dies ist ein mehrzeiliger Eintrag in einer Tabelle. - Dieser ist nun länger. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -9 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Kopieren und Ersetzen funktioniert zwischen Tabellen und Tabellenzellen - gut; man kann sogar mehrere Zeilen kopieren und einfügen. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Man beachte, dass man nicht in eine Auswahl mehrerer Zellen kopieren kann, - denn es wäre nicht klar wohin ein einzelnes Wort in einer Auswahl von 2×3 - Zellen kopiert werden soll. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Das Auswählen mit der Maus oder mit -\family sans -Umschalt -\family default - plus den Pfeiltasten funktioniert wie gewohnt. - Man kann auch ganze Tabellen kopieren indem man die Auswahl außerhalb der - Tabelle beginnt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Gleitobjekte -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Gleitobjekte" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gleitobjekte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einführung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein Gleitobjekt ist ein Teil eines Dokuments, das keinen festen Platz hat. - Es kann eine oder mehrere Seiten vorwärts oder rückwärts -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -gleiten -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, dahin wo es am besten passt. - -\family sans -Fußnoten -\family default - und -\family sans -Randnotizen -\family default - sind ebenfalls Gleitobjekte, da sie zur nächsten Seite gleiten falls zu - viele Fußnoten/Notizen auf der aktuellen Seite sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Gleitobjekte ermöglichen ein qualitativ hochwertiges Layout. - Bilder und Tabellen können gleichmäßig über die Seiten verteilt werden - um Leerraum und Seiten ohne Text zu vermeiden. - Da das Gleiten oft den räumlichen Bezug zwischen dem Text und dem Bild -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -der Tabelle zerstört, kann jedes Gleitobjekt im Text referenziert werden. - Gleitobjekte sind daher nummeriert. - Referenzierungen/Querverweise sind Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Querverweise" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um ein Gleitobjekt einzufügen, verwendet man das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Gleitobjekt -\family default -. - Eine Box mit einer Legende, die z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - die Beschriftung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Abbildung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -#: -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - hat (# ist die aktuelle Nummer) wird in das Dokument eingefügt. - Die Beschriftung wird automatisch in der Ausgabe in die Dokumentsprache - übersetzt. - Nach der Beschriftung kann man einen Text für die Legende eingeben. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gleitobjekte ! Legende -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Das Bild oder die Tabelle wird über oder unter der Legende in einen eigenen - Absatz innerhalb des Gleitobjekts eingefügt. - Um LyX-Dokumente lesbar zu halten, können Gleitobjekt-Boxen durch Links-klicken - auf die Box-Beschriftung geöffnet und geschlossen werden. - Eine geschlossene Gleitobjekt-Box sieht wie diese aus: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/GleitobjektQt4.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - - – ein grauer Knopf mit roter Beschriftung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es wird empfohlen Gleitobjekte als separaten Absatz einzufügen um mögliche - LaTeX-Fehler zu vermeiden, die auftreten können, wenn der umgebende Text - besonders formatiert ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Beispiele -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gleitobjekte ! Abbildung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Abbildung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Ein-verzerrtes-Schnabeltier" - -\end_inset - - wurde mit dem Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Gleitobjekt\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Abbildung -\family default - oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert figure" -\end_inset - - erstellt. - Das Bild wurde eingefügt, indem der Cursor über die Beschriftung gesetzt - wurde und dann das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Grafik -\family default - oder der Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - verwendet wurde. - Das Bild wurde horizontal im Gleitobjekt zentriert, indem der Cursor vor - oder hinter das Bild gesetzt wurde und dann das Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Absatz-Einstellungen -\family default - oder der Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - - benutzt wurde. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/platypus.eps - lyxscale 50 - width 50col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Ein-verzerrtes-Schnabeltier" - -\end_inset - -Ein verzerrtes Schnabeltier in einem Gleitobjekt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Abbildungs-Gleitobjekt zeigt außerdem, wie man eine Marke einfügt - und diese referenziert: Man fügt eine Marke in die Beschriftung über das - Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marke -\family default - oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - - ein und verweist darauf mit dem Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Querverweis -\family default - oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -. - Es ist wichtig Querverweise für Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte zu verwenden, und - nicht vage Formulierungen wie -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -die obige Abbildung -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, denn LaTeX wird die Gleitobjekte in der Ausgabe neu anordnen, so dass - sie nicht mehr -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -obig -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - sein muss. - Für mehr über Querverweise siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Querverweise" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalerweise wird nur ein Bild in ein Abbildungs-Gleitobjekt eingefügt - aber manchmal will man zwei Bilder mit eigenen Beschriftungen haben. - Dies wird erreicht, indem man ein Abbildungs-Gleitobjekt in ein existierendes - Abbildungs-Gleitobjekt einfügt. - Dabei ist zu beachten, dass nur die Hauptbeschriftung des Gleitobjekts - in die Liste der Abbildungen, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Verzeichnisse" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben, eingefügt wird. - Abbildung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Zwei-verzerrte-Bilder" - -\end_inset - - ist ein Beispiel eines Abbildungs-Gleitobjekts mit zwei Bildern nebeneinander. - Man kann die Bilder auch untereinander setzen. - Abbildung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Undefinierbar" - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Schnabeltier" - -\end_inset - - sind die Untergleitobjekte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Undefinierbar" - -\end_inset - -Undefinierbar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Schnabeltier" - -\end_inset - -Schnabeltier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/platypus.eps - lyxscale 60 - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Zwei-verzerrte-Bilder" - -\end_inset - -Zwei verzerrte Bilder. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Tabellen-Gleitobjekt -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gleitobjekte ! Tabelle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Tabellen-Gleitobjekte können über das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Gleitobjekt\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tabelle -\family default - oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert table" -\end_inset - - eingefügt werden. - Sie haben dieselben Eigenschaften wie Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte bis auf dass - die Tabelle darin normalerweise unter die Beschriftung statt wie bei Abbildunge -n darüber gesetzt wird und dass die Marken mit -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -tab: -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - beginnen. - Tabelle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" - -\end_inset - - ist ein Tabellen-Gleitobjekt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" - -\end_inset - -Ein Tabellen-Gleitobjekt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Joe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mary -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ted -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -a & b\\ -c & d -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Weitere Informationen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gleitobjekte ! Details -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX unterstützt weitere Gleitobjekt-Typen und auch rotierte Gleitobjekte. - Des Weiteren kann das Nummerierungsschema, die Gleitobjekt-Platzierung - und die Formatierung der Beschriftung geändert werden. - All diese Features sind im Detail in Kapitel -\emph on -Gleitobjekte -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs mit vielen Beispielen beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Minipage -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Minipage" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Minipage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX bietet einen Mechanismus an, um im Prinzip eine Seite innerhalb einer - Seite zu erstellen, eine sogenannte Minipage. - Innerhalb einer Minipage gelten alle üblichen Regeln wie die des Einzugs - oder der Silbentrennung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Minipages haben in LyX ihre eigene schließbare Box, die mit dem Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Box -\family default - eingefügt wird. - Per Rechts-klicken auf die Boxmarke kann die Breite und Ausrichtung der - Minipage eingestellt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "30col%" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -Dies ist eine Minipage. - Der Text ist kursiv gesetzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -Minipages werden häufig für Text in einer anderen Sprache verwendet oder - für Text mit besonderen Formatierungen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -Wenn man zwei Minipages nebeneinander setzt, kann man -\family sans -HFills -\family default -, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Horizontaler-Leerraum" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben, verwenden: -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -\emph on -Dies ist eine Minipage -\shape default -\emph default - mit sinnlosem Text. - Dieser Sinnlostext wird verwendet um die Minipage zu vergrößern. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -\emph on -Dies ist eine Minipage -\shape default -\emph default - mit sinnlosem Text. - Dieser Sinnlostext wird verwendet um die Minipage zu vergrößern. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Klickt man mit rechts auf eine Minipage-Box, kann man die Box in einen anderen - Boxtyp umwandeln. - Alle Box-Typen und ihre Einstellungen sind im Detail in Kapitel -\emph on -Boxen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Mathematische Formeln -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mathematische!Formeln -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:Mathematische-Formeln" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alle Themen dieses Kapitels sind im Detail im -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default - Handbuch beschrieben. - Dort finden Sie außerdem Tipps und Tricks für spezielle Fälle. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Grundlagen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um eine Formel zu erstellen, klickt man einfach auf den Werkzeugleistenknopf - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-mode on" -\end_inset - - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+M -\family default -). - Dies erzeugt ein kleines, blaues Rechteck mit violetten Markierungen an - den Ecken. - Das blaue Rechteck ist die Formel, die Markierungen geben an, wo in der - Formel man sich befindet. - Man kann auch direkt einen bestimmten Formeltyp über das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe -\family default - einfügen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Bearbeiten von Formelparametern und das Hinzufügen von Mathe-Konstrukten - kann man über die -\family sans -Mathe -\family default -Werkzeugleiste machen, die erscheint, wenn der Cursor in einer Formel ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt zwei Haupttypen von Formeln, eingebettete und abgesetzte. - Eingebettete Formeln erscheinen innerhalb einer Textzeile, so wie diese: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dies ist eine Zeile mit einer -\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ -\end_inset - - eingebetteten Formel. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Abgesetzte Formeln erscheinen außerhalb des Textes, als wären sie in einem - eigenen Absatz, so wie diese: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -A=B -\] - -\end_inset - -Nur abgesetzte Formeln können nummeriert und referenziert werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX unterstützt auch viele LaTeX-Mathebefehle. - Tippt man z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -alpha -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - gefolgt von einem Leerzeichen in eine Formel ein, wird der griechische - Buchstabe -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ -\end_inset - - erzeugt. - Befehle einzugeben ist oft schneller als die -\family sans -Mathe -\family default -Werkzeugleiste zu verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Wie man sich in einer Formel -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - bewegt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können auf eine existierende Gleichung klicken und den Cursor in etwa - dort vorfinden, wo Sie geklickt haben. - In einer existierenden Formel hat man mit den Pfeiltasten die beste Kontrolle - über die Cursorposition. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Pfeiltasten können benutzt werden, um sich in einer Struktur zwischen - Textgebieten zu bewegen. - Wenn man eine Pfeiltaste am Rande einer Formel drückt, verlässt man die - Formel, wenn der Pfeil aus dem Formel-Kästchen herauszeigt. - Wenn man die -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default - drückt, verlässt man einen Teil oder eine andere Formel-Struktur (eine - Quadratwurzel -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ -\end_inset - -, Klammern -\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ -\end_inset - - oder eine Matrix -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - -), und bleibt innerhalb der Formel. - Mit -\family sans -Esc -\family default - verlässt man Formeln, und der Cursor wird rechts vom Kästchen platziert. - Mit der -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default - kann man Formeln auch verlassen, aber der Cursor wird um eine Leerstelle - neben dem Kästchen gestellt (wenn keine Leerstelle dort war, wird sie erzeugt). - -\family sans -Tab -\family default - kann benutzt werden, um sich waagerecht in einer Formel-Struktur zu bewegen, - wie in den Zeilen einer Matrix oder den Stellen in einer mehrzeiligen Gleichung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default - scheint nichts innerhalb von Formeln zu bewirken, weil sie wirklich keinen - Zwischenraum zwischen Zeichen hinzufügt, aber sie verlässt eine geschachtelte - Struktur. - Deshalb muss man mit der -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default - vorsichtig sein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn man zum Beispiel -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ -\end_inset - - erreichen will, muss man -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -2x+1 -\series default -eingeben und nicht -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -2x -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -+ -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -1 -\series default -, weil dann nur die -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Formula $2x$ -\end_inset - - -\family default - unter dem Wurzelzeichen stehen würden: -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ -\end_inset - -. - Diejenigen, die es gewohnt sind, Ausdrücke auf diese Weise mit Zwischenräumen - zu versehen, müssen ein wenig umlernen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Da wir über die -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default - sprechen: es mag sein, dass Sie Leerzeichen erzeugen wollen, die über das - hinausgehen, was LaTeX normalerweise erzeugt. - Wir empfehlen das natürlich nicht, weil das WYSIWYM-Prinzip bedeutet, dass - Sie nicht über den Schriftsatz nachdenken sollen, sondern über den Inhalt. - Es mag aber Situationen geben, in denen Sie wirklich Leerzeichen hinzufügen - wollen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das kann man mit -\family sans -Strg+Leertaste -\family default - machen. - Das erzeugt einen kleinen Zwischenraum und zeigt ihn auf dem Bildschirm - wie eine auf dem Rücken liegende eckige rote Klammer an: -\begin_inset Formula $a\text{{\color{red}\leer}}b$ -\end_inset - -. - Gedruckt sieht das so aus: -\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ -\end_inset - -. - Mit dem nächstes Trick ändert man die Größe. - -\emph on -Bevor -\emph default - Sie nach -\family sans -Strg+Leertaste -\family default - den Cursor bewegen, drücken Sie die -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default - erneut ein- oder mehrere Male, das vergrößert den Zwischenraum auf unterschiedl -iche Größen: -\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ -\end_inset - -. - Als letztes gibt es den roten, negativen Zwischenraum: -\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann viele teilweise gefüllte Formel-Strukturen wie diese Matrix verlassen: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -\lambda_{1}\\ - & \ddots\\ - & & \lambda_{n} -\end{array}\right). -\] - -\end_inset - -Wenn Sie eine Teilstruktur, die nur teilweise gefüllt ist, verlassen oder - einen Exponenten mit nichts darin, wird das Ergebnis unvorhersehbar, aber - die meisten Objekte stört das nicht. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Text auswählen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mathe- ! Text auswählen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Innerhalb von Formeln können Sie Text auf zwei verschiedene Arten auswählen. - Stellen Sie den Cursor an das eine Ende der Zeichenkette, die Sie auswählen - wollen, und drücken Sie -\family sans -Umschalt+Pfeil -\family default - in der Richtung, in der Sie markieren wollen. - Der markierte Text wird wie sonst auch hervorgehoben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Oder Sie machen es wie gewohnt mit der Maus, obwohl dabei manchmal alles - im purpurnen Rechteck markiert wird. - Den markierten Text können Sie dann kopieren oder ausschneiden und in eine - andere Formel einsetzen. - Auch Text, der außerhalb von LyX ausgewählt wurde, kann in eine Formel - eingesetzt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Exponenten -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Exponenten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Indizes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Indizes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können die -\family sans -Mathe-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - benutzen um Hoch- oder Tiefstellungen zu erzeugen (Knöpfe -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-superscript" -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-subscript" -\end_inset - -), aber viel einfacher geht es mit der normalen TeX-Methode. - Um -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - - zu erhalten, geben Sie -\series bold -x^2 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default - ein. - Die -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default - bringt den Cursor zurück auf die Grundlinie des Ausdrucks. - Wenn Sie -\series bold -x^2y -\series default - eingeben, erhalten Sie -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ -\end_inset - -; um -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ -\end_inset - - zu erhalten, müssen Sie -\series bold -x^2 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -y -\series default - eingeben. - Wenn Sie Zeichen in der Hochstellung haben, die mit dem Zirkumflex -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -^ -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - akzentuiert werden können, müssen Sie die -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default - ein weiteres Mal drücken um den Zirkumflex vom Zeichen zu trennen. - Wenn Sie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - -\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ -\end_inset - - haben wollen, geben Sie -\series bold -x^ -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -a -\series default - ein. - Indizes sind ähnlich: um -\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ -\end_inset - - zu erhalten, müssen Sie in eine Formel -\series bold -a_1 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default - eingeben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Brüche -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bruche@Brüche -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einen Bruch kann man mit -\series bold - -\backslash -frac -\series default - oder mit dem Bruchsymbol -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\frac" -\end_inset - -aus der -\family sans -Mathe-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - schreiben. - Sie erhalten einen leeren Bruch mit zwei blauen Formel-Kästchen über und - unter einem Bruchstrich. - Der Cursor steht im Zähler. - Mit der -\begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$ -\end_inset - --Taste gelangt man in den Nenner, mit der -\begin_inset Formula $\uparrow$ -\end_inset - --Taste wieder in den Zähler. - Jede mathematische Struktur kann in einen Bruch geschrieben werden, wie - dieses Beispiel zeigt: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} -2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 -\end{array}\right)}\right] -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Wurzeln -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Wurzeln -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wurzeln erhält man, wenn man auf das Symbol -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\sqrt" -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\root" -\end_inset - - in der -\family sans -Mathe-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - klickt, oder die Befehle -\family typewriter - -\backslash -sqrt -\family default - oder -\family typewriter - -\backslash -root -\family default - benutzt. - Ersteres liefert nur Quadratwurzeln, letzteres beliebige. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Summen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Summen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Integrale -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Integrale -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Summen- und Integralzeichen -\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Formula $\int$ -\end_inset - - werden sehr oft mit Grenzen versehen, die in LyX (wie in LaTeX) als Exponenten - und Indizes geschrieben werden. - Bei Summen in der Zeile werden die Grenzen automatisch neben dem Summenzeichen - platziert wie bei -\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ -\end_inset - -, bei abgesetzten Formeln hingegen über und unter dem Summenzeichen: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\sum_{n=1}^{\infty}\frac{x^{n}}{n}=\ln\left(\frac{1}{1-x}\right). -\] - -\end_inset - -Bei Integralen werden die Grenzen immer neben dem Integralzeichen platziert - wie in -\begin_inset Formula $\int_{a}^{x}f(t)dt:=F(x)$ -\end_inset - -, bei abgesetzten Formeln sieht es so aus: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\int_{-\infty}^{\infty}\frac{dx}{1+x^{2}}=\pi. -\] - -\end_inset - -Beide Symbole werden automatisch angepasst. - Man kann die Platzierung der Grenzen (direkt über und unter oder rechts - neben dem Zeichen) umschalten, indem man den Cursor direkt vor das Zeichen - stellt und -\family sans -Alt+M -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\family default - eingibt. - Wie die Änderung genau aussieht, hängt vom Zeichen ab. - Einige andere mathematische Ausdrücke besitzen diese Automatik-Funktion - auch, wie -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x), -\] - -\end_inset - -bei dem -\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ -\end_inset - - unter dem -\emph on -lim -\emph default - bei abgesetzten Formeln platziert wird, aber in der Zeile daneben: -\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ -\end_inset - -. - Das -\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ -\end_inset - --Zeichen hat eine besondere Bedeutung. - In LaTeX wird es als Sonderobjekt behandelt, damit es Indizes wie beschrieben - darstellen kann. - In LyX erhält man es mit -\series bold - -\backslash -lim -\series default - in einer Formel oder indem man es aus den -\family sans -Funktionen -\family default - im Menü -\family sans -Mathe-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - auswählt. - Andere Spezialworte sind trigonometrische Funktionen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sub:Mathematische-Funktionen" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mathematische Symbole -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mathematische!Symbole -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die meisten mathematischen Symbole sind in der -\family sans -Mathe -\family default -Werkzeugleiste unter einer der verschiedenen Kategorien wie -\family sans -Griechisch -\family default -, -\family sans -Operatoren -\family default -, -\family sans -Relationen -\family default -, -\family sans -Pfeile -\family default - zu finden. - Dort gibt es außerdem zusätzliche Symbole, die von der Amerikanisch Mathematisc -hen Gesellschaft (AMS) zu Verfügung gestellt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie den LaTeX-Befehl für ein Konstrukt oder ein Symbol kennen, müssen - Sie nicht die -\family sans -Mathe -\family default -Werkzeugleiste benutzen sondern können den Befehl direkt in die Formel eingeben. - LyX wird ihn in das entsprechnde Konstrukt oder Symbol konvertieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Leerraum ändern -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Will man Leerraum erzeugen, der sich von LaTeXs Standard-Leerraum unterscheidet, - drückt man -\family sans -Strg+Leertaste -\family default - oder den -\family sans -Mathe -\family default - Werkzeugleistenknopf -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\space" -\end_inset - - -\family default -. - Dies erzeugt einen kleinen Leerraum mit einer Marke zur Visualisierung. - Zum Beispiel erscheint die Sequenz -\series bold -a Strg+Leertaste b -\series default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ -\end_inset - - in LyX als -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png - -\end_inset - -. - Man kann verschiedenen Größen für den Leerraum anwählen, indem man den - Cursor hinter die Marke setzt und mehrfach die Leertaste drückt. - Mit jedem Drücken der Leertaste wird die Größe verändert. - Die Marke erscheint für einige Größen rot, da diese Größen negativen Leerraum - darstellen. - Hier sind zwei Beispiele: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Strg+Leertaste b -\series default - und 3× -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Strg+Leertaste b -\series default - und 5× -\family sans -Leertaste -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mathematische Funktionen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mathematische!Funktionen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Mathematische-Funktionen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Funktionen wie -\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ -\end_inset - -, usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -kann man entweder mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\functions" -\end_inset - - -\family default - oder mit Befehlen wie -\series bold - -\backslash -sin -\series default - usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -eintippen. - Standardmäßig werden Funktionen, die Namen sind wie -\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ -\end_inset - -, nicht kursiv geschrieben. - Gibt man in einer Formel aber nur die Buchstaben -\begin_inset Formula $sin$ -\end_inset - - ein, sind sie natürlich kursiv. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Deshalb gibt es diese besonderen Makros. - In der Druckausgabe bewirken sie aber mehr als nur die Schriftform zu ändern. - Zum Beispiel bekommt der Ausdruck -\emph on -sint -\emph default - zusätzlichen Leerraum zwischen sin und t: -\begin_inset Formula $\sin t$ -\end_inset - -. - Bei komplexeren mathematischen Objekten wie -\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ -\end_inset - - bestimmt das Makro, wo die Bedingung platziert wird, ob neben das Wort - lim als Index wie hier: -\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow0}f(x)=L$ -\end_inset - - oder darunter wie hier: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\lim_{x\rightarrow0}f(x)=L. -\] - -\end_inset - - Beide Ausdrücke wurden exakt gleich eingetippt, nur die Art, wie das lim-Makro - benutzt wurde, entschied über die Darstellung (in diesem Fall wurde das - Makro für die Darstellung in der Zeile geändert, damit der Zeilenabstand - besser aussieht). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Akzente -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Akzente -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Mathe-Modus setzt man Akzente wie im normalen Textmodus. - Wie das gemacht wird, kann von Ihrer Tastatur und Ihrer Tastaturdatei abhängen. - Sie können aber auch die LaTeX-Äquivalente als Makros benutzen. - Wenn Ihre Tastatur keine Akzente ermöglicht, können Sie zum Beispiel in - Formeln -\series bold - -\backslash -hat{a -\series default - eintippen, um -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - - zu erhalten. - Tabelle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Akzente" - -\end_inset - - enthält die Akzentnamen im Textmodus, in Formeln und Beispiele für die - Akzente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Akzente" - -\end_inset - -Akzente -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Akzente -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Name -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Befehl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Beispiel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -circumflex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -hat -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -acute -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -acute -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -umlaut -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -ddot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -dot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -dot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -breve -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -breve -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -caron -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -check -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -macron -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -bar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -vector -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -vector -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können die Akzente auch über das Untermenü -\family sans -Rahmen-Verzierungen -\family default - des Mathe-Werkzeugleistenknopfs -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\hat" -\end_inset - - auswählen. - Dies wirkt auch auf markierte Bereiche in Formeln. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Klammern -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Klammern -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Dekorationen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dekorationen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Klammern-und-Dekos" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt in LyX mehrere Klammerarten. - Für die meisten Zwecke sollte es genügen, nur die Tasten -\family typewriter -[{]}()| -\backslash -<> -\family default - zu drücken. - Aber die Wirkung ist besser, wenn Sie die -\family sans - Mathe-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - benutzen, insbesondere, wenn Sie große Strukturen wie Matrizen oder Brüche - in Klammern setzen wollen, oder wenn Sie mehrere Klammernschichten haben. - So zum Beispiel würden Sie Klammern um eine Matrix setzen: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right]. -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -In Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Matrizen-mehrzeilige-Gleichungen" - -\end_inset - - steht ausführlich beschrieben, wie man das im Einzelnen macht. - Auch erkennt man mehrere Klammernschichten besser bei Ausdrücken wie -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{equation} -\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\label{eq:Bruch} -\end{equation} - -\end_inset - -oder -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f\left(g\left(h\left(k\left(l\left(x\right)\right)\right)\right)\right). -\] - -\end_inset - -Die Klammern aus dem Menü werden automatisch an die Größe ihres Inhaltes - angepasst. - (Das wird direkt mit den LaTeX-Befehlen -\series bold - -\backslash -left( bla -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bla -\backslash -right) -\series default - erreicht.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es ist sehr einfach, die gewünschten Klammern zu bekommen. - Klicken Sie in der automatischen -\family sans -Mathe-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - auf -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/math/delim.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -, um das -\family sans -Mathe-Trennzeichen -\family default --Menü zu öffnen. - Sie müssen links das Klammersymbol, das Sie links haben wollen, auswählen, - rechts das, das Sie rechts haben wollen, und schließlich zum Einsetzen - auf den Knopf -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie auf einer Seite keine Klammer haben wollen, wählen Sie das leere - Symbol. - In LyX wird es als gestrichelte senkrechte Linie angezeigt, in der Druckausgabe - ist nichts zu sehen. - Wenn Sie links und rechts die zugehörige Klammer haben wollen, können Sie - -\family sans -Zusammenpassend -\family default - ankreuzen und müssen nur eine Klammer auswählen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Schließlich können Sie noch zwischen 5 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Klammergrößen wählen. - -\family sans -Variabel -\family default - sollte meistens die richtige Wahl sein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie sich erst nachträglich entschließen, eine mathematische Struktur - mit Klammern, anderen mathematischen Symbolen oder Verzierungen zu versehen, - können Sie das tun, indem Sie das, was innerhalb der Klammern usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -stehen soll, markieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dazu stellen Sie den Cursor links oder rechts neben Ihre Auswahl, drücken - die -\family sans -Umschalt -\family default --Taste und gehen mit den Pfeiltasten in die gewünschte Richtung. - Sie können natürlich auch mit der Maus markieren. - Dann wählen Sie die gewünschten Klammern für links und rechts und klicken - auf -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default -. - Die Klammern werden um die markierte Struktur gesetzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Matrizen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matrizen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und mehrzeilige Gleichungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gleichungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Matrizen-mehrzeilige-Gleichungen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Matrizenähnliche Gebilde kann man in LyX einfach eingeben. - Entweder wählen Sie -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Array-Umgebung -\family default -: dann bekommen Sie automatisch eine 2x2-Matrix, oder Sie klicken in der - automatischen -\family sans -Mathe-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - den Knopf -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" -\end_inset - - -\family default - an, der das Menü -\family sans -Mathe-Matrix -\family default - öffnet, in dem Sie verschiedene Optionen setzen können. - Hier ist ein Beispiel: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -1 & 2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 & 6\\ -7 & 8 & 9 -\end{array}\right). -\] - -\end_inset - -Die Klammern werden nicht automatisch eingefügt, sondern müssen mit dem - -\family sans -Mathe-Trenn\SpecialChar \- -zeichen -\family default --Menü hinzugefügt werden. - Das können Sie nachträglich machen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sec:Klammern-und-Dekos" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können festlegen, ob die Spalten einer Matrix (oder Teile davon) links- - oder rechtsbündig oder zentriert ausgerichtet werden sollen. - Die Voreinstellung ist zentriert -\family sans -. - -\family default - Bei anderen und verschiedenen Ausrichtungen müssen Sie die entsprechende - Buchstabenkombinationen aus -\family typewriter -l -\family default -, -\family typewriter -c -\family default - und -\family typewriter -r -\family default - in das Feld -\family sans -Ausrichtung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Horizontal -\family default - eingeben. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family typewriter -rlc -\family default - bedeutet: Spalte 1 rechtsbündig, Spalte 2 linksbündig und Spalte 3 zentriert. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Außerdem können Sie den Inhalt der Zeilen -\family sans -Vertikal -\family default - ausrichten, voreingestellt ist -\family sans -Mitte -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn der Cursor in der Matrix steht, können Sie über -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe -\family default - oder die 4 rechten Knöpfe in der Mathe-Werkzeugleiste Zeilen und Spalten - hinzufügen oder löschen. - Hier ist ein anderes Beispiel mit unterschiedlichen Ausrichtungen: -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Das -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -ü -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - erhält man übrigens durch -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - - -\backslash -ddot u -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - oder "u, aber "u wird in LyX -\emph on -nicht -\emph default - als ü dargestellt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\begin{array}{lcr} -diese & diese & diese\\ -Spalte & Spalte & Spalte\\ -ist\: linksb\ddot{u}ndig & ist\: zentriert & ist\: rechtsb\ddot{u}ndig -\end{array}. -\] - -\end_inset - -Der LaTeX- -\family typewriter -Mathe-Modus -\family default - hat viele Matrizenarten, insbesondere bietet das AMS-LaTeX-Paket zum Beispiel - -\series bold - -\backslash -cases -\series default - und kommutative Diagramme. - Hier ist ein einfaches Beispiel, wie LyX Bedingungen (LaTeX -\series bold - -\backslash -cases -\series default -) darstellen kann: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray*} -f(x) & := & \begin{cases} -\frac{1}{q} & \mathrm{f}\ddot{\mathrm{u}}\mathrm{r}\, x=\frac{p}{q}\,(\mathrm{p},\,\mathrm{q}\,\,\mathrm{ganzzahlig})\\ -0 & \mathrm{falls}\, x\,\mathrm{irrational}\,\mathrm{ist} -\end{cases} -\end{eqnarray*} - -\end_inset - -Dies wurde folgendermaßen erreicht: zuerst wurde eine Gleichungs-Umgebung - gewählt ( -\family sans -Ein\SpecialChar \- -fü\SpecialChar \- -gen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Eqnarray-Umgebung -\family default -), in die linken beiden Kästchen f(x) und := geschrieben. - Ins rechte Kästchen wurde eine Bedingungs-Umgebung ( -\family sans -Ein\SpecialChar \- -fü\SpecialChar \- -gen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cases-Umgebung -\family default -) eingefügt und mit -\family sans -Strg+Eingabe -\family default - zwei Zeilen erzeugt. - In die beiden blauen Kästchen wurde dann alles rechts der geschweiften - Klammer geschrieben. - Wie man die Roman-Schrift bekommt, wird später erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mehrzeilige Gleichungen kann man mit LyX sehr einfach schreiben ( -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Eqnarray-Umgebung -\family default -). - Dadurch wird das LaTeX-Format -\family typewriter -eqnarray -\family default - für mehrzeilige Gleichungen eingeschaltet. - Innerhalb des Kästchens tippt man -\family sans -Strg+Ein\SpecialChar \- -gabe -\family default - so oft, bis man die Zahl der gewünschten Zeilen hat, am besten als erstes. - Jede Zeile hat drei Gebiete, links, Mitte, rechts, zwischen denen Sie sich - mit den Pfeiltasten, der Maus oder der -\family sans -Tab -\family default --Taste bewegen können. - Hier ist ein Beispiel: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray*} -3 & = & 1+2\\ -4+5 & = & 9 -\end{eqnarray*} - -\end_inset - -Man kann auch eine vorhandene abgesetzte Formel in eine mehrzeilige umändern, - indem man irgendwo in der Formel -\family sans -\series medium -Strg+Eingabe -\family default -\series default - tippt. - LyX wird alles in den linken Teil der mehrzeiligen Gleichung packen, wobei - alles links vom Cursor in die erste Zeile kommt, der Rest in die zweite. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alles rechts vom Cursor wird dann in den mittleren Teil der Gleichung gepackt - (LaTeX setzt den mittleren Teil übrigens nicht wie normale Formeln, deshalb - sollten Sie dort keine großen Ausdrücke wie Brüche schreiben). - Stellen Sie dann den Cursor dorthin, wo der rechte Teil beginnen soll, - und tippen nochmals -\family sans -Strg+Tab -\family default -. - Der -\emph on -zusätzliche -\emph default - Einfügepunkt in der Zeile verschwindet dann. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine ganze Zeile der Gleichung kann man löschen, indem man den Cursor in - die Zeile stellt und -\family sans -Alt+M -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -W -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -D -\family default - tippt. - Weitere Zeilen fügt man mit -\family sans -Strg+Eingabe -\family default - hinzu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Gleichungen nummerieren -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gleichungen!nummerieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und markieren -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gleichungen!markieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Gleichungen-numerieren-markieren" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um eine Gleichung zu nummerieren, setzt man den Cursor in eine Gleichung - und verwendet das Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ganze -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nummerieren -\family default - oder das Tastenkürzel -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - -. - Die Nummer der Gleichung erscheint in LyX in Klammern dahinter. - Die angezeigte Nummer ist nur temporär und kann in der Ausgabe anders aussehen. - Die Position und das Format der Nummer in der Ausgabe hängt von der Dokumentkla -sse ab. - In diesem Dokument wird die Nummer zusammen mit der Kapitelnummer ausgegeben, - von der sie durch einen Punkt getrennt ist.: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{equation} -1+1=2 -\end{equation} - -\end_inset - -Die Verwendung von -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - - in einer nummerierten Gleichung schaltet die Nummerierung aus. - Man kann nur abgesetzte Formeln nummerieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mehrzeilige Formeln können Zeile für Zeile nummeriert werden: Das Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Diese -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Zeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nummerieren -\family default - oder das Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Alt+M -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Umschalt+N -\family default - nummeriert nur die Zeile, in der sich der Cursor befindet: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -1 & = & 3-2\\ -2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ -4 & \leq & 7 -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -Um alle Zeilen zu nummerieren, verwendet man das Tastenkürzel -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - -Jede abgesetzte Formel kann mit ihrer Nummer durch eine Marke referenziert - werden. - Eine Marke wird mit dem Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marke -\family default - (Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - -) eingefügt, wenn sich der Cursor in der Gleichung befindet. - Es erscheint ein Dialog, in den man die Marke eingibt. - Es ist empfohlen, dass man das vorgeschlagene -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eq: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - als ersten Teil der Marke verwendet, da dies später hilft, schnell den - Typ der Marke zu finden, wenn man viele Marken im Dokument hat. - Wir haben im folgenden Beispiel die Marke -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -eq:tanhExp -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - in der zweiten Zeile eingegeben: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ - & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -Jede markierte Zeile wird automatisch nummeriert. - Daher wird die Marke hinter der Nummer angezeigt. - Mit dem Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Querverweis -\family default - (Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -) kann man auf eine markierte Gleichung verweisen. - Es öffnet sich ein Dialog in dem man eine Marke auswählen kann. - Der Querverweis erscheint in LyX als graue Querverweis-Box und in der Ausgabe - als Nummer: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dies ist ein Querverweis auf Gleichung ( -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "eq:tanhExp" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Eigenschaften von LyXs Querverweis-Box sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Querverweise" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. - Um eine Marke zu entfernen, setzt man den Cursor ans Ende in die Gleichung - und drückt die -\family sans -Entf -\family default --Taste. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Benutzerdefinierte Mathe-Makros -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Makros -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX erlaubt dem Benutzer, Makros zu definieren. - Dies ist von großem Nutzen wenn man in einem Dokument mehrfach denselben - Formeltyp hat. - Mathe-Makros sind im Abschnitt -\emph on -Mathe-Makro -\emph default -s des -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default --Handbuchs beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Feineinstellungen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im folgenden wird vorausgesetzt, dass Sie sich bei der Texteingabe im -\family typewriter -Mathe-Modus -\family default - befinden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Schriftstile -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriftstile -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können verschiedene Schriftstile benutzen, die Sie über den Knopf -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\font" -\end_inset - - -\family default - auf der -\family sans -Mathe-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - oder Tastaturbefehle auswählen. - Nicht alle erscheinen genau WYSIWYM, und einige werden überhaupt nicht - angezeigt. - Der Standardschriftstil für Text ist kursiv, -\begin_inset Formula $text$ -\end_inset - -, aber für Zahlen ist der Standard Roman. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um Text im -\family typewriter -Mathe-Modus -\family default - Roman zu setzen, benutzen Sie -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -R -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{\mathbf{\mathrm{text}}}$ -\end_inset - -. - Für Fettdruck, -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{text}$ -\end_inset - -, ist es -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -F -\family default -. - Den kalligrafischen Schriftstil für Großbuchstaben, -\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{TEXT}$ -\end_inset - -, erhält man mit -\family sans -Alt+Z -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -I -\family default -. - Tabelle -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "tab:Mathematik-Schriftstile" - -\end_inset - - zeigt die unterstützten Schriften. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family typewriter -\begin_inset Float table -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Mathematik-Schriftstile" - -\end_inset - -Mathematik-Schriftstile -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mathematische ! Schriftstile -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriftstil -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Befehl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Aufrecht}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathrm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Fett}}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Kursiv}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Schreibmaschine}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathtt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbb -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathfrak -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{KALLIGRAFISCH}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathcal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{Serifenlos}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathsf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Man kann nur Großbuchstaben in die Stile -\family sans -Blackboard -\family default - und -\family sans -Kalligrafisch -\family default - setzen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Der Tastaturbefehl, um zu einem speziellen Schriftstil zu wechseln, wird - im -\family typewriter -Mathe-Modus -\family default - wie beschrieben interpretiert. - Der -\family typewriter -Mathe-Modus -\family default - unterstützt aber nicht alle Zeichen in allen Schriftstilen, und der Kalligraphi -estil unterstützt nur Großbuchstaben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bei all diesen Schriftstilen müssen Sie den Text sorgfältig eingeben. - Wenn es rechts vom Anfangspunkt Text gibt, wird der Schriftstil nach einem - Buchstaben in den anderen Stil geändert. - Um eine Zeichenkette mit einem speziellen Stil zu schreiben, müssen Sie - rechts vom Cursor ein geschütztes Leerzeichen eingeben. - Außerdem wird durch ein geschütztes Leerzeichen der nachfolgende Text in - den Standardstil geändert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In AMS-LaTeX ist es möglich, Zahlen und Spezialsymbole fett (aber nicht - kursiv) zu schreiben. - Um ein fettgedrucktes -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ -\end_inset - - zu bekommen, müssen Sie -\series bold - -\backslash -boldsymbol -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -{ -\backslash -alpha} -\series default - eingeben: -\begin_inset Formula $\boldsymbol{\mathbb{\alpha}}$ -\end_inset - -. - Klammer-zu erscheint automatisch, nachdem Sie Klammer-auf getippt haben. - Dies funktioniert für alle Symbole und Zahlen. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mathematischer Textmodus -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mathematische!r Textmodus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die verschiedenen Schriftstile sind hilfreich, um Variablennamen in einem - bestimmten Zeichensatz einzugeben, aber sicherlich nicht, um damit normalen - Text zu schreiben. - Verwenden Sie deshalb zum Schreiben von längeren Textstücken den mathematischen - Textmodus, den Sie durch -\family sans -Alt+M -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -M -\family default - aktivieren, wenn Sie sich bereits im Mathematikmodus befinden. - Der mathematische Textmodus wird am Bildschirm in Schwarz anstelle des - üblichen Blau dargestellt. - Sie können in diesem Modus allerdings nicht den Zeichensatz wechseln oder - Satzzeichen verwenden, -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Außerdem gibt der mathematische Textmodus den Text in einer -\family typewriter - -\backslash -textrm{} -\family default --Umgebung aus, obwohl eigentlich -\family typewriter - -\backslash -mbox -\family default - (oder das -\family typewriter - -\backslash -text -\family default - von AMS-LaTeX) die bessere Wahl wäre. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - doch für einfache Texte ist das ausreichend. - Hier ist ein Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\begin{cases} -x & \mbox{wenn ich es sage}\\ --x & \mbox{sonst} -\end{cases} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Schriftgrößen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schriften ! Größe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt vier (relative) Schriftgrößen, die in den meisten Fällen automatisch - benutzt werden. - Sie heißen -\emph on -displaystyle -\emph default -, -\emph on -textstyle -\emph default -, -\emph on -scriptstyle -\emph default - und -\emph on -scriptscriptstyle -\emph default -. - Für die meisten Zeichen haben -\emph on -displaystyle -\emph default - und -\emph on -textstyle -\emph default - dieselbe Größe, aber Brüche, Exponenten, Indizes und gewisse andere Effekte - werden größer oder im -\emph on -displaystyle -\emph default - gesetzt. - Außer einigen Operatoren, die ihre Größe an die jeweilige Situation anpassen, - werden die Texte in der Größe gesetzt, die LaTeX für geeignet hält. - Diese Größe kann mit dem Knopf -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\style" -\end_inset - - -\family default - der -\family sans -Mathe-Werkzeugleiste -\family default - geändert werden. - Es wird dann eine Box eingefügt, in die man das Mathe-Konstrukt eingibt. - Zum Beispiel kann man -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ -\end_inset - - normal schreiben ( -\family sans -textstyle -\family default -), oder man kann es vergrößern, wobei auch die Zeilenabstände vergrößert - werden, indem man -\family sans -displaystyle -\family default - benutzt: -\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ -\end_inset - -. - Hier ist Text in den verschiedenen Größen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -All diese Schriftgrößen sind relativ, das heißt sie werden relativ zu der - Größe angepasst, in die die gesamte Formel über das Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Textstil -\family default - gesetzt wird. - Auf ähnliche Weise wird alles angepasst, wenn die Basisschriftgröße eines - Dokumentes geändert wird. - Als Beispiel eine Formel in der Größe -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Noch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -größer -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\size largest -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -AMS-LaTeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -AMS-TeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX unterstützt die LaTeX-Pakete der American Mathematical Society (AMS), - die oft benutzt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -AMS verwenden -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie im Menü -\family sans -Dokument -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default - unter -\family sans -Mathe-Optionen -\family default -die Option -\family sans - AMS-Mathe-Paket -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -verwenden -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - aktivieren, werden diese Pakete explizit in Ihrem Dokument verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -AMS-Formeltypen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Unter -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe -\family default - können Sie die AMS-Formeltypen -\family typewriter -align -\family default -, -\family typewriter -alignat -\family default -, -\family typewriter -flalign -\family default -, -\family typewriter -gather -\family default - und -\family typewriter -multline -\family default - auswählen. - Eine ausführliche Dokumentation dieser Typen finden Sie in -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Weitere Werkzeuge -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Querverweise -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Querverweis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Querverweise" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine von LyXs Stärken sind Querverweise. - Sie können auf jeden Abschnitt, jedes Gleitobjekt, jede Fußnote, Formel - und Liste im Dokument referenzieren. - Für eine Referenz müssen Sie zuerst eine Marke in den zu referenzieren - Teil einfügen. - Die Marke dient als Anker und Name für die Referenz. - Angenommen Sie wollen den zweiten Eintrag der folgenden Liste referenzieren: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Erster Eintrag -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "enu:Zweiter-Eintrag" - -\end_inset - -Zweiter Eintrag -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dritter Eintrag -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Zuerst setzen Sie eine Marke zu definieren, benutzen Sie -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marke -\family default - oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/label-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -. - Ein Kästchen wie dieses: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/Marke.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - wird eingefügt und LyX fragt nach einem Namen für die Marke. - LyX schlägt als Namen die ersten Wörter des Listeneintrags und zusätzlich - einen Präfix. - In diesem Fall -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -enu:Zweiter-Eintrag -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Der Präfix -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -enu: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - steht für -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -enumerate -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (auf deutsch: -\emph on -nummeriert -\emph default -). - Der Präfix hängt vom Dokumentteil ab, in den die Marke eingefügt wurde. - Für Abschnitte ist er z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -sec: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (Englisch für -\emph on -section -\emph default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um nun auf die Marke zu verweisen, wählen Sie -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Querverweis -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_ref.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - -. - Ein graues Querverweis-Kästchen wie dieses: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/Querverweis.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - wird eingefügt und der Querverweis-Dialog erscheint mit einer Liste der - Marken. - Um eine Marke einzufügen, können Sie die Marken alphabetisch sortieren - und wählen dann -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -enu:Zweiter-Eintrag -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - aus. - Im Feld -\family sans -Format -\family default - können Sie einen der unten beschriebenen Verweisstile auswählen. - An der Stelle der Querverweis-Box erscheint in der Ausgabe die Nummer des - Listeneintrags. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alternativ zu -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Querverweis -\family default - können Sie mit rechts auf die Marke klicken und im erscheinenden Kontextmenü - -\family sans -Als Querverweis kopieren -\family default - verwenden. - Der Querverweis zu dieser Marke ist nun in der Zwischenablage und kann - an der aktuellen Cursorposition mit dem Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einfügen -\family default - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Ctrl+V -\family default -) eingefügt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist unser Querverweis: Eintrag -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "enu:Zweiter-Eintrag" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es wird empfohlen, ein geschütztes Leerzeichen -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -beschrieben in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Geschütztes-Leerzeichen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - zwischen Querverweisnamen und Querverweis zu verwenden, um unschöne Zeilenumbrü -che zwischen beiden zu vermeiden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt folgende Querverweisstile: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -: druckt die Nummer, dies ist die Voreinstellung: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -(): druckt die Nummer umgeben von zwei runden Klammern, dies - ist der Stil, wie er normalerweise für Verweise auf Formeln verwendet wird, - speziell wenn der Name -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Gleichung -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - weggelassen wird: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand eqref -reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -: druckt die Seitennummer: Seite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand pageref -reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -auf -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Seite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -: druckt den Text -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -auf Seite -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und die Seitennummer: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vpageref -reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Wenn sich die Marke auf derselben Seite befindet, wird stattdessen -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -auf dieser Seite -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - gedruckt; wenn sich die Marke auf der gegenüberliegenden Seite in einem - doppelseitigen Dokument befindet, wird -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -auf der gegenüberliegenden Seite -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - gedruckt; befindet sie sich auf der vorigen Seite, die keine gegenüberliegende - ist, wird -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -auf der vorherigen Seite -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - gedruckt; wenn sie sich auf der nächsten, nicht gegenüberliegenden Seite - befindet, wird -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -auf der nächsten Seite -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - gedruckt. - Der Wortlaut des gedruckten Texts hängt zudem von der verwendeten Dokumentklass -e ab. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -auf -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Seite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -: druckt die Nummer, den Text -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -auf Seite -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, und die Seitennummer: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Wenn sich die Marke auf derselben Seite befindet, verhält sich der Stil - wie -\family sans -\series bold - -\family default -\series default -, ansonsten wie -\family sans -\series bold -auf -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Seite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Formatierter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Querverweis: druckt ein selbst definiertes Querverweisformat -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bemerkung: -\series default - Dies ist nur möglich, wenn das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - oder -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installiert ist. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\lang english - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang ngerman -Man kann mit der Option -\family sans -Verwende refstyle (statt prettyref) für Querverweise -\family default - im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dokumentklasse -\family default - auswählen, welches LaTeX-Paket für dieses Feature verwendet wird. - Das Paket -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - ist die Voreinstellung und bevorzugt, da -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - nur englische Dokumente unterstützt. - Das Format wird festgelegt, indem der Befehl -\series bold - -\backslash -newrefformat -\series default - (prettyref) oder -\series bold - -\backslash -newref -\series default - (refstyle) im LaTeX-Vorspann des Dokuments verwendet wird. - Um z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - alle Verweise auf Abbildungen (die den Marken-Präfix -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -fig -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - haben) umzuformatieren, verwendet man den Befehl -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -newref{fig}{refcmd={Bild auf Seite -\backslash -pageref{#1}}} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Für weitere Informationen über das Format, siehe die Dokumentation der Pakete, - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "prettyref,refstyle" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Textverweis: druckt die Beschriftung oder den Namen der Referenz: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand nameref -reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Nummer und die aktuelle Seite des referenzierten Dokumentteils wird - automatisch von LaTeX berechnet. - Die Stile können im Feld -\family sans -Format -\family default - des Querverweis-Fensters eingestellt werden, das erscheint, wenn Sie auf - einen Querverweis klicken. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Stil -\family sans - -\family default - kann nur zur Referenzierung nummerierter Teile des Dokuments verwendet - werden, während der Stil -\family sans - -\family default - immer möglich ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um einen Abschnitt zu referenzieren, setzen Sie die Marke in die Abschnittsübers -chrift; bei Gleitobjekten setzen Sie die Marke in die Beschriftung; bei - Fußnoten wird die Marke in die Fußnote gesetzt. - Die Referenzierung von Formeln ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Gleichungen-numerieren-markieren" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Recht-klicken auf einen Querverweis öffnet ein Kontextmenü. - Der Eintrag -\family sans -Gehe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -zur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Marke -\family default - setzt den Cursor vor die referenzierte Marke. - Dieser Eintrag wird im Kontextmenü der Marke in -\family sans -Gehe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -zurück -\family default - umbenannt, so dass man ihn benutze kann, um zum Querverweis zurückzukehren. - Man kann auch mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/bookmark-goto_0.png - -\end_inset - - zurückkehren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Marken können jederzeit geändert werden. - Verweise auf die geänderte Marke werden automatisch aktualisiert, so dass - Sie sich nicht darum kümmern müssen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn ein Querverweis eine nicht existierende Marke referenziert, erscheint - in LyX -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -NICHT VORHANDEN -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - in der Querverweismarke und in der Ausgabe zwei Fragezeichen statt der - Referenz. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Querverweise sind detailliert im Kap. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Auf Gleitobjekte verweisen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - im -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuch beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und andere Listen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Inhaltsverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Inhaltsverzeichnis wird über -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Liste -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Inhaltsverzeichnis\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\family default - eingefügt. - An der Einfügestelle erscheint ein graues Kästchen mit der Aufschrift Inhaltsve -rzeichnis. - Wenn Sie draufklicken, erscheint das Gliederungsfenster, siehe auch Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Gliederung" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Inhaltsverzeichnis enthält automatisch alle nummerierten Überschriften. - Wenn Sie für eine Überschrift einen Kurztitel definiert haben, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Kurztitel" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben, wird dieser statt der Überschrift verwendet. - In Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Nummerierung-aendern" - -\end_inset - - ist beschrieben, wie die Nummerierungstiefe geändert werden kann. - Unnummerierte Überschriften tauchen unter Navigieren und in der Gliederung - auf, werden aber nicht im Inhaltsverzeichnis gedruckt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Abbildungs- -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Abbildungs!-verzeichnis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, Tabellen- -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tabellen!verzeichnis@-verzeichnis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und Algorithmenverzeichnisse -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Algorithmen!-verzeichnis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Verzeichnisse" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Tabellen-, Abbildungs-, und Algorithmenverzeichnisse sind sehr ähnlich zum - Inhaltsverzeichnis. - Sie können über das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Liste -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\family default - eingefügt werden. - Die Verzeichniseinträge sind die Beschriftung der Gleitobjekte und deren - Nummer. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -URLs und Hyperlinks -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URLs -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:URLs" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -URL -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Links zu Internetseiten oder Email-Adressen können Sie mit -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -URL -\family default - einfügen, wie zum Beispiel die Adresse der LyX-Homepage: -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Wichtiger Hinweis -\series default -: Enthält die URL eines der folgenden Zeichen: -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -% -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -# -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -^ -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, dann müssen diese Zeichen mit einem vorangestellten Backslash eingegeben - werden, zum Beispiel -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\backslash -# -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - -\emph on - URLs dürfen nicht mit einem Backslash enden! -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Text eines URLs wird immer im Schreibmaschinenstil gedruckt. - Um den Text zu formatieren, müssen Sie einen Hyperlink benutzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hyperlinks -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Hyperlinks" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hyperlink -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hyperlinks werden mit -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Hyperlink -\family default - oder einen Klick auf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "href-insert" -\end_inset - - eingefügt. - Das Hyperlink-Dialogfenster hat zwei Eingabefelder: -\family sans -Ziel -\family default - und -\family sans -Name -\family default -. - In -\family sans -Ziel -\family default - tragen Sie die Adresse wie bei einem URL ein. - In -\family sans -Name -\family default - tragen Sie den Text ein, der im gedruckten Dokument erscheinen soll. - Wenn Sie diese Feld leer lassen, wird der Text in -\family sans -Ziel -\family default - gedruckt. - Mit -\family sans -Linktyp -\family default - legen Sie fest, ob es sich um eine Internet-Adresse wie -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "LyX-Homepage" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - -, eine Email-Adresse wie -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "LyX-Dokumentation" -target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX-Dokumentation" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - - oder einen Link auf eine Datei handelt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beim Anklicken eines Hyperlinks in der Druckvorschau startet bei Internet-Adress -en Ihr Standard-Browser, bei Email-Adressen Ihr Standard-Email-Programm - und bei Dateien Ihr Standard-Dateibetrachter. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie vor einer Internet-Adresse -\family sans -run: -\family default - einfügen, wird eine Anwendung gestartet: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Firefox für Linux starten" -target "run:/usr/bin/firefox" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um einen Hyperlink zu formatieren, markieren Sie ihn und formatieren wie - gewohnt: -\family sans -\series bold - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "LyX-Homepage" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Textfarbe kann über -\family sans -Dokument -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -PDF-Eigenschaften -\family default - im Feld -\family sans -Zusätzliche -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Optionen -\family default - mit dem Parameter -\family typewriter -urlcolor= -\family default - geändert werden. - Voreingestellt ist -\family sans -blue -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Anhang -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Anhang" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anhang -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um einen Anhang zu erstellen, fügen Sie zunächst eine neue Überschrift des - höchsten Abschnitttyps hinzu, also -\family sans -Kapitel -\family default - oder -\family sans -Abschnitt. - -\family default - Dann stellen Sie den Cursor an den Anfang der Überschrift und wählen -\family sans -Dokument -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Anhang -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -hier -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -beginnen -\family default -. - LyX fügt eine rote Linie ein, um den Anhang vom übrigen Dokument abzugrenzen. - Die erste Nummer vor den nun folgenden Überschriften wird in einen Großbuchstab -en umgeändert. - Die weitere Nummerierung ist wie gewohnt. - Auf Anhänge kann natürlich auch verwiesen werden: siehe Anhang -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "chap:Der-Einstellungen-Dialog" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Literaturverzeichnis -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Literaturverzeichnis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten, in einem LyX-Dokument ein Literaturverzeichnis - zu erstellen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Sie können eine Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbank einfügen -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bekannt als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -BibTeX-Datenbank -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, was in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Sie können ein Literaturverzeichnis von Hand einfügen. - Dafür wird die Absatzumgebung -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default - (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sub:Literaturverzeichnis-Umgebung" - -\end_inset - -) benutzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Die Literaturverzeichnis-Umgebung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Am -\emph on -Anfang der -\emph default - -\emph on -ersten Zeile -\emph default - eines Absatzes werden Sie ein graues Kästchen mit einem Wort und einer - Zahl in eckigen Klammern sehen. - Wenn Sie daraufklicken, erscheint ein Menü, in dem Sie einen -\family sans -Schlüssel -\family default - und eine -\family sans -Marke -\family default - einfügen können. - Der -\family sans -Schlüssel -\family default - ist der symbolische Name, mit dem Sie auf diese Literaturangabe verweisen. - Nehmen wir zum Beispiel an, Ihre erste Literaturangabe wäre ein Buch über - LaTeX. - Wir könnten dann als -\family sans -Schlüssel -\family default - -\emph on -latexbuch -\emph default - dafür nehmen. - Sie können auch eine -\family sans -Marke -\family default - benutzen, die dann in dem grauen Kästchen erscheinen würde. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das -\family sans -Marke -\family default -n-Feld ist nicht nutzlos. - Sie können auf Ihre Literaturangaben verweisen, indem Sie -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Zitat -\family default - oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" -\end_inset - - benutzen. - Es öffnet sich ein Fenster in dem Sie nun einen Schlüssel aus der Liste - der verfügbaren Verweise auswählen. - Drücken Sie -\family sans -Hinzufügen -\family default - und anschließend -\family sans -OK -\family default -. - Es wurde eine Literatur-Verweisbox eingefügt, die nach dem(n) referenzierten - Schlüssel(n) benannt ist. - Klickt man auf die Box, wird wieder das Literaturverweis-Fenster angezeigt, - so dass man den Verweis ändern kann. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Literaturverweise erscheinen im der Ausgabe als Nummer des Literatureintrags - in eckigen Klammern. - Setzt man eine -\family sans -Marke -\family default - für einen Eintrag, erscheint die Marke statt der Nummer. - Hier sind zwei Beispiele, da erste ohne Marke, das zweite mit der Marke - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Credits -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Siehe den -\family sans -LaTeX Companion Second Edition -\family default -: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Mitglieder des LyX-Teams sind in den Credits aufgelistet: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um alle Literatureinträge auzurichten, kann man im Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Absatz-Einstellungen -\family default - (Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -) eine längste Marke angeben. - Es werden dann alle Einträge mit der Breite der angegebenen Marke eingerückt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken (BibTeX) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Literaturverzeichnis ! Datenbanken -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Literaturverzeichnis ! BibTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -BibTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken sind nützlich, wenn Sie dasselbe Literaturverze -ichnis in mehreren Dokumenten benutzen wollen. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sie sind auch nützlich um eine Datenbank von Artikeln mit Notizen dazu zu - haben. - Die meisten der Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbankprogramme erlauben es, Anmerkunge -n und Rezensionen zusammen mit Literaturquellen zu speichern. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Außerdem sehen sie dann auch gleich aus. - Sie können alle Literaturangaben Ihres Arbeitsgebiets in einer Datenbank - sammeln. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Datenbank ist eine Textdatei mit der Endung -\family typewriter -.bib -\family default - und enthält das Literaturverzeichnis in einem eigenen Format. - Diese wird in LaTeX-Büchern beschrieben ( -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" - -\end_inset - -). - Normalerweise benutzt man ein besonderes Programm, um die Datenbank anzulegen - und zu bearbeiten. - Auf -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - finden Sie eine Liste mit Programmen für Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um eine Datenbank zu benutzen, wählen Sie -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Liste -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Inhaltsverzeichnis\SpecialChar \menuseparator -BibTe -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -X-Literaturverzeichnis -\family default -, woraufhin das -\family sans -BibTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Literaturverzeichnis -\family default --Fenster geöffnet wird. - Sie können dort Datenbanken hinzufügen und auch wieder löschen. - Außerdem können Sie eine Stildatei auswählen. - Die Option -\family sans -Literaturverzeichnis -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -ins -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\family default - fügt einen Literaturverzeichniseintrag zum Inhaltsverzeichnis hinzu. - Über -\family sans -Inhalt -\family default - können Sie festlegen, was gedruckt werden soll. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Stildatei ist eine Textdatei mit der Endung -\family typewriter -.bst -\family default -, die das Aussehen der Literatureinträge definiert. - Ihre LaTeX-Distribution sollte mehrere anbieten, und viele Verleger liefern - eigene Stildateien, so dass Sie sich um das Aussehen nicht kümmern müssen. - Sie können aber auch eine eigene Stildatei erstellen, aber das ist etwas - für Experten. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Für Informationen, wie dies gemacht wird, siehe -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein Querverweis auf einen Datenbankeintrag erfolgt wie oben beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX verwendet BibTeX, um ein Literaturverzeichnis aus einer Datenbank zu - erstellen. - Sie können festlegen, welche seiner Varianten von LyX als Prozessor verwendet - wird; entweder im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default - oder -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ausgabe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. - Die folgenden Varianten sind möglich: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -biber bietet volle Unterstützung von Unicode, unbergrenzter Speicher, funktionie -rt nicht mit anderen Literaturpaketen (wie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - -\series bold -natbib -\series default -), nur mit dem Paket -\series bold -biblatex -\series default -; empfohlen für mehrsprachige Texte und für Dokumente deren Sprache keine - lateinischen Buchstaben verwendet -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex der Standard; erlaubt keine Sonderzeichen, die nicht in einer 7-Bit - Kodierung kodiert werden können, bergrenzter Speicher, funktioniert mit - allen Literaturpaketen, mit Ausnahme von -\series bold -biblatex -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex8 erlaubt alle Zeichen, die in einer 8-Bit Kodierung kodiert werden - können, größerer Speicher als -\family sans -bibtex -\family default -, funktioniert mit allen Literaturpaketen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -BibTeX kann durch Optionen gesteuert werden, die Sie unterhalb der Festlegung - der Variante eingeben können. - Bevor Sie Optionen verwenden, lesen Sie unbedingt das BibTeX-Handbuch -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default -die Option -\family sans -Abschnittspezifisches -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default - angekreuzt haben, können Sie mehrfache und unterteilte Literaturverzeichnisse - erstellen. - Mehr darüber finden Sie im Abschnitt -\emph on -Literaturverzeichnisse mit BibTeX -\emph default - in den -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In diesem Dokument werden zwei Literaturverzeichnisse benutzt, um die Unterschie -de zu zeigen. - Wie Sie sehen, enthält das Literaturverzeichnis, das mit einer Datenbank - erstellt wurde, nur die Einträge, auf die verwiesen wird. - Als Stildatei wurde -\family typewriter -alphadin.bst -\family default - benutzt, um das komplizierte deutsche Verweisschema automatisch zu verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Literaturverzeichnis-Gestaltung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Literaturverzeichnis ! Gestaltung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Literaturverweisdialog können Sie eine -\family sans -Formatierung -\family default - festlegen. - Dazu müssen Sie in -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Literaturverzeichnis -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - die Option -\family sans -Natbib -\family default - anklicken. - -\family sans - -\family default -Damit wird die Standardeinstellung überschrieben. - Globale Einstellungen müssen Sie in den BibTeX-Stildateien vornehmen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Dialogfenster können Sie auch Text, der vor oder nach dem Verweis erscheinen - soll, festlegen. - Hier erscheint der Text -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Kapitel -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -3 -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - nach dem Verweis: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "Kapitel 3" -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In den -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - finden Sie noch ein paar weitere Dinge über Literaturverzeichnisse. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Stichwortverzeichnisse -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Stichwortverzeichnisse" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stichwort!verzeichnis@-verzeichnis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein Stichwort wird erzeugt, wenn man das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Stichwort -\family default - oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "index-insert" -\end_inset - - verwendet. - Es wird dann eine Box eingefügt, die den Text des Stichworts enthält. - Das Wort in dem sich der Cursor befindet oder markierter Text wird von - LyX als Stichwort vorgeschlagen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Stichwortverzeichnis wird in das Dokument mit dem Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Liste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Inhaltsverzeichnis\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Stichwortverzeichnis -\family default - eingefügt. - Eine hellblaue Box namens -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Stichwortverzeichnis -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - zeigt die Stelle an, wo das Stichwortverzeichnis in der Ausgabe erscheinen - wird. - Die Stichwortverzeichnis-Box ist nicht wie andere LyX-Boxen anklickbar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es folgt ein kurzer Überblick über die Stichwort-Befehle. - Für eine detaillierte Beschreibung von LaTeXs Stichwort-Mechanismus, sei - auf eines dieser LaTeX-Bücher verwiesen: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Stichworte gruppieren -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stichwort ! gruppieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Stichworte werden häufig gruppiert, um dem Leser eine schnelle Suche zu - ermöglichen. - Wenn wir zum Beispiel -\emph on -Auflistung -\emph default - und -\emph on -Aufzählung -\emph default - unter dem Stichwort -\emph on -Liste -\emph default - gruppieren wollen, erzeugen wir zunächst in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Listen" - -\end_inset - - das Stichwort -\emph on -Liste -\emph default -. - Im Textfeld für das Stichwort -\emph on - Auflistung -\emph default - in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Auflistung" - -\end_inset - - fügen wir als Stichwort -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Liste ! Auflistung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -und -\series bold - -\series default -in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Aufzählung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Liste ! Aufzählung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Ausrufezeichen -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -! -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - markiert die Gruppierungsstufe, von denen es drei gibt. - Jede Stufe wird in der Druckausgabe ein wenig eingerückt. - Für eine höhere Stufe ist kein Stichwort nötig, es wird aber trotzdem gedruckt, - aber ohne Seitenzahl. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mehrere Seiten -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stichwort ! Mehrere Seiten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalerweise erscheint ein Stichwort im Verzeichnis mit der Seitennummer - des Abschnitts, indem sich das Stichwort befindet. - Manchmal will man aber mehrere Seiten unter einem Stichwort indizieren. - Will man z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - den Abschnitt über Absatzumgebungen indizieren, erzeugt man ein Stichwort - in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Absatzumgebungen" - -\end_inset - - mit dem Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Absatzumgebungen|( -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -und ein weiteres Stichwort am Ende des Abschnitts -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LyX-Code" - -\end_inset - - mit dem Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Absatzumgebungen|) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Befehle -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|( -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|) -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - beginnen bzw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -beenden den Indexbereich. - Man kann außerdem dasselbe Stichwort mehrfach an verschiedenen Stellen - des Dokuments einfügen. - Diese erscheinen im Stichwortverzeichnis als ein Stichwort mit einer nachstehen -den Liste von Seitenzahlen in denen sich das Stichwort befindet. - Ein Beispiel ist das Stichwort -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Querverweise -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stichwort ! Querverweis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es ist auch möglich, auf ein anderes Stichwort zu verweisen. - Wenn Sie zum Beispiel irgendwo den Begriff GIF -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -GIF|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Grafikformate -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - verwenden und ihn mit einem Stichwort versehen wollen, das auf den Abschnitt - verweist, in dem er zum ersten Mal gebraucht wurde (Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sec:Grafikformate" - -\end_inset - -), so schreiben Sie in das Stichwort-Eingabefeld -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -GIF|see{Grafikformate} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Text in den geschweiften Klammern wird dann im Stichwortverzeichnis - ohne Seitenangabe erscheinen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Stichwort-Reihenfolge -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stichwort ! Reihenfolge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann akzentuierte Zeichen in Stichwörtern verwenden, aber diese Zeichen - können dazu führen, dass das Stichwort im Stichwortverzeichnis nicht korrekt - sortiert wird. - Die Stichworte werden alphabetisch sortiert, aber LaTeX -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Das Stichwortverzeichnis wird im Hintergrund von einem speziellen Programm - erzeugt, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Stichwort-Programm" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - weiß nicht wie die Akzente in verschiedenen Sprachen einsortiert werden. - Als Beispiel haben wir die drei Stichworte -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -maison -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -maïs -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -maître -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sinnloseintrag ! maïs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sinnloseintrag ! maître -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sinnloseintrag ! maïs@maison -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - eingefügt. - Sie werden in der Reihenfolge maïs, maître, maison sortiert, aber wir wollen - die Reihenfolge maïs, maison, maître. - Um dies zu erreichen, verwendet man den Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -voriger Eintrag@aktueller Eintrag -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In unserem Fall wollen wir -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -maison -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - nach -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -maïs -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - haben und schreiben daher in das Stichwort von maison: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -maïs@maison -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der vorige Eintrag muss kein existierender Eintrag sein. - Man kann ein beliebiges Wort verwenden um LaTeX die Reihenfolge vorzugeben, - siehe den nächsten Unterabschnitt für ein Beispiel. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In einigen Fällen ist die Stichwort-Reihenfolge inkorrekt wenn das Programm - -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -verwendet wird um das Stichwortverzeichnis zu erzeugen (siehe Kap. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Stichwort-Programm" - -\end_inset - -). - -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - gibt zum Beispiel das Stichwort für das LaTeX-Paket aeguill in Kap. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Dokumentschrift-und-Schriftgröße" - -\end_inset - - nach den Stichworten der anderen LaTeX-Pakete aus, obwohl all diese Stichwort-B -efehle mit -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -LaTeX-Paket ! -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - beginnen. - Der Grund ist, dass sich das Stichwort für aeguill in einer Fußnote befindet. - Um diesen Fehler von -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - zu umgehen, kann man diese Befehle zum LaTeX-Vorspann des Dokuments hinzufügen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -let -\backslash -OrgIndex -\backslash -index -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand*{ -\backslash -index}[1]{ -\backslash -OrgIndex{#1}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Stichwort-Formatierung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stichwort ! Formatierung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann das Erscheinungsbild von Stichworten über den Textstil-Dialog verändern. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sinnloseintrag ! -\shape italic -Dies ist ein kursiver Sinnloseintrag -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Des Weiteren kann die Seitennummer mit dem Befehl -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -| -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, gefolgt von einem LaTeX-Befehl ohne Backslash, formatiert werden . - Man kann zum Beispiel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -kursive Seitennummer:|textit -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -schreiben, um die Seitennummer kursiv zu bekommen. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sinnloseintrag ! kursive Seitennummer:|textit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Normalerweise beginnen alle LaTeX-Befehle mit einem Backslash, aber in - diesem speziellen Fall bedeutet -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|Befehl -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -Befehl{Seitennummer} -\series default -. - Siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - - um mehr über die LaTeX-Syntax zu erfahren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Die Formatierung von einzelnen Stichworten funktioniert nur, wenn Sie das - Programm -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -verwenden um das Stichwortverzeichnis zu erzeugen, siehe Kap. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Stichwort-Programm" - -\end_inset - -. - Verwenden Sie -\family sans -xindy -\family default -, wird es mit Ausnahme von fett und kursiv nicht funktionieren, da -\family sans -xindy -\family default - semantische Elemente benötigt, die man erst definieren muss; siehe -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "p. 678 ff." -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - für Details. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Allgemein ist es jedoch nicht empfehlenswert die Seitennummer auf obige - Weise zu formatieren. - Stattdessen sollte man ein Makro im LaTeX-Vorspann definieren und es in - Stichworten verwenden. - Vielleicht wollen Sie alle Seitennummern von Stichworten, die auf eine - Definition verweisen, kursiv setzen, so dass die Leser schnell Definitionen - finden können. - In diesem Fall schreiben Sie Folgendes in den LaTeX-Vorspann -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -IndexDef}[1]{ -\backslash -textit{#1}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -und schreiben -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -mein Eintrag|IndexDef -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -in das Stichwort. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sinnloseintrag ! mein Eintrag|IndexDef -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Der Vorteil ist, dass, wenn man seine Meinung später ändert oder der Lektor - darauf besteht, dass Definitionen nicht kursiv gesetzt werden dürfen, sondern - fett gesetzt werden müssen, man nur den Befehl im Vorspann ändern muss, - nicht jedes Stichwort. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können das Aussehen für das gesamte Stichwortverzeichnis ändern. - Wenn Sie zum Beispiel den Absatz mit dem Kästchen -\family sans -Stichwortverzeichnis -\family default - am Ende des Dokumentes fett markieren, werden alle Stichworte fett gedruckt. - Weiterführende Informationen finden Sie in -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie wollen, dass die Stichworte mit Stichwortverzeichnis statt Index - beginnen, sollten Sie in den LaTeX-Vorspann folgendes einfügen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -addto -\backslash -captionsngerman{ -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -indexname}{Stich -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -wort -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ver -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -zeich -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -nis}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Stichwort-Programm -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Stichwort-Programm" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stichwort ! Programm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX benutzt standardmäßig das Programm -\family typewriter -xindy -\family default -, wenn es installiert ist, das aber nur für Linux verfügbar ist, ansonsten - das Programm -\family typewriter -makeindex -\family default -, welches Bestandteil jeder LaTeX-Distribution ist. - Beide Programme können durch Optionen in -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ausgaben\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaTe -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -X -\family default - kontrolliert werden. - Die Funktionen und Eigenschaften der Programme können Sie der Dokumentation - entnehmen, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können aber auch ein anderes Stichwort-Programm benutzen, wenn Sie es - in -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ausgaben\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaTe -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -X -\family default - im Feld -\family sans -Befehl -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -für -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Stichwortverzeichnis -\family default -eintragen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mehrere Stichwortverzeichnisse -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In vielen Fällen ist es üblich mehr als ein Stichwortverzeichnis zu haben. - Zum Beispiel könnten Sie ein separates Stichwortverzeichnis -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Index der Namen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - neben dem Standard-Stichwortverzeichnis haben wollen. - Mit LaTeX ist dies nicht direkt möglich, aber es gibt Pakete, die dies - ermöglichen. - LyX verwendet das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -splitidx -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! splitidx -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - um mehrere Stichwortverzeichnisse zu erzeugen. - Dieses Paket ist in allen aktuellen LaTeX-Distributionen enthalten. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Falls Ihre Distribution es nicht anbietet, konsultieren Sie den TeX-Katalog, - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeX-Katalog" - -\end_inset - -. - Beachten Sie dabei, dass das Paket nicht nur aus LaTeX-Stilen besteht sondern - auch aus speziellen Präprozessor-Programmen, die mit installiert werden - müssen. - Lesen Sie die Dokumentation des Pakets für weitere Informationen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um LyX für mehrere Stichwortverzeichnisse einzurichten, gehen Sie ins Menü - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Stichwortverzeichnis -\family default - und aktivieren die Option -\family sans -Mehrere Indexe verwenden -\family default -. - Wie man sieht, enthält die Liste -\family sans -Verfügbare Indexe -\family default - bereits den Standard-Index -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Stichwortverzeichnis -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Um weitere Indexe hinzuzufügen, geben Sie den Namen des Indexes in das - Feld -\family sans -Neuer Index -\family default - ein (in der Form, in der er auch als Überschrift erscheinen soll) und drücken - -\family sans -Hinzufügen -\family default -. - Der neue Index erscheint nun auch in der Liste. - Sie können dem neuen Index auch eine alternative Farbe für dessen Einfügungen - in LyX zuweisen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sobald die Änderungen übernommen wurden, findet man den neuen Index im Menü - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Liste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\family default - und das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen -\family default - hat einen eigenen Eintrag für jeden definierten Index. - Das Arbeiten mit neuen Indexen ist im Prinzip dasselbe wie mit dem Stichwortver -zeichnis aber es gibt zusätzliche Funktionen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Wenn Sie die Index-Zuweisung eines Indexeintrags ändern wollen, klicken - die mit Rechts auf die Marke des Eintrags. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Durch Rechtsklicken auf einen Index kann man dessen Typ ändern. - Man kann des weiteren einen Index als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Unterindex -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - verwenden. - Wenn man das macht, wird die Überschrift des Indexes um eine Ebene verringert. - Das bedeutet, dass wenn man z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - eine Buch-Dokumentklasse verwendet, in der der Titel des Stichwortverzeichnisse -s als Kapitel definiert ist, der Titels des Unterindex' als Abschnitt definiert - wird und daher in Nicht-Unterindexe eingegliedert werden kann. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Nomenklatur/Glossar -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Nomenklatur/Glossar" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenklatur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glossar|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Nomenklatur -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Manchmal benötigen Sie vielleicht eine Liste von Symbolen oder Begriffen - mit deren Bedeutung – eine sogenannte Nomenklatur bzw. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - ein Glossar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um dies in LyX zu erstellen, muss das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installiert sein. - Sie finden es im TeX-Katalog, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeX-Katalog" - -\end_inset - - oder im Paketmanager Ihrer LaTeX-Distribution. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einen Nomenklatureintrag erstellen Sie, indem Sie den Cursor hinter ein - Symbol oder einen Begriff stellen und -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nomenklatureintrag -\family default - oder -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/nomencl-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - wählen. - Ein graues Kästchen mit der Aufschrift -\family sans -Nom -\family default - wird eingefügt und ein Dialogfenster geöffnet. - Ein Glossar-Eintrag besteht aus zwei Hauptteilen: das -\family sans -Symbol -\family default - und dessen -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Sie müssen korrekten LaTeX-Code in allen Feldern des Nomenklatur-Dialogs - eingeben. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenklaturdefinition und Layout -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenklatur ! Layout -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie Symbole in Formeln haben, müssen diese im -\family sans -Symbol -\family default - Feld als LaTeX-Formel eingegeben werden. - Um z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - zu bekommen, fügt man dies ein: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series default -Das Zeichen -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -$ -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - beginnt/beendet die Formel. - Der LaTeX-Befehl für den griechischen Buchstaben ist dessen Name beginnend - mit einem umgekehrten Schrägstrich -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\backslash - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Für große griechische Buchstaben beginnt der Befehl mit einem Großbuchstaben: - -\series bold - -\backslash -Sigma -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -(Eine kurze Einführung in die LaTeX-Syntax ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - - zu finden.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann den -\family sans -Textstil -\family default - Dialog nicht verwenden, um den Beschreibungstext zu formatieren, sondern - man muss LaTeX-Befehle verwenden. - Zum Beispiel lautet die Beschreibung für den Nomenklatureintrag für -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - in diesem Dokument: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Sinnsloseintrag für das Zeichen -\backslash -textsf{sigma} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Der Befehl -\series bold - -\backslash -textsf -\series default - setzt die Schrift auf -\family sans -serifenlos -\family default -. - Für -\series bold -fett -\series default - verwenden Sie den Befehl -\series bold - -\backslash -textbf -\series default -, für -\family typewriter -schreibmaschine -\family default - -\series bold - -\backslash -texttt -\series default -, für -\emph on -hervorgehoben -\series bold -\emph default - -\backslash -emph -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sollen die Zeichen | -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -! -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -, @ und -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -" -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -in Nomenklatureinträgen erscheinen, müssen sie geschützt werden. - indem man ein Anführungszeichen davor setzt. - Um zu verhindern, dass das Zeichen " nachfolgende Zeichen beeinflusst, - wird es mit einem leeren TeX-Klammerpaar abgeschlossen: ""{} -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\"{}" -description "Das Anführungszeichen wird mit der Sequenz ' \"\"{}\"\"{} ' ausgegeben" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenklatur-Einträge sortieren -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenklatur ! sortieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nehmen wir an, Sie hätten zwei Nomenklatureinträge für die Symbole -\emph on - a -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "a" -description "Sinnsloseintrag für das Zeichen ,,a``" - -\end_inset - - -\emph default - und -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -prefix "sigma" -symbol "$\\sigma$" -description "Sinnsloseintrag für das Zeichen \\textsf{sigma}" - -\end_inset - -. - Diese werden alphabetisch nach dem sortiert, was im Feld -\family sans -Symbol -\family default - steht. - Sie werden daher nach -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -a -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - sortiert – das -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - wird vor dem -\emph on -a -\emph default - erscheinen, denn das Befehlszeichen -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -$ -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - wird bei der Sortierung berücksichtigt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um das zu ändern, können Sie etwas ins Feld -\family sans -Einsortieren -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -als -\family default - schreiben, zum Beispiel -\family typewriter -sigma -\family default - bei -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - . - Dann stimmt die Sortierreihenfolge wieder. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um verschachtelte Nomenklaturen zu erstellen, lesen Sie bitte in der -\series bold -nomencl -\series default --Dokumentation nach, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenklatur-Optionen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenklatur ! Optionen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Paket -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - bietet einige Optionen an um das Aussehen der Nomenklatur zu verändern. - Hier sind einige seiner Optionen, für weitere siehe seine Dokumentation: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refeq Verweis mit dem Ausdruck -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, siehe Gleichung (#) -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refpage Verweis mit dem Ausdruck -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, Seite (#) -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -intoc fügt die Nomenklatur ins Inhaltsverzeichnis ein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um eine oder mehrere Optionen benutzen zu können, fügen Sie sie, durch Kommas - getrennt, in das Feld -\family sans -Optionen -\family default - von -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dokumentklasse -\family default - ein. - In diesem Dokument werden die Optionen -\series bold -refpage, intoc -\series default - verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die ersten beiden Optionen können Sie auch nur für gewisse Nomenklatureinträge - benutzen, wenn Sie als letzten Eintrag im Feld -\family sans -Beschreibung -\family default - folgendes schreiben: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeq wie die Option -\series bold -refeq -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\series bold - -\backslash -nomrefpage -\series default - wie die Option -\series bold -refpage -\series default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeqpage ist die Kurzform von -\series bold - -\backslash -nomrefeq -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomnorefeq, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefpage, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefeqpage schaltet die entsprechende Option ab -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Damit Wörter wie -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Seite -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - auch auf Deutsch und nicht in Englisch erscheinen, fügen Sie diese Zeilen - dem LaTeX-Vorspann ihres Dokuments hinzu: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -eqdeclaration}[1]{, siehe Gleichung -\backslash -nobreakspace(#1)} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -pagedeclaration}[1]{, Seite -\backslash -nobreakspace{}#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenklatur drucken -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenklatur ! drucken -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Liste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Inhaltsverzeichnis\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nomenklatur -\family default - können Sie ein Glossar -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Verzeichnis einfügen. - An der Stelle erscheint ein Kästchen mit der Aufschrift -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Nomenklatur -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, und dort wird das Verzeichnis auch gedruckt. - Mit einem Rechtsklick auf das Kästchen kann man die verfügbare Breite für - die Symbole einstellen. - Sie können dabei zwischen diesen Einstellungen wählen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Standard Breite von 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Breite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -längsten -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Marke die Breite des breitesten Symbols aller Nomenklatureinträge wird verwendet -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Benutzerdefiniert benutzerdefinierte Breite -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In der Druckausgabe erscheint die Nomenklatur als -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Nomenclature -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Sie ihn im LaTeX-Vorspann mit dieser Zeile ändern: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -nomname}{Nomenklatur} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenklatur-Programm -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Nomenklatur-Programm" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenklatur ! Programm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX benutzt standardmäßig das Programm -\family typewriter -makeindex -\family default -, um die Nomenklatur zu erzeugen, weil es zu jeder LaTeX-Distribution gehört. - Im Feld -\family sans -Nomenklaturbefehl -\family default - von -\family sans -Werkzeuge -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Einstellun\SpecialChar \- -gen -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Ausgaben -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -LaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default - können Sie den Befehl modifizieren oder ein anderes Programm eintragen. - In -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex" - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - - sind die möglichen Optionen beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Zweige -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zweige -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Zweige" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Manchmal wollen Sie mehrere Versionen desselben Dokuments ausgeben. - Der Extremfall ist die Ausgabe eines einzigen Dokuments in verschiedenen - Sprachen, aber als eine Datei und so, dass korrespondierende Teile aufeinander - folgen. - Dies kann man mit -\emph on -Zweigen -\emph default - erreichen. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Zuerst müssen Sie die verschiedenen Zweige definieren. - Das machen entweder indem Sie das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Zweig\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Neuen Zweig einfügen -\family default - verwenden (falls Sie nur einen neuen Zweig anlegen möchten), oder im Menü - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Zweige -\family default -. - Sie können jedem Zweig eine Hintergrundfarbe zuweisen, um ihn leichter - erkennen zu können. - Dann geben Sie in das Feld -\family sans -Neu -\family default - einen Namen ein und klicken auf -\family sans -Hinzufügen -\family default -. - Der Name erscheint im unteren Feld, wo Sie ihn bearbeiten können. - Dort können Sie den Zweig -\family sans -(De)aktivieren -\family default -, ihm eine -\family sans -Farbe -\family default - geben, die aber nur in LyX zu sehen ist, und ihn wieder -\family sans -Entfernen -\family default -. - Des Weiteren erlaubt es der Dialog zwei Zweige miteinander zu vereinen - (einfach einen Zweig in den Namen eines andren umbenennen) und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -unbekannte Zweige -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - (d. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -h. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Zweige, die durch Copy/Paste von anderen Dokumenten eingefügt wurden, ohne - definiert worden zu sein) zur Zweig-Liste des Dokuments hinzuzufügen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie nun Text für einen Zweig schreiben wollen, wählen Sie ihn unter - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Zweig -\family default - aus und geben ihn ein. - Sie können natürlich auch vorhandenen Text auswählen und ihn dann einem - Zweig zuweisen. - Alle deaktivierten Zweige werden automatisch geschlossen und aktivierte - geöffnet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine weitere mögliche Anwendung wäre eine Lehrerversion, in der die Antworten - auf Prüfungsfragen stehen würden. - In der Druckausgabe sehen Sie die Schülerversion: -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Frage -status open - -\begin_layout Standard -Frage: Wer war der erste Physik-Nobelpreis-Gewinner? -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Antwort -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -Antwort: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie -\family sans -Dateinamensendung -\family default - im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Zweige -\family default - aktivieren, wird der Name des aktiven Zweigs beim Export des Dokuments - an den Dateinamen angehängt. - Angenommen Sie haben eine Datei namens -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Prüfung.lyx -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - mit den beiden obigen Zweigen. - Wenn -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Dateinamensendung -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - aktiv ist, wird die exportierte PDF-Datei -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Prüfung.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - heißen wenn beide Zweige -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Frage -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Antwort -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - inaktiv waren, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Prüfung-Frage.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - wenn nur der Zweig -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Frage -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - aktiv war, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Prüfung-Antwort.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - wenn nur der Zweig -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Antwort -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - aktiv war, und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Prüfung-Frage-Answer.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - wenn beide Zweige aktiv waren. - Dies hilft um verschiedene Versionen einer Datei zu exportieren ohne den - Überblick zu verlieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um konditionale Ausgaben zu erzeugen, wo keine Zweige angegeben werden können - wie in Formeln, können spezielle LaTeX-Definitionen für jeden Zweig angegeben - werden. - Man kann zum Beispiel für den Frage-Zweig definieren: -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Eine Einführung in die LaTeX-Syntax ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - - zu finden. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -Frage}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -Antwort}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -und für den Antwort-Zweig: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -Frage}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -Antwort}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Frage -status open - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -Frage}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -Antwort}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Antwort -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -Frage}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -Antwort}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nun ist es möglich, die Befehle -\series bold - -\backslash -Frage{\SpecialChar \ldots{} -} -\series default - und -\series bold - -\backslash -Antwort{\SpecialChar \ldots{} -} -\series default - zu verwenden, um eine konditionale Ausgabe zu erhalten. - Hier ist eine Beispielformel, in der nur der -\series bold - -\backslash -Frage -\series default --Teil erscheint: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\Frage{x_{1}}\Antwort{x_{2}}=1\Frage{+\sqrt{3}}\Antwort{-\sqrt{3}}. -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Innerhalb von Formeln, kann dasselbe auch mit Hilfe von Makros geschehen, - siehe Abschnitt -\emph on -Mathe-Makro -\emph default -s des -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default - Handbuchs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -PDF-Eigenschaften -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF!-Eigenschaften -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:PDF-Eigenschaften" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Dialogfenster -\family sans -Dokument-Einstellungen -\family default - können Sie unter -\family sans -PDF-Eigenschaften -\family default - spezielle Optionen für die PDF-Ausgabe eines Dokuments setzen. - Alle Optionen stammen vom LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - wird in der DVI- oder PDF-Ausgabe alle Querverweise verlinken, so dass - ein Leser, der die DVI- oder PDF-Ausgabe auf seinem PC liest, einen Querverweis - anklicken kann und so zur entsprechenden Stelle gelangt, wie es auch im - Internet passiert. - Auf der Karteikarte -\family sans -Hyperlinks -\family default - können Sie festlegen, wie die Querverweise aussehen sollen, und ob bibliografis -che Rückverweise angelegt werden sollen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Auf der Karteikarte -\family sans -Lesezeichen -\family default - können Sie festlegen, ob welche erzeugt und auch nummeriert werden sollen. - Das erleichtert es Lesern, durch die PDF-Ausgabe des Dokuments zu navigieren. - Mit -\family sans -Ebene -\family default - legen Sie fest, welche Lesezeichen angezeigt werden sollen. - 2 zum Beispiel zeigt die Lesezeichen aller Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte, - während 1 nur Abschnitte berücksichtigt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Dokument-Informationen -\family default - auf Karteikarte -\family sans -Allgemein -\family default - werden zusammen mit der PDF-Ausgabe als Datei-Eigenschaften gespeichert. - Viele PDF-Leseprogramme können diese Informationen verarbeiten. - Das ist zum Verwalten von PDF-Dateien sehr hilfreich. - Ist -\family sans -Informationen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -automatisch -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -eintragen -\family default - angekreuzt, versucht LyX, diese Informationen aus dem Titel und dem Autor - des Dokuments zu gewinnen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Im -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Vollbildmodus -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -öffnen -\family default - sorgt dafür, dass die PDF-Datei automatisch so geöffnet wird, was bei Präsentat -ionen hilfreich ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Auch in diesem Handbuch werden PDF-Eigenschaften benutzt, wie Sie im Dialogfenst -er -\family sans -Dokument-Einstellungen -\family default - sehen können. - Dort sehen Sie auch, dass -\family sans -Zusätzliche -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Optionen -\family default - benutzt werden. - Genaueres dazu finden Sie im -\series bold -hyperref -\series default --Handbuch -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -TeX-Code und LaTeX-Syntax -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:TeX-Code" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX!-Syntax -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -TeX-Code -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -TeX-Code-Kästchen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:TeX-Code-Kästchen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -TeX-Code -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie gezwungen sind oder es wollen, LaTeX-Befehle in LyX zu benutzen, - geben Sie diese in TeX-Code-Kästchen ein. - Ein TeX-Code-Kästchen erhalten Sie mit -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Code -\family default -, -\family sans -Strg+L -\family default - oder durch Klicken auf den Knopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - - (Tastenkürzel -\family sans -Strg+L -\family default -). - Es erscheint ein rotes Rechteck, in das Sie Ihren LaTeX-Text schreiben. - LyX wird alles, was im TeX-Code-Kästchen steht, unverändert an LaTeX übergeben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Kästchen selber kann auf zwei Arten angezeigt werden: -\family sans -Geschlossen -\family default - und -\family sans -Geöffnet -\family default -. - Im geschlossenen Zustand wird ein Teil des Textes auf grauem Hintergrund - dargestellt. - Um die Darstellung zu ändern, machen Sie einen Rechtsklick auf das Kästchen - und wählen in dem Dialogfenster aus, was Sie wollen. - Außerdem können Sie im geöffneten Zustand die Einfügung auflösen, das heißt, - der enthaltenen Text wird normal dargestellt. - Wenn das Kästchen geschlossen ist, öffnet ein Linksklick es. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In das TeX-Code-Kästchen können Sie vollständige oder unvollständige LaTeX-Befeh -le schreiben. - Ein vollständiger LaTeX-Befehl ist zum Beispiel die Verwendung von -\family typewriter -slop\SpecialChar \- -py\SpecialChar \- -par -\family default - in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "Sloppypar" - -\end_inset - -. - Unvollständig bedeutet, dass Sie in ein TeX-Code-Kästchen -\family typewriter - -\backslash -Befehlsname[Optionen]{ -\family default - schreiben, dann das Argument mit allen gewünschten Formatierungen als LyX-Text - und schließlich -\family typewriter -} -\family default - in ein zweites TeX -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Code -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -"= -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Kästchen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ERT.png - scale 75 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ergibt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dies ist eine Zeile mit einem -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fbox{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eingerahmten -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Wort. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das hat den Vorteil, dass Formatierungen einfach mit LyX-Mitteln durchgeführt - werden können. - Hier ist ein Beispiel, in dem formatierter -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fbox{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Text -\series default - und ein Bild -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/ert-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - eingerahmt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bemerkung: -\series default - Am Ende von LaTeX-Befehlen ohne Argument müssen Sie ein Leerzeichen eingeben, - damit LaTeX weiß, dass der Befehl zu Ende ist. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Kurze Einführung in die LaTeX-Syntax -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie größere Dokumente oder Bücher schreiben, müssen Sie etwas über - die LaTeX-Befehle wissen, die LyX im Hintergrund verwendet. - Da LaTeX auf Befehlen basiert, können Sie Ihren Text -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -programmieren -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Dies hat den Vorteil, dass das Aussehen des Dokuments jederzeit geändert - werden kann, wenn man die richtigen Befehle kennt. - Stellen Sie sich zum Beispiel vor, dass Sie ein Handbuch für ein Produkt - schreiben müssen und der Abgabetermin in wenigen Stunden ist. - Ihr Chef hat Sie eben für Ihre gute Arbeit gelobt, hätte aber gern alle - Beschriftungsmarken fett gesetzt. - Nun haben Sie aber im Dokument über hundert Abbildungs- und Tabellenbeschriftun -gen mit Marken in normaler Schrift. - Natürlich kann man sie nicht alle in so kurzer Zeit manuell ändern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nun kommt LaTeX ins Spiel. - Wie schon weiter oben erwähnt, gibt es für jedes Problem ein LaTeX-Paket. - Zuerst müssen Sie herausfinden welches und schauen daher in die LaTeX-Paket - Datenbank, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Catalogue" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Als Ergebnis wissen Sie, dass das Paket -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - das ist, das Sie brauchen. - Um ein Paket zu verwenden, muss es im LaTeX-Vorspann (Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default -) mit dem Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[Optionen]{Paketname} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -geladen werden. - Alle LaTeX Befehle beginnen mit einem Backslash, das Befehls-Argument wird - in geschweifte Klammern gesetzt und die Optionen in eckige Klammern. - Nicht alle Befehle haben ein Argument und Optionen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In Ihrem Fall ist der Paketname -\series bold -caption -\series default -. - Nach einem Blick in die Dokumentation des Pakets wissen Sie, dass die Option - -\series bold -labelfont=bf -\series default - die Schrift aller Beschriftungsmarken fett setzt. - Daher fügen Sie den Befehl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -in den LaTeX-Vorspann ein und das Problem ist gelöst. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Für weitere Befehle, die das Paket -\series bold -caption -\series default - zur Verfügung stellt, siehe seine Dokumentation, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "caption" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beachten Sie dass einige Dokumentklassen eingebaute Lösungen für häufige - Problemstellungen wie diese haben. - Verwenden Sie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - eine -\family sans -KOMA-Script -\family default - Kasse, müssen Die das Paket -\series bold -caption -\series default - nicht verwenden. - Sie können stattdessen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont{captionlabel}{ -\backslash -bfseries} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -in den LaTeX-Vorspann schreiben und das Problem ist gelöst. - Wenn Sie also ein größeres Dokument planen, sollten Sie einen Blick in - die Dokumentation der Dokumentklasse werfen, die Sie verwenden wollen. - ( -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont -\series default - ist ein Beispiel für einen Befehl mit mehr als einem Argument.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Befehle im LaTeX-Vorspann beeinflussen das gesamte Dokument, während Befehle - im Text nur den Text nach dem Befehl oder den Text, der als Befehlsargument - verwendet wird, beeinflussen. - Um einen LaTeX-Befehl im Text einzufügen, verwenden Sie die TeX-Code-Kästchen - wie im vorigen Abschnitt beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie mehr über LaTeX und seine Syntax wissen wollen, schauen Sie in - die LaTeX-Bücher -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexguide" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{fancy} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -wechselt temporär auf den Stil mit benutzerdefinierten Kopf/Fußzeilen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rightmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -definiert die Kopfzeile wie unten beschrieben -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leftmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -thepage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -LyXs Benutzerhandbuch -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Magischer Code: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Benutzerdefinierte Kopf/Fußzeilen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Benutzerdefinierte-Kopf/Fußzeile" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Kopf/Fußzeilen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Kopf/Fußzeile -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um eigene Kopf- und Fußzeilen für ein Dokument zu definieren, muss man den - Stil -\family sans -ausgefallen -\family default - im -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - Dialog unter -\family sans -Seitenlayout -\family default - einstellen. - Als zweiten Schritt fügt man im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Module -\family default - das Modul -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Benutzerdefinierte Kopf/Fußzeilen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - hinzu. - Dieses Modul bietet die 6 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Stile -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kopfzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -links, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Kopfzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mitte, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Kopfzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -rechts -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fußzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -links, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Fußzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mitte, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Fußzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -rechts -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -für die verschiedenen Positionen in der Kopf/Fußzeile an. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalerweise werden Kopf/Fußzeilen am Anfang eines Dokuments definiert, - aber man kann sie an jeder Stellen im Dokument ändern. - Abbildung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Seitenlayout-mit-benutzer" - -\end_inset - - zeigt das Seitenlayout und wo die Kopf/Fußzeilen Stile erscheinen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Kopfzeile links -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Kopfzeile mitte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Kopfzeile rechts -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Der normale Text kommt hierhin. - Die Kopfzeile ist über dem Text, die Fußzeile darunter (inklusive Fußnoten). - Kopf/Fußzeilen enthalten typischer Weise Dinge wie die Seitenzahl, Titel - des Kapitels, Firmenlogo aber man kann eigentlich alles außer Gleitumgebungen - verwenden. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fußzeile links -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fußzeile mitte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fußzeile rechts -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Seitenlayout-mit-benutzer" - -\end_inset - -Seitenlayout mit benutzerdefinierter Kopf/Fußzeile. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um eine Kopfzeile zu definieren, fügt man alle 3 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Kopfzeilen-Stile ins Dokument ein. - Die Dinge die man in den Stilen verwendet, erscheinen auf ungeraden Seiten, - die Dinge in den optionalen Argumenten auf geraden Seiten. - Bei einseitigen Dokumenten werden die optionalen Argumente nicht verwendet - und können weggelassen werden. - Lässt man einen Stil oder sein optionales Argument leer, erscheint nichts - in der Ausgabe. - Die Definition der Fußzeile funktioniert analog. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Für die Definition benötigt man einige LaTeX-Befehle die als TeX-Code (Menü - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Code -\family default -) eingefügt werden: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -thepage druckt die aktuelle Seitennummer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -Roman{page} druckt die aktuelle Seitennummer in kleinen römischen Ziffern -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -roman{page} druckt die aktuelle Seitennummer in großen römischen Ziffern -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -leftmark druckt die aktuelle Abschnittsnummer und dessen Titel. - Besitzt das Dokument Kapitel, druckt es stattdessen die Kapitelnummer und - dessen Name. - Es heißt -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -leftmark -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - -, da man es üblicherweise links in der Kopfzeile verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -rightmark druckt den Namen und die Nummer des aktuellen Unterabschnitts. - Besitzt das Dokument Kapitel, druckt es stattdessen die Abschnittsnummer - und dessen Name. - Es wird üblicherweise rechts in der Kopfzeile verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Voreingestellte Kopf/Fußzeilen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Benutzerdefinierte Kopf/Fußzeilen sind standardmäßig nicht leer. - Die Standard-Kopfzeile enthält den Kapitel- und Abschnittstitel und die - Fußzeile hat mittig die Seitennummer. - Um ungewollte Einträge von der Kopf/Fußzeile zu entfernen, fügt man den - entsprechenden Kopf/Fußzeilen-Stil ins Dokument ein, aber lässt ihn leer. - Um z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - die Seitennummer von der Fußzeile zu entfernen, fügt man einen leeren Stil - -\family sans -Fußzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mitte -\family default - ein. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Erscheinungsbild -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Kopf/Fußzeilen erscheinen auf normalen Seiten. - Einige Seiten sind speziell. - So hat die Titelseite ihren eigenen Stil, genauso wie die Seiten, auf denen - Teile oder Kapitel eines Buches beginnen. - Diese Seiten haben keine Kopf/Fußzeilen, aber dies ist normal. - So ist es z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - unsinnig, eine Kopfzeile mit dem Kapitelnamen auf einer Seite zu haben, - auf der der Kapitelname schon in großen Buchstaben steht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Kopf/Fußzeilen Dekorationslinie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Standardmäßig bekommt man eine 0.4 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt dicke Linie unter der Kopfzeile und keine Linie für die Fußzeile. - Dies kann im LaTeX-Vorspann mit den Befehlen -\series bold - -\backslash -headrulewidth -\series default - und -\series bold - -\backslash -footrulewidth -\series default - in folgendem Schema geändert werden: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -headrulewidth}{Dicke} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wobei Dicke eine Größe in Standard-Einheiten wie -\family sans -pt -\family default - oder -\family sans -mm -\family default - ist. - Möchte man keine Linie, setzt man die Dicke auf 0 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Linien können auch gefärbt werden, aber die erfordert größeres Wissen - über LaTeX. - Wenn Sie dies wirklich benötigen, schauen sie im Internet oder im Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -4.4 des Buches -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach" - -\end_inset - - nach. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Mehrere Kopf/Fußzeilen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Für den Fall dass man mehr als eine Textzeile als Kopf/Fußzeile benötigt, - kann man einen normalen Zeilenumbruch in der Definition verwenden. - Dennoch ist die Höhe der Kopf/Fußzeile nur die einer einzigen Textzeile - Um die Höhe zu vergrößern, redefiniert man die LaTeX-Länge -\series bold - -\backslash -headheight -\series default - oder -\series bold - -\backslash -footheight -\series default - im LaTeX-Vorspann in folgendem Schema: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -headheight}{Höhe} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wobei Höhe eine Größe in Standard-Einheiten ist. - Weiß man nicht welche Höhe man benötigt, definiert man die Kopf/Fußzeilen - und schaut das Dokument als PDF an. - Anschließend öffnet man das LaTeX-Protokoll über das Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -La -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -TeX-Protokoll -\family default -und schaut mit Hilfe des Knopfes -\family sans -Nächste -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Warnung -\family default - ob man eine Warnung des Pakets -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - findet. - Falls eine solche Warnung existiert, enthält sie die Höhe, die man mindestens - für die Kopf/Fußzeile braucht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Dieses Beispiel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Beispiel demonstriert was man in Kopf/Fußzeilen machen kann. - Verwenden Sie es nicht für ihr Dokument, denn es ist ein nicht sehr sinnvolles - Beispiel. - Es besteht aus der folgenden Definition: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kopfzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -links -\series bold - -\backslash -rightmark -\series default -, leeres optionales Argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kopfzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mitte leer, leeres optionales Argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kopfzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -rechts leer, -\series bold - -\backslash -leftmark -\series default - im optionalen Argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fußzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -links leer, -\series bold - -\backslash -thepage -\series default - im optionalen Argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fußzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mitte -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -LyXs Benutzerhandbuch -\family default -\series default -\color inherit -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Magischer Code: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - im optionalen Argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fußzeile -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -rechts -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\series default -, leeres optionales Argument -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -headrulewidth auf 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt gesetzt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Prinzip kann man in Kopf/Fußzeilen alles verwenden, außer Gleitumgebungen. - Für weitere spezielle Dinge wie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - Daumenregister, siehe das Handbuch des Pakets -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage clearpage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{headings} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -wechselt zurück zum Stil mit den Standard-Kopf/Fußzeilen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Dokumentteile vorschauen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Dokumentteile-vorschauen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sofortige Vorschau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Vorschau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX ermöglicht es, Teile Ihres Dokuments als Vorschau anzusehen, so dass - der Schreib- und Denkfluss nicht durch die Ansicht der Ausgabe gestört - wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Voraussetzung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Damit Vorschauen möglich sind, müssen Sie das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -preview-latex -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! preview-latex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (auf manchen System hat es den Namen -\series bold -preview -\series default -) installiert haben. - Falls es noch nicht installiert ist, finden Sie es im TeX-Katalog, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeX-Katalog" - -\end_inset - - oder im Paketmanager Ihres LaTeX-Systems. - Schönere Ergebnisse erzielen Sie, wenn Sie zusätzlich das Programm -\family typewriter -pnmcrop -\family default - des -\family typewriter -netpbm -\family default --Paketes installieren. - Unter LyX für Windows wird dieses und auch das LaTeX-Paket automatisch - zusammen mit LyX installiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Vorschau aktivieren -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - alle mathematischen Formeln als Vorschau ansehen wollen, müssen Sie die - Option -\family sans -Grafiken -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -anzeigen -\family default - im Dialog -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - unter -\family sans -Aussehen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Handhabung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Anzeige -\family default - aktivieren. - Dann setzen Sie -\family sans -Sofortige -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Vorschau -\family default - auf -\family sans -An -\family default -. - Die -\family sans -Vorschaugröße -\family default - ist der Multiplikationsfaktor für die Größe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vorschauen werden erzeugt, wenn Sie ein Dokument öffnen oder eine Einfügung - verlassen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Hinweis: -\series default - Von bereits geöffneten Dokumenten werden nicht in jedem Fall sofort Vorschauen - erzeugt, wenn man die Option -\family sans -Grafiken -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -anzeigen -\family default - aktiviert. - Man muss also diese Dokumente eventuell neu laden. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ausgewählte Dokumentteile -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Neben Formeln gibt es andere Fälle, in denen man vielleicht eine Vorschau - sehen möchte. - Zum Beispiel bei Dingen die LyX nicht anzeigen kann, wie Rotationen oder - Dinge, die LyX noch nicht unterstützt. - Dazu fügt man eine Vorschau-Einfügung über das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Vorschau -\family default - ein und fügt oder kopiert die Sachen, die vorgeschaut werden sollen, hinein. - Die Vorschau wird erzeugt, wenn sich der Cursor außerhalb der Vorschau-Einfügun -g befindet. - Wenn man auf eine Vorschau klickt, kann das Vorgeschaute bearbeitet werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein Beispiel: Für rotierte Boxen verwenden Sie den LaTeX-Befehl -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default -, der noch nicht von LyX unterstützt wird. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default - ist in Abschnitt -\emph on -Rotierte Boxen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs erklärt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Anstelle der TeX-Code Boxen wollen Sie in LyX die rotierten Boxen sehen, - um z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - den Rotationswinkel so einstellen zu können, dass er zum umgebenden Text - passt. - Daher fügen Sie eine Vorschau-Einfügung ein und kopieren den Text mit den - rotierten Boxen hinein. - Hier ist das Ergebnis: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -Dies ist eine Zeile -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Doublebox -position "c" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 0 -inner_pos "c" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1in" -special "width" -height "1in" -height_special "totalheight" -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mit rotiertem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, gerahmten Text -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und einer Formel. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Vorschau funktioniert auch mit Farben. - In diesem Beispiel wurde eine spezielle gerahmte, farbige Box mit dem LaTeX-Bef -ehl -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default - erzeugt: -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default - ist in Abschnitt -\emph on -Farbige Boxen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs erklärt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fboxrule 1mm -\backslash -fboxsep 1mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Dies ist Text in einer farbigen, gerahmten Box. -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Falls LyX keine Vorschau anzeigt, stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie Vorschauen, - wie oben beschrieben, aktiviert haben, dass TeX-Code in der Vorschau-Einfügung - korrekt ist und dass Sie die LaTeX-Pakete in der Dokumentpräambel geladen - haben, die vom TeX-Code benötigt werden. - Wenn LyX keine Vorschau erzeugen kann, werden Sie in den meisten Fällen - auch keine Ausgabe Ihres Dokumentes aufgrund von LaTeX-Fehlern erzeugen - können. - Falls Sie also TeX-Code verwenden müssen und sich nicht sicher sind, ob - er korrekt ist, ist die Vorschau-Einfügung eine gute Methode ihn zu testen, - ohne das gesamte Dokument anzusehen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaTeX-Quellcode -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Des Weiteren kann der LaTeX-Quellcode des gesamten Dokuments oder von Teilen - davon angeschaut werden. - Das Menü -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Quelle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ansehen -\family default - öffnet ein Fenster in dem der LaTeX-Quellcode angezeigt wird. - Das Fenster zeigt den Quellcode des gesamten Absatzes, indem sich der Cursor - momentan befindet. - Man kann auch Dokumentteile in LyXs Hauptfenster markieren, dann wird nur - der Code der Auswahl angezeigt (wenn es mehr als ein Absatz ist). - Um das gesamte Dokument als Quellcode anzusehen, verwendet man die entsprechend -e Option im Quellcode-Fenster. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Fortgeschrittenes Suchen und Ersetzen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Fortgeschrittenes-Suchen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Suchen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ersetzen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einleitung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das fortgeschrittene Suchen und Ersetzen von LyX erlaubt es nach komplexen - Textabschnitten und mathematischem Inhalt zu suchen. - Es ist eine Erweiterung des Standard Suchen -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Ersetzen Dialogs. - Die Haupteigenschaften sind: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Beides, das Suchen nach Text und nach mathematischen Formeln ist möglich, - wobei Letzteres durch die normale Eingabe einer Formel in das Suchfenster - geschieht; es werden eigenständige Formeln aber auch Teile von Formeln - gefunden -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Die Suche kann formatierungsunabhängig sein, so dass Text in jedem Kontext/Stil - (Standardtext, Abschnittsüberschrift, Notizen, und sogar in Formeln) gefunden - wird, oder er ist formatierungsabhängig, so dass zum Beispiel ein Wort, - das in einer Abschnittsüberschrift eingegeben wurde, auch nur in Abschnittsüber -schriften gefunden wird -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Die Suche kann auf bestimmte -\emph on -Bereiche -\emph default - ausgeweitet werden, das heißt ein Datensatz, der entweder die Unterdokumente - des Dokuments einschließt, aus allen geöffneten Dokumenten oder allen Handbüche -rn besteht, die im Menü -\family sans -Hilfe -\family default - verfügbar sind -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Das Ersetzen kann die Großschreibung beibehalten so dass die Großschreibung - des ersetzten Texts an den gefundenen Text angepasst wird (das heißt alles - groß-, alles klein- oder erster Buchstabe groß-, die anderen kleingeschrieben) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Benutzung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das erweiterte Suchen -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Ersetzen Feature wird über das Menü -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suchen & Ersetzen -\noun on - ( -\noun default -ersetzen -\noun on -) -\family default -\noun default - (Tastenkürzel Ctrl+ -\family sans -Umschalt -\family default -+F oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-toggle_findreplaceadv.png - scale 85 - groupId Icon - -\end_inset - - aktiviert. - Damit wird der Dialog -\family sans -Erweitertes Suchen und Ersetzen -\family default - geöffnet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Suche nach Text -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man gibt in das Editorfeld -\family sans -Suchen -\family default - ein unformatiertes Wort ein und sucht danach mit dem Knopf -\family sans -Nächstes suchen -\family default - unten im Dialog (oder drückt einfach die -\family sans -Entertaste -\family default -). - Das eingegebene Wort wird überall im Text in jeder beliebigen Formatierung - als auch in Formeln gefunden. - Mehrmaliges Drücken von -\family sans -Enter -\family default - sucht weiter vorwärts während -\family sans -Umschalt+Enter -\family default - rückwärts sucht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Groß-/Kleinschreibung beachten -\family default - findet nur Dinge mit derselben Großschreibung wie im Feld -\family sans -Suchen -\family default -. - Die Option -\family sans -Ganze Wörter -\family default - findet keine Wortteile. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Suche nach Formeln -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nach mathematischen Formeln kann gesucht werden, indem man diese im Feld - -\family sans -Suchen -\family default - eingibt, so wie -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - -. - Wenn nach Formeln gesucht wird, werden diese gefunden, wenn sie allein - stehen, aber auch wenn sie Teil einer Formel sind. - Zum Beispiel werden die beiden Beispiele in dieser Formel gefunden: -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Suche nach Textformatierung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es ist auch möglich nach Text in einer bestimmten Formatierung zu suchen. - Dies wird erreicht, indem man im Tab -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default - des Dialogs die Option -\family sans -Ignoriere Format -\family default - ausschaltet. - Die Eingabe in das Feld -\family sans -Suchen -\family default - von -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -einem unformatierten Wort wird keine Treffer liefern, wenn das Wort im Dokument - z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - fett oder kursiv ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - einem kursiven oder fetten Wort liefert nur Treffer, wenn das Wort im Dokument - dieselbe Formatierung hat. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -einem unformatierten Wort in einer Abschnittsüberschrift führt nur zu Treffern, - wenn sich das Wort in einer Abschnittsüberschrift befindet. - Wenn das Wort zusätzlich eine Formatierung hat, wird nur gefunden, was - in einer Abschnittsüberschrift steht und ebenfalls diese Formatierung hat. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -einer abgesetzten Formel findet diese Formel nur, wenn sie im Dokument ebenfalls - eine eingebettete Formel ist (keine in einer Textzeile eingebettete Formel). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ersetzen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dokumentsegmente, die im -\family sans -Suchen -\family default - Feld eingegeben wurden, können mit Segmenten ersetzt werden, die im -\family sans -Ersetzen durch -\family default -\noun on - -\noun default -Feld eingegeben werden. - Um das nächste Auftreten zu finden und dieses zu ersetzen, drückt man den - Knopf -\family sans -Ersetzen -\family default - oder drückt alternativ -\family sans -Enter -\family default - oder -\family sans -Umschalt+Enter -\family default - während der Cursor sich im Feld -\family sans -Ersetzen durch -\family default -\noun on - -\noun default -befindet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann mit formatierten Segmenten ersetzen. - Typische Szenarios in denen das nützlich ist (nur um einige zu nennen), - sind: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -das Ersetzen mit einer formatierten Version des selben Wortes, z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - Ersetzen des Namens -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -func() -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - mit seiner Version im Stil Schreibmaschine -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -func() -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Änderung der mathematischen Notation, z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - um alle Vorkommen von -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $R$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - mit -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - zu ersetzen (dabei hilft es eventuell, die Optionen -\family sans -Ganze Wörter -\family default - und -\family sans -Groß-/Kleinschreibung beachten -\family default - zu verwenden und die Option -\family sans -Ignoriere Format -\family default - im Tab -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default - zu deaktivieren, um zu verhindern, dass alle -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -R -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - im normalen Text ersetzt werden), oder -\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ -\end_inset - - mit -\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$ -\end_inset - - zu ersetzen oder -\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ -\end_inset - - mit -\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Benutzung mit regulären Ausdrücken -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt einen Regulärer Ausdruck (Regexp)-basierten Suchmodus. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Der Wikipedia-Artikel -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regulärer_Ausdruck" - -\end_inset - - ist eine gute Erklärung was ein Regulärer Ausdruck ist. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Man kann nach Regulären Ausdrücken suchen, indem man eine Regexp-Einfügung - in den -\family sans -Suchen -\family default --Editor einfügt. - Dies geschieht über das Menü -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Regulären Ausdruck einfügen -\family default - während sich der Cursor im -\family sans -Suchen -\family default --Editor befindet. - Zeichen in Regexp-Einfügungen werden entsprechend der Regeln für reguläre - Ausdrücke gefunden -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mit der Bedingung, dass jeder (Unter)Ausdruck ein korrekt formatiertes LyX-Segme -nt sein muss. - Das heißt, dass z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - TeX-Code keine ungeschlossenen {}-Klammern haben darf. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - während Text außerhalb der Einfügungen nur Treffer liefert, die exakt diesem - Text entsprechen. - Das Kopieren und Ersetzen funktioniert wie gewohnt auch in Regexp-Einfügungen. - Anwendungen von Suchen mit regulären Ausdrücken sind zum Beispiel: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Suche in allen Brüchen nach einem bestimmten Nenner: zum Beispiel findet - man mit dem Bruch -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - - ( -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - ist der reguläre Ausdruck für einen Platzhalter), im Feld -\family sans -Suchen -\family default - alle Brüche mit diesem Nenner. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Suche nach Text in einem bestimmten Stil: ist die Option -\family sans -Ignoriere Format -\family default - im Reiter -\family sans -Einstellungen -\family default - ausgeschaltet, kann man den regulären Ausdruck -\series bold - -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - -\series default - eingeben und für ihn zum Beispiel den Textstil kursiv oder fett wählen - um alle kursiven oder fettgedruckten Textstellen im Dokument zu finden. - Der reguläre Ausdruck -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - in einer nummerierten Liste oder einer Abschnittsüberschrift findet alle - nummerierten Listen oder Abschnittsüberschriften. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Allgemein können Referenzen auf (Unter)Ausdrücke in Regexp wie üblich verwendet - werden: Gruppieren eines Teils des Ausdrucks mit runden Klammern -\begin_inset Formula $()$ -\end_inset - - und dessen Referenzierung mit -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ -\end_inset - -, usw.. - Versuchen Sie zum Beispiel mit dem regulären Ausdruck -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -[[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]] -\backslash -1[[:space:]] -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -zu suchen, um Wortwiederholungen zu finden, falls es welche gibt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Verwendung von Referenzen im ersetzten Text ist (noch) nicht implementiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -\color none -Achtung: -\series default - Referenzen funktionieren innerhalb einer Regexp als auch in mehreren Regexps, - wobei die Nummerierung der referenzierten Unterausdrücke absolut ist. - Das heißt, dass -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - - immer das erste Auftreten von () in allen eingefügten Regexps referenziert. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Rechtschreibprüfung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Rechtschreibprufung@Rechtschreibprüfung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Rechtschreibprüfung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX besitzt eine eigene Rechtschreibprüfung. - man kann Sie mit dem Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rechtschreibprüfung -\family default -, der Taste -\family sans -F7 -\family default - oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show spellchecker" -\end_inset - - starten. - Die Prüfung beginnt entweder an der aktuellen Cursorposition oder dem Beginn - des momentan markierten Textabschnitts. - Eine Seitenleiste erscheint und zeigt jedes falsche (oder unbekannte) gefundene - Wort an und erlaubt es diese zu korrigieren. - Wenn ein unbekanntes Wort gefunden wird, wird das Wort markiert und der - Text gescrollt damit das Wort zu sehen ist. - In der Rechtschreibprüfungs-Seitenleiste, gibt es ein Feld mit Vorschlägen - für die Korrektur. - Klickt man auf einen Vorschlag, wird er ins -\family sans -Ersetzung -\family default -s-Feld kopiert., ein Doppelklick ersetzt das Wort sofort. - Unbekannte, aber richtig geschriebene Wörter können zum persönlichen Wörterbuch - hinzugefügt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die standardmäßig verwendete Wörterbuchdatei ist die der Dokumentsprache, - die im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - eingestellt ist. - Die Sprache eines Wortes kann in der Rechtschreibprüfungs-Seitenleiste - ausgewählt werden, indem man in der Dropdown-Box eine andere Sprache auswählt - LyX kann auch Dokumente, die Text in mehreren Sprachen enthalten, korrekt - prüfen. - Dies funktioniert, wenn man die verschiedenen Sprachen entsprechend markiert - und die Rechtschreibprüfungs-Wörterbücher installiert hat. - LyX wechselt dann automatisch die Wörterbuchdateien. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alle von LyX unterstützten Wörterbucher können von hier heruntergeladen - werden: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Es gibt 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Dateien für jede Sprache. - Um ein Wörterbuch zu installieren, kopiert man beide Dateien in LyXs Installati -onsunterordner -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -dicts -\family default - und startet LyX neu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Weitere Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In LyXs Einstellungen Dialog unter -\family sans -Spracheinstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rechtschreibprüfung -\family default - kann man die folgenden Dinge einstellen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Programm Legt das Programm fest, das LyX für die Rechtschreibprüfung verwenden - soll. - Abhängig vom Betriebssystem, sind -\family typewriter -aspell -\family default -, -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default - oder -\family typewriter -enchant -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Enchant selbst ist eine Hüllbibliothek mit verschiedenen konfigurierbaren - Programmen. - Lesen Sie dessen Dokumentation um mehr zu erfahren. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - verfügbar. - Bei Windows ist nur -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default - verfügbar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Alternative -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Sprache Wenn dieses Feld nicht leer ist, wird LyX immer die im Feld angegebene - Sprache für die Rechtschreibprüfung verwenden, egal wie die Dokumentsprache - ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Zu -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ignorierende -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Zeichen Erlaubt es spezielle Zeichen anzugeben, die die Rechtschreibprüfung - ignorieren soll, z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - französischen Akzente. - Dieses Feature sollte aber normalerweise nicht benötigt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Zusammengesetzte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Wörter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -akzeptieren Verhindert, dass zusammengesetzte Wörter wie -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Verzeichnisname -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - moniert werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Rechtschreibung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -während -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Eingabe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -überprüfen Prüft die Rechtschreibung schon während der Eingabe. - Falsch geschriebene Wörter werden rot gestrichelt unterstrichen. - Beim Rechts-klicken auf ein unterstrichenes Wort, erscheinen die Vorschläge - der Rechtschreibprüfung im Kontext-Menü. - Wählt man einen Vorschlag aus, ersetzt er das unterstrichene Wort. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Prüfe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Notizen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -und -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Kommentare Wenn aktiviert, werden auch die nicht zu druckenden Dokumentteile - wie Notizen mit geprüft. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Thesaurus -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Thesaurus" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Thesaurus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX bietet einen mehrsprachigen Thesaurus. - Es verwendet denselben Thesaurus wie LibreOffice, OpenOffice und Firefox - (namentlich die -\family typewriter -MyThes -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Thesaurus-Bibliothek, die in LyX enthalten ist). - Daher kann LyX direkt auf OpenOffice Thesaurus Wörterbücher zugreifen, - die für viele Sprachen verfügbar sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt wie neue Wörterbücher installiert und für LyX - bereitgestellt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einrichten des Thesaurus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family typewriter -MyThes -\family default -\emph on -/ -\emph default -OpenOffice Thesauri bestehen aus zwei Dateien pro Sprache: Eine Datei mit - der Endung -\emph on -*.dat -\emph default -, die die Daten enthält und eine Index-Datei mit der Endung -\emph on -*.idx -\emph default -. - Der Standardisierte Dateinamen enthält den Code der Sprache (z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - -\family sans -de_DE -\family default - für Deutsch). - So heißen die Dateien für Deutsch: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_de_DE_v2.idx -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_de_DE_v2.dat -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie LibreOffice oder OpenOffice verwenden uns dessen Thesaurus auf - einem Linux-System installiert haben, sollten sich diese Dateien bereits - auf Ihrem System befinden. - Bei Windows kann man im LyX-Installer auswählen, welche Wörterbucher installier -t werden sollen.. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alle von LyX unterstützten Wörterbucher können von hier heruntergeladen - werden: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Um ein Wörterbuch zu installieren, kopiert man beide Dateien in LyXs Installatio -nsunterordner -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -thes -\family default - und startet LyX neu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Verwendung des Thesaurus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um den Thesaurus zu starten, verwendet man das Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Thesaurus -\family default - oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "thesaurus-entry" -\end_inset - - während ein Wort markiert ist oder während sich der Cursor in einem Wort - befindet. - Es öffnet sich ein Dialog und zeigt Wörter als Ersetzungsvorschläge an, - die wahrscheinlich dasselbe wie das aktuelle Wort bedeuten. - Die Vorschläge sind in Kategorien gruppiert. - Für manche Sprachen (beispielsweise Englisch) zeigt der Thesaurus nicht - nur bedeutungsähnliche Wörter (Synonyme) an, sondern auch Oberbegriffe - (wie -\emph on -organism -\emph default - für -\emph on -plant -\emph default -), sachverwandte Wörter (wie -\emph on -polical -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -theory -\emph default - für -\emph on -anarchistic -\emph default -), Zusammengesetze Wörter (wie -\emph on -tree -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -diagram -\emph default -, wenn Sie -\emph on -tree -\emph default - eingeben) und Gegenbegriffe (Antonyme) (wie -\emph on -boy -\emph default - für -\emph on -girl -\emph default -). - Das deutsche Thesauruswörterbuch zeigt momentan allerdings nur bedeutungsähnlic -he und bedeutungsverwandte Wörter an. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Sprachen wird automatisch von dem Wort übernommen, indem sich der Cursor - befindet, aber man kann sie auch im Dialog umstellen, genauso wie man dort - das Wort ändern kann. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man beachte dass der Thesaurus kann keine Phrasen handhaben kann (nur Zusammense -tzungen, die im Wörterbuch stehen, so wie das obige -\emph on - Baumdiagramm -\emph default -) und dass man die sogenannte Lemmaform verwenden muss; die Form, die auch - in Wörterbüchern verwendet wird (für die meisten Sprachen ist das: erste - Person Einzahl für Substantive, Infinitiv für Verben). - Schlägt man zum Beispiel für die Worte -\emph on -Berichte -\emph default - oder -\emph on -berichtend -\emph default - nach, bekommt man keine Vorschläge, während es mehrere für -\emph on -Bericht -\emph default - gibt. - Die beste Vorgehensweise ist es nur die relevanten Teile von Worten zu - markieren (z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - -\emph on -Bericht -\emph default - in -\emph on -Berichte -\emph default -). - Dann bekommt man sofort Vorschläge ohne das Wort im Dialog erst anpassen - zu müssen und auch der Ersetzung wird dann wahrscheinlich sofort korrekt - sein (nur der markierte Teil wird ersetzt). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Änderungsverfolgung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anderungsverfolgung@Änderungsverfolgung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Änderungsverfolgung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Änderungsverfolgung" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn mehrere Personen ein Dokument zusammen bearbeiten, ist es sehr nützlich, - wenn die Änderungen der anderen im Dokument hervorgehoben werden. - Sie können dann entscheiden, ob Sie eine Änderung akzeptieren wollen. - Das erreichen Sie, indem Sie -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -verfolgen -\family default - ( -\family sans -Strg+Umschalt+E -\family default -) ankreuzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Änderungen im Dokument werden durch Striche und Farben hervorgehoben: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\bar under -\color blue -Unterstrichener Text -\bar default -\color inherit -ist eine Einfügung, -\strikeout on -\color blue -durchgestrichener Text -\strikeout default - -\color inherit -eine Löschung. - Die Farbe hängt vom Autor der Änderung ab. - Die Farben können Sie in -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Aussehen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Handhabung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Farben -\family default - ändern. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Farbe ! Änderungsverfolgung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Der Autor und das Datum der Änderung werden in LyXs Statusleiste angezeigt, - wenn sich der Cursor in geändertem Text befindet. - Die selbe Information erhalten Sie, wenn Sie den Werkzeugleistenknopf -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - - benutzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn die Änderungsverfolgung aktiviert ist, erscheint diese Werkzeug\SpecialChar \- -leiste: -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Werkzeugleiste ! Änderungsverfolgung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png - scale 90 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Diese Werkzeugleiste enthält folgende Knöpfe: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-track" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -verfolgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-output" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -In -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Ausgabe -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -anzeigen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -springt zur nächsten Änderung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderung -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -akzeptieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderung -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -ablehnen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -zusammenfassen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Alle -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Änderungen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -akzeptieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Alle -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Änderungen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -ablehnen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Notiz\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Notiz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nächste -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Notiz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es werden (noch) nicht alle Änderungen angezeigt, insbesondere keine Formatänder -ungen wie zum Beispiel -\emph on -normal -\emph default - nach -\emph on -fett -\emph default - oder -\emph on -Standardabsatz -\emph default - nach -\emph on -Beschreibung -\emph default -. - Das kann man jedoch anzeigen lassen, indem man den Textteil dupliziert, - das Original löscht und die Kopie ändert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Änderungsverfolgungs-Werkzeugleiste hilft Ihnen beim Bearbeiten der - Änderungen – Sie müssen nur die Änderungen auswählen und einen der Schaltknöpfe - anklicken. - Wenn Sie Änderungen zusammenfassen, erscheint ein Fenster, das Ihnen Informatio -nen über die nächste Änderung nach der momentanen Cursorposition anzeigt. - Sie brauchen dann keine bestimmte Änderung zu markieren. - In dem Fenster können Sie entscheiden, Änderungen zu akzeptieren oder abzulehne -n, und dann zur nächsten Änderung zu gehen. - So können Sie alle Änderungen durchgehen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Werkzeugleiste hat zwei Schaltknöpfe, um Notizen zu behandeln, weil - diese zur Beschreibung einer Änderung oft wichtig sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um Änderungen in der Druckausgabe anzeigen zu können, benötigen Sie das - LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -dvipost -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! dvipost -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Sie finden es im TeX-Katalog, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeX-Katalog" - -\end_inset - -, oder im Paket-Manager Ihres LaTeX-Systems. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Vergleich von Dokumenten -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Vergleich von Dokumenten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können zwei verschiedene LyX-Dokumente über das Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Vergleichen -\family default - miteinander vergleichen. - Das Ergebnis des Vergleichs ist eine LyX-Datei mit eingeschalteter Änderungsver -folgung um die Unterschiede anzuzeigen. - Im Vergleichen-Dialog können Sie mit der Option -\family sans -Kopiere -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Dokument-Einstellungen -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -von -\family default - festlegen, von welcher Datei LyX die Dokumenteinstellungen für die Ergebnisdate -i verwenden soll. - Die Option -\family sans -Änderungsverfolgung -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -in -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Ausgabe -\family default - verwendet die Änderungsverfolgungsoption -\family sans -In -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Ausgabe -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -anzeigen -\family default - um die Unterschiede auch in der PDF-Ausgabe der Ergebnisdatei zu visualisieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Internationale Unterstützung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Internationale Unterstutzung@Unterstützung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt, wie Sie LyX mit jeder gewünschten Sprache benutzen - können. - Für einige Sprachen gibt es spezielle Wiki-Seiten, die erklären, wie man - sie verwendet: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Neben Sprachen unterstützt LyX auch phonetische Symbole, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Sonderzeichen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Sprachoptionen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sprachoptionen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Sprachoptionen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Dialog -\family sans -Do\SpecialChar \- -ku\SpecialChar \- -ment-Ein\SpecialChar \- -stel\SpecialChar \- -lungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Sprache -\family default - können Sie die Sprache, den Stil der Anführungszeichen und die Zeichenkodierung - festlegen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Unter -\family sans -Kodierung -\family default - können Sie die Zeichenkodierung auswählen, die für die Ausgabe verwendet - werden soll. - Die Option -\family sans -Voreinstellung der gewählten Sprache -\family default - ist empfohlen und funktioniert für die meisten Fälle. - Für Details über die verschiedenen Kodierungsoptionen siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Sprache" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tastaturtabellen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tastatur ! -tabellen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Tastaturtabellen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie zum Beispiel eine U. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -S.-Tastatur haben, aber nicht in Englisch schreiben wollen, können Sie eine - alternative Tastaturtabelle benutzen. - Z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - wollen Sie Italienisch schreiben. - Dann können Sie LyX mit einer italienischen Tastaturtabelle verwenden. - Der Dialog -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Aussehen & Handhabung\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tastatur/Maus -\family default - erlaubt es bis zu zwei Tastaturtabellen zu laden, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tastatur-/-Maus" - -\end_inset - -. - Sie können eine primäre und sekundäre Tastatursprache wählen und dann entscheid -en, welche Sie verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vielleicht wollen Sie aber auch nur ein paar Tastenzuordnungen ändern oder - eine komplett neue Tastaturtabelle erstellen (für Vulkanisch zum Beispiel). - Sie Schreiben z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - normalerweise Italienisch auf einer U. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -S.-Tastatur aber von Zeit zu Zeit auch deutsche Kurztexte. - Sie können in diesem Fall eine eigene Tastaturzuordnung erstellen oder - eine bestehende Tastaturtabelle ändern um spezielle Zeichen zu unterstützen.. - Diese und andere Anpassungen sind im Handbuch -\emph on -Anpassungen -\emph default - erläutert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -\start_of_appendix -Die Benutzeroberfläche -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:Die-Benutzeroberfläche" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieser Anhang listet alle verfügbaren Menüs auf und beschreibt ihre Funktionalit -ät. - Er ist als schnelle Referenz angelegt, wenn man nach einem bestimmten Thema - im Benutzerhandbuch sucht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Das Datei Menü -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menü ! Datei -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Menü -\family sans -Datei -\family default - finden sich alle Grundlegenden und einige fortgeschrittene Aktionen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Neu -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Erstellt ein neues Dokument. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Neu von Vorlage -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieser Menüeintrag fragt Sie nach einer Vorlage, die Sie verwenden wollen. - Das Auswählen einer Vorlage wird automatisch bestimmte Dokumenteinstellungen - setzen, die Sie sonst selbst vornehmen müssten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Öffnen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Öffnet ein Dokument. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Zuletzt geöffnet -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Untermenü zeigt eine Liste aller zuletzt geöffneten Dateien. - Beim Klicken auf eine Datei wird diese geöffnet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Schließen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Schließt das aktuelle Dokument. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Alle schließen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Schließt alle geöffneten Dokumente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Speichern -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Speichert das aktuelle Dokument. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Speichern unter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Speichert das aktuelle Dokument unter einem neuen Namen um eine Kopie zu - erstellen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Alle speichern -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Speichert alle geöffneten Dokumente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Zum Gespeicherten zurückkehren -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Lädt das aktuelle Dokument neu von der Festplatte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Versionskontrolle -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dies wird verwendet, wenn mehrere Personen am selben Dokument arbeiten oder - wenn eine Person ihre Änderungen archivieren möchte. - Es ist in Abschnitt -\emph on -Versionskontrolle -\emph default - der -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Importieren -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann hier Dateien von älteren LyX-Versionen, HTML-Dateien, LaTeX-Dateien, - NoWeb-Dateien, einfache Textdateien und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Komma-getrennte -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, tabellenartige Textdateien (CSV) importieren. - Die Dateien werden als neues LyX-Dokument importiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wird der Menüeintrag -\family sans -Einfacher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text -\family default - verwendet, führen Zeilenumbrüche im Text zu neuen Absätzen; mit dem Menüeintrag - -\family sans -Einfacher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text, Zeilen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -verbinden -\family default - werden aufeinanderfolgende Textzeilen als ein großer Absatz importiert. - Ein neuer Absatz wird bei einer leeren Zeile im Text angelegt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Exportieren -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub: Exportieren" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können Ihr Dokument in verschiedene Formate exportieren. - Die neuen Dateien werden im selben Ordner wie die LyX-Datei erstellt. - Die Menüeinträge sind nicht bei allen Installationen dieselben. - Sie hängen von den Programmen ab, die von LyX während der Konfiguration - gefunden wurden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist eine Liste aller verfügbaren Einträge; einige davon sind im Detail - in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ausgabe-Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - - erläutert: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -CJK -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX Format der speziellen LyX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.4.x Versionen für Chinesisch, Japanisch und Koreanisch (CJK) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - Seit LyX 1.5.0 ist die Unterstützung für CJK in LyX voll integriert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DocBook Textdatei mit Code in der Sprache SGML, die für die Auszeichnungssprache - -\family typewriter -DocBook -\family default - verwendet wird -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DocBook -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XML) Textdatei mit Code in der Sprache XML die für die Auszeichnungssprache - -\family typewriter -DocBook -\family default - verwendet wird -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DraftDVI LaTeXs natives DVI-Format. - Dieses Format ist nicht geeignet, wenn Sie Sonder- oder Leerzeichen für - Dateinamen oder -pfade im Dokument verwenden. - LyX verwendet dieses Format intern als Vorstufe beim Export nach -\family sans -DVI -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVI DVI-Format -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) DVI-Format unter Verwendung des Programms -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -; unterstützt Unicode und die Verwendung von nicht-TeX Schriften; -\series bold - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - nicht alle DVI-Betrachtungsprogramme sind in der Lage dieses Format korrekt - anzuzeigen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Graphviz -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Dot Textdatei mit Code in der Programmiersprache -\family typewriter -Dot -\family default -, die für grafische Visualisierungen über das Programm -\family typewriter -Graphviz -\family default - verwendet wird -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -HTML HTML-Format (Der HTML-Konverter ist kein Bestandteil von LyX und funktionie -rt eventuell nicht in allen Fällen.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -HTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(MS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Word) spezielles HTML-Format so dass der Ergebnis nach -\family sans -MS Word -\family default - importiert werden kann; als Konsequenz davon werden Formeln als Bitmap-Schrift - eingebettet und nicht im Format -\family sans -MathML -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode, der mit dem Programm -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - kompilierbar ist -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode. - Zusätzlich werden alle Bilder des Dokuments in ein Format konvertiert, - dass vom Programm -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default - gelesen werden kann (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(normal) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode. - Zusätzlich werden alle Bilder des Dokuments in das EPS-Format konvertiert. - Nur dieses Format ist vom Programm -\family typewriter -latex -\family default - lesbar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode, der mit dem Programm -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default - kompilierbar ist -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LilyPond -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -book -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(La -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -TeX) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode und außerdem Code in der Syntax der - Musik-Notationssoftware -\family typewriter - LilyPond -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX-Archiv -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(zip|tar.gz) erstellt eine zip- oder-tar.gz-Archiv-Datei (abhängig von Ihrem - System) die Ihr Dokument und alle Dateien, die notwendig sind, um es zu - kompilieren, enthält (Bilder, Unterdokumente, BibTeX-Dateien, usw.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -z.y.x LyX-Dokument in einem Format, das von der LyX-Version z.y.x lesbar ist. - ( -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -z -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -y -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - repräsentieren die Versionsnummer) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yXHTML HTML-Format, unter Verwendung von LyXs internem XHTML-Konverter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -NoWeb Textdatei mit Code im Format der Programmiersprache -\family typewriter -NoWeb -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatierte Datei, um sie mit -\family sans -LibreOffice, OpenOffice -\family default -, -\family sans -KOffice -\family default -, -\family sans -Abiword -\family default -, usw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -zu öffnen. - (Der OpenDocument-Konverter ist kein Bestandteil von LyX und funktioniert - eventuell nicht in allen Fällen.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default -, erzeugt intern eine DVI-Datei, die in eine PDF-Datei konvertiert wird -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -, erzeugt PDF-Dateien direkt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -, erzeugt PDF-Dateien direkt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default -, erzeugt intern eine PostScript-Datei, die in eine PDF-Datei konvertiert - wird -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -, erzeugt PDF-Dateien direkt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Einfacher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text Textformat -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Einfacher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii) Textformat, das Dokument wird zuerst ins PostScript Format konvertier -t und dann als Text exportiert unter Verwendung des Programms -\family sans -ps2ascii -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Postscript PostScript Format unter Verwendung des Programms -\family typewriter -dvips -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sweave Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode und zusätzlich Code in der statistische -n Programmiersprache -\family typewriter -R -\family default -. - Unter Verwendung der -\family typewriter -R -\family default --Funktion -\family typewriter -Sweave -\family default - ist es möglich -\family typewriter -R -\family default --Befehle in LaTeX zu benutzen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Falls einer der Menüeinträge -\family sans -DVI -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - oder -\family sans -Postscript -\family default - fehlt, müssen Sie ihre LaTeX-Installation aktualisieren. - Anschließend müssen Sie LyX neu konfigurieren, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "LyX-Grundeinstellungen" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Neukonfiguration von LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Drucken -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit diesem Menü können Sie Ihr Dokument entweder in eine Datei im PostScript-For -mat drucken, oder sie an einen Drucker schicken. - Der Drucker wird das Dokument ebenfalls im PostScript-Format erhalten. - Die Konvertierung nach PostScript wird von LyX im Hintergrund mit dem Programm - -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - durchgeführt. - Für weitere Informationen siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Datei-ausdrucken" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fax -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü erscheint nur, wenn ein Faxprogramm installiert ist (bei Windows - muss zusätzlich dessen Programmpfad zu LyXs PATH-Präfix hinzugefügt werden, - siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Pfade" - -\end_inset - -). - Über dieses Menü können Sie Ihr Dokument an ein Faxprogramm wie -\family typewriter -hylapex -\family default - oder -\family typewriter -kdeprintfax -\family default - senden. - Das voreingestellte Format der gesendeten Datei ist PostScript. - Das Format kann in LyXs Grundeinstellungen, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Konverter" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben, geändert werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Neues Fenster und Fenster schließen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Öffnet oder schließt eine neue Instanz von LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Beenden -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fordert Sie auf alle ungespeicherten Dokumente zu schließen und beendet - LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Das Bearbeiten Menü -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menü ! Bearbeiten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Rückgängig und Wiederholen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beschrieben in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rückgängig-Wiederholen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen, Einfügen (vorherige Auswahl), Einfügen - (speziell) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beschrieben in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Einfache-Bearbeitungsfunktionen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Komplette Einfügung auswählen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wählt den Inhalt der Einfügung aus, in der sich der Cursor befindet. - Ist der Cursor außerhalb einer Einfügung, wird das gesamte Dokument ausgewählt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Alles auswählen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wählt das komplette Dokument aus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Suchen & Ersetzen (einfach) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beschrieben in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Einfache-Bearbeitungsfunktionen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Suchen & Ersetzen (erweitert) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beschrieben in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Fortgeschrittenes-Suchen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Absatz nach oben/unten verschieben -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Schiebt den Absatz, in dem sich der Cursor befindet, einen Absatz nach oben - oder unten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Textstil -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beschrieben in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Textstil-Dialog" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Absatz-Einstellungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Absatz ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Damit kann man die Ausrichtung von Absätzen, den Zeilenabstand und die Breite - von Listenmarken einstellen. - Diese Einstellungen beeinflussen nur den Absatz, indem sich der Cursor - gerade befindet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann des Weiteren verhindern, dass die erste Zeile des Absatzes eingerückt - wird, wenn man im Dialog -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - unter -\family sans -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default - Absätze durch Einrückung getrennt hat. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tabellen-Einstellungen und Mathe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Diese zwei Menüs sind nur voll aktiv, wenn sich der Cursor in einer Tabelle - oder Formel befindet. - Hier kann man die Eigenschaften von Tabellen und Formeln ändern. - Die Eigenschaften von Tabellen sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tabellen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben, die von Formeln in Kapitel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Mathematische-Formeln" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Listentiefe erhöhen / verringern -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Diese Menüs sind nur aktiv, wenn sich der Cursor in einer Umgebung befindet, - die geschachtelt werden können. - Sie erhöhen/verringern die Schachtelungstiefe der Umgebung wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Nummerierung-aendern" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Das Ansicht Menü -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menü ! Ansicht -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Am unteren Ende des -\family sans -Ansicht -\family default - Menüs sind die geöffneten Dokumente aufgelistet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Alle Einfügungen öffnen/schließen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Schließt/öffnet alle Einfügungen des Dokuments. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mathe-Makro auf/zuklappen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Klappt Mathe-Makros auf/zu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mathe-Makros sind im -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default - Handbuch beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Quelle ansehen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Öffnet ein Fenster, das den Quelltext des aktuellen Dokuments zeigt, wie - in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dokumentteile-vorschauen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Meldungen anzeigen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Öffnet ein Fenster mit Konsolenmeldungen. - Dies ist nützlich um LyX zu debuggen (d. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -h. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nach Fehlern im Programm zu suchen) oder um zu sehen, was im Hintergrund - vor sich geht, während LaTeX das Dokument prozessiert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ansehen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü erzeugt die Ausgabe im dem Format, das als Voreinstellung entweder - in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - -) oder in den Dokumenteinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" - -\end_inset - -) gesetzt ist und öffnet es in einem geeigneten Betrachtungsprogramm. - Das Betrachtungsprogramm kann in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen festgelegt - oder geändert werden, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - -. - Die voreingestellten Betrachtungsprogramme wurden von LyX gesetzt, als - es zum ersten Mal konfiguriert wurde. - Das Standard-Ausgabeformat ist -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Andere Formate ansehen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit diesem Untermenü können Sie Ihr Dokument in einem alternativen Ausgabeformat - ansehen. - Das Menü enthält eine Liste mit allen verfügbaren Formaten, in denen man - das aktuelle Dokument mit einem externen Programm ansehen kann. - Die Menüeinträge sind nicht bei allen Installationen die selben — sie hängen - von den LaTeX-Programmen ab, die gefunden wurden, als LyX konfiguriert - wurde. - Alle möglichen Formate sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub: Exportieren" - -\end_inset - - aufgelistet. - Sie sollten mindestens den Menüeintrag -\family sans -DVI -\family default - sehen. - Falls er fehlt, müssen Sie Ihre LaTeX-Installation aktualisieren oder repariere -n. - Nach der Aktualisierung muss LyX neu konfiguriert werden, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "LyX-Grundeinstellungen" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Neukonfiguration von LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Ausführen eines Menüeintrags öffnet ein Betrachtungsprogramm. - Dieses kann in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen festgelegt oder geändert werden, - siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - -. - Die voreingestellten Betrachtungsprogramme wurden von LyX gesetzt, als - es zum ersten Mal konfiguriert wurde. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Aktualisieren -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü erlaubt es, die Ansicht mit Ihren letzten Änderungen zu aktualisiere -n (im voreingestellten Ausgabeformat), ohne ein neues Fenster im Betrachtungspro -gramm zu öffnen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Andere Formate aktualisieren -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit diesem Untermenü können Sie die Ansicht eines alternativen Ausgabeformats - aktualisieren, ohne ein neues Fenster im Betrachtungsprogramm zu öffnen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hauptdokument ansehen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü ist nur sichtbar wenn Ihr Dokument in ein anderes Dokument eingefügt - ist. - Das andere Dokument ist daher das Hauptdokument des aktuellen Dokuments - (Unterdokument) (siehe Abschnitt -\emph on -Unterdokumente -\emph default - im -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuch für mehr Informationen zu diesem Thema). - Mit diesem Menü kann man das Hauptdokument vom Unterdokument aus ansehen/öffnen. - Das bedeutet, dass wenn man an einem Unterdokument arbeitet, das z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - ein Kapitel eines Buches ist, erzeugt -\family sans -Hauptdokument ansehen -\family default - die Ausgabe des kompletten Buches während -\family sans -Ansehen -\family default - nur das Kapitel ausgibt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das von dieser Funktion verwendete Format ist das, das als Voreinstellung - entweder in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - -) oder in den Dokumenteinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" - -\end_inset - -) gesetzt ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hauptdokument aktualisieren -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü ist nur sichtbar wenn Ihr Dokument in ein anderes Dokument eingefügt - ist. - Das andere Dokument ist daher das Hauptdokument des aktuellen Dokuments - (Unterdokument) (siehe Abschnitt -\emph on -Unterdokumente -\emph default - im -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuch für mehr Informationen zu diesem Thema). - Dieses Menü erlaubt es, die Ansicht eines Hauptdokuments vom Unterdokument - aus zu aktualisieren, ohne zum Hauptdokument wechseln zu müssen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das von dieser Funktion verwendete Format ist das, das als Voreinstellung - entweder in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - -) oder in den Dokumenteinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" - -\end_inset - -) gesetzt ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ansicht teilen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dies teilt LyXs Hauptfenster vertikal oder horizontal. - Dies erlaubt es, Dokumente gleichzeitig anzusehen um sie zu vergleichen - oder dasselbe Dokument an verschiedenen Stellen gleichzeitig zu betrachten. - Man kann das Hauptfenster sogar mehrfach teilen um z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - 3 oder mehr Dokumente gleichzeitig anzuschauen. - Um zu einer ungeteilten Ansicht zurückzukehren, verwendet man das Menü - -\family sans -Aktuelle Ansicht schließen -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Aktuelle Ansicht schließen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Schließt eine geteilte Ansicht. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Vollbild -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit diesem Menü oder durch Drücken von F11 wird die Menüleiste und alle - Werkzeugleisten ausgeblendet, so dass nur noch das Hauptfenster mit dem - Text des Dokuments als Vollbild zu sehen ist. - Um vom Vollbildmodus zurückzukehren, drückt man entweder wieder F11 oder - klickt mit rechts und schaltet den Vollbildmodus im Kontextmenü ab. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Werkzeugleisten -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Werkzeugleisten" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Werkzeugleiste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In diesem Menü kann das Erscheinungsbild der verschiedenen Werkzeugleisten - eingestellt werden. - Alle Werkzeugleisten und das -\family sans -Befehlseingabefenster -\family default - können an- und ausgeschaltet werden. - Der Zustand -\emph on -an -\emph default - ist im Menü mit einem Häkchen gekennzeichnet. - Die Werkzeugleisten -\family sans -Überarbeiten -\family default -, -\family sans -Tabelle -\family default -, -\family sans -Mathe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Kontrollflächen -\family default -, -\family sans -Mathe-Makros -\family default - und -\family sans -Mathe -\family default - können zusätzlich auf den Zustand -\emph on -automatisch -\emph default - gesetzt werden, der im Menü mit dem Suffix -\family sans -(automatisch) -\family default - gekennzeichnet ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Zustand -\emph on -an -\emph default - wird die Werkzeugleiste permanent angezeigt, im Zustand -\emph on -automatisch -\emph default - wird die Werkzeugleiste nur angezeigt, wenn sich der Cursor sich in einer - bestimmten Einfügung befindet, oder ein bestimmtes Feature aktiviert ist. - Das heißt, dass die Werkzeugleiste -\family sans -Überarbeiten -\family default - nur angezeigt wird, wenn Änderungsverfolgung aktiviert ist, die Mathe und - Tabellen Werkzeugleisten werden nur angezeigt, wenn der Cursor in einer - Formel bzw. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Tabelle ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXs Werkzeugleisten und ihre Knöpfe sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Werkzeugleisten" - -\end_inset - - erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Das Einfügen Menü -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menü ! Einfügen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mathe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt mathematische Konstrukte ein, die in Kapitel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Mathematische-Formeln" - -\end_inset - - und im -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default - Handbuch beschrieben sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Sonderzeichen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Sonderzeichen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier können die folgenden Zeichen eingefügt werden: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Symbole Fügt jedes Zeichen ein, das von Ihrem LaTeX-System ausgegeben werden - kann. - Daher ist die Anzahl der Kategorien von Zeichen im Dialog und die Anzahl - an verfügbaren Zeichen von den LaTeX-Paketen abhängig, die in Ihrem LaTeX-Syste -m installiert sind. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bemerkung: -\series default - Nicht alle Zeichen sind im Dialog -\family sans -Symbols -\family default - sichtbar, denn keine der Schriftarten, die man in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen - als Bildschirmschrift setzen kann (siehe Abschnitt. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bildschirmschriften" - -\end_inset - -), kann alle Zeichen darstellen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fortsetzungspunkte Fügt Fortsetzungspunkte ein: \SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Satzendepunkt Fügt einen Satzendepunkt ein, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Abkürzungen-und-Satzendepunkt" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Nicht-typographisches -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Anführungszeichen Fügt dieses Anführungszeichen ein: ", unabhängig vom Anführung -szeichen-Stil der im Dialog -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - unter -\family sans -Sprache -\family default - eingestellt ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Einfaches -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Anführungszeichen Fügt ein einfaches Anführungszeichen im Anführungszeichenstil - ein, der im Dialog -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - unter -\family sans -Sprache -\family default - eingestellt ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Geschützter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Trennstrich Fügt einen Trennstrich ein, der vor Zeilenumbrüchen geschützt - ist: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash- - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Umbruchfähiger -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Schrägstrich Fügt einen Schrägstrich ein, an dessen Stelle ein Zeilenumbruch - möglich ist: \SpecialChar \slash{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Menütrenner Fügt das Menütrenner-Zeichen ein: \SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Phonetische -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Symbole -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Phonetische -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Symbole -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sprache ! Phonetische -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Symbole -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Erstellt eine Einfügung, in die man Symbole des Internationalen Phonetischen - Alphabets (IPA) eingeben kann, und öffnet eine Symbolleiste, die einen - Großteil dieser Symbole bereitstellt. - Um dieses Feature mit traditionellem LaTeX nutzen zu können, muss das LaTeX-Pak -et -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - installiert sein. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Weitere Informationen über dieses Feature bietet das Linguistik-Handbuch - unter -\family sans -Hilfe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Spezielle Handbücher -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formatierung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier können die folgenden Konstrukte eingefügt werden: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hochgestellt Fügt hochgestellten Text ein: Test -\begin_inset script superscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -a, b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Tiefgestellt Fügt tiefgestellten Text ein: Test -\begin_inset script subscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3x -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Geschütztes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Leerzeichen Fügt ein geschütztes Leerzeichen ein, das in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Geschütztes-Leerzeichen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Normales -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Leerzeichen Fügt ein normales Leerzeichen ein, das in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Normales-Leerzeichen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Halbes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Leerzeichen Fügt ein halbes Leerzeichen ein, das in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Halbes-Leerzeichen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Horizontaler -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Abstand Fügt horizontalen Abstand ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Horizontaler-Leerraum" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Horizontale -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Linie Fügt eine horizontale Linie ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Horizontale-Linien" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Vertikaler -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Abstand Fügt vertikalen Abstand ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Vertikaler-Leerraum" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Phantom Fügt Phantom-Leerraum ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Phantom-Leerraum" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Trennmöglichkeit Fügt eine Trennmöglichkeit ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Silbentrennung" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ligaturtrenner Fügt einen Ligaturtrenner ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ligaturen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Normaler -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Zeilenumbruch Fügt einen normalen Zeilenumbruch ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Manueller-Zeilenumbruch" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Rechtsbündiger -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Zeilenumbruch Fügt einen rechtsbündigen Zeilenumbruch ein, der zusätzlich - die gebrochene Zeile bis zum Seitenrand streckt, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Manueller-Zeilenumbruch" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Neue -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Seite Fügt einen Seitenumbruch ein, der in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Manueller-Seitenumbruch" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Seitenumbruch Fügt einen Seitenumbruch ein, der zusätzlich den gebrochene - Text bis zum Seitenrand streckt, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Manueller-Seitenumbruch" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Seite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -leeren Leert eine Seite, wie es in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Leerender-Seitenumbruch" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Doppelseite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -leeren Leert eine Doppelseite, wie es in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Leerender-Seitenumbruch" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Liste / Inhaltsverzeichnis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Über dieses Menü können verschiedene Listen und Verzeichnisse eingefügt - werden. - Das Inhaltsverzeichnis, die Liste der Algorithmen, Abbildungen und Tabellen - sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Inhaltsverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. - Das Stichwortverzeichnis ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Stichwortverzeichnisse" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben, die Nomenklatur in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nomenklatur/Glossar" - -\end_inset - - und das BibTeX-Literaturverzeichnis in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Gleitobjekt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Gleitobjekte sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Gleitobjekte" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Notiz -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notizen sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Notizen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Zweig -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt einen Zweig ein, der in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Zweige" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Benutzerdefinierte Einfügungen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt dokumentklassen-spezifische Einfügungen ein. - Solche Einfügungen existieren nur, wenn sie in der Layout-Datei der Dokumentkla -sse definiert sind. - Ein Beispiel ist die Dokumentklasse -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -article (Elsevier) -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - mit drei benutzerdefinierten Einfügungen. - Der Abschnitt -\emph on -Flexible Einfügungen und InsetLayout -\emph default - des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs erklärt, wie benutzerdefinierte Einfügungen definiert werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Datei -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Externes Material -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü ermöglicht es, den Inhalt von anderen Dokumenten in Ihr Dokument - einzufügen. - Wie dies geschieht ist im Detail im Kapitel -\emph on -Externe Dateien -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Box -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Boxen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine Minipage-Box ein, die in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Minipage" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. - Alle von LyX unterstützten Boxtypen sind im Detail im Kapitel -\emph on -Boxen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs erläutert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Literaturverweis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt einen Literaturverweis ein, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - -beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Querverweis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt einen Querverweis ein, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Querverweise" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Marke -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine Marke ein, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Querverweise" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Legende -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Legende -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lange Tabellen ! Legende -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine Legende in ein Gleitobjekt oder eine lange Tabelle ein. - Gleitobjekte sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Gleitobjekte" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben, Legenden in langen Tabellen sind im Abschnitt -\emph on -Beschriftungen langer Tabellen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Stichwort -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt ein Stichwort ein, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Stichwortverzeichnisse" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nomenklatureintrag -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt einen Nomenklatureintrag ein , wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nomenklatur/Glossar" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tabelle -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine Tabelle ein. - Tabelle sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tabellen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Grafik -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine Grafik ein. - Grafiken sind Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Abbildungen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URL -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt einen URL ein, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:URLs" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hyperlink -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt einen Hyperlink ein, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Hyperlinks" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fußnote -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine Fußnote ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Fußnoten" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Randnotiz -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine Randnotiz ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Randnotizen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Kurztitel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt einen Kurztitel ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Kurztitel" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -TeX-Code -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine TeX-Code Box ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:TeX-Code" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Programmlisting -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Programmlisting -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine Programmlisting-Box ein. - Programmlistings sind im Kapitel -\emph on -Programm-Code-Listen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Datum -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt das aktuelle Datum ein. - Das Format hängt vom Datumsformat der Sprache ab, die aktuell für die Benutzero -berfläche von LyX verwendet wird. - LyX bietet mehrere Möglichkeiten ein Datum einzufügen, die im Abschnitt - -\emph on -Externes Material -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs erklärt und auch verglichen sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Vorschau -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Fügt eine Vorschau-Einfügung ein, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dokumentteile-vorschauen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Das Navigieren Menü -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menü ! Navigieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü listet die existierenden Kapitel, Abschnitte, Abbildungen, Tabellen, - usw. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des aktuellen Dokuments auf. - Dies ermöglicht eine einfache Navigation im Dokument. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Lesezeichen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit diesem Menü kann man eigenen Lesezeichen setzen. - Dies ist nützlich, wenn man an großen Dokumenten arbeitet und z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - oft zwischen Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 und 6.3 hin und her springen muss. - Um Lesezeichen für dieses Beispiel zu setzen, geht man zu Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 und verwendet das Untermenü -\family sans -Lesezeichen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -speichern -\family default -. - Anschließend geht man zu Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -6.3 und verwendet -\family sans -Lesezeichen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -speichern -\family default -. - Nun kann man leicht zwischen diesen Abschnitten hin und her springen, indem - man das Menü oder die Tastenkürzel -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "bookmark-goto 1" -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "bookmark-goto 2" -\end_inset - - benutzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann Lesezeichen auch verwenden, um zwischen verschiedenen geöffneten - Dokumenten hin und her zu springen. - Die gespeicherten Lesezeichen sind gültig, bis das Dokument geschlossen - wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nächste Notiz, Änderung, Querverweis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Springt zur nächsten Notiz, Änderung, oder Querverweis der der aktuellen - Cursorposition folgt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Gehe zur Marke -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nur aktiv, wenn sich der Cursor vor einem Querverweis befindet. - Es setzt den Cursor vor die referenzierte Marke. - (Ist dasselbe als wenn man mit rechts auf eine Querverweisbox klickt und - -\family sans -Gehe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -zur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Marke -\family default - verwendet.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Vorwärtssuche -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Feature erlaubt es, direkt an die entsprechende Stelle in der Ausgabe - zu springen, siehe Abschnitt -\emph on -Vorwärtssuche -\emph default - in den -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - für eine detaillierte Beschreibung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Das Dokument Menü -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menü ! Dokument -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Änderungsverfolgung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Änderungsverfolgung ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Änderungsverfolgung" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX-Protokoll -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nachdem LaTeX gestartet wurde, indem die Ausgabe des Dokuments erzeugt wurde - (durch Ansicht oder Export), ist dieses Menü verfügbar. - Es zeigt das Protokoll des verwendeten LaTeX-Programms an. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Darin kann man sehen, wie LaTeX im Hintergrund arbeitet. - -\emph on -Experten -\emph default - werden im Protokoll Gründe für LaTeX-Fehler finden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Gliederung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Öffnet das Gliederungs-Fenster, das in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Navigieren" - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Inhaltsverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Anhang hier beginnen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü beginnt den Anhang des Dokuments an der aktuellen Cursorposition, - wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Anhang" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Komprimiert -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -De/komprimiert das aktuelle Dokument. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Dokumenteinstellungen sind im Anhang -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Dokument-Einstellungen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Das Werkzeuge Menü -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menü ! Werkzeuge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Rechtschreibprüfung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Rechtschreibprüfung ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rechtschreibprüfung" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Thesaurus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Thesaurus ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Thesaurus" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Statistik -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Wörter zählen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zeichen zählen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Zählt die Wörter und Zeichen des aktuellen Dokuments oder des markierten - Dokumentteils. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -TeX-Informationen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -TeX-Informationen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Zeigt eine Liste der Dokumentklassen und Stile, die in Ihrem LaTeX-System - installiert sind. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Neu konfigurieren -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Neu konfigurieren|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Neukonfiguration von LyX -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Neukonfiguration von LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü konfiguriert LyX neu. - Das bedeutet, dass LyX nach LaTeX-Paketen und Programmen sucht, die es - benötigt; siehe auch Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "LyX-Grundeinstellungen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Einstellungen Dialog ist im Detail im Anhang -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:Der-Einstellungen-Dialog" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Das Hilfe Menü -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menü ! Hilfe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Menü listet die Dokumentationsdateien von LyX in der Sprache auf, - die aktuell für die LyX Menüs verwendet wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Menü -\family sans -LaTeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Konfiguration -\family default - öffnet ein LyX-Dokument mit Informationen über die LaTeX-Pakete und -Klassen - die von LyX gefunden wurden (siehe auch Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:LaTeX-Einstellung" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Werkzeugleisten -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Werkzeugleisten" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie man Werkzeugleisten anzeigt oder versteckt ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Werkzeugleisten" - -\end_inset - - erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es ist auch möglich, eigene Werkzeugleisten zu definieren. - Dies ist in den -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Standard-Werkzeugleiste -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Werkzeugleiste ! Standard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Standard-Werkzeugleiste enthält wie oben gezeigt von links nach rechts - die folgenden Knöpfe: -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -LTleft}{0pt} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dies ist notwendig, um die lange Tabelle links auszurichten. - Siehe das Handbuch -\emph on -Eingebettete Objekte -\emph default - für weitere Informationen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png - clip - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Auswahlbox für die Umgebungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace -10mm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align left -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-new" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Neu -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "file-open" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Öffnen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-write" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Speichern -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Drucken -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show spellchecker" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rechtschreibprüfung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "undo" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rückgängig -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "redo" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Wiederholen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "cut" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ausschneiden -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "copy" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Kopieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "paste" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einfügen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show findreplace" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suchen -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Ersetzen -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -(einfach) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suchen -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Ersetzen -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -(erweitert) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Lesezeichen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Gehe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -zurück -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Text hervorheben, Funktion des -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Textstil -\family default - Dialogs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Text als Eigenname setzen, Funktion des -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Textstil -\family default - Dialogs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "textstyle-apply" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatiert Text unter Benutzung der aktuellen Einstellungen des -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Textstil -\family default - Dialogs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-mode" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Grafik -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "tabular-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tabelle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle toc" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gliederung an/aus, -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Gliederung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "toolbar-toggle math" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mathe-Werkzeugleiste an/aus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "toolbar-toggle table" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tabellen-Werkzeugleiste an/aus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Extra-Werkzeugleiste -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Werkzeugleiste ! Extra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Extra-Werkzeugleiste enthält wie oben gezeigt von links nach rechts - die folgenden Knöpfe: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Standard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Enumerate" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Aufzählung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Itemize" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Auflistung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout List" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Description" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Beschreibung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listentiefe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -erhöhen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listentiefe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -verringern -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert figure" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Gleitobjekt\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Abbildung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert table" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Gleitobjekt\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tabelle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marke -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Querverweis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Literaturverweis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "index-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Stichwort -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "nomencl-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nomenklatureintrag -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "footnote-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fußnote -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "marginalnote-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Randnotiz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Notiz\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Notiz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "box-insert Frameless" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Box -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "href-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Hyperlink -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -T -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eX-Code -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Makro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset include" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Unterdokument -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Textstil\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Benutzerdefiniert -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Absatz-Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "thesaurus-entry" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Thesaurus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ansicht / Aktualisieren-Werkzeugleiste -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Werkzeugleiste ! Ansicht / Aktualisieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Ansicht / Aktualisieren-Werkzeugleiste enthält wie oben gezeigt von - links nach rechts die folgenden Knöpfe: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ansehen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Aktualisieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Hauptdokument -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ansehen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Hauptdokument -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -aktualisieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ausgabe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mit -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ausgabe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -synchronisieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Andere -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formate -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ansehen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/update-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Andere -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formate -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -aktualisieren -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -* Diese Knöpfe können anders aussehen, wenn sie nicht das voreingestellte - Symboldesign verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Andere Werkzeugleisten -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Änderungsverfolgungs-Werkzeugleiste ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Änderungsverfolgung" - -\end_inset - - erläutert, die Tabellen-Werkzeugleiste -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Werkzeugleiste ! Tabelle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - im -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuch und die Mathe-Makro Werkzeugleiste -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Werkzeugleiste ! Makro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - im -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default - Handbuch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Die Dokument-Einstellungen -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:Dokument-Einstellungen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dokument ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Dokument-Einstellungsdialog enthält Untermenüs um die Eigenschaften - des kompletten Dokuments festzulegen. - Es wird über das Menü -\family sans - Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - aufgerufen. - Sie können Ihre Dokumenteinstellungen mit dem Knopf -\family sans -Als Dokument-Voreinstellung speichern -\family default - als Voreinstellung speichern. - Dies erzeugt eine Vorlage mit Namen -\family typewriter -defaults.lyx -\family default - die von LyX automatisch geladen wird, wenn Sie eine neue Datei erstellen - ohne eine Vorlage zu verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Knopf -\family sans -Klassen-Voreinstellungen verwenden -\family default - setzt die Dokumenteinstellungen auf die Vorgaben der verwendeten Dokumentklasse - zurück. - Dies betrifft hauptsächlich Klassenoptionen, das Seitenlayout und Nummerierung - & Inhaltsverzeichnis. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die verschiedenen Untermenüs des Dialogs sind im Folgenden erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Dokumentklasse -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier stellen Sie die Dokumentklasse, Klassenoptionen, den Grafiktreiber - und das Hauptdokument ein. - Dokumentklassen sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Dokumentklassen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Über den Knopf -\family sans -Lokales -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Format -\family default - können Sie eine eigene Layout-Datei laden, die sich nicht in LyXs -\emph on -layouts -\emph default - Ordner befindet und daher nicht als Layout einer Dokumentklasse von LyX - erkannt wurde. - Für Weiteres über Layout-Dateien, siehe das Kapitel -\emph on -Installieren neuer Textklassen, Layouts und Vorlagen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einige Klassen verwenden spezielle Klassenoptionen standardmäßig. - In diesem Fall sind diese im Feld -\family sans -Vordefiniert -\family default - aufgelistet und Sie können entscheiden, ob Sie sie verwenden wollen oder - nicht. - Wenn Sie nicht genau wissen, was die Klassenoptionen bedeuten, ist es empfohlen -, sie unverändert zu verwenden. - Der Grafiktreiber wird für LaTeXs Grafik-, Farb- und Seitenlayoutpakete - verwendet. - Wenn -\family sans -Standard -\family default - benutzt wird, wird der Standardtreiber für die LaTeX-Pakete verwendet. - Es wird empfohlen den Standard zu benutzen, es sei denn Sie wissen genau - was Sie tun -\family sans -. -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Wenn Sie einen der folgenden Treiber verwenden wollen: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -müssen Sie ihn zuerst in Ihrem LaTeX-System aktivieren, siehe Abschnitt - -\emph on -Driver support -\emph default - in -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein Hauptdokument festzulegen ist notwendig, wenn das aktuelle Dokument - ein Unterdokument ist. - Das Hauptdokument wird von LyX im Hintergrund benutzt, wenn das Unterdokument - ohne sein Hauptdokument geöffnet ist. - Auf diese Weise sind -\emph on -Unte -\emph default -rdokumente immer prozessierbar. - Mehr über Haupt- und Unterdokumente ist in Abschnitt -\emph on -Unterdokumente -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs zu finden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt zudem noch eine Option um die Ausgabe des Datums zu unterdrücken - und eine um das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - anstelle von -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - für Querverweise zu verwenden, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Querverweise" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Unterdokumente -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dieses Untermenü ist nur sichtbar, wenn das Dokument Unterdokumente enthält. - Siehe das Kapitel -\emph on -Unterdokumente -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs für mehr Informationen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Module -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Module sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Module" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Lokales Format -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Lokales-Format" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Schriften -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Schrift-und-Textstile" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Textformat -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann hier festlegen, ob Absätze durch Einrückungen oder Abstände getrennt - werden sollen. - Die Zeilenabstände und die Anzahl der Textspalten können ebenfalls hier - eingestellt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es ist zu beachten, dass LyX keine zwei Spalten oder die eingestellten Zeilenabs -tände darstellt. - Dies wäre unpraktisch, oft unlesbar und ist nicht Teil des WYSIWYM-Konzepts. - In der Ausgabe erscheint der Text natürlich wie eingestellt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Seitenlayout -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eine Beschreibung ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Seitengröße-und-Orientierung" - -\end_inset - - und -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Dokumentlayout" - -\end_inset - - zu finden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Seitenränder -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sub:Seitenränder" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Sprache -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Sprache" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier werden die Grundsprache des Dokuments und der Stil der Anführungszeichen - festgelegt, außerdem die Kodierung, in der das Dokument nach LaTeX exportiert - wird (das LyX-Dokument selbst ist immer in UTF8 kodiert). - LyX versucht, alle Zeichen, die in der ausgewählten Kodierung nicht enthalten - sind, in LaTeX-Befehle umzuwandeln; falls für ein bestimmtes Zeichen kein - LaTeX-Befehl bekannt ist, wird eine Fehlermeldung ausgegeben. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX schaut die Befehle in einer Textdatei ( -\emph on -unicodesymbols -\emph default -) nach, denen Sie leicht auch selbst fehlende Zeichen hinzufügen können, - wenn Sie den entsprechenden LaTeX-Befehl kennen. - Im Handbuch -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - ist dies genauer beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wird die Option -\family sans -Voreinstellung der Sprache -\family default - verwendet, wählt LyX die Standard-Kodierung für die Grundsprache und auch - für einzelne Textpassagen in anderen Sprachen. - Wenn Ihr Dokument also mehrsprachig ist, werden in diesem Fall gegebenenfalls - mehrere Kodierungen für das LaTeX-Dokument verwendet. - wenn Sie diese Option jedoch nicht wählen, wird die von Ihnen gewählte - Kodierung für alle Sprachen im Dokument verwendet, was zu Problemen führen - kann, wenn die gewählte Kodierung für eine der verwendeten Sprachen nicht - geeignet ist. - Die Option -\family sans -Voreinstellung der Sprache -\family default - wird deshalb empfohlen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX unterstützt auch Unicode-Ausgabe. - Dies kann dann sinnvoll sein, wenn Sie sehr viele Sonderzeichen benötigen - oder mit nicht-alphabetischen Schriften arbeiten. - Wenn Sie Unicode benötigen (und vorausgesetzt, Ihre LaTeX-Version unterstützt - ebenfalls Unicode, was in modernen Distributionen der Fall ist), wählen - Sie eine der unten aufgeführten UTF8-Varianten. - Leider ist die Unicode-Unterstützung im klassischen LaTeX beschränkt; es - kann also gut sein, dass Dokumente mit vielen Sonderzeichen mit der Option - -\family sans -Voreinstellung der Sprache -\family default - problemlos ausgegeben werden (da LyX die Zeichen in entsprechende Befehle - umwandelt), dass es aber eine UTF8-Kodierung Fehler produziert (da LyX - dort keine Zeichen in Befehle umwandelt, LaTeX aber nicht alle Zeichen - kennt). - Mit neueren TeX-Alternativen wir XeTeX und LuaTeX gibt es diese Probleme - in aller Regel nicht, denn sie wurden von Anfang an auf Unicode-Unterstützung - angelegt. - LyX unterstützt beide dieser TeX-Alternativen über die Ausgabeformate -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - und -\family sans -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTeX) -\family default -, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ausgabe-Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - -. - Sie können also auf diese zurückgreifen, wenn Sie mit vielen Sonderzeichen - oder Akzenten arbeiten und -\family sans -Voreinstellung der Sprache -\family default - nicht funktioniert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das -\family sans -Sprachpaket -\family default - legt das LaTeX-Paket fest, das für die Silbentrennung und Übersetzung von - Ausdrücken wie -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Teil -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - verwendet wird. - Die möglichen Einstellungen sind: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Standard verwendet das Sprachpaket, das in -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Spracheinstellungen -\family default - eingestellt ist, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Spracheinstellungen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Automatisch wählt ein passendes Sprachpaket für das Ansichts-/Exportformat - an, das Sie verwenden. - In den meisten Fällen wird das -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - sein. - Wenn das neuere Paket -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - besser geeignet ist (ist der Fall wenn XeTeX und/oder Nicht-T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX-Schriften benutzt werden), wird dies anstelle on -\series bold -babel -\series default - verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Immer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Babel verwendet -\series bold -babel -\series default -, auch wenn -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - besser geeignet wäre. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Benutzerdefiniert erlaubt es, einen Befehl für ein Sprachpaket ihrer Wahl - festzulegen. - Zum Beispiel, wenn Sie ein Sprach-spezifisches Paket wie -\series bold -ngerman -\series default - (für deutsche Texte) verwenden wollen, schreiben Sie -\series bold - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\backslash -usepackage{ngerman} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Keines verwendet kein Sprachpaket. - Dies ist für einige Dokumentklassen für wissenschaftliche Artikel notwendig. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist eine Liste mit den wichtigen Kodierungen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sprach-Voreinstellung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ohne -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -inputenc) Dasselbe wie -\family sans -Voreinstellung -\family default - -\family sans -der Sprache -\family default -, das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - wird jedoch nicht von LyX geladen. - Wenn Sie dies verwenden, müssen Sie wahrscheinlich zusätzliche Pakete im - LaTeX-Vorspann manuell laden und auch die Kodierung für fremdsprachige - Texte durch TeX-Code selbst angeben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ASCII die ASCII-Kodierung umfasst nur die im Standard-Englischen gebrauchten - Zeichen ab (7-bit ASCII). - LyX wandelt alle anderen Zeichen in LaTeX-Befehle um, was zu großen LaTeX-Datei -en führen kann, wenn Sie viele Nicht-ASCII-Zeichen verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Arabisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1256) MS Windows Zeichensatztabelle für Arabisch und Farsi. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Arabisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-6) für Arabisch und Farsi. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Armenisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ArmSCII8) für Armenisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Baltisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1257) MS Windows Zeichensatztabelle für Estnisch, Lettisch und Litauisch, - dasselbe wie die ISO-8859-13-Kodierung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Baltisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-13) für Estnisch, Lettisch und Litauisch, eine Obermenge der ISO-8859-4-Kod -ierung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Baltisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-4) (latin4) für Estnisch, Lettisch und Litauisch, eine Untermenge der - ISO-8859-13-Kodierung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chinesisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(vereinfacht) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-CN) für vereinfachtes Chinesisch, wird vor allem in UNIX-Betriebssystemen - verwendet. - Seit 2001 ist diese Kodierung obsolet und von der Kodierung GB-18030 abgelöst. - Da diese aber von LaTeX noch nicht unterstützt wird, sollten Sie Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chinesisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(vereinfacht) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(GBK) für vereinfachtes Chinesisch, entspricht der Windows-Zeichensatztabelle - CP-936, mit Ausnahme des Eurozeichens. - Seit 2001 ist diese Kodierung obsolet und von der Kodierung GB-18030 abgelöst. - Da diese aber von LaTeX noch nicht unterstützt wird, sollten Sie Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chinesisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(traditionell) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-TW) für traditionelles Chinesisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Griechisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-7) für Griechisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hebräisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1255) MS-Windows-Zeichensatztabelle für Hebräisch, eine Obermenge der ISO-8859-8 - Kodierung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hebräisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-8) für Hebräisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-JP) EUC-JP-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -CJK -\series default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Wählen Sie -\family sans -Japanisch (CJK) -\family default - als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(JIS) JIS-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -CJK -\series default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Wählen Sie -\family sans -Japanisch (CJK) -\family default - als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(nicht -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-JP) EUC-JP-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -japanese -\series default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Wählen Sie -\family sans -Japanisch -\family default -als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(nicht -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(JIS) JIS-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -japanese -\series default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Wählen Sie -\family sans -Japanisch -\family default -als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japanisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(nicht -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(SJIS) SJIS-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -japanese -\series default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Wählen Sie -\family sans -Japanisch -\family default -als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Koreanisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-KR) für Koreanisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kyrillisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1251) MS-Windows-Zeichensatztabelle für Kyrillisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kyrillisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-5) deckt Weißrussisch, Bulgarisch, Makedonisch, Serbisch und Ukrainisch - ab. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kyrillisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(KOI8-R) Standard-Kyrillisch speziell für Russisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kyrillisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(KOI8-U) Kyrillisch für Ukrainisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kyrillisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -154) Kyrillisch für Kasachisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Mitteleuropäisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1250) MS-Windows-Zeichensatztabelle für ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2 (latin2). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Mitteleuropäisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2) (latin2) deckt Albanisch, Tschechisch, Deutsch, Ungarisch, Kroatisch, - Polnisch, Rumänisch, Slowakisch und Slowenisch ab. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Südosteuropäisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-3) (latin3) deckt Esperanto, Galizisch, Maltesisch und Türkisch ab. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Südosteuropäisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-16) (latin10) deckt Albanisch, Finnisch, Französisch, Deutsch, Ungarisch, - Irisches Gälisch, Italienisch, Kroatisch, Polnisch, Rumänisch und Slowenisch - ab. - Die Kodierung wurde entwickelt, um möglichst viele Sprachen, die Zeichen - mit Diakritika verwenden, abzudecken. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Thailändisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(TIS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -620-0) für Thailändisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Türkisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-9) (latin5) für Türkisch, ähnlich der ISO-8859-1-Kodierung, allerdings - wurden die isländischen Zeichen durch türkische ersetzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) Unicode (utf8) mit dem LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (für die Sprachen Chinesisch, Japanisch und Koreanisch). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTeX) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) Unicode (utf8) für die TeX-Alternativen -\family sans -XeTeX -\family default - und -\family sans -LuaTeX -\family default -, die Unicode nativ unterstützen, das LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - also nicht benötigen. - LyX wählt diese Kodierung automatisch, wenn Sie nach XeTeX oder LuaTeX - exportieren. - Normalerweise müssen Sie diese Kodierung nicht manuell auswählen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ucs-erweitert) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8x) Unicode (utf8) basierend auf dem LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -ucs -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! ucs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (relativ umfassend, enthält lateinische, griechisch und kyrillische Alphabetzei -chen sowie Chinesische, Koreanische und Japanische Zeichen). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) Unicode (utf8) basierend auf dem LaTeX-Paket -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Unterstützt derzeit nur einen eingeschränkten Teilbereich des Unicode-Spektrums - (hauptsächlich lateinisch-alphabetische Zeichen). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Westeuropäisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1252) MS-Windows-Zeichensatztabelle für ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1 (latin1). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Westeuropäisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1) (latin1) deckt die Sprachen Albanisch, Dänisch, Deutsch, Englisch, - Faröisch, Finnisch, Französisch, Galizisch, Holländisch, Isländisch, Irisch, - Italienisch, Katalanisch, Norwegisch, Portugiesisch, Spanisch und Schwedisch - ab; enthält aber im Gegensatz zur ISO-8859-15-Kodierung kein Eurozeichen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Westeuropäisch -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-15) (latin9), weitgehend identisch zur ISO-8859-1-Kodierung, enthält - jedoch im Unterschied zu dieser das Eurozeichen, die œ-Ligatur und einige - französische und finnische Sonderzeichen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Schließlich können Sie in diesem Dialog auch ein spezifisches Sprachpaket - für das aktuelle Dokument auswählen. - In Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Spracheinstellungen" - -\end_inset - - finden Sie weitere Informationen zum Thema -\emph on -Sprachpaket -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Farben -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Farbe ! Hintergrund -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Farbe ! Haupttext- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier können Sie die Schriftfarbe für den Haupttext (Voreinstellung: schwarz) - und für Grauschrift-Notizen (Voreinstellung: hellgrau) ändern. - Der Kopf -\family sans -Zurücksetzen -\family default - setzt die Farbe zurück auf die Voreinstellung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können außerdem die Hintergrundfarbe für die Seiten (Voreinstellung: - weiß) und für Schattierte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Boxen (Voreinstellung: rot) ändern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Die Farben werden in LyX nicht angezeigt, nur in der Ausgabe. - (Diese Grauschrift-Notiz erscheint in der Ausgabe blau.) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Beachten Sie, dass wenn Sie die Farbe ändern und die Option -\family sans -Links -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -einfärben -\family default - in den Dokumenteinstellungen unter -\family sans -PDF-Eigenschaften -\family default - verwenden, müssen Sie wahrscheinlich auch die Schriftfarbe der Links ändern, - indem sie -\family sans -Zusätzliche -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Optionen -\family default - in den -\family sans -PDF-Eigenschaften -\family default - verwenden. - Zum Beispiel färbt die Option -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -linkcolor=black -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -den Linktext schwarz. - Für weitere Informationen, siehe das Handbuch des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können die Schriftfarbe des Haupttextes und die Seiten-Hintergrundfarbe - für jede Seite ihres Dokuments anpassen, indem Sie diese Befehle als TeX-Code - nach einem manuellen Seitenumbruch einfügen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Für die Seitenfarbe: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -pagecolor{Farbname} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Für die Textfarbe: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -color{Farbname} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Farbname kann einer dieser Namen sein: -\series bold -black -\series default -, -\series bold -blue -\series default -, -\series bold -cyan -\series default -, -\series bold -green -\series default -, -\series bold -magenta -\series default -, -\series bold -red -\series default -, -\series bold -white -\series default -, -\series bold -yellow -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn Sie eine Text- oder Hintergrundfarbe geändert haben, können Sie diese - unter den folgenden Namen verwenden: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Für die Seiten-Hintergrundfarbe: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -page_backgroundcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Für die Schriftfarbe des Haupttextes: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -document_fontcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Für die Schattierte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Box-Hintergrundfarbe: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -shadecolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Für die Schriftfarbe der Grauschrift-Notizen: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -note_fontcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wie man eigene Farben definiert und verwendet ist in Abschnitt -\emph on -Farbige -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Zellen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Nummerierung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Inhaltsverzeichnis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier können Sie die Nummerierungstiefe von Abschnittsüberschriften einstellen - und festlegen bis zu welcher Tiefe Abschnitte im Inhaltsverzeichnis erscheinen, - siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Nummerierung-aendern" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Literaturverzeichnis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier können Sie einen Zitierstil unter Verwendung der LaTeX-Pakete -\series bold -natbib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! natbib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - oder -\series bold -jurabib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! jurabib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - festlegen. - Sie können ein abschnittsspezifisches Literaturverzeichnis unter Verwendung - des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -bibtopic -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! bibtopic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - aktivieren und festlegen wie das Literaturverzeichnis erzeugt wird. - Für eine detaillierte Beschreibung siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Stichwortverzeichnis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier kann eingestellt werden, wie das Stichwortverzeichnis des Dokuments - erzeugt wird und es können zusätzliche Stichwortverzeichnisse definiert - werden. - Siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Stichwortverzeichnisse" - -\end_inset - - für Details. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -PDF-Eigenschaften -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die PDF-Eigenschaften sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:PDF-Eigenschaften" - -\end_inset - - erklärt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Mathe-Optionen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit diesen Optionen können Sie LyX zwingen, die LaTeX-Pakete -\series bold -amsmath -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! amsmath -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\series bold -esint -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! esint -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\series bold -mathdots -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! mathdots -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - und -\series bold -mhchem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! mhchem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, direkt zu benutzen oder automatisch, wenn sie benötigt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -amsmath wird für viele Konstrukte benötigt. - Wenn Sie viele LaTeX-Fehlermeldungen in Formeln bekommen, vergewissern - Sie sich, dass Sie -\family typewriter - -\family sans -AMS-Mathe -\family default - aktiviert haben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -esint wird für spezielle Integralzeichen benötigt, siehe Abschnitt -\emph on -Große -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Operatoren -\emph default - des -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default - Handbuchs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mathdots wird für spezielle Fortsetzungspunkte benötigt, siehe Abschnitt - -\emph on -Fortsetzungspunkte -\emph default - des -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default - Handbuchs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mhchem wird für chemische Gleichungen benötigt, siehe Abschnitt -\emph on -Chemische Symbole und Reaktionsgleichungen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default - Handbuchs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Gleitobjekt-Platzierung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Gleitobjekt-Platzierungsoptionen sind in Abschnitt -\emph on -Beschriftungs-Platzierung -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Listing -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Listing-Einstellungen sind in Kapitel -\emph on -Programm-Code-Listen -\emph default - des -\emph on -Eingebettete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Objekte -\emph default - Handbuchs beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Auflistungszeichen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier können Sie die Zeichen für die verschiedenen Auflistungsebenen einstellen. - Die Auflistung-Umgebung ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Auflistung" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Zweige -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Zweige sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Zweige" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Ausgabe -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier können Sie einige Spezifika für die Ausgabe des Dokuments festlegen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Voreingestelltes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ausgabeformat: Das Format, welches verwendet wird, wenn Sie im Menü -\family sans -Ansicht -\family default - oder der Werkzeugleiste -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Ansehen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Aktualisieren -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Hauptdokument ansehen -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - oder -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Hauptdokument aktualisieren -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - anklicken. - Die Standard-Einstellung wird in -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dateiformate -\family default - festgelegt, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Mit -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ausgabe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -synchronisieren Einstellungen für das Menü -\family sans -Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Vorwärtssuche -\family default -. - Siehe Abschnitt -\emph on -DVI/PDF Rückwärtssuche -\emph default - der -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - für eine detaillierte Beschreibung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -XHTML-Ausgabe-Optionen Einstellungen für das Export-Format -\family sans -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -XHTML -\family default -. - -\family sans -Striktes XHTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.1 -\family default - stellt sicher, das die Ausgabe exakt mit Version -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.1 des XHTML-Standards übereinstimmt. - Die verschiedenen Einstellungen für die -\family sans -Mathe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ausgabe -\family default - sind im Detail in Abschnitt -\emph on -Mathe-Ausgabe in XHTML -\emph default - der -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - beschrieben. - Die Skalierung wird für die Größe von Gleichungen in der Ausgabe verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LaTeX-Vorspann -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Er enthält LaTeX-Befehle, die nicht zum Klassenstandard gehören. - Dies ist etwas für LaTeX-Experten. - Eine Einführung in die LaTeX-Syntax finden Sie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Der Einstellungen-Dialog -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:Der-Einstellungen-Dialog" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Einstellungen-Dialog wird über das Menü -\family sans -Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen -\family default - aufgerufen. - Er besitzt die folgenden Untermenüs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Aussehen & Handhabung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Benutzeroberfläche -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -UI-Datei -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anpassung ! der Werkzeugleisten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anpassung ! der Menüs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das Erscheinungsbild der Menüs und Werkzeugleisten kann durch die Auswahl - einer Benutzerinterface-Datei (UI) geändert werden. - Eine UI-Datei ist eine Textdatei in der die Werkzeugleisten und Menüs aufgelist -et sind. - Die Datei -\emph on -default.ui -\emph default - lädt drei Dateien: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdmenus.inc -\shape italic - -\emph on -legt die Menüeinträge für die Standard-Menüs fest -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdcontext.inc legt die Menüeinträge für die Popup/Kontext-Menüs fest -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdtoolbars.inc -\shape italic -\emph on -legt fest welche Werkzeugleistenknöpfe es gibt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um eigene Menü- und Werkzeugleisten-Gestaltungen zu erstellen, fängt man - mit einer Kopie dieser Dateien an und editiert die Einträge. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Syntax der .inc-Dateien ist selbsterklärend: Die -\family sans -Menubar -\family default -, -\family sans -Menu -\family default - und -\family sans -Toolbar -\family default --Einträge müssen mit einem -\family sans -End -\family default - beendet werden. - Sie können -\family sans -Submenu -\family default -, -\family sans -Item -\family default -, -\family sans -OptItem -\family default -, -\family sans -Separator -\family default -, -\family sans -Icon -\family default - und im Fall des Menüs -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -file_lastfiles -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - einen -\family sans -Lastfiles -\family default --Eintrag enthalten. - Die Syntax für die Einträge ist: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Item -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Menü -\series default -oder -\series bold - Knopfname -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -LyX-Funktion -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - -Alle LyX-Funktionen sind im Menü -\family sans -Hilfe\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Funktionen -\family default - aufgelistet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein Beispiel: Angenommen Sie verwenden das Menü -\family sans -Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Lesezeichen -\family default - recht oft und würden daher gerne sechs verfügbare Lesezeichen haben. - Dann können Sie diese Zeile -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Item -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Lesezeichen 6 speichern -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -bookmark-save 6 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - -zum Menü -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -navigate_bookmarks -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - in der Datei -\emph on -stdmenus.inc -\emph default - hinzufügen und haben dann das sechste Lesezeichen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit -\family sans - Symbldesign -\family default - kann das Aussehen von LyXs Werkzeugleisten geändert werden. - Die derzeit verfügbaren Symboldesigns sind in -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "diesem Bild" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" - -\end_inset - - gegenübergestellt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Automatische Hilfe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Tooltips im Hauptarbeitsbereich aktivieren -\family default - aktiviert Tooltips, die den Inhalt von geschlossenen Einfügungen wie Indexeintr -ägen oder Fußnoten anzeigt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Sitzung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit der Option -\family sans -Aussehen und Größe von Fenstern wiederherstellen -\family default - wird LyXs Hauptfenster mit der Größe und dem Aussehen geöffnet, das in - der letzten LyX-Sitzung benutzt wurde. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Cursor-Positionen wiederherstellen -\family default - setzt den Cursor auf die Position in der Datei, wo er beim letzten Mal - war. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Geöffnete Dateien der letzten Sitzung laden -\family default - öffnet alle Dateien, die in der letzten LyX-Sitzung geöffnet waren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Der Knopf -\family sans -Lösche alle Sitzungsinformationen -\family default - löscht alle Informationen von vorherigen LyX-Sitzungen (Cursorpositionen, - Namen der zuletzt geöffneten Dokumente, usw.). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Dokumente -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Sicherung-Dokumente" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sicherung ! Dokumente -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Sichere Originaldokumente beim Speichern -\family default - erstellt eine Sicherungskopie der Datei im Zustand, in dem sie geöffnet - oder das letzte mal gespeichert wurde. - Sie wird im -\family sans -Sicherungsverzeichnis -\family default - (siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Pfade" - -\end_inset - -) gespeichert oder im selben Ordner wie Ihr Dokument, wenn kein -\family sans -Sicherungsverzeichnis -\family default - vorgegeben ist. - Sie wird im selben Ordner wie Ihr Dokument oder im -\family sans -Sicherungsverzeichnis -\family default - gespeichert, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Pfade" - -\end_inset - -. - Die Sicherungsdateien haben die Endung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -.lyx~ -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit der Option -\family sans - Sicherung der Dokumente alle -\family default - kann die Zeit zwischen den Sicherungsspeicherungen eingestellt werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Dokumente komprimiert speichern -\family default - speichert die Dateien immer in einem komprimierten Format. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Maximale Anzahl letzter Dateien -\family default - ist die Anzahl der zuletzt von LyX geöffneten Dateien, die LyX im Menü - -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Zuletzt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -geöffnet -\family default - anzeigen soll. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn die Option -\family sans -Dokument in Registerkarten öffnen -\family default - nicht verwendet wird, wird jede Datei in einer eigenen Instanz von LyX - geöffnet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Einzelinstanz -\family default - ist nur aktiv, wenn eine LyX-Server-Weiterleitung -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Pfade" - -\end_inset - - für Informationen über die LyX-Server-Weiterleitung. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - eingerichtet wurde. - Wenn sie ausgewählt ist, werden LyX-Dokumente, in der selben Instanz von - LyX geöffnet. - Ansonsten wird für jede Datei eine neue Instanz von LyX erzeugt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit der Option -\family sans -Globaler Knopf zum Schließen von Registerkarten -\family default - gibt es nur einen Knopf ( -\family sans - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/closetab.png - scale 75 - -\end_inset - - -\family default -) auf der rechten Seite der Reiterleiste um Registerkarten zu schließen. - Ansonsten hat jede Registerkarte ihren eigenen Knopf zum Schließen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Für die letzte Option muss LyX neu gestartet werden, ehe die Änderung aktiv - wird. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Bildschirmschriften -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Bildschirmschriften" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Schrift ! Bildschirm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Diese Schriften werden verwendet, um Ihr Dokument auf dem Bildschirm in - LyX anzuzeigen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Dieser Abschnitt behandelt nur die Schriften -\emph on -innerhalb -\emph default - des LyX-Hauptfensters. - Die Schriften, die für die Ausgabe verwendet werden, sind davon unabhängig - und werden im Menü -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Schriften -\family default -eingestellt. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Standardmäßig verwendet LyX -\family typewriter -Times -\family default - als Serifenschrift, -\family typewriter -Arial -\family default - oder -\family typewriter -Helvetica -\family default - (hängt vom System ab) als -\family sans -serifenlose -\family default - Schrift und -\family typewriter -Courier -\family default - als -\family typewriter -Schreibmaschine -\family default --Schrift. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Schriftgröße kann über die -\family sans -Zoom -\family default --Einstellung geändert werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die -\family sans -Schriftgrößen -\family default - werden als Buchstabenhöhe in Einheiten von Punkten berechnet. - 72,27 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Punkte haben die Größe von 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Zoll, siehe Anhang -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "chap:In-LyX-verfügbare" - -\end_inset - -. - Die voreingestellten Schriftgrößen sind dieselben als würde eine Dokument-Schri -ftgröße von 10 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt verwendet werden. - The Größen sind im Detail in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Dokumentschrift-und-Schriftgröße" - -\end_inset - - erläutert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mit der aktivierten Option -\family sans -Pixmap-Zwischenspeicher benutzen, um die Darstellung von Zeichen zu beschleunige -n -\family default - muss LyX seltener die Bildschirmanzeige erneuern. - Dies führt zu einer besseren Performanz, besonders auf langsameren Rechnern. - Allerdings könnten die Zeichen verpixelt aussehen. - Ob es sich lohnt diese Option zu aktivieren, müssen Sie also ausprobieren. - Man beachte dass der Pixmap Cache nur unter Mac -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -OS und Windows verfügbar und nützlich ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Farben -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Farbe ! LyX-Bildschirm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Farbe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier können alle Farben, die LyX verwendet, geändert werden. - Wählen Sie einen Eintrag in der Liste aus und drücken den Knopf -\family sans -Ändern -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Durch die Option -\family sans -Systemfarben verwenden -\family default - wird das Farbschema Ihres Betriebssystems oder Fenstermanagers benutzt. - Die Farben -\family sans -Auswahl, Cursor, Tabelle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Linie), Text, URL -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Marke) -\family default - und -\family sans -URL -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Text) -\family default - sind dann nicht veränderbar und daher nicht aufgelistet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Anzeige -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Anzeige -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier kann festgelegt werden, ob Grafiken in LyX dargestellt werden sollen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Sofortige Vorschau -\family default - aktiviert die sofortige Vorschau von Dokumentteilen. - Dieses Feature ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dokumentteile-vorschauen" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Absatzenden -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -markieren -\family default - zeigt ein Absatzzeichen (¶) am Ende jedes Absatzes an. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Bearbeiten -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Bearbeiten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Kontrolle -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Bearbeiten -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Cursor folgt Scrollbar -\family default - setzt den Cursor an den Anfang des aktuell angezeigten Dokumentteils wenn - gescrollt wird. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann die Dicke des Cursors einstellen. - Wird die Dicke auf Null gesetzt, wird die Cursordicke realtiv zum eingestellten - Zoom der Bildschirmschriften skaliert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Unter das Ende des Dokuments scrollen -\family default - ist selbsterklärend. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -In LyX kann man von Wort zu Wort springen, indem man -\family sans -Strg+Pfeiltaste -\family default - drückt. - Mit der Option -\family sans -Cursornavigation zwischen Wörtern im Mac-Stil -\family default - springt der Cursor vom Wortende zum Wortende des nächsten Wortes. - Normalerweise springt er von Anfang zu Anfang. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Absatzlayouts alphabetisch sortieren -\family default - sortiert die Einträge im pull-down Menü der Absatzumgebungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Option -\family sans -Absatzlayouts nach Kategorien gruppieren -\family default - gruppiert die Einträge im pull-down Menü der Absatzumgebungen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Mathe-Makro Optionen legen den Editierstil von Makros fest, siehe den - Abschnitt -\emph on -Mathe-Makros -\emph default - des -\emph on -Mathe -\emph default - Handbuchs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Vollbild -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier kann eingestellt werden, was im Vollbildmodus ausgeblendet wird. - Die Option -\family sans -Begrenze Textbreite -\family default - legt die Breite des Textes im Vollbildmodus fest. - Auf diese Weise kann der Text schmaler als der Bildschirm angezeigt werden. - Der Text erscheint dann zentriert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tastenkürzel -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tastenkürzel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Tastenkürzel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Tastenkürzel-Datei -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Tastaturkürzel-Datei -\family default - gibt an, welche Datei benutzt wird, um LyX-Funktionen mit einem Tastenkürzel - zu verknüpfen. - Es gibt mehrere Dateien; darunter: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -cua.bind ist die gebräuchlichste Tastaturkürzel-Datei für PCs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -(x)emacs.bind definiert Tastaturkürzel so, wie es beim Editor (X)Emacs üblich - ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mac.bind macht dasselbe für MacOS-Systeme. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt auch Tastaturkürzel-Dateien für spezielle Dokumentklassen, wie -\shape italic -broadway.bind -\shape default -, und für Sprachen. - Der Name einer Tastaturkürzel-Datei für Sprachen beginnt mit dem Sprach-Code, - zum Beispiel -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -pt -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - für Portugiesisch. - Wenn Sie LyX für eine spezielle Sprache benutzen, wird es die entsprechende - Tastaturkürzel-Datei benutzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Einige Tastaturkürzel-Dateien wie -\shape italic -math.bind -\shape default - haben nur einen kleinen Anwendungsbereich. - Schaut man ans Ende der Datei -\shape italic -cua.bind -\shape default -, sieht man, dass diese eingebunden sind um den Überblick in der bind-Datei - zu erhalten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Feld -\family sans -Zeige -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tastenkürzel, die Folgendes enthalten -\family default -kann man nach den Kürzeln für eine bestimmte Funktion in der gewählten Tastenkür -zel-Datei suchen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Tastenkürzel bearbeiten -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Tastenkürzel-bearbeiten" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tastenkürzel ! bearbeiten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um ein Tastaturkürzel zu bearbeiten o der ein neues zu definieren, können - Sie die Tabelle benutzen, die alle LyX-Funktionen und ihre Tastaturkürzel - enthält. - Um sie leichter zu finden, sind sie nach Funktionen gruppiert. - Mit Hilfe von -\family sans -Zeige -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Tastaturkürzel, -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -die -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Folgendes -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -enthalten -\family default -, können Sie vorhandene Tastaturkürzel finden. - Wenn Sie zum Beispiel -\emph on -paste -\emph default - eingeben, werden die vier vorhandenen Tastaturkürzel für die drei verschiedenen - Funktionen, in deren Name -\emph on -paste -\emph default - vorkommt, angezeigt. - Sie sehen, dass eine Funktion mehrere Tastaturkürzel besitzen kann. - Außerdem sind alle LyX-Funktionen im gleichnamigen Handbuch aufgelistet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um zum Beispiel das Tastaturkürzel -\family sans -Alt+Q -\family default - für die LyX-Funktion -\family sans -textstyle-apply -\family default - hinzuzufügen, suchen Sie sie, markieren sie und klicken auf -\family sans -Ändern -\family default -. - Es erscheint ein Dialogfenster, in dem Sie das Tastaturkürzel einfügen - können, indem Sie es benutzen (Alt drücken, gedrückt halten, dann Q drücken). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ein vorhandenes Tastaturkürzel wird ebenso geändert. - Sie auch mehrere Funktionen einem Tastaturkürzel zuordnen, indem Sie die - LyX-Funktion mit -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -command alternatives -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - beginnen und die verschiedenen Funktionen, durch Kommas getrennt, anfügen. - LyX wird dann für das Tastaturkürzel die erste Funktion benutzen, die im - gerade bearbeiteten Dokumentteil aktiv ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Falls Ihnen ein bestimmtes Tastenkürzel nicht gefällt, können Sie es löschen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alternativ können Sie natürlich auch die entsprechende Tastaturkürzel-Datei - mit einem Editor bearbeiten. - Die Syntax für ein Kürzel ist -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -bind -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Tastaturkürzel -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -LyX-Funktion -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tastatur / Maus -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Tastatur-/-Maus" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tastaturtabelle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Tastaturtabelle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalerweise werden Tastatureinstellungen in einem Menü des Betriebssystems - vorgenommen. - Für den Fall, dass dies nicht möglich ist, bietet LyX Tastaturtabellen - an. - Wenn Sie z. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -B. - eine tschechische Tastatur haben, aber mit ihr wie mit einer rumänischen - schreiben wollen, können Sie die Option -\family sans -Tastaturtabelle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -verwenden -\family default - aktivieren und die Tastaturtabellen-Datei namens -\shape italic -romanian.kmap -\shape default - auswählen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sie können eine -\family sans -Erste -\family default - und eine -\family sans -Zweite -\family default - Tastaturtabelle definieren und, wenn Sie die -\emph on -cua -\emph default - Tastaturkürzel verwenden, die erste mit -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-primary" -\end_inset - - und die zweite mit -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-secondary" -\end_inset - - auswählen oder mit -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-toggle" -\end_inset - - zwischen beiden hin- und herschalten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Hinweis: -\series default - Tastaturtabellen werden nur als Notbehelf angeboten und funktionieren nicht - auf allen Systemen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Man kann außerdem hier die -\family sans -Mausrad-Scrollgeschwindigkeit -\family default - einstellen. - Der Standardwert ist 1.0, höhere Werte beschleunigen das Scrollen, niedrigere - verlangsamen es. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Im Abschnitt -\family sans -Textgröße mit dem Mausrad einstellen -\family default - kann eine Taste für das Zoomen ausgewählt werden. - Wenn diese Taste gedrückt und das Mausrad gedreht wird, wird der Text gezoomt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Eingabevervollständigung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Eingabevervollständigung ist in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Eingabevervollständigung-general" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Pfade -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Pfade" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pfade -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Pfade -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Pfade zu den verschiedenen, von LyX verwendeten Ressourcen werden normalerwe -ise während der Installation festgelegt. - Es kann aber Gründe geben diese zu ändern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Arbeitsverzeichnis Dieses Verzeichnis öffnet LyX, wenn Sie im Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Öffnen -\family default - auf -\family sans -Dokumente -\family default - klicken. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Dokumentvorlagen Dieses Verzeichnis öffnet LyX, wenn Sie -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Neu -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -von -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -Vorlage -\family default - wählen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Beispieldateien Dieses Verzeichnis öffnet LyX, wenn Sie im Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Öffnen -\family default - auf -\family sans -Beispiele -\family default - klicken. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Achtung: -\series default - Der Knopf -\family sans -Beispiele -\family default - existiert nicht bei LyX unter Windows oder Mac OS. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sicherungsverzeichnis -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sicherung ! Verzeichnis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - In diesem Verzeichnis werden Sicherungen gespeichert. - Wenn kein Sicherungsverzeichnis angegeben ist, aber Sicherungen wie in - Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Sicherung-Dokumente" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben, aktiviert sind, wird das -\family sans -Arbeitsverzeichnis -\family default - für die Sicherungen verwendet. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Sicherungsdateien haben die Endung -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -.lyx~ -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Server-Weiterleitung Hier wird der Name einer sogenannten UNIX-Pipe angegeben. - Über diese werden Daten aus externen Programmen an LyX gesendet. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Beispiel: -\series default - Sie fügen die Literaturdatenbank -\emph on -test.bib -\emph default - dem Dokument hinzu. - Diese können Sie mit dem Programm -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - bearbeiten. - In -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - ist für LyX in dessen Einstellungen unter -\family sans -Externe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Programme -\family default - die gleiche Unix-Pipe wie hier einzutragen. - Wollen Sie sich jetzt einen Eintrag aus der Datenbank als Literaturverweis - einfügen, wählen Sie diesen in -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - aus und klicken auf das LyX-Symbol. - Es wird im aktuellen LyX-Dokument an der Cursor-Position der Literaturverweis - eingefügt. - -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - und LyX müssen natürlich beide laufen. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Die Pipe wird auch für das Feature -\family sans -Einzelinstanz -\family default - verwendet, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Sicherung-Dokumente" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Um die LyX-Server-Weiterleitung auf Windows zu verwenden, muss dieser Pipename - verwendet werden: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash - -\backslash -. -\backslash -pipe -\backslash -lyxpipe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Tempor -\family sans -ä -\family default -res -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Verzeichnis Hier speichert LyX alle temporären Daten einer Sitzung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Thesaurus-Wörterbücher Verzeichnis wo sich die Thesaurus-Wörterbücher befinden. - Es muss nur angegeben werden, wenn der Thesaurus sonst nicht funktioniert - oder Sie eigene/alternative Wörterbücher verwenden wollen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hunspell-Wörterbücher Verzeichnis wo sich die Wörterbücher des Rechtschreibprüfu -ngsprogramms -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - befinden. - Es muss nur angegeben werden, wenn Sie -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - verwenden und die Rechtschreibprüfung sonst nicht funktioniert oder Sie - eigene/alternative Wörterbücher verwenden wollen. - Für LyX unter Windows ist -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - das einzige verfügbare Rechtschreibprüfungsprogramm und sollte ohne Angabe - eines Verzeichnisses funktionieren. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PATH-Präfix Diese Feld enthält eine Liste mit Pfaden zu externen Programmen. - Wenn LyX ein externes Programm benötigt, wird in der Liste nachgesehen, - wo es zu finden ist. - Für Windows und Mac wird diese Liste automatisch bei der Konfiguration - von LyX erstellt, sodass Sie sie normalerweise nicht ändern müssen. - Auf Linux/Unix-Systemen muss sie nur dann erstellt werden, wenn externe - Programme benutzt werden sollen, die nicht in $PATH stehen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -TEXINPUTS-Präfix Die TEXINPUTS Umgebungsvariable erlaubt es externe Dateien, - die in LyX-Dokumenten mittels Befehlen als TeX-Code oder im LaTeX-Vorspann - eingefügt wurden, zu verwenden. - Dieser Präfix enthält standardmäßig das Dokumentverzeichnis (durch einen - Punkt '.' repräsentiert). - Der Präfix kann jede Liste an Pfaden enthalten, die durch das Standard-Trennzei -chen des Betriebssystems (':' auf UNIX-artigen Systemen und ';' auf Windows) - getrennt sind. - Falls Dateien eingefügt werden, werden die Pfade, die im TEXINPUTS-Präfix - aufgelistet sind, nach den den eingefügten Dateien gescannt. - Es ist zu beachten, dass jeder nicht-absolute Pfad im TEXINPUTS-Präfix - als relativ zum Verzeichnis Ihrer LyX-Datei betrachtet wird. - Es ist empfohlen, immer '.' als einen der Pfade anzugeben, ansonsten könnte - die Ausgabe für einige Dokumente fehlschlagen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Identität -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier können Sie Ihren Namen und Ihre E-Mail-Adresse eingeben. - Die Identität wird verwendet, um Änderungen die Sie machen, als Ihre zu - markieren, wenn Änderungsverfolgung, wie in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Änderungsverfolgung" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben, aktiviert ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Spracheinstellungen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sprache ! Einstellungen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Sprache -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Sprache -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Spracheinstellungen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sprache -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Benutzeroberfläche Hier kann die Sprache der LyXs Menüs eingestellt werden. - Der aktuelle Übersetzungsstatus ist hier zu finden: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sprachpaket legt fest, welches LaTeX-Paket für die Sprachunterstützung geladen - werden soll. - Zur Sprachunterstützung zählen Silbentrennmuster ebenso wie die Lokalisation - von Daten und von Klassen verwendeten Ausdrücken wie -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Kapitel -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und Tabelle -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. - Das verbreitetste Sprachpaket ist -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, das Standard-Sprachpaket im klassischen LaTeX. - Für moderne TeX-Alternativen wie XeTeX und LuaTeX gibt es allerdings das - alternative Sprachpaket -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, welches die umfassende Unterstützung dieser Programme für verschiedenartige - Schriftsysteme voll ausnutzt. - Außerdem gibt es auch noch spezifische Sprachpakete für Sprachen, die von - babel (noch) nicht unterstützt werden. - Die möglichen Einstellungen sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Sprache" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Befehl -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Anfang Wenn ein besonderes LaTeX-Paket benötigt wird, um in einer gewissen - Dokumentsprache zu schreiben, können Sie hier den Befehl zum Start des - Paketes eingeben. - Ein Beispiel ist der Befehl -\series bold - -\backslash -begin{arabtext} -\series default -, der gebraucht wird, um mithilfe des Paketes -\series bold -ArabTeX -\series default - Arabisch zu schreiben, siehe -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - -. - Standard ist der -\series bold -babel -\series default --Befehl -\series bold - -\backslash -selectlanguage{$$lang} -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Befehl -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ende ist das Gegenstück zu -\family sans -Befehl -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Anfang -\family default -. - Einige Pakete wie das Standardpaket haben keinen Endbefehl, weil der Startbefeh -l das Paket an- und abschaltet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Standard-Dezimalzeichen Legen Sie hier den Standard-Dezimaltrenner fest, - welcher für die Ausrichtung am Dezimalzeichen in Tabellen verwendet wird. - Voreingestellt ist der Punkt, im Deutschen wird in der Regel aber ein Komma - verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sprachen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -global -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -definieren Wenn diese Option gesetzt wird, werden die im Dokument benutzten - Sprachen zu den Klassenoptionen des Dokuments hinzugefügt, sodass sie von - allen LaTeX-Paketen benutzt werden können. - Sonst werden sie nur als Optionen von -\family typewriter -babel -\family default - benutzt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Auto-Beginn Wenn diese Option gesetzt wird, starten die Dokumente mit der - gewählten Dokumentsprache. - Wenn nicht, wird der Befehl -\family sans -\series bold -Befehl -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Anfang -\family default -\series default - explizit an den Anfang der LaTeX-Ausgabe des Dokuments geschrieben. - Damit wird sichergestellt, dass die richtige Sprache benutzt wird, wenn - Sie in -\family sans -\series bold -Befehl -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Anfang -\family default -\series default -nicht die Standardeinstellung benutzen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Auto-Ende ist das Gegenstück zu -\family sans -\series bold -Auto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Beginn -\family default -\series default -. - Wenn es nicht gesetzt ist, wird der -\family sans -\series bold -Befehl -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ende -\family default -\series default - ans Ende des Dokuments geschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fremdsprachen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -markieren Wenn Sie dies ankreuzen, werden Texte in einer anderen Sprache - als der Standard-Sprache unterstrichen, standardmäßig blau. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Rechts-nach-links-Sprachunterstützung für die entsprechenden Sprachen wie - Arabisch, Hebräisch, Persisch. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -RNL-Unterstützung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -aktivieren aktiviert Unterstützung für Sprachen, die von rechts nach links - geschrieben werden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cursorbewegung legt fest, wie der Cursor sich bei RNL-Sprachen verhält, - wenn sie die Pfeil-rechts- oder Pfeil-links-Taste drücken. - -\family sans -Logisch -\family default - bedeutet, dass der Cursor nach links bewegt wird, wenn Sie die Pfeil-rechts-Tas -te drücken, während sich der Cursor in einer RNL-Passage befindet. - Diese Einstellung ist vor allem in gemischten Texten (RNL und LNR) sinnvoll, - da die Cursorbewegung dann einer einheitlichen Textlogik folgt. - -\family sans -Visuell -\family default - bedeutet, dass sich der Cursor in die Richtung bewegt, in die auch die - Pfeile zeigen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Rechtschreibprüfung -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Die Rechtschreibprüfungseinstellungen sind in Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rechtschreibprüfung" - -\end_inset - - beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Ausgabe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Allgemein -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ausgabe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Zeilenlänge legt die maximale Anzahl an Zeichen pro Zeile fest, die für - das Menü -\family sans -Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einfacher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Text -\family default - verwendet wird. - Wird die Zeilenlänge auf 0 gesetzt, wird der komplette Text in einer endlos - langen Zeile ausgegeben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Datumsformat -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Datumsformat -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Datumsformat -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Das Datumsformat kann eines oder eine Mischung der hier aufgelisteten Formate - sein: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Zum Beispiel gibt das Format -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -%d/%m/%y -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -das Datum in der Form Tag/Monat/Jahr aus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Beim -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Export -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -überschreiben Einstellung was LyX erlaubt ist zu überschreiben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Vorwärtssuche Befehle, die für das Menü -\family sans -Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Vorwärtssuche -\family default - verwendet werden. - Siehe Abschnitt -\emph on -DVI/PDF Rückwärtssuche -\emph default - der -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - für eine detaillierte Beschreibung. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Drucker -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Drucker" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Drucker -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Drucker -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Standard-Drucker Hier können Sie den Namen Ihres Standard-Druckers eintragen. - Der Name wird dann beim -\family sans -Druckbefehl -\family default - übernommen. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Hinweis: -\series default - Dieses Feld kann unter Windows leer gelassen werden, da es keinen Effekt - hat. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Druckbefehl ist der Befehl, den LyX/LaTeX zum Drucken benutzt. - Der Standard ist bei den meisten Systemen -\family sans -dvips -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Optionen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -für -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Druckbefehl Hier können Sie Drucker-Optionen angeben. - Eine Liste mit Drucker-Optionen und Erläuterungen finden Sie in der Dokumentati -on des Programms dessen -\family sans -Druckbefehl -\family default - Sie verwenden. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ausgabe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -an -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -den -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Drucker -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -anpassen Diese Option funktioniert nur für den -\family sans -Druckbefehl -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -dvips -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - und ist für Experten gedacht. - Sie aktiviert eine Konfigurationsdatei für dvips. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-Einstellungen" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Fontkodierung -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -verwenden Dies ist die Standard-Kodierung der Dokumentschrift. - -\family sans -T1 -\family default - ist der Standard und deckt westliche Sprachen und Symbole ab. - -\family sans -T2A -\family default -, -\family sans -T2B -\family default -, -\family sans -T2C -\family default -, -\family sans -LCY -\family default - und -\family sans -X2 -\family default - werden für Kyrillisch verwendet. - Kombinationen der Kodierungen wie -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -T1, T2B -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - sind möglich. - Die Schriftkodierung wird normalerweise automatisch von den Sprachpaketen - geladen, die LyX im Hintergund verwendet. - Man muss die Standard-Kodierung also nicht ändern. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Standard-Papiergröße Dies ist die Papiergröße die für neue Dokumente verwendet - wird. - Der -\family sans -Standard -\family default - Wert hängt von den LaTeX-Systemeinstellungen ab. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Papiergrößen-Optionen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -DVI-Betrachters Diese haben nur einen Effekt, wenn das Programm -\family sans -xdvi -\family default - als DVI-Betrachter verwendet wird; siehe dessen Handbuch für weitere Informatio -nen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Des Weiteren können hier Optionen und Befehle mit Parametern für die aufgelistet -en Prozessoren angegeben werden. - Bevor Sie aber etwas ändern, sollten Sie vorher unbedingt in die Handbücher - der Prozessoren geschaut haben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Literaturverzeichnis-Erzeugung Einstellungen für die Erstellung des Literaturver -zeichnisses, siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Indexerzeugung Einstellungen für die Erstellung des Stichwortverzeichnisses, - siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Stichwort-Programm" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Nomenklarturbefehl Befehl für das Programm, das die Nomenklatur erstellt, - siehe Abschnitt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Nomenklatur-Programm" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -CheckTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X-Befehl Befehl für das Programm -\family sans -CheckTeX -\family default -, das im Abschnitt -\emph on -TeX prüfen -\emph default - der -\emph on -Handbuchergänzungen -\emph default - beschrieben ist. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es gibt zusätzlich die folgenden Optionen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Verwende -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -windowskonforme -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Pfade -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -in -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTeX-Dateien Verwendet Pfade in der Notation von Windows; das bedeutet, - dass -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - - -\backslash - -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - anstelle von -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - verwendet wird, um Verzeichnisse zu trennen. - Diese Option ist automatisch aktiv unter LyX für Windows. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pfade -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einstellungen ! Pfade -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Klassenoptionen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -beim -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Wechsel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -der -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Dokumentklasse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -zurücksetzen entfernt beim Wechsel der Dokumentklasse alle von Hand gesetzten - -\family sans -Klassenoptionen -\family default - im Dialog -\family sans -Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dokumentklasse -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Datei-Handhabung -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Datei-Handhabung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Konverter -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Konverter" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Konverter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier ist eine Liste mit definierten Konverter-Befehlen zu finden, um Material - von einem Format in ein anderes zu konvertieren. - Man kann Konverter modifizieren oder neue erstellen. - Um einen Konverter zu modifizieren, wählt man ihn aus, ändert den Eintrag - im Feld -\family sans -Konverter -\family default - und/oder -\family sans -Zusatz-Flag -\family default - und drückt den Knopf -\family sans -Ändern -\family default -. - Um einen neuen Konverter zu erstellen, wählt man einen existierenden aus, - wählt in der Dropdown-Liste -\family sans -In -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Format -\family default - ein anderes Format aus, modifiziert das Feld -\family sans -Konverter -\family default - und drückt den Knopf -\family sans -Hinzufügen -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Wenn der -\family sans -Konverterdatei-Zwischenspeicher -\family default - aktiviert ist, werden Konvertierungen so lange wie im Feld -\family sans -Maximales Alter (in Tagen -\family default -) angegeben, gespeichert. - Das bedeutet, dass Bilder nicht immer wieder konvertiert werden müssen, - wenn man ein Dokument öffnet; die konvertierten Bilder aus dem Speicher - werden stattdessen verwendet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mehr über Konverter und die Flags, die man in der Konverter-Definition verwenden - kann, ist im Abschnitt -\emph on -Konverter -\emph default - des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Dateiformate -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Dateiformate" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dateiformate -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hier findet man eine Liste mit definierten Dateiformaten, die LyX handhaben - kann. - Man kann das Betrachtungs- und Bearbeitungsprogramm ändern, das für bestimmte - Formate verwendet werden soll. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Des Weiteren kann man hier das -\family sans -Voreingestellte Ausgabeformat -\family default - festlegen, das verwendet wird, wenn man -\family sans -Ansehen, Aktualisieren, Hauptdokument ansehen -\family default - oder -\family sans -Hauptdokument aktualisieren -\family default - im Menü -\family sans -Ansicht -\family default - oder in der Werkzeugleiste aufruft. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mehr über Formate und deren Optionen, ist im Abschnitt -\emph on -Formate -\emph default - des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Da alle Konvertierungen von einem Format in ein anderes in LyXs temporärem - Verzeichnis stattfinden, ist es manchmal notwendig eine Datei zu modifizieren, - bevor sie ins temporäre Verzeichnis kopiert und dort konvertiert wird. - Dies geschieht, indem man einen -\family sans -Kopierer -\family default - angibt. - Mehr darüber ist im Abschnitt -\emph on -Kopierer -\emph default - des -\emph on -Anpassung -\emph default - Handbuchs beschrieben. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -In LyX verfügbare Maßeinheiten -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "chap:In-LyX-verfügbare" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Einheiten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Um die in diesem Handbuch verwendeten Maßeinheiten zu verstehen, erläutert - Tabelle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Maßeinheiten" - -\end_inset - - alle in LyX verfügbaren Maßeinheiten. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Maßeinheiten" - -\end_inset - -Maßeinheiten -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Maßeinheit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Name/Beschreibung -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Millimeter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zentimeter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -in -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zoll (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -in = 2.54 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Punkt (72.27 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pica (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pc = 12 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -sp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -skalierter Punkt (65536 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -sp = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -bp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -großer Punkt (72 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -bp = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -dd -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Didot (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -dd -\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ -\end_inset - - 0,376 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mm) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cicero (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cc = 12 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -dd) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Skalierung% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% der originalen Bildbreite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Textbreite % -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% der Textbreite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Spaltenbreite % -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% der Spaltenbreite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Seitenbreite % -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% der Seitenbreite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Zeilenbreite % -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% der Zeilenbreite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Texthöhe % -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% der Texthöhe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Seitenhöhe % -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% der Seitenhöhe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Die Höhe des Buchstabens -\emph on -x -\emph default - im aktiven Zeichensatz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Die Breite des Buchstabens -\emph on -M -\emph default - im aktiven Zeichensatz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mu -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mathematische Maßeinheit -\series bold - -\series default -(1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mu = 1/18 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -label "Credits" -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - -Das LyX Team: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Credits" -target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org/Credits -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexbook" - -\end_inset - -Leslie Lamport. - -\emph on -LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin: -\emph on -The LaTeX Companion. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 1994 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -A Guide to LaTeX2e, Kopka and Daly. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "texbook" - -\end_inset - -Donald E. - Knuth. - -\emph on -The TeXbook -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latex-einführung" - -\end_inset - -Helmut Kopka: -\emph on -LaTeX, Band 1 – Einführung, 2., überarbeitete Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -lage -\emph default -. - Addison-Wesley, 1996 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latex-praxisbuch" - -\end_inset - -Elke & Michael Niedermair: -\emph on -LaTeX-Praxisbuch -\emph default -, Franzis-Verlag, 2004 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "TeX-Katalog" - -\end_inset - -Der TeX-Katalog: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "LaTeXFAQ" - -\end_inset - -The LaTeX FAQ: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" - -\end_inset - - des Programms -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX-2" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" - -\end_inset - - wie man das Programm -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default - verwendet: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "makeindex" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" - -\end_inset - - des Programms -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "xindy" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" - -\end_inset - - des Programms -\family sans -xindy -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" - -\end_inset - - der AMS LaTeX-Pakete: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "caption" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-deu.pdf" - -\end_inset - - des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-deu.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" - -\end_inset - - des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" - -\end_inset - - des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" - -\end_inset - - des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" - -\end_inset - - des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "prettyref" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" - -\end_inset - - des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "refstyle" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" - -\end_inset - - des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "tipa" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Dokumentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" - -\end_inset - - des LaTeX-Pakets -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX-Paket ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX für Arabisch konfiguriert: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Armenian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX für Armenisch konfiguriert: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX fü kyrillische Sprachen konfiguriert: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Farsi" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX für Farsi konfiguriert: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Hebrew" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX für Hebräisch konfiguriert: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Japanese" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX für Japanisch konfiguriert: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Latvian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX für Lettisch konfiguriert -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX für Litauisch konfiguriert -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Mongolian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX für Mongolisch konfiguriert: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - wie man LyX für Vietnamesisch konfiguriert: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "NeuInLyX20" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wiki-Seite" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" - -\end_inset - - über neue Funktionen in -\family sans -LyX 2.0 -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -let -\backslash -mybibname -\backslash -bibname -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -bibname}{ -\backslash -mybibname -\backslash -; 2} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Der Befehl -\family typewriter - -\backslash -bibname -\family default - ist der Name des Literaturverzeichnisses in der jeweiligen Dokumentsprache. - Er wird hier mit der Nummer 2 versehen, ein zweites Verzeichnis folgt: -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex -LatexCommand bibtex -bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs" -options "../biblio/alphadin" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Das obige Literaturverzeichnis stammt aus einer BibTeX-Datenbank. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Damit die Nomenklatur auch den entspechenden Namen erhält, wurde im LaTeX-Vorspa -nn -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -nomname}{Nomenklatur} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -eingefügt. - Denn voreingestellt ist -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Nomenclature -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print -LatexCommand printnomenclature -set_width "auto" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Damit der Index den Namen -\emph on -Stichwortverzeichnis -\emph default - erhält, wurde im LaTeX-Vorspann -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -addto -\backslash -captionsngerman { -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -indexname} {Stichwortverzeichnis}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -eingefügt. - Denn voreingestellt ist -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Index -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Das Paket -\series bold -babel -\series default - sorgt dafür, dass die Legenden in der ausgewählten Sprache erscheinen. - Ehe man Legenden ändern kann, muss es geladen werden. - Außerdem wird -\series bold -babel -\series default - von LyX automatisch nach dem LaTeX-Vorspann geladen. - Das ruft aber keine Probleme hervor. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Möchte man andere Legenden ändern, ersetzt man -\series bold - -\backslash -indexname -\series default - durch -\series bold - -\backslash -name -\series default -. - Eine Auflistung der möglichen Namen findet man unter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family typewriter -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=fixnam -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Möchte man Legenden für andere Sprachen ändern, ersetzt man -\series bold -ngerman -\series default - durch die Dokumentsprache und -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -captionsgerman -\series default - durch -\series bold - -\backslash -captions -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset index_print -LatexCommand printindex -type "idx" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_body -\end_document +#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ +\lyxformat 413 +\begin_document +\begin_header +\textclass scrbook +\begin_preamble +% Präambel nicht verändern!!! +% +% Die Präambel stellt sicher, dass das Benutzerhandbuch korrekt +% in die Formate pdf, ps und dvi exportiert werden kann. +% Wenn Probleme beim Exportieren auftreten, können Sie sich +% an das LyX-Dokumentationsteam wenden. +% EMail: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org + +% wenn pdflatex benutzt wird: +\usepackage{ifpdf} +\ifpdf + +% Fonts fuer huebschere PDF-Ansichten +\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} + +\fi % Ende von: wenn pdflatex benutzt wird + +% Setzt den Link fuer Spruenge zu Gleitabbildungen +% auf den Anfang des Gelitobjekts und nicht aufs Ende +\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} + +% Ein PDF-Lesezeichen für das Inhaltsverzeichnis wird hinzugefügt +\let\myTOC\tableofcontents +\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% + \frontmatter + \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} + \myTOC + \mainmatter } + +% Damit der Index den Namen "Stichwortverzeichnis" erhält +\addto\captionsngerman{\renewcommand{\indexname}{Stichwortverzeichnis}} + +% define a short command for \textvisiblespace +\newcommand{\leer}{\textvisiblespace} + +% macro for italic page numbers in the index +\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} + +% for customized page headers/footers +% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document +\usepackage{fancyhdr} +% change header rule width +\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} + +%für deutsche Nomenlatur +\renewcommand{\eqdeclaration}[1]{, siehe Gleichung\nobreakspace(#1)} +\renewcommand{\pagedeclaration}[1]{, Seite\nobreakspace{}#1} +\renewcommand{\nomname}{Nomenklatur} + +% workaround for a makeindex bug, +% see sec. "Index Entry Order" +% only uncomment this when you are using makindex +%\let\OrgIndex\index +%\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}} +\end_preamble +\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading +\use_default_options false +\begin_modules +customHeadersFooters +enumitem +\end_modules +\maintain_unincluded_children false +\language ngerman +\language_package default +\inputencoding auto +\fontencoding global +\font_roman default +\font_sans default +\font_typewriter default +\font_default_family default +\use_non_tex_fonts false +\font_sc false +\font_osf false +\font_sf_scale 100 +\font_tt_scale 100 + +\graphics default +\default_output_format default +\output_sync 0 +\bibtex_command default +\index_command default +\paperfontsize 12 +\spacing single +\use_hyperref true +\pdf_title "Das LyX-Benutzerhandbuch" +\pdf_author "LyX Team, Übersetzung und Bearbeitung : Hartmut Haase (HHa), Uwe Stöhr" +\pdf_subject "LyX" +\pdf_keywords "LyX" +\pdf_bookmarks true +\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true +\pdf_bookmarksopen false +\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 +\pdf_breaklinks true +\pdf_pdfborder false +\pdf_colorlinks true +\pdf_backref false +\pdf_pdfusetitle false +\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" +\papersize default +\use_geometry false +\use_amsmath 1 +\use_esint 1 +\use_mhchem 1 +\use_mathdots 1 +\cite_engine basic +\use_bibtopic false +\use_indices false +\paperorientation portrait +\suppress_date false +\use_refstyle 0 +\notefontcolor #0000ff +\branch Frage +\selected 1 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #00ff00 +\end_branch +\branch Antwort +\selected 0 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #aa55ff +\end_branch +\index Stichwortverzeichnis +\shortcut idx +\color #008000 +\end_index +\secnumdepth 3 +\tocdepth 2 +\paragraph_separation indent +\paragraph_indentation default +\quotes_language german +\papercolumns 1 +\papersides 2 +\paperpagestyle default +\tracking_changes false +\output_changes false +\html_math_output 0 +\html_css_as_file 0 +\html_be_strict false +\end_header + +\begin_body + +\begin_layout Title +Das LyX-Benutzerhandbuch +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Author +vom LyX-Team +\size normal + +\begin_inset Foot +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Übersetzung und Bearbeitung : Hartmut Haase ( +\noun on +HHa +\noun default +, bis März 2010), Uwe Stöhr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\size default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +Wenn Sie Anmerkungen oder Korrekturvorschläge machen wollen, schreiben Sie + bitte an: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" +target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX-Benutzerhandbuch" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Version 2.0.x +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Die neueste PDF-Version dieses Dokuments kann von hier heruntergeladen werden: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset toc +LatexCommand tableofcontents + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Einleitung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Was ist LyX? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX ist ein System zur Druckvorbereitung von Dokumenten. + Es ist ein Werkzeug, mit dem man schöne Manuskripte, verlegbare Bücher, + Geschäftsbriefe und -vorschläge und sogar Lyrik schreiben kann. + Anders als die meisten anderen +\emph on +Textverarbeitungen +\emph default + verhält es sich eher wie eine Auszeichnungssprache. + Das heißt, wenn Sie eine Abschnittsüberschrift schreiben, bezeichnen Sie + sie als +\family sans +Abschnitt +\family default +, aber nicht als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Fett, Schriftgröße 17, linksbündig, 5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mm Leerraum darunter +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + LyX kümmert sich für Sie um die Druckaufbereitung, Sie beschäftigen sich + nur mit dem Entwurf, nicht mit der Ausführung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Diese Philosophie wird viel ausführlicher in der +\emph on +Einführung +\emph default + erläutert. + Wenn Sie sie noch nicht gelesen haben, sollten Sie das jetzt tun. + Ja, wir meinen +\emph on +jetzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\emph on +Einführung +\emph default + beschreibt außerdem einige zusätzliche Dinge: das wichtigste ist das Format + der Handbücher. + Wenn Sie sie nicht lesen, werden Sie viel Zeit brauchen, um in diesem Handbuch + zu suchen. + Ihnen ist vielleicht auch mehr damit gedient, in andere Handbücher als + dieses zu schauen. + Die +\emph on +Einführung +\emph default + beschreibt das auch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Wie LyX aussieht +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie die meisten Anwendungen hat auch LyX die bekannte Menüleiste am oberen + Rand des Fensters. + Darunter befindet sich eine Werkzeugleiste mit einer Auswahlbox und verschieden +en Knöpfen. + Es gibt natürlich einen vertikalen Rollbalken und ein Hauptarbeitsbereich + um die Dokumente zu bearbeiten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt keinen vertikalen Rollbalken. + Dies ist kein Fehler, sondern Absicht. + Wenn man ein Buch liest, erwartet man, dass die Zeilen am Rand umgebrochen + werden. + Der Text rutscht dabei automatisch auf die nächste Seite, daher ist ein + horizontaler Rollbalken nicht notwendig. + Es gibt drei Fälle, bei denen Sie dennoch einen Rollbalken erwarten. + Der erste Fall sind große Bilder. + Um zu verhindern, dass sie größer als der Bildschirm dargestellt werden, + kann man in den Bildeinstellungen die Option +\family sans +Skalierung auf Bildschirm +\family default + im Tab +\family sans +LaTeX- und LyX-Optionen +\family default + verwenden. + Der zweite und dritte Fall sind Tabellen und Gleichungen, die breiter als + LyXs Hauptarbeitsbereich sind. + Man kann die Pfeiltasten benutzen um horizontal durch Tabellen zu navigieren. + Dies funktioniert leider noch nicht für Gleichungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Für eine detaillierte Beschreibung aller LyX Menüs und Werkzeugleistenknöpfe, + siehe Anhang +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Die-Benutzeroberfläche" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +HILFE +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Hilfesystem besteht aus den LyX +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Handbüchern, +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mehr über den Befehl +\series bold +"= +\series default + siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "Zusammengesetzte-Worte" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + die Sie alle direkt in LyX lesen können. + Wählen Sie einfach das gewünschte Dokument aus dem Menü +\family sans +Hilfe +\family default + aus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LyX-Grundeinstellungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Grundeinstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "LyX-Grundeinstellungen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nahezu alle Features von LyX können über das Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + konfiguriert werden. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Grundeinstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + LyX kann Ihr System inspizieren, um zu sehen welche Programme, LaTeX-Dokumentkl +assen und LaTeX-Pakete verfügbar sind. + Diese Informationen werden verwendet, um sinnvolle Voreinstellungen für + die LyX-Grundeinstellungen festzulegen. + Die Konfiguration wird bereits bei der Installation durchgeführt. + Allerdings können später installierte Dinge wie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B, LaTeX-Klassen nicht detektiert werden. + In diesem Fall muss LyX über das Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Neu +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +konfigurieren +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Neukonfiguration von LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + neu konfiguriert werden. + Sie sollten dann LyX neu starten um sicherzustellen, dass die Änderungen + verwendet werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LaTeX-Einstellung +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:LaTeX-Einstellung" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX ! -Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können Dokumente in LyX bearbeiten ohne LaTeX installiert zu haben, + aber sie können dann keine PDFs erzeugen oder drucken. + Einige LyX-Dokumente benutzen jedoch z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + DocBook als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Backend +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + das PDFs erzeugen kann. + Des Weiteren können Sie LyX-Dokumente jederzeit als reine Textdatei oder + XHTML ausgeben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Manche Dokumentklassen benötigen spezielle LaTeX- oder DocBook-Pakete. + Wenn sie nicht installiert sind, können Sie diese Dokumentklassen trotzdem + verwenden, nur keine Ausgabe erzeugen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die LaTeX-Pakete die LyX auf Ihrem System gefunden hat, sind in einer Datei + aufgelistet, die Sie über das Menü +\family sans +Hilfe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Konfiguration +\family default + anschauen können. + Wenn sie Pakete vermissen, die sie benötigen, müssen Sie das fehlende Paket + installieren und LyX anschließend über das Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Neu +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +konfigurieren +\family default + neu konfigurieren. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Neukonfiguration von LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Installation eines neuen LaTeX-Paketes +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs für mehr Informationen wie man Pakete installiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Mit LyX arbeiten +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Einfache Datei-Befehle +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Menü +\family sans +Datei +\family default + finden Sie die 10 einfachen Datei-Befehle einer jeden Textverarbeitung + und einige fortgeschrittene: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Neu (Strg+N) +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/buffer-new.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Neu von +\family default + +\family sans +Vorlage (Strg+Umschalt+N) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Öffnen (Strg+O) +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/file-open.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Schließen (Strg+W) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Speichern (Strg+S) +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/buffer-write.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Speichern +\family default + +\family sans +unter (Strg+Umschalt+S) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Alles speichern +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Speicherung wieder herstellen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Drucken (Strg+P) +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show_print.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Beenden (Strg+Q) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bis auf ein paar kleine Unterschiede machen sie dasselbe wie bei jeder anderen + Textverarbeitung. + Der Menüpunkt +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Neu +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +von +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Vorlage +\family default + listet alle verfügbaren Vorlagen auf. + Mit der Auswahl einer Vorlagedatei werden automatisch verschiedene Layout-Einst +ellungen aktiviert, die Sie sonst von Hand verändern müssten. + Derartige Vorlagen können für alle möglichen Textklassen verwendet werden, + sie bieten sich aber vor allem für Briefe an (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sub:Dokumentklassen" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Hinweis: +\series default + Es gibt keine Standarddatei oder ein Dokument +\emph on +unbenannt +\emph default +, das automatisch geladen wird. + Solange Sie nicht selber eine Datei öffnen oder neu anlegen, ist der leere + Bereich auf dem Bildschirm genau das – ein großer, leerer Bereich. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Befehl +\family sans +Speicherung +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +wieder +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +herstellen +\family default + lädt das aktuelle Dokument neu von der Festplatte. + Damit können Sie einen Text, den Sie aus Versehen editiert haben, wieder + in den Originalzustand bringen, außerdem ist er hilfreich, wenn mehrere + Personen an einem Text arbeiten. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Wenn Sie das vorhaben, sollten Sie sich die Unterstützung für Versionskontrolle + im Dokument +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + ansehen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der letzte Hinweis betrifft die Menüpunkte +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Schließen +\family default + und +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Beenden +\family default +. + Wenn Sie eine bearbeitete Datei schließen oder LyX beenden wollen, werden + Sie gefragt, ob Sie vorher geänderte Dateien speichern wollen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Einfache Bearbeitungsfunktionen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Einfache-Bearbeitungsfunktionen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie bei den meisten gängigen Textverarbeitungen können Sie auch bei LyX + Textblöcke ausschneiden und kopieren, sich zeichen-, wort- oder seitenweise + durch den Text bewegen und ganze Worte oder auch einzelne Zeichen löschen. + In den folgenden vier Abschnitten werden diese Funktionen beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie zu erwarten, finden Sie diese Befehle im Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten +\family default +, zusammen mit einigen weiteren Funktionen zur Textbearbeitung. + Einige von ihnen sind von besonderer Bedeutung und werden später gesondert + behandelt. + Die grundlegenden Befehle sind: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Ausschneiden +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ausschneiden +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, Strg+X +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/cut.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Kopieren +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Kopieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, Strg+C +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/copy.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einfugen@Einfügen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\family sans +Strg+V +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/paste.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Einfügen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(vorherige +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Auswahl) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Einfügen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(speziell) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Suchen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Ersetzen, +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Suchen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ersetzen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans + Strg+F +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show_findreplace.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die ersten drei sind selbsterklärend. + Unter +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einfügen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(vorherige +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Auswahl) +\family default + finden Sie eine Liste der letzten eingefügten Textstücke. + Durch anklicken können Sie eins davon an der momentanen Cursorposition + einfügen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einfügen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(speziell) +\family default +fügt ausgewählten Text mit allen Sonderzeichen, Formatierungen und Umgebungen + ( +\family sans +Einfacher +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Text +\family default +) oder ohne sie ( +\family sans +Auswahl +\family default +) ein. + Außerdem bleibt das Eingefügte im ersten Fall markiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Tasten +\family sans +Entf +\family default + und +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + + arbeiten ebenfalls wie der Befehl +\family sans +Ausschneiden +\family default +. + Auch müssen Sie aufpassen, wenn Sie Textstellen markiert haben. + Wenn Sie in diesem Moment eine Taste drücken, wird der markierte Text gelöscht + und durch den neu eingegebenen Text ersetzt. + Sie müssen dann den gelöschten Text mit dem Befehl +\family sans +Rückgängig +\family default + ( +\family sans +Strg+Z +\family default +) zurückholen (siehe auch Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sec:Rückgängig-Wiederholen" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suchen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ersetzen +\family default + öffnet das Dialogfenster +\family sans +Suchen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +und +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Ersetzen +\family default +. + Den zu suchenden Text tragen Sie im Feld +\family sans +Suchen: +\family default + ein. + Mit der Schaltfläche +\family sans +Nächstes +\family default + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\family sans +suchen +\family default + wird der Text gesucht. + Die Suchrichtung ist normalerweise vorwärts, es sei denn, +\family sans +Rückwärts +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +suchen +\family default + ist aktiviert. + Wurde der Suchbegriff gefunden, wird er markiert. + Wenn Sie das Fenster schließen, können Sie mit der +\family sans +F3 +\family default +-Taste weiter suchen, aber nur vorwärts und ohne Unterscheidung zwischen + groß und klein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie dann +\family sans +Ersetzen +\family default + anklicken, wird der markierte Begriff durch den Inhalt des Feldes +\family sans +Ersetzen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +durch: +\family default + ersetzt. + Dann können Sie weiter suchen. + Wenn Sie +\family sans +Alles +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ersetzen +\family default + anklicken, werden unabhängig davon, wo der Cursor im Dokument gerade steht, + wirklich ALLE Suchbegriffe ersetzt. + Ist das Feld +\family sans +Ersetzen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +durch: +\family default + leer, wird der Suchbegriff gelöscht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Über den Umschaltknopf +\family sans +Groß-/Kleinschreibung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +beachten +\family default + können Sie festlegen, ob bei der Suche die Schreibweise berücksichtigt + werden soll. + Ist sie aktiv, wird zum Beispiel bei der Suche nach +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Treffen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + das Wort +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +treffen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + nicht gefunden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Umschaltknopf +\family sans +Nur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ganze +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Wörter +\family default + schaltet den Modus +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +nur ganze Worte suchen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + ein und aus. + Dann wird beispielsweise bei der Suche nach +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Treff +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + das Wort +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Treffer +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + nicht gefunden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX bietet außerdem ein fortgeschrittenes Suchen&Ersetzen, das in Kap. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Fortgeschrittenes-Suchen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dinge wie Notizen, Gleitobjekte, usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(sogenannte Einfügungen) können aufgelöst werden. + Das bedeutet, dass sie gelöscht werden, ihr Inhalt jedoch als normaler + Text erhalten bleibt. + Um etwas aufzulösen, setzt man den Cursor an den Anfang des Objekts und + drückt die +\family sans +Rücktaste +\family default + oder setzt den Cursor an das Ende und drückt die +\family sans +Entfernen +\family default +-Taste der Tastatur. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Inhalt von Einfügungen wird mit dem Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+Alt+A +\family default + ausgewählt, das Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+A +\family default + wählt das komplette Dokument aus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +R +\family sans +ückgängig +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ruckgangig@Rückgängig +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + machen und W +\family sans +iederholen +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Wiederholen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Rückgängig-Wiederholen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie einen Fehler machen, können Sie diesen leicht ungeschehen machen, + denn LyX verfügt über einen sehr großen Speicher für Änderungen. + Wählen Sie die Funktion +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rückgängig +\family default + ( +\family sans +Strg+Z +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/undo.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +), um einen falschen Arbeitsschritt zurückzunehmen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie dabei versehentlich zu weit zurückgehen, können Sie mit +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Wiederho\SpecialChar \- +len +\family default + ( +\family sans +Strg+Y +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/redo.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +) das Rückgängigmachen schrittweise wieder zurücknehmen. + Derzeit ist die Anzahl der zurücknehmbaren Schritte auf 100 beschränkt, + um den Speicherverbrauch zu verringern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Auf diese Weise lassen sich Änderungen natürlich nur bis zu dem Zeitpunkt + zurücknehmen, als Sie das Dokument geöffnet haben, ebenso funktioniert + +\family sans +Wiederholen +\family default + nur bis zur letzten gemachten Änderung. + Sonst sind die entsprechenden Menüpunkte grau unterlegt und nicht wählbar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bitte beachten Sie auch, dass, wenn Sie in einem Dokument alle gemachten + Änderungen zurücknehmen, trotzdem der Status des Dokumentes als +\emph on +geändert +\emph default + erhalten bleibt. + Dies ist mit der oben erwähnten Beschränkung auf 100 Änderungsschritte + verbunden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Funktionen +\family sans +Rückgängig +\family default + und +\family sans +Wiederholen +\family default + sind auf fast alle Bearbeitungsschritte anwendbar, jedoch gibt es ein paar + Eigenheiten. + So arbeiten sie beispielsweise nicht zeichenorientiert, sondern textblockweise; + das kann anfangs etwas gewöhnungsbedürftig sein. + Probieren Sie ein wenig mit diesen Funktionen herum, um ein Gefühl dafür + zu bekommen, wie viel Text in einem solchen Block enthalten ist, und Sie + werden sich hoffentlich bald daran gewöhnt haben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Außerdem funktioniert +\family sans +Wiederholen +\family default + nicht im Mathematikmodus. + Ein Tipp dazu: Wenn Sie in den Mathematikmodus wechseln, dort eine Gleichung + ändern und dann den Mathematikmodus verlassen, stellt ein +\family sans +Rückgängig +\family default + die Gleichung so wieder her, wie sie war, bevor Sie in den Mathematikmodus + gewechselt sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Mausfunktionen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mausfunktionen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +An dieser Stelle werden nur die grundlegenden Operationen beschrieben, die + mit der Maus durchgeführt werden können. + In anderen Abschnitten dieses Dokumentes werden Sie weitere, spezielle + Funktionen kennenlernen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Positionieren +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Einfaches Klicken mit der +\emph on +linken +\emph default + Maustaste positioniert den Textcursor unter den Mauszeiger. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Der Rollbalken funktioniert so wie in anderen Programmen, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +das Mausrad auch +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Querverweise: Ein Klick mit der +\emph on +rechten +\emph default + Maustaste springt zu der Stelle, auf die verwiesen wird. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Text markieren +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Halten Sie die +\emph on +linke +\emph default + Maustaste gedrückt und bewegen Sie die Maus. + LyX markiert den Text zwischen der alten und der neuen Position des Mauszeigers. + Mit +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Kopieren, Strg+C +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/copy.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + übernehmen Sie den markierten Text in den internen Kopierspeicher von LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Positionieren Sie den Textcursor neu und fügen Sie die Auswahl mit +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einfügen, Strg+V +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/paste.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + in den Text ein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Wenn Sie die Auswahl durch Klicken mit der +\emph on +mittleren +\emph default + Maustaste in den Text einzufügen, verwendet LyX anstelle des eigenen Kopierspei +chers den X-Puffer. + Der Text wird derselbe sein, jedoch gehen dabei sämtliche Formatierungen + verloren. + Dennoch ist dieser Mechanismus praktisch, wenn Sie Textabschnitte aus anderen + X-Anwendungen in ein Dokument einfügen wollen. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Fußnoten, Randnotizen, Gleitobjekte (Abbildungen und Tabellen) usw. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Ein einfaches Klicken mit der +\emph on +linken +\emph default + Maustaste öffnet oder schließt jedes dieser Objekte. + Beachten Sie außerdem die entsprechenden Abschnitte dieses Handbuches. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Section +Navigieren +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Navigieren" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Navigieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX bietet Ihnen verschiedene Möglichkeiten in Dokumenten zu navigieren: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Das Menü +\family sans +Navigieren +\family default + enthält alle Überschriften des Dokuments als Untermenüs, deren Anklicken + Sie zu dem entsprechenden Dokumentteil führt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Gliederung +\family default + (Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle toc" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + + springt zu der Position im Dokument, wo zuletzt etwas geändert wurde. + Das ist z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + nützlich bei großen Dokumenten, wenn man zu einer anderen Position im Dokument + navigiert oder gescrollt hat, um etwas nachzuschauen und anschließend zur + Position zurückspringen möchte, wo man zuletzt etwas geschrieben hat. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit der +\family sans +F5 +\family default + -Taste wird der Cursor vertikal in LyXs Hauptfenster zentriert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Gliederung +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Gliederung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hiermit schalten Sie die Gliederung an, die dann im linken Teil des LyX-Fensters + erscheint. + Ein weiterer Klick auf den Knopf lässt die Gliederung wieder verschwinden. + Das Navigieren selber erfolgt wie im Menü +\family sans +Navigieren +\family default +. + Die Gliederung zeigt zunächst das Inhaltsverzeichnis, aber Sie können durch + einen Klick auf +\family sans +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\family default + auch andere Listen auswählen, z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + Fußnoten, oder Marken und Querverweise (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Querverweise" + +\end_inset + +), oder Notizen, oder Literaturverweise (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + +). + Es hängt vom Dokumenttyp ab, welche Listen vorhanden sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Rechts-klicken auf Elemente in der Gliederung öffnet in vielen Fällen ein + Kontextmenü mit dem Elemente direkt verändert werden können. + Zum Beispiel erlaubt das Kontextmenü für Literaturverweise den Literaturverweis +-Dialog zu öffnen um den Verweis zu bearbeiten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Feld `Filter' erlaubt es, die angezeigten Einträge einzugrenzen. + Wenn zum Beispiel die Liste der Marken und Querverweise angezeigt ist und + Sie nur Verweise auf Unterabschnitte sehen wollen, geben Sie den Text +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +sub: +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + in den Filter ein und nur Einträge mit diesem Text werden angezeigt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Unten in der Gliederung gibt es verschiedene Knöpfe und Optionen zur Kontrolle + der Gliederung. + Die Option +\family sans +Sortieren +\family default + sortiert die aktuelle Liste alphabetisch. + Ansonsten erscheinen die Elemente in der Reihenfolge, in der sie im Dokument + erscheinen. + Die Option +\family sans +Behalten +\family default + behält die aktuelle Ansicht bei. + Behalten bedeutet, dass wenn z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + die Unterabschnitte von Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 und 4 angezeigt sind und man auf Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 klickt, die Unterabschnitte von Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 und 4 weiterhin angezeigt bleiben. + Ohne die Option +\family sans +Behalten +\family default + würde nur die Unterabschnitte von Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 angezeigt. + Des Weiteren gibt es einen Schieberegler, mit dem Sie die Anzeigetiefe + ändern können. + Außerdem sind dort fünf Knöpfe mit folgender Bedeutung: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/reload.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + : aktualisiert das Verzeichnis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/promote.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + : schiebt das ausgewählte Gliederungs-Element um eine Stufe nach oben (zum + Beispiel von 1.2.3 nach 1.3). + Alle folgenden Gliederungs-Elemente werden angepasst. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/demote.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + : schiebt das ausgewählte Gliederungs-Element um eine Stufe nach unten + (zum Beispiel von 1.2 nach 1.2.1). + Alle folgenden Gliederungs-Elemente werden angepasst. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/down.png + scale 70 + +\end_inset + + : schiebt das ausgewählte Gliederungs-Element nach unten. + Die Gliederung wird angepasst. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/up.png + scale 70 + +\end_inset + + : schiebt das ausgewählte Gliederungs-Element nach oben. + Die Gliederung wird angepasst. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die letzten vier Knöpfe erleichtern das Verschieben von Textteilen, sofern + es sich um ganze Abschnitte und ähnliches handelt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Gliederung erhalten Sie auch, wenn Sie am Anfang des Dokuments ein Inhalts-, + Tabellen- oder Abbildungsverzeichnis angelegt haben und darauf klicken. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Eingabevervollständigung +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Eingabevervollständigung-general" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Eingabevervollständigung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX bietet eine Eingabevervollständigung an, indem alle geöffneten Dokumente + gescannt werden. + Jedes gefundene Wort wird in eine Datenbank eingetragen, die für die Vervollstä +ndigungsvorschläge verwendet wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Eingabevervollständigung wird in dem LyX-Grundeinstellungen (Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default +) unter +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Eingabevervollständigung +\family default + aktiviert werden. + Mit der Option +\family sans +Automatische +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Wortvervollständigung +\family default + wird der Vervollständigungsvorschlag direkt hinter dem Cursor angezeigt. + Mit der Option +\family sans +Automatisches +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Popup +\family default + werden die Vorschläge immer in einem Popup angezeigt. + Der Vervollständigungsindikator kann mit der Option +\family sans +Cursor +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Markierung +\family default + abgeschaltet werden. + Mit den allgemeinen Optionen kann die Verzögerungszeit für die Popups und + für die Vervollständigung eingestellt werden und man kann wählen, ob lange + Vervollständigungen abgekürzt werden sollen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX verwendet ein kleines Dreieck hinter dem Cursor als Indikator dass es + Vervollständigungen gibt. + Um eine Vervollständigung zu akzeptieren, drückt man die +\family sans +Tab +\family default + Taste. + Falls mehrere Vervollständigungen verfügbar sind, wird ein Popup geöffnet, + das diese anzeigt. + Man kann eine Vervollständigung im Popup mit der Maus oder den Pfeiltasten + auswählen, und akzeptieren, indem man +\family sans +Enter +\family default + drückt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Vervollständigungsoptionen für Mathe in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen bewirken + dasselbe wie die entsprechenden Optionen für Text. + Die spezielle Mathe-Option +\family sans +Automatische Korrektur +\family default + erlaubt es, Zeichen aus anderen zusammenzusetzen. + Wenn man z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + das Zeichen +\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + einfügen will, kann man dann die Zeichen +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +=> +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + in eine Formel eingeben um es zu erhalten. + Dies ist also eine schnelle Alternative zur Eingabe von Befehlen oder der + Verwendung der Mathe-Werkzeugleiste. + Eine Liste mit allen unterstützten Zeichenkombinationen ist in der Datei + +\family typewriter +autocorrect +\family default + zu finden, die sich irgendwo in LyXs Installationsordner befindet. + Die Automatische Korrektur kann jederzeit angeschaltet werden in dem man + das Ausrufezeichen drückt '!'. + Durch Drücken der Leertaste wird sie ausgeschaltet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Grundlegende Tastaturfunktionen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tastatur!-funktionen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt mindestens zwei verschiedene grundlegende Sätze von Tastenkürzeln: + +\family typewriter +cua +\family default + und +\family typewriter +emacs +\family default +. + LyXs Voreinstellung ist +\family typewriter +cua +\family default +, die in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen unter +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tastenkürzel +\family default + geändert werden kann. + (Man kann dort auch alle Tastenkürzel auflisten oder ändern, wie es in + Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tastenkürzel-bearbeiten" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einige Tasten wie +\family sans +Bild +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Hoch +\family default +, +\family sans +Bild +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Runter +\family default +, +\family sans +Links +\family default +, +\family sans +Rechts +\family default +, +\family sans +Hoch +\family default + und +\family sans +Runter +\family default + machen genau das, was man erwartet, andere nicht: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tabulator +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Tab" +description "Tabulator key" + +\end_inset + +Es gibt in LyX keine Tabulatoren. + Wenn Sie das nicht verstehen, lesen Sie die Abschnitte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Einleitung-Absatzeinrückung" + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Absatzumgebungen" + +\end_inset + +, speziell Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Listen" + +\end_inset + +, jetzt sofort. + Ja, jetzt sofort. + Wenn Sie immer noch verwirrt sind, schauen Sie in das LyX +\emph on +Tutorium +\emph default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +In LyX wird die Tabulatortaste nur verwendet, um Vorschläge der Eingabevervollst +ändigung zu übernehmen, um den Cursor in Tabellen oder Matrizen zu bewegen + oder um die Schachtelungstiefe in Aufzählungen der Listen zu ändern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Esc +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Esc" +description "Escape key" + +\end_inset + +Wird verwendet, um Operationen abzubrechen. + Andere Teile des Handbuchs gehen detaillierter darauf ein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Pos1 +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +und +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Ende +\family default + Diese setzen den Cursor an den Anfang oder das Ende einer Zeile. + Verwenden Sie die Emacs-Tastenkürzel, wird der Cursor an den Anfang oder + das Ende des Dokuments gesetzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt drei Hilfstasten: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Steuerung +\family default + (in der Dokumentation als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Strg +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Strg" +description "Steuerung-Taste" + +\end_inset + + bezeichnet) Diese hat verschiedene Funktionen, abhängig mit welcher Taste + es in Kombination verwendet wird: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Mit +\family sans +Rücktaste +\family default + oder +\family sans +Entf +\family default + löscht es ein ganzes Wort statt nur einem Zeichen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Mit +\family sans +Links +\family default + und +\family sans +Rechts +\family default + springt es über Wörter statt Zeichen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Mit +\family sans +Pos1 +\family default + und +\family sans +Ende +\family default + springt es Richtung Anfang bzw. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ende des Dokuments. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Umschalt +\family default + (in der Dokumentation als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Umschalt +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Umschalt" +description "Umschalt-Taste" + +\end_inset + + bezeichnet) Verwenden Sie diese zusammen mit den Pfeiltasten, wird der + Text zwischen der alten und neuen Cursorposition markiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Alt +\family default + (in der Dokumentation als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Alt +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Alt" +description "Alt oder Meta-Taste" + +\end_inset + + bezeichnet) Dies ist auf den meisten Tastaturen die Alt Taste, es sei denn + dass die Tastatur eine spezielle +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Meta +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Taste besitzt. + Haben Sie beide Tasten, müssen Sie herausfinden welche die Funktion der + Alt Taste hat. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Diese Taste macht verschiedene Dinge und aktiviert zudem die Menü Schnellauswahl. + Wenn man sie in Kombination mit einem unterstrichenen Buchstaben eines + Menüeintrags verwendet, wird dieses Menü ausgewählt. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Zum Beispiel öffnet die Sequenz +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Alt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +b +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +t +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +b +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + den +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Textstil +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Dialog. + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Alt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + öffnet das +\family sans +Datei +\family default + Menü. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Handbuch +\emph on +Tastenkürzel +\emph default + listet alle Kürzel mit der +\family sans +Alt +\family default + Taste auf. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Mit der zeit werden Sie mehr und mehr Tastenkürzel von LyX lernen und verwenden, + denn meist wird das Kürzel zu einer Aktion in der Statusleiste von LyX + angezeigt. + Die LyX Menüeinträge listen zudem die entsprechenden Tastenkürzel auf. + Die Schreibweise der Kürzel ist sehr ähnlich, meist sogar dieselbe wie + in der LyX Dokumentation. + Beachten Sie, dass die +\family sans +Umschalt +\family default + Taste explizit erwähnt wird; +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Alt+A Umschalt+A +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + bedeutet +\family sans +Alt+P +\family default + gefolgt von einem großen A. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann im Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + unter +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tastenkürzel +\family default + alle Tastenkürzel auflisten oder ändern, wie es in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tastenkürzel-bearbeiten" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +LyX-Grundlagen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Dokumenttypen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einleitung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bevor Sie anfangen, ein Dokument zu schreiben, müssen Sie entscheiden, was + für eine +\emph on +Art +\emph default + von Dokument Sie wollen. + Unterschiedliche Dokumentarten benutzen unterschiedliche Typen für Zwischenräum +e, Überschriften, Nummerierungen, usw. + Außerdem benutzen unterschiedliche Dokumente unterschiedliche Absatzumgebungen + und formatieren Dokumenttitel unterschiedlich. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine +\emph on +Dokumentklasse +\emph default + beschreibt eine Gruppe von Eigenschaften, die eine bestimmte Menge von + Dokumenten gemeinsam haben. + Durch die Wahl der Dokumentklasse legt man diese Eigenschaften automatisch + fest und erleichtert die Erschaffung des gewünschten Dokumentes. + Wenn Sie keine Dokumentklasse wählen, nimmt LyX die Standardklasse. + Dann aber müssen Sie eventuell die Dokumentklasse ändern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Dokumentklassen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Dokumentklassen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! -klassen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können eine Klasse über D +\family sans +okument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dokumentklasse +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + auswählen. + Danach können Sie die benötigten Optionen feineinstellen. + Wenn Sie ans Ende der Auswahl gehen, sehen Sie einige Dokumentklassen, + die LyX zwar unterstützt, die aber bei Ihnen nicht installiert sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Übersicht +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In LyX gibt es vier Standarddokumentklassen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Article für Standardartikel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Book für Bücher +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Letter für Briefe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Report für Standardberichte +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt auch noch andere Klassen, die LyX aber nur benutzt, wenn LaTeX entsprech +end eingerichtet ist. + Die vollständige Liste finden Sie im Anhang der +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default +. + Hier sind einige: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +A&A Journal-Artikel in Stil und Format von Astronomy & Astrophysics. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ACS Layout für Journale der American Chemistry Society +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +AGU Layout für Journale der American Geophysical Union +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +AMS Artikel im Stil und Format der AMS (American Mathematical Society). + Es gibt drei amsart-Layouts. + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Das Standardlayout benutzt das normale Nummerierungsschema für Sätze usw., + das die Abschnittsnummer voranstellt. + Alle Behauptungen (Sätze, Korollare usw.) werden gemeinsam nummeriert, aber + Definitionen, Beispiele und Ähnliches haben ihre eigene Nummerierungsreihenfolg +e. + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +sequential numbering +\series default + stellt keine Abschnittsnummer voran, sondern nummeriert alles fortlaufend. + Jeder Typ (Sätze, Definitionen usw.) erhält eine eigene Nummerierungsreihenfolge. + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +unnumbered +\series default + verzichtet vollständig auf die Nummerierung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Beamer Layout für Präsentationen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Broadway Layout zum Schreiben von Theaterstücken. + Dies ist keine LaTeX +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Dokumentklasse +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +siehe +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "Zusammengesetzte-Worte" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, sondern eine, die zusammen mit LyX ausgeliefert wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chess Layout um über Schachspiele zu schreiben +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Curiculum +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vitae für Lebensläufe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Elsarticle Layout für Journale der Elsevier-Gruppe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Foils um Präsentationsfolien zu erstellen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hollywood für spezielle Filmskripte der US-Filmindustrie. + Dies ist keine LaTeX +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Dokumentklasse, sondern eine, die zusammen mit LyX ausgeliefert wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +IEEEtran Layout für Journale des Institute of Electrical and Electronics + Engineers (IEEE) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +IOP Layout für Journale des Institute of Physics +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kluwer Layout für Journale der Kluwer-Gruppe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +\series bold +KOMA-Script +\family default +\series default + ersetzt die Standardklassen und bietet viele nützliche Funktionen wie das + Formatieren von Beschriftungen, automatische Druckgrößen-Berechnung usw. + (Wird von diesem Dokument benutzt.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Memoir ein weiterer Ersatz für die Standardklassen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Powerdot Layout für Präsentationen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +REVTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X Artikel für Veröffentlichungen der APS (American Physical Society), des + AIP (American Institute of Physics) und der OSA (Optical Society of America). + Diese Klasse ist nicht mit allen LyX-Funktionen kompatibel. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Slides um Präsentationsfolien zu erstellen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +SPIE +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Proceedings Layout für Journale der International Society for Optical Engineerin +g (SPIE) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Springer Layouts für Journale der Springer-Gruppe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wir wollen hier nicht im Einzelnen beschreiben, wie man diese verschiedenen + Dokumentklassen benutzen kann. + Einzelheiten über die Nicht-Standard-Klassen finden Sie in den +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default +. + Hier wollen wir uns mit Eigenschaften befassen, die allen Dokumentklassen + gemeinsam sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Verfügbarkeit +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Neue Benutzer sind manchmal verwundert, dass viele Dokumentklassen, die + im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dokumentklasse +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + gelistet sind, als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +nicht verfügbar +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + markiert sind. + Oder sie sind überrascht wenn sie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + die Vorlage +\family sans +iop-article +\family default + öffnen und eine Warnung erhalten, dass das Dokument Dateien benötigt, die + nicht installiert sind. + Daher könnte man meinen, dass etwas nicht stimmt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aber alles ist in Ordnung. + LyX enthält weit mehr Dokumentklassen als man jemals benutzen wird. + Die meisten, wie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + +\family sans +IOP +\family default +, sind sehr speziell. + LyX versucht so viele Klassen wie möglich zu unterstützen und enthält annähernd + hundert verschiedene Layout-Dateien, Tendenz steigend. + Keine LaTeX-Distribution wird standardmäßig alle Dateien installieren, + die von irgend einer Dokumentklasse benötigt werden. + Es sind einfach zu viele. + Das ist der Grund warum einige Dokumentklassen nicht verfügbar sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Falls es eine Dokumentklasse gibt, die Sie benutzen möchten, die aber als + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +nicht verfügbar +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + gekennzeichnet ist, müssen Sie die entsprechenden Paketdateien installieren. + Der einfachste Weg herauszufinden welche Dateien Sie installieren müssen, + ist es, die Dokumentklasse für eine neue Datei zu verwenden. + LyX wird dann einen Dialog zeigen, der die fehlenden Dateien auflistet. + In Abschnitt +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Installation eines neuen LaTeX-Paketes +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs ist beschrieben, wie man diese installiert. +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Obwohl LyX viele verschiedenen Dokumenttypen unterstützt, kann es nicht + alle unterstützen, die man vielleicht benutzen möchte. + Zum Beispiel stellen viele Universitäten LaTeX-Dokumentklassen bereit, + die man für Dissertationen verwenden muss. + Das LyX-Team kann nicht für jede davon eine Layout-Datei schreiben, da + es zu viele davon gibt, die sich auch noch oft ändern. + Glücklicherweise kann man sich aber sein eigenes Layout schreiben, und + viele LyX-Nutzer haben das schon getan. + Kapitel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +5 des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs enthält Informationen wie man Layout-Dateien erstellt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Module +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Module" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Module +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Module ergänzen ein Dokument um zusätzliche Funktionen, die nicht standardmäßig + zur gewählten Dokumentklasse gehören. + Wenn Sie zum Beispiel Brailleschrift benutzen wollen, gibt es das natürlich + in keiner Dokumentklasse, also müssen Sie ein entsprechendes Modul im Abschnitt + +\family sans +Dokumentklasse +\family default + von +\family sans +Dokument +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + laden. + Wenn Sie auf einen Namen klicken, erscheint im unteren Feld eine Erklärung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einige Module benötigen LaTeX-Pakete die nicht standardmäßig installiert + sind. + LyX wird Sie warnen falls das benötigte Paket nicht installiert ist. + Sie können das Modul dann trotzdem verwenden um das Dokument zu bearbeiten, + nur keine Ausgabe erzeugen oder es als PDF ansehen, da LyX ohne das Paket + nicht kompilieren kann. + Um eine Ausgabe erzeugen zu können müssen Sie das fehlende Paket installieren + und LyX anschließend über das Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Neu +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +konfigurieren +\family default + neu konfigurieren. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Neukonfiguration von LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Installation eines neuen LaTeX-Paketes +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs für mehr Informationen wie man Pakete installiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Einige Module benötigen andere Module und manche Module sind miteinander + inkompatibel. + LyX wird Sie darauf hinweisen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Lokales Format +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Lokales-Format" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! lokales Format +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Module funktionieren bei LyX wie Pakete bei LaTeX: Sie sind dazu gedacht + in verschiedenem Dokumenten verwendet zu werden. + Wenn Sie oft dieselbe Sache in verschiedenen Dokumenten benötigen, sollten + Sie es in Betracht ziehen, dafür ein Modul zu schreiben. + Manchmal jedoch braucht man für ein bestimmtes Dokument ein Format, aber + nur in diesem einen Dokument. + Also so etwas wie einen dokumentspezifischen LaTeX-Vorspann: LyXs sogenanntes + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Lokales +\emph on + +\emph default +Format +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Siehe Abschnitt +\emph on +Lokales Layout +\emph default + des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs für Informationen wie man es benutzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Eigenschaften +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Jede Dokumentklasse hat Standardwerte, diese Tabelle beschreibt sie: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Seitenstil +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Seiten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Spalten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +höchste Abschnittsstufe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +article +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfach +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einseitig +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Eine +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Abschnitt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +report +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfach +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einseitig +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Eine +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Kapitel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +book +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +mit Überschriften +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Zweiseitig +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Eine +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Kapitel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +letter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfach +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einseitig +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Eine +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +keine +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Sie werden sich wahrscheinlich fragen, was +\family sans +höchste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Abschnittsstufe +\family default + bedeutet. + Es gibt mehrere Absatzumgebungen, um Abschnittsüberschriften zu erzeugen. + Unterschiedliche Dokumentklassen gestatten unterschiedliche Abschnittsüberschri +ften. + Nur zwei benutzen die +\family sans +Kapitel +\family default +-Überschrift; der Rest beginnt stattdessen mit der +\family sans +Abschnitt +\family default +-Überschrift. + Einige Dokumentklassen wie die für Briefe benutzen überhaupt keine Überschrifte +n. + Außer +\family sans +Kapitel +\family default +- und +\family sans +Abschnitt +\family default +-Überschriften gibt es auch +\family sans +Unterabschnitt +\family default +-Überschriften, +\family sans +Unterunterabschnitt +\family default +-Überschriften usw.. + Wir werden diese Überschriften ausführlich in Abschnitt +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sub:Überschriften" + +\end_inset + + beschreiben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Dokumentlayout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Dokumentlayout" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Layout +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die wichtigsten Eigenschaften von Dokumentklassen werden im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + gesetzt. + Dort können Sie im Feld +\family sans +Klassenoptionen +\family default + unter +\family sans +Dokumentklasse +\family default + spezielle Optionen für Ihre Dokumentklasse als mit Kommas unterteilte Liste + angeben. + Dies ist nur notwendig wenn LyX spezielle Optionen nicht unterstützt, die + Sie verwenden wollen. + Um mehr über Ihre bevorzugte LaTeX-Klasse zu lernen, müssen deren Handbuch + lesen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Box +\family sans +Seiten-Stil +\family default + im +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + Dialog unter +\family sans +Seitenlayout +\family default + legt fest welche Kopfzeilen und Seitennummern auf den Seiten erscheinen. + Man kann zwischen den folgenden fünf Optionen wählen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Standard +\family default + der Standard-Stil der aktuellen Klasse +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +leer +\family default + keine Seitennummern oder Kopfzeilen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +einfach +\family default + nur Seitennummern +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +mit +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Überschriften +\family default + Seitennummern und entweder das aktuelle Kapitel oder Abschnittstitel und + -nummer. + Ob LyX das aktuelle Kapitel oder den Abschnitt verwendet, hängt von der + maximalen Abschnittsstufe der Klasse ab. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +ausgefallen +\family default + Dies erlaubt es, eigene Kopf- und Fußzeilen zu erstellen, wenn das LaTeX-Paket + +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installiert ist. + Wie diese erstellt werden, ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Benutzerdefinierte-Kopf/Fußzeile" + +\end_inset + + erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Trennung von Absätzen ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Globale-Absatztrennung" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Seitengröße und Orientierung +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Seitengröße-und-Orientierung" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Seitengröße +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie finden die folgenden Optionen im Menü +\family sans +Seitenlayout +\family default + des +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + Dialogs: +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Papierformat +\family default + Auf welche Papiergröße ausgegeben werden soll. + Die Größen sind +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Standard +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +A0 - A6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +B0 - B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +C0 - C6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +US letter, US legal, US executive +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +JIS B0 - JIS B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Benutzerdefiniert +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Orientierung +\family default + Ob es als +\family sans +Hochformat +\family default + oder +\family sans +Querformat +\family default + ausgegeben werden soll. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Doppelseitiges +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Dokument +\family default + Verändert den Textbereich um beide Seiten des Papiers zu bedrucken. + Dies bedeutet, dass der Textbereich für gerade und ungerade Seiten verschieden + ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Seitenränder +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Seitenränder" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Seitenränder +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Seitenränder +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Seitenränder werden im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + eingestellt. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie eine KOMA-Script Dokumentklasse verwenden, können Sie die Standard-Ränd +er beibehalten. + Denn KOMA-Script berechnet den Textbereich automatisch unter Berücksichtigung + des Papierformats und der Schriftgröße. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Wichtiger Hinweis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie die Dokumentklasse ändern, muss LyX +\emph on +alles +\emph default + in die neue Klasse umwandeln, einschließlich der Absatzumgebungen. + Einige Absatzumgebungen sind Standard; alle Dokumentklassen haben sie. + Einige Klassen jedoch haben besondere Absatzumgebungen. + Wenn Sie in so einem Fall die Dokumentklasse ändern, markiert LyX die Absätze, + deren Umgebungen es nicht mehr kennt, als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +unbekannt +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Der Name der Umgebung wird beibehalten für den Fall, dass Sie zur vorigen + Dokumentklasse zurück wechseln wollen. + Absätze mit unbekannter Umgebung werden ohne spezielle Formatierung ausgegeben, + so dass Sie entweder eine eigene Formatierung festlegen oder für den Absatz + eine bekannte Umgebung der aktuellen Dokumentklasse ändern müssen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Absatzeinrückung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Absatz!-einruckung@-einrückung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Absatztrennung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Absatz!-trennung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einleitung +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Einleitung-Absatzeinrückung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bevor wir die verschiedenen Absatzumgebungen beschreiben, wollen wir etwas + über die Absatzeinrückung sagen. + Jeder scheint eigene Vorstellungen darüber zu haben, wie Absätze zu trennen + sind. + Die meisten Amerikaner rücken die erste Zeile eines Absatzes ein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die deutsche LyX-Version benutzt diese Konvention. + Die englische (amerikanische) Version rückt den +\emph on +ersten +\emph default + Absatz eines Abschnittes, oder nach einem Bild, einer Gleichung, einer + Liste usw. +\emph on + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +nicht +\emph default + ein. + Nur die folgenden Absätze werden eingerückt. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Die Unterschiede erkennt man am besten, wenn man sich die Dokumentation + in den verschiedenen Sprachen ansieht. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Manch einer mag diese Konvention nicht, aber wenn Sie eingerückte Absätze + benutzen wollen, müssen Sie damit leben. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Man kann LaTeX nicht zwingen, +\emph on +alle +\emph default + Absätze einzurücken. + LyX zeigt es natürlich nicht und LaTeX wird es auch nicht so drucken. + Sie benötigen ein Spezialpaket und einen entsprechenden Befehl im LaTeX-Vorspan +n. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Andere machen das nicht, sondern fügen stattdessen einen größeren Abstand + zwischen zwei Absätzen ein. + Der Abstand zwischen zwei Absätzen, der Zeilenabstand, der Abstand zwischen + Überschrift und Text – alle Abstände zwischen irgendwelchen Objekten sind + in LyX in der Tat vordefiniert. + Wie wir sagten, Sie müssen sich nicht um Zwischenräume kümmern, LyX passt + darauf auf. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Tatsächlich sind die vordefinierten vertikalen Abstände keine feste Zahl, + sondern ein Bereich. + Auf diese Weise kann LyX den Platz zwischen Zeilen verringern oder dehnen + um sicherzustellen, dass Bilder zusammen mit Text auf eine Seite passen, + dass Abschnitte nicht am Fuß einer Seite beginnen usw. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Eigentlich macht LaTeX das, wenn LyX die Druckdatei erzeugen will. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Aber vordefiniert bedeutet nicht, dass Sie das nicht ändern können. + LyX lässt Sie +\emph on +alle +\emph default + vordefinierten Abstände global ändern. + Wir werden das später erklären. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Globale Absatztrennung +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Globale-Absatztrennung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um eine Standardmethode für die Absatztrennung festzulegen, wählen Sie das + Menü +\family sans +Doku\SpecialChar \- +ment\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, um das Dialogfenster +\family sans +Textformat +\family default + anzuzeigen. + Dann wählen Sie bei +\family sans +Absätze +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +trennen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +durch +\family default + entweder +\family sans +Einrückung +\family default + oder +\family sans +Vertikaler +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Abstand +\family default +, um Absätze einzurücken oder einen größeren Abstand zwischen den Absätzen + einzufügen. + Außerdem können Sie verschiedene Abstände auswählen oder Ihren eigenen + festlegen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Feineinstellung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können die Art der Absatztrennung auch für einzelne Absätze festlegen. + Wählen Sie +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Absatz +\family default +- +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default + oder klicken Sie auf +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +, um das Menü +\family sans +Absatz-Einstellun\SpecialChar \- +gen +\family default + anzuzeigen. + Dort können Sie den +\family sans +Absatz +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +einrücken +\family default +-Knopf anklicken (Tastenkürzel +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle" +\end_inset + +), um die Einrückart des aktuellen Absatzes zu ändern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Absätze standardmäßig nicht eingerückt werden, sondern durch zusätzlichen + Leerraum getrennt werden, wird dieser Knopf völlig ignoriert (das heißt + Sie können ihn auch nicht verwenden, um einen einzelnen Absatz einzurücken). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Absatztrennung werden Sie nur für die Feineinstellung eines einzelnen + Absatzes ändern müssen. + Normalerweise wählt man +\family sans +Einrückung +\family default + oder +\family sans +Vertikaler +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Abstand +\family default + für das gesamte Dokument. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Zeilenabstände ändern +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Den Zeilenabstand können Sie für das gesamte Dokument im Menü +\family sans +Doku\SpecialChar \- +ment\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + unter +\family sans +Textformat +\family default +einstellen. + Für einzelne Absätze kann er im Dialog +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Absatz +\family default +- +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default + eingestellt werden; jedoch sollte dies nur in Ausnahmefällen geschehen, + da der Zeilenabstand normalerweise im Absatzstil definiert ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Absatzumgebungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Absatz!-umgebungen|( +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Absatzumgebungen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Überblick +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Absatzumgebungen entsprechen in einer normalen LaTeX-Datei +\family typewriter + +\backslash +begin{ +\emph on +Umgebung +\emph default +} +\family default +\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\family typewriter + +\backslash +end{ +\emph on +Umgebung +\emph default +} +\family default +. + Alles zwischen den beiden Befehlen ist ein Absatz. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Anmerkung +\series default +: Wie Sie in der Vorschau sehen können, wird die obige Zeile nicht richtig + umgebrochen. + LaTeX hat Probleme, Zeichenketten, die aus Worten und Sonderzeichen bestehen, + richtig umzubrechen, siehe auch +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latex-einführung" + +\end_inset + +, S. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +21 und S. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +101. + Wie man das korrigieren kann, finden Sie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Manueller-Zeilenumbruch" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine Absatzumgebung ist eine Art +\emph on +Behälter +\emph default + für einen Absatz, der für ihn gewisse Eigenschaften enthält. + Diese können Stil, Schriftart, Ränder, Nummerierungsart, Marken usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +betreffen. + Außerdem kann man die verschiedenen Umgebungen +\emph on +schachteln +\emph default +, wobei eine Umgebung Eigenschaften einer anderen erbt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die verschiedenen Absatzumgebungen machen den Gebrauch unsauberer Tabstops, + das Ausrichten von Rändern im Vorübergehen und andere unnütze Dinge aus + den Tagen der Schreibmaschine überflüssig. + Es gibt mehrere Absatzumgebungen für spezielle Dokumentarten. + Wir werden hier nur die gebräuchlichsten beschreiben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine Absatzumgebung wählt man mit dem +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +pull-down +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +-Menü am Anfang der Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Werkzeugleiste. + Was für Einträge Sie dort finden, hängt von der gewählten Dokumentklasse + ab. + Das Menü öffnen Sie durch einen Klick auf den beschrifteten Balken oder + das kleine Dreieck oder mit +\family sans +Alt+A+Leertaste +\family default +. + Wenn das Menü geöffnet ist, können Sie die Einträge einschränken, wenn + Sie Buchstaben eingeben, die in dem von Ihnen gesuchten Eintrag vorkommen. + Geben Sie zum Beispiel +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +abs +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + ein, werden alle Einträge angezeigt, die mit Abschnitten zu tun haben. + Mit der +\family sans +Esc +\family default +-Taste wird der Filter wieder zurückgesetzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Für einige gibt es am Anfang der Extra +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Werkzeugleiste eigene Schalter ( +\family sans +Standard +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +, +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout_Enumerate.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +, +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout_Itemize.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +, +\family sans +Liste +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout_List.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +, +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout_Description.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +). + LyX wird die Umgebung des +\emph on +gesamten +\emph default + Absatzes, in dem der Cursor sitzt, ändern. + Eine Gruppe von Absätzen kann man ändern, indem man sie vorher markiert. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn man +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + drückt, wird +\emph on +normalerweise +\emph default + ein neuer Absatz des Typs +\family sans +Standard +\family default + begonnen. + Wir sagen +\emph on +normalerweise +\emph default +, weil das nicht immer stimmt. + Wenn Sie in einer der folgenden Umgebungen sind: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Zitat (kurz) +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zitat!(kurz) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Zitat (lang) +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zitat!(lang) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Gedicht +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gedicht +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +listung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Auf +\family sans +\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} + +\family default +listung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Aufzählung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Aufzahlung@Aufzählung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Beschreibung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Beschreibung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Liste +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +wird LyX die bisherige Absatzumgebung beibehalten, wenn Sie +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + drücken, anstatt nach +\family sans +Standard +\family default + zurückzukehren. + Es wird außerdem die Schachtelungstiefe beibehalten (mehr über Schachtelungen + siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Standard +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Standard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die normale Absatzumgebung ist +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + Sie hat keine besonderen Eigenschaften. + Wenn LyX eine Absatzumgebung zurücksetzt, wird diese genommen. + Der Absatz, den Sie gerade lesen – und die meisten dieses Handbuches – + haben die +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Umgebung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können einen Absatz schachteln, indem Sie in fast jeder anderen Umgebung + die +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Umgebung wählen, aber in einer +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Umgebung können Sie so gut wie nichts schachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Dokumenttitel +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument!titel@-titel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine LaTeX-Titelseite hat drei Teile: den Titel selber, die Autorennamen + und das Datum. + Außerdem können Sie eine +\emph on +Fußnote +\emph default + für Danksagungen oder Kontaktinformation schreiben. + Bei einigen Dokumenttypen druckt LaTeX dies alles auf einer eigenen Seite + zusammen mit dem Druckdatum. + Bei anderen Dokumenttypen wird die +\emph on +Titelseite +\emph default + zum Beginn der ersten Seite gedruckt. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX stellt mit den Absatzumgebungen +\family sans +Titel +\family default +, +\family sans +Autor +\family default + und +\family sans +Datum +\family default + eine Schnittstelle zu den Titelsei\SpecialChar \- +tenkommandos zur Verfügung. + So benutzen Sie sie: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Schreiben Sie den Titel Ihres Dokumentes mit der +\family sans +Titel +\family default +-Umgebung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Titel!Umgebung@-Umgebung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Schreiben Sie den Autorennamen mit der +\family sans +Autor +\family default +-Umgebung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Autor!-Umgebung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Wenn Sie wollen, dass das Datum ein bestimmtes Format hat, wenn Sie ein + festes Datum wollen oder wenn Sie einen Text anstelle des Datums wollen, + benutzen Sie die +\family sans +Datum +\family default +-Umgebung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Datum-Umgebung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Der Gebrauch dieser Umgebung ist optional. + Wenn Sie sie nicht benutzen, wird LaTeX automatisch das Druckdatum einfügen. + Wenn Sie kein Datum haben wollen, verwenden Sie die Option +\family sans +Datum af der Titelseite nicht anzeigen +\family default + im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dokumentklasse +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Passen Sie auf, dass Sie dies am Beginn des Dokuments machen. + Sie können auch Fußnoten benutzen, um +\emph on +Danksagungen +\emph default + oder Kontaktinformation einzufügen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Überschriften +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Uberschriften@Überschriften +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Überschriften" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt neun Absatzumgebungen für Abschnittsüberschriften. + LyX übernimmt für Sie die Nummerierung. + Sie müssen nur festlegen, wie Abschnitt x von Kapitel y heißen soll. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Nummerierte Überschriften +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt 6 nummerierte Abschnittsüberschriften: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Kapitel +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Kapitel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Abschnitt +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Abschnitt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Unterabschnitt +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unterabschnitt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Unterunterabschn. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unterunterabschnitt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Paragraph +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Unterparagraph +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unterparagraph +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX markiert jede Überschrift mit einer Reihe von Zahlen, die durch Punkte + getrennt werden. + Die Zahlen beschreiben, wo im Dokument Sie sich befinden. + Die Überschriften unterteilen Ihr Dokument in unterschiedliche Textstücke. + Nehmen wir zum Beispiel an, Sie schreiben ein Buch. + Sie unterteilen das Buch in Kapitel. + LyX macht eine ähnliche Unterteilung: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Die höchste Abschnittsstufe ist entweder +\family sans +Kapitel +\family default + oder +\family sans +Abschnitt +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Kapitel +\family default + wird in +\family sans +Abschnitt +\family default +e unterteilt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Abschnitt +\family default + wird in +\family sans +Unterabschnitt +\family default +e unterteilt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Unterabschnitt +\family default + wird in +\family sans +Unterunterabschn. +\family default +e unterteilt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Unterunterabschn. + +\family default + wird in +\family sans +Paragraph +\family default +en unterteilt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Paragraph +\family default + wird in +\family sans +Unterparagraph +\family default +en unterteilt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bemerkung +\series default +: Nicht alle Dokumenttypen benutzen +\family sans +Kapitel +\family default + als höchste Abschnittsstufe, sondern +\family sans +Abschnitt +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Also, wenn Sie die +\family sans +Unterunterabschn. +\family default +-Umgebung benutzen, um einen neuen Unter-Unterabschnitt zu markieren, markiert + LyX die Überschrift mit der zugehörigen Nummer und den Nummern des Unterabschni +ttes +\family sans +, +\family default + des Abschnittes und, falls möglich, des Kapitels, in dem der Unter-Unterabschni +tt steht. + Beispiel: der fünfte Abschnitt des zweiten Kapitels dieses Handbuches hat + die Marke +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +2.5 +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Unnummerierte Überschriften +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die unnummerierten Überschriftarten haben ein +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +* +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + am Ende des Namens. + Sie funktionieren so wie ihre nummerierten Entsprechungen aber erscheinen + nicht im Inhaltsverzeichnis, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Inhaltsverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ändern der Nummerierung +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Nummerierung-aendern" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können auch wählen, welche Abschnittsstufen nummeriert und welche im + Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen werden sollen. + Dadurch werden ihre Stufen nicht entfernt, weil das in der Dokumentklasse + festgelegt wird. + Einige Klassen beginnen mit +\family sans +Kapitel +\family default + und gehen hinunter bis zur +\family sans +Unterparagraph +\family default +-Stufe. + Andere beginnen mit +\family sans +Abschnitt +\family default +. + Auf ähnliche Weise nummerieren nicht alle Dokumentklassen alle Abschnittsstufen. + Die meisten nummerieren weder +\family sans +Paragraph +\family default + noch +\family sans +Unterparagraph +\family default +. + Das können Sie ändern: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Öffnen Sie das Dialogfenster +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Unter +\family sans +Nummerierung +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\family default + können Sie mit den beiden Schiebereglern festlegen, wie viele Hierarchiestufen + LyX nummerieren soll und wievielte im Inhaltsverzeichnis erscheinen sollen. + In der Tabelle darunter sehen Sie die Auswirkung der Reglerstellungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Kurztitel +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Titel ! Kurztitel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + mit optionalen Argumenten definieren +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Kurztitel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Kurztitel" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einige Kapitel oder Abschnittsüberschriften wie diese können sehr lang werden. + Wenn sie als Seitenüberschriften benutzt werden, können sie über den Blattrand + ragen, was sehr hässlich aussieht. + Deswegen kann man mit +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Kurztitel +\family default + eine alternative Überschrift definieren, die dann benutzt wird, wenn die + lange nicht in die Zeile passt. + Dieser Kurztitel wird im Inhaltsverzeichnis und in Gleitobjekten benutzt, + wenn es nötig ist. + Im Dokument selber wird immer die lange Überschrift benutzt und nötigenfalls + umgebrochen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Spezielle Informationen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die folgenden Bemerkungen gelten für alle Überschriften: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Innerhalb dieser Umgebungen können Sie keine Randnotiz einfügen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Sie können +\emph on +eingefügte Formeln +\emph default + (siehe +\emph on +Tutorium +\emph default +) schreiben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Diese Umgebungen können Sie nicht schachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Sie können Marken und Querverweise benutzen, um auf ihre Nummern zu verweisen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beispiele für diese Absatzumgebungen finden Sie überall in unseren Handbüchern. + Schauen Sie sich nur um! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Überschrift (Inhaltsverz.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn hinter einem Überschriftstyp +\family sans +(Inhaltsverz.) +\family default + steht, wird auf der gleichen Stufe die Nummerierung fortgesetzt. + Außerdem erscheinen solchermaßen gekennzeichnete Überschriften +\emph on +immer +\emph default + im Inhaltsverzeichnis. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Zitate +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zitat +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Lyrik +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lyrik +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX hat drei Absatzumgebungen, um Zitate und Lyrik zu schreiben. + Es sind +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default +, +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default + und +\family sans +Gedicht +\family default +. + Vergessen Sie die Zeiten, wo Sie Zeilenabstände ändern und an Rändern drehen + mussten. + Diese drei Absatzumgebungen haben dies bereits eingebaut. + Sie alle vergrößern den linken Rand und fügen ober- und unterhalb des Textes + zusätzlichen Leerraum ein. + Sie erlauben auch zu schachteln, das heißt Sie können ein +\family sans +Gedicht +\family default + in ein +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default + setzen, ebenso wie in einige andere Absatzumgebungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Diese drei Absatzumgebungen haben noch eine Eigenschaft: sie kehren +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + nach +\family sans +Standard +\family default + zurück, wenn Sie +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + drücken. + So können Sie das Gedicht schreiben und fröhlich +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + drücken, ohne fürchten zu müssen, dass die Absatzumgebung sich ändert. + Das bedeutet natürlich, dass Sie am Ende die +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Umgebung von Hand setzen müssen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Zitat (kurz) +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zitat!(kurz) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und +\family sans +Zitat (lang) +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zitat!(lang) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Zitate" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nachdem wir die Gemeinsamkeiten dieser drei Umgebungen beschrieben haben, + ist es Zeit für die Unterschiede. + +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default + und +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default + besitzen nur einen Unterschied: +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default + benutzt zusätzlichen Leerraum zwischen Absätzen und rückt die erste Zeile + niemals ein. + +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default + rückt die erste Zeile eines Absatzes +\emph on +immer +\emph default + ein und hat konstante Zeilenabstände. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist ein Beispiel für eine +\family sans +Zitat (kurz) +\family default +-Umgebung: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Dies ist die +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default +-Umgebung. + Wenn ich schreibe, wird die Zeile immer länger, bis sie umgebrochen wird. + Sehen Sie – keine Einrückung! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Hier ist der zweite Absatz dieses Zitats. + Wieder gibt es keine Einrückung, aber zwischen beiden Absätzen ist zusätzlicher + Leerraum. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Beispiel ist zu Ende. + Hier ist ein weiteres, diesmal für die +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default +-Umgebung: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Dies ist die +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default +-Umgebung. + Beim Schreiben sehen Sie die Einrückung. + Wenn es in Ihrem Land üblich ist, die erste Zeile eines neuen Absatzes + einzurücken, dann ist +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default + die richtige Umgebung für Sie, das heißt Sie sollten sie benutzen, +\emph on +wenn +\emph default + Sie anderen Text zitieren würden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Hier ist ein neuer Absatz. + Ich könnte wie ein Politiker (nicht nur zur Wahlzeit) weiter schwafeln, + aber es würde Sie langweilen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das war das andere Beispiel. + Also: +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default + ist geeignet für diejenigen, die zur Absatztrennung zusätzlichen Leerraum + verwenden. + Sie sollten Zitate in einer +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default +-Umgebung schreiben. + Diejenigen, die Absätze durch Einrückung trennen, sollten die +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default +-Absatzumgebung für zitierten Text benutzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Gedicht +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lyrik +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Gedicht" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Gedicht +\family default + ist eine Absatzumgebung für Lyrik. + Hier ist ein Beispiel (ich glaube, es ist von +\noun on +Wilhelm Busch +\noun default +): +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +gekrochen ist auf einen Baum, +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +schon meint, dass er ein Vöglein wär' +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +so irrt sich der. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Es folgt ein viel schlechteres Beispiel. + Diese Zeile wird länger, immer länger, sehr lang, endlich bricht sie um. + Hier sieht es nicht schlecht aus, aber im gedruckten Dokument sind die + Folgezeilen ein wenig weiter eingerückt als die erste. + Nun, es ist Prosa geworden und reimt sich nicht mehr. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Um eine Zeile umzubrechen +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +und es gut aussehen zu lassen +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +benutze man +\family sans +Strg+Eingabe +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie Sie sehen, rückt +\family sans +Gedicht +\family default + nur den linken Rand ein. + Jede Strophe ist ein eigener Absatz. + Zum Trennen der Zeilen einer Strophe benutze man die +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default +-Funktion +\family sans +Strg+Eingabe +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Listen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Listen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX hat vier verschiedene Absatzumgebungen, um unterschiedliche Listen zu + erzeugen. + In den +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +- und +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebungen markiert LyX Ihre Listeneinträge mit Aufzählungszeichen oder + Zahlen. + In den +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +- und +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebungen lässt LyX Sie Ihre eigenen Marken verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Allgemeine Eigenschaften +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die vier Absatzumgebungen unterscheiden sich von anderen Umgebungen in vielerlei + Hinsicht. + Zunächst einmal behandelt LyX jeden Absatz als Listenelement. + Wenn Sie +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + drücken, wird die Umgebung +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + auf +\family sans +Standard +\family default + zurückgesetzt, sondern bleibt gleich und erzeugt ein neues Listenelement. + Die Schachtelungstiefe bleibt ebenfalls erhalten. + Wenn Sie die Absatzumgebung behalten wollen, aber die Schachtelungstiefe + zurücksetzen wollen, können Sie +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default + benutzen. + Macht man das in der höchsten Ebene einer Liste, erhält man eine +\family sans +Standard +\family default + Umgebung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können Listen jeden Typs ineinander schachteln. + LyX ändert die Aufzählungszeichen abhängig von der Schachtelung. + Wenn Sie eine der Listenumgebungen benutzen wollen, sollten Sie +\emph on +unbedingt +\emph default + den gesamten Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + +ff lesen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Auf +\family default +\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} + +\family sans +listung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste ! Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +listung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Auflistung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der erste Listentyp, den wir genauer beschreiben werden, ist die +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Absatz\SpecialChar \- +umgebung. + Sie hat folgende Eigenschaften: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Jedes Element besitzt ein bestimmtes Aufzählungszeichen als Marke. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +LyX benutzt für alle Elemente derselben Stufe dasselbe Symbol. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Das Symbol erscheint am Anfang der Zeile. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Die Elemente können beliebig lang sein. + LyX rückt den linken Rand jedes Elements automatisch ein. + Die Einrückung ist immer relativ zu der Umgebung, in der die +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default + sich befindet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Wenn Sie +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebungen schachteln, bekommt jede Stufe ein neues Symbol als Markierung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Es gibt vier verschiedene Symbole, um maximal vierfach schachteln zu können. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + + beschreibt die Schachtelung vollständig. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Natürlich war diese Erklärung auch ein Beispiel für eine +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +. + Die +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebung eignet sich am besten für Listen, bei denen die Reihenfolge keine + Rolle spielt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wir sagten, dass unterschiedliche Stufen unterschiedliche Symbole als Markierung + benutzen würden. + Hier ist ein Beispiel für alle vier Symbole. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Die Marke für die erste Stufe von +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default + ist ein schwarzer Kreis. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Die Marke für die zweite Stufe ist ein Gedankenstrich. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Die Marke für die dritte Stufe ist ein Stern. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Die Marke für die vierte Stufe ist ein zentrierter Punkt. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Zurück zu Stufe drei. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Zurück zu Stufe zwei. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Und zurück zu Stufe eins. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses sind die Standardmarken für eine +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +. + Sie können diese Marken Ihren Wünschen anpassen, indem Sie im Dialogfenster + +\family sans +Dokument-Einstellungen +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + unter +\family sans +Auflistungszeichen +\family default + die +\family sans +Ebene +\family default + anklicken, dann eins der Felder +\family sans +Standard +\family default + bis +\family sans +Dings +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +4 +\family default + und schließlich eins der Symbole auswählen. + Das Symbol wird dann angezeigt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie +\family sans +Benutzerdef +\family default +. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Zeichen +\family default + ankreuzen, können Sie +\family sans + +\family default +rechts davon den LaTeX-Befehl für ein Zeichen Ihrer Wahl eingeben. + Außerdem können Sie die Größe des Aufzählungszeichens im Feld +\family sans +Größe +\family default + für jede Ebene festlegen. + In LyX werden (zur Zeit) nur die oben erwähnten vier Standardzeichen verwendet. + Alle Anpassungen erscheinen nur im gedruckten Dokument. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beachten Sie, wie der Abstand zwischen den Elementen mit ansteigender Schachtelu +ng abnimmt. + Wir werden Schachtelungen und alle Tricks für verschiedene Stufen in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + +ff ausführlich beschreiben. + Lesen Sie ihn auf jeden Fall! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Aufzählung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste ! Aufzahlung@Aufzählung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Aufzählung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung benutzt man, um nummerierte Listen und Aufzählungen zu erstellen. + Sie hat folgende Eigenschaften: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Jedes Element hat eine Ziffer als Marke. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Die Ziffernart hängt von der Schachtelungstiefe ab. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Wie die Ziffern gedruckt werden, hängt von der Dokumentklasse ( +\family sans +Doku\SpecialChar \- +ment\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dokumentklasse +\family default +) ab. + Bei der hier verwendeten ( +\family sans +book +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(KOMA-Script) +\family default +) wird das (b) als b) gedruckt. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +LyX zählt die Elemente automatisch für Sie und erneuert die Marken, wenn + nötig. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Jede neue +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung fängt mit 1 an. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Ebenso wie die +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebung macht die +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung folgendes: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +LyX rückt den linken Rand jedes Elements automatisch ein. + Die Elemente können beliebig lang sein. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +der Abstand zwischen den Elementen nimmt mit ansteigender Schachtelung ab. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +abhängig von der Schachtelungstiefe werden unterschiedliche Marken benutzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +maximal vier Schachtelungsstufen sind erlaubt. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Anders als bei der +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebung sind die verschiedenen Marken von +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default + in LyX +\emph on +zu erkennen +\emph default +. + So markiert LyX die vier Stufen von +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Die erste Stufe von +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default + benutzt arabische Ziffern, gefolgt von einem Punkt. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Die zweite Stufe benutzt Kleinbuchstaben in runden Klammern. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Die dritte Stufe benutzt kleingeschriebene römische Ziffern, gefolgt von + einem Punkt. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Die vierte Stufe benutzt Großbuchstaben, gefolgt von einem Punkt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Beachten Sie wieder, wie der Abstand zwischen den Elementen mit ansteigender + Schachtelung abnimmt. + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Zurück zu Stufe drei. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Zurück zu Stufe zwei. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Und zurück zu Stufe eins. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Auch in der +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung können Sie diese Marken Ihren Wünschen durch entsprechende Befehle + im LaTeX-Vorspann anpassen, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Benutzerdefinierte-Listen" + +\end_inset + +. + Solche Anpassungen erscheinen nur im gedruckten Dokument, nicht im LyX-Fenster. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Über Schachtelungen von +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebungen gibt es mehr als hier beschrieben. + Sie sollten +\emph on +wirklich +\emph default + Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + +ff lesen, um mehr darüber zu erfahren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Beschreibung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste ! Beschreibung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Beschreibung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Anders als die beiden vorigen Umgebungen hat die +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default + keine festen Marken. + Stattdessen benutzt LyX das erste +\emph on +Wort +\emph default + der ersten Zeile als Marke. + Hier ist ein Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Beispiel: Dies ist ein Beispiel für die +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-Umgebung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX setzt die Marke fett und fügt zusätzlichen Leerraum zwischen der Marke + und dem Rest der Zeile ein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie mehr als ein Wort als Marke wollen oder benötigen, benutzen Sie + ein normales oder geschütztes Leerzeichen ( +\family sans +Strg+Alt+Leertaste +\family default + / +\family sans +Strg+Leer\SpecialChar \- +taste +\family default + oder +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Geschütztes +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Leerzeichen +\family default +). + Lesen Sie auch Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Variabler-horiz-Abstand" + +\end_inset + + für weitere Hinweise. + Hier ist ein Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Zweites +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Beispiel: Hier sehen Sie, wie man ein geschütztes Leerzeichen in einer Marke + eines +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-Ele\SpecialChar \- +men\SpecialChar \- +tes benutzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Gebrauch: Sie sollten die +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-Umgebung für Dinge wie Definitionen oder Theoreme benutzen. + Benutzen Sie sie, wenn ein beschreibendes Wort besonders hervorgehoben + werden soll. + Sie sollten die +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-Umgebung aber nicht benutzen, wenn Sie einen ganzen Satz hervorheben wollen. + Dann benutzt man besser +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default + oder +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default + und schachtelt mehrere +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Absätze hinein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Schachteln: Sie können natürlich +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-Umgebungen ineinander oder mit anderen Typen schachteln. + Lesen Sie Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + +ff, um mehr darüber zu erfahren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beachten Sie, dass LyX auch hier ab der zweiten Zeile einrückt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Liste +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste ! Liste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebung ist eine LyX-Erweiterung von LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebung hat ebenso wie die +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-Umgebung benutzerdefinierte Marken für jedes Listenelement. + Es gibt aber einige gravierende Unterschiede zwischen der +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebung und den anderen drei: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +Marken +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Marken +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + LyX benutzt das erste +\emph on +Wort +\emph default + der ersten Zeile als Marke. + Sie wird wie bei der +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-Umgebung behandelt (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Beschreibung" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +Ränder +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Rander@Ränder +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Wie Sie sehen, benutzt LyX unterschiedliche Ränder für die Marke und den + Rest des Listenelementes. + Der Text hat einen größeren linken Rand, der sich aus einem Standardwert + plus ein wenig extra Leerraum ergibt. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +Breite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Marken +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Marken!-breite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Dafür benutzt LyX das Maximum aus wirklicher Markenbreite und einem Standardwer +t. + Ist die wirkliche Breite größer als der Standardwert, wird die Marke in + die erste Zeile +\emph on +ausgedehnt +\emph default +. + Das bedeutet, dass der linke Rand der ersten Textzeile dann nicht mit dem + Rand des Restes übereinstimmt, so wie bei diesem Element. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +Standardbreite +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Standardbreite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Diese können Sie sehr leicht setzen und damit sicherstellen, dass die Texte + aller Elemente der +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebung denselben linken Rand haben. + Um die Standardmarkenbreite zu ändern, markieren Sie die Elemente, die + Sie ändern wollen. + Wenn Sie nur die Markenbreite eines Elementes ändern wollen, bewegen Sie + den Cursor einfach in dieses Element. + Dann öffnen Sie das Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Absatz +\family default +- +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default + oder drücken +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). + Der Text im Feld +\family sans +Längste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Marke +\family default + bestimmt die Standardmarkenbreite. + Wenn Sie wollen, können Sie hier den Text Ihrer breitesten Marke eintragen + oder stattdesse den Buchstaben +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +M +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + mehrfach hintereinander verwenden. + Das M ist der breiteste Buchstabe und eine Standard-Einheit von Längen + in LaTeX. + Verwendet man +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +M +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + als Einheit der Breite, muss man die +\family sans +Längste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Marke +\family default + nicht jedes Mal anpassen, wenn man eine Marke in einer +\family sans +Liste +\family default + ändert. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Die voreingestellte Breite ist die Länge von +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +00.00.0000 +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (entspricht 6 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +M). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebung sollten Sie wie die +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-Umgebung benutzen, wenn Sie wollen, dass ein Begriff, der den Text beschreibt, + hervorgehoben wird. + Mit der +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebung haben Sie eine weitere Möglichkeit, das zu tun, aber mit einem + anderen Aussehen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebungen ineinander oder in andere schachteln usw., wie bei den anderen + Listen-Umgebungen auch. + In Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + + erfahren Sie mehr darüber. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt noch eine weitere Funktion der +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebung. + Wie Sie in den Beispielen sehen können, richtet LyX die Marken standardmäßig + linksbündig aus. + Man kann zusätzliche variable horizontale Abstände benutzen, damit LyX + die Marken anders ausrichtet. + Variable horizontale Abstände sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Variabler-horiz-Abstand" + +\end_inset + + erläutert. + Hier sind einige Beispiele: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +Links Die Standardausrichtung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Rechts Ein variabler horizontaler Abstand am Anfang der Marke richtet sie + nach rechts aus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Zentriert +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + Je ein variabler horizontaler Abstand am Anfang und am Ende zentriert die + Marke. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Benutzerdefinierte Listen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Benutzerdefinierte-Listen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste ! Benutzerdefiniert +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um die Features nutzen zu können, die in diesem Abschnitt vorgestellt werden, + müssen Sie das Modul +\family sans +Flexible Listen (enumitem) +\family default + in den Dokumenteinstellungen laden. + Dies lädt die Features des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Benutzerdefinierte Aufzählungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste ! Aufzahlung@Aufzählung ! Benutzerdefiniert +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Die voreingestellte Nummerierung von Aufzählungen kann geändert werden, + indem man ein optionales Argument (Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Kurztitel +\family default +) zum ersten Eintrag jeder Stufe der Liste hinzufügt. + Darin fügt man den Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +roman{enumi} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +als TeX-Code (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+L +\family default +) ein. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Für mehr über TeX-Code, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:TeX-Code" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\emph on + enumi +\emph default + ist hierbei der Zähler der Nummerierung der ersten Stufe. + Der Befehl +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default + gibt den Zähler als kleine römische Zahl aus. + Für große römische Zahlen ersetzen Sie in obigem Befehl +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default + durch +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman +\series default +. + Für arabische Zahlen verwenden Sie +\series bold + +\backslash +arabic +\series default +. + Um Punkte mit großen oder kleinen Buchstaben zu +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +nummerieren +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, verwenden Sie die Befehle +\series bold + +\backslash +Alph +\series default + oder +\series bold + +\backslash +alph +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Mit Buchstaben können höchstens 26 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Punkte nummeriert werden, weil nur +\emph on +ein +\emph default + Buchstabe verwendet wird. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um die Nummerierung für die anderen Stufen der Liste zu ändern, ersetzen + Sie im Befehl das 'i' jeweils durch die kleine römische Zahl der Stufe + (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Als Beispiel eine Liste mit benutzerdefinierter Nummerierung: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Stufe 1 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Stufe 2 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Level 2 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Stufe 3 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Stufe 4 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Für diese Liste wurden diese Befehle verwendet: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +wobei der Befehl +\series bold + +\backslash +emph{} +\series default + die Nummerierung hervorhebt und +\series bold + +\backslash +bf{} +\series default + sie fett druckt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Wenn Sie die Nummerierung einer Listenstufe geändert haben, wird sie von + allen weiteren Listen verwendet, bis Sie die Definition wieder ändern. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Unterbrochene Aufzählungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste ! Aufzahlung@Aufzählung ! Unterbrochen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aufzählungen können nach Unterbrechungen fortgesetzt werden: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +arabic{enumi}. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Erstens +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +geht zurück auf Standard-Nummerierung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Zweitens +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normaler Text +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume +Fortgesetzt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um eine Aufzählung fortzusetzen, verwendet man den Stil +\family sans +Aufzählung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fortführen +\family default +. + Dessen Nummerierung erscheint in blau in LyX um zu zeigen, das es eine + fortgesetzte Liste ist und die Nummerierung in LyX nicht korrekt ist, aber + in der Ausgabe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Falls es keine vorhergehende Liste gibt, die fortgesetzt werden kann, bekommt + man einen LaTeX-Fehler. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vielleicht wollen Sie die Liste mit einer anderen Nummer als die eigentlich + folgende fortsetzen. + Oder Sie wollen eine neue Aufzählung starten, die mit einer bestimmten + Nummer beginnen soll. + Dies ist möglich, indem Sie in einer neuen, normalen Liste ein optionales + Argument im ersten Listeneintrag einfügen und darin den Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +start=Nummer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +verwenden. + Dabei ist +\emph on +Nummer +\emph default + die Nummer, mit der Sie die Liste fortsetzen wollen. + Ein Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Erstens +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Zweitens +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aufzählung startet bei gegebenem Wert: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +start=4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Diese Aufzählung startet bei 4 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Abstände in Listen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste ! Abstände +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In manchen Fällen wollen Sie vielleicht weniger vertikalen Abstand zwischen + den Listeneinträgen haben. + Z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + ist ihrer Meinung nach zu viel Abstand in dieser Liste: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Eine Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +listung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +mit Standard-Abstand +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Abstand kann verkleinert werden, indem man ein optionales Argument im + ersten Listeneintrag verwendet. + Darin fügt man den Befehl +\series bold +nolistsep +\series default + ein, der den zusätzlichen Listenabstand entfernt, wie in diesem Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +nolistsep +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Eine Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +listung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ohne zusätzlichen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +vertikalen Abstand +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um Abstand hinzuzufügen, können Sie verschiedene andere Befehle des LaTeX-Pakets + +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + verwenden. + Für mehr Informationen siehe dessen Dokumentation, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt zudem viele Befehle mit denen horizontale Abstände und der Einzug + eingestellt werden kann. + Hier ist ein Beispiel bei dem der Einzug auf den Einzug der Absätze des + Dokuments gesetzt wurde und der Abstand zwischen Nummer und Text auf 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm, so dass sich die Nummer im Seitenrand befindet: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent= +\backslash +parindent, labelsep=2cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Eine Aufzählung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +mit negativem Einzug +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Weitere Anpassungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste ! Anpassungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können auch den Stil von Beschreibungen ändern. + Der Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font=Definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ändert den Beschreibungstitel, der Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +style=Definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +legt den Listenstil fest. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein Beispiel bei dem der Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +verwendet wird: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\lang english +Ionizing +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +radiation: +\lang ngerman + +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are + energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore + ionizing them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\lang english +Reference +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing + the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an + object, block of memory, disk space or other resource. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt viele weitere Befehle und Features des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Für mehr Informationen siehe dessen Dokumentation, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Briefe +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Briefe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Adresse +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Adresse +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + und +\family sans +Adress +\family default +e +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +rechts +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Adresse!rechte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: Ein Überblick +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX (LaTeX) hat Dokumentklassen für Briefe, die Sie unter +\family sans +Dokument +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Dokumentklasse +\family default + auswählen können. + Wie diese Klassen zu benutzen sind, sehen Sie zum einen in den Beispielen, + die Sie unter +\family sans +Strg+O +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Beispiele +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +de +\family default + finden, oder in der Dokumentation der jeweiligen Klasse. + Das Wichtigste dabei ist meistens, die angebotenen Absatzumgebungen in + der richtigen Reihenfolge zu benutzen, damit LaTeX damit klarkommt. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Außerdem wurden speziell für LyX zwei Absatzumgebungen +\family sans +Adresse +\family default + und +\family sans +Adress +\family default +e +\family sans + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +rechts +\family default + geschaffen. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anmerkung von +\noun on +Matthias +\noun default +: Ich bin ein wenig stolz auf das Aussehen der rechten Adresse. + Versuchen Sie einmal, dasselbe mit einer normalen Textverarbeitung zu erreichen. + Sie müssten einen Rahmen definieren und ihn von Hand mit der Maus oder + wie auch immer positionieren. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Sie können die +\family sans +Adresse +\family default +- und +\family sans +Adress +\family default +e +\family sans + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +rechts +\family default +-Absatzumgebungen überall problemlos benutzen. + Sie können sie sogar in anderen Umgebungen schachteln, obwohl Sie nicht + alles in ihnen schachteln können. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Natürlich können Sie +\family sans +Adresse +\family default + und +\family sans +Adress +\family default +e +\family sans + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +rechts +\family default + nicht nur für Briefe benutzen. + +\family sans +Adresse +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +rechts +\family default + eignet sich insbesondere für Artikelüberschriften, wie sie in europäischen + wissenschaftlichen Zeitschriften benutzt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Gebrauch +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Adresse-verwenden" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Adresse +\family default +-Umgebung formatiert Text wie eine Adresse, was in einigen Ländern auch + für die Eröffnung und die Unterschrift benutzt wird. + Entsprechend formatiert die +\family sans +Adress +\family default +e +\family sans + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +rechts +\family default +-Umgebung Text im Stile einer rechtsbündigen Adresse, was in einigen Ländern + für den Absender und das Datum benutzt wird. + Hier ist für beides ein Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Address +Absender +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Straße +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +PLZ Ort +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Ort, Datum +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das war eine +\family sans +Adresse +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +rechts +\family default +. + Beachten Sie, dass alle Zeilen linksbündig sind. + LyX setzt den linken Rand so, dass der längste Text auf eine Zeile passt. + Hier ist ein Beispiel für die +\family sans +Adresse +\family default +-Umgebung: +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Empfänger +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Straße +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +PLZ Ort +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie Sie sehen, ist zwischen +\family sans +Adresse +\family default + und +\family sans +Adresse +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +rechts +\family default + und dem nächsten Absatz ein größerer Abstand als normal. + Wenn Sie +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + drücken, setzt LyX die Schachtelungstiefe zurück und kehrt zur +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Umgebung zurück. + Wollen Sie innerhalb von +\family sans +Adresse +\family default + oder +\family sans +Adresse +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +rechts +\family default + eine neue Zeile beginnen, müssen Sie +\family sans +Strg+Eingabe +\family default + oder +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Normaler Zeilenumbruch +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zeilenumbruch +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + benutzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Wissenschaftliche Texte +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Wissenschaftliche Texte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die meisten wissenschaftlichen Texte beginnen mit einer kurzen Zusammenfassung + (oft als Abstract bezeichnet) und enden mit einem Literaturverzeichnis. + LyX hat dafür Absatzumgebungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Zusammenfassung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zusammenfassung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Zusammenfassung +\family default +-Umgebung kann man nur in den +\family sans +article +\family default +- und +\family sans +report +\family default +-Dokumentklassen benutzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Zusammenfassung +\family default +-Umgebung wird für die Zusammenfassung benutzt. + Technisch gesehen +\emph on +könnten +\emph default + Sie diese Umgebung überall benutzen, aber Sie +\emph on +sollten +\emph default + es nur am Anfang eines Dokumentes, nach dem Titel, tun. + Versuchen Sie auch nicht, die +\family sans +Zusammenfassung +\family default +-Umgebung in eine andere zu schachteln oder umgekehrt. + Es geht nicht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Zusammenfassung +\family default +-Umgebung erledigt einige Dinge für Sie. + Erstens wird die Marke +\series bold +Zusammenfassung +\series default + zentriert über den Text gesetzt (allerdings nicht bei der +\family sans +KOMA-Script +\family default +-Version). + Die Marke und der Text werden durch zusätzlichen Leerraum getrennt. + Zweitens ist die Schriftart etwas kleiner, gerade so wie Sie es erwarten. + Drittens ist die Zusammenfassung ein wenig eingerückt und vom restlichen + Text durch zusätzlichen Leerraum getrennt. + So jedenfalls wird es in LyX aussehen. + Wenn Ihr Dokument die +\family sans +report +\family default +-Klasse benutzt, wird die Zusammenfassung im Ausdruck auf einer eigenen + Seite erscheinen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn man +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + drückt, wird die +\family sans +Zusammenfassung +\family default +-Umgebung +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + zurückgesetzt. + Der neue Absatz wird weiterhin in der +\family sans +Zusammenfassung +\family default +-Umgebung sein. + Sie müssen also am Ende der Zusammenfassung die Absatzumgebung von Hand + ändern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wir würden Ihnen gern ein Beispiel zeigen, aber das geht nicht, weil dieses + Dokument eine Buch-Klasse benutzt. + Wenn Sie noch nie von einer Zusammenfassung gehört haben, können Sie diese + Umgebung ruhig ignorieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Literaturverzeichnis +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Literaturverzeichnis!-Umgebung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Literaturverzeichnis-Umgebung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +-Umgebung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Literaturverzeichnis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + wird für Literaturangaben benutzt. + Technisch gesehen +\emph on +könnten +\emph default + Sie diese Umgebung überall benutzen, aber Sie +\emph on +sollten +\emph default + es nur am Ende eines Dokumentes tun. + Versuchen Sie auch nicht, die +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +-Umgebung in eine andere zu schachteln oder umgekehrt. + Es geht nicht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie eine +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +-Umgebung das erste Mal öffnen, fügt LyX einen großen Leerraum ein, gefolgt + von der großen fetten Überschrift +\family sans +\series bold +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +\series default + oder einen kleineren, gefolgt von +\emph on +Referenzen +\emph default + in Großbuchstaben, abhängig von der Dokumentklasse. + Jeder Absatz der +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +-Umgebung ist ein Eintrag in das Literaturverzeichnis. + Das Drücken von +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + setzt die Absatzumgebung +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + zurück. + Jeder neue Absatz bleibt in der +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +-Umgebung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine ausführliche Beschreibung der +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +-Umgebung finden Sie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + +. + Dort finden Sie auch einiges über BibTeX +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Literaturverzeichnisse. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Besondere Umgebungen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt drei Absatzumgebungen, die einfach in keine Kategorie passen, weil + sie für besondere Zwecke benutzt werden. + Wir werden das Wichtigste von ihnen und ihren Gebrauch erklären. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Legende, Legende oben, Legende unten +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Legende +\family default +-Umgebung ist die Standard-Paragraph-Umgebung für Gleitobjekt-Ab\SpecialChar \- +bil\SpecialChar \- +dungen + und -Tabellen. + In LyX sehen Sie die Marke +\emph on +Abbildung +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Nr: +\emph default + oder +\emph on +Tabelle +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Nr: +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann in die +\family sans +Legende +\family default +-Umgebung nichts schachteln. + Außerdem setzt +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + die Absatzumgebung auf +\family sans +Standard +\family default + zurück, sodass die +\family sans +Legende +\family default +nur aus einem Absatz besteht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Außerhalb von Gleitobjekten kann man die +\family sans +Legende +\family default +-Umgebung nicht benutzen. + Siehe auch die Abschnitte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Abbildungen" + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tabellen" + +\end_inset + + für weitere Informationen über Gleitobjekt-Abbildungen und -Tabellen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Legende +\family default + wird in der normalen +\family sans +book +\family default +-Dokumentklasse benutzt, L +\family sans +egende oben +\family default + und +\family sans +Legende unten +\family default + in der +\family sans +KOMA-Script +\family default +-Version. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +L +\family default +yX-Code +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X!-Code +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LyX-Code" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default +-Umgebung ist noch eine LyX-Erweiterung von LaTeX. + Sie setzt Text in einem Schreibmaschinenschriftart. + Außerdem kann die Leertaste mehrfach hintereinander benutzt werden; +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +In der +\family sans +LyX +\family default +- +\family sans +Code +\family default +-Umgebung wird die Leertaste als geschütztes Leerzeichen behandelt anstatt + als +\family typewriter +end-of-word +\family default +-Markierung. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dies ist einer der wenigen Fälle in LyX. + Für Leerzeilen muss man +\family sans +Strg+Eingabe +\family default + eingeben (die +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default +-Funktion). + +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + beendet Absätze. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beachten Sie aber, dass +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + die Absatzumgebung zurücksetzt. + Wenn man also die +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default +-Umgebung verlassen will, muss man das durch Wahl einer anderen Umgebung + machen. + +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default +-Umgebungen kann man auch in andere schachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Diese Umgebung hat ein paar Marotten: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Am Anfang eines neuen Absatzes kann man +\family sans +Strg+Eingabe +\family default + nicht benutzen (das heißt auf +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + kann kein +\family sans +Strg+Eingabe +\family default + folgen). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +In der Druckausgabe gibt es keine leeren Absätze und keine leeren Zeilen. + Sie müssen in jeder leeren Zeile mindestens einmal die Leertaste drücken. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Anführungszeichen erreichen Sie nicht durch Eingabe von +\family sans +", +\family default + weil das ` +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +` erzeugt. + Die Anführungszeichen erhalten Sie durch +\family sans +Strg+", +\family default +eigentlich +\family sans + Strg+Umschalt+2 +\family default + (oder +\family sans +Strg+Q +\family default +, wenn Sie die Emacs-Tastaturbelegung verwenden). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist ein Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +#include +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +int main(void) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +{ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + printf("Hallo Welt! +\backslash +n"); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + return 0; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das ist das Standard- +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Hallo Welt! +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +-C-Programm. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default + hat einen Zweck: Code zu schreiben, zum Beispiel Quellprogramme, Shell-Skripte, + rc-Dateien usw. + Benutzen Sie diese Umgebung nur in diesen Spezialfällen, wenn der Text + aussehen soll, als wäre er mit einer Schreibmaschine geschrieben worden. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Absatz!-umgebungen|) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Für längeren Programmcode verwenden Sie Programmlistings, die in Kapitel + +\emph on +Programm-Code-Listen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Umgebungen schachteln +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Umgebungen schachteln +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einleitung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Während der vorangegangenen Abschnitte haben wir Ihnen empfohlen, Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + + zu lesen. + Deswegen fragen Sie sich sicher, worum es eigentlich geht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX unterscheidet sich vom normalen Konzept der +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Textverarbeitung-als-Super\SpecialChar \- +schreib\SpecialChar \- +ma\SpecialChar \- +schine +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + sehr stark. + Mit einer Schreibmaschine ist Text bloß Tinte auf Papier. + Bei einigen Textverarbeitungen ist das auch heute noch das Hauptproblem. + LyX dagegen behandelt Text als einen zusammengehörigen Block in einem spezielle +n Kontext und mit speziellen Eigenschaften. + Aber was ist, wenn Sie möchten, dass ein Block einige Eigenschaften eines + anderen Blocks erben soll? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein gutes Beispiel dafür sind Aufzählungen. + Nehmen wir an, Sie haben drei Hauptpunkte in Ihrer Aufzählung, aber Punkt + 2 hat auch noch zwei Unterpunkte. + Mit anderen Worten, Sie haben eine Liste +\emph on +innerhalb +\emph default + einer anderen, wobei die innere Liste zu Punkt 2 +\emph on +gehört +\emph default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +eins +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +zwei +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Unterliste - Punkt 1 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Unterliste - Punkt 2 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +drei +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Umgebungen schachteln ist einfach: Verwenden Sie das Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listentiefe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +erhöhen +\family default +oder +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listentiefe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +verringern +\family default + um die Schachtelungstiefe zu verändern. + (In der Statusleiste ist die Schachtelungsebene angegeben.) Statt des Menüs + können Sie auch die Werkzeugleistenknöpfe +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + oder die Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Tab +\family default + und +\family sans +Umschalt+Tab +\family default + oder +\family sans +Alt+Umschalt+Rechts +\family default + und +\family sans +Alt+Umschalt+Links +\family default + verwenden. + Die Änderung betrifft nur die aktuelle Auswahl, falls Sie eine haben (erlaubt + es die Schachtelungstiefe von mehreren Absätzen auf einmal zu ändern), + oder den aktuellen Absatz. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beachten Sie, dass LyX die Schachtelungstiefe nur ändert, wenn das möglich + ist, ansonsten passiert nichts. + Beachten Sie außerdem, dass wenn Sie die Schachtelungstiefe eines Absatzes + ändern, die Tiefe der darin geschachtelten Objekte ebenfalls entsprechend + angepasst wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Schachteln ist nicht auf Listen beschränkt. + In LyX kann man fast alles ineinander schachteln, wie Sie bald feststellen + werden. + Das ist die wirkliche Stärke des Schachtelns von Absatzumgebungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Was Sie schachteln können und was nicht +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bevor wir Sie mit einer Liste von Absatzumgebungen konfrontieren, müssen + wir Ihnen etwas mehr darüber sagen, wie schachteln arbeitet. + Die Frage, ob man schachteln kann oder nicht, ist nicht einfach mit ja + oder nein zu beantworten. + Die Frage ist auch noch: wie? Kann man diese Umgebung in irgendeine andere + schachteln? Kann man eine andere Umgebung in diese schachteln? Ein +\emph on +Ja +\emph default + auf die erste Frage garantiert noch kein +\emph on +Ja +\emph default + auf die zweite. + Die Absatzumgebungen in LyX können bezüglich schachteln eins von drei Dingen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Eine Umgebung kann überhaupt kein Schachteln erlauben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Es gibt Umgebungen, die vollständig schachtelbar sind. + Man kann sie in andere Dinge schachteln und auch andere Dinge in sie. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Es gibt Umgebungen, die man in andere schachteln kann, aber in sie selber + kann man nichts schachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist eine Aufstellung der drei Schachteltypen und der zugehörigen Absatzumge +bungen: +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Seltsamerweise erlaubt LyX, +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default + und +\family sans +Zusammenfassung +\family default + vollständig zu schachteln. + Ebenso kann man +\family sans +Titel +\family default +, +\family sans +Autor +\family default + und +\family sans +Datum +\family default + in andere Umgebungen schachteln. + Wir bitten Sie dringend, das nicht zu tun. + LaTeX könnte meckern – oder auch nicht. + Wir wissen es nicht genau. + Aber da es vom Kontext her keinen Sinn macht, diese Umgebungen in andere + zu schachteln, warum sollten Sie es dann tun? +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Nicht +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +schachtelbar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +schachtelbar!nicht +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Man kann sie nicht schachteln. + Man kann nichts in sie hineinschachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Literaturverzeichnis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Zusammenfassung, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zusammenfassung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Titel, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Titel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Autor, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Autor +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Datum. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Datum +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +Vollständig +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +schachtelbar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +schachtelbar!vollstandig@vollständig +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Man kann sie schachteln. + Man kann andere Dinge in sie hineinschachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Gedicht, Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(kurz), Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(lang), Auflistung, Aufzählung, Beschreibung, Liste, LyX-Code +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +Teilweise +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +schachtelbar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +schachtelbar!teilweise +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Man kann sie in andere Dinge schachteln. + Man kann nichts in sie hineinschachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Standard, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Standard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, Teil +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Teil +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, Kapitel, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Kapitel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Abschnitt, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Abschnitt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Unterabschnitt, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unterabschnitt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Unterunterabschn., +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unterunterabschn. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Paragraph, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraph +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Unterparagraph, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unterparagraph +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Teil*, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Teil* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Kapitel*, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Kapitel* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Abschnitt*, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Abschnitt* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Unterabschnitt*, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unterabschnitt* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Unterunterabschn.*, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unterunterabschn.* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Adresse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +rechts, +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Rechte Adresse +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Adresse. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Adresse +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Anmerkung: +\series default + Obwohl es möglich ist, nummerierte Gliederungen wie +\family sans +Kapitel +\family default +, +\family sans +Abschnitt +\family default +, usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +in zum Beispiel Listen zu schachteln, wird dringend davon abgeraten. + Denn das Ziel ist es, gut strukturierte Dokumente zu erzeugen, die den + gängigen Normen des Schriftsatzes folgen, aber geschachtelte Gliederungen + verstoßen dagegen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Andere Dinge schachteln: Tabellen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tabellen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, Mathematik +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mathematik +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, Gleitobjekte +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gleitobjekte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + usw. +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Andere Dinge schachteln +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt einige Dinge, die zwar keine Absatzumgebungen, aber trotzdem vom + schachteln betroffen sind: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Gleichungen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Tabellen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Bilder +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Anmerkung +\series default +: Bilder und Tabellen in Gleitobjekten sind davon nicht betroffen. + Lesen Sie weiter unten oder in den Abschnitten +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Abbildungen" + +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tabellen" + +\end_inset + + weitere Einzelheiten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX kann diese drei Objekte entweder als Wort oder als Absatz behandeln. + Nun, eine Tabelle kann man nicht in eine Zeile schreiben, aber Formeln + und Bilder. + Wenn ein Bild oder eine Gleichung +\emph on +inline +\emph default + ist, folgt sie dem Absatz überall hin. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie aber eine Gleichung, ein Bild oder eine Tabelle in einem eigenen + +\emph on +Absatz +\emph default + haben, verhalten sie sich wie teilweise schachtelbare Absatzumgebungen. + Man kann sie in jede Umgebung schachteln, aber man kann natürlich nichts + in sie schachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist ein Beispiel mit einer Tabelle: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Punkt eins +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist (a) und geschachtelt. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Address +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist (b). + Die Tabelle ist in a) geschachtelt. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Wieder zurück. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn wir die Tabelle nicht geschachtelt hätten, würde die Liste wie folgt + aussehen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Punkt eins +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist (a) und geschachtelt. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist (b). + Die Tabelle ist +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + in (a) geschachtelt. + Sie ist überhaupt nicht geschachtelt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Wieder zurück. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beachten Sie, dass b) nicht nur nicht mehr geschachtelt ist, sondern auch + der erste Punkt einer neuen Liste! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt noch eine Falle, in die man leicht geht: man schachtelt zwar die + Tabelle, geht aber nicht tief genug. + LyX verwandelt dann alles nach der Tabelle in eine neue (Unter)liste. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Punkt eins +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist (a) und geschachtelt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist (b). + Die Tabelle ist in 1. + geschachtelt, aber +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + in (a). +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Wieder zurück. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie Sie sehen, wurde b) zum ersten Punkt einer neuen Liste, aber +\emph on +innerhalb +\emph default + von Punkt 1. + Dasselbe würde mit einem Bild oder einer Gleichung geschehen. + Wenn Sie also Tabellen, Bilder oder Gleichungen schachteln, passen Sie + auf die richtige Tiefe auf! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dann sind da die so genannten Gleitobjekte. + Ein Gleitobjekt ist ein Textblock, der mit einer Art Marke versehen ist, + aber keinen festen Platz hat. + Er kann eine Seite oder zwei vorwärts oder rückwärts +\emph on +gleiten +\emph default +, je nachdem, wohin er am besten passt. + +\family sans +Fußnote +\family default +n und +\family sans +Randnotiz +\family default +en sind Gleitobjekte, ebenso Gleitobjekt-Abbildung, Gleitobjekt-Tabelle + und Gleitobjekt-Algorithmus. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +In zweispaltigen Dokumenten können sich Gleitobjekte über zwei Spalten anstatt + über eine erstrecken. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Weil ein Gleitobjekt keinen festen Platz im fertigen Text hat, wirkt sich + Schachteln auf seinen momentanen Platz nicht aus, nachdem Sie es an LaTeX + weitergereicht haben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Gebrauch und allgemeine Eigenschaften +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nachdem wir Ihnen gesagt haben, was Sie schachteln können und was nicht, + ist es an der Zeit zu erklären, +\emph on +wie +\emph default + man schachtelt. + Die Schachtelungstiefe +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schachtelungs!-tiefe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + können Sie mit der Tastenkombination +\family sans +Umschalt+Alt+ +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\emph on +erhöhen +\emph default + und mit +\family sans +Umschalt+Alt+ +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\emph on +verringern +\emph default +. + Sie können dafür auch die Werkzeugleistenknöpfe +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + benutzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten, Text zu schachteln. + Man kann den zu schachtelnden Text markieren oder den Cursor einfach in + den Absatz bewegen, dessen Tiefe man ändern möchte. + Mit der ersten Methode kann man mehrere Absätze auf einmal ändern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beachten Sie, dass LyX die Schachtelungstiefe nur dann ändert, wenn es möglich + ist. + Sonst passiert nichts, wenn Sie versuchen, die Tiefe zu ändern. + Die beiden Werkzeugleistenknöpfe +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + sind dann auch deaktiviert. + Wenn Sie die Tiefe eines Absatzes ändern, werden außerdem alle darin geschachte +lten Absätze betroffen. + Es ist schwer zu beschreiben, was LyX in diesem Fall genau tut. + Das hängt insbesondere davon ab, wie Ihr Text aussieht. + Das Beste, was Sie tun können, ist ausprobieren und sehen, was passiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Zuletzt sollten Sie noch folgendes beachten: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Wenn Sie die Tiefe mehrmals +\emph on +verringern +\emph default + (das heißt wiederholt +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + drücken), hält LyX auf der äußersten Stufe an. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Wenn Sie die Tiefe +\emph on +zu oft +\emph default + +\emph on +erhöhen +\emph default + (das heißt wiederholt +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + drücken), hört LyX +\emph on + +\emph default +irgendwann auf. + Es kann aber sein, dass LaTeX nicht so viele Schachtelungen erlaubt. + Sie bekommen dann bei der DVI-Ansicht eine Fehlermeldung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beachten Sie, dass die +\emph on +niedrigste Stufe +\emph default + nicht die niedrigst mögliche bedeutet. + Sie können nicht beliebig schachteln, wie Sie es bereits bei der +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung und anderen gesehen haben, und auch LaTeX setzt eine Grenze. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX kann maximal sechsmal schachteln, ohne dass LaTeX meckert. + Hier ist ein Beispiel, das zeigt, was wir meinen: +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Wenn Sie dies in LyX lesen, erkennen Sie die Schachtelungen auch an den + roten Klammer am linken Rand. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Stufe 1 - außen +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Stufe 2 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Stufe 3 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Stufe 4 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Stufe 5 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Stufe 6 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Noch einmal: LyX hat maximal 6 sinnvolle Stufen, unabhängig davon, welche + Absatzumgebung Sie auf einer bestimmten Stufe benutzen. + Das bedeutet, dass Sie eine sechsfach geschachtelte +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +- oder +\family sans +Gedicht +\family default +-Umgebung usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +erzeugen können. + Sie können auch sechs Umgebungen mischen, wie wir später sehen werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt zwei Ausnahmen für das sechsfache Schachteln, und Sie können beide + im obigen Beispiel sehen. + Anders als die anderen vollständig schachtelbaren Umgebungen können Sie + die +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung und die +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebung nur vierfach schachteln. + Wenn wir zum Beispiel eine weitere +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default + innerhalb von +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +A. +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + erstellen wollten, würden wir Fehlermeldungen erhalten. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Noch einmal: LyX kümmert sich nicht um die Grenze, sondern LaTeX produziert + Fehlermeldungen, wenn Sie Ihr Dokument für den Druck aufbereiten wollen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einige Beispiele +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der beste Weg zu erklären, was Sie mit schachteln erreichen können, sind + Beispiele. + Wir haben mehrere mit geschachtelten Umgebungen. + Darin erklären wir, wie wir sie erzeugt haben, so dass Sie sie reproduzieren + können. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Beispiel 1: Sechsfache und gemischte Schachtelung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schachtelungs!-beispiele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +1-a Dies ist die äußerste Stufe. + Es ist eine +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebung. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +2-a Dies ist Stufe 2. + Wir haben +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default + gedrückt, gefolgt von +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +3-a Dies ist Stufe 3. + Diesmal haben wir nur +\family sans +Ein\SpecialChar \- +gabe +\family default + gedrückt, dann +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + zweimal nacheinander. + Wir hätten es aber auch wie bei 2-a machen können: +\family sans +Alt+Ein\SpecialChar \- +gabe +\family default + drücken, gefolgt von +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Dies ist eine +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Umgebung, in +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +3-a +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + geschachtelt. + Also ist sie auf Stufe 4. + Wir haben dies durch +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default +, dann +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + und schließlich durch Ändern der Umgebung auf +\family sans +Standard +\family default + erreicht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +So erhalten Sie Listeneinträge mit mehr als einem Absatz – es funktioniert + auch mit den +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-, +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +- und +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebungen! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist ein weiterer +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Absatz, auch auf Stufe 4, nur mit einem +\family sans +Alt+Ein\SpecialChar \- +gabe +\family default + erzeugt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +4-a Dies ist Stufe 4. + Wir haben +\family sans +Alt+Ein\SpecialChar \- +gabe +\family default + gedrückt und die Absatz\SpecialChar \- +umgebung auf +\family sans +Liste +\family default + zurückgesetzt. + Denken Sie daran – innerhalb einer +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Umge\SpecialChar \- +bung kann man nichts schachteln, deswegen sind wir noch auf 4. + Aber wir +\emph on +können +\emph default + innerhalb von +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +3-a +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + weiterschachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +5-a Dies ist Stufe 5\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{} +und dies ist Stufe 6. + Inzwischen sollten Sie wissen, wie wir diese beiden erzeugt haben. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +5-b Zurück zu Stufe 5. + Drü\SpecialChar \- +cken Sie nur +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default +, gefolgt von +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +4-b Nach noch einem +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default +, gefolgt von +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +, sind wir zurück auf Stufe 4. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +3-b Zurück zu Stufe 3. + Inzwischen sollte klar sein, wie wir das taten. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +2-b Zurück zu Stufe 2. + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +1-b Und schließlich zurück zur äußersten Stufe 1. + Nach diesem Satz drücken wir +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + und ändern die Absatzumgebung zurück nach +\family sans +Standard +\family default +, um die Liste zu beenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Das war es! Übrigens hätten wir auch die +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +-, +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default +-, +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(lang)- +\family default + und sogar die +\family sans +Gedicht +\family default +-Umgebung anstatt der +\family sans +Liste +\family default +-Umgebung benutzen können. + Das Beispiel hätte sehr ähnlich ausgesehen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Beispiel 2: Vererbung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schachtelungs!-beispiele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +Dies ist die +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default +-Umgebung auf Stufe 1, der äußersten Stufe. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +Jetzt werden wir Eingabe drücken, dann +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +; danach werden wir zur +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung wechseln. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist die +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung auf Stufe 2. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Sehen Sie, wie die geschachtelte +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung nicht nur die Rand\SpecialChar \- +ein\SpecialChar \- +stel\SpecialChar \- +lung der Elternumgebung ( +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default +) erbt, sondern auch Schriftart und Leerzeichen! +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Wir haben dies Beispiel beendet, indem wir +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + gedrückt haben. + Danach mussten wir die Absatzumgebung auf +\family sans +Standard +\family default + und die Schachtelungstiefe mit einmal +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + zurücksetzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Beispiel 3: Marken, Stufen und +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +- und +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schachtelungs!-beispiele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Beispiel 3: Marken, Stufen \SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist Stufe 1 in einer +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Absatzumgebung. + Wir wollen einige davon schachteln. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist Stufe 2. + Wir haben +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default + gedrückt, gefolgt von +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +. + Was wird passieren, wenn wir eine +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebung hier hinein schachteln? Sie wird auf Stufe 3 sein, aber welche + Marke wird es sein? Ein Stern? +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Nein! Es ist ein schwarzer Kreis. + Dies ist die +\emph on +erste +\emph default + +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Stufe, obwohl wir auf Stufe 3 sind. + Deswegen ist die Marke ein schwarzer Kreis. + (Bemerkung: wir kamen hierher durch +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default +, dann +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +, dann der Umgebungswechsel auf +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +.) +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Hier ist Stufe 4, produziert mit +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default +, dann +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +. + +\family default + Wir werden das noch einmal machen \SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\SpecialChar \ldots{} + um zu Stufe 5 zu gelangen. + Diesmal aber haben wir auch die Absatz\SpecialChar \- +umgebung auf +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default + zurückgesetzt. + Beachten Sie die Nummerierung! Sie ist jetzt eine +\emph on +kleingeschriebene römische Zahl +\emph default +, weil wir auf der +\emph on +dritten +\emph default + Stufe der +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung sind (das heißt dies ist eine +\family sans +Aufzählung- +\family default + in einer +\family sans +Aufzählung- +\family default + in einer +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Was passiert, wenn wir die Absatzumgebung +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + ändern, sondern die Schachtelungstiefe verringern? Welche Nummerierung + wird LyX benutzen? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Oh, als wenn Sie das nicht bereits geraten hätten. + Wir benutzen nur +\family sans +Alt+Ein\SpecialChar \- +gabe +\family default +, um die Umgebung und die Tiefe beizubehalten und einen neuen Eintrag zu + erzeugen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Wir wollen +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + benutzen, um nach dem nächsten +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default + die Tiefe zu verringern. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist Stufe 4. + Sehen Sie, was für eine Marke LyX benutzt! +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dies ist Stufe 3. + Obwohl wir die Stufen geändert haben, benutzt LyX immer noch kleingeschriebene + römische Zahlen für die Marken. + Warum? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Weil der Absatz trotz der Tiefenänderung +\emph on +immer noch +\emph default + die dritte Stufe der +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung ist. + Beachten Sie aber, dass LyX den Zähler für die Marke +\emph on +zurückgesetzt +\emph default + hat. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Eine weitere Folge +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe+ +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + und wir sind zurück auf Stufe 2. + Diesmal haben wir nicht nur die Schachtelungstiefe zurückgesetzt, sondern + sind auch in der +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebung eine Stufe zurückgegangen. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dasselbe passiert nach einer weiteren Folge +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe+ +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +. + Wir sind zurück auf Stufe 1, der äußersten Stufe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Schließlich haben wir die Umgebung auf +\family sans +Standard +\family default + zurückgesetzt. + Wie Sie sehen, korrespondiert die Stufennummer nicht mit dem Markentyp, + den LyX für die +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +- und +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebungen benutzt. + Die Anzahl von +\emph on +anderen +\emph default + +\family sans +\emph on +Aufzählung +\family default +-Umgebun\SpecialChar \- +gen +\emph default +, die sie umgeben, bestimmen die Marke, die LyX für einen +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +-Eintrag benutzt. + Dasselbe gilt auch für die +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +-Umgebung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Beispiel 4: Übergeschnappt +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schachtelungs!-beispiele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Jetzt werden wir völlig verrückt. + Wir werden weder so tief wie in den anderen Beispielen schachteln noch + so ausführlich erklären, wie wir es machen. + (Stufe 1: +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +( +\family sans +Eingabe, +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, Standard +\family default +: Stufe 2) Wir werden eine kurze Beschreibung in runden Klammern irgendwo + platzieren. + Zum Beispiel besagen die beiden Tastenkombinationen, wie wir die Tiefe + änderten. + Der Umgebungsname bezeichnet natürlich die Umgebung, in der wir uns befinden. + Entweder davor oder danach werden wir die Stufe schreiben. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +( +\family sans +Eingabe, Aufzählung +\family default +: Stufe 1) Dies ist der nächste Eintrag in der Liste. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Verse +Jetzt dichten wir. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Es wird noch schlechter. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +( +\family sans +Eingabe, +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, Gedicht +\family default +: Stufe 2) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Wir wollen ein Bier. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Das wäre gerechter! +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +( +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Hier kommt eine Tabelle: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ein Fisch +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +zwei Fische +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +rote Fische +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +blaue Fische +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Verse + +\family sans +(Alt+Eingabe, Tabelle, +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + 3mal, +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe, Gedicht, +\family default + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +( +\family sans +Eingabe, Aufzählung +\family default +: Stufe 1) Dies ist ein weiterer Eintrag. + Beachten Sie, dass die Wahl einer +\family sans +Tabelle +\family default + die Schachtelungstiefe auf Stufe 1 zurücksetzt, so dass wir sie dreimal + erhöhen mussten, damit die Tabelle in die +\family sans +Gedicht +\family default +-Umgebung kommt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Wir beenden nun die +\family sans +Aufzählung +\family default + und wechseln nach +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default +. + Wir sind immer noch auf Stufe 1. + Wir wollen Ihnen einige Dinge zeigen, die Sie mit dem Mischen von Umgebungen + machen können. + Die nächsten Absätze sind ein +\emph on +zitierter Brief +\emph default +. + Wir werden die +\family sans +Adresse +\family default +- und die +\family sans +Adresse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +rechts +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Umgebung hier hineinschachteln, dann ein weiteres geschachteltes +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default + für den Brief selber benutzen. + Wir werden +\family sans +Alt+Eingabe +\family default + benutzen, um die Tiefe beizubehalten. + Denken Sie daran, dass Sie +\family sans +Strg+Ein\SpecialChar \- +ga\SpecialChar \- +be +\family default + benötigen, um innerhalb von +\family sans +Adresse +\family default +- und +\family sans +Adresse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +rechts +\family default +-Umgebungen mehrere Zeilen schreiben zu können. + Hier ist das Ergebnis: +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Right Address +Franz Meier +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Nirgendwostr. + 1234 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +54321 Irgendwo +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +18. + Feb. + 1999 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Sehr geehrter Herr Soundso, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +wir bedauern, Ihnen mitteilen zu müssen, dass wir Ihre Bestellung über 50 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Liter komprimiertes Methangas wegen widriger Umstände nicht liefern können. + Unglücklicherweise sind einige unserer Kühe auf merkwürdige Weise explodiert, + so dass wir nicht mehr genügend Methan haben. + Wir werden Sie auf die Warteliste setzen und Ihre Bestellung so schnell + wie möglich liefern. + In der Zwischenzeit danken wir Ihnen für Ihre Geduld. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Wir haben aber jetzt ein Sonderangebot für Rindfleisch. + Wenn Sie interessiert sind, schicken Sie bitte das beigefügte Bestellformular + zusammen mit einem Scheck an uns zurück. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Wir danken Ihnen nochmals für Ihre Geduld. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Hochachtungsvoll, +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Franz Meier +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Quotation +Ende des Beispiels! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie Sie sehen können, erreichen Sie mit dem Schachteln von Umgebungen in + LyX eine ganze Menge mit nur wenigen Tastendrücken. + Wir hätten leicht eine +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default + innerhalb von +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(lang) +\family default + oder +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default + schachteln können oder ein +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default + innerhalb von einer +\family sans +Auflistung +\family default +. + Sie haben jede Menge Möglichkeiten zur Auswahl. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Abstände, Seiten- und Zeilenumbrüche +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Was ist ein Abstand? Während es andere Programme erleuben, mehrfach hintereinand +er Leerzeichen zu verwenden, bietet LyX stattdessen verschiedene Leerräume/Abstä +nde an: Abstände mit verschiedener Breite und Leerzeichen, die am Zeilenende + umgebrochen werden können oder davor geschützt sind. + Der folgende Abschnitt zeigt einige Beispiele wo solche Abstände nützlich + sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Geschütztes Leerzeichen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Geschütztes-Leerzeichen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Leerzeichen ! geschutztes@geschütztes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es wird benutzt, um LyX (bzw. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTeX) mitzuteilen, die Zeile +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + zwischen den beiden Worten umzubrechen. + Das ist manchmal nötig, um unschöne Zeilenumbrüche zu vermeiden, wie hier: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Weitere Informationen finden Sie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family roman +\series medium +Offensic +\family default +\series default +htlich sollte zwischen +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Abschnitt +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + ein geschütztes Leerzeichen stehen. + Dieses wird über das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Formatierung +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Ge\SpecialChar \- +schütz\SpecialChar \- +tes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Leer\SpecialChar \- +zei\SpecialChar \- +chen +\family default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+Leertaste +\family default +) eingefügt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Horizontaler Leerraum +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Horizontaler-Leerraum" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Leerraum ! horizontaler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alle horizontalen Leerräume können über das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Horizontaler +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Abstand +\family default + eingefügt werden. + Die Längeneinheiten sind in Anhang +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Maßeinheiten" + +\end_inset + + aufgelistet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Normales Leerzeichen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Normales-Leerzeichen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einige Sprachen fügen nach einem Punkt einen etwas größeren Abstand ein, + und LyX befolgt diese Konvention; siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Abkürzungen-und-Satzendepunkt" + +\end_inset + + für Beispiele. + Nach Punkten in Abkürzungen folgt jedoch meist ein normaler Abstand. + Diesen können Sie mit +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Normales +\family default + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Leerzeichen +\family default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+Alt+Leertaste +\family default +) einfügen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Halbes Leerzeichen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Halbes-Leerzeichen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Leerzeichen ! halbes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein +\family sans +Halbes +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Leerzeichen +\family default + ist nur halb so breit wie das normale und +\emph on +geschützt +\emph default +. + Die typographischen Konventionen vieler Sprachen benutzen es dort, wo ein + normales Leerzeichen zu breit sein würde, zum Beispiel in Abkürzungen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote + +\noun on +D. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +E +\noun default +. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\noun on +Knuth +\noun default + hat unser geliebtes Schriftsatzprogramm entwickelt, d. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +h. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +TeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einen halbes Leerzeichen können Sie mit +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Formatierung +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Halbes +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Leerzeichen +\family default + oder +\family sans +Strg+Umschalt+Leertaste +\family default + einfügen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Weitere Leerräume +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt des Weiteren die folgenden Leerräume: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Negatives +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Halbes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Leerzeichen Eine Zeile mit einem +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + Negatives, halbes Leerzeichen zwischen den Pfeilen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Halbgeviert +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) Eine Zeile mit einem +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \enskip{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + Halbgeviert +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) zwischen den Pfeilen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Geviert +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) Eine Zeile mit einem +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \quad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + Geviert +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) zwischen den Pfeilen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Doppelgeviert +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) Eine Zeile mit einem +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \qquad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + Doppelgeviert +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) zwischen den Pfeilen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Benutzerdefiniert Eine Zeile mit +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hspace{} +\length 2cm +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm Leerraum zwischen den Pfeilen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Tabelle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Breite-der-verschiedenen" + +\end_inset + + listet die verschiedenen Breiten der Lerräume auf. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Breite-der-verschiedenen" + +\end_inset + +Breite der verschiedenen horizontalen Lerräume. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Leerraum +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Breite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Normal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Geschützt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Halb +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Negativ Halb +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +-1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Halbgeviert (0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Geviert (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Doppelgeviert (2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Variabler horizontaler Abstand +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Variabler-horiz-Abstand" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein variabler horizontaler Abstand ( +\family sans +HFill +\family default +) ist eine besondere Funktion, um zusätzlichen Leerraum gleichmäßig einzufügen. + Er ist ein Leerraum mit variabler Länge, der dem verbleibenden zwischen + dem linken und dem rechten Rand entspricht. + Gibt es in einer Zeile mehrere variable horizontale Abstände, teilen sie + sich den freien Leerraum gleichmäßig. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier sind ein paar Beispiele: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Dieser Teil ist links +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Dieser Teil ist rechts +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Links +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Mitte +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Rechts +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Links +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +1/3 Links +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Rechts +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das waren Beispiele in der +\family sans +Zitat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(kurz) +\family default +-Umgebung. + Hier +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + ist ein variabler horizontaler Abstand in einem +\family sans +Standard +\family default + Absatz. + Egal ob er im Ausdruck erscheint oder nicht, er befindet sich zwischen + den Pfeilen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +HFills können sichtbar gemacht werden, wenn Sie ein +\family sans +Füllmuster +\family default + in den Abstand-Einstellungen wählen. + Folgende Füllmuster sind verfügbar: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Punkte: +\begin_inset space \dotfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Linie: +\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Linkspfeil: +\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Rechtspfeil: +\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Klammer oben: +\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Klammer unten: +\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bemerkung: +\series default + Wenn ein HFill am Beginn einer Zeile aber nicht in der ersten Zeile eines + Absatzes ist, wird er von LyX ignoriert. + Das verhindert, dass HFills aus Versehen auf die nächste Zeile gesetzt + werden. + Wenn Sie in diesem Fall trotzdem den Abstand brauchen, setzen Sie die Option + +\family sans +Schützen +\family default + in den Abstand Einstellungen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Phantom-Leerraum +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Phantom-Leerraum" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Leerraum ! Phantom +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Manchmal benötigt man Leerraum mit exakt der Länge eines Ausdrucks. + Angenommen Sie wollen die folgende Multiple-Choice Frage stellen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +Was ist korrektes Englisch?: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge would have been jumps the gun. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang ngerman + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mr. + Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +has to be jumped +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang ngerman + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mr. + Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +jumps +\lang ngerman + +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +So dass die Antwortmöglichkeiten exakt nach dem Ausdruck +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + beginnen. + Dafür können Sie die Phantom-Einfügung im Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Phantom +\family default + verwenden. + In unserem Fall fügen Sie ein horizontales Phantom am Anfang der letzten + beiden Zeilen ein und schreiben +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + in das Phantom (beachten sie das Leerzeichen nach +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). + Eine Phantom-Einfügung gibt nur den Leerraum ihres Inhalts aus (so wie + ein Platzhalter). + Das ist der Grund warum es +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Phantom +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + genannt wird. + Das normale Phantom gibt die Höhe und Breite des Inhalts als Leerraum aus, + während die horizontale und vertikale Variante nur die entsprechende Dimension + ausgibt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Vertikaler Leerraum +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Vertikaler-Leerraum" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Leerraum ! vertikaler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Zusätzlichen senkrechten Leerraum über oder unter einem Absatz fügt man + mit dem Dialog +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Vertikaler +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Abstand +\family default + hinzu. + Dort kann man aus den folgenden Größen wählen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +SmallSkip +\family default +, +\family sans +MedSkip +\family default + und +\family sans +BigSkip +\family default + sind LaTeX-Größen, die von der Schriftgröße des Dokuments abhängen. + +\family sans +DefSkip +\family default + ist der Abstand, der im Dialog +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Textformat +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + für die Absatztrennung eingestellt ist. + Wenn Sie Absätze per Einrückung voneinander trennen, ist +\family sans +DefSkip +\family default + gleich +\family sans +MedSkip +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der +\family sans +Abstand +\family default + wird dort eingefügt, wo der Cursor steht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wir werden kein Beispiel für +\family sans +Variabel +\family default + zeigen, weil es Papierverschwendung ist. + Er arbeitet so wie die anderen Fülltypen, einschließlich variabler horizontaler + Abstand: er füllt den restlichen senkrechten Raum einer Seite mit Leerraum. + Gibt es mehrere +\family sans +VFill +\family default +s auf einer Seite, teilen sie sich den restlichen Leerraum gleichmäßig. + +\family sans +VFill +\family default +s kann man deshalb benutzen, wenn man Text auf einer Seite zentrieren will + oder ihn 2/3 oder 1/4 usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +nach unten platzieren will. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bemerkung: +\series default + Falls der vertikale Leerraum in der Ausgabe am oberen/unteren Seitenrand + erscheinen würde, wird er nur hinzugefügt, wenn die Option +\family sans +Schützen +\family default + gesetzt ist. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Absatz +\family sans +-Ausrichtung +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Absatz ! -ausrichtung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit dem Menü +\family sans +Absatz-Einstellungen +\family default + ( +\family sans +Bearbeiten +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Absatz-Einstellungen +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +) können Sie die Ausrichtung ändern. + Normalerweise ist +\family sans +Voreinstellung +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Absatztyps +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +(xyz) +\family default + aktiviert, meistens ist xyz Blocksatz, was bedeutet, dass der Leerraum + zwischen den Worten variabel ist und jede Zeile des Absatzes den Platz + zwischen den beiden Rändern ausfüllt. + Wenn Sie eine der vier Möglichkeiten +\family sans + Blocksatz, Links, Zentriert +\family default + und +\family sans +Rechts +\family default + aktivieren, wird die Voreinstellung deaktiviert. + Diese Ausrichtungen sind selbsterklärend und sehen wie folgt aus: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align left +Dieser Absatz ist linksbündig, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +dieser ist zentriert, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align right +und dieser ist rechtsbündig. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\emph on +Anmerkung +\emph default +: Bei diesen drei Absatzausrichtungen wird ober- und unterhalb ein zusätzlicher + vertikaler Abstand eingefügt. + Will man zum Beispiel mehrere kurze Zeilen zentriert setzen, sollte man + nach jeder Zeile +\family sans +Strg+Eingabe +\family default + statt +\family sans +Eingabe +\family default + benutzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Manueller Seitenumbruch +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Seitenumbruch!manuell +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Manueller-Seitenumbruch" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Ihnen nicht gefällt, wie LaTeX die Seiten Ihres Dokumentes umbricht, + können Sie manuelle Seitenumbrüche einfügen. + Im allgemeinen ist das +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + nötig, weil LaTeX Seitenumbrüche gut gestaltet, wie bereits in Abschnitt + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Schusterjungen-und-Hurenkinder" + +\end_inset + + erwähnt. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wir empfehlen +\emph on +sehr +\emph default +, +\emph on +keine +\emph default + manuellen Seitenumbrüche einzufügen, +\emph on +bevor +\emph default + das Dokument endgültig fertig ist und Sie sich in der Druckvorschau überzeugt + haben, dass Sie die Seitenumbrüche +\emph on +wirklich +\emph default + ändern müssen. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Natürlich können Sie das auch kapitelweise tun, da ein Kapitel immer auf + einer neuen Seite beginnt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Dann können Sie einen manuellen Seitenumbruch an der Stelle, wo der Cursor + gerade steht, mit +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Formatierung +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Neue +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Seite +\family default + einfügen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einen manuellen Seitenumbruch werden Sie vielleicht einfügen wollen, damit + eine Abbildung oder eine Tabelle auf einer neuen Seite beginnen. + Das ist natürlich der falsche Weg. + Mit LyX können Sie festlegen, dass Ihre Abbildungen und Tabellen automatisch + auf den Beginn einer neuen Seite kommen (oder ans Ende oder auf eine eigene + Seite), ohne dass Sie sich darum kümmern müssen, was vor oder nach Ihrer + Abbildung oder Tabelle steht. + In den Abschnitten +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Abbildungen" + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tabellen" + +\end_inset + + erfahren Sie mehr über Gleitobjekte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Leerender Seitenumbruch +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Leerender-Seitenumbruch" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Seitenumbruch!leerend +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enthält eine Seite auch Gleitobjekte, wird mit dem Befehl +\family sans + Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seite +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +leeren +\family default + die Seite umgebrochen, und alle noch nicht gedruckten Gleitobjekte kommen + auf die neue Seite oder folgende. + Bei doppelseitigem Druck macht der Befehl +\family sans + Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Doppelseite +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +leeren +\family default + dasselbe, aber die neue Seite ist auf jeden Fall eine ungerade, eventuell + mit einer Leerseite dazwischen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Manueller Zeilenumbruch +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Manueller-Zeilenumbruch" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zeilenumbruch ! manuell +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Analog zu Seitenumbrüchen gibt es zwei Typen von Zeilenumbrüchen: Einen + der einfach die Zeile umbricht. + Dieser Zeilenumbruch kann in einem Absatz mit dem Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Normaler +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Zeilenumbruch +\family default + oder mit +\family sans +Strg+Enter +\family default + erzwungen werden. + Der andere Typ, der über das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rechtsbündiger +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Zeilenumbruch +\family default + oder mit +\family sans +Strg+Umschalt+Enter +\family default +eingefügt wird, bricht die Zeile um und dehnt sie dabei so, dass sie den + kompletten Raum zwischen den Seitenrändern einnimmt. + Dies ist nützlich um +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Fransen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + in Blocksatz-Absätzen zu verhindern, die eventuell durch Leerraum aufgrund + eines Zeilenumbruchs entstehen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie sollten keine manuellen Zeilenumbrüche verwenden um LaTeXs Zeilenumbruchmech +anismus zu korrigieren, denn LaTeX ist sehr gut bei Zeilenumbrüchen. + Es gibt dennoch einige Situationen wo es notwendig ist, einen Zeilenumbruch + zu setzen, z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + in einem Gedicht oder einer Adresse (siehe die Abschnitte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Zitate" + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Gedicht" + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Adresse-verwenden" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Horizontale Linien +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Horizontale-Linien" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +horizontale Linien +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Horizontale Linien können Sie mit +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Formatierung +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Horizontale +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Linie +\family default + einfügen. + Der Linienversatz ist der vertikale Abstand zwischen Linien und Grundlinie + der aktuellen Textzeile oder des Absatzes. + Die Linieneinstellungen können geändert werden, indem man mit links auf + die Linie klickt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Zeichen und Symbole +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alle Zeichen Ihrer Tastatur können Sie direkt eingeben. + Sie können auch besondere Tastaturtabellen benutzen, wenn Sie zum Beispiel + französische Zeichen mit einer deutschen Tastatur eingeben wollen. + In Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sub:Tastaturtabellen" + +\end_inset + + finden Sie weitere Informationen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie Zeichen benutzen wollen, die nicht auf Ihrer Tastatur sind, gibt + es das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Sonderzeichen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Symbole +\family default +. + Hiermit öffnen Sie ein Fenster mit Symbolen, von denen Sie eins oder mehrere + auswählen können. + Außerdem können Sie auch aus anderen Kategorien als der angezeigten auswählen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Anmerkung: +\series default + Eventuell werden nicht alle eingefügten Symbole von LyX angezeigt. + Das hängt von Ihrer Bildschirmschriftart ab, aber +\emph on +alle +\emph default + Symbole werden gedruckt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Schrift +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Textstile +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Text ! -stil +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Schrift-und-Textstile" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Schrifttypen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften ! Typen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt zwei Schrifttypen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Skalierbare +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Schriften +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften ! skalierbare +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (auch Vektorschriften +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften ! Vektor- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + genannt)werden aus den Umrissen der einzelnen Zeichen mit Hilfe von mathematisc +hen Funktionen erstellt. + Damit die Darstellung der Zeichen für verschiedene Größen immer gut aussieht, + werden mehrere Funktionen benutzt. + Zum Darstellen oder Drucken eines Zeichens berechnet ein Renderer, welche + Pixel in den Umriss gepackt werden müssen. + Die Vektorschriften sind für jede Zeichengröße bestens geeignet. + Nur bei sehr kleinen Zeichengrößen kann es schwer sein, die Pixel richtig + zu berechnen, damit das Zeichen noch gut aussieht. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Die Schriftarttypen +\family typewriter +TrueType +\family default +, +\family typewriter +OpenType +\family default + und +\family typewriter +Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +PostScript +\family default + sind Vektorschriftarten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Bitmap-Schriften +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften ! Bitmap- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + werden aus Bitmap-Bildern der einzelnen Zeichen erstellt. + Sie sehen deshalb für alle Größen gut aus, für die ein Bitmap-Bild vorhanden + ist. + Das sind meist Zeichengrößen von 8 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +34 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Pixel. + Vergrößerungen sehen deshalb nicht besonders gut aus. + Der Vorteil von Bitmap-Schriften ist, dass keine aufwendigen Berechnungen + durchgeführt werden müssen. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +In PostScript und PDF-Dokumenten sind +\family typewriter +Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\family default +-Schriftarten Bitmap-Schriften. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Weil also skalierbare Schriften für fast alle Zeichengrößen gute Ergebnisse + liefern, werden sie von fast allen Text-Render- und Drucksatz-Programmen + benutzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie wissen wollen, welche Schriftarten in einem PDF-Dokument benutzt + werden, sollten Sie sich dessen Eigenschaften anschauen. + Beim +\family typewriter +Adobe Reader +\family default + sind sie unter +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dokumenteigenschaften\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Schriften +\family default + zu finden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Viele moderne Drucksetz- und Textauszeichnungs-Programme haben damit begonnen, + Schriftstile an Stelle von verschiedenen Schriftarten zu benutzen. + Anstatt zum Beispiel die Kursivform einer bestimmten Schriftart zu benutzen, + wird ein +\emph on +Hervorhebungsstil +\emph default + benutzt. + So wird das auch in LyX gemacht, wo kontextabhängig gearbeitet wird, damit + Sie sich nicht auf die Einzelheiten des Drucksatzes konzentrieren müssen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaTeX Schriftunterstützung +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Traditionell verwendet LaTeX seine eigenen Schriften. + Daher kann man die Schriften, die im Betriebssystem installiert sind nicht + verwenden, sondern muss spezielle LaTeX-Schriften benutzen. + Der Grund ist, dass LaTeX besondere Informationen von den Schriften benötigt, + die von zusätzlichen Dateien und Paketen bereit gestellt werden. + Die Schattenseite ist, dass daher die Auswahl an Schriften im Vergleich + zu anderen Textprogrammen etwas eingeschränkt ist. + Auf der anderen Seite hat man den Vorteil dass die LaTeX-Schriften generell + eine exzellente Qualität haben und auf allen Betriebssystemen exakt gleich + aussehen. + Mittlerweile gibt es eine recht große Zahl an LaTeX-Schriften, freie und + kommerzielle. + In LyX sind nur einige davon direkt über die Dokumenteinstellungen auswählbar + (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Dokumentschrift-und-Schriftgröße" + +\end_inset + + für Details). + Es sind dennoch alle verfügbar wenn man den entsprechenden LaTeX-Code in + den LaTeX-Vorspann einfügt (bitte lesen Sie dazu die Dokumentation der + gewünschten Schrift). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die neuesten Entwicklungen sind LaTeX-Interpreter, die es erlauben die Schriften +, die auf Ihrem Betriebssystem installiert sind, direkt zu verwenden. + Dies sind die Interpreter XeTeX und LuaTeX. + Beine werden von LyX unterstützt. + Damit kann man theoretisch jede installierte OpenType oder TrueType Schrift + verwenden. + Der nächste Abschnitt beschreibt wie man diese Schriften verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Es kann sein, dass einige Schriften aufgrund schlechter Zeichendefinitionen + ein schlechtes Ergebnis in der Ausgabe bringen; daher muss man manchmal + experimentieren. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + XeTeX und besonders LuaTeX sind immer noch relativ neu und daher noch nicht + ganz so stabil wie das traditionelle LaTeX oder PDFTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Dokumentschrift +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Schrift@-schrift +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Schriftgröße +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften ! Größe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Dokumentschrift-und-Schriftgröße" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können die Dokumentschrift im Dialog +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Schriften +\family default + festlegen. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Dort kann eingestellt werden, welche Schriftfamilie verwendet wird — Serifensch +rift, +\family sans +Serifenlos +\family default + oder +\family typewriter +Schreibmaschine +\family default + — und wie groß die Grundschriftgröße und der Skalierungsfaktor für (einige) + Serifenlos- und Schreibmaschine-Schriften ist, damit deren Größe zur Größe + der Serifenschrift passt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie die Option +\family sans +Nicht-T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX-Schriften verwenden +\family default + benutzen, haben Sie Zugriff auf die in Ihrem Betriebssystem installierten + Schriften. + Dies setzt voraus, dass Sie +\family sans +PDF (XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF (LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + oder +\family sans +DVI (LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + als Ausgabeformat verwenden. + Das bedeutet daher auch, dass entweder XeTeX oder LuaTeX installiert sein + müssen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" + +\end_inset + +). + Die TeX-Schriften sind dann allerdings nicht verfügbar. + Es ist zu beachten, dass LyX dann alle verfügbaren Schriften in jeder der + drei Listen (Serifenschrift, Serifenlose, und Schreibmaschine) aufführt, + da LyX die Familie nicht bestimmen kann. + Des Weiteren kann die Ausgabe mit einigen der Schriften fehlschlagen, entweder + durch inkompatible Kodierungen der Schriften oder Fehler in den Schriftdefiniti +onen. + LyX kann dies nicht im Voraus prüfen, so dass Sie eventuell experimentieren + müssen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie TeX-Schriften verwenden (dies ist die Voreinstellung), sind die + möglichen Optionen für die Schriften +\family sans +Standard +\family default + und eine Liste von in Ihrer LaTeX-Distribution verfügbaren Schriften. + +\family sans +Standard, +\family default + verwendet die Schrift, die die aktuelle Dokumentklasse als Standard hat. + In den meisten Fällen ist dies die Standard-TeX-Schrift, die als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +Computer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + ( +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +) oder +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +European Computer Modern +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + ( +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +) bekannt ist. + Einige spezielle Klassen verwenden eine andere Schrift als Standard. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Weil +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + und +\family typewriter +ec +\family default + Bitmap-Schriften sind, können sie in manchen PDF-Betrachtern bei großer + Vergrößerung treppenförmig aussehen. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Der Adobe Reader ab Version 6 glättet sie mit einem speziellen Renderer + für Bitmap-Schriften. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Um das zu vermeiden, können Sie skalierbare Schriften benutzen. + Es gibt drei Möglichkeiten: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Wählen Sie die +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + Schriften, was empfohlen ist, wenn Sie die das Aussehen der +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +/ +\family typewriter +ec +\family default + Schriften behalten wollen. + +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + wurde für die LaTeX-Gemeinde entwickelt, um die +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +-Schriften als Standard abzulösen. + Sie enthält eine riesige Anzahl an Glyphen und verschiedene Schriftschnitte. + Außer einigen Details, in denen das Aussehen verbessert wurde, schaut +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + identisch zu +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + aus; +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ein Unterschied ist eine bessere Unterschneidung. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +oder wählen Sie +\family sans +AE +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Almost +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European) +\family default + für den (seltenen) Fall dass +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + nicht verfügbar ist oder nicht funktioniert, Sie aber das Aussehen der + Schrift +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +/ +\family typewriter +ec +\family default + emulieren wollen. + +\family typewriter +AE +\family default + sind virtuelle Schriften in dem Sinne, dass sie das Aussehen der +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +-Schriften von anderen Schriften +\emph on +stehlen +\emph default +. + Der Nachteil ist, dass einige Zeichen fehlen, zum Beispiel die französischen + +\emph on +Guillemets +\emph default + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +« +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +» +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Wenn Sie im LaTeX-Vorspann das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +aeguill +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! aeguill +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + mit der Zeile +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[ec]{aeguill} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series default +laden, wird dieses Problem beseitigt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und dass Zeichen mit Akzenten nicht +\emph on +ein +\emph default + Zeichen sind, sondern aus +\emph on +zwei +\emph default + bestehen, dem Buchstaben und dem Akzent. + Deswegen kann man Dokumente nicht nach Worten mit solchen Zeichen durchsuchen. + Wenn Sie zum Beispiel das französische Wort +\emph on +brève +\emph default + in einer PDF-Datei suchen, werden Sie es nicht finden, weil der PDF-Betrachter + nach +\emph on + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\emph default +è +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + sucht und nicht nach +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +e + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + ̀ +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Wenn Sie das Aussehen von +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +/ +\family typewriter +ec +\family default + nicht mögen, können Sie natürlich eine der anderen angebotenen Vektorschriftart +en verwenden, z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + oder +\family typewriter + +\family sans +Palatino +\family default +. + Die meisten Vektorschriftarten mit Serifen wählen automatisch eine passende + serifenlose und eine Schreibmaschine-Schriftart aus +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dies sind entweder einfach passende andere Schriftarten (z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + verwendet +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman die Schrift +\family default + +\family sans +Helvetica +\family default + für serifenlosen Text), oder verschiedene Schnitte der selben Schrift, + d. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +h. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +eine echte +\emph on +Schriftfamilie +\emph default + (z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + im Fall von +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + oder +\family sans +Computer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, aber Sie könne auch eigene explizit festlegen. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Die Unterschiede zwischen Serifenschrift, +\family sans +Serifenlos +\family default + und +\family typewriter +Schreibmaschine +\family default + werden in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Textstil-Dialog" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Die Schrift +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + wurde ursprünglich für Zeitungen entwickelt. + Das bedeutet, dass ihre Zeichen kleiner als die von anderen Schriften sind, + damit sie in die schmalen Zeitungsspalten passen. + Deshalb ist diese Schrift für große Dokumente wie Bücher nicht geeignet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Für die Schriftgröße gibt es generell vier mögliche Werte: Standard, 10, + 11 und 12. + Einige Klassen bieten zusätzliche Größen an. + Die Größe von Standard hängt von der Klasse ab, die Sie benutzen. + Bei den Standard-Klassen ist sie gleich der Schriftgröße 10. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Für die +\family sans +Grundgröße +\family default + gibt es die Werte +\family sans +Standard +\family default +, +\family sans +10 +\family default +, +\family sans +11 +\family default + und +\family sans +12 +\family default +. + Einige Dokumentklassen bieten weitere Größen an. + Die +\family sans +Standard +\family default +-Größe hängt von der Klasse ab, die Sie verwenden. + Bei den Standardklassen ist sie gleich +\family sans +10 +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es ist zu beachten dass die Schriftgröße eine +\emph on +Grundgröße +\emph default + ist. + Das heißt dass LyX alle anderen möglichen Schriftgrößen, zum Beispiel für + Fußnoten, hoch- und tiefgestellt usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +an dieser Größe ausrichtet. + Die Schriftgröße von Teilen des Texts kann im +\family sans +Textstil +\family default +-Dialog geändert werden. + Die möglichen Schriftgrößen sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Textstil-Dialog" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Über die +\family sans +Standard-Familie +\family default + kann der Standard-Schriftfamilie eingestellt werden; Serifenschrift, Serifenlos + oder Schreibmaschine. + In den meisten Fällen ist +\family sans +Standard +\family default + gleichbedeutend mit +\family sans +Serifenschrift +\family default +. + Einige Dokumentklassen (wie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B.Präsentationsklassen) verwenden jedoch einen anderen Standard. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family typewriter + +\family sans +LaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Fontkodierung +\family default + ist eine Einstellung für Experten, mit der der Wert geändert kann, der + an das LaTeX-Paket +\emph on + +\series bold +\emph default +fontenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! fontenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + übergeben wird (siehe auch Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Einstellungen" + +\end_inset + +). + Normalerweise müssen Sie nichts ändern (und diese Einstellung auch nicht + verstehen). + Verwenden Sie daher +\family sans +Benutzerdefiniert +\family default +, es sei denn, Sie haben Ihre Gründe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit einigen Schriften sind die Optionen +\family sans +Mediävalziffern verwenden +\family default + und +\family sans +Echte Kapitälchen verwenden +\family default + aktiviert. + Dies sind spezielle Features, die einige Schriften anbieten. + Wenn Sie die Option +\family sans +Mediävalziffern verwenden +\family default + auswählen, werden Ziffern mit Ober- und Unterlängen (sogenannte Mediäval- + oder Minuskelziffern) verwendet, die sich besonders gut in den Fließtext + einfügen. + +\family sans +Echte Kapitälchen verwenden +\family default + bewirkt, dass echte Kapitälchen verwendet werden, und nicht Großbuchstaben, + die skaliert werden. + Echte Kapitälchen sind Teil von hochwertigen Schriften und sehen besser + aus als skalierte, müssen jedoch oft extra gekauft werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im CJK-Feld können die Benutzer von Chinesisch, Japanisch oder Koreanisch + (CJK) eine Schrift festlegen, mit dem die Schriftzeichen dargestellt werden + sollen. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Die Schrift wird als Argument für die Befehle des LaTeX-Paketes +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + verwendet. + Das wirkt sich aber nicht auf die Dokumentsprache +\family sans +Japanisch +\family default + aus, die +\series bold +CJK +\series default + nicht benutzt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Wenn Sie eine andere Schrift oder Schriftgröße verwenden, verändert LyX + +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + die Bildschirmschrift! Die Änderung ist nur in der Ausgabe sichtbar; dies + ist Teil des WYSIWYM Konzeptes. + LyXs Bildschirmschriften können im Dialog +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + eingestellt werden, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bildschirmschriften" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Gebrauch unterschiedlicher Buchstabenstile +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Buchstabenstile +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie wir bereits gesehen haben, ändert LyX automatisch den +\color black +Buchstabenstil +\color inherit + für gewisse Absatzumgebungen. + Wir haben bereits den Buchstabenstil +\family sans +Hervorhebung +\family default + erwähnt. + Es gibt auch +\family sans +Eigenname +\family default + (meistens ist das +\family sans +Kapitälchen +\family default +). + Beide kann man mit Tastenkürzeln, über die Menüs oder die Werkzeugleiste + auswählen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um +\family sans +Kapitälchen +\family default + zu aktivieren, machen Sie folgendes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Sie klicken auf den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + +, oder Sie drücken +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +K. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Diese Befehle sind Umschalter: ist +\family sans +Eigenname/Kapitälchen +\family default + aktiviert, so wird es durch den Befehl deaktiviert und umgekehrt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine typische Anwendung für +\family sans +Eigenname/Kapitälchen +\family default +-Stil sind Namen, zum Beispiel +\noun on + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Matthias Ettrich +\noun default + ist der LyX-Erfinder. +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der +\family sans +Hervorhebung +\family default +sstil wird häufiger benutzt. + Man kann ihn folgendermaßen (de)ak\SpecialChar \- +ti\SpecialChar \- +vie\SpecialChar \- +ren – es sind ebenfalls Umschalter: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Sie klicken auf den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + +, oder Sie drücken +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +H +\family default +. + oder +\family sans +Strg+E +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Zur Zeit ist der +\family sans +Hervorhebung +\family default +sstil gleichbedeutend mit einer kursiven Schrift. + Wir wollen dem Benutzer in Zukunft ermöglichen, eine andere Zuordnung zu + treffen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Den +\family sans +Hervorhebung +\family default +sstil haben wir überall in diesem Dokument benutzt. + Hier ist noch ein Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation + +\emph on +Übertreiben Sie den Gebrauch von Buchstabenstilen nicht! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Über das Beispiel hinaus ist es eine Warnung. + Man sollte in etwa so schreiben, wie man sich unterhält. + Da man sich ja nicht dauernd anschreit, sollte man vermeiden, Dinge zu + oft hervorzuheben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann den Buchstabenstil auf die Voreinstellung zurücksetzen, indem man + entweder das Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Leerzeichen +\family default + oder den Dialog +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Textstil\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Benutzerdefiniert +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +) verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Feineinstellung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Feineinstellung!der Zeichen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + mit dem Textstil-Dialog +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Textstil-Dialog" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt immer Situationen, in denen man Feineinstellungen vornehmen muss. + Deshalb hat LyX Möglichkeiten, den Buchstabenstil zu verändern. + Zum Beispiel schreiben ein wissenschaftliches Journal oder eine Firma vor, + dass eine Schrift ohne Serifen in gewissen Situationen zu benutzen ist. + Schriftsteller benutzen manchmal eine andere Schrift, um die Gedanken einer + Person von einem gewöhnlichen Dialog abzuheben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bevor wir beschreiben, wie man Buchstabenstile ändern kann, wollen wir eine + Warnung wiederholen: Übertreiben Sie den Gebrauch von Buchstabenstilen + nicht. + Viele moderne Textverarbeitungen bieten viele Schriften an, womit Sie die + Stärke der Presse besitzen. + Unglücklicherweise gibt es eine Tendenz, damit zu verschwenderisch umzugehen. + Es hat etwas von +\emph on +mit Kanonen auf Spatzen schießen +\emph default +. + Außerdem sieht ein Dokument, das sehr viele Schriften und Größen benutzt, + wirklich so aus, als hätte jemand Löcher hinein geschossen. + – Aber genug gejammert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um Schriften zu verändern, wählen Sie +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Textstil +\family default + oder klicken Sie auf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +, um das Dialogfenster +\family sans +Textstil +\family default + angezeigt zu bekommen. + Dieses Menü hat sieben Schaltflächen für die verschiedenen Schrifteigenschaften +, die man auswählen kann. + Klickt man auf eine Schaltfläche, kann man eine Einstellung wählen oder + mit +\family sans +Keine +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Änderung +\family default + alles beim alten lassen. + Mit +\family sans +Zurücksetzen +\family default + wird die Eigenschaft auf ihren Standardwert in der gerade benutzten Absatzumgeb +ung zurückgesetzt. + Damit kann man auf einen Schlag Attribute für verschiedene Absatzumgebungen + zurücksetzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die sieben Schrifteigenschaften und ihre möglichen Werte (plus +\family sans +Keine +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Änderung +\family default + und +\family sans +Zurücksetzen +\family default +) sind: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Familie +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften ! Familie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + Das +\emph on +allgemeine Aussehen +\emph default + der Schrift. + Es gibt folgende Möglichkeiten: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Roman +\family default + Dies ist die Schriftfamilie Roman. + Es ist auch die Standardfamilie. + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +R +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Serifenfrei +\family default + +\family sans +Dies ist die Schriftfamilie Sans Serif. + +\family default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +S +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Schreibmaschine +\family default + +\family typewriter +Dies ist die Schriftfamilie Schreibmaschine +\family default + (Tas\SpecialChar \- +ten\SpecialChar \- +kürzel +\family sans +Alt+Z C +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Strichstärke +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Strichstärke +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + Dies ist die Druckstärke +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Druckstärke +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + mit folgenden Optionen: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Mittel +\family default + Dies ist die Druckstärke mittel. + Es ist auch die Standardstärke. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Fett +\family default + +\series bold +Dies ist die Druckstärke fett. + +\series default + Fettdruck kann man mit +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +F +\family default + oder +\family sans +Strg+B +\family default + (de)aktivieren. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Schnitt +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schnitt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + Wie der Name schon sagt mit folgenden Optionen: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Normal +\family default + Dies ist die Standardform. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Kursiv +\family default + +\shape italic +Dies +\shape default + +\family sans +\shape italic +i +\family default +st die kursive Form +\shape default +\emph on +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Geneigt +\family default + +\shape slanted +Dies ist die geneigte Form +\shape default + (obwohl man es auf dem Bildschirm vielleicht nicht sieht, ist die Form + anders als kursiv). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Kapitälchen +\family default + +\shape smallcaps +Dies ist die Kapitälchenform +\shape default +\noun on +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Farbe +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften ! Farbe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Farbe ! Text +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Hiermit können Sie eine Textfarbe auswählen. + Neben +\family sans +Keine +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Farbe +\family default +, was bedeutet, dass die Farbe verwendet wird, die im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Farbe +\family default + für den +\family sans +Haupttext +\family default + eingestellt ist, können Sie zwischen +\family sans +Schwarz +\family default +, +\family sans +Weiß +\family default +, +\family sans +Rot +\family default +, +\family sans +Grün +\family default +, +\family sans +Blau +\family default +, +\family sans +Cyan +\family default +, +\family sans +Magenta +\family default + und +\family sans +Gelb +\family default + wählen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Sprache +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sprache (ändern) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +Hiermit können Sie einem markierten Textteil eine andere Sprache zuordnen. + Dieser Text wird (nur in LyX) blau unterstrichen, um die Sprachänderung + zu anzuzeigen. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Wenn Sie zum Beispiel längeren englischen Text in Ihrem Dokument haben, + berücksichtigt LaTeX für diesen Teil automatisch die englische Silbentrennung. + Wenn Sie die Rechtschreibprüfung benutzen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rechtschreibprüfung" + +\end_inset + +), werden dann englisch markierten Wörter nach dem englischen Wörterbuch + geprüft. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Größe +\family default + Ändert die Schriftgröße +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften ! Größe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Sie werden hier keine Zahlenwerte finden; alle möglichen Größen sind proportion +al zur Standardschriftgröße. + Noch einmal, Sie füttern LyX nicht mit Details, sondern mit einer Beschreibung + von dem, was Sie machen wollen. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Die Optionen sind: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Winzig +\family default + +\size tiny +Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +winzige +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Schriftgröße. + +\size default + (Tastenkürzel: +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +T +\family default + oder +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Sehr +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Klein +\family default + +\size scriptsize +Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +sehr kleine +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Schriftgröße. + +\size default + (Tastenkürzel: +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Fußnote +\family default + +\size footnotesize +Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Fußnoten +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +-Schriftgröße. + +\size default + ( +\size small +Tastenkürzel +\size default +: +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Klein +\family default + +\size small +Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +kleine +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + Schriftgröße. + +\size default + ( +\size small +Tastenkürzel: +\size default + +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Umschalt+S +\family default + oder +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +4 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Normal +\family default + Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +normale +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + Schriftgröße. + Dies ist auch die Standardgröße (Tastenkürzel: +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +N +\family default + oder +\family sans +Alt+S 5 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Groß +\family default + +\size large +Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +große +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Schriftgröße. + +\size default + (Tastenkürzel: +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\family default + oder +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +6 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Größer +\family default + +\size larger +Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +größere +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Schriftgröße. + +\size default +(Tastenkürzel: +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Umschalt+L +\family default + oder +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +7 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Noch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Größer +\family default + +\size largest +Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +noch größere +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Schriftgröße. + +\size default + (Tastenkürzel: +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Riesig +\family default + +\size huge +Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +riesige +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Schriftgröße. + +\size default + (Tastenkürzel: +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +H +\family default + oder +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +9 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Gigantisch +\family default + +\size giant +Dies ist die +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +gigantische +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Schriftgröße. + +\size default + (Tastenkürzel: +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Umschalt+H +\family default + oder +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +0 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Vergrößern +\family default + vergrößert den markierten Text schrittweise +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Verkleinern +\family default + verkleinert den markierten Text schrittweise +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Wir warnen Sie +\emph on +noch einmal +\emph default +: spielen Sie mit dieser Funktion nicht verrückt. + Die Schriftgröße müssen Sie so gut wie nie ändern. + LyX ändert die Schriftgröße für verschiedene Absatzumgebungen automatisch + – das sollten Sie benutzen. + Dies ist nur für Feineinstellungen! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Diverses +\family default + Hier können Sie auf Buchstabenniveau noch ein paar andere Dinge ändern: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Hervorgehoben +\family default + +\emph on +Dies ist hervorgehobener Text +\emph default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Dies mag wie +\shape italic +kursiv +\shape default + aussehen, aber es ist ein wenig anders. + Wenn Sie bei kursivem Text hervorheben benutzen, wird es normaler Text. + Bei zukünftigen LyX-Versionen können Sie diese +\emph on +logische +\emph default + Eigenschaft hoffentlich Ihren Wünschen entsprechend anpassen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Unterstrichen +\family default + +\bar under +Dies ist unterstrichener Text. + +\bar default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +U +\family default + oder +\family sans +Strg+U +\family default +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Vermeiden Sie unterstrichenen Text wo immer es geht! Dies ist ein Überbleibsel + aus der Zeit der Schreibmaschine, als man Schriften nicht ändern konnte. + Man muss heutzutage Text nicht mehr durch Unterstreichung hervorheben. + Dies ist in LyX nur verfügbar, da einige Leute dies brauchen um Stilvorschrifte +n von Journalen einzuhalten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Doppelt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +unterstrichen +\family default + +\uuline on +Dies ist doppelt unterstrichener Text. + +\uuline default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +D +\family default +) +\lang english + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang ngerman +Da wir Sie eben vor unterstrichenem Text gewarnt haben, können Sie sich + sicher denken, was wir von doppelt unterstrichenem Text halten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Wellig +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +unterstrichen +\family default + +\uwave on +Dies ist wellig unterstrichener Text. + +\uwave default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +W +\family default +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Verwenden Sie dies nur wenn ein Journal unbedingt darauf besteht. + halten Sie Tabletten gegen Übelkeit parat. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Durchgestrichen +\family default +\bar under + +\bar default +\strikeout on +Dies ist durchgestrichener Text. + +\strikeout default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+Umschalt+O +\family default +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Dies wird oft verwendet um eine alte Version eines Textes zu kennzeichnen, + der inzwischen geändert wurde. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Eigenname/Kapitälchen +\family default + +\noun on +Dies ist Text mit Kapitälchen. +\noun default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Dies ist ebenso wie +\family sans +Hervorgehoben +\family default + ein logisches Attribut. + Zur Zeit ist es +\family sans +Kapitälchen +\family default +, aber es wird eines Tages wählbar sein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vermeiden Sie zu unterstreichen, wenn Sie können! Es ist ein Überbleibsel + aus den Schreibmaschinentagen, als man Schriften nicht wechseln konnte. + Wir brauchen auf das Unterstreichen nicht mehr zurückzugreifen, um etwas + hervorzuheben. + Es ist nur deshalb in LyX, weil es auch in LaTeX ist und weil einige es + +\emph on +möglicherweise +\emph default + benötigen, um Stilvorschriften zu genügen. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Sie können aus einer großen Zahl von Kombinationsmöglichkeiten wählen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nachdem Sie mit Hilfe des Dialogs +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Textstil\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Benutzerdefiniert +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +) einen neuen Buchstabenstil gewählt haben, +\shape italic +\emph on +können +\shape default +\emph default + Sie ihn mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "textstyle-apply" +\end_inset + + aktivieren. + (Sie können natürlich auch die Knöpfe +\family sans +Übernehmen +\family default + und +\family sans +Schließen +\family default + benutzen.) Mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf kann man auch dann umschalten, +\color black +wenn +\color inherit + das +\color black +Menü +\color inherit + +\family sans +Zeichenformat +\family default + nicht zu sehen ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um den Buchstabenstil komplett auf die Voreinstellung zurückzusetzen, drückt + man +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Leertaste +\family default +. + Will man nur die Einstellungen umschalten, die man gerade geändert hat + (angenommen man hat gerade den Schnitt auf +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +geneigt +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und die Strichstärke auf +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +fett +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + gesetzt), verwendet man die Option +\family sans +Alle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +umschalten +\family default + und drückt +\family sans +Übernehmen +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie sollten den Unterschied zwischen den drei Hauptschrifttypen kennen +\family sans +Serifenschrift +\family default +, +\family sans +Serifenlos +\family default +, und +\family typewriter +Schreibmaschine +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family typewriter +Schreibmaschine +\family default + ist eine sogenannte +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +nichtproportionale +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + Schriftart, was bedeutet, dass jedes Zeichen dieselbe Breite hat; das +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +i +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + ist so breit wie das +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +m +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Hier ist ein Beispiel +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +kein +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +Schreibmaschine-Text +\family default + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Für mehr über Phantom-Leerräume, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Phantom-Leerraum" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +kein Schreibmaschine-Text +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Serifenschrift +\family default + Schriftarten verwenden Zeichen mit Serifen. + Dies sind die kleinen +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Anhängsel +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + am Ende der Striche, die ein Zeichen bilden. + Das folgende Beispiel zeigt den Unterschied: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Text mit Serifen +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Text ohne Serifen +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Serifen ermöglichen ein schnelles und leichtes Lesen. + Diese Schriften werden daher als Standardschrift verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Serifenlos +\family default + wird nicht als Grundtyp empfohlen. + Diese Schrift wird daher oft nur für Abschnittsüberschriften und Kurztexte + verwendet. + In diesem Dokument wird er zur Hervorhebung von Menünamen verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Umschalten +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + bezieht sich auf das Setzen oder Entfernen von Schrifteigenschaften. + Wenn eine Eigenschaft fürs Umschalten im Textstil-Dialog ausgewählt ist, + wird sie vom ausgewählten Text entfernt, wenn dieser schon die Eigenschaft + besitzt. + Wenn man z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + einen Stil mit den Eigenschaften A, B und C für Text anwendet, der aktuell + die Schrifteigenschaften B, C, F und G hat, und wenn B auf umschalten, + C auf nicht umschalten gesetzt ist, wird der Text danach die Eigenschaften + A, C, F und G haben. + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Niemals Umschalten +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Immer Umschalten +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + bedeutet, dass man die Umschalt-Eigenschaft nicht kontrolliert. + Für die Eigenschaften der linken Seite des Dialogs ( +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Familie +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + usw.) entscheidet man selbst über das Umschalten. + Wenn +\family sans +Alle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +umschalten +\family default + gewählt ist, werden alle Eigenschaften der linken Dialogseite umgeschaltet; + standardmäßig werden sie nicht umgeschaltet. + Die Einstellung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Zurücksetzen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + wird nie umgeschaltet. + Wenn man z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B: +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Strichstärke +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + auf +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Zurücksetzen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + setzt, +\family sans +Alle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +umschalten +\family default + wählt und dies auf fett gesetzten Text anwendet, wird auf die Voreinstellung + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Mittel +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + zurückgesetzt, egal wie oft man den Stil anwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es wird zum Schluss nochmal gewarnt: Übertreiben Sie den Gebrauch von +\emph on + +\emph default +Schriften nicht! Sie sind ansonsten nur ein vorgetäuschter Ersatz für gutes + Schreiben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Druckvorschau +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Druckvorschau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Drucken +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +drucken +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Überblick +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nachdem wir nun einige Grundfunktionen von LyX zur Dokumentbearbeitung erläutert + haben, wollen Sie sicherlich wissen, wie Sie Ihr Meisterstück ausdrucken + können. + Vorher wollen wir Ihnen jedoch einen kurzen Überblick über das geben, was + sich im Hintergrund abspielt. + Wir werden dies ausführlicher in den +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + behandeln. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX benutzt das Programm LaTeX zur Druckaufbereitung. + (Eigentlich ist LaTeX nur ein Makropaket für das Druckaufbereitungssystem + TeX, aber um Sie nicht zu verwirren, werden wir das Ganze nur LaTeX nennen.) + Sehen Sie es so: LyX benutzen Sie zum Schreiben. + Dann ruft LyX LaTeX auf, um daraus etwas Druckbares zu machen. + Das passiert in mehreren Schritten: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +LyX wandelt Ihr Dokument in eine Reihe von Textbefehlen für LaTeX um und + erzeugt eine Datei mit der Erweiterung +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +LaTeX benutzt die Befehle der +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default +-Datei, um eine druckbare Ausgabe zu erzeugen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ausgabe-Dateiformate +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dateiformate +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Ausgabe-Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +ASCII +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dateiformate ! ASCII +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.txt +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + Es enthält Ihr Dokument als reinen Text bezüglich den Regeln des ASCII-Formats + (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können ihr Dokument nach ASCII über das Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Einfacher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text +\family default +. + Dies exportiert jedoch nicht Material, das extern generiert wird, wie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + BibTeX-Bibliographien (Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken" + +\end_inset + +). + Falls Ihr Dokument solches Material enthält, verwenden Sie das Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Weitere Formate und Optionen +\family default + und wählen dann +\family sans +Einfacher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii) +\family default +. + Dies exportiert das Dokument intern zuerst nach PostScript (erzeugt dabei + das externe Material) und dann nach ASCII. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +LaTeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dateiformate ! LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + und enthält alle Befehle, die von LaTeX benötigt werden um das Dokument + zu prozessieren. + Wenn die LaTeX verstehen, können Sie so die Ursache von LaTeX-Fehler ergründen + oder die Datei mittels Konsolenbefehlen bearbeiten. + Die LaTeX-Datei wird automatisch in LyXs temporärem Verzeichnis erstellt, + wann immer Sie Ihr Dokument ansehen oder exportieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können ihr Dokument als LaTeX-Datei über das Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default + exportieren. + Die verschiedenen LaTeX-Export-Varianten sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub: Exportieren" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +DVI +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dateiformate ! DVI +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.dvi +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Diese bedeutet +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +device-independent +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (geräteunabhängig) da dieses Format genau das ist: Man kann es auf allen + Computern ohne irgend welche Konvertierungen einsetzen. + DVIs eignen sich für schnelle Voransicht für andere Ausgabeformate wie + PostScript. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +DVI-Dateien enthalten keine Bilder, sie verlinken diese nur. + Daher darf man nicht vergessen, die Bilder zusammen mit den DVIs weiterzugeben. + Da der DVI-Betrachter die Bilder im Hintergrund konvertieren muss um sie + darstellen zu können, kann das beim Scrollen im DVI den Computer verlangsamen. + Daher wird empfohlen PDF für Dateien mit vielen Bildern zu verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können ihr Dokument als DVI über das Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\family default + oder +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + exportieren. + Die zweite Möglichkeit verwendet das Programm +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +. + Dieses bietet direkte Unterstützung für Unicode und für die Direktwahl + von Schriften (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" + +\end_inset + +). + LuaTeX ist noch in der Entwicklung, könnte aber der nächste Standard TeX-Prozes +sor werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PostScript +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dateiformate ! PostScript +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.ps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + PostScript wurde von der Firma +\family typewriter +Adobe +\family default + als Druckersprache entwickelt. + Das Format enthält daher Befehle, die Drucker verwenden um die Datei zu + drucken. + PostScript kann als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Programmiersprache +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + angesehen werden; man kann damit Berechnungen durchführen und Diagramme + und Bilder zeichnen. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Falls Sie interessiert sind, mehr darüber zu erfahren, sollten Sie sich + das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +pstricks +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! pstricks +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + ansehen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Durch diese Fähigkeit sind die Dateien oft größer als PDFs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PostScript kann nur Bilder im Format +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Encapsulated PostScript +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (EPS, Dateiendung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.eps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +) enthalten. + Da LyX es erlaubt jedes bekannte Bildformat in Dokumente einzufügen, muss + es diese im Hintergrund in EPS konvertieren. + Wenn Sie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + 50 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Bilder in Ihrem Dokument haben, muss LyX 50 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Konvertierungen durchführen, wenn Sie Ihr Dokument zum ersten Mal in der + Ausgabe ansehen oder exportieren. + Dies kann Ihren Arbeitsfluss mit LyX verlangsamen. + Wenn Sie also planen, PostScript für die Ausgabe zu verwenden, sollten + Sie alle Bilder direkt als EPS einfügen und das Problem zu vermeiden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können ihr Dokument als PostScript über das Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +PostScript +\family default + exportieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PDF +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dateiformate ! PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.pdf +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Das +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Portable Document Format +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (PDF) wurde von +\family typewriter +Adobe +\family default + von PostScript abgeleitet. + Es ist komprimierter und verwendet weniger befehle als PostScript. + Wie der Name +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +portable +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (übertragbar) impliziert, kann es auf jedem Computersystem dargestellt + werden und der Ausdruck wird exakt gleich aussehen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF kann Bilder in seinem eigenen PDF-Format sowie in den Formaten +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Joint Photographic Experts Group +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (JPG, Dateiendung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpeg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +) und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Portable Network Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (PNG, Dateiendung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.png +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +) enthalten. + Sie können jedoch auch jedes andere Bildformat verwenden, denn LyX konvertiert + diese in eine der möglichen Formate. + Jedoch kann, wie im Abschnitt über PostScript beschrieben, die Bildkonvertierun +g den Arbeitsfluss verlangsamen. + Daher wird empfohlen, Bilder direkt in einem der drei erwähnten Formate + einzufügen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können ihr Dokument als PDF über das Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren +\family default + in verschiedenen Arten exportieren: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) Diese verwendet das Programm +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default +, das Ihr Dokument direkt in ein PDF konvertiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) Diese verwendet das Programm +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +, das Ihr Dokument direkt in ein PDF konvertiert. + +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + ist ein neuer Prozessor, der aus +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default + weiter entwickelt wurde und direkte Unterstützung für Unicode und für die + Direktwahl von Schriften bietet (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" + +\end_inset + +). + LuaTeX ist noch in der Entwicklung, könnte aber der nächste Standard TeX-Prozes +sor werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) Diese verwendet das Programm +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +, das Ihr Dokument direkt in ein PDF konvertiert. + +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default + ist ein neuer Prozessor, der direkte Unterstützung für Unicode und für + die Direktwahl von Schriften bietet (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Schriftunterstützung" + +\end_inset + +). + Er ist besonders geeignet für die Verwendung verschiedener Schriftsysteme + (Arabisch, Lateinisch, Japanisch, usw.). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) Diese verwendet das Programm +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default +, das Ihr Dokument im Hintergrund erst in ein DVI und anschließend in ein + PDF konvertiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) Diese verwendet das Programm +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default +, das ein PDF aus einer Post\SpecialChar \- +Script-Version Ihres Dokuments erstellt. + Die PostScript-Version wird vom Programm +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + erzeugt, das wiederum eine DVI-Version als Zwischenschritt erstellt. + Diese Art besteht also aus drei Konvertierungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wir empfehlen +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + zu verwenden, denn +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default + unterstützt alle Funktionen von aktuellen PDF-Versionen, ist schnell, stabil + und arbeitet ohne Probleme. + Wenn Sie verschiedene Schriftsysteme und\SpecialChar \slash{} +oder spezielle OpenType Schriften + verwenden, sollten Sie stattdessen +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + oder +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + ausprobieren auch wenn sie noch nicht so ausentwickelt wie +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default + sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +XHTML +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dateiformate ! XHTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +HTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Dateiformat hat die Endung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.xhtml +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und eignet sich besonders für die Ansicht in Webbrowsern. + Es enthält keine Bilder, sondern verlinkt sie nur. + Wenn LyX XHTML erzeugt, werden Teile des Dokuments wenn nötig in Bilder + umgewandelt. + Für die Ausgabe von Mathe können Sie im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ausgabe +\family default + zwischen verschiedenen Formaten wählen, die in Abschnitt +\emph on +Mathe-Ausgabe in XHTML +\emph default + der +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + beschrieben sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die XHTML-Ausgabe ist noch +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +unter Entwicklung +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + so dass noch nicht alle Funktionen von LyX unterstützt werden. + Siehe das Kapitel +\emph on +LyX und das World Wide Web +\emph default + in den +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + für weitere Informationen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können Ihr Dokument mit dem Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LyX-HTML +\family default + als XHTML-Datei exportieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Vorschau +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Vorschau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um das fertige Dokument mit allen Seitenumbrüchen, Fußnoten usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +anzusehen, verwenden Sie das Menü +\family sans +Ansicht +\family default + und wählen +\family sans +Ansehen +\family default +oder drücken den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + +. + Es wird sich dann ein Betrachtungsprogramm öffnen und das Dokument im voreinges +tellten Ausgabeformat anzeigen. + Für mehr über die globale Voreinstellung siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + + für die dokumentspezifische Einstellung siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" + +\end_inset + +. + Weitere Ausgabeformate können über +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Andere Formate ansehen +\family default + oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + ausgewählt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie Ihr Dokument geändert haben, können Sie die Ansicht mit dem Menü + +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Aktualisieren +\family default + bzw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Andere Formate aktualisieren +\family default + aktualisieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beim Vorschauen eines Dokuments wird die Ausgabedatei nur in LyXs temporärem + Verzeichnis erzeugt. + Für eine permanente Ausgabe muss das Dokument exportiert werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Die Datei von LyX aus ausdrucken +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Datei-ausdrucken" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Statt Ihre Dokument zu exportieren und dann zu drucken, können Sie es auch + direkt von LyX aus drucken. + Um eine Datei zu drucken, wählen Sie das Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Drucken +\family default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+P +\family default +) oder drücken Sie den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + +. + LyX ruft dann intern LaTeX auf um ein DVI zu erzeugen. + Diese Datei wird dann vom Programm +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + in eine PostScript-Datei gewandelt und anschließend mit dem Programm +\family typewriter +Ghostscript +\family default + gedruckt. + Durch diese Schritte im Hintergrund ist diese Methode nicht die schnellste. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann folgende Druckparameter in der +\family sans +Druckziel +\family default + Box festlegen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Drucker +\family default + Dies ist der Name des Druckers, auf dem ausgedruckt werden soll. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Man beachte, dass dies der Druckername für das Programm +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + ist. + Das bedeutet, dass +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + für diesen Druckernamen konfiguriert sein muss. + Der Standard-Drucker kann in LyXs Einstellungen-Dialog festgelegt werden, + siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Drucker" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Der Drucker sollte PostScript verarbeiten können. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Datei +\family default + Der Name einer Datei in die ausgegeben werden soll. + Die Ausgabe wird eine PostScript-Datei sein. + Sie wird in LyXs Arbeitsverzeichnis erstellt, falls kein Pfad angegeben + wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können wählen einen Bereich, nur gerade oder ungerade Seiten oder Seiten + in umgekehrter Reihenfolge zu drucken — Letztere sind für zweiseitigen + Druck ohne Duplexer nützlich: Man kann die Seiten nach dem einseitigen + Drucken je nach Drucker neu einlegen um anschließend die Rückseite zu bedrucken. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Ein paar Worte über Typographie +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Bindestriche, Gedankenstriche und Minuszeichen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bindestriche +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gedankenstriche +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In LyX hat das +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +-Zeichen vier Längen +\emph on +: +\emph default + +\emph on +Bindestrich, Gedankenstrich +\emph default +, +\emph on +langer Gedankenstrich +\emph default + und +\emph on +Minuszeichen +\emph default +: +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bindestrich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ein +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gedankenstrich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +– +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +eingefügt mit +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Sonderzeichen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Symbole +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +langer Gedankenstrich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +— +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +eingefügt mit +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Sonderzeichen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Symbole +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Minuszeichen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $-$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ein +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + im Mathematikmodus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alternativ können Sie die Gedankenstriche erzeugen, indem Sie das +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +-Zeichen mehrmals hintereinander schreiben. + LyX konvertiert sie automatisch in die richtige Länge. + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + gibt einen Gedankenstrich, +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + einen langen Gedankenstrich. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die drei Strichtypen unterscheiden sich vom Minuszeichen, das im Mathematikmodus + erscheint und eine eigene Länge hat. + Hier sind einige Beispiele für den Gebrauch von +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Zeilen- und Seitenumbrüche ( +\emph on +Bindestrich +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Von A – Z ( +\emph on +Gedankenstrich +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Oh — da ist ein +\emph on +langer Gedankenstrich. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ +\end_inset + + ( +\emph on +Minuszeichen +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie dies in LyX lesen, sehen Sie keine Unterschiede, aber in der gedruckten + Version erkennen Sie es. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Silbentrennung +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Silbentrennung" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silbentrennung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Allgemein +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In LyX gibt es keine Silbentrennung, erst in der Druckausgabe, und zwar + automatisch. + Das macht das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, und zwar in +\emph on +einigen +\emph default + Sprachen, nach den Regeln der Dokumentsprache. + Die LaTeX-Silbentrennung ist fast perfekt, sie hat nur Probleme mit dem + Schriftstil +\family sans +Schreibmaschine +\family default +, manchmal auch bei serifenfreiem Text, bei unüblichen Begriffen wie +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +h3knix/m0n0wand +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und zusammengesetzten Worten mit Bindestrich. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Falls LaTeX ein Wort nicht oder nicht richtig trennen kann, können Sie manuell + Trennhilfen einfügen. + Dazu wählen Sie +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Trenn\SpecialChar \- +möglichkeit +\family default + an der Stelle im Wort, an der Sie trennen möchten, oder einfach +\family sans +Strg+ +\family default + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +-. + Beachten Sie, dass diese Trennhilfen nur Empfehlungen für LaTeX sind. + Wenn keine Silbentrennung notwendig ist, wird LaTeX die Trennhilfen ignorieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Manchmal will man verhindern, dass etwas getrennt wird. + Dann schreibt man den Begriff am besten in eine Makebox wie in Abschnitt + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Silbentrennung unterbinden +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Bemerkung: Wenn Sie manuelle Trennhilfen innerhalb einer +\family sans +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Code +\family default +-Umgebung benötigen, müssen Sie statt +\family sans +Strg+ +\family default + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\backslash +- +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +"- +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + als TeX-Code benutzen, weil LyX mit +\family sans +Strg+ +\family default + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- in +\family sans +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Code +\family default +-Umgebungen (noch) nicht klarkommt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Eigenheiten der deutschen Sprache +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Paragraph +Zusammengesetzte Worte +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "Zusammengesetzte-Worte" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Deutschen werden zusammengesetzte Worte entweder zusammengeschrieben + wie eben oder mit einem Bindestrich zusammengefügt wie bei dem Ungetüm + Programmiersprachen-Handbücher. + In der Druckansicht werden Sie erkennen, dass dieses Wort über den Rand + gedruckt wird. + Das liegt daran, dass LaTeX solche Worte nur am Bindestrich trennen kann. + Zum Korrigieren gibt es mehrere Möglichkeiten: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Sie fügen Trennmöglichkeiten ein ( +\family sans +Strg+ +\family default + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +-), und zwar an jeder infrage kommenden Stelle, weil Sie ja nicht wissen + können, wo genau das zusammengesetzte Wort im Laufe der Bearbeitung landen + wird: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Im Deutschen werden zusammengesetzte Worte entweder zusammengeschrieben + wie eben oder mit einem Bindestrich zusammengefügt wie bei Pro\SpecialChar \- +gram\SpecialChar \- +mier\SpecialChar \- +spra\SpecialChar \- +chen- +Hand\SpecialChar \- +bü\SpecialChar \- +cher\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Sie benutzen statt des Bindestrichs +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +"= +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + als TeX-Code (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:TeX-Code-Kästchen" + +\end_inset + +). + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +"= +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + wird in der Druckansicht durch den Bindestrich ersetzt, und LaTeX wendet + seine Silbentrennregeln auf beide Teile an: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Im Deutschen werden zusammengesetzte Worte entweder zusammengeschrieben + wie eben oder mit einem Bindestrich zusammengefügt wie bei Programmiersprachen +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Handbücher\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Sie benutzen den rechtsbündigen Zeilenumbruch ( +\family sans +Strg+Umschalt+Eingabe +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Paragraph +Weggelassene Wortteile +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie einen Satz wie den folgenden schreiben: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Weil LyX LaTeX im Hintergrund benutzt, unterstützt es viele LaTeX-Befehle + und -Konstrukte, aber nicht alle. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +kann es wie hier vorkommen, dass die Zeile nach dem +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +-Zeichen umgebrochen wird, was natürlich Unsinn ist. + Dann verwendet man am besten den geschützten Trennstrich +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Trennstrich ! geschützter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + ( +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Sonderzeichen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Geschützter +\family default + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Trennstrich +\family default + oder +\family sans +Strg+Alt+ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\family default +): +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Weil LyX LaTeX im Hintergrund benutzt, unterstützt es viele LaTeX-Befehle + und \SpecialChar \nobreakdash- +Konstrukte, aber nicht alle. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Satzzeichen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Satzzeichen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Abkürzungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Abkurzungen@Abkürzungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Satzendepunkt +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Satzendepunkt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Abkürzungen-und-Satzendepunkt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn LyX LaTeX aufruft, um die endgültige Version Ihres Dokumentes zu erzeugen, + unterscheidet LaTeX automatisch zwischen Worten, Sätzen und Abkürzungen. + LaTeX fügt dann +\emph on +geeigneten Leerraum +\emph default + ein: zwischen dem Punkt am Ende eines Satzes und dem ersten Wort des nächsten + kommt ein wenig mehr Leerraum. + Abkürzungen bekommen hinter dem Punkt genauso viel Leerraum wie normale + Worte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Unglücklicherweise ist der Algorithmus zur Bestimmung einer Abkürzung und + eines Satzendes ein wenig dumm. + Wenn ein Punkt auf einen klein geschriebenen Buchstaben folgt, wird auf + Satzende entschieden; folgt der Punkt auf einen groß geschriebenen Buchstaben, + wird auf Abkürzung entschieden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier sind einige Beispiele von +\emph on +richtigen +\emph default + Abkürzungen und Satzenden: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +B. + Traven +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Ärgere Dich nicht. + Sei glücklich. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\SpecialChar \ldots{} + und hier sind welche, bei denen der Algorithmus falsch arbeitet: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +hier z. + B. + ist zu viel Leerraum! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Dies bin ICH. + Hier ist zu wenig. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Fehler sehen Sie erst in der gedruckten Version Ihres Dokumentes. + Um das Problem zu beheben, können Sie folgendes tun: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Benutzen Sie ein +\family sans +Normales +\bar under + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\bar default +Leerzeichen +\family default + ( +\family sans +Strg+Alt+Leertaste +\family default +) nach klein geschriebenen Abkürzungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Benutzen Sie einen kleinen Zwischenraum +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + ( +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latex-einführung" + +\end_inset + +, S. + 405) innerhalb von Abkürzungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Benutzen Sie einen +\family sans +Satzendepunkt +\family default + ( +\family sans +Strg+ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +. +\family default +), den Sie auch unter +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Son\SpecialChar \- +der\SpecialChar \- +zei\SpecialChar \- +chen +\family default + finden, um einen Leerraum wie zwischen Sätzen zu erzwingen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit den Korrekturen sehen die obigen Beispiele so aus: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +hier z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + ist zu viel Leerraum! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Dies bin ICH\SpecialChar \@. + Hier ist zu wenig. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Anführungszeichen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie ! Anführungszeichen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anfuhrungszeichen@Anführungszeichen | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Typographie +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX setzt Anführungszeichen normalerweise richtig. + Insbesondere wird es unterschiedliche Anführungszeichen für den Beginn + und das Ende des eingeschlossenen Textes benutzen. + Zum Beispiel +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Anfang Ende +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Das Tastaturzeichen +\family sans +" +\family default + (= +\family sans +Umschalt+2) +\family default + wird sie automatisch erzeugen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können das Verhalten der +\family sans +" +\family default +-Taste im Dialogfenster +\family sans +Dokument-Einstellungen +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + unter +\family sans +Sprache\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Stil +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Anführungszeichen +\family default + einstellen. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Über +\family sans +Anführungszeichen +\family default + können Sie sechs verschiedene Anführungszeichen auswählen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\family default + benutzt die Anführungszeichen: +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +doppelt +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + +\family default + benutzt die Anführungszeichen: +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +doppelt +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\family default + benutzt die Anführungszeichen: +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +doppelt +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + +\family default + benutzt die Anführungszeichen: +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +doppelt +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + benutzt die Anführungszeichen: +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +doppelt +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes ald +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes ard +\end_inset + + +\family default + benutzt die Anführungszeichen: +\begin_inset Quotes ald +\end_inset + +doppelt +\begin_inset Quotes ard +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um ein einfaches Anführungszeichens zu schreiben wollen, benutzen Sie +\family sans +Alt+ +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ligaturen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Ligaturen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie ! Ligaturen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ligaturen | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Typographie +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es ist eine Schriftsetzpraxis, gewisse Buchstaben zusammenzuziehen und sie + wie einen zu drucken. + Diese Kombinationen nennt man +\emph on +Ligaturen +\emph default +. + Da sich LaTeX mit Ligaturen auskennt, werden Ihre mit LyX geschriebenen + Dokumente sie auch haben. + Hier sind die möglichen Ligaturen: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +ff +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +fi +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +fl +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +ffi +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +ffl +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Manchmal aber möchte man keine Ligaturen in einem Wort. + Während eine Ligatur in einem Wort wie +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Graffiti +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + vielleicht in Ordnung ist, sieht es in zusammengesetzten Worten seltsam + aus, zum Beispiel +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Stofflappen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Dorffest +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Um die Ligatur aufzuheben benutzt man den LaTeX-Befehl +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +| +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + zwischen den Buchstaben ( +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ligaturtrenner +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ligatur!-trenner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + oder +\family sans +Strg+Umschalt+L +\family default +). + Dies macht aus +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Stofflappen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Stoff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +lappen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und aus +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Dorffest +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +fest +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einheiten +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie ! Einheiten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Allgemeinen ist der Abstand zwischen Zahl und Einheit kleiner als ein + normales Leerzeichen zwischen zwei Wörtern. + Wie man im Beispiel sehen kann, sieht es besser aus, wenn der Abstand kleiner + ist. + Um solch ein +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +halbes Leerzeichen +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + für Einheiten einzufügen, verwendet man das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatierung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Halbes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Leerzeichen +\family default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+Umschalt+Leerzeichen +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist ein Beispiel, das den Unterschied verdeutlicht: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Leerzeichen zwischen Zahl und Einheit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +halbes Leerzeichen zwischen Zahl und Einheit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Schusterjungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie ! Schusterjungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Hurenkinder +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie ! Hurenkinder +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Schusterjungen-und-Hurenkinder" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In den frühen Tagen der Textverarbeitungen passierten Seitenumbrüche genau + dort, wo die Seiten zu Ende waren. + Es spielte keine Rolle, worum es im Text eigentlich ging. + Sie werden sich sicher erinnern, dass Sie nach dem Drucken eines Dokumentes + feststellten, dass die Überschrift eines neuen Abschnittes oder die erste + Zeile eines neuen Absatzes allein auf der letzten Zeile einer Seite standen, + oder dass die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes die erste Zeile einer neuen Seite + bildete. + Diese Dinge nennt man +\emph on +Schusterjungen +\emph default + und +\emph on +Hurenkinder +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Klar, dass LyX vermeiden kann, eine Seite direkt nach der Abschnittsüberschrift + umzubrechen. + Das ist ein Vorteil von Absatzumgebungen. + Aber was ist mit Schusterjungen und Hurenkindern? LaTeX hat Regeln, um + mit Seitenumbrüchen fertig zu werden, und einige von ihnen sind speziell + dazu da, um Schusterjungen und Hurenkinder zu verhindern. + Das ist +\emph on +ein +\emph default + Vorteil, dass LyX LaTeX im Hintergrund hat. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wir können es nicht näher erläutern, wie TeX und LaTeX Seitenumbrüche festlegen + oder wie man das Verhalten beeinflussen kann. + Einige LaTeX-Bücher im Literaturverzeichnis (zum Beispiel +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +) mögen mehr darüber enthalten. + Auf jeden Fall müssen Sie sich fast nie darum kümmern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Notizen, Abbildungen, Tabellen und Gleitobjekte +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Notizen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notizen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Notizen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX bietet die folgenden Typen für Notizen an: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LyX-Notiz Dieser Notiz-Typ ist für interne Notizen gedacht, die nicht in + der Ausgabe erscheinen. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dies ist Text in einer Notiz-Box der nicht in der Ausgabe erscheint. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kommentar Dieser Notiz-Typ erscheint ebenfalls nicht in der Ausgabe, aber + als LaTeX-Kommentar wenn man das Dokument als LaTeX über das Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaTeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(xxx) +\family default + exportiert. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Comment +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dies ist Text in einer Notiz-Box der nur als Kommentar in der LaTeX-Datei + erscheint. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Grauschrift Dieser Notiz-Typ erscheint in der Ausgabe in einer Farbe, die + man in den Dokumenteinstellungen unter +\family sans +Farben\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Grauschrift-Notizen +\family default + einstellen kann. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dies ist Text +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dies ist eine Beispiel-Fußnote in einer Grauschrift-Notiz. + In diesem Dokument ist die Farbe dieses Notiz-Typs auf blau gesetzt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + eines Kommentars, der in der Ausgabe erscheint. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Wie man am Beispiel sehen kann, können Grauschrift-Notizen Fußnoten haben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notizen werden mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + oder dem Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Notiz +\family default + eingefügt. + Durch Rechts-Klicken auf die Notiz-Box kann der Typ eingestellt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Fußnoten +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Fußnoten" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fusnoten@Fußnoten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX verwendet Boxen, um Fußnoten darzustellen: Wenn man eine Fußnote mit + dem Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fußnote +\family default + oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "footnote-insert" +\end_inset + + einfügt, wird man die folgende Box sehen: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/FussnoteQt4.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + + Diese Box ist LyXs Darstellung einer Fußnote. + Klickt man mit links auf die Marke +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Fußnote +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, wird die Box geöffnet und man kann den Fußnotentext hineinschreiben. + Nochmaliges Klicken auf die Marke schließt die Box. + Will man bestehenden Text als Fußnote setzen, markiert man ihn einfach + und klickt dann auf den Fußnoten-Werkzeugleistenknopf. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist eine Beispiel-Fußnote: +\begin_inset Foot +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Um eine Fußnote zu schließen, klickt man auf die Marke der Fußnoten-Box. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Fußnote erscheint in der Ausgabe als tiefgestellte Nummer an der Position + im Text, an der die Fußnoten-Box eingefügt wurde. + Der Fußnotentext wird an das Ende der aktuellen Seite gesetzt. + Die Fußnotennummer wird von LyX entsprechend der Dokumentklasse berechnet. + LyX unterstützt noch keine speziellen Nummerierungsschemata, aber man kann + sie mit speziellen LaTeX-Befehlen erhalten. + Diese sind im Handbuch +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Randnotizen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Randnotizen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Randnotizen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Innerhalb von LyX erscheint und verhält sich eine Randnotiz genau wie eine + Fußnote. + Wenn Sie über das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Randnotiz +\family default + oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "marginalnote-insert" +\end_inset + + eine Randnotiz einfügen, erscheint eine Box mit der Beschriftung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Rand +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Diese Box repräsentiert in LyX eine Randnotiz. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +An der Seite ist eine Beispiel-Randnotiz. +\begin_inset Marginal +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dies ist eine Randnotiz. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Randnotizen erscheinen auf der rechten Seite in einseitigen Dokumenten. + In doppelseitigen Dokumenten erscheinen sie im Außenrand – links auf geraden + Seiten, rechts auf ungeraden Seiten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Für weitere Informationen über die Formatierung von Randnotizen, siehe Abschnitt + +\emph on +Randnotizen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Abbildungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Abbildungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und eingebundene Grafiken +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Grafiken +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Abbildungen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um ein Bild einzufügen, setzt man den Cursor an die gewünschte Position + und klickt auf den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + oder verwendet das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Grafik +\family default +. + Es erscheint dann ein Dialog in dem man das zu ladende Bild auswählt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieser Dialog bietet eine Vielzahl an selbsterklärenden Parametern. + In der Karteikarte +\family sans +Grafik +\family default + wählt man die Bilddatei aus. + Das Bild kann skaliert und rotiert werden. + Die Einheiten der Skalierung sind in Anhang +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:In-LyX-verfügbare" + +\end_inset + + erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In der Karteikarte +\family sans +Ausschnitt +\family default + können Bildkoordinaten angegeben werden um das Bild in der Ausgabe zuzuschneide +n. + Koordinaten können außerdem automatisch mit dem Knopf +\family sans +Lese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +aus +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Datei +\family default + berechnet werden. + Die Option +\family sans +Auf +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Begrenzungsbox +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +zuschneiden +\family default + druckt nur die Bildregion innerhalb der angegebenen Koordinaten. + Normalerweise muss man sich nicht um Bildkoordinaten kümmern und kann die + Karteikarte +\family sans +Ausschnitt +\family default +ignorieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In der Karteikarte +\family sans +LaTeX und LyX-Optionen +\family default + können LaTeX-Experten zusätzliche LaTeX-Optionen angeben. + Man kann zudem angeben wie das Bild innerhalb von LyX angezeigt wird. + Die Option +\family sans +Entwurfsmodus +\family default + hat den Effekt dass das Bild nicht in der Ausgabe erscheint, sondern nur + ein Rahmen in der Größe des Bildes. + Die Option +\family sans +Beim Exportieren nicht entpacken +\family default + ist im Handbuch +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + im Abschnitt +\emph on +Grafik-Dialog +\emph default + erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Grafikdialog kann jederzeit durch Klicken auf ein Bild geöffnet werden. + Bilder erscheinen in der Ausgabe genau an der Stelle, an der sie sich im + Text befinden. + Dies ist ein Beispielbild in einem separaten, horizontal zentrierten Absatz: + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/mobius.eps + scale 70 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn man Bildbeschriftungen benötigt und Bilder referenzieren will, muss + man das Bild in ein Gleitobjekt setzen, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Grafikformate +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Grafikformate +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Grafikformate" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können Grafiken in allen bekannten Formaten einfügen, aber weil jedes + Druckausgabe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Format nur bestimmte Grafikformate zulässt, benutzt LyX das Programm +\family typewriter +ImageMagick +\family default + im Hintergrund, um die Bilder ins richtige Format zu konvertieren. + In den Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ausgabe-Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + + ist beschrieben, welche Grafikformate Sie benutzen sollten. + Ähnlich wie bei Schriften gibt es zwei Hauptarten: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Pixelbilder +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Bitmaps) bestehen aus einzelnen Pixeln, oft in komprimierter Form. + Bei starker Vergrößerung sind diese Pixel sichtbar – man spricht vom +\emph on +Treppeneffekt +\emph default + (oder von +\emph on +Aliasing +\emph default +). + Bekannte Formate sind +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Graphics Interchange Format +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (GIF, Dateiendung +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.gif +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +GIF|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Grafikformate +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Portable Network Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (PNG, Dateiendung +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.png +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PNG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Grafikformate +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, und +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Joint Photographic Experts Group +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (JPG, Dateiendung +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpeg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +JPG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Grafikformate +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Skalierbare +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Grafiken +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Vektor-) bestehen aus Vektoren, die das Bild beschreiben, und lassen sich + ohne Datenverlust beliebig vergrößern. + Das ist bei Präsentationen wichtig, weil dort die Bilder durch den Projektor + skaliert werden. + Hilfreich sind sie auch bei Online-Dokumenten, um den Benutzer in Diagramme + hineinzoomen zu lassen. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Skalierbare Grafikformate können +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Scalable Vector Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (SVG, Dateiendung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.svg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +SVG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Grafikformate +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Encapsulated PostScript +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (EPS, Dateiendung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.eps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +EPS|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Grafikformate +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Portable Document Format +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (PDF, Dateiendung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.pdf +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + sein. + Wir sagen sie können, da man jedes Pixel-Grafikformat in ein PDF oder EPS + konvertieren kann und das Ergebnis trotzdem nicht skalierbar sein wird. + In diesen Fällen wird nur ein Vorspann mit dem Bildeigenschaften zum Originalbi +ld hinzugefügt. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Im Fall von PDF wird das Originalbild zusätzlich komprimiert. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Abbildungseinstellungen gruppieren +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Abbildungen!Einstellungen gruppieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Jede Abbildung kann eine neue Gruppe von Abbildungseinstellungen definieren + oder zu einer vorhandenen hinzugefügt werden. + Abbildungen einer Gruppe haben dieselben Einstellungen, so dass die Änderung + der Einstellungen einer Abbildung automatisch die Einstellungen aller Abbildung +en dieser Gruppe ändert. + Das erleichtert das Bearbeiten ähnlicher Abbildungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine neue Gruppe definieren Sie, indem Sie den Knopf +\family sans +Neue +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Gruppe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +eröffnen +\family default + im Grafik-Dialogfenster in der Karteikarte +\family sans +LaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X- +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +und +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Optionen +\family default + drücken. + Wenn Sie dann im Grafik-Dialogfenster einer anderen Abbildung denselben + Namen eintragen, gehört auch diese Abbildung zur Gruppe. + Wenn es schon Gruppennamen gibt, können Sie diese im Kontextmenü (Rechtsklick + auf die Abbildung) auswählen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Tabellen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tabellen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Tabellen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann Tabellen entweder über den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "tabular-insert" +\end_inset + + oder das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tabelle +\family default + einfügen. + Es erscheint dann ein Dialog, der nach der Anzahl an Spalten und Zeilen + fragt. + Die voreingestellte Tabelle besitzt Linien um jede Zelle und die erste + Zeile erscheint von der restlichen Tabelle etwas abgesetzt. + Dies kommt durch eine doppelte Linie zustande: Die Zellen der ersten Zeile + haben eine untere Linie und die Zellen der zweiten Zeile eine obere Linie. + Hier ist eine Beispieltabelle: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +A +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +B +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +C +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Der Tabellendialog +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tabellen ! -dialog +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann Tabellen verändern, indem man mit der rechten Maustaste auf sie + klickt und dann +\family sans +Mehr\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + wählt. + Dies öffnet den Tabellendialog. + Hier kann man die Einstellungen für Zellen, Zeilen und/oder Spalten vornehmen, + in denen sich gerade der Cursor befindet. + Die meisten der Dialogoptionen funktionieren auch für Auswahlen. + Das bedeutet dass wenn mehrere Zellen, Spalten oder Zeilen ausgewählt sind, + die Aktion für alle in der Auswahl durchgeführt wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Zusätzlich zum Tabellendialog hilft die +\family sans +Tabellen-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + um Tabelleneigenschaften zu verändern. + Sie erscheint wenn sich der Cursor in einer Tabelle befindet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In der Karteikarte +\family sans +Tabellen-Einstellungen +\family default + des Tabellendialogs kann man die Ausrichtung der aktuellen Zeile festlegen. + Wenn man eine Zeile oder Spalte einfügt, wird diese rechts neben bzw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +unter der aktuellen Zelle eingefügt. + Die vertikale Ausrichtung einer Spalte kann nur eingestellt werden wenn + eine Spaltenbreite angegeben ist. + Eine angegebene Spaltenbreite erlaubt es in der Zelle Zeilenumbrüche und + mehrere Absätze zu haben, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tabellenzellen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann mehrere Zellen einer Zeile/Spalte als Mehrfachspalten-/Mehrfachzeilenze +lle markieren, indem man die Option +\family sans +Mehrfachspalte +\family default + oder +\family sans +Mehrfachzeile +\family default + verwendet. + Dies vereint die Zellen zu +\emph on +einer +\emph default + Zelle, die sich über mehrere Zeilen/Spalten erstreckt. + Mehrfachspaltenzellen werden als eigene Zeilen behandelt, so dass die Ausrichtu +ngs-, Breiten-, und Linieneinstellungen nur die Mehrfachspaltenzelle betrifft. + Hier ist eine Beispieltabelle mit einer Mehrfachspaltenzelle in der ersten + Zeile und einer in der letzten Zeile ohne obere Linie: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +abc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +def ghi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +jkl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +A +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +B +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +C +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +D +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Versierte Nutzer können spezielle LaTeX-Argumente für die Tabelle angeben. + Diese sind für besondere Formatierungen wie Mehrfachzellen nötig, die im + Kapitel +\emph on +Tabellen +\emph default + des Handbuchs +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + erklärt sind. + Man kann außerdem die aktuelle Zelle oder die ganze Tabelle um 90 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Grad gegen den Uhrzeigersinn drehen. + Diese Rotationen sind in LyX nicht sichtbar, aber in der Ausgabe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Viele DVI-Betrachter können +\emph on +keine +\emph default + Rotationen darstellen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In der Karteikarte +\family sans +Rahmenlinien +\family default + können Linien für die aktuelle Zeile/Spalte hinzugefügt und entfernt werden. + Der Knopf +\family sans +Festlegen +\family default + fügt Linien um alle Zellen ein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Lange Tabellen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tabellen ! lange +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn eine Tabelle zu lang ist, um auf eine Seite zu passen, können Sie im + Dialogfenster +\family sans +Tabellen-Einstellungen +\family default + auf der Karteikarte +\family sans +Lange +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tabelle +\family default + die Option +\family sans +Lange +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tabelle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +verwenden +\family default + aktivieren, damit die Tabelle automatisch auf mehrere Seiten verteilt wird. + Wird dies gemacht, werden folgende Optionen freigeschaltet: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kopfzeile: Die aktuelle Zeile wird als eine Überschrifts-Zeile aller Seiten + festgelegt; mit Ausnahme der ersten, wenn +\family sans +Erste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Kopfzeile +\family default + aktiviert ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Erste +\lang english + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\lang ngerman +Kopfzeile: Die aktuelle Zeile wird als eine Überschrifts-Zeile der ersten + Seite einer mehrseitigen Tabelle definiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fußzeile: Die aktuelle Zeile wird als eine Fußzeile aller Seiten festgelegt; + mit Ausnahme der letzten, wenn +\family sans +Letzte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Fußzeile +\family default + aktiviert ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Letzte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Fußzeile: Die aktuelle Zeile wird als eine die Fußzeile der letzten Seite + einer mehrseitigen Tabelle definiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Legende: Die aktuelle Zeile enthält die Legende. + Sie wird als einzelne Spalte zurückgesetzt und eine Beschriftung wird über + das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Legende +\family default + eingefügt. + Mehr über Beschriftungen langer Tabellen ist im Handbuch +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können zudem eine Zeile angeben, an der die Tabelle gebrochen wird. + Wenn Sie mehr als eine Option für eine Tabellenzeile verwenden, sollten + Sie sich bewusst sein, dass dann nur die erste angegebene Option verwendet + wird, die anderen Optionen werden als +\emph on +leer +\emph default + definiert. + In diesem Zusammenhang bedeutet zuerst das Zuerst in dieser Reihenfolge: + +\family sans +Fußzeile, Letzte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Fußzeile, +\family default + +\family sans +Kopfzeile, +\family default + +\family sans +Erste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Kopfzeile +\family default +; siehe die folgende Lange Tabelle als Beispiel wie es funktioniert: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Telefonliste (ignoriere die Namen) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +NAME +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Telefonliste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +NAME +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +wird fortgesetzt +\series default + \SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +999 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +End +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tabellenzellen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Tabellenzellen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tabellen ! zellen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine Tabellenzelle kann Text, eingebettete Formeln, ein Bild oder eine andere + Tabelle enthalten. + All diese Arten von Objekten können in dieselbe Zelle gepackt werden. + Schriftgrößen und -schnitte können ebenfalls eingestellt werden. + Man kann aber keine speziellen Umgebungen (wie +\family sans +Abschnitt* +\family default +, u. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Ä.) einfügen oder Ausrichtungsoptionen für den Absatz der Zelle festlegen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um mehrzeilige Einträge in Tabellenzellen zu erstellen, muss man eine feste + Breite für die Spalte im Tabellendialog angegeben haben. + Der Text wird dann automatisch in mehrere Zeilen aufgeteilt und die Zelle + vertikal vergrößert, wenn die angegebene Breite überschritten wird. + Ein Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dies ist ein mehrzeiliger Eintrag in einer Tabelle. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +5 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +6 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dieser ist nun länger. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +7 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +8 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dies ist ein mehrzeiliger Eintrag in einer Tabelle. + Dieser ist nun länger. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +9 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Kopieren und Ersetzen funktioniert zwischen Tabellen und Tabellenzellen + gut; man kann sogar mehrere Zeilen kopieren und einfügen. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Man beachte, dass man nicht in eine Auswahl mehrerer Zellen kopieren kann, + denn es wäre nicht klar wohin ein einzelnes Wort in einer Auswahl von 2×3 + Zellen kopiert werden soll. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Das Auswählen mit der Maus oder mit +\family sans +Umschalt +\family default + plus den Pfeiltasten funktioniert wie gewohnt. + Man kann auch ganze Tabellen kopieren indem man die Auswahl außerhalb der + Tabelle beginnt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Gleitobjekte +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Gleitobjekte" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gleitobjekte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einführung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein Gleitobjekt ist ein Teil eines Dokuments, das keinen festen Platz hat. + Es kann eine oder mehrere Seiten vorwärts oder rückwärts +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +gleiten +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, dahin wo es am besten passt. + +\family sans +Fußnoten +\family default + und +\family sans +Randnotizen +\family default + sind ebenfalls Gleitobjekte, da sie zur nächsten Seite gleiten falls zu + viele Fußnoten/Notizen auf der aktuellen Seite sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Gleitobjekte ermöglichen ein qualitativ hochwertiges Layout. + Bilder und Tabellen können gleichmäßig über die Seiten verteilt werden + um Leerraum und Seiten ohne Text zu vermeiden. + Da das Gleiten oft den räumlichen Bezug zwischen dem Text und dem Bild +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +der Tabelle zerstört, kann jedes Gleitobjekt im Text referenziert werden. + Gleitobjekte sind daher nummeriert. + Referenzierungen/Querverweise sind Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Querverweise" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um ein Gleitobjekt einzufügen, verwendet man das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Gleitobjekt +\family default +. + Eine Box mit einer Legende, die z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + die Beschriftung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Abbildung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +#: +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + hat (# ist die aktuelle Nummer) wird in das Dokument eingefügt. + Die Beschriftung wird automatisch in der Ausgabe in die Dokumentsprache + übersetzt. + Nach der Beschriftung kann man einen Text für die Legende eingeben. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gleitobjekte ! Legende +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Das Bild oder die Tabelle wird über oder unter der Legende in einen eigenen + Absatz innerhalb des Gleitobjekts eingefügt. + Um LyX-Dokumente lesbar zu halten, können Gleitobjekt-Boxen durch Links-klicken + auf die Box-Beschriftung geöffnet und geschlossen werden. + Eine geschlossene Gleitobjekt-Box sieht wie diese aus: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/GleitobjektQt4.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + + – ein grauer Knopf mit roter Beschriftung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es wird empfohlen Gleitobjekte als separaten Absatz einzufügen um mögliche + LaTeX-Fehler zu vermeiden, die auftreten können, wenn der umgebende Text + besonders formatiert ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Beispiele +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gleitobjekte ! Abbildung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Abbildung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Ein-verzerrtes-Schnabeltier" + +\end_inset + + wurde mit dem Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Gleitobjekt\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Abbildung +\family default + oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert figure" +\end_inset + + erstellt. + Das Bild wurde eingefügt, indem der Cursor über die Beschriftung gesetzt + wurde und dann das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Grafik +\family default + oder der Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + verwendet wurde. + Das Bild wurde horizontal im Gleitobjekt zentriert, indem der Cursor vor + oder hinter das Bild gesetzt wurde und dann das Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Absatz-Einstellungen +\family default + oder der Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + + benutzt wurde. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/platypus.eps + lyxscale 50 + width 50col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Ein-verzerrtes-Schnabeltier" + +\end_inset + +Ein verzerrtes Schnabeltier in einem Gleitobjekt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Abbildungs-Gleitobjekt zeigt außerdem, wie man eine Marke einfügt + und diese referenziert: Man fügt eine Marke in die Beschriftung über das + Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marke +\family default + oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + + ein und verweist darauf mit dem Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Querverweis +\family default + oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +. + Es ist wichtig Querverweise für Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte zu verwenden, und + nicht vage Formulierungen wie +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +die obige Abbildung +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, denn LaTeX wird die Gleitobjekte in der Ausgabe neu anordnen, so dass + sie nicht mehr +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +obig +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + sein muss. + Für mehr über Querverweise siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Querverweise" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalerweise wird nur ein Bild in ein Abbildungs-Gleitobjekt eingefügt + aber manchmal will man zwei Bilder mit eigenen Beschriftungen haben. + Dies wird erreicht, indem man ein Abbildungs-Gleitobjekt in ein existierendes + Abbildungs-Gleitobjekt einfügt. + Dabei ist zu beachten, dass nur die Hauptbeschriftung des Gleitobjekts + in die Liste der Abbildungen, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Verzeichnisse" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben, eingefügt wird. + Abbildung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Zwei-verzerrte-Bilder" + +\end_inset + + ist ein Beispiel eines Abbildungs-Gleitobjekts mit zwei Bildern nebeneinander. + Man kann die Bilder auch untereinander setzen. + Abbildung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Undefinierbar" + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Schnabeltier" + +\end_inset + + sind die Untergleitobjekte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Undefinierbar" + +\end_inset + +Undefinierbar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Schnabeltier" + +\end_inset + +Schnabeltier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/platypus.eps + lyxscale 60 + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Zwei-verzerrte-Bilder" + +\end_inset + +Zwei verzerrte Bilder. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Tabellen-Gleitobjekt +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gleitobjekte ! Tabelle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Tabellen-Gleitobjekte können über das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Gleitobjekt\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tabelle +\family default + oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert table" +\end_inset + + eingefügt werden. + Sie haben dieselben Eigenschaften wie Abbildungs-Gleitobjekte bis auf dass + die Tabelle darin normalerweise unter die Beschriftung statt wie bei Abbildunge +n darüber gesetzt wird und dass die Marken mit +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +tab: +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + beginnen. + Tabelle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" + +\end_inset + + ist ein Tabellen-Gleitobjekt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" + +\end_inset + +Ein Tabellen-Gleitobjekt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Joe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mary +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ted +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +a & b\\ +c & d +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Weitere Informationen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gleitobjekte ! Details +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX unterstützt weitere Gleitobjekt-Typen und auch rotierte Gleitobjekte. + Des Weiteren kann das Nummerierungsschema, die Gleitobjekt-Platzierung + und die Formatierung der Beschriftung geändert werden. + All diese Features sind im Detail in Kapitel +\emph on +Gleitobjekte +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs mit vielen Beispielen beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Minipage +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Minipage" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Minipage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX bietet einen Mechanismus an, um im Prinzip eine Seite innerhalb einer + Seite zu erstellen, eine sogenannte Minipage. + Innerhalb einer Minipage gelten alle üblichen Regeln wie die des Einzugs + oder der Silbentrennung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Minipages haben in LyX ihre eigene schließbare Box, die mit dem Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Box +\family default + eingefügt wird. + Per Rechts-klicken auf die Boxmarke kann die Breite und Ausrichtung der + Minipage eingestellt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "30col%" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +Dies ist eine Minipage. + Der Text ist kursiv gesetzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +Minipages werden häufig für Text in einer anderen Sprache verwendet oder + für Text mit besonderen Formatierungen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +Wenn man zwei Minipages nebeneinander setzt, kann man +\family sans +HFills +\family default +, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Horizontaler-Leerraum" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben, verwenden: +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +\emph on +Dies ist eine Minipage +\shape default +\emph default + mit sinnlosem Text. + Dieser Sinnlostext wird verwendet um die Minipage zu vergrößern. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +\emph on +Dies ist eine Minipage +\shape default +\emph default + mit sinnlosem Text. + Dieser Sinnlostext wird verwendet um die Minipage zu vergrößern. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Klickt man mit rechts auf eine Minipage-Box, kann man die Box in einen anderen + Boxtyp umwandeln. + Alle Box-Typen und ihre Einstellungen sind im Detail in Kapitel +\emph on +Boxen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Mathematische Formeln +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mathematische!Formeln +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:Mathematische-Formeln" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alle Themen dieses Kapitels sind im Detail im +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default + Handbuch beschrieben. + Dort finden Sie außerdem Tipps und Tricks für spezielle Fälle. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Grundlagen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um eine Formel zu erstellen, klickt man einfach auf den Werkzeugleistenknopf + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-mode on" +\end_inset + + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+M +\family default +). + Dies erzeugt ein kleines, blaues Rechteck mit violetten Markierungen an + den Ecken. + Das blaue Rechteck ist die Formel, die Markierungen geben an, wo in der + Formel man sich befindet. + Man kann auch direkt einen bestimmten Formeltyp über das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe +\family default + einfügen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Bearbeiten von Formelparametern und das Hinzufügen von Mathe-Konstrukten + kann man über die +\family sans +Mathe +\family default +Werkzeugleiste machen, die erscheint, wenn der Cursor in einer Formel ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt zwei Haupttypen von Formeln, eingebettete und abgesetzte. + Eingebettete Formeln erscheinen innerhalb einer Textzeile, so wie diese: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dies ist eine Zeile mit einer +\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ +\end_inset + + eingebetteten Formel. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Abgesetzte Formeln erscheinen außerhalb des Textes, als wären sie in einem + eigenen Absatz, so wie diese: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +A=B +\] + +\end_inset + +Nur abgesetzte Formeln können nummeriert und referenziert werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX unterstützt auch viele LaTeX-Mathebefehle. + Tippt man z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +alpha +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + gefolgt von einem Leerzeichen in eine Formel ein, wird der griechische + Buchstabe +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ +\end_inset + + erzeugt. + Befehle einzugeben ist oft schneller als die +\family sans +Mathe +\family default +Werkzeugleiste zu verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Wie man sich in einer Formel +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + bewegt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können auf eine existierende Gleichung klicken und den Cursor in etwa + dort vorfinden, wo Sie geklickt haben. + In einer existierenden Formel hat man mit den Pfeiltasten die beste Kontrolle + über die Cursorposition. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Pfeiltasten können benutzt werden, um sich in einer Struktur zwischen + Textgebieten zu bewegen. + Wenn man eine Pfeiltaste am Rande einer Formel drückt, verlässt man die + Formel, wenn der Pfeil aus dem Formel-Kästchen herauszeigt. + Wenn man die +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default + drückt, verlässt man einen Teil oder eine andere Formel-Struktur (eine + Quadratwurzel +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ +\end_inset + +, Klammern +\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ +\end_inset + + oder eine Matrix +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + +), und bleibt innerhalb der Formel. + Mit +\family sans +Esc +\family default + verlässt man Formeln, und der Cursor wird rechts vom Kästchen platziert. + Mit der +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default + kann man Formeln auch verlassen, aber der Cursor wird um eine Leerstelle + neben dem Kästchen gestellt (wenn keine Leerstelle dort war, wird sie erzeugt). + +\family sans +Tab +\family default + kann benutzt werden, um sich waagerecht in einer Formel-Struktur zu bewegen, + wie in den Zeilen einer Matrix oder den Stellen in einer mehrzeiligen Gleichung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default + scheint nichts innerhalb von Formeln zu bewirken, weil sie wirklich keinen + Zwischenraum zwischen Zeichen hinzufügt, aber sie verlässt eine geschachtelte + Struktur. + Deshalb muss man mit der +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default + vorsichtig sein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn man zum Beispiel +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ +\end_inset + + erreichen will, muss man +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +2x+1 +\series default +eingeben und nicht +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +2x +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + ++ +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +1 +\series default +, weil dann nur die +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Formula $2x$ +\end_inset + + +\family default + unter dem Wurzelzeichen stehen würden: +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ +\end_inset + +. + Diejenigen, die es gewohnt sind, Ausdrücke auf diese Weise mit Zwischenräumen + zu versehen, müssen ein wenig umlernen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Da wir über die +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default + sprechen: es mag sein, dass Sie Leerzeichen erzeugen wollen, die über das + hinausgehen, was LaTeX normalerweise erzeugt. + Wir empfehlen das natürlich nicht, weil das WYSIWYM-Prinzip bedeutet, dass + Sie nicht über den Schriftsatz nachdenken sollen, sondern über den Inhalt. + Es mag aber Situationen geben, in denen Sie wirklich Leerzeichen hinzufügen + wollen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das kann man mit +\family sans +Strg+Leertaste +\family default + machen. + Das erzeugt einen kleinen Zwischenraum und zeigt ihn auf dem Bildschirm + wie eine auf dem Rücken liegende eckige rote Klammer an: +\begin_inset Formula $a\text{{\color{red}\leer}}b$ +\end_inset + +. + Gedruckt sieht das so aus: +\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ +\end_inset + +. + Mit dem nächstes Trick ändert man die Größe. + +\emph on +Bevor +\emph default + Sie nach +\family sans +Strg+Leertaste +\family default + den Cursor bewegen, drücken Sie die +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default + erneut ein- oder mehrere Male, das vergrößert den Zwischenraum auf unterschiedl +iche Größen: +\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ +\end_inset + +. + Als letztes gibt es den roten, negativen Zwischenraum: +\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann viele teilweise gefüllte Formel-Strukturen wie diese Matrix verlassen: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +\lambda_{1}\\ + & \ddots\\ + & & \lambda_{n} +\end{array}\right). +\] + +\end_inset + +Wenn Sie eine Teilstruktur, die nur teilweise gefüllt ist, verlassen oder + einen Exponenten mit nichts darin, wird das Ergebnis unvorhersehbar, aber + die meisten Objekte stört das nicht. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Text auswählen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mathe- ! Text auswählen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Innerhalb von Formeln können Sie Text auf zwei verschiedene Arten auswählen. + Stellen Sie den Cursor an das eine Ende der Zeichenkette, die Sie auswählen + wollen, und drücken Sie +\family sans +Umschalt+Pfeil +\family default + in der Richtung, in der Sie markieren wollen. + Der markierte Text wird wie sonst auch hervorgehoben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Oder Sie machen es wie gewohnt mit der Maus, obwohl dabei manchmal alles + im purpurnen Rechteck markiert wird. + Den markierten Text können Sie dann kopieren oder ausschneiden und in eine + andere Formel einsetzen. + Auch Text, der außerhalb von LyX ausgewählt wurde, kann in eine Formel + eingesetzt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Exponenten +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Exponenten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Indizes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Indizes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können die +\family sans +Mathe-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + benutzen um Hoch- oder Tiefstellungen zu erzeugen (Knöpfe +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-superscript" +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-subscript" +\end_inset + +), aber viel einfacher geht es mit der normalen TeX-Methode. + Um +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + + zu erhalten, geben Sie +\series bold +x^2 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default + ein. + Die +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default + bringt den Cursor zurück auf die Grundlinie des Ausdrucks. + Wenn Sie +\series bold +x^2y +\series default + eingeben, erhalten Sie +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ +\end_inset + +; um +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ +\end_inset + + zu erhalten, müssen Sie +\series bold +x^2 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +y +\series default + eingeben. + Wenn Sie Zeichen in der Hochstellung haben, die mit dem Zirkumflex +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +^ +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + akzentuiert werden können, müssen Sie die +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default + ein weiteres Mal drücken um den Zirkumflex vom Zeichen zu trennen. + Wenn Sie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + +\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ +\end_inset + + haben wollen, geben Sie +\series bold +x^ +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +a +\series default + ein. + Indizes sind ähnlich: um +\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ +\end_inset + + zu erhalten, müssen Sie in eine Formel +\series bold +a_1 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default + eingeben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Brüche +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bruche@Brüche +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einen Bruch kann man mit +\series bold + +\backslash +frac +\series default + oder mit dem Bruchsymbol +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\frac" +\end_inset + +aus der +\family sans +Mathe-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + schreiben. + Sie erhalten einen leeren Bruch mit zwei blauen Formel-Kästchen über und + unter einem Bruchstrich. + Der Cursor steht im Zähler. + Mit der +\begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$ +\end_inset + +-Taste gelangt man in den Nenner, mit der +\begin_inset Formula $\uparrow$ +\end_inset + +-Taste wieder in den Zähler. + Jede mathematische Struktur kann in einen Bruch geschrieben werden, wie + dieses Beispiel zeigt: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} +2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 +\end{array}\right)}\right] +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Wurzeln +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Wurzeln +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wurzeln erhält man, wenn man auf das Symbol +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\sqrt" +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\root" +\end_inset + + in der +\family sans +Mathe-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + klickt, oder die Befehle +\family typewriter + +\backslash +sqrt +\family default + oder +\family typewriter + +\backslash +root +\family default + benutzt. + Ersteres liefert nur Quadratwurzeln, letzteres beliebige. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Summen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Summen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Integrale +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Integrale +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Summen- und Integralzeichen +\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Formula $\int$ +\end_inset + + werden sehr oft mit Grenzen versehen, die in LyX (wie in LaTeX) als Exponenten + und Indizes geschrieben werden. + Bei Summen in der Zeile werden die Grenzen automatisch neben dem Summenzeichen + platziert wie bei +\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ +\end_inset + +, bei abgesetzten Formeln hingegen über und unter dem Summenzeichen: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\sum_{n=1}^{\infty}\frac{x^{n}}{n}=\ln\left(\frac{1}{1-x}\right). +\] + +\end_inset + +Bei Integralen werden die Grenzen immer neben dem Integralzeichen platziert + wie in +\begin_inset Formula $\int_{a}^{x}f(t)dt:=F(x)$ +\end_inset + +, bei abgesetzten Formeln sieht es so aus: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\int_{-\infty}^{\infty}\frac{dx}{1+x^{2}}=\pi. +\] + +\end_inset + +Beide Symbole werden automatisch angepasst. + Man kann die Platzierung der Grenzen (direkt über und unter oder rechts + neben dem Zeichen) umschalten, indem man den Cursor direkt vor das Zeichen + stellt und +\family sans +Alt+M +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\family default + eingibt. + Wie die Änderung genau aussieht, hängt vom Zeichen ab. + Einige andere mathematische Ausdrücke besitzen diese Automatik-Funktion + auch, wie +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x), +\] + +\end_inset + +bei dem +\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ +\end_inset + + unter dem +\emph on +lim +\emph default + bei abgesetzten Formeln platziert wird, aber in der Zeile daneben: +\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ +\end_inset + +. + Das +\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ +\end_inset + +-Zeichen hat eine besondere Bedeutung. + In LaTeX wird es als Sonderobjekt behandelt, damit es Indizes wie beschrieben + darstellen kann. + In LyX erhält man es mit +\series bold + +\backslash +lim +\series default + in einer Formel oder indem man es aus den +\family sans +Funktionen +\family default + im Menü +\family sans +Mathe-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + auswählt. + Andere Spezialworte sind trigonometrische Funktionen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sub:Mathematische-Funktionen" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mathematische Symbole +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mathematische!Symbole +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die meisten mathematischen Symbole sind in der +\family sans +Mathe +\family default +Werkzeugleiste unter einer der verschiedenen Kategorien wie +\family sans +Griechisch +\family default +, +\family sans +Operatoren +\family default +, +\family sans +Relationen +\family default +, +\family sans +Pfeile +\family default + zu finden. + Dort gibt es außerdem zusätzliche Symbole, die von der Amerikanisch Mathematisc +hen Gesellschaft (AMS) zu Verfügung gestellt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie den LaTeX-Befehl für ein Konstrukt oder ein Symbol kennen, müssen + Sie nicht die +\family sans +Mathe +\family default +Werkzeugleiste benutzen sondern können den Befehl direkt in die Formel eingeben. + LyX wird ihn in das entsprechnde Konstrukt oder Symbol konvertieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Leerraum ändern +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Will man Leerraum erzeugen, der sich von LaTeXs Standard-Leerraum unterscheidet, + drückt man +\family sans +Strg+Leertaste +\family default + oder den +\family sans +Mathe +\family default + Werkzeugleistenknopf +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\space" +\end_inset + + +\family default +. + Dies erzeugt einen kleinen Leerraum mit einer Marke zur Visualisierung. + Zum Beispiel erscheint die Sequenz +\series bold +a Strg+Leertaste b +\series default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ +\end_inset + + in LyX als +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png + +\end_inset + +. + Man kann verschiedenen Größen für den Leerraum anwählen, indem man den + Cursor hinter die Marke setzt und mehrfach die Leertaste drückt. + Mit jedem Drücken der Leertaste wird die Größe verändert. + Die Marke erscheint für einige Größen rot, da diese Größen negativen Leerraum + darstellen. + Hier sind zwei Beispiele: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Strg+Leertaste b +\series default + und 3× +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Strg+Leertaste b +\series default + und 5× +\family sans +Leertaste +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mathematische Funktionen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mathematische!Funktionen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Mathematische-Funktionen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Funktionen wie +\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ +\end_inset + +, usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +kann man entweder mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\functions" +\end_inset + + +\family default + oder mit Befehlen wie +\series bold + +\backslash +sin +\series default + usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +eintippen. + Standardmäßig werden Funktionen, die Namen sind wie +\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ +\end_inset + +, nicht kursiv geschrieben. + Gibt man in einer Formel aber nur die Buchstaben +\begin_inset Formula $sin$ +\end_inset + + ein, sind sie natürlich kursiv. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Deshalb gibt es diese besonderen Makros. + In der Druckausgabe bewirken sie aber mehr als nur die Schriftform zu ändern. + Zum Beispiel bekommt der Ausdruck +\emph on +sint +\emph default + zusätzlichen Leerraum zwischen sin und t: +\begin_inset Formula $\sin t$ +\end_inset + +. + Bei komplexeren mathematischen Objekten wie +\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ +\end_inset + + bestimmt das Makro, wo die Bedingung platziert wird, ob neben das Wort + lim als Index wie hier: +\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow0}f(x)=L$ +\end_inset + + oder darunter wie hier: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\lim_{x\rightarrow0}f(x)=L. +\] + +\end_inset + + Beide Ausdrücke wurden exakt gleich eingetippt, nur die Art, wie das lim-Makro + benutzt wurde, entschied über die Darstellung (in diesem Fall wurde das + Makro für die Darstellung in der Zeile geändert, damit der Zeilenabstand + besser aussieht). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Akzente +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Akzente +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Mathe-Modus setzt man Akzente wie im normalen Textmodus. + Wie das gemacht wird, kann von Ihrer Tastatur und Ihrer Tastaturdatei abhängen. + Sie können aber auch die LaTeX-Äquivalente als Makros benutzen. + Wenn Ihre Tastatur keine Akzente ermöglicht, können Sie zum Beispiel in + Formeln +\series bold + +\backslash +hat{a +\series default + eintippen, um +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + + zu erhalten. + Tabelle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Akzente" + +\end_inset + + enthält die Akzentnamen im Textmodus, in Formeln und Beispiele für die + Akzente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Akzente" + +\end_inset + +Akzente +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Akzente +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Name +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Befehl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Beispiel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +circumflex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +hat +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +acute +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +acute +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +umlaut +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +ddot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +dot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +dot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +breve +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +breve +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +caron +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +check +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +macron +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +bar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +vector +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +vector +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können die Akzente auch über das Untermenü +\family sans +Rahmen-Verzierungen +\family default + des Mathe-Werkzeugleistenknopfs +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\hat" +\end_inset + + auswählen. + Dies wirkt auch auf markierte Bereiche in Formeln. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Klammern +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Klammern +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Dekorationen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dekorationen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Klammern-und-Dekos" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt in LyX mehrere Klammerarten. + Für die meisten Zwecke sollte es genügen, nur die Tasten +\family typewriter +[{]}()| +\backslash +<> +\family default + zu drücken. + Aber die Wirkung ist besser, wenn Sie die +\family sans + Mathe-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + benutzen, insbesondere, wenn Sie große Strukturen wie Matrizen oder Brüche + in Klammern setzen wollen, oder wenn Sie mehrere Klammernschichten haben. + So zum Beispiel würden Sie Klammern um eine Matrix setzen: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right]. +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +In Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Matrizen-mehrzeilige-Gleichungen" + +\end_inset + + steht ausführlich beschrieben, wie man das im Einzelnen macht. + Auch erkennt man mehrere Klammernschichten besser bei Ausdrücken wie +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{equation} +\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\label{eq:Bruch} +\end{equation} + +\end_inset + +oder +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f\left(g\left(h\left(k\left(l\left(x\right)\right)\right)\right)\right). +\] + +\end_inset + +Die Klammern aus dem Menü werden automatisch an die Größe ihres Inhaltes + angepasst. + (Das wird direkt mit den LaTeX-Befehlen +\series bold + +\backslash +left( bla +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bla +\backslash +right) +\series default + erreicht.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es ist sehr einfach, die gewünschten Klammern zu bekommen. + Klicken Sie in der automatischen +\family sans +Mathe-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + auf +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/math/delim.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +, um das +\family sans +Mathe-Trennzeichen +\family default +-Menü zu öffnen. + Sie müssen links das Klammersymbol, das Sie links haben wollen, auswählen, + rechts das, das Sie rechts haben wollen, und schließlich zum Einsetzen + auf den Knopf +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie auf einer Seite keine Klammer haben wollen, wählen Sie das leere + Symbol. + In LyX wird es als gestrichelte senkrechte Linie angezeigt, in der Druckausgabe + ist nichts zu sehen. + Wenn Sie links und rechts die zugehörige Klammer haben wollen, können Sie + +\family sans +Zusammenpassend +\family default + ankreuzen und müssen nur eine Klammer auswählen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Schließlich können Sie noch zwischen 5 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Klammergrößen wählen. + +\family sans +Variabel +\family default + sollte meistens die richtige Wahl sein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie sich erst nachträglich entschließen, eine mathematische Struktur + mit Klammern, anderen mathematischen Symbolen oder Verzierungen zu versehen, + können Sie das tun, indem Sie das, was innerhalb der Klammern usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +stehen soll, markieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dazu stellen Sie den Cursor links oder rechts neben Ihre Auswahl, drücken + die +\family sans +Umschalt +\family default +-Taste und gehen mit den Pfeiltasten in die gewünschte Richtung. + Sie können natürlich auch mit der Maus markieren. + Dann wählen Sie die gewünschten Klammern für links und rechts und klicken + auf +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default +. + Die Klammern werden um die markierte Struktur gesetzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Matrizen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matrizen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und mehrzeilige Gleichungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gleichungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Matrizen-mehrzeilige-Gleichungen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Matrizenähnliche Gebilde kann man in LyX einfach eingeben. + Entweder wählen Sie +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Array-Umgebung +\family default +: dann bekommen Sie automatisch eine 2x2-Matrix, oder Sie klicken in der + automatischen +\family sans +Mathe-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + den Knopf +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" +\end_inset + + +\family default + an, der das Menü +\family sans +Mathe-Matrix +\family default + öffnet, in dem Sie verschiedene Optionen setzen können. + Hier ist ein Beispiel: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +1 & 2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 & 6\\ +7 & 8 & 9 +\end{array}\right). +\] + +\end_inset + +Die Klammern werden nicht automatisch eingefügt, sondern müssen mit dem + +\family sans +Mathe-Trenn\SpecialChar \- +zeichen +\family default +-Menü hinzugefügt werden. + Das können Sie nachträglich machen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sec:Klammern-und-Dekos" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können festlegen, ob die Spalten einer Matrix (oder Teile davon) links- + oder rechtsbündig oder zentriert ausgerichtet werden sollen. + Die Voreinstellung ist zentriert +\family sans +. + +\family default + Bei anderen und verschiedenen Ausrichtungen müssen Sie die entsprechende + Buchstabenkombinationen aus +\family typewriter +l +\family default +, +\family typewriter +c +\family default + und +\family typewriter +r +\family default + in das Feld +\family sans +Ausrichtung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Horizontal +\family default + eingeben. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family typewriter +rlc +\family default + bedeutet: Spalte 1 rechtsbündig, Spalte 2 linksbündig und Spalte 3 zentriert. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Außerdem können Sie den Inhalt der Zeilen +\family sans +Vertikal +\family default + ausrichten, voreingestellt ist +\family sans +Mitte +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn der Cursor in der Matrix steht, können Sie über +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe +\family default + oder die 4 rechten Knöpfe in der Mathe-Werkzeugleiste Zeilen und Spalten + hinzufügen oder löschen. + Hier ist ein anderes Beispiel mit unterschiedlichen Ausrichtungen: +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Das +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +ü +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + erhält man übrigens durch +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + + +\backslash +ddot u +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + oder "u, aber "u wird in LyX +\emph on +nicht +\emph default + als ü dargestellt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\begin{array}{lcr} +diese & diese & diese\\ +Spalte & Spalte & Spalte\\ +ist\: linksb\ddot{u}ndig & ist\: zentriert & ist\: rechtsb\ddot{u}ndig +\end{array}. +\] + +\end_inset + +Der LaTeX- +\family typewriter +Mathe-Modus +\family default + hat viele Matrizenarten, insbesondere bietet das AMS-LaTeX-Paket zum Beispiel + +\series bold + +\backslash +cases +\series default + und kommutative Diagramme. + Hier ist ein einfaches Beispiel, wie LyX Bedingungen (LaTeX +\series bold + +\backslash +cases +\series default +) darstellen kann: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray*} +f(x) & := & \begin{cases} +\frac{1}{q} & \mathrm{f}\ddot{\mathrm{u}}\mathrm{r}\, x=\frac{p}{q}\,(\mathrm{p},\,\mathrm{q}\,\,\mathrm{ganzzahlig})\\ +0 & \mathrm{falls}\, x\,\mathrm{irrational}\,\mathrm{ist} +\end{cases} +\end{eqnarray*} + +\end_inset + +Dies wurde folgendermaßen erreicht: zuerst wurde eine Gleichungs-Umgebung + gewählt ( +\family sans +Ein\SpecialChar \- +fü\SpecialChar \- +gen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Eqnarray-Umgebung +\family default +), in die linken beiden Kästchen f(x) und := geschrieben. + Ins rechte Kästchen wurde eine Bedingungs-Umgebung ( +\family sans +Ein\SpecialChar \- +fü\SpecialChar \- +gen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cases-Umgebung +\family default +) eingefügt und mit +\family sans +Strg+Eingabe +\family default + zwei Zeilen erzeugt. + In die beiden blauen Kästchen wurde dann alles rechts der geschweiften + Klammer geschrieben. + Wie man die Roman-Schrift bekommt, wird später erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mehrzeilige Gleichungen kann man mit LyX sehr einfach schreiben ( +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Eqnarray-Umgebung +\family default +). + Dadurch wird das LaTeX-Format +\family typewriter +eqnarray +\family default + für mehrzeilige Gleichungen eingeschaltet. + Innerhalb des Kästchens tippt man +\family sans +Strg+Ein\SpecialChar \- +gabe +\family default + so oft, bis man die Zahl der gewünschten Zeilen hat, am besten als erstes. + Jede Zeile hat drei Gebiete, links, Mitte, rechts, zwischen denen Sie sich + mit den Pfeiltasten, der Maus oder der +\family sans +Tab +\family default +-Taste bewegen können. + Hier ist ein Beispiel: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray*} +3 & = & 1+2\\ +4+5 & = & 9 +\end{eqnarray*} + +\end_inset + +Man kann auch eine vorhandene abgesetzte Formel in eine mehrzeilige umändern, + indem man irgendwo in der Formel +\family sans +\series medium +Strg+Eingabe +\family default +\series default + tippt. + LyX wird alles in den linken Teil der mehrzeiligen Gleichung packen, wobei + alles links vom Cursor in die erste Zeile kommt, der Rest in die zweite. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alles rechts vom Cursor wird dann in den mittleren Teil der Gleichung gepackt + (LaTeX setzt den mittleren Teil übrigens nicht wie normale Formeln, deshalb + sollten Sie dort keine großen Ausdrücke wie Brüche schreiben). + Stellen Sie dann den Cursor dorthin, wo der rechte Teil beginnen soll, + und tippen nochmals +\family sans +Strg+Tab +\family default +. + Der +\emph on +zusätzliche +\emph default + Einfügepunkt in der Zeile verschwindet dann. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine ganze Zeile der Gleichung kann man löschen, indem man den Cursor in + die Zeile stellt und +\family sans +Alt+M +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +W +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +D +\family default + tippt. + Weitere Zeilen fügt man mit +\family sans +Strg+Eingabe +\family default + hinzu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Gleichungen nummerieren +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gleichungen!nummerieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und markieren +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gleichungen!markieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Gleichungen-numerieren-markieren" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um eine Gleichung zu nummerieren, setzt man den Cursor in eine Gleichung + und verwendet das Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ganze +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nummerieren +\family default + oder das Tastenkürzel +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + +. + Die Nummer der Gleichung erscheint in LyX in Klammern dahinter. + Die angezeigte Nummer ist nur temporär und kann in der Ausgabe anders aussehen. + Die Position und das Format der Nummer in der Ausgabe hängt von der Dokumentkla +sse ab. + In diesem Dokument wird die Nummer zusammen mit der Kapitelnummer ausgegeben, + von der sie durch einen Punkt getrennt ist.: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{equation} +1+1=2 +\end{equation} + +\end_inset + +Die Verwendung von +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + + in einer nummerierten Gleichung schaltet die Nummerierung aus. + Man kann nur abgesetzte Formeln nummerieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mehrzeilige Formeln können Zeile für Zeile nummeriert werden: Das Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Diese +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Zeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nummerieren +\family default + oder das Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Alt+M +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Umschalt+N +\family default + nummeriert nur die Zeile, in der sich der Cursor befindet: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +1 & = & 3-2\\ +2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ +4 & \leq & 7 +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +Um alle Zeilen zu nummerieren, verwendet man das Tastenkürzel +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + +Jede abgesetzte Formel kann mit ihrer Nummer durch eine Marke referenziert + werden. + Eine Marke wird mit dem Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marke +\family default + (Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + +) eingefügt, wenn sich der Cursor in der Gleichung befindet. + Es erscheint ein Dialog, in den man die Marke eingibt. + Es ist empfohlen, dass man das vorgeschlagene +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eq: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + als ersten Teil der Marke verwendet, da dies später hilft, schnell den + Typ der Marke zu finden, wenn man viele Marken im Dokument hat. + Wir haben im folgenden Beispiel die Marke +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +eq:tanhExp +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + in der zweiten Zeile eingegeben: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ + & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +Jede markierte Zeile wird automatisch nummeriert. + Daher wird die Marke hinter der Nummer angezeigt. + Mit dem Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Querverweis +\family default + (Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +) kann man auf eine markierte Gleichung verweisen. + Es öffnet sich ein Dialog in dem man eine Marke auswählen kann. + Der Querverweis erscheint in LyX als graue Querverweis-Box und in der Ausgabe + als Nummer: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dies ist ein Querverweis auf Gleichung ( +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "eq:tanhExp" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Eigenschaften von LyXs Querverweis-Box sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Querverweise" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. + Um eine Marke zu entfernen, setzt man den Cursor ans Ende in die Gleichung + und drückt die +\family sans +Entf +\family default +-Taste. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Benutzerdefinierte Mathe-Makros +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Makros +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX erlaubt dem Benutzer, Makros zu definieren. + Dies ist von großem Nutzen wenn man in einem Dokument mehrfach denselben + Formeltyp hat. + Mathe-Makros sind im Abschnitt +\emph on +Mathe-Makro +\emph default +s des +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default +-Handbuchs beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Feineinstellungen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im folgenden wird vorausgesetzt, dass Sie sich bei der Texteingabe im +\family typewriter +Mathe-Modus +\family default + befinden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Schriftstile +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriftstile +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können verschiedene Schriftstile benutzen, die Sie über den Knopf +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\font" +\end_inset + + +\family default + auf der +\family sans +Mathe-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + oder Tastaturbefehle auswählen. + Nicht alle erscheinen genau WYSIWYM, und einige werden überhaupt nicht + angezeigt. + Der Standardschriftstil für Text ist kursiv, +\begin_inset Formula $text$ +\end_inset + +, aber für Zahlen ist der Standard Roman. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um Text im +\family typewriter +Mathe-Modus +\family default + Roman zu setzen, benutzen Sie +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +R +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{\mathbf{\mathrm{text}}}$ +\end_inset + +. + Für Fettdruck, +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{text}$ +\end_inset + +, ist es +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +F +\family default +. + Den kalligrafischen Schriftstil für Großbuchstaben, +\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{TEXT}$ +\end_inset + +, erhält man mit +\family sans +Alt+Z +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +I +\family default +. + Tabelle +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "tab:Mathematik-Schriftstile" + +\end_inset + + zeigt die unterstützten Schriften. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family typewriter +\begin_inset Float table +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Mathematik-Schriftstile" + +\end_inset + +Mathematik-Schriftstile +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mathematische ! Schriftstile +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriftstil +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Befehl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Aufrecht}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathrm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Fett}}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Kursiv}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Schreibmaschine}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathtt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbb +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathfrak +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{KALLIGRAFISCH}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathcal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{Serifenlos}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathsf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Man kann nur Großbuchstaben in die Stile +\family sans +Blackboard +\family default + und +\family sans +Kalligrafisch +\family default + setzen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Der Tastaturbefehl, um zu einem speziellen Schriftstil zu wechseln, wird + im +\family typewriter +Mathe-Modus +\family default + wie beschrieben interpretiert. + Der +\family typewriter +Mathe-Modus +\family default + unterstützt aber nicht alle Zeichen in allen Schriftstilen, und der Kalligraphi +estil unterstützt nur Großbuchstaben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bei all diesen Schriftstilen müssen Sie den Text sorgfältig eingeben. + Wenn es rechts vom Anfangspunkt Text gibt, wird der Schriftstil nach einem + Buchstaben in den anderen Stil geändert. + Um eine Zeichenkette mit einem speziellen Stil zu schreiben, müssen Sie + rechts vom Cursor ein geschütztes Leerzeichen eingeben. + Außerdem wird durch ein geschütztes Leerzeichen der nachfolgende Text in + den Standardstil geändert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In AMS-LaTeX ist es möglich, Zahlen und Spezialsymbole fett (aber nicht + kursiv) zu schreiben. + Um ein fettgedrucktes +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ +\end_inset + + zu bekommen, müssen Sie +\series bold + +\backslash +boldsymbol +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +{ +\backslash +alpha} +\series default + eingeben: +\begin_inset Formula $\boldsymbol{\mathbb{\alpha}}$ +\end_inset + +. + Klammer-zu erscheint automatisch, nachdem Sie Klammer-auf getippt haben. + Dies funktioniert für alle Symbole und Zahlen. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mathematischer Textmodus +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mathematische!r Textmodus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die verschiedenen Schriftstile sind hilfreich, um Variablennamen in einem + bestimmten Zeichensatz einzugeben, aber sicherlich nicht, um damit normalen + Text zu schreiben. + Verwenden Sie deshalb zum Schreiben von längeren Textstücken den mathematischen + Textmodus, den Sie durch +\family sans +Alt+M +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +M +\family default + aktivieren, wenn Sie sich bereits im Mathematikmodus befinden. + Der mathematische Textmodus wird am Bildschirm in Schwarz anstelle des + üblichen Blau dargestellt. + Sie können in diesem Modus allerdings nicht den Zeichensatz wechseln oder + Satzzeichen verwenden, +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Außerdem gibt der mathematische Textmodus den Text in einer +\family typewriter + +\backslash +textrm{} +\family default +-Umgebung aus, obwohl eigentlich +\family typewriter + +\backslash +mbox +\family default + (oder das +\family typewriter + +\backslash +text +\family default + von AMS-LaTeX) die bessere Wahl wäre. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + doch für einfache Texte ist das ausreichend. + Hier ist ein Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\begin{cases} +x & \mbox{wenn ich es sage}\\ +-x & \mbox{sonst} +\end{cases} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Schriftgrößen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schriften ! Größe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt vier (relative) Schriftgrößen, die in den meisten Fällen automatisch + benutzt werden. + Sie heißen +\emph on +displaystyle +\emph default +, +\emph on +textstyle +\emph default +, +\emph on +scriptstyle +\emph default + und +\emph on +scriptscriptstyle +\emph default +. + Für die meisten Zeichen haben +\emph on +displaystyle +\emph default + und +\emph on +textstyle +\emph default + dieselbe Größe, aber Brüche, Exponenten, Indizes und gewisse andere Effekte + werden größer oder im +\emph on +displaystyle +\emph default + gesetzt. + Außer einigen Operatoren, die ihre Größe an die jeweilige Situation anpassen, + werden die Texte in der Größe gesetzt, die LaTeX für geeignet hält. + Diese Größe kann mit dem Knopf +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\style" +\end_inset + + +\family default + der +\family sans +Mathe-Werkzeugleiste +\family default + geändert werden. + Es wird dann eine Box eingefügt, in die man das Mathe-Konstrukt eingibt. + Zum Beispiel kann man +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ +\end_inset + + normal schreiben ( +\family sans +textstyle +\family default +), oder man kann es vergrößern, wobei auch die Zeilenabstände vergrößert + werden, indem man +\family sans +displaystyle +\family default + benutzt: +\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ +\end_inset + +. + Hier ist Text in den verschiedenen Größen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +All diese Schriftgrößen sind relativ, das heißt sie werden relativ zu der + Größe angepasst, in die die gesamte Formel über das Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Textstil +\family default + gesetzt wird. + Auf ähnliche Weise wird alles angepasst, wenn die Basisschriftgröße eines + Dokumentes geändert wird. + Als Beispiel eine Formel in der Größe +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Noch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +größer +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\size largest +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +AMS-LaTeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +AMS-TeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX unterstützt die LaTeX-Pakete der American Mathematical Society (AMS), + die oft benutzt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +AMS verwenden +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie im Menü +\family sans +Dokument +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default + unter +\family sans +Mathe-Optionen +\family default +die Option +\family sans + AMS-Mathe-Paket +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +verwenden +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + aktivieren, werden diese Pakete explizit in Ihrem Dokument verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +AMS-Formeltypen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Unter +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe +\family default + können Sie die AMS-Formeltypen +\family typewriter +align +\family default +, +\family typewriter +alignat +\family default +, +\family typewriter +flalign +\family default +, +\family typewriter +gather +\family default + und +\family typewriter +multline +\family default + auswählen. + Eine ausführliche Dokumentation dieser Typen finden Sie in +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Weitere Werkzeuge +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Querverweise +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Querverweis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Querverweise" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine von LyXs Stärken sind Querverweise. + Sie können auf jeden Abschnitt, jedes Gleitobjekt, jede Fußnote, Formel + und Liste im Dokument referenzieren. + Für eine Referenz müssen Sie zuerst eine Marke in den zu referenzieren + Teil einfügen. + Die Marke dient als Anker und Name für die Referenz. + Angenommen Sie wollen den zweiten Eintrag der folgenden Liste referenzieren: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Erster Eintrag +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "enu:Zweiter-Eintrag" + +\end_inset + +Zweiter Eintrag +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dritter Eintrag +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Zuerst setzen Sie eine Marke zu definieren, benutzen Sie +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marke +\family default + oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/label-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +. + Ein Kästchen wie dieses: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/Marke.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + wird eingefügt und LyX fragt nach einem Namen für die Marke. + LyX schlägt als Namen die ersten Wörter des Listeneintrags und zusätzlich + einen Präfix. + In diesem Fall +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +enu:Zweiter-Eintrag +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Der Präfix +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +enu: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + steht für +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +enumerate +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (auf deutsch: +\emph on +nummeriert +\emph default +). + Der Präfix hängt vom Dokumentteil ab, in den die Marke eingefügt wurde. + Für Abschnitte ist er z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +sec: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (Englisch für +\emph on +section +\emph default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um nun auf die Marke zu verweisen, wählen Sie +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Querverweis +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_ref.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + +. + Ein graues Querverweis-Kästchen wie dieses: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/Querverweis.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + wird eingefügt und der Querverweis-Dialog erscheint mit einer Liste der + Marken. + Um eine Marke einzufügen, können Sie die Marken alphabetisch sortieren + und wählen dann +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +enu:Zweiter-Eintrag +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + aus. + Im Feld +\family sans +Format +\family default + können Sie einen der unten beschriebenen Verweisstile auswählen. + An der Stelle der Querverweis-Box erscheint in der Ausgabe die Nummer des + Listeneintrags. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alternativ zu +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Querverweis +\family default + können Sie mit rechts auf die Marke klicken und im erscheinenden Kontextmenü + +\family sans +Als Querverweis kopieren +\family default + verwenden. + Der Querverweis zu dieser Marke ist nun in der Zwischenablage und kann + an der aktuellen Cursorposition mit dem Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einfügen +\family default + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Ctrl+V +\family default +) eingefügt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist unser Querverweis: Eintrag +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "enu:Zweiter-Eintrag" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es wird empfohlen, ein geschütztes Leerzeichen +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +beschrieben in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Geschütztes-Leerzeichen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + zwischen Querverweisnamen und Querverweis zu verwenden, um unschöne Zeilenumbrü +che zwischen beiden zu vermeiden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt folgende Querverweisstile: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +: druckt die Nummer, dies ist die Voreinstellung: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +(): druckt die Nummer umgeben von zwei runden Klammern, dies + ist der Stil, wie er normalerweise für Verweise auf Formeln verwendet wird, + speziell wenn der Name +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Gleichung +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + weggelassen wird: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand eqref +reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +: druckt die Seitennummer: Seite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand pageref +reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +auf +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Seite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +: druckt den Text +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +auf Seite +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und die Seitennummer: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vpageref +reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Wenn sich die Marke auf derselben Seite befindet, wird stattdessen +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +auf dieser Seite +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + gedruckt; wenn sich die Marke auf der gegenüberliegenden Seite in einem + doppelseitigen Dokument befindet, wird +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +auf der gegenüberliegenden Seite +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + gedruckt; befindet sie sich auf der vorigen Seite, die keine gegenüberliegende + ist, wird +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +auf der vorherigen Seite +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + gedruckt; wenn sie sich auf der nächsten, nicht gegenüberliegenden Seite + befindet, wird +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +auf der nächsten Seite +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + gedruckt. + Der Wortlaut des gedruckten Texts hängt zudem von der verwendeten Dokumentklass +e ab. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +auf +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Seite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +: druckt die Nummer, den Text +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +auf Seite +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, und die Seitennummer: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Wenn sich die Marke auf derselben Seite befindet, verhält sich der Stil + wie +\family sans +\series bold + +\family default +\series default +, ansonsten wie +\family sans +\series bold +auf +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Seite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Formatierter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Querverweis: druckt ein selbst definiertes Querverweisformat +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bemerkung: +\series default + Dies ist nur möglich, wenn das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + oder +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installiert ist. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang ngerman +Man kann mit der Option +\family sans +Verwende refstyle (statt prettyref) für Querverweise +\family default + im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dokumentklasse +\family default + auswählen, welches LaTeX-Paket für dieses Feature verwendet wird. + Das Paket +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + ist die Voreinstellung und bevorzugt, da +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + nur englische Dokumente unterstützt. + Das Format wird festgelegt, indem der Befehl +\series bold + +\backslash +newrefformat +\series default + (prettyref) oder +\series bold + +\backslash +newref +\series default + (refstyle) im LaTeX-Vorspann des Dokuments verwendet wird. + Um z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + alle Verweise auf Abbildungen (die den Marken-Präfix +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +fig +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + haben) umzuformatieren, verwendet man den Befehl +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +newref{fig}{refcmd={Bild auf Seite +\backslash +pageref{#1}}} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Für weitere Informationen über das Format, siehe die Dokumentation der Pakete, + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "prettyref,refstyle" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Textverweis: druckt die Beschriftung oder den Namen der Referenz: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand nameref +reference "tab:Ein-Tabellen-Gleitobjekt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Nummer und die aktuelle Seite des referenzierten Dokumentteils wird + automatisch von LaTeX berechnet. + Die Stile können im Feld +\family sans +Format +\family default + des Querverweis-Fensters eingestellt werden, das erscheint, wenn Sie auf + einen Querverweis klicken. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Stil +\family sans + +\family default + kann nur zur Referenzierung nummerierter Teile des Dokuments verwendet + werden, während der Stil +\family sans + +\family default + immer möglich ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um einen Abschnitt zu referenzieren, setzen Sie die Marke in die Abschnittsübers +chrift; bei Gleitobjekten setzen Sie die Marke in die Beschriftung; bei + Fußnoten wird die Marke in die Fußnote gesetzt. + Die Referenzierung von Formeln ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Gleichungen-numerieren-markieren" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Recht-klicken auf einen Querverweis öffnet ein Kontextmenü. + Der Eintrag +\family sans +Gehe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +zur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Marke +\family default + setzt den Cursor vor die referenzierte Marke. + Dieser Eintrag wird im Kontextmenü der Marke in +\family sans +Gehe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +zurück +\family default + umbenannt, so dass man ihn benutze kann, um zum Querverweis zurückzukehren. + Man kann auch mit dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/bookmark-goto_0.png + +\end_inset + + zurückkehren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Marken können jederzeit geändert werden. + Verweise auf die geänderte Marke werden automatisch aktualisiert, so dass + Sie sich nicht darum kümmern müssen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn ein Querverweis eine nicht existierende Marke referenziert, erscheint + in LyX +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +NICHT VORHANDEN +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + in der Querverweismarke und in der Ausgabe zwei Fragezeichen statt der + Referenz. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Querverweise sind detailliert im Kap. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Auf Gleitobjekte verweisen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + im +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuch beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und andere Listen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Inhaltsverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Inhaltsverzeichnis wird über +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Liste +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Inhaltsverzeichnis\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\family default + eingefügt. + An der Einfügestelle erscheint ein graues Kästchen mit der Aufschrift Inhaltsve +rzeichnis. + Wenn Sie draufklicken, erscheint das Gliederungsfenster, siehe auch Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Gliederung" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Inhaltsverzeichnis enthält automatisch alle nummerierten Überschriften. + Wenn Sie für eine Überschrift einen Kurztitel definiert haben, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Kurztitel" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben, wird dieser statt der Überschrift verwendet. + In Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Nummerierung-aendern" + +\end_inset + + ist beschrieben, wie die Nummerierungstiefe geändert werden kann. + Unnummerierte Überschriften tauchen unter Navigieren und in der Gliederung + auf, werden aber nicht im Inhaltsverzeichnis gedruckt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Abbildungs- +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Abbildungs!-verzeichnis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, Tabellen- +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tabellen!verzeichnis@-verzeichnis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und Algorithmenverzeichnisse +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Algorithmen!-verzeichnis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Verzeichnisse" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Tabellen-, Abbildungs-, und Algorithmenverzeichnisse sind sehr ähnlich zum + Inhaltsverzeichnis. + Sie können über das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Liste +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\family default + eingefügt werden. + Die Verzeichniseinträge sind die Beschriftung der Gleitobjekte und deren + Nummer. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +URLs und Hyperlinks +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URLs +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:URLs" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +URL +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Links zu Internetseiten oder Email-Adressen können Sie mit +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +URL +\family default + einfügen, wie zum Beispiel die Adresse der LyX-Homepage: +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Wichtiger Hinweis +\series default +: Enthält die URL eines der folgenden Zeichen: +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +% +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +# +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +^ +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, dann müssen diese Zeichen mit einem vorangestellten Backslash eingegeben + werden, zum Beispiel +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\backslash +# +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + +\emph on + URLs dürfen nicht mit einem Backslash enden! +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Text eines URLs wird immer im Schreibmaschinenstil gedruckt. + Um den Text zu formatieren, müssen Sie einen Hyperlink benutzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hyperlinks +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Hyperlinks" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hyperlink +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hyperlinks werden mit +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Hyperlink +\family default + oder einen Klick auf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "href-insert" +\end_inset + + eingefügt. + Das Hyperlink-Dialogfenster hat zwei Eingabefelder: +\family sans +Ziel +\family default + und +\family sans +Name +\family default +. + In +\family sans +Ziel +\family default + tragen Sie die Adresse wie bei einem URL ein. + In +\family sans +Name +\family default + tragen Sie den Text ein, der im gedruckten Dokument erscheinen soll. + Wenn Sie diese Feld leer lassen, wird der Text in +\family sans +Ziel +\family default + gedruckt. + Mit +\family sans +Linktyp +\family default + legen Sie fest, ob es sich um eine Internet-Adresse wie +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "LyX-Homepage" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + +, eine Email-Adresse wie +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "LyX-Dokumentation" +target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX-Dokumentation" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + + oder einen Link auf eine Datei handelt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beim Anklicken eines Hyperlinks in der Druckvorschau startet bei Internet-Adress +en Ihr Standard-Browser, bei Email-Adressen Ihr Standard-Email-Programm + und bei Dateien Ihr Standard-Dateibetrachter. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie vor einer Internet-Adresse +\family sans +run: +\family default + einfügen, wird eine Anwendung gestartet: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Firefox für Linux starten" +target "run:/usr/bin/firefox" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um einen Hyperlink zu formatieren, markieren Sie ihn und formatieren wie + gewohnt: +\family sans +\series bold + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "LyX-Homepage" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Textfarbe kann über +\family sans +Dokument +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +PDF-Eigenschaften +\family default + im Feld +\family sans +Zusätzliche +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Optionen +\family default + mit dem Parameter +\family typewriter +urlcolor= +\family default + geändert werden. + Voreingestellt ist +\family sans +blue +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Anhang +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Anhang" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anhang +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um einen Anhang zu erstellen, fügen Sie zunächst eine neue Überschrift des + höchsten Abschnitttyps hinzu, also +\family sans +Kapitel +\family default + oder +\family sans +Abschnitt. + +\family default + Dann stellen Sie den Cursor an den Anfang der Überschrift und wählen +\family sans +Dokument +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Anhang +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +hier +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +beginnen +\family default +. + LyX fügt eine rote Linie ein, um den Anhang vom übrigen Dokument abzugrenzen. + Die erste Nummer vor den nun folgenden Überschriften wird in einen Großbuchstab +en umgeändert. + Die weitere Nummerierung ist wie gewohnt. + Auf Anhänge kann natürlich auch verwiesen werden: siehe Anhang +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "chap:Der-Einstellungen-Dialog" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Literaturverzeichnis +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Literaturverzeichnis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten, in einem LyX-Dokument ein Literaturverzeichnis + zu erstellen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Sie können eine Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbank einfügen +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bekannt als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +BibTeX-Datenbank +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, was in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Sie können ein Literaturverzeichnis von Hand einfügen. + Dafür wird die Absatzumgebung +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default + (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sub:Literaturverzeichnis-Umgebung" + +\end_inset + +) benutzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Die Literaturverzeichnis-Umgebung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Am +\emph on +Anfang der +\emph default + +\emph on +ersten Zeile +\emph default + eines Absatzes werden Sie ein graues Kästchen mit einem Wort und einer + Zahl in eckigen Klammern sehen. + Wenn Sie daraufklicken, erscheint ein Menü, in dem Sie einen +\family sans +Schlüssel +\family default + und eine +\family sans +Marke +\family default + einfügen können. + Der +\family sans +Schlüssel +\family default + ist der symbolische Name, mit dem Sie auf diese Literaturangabe verweisen. + Nehmen wir zum Beispiel an, Ihre erste Literaturangabe wäre ein Buch über + LaTeX. + Wir könnten dann als +\family sans +Schlüssel +\family default + +\emph on +latexbuch +\emph default + dafür nehmen. + Sie können auch eine +\family sans +Marke +\family default + benutzen, die dann in dem grauen Kästchen erscheinen würde. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das +\family sans +Marke +\family default +n-Feld ist nicht nutzlos. + Sie können auf Ihre Literaturangaben verweisen, indem Sie +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Zitat +\family default + oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" +\end_inset + + benutzen. + Es öffnet sich ein Fenster in dem Sie nun einen Schlüssel aus der Liste + der verfügbaren Verweise auswählen. + Drücken Sie +\family sans +Hinzufügen +\family default + und anschließend +\family sans +OK +\family default +. + Es wurde eine Literatur-Verweisbox eingefügt, die nach dem(n) referenzierten + Schlüssel(n) benannt ist. + Klickt man auf die Box, wird wieder das Literaturverweis-Fenster angezeigt, + so dass man den Verweis ändern kann. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Literaturverweise erscheinen im der Ausgabe als Nummer des Literatureintrags + in eckigen Klammern. + Setzt man eine +\family sans +Marke +\family default + für einen Eintrag, erscheint die Marke statt der Nummer. + Hier sind zwei Beispiele, da erste ohne Marke, das zweite mit der Marke + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Credits +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Siehe den +\family sans +LaTeX Companion Second Edition +\family default +: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Mitglieder des LyX-Teams sind in den Credits aufgelistet: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um alle Literatureinträge auzurichten, kann man im Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Absatz-Einstellungen +\family default + (Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +) eine längste Marke angeben. + Es werden dann alle Einträge mit der Breite der angegebenen Marke eingerückt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken (BibTeX) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Literaturverzeichnis ! Datenbanken +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Literaturverzeichnis ! BibTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +BibTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken sind nützlich, wenn Sie dasselbe Literaturverze +ichnis in mehreren Dokumenten benutzen wollen. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sie sind auch nützlich um eine Datenbank von Artikeln mit Notizen dazu zu + haben. + Die meisten der Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbankprogramme erlauben es, Anmerkunge +n und Rezensionen zusammen mit Literaturquellen zu speichern. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Außerdem sehen sie dann auch gleich aus. + Sie können alle Literaturangaben Ihres Arbeitsgebiets in einer Datenbank + sammeln. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Datenbank ist eine Textdatei mit der Endung +\family typewriter +.bib +\family default + und enthält das Literaturverzeichnis in einem eigenen Format. + Diese wird in LaTeX-Büchern beschrieben ( +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" + +\end_inset + +). + Normalerweise benutzt man ein besonderes Programm, um die Datenbank anzulegen + und zu bearbeiten. + Auf +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + finden Sie eine Liste mit Programmen für Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um eine Datenbank zu benutzen, wählen Sie +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Liste +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Inhaltsverzeichnis\SpecialChar \menuseparator +BibTe +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +X-Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +, woraufhin das +\family sans +BibTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +-Fenster geöffnet wird. + Sie können dort Datenbanken hinzufügen und auch wieder löschen. + Außerdem können Sie eine Stildatei auswählen. + Die Option +\family sans +Literaturverzeichnis +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +ins +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\family default + fügt einen Literaturverzeichniseintrag zum Inhaltsverzeichnis hinzu. + Über +\family sans +Inhalt +\family default + können Sie festlegen, was gedruckt werden soll. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Stildatei ist eine Textdatei mit der Endung +\family typewriter +.bst +\family default +, die das Aussehen der Literatureinträge definiert. + Ihre LaTeX-Distribution sollte mehrere anbieten, und viele Verleger liefern + eigene Stildateien, so dass Sie sich um das Aussehen nicht kümmern müssen. + Sie können aber auch eine eigene Stildatei erstellen, aber das ist etwas + für Experten. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Für Informationen, wie dies gemacht wird, siehe +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein Querverweis auf einen Datenbankeintrag erfolgt wie oben beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX verwendet BibTeX, um ein Literaturverzeichnis aus einer Datenbank zu + erstellen. + Sie können festlegen, welche seiner Varianten von LyX als Prozessor verwendet + wird; entweder im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default + oder +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ausgabe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. + Die folgenden Varianten sind möglich: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +biber bietet volle Unterstützung von Unicode, unbergrenzter Speicher, funktionie +rt nicht mit anderen Literaturpaketen (wie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + +\series bold +natbib +\series default +), nur mit dem Paket +\series bold +biblatex +\series default +; empfohlen für mehrsprachige Texte und für Dokumente deren Sprache keine + lateinischen Buchstaben verwendet +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex der Standard; erlaubt keine Sonderzeichen, die nicht in einer 7-Bit + Kodierung kodiert werden können, bergrenzter Speicher, funktioniert mit + allen Literaturpaketen, mit Ausnahme von +\series bold +biblatex +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex8 erlaubt alle Zeichen, die in einer 8-Bit Kodierung kodiert werden + können, größerer Speicher als +\family sans +bibtex +\family default +, funktioniert mit allen Literaturpaketen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +BibTeX kann durch Optionen gesteuert werden, die Sie unterhalb der Festlegung + der Variante eingeben können. + Bevor Sie Optionen verwenden, lesen Sie unbedingt das BibTeX-Handbuch +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default +die Option +\family sans +Abschnittspezifisches +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default + angekreuzt haben, können Sie mehrfache und unterteilte Literaturverzeichnisse + erstellen. + Mehr darüber finden Sie im Abschnitt +\emph on +Literaturverzeichnisse mit BibTeX +\emph default + in den +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In diesem Dokument werden zwei Literaturverzeichnisse benutzt, um die Unterschie +de zu zeigen. + Wie Sie sehen, enthält das Literaturverzeichnis, das mit einer Datenbank + erstellt wurde, nur die Einträge, auf die verwiesen wird. + Als Stildatei wurde +\family typewriter +alphadin.bst +\family default + benutzt, um das komplizierte deutsche Verweisschema automatisch zu verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Literaturverzeichnis-Gestaltung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Literaturverzeichnis ! Gestaltung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Literaturverweisdialog können Sie eine +\family sans +Formatierung +\family default + festlegen. + Dazu müssen Sie in +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Literaturverzeichnis +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + die Option +\family sans +Natbib +\family default + anklicken. + +\family sans + +\family default +Damit wird die Standardeinstellung überschrieben. + Globale Einstellungen müssen Sie in den BibTeX-Stildateien vornehmen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Dialogfenster können Sie auch Text, der vor oder nach dem Verweis erscheinen + soll, festlegen. + Hier erscheint der Text +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Kapitel +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +3 +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + nach dem Verweis: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "Kapitel 3" +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In den +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + finden Sie noch ein paar weitere Dinge über Literaturverzeichnisse. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Stichwortverzeichnisse +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Stichwortverzeichnisse" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stichwort!verzeichnis@-verzeichnis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein Stichwort wird erzeugt, wenn man das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Stichwort +\family default + oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "index-insert" +\end_inset + + verwendet. + Es wird dann eine Box eingefügt, die den Text des Stichworts enthält. + Das Wort in dem sich der Cursor befindet oder markierter Text wird von + LyX als Stichwort vorgeschlagen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Stichwortverzeichnis wird in das Dokument mit dem Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Liste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Inhaltsverzeichnis\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Stichwortverzeichnis +\family default + eingefügt. + Eine hellblaue Box namens +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Stichwortverzeichnis +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + zeigt die Stelle an, wo das Stichwortverzeichnis in der Ausgabe erscheinen + wird. + Die Stichwortverzeichnis-Box ist nicht wie andere LyX-Boxen anklickbar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es folgt ein kurzer Überblick über die Stichwort-Befehle. + Für eine detaillierte Beschreibung von LaTeXs Stichwort-Mechanismus, sei + auf eines dieser LaTeX-Bücher verwiesen: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Stichworte gruppieren +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stichwort ! gruppieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Stichworte werden häufig gruppiert, um dem Leser eine schnelle Suche zu + ermöglichen. + Wenn wir zum Beispiel +\emph on +Auflistung +\emph default + und +\emph on +Aufzählung +\emph default + unter dem Stichwort +\emph on +Liste +\emph default + gruppieren wollen, erzeugen wir zunächst in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Listen" + +\end_inset + + das Stichwort +\emph on +Liste +\emph default +. + Im Textfeld für das Stichwort +\emph on + Auflistung +\emph default + in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Auflistung" + +\end_inset + + fügen wir als Stichwort +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Liste ! Auflistung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +und +\series bold + +\series default +in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Aufzählung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Liste ! Aufzählung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Ausrufezeichen +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +! +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + markiert die Gruppierungsstufe, von denen es drei gibt. + Jede Stufe wird in der Druckausgabe ein wenig eingerückt. + Für eine höhere Stufe ist kein Stichwort nötig, es wird aber trotzdem gedruckt, + aber ohne Seitenzahl. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mehrere Seiten +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stichwort ! Mehrere Seiten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalerweise erscheint ein Stichwort im Verzeichnis mit der Seitennummer + des Abschnitts, indem sich das Stichwort befindet. + Manchmal will man aber mehrere Seiten unter einem Stichwort indizieren. + Will man z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + den Abschnitt über Absatzumgebungen indizieren, erzeugt man ein Stichwort + in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Absatzumgebungen" + +\end_inset + + mit dem Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Absatzumgebungen|( +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +und ein weiteres Stichwort am Ende des Abschnitts +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LyX-Code" + +\end_inset + + mit dem Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Absatzumgebungen|) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Befehle +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|( +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|) +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + beginnen bzw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +beenden den Indexbereich. + Man kann außerdem dasselbe Stichwort mehrfach an verschiedenen Stellen + des Dokuments einfügen. + Diese erscheinen im Stichwortverzeichnis als ein Stichwort mit einer nachstehen +den Liste von Seitenzahlen in denen sich das Stichwort befindet. + Ein Beispiel ist das Stichwort +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Querverweise +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stichwort ! Querverweis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es ist auch möglich, auf ein anderes Stichwort zu verweisen. + Wenn Sie zum Beispiel irgendwo den Begriff GIF +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +GIF|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Grafikformate +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + verwenden und ihn mit einem Stichwort versehen wollen, das auf den Abschnitt + verweist, in dem er zum ersten Mal gebraucht wurde (Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sec:Grafikformate" + +\end_inset + +), so schreiben Sie in das Stichwort-Eingabefeld +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +GIF|see{Grafikformate} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Text in den geschweiften Klammern wird dann im Stichwortverzeichnis + ohne Seitenangabe erscheinen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Stichwort-Reihenfolge +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stichwort ! Reihenfolge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann akzentuierte Zeichen in Stichwörtern verwenden, aber diese Zeichen + können dazu führen, dass das Stichwort im Stichwortverzeichnis nicht korrekt + sortiert wird. + Die Stichworte werden alphabetisch sortiert, aber LaTeX +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Das Stichwortverzeichnis wird im Hintergrund von einem speziellen Programm + erzeugt, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Stichwort-Programm" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + weiß nicht wie die Akzente in verschiedenen Sprachen einsortiert werden. + Als Beispiel haben wir die drei Stichworte +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +maison +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +maïs +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +maître +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sinnloseintrag ! maïs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sinnloseintrag ! maître +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sinnloseintrag ! maïs@maison +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + eingefügt. + Sie werden in der Reihenfolge maïs, maître, maison sortiert, aber wir wollen + die Reihenfolge maïs, maison, maître. + Um dies zu erreichen, verwendet man den Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +voriger Eintrag@aktueller Eintrag +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In unserem Fall wollen wir +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +maison +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + nach +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +maïs +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + haben und schreiben daher in das Stichwort von maison: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +maïs@maison +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der vorige Eintrag muss kein existierender Eintrag sein. + Man kann ein beliebiges Wort verwenden um LaTeX die Reihenfolge vorzugeben, + siehe den nächsten Unterabschnitt für ein Beispiel. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In einigen Fällen ist die Stichwort-Reihenfolge inkorrekt wenn das Programm + +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +verwendet wird um das Stichwortverzeichnis zu erzeugen (siehe Kap. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Stichwort-Programm" + +\end_inset + +). + +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + gibt zum Beispiel das Stichwort für das LaTeX-Paket aeguill in Kap. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Dokumentschrift-und-Schriftgröße" + +\end_inset + + nach den Stichworten der anderen LaTeX-Pakete aus, obwohl all diese Stichwort-B +efehle mit +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +LaTeX-Paket ! +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + beginnen. + Der Grund ist, dass sich das Stichwort für aeguill in einer Fußnote befindet. + Um diesen Fehler von +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + zu umgehen, kann man diese Befehle zum LaTeX-Vorspann des Dokuments hinzufügen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +let +\backslash +OrgIndex +\backslash +index +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand*{ +\backslash +index}[1]{ +\backslash +OrgIndex{#1}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Stichwort-Formatierung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stichwort ! Formatierung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann das Erscheinungsbild von Stichworten über den Textstil-Dialog verändern. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sinnloseintrag ! +\shape italic +Dies ist ein kursiver Sinnloseintrag +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Des Weiteren kann die Seitennummer mit dem Befehl +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +| +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, gefolgt von einem LaTeX-Befehl ohne Backslash, formatiert werden . + Man kann zum Beispiel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +kursive Seitennummer:|textit +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +schreiben, um die Seitennummer kursiv zu bekommen. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sinnloseintrag ! kursive Seitennummer:|textit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Normalerweise beginnen alle LaTeX-Befehle mit einem Backslash, aber in + diesem speziellen Fall bedeutet +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|Befehl +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +Befehl{Seitennummer} +\series default +. + Siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + + um mehr über die LaTeX-Syntax zu erfahren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Die Formatierung von einzelnen Stichworten funktioniert nur, wenn Sie das + Programm +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +verwenden um das Stichwortverzeichnis zu erzeugen, siehe Kap. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Stichwort-Programm" + +\end_inset + +. + Verwenden Sie +\family sans +xindy +\family default +, wird es mit Ausnahme von fett und kursiv nicht funktionieren, da +\family sans +xindy +\family default + semantische Elemente benötigt, die man erst definieren muss; siehe +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "p. 678 ff." +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + für Details. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Allgemein ist es jedoch nicht empfehlenswert die Seitennummer auf obige + Weise zu formatieren. + Stattdessen sollte man ein Makro im LaTeX-Vorspann definieren und es in + Stichworten verwenden. + Vielleicht wollen Sie alle Seitennummern von Stichworten, die auf eine + Definition verweisen, kursiv setzen, so dass die Leser schnell Definitionen + finden können. + In diesem Fall schreiben Sie Folgendes in den LaTeX-Vorspann +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +IndexDef}[1]{ +\backslash +textit{#1}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +und schreiben +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +mein Eintrag|IndexDef +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +in das Stichwort. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sinnloseintrag ! mein Eintrag|IndexDef +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Der Vorteil ist, dass, wenn man seine Meinung später ändert oder der Lektor + darauf besteht, dass Definitionen nicht kursiv gesetzt werden dürfen, sondern + fett gesetzt werden müssen, man nur den Befehl im Vorspann ändern muss, + nicht jedes Stichwort. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können das Aussehen für das gesamte Stichwortverzeichnis ändern. + Wenn Sie zum Beispiel den Absatz mit dem Kästchen +\family sans +Stichwortverzeichnis +\family default + am Ende des Dokumentes fett markieren, werden alle Stichworte fett gedruckt. + Weiterführende Informationen finden Sie in +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie wollen, dass die Stichworte mit Stichwortverzeichnis statt Index + beginnen, sollten Sie in den LaTeX-Vorspann folgendes einfügen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +addto +\backslash +captionsngerman{ +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +indexname}{Stich +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +wort +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ver +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +zeich +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +nis}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Stichwort-Programm +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Stichwort-Programm" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stichwort ! Programm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX benutzt standardmäßig das Programm +\family typewriter +xindy +\family default +, wenn es installiert ist, das aber nur für Linux verfügbar ist, ansonsten + das Programm +\family typewriter +makeindex +\family default +, welches Bestandteil jeder LaTeX-Distribution ist. + Beide Programme können durch Optionen in +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ausgaben\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaTe +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +X +\family default + kontrolliert werden. + Die Funktionen und Eigenschaften der Programme können Sie der Dokumentation + entnehmen, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können aber auch ein anderes Stichwort-Programm benutzen, wenn Sie es + in +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ausgaben\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaTe +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +X +\family default + im Feld +\family sans +Befehl +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +für +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Stichwortverzeichnis +\family default +eintragen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mehrere Stichwortverzeichnisse +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In vielen Fällen ist es üblich mehr als ein Stichwortverzeichnis zu haben. + Zum Beispiel könnten Sie ein separates Stichwortverzeichnis +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Index der Namen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + neben dem Standard-Stichwortverzeichnis haben wollen. + Mit LaTeX ist dies nicht direkt möglich, aber es gibt Pakete, die dies + ermöglichen. + LyX verwendet das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +splitidx +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! splitidx +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + um mehrere Stichwortverzeichnisse zu erzeugen. + Dieses Paket ist in allen aktuellen LaTeX-Distributionen enthalten. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Falls Ihre Distribution es nicht anbietet, konsultieren Sie den TeX-Katalog, + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeX-Katalog" + +\end_inset + +. + Beachten Sie dabei, dass das Paket nicht nur aus LaTeX-Stilen besteht sondern + auch aus speziellen Präprozessor-Programmen, die mit installiert werden + müssen. + Lesen Sie die Dokumentation des Pakets für weitere Informationen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um LyX für mehrere Stichwortverzeichnisse einzurichten, gehen Sie ins Menü + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Stichwortverzeichnis +\family default + und aktivieren die Option +\family sans +Mehrere Indexe verwenden +\family default +. + Wie man sieht, enthält die Liste +\family sans +Verfügbare Indexe +\family default + bereits den Standard-Index +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Stichwortverzeichnis +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Um weitere Indexe hinzuzufügen, geben Sie den Namen des Indexes in das + Feld +\family sans +Neuer Index +\family default + ein (in der Form, in der er auch als Überschrift erscheinen soll) und drücken + +\family sans +Hinzufügen +\family default +. + Der neue Index erscheint nun auch in der Liste. + Sie können dem neuen Index auch eine alternative Farbe für dessen Einfügungen + in LyX zuweisen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sobald die Änderungen übernommen wurden, findet man den neuen Index im Menü + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Liste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\family default + und das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen +\family default + hat einen eigenen Eintrag für jeden definierten Index. + Das Arbeiten mit neuen Indexen ist im Prinzip dasselbe wie mit dem Stichwortver +zeichnis aber es gibt zusätzliche Funktionen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Wenn Sie die Index-Zuweisung eines Indexeintrags ändern wollen, klicken + die mit Rechts auf die Marke des Eintrags. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Durch Rechtsklicken auf einen Index kann man dessen Typ ändern. + Man kann des weiteren einen Index als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Unterindex +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + verwenden. + Wenn man das macht, wird die Überschrift des Indexes um eine Ebene verringert. + Das bedeutet, dass wenn man z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + eine Buch-Dokumentklasse verwendet, in der der Titel des Stichwortverzeichnisse +s als Kapitel definiert ist, der Titels des Unterindex' als Abschnitt definiert + wird und daher in Nicht-Unterindexe eingegliedert werden kann. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Nomenklatur/Glossar +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Nomenklatur/Glossar" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenklatur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glossar|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Nomenklatur +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Manchmal benötigen Sie vielleicht eine Liste von Symbolen oder Begriffen + mit deren Bedeutung – eine sogenannte Nomenklatur bzw. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + ein Glossar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um dies in LyX zu erstellen, muss das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installiert sein. + Sie finden es im TeX-Katalog, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeX-Katalog" + +\end_inset + + oder im Paketmanager Ihrer LaTeX-Distribution. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einen Nomenklatureintrag erstellen Sie, indem Sie den Cursor hinter ein + Symbol oder einen Begriff stellen und +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nomenklatureintrag +\family default + oder +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/nomencl-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + wählen. + Ein graues Kästchen mit der Aufschrift +\family sans +Nom +\family default + wird eingefügt und ein Dialogfenster geöffnet. + Ein Glossar-Eintrag besteht aus zwei Hauptteilen: das +\family sans +Symbol +\family default + und dessen +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Sie müssen korrekten LaTeX-Code in allen Feldern des Nomenklatur-Dialogs + eingeben. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenklaturdefinition und Layout +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenklatur ! Layout +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie Symbole in Formeln haben, müssen diese im +\family sans +Symbol +\family default + Feld als LaTeX-Formel eingegeben werden. + Um z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + zu bekommen, fügt man dies ein: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series default +Das Zeichen +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +$ +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + beginnt/beendet die Formel. + Der LaTeX-Befehl für den griechischen Buchstaben ist dessen Name beginnend + mit einem umgekehrten Schrägstrich +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\backslash + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Für große griechische Buchstaben beginnt der Befehl mit einem Großbuchstaben: + +\series bold + +\backslash +Sigma +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +(Eine kurze Einführung in die LaTeX-Syntax ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + + zu finden.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann den +\family sans +Textstil +\family default + Dialog nicht verwenden, um den Beschreibungstext zu formatieren, sondern + man muss LaTeX-Befehle verwenden. + Zum Beispiel lautet die Beschreibung für den Nomenklatureintrag für +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + in diesem Dokument: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Sinnsloseintrag für das Zeichen +\backslash +textsf{sigma} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Der Befehl +\series bold + +\backslash +textsf +\series default + setzt die Schrift auf +\family sans +serifenlos +\family default +. + Für +\series bold +fett +\series default + verwenden Sie den Befehl +\series bold + +\backslash +textbf +\series default +, für +\family typewriter +schreibmaschine +\family default + +\series bold + +\backslash +texttt +\series default +, für +\emph on +hervorgehoben +\series bold +\emph default + +\backslash +emph +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sollen die Zeichen | +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +! +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +, @ und +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +" +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +in Nomenklatureinträgen erscheinen, müssen sie geschützt werden. + indem man ein Anführungszeichen davor setzt. + Um zu verhindern, dass das Zeichen " nachfolgende Zeichen beeinflusst, + wird es mit einem leeren TeX-Klammerpaar abgeschlossen: ""{} +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\"{}" +description "Das Anführungszeichen wird mit der Sequenz ' \"\"{}\"\"{} ' ausgegeben" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenklatur-Einträge sortieren +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenklatur ! sortieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nehmen wir an, Sie hätten zwei Nomenklatureinträge für die Symbole +\emph on + a +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "a" +description "Sinnsloseintrag für das Zeichen ,,a``" + +\end_inset + + +\emph default + und +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +prefix "sigma" +symbol "$\\sigma$" +description "Sinnsloseintrag für das Zeichen \\textsf{sigma}" + +\end_inset + +. + Diese werden alphabetisch nach dem sortiert, was im Feld +\family sans +Symbol +\family default + steht. + Sie werden daher nach +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +a +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + sortiert – das +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + wird vor dem +\emph on +a +\emph default + erscheinen, denn das Befehlszeichen +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +$ +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + wird bei der Sortierung berücksichtigt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um das zu ändern, können Sie etwas ins Feld +\family sans +Einsortieren +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +als +\family default + schreiben, zum Beispiel +\family typewriter +sigma +\family default + bei +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + . + Dann stimmt die Sortierreihenfolge wieder. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um verschachtelte Nomenklaturen zu erstellen, lesen Sie bitte in der +\series bold +nomencl +\series default +-Dokumentation nach, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenklatur-Optionen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenklatur ! Optionen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Paket +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + bietet einige Optionen an um das Aussehen der Nomenklatur zu verändern. + Hier sind einige seiner Optionen, für weitere siehe seine Dokumentation: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refeq Verweis mit dem Ausdruck +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, siehe Gleichung (#) +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refpage Verweis mit dem Ausdruck +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, Seite (#) +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +intoc fügt die Nomenklatur ins Inhaltsverzeichnis ein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um eine oder mehrere Optionen benutzen zu können, fügen Sie sie, durch Kommas + getrennt, in das Feld +\family sans +Optionen +\family default + von +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dokumentklasse +\family default + ein. + In diesem Dokument werden die Optionen +\series bold +refpage, intoc +\series default + verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die ersten beiden Optionen können Sie auch nur für gewisse Nomenklatureinträge + benutzen, wenn Sie als letzten Eintrag im Feld +\family sans +Beschreibung +\family default + folgendes schreiben: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeq wie die Option +\series bold +refeq +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\series bold + +\backslash +nomrefpage +\series default + wie die Option +\series bold +refpage +\series default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeqpage ist die Kurzform von +\series bold + +\backslash +nomrefeq +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomnorefeq, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefpage, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefeqpage schaltet die entsprechende Option ab +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Damit Wörter wie +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Seite +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + auch auf Deutsch und nicht in Englisch erscheinen, fügen Sie diese Zeilen + dem LaTeX-Vorspann ihres Dokuments hinzu: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +eqdeclaration}[1]{, siehe Gleichung +\backslash +nobreakspace(#1)} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +pagedeclaration}[1]{, Seite +\backslash +nobreakspace{}#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenklatur drucken +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenklatur ! drucken +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Liste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Inhaltsverzeichnis\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nomenklatur +\family default + können Sie ein Glossar +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Verzeichnis einfügen. + An der Stelle erscheint ein Kästchen mit der Aufschrift +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Nomenklatur +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, und dort wird das Verzeichnis auch gedruckt. + Mit einem Rechtsklick auf das Kästchen kann man die verfügbare Breite für + die Symbole einstellen. + Sie können dabei zwischen diesen Einstellungen wählen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Standard Breite von 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Breite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +längsten +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Marke die Breite des breitesten Symbols aller Nomenklatureinträge wird verwendet +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Benutzerdefiniert benutzerdefinierte Breite +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In der Druckausgabe erscheint die Nomenklatur als +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Nomenclature +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Sie ihn im LaTeX-Vorspann mit dieser Zeile ändern: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +nomname}{Nomenklatur} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenklatur-Programm +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Nomenklatur-Programm" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenklatur ! Programm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX benutzt standardmäßig das Programm +\family typewriter +makeindex +\family default +, um die Nomenklatur zu erzeugen, weil es zu jeder LaTeX-Distribution gehört. + Im Feld +\family sans +Nomenklaturbefehl +\family default + von +\family sans +Werkzeuge +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Einstellun\SpecialChar \- +gen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Ausgaben +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +LaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default + können Sie den Befehl modifizieren oder ein anderes Programm eintragen. + In +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex" + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + + sind die möglichen Optionen beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Zweige +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zweige +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Zweige" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Manchmal wollen Sie mehrere Versionen desselben Dokuments ausgeben. + Der Extremfall ist die Ausgabe eines einzigen Dokuments in verschiedenen + Sprachen, aber als eine Datei und so, dass korrespondierende Teile aufeinander + folgen. + Dies kann man mit +\emph on +Zweigen +\emph default + erreichen. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Zuerst müssen Sie die verschiedenen Zweige definieren. + Das machen entweder indem Sie das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Zweig\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Neuen Zweig einfügen +\family default + verwenden (falls Sie nur einen neuen Zweig anlegen möchten), oder im Menü + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Zweige +\family default +. + Sie können jedem Zweig eine Hintergrundfarbe zuweisen, um ihn leichter + erkennen zu können. + Dann geben Sie in das Feld +\family sans +Neu +\family default + einen Namen ein und klicken auf +\family sans +Hinzufügen +\family default +. + Der Name erscheint im unteren Feld, wo Sie ihn bearbeiten können. + Dort können Sie den Zweig +\family sans +(De)aktivieren +\family default +, ihm eine +\family sans +Farbe +\family default + geben, die aber nur in LyX zu sehen ist, und ihn wieder +\family sans +Entfernen +\family default +. + Des Weiteren erlaubt es der Dialog zwei Zweige miteinander zu vereinen + (einfach einen Zweig in den Namen eines andren umbenennen) und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +unbekannte Zweige +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + (d. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +h. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Zweige, die durch Copy/Paste von anderen Dokumenten eingefügt wurden, ohne + definiert worden zu sein) zur Zweig-Liste des Dokuments hinzuzufügen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie nun Text für einen Zweig schreiben wollen, wählen Sie ihn unter + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Zweig +\family default + aus und geben ihn ein. + Sie können natürlich auch vorhandenen Text auswählen und ihn dann einem + Zweig zuweisen. + Alle deaktivierten Zweige werden automatisch geschlossen und aktivierte + geöffnet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine weitere mögliche Anwendung wäre eine Lehrerversion, in der die Antworten + auf Prüfungsfragen stehen würden. + In der Druckausgabe sehen Sie die Schülerversion: +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Frage +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +Frage: Wer war der erste Physik-Nobelpreis-Gewinner? +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Antwort +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard +Antwort: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie +\family sans +Dateinamensendung +\family default + im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Zweige +\family default + aktivieren, wird der Name des aktiven Zweigs beim Export des Dokuments + an den Dateinamen angehängt. + Angenommen Sie haben eine Datei namens +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Prüfung.lyx +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + mit den beiden obigen Zweigen. + Wenn +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Dateinamensendung +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + aktiv ist, wird die exportierte PDF-Datei +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Prüfung.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + heißen wenn beide Zweige +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Frage +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Antwort +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + inaktiv waren, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Prüfung-Frage.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + wenn nur der Zweig +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Frage +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + aktiv war, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Prüfung-Antwort.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + wenn nur der Zweig +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Antwort +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + aktiv war, und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Prüfung-Frage-Answer.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + wenn beide Zweige aktiv waren. + Dies hilft um verschiedene Versionen einer Datei zu exportieren ohne den + Überblick zu verlieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um konditionale Ausgaben zu erzeugen, wo keine Zweige angegeben werden können + wie in Formeln, können spezielle LaTeX-Definitionen für jeden Zweig angegeben + werden. + Man kann zum Beispiel für den Frage-Zweig definieren: +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Eine Einführung in die LaTeX-Syntax ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + + zu finden. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +Frage}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +Antwort}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +und für den Antwort-Zweig: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +Frage}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +Antwort}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Frage +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +Frage}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +Antwort}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Antwort +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +Frage}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +Antwort}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nun ist es möglich, die Befehle +\series bold + +\backslash +Frage{\SpecialChar \ldots{} +} +\series default + und +\series bold + +\backslash +Antwort{\SpecialChar \ldots{} +} +\series default + zu verwenden, um eine konditionale Ausgabe zu erhalten. + Hier ist eine Beispielformel, in der nur der +\series bold + +\backslash +Frage +\series default +-Teil erscheint: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\Frage{x_{1}}\Antwort{x_{2}}=1\Frage{+\sqrt{3}}\Antwort{-\sqrt{3}}. +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Innerhalb von Formeln, kann dasselbe auch mit Hilfe von Makros geschehen, + siehe Abschnitt +\emph on +Mathe-Makro +\emph default +s des +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default + Handbuchs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Jeder Branchtyp kann einen speziellen Stil haben, der in Layout-Dateien + definiert werden kann. + Für diese fortgeschrittene Anwendung siehe das +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuch, Abschnitt +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Flexible Einfügungen und InsetLayout +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +PDF-Eigenschaften +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF!-Eigenschaften +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:PDF-Eigenschaften" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Dialogfenster +\family sans +Dokument-Einstellungen +\family default + können Sie unter +\family sans +PDF-Eigenschaften +\family default + spezielle Optionen für die PDF-Ausgabe eines Dokuments setzen. + Alle Optionen stammen vom LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + wird in der DVI- oder PDF-Ausgabe alle Querverweise verlinken, so dass + ein Leser, der die DVI- oder PDF-Ausgabe auf seinem PC liest, einen Querverweis + anklicken kann und so zur entsprechenden Stelle gelangt, wie es auch im + Internet passiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Dokument-Informationen +\family default + auf Karteikarte +\family sans +Allgemein +\family default + werden zusammen mit der PDF-Ausgabe als Datei-Eigenschaften gespeichert. + Viele PDF-Leseprogramme können diese Informationen verarbeiten. + Das ist zum Verwalten von PDF-Dateien sehr hilfreich. + Ist +\family sans +Informationen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +automatisch +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +eintragen +\family default + angekreuzt, versucht LyX, diese Informationen aus dem Titel und dem Autor + des Dokuments zu gewinnen. + Die Option +\family sans +Im +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Vollbildmodus +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +öffnen +\family default + sorgt dafür, dass die PDF-Datei automatisch so geöffnet wird, was bei Präsentat +ionen hilfreich ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Auf der Karteikarte +\family sans +Hyperlinks +\family default + können Sie festlegen, wie die Querverweise aussehen sollen, und ob bibliografis +che Rückverweise angelegt werden sollen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit die Option +\family sans +Links am Zeilenende umbrechen +\family default + können lange Links umgebrochen werden; +\family sans +Keine +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Rahmen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +um +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Links +\family default + und +\family sans +Links +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +einfärben +\family default + schalten beide die Eingenschaft aus, dass standardmäßig Rahmen um Links + gezeichnet werden; +\family sans +Links +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +einfärben +\family default + färbt die verschiedenen Links. + Die verschiedenen Farben sind: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color magenta +magenta +\color inherit + für Hyperlinks und URLs +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color red +rot +\color inherit + für links +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color green +grün +\color inherit + für Zitate +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +die aber im Feld +\family sans +Zusätzliche Optionen +\family default + geändert werden können. + Dies wurde z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + in diesem Dokument mit den Optionen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +getan. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn die Option +\family sans +Rückverweise +\family default + ausgewählt ist, erscheinen die Hyperlinks im Literaturverzeichnis hinter + den Einträgen, je nach Einstellung, als Nummer des Abschnitts, der Folie + oder Seite in/auf der sie referenziert sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In der Karteikarte +\family sans +Lesezeichen +\family default + können Sie festlegen, ob welche erzeugt und auch nummeriert werden sollen. + Das erleichtert es Lesern, durch die PDF-Ausgabe des Dokuments zu navigieren. + Mit +\family sans +Ebene +\family default + legen Sie fest, welche Lesezeichen angezeigt werden sollen. + 2 zum Beispiel zeigt die Lesezeichen aller Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte, + während 1 nur Abschnitte berücksichtigt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Auch in diesem Handbuch werden PDF-Eigenschaften benutzt, wie Sie im Dialogfenst +er +\family sans +Dokument-Einstellungen +\family default + sehen können. + Dort sehen Sie auch, dass +\family sans +Zusätzliche +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Optionen +\family default + benutzt werden. + Genaueres dazu finden Sie im +\series bold +hyperref +\series default +-Handbuch +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +TeX-Code und LaTeX-Syntax +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:TeX-Code" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX!-Syntax +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +TeX-Code +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +TeX-Code-Kästchen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:TeX-Code-Kästchen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +TeX-Code +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie gezwungen sind oder es wollen, LaTeX-Befehle in LyX zu benutzen, + geben Sie diese in TeX-Code-Kästchen ein. + Ein TeX-Code-Kästchen erhalten Sie mit +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Code +\family default +, +\family sans +Strg+L +\family default + oder durch Klicken auf den Knopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + + (Tastenkürzel +\family sans +Strg+L +\family default +). + Es erscheint ein rotes Rechteck, in das Sie Ihren LaTeX-Text schreiben. + LyX wird alles, was im TeX-Code-Kästchen steht, unverändert an LaTeX übergeben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Kästchen selber kann auf zwei Arten angezeigt werden: +\family sans +Geschlossen +\family default + und +\family sans +Geöffnet +\family default +. + Im geschlossenen Zustand wird ein Teil des Textes auf grauem Hintergrund + dargestellt. + Um die Darstellung zu ändern, machen Sie einen Rechtsklick auf das Kästchen + und wählen in dem Dialogfenster aus, was Sie wollen. + Außerdem können Sie im geöffneten Zustand die Einfügung auflösen, das heißt, + der enthaltenen Text wird normal dargestellt. + Wenn das Kästchen geschlossen ist, öffnet ein Linksklick es. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In das TeX-Code-Kästchen können Sie vollständige oder unvollständige LaTeX-Befeh +le schreiben. + Ein vollständiger LaTeX-Befehl ist zum Beispiel die Verwendung von +\family typewriter +slop\SpecialChar \- +py\SpecialChar \- +par +\family default + in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "Sloppypar" + +\end_inset + +. + Unvollständig bedeutet, dass Sie in ein TeX-Code-Kästchen +\family typewriter + +\backslash +Befehlsname[Optionen]{ +\family default + schreiben, dann das Argument mit allen gewünschten Formatierungen als LyX-Text + und schließlich +\family typewriter +} +\family default + in ein zweites TeX +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Code +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +"= +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Kästchen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ERT.png + scale 75 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ergibt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dies ist eine Zeile mit einem +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fbox{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eingerahmten +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Wort. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das hat den Vorteil, dass Formatierungen einfach mit LyX-Mitteln durchgeführt + werden können. + Hier ist ein Beispiel, in dem formatierter +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fbox{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Text +\series default + und ein Bild +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/ert-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId Icon + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + eingerahmt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bemerkung: +\series default + Am Ende von LaTeX-Befehlen ohne Argument müssen Sie ein Leerzeichen eingeben, + damit LaTeX weiß, dass der Befehl zu Ende ist. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Kurze Einführung in die LaTeX-Syntax +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie größere Dokumente oder Bücher schreiben, müssen Sie etwas über + die LaTeX-Befehle wissen, die LyX im Hintergrund verwendet. + Da LaTeX auf Befehlen basiert, können Sie Ihren Text +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +programmieren +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Dies hat den Vorteil, dass das Aussehen des Dokuments jederzeit geändert + werden kann, wenn man die richtigen Befehle kennt. + Stellen Sie sich zum Beispiel vor, dass Sie ein Handbuch für ein Produkt + schreiben müssen und der Abgabetermin in wenigen Stunden ist. + Ihr Chef hat Sie eben für Ihre gute Arbeit gelobt, hätte aber gern alle + Beschriftungsmarken fett gesetzt. + Nun haben Sie aber im Dokument über hundert Abbildungs- und Tabellenbeschriftun +gen mit Marken in normaler Schrift. + Natürlich kann man sie nicht alle in so kurzer Zeit manuell ändern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nun kommt LaTeX ins Spiel. + Wie schon weiter oben erwähnt, gibt es für jedes Problem ein LaTeX-Paket. + Zuerst müssen Sie herausfinden welches und schauen daher in die LaTeX-Paket + Datenbank, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Catalogue" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Als Ergebnis wissen Sie, dass das Paket +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + das ist, das Sie brauchen. + Um ein Paket zu verwenden, muss es im LaTeX-Vorspann (Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX-Vorspann +\family default +) mit dem Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[Optionen]{Paketname} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +geladen werden. + Alle LaTeX Befehle beginnen mit einem Backslash, das Befehls-Argument wird + in geschweifte Klammern gesetzt und die Optionen in eckige Klammern. + Nicht alle Befehle haben ein Argument und Optionen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In Ihrem Fall ist der Paketname +\series bold +caption +\series default +. + Nach einem Blick in die Dokumentation des Pakets wissen Sie, dass die Option + +\series bold +labelfont=bf +\series default + die Schrift aller Beschriftungsmarken fett setzt. + Daher fügen Sie den Befehl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +in den LaTeX-Vorspann ein und das Problem ist gelöst. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Für weitere Befehle, die das Paket +\series bold +caption +\series default + zur Verfügung stellt, siehe seine Dokumentation, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "caption" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beachten Sie dass einige Dokumentklassen eingebaute Lösungen für häufige + Problemstellungen wie diese haben. + Verwenden Sie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + eine +\family sans +KOMA-Script +\family default + Kasse, müssen Die das Paket +\series bold +caption +\series default + nicht verwenden. + Sie können stattdessen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont{captionlabel}{ +\backslash +bfseries} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +in den LaTeX-Vorspann schreiben und das Problem ist gelöst. + Wenn Sie also ein größeres Dokument planen, sollten Sie einen Blick in + die Dokumentation der Dokumentklasse werfen, die Sie verwenden wollen. + ( +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont +\series default + ist ein Beispiel für einen Befehl mit mehr als einem Argument.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Befehle im LaTeX-Vorspann beeinflussen das gesamte Dokument, während Befehle + im Text nur den Text nach dem Befehl oder den Text, der als Befehlsargument + verwendet wird, beeinflussen. + Um einen LaTeX-Befehl im Text einzufügen, verwenden Sie die TeX-Code-Kästchen + wie im vorigen Abschnitt beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie mehr über LaTeX und seine Syntax wissen wollen, schauen Sie in + die LaTeX-Bücher +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexguide" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{fancy} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +wechselt temporär auf den Stil mit benutzerdefinierten Kopf/Fußzeilen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rightmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +definiert die Kopfzeile wie unten beschrieben +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leftmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +thepage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +LyXs Benutzerhandbuch +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Magischer Code: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Benutzerdefinierte Kopf-/Fußzeilen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Benutzerdefinierte-Kopf/Fußzeile" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Kopf/Fußzeilen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Kopf/Fußzeile +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um eigene Kopf- und Fußzeilen für ein Dokument zu definieren, muss man den + Seitenstil +\family sans +ausgefallen +\family default + im +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + Dialog unter +\family sans +Seitenlayout +\family default + einstellen. + Als zweiten Schritt fügt man im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Module +\family default + das Modul +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Benutzerdefinierte Kopf/Fußzeilen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + hinzu. + Dieses Modul bietet die 6 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Stile +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kopfzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Kopfzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mitte, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Kopfzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +rechts +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fußzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Fußzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mitte, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Fußzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +rechts +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +für die verschiedenen Positionen in der Kopf/Fußzeile an. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalerweise werden Kopf/Fußzeilen am Anfang eines Dokuments definiert, + aber man kann sie an jeder Stellen im Dokument ändern. + Abbildung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Seitenlayout-mit-benutzer" + +\end_inset + + zeigt das Seitenlayout und wo die Kopf/Fußzeilen Stile erscheinen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Kopfzeile links +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Kopfzeile mitte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Kopfzeile rechts +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Der normale Text kommt hierhin. + Die Kopfzeile ist über dem Text, die Fußzeile darunter (inklusive Fußnoten). + Kopf/Fußzeilen enthalten typischer Weise Dinge wie die Seitenzahl, Titel + des Kapitels, Firmenlogo aber man kann eigentlich alles außer Gleitumgebungen + verwenden. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fußzeile links +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fußzeile mitte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fußzeile rechts +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Seitenlayout-mit-benutzer" + +\end_inset + +Seitenlayout mit benutzerdefinierter Kopf/Fußzeile. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung +\series default +: Einige Dokumentklassen definieren ihre eigenen Kopf-/Fußzeilen wenn +\family sans +Seiten-Stil +\family default + auf +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Standard +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + gesetzt ist. + Daher sollten Sie deren Stil ausprobieren bevor Sie eigenen Kopf-/Fußzeilen + definieren. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um eine Kopfzeile zu definieren, fügt man alle 3 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Kopfzeilen-Stile ins Dokument ein. + Die Dinge die man in den Stilen verwendet, erscheinen auf ungeraden Seiten, + die Dinge in den optionalen Argumenten auf geraden Seiten. + Bei einseitigen Dokumenten werden die optionalen Argumente nicht verwendet + und können weggelassen werden. + Lässt man einen Stil oder sein optionales Argument leer, erscheint nichts + in der Ausgabe. + Die Definition der Fußzeile funktioniert analog. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Für die Definition benötigt man einige LaTeX-Befehle die als TeX-Code (Menü + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Code +\family default +) eingefügt werden: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +thepage druckt die aktuelle Seitennummer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +Roman{page} druckt die aktuelle Seitennummer in kleinen römischen Ziffern +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +roman{page} druckt die aktuelle Seitennummer in großen römischen Ziffern +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +leftmark druckt die aktuelle Abschnittsnummer und dessen Titel. + Besitzt das Dokument Kapitel, druckt es stattdessen die Kapitelnummer und + dessen Name. + Es heißt +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +leftmark +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + +, da man es üblicherweise links in der Kopfzeile verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +rightmark druckt den Namen und die Nummer des aktuellen Unterabschnitts. + Besitzt das Dokument Kapitel, druckt es stattdessen die Abschnittsnummer + und dessen Name. + Es wird üblicherweise rechts in der Kopfzeile verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Voreingestellte Kopf/Fußzeilen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Benutzerdefinierte Kopf/Fußzeilen sind standardmäßig nicht leer. + Die Standard-Kopfzeile enthält den Kapitel- und Abschnittstitel und die + Fußzeile hat mittig die Seitennummer. + Um ungewollte Einträge von der Kopf/Fußzeile zu entfernen, fügt man den + entsprechenden Kopf/Fußzeilen-Stil ins Dokument ein, aber lässt ihn leer. + Um z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + die Seitennummer von der Fußzeile zu entfernen, fügt man einen leeren Stil + +\family sans +Fußzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mitte +\family default + ein. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Erscheinungsbild +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Kopf/Fußzeilen erscheinen auf normalen Seiten. + Einige Seiten sind speziell. + So hat die Titelseite ihren eigenen Stil, genauso wie die Seiten, auf denen + Teile oder Kapitel eines Buches beginnen. + Diese Seiten haben keine Kopf/Fußzeilen, aber dies ist normal. + So ist es z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + unsinnig, eine Kopfzeile mit dem Kapitelnamen auf einer Seite zu haben, + auf der der Kapitelname schon in großen Buchstaben steht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Kopf/Fußzeilen Dekorationslinie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Standardmäßig bekommt man eine 0.4 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt dicke Linie unter der Kopfzeile und keine Linie für die Fußzeile. + Dies kann im LaTeX-Vorspann mit den Befehlen +\series bold + +\backslash +headrulewidth +\series default + und +\series bold + +\backslash +footrulewidth +\series default + in folgendem Schema geändert werden: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +headrulewidth}{Dicke} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wobei Dicke eine Größe in Standard-Einheiten wie +\family sans +pt +\family default + oder +\family sans +mm +\family default + ist. + Möchte man keine Linie, setzt man die Dicke auf 0 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Linien können auch gefärbt werden, aber die erfordert größeres Wissen + über LaTeX. + Wenn Sie dies wirklich benötigen, schauen sie im Internet oder im Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +4.4 des Buches +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach" + +\end_inset + + nach. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Mehrere Kopf/Fußzeilen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Für den Fall dass man mehr als eine Textzeile als Kopf/Fußzeile benötigt, + kann man einen normalen Zeilenumbruch in der Definition verwenden. + Dennoch ist die Höhe der Kopf/Fußzeile nur die einer einzigen Textzeile + Um die Höhe zu vergrößern, redefiniert man die LaTeX-Länge +\series bold + +\backslash +headheight +\series default + oder +\series bold + +\backslash +footheight +\series default + im LaTeX-Vorspann in folgendem Schema: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +headheight}{Höhe} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wobei Höhe eine Größe in Standard-Einheiten ist. + Weiß man nicht welche Höhe man benötigt, definiert man die Kopf/Fußzeilen + und schaut das Dokument als PDF an. + Anschließend öffnet man das LaTeX-Protokoll über das Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +La +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +TeX-Protokoll +\family default +und schaut mit Hilfe des Knopfes +\family sans +Nächste +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Warnung +\family default + ob man eine Warnung des Pakets +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + findet. + Falls eine solche Warnung existiert, enthält sie die Höhe, die man mindestens + für die Kopf/Fußzeile braucht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Dieses Beispiel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Beispiel demonstriert was man in Kopf/Fußzeilen machen kann. + Verwenden Sie es nicht für ihr Dokument, denn es ist ein nicht sehr sinnvolles + Beispiel. + Es besteht aus der folgenden Definition: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kopfzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\series bold + +\backslash +rightmark +\series default +, leeres optionales Argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kopfzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mitte leer, leeres optionales Argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kopfzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +rechts leer, +\series bold + +\backslash +leftmark +\series default + im optionalen Argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fußzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links leer, +\series bold + +\backslash +thepage +\series default + im optionalen Argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fußzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mitte +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +LyXs Benutzerhandbuch +\family default +\series default +\color inherit +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Magischer Code: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + im optionalen Argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fußzeile +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +rechts +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\series default +, leeres optionales Argument +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +headrulewidth auf 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt gesetzt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Prinzip kann man in Kopf/Fußzeilen alles verwenden, außer Gleitumgebungen. + Für weitere spezielle Dinge wie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + Daumenregister, siehe das Handbuch des Pakets +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage clearpage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{headings} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +wechselt zurück zum Stil mit den Standard-Kopf/Fußzeilen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Dokumentteile vorschauen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Dokumentteile-vorschauen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sofortige Vorschau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Vorschau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX ermöglicht es, Teile Ihres Dokuments als Vorschau anzusehen, so dass + der Schreib- und Denkfluss nicht durch die Ansicht der Ausgabe gestört + wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Voraussetzung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Damit Vorschauen möglich sind, müssen Sie das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +preview-latex +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! preview-latex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (auf manchen System hat es den Namen +\series bold +preview +\series default +) installiert haben. + Falls es noch nicht installiert ist, finden Sie es im TeX-Katalog, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeX-Katalog" + +\end_inset + + oder im Paketmanager Ihres LaTeX-Systems. + Schönere Ergebnisse erzielen Sie, wenn Sie zusätzlich das Programm +\family typewriter +pnmcrop +\family default + des +\family typewriter +netpbm +\family default +-Paketes installieren. + Unter LyX für Windows wird dieses und auch das LaTeX-Paket automatisch + zusammen mit LyX installiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Vorschau aktivieren +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + alle mathematischen Formeln als Vorschau ansehen wollen, müssen Sie die + Option +\family sans +Grafiken +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +anzeigen +\family default + im Dialog +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + unter +\family sans +Aussehen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Handhabung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Anzeige +\family default + aktivieren. + Dann setzen Sie +\family sans +Sofortige +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Vorschau +\family default + auf +\family sans +An +\family default +. + Die +\family sans +Vorschaugröße +\family default + ist der Multiplikationsfaktor für die Größe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie alles außer Mathe vorschauen wollen, setzen Sie +\family sans +Sofortige +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Vorschau +\family default + auf +\family sans +Kein +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Mathe +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vorschauen werden erzeugt, wenn Sie ein Dokument öffnen oder eine Einfügung + verlassen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Hinweis: +\series default + Von bereits geöffneten Dokumenten werden nicht in jedem Fall sofort Vorschauen + erzeugt, wenn man die Option +\family sans +Grafiken +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +anzeigen +\family default + aktiviert. + Man muss also diese Dokumente eventuell neu laden. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ausgewählte Dokumentteile +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Neben Formeln gibt es andere Fälle, in denen man vielleicht eine Vorschau + sehen möchte. + Zum Beispiel bei Dingen die LyX nicht anzeigen kann, wie Rotationen oder + Dinge, die LyX noch nicht unterstützt. + Dazu fügt man eine Vorschau-Einfügung über das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Vorschau +\family default + ein und fügt oder kopiert die Sachen, die vorgeschaut werden sollen, hinein. + Die Vorschau wird erzeugt, wenn sich der Cursor außerhalb der Vorschau-Einfügun +g befindet. + Wenn man auf eine Vorschau klickt, kann das Vorgeschaute bearbeitet werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein Beispiel: Für rotierte Boxen verwenden Sie den LaTeX-Befehl +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default +, der noch nicht von LyX unterstützt wird. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default + ist in Abschnitt +\emph on +Rotierte Boxen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs erklärt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Anstelle der TeX-Code Boxen wollen Sie in LyX die rotierten Boxen sehen, + um z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + den Rotationswinkel so einstellen zu können, dass er zum umgebenden Text + passt. + Daher fügen Sie eine Vorschau-Einfügung ein und kopieren den Text mit den + rotierten Boxen hinein. + Hier ist das Ergebnis: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +Dies ist eine Zeile +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Doublebox +position "c" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 0 +inner_pos "c" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1in" +special "width" +height "1in" +height_special "totalheight" +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mit rotiertem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, gerahmten Text +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und einer Formel. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Vorschau funktioniert auch mit Farben. + In diesem Beispiel wurde eine spezielle gerahmte, farbige Box mit dem LaTeX-Bef +ehl +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default + erzeugt: +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default + ist in Abschnitt +\emph on +Farbige Boxen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs erklärt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fboxrule 1mm +\backslash +fboxsep 1mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Dies ist Text in einer farbigen, gerahmten Box. +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Falls LyX keine Vorschau anzeigt, stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie Vorschauen, + wie oben beschrieben, aktiviert haben, dass TeX-Code in der Vorschau-Einfügung + korrekt ist und dass Sie die LaTeX-Pakete in der Dokumentpräambel geladen + haben, die vom TeX-Code benötigt werden. + Wenn LyX keine Vorschau erzeugen kann, werden Sie in den meisten Fällen + auch keine Ausgabe Ihres Dokumentes aufgrund von LaTeX-Fehlern erzeugen + können. + Falls Sie also TeX-Code verwenden müssen und sich nicht sicher sind, ob + er korrekt ist, ist die Vorschau-Einfügung eine gute Methode ihn zu testen, + ohne das gesamte Dokument anzusehen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaTeX-Quellcode +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Des Weiteren kann der LaTeX-Quellcode des gesamten Dokuments oder von Teilen + davon angeschaut werden. + Das Menü +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Quelle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ansehen +\family default + öffnet ein Fenster in dem der LaTeX-Quellcode angezeigt wird. + Das Fenster zeigt den Quellcode des gesamten Absatzes, indem sich der Cursor + momentan befindet. + Man kann auch Dokumentteile in LyXs Hauptfenster markieren, dann wird nur + der Code der Auswahl angezeigt (wenn es mehr als ein Absatz ist). + Um das gesamte Dokument als Quellcode anzusehen, verwendet man die entsprechend +e Option im Quellcode-Fenster. + Verwendet man die Option +\family sans +Automatische Aktualisierung +\family default +, werden die Änderungen, die man am Dokument vornimmt, sofort angezeigt; + aber beachten Sie, dass das LyX langsamer machen kann, wenn mehrere Dateien + geöffnet sind, da LyX alle geöffneten Dateien aktualisiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Fortgeschrittenes Suchen und Ersetzen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Fortgeschrittenes-Suchen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Suchen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ersetzen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einleitung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das fortgeschrittene Suchen und Ersetzen von LyX erlaubt es nach komplexen + Textabschnitten und mathematischem Inhalt zu suchen. + Es ist eine Erweiterung des Standard Suchen +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Ersetzen Dialogs. + Die Haupteigenschaften sind: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Beides, das Suchen nach Text und nach mathematischen Formeln ist möglich, + wobei Letzteres durch die normale Eingabe einer Formel in das Suchfenster + geschieht; es werden eigenständige Formeln aber auch Teile von Formeln + gefunden +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Die Suche kann formatierungsunabhängig sein, so dass Text in jedem Kontext/Stil + (Standardtext, Abschnittsüberschrift, Notizen, und sogar in Formeln) gefunden + wird, oder er ist formatierungsabhängig, so dass zum Beispiel ein Wort, + das in einer Abschnittsüberschrift eingegeben wurde, auch nur in Abschnittsüber +schriften gefunden wird +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Die Suche kann auf bestimmte +\emph on +Bereiche +\emph default + ausgeweitet werden, das heißt ein Datensatz, der entweder die Unterdokumente + des Dokuments einschließt, aus allen geöffneten Dokumenten oder allen Handbüche +rn besteht, die im Menü +\family sans +Hilfe +\family default + verfügbar sind +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Das Ersetzen kann die Großschreibung beibehalten so dass die Großschreibung + des ersetzten Texts an den gefundenen Text angepasst wird (das heißt alles + groß-, alles klein- oder erster Buchstabe groß-, die anderen kleingeschrieben) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Benutzung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das erweiterte Suchen +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Ersetzen Feature wird über das Menü +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suchen & Ersetzen +\noun on + ( +\noun default +ersetzen +\noun on +) +\family default +\noun default + (Tastenkürzel Ctrl+ +\family sans +Umschalt +\family default ++F oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + + aktiviert. + Damit wird der Dialog +\family sans +Erweitertes Suchen und Ersetzen +\family default + geöffnet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Suche nach Text +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man gibt in das Editorfeld +\family sans +Suchen +\family default + ein unformatiertes Wort ein und sucht danach mit dem Knopf +\family sans +Nächstes suchen +\family default + unten im Dialog (oder drückt einfach die +\family sans +Entertaste +\family default +). + Das eingegebene Wort wird überall im Text in jeder beliebigen Formatierung + als auch in Formeln gefunden. + Mehrmaliges Drücken von +\family sans +Enter +\family default + sucht weiter vorwärts während +\family sans +Umschalt+Enter +\family default + rückwärts sucht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Option +\family sans +Groß-/Kleinschreibung beachten +\family default + findet nur Dinge mit derselben Großschreibung wie im Feld +\family sans +Suchen +\family default +. + Die Option +\family sans +Ganze Wörter +\family default + findet keine Wortteile. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Suche nach Formeln +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nach mathematischen Formeln kann gesucht werden, indem man diese im Feld + +\family sans +Suchen +\family default + eingibt, so wie +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + +. + Wenn nach Formeln gesucht wird, werden diese gefunden, wenn sie allein + stehen, aber auch wenn sie Teil einer Formel sind. + Zum Beispiel werden die beiden Beispiele in dieser Formel gefunden: +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Suche nach Textformatierung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es ist auch möglich nach Text in einer bestimmten Formatierung zu suchen. + Dies wird erreicht, indem man im Tab +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default + des Dialogs die Option +\family sans +Ignoriere Format +\family default + ausschaltet. + Die Eingabe in das Feld +\family sans +Suchen +\family default + von +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +einem unformatierten Wort wird keine Treffer liefern, wenn das Wort im Dokument + z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + fett oder kursiv ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + einem kursiven oder fetten Wort liefert nur Treffer, wenn das Wort im Dokument + dieselbe Formatierung hat. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +einem unformatierten Wort in einer Abschnittsüberschrift führt nur zu Treffern, + wenn sich das Wort in einer Abschnittsüberschrift befindet. + Wenn das Wort zusätzlich eine Formatierung hat, wird nur gefunden, was + in einer Abschnittsüberschrift steht und ebenfalls diese Formatierung hat. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +einer abgesetzten Formel findet diese Formel nur, wenn sie im Dokument ebenfalls + eine eingebettete Formel ist (keine in einer Textzeile eingebettete Formel). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ersetzen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dokumentsegmente, die im +\family sans +Suchen +\family default + Feld eingegeben wurden, können mit Segmenten ersetzt werden, die im +\family sans +Ersetzen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +durch +\family default +\noun on + +\noun default +Feld eingegeben werden. + Um das nächste Auftreten zu finden und dieses zu ersetzen, drückt man den + Knopf +\family sans +Ersetzen +\family default + oder drückt alternativ +\family sans +Enter +\family default + oder +\family sans +Umschalt+Enter +\family default + während der Cursor sich im Feld +\family sans +Ersetzen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +durch +\family default +\noun on + +\noun default +befindet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann mit formatierten Segmenten ersetzen. + Typische Szenarios in denen das nützlich ist (nur um einige zu nennen), + sind: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +das Ersetzen mit einer formatierten Version des selben Wortes, z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + Ersetzen des Namens +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +func() +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + mit seiner Version im Stil Schreibmaschine +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +func() +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Änderung der mathematischen Notation, z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + um alle Vorkommen von +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $R$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + mit +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + zu ersetzen (dabei hilft es eventuell, die Optionen +\family sans +Ganze Wörter +\family default + und +\family sans +Groß-/Kleinschreibung beachten +\family default + zu verwenden und die Option +\family sans +Ignoriere Format +\family default + im Tab +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default + zu deaktivieren, um zu verhindern, dass alle +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +R +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + im normalen Text ersetzt werden), oder +\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ +\end_inset + + mit +\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$ +\end_inset + + zu ersetzen oder +\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ +\end_inset + + mit +\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Benutzung mit regulären Ausdrücken +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt einen Regulärer Ausdruck (Regexp)-basierten Suchmodus. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Der Wikipedia-Artikel +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regulärer_Ausdruck" + +\end_inset + + ist eine gute Erklärung was ein Regulärer Ausdruck ist. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Man kann nach Regulären Ausdrücken suchen, indem man eine Regexp-Einfügung + in den +\family sans +Suchen +\family default +-Editor einfügt. + Dies geschieht über das Menü +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Regulären Ausdruck einfügen +\family default + während sich der Cursor im +\family sans +Suchen +\family default +-Editor befindet. + Zeichen in Regexp-Einfügungen werden entsprechend der Regeln für reguläre + Ausdrücke gefunden +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mit der Bedingung, dass jeder (Unter)Ausdruck ein korrekt formatiertes LyX-Segme +nt sein muss. + Das heißt, dass z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + TeX-Code keine ungeschlossenen {}-Klammern haben darf. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + während Text außerhalb der Einfügungen nur Treffer liefert, die exakt diesem + Text entsprechen. + Das Kopieren und Ersetzen funktioniert wie gewohnt auch in Regexp-Einfügungen. + Anwendungen von Suchen mit regulären Ausdrücken sind zum Beispiel: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Suche in allen Brüchen nach einem bestimmten Nenner: zum Beispiel findet + man mit dem Bruch +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + + ( +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + ist der reguläre Ausdruck für einen Platzhalter), im Feld +\family sans +Suchen +\family default + alle Brüche mit diesem Nenner. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Suche nach Text in einem bestimmten Stil: ist die Option +\family sans +Ignoriere Format +\family default + im Reiter +\family sans +Einstellungen +\family default + ausgeschaltet, kann man den regulären Ausdruck +\series bold + +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + +\series default + eingeben und für ihn zum Beispiel den Textstil kursiv oder fett wählen + um alle kursiven oder fettgedruckten Textstellen im Dokument zu finden. + Der reguläre Ausdruck +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + in einer nummerierten Liste oder einer Abschnittsüberschrift findet alle + nummerierten Listen oder Abschnittsüberschriften. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Allgemein können Referenzen auf (Unter)Ausdrücke in Regexp wie üblich verwendet + werden: Gruppieren eines Teils des Ausdrucks mit runden Klammern +\begin_inset Formula $()$ +\end_inset + + und dessen Referenzierung mit +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ +\end_inset + +, usw.. + Versuchen Sie zum Beispiel mit dem regulären Ausdruck +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +[[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]] +\backslash +1[[:space:]] +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +zu suchen, um Wortwiederholungen zu finden, falls es welche gibt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Verwendung von Referenzen im ersetzten Text ist (noch) nicht implementiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +\color none +Achtung: +\series default + Referenzen funktionieren innerhalb einer Regexp als auch in mehreren Regexps, + wobei die Nummerierung der referenzierten Unterausdrücke absolut ist. + Das heißt, dass +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + + immer das erste Auftreten von () in allen eingefügten Regexps referenziert. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Rechtschreibprüfung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Rechtschreibprufung@Rechtschreibprüfung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Rechtschreibprüfung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX besitzt eine eigene Rechtschreibprüfung. + man kann Sie mit dem Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rechtschreibprüfung +\family default +, der Taste +\family sans +F7 +\family default + oder dem Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show spellchecker" +\end_inset + + starten. + Die Prüfung beginnt entweder an der aktuellen Cursorposition oder dem Beginn + des momentan markierten Textabschnitts. + Eine Seitenleiste erscheint und zeigt jedes falsche (oder unbekannte) gefundene + Wort an und erlaubt es diese zu korrigieren. + Wenn ein unbekanntes Wort gefunden wird, wird das Wort markiert und der + Text gescrollt damit das Wort zu sehen ist. + In der Rechtschreibprüfungs-Seitenleiste, gibt es ein Feld mit Vorschlägen + für die Korrektur. + Klickt man auf einen Vorschlag, wird er ins +\family sans +Ersetzung +\family default +s-Feld kopiert., ein Doppelklick ersetzt das Wort sofort. + Unbekannte, aber richtig geschriebene Wörter können zum persönlichen Wörterbuch + hinzugefügt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die standardmäßig verwendete Wörterbuchdatei ist die der Dokumentsprache, + die im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + eingestellt ist. + Die Sprache eines Wortes kann in der Rechtschreibprüfungs-Seitenleiste + ausgewählt werden, indem man in der Dropdown-Box eine andere Sprache auswählt + LyX kann auch Dokumente, die Text in mehreren Sprachen enthalten, korrekt + prüfen. + Dies funktioniert, wenn man die verschiedenen Sprachen entsprechend markiert + und die Rechtschreibprüfungs-Wörterbücher installiert hat. + LyX wechselt dann automatisch die Wörterbuchdateien. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alle von LyX unterstützten Wörterbucher können von hier heruntergeladen + werden: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Es gibt 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Dateien für jede Sprache. + Um ein Wörterbuch zu installieren, kopiert man beide Dateien in LyXs Installati +onsunterordner +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +dicts +\family default + und startet LyX neu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Weitere Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In LyXs Einstellungen Dialog unter +\family sans +Spracheinstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rechtschreibprüfung +\family default + kann man die folgenden Dinge einstellen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Programm Legt das Programm fest, das LyX für die Rechtschreibprüfung verwenden + soll. + Abhängig vom Betriebssystem, sind +\family typewriter +aspell +\family default +, +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default + oder +\family typewriter +enchant +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Enchant selbst ist eine Hüllbibliothek mit verschiedenen konfigurierbaren + Programmen. + Lesen Sie dessen Dokumentation um mehr zu erfahren. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + verfügbar. + Bei Windows ist nur +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default + verfügbar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Alternative +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Sprache Wenn dieses Feld nicht leer ist, wird LyX immer die im Feld angegebene + Sprache für die Rechtschreibprüfung verwenden, egal wie die Dokumentsprache + ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Zu +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ignorierende +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Zeichen Erlaubt es spezielle Zeichen anzugeben, die die Rechtschreibprüfung + ignorieren soll, z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + französischen Akzente. + Dieses Feature sollte aber normalerweise nicht benötigt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Zusammengesetzte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Wörter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +akzeptieren Verhindert, dass zusammengesetzte Wörter wie +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Verzeichnisname +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + moniert werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Rechtschreibung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +während +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Eingabe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +überprüfen Prüft die Rechtschreibung schon während der Eingabe. + Falsch geschriebene Wörter werden rot gestrichelt unterstrichen. + Beim Rechts-klicken auf ein unterstrichenes Wort, erscheinen die Vorschläge + der Rechtschreibprüfung im Kontext-Menü. + Wählt man einen Vorschlag aus, ersetzt er das unterstrichene Wort. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Prüfe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Notizen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +und +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Kommentare Wenn aktiviert, werden auch die nicht zu druckenden Dokumentteile + wie Notizen mit geprüft. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Thesaurus +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Thesaurus" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Thesaurus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX bietet einen mehrsprachigen Thesaurus. + Es verwendet denselben Thesaurus wie LibreOffice, OpenOffice und Firefox + (namentlich die +\family typewriter +MyThes +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Thesaurus-Bibliothek, die in LyX enthalten ist). + Daher kann LyX direkt auf OpenOffice Thesaurus Wörterbücher zugreifen, + die für viele Sprachen verfügbar sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt wie neue Wörterbücher installiert und für LyX + bereitgestellt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einrichten des Thesaurus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family typewriter +MyThes +\family default +\emph on +/ +\emph default +OpenOffice Thesauri bestehen aus zwei Dateien pro Sprache: Eine Datei mit + der Endung +\emph on +*.dat +\emph default +, die die Daten enthält und eine Index-Datei mit der Endung +\emph on +*.idx +\emph default +. + Der Standardisierte Dateinamen enthält den Code der Sprache (z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + +\family sans +de_DE +\family default + für Deutsch). + So heißen die Dateien für Deutsch: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_de_DE_v2.idx +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_de_DE_v2.dat +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie LibreOffice oder OpenOffice verwenden uns dessen Thesaurus auf + einem Linux-System installiert haben, sollten sich diese Dateien bereits + auf Ihrem System befinden. + Bei Windows kann man im LyX-Installer auswählen, welche Wörterbucher installier +t werden sollen.. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alle von LyX unterstützten Wörterbucher können von hier heruntergeladen + werden: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Um ein Wörterbuch zu installieren, kopiert man beide Dateien in LyXs Installatio +nsunterordner +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +thes +\family default + und startet LyX neu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Verwendung des Thesaurus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um den Thesaurus zu starten, verwendet man das Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Thesaurus +\family default + oder den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "thesaurus-entry" +\end_inset + + während ein Wort markiert ist oder während sich der Cursor in einem Wort + befindet. + Es öffnet sich ein Dialog und zeigt Wörter als Ersetzungsvorschläge an, + die wahrscheinlich dasselbe wie das aktuelle Wort bedeuten. + Die Vorschläge sind in Kategorien gruppiert. + Für manche Sprachen (beispielsweise Englisch) zeigt der Thesaurus nicht + nur bedeutungsähnliche Wörter (Synonyme) an, sondern auch Oberbegriffe + (wie +\emph on +organism +\emph default + für +\emph on +plant +\emph default +), sachverwandte Wörter (wie +\emph on +polical +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +theory +\emph default + für +\emph on +anarchistic +\emph default +), Zusammengesetze Wörter (wie +\emph on +tree +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +diagram +\emph default +, wenn Sie +\emph on +tree +\emph default + eingeben) und Gegenbegriffe (Antonyme) (wie +\emph on +boy +\emph default + für +\emph on +girl +\emph default +). + Das deutsche Thesauruswörterbuch zeigt momentan allerdings nur bedeutungsähnlic +he und bedeutungsverwandte Wörter an. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Sprachen wird automatisch von dem Wort übernommen, indem sich der Cursor + befindet, aber man kann sie auch im Dialog umstellen, genauso wie man dort + das Wort ändern kann. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man beachte dass der Thesaurus kann keine Phrasen handhaben kann (nur Zusammense +tzungen, die im Wörterbuch stehen, so wie das obige +\emph on + Baumdiagramm +\emph default +) und dass man die sogenannte Lemmaform verwenden muss; die Form, die auch + in Wörterbüchern verwendet wird (für die meisten Sprachen ist das: erste + Person Einzahl für Substantive, Infinitiv für Verben). + Schlägt man zum Beispiel für die Worte +\emph on +Berichte +\emph default + oder +\emph on +berichtend +\emph default + nach, bekommt man keine Vorschläge, während es mehrere für +\emph on +Bericht +\emph default + gibt. + Die beste Vorgehensweise ist es nur die relevanten Teile von Worten zu + markieren (z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + +\emph on +Bericht +\emph default + in +\emph on +Berichte +\emph default +). + Dann bekommt man sofort Vorschläge ohne das Wort im Dialog erst anpassen + zu müssen und auch der Ersetzung wird dann wahrscheinlich sofort korrekt + sein (nur der markierte Teil wird ersetzt). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Änderungsverfolgung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anderungsverfolgung@Änderungsverfolgung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Änderungsverfolgung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Änderungsverfolgung" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn mehrere Personen ein Dokument zusammen bearbeiten, ist es sehr nützlich, + wenn die Änderungen der anderen im Dokument hervorgehoben werden. + Sie können dann entscheiden, ob Sie eine Änderung akzeptieren wollen. + Das erreichen Sie, indem Sie +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +verfolgen +\family default + ( +\family sans +Strg+Umschalt+E +\family default +) ankreuzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Änderungen im Dokument werden durch Striche und Farben hervorgehoben: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\bar under +\color blue +Unterstrichener Text +\bar default +\color inherit +ist eine Einfügung, +\strikeout on +\color blue +durchgestrichener Text +\strikeout default + +\color inherit +eine Löschung. + Die Farbe hängt vom Autor der Änderung ab. + Die Farben können Sie in +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Aussehen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Handhabung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Farben +\family default + ändern. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Farbe ! Änderungsverfolgung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Der Autor und das Datum der Änderung werden in LyXs Statusleiste angezeigt, + wenn sich der Cursor in geändertem Text befindet. + Die selbe Information erhalten Sie, wenn Sie den Werkzeugleistenknopf +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + + benutzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn die Änderungsverfolgung aktiviert ist, erscheint diese Werkzeug\SpecialChar \- +leiste: +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Werkzeugleiste ! Änderungsverfolgung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png + scale 90 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Diese Werkzeugleiste enthält folgende Knöpfe: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-track" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +verfolgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-output" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +In +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Ausgabe +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +anzeigen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +springt zur nächsten Änderung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderung +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +akzeptieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderung +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +ablehnen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +zusammenfassen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Alle +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Änderungen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +akzeptieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Änderungsverfolgung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Alle +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Änderungen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +ablehnen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Notiz\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Notiz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nächste +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Notiz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es werden (noch) nicht alle Änderungen angezeigt, insbesondere keine Formatänder +ungen wie zum Beispiel +\emph on +normal +\emph default + nach +\emph on +fett +\emph default + oder +\emph on +Standardabsatz +\emph default + nach +\emph on +Beschreibung +\emph default +. + Das kann man jedoch anzeigen lassen, indem man den Textteil dupliziert, + das Original löscht und die Kopie ändert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Änderungsverfolgungs-Werkzeugleiste hilft Ihnen beim Bearbeiten der + Änderungen – Sie müssen nur die Änderungen auswählen und einen der Schaltknöpfe + anklicken. + Wenn Sie Änderungen zusammenfassen, erscheint ein Fenster, das Ihnen Informatio +nen über die nächste Änderung nach der momentanen Cursorposition anzeigt. + Sie brauchen dann keine bestimmte Änderung zu markieren. + In dem Fenster können Sie entscheiden, Änderungen zu akzeptieren oder abzulehne +n, und dann zur nächsten Änderung zu gehen. + So können Sie alle Änderungen durchgehen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Werkzeugleiste hat zwei Schaltknöpfe, um Notizen zu behandeln, weil + diese zur Beschreibung einer Änderung oft wichtig sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um Änderungen in der Druckausgabe anzeigen zu können, benötigen Sie das + LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +dvipost +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! dvipost +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Sie finden es im TeX-Katalog, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeX-Katalog" + +\end_inset + +, oder im Paket-Manager Ihres LaTeX-Systems. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Vergleich von Dokumenten +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Vergleich von Dokumenten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können zwei verschiedene LyX-Dokumente über das Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Vergleichen +\family default + miteinander vergleichen. + Das Ergebnis des Vergleichs ist eine LyX-Datei mit eingeschalteter Änderungsver +folgung um die Unterschiede anzuzeigen. + Im Vergleichen-Dialog können Sie mit der Option +\family sans +Kopiere +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Dokument-Einstellungen +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +von +\family default + festlegen, von welcher Datei LyX die Dokumenteinstellungen für die Ergebnisdate +i verwenden soll. + Die Option +\family sans +Änderungsverfolgung +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +in +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Ausgabe +\family default + verwendet die Änderungsverfolgungsoption +\family sans +In +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Ausgabe +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +anzeigen +\family default + um die Unterschiede auch in der PDF-Ausgabe der Ergebnisdatei zu visualisieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Internationale Unterstützung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Internationale Unterstutzung@Unterstützung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt, wie Sie LyX mit jeder gewünschten Sprache benutzen + können. + Für einige Sprachen gibt es spezielle Wiki-Seiten, die erklären, wie man + sie verwendet: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Neben Sprachen unterstützt LyX auch phonetische Symbole, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Sonderzeichen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Sprachoptionen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sprachoptionen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Sprachoptionen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Dialog +\family sans +Do\SpecialChar \- +ku\SpecialChar \- +ment-Ein\SpecialChar \- +stel\SpecialChar \- +lungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Sprache +\family default + können Sie die Sprache, den Stil der Anführungszeichen und die Zeichenkodierung + festlegen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Unter +\family sans +Kodierung +\family default + können Sie die Zeichenkodierung auswählen, die für die Ausgabe verwendet + werden soll. + Die Option +\family sans +Voreinstellung der gewählten Sprache +\family default + ist empfohlen und funktioniert für die meisten Fälle. + Für Details über die verschiedenen Kodierungsoptionen siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Sprache" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tastaturtabellen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tastatur ! -tabellen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Tastaturtabellen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie zum Beispiel eine U. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +S.-Tastatur haben, aber nicht in Englisch schreiben wollen, können Sie eine + alternative Tastaturtabelle benutzen. + Z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + wollen Sie Italienisch schreiben. + Dann können Sie LyX mit einer italienischen Tastaturtabelle verwenden. + Der Dialog +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Aussehen & Handhabung\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tastatur/Maus +\family default + erlaubt es bis zu zwei Tastaturtabellen zu laden, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tastatur-/-Maus" + +\end_inset + +. + Sie können eine primäre und sekundäre Tastatursprache wählen und dann entscheid +en, welche Sie verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vielleicht wollen Sie aber auch nur ein paar Tastenzuordnungen ändern oder + eine komplett neue Tastaturtabelle erstellen (für Vulkanisch zum Beispiel). + Sie Schreiben z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + normalerweise Italienisch auf einer U. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +S.-Tastatur aber von Zeit zu Zeit auch deutsche Kurztexte. + Sie können in diesem Fall eine eigene Tastaturzuordnung erstellen oder + eine bestehende Tastaturtabelle ändern um spezielle Zeichen zu unterstützen.. + Diese und andere Anpassungen sind im Handbuch +\emph on +Anpassungen +\emph default + erläutert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +\start_of_appendix +Die Benutzeroberfläche +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:Die-Benutzeroberfläche" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieser Anhang listet alle verfügbaren Menüs auf und beschreibt ihre Funktionalit +ät. + Er ist als schnelle Referenz angelegt, wenn man nach einem bestimmten Thema + im Benutzerhandbuch sucht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Das Datei Menü +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menü ! Datei +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Menü +\family sans +Datei +\family default + finden sich alle Grundlegenden und einige fortgeschrittene Aktionen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Neu +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Erstellt ein neues Dokument. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Neu von Vorlage +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieser Menüeintrag fragt Sie nach einer Vorlage, die Sie verwenden wollen. + Das Auswählen einer Vorlage wird automatisch bestimmte Dokumenteinstellungen + setzen, die Sie sonst selbst vornehmen müssten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Öffnen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Öffnet ein Dokument. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Zuletzt geöffnet +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Untermenü zeigt eine Liste aller zuletzt geöffneten Dateien. + Beim Klicken auf eine Datei wird diese geöffnet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Schließen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Schließt das aktuelle Dokument. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Alle schließen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Schließt alle geöffneten Dokumente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Speichern +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Speichert das aktuelle Dokument. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Speichern unter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Speichert das aktuelle Dokument unter einem neuen Namen um eine Kopie zu + erstellen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Alle speichern +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Speichert alle geöffneten Dokumente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Zum Gespeicherten zurückkehren +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Lädt das aktuelle Dokument neu von der Festplatte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Versionskontrolle +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dies wird verwendet, wenn mehrere Personen am selben Dokument arbeiten oder + wenn eine Person ihre Änderungen archivieren möchte. + Es ist in Abschnitt +\emph on +Versionskontrolle +\emph default + der +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Importieren +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann hier Dateien von älteren LyX-Versionen, HTML-Dateien, LaTeX-Dateien, + NoWeb-Dateien, einfache Textdateien und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Komma-getrennte +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, tabellenartige Textdateien (CSV) importieren. + Die Dateien werden als neues LyX-Dokument importiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wird der Menüeintrag +\family sans +Einfacher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text +\family default + verwendet, führen Zeilenumbrüche im Text zu neuen Absätzen; mit dem Menüeintrag + +\family sans +Einfacher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text, Zeilen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +verbinden +\family default + werden aufeinanderfolgende Textzeilen als ein großer Absatz importiert. + Ein neuer Absatz wird bei einer leeren Zeile im Text angelegt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Exportieren +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub: Exportieren" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können Ihr Dokument in verschiedene Formate exportieren. + Die neuen Dateien werden im selben Ordner wie die LyX-Datei erstellt. + Die Menüeinträge sind nicht bei allen Installationen dieselben. + Sie hängen von den Programmen ab, die von LyX während der Konfiguration + gefunden wurden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist eine Liste aller verfügbaren Einträge; einige davon sind im Detail + in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ausgabe-Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + + erläutert: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +CJK +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX Format der speziellen LyX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.4.x Versionen für Chinesisch, Japanisch und Koreanisch (CJK) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + Seit LyX 1.5.0 ist die Unterstützung für CJK in LyX voll integriert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DocBook Textdatei mit Code in der Sprache SGML, die für die Auszeichnungssprache + +\family typewriter +DocBook +\family default + verwendet wird +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DocBook +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XML) Textdatei mit Code in der Sprache XML die für die Auszeichnungssprache + +\family typewriter +DocBook +\family default + verwendet wird +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DraftDVI LaTeXs natives DVI-Format. + Dieses Format ist nicht geeignet, wenn Sie Sonder- oder Leerzeichen für + Dateinamen oder -pfade im Dokument verwenden. + LyX verwendet dieses Format intern als Vorstufe beim Export nach +\family sans +DVI +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVI DVI-Format +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) DVI-Format unter Verwendung des Programms +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +; unterstützt Unicode und die Verwendung von nicht-TeX Schriften; +\series bold + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + nicht alle DVI-Betrachtungsprogramme sind in der Lage dieses Format korrekt + anzuzeigen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Graphviz +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Dot Textdatei mit Code in der Programmiersprache +\family typewriter +Dot +\family default +, die für grafische Visualisierungen über das Programm +\family typewriter +Graphviz +\family default + verwendet wird +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +HTML HTML-Format (Der HTML-Konverter ist kein Bestandteil von LyX und funktionie +rt eventuell nicht in allen Fällen.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +HTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(MS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Word) spezielles HTML-Format so dass der Ergebnis nach +\family sans +MS Word +\family default + importiert werden kann; als Konsequenz davon werden Formeln als Bitmap-Schrift + eingebettet und nicht im Format +\family sans +MathML +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode, der mit dem Programm +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + kompilierbar ist +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode. + Zusätzlich werden alle Bilder des Dokuments in ein Format konvertiert, + dass vom Programm +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default + gelesen werden kann (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(normal) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode. + Zusätzlich werden alle Bilder des Dokuments in das EPS-Format konvertiert. + Nur dieses Format ist vom Programm +\family typewriter +latex +\family default + lesbar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode, der mit dem Programm +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default + kompilierbar ist +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LilyPond +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +book +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(La +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +TeX) Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode und außerdem Code in der Syntax der + Musik-Notationssoftware +\family typewriter + LilyPond +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX-Archiv +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(zip|tar.gz) erstellt eine zip- oder-tar.gz-Archiv-Datei (abhängig von Ihrem + System) die Ihr Dokument und alle Dateien, die notwendig sind, um es zu + kompilieren, enthält (Bilder, Unterdokumente, BibTeX-Dateien, usw.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +z.y.x LyX-Dokument in einem Format, das von der LyX-Version z.y.x lesbar ist. + ( +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +z +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +y +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + repräsentieren die Versionsnummer) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yXHTML HTML-Format, unter Verwendung von LyXs internem XHTML-Konverter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +NoWeb Textdatei mit Code im Format der Programmiersprache +\family typewriter +NoWeb +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatierte Datei, um sie mit +\family sans +LibreOffice, OpenOffice +\family default +, +\family sans +KOffice +\family default +, +\family sans +Abiword +\family default +, usw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +zu öffnen. + (Der OpenDocument-Konverter ist kein Bestandteil von LyX und funktioniert + eventuell nicht in allen Fällen.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default +, erzeugt intern eine DVI-Datei, die in eine PDF-Datei konvertiert wird +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +, erzeugt PDF-Dateien direkt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +, erzeugt PDF-Dateien direkt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default +, erzeugt intern eine PostScript-Datei, die in eine PDF-Datei konvertiert + wird +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) PDF-Format unter Verwendung des Programms +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +, erzeugt PDF-Dateien direkt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Einfacher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text Textformat +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Einfacher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii) Textformat, das Dokument wird zuerst ins PostScript Format konvertier +t und dann als Text exportiert unter Verwendung des Programms +\family sans +ps2ascii +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Postscript PostScript Format unter Verwendung des Programms +\family typewriter +dvips +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sweave Textdatei mit dem LaTeX-Quellcode und zusätzlich Code in der statistische +n Programmiersprache +\family typewriter +R +\family default +. + Unter Verwendung der +\family typewriter +R +\family default +-Funktion +\family typewriter +Sweave +\family default + ist es möglich +\family typewriter +R +\family default +-Befehle in LaTeX zu benutzen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Falls einer der Menüeinträge +\family sans +DVI +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + oder +\family sans +Postscript +\family default + fehlt, müssen Sie ihre LaTeX-Installation aktualisieren. + Anschließend müssen Sie LyX neu konfigurieren, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "LyX-Grundeinstellungen" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Neukonfiguration von LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Drucken +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit diesem Menü können Sie Ihr Dokument entweder in eine Datei im PostScript-For +mat drucken, oder sie an einen Drucker schicken. + Der Drucker wird das Dokument ebenfalls im PostScript-Format erhalten. + Die Konvertierung nach PostScript wird von LyX im Hintergrund mit dem Programm + +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + durchgeführt. + Für weitere Informationen siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Datei-ausdrucken" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fax +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü erscheint nur, wenn ein Faxprogramm installiert ist (bei Windows + muss zusätzlich dessen Programmpfad zu LyXs PATH-Präfix hinzugefügt werden, + siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Pfade" + +\end_inset + +). + Über dieses Menü können Sie Ihr Dokument an ein Faxprogramm wie +\family typewriter +hylapex +\family default + oder +\family typewriter +kdeprintfax +\family default + senden. + Das voreingestellte Format der gesendeten Datei ist PostScript. + Das Format kann in LyXs Grundeinstellungen, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Konverter" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben, geändert werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Neues Fenster und Fenster schließen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Öffnet oder schließt eine neue Instanz von LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Beenden +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fordert Sie auf alle ungespeicherten Dokumente zu schließen und beendet + LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Das Bearbeiten Menü +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menü ! Bearbeiten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Rückgängig und Wiederholen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beschrieben in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rückgängig-Wiederholen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ausschneiden, Kopieren, Einfügen, Einfügen (vorherige Auswahl), Einfügen + (speziell) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beschrieben in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Einfache-Bearbeitungsfunktionen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Komplette Einfügung auswählen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wählt den Inhalt der Einfügung aus, in der sich der Cursor befindet. + Ist der Cursor außerhalb einer Einfügung, wird das gesamte Dokument ausgewählt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Alles auswählen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wählt das komplette Dokument aus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Suchen & Ersetzen (einfach) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beschrieben in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Einfache-Bearbeitungsfunktionen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Suchen & Ersetzen (erweitert) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beschrieben in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Fortgeschrittenes-Suchen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Absatz nach oben/unten verschieben +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Schiebt den Absatz, in dem sich der Cursor befindet, einen Absatz nach oben + oder unten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Textstil +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beschrieben in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Textstil-Dialog" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Absatz-Einstellungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Absatz ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Damit kann man die Ausrichtung von Absätzen, den Zeilenabstand und die Breite + von Listenmarken einstellen. + Diese Einstellungen beeinflussen nur den Absatz, indem sich der Cursor + gerade befindet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann des Weiteren verhindern, dass die erste Zeile des Absatzes eingerückt + wird, wenn man im Dialog +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + unter +\family sans +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default + Absätze durch Einrückung getrennt hat. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tabellen-Einstellungen und Mathe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Diese zwei Menüs sind nur voll aktiv, wenn sich der Cursor in einer Tabelle + oder Formel befindet. + Hier kann man die Eigenschaften von Tabellen und Formeln ändern. + Die Eigenschaften von Tabellen sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tabellen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben, die von Formeln in Kapitel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Mathematische-Formeln" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Listentiefe erhöhen / verringern +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Diese Menüs sind nur aktiv, wenn sich der Cursor in einer Umgebung befindet, + die geschachtelt werden können. + Sie erhöhen/verringern die Schachtelungstiefe der Umgebung wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Umgebungen-schachteln" + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Nummerierung-aendern" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Das Ansicht Menü +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menü ! Ansicht +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Am unteren Ende des +\family sans +Ansicht +\family default + Menüs sind die geöffneten Dokumente aufgelistet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Alle Einfügungen öffnen/schließen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Schließt/öffnet alle Einfügungen des Dokuments. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mathe-Makro auf/zuklappen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Klappt Mathe-Makros auf/zu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mathe-Makros sind im +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default + Handbuch beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Quelle ansehen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Öffnet ein Fenster, das den Quelltext des aktuellen Dokuments zeigt, wie + in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dokumentteile-vorschauen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Meldungen anzeigen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Öffnet ein Fenster mit Konsolenmeldungen. + Dies ist nützlich um LyX zu debuggen (d. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +h. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nach Fehlern im Programm zu suchen) oder um zu sehen, was im Hintergrund + vor sich geht, während LaTeX das Dokument prozessiert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ansehen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü erzeugt die Ausgabe im dem Format, das als Voreinstellung entweder + in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + +) oder in den Dokumenteinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" + +\end_inset + +) gesetzt ist und öffnet es in einem geeigneten Betrachtungsprogramm. + Das Betrachtungsprogramm kann in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen festgelegt + oder geändert werden, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + +. + Die voreingestellten Betrachtungsprogramme wurden von LyX gesetzt, als + es zum ersten Mal konfiguriert wurde. + Das Standard-Ausgabeformat ist +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Andere Formate ansehen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit diesem Untermenü können Sie Ihr Dokument in einem alternativen Ausgabeformat + ansehen. + Das Menü enthält eine Liste mit allen verfügbaren Formaten, in denen man + das aktuelle Dokument mit einem externen Programm ansehen kann. + Die Menüeinträge sind nicht bei allen Installationen die selben — sie hängen + von den LaTeX-Programmen ab, die gefunden wurden, als LyX konfiguriert + wurde. + Alle möglichen Formate sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub: Exportieren" + +\end_inset + + aufgelistet. + Sie sollten mindestens den Menüeintrag +\family sans +DVI +\family default + sehen. + Falls er fehlt, müssen Sie Ihre LaTeX-Installation aktualisieren oder repariere +n. + Nach der Aktualisierung muss LyX neu konfiguriert werden, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "LyX-Grundeinstellungen" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Neukonfiguration von LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Ausführen eines Menüeintrags öffnet ein Betrachtungsprogramm. + Dieses kann in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen festgelegt oder geändert werden, + siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + +. + Die voreingestellten Betrachtungsprogramme wurden von LyX gesetzt, als + es zum ersten Mal konfiguriert wurde. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Aktualisieren +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü erlaubt es, die Ansicht mit Ihren letzten Änderungen zu aktualisiere +n (im voreingestellten Ausgabeformat), ohne ein neues Fenster im Betrachtungspro +gramm zu öffnen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Andere Formate aktualisieren +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit diesem Untermenü können Sie die Ansicht eines alternativen Ausgabeformats + aktualisieren, ohne ein neues Fenster im Betrachtungsprogramm zu öffnen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hauptdokument ansehen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü ist nur sichtbar wenn Ihr Dokument in ein anderes Dokument eingefügt + ist. + Das andere Dokument ist daher das Hauptdokument des aktuellen Dokuments + (Unterdokument) (siehe Abschnitt +\emph on +Unterdokumente +\emph default + im +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuch für mehr Informationen zu diesem Thema). + Mit diesem Menü kann man das Hauptdokument vom Unterdokument aus ansehen/öffnen. + Das bedeutet, dass wenn man an einem Unterdokument arbeitet, das z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + ein Kapitel eines Buches ist, erzeugt +\family sans +Hauptdokument ansehen +\family default + die Ausgabe des kompletten Buches während +\family sans +Ansehen +\family default + nur das Kapitel ausgibt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das von dieser Funktion verwendete Format ist das, das als Voreinstellung + entweder in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + +) oder in den Dokumenteinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" + +\end_inset + +) gesetzt ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hauptdokument aktualisieren +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü ist nur sichtbar wenn Ihr Dokument in ein anderes Dokument eingefügt + ist. + Das andere Dokument ist daher das Hauptdokument des aktuellen Dokuments + (Unterdokument) (siehe Abschnitt +\emph on +Unterdokumente +\emph default + im +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuch für mehr Informationen zu diesem Thema). + Dieses Menü erlaubt es, die Ansicht eines Hauptdokuments vom Unterdokument + aus zu aktualisieren, ohne zum Hauptdokument wechseln zu müssen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das von dieser Funktion verwendete Format ist das, das als Voreinstellung + entweder in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + +) oder in den Dokumenteinstellungen (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" + +\end_inset + +) gesetzt ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ansicht teilen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dies teilt LyXs Hauptfenster vertikal oder horizontal. + Dies erlaubt es, Dokumente gleichzeitig anzusehen um sie zu vergleichen + oder dasselbe Dokument an verschiedenen Stellen gleichzeitig zu betrachten. + Man kann das Hauptfenster sogar mehrfach teilen um z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + 3 oder mehr Dokumente gleichzeitig anzuschauen. + Um zu einer ungeteilten Ansicht zurückzukehren, verwendet man das Menü + +\family sans +Aktuelle Ansicht schließen +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Aktuelle Ansicht schließen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Schließt eine geteilte Ansicht. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Vollbild +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit diesem Menü oder durch Drücken von F11 wird die Menüleiste und alle + Werkzeugleisten ausgeblendet, so dass nur noch das Hauptfenster mit dem + Text des Dokuments als Vollbild zu sehen ist. + Um vom Vollbildmodus zurückzukehren, drückt man entweder wieder F11 oder + klickt mit rechts und schaltet den Vollbildmodus im Kontextmenü ab. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Werkzeugleisten +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Werkzeugleisten" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Werkzeugleiste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In diesem Menü kann das Erscheinungsbild der verschiedenen Werkzeugleisten + eingestellt werden. + Alle Werkzeugleisten und das +\family sans +Befehlseingabefenster +\family default + können an- und ausgeschaltet werden. + Der Zustand +\emph on +an +\emph default + ist im Menü mit einem Häkchen gekennzeichnet. + Die Werkzeugleisten +\family sans +Überarbeiten +\family default +, +\family sans +Tabelle +\family default +, +\family sans +Mathe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Kontrollflächen +\family default +, +\family sans +Mathe-Makros +\family default + und +\family sans +Mathe +\family default + können zusätzlich auf den Zustand +\emph on +automatisch +\emph default + gesetzt werden, der im Menü mit dem Suffix +\family sans +(automatisch) +\family default + gekennzeichnet ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Zustand +\emph on +an +\emph default + wird die Werkzeugleiste permanent angezeigt, im Zustand +\emph on +automatisch +\emph default + wird die Werkzeugleiste nur angezeigt, wenn sich der Cursor sich in einer + bestimmten Einfügung befindet, oder ein bestimmtes Feature aktiviert ist. + Das heißt, dass die Werkzeugleiste +\family sans +Überarbeiten +\family default + nur angezeigt wird, wenn Änderungsverfolgung aktiviert ist, die Mathe und + Tabellen Werkzeugleisten werden nur angezeigt, wenn der Cursor in einer + Formel bzw. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Tabelle ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXs Werkzeugleisten und ihre Knöpfe sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Werkzeugleisten" + +\end_inset + + erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Das Einfügen Menü +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menü ! Einfügen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mathe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt mathematische Konstrukte ein, die in Kapitel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Mathematische-Formeln" + +\end_inset + + und im +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default + Handbuch beschrieben sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Sonderzeichen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Sonderzeichen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier können die folgenden Zeichen eingefügt werden: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Symbole Fügt jedes Zeichen ein, das von Ihrem LaTeX-System ausgegeben werden + kann. + Daher ist die Anzahl der Kategorien von Zeichen im Dialog und die Anzahl + an verfügbaren Zeichen von den LaTeX-Paketen abhängig, die in Ihrem LaTeX-Syste +m installiert sind. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bemerkung: +\series default + Nicht alle Zeichen sind im Dialog +\family sans +Symbols +\family default + sichtbar, denn keine der Schriftarten, die man in den LyX-Grundeinstellungen + als Bildschirmschrift setzen kann (siehe Abschnitt. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bildschirmschriften" + +\end_inset + +), kann alle Zeichen darstellen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fortsetzungspunkte Fügt Fortsetzungspunkte ein: \SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Satzendepunkt Fügt einen Satzendepunkt ein, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Abkürzungen-und-Satzendepunkt" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Nicht-typographisches +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Anführungszeichen Fügt dieses Anführungszeichen ein: ", unabhängig vom Anführung +szeichen-Stil der im Dialog +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + unter +\family sans +Sprache +\family default + eingestellt ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Einfaches +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Anführungszeichen Fügt ein einfaches Anführungszeichen im Anführungszeichenstil + ein, der im Dialog +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + unter +\family sans +Sprache +\family default + eingestellt ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Geschützter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Trennstrich Fügt einen Trennstrich ein, der vor Zeilenumbrüchen geschützt + ist: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash- + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Umbruchfähiger +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Schrägstrich Fügt einen Schrägstrich ein, an dessen Stelle ein Zeilenumbruch + möglich ist: \SpecialChar \slash{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Menütrenner Fügt das Menütrenner-Zeichen ein: \SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Phonetische +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Symbole +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Phonetische +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Symbole +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sprache ! Phonetische +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Symbole +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Erstellt eine Einfügung, in die man Symbole des Internationalen Phonetischen + Alphabets (IPA) eingeben kann, und öffnet eine Symbolleiste, die einen + Großteil dieser Symbole bereitstellt. + Um dieses Feature mit traditionellem LaTeX nutzen zu können, muss das LaTeX-Pak +et +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + installiert sein. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Weitere Informationen über dieses Feature bietet das Linguistik-Handbuch + unter +\family sans +Hilfe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Spezielle Handbücher +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formatierung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier können die folgenden Konstrukte eingefügt werden: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hochgestellt Fügt hochgestellten Text ein: Test +\begin_inset script superscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +a, b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Tiefgestellt Fügt tiefgestellten Text ein: Test +\begin_inset script subscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3x +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Geschütztes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Leerzeichen Fügt ein geschütztes Leerzeichen ein, das in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Geschütztes-Leerzeichen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Normales +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Leerzeichen Fügt ein normales Leerzeichen ein, das in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Normales-Leerzeichen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Halbes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Leerzeichen Fügt ein halbes Leerzeichen ein, das in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Halbes-Leerzeichen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Horizontaler +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Abstand Fügt horizontalen Abstand ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Horizontaler-Leerraum" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Horizontale +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Linie Fügt eine horizontale Linie ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Horizontale-Linien" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Vertikaler +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Abstand Fügt vertikalen Abstand ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Vertikaler-Leerraum" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Phantom Fügt Phantom-Leerraum ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Phantom-Leerraum" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Trennmöglichkeit Fügt eine Trennmöglichkeit ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Silbentrennung" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ligaturtrenner Fügt einen Ligaturtrenner ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ligaturen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Normaler +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Zeilenumbruch Fügt einen normalen Zeilenumbruch ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Manueller-Zeilenumbruch" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Rechtsbündiger +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Zeilenumbruch Fügt einen rechtsbündigen Zeilenumbruch ein, der zusätzlich + die gebrochene Zeile bis zum Seitenrand streckt, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Manueller-Zeilenumbruch" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Neue +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Seite Fügt einen Seitenumbruch ein, der in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Manueller-Seitenumbruch" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Seitenumbruch Fügt einen Seitenumbruch ein, der zusätzlich den gebrochene + Text bis zum Seitenrand streckt, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Manueller-Seitenumbruch" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Seite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +leeren Leert eine Seite, wie es in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Leerender-Seitenumbruch" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Doppelseite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +leeren Leert eine Doppelseite, wie es in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Leerender-Seitenumbruch" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Liste / Inhaltsverzeichnis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Über dieses Menü können verschiedene Listen und Verzeichnisse eingefügt + werden. + Das Inhaltsverzeichnis, die Liste der Algorithmen, Abbildungen und Tabellen + sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Inhaltsverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. + Das Stichwortverzeichnis ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Stichwortverzeichnisse" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben, die Nomenklatur in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nomenklatur/Glossar" + +\end_inset + + und das BibTeX-Literaturverzeichnis in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Gleitobjekt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Gleitobjekte sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Gleitobjekte" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Notiz +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notizen sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Notizen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Zweig +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt einen Zweig ein, der in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Zweige" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Benutzerdefinierte Einfügungen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt dokumentklassen-spezifische Einfügungen ein. + Solche Einfügungen existieren nur, wenn sie in der Layout-Datei der Dokumentkla +sse definiert sind. + Ein Beispiel ist die Dokumentklasse +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +article (Elsevier) +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + mit drei benutzerdefinierten Einfügungen. + Der Abschnitt +\emph on +Flexible Einfügungen und InsetLayout +\emph default + des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs erklärt, wie benutzerdefinierte Einfügungen definiert werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Datei +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Externes Material +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü ermöglicht es, den Inhalt von anderen Dokumenten in Ihr Dokument + einzufügen. + Wie dies geschieht ist im Detail im Kapitel +\emph on +Externe Dateien +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Box +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Boxen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine Minipage-Box ein, die in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Minipage" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. + Alle von LyX unterstützten Boxtypen sind im Detail im Kapitel +\emph on +Boxen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs erläutert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Literaturverweis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt einen Literaturverweis ein, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + +beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Querverweis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt einen Querverweis ein, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Querverweise" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Marke +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine Marke ein, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Querverweise" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Legende +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Legende +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lange Tabellen ! Legende +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine Legende in ein Gleitobjekt oder eine lange Tabelle ein. + Gleitobjekte sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Gleitobjekte" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben, Legenden in langen Tabellen sind im Abschnitt +\emph on +Beschriftungen langer Tabellen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Stichwort +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt ein Stichwort ein, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Stichwortverzeichnisse" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nomenklatureintrag +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt einen Nomenklatureintrag ein , wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nomenklatur/Glossar" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tabelle +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine Tabelle ein. + Tabelle sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tabellen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Grafik +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine Grafik ein. + Grafiken sind Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Abbildungen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URL +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt einen URL ein, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:URLs" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hyperlink +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt einen Hyperlink ein, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Hyperlinks" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fußnote +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine Fußnote ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Fußnoten" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Randnotiz +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine Randnotiz ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Randnotizen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Kurztitel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt einen Kurztitel ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Kurztitel" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +TeX-Code +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine TeX-Code Box ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:TeX-Code" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Programmlisting +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Programmlisting +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine Programmlisting-Box ein. + Programmlistings sind im Kapitel +\emph on +Programm-Code-Listen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Datum +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt das aktuelle Datum ein. + Das Format hängt vom Datumsformat der Sprache ab, die aktuell für die Benutzero +berfläche von LyX verwendet wird. + LyX bietet mehrere Möglichkeiten ein Datum einzufügen, die im Abschnitt + +\emph on +Externes Material +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs erklärt und auch verglichen sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Vorschau +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Fügt eine Vorschau-Einfügung ein, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dokumentteile-vorschauen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Das Navigieren Menü +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menü ! Navigieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü listet die existierenden Kapitel, Abschnitte, Abbildungen, Tabellen, + usw. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des aktuellen Dokuments auf. + Dies ermöglicht eine einfache Navigation im Dokument. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Lesezeichen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit diesem Menü kann man eigenen Lesezeichen setzen. + Dies ist nützlich, wenn man an großen Dokumenten arbeitet und z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + oft zwischen Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 und 6.3 hin und her springen muss. + Um Lesezeichen für dieses Beispiel zu setzen, geht man zu Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 und verwendet das Untermenü +\family sans +Lesezeichen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +speichern +\family default +. + Anschließend geht man zu Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +6.3 und verwendet +\family sans +Lesezeichen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +speichern +\family default +. + Nun kann man leicht zwischen diesen Abschnitten hin und her springen, indem + man das Menü oder die Tastenkürzel +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "bookmark-goto 1" +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "bookmark-goto 2" +\end_inset + + benutzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann Lesezeichen auch verwenden, um zwischen verschiedenen geöffneten + Dokumenten hin und her zu springen. + Die gespeicherten Lesezeichen sind gültig, bis das Dokument geschlossen + wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nächste Notiz, Änderung, Querverweis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Springt zur nächsten Notiz, Änderung, oder Querverweis der der aktuellen + Cursorposition folgt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Gehe zur Marke +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nur aktiv, wenn sich der Cursor vor einem Querverweis befindet. + Es setzt den Cursor vor die referenzierte Marke. + (Ist dasselbe als wenn man mit rechts auf eine Querverweisbox klickt und + +\family sans +Gehe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +zur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Marke +\family default + verwendet.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Vorwärtssuche +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Feature erlaubt es, direkt an die entsprechende Stelle in der Ausgabe + zu springen, siehe Abschnitt +\emph on +Vorwärtssuche +\emph default + in den +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + für eine detaillierte Beschreibung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Das Dokument Menü +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menü ! Dokument +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Änderungsverfolgung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Änderungsverfolgung ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Änderungsverfolgung" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX-Protokoll +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nachdem LaTeX gestartet wurde, indem die Ausgabe des Dokuments erzeugt wurde + (durch Ansicht oder Export), ist dieses Menü verfügbar. + Es zeigt das Protokoll des verwendeten LaTeX-Programms an. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Darin kann man sehen, wie LaTeX im Hintergrund arbeitet. + +\emph on +Experten +\emph default + werden im Protokoll Gründe für LaTeX-Fehler finden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Gliederung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Öffnet das Gliederungs-Fenster, das in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Navigieren" + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Inhaltsverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Anhang hier beginnen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü beginnt den Anhang des Dokuments an der aktuellen Cursorposition, + wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Anhang" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Komprimiert +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +De/komprimiert das aktuelle Dokument. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Dokumenteinstellungen sind im Anhang +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Dokument-Einstellungen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Das Werkzeuge Menü +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menü ! Werkzeuge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Rechtschreibprüfung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Rechtschreibprüfung ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rechtschreibprüfung" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Thesaurus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Thesaurus ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Thesaurus" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Statistik +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Wörter zählen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zeichen zählen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Zählt die Wörter und Zeichen des aktuellen Dokuments oder des markierten + Dokumentteils. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +TeX-Informationen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +TeX-Informationen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Zeigt eine Liste der Dokumentklassen und Stile, die in Ihrem LaTeX-System + installiert sind. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Neu konfigurieren +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Neu konfigurieren|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Neukonfiguration von LyX +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Neukonfiguration von LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü konfiguriert LyX neu. + Das bedeutet, dass LyX nach LaTeX-Paketen und Programmen sucht, die es + benötigt; siehe auch Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "LyX-Grundeinstellungen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Einstellungen Dialog ist im Detail im Anhang +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:Der-Einstellungen-Dialog" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Das Hilfe Menü +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menü ! Hilfe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Menü listet die Dokumentationsdateien von LyX in der Sprache auf, + die aktuell für die LyX Menüs verwendet wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Menü +\family sans +LaTeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Konfiguration +\family default + öffnet ein LyX-Dokument mit Informationen über die LaTeX-Pakete und -Klassen + die von LyX gefunden wurden (siehe auch Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:LaTeX-Einstellung" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Werkzeugleisten +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Werkzeugleisten" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie man Werkzeugleisten anzeigt oder versteckt ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Werkzeugleisten" + +\end_inset + + erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es ist auch möglich, eigene Werkzeugleisten zu definieren. + Dies ist in den +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Standard-Werkzeugleiste +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Werkzeugleiste ! Standard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Standard-Werkzeugleiste enthält wie oben gezeigt von links nach rechts + die folgenden Knöpfe: +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +LTleft}{0pt} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dies ist notwendig, um die lange Tabelle links auszurichten. + Siehe das Handbuch +\emph on +Eingebettete Objekte +\emph default + für weitere Informationen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png + clip + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Auswahlbox für die Umgebungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace -10mm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align left +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-new" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Neu +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "file-open" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Öffnen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-write" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Speichern +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Drucken +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show spellchecker" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rechtschreibprüfung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "undo" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rückgängig +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "redo" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Wiederholen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "cut" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ausschneiden +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "copy" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Kopieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "paste" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einfügen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show findreplace" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suchen +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Ersetzen +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +(einfach) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suchen +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Ersetzen +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +(erweitert) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Lesezeichen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Gehe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +zurück +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Text hervorheben, Funktion des +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Textstil +\family default + Dialogs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Text als Eigenname setzen, Funktion des +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Textstil +\family default + Dialogs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "textstyle-apply" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatiert Text unter Benutzung der aktuellen Einstellungen des +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Textstil +\family default + Dialogs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-mode" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Grafik +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "tabular-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tabelle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle toc" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gliederung an/aus, +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Gliederung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "toolbar-toggle math" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mathe-Werkzeugleiste an/aus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "toolbar-toggle table" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tabellen-Werkzeugleiste an/aus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Extra-Werkzeugleiste +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Werkzeugleiste ! Extra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Extra-Werkzeugleiste enthält wie oben gezeigt von links nach rechts + die folgenden Knöpfe: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Standard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Enumerate" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Aufzählung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Itemize" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Auflistung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout List" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Description" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Beschreibung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listentiefe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +erhöhen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listentiefe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +verringern +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert figure" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Gleitobjekt\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Abbildung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert table" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Gleitobjekt\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tabelle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marke +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Querverweis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Literaturverweis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "index-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Stichwort +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "nomencl-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nomenklatureintrag +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "footnote-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fußnote +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "marginalnote-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Randnotiz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Notiz\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Notiz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "box-insert Frameless" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Box +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "href-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Hyperlink +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +T +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eX-Code +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mathe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Makro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset include" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Einfügen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Unterdokument +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Textstil\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Benutzerdefiniert +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Bearbeiten\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Absatz-Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "thesaurus-entry" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Thesaurus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ansicht / Aktualisieren-Werkzeugleiste +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Werkzeugleiste ! Ansicht / Aktualisieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Ansicht / Aktualisieren-Werkzeugleiste enthält wie oben gezeigt von + links nach rechts die folgenden Knöpfe: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ansehen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Aktualisieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Hauptdokument +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ansehen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Hauptdokument +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +aktualisieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ausgabe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mit +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ausgabe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +synchronisieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Andere +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formate +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ansehen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/update-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ansicht\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Andere +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formate +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +aktualisieren +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +* Diese Knöpfe können anders aussehen, wenn sie nicht das voreingestellte + Symboldesign verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Andere Werkzeugleisten +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Änderungsverfolgungs-Werkzeugleiste ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Änderungsverfolgung" + +\end_inset + + erläutert, die Tabellen-Werkzeugleiste +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Werkzeugleiste ! Tabelle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + im +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuch und die Mathe-Makro Werkzeugleiste +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Werkzeugleiste ! Makro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + im +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default + Handbuch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Die Dokument-Einstellungen +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:Dokument-Einstellungen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dokument ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Dokument-Einstellungsdialog enthält Untermenüs um die Eigenschaften + des kompletten Dokuments festzulegen. + Es wird über das Menü +\family sans + Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + aufgerufen. + Sie können Ihre Dokumenteinstellungen mit dem Knopf +\family sans +Als Dokument-Voreinstellung speichern +\family default + als Voreinstellung speichern. + Dies erzeugt eine Vorlage mit Namen +\family typewriter +defaults.lyx +\family default + die von LyX automatisch geladen wird, wenn Sie eine neue Datei erstellen + ohne eine Vorlage zu verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Knopf +\family sans +Klassen-Voreinstellungen verwenden +\family default + setzt die Dokumenteinstellungen auf die Vorgaben der verwendeten Dokumentklasse + zurück. + Dies betrifft hauptsächlich Klassenoptionen, das Seitenlayout und Nummerierung + & Inhaltsverzeichnis. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die verschiedenen Untermenüs des Dialogs sind im Folgenden erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Dokumentklasse +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier stellen Sie die Dokumentklasse, Klassenoptionen, den Grafiktreiber + und das Hauptdokument ein. + Dokumentklassen sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Dokumentklassen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Über den Knopf +\family sans +Lokales +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Format +\family default + können Sie eine eigene Layout-Datei laden, die sich nicht in LyXs +\emph on +layouts +\emph default + Ordner befindet und daher nicht als Layout einer Dokumentklasse von LyX + erkannt wurde. + Für Weiteres über Layout-Dateien, siehe das Kapitel +\emph on +Installieren neuer Textklassen, Layouts und Vorlagen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einige Klassen verwenden spezielle Klassenoptionen standardmäßig. + In diesem Fall sind diese im Feld +\family sans +Vordefiniert +\family default + aufgelistet und Sie können entscheiden, ob Sie sie verwenden wollen oder + nicht. + Wenn Sie nicht genau wissen, was die Klassenoptionen bedeuten, ist es empfohlen +, sie unverändert zu verwenden. + Der Grafiktreiber wird für LaTeXs Grafik-, Farb- und Seitenlayoutpakete + verwendet. + Wenn +\family sans +Standard +\family default + benutzt wird, wird der Standardtreiber für die LaTeX-Pakete verwendet. + Es wird empfohlen den Standard zu benutzen, es sei denn Sie wissen genau + was Sie tun +\family sans +. +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Wenn Sie einen der folgenden Treiber verwenden wollen: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +müssen Sie ihn zuerst in Ihrem LaTeX-System aktivieren, siehe Abschnitt + +\emph on +Driver support +\emph default + in +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein Hauptdokument festzulegen ist notwendig, wenn das aktuelle Dokument + ein Unterdokument ist. + Das Hauptdokument wird von LyX im Hintergrund benutzt, wenn das Unterdokument + ohne sein Hauptdokument geöffnet ist. + Auf diese Weise sind +\emph on +Unte +\emph default +rdokumente immer prozessierbar. + Mehr über Haupt- und Unterdokumente ist in Abschnitt +\emph on +Unterdokumente +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs zu finden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt zudem noch eine Option um die Ausgabe des Datums zu unterdrücken + und eine um das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + anstelle von +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + für Querverweise zu verwenden, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Querverweise" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Unterdokumente +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dieses Untermenü ist nur sichtbar, wenn das Dokument Unterdokumente enthält. + Siehe das Kapitel +\emph on +Unterdokumente +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs für mehr Informationen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Module +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Module sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Module" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Lokales Format +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Lokales-Format" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Schriften +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Schrift-und-Textstile" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Textformat +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann hier festlegen, ob Absätze durch Einrückungen oder Abstände getrennt + werden sollen. + Die Zeilenabstände und die Anzahl der Textspalten können ebenfalls hier + eingestellt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es ist zu beachten, dass LyX keine zwei Spalten oder die eingestellten Zeilenabs +tände darstellt. + Dies wäre unpraktisch, oft unlesbar und ist nicht Teil des WYSIWYM-Konzepts. + In der Ausgabe erscheint der Text natürlich wie eingestellt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Seitenlayout +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eine Beschreibung ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Seitengröße-und-Orientierung" + +\end_inset + + und +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Dokumentlayout" + +\end_inset + + zu finden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Seitenränder +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sub:Seitenränder" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Sprache +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Sprache" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier werden die Grundsprache des Dokuments und der Stil der Anführungszeichen + festgelegt, außerdem die Kodierung, in der das Dokument nach LaTeX exportiert + wird (das LyX-Dokument selbst ist immer in UTF8 kodiert). + LyX versucht, alle Zeichen, die in der ausgewählten Kodierung nicht enthalten + sind, in LaTeX-Befehle umzuwandeln; falls für ein bestimmtes Zeichen kein + LaTeX-Befehl bekannt ist, wird eine Fehlermeldung ausgegeben. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX schaut die Befehle in einer Textdatei ( +\emph on +unicodesymbols +\emph default +) nach, denen Sie leicht auch selbst fehlende Zeichen hinzufügen können, + wenn Sie den entsprechenden LaTeX-Befehl kennen. + Im Handbuch +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + ist dies genauer beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wird die Option +\family sans +Voreinstellung der Sprache +\family default + verwendet, wählt LyX die Standard-Kodierung für die Grundsprache und auch + für einzelne Textpassagen in anderen Sprachen. + Wenn Ihr Dokument also mehrsprachig ist, werden in diesem Fall gegebenenfalls + mehrere Kodierungen für das LaTeX-Dokument verwendet. + wenn Sie diese Option jedoch nicht wählen, wird die von Ihnen gewählte + Kodierung für alle Sprachen im Dokument verwendet, was zu Problemen führen + kann, wenn die gewählte Kodierung für eine der verwendeten Sprachen nicht + geeignet ist. + Die Option +\family sans +Voreinstellung der Sprache +\family default + wird deshalb empfohlen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX unterstützt auch Unicode-Ausgabe. + Dies kann dann sinnvoll sein, wenn Sie sehr viele Sonderzeichen benötigen + oder mit nicht-alphabetischen Schriften arbeiten. + Wenn Sie Unicode benötigen (und vorausgesetzt, Ihre LaTeX-Version unterstützt + ebenfalls Unicode, was in modernen Distributionen der Fall ist), wählen + Sie eine der unten aufgeführten UTF8-Varianten. + Leider ist die Unicode-Unterstützung im klassischen LaTeX beschränkt; es + kann also gut sein, dass Dokumente mit vielen Sonderzeichen mit der Option + +\family sans +Voreinstellung der Sprache +\family default + problemlos ausgegeben werden (da LyX die Zeichen in entsprechende Befehle + umwandelt), dass es aber eine UTF8-Kodierung Fehler produziert (da LyX + dort keine Zeichen in Befehle umwandelt, LaTeX aber nicht alle Zeichen + kennt). + Mit neueren TeX-Alternativen wir XeTeX und LuaTeX gibt es diese Probleme + in aller Regel nicht, denn sie wurden von Anfang an auf Unicode-Unterstützung + angelegt. + LyX unterstützt beide dieser TeX-Alternativen über die Ausgabeformate +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + und +\family sans +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTeX) +\family default +, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ausgabe-Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + +. + Sie können also auf diese zurückgreifen, wenn Sie mit vielen Sonderzeichen + oder Akzenten arbeiten und +\family sans +Voreinstellung der Sprache +\family default + nicht funktioniert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das +\family sans +Sprachpaket +\family default + legt das LaTeX-Paket fest, das für die Silbentrennung und Übersetzung von + Ausdrücken wie +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Teil +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + verwendet wird. + Die möglichen Einstellungen sind: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Standard verwendet das Sprachpaket, das in +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Spracheinstellungen +\family default + eingestellt ist, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Spracheinstellungen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Automatisch wählt ein passendes Sprachpaket für das Ansichts-/Exportformat + an, das Sie verwenden. + In den meisten Fällen wird das +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + sein. + Wenn das neuere Paket +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + besser geeignet ist (ist der Fall wenn XeTeX und/oder Nicht-T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX-Schriften benutzt werden), wird dies anstelle on +\series bold +babel +\series default + verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Immer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Babel verwendet +\series bold +babel +\series default +, auch wenn +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + besser geeignet wäre. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Benutzerdefiniert erlaubt es, einen Befehl für ein Sprachpaket ihrer Wahl + festzulegen. + Zum Beispiel, wenn Sie ein Sprach-spezifisches Paket wie +\series bold +ngerman +\series default + (für deutsche Texte) verwenden wollen, schreiben Sie +\series bold + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\backslash +usepackage{ngerman} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Keines verwendet kein Sprachpaket. + Dies ist für einige Dokumentklassen für wissenschaftliche Artikel notwendig. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist eine Liste mit den wichtigen Kodierungen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sprach-Voreinstellung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ohne +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +inputenc) Dasselbe wie +\family sans +Voreinstellung +\family default + +\family sans +der Sprache +\family default +, das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + wird jedoch nicht von LyX geladen. + Wenn Sie dies verwenden, müssen Sie wahrscheinlich zusätzliche Pakete im + LaTeX-Vorspann manuell laden und auch die Kodierung für fremdsprachige + Texte durch TeX-Code selbst angeben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ASCII die ASCII-Kodierung umfasst nur die im Standard-Englischen gebrauchten + Zeichen ab (7-bit ASCII). + LyX wandelt alle anderen Zeichen in LaTeX-Befehle um, was zu großen LaTeX-Datei +en führen kann, wenn Sie viele Nicht-ASCII-Zeichen verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Arabisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1256) MS Windows Zeichensatztabelle für Arabisch und Farsi. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Arabisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-6) für Arabisch und Farsi. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Armenisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ArmSCII8) für Armenisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Baltisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1257) MS Windows Zeichensatztabelle für Estnisch, Lettisch und Litauisch, + dasselbe wie die ISO-8859-13-Kodierung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Baltisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-13) für Estnisch, Lettisch und Litauisch, eine Obermenge der ISO-8859-4-Kod +ierung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Baltisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-4) (latin4) für Estnisch, Lettisch und Litauisch, eine Untermenge der + ISO-8859-13-Kodierung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chinesisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(vereinfacht) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-CN) für vereinfachtes Chinesisch, wird vor allem in UNIX-Betriebssystemen + verwendet. + Seit 2001 ist diese Kodierung obsolet und von der Kodierung GB-18030 abgelöst. + Da diese aber von LaTeX noch nicht unterstützt wird, sollten Sie Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chinesisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(vereinfacht) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(GBK) für vereinfachtes Chinesisch, entspricht der Windows-Zeichensatztabelle + CP-936, mit Ausnahme des Eurozeichens. + Seit 2001 ist diese Kodierung obsolet und von der Kodierung GB-18030 abgelöst. + Da diese aber von LaTeX noch nicht unterstützt wird, sollten Sie Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chinesisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(traditionell) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-TW) für traditionelles Chinesisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Griechisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-7) für Griechisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hebräisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1255) MS-Windows-Zeichensatztabelle für Hebräisch, eine Obermenge der ISO-8859-8 + Kodierung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hebräisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-8) für Hebräisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-JP) EUC-JP-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +CJK +\series default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Wählen Sie +\family sans +Japanisch (CJK) +\family default + als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(JIS) JIS-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +CJK +\series default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Wählen Sie +\family sans +Japanisch (CJK) +\family default + als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(nicht +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-JP) EUC-JP-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +japanese +\series default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Wählen Sie +\family sans +Japanisch +\family default +als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(nicht +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(JIS) JIS-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +japanese +\series default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Wählen Sie +\family sans +Japanisch +\family default +als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japanisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(nicht +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(SJIS) SJIS-Kodierung für Japanisch, verwendet das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +japanese +\series default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Wählen Sie +\family sans +Japanisch +\family default +als Grundsprache, wenn Sie diese Kodierung verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Koreanisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-KR) für Koreanisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kyrillisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1251) MS-Windows-Zeichensatztabelle für Kyrillisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kyrillisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-5) deckt Weißrussisch, Bulgarisch, Makedonisch, Serbisch und Ukrainisch + ab. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kyrillisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(KOI8-R) Standard-Kyrillisch speziell für Russisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kyrillisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(KOI8-U) Kyrillisch für Ukrainisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kyrillisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +154) Kyrillisch für Kasachisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Mitteleuropäisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1250) MS-Windows-Zeichensatztabelle für ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2 (latin2). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Mitteleuropäisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2) (latin2) deckt Albanisch, Tschechisch, Deutsch, Ungarisch, Kroatisch, + Polnisch, Rumänisch, Slowakisch und Slowenisch ab. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Südosteuropäisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-3) (latin3) deckt Esperanto, Galizisch, Maltesisch und Türkisch ab. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Südosteuropäisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-16) (latin10) deckt Albanisch, Finnisch, Französisch, Deutsch, Ungarisch, + Irisches Gälisch, Italienisch, Kroatisch, Polnisch, Rumänisch und Slowenisch + ab. + Die Kodierung wurde entwickelt, um möglichst viele Sprachen, die Zeichen + mit Diakritika verwenden, abzudecken. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Thailändisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(TIS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +620-0) für Thailändisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Türkisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-9) (latin5) für Türkisch, ähnlich der ISO-8859-1-Kodierung, allerdings + wurden die isländischen Zeichen durch türkische ersetzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) Unicode (utf8) mit dem LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (für die Sprachen Chinesisch, Japanisch und Koreanisch). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTeX) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) Unicode (utf8) für die TeX-Alternativen +\family sans +XeTeX +\family default + und +\family sans +LuaTeX +\family default +, die Unicode nativ unterstützen, das LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + also nicht benötigen. + LyX wählt diese Kodierung automatisch, wenn Sie nach XeTeX oder LuaTeX + exportieren. + Normalerweise müssen Sie diese Kodierung nicht manuell auswählen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ucs-erweitert) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8x) Unicode (utf8) basierend auf dem LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +ucs +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! ucs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (relativ umfassend, enthält lateinische, griechisch und kyrillische Alphabetzei +chen sowie Chinesische, Koreanische und Japanische Zeichen). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) Unicode (utf8) basierend auf dem LaTeX-Paket +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Unterstützt derzeit nur einen eingeschränkten Teilbereich des Unicode-Spektrums + (hauptsächlich lateinisch-alphabetische Zeichen). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Westeuropäisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1252) MS-Windows-Zeichensatztabelle für ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1 (latin1). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Westeuropäisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1) (latin1) deckt die Sprachen Albanisch, Dänisch, Deutsch, Englisch, + Faröisch, Finnisch, Französisch, Galizisch, Holländisch, Isländisch, Irisch, + Italienisch, Katalanisch, Norwegisch, Portugiesisch, Spanisch und Schwedisch + ab; enthält aber im Gegensatz zur ISO-8859-15-Kodierung kein Eurozeichen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Westeuropäisch +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-15) (latin9), weitgehend identisch zur ISO-8859-1-Kodierung, enthält + jedoch im Unterschied zu dieser das Eurozeichen, die œ-Ligatur und einige + französische und finnische Sonderzeichen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Schließlich können Sie in diesem Dialog auch ein spezifisches Sprachpaket + für das aktuelle Dokument auswählen. + In Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Spracheinstellungen" + +\end_inset + + finden Sie weitere Informationen zum Thema +\emph on +Sprachpaket +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Farben +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Farbe ! Hintergrund +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Farbe ! Haupttext- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier können Sie die Schriftfarbe für den Haupttext (Voreinstellung: schwarz) + und für Grauschrift-Notizen (Voreinstellung: hellgrau) ändern. + Der Kopf +\family sans +Zurücksetzen +\family default + setzt die Farbe zurück auf die Voreinstellung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können außerdem die Hintergrundfarbe für die Seiten (Voreinstellung: + weiß) und für Schattierte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Boxen (Voreinstellung: rot) ändern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Die Farben werden in LyX nicht angezeigt, nur in der Ausgabe. + (Diese Grauschrift-Notiz erscheint in der Ausgabe blau.) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Beachten Sie, dass wenn Sie die Farbe ändern und die Option +\family sans +Links +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +einfärben +\family default + in den Dokumenteinstellungen unter +\family sans +PDF-Eigenschaften +\family default + verwenden, müssen Sie wahrscheinlich auch die Schriftfarbe der Links ändern, + indem sie +\family sans +Zusätzliche +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Optionen +\family default + in den +\family sans +PDF-Eigenschaften +\family default + verwenden. + Zum Beispiel färbt die Option +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +den Linktext schwarz. + Für weitere Informationen, siehe das Handbuch des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können die Schriftfarbe des Haupttextes und die Seiten-Hintergrundfarbe + für jede Seite ihres Dokuments anpassen, indem Sie diese Befehle als TeX-Code + nach einem manuellen Seitenumbruch einfügen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Für die Seitenfarbe: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +pagecolor{Farbname} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Für die Textfarbe: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +color{Farbname} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Farbname kann einer dieser Namen sein: +\series bold +black +\series default +, +\series bold +blue +\series default +, +\series bold +cyan +\series default +, +\series bold +green +\series default +, +\series bold +magenta +\series default +, +\series bold +red +\series default +, +\series bold +white +\series default +, +\series bold +yellow +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn Sie eine Text- oder Hintergrundfarbe geändert haben, können Sie diese + unter den folgenden Namen verwenden: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Für die Seiten-Hintergrundfarbe: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +page_backgroundcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Für die Schriftfarbe des Haupttextes: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +document_fontcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Für die Schattierte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Box-Hintergrundfarbe: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +shadecolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Für die Schriftfarbe der Grauschrift-Notizen: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +note_fontcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wie man eigene Farben definiert und verwendet ist in Abschnitt +\emph on +Farbige +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Zellen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Nummerierung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Inhaltsverzeichnis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier können Sie die Nummerierungstiefe von Abschnittsüberschriften einstellen + und festlegen bis zu welcher Tiefe Abschnitte im Inhaltsverzeichnis erscheinen, + siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Nummerierung-aendern" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Literaturverzeichnis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier können Sie einen Zitierstil unter Verwendung der LaTeX-Pakete +\series bold +natbib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! natbib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + oder +\series bold +jurabib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! jurabib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + festlegen. + Sie können ein abschnittsspezifisches Literaturverzeichnis unter Verwendung + des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +bibtopic +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! bibtopic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + aktivieren und festlegen wie das Literaturverzeichnis erzeugt wird. + Für eine detaillierte Beschreibung siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Stichwortverzeichnis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier kann eingestellt werden, wie das Stichwortverzeichnis des Dokuments + erzeugt wird und es können zusätzliche Stichwortverzeichnisse definiert + werden. + Siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Stichwortverzeichnisse" + +\end_inset + + für Details. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +PDF-Eigenschaften +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die PDF-Eigenschaften sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:PDF-Eigenschaften" + +\end_inset + + erklärt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Mathe-Optionen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit diesen Optionen können Sie LyX zwingen, die LaTeX-Pakete +\series bold +amsmath +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! amsmath +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\series bold +esint +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! esint +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\series bold +mathdots +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! mathdots +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + und +\series bold +mhchem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! mhchem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, direkt zu benutzen oder automatisch, wenn sie benötigt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +amsmath wird für viele Konstrukte benötigt. + Wenn Sie viele LaTeX-Fehlermeldungen in Formeln bekommen, vergewissern + Sie sich, dass Sie +\family typewriter + +\family sans +AMS-Mathe +\family default + aktiviert haben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +esint wird für spezielle Integralzeichen benötigt, siehe Abschnitt +\emph on +Große +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Operatoren +\emph default + des +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default + Handbuchs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mathdots wird für spezielle Fortsetzungspunkte benötigt, siehe Abschnitt + +\emph on +Fortsetzungspunkte +\emph default + des +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default + Handbuchs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mhchem wird für chemische Gleichungen benötigt, siehe Abschnitt +\emph on +Chemische Symbole und Reaktionsgleichungen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default + Handbuchs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Gleitobjekt-Platzierung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Gleitobjekt-Platzierungsoptionen sind in Abschnitt +\emph on +Beschriftungs-Platzierung +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Listing +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Listing-Einstellungen sind in Kapitel +\emph on +Programm-Code-Listen +\emph default + des +\emph on +Eingebettete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Objekte +\emph default + Handbuchs beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Auflistungszeichen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier können Sie die Zeichen für die verschiedenen Auflistungsebenen einstellen. + Die Auflistung-Umgebung ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Auflistung" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Zweige +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Zweige sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Zweige" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Ausgabe +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Dokument-Ausgabe" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier können Sie einige Spezifika für die Ausgabe des Dokuments festlegen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Voreingestelltes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ausgabeformat: Das Format, welches verwendet wird, wenn Sie im Menü +\family sans +Ansicht +\family default + oder der Werkzeugleiste +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Ansehen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Aktualisieren +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Hauptdokument ansehen +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + oder +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Hauptdokument aktualisieren +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + anklicken. + Die Standard-Einstellung wird in +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dateiformate +\family default + festgelegt, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Mit +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ausgabe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +synchronisieren Einstellungen für das Menü +\family sans +Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Vorwärtssuche +\family default +. + Siehe Abschnitt +\emph on +DVI/PDF Rückwärtssuche +\emph default + der +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + für eine detaillierte Beschreibung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +XHTML-Ausgabe-Optionen Einstellungen für das Export-Format +\family sans +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +XHTML +\family default +. + +\family sans +Striktes XHTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.1 +\family default + stellt sicher, das die Ausgabe exakt mit Version +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.1 des XHTML-Standards übereinstimmt. + Die verschiedenen Einstellungen für die +\family sans +Mathe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ausgabe +\family default + sind im Detail in Abschnitt +\emph on +Mathe-Ausgabe in XHTML +\emph default + der +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + beschrieben. + Die Skalierung wird für die Größe von Gleichungen in der Ausgabe verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LaTeX-Vorspann +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Er enthält LaTeX-Befehle, die nicht zum Klassenstandard gehören. + Dies ist etwas für LaTeX-Experten. + Eine Einführung in die LaTeX-Syntax finden Sie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Der Einstellungen-Dialog +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:Der-Einstellungen-Dialog" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Einstellungen-Dialog wird über das Menü +\family sans +Werkzeuge\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen +\family default + aufgerufen. + Er besitzt die folgenden Untermenüs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Aussehen & Handhabung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Benutzeroberfläche +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +UI-Datei +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anpassung ! der Werkzeugleisten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anpassung ! der Menüs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das Erscheinungsbild der Menüs und Werkzeugleisten kann durch die Auswahl + einer Benutzerinterface-Datei (UI) geändert werden. + Eine UI-Datei ist eine Textdatei in der die Werkzeugleisten und Menüs aufgelist +et sind. + Die Datei +\emph on +default.ui +\emph default + lädt drei Dateien: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdmenus.inc +\shape italic + +\emph on +legt die Menüeinträge für die Standard-Menüs fest +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdcontext.inc legt die Menüeinträge für die Popup/Kontext-Menüs fest +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdtoolbars.inc +\shape italic +\emph on +legt fest welche Werkzeugleistenknöpfe es gibt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um eigene Menü- und Werkzeugleisten-Gestaltungen zu erstellen, fängt man + mit einer Kopie dieser Dateien an und editiert die Einträge. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Syntax der .inc-Dateien ist selbsterklärend: Die +\family sans +Menubar +\family default +, +\family sans +Menu +\family default + und +\family sans +Toolbar +\family default +-Einträge müssen mit einem +\family sans +End +\family default + beendet werden. + Sie können +\family sans +Submenu +\family default +, +\family sans +Item +\family default +, +\family sans +OptItem +\family default +, +\family sans +Separator +\family default +, +\family sans +Icon +\family default + und im Fall des Menüs +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +file_lastfiles +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + einen +\family sans +Lastfiles +\family default +-Eintrag enthalten. + Die Syntax für die Einträge ist: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Item +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Menü +\series default +oder +\series bold + Knopfname +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +LyX-Funktion +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + +Alle LyX-Funktionen sind im Menü +\family sans +Hilfe\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Funktionen +\family default + aufgelistet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein Beispiel: Angenommen Sie verwenden das Menü +\family sans +Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Lesezeichen +\family default + recht oft und würden daher gerne sechs verfügbare Lesezeichen haben. + Dann können Sie diese Zeile +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Item +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Lesezeichen 6 speichern +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +bookmark-save 6 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + +zum Menü +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +navigate_bookmarks +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + in der Datei +\emph on +stdmenus.inc +\emph default + hinzufügen und haben dann das sechste Lesezeichen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit +\family sans + Symbldesign +\family default + kann das Aussehen von LyXs Werkzeugleisten geändert werden. + Die derzeit verfügbaren Symboldesigns sind in +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "diesem Bild" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" + +\end_inset + + gegenübergestellt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Automatische Hilfe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Option +\family sans +Tooltips im Hauptarbeitsbereich aktivieren +\family default + aktiviert Tooltips, die den Inhalt von geschlossenen Einfügungen wie Indexeintr +ägen oder Fußnoten anzeigt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Sitzung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit der Option +\family sans +Aussehen und Größe von Fenstern wiederherstellen +\family default + wird LyXs Hauptfenster mit der Größe und dem Aussehen geöffnet, das in + der letzten LyX-Sitzung benutzt wurde. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Option +\family sans +Cursor-Positionen wiederherstellen +\family default + setzt den Cursor auf die Position in der Datei, wo er beim letzten Mal + war. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Option +\family sans +Geöffnete Dateien der letzten Sitzung laden +\family default + öffnet alle Dateien, die in der letzten LyX-Sitzung geöffnet waren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Der Knopf +\family sans +Lösche alle Sitzungsinformationen +\family default + löscht alle Informationen von vorherigen LyX-Sitzungen (Cursorpositionen, + Namen der zuletzt geöffneten Dokumente, usw.). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Dokumente +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Sicherung-Dokumente" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sicherung ! Dokumente +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Sichere Originaldokumente beim Speichern +\family default + erstellt eine Sicherungskopie der Datei im Zustand, in dem sie geöffnet + oder das letzte mal gespeichert wurde. + Sie wird im +\family sans +Sicherungsverzeichnis +\family default + (siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Pfade" + +\end_inset + +) gespeichert oder im selben Ordner wie Ihr Dokument, wenn kein +\family sans +Sicherungsverzeichnis +\family default + vorgegeben ist. + Sie wird im selben Ordner wie Ihr Dokument oder im +\family sans +Sicherungsverzeichnis +\family default + gespeichert, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Pfade" + +\end_inset + +. + Die Sicherungsdateien haben die Endung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +.lyx~ +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit der Option +\family sans + Sicherung der Dokumente alle +\family default + kann die Zeit zwischen den Sicherungsspeicherungen eingestellt werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Dokumente komprimiert speichern +\family default + speichert die Dateien immer in einem komprimierten Format. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Maximale Anzahl letzter Dateien +\family default + ist die Anzahl der zuletzt von LyX geöffneten Dateien, die LyX im Menü + +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Zuletzt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +geöffnet +\family default + anzeigen soll. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn die Option +\family sans +Dokument in Registerkarten öffnen +\family default + nicht verwendet wird, wird jede Datei in einer eigenen Instanz von LyX + geöffnet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Option +\family sans +Einzelinstanz +\family default + ist nur aktiv, wenn eine LyX-Server-Weiterleitung +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Pfade" + +\end_inset + + für Informationen über die LyX-Server-Weiterleitung. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + eingerichtet wurde. + Wenn sie ausgewählt ist, werden LyX-Dokumente, in der selben Instanz von + LyX geöffnet. + Ansonsten wird für jede Datei eine neue Instanz von LyX erzeugt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit der Option +\family sans +Globaler Knopf zum Schließen von Registerkarten +\family default + gibt es nur einen Knopf ( +\family sans + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/closetab.png + scale 75 + +\end_inset + + +\family default +) auf der rechten Seite der Reiterleiste um Registerkarten zu schließen. + Ansonsten hat jede Registerkarte ihren eigenen Knopf zum Schließen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Für die letzte Option muss LyX neu gestartet werden, ehe die Änderung aktiv + wird. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Bildschirmschriften +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Bildschirmschriften" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Schrift ! Bildschirm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Diese Schriften werden verwendet, um Ihr Dokument auf dem Bildschirm in + LyX anzuzeigen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Dieser Abschnitt behandelt nur die Schriften +\emph on +innerhalb +\emph default + des LyX-Hauptfensters. + Die Schriften, die für die Ausgabe verwendet werden, sind davon unabhängig + und werden im Menü +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Schriften +\family default +eingestellt. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Standardmäßig verwendet LyX +\family typewriter +Times +\family default + als Serifenschrift, +\family typewriter +Arial +\family default + oder +\family typewriter +Helvetica +\family default + (hängt vom System ab) als +\family sans +serifenlose +\family default + Schrift und +\family typewriter +Courier +\family default + als +\family typewriter +Schreibmaschine +\family default +-Schrift. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Schriftgröße kann über die +\family sans +Zoom +\family default +-Einstellung geändert werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die +\family sans +Schriftgrößen +\family default + werden als Buchstabenhöhe in Einheiten von Punkten berechnet. + 72,27 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Punkte haben die Größe von 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Zoll, siehe Anhang +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "chap:In-LyX-verfügbare" + +\end_inset + +. + Die voreingestellten Schriftgrößen sind dieselben als würde eine Dokument-Schri +ftgröße von 10 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt verwendet werden. + The Größen sind im Detail in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Dokumentschrift-und-Schriftgröße" + +\end_inset + + erläutert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mit der aktivierten Option +\family sans +Pixmap-Zwischenspeicher benutzen, um die Darstellung von Zeichen zu beschleunige +n +\family default + muss LyX seltener die Bildschirmanzeige erneuern. + Dies führt zu einer besseren Performanz, besonders auf langsameren Rechnern. + Allerdings könnten die Zeichen verpixelt aussehen. + Ob es sich lohnt diese Option zu aktivieren, müssen Sie also ausprobieren. + Man beachte dass der Pixmap Cache nur unter Mac +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +OS und Windows verfügbar und nützlich ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Farben +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Farbe ! LyX-Bildschirm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Farbe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier können alle Farben, die LyX verwendet, geändert werden. + Wählen Sie einen Eintrag in der Liste aus und drücken den Knopf +\family sans +Ändern +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Durch die Option +\family sans +Systemfarben verwenden +\family default + wird das Farbschema Ihres Betriebssystems oder Fenstermanagers benutzt. + Die Farben +\family sans +Auswahl, Cursor, Tabelle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Linie), Text, URL +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Marke) +\family default + und +\family sans +URL +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Text) +\family default + sind dann nicht veränderbar und daher nicht aufgelistet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Anzeige +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Anzeige +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier kann festgelegt werden, ob Grafiken in LyX dargestellt werden sollen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Sofortige Vorschau +\family default + aktiviert die sofortige Vorschau von Dokumentteilen. + Dieses Feature ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dokumentteile-vorschauen" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Option +\family sans +Absatzenden +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +markieren +\family default + zeigt ein Absatzzeichen (¶) am Ende jedes Absatzes an. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Bearbeiten +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Bearbeiten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Kontrolle +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Bearbeiten +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Option +\family sans +Cursor folgt Scrollbar +\family default + setzt den Cursor an den Anfang des aktuell angezeigten Dokumentteils wenn + gescrollt wird. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann die Dicke des Cursors einstellen. + Wird die Dicke auf Null gesetzt, wird die Cursordicke realtiv zum eingestellten + Zoom der Bildschirmschriften skaliert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Unter das Ende des Dokuments scrollen +\family default + ist selbsterklärend. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +In LyX kann man von Wort zu Wort springen, indem man +\family sans +Strg+Pfeiltaste +\family default + drückt. + Mit der Option +\family sans +Cursornavigation zwischen Wörtern im Mac-Stil +\family default + springt der Cursor vom Wortende zum Wortende des nächsten Wortes. + Normalerweise springt er von Anfang zu Anfang. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Option +\family sans +Absatzlayouts alphabetisch sortieren +\family default + sortiert die Einträge im pull-down Menü der Absatzumgebungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Option +\family sans +Absatzlayouts nach Kategorien gruppieren +\family default + gruppiert die Einträge im pull-down Menü der Absatzumgebungen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Mathe-Makro Optionen legen den Editierstil von Makros fest, siehe den + Abschnitt +\emph on +Mathe-Makros +\emph default + des +\emph on +Mathe +\emph default + Handbuchs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Vollbild +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier kann eingestellt werden, was im Vollbildmodus ausgeblendet wird. + Die Option +\family sans +Begrenze Textbreite +\family default + legt die Breite des Textes im Vollbildmodus fest. + Auf diese Weise kann der Text schmaler als der Bildschirm angezeigt werden. + Der Text erscheint dann zentriert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tastenkürzel +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tastenkürzel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Tastenkürzel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Tastenkürzel-Datei +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Tastaturkürzel-Datei +\family default + gibt an, welche Datei benutzt wird, um LyX-Funktionen mit einem Tastenkürzel + zu verknüpfen. + Es gibt mehrere Dateien; darunter: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +cua.bind ist die gebräuchlichste Tastaturkürzel-Datei für PCs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +(x)emacs.bind definiert Tastaturkürzel so, wie es beim Editor (X)Emacs üblich + ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mac.bind macht dasselbe für MacOS-Systeme. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt auch Tastaturkürzel-Dateien für spezielle Dokumentklassen, wie +\shape italic +broadway.bind +\shape default +, und für Sprachen. + Der Name einer Tastaturkürzel-Datei für Sprachen beginnt mit dem Sprach-Code, + zum Beispiel +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +pt +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + für Portugiesisch. + Wenn Sie LyX für eine spezielle Sprache benutzen, wird es die entsprechende + Tastaturkürzel-Datei benutzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Einige Tastaturkürzel-Dateien wie +\shape italic +math.bind +\shape default + haben nur einen kleinen Anwendungsbereich. + Schaut man ans Ende der Datei +\shape italic +cua.bind +\shape default +, sieht man, dass diese eingebunden sind um den Überblick in der bind-Datei + zu erhalten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Feld +\family sans +Zeige +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tastenkürzel, die Folgendes enthalten +\family default +kann man nach den Kürzeln für eine bestimmte Funktion in der gewählten Tastenkür +zel-Datei suchen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Tastenkürzel bearbeiten +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Tastenkürzel-bearbeiten" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tastenkürzel ! bearbeiten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um ein Tastaturkürzel zu bearbeiten o der ein neues zu definieren, können + Sie die Tabelle benutzen, die alle LyX-Funktionen und ihre Tastaturkürzel + enthält. + Um sie leichter zu finden, sind sie nach Funktionen gruppiert. + Mit Hilfe von +\family sans +Zeige +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Tastaturkürzel, +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +die +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Folgendes +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +enthalten +\family default +, können Sie vorhandene Tastaturkürzel finden. + Wenn Sie zum Beispiel +\emph on +paste +\emph default + eingeben, werden die vier vorhandenen Tastaturkürzel für die drei verschiedenen + Funktionen, in deren Name +\emph on +paste +\emph default + vorkommt, angezeigt. + Sie sehen, dass eine Funktion mehrere Tastaturkürzel besitzen kann. + Außerdem sind alle LyX-Funktionen im gleichnamigen Handbuch aufgelistet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um zum Beispiel das Tastaturkürzel +\family sans +Alt+Q +\family default + für die LyX-Funktion +\family sans +textstyle-apply +\family default + hinzuzufügen, suchen Sie sie, markieren sie und klicken auf +\family sans +Ändern +\family default +. + Es erscheint ein Dialogfenster, in dem Sie das Tastaturkürzel einfügen + können, indem Sie es benutzen (Alt drücken, gedrückt halten, dann Q drücken). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ein vorhandenes Tastaturkürzel wird ebenso geändert. + Sie auch mehrere Funktionen einem Tastaturkürzel zuordnen, indem Sie die + LyX-Funktion mit +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +command alternatives +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + beginnen und die verschiedenen Funktionen, durch Kommas getrennt, anfügen. + LyX wird dann für das Tastaturkürzel die erste Funktion benutzen, die im + gerade bearbeiteten Dokumentteil aktiv ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Falls Ihnen ein bestimmtes Tastenkürzel nicht gefällt, können Sie es löschen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alternativ können Sie natürlich auch die entsprechende Tastaturkürzel-Datei + mit einem Editor bearbeiten. + Die Syntax für ein Kürzel ist +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +bind +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Tastaturkürzel +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +LyX-Funktion +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tastatur / Maus +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Tastatur-/-Maus" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tastaturtabelle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Tastaturtabelle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalerweise werden Tastatureinstellungen in einem Menü des Betriebssystems + vorgenommen. + Für den Fall, dass dies nicht möglich ist, bietet LyX Tastaturtabellen + an. + Wenn Sie z. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +B. + eine tschechische Tastatur haben, aber mit ihr wie mit einer rumänischen + schreiben wollen, können Sie die Option +\family sans +Tastaturtabelle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +verwenden +\family default + aktivieren und die Tastaturtabellen-Datei namens +\shape italic +romanian.kmap +\shape default + auswählen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sie können eine +\family sans +Erste +\family default + und eine +\family sans +Zweite +\family default + Tastaturtabelle definieren und, wenn Sie die +\emph on +cua +\emph default + Tastaturkürzel verwenden, die erste mit +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-primary" +\end_inset + + und die zweite mit +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-secondary" +\end_inset + + auswählen oder mit +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-toggle" +\end_inset + + zwischen beiden hin- und herschalten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Hinweis: +\series default + Tastaturtabellen werden nur als Notbehelf angeboten und funktionieren nicht + auf allen Systemen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Man kann außerdem hier die +\family sans +Mausrad-Scrollgeschwindigkeit +\family default + einstellen. + Der Standardwert ist 1.0, höhere Werte beschleunigen das Scrollen, niedrigere + verlangsamen es. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Im Abschnitt +\family sans +Textgröße mit dem Mausrad einstellen +\family default + kann eine Taste für das Zoomen ausgewählt werden. + Wenn diese Taste gedrückt und das Mausrad gedreht wird, wird der Text gezoomt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Eingabevervollständigung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Eingabevervollständigung ist in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Eingabevervollständigung-general" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Pfade +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Pfade" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pfade +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Pfade +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Pfade zu den verschiedenen, von LyX verwendeten Ressourcen werden normalerwe +ise während der Installation festgelegt. + Es kann aber Gründe geben diese zu ändern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Arbeitsverzeichnis Dieses Verzeichnis öffnet LyX, wenn Sie im Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Öffnen +\family default + auf +\family sans +Dokumente +\family default + klicken. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Dokumentvorlagen Dieses Verzeichnis öffnet LyX, wenn Sie +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Neu +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +von +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +Vorlage +\family default + wählen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Beispieldateien Dieses Verzeichnis öffnet LyX, wenn Sie im Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Öffnen +\family default + auf +\family sans +Beispiele +\family default + klicken. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Achtung: +\series default + Der Knopf +\family sans +Beispiele +\family default + existiert nicht bei LyX unter Windows oder Mac OS. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sicherungsverzeichnis +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sicherung ! Verzeichnis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + In diesem Verzeichnis werden Sicherungen gespeichert. + Wenn kein Sicherungsverzeichnis angegeben ist, aber Sicherungen wie in + Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Sicherung-Dokumente" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben, aktiviert sind, wird das +\family sans +Arbeitsverzeichnis +\family default + für die Sicherungen verwendet. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Sicherungsdateien haben die Endung +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +.lyx~ +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Server-Weiterleitung Hier wird der Name einer sogenannten UNIX-Pipe angegeben. + Über diese werden Daten aus externen Programmen an LyX gesendet. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Beispiel: +\series default + Sie fügen die Literaturdatenbank +\emph on +test.bib +\emph default + dem Dokument hinzu. + Diese können Sie mit dem Programm +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + bearbeiten. + In +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + ist für LyX in dessen Einstellungen unter +\family sans +Externe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Programme +\family default + die gleiche Unix-Pipe wie hier einzutragen. + Wollen Sie sich jetzt einen Eintrag aus der Datenbank als Literaturverweis + einfügen, wählen Sie diesen in +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + aus und klicken auf das LyX-Symbol. + Es wird im aktuellen LyX-Dokument an der Cursor-Position der Literaturverweis + eingefügt. + +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + und LyX müssen natürlich beide laufen. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Die Pipe wird auch für das Feature +\family sans +Einzelinstanz +\family default + verwendet, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Sicherung-Dokumente" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Um die LyX-Server-Weiterleitung auf Windows zu verwenden, muss dieser Pipename + verwendet werden: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash + +\backslash +. +\backslash +pipe +\backslash +lyxpipe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Tempor +\family sans +ä +\family default +res +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Verzeichnis Hier speichert LyX alle temporären Daten einer Sitzung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Thesaurus-Wörterbücher Verzeichnis wo sich die Thesaurus-Wörterbücher befinden. + Es muss nur angegeben werden, wenn der Thesaurus sonst nicht funktioniert + oder Sie eigene/alternative Wörterbücher verwenden wollen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hunspell-Wörterbücher Verzeichnis wo sich die Wörterbücher des Rechtschreibprüfu +ngsprogramms +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + befinden. + Es muss nur angegeben werden, wenn Sie +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + verwenden und die Rechtschreibprüfung sonst nicht funktioniert oder Sie + eigene/alternative Wörterbücher verwenden wollen. + Für LyX unter Windows ist +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + das einzige verfügbare Rechtschreibprüfungsprogramm und sollte ohne Angabe + eines Verzeichnisses funktionieren. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PATH-Präfix Diese Feld enthält eine Liste mit Pfaden zu externen Programmen. + Wenn LyX ein externes Programm benötigt, wird in der Liste nachgesehen, + wo es zu finden ist. + Für Windows und Mac wird diese Liste automatisch bei der Konfiguration + von LyX erstellt, sodass Sie sie normalerweise nicht ändern müssen. + Auf Linux/Unix-Systemen muss sie nur dann erstellt werden, wenn externe + Programme benutzt werden sollen, die nicht in $PATH stehen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +TEXINPUTS-Präfix Die TEXINPUTS Umgebungsvariable erlaubt es externe Dateien, + die in LyX-Dokumenten mittels Befehlen als TeX-Code oder im LaTeX-Vorspann + eingefügt wurden, zu verwenden. + Dieser Präfix enthält standardmäßig das Dokumentverzeichnis (durch einen + Punkt '.' repräsentiert). + Der Präfix kann jede Liste an Pfaden enthalten, die durch das Standard-Trennzei +chen des Betriebssystems (':' auf UNIX-artigen Systemen und ';' auf Windows) + getrennt sind. + Falls Dateien eingefügt werden, werden die Pfade, die im TEXINPUTS-Präfix + aufgelistet sind, nach den den eingefügten Dateien gescannt. + Es ist zu beachten, dass jeder nicht-absolute Pfad im TEXINPUTS-Präfix + als relativ zum Verzeichnis Ihrer LyX-Datei betrachtet wird. + Es ist empfohlen, immer '.' als einen der Pfade anzugeben, ansonsten könnte + die Ausgabe für einige Dokumente fehlschlagen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Identität +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier können Sie Ihren Namen und Ihre E-Mail-Adresse eingeben. + Die Identität wird verwendet, um Änderungen die Sie machen, als Ihre zu + markieren, wenn Änderungsverfolgung, wie in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Änderungsverfolgung" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben, aktiviert ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Spracheinstellungen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sprache ! Einstellungen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Sprache +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Sprache +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Spracheinstellungen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sprache +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Benutzeroberfläche Hier kann die Sprache der LyXs Menüs eingestellt werden. + Der aktuelle Übersetzungsstatus ist hier zu finden: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sprachpaket legt fest, welches LaTeX-Paket für die Sprachunterstützung geladen + werden soll. + Zur Sprachunterstützung zählen Silbentrennmuster ebenso wie die Lokalisation + von Daten und von Klassen verwendeten Ausdrücken wie +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Kapitel +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und Tabelle +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. + Das verbreitetste Sprachpaket ist +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, das Standard-Sprachpaket im klassischen LaTeX. + Für moderne TeX-Alternativen wie XeTeX und LuaTeX gibt es allerdings das + alternative Sprachpaket +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, welches die umfassende Unterstützung dieser Programme für verschiedenartige + Schriftsysteme voll ausnutzt. + Außerdem gibt es auch noch spezifische Sprachpakete für Sprachen, die von + babel (noch) nicht unterstützt werden. + Die möglichen Einstellungen sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Sprache" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Befehl +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Anfang Wenn ein besonderes LaTeX-Paket benötigt wird, um in einer gewissen + Dokumentsprache zu schreiben, können Sie hier den Befehl zum Start des + Paketes eingeben. + Ein Beispiel ist der Befehl +\series bold + +\backslash +begin{arabtext} +\series default +, der gebraucht wird, um mithilfe des Paketes +\series bold +ArabTeX +\series default + Arabisch zu schreiben, siehe +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + +. + Standard ist der +\series bold +babel +\series default +-Befehl +\series bold + +\backslash +selectlanguage{$$lang} +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Befehl +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ende ist das Gegenstück zu +\family sans +Befehl +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Anfang +\family default +. + Einige Pakete wie das Standardpaket haben keinen Endbefehl, weil der Startbefeh +l das Paket an- und abschaltet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Standard-Dezimalzeichen Legen Sie hier den Standard-Dezimaltrenner fest, + welcher für die Ausrichtung am Dezimalzeichen in Tabellen verwendet wird. + Voreingestellt ist der Punkt, im Deutschen wird in der Regel aber ein Komma + verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sprachen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +global +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +definieren Wenn diese Option gesetzt wird, werden die im Dokument benutzten + Sprachen zu den Klassenoptionen des Dokuments hinzugefügt, sodass sie von + allen LaTeX-Paketen benutzt werden können. + Sonst werden sie nur als Optionen von +\family typewriter +babel +\family default + benutzt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Auto-Beginn Wenn diese Option gesetzt wird, starten die Dokumente mit der + gewählten Dokumentsprache. + Wenn nicht, wird der Befehl +\family sans +\series bold +Befehl +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Anfang +\family default +\series default + explizit an den Anfang der LaTeX-Ausgabe des Dokuments geschrieben. + Damit wird sichergestellt, dass die richtige Sprache benutzt wird, wenn + Sie in +\family sans +\series bold +Befehl +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Anfang +\family default +\series default +nicht die Standardeinstellung benutzen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Auto-Ende ist das Gegenstück zu +\family sans +\series bold +Auto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Beginn +\family default +\series default +. + Wenn es nicht gesetzt ist, wird der +\family sans +\series bold +Befehl +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ende +\family default +\series default + ans Ende des Dokuments geschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fremdsprachen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +markieren Wenn Sie dies ankreuzen, werden Texte in einer anderen Sprache + als der Standard-Sprache unterstrichen, standardmäßig blau. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Rechts-nach-links-Sprachunterstützung für die entsprechenden Sprachen wie + Arabisch, Hebräisch, Persisch. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +RNL-Unterstützung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +aktivieren aktiviert Unterstützung für Sprachen, die von rechts nach links + geschrieben werden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cursorbewegung legt fest, wie der Cursor sich bei RNL-Sprachen verhält, + wenn sie die Pfeil-rechts- oder Pfeil-links-Taste drücken. + +\family sans +Logisch +\family default + bedeutet, dass der Cursor nach links bewegt wird, wenn Sie die Pfeil-rechts-Tas +te drücken, während sich der Cursor in einer RNL-Passage befindet. + Diese Einstellung ist vor allem in gemischten Texten (RNL und LNR) sinnvoll, + da die Cursorbewegung dann einer einheitlichen Textlogik folgt. + +\family sans +Visuell +\family default + bedeutet, dass sich der Cursor in die Richtung bewegt, in die auch die + Pfeile zeigen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Rechtschreibprüfung +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Die Rechtschreibprüfungseinstellungen sind in Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rechtschreibprüfung" + +\end_inset + + beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Ausgabe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Allgemein +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ausgabe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Zeilenlänge legt die maximale Anzahl an Zeichen pro Zeile fest, die für + das Menü +\family sans +Datei\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einfacher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Text +\family default + verwendet wird. + Wird die Zeilenlänge auf 0 gesetzt, wird der komplette Text in einer endlos + langen Zeile ausgegeben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Datumsformat +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Datumsformat +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Datumsformat +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Das Datumsformat kann eines oder eine Mischung der hier aufgelisteten Formate + sein: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Zum Beispiel gibt das Format +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +%d/%m/%y +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +das Datum in der Form Tag/Monat/Jahr aus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Beim +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Export +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +überschreiben Einstellung was LyX erlaubt ist zu überschreiben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Vorwärtssuche Befehle, die für das Menü +\family sans +Navigieren\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Vorwärtssuche +\family default + verwendet werden. + Siehe Abschnitt +\emph on +DVI/PDF Rückwärtssuche +\emph default + der +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + für eine detaillierte Beschreibung. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Drucker +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Drucker" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Drucker +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Drucker +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Standard-Drucker Hier können Sie den Namen Ihres Standard-Druckers eintragen. + Der Name wird dann beim +\family sans +Druckbefehl +\family default + übernommen. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Hinweis: +\series default + Dieses Feld kann unter Windows leer gelassen werden, da es keinen Effekt + hat. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Druckbefehl ist der Befehl, den LyX/LaTeX zum Drucken benutzt. + Der Standard ist bei den meisten Systemen +\family sans +dvips +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Optionen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +für +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Druckbefehl Hier können Sie Drucker-Optionen angeben. + Eine Liste mit Drucker-Optionen und Erläuterungen finden Sie in der Dokumentati +on des Programms dessen +\family sans +Druckbefehl +\family default + Sie verwenden. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ausgabe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +an +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +den +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Drucker +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +anpassen Diese Option funktioniert nur für den +\family sans +Druckbefehl +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +dvips +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + und ist für Experten gedacht. + Sie aktiviert eine Konfigurationsdatei für dvips. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-Einstellungen" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Fontkodierung +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +verwenden Dies ist die Standard-Kodierung der Dokumentschrift. + +\family sans +T1 +\family default + ist der Standard und deckt westliche Sprachen und Symbole ab. + +\family sans +T2A +\family default +, +\family sans +T2B +\family default +, +\family sans +T2C +\family default +, +\family sans +LCY +\family default + und +\family sans +X2 +\family default + werden für Kyrillisch verwendet. + Kombinationen der Kodierungen wie +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +T1, T2B +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + sind möglich. + Die Schriftkodierung wird normalerweise automatisch von den Sprachpaketen + geladen, die LyX im Hintergund verwendet. + Man muss die Standard-Kodierung also nicht ändern. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Standard-Papiergröße Dies ist die Papiergröße die für neue Dokumente verwendet + wird. + Der +\family sans +Standard +\family default + Wert hängt von den LaTeX-Systemeinstellungen ab. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Papiergrößen-Optionen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +DVI-Betrachters Diese haben nur einen Effekt, wenn das Programm +\family sans +xdvi +\family default + als DVI-Betrachter verwendet wird; siehe dessen Handbuch für weitere Informatio +nen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Des Weiteren können hier Optionen und Befehle mit Parametern für die aufgelistet +en Prozessoren angegeben werden. + Bevor Sie aber etwas ändern, sollten Sie vorher unbedingt in die Handbücher + der Prozessoren geschaut haben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Literaturverzeichnis-Erzeugung Einstellungen für die Erstellung des Literaturver +zeichnisses, siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Literaturverzeichnis-Datenbanken" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Indexerzeugung Einstellungen für die Erstellung des Stichwortverzeichnisses, + siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Stichwort-Programm" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Nomenklarturbefehl Befehl für das Programm, das die Nomenklatur erstellt, + siehe Abschnitt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Nomenklatur-Programm" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +CheckTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X-Befehl Befehl für das Programm +\family sans +CheckTeX +\family default +, das im Abschnitt +\emph on +TeX prüfen +\emph default + der +\emph on +Handbuchergänzungen +\emph default + beschrieben ist. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es gibt zusätzlich die folgenden Optionen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Verwende +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +windowskonforme +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Pfade +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +in +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTeX-Dateien Verwendet Pfade in der Notation von Windows; das bedeutet, + dass +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + + +\backslash + +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + anstelle von +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + verwendet wird, um Verzeichnisse zu trennen. + Diese Option ist automatisch aktiv unter LyX für Windows. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pfade +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einstellungen ! Pfade +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Klassenoptionen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +beim +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Wechsel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +der +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Dokumentklasse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +zurücksetzen entfernt beim Wechsel der Dokumentklasse alle von Hand gesetzten + +\family sans +Klassenoptionen +\family default + im Dialog +\family sans +Dokument\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Einstellungen\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dokumentklasse +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Datei-Handhabung +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Datei-Handhabung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Konverter +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Konverter" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Konverter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier ist eine Liste mit definierten Konverter-Befehlen zu finden, um Material + von einem Format in ein anderes zu konvertieren. + Man kann Konverter modifizieren oder neue erstellen. + Um einen Konverter zu modifizieren, wählt man ihn aus, ändert den Eintrag + im Feld +\family sans +Konverter +\family default + und/oder +\family sans +Zusatz-Flag +\family default + und drückt den Knopf +\family sans +Ändern +\family default +. + Um einen neuen Konverter zu erstellen, wählt man einen existierenden aus, + wählt in der Dropdown-Liste +\family sans +In +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Format +\family default + ein anderes Format aus, modifiziert das Feld +\family sans +Konverter +\family default + und drückt den Knopf +\family sans +Hinzufügen +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Wenn der +\family sans +Konverterdatei-Zwischenspeicher +\family default + aktiviert ist, werden Konvertierungen so lange wie im Feld +\family sans +Maximales Alter (in Tagen +\family default +) angegeben, gespeichert. + Das bedeutet, dass Bilder nicht immer wieder konvertiert werden müssen, + wenn man ein Dokument öffnet; die konvertierten Bilder aus dem Speicher + werden stattdessen verwendet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mehr über Konverter und die Flags, die man in der Konverter-Definition verwenden + kann, ist im Abschnitt +\emph on +Konverter +\emph default + des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Dateiformate +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Dateiformate" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dateiformate +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hier findet man eine Liste mit definierten Dateiformaten, die LyX handhaben + kann. + Man kann das Betrachtungs- und Bearbeitungsprogramm ändern, das für bestimmte + Formate verwendet werden soll. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Des Weiteren kann man hier das +\family sans +Voreingestellte Ausgabeformat +\family default + festlegen, das verwendet wird, wenn man +\family sans +Ansehen, Aktualisieren, Hauptdokument ansehen +\family default + oder +\family sans +Hauptdokument aktualisieren +\family default + im Menü +\family sans +Ansicht +\family default + oder in der Werkzeugleiste aufruft. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mehr über Formate und deren Optionen, ist im Abschnitt +\emph on +Formate +\emph default + des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Da alle Konvertierungen von einem Format in ein anderes in LyXs temporärem + Verzeichnis stattfinden, ist es manchmal notwendig eine Datei zu modifizieren, + bevor sie ins temporäre Verzeichnis kopiert und dort konvertiert wird. + Dies geschieht, indem man einen +\family sans +Kopierer +\family default + angibt. + Mehr darüber ist im Abschnitt +\emph on +Kopierer +\emph default + des +\emph on +Anpassung +\emph default + Handbuchs beschrieben. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +In LyX verfügbare Maßeinheiten +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "chap:In-LyX-verfügbare" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Einheiten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Um die in diesem Handbuch verwendeten Maßeinheiten zu verstehen, erläutert + Tabelle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Maßeinheiten" + +\end_inset + + alle in LyX verfügbaren Maßeinheiten. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Maßeinheiten" + +\end_inset + +Maßeinheiten +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Maßeinheit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Name/Beschreibung +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Millimeter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zentimeter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +in +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zoll (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +in = 2.54 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Punkt (72.27 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pica (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pc = 12 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +sp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +skalierter Punkt (65536 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +sp = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +bp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +großer Punkt (72 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +bp = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +dd +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Didot (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +dd +\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ +\end_inset + + 0,376 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mm) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cicero (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cc = 12 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +dd) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Skalierung% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% der originalen Bildbreite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Textbreite % +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% der Textbreite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Spaltenbreite % +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% der Spaltenbreite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Seitenbreite % +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% der Seitenbreite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Zeilenbreite % +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% der Zeilenbreite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Texthöhe % +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% der Texthöhe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Seitenhöhe % +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% der Seitenhöhe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Die Höhe des Buchstabens +\emph on +x +\emph default + im aktiven Zeichensatz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Die Breite des Buchstabens +\emph on +M +\emph default + im aktiven Zeichensatz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mu +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mathematische Maßeinheit +\series bold + +\series default +(1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mu = 1/18 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +label "Credits" +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + +Das LyX Team: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Credits" +target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org/Credits +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexbook" + +\end_inset + +Leslie Lamport. + +\emph on +LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin: +\emph on +The LaTeX Companion. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 1994 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +A Guide to LaTeX2e, Kopka and Daly. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "texbook" + +\end_inset + +Donald E. + Knuth. + +\emph on +The TeXbook +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latex-einführung" + +\end_inset + +Helmut Kopka: +\emph on +LaTeX, Band 1 – Einführung, 2., überarbeitete Auf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +lage +\emph default +. + Addison-Wesley, 1996 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latex-praxisbuch" + +\end_inset + +Elke & Michael Niedermair: +\emph on +LaTeX-Praxisbuch +\emph default +, Franzis-Verlag, 2004 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "TeX-Katalog" + +\end_inset + +Der TeX-Katalog: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "LaTeXFAQ" + +\end_inset + +The LaTeX FAQ: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" + +\end_inset + + des Programms +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX-2" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" + +\end_inset + + wie man das Programm +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default + verwendet: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "makeindex" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" + +\end_inset + + des Programms +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "xindy" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" + +\end_inset + + des Programms +\family sans +xindy +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" + +\end_inset + + der AMS LaTeX-Pakete: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "caption" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-deu.pdf" + +\end_inset + + des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-deu.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" + +\end_inset + + des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" + +\end_inset + + des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" + +\end_inset + + des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" + +\end_inset + + des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "prettyref" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" + +\end_inset + + des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "refstyle" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" + +\end_inset + + des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "tipa" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Dokumentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" + +\end_inset + + des LaTeX-Pakets +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX-Paket ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX für Arabisch konfiguriert: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Armenian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX für Armenisch konfiguriert: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX fü kyrillische Sprachen konfiguriert: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Farsi" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX für Farsi konfiguriert: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Hebrew" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX für Hebräisch konfiguriert: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Japanese" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX für Japanisch konfiguriert: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Latvian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX für Lettisch konfiguriert +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX für Litauisch konfiguriert +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Mongolian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX für Mongolisch konfiguriert: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + wie man LyX für Vietnamesisch konfiguriert: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "NeuInLyX20" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wiki-Seite" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" + +\end_inset + + über neue Funktionen in +\family sans +LyX 2.0 +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +let +\backslash +mybibname +\backslash +bibname +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +bibname}{ +\backslash +mybibname +\backslash +; 2} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Der Befehl +\family typewriter + +\backslash +bibname +\family default + ist der Name des Literaturverzeichnisses in der jeweiligen Dokumentsprache. + Er wird hier mit der Nummer 2 versehen, ein zweites Verzeichnis folgt: +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex +LatexCommand bibtex +bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs" +options "../biblio/alphadin" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Das obige Literaturverzeichnis stammt aus einer BibTeX-Datenbank. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Damit die Nomenklatur auch den entspechenden Namen erhält, wurde im LaTeX-Vorspa +nn +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +nomname}{Nomenklatur} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +eingefügt. + Denn voreingestellt ist +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Nomenclature +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print +LatexCommand printnomenclature +set_width "auto" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Damit der Index den Namen +\emph on +Stichwortverzeichnis +\emph default + erhält, wurde im LaTeX-Vorspann +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +addto +\backslash +captionsngerman { +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +indexname} {Stichwortverzeichnis}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +eingefügt. + Denn voreingestellt ist +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Index +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Das Paket +\series bold +babel +\series default + sorgt dafür, dass die Legenden in der ausgewählten Sprache erscheinen. + Ehe man Legenden ändern kann, muss es geladen werden. + Außerdem wird +\series bold +babel +\series default + von LyX automatisch nach dem LaTeX-Vorspann geladen. + Das ruft aber keine Probleme hervor. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Möchte man andere Legenden ändern, ersetzt man +\series bold + +\backslash +indexname +\series default + durch +\series bold + +\backslash +name +\series default +. + Eine Auflistung der möglichen Namen findet man unter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family typewriter +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=fixnam +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Möchte man Legenden für andere Sprachen ändern, ersetzt man +\series bold +ngerman +\series default + durch die Dokumentsprache und +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +captionsgerman +\series default + durch +\series bold + +\backslash +captions +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset index_print +LatexCommand printindex +type "idx" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_body +\end_document diff --git a/lib/doc/es/UserGuide.lyx b/lib/doc/es/UserGuide.lyx index de1b8834dd..15e0573a67 100644 --- a/lib/doc/es/UserGuide.lyx +++ b/lib/doc/es/UserGuide.lyx @@ -1,46061 +1,46301 @@ -#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ -\lyxformat 413 -\begin_document -\begin_header -\textclass scrbook -\begin_preamble -% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!! -% -% This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints -% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble, -% parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you -% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact -% the documentation team -% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org - -\usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle -\ifpdf % if pdflatex is used - - % set fonts for nicer pdf view - \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} - -\fi % end if pdflatex is used - -% for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float -\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} - -% the pages of the TOC is numbered roman -% and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added -\let\myTOC\tableofcontents -\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \frontmatter - \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} - \myTOC - \mainmatter } - -% define a short command for \textvisiblespace -\newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace} - -% macro for italic page numbers in the index -\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} - -% for customized page headers/footers -% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document -\usepackage{fancyhdr} -% change header rule width -\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} - -% workaround for a makeindex bug, -% see sec. "Index Entry Order" -% only uncomment this when you are using makindex -%\let\OrgIndex\index -%\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}} -\end_preamble -\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading -\use_default_options false -\begin_modules -customHeadersFooters -enumitem -\end_modules -\maintain_unincluded_children false -\language spanish -\language_package default -\inputencoding auto -\fontencoding global -\font_roman default -\font_sans default -\font_typewriter default -\font_default_family default -\use_non_tex_fonts false -\font_sc false -\font_osf false -\font_sf_scale 100 -\font_tt_scale 100 - -\graphics default -\default_output_format default -\output_sync 0 -\bibtex_command default -\index_command default -\paperfontsize 12 -\spacing single -\use_hyperref true -\pdf_title "Guía del usuario de LyX" -\pdf_author "LyX Team" -\pdf_subject "LyX" -\pdf_keywords "LyX" -\pdf_bookmarks true -\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true -\pdf_bookmarksopen false -\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 -\pdf_breaklinks false -\pdf_pdfborder false -\pdf_colorlinks true -\pdf_backref false -\pdf_pdfusetitle false -\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" -\papersize default -\use_geometry false -\use_amsmath 1 -\use_esint 1 -\use_mhchem 1 -\use_mathdots 1 -\cite_engine basic -\use_bibtopic false -\use_indices false -\paperorientation portrait -\suppress_date false -\use_refstyle 0 -\notefontcolor #0000ff -\branch Pregunta -\selected 1 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #00ff00 -\end_branch -\branch Respuesta -\selected 0 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #aa55ff -\end_branch -\index Índice -\shortcut idx -\color #008000 -\end_index -\secnumdepth 3 -\tocdepth 2 -\paragraph_separation indent -\paragraph_indentation default -\quotes_language french -\papercolumns 1 -\papersides 2 -\paperpagestyle default -\tracking_changes false -\output_changes false -\html_math_output 0 -\html_css_as_file 0 -\html_be_strict true -\end_header - -\begin_body - -\begin_layout Title -Guía del usuario de LyX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Author -por el Equipo LyX -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -Si tienes comentarios o correcciones, por favor, escribe a la lista de correo - de Documentación de LyX: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Versión 2.0.x -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset toc -LatexCommand tableofcontents - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Para empezar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -¿Qué es LyX? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX es un sistema para confeccionar documentos. - Es una herramienta para producir preciosos manuscritos, libros para publicar, - cartas comerciales y proyectos, e incluso poesía. - Es distinto de la mayoría de otros «procesadores de texto» en el sentido - de que usa el paradigma del lenguaje de diseño como núcleo de su estilo - de edición. - Esto significa que cuando escribes un encabezado de sección, simplemente - lo marcas como «Sección», no es necesario hacer «negrita, tamaño 17 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt, justificado a la izquierda, espacio inferior 5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mm». - LyX se ocupa por ti del formato, así que sólo debes preocuparte de los - conceptos, no de los mecanismos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta filosofía se explica con mucho más detalle en el manual « -\emph on -Introducción -\emph default -». - Si aún no lo has leído, debes hacerlo. - Sí, queremos decir ahora. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La « -\emph on -Introducción -\emph default -» -\emph on - -\emph default -describe otros temas además de la filosofía de LyX: el más importante, el - formato de los manuales. - Si no lo has leído, perderás tiempo navegando por este manual. - La « -\emph on -Introducción -\emph default -» te orientará en la búsqueda de temas de ayuda en los diversos manuales. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Qué aspecto tiene LyX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como la mayoría de aplicaciones, LyX tiene en la parte superior de la ventana - la habitual barra de menús. - Bajo ella, una barra de herramientas con un cuadro desplegable y varios - botones. - Hay, por supuesto, una barra de deslizamiento vertical y un área principal - para editar los documentos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Observa que no hay barra de desplazamiento horizontal. - No es un error ni un descuido, es intencionado. - Cuando lees un libro, esperas que el final de una línea corresponda con - la siguiente. - El texto fluye a las nuevas páginas en vertical, de ahí que sólo haga falta - una barra de deslizamiento vertical. - Hay tres casos en que podrías necesitar una barra de desplazamiento horizontal: - el primero es si hay grandes figuras. - Para evitar que se vean más grandes que la pantalla, usa la opción -\family sans -Escala en pantalla -\family default - en la pestaña -\family sans -Opciones de LaTeX y LyX -\family default - de la configuración de gráficos. - Los otros dos casos son cuadros y ecuaciones más anchas que la ventana - de LyX. - Puedes usar las teclas de flecha para desplazarte horizontalmente por el - cuadro, pero esto todavía no funciona con las ecuaciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para una descripción breve de los menús y botones de la barra de herramientas, - mira en el apéndice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Interfaz-de-usuario" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -AYUDA -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El sistema de ayuda de LyX consta de diversos manuales. - Puedes leer -\emph on -todo -\emph default - su contenido en el propio LyX. - Sólo has de seleccionar el que quieras en el menú -\family sans -Ayuda -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Configuración básica de LyX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Configuración-básica" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Casi todas las características de LyX se pueden configurar mediante el menú - -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferencias -\family default -. -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Preferencias -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - LyX es capaz de explorar el sistema para ver qué programas, clases de documento - de LaTeX y paquetes de LaTeX están disponibles. - A partir de esto proporciona unos valores predeterminados convenientes - a varias configuraciones de las preferencias. - Aunque esta configuración ya se ha hecho al instalar LyX en el sistema, - podría haber algunas cosas que hayas instalado localmente, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nuevas clases de LaTeX, que LyX no encontró cuando se instaló. - Para forzar nuevas exploraciones del sistema, usa -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reconfigurar. -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguración de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Después debes reiniciar LyX para asegurar que los cambios tengan efecto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Configuración de LaTeX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:LaTeX-conf" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es posible editar documentos en LyX sin tener LaTeX instalado, pero no se - podrán generar PDF ni imprimirlos. - No obstante, algunos documentos LyX usan DocBook para procesar la salida, - en ese caso sí se pueden producir PDF y demás, y en todo caso cualquier - documento LyX siempre se puede exportar como texto simple o XHTML. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Algunas clases de documento pueden depender de clases o paquetes específicos - de LaTeX o DocBook. - Dichas clases de documento se pueden usar aunque no estén instalados los - archivos requeridos, pero no se podrán generar todos los tipos de salida. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los paquetes LaTeX que LyX ha encontrado en el sistema se listan en un archivo - accesible desde el menú -\family sans -Ayuda\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Las llaves en código TeX evitan que el término «LaTeX» se imprima con letras - desencajadas. - Más sobre código TeX en la sección -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Código-TeX" - -\end_inset - -, la impresión de nombres propios como LaTeX se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Nombres-Propios-en-LyX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Si faltan paquetes que sean necesarios, deben ser instalados y después - reconfigurar LyX (menú -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reconfigurar -\family default -). -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguración de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Véase la sección 5.1 del manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default - para más información sobre la instalación de paquetes LaTeX adicionales. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Cómo trabajar con LyX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Operaciones básicas con archivos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Operar con archivos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bajo el menú -\family sans -Archivo -\family default - están las operaciones básicas de cualquier procesador de texto y algunas - otras opciones más avanzadas: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Nuevo -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-new" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Nuevo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -desde -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -plantilla -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Abrir -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "file-open" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Abrir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -reciente -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Cerrar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Guardar -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-write" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Guardar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -como -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Revertir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -guardado -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Control -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -versiones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Importar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Exportar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Imprimir -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-write" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Ventana -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nueva -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Cerrar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ventana -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Salir -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Todos hacen prácticamente lo mismo que en cualquier otro procesador de texto, - con una pocas diferencias menores. - El comando -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nuevo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -desde -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -plantilla -\family default - te pide una plantilla para usar como punto de partida. - Al seleccionar una plantilla se establecerán automáticamente ciertas caracterís -ticas de formato para el documento, características que de otra forma necesitarí -as cambiar manualmente. - Las plantillas pueden ser útiles para determinadas clases de documento, - especialmente aquellas para escribir cartas (véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Clases-de-documento" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - No hay «archivo predeterminado» ni documento «Sin título» ni «de inicio». - A menos que indiques a LyX abrir un archivo o crear uno nuevo, este gran - espacio en blanco es sólo eso —un gran espacio en blanco—. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Revertir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -guardado -\family default - y -\family sans -Control -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -versiones -\family default - son útiles si varias personas trabajan en el mismo documento al mismo tiempo. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Si piensas hacer esto, tienes más información en el manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Revertir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -guardado -\family default -recargará el documento desde el disco. - Por supuesto, también puedes usar esta opción si rechazas los cambios realizado -s y quieres volver al último documento guardado. - Con -\family sans -Control -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -versiones -\family default - puedes registrar los cambios que has hecho en el documento para que otras - personas puedan identificarlos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Características básicas de edición -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Edición -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Características-básicas-de-edición" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como la mayoría de los procesadores de texto, LyX puede cortar y pegar bloques - de texto, puede desplazarse por carácter, palabra o pantalla completa, - puede borrar palabras o caracteres individuales. - Las cuatro secciones siguientes tratan las operaciones básicas de edición - en LyX. - Comenzaremos con cortar y pegar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como es de suponer, el menú -\family sans -Editar -\family default - tiene los comandos cortar y pegar, entre otros. - Algunos de ellos son especiales y se tratan en secciones posteriores. - Los comandos básicos son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Cortar -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "cut" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Copiar -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "copy" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Pegar -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "paste" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Pegar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -reciente -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Pegado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -especial -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Encontrar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -y -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -reemplazar -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show findreplace" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los tres primeros son evidentes. - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pegar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -También puedes copiar texto entre LyX y otros programas con cortar, copiar - y pegar. - El submenú -\family sans -Pegar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -reciente -\family default - muestra una lista con los últimos términos copiados. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Pegado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Especial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Texto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -simple -\family default -el texto del portapapeles se inserta como párrafos, de manera que cada salto - de línea del texto inicia un párrafo nuevo. - El menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Pegado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Especial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Texto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -simple, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -líneas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -juntas -\family default - insertará todo el texto del portapapeles como -\emph on -un solo -\emph default - párrafo. - Si en el texto hay una línea en blanco se iniciará un nuevo párrafo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reemplazar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encontrar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -La opción -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Encontrar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -y -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -reemplazar -\family default - abre una ventana de diálogo. - Cuando LyX encuentra una palabra o expresión la selecciona. - Pulsando el botón -\family sans -Reemplazar -\family default - se cambia el texto resaltado con el contenido del campo -\family sans -Reemplazar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -con -\family default -. - Si pulsas el botón -\family sans -Encontrar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -siguiente -\family default - LyX irá a la siguiente aparición de la palabra o expresión buscada. - -\family sans -Reemplazar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -todo -\family default - cambia automáticamente todas las apariciones de la expresión buscada. - La opción -\family sans -Distinguir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mayúsculas -\family default - sirve para que la búsqueda considere las mayúsculas de la expresión a encontrar. - Si se marca esta opción, si queremos encontrar p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. - la palabra « -\family typewriter -Test -\family default -» se ignorará la palabra « -\family typewriter -test -\family default -». - La opción -\family sans -Coincidir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sólo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -palabras -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -completas -\family default -hace que LyX busque solamente palabras completas, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej., si buscamos « -\family typewriter -estrella -\family default -» se ignorarán palabras como « -\family typewriter -estrellado -\family default -». - Además, LyX proporciona una función avanzada -\family sans -Encontrar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -y -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -reemplazar -\family default - que se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Encontrar-avanzado" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cosas como las notas, flotantes, etc., se insertan en recuadros que se pueden - disolver. - Esto significa que el recuadro se elimina y su contenido se deja como texto - normal. - Para disolver un recuadro se sitúa el cursor al comienzo del mismo y se - pulsa -\family sans -Retroceso -\family default -, o bien se sitúa el cursor al final y se pulsa -\family sans -Suprimir -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El contenido de un recuadro se selecciona con la combinación de teclas -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "inset-select-all" -\end_inset - -, la combinación -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select" -\end_inset - - selecciona todo el documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Deshacer y rehacer -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Rehacer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Deshacer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Deshacer-y-rehacer" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si cometes un error lo puedes remediar fácilmente. - LyX dispone de una gran capacidad para deshacer/rehacer. - Pulsa -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Deshacer -\family default - para deshacer un error, o clic en el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "undo" -\end_inset - -. - Si accidentalmente deshaces demasiado, usa -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rehacer -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "redo" -\end_inset - - para «deshacer el deshacer». - El mecanismo deshacer está actualmente limitado a 100 pasos para minimizar - sobrecarga de memoria. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ten en cuenta que si deshaces todos los cambios hasta llegar al documento - tal como se guardó la última vez, no es posible rehacer los cambios realizados. - Esto es una consecuencia del límite mencionado de los 100 pasos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Deshacer -\family default -y -\family sans -Rehacer -\family default - funcionan con casi todo en LyX. - Pero tienen algunas peculiaridades. - No se puede -\family sans -Deshacer -\family default -y -\family sans -Rehacer -\family default -por caracteres individuales sino por bloques de texto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Operaciones con el ratón -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Operaciones con el ratón -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Estas son las operaciones básicas con el ratón: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Movimiento -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Pulsa el botón izquierdo -\emph on - -\emph default -del ratón en cualquier punto de la ventana de edición. - El cursor se colocará en el punto correspondiente del texto. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Seleccionar texto -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Mantén pulsado el botón izquierdo -\emph on - -\emph default -del ratón y arrastra. - LyX resalta el texto entre la primera y la última posiciones del ratón. - Usa -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Copiar -\family default - para crear una copia de ese bloque de texto en el -\emph on -buffer -\emph default - de LyX (y en el portapapeles). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Recoloca el cursor y pega el texto con -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Pegar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Insertados (Notas, flotantes, etc.) -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Un -\emph on - -\emph default -clic con el botón izquierdo del ratón sobre su recuadro abre o cierra cualquiera - de ellos. - Un clic derecho abre una ventana de propiedades. - En otra sección de este manual encontrarás más detalles. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Section -Navegación -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Navegación" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Navegación -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX ofrece varias formas de navegar por los documentos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -En el menú -\family sans -Navegar -\family default - se ordenan todas las secciones del documento como submenús que puedes pulsar - para ir a la parte correspondiente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -El menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Navegador de contorno -\family default - o el botón de herramientas -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle toc" -\end_inset - - . -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Estableciendo marcadores mediante -\family sans -Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marcadores, -\family default - y de puede volver a ellos mediante el mismo menú. - Los marcadores se guardan para nuevas sesiones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - - (también -\family sans -Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marcadores\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Navegar atrás -\family default -) lleva a la posición del documento en la que se ha cambiado algo recientemente. - Esto es útil en documentos largos, si has ido o deslizado a otra parte - del documento a comprobar algo y quieres volver a tu última posición editada. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pulsando la tecla -\family sans -F5 -\family default - el texto se desplaza de modo que el cursor queda centrado verticalmente - en el escritorio de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -El navegador de contorno -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El navegador de contorno es el equivalente actual del llamado -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Índice general -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en versiones anteriores de LyX, puesto que su propósito original era mostrar - el índice del contenido del documento. - Sin embargo, el actual Navegador de contorno es mucho más versátil. - En el cuadro desplegable de la parte superior de la ventana de contorno - se puede elegir entre varias listas e índices diferentes de una variedad - de objetos, tales como índices de cuadros y figuras, listas de varios tipos - de notas, etiquetas y referencias (véase la sección -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" - -\end_inset - -), citas (véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliografía" - -\end_inset - -)... - Haciendo clic en cualquiera de ellos el documento se desplazará en la pantalla - hasta la posición correspondiente. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En ciertos casos, al hacer clic derecho sobre un elemento se abre un menú - contextual que permite la modificación directa de dicho elemento. - Por ejemplo, con las citas, el menú contextual permite abrir el diálogo - de citas y modificarlas. - Con los cambios, permite aceptarlos o rechazarlos. - Y así con otros elementos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El campo -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Filtro -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - permite restringir las entradas que deben aparecer en el Navegador. - Por ejemplo, si está abierta la lista de Etiquetas y referencias y quieres - ver solamente las referencias a subsecciones, introduce el texto -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -sub: -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - como filtro y solo se mostrarán las entradas de la lista que contengan - ese texto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la parte inferior del Contorno hay varios botones y similares que permiten - controlar otros aspectos. - La opción -\family sans -Ordenar -\family default - ordena alfabéticamente la lista actual; si no, los elementos aparecen en - el orden en que se encuentran en el documento. - La opción -\family sans -Mantener -\family default - mantiene la visualización actual. - Mantener quiere decir que si, por ejemplo, están desplegadas las subsecciones - de las secciones 2 y 4 y haces clic sobre la sección 3, las subsecciones - de las secciones 2 y 4 permanecerán como están. - Sin la opción -\family sans -Mantener -\family default - éstas se ocultarán y se resaltará la sección 3. - Por último, el deslizador se puede usar para controlar el número de subniveles - de sección que se muestran. - Lo mejor es experimentar con él para ver cómo funciona. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El botón -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/reload.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -refresca el IG (aunque esto no será necesario, normalmente). - Cerca de este hay botones que permiten cambiar la posición de las secciones - en el documento. - Los botones -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/down.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/up.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - mueven las secciones hacia arriba y hacia abajo. - Así, por ejemplo, puedes poner la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 delante de la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.4 o detrás de la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.6. - LyX reordenará automáticamente la numeración. - Con los botones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/promote.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/demote.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - (o los correspondientes atajos de teclado -\family sans -Tab -\family default - y -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Tab -\family default -) puedes cambiar el nivel de una sección. - Por ejemplo, puedes convertir la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 en el capítulo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 o en la subsección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.4.1. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Finalización de entradas / palabras -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Finalización-de-entradas/palabras" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Finalización de entradas y palabras -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Autocompletar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX facilita la finalización automática de palabras mediante la exploración - de todos los documentos que están abiertos en ese momento. - Cada palabra que aparece en estos documentos se añade a una base de datos - que se utiliza para proponer terminaciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La finalización de entradas puede activarse en las preferencias LyX (menú - -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferencias -\family default -) en la sección -\family sans -Edición\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Autocompletar -\family default -. - Con la opción -\family sans -Finalización automática en línea -\family default - la finalización propuesta se muestra directamente tras el cursor. - Con la opción -\family sans -Recuadros emergentes automáticos -\family default - las terminaciones se muestran siempre en un recuadro emergente. - Se puede desactivar el indicador de terminación del cursor desmarcando - la opción -\family sans -Indicador en el cursor -\family default -. - Con las opciones generales puedes definir el tiempo de retardo para la - visualización en línea y para el recuadro emergente, y elegir si las finalizaci -ones largas deberían abreviarse. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX muestra un triangulito detrás del cursor como indicador de que hay finalizac -iones disponibles. - Para aceptar una propuesta utiliza la tecla -\family sans -Tabulador -\family default -. - Puedes entonces pulsar la tecla -\family sans -Tabulador -\family default - para aceptar esa terminación. - Si hay varias terminaciones posibles, se abre un recuadro emergente que - las muestra. - En ese recuadro puedes seleccionar una finalización con el ratón o con - las teclas de flecha, y aceptar la elegida pulsando -\family sans -Entrar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las opciones de finalización para ecuaciones en las preferencias hacen lo - mismo que las correspondientes opciones para texto. - La opción específica de ecuaciones -\family sans -Autocorrección -\family default - permite que los caracteres puedan ser compuestos. - Si, por ejemplo, quieres insertar el carácter -\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ -\end_inset - -, puedes insertar en la ecuación los caracteres -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -=> -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - para obtenerlo. - Esto es una alternativa rápida a la inserción de comandos o al uso de las - barras de herramientas. - La lista de combinaciones de caracteres posibles se encuentra en el archivo - -\family typewriter -autocorrect -\family default -, que está en algún sitio en la carpeta de instalación de LyX. - La autocorrección en ecuaciones puede activarse en cualquier momento pulsando - la tecla de exclamación -\family typewriter -'!' -\family default -. - La tecla -\family typewriter -Espacio -\family default - la desactiva. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Atajos de teclado básicos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Atajos de teclado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Teclado ! Asociaciones de teclas|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Atajos de teclado -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Al menos, hay dos mapas de teclado principales: -\family typewriter -cua -\family default - y -\family typewriter -emacs -\family default -. - LyX usa -\family typewriter -cua -\family default - por omisión, pero se puede cambiar en las preferencias de LyX, en -\family sans -Edición\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Atajos de teclado -\family default -. - (Puedes también ver ahí las combinaciones de teclas o cambiarlas, como - se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Edición-de-los-atajos" - -\end_inset - -.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Algunas teclas, como -\family sans -AvPág -\family default -, -\family sans -RePág -\family default -, o las flechas -\family sans -Izquierda -\family default -, -\family sans -Derecha -\family default -, -\family sans -Arriba -\family default - y -\family sans -Abajo -\family default -, hacen exactamente lo que se supone que hacen. - Otras teclas no: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tab -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Tab" -description "tecla Tabulador" - -\end_inset - - -\family default - No hay tabuladores en LyX. - Si no entiendes esto lee las secciones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Intro-Sangrado-de-párrafos" - -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Entornos-de-párrafo" - -\end_inset - -, especialmente la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Listas" - -\end_inset - -, ahora. - Sí, ahora. - Si aún estás confuso, mira en el -\emph on -Tutorial -\emph default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -En LyX, la tecla Tabulador solo se usa para aceptar propuestas de autocompletar, - desplazar el cursor en cuadros o matrices, o cambiar el nivel de profundidad - en listas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Esc -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Esc" -description "tecla Escape" - -\end_inset - - -\family default - Esta es la tecla «cancelar». - Se usa generalmente para cancelar operaciones. - En otras partes del manual se dan más detalles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Inicio -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -y -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Fin -\family default - Éstas mueven el cursor, respectivamente, al comienzo y al final de la línea, - a menos que estés usando el mapa de Emacs, en cuyo caso llevan al comienzo - y al fin del archivo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay tres teclas modificadoras: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Control -\family default - (Denominada « -\family sans -Ctrl -\family default -» -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Ctrl" -description "tecla Control" - -\end_inset - - en los archivos de documentación). - Tiene un par de usos diferentes, dependiendo de las teclas con las que - se combine: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Con -\family sans -Retroceso -\family default - o -\family sans -Suprimir -\family default -, borra una palabra completa en vez de un carácter. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Con -\family sans -Izquierda -\family default - y -\family sans -Derecha -\family default -, desplaza el cursor por palabras en vez de caracteres. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Con -\family sans -Inicio -\family default - y -\family sans -Fin -\family default -, lleva al inicio y al fin del documento, respectivamente. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Mayúsculas -\family default - (Representada por « -\family sans -Mayúsculas -\family default -» -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Mayúsculas" -description "tecla Mayúsculas" - -\end_inset - - —«Shift»— en los archivos de documentación). - Usada con cualquiera de las teclas de movimiento selecciona el texto entre - las posiciones inicial y final del cursor. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Alt -\family default - (Representada por « -\family sans -Alt -\family default -» -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Alt" -description "tecla Alt o Meta" - -\end_inset - - en los archivos de documentación). - Es la tecla -\family sans -Alt -\family default - en muchos teclados, aunque tu teclado puede tener otra tecla -\family sans -Meta -\family default - distinta. - Si tiene ambas teclas tendrás que probar cuál de ellas funciona realmente - como -\family sans -Alt -\family default -. - Esta tecla hace muchas cosas diferentes, una de ellas activar las -\emph on -teclas de aceleración de menú -\emph default -: usada en combinación con la tecla de la letra subrayada en el nombre de - un menú o un ítem, abre ese menú o acciona el ítem. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Por ejemplo, la secuencia -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Alt+E -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -E -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - abre el diálogo «Estilo del texto», -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Alt+A -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - abre el menú «Archivo». -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Más información relativa al uso de la tecla -\family sans -Alt -\family default - en el manual -\emph on -Atajos de teclado -\family sans -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Aprenderás más y más combinaciones de teclas y atajos de teclado conforme - uses LyX, porque casi todas las acciones muestran, en la barra de estado - situada en la parte inferior de la ventana, un corto mensaje que describe - la acción a realizar y sus correspondientes atajos de teclado. - La notación de las acciones de teclado es muy similar a la usada en esta - documentación, así que no deberías tener problemas en entenderlas. - Sin embargo, ten en cuenta que la tecla modificadora «Mayúsculas» se menciona - de forma explícita, así -\family sans -«Alt+P Mayúsculas+A -\family default -» -\family sans - -\family default -significa -\family sans -Alt+P -\family default - seguido de A mayúscula. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Fundamentos de LyX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Fundamentos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Clases de documento -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Clases -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introducción -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Antes de hacer nada, antes de empezar a escribir, debes decidir qué clase - de documento quieres hacer. - Cada tipo de documento tiene sus propios espacios, encabezados, esquemas - de numeración y demás. - Además, distintos tipos de documento usan distintos entornos de párrafo - y diseñan el título con formato diferente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Una -\emph on -clase de documento -\emph default - describe un grupo de propiedades comunes a un conjunto particular de documentos. - Al establecer la clase de documento, seleccionas automáticamente dichas - propiedades, haciendo más fácil crear el tipo de documento que deseas. - Si no eliges una clase de documento, LyX lo hace por ti, así que el cambio - de clase del documento es de tu incumbencia. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Clases de documento -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Clases -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Clases-de-documento" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes seleccionar una clase en el diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Clase -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -documento -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Selecciona la clase que quieras y haz los ajustes finos que necesites en - las distintas opciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Vista general -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay cuatro clases estándar de documentos en LyX. - Son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Article para artículos sencillos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Report para informes sencillos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Book para escribir libros -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Letter para cartas estilo US -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay además otras clases no estándar que sólo están disponibles en LyX si - están instalados los correspondientes archivos de clase LaTeX, aunque muchos - de ellos ya están incluidos en la mayoría de distribuciones LaTeX. - A continuación se mencionan algunas de ellas; la lista completa con explicacion -es detalladas se encuentra en el capítulo -\emph on -Clases especiales de documentos -\emph default -, en el manual -\emph on -Características adicionales. - -\emph default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -A&A Artículos para publicaciones en el estilo y formato empleado por -\emph on -Astronomy & Astrophysics -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ACS Para publicaciones de la -\emph on -American Chemistry Society -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -AGU Para publicaciones de la -\emph on - American Geophysical Union -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -AMS Diseños para artículos y libros en el estilo y formato de la -\emph on -American Mathematical Society -\emph default - (AMS). - Hay tres variantes disponibles. - El estándar usa un esquema típico de numeración para teoremas, etc. - que antepone el número de sección al número del resultado. - Todos las exposiciones tipo resultado (proposiciones, corolarios y demás) - se secuencian juntos, pero las definiciones, los ejemplos y cosas por el - estilo tienen su propia secuencia. - El esquema de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -numeración secuencial -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - no sitúa el número de sección con cada resultado, sino que los numera a - lo largo del artículo en una secuencia simple. - Cada tipo de resultado sigue su propia secuencia. - También hay un formato que reparte la numeración de relaciones en conjunto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Beamer Formato para presentaciones y transparencias -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Broadway Formato para escribir guiones. - No es una clase de documento de LaTeX, sino una nueva específica de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chess Formato para escribir sobre ajedrez -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Curiculum -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vitae clases para confeccionar currículum vitae -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Elsarticle Formato para publicaciones del grupo -\emph on -Elsevier -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Foils Para hacer transparencias -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hollywood Para escribir guiones para la industria cinematográfica US. - No es una clase de documento de LaTeX, sino una nueva específica de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -IEEEtran Formato para publicaciones del -\emph on -Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers -\emph default - (IEEE) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -IOP Formato para publicaciones del -\emph on -Institute of Physics -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kluwer Formato para publicaciones del grupo -\emph on -Kluwer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -KOMA-Script Una revisión de las clases estándar, ofrece varias características - útiles como formato de encabezados, cálculo automático de espacio de impresión - etc. - (Es la clase de este documento). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Memoir Otra revisión de las clases estándar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Powerdot Formato para presentaciones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -REVTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X Para escribir artículos publicados por: -\emph on -American Physical Society -\emph default - (APS), -\emph on -American Institute of Physics -\emph default - (AIP), y -\emph on -Optical Society of America -\emph default - (OSA). - Esta clase no es totalmente compatible con todas las características de - LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Slides Para hacer transparencias -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -SPIE -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Proceedings Formato para publicaciones de la -\emph on -International Society for Optical Engineering -\emph default - (SPIE) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Springer Formato para publicaciones del grupo -\emph on -Springer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -No entraremos aquí en detalles sobre el uso de las distintas clases de documento. - Puedes encontrar información sobre las clases no estándar en el manual - -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. - Aquí, nos centraremos en repasar algunas de las propiedades comunes a todas - las clases de documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Clases disponibles -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Probablemente notarás que muchas de las clases de documento listadas en - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Clase del documento -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - están marcadas como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -No disponible -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Al abrir un documento que use una de estas clases, aparece un aviso advirtiendo - que para generar salida del documento se requieren archivos que no están - instalados. - De modo que parece que algo va mal. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -No es así. - LyX incluye muchas más clases de documento de las que nunca necesitarás, - y algunas de ellas, como -\family sans -IOP -\family default -, son altamente especializadas. - LyX intenta soportar el mayor número posible de tipos de documento, e incluye - casi un centenar de archivos de formato diferentes, y creciendo. - Ninguna distribución LaTeX instalará por omisión todos los archivos que - podrían necesitarse por algunas clases de documento: son demasiados. - Esto es por lo que algunas clases de documento no están disponibles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si necesitaras una clase de documento -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -No disponible -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, tienes que instalar los archivos del paquete apropiado. - La forma más fácil de saber los archivos que hay que instalar es usar esa - clase de documento para un archivo nuevo: LyX mostrará un aviso en el que - se indicarán los archivos requeridos. - Véase la sección -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Instalación de nuevos paquetes LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - del manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default - para información sobre cómo hacerlo. -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -Aunque LyX proporciona soporte para muchas clases de documento diferentes, - no incluye soporte para todas y cada una de las que los usuarios podrían - necesitar. - Por ejemplo, muchas universidades proporcionan archivos de clases LaTeX - para que se usen en los trabajos que se les vayan a remitir. - El equipo LyX no puede escribir archivos de formato para soportar cada - una de estas clases. - Hay demasiadas. - Afortunadamente, los usuarios pueden escribir sus propios archivos de formato, - y así lo han hecho muchos. - El capítulo 5 del manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default - contiene información sobre la creación de archivos de formato. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Módulos -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Módulos" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Modulos@Módulos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los módulos permiten añadir a un documento características adicionales que - no están disponibles por omisión en la clase de documento elegida. - Por ejemplo, para escritura Braille (impresión en relieve). - Evidentemente esto no está disponible en ninguna clase de documento, así - que hay que cargar el módulo correspondiente en la sección -\family sans -Módulos -\family default - del diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Seleccionando un módulo en la lista se mostrará una descripción del mismo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Algunos módulos requieren paquetes LaTeX o convertidores de formatos de - archivo que no siempre se instalan por omisión. - LyX avisará si falta algún paquete o convertidor requerido y dará información - de lo que hace falta exactamente. - El módulo se puede seguir usando en la edición del documento, pero no se - podrá exportar a PDF o imprimir, puesto que LyX será incapaz de compilar - el archivo LaTeX sin los requisitos ausentes. - Para poder generar la salida habrá que instalar dichos requisitos y después - reconfigurar LyX con -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reconfigurar -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguración de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Véase la sección -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Instalar un nuevo paquete LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en el manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default - para más información sobre la instalación de paquetes requeridos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Notas: -\series default -Algunos módulos requieren otros módulos y ciertos pares de módulos son incompati -bles. - LyX avisará en esos casos. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Formato local -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Formato-local" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Formato local -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los módulos son a LyX lo que los paquetes son a LaTeX: están pensados para - ser usados en una variedad de documentos diferentes, y cuando necesitas - a menudo la misma clase de cosas para diferentes documentos, lo mejor sería - escribir un módulo con ese propósito. - No obstante, algunas veces surgen requerimientos muy concretos para un - solo documento determinado, como algún recuadro específico o cierto estilo - de carácter. - En esos casos, lo que necesitamos es algo como el preámbulo LaTeX de un - documento. - Se trata del -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Formato local -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - de LyX, cuyo uso se describe en el sección -\emph on -Formato local -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Propiedades -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cada clase tiene un conjunto de opciones predeterminadas. - Este cuadro las describe: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -página -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Caras -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Columnas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Nivel máx. - de sección -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -article -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Simple -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Una -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Una -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Sección -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -report -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Simple -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Una -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Una -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Capítulo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -book -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Encabezados -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Dos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Una -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Capítulo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -letter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Simple -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Una -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Una -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -ninguno -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quizás te preguntes qué significa -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Nivel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -máx. - de sección -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Hay varios entornos de párrafo que generan encabezados de sección. - Diferentes clases de documento producen distintos tipos de encabezados - de sección. - Sólo dos usan el encabezado -\family sans -Capítulo -\family default -; el resto no lo hacen y en su lugar empiezan con el encabezado -\family sans -Sección -\family default -. - Algunas clases de documento, como las de cartas, no usan ningún encabezado - de sección. - Además de los encabezados -\family sans -Capítulo -\family default - y -\family sans -Sección, -\family default - hay también -\family sans -Subsección, Subsubsección -\family default - y otros. - Los describiremos detalladamente en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Encabezados" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formato de un documento -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Formato -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Formato-de-documento" - -\end_inset - - -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las propiedades más importantes de los documentos se establecen en el submenú - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -. - En el campo -\family sans -Opciones -\family default -bajo -\family sans - Clase -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -del -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -documento, -\family default - puedes introducir opciones especiales para la clase de documento elegida - en forma de lista separada por comas. - Esto sólo es preciso si LyX no soporta las opciones especiales que quieras - usar. - Para saber más sobre tu clase LaTeX favorita y sus opciones, tienes que - leer su manual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En -\family sans -Diseño -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -de -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -página, -\family default -el -\family sans - Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -encabezado y pie -\family default - controla el tipo de encabezamiento y de numeración de las páginas. - Puedes escoger entre las siguientes cinco opciones: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Predeterminado -\family default - Usa el estilo predeterminado para la clase actual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Vacío -\family default - Sin números de página ni encabezamientos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Simple -\family default - Solo números de página. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Encabezado -\family default - Número de página y el capítulo actual o el título y número de sección, - dependiendo del nivel máximo de secciones de la clase. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Elaborado -\family default - Permite crear encabezamientos y pies de página totalmente configurables - si tienes instalado el paquete -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Encabezados-personalizados" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La separación de párrafos se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Separación-de-párrafos" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tamaño y orientación del papel -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Tamaño del papel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Papel-tamaño-orientación" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración, -\family default -en el apartado -\family sans -Diseño -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -de -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -página -\family default - encontrarás las siguientes opciones: -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tamaño -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -papel -\family default - Elección del tamaño de impresión del papel: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Predeterminado -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -A0 - A6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -B0 - B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -C0 - C6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Carta US, Oficio US, Ejecutivo US -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -JIS B0 - JIS B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Personalizado -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Orientación -\family default - Elige el formato de salida como -\family sans -Retrato -\family default - o -\family sans -Apaisado -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Documento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -con -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dos -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -caras -\family default - Ajusta el espacio para imprimir ambas caras del papel, de modo que el margen - de impresión se adapta para páginas pares e impares. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Márgenes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Márgenes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margenes@Márgenes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Márgenes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los márgenes de la página se establecen en el menú -\family sans -Document -\family default -o -\family sans -\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -. -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si usas la clase de documento KOMA-Script, puedes dejar los valores predetermina -dos, porque KOMA-Script calcula automáticamente el espacio de impresión - en función del formato del papel y el tamaño de letra. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nota importante -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si cambias la clase de un documento, LyX debe convertir -\emph on -todo -\emph default - a la nueva clase. - Esto incluye los entornos de párrafo, algunos de los cuáles son estándar, - los tienen todas las clases de documento; pero algunas clases tienen entornos - de párrafo específicos. - En ese caso, si cambias la clase del documento, LyX marcará los párrafos - cuyo estilo no es reconocido como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -desconocido -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - El nombre del estilo es retenido por si se deseara volver a la clase original. - No obstante, esos párrafos se mostrarán en la salida sin formato especial, - de modo que necesitarás crear un nuevo estilo o bien convertirlos manualmente - a uno de los estilos presentes en la nueva clase de documento. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Sangrado y separación de párrafos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Párrafos ! Sangrado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introducción -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Intro-Sangrado-de-párrafos" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Antes de describir los distintos entornos de párrafo, nos gustaría decir - unas palabras sobre el sangrado de párrafos. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cada cual parece tener sus propias reglas para separar párrafos. - Los americanos suelen sangrar la primera línea de párrafo. - Otros no sangran los párrafos pero ponen espacio extra entre ellos. - Si eliges sangrado para separar párrafos, el -\emph on -primer -\emph default - párrafo de una sección, o detrás de una figura, una ecuación, un cuadro, - una lista, etc., -\emph on -no -\emph default - se sangra. - Sólo se sangran los párrafos siguientes a otro párrafo. - Ten en cuenta que el comportamiento del sangrado puede ser diferente si - usas un lenguaje distinto del inglés. - LaTeX se ocupa de que el sangrado siga las normas del idioma utilizado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El espacio entre párrafos, así como el espacio entre líneas, entre encabezado - y texto —en definitiva, cada uno de los espacios para cada cosa— están - precodificados en LyX. - Como ya hemos dicho, no debes preocuparte por el espacio que hay que añadir - en cada caso. - LyX se ocupa de ello. - De hecho, esos espacios verticales precodificados no son una longitud fija - sino un rango. - Así, Lyx puede ajustar el espacio entre líneas para garantizar que las - figuras caben en una página con texto, para que las secciones no comiencen - al final de una página, y así todo. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX se encarga de esto cuando LyX genera un archivo de salida. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - No obstante, precodificado no significa que no puedas cambiarlo. - LyX te da la posibilidad de cambiar globalmente -\emph on -todos -\emph default - estos espacios precodificados. - Lo explicaremos después. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Separación de párrafos -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Separación-de-párrafos" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Párrafos ! Separación -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para separar párrafos, selecciona -\family sans -Sangrado -\family default - o -\family sans -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical -\family default - en el submenú -\family sans -Diseño -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto -\family default - del diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - para sangrar el comienzo de los párrafos o para añadir espacio vertical - extra entre ellos, respectivamente. - La cantidad de espacio se puede definir en el diálogo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ajuste fino -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además, puedes cambiar la forma de separar un párrafo individual. - Abre el diálogo -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -párrafo -\family default - y cambia el botón -\family sans -Sangrar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -párrafo -\family default - para cambiar el estado actual (atajo -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle" -\end_inset - -). - Si el método global para separar los párrafos está establecido en -\family sans -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical, -\family default - el botón -\family sans -Sangrar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -párrafo -\family default - será ignorado aunque lo marques (no puedes sangrar un párrafo con él). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cambiar el método de separación de un solo párrafo sólo sería necesario - para hacer algún ajuste fino. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Espacio entre líneas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Párrafos ! Espacio entre líneas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\family default -puedes definir el espacio entre líneas para todo el documento en el submenú - -\family sans -Diseño -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto. -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Para que esto funcione el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -setspace -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! setspace -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default - debe estar instalado. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Para un párrafo determinado, ese espacio se puede definir en el diálogo - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -párrafo -\family default -, pero debería usarse de manera excepcional porque el espacio vertical se - define normalmente en el estilo del entorno. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Entornos de párrafo -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Párrafos ! Entornos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Entornos-de-párrafo" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entornos de párrafo|( -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Visión general -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los entornos de párrafo corresponden a las diversas secuencias de comandos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -begin{ -\emph on -environment -\emph default -} ... - -\backslash -end{ -\emph on -environment -\emph default -} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -en un archivo LaTeX corriente. - Si no conoces LaTeX, o el concepto de entorno de párrafo te suena a chino, - es urgente que leas el -\emph on -Tutorial -\emph default -. - Además, el -\emph on -Tutorial -\emph default - contiene muchos más ejemplos que esta sección. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un entorno de párrafo es simplemente un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -contenedor -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - que le da al párrafo ciertas propiedades. - Esto puede incluir un estilo determinado de letra, márgenes diferentes, - un esquema de numeración, etiquetas, etc. - Además, puedes «anidar» distintos entornos dentro de otro, lo que permite - a un entorno heredar algunas de las propiedades del otro. - Los diversos entornos de párrafo evitan totalmente la necesidad de los - confusos tabuladores, de ajustes de márgenes al vuelo, y otros manejos - heredados de los tiempos de las máquinas de escribir. - Hay varios entornos de párrafo que son específicos de una clase particular - de documento. - Aquí sólo nos ocuparemos de los más corrientes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para escoger un nuevo entorno de párrafo, usa el menú desplegable -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/es_ToolbarEnvBox.png - scale 70 - -\end_inset - - que hay a la izquierda en la barra de herramientas. - LyX cambiará el entorno de -\emph on -todo -\emph default - el párrafo en el que esté el cursor. - También puedes cambiar el entorno de un grupo de párrafos si los seleccionas - antes de escoger el nuevo entorno. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Observa que al pulsar -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - se creará, típicamente, un párrafo nuevo en el entorno -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. - Decimos -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -típicamente -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - porque si estás en uno de estos entornos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Cita -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Citar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Verso -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Enumeración -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Enumeración* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Descripción -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Lista -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX mantiene el entorno de párrafo vigente al pulsar -\family sans -Entrar -\family default -, sin cambiarlo a -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. - Además se mantiene la profundidad de anidación. - (Más detalles sobre anidación en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Anidación" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Normal -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Normal -\family default - es el entorno de párrafo predeterminado para la mayoría de las clases de - documento. - En este entorno se crea un párrafo simple, sin características especiales. - Cuando LyX reinicia el entorno de párrafo escoge éste. - De hecho, el párrafo que estás leyendo (y la mayor parte de ellos en este - manual) están en el entorno -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes anidar un párrafo en entorno -\family sans -Normal -\family default - en casi cualquier otra cosa, pero no se puede anidar nada en un párrafo - en entorno -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Título del documento -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos !Título -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En LaTeX, la página del título tiene tres partes: el título en sí, el nombre(s) - del autor(es) y una -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -nota -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - para agradecimientos o información de contacto. - En ciertas clases de documento LaTeX las coloca en una página separada - junto a la fecha actual. - En otras clases de documento el título va al principio de la primera página. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX provee una interfaz para los comandos del título mediante los entornos - de párrafo -\family sans -Título -\family default -, -\family sans -Autor -\family default - y -\family sans -Fecha -\family default -. - He aquí cómo usarlos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Pon el título de tu documento en el entorno -\family sans -Título -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Pon el nombre del autor en el entorno -\family sans -Autor -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Si quieres cierta apariencia para la fecha, una fecha fija, o sustituir - la fecha por algún texto, usa el entorno -\family sans -Fecha. - -\family default - Observa que el uso de este entorno es opcional. - Si no lo empleas, LaTeX insertará automáticamente la fecha actual. - Si no quieres poner fecha, usa la opción -\family sans -Suprimir fecha por omisión en primera página -\family default - en el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Clase del documento -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes usar notas al pie para agradecimientos o información de contactos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Encabezados de sección -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encabezados de sección -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Encabezados" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay varios entornos de párrafo para generar encabezados de sección. - LyX se cuida de numerarlos por ti. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Encabezados numerados -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encabezados de sección ! Numerados -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay 7 tipos de encabezados de sección numerados, que son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Parte -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Capítulo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Sección -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Subsección -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Subsubsección -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Párrafo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Subpárrafo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX etiqueta cada encabezado con series de números separados por puntos. - Los números te indican dónde estás en el documento. - A diferencia de los demás encabezados, las -\family sans -Partes -\family default - se ordenan con letras. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los encabezados subdividen todo el documento en diferentes trozos de texto. - Por ejemplo, supón que estás escribiendo un libro: Divides el texto en - capítulos. - LyX hace un agrupamiento parecido: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Las -\family sans -Partes -\family default - se dividen en -\family sans -Capítulos -\family default - o -\family sans -Secciones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Los -\family sans -Capítulos -\family default - se dividen en -\family sans -Secciones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Las S -\family sans -ecciones -\family default - se dividen en -\family sans -Subsecciones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Las -\family sans -Subsecciones -\family default - se dividen en -\family sans -Subsubsecciones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Las -\family sans -Subsubsecciones -\family default - se dividen en -\family sans -Párrafos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Los -\family sans -Párrafos -\family default - se dividen en -\family sans -Subpárrafos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - No todos los tipos de documento usan el encabezado -\family sans -Capítulo -\family default - como primer nivel de división. - En esos casos, el encabezado de primer nivel es la -\family sans -Sección -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Así, si usas el entorno -\family sans -Subsubsección -\family default - para iniciar una nueva sub-subsección, LyX la etiqueta con su número, junto - con los números de subsección, sección y, si procede, capítulo en los que - se encuentra. - Por ejemplo, la quinta sección del segundo capítulo de este libro tiene - la etiqueta -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -2.5 -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Encabezados no numerados -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encabezados de sección ! No numerados -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los encabezados de sección sin numerar tienen un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -* -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - al final del nombre. - Trabajan como sus homólogos numerados pero no aparecen en el índice general, - véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:IG" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Cambiar el número de niveles numerados -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Profundidad-de-numeración" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes cambiar qué niveles de sección serán numerados y cuáles aparecerán - en el Índice General. - Ahora bien, no eliminas ninguno de los niveles; esto está preestablecido - en la clase de documento. - Ciertas clases empiezan con -\family sans -Capítulo -\family default - y bajan hasta el nivel -\family sans -Subpárrafo -\family default -. - Otras empiezan en -\family sans -Sección -\family default -. - De igual forma, no todas las clases numeran todos los niveles de división. - La mayoría no numeran -\family sans -Párrafo -\family default - ni -\family sans -Subpárrafo -\family default -. - Esto lo puedes cambiar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Abre el diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - En -\family sans -Numeración -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -e -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -IG -\family default - verás dos contadores deslizantes. - El llamado -\family sans -Numeración -\family default - controla hasta qué nivel se numera la jerarquía de encabezados. - El otro controla qué encabezados deben figurar en el índice general. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Encabezados con Título breve -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encabezados de sección ! Títulos breves -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Títulos breves -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Títulos-breves" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Algunos títulos de capítulo o sección, como el presente, pueden resultar - demasiado largos. - Esto puede ser problemático cuando el espacio horizontal es limitado. - Por ejemplo, si el encabezado de página debe mostrar el título de la sección - actual, un título largo puede invadir los márgenes de página y queda fatal. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX permite especificar un título breve para encabezados de sección. - Este se usa en el encabezado de página y en el índice general actual, evitando - el problema mencionado. - Para poner un título breve, usa el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Título -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -breve -\family default -. - Así se inserta un cuadro etiquetado -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -opt -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (por «optativo») que te permite introducir el texto del título. - Esto también trabaja para encabezados en flotantes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El título de esta sección es un buen ejemplo de esta característica. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Información especial -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Lo siguiente se aplica a todos los encabezados de sección: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -No puedes anidar nada en estos entornos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -No puedes poner notas al margen en ninguno de estos entornos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Las ecuaciones sólo se pueden poner en línea en estos entornos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Puedes usar etiquetas y referencias cruzadas a sus números. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Espacios para Citas y Versos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX tiene tres entornos para escribir citas y poesías. - Son -\family sans -Cita -\family default -, -\family sans -Citar -\family default -, y -\family sans -Verso -\family default -. - Olvida el tener que cambiar espacios de línea y enredar con los márgenes. - Estos tres entornos de párrafo ya lo tienen incorporado. - Todos amplían el margen izquierdo y añaden un poco de espacio extra sobre - y bajo el texto que contienen. - También permiten anidar, así que puedes poner un -\family sans -Verso -\family default - en una -\family sans -Cita -\family default -, así como en algún otro entorno de párrafo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay otra característica en estos tres entornos: cuando inicias un nuevo - párrafo -\emph on -no -\emph default - se restablece el entorno -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. - Así, puedes escribir tu verso y alegremente pulsar -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - sin preocuparte de cambiar el entorno cada vez. - Por supuesto, esto implica que una vez terminado el poema debes cambiar - manualmente al nuevo entorno. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Citar y Cita -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Citar" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Citas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Una vez descritas las semejanzas de estos tres entornos, ahora le toca a - las diferencias. - -\family sans -Citar -\family default - y -\family sans -Cita -\family default - son idénticos excepto en una cosa: -\family sans -Citar -\family default - usa espacio extra para separar párrafos y nunca sangra la primera línea. - -\family sans -Cita -\family default - -\emph on -siempre -\emph default - sangra la primera línea de un párrafo y usa en todo el mismo espaciado - de línea. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí hay un ejemplo de entorno -\family sans -Citar -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Este es un entorno -\family sans -Citar -\family default -. - Puedo seguir escribiendo y extender esta línea más y más hasta que se quiebra. - ¡Observa: sin sangrado! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Este es el segundo párrafo de esta cita. - De nuevo, no hay sangrado, pero hay espacio extra entre éste y el anterior - párrafo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí hay otro ejemplo, esta vez en el entorno -\family sans -Cita -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Este es un entorno -\family sans -Cita -\family default -. - Si sigues escribiendo verás el sangrado. - Si en tu país se usa un estilo en el que los párrafos nuevos se sangran - en la primera línea, ¡éste es el tuyo! Bueno, -\emph on -si -\emph default - estuvieras citando otro texto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Aquí hay un párrafo nuevo. - Podría divagar y divagar como un político en elecciones, pero te aburriría. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como muestra el ejemplo, -\family sans -Citar -\family default - es para los que acostumbran separar párrafos con espacio extra. - Éstos pondrían las citas en un entorno -\family sans -Citar. - -\family default - Los que prefieren separar párrafos con sangrado usarán el entorno -\family sans -Cita -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Verso -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Párrafos ! Verso -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Poesía -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Verso" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Verso -\family default - es un entorno de párrafo para poemas, rimas, versos y demás. - Un ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Esto es un Verso -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -¡Que yo no ensayé! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Podría ser mucho peor. - Esta línea debería ser larga, larga, tan larga que se quiebra. - En pantalla se ve bien, pero en la versión para imprimir las líneas extras - se sangran un poco más que la primera. - De acuerdo, así se convierte en prosa y no rima más. - Demándame. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Para quebrar una línea -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Y hacer que las cosas se vean bien -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Usa -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como puedes ver, -\family sans -Verso -\family default - no sangra los márgenes. - Cada estrofa del poema está en su propio párrafo. - Para separar las líneas individuales de una estrofa, usa la función -\family typewriter -salto-de-línea, -\family default - -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Listas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Listas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX tiene cuatro entornos de párrafo para crear distintas clases de listas. - En los entornos -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default - y -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -, LyX etiqueta los ítems de la lista con marcas o números, respectivamente. - En los entornos -\family sans -Descripción -\family default - y -\family sans -Lista -\family default -, LyX destaca de alguna forma la primera palabra . - Los detalles individuales de cada tipo de lista los veremos después de - describir sus características generales comunes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Características generales -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los cuatro entornos de párrafo para listas difieren de los demás entornos - en varias cosas. - En primer lugar, LyX trata cada párrafo como un ítem de la lista. - Al pulsar -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - -\emph on -no -\emph default - se restablece el entorno -\family sans -Normal -\family default -, se mantiene el entorno actual y se genera un nuevo ítem en el mismo nivel - de profundidad de anidación. - Para crear un nuevo ítem en un nivel menor de profundidad de anidación - hay que teclear -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default -. - Si se teclea esto en un primer nivel de una lista se vuelve al entorno - -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes anidar listas de cualquier tipo dentro de otra lista. - De hecho, LyX cambia las marcas en algunos ítems, dependiendo de cómo están - anidados. - Si piensas usar cualquiera de los entornos de lista, te sugerimos que leas - toda la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Anidación" - -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Enumeración* -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas ! Enumeración* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Enumeración*" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En primer lugar describiremos con detalle el entorno de listas no numeradas, - -\family sans -Enumeración*. - -\family default - Tiene las siguientes propiedades: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Cada ítem tiene una marca o símbolo particular como etiqueta. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -LyX usa el mismo símbolo para todos los ítems de cada nivel dado de profundidad. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -El símbolo aparece al comienzo de la primera línea. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Los ítems pueden tener cualquier longitud. - LyX encaja automáticamente el margen izquierdo, de acuerdo con la situación - en que esté la lista -\family sans -Enumeración*. - -\family default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Si anidas una lista -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default - dentro de otra, la marca cambia a otra nueva. - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Hay cuatro símbolos distintos para los cuatro niveles de anidación. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -LyX muestra siempre el mismo símbolo en pantalla. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Anidación" - -\end_inset - - para una explicación completa. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Por supuesto, esta explicación también era un ejemplo de lista -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default -. - Este entorno de lista es aconsejable para listas en las que el orden no - importa. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hemos dicho que los distintos niveles usan distintos símbolos como etiquetas. - Aquí hay un ejemplo con las cuatro posibilidades. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "np:N.del-t.:-item" - -\end_inset - -N. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -del t. -\emph default -: En la salida del documento en español las marcas son diferentes de las - que se describen; la causa se explica en la pág. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand pageref -reference "sub:En-español" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -La marca para el primer nivel de -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default - es un punto grueso, o topo. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -La marca del segundo nivel es una raya. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -El tercer nivel tiene un asterisco. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -La marca del cuarto nivel es un punto centrado. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Vuelta al tercer nivel. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Vuelta al segundo nivel. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Vuelta al nivel más externo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Estas son las marcas predeterminadas para una lista -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default -. - Puedes personalizar como estas marcas -\lang english -are displayed in the output -\lang spanish - en el submenú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\family default - diálogo -\family sans -Marcas -\family default -. - -\lang english -These customizations are not displayed in LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Observa cómo el espacio entre ítems decrece al aumentar la profundidad. - Explicaremos la anidación y los trucos factibles para las profundidades - en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Anidación" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Enumeración -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas ! Enumeración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Enumeración" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El entorno -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - se usa para crear listas numeradas y esquemas. - Sus propiedades son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Cada ítem se etiqueta con un número o letra. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Dependiendo de la profundidad. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -LyX contabiliza automáticamente los ítems y los actualiza adecuadamente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Cada nuevo entorno -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - reinicia la cuenta a uno. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Como en el entorno -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default -, el entorno -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Compensa los ítems en relación al margen izquierdo. - Los ítems pueden tener cualquier longitud. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Reduce el espacio entre ítems al aumentar la profundidad. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Usa diferentes etiquetas según la profundidad. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Permite hasta cuatro niveles de anidación. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Las distintas etiquetas para cada nivel de profundidad en una lista numerada, - -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -, son las que se muestran en el siguiente ejemplo: -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -N. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -del t. -\emph default -: En la salida del documento en español las etiquetas son diferentes de - las que se describen; la causa se explica en la pág. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand pageref -reference "sub:En-español" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -El primer nivel usa números arábigos seguidos de un punto. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -El segundo usa letras minúsculas y paréntesis. - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -El tercer nivel usa números romanos en minúscula y punto. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -El cuarto usa letras mayúsculas y punto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Observa de nuevo la disminución de espacio entre ítems al aumentar la profundida -d de entorno. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Vuelta al tercer nivel. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Vuelta al segundo nivel. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Vuelta al nivel más externo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes personalizar el tipo de numeración en el entorno -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -, véase sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Listas-personalizadas" - -\end_inset - -. - Estos cambios sólo se aprecian en la versión impresa, no en LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En cuanto a anidación en entornos -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - hay más de lo visto aquí. - Para saber más deberías leer la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Anidación" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection* -Enumeración* y Enumeración en español -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:En-español" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -N. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -del t. -\emph default -: Este apartado no está en el documento original. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si el idioma establecido en la configuración predeterminada de documentos - es el español, -\family sans - -\family default -todos los documentos nuevos usan este idioma. - Por omisión, LyX carga el paquete -\series bold -babel -\series default - con la opción del idioma del documento y, al procesar el archivo con LaTeX, - interviene el estilo -\family typewriter -spanish -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El estilo -\family typewriter -spanish -\family default - establece por omisión un conjunto de traducciones y características tipográfica -s adaptadas a los usos propios del español. - En particular, las marcas de los ítems de una lista sin numerar (entorno - -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -*) que aparecen en el documento impreso no son como las que se han descrito - en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Enumeración*" - -\end_inset - -. - Para cada uno de los cuatro niveles las marcas son, respectivamente: -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -raisebox{.2ex}{ -\backslash -rule{.7ex}{.7ex}} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - • -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\circ$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\diamond$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las marcas predefinidas por -\family typewriter -spanish -\family default - para una -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -* -\family sans - -\family default -se pueden cambiar en el diálogo -\family sans -Marcas -\family default - ( -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -) o mediante los siguientes comandos, que se escriben en código TeX en el - texto del documento: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -spanishdashitems -\series default -hace que todas las listas no numeradas siguientes en el documento lleven - como etiqueta una raya, —, en todos los niveles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -spanishsignitems -\series default - hace que todas las listas no numeradas siguientes al comando usen como - etiquetas para cada nivel los símbolos: -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - • -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\circ$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\diamond$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\triangleright$ -\end_inset - - , respectivamente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En cuanto a las etiquetas de las listas numeradas, -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -, las que se muestran en la salida impresa para los distintos niveles son - de la forma: 1. - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\emph on -a -\emph default -) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\emph on -a -\emph default - -\begin_inset Formula $'$ -\end_inset - -, respectivamente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A partir de la versión -\family typewriter -5.0h -\family default -, -\family typewriter -spanish -\family default - ofrece la posibilidad de anular sus valores predefinidos de marcas y etiquetas - mediante las opciones de paquete «es-nolists», «es-noitemize» y «es-noenumerate -», insertando en el preámbulo LaTeX del documento el comando: -\family typewriter - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -def -\backslash -spanishoptions{opción} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Según la opción elegida, en la salida se imprimirán en todas las listas, - solo en -\family typewriter - -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default - o solo en -\family sans -Enumeración, -\family default - respectivamente, las etiquetas predefinidas por LyX/LaTeX en vez de las - predefinidas por -\family typewriter -spanish -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota -\series default -: Debido a un conflicto entre -\series bold -spanish-babel -\series default -e -\series bold -hyperref, -\series default - si se habilita el soporte hyperref en el documento el comando anterior - deja de funcionar. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Más información sobre opciones y comandos de -\family typewriter -spanish -\family default - en su página web, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "spanish" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Descripción -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas ! Descripción -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A diferencia de los dos entornos anteriores, la lista -\family sans -Descripción -\family default - no tiene marcas fijas. - En vez de ello, LyX destaca la «primera palabra» de la primera línea, por - ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ejemplo: Esto es un ejemplo de entorno -\family sans -Descripción -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX escribe la etiqueta en negrita y pone un espacio extra ante el resto - de la línea. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por «primera palabra» entendemos que la primera pulsación de la tecla -\family sans -Espacio -\family default - en cada ítem da fin a la etiqueta. - Si quieres poner más de una palabra como etiqueta del ítem debes usar un - -\family sans -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -protegido -\family default -. - (Con -\family sans -Ctrl+Espacio -\family default - o con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -protegido -\family default -. - Véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-protegido" - -\end_inset - -) Un ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Segundo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ejemplo: -\family sans -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -protegido -\family default - entre dos palabras de la etiqueta en una lista -\family sans -Descripción -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Empleo: Podrías usar el entorno -\family sans -Descripción -\family default - para cosas como definiciones y teoremas. - O para poner determinada palabra separada del texto que describe. - No es buena idea usar -\family sans -Descripción -\family default - para describir una frase completa. - Para esto es mejor emplear -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default - o -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - y anidar en él un párrafo -\family sans -Normal. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Anidación: Puedes anidar entornos -\family sans -Descripción -\family default - dentro de otros entornos de lista. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Observa que después de la primera línea, LyX sangra las siguientes respecto - a ella. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Etiquetado -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas ! Etiquetado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El entorno -\family sans -Etiquetado -\family default - es una extensión a LaTeX en LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como el entorno -\family sans -Descripción, -\family default - la -\family sans -Lista -\family default - tiene etiquetas definidas por el usuario para cada ítem. - Las propiedades de este entorno de lista son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -etiquetas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ítem LyX usa la «primera palabra» como etiqueta. - El primer -\family sans -Espacio -\family default - en la primera línea de un ítem finaliza la etiqueta. - Si necesitas más de una palabra pon espacios protegidos, como se ha descrito - antes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -márgenes Como se ve, LyX pone márgenes diferentes para la etiqueta y el - resto del ítem. - El texto tiene un margen izquierdo mayor, igual a la anchura predeterminada - de etiqueta más un pequeño espacio extra. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -anchura -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -etiqueta LyX escoge la mayor de estas dos opciones para el margen izquierdo: - la anchura de la etiqueta, o la anchura predeterminada. - Si la anchura de la etiqueta es mayor, la etiqueta se «extiende» en la - primera línea. - En otras palabras, el texto de la primera línea no se alinea con el margen - izquierdo del resto del texto del ítem. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -anchura -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -predeterminada Puedes fijar esta anchura para asegurar que el texto de todos - los ítems en un entorno -\family sans -Etiquetado -\family default - tienen el mismo margen izquierdo. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Para cambiar la anchura por omisión, selecciona los ítems en la lista. - Ahora, en el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -párrafo -\family default -(botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -) -\family sans -, -\family default - el texto escrito en -\family sans -Etiqueta -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -más -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -larga -\family default - bajo -\family sans -Ancho -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -de -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -etiqueta -\family default - determina la anchura predeterminada. - Puedes poner aquí el texto de tu etiqueta más larga, aunque sugerimos escribir - la letra «M» varias veces. - Es el carácter más ancho y es una unidad de anchura estándar en LaTeX. - Usando «M» como unidad no necesitas cambiar el contenido del cuadro -\family sans -Etiqueta -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -más -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -larga -\family default - cada vez que cambies una etiqueta en un entorno -\family sans -Lista -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -La anchura predefinida es la longitud de «00.00.0000» (equivalente a 6 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -M). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Deberías emplear el entorno -\family sans -Etiquetado -\family default - de la misma manera que -\family sans -Descripción -\family default -: Cuando necesites que una palabra sobresalga del texto que describe. - El entorno -\family sans -Etiquetado -\family default - te permite otra manera de hacerlo con un formato distinto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes anidar entornos -\family sans -Etiquetado -\family default - en otras listas. - Funcionan igual que los otros entornos de párrafo tipo lista. - Lee la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Anidación" - -\end_inset - - para saber más. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aún queda otra característica de -\family sans -Etiquetado -\family default -: Como ves en los ejemplos, LyX, por omisión, alinea las etiquetas a la - izquierda. - Puedes cambiar esto con -\family sans -Relleno -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -horizontal -\family default - adicional. - Explicaremos el -\family sans -Relleno -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -horizontal -\family default -en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-horizontal" - -\end_inset - -. - Unos ejemplos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -Izquierda Predeterminado para etiquetas de ítems en una -\family sans -Etiquetado -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Derecha Un -\family sans -Relleno horizontal -\family default - previo ajusta la etiqueta a la derecha. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Centro -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - Un -\family sans -Relleno horizontal -\family default - al principio y otro al final la centra. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Listas personalizadas -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Listas-personalizadas" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas ! Personalizadas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para usar las funciones descritas en esta sección hay que cargar el módulo - -\family sans -Listas personalizadas (enumitem) -\family default - en la configuración del documento. - Esto permite usar las funciones del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Listas de enumeración personalizadas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas ! Enumeración ! Personalizadas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La numeración predeterminada de las listas numeradas se puede cambiar añadiendo - un argumento opcional (menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Título breve -\family default -) al primer ítem de cada nivel en la lista. - Añades el comando -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -roman{enumi} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -en código TeX (atajo -\family sans -Ctrl-L -\family default -). -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Más sobre código TeX en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Código-TeX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - De esta manera -\emph on -enumi -\emph default - es el contador de numeración en el primer nivel. - El comando -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default - genera el contador como número romano en minúsculas. - Para números romanos en mayúsculas reemplaza -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default - por -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman -\series default -. - Para usar números arábigos usa -\series bold - -\backslash -arabic -\series default -. - Para -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -numerar -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - los ítems con letras mayúsculas o minúsculas, respectivamente, usa -\series bold - -\backslash -Alph -\series default - o -\series bold - -\backslash -alph -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - Solo se pueden numerar 26 ítems con letras porque está limitado a caracteres - únicos. - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para cambiar la numeración de los subniveles de la lista, reemplaza el -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -i -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - del comando por el número romano en minúsculas correspondiente al nivel - ( -\emph on -enumi -\emph default -, -\emph on -enumii -\emph default -, -\emph on -enumiii -\emph default -, -\emph on -enumiv -\emph default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un ejemplo de lista con numeración personalizada: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Nivel 1 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Nivel 2 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Nivel 2 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Nivel 3 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Nivel 4 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -N. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -del t. -\emph default -: En español no se usan los números romanos en minúscula. - Por eso, el estilo -\family sans -spanish-babel -\family default - cambia automáticamente -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default - por -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Se han empleado los siguientes comandos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -donde el comando -\series bold - -\backslash -emph{} -\series default - pone estilo énfasis y -\series bold - -\backslash -bf{} -\series default - negrita en las etiquetas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - Si cambias la etiqueta de un nivel de la lista se usará para todas las - siguientes listas hasta que cambies de nuevo la definición. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Enumeración reanudada -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas ! Enumeración ! Reanudada -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las listas numeradas se pueden reanudar después de párrafos intermedios: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -arabic{enumi}. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -primero -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -vuelta a la numeración predeterminada -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -segundo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -texto normal -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume -reanudada -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para reanudar la numeración de una lista usa el estilo -\family sans -Enumeración-Reanudar -\family default -. - En LyX se muestra en azul para indicar que es una lista reanudada y que - se corregirá en el documento de salida. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - Si no hay numeración previa para continuar se obtendrá un error de LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si deseas continuar la lista con un número diferente al que corresponde, - o iniciar una nueva enumeración con un número definido, se consigue añadiendo - un argumento opcional al primer ítem de una nueva enumeración normal. - Se inserta el comando -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -start=número -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -donde -\emph on -número -\emph default - es el número con el que se desea continuar la lista. - Un ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -primer ítem -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -segundo ítem -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enumeración comenzando con un valor dado: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -start=4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Esta enumeración comienza por 4 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Espacios en listas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas ! Espacios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En ciertos casos podrías querer cambiar el espacio vertical entre los ítems - de una lista. - Por ejemplo, si consideras que el espacio predeterminado es excesivo en - este caso: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Lista no numerada -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -con espacio estándar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes disminuir el espacio añadiendo un argumento opcional al primer ítem - de la lista. - Añade el comando -\series bold -nolistsep -\series default - para eliminar el espacio adicional propio de las listas, por ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -nolistsep -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Lista no numerada -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -sin espacio vertical -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -adicional -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para añadir espacio hay varios comandos proporcionados por el paquete LaTeX - -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Para más información consulta su documentación -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -También hay varios comandos para variar el espacio horizontal y la sangría. - Aquí hay un ejemplo donde se ha puesto una sangría como la de los párrafos - del documento y la etiqueta se ha separado 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm, con lo que el número aparece en el margen de la página: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent= -\backslash -parindent, labelsep=2cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Enumeración -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -con sangría negativa -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Personalización adicional -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listas ! Personalización -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El estilo de la lista descripción se puede cambiar con los comandos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font=definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -cambia la tipografía de la etiqueta, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -style=definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -establece el estilo de la lista. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un ejemplo donde se han usado los comandos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Radiación -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ionizante: -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -La radiación ionizante consiste en ondas electromagnéticas o partículas - con la energía suficiente para arrancar electrones de átomos o moléculas, - y por tanto ionizándolos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Conteo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -referencias: En computación es una técnica para contabilizar el número de - referencias, punteros o -\emph on -handles -\emph default - a un recurso como un objeto, bloque de memoria, espacio de disco u otros. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay muchos más comandos y funciones disponibles en el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Más información en su documentación, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cartas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cartas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Introducción a -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - y -\family sans -Dirección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -d -\family sans -erecha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aunque LyX tiene clases de documento para cartas ( -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -letter -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -), también dispone de dos entornos de párrafo llamados -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - y -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -derecha. - -\family default - Para usar las clases para cartas, tienes que usar los entornos de párrafo - específicos en determinado orden, si no LaTeX gasta bromas. - Sin embargo, puedes usar los entornos -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - y -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -derecha -\family default - donde quieras sin problemas. - Puedes incluso anidarlos en otros entornos, aunque no puedes anidar nada - en ellos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Evidentemente, el uso de -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - y -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -derecha -\family default - no está limitado a las cartas. - -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -derecha, -\family default - en particular, es útil para crear títulos de artículos como los que se - utilizan en algunas publicaciones académicas europeas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Forma de empleo -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Empleo-direcciones" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El entorno -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - da al texto el estilo de una dirección, que también se usa para la apertura - y la firma en algunos países. - El entorno -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -derecha -\family default - da al texto el estilo de una dirección alineada a la derecha, que se emplea - para los datos del remitente y la fecha en algunos países. - Ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Address -Dirección a la derecha -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Quién soy -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Dónde estoy -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -¿Cuándo? ¿Qué es hoy? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esto era -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -derecha -\family default -. - Observa que todas las líneas tienen el mismo margen izquierdo, el que pone - LyX para llenar el bloque mayor de texto en una línea sencilla. - Y aquí un ejemplo de -\family sans -Dirección -\family default -, para los datos del destinatario: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Quién eres tú -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Dónde lo envío -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Tu población, C.P. - o país -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como ves, ambos entornos añaden espacio extra entre ellos y el siguiente - párrafo. - Si pulsas -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - en cualquiera de estos entornos, LyX reinicia la profundidad y pone entorno - -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. - Esto tiene sentido porque -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - funciona como -\family typewriter -salto-de-párrafo -\family default -, y las líneas individuales de una dirección no son párrafos. - De manera que has de usar -\family typewriter -salto-de-línea -\family default - ( -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default - o el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -línea -\family default -) para iniciar línea nueva en un entorno -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - o -\family sans -Dirección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -derecha -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Escritos académicos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los escritos académicos suelen comenzar con un resumen y finalizar con una - bibliografía o una lista de referencias. - LyX dispone de entornos para ambos tipos de párrafo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Resumen -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Resumen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El entorno -\family sans -Resumen -\family default - se usa para el resumen de un artículo. - Técnicamente, se puede usar este entorno en cualquier sitio, pero sólo - debería usarse al principio del documento, tras el título. - Tampoco deberías molestarte en intentar anidar un -\family sans -Resumen -\family default - en algo o viceversa. - No funciona. - El entorno -\family sans -Resumen -\family default - sólo se aplica en las clases -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -article -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -report -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Las clases de documento -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -book -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - lo ignoran totalmente, y sería ridículo usar -\family sans -Resumen -\family default - en cartas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El entorno -\family sans -Resumen -\family default - hace varias cosas por ti. - Primero, pone una etiqueta -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Resumen -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - centrada sobre el texto. - La etiqueta y el texto se separan con algo de espacio extra. - Segundo, usa un tamaño de letra menor, como se podría esperar. - Por último, añade un poco de espacio vertical extra ante el texto que sigue. - Ahora bien, así es como aparece en pantalla en LyX. - El aspecto en la salida depende de la clase de artículo o informe elegida. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Al pulsar -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - no se cambia el entorno de párrafo, el nuevo párrafo seguirá estando en - -\family sans -Resumen. - -\family default - Por tanto, debes cambiar tú mismo el entorno de párrafo cuando acabes el - resumen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/Resumen.pdf - clip - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Párrafo-en" - -\end_inset - -Párrafo en un entorno -\family sans -Resumen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nos gustaría poner directamente un ejemplo de -\family sans -Resumen, -\family default - pero como este documento es clase -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -book -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, no podemos. - Lo hemos insertado como figura -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Párrafo-en" - -\end_inset - -. - Si nunca habías oído hablar de un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -resumen -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, puedes ignorar sin problema este entorno. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Bibliografía -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliografía -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Biblio_entorno" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El entorno -\family sans -Bibliografía -\family default - se usa para listar referencias. - Técnicamente, se puede usar este entorno en cualquier sitio, pero sólo - debería usarse al final del documento. - Anidar -\family sans -Bibliografía -\family default - en algo o viceversa no funciona. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Al abrir un entorno -\family sans -Bibliografía, -\family default - LyX añade un gran espacio vertical seguido por el encabezado -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Bibliografía -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Referencias -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, según la clase de documento. - El encabezado va en letra negrita grande. - Cada párrafo de la -\family sans -Bibliografía -\family default - es una entrada de referencia. - Así que pulsar -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - no reinicia el entorno de párrafo, el nuevo sigue siendo -\family sans -Bibliografía. - -\family default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay otra forma generalmente mejor de incluir referencias en un documento - usando una base de datos BibTeX. - Para una descripción detallada del manejo de la bibliografía en LyX, echa - una ojeada a la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliografía" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Código LyX -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Párrafos! Código LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Código-LyX" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El entorno -\family sans -Código-LyX -\family default - es otra extensión de LyX. - Escribe el texto en estilo máquina de escribir. - Trata la tecla -\family sans -Espacio -\family default - como espacio fijo -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En el entorno -\family sans -Código-LyX -\family default -, la tecla -\family sans -Espacio -\family default - es tratada como un -\family sans -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -protegido -\family default - en vez de un separador de palabras. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -; es el único caso en LyX en que puedes teclear múltiples espacios. - Si necesitas insertar líneas en blanco debes usar -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default - (función -\family typewriter -salto-de-línea -\family default -). - -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - quiebra el párrafo. - Observa, no obstante, que -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - no reinicia el entorno de párrafo. - Así que cuando acabes el entorno -\family sans -Código-LyX -\family default - debes cambiar a mano el entorno. - Por otra parte, el entorno -\family sans -Código-LyX -\family default - se puede anidar en otros. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este entorno tiene ciertas peculiaridades: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -No puedes usar -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default - al principio de un nuevo párrafo (por ejemplo, no puedes hacer -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default - seguido a -\family sans -Entrar -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -No puedes continuar un -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default - con un -\family sans -Espacio -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Usa un -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - para iniciar un párrafo, entonces puedes poner un -\family sans -Espacio -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -O: usa -\family sans -Ctrl+Espacio -\family default - en su lugar. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -No puede tener un párrafo vacío o una línea vacía. - Al menos debes poner un -\family sans -Espacio -\family default - en cualquier línea que quieras vacía. - De lo contrario, LaTeX genera error. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -No puedes poner comillas dobles tipo máquina de escribir con la tecla -\family sans -" -\family default - porque esto insertará comillas -\emph on -reales -\emph default -. - Puedes ponerlas con -\family sans -Ctrl+Mayúsculas+" -\family default - . -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -#include -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -int main(void) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -{ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - printf("Hello World! -\backslash -n"); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - return 0; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esto es justo el programa estándar -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Hello world! -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Código-LyX -\family default - tiene un propósito: escribir lenguaje informático, tales como código de - programa, guiones de shell, archivos rc, y otros. - Úsalo sólo en casos muy especiales en los que necesites generar texto como - en una máquina de escribir. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entornos de párrafo|) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Para partes más largas de código, usa el recuadro Listado de programa, - que se describe en el capítulo -\emph on -Listado de programa -\emph default -del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Anidación de entornos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anidación ! Entornos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Anidación" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introducción -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX maneja el texto como un bloque unificado con propiedades específicas - en un determinado contexto. - Esto permite crear bloques que heredan algunas de las propiedades de otro - bloque. - Por ejemplo, tienes tres puntos principales en un esquema, pero el punto - #2 tiene a su vez dos subapartados. - Dicho de otra forma, tienes una lista dentro de otra, con la lista interna - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -atada -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - al ítem #2: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -uno -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -dos -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -subapartado - ítem #1 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -subapartado - ítem #2 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -tres -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Una lista se introduce en otra anidándola en ella. - Anidar un entorno es sencillo: Selecciona el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Aumentar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -profundidad -\family default - o -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Disminuir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -profundidad -\family default - para cambiar la profundidad de anidación del párrafo actual (en la barra - de estado se indica el nivel de profundidad). - En vez del menú, puedes usar los botones de la barra de herramientas -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - o el atajo de teclado -\family sans -Tab -\family default - y -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Tab -\family default - o -\family sans - Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default - y -\family sans - Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda -\family default -. - El cambio de profundidad funcionará para el párrafo actual y también para - varios párrafos a la vez si los tienes seleccionados. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Observa que LyX sólo cambia la profundidad de anidación si puede. - Si no es válido no sucede nada aunque lo intentes. - Además, si cambias la profundidad de un párrafo, afecta a la profundidad - de los párrafos anidados en él. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La anidación no está restringida a listas. - En LyX, puedes anidar casi cualquier cosa en cualquiera otra, como podrás - comprobar. - Esta es la verdadera potencia de los entornos de anidación de párrafos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Qué se puede anidar y qué no -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anidación ! Tipos de -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Antes de bombardearte con una lista de entornos de párrafo, te contaremos - algo más sobre cómo funciona la anidación. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La respuesta a si es posible anidar un entorno de párrafo no es tan simple - como sí o no. - Hay, al respecto, tres tipos de entornos de párrafo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -No anidables -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Totalmente anidables, puedes anidarlos en otros y también anidar otras cosas - en ellos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Parcialmente anidables, este tipo de entornos pueden anidarse en otros pero - no se puede anidar en ellos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -He aquí una lista de los tres tipos de comportamiento respecto a la anidación - y los entornos que los tienen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -No -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -anidables No pueden anidarse. - No pueden anidar. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Bibliografía -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Resumen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Título -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Autor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Fecha -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -Totalmente -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -anidables Puedes anidarlos. - Puedes anidar otras cosas en ellos. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Verso -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Citar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Citación -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Enumeración* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Enumeración -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Descripción -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Lista -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Código-LyX -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -Parcialmente -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -anidables Puedes anidarlos en otros entornos. - No puedes anidar nada en ellos. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Normal -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Parte -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Capítulo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Sección -\family default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsección -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsubsección -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Párrafo -\family default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subpárrafo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Parte* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Capítulo* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Sección* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsección* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Subsubsección* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Dirección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -derecha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Dirección -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default -Aunque es posible anidar encabezados de sección numerados, como -\family sans -Capítulo, Sección -\family default -, etc., p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en listas, es muy recomendable no hacerlo porque el objetivo es componer - documentos bien estructurados respetuosos con las normas tipográficas, - pero la anidación de encabezados de sección viola dichas normas. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Anidar otras cosas: cuadros, ecuaciones, flotantes, etc. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anidación ! Cuadros y otros -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay varias cosas que no son entornos de párrafo, pero a las que de todas - formas les atañe la anidación. - Son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ecuaciones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -cuadros -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -figuras -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -( -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - A las figuras y cuadros en -\family sans -Flotantes -\family default - no les afecta esto. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Echa un vistazo a la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Flotantes" - -\end_inset - - para más información sobre -\family sans -Flotantes -\family default -.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX puede manejar estos tres objetos bien como palabras, bien como párrafos. - Si una figura, cuadro o ecuación están en una línea, van a la par del párrafo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por otra parte, si tienes una ecuación, figura o cuadro en su propio -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -párrafo -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, se comportan igual que un entorno del tipo -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -anidación parcial -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Puedes anidarlos en otros entornos, pero obviamente no puedes anidar nada - en ellos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -He aquí un ejemplo con un cuadro: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Ítem Uno -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Esto es (a) y está anidado. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Esto es (b). - El cuadro está realmente anidado en (a). -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Fuera otra vez. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si no anidamos el cuadro, la lista se vería así: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Ítem Uno -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Esto es (a) y está anidado. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Esto es (b). - El cuadro -\emph on -no -\emph default - está anidado en (a). - De hecho, no está anidado de ninguna forma. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Fuera otra vez. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Observa cómo el ítem (b) no sólo no está anidado, sino que además ¡es el - primer ítem de una nueva lista! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay otra trampa en la que puedes caer: Anidar el cuadro pero sin la profundidad - suficiente. - Entonces LyX convierte todo lo que sigue al cuadro en una nueva sublista. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Ítem Uno -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Esto es (a) y está anidado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Esto es (b). - El cuadro está realmente anidado en el Ítem Uno, -\emph on -no -\emph default - en (a). -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Fuera otra vez. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como ves, el ítem (b) se ha convertido en el primer ítem de una nueva lista, - pero dentro del ítem 1. - Lo mismo sucedería a una ecuación o a una figura. - Así pues, si anidas cuadros, figuras o ecuaciones, ¡asegúrate de darle - la profundidad adecuada! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Empleo y características generales -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hablando de niveles, LyX puede poner hasta seis niveles de anidación. - En otras palabras, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -nivel #6 -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - es el nivel más interno posible de profundidad. - Este ejemplo muestra lo que decimos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -nivel #1 - el más externo -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -nivel #2 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -nivel #3 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -nivel #4 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -nivel #5 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -nivel #6 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Hay dos excepciones al límite de seis niveles de anidación, y ambas las - puedes ver en el ejemplo. - A diferencia de los demás entornos con anidación completa, los entornos - -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - y -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default - sólo admiten cuatro niveles de anidación. - Así, si intentamos anidar un subnivel más de -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - bajo el ítem -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -A. -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, se generará error. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Algunos ejemplos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Anidación ! Ejemplos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La mejor forma de explicar lo que podemos hacer con la anidación es practicando. - Tenemos varios ejemplos de entornos anidados, en los que explicamos cómo - se ha procedido, para que puedas reproducirlos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ejemplo 1: Los seis niveles y anidación mezclada -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ejemplo 1: Lista con seis niveles -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#1-a Este es el nivel más externo. - Está en un entorno -\family sans -Lista -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#2-a Este es el nivel #2. - Lo hemos hecho con -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - seguido de -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#3-a Este es el nivel #3. - Esta vez, sólo pulsamos -\family sans -Entrar -\family default -, luego -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default - dos veces en una fila. - También podríamos haber hecho como en el nivel anterior, pulsando -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - seguido de -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Esto es realmente un entorno -\family sans -Normal -\family default -, anidado en el ítem -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -#3-a -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - Así que está en el nivel #4. - Lo hemos hecho pulsando -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default -, luego -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default -, luego cambiando el párrafo a -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. - Haz esto para crear ítems con más de un párrafo; ¡también funciona en los - entornos -\family sans -Descripción -\family default -, -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -, y -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default -! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí hay otro párrafo -\family sans -Normal -\family default -, también en el nivel #4, hecho con sólo un -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#4-a Este es nivel #4. - Hemos pulsado -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - y cambiado el párrafo de nuevo a -\family sans -List -\family default -a. - Recuerda: no podemos anidar nada en entorno -\family sans -Normal -\family default -, que es por lo que aún estamos en el nivel #4. - No obstante, -\emph on -podemos -\emph default - mantener cosas anidadas en -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -#3-a -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#5-a Este es el nivel #5\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{} -y este el nivel #6. - Ahora ya deberías saber cómo hacer estos dos. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#5-b Vuelta al nivel #5. - Sólo pulsa -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - seguido de -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#4-b Vuelta al nivel #4 tras -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - seguido de -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#3-b Vuelta al nivel #3. - Ya debería ser obvio cómo hacerlo. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#2-b Vuelta al nivel #2. - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -#1-b Y por último, volvemos al nivel más externo, #1. - Después de esta frase, pulsaremos -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - y retornaremos a párrafo -\family sans -Normal -\family default - para finalizar la lista. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Podríamos haber usado también los entornos -\family sans -Descripción -\family default -, -\family sans -Citar -\family default -, -\family sans -Citación -\family default -, o incluso -\family sans -Verso -\family default - en lugar del entorno -\family sans -Lista -\family default -. - El ejemplo habría funcionado exactamente igual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ejemplo 2: Herencia -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -Esto es el entorno Código-LyX en nivel #1, el más externo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -Ahora presionamos -\family sans -Entrar -\family default -, luego -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default -, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -después de lo cuál, cambiamos a -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Esto es entorno -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - en el nivel #2. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Observa cómo el -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - anidado no sólo hereda sus márgenes de su entorno progenitor ( -\family sans -Código-LyX -\family default -), sino que ¡también hereda su letra y espaciado! -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Hemos terminado este ejemplo pulsando -\family sans -Entrar -\family default -. - Después hemos de reiniciar a párrafo -\family sans -Normal -\family default - y reiniciar la profundidad de anidación con -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda -\family default - una vez. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ejemplo 3: Etiquetas y niveles en los entornos -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - y -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default - -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ejemplo 3: Etiquetas, niveles y otras listas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Este es el nivel #1, en un entorno de párrafo -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -. - Vamos a anidar realmente un puñado de ellos. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Este es el nivel #2. - Hemos usado -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - seguido de -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default -. - Ahora, ¿qué sucede si anidamos un entorno -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default - en éste? Estará en el nivel #3, pero ¿cuál será su etiqueta? ¿Un asterisco? -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -¡No! Es un punto grueso. -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\size normal -\emph on -\color none -N. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -del t.: -\size default -\emph default -\color inherit -véase nota -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "np:N.del-t.:-item" - -\end_inset - - -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no - en la sección -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Enumeración*" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -\bar default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcounter{MyRepeatFoot} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -setcounter{MyRepeatFoot}{ -\backslash -thefootnote} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Este es el -\emph on -primer -\emph default - entorno -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default -, a pesar de estar en el nivel #3. - Por eso su etiqueta es un punto. - (Hemos llegado aquí con -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default -, luego -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default -, luego cambiando a entorno -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -*.) -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Aquí tenemos un nivel #4, generado con -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default -, luego -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default -. - Haremos esto otra vez\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\SpecialChar \ldots{} -para conseguir el nivel #5. - Esta vez, sin embargo, también hemos vuelto a entorno -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -. - Observa que el tipo de numeración es -\emph on -romana -\emph default -, -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -footnotemark[ -\backslash -theMyRepeatFoot] -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -\bar default - porque estamos en el -\emph on -tercer nivel -\emph default - de -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - (o sea, es una -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - dentro de una -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - dentro de una -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -¿Qué pasa si -\emph on -no -\emph default - cambiamos el entorno de párrafo, pero disminuye la profundidad de anidación? - ¿Qué tipo de numeración usará LyX? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -¡Oh!, como si no lo pudieras imaginar ya, sólo hemos usado -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - para mantener el entorno y profundidad actuales pero crea un nuevo ítem. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Usemos -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda -\family default - para disminuir la profundidad después del siguiente -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Este es el nivel #4. - ¡Mira el tipo de etiqueta que está usando LyX! -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Este es el nivel #3. - A pesar de que hemos cambiado los niveles, LyX todavía pone números romanos. -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -footnotemark[ -\backslash -theMyRepeatFoot] -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -\bar default - ¿Por qué? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Porque, aunque ha cambiado la profundidad de anidación, el párrafo -\emph on -todavía -\emph default - está en el tercer nivel del entorno -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -. - Observa, sin embargo, que LyX -\emph on -ha reiniciado -\emph default - el contador de la etiqueta. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Otra secuencia -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda -\family default -, y volvemos al nivel #2. - Esta vez, no sólo hemos cambiado la profundidad de anidación, también hemos - vuelto al nivel de anidación 2 en el entorno -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Lo mismo sucede si hacemos otra secuencia -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda -\family default - y volvemos al nivel #1, el más externo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por último, reiniciamos el entorno a -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. - Como puedes ver, el número de nivel no corresponde al tipo de etiqueta - que usa LyX para los entornos -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - y -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default -. - El número de otros entornos -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - que lo envuelven determina qué clase de etiqueta pone LyX para un ítem - de -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -. - La misma regla se aplica también para el entorno -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ejemplo 4: Perdiendo la chaveta -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Ahora vamos a ir locos del todo. - No queremos anidar tan profundo como en los otros ejemplos, ni vamos a - dar tantos detalles sobre cómo lo hacemos. - (nivel #1: -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -( -\family sans -Entrar, Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha, Normal -\family default -: nivel #2) En algunos sitios pondremos entre paréntesis una descripción - de cómo se ha hecho. - Por ejemplo, los dos atajos de teclado para cambiar la profundidad. - El nombre del entorno es el nombre del entorno actual. - Delante o detrás pondremos el nivel. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -( -\family sans -Entrar, Enumeración -\family default -: nivel #1) Este es el siguiente ítem en la lista. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Verse -Vamos a añadir ahora un verso. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Para que esto resulte aún más perverso. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -( -\family sans -Entrar, Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha, Verso -\family default -: nivel #2) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Bippitey boppitey boo! -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -( -\family sans -Alt+Entrar) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Ahora viene un cuadro: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -un-pez -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -dos-peces -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -pez-rojo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pez-azul -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Verse -( -\family sans -Alt+Entrar, Cuadro, Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha -\family default - 3 veces, -\family sans -Alt+Entrar, Verso, Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -( -\family sans -Entrar, Enumeración -\family default -: nivel #1) Este es otro ítem. - Observa que al seleccionar un -\family sans -Cuadro -\family default - se reinicia la anidación al nivel #1, así que aumentamos la profundidad - 3 veces para poner el cuadro dentro del entorno -\family sans -Verso -\family default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Terminamos la lista -\family sans -Enumeración -\family default - y cambiamos a -\family sans -Cita -\family default -. - Aún estamos en el nivel #1. - Queremos mostrar algunas cosas que puedes hacer mezclando entornos. - El próximo grupo de párrafos es una -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -carta en cita -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Anidaremos los entornos -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - y -\family sans -Dirección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Derecha -\family default - dentro de éste, luego usaremos otra -\family sans -Cita -\family default - anidada para el cuerpo de la carta. - Usaremos -\family sans -Alt+Entrar -\family default - para preservar la profundidad. - Recuerda que debes usar -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default - para crear múltiples líneas en los entornos -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - y -\family sans -Dirección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Derecha -\family default -. - Aquí va: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Right Address -C/ Lacalle 123 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Villaratón, CP 00100 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -9-6-06 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Estimado Sr. - Fizlewitz: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Lamentamos informarle que no podemos completar su pedido de 50 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -L de gas metano comprimido debido a circunstancias que escapan a nuestro - control. - Desgraciadamente, algunas de nuestras vacas han explotado misteriosamente, - originando un retraso en nuestros pedidos de metano. - Pondremos su nombre en lista de espera y le enviaremos el pedido lo antes - posible. - Mientras tanto, agradecemos su paciencia. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Tenemos, por otra parte, una oferta especial de buey. - Si le interesa, envíe por favor el formulario de pedido adjunto, junto - con el pago. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Agradecemos su paciencia. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Atentamente, -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Bill Hick -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Quotation -¡Aquí finaliza este ejemplo! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como puedes comprobar, anidar entornos en LyX te da un gran poderío con - sólo unos cuantos tecleos. - Fácilmente podríamos anidar una lista -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default - en un entorno -\family sans -Cita -\family default - o -\family sans -Citar -\family default -, o poner una -\family sans -Cita -\family default - en una -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default -. - Tienes a tu disposición una amplia variedad de opciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Espacios, paginación y saltos de línea -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -¿Qué es un espacio? Aunque estarás acostumbrado a pulsar la tecla espacio - cada vez que quieres separar dos palabras, como en los procesadores de - texto habituales, LyX dispone de más espacios: Espacios de diferente longitud - y espacios que pueden, o no, quebrarse al final de la línea. - Las siguientes secciones mostrarán algunos ejemplos de situaciones en las - que esta variedad de espacios resulta útil. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Espacio protegido -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios ! Protegido -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espacio-protegido" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El espacio protegido sirve para indicar a LyX (y a LaTeX) que no rompa la - línea en ese punto. - Puede ser conveniente para evitar feos saltos de línea, como en: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Hay más información en la sección -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliografía" - -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Obviamente, sería bueno poner un espacio protegido entre -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -sección -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliografía" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - El espacio protegido se inserta con -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -protegido -\family default - (atajo -\family sans -Ctrl+Espacio). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Espacio horizontal -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios ! Horizontal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espacio-horizontal" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Todos los espacios horizontales se pueden insertar con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espacio horizontal -\family default -. - La lista de las unidades de longitud se encuentra en el apéndice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Unidades-disponibles" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Espacio entre palabras -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espacio-entre-palabra" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios ! Entre palabras -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En tipografía de algunos idiomas (p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -inglés) existe la convención de añadir espacio extra detrás del signo de - puntuación de un fin de frase; LyX respeta esta convención, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Abreviaturas" - -\end_inset - - por ejemplos. - Sin embargo, -\lang english -you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed - by a period -\lang spanish -. - En ese caso, puedes insertarlo con -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -entre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -palabras (atajo Ctrl+Alt+Espacio). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Espacio delgado -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espacio-delgado" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios ! Delgado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un «espacio delgado» es un espacio con la mitad de la longitud normal (y - también es «protegido»). - Las convenciones tipográficas en muchos idiomas proponen el uso de espacios - menores en los casos en que un espacio normal resultaría demasiado amplio, - por ejemplo en las abreviaturas: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -D. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -E. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Knuth ha desarrollado nuestro querido programa de tipografía, TeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -O entre valores y unidades. - Compara por ejemplo: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -10 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -kg (espacio delgado) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -10 kg (espacio normal) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los espacios delgados se insertan con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -delgado -\family default - (atajo -\family sans -Ctrl+Mayúsculas+Espacio -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Otros espacios -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además se pueden insertar los siguientes tipos de espacio: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -delgado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -negativo Espacio delgado negativo -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - - entre las flechas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Medio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cuadratín -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) Espacio de medio cuadratín (0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \enskip{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - - entre las flechas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cuadratín -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) Espacio de un cuadratín (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \quad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - - entre las flechas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Doble -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cuadratín -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) Espacio de dos cuadratines (2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \qquad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - - entre las flechas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -personalizado Espacio de 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hspace{} -\length 2cm -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - - entre las flechas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En el cuadro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Anchura-espacios" - -\end_inset - - se encuentran los distintos tamaños de los espacios. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Anchura-espacios" - -\end_inset - -Anchura de los distintos espacios horizontales. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Espacio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Anchura -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Normal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Protegido -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Delgado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Delgado negativo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout --1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Medio cuadratín -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cuadratín -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Doble cuadratín -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Relleno horizontal -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios ! Relleno horizontal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El relleno horizontal es una característica especial de LyX para añadir - espacio extra de manera uniforme. - Un relleno horizontal es en realidad un espacio variable, que rellena el - espacio restante entre los márgenes izquierdo y derecho. - Si hay más de un relleno horizontal en la misma línea, el espacio disponible - se reparte equitativamente entre ellos. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Veamos unos ejemplos de lo que se puede hacer con ellos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Esto está a la izquierda -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Esto a la derecha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Izquierda -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Centro -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Derecha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Izquierda -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -1/3 Izquierda -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Derecha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ha sido un ejemplo en un entorno -\family sans -Citar -\family default -. - Aquí -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - hay uno en un párrafo -\family sans -Normal -\family default -. - Puede que no sea visible en el texto impreso, pero el relleno -\emph on -está -\emph default - entre las flechas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los rellenos horizontales se pueden hacer visibles si eliges uno de los - -\family sans -Patrones -\family default - en el diálogo de espacios. - Los siguientes patrones están disponibles: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puntos: -\begin_inset space \dotfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Línea: -\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Flecha izquierda: -\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Flecha derecha: -\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Llave arriba: -\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Llave abajo: -\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - Si hay un relleno horizontal al principio de una línea que -\emph on -no -\emph default - es la primera del párrafo, LyX lo ignora. - Esto impide que el relleno se quiebre accidentalmente en otra línea. - Si en algún caso necesitas ese espacio, marca la opción -\family sans -Proteger -\family default - en el diálogo de configuración de espacios. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Espacio fantasma -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espacio-fantasma" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios ! fantasma -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A veces querrás insertar espacios con, exactamente, la longitud de una frase. - P.e., puedes crear la siguiente pregunta de elección múltiple: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -¿Qué es inglés correcto?: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge would have been jumps the gun. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -has to be jumped -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -jumps -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Así las opciones aparecen exactamente después de las palabras -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Para conseguirlo puedes usar los recuadros fantasmas disponibles en el - menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fantasma -\family default -. - En nuestro caso se ha insertado un fantasma horizontal al principio de - las dos últimas líneas y en el recuadro hemos escrito -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (observa el espacio detrás de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -). - Un recuadro fantasma imprime solo el espacio correspondiente a su contenido - (como un marcador de posición). - De ahí su nombre, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -fantasma -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - El fantasma normal imprime un espacio de la anchura y altura de su contenido, - mientras que las variantes horizontal y vertical imprimen solo el hueco - de la dimensión correspondiente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Espacio vertical -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios ! Vertical -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espacio-vertical" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para añadir espacio vertical extra sobre o bajo un párrafo, usa el diálogo - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical. - -\family default - Encontrarás los espacios siguientes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Pequeño -\family default -, -\family sans -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Medio -\family default - y -\family sans -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Grande -\family default - son tamaños LaTeX estándar que dependen del tamaño de letra del documento. - -\family sans -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Predeterminado -\family default - es el salto establecido en el diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Diseño -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - para la separación de párrafos. - Si usas sangrado para separar los párrafos, -\family sans -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Predeterminado -\family default - es igual a -\family sans -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Medio -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Relleno -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical -\family default - es un espacio variable, establecido de forma que es máximo en una página - dada. - Un ejemplo: Tienes dos breves párrafos en una página, con un relleno vertical - entre ambos. - Entonces el primer párrafo se sitúa al principio de la página y el segundo - al final, de forma que entre ellos el espacio es el máximo posible. - -\family sans -Relleno -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical -\family default - funciona como -\family sans -Relleno -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal -\family default -: llena en blanco el espacio vertical sobrante en una página. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Relleno -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal -\family default - se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-horizontal" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Si hay varios rellenos verticales en una página, dividen equitativamente - entre ellos el espacio sobrante: Puedes usar varios rellenos para centrar - texto en una página o ponerlo, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej., 2/3 abajo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Personalizado -\family default - sirve para poner cualquier espacio en una de las unidades explicadas en - el apéndice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Unidades-disponibles" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - -\series medium -Si el espacio vertical extra coincidiera en la salida con inicio/fin de - una página, el espacio será añadido sólo si se marca la opción -\family sans -Proteger -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Alineación de párrafos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Párrafos ! Alineación -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se puede cambiar la alineación del texto en un párrafo con el diálogo -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -párrafo -\family default - (botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). - Hay cinco posibilidades: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Justificado -\family default - (atajo -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align block" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Izquierda -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align left" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Derecha -\family default -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align right" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Centro -\family default -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align center" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Predeterminado -\family default -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align default" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la mayoría de los casos la opción por omisión es justificado, en la que - el hueco entre palabras es variable y cada línea llena el espacio entre - los márgenes izquierdo y derecho. - Las otras tres opciones son evidentes, y se verían así: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align right -Párrafo alineado a la derecha. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -Párrafo que está centrado, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align left -Párrafo alineado a la izquierda. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Saltos de página forzados -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Salto de página ! Forzado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Saltos-de-página-forzados" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si no te gustan los saltos de página que LaTeX hace en tu documento, puedes - insertarlos donde quieras. - Normalmente no será necesario, porque LaTeX es bueno en eso. - Aunque si tienes muchos -\family sans -Flotantes -\family default -, LaTeX puede fallar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Recomendamos no utilizar saltos de página forzados hasta acabar el documento - y haber visto en una vista preliminar si -\emph on -realmente -\emph default - tienes que cambiar la paginación. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay dos clases de saltos de página: Uno finaliza la página sin ninguna acción - especial. - Este se puede insertar encima o debajo de un párrafo con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Página -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nueva -\family default -. - El segundo tipo, que se inserta mediante el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -página -\family default -finaliza una página, pero comprime su contenido de forma que éste llene - la página completa. - Este tipo es útil para evitar espacios en blanco cuando un salto de página - da lugar a una página con muy pocas líneas. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Podrías probar el uso de un salto de página para asegurar que una figura - o un cuadro se sitúe a principio de página. - Por supuesto, ésta es una forma incorrecta de hacerlo. - LyX tiene mecanismos para asegurar que tus figuras y cuadros aparezcan - automáticamente en la parte superior de la página (o abajo, o en página - propia) sin tener que preocuparse sobre lo que precede o sigue al cuadro - o figura. - Véase el capítulo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Notas-y-flotantes" - -\end_inset - - para aprender más sobre -\family sans -Flotantes -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Saltos de página limpia -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Salto-de-página-limpia" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Salto de página ! Limpia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A diferencia de los saltos de página forzados, en los que el contenido siguiente - al salto se coloca directamente en la página siguiente, también se pueden - despejar las páginas a la vez que se quiebran. - Esto significa que el párrafo actual se termina y todo lo demás, quizá - flotantes de partes previas del documento no procesados aún, se colocan - detrás, añadiendo páginas si hace falta. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los saltos de página limpia se pueden insertar con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Limpiar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -página -\family default -. - Si el documento es con dos caras puedes usar el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Limpiar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -página -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -doble -\family default -, para asegurar que la página escrita siguiente va en la primera cara (página - impar), añadiendo, si es necesario, una página en blanco. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Saltos de línea forzados -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Salto de línea -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Salto-de-línea-forzado" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay dos tipos de saltos de línea: Uno simplemente quiebra la línea. - Se puede forzar este salto de línea con -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -línea -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cortada -\family default - o con -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default -. - El otro tipo, que se inserta con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -línea -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -justificada -\family default - o con -\family sans -Ctrl+Shift+Entrar -\family default -, rompe la línea y la comprime para llenar todo el espacio entre los márgenes. - Esto viene bien para evitar -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -flequillos -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en párrafos justificados debido al espacio en blanco introducido por el - salto de línea. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -No deberías forzar saltos de línea para corregir los saltos de línea de - LaTeX, porque LaTeX es muy bueno en esto. - Sin embargo, hay ciertas situaciones en las que es necesario forzar un - salto de línea, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. - en un poema o en una dirección (véanse las secciones -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Citar" - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Verso" - -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Empleo-direcciones" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Líneas horizontales -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Líneas-horizontales" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lineas@Líneas horizontales -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -Con el diálogo -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Línea -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal -\family default - puedes dibujar líneas horizontales. - El desplazamiento es la distancia vertical entre la línea y la base de - la línea de texto o párrafo. - Las características de la línea se muestran con clic izquierdo sobre ella. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Caracteres y símbolos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes insertar directamente todos los caracteres disponibles en tu teclado. - También puedes usar mapas de teclado especiales para escribir caracteres - franceses con un teclado inglés, por ejemplo. - Véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Configuración-del-mapa" - -\end_inset - - para más información. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para los casos en que necesites caracteres que no estén en el teclado, puedes - usar el diálogo -\family sans -Símbolos -\family default - del menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Carácter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -especial -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - Es posible que no todos los símbolos insertados con ese diálogo se muestren - en pantalla con determinadas tipografías disponibles en las preferencias - de LyX. - Pero en todo caso, los símbolos aparecerán en la salida. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Estilos de letra y de texto -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Estilo-de-letra" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Clases tipográficas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografías ! Clases -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay dos clases de tipografías: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Tipografías -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vectoriales -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografías ! Vectoriales -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - construidos a partir de trazos de formas simples (p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. - caracteres). - Significa que cada símbolo se define mediante curvas matemáticas que son - adecuadas para adaptarse a cualquier tamaño requerido. - Esta definición matemática es interpretada por el servidor de tipos y la - curva se rellena con píxeles de acuerdo con el tamaño. - Esto conlleva que las letras trazadas pintan muy bien en todos los tamaños. - Sólo a muy pequeños tamaños podría resultar complicado suministrar una - buena apariencia, ya que cada píxel debe ser computado muy cuidadosamente - para generar una buena imagen. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Podría pensarse que solo hace falta definir un tamaño y redimensionar los - demás a escala. - Pero para conseguir buena calidad, muchas tipografías están definidas en - varios tamaños. - Esto mejora la apariencia, porque se necesitan más detalles para tamaños - grandes que para tamaños pequeños. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Las tipografías -\family typewriter -TrueType -\family default -, -\family typewriter -OpenType -\family default -, y -\family typewriter -Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\family default - son vectoriales. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Tipografías -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mapa -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bits -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografías ! Mapa de bits -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - que se definen mediante gráficos en mapa de bits desde el principio, así - que se verán muy bien en todos los tamaños para los que estén definidas. - Sin embargo, no se redimensionan bien, porque para variar una forma cada - píxel debe desdoblarse en varios píxeles. - Es el mismo efecto que se produce cuando aumentas el zoom para ver una - imagen. - Con el fin de mitigar este efecto, las tipografías mapa de bits se suelen - suministrar en varios tamaños, los que se consideran más útiles. - La ventaja de las tipografías mapa de bits es que no se necesitan complicados - cálculos para diseñar cada carácter, y por tanto se procesan más rápidamente - que las tipografías de tamaño variable. - La desventaja es que los tamaños que no existen de forma predefinida tienen - que redimensionarse desdoblando píxeles y entonces no pintan muy bien. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Las tipografías mapa de bits se conocen como -\family typewriter -Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\family default - en documentos PostScript y PDF. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La conclusión de todo esto es que las tipografías mapa de bits son mejores - en aquellos tamaños para los que están diseñadas, mientras que las tipografías - ajustables son buenas para casi todos los tamaños. - Se necesitan menos definiciones de tamaño para tipografías variables. - Esta es la razón por la que casi todos los programas de tipografía y servidores - de texto emplean tipografías ajustables. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para averiguar qué tipografías se usan en un documento PDF, puedes echar - una mirada a sus propiedades. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Muchos modernos lenguajes de diseño y de tipografía han comenzado a migrar - hacia estilos de especificación de caracteres en vez de especificación - de una tipografía particular. - Por ejemplo, en lugar de cambiar a una versión en cursiva de la tipografía - actual para enfatizar un texto, puedes usar un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -estilo énfasis -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Este concepto encaja perfectamente en LyX. - En LyX haces las cosas basándote en el contexto en lugar de estar pendiente - de los detalles de la tipografía. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Soporte de tipografías LaTeX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Tradicionalmente, LaTeX usa sus propias tipografías. - Es decir, no puedes acceder directamente a las tipografías instaladas en - el sistema operativo, sino que has de usar las tipografías específicas - proporcionadas por la distribución LaTeX. - La razón es que LaTeX necesita cierta información extra sobre las tipografías - que debe ser suministrada por archivos y paquetes adicionales. - La desventaja de esto es que la elección de tipografías está algo limitada - en comparación con los habituales procesadores de texto. - Por otra parte, tiene la ventaja de que las tipografías proporcionadas - son, en general, de muy buena calidad y que los archivos LaTeX son portables - a diferentes máquinas. - Además, el rango de tipografías soportadas por el tradicional LaTeX ha - ido aumentando considerablemente y se pueden encontrar paquetes para muchas - tipografías libres y comerciales. - En LyX, solo un subconjunto de estas es directamente accesible en la interfaz - de usuario, (véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Formato-de-documento" - -\end_inset - - para más detalle). - No obstante, todas las demás son accesibles si se introduce el correspondiente - código LaTeX en el preámbulo del documento (por favor, consulta la documentació -n de la tipografía deseada). - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por otra parte, desarrollos recientes han aportado algunos nuevos ingenios - LaTeX que son capaces de acceder directamente a las tipografías instaladas - por el sistema operativo (SO), a saber, XeTeX y LuaTeX. - Ambos ingenios son soportados por LyX. - Con ellos, teóricamente se puede usar cualquier tipografía OpenType o TrueType - instalada en el sistema. - La siguiente sección describe cómo usar estas tipografías del SO. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -\color none -Nota -\series default -: En la práctica, algunas tipografías podrían no funcionar debido a métricas - defectuosas u otras deficiencias, de modo que puede que tengas que experimentar. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -\color none -Nota -\series default -: XeTeX y especialmente LuaTeX aún son bastante nuevos y por tanto no tan - maduros como los tradicionales LaTeX o PDFLaTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tipo y tamaño de letra en un documento -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Tipografía-del-documento" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografías ! Tamaño -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Tipografías -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las tipografías de un documento se establecen en -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - En la sección -\family sans -Tipografías -\family default - se puede especificar la tipografía a usar para cada forma ―romana (serif), - -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif -\family default - (palo seco) y -\family typewriter -ancho fijo -\family default -―, el tamaño base de la tipografía y factores de escala para determinadas - tipografías sans serif y ancho fijo por si fuera necesario ajustarlas a - la tipografía romana. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si se selecciona -\family sans - Usar tipografías no T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -, se puede acceder a las tipografías instaladas en el sistema operativo. - Esto requiere el uso de -\family sans -PDF (XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF (LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - o -\family sans -DVI (LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - como formato de salida, por tanto debe estar instalado XeTeX o LuaTeX (véase - la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" - -\end_inset - -). - En ese caso no habrá acceso a las tipografías propias de TeX (la selección - que se describe más abajo). - Hay que señalar que LyX lista todas las tipografías disponibles en cualquiera - de las tres listas (romana, sans serif y ancho fijo), puesto que LyX no - puede determinar la familia. - Además, la salida podría fallar con algunas de las tipografías listadas, - debido a la codificación o a fallos de las propias tipografías. - De nuevo, LyX no puede detectar esto de antemano, por lo que podría ser - necesario experimentar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si se usan tipografías TeX (opción por omisión), las opciones posibles incluyen - -\family sans -Predeterminado -\family default - y una lista de las tipografías disponibles en el sistema. - La opción -\family sans -Predeterminado -\family default - usa las tipografías estándar de TeX, conocidas como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -Computer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ( -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -) o -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -European Computer Modern -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ( -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - y -\family typewriter -ec -\family default - son tipografías mapa de bits, a menudo se ven pixeladas en la salida PDF, - sobre todo si se lee con ampliación. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Este problema no aparece en -\family typewriter -Adobe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Reader -\family default - versión 6 o posterior, porque este programa incluye un servidor especial - de tipografías mapa de bits. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Pero en general, para evitar caracteres pixelados hay que usar tipografías - vectoriales. - Veamos tres posibilidades para usarlas: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Utilizar la tipografía -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -. - Esta tipografía ha sido desarrollada por la comunidad LaTeX para reemplazar - a -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - como tipografía predeterminadas.En la mayoría de los casos tienen un aspecto - semejante a -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Una diferencia es un interletraje mejorado. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, pero -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - cubre un enorme número de caracteres en comparación con las familias -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - y -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Elegir la tipografía -\family sans -AE -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Almost -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European) -\family default - en el caso (raro) de que -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - no esté disponible o no funcione, y se desee emular el aspecto de -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -/ -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -. - -\family typewriter -AE -\family default - se refiere a -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Almost European -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y es una tipografía virtual. - Virtual significa que -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -roba -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - perfiles de otras tipografías. - Esto tiene la desventaja de que algunos caracteres se pierden, como las - comillas francesas, ( -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -« -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -» -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Este problema se soluciona cargando el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -aeguill -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! aeguill -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - en el preámbulo, con la línea -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[ec]{aeguill} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, y que los caracteres acentuados no se forman con -\emph on -uno -\emph default - sino con -\emph on -dos -\emph default - caracteres, el acento y la letra. - Por esto no puedes buscar palabras con acentos en documentos creados con - la tipografía -\family typewriter -AE -\family default -. - Por ejemplo. - si buscas la palabra francesa -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -brève -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en un PDF, no obtienes ningún resultado, porque el visor PDF busca el carácter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -è -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y no los caracteres -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - e + -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - ̀ -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Si no nos agrada el aspecto de -\family typewriter - cm -\family default -/ -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -, podemos seleccionar una de las otras tipografías vectoriales suministradas, - por ejemplo, -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - o -\family typewriter - -\family sans -Palatino -\family default -. - La mayoría de tipografías romanas vectoriales seleccionarán automáticamente - las correspondientes tipografías sans serif y ancho fijo -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -A veces corresponden otras tipografías, (p. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ej., -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - selecciona -\family sans -Helvetica -\family default - para sans serif), o diferentes formas de la misma letra, o sea, una -\emph on -familia -\emph default - real de letras (p. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ej. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -con -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default - o -\family sans -Computer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, aunque se pueden seleccionar a conveniencia. - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Las diferencias entre las tipografías romana -\family sans -, -\family default - -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif -\family default -y -\family typewriter -ancho fijo -\family default - se explican en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ajuste-fino-con" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -La tipografía -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - se diseñó originalmente para periódicos. - Esto significa que sus formas son más pequeñas que las de otras tipografías - para encajar en las pequeñas columnas de un periódico. - Así pues, -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default - no es la elección óptima para documentos extensos como los libros. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para el tamaño de carácter hay cuatro valores posibles: -\family sans -Predeterminado, 10 -\family default -, -\family sans -11 -\family default -, y -\family sans -12 -\family default -. - Algunas clases proporcionan tamaños adicionales. - El -\family sans -predeterminado -\family default - depende de la clase que se esté usando. - En las clases estándar equivale a 10. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los tamaños de carácter son -\emph on -tamaños base -\emph default -. - En realidad, LyX redimensiona todos los otros tamaños posibles (tales como - los que se usan en notas, exponentes y subíndices) según este valor. - Siempre podrás afinar el tamaño de letra en aquellas partes de texto en - que lo necesites mediante el diálogo -\family sans -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto -\family default -. - Esto se desarrolla en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ajuste-fino-con" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La selección -\family sans -Familia predeterminada -\family default - permite especificar si la tipografía base del documento debe ser romana, - sans serif o ancho fijo. - La opción -\family sans -Predeterminado -\family default - usa la predefinida por la clase, las demás selecciones invalidan esto. - -\family sans -Predeterminado -\family default - equivale a romana, pero algunas clases (como las de presentaciones) usan - además otros valores. - -\family sans - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La selección -\family typewriter - -\family sans -Codificación de tipografías LaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default - es una configuración para expertos que permite cambiar el valor pasado - al paquete LaTeX -\series bold -fontenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! fontenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (véase también sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Configuración" - -\end_inset - -). - Normalmente, no hace falta cambiar (ni siquiera entender) esto. - A menos que haya una razón, es mejor usar -\family sans -Predeterminado -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con algunas tipografías, las casillas -\family sans -Usar versalitas verdaderas -\family default - y -\family sans -Usar estilo antiguo para las cifras -\family default - se activan. - Son características adicionales suministradas por algunas tipografías. - Si se marca -\family sans -Usar estilo antiguo para las cifras -\family default -, la tipografía utiliza números en estilo antiguo (también llamado medieval, - elzeviriano o de texto), es decir, cifras con altura variable que se adaptan - graciosamente a las minúsculas. - -\family sans -Usar versalitas verdaderas -\family default - determina que se usarán versalitas auténticas en lugar de falsas versalitas - construidas con mayúsculas redimensionadas. - Las versalitas auténticas suelen formar parte de colecciones expertas de - tipografías; generalmente su aspecto es mejor que el de las falsas versalitas, - aunque a veces se deben adquirir separadamente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El campo -\family sans -CJK -\family default - permite a usuarios de los idiomas chino, japonés o coreano (CJK) especificar - una tipografía para la escritura de caracteres. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -La tipografía será el argumento para los comandos del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -CJK -\series default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Así, esto no tiene efecto para el idioma de documento -\family sans -Japonés -\family default - que no usa -\series bold -CJK -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default -Cuando cambias una tipografía o su tamaño en el documento, ¡LyX -\emph on -no -\emph default - cambia la tipografía en pantalla! Sólo verás la diferencia en la salida - impresa; esto es parte del concepto WYSIWYM. - Las tipografías en pantalla se pueden determinar en el diálogo -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferencias -\family default -, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tipografías-en-pantalla" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Usar diferentes estilos de carácter -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Estilo del texto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como ya hemos visto, LyX cambia automáticamente el estilo de letra en ciertos - entornos de párrafo. - LyX soporta dos estilos, -\family sans -Énfasis -\family default - y -\family sans -Versalitas -\family default -. - Puedes activarlos con atajos de teclado, con el menú, y con la barra de - herramientas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para activar el estilo -\family sans -Versalitas -\family default -, haz una de estas acciones: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -clic en el botón de la barra de herramientas -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -teclea la combinación -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -C -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Estos comandos son alternativos. - Esto es, si -\family sans -Versalitas -\family default - ya está activo, esas acciones lo desactivan. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El estilo -\family sans -Versalitas -\family default - se utiliza típicamente para nombres propios. - Por ejemplo: -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\noun on -Matthias Ettrich -\noun default - es el autor original de LyX. -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un estilo empleado más frecuentemente es el estilo -\family sans -Énfasis -\family default -. - Se activa (o se desactiva, también es alternativo) así: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -clic en el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -con la combinación de teclas -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -E -\family default -, -\family sans -Ctrl+E -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalmente el estilo -\family sans -Énfasis -\family default - equivale a letra cursiva aunque algunas clases de documento o paquetes - LaTeX usan una tipografía diferente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hemos estado usando el estilo -\family sans -Énfasis -\family default - por todos sitios en este documento. - Aquí un ejemplo más: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation - -\emph on -¡No abusen de los estilos de letra! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es un aviso además de un ejemplo. - Un escrito debería parecerse a una conversación ordinaria. - Puesto que no estamos gritando continuamente a los demás, también deberíamos - evitar abusar de los estilos de letra. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Siempre se puede restablecer la tipografía predeterminada con la combinación - -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Espacio -\family default - o el diálogo -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Estilo del texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\family default -\lang spanish - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ajuste fino con el diálogo Estilo del texto -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Ajuste-fino-con" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Estilo del texto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Siempre hay ocasiones en las que necesitas afinar el estilo del texto, por - eso LyX permite crear estilos personalizados. - Por ejemplo, una publicación académica o corporativa que tienen una hoja - de estilo que requiere una letra sans serif en ciertas situaciones. - También, escritores que a veces usan letra diferente para distinguir reflexione -s del diálogo ordinario. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Antes de explicar cómo personalizar el estilo de letra, queremos repetir - de nuevo el aviso: ¡No abuses de los estilos de letra! -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Los documentos que abusan de distintos tipos y tamaños de letra no se leen - bien y pueden llegar a parecer coladores. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para usar estilos de letra personalizados, abre el diálogo -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Estilo del texto -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Personalizado -\family default - o clic en el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -. - En él hay varios cuadros desplegables correspondientes a varias propiedades - que puedes escoger. - La opción -\family sans -Ningún -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambio -\family default - mantiene el estado actual de esa propiedad. - La opción -\family sans -Reiniciar -\family default - restablece la propiedad a su valor predeterminado. - Puedes usar esta opción para reiniciar atributos de un conjunto de párrafos - de un plumazo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las propiedades de letra y sus opciones (además de -\family sans -Ningún -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambio -\family default - y -\family sans -Reiniciar -\family default -) son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Familia -\family default - Apariencia general de la tipografía. - Las opciones posibles son: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Romana -\family default - Esta es la familia de tipos romanos. - Normalmente una tipografía serif (con remates). - Es la familia predeterminada. - (combinación -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -R -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Serif -\family default - Esta es la familia de tipografías -\family sans -Sans Serif -\family default -, (palo seco). - (combinación -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -S -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Ancho fijo -\family default - Esta es la familia de tipografías de -\family typewriter -Ancho fijo. - -\family default - (combinación -\family sans -Control+Mayúsculas+P) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Grosor -\family default - Esto corresponde a la intensidad de impresión. - Las opciones son: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Medio -\family default - Este es el grosor Medio. - Es el valor predeterminado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Negrita -\family default - -\series bold -Este es -\series default -el grosor -\series bold - Negrita. - -\series default - (combinaciones -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -B -\family default -, -\family sans -Ctrl+B -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Forma -\family default - Como su nombre indica. - Opciones: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Vertical -\family default - Esta es la forma vertical, predeterminada. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Cursiva -\family default - -\shape italic -Esta es la forma de letra cursiva -\shape default -\emph on -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Inclinada -\family default - -\shape italic -Esta es la forma de letra Inclinada -\shape default - (aunque quizá no se note en LyX, es diferente de la cursiva). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Versalitas -\family default - -\shape smallcaps -Esta es la forma de letra Versalitas -\shape default -\noun on -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Color -\family default - Esta opción permite poner el texto en color. - Ten en cuenta que no todos los visores DVI pueden mostrar colores. - Además de -\family sans -Sin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -color -\family default -, -\lang english -which means that the document default color set in -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Color -\family default - for -\family sans -Main -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\family default - is used -\lang spanish -, puedes elegir entre -\family sans -Negro -\family default -, -\family sans -Blanco -\family default -, -\family sans -Rojo, -\family default - -\family sans -Verde -\family default -, -\family sans -Azul -\family default -, -\family sans -Cian -\family default -, -\family sans -Magenta -\family default - y -\family sans -Amarillo -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! Texto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Idioma -\family default - Se usa para marcar regiones de texto en un idioma distinto al del documento. - El texto así marcado se subraya en azul para indicar el cambio (sólo en - LyX). -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Si tienes un texto más largo en otro idioma, por ejemplo, alemán, LaTeX - respeta automáticamente las reglas de división de palabras en ese idioma. - Si se usa el corrector ortográfico (sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Corrector-ortográfico" - -\end_inset - -), el texto marcado alemán se comprueba con el diccionario alemán. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tamaño -\family default - Establece el tamaño del carácter. - Encontrarás aquí valores no numéricos; todos los tamaños posibles son en - realidad proporcionales al tamaño de la tipografía del documento. - Insistimos, no das los detalles a LyX, sino una indicación general de lo - que quieres hacer. - Las opciones son: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Diminuta -\family default - -\size tiny -Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Diminuta -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\size default - (Combinaciones -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -T -\family default -, -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Pequeñísima -\family default - -\size scriptsize -Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Pequeñísima -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\size default -. - (Combinación -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Más -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pequeña -\family default - -\size footnotesize -Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Más Pequeña -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\size default - (Combinaciones -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Mayúsculas+S -\family default -, -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Pequeña -\family default - -\size small -Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Pequeña -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\size default - (Combinaciones -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -S -\family default -, -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -4 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Normal -\family default - Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Normal -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Es el valor por omisión. - (Combinaciones -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -N -\family default -, -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -5 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Grande -\family default - -\size large -Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Grande -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\size default - (Combinaciones -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\family default -, -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -6 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Más -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -grande -\family default - -\size larger -Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Más grande -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\size default - (Combinaciones -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Mayúsculas+L -\family default -, -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -7 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Grandísima -\family default - -\size largest -Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Grandísima -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\size default - (Combinación -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Enorme -\family default - -\size huge -Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Enorme -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\size default - (Combinaciones -\family sans -Alt+S Mayúsculas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -H -\family default -, -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -9 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Más -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -enorme -\family default - -\size giant -Este es el tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Más enorme -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\size default - (Combinaciones -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Mayúsculas+H -\family default -, -\family sans -Alt+S -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -0 -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Aumentar -\family default - Aumenta el tamaño un escalón (por ejemplo, de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Grandísima -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - a -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Enorme -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -). - (Combinación -\family sans -Alt+S+ -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Disminuir -\family default - Disminuye el tamaño un escalón (por ejemplo, de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Normal -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - a -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Pequeña -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -). - (Combinación -\family sans -Alt+S- -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Reiteramos el aviso -\emph on -otra vez -\emph default -: no te vuelvas loco con esta característica. - Casi nunca deberías necesitarla. - LyX cambia automáticamente el tamaño para diferentes entornos de párrafo, - eso está bien así. - ¡Esto es sólo para algún ajuste fino! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Otros -\family default - Aquí puedes cambiar estas otras opciones: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Énfasis -\family default - -\emph on -Texto con énfasis. - -\emph default - (Combinaciones C -\family sans -trl+E, Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -E) -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Podría parecer igual que -\shape italic -Cursiva -\shape default -, pero realmente es algo diferente. - El énfasis es un atributo -\emph on -lógico -\emph default -. - Esto significa que cada clase de documento puede definir su propia tipografía - para dar énfasis a un texto. - Normalmente equivale a cursiva. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Subrayado -\family default - -\bar under -Esto es un texto subrayado. - -\bar default - (Combinaciones C -\family sans -trl+U, Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -U) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family default -¡Evita usar subrayado si es posible! Es un recurso de los tiempos de las - máquinas de escribir, cuando no era posible cambiar de letra. - Ahora no necesitamos resaltar texto subrayando. - Se incluye en LyX sólo por si alguien lo necesita para respetar hojas de - estilo de algunas publicaciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Subrayado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -doble -\family default - -\bar under -\uuline on -Esto es un texto con doble subrayado. - -\bar default -\uuline default - (Combinación -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -D) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family default -Si acabamos de advertir contra el uso de subrayado, imagina lo que pensamos - sobre el doble subrayado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Subrayado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ondulado -\family default - -\uwave on -Esto es un texto con subrayado ondulado. - -\uwave default - (Combinación -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -W -\family default -) -\family sans - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family default -Úsalo solo si alguna publicación insiste en ello. - Ten a mano píldoras para el mareo. - -\family sans - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tachado -\family default - -\strikeout on -Esto es un texto tachado. - -\strikeout default - (Combinación -\family sans -Ctrl+Mayúsculas+O -\family default -). -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Se usa frecuentemente para señalar la versión antigua de un texto cambiado. - -\strikeout on - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Versalitas -\family default - -\noun on -Este texto está en Versalitas. - -\noun default -(Combinación -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -C -\family default -). -\noun on - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\noun default -Como -\family sans -Énfasis -\family default -, es un atributo lógico. - Normalmente equivale a -\family sans -Mayúsculas pequeñas -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Bien, tienes un gran número de opciones para escoger. - Una vez que has elegido un nuevo estilo de texto en el diálogo -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Estilo del texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\family default -\lang spanish - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -), se guardan las opciones. - Para activarlas, usa el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "textstyle-apply" -\end_inset - -. - Ese botón te permite aplicar el estado del estilo personalizado cuando - el diálogo no está visible. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para reiniciar completamente el estilo a sus valores por omisión, usa -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Espacio -\family default -. - Si quieres conmutar sólo aquellas propiedades recién cambiadas (supón que - sólo pones forma -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -inclinada -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y serie -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -negrita -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -), marca el cuadro -\family sans -Conmutar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -todo -\family default - y pulsa -\family sans -Aceptar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Deberías también saber un poco sobre las diferencias entre los tres tipos - principales de tipografías -\family sans -serif -\family default -, -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif -\family default -, y -\family sans -ancho fijo -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Ancho fijo -\family default - es una tipografía de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -ancho fijo -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (mono), significa que cada carácter tiene la misma anchura, la -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -i -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ocupa el mismo espacio que la -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -m -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Aquí hay un ejemplo -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -sin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -texto en ancho fijo -\family default - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Más sobre -\series bold - -\backslash -phantom -\series default - en la sección -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-fantasma" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -sin texto en ancho fijo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Serif -\family default - son tipografías formadas por caracteres con pequeños -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -apéndices -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -remates -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en los extremos de las líneas que los dibujan. - El siguiente ejemplo muestra las diferencias: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -texto con letras serif, con remates -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -texto con letras no serif, sin remates -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Los caracteres serif facilitan una cómoda y ágil lectura. - Por esto se usan como tipografía predeterminada (conocida por -\family sans -roman -\family default -a). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Las tipografías -\family sans -Sans serif -\family default - (palo seco) no tienen apéndices. - Por eso este tipo de letra se suele usar para encabezados y textos cortos. - En este documento la usamos para resaltar nombres de menú. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Conmutar -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - significa cambiar entre dos estados excluyentes de una propiedad de estilo - del texto. - Cuando una propiedad que está marcada para conmutar en el diálogo Estilo - del texto se aplica a un texto que ya la tenía, se le quitará al texto - dicha característica. - Si aplicas un estilo con las propiedades A, B y C a un texto que actualmente - tiene las propiedades B, C, F y G, y si B es conmutable y C no lo es, el - texto acabará por tener las propiedades A, C, F y G. - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Nunca conmutado -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Siempre conmutado -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - implican que no tienes control sobre este comportamiento. - Para las propiedades de la parte izquierda del diálogo ( -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Familia -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, etc.), la conmutación depende de tu elección. - Si -\family sans -Conmutar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -todo -\family default - está marcado, todas las propiedades de esa parte se conmutan; por omisión - no lo está ninguna de ellas. - Por último, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Reiniciar -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - nunca se conmuta. - Si eliges -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Reiniciar -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - el -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Grosor -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y marcas -\family sans -Conmutar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -todo -\family default -, y luego aplicas el estilo a texto en negrita, este texto volverá al grosor - por omisión, ( -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Medio -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -), independientemente del número de veces que apliques el estilo. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Concluiremos reiterando la misma advertencia: No abuses de los estilos de - texto. - A menudo se confunde con una buena presentación, y casi nunca es así. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Vista preliminar e impresión -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introducción -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Una vez cubiertas algunas de las características fundamentales de la preparación - de documentos con LyX, probablemente quieras saber cómo imprimir tu obra - maestra. - Antes de explicarlo queremos dar unas breves nociones sobre lo que sucede - entre bambalinas. - También damos esta información, con mucho mayor detalle, en el manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX usa el programa LaTeX como soporte. - LaTeX es un paquete de macros para el sistema de tipografía TeX, pero para - evitar confusión, sólo nos referiremos a LaTeX. - LyX es lo que utilizas para escribir realmente. - Después, LyX ejecuta LaTeX para volcar tus escritos en una salida imprimible. - Esto tiene lugar en dos pasos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Primero, LyX convierte tu documento a una serie de comandos de texto para - LaTeX, generando un archivo con la extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -A continuación, LaTeX usa los comandos en el archivo -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default - y genera la salida para imprimir. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formatos del archivo de salida -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatos de archivo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Formatos-de-salida" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Texto simple (ASCII) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatos de archivo ! Texto simple -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este tipo de archivo tiene la extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.txt -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Contiene el documento en texto simple siguiendo las normas del -\emph on -American Standard Code for Information Interchange -\emph default - (ASCII). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes exportar el documento a ASCII con el menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Texto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -simple -\family default -. - -\lang english -However, this will not export any externally generated material such as - a BibTeX bibliography -\lang spanish - (sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bases-datos-bibliográficos" - -\end_inset - -). - -\lang english -If your document includes such material, use -\lang spanish - -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Más formatos y opciones -\family default - y -\lang english -then select -\family sans -\lang spanish -Texto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -simple -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii) -\family default -. - Esta será exportada internamente primero a PostScript ( -\lang english -generating thereby the external material -\lang spanish -) y luego convertida a ASCII. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -LaTeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatos de archivo ! LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este tipo de archivo tiene extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y contiene todos los comandos necesarios para procesar el documento con - el programa LaTeX. - Si conoces LaTeX, puedes usarlo para encontrar errores LaTeX o procesar - manualmente con comandos de consola. - El archivo LaTeX se crea automáticamente en el directorio temporal de LyX - siempre que veas (menú -\family sans -Ver -\family default -) o exportes el documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes exportar el documento a LaTeX con el menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. - Las variantes de exportación a LaTeX se explican en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Exportar" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -DVI -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatos de archivo ! DVI -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este tipo de archivo tiene extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.dvi -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Se conoce como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -independiente del dispositivo -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ( -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -device-independent -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, DVI), porque es completamente portable; puedes moverlo de una máquina - a otra sin necesidad de hacer ninguna conversión. - DVIs se usan para rápidas vistas preliminares y como preparación para otros - formatos de salida, como PostScript. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los archivos DVI no contienen imágenes, sino enlaces a ellas. - Por tanto no debes olvidar adjuntar las imágenes a los archivos DVI. - Esta característica también puede retardar la visualización del archivo, - porque el visor DVI tiene que convertir la imagen en segundo plano para - hacerla visible al deslizar el visor. - Así pues recomendamos usar PDF para archivos con muchas imágenes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un documento se exporta a DVI con el menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\family default - o -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default -. - Esta última opción usa el programa -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -. - -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - es un motor que proporciona soporte directo de Unicode y acceso directo - a tipografías (véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" - -\end_inset - -). - -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - todavía es un proyecto en desarrollo, pero puede llegar a ser el próximo - procesador estándar de TeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PostScript -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatos de archivo ! PostScript -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este tipo de archivo tiene la extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.ps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - PostScript fue desarrollado por la compañía -\family typewriter -Adobe -\family default - como lenguaje para impresoras. - Por eso estos archivos contienen comandos que usa la impresora para imprimirlos. - PostScript puede considerarse como un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -lenguaje de programación -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; con él puedes calcular y dibujar imágenes y diagramas. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Si estás interesado en este tema acude al paquete LaTeX -\series bold -pstricks -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! pstricks -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Por esto los archivos suelen ser más grandes que los PDF. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los archivos PostScript sólo pueden contener imágenes en el formato -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Encapsulated PostScript -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (EPS, extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.eps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -). - Como LyX permite usar cualquier formato de imagen conocido, tiene que trabajar - en segundo plano para convertir las imágenes a EPS. - Si por ejemplo, el documento tiene 50 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -imágenes, LyX ha de hacer 50 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -conversiones la primera vez que veas o exportes el documento. - Esto podría ralentizar el trabajo, así que si piensas usar PostScript, - puedes evitar el problema insertando las imágenes directamente en EPS. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El documento se puede exportar a PostScript con el menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Postscript -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PDF -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatos de archivo ! PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este tipo de archivo tiene la extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.pdf -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - El formato -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Portable Document Format -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (PDF) fue desarrollado por -\family typewriter -Adobe -\family default - como un derivado de PostScript. - Es más comprimido y utiliza muchos menos comandos que PostScript. - Como su nombre -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -portable -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - indica, puede ser procesado en cualquier sistema operativo y la salida - impresa se muestra exactamente igual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF puede contener imágenes en su propio formato PDF, y en los formatos - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Joint Photographic Experts Group -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (JPG, extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpeg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -), y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Portable Network Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (PNG, extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.png -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -). - No obstante, puedes poner cualquier otro formato de imagen, porque LyX - los convierte en segundo plano a alguno de los anteriores. - Pero como se ha comentado en la sección sobre PostScript, la conversión - de gráficos ralentiza el trabajo. - Por tanto se recomienda utilizar alguno de los tres formatos de imagen - mencionados. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un documento se puede exportar a PDF con el menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportar -\family default - en varios modos diferentes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) Este utiliza el programa -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default - que convierte directamente el archivo a PDF. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) Usa el programa -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -, que convierte el archivo directamente a PDF. - -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - es un motor aún más nuevo, derivado de -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -, que también proporciona soporte directo de Unicode y soporte para acceso - directo a tipografías (véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" - -\end_inset - -). - LuaTeX todavía es un proyecto en desarrollo, pero podría llegar a ser el - próximo procesador estándar de TeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) Usa el programa -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -, que convierte el archivo directamente a PDF. - -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default - es un nuevo motor que suministra soporte directo de Unicode y acceso directo - a tipografías (véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" - -\end_inset - -). - Es particularmente bueno para la tipografía de diferentes guiones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) Este utiliza el programa -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default - que convierte el archivo a DVI en segundo plano y en un segundo paso a - PDF. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) Este utiliza el programa -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default - que crea un PDF a partir de una versión PostScript del archivo. - La versión PostScript es producida por el programa -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - que usa una versión DVI como paso intermedio. - Así que este modo de exportación consta de tres conversiones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Recomendamos usar -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - porque -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default - soporta todas las características de las versiones actuales de PDF, es - rápido y estable. - Si confías en el soporte multi-guion y en tipografías específicas OpenType, - te podría interesar probar en su lugar -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - o -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default -, teniendo presente que estos dos programas aún no están tan maduros como - -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -XHTML -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatos de archivo ! XHTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -XHTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este tipo de archivo tiene la extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.xhtml -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Es un archivo apropiado para ver en navegadores web. - En sí mismo no contiene imágenes y demás, solo enlaces a ellos, y al generar - XHTML LyX también genera las imágenes correspondientes apropiadas. - Para la presentación de ecuaciones matemáticas en la salida hay varios - formatos disponibles en el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Salidas -\family default -, que se describe en la sección -\emph on -Las ecuaciones en XHTML -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La salida XHTML se encuentra -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -en desarrollo -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y aún no soporta todas las características de LyX. - Véase el capítulo -\emph on -LyX e Internet -\emph default - en el manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El documento se puede exportar como XHTML con el menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LyXHTML -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Vista preliminar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Vista preliminar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para echar un vistazo a tu documento, o ver su versión final con sus saltos - de página, notas bien numeradas, y demás, usa el menú -\family sans -Ver -\family default - y elige el tipo de archivo o el botón -\emph on - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\emph default -. - Se abrirá un programa visor donde podemos ver la salida en el formato de - salida definido como predeterminado, que se establece globalmente en las - preferencias (véase la sec. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" - -\end_inset - -), y que puede cambiarse para documentos concretos en la configuración del - documento (véase la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Salidas" - -\end_inset - -). - Se pueden seleccionar otros formatos de salida en el menú -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ver (Otros formatos) -\family default - o con el botón -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si has hecho cambios en tu documento, puedes refrescar la salida en la misma - ventana del visor usando el menú -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Actualizar -\family default - o -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Actualizar (Otros formatos) -\family default -, respectivamente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cuando utilizas -\family sans -Ver -\family default - un archivo, el archivo de salida sólo se genera en el directorio temporal - de LyX. - Para disponer de un archivo de salida real, utiliza -\family sans -Exportar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Imprimir archivos desde LyX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Imprimir -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Imprimir-archivos" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En vez de exportar un archivo y luego imprimirlo, puedes imprimirlo directamente - desde LyX, con el menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Imprimir -\family default - (combinación de teclas -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - -) o clic en el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - -. - LyX llamará internamente a LaTeX para generar un DVI. - Este archivo es procesado por el programa -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - a un archivo PostScript, que es finalmente impreso mediante el programa - -\family typewriter -ghostscript -\family default -. - Debido a esta serie de pasos, este método no es el más rápido. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En el cuadro -\family sans -Destino -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -impresión -\family default - puedes establecer los siguientes parámetros: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Impresora -\family default - Este es el nombre de la impresora. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Observa que este nombre de impresora es para el programa -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -. - Esto implica que -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - ha de configurarse para este nombre. - La impresora predeterminada se puede poner en el diálogo -\family sans -Preferencias -\family default - de LyX, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Impresora" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - La impresora debe entender PostScript. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Archivo -\family default - Nombre con el que se guardará la salida como archivo PostScript. - Se guardará en el directorio de trabajo de LyX a menos que se especifique - una ruta completa. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes elegir imprimir -\lang english -to print only a range of pages -\lang spanish -, sólo las páginas pares o las impares -\lang english -or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options are -\lang spanish - útil para imprimir a dos caras -\lang english -with a printer without a duplexer -\lang spanish -: Puedes reinsertar las hojas en la impresora después de imprimir una cara - para imprimir la otra. - Algunas impresoras expulsan las hojas boca arriba y otras al revés. - Al escoger un determinado orden de impresión, puedes tener todas las hojas - ya ordenadas al salir de la impresora. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Unas palabras sobre tipografía -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografía -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Guiones, rayas y signo menos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Guiones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Rayas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En LyX, el carácter -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dispone de cuatro longitudes, -\emph on -guión -\emph default -, -\emph on -semirraya -\emph default - (longitud doble), -\emph on -raya -\emph default - (longitud triple) y el signo -\emph on -menos -\emph default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -nombre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -salida -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -se inserta con -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -guión -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -tecla « -\family typewriter -- -\family default -» -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -semirraya -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -– -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Carácter especial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Símbolos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -raya -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -— -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Carácter especial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Símbolos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -menos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $-$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -« -\family typewriter -- -\family default -» en modo matemático -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La semirraya y la raya se pueden generar también insertando el carácter - « -\family typewriter -- -\family default -» varias veces. - En la salida se mostrarán los guiones con su longitud apropiada, pero no - en LyX. - «- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - --» genera una semirraya y «- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - --» una raya. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los tres tipos de guión son distintos del signo menos, que se usa en modo - matemático y tiene su propia longitud. - Aquí tenemos unos ejemplos de uso de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -- -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -División de palabras a final de lí-nea -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -guión -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -De A–Z -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -semirraya -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Incisos y diálogos. - ¡Oh! ―aquí hay rayas―. -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -raya -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -menos -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -División de palabras con guión -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -División de palabras -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:División-con-guión" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En LyX no se parten las palabras a final de línea; sí se dividen en la salida, - automáticamente, por medio del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, siguiendo las normas del idioma del documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX realiza la separación silábica casi a la perfección, sólo tiene dificultad -es con texto en letra de -\family sans -ancho fijo -\family default - y con estructuras inusuales, como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -h3knix/m0n0wall -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Si LaTeX no puede quebrar correctamente una palabra, puedes poner manualmente - un guión con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Guión de división silábica -\family default -. - Estos guiones extras sólo son recomendaciones para LaTeX. - Si los guiones no son necesarios, LaTeX los ignorará. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A veces interesará evitar que ciertas palabras o estructuras se partan. - Supongamos que en el documento se describe una combinación de teclas en - la forma -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -A-b c -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - LaTeX se encuentra con el guión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y lo interpreta como posibilidad de ruptura, lo que en este caso quedaría - feo. - Para impedir que se parta esa secuencia de letras, puedes ponerla en un - cuadro, tal como se describe en la sección -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Evitar la partición de palabras -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Signos de puntuación -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Signos de puntuación -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Abreviaturas y fin de frase -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Abreviaturas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cuando LyX ejecuta LaTeX para generar la versión final del documento, LaTeX - distingue automáticamente entre palabras, frases y abreviaturas. - LaTeX añade entonces la -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -cantidad de espacio adecuada -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Esto significa que en las frases hay un poquito más de espacio entre el - punto y la palabra siguiente. - Las abreviaturas llevan tras el punto un espacio igual que el de palabras. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Desafortunadamente, el algoritmo para identificar abreviaturas no siempre - funciona. - Si un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -. -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - está detrás de minúscula, es un fin de frase; si está detrás de mayúscula - es una abreviatura. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí hay unos ejemplos de abreviaturas -\emph on -correctas -\emph default - y finales de frase: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -M. - Butterfly -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -No te preocupes. - Sé feliz. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Y aquí hay un ejemplo de mal funcionamiento del algoritmo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej., ¡aquí hay demasiado espacio! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Apartado B. - Este es correcto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -No verás nada incorrecto hasta que veas la salida del documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para arreglar este inconveniente, haz una de las siguientes cosas: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Inserta un -\family sans -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -entre palabras -\family default - detrás de abreviaturas en minúscula (véase sección -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-entre-palabra" - -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios ! Entre palabras -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Inserta un -\family sans -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -delgado -\family default -entre los caracteres abreviados (véase sección -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-delgado" - -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacios ! Delgado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Inserta un punto -\family sans -Fin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -oración -\family default - con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Carácter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -especial -\family default - para forzar el uso de un espacio entre frases. - Esta función está asociada a -\family sans -Ctrl+. - -\family default - para un rápido acceso. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con las correcciones, los ejemplos anteriores quedan así: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -¡aquí hay demasiado espacio! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Apartado B\SpecialChar \@. - Esto es correcto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En algunos idiomas no se pone espacio extra entre oraciones. - Si tu idioma es uno de ellos, no debes preocuparte, porque LaTeX lo tiene - en cuenta. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para los que quieran tomarse la molestia, hay una herramienta para revisar - errores furtivos, en -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Comprobar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TeX -\family default -, que se describe en -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Comillas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografía ! Comillas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Comillas|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Tipografía -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En general, LyX maneja las comillas correctamente. - En concreto, pondrá comillas de apertura al principio de una cita y comillas - de cierre al final. - Por ejemplo, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -abrir cerrar -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - La tecla con el carácter -\family sans -" -\family default - las genera automáticamente. - El tipo de comillas generado por la tecla -\family sans -" -\family default - se puede cambiar en el submenú -\family sans -Idioma -\family default - del diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - En el cuadro -\family sans -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cita -\family default - se pueden seleccionar comillas para distintos idiomas. - Hay seis opciones: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Texto -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Comillas como estas -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -dobles -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Quotes els -\end_inset - -sencillas -\begin_inset Quotes ers -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -Texto -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Comillas como -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -estas -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - o 'estas -\begin_inset Quotes ers -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Texto -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Comillas como -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -estas -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Quotes gls -\end_inset - -estas -\begin_inset Quotes grs -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Texto -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Comillas como -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -estas -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Quotes pls -\end_inset - -estas -\begin_inset Quotes prs -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Texto -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - Comillas como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -estas -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Quotes fls -\end_inset - -estas -\begin_inset Quotes frs -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -»Texto« -\family default - Comillas como »estas« o -\begin_inset Quotes als -\end_inset - -estas -\begin_inset Quotes ars -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Estas opciones afectan al carácter generado por la tecla -\family sans -" -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por otra parte, para generar comillas en texto simple, teclea -\family sans -Ctrl+Mayúsculas+" -\family default -. - Esto genera -\family typewriter -" -\family default - en cualquier caso. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ligaduras -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografía ! Ligaduras -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ligaduras|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Tipografía -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Ligaduras" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es una práctica habitual en tipografía agrupar ciertas letras e imprimirlas - como caracteres simples. - Estos agrupamientos se conocen como -\emph on -ligaduras -\emph default -. - Puesto que LaTeX sabe de esto, tus documentos también las mostrarán en - la salida. - Las ligaduras estándar son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ff -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -fi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -fl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ffi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ffl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Algunos idiomas usan otras ligaduras si la tipografía del documento las - soporta. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puede ser que en ocasiones no te guste cómo quedan ciertas letras ligadas. - Mientras que una ligadura puede quedar bien en una palabra como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -graffiti -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, puede dar un aspecto raro en otras como la palabra inglesa -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -cufflink -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - o la alemana «Dorffest». - Para romper una ligadura, usa -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligadura. - -\family default - Esto cambia el aspecto de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -cufflinks -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - a -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -links -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y de «Dorffest» a -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -fest -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nombres propios en LyX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Nombres propios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Nombres-Propios-en-LyX" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Seguramente has observado que la palabra -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - aparece siempre con caracteres de distinto tamaño y altura. - LaTeX es el nombre del programa usado por LyX y es interpretado como un - nombre propio cuando lo escribes en LyX como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Las llaves en código TeX impiden que «comando» aparezca como nombre propio - en la salida; véase el último párrafo de esta sección. - Para generar nombres propios omite el código TeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - ¡Observa la alternancia de mayúsculas y minúsculas! LyX reconoce los siguientes - nombres propios: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LyX El nombre del juego, escribe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - para generarlo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -TeX El programa usado por LaTeX, escribe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - para generarlo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeX El programa usado por LyX, escribe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - para generarlo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeX2e La versión actual de LaTeX, escribe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX2e -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - para generarlo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quizá te preguntes por qué versión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -2 -\begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Es una vieja tradición en el mundillo TeX dar a los programas números de - versión en griego. - Por ejemplo, el número de versión de TeX converge al número -\begin_inset Formula $\pi$ -\end_inset - -: La versión actual es -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -TeX-3.141592 -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, la anterior fue -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -TeX-3.14159 -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si no quieres usar nombres propios, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. - en encabezados de sección, debes insertar un par de llaves vacías en código - TeX en la palabra. - En LyX lo verás como: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/LaTeX.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Más sobre código TeX en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Código-TeX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Unidades -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografía ! Unidades -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En general, el espacio entre un número y su unidad es menor que el espacio - normal entre dos palabras. - Como verás en el ejemplo siguiente, se ve mejor con un espacio más pequeño. - Para introducir esos espacios usa el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -delgado -\family default - (atajo -\family sans -Ctrl+Mayúsculas+Espacio -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En este ejemplo se ven las diferencias: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -espacio entre número y unidad -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -medio espacio entre número y unidad -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Líneas viudas y huérfanas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografía ! Líneas viudas y huérfanas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En los primeros tiempos de los procesadores de texto, los saltos de página - iban allí donde acababa la página. - No se atendía a lo que estaba escrito. - Podías encontrarte con el encabezado de una nueva sección o la primera - línea de un nuevo párrafo, solos al final de la página, o la última línea - de un párrafo aislada en la página siguiente. - Estos flecos de texto llegaron a ser conocidos como líneas -\emph on -viudas -\emph default - y líneas -\emph on -huérfanas -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sin duda, LyX puede impedir los saltos de página detrás de un encabezado - de sección. - Esto forma parte de las ventajas de los entornos de párrafo. - Pero, ¿qué pasa con las líneas viudas y huérfanas, cuando el salto de página - deja una línea de un párrafo aislada al principio o al final de una página? - LaTeX incorpora reglas que gobiernan los saltos de página, y algunas de - ellas están pensadas precisamente para evitar las líneas viudas o huérfanas. - Esta es una de las ventajas que obtiene LyX del empleo de LaTeX como soporte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -No es posible explicar aquí la forma en que TeX y LaTeX deciden dónde saltar - una página , o en cómo ajustar esta característica. - Algunos libros sobre LaTeX listados en la bibliografía [como -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -] tienen más información. - Sin embargo, no deberías preocuparte por este asunto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Notas, gráficos, cuadros y flotantes -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cap:Notas-y-flotantes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los temas tratados en este capítulo se desarrollan en profundidad en el - manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados. - -\emph default -En él encontrarás también consejos y trucos para casos especiales. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Notas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Notas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX suministra algunos tipos de notas para incluir en los documentos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Nota -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LyX Este tipo es para incluir notas internas que no deben aparecer en el - documento de salida. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Esto es un texto en un cuadro de nota LyX que no aparece en la salida. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Comentario Esta nota tampoco aparece en la salida pero sí como comentario - en el documento LaTeX cuando lo exportas mediante el menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaTeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(xxx) -\family default -. - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Comment -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Esto es un texto en un cuadro de nota que sólo aparece como comentario en - los archivos LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Resaltado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -gris El texto de esta nota aparecerá en la salida en el color elegido en - la configuración del documento, apartado -\family sans - Colores\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Notas en gris -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Esto es el texto -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Esto es un ejemplo de nota al pie dentro de una nota resaltada en gris. - En este documento, el color de este tipo de notas es azul. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - de un comentario que se ve en la salida en color gris. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Como se ve en este ejemplo, en las notas resaltadas en gris se pueden incluir - notas al pie. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las notas se insertan con el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - o con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota -\family default -. - Haciendo clic derecho sobre el cuadro de una nota se puede seleccionar - el tipo de nota. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Notas al pie -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notas al pie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX muestra las notas a pie de página en recuadros: al insertar una nota - mediante el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pie -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "footnote-insert" -\end_inset - -, -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -verás un recuadro como este -\family default -\series default -\bar default -: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/notapieQt4.png - scale 85 - groupId botonesbh - -\end_inset - - -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -. - Es la representación en LyX de una nota a pie de página. - Si haces -\family default -\series default -\bar default - clic izquierdo sobre -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -él se abre un marco rojo en el que puedes escribir el texto de la nota -\family default -\series default -\bar default -. - Otro clic en la etiqueta cierra el recuadro -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no -. - Si quieres convertir un texto existente en nota al pie, selecciónalo y - pulsa el botón de la barra de herramientas -\family default -\series default -\bar default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ejemplo de nota al pie: -\family roman -\series medium -\bar no - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Para ocultar en LyX el texto de la nota al pie, haz clic sobre el recuadro - con la etiqueta «pie». -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la salida, la nota al pie aparece como un superíndice numerado en el - lugar del texto en el que se ha insertado. - El texto de la nota se muestra al final de la página actual. - Los números de las notas son calculados por LyX -\lang english -according to the document class. - -\lang spanish - LyX aún no soporta -\lang english -a particular -\lang spanish - esquema de numeración, pero puedes usarlos mediante comandos LaTeX especiales. - Se describen en el manual -\emph on - Objetos insertados. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Notas al margen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notas al margen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Notas-al-margen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las notas al margen se ven y se comportan en LyX como las notas al pie. - Se insertan con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -margen -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "marginalnote-insert" -\end_inset - -. - Aparece un cuadro con la etiqueta -\family roman -\series medium - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -margen -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, que es su representación en LyX y que contiene el texto de la nota. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Al lado hay un ejemplo de nota al margen. -\family roman -\series medium - -\begin_inset Marginal -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Esto es una nota al margen. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Estas notas salen en el margen derecho en documentos a una cara. - En documentos a doble cara se muestran en el margen externo —izquierdo - en páginas pares, derecho en páginas impares—. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay más información sobre este asunto en la sección -\emph on -Notas al margen -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Gráficos e imágenes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Imágenes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gráficos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Gráficos" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para insertar una imagen en el documento, sitúa el cursor en la posición - que quieras y clic sobre el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - o selecciona -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Imagen -\family default - desde el menú. - Se mostrará un diálogo para escoger el archivo a cargar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este diálogo contiene numerosos parámetros, la mayoría autodefinidos. - La pestaña -\family sans -Gráficos -\family default - permite escoger el archivo de imagen. - La imagen se puede transformar poniendo un ángulo de rotación y un factor - de escala. - Las unidades de escala se explican en el Apéndice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Unidades-disponibles" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la pestaña -\family sans -Recorte -\family default - es posible ajustar coordenadas para fijar la altura y anchura de la imagen - en la salida. - Las coordenadas también pueden calcularse automáticamente pulsando el botón - -\family sans -Obtener -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -de -\family default -l -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -archivo -\family default -. - La opción -\family sans -Recortar -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -al -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -cuadro -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -delimitador -\family default - hace que sólo se imprima la región comprendida entre las coordenadas dadas. - Normalmente no debes preocuparte de las coordenadas y puedes ignorar la - pestaña -\family sans -Recorte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los expertos en LaTeX pueden dar opciones adicionales en la pestaña -\family sans -Opciones de LaTeX y LyX -\family default -. - También puedes ajustar aquí la presentación de la imagen en LyX. - La opción -\family sans -Modo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -borrador -\family default - hace que la imagen no aparezca en la salida, sólo sale un marco con el - tamaño de la imagen. - La opción -\family sans -No descomprimir al exportar -\family default - se explica en la sección -\emph on -Diálogo de gráficos -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El diálogo -\family sans -Gráficos -\family default - puede abrirse en cualquier momento con un clic sobre una imagen. - La imagen se muestra en la salida exactamente en la posición en que está - en el texto. - Esta es una imagen en un párrafo separado, centrado horizontalmente: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/mobius.eps - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si quieres titular o referenciar una imagen, tienes que ponerla en un flotante; - véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Figuras-flotantes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formatos de imagen -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatos de imagen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Formatos-de-imagen" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes insertar imágenes en cualquier formato. - Pero como se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Formatos-de-salida" - -\end_inset - -, cada formato de archivo del documento de salida permite sólo ciertos formatos - de archivo de imagen. - Por eso LyX usa el programa -\family sans -ImageMagick -\family default - en segundo plano para convertir imágenes al formato adecuado. - Para aumentar el rendimiento evitando estas conversiones, puedes usar sólo - los formatos de imagen listados en las subsecciones de la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Formatos-de-salida" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como en el caso de las tipografías, hay dos tipos de archivos de imagen: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Imágenes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mapa -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bits -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Bitmap) formadas por mapas de puntos (píxeles), generalmente comprimidos. - Por tanto, estas imágenes no son totalmente escalables y se ven pixeladas - a valores altos de zoom. - Formatos de imagen en bitmap bien conocidos son -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Graphics Interchange Format -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (GIF, extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -.gif -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -GIF|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Formatos de imagen -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Portable Network Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (PNG, extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -.png -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PNG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Formatos de imagen -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Joint Photographic Experts Group -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (JPG, extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -.jpg -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -.jpeg -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -JPG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Formatos de imagen -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Imágenes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vectoriales se generan mediante una descripción de una serie de trazos (vectores -) y por tanto se puede cambiar su escala a cualquier tamaño sin pérdidas. - La posibilidad de escala hace falta para crear presentaciones, cuyo tamaño - siempre es ajustado por el proyector. - El escalado también es útil en los documentos en línea para permitir zoom - en diagramas. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Formatos de imagen escalables pueden ser -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Scalable Vector Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (SVG, extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -. -\family typewriter -svg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -SVG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Formatos de imagen -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Encapsulated PostScript -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (EPS, extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -. -\family typewriter -eps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -EPS|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Formatos de imagen -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Portable Document Format -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (PDF, extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -. -\family typewriter -pdf -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Formatos de imagen -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Escribimos -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -pueden ser -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, porque se puede convertir cualquier imagen bitmap a PDF o EPS y el resultado - seguirá siendo no escalable. - En estos casos sólo se añade una cabecera con las propiedades de la imagen - a la imagen original -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En el caso de PDF, además se comprime la imagen original. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalmente no es posible convertir una imagen bitmap a escalable, sólo - viceversa. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Agrupación de configuraciones de imágenes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Imágenes ! Agrupación de configuraciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cada imagen puede definir un nuevo grupo de imágenes o unirse a un grupo - existente. - Las imágenes pertenecientes a un grupo comparten los mismos ajustes de - configuración, de modo que si se modifican las características de una imagen - se modifican igual y automáticamente las de las imágenes incluidas en el - mismo grupo. - Así puedes cambiar, por ejemplo, el tamaño de salida de un grupo de imágenes - sin necesidad de hacerlo individualmente con cada una de ellas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para crear un nuevo grupo se -\lang english -pressing the button -\family sans -Open -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -new -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -group -\family default - in -\lang spanish - el diálogo -\family sans - -\lang english -Graphics -\family default -\lang spanish - en la pestaña -\family sans -Opciones de LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX y Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default -. - Se puede integrar una imagen a un grupo existente marcando el nombre del - mismo en el menú contextual de la imagen, accesible con clic derecho. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Cuadros y tablas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tablas|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Cuadros -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cuadros -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Cuadros" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un cuadro se inserta mediante el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "tabular-insert" -\end_inset - - o el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cuadro/Tabla -\family default -. - Aparece un diálogo en el que se pide el número de filas y columnas. - Por omisión, el cuadro tiene líneas que enmarcan cada celda y la primera - fila aparece separada por una línea doble: la línea inferior de la primera - fila y la línea superior de la segunda fila. - Ejemplo de cuadro: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -A -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -B -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\size normal -\noun off -\color none - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -C -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Diálogo de configuración de cuadros -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un cuadro se puede cambiar mediante la ventana de diálogo que aparece al - pulsar sobre él con el botón derecho del ratón y después seleccionar -\family sans -Más\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuratión -\family default -. - Se pueden ajustar los parámetros de la celda y fila/columna en la que se - encuentra el cursor. - La mayoría de opciones también funcionan sobre una selección. - Esto significa que si seleccionas más celdas, filas o columnas, la acción - se realizará sobre todas ellas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además del diálogo hay una -\family sans -barra de herramientas -\family default - para cuadros, que aparece cuando el cursor se sitúa dentro de un cuadro, - que permite -\family sans - -\family default -establecer sus propiedades. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la pestaña de -\family sans -Configuración -\family default - del diálogo puedes poner la alineación horizontal para la fila actual. - Si añades una fila o columna, se inserta, respectivamente, a la derecha - o debajo de la celda actual. - La alineación vertical de una columna sólo se puede ajustar si se fija - la anchura. - Fijar una anchura permite tener saltos de línea y varios párrafos en una - celda, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Celdas-de-cuadros" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes seleccionar varias celdas de una fila/columna para hacer una celda - multicolumna/multifila, marcando el cuadro -\family sans -Multicolumna -\family default -o -\family sans -Multifila. - -\family default - Así se funden las celdas en -\emph on -una -\emph default -, que se extiende sobre más de una columna/fila. - Las celdas multicolumna se consideran como filas propias, de forma que - la alineación, la anchura, y los bordes afectan sólo a la celda multicolumna. - Aquí hay un ejemplo de cuadro con multicolumna en la primera fila, y una - celda de la última fila sin borde superior: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -abc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -def ghi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -jkl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -A -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -B -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -C -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -D -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los expertos pueden añadir argumentos especiales de LaTeX al cuadro, necesarios - para formatos de cuadro especiales, como multifilas; se explican en la - sección -\emph on -Cuadros y tablas -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. - También puedes girar la celda actual o todo el cuadro 90 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -grados hacia la derecha. - Estas rotaciones no se ven en LyX, sólo en la salida. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ten en cuenta que la mayoría de visores DVI -\emph on -no -\emph default - pueden mostrar rotaciones. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La pestaña -\family sans -Bordes -\family default - permite poner y quitar bordes en la fila/columna actual. - Los botones del marco -\family sans -Todos -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -los -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bordes -\family default - permiten poner o quitar todas las líneas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cuadros largos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cuadros ! Largos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si el cuadro es demasiado largo para una página, puedes usar la opción -\family sans -Usar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cuadro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -largo -\family default - en la pestaña -\family sans -Cuadro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -largo -\family default - del diálogo para repartirlo automáticamente entre varias páginas. - Al hacer esto se habilitan diversos botones opcionales en los que puede - definirse: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Encabezado: -\family default - La fila actual y todas las de arriba, que no tienen ninguna opción especial - definida, se definen como filas de encabezado para todas las páginas del - cuadro, excepto para la primera página si -\family sans -Primer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -encabezado -\family default - está definido. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Primer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -encabezado: -\family default - La fila actual y superiores, que no tienen ninguna opción especial definida, - se definen como encabezados de la primera página del cuadro. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Pie: -\family default - La fila actual y todas las siguientes, que no tienen ninguna opción especial - definida, se definen como pie de todas las páginas del cuadro, excepto - para la última página si se define -\family sans -Último -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pie. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Último -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pie: L -\family default -a fila actual y siguientes, que no tienen ninguna opción especial definida, - se definen como pie de la última página del cuadro. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Leyenda: La primera fila se reajusta como columna simple. - Ahora puedes insertar ahí la leyenda del cuadro con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Leyenda -\family default -. - Más detalles sobre leyendas en cuadros largos en el manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -También se puede especificar una fila en la que se divida el cuadro. - Si se establece más de una opción en la misma fila, habría que tener en - cuenta que sólo la primera de ellas se usa en la fila dada. - Las otras quedarán definidas como -\emph on -vacías -\emph default -. - En este contexto, primera significa primero en este orden: -\family sans -Pie, Último -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pie, Encabezado, Primer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -encabezado -\family default -. - El siguiente cuadro muestra cómo funciona: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Ejemplo de Lista Telefónica (ignore los nombres) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -NOMBRE -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Ejemplo de Lista Telefónica -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -NOMBRE -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -continúa ... -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -999 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Fin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Celdas de cuadros -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cuadros ! Celdas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Celdas-de-cuadros" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Una celda puede contener texto, una ecuación en línea, una figura, u otro - cuadro. - Todas estas clases de objetos pueden colocarse en la misma celda. - Se puede alterar el tamaño y la forma de la letra. - Pero no puedes poner determinados entornos (como -\family sans -Sección* -\family default -, etc.), ni establecer opciones de espacio, etc., para los párrafos en una - celda. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para poner entradas multilínea en una celda, debes declarar una anchura - fija de columna en el diálogo de cuadros. - Entonces, si la longitud del texto excede el ancho dado, se divide automáticame -nte en varias líneas y la celda se amplía verticalmente. - Un ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Esto es una entrada multilínea en una celda. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -5 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -6 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Ahora es más larga. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -7 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -8 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Esto es una entrada multilínea en una celda. - Ahora es más larga. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -9 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cortar y pegar entre cuadros y celdas de cuadros funciona razonablemente - bien. - Puedes cortar y pegar más de una fila. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -No se puede pegar en una selección multicelda porque no estaría claro cómo - proceder al pegar, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej., una palabra en una selección 2×3. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Seleccionar con el ratón o con -\family sans -Mayúsculas+flecha -\family default - trabaja como es habitual. - También puedes copiar y pegar un cuadro entero como un todo iniciando la - selección desde fuera del mismo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Flotantes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flotantes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Flotantes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introducción -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un flotante es un bloque de texto asociado con una especie de etiqueta que - no tiene posición fija. - Puede «flotar» adelante o atrás una o dos páginas, donde encaje mejor. - Las -\family sans -Notas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pie -\family default - y las -\family sans -Notas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -margen -\family default - también son flotantes, porque pueden flotar a la página siguiente cuando - hay demasiadas notas en la página. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los flotantes hacen posible composiciones de alta calidad. - Imágenes y cuadros se pueden distribuir equitativamente en las páginas - para evitar espacios en blanco y páginas sin texto. - Como el flotante destruye a menudo el contexto entre texto e imagen o cuadro, - cada flotante puede estar referido en el texto. - Por lo tanto los flotantes están numerados. - Las referencias se describen en la sección -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para insertar un flotante, usa el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flotante -\family default -. - En el documento aparece un cuadro con una etiqueta. - La etiqueta será traducida automáticamente al idioma del documento. - A continuación de la etiqueta se puede escribir el texto de la leyenda. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flotantes ! Leyenda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - La imagen o la tabla se inserta encima o debajo de la leyenda en un párrafo - separado dentro del flotante. - Para mantener legible el documento LyX, puedes mostrar u ocultar el contenido - del flotante haciendo clic izquierdo sobre el recuadro. - Un recuadro se muestra así: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/flotanteQt4.png - scale 85 - groupId botonesbh - -\end_inset - - —un cuadro gris con etiqueta en rojo—. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se recomienda insertar flotantes como párrafos separados para evitar posibles - errores de LaTeX, que pueden ocurrir si el texto circundante se formatea - de modo especial. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ejemplos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Figuras flotantes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flotantes ! Figuras -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Figuras-flotantes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La figura -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Ornitorrinco-distorsionado" - -\end_inset - - se ha creado usando el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flotante\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Figura -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert figure" -\end_inset - -. - La imagen se ha insertado poniendo el cursor sobre la etiqueta de la leyenda - y usando el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Imagen -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - -. - La imagen se ha centrado en el flotante poniendo el cursor delante o detrás - de la imagen y usando el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración del párrafo -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/platypus.eps - lyxscale 50 - width 50col% - rotateOrigin center - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Ornitorrinco-distorsionado" - -\end_inset - -Un ornitorrinco muy distorsionado en un flotante. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Estas figuras flotantes también muestran cómo poner una etiqueta y crear - una referencia a ella: Inserta una etiqueta en el título con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Etiqueta -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - - y haz referencia a ella con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Referencia -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cruzada -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -. - Es importante usar referencias a figuras flotantes, mejor que hacer vagas - alusiones como «la figura de arriba», debido a que LaTeX recolocará los - flotantes en el documento final, y entonces la figura podría no quedar - «arriba» precisamente. - Para más sobre referencias cruzadas, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalmente sólo se inserta una imagen en un flotante, pero si quieres poner - dos imágenes con leyendas separadas, esto es posible insertando una imagen - flotante dentro de otro flotante. - Ten en cuenta que sólo el título principal del flotante se añade al índice - de figuras. - La Figura -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" - -\end_inset - - es un ejemplo de flotante con dos imágenes adosadas. - También se puede poner una sobre otra. - Las figuras -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Estructura-indefinible" - -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Ornitorrinco" - -\end_inset - - son las subfiguras. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Estructura-indefinible" - -\end_inset - -Estructura indefinible -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Ornitorrinco" - -\end_inset - -Ornitorrinco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/platypus.eps - lyxscale 60 - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Dos-imágenes" - -\end_inset - -Dos imágenes distorsionadas. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Cuadros flotantes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flotantes ! Cuadros y Tablas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los cuadros flotantes se insertan con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flotante\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cuadro -\family default - o con el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert table" -\end_inset - -. - Tienen las mismas propiedades que las figuras flotantes, excepto -\lang english -that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not - above like for figures and that the label begins with -\lang spanish - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -tab: -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - El cuadro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Un cuadro flotante" - -\end_inset - - es un cuadro flotante. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Un cuadro flotante" - -\end_inset - -Un cuadro flotante. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Pepe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Mari -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -Teo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -a & b\\ -c & d -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Más información -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flotantes ! Información detallada -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX proporciona otros tipos de flotantes y la posibilidad de girarlos. - También permite cambiar el esquema de su numeración, controlar su colocación - y cambiar el formato y posición de la leyenda. - Todas estas opciones se explican en detalle con ejemplos en el capítulo - -\emph on -Flotantes -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Minipáginas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Minipáginas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Minipáginas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX provee un mecanismo para generar una página, llamada minipágina, dentro - de otra. - En una minipágina se aplican las reglas habituales de sangrado, ajuste - de línea, etc. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En LyX, las minipáginas se ven como un recuadro desplegable que se inserta - con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marco. - -\family default - Haciendo clic derecho en el recuadro se pueden fijar las dimensiones y - la alineación de la minipágina. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "30col%" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -Esto es una minipágina. - El texto en estilo cursiva. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -Las minipáginas se suelen usar para texto en otro idioma o que necesita - otro formato. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -Si sitúas dos minipáginas adosadas, puedes usar -\family sans -Relleno -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal -\family default -, descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-horizontal" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Minipágina con un poco de texto estúpido, sólo para rellenar la minipágina. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Minipágina con un poco de texto estúpido, sólo para rellenar la minipágina. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Haciendo clic derecho en el recuadro de una minipágina puedes cambiar el - tipo de marco y la decoración del borde. - En el capítulo -\emph on -Marcos -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default - se explican con detalle todos los tipos de marcos y sus características. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Ecuaciones matemáticas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ecuaciones|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Matemáticas -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cap:Ecuaciones-matemáticas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los temas tratados en este capítulo se desarrollan en profundidad en el - manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones. - -\emph default -En él encontrarás también consejos y trucos para casos especiales. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Edición básica de ecuaciones -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Edición de ecuaciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para crear una ecuación matemática, pulsa el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-mode on" -\end_inset - - (atajo -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-mode" -\end_inset - -). - Con esto aparece un pequeño marco azul con esquinas color púrpura. - El marco azul delimita la ecuación; los marcadores púrpuras el nivel de - anidación en la ecuación. - También puedes insertar un tipo particular de ecuación con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuación -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La edición de los parámetros de una ecuación y la adición de estructuras - matemáticas se puede hacer mediante las -\family sans -Barras -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -herramientas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -matemáticas -\family default -que se muestran cuando el cursor está en una ecuación. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay dos tipos principales de ecuaciones: Las ecuaciones -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -en línea -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - se muestran en la misma línea del texto, como en este caso: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Línea de texto con una ecuación, -\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ -\end_inset - - en línea. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las ecuaciones -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -presentadas -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - se muestran separadas del texto, como si estuvieran en su propio párrafo, - como en este caso: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -A=B -\] - -\end_inset - -Sólo se pueden numerar y referenciar las ecuaciones presentadas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX soporta además muchos comandos LaTeX de matemáticas. - P. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e., escribir -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -alpha -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, seguido de espacio, en una ecuación imprime la letra griega -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ -\end_inset - -. - A veces, escribir comandos podría ser más rápido que usar la -\family sans -barra -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -herramientas -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Navegando por una ecuación -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Navegar por una ecuación -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La posición del cursor en una ecuación se controla mucho mejor con las teclas - de flecha. - LyX se sirve de pequeños rectángulos para marcar el punto de inserción, - y las teclas de flecha permiten navegar entre ellos. - Al pulsar -\family sans -Espacio -\family default - el cursor sale de la estructura matemática actual (raíz -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ -\end_inset - -, paréntesis -\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ -\end_inset - -, matriz -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - -, \SpecialChar \ldots{} -) sin abandonar la ecuación. - Si se pulsa -\family sans -Escape -\family default - el cursor sale de la ecuación y se coloca tras ella. - La tecla -\family sans -Tab -\family default - permite desplazarse horizontalmente por la ecuación; por ejemplo, por las - celdas de una matriz o a través de una ecuación multilínea. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El -\family sans -Espacio -\family default -, representado en este documento como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En la salida, este comando aparece como su carácter correspondiente, el - que identifica un espacio (espacio visible). -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, parece que no hace nada en una ecuación, puesto que no añade espacio, - pero sirve para salir de estructuras anidadas. - Por esta razón debes tener cuidado con el uso de -\family sans -Espacio -\family default -. - Por ejemplo, si quieres escribir -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ -\end_inset - -, teclea -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -2x+1 -\series default - y si quieres escribir -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ -\end_inset - - teclea -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -2x -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -+1 -\series default -, en este caso sólo -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Formula $2x$ -\end_inset - - -\family default - está bajo la raíz. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes omitir partes de una ecuación, como se ve en la siguiente matriz - con huecos: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -\lambda_{1}\\ - & \ddots\\ - & & \lambda_{n} -\end{array}\right) -\] - -\end_inset - -Si escribes una fracción sólo parcialmente, o un subíndice vacío, el resultado - es impredecible, aunque a la mayoría de estructuras les trae sin cuidado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Seleccionar texto -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay dos formas de seleccionar texto en una ecuación. - Pon el cursor en un extremo de la cadena de texto que quieras, y pulsa - -\family sans -Mayúsculas -\family default - y una flecha de movimiento para seleccionarlo. - Resaltará como una selección de texto normal. - Alternativamente puedes seleccionar texto con el ratón como de costumbre. - El texto resaltado puede cortarse o copiarse para pegarlo en cualquier - fórmula, aunque no en una zona de texto normal. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Exponentes y subíndices -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Exponentes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Subíndices -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con el panel de ecuaciones se pueden poner exponentes y subíndices (botones - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-superscript" -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-subscript" -\end_inset - -), pero la forma más sencilla es usar comandos. - Para escribir -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - -, teclea en una ecuación -\series bold -x^2 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default -. - El -\family sans -Espacio -\family default - vuelve a poner el cursor en el nivel básico de la expresión, saliendo del - exponente. - Si tecleas -\series bold -x^2y -\series default -, obtendrás -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ -\end_inset - -; para obtener -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ -\end_inset - -, teclea -\series bold -x^2 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -y -\series default -. - Para poner como exponentes caracteres que serían acentuados con el circunflejo - «^», debes teclear un -\family sans -Espacio -\family default - extra entre el acento -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -^ -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y el carácter. - Por ejemplo, para -\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ -\end_inset - - teclea -\series bold -x^ -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -a -\series default -. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -N. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -del t.: -\emph default -Este será el método a usar habitualmente en teclados en español para entrar - en modo exponente. - También funciona pulsar dos veces seguidas la tecla «^». - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Los subíndices se ponen con guión bajo -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -_ -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -: Para -\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ -\end_inset - -, teclea -\series bold -a_1 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fracciones -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Fracciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Una fracción se escribe con el comando -\series bold - -\backslash -frac -\series default - o con el icono -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\frac" -\end_inset - - de la -\family sans -Barra -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -herramientas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -matemáticas -\family default -. - Se presenta una fracción vacía, con el cursor sobre la línea de fracción. - Para moverlo abajo, sencillamente pulsa la tecla -\family sans -Abajo -\family default -. - Para volver, -\family sans -Arriba -\family default -. - En una fracción se puede poner cualquier estructura, por ejemplo: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} -2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 -\end{array}\right)}\right] -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Raíces -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Raíces -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las raíces se generan con el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\sqrt" -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\root" -\end_inset - - de la -\family sans -Barra -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -herramientas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -matemáticas, -\family default - o con los comandos -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default - o -\series bold - -\backslash -root -\series default -. - -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default - escribe siempre raíces cuadradas, con -\series bold - -\backslash -root -\series default - puedes escribir raíces de orden mayor, como cúbicas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Operadores con límites -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Integrales -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Operador suma -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Operadores-con-límites" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los operadores suma ( -\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ -\end_inset - -) e integral ( -\begin_inset Formula $\int$ -\end_inset - -) se decoran frecuentemente con límites. - En LyX puedes introducir los límites como si fueran exponentes o subíndices, - directamente después del símbolo. - El operador suma coloca automáticamente sus «límites» al lado en fórmulas - en línea, sobre y bajo el símbolo en fórmulas en modo presentación. - Tal como en -\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ -\end_inset - -, y en -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e -\] - -\end_inset - -Sin embargo, las integrales sitúan sus límites al lado en cualquier caso. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Todos los operadores con límites cambian automáticamente de tamaño cuando - se ponen en modo presentación. - La colocación de los límites puede cambiarse situando el cursor directamente - detrás del operador y pulsando -\family sans -Alt+M -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\family default - o con el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuaciones\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cambiar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tipo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -límites -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Algunas otras expresiones matemáticas tienen añadida esta característica - de colocación de los límites, como -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Límites -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x), -\] - -\end_inset - -que pondrá -\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ -\end_inset - - bajo -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -lím -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en estilo presentación. - En fórmulas en línea se ve así: -\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Observa que la función lím se ha introducido como una función macro -\series bold - -\backslash -lim -\series default -. - Echa un vistazo a la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Funciones" - -\end_inset - - para ver una explicación de las macros de funciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Símbolos matemáticos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Símbolos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La mayor parte de los símbolos matemáticos se encuentran en los -\family sans -Paneles -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ecuaciones -\family default - en alguna de las distintas categorías: -\family sans -Griego -\family default -, -\family sans -Operadores -\family default -, -\family sans -Relaciones -\family default -, -\family sans -Flechas -\family default -\SpecialChar \ldots{} - También hay símbolos adicionales suministrados por la -\emph on -American Mathematical Society -\emph default - (AMS). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si conoces el comando LaTeX para una estructura o símbolo y quieres ponerlo - así, no tienes que emplear el -\family sans -Panel de ecuaciones -\family default -, sino que puedes teclear el comando directamente en la ecuación. - LyX lo convertirá al símbolo o estructura correspondiente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cambiar el espacio -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Espacios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El espacio estándar provisto por LaTeX se puede cambiar. - Para hacerlo teclea -\family sans -Ctrl+Espacio -\family default - o usa el botón -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\space" -\end_inset - - -\family default - de los -\family sans -Paneles de ecuaciones -\family default -. - Se genera un espacio señalado con un pequeño marcador en la pantalla. - Por ejemplo, la secuencia -\series bold -a -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ctrl+Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -b -\series default - da: -\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ -\end_inset - - (en LyX se ve -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png - scale 85 - groupId botonesbh - -\end_inset - -). - Puedes cambiar el ancho del espacio si pones el cursor detrás del marcador - de espacio y vas pulsando sucesivas veces la tecla espacio; con cada pulsación - cambia el tamaño. - Algunos marcadores de espacio se ven en rojo en LyX, significa que son - espacios negativos. - Dos ejemplos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Ctrl+Espacio b -\series default - con 3× -\family sans -Espacio -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Ctrl+Espacio b -\series default - con 5× -\family sans -Espacio -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Funciones -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Funciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Funciones" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El botón -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\functions" -\end_inset - - -\family default - abre el -\family sans -Panel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -funciones -\family default -, que contiene diversas macros de funciones como -\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ -\end_inset - - (seno), -\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ -\end_inset - -, -\emph on -etc -\emph default -. - (también se pueden insertar tecleando en una ecuación -\series bold - -\backslash -sen -\series default - etc.) -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\size normal -\emph on -\color none -N. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -del t: -\size default -\emph default -\color inherit -El estilo -\family typewriter -spanish -\family default -\size normal -\color none - proporciona comandos para escribir las funciones en español, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej., -\begin_inset Formula $\sen x$ -\end_inset - -. - Más detalles en la sec. - -\size default -\emph on -\color inherit -Funciones predefinidas -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones -\emph default - y en la página web -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "spanish" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - En matemáticas es habitual escribir las funciones en letras verticales, - para evitar confusiones con las letras cursivas que representan variables, - porque -\begin_inset Formula $sen$ -\end_inset - - podría hacer pensar en el producto -\begin_inset Formula $s·e·n$ -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El empleo de macros de función generará también el espacio correcto alrededor - de la función: -\begin_inset Formula $a\sen x$ -\end_inset - - es diferente de -\begin_inset Formula $asenx$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para ciertos objetos matemáticos, como los límites, la macro cambia la forma - de situar los subíndices, como se describe en sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Operadores-con-límites" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Acentos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Acentos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En las ecuaciones se pueden poner caracteres acentuados de la misma forma - que en modo texto. - Esto puede depender de tu teclado, o de las asociaciones de teclas que - uses. - También puedes usar comandos LaTeX para escribir, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej., -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - - incluso si tu teclado no tiene acento circunflejo. - El ejemplo se ha hecho con -\series bold - -\backslash -hat -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -a -\series default - en una ecuación. - El cuadro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Acentos-y-comandos" - -\end_inset - - muestra las equivalencias entre tipos de acentos y sus comandos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Acentos-y-comandos" - -\end_inset - -Tipos de acentos y comandos correspondientes. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nombre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Comando -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -E -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -jemplo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -circunflejo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -hat -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -agudo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -acute -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -diéresis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -ddot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -punto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -dot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -breve -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -breve -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -caron -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -check -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -barra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -bar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -vector -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -vec -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes elegir uno de los acentos seleccionándolo en el panel -\family sans -Decoraciones -\family default -, botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\hat" -\end_inset - - de los -\family sans -Paneles de ecuaciones -\family default -; esto se aplicará también a cualquier selección que hayas hecho en una - fórmula. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Paréntesis y otros delimitadores -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Delimitadores -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Paréntesis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Paréntesis-y-delimitadores" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay varios tipos de delimitadores disponibles en LyX. - Para casi todas las necesidades debería bastar con el uso de las teclas - -\family typewriter -[]{}()|<> -\family default -. - Pero si quieres envolver una estructura grande, como una matriz o una fracción, - o si tienes delimitadores de varios tipos, es mejor utilizar el panel que - surge al pulsar el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" -\end_inset - - de la barra de herramientas de ecuaciones. - Por ejemplo, para poner corchetes alrededor de una matriz estándar: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right] -\] - -\end_inset - -o para colocar diversos paréntesis. - Abajo, la expresión de la izquierda se ha escrito usando el botón delimitadores - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" -\end_inset - - y la expresión de la derecha se ha escrito usando las teclas -\family typewriter -() -\family default -. - -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si usas el icono delimitadores, los paréntesis y otros delimitadores de - dicho panel se redimensionan automáticamente de acuerdo con el tamaño de - lo que contienen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para construir delimitadores pulsa el botón del que quieras poner para el - lado izquierdo y para el lado derecho. - Si marcas la opción -\family sans -Mantener -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -iguales -\family default -, el tipo de delimitador seleccionado se pondrá en ambos lados. - El comando TeX de la selección se mostrará bajo el panel de botones. - Si quieres que un lado no tenga delimitador, usa el botón -\family sans -Ninguno -\family default -. - En LyX se mostrará una línea punteada pero no se imprime en la salida. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si quieres poner delimitadores alrededor de estructuras matemáticas, como - una raíz cuadrada, puedes seleccionar la estructura que debe incluirse, - escoger los delimitadores deseados y pulsar -\family sans -Insert -\family default -ar, con esto se dibujarán alrededor de la estructura resaltada. - Las combinaciones más comunes de delimitadores (paréntesis, corchetes y - llaves en ambos lados) se pueden insertar más rápidamente mediante atajos - de teclado. - Por ejemplo, para insertar un par de paréntesis flexibles en ambos lados, - selecciona la estructura y teclea -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-delim ( )" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Ecuaciones con varias líneas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Presentación de ecuaciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Matrices -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Ecuaciones multilínea -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las matrices se introducen con el botón -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" -\end_inset - - -\family default - de la -\family sans -Barra -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -herramientas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -matemáticas -\family default -. - Se abrirá un diálogo para elegir el número de filas y columnas. - Por ejemplo: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -1 & 2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 & 6\\ -7 & 8 & 9 -\end{array}\right) -\] - -\end_inset - -Los paréntesis no son automáticos, puedes añadirlos como se ha descrito - en la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Paréntesis-y-delimitadores" - -\end_inset - -. - Al construir la matriz, puedes elegir si las entradas de columna se alinean - a la izquierda, a la derecha o al centro, en el cuadro -\family sans -Horizontal, -\family default - con las letras -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -l -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -r -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -c -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Lyx utiliza -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -c -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - por omisión. - Por ejemplo, la secuencia -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -lcr -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - indica que la primera columna se alineará a la izquierda, la segunda al - centro y la tercera a la derecha, ya que cada letra corresponde a una columna. - El resultado será el siguiente: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\begin{array}{lcr} -columna & columna & columna\\ -alineada & alineada & alineada\\ -a\, la\, izquierda & al\, centro & a\, la\, derecha -\end{array} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes añadir más filas a una matriz existente con -\family sans -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default - estando el cursor en la matriz. - Puedes añadir o quitar filas y columnas con el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuaciones -\family default - o con los botones adecuados de la barra de herramientas matemáticas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay otros ordenamientos utilizados en ecuaciones, tales como una presentación - de distintos casos. - Para ello se usa el submenú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Entorno -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -casos -\family default - o el comando -\series bold - -\backslash -cases -\series default -. - Aquí ves un ejemplo: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\begin{cases} --1 & x<0\\ -0 & x=0\\ -1 & x>0 -\end{cases} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las ecuaciones con varias líneas se crean pulsando -\family sans -\series medium -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default -\series default - dentro de la ecuación. - Si lo haces en una ecuación vacía verás aparecer tres rectángulos azules. - Si tecleas -\family sans -\series medium -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default -\series default - en una ecuación no vacía, la parte anterior al signo de relación (signo - igual -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -= -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, etc.) se insertará automáticamente en la primera columna, el signo de relación - en la segunda y el resto en la tercera columna. - Por cada nueva pulsación de -\family sans -\series medium -Ctrl+Entrar -\family default -\series default - se crea una fila nueva. - Las ecuaciones multilínea siempre están en modo presentación. - Aquí hay un ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\ -a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:acuadrado} -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ten en cuenta que la columna central está destinada para los signos de relación, - y que las estructuras en esa columna se imprimirán en un tamaño menor: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray*} -\frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} -\end{eqnarray*} - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La ecuación multilínea aquí descrita es del tipo -\family sans -Entorno_EqnArray -\family default -. - Hay otros tipos de ecuaciones de varias líneas más apropiados para determinadas - situaciones, por ejemplo si quieres un espacio entre líneas más adecuado - que en la ecuación -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand eqref -reference "eq:acuadrado" - -\end_inset - -. - Los otros tipos se describen en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tipos-de-ecuaciones-AMS" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Numeración y referencia de ecuaciones -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Numeración de ecuaciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Referencias a ecuaciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Numeración-y-referencia" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para numerar una ecuación, pon el cursor en ella y usa el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Numerar la ecuación -\family default - o el atajo -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - -. - El número de ecuación se ve en LyX entre paréntesis. - -\lang english -The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated. - -\lang spanish - La posición y el formato del número de fórmula depende de la clase del - documento. - En este documento el número se imprime junto con el número del capítulo, - separados por un punto: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{equation} -1+1=2 -\end{equation} - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - - en una ecuación numerada quita la numeración. - Sólo se pueden numerar ecuaciones presentadas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las ecuaciones multilínea se pueden numerar línea por línea, mediante el - menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Numerar la línea -\family default - o el atajo -\family sans -Alt+M -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Mayúsculas+N. - -\family default - Sólo se conmuta la numeración de la línea donde esté el cursor: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -1 & = & 3-2\\ -2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ -4 & \leq & 7 -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -Para numerar todas las líneas usa el atajo -\family sans -Alt+M -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -N -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Toda ecuación presentada puede ser referida a su número mediante una etiqueta. - La etiqueta se inserta con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Etiqueta -\family default - (botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - -) cuando el cursor está en la ecuación: Se abre un diálogo para introducir - el texto. - Se recomienda dejar como primera parte de la etiqueta la propuesta -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eq: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, porque esto ayuda después a identificar el tipo de etiqueta si hay muchas - en el documento. - En el ejemplo siguiente hemos insertado la etiqueta -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -eq:tanhExp -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en la segunda línea: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\senh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ - & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cada línea etiquetada es automáticamente numerada, por tanto la etiqueta - se ve en LyX en el sitio del contenedor del número de ecuación -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -# -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - Puedes hacer referencia a una ecuación etiquetada con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Referencia -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cruzada -\family default - (botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -). - Saldrá un diálogo en el que escoger la etiqueta a la que quieras referirte. - La referencia se ve en LyX en un cuadro gris y en la salida se ve el número - de ecuación: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esto es una referencia cruzada a la ecuación ( -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "eq:tanhExp" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las propiedades de los cuadros de referencia en LyX se describen en la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" - -\end_inset - -. - Para borrar una etiqueta, pon el cursor al final de la ecuación etiquetada - y teclea -\family sans -Supr -\family default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Definición de macros de ecuación -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Macros de ecuación -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX permite la definición de macros para ecuaciones, lo que es muy útil - para documentos en los que aparecen varias veces los mismos tipos de ecuaciones. - Se explica en la sección -\emph on -Macros de ecuaciones -\emph default - del manual -\emph on - Ecuaciones -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Ajuste fino -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Estilos de la tipografía -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Estilos de la tipografía -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La tipografía estándar para el texto es cursiva, y para números es romana. - Para establecer una tipografía en una ecuación usa el botón -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\font" -\end_inset - - -\family default - de -\family sans -Paneles de ecuaciones -\family default -, o introduce directamente el comando adecuado, según el cuadro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Estilos-del-texto-y" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Estilos-del-texto-y" - -\end_inset - -Estilos del texto y comandos correspondientes. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografía -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Comando -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape up -\size normal -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathrm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Negrita}}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Cursiva}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape up -\size normal -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathtt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbb -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathfrak -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape up -\size normal -\emph on -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALIGRAFICA}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathcal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathsf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default -Ten en cuenta que los estilos -\family sans -Blackboard -\family default - y -\family sans -Caligráfica -\family default - sólo tienen mayúsculas. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cuando usas un estilo de letra se inserta un cuadro azul en la ecuación. - Cada carácter en este cuadro se imprime en ese estilo. - Al pulsar -\family sans -Espa -\family default -cio dentro del cuadro el cursor sale del mismo, por lo que si necesitas - un espacio debe ser protegido. - En este ejemplo la letra -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -N -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en estilo -\family sans -Blackboard -\family default - representa el conjunto de los números naturales: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los estilos de texto se pueden anidar unos en otros, lo que puede causar - confusión. - Por ejemplo, puedes poner un carácter en -\family sans -Fraktur -\family default - en un marco en -\family sans -Ancho fijo -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Por tanto es mejor no usar esta característica. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los estilos de texto no tienen efecto sobre las letras griegas: -\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Sólo se pueden imprimir en negrita usando el comando -\series bold - -\backslash -boldsymbol -\series default -, que trabaja como los demás comandos de estilo de letra: -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -boldsymbol -\series default - funciona con todos los símbolos, letras y números. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay más opciones para tipografías en el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Texto en ecuaciones -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Texto en una ecuación -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los estilos de tipografía son útiles para escribir ciertos caracteres pero - no para texto. - Para escribir partes más largas de texto en una ecuación es mejor usar - -\family sans -Modo texto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -normal -\family default - en la lista desplegable que surge al pulsar el botón -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\font" -\end_inset - - -\family default - de los -\family sans -Paneles de ecuaciones -\family default - (o bien el atajo -\family sans -Alt+C -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Espacio -\family default -). - En LyX, el texto normal dentro de una ecuación aparece en negro, no en - azul. - Puedes usar espacios y acentos de la manera habitual. - Por ejemplo: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\begin{cases} -x & \mbox{en este caso}\\ --x & \mbox{en otro caso} -\end{cases} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tamaños de la tipografía -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Tamaños de la tipografía -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay cuatro estilos tipográficos (tamaños relativos) disponibles en modo - matemático, que son automáticamente escogidos en la mayoría de situaciones. - Son los estilos -\family sans -presentación -\family default -, -\family sans -texto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -normal -\family default -, -\family sans -índice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pequeño) -\family default -, e -\family sans -índice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -índice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(más -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pequeño) -\family default -. - Para la mayoría de los caracteres -\family sans -, texto -\family default - y -\family sans -presentación -\family default - muestran igual tamaño, pero en fracciones, exponentes, subíndices y algunas - otras estructuras, los caracteres son más grandes en -\family sans -presentación. - -\family default - Excepto para algunos operadores, que se redimensionan de acuerdo con la - situación, todo el texto se pondrá en el estilo que LaTeX considere apropiado. - La elección de LaTeX puede ser cambiada en el -\family sans -Panel de ecuaciones con el -\family default - botón -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\style" -\end_inset - - -\family default -. - Aparece un rectángulo de tamaño adecuado al estilo elegido en el que puedes - insertar la estructura matemática. - Por ejemplo, puedes poner -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ -\end_inset - -, que está normalmente en -\family sans -modo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto, -\family default - más grande en estilo -\family sans -presentación -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ -\end_inset - -. - En el siguiente ejemplo puedes ver los cuatro estilos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula $presentaci\acute{o}n$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle texto}$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle índice\, pequeño}$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle índice\, más\, pequeño}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Todos estos tamaños de la tipografía en modo ecuación son relativos, lo - que significa que si se ha puesto un cierto tamaño predeterminado con el - menú de -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto, -\family default - los tamaños en la fórmula se ajustarán en relación a dicho tamaño predeterminad -o. - De forma que, si el tamaño base de la tipografía del documento se cambia, - todos los caracteres serán reajustados. - Como ejemplo una ecuación con letra en tamaño -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -grandísima -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family roman -\size largest -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -AMS-LaTeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -AMS, ecuaciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! AMS -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX soporta los paquetes más habituales suministrados por la -\emph on -American Mathematical Society -\emph default - (AMS). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Habilitar el uso de AMS -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para usar los paquetes AMS y aprovechar sus ventajas, marca el cuadro -\family sans -Usar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -el -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paquete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ecuaciones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -AMS -\family default - en el diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuaciones -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - AMS es necesario para muchas estructuras matemáticas, de modo que si se - generan errores de LaTeX en ecuaciones, comprueba que has habilitado el - uso de AMS. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tipos de ecuaciones AMS -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Tipos-de-ecuaciones-AMS" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Matemáticas ! Ecuaciones multilínea -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -AMS-LaTeX provee una selección de tipos diferentes de ecuaciones. - LyX permite elegir entre -\family typewriter -align -\family default -, -\family typewriter -alignat -\family default -, -\family typewriter -flalign -\family default -, -\family typewriter -gather -\family default - y -\family typewriter -multilínea -\family default -. - La explicación de estos tipos de ecuación está en la documentación de AMS, - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Otras herramientas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Referencias cruzadas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Referencias cruzadas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las referencias cruzadas son uno de los puntos fuertes de LyX. - Puedes referenciar cada sección, flotante, nota al pie, ecuación y lista - en el documento. - Para hacer referencia a una parte del documento debes insertar en ella - una etiqueta. - La etiqueta se usa como ancla y como nombre para la referencia. - Supongamos que queremos hacer una referencia al segundo ítem de la lista: - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Primer ítem -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "enu:Segundo-ítem" - -\end_inset - -Segundo ítem -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Tercer ítem -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En primer lugar, insertamos una etiqueta en el segundo ítem con el menú - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Etiqueta -\family default - o con el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - - de la barra de herramientas. - Aparece una ventanilla para escribir el texto de la etiqueta, en la que - LyX propone un prefijo y un posible título, en este caso -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -enu:Segundo-ítem -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; el prefijo -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -enu: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - por -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -enumeración -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Al pulsar -\family sans -Aceptar -\family default - se inserta un cuadro gris parecido a este: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/etiquetaQt4.png - scale 85 - groupId botonesbh - -\end_inset - -. - El prefijo depende de la parte del documento donde se inserta la etiqueta, - p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. - si pones una etiqueta en un encabezado de sección, el prefijo será -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -sec: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para hacer referencia al ítem, hacemos una referencia a su etiqueta con - el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Referencia -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cruzada -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -. - Aparece la ventana de referencias cruzadas con la lista de todas las etiquetas - del documento, que podemos ordenar alfabéticamente, y escogemos en ella - la entrada -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -enu:Segundo-ítem -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Al pulsar -\family sans -Aceptar -\family default - se inserta un recuadro gris parecido a este: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/referenciaQt4.png - scale 85 - groupId botonesbh - -\end_inset - -. - En el documento de salida, en vez de este recuadro se mostrará el número - del ítem. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como alternativa a -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Referencia cruzada -\family default - puedes hacer clic derecho sobre una etiqueta y, en el menú contextual que - aparece, marcar -\family sans -Copiar como referencia -\family default -. - La referencia cruzada a esta etiqueta está ahora en el portapapeles y puede - pegarse en la posición actual del cursor con el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Pegar -\family default - (atajo -\family sans -Ctrl+V -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A continuación ponemos nuestra referencia cruzada: Ítem -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "enu:Segundo-ítem" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se recomienda usar un espacio protegido -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Se describen en sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-protegido" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - entre el nombre de la referencia y su número para evitar feos saltos de - línea entre ellos. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay seis estilos de referencias cruzadas: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -: imprime el número, es la opción predeterminada: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -(): imprime el número entre paréntesis, este estilo es el habitual - para referir ecuaciones, especialmente cuando se omite el nombre de referencia - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Ecuación -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand eqref -reference "eq:tanhExp" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -: imprime el número de la página: Página -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand pageref -reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -página -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -: imprime el texto -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -en la página -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y el número de página: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vpageref -reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -If the label is on the same page, it prints -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -on this page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -on the facing page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -on the previous page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page, it prints -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -on the next page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -página -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -: imprime el número, el texto -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -en la página -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y el número de página: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like -\family sans -\series bold - -\family default -\series default -; otherwise it behaves like -\family sans -\series bold -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Referencia -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -con -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -formato: imprime un formato personalizado. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - Esta característica sólo está disponible si está instalado el paquete LaTeX - -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - o -\series bold -refstyle -\series default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -El paquete LaTeX a usar para esta función se puede seleccionar con la opción - -\family sans -Usar refstyle (no prettyref) para referencias cruzadas -\family default -, en el menú -\family sans - Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Clase de documento -\family default -. - El paquete -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - es el preferido porque -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - solo soporta documentos en inglés. - El formato se especifica usando el comando -\series bold - -\backslash -newrefformat -\series default - (prettyref) o -\series bold - -\backslash -newref -\series default - (refstyle) en el preámbulo LaTeX del documento. - Por ejemplo, para redefinir todas las referencias a figuras (que tienen - la etiqueta -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -fig -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -), se usa el comando -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -newref{fig}{refcmd={Figura en la página -\backslash -pageref{#1}}} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Para más información sobre el formato echa un vistazo a las documentaciones - de los paquetes, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "prettyref,refstyle" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Referencia -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -textual: imprime la leyenda o el nombre de la referencia: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand nameref -reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El número y la página de la parte referida del documento es calculado automática -mente por LaTeX al generar la salida. - El estilo de las referencias se especifica en el apartado -\family sans -Formato -\family default - de la ventana de referencias cruzadas, que surge si haces clic en un cuadro - de referencia. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sólo puedes usar el estilo -\family sans - -\family default - para referenciar partes numeradas del documento, mientras que el estilo - -\family sans - -\family default - siempre es posible. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para hacer referencia a una sección, pon la etiqueta en el encabezado de - la misma; para un flotante, pon la etiqueta en su leyenda. - En notas al pie puedes poner la etiqueta en cualquier sitio de la nota. - Las referencias a ecuaciones se explican en la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Numeración-y-referencia" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Clic derecho sobre una referencia cruzada abre un menú contextual. - La entrada -\family sans -Ir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -a -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -etiqueta -\family default - lleva al cursor delante de la etiqueta correspondiente. - Esta entrada se cambiará por -\family sans -Volver -\family default - en el menú contextual de la etiqueta, de modo que permite retornar el cursor - a la referencia. - Puedes también volver con el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - - de la barra de herramientas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En cualquier momento puedes cambiar el texto de una etiqueta pulsando sobre - su cuadro. - Las referencias a esa nueva etiqueta se actualizan automáticamente, no - debes preocuparte de ello. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si una referencia cruzada no encuentra su etiqueta, verás en LyX -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\lang english -BROKEN -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - in the cross-reference label -\lang spanish - y en la salida dos signos de interrogación en vez de la referencia. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las referencias se describen con detalle en sección -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Referencias a flotantes -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en el manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -El índice general y otros índices -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Indi@Índice general -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Navegador de contorno -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:IG" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -El índice general -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Indice-general" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El índice general (IG) se inserta con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índice\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -general -\family default -. - En LyX se muestra un cuadro gris. - Si pulsas en él, aparece en una ventana lateral el -\family sans -Navegador de contorno -\family default - con las entradas del IG. - Puedes ir a cualquier parte del documento pulsando su entrada y reorganizar - las secciones. - Esta operación es una alternativa al menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Navegador de contorno -\family default -, como se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Navegación" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El IG lista automáticamente las secciones numeradas. - Si has declarado un título breve para un encabezado, como se explica en - la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Títulos-breves" - -\end_inset - -, será éste el que aparezca en el IG. - La sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Profundidad-de-numeración" - -\end_inset - - describe cómo ajustar el número de niveles de secciones que han de aparecer - en el IG. - También puedes ajustar el nivel de secciones mostradas en la ventana del - IG mediante el deslizador que hay en la parte inferior de la misma. - Las secciones no numeradas no salen en el IG. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Índices de figuras, cuadros y algoritmos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los índices de cuadros, figuras y algoritmos son muy parecidos al índice - general. - Se insertan mediante los submenús de -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índice -\family default -. - Las entradas del índice son el número del flotante correspondiente y su - leyenda. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -URLs e hiperenlaces -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hiperenlaces -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -URLs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URLs -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:URL" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se pueden insertar enlaces a páginas web o direcciones de correo electrónico - con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -URL -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí hay un ejemplo: Página de inicio de LyX: -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El estilo del texto del enlace no se puede cambiar, el texto del URL se - mostrará siempre en -\family typewriter -Ancho fijo -\family default -. - Para poder cambiar el formato del texto del URL usa hiperenlaces, como - se explica en la siguiente subsección. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota -\series default -: Los URLs no deben finalizar con una contra-barra, de lo contrario se generan - errores de LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hiperenlaces -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Hiperenlaces" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los hiperenlaces se insertan con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Hiperenlace -\family default - o con el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "href-insert" -\end_inset - - de la barra de herramientas. - Aparece un diálogo con dos campos: -\family sans -Dirección -\family default - y -\family sans -Nombre -\family default -. - El nombre es el texto que se imprime para el enlace. - El tipo de enlace puede ser un enlace web como: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página de LyX" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - -, una dirección de correo o un enlace a un archivo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes iniciar aplicaciones mediante un hiperenlace tipo web, pero añadiendo - el prefijo « -\family sans -run: -\family default -» a la dirección del enlace. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la salida PDF los enlaces se partirán con un guión si es necesario, y - se puede hacer clic sobre ellos en las salidas DVI y PDF. - Para cambiar el formato del texto selecciona el enlace insertado y usa - el diálogo de estilo del texto. - Este es un ejemplo de hiperenlace con texto en sans serif negrita: -\family sans -\series bold - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página de LyX" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El color del texto del enlace se puede cambiar si está marcada la opción - -\family sans -Enlaces -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -coloreados -\family default - en el diálogo de propiedades de PDF, (menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Propiedades PDF -\family default -). - Por ejemplo, en este documento el color del texto se ha establecido en - azul añadiendo la opción -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -urlcolor=blue -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -en el campo -\family sans -Opciones adicionales -\family default - de la pestaña -\family sans -Hiperenlaces -\family default - del mencionado menú. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Apéndices -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Apéndices -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Apéndices" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los apéndices se crean con el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Comenzar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -apéndice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -aquí -\family default -. - Todo el documento, desde la posición actual del cursor hasta el final, - se transforma en apéndice. - La región es señalada con un borde rojo. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cada capítulo o sección dentro de la región del apéndice se considera un - apéndice, y se ordenan con letras mayúsculas. - Las subsecciones se ordenan con esta letra, un punto y el número de la - subsección. - Todas las secciones del apéndice se pueden referenciar como las secciones - normales, como en estos dos ejemplos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Apéndice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Créditos" - -\end_inset - -. - Apéndice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Exportar" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Bibliografía -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliografía -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Bibliografía" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay dos formas de generar la bibliografía en un documento LyX. - Puedes incluir una base de datos bibliográficos -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -conocida por «bases de datos BibTeX» -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, que se explica enseguida, o insertarla manualmente usando el entorno de - párrafo -\family sans -Bibliografía, -\family default - descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Biblio_entorno" - -\end_inset - -. - Si quieres cosas distintas a citas numéricas, usadas en este documento, - como citas autor-año, debes usar una base de datos bibliográficos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -El entorno Bibliografía -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En el entorno -\family sans -Bibliografía -\family default - cada párrafo comienza con un cuadro gris etiquetado con un número. - Si pinchas en él verás un diálogo donde se establece una -\family sans -Clave -\family default - y una -\family sans -Etiqueta. - -\family default - La clave es el nombre simbólico al que se referirá la entrada bibliográfica. - Por ejemplo, nuestra segunda entrada en la bibliografía es un libro sobre - LaTeX para el que hemos puesto como clave una abreviatura de su título, - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -latexcompanion -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes insertar una referencia a la clave de una bibliografía con el menú - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cita -\family default -o con el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" -\end_inset - - -\family sans -. - -\family default - Saldrá una ventana -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Añadir cita -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en la que puedes seleccionar una o más claves en la lista de las disponibles. - El cuadro de la referencia a la cita se etiquetará con la clave de referencia. - Si pinchas en el cuadro, aparece la ventana de cita y puedes cambiar la - referencia. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las referencias bibliográficas se muestran en la salida con el número de - entrada entre corchetes. - Si pones una -\family sans -Etiqueta -\family default - para la entrada, esta se verá en lugar del número. - Aquí vemos dos ejemplos, el primero sin etiqueta, el segundo con la etiqueta - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Créditos -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Echa un vistazo a -\family sans -LaTeX Companion Second Edition -\family default -: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los miembros del equipo LyX figuran en los Créditos: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest - label via the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). - All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Bases de datos bibliográficos (BibTeX) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliografía ! Bases de datos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliografía ! BibTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Bases-datos-bibliográficos" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las bases de datos bibliográficos son útiles si usas la misma bibliografía - en distintos documentos. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -También son útiles simplemente para mantener una base de datos de artículos - y notas relacionados con ellos. - La mayoría de los programas de bases de datos mencionados permiten almacenar - anotaciones y revisiones junto con la información bibliográfica. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - También hace que sea muy sencillo tener un formato uniforme para todas - las entradas de la bibliografía. - Puedes recoger la bibliografía de todos los libros o artículos relevantes - para tu trabajo en una base de datos, la cual sirve para distintos documentos - porque sólo aparecerán en la bibliografía las entradas que sean referidas - en un documento dado. - Esto evita la necesidad de mantener el rastro de los artículos y libros - que se citan. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La base de datos es un archivo de texto con la extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -.bib -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - que contiene la bibliografía en un formato especial, como se explica en - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "BibTeX-2" - -\end_inset - - y en libros de LaTeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -( -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" - -\end_inset - -). - El archivo se puede crear con cualquier editor de texto, pero habitualmente - se usa un programa especial para crear y editar las entradas en la base - de datos. - Hay disponible una lista de estos programas en la Wiki de LyX, -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para usar una base de datos está el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índice\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bibliografía -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -BibT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. - Surge una ventana en la que puedes añadir una o más bases de datos y selecciona -r un archivo de estilo y después se inserta un recuadro gris. - La opción -\family sans -Añadir bibliografía al IG -\family default - añade en el índice una entrada para la bibliografía. - En el cuadro desplegable -\family sans -Contenido -\family default - puedes seleccionar qué parte de la base de datos debe mostrarse en la salida. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El archivo de estilo es un archivo de texto con extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -.bst -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - que define el estilo de todas las entradas bibliográficas. - Tu distribución LaTeX debería proporcionar varios de ellos, y muchos editores - proporcionan sus propios archivos de estilo, de modo que no tienes que - preocuparte del formato. - Por supuesto, es posible escribir estilos propios, aunque es tarea para - expertos. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hay información sobre el modo de hacerlo en -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La inserción de referencias a citas bibliográficas funciona como ya se ha - descrito en la sección anterior. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para generar la bibliografía a partir de una base de datos, LyX utiliza - el programa -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -. - Puedes elegir cual de sus variantes debería usar LyX como procesador: en -\family sans - Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bibliografía -\family default - o en -\family sans -\lang english -Tools -\lang spanish -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Preferences -\lang spanish -\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Salidas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. - Son posibles las siguientes variantes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -biber provee soporte Unicode completo, memoria ilimitada, no funciona con - otros paquetes de bibliografía (como p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\series bold -natbib -\series default -), solo con el paquete -\series bold -biblatex -\series default -; recomendado para textos multilingües y para idiomas que no usen tipografías - latinas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex predeterminado; no permite en las entradas caracteres especiales - que no se pueden codificar en 7 bits, memoria limitada, funciona con todos - los paquetes de bibliografía, excepto -\series bold -biblatex -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex8 permite todos los caracteres que se pueden codificar en 8 bits, - memoria más amplia que -\family sans -bibtex -\family default -, funciona con todos los paquetes de bibliografía -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -BibTeX puede controlarse con opciones que puedes añadir bajo la especificación - de la variante. - Antes de añadir ninguna opción, se recomienda encarecidamente leer el manual - de -\family sans -BibTeX -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si seleccionas la opción -\family sans -Bibliografía por secciones -\family default - en -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bibliografía -\family default -, es posible tener múltiples bibliografías ordenadas en secciones. - Esto y otras características se explica con detalle en la sección -\emph on -Personalizar bibliografías con BibTeX -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Características adicionales. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En este documento hemos utilizado dos bibliografías para mostrar la diferencia - entre las dos formas de crearlas. - Como se ve, la bibliografía creada a partir de una base de datos contiene - sólo las entradas que son referidas en el documento. - El estilo utilizado es -\family sans -alphadin.bst -\family default -, que genera el complicado esquema alemán de claves de referencia de la - bibliografía. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formato de la Bibliografía -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliografía ! Formato -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes poner un estilo especial de cita en la ventana de referencia de cita. - Para esto debes habilitar la opción -\family sans -NatBib -\family default - en el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bibliografía -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -. - -\family default - En dicho menú puedes establecer el estilo de cita por omisión. - Si pones un estilo de cita para una referencia prevalecerá sobre la opción - por omisión. - Para el estilo global usa los archivos de estilo de BibTeX como se explica - en la sección anterior. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la ventana de referencia de cita también puedes poner un texto para que - aparezca antes o después de la referencia. - Aquí hay un ejemplo en el que el texto -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Capítulo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - va detrás de la referencia: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Echa un vistazo a -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "Capítulo 3" -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Índice alfabético -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ind@Índice alfabético -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Indice-alfabético" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para crear una entrada en el índice usa el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Entrada -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -índice -\family default -o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "index-insert" -\end_inset - -. - Se inserta un cuadro que contiene el texto que aparecerá en el índice. - Por omisión, LyX escoge como texto para la entrada de índice la palabra - en la que está el cursor o el texto que esté seleccionado. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El índice alfabético se inserta en el documento con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índice\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -alfabético -\family default -. - En LyX se muestra un cuadro azul claro con la etiqueta -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Índice -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en el lugar en que saldrá impreso en la salida. - Este tipo de cuadro no admite clic. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En las siguientes subsecciones describiremos brevemente los comandos para - el índice alfabético. - Para una descripción detallada del mecanismo de indexación de LaTeX, consulta - algún libro de LaTeX, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexbook,latexguide" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Agrupación de entradas de índice -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ind@Índice alfabético ! Agrupación de entradas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es frecuente agrupar entradas del índice de forma que el lector pueda hacer - búsquedas más rápidas. - Supongamos que queremos agrupar las entradas del índice para las listas - enumeración y enumeración* bajo la entrada -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Listas -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Primero creamos esta entrada en la sección -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Listas" - -\end_inset - -. - En el campo de texto de la entrada de índice en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Enumeración*" - -\end_inset - -, insertamos lo siguiente -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Listas ! Enumeración* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -y en la entrada de índice de la sección -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Enumeración" - -\end_inset - - ponemos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Listas ! Enumeración -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El signo de exclamación -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -! -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - indica los niveles de agrupación. - Puedes tener tres niveles; cada nivel se sangra un poco más. - Para el nivel más alto no hace falta entrada de índice. - Si no ponemos ninguna entrada de índice para -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Listas -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, se imprimirá de todas formas pero sin número de página. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Rangos de página -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ind@Índice alfabético ! Rangos de página -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalmente las entradas de índice aparecerán con el número de página de - la sección indexada. - Pero a veces querrás indexar más páginas bajo la misma entrada. - P. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e., si quieres indexar los entornos de párrafo, creas una entrada de índice - en la sección -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Entornos-de-párrafo" - -\end_inset - - con el comando -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Entornos de párrafo|( -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -y otra entrada al final de la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Código-LyX" - -\end_inset - - con el comando -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Entornos de párrafo|) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los comandos -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|( -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|) -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - respectivamente inician y finalizan el rango de páginas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puedes añadir la misma entrada de índice en distintos sitios del documento. - En la salida se muestra una lista de referencias de páginas, separadas - por comas, bajo la misma entrada. - Un ejemplo es la entrada de índice «Documentos ! Configuración». -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Referencias cruzadas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ind@Índice alfabético ! Referencias cruzadas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es posible hacer referencia a otra entrada del índice. - Por ejemplo, en la entrada -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -GIF -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Formatos-de-imagen" - -\end_inset - -) del índice, se hace una referencia a la entrada -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Formatos de imagen -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en la misma sección con el comando -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -GIF|see{Formatos de imagen} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -donde las llaves deben insertarse en código TeX. - El texto entre llaves es la entrada a la que se remite. - En la salida aparece sin número de página. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -N. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -del t. -\emph default -: En la salida, el término -\emph on -see -\emph default - se traduce automáticamente por -\emph on -véase -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Orden de entradas en el índice -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ind@Índice alfabético ! Orden de las entradas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En el índice alfabético se pueden usar caracteres acentuados, pero entonces - las entradas podrían no estar en el orden adecuado. - Las entradas se ordenan alfabéticamente, pero LaTeX -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -El índice es generado en segundo plano por un programa externo, véase la - sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Programas-para-índice" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - no sabe ordenar caracteres acentuados en idiomas distintos. - Hemos puesto como ejemplo las entradas postizas «maison», «maïs», y «maître». - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entradas postizas ! maïs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entradas postizas ! maître -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entradas postizas ! maïs@maison -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Saldrían en el orden maïs, maître, maison, pero lo correcto sería maïs, - maison, maître. - Para conseguirlo usamos el comando -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -entrada anterior@entrada actual -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En nuestro caso queremos que «maison» siga a «maïs», por tanto escribimos - la entrada de esta forma: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -maïs@maison -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La entrada anterior no tiene que ser una entrada real, puede ser cualquier - palabra para indicar a LaTeX el orden; en la siguiente subsección hay un - ejemplo. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -N. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -del t -\emph default -.: En las secciones -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:IG" - -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Indice-alfabético" - -\end_inset - - hay ejemplos: sin el comando explicado, las entradas «Índice alfabético» - e «Índice general» aparecerían las primeras, delante de «AMS, ecuaciones». -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En algunos casos, si estás usando el programa -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - para generar el índice, el orden de entradas en el índice no es correcto - (véase la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Programas-para-índice" - -\end_inset - -). - Por ejemplo, -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - podría imprimir la entrada de índice para el paquete LaTeX aeguill, en - la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tipografía-del-documento" - -\end_inset - -, después de las entradas de índice de los demás paquetes LaTeX, aunque - todos estos comandos de índice empiezan con -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -LaTeX, paquetes ! -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - La razón es que la entrada de índice para aeguill está en una nota al pie. - Para arreglar este fallo de -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -, añade estos comandos en el preámbulo del documento: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -let -\backslash -OrgIndex -\backslash -index -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand*{ -\backslash -index}[1]{ -\backslash -OrgIndex{#1}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formato de entradas del índice -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ind@Índice alfabético ! Formato de las entradas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El aspecto de las entradas de índice se puede cambiar con el diálogo de - estilo del texto. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entradas postizas ! -\emph on -Entrada en cursiva -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - También se puede formatear el número de página mediante el carácter -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -| -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - seguido del comando LaTeX sin barra invertida. - Por ejemplo, podemos poner -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -número en cursiva:|textit -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -para imprimir el número en cursiva. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entradas postizas ! número en cursiva:|textit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Normalmente todos los comandos LaTeX comienzan con barra invertida, pero - en este caso especial -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|command -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - equivale a -\series bold - -\backslash -command{page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -number} -\series default -. - Echa un vistazo a la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" - -\end_inset - - para saber más sobre sintaxis de LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - El formato de entradas individuales sólo funciona si usas el programa -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -para generar el índice, véase la sec. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Programas-para-índice" - -\end_inset - -. - Si usas -\family sans -xindy -\family default -, sólo funciona para negrita y cursiva. - Esto se debe a que -\family sans -xindy -\family default - requiere definir elementos semánticos antes de poder usarse, véase -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "p. 678 ff." -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - para detalles. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En general recomendamos no utilizar el procedimiento anterior. - Es mejor definir una macro en el preámbulo. - Quizá quieras en cursiva todos los números de página que se refieran a - definiciones del término indexado para que el usuario las encuentre fácilmente. - Para ello, pon lo siguiente en el preámbulo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -IndexDef}[1]{ -\backslash -textit{#1}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -y escribe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -mi entrada|IndexDef -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -en la entrada de índice. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entradas postizas ! mi entrada|IndexDef -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - La ventaja es que si cambias de opinión o si tu editor pide las definiciones - en negrita, sólo tendrás que cambiar la macro y no cada entrada. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -También puedes cambiar el formato para todo el índice. - Por ejemplo, hemos marcado el cuadro de índice al final de este documento - en negrita, con lo que todas las entradas del índice alfabético saldrán - con ese estilo de letra. - Para tareas más avanzadas tienes que componer un -\emph on -Index Style File -\emph default -, véase la documentación de -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - o -\family sans -xindy -\family default - para detalles, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Programas para generar el índice -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ind@Índice alfabético ! Programas para generarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Programas-para-índice" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si está instalado el programa -\family sans -xindy -\family default -, LyX lo usa para generar el índice; si no, usa el programa -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -, que forma parte de cualquier distribución LaTeX. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - es muy antiguo, ya no se desarrolla y tiene muchas dificultades. - En particular, ha sido definido pensando exclusivamente en el inglés. - Así que falla en la ordenación correcta de todo lo que no sea texto de - tipo inglés. - Hemos explicado anteriormente como arreglar esto. - Sin embargo, si escribes en otro idioma y usas Linux, considera el empleo - de -\family sans -xindy -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Ambos programas se pueden controlar mediante opciones que se pueden determinar - en el diálogo de preferencias de LyX, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Configuración" - -\end_inset - -. - Las opciones disponibles se explican en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -. - Además puedes especificar otro programa para generar el índice. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si necesitas opciones específicas o un programa de índices alternativo solo - para un documento, puedes definir el programa y las opciones en -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índices -\family default -. - Esto es especialmente útil si necesitas pasar opciones específicas del - idioma al programa de índices o si necesitas un estilo específico. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Índices múltiples -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En muchos campos es frecuente tener más de un índice. - Por ejemplo, tener un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Índice de nombres -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - además del índice alfabético. - LaTeX no ofrece directamente esta posibilidad, pero hay muchos paquetes - que proporcionan esta función. - LyX usa el paquete -\series bold -splitidx -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! splitidx -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - para generar índices múltiples. - El paquete se incluye en las distribuciones recientes de LaTeX. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Si no es así consulta TeX Catalogue, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -. - Este paquete no solo consta de un archivo de estilo LaTeX, incluye además - programas preprocesadores que también deben instalarse. - Véase la documentación del paquete para más detalles. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para configurar el uso de múltiples índices en LyX, hay que seleccionar - -\family sans -Usar índices múltiples -\family default - en el diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índices -\family default -. - La lista -\family sans -Índices disponibles -\family default - ya contiene el índice estándar -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Índice -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Para añadir más índices, añade su nombre (en la forma en que deba aparecer - como encabezado) en el campo -\family sans -Nuevo -\family default - y pulsa el botón -\family sans -Añadir -\family default -. - El nuevo índice aparecerá ahora en la lista. - Es posible asignar un color alternativo a la etiqueta LyX del nuevo índice. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Una vez aplicados los cambios, encontrarás el nuevo índice definido en una - nueva entrada en el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índice -\family default - y el menú -\family sans -Insertar -\family default - tiene una entrada separada para cada uno de los índices definidos. - El funcionamiento es básicamente el mismo que el del índice estándar, pero - tiene algunas características adicionales: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Si quieres cambiar la atribución de una entrada de índice específica, haciendo - clic derecho sobre la etiqueta de la entrada abrirá un diálogo donde se - puede hacer eso. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Con clic derecho sobre un índice, puedes cambiar su tipo. - Además, es posible calificar una lista de índice como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Subíndice -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - En este caso, el encabezado de esta lista descenderá un nivel. - Por ejemplo, en un documento clase -\emph on -book -\emph default -, en el que el encabezado estándar de índice se define como capítulo, los - subíndices se definirán como secciones y así se anidarán en los índices. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Nomenclatura / Glosario -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclatura -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glosario|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Nomenclatura -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Nomenclatura" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A veces necesitarás compilar una lista de símbolos que han sido mencionados - en el documento, con una breve descripción de los mismos: la llamada nomenclatu -ra o glosario. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para crear nomenclaturas debe estar instalado el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Lo puedes encontrar en el Catálogo TeX, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - o en el administrador de paquetes de tu sistema LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Una entrada de nomenclatura se genera colocando el cursor detrás de un símbolo - y usando el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Entrada -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nomenclatura -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "nomencl-insert" -\end_inset - -. - Aparece una ventana con varios campos de texto y se inserta un cuadro gris - con la etiqueta « -\family sans -Nom -\family default -». -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Una ventana de nomenclatura contiene dos entradas principales: la primera - es el propio símbolo y la segunda su descripción. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - Debes introducir en todos los campos código LaTeX válido. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Definición y formato de la nomenclatura -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclatura ! Formato -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si tienes que referir símbolos, tienes que definirlos en el campo -\family sans -Símbolo -\family default -como fórmula de LaTeX. - Por ejemplo, para obtener « -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -», inserta: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series default -El carácter «$» empieza y finaliza el modo matemático. - El comando LaTeX para la letra griega es su nombre precedido de la barra - invertida « -\backslash -». - Para letras griegas mayúsculas el comando comienza también con mayúscula, - -\series bold - -\backslash -Sigma -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -(En la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" - -\end_inset - - hay una breve introducción a la sintaxis de LaTeX.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El diálogo -\family sans -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto -\family default - no se puede emplear para formatear la descripción, hay que usar comandos - LaTeX. - Por ejemplo, la descripción de la entrada de nomenclatura para el símbolo - « -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -» en este documento es: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -entrada postiza para el carácter -\backslash -textsf{sigma} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -El comando -\series bold - -\backslash -textsf -\series default - pone el texto en estilo -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serif -\family default -. - Para estilo -\series bold -negrita -\series default - usa el comando -\series bold - -\backslash -textbf -\series default -, para -\family typewriter -ancho fijo -\family default - usa -\series bold - -\backslash -texttt -\series default -, para -\emph on -cursiva -\emph default - usa -\series bold - -\backslash -emph -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para introducir en entradas de la nomenclatura caracteres como | -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -! -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -, @ -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -" -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -, es necesario que vayan precedidos por comillas como secuencia de escape. - Para evitar que el carácter -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -" -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - perturbe los caracteres siguientes, la secuencia se finaliza con un par - de llaves: ""{} -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\"{}" -description "El carácter comillas se obtiene escribiendo ' \"\"{}\"\"{} '" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Orden de las entradas de la nomenclatura -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclatura ! Orden de las entradas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las entradas de la nomenclatura se ordenan alfabéticamente según el código - LaTeX de la definición del símbolo. - Esto puede llevar a resultados indeseables cuando, por ejemplo, tienes - símbolos en el código. - Supón que tienes entradas de nomenclatura para los símbolos -\emph on -a -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "a" -description "entrada postiza para el carácter <>" - -\end_inset - - -\emph default - y -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -prefix "Sigma" -symbol "$\\sigma$" -description "entrada postiza para el carácter \\textsf{sigma}" - -\end_inset - -. - Serán ordenados según « -\family sans -a -\family default -» y « -\family typewriter -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\family default -», y por tanto -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - estará delante de -\emph on -a -\emph default - porque el carácter «$» es tenido en cuenta para la ordenación. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para controlar el orden de la lista se usa el campo -\family sans -Ordenar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -como -\family default -en el diálogo de nomenclatura. - Entonces el orden será establecido teniendo en cuenta el texto de dicho - campo y no la definición del símbolo. - Para nuestro ejemplo, puedes escribir -\family typewriter -sigma -\family default - para -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -, con lo que -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\emph on - -\emph default -se colocará donde corresponda. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para hacer agrupamientos y ver otras indicaciones sobre nomenclatura, consulta - la documentación del paquete -\series bold -nomencl -\series default -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Opciones para la nomenclatura -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclatura ! Opciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El paquete -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - acepta algunas opciones para modificar su apariencia. - Aquí hay algunas de ellas (y más en su documentación): -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refeq Adjunta la frase « -\family sans -, véase la ecuación ( -\emph on -eq -\emph default -) -\family default -» a cada entrada, siendo -\family sans -\emph on -eq -\family default -\emph default - el número de la última ecuación al frente de la entrada de la nomenclatura -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refpage Adjunta la frase « -\family sans -, página -\emph on -página -\family default -\emph default -» a cada entrada, siendo -\family sans -\emph on -página -\family default -\emph default - el número de la página en la que aparece la entrada -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -intoc Inserta la nomenclatura en el Índice general -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para emplear una o más de las opciones, añádelas separadas por comas en - el campo de opciones de la clase de documento, en el diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -. - En este documento se ha puesto las opciones -\series bold -refpage, intoc -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -También se pueden usar las dos primeras opciones de antes sólo para ciertas - entradas de la nomenclatura, añadiendo uno de los siguientes comandos como - última entrada en el campo -\family sans -Descripción -\family default - del diálogo -\family sans -Entrada de nomenclatura -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeq Como la opción -\series bold -refeq -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefpage Como la opción -\series bold -refpage -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeqpage Forma abreviada de -\series bold - -\backslash -nomrefeq -\backslash -nomrefpage -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomnorefeq, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefpage, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefeqpage Deshabilita las opciones correspondientes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Imprimir la nomenclatura -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclatura ! Impresión -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para imprimir la nomenclatura usa el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Índice\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nomenclatura -\family default -. - Se mostrará un cuadro etiquetado « -\family sans -Nomenclatura -\family default -» en el lugar en el que aparecerá en la salida. - Con clic derecho sobre él se puede alterar el espacio para los símbolos. - Están disponibles las siguientes opciones: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Predeterminado un espacio de 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ancho -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -etiqueta -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -más -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -larga anchura de la etiqueta más amplia de todas las entradas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Personalizado espacio personalizado -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la salida impresa aparece el título «Nomenclatura». - Si no te gusta ese nombre, puedes cambiarlo redefiniendo el comando -\series bold - -\backslash -nomname -\series default - en el preámbulo. - Por ejemplo, para titular como -\emph on -Índice de símbolos -\emph default -, añade al preámbulo la línea: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family roman -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -nomname}{Índice de símbolos} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Programa para la nomenclatura -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Programa-para-la-nomenclatura" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclatura ! Programa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX utiliza el programa -\family sans - makeindex -\family default -, incluido en todas las distribuciones LaTeX, para generar la nomenclatura. - El diálogo de las preferencias de LyX permite especificar otro programa - o controlar -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - añadiendo opciones, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Configuración" - -\end_inset - -. - Las opciones disponibles se explican en -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl,makeindex" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Ramas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ramas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Ramas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Ramas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A veces es útil ocultar ciertas partes de un documento en la salida. - Por ejemplo, para un profesor es más cómodo tener las preguntas y las respuesta -s de un examen en el mismo documento, pero no quiere, evidentemente, que - los alumnos vean las respuestas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para casos como éste, LyX ofrece la herramienta llamada «ramas». - El texto de una rama sólo aparecerá en la salida si la rama está activada. - Para crear una rama, selecciona el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rama\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Insertar rama nueva -\family default - (si solo quieres especificar una nueva rama), o bien, en el diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -, ve al apartado -\family sans -Ramas -\family default -. - Ahí puedes poner el nombre de la rama, activarla o cambiar su color de - fondo en LyX. - Además, el diálogo permite mezclar dos ramas (renombrando una con el nombre - de la otra) y añadir -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -ramas desconocidas -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, (o sea, ramas que se añadieron al documento mediante copia y pega desde - otro documento sin haber sido definidas) a la lista de ramas del documento. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El texto a incluir en una rama se escribe en un cuadro desplegable que se - inserta mediante el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rama -\family default -, donde puedes elegir una de las ramas creadas. - También puedes cambiar la rama haciendo clic derecho sobre el cuadro. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A continuación hay un ejemplo en el que sólo está activada la pregunta, - mientras que la respuesta está desactivada y no aparece en la salida: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Pregunta -status open - -\begin_layout Standard -Pregunta: ¿Quién fue el primer Nobel de Física? -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Respuesta -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -Respuesta: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Activando -\family sans -Sufijo del nombre de archivo -\family default - en -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ramas -\family default -, se añadirá el nombre de las ramas activas al nombre del archivo al exportarlo. - Considera, por ejemplo, un archivo -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen.lyx -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - que tiene las ramas de arriba. - Si -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Sufijo del nombre de archivo -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - está activo, el archivo PDF exportado será nombrado -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - si -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Pregunta -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Respuesta -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - están inactivas, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen-Pregunta.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - si solo está activa la rama -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Pregunta -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen-Respuesta.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - si solo está activa la rama -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Respuesta -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen-Pregunta-Respuesta.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - si ambas ramas están activas. - Esto ayuda a exportar fácilmente diferentes versiones del documento sin - mucha molestia. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para usar salida condicional en sitios donde no se pueden insertar ramas, - como en ecuaciones, puedes codificar definiciones LaTeX especiales para - cada rama. - Por ejemplo, puedes definir para la rama pregunta -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Para una introducción a la sintaxis de LaTeX, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -pregunta}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -respuesta}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -y para la rama respuesta -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -pregunta}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -respuesta}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Pregunta -status open - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -pregunta}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -respuesta}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Respuesta -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -pregunta}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -respuesta}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ahora se pueden usar los comandos -\series bold - -\backslash -pregunta{\SpecialChar \ldots{} -} -\series default - y -\series bold - -\backslash -respuesta{\SpecialChar \ldots{} -} -\series default - para obtener salida condicional. - Aquí hay un ejemplo de ecuación en la que sólo aparece la parte -\series bold - -\backslash -pregunta -\series default -: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -x^{2}-2x-2=0\Rightarrow\pregunta{x_{1}}\respuesta{x_{2}}=1\pregunta{+\sqrt{3}}\respuesta{-\sqrt{3}} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En ecuaciones, se puede conseguir el mismo efecto usando macros de ecuación, - véase el manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Propiedades PDF -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Propiedades-PDF" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Propiedades PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En -\family sans -Propiedades PDF -\family default -del diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default - se pueden configurar opciones especiales para la salida PDF del documento. - Todas las opciones son suministradas por el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Utilizando -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - se enlazan todas las referencias cruzadas en las salidas DVI y PDF. - Esto significa que el lector puede desplazarse por las partes del documento - referenciadas haciendo clic sobre una entrada del índice general o una - referencia. - En la pestaña -\family sans -Hiperenlaces -\family default - del diálogo puedes especificar el aspecto de los enlaces y si se crean - enlaces para las referencias bibliográficas. - Estas aparecerán en la bibliografía detrás de las diferentes entradas, - mostrando el número de la sección, transparencia o página donde la entrada - está referenciada. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la pestaña -\family sans -Marcadores -\family default - puedes determinar si se crean marcadores para cada sección del documento - para facilitar al lector la navegación por el mismo. - Puedes decidir si los marcadores se numeran o no como las secciones del - documento. - Con el nivel de marcadores abiertos puedes determinar qué niveles de sección - deben mostrarse al abrir el PDF. - Por ejemplo, un nivel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 mostrará las secciones y subsecciones, un nivel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 mostrará sólo las secciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La información de cabecera de la pestaña -\family sans -General -\family default - se guarda como propiedades del archivo junto con el PDF. - Muchos programas son capaces de extraer estas informaciones para, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej., reconocer automáticamente quién es el autor y otras características - del PDF. - Esto es muy útil para ordenar, clasificar o usar PDF\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -s para propósitos bibliográ -ficos. - Si se marca la opción -\family sans -Llenar automáticamente la información de cabecera -\family default -, LyX intenta extraer la información de cabecera a partir de la configuración - del título y del autor del documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Modo pantalla completa -\family default - abre el PDF en pantalla completa, útil para presentaciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En este documento se han utilizado las propiedades PDF. - Si miras la configuración del documento puedes ver algunas opciones adicionales - de -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - utilizadas. - Para explicación de las mismas te remitimos al manual de hyperref -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Código TeX y la sintaxis de LaTeX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Código-TeX" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cuadros de código TeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Codigo@Código TeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Cuadros-TeX" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Como LyX funciona sobre LaTeX, soporta muchos comandos y estructuras LaTeX, - pero no todos. - LaTeX contiene cientos de paquetes que suministran diversos comandos. - Cada mes se actualizan paquetes y se añaden nuevos. - Esto tiene la ventaja de que puedes hacer prácticamente todo, para cada - necesidad hay un paquete LaTeX. - Evidentemente, LyX no puede seguir este ritmo de actualización para soportar - todos estos paquetes y sus comandos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pero no temas, LyX puede insertar directamente cualquier comando LaTeX dentro - de un cuadro de código TeX. - Los cuadros de código TeX se insertan con el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Código -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default - o con el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - - (atajo -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - -). - El cuadro se puede abrir con clic izquierdo y cerrar con clic derecho y - seleccionando -\family sans -Cerrar recuadro -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En un cuadro de código TeX se pueden insertar los comandos total o parcialmente. - Parcialmente significa que el argumento del comando puede ser texto LyX - normal. - Por ejemplo, si quieres dibujar un marco alrededor de una palabra con el - comando LaTeX -\series bold - -\backslash -fbox -\series default -, puedes escribir la parte del comando -\series bold - -\backslash -fbox{ -\series default - en un cuadro de código TeX antes de la palabra y la llave de cierre del - comando, -\series bold -} -\series default -, en otro cuadro de código TeX después de la palabra. - Esta palabra entre los dos recuadros de código TeX constituye el argumento - del comando, como se ve en este ejemplo: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/es_ERT.png - scale 90 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la salida verás la palabra «enmarcada» dentro de un marco: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta es una línea con una palabra -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fbox{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -enmarcada -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default -Hay que poner un espacio al final de los comandos LaTeX sin parámetros, - para que LaTeX sepa que ha finalizado el comando. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Breve introducción a la sintaxis de LaTeX -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sintaxis de LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sintaxis de LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cuando escribas documentos extensos o libros, necesitarás saber algo sobre - los comandos LaTeX que LyX usa en segundo plano. - Como LaTeX se basa en comandos puedes -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -programar -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - tu texto, lo que tiene la ventaja de que se puede cambiar el formato del - documento en cualquier momento con los comandos adecuados. - Imagina que tienes que entregar antes de que acabe el día un manual que - has escrito para un producto. - Tu jefe te felicita por el buen trabajo pero quiere todos los títulos de - cuadros y figuras en negrita. - Pero tu documento tiene más de cien de ellos, por tanto es imposible cambiarlos - todos a mano en poco tiempo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX entra en juego. - Como dijimos antes, cada necesidad tiene su paquete LaTeX. - Primero debes averiguar cuál necesitas y luego buscarlo en la base de datos - de paquetes de LaTeX: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Catalogue" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por fin averiguas que necesitas el paquete -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Para usarlo debes cargarlo en el preámbulo del documento (menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -) con el comando -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[opciones]{nombre_del_paquete} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Todos los comandos LaTeX comienzan con barra invertida, el argumento se - pone entre llaves, y las opciones entre corchetes. - No todos los comandos tienen argumento y opciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En nuestro caso el nombre del paquete es -\series bold -caption -\series default -. - Tras un vistazo a la documentación del paquete, verás que la opción -\series bold -labelfont=bf -\series default - pondrá en negrita la letra de todos los títulos de figuras y cuadros. - Así que añades al preámbulo el comando -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -y problema resuelto. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Para ver más comandos del paquete -\series bold -caption -\series default - mira su documentación, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "caption" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ten en cuenta que algunas clases de documento llevan incorporadas soluciones - para problemas habituales como el de este caso. - Por ejemplo, si usas la clase -\family typewriter -KOMA-Script -\family default -, no necesitas el paquete -\series bold -caption -\series default -. - Sólo escribe en el preámbulo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont{captionlabel}{ -\backslash -bfseries} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -y asunto resuelto. - Así que si planeas escribir un extenso documento, deberías echar una ojeada - a la documentación de la clase de documento que quieras usar. - ( -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont -\series default - es un ejemplo de comando con más de un argumento.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los comandos en el preámbulo afectan a todo el documento, mientras que los - comandos en el texto afectan sólo a la parte que sigue o al texto que va - como argumento. - Para insertar comandos LaTeX en el texto usa los cuadros código TeX como - se describe en la sección anterior. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para saber más sobre LaTeX y su sintaxis, consulta los libros de la bibliografía - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexguide" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{fancy} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cambia temporalmente a un estilo de página con encabezado y pie personalizados -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rightmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -define el encabezado como se describe abajo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leftmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -thepage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -Guía del usuario de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Código mágico: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Encabezados y pies de página personalizados -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Encabezados-personalizados" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Encabezados y pies de página -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encabezados y pies de página -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para definir encabezados y pies de página personalizados hay que escoger - el estilo -\family sans -Elaborado -\family default - en el -\family sans -Diseño de página -\family default - del menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -. - En segundo lugar, añade el módulo -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Encabezado/Pie personalizados -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Módulos -\family default -. - Este módulo ofrece 6 estilos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Encabezado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -izquierda, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Encabezado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -centro, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Encabezado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -derecha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -izquierda, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -centro, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -derecha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -para las diferentes posiciones en el encabezado y en el pie de página. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalmente, los encabezados y pies de página se establecen al principio - del documento, pero los puedes cambiar en cualquier momento. - El cuadro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Diseño-de-página" - -\end_inset - - muestra el diseño de una página y la colocación de los encabezados y pies - en la misma. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\align center -\begin_inset Float figure -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encabezado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -izquierda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encabezado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -centro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encabezado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -derecha -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -El texto normal de la página va aquí. - El encabezado actual está sobre el texto, y el pie de página bajo él (incluyend -o las notas a pie de página). - Típicamente, los encabezados y pies de página contienen cosas como el número - de página, el título del capítulo, el logo de la institución\SpecialChar \ldots{} -, aunque puedes - poner ahí casi cualquier cosa, excepto flotantes. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -izquierda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -centro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -derecha -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Diseño-de-página" - -\end_inset - -Diseño de página con encabezado y pie personalizados -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Definición -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para definir una línea de encabezado añade los tres estilos de encabezado. - Lo que pones en los estilos aparece en las páginas impares, lo que pones - como argumento opcional en las pares. - En documentos a una cara, los argumentos opcionales no se usarán y se pueden - omitir. - Si dejas un estilo o su argumento vacío, en la salida no aparece nada. - La definición de la línea de pie de página es similar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para la definición hacen falta algunos comandos LaTeX que se insertan en - código TeX (menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Código Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default -): -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -thepage imprime el número de página -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -Roman{page} imprime el número de página en números romanos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -roman{page} imprime el número de página en números romanos en minúscula -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -leftmark imprime el número de la sección actual y el título. - Si el documento tiene capítulos, imprime el número de capítulo actual y - el título. - Se llama -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -leftmark -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - porque generalmente va en un encabezado izquierda. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -rightmark imprime el número de la subsección actual y el título. - Si el documento tiene capítulos, imprime el número de sección actual y - el título. - Normalmente va en el encabezado derecha. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Encabezado/pie predeterminados -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El encabezado y pie personalizados no están vacíos por omisión. - El encabezado contiene los títulos del capítulo y de la sección, y el pie - centro el número de página. - Para quitar las entradas no deseadas, debes incluir los correspondientes - estilos en el documento pero dejándolos en blanco. - Así, para quitar el número de página en el pie, incluye un estilo -\family sans -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -centro -\family default - en blanco. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Apariencia -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los encabezados y pies se muestran en páginas normales. - Algunas páginas son diferentes: la página de título tiene su propio estilo, - así como la primera página de una parte o capítulo nuevos de un libro. - Tales páginas no tendrán los encabezados/pies personalizados, pero esto - es normal. - Por ejemplo, no hay necesidad de imprimir un encabezado con el título del - capítulo en la misma página donde dicho título ya figura en grandes letras - en negrita. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Línea decorativa -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por omisión, se imprime una línea de 0,4 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt de grosor bajo el encabezado. - Se puede cambiar en el preámbulo del documento con los comandos -\series bold - -\backslash -headrulewidth -\series default - y -\series bold - -\backslash -footrulewidth -\series default - de esta forma: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -headrulewidth}{grosor} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -donde el grosor se expresa en unidades estándar como -\family sans -pt -\family default - o -\family sans -mm -\family default -. - Si no deseas línea, pon un grosor de 0 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las líneas pueden ser en color, aunque requiere más conocimientos de LaTeX. - Si realmente lo deseas, echa un vistazo en Internet o en la sección 4.4 - del libro -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Encabezados y pies con varias líneas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si necesitas más de una línea de texto en encabezados o pies, puedes añadir - un salto de línea normal en la definición del estilo. - Sin embargo, la altura predeterminada de los encabezados y pies es de solo - una línea. - Para aumentar la altura redefine la longitud LaTeX -\series bold - -\backslash -headheight -\series default - o -\series bold - -\backslash -footheight -\series default - en el preámbulo del documento: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -headheight}{altura} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Altura es una longitud en unidades estándar. - Si desconoces la cantidad de espacio necesaria, define tu encabezado o - pie y haz una vista previa PDF del documento. - Luego abres el -\family sans -Registro de La -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -TeX -\family default - en el menú -\family sans -Documento -\family default - y mediante el botón -\family sans -Aviso siguiente -\family default - busca un aviso del paquete -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Si hay tal aviso, verás en él el espacio necesario para el encabezad/pie. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -El ejemplo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nuestro ejemplo enseña lo que se puede hacer para personalizar un encabezado/pie. - Se trata solo de un ejemplo, no lo uses para tu documento. - Contiene las definiciones siguientes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Encabezado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -izquierda -\series bold - -\backslash -rightmark -\series default -, argumento opcional vacío -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Encabezado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -centro vacío, argumento opcional vacío -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Encabezado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -derecha vacío, -\series bold - -\backslash -leftmark -\series default - en el argumento opcional -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -izquierda vacío, -\series bold - -\backslash -thepage -\series default - en el argumento opcional -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -centro -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -Guía del usuario de LyX -\family default -\series default -\color inherit -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Código mágico: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - en el argumento opcional -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Pie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -derecha -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\series default -, argumento opcional vacío -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -headrulewidth establecido en 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En principio puedes usar casi cualquier cosa en los encabezados y pies de - página, excepto flotantes. - Para cosas más sofisticadas, como lengüetas o pestañas, véase el manual - del paquete -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage clearpage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{headings} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -retorno al estilo de página con los encabezados predeterminados -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Vista preliminar inmediata -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Vista-preliminar-inmediata" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Vista instantánea -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX permite generar sobre la marcha vistas de ciertas partes del documento - y ver su aspecto final, sin necesidad de interrumpir el ritmo de trabajo - acudiendo cada vez a ver la salida. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Requisitos previos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para que funcione la vista previa inmediata debe estar instalado el paquete - LaTeX -\series bold -preview-latex -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! preview-latex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (también llamado simplemente -\series bold -preview -\series default -). - Lo encontrarás en el Catálogo TeX, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - o en el administrador de paquetes de tu sistema. - Obtendrás instantáneas mejores si además instalas -\family typewriter -pnmcrop, -\family default - que forma parte del paquete -\family typewriter -netpbm -\family default -; en Windows este programa y también el paquete se instala automáticamente - junto con LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Activar la vista preliminar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si deseas ver, por ejemplo, cómo quedarían tus ecuaciones impresas por LaTeX, - activa la opción -\family sans -Mostrar gráficos -\family default - en el diálogo -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferencias\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Apariencia\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Visualización -\family default -, y en -\family sans -Vista preliminar inmediata -\family default - marca la opción -\family sans -Activada -\family default -. - El -\family sans -Tamaño de la vista -\family default - es el factor de multiplicación para el tamaño. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las vistas se generan cuando cargas un documento en Lyx y cuando terminas - de editar el objeto insertado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - La vista inmediata al activar -\family sans -Mostrar gráficos -\family default - en un documento ya abierto no se genera inmediatamente en todos los casos. - Reabrir el documento garantiza que funcione la vista previa inmediata. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Partes seleccionadas del documento -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además de las ecuaciones, puede haber otros casos en los que desees disponer - de vistas previas, por ejemplo, de cosas que LyX no puede mostrar como - objetos rotados o cosas aún no soportadas por LyX. - En estos casos, inserta un recuadro mediante el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Vista preliminar -\family default -. - Inserta o pega dentro del cuadro lo que quieras ver. - La vista previa se generará cuando el cursor esté fuera del recuadro. - Haciendo clic en el recuadro puedes editar su contenido. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un ejemplo: para crear cuadros rotados, se usa el comando LaTeX -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default -, aún no soportado por LyX. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default - se explica en la sección -\emph on -Marcos girados y a escala -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Para ver en LyX los marcos tal como quedarán en la salida en vez de ver - solo un recuadro de código TeX, y poder así hacer ajustes del ángulo, por - ejemplo, inserta un recuadro de vista preliminar y copia en él el texto - con los marcos girados. - He aquí el resultado: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -Una línea con texto en un marco -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Doublebox -position "c" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 0 -inner_pos "c" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1in" -special "width" -height "1in" -height_special "totalheight" -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -girado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - y una ecuación -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La vista preliminar también funciona con colores. - En este ejemplo se ha creado un marco coloreado mediante el comando LaTeX - -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default -: -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default - se explica en la sección -\emph on -Marcos coloreados -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fboxrule 1mm -\backslash -fboxsep 1mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Texto en un marco con borde y fondo coloreado. -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si LyX no muestra la vista previa, comprueba que está activada la opción - como se describe arriba, que el código TeX insertado es correcto y que - los paquetes LaTeX requeridos están correctamente cargados en el preámbulo - del documento. - Si LyX no puede generar una vista preliminar, en la mayoría de los casos - tampoco será posible obtener salida del documento, debido a errores de - LaTeX. - De esta manera, si usas código TeX y no estás seguro si es correcto, el - recuadro de vista preliminar es un buen método para comprobarlo, sin necesidad - de ver la salida de todo el documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Código fuente de LaTeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por otra parte, puedes ver el código LaTeX de todo el documento o de partes - del mismo. - Con el menú -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ver -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fuente -\family default - surge una ventana en la que puedes ver el código fuente de LaTeX correspondient -e al párrafo en el que se encuentre el cursor. - También puedes seleccionar varios párrafos para ver su código. - Para ver el código de todo el documento, marca la opción correspondiente - en la ventana de código. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Encontrar y reemplazar avanzado -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Encontrar-avanzado" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reemplazar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Encontrar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introducción -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La función avanzada de encontrar y reemplazar de LyX permite la búsqueda - de segmentos de texto complejos, sensibles al formato y contenido matemático - en los documentos. - Es una mejora de la función estándar (rápida) encontrar y reemplazar. - Las características claves son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Permite la búsqueda tanto de texto como de ecuaciones matemáticas, en este - caso introduciendo expresiones en la forma usual; no solo encuentra ecuaciones - completas, también partes presentes en ecuaciones más complejas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -La búsqueda puede ser insensible al formato, de modo que el texto buscado - se encuentra en cualquier contexto o estilo (normal, encabezados, notas - e incluso ecuaciones), o puede ser sensible al formato, así que, por ejemplo, - una palabra introducida con formato de sección solo será buscada en encabezados - de sección -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -La búsqueda puede ampliarse a un -\emph on -ámbito -\emph default - específico, es decir, a un conjunto de archivos que pueden ser todos los - hijos del documento en edición, a todos los archivos abiertos o a todos - los manuales disponibles en el menú -\family sans -Ayuda -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Reemplazar puede, opcionalmente, preservar la capitalización, de forma que - la capitalización del texto reemplazado se adapta al texto coincidente - (es decir, todas minúsculas, todas mayúsculas, primera mayúscula seguida - de minúsculas) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Uso básico -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La función avanzada de encontrar y reemplazar se activa con el menú -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Encontrar y reemplazar (Avanzado) -\family default -(atajo -\family sans -Ctrl+Mayúsculas+F -\family default -) o con el botón de herramientas -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - -. - Se abre el diálogo -\family sans -Encontrar y reemplazar avanzado -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Búsqueda de texto -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Introduce una palabra en el mini-editor de LyX -\family sans -Encontrar -\family default -; haciendo clic en el botón -\family sans -Encontrar siguiente -\family default - en la parte inferior del diálogo (o pulsando la tecla -\family sans -Entrar -\family default -) comienza la búsqueda de la siguiente coincidencia. - La palabra introducida se buscará tanto en modo texto como en modo matemático, - en los tipos de letra normal, énfasis o negrita y tanto en títulos de sección - como en texto normal. - Pulsando -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - repetidamente continúa buscando hacia delante. - Si se pulsa -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Entrar -\family default - busca el texto introducido hacia atrás. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Distinguir mayúsculas -\family default - restringe la búsqueda a las coincidencias que tienen la misma caja introducida - en el editor -\family sans -Encontrar -\family default -. - La opción -\family sans -Palabras completas -\family default - restringe la búsqueda a las coincidencias que corresponden a los límites - de una palabra. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Búsqueda de expresiones matemáticas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se pueden buscar expresiones matemáticas escribiéndolas tal cual en el editor - -\family sans -Encontrar -\family default -, por ejemplo -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - - o algo más complejo como -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - -. - Cuando se busca una expresión, se encuentran las coincidencias tanto si - está aislada como si es parte de otra ecuación o está anidada en ella, - por ejemplo, las expresiones anteriores serían encontradas también en expresion -es como -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Búsqueda de texto con estilo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es posible buscar texto con estilos específicos. - Esto se consigue cambiando a la solapa -\family sans -Configuración -\family default - del diálogo y desmarcando la opción -\family sans -Ignorar formatos -\family default -. - De esta manera, introduciendo en el editor -\family sans -Encontrar -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Una palabra sencilla, la búsqueda no incluirá las coincidencias de la palabra - en estilos énfasis o negrita. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Una palabra en énfasis o negrita, la búsqueda encontrará solo las coincidencias - con el mismo aspecto y solo en el mismo estilo de texto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Una palabra sencilla en un encabezado de sección, la búsqueda solo dará - resultados de coincidencias dentro de encabezados de sección. - Además, si el texto para buscar está en énfasis o negrita, además del formato - de sección solo encontrará las coincidencias con el mismo estilo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Alguna expresión matemática en modo presentación, solo buscará coincidencias - de la expresión que estén en ecuaciones presentadas (no buscará en ecuaciones - en línea). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Reemplazar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los segmentos de texto coincidentes con lo introducido en el editor -\family sans -Encontrar -\family default - se pueden reemplazar con el texto introducido en el editor -\family sans -Reemplazar -\family default -. - Para encontrar la siguiente coincidencia y reemplazarla, haz clic en el - botón -\family sans -Reemplazar -\family default - o, como alternativa, pulsa -\family sans -Entrar -\family default - o -\family sans -Mayúsculas+Entrar -\family default - mientras el cursor esté en el editor -\family sans -Reemplazar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se pueden reemplazar segmentos de texto coincidentes en el documento por - segmentos con formato de LyX. - Escenarios típicos en los que se puede usar esta función pueden ser (solo - mencionamos algunos): -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Reemplazar coincidencias de una palabra con una versión personalizada de - la palabra, por ejemplo, reemplazar "func()"; por su versión en tipo máquina - de escribir, " -\family typewriter -func() -\family default -". -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Realizar una modificación de símbolos matemáticos, por ejemplo, reemplazar - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $R$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - por -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, (para evitar reemplazar todas las letras -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -R -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en texto normal, puedes marcar las opciones -\family sans -Palabras completas -\family default - y -\family sans -Distinguir mayúsculas -\family default -, y desmarcar la opción -\family sans -Ignorar formatos -\family default - en la solapa -\family sans -Configuración -\family default -); o reemplazar -\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ -\end_inset - - por -\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$ -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ -\end_inset - - por -\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Uso avanzado -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay disponible una función de búsqueda basada en una expresión regular, - regexp. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En la entrada de Wikipedia -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" - -\end_inset - - -\family default - se da una buena descripción de las expresiones regulares. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Se pueden buscar expresiones regulares insertando un recuadro regexp en - el editor -\family sans -Encontrar -\family default -, mediante el menú -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Expresión regular -\family default - estando el cursor en el editor -\family sans -Encontrar -\family default -. - Los caracteres introducidos en los recuadros regexp son buscados de acuerdo - con las reglas de coincidencia de las expresiones regulares -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Con la restricción de que cualquier (sub)expresión debe coincidir con un - segmento de texto bien formado en LyX, es decir, si se busca código LaTeX, - no se permite la búsqueda de coincidencias con segmentos con llaves {} - no emparejadas. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, mientras que el texto introducido fuera de los recuadros regexp es buscado - exactamente como tal en el documento. - Está permitido cortar y pegar recuadros regexp en la forma habitual. - Ejemplos de uso de esta característica pueden ser: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Búsqueda de todas las fracciones con un denominador dado: por ejemplo, introduci -endo en el editor -\family sans -Encontrar -\family default - la fracción -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - - (donde -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - en el numerador es la expresión regular para cualquier coincidencia) encontrará - todas las fracciones con ese denominador. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Búsqueda de todo texto con un estilo dado: por ejemplo, tras haber desmarcado - -\family sans -Ignorar formatos -\family default - en la solapa -\family sans -Configuración -\family default -, si se introduce la expresión regular -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - y se añade estilo énfasis o negrita, se encontrará todo testo en estilo - énfasis o negrita, respectivamente. - Además, insertando la expresión regular -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - en una lista no numerada o numerada o en un encabezado de sección, se encontrar -án todas las listas no numeradas o numeradas o cabeceras de sección. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por último, se pueden usar referencias a (sub)expresiones en regexp en la - forma habitual, encerrando partes de la expresión entre paréntesis -\begin_inset Formula $()$ -\end_inset - -, y haciendo referencia a ellas mediante -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ -\end_inset - -, etc., donde el símbolo -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash$ -\end_inset - - se introduce en modo regexp pulsando dos veces la tecla correspondiente. - Por ejemplo, prueba la búsqueda de la regexp -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -[[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]] -\backslash -1[[:space:]] -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -para encontrar repeticiones de palabras, si las hay. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El uso de referencias en el texto reemplazado no está implementado (todavía). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -\color none -Nota: -\series default - Las referencias funcionan cuando aparecen dentro de la misma -\family typewriter -regexp -\family default - y cuando aparecen en diferentes -\family typewriter -regexp -\family default -, donde la numeración de referencias a sub-expresiones es absoluta, es decir, - -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - - siempre se refiere a la primera ocurrencia de -\begin_inset Formula $()$ -\end_inset - - en todas las regexps introducidas. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Corrector ortográfico -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Corrector-ortográfico" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Corrector ortográfico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX no incorpora corrector ortográfico propio. - El menú -\family sans - Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Corrector -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ortográfico -\family default -, la tecla -\family sans -F7 -\family default - o el botón de la barra de herramientas -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show spellchecker" -\end_inset - - inicia la revisión a partir de la posición del cursor o al comienzo del - texto seleccionado. - Se muestra una ventana en la que aparece un cuadro con cualquier palabra - incorrecta o desconocida, que puedes reemplazar en el cuadro siguiente. - Siempre que se encuentra una palabra incorrecta el texto se desplaza hasta - ella y se ve resaltada. - En la ventana de diálogo también hay una lista de sugerencias de reemplazo. - Seleccionando una de ellas se copia en el campo -\family sans -Reemplazar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -con -\family default -, si haces doble clic se verifica directamente el reemplazo. - El botón -\family sans -Ignorar -\family default - sirve para desestimar el reemplazo y proseguir con la revisión. - En el diccionario personal se pueden añadir nuevas palabras. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por omisión, el archivo de diccionario empleado se determina por el idioma - del documento que se establece en -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -. - Puedes especificar el idioma de una palabra en la parte superior del diálogo - del corrector. - LyX puede revisar correctamente documentos con varios idiomas alternando - entre los diccionarios pertinentes. - Esto funciona si los diferentes idiomas se han marcado adecuadamente y - están instalados los diccionarios de los idiomas correspondientes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here -\lang spanish -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -There are 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files for each language. - To install a dictionary, copy the 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files into LyX's installation subfolder -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -dicts -\family default - and restart LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Configuración adicional -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En las preferencias de LyX, -\family sans -Configuración -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -idioma\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Corrector ortográfico -\family default -, están disponibles las siguientes opciones: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Motor -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -corrector -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ortográfico Selecciona la biblioteca que LyX debe usar. - Según la plataforma, están disponibles -\family typewriter -aspell -\family default -, -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default - o -\family typewriter -enchant -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Enchant es una biblioteca envoltorio de diferentes entornos configurables. - Consulta la documentación o la página de manual para saber más. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -. - En Windows solo está disponible -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Idioma -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -alternativo Si este campo no está vacío, LyX usará siempre el idioma dado, - no importa qué idioma tenga el documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Usar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -caracteres -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -escape Permite añadir caracteres no estándar que serán evitados por el corrector -, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -un carácter alemán. - En general esto no debería ser necesario. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Aceptar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -palabras -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -compuestas para que el diccionario admita palabras como «eurozona». -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Revisar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ortografía -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -continuamente La ortografía se revisa mientras se escribe. - Las palabras incorrectas quedan subrayadas en rojo. - Con clic derecho sobre una de estas aparecen las sugerencias en el menú - contextual. - Escogiendo una de ellas se producirá el reemplazo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Revisar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -notas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -y -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -comentarios Si se marca, se revisa también el contenido no imprimible. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Tesauro -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tesauro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Tesauro" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX proporciona un diccionario de sinónimos multilingüe. - Utiliza la misma estructura que LibreOffice, OpenOffice y Firefox (o sea, - la biblioteca de sinónimos -\family typewriter -MyThes -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, incluida en LyX). - Por tanto, LyX puede acceder directamente a los diccionarios de sinónimos - de Libre/OpenOffice, que están disponibles para muchos idiomas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta sección describe cómo se instalan y configuran en LyX diccionarios - nuevos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Configuración del tesauro -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los tesauros de -\family typewriter -MyThes -\family default -/OpenOffice constan de dos archivos por idioma: un archivo con el sufijo - -\family typewriter -*.dat -\family default - que contiene los datos y un archivo con el sufijo -\family typewriter -*.idx -\family default - que contiene un índice. - Los nombres de archivo normalizados incluyen el código para el idioma dado - (p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej., -\family sans -es_ES -\family default - para español). - Así, los archivos para español son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_es_ES_v2.idx -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_es_ES_v2.dat -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si están instalados LibreOffice o OpenOffice y su tesauro -\lang english -on a Linux system, these files should be already on your system. - On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be - installed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here -\lang spanish -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -To install a dictionary, copy the 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files into LyX's installation subfolder -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -thes -\family default - and restart LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Uso del tesauro -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para iniciar el diccionario de sinónimos usa el menú -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tesauro -\family default - o el botón -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "thesaurus-entry" -\end_inset - - de la barra de herramientas, estando el cursor en la palabra a buscar o - estando seleccionada. - Se muestra una ventana con palabras relacionadas con la anterior agrupadas - en categorías. - Para ciertos idiomas el tesauro no solo muestra sinónimos, también términos - genéricos (como -\emph on -organismo -\emph default - por -\emph on -planta -\emph default -), términos relacionados (como -\emph on -teoría política -\emph default - por -\emph on -anarquismo -\emph default -), compuestos (como -\emph on -diagrama en árbol -\emph default - al buscar -\emph on -árbol -\emph default -) y antónimos ( -\emph on -mujer -\emph default - por -\emph on -hombre -\emph default -). - Los términos genéricos, los relacionados y los antónimos se marcan como - tales. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El idioma se escoge automáticamente a partir del idioma vigente en la posición - del cursor, pero se puede cambiar en el diálogo, ya que puedes introducir - ahí palabras nuevas a buscar. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Hay que advertir que el tesauro no puede manejar frases (solo palabras compuesta -s presentes en el diccionario), y hay que usar la denominada forma lema, - esto es, la forma usada en los diccionarios (para muchos idiomas: palabras - individuales y en masculino singular para nombres, infinitivo para verbos). - Por ejemplo, buscar -\emph on -árboles -\emph default - no da resultado, pero sí lo da buscar -\emph on -árbol -\emph default -. - Lo que puedes hacer en estos casos es seleccionar sólo una parte de la - palabra, en este caso -\emph on -árbol -\emph default -es, así se muestran las propuestas sin tener que modificar la palabra en - el diálogo, y el reemplazamiento será probablemente correcto (solo se reemplaza -rá la parte seleccionada, la otra permanece). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Seguimiento de cambios -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Seguimiento de cambios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Seguimiento de cambios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Seguimiento-de-cambios" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cuando varias personas trabajan en el mismo documento es muy útil ver resaltados - los cambios hechos por otros. - Entonces puedes decidir si aceptar o no dichos cambios. - Para habilitar esta característica marca el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguimiento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los cambios realizados en el documento se resaltarán con trazos y colores: - -\bar under -\color blue -texto subrayado -\bar default -\color inherit - es texto añadido, -\strikeout on -\color blue -texto tachado -\strikeout default -\color inherit - es texto borrado. - El color depende del autor que hizo el cambio. - Puedes cambiar estos colores en el diálogo de las preferencias de LyX, - en -\family sans -Apariencia -\family default -, -\family sans -Colores -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! Seguimiento de cambios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - El autor y la fecha del cambio se muestran en la barra de estado de LyX - cuando el cursor está en texto modificado. - Esta misma información se muestra usando el botón de la barra de herramientas - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si el seguimiento de cambios está activado, verás la correspondiente barra - de herramientas: -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barras de herramientas ! Seguimiento de cambios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los botones de la barra de seguimiento de cambios tienen las siguientes - funciones: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-track" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguimiento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-output" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguimiento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mostrar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -salida -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cambio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -siguiente -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguimiento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Aceptar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguimiento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Descartar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguimiento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fusionar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios... -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguimiento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Aceptar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -todos -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -los -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguimiento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Descartar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -todos -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -los -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -siguiente -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La barra de revisión ayuda a aceptar, descartar o fusionar cambios, para - ello selecciona el cambio y pulsa el botón adecuado. - Cuando fusionas cambios aparece una ventana con información sobre el cambio, - la posibilidad de aceptarlo o rechazarlo y la búsqueda del siguiente cambio. - Así que no tienes que ir seleccionando cada cambio por separado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La barra tiene también dos botones para manejar notas porque su uso es habitual - para describir los cambios. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para que los cambios se muestren en la salida debe estar instalado el paquete - LaTeX -\series bold -dvipost -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! dvipost -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Está disponible en el Catálogo TeX, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - o en el administrador de paquetes de tu sistema LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Comparación de documentos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Comparación de documentos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se pueden comparar dos documentos de LyX con el menú -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Comparar\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\family default -. - El resultado es un archivo LyX con el seguimiento de cambios activado que - destaca las diferencias. - En el diálogo Comparar archivos de LyX, puedes elegir la configuración - del documento de diferencias resultante en -\family sans -Copiar la configuración de documento del: -\family default -. - La opción -\family sans -Habilitar características de seguimiento de cambios en la salida -\family default - activa la opción del menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Seguimiento de cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mostrar cambios en la salida -\family default - para poder ver las diferencias también en la salida PDF del documento de - diferencias. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Soporte internacional -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Soporte internacional -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta sección describe cómo usar LyX con cualquier idioma. - Para algunos idiomas hay páginas wiki que describen cómo configurar LyX - para utilizarlos: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además de idiomas, LyX también soporta símbolos fonéticos, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Carácter-especial" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Opciones de idioma -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Idioma ! Opciones -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Idioma -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Idioma -\family default - permite determinar el idioma -\family roman -\lang english -, the quote style -\family default -\lang spanish - y la codificación -\family roman - de caracteres. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El cuadro desplegable -\family sans -Otros -\family default -, bajo -\family sans -Codificación -\family default -, permite elegir el mapa de codificación de caracteres que quieres emplear - para exportar a LaTeX. - La opción -\family sans -Idioma predeterminado -\family default -es la más recomendable porque funciona bien en la mayoría de los casos. - Para más detalles sobre las distintas opciones de codificación, véase la - sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Configuración-del-documento" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Configuración del mapa de teclado -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Configuración-del-mapa" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si tienes, por ejemplo, un teclado U. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -S. - y quieres escribir en otro idioma, pongamos italiano, puedes usar un mapa - de teclado alternativo configurando LyX para que use un teclado italiano. - En el diálogo -\family sans -\lang english -Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Keyboard/Mouse -\family default -\lang spanish - puedes escoger hasta dos mapas de teclado, uno primario y otro secundario, - y seleccionar después el que quieres usar. - Véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Teclado/Ratón" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por otra parte, puede que quieras cambiar sólo unas pocas teclas de un mapa - o crear uno completamente diferente (para Vulcano, por ejemplo). - O bien quieres escribir normalmente en italiano en un teclado U. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -S. - y además incluir de vez en cuando una cita en alemán. - En estos casos puedes escribir tu propio mapa de teclado o modificar uno - existente para soportar los caracteres que necesites. - Esta y otras muchas personalizaciones se explican en el manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -\start_of_appendix -Interfaz de usuario -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cap:Interfaz-de-usuario" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En este apéndice repasaremos los menús disponibles y describiremos sus funciones. - Está diseñado para servir de referencia rápida si buscas un determinado - asunto en esta guía de usuario. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -El menú Archivo -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menú ! Archivo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bajo el menú -\family sans -Archivo -\family default - están las operaciones fundamentales y algunas operaciones más avanzadas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nuevo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Crea un documento nuevo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nuevo desde plantilla -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta opción ofrece la posibilidad de abrir un documento sobre la base de - una plantilla existente, de manera que ciertas características de formato - se heredan automáticamente de la plantilla. - Características que puedes cambiar luego manualmente si quieres. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Abrir -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Abre un documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Abrir reciente -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Muestra una lista de los últimos archivos que se han abierto con el menú - -\family sans -Abrir -\family default -. - Clic sobre el que quieras para abrirlo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cerrar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cierra el documento en pantalla. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cerrar todo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cierra todos los documentos abiertos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Guardar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Guarda el documento en pantalla. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Guardar como -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Guarda el documento en pantalla con la posibilidad de cambiarle el nombre. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Guardar todo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Guarda todos los documentos abiertos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Revertir -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El menú -\family sans -Revertir -\family default - recarga el documento desde su ubicación en el disco. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Control de versiones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esto se emplea cuando varias personas trabajan en el mismo documento o cuando - una persona quiere mantener un detallado archivo de cambios. - Se describe con detalle en el manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -, sección -\emph on -Control de versiones -\emph default - -\emph on -en LyX -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Importar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se pueden importar archivos de versiones anteriores de LyX, archivos HTML, - archivos de LaTeX, archivos NoWeb, archivos de texto simple y archivos - de texto de datos separados con comas (tipo CSV). - Los archivos serán importados como documento nuevo de LyX. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Texto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -simple, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -unir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -líneas -\family default - importa todas las líneas del archivo de texto seguidas, en un sólo párrafo. - Si hay una línea en blanco en el texto, se inicia un párrafo nuevo. - Si el texto se inserta como párrafos los saltos de línea del texto inician - párrafos nuevos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Exportar -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Exportar" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un documento se puede exportar a diversos formatos de salida. - Los archivos resultantes se sitúan en el directorio del archivo LyX. - Las entradas disponibles en el menú dependen de cada instalación, según - los programas que LyX haya encontrado durante su configuración. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sigue una lista de las opciones disponibles, que se explican con detalle - en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Formatos-de-salida" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -CJK -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX -\family default -formato especial de las versiones 1.4.x de LyX para chino, japonés y coreano - (CJK). -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Desde LyX 1.5.0, el soporte de CJK está totalmente integrado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DocBook archivo de texto con código en lenguaje SGML usado en el lenguaje - de marcación -\family typewriter -DocBook -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DocBook -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XML) archivo de texto con código en lenguaje XML usado en el lenguaje de - marcación -\family typewriter -DocBook -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DraftDVI formato DVI nativo de LaTeX. - No es aconsejable si el documento tiene caracteres especiales o espacios - en rutas o nombres de archivos. - LyX usa este formato internamente en una etapa previa a la exportación - a DVI. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVI formato DVI que permite el uso de caracteres especiales o espacios en - rutas y nombres de archivo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) formato DVI que usa el programa -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -; soporta Unicode y tipografías no-TeX; -\series bold - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - actualmente no todos los visores DVI pueden mostrar adecuadamente este - formato -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Graphviz -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Dot archivo de texto con código en el lenguaje de programación -\family typewriter -Dot -\family default -, usado para dibujar gráficos mediante el programa -\family typewriter -Graphviz -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -HTML formato HTML (el convertidor HTML es un programa externo que no siempre - funciona) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -HTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(MS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Word) formato HTML especial que puede ser importado en -\family sans -MS Word -\family default -, en el que las fórmulas se transforman en tipografías bitmap y no en el - formato -\family sans -MathML -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) archivo de texto con el código LaTeX compilable con el programa -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - archivo de texto en código LaTeX, y todas las imágenes del documento se - convierten a un formato legible por el programa -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default - (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(simple) -\family default - archivo de texto en código LaTeX, y todas las imágenes del documento se - convierten al formato EPS, único legible por el programa -\family typewriter -latex -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) archivo de texto con el código LaTeX compilable con el programa -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LilyPond -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -book -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(La -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -TeX) archivo de texto con el código LaTeX y además código en la sintaxis - del software de notación musical -\family typewriter - LilyPond -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Archivo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(zip|tar.gz) crea un contenedor de archivos zip o tar.gz (dependiendo del - sistema) con el documento y todos los archivos necesarios para compilarlo - (imágenes, documentos hijo, archivos BibTeX, etc.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -yX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -z.y.x documento LyX en formato legible para las versiones correspondientes - de LyX («z.y.» es el número de versión) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -yXHTML formato HTML, usando un ingenio XHTML interno de LyX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -NoWeb archivo de texto con código en el formato del lenguaje de programación - literaria -\family typewriter - NoWeb -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -OpenDocument archivo de texto en formato OpenDocument, que puede abrirse - con -\family sans -LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword -\family default -, etc. - (el convertidor a OpenDocument es un programa externo que no siempre funciona) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) -\family default - formato PDF usando el programa -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default -, produce internamente un archivo DVI que es convertido después a PDF -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -eX) formato PDF usando el programa -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -, produce directamente archivos PDF -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - formato PDF usando el programa -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -, produce directamente archivos PDF -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) -\family default - formato PDF usando el programa -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default -, produce internamente un archivo PostScript que es convertido después a - PDF -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeT -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -eX) formato PDF usando el programa -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -, produce directamente archivos PDF -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Texto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -simple -\family default - formato de texto -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Texto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -simple -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii) -\family default - formato de texto, el documento se convierte a Postscript y luego se exporta - a texto con el programa -\family sans -ps2ascii -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Postscript -\family default - formato PostScript usando el programa -\family typewriter -dvips -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sweave archivo de texto con el código LaTeX y además código en el lenguaje - de programación estadística -\family typewriter -R -\family default -. - Usando la función -\family typewriter -R -\family default - -\family typewriter -Sweave -\family default - es posible usar comandos -\family typewriter -R -\family default - en LaTeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si alguna de las entradas del menú, -\family sans -DVI -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - o -\family sans -Postscript -\family default - no está presente, debes actualizar la instalación de LaTeX. - Después de actualizar debes reconfigurar LyX, como se ha explicado en la - sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Configuración-básica" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguración de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Imprimir -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con este menú puedes imprimir el documento en un archivo en formato PostScript - o enviarlo a la impresora. - La impresora también usará el formato PostScript. - La conversión a PostScript la hace LyX en segundo plano ejecutando el programa - -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -. - Para más información mira en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Imprimir-archivos" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fax -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta entrada de menú solo aparece cuando está instalado un programa de fax - (en Windows, es necesario además registrar la ruta del programa en el prefijo - PATH de LyX, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rutas" - -\end_inset - -). - Con esta entrada puedes enviar tu documento a un programa de fax como -\family typewriter -hylapex -\family default - o -\family typewriter -kdeprintfax -\family default -. - Por omisión, el archivo se envía en formato PostScript. - El formato se puede cambiar en las preferencias de LyX como se describe - en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Convertidores" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ventana nueva y Cerrar ventana -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Abre una nueva ventana de LyX o cierra una ventana . -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Salir -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avisa si hay documentos no guardados y sale. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -El menú Editar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menú ! Editar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Deshacer y Rehacer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Deshacer-y-rehacer" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cortar, Copiar, Pegar, Pegar reciente, Pegado especial -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Características-básicas-de-edición" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Seleccionar el recuadro completo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Selecciona el contenido del recuadro en el que está el cursor. - Si el cursor está fuera de un recuadro se seleccionará el documento completo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Seleccionar todo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Selecciona el documento completo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Encontrar y reemplazar (Rápido) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Características-básicas-de-edición" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Encontrar y reemplazar (Avanzado) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Encontrar-avanzado" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mover párrafo arriba/abajo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El párrafo que contiene el cursor se desplaza un párrafo arriba o abajo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Estilo del texto -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ajuste-fino-con" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Configuración del párrafo -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Párrafos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las características de este diálogo afectan sólo al párrafo donde esté el - cursor. - Aquí puedes especificar la alineación del párrafo y el espacio entre líneas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -También puedes evitar el sangrado de primera línea, siempre y cuando la - configuración global de la separación de párrafos esté configurada en sangrado, - en el apartado Diseño -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto del diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Configuración de cuadros y ecuaciones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Estos menús sólo están activos cuando el cursor está dentro de un cuadro - o de una ecuación. - Las propiedades del cuadro o la fórmula se pueden cambiar en ese caso. - Las propiedades de los cuadros se describen en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Cuadros" - -\end_inset - -, las propiedades de las ecuaciones en el capítulo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Ecuaciones-matemáticas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Aumentar o disminuir la profundidad en las listas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Estos menús sólo están activos cuando el cursor está en un entorno anidable. - Permiten aumentar o disminuir la profundidad del nivel de anidación en - una lista, como se explica en las secciones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Anidación" - -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Profundidad-de-numeración" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -El menú Ver -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menú ! Ver -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Al final del menú -\family sans -Ver -\family default - sale la lista de documentos abiertos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Abrir/Cerrar todos los recuadros -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Abre o cierra todos los recuadros en el documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Desplegar/Plegar macros de ecuación -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Despliega o pliega la macro de ecuación actual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las macros de ecuaciones se describen en el manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ver fuente -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Muestra una ventana en la que se puede ver el código LaTeX del párrafo actual, - de una selección de párrafos o del documento completo, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Vista-preliminar-inmediata" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ver mensajes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Abre una ventana en la que se muestran mensajes de consola. - Esto es útil para operaciones de depuración (es decir, caza de errores) - en LyX o para ver lo que sucede en segundo plano mientras LaTeX procesa - el documento, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ver -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta entrada de menú genera la salida en el formato especificado como predetermi -nado en las preferencias (véase la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" - -\end_inset - -) o en la configuración del documento (véase la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Salidas" - -\end_inset - -) y lo abre con el visor apropiado, el cuál se puede elegir y configurar - en las preferencias, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" - -\end_inset - -. - Los visores predeterminados son establecidos por LyX cuando se instala. - El formato de salida por omisión es -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ver (Otros Formatos) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con este submenú puedes ver la salida del documento en otros formatos disponible -s. - El menú contiene una lista de formatos en los que puedes ver el documento - abierto con un programa externo. - Las opciones de este menú no son las mismas en todas las instalaciones - —depende de los programas LaTeX que LyX encontró durante su configuración—. - Todos los formatos posibles se describen en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Exportar" - -\end_inset - -. - Al menos debes ver en el menú la entrada -\family sans -DVI -\family default -. - Si falta alguna de ellas debes actualizar o arreglar la instalación de - LaTeX y reconfigurar LyX, como se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Configuración-básica" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguración de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Al pulsar una opción del menú se iniciará un programa visor, el cuál se - puede elegir y configurar en las preferencias, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" - -\end_inset - -. - Los visores predeterminados son establecidos por LyX cuando se instala. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Actualizar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Permite actualizar la vista del documento con los últimos cambios (en el - formato predeterminado) sin necesidad de reabrir la ventana del visor. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Actualizar (Otros formatos) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con este submenú puedes actualizar la vista de formatos alternativos de - salida sin necesidad de reabrir la ventana del visor. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ver documento maestro -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este ítem del menú solo es visible si el documento actual está incluido - en otro que es su documento -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maestro -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, (véase la sección -\emph on -Documentos hijo -\emph default - en el manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default - para más información sobre este asunto). - Esto permite ver el documento maestro desde dentro de su documento hijo, - es decir, si estás trabajando en un documento hijo que es un capítulo de - un libro, -\family sans -Ver maestro -\family default - genera la salida del libro completo, mientras que -\family sans -Ver -\family default - solo mostrará la salida del capítulo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El formato de salida usado por esta función es el predeterminado especificado - en las preferencias (véase la sec. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" - -\end_inset - -) o en la configuración del documento (véase la sec. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Salidas" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Actualizar documento maestro -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este ítem solo es visible si el documento actual está incluido en otro que - es su documento -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maestro -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, (véase la sección -\emph on -Documentos hijo -\emph default - en el manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default - para más información sobre este asunto). - Permite actualizar la vista de un documento maestro desde dentro de su - hijo sin necesidad de abrir el propio documento maestro. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El formato de salida usado por esta función es el predeterminado especificado - en las preferencias (véase la sec. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" - -\end_inset - -) o en la configuración del documento (véase la sec. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Salidas" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Dividir la ventana -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Estas entradas del menú dividirán la pantalla principal de LyX vertical - u horizontalmente. - Así puedes ver simultáneamente varios documentos para compararlos, o ver - el mismo documento en diferentes posiciones. - Puedes dividir la ventana principal varias veces para ver, p. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ej., tres o más documentos a la vez. - Para volver a una vista sin dividir, usa el menú -\family sans -Cerrar la vista actual -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cerrar la vista actual -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cierra las ventanas divididas volviendo a vista única o, si no hay ventanas - divididas, oculta todas las pestañas. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Pantalla completa -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta opción del menú o pulsando F11 muestra la ventana principal de LyX - en modo pantalla completa, ocultando la barra de menú y las barras de herramien -tas. - Para volver a vista normal pulsa F11 o haz clic derecha en el ratón y desmarca - el modo pantalla completa en el menú contextual que aparece. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Barras de herramientas -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Barras-de-herramientas" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barras de herramientas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este menú permite mostrar en pantalla, o no, las distintas barras de herramienta -s, así como el -\family sans -Búfer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -comandos -\family default -. - Si la vista está activada se muestra una marca en el menú. - Las barras de -\family sans -Seguimiento de cambios -\family default -, -\family sans -Cuadro -\family default -, -\family sans -Paneles de ecuaciones -\family default -, -\family sans -Macros de ecuación -\family default - y -\family sans -Ecuaciones -\family default -se pueden poner además en modo -\emph on -automático -\emph default -, que se indica mediante ( -\family sans -auto -\family default -) en el menú. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con vista activada la barra se muestra permanentemente; en modo -\emph on -automático -\emph default - la barra se muestra sólo cuando el cursor se encuentra en un entorno relacionad -o con las funciones de la misma. - Esto implica que, en modo -\emph on -automático -\emph default -, la barra de revisión sólo se ve si está activado el seguimiento de cambios, - y la de cuadros y las de ecuaciones sólo se ven cuando el cursor está en - un cuadro o ecuación, respectivamente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las barras de herramientas y sus botones se explican en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Barras-de-herramientas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -El menú Insertar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menú ! Insertar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ecuación -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La inserción de estructuras matemáticas se explica en el capítulo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Ecuaciones-matemáticas" - -\end_inset - - y en el manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Carácter especial -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Carácter-especial" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con este menú puedes insertar los siguientes caracteres: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Símbolos Inserta cualquier carácter que esté disponible en tu sistema LaTeX. - Por tanto las categorías de caracteres y los caracteres disponibles en - este diálogo dependen de los paquetes LaTeX instalados. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -No todos los caracteres serán visibles en el diálogo -\family sans -Símbolos -\family default - porque ninguna de las tipografías de pantalla disponibles en el diálogo - de preferencias (véase sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tipografías-en-pantalla" - -\end_inset - -) pueden mostrar todos los caracteres. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Puntos -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -suspensivos Inserta \SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -oración Inserta un punto final de oración, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Abreviaturas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Comillas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dobles Inserta estas comillas: ", independientemente del tipo de comillas - que hayas seleccionado en el diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default -, -\family sans -Idioma -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Comillas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -simples Inserta esta comilla: -\begin_inset Quotes frs -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Guión -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -protegido Inserta un guión protegido de saltos de línea: - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Barra -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -oblicua -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -frágil Inserta una barra oblicua donde también se puede producir un salto - de línea: \SpecialChar \slash{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Separador -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -menú Inserta el símbolo: \SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Símbolos -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fonéticos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Simbolos@Símbolos fonéticos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Idioma ! Símbolos fonéticos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Crea una ecuación con el llamado mapa -\emph on -tipa -\emph default -. - En la fórmula puedes introducir comandos para imprimir símbolos fonéticos - IPA. - Esta característica requiere el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Para más información sobre este paquete consulta su documentación -\series bold -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "tipa" - -\end_inset - -, -\series default -y su página Wiki: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formato -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí puedes introducir las siguientes estructuras o formatos: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Superíndice Inserta un superíndice o exponente: test -\begin_inset script superscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -a, b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Subíndice Inserta un subíndice: test -\begin_inset script subscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3x -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -protegido Inserta un espacio protegido, descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-protegido" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -entre-palabra Inserta un espacio entre-palabra, descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-entre-palabra" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -delgado Inserta un espacio delgado, descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-delgado" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal Inserta un relleno horizontal, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-horizontal" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Línea -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal Inserta una línea horizontal, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Líneas-horizontales" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espacio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical Inserta un espacio, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-vertical" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fantasma Inserta espacio fantasma, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacio-fantasma" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Guión -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -silábico Inserta un guión, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:División-con-guión" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligado Inserta una ligadura, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ligaduras" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -línea -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cortada Inserta un salto de línea forzado, véase la sección -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Salto-de-línea-forzado" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -línea -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -justificada Fuerza un salto de línea de forma que la línea se expande hasta - el margen, véase la sección -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Salto-de-línea-forzado" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Página -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nueva Inserta un salto de página forzado, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Saltos-de-página-forzados" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Salto -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -página Inserta a salto de página forzado, descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Saltos-de-página-forzados" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Limpiar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -página Inserta un salto de página limpia, descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Salto-de-página-limpia" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Limpiar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -página -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -doble Inserta un salto de página limpia en documentos a dos caras, descrito - en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Salto-de-página-limpia" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Índice -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con este menú se pueden insertar varios tipos de índices. - El índice general y los índices de algoritmos, de figuras y de cuadros - se describen en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:IG" - -\end_inset - -. - El índice alfabético se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Indice-alfabético" - -\end_inset - -, la nomenclatura en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nomenclatura" - -\end_inset - -, y la bibliografía BibTeX en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bases-datos-bibliográficos" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Flotante -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Flotantes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nota -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Notas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Rama -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Ramas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Recuadro personalizado -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta recuadros específicos de la clase de documento. - Estos recuadros solo son posibles si están definidos en el archivo de formato - ( -\emph on -layout -\emph default -) para una determinada clase de documento. - Un ejemplo es la clase de documento -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -article (Elsevier) -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - con tres recuadros personalizados. - La sección -\emph on -Recuadros flexibles y formato del recuadro -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default - explica cómo se definen los recuadros personalizados. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Archivo -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Material externo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí se pueden insertar en el documento varios tipos de archivos y de material - externo. - Se explica detalladamente cómo hacerlo en el capítulo -\emph on -Archivos externos -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Marco -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Marcos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta una minipágina, se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Minipáginas" - -\end_inset - -. - Todos los tipos de marcos soportados por LyX se explican con detalle en - el capítulo -\emph on -Marcos -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cita -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta una cita bibliográfica, se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliografía" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Referencia cruzada -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta una referencia cruzada, como se describe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Etiqueta -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta una etiqueta, se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Leyenda -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Leyenda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cuadros ! Largos ! leyenda en -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta una leyenda sobre o bajo los flotantes o los cuadros largos. - Se describen, respectivamente, en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Flotantes" - -\end_inset - - de este manual, y en la sección -\emph on -Leyendas en cuadros largos -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Entrada de índice -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta una entrada para el índice alfabético, como se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Indice-alfabético" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Entrada de nomenclatura -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta una entrada de nomenclatura, se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Nomenclatura" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cuadro/Tabla -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta un cuadro (o tabla). - Los cuadros se describen en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Cuadros" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Imagen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta un gráfico o imagen. - Se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Gráficos" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URL -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta un cuadro URL, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:URL" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hiperenlaces -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta un hiperenlace, se describe en la sección -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Hiperenlaces" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nota al pie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta una nota al pie, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Notas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nota al margen -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta una nota al margen, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Notas-al-margen" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Título breve -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta un título breve, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Títulos-breves" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Código TeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta un cuadro código TeX, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Cuadros-TeX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Listado de programa -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listado de programa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta un cuadro para escribir código de programa. - Se describe en el capítulo -\emph on -Listado de programa -\emph default -del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fecha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta la fecha actual. - El formato de fecha depende del idioma usado para los menús de LyX. - LyX ofrece otras formas de insertar una fecha, tal como se describe en - la sección -\emph on - Material externo -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. - Ahí se comparan los diversos métodos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Vista preliminar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inserta un recuadro para una vista instantánea; véase su descripción en - la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Vista-preliminar-inmediata" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -El menú Navegar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menú ! Navegar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En este menú se muestran los índices y listas existentes de figuras, cuadros - y otras cosas, así como el índice general (IG) del documento abierto. - Esto permite navegar cómodamente a través del documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Marcadores -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta opción permite definir marcadores personales. - Esto es útil cuando trabajas en un documento extenso y debes cambiar a - menudo de una parte a otra del mismo. - Por ejemplo, si tienes que cambiar con frecuencia de la sección -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -2.6 a la 6.3, te sitúas en la primera y usas el menú -\family sans -Guardar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -marcador -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1, -\family default - después vas a la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -6.3 y pulsas -\family sans -Guardar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -marcador -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2. - -\family default - Ahora puedes saltar fácilmente de una sección a otra bien con el menú, - bien con los atajos -\family sans -Ctrl+1 -\family default - y -\family sans -Ctrl+2 -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -También se pueden usar los marcadores para alternar entre varios documentos - abiertos. - Los marcadores permanecen hasta que se cierra el documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nota, Cambio, Referencia siguiente -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Desde su posición actual, el cursor va a la nota, al cambio o a la referencia - cruzada siguiente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ir a la etiqueta -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Solo está visible cuando el cursor está frente a una referencia cruzada. - Lleva el cursor hasta la etiqueta correspondiente. - (Es lo mismo que pulsar clic derecho sobre el cuadro de la referencia y - usar -\family sans -Ir a la etiqueta -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Búsqueda directa -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta función permite ir directamente, en el documento de salida, a la parte - correspondiente del documento en LyX; véase la sección -\emph on -Búsqueda directa -\emph default - en el manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default - para más detalles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -El menú Documento -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menú ! Documento -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Seguimiento de cambios -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Descrito en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Seguimiento-de-cambios" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Registro de LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Después de exportar o mostrar una vista preliminar del documento, se habilita - el menú -\family sans -Registro -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -de -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -LaTeX. - -\family default - Permite visualizar el archivo de registro de los programas y archivos empleados - por LaTeX al generar la salida. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En él se puede ver cómo funciona LaTeX al procesar el documento. - Los -\emph on -expertos -\emph default - encontrarán aquí posibles causas de los errores de LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Navegador de contorno -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Abre una ventana lateral para navegar por los índices descrita en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Indice-general" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Comenzar apéndice aquí -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inicia el apéndice del documento en la posición del cursor, como se describe - en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Apéndices" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Comprimido -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comprime/descomprime el documento actual. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Configuración -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La configuración del documento se describe en el apéndice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Configuración-del-documento" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -El menú Herramientas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menú ! Herramientas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Corrector ortográfico -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Corrector-ortográfico" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tesauro -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tesauro" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Estadísticas -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Contar palabras -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Contar caracteres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cuenta el número de palabras y caracteres en el documento o en la parte - resaltada. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Información TeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Información TeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Muestra una lista de las clases y estilos instalados en el sistema LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Reconfigurar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguración de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Reconfigurar|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Reconfiguración de LyX -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta opción sirve para que LyX reconozca nuevos paquetes LaTeX o programas - tras su instalación. - Véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Configuración-básica" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Preferencias -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El diálogo -\family sans -Preferencias -\family default - se describe con detalle en el capítulo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cap:Diálogo-preferencias" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -El menú Ayuda -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menú ! Ayuda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí están los archivos de documentación de LyX. - Los que estén traducidos saldrán en el idioma en que estén los menús. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El apartado -\family sans -Configuración -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\family default - genera un archivo LyX con información sobre los paquetes LaTeX y clases - de documento encontrados por LyX (véase también la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:LaTeX-conf" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Barras de herramientas -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Barras-de-herramientas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La aparición u ocultación de las barras de herramientas se explica en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Barras-de-herramientas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -También se pueden definir barras personalizadas. - Se explica en el manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Barra de herramientas Normal -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barras de herramientas ! Normal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los botones de la barra normal son, de izquierda a derecha: -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -LTleft}{0pt} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Este comando es necesario para alinear las celdas en el siguiente cuadro - largo. - Véase el manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default - para más detalles. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/es_ToolbarEnvBox.png - clip - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menú desplegable con los entornos de párrafo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace -10mm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align left -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-new" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nuevo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "file-open" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Abrir -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-write" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Guardar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Imprimir -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show spellchecker" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Corrector ortográfico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "undo" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Deshacer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "redo" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rehacer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "cut" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cortar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "copy" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Copiar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "paste" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Pegar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show findreplace" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Encontrar y reemplazar -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -( -\lang english -Quick -\lang spanish -) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Encontrar y reemplazar -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -( -\lang english -Advanced -\lang spanish -) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marcadores\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Volver -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Aplica al texto el formato énfasis, función del diálogo Edit -\family sans -ar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Aplica al texto el formato versalitas, función del diálogo Edit -\family sans -ar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "textstyle-apply" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Aplica al texto el formato actual del diálogo Edit -\family sans -ar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-mode" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator -En -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -línea -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Imagen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "tabular-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cuadro/Tabla -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle toc" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Muestra/oculta la ventana del navegador, -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Navegador -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -contorno -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "toolbar-toggle math" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Muestra/oculta la barra de herramientas matemáticas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "toolbar-toggle table" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Muestra/oculta la barra de herramientas de cuadros -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Barra de herramientas Extra -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barras de herramientas ! Extra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los botones de la barra extra son, de izquierda a derecha: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Predeterminado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Enumerate" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lista numerada -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Itemize" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lista no numerada -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout List" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lista -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Description" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lista descripción -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Aumentar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -profundidad -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -lista -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Disminuir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -profundidad -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -lista -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert figure" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flotante\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Figura -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert table" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flotante\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cuadro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Etiqueta -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Referencia -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cruzada -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cita -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "index-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Entrada -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -índice -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "nomencl-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Entrada -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nomenclatura -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "footnote-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "marginalnote-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -margen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nota -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -X -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "box-insert Frameless" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "href-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Hyperlink -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Código -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -T -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ecuaciones\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Macro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset include" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Documento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -hijo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -párrafo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "thesaurus-entry" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tesauro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Barra de herramientas Ver / Actualizar -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barras de herramientas ! Ver/Actualizar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los botones de la barra ver -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -actualizar son, de izquierda a derecha: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ver -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Actualizar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Maestro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\lang english -Document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Actualizar Maestro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\lang english -Document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Salidas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Sincronizar con salida -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ver (Otros Formatos) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/update-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Actualizar (Otros Formatos) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -* Estos iconos podrían tener un aspecto distinto si se cambia la colección - de iconos predeterminada. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Otras barras de herramientas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La barra de herramientas para el seguimiento de cambios se explica en la - sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Seguimiento-de-cambios" - -\end_inset - -, la barra de herramientas para cuadros -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barras de herramientas ! Cuadros -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - se explica en el manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -, la de macros -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barras de herramientas ! Macros -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - en el manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Configuración del documento -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cap:Configuración-del-documento" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El diálogo que se abre con el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración -\family default - contiene diversos submenús en los que se pueden establecer propiedades - para todo el documento. - Las características seleccionadas pueden guardarse como predeterminadas - con el botón -\family sans -Guardar -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -como -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -valores -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -predeterminados -\family default -. - Al hacer esto, se crea una plantilla llamada -\family typewriter -defaults.lyx -\family default - que se carga automáticamente cada vez que abres un nuevo documento sin - plantilla. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El botón -\family sans -Usar predeterminados de clase -\family default - restablece las opciones del documento a los valores predefinidos de la - clase de documento. - Esto afecta a la mayoría de las opciones de la clase, al diseño de página - y a la numeración e IG. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los submenús del diálogo se explican a continuación. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Clase del documento -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí se establece la clase de documento, las opciones de clase, un controlador - de gráficos y un documento maestro. - Las clases de documento se describen en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Clases-de-documento" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con el botón -\family sans -Formato local -\family default - puedes cargar tu propio archivo de formato, que al no estar en la carpeta - -\emph on -layouts -\emph default - no es reconocida por LyX como formato de clase de documento. - Más información sobre este asunto en el capítulo -\emph on -Instalación de nuevas clases de documento, formatos y plantillas -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Algunas clases usan algunas opciones de clase predefinidas. - Si este es el caso, se listan en el campo -\family sans -Predefinido -\family default - y puedes decidir si usarlas o no. - Si no sabes exactamente para qué sirven las opciones de clase predefinidas, - es recomendable no tocarlas. - El controlador de gráficos se usa para paquetes LaTeX de gráficos, color - y formato de página. - Cuando se usa -\family sans -Predeterminado -\family default - se utilizan los controladores predeterminados para los paquetes LaTeX. - Es conveniente dejar el controlador predeterminado, a menos que sepas lo - que haces. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Si quieres usar uno de los siguientes controladores -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -primero tienes que activarlos en tu distribución LaTeX, véase sección -\emph on -Driver support -\emph default - en -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Es necesario especificar un documento maestro cuando el actual documento - es un documento hijo o un subdocumento. - El documento maestro será utilizado por LyX si se abre un documento hijo - sin su maestro. - Así los documentos hijo son siempre compilables. - Sobre este asunto hay más información en la sección -\emph on -Documentos hijo -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además hay una opción para suprimir la fecha y otra para usar el paquete - LaTeX -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - en vez de -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - para las referencias cruzadas, véase la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Documentos hijo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este submenú solo es visible si el documento incluye hijos. - Se explica en la sección -\emph on -Documentos hijo -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Módulos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los módulos se explican en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Módulos" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Formato local -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Formato-local" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Tipografías -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La configuración de las tipografías del documento se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Estilo-de-letra" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Diseño del texto -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí se establece el modo de separación de párrafos, sangrado o espacio - vertical. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -También el espacio entre líneas y el número de columnas, pero ten en cuenta - que esto no se ve en la pantalla de LyX, no es práctico ni cómodo de leer, - y no es parte del concepto WYSIWYM. - Sí se verá en la salida. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Diseño de página -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Este menú se describe en las secciones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Papel-tamaño-orientación" - -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Formato-de-documento" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Márgenes de página -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para establecer los márgenes del papel, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Márgenes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Idioma -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Idioma" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Idioma ! Codificación -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí se determina el idioma del documento y el estilo de las comillas. - La codificación determina cómo se exporta a LaTeX el contenido del documento - (el archivo LyX siempre se codifica en utf8). - Todos los caracteres que no puedan codificarse en la codificación especificada - se exportan como comandos LaTeX (esto puede fallar si el comando para algún - carácter es desconocido). -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Los comandos conocidos se definen en un archivo de texto ( -\emph on -unicodesymbols -\emph default -). - Puedes añadir comandos para símbolos desconocidos en ese archivo, como - se explica en el manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default -. - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si marcas la opción -\family sans -Idioma predeterminado -\family default -, LyX determina la codificación de cada porción de texto a partir del idioma - de dicho texto. - Si el documento contiene texto en más de un idioma podría haber más de - una codificación en el archivo LaTeX. - Si no usas esa opción, todo el documento usará sólo una codificación. - Lo más recomendable es marcar esta opción. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX soporta salida en Unicode, que es especialmente útil en el caso de tener - muchos símbolos especiales o no alfabéticos. - Si quieres usar esto (y en ese caso tu instalación LaTeX soporta Unicode), - elige una de las cuatro variantes utf8 de la lista de abajo. - Desgraciadamente, el soporte unicode del sistema LaTeX estándar es bastante - incompleto, y por tanto no es infrecuente que un archivo con muchos símbolos - unicode sea bien procesado con la opción -\family sans -Idioma predeterminado -\family default -, (cuando LyX usa su lista de comandos LaTeX conocidos), y sin embargo no - funcione con una codificación fija utf8, (cuando no se usa la lista de - comandos conocidos, pues todos los símbolos unicode se codifican en utf8). - La situación es mucho mejor con XeTeX y LuaTeX, dos nuevos motores alternativos - al estándar LaTeX. - Ambos motores soportan Unicode de forma nativa. - Ahora LyX también soporta estos dos motores (mediante los formatos de salida - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - y -\family sans -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTeX) -\family default -, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Formatos-de-salida" - -\end_inset - -); así, si las opciones de más arriba fallan, podrías intentar alguno de - estos nuevos motores. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El -\family sans -Paquete de idiomas -\family default - determina el paquete LaTeX que se usa para la división de palabras y la - traducción de cadenas de texto como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Part -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Las opciones posibles son: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Predeterminado usa el paquete de idioma seleccionado en -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferencias\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración del idioma -\family default -. - (Véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Idioma" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Automático selecciona el paquete de idiomas más adecuado para el formato - de ver/exportar. - En muchos casos será -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Si es más adecuado el nuevo paquete -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (es el caso cuando se usa XeTeX y/o tipografías no TeX), se usará este - en vez de -\series bold -babel -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Siempre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Babel usa -\series bold -babel -\series default - aunque -\series bold - polyglossia -\series default - fuera más adecuado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Personalizado permite elegir un comando de paquete de idiomas. - Por ejemplo, si quieres usar un paquete de idiomas específico como -\series bold -ngerman -\series default - (para textos en alemán), escribe -\series bold - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\backslash -usepackage{ngerman} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ninguno no se usará ningún paquete de idiomas. - Es necesario para ciertas clases de documentos científicos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -He aquí una lista con las codificaciones importantes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Idioma -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -predeterminado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(no -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -inputenc) -\family roman - -\family default -Lo mismo que -\family sans -Idioma predeterminado -\family default -, pero sin usar el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Si se usa esto probablemente haya que cargar manualmente algunos paquetes - adicionales en el preámbulo, y especificar la codificación usada para partes - de texto en idiomas foráneos en código TeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ASCII el código ASCII cubre sólo inglés simple (7-bit ASCII). - LyX convierte todos los caracteres en comandos LaTeX; puede resultar en - un archivo enorme porque pueden ser necesarios muchos comandos LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Árabe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1256) Código MS Windows para árabe y farsi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Árabe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-6) para árabe y farsi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Armenio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ArmSCII8) para armenio -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Báltico -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1257) Código MS Windows para estonio, letón y lituano, lo mismo que el código - ISO-8859-13 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Báltico -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-13) para estonio, letón y lituano, un superconjunto del código ISO-8859-4 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Báltico -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-4) (latin 4) para estonio, letón y lituano, un subconjunto del código - ISO-8859-13 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chino -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(simplificado) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-CN) para chino simplificado, usado especialmente en los SO UNIX; desde - 2001 este código se ha reemplazado oficialmente por el código GB18030, - como GB18030 no está disponible para LaTeX podrías probar a usar el código - Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chino -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(simplificado) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(GBK) para chino simplificado, es el mismo que Windows CP 936 excepto el - signo del euro; desde 2001 este código se ha reemplazado oficialmente por - GB18030, como GB18030 no está disponible para LaTeX podrías probar a usar - el código Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chino -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(traditional) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-TW) para chino tradicional -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cirílico -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1251) código MS Windows para cirílico -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cirílico -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-5) cubre bielorruso, búlgaro, macedonio, serbio, y ucranio -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cirílico -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(KOI8-R) cirílico estándar especialmente para ruso -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cirílico -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(KOI8-U) cirílico para ucranio -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cirílico -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -154) cirílico para kazajo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Coreano -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-KR) para coreano -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europeo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Central -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1250) Código MS Windows para ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2 (latin2) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europeo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Central -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2) (latin 2) cubre albano, croata, checo, alemán, húngaro, polaco, - rumano, eslovaco y esloveno -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europeo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Occidental -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1252) código MS Windows para ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1 (latin1) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europeo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Occidental -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1) (latin 1) cubre los idiomas albanés, catalán, danés, holandés, inglés, - faroe, finés, francés, gallego, alemán, islandés, irlandés, italiano, noruego, - portugués, español y sueco; es mejor utilizar el código ISO-8859-15 en - vez de éste. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europeo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Occidental -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-15) (latin 9) como el código ISO-8859-1, pero con el signo del Euro, - la ligadura œ y algunos caracteres para francés y finés -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europeo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Sur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-3) (latin 3) cubre esperanto, gallego, maltés y turco -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europeo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Sudoriental -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-16) (latin 10) cubre albano, croata, finés, francés, alemán, húngaro, - gaélico irlandés, italiano, polaco, rumano, esloveno, diseñado para muchos - idiomas con caracteres diacríticos -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Griego -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-7) para griego -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hebreo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1255) código MS Windows para hebreo, un superconjunto del código ISO-8859-8 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hebreo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-8) para hebreo -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japonés -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-JP) código EUC-JP para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en -\family sans -Japonés (CJK) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japonés -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(JIS) código JIS para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX -\series bold - CJK -\series default -, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en -\family sans -Japonés (CJK) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japonés -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(no-CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-JP) código EUC-JP para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -japanese -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en -\family sans -Japonés -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japonés -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(no-CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(JIS) código JIS para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -japanese -\series default -, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en -\family sans -Japonés -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japonés -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(no-CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(SJIS) código SJIS para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -japanese -\series default -, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en -\family sans -Japonés -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Thai -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(TIS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -620-0) para thai -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Turco -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-9) (latin 5) para turco, es como el código ISO-8859-1 en el que las - letras islandesas son reemplazadas por letras turcas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) Unicode utf8 con el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (para los idiomas chino, japonés y coreano) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTeX) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) Unicode utf8 para usar con -\family sans -XeTeX -\family default - y -\family sans -LuaTeX -\family default -, que emplea Unicode directamente, sin la ayuda del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -inputenc -\series default -. - LyX selecciona automáticamente esta codificación si se exporta o se ve - con XeTeX o LuaTeX. - Normalmente no hace falta establecer manualmente esta codificación. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ucs-extendido) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8x) Unicode utf8 basado en el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -ucs -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! ucs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (global, incluyendo latín, griego, cirílico y guiones CJK). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) Unicode utf8 basado en el paquete LaTeX -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Actualmente sólo se soporta un rango limitado de caracteres (principalmente - para escritos en latín) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por último, el diálogo permite seleccionar un paquete de idioma específico - para el documento actual. - Véase -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand formatted -reference "sub:Idioma" - -\end_inset - - para más información sobre paquetes de idioma. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Colores -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! Texto principal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! Fondo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí puede cambiar el color para el texto principal (por omisión: negro) - y para las notas resaltadas en gris (por omisión: gris claro). - El botón -\family sans -Reiniciar -\family default - retorna los colores predeterminados. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -También puedes cambiar el color de fondo de las páginas (por omisión: blanco) - y de los marcos (por omisión: rojo). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Los colores no se muestran en LyX sino en la salida. - Esta nota Resaltado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -gris se ve azul en la salida. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nota, si cambias el color del texto principal y usas la opción -\family sans -Enlaces coloreados -\family default - en las -\family sans -Propiedades -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -PDF -\family default - de la configuración del documento, probablemente debas cambiar el color - de los enlaces en -\family sans -Opciones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -adicionales d -\family default -e -\family sans -Propiedades -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -PDF -\family default -. - Por ejemplo, la opción -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -linkcolor=black -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -establece negro para el color de los enlaces. - Para más información, véase el manual del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los colores del texto y de fondo se pueden establecer para cada página individua -lmente usando los siguientes comandos en código TeX detrás de un salto de - página forzado: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Para el color de la página: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -pagecolor{nombre de color} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Para el color del texto: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -color{nombre de color} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El nombre del color puede ser aquí uno de estos: -\series bold -black -\series default -, -\series bold -blue -\series default -, -\series bold -cyan -\series default -, -\series bold -green -\series default -, -\series bold -magenta -\series default -, -\series bold -red -\series default -, -\series bold -white -\series default -, -\series bold -yellow -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Si has cambiado el color de un texto o fondo, puedes usarlo bajo los nombres - siguientes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Para el color de la página: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -page_backgroundcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Para el color del texto: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -document_fontcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Para el fondo de los marcos: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -shadecolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Para el texto de notas Resaltado en gris: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -note_fontcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para la definición y uso de colores personalizados, véase la sección -\emph on -Celdas coloreadas -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Numeración e IG -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta opción permite ajustar la profundidad de numeración de los encabezados - de sección como se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Profundidad-de-numeración" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Bibliografía -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí se elige el estilo de las citas bibliográficas usando los paquetes - LaTeX -\series bold -natbib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! natbib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - o -\series bold -jurabib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! jurabib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, se pueden habilitar bibliografías subdivididas usando el paquete LaTeX - -\series bold -bibtopic -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! bibtopic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - y se puede personalizar la generación de la bibliografía en un documento - dado. - Hay una descripción de estas funciones en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliografía" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Índices -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí se puede personalizar la forma en que se genera el índice del documento - y definir índices adicionales. - Véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Indice-alfabético" - -\end_inset - - para los detalles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Propiedades PDF -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Propiedades-PDF" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Opciones para ecuaciones -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Permite escoger si habilitar o no los paquetes LaTeX para matemáticas -\family sans - -\family default -\series bold -amsmath -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! amsmath -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\series bold -esint -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! esint -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\series bold -mathdots -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! mathdots -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - y -\series bold -mhchem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! mhchem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, o si usarlos automáticamente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -amsmath -\series bold - -\series default -es necesario para numerosas estructuras; si recibes mensajes de error en - ecuaciones comprueba que has habilitado el uso de AMS. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -esint se usa para ciertos caracteres en integrales, véase -\emph on -Operadores grandes -\emph default - en el manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mathdots para escribir diversos grupos de puntos, véase -\emph on -Puntos -\emph default - en el manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mhchem para escribir ecuaciones químicas, véase -\emph on -Símbolos y ecuaciones químicas -\emph default - en el manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Posición de flotantes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las opciones de colocación de flotantes se describen en la sección -\emph on -Colocación de flotantes -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Listado de programa -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La configuración de listados se explica en el capítulo -\emph on -Listado de programa -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Objetos insertados -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Marcas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí se pueden elegir los símbolos para las marcas de los distintos niveles - del entorno de lista -\family sans -Enumeración* -\family default -, que se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Enumeración*" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Ramas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se explican en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Ramas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Salidas -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Salidas" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí puedes definir ciertos ajustes para la salida del documento actual: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Formato -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -salida -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -predeterminado: El formato a utilizar cuando pulsas -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Ver -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Actualizar -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Ver documento maestro -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Actualizar documento maestro -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - en el menú -\family sans -Ver -\family default - o en la barra de herramientas. - El valor predefinido se establece en -\family sans -Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Preferencias\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Gestión de archivos\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formatos de archivo -\family default -, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sincronizar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -con -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -salida opción para el menú -\family sans -Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Búsqueda directa -\family default -. - Para una descripción detallada véase -\emph on -Búsqueda inversa DVI/PDF -\emph default - en el manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Opciones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -salida -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -XHTML funciones para el formato de exportación -\family sans -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -XHTML -\family default -. - -\family sans -XHTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.1 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -estricto -\family default - garantiza que la salida sigue el estándar de la version -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.1 de XHTML. - Las distintas opciones de -\family sans -Salida de ecuaciones -\family default - se describen en la sección -\emph on -Ecuaciones en XHTML -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. - La escala permite ajustar el tamaño de las ecuaciones en la salida. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Preámbulo LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Contiene un amplio campo de texto en el que se pueden introducir comandos - para cargar paquetes especiales de LaTeX o para (re)definir comandos LaTeX. - El preámbulo es algo para expertos en LaTeX. - No deberías introducir nada aquí hasta que no sepas exactamente lo que - haces. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" - -\end_inset - - hay una introducción a la sintaxis de LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -El diálogo Preferencias -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cap:Diálogo-preferencias" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Preferencias -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El diálogo Preferencias se abre con el menú -\family sans -Herramientas -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Preferencias -\family default -. - Contiene diversos submenús que se explican a continuación. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Apariencia -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Interfaz de usuario -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Archivo de la interfaz de usuario -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Personalización ! de barras de herramientas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Personalización ! de menús -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El aspecto de los menús y de las barras de herramientas depende del archivo - de interfaz de usuario ( -\family typewriter -ui -\family default -) elegido. - Es un archivo de texto con una lista de los menús y de las barras de herramient -as. - -\lang english -The file -\emph on -default.ui -\emph default - loads three files -\lang spanish -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdmenus.inc -\lang english -specifies the menu entries for the standard menus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdcontext.inc -\lang english -specifies the menu entries in popup context menus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdtoolbars.inc -\shape italic - -\emph on -\lang english -specifies the toolbar buttons -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para crear tus propios formatos de menú y de barras de herramientas comienza - con una copia de estos archivos y edita las entradas. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La sintaxis de los archivos .inc es sencilla. - Las entradas -\family sans -Menubar -\family default -, -\family sans -Menu -\family default - y -\family sans -Toolbar -\family default - deben acabar con un -\family typewriter -End -\family default - explícito. - Pueden contener -\family sans -Submenus -\family default -, -\family sans -Items -\family default -, -\family sans -OptItems -\family default -, -\family sans -Separators -\family default -, -\family sans -Icons -\family default - y en el caso del Menu -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -file_lastfiles -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, una entrada -\family sans -Lastfiles -\family default -. - La sintaxis de estas entradas es: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Item "menu -\series default -o -\series bold - button name" "LyX-function" -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las funciones de LyX se listan en el menú -\family sans -Ayuda\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Funciones de Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default -. -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un ejemplo: Si usas con frecuencia el menú -\family sans -Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Marcadores -\family default - y quieres aumentar a seis el número de marcadores disponibles, añade esta - línea: -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Item "Guardar marcador 6" "bookmark-save 6" -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - -en la sección -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -navigate_bookmarks -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\emph on - -\emph default -del archivo -\emph on -stdmenus.inc -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con -\family sans -\lang english -Icon -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Set -\family default -\lang spanish - puedes cambiar el aspecto de los botones de las barras de herramientas - de LyX. - Las colecciones de iconos disponibles actualmente se muestran en -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "esta imagen" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ayuda automática -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Habilitar los recuadros emergentes en el área de trabajo principal -\family default - hace que se muestre el contenido de los recuadros insertados cerrados, - como notas al pie o entradas del índice alfabético. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Sesión -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con la opción -\family sans -Restaurar formatos y geometrías de la ventana, -\family default - la ventana principal de LyX se abrirá con el tamaño y diseño que tenía - en la última sesión. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Restaurar posiciones del cursor -\family default - hace que al abrir un archivo el cursor se coloque en la posición que tenía - cuando se cerró el archivo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Cargar los archivos abiertos de la última sesión -\family default - hace que se abran todos los archivos que estuvieran abiertos en la última - sesión de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El botón -\family sans -Limpiar la información de todas las sesiones -\family default - elimina la información de sesiones previas de LyX (posiciones del cursor, - nombres de archivos recientes, etc.). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Documentos -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Copias-de-seguridad" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Copias de seguridad -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Hacer copias de seguridad de los documentos originales al guardar -\family default -crea una copia de seguridad del archivo en el estado en que se abrió o se - guardó la última vez. - Se guarda en la -\family sans -Copias de seguridad -\family default - (véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rutas" - -\end_inset - -) o en la misma carpeta del documento -\lang english -if no -\lang spanish - -\family sans -Copias de seguridad -\family default - -\lang english -is specified -\lang spanish -. - Se guarda en la misma carpeta del documento o en el directorio -\family sans -Copias de seguridad -\family default -, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rutas" - -\end_inset - -. - La copia de seguridad tiene la extensión -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -.lyx~ -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si está marcada la opción -\family sans -Hacer copias de seguridad cada -\family default - puedes especificar el intervalo de tiempo entre copias de seguridad. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Guardar los documentos comprimidos por omisión -\family default - guarda siempre los archivos en formato comprimido. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Documentos recientes -\family default - es el número de últimos archivos abiertos que LyX mostrará en el menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Abrir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -reciente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si no se usa la opción -\family sans -Abrir documentos en pestañas -\family default - cada archivo se abrirá en su propia nueva ventana de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Instancia única -\family default - solo está activa si se ha especificado una tubería LyXServer. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rutas" - -\end_inset - - para información sobre tuberías LyXServer. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - En ese caso, los documentos se abrirán en la misma sesión actual de LyX. - De lo contrario, para cada archivo se crea una nueva instancia de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con la opción -\family sans -Botón único para cerrar pestañas -\family default - se mostrará solo un botón ( -\family sans - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/closetab.png - scale 75 - -\end_inset - - -\family default -) en el lado derecho de la barra de pestañas para cerrarlas. - De lo contrario, cada pestaña de documento tendrá su botón de cierre. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - la última opción requiere reiniciar LyX para que el cambio funcione. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tipografías de pantalla -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tipografías ! en pantalla -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Tipografías-en-pantalla" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Son las tipografías usadas para mostrar los documentos en la pantalla. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default -Se refiere a las tipografías mostradas en la -\emph on -pantalla -\emph default - de LyX, exclusivamente. - Las tipografías que aparecerán en el documento de -\emph on -salida -\emph default - son totalmente independientes de éstas y se determinan en el menú -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Por omisión, LyX usa -\family typewriter -Times -\family default - como tipo romano (serif), -\family typewriter -Arial -\family default - o -\family typewriter -Helvetica -\family default - (depende del sistema) como tipografía sans serif, y -\family typewriter -Courier -\family default - como tipo máquina de escribir. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El tamaño de letra se puede cambiar con -\family sans -Zoom. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Los tamaños de las tipografías se expresan como altura del carácter en puntos. - 72.27 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -puntos equivalen a 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pulgada, véase el Apéndice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tipografía-del-documento" - -\end_inset - -. - Los tamaños predeterminados corresponden a un tamaño de 10 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -puntos. - El tamaño de la tipografía se explica con detalle en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Tipografía-del-documento" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con la opción -\family sans -Usar Pixmap Cache para acelerar el rendimiento -\family default - marcada, LyX necesita refrescar la pantalla con menor frecuencia. - Esto conlleva un mejor rendimiento, especialmente en sistemas lentos. - Por otra parte, los caracteres podrían mostrarse más borrosos. - Así que activar o no esta opción depende de si prefieres velocidad o estética. - Esta opción sólo está disponible en Mac -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -OS o Windows. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Colores -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! Pantalla de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Color ! Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí puedes cambiar todos los colores que se ven en LyX. - Elige una opción de la lista y usa el botón -\family sans -Cambiar -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Con la opción -\family sans -Usar colores del sistema -\family default -, se usará el esquema de colores del SO o del gestor de ventanas. - En este caso no aparecen en la lista los colores de -\family sans -cursor -\family default -, -\family sans -selección -\family default -, -\family sans -línea de cuadro -\family default -, -\family sans -texto -\family default -, -\family sans -etiqueta URL -\family default - y -\family sans -texto URL. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Visualización -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Configuración ! Visualización -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta opción permite decidir si se mostrarán los gráficos en la pantalla - de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -El botón -\family sans -Vista -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -preliminar -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -inmediata -\family default - sirve para habilitar, o no, la vista en LyX de ciertas partes del documento. - Se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Vista-preliminar-inmediata" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Marcar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -final -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -párrafos -\family default - muestra un calderón (¶) al final de cada párrafo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Edición -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Edición -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Control -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Edición -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -El cursor sigue a la barra de desplazamiento -\family default - hace que el cursor se muestre siempre en la parte del documento que está - en pantalla cuando esta se desliza. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Anchura del cursor (pixels) -\family default - permite ajustar el grosor del mismo. - Un valor cero establece para el grosor del cursor un valor relativo al - zoom establecido para la tipografía en pantalla. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Deslizar por debajo del final del documento -\family default - es evidente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En LyX se puede saltar de palabra en palabra con las teclas -\family sans -Ctrl+flecha -\family default -. - La opción -\family sans -Usar estilo Mac\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\family default - hace que el cursor salte del final de una palabra al final de la siguiente. - Normalmente, el cursor salta de inicio a inicio de palabra. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Ordenar entornos alfabéticamente -\family default - ordena los entornos de párrafo en el menú desplegable. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La opción -\family sans -Agrupar entornos por categorías -\family default - agrupa las entradas del menú desplegable de los entornos de párrafo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Las opciones de edición de macros de ecuación determina el estilo de edición, - véase la sección -\emph on -Macros de ecuaciones -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Ecuaciones -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Pantalla completa -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí puedes determinar qué partes ocultar en el modo pantalla completa. - La opción -\family sans -Limitar anchura del texto -\family default - especifica la anchura del texto en pantalla completa. - De esta manera puedes mostrar el texto más pequeño que la pantalla; el - texto se ve centrado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Atajos de teclado -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Atajos de teclado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Archivos de asociaciones de teclas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -\lang english -Bind File -\family default - specifies the file -\lang spanish - se usa para asociar una función de LyX a una o varias teclas. - Hay varios archivos disponibles para asociaciones de teclas -\family sans -, -\family default -\lang english -among them -\lang spanish -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -cua.bind conjunto típico de asociaciones de teclas en los teclados PC. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -(x)emacs.bind conjunto de asociaciones de teclas usados en el editor -\family sans -(X)Emacs -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mac.bind conjunto de asociaciones de teclas para sistemas -\family sans -Mac -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además hay archivos de asociaciones de teclas para clases especiales de - documentos, como -\shape italic -broadway.bind -\shape default -, y para ciertos idiomas. - El nombre de los archivos para idiomas comienza con el código del idioma. - por ejemplo, «pt» para portugués. - Si usas LyX con determinados idiomas, LyX intentará usar el archivo de - teclas apropiado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Algunos archivos de asociaciones de teclas como -\shape italic -math.bind -\shape default -, son de pequeño alcance. - Si miras al final del archivo -\shape italic -cua.bind -\shape default - verás algunos de aquellos incluidos para mantener la información general - en el archivo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -The field -\family sans -Show -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ke -\bar under -y -\bar default --bindings -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -containing -\family default - allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function - in the selected key binding file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Edición de los atajos de teclado -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Edición-de-los-atajos" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Atajos de teclado ! Edición -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para añadir o modificar asociaciones de teclas puedes usar la lista del - diálogo que recoge todas las funciones de LyX y sus correspondientes teclas. - Para encontrar fácilmente funciones están agrupadas por categorías y el - diálogo suministra el campo -\family sans -Mostrar asociaciones que contienen -\family default -:, en el que puedes insertar una clave para una función que quieras editar. - Escribe por ejemplo como clave «paste» y obtendrás las cuatro combinaciones - que hay para las tres funciones que contienen «paste» en su nombre. - Como puedes ver, una función puede tener más de una combinación. - Todas las funciones de LyX se listan además en el archivo -\emph on -LyX Functions -\emph default - disponible en el menú -\family sans -Ayuda -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para añadir, por ejemplo, el atajo -\family sans -Alt+Q -\family default - para la función -\family sans -textstyle-apply -\family default -, selecciona la función y pulsa el botón -\family sans -Modificar -\family default -. - Surge un diálogo en el que puedes añadir el atajo pulsando las teclas correspon -dientes, en este caso Alt+Q. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -De igual manera se modifica una combinación ya existente. - -\lang english -You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX - Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the - different function names as a semicolon separated list. - LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document - part. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -If you don't like a a particular shortcut, you can remove it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alternativamente puedes modificar combinaciones de teclas editando los archivos - -\emph on -.bind -\emph default - con un editor de texto. - La sintaxis de las entradas es: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -bind -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -key combination -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -LyX-function -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\series default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Teclado / Ratón -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Teclado/Ratón" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Teclado ! Mapas de -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Configuración ! Mapa de teclado -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalmente la configuración del teclado se hace en el sistema operativo. - Para casos en los que no es posible, LyX suministra mapas de teclado. - Si tienes, por ejemplo, un teclado checo pero quieres escribir en él como - en un teclado rumano, puedes -\lang english -enable -\family sans -Use -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -keyboard -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -map -\family default - and select -\lang spanish - el mapa de teclado -\shape italic -romanian.kmap -\shape default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -You can specify a -\family sans -First -\family default - and a -\family sans -Second -\family default - keyboard map and, if you use the -\emph on -cua -\emph default - bindings, you can select the first and second with -\lang spanish - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-primary" -\end_inset - - y -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-secondary" -\end_inset - - -\lang english -respectively or toggle between them with -\lang spanish - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-toggle" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Los mapas de teclado son provisionales y no funcionan en todos los sistemas. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además de esto, puedes determinar aquí la -\family sans -Velocidad de desplazamiento de la rueda -\family default - del ratón. - El valor estándar es 1.0, valores mayores aumentan la velocidad y menores - la disminuyen. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la sección -\family sans -Zoom de deslizamiento de la rueda -\family default - se puede elegir una tecla para hacer zoom. - Con esta tecla pulsada, al girar la rueda del ratón varía el tamaño del - texto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Autocompletar -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La finalización de entradas se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Finalización-de-entradas/palabras" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Rutas -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Rutas" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Rutas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Configuración ! Directorios -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during - installation. - But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Directorio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -trabajo Es el directorio de trabajo de LyX. - El directorio predeterminado cuando haces -\family sans -Abrir -\family default -, -\family sans -Guardar -\family default - o -\family sans -Guardar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -como -\family default - con un archivo. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Plantillas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -documento Directorio que contiene las plantillas del menú -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nuevo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -desde -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -plantilla. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Archivos -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ejemplo Este directorio se abrirá al pulsar el botón -\family sans -Ejemplos -\family default - del diálogo -\family sans -Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Abrir -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - El botón -\family sans -Ejemplos -\family default - no existe en los sistemas Mac OS o Windows. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Copias -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -seguridad -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documentos ! Copias de seguridad -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Directorio donde se guardarán las copias de seguridad. - Si este campo está en blanco pero las copias de seguridad están habilitadas, - como se describe en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Copias-de-seguridad" - -\end_inset - -, éstas se guardarán en el -\family sans -Directorio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -trabajo -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Los archivos de seguridad tienen la extensión «.lyx~». -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Tubería -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -XServer Aquí puedes introducir el nombre de una tubería de UNIX. - Esta tubería se emplea para enviar datos desde programas externos a LyX. -\lang ngerman - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -\lang spanish -Ejemplo: -\series default - Añade una base de datos BibTeX -\emph on -test.bib -\emph default - al documento. - Puedes editar este archivo con el programa -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default -. - En las preferencias de -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default -, bajo -\family sans -External -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -programs -\family default -, tienes que usar la misma tubería Unix que en LyX. - Si quieres obtener una entrada de la base de datos como cita, selecciónala - en -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - y haz clic sobre el símbolo LyX. - La entrada se insertará ahora como cita en la posición actual del cursor - en el archivo LyX. - -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - y LyX deben ejecutarse al mismo tiempo, evidentemente. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -La tubería también se usa para la opción -\family sans -Instancia única -\family default - , véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Copias-de-seguridad" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Para usar LyXServer-Pipe en Windows hay que usar este nombre: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash - -\backslash -. -\backslash -pipe -\backslash -lyxpipe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Directorio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -temporal Directorio en el que se guardarán los archivos temporales generados - por LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Directorio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sinónimos Directorio en el que se localizan los diccionarios de sinónimos. - Solo es preciso indicarlo si el diccionario no funciona o si se desea usar - diccionarios alternativos o personalizados. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Directorio -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -hunspell Directorio del programa de revisión ortográfica -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default -. - Solo es preciso especificarlo si al usar -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - la corrección ortográfica no funcionara, o si deseas usar diccionarios - alternativos. - Para LyX en Windows -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - es el único disponible y debería funcionar sin tener que poner el directorio. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Prefijo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -PATH Este campo puede contener una lista de rutas («paths») a programas - externos. - Cuando LyX necesita usar uno de ellos, busca su ubicación en el sistema - en esta lista. - La lista de rutas es automáticamente configurada en sistemas Mac y Windows, - de modo que normalmente no debes modificarla. - En sistemas Unix/Linux, la lista de rutas debe ponerse en el caso de querer - usar programas externos que no estén en la rutas reconocidas por la variable - $PATH. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Prefijo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TEXINPUTS La variable de entorno TEXINPUTS permite incluir archivos externos - en un documento LyX vía comandos en código TeX o en el preámbulo LaTeX. - El prefijo incluye por omisión el directorio del documento (representado - por un '.'). - El prefijo se puede establecer como una lista de rutas separadas por el - separador habitual del SO (':' en sistemas UNIX y ';' en Windows). - Si los archivos son incluidos por LaTeX, las rutas listadas en el prefijo - TEXINPUTS serán escaneadas por los archivos de entrada. - Cualquier ruta no absoluta listada en el prefijo TEXINPUTS se considera - relativa al directorio del documento LyX. - Es recomendable incluir siempre el '.' como una de las rutas, de lo contrario - la compilación puede fallar en determinados documentos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Identidad -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En este campo puedes poner tu nombre y correo electrónico. - Esta identidad se usará cuando habilites el seguimiento de cambios, explicado - en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Seguimiento-de-cambios" - -\end_inset - -, para identificar tus cambios en el documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Configuración del idioma -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Idioma !Configuración -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Configuración ! Idioma -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Idioma -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Idioma" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Idioma -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -interfaz -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -usuario Aquí puedes seleccionar el idioma de los menús de LyX. - El estado actual de las traducciones se puede consultar en: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Paquete -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Idiom -\family default -a determina qué paquete LaTeX se debería cargar para manejar características - de los idiomas. - Características como patrones de división de palabras apropiados, traducción - de fechas y de cadenas de texto como -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Chapter -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - o -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Table -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - El paquete de idiomas más ampliamente usado es -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, que es el predeterminado en LaTeX clásico. - Sin embargo, motores de tipografía más recientes, como XeTeX y LuaTeX, - incorporan el paquete de idiomas alternativo -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - que es más adecuado para el soporte multi-guión de estos motores. - Además, también hay paquetes específicos para idiomas no cubiertos por - babel. - Las opciones disponibles se describen en la sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Idioma" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -inicial Cuando hace falta algún paquete LaTeX especial para escribir en - determinado idioma, aquí puedes poner el comando para cargarlo. - Un ejemplo es el comando -\series bold - -\backslash -begin{arabtext} -\family sans -\series default - -\family default -para cargar el paquete -\series bold -ArabTeX -\series default - (véase -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - -), necesario para escribir en árabe. - -\series bold - -\series default -Por omisión, es el comando de -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\series bold - -\backslash -selectlanguage{$$lang} -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -final El correspondiente a -\family sans -Comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -inicial -\family default -. - Algunos paquetes, como el predeterminado, no tienen comando para finalizar - porque el comando de inicio habilita o no el paquete. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Separador -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -decimal -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -predeterminado Define el símbolo por omisión para separar decimales en cuadros - (alineación del separador decimal). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Establecer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -idioma -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -globalmente Si se marca esta opción, los idiomas usados en el documento - se añadirán como opciones a la clase de documento, para que puedan usarse - por todos los paquetes LaTeX. - Si no, sólo serán utilizados como opciones para -\series bold -babel -\series default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Auto-iniciar Con esta opción los documentos comienzan con el idioma de documento - elegido. - Sin ella, el -\family sans -Comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -inicial -\family default - se establece explícitamente al inicio del documento en la salida de LaTeX. - Esto asegura que se usa el idioma correcto cuando pongas un -\family sans - Comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -inicial -\family default - distinto al predeterminado. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Auto-terminar Correspondiente a -\family sans -Auto-iniciar. - -\family default -Si no está marcado, el -\family sans -Comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -final -\family default - se establece al final del documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Marcar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -idiomas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -extranjeros El texto marcado con estilo de idioma distinto al del documento - se subraya en azul. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Soporte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -para -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -idioma -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -derecha-izquierda habilita el uso de idiomas que, como el hebreo, el árabe - o el farsi, se escriben de derecha a izquierda. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Movimiento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cursor Cuando se escribe de derecha a izquierda, aquí se puede definir si - las teclas de flecha izquierda y derecha mueven el cursor visualmente a - la izquierda o a la derecha, respectivamente, o lógicamente. - Movimiento lógico significa que el cursor se mueve a la izquierda cuando - pulsas la flecha derecha estando el cursor dentro de texto en un idioma - derecha-izquierda. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Corrector ortográfico -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Se explica en la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Corrector-ortográfico" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Salidas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -General -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Longitud -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -línea -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -salida -\family default - establece el número máximo de caracteres impresos en cada línea, cuando - el archivo se exporta como texto simple. - Si se pone valor 0, todo el texto se imprimirá en una sola línea sin fin. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Formato -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fecha -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fecha, formato de -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Configuración ! Formato de fecha -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - El formato de la fecha puede ser uno, o una mezcla, de los listados en: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Por ejemplo, el formato -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -%d/%m/%y -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -imprime la fecha como día/mes/año. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sobrescribir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -al -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -exportar Establece lo que está permitido sobrescribir al exportar el documento. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Búsqueda -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directa Comandos a usar para el menú -\family sans -Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Búsqueda directa -\family default -. - Para una descripción detallada véase -\emph on -Búsqueda inversa DVI/PDF -\emph default - en el manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Impresora -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Impresora" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Impresora -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Configuración ! Impresora -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Impresora -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -predeterminada En este campo puedes poner el nombre de tu impresora predetermina -da. - Este nombre se usará cuando se ejecute el -\family sans -Comando de Impresión -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Nota: -\series default - En Windows puedes dejar el campo en blanco porque no tiene efecto. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Impresión -\family default -es el comando que usan LyX -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -LaTeX para imprimir. - En la mayoría de sistemas el comando predeterminado es -\family sans -dvips -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Opciones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -impresión En la documentación del programa que suministra el -\family sans -Comando de impresión -\family default - que se use -\family sans - -\family default -puedes encontrar la explicación de las opciones que pueden configurarse - en estos campos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Adaptar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -salida -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -a -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -impresora Esta opción sólo funciona si el -\family sans -Comando de Impresión -\family default - es « -\family sans -dvips -\family default -». - Activa un archivo de configuración para dvips. - Esta opción es para expertos en dvips. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-Configuración" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Configuración ! LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Codificación -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X Esta es la codificación predeterminada de la tipografía del documento, - -\family sans -T1 -\family default -, que cubre los idiomas y símbolos occidentales. - -\family sans -T2A -\family default -, -\family sans -T2B -\family default -, -\family sans -T2C -\family default -, -\family sans -LCY -\family default -, y -\family sans -X2 -\family default -son para cirílico. - Se pueden combinar codificaciones, como -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -T1, T2B -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Normalmente la codificación se carga automáticamente cuando LyX configura - los paquetes de idioma. - Por tanto no hay por qué cambiarla. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Tamaño -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -predeterminado -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -papel Este será el tamaño del papel para documentos nuevos. - El valor -\family sans -Predeterminado -\family default -depende de la configuración del sistema LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Opciones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tamaño -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -del -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -papel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -para -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -el -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -visor -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -DVI Solo tienen efecto para el programa visor de DVI -\family sans -xdvi -\family default -; consulta su manual para saber más. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además, aquí puedes especificar opciones y comandos con parámetros para - las procesadores listadas. - Pero antes de cambiar algo, es muy recomendable leer los manuales de las - aplicaciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Generación -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bibliografía Parámetros para generar la bibliografía; véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bases-datos-bibliográficos" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Generación -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -índice Parámetros para generar el índice, véase la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Programas-para-índice" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -para -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nomenclatura Comando para el programa que genera la nomenclatura, véase - la sección -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Programa-para-la-nomenclatura" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Comando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -CheckTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X El programa -\family sans -CheckTeX -\family default -se explica en la sección -\emph on -Comprobar TeX -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Características adicionales -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además están las opciones: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Usar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -rutas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -estilo -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Windows -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -archivos -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTeX Utiliza rutas con la notación Windows, es decir, se emplea « -\backslash -» en vez de «/» para separar carpetas. - Esta opción está marcada por omisión cuando se usa LyX en Windows. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Rutas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Configuración ! Rutas -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Reiniciar -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -opciones -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -clase -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cuando -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -clase -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -documento -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cambie Si se cambia la clase de documento se eliminan todas las -\family sans -\lang english -Class options -\family default -\lang spanish - establecidas manualmente en el diálogo -\family sans -Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Class -\family default -\lang spanish -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Gestión de archivos -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gestión de archivos -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Convertidores -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Convertidores" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Convertidores -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí está la lista de los comandos de los programas para convertir archivos - de un formato a otro. - Puedes modificar los convertidores o configurar otros nuevos. - Para modificar un convertidor lo seleccionas, cambias las entradas de los - campos -\family sans -Convertidor -\family default - y/o -\family sans -Indicador adicional -\family default -, y pulsas el botón -\family sans -Modificar -\family default -. - Para crear un convertidor nuevo, selecciona uno existente, cambia los formatos - en las listas desplegables, modifica el campo -\family sans -Convertidor -\family default -, y pulsa -\family sans -Añadir -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si se activa la opción -\family sans -Caché del convertidor -\family default -, las conversiones se conservarán durante el tiempo especificado en -\family sans -Tiempo máximo (en días) -\family default -. - Esto significa que las imágenes no necesitan ser convertidas de nuevo al - reabrir el documento, porque se usarán las almacenadas en la caché. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la sección -\emph on -Convertidores -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default - encontrarás más información sobre convertidores, como opciones que se pueden - poner en su definición. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formatos de archivo -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formatos de archivo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Copiadores -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aquí está la lista de los formatos de archivo que LyX puede manejar. - Puedes modificar los programas visor y editor para determinados formatos. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Además, puedes definir el -\family sans -Formato de salida predeterminado -\family default - a utilizar cuando pulses -\family sans -Ver, Actualizar, Ver documento maestro -\family default - o -\family sans -Actualizar documento maestro -\family default - en el menú Editar o en la barra de herramientas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En la sección -\emph on -Formatos -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default - encontrarás más información sobre formatos y sus opciones. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Puesto que todas las conversiones de un formato a otro tienen lugar en el - directorio temporal de LyX, a veces es preciso modificar un archivo antes - de copiarlo al directorio temporal, con el fin de que la conversión pueda - llevarse a cabo. - Esto se hace especificando un -\family sans -Copiador -\family default -. - En la sección -\emph on -Copiadores -\emph default - del manual -\emph on -Personalización -\emph default - hay más información sobre esto. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Unidades disponibles en LyX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unidades -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cap:Unidades-disponibles" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Para comprender las unidades utilizadas en este manual, el cuadro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Unidades" - -\end_inset - - describe todas las unidades disponibles en LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Unidades" - -\end_inset - -Unidades -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -unidad -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -nombre/descripción -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -milímetro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -centímetro -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -in -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pulgada -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -punto (72.27 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pica (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pc = 12 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -sp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -punto escalado (65536 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -sp = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -bp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -punto grande (72 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -bp = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -dd -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -didot (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -dd -\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ -\end_inset - - 0.376 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mm) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cicero (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cc = 12 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -dd) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -escala -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% del tamaño original de la imagen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -texto -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% del ancho de texto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -columna -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% del ancho de columna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -página -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% del ancho de página -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -línea -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% del ancho de línea -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -alt_texto -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% de altura de texto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -alt_página -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -% de altura de página -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -altura de la letra -\emph on -x -\emph default - en la tipografía actual -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ancho de la letra -\emph on -M -\emph default - en la tipografía actual -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mu -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -unidad matemática (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mu = 1/18 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Créditos -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cap:Créditos" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La documentación es un esfuerzo de colaboración de muchas personas (¡y os - animamos a que participéis!). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Alejandro Aguilar Sierra -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Amir Karger -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -David Johnson -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Hartmut Haase -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Ignacio García -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Ivan Schreter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -John Raithel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -John Weiss -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Lars Gullik Bjønnes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Matthias Ettrich -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Matthias Zenker -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Rich Fields -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Pascal André -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Paul Evans -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Paul Russel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Robin Socha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Uwe Stöhr -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -El Equipo LyX: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - - La bibliografía de la página siguiente se ha generado con el entorno -\family sans -Bibliografía -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -label "Créditos" -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - -El Equipo Lyx: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Créditos" -target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org/Credits -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens: -\emph on -The LaTeX Companion Second Edition. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 2004 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. - Daly: -\emph on -A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 2003 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexbook" - -\end_inset - -Leslie Lamport: -\emph on -LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "texbook" - -\end_inset - -Donald E. - Knuth. - -\emph on -The TeXbook. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 1984 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -The TeX Catalogue: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "LaTeXFAQ" - -\end_inset - -LaTeX FAQ: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" - -\end_inset - - del programa -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX-2" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" - -\end_inset - - acerca de cómo usar el programa -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "makeindex" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" - -\end_inset - - del programa -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "xindy" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" - -\end_inset - - del programa -\family sans -xindy -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" - -\end_inset - - de los paquetes AMS: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "caption" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf" - -\end_inset - - del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" - -\end_inset - - del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" - -\end_inset - - del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" - -\end_inset - - del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" - -\end_inset - - del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "prettyref" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" - -\end_inset - - del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "refstyle" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" - -\end_inset - - del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "tipa" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentación" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" - -\end_inset - - del paquete LaTeX -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX, paquetes ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para árabe: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Armenian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para armenio: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para idiomas cirílicos: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Farsi" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para farsi: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Hebrew" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para hebreo: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Japanese" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para japonés: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Latvian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para letón: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para lituano: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Mongolian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para mongol: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - cómo configurar LyX para vietnamita: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "NewInLyX20" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" - -\end_inset - - sobre características nuevas en -\family sans -LyX 2.0 -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "spanish" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Página web" -target "http://www.tex-tipografia.com/spanish.html" - -\end_inset - - del estilo -\family sans -spanish -\family default -del paquete -\series bold -babel -\series default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.tex-tipografia.com/spanish.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -let -\backslash -mybibname -\backslash -bibname -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -bibname}{ -\backslash -mybibname -\backslash -; 2} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -El comando -\series bold - -\backslash -bibname -\series default - es el nombre de la bibliografía en el idioma del documento actual. - Aquí se ha redefinido con el número 2 al final para declarar que la siguiente - bibliografía es la segunda: -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex -LatexCommand bibtex -bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs" -options "../biblio/alphadin" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Esta bibliografía se ha generado a partir de una base de datos BibTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print -LatexCommand printnomenclature -set_width "auto" - -\end_inset - - -\series default - -\begin_inset CommandInset index_print -LatexCommand printindex -type "idx" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_body -\end_document +#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ +\lyxformat 413 +\begin_document +\begin_header +\textclass scrbook +\begin_preamble +% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!! +% +% This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints +% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble, +% parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you +% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact +% the documentation team +% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org + +\usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle +\ifpdf % if pdflatex is used + + % set fonts for nicer pdf view + \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} + +\fi % end if pdflatex is used + +% for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float +\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} + +% the pages of the TOC is numbered roman +% and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added +\let\myTOC\tableofcontents +\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% + \frontmatter + \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} + \myTOC + \mainmatter } + +% define a short command for \textvisiblespace +\newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace} + +% macro for italic page numbers in the index +\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} + +% for customized page headers/footers +% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document +\usepackage{fancyhdr} +% change header rule width +\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} + +% workaround for a makeindex bug, +% see sec. "Index Entry Order" +% only uncomment this when you are using makindex +%\let\OrgIndex\index +%\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}} +\end_preamble +\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading +\use_default_options false +\begin_modules +customHeadersFooters +enumitem +\end_modules +\maintain_unincluded_children false +\language spanish +\language_package default +\inputencoding auto +\fontencoding global +\font_roman default +\font_sans default +\font_typewriter default +\font_default_family default +\use_non_tex_fonts false +\font_sc false +\font_osf false +\font_sf_scale 100 +\font_tt_scale 100 + +\graphics default +\default_output_format default +\output_sync 0 +\bibtex_command default +\index_command default +\paperfontsize 12 +\spacing single +\use_hyperref true +\pdf_title "Guía del usuario de LyX" +\pdf_author "LyX Team" +\pdf_subject "LyX" +\pdf_keywords "LyX" +\pdf_bookmarks true +\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true +\pdf_bookmarksopen false +\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 +\pdf_breaklinks false +\pdf_pdfborder false +\pdf_colorlinks true +\pdf_backref false +\pdf_pdfusetitle false +\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" +\papersize default +\use_geometry false +\use_amsmath 1 +\use_esint 1 +\use_mhchem 1 +\use_mathdots 1 +\cite_engine basic +\use_bibtopic false +\use_indices false +\paperorientation portrait +\suppress_date false +\use_refstyle 0 +\notefontcolor #0000ff +\branch Pregunta +\selected 1 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #00ff00 +\end_branch +\branch Respuesta +\selected 0 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #aa55ff +\end_branch +\index Índice +\shortcut idx +\color #008000 +\end_index +\secnumdepth 3 +\tocdepth 2 +\paragraph_separation indent +\paragraph_indentation default +\quotes_language french +\papercolumns 1 +\papersides 2 +\paperpagestyle default +\tracking_changes false +\output_changes false +\html_math_output 0 +\html_css_as_file 0 +\html_be_strict true +\end_header + +\begin_body + +\begin_layout Title +Guía del usuario de LyX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Author +por el Equipo LyX +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +Si tienes comentarios o correcciones, por favor, escribe a la lista de correo + de Documentación de LyX: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Versión 2.0.x +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset toc +LatexCommand tableofcontents + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Para empezar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +¿Qué es LyX? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX es un sistema para confeccionar documentos. + Es una herramienta para producir preciosos manuscritos, libros para publicar, + cartas comerciales y proyectos, e incluso poesía. + Es distinto de la mayoría de otros «procesadores de texto» en el sentido + de que usa el paradigma del lenguaje de diseño como núcleo de su estilo + de edición. + Esto significa que cuando escribes un encabezado de sección, simplemente + lo marcas como «Sección», no es necesario hacer «negrita, tamaño 17 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt, justificado a la izquierda, espacio inferior 5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mm». + LyX se ocupa por ti del formato, así que sólo debes preocuparte de los + conceptos, no de los mecanismos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta filosofía se explica con mucho más detalle en el manual « +\emph on +Introducción +\emph default +». + Si aún no lo has leído, debes hacerlo. + Sí, queremos decir ahora. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La « +\emph on +Introducción +\emph default +» +\emph on + +\emph default +describe otros temas además de la filosofía de LyX: el más importante, el + formato de los manuales. + Si no lo has leído, perderás tiempo navegando por este manual. + La « +\emph on +Introducción +\emph default +» te orientará en la búsqueda de temas de ayuda en los diversos manuales. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Qué aspecto tiene LyX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como la mayoría de aplicaciones, LyX tiene en la parte superior de la ventana + la habitual barra de menús. + Bajo ella, una barra de herramientas con un cuadro desplegable y varios + botones. + Hay, por supuesto, una barra de deslizamiento vertical y un área principal + para editar los documentos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Observa que no hay barra de desplazamiento horizontal. + No es un error ni un descuido, es intencionado. + Cuando lees un libro, esperas que el final de una línea corresponda con + la siguiente. + El texto fluye a las nuevas páginas en vertical, de ahí que sólo haga falta + una barra de deslizamiento vertical. + Hay tres casos en que podrías necesitar una barra de desplazamiento horizontal: + el primero es si hay grandes figuras. + Para evitar que se vean más grandes que la pantalla, usa la opción +\family sans +Escala en pantalla +\family default + en la pestaña +\family sans +Opciones de LaTeX y LyX +\family default + de la configuración de gráficos. + Los otros dos casos son cuadros y ecuaciones más anchas que la ventana + de LyX. + Puedes usar las teclas de flecha para desplazarte horizontalmente por el + cuadro, pero esto todavía no funciona con las ecuaciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para una descripción breve de los menús y botones de la barra de herramientas, + mira en el apéndice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Interfaz-de-usuario" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +AYUDA +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El sistema de ayuda de LyX consta de diversos manuales. + Puedes leer +\emph on +todo +\emph default + su contenido en el propio LyX. + Sólo has de seleccionar el que quieras en el menú +\family sans +Ayuda +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Configuración básica de LyX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Configuración-básica" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Casi todas las características de LyX se pueden configurar mediante el menú + +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferencias +\family default +. +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Preferencias +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + LyX es capaz de explorar el sistema para ver qué programas, clases de documento + de LaTeX y paquetes de LaTeX están disponibles. + A partir de esto proporciona unos valores predeterminados convenientes + a varias configuraciones de las preferencias. + Aunque esta configuración ya se ha hecho al instalar LyX en el sistema, + podría haber algunas cosas que hayas instalado localmente, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nuevas clases de LaTeX, que LyX no encontró cuando se instaló. + Para forzar nuevas exploraciones del sistema, usa +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reconfigurar. +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguración de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Después debes reiniciar LyX para asegurar que los cambios tengan efecto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Configuración de LaTeX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:LaTeX-conf" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es posible editar documentos en LyX sin tener LaTeX instalado, pero no se + podrán generar PDF ni imprimirlos. + No obstante, algunos documentos LyX usan DocBook para procesar la salida, + en ese caso sí se pueden producir PDF y demás, y en todo caso cualquier + documento LyX siempre se puede exportar como texto simple o XHTML. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Algunas clases de documento pueden depender de clases o paquetes específicos + de LaTeX o DocBook. + Dichas clases de documento se pueden usar aunque no estén instalados los + archivos requeridos, pero no se podrán generar todos los tipos de salida. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los paquetes LaTeX que LyX ha encontrado en el sistema se listan en un archivo + accesible desde el menú +\family sans +Ayuda\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Las llaves en código TeX evitan que el término «LaTeX» se imprima con letras + desencajadas. + Más sobre código TeX en la sección +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Código-TeX" + +\end_inset + +, la impresión de nombres propios como LaTeX se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Nombres-Propios-en-LyX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Si faltan paquetes que sean necesarios, deben ser instalados y después + reconfigurar LyX (menú +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reconfigurar +\family default +). +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguración de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Véase la sección 5.1 del manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default + para más información sobre la instalación de paquetes LaTeX adicionales. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Cómo trabajar con LyX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Operaciones básicas con archivos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Operar con archivos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bajo el menú +\family sans +Archivo +\family default + están las operaciones básicas de cualquier procesador de texto y algunas + otras opciones más avanzadas: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Nuevo +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-new" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Nuevo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +desde +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +plantilla +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Abrir +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "file-open" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Abrir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +reciente +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Cerrar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Guardar +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-write" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Guardar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +como +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Revertir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +guardado +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Control +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +versiones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Importar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Exportar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Imprimir +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-write" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Ventana +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nueva +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Cerrar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ventana +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Salir +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Todos hacen prácticamente lo mismo que en cualquier otro procesador de texto, + con una pocas diferencias menores. + El comando +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nuevo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +desde +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +plantilla +\family default + te pide una plantilla para usar como punto de partida. + Al seleccionar una plantilla se establecerán automáticamente ciertas caracterís +ticas de formato para el documento, características que de otra forma necesitarí +as cambiar manualmente. + Las plantillas pueden ser útiles para determinadas clases de documento, + especialmente aquellas para escribir cartas (véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Clases-de-documento" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + No hay «archivo predeterminado» ni documento «Sin título» ni «de inicio». + A menos que indiques a LyX abrir un archivo o crear uno nuevo, este gran + espacio en blanco es sólo eso —un gran espacio en blanco—. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Revertir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +guardado +\family default + y +\family sans +Control +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +versiones +\family default + son útiles si varias personas trabajan en el mismo documento al mismo tiempo. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Si piensas hacer esto, tienes más información en el manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Revertir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +guardado +\family default +recargará el documento desde el disco. + Por supuesto, también puedes usar esta opción si rechazas los cambios realizado +s y quieres volver al último documento guardado. + Con +\family sans +Control +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +versiones +\family default + puedes registrar los cambios que has hecho en el documento para que otras + personas puedan identificarlos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Características básicas de edición +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Edición +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Características-básicas-de-edición" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como la mayoría de los procesadores de texto, LyX puede cortar y pegar bloques + de texto, puede desplazarse por carácter, palabra o pantalla completa, + puede borrar palabras o caracteres individuales. + Las cuatro secciones siguientes tratan las operaciones básicas de edición + en LyX. + Comenzaremos con cortar y pegar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como es de suponer, el menú +\family sans +Editar +\family default + tiene los comandos cortar y pegar, entre otros. + Algunos de ellos son especiales y se tratan en secciones posteriores. + Los comandos básicos son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Cortar +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "cut" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Copiar +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "copy" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Pegar +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "paste" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Pegar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +reciente +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Pegado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +especial +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Encontrar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +y +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +reemplazar +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show findreplace" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los tres primeros son evidentes. + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pegar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +También puedes copiar texto entre LyX y otros programas con cortar, copiar + y pegar. + El submenú +\family sans +Pegar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +reciente +\family default + muestra una lista con los últimos términos copiados. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Pegado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Especial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Texto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +simple +\family default +el texto del portapapeles se inserta como párrafos, de manera que cada salto + de línea del texto inicia un párrafo nuevo. + El menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Pegado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Especial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Texto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +simple, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +líneas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +juntas +\family default + insertará todo el texto del portapapeles como +\emph on +un solo +\emph default + párrafo. + Si en el texto hay una línea en blanco se iniciará un nuevo párrafo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reemplazar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encontrar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +La opción +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Encontrar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +y +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +reemplazar +\family default + abre una ventana de diálogo. + Cuando LyX encuentra una palabra o expresión la selecciona. + Pulsando el botón +\family sans +Reemplazar +\family default + se cambia el texto resaltado con el contenido del campo +\family sans +Reemplazar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +con +\family default +. + Si pulsas el botón +\family sans +Encontrar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +siguiente +\family default + LyX irá a la siguiente aparición de la palabra o expresión buscada. + +\family sans +Reemplazar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +todo +\family default + cambia automáticamente todas las apariciones de la expresión buscada. + La opción +\family sans +Distinguir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mayúsculas +\family default + sirve para que la búsqueda considere las mayúsculas de la expresión a encontrar. + Si se marca esta opción, si queremos encontrar p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. + la palabra « +\family typewriter +Test +\family default +» se ignorará la palabra « +\family typewriter +test +\family default +». + La opción +\family sans +Coincidir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sólo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +palabras +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +completas +\family default +hace que LyX busque solamente palabras completas, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej., si buscamos « +\family typewriter +estrella +\family default +» se ignorarán palabras como « +\family typewriter +estrellado +\family default +». + Además, LyX proporciona una función avanzada +\family sans +Encontrar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +y +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +reemplazar +\family default + que se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Encontrar-avanzado" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cosas como las notas, flotantes, etc., se insertan en recuadros que se pueden + disolver. + Esto significa que el recuadro se elimina y su contenido se deja como texto + normal. + Para disolver un recuadro se sitúa el cursor al comienzo del mismo y se + pulsa +\family sans +Retroceso +\family default +, o bien se sitúa el cursor al final y se pulsa +\family sans +Suprimir +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El contenido de un recuadro se selecciona con la combinación de teclas +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "inset-select-all" +\end_inset + +, la combinación +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select" +\end_inset + + selecciona todo el documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Deshacer y rehacer +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Rehacer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Deshacer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Deshacer-y-rehacer" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si cometes un error lo puedes remediar fácilmente. + LyX dispone de una gran capacidad para deshacer/rehacer. + Pulsa +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Deshacer +\family default + para deshacer un error, o clic en el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "undo" +\end_inset + +. + Si accidentalmente deshaces demasiado, usa +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rehacer +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "redo" +\end_inset + + para «deshacer el deshacer». + El mecanismo deshacer está actualmente limitado a 100 pasos para minimizar + sobrecarga de memoria. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ten en cuenta que si deshaces todos los cambios hasta llegar al documento + tal como se guardó la última vez, no es posible rehacer los cambios realizados. + Esto es una consecuencia del límite mencionado de los 100 pasos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Deshacer +\family default +y +\family sans +Rehacer +\family default + funcionan con casi todo en LyX. + Pero tienen algunas peculiaridades. + No se puede +\family sans +Deshacer +\family default +y +\family sans +Rehacer +\family default +por caracteres individuales sino por bloques de texto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Operaciones con el ratón +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Operaciones con el ratón +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Estas son las operaciones básicas con el ratón: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Movimiento +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Pulsa el botón izquierdo +\emph on + +\emph default +del ratón en cualquier punto de la ventana de edición. + El cursor se colocará en el punto correspondiente del texto. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Seleccionar texto +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Mantén pulsado el botón izquierdo +\emph on + +\emph default +del ratón y arrastra. + LyX resalta el texto entre la primera y la última posiciones del ratón. + Usa +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Copiar +\family default + para crear una copia de ese bloque de texto en el +\emph on +buffer +\emph default + de LyX (y en el portapapeles). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Recoloca el cursor y pega el texto con +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Pegar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Insertados (Notas, flotantes, etc.) +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Un +\emph on + +\emph default +clic con el botón izquierdo del ratón sobre su recuadro abre o cierra cualquiera + de ellos. + Un clic derecho abre una ventana de propiedades. + En otra sección de este manual encontrarás más detalles. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Section +Navegación +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Navegación" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Navegación +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX ofrece varias formas de navegar por los documentos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +En el menú +\family sans +Navegar +\family default + se ordenan todas las secciones del documento como submenús que puedes pulsar + para ir a la parte correspondiente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +El menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Navegador de contorno +\family default + o el botón de herramientas +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle toc" +\end_inset + + . +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Estableciendo marcadores mediante +\family sans +Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marcadores, +\family default + y de puede volver a ellos mediante el mismo menú. + Los marcadores se guardan para nuevas sesiones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + + (también +\family sans +Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marcadores\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Navegar atrás +\family default +) lleva a la posición del documento en la que se ha cambiado algo recientemente. + Esto es útil en documentos largos, si has ido o deslizado a otra parte + del documento a comprobar algo y quieres volver a tu última posición editada. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pulsando la tecla +\family sans +F5 +\family default + el texto se desplaza de modo que el cursor queda centrado verticalmente + en el escritorio de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +El navegador de contorno +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El navegador de contorno es el equivalente actual del llamado +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Índice general +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en versiones anteriores de LyX, puesto que su propósito original era mostrar + el índice del contenido del documento. + Sin embargo, el actual Navegador de contorno es mucho más versátil. + En el cuadro desplegable de la parte superior de la ventana de contorno + se puede elegir entre varias listas e índices diferentes de una variedad + de objetos, tales como índices de cuadros y figuras, listas de varios tipos + de notas, etiquetas y referencias (véase la sección +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" + +\end_inset + +), citas (véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliografía" + +\end_inset + +)... + Haciendo clic en cualquiera de ellos el documento se desplazará en la pantalla + hasta la posición correspondiente. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En ciertos casos, al hacer clic derecho sobre un elemento se abre un menú + contextual que permite la modificación directa de dicho elemento. + Por ejemplo, con las citas, el menú contextual permite abrir el diálogo + de citas y modificarlas. + Con los cambios, permite aceptarlos o rechazarlos. + Y así con otros elementos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El campo +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Filtro +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + permite restringir las entradas que deben aparecer en el Navegador. + Por ejemplo, si está abierta la lista de Etiquetas y referencias y quieres + ver solamente las referencias a subsecciones, introduce el texto +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +sub: +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + como filtro y solo se mostrarán las entradas de la lista que contengan + ese texto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la parte inferior del Contorno hay varios botones y similares que permiten + controlar otros aspectos. + La opción +\family sans +Ordenar +\family default + ordena alfabéticamente la lista actual; si no, los elementos aparecen en + el orden en que se encuentran en el documento. + La opción +\family sans +Mantener +\family default + mantiene la visualización actual. + Mantener quiere decir que si, por ejemplo, están desplegadas las subsecciones + de las secciones 2 y 4 y haces clic sobre la sección 3, las subsecciones + de las secciones 2 y 4 permanecerán como están. + Sin la opción +\family sans +Mantener +\family default + éstas se ocultarán y se resaltará la sección 3. + Por último, el deslizador se puede usar para controlar el número de subniveles + de sección que se muestran. + Lo mejor es experimentar con él para ver cómo funciona. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El botón +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/reload.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +refresca el IG (aunque esto no será necesario, normalmente). + Cerca de este hay botones que permiten cambiar la posición de las secciones + en el documento. + Los botones +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/down.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/up.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + mueven las secciones hacia arriba y hacia abajo. + Así, por ejemplo, puedes poner la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 delante de la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.4 o detrás de la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.6. + LyX reordenará automáticamente la numeración. + Con los botones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/promote.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/demote.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + (o los correspondientes atajos de teclado +\family sans +Tab +\family default + y +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Tab +\family default +) puedes cambiar el nivel de una sección. + Por ejemplo, puedes convertir la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 en el capítulo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 o en la subsección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.4.1. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Finalización de entradas / palabras +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Finalización-de-entradas/palabras" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Finalización de entradas y palabras +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Autocompletar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX facilita la finalización automática de palabras mediante la exploración + de todos los documentos que están abiertos en ese momento. + Cada palabra que aparece en estos documentos se añade a una base de datos + que se utiliza para proponer terminaciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La finalización de entradas puede activarse en las preferencias LyX (menú + +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferencias +\family default +) en la sección +\family sans +Edición\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Autocompletar +\family default +. + Con la opción +\family sans +Finalización automática en línea +\family default + la finalización propuesta se muestra directamente tras el cursor. + Con la opción +\family sans +Recuadros emergentes automáticos +\family default + las terminaciones se muestran siempre en un recuadro emergente. + Se puede desactivar el indicador de terminación del cursor desmarcando + la opción +\family sans +Indicador en el cursor +\family default +. + Con las opciones generales puedes definir el tiempo de retardo para la + visualización en línea y para el recuadro emergente, y elegir si las finalizaci +ones largas deberían abreviarse. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX muestra un triangulito detrás del cursor como indicador de que hay finalizac +iones disponibles. + Para aceptar una propuesta utiliza la tecla +\family sans +Tabulador +\family default +. + Puedes entonces pulsar la tecla +\family sans +Tabulador +\family default + para aceptar esa terminación. + Si hay varias terminaciones posibles, se abre un recuadro emergente que + las muestra. + En ese recuadro puedes seleccionar una finalización con el ratón o con + las teclas de flecha, y aceptar la elegida pulsando +\family sans +Entrar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las opciones de finalización para ecuaciones en las preferencias hacen lo + mismo que las correspondientes opciones para texto. + La opción específica de ecuaciones +\family sans +Autocorrección +\family default + permite que los caracteres puedan ser compuestos. + Si, por ejemplo, quieres insertar el carácter +\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ +\end_inset + +, puedes insertar en la ecuación los caracteres +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +=> +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + para obtenerlo. + Esto es una alternativa rápida a la inserción de comandos o al uso de las + barras de herramientas. + La lista de combinaciones de caracteres posibles se encuentra en el archivo + +\family typewriter +autocorrect +\family default +, que está en algún sitio en la carpeta de instalación de LyX. + La autocorrección en ecuaciones puede activarse en cualquier momento pulsando + la tecla de exclamación +\family typewriter +'!' +\family default +. + La tecla +\family typewriter +Espacio +\family default + la desactiva. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Atajos de teclado básicos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Atajos de teclado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Teclado ! Asociaciones de teclas|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Atajos de teclado +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Al menos, hay dos mapas de teclado principales: +\family typewriter +cua +\family default + y +\family typewriter +emacs +\family default +. + LyX usa +\family typewriter +cua +\family default + por omisión, pero se puede cambiar en las preferencias de LyX, en +\family sans +Edición\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Atajos de teclado +\family default +. + (Puedes también ver ahí las combinaciones de teclas o cambiarlas, como + se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Edición-de-los-atajos" + +\end_inset + +.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Algunas teclas, como +\family sans +AvPág +\family default +, +\family sans +RePág +\family default +, o las flechas +\family sans +Izquierda +\family default +, +\family sans +Derecha +\family default +, +\family sans +Arriba +\family default + y +\family sans +Abajo +\family default +, hacen exactamente lo que se supone que hacen. + Otras teclas no: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tab +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Tab" +description "tecla Tabulador" + +\end_inset + + +\family default + No hay tabuladores en LyX. + Si no entiendes esto lee las secciones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Intro-Sangrado-de-párrafos" + +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Entornos-de-párrafo" + +\end_inset + +, especialmente la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Listas" + +\end_inset + +, ahora. + Sí, ahora. + Si aún estás confuso, mira en el +\emph on +Tutorial +\emph default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +En LyX, la tecla Tabulador solo se usa para aceptar propuestas de autocompletar, + desplazar el cursor en cuadros o matrices, o cambiar el nivel de profundidad + en listas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Esc +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Esc" +description "tecla Escape" + +\end_inset + + +\family default + Esta es la tecla «cancelar». + Se usa generalmente para cancelar operaciones. + En otras partes del manual se dan más detalles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Inicio +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +y +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Fin +\family default + Éstas mueven el cursor, respectivamente, al comienzo y al final de la línea, + a menos que estés usando el mapa de Emacs, en cuyo caso llevan al comienzo + y al fin del archivo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay tres teclas modificadoras: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Control +\family default + (Denominada « +\family sans +Ctrl +\family default +» +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Ctrl" +description "tecla Control" + +\end_inset + + en los archivos de documentación). + Tiene un par de usos diferentes, dependiendo de las teclas con las que + se combine: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Con +\family sans +Retroceso +\family default + o +\family sans +Suprimir +\family default +, borra una palabra completa en vez de un carácter. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Con +\family sans +Izquierda +\family default + y +\family sans +Derecha +\family default +, desplaza el cursor por palabras en vez de caracteres. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Con +\family sans +Inicio +\family default + y +\family sans +Fin +\family default +, lleva al inicio y al fin del documento, respectivamente. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Mayúsculas +\family default + (Representada por « +\family sans +Mayúsculas +\family default +» +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Mayúsculas" +description "tecla Mayúsculas" + +\end_inset + + —«Shift»— en los archivos de documentación). + Usada con cualquiera de las teclas de movimiento selecciona el texto entre + las posiciones inicial y final del cursor. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Alt +\family default + (Representada por « +\family sans +Alt +\family default +» +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Alt" +description "tecla Alt o Meta" + +\end_inset + + en los archivos de documentación). + Es la tecla +\family sans +Alt +\family default + en muchos teclados, aunque tu teclado puede tener otra tecla +\family sans +Meta +\family default + distinta. + Si tiene ambas teclas tendrás que probar cuál de ellas funciona realmente + como +\family sans +Alt +\family default +. + Esta tecla hace muchas cosas diferentes, una de ellas activar las +\emph on +teclas de aceleración de menú +\emph default +: usada en combinación con la tecla de la letra subrayada en el nombre de + un menú o un ítem, abre ese menú o acciona el ítem. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Por ejemplo, la secuencia +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Alt+E +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +E +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + abre el diálogo «Estilo del texto», +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Alt+A +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + abre el menú «Archivo». +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Más información relativa al uso de la tecla +\family sans +Alt +\family default + en el manual +\emph on +Atajos de teclado +\family sans +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Aprenderás más y más combinaciones de teclas y atajos de teclado conforme + uses LyX, porque casi todas las acciones muestran, en la barra de estado + situada en la parte inferior de la ventana, un corto mensaje que describe + la acción a realizar y sus correspondientes atajos de teclado. + La notación de las acciones de teclado es muy similar a la usada en esta + documentación, así que no deberías tener problemas en entenderlas. + Sin embargo, ten en cuenta que la tecla modificadora «Mayúsculas» se menciona + de forma explícita, así +\family sans +«Alt+P Mayúsculas+A +\family default +» +\family sans + +\family default +significa +\family sans +Alt+P +\family default + seguido de A mayúscula. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Fundamentos de LyX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Fundamentos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Clases de documento +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Clases +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introducción +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Antes de hacer nada, antes de empezar a escribir, debes decidir qué clase + de documento quieres hacer. + Cada tipo de documento tiene sus propios espacios, encabezados, esquemas + de numeración y demás. + Además, distintos tipos de documento usan distintos entornos de párrafo + y diseñan el título con formato diferente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Una +\emph on +clase de documento +\emph default + describe un grupo de propiedades comunes a un conjunto particular de documentos. + Al establecer la clase de documento, seleccionas automáticamente dichas + propiedades, haciendo más fácil crear el tipo de documento que deseas. + Si no eliges una clase de documento, LyX lo hace por ti, así que el cambio + de clase del documento es de tu incumbencia. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Clases de documento +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Clases +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Clases-de-documento" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes seleccionar una clase en el diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Clase +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +documento +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Selecciona la clase que quieras y haz los ajustes finos que necesites en + las distintas opciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Vista general +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay cuatro clases estándar de documentos en LyX. + Son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Article para artículos sencillos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Report para informes sencillos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Book para escribir libros +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Letter para cartas estilo US +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay además otras clases no estándar que sólo están disponibles en LyX si + están instalados los correspondientes archivos de clase LaTeX, aunque muchos + de ellos ya están incluidos en la mayoría de distribuciones LaTeX. + A continuación se mencionan algunas de ellas; la lista completa con explicacion +es detalladas se encuentra en el capítulo +\emph on +Clases especiales de documentos +\emph default +, en el manual +\emph on +Características adicionales. + +\emph default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +A&A Artículos para publicaciones en el estilo y formato empleado por +\emph on +Astronomy & Astrophysics +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ACS Para publicaciones de la +\emph on +American Chemistry Society +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +AGU Para publicaciones de la +\emph on + American Geophysical Union +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +AMS Diseños para artículos y libros en el estilo y formato de la +\emph on +American Mathematical Society +\emph default + (AMS). + Hay tres variantes disponibles. + El estándar usa un esquema típico de numeración para teoremas, etc. + que antepone el número de sección al número del resultado. + Todos las exposiciones tipo resultado (proposiciones, corolarios y demás) + se secuencian juntos, pero las definiciones, los ejemplos y cosas por el + estilo tienen su propia secuencia. + El esquema de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +numeración secuencial +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + no sitúa el número de sección con cada resultado, sino que los numera a + lo largo del artículo en una secuencia simple. + Cada tipo de resultado sigue su propia secuencia. + También hay un formato que reparte la numeración de relaciones en conjunto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Beamer Formato para presentaciones y transparencias +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Broadway Formato para escribir guiones. + No es una clase de documento de LaTeX, sino una nueva específica de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chess Formato para escribir sobre ajedrez +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Curiculum +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vitae clases para confeccionar currículum vitae +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Elsarticle Formato para publicaciones del grupo +\emph on +Elsevier +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Foils Para hacer transparencias +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hollywood Para escribir guiones para la industria cinematográfica US. + No es una clase de documento de LaTeX, sino una nueva específica de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +IEEEtran Formato para publicaciones del +\emph on +Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers +\emph default + (IEEE) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +IOP Formato para publicaciones del +\emph on +Institute of Physics +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kluwer Formato para publicaciones del grupo +\emph on +Kluwer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +KOMA-Script Una revisión de las clases estándar, ofrece varias características + útiles como formato de encabezados, cálculo automático de espacio de impresión + etc. + (Es la clase de este documento). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Memoir Otra revisión de las clases estándar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Powerdot Formato para presentaciones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +REVTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X Para escribir artículos publicados por: +\emph on +American Physical Society +\emph default + (APS), +\emph on +American Institute of Physics +\emph default + (AIP), y +\emph on +Optical Society of America +\emph default + (OSA). + Esta clase no es totalmente compatible con todas las características de + LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Slides Para hacer transparencias +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +SPIE +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Proceedings Formato para publicaciones de la +\emph on +International Society for Optical Engineering +\emph default + (SPIE) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Springer Formato para publicaciones del grupo +\emph on +Springer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +No entraremos aquí en detalles sobre el uso de las distintas clases de documento. + Puedes encontrar información sobre las clases no estándar en el manual + +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. + Aquí, nos centraremos en repasar algunas de las propiedades comunes a todas + las clases de documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Clases disponibles +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Probablemente notarás que muchas de las clases de documento listadas en + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Clase del documento +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + están marcadas como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +No disponible +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Al abrir un documento que use una de estas clases, aparece un aviso advirtiendo + que para generar salida del documento se requieren archivos que no están + instalados. + De modo que parece que algo va mal. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +No es así. + LyX incluye muchas más clases de documento de las que nunca necesitarás, + y algunas de ellas, como +\family sans +IOP +\family default +, son altamente especializadas. + LyX intenta soportar el mayor número posible de tipos de documento, e incluye + casi un centenar de archivos de formato diferentes, y creciendo. + Ninguna distribución LaTeX instalará por omisión todos los archivos que + podrían necesitarse por algunas clases de documento: son demasiados. + Esto es por lo que algunas clases de documento no están disponibles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si necesitaras una clase de documento +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +No disponible +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, tienes que instalar los archivos del paquete apropiado. + La forma más fácil de saber los archivos que hay que instalar es usar esa + clase de documento para un archivo nuevo: LyX mostrará un aviso en el que + se indicarán los archivos requeridos. + Véase la sección +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Instalación de nuevos paquetes LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + del manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default + para información sobre cómo hacerlo. +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +Aunque LyX proporciona soporte para muchas clases de documento diferentes, + no incluye soporte para todas y cada una de las que los usuarios podrían + necesitar. + Por ejemplo, muchas universidades proporcionan archivos de clases LaTeX + para que se usen en los trabajos que se les vayan a remitir. + El equipo LyX no puede escribir archivos de formato para soportar cada + una de estas clases. + Hay demasiadas. + Afortunadamente, los usuarios pueden escribir sus propios archivos de formato, + y así lo han hecho muchos. + El capítulo 5 del manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default + contiene información sobre la creación de archivos de formato. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Módulos +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Módulos" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Modulos@Módulos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los módulos permiten añadir a un documento características adicionales que + no están disponibles por omisión en la clase de documento elegida. + Por ejemplo, para escritura Braille (impresión en relieve). + Evidentemente esto no está disponible en ninguna clase de documento, así + que hay que cargar el módulo correspondiente en la sección +\family sans +Módulos +\family default + del diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Seleccionando un módulo en la lista se mostrará una descripción del mismo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Algunos módulos requieren paquetes LaTeX o convertidores de formatos de + archivo que no siempre se instalan por omisión. + LyX avisará si falta algún paquete o convertidor requerido y dará información + de lo que hace falta exactamente. + El módulo se puede seguir usando en la edición del documento, pero no se + podrá exportar a PDF o imprimir, puesto que LyX será incapaz de compilar + el archivo LaTeX sin los requisitos ausentes. + Para poder generar la salida habrá que instalar dichos requisitos y después + reconfigurar LyX con +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reconfigurar +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguración de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Véase la sección +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Instalar un nuevo paquete LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en el manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default + para más información sobre la instalación de paquetes requeridos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Notas: +\series default +Algunos módulos requieren otros módulos y ciertos pares de módulos son incompati +bles. + LyX avisará en esos casos. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Formato local +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Formato-local" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Formato local +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los módulos son a LyX lo que los paquetes son a LaTeX: están pensados para + ser usados en una variedad de documentos diferentes, y cuando necesitas + a menudo la misma clase de cosas para diferentes documentos, lo mejor sería + escribir un módulo con ese propósito. + No obstante, algunas veces surgen requerimientos muy concretos para un + solo documento determinado, como algún recuadro específico o cierto estilo + de carácter. + En esos casos, lo que necesitamos es algo como el preámbulo LaTeX de un + documento. + Se trata del +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Formato local +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + de LyX, cuyo uso se describe en el sección +\emph on +Formato local +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Propiedades +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cada clase tiene un conjunto de opciones predeterminadas. + Este cuadro las describe: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +página +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Caras +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Columnas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Nivel máx. + de sección +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +article +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Simple +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Una +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Una +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Sección +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +report +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Simple +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Una +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Una +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Capítulo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +book +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Encabezados +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Dos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Una +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Capítulo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +letter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Simple +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Una +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Una +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +ninguno +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quizás te preguntes qué significa +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Nivel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +máx. + de sección +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Hay varios entornos de párrafo que generan encabezados de sección. + Diferentes clases de documento producen distintos tipos de encabezados + de sección. + Sólo dos usan el encabezado +\family sans +Capítulo +\family default +; el resto no lo hacen y en su lugar empiezan con el encabezado +\family sans +Sección +\family default +. + Algunas clases de documento, como las de cartas, no usan ningún encabezado + de sección. + Además de los encabezados +\family sans +Capítulo +\family default + y +\family sans +Sección, +\family default + hay también +\family sans +Subsección, Subsubsección +\family default + y otros. + Los describiremos detalladamente en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Encabezados" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formato de un documento +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Formato +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Formato-de-documento" + +\end_inset + + +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las propiedades más importantes de los documentos se establecen en el submenú + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +. + En el campo +\family sans +Opciones +\family default +bajo +\family sans + Clase +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +del +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +documento, +\family default + puedes introducir opciones especiales para la clase de documento elegida + en forma de lista separada por comas. + Esto sólo es preciso si LyX no soporta las opciones especiales que quieras + usar. + Para saber más sobre tu clase LaTeX favorita y sus opciones, tienes que + leer su manual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En +\family sans +Diseño +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +de +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +página, +\family default +el +\family sans + Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +encabezado y pie +\family default + controla el tipo de encabezamiento y de numeración de las páginas. + Puedes escoger entre las siguientes cinco opciones: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Predeterminado +\family default + Usa el estilo predeterminado para la clase actual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Vacío +\family default + Sin números de página ni encabezamientos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Simple +\family default + Solo números de página. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Encabezado +\family default + Número de página y el capítulo actual o el título y número de sección, + dependiendo del nivel máximo de secciones de la clase. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Elaborado +\family default + Permite crear encabezamientos y pies de página totalmente configurables + si tienes instalado el paquete +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Encabezados-personalizados" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La separación de párrafos se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Separación-de-párrafos" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tamaño y orientación del papel +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Tamaño del papel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Papel-tamaño-orientación" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración, +\family default +en el apartado +\family sans +Diseño +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +de +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +página +\family default + encontrarás las siguientes opciones: +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tamaño +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +papel +\family default + Elección del tamaño de impresión del papel: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Predeterminado +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +A0 - A6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +B0 - B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +C0 - C6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Carta US, Oficio US, Ejecutivo US +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +JIS B0 - JIS B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Personalizado +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Orientación +\family default + Elige el formato de salida como +\family sans +Retrato +\family default + o +\family sans +Apaisado +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Documento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +con +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dos +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +caras +\family default + Ajusta el espacio para imprimir ambas caras del papel, de modo que el margen + de impresión se adapta para páginas pares e impares. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Márgenes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Márgenes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margenes@Márgenes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Márgenes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los márgenes de la página se establecen en el menú +\family sans +Document +\family default +o +\family sans +\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +. +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si usas la clase de documento KOMA-Script, puedes dejar los valores predetermina +dos, porque KOMA-Script calcula automáticamente el espacio de impresión + en función del formato del papel y el tamaño de letra. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nota importante +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si cambias la clase de un documento, LyX debe convertir +\emph on +todo +\emph default + a la nueva clase. + Esto incluye los entornos de párrafo, algunos de los cuáles son estándar, + los tienen todas las clases de documento; pero algunas clases tienen entornos + de párrafo específicos. + En ese caso, si cambias la clase del documento, LyX marcará los párrafos + cuyo estilo no es reconocido como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +desconocido +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + El nombre del estilo es retenido por si se deseara volver a la clase original. + No obstante, esos párrafos se mostrarán en la salida sin formato especial, + de modo que necesitarás crear un nuevo estilo o bien convertirlos manualmente + a uno de los estilos presentes en la nueva clase de documento. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Sangrado y separación de párrafos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Párrafos ! Sangrado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introducción +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Intro-Sangrado-de-párrafos" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Antes de describir los distintos entornos de párrafo, nos gustaría decir + unas palabras sobre el sangrado de párrafos. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cada cual parece tener sus propias reglas para separar párrafos. + Los americanos suelen sangrar la primera línea de párrafo. + Otros no sangran los párrafos pero ponen espacio extra entre ellos. + Si eliges sangrado para separar párrafos, el +\emph on +primer +\emph default + párrafo de una sección, o detrás de una figura, una ecuación, un cuadro, + una lista, etc., +\emph on +no +\emph default + se sangra. + Sólo se sangran los párrafos siguientes a otro párrafo. + Ten en cuenta que el comportamiento del sangrado puede ser diferente si + usas un lenguaje distinto del inglés. + LaTeX se ocupa de que el sangrado siga las normas del idioma utilizado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El espacio entre párrafos, así como el espacio entre líneas, entre encabezado + y texto —en definitiva, cada uno de los espacios para cada cosa— están + precodificados en LyX. + Como ya hemos dicho, no debes preocuparte por el espacio que hay que añadir + en cada caso. + LyX se ocupa de ello. + De hecho, esos espacios verticales precodificados no son una longitud fija + sino un rango. + Así, Lyx puede ajustar el espacio entre líneas para garantizar que las + figuras caben en una página con texto, para que las secciones no comiencen + al final de una página, y así todo. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX se encarga de esto cuando LyX genera un archivo de salida. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + No obstante, precodificado no significa que no puedas cambiarlo. + LyX te da la posibilidad de cambiar globalmente +\emph on +todos +\emph default + estos espacios precodificados. + Lo explicaremos después. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Separación de párrafos +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Separación-de-párrafos" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Párrafos ! Separación +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para separar párrafos, selecciona +\family sans +Sangrado +\family default + o +\family sans +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical +\family default + en el submenú +\family sans +Diseño +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto +\family default + del diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + para sangrar el comienzo de los párrafos o para añadir espacio vertical + extra entre ellos, respectivamente. + La cantidad de espacio se puede definir en el diálogo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ajuste fino +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además, puedes cambiar la forma de separar un párrafo individual. + Abre el diálogo +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +párrafo +\family default + y cambia el botón +\family sans +Sangrar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +párrafo +\family default + para cambiar el estado actual (atajo +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle" +\end_inset + +). + Si el método global para separar los párrafos está establecido en +\family sans +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical, +\family default + el botón +\family sans +Sangrar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +párrafo +\family default + será ignorado aunque lo marques (no puedes sangrar un párrafo con él). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cambiar el método de separación de un solo párrafo sólo sería necesario + para hacer algún ajuste fino. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Espacio entre líneas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Párrafos ! Espacio entre líneas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\family default +puedes definir el espacio entre líneas para todo el documento en el submenú + +\family sans +Diseño +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto. +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Para que esto funcione el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +setspace +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! setspace +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default + debe estar instalado. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Para un párrafo determinado, ese espacio se puede definir en el diálogo + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +párrafo +\family default +, pero debería usarse de manera excepcional porque el espacio vertical se + define normalmente en el estilo del entorno. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Entornos de párrafo +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Párrafos ! Entornos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Entornos-de-párrafo" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entornos de párrafo|( +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Visión general +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los entornos de párrafo corresponden a las diversas secuencias de comandos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +begin{ +\emph on +environment +\emph default +} ... + +\backslash +end{ +\emph on +environment +\emph default +} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +en un archivo LaTeX corriente. + Si no conoces LaTeX, o el concepto de entorno de párrafo te suena a chino, + es urgente que leas el +\emph on +Tutorial +\emph default +. + Además, el +\emph on +Tutorial +\emph default + contiene muchos más ejemplos que esta sección. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un entorno de párrafo es simplemente un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +contenedor +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + que le da al párrafo ciertas propiedades. + Esto puede incluir un estilo determinado de letra, márgenes diferentes, + un esquema de numeración, etiquetas, etc. + Además, puedes «anidar» distintos entornos dentro de otro, lo que permite + a un entorno heredar algunas de las propiedades del otro. + Los diversos entornos de párrafo evitan totalmente la necesidad de los + confusos tabuladores, de ajustes de márgenes al vuelo, y otros manejos + heredados de los tiempos de las máquinas de escribir. + Hay varios entornos de párrafo que son específicos de una clase particular + de documento. + Aquí sólo nos ocuparemos de los más corrientes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para escoger un nuevo entorno de párrafo, usa el menú desplegable +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/es_ToolbarEnvBox.png + scale 70 + +\end_inset + + que hay a la izquierda en la barra de herramientas. + LyX cambiará el entorno de +\emph on +todo +\emph default + el párrafo en el que esté el cursor. + También puedes cambiar el entorno de un grupo de párrafos si los seleccionas + antes de escoger el nuevo entorno. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Observa que al pulsar +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + se creará, típicamente, un párrafo nuevo en el entorno +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. + Decimos +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +típicamente +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + porque si estás en uno de estos entornos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Cita +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Citar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Verso +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Enumeración +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Enumeración* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Descripción +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Lista +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX mantiene el entorno de párrafo vigente al pulsar +\family sans +Entrar +\family default +, sin cambiarlo a +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. + Además se mantiene la profundidad de anidación. + (Más detalles sobre anidación en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Anidación" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Normal +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Normal +\family default + es el entorno de párrafo predeterminado para la mayoría de las clases de + documento. + En este entorno se crea un párrafo simple, sin características especiales. + Cuando LyX reinicia el entorno de párrafo escoge éste. + De hecho, el párrafo que estás leyendo (y la mayor parte de ellos en este + manual) están en el entorno +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes anidar un párrafo en entorno +\family sans +Normal +\family default + en casi cualquier otra cosa, pero no se puede anidar nada en un párrafo + en entorno +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Título del documento +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos !Título +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En LaTeX, la página del título tiene tres partes: el título en sí, el nombre(s) + del autor(es) y una +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +nota +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + para agradecimientos o información de contacto. + En ciertas clases de documento LaTeX las coloca en una página separada + junto a la fecha actual. + En otras clases de documento el título va al principio de la primera página. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX provee una interfaz para los comandos del título mediante los entornos + de párrafo +\family sans +Título +\family default +, +\family sans +Autor +\family default + y +\family sans +Fecha +\family default +. + He aquí cómo usarlos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Pon el título de tu documento en el entorno +\family sans +Título +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Pon el nombre del autor en el entorno +\family sans +Autor +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Si quieres cierta apariencia para la fecha, una fecha fija, o sustituir + la fecha por algún texto, usa el entorno +\family sans +Fecha. + +\family default + Observa que el uso de este entorno es opcional. + Si no lo empleas, LaTeX insertará automáticamente la fecha actual. + Si no quieres poner fecha, usa la opción +\family sans +Suprimir fecha por omisión en primera página +\family default + en el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Clase del documento +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes usar notas al pie para agradecimientos o información de contactos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Encabezados de sección +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encabezados de sección +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Encabezados" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay varios entornos de párrafo para generar encabezados de sección. + LyX se cuida de numerarlos por ti. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Encabezados numerados +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encabezados de sección ! Numerados +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay 7 tipos de encabezados de sección numerados, que son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Parte +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Capítulo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Sección +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Subsección +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Subsubsección +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Párrafo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Subpárrafo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX etiqueta cada encabezado con series de números separados por puntos. + Los números te indican dónde estás en el documento. + A diferencia de los demás encabezados, las +\family sans +Partes +\family default + se ordenan con letras. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los encabezados subdividen todo el documento en diferentes trozos de texto. + Por ejemplo, supón que estás escribiendo un libro: Divides el texto en + capítulos. + LyX hace un agrupamiento parecido: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Las +\family sans +Partes +\family default + se dividen en +\family sans +Capítulos +\family default + o +\family sans +Secciones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Los +\family sans +Capítulos +\family default + se dividen en +\family sans +Secciones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Las S +\family sans +ecciones +\family default + se dividen en +\family sans +Subsecciones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Las +\family sans +Subsecciones +\family default + se dividen en +\family sans +Subsubsecciones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Las +\family sans +Subsubsecciones +\family default + se dividen en +\family sans +Párrafos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Los +\family sans +Párrafos +\family default + se dividen en +\family sans +Subpárrafos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + No todos los tipos de documento usan el encabezado +\family sans +Capítulo +\family default + como primer nivel de división. + En esos casos, el encabezado de primer nivel es la +\family sans +Sección +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Así, si usas el entorno +\family sans +Subsubsección +\family default + para iniciar una nueva sub-subsección, LyX la etiqueta con su número, junto + con los números de subsección, sección y, si procede, capítulo en los que + se encuentra. + Por ejemplo, la quinta sección del segundo capítulo de este libro tiene + la etiqueta +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +2.5 +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Encabezados no numerados +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encabezados de sección ! No numerados +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los encabezados de sección sin numerar tienen un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +* +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + al final del nombre. + Trabajan como sus homólogos numerados pero no aparecen en el índice general, + véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:IG" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Cambiar el número de niveles numerados +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Profundidad-de-numeración" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes cambiar qué niveles de sección serán numerados y cuáles aparecerán + en el Índice General. + Ahora bien, no eliminas ninguno de los niveles; esto está preestablecido + en la clase de documento. + Ciertas clases empiezan con +\family sans +Capítulo +\family default + y bajan hasta el nivel +\family sans +Subpárrafo +\family default +. + Otras empiezan en +\family sans +Sección +\family default +. + De igual forma, no todas las clases numeran todos los niveles de división. + La mayoría no numeran +\family sans +Párrafo +\family default + ni +\family sans +Subpárrafo +\family default +. + Esto lo puedes cambiar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Abre el diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + En +\family sans +Numeración +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +e +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +IG +\family default + verás dos contadores deslizantes. + El llamado +\family sans +Numeración +\family default + controla hasta qué nivel se numera la jerarquía de encabezados. + El otro controla qué encabezados deben figurar en el índice general. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Encabezados con Título breve +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encabezados de sección ! Títulos breves +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Títulos breves +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Títulos-breves" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Algunos títulos de capítulo o sección, como el presente, pueden resultar + demasiado largos. + Esto puede ser problemático cuando el espacio horizontal es limitado. + Por ejemplo, si el encabezado de página debe mostrar el título de la sección + actual, un título largo puede invadir los márgenes de página y queda fatal. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX permite especificar un título breve para encabezados de sección. + Este se usa en el encabezado de página y en el índice general actual, evitando + el problema mencionado. + Para poner un título breve, usa el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Título +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +breve +\family default +. + Así se inserta un cuadro etiquetado +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +opt +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (por «optativo») que te permite introducir el texto del título. + Esto también trabaja para encabezados en flotantes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El título de esta sección es un buen ejemplo de esta característica. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Información especial +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Lo siguiente se aplica a todos los encabezados de sección: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +No puedes anidar nada en estos entornos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +No puedes poner notas al margen en ninguno de estos entornos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Las ecuaciones sólo se pueden poner en línea en estos entornos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Puedes usar etiquetas y referencias cruzadas a sus números. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Espacios para Citas y Versos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX tiene tres entornos para escribir citas y poesías. + Son +\family sans +Cita +\family default +, +\family sans +Citar +\family default +, y +\family sans +Verso +\family default +. + Olvida el tener que cambiar espacios de línea y enredar con los márgenes. + Estos tres entornos de párrafo ya lo tienen incorporado. + Todos amplían el margen izquierdo y añaden un poco de espacio extra sobre + y bajo el texto que contienen. + También permiten anidar, así que puedes poner un +\family sans +Verso +\family default + en una +\family sans +Cita +\family default +, así como en algún otro entorno de párrafo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay otra característica en estos tres entornos: cuando inicias un nuevo + párrafo +\emph on +no +\emph default + se restablece el entorno +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. + Así, puedes escribir tu verso y alegremente pulsar +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + sin preocuparte de cambiar el entorno cada vez. + Por supuesto, esto implica que una vez terminado el poema debes cambiar + manualmente al nuevo entorno. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Citar y Cita +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Citar" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Citas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Una vez descritas las semejanzas de estos tres entornos, ahora le toca a + las diferencias. + +\family sans +Citar +\family default + y +\family sans +Cita +\family default + son idénticos excepto en una cosa: +\family sans +Citar +\family default + usa espacio extra para separar párrafos y nunca sangra la primera línea. + +\family sans +Cita +\family default + +\emph on +siempre +\emph default + sangra la primera línea de un párrafo y usa en todo el mismo espaciado + de línea. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí hay un ejemplo de entorno +\family sans +Citar +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Este es un entorno +\family sans +Citar +\family default +. + Puedo seguir escribiendo y extender esta línea más y más hasta que se quiebra. + ¡Observa: sin sangrado! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Este es el segundo párrafo de esta cita. + De nuevo, no hay sangrado, pero hay espacio extra entre éste y el anterior + párrafo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí hay otro ejemplo, esta vez en el entorno +\family sans +Cita +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Este es un entorno +\family sans +Cita +\family default +. + Si sigues escribiendo verás el sangrado. + Si en tu país se usa un estilo en el que los párrafos nuevos se sangran + en la primera línea, ¡éste es el tuyo! Bueno, +\emph on +si +\emph default + estuvieras citando otro texto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Aquí hay un párrafo nuevo. + Podría divagar y divagar como un político en elecciones, pero te aburriría. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como muestra el ejemplo, +\family sans +Citar +\family default + es para los que acostumbran separar párrafos con espacio extra. + Éstos pondrían las citas en un entorno +\family sans +Citar. + +\family default + Los que prefieren separar párrafos con sangrado usarán el entorno +\family sans +Cita +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Verso +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Párrafos ! Verso +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Poesía +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Verso" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Verso +\family default + es un entorno de párrafo para poemas, rimas, versos y demás. + Un ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Esto es un Verso +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +¡Que yo no ensayé! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Podría ser mucho peor. + Esta línea debería ser larga, larga, tan larga que se quiebra. + En pantalla se ve bien, pero en la versión para imprimir las líneas extras + se sangran un poco más que la primera. + De acuerdo, así se convierte en prosa y no rima más. + Demándame. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Para quebrar una línea +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Y hacer que las cosas se vean bien +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Usa +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como puedes ver, +\family sans +Verso +\family default + no sangra los márgenes. + Cada estrofa del poema está en su propio párrafo. + Para separar las líneas individuales de una estrofa, usa la función +\family typewriter +salto-de-línea, +\family default + +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Listas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Listas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX tiene cuatro entornos de párrafo para crear distintas clases de listas. + En los entornos +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default + y +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +, LyX etiqueta los ítems de la lista con marcas o números, respectivamente. + En los entornos +\family sans +Descripción +\family default + y +\family sans +Lista +\family default +, LyX destaca de alguna forma la primera palabra . + Los detalles individuales de cada tipo de lista los veremos después de + describir sus características generales comunes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Características generales +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los cuatro entornos de párrafo para listas difieren de los demás entornos + en varias cosas. + En primer lugar, LyX trata cada párrafo como un ítem de la lista. + Al pulsar +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + +\emph on +no +\emph default + se restablece el entorno +\family sans +Normal +\family default +, se mantiene el entorno actual y se genera un nuevo ítem en el mismo nivel + de profundidad de anidación. + Para crear un nuevo ítem en un nivel menor de profundidad de anidación + hay que teclear +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default +. + Si se teclea esto en un primer nivel de una lista se vuelve al entorno + +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes anidar listas de cualquier tipo dentro de otra lista. + De hecho, LyX cambia las marcas en algunos ítems, dependiendo de cómo están + anidados. + Si piensas usar cualquiera de los entornos de lista, te sugerimos que leas + toda la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Anidación" + +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Enumeración* +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas ! Enumeración* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Enumeración*" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En primer lugar describiremos con detalle el entorno de listas no numeradas, + +\family sans +Enumeración*. + +\family default + Tiene las siguientes propiedades: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Cada ítem tiene una marca o símbolo particular como etiqueta. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +LyX usa el mismo símbolo para todos los ítems de cada nivel dado de profundidad. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +El símbolo aparece al comienzo de la primera línea. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Los ítems pueden tener cualquier longitud. + LyX encaja automáticamente el margen izquierdo, de acuerdo con la situación + en que esté la lista +\family sans +Enumeración*. + +\family default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Si anidas una lista +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default + dentro de otra, la marca cambia a otra nueva. + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Hay cuatro símbolos distintos para los cuatro niveles de anidación. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +LyX muestra siempre el mismo símbolo en pantalla. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Anidación" + +\end_inset + + para una explicación completa. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Por supuesto, esta explicación también era un ejemplo de lista +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default +. + Este entorno de lista es aconsejable para listas en las que el orden no + importa. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hemos dicho que los distintos niveles usan distintos símbolos como etiquetas. + Aquí hay un ejemplo con las cuatro posibilidades. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "np:N.del-t.:-item" + +\end_inset + +N. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +del t. +\emph default +: En la salida del documento en español las marcas son diferentes de las + que se describen; la causa se explica en la pág. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand pageref +reference "sub:En-español" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +La marca para el primer nivel de +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default + es un punto grueso, o topo. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +La marca del segundo nivel es una raya. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +El tercer nivel tiene un asterisco. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +La marca del cuarto nivel es un punto centrado. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Vuelta al tercer nivel. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Vuelta al segundo nivel. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Vuelta al nivel más externo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Estas son las marcas predeterminadas para una lista +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default +. + Puedes personalizar como estas marcas +\lang english +are displayed in the output +\lang spanish + en el submenú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\family default + diálogo +\family sans +Marcas +\family default +. + +\lang english +These customizations are not displayed in LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Observa cómo el espacio entre ítems decrece al aumentar la profundidad. + Explicaremos la anidación y los trucos factibles para las profundidades + en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Anidación" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Enumeración +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas ! Enumeración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Enumeración" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El entorno +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + se usa para crear listas numeradas y esquemas. + Sus propiedades son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Cada ítem se etiqueta con un número o letra. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Dependiendo de la profundidad. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +LyX contabiliza automáticamente los ítems y los actualiza adecuadamente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Cada nuevo entorno +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + reinicia la cuenta a uno. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Como en el entorno +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default +, el entorno +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Compensa los ítems en relación al margen izquierdo. + Los ítems pueden tener cualquier longitud. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Reduce el espacio entre ítems al aumentar la profundidad. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Usa diferentes etiquetas según la profundidad. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Permite hasta cuatro niveles de anidación. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Las distintas etiquetas para cada nivel de profundidad en una lista numerada, + +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +, son las que se muestran en el siguiente ejemplo: +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +N. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +del t. +\emph default +: En la salida del documento en español las etiquetas son diferentes de + las que se describen; la causa se explica en la pág. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand pageref +reference "sub:En-español" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +El primer nivel usa números arábigos seguidos de un punto. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +El segundo usa letras minúsculas y paréntesis. + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +El tercer nivel usa números romanos en minúscula y punto. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +El cuarto usa letras mayúsculas y punto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Observa de nuevo la disminución de espacio entre ítems al aumentar la profundida +d de entorno. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Vuelta al tercer nivel. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Vuelta al segundo nivel. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Vuelta al nivel más externo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes personalizar el tipo de numeración en el entorno +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +, véase sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Listas-personalizadas" + +\end_inset + +. + Estos cambios sólo se aprecian en la versión impresa, no en LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En cuanto a anidación en entornos +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + hay más de lo visto aquí. + Para saber más deberías leer la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Anidación" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection* +Enumeración* y Enumeración en español +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:En-español" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +N. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +del t. +\emph default +: Este apartado no está en el documento original. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si el idioma establecido en la configuración predeterminada de documentos + es el español, +\family sans + +\family default +todos los documentos nuevos usan este idioma. + Por omisión, LyX carga el paquete +\series bold +babel +\series default + con la opción del idioma del documento y, al procesar el archivo con LaTeX, + interviene el estilo +\family typewriter +spanish +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El estilo +\family typewriter +spanish +\family default + establece por omisión un conjunto de traducciones y características tipográfica +s adaptadas a los usos propios del español. + En particular, las marcas de los ítems de una lista sin numerar (entorno + +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +*) que aparecen en el documento impreso no son como las que se han descrito + en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Enumeración*" + +\end_inset + +. + Para cada uno de los cuatro niveles las marcas son, respectivamente: +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +raisebox{.2ex}{ +\backslash +rule{.7ex}{.7ex}} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + • +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\circ$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\diamond$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las marcas predefinidas por +\family typewriter +spanish +\family default + para una +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +* +\family sans + +\family default +se pueden cambiar en el diálogo +\family sans +Marcas +\family default + ( +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +) o mediante los siguientes comandos, que se escriben en código TeX en el + texto del documento: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +spanishdashitems +\series default +hace que todas las listas no numeradas siguientes en el documento lleven + como etiqueta una raya, —, en todos los niveles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +spanishsignitems +\series default + hace que todas las listas no numeradas siguientes al comando usen como + etiquetas para cada nivel los símbolos: +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + • +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\circ$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\diamond$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\triangleright$ +\end_inset + + , respectivamente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En cuanto a las etiquetas de las listas numeradas, +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +, las que se muestran en la salida impresa para los distintos niveles son + de la forma: 1. + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\emph on +a +\emph default +) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\emph on +a +\emph default + +\begin_inset Formula $'$ +\end_inset + +, respectivamente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A partir de la versión +\family typewriter +5.0h +\family default +, +\family typewriter +spanish +\family default + ofrece la posibilidad de anular sus valores predefinidos de marcas y etiquetas + mediante las opciones de paquete «es-nolists», «es-noitemize» y «es-noenumerate +», insertando en el preámbulo LaTeX del documento el comando: +\family typewriter + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +def +\backslash +spanishoptions{opción} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Según la opción elegida, en la salida se imprimirán en todas las listas, + solo en +\family typewriter + +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default + o solo en +\family sans +Enumeración, +\family default + respectivamente, las etiquetas predefinidas por LyX/LaTeX en vez de las + predefinidas por +\family typewriter +spanish +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota +\series default +: Debido a un conflicto entre +\series bold +spanish-babel +\series default +e +\series bold +hyperref, +\series default + si se habilita el soporte hyperref en el documento el comando anterior + deja de funcionar. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Más información sobre opciones y comandos de +\family typewriter +spanish +\family default + en su página web, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "spanish" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Descripción +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas ! Descripción +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A diferencia de los dos entornos anteriores, la lista +\family sans +Descripción +\family default + no tiene marcas fijas. + En vez de ello, LyX destaca la «primera palabra» de la primera línea, por + ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ejemplo: Esto es un ejemplo de entorno +\family sans +Descripción +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX escribe la etiqueta en negrita y pone un espacio extra ante el resto + de la línea. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por «primera palabra» entendemos que la primera pulsación de la tecla +\family sans +Espacio +\family default + en cada ítem da fin a la etiqueta. + Si quieres poner más de una palabra como etiqueta del ítem debes usar un + +\family sans +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +protegido +\family default +. + (Con +\family sans +Ctrl+Espacio +\family default + o con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +protegido +\family default +. + Véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-protegido" + +\end_inset + +) Un ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Segundo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ejemplo: +\family sans +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +protegido +\family default + entre dos palabras de la etiqueta en una lista +\family sans +Descripción +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Empleo: Podrías usar el entorno +\family sans +Descripción +\family default + para cosas como definiciones y teoremas. + O para poner determinada palabra separada del texto que describe. + No es buena idea usar +\family sans +Descripción +\family default + para describir una frase completa. + Para esto es mejor emplear +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default + o +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + y anidar en él un párrafo +\family sans +Normal. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Anidación: Puedes anidar entornos +\family sans +Descripción +\family default + dentro de otros entornos de lista. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Observa que después de la primera línea, LyX sangra las siguientes respecto + a ella. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Etiquetado +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas ! Etiquetado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El entorno +\family sans +Etiquetado +\family default + es una extensión a LaTeX en LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como el entorno +\family sans +Descripción, +\family default + la +\family sans +Lista +\family default + tiene etiquetas definidas por el usuario para cada ítem. + Las propiedades de este entorno de lista son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +etiquetas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ítem LyX usa la «primera palabra» como etiqueta. + El primer +\family sans +Espacio +\family default + en la primera línea de un ítem finaliza la etiqueta. + Si necesitas más de una palabra pon espacios protegidos, como se ha descrito + antes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +márgenes Como se ve, LyX pone márgenes diferentes para la etiqueta y el + resto del ítem. + El texto tiene un margen izquierdo mayor, igual a la anchura predeterminada + de etiqueta más un pequeño espacio extra. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +anchura +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +etiqueta LyX escoge la mayor de estas dos opciones para el margen izquierdo: + la anchura de la etiqueta, o la anchura predeterminada. + Si la anchura de la etiqueta es mayor, la etiqueta se «extiende» en la + primera línea. + En otras palabras, el texto de la primera línea no se alinea con el margen + izquierdo del resto del texto del ítem. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +anchura +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +predeterminada Puedes fijar esta anchura para asegurar que el texto de todos + los ítems en un entorno +\family sans +Etiquetado +\family default + tienen el mismo margen izquierdo. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Para cambiar la anchura por omisión, selecciona los ítems en la lista. + Ahora, en el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +párrafo +\family default +(botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +) +\family sans +, +\family default + el texto escrito en +\family sans +Etiqueta +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +más +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +larga +\family default + bajo +\family sans +Ancho +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +de +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +etiqueta +\family default + determina la anchura predeterminada. + Puedes poner aquí el texto de tu etiqueta más larga, aunque sugerimos escribir + la letra «M» varias veces. + Es el carácter más ancho y es una unidad de anchura estándar en LaTeX. + Usando «M» como unidad no necesitas cambiar el contenido del cuadro +\family sans +Etiqueta +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +más +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +larga +\family default + cada vez que cambies una etiqueta en un entorno +\family sans +Lista +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +La anchura predefinida es la longitud de «00.00.0000» (equivalente a 6 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +M). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Deberías emplear el entorno +\family sans +Etiquetado +\family default + de la misma manera que +\family sans +Descripción +\family default +: Cuando necesites que una palabra sobresalga del texto que describe. + El entorno +\family sans +Etiquetado +\family default + te permite otra manera de hacerlo con un formato distinto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes anidar entornos +\family sans +Etiquetado +\family default + en otras listas. + Funcionan igual que los otros entornos de párrafo tipo lista. + Lee la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Anidación" + +\end_inset + + para saber más. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aún queda otra característica de +\family sans +Etiquetado +\family default +: Como ves en los ejemplos, LyX, por omisión, alinea las etiquetas a la + izquierda. + Puedes cambiar esto con +\family sans +Relleno +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +horizontal +\family default + adicional. + Explicaremos el +\family sans +Relleno +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +horizontal +\family default +en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-horizontal" + +\end_inset + +. + Unos ejemplos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +Izquierda Predeterminado para etiquetas de ítems en una +\family sans +Etiquetado +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Derecha Un +\family sans +Relleno horizontal +\family default + previo ajusta la etiqueta a la derecha. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Centro +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + Un +\family sans +Relleno horizontal +\family default + al principio y otro al final la centra. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Listas personalizadas +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Listas-personalizadas" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas ! Personalizadas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para usar las funciones descritas en esta sección hay que cargar el módulo + +\family sans +Listas personalizadas (enumitem) +\family default + en la configuración del documento. + Esto permite usar las funciones del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Listas de enumeración personalizadas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas ! Enumeración ! Personalizadas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La numeración predeterminada de las listas numeradas se puede cambiar añadiendo + un argumento opcional (menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Título breve +\family default +) al primer ítem de cada nivel en la lista. + Añades el comando +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +roman{enumi} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +en código TeX (atajo +\family sans +Ctrl-L +\family default +). +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Más sobre código TeX en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Código-TeX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + De esta manera +\emph on +enumi +\emph default + es el contador de numeración en el primer nivel. + El comando +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default + genera el contador como número romano en minúsculas. + Para números romanos en mayúsculas reemplaza +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default + por +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman +\series default +. + Para usar números arábigos usa +\series bold + +\backslash +arabic +\series default +. + Para +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +numerar +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + los ítems con letras mayúsculas o minúsculas, respectivamente, usa +\series bold + +\backslash +Alph +\series default + o +\series bold + +\backslash +alph +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + Solo se pueden numerar 26 ítems con letras porque está limitado a caracteres + únicos. + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para cambiar la numeración de los subniveles de la lista, reemplaza el +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +i +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + del comando por el número romano en minúsculas correspondiente al nivel + ( +\emph on +enumi +\emph default +, +\emph on +enumii +\emph default +, +\emph on +enumiii +\emph default +, +\emph on +enumiv +\emph default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un ejemplo de lista con numeración personalizada: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Nivel 1 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Nivel 2 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Nivel 2 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Nivel 3 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Nivel 4 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +N. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +del t. +\emph default +: En español no se usan los números romanos en minúscula. + Por eso, el estilo +\family sans +spanish-babel +\family default + cambia automáticamente +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default + por +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Se han empleado los siguientes comandos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +donde el comando +\series bold + +\backslash +emph{} +\series default + pone estilo énfasis y +\series bold + +\backslash +bf{} +\series default + negrita en las etiquetas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + Si cambias la etiqueta de un nivel de la lista se usará para todas las + siguientes listas hasta que cambies de nuevo la definición. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Enumeración reanudada +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas ! Enumeración ! Reanudada +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las listas numeradas se pueden reanudar después de párrafos intermedios: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +arabic{enumi}. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +primero +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +vuelta a la numeración predeterminada +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +segundo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +texto normal +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume +reanudada +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para reanudar la numeración de una lista usa el estilo +\family sans +Enumeración-Reanudar +\family default +. + En LyX se muestra en azul para indicar que es una lista reanudada y que + se corregirá en el documento de salida. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + Si no hay numeración previa para continuar se obtendrá un error de LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si deseas continuar la lista con un número diferente al que corresponde, + o iniciar una nueva enumeración con un número definido, se consigue añadiendo + un argumento opcional al primer ítem de una nueva enumeración normal. + Se inserta el comando +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +start=número +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +donde +\emph on +número +\emph default + es el número con el que se desea continuar la lista. + Un ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +primer ítem +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +segundo ítem +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enumeración comenzando con un valor dado: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +start=4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Esta enumeración comienza por 4 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Espacios en listas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas ! Espacios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En ciertos casos podrías querer cambiar el espacio vertical entre los ítems + de una lista. + Por ejemplo, si consideras que el espacio predeterminado es excesivo en + este caso: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Lista no numerada +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +con espacio estándar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes disminuir el espacio añadiendo un argumento opcional al primer ítem + de la lista. + Añade el comando +\series bold +nolistsep +\series default + para eliminar el espacio adicional propio de las listas, por ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +nolistsep +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Lista no numerada +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +sin espacio vertical +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +adicional +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para añadir espacio hay varios comandos proporcionados por el paquete LaTeX + +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Para más información consulta su documentación +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +También hay varios comandos para variar el espacio horizontal y la sangría. + Aquí hay un ejemplo donde se ha puesto una sangría como la de los párrafos + del documento y la etiqueta se ha separado 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm, con lo que el número aparece en el margen de la página: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent= +\backslash +parindent, labelsep=2cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Enumeración +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +con sangría negativa +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Personalización adicional +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listas ! Personalización +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El estilo de la lista descripción se puede cambiar con los comandos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font=definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +cambia la tipografía de la etiqueta, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +style=definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +establece el estilo de la lista. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un ejemplo donde se han usado los comandos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Radiación +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ionizante: +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +La radiación ionizante consiste en ondas electromagnéticas o partículas + con la energía suficiente para arrancar electrones de átomos o moléculas, + y por tanto ionizándolos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Conteo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +referencias: En computación es una técnica para contabilizar el número de + referencias, punteros o +\emph on +handles +\emph default + a un recurso como un objeto, bloque de memoria, espacio de disco u otros. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay muchos más comandos y funciones disponibles en el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Más información en su documentación, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cartas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cartas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Introducción a +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + y +\family sans +Dirección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +d +\family sans +erecha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aunque LyX tiene clases de documento para cartas ( +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +letter +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +), también dispone de dos entornos de párrafo llamados +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + y +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +derecha. + +\family default + Para usar las clases para cartas, tienes que usar los entornos de párrafo + específicos en determinado orden, si no LaTeX gasta bromas. + Sin embargo, puedes usar los entornos +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + y +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +derecha +\family default + donde quieras sin problemas. + Puedes incluso anidarlos en otros entornos, aunque no puedes anidar nada + en ellos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Evidentemente, el uso de +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + y +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +derecha +\family default + no está limitado a las cartas. + +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +derecha, +\family default + en particular, es útil para crear títulos de artículos como los que se + utilizan en algunas publicaciones académicas europeas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Forma de empleo +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Empleo-direcciones" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El entorno +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + da al texto el estilo de una dirección, que también se usa para la apertura + y la firma en algunos países. + El entorno +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +derecha +\family default + da al texto el estilo de una dirección alineada a la derecha, que se emplea + para los datos del remitente y la fecha en algunos países. + Ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Address +Dirección a la derecha +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Quién soy +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Dónde estoy +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +¿Cuándo? ¿Qué es hoy? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esto era +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +derecha +\family default +. + Observa que todas las líneas tienen el mismo margen izquierdo, el que pone + LyX para llenar el bloque mayor de texto en una línea sencilla. + Y aquí un ejemplo de +\family sans +Dirección +\family default +, para los datos del destinatario: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Quién eres tú +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Dónde lo envío +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Tu población, C.P. + o país +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como ves, ambos entornos añaden espacio extra entre ellos y el siguiente + párrafo. + Si pulsas +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + en cualquiera de estos entornos, LyX reinicia la profundidad y pone entorno + +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. + Esto tiene sentido porque +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + funciona como +\family typewriter +salto-de-párrafo +\family default +, y las líneas individuales de una dirección no son párrafos. + De manera que has de usar +\family typewriter +salto-de-línea +\family default + ( +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default + o el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +línea +\family default +) para iniciar línea nueva en un entorno +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + o +\family sans +Dirección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +derecha +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Escritos académicos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los escritos académicos suelen comenzar con un resumen y finalizar con una + bibliografía o una lista de referencias. + LyX dispone de entornos para ambos tipos de párrafo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Resumen +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Resumen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El entorno +\family sans +Resumen +\family default + se usa para el resumen de un artículo. + Técnicamente, se puede usar este entorno en cualquier sitio, pero sólo + debería usarse al principio del documento, tras el título. + Tampoco deberías molestarte en intentar anidar un +\family sans +Resumen +\family default + en algo o viceversa. + No funciona. + El entorno +\family sans +Resumen +\family default + sólo se aplica en las clases +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +article +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +report +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Las clases de documento +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +book +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + lo ignoran totalmente, y sería ridículo usar +\family sans +Resumen +\family default + en cartas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El entorno +\family sans +Resumen +\family default + hace varias cosas por ti. + Primero, pone una etiqueta +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Resumen +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + centrada sobre el texto. + La etiqueta y el texto se separan con algo de espacio extra. + Segundo, usa un tamaño de letra menor, como se podría esperar. + Por último, añade un poco de espacio vertical extra ante el texto que sigue. + Ahora bien, así es como aparece en pantalla en LyX. + El aspecto en la salida depende de la clase de artículo o informe elegida. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Al pulsar +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + no se cambia el entorno de párrafo, el nuevo párrafo seguirá estando en + +\family sans +Resumen. + +\family default + Por tanto, debes cambiar tú mismo el entorno de párrafo cuando acabes el + resumen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/Resumen.pdf + clip + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Párrafo-en" + +\end_inset + +Párrafo en un entorno +\family sans +Resumen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nos gustaría poner directamente un ejemplo de +\family sans +Resumen, +\family default + pero como este documento es clase +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +book +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, no podemos. + Lo hemos insertado como figura +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Párrafo-en" + +\end_inset + +. + Si nunca habías oído hablar de un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +resumen +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, puedes ignorar sin problema este entorno. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Bibliografía +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliografía +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Biblio_entorno" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El entorno +\family sans +Bibliografía +\family default + se usa para listar referencias. + Técnicamente, se puede usar este entorno en cualquier sitio, pero sólo + debería usarse al final del documento. + Anidar +\family sans +Bibliografía +\family default + en algo o viceversa no funciona. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Al abrir un entorno +\family sans +Bibliografía, +\family default + LyX añade un gran espacio vertical seguido por el encabezado +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Bibliografía +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Referencias +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, según la clase de documento. + El encabezado va en letra negrita grande. + Cada párrafo de la +\family sans +Bibliografía +\family default + es una entrada de referencia. + Así que pulsar +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + no reinicia el entorno de párrafo, el nuevo sigue siendo +\family sans +Bibliografía. + +\family default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay otra forma generalmente mejor de incluir referencias en un documento + usando una base de datos BibTeX. + Para una descripción detallada del manejo de la bibliografía en LyX, echa + una ojeada a la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliografía" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Código LyX +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Párrafos! Código LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Código-LyX" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El entorno +\family sans +Código-LyX +\family default + es otra extensión de LyX. + Escribe el texto en estilo máquina de escribir. + Trata la tecla +\family sans +Espacio +\family default + como espacio fijo +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En el entorno +\family sans +Código-LyX +\family default +, la tecla +\family sans +Espacio +\family default + es tratada como un +\family sans +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +protegido +\family default + en vez de un separador de palabras. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +; es el único caso en LyX en que puedes teclear múltiples espacios. + Si necesitas insertar líneas en blanco debes usar +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default + (función +\family typewriter +salto-de-línea +\family default +). + +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + quiebra el párrafo. + Observa, no obstante, que +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + no reinicia el entorno de párrafo. + Así que cuando acabes el entorno +\family sans +Código-LyX +\family default + debes cambiar a mano el entorno. + Por otra parte, el entorno +\family sans +Código-LyX +\family default + se puede anidar en otros. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este entorno tiene ciertas peculiaridades: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +No puedes usar +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default + al principio de un nuevo párrafo (por ejemplo, no puedes hacer +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default + seguido a +\family sans +Entrar +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +No puedes continuar un +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default + con un +\family sans +Espacio +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Usa un +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + para iniciar un párrafo, entonces puedes poner un +\family sans +Espacio +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +O: usa +\family sans +Ctrl+Espacio +\family default + en su lugar. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +No puede tener un párrafo vacío o una línea vacía. + Al menos debes poner un +\family sans +Espacio +\family default + en cualquier línea que quieras vacía. + De lo contrario, LaTeX genera error. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +No puedes poner comillas dobles tipo máquina de escribir con la tecla +\family sans +" +\family default + porque esto insertará comillas +\emph on +reales +\emph default +. + Puedes ponerlas con +\family sans +Ctrl+Mayúsculas+" +\family default + . +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +#include +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +int main(void) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +{ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + printf("Hello World! +\backslash +n"); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + return 0; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esto es justo el programa estándar +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Hello world! +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Código-LyX +\family default + tiene un propósito: escribir lenguaje informático, tales como código de + programa, guiones de shell, archivos rc, y otros. + Úsalo sólo en casos muy especiales en los que necesites generar texto como + en una máquina de escribir. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entornos de párrafo|) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Para partes más largas de código, usa el recuadro Listado de programa, + que se describe en el capítulo +\emph on +Listado de programa +\emph default +del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Anidación de entornos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anidación ! Entornos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Anidación" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introducción +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX maneja el texto como un bloque unificado con propiedades específicas + en un determinado contexto. + Esto permite crear bloques que heredan algunas de las propiedades de otro + bloque. + Por ejemplo, tienes tres puntos principales en un esquema, pero el punto + #2 tiene a su vez dos subapartados. + Dicho de otra forma, tienes una lista dentro de otra, con la lista interna + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +atada +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + al ítem #2: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +uno +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +dos +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +subapartado - ítem #1 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +subapartado - ítem #2 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +tres +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Una lista se introduce en otra anidándola en ella. + Anidar un entorno es sencillo: Selecciona el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Aumentar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +profundidad +\family default + o +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Disminuir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +profundidad +\family default + para cambiar la profundidad de anidación del párrafo actual (en la barra + de estado se indica el nivel de profundidad). + En vez del menú, puedes usar los botones de la barra de herramientas +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + o el atajo de teclado +\family sans +Tab +\family default + y +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Tab +\family default + o +\family sans + Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default + y +\family sans + Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda +\family default +. + El cambio de profundidad funcionará para el párrafo actual y también para + varios párrafos a la vez si los tienes seleccionados. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Observa que LyX sólo cambia la profundidad de anidación si puede. + Si no es válido no sucede nada aunque lo intentes. + Además, si cambias la profundidad de un párrafo, afecta a la profundidad + de los párrafos anidados en él. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La anidación no está restringida a listas. + En LyX, puedes anidar casi cualquier cosa en cualquiera otra, como podrás + comprobar. + Esta es la verdadera potencia de los entornos de anidación de párrafos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Qué se puede anidar y qué no +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anidación ! Tipos de +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Antes de bombardearte con una lista de entornos de párrafo, te contaremos + algo más sobre cómo funciona la anidación. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La respuesta a si es posible anidar un entorno de párrafo no es tan simple + como sí o no. + Hay, al respecto, tres tipos de entornos de párrafo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +No anidables +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Totalmente anidables, puedes anidarlos en otros y también anidar otras cosas + en ellos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Parcialmente anidables, este tipo de entornos pueden anidarse en otros pero + no se puede anidar en ellos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +He aquí una lista de los tres tipos de comportamiento respecto a la anidación + y los entornos que los tienen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +anidables No pueden anidarse. + No pueden anidar. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Bibliografía +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Resumen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Título +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Autor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Fecha +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +Totalmente +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +anidables Puedes anidarlos. + Puedes anidar otras cosas en ellos. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Verso +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Citar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Citación +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Enumeración* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Enumeración +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Descripción +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Lista +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Código-LyX +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +Parcialmente +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +anidables Puedes anidarlos en otros entornos. + No puedes anidar nada en ellos. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Normal +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Parte +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Capítulo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Sección +\family default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsección +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsubsección +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Párrafo +\family default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subpárrafo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Parte* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Capítulo* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Sección* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsección* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Subsubsección* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Dirección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +derecha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Dirección +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default +Aunque es posible anidar encabezados de sección numerados, como +\family sans +Capítulo, Sección +\family default +, etc., p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en listas, es muy recomendable no hacerlo porque el objetivo es componer + documentos bien estructurados respetuosos con las normas tipográficas, + pero la anidación de encabezados de sección viola dichas normas. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Anidar otras cosas: cuadros, ecuaciones, flotantes, etc. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anidación ! Cuadros y otros +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay varias cosas que no son entornos de párrafo, pero a las que de todas + formas les atañe la anidación. + Son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ecuaciones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +cuadros +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +figuras +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +( +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + A las figuras y cuadros en +\family sans +Flotantes +\family default + no les afecta esto. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Echa un vistazo a la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Flotantes" + +\end_inset + + para más información sobre +\family sans +Flotantes +\family default +.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX puede manejar estos tres objetos bien como palabras, bien como párrafos. + Si una figura, cuadro o ecuación están en una línea, van a la par del párrafo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por otra parte, si tienes una ecuación, figura o cuadro en su propio +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +párrafo +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, se comportan igual que un entorno del tipo +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +anidación parcial +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Puedes anidarlos en otros entornos, pero obviamente no puedes anidar nada + en ellos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +He aquí un ejemplo con un cuadro: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Ítem Uno +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Esto es (a) y está anidado. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Esto es (b). + El cuadro está realmente anidado en (a). +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Fuera otra vez. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si no anidamos el cuadro, la lista se vería así: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Ítem Uno +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Esto es (a) y está anidado. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Esto es (b). + El cuadro +\emph on +no +\emph default + está anidado en (a). + De hecho, no está anidado de ninguna forma. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Fuera otra vez. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Observa cómo el ítem (b) no sólo no está anidado, sino que además ¡es el + primer ítem de una nueva lista! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay otra trampa en la que puedes caer: Anidar el cuadro pero sin la profundidad + suficiente. + Entonces LyX convierte todo lo que sigue al cuadro en una nueva sublista. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Ítem Uno +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Esto es (a) y está anidado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Esto es (b). + El cuadro está realmente anidado en el Ítem Uno, +\emph on +no +\emph default + en (a). +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Fuera otra vez. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como ves, el ítem (b) se ha convertido en el primer ítem de una nueva lista, + pero dentro del ítem 1. + Lo mismo sucedería a una ecuación o a una figura. + Así pues, si anidas cuadros, figuras o ecuaciones, ¡asegúrate de darle + la profundidad adecuada! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Empleo y características generales +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hablando de niveles, LyX puede poner hasta seis niveles de anidación. + En otras palabras, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +nivel #6 +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + es el nivel más interno posible de profundidad. + Este ejemplo muestra lo que decimos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +nivel #1 - el más externo +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +nivel #2 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +nivel #3 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +nivel #4 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +nivel #5 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +nivel #6 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Hay dos excepciones al límite de seis niveles de anidación, y ambas las + puedes ver en el ejemplo. + A diferencia de los demás entornos con anidación completa, los entornos + +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + y +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default + sólo admiten cuatro niveles de anidación. + Así, si intentamos anidar un subnivel más de +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + bajo el ítem +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +A. +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, se generará error. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Algunos ejemplos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Anidación ! Ejemplos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La mejor forma de explicar lo que podemos hacer con la anidación es practicando. + Tenemos varios ejemplos de entornos anidados, en los que explicamos cómo + se ha procedido, para que puedas reproducirlos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ejemplo 1: Los seis niveles y anidación mezclada +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ejemplo 1: Lista con seis niveles +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#1-a Este es el nivel más externo. + Está en un entorno +\family sans +Lista +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#2-a Este es el nivel #2. + Lo hemos hecho con +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + seguido de +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#3-a Este es el nivel #3. + Esta vez, sólo pulsamos +\family sans +Entrar +\family default +, luego +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default + dos veces en una fila. + También podríamos haber hecho como en el nivel anterior, pulsando +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + seguido de +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Esto es realmente un entorno +\family sans +Normal +\family default +, anidado en el ítem +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +#3-a +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + Así que está en el nivel #4. + Lo hemos hecho pulsando +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default +, luego +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default +, luego cambiando el párrafo a +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. + Haz esto para crear ítems con más de un párrafo; ¡también funciona en los + entornos +\family sans +Descripción +\family default +, +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +, y +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default +! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí hay otro párrafo +\family sans +Normal +\family default +, también en el nivel #4, hecho con sólo un +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#4-a Este es nivel #4. + Hemos pulsado +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + y cambiado el párrafo de nuevo a +\family sans +List +\family default +a. + Recuerda: no podemos anidar nada en entorno +\family sans +Normal +\family default +, que es por lo que aún estamos en el nivel #4. + No obstante, +\emph on +podemos +\emph default + mantener cosas anidadas en +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +#3-a +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#5-a Este es el nivel #5\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{} +y este el nivel #6. + Ahora ya deberías saber cómo hacer estos dos. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#5-b Vuelta al nivel #5. + Sólo pulsa +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + seguido de +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#4-b Vuelta al nivel #4 tras +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + seguido de +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#3-b Vuelta al nivel #3. + Ya debería ser obvio cómo hacerlo. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#2-b Vuelta al nivel #2. + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +#1-b Y por último, volvemos al nivel más externo, #1. + Después de esta frase, pulsaremos +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + y retornaremos a párrafo +\family sans +Normal +\family default + para finalizar la lista. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Podríamos haber usado también los entornos +\family sans +Descripción +\family default +, +\family sans +Citar +\family default +, +\family sans +Citación +\family default +, o incluso +\family sans +Verso +\family default + en lugar del entorno +\family sans +Lista +\family default +. + El ejemplo habría funcionado exactamente igual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ejemplo 2: Herencia +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +Esto es el entorno Código-LyX en nivel #1, el más externo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +Ahora presionamos +\family sans +Entrar +\family default +, luego +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default +, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +después de lo cuál, cambiamos a +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Esto es entorno +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + en el nivel #2. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Observa cómo el +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + anidado no sólo hereda sus márgenes de su entorno progenitor ( +\family sans +Código-LyX +\family default +), sino que ¡también hereda su letra y espaciado! +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Hemos terminado este ejemplo pulsando +\family sans +Entrar +\family default +. + Después hemos de reiniciar a párrafo +\family sans +Normal +\family default + y reiniciar la profundidad de anidación con +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda +\family default + una vez. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ejemplo 3: Etiquetas y niveles en los entornos +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + y +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default + +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ejemplo 3: Etiquetas, niveles y otras listas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Este es el nivel #1, en un entorno de párrafo +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +. + Vamos a anidar realmente un puñado de ellos. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Este es el nivel #2. + Hemos usado +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + seguido de +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default +. + Ahora, ¿qué sucede si anidamos un entorno +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default + en éste? Estará en el nivel #3, pero ¿cuál será su etiqueta? ¿Un asterisco? +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +¡No! Es un punto grueso. +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\size normal +\emph on +\color none +N. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +del t.: +\size default +\emph default +\color inherit +véase nota +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "np:N.del-t.:-item" + +\end_inset + + +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no + en la sección +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Enumeración*" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +\bar default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcounter{MyRepeatFoot} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +setcounter{MyRepeatFoot}{ +\backslash +thefootnote} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Este es el +\emph on +primer +\emph default + entorno +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default +, a pesar de estar en el nivel #3. + Por eso su etiqueta es un punto. + (Hemos llegado aquí con +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default +, luego +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default +, luego cambiando a entorno +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +*.) +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Aquí tenemos un nivel #4, generado con +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default +, luego +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default +. + Haremos esto otra vez\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\SpecialChar \ldots{} +para conseguir el nivel #5. + Esta vez, sin embargo, también hemos vuelto a entorno +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +. + Observa que el tipo de numeración es +\emph on +romana +\emph default +, +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +footnotemark[ +\backslash +theMyRepeatFoot] +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +\bar default + porque estamos en el +\emph on +tercer nivel +\emph default + de +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + (o sea, es una +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + dentro de una +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + dentro de una +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +¿Qué pasa si +\emph on +no +\emph default + cambiamos el entorno de párrafo, pero disminuye la profundidad de anidación? + ¿Qué tipo de numeración usará LyX? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +¡Oh!, como si no lo pudieras imaginar ya, sólo hemos usado +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + para mantener el entorno y profundidad actuales pero crea un nuevo ítem. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Usemos +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda +\family default + para disminuir la profundidad después del siguiente +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Este es el nivel #4. + ¡Mira el tipo de etiqueta que está usando LyX! +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Este es el nivel #3. + A pesar de que hemos cambiado los niveles, LyX todavía pone números romanos. +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +footnotemark[ +\backslash +theMyRepeatFoot] +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +\bar default + ¿Por qué? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Porque, aunque ha cambiado la profundidad de anidación, el párrafo +\emph on +todavía +\emph default + está en el tercer nivel del entorno +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +. + Observa, sin embargo, que LyX +\emph on +ha reiniciado +\emph default + el contador de la etiqueta. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Otra secuencia +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda +\family default +, y volvemos al nivel #2. + Esta vez, no sólo hemos cambiado la profundidad de anidación, también hemos + vuelto al nivel de anidación 2 en el entorno +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Lo mismo sucede si hacemos otra secuencia +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda +\family default + y volvemos al nivel #1, el más externo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por último, reiniciamos el entorno a +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. + Como puedes ver, el número de nivel no corresponde al tipo de etiqueta + que usa LyX para los entornos +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + y +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default +. + El número de otros entornos +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + que lo envuelven determina qué clase de etiqueta pone LyX para un ítem + de +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +. + La misma regla se aplica también para el entorno +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ejemplo 4: Perdiendo la chaveta +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Ahora vamos a ir locos del todo. + No queremos anidar tan profundo como en los otros ejemplos, ni vamos a + dar tantos detalles sobre cómo lo hacemos. + (nivel #1: +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +( +\family sans +Entrar, Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha, Normal +\family default +: nivel #2) En algunos sitios pondremos entre paréntesis una descripción + de cómo se ha hecho. + Por ejemplo, los dos atajos de teclado para cambiar la profundidad. + El nombre del entorno es el nombre del entorno actual. + Delante o detrás pondremos el nivel. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +( +\family sans +Entrar, Enumeración +\family default +: nivel #1) Este es el siguiente ítem en la lista. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Verse +Vamos a añadir ahora un verso. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Para que esto resulte aún más perverso. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +( +\family sans +Entrar, Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha, Verso +\family default +: nivel #2) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Bippitey boppitey boo! +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +( +\family sans +Alt+Entrar) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Ahora viene un cuadro: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +un-pez +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +dos-peces +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +pez-rojo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pez-azul +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Verse +( +\family sans +Alt+Entrar, Cuadro, Mayúsculas+Alt+Derecha +\family default + 3 veces, +\family sans +Alt+Entrar, Verso, Mayúsculas+Alt+Izquierda +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +( +\family sans +Entrar, Enumeración +\family default +: nivel #1) Este es otro ítem. + Observa que al seleccionar un +\family sans +Cuadro +\family default + se reinicia la anidación al nivel #1, así que aumentamos la profundidad + 3 veces para poner el cuadro dentro del entorno +\family sans +Verso +\family default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Terminamos la lista +\family sans +Enumeración +\family default + y cambiamos a +\family sans +Cita +\family default +. + Aún estamos en el nivel #1. + Queremos mostrar algunas cosas que puedes hacer mezclando entornos. + El próximo grupo de párrafos es una +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +carta en cita +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Anidaremos los entornos +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + y +\family sans +Dirección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Derecha +\family default + dentro de éste, luego usaremos otra +\family sans +Cita +\family default + anidada para el cuerpo de la carta. + Usaremos +\family sans +Alt+Entrar +\family default + para preservar la profundidad. + Recuerda que debes usar +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default + para crear múltiples líneas en los entornos +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + y +\family sans +Dirección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Derecha +\family default +. + Aquí va: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Right Address +C/ Lacalle 123 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Villaratón, CP 00100 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +9-6-06 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Estimado Sr. + Fizlewitz: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Lamentamos informarle que no podemos completar su pedido de 50 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +L de gas metano comprimido debido a circunstancias que escapan a nuestro + control. + Desgraciadamente, algunas de nuestras vacas han explotado misteriosamente, + originando un retraso en nuestros pedidos de metano. + Pondremos su nombre en lista de espera y le enviaremos el pedido lo antes + posible. + Mientras tanto, agradecemos su paciencia. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Tenemos, por otra parte, una oferta especial de buey. + Si le interesa, envíe por favor el formulario de pedido adjunto, junto + con el pago. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Agradecemos su paciencia. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Atentamente, +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Bill Hick +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Quotation +¡Aquí finaliza este ejemplo! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como puedes comprobar, anidar entornos en LyX te da un gran poderío con + sólo unos cuantos tecleos. + Fácilmente podríamos anidar una lista +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default + en un entorno +\family sans +Cita +\family default + o +\family sans +Citar +\family default +, o poner una +\family sans +Cita +\family default + en una +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default +. + Tienes a tu disposición una amplia variedad de opciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Espacios, paginación y saltos de línea +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +¿Qué es un espacio? Aunque estarás acostumbrado a pulsar la tecla espacio + cada vez que quieres separar dos palabras, como en los procesadores de + texto habituales, LyX dispone de más espacios: Espacios de diferente longitud + y espacios que pueden, o no, quebrarse al final de la línea. + Las siguientes secciones mostrarán algunos ejemplos de situaciones en las + que esta variedad de espacios resulta útil. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Espacio protegido +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios ! Protegido +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espacio-protegido" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El espacio protegido sirve para indicar a LyX (y a LaTeX) que no rompa la + línea en ese punto. + Puede ser conveniente para evitar feos saltos de línea, como en: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Hay más información en la sección +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliografía" + +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Obviamente, sería bueno poner un espacio protegido entre +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +sección +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliografía" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + El espacio protegido se inserta con +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +protegido +\family default + (atajo +\family sans +Ctrl+Espacio). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Espacio horizontal +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios ! Horizontal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espacio-horizontal" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Todos los espacios horizontales se pueden insertar con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espacio horizontal +\family default +. + La lista de las unidades de longitud se encuentra en el apéndice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Unidades-disponibles" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Espacio entre palabras +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espacio-entre-palabra" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios ! Entre palabras +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En tipografía de algunos idiomas (p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +inglés) existe la convención de añadir espacio extra detrás del signo de + puntuación de un fin de frase; LyX respeta esta convención, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Abreviaturas" + +\end_inset + + por ejemplos. + Sin embargo, +\lang english +you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed + by a period +\lang spanish +. + En ese caso, puedes insertarlo con +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +entre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +palabras (atajo Ctrl+Alt+Espacio). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Espacio delgado +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espacio-delgado" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios ! Delgado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un «espacio delgado» es un espacio con la mitad de la longitud normal (y + también es «protegido»). + Las convenciones tipográficas en muchos idiomas proponen el uso de espacios + menores en los casos en que un espacio normal resultaría demasiado amplio, + por ejemplo en las abreviaturas: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +D. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +E. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Knuth ha desarrollado nuestro querido programa de tipografía, TeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +O entre valores y unidades. + Compara por ejemplo: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +10 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +kg (espacio delgado) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +10 kg (espacio normal) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los espacios delgados se insertan con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +delgado +\family default + (atajo +\family sans +Ctrl+Mayúsculas+Espacio +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Otros espacios +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además se pueden insertar los siguientes tipos de espacio: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +delgado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +negativo Espacio delgado negativo +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + + entre las flechas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Medio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cuadratín +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) Espacio de medio cuadratín (0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \enskip{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + + entre las flechas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cuadratín +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) Espacio de un cuadratín (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \quad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + + entre las flechas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Doble +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cuadratín +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) Espacio de dos cuadratines (2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \qquad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + + entre las flechas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +personalizado Espacio de 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hspace{} +\length 2cm +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + + entre las flechas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En el cuadro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Anchura-espacios" + +\end_inset + + se encuentran los distintos tamaños de los espacios. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Anchura-espacios" + +\end_inset + +Anchura de los distintos espacios horizontales. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Espacio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Anchura +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Normal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Protegido +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Delgado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Delgado negativo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +-1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Medio cuadratín +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cuadratín +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Doble cuadratín +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Relleno horizontal +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios ! Relleno horizontal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El relleno horizontal es una característica especial de LyX para añadir + espacio extra de manera uniforme. + Un relleno horizontal es en realidad un espacio variable, que rellena el + espacio restante entre los márgenes izquierdo y derecho. + Si hay más de un relleno horizontal en la misma línea, el espacio disponible + se reparte equitativamente entre ellos. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Veamos unos ejemplos de lo que se puede hacer con ellos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Esto está a la izquierda +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Esto a la derecha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Izquierda +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Centro +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Derecha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Izquierda +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +1/3 Izquierda +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Derecha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ha sido un ejemplo en un entorno +\family sans +Citar +\family default +. + Aquí +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + hay uno en un párrafo +\family sans +Normal +\family default +. + Puede que no sea visible en el texto impreso, pero el relleno +\emph on +está +\emph default + entre las flechas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los rellenos horizontales se pueden hacer visibles si eliges uno de los + +\family sans +Patrones +\family default + en el diálogo de espacios. + Los siguientes patrones están disponibles: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puntos: +\begin_inset space \dotfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Línea: +\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Flecha izquierda: +\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Flecha derecha: +\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Llave arriba: +\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Llave abajo: +\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + Si hay un relleno horizontal al principio de una línea que +\emph on +no +\emph default + es la primera del párrafo, LyX lo ignora. + Esto impide que el relleno se quiebre accidentalmente en otra línea. + Si en algún caso necesitas ese espacio, marca la opción +\family sans +Proteger +\family default + en el diálogo de configuración de espacios. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Espacio fantasma +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espacio-fantasma" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios ! fantasma +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A veces querrás insertar espacios con, exactamente, la longitud de una frase. + P.e., puedes crear la siguiente pregunta de elección múltiple: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +¿Qué es inglés correcto?: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge would have been jumps the gun. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +has to be jumped +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +jumps +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Así las opciones aparecen exactamente después de las palabras +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Para conseguirlo puedes usar los recuadros fantasmas disponibles en el + menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fantasma +\family default +. + En nuestro caso se ha insertado un fantasma horizontal al principio de + las dos últimas líneas y en el recuadro hemos escrito +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (observa el espacio detrás de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). + Un recuadro fantasma imprime solo el espacio correspondiente a su contenido + (como un marcador de posición). + De ahí su nombre, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +fantasma +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + El fantasma normal imprime un espacio de la anchura y altura de su contenido, + mientras que las variantes horizontal y vertical imprimen solo el hueco + de la dimensión correspondiente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Espacio vertical +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios ! Vertical +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espacio-vertical" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para añadir espacio vertical extra sobre o bajo un párrafo, usa el diálogo + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical. + +\family default + Encontrarás los espacios siguientes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Pequeño +\family default +, +\family sans +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Medio +\family default + y +\family sans +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Grande +\family default + son tamaños LaTeX estándar que dependen del tamaño de letra del documento. + +\family sans +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Predeterminado +\family default + es el salto establecido en el diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Diseño +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + para la separación de párrafos. + Si usas sangrado para separar los párrafos, +\family sans +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Predeterminado +\family default + es igual a +\family sans +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Medio +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Relleno +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical +\family default + es un espacio variable, establecido de forma que es máximo en una página + dada. + Un ejemplo: Tienes dos breves párrafos en una página, con un relleno vertical + entre ambos. + Entonces el primer párrafo se sitúa al principio de la página y el segundo + al final, de forma que entre ellos el espacio es el máximo posible. + +\family sans +Relleno +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical +\family default + funciona como +\family sans +Relleno +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal +\family default +: llena en blanco el espacio vertical sobrante en una página. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Relleno +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal +\family default + se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-horizontal" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Si hay varios rellenos verticales en una página, dividen equitativamente + entre ellos el espacio sobrante: Puedes usar varios rellenos para centrar + texto en una página o ponerlo, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej., 2/3 abajo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Personalizado +\family default + sirve para poner cualquier espacio en una de las unidades explicadas en + el apéndice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Unidades-disponibles" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + +\series medium +Si el espacio vertical extra coincidiera en la salida con inicio/fin de + una página, el espacio será añadido sólo si se marca la opción +\family sans +Proteger +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Alineación de párrafos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Párrafos ! Alineación +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se puede cambiar la alineación del texto en un párrafo con el diálogo +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +párrafo +\family default + (botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). + Hay cinco posibilidades: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Justificado +\family default + (atajo +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align block" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Izquierda +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align left" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Derecha +\family default +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align right" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Centro +\family default +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align center" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Predeterminado +\family default +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align default" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la mayoría de los casos la opción por omisión es justificado, en la que + el hueco entre palabras es variable y cada línea llena el espacio entre + los márgenes izquierdo y derecho. + Las otras tres opciones son evidentes, y se verían así: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align right +Párrafo alineado a la derecha. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +Párrafo que está centrado, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align left +Párrafo alineado a la izquierda. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Saltos de página forzados +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Salto de página ! Forzado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Saltos-de-página-forzados" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si no te gustan los saltos de página que LaTeX hace en tu documento, puedes + insertarlos donde quieras. + Normalmente no será necesario, porque LaTeX es bueno en eso. + Aunque si tienes muchos +\family sans +Flotantes +\family default +, LaTeX puede fallar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Recomendamos no utilizar saltos de página forzados hasta acabar el documento + y haber visto en una vista preliminar si +\emph on +realmente +\emph default + tienes que cambiar la paginación. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay dos clases de saltos de página: Uno finaliza la página sin ninguna acción + especial. + Este se puede insertar encima o debajo de un párrafo con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Página +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nueva +\family default +. + El segundo tipo, que se inserta mediante el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +página +\family default +finaliza una página, pero comprime su contenido de forma que éste llene + la página completa. + Este tipo es útil para evitar espacios en blanco cuando un salto de página + da lugar a una página con muy pocas líneas. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Podrías probar el uso de un salto de página para asegurar que una figura + o un cuadro se sitúe a principio de página. + Por supuesto, ésta es una forma incorrecta de hacerlo. + LyX tiene mecanismos para asegurar que tus figuras y cuadros aparezcan + automáticamente en la parte superior de la página (o abajo, o en página + propia) sin tener que preocuparse sobre lo que precede o sigue al cuadro + o figura. + Véase el capítulo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Notas-y-flotantes" + +\end_inset + + para aprender más sobre +\family sans +Flotantes +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Saltos de página limpia +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Salto-de-página-limpia" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Salto de página ! Limpia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A diferencia de los saltos de página forzados, en los que el contenido siguiente + al salto se coloca directamente en la página siguiente, también se pueden + despejar las páginas a la vez que se quiebran. + Esto significa que el párrafo actual se termina y todo lo demás, quizá + flotantes de partes previas del documento no procesados aún, se colocan + detrás, añadiendo páginas si hace falta. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los saltos de página limpia se pueden insertar con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Limpiar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +página +\family default +. + Si el documento es con dos caras puedes usar el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Limpiar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +página +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +doble +\family default +, para asegurar que la página escrita siguiente va en la primera cara (página + impar), añadiendo, si es necesario, una página en blanco. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Saltos de línea forzados +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Salto de línea +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Salto-de-línea-forzado" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay dos tipos de saltos de línea: Uno simplemente quiebra la línea. + Se puede forzar este salto de línea con +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +línea +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cortada +\family default + o con +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default +. + El otro tipo, que se inserta con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +línea +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +justificada +\family default + o con +\family sans +Ctrl+Shift+Entrar +\family default +, rompe la línea y la comprime para llenar todo el espacio entre los márgenes. + Esto viene bien para evitar +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +flequillos +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en párrafos justificados debido al espacio en blanco introducido por el + salto de línea. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +No deberías forzar saltos de línea para corregir los saltos de línea de + LaTeX, porque LaTeX es muy bueno en esto. + Sin embargo, hay ciertas situaciones en las que es necesario forzar un + salto de línea, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. + en un poema o en una dirección (véanse las secciones +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Citar" + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Verso" + +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Empleo-direcciones" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Líneas horizontales +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Líneas-horizontales" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lineas@Líneas horizontales +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +Con el diálogo +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Línea +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal +\family default + puedes dibujar líneas horizontales. + El desplazamiento es la distancia vertical entre la línea y la base de + la línea de texto o párrafo. + Las características de la línea se muestran con clic izquierdo sobre ella. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Caracteres y símbolos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes insertar directamente todos los caracteres disponibles en tu teclado. + También puedes usar mapas de teclado especiales para escribir caracteres + franceses con un teclado inglés, por ejemplo. + Véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Configuración-del-mapa" + +\end_inset + + para más información. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para los casos en que necesites caracteres que no estén en el teclado, puedes + usar el diálogo +\family sans +Símbolos +\family default + del menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Carácter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +especial +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + Es posible que no todos los símbolos insertados con ese diálogo se muestren + en pantalla con determinadas tipografías disponibles en las preferencias + de LyX. + Pero en todo caso, los símbolos aparecerán en la salida. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Estilos de letra y de texto +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Estilo-de-letra" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Clases tipográficas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografías ! Clases +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay dos clases de tipografías: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Tipografías +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vectoriales +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografías ! Vectoriales +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + construidos a partir de trazos de formas simples (p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. + caracteres). + Significa que cada símbolo se define mediante curvas matemáticas que son + adecuadas para adaptarse a cualquier tamaño requerido. + Esta definición matemática es interpretada por el servidor de tipos y la + curva se rellena con píxeles de acuerdo con el tamaño. + Esto conlleva que las letras trazadas pintan muy bien en todos los tamaños. + Sólo a muy pequeños tamaños podría resultar complicado suministrar una + buena apariencia, ya que cada píxel debe ser computado muy cuidadosamente + para generar una buena imagen. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Podría pensarse que solo hace falta definir un tamaño y redimensionar los + demás a escala. + Pero para conseguir buena calidad, muchas tipografías están definidas en + varios tamaños. + Esto mejora la apariencia, porque se necesitan más detalles para tamaños + grandes que para tamaños pequeños. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Las tipografías +\family typewriter +TrueType +\family default +, +\family typewriter +OpenType +\family default +, y +\family typewriter +Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\family default + son vectoriales. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Tipografías +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mapa +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bits +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografías ! Mapa de bits +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + que se definen mediante gráficos en mapa de bits desde el principio, así + que se verán muy bien en todos los tamaños para los que estén definidas. + Sin embargo, no se redimensionan bien, porque para variar una forma cada + píxel debe desdoblarse en varios píxeles. + Es el mismo efecto que se produce cuando aumentas el zoom para ver una + imagen. + Con el fin de mitigar este efecto, las tipografías mapa de bits se suelen + suministrar en varios tamaños, los que se consideran más útiles. + La ventaja de las tipografías mapa de bits es que no se necesitan complicados + cálculos para diseñar cada carácter, y por tanto se procesan más rápidamente + que las tipografías de tamaño variable. + La desventaja es que los tamaños que no existen de forma predefinida tienen + que redimensionarse desdoblando píxeles y entonces no pintan muy bien. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Las tipografías mapa de bits se conocen como +\family typewriter +Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\family default + en documentos PostScript y PDF. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La conclusión de todo esto es que las tipografías mapa de bits son mejores + en aquellos tamaños para los que están diseñadas, mientras que las tipografías + ajustables son buenas para casi todos los tamaños. + Se necesitan menos definiciones de tamaño para tipografías variables. + Esta es la razón por la que casi todos los programas de tipografía y servidores + de texto emplean tipografías ajustables. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para averiguar qué tipografías se usan en un documento PDF, puedes echar + una mirada a sus propiedades. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Muchos modernos lenguajes de diseño y de tipografía han comenzado a migrar + hacia estilos de especificación de caracteres en vez de especificación + de una tipografía particular. + Por ejemplo, en lugar de cambiar a una versión en cursiva de la tipografía + actual para enfatizar un texto, puedes usar un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +estilo énfasis +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Este concepto encaja perfectamente en LyX. + En LyX haces las cosas basándote en el contexto en lugar de estar pendiente + de los detalles de la tipografía. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Soporte de tipografías LaTeX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Tradicionalmente, LaTeX usa sus propias tipografías. + Es decir, no puedes acceder directamente a las tipografías instaladas en + el sistema operativo, sino que has de usar las tipografías específicas + proporcionadas por la distribución LaTeX. + La razón es que LaTeX necesita cierta información extra sobre las tipografías + que debe ser suministrada por archivos y paquetes adicionales. + La desventaja de esto es que la elección de tipografías está algo limitada + en comparación con los habituales procesadores de texto. + Por otra parte, tiene la ventaja de que las tipografías proporcionadas + son, en general, de muy buena calidad y que los archivos LaTeX son portables + a diferentes máquinas. + Además, el rango de tipografías soportadas por el tradicional LaTeX ha + ido aumentando considerablemente y se pueden encontrar paquetes para muchas + tipografías libres y comerciales. + En LyX, solo un subconjunto de estas es directamente accesible en la interfaz + de usuario, (véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Formato-de-documento" + +\end_inset + + para más detalle). + No obstante, todas las demás son accesibles si se introduce el correspondiente + código LaTeX en el preámbulo del documento (por favor, consulta la documentació +n de la tipografía deseada). + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por otra parte, desarrollos recientes han aportado algunos nuevos ingenios + LaTeX que son capaces de acceder directamente a las tipografías instaladas + por el sistema operativo (SO), a saber, XeTeX y LuaTeX. + Ambos ingenios son soportados por LyX. + Con ellos, teóricamente se puede usar cualquier tipografía OpenType o TrueType + instalada en el sistema. + La siguiente sección describe cómo usar estas tipografías del SO. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +\color none +Nota +\series default +: En la práctica, algunas tipografías podrían no funcionar debido a métricas + defectuosas u otras deficiencias, de modo que puede que tengas que experimentar. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +\color none +Nota +\series default +: XeTeX y especialmente LuaTeX aún son bastante nuevos y por tanto no tan + maduros como los tradicionales LaTeX o PDFLaTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tipo y tamaño de letra en un documento +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Tipografía-del-documento" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografías ! Tamaño +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Tipografías +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las tipografías de un documento se establecen en +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + En la sección +\family sans +Tipografías +\family default + se puede especificar la tipografía a usar para cada forma ―romana (serif), + +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif +\family default + (palo seco) y +\family typewriter +ancho fijo +\family default +―, el tamaño base de la tipografía y factores de escala para determinadas + tipografías sans serif y ancho fijo por si fuera necesario ajustarlas a + la tipografía romana. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si se selecciona +\family sans + Usar tipografías no T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +, se puede acceder a las tipografías instaladas en el sistema operativo. + Esto requiere el uso de +\family sans +PDF (XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF (LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + o +\family sans +DVI (LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + como formato de salida, por tanto debe estar instalado XeTeX o LuaTeX (véase + la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" + +\end_inset + +). + En ese caso no habrá acceso a las tipografías propias de TeX (la selección + que se describe más abajo). + Hay que señalar que LyX lista todas las tipografías disponibles en cualquiera + de las tres listas (romana, sans serif y ancho fijo), puesto que LyX no + puede determinar la familia. + Además, la salida podría fallar con algunas de las tipografías listadas, + debido a la codificación o a fallos de las propias tipografías. + De nuevo, LyX no puede detectar esto de antemano, por lo que podría ser + necesario experimentar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si se usan tipografías TeX (opción por omisión), las opciones posibles incluyen + +\family sans +Predeterminado +\family default + y una lista de las tipografías disponibles en el sistema. + La opción +\family sans +Predeterminado +\family default + usa las tipografías estándar de TeX, conocidas como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +Computer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ( +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +) o +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +European Computer Modern +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ( +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + y +\family typewriter +ec +\family default + son tipografías mapa de bits, a menudo se ven pixeladas en la salida PDF, + sobre todo si se lee con ampliación. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Este problema no aparece en +\family typewriter +Adobe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Reader +\family default + versión 6 o posterior, porque este programa incluye un servidor especial + de tipografías mapa de bits. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Pero en general, para evitar caracteres pixelados hay que usar tipografías + vectoriales. + Veamos tres posibilidades para usarlas: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Utilizar la tipografía +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +. + Esta tipografía ha sido desarrollada por la comunidad LaTeX para reemplazar + a +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + como tipografía predeterminadas.En la mayoría de los casos tienen un aspecto + semejante a +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Una diferencia es un interletraje mejorado. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, pero +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + cubre un enorme número de caracteres en comparación con las familias +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + y +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Elegir la tipografía +\family sans +AE +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Almost +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European) +\family default + en el caso (raro) de que +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + no esté disponible o no funcione, y se desee emular el aspecto de +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +/ +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +. + +\family typewriter +AE +\family default + se refiere a +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Almost European +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y es una tipografía virtual. + Virtual significa que +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +roba +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + perfiles de otras tipografías. + Esto tiene la desventaja de que algunos caracteres se pierden, como las + comillas francesas, ( +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +« +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +» +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Este problema se soluciona cargando el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +aeguill +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! aeguill +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + en el preámbulo, con la línea +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[ec]{aeguill} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, y que los caracteres acentuados no se forman con +\emph on +uno +\emph default + sino con +\emph on +dos +\emph default + caracteres, el acento y la letra. + Por esto no puedes buscar palabras con acentos en documentos creados con + la tipografía +\family typewriter +AE +\family default +. + Por ejemplo. + si buscas la palabra francesa +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +brève +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en un PDF, no obtienes ningún resultado, porque el visor PDF busca el carácter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +è +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y no los caracteres +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + e + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + ̀ +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Si no nos agrada el aspecto de +\family typewriter + cm +\family default +/ +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +, podemos seleccionar una de las otras tipografías vectoriales suministradas, + por ejemplo, +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + o +\family typewriter + +\family sans +Palatino +\family default +. + La mayoría de tipografías romanas vectoriales seleccionarán automáticamente + las correspondientes tipografías sans serif y ancho fijo +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +A veces corresponden otras tipografías, (p. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ej., +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + selecciona +\family sans +Helvetica +\family default + para sans serif), o diferentes formas de la misma letra, o sea, una +\emph on +familia +\emph default + real de letras (p. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ej. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +con +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default + o +\family sans +Computer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, aunque se pueden seleccionar a conveniencia. + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Las diferencias entre las tipografías romana +\family sans +, +\family default + +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif +\family default +y +\family typewriter +ancho fijo +\family default + se explican en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ajuste-fino-con" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +La tipografía +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + se diseñó originalmente para periódicos. + Esto significa que sus formas son más pequeñas que las de otras tipografías + para encajar en las pequeñas columnas de un periódico. + Así pues, +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default + no es la elección óptima para documentos extensos como los libros. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para el tamaño de carácter hay cuatro valores posibles: +\family sans +Predeterminado, 10 +\family default +, +\family sans +11 +\family default +, y +\family sans +12 +\family default +. + Algunas clases proporcionan tamaños adicionales. + El +\family sans +predeterminado +\family default + depende de la clase que se esté usando. + En las clases estándar equivale a 10. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los tamaños de carácter son +\emph on +tamaños base +\emph default +. + En realidad, LyX redimensiona todos los otros tamaños posibles (tales como + los que se usan en notas, exponentes y subíndices) según este valor. + Siempre podrás afinar el tamaño de letra en aquellas partes de texto en + que lo necesites mediante el diálogo +\family sans +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto +\family default +. + Esto se desarrolla en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ajuste-fino-con" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La selección +\family sans +Familia predeterminada +\family default + permite especificar si la tipografía base del documento debe ser romana, + sans serif o ancho fijo. + La opción +\family sans +Predeterminado +\family default + usa la predefinida por la clase, las demás selecciones invalidan esto. + +\family sans +Predeterminado +\family default + equivale a romana, pero algunas clases (como las de presentaciones) usan + además otros valores. + +\family sans + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La selección +\family typewriter + +\family sans +Codificación de tipografías LaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default + es una configuración para expertos que permite cambiar el valor pasado + al paquete LaTeX +\series bold +fontenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! fontenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (véase también sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Configuración" + +\end_inset + +). + Normalmente, no hace falta cambiar (ni siquiera entender) esto. + A menos que haya una razón, es mejor usar +\family sans +Predeterminado +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con algunas tipografías, las casillas +\family sans +Usar versalitas verdaderas +\family default + y +\family sans +Usar estilo antiguo para las cifras +\family default + se activan. + Son características adicionales suministradas por algunas tipografías. + Si se marca +\family sans +Usar estilo antiguo para las cifras +\family default +, la tipografía utiliza números en estilo antiguo (también llamado medieval, + elzeviriano o de texto), es decir, cifras con altura variable que se adaptan + graciosamente a las minúsculas. + +\family sans +Usar versalitas verdaderas +\family default + determina que se usarán versalitas auténticas en lugar de falsas versalitas + construidas con mayúsculas redimensionadas. + Las versalitas auténticas suelen formar parte de colecciones expertas de + tipografías; generalmente su aspecto es mejor que el de las falsas versalitas, + aunque a veces se deben adquirir separadamente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El campo +\family sans +CJK +\family default + permite a usuarios de los idiomas chino, japonés o coreano (CJK) especificar + una tipografía para la escritura de caracteres. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +La tipografía será el argumento para los comandos del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +CJK +\series default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Así, esto no tiene efecto para el idioma de documento +\family sans +Japonés +\family default + que no usa +\series bold +CJK +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default +Cuando cambias una tipografía o su tamaño en el documento, ¡LyX +\emph on +no +\emph default + cambia la tipografía en pantalla! Sólo verás la diferencia en la salida + impresa; esto es parte del concepto WYSIWYM. + Las tipografías en pantalla se pueden determinar en el diálogo +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferencias +\family default +, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tipografías-en-pantalla" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Usar diferentes estilos de carácter +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Estilo del texto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como ya hemos visto, LyX cambia automáticamente el estilo de letra en ciertos + entornos de párrafo. + LyX soporta dos estilos, +\family sans +Énfasis +\family default + y +\family sans +Versalitas +\family default +. + Puedes activarlos con atajos de teclado, con el menú, y con la barra de + herramientas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para activar el estilo +\family sans +Versalitas +\family default +, haz una de estas acciones: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +clic en el botón de la barra de herramientas +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +teclea la combinación +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +C +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Estos comandos son alternativos. + Esto es, si +\family sans +Versalitas +\family default + ya está activo, esas acciones lo desactivan. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El estilo +\family sans +Versalitas +\family default + se utiliza típicamente para nombres propios. + Por ejemplo: +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\noun on +Matthias Ettrich +\noun default + es el autor original de LyX. +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un estilo empleado más frecuentemente es el estilo +\family sans +Énfasis +\family default +. + Se activa (o se desactiva, también es alternativo) así: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +clic en el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +con la combinación de teclas +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +E +\family default +, +\family sans +Ctrl+E +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalmente el estilo +\family sans +Énfasis +\family default + equivale a letra cursiva aunque algunas clases de documento o paquetes + LaTeX usan una tipografía diferente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hemos estado usando el estilo +\family sans +Énfasis +\family default + por todos sitios en este documento. + Aquí un ejemplo más: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation + +\emph on +¡No abusen de los estilos de letra! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es un aviso además de un ejemplo. + Un escrito debería parecerse a una conversación ordinaria. + Puesto que no estamos gritando continuamente a los demás, también deberíamos + evitar abusar de los estilos de letra. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Siempre se puede restablecer la tipografía predeterminada con la combinación + +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Espacio +\family default + o el diálogo +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Estilo del texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\family default +\lang spanish + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ajuste fino con el diálogo Estilo del texto +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Ajuste-fino-con" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Estilo del texto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Siempre hay ocasiones en las que necesitas afinar el estilo del texto, por + eso LyX permite crear estilos personalizados. + Por ejemplo, una publicación académica o corporativa que tienen una hoja + de estilo que requiere una letra sans serif en ciertas situaciones. + También, escritores que a veces usan letra diferente para distinguir reflexione +s del diálogo ordinario. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Antes de explicar cómo personalizar el estilo de letra, queremos repetir + de nuevo el aviso: ¡No abuses de los estilos de letra! +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Los documentos que abusan de distintos tipos y tamaños de letra no se leen + bien y pueden llegar a parecer coladores. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para usar estilos de letra personalizados, abre el diálogo +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Estilo del texto +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Personalizado +\family default + o clic en el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +. + En él hay varios cuadros desplegables correspondientes a varias propiedades + que puedes escoger. + La opción +\family sans +Ningún +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambio +\family default + mantiene el estado actual de esa propiedad. + La opción +\family sans +Reiniciar +\family default + restablece la propiedad a su valor predeterminado. + Puedes usar esta opción para reiniciar atributos de un conjunto de párrafos + de un plumazo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las propiedades de letra y sus opciones (además de +\family sans +Ningún +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambio +\family default + y +\family sans +Reiniciar +\family default +) son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Familia +\family default + Apariencia general de la tipografía. + Las opciones posibles son: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Romana +\family default + Esta es la familia de tipos romanos. + Normalmente una tipografía serif (con remates). + Es la familia predeterminada. + (combinación +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +R +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Serif +\family default + Esta es la familia de tipografías +\family sans +Sans Serif +\family default +, (palo seco). + (combinación +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +S +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Ancho fijo +\family default + Esta es la familia de tipografías de +\family typewriter +Ancho fijo. + +\family default + (combinación +\family sans +Control+Mayúsculas+P) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Grosor +\family default + Esto corresponde a la intensidad de impresión. + Las opciones son: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Medio +\family default + Este es el grosor Medio. + Es el valor predeterminado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Negrita +\family default + +\series bold +Este es +\series default +el grosor +\series bold + Negrita. + +\series default + (combinaciones +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +B +\family default +, +\family sans +Ctrl+B +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Forma +\family default + Como su nombre indica. + Opciones: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Vertical +\family default + Esta es la forma vertical, predeterminada. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Cursiva +\family default + +\shape italic +Esta es la forma de letra cursiva +\shape default +\emph on +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Inclinada +\family default + +\shape italic +Esta es la forma de letra Inclinada +\shape default + (aunque quizá no se note en LyX, es diferente de la cursiva). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Versalitas +\family default + +\shape smallcaps +Esta es la forma de letra Versalitas +\shape default +\noun on +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Color +\family default + Esta opción permite poner el texto en color. + Ten en cuenta que no todos los visores DVI pueden mostrar colores. + Además de +\family sans +Sin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +color +\family default +, +\lang english +which means that the document default color set in +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Color +\family default + for +\family sans +Main +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\family default + is used +\lang spanish +, puedes elegir entre +\family sans +Negro +\family default +, +\family sans +Blanco +\family default +, +\family sans +Rojo, +\family default + +\family sans +Verde +\family default +, +\family sans +Azul +\family default +, +\family sans +Cian +\family default +, +\family sans +Magenta +\family default + y +\family sans +Amarillo +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! Texto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Idioma +\family default + Se usa para marcar regiones de texto en un idioma distinto al del documento. + El texto así marcado se subraya en azul para indicar el cambio (sólo en + LyX). +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Si tienes un texto más largo en otro idioma, por ejemplo, alemán, LaTeX + respeta automáticamente las reglas de división de palabras en ese idioma. + Si se usa el corrector ortográfico (sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Corrector-ortográfico" + +\end_inset + +), el texto marcado alemán se comprueba con el diccionario alemán. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tamaño +\family default + Establece el tamaño del carácter. + Encontrarás aquí valores no numéricos; todos los tamaños posibles son en + realidad proporcionales al tamaño de la tipografía del documento. + Insistimos, no das los detalles a LyX, sino una indicación general de lo + que quieres hacer. + Las opciones son: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Diminuta +\family default + +\size tiny +Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Diminuta +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\size default + (Combinaciones +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +T +\family default +, +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Pequeñísima +\family default + +\size scriptsize +Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Pequeñísima +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\size default +. + (Combinación +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Más +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pequeña +\family default + +\size footnotesize +Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Más Pequeña +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\size default + (Combinaciones +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Mayúsculas+S +\family default +, +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Pequeña +\family default + +\size small +Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Pequeña +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\size default + (Combinaciones +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +S +\family default +, +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +4 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Normal +\family default + Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Normal +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Es el valor por omisión. + (Combinaciones +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +N +\family default +, +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +5 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Grande +\family default + +\size large +Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Grande +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\size default + (Combinaciones +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\family default +, +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +6 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Más +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +grande +\family default + +\size larger +Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Más grande +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\size default + (Combinaciones +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Mayúsculas+L +\family default +, +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +7 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Grandísima +\family default + +\size largest +Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Grandísima +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\size default + (Combinación +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Enorme +\family default + +\size huge +Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Enorme +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\size default + (Combinaciones +\family sans +Alt+S Mayúsculas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +H +\family default +, +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +9 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Más +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +enorme +\family default + +\size giant +Este es el tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Más enorme +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\size default + (Combinaciones +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Mayúsculas+H +\family default +, +\family sans +Alt+S +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +0 +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Aumentar +\family default + Aumenta el tamaño un escalón (por ejemplo, de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Grandísima +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + a +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Enorme +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). + (Combinación +\family sans +Alt+S+ +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Disminuir +\family default + Disminuye el tamaño un escalón (por ejemplo, de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Normal +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + a +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Pequeña +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). + (Combinación +\family sans +Alt+S- +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Reiteramos el aviso +\emph on +otra vez +\emph default +: no te vuelvas loco con esta característica. + Casi nunca deberías necesitarla. + LyX cambia automáticamente el tamaño para diferentes entornos de párrafo, + eso está bien así. + ¡Esto es sólo para algún ajuste fino! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Otros +\family default + Aquí puedes cambiar estas otras opciones: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Énfasis +\family default + +\emph on +Texto con énfasis. + +\emph default + (Combinaciones C +\family sans +trl+E, Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +E) +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Podría parecer igual que +\shape italic +Cursiva +\shape default +, pero realmente es algo diferente. + El énfasis es un atributo +\emph on +lógico +\emph default +. + Esto significa que cada clase de documento puede definir su propia tipografía + para dar énfasis a un texto. + Normalmente equivale a cursiva. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Subrayado +\family default + +\bar under +Esto es un texto subrayado. + +\bar default + (Combinaciones C +\family sans +trl+U, Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +U) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family default +¡Evita usar subrayado si es posible! Es un recurso de los tiempos de las + máquinas de escribir, cuando no era posible cambiar de letra. + Ahora no necesitamos resaltar texto subrayando. + Se incluye en LyX sólo por si alguien lo necesita para respetar hojas de + estilo de algunas publicaciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Subrayado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +doble +\family default + +\bar under +\uuline on +Esto es un texto con doble subrayado. + +\bar default +\uuline default + (Combinación +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +D) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family default +Si acabamos de advertir contra el uso de subrayado, imagina lo que pensamos + sobre el doble subrayado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Subrayado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ondulado +\family default + +\uwave on +Esto es un texto con subrayado ondulado. + +\uwave default + (Combinación +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +W +\family default +) +\family sans + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family default +Úsalo solo si alguna publicación insiste en ello. + Ten a mano píldoras para el mareo. + +\family sans + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tachado +\family default + +\strikeout on +Esto es un texto tachado. + +\strikeout default + (Combinación +\family sans +Ctrl+Mayúsculas+O +\family default +). +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Se usa frecuentemente para señalar la versión antigua de un texto cambiado. + +\strikeout on + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Versalitas +\family default + +\noun on +Este texto está en Versalitas. + +\noun default +(Combinación +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +C +\family default +). +\noun on + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\noun default +Como +\family sans +Énfasis +\family default +, es un atributo lógico. + Normalmente equivale a +\family sans +Mayúsculas pequeñas +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Bien, tienes un gran número de opciones para escoger. + Una vez que has elegido un nuevo estilo de texto en el diálogo +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Estilo del texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\family default +\lang spanish + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +), se guardan las opciones. + Para activarlas, usa el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "textstyle-apply" +\end_inset + +. + Ese botón te permite aplicar el estado del estilo personalizado cuando + el diálogo no está visible. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para reiniciar completamente el estilo a sus valores por omisión, usa +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Espacio +\family default +. + Si quieres conmutar sólo aquellas propiedades recién cambiadas (supón que + sólo pones forma +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +inclinada +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y serie +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +negrita +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +), marca el cuadro +\family sans +Conmutar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +todo +\family default + y pulsa +\family sans +Aceptar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Deberías también saber un poco sobre las diferencias entre los tres tipos + principales de tipografías +\family sans +serif +\family default +, +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif +\family default +, y +\family sans +ancho fijo +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Ancho fijo +\family default + es una tipografía de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +ancho fijo +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (mono), significa que cada carácter tiene la misma anchura, la +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +i +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ocupa el mismo espacio que la +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +m +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Aquí hay un ejemplo +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +sin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +texto en ancho fijo +\family default + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Más sobre +\series bold + +\backslash +phantom +\series default + en la sección +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-fantasma" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +sin texto en ancho fijo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Serif +\family default + son tipografías formadas por caracteres con pequeños +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +apéndices +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +remates +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en los extremos de las líneas que los dibujan. + El siguiente ejemplo muestra las diferencias: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +texto con letras serif, con remates +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +texto con letras no serif, sin remates +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Los caracteres serif facilitan una cómoda y ágil lectura. + Por esto se usan como tipografía predeterminada (conocida por +\family sans +roman +\family default +a). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Las tipografías +\family sans +Sans serif +\family default + (palo seco) no tienen apéndices. + Por eso este tipo de letra se suele usar para encabezados y textos cortos. + En este documento la usamos para resaltar nombres de menú. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Conmutar +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + significa cambiar entre dos estados excluyentes de una propiedad de estilo + del texto. + Cuando una propiedad que está marcada para conmutar en el diálogo Estilo + del texto se aplica a un texto que ya la tenía, se le quitará al texto + dicha característica. + Si aplicas un estilo con las propiedades A, B y C a un texto que actualmente + tiene las propiedades B, C, F y G, y si B es conmutable y C no lo es, el + texto acabará por tener las propiedades A, C, F y G. + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Nunca conmutado +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Siempre conmutado +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + implican que no tienes control sobre este comportamiento. + Para las propiedades de la parte izquierda del diálogo ( +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Familia +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, etc.), la conmutación depende de tu elección. + Si +\family sans +Conmutar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +todo +\family default + está marcado, todas las propiedades de esa parte se conmutan; por omisión + no lo está ninguna de ellas. + Por último, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Reiniciar +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + nunca se conmuta. + Si eliges +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Reiniciar +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + el +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Grosor +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y marcas +\family sans +Conmutar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +todo +\family default +, y luego aplicas el estilo a texto en negrita, este texto volverá al grosor + por omisión, ( +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Medio +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +), independientemente del número de veces que apliques el estilo. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Concluiremos reiterando la misma advertencia: No abuses de los estilos de + texto. + A menudo se confunde con una buena presentación, y casi nunca es así. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Vista preliminar e impresión +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introducción +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Una vez cubiertas algunas de las características fundamentales de la preparación + de documentos con LyX, probablemente quieras saber cómo imprimir tu obra + maestra. + Antes de explicarlo queremos dar unas breves nociones sobre lo que sucede + entre bambalinas. + También damos esta información, con mucho mayor detalle, en el manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX usa el programa LaTeX como soporte. + LaTeX es un paquete de macros para el sistema de tipografía TeX, pero para + evitar confusión, sólo nos referiremos a LaTeX. + LyX es lo que utilizas para escribir realmente. + Después, LyX ejecuta LaTeX para volcar tus escritos en una salida imprimible. + Esto tiene lugar en dos pasos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Primero, LyX convierte tu documento a una serie de comandos de texto para + LaTeX, generando un archivo con la extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +A continuación, LaTeX usa los comandos en el archivo +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default + y genera la salida para imprimir. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formatos del archivo de salida +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatos de archivo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Formatos-de-salida" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Texto simple (ASCII) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatos de archivo ! Texto simple +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este tipo de archivo tiene la extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.txt +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Contiene el documento en texto simple siguiendo las normas del +\emph on +American Standard Code for Information Interchange +\emph default + (ASCII). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes exportar el documento a ASCII con el menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Texto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +simple +\family default +. + +\lang english +However, this will not export any externally generated material such as + a BibTeX bibliography +\lang spanish + (sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bases-datos-bibliográficos" + +\end_inset + +). + +\lang english +If your document includes such material, use +\lang spanish + +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Más formatos y opciones +\family default + y +\lang english +then select +\family sans +\lang spanish +Texto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +simple +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii) +\family default +. + Esta será exportada internamente primero a PostScript ( +\lang english +generating thereby the external material +\lang spanish +) y luego convertida a ASCII. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +LaTeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatos de archivo ! LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este tipo de archivo tiene extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y contiene todos los comandos necesarios para procesar el documento con + el programa LaTeX. + Si conoces LaTeX, puedes usarlo para encontrar errores LaTeX o procesar + manualmente con comandos de consola. + El archivo LaTeX se crea automáticamente en el directorio temporal de LyX + siempre que veas (menú +\family sans +Ver +\family default +) o exportes el documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes exportar el documento a LaTeX con el menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. + Las variantes de exportación a LaTeX se explican en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Exportar" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +DVI +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatos de archivo ! DVI +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este tipo de archivo tiene extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.dvi +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Se conoce como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +independiente del dispositivo +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ( +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +device-independent +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, DVI), porque es completamente portable; puedes moverlo de una máquina + a otra sin necesidad de hacer ninguna conversión. + DVIs se usan para rápidas vistas preliminares y como preparación para otros + formatos de salida, como PostScript. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los archivos DVI no contienen imágenes, sino enlaces a ellas. + Por tanto no debes olvidar adjuntar las imágenes a los archivos DVI. + Esta característica también puede retardar la visualización del archivo, + porque el visor DVI tiene que convertir la imagen en segundo plano para + hacerla visible al deslizar el visor. + Así pues recomendamos usar PDF para archivos con muchas imágenes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un documento se exporta a DVI con el menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\family default + o +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default +. + Esta última opción usa el programa +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +. + +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + es un motor que proporciona soporte directo de Unicode y acceso directo + a tipografías (véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" + +\end_inset + +). + +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + todavía es un proyecto en desarrollo, pero puede llegar a ser el próximo + procesador estándar de TeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PostScript +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatos de archivo ! PostScript +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este tipo de archivo tiene la extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.ps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + PostScript fue desarrollado por la compañía +\family typewriter +Adobe +\family default + como lenguaje para impresoras. + Por eso estos archivos contienen comandos que usa la impresora para imprimirlos. + PostScript puede considerarse como un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +lenguaje de programación +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; con él puedes calcular y dibujar imágenes y diagramas. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Si estás interesado en este tema acude al paquete LaTeX +\series bold +pstricks +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! pstricks +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Por esto los archivos suelen ser más grandes que los PDF. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los archivos PostScript sólo pueden contener imágenes en el formato +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Encapsulated PostScript +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (EPS, extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.eps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). + Como LyX permite usar cualquier formato de imagen conocido, tiene que trabajar + en segundo plano para convertir las imágenes a EPS. + Si por ejemplo, el documento tiene 50 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +imágenes, LyX ha de hacer 50 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +conversiones la primera vez que veas o exportes el documento. + Esto podría ralentizar el trabajo, así que si piensas usar PostScript, + puedes evitar el problema insertando las imágenes directamente en EPS. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El documento se puede exportar a PostScript con el menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Postscript +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PDF +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatos de archivo ! PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este tipo de archivo tiene la extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.pdf +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + El formato +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Portable Document Format +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (PDF) fue desarrollado por +\family typewriter +Adobe +\family default + como un derivado de PostScript. + Es más comprimido y utiliza muchos menos comandos que PostScript. + Como su nombre +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +portable +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + indica, puede ser procesado en cualquier sistema operativo y la salida + impresa se muestra exactamente igual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF puede contener imágenes en su propio formato PDF, y en los formatos + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Joint Photographic Experts Group +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (JPG, extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpeg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +), y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Portable Network Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (PNG, extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.png +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). + No obstante, puedes poner cualquier otro formato de imagen, porque LyX + los convierte en segundo plano a alguno de los anteriores. + Pero como se ha comentado en la sección sobre PostScript, la conversión + de gráficos ralentiza el trabajo. + Por tanto se recomienda utilizar alguno de los tres formatos de imagen + mencionados. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un documento se puede exportar a PDF con el menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportar +\family default + en varios modos diferentes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) Este utiliza el programa +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default + que convierte directamente el archivo a PDF. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) Usa el programa +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +, que convierte el archivo directamente a PDF. + +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + es un motor aún más nuevo, derivado de +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +, que también proporciona soporte directo de Unicode y soporte para acceso + directo a tipografías (véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" + +\end_inset + +). + LuaTeX todavía es un proyecto en desarrollo, pero podría llegar a ser el + próximo procesador estándar de TeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) Usa el programa +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +, que convierte el archivo directamente a PDF. + +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default + es un nuevo motor que suministra soporte directo de Unicode y acceso directo + a tipografías (véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Soporte-de-tipografías-LaTeX" + +\end_inset + +). + Es particularmente bueno para la tipografía de diferentes guiones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) Este utiliza el programa +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default + que convierte el archivo a DVI en segundo plano y en un segundo paso a + PDF. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) Este utiliza el programa +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default + que crea un PDF a partir de una versión PostScript del archivo. + La versión PostScript es producida por el programa +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + que usa una versión DVI como paso intermedio. + Así que este modo de exportación consta de tres conversiones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Recomendamos usar +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + porque +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default + soporta todas las características de las versiones actuales de PDF, es + rápido y estable. + Si confías en el soporte multi-guion y en tipografías específicas OpenType, + te podría interesar probar en su lugar +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + o +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default +, teniendo presente que estos dos programas aún no están tan maduros como + +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +XHTML +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatos de archivo ! XHTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +XHTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este tipo de archivo tiene la extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.xhtml +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Es un archivo apropiado para ver en navegadores web. + En sí mismo no contiene imágenes y demás, solo enlaces a ellos, y al generar + XHTML LyX también genera las imágenes correspondientes apropiadas. + Para la presentación de ecuaciones matemáticas en la salida hay varios + formatos disponibles en el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Salidas +\family default +, que se describe en la sección +\emph on +Las ecuaciones en XHTML +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La salida XHTML se encuentra +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +en desarrollo +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y aún no soporta todas las características de LyX. + Véase el capítulo +\emph on +LyX e Internet +\emph default + en el manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El documento se puede exportar como XHTML con el menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LyXHTML +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Vista preliminar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Vista preliminar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para echar un vistazo a tu documento, o ver su versión final con sus saltos + de página, notas bien numeradas, y demás, usa el menú +\family sans +Ver +\family default + y elige el tipo de archivo o el botón +\emph on + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\emph default +. + Se abrirá un programa visor donde podemos ver la salida en el formato de + salida definido como predeterminado, que se establece globalmente en las + preferencias (véase la sec. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" + +\end_inset + +), y que puede cambiarse para documentos concretos en la configuración del + documento (véase la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Salidas" + +\end_inset + +). + Se pueden seleccionar otros formatos de salida en el menú +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ver (Otros formatos) +\family default + o con el botón +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si has hecho cambios en tu documento, puedes refrescar la salida en la misma + ventana del visor usando el menú +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Actualizar +\family default + o +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Actualizar (Otros formatos) +\family default +, respectivamente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cuando utilizas +\family sans +Ver +\family default + un archivo, el archivo de salida sólo se genera en el directorio temporal + de LyX. + Para disponer de un archivo de salida real, utiliza +\family sans +Exportar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Imprimir archivos desde LyX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Imprimir +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Imprimir-archivos" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En vez de exportar un archivo y luego imprimirlo, puedes imprimirlo directamente + desde LyX, con el menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Imprimir +\family default + (combinación de teclas +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + +) o clic en el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + +. + LyX llamará internamente a LaTeX para generar un DVI. + Este archivo es procesado por el programa +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + a un archivo PostScript, que es finalmente impreso mediante el programa + +\family typewriter +ghostscript +\family default +. + Debido a esta serie de pasos, este método no es el más rápido. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En el cuadro +\family sans +Destino +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +impresión +\family default + puedes establecer los siguientes parámetros: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Impresora +\family default + Este es el nombre de la impresora. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Observa que este nombre de impresora es para el programa +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +. + Esto implica que +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + ha de configurarse para este nombre. + La impresora predeterminada se puede poner en el diálogo +\family sans +Preferencias +\family default + de LyX, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Impresora" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + La impresora debe entender PostScript. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Archivo +\family default + Nombre con el que se guardará la salida como archivo PostScript. + Se guardará en el directorio de trabajo de LyX a menos que se especifique + una ruta completa. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes elegir imprimir +\lang english +to print only a range of pages +\lang spanish +, sólo las páginas pares o las impares +\lang english +or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options are +\lang spanish + útil para imprimir a dos caras +\lang english +with a printer without a duplexer +\lang spanish +: Puedes reinsertar las hojas en la impresora después de imprimir una cara + para imprimir la otra. + Algunas impresoras expulsan las hojas boca arriba y otras al revés. + Al escoger un determinado orden de impresión, puedes tener todas las hojas + ya ordenadas al salir de la impresora. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Unas palabras sobre tipografía +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografía +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Guiones, rayas y signo menos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Guiones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Rayas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En LyX, el carácter +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dispone de cuatro longitudes, +\emph on +guión +\emph default +, +\emph on +semirraya +\emph default + (longitud doble), +\emph on +raya +\emph default + (longitud triple) y el signo +\emph on +menos +\emph default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +nombre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +salida +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +se inserta con +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +guión +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +tecla « +\family typewriter +- +\family default +» +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +semirraya +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +– +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Carácter especial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Símbolos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +raya +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +— +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Carácter especial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Símbolos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +menos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $-$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +« +\family typewriter +- +\family default +» en modo matemático +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La semirraya y la raya se pueden generar también insertando el carácter + « +\family typewriter +- +\family default +» varias veces. + En la salida se mostrarán los guiones con su longitud apropiada, pero no + en LyX. + «- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +-» genera una semirraya y «- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +-» una raya. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los tres tipos de guión son distintos del signo menos, que se usa en modo + matemático y tiene su propia longitud. + Aquí tenemos unos ejemplos de uso de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +- +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +División de palabras a final de lí-nea +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +guión +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +De A–Z +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +semirraya +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Incisos y diálogos. + ¡Oh! ―aquí hay rayas―. +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +raya +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +menos +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +División de palabras con guión +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +División de palabras +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:División-con-guión" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En LyX no se parten las palabras a final de línea; sí se dividen en la salida, + automáticamente, por medio del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, siguiendo las normas del idioma del documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX realiza la separación silábica casi a la perfección, sólo tiene dificultad +es con texto en letra de +\family sans +ancho fijo +\family default + y con estructuras inusuales, como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +h3knix/m0n0wall +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Si LaTeX no puede quebrar correctamente una palabra, puedes poner manualmente + un guión con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Guión de división silábica +\family default +. + Estos guiones extras sólo son recomendaciones para LaTeX. + Si los guiones no son necesarios, LaTeX los ignorará. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A veces interesará evitar que ciertas palabras o estructuras se partan. + Supongamos que en el documento se describe una combinación de teclas en + la forma +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +A-b c +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + LaTeX se encuentra con el guión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y lo interpreta como posibilidad de ruptura, lo que en este caso quedaría + feo. + Para impedir que se parta esa secuencia de letras, puedes ponerla en un + cuadro, tal como se describe en la sección +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Evitar la partición de palabras +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Signos de puntuación +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Signos de puntuación +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Abreviaturas y fin de frase +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Abreviaturas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cuando LyX ejecuta LaTeX para generar la versión final del documento, LaTeX + distingue automáticamente entre palabras, frases y abreviaturas. + LaTeX añade entonces la +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +cantidad de espacio adecuada +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Esto significa que en las frases hay un poquito más de espacio entre el + punto y la palabra siguiente. + Las abreviaturas llevan tras el punto un espacio igual que el de palabras. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Desafortunadamente, el algoritmo para identificar abreviaturas no siempre + funciona. + Si un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +. +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + está detrás de minúscula, es un fin de frase; si está detrás de mayúscula + es una abreviatura. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí hay unos ejemplos de abreviaturas +\emph on +correctas +\emph default + y finales de frase: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +M. + Butterfly +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +No te preocupes. + Sé feliz. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Y aquí hay un ejemplo de mal funcionamiento del algoritmo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej., ¡aquí hay demasiado espacio! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Apartado B. + Este es correcto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +No verás nada incorrecto hasta que veas la salida del documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para arreglar este inconveniente, haz una de las siguientes cosas: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Inserta un +\family sans +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +entre palabras +\family default + detrás de abreviaturas en minúscula (véase sección +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-entre-palabra" + +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios ! Entre palabras +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Inserta un +\family sans +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +delgado +\family default +entre los caracteres abreviados (véase sección +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-delgado" + +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacios ! Delgado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Inserta un punto +\family sans +Fin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +oración +\family default + con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Carácter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +especial +\family default + para forzar el uso de un espacio entre frases. + Esta función está asociada a +\family sans +Ctrl+. + +\family default + para un rápido acceso. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con las correcciones, los ejemplos anteriores quedan así: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +¡aquí hay demasiado espacio! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Apartado B\SpecialChar \@. + Esto es correcto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En algunos idiomas no se pone espacio extra entre oraciones. + Si tu idioma es uno de ellos, no debes preocuparte, porque LaTeX lo tiene + en cuenta. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para los que quieran tomarse la molestia, hay una herramienta para revisar + errores furtivos, en +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Comprobar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TeX +\family default +, que se describe en +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Comillas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografía ! Comillas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Comillas|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Tipografía +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En general, LyX maneja las comillas correctamente. + En concreto, pondrá comillas de apertura al principio de una cita y comillas + de cierre al final. + Por ejemplo, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +abrir cerrar +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + La tecla con el carácter +\family sans +" +\family default + las genera automáticamente. + El tipo de comillas generado por la tecla +\family sans +" +\family default + se puede cambiar en el submenú +\family sans +Idioma +\family default + del diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + En el cuadro +\family sans +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cita +\family default + se pueden seleccionar comillas para distintos idiomas. + Hay seis opciones: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Texto +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Comillas como estas +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +dobles +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Quotes els +\end_inset + +sencillas +\begin_inset Quotes ers +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +Texto +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Comillas como +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +estas +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + o 'estas +\begin_inset Quotes ers +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Texto +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Comillas como +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +estas +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Quotes gls +\end_inset + +estas +\begin_inset Quotes grs +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Texto +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Comillas como +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +estas +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Quotes pls +\end_inset + +estas +\begin_inset Quotes prs +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Texto +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + Comillas como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +estas +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Quotes fls +\end_inset + +estas +\begin_inset Quotes frs +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +»Texto« +\family default + Comillas como »estas« o +\begin_inset Quotes als +\end_inset + +estas +\begin_inset Quotes ars +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Estas opciones afectan al carácter generado por la tecla +\family sans +" +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por otra parte, para generar comillas en texto simple, teclea +\family sans +Ctrl+Mayúsculas+" +\family default +. + Esto genera +\family typewriter +" +\family default + en cualquier caso. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ligaduras +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografía ! Ligaduras +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ligaduras|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Tipografía +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Ligaduras" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es una práctica habitual en tipografía agrupar ciertas letras e imprimirlas + como caracteres simples. + Estos agrupamientos se conocen como +\emph on +ligaduras +\emph default +. + Puesto que LaTeX sabe de esto, tus documentos también las mostrarán en + la salida. + Las ligaduras estándar son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ff +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +fi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +fl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ffi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ffl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Algunos idiomas usan otras ligaduras si la tipografía del documento las + soporta. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puede ser que en ocasiones no te guste cómo quedan ciertas letras ligadas. + Mientras que una ligadura puede quedar bien en una palabra como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +graffiti +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, puede dar un aspecto raro en otras como la palabra inglesa +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +cufflink +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + o la alemana «Dorffest». + Para romper una ligadura, usa +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligadura. + +\family default + Esto cambia el aspecto de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +cufflinks +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + a +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +links +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y de «Dorffest» a +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +fest +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nombres propios en LyX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Nombres propios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Nombres-Propios-en-LyX" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Seguramente has observado que la palabra +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + aparece siempre con caracteres de distinto tamaño y altura. + LaTeX es el nombre del programa usado por LyX y es interpretado como un + nombre propio cuando lo escribes en LyX como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Las llaves en código TeX impiden que «comando» aparezca como nombre propio + en la salida; véase el último párrafo de esta sección. + Para generar nombres propios omite el código TeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + ¡Observa la alternancia de mayúsculas y minúsculas! LyX reconoce los siguientes + nombres propios: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LyX El nombre del juego, escribe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + para generarlo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +TeX El programa usado por LaTeX, escribe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + para generarlo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeX El programa usado por LyX, escribe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + para generarlo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeX2e La versión actual de LaTeX, escribe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX2e +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + para generarlo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quizá te preguntes por qué versión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +2 +\begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Es una vieja tradición en el mundillo TeX dar a los programas números de + versión en griego. + Por ejemplo, el número de versión de TeX converge al número +\begin_inset Formula $\pi$ +\end_inset + +: La versión actual es +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +TeX-3.141592 +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, la anterior fue +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +TeX-3.14159 +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si no quieres usar nombres propios, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. + en encabezados de sección, debes insertar un par de llaves vacías en código + TeX en la palabra. + En LyX lo verás como: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/LaTeX.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Más sobre código TeX en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Código-TeX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Unidades +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografía ! Unidades +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En general, el espacio entre un número y su unidad es menor que el espacio + normal entre dos palabras. + Como verás en el ejemplo siguiente, se ve mejor con un espacio más pequeño. + Para introducir esos espacios usa el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formato\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +delgado +\family default + (atajo +\family sans +Ctrl+Mayúsculas+Espacio +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En este ejemplo se ven las diferencias: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +espacio entre número y unidad +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +medio espacio entre número y unidad +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Líneas viudas y huérfanas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografía ! Líneas viudas y huérfanas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En los primeros tiempos de los procesadores de texto, los saltos de página + iban allí donde acababa la página. + No se atendía a lo que estaba escrito. + Podías encontrarte con el encabezado de una nueva sección o la primera + línea de un nuevo párrafo, solos al final de la página, o la última línea + de un párrafo aislada en la página siguiente. + Estos flecos de texto llegaron a ser conocidos como líneas +\emph on +viudas +\emph default + y líneas +\emph on +huérfanas +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sin duda, LyX puede impedir los saltos de página detrás de un encabezado + de sección. + Esto forma parte de las ventajas de los entornos de párrafo. + Pero, ¿qué pasa con las líneas viudas y huérfanas, cuando el salto de página + deja una línea de un párrafo aislada al principio o al final de una página? + LaTeX incorpora reglas que gobiernan los saltos de página, y algunas de + ellas están pensadas precisamente para evitar las líneas viudas o huérfanas. + Esta es una de las ventajas que obtiene LyX del empleo de LaTeX como soporte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +No es posible explicar aquí la forma en que TeX y LaTeX deciden dónde saltar + una página , o en cómo ajustar esta característica. + Algunos libros sobre LaTeX listados en la bibliografía [como +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +] tienen más información. + Sin embargo, no deberías preocuparte por este asunto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Notas, gráficos, cuadros y flotantes +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cap:Notas-y-flotantes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los temas tratados en este capítulo se desarrollan en profundidad en el + manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados. + +\emph default +En él encontrarás también consejos y trucos para casos especiales. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Notas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Notas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX suministra algunos tipos de notas para incluir en los documentos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Nota +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LyX Este tipo es para incluir notas internas que no deben aparecer en el + documento de salida. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Esto es un texto en un cuadro de nota LyX que no aparece en la salida. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Comentario Esta nota tampoco aparece en la salida pero sí como comentario + en el documento LaTeX cuando lo exportas mediante el menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exportar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaTeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(xxx) +\family default +. + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Comment +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Esto es un texto en un cuadro de nota que sólo aparece como comentario en + los archivos LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Resaltado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +gris El texto de esta nota aparecerá en la salida en el color elegido en + la configuración del documento, apartado +\family sans + Colores\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Notas en gris +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Esto es el texto +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Esto es un ejemplo de nota al pie dentro de una nota resaltada en gris. + En este documento, el color de este tipo de notas es azul. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + de un comentario que se ve en la salida en color gris. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Como se ve en este ejemplo, en las notas resaltadas en gris se pueden incluir + notas al pie. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las notas se insertan con el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + o con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota +\family default +. + Haciendo clic derecho sobre el cuadro de una nota se puede seleccionar + el tipo de nota. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Notas al pie +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notas al pie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX muestra las notas a pie de página en recuadros: al insertar una nota + mediante el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pie +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "footnote-insert" +\end_inset + +, +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +verás un recuadro como este +\family default +\series default +\bar default +: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/notapieQt4.png + scale 85 + groupId botonesbh + +\end_inset + + +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +. + Es la representación en LyX de una nota a pie de página. + Si haces +\family default +\series default +\bar default + clic izquierdo sobre +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +él se abre un marco rojo en el que puedes escribir el texto de la nota +\family default +\series default +\bar default +. + Otro clic en la etiqueta cierra el recuadro +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no +. + Si quieres convertir un texto existente en nota al pie, selecciónalo y + pulsa el botón de la barra de herramientas +\family default +\series default +\bar default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ejemplo de nota al pie: +\family roman +\series medium +\bar no + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Para ocultar en LyX el texto de la nota al pie, haz clic sobre el recuadro + con la etiqueta «pie». +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la salida, la nota al pie aparece como un superíndice numerado en el + lugar del texto en el que se ha insertado. + El texto de la nota se muestra al final de la página actual. + Los números de las notas son calculados por LyX +\lang english +according to the document class. + +\lang spanish + LyX aún no soporta +\lang english +a particular +\lang spanish + esquema de numeración, pero puedes usarlos mediante comandos LaTeX especiales. + Se describen en el manual +\emph on + Objetos insertados. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Notas al margen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notas al margen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Notas-al-margen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las notas al margen se ven y se comportan en LyX como las notas al pie. + Se insertan con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +margen +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "marginalnote-insert" +\end_inset + +. + Aparece un cuadro con la etiqueta +\family roman +\series medium + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +margen +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, que es su representación en LyX y que contiene el texto de la nota. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Al lado hay un ejemplo de nota al margen. +\family roman +\series medium + +\begin_inset Marginal +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Esto es una nota al margen. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Estas notas salen en el margen derecho en documentos a una cara. + En documentos a doble cara se muestran en el margen externo —izquierdo + en páginas pares, derecho en páginas impares—. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay más información sobre este asunto en la sección +\emph on +Notas al margen +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Gráficos e imágenes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Imágenes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gráficos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Gráficos" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para insertar una imagen en el documento, sitúa el cursor en la posición + que quieras y clic sobre el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + o selecciona +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Imagen +\family default + desde el menú. + Se mostrará un diálogo para escoger el archivo a cargar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este diálogo contiene numerosos parámetros, la mayoría autodefinidos. + La pestaña +\family sans +Gráficos +\family default + permite escoger el archivo de imagen. + La imagen se puede transformar poniendo un ángulo de rotación y un factor + de escala. + Las unidades de escala se explican en el Apéndice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Unidades-disponibles" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la pestaña +\family sans +Recorte +\family default + es posible ajustar coordenadas para fijar la altura y anchura de la imagen + en la salida. + Las coordenadas también pueden calcularse automáticamente pulsando el botón + +\family sans +Obtener +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +de +\family default +l +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +archivo +\family default +. + La opción +\family sans +Recortar +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +al +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +cuadro +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +delimitador +\family default + hace que sólo se imprima la región comprendida entre las coordenadas dadas. + Normalmente no debes preocuparte de las coordenadas y puedes ignorar la + pestaña +\family sans +Recorte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los expertos en LaTeX pueden dar opciones adicionales en la pestaña +\family sans +Opciones de LaTeX y LyX +\family default +. + También puedes ajustar aquí la presentación de la imagen en LyX. + La opción +\family sans +Modo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +borrador +\family default + hace que la imagen no aparezca en la salida, sólo sale un marco con el + tamaño de la imagen. + La opción +\family sans +No descomprimir al exportar +\family default + se explica en la sección +\emph on +Diálogo de gráficos +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El diálogo +\family sans +Gráficos +\family default + puede abrirse en cualquier momento con un clic sobre una imagen. + La imagen se muestra en la salida exactamente en la posición en que está + en el texto. + Esta es una imagen en un párrafo separado, centrado horizontalmente: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/mobius.eps + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si quieres titular o referenciar una imagen, tienes que ponerla en un flotante; + véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Figuras-flotantes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formatos de imagen +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatos de imagen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Formatos-de-imagen" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes insertar imágenes en cualquier formato. + Pero como se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Formatos-de-salida" + +\end_inset + +, cada formato de archivo del documento de salida permite sólo ciertos formatos + de archivo de imagen. + Por eso LyX usa el programa +\family sans +ImageMagick +\family default + en segundo plano para convertir imágenes al formato adecuado. + Para aumentar el rendimiento evitando estas conversiones, puedes usar sólo + los formatos de imagen listados en las subsecciones de la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Formatos-de-salida" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como en el caso de las tipografías, hay dos tipos de archivos de imagen: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Imágenes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mapa +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bits +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Bitmap) formadas por mapas de puntos (píxeles), generalmente comprimidos. + Por tanto, estas imágenes no son totalmente escalables y se ven pixeladas + a valores altos de zoom. + Formatos de imagen en bitmap bien conocidos son +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Graphics Interchange Format +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (GIF, extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +.gif +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +GIF|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Formatos de imagen +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Portable Network Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (PNG, extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +.png +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PNG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Formatos de imagen +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Joint Photographic Experts Group +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (JPG, extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +.jpg +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +.jpeg +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +JPG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Formatos de imagen +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Imágenes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vectoriales se generan mediante una descripción de una serie de trazos (vectores +) y por tanto se puede cambiar su escala a cualquier tamaño sin pérdidas. + La posibilidad de escala hace falta para crear presentaciones, cuyo tamaño + siempre es ajustado por el proyector. + El escalado también es útil en los documentos en línea para permitir zoom + en diagramas. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Formatos de imagen escalables pueden ser +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Scalable Vector Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (SVG, extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +. +\family typewriter +svg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +SVG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Formatos de imagen +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Encapsulated PostScript +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (EPS, extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +. +\family typewriter +eps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +EPS|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Formatos de imagen +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Portable Document Format +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (PDF, extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +. +\family typewriter +pdf +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Formatos de imagen +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Escribimos +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +pueden ser +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, porque se puede convertir cualquier imagen bitmap a PDF o EPS y el resultado + seguirá siendo no escalable. + En estos casos sólo se añade una cabecera con las propiedades de la imagen + a la imagen original +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En el caso de PDF, además se comprime la imagen original. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalmente no es posible convertir una imagen bitmap a escalable, sólo + viceversa. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Agrupación de configuraciones de imágenes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Imágenes ! Agrupación de configuraciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cada imagen puede definir un nuevo grupo de imágenes o unirse a un grupo + existente. + Las imágenes pertenecientes a un grupo comparten los mismos ajustes de + configuración, de modo que si se modifican las características de una imagen + se modifican igual y automáticamente las de las imágenes incluidas en el + mismo grupo. + Así puedes cambiar, por ejemplo, el tamaño de salida de un grupo de imágenes + sin necesidad de hacerlo individualmente con cada una de ellas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para crear un nuevo grupo se +\lang english +pressing the button +\family sans +Open +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +new +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +group +\family default + in +\lang spanish + el diálogo +\family sans + +\lang english +Graphics +\family default +\lang spanish + en la pestaña +\family sans +Opciones de LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX y Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default +. + Se puede integrar una imagen a un grupo existente marcando el nombre del + mismo en el menú contextual de la imagen, accesible con clic derecho. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Cuadros y tablas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tablas|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Cuadros +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cuadros +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Cuadros" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un cuadro se inserta mediante el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "tabular-insert" +\end_inset + + o el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cuadro/Tabla +\family default +. + Aparece un diálogo en el que se pide el número de filas y columnas. + Por omisión, el cuadro tiene líneas que enmarcan cada celda y la primera + fila aparece separada por una línea doble: la línea inferior de la primera + fila y la línea superior de la segunda fila. + Ejemplo de cuadro: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +A +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +B +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\size normal +\noun off +\color none + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +C +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Diálogo de configuración de cuadros +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un cuadro se puede cambiar mediante la ventana de diálogo que aparece al + pulsar sobre él con el botón derecho del ratón y después seleccionar +\family sans +Más\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuratión +\family default +. + Se pueden ajustar los parámetros de la celda y fila/columna en la que se + encuentra el cursor. + La mayoría de opciones también funcionan sobre una selección. + Esto significa que si seleccionas más celdas, filas o columnas, la acción + se realizará sobre todas ellas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además del diálogo hay una +\family sans +barra de herramientas +\family default + para cuadros, que aparece cuando el cursor se sitúa dentro de un cuadro, + que permite +\family sans + +\family default +establecer sus propiedades. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la pestaña de +\family sans +Configuración +\family default + del diálogo puedes poner la alineación horizontal para la fila actual. + Si añades una fila o columna, se inserta, respectivamente, a la derecha + o debajo de la celda actual. + La alineación vertical de una columna sólo se puede ajustar si se fija + la anchura. + Fijar una anchura permite tener saltos de línea y varios párrafos en una + celda, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Celdas-de-cuadros" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes seleccionar varias celdas de una fila/columna para hacer una celda + multicolumna/multifila, marcando el cuadro +\family sans +Multicolumna +\family default +o +\family sans +Multifila. + +\family default + Así se funden las celdas en +\emph on +una +\emph default +, que se extiende sobre más de una columna/fila. + Las celdas multicolumna se consideran como filas propias, de forma que + la alineación, la anchura, y los bordes afectan sólo a la celda multicolumna. + Aquí hay un ejemplo de cuadro con multicolumna en la primera fila, y una + celda de la última fila sin borde superior: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +abc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +def ghi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +jkl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +A +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +B +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +C +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +D +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los expertos pueden añadir argumentos especiales de LaTeX al cuadro, necesarios + para formatos de cuadro especiales, como multifilas; se explican en la + sección +\emph on +Cuadros y tablas +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. + También puedes girar la celda actual o todo el cuadro 90 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +grados hacia la derecha. + Estas rotaciones no se ven en LyX, sólo en la salida. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ten en cuenta que la mayoría de visores DVI +\emph on +no +\emph default + pueden mostrar rotaciones. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La pestaña +\family sans +Bordes +\family default + permite poner y quitar bordes en la fila/columna actual. + Los botones del marco +\family sans +Todos +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +los +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bordes +\family default + permiten poner o quitar todas las líneas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cuadros largos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cuadros ! Largos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si el cuadro es demasiado largo para una página, puedes usar la opción +\family sans +Usar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cuadro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +largo +\family default + en la pestaña +\family sans +Cuadro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +largo +\family default + del diálogo para repartirlo automáticamente entre varias páginas. + Al hacer esto se habilitan diversos botones opcionales en los que puede + definirse: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Encabezado: +\family default + La fila actual y todas las de arriba, que no tienen ninguna opción especial + definida, se definen como filas de encabezado para todas las páginas del + cuadro, excepto para la primera página si +\family sans +Primer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +encabezado +\family default + está definido. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Primer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +encabezado: +\family default + La fila actual y superiores, que no tienen ninguna opción especial definida, + se definen como encabezados de la primera página del cuadro. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Pie: +\family default + La fila actual y todas las siguientes, que no tienen ninguna opción especial + definida, se definen como pie de todas las páginas del cuadro, excepto + para la última página si se define +\family sans +Último +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pie. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Último +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pie: L +\family default +a fila actual y siguientes, que no tienen ninguna opción especial definida, + se definen como pie de la última página del cuadro. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Leyenda: La primera fila se reajusta como columna simple. + Ahora puedes insertar ahí la leyenda del cuadro con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Leyenda +\family default +. + Más detalles sobre leyendas en cuadros largos en el manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +También se puede especificar una fila en la que se divida el cuadro. + Si se establece más de una opción en la misma fila, habría que tener en + cuenta que sólo la primera de ellas se usa en la fila dada. + Las otras quedarán definidas como +\emph on +vacías +\emph default +. + En este contexto, primera significa primero en este orden: +\family sans +Pie, Último +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pie, Encabezado, Primer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +encabezado +\family default +. + El siguiente cuadro muestra cómo funciona: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Ejemplo de Lista Telefónica (ignore los nombres) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +NOMBRE +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Ejemplo de Lista Telefónica +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +NOMBRE +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +continúa ... +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +999 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Fin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Celdas de cuadros +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cuadros ! Celdas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Celdas-de-cuadros" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Una celda puede contener texto, una ecuación en línea, una figura, u otro + cuadro. + Todas estas clases de objetos pueden colocarse en la misma celda. + Se puede alterar el tamaño y la forma de la letra. + Pero no puedes poner determinados entornos (como +\family sans +Sección* +\family default +, etc.), ni establecer opciones de espacio, etc., para los párrafos en una + celda. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para poner entradas multilínea en una celda, debes declarar una anchura + fija de columna en el diálogo de cuadros. + Entonces, si la longitud del texto excede el ancho dado, se divide automáticame +nte en varias líneas y la celda se amplía verticalmente. + Un ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Esto es una entrada multilínea en una celda. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +5 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +6 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Ahora es más larga. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +7 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +8 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Esto es una entrada multilínea en una celda. + Ahora es más larga. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +9 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cortar y pegar entre cuadros y celdas de cuadros funciona razonablemente + bien. + Puedes cortar y pegar más de una fila. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +No se puede pegar en una selección multicelda porque no estaría claro cómo + proceder al pegar, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej., una palabra en una selección 2×3. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Seleccionar con el ratón o con +\family sans +Mayúsculas+flecha +\family default + trabaja como es habitual. + También puedes copiar y pegar un cuadro entero como un todo iniciando la + selección desde fuera del mismo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Flotantes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flotantes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Flotantes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introducción +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un flotante es un bloque de texto asociado con una especie de etiqueta que + no tiene posición fija. + Puede «flotar» adelante o atrás una o dos páginas, donde encaje mejor. + Las +\family sans +Notas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pie +\family default + y las +\family sans +Notas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +margen +\family default + también son flotantes, porque pueden flotar a la página siguiente cuando + hay demasiadas notas en la página. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los flotantes hacen posible composiciones de alta calidad. + Imágenes y cuadros se pueden distribuir equitativamente en las páginas + para evitar espacios en blanco y páginas sin texto. + Como el flotante destruye a menudo el contexto entre texto e imagen o cuadro, + cada flotante puede estar referido en el texto. + Por lo tanto los flotantes están numerados. + Las referencias se describen en la sección +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para insertar un flotante, usa el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flotante +\family default +. + En el documento aparece un cuadro con una etiqueta. + La etiqueta será traducida automáticamente al idioma del documento. + A continuación de la etiqueta se puede escribir el texto de la leyenda. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flotantes ! Leyenda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + La imagen o la tabla se inserta encima o debajo de la leyenda en un párrafo + separado dentro del flotante. + Para mantener legible el documento LyX, puedes mostrar u ocultar el contenido + del flotante haciendo clic izquierdo sobre el recuadro. + Un recuadro se muestra así: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/flotanteQt4.png + scale 85 + groupId botonesbh + +\end_inset + + —un cuadro gris con etiqueta en rojo—. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se recomienda insertar flotantes como párrafos separados para evitar posibles + errores de LaTeX, que pueden ocurrir si el texto circundante se formatea + de modo especial. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ejemplos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Figuras flotantes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flotantes ! Figuras +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Figuras-flotantes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La figura +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Ornitorrinco-distorsionado" + +\end_inset + + se ha creado usando el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flotante\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Figura +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert figure" +\end_inset + +. + La imagen se ha insertado poniendo el cursor sobre la etiqueta de la leyenda + y usando el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Imagen +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + +. + La imagen se ha centrado en el flotante poniendo el cursor delante o detrás + de la imagen y usando el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración del párrafo +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/platypus.eps + lyxscale 50 + width 50col% + rotateOrigin center + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Ornitorrinco-distorsionado" + +\end_inset + +Un ornitorrinco muy distorsionado en un flotante. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Estas figuras flotantes también muestran cómo poner una etiqueta y crear + una referencia a ella: Inserta una etiqueta en el título con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Etiqueta +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + + y haz referencia a ella con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Referencia +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cruzada +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +. + Es importante usar referencias a figuras flotantes, mejor que hacer vagas + alusiones como «la figura de arriba», debido a que LaTeX recolocará los + flotantes en el documento final, y entonces la figura podría no quedar + «arriba» precisamente. + Para más sobre referencias cruzadas, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalmente sólo se inserta una imagen en un flotante, pero si quieres poner + dos imágenes con leyendas separadas, esto es posible insertando una imagen + flotante dentro de otro flotante. + Ten en cuenta que sólo el título principal del flotante se añade al índice + de figuras. + La Figura +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" + +\end_inset + + es un ejemplo de flotante con dos imágenes adosadas. + También se puede poner una sobre otra. + Las figuras +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Estructura-indefinible" + +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Ornitorrinco" + +\end_inset + + son las subfiguras. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Estructura-indefinible" + +\end_inset + +Estructura indefinible +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Ornitorrinco" + +\end_inset + +Ornitorrinco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/platypus.eps + lyxscale 60 + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Dos-imágenes" + +\end_inset + +Dos imágenes distorsionadas. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Cuadros flotantes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flotantes ! Cuadros y Tablas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los cuadros flotantes se insertan con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flotante\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cuadro +\family default + o con el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert table" +\end_inset + +. + Tienen las mismas propiedades que las figuras flotantes, excepto +\lang english +that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not + above like for figures and that the label begins with +\lang spanish + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +tab: +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + El cuadro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Un cuadro flotante" + +\end_inset + + es un cuadro flotante. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Un cuadro flotante" + +\end_inset + +Un cuadro flotante. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Pepe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Mari +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +Teo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +a & b\\ +c & d +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Más información +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flotantes ! Información detallada +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX proporciona otros tipos de flotantes y la posibilidad de girarlos. + También permite cambiar el esquema de su numeración, controlar su colocación + y cambiar el formato y posición de la leyenda. + Todas estas opciones se explican en detalle con ejemplos en el capítulo + +\emph on +Flotantes +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Minipáginas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Minipáginas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Minipáginas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX provee un mecanismo para generar una página, llamada minipágina, dentro + de otra. + En una minipágina se aplican las reglas habituales de sangrado, ajuste + de línea, etc. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En LyX, las minipáginas se ven como un recuadro desplegable que se inserta + con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marco. + +\family default + Haciendo clic derecho en el recuadro se pueden fijar las dimensiones y + la alineación de la minipágina. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "30col%" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +Esto es una minipágina. + El texto en estilo cursiva. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +Las minipáginas se suelen usar para texto en otro idioma o que necesita + otro formato. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +Si sitúas dos minipáginas adosadas, puedes usar +\family sans +Relleno +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal +\family default +, descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-horizontal" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Minipágina con un poco de texto estúpido, sólo para rellenar la minipágina. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Minipágina con un poco de texto estúpido, sólo para rellenar la minipágina. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Haciendo clic derecho en el recuadro de una minipágina puedes cambiar el + tipo de marco y la decoración del borde. + En el capítulo +\emph on +Marcos +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default + se explican con detalle todos los tipos de marcos y sus características. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Ecuaciones matemáticas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ecuaciones|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Matemáticas +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cap:Ecuaciones-matemáticas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los temas tratados en este capítulo se desarrollan en profundidad en el + manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones. + +\emph default +En él encontrarás también consejos y trucos para casos especiales. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Edición básica de ecuaciones +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Edición de ecuaciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para crear una ecuación matemática, pulsa el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-mode on" +\end_inset + + (atajo +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-mode" +\end_inset + +). + Con esto aparece un pequeño marco azul con esquinas color púrpura. + El marco azul delimita la ecuación; los marcadores púrpuras el nivel de + anidación en la ecuación. + También puedes insertar un tipo particular de ecuación con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuación +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La edición de los parámetros de una ecuación y la adición de estructuras + matemáticas se puede hacer mediante las +\family sans +Barras +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +herramientas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +matemáticas +\family default +que se muestran cuando el cursor está en una ecuación. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay dos tipos principales de ecuaciones: Las ecuaciones +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +en línea +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + se muestran en la misma línea del texto, como en este caso: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Línea de texto con una ecuación, +\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ +\end_inset + + en línea. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las ecuaciones +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +presentadas +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + se muestran separadas del texto, como si estuvieran en su propio párrafo, + como en este caso: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +A=B +\] + +\end_inset + +Sólo se pueden numerar y referenciar las ecuaciones presentadas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX soporta además muchos comandos LaTeX de matemáticas. + P. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e., escribir +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +alpha +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, seguido de espacio, en una ecuación imprime la letra griega +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ +\end_inset + +. + A veces, escribir comandos podría ser más rápido que usar la +\family sans +barra +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +herramientas +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Navegando por una ecuación +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Navegar por una ecuación +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La posición del cursor en una ecuación se controla mucho mejor con las teclas + de flecha. + LyX se sirve de pequeños rectángulos para marcar el punto de inserción, + y las teclas de flecha permiten navegar entre ellos. + Al pulsar +\family sans +Espacio +\family default + el cursor sale de la estructura matemática actual (raíz +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ +\end_inset + +, paréntesis +\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ +\end_inset + +, matriz +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + +, \SpecialChar \ldots{} +) sin abandonar la ecuación. + Si se pulsa +\family sans +Escape +\family default + el cursor sale de la ecuación y se coloca tras ella. + La tecla +\family sans +Tab +\family default + permite desplazarse horizontalmente por la ecuación; por ejemplo, por las + celdas de una matriz o a través de una ecuación multilínea. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El +\family sans +Espacio +\family default +, representado en este documento como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En la salida, este comando aparece como su carácter correspondiente, el + que identifica un espacio (espacio visible). +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, parece que no hace nada en una ecuación, puesto que no añade espacio, + pero sirve para salir de estructuras anidadas. + Por esta razón debes tener cuidado con el uso de +\family sans +Espacio +\family default +. + Por ejemplo, si quieres escribir +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ +\end_inset + +, teclea +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +2x+1 +\series default + y si quieres escribir +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ +\end_inset + + teclea +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +2x +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + ++1 +\series default +, en este caso sólo +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Formula $2x$ +\end_inset + + +\family default + está bajo la raíz. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes omitir partes de una ecuación, como se ve en la siguiente matriz + con huecos: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +\lambda_{1}\\ + & \ddots\\ + & & \lambda_{n} +\end{array}\right) +\] + +\end_inset + +Si escribes una fracción sólo parcialmente, o un subíndice vacío, el resultado + es impredecible, aunque a la mayoría de estructuras les trae sin cuidado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Seleccionar texto +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay dos formas de seleccionar texto en una ecuación. + Pon el cursor en un extremo de la cadena de texto que quieras, y pulsa + +\family sans +Mayúsculas +\family default + y una flecha de movimiento para seleccionarlo. + Resaltará como una selección de texto normal. + Alternativamente puedes seleccionar texto con el ratón como de costumbre. + El texto resaltado puede cortarse o copiarse para pegarlo en cualquier + fórmula, aunque no en una zona de texto normal. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Exponentes y subíndices +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Exponentes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Subíndices +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con el panel de ecuaciones se pueden poner exponentes y subíndices (botones + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-superscript" +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-subscript" +\end_inset + +), pero la forma más sencilla es usar comandos. + Para escribir +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + +, teclea en una ecuación +\series bold +x^2 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default +. + El +\family sans +Espacio +\family default + vuelve a poner el cursor en el nivel básico de la expresión, saliendo del + exponente. + Si tecleas +\series bold +x^2y +\series default +, obtendrás +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ +\end_inset + +; para obtener +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ +\end_inset + +, teclea +\series bold +x^2 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +y +\series default +. + Para poner como exponentes caracteres que serían acentuados con el circunflejo + «^», debes teclear un +\family sans +Espacio +\family default + extra entre el acento +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +^ +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y el carácter. + Por ejemplo, para +\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ +\end_inset + + teclea +\series bold +x^ +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +a +\series default +. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +N. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +del t.: +\emph default +Este será el método a usar habitualmente en teclados en español para entrar + en modo exponente. + También funciona pulsar dos veces seguidas la tecla «^». + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Los subíndices se ponen con guión bajo +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +_ +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +: Para +\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ +\end_inset + +, teclea +\series bold +a_1 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fracciones +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Fracciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Una fracción se escribe con el comando +\series bold + +\backslash +frac +\series default + o con el icono +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\frac" +\end_inset + + de la +\family sans +Barra +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +herramientas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +matemáticas +\family default +. + Se presenta una fracción vacía, con el cursor sobre la línea de fracción. + Para moverlo abajo, sencillamente pulsa la tecla +\family sans +Abajo +\family default +. + Para volver, +\family sans +Arriba +\family default +. + En una fracción se puede poner cualquier estructura, por ejemplo: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} +2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 +\end{array}\right)}\right] +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Raíces +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Raíces +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las raíces se generan con el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\sqrt" +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\root" +\end_inset + + de la +\family sans +Barra +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +herramientas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +matemáticas, +\family default + o con los comandos +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default + o +\series bold + +\backslash +root +\series default +. + +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default + escribe siempre raíces cuadradas, con +\series bold + +\backslash +root +\series default + puedes escribir raíces de orden mayor, como cúbicas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Operadores con límites +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Integrales +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Operador suma +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Operadores-con-límites" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los operadores suma ( +\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ +\end_inset + +) e integral ( +\begin_inset Formula $\int$ +\end_inset + +) se decoran frecuentemente con límites. + En LyX puedes introducir los límites como si fueran exponentes o subíndices, + directamente después del símbolo. + El operador suma coloca automáticamente sus «límites» al lado en fórmulas + en línea, sobre y bajo el símbolo en fórmulas en modo presentación. + Tal como en +\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ +\end_inset + +, y en +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e +\] + +\end_inset + +Sin embargo, las integrales sitúan sus límites al lado en cualquier caso. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Todos los operadores con límites cambian automáticamente de tamaño cuando + se ponen en modo presentación. + La colocación de los límites puede cambiarse situando el cursor directamente + detrás del operador y pulsando +\family sans +Alt+M +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\family default + o con el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuaciones\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cambiar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tipo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +límites +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Algunas otras expresiones matemáticas tienen añadida esta característica + de colocación de los límites, como +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Límites +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x), +\] + +\end_inset + +que pondrá +\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ +\end_inset + + bajo +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +lím +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en estilo presentación. + En fórmulas en línea se ve así: +\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Observa que la función lím se ha introducido como una función macro +\series bold + +\backslash +lim +\series default +. + Echa un vistazo a la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Funciones" + +\end_inset + + para ver una explicación de las macros de funciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Símbolos matemáticos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Símbolos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La mayor parte de los símbolos matemáticos se encuentran en los +\family sans +Paneles +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ecuaciones +\family default + en alguna de las distintas categorías: +\family sans +Griego +\family default +, +\family sans +Operadores +\family default +, +\family sans +Relaciones +\family default +, +\family sans +Flechas +\family default +\SpecialChar \ldots{} + También hay símbolos adicionales suministrados por la +\emph on +American Mathematical Society +\emph default + (AMS). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si conoces el comando LaTeX para una estructura o símbolo y quieres ponerlo + así, no tienes que emplear el +\family sans +Panel de ecuaciones +\family default +, sino que puedes teclear el comando directamente en la ecuación. + LyX lo convertirá al símbolo o estructura correspondiente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cambiar el espacio +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Espacios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El espacio estándar provisto por LaTeX se puede cambiar. + Para hacerlo teclea +\family sans +Ctrl+Espacio +\family default + o usa el botón +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\space" +\end_inset + + +\family default + de los +\family sans +Paneles de ecuaciones +\family default +. + Se genera un espacio señalado con un pequeño marcador en la pantalla. + Por ejemplo, la secuencia +\series bold +a +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ctrl+Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +b +\series default + da: +\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ +\end_inset + + (en LyX se ve +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png + scale 85 + groupId botonesbh + +\end_inset + +). + Puedes cambiar el ancho del espacio si pones el cursor detrás del marcador + de espacio y vas pulsando sucesivas veces la tecla espacio; con cada pulsación + cambia el tamaño. + Algunos marcadores de espacio se ven en rojo en LyX, significa que son + espacios negativos. + Dos ejemplos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Ctrl+Espacio b +\series default + con 3× +\family sans +Espacio +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Ctrl+Espacio b +\series default + con 5× +\family sans +Espacio +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Funciones +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Funciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Funciones" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El botón +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\functions" +\end_inset + + +\family default + abre el +\family sans +Panel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +funciones +\family default +, que contiene diversas macros de funciones como +\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ +\end_inset + + (seno), +\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ +\end_inset + +, +\emph on +etc +\emph default +. + (también se pueden insertar tecleando en una ecuación +\series bold + +\backslash +sen +\series default + etc.) +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\size normal +\emph on +\color none +N. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +del t: +\size default +\emph default +\color inherit +El estilo +\family typewriter +spanish +\family default +\size normal +\color none + proporciona comandos para escribir las funciones en español, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej., +\begin_inset Formula $\sen x$ +\end_inset + +. + Más detalles en la sec. + +\size default +\emph on +\color inherit +Funciones predefinidas +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones +\emph default + y en la página web +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "spanish" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + En matemáticas es habitual escribir las funciones en letras verticales, + para evitar confusiones con las letras cursivas que representan variables, + porque +\begin_inset Formula $sen$ +\end_inset + + podría hacer pensar en el producto +\begin_inset Formula $s·e·n$ +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El empleo de macros de función generará también el espacio correcto alrededor + de la función: +\begin_inset Formula $a\sen x$ +\end_inset + + es diferente de +\begin_inset Formula $asenx$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para ciertos objetos matemáticos, como los límites, la macro cambia la forma + de situar los subíndices, como se describe en sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Operadores-con-límites" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Acentos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Acentos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En las ecuaciones se pueden poner caracteres acentuados de la misma forma + que en modo texto. + Esto puede depender de tu teclado, o de las asociaciones de teclas que + uses. + También puedes usar comandos LaTeX para escribir, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej., +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + + incluso si tu teclado no tiene acento circunflejo. + El ejemplo se ha hecho con +\series bold + +\backslash +hat +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +a +\series default + en una ecuación. + El cuadro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Acentos-y-comandos" + +\end_inset + + muestra las equivalencias entre tipos de acentos y sus comandos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Acentos-y-comandos" + +\end_inset + +Tipos de acentos y comandos correspondientes. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nombre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Comando +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +E +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +jemplo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +circunflejo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +hat +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +agudo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +acute +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +diéresis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +ddot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +punto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +dot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +breve +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +breve +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +caron +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +check +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +barra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +bar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +vector +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +vec +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes elegir uno de los acentos seleccionándolo en el panel +\family sans +Decoraciones +\family default +, botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\hat" +\end_inset + + de los +\family sans +Paneles de ecuaciones +\family default +; esto se aplicará también a cualquier selección que hayas hecho en una + fórmula. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Paréntesis y otros delimitadores +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Delimitadores +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Paréntesis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Paréntesis-y-delimitadores" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay varios tipos de delimitadores disponibles en LyX. + Para casi todas las necesidades debería bastar con el uso de las teclas + +\family typewriter +[]{}()|<> +\family default +. + Pero si quieres envolver una estructura grande, como una matriz o una fracción, + o si tienes delimitadores de varios tipos, es mejor utilizar el panel que + surge al pulsar el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" +\end_inset + + de la barra de herramientas de ecuaciones. + Por ejemplo, para poner corchetes alrededor de una matriz estándar: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right] +\] + +\end_inset + +o para colocar diversos paréntesis. + Abajo, la expresión de la izquierda se ha escrito usando el botón delimitadores + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" +\end_inset + + y la expresión de la derecha se ha escrito usando las teclas +\family typewriter +() +\family default +. + +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si usas el icono delimitadores, los paréntesis y otros delimitadores de + dicho panel se redimensionan automáticamente de acuerdo con el tamaño de + lo que contienen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para construir delimitadores pulsa el botón del que quieras poner para el + lado izquierdo y para el lado derecho. + Si marcas la opción +\family sans +Mantener +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +iguales +\family default +, el tipo de delimitador seleccionado se pondrá en ambos lados. + El comando TeX de la selección se mostrará bajo el panel de botones. + Si quieres que un lado no tenga delimitador, usa el botón +\family sans +Ninguno +\family default +. + En LyX se mostrará una línea punteada pero no se imprime en la salida. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si quieres poner delimitadores alrededor de estructuras matemáticas, como + una raíz cuadrada, puedes seleccionar la estructura que debe incluirse, + escoger los delimitadores deseados y pulsar +\family sans +Insert +\family default +ar, con esto se dibujarán alrededor de la estructura resaltada. + Las combinaciones más comunes de delimitadores (paréntesis, corchetes y + llaves en ambos lados) se pueden insertar más rápidamente mediante atajos + de teclado. + Por ejemplo, para insertar un par de paréntesis flexibles en ambos lados, + selecciona la estructura y teclea +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-delim ( )" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Ecuaciones con varias líneas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Presentación de ecuaciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Matrices +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Ecuaciones multilínea +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las matrices se introducen con el botón +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" +\end_inset + + +\family default + de la +\family sans +Barra +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +herramientas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +matemáticas +\family default +. + Se abrirá un diálogo para elegir el número de filas y columnas. + Por ejemplo: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +1 & 2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 & 6\\ +7 & 8 & 9 +\end{array}\right) +\] + +\end_inset + +Los paréntesis no son automáticos, puedes añadirlos como se ha descrito + en la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Paréntesis-y-delimitadores" + +\end_inset + +. + Al construir la matriz, puedes elegir si las entradas de columna se alinean + a la izquierda, a la derecha o al centro, en el cuadro +\family sans +Horizontal, +\family default + con las letras +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +l +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +r +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +c +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Lyx utiliza +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +c +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + por omisión. + Por ejemplo, la secuencia +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +lcr +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + indica que la primera columna se alineará a la izquierda, la segunda al + centro y la tercera a la derecha, ya que cada letra corresponde a una columna. + El resultado será el siguiente: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\begin{array}{lcr} +columna & columna & columna\\ +alineada & alineada & alineada\\ +a\, la\, izquierda & al\, centro & a\, la\, derecha +\end{array} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes añadir más filas a una matriz existente con +\family sans +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default + estando el cursor en la matriz. + Puedes añadir o quitar filas y columnas con el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuaciones +\family default + o con los botones adecuados de la barra de herramientas matemáticas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay otros ordenamientos utilizados en ecuaciones, tales como una presentación + de distintos casos. + Para ello se usa el submenú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Entorno +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +casos +\family default + o el comando +\series bold + +\backslash +cases +\series default +. + Aquí ves un ejemplo: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\begin{cases} +-1 & x<0\\ +0 & x=0\\ +1 & x>0 +\end{cases} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las ecuaciones con varias líneas se crean pulsando +\family sans +\series medium +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default +\series default + dentro de la ecuación. + Si lo haces en una ecuación vacía verás aparecer tres rectángulos azules. + Si tecleas +\family sans +\series medium +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default +\series default + en una ecuación no vacía, la parte anterior al signo de relación (signo + igual +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + += +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, etc.) se insertará automáticamente en la primera columna, el signo de relación + en la segunda y el resto en la tercera columna. + Por cada nueva pulsación de +\family sans +\series medium +Ctrl+Entrar +\family default +\series default + se crea una fila nueva. + Las ecuaciones multilínea siempre están en modo presentación. + Aquí hay un ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\ +a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:acuadrado} +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ten en cuenta que la columna central está destinada para los signos de relación, + y que las estructuras en esa columna se imprimirán en un tamaño menor: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray*} +\frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} +\end{eqnarray*} + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La ecuación multilínea aquí descrita es del tipo +\family sans +Entorno_EqnArray +\family default +. + Hay otros tipos de ecuaciones de varias líneas más apropiados para determinadas + situaciones, por ejemplo si quieres un espacio entre líneas más adecuado + que en la ecuación +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand eqref +reference "eq:acuadrado" + +\end_inset + +. + Los otros tipos se describen en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tipos-de-ecuaciones-AMS" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Numeración y referencia de ecuaciones +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Numeración de ecuaciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Referencias a ecuaciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Numeración-y-referencia" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para numerar una ecuación, pon el cursor en ella y usa el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Numerar la ecuación +\family default + o el atajo +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + +. + El número de ecuación se ve en LyX entre paréntesis. + +\lang english +The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated. + +\lang spanish + La posición y el formato del número de fórmula depende de la clase del + documento. + En este documento el número se imprime junto con el número del capítulo, + separados por un punto: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{equation} +1+1=2 +\end{equation} + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + + en una ecuación numerada quita la numeración. + Sólo se pueden numerar ecuaciones presentadas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las ecuaciones multilínea se pueden numerar línea por línea, mediante el + menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Numerar la línea +\family default + o el atajo +\family sans +Alt+M +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Mayúsculas+N. + +\family default + Sólo se conmuta la numeración de la línea donde esté el cursor: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +1 & = & 3-2\\ +2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ +4 & \leq & 7 +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +Para numerar todas las líneas usa el atajo +\family sans +Alt+M +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +N +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Toda ecuación presentada puede ser referida a su número mediante una etiqueta. + La etiqueta se inserta con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Etiqueta +\family default + (botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + +) cuando el cursor está en la ecuación: Se abre un diálogo para introducir + el texto. + Se recomienda dejar como primera parte de la etiqueta la propuesta +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eq: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, porque esto ayuda después a identificar el tipo de etiqueta si hay muchas + en el documento. + En el ejemplo siguiente hemos insertado la etiqueta +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +eq:tanhExp +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en la segunda línea: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\senh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ + & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cada línea etiquetada es automáticamente numerada, por tanto la etiqueta + se ve en LyX en el sitio del contenedor del número de ecuación +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +# +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + Puedes hacer referencia a una ecuación etiquetada con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Referencia +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cruzada +\family default + (botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +). + Saldrá un diálogo en el que escoger la etiqueta a la que quieras referirte. + La referencia se ve en LyX en un cuadro gris y en la salida se ve el número + de ecuación: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esto es una referencia cruzada a la ecuación ( +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "eq:tanhExp" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las propiedades de los cuadros de referencia en LyX se describen en la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" + +\end_inset + +. + Para borrar una etiqueta, pon el cursor al final de la ecuación etiquetada + y teclea +\family sans +Supr +\family default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Definición de macros de ecuación +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Macros de ecuación +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX permite la definición de macros para ecuaciones, lo que es muy útil + para documentos en los que aparecen varias veces los mismos tipos de ecuaciones. + Se explica en la sección +\emph on +Macros de ecuaciones +\emph default + del manual +\emph on + Ecuaciones +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Ajuste fino +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Estilos de la tipografía +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Estilos de la tipografía +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La tipografía estándar para el texto es cursiva, y para números es romana. + Para establecer una tipografía en una ecuación usa el botón +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\font" +\end_inset + + +\family default + de +\family sans +Paneles de ecuaciones +\family default +, o introduce directamente el comando adecuado, según el cuadro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Estilos-del-texto-y" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Estilos-del-texto-y" + +\end_inset + +Estilos del texto y comandos correspondientes. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografía +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Comando +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape up +\size normal +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathrm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Negrita}}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Cursiva}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape up +\size normal +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathtt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbb +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathfrak +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape up +\size normal +\emph on +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALIGRAFICA}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathcal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathsf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default +Ten en cuenta que los estilos +\family sans +Blackboard +\family default + y +\family sans +Caligráfica +\family default + sólo tienen mayúsculas. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cuando usas un estilo de letra se inserta un cuadro azul en la ecuación. + Cada carácter en este cuadro se imprime en ese estilo. + Al pulsar +\family sans +Espa +\family default +cio dentro del cuadro el cursor sale del mismo, por lo que si necesitas + un espacio debe ser protegido. + En este ejemplo la letra +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +N +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en estilo +\family sans +Blackboard +\family default + representa el conjunto de los números naturales: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los estilos de texto se pueden anidar unos en otros, lo que puede causar + confusión. + Por ejemplo, puedes poner un carácter en +\family sans +Fraktur +\family default + en un marco en +\family sans +Ancho fijo +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Por tanto es mejor no usar esta característica. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los estilos de texto no tienen efecto sobre las letras griegas: +\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Sólo se pueden imprimir en negrita usando el comando +\series bold + +\backslash +boldsymbol +\series default +, que trabaja como los demás comandos de estilo de letra: +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +boldsymbol +\series default + funciona con todos los símbolos, letras y números. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay más opciones para tipografías en el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Texto en ecuaciones +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Texto en una ecuación +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los estilos de tipografía son útiles para escribir ciertos caracteres pero + no para texto. + Para escribir partes más largas de texto en una ecuación es mejor usar + +\family sans +Modo texto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +normal +\family default + en la lista desplegable que surge al pulsar el botón +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\font" +\end_inset + + +\family default + de los +\family sans +Paneles de ecuaciones +\family default + (o bien el atajo +\family sans +Alt+C +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Espacio +\family default +). + En LyX, el texto normal dentro de una ecuación aparece en negro, no en + azul. + Puedes usar espacios y acentos de la manera habitual. + Por ejemplo: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\begin{cases} +x & \mbox{en este caso}\\ +-x & \mbox{en otro caso} +\end{cases} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tamaños de la tipografía +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Tamaños de la tipografía +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay cuatro estilos tipográficos (tamaños relativos) disponibles en modo + matemático, que son automáticamente escogidos en la mayoría de situaciones. + Son los estilos +\family sans +presentación +\family default +, +\family sans +texto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +normal +\family default +, +\family sans +índice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pequeño) +\family default +, e +\family sans +índice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +índice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(más +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pequeño) +\family default +. + Para la mayoría de los caracteres +\family sans +, texto +\family default + y +\family sans +presentación +\family default + muestran igual tamaño, pero en fracciones, exponentes, subíndices y algunas + otras estructuras, los caracteres son más grandes en +\family sans +presentación. + +\family default + Excepto para algunos operadores, que se redimensionan de acuerdo con la + situación, todo el texto se pondrá en el estilo que LaTeX considere apropiado. + La elección de LaTeX puede ser cambiada en el +\family sans +Panel de ecuaciones con el +\family default + botón +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\style" +\end_inset + + +\family default +. + Aparece un rectángulo de tamaño adecuado al estilo elegido en el que puedes + insertar la estructura matemática. + Por ejemplo, puedes poner +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ +\end_inset + +, que está normalmente en +\family sans +modo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto, +\family default + más grande en estilo +\family sans +presentación +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ +\end_inset + +. + En el siguiente ejemplo puedes ver los cuatro estilos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula $presentaci\acute{o}n$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle texto}$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle índice\, pequeño}$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle índice\, más\, pequeño}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Todos estos tamaños de la tipografía en modo ecuación son relativos, lo + que significa que si se ha puesto un cierto tamaño predeterminado con el + menú de +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto, +\family default + los tamaños en la fórmula se ajustarán en relación a dicho tamaño predeterminad +o. + De forma que, si el tamaño base de la tipografía del documento se cambia, + todos los caracteres serán reajustados. + Como ejemplo una ecuación con letra en tamaño +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +grandísima +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family roman +\size largest +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +AMS-LaTeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +AMS, ecuaciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! AMS +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX soporta los paquetes más habituales suministrados por la +\emph on +American Mathematical Society +\emph default + (AMS). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Habilitar el uso de AMS +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para usar los paquetes AMS y aprovechar sus ventajas, marca el cuadro +\family sans +Usar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +el +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paquete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ecuaciones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +AMS +\family default + en el diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuaciones +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + AMS es necesario para muchas estructuras matemáticas, de modo que si se + generan errores de LaTeX en ecuaciones, comprueba que has habilitado el + uso de AMS. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tipos de ecuaciones AMS +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Tipos-de-ecuaciones-AMS" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Matemáticas ! Ecuaciones multilínea +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +AMS-LaTeX provee una selección de tipos diferentes de ecuaciones. + LyX permite elegir entre +\family typewriter +align +\family default +, +\family typewriter +alignat +\family default +, +\family typewriter +flalign +\family default +, +\family typewriter +gather +\family default + y +\family typewriter +multilínea +\family default +. + La explicación de estos tipos de ecuación está en la documentación de AMS, + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Otras herramientas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Referencias cruzadas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Referencias cruzadas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las referencias cruzadas son uno de los puntos fuertes de LyX. + Puedes referenciar cada sección, flotante, nota al pie, ecuación y lista + en el documento. + Para hacer referencia a una parte del documento debes insertar en ella + una etiqueta. + La etiqueta se usa como ancla y como nombre para la referencia. + Supongamos que queremos hacer una referencia al segundo ítem de la lista: + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Primer ítem +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "enu:Segundo-ítem" + +\end_inset + +Segundo ítem +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Tercer ítem +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En primer lugar, insertamos una etiqueta en el segundo ítem con el menú + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Etiqueta +\family default + o con el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + + de la barra de herramientas. + Aparece una ventanilla para escribir el texto de la etiqueta, en la que + LyX propone un prefijo y un posible título, en este caso +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +enu:Segundo-ítem +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; el prefijo +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +enu: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + por +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +enumeración +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Al pulsar +\family sans +Aceptar +\family default + se inserta un cuadro gris parecido a este: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/etiquetaQt4.png + scale 85 + groupId botonesbh + +\end_inset + +. + El prefijo depende de la parte del documento donde se inserta la etiqueta, + p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. + si pones una etiqueta en un encabezado de sección, el prefijo será +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +sec: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para hacer referencia al ítem, hacemos una referencia a su etiqueta con + el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Referencia +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cruzada +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +. + Aparece la ventana de referencias cruzadas con la lista de todas las etiquetas + del documento, que podemos ordenar alfabéticamente, y escogemos en ella + la entrada +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +enu:Segundo-ítem +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Al pulsar +\family sans +Aceptar +\family default + se inserta un recuadro gris parecido a este: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/referenciaQt4.png + scale 85 + groupId botonesbh + +\end_inset + +. + En el documento de salida, en vez de este recuadro se mostrará el número + del ítem. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como alternativa a +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Referencia cruzada +\family default + puedes hacer clic derecho sobre una etiqueta y, en el menú contextual que + aparece, marcar +\family sans +Copiar como referencia +\family default +. + La referencia cruzada a esta etiqueta está ahora en el portapapeles y puede + pegarse en la posición actual del cursor con el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Pegar +\family default + (atajo +\family sans +Ctrl+V +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A continuación ponemos nuestra referencia cruzada: Ítem +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "enu:Segundo-ítem" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se recomienda usar un espacio protegido +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Se describen en sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-protegido" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + entre el nombre de la referencia y su número para evitar feos saltos de + línea entre ellos. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay seis estilos de referencias cruzadas: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +: imprime el número, es la opción predeterminada: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +(): imprime el número entre paréntesis, este estilo es el habitual + para referir ecuaciones, especialmente cuando se omite el nombre de referencia + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Ecuación +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand eqref +reference "eq:tanhExp" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +: imprime el número de la página: Página +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand pageref +reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +página +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +: imprime el texto +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +en la página +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y el número de página: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vpageref +reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +If the label is on the same page, it prints +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +on this page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +on the facing page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +on the previous page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page, it prints +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +on the next page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +página +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +: imprime el número, el texto +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +en la página +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y el número de página: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like +\family sans +\series bold + +\family default +\series default +; otherwise it behaves like +\family sans +\series bold +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Referencia +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +con +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +formato: imprime un formato personalizado. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + Esta característica sólo está disponible si está instalado el paquete LaTeX + +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + o +\series bold +refstyle +\series default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +El paquete LaTeX a usar para esta función se puede seleccionar con la opción + +\family sans +Usar refstyle (no prettyref) para referencias cruzadas +\family default +, en el menú +\family sans + Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Clase de documento +\family default +. + El paquete +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + es el preferido porque +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + solo soporta documentos en inglés. + El formato se especifica usando el comando +\series bold + +\backslash +newrefformat +\series default + (prettyref) o +\series bold + +\backslash +newref +\series default + (refstyle) en el preámbulo LaTeX del documento. + Por ejemplo, para redefinir todas las referencias a figuras (que tienen + la etiqueta +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +fig +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +), se usa el comando +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +newref{fig}{refcmd={Figura en la página +\backslash +pageref{#1}}} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Para más información sobre el formato echa un vistazo a las documentaciones + de los paquetes, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "prettyref,refstyle" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Referencia +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +textual: imprime la leyenda o el nombre de la referencia: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand nameref +reference "fig:Dos-imágenes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El número y la página de la parte referida del documento es calculado automática +mente por LaTeX al generar la salida. + El estilo de las referencias se especifica en el apartado +\family sans +Formato +\family default + de la ventana de referencias cruzadas, que surge si haces clic en un cuadro + de referencia. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sólo puedes usar el estilo +\family sans + +\family default + para referenciar partes numeradas del documento, mientras que el estilo + +\family sans + +\family default + siempre es posible. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para hacer referencia a una sección, pon la etiqueta en el encabezado de + la misma; para un flotante, pon la etiqueta en su leyenda. + En notas al pie puedes poner la etiqueta en cualquier sitio de la nota. + Las referencias a ecuaciones se explican en la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Numeración-y-referencia" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Clic derecho sobre una referencia cruzada abre un menú contextual. + La entrada +\family sans +Ir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +a +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +etiqueta +\family default + lleva al cursor delante de la etiqueta correspondiente. + Esta entrada se cambiará por +\family sans +Volver +\family default + en el menú contextual de la etiqueta, de modo que permite retornar el cursor + a la referencia. + Puedes también volver con el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + + de la barra de herramientas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En cualquier momento puedes cambiar el texto de una etiqueta pulsando sobre + su cuadro. + Las referencias a esa nueva etiqueta se actualizan automáticamente, no + debes preocuparte de ello. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si una referencia cruzada no encuentra su etiqueta, verás en LyX +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\lang english +BROKEN +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + in the cross-reference label +\lang spanish + y en la salida dos signos de interrogación en vez de la referencia. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las referencias se describen con detalle en sección +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Referencias a flotantes +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en el manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +El índice general y otros índices +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Indi@Índice general +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Navegador de contorno +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:IG" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +El índice general +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Indice-general" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El índice general (IG) se inserta con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índice\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +general +\family default +. + En LyX se muestra un cuadro gris. + Si pulsas en él, aparece en una ventana lateral el +\family sans +Navegador de contorno +\family default + con las entradas del IG. + Puedes ir a cualquier parte del documento pulsando su entrada y reorganizar + las secciones. + Esta operación es una alternativa al menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Navegador de contorno +\family default +, como se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Navegación" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El IG lista automáticamente las secciones numeradas. + Si has declarado un título breve para un encabezado, como se explica en + la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Títulos-breves" + +\end_inset + +, será éste el que aparezca en el IG. + La sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Profundidad-de-numeración" + +\end_inset + + describe cómo ajustar el número de niveles de secciones que han de aparecer + en el IG. + También puedes ajustar el nivel de secciones mostradas en la ventana del + IG mediante el deslizador que hay en la parte inferior de la misma. + Las secciones no numeradas no salen en el IG. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Índices de figuras, cuadros y algoritmos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los índices de cuadros, figuras y algoritmos son muy parecidos al índice + general. + Se insertan mediante los submenús de +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índice +\family default +. + Las entradas del índice son el número del flotante correspondiente y su + leyenda. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +URLs e hiperenlaces +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hiperenlaces +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +URLs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URLs +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:URL" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se pueden insertar enlaces a páginas web o direcciones de correo electrónico + con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +URL +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí hay un ejemplo: Página de inicio de LyX: +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El estilo del texto del enlace no se puede cambiar, el texto del URL se + mostrará siempre en +\family typewriter +Ancho fijo +\family default +. + Para poder cambiar el formato del texto del URL usa hiperenlaces, como + se explica en la siguiente subsección. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota +\series default +: Los URLs no deben finalizar con una contra-barra, de lo contrario se generan + errores de LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hiperenlaces +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Hiperenlaces" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los hiperenlaces se insertan con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Hiperenlace +\family default + o con el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "href-insert" +\end_inset + + de la barra de herramientas. + Aparece un diálogo con dos campos: +\family sans +Dirección +\family default + y +\family sans +Nombre +\family default +. + El nombre es el texto que se imprime para el enlace. + El tipo de enlace puede ser un enlace web como: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página de LyX" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + +, una dirección de correo o un enlace a un archivo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes iniciar aplicaciones mediante un hiperenlace tipo web, pero añadiendo + el prefijo « +\family sans +run: +\family default +» a la dirección del enlace. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la salida PDF los enlaces se partirán con un guión si es necesario, y + se puede hacer clic sobre ellos en las salidas DVI y PDF. + Para cambiar el formato del texto selecciona el enlace insertado y usa + el diálogo de estilo del texto. + Este es un ejemplo de hiperenlace con texto en sans serif negrita: +\family sans +\series bold + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página de LyX" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El color del texto del enlace se puede cambiar si está marcada la opción + +\family sans +Enlaces +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +coloreados +\family default + en el diálogo de propiedades de PDF, (menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Propiedades PDF +\family default +). + Por ejemplo, en este documento el color del texto se ha establecido en + azul añadiendo la opción +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +urlcolor=blue +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +en el campo +\family sans +Opciones adicionales +\family default + de la pestaña +\family sans +Hiperenlaces +\family default + del mencionado menú. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Apéndices +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Apéndices +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Apéndices" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los apéndices se crean con el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Comenzar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +apéndice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +aquí +\family default +. + Todo el documento, desde la posición actual del cursor hasta el final, + se transforma en apéndice. + La región es señalada con un borde rojo. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cada capítulo o sección dentro de la región del apéndice se considera un + apéndice, y se ordenan con letras mayúsculas. + Las subsecciones se ordenan con esta letra, un punto y el número de la + subsección. + Todas las secciones del apéndice se pueden referenciar como las secciones + normales, como en estos dos ejemplos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Apéndice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Créditos" + +\end_inset + +. + Apéndice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Exportar" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Bibliografía +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliografía +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Bibliografía" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay dos formas de generar la bibliografía en un documento LyX. + Puedes incluir una base de datos bibliográficos +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +conocida por «bases de datos BibTeX» +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, que se explica enseguida, o insertarla manualmente usando el entorno de + párrafo +\family sans +Bibliografía, +\family default + descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Biblio_entorno" + +\end_inset + +. + Si quieres cosas distintas a citas numéricas, usadas en este documento, + como citas autor-año, debes usar una base de datos bibliográficos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +El entorno Bibliografía +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En el entorno +\family sans +Bibliografía +\family default + cada párrafo comienza con un cuadro gris etiquetado con un número. + Si pinchas en él verás un diálogo donde se establece una +\family sans +Clave +\family default + y una +\family sans +Etiqueta. + +\family default + La clave es el nombre simbólico al que se referirá la entrada bibliográfica. + Por ejemplo, nuestra segunda entrada en la bibliografía es un libro sobre + LaTeX para el que hemos puesto como clave una abreviatura de su título, + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +latexcompanion +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes insertar una referencia a la clave de una bibliografía con el menú + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cita +\family default +o con el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" +\end_inset + + +\family sans +. + +\family default + Saldrá una ventana +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Añadir cita +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en la que puedes seleccionar una o más claves en la lista de las disponibles. + El cuadro de la referencia a la cita se etiquetará con la clave de referencia. + Si pinchas en el cuadro, aparece la ventana de cita y puedes cambiar la + referencia. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las referencias bibliográficas se muestran en la salida con el número de + entrada entre corchetes. + Si pones una +\family sans +Etiqueta +\family default + para la entrada, esta se verá en lugar del número. + Aquí vemos dos ejemplos, el primero sin etiqueta, el segundo con la etiqueta + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Créditos +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Echa un vistazo a +\family sans +LaTeX Companion Second Edition +\family default +: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los miembros del equipo LyX figuran en los Créditos: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest + label via the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). + All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Bases de datos bibliográficos (BibTeX) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliografía ! Bases de datos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliografía ! BibTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Bases-datos-bibliográficos" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las bases de datos bibliográficos son útiles si usas la misma bibliografía + en distintos documentos. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +También son útiles simplemente para mantener una base de datos de artículos + y notas relacionados con ellos. + La mayoría de los programas de bases de datos mencionados permiten almacenar + anotaciones y revisiones junto con la información bibliográfica. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + También hace que sea muy sencillo tener un formato uniforme para todas + las entradas de la bibliografía. + Puedes recoger la bibliografía de todos los libros o artículos relevantes + para tu trabajo en una base de datos, la cual sirve para distintos documentos + porque sólo aparecerán en la bibliografía las entradas que sean referidas + en un documento dado. + Esto evita la necesidad de mantener el rastro de los artículos y libros + que se citan. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La base de datos es un archivo de texto con la extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +.bib +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + que contiene la bibliografía en un formato especial, como se explica en + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "BibTeX-2" + +\end_inset + + y en libros de LaTeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +( +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" + +\end_inset + +). + El archivo se puede crear con cualquier editor de texto, pero habitualmente + se usa un programa especial para crear y editar las entradas en la base + de datos. + Hay disponible una lista de estos programas en la Wiki de LyX, +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para usar una base de datos está el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índice\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bibliografía +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +BibT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. + Surge una ventana en la que puedes añadir una o más bases de datos y selecciona +r un archivo de estilo y después se inserta un recuadro gris. + La opción +\family sans +Añadir bibliografía al IG +\family default + añade en el índice una entrada para la bibliografía. + En el cuadro desplegable +\family sans +Contenido +\family default + puedes seleccionar qué parte de la base de datos debe mostrarse en la salida. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El archivo de estilo es un archivo de texto con extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +.bst +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + que define el estilo de todas las entradas bibliográficas. + Tu distribución LaTeX debería proporcionar varios de ellos, y muchos editores + proporcionan sus propios archivos de estilo, de modo que no tienes que + preocuparte del formato. + Por supuesto, es posible escribir estilos propios, aunque es tarea para + expertos. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hay información sobre el modo de hacerlo en +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La inserción de referencias a citas bibliográficas funciona como ya se ha + descrito en la sección anterior. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para generar la bibliografía a partir de una base de datos, LyX utiliza + el programa +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +. + Puedes elegir cual de sus variantes debería usar LyX como procesador: en +\family sans + Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bibliografía +\family default + o en +\family sans +\lang english +Tools +\lang spanish +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Preferences +\lang spanish +\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Salidas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. + Son posibles las siguientes variantes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +biber provee soporte Unicode completo, memoria ilimitada, no funciona con + otros paquetes de bibliografía (como p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\series bold +natbib +\series default +), solo con el paquete +\series bold +biblatex +\series default +; recomendado para textos multilingües y para idiomas que no usen tipografías + latinas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex predeterminado; no permite en las entradas caracteres especiales + que no se pueden codificar en 7 bits, memoria limitada, funciona con todos + los paquetes de bibliografía, excepto +\series bold +biblatex +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex8 permite todos los caracteres que se pueden codificar en 8 bits, + memoria más amplia que +\family sans +bibtex +\family default +, funciona con todos los paquetes de bibliografía +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +BibTeX puede controlarse con opciones que puedes añadir bajo la especificación + de la variante. + Antes de añadir ninguna opción, se recomienda encarecidamente leer el manual + de +\family sans +BibTeX +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si seleccionas la opción +\family sans +Bibliografía por secciones +\family default + en +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bibliografía +\family default +, es posible tener múltiples bibliografías ordenadas en secciones. + Esto y otras características se explica con detalle en la sección +\emph on +Personalizar bibliografías con BibTeX +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Características adicionales. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En este documento hemos utilizado dos bibliografías para mostrar la diferencia + entre las dos formas de crearlas. + Como se ve, la bibliografía creada a partir de una base de datos contiene + sólo las entradas que son referidas en el documento. + El estilo utilizado es +\family sans +alphadin.bst +\family default +, que genera el complicado esquema alemán de claves de referencia de la + bibliografía. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formato de la Bibliografía +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliografía ! Formato +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes poner un estilo especial de cita en la ventana de referencia de cita. + Para esto debes habilitar la opción +\family sans +NatBib +\family default + en el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bibliografía +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +. + +\family default + En dicho menú puedes establecer el estilo de cita por omisión. + Si pones un estilo de cita para una referencia prevalecerá sobre la opción + por omisión. + Para el estilo global usa los archivos de estilo de BibTeX como se explica + en la sección anterior. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la ventana de referencia de cita también puedes poner un texto para que + aparezca antes o después de la referencia. + Aquí hay un ejemplo en el que el texto +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Capítulo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + va detrás de la referencia: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Echa un vistazo a +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "Capítulo 3" +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Índice alfabético +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ind@Índice alfabético +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Indice-alfabético" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para crear una entrada en el índice usa el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Entrada +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +índice +\family default +o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "index-insert" +\end_inset + +. + Se inserta un cuadro que contiene el texto que aparecerá en el índice. + Por omisión, LyX escoge como texto para la entrada de índice la palabra + en la que está el cursor o el texto que esté seleccionado. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El índice alfabético se inserta en el documento con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índice\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +alfabético +\family default +. + En LyX se muestra un cuadro azul claro con la etiqueta +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Índice +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en el lugar en que saldrá impreso en la salida. + Este tipo de cuadro no admite clic. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En las siguientes subsecciones describiremos brevemente los comandos para + el índice alfabético. + Para una descripción detallada del mecanismo de indexación de LaTeX, consulta + algún libro de LaTeX, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexbook,latexguide" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Agrupación de entradas de índice +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ind@Índice alfabético ! Agrupación de entradas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es frecuente agrupar entradas del índice de forma que el lector pueda hacer + búsquedas más rápidas. + Supongamos que queremos agrupar las entradas del índice para las listas + enumeración y enumeración* bajo la entrada +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Listas +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Primero creamos esta entrada en la sección +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Listas" + +\end_inset + +. + En el campo de texto de la entrada de índice en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Enumeración*" + +\end_inset + +, insertamos lo siguiente +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Listas ! Enumeración* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +y en la entrada de índice de la sección +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Enumeración" + +\end_inset + + ponemos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Listas ! Enumeración +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El signo de exclamación +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +! +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + indica los niveles de agrupación. + Puedes tener tres niveles; cada nivel se sangra un poco más. + Para el nivel más alto no hace falta entrada de índice. + Si no ponemos ninguna entrada de índice para +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Listas +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, se imprimirá de todas formas pero sin número de página. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Rangos de página +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ind@Índice alfabético ! Rangos de página +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalmente las entradas de índice aparecerán con el número de página de + la sección indexada. + Pero a veces querrás indexar más páginas bajo la misma entrada. + P. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e., si quieres indexar los entornos de párrafo, creas una entrada de índice + en la sección +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Entornos-de-párrafo" + +\end_inset + + con el comando +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Entornos de párrafo|( +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +y otra entrada al final de la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Código-LyX" + +\end_inset + + con el comando +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Entornos de párrafo|) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los comandos +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|( +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|) +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + respectivamente inician y finalizan el rango de páginas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puedes añadir la misma entrada de índice en distintos sitios del documento. + En la salida se muestra una lista de referencias de páginas, separadas + por comas, bajo la misma entrada. + Un ejemplo es la entrada de índice «Documentos ! Configuración». +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Referencias cruzadas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ind@Índice alfabético ! Referencias cruzadas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es posible hacer referencia a otra entrada del índice. + Por ejemplo, en la entrada +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +GIF +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Formatos-de-imagen" + +\end_inset + +) del índice, se hace una referencia a la entrada +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Formatos de imagen +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en la misma sección con el comando +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +GIF|see{Formatos de imagen} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +donde las llaves deben insertarse en código TeX. + El texto entre llaves es la entrada a la que se remite. + En la salida aparece sin número de página. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +N. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +del t. +\emph default +: En la salida, el término +\emph on +see +\emph default + se traduce automáticamente por +\emph on +véase +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Orden de entradas en el índice +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ind@Índice alfabético ! Orden de las entradas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En el índice alfabético se pueden usar caracteres acentuados, pero entonces + las entradas podrían no estar en el orden adecuado. + Las entradas se ordenan alfabéticamente, pero LaTeX +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +El índice es generado en segundo plano por un programa externo, véase la + sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Programas-para-índice" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + no sabe ordenar caracteres acentuados en idiomas distintos. + Hemos puesto como ejemplo las entradas postizas «maison», «maïs», y «maître». + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entradas postizas ! maïs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entradas postizas ! maître +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entradas postizas ! maïs@maison +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Saldrían en el orden maïs, maître, maison, pero lo correcto sería maïs, + maison, maître. + Para conseguirlo usamos el comando +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +entrada anterior@entrada actual +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En nuestro caso queremos que «maison» siga a «maïs», por tanto escribimos + la entrada de esta forma: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +maïs@maison +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La entrada anterior no tiene que ser una entrada real, puede ser cualquier + palabra para indicar a LaTeX el orden; en la siguiente subsección hay un + ejemplo. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +N. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +del t +\emph default +.: En las secciones +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:IG" + +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Indice-alfabético" + +\end_inset + + hay ejemplos: sin el comando explicado, las entradas «Índice alfabético» + e «Índice general» aparecerían las primeras, delante de «AMS, ecuaciones». +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En algunos casos, si estás usando el programa +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + para generar el índice, el orden de entradas en el índice no es correcto + (véase la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Programas-para-índice" + +\end_inset + +). + Por ejemplo, +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + podría imprimir la entrada de índice para el paquete LaTeX aeguill, en + la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tipografía-del-documento" + +\end_inset + +, después de las entradas de índice de los demás paquetes LaTeX, aunque + todos estos comandos de índice empiezan con +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +LaTeX, paquetes ! +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + La razón es que la entrada de índice para aeguill está en una nota al pie. + Para arreglar este fallo de +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +, añade estos comandos en el preámbulo del documento: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +let +\backslash +OrgIndex +\backslash +index +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand*{ +\backslash +index}[1]{ +\backslash +OrgIndex{#1}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formato de entradas del índice +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ind@Índice alfabético ! Formato de las entradas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El aspecto de las entradas de índice se puede cambiar con el diálogo de + estilo del texto. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entradas postizas ! +\emph on +Entrada en cursiva +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + También se puede formatear el número de página mediante el carácter +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +| +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + seguido del comando LaTeX sin barra invertida. + Por ejemplo, podemos poner +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +número en cursiva:|textit +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +para imprimir el número en cursiva. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entradas postizas ! número en cursiva:|textit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Normalmente todos los comandos LaTeX comienzan con barra invertida, pero + en este caso especial +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|command +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + equivale a +\series bold + +\backslash +command{page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +number} +\series default +. + Echa un vistazo a la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" + +\end_inset + + para saber más sobre sintaxis de LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + El formato de entradas individuales sólo funciona si usas el programa +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +para generar el índice, véase la sec. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Programas-para-índice" + +\end_inset + +. + Si usas +\family sans +xindy +\family default +, sólo funciona para negrita y cursiva. + Esto se debe a que +\family sans +xindy +\family default + requiere definir elementos semánticos antes de poder usarse, véase +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "p. 678 ff." +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + para detalles. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En general recomendamos no utilizar el procedimiento anterior. + Es mejor definir una macro en el preámbulo. + Quizá quieras en cursiva todos los números de página que se refieran a + definiciones del término indexado para que el usuario las encuentre fácilmente. + Para ello, pon lo siguiente en el preámbulo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +IndexDef}[1]{ +\backslash +textit{#1}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +y escribe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +mi entrada|IndexDef +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +en la entrada de índice. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entradas postizas ! mi entrada|IndexDef +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + La ventaja es que si cambias de opinión o si tu editor pide las definiciones + en negrita, sólo tendrás que cambiar la macro y no cada entrada. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +También puedes cambiar el formato para todo el índice. + Por ejemplo, hemos marcado el cuadro de índice al final de este documento + en negrita, con lo que todas las entradas del índice alfabético saldrán + con ese estilo de letra. + Para tareas más avanzadas tienes que componer un +\emph on +Index Style File +\emph default +, véase la documentación de +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + o +\family sans +xindy +\family default + para detalles, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Programas para generar el índice +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ind@Índice alfabético ! Programas para generarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Programas-para-índice" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si está instalado el programa +\family sans +xindy +\family default +, LyX lo usa para generar el índice; si no, usa el programa +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +, que forma parte de cualquier distribución LaTeX. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + es muy antiguo, ya no se desarrolla y tiene muchas dificultades. + En particular, ha sido definido pensando exclusivamente en el inglés. + Así que falla en la ordenación correcta de todo lo que no sea texto de + tipo inglés. + Hemos explicado anteriormente como arreglar esto. + Sin embargo, si escribes en otro idioma y usas Linux, considera el empleo + de +\family sans +xindy +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Ambos programas se pueden controlar mediante opciones que se pueden determinar + en el diálogo de preferencias de LyX, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Configuración" + +\end_inset + +. + Las opciones disponibles se explican en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +. + Además puedes especificar otro programa para generar el índice. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si necesitas opciones específicas o un programa de índices alternativo solo + para un documento, puedes definir el programa y las opciones en +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índices +\family default +. + Esto es especialmente útil si necesitas pasar opciones específicas del + idioma al programa de índices o si necesitas un estilo específico. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Índices múltiples +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En muchos campos es frecuente tener más de un índice. + Por ejemplo, tener un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Índice de nombres +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + además del índice alfabético. + LaTeX no ofrece directamente esta posibilidad, pero hay muchos paquetes + que proporcionan esta función. + LyX usa el paquete +\series bold +splitidx +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! splitidx +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + para generar índices múltiples. + El paquete se incluye en las distribuciones recientes de LaTeX. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Si no es así consulta TeX Catalogue, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +. + Este paquete no solo consta de un archivo de estilo LaTeX, incluye además + programas preprocesadores que también deben instalarse. + Véase la documentación del paquete para más detalles. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para configurar el uso de múltiples índices en LyX, hay que seleccionar + +\family sans +Usar índices múltiples +\family default + en el diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índices +\family default +. + La lista +\family sans +Índices disponibles +\family default + ya contiene el índice estándar +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Índice +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Para añadir más índices, añade su nombre (en la forma en que deba aparecer + como encabezado) en el campo +\family sans +Nuevo +\family default + y pulsa el botón +\family sans +Añadir +\family default +. + El nuevo índice aparecerá ahora en la lista. + Es posible asignar un color alternativo a la etiqueta LyX del nuevo índice. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Una vez aplicados los cambios, encontrarás el nuevo índice definido en una + nueva entrada en el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índice +\family default + y el menú +\family sans +Insertar +\family default + tiene una entrada separada para cada uno de los índices definidos. + El funcionamiento es básicamente el mismo que el del índice estándar, pero + tiene algunas características adicionales: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Si quieres cambiar la atribución de una entrada de índice específica, haciendo + clic derecho sobre la etiqueta de la entrada abrirá un diálogo donde se + puede hacer eso. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Con clic derecho sobre un índice, puedes cambiar su tipo. + Además, es posible calificar una lista de índice como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Subíndice +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + En este caso, el encabezado de esta lista descenderá un nivel. + Por ejemplo, en un documento clase +\emph on +book +\emph default +, en el que el encabezado estándar de índice se define como capítulo, los + subíndices se definirán como secciones y así se anidarán en los índices. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Nomenclatura / Glosario +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclatura +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glosario|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Nomenclatura +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Nomenclatura" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A veces necesitarás compilar una lista de símbolos que han sido mencionados + en el documento, con una breve descripción de los mismos: la llamada nomenclatu +ra o glosario. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para crear nomenclaturas debe estar instalado el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Lo puedes encontrar en el Catálogo TeX, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + o en el administrador de paquetes de tu sistema LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Una entrada de nomenclatura se genera colocando el cursor detrás de un símbolo + y usando el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Entrada +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nomenclatura +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "nomencl-insert" +\end_inset + +. + Aparece una ventana con varios campos de texto y se inserta un cuadro gris + con la etiqueta « +\family sans +Nom +\family default +». +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Una ventana de nomenclatura contiene dos entradas principales: la primera + es el propio símbolo y la segunda su descripción. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + Debes introducir en todos los campos código LaTeX válido. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Definición y formato de la nomenclatura +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclatura ! Formato +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si tienes que referir símbolos, tienes que definirlos en el campo +\family sans +Símbolo +\family default +como fórmula de LaTeX. + Por ejemplo, para obtener « +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +», inserta: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series default +El carácter «$» empieza y finaliza el modo matemático. + El comando LaTeX para la letra griega es su nombre precedido de la barra + invertida « +\backslash +». + Para letras griegas mayúsculas el comando comienza también con mayúscula, + +\series bold + +\backslash +Sigma +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +(En la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" + +\end_inset + + hay una breve introducción a la sintaxis de LaTeX.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El diálogo +\family sans +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto +\family default + no se puede emplear para formatear la descripción, hay que usar comandos + LaTeX. + Por ejemplo, la descripción de la entrada de nomenclatura para el símbolo + « +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +» en este documento es: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +entrada postiza para el carácter +\backslash +textsf{sigma} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +El comando +\series bold + +\backslash +textsf +\series default + pone el texto en estilo +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serif +\family default +. + Para estilo +\series bold +negrita +\series default + usa el comando +\series bold + +\backslash +textbf +\series default +, para +\family typewriter +ancho fijo +\family default + usa +\series bold + +\backslash +texttt +\series default +, para +\emph on +cursiva +\emph default + usa +\series bold + +\backslash +emph +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para introducir en entradas de la nomenclatura caracteres como | +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +! +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +, @ +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +" +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +, es necesario que vayan precedidos por comillas como secuencia de escape. + Para evitar que el carácter +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +" +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + perturbe los caracteres siguientes, la secuencia se finaliza con un par + de llaves: ""{} +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\"{}" +description "El carácter comillas se obtiene escribiendo ' \"\"{}\"\"{} '" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Orden de las entradas de la nomenclatura +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclatura ! Orden de las entradas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las entradas de la nomenclatura se ordenan alfabéticamente según el código + LaTeX de la definición del símbolo. + Esto puede llevar a resultados indeseables cuando, por ejemplo, tienes + símbolos en el código. + Supón que tienes entradas de nomenclatura para los símbolos +\emph on +a +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "a" +description "entrada postiza para el carácter <>" + +\end_inset + + +\emph default + y +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +prefix "Sigma" +symbol "$\\sigma$" +description "entrada postiza para el carácter \\textsf{sigma}" + +\end_inset + +. + Serán ordenados según « +\family sans +a +\family default +» y « +\family typewriter +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\family default +», y por tanto +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + estará delante de +\emph on +a +\emph default + porque el carácter «$» es tenido en cuenta para la ordenación. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para controlar el orden de la lista se usa el campo +\family sans +Ordenar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +como +\family default +en el diálogo de nomenclatura. + Entonces el orden será establecido teniendo en cuenta el texto de dicho + campo y no la definición del símbolo. + Para nuestro ejemplo, puedes escribir +\family typewriter +sigma +\family default + para +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +, con lo que +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\emph on + +\emph default +se colocará donde corresponda. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para hacer agrupamientos y ver otras indicaciones sobre nomenclatura, consulta + la documentación del paquete +\series bold +nomencl +\series default +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Opciones para la nomenclatura +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclatura ! Opciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El paquete +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + acepta algunas opciones para modificar su apariencia. + Aquí hay algunas de ellas (y más en su documentación): +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refeq Adjunta la frase « +\family sans +, véase la ecuación ( +\emph on +eq +\emph default +) +\family default +» a cada entrada, siendo +\family sans +\emph on +eq +\family default +\emph default + el número de la última ecuación al frente de la entrada de la nomenclatura +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refpage Adjunta la frase « +\family sans +, página +\emph on +página +\family default +\emph default +» a cada entrada, siendo +\family sans +\emph on +página +\family default +\emph default + el número de la página en la que aparece la entrada +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +intoc Inserta la nomenclatura en el Índice general +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para emplear una o más de las opciones, añádelas separadas por comas en + el campo de opciones de la clase de documento, en el diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +. + En este documento se ha puesto las opciones +\series bold +refpage, intoc +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +También se pueden usar las dos primeras opciones de antes sólo para ciertas + entradas de la nomenclatura, añadiendo uno de los siguientes comandos como + última entrada en el campo +\family sans +Descripción +\family default + del diálogo +\family sans +Entrada de nomenclatura +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeq Como la opción +\series bold +refeq +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefpage Como la opción +\series bold +refpage +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeqpage Forma abreviada de +\series bold + +\backslash +nomrefeq +\backslash +nomrefpage +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomnorefeq, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefpage, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefeqpage Deshabilita las opciones correspondientes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Imprimir la nomenclatura +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclatura ! Impresión +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para imprimir la nomenclatura usa el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Índice\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nomenclatura +\family default +. + Se mostrará un cuadro etiquetado « +\family sans +Nomenclatura +\family default +» en el lugar en el que aparecerá en la salida. + Con clic derecho sobre él se puede alterar el espacio para los símbolos. + Están disponibles las siguientes opciones: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Predeterminado un espacio de 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ancho +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +etiqueta +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +más +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +larga anchura de la etiqueta más amplia de todas las entradas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Personalizado espacio personalizado +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la salida impresa aparece el título «Nomenclatura». + Si no te gusta ese nombre, puedes cambiarlo redefiniendo el comando +\series bold + +\backslash +nomname +\series default + en el preámbulo. + Por ejemplo, para titular como +\emph on +Índice de símbolos +\emph default +, añade al preámbulo la línea: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family roman +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +nomname}{Índice de símbolos} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Programa para la nomenclatura +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Programa-para-la-nomenclatura" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclatura ! Programa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX utiliza el programa +\family sans + makeindex +\family default +, incluido en todas las distribuciones LaTeX, para generar la nomenclatura. + El diálogo de las preferencias de LyX permite especificar otro programa + o controlar +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + añadiendo opciones, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Configuración" + +\end_inset + +. + Las opciones disponibles se explican en +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl,makeindex" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Ramas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ramas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Ramas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Ramas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A veces es útil ocultar ciertas partes de un documento en la salida. + Por ejemplo, para un profesor es más cómodo tener las preguntas y las respuesta +s de un examen en el mismo documento, pero no quiere, evidentemente, que + los alumnos vean las respuestas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para casos como éste, LyX ofrece la herramienta llamada «ramas». + El texto de una rama sólo aparecerá en la salida si la rama está activada. + Para crear una rama, selecciona el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rama\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Insertar rama nueva +\family default + (si solo quieres especificar una nueva rama), o bien, en el diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +, ve al apartado +\family sans +Ramas +\family default +. + Ahí puedes poner el nombre de la rama, activarla o cambiar su color de + fondo en LyX. + Además, el diálogo permite mezclar dos ramas (renombrando una con el nombre + de la otra) y añadir +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +ramas desconocidas +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, (o sea, ramas que se añadieron al documento mediante copia y pega desde + otro documento sin haber sido definidas) a la lista de ramas del documento. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El texto a incluir en una rama se escribe en un cuadro desplegable que se + inserta mediante el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rama +\family default +, donde puedes elegir una de las ramas creadas. + También puedes cambiar la rama haciendo clic derecho sobre el cuadro. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A continuación hay un ejemplo en el que sólo está activada la pregunta, + mientras que la respuesta está desactivada y no aparece en la salida: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Pregunta +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +Pregunta: ¿Quién fue el primer Nobel de Física? +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Respuesta +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard +Respuesta: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Activando +\family sans +Sufijo del nombre de archivo +\family default + en +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ramas +\family default +, se añadirá el nombre de las ramas activas al nombre del archivo al exportarlo. + Considera, por ejemplo, un archivo +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen.lyx +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + que tiene las ramas de arriba. + Si +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Sufijo del nombre de archivo +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + está activo, el archivo PDF exportado será nombrado +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + si +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Pregunta +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Respuesta +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + están inactivas, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen-Pregunta.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + si solo está activa la rama +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Pregunta +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen-Respuesta.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + si solo está activa la rama +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Respuesta +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen-Pregunta-Respuesta.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + si ambas ramas están activas. + Esto ayuda a exportar fácilmente diferentes versiones del documento sin + mucha molestia. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para usar salida condicional en sitios donde no se pueden insertar ramas, + como en ecuaciones, puedes codificar definiciones LaTeX especiales para + cada rama. + Por ejemplo, puedes definir para la rama pregunta +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Para una introducción a la sintaxis de LaTeX, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +pregunta}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +respuesta}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +y para la rama respuesta +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +pregunta}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +respuesta}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Pregunta +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +pregunta}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +respuesta}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Respuesta +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +pregunta}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +respuesta}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ahora se pueden usar los comandos +\series bold + +\backslash +pregunta{\SpecialChar \ldots{} +} +\series default + y +\series bold + +\backslash +respuesta{\SpecialChar \ldots{} +} +\series default + para obtener salida condicional. + Aquí hay un ejemplo de ecuación en la que sólo aparece la parte +\series bold + +\backslash +pregunta +\series default +: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +x^{2}-2x-2=0\Rightarrow\pregunta{x_{1}}\respuesta{x_{2}}=1\pregunta{+\sqrt{3}}\respuesta{-\sqrt{3}} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En ecuaciones, se puede conseguir el mismo efecto usando macros de ecuación, + véase el manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout + files (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.). + For this advanced usage, see the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual, section +\lang spanish + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Flex insets and InsetLayout +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Propiedades PDF +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Propiedades-PDF" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Propiedades PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En +\family sans +Propiedades PDF +\family default +del diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default + se pueden configurar opciones especiales para la salida PDF del documento. + Todas las opciones son suministradas por el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +which will link +\lang spanish +todas las referencias cruzadas en las salidas DVI y PDF. + Esto significa que el lector puede desplazarse por las partes del documento + referenciadas haciendo clic sobre una entrada del índice general o una + referencia. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La información de cabecera de la pestaña +\family sans +General +\family default + se guarda como propiedades del archivo junto con el PDF. + Muchos programas son capaces de extraer estas informaciones para, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej., reconocer automáticamente quién es el autor y otras características + del PDF. + Esto es muy útil para ordenar, clasificar o usar PDF\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +s para propósitos bibliográ +ficos. + Si se marca la opción +\family sans +Llenar automáticamente la información de cabecera +\family default +, LyX intenta extraer la información de cabecera a partir de la configuración + del título y del autor del documento. + La opción +\family sans +Modo pantalla completa +\family default + abre el PDF en pantalla completa, útil para presentaciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la pestaña +\family sans +Hiperenlaces +\family default + del diálogo puedes especificar el aspecto de los enlaces y si se crean + enlaces para las referencias bibliográficas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +The +\family sans +Break +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +over +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +lines +\family default + option allows long links to be split; +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +frames +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +around +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + and +\family sans +Color +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames; +\family sans +Color +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + colors the different links. + The default colors are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color magenta +\lang english +magenta +\color inherit + for hyperlinks and URLs +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color red +\lang english +red +\color inherit + for links +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color green +\lang english +green +\color inherit + for citations +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +but you can change these in the field +\family sans +Additional options +\family default +. + For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If the option +\family sans +Backreferences +\family default + is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different + entries +\lang spanish +, mostrando el número de la sección, transparencia o página donde la entrada + está referenciada. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la pestaña +\family sans +Marcadores +\family default + puedes determinar si se crean marcadores para cada sección del documento + para facilitar al lector la navegación por el mismo. + Puedes decidir si los marcadores se numeran o no como las secciones del + documento. + Con el nivel de marcadores abiertos puedes determinar qué niveles de sección + deben mostrarse al abrir el PDF. + Por ejemplo, un nivel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 mostrará las secciones y subsecciones, un nivel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 mostrará sólo las secciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En este documento se han utilizado las propiedades PDF. + Si miras la configuración del documento puedes ver algunas opciones adicionales + de +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + utilizadas. + Para explicación de las mismas te remitimos al manual de hyperref +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Código TeX y la sintaxis de LaTeX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Código-TeX" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cuadros de código TeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Codigo@Código TeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Cuadros-TeX" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Como LyX funciona sobre LaTeX, soporta muchos comandos y estructuras LaTeX, + pero no todos. + LaTeX contiene cientos de paquetes que suministran diversos comandos. + Cada mes se actualizan paquetes y se añaden nuevos. + Esto tiene la ventaja de que puedes hacer prácticamente todo, para cada + necesidad hay un paquete LaTeX. + Evidentemente, LyX no puede seguir este ritmo de actualización para soportar + todos estos paquetes y sus comandos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pero no temas, LyX puede insertar directamente cualquier comando LaTeX dentro + de un cuadro de código TeX. + Los cuadros de código TeX se insertan con el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Código +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default + o con el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + + (atajo +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + +). + El cuadro se puede abrir con clic izquierdo y cerrar con clic derecho y + seleccionando +\family sans +Cerrar recuadro +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En un cuadro de código TeX se pueden insertar los comandos total o parcialmente. + Parcialmente significa que el argumento del comando puede ser texto LyX + normal. + Por ejemplo, si quieres dibujar un marco alrededor de una palabra con el + comando LaTeX +\series bold + +\backslash +fbox +\series default +, puedes escribir la parte del comando +\series bold + +\backslash +fbox{ +\series default + en un cuadro de código TeX antes de la palabra y la llave de cierre del + comando, +\series bold +} +\series default +, en otro cuadro de código TeX después de la palabra. + Esta palabra entre los dos recuadros de código TeX constituye el argumento + del comando, como se ve en este ejemplo: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/es_ERT.png + scale 90 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la salida verás la palabra «enmarcada» dentro de un marco: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta es una línea con una palabra +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fbox{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +enmarcada +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default +Hay que poner un espacio al final de los comandos LaTeX sin parámetros, + para que LaTeX sepa que ha finalizado el comando. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Breve introducción a la sintaxis de LaTeX +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sintaxis de LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sintaxis de LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cuando escribas documentos extensos o libros, necesitarás saber algo sobre + los comandos LaTeX que LyX usa en segundo plano. + Como LaTeX se basa en comandos puedes +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +programar +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + tu texto, lo que tiene la ventaja de que se puede cambiar el formato del + documento en cualquier momento con los comandos adecuados. + Imagina que tienes que entregar antes de que acabe el día un manual que + has escrito para un producto. + Tu jefe te felicita por el buen trabajo pero quiere todos los títulos de + cuadros y figuras en negrita. + Pero tu documento tiene más de cien de ellos, por tanto es imposible cambiarlos + todos a mano en poco tiempo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX entra en juego. + Como dijimos antes, cada necesidad tiene su paquete LaTeX. + Primero debes averiguar cuál necesitas y luego buscarlo en la base de datos + de paquetes de LaTeX: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Catalogue" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por fin averiguas que necesitas el paquete +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Para usarlo debes cargarlo en el preámbulo del documento (menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +\lang english +LaT +\lang spanish + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preamble +\family default +\lang spanish +) con el comando +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[opciones]{nombre_del_paquete} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Todos los comandos LaTeX comienzan con barra invertida, el argumento se + pone entre llaves, y las opciones entre corchetes. + No todos los comandos tienen argumento y opciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En nuestro caso el nombre del paquete es +\series bold +caption +\series default +. + Tras un vistazo a la documentación del paquete, verás que la opción +\series bold +labelfont=bf +\series default + pondrá en negrita la letra de todos los títulos de figuras y cuadros. + Así que añades al preámbulo el comando +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +y problema resuelto. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Para ver más comandos del paquete +\series bold +caption +\series default + mira su documentación, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "caption" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ten en cuenta que algunas clases de documento llevan incorporadas soluciones + para problemas habituales como el de este caso. + Por ejemplo, si usas la clase +\family typewriter +KOMA-Script +\family default +, no necesitas el paquete +\series bold +caption +\series default +. + Sólo escribe en el preámbulo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont{captionlabel}{ +\backslash +bfseries} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +y asunto resuelto. + Así que si planeas escribir un extenso documento, deberías echar una ojeada + a la documentación de la clase de documento que quieras usar. + ( +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont +\series default + es un ejemplo de comando con más de un argumento.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los comandos en el preámbulo afectan a todo el documento, mientras que los + comandos en el texto afectan sólo a la parte que sigue o al texto que va + como argumento. + Para insertar comandos LaTeX en el texto usa los cuadros código TeX como + se describe en la sección anterior. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para saber más sobre LaTeX y su sintaxis, consulta los libros de la bibliografía + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexguide" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{fancy} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cambia temporalmente a un estilo de página con encabezado y pie personalizados +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rightmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +define el encabezado como se describe abajo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leftmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +thepage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +Guía del usuario de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Código mágico: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Encabezados y pies de página personalizados +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Encabezados-personalizados" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Encabezados y pies de página +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encabezados y pies de página +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para definir encabezados y pies de página personalizados hay que escoger + el estilo +\family sans +Elaborado +\family default + en el +\family sans +Diseño de página +\family default + del menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +. + En segundo lugar, añade el módulo +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Encabezado/Pie personalizados +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Módulos +\family default +. + Este módulo ofrece 6 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Sestilos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Encabezado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +izquierda, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Encabezado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +centro, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Encabezado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +derecha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +izquierda, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +centro, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +derecha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +para las diferentes posiciones en el encabezado y en el pie de página. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalmente, los encabezados y pies de página se establecen al principio + del documento, pero los puedes cambiar en cualquier momento. + El cuadro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Diseño-de-página" + +\end_inset + + muestra el diseño de una página y la colocación de los encabezados y pies + en la misma. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\align center +\begin_inset Float figure +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encabezado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +izquierda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encabezado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +centro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encabezado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +derecha +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +El texto normal de la página va aquí. + El encabezado actual está sobre el texto, y el pie de página bajo él (incluyend +o las notas a pie de página). + Típicamente, los encabezados y pies de página contienen cosas como el número + de página, el título del capítulo, el logo de la institución\SpecialChar \ldots{} +, aunque puedes + poner ahí casi cualquier cosa, excepto flotantes. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +izquierda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +centro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +derecha +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Diseño-de-página" + +\end_inset + +Diseño de página con encabezado y pie personalizados +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +\lang english +Note +\series default +: some document classes implement their own customized page headers and + footers if +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +style +\family default + is set to +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Default +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers + and footers. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Definición +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para definir una línea de encabezado añade los tres estilos de encabezado. + Lo que pones en los estilos aparece en las páginas impares, lo que pones + como argumento opcional en las pares. + En documentos a una cara, los argumentos opcionales no se usarán y se pueden + omitir. + Si dejas un estilo o su argumento vacío, en la salida no aparece nada. + La definición de la línea de pie de página es similar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para la definición hacen falta algunos comandos LaTeX que se insertan en + código TeX (menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Código Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default +): +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +thepage imprime el número de página +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +Roman{page} imprime el número de página en números romanos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +roman{page} imprime el número de página en números romanos en minúscula +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +leftmark imprime el número de la sección actual y el título. + Si el documento tiene capítulos, imprime el número de capítulo actual y + el título. + Se llama +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +leftmark +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + porque generalmente va en un encabezado izquierda. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +rightmark imprime el número de la subsección actual y el título. + Si el documento tiene capítulos, imprime el número de sección actual y + el título. + Normalmente va en el encabezado derecha. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Encabezado/pie predeterminados +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El encabezado y pie personalizados no están vacíos por omisión. + El encabezado contiene los títulos del capítulo y de la sección, y el pie + centro el número de página. + Para quitar las entradas no deseadas, debes incluir los correspondientes + estilos en el documento pero dejándolos en blanco. + Así, para quitar el número de página en el pie, incluye un estilo +\family sans +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +centro +\family default + en blanco. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Apariencia +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los encabezados y pies se muestran en páginas normales. + Algunas páginas son diferentes: la página de título tiene su propio estilo, + así como la primera página de una parte o capítulo nuevos de un libro. + Tales páginas no tendrán los encabezados/pies personalizados, pero esto + es normal. + Por ejemplo, no hay necesidad de imprimir un encabezado con el título del + capítulo en la misma página donde dicho título ya figura en grandes letras + en negrita. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Línea decorativa +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por omisión, se imprime una línea de 0,4 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt de grosor bajo el encabezado. + Se puede cambiar en el preámbulo del documento con los comandos +\series bold + +\backslash +headrulewidth +\series default + y +\series bold + +\backslash +footrulewidth +\series default + de esta forma: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +headrulewidth}{grosor} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +donde el grosor se expresa en unidades estándar como +\family sans +pt +\family default + o +\family sans +mm +\family default +. + Si no deseas línea, pon un grosor de 0 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las líneas pueden ser en color, aunque requiere más conocimientos de LaTeX. + Si realmente lo deseas, echa un vistazo en Internet o en la sección 4.4 + del libro +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Encabezados y pies con varias líneas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si necesitas más de una línea de texto en encabezados o pies, puedes añadir + un salto de línea normal en la definición del estilo. + Sin embargo, la altura predeterminada de los encabezados y pies es de solo + una línea. + Para aumentar la altura redefine la longitud LaTeX +\series bold + +\backslash +headheight +\series default + o +\series bold + +\backslash +footheight +\series default + en el preámbulo del documento: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +headheight}{altura} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Altura es una longitud en unidades estándar. + Si desconoces la cantidad de espacio necesaria, define tu encabezado o + pie y haz una vista previa PDF del documento. + Luego abres el +\family sans +Registro de La +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +TeX +\family default + en el menú +\family sans +Documento +\family default + y mediante el botón +\family sans +Aviso siguiente +\family default + busca un aviso del paquete +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Si hay tal aviso, verás en él el espacio necesario para el encabezad/pie. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +El ejemplo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nuestro ejemplo enseña lo que se puede hacer para personalizar un encabezado/pie. + Se trata solo de un ejemplo, no lo uses para tu documento. + Contiene las definiciones siguientes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Encabezado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +izquierda +\series bold + +\backslash +rightmark +\series default +, argumento opcional vacío +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Encabezado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +centro vacío, argumento opcional vacío +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Encabezado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +derecha vacío, +\series bold + +\backslash +leftmark +\series default + en el argumento opcional +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +izquierda vacío, +\series bold + +\backslash +thepage +\series default + en el argumento opcional +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +centro +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +Guía del usuario de LyX +\family default +\series default +\color inherit +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Código mágico: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + en el argumento opcional +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Pie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +derecha +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\series default +, argumento opcional vacío +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +headrulewidth establecido en 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En principio puedes usar casi cualquier cosa en los encabezados y pies de + página, excepto flotantes. + Para cosas más sofisticadas, como lengüetas o pestañas, véase el manual + del paquete +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage clearpage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{headings} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +retorno al estilo de página con los encabezados predeterminados +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Vista preliminar inmediata +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Vista-preliminar-inmediata" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Vista instantánea +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX permite generar sobre la marcha vistas de ciertas partes del documento + y ver su aspecto final, sin necesidad de interrumpir el ritmo de trabajo + acudiendo cada vez a ver la salida. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Requisitos previos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para que funcione la vista previa inmediata debe estar instalado el paquete + LaTeX +\series bold +preview-latex +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! preview-latex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (también llamado simplemente +\series bold +preview +\series default +). + Lo encontrarás en el Catálogo TeX, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + o en el administrador de paquetes de tu sistema. + Obtendrás instantáneas mejores si además instalas +\family typewriter +pnmcrop, +\family default + que forma parte del paquete +\family typewriter +netpbm +\family default +; en Windows este programa y también el paquete se instala automáticamente + junto con LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Activar la vista preliminar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si deseas ver, por ejemplo, cómo quedarían tus ecuaciones impresas por LaTeX, + activa la opción +\family sans +Mostrar gráficos +\family default + en el diálogo +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferencias\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Apariencia\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Visualización +\family default +, y en +\family sans +Vista preliminar inmediata +\family default + marca la opción +\family sans +Activada +\family default +. + El +\family sans +Tamaño de la vista +\family default + es el factor de multiplicación para el tamaño. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX, + set +\family sans +Instant +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preview +\family default + to +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +math +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las vistas se generan cuando cargas un documento en Lyx y cuando terminas + de editar el objeto insertado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + La vista inmediata al activar +\family sans +Mostrar gráficos +\family default + en un documento ya abierto no se genera inmediatamente en todos los casos. + Reabrir el documento garantiza que funcione la vista previa inmediata. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Partes seleccionadas del documento +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además de las ecuaciones, puede haber otros casos en los que desees disponer + de vistas previas, por ejemplo, de cosas que LyX no puede mostrar como + objetos rotados o cosas aún no soportadas por LyX. + En estos casos, inserta un recuadro mediante el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Vista preliminar +\family default +. + Inserta o pega dentro del cuadro lo que quieras ver. + La vista previa se generará cuando el cursor esté fuera del recuadro. + Haciendo clic en el recuadro puedes editar su contenido. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un ejemplo: para crear cuadros rotados, se usa el comando LaTeX +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default +, aún no soportado por LyX. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default + se explica en la sección +\emph on +Marcos girados y a escala +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Para ver en LyX los marcos tal como quedarán en la salida en vez de ver + solo un recuadro de código TeX, y poder así hacer ajustes del ángulo, por + ejemplo, inserta un recuadro de vista preliminar y copia en él el texto + con los marcos girados. + He aquí el resultado: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +Una línea con texto en un marco +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Doublebox +position "c" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 0 +inner_pos "c" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1in" +special "width" +height "1in" +height_special "totalheight" +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +girado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + y una ecuación +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La vista preliminar también funciona con colores. + En este ejemplo se ha creado un marco coloreado mediante el comando LaTeX + +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default +: +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default + se explica en la sección +\emph on +Marcos coloreados +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fboxrule 1mm +\backslash +fboxsep 1mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Texto en un marco con borde y fondo coloreado. +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si LyX no muestra la vista previa, comprueba que está activada la opción + como se describe arriba, que el código TeX insertado es correcto y que + los paquetes LaTeX requeridos están correctamente cargados en el preámbulo + del documento. + Si LyX no puede generar una vista preliminar, en la mayoría de los casos + tampoco será posible obtener salida del documento, debido a errores de + LaTeX. + De esta manera, si usas código TeX y no estás seguro si es correcto, el + recuadro de vista preliminar es un buen método para comprobarlo, sin necesidad + de ver la salida de todo el documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Código fuente de LaTeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por otra parte, puedes ver el código LaTeX de todo el documento o de partes + del mismo. + Con el menú +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ver +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fuente +\family default + surge una ventana en la que puedes ver el código fuente de LaTeX correspondient +e al párrafo en el que se encuentre el cursor. + También puedes seleccionar varios párrafos para ver su código. + Para ver el código de todo el documento, marca la opción correspondiente + en la ventana de código. + +\lang english +If you check +\family sans +Automatic update +\family default +, you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you + have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates + them all, not just the one which is open at the time. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Encontrar y reemplazar avanzado +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Encontrar-avanzado" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reemplazar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Encontrar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introducción +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La función avanzada de encontrar y reemplazar de LyX permite la búsqueda + de segmentos de texto complejos, sensibles al formato y contenido matemático + en los documentos. + Es una mejora de la función estándar (rápida) encontrar y reemplazar. + Las características claves son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Permite la búsqueda tanto de texto como de ecuaciones matemáticas, en este + caso introduciendo expresiones en la forma usual; no solo encuentra ecuaciones + completas, también partes presentes en ecuaciones más complejas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +La búsqueda puede ser insensible al formato, de modo que el texto buscado + se encuentra en cualquier contexto o estilo (normal, encabezados, notas + e incluso ecuaciones), o puede ser sensible al formato, así que, por ejemplo, + una palabra introducida con formato de sección solo será buscada en encabezados + de sección +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +La búsqueda puede ampliarse a un +\emph on +ámbito +\emph default + específico, es decir, a un conjunto de archivos que pueden ser todos los + hijos del documento en edición, a todos los archivos abiertos o a todos + los manuales disponibles en el menú +\family sans +Ayuda +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Reemplazar puede, opcionalmente, preservar la capitalización, de forma que + la capitalización del texto reemplazado se adapta al texto coincidente + (es decir, todas minúsculas, todas mayúsculas, primera mayúscula seguida + de minúsculas) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Uso básico +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La función avanzada de encontrar y reemplazar se activa con el menú +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Encontrar y reemplazar (Avanzado) +\family default +(atajo +\family sans +Ctrl+Mayúsculas+F +\family default +) o con el botón de herramientas +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + +. + Se abre el diálogo +\family sans +Encontrar y reemplazar avanzado +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Búsqueda de texto +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Introduce una palabra en el mini-editor de LyX +\family sans +Encontrar +\family default +; haciendo clic en el botón +\family sans +Encontrar siguiente +\family default + en la parte inferior del diálogo (o pulsando la tecla +\family sans +Entrar +\family default +) comienza la búsqueda de la siguiente coincidencia. + La palabra introducida se buscará tanto en modo texto como en modo matemático, + en los tipos de letra normal, énfasis o negrita y tanto en títulos de sección + como en texto normal. + Pulsando +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + repetidamente continúa buscando hacia delante. + Si se pulsa +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Entrar +\family default + busca el texto introducido hacia atrás. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Distinguir mayúsculas +\family default + restringe la búsqueda a las coincidencias que tienen la misma caja introducida + en el editor +\family sans +Encontrar +\family default +. + La opción +\family sans +Palabras completas +\family default + restringe la búsqueda a las coincidencias que corresponden a los límites + de una palabra. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Búsqueda de expresiones matemáticas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se pueden buscar expresiones matemáticas escribiéndolas tal cual en el editor + +\family sans +Encontrar +\family default +, por ejemplo +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + + o algo más complejo como +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + +. + Cuando se busca una expresión, se encuentran las coincidencias tanto si + está aislada como si es parte de otra ecuación o está anidada en ella, + por ejemplo, las expresiones anteriores serían encontradas también en expresion +es como +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Búsqueda de texto con estilo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es posible buscar texto con estilos específicos. + Esto se consigue cambiando a la solapa +\family sans +Configuración +\family default + del diálogo y desmarcando la opción +\family sans +Ignorar formatos +\family default +. + De esta manera, introduciendo en el editor +\family sans +Encontrar +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Una palabra sencilla, la búsqueda no incluirá las coincidencias de la palabra + en estilos énfasis o negrita. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Una palabra en énfasis o negrita, la búsqueda encontrará solo las coincidencias + con el mismo aspecto y solo en el mismo estilo de texto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Una palabra sencilla en un encabezado de sección, la búsqueda solo dará + resultados de coincidencias dentro de encabezados de sección. + Además, si el texto para buscar está en énfasis o negrita, además del formato + de sección solo encontrará las coincidencias con el mismo estilo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Alguna expresión matemática en modo presentación, solo buscará coincidencias + de la expresión que estén en ecuaciones presentadas (no buscará en ecuaciones + en línea). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Reemplazar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los segmentos de texto coincidentes con lo introducido en el editor +\family sans +Encontrar +\family default + se pueden reemplazar con el texto introducido en el editor +\family sans +Reemplazar +\family default +. + Para encontrar la siguiente coincidencia y reemplazarla, haz clic en el + botón +\family sans +Reemplazar +\family default + o, como alternativa, pulsa +\family sans +Entrar +\family default + o +\family sans +Mayúsculas+Entrar +\family default + mientras el cursor esté en el editor +\family sans +Reemplazar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se pueden reemplazar segmentos de texto coincidentes en el documento por + segmentos con formato de LyX. + Escenarios típicos en los que se puede usar esta función pueden ser (solo + mencionamos algunos): +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Reemplazar coincidencias de una palabra con una versión personalizada de + la palabra, por ejemplo, reemplazar "func()"; por su versión en tipo máquina + de escribir, " +\family typewriter +func() +\family default +". +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Realizar una modificación de símbolos matemáticos, por ejemplo, reemplazar + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $R$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + por +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, (para evitar reemplazar todas las letras +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +R +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en texto normal, puedes marcar las opciones +\family sans +Palabras completas +\family default + y +\family sans +Distinguir mayúsculas +\family default +, y desmarcar la opción +\family sans +Ignorar formatos +\family default + en la solapa +\family sans +Configuración +\family default +); o reemplazar +\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ +\end_inset + + por +\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$ +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ +\end_inset + + por +\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Uso avanzado +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay disponible una función de búsqueda basada en una expresión regular, + regexp. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En la entrada de Wikipedia +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" + +\end_inset + + +\family default + se da una buena descripción de las expresiones regulares. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Se pueden buscar expresiones regulares insertando un recuadro regexp en + el editor +\family sans +Encontrar +\family default +, mediante el menú +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Expresión regular +\family default + estando el cursor en el editor +\family sans +Encontrar +\family default +. + Los caracteres introducidos en los recuadros regexp son buscados de acuerdo + con las reglas de coincidencia de las expresiones regulares +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Con la restricción de que cualquier (sub)expresión debe coincidir con un + segmento de texto bien formado en LyX, es decir, si se busca código LaTeX, + no se permite la búsqueda de coincidencias con segmentos con llaves {} + no emparejadas. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, mientras que el texto introducido fuera de los recuadros regexp es buscado + exactamente como tal en el documento. + Está permitido cortar y pegar recuadros regexp en la forma habitual. + Ejemplos de uso de esta característica pueden ser: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Búsqueda de todas las fracciones con un denominador dado: por ejemplo, introduci +endo en el editor +\family sans +Encontrar +\family default + la fracción +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + + (donde +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + en el numerador es la expresión regular para cualquier coincidencia) encontrará + todas las fracciones con ese denominador. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Búsqueda de todo texto con un estilo dado: por ejemplo, tras haber desmarcado + +\family sans +Ignorar formatos +\family default + en la solapa +\family sans +Configuración +\family default +, si se introduce la expresión regular +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + y se añade estilo énfasis o negrita, se encontrará todo testo en estilo + énfasis o negrita, respectivamente. + Además, insertando la expresión regular +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + en una lista no numerada o numerada o en un encabezado de sección, se encontrar +án todas las listas no numeradas o numeradas o cabeceras de sección. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por último, se pueden usar referencias a (sub)expresiones en regexp en la + forma habitual, encerrando partes de la expresión entre paréntesis +\begin_inset Formula $()$ +\end_inset + +, y haciendo referencia a ellas mediante +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ +\end_inset + +, etc., donde el símbolo +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash$ +\end_inset + + se introduce en modo regexp pulsando dos veces la tecla correspondiente. + Por ejemplo, prueba la búsqueda de la regexp +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +[[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]] +\backslash +1[[:space:]] +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +para encontrar repeticiones de palabras, si las hay. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El uso de referencias en el texto reemplazado no está implementado (todavía). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +\color none +Nota: +\series default + Las referencias funcionan cuando aparecen dentro de la misma +\family typewriter +regexp +\family default + y cuando aparecen en diferentes +\family typewriter +regexp +\family default +, donde la numeración de referencias a sub-expresiones es absoluta, es decir, + +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + + siempre se refiere a la primera ocurrencia de +\begin_inset Formula $()$ +\end_inset + + en todas las regexps introducidas. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Corrector ortográfico +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Corrector-ortográfico" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Corrector ortográfico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX no incorpora corrector ortográfico propio. + El menú +\family sans + Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Corrector +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ortográfico +\family default +, la tecla +\family sans +F7 +\family default + o el botón de la barra de herramientas +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show spellchecker" +\end_inset + + inicia la revisión a partir de la posición del cursor o al comienzo del + texto seleccionado. + Se muestra una ventana en la que aparece un cuadro con cualquier palabra + incorrecta o desconocida, que puedes reemplazar en el cuadro siguiente. + Siempre que se encuentra una palabra incorrecta el texto se desplaza hasta + ella y se ve resaltada. + En la ventana de diálogo también hay una lista de sugerencias de reemplazo. + Seleccionando una de ellas se copia en el campo +\family sans +Reemplazar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +con +\family default +, si haces doble clic se verifica directamente el reemplazo. + El botón +\family sans +Ignorar +\family default + sirve para desestimar el reemplazo y proseguir con la revisión. + En el diccionario personal se pueden añadir nuevas palabras. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por omisión, el archivo de diccionario empleado se determina por el idioma + del documento que se establece en +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +. + Puedes especificar el idioma de una palabra en la parte superior del diálogo + del corrector. + LyX puede revisar correctamente documentos con varios idiomas alternando + entre los diccionarios pertinentes. + Esto funciona si los diferentes idiomas se han marcado adecuadamente y + están instalados los diccionarios de los idiomas correspondientes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here +\lang spanish +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +There are 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files for each language. + To install a dictionary, copy the 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files into LyX's installation subfolder +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +dicts +\family default + and restart LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Configuración adicional +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En las preferencias de LyX, +\family sans +Configuración +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +idioma\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Corrector ortográfico +\family default +, están disponibles las siguientes opciones: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Motor +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +corrector +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ortográfico Selecciona la biblioteca que LyX debe usar. + Según la plataforma, están disponibles +\family typewriter +aspell +\family default +, +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default + o +\family typewriter +enchant +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Enchant es una biblioteca envoltorio de diferentes entornos configurables. + Consulta la documentación o la página de manual para saber más. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +. + En Windows solo está disponible +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Idioma +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +alternativo Si este campo no está vacío, LyX usará siempre el idioma dado, + no importa qué idioma tenga el documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Usar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +caracteres +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +escape Permite añadir caracteres no estándar que serán evitados por el corrector +, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +un carácter alemán. + En general esto no debería ser necesario. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Aceptar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +palabras +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +compuestas para que el diccionario admita palabras como «eurozona». +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Revisar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ortografía +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +continuamente La ortografía se revisa mientras se escribe. + Las palabras incorrectas quedan subrayadas en rojo. + Con clic derecho sobre una de estas aparecen las sugerencias en el menú + contextual. + Escogiendo una de ellas se producirá el reemplazo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Revisar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +notas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +y +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +comentarios Si se marca, se revisa también el contenido no imprimible. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Tesauro +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tesauro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Tesauro" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX proporciona un diccionario de sinónimos multilingüe. + Utiliza la misma estructura que LibreOffice, OpenOffice y Firefox (o sea, + la biblioteca de sinónimos +\family typewriter +MyThes +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, incluida en LyX). + Por tanto, LyX puede acceder directamente a los diccionarios de sinónimos + de Libre/OpenOffice, que están disponibles para muchos idiomas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta sección describe cómo se instalan y configuran en LyX diccionarios + nuevos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Configuración del tesauro +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los tesauros de +\family typewriter +MyThes +\family default +/OpenOffice constan de dos archivos por idioma: un archivo con el sufijo + +\family typewriter +*.dat +\family default + que contiene los datos y un archivo con el sufijo +\family typewriter +*.idx +\family default + que contiene un índice. + Los nombres de archivo normalizados incluyen el código para el idioma dado + (p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej., +\family sans +es_ES +\family default + para español). + Así, los archivos para español son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_es_ES_v2.idx +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_es_ES_v2.dat +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si están instalados LibreOffice o OpenOffice y su tesauro +\lang english +on a Linux system, these files should be already on your system. + On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be + installed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here +\lang spanish +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +To install a dictionary, copy the 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files into LyX's installation subfolder +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +thes +\family default + and restart LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Uso del tesauro +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para iniciar el diccionario de sinónimos usa el menú +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tesauro +\family default + o el botón +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "thesaurus-entry" +\end_inset + + de la barra de herramientas, estando el cursor en la palabra a buscar o + estando seleccionada. + Se muestra una ventana con palabras relacionadas con la anterior agrupadas + en categorías. + Para ciertos idiomas el tesauro no solo muestra sinónimos, también términos + genéricos (como +\emph on +organismo +\emph default + por +\emph on +planta +\emph default +), términos relacionados (como +\emph on +teoría política +\emph default + por +\emph on +anarquismo +\emph default +), compuestos (como +\emph on +diagrama en árbol +\emph default + al buscar +\emph on +árbol +\emph default +) y antónimos ( +\emph on +mujer +\emph default + por +\emph on +hombre +\emph default +). + Los términos genéricos, los relacionados y los antónimos se marcan como + tales. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El idioma se escoge automáticamente a partir del idioma vigente en la posición + del cursor, pero se puede cambiar en el diálogo, ya que puedes introducir + ahí palabras nuevas a buscar. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Hay que advertir que el tesauro no puede manejar frases (solo palabras compuesta +s presentes en el diccionario), y hay que usar la denominada forma lema, + esto es, la forma usada en los diccionarios (para muchos idiomas: palabras + individuales y en masculino singular para nombres, infinitivo para verbos). + Por ejemplo, buscar +\emph on +árboles +\emph default + no da resultado, pero sí lo da buscar +\emph on +árbol +\emph default +. + Lo que puedes hacer en estos casos es seleccionar sólo una parte de la + palabra, en este caso +\emph on +árbol +\emph default +es, así se muestran las propuestas sin tener que modificar la palabra en + el diálogo, y el reemplazamiento será probablemente correcto (solo se reemplaza +rá la parte seleccionada, la otra permanece). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Seguimiento de cambios +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Seguimiento de cambios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Seguimiento de cambios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Seguimiento-de-cambios" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cuando varias personas trabajan en el mismo documento es muy útil ver resaltados + los cambios hechos por otros. + Entonces puedes decidir si aceptar o no dichos cambios. + Para habilitar esta característica marca el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguimiento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los cambios realizados en el documento se resaltarán con trazos y colores: + +\bar under +\color blue +texto subrayado +\bar default +\color inherit + es texto añadido, +\strikeout on +\color blue +texto tachado +\strikeout default +\color inherit + es texto borrado. + El color depende del autor que hizo el cambio. + Puedes cambiar estos colores en el diálogo de las preferencias de LyX, + en +\family sans +Apariencia +\family default +, +\family sans +Colores +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! Seguimiento de cambios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + El autor y la fecha del cambio se muestran en la barra de estado de LyX + cuando el cursor está en texto modificado. + Esta misma información se muestra usando el botón de la barra de herramientas + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si el seguimiento de cambios está activado, verás la correspondiente barra + de herramientas: +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barras de herramientas ! Seguimiento de cambios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los botones de la barra de seguimiento de cambios tienen las siguientes + funciones: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-track" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguimiento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-output" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguimiento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mostrar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +salida +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cambio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +siguiente +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguimiento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Aceptar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguimiento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Descartar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguimiento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fusionar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios... +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguimiento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Aceptar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +todos +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +los +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguimiento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Descartar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +todos +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +los +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +siguiente +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La barra de revisión ayuda a aceptar, descartar o fusionar cambios, para + ello selecciona el cambio y pulsa el botón adecuado. + Cuando fusionas cambios aparece una ventana con información sobre el cambio, + la posibilidad de aceptarlo o rechazarlo y la búsqueda del siguiente cambio. + Así que no tienes que ir seleccionando cada cambio por separado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La barra tiene también dos botones para manejar notas porque su uso es habitual + para describir los cambios. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para que los cambios se muestren en la salida debe estar instalado el paquete + LaTeX +\series bold +dvipost +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! dvipost +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Está disponible en el Catálogo TeX, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + o en el administrador de paquetes de tu sistema LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Comparación de documentos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Comparación de documentos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se pueden comparar dos documentos de LyX con el menú +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Comparar\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\family default +. + El resultado es un archivo LyX con el seguimiento de cambios activado que + destaca las diferencias. + En el diálogo Comparar archivos de LyX, puedes elegir la configuración + del documento de diferencias resultante en +\family sans +Copiar la configuración de documento del: +\family default +. + La opción +\family sans +Habilitar características de seguimiento de cambios en la salida +\family default + activa la opción del menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Seguimiento de cambios\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mostrar cambios en la salida +\family default + para poder ver las diferencias también en la salida PDF del documento de + diferencias. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Soporte internacional +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Soporte internacional +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta sección describe cómo usar LyX con cualquier idioma. + Para algunos idiomas hay páginas wiki que describen cómo configurar LyX + para utilizarlos: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además de idiomas, LyX también soporta símbolos fonéticos, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Carácter-especial" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Opciones de idioma +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Idioma ! Opciones +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Idioma +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Idioma +\family default + permite determinar el idioma +\family roman +\lang english +, the quote style +\family default +\lang spanish + y la codificación +\family roman + de caracteres. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El cuadro desplegable +\family sans +Otros +\family default +, bajo +\family sans +Codificación +\family default +, permite elegir el mapa de codificación de caracteres que quieres emplear + para exportar a LaTeX. + La opción +\family sans +Idioma predeterminado +\family default +es la más recomendable porque funciona bien en la mayoría de los casos. + Para más detalles sobre las distintas opciones de codificación, véase la + sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Configuración-del-documento" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Configuración del mapa de teclado +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Configuración-del-mapa" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si tienes, por ejemplo, un teclado U. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +S. + y quieres escribir en otro idioma, pongamos italiano, puedes usar un mapa + de teclado alternativo configurando LyX para que use un teclado italiano. + En el diálogo +\family sans +\lang english +Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Keyboard/Mouse +\family default +\lang spanish + puedes escoger hasta dos mapas de teclado, uno primario y otro secundario, + y seleccionar después el que quieres usar. + Véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Teclado/Ratón" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por otra parte, puede que quieras cambiar sólo unas pocas teclas de un mapa + o crear uno completamente diferente (para Vulcano, por ejemplo). + O bien quieres escribir normalmente en italiano en un teclado U. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +S. + y además incluir de vez en cuando una cita en alemán. + En estos casos puedes escribir tu propio mapa de teclado o modificar uno + existente para soportar los caracteres que necesites. + Esta y otras muchas personalizaciones se explican en el manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +\start_of_appendix +Interfaz de usuario +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cap:Interfaz-de-usuario" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En este apéndice repasaremos los menús disponibles y describiremos sus funciones. + Está diseñado para servir de referencia rápida si buscas un determinado + asunto en esta guía de usuario. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +El menú Archivo +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menú ! Archivo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bajo el menú +\family sans +Archivo +\family default + están las operaciones fundamentales y algunas operaciones más avanzadas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nuevo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Crea un documento nuevo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nuevo desde plantilla +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta opción ofrece la posibilidad de abrir un documento sobre la base de + una plantilla existente, de manera que ciertas características de formato + se heredan automáticamente de la plantilla. + Características que puedes cambiar luego manualmente si quieres. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Abrir +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Abre un documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Abrir reciente +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Muestra una lista de los últimos archivos que se han abierto con el menú + +\family sans +Abrir +\family default +. + Clic sobre el que quieras para abrirlo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cerrar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cierra el documento en pantalla. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cerrar todo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cierra todos los documentos abiertos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Guardar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Guarda el documento en pantalla. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Guardar como +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Guarda el documento en pantalla con la posibilidad de cambiarle el nombre. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Guardar todo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Guarda todos los documentos abiertos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Revertir +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El menú +\family sans +Revertir +\family default + recarga el documento desde su ubicación en el disco. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Control de versiones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esto se emplea cuando varias personas trabajan en el mismo documento o cuando + una persona quiere mantener un detallado archivo de cambios. + Se describe con detalle en el manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +, sección +\emph on +Control de versiones +\emph default + +\emph on +en LyX +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Importar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se pueden importar archivos de versiones anteriores de LyX, archivos HTML, + archivos de LaTeX, archivos NoWeb, archivos de texto simple y archivos + de texto de datos separados con comas (tipo CSV). + Los archivos serán importados como documento nuevo de LyX. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Texto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +simple, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +unir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +líneas +\family default + importa todas las líneas del archivo de texto seguidas, en un sólo párrafo. + Si hay una línea en blanco en el texto, se inicia un párrafo nuevo. + Si el texto se inserta como párrafos los saltos de línea del texto inician + párrafos nuevos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Exportar +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Exportar" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un documento se puede exportar a diversos formatos de salida. + Los archivos resultantes se sitúan en el directorio del archivo LyX. + Las entradas disponibles en el menú dependen de cada instalación, según + los programas que LyX haya encontrado durante su configuración. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sigue una lista de las opciones disponibles, que se explican con detalle + en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Formatos-de-salida" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +CJK +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX +\family default +formato especial de las versiones 1.4.x de LyX para chino, japonés y coreano + (CJK). +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Desde LyX 1.5.0, el soporte de CJK está totalmente integrado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DocBook archivo de texto con código en lenguaje SGML usado en el lenguaje + de marcación +\family typewriter +DocBook +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DocBook +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XML) archivo de texto con código en lenguaje XML usado en el lenguaje de + marcación +\family typewriter +DocBook +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DraftDVI formato DVI nativo de LaTeX. + No es aconsejable si el documento tiene caracteres especiales o espacios + en rutas o nombres de archivos. + LyX usa este formato internamente en una etapa previa a la exportación + a DVI. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVI formato DVI que permite el uso de caracteres especiales o espacios en + rutas y nombres de archivo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) formato DVI que usa el programa +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +; soporta Unicode y tipografías no-TeX; +\series bold + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + actualmente no todos los visores DVI pueden mostrar adecuadamente este + formato +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Graphviz +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Dot archivo de texto con código en el lenguaje de programación +\family typewriter +Dot +\family default +, usado para dibujar gráficos mediante el programa +\family typewriter +Graphviz +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +HTML formato HTML (el convertidor HTML es un programa externo que no siempre + funciona) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +HTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(MS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Word) formato HTML especial que puede ser importado en +\family sans +MS Word +\family default +, en el que las fórmulas se transforman en tipografías bitmap y no en el + formato +\family sans +MathML +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) archivo de texto con el código LaTeX compilable con el programa +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + archivo de texto en código LaTeX, y todas las imágenes del documento se + convierten a un formato legible por el programa +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default + (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(simple) +\family default + archivo de texto en código LaTeX, y todas las imágenes del documento se + convierten al formato EPS, único legible por el programa +\family typewriter +latex +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) archivo de texto con el código LaTeX compilable con el programa +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LilyPond +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +book +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(La +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +TeX) archivo de texto con el código LaTeX y además código en la sintaxis + del software de notación musical +\family typewriter + LilyPond +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Archivo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(zip|tar.gz) crea un contenedor de archivos zip o tar.gz (dependiendo del + sistema) con el documento y todos los archivos necesarios para compilarlo + (imágenes, documentos hijo, archivos BibTeX, etc.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +yX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +z.y.x documento LyX en formato legible para las versiones correspondientes + de LyX («z.y.» es el número de versión) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +yXHTML formato HTML, usando un ingenio XHTML interno de LyX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +NoWeb archivo de texto con código en el formato del lenguaje de programación + literaria +\family typewriter + NoWeb +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +OpenDocument archivo de texto en formato OpenDocument, que puede abrirse + con +\family sans +LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword +\family default +, etc. + (el convertidor a OpenDocument es un programa externo que no siempre funciona) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) +\family default + formato PDF usando el programa +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default +, produce internamente un archivo DVI que es convertido después a PDF +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +eX) formato PDF usando el programa +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +, produce directamente archivos PDF +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + formato PDF usando el programa +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +, produce directamente archivos PDF +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) +\family default + formato PDF usando el programa +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default +, produce internamente un archivo PostScript que es convertido después a + PDF +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeT +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +eX) formato PDF usando el programa +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +, produce directamente archivos PDF +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Texto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +simple +\family default + formato de texto +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Texto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +simple +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii) +\family default + formato de texto, el documento se convierte a Postscript y luego se exporta + a texto con el programa +\family sans +ps2ascii +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Postscript +\family default + formato PostScript usando el programa +\family typewriter +dvips +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sweave archivo de texto con el código LaTeX y además código en el lenguaje + de programación estadística +\family typewriter +R +\family default +. + Usando la función +\family typewriter +R +\family default + +\family typewriter +Sweave +\family default + es posible usar comandos +\family typewriter +R +\family default + en LaTeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si alguna de las entradas del menú, +\family sans +DVI +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + o +\family sans +Postscript +\family default + no está presente, debes actualizar la instalación de LaTeX. + Después de actualizar debes reconfigurar LyX, como se ha explicado en la + sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Configuración-básica" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguración de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Imprimir +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con este menú puedes imprimir el documento en un archivo en formato PostScript + o enviarlo a la impresora. + La impresora también usará el formato PostScript. + La conversión a PostScript la hace LyX en segundo plano ejecutando el programa + +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +. + Para más información mira en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Imprimir-archivos" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fax +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta entrada de menú solo aparece cuando está instalado un programa de fax + (en Windows, es necesario además registrar la ruta del programa en el prefijo + PATH de LyX, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rutas" + +\end_inset + +). + Con esta entrada puedes enviar tu documento a un programa de fax como +\family typewriter +hylapex +\family default + o +\family typewriter +kdeprintfax +\family default +. + Por omisión, el archivo se envía en formato PostScript. + El formato se puede cambiar en las preferencias de LyX como se describe + en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Convertidores" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ventana nueva y Cerrar ventana +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Abre una nueva ventana de LyX o cierra una ventana . +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Salir +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avisa si hay documentos no guardados y sale. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +El menú Editar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menú ! Editar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Deshacer y Rehacer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Deshacer-y-rehacer" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cortar, Copiar, Pegar, Pegar reciente, Pegado especial +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Características-básicas-de-edición" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Seleccionar el recuadro completo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Selecciona el contenido del recuadro en el que está el cursor. + Si el cursor está fuera de un recuadro se seleccionará el documento completo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Seleccionar todo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Selecciona el documento completo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Encontrar y reemplazar (Rápido) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Características-básicas-de-edición" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Encontrar y reemplazar (Avanzado) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Encontrar-avanzado" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mover párrafo arriba/abajo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El párrafo que contiene el cursor se desplaza un párrafo arriba o abajo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Estilo del texto +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ajuste-fino-con" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Configuración del párrafo +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Párrafos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las características de este diálogo afectan sólo al párrafo donde esté el + cursor. + Aquí puedes especificar la alineación del párrafo y el espacio entre líneas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +También puedes evitar el sangrado de primera línea, siempre y cuando la + configuración global de la separación de párrafos esté configurada en sangrado, + en el apartado Diseño +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto del diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Configuración de cuadros y ecuaciones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Estos menús sólo están activos cuando el cursor está dentro de un cuadro + o de una ecuación. + Las propiedades del cuadro o la fórmula se pueden cambiar en ese caso. + Las propiedades de los cuadros se describen en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Cuadros" + +\end_inset + +, las propiedades de las ecuaciones en el capítulo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Ecuaciones-matemáticas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Aumentar o disminuir la profundidad en las listas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Estos menús sólo están activos cuando el cursor está en un entorno anidable. + Permiten aumentar o disminuir la profundidad del nivel de anidación en + una lista, como se explica en las secciones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Anidación" + +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Profundidad-de-numeración" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +El menú Ver +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menú ! Ver +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Al final del menú +\family sans +Ver +\family default + sale la lista de documentos abiertos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Abrir/Cerrar todos los recuadros +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Abre o cierra todos los recuadros en el documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Desplegar/Plegar macros de ecuación +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Despliega o pliega la macro de ecuación actual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las macros de ecuaciones se describen en el manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ver fuente +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Muestra una ventana en la que se puede ver el código LaTeX del párrafo actual, + de una selección de párrafos o del documento completo, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Vista-preliminar-inmediata" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ver mensajes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Abre una ventana en la que se muestran mensajes de consola. + Esto es útil para operaciones de depuración (es decir, caza de errores) + en LyX o para ver lo que sucede en segundo plano mientras LaTeX procesa + el documento, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ver +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta entrada de menú genera la salida en el formato especificado como predetermi +nado en las preferencias (véase la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" + +\end_inset + +) o en la configuración del documento (véase la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Salidas" + +\end_inset + +) y lo abre con el visor apropiado, el cuál se puede elegir y configurar + en las preferencias, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" + +\end_inset + +. + Los visores predeterminados son establecidos por LyX cuando se instala. + El formato de salida por omisión es +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ver (Otros Formatos) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con este submenú puedes ver la salida del documento en otros formatos disponible +s. + El menú contiene una lista de formatos en los que puedes ver el documento + abierto con un programa externo. + Las opciones de este menú no son las mismas en todas las instalaciones + —depende de los programas LaTeX que LyX encontró durante su configuración—. + Todos los formatos posibles se describen en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Exportar" + +\end_inset + +. + Al menos debes ver en el menú la entrada +\family sans +DVI +\family default +. + Si falta alguna de ellas debes actualizar o arreglar la instalación de + LaTeX y reconfigurar LyX, como se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Configuración-básica" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguración de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Al pulsar una opción del menú se iniciará un programa visor, el cuál se + puede elegir y configurar en las preferencias, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" + +\end_inset + +. + Los visores predeterminados son establecidos por LyX cuando se instala. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Actualizar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Permite actualizar la vista del documento con los últimos cambios (en el + formato predeterminado) sin necesidad de reabrir la ventana del visor. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Actualizar (Otros formatos) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con este submenú puedes actualizar la vista de formatos alternativos de + salida sin necesidad de reabrir la ventana del visor. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ver documento maestro +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este ítem del menú solo es visible si el documento actual está incluido + en otro que es su documento +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maestro +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, (véase la sección +\emph on +Documentos hijo +\emph default + en el manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default + para más información sobre este asunto). + Esto permite ver el documento maestro desde dentro de su documento hijo, + es decir, si estás trabajando en un documento hijo que es un capítulo de + un libro, +\family sans +Ver maestro +\family default + genera la salida del libro completo, mientras que +\family sans +Ver +\family default + solo mostrará la salida del capítulo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El formato de salida usado por esta función es el predeterminado especificado + en las preferencias (véase la sec. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" + +\end_inset + +) o en la configuración del documento (véase la sec. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Salidas" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Actualizar documento maestro +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este ítem solo es visible si el documento actual está incluido en otro que + es su documento +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maestro +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, (véase la sección +\emph on +Documentos hijo +\emph default + en el manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default + para más información sobre este asunto). + Permite actualizar la vista de un documento maestro desde dentro de su + hijo sin necesidad de abrir el propio documento maestro. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El formato de salida usado por esta función es el predeterminado especificado + en las preferencias (véase la sec. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" + +\end_inset + +) o en la configuración del documento (véase la sec. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Salidas" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Dividir la ventana +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Estas entradas del menú dividirán la pantalla principal de LyX vertical + u horizontalmente. + Así puedes ver simultáneamente varios documentos para compararlos, o ver + el mismo documento en diferentes posiciones. + Puedes dividir la ventana principal varias veces para ver, p. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ej., tres o más documentos a la vez. + Para volver a una vista sin dividir, usa el menú +\family sans +Cerrar la vista actual +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cerrar la vista actual +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cierra las ventanas divididas volviendo a vista única o, si no hay ventanas + divididas, oculta todas las pestañas. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Pantalla completa +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta opción del menú o pulsando F11 muestra la ventana principal de LyX + en modo pantalla completa, ocultando la barra de menú y las barras de herramien +tas. + Para volver a vista normal pulsa F11 o haz clic derecha en el ratón y desmarca + el modo pantalla completa en el menú contextual que aparece. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Barras de herramientas +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Barras-de-herramientas" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barras de herramientas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este menú permite mostrar en pantalla, o no, las distintas barras de herramienta +s, así como el +\family sans +Búfer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +comandos +\family default +. + Si la vista está activada se muestra una marca en el menú. + Las barras de +\family sans +Seguimiento de cambios +\family default +, +\family sans +Cuadro +\family default +, +\family sans +Paneles de ecuaciones +\family default +, +\family sans +Macros de ecuación +\family default + y +\family sans +Ecuaciones +\family default +se pueden poner además en modo +\emph on +automático +\emph default +, que se indica mediante ( +\family sans +auto +\family default +) en el menú. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con vista activada la barra se muestra permanentemente; en modo +\emph on +automático +\emph default + la barra se muestra sólo cuando el cursor se encuentra en un entorno relacionad +o con las funciones de la misma. + Esto implica que, en modo +\emph on +automático +\emph default +, la barra de revisión sólo se ve si está activado el seguimiento de cambios, + y la de cuadros y las de ecuaciones sólo se ven cuando el cursor está en + un cuadro o ecuación, respectivamente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las barras de herramientas y sus botones se explican en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Barras-de-herramientas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +El menú Insertar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menú ! Insertar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ecuación +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La inserción de estructuras matemáticas se explica en el capítulo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Ecuaciones-matemáticas" + +\end_inset + + y en el manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Carácter especial +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Carácter-especial" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con este menú puedes insertar los siguientes caracteres: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Símbolos Inserta cualquier carácter que esté disponible en tu sistema LaTeX. + Por tanto las categorías de caracteres y los caracteres disponibles en + este diálogo dependen de los paquetes LaTeX instalados. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +No todos los caracteres serán visibles en el diálogo +\family sans +Símbolos +\family default + porque ninguna de las tipografías de pantalla disponibles en el diálogo + de preferencias (véase sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tipografías-en-pantalla" + +\end_inset + +) pueden mostrar todos los caracteres. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Puntos +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +suspensivos Inserta \SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +oración Inserta un punto final de oración, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Abreviaturas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Comillas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dobles Inserta estas comillas: ", independientemente del tipo de comillas + que hayas seleccionado en el diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default +, +\family sans +Idioma +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Comillas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +simples Inserta esta comilla: +\begin_inset Quotes frs +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Guión +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +protegido Inserta un guión protegido de saltos de línea: - +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Barra +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +oblicua +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +frágil Inserta una barra oblicua donde también se puede producir un salto + de línea: \SpecialChar \slash{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Separador +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +menú Inserta el símbolo: \SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Símbolos +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fonéticos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Simbolos@Símbolos fonéticos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Idioma ! Símbolos fonéticos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Crea una ecuación con el llamado mapa +\emph on +tipa +\emph default +. + En la fórmula puedes introducir comandos para imprimir símbolos fonéticos + IPA. + Esta característica requiere el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Para más información sobre este paquete consulta su documentación +\series bold +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "tipa" + +\end_inset + +, +\series default +y su página Wiki: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formato +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí puedes introducir las siguientes estructuras o formatos: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Superíndice Inserta un superíndice o exponente: test +\begin_inset script superscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +a, b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Subíndice Inserta un subíndice: test +\begin_inset script subscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3x +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +protegido Inserta un espacio protegido, descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-protegido" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +entre-palabra Inserta un espacio entre-palabra, descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-entre-palabra" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +delgado Inserta un espacio delgado, descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-delgado" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal Inserta un relleno horizontal, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-horizontal" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Línea +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal Inserta una línea horizontal, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Líneas-horizontales" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espacio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical Inserta un espacio, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-vertical" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fantasma Inserta espacio fantasma, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacio-fantasma" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Guión +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +silábico Inserta un guión, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:División-con-guión" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligado Inserta una ligadura, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ligaduras" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +línea +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cortada Inserta un salto de línea forzado, véase la sección +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Salto-de-línea-forzado" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +línea +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +justificada Fuerza un salto de línea de forma que la línea se expande hasta + el margen, véase la sección +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Salto-de-línea-forzado" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Página +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nueva Inserta un salto de página forzado, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Saltos-de-página-forzados" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Salto +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +página Inserta a salto de página forzado, descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Saltos-de-página-forzados" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Limpiar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +página Inserta un salto de página limpia, descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Salto-de-página-limpia" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Limpiar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +página +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +doble Inserta un salto de página limpia en documentos a dos caras, descrito + en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Salto-de-página-limpia" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Índice +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con este menú se pueden insertar varios tipos de índices. + El índice general y los índices de algoritmos, de figuras y de cuadros + se describen en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:IG" + +\end_inset + +. + El índice alfabético se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Indice-alfabético" + +\end_inset + +, la nomenclatura en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nomenclatura" + +\end_inset + +, y la bibliografía BibTeX en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bases-datos-bibliográficos" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Flotante +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Flotantes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nota +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Notas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Rama +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Ramas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Recuadro personalizado +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta recuadros específicos de la clase de documento. + Estos recuadros solo son posibles si están definidos en el archivo de formato + ( +\emph on +layout +\emph default +) para una determinada clase de documento. + Un ejemplo es la clase de documento +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +article (Elsevier) +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + con tres recuadros personalizados. + La sección +\emph on +Recuadros flexibles y formato del recuadro +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default + explica cómo se definen los recuadros personalizados. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Archivo +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Material externo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí se pueden insertar en el documento varios tipos de archivos y de material + externo. + Se explica detalladamente cómo hacerlo en el capítulo +\emph on +Archivos externos +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Marco +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Marcos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta una minipágina, se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Minipáginas" + +\end_inset + +. + Todos los tipos de marcos soportados por LyX se explican con detalle en + el capítulo +\emph on +Marcos +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cita +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta una cita bibliográfica, se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliografía" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Referencia cruzada +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta una referencia cruzada, como se describe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Etiqueta +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta una etiqueta, se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Leyenda +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Leyenda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cuadros ! Largos ! leyenda en +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta una leyenda sobre o bajo los flotantes o los cuadros largos. + Se describen, respectivamente, en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Flotantes" + +\end_inset + + de este manual, y en la sección +\emph on +Leyendas en cuadros largos +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Entrada de índice +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta una entrada para el índice alfabético, como se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Indice-alfabético" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Entrada de nomenclatura +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta una entrada de nomenclatura, se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Nomenclatura" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cuadro/Tabla +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta un cuadro (o tabla). + Los cuadros se describen en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Cuadros" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Imagen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta un gráfico o imagen. + Se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Gráficos" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URL +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta un cuadro URL, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:URL" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hiperenlaces +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta un hiperenlace, se describe en la sección +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Hiperenlaces" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nota al pie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta una nota al pie, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Notas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nota al margen +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta una nota al margen, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Notas-al-margen" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Título breve +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta un título breve, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Títulos-breves" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Código TeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta un cuadro código TeX, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Cuadros-TeX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Listado de programa +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listado de programa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta un cuadro para escribir código de programa. + Se describe en el capítulo +\emph on +Listado de programa +\emph default +del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fecha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta la fecha actual. + El formato de fecha depende del idioma usado para los menús de LyX. + LyX ofrece otras formas de insertar una fecha, tal como se describe en + la sección +\emph on + Material externo +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. + Ahí se comparan los diversos métodos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Vista preliminar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inserta un recuadro para una vista instantánea; véase su descripción en + la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Vista-preliminar-inmediata" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +El menú Navegar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menú ! Navegar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En este menú se muestran los índices y listas existentes de figuras, cuadros + y otras cosas, así como el índice general (IG) del documento abierto. + Esto permite navegar cómodamente a través del documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Marcadores +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta opción permite definir marcadores personales. + Esto es útil cuando trabajas en un documento extenso y debes cambiar a + menudo de una parte a otra del mismo. + Por ejemplo, si tienes que cambiar con frecuencia de la sección +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +2.6 a la 6.3, te sitúas en la primera y usas el menú +\family sans +Guardar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +marcador +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1, +\family default + después vas a la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +6.3 y pulsas +\family sans +Guardar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +marcador +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2. + +\family default + Ahora puedes saltar fácilmente de una sección a otra bien con el menú, + bien con los atajos +\family sans +Ctrl+1 +\family default + y +\family sans +Ctrl+2 +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +También se pueden usar los marcadores para alternar entre varios documentos + abiertos. + Los marcadores permanecen hasta que se cierra el documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nota, Cambio, Referencia siguiente +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Desde su posición actual, el cursor va a la nota, al cambio o a la referencia + cruzada siguiente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ir a la etiqueta +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Solo está visible cuando el cursor está frente a una referencia cruzada. + Lleva el cursor hasta la etiqueta correspondiente. + (Es lo mismo que pulsar clic derecho sobre el cuadro de la referencia y + usar +\family sans +Ir a la etiqueta +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Búsqueda directa +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta función permite ir directamente, en el documento de salida, a la parte + correspondiente del documento en LyX; véase la sección +\emph on +Búsqueda directa +\emph default + en el manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default + para más detalles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +El menú Documento +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menú ! Documento +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Seguimiento de cambios +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Descrito en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Seguimiento-de-cambios" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Registro de LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Después de exportar o mostrar una vista preliminar del documento, se habilita + el menú +\family sans +Registro +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +de +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +LaTeX. + +\family default + Permite visualizar el archivo de registro de los programas y archivos empleados + por LaTeX al generar la salida. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En él se puede ver cómo funciona LaTeX al procesar el documento. + Los +\emph on +expertos +\emph default + encontrarán aquí posibles causas de los errores de LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Navegador de contorno +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Abre una ventana lateral para navegar por los índices descrita en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Indice-general" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Comenzar apéndice aquí +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inicia el apéndice del documento en la posición del cursor, como se describe + en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Apéndices" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Comprimido +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comprime/descomprime el documento actual. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Configuración +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La configuración del documento se describe en el apéndice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Configuración-del-documento" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +El menú Herramientas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menú ! Herramientas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Corrector ortográfico +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Corrector-ortográfico" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tesauro +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tesauro" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Estadísticas +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Contar palabras +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Contar caracteres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cuenta el número de palabras y caracteres en el documento o en la parte + resaltada. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Información TeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Información TeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Muestra una lista de las clases y estilos instalados en el sistema LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Reconfigurar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguración de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Reconfigurar|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Reconfiguración de LyX +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta opción sirve para que LyX reconozca nuevos paquetes LaTeX o programas + tras su instalación. + Véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Configuración-básica" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Preferencias +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El diálogo +\family sans +Preferencias +\family default + se describe con detalle en el capítulo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cap:Diálogo-preferencias" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +El menú Ayuda +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menú ! Ayuda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí están los archivos de documentación de LyX. + Los que estén traducidos saldrán en el idioma en que estén los menús. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El apartado +\family sans +Configuración +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\family default + genera un archivo LyX con información sobre los paquetes LaTeX y clases + de documento encontrados por LyX (véase también la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:LaTeX-conf" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Barras de herramientas +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Barras-de-herramientas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La aparición u ocultación de las barras de herramientas se explica en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Barras-de-herramientas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +También se pueden definir barras personalizadas. + Se explica en el manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Barra de herramientas Normal +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barras de herramientas ! Normal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los botones de la barra normal son, de izquierda a derecha: +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +LTleft}{0pt} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Este comando es necesario para alinear las celdas en el siguiente cuadro + largo. + Véase el manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default + para más detalles. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/es_ToolbarEnvBox.png + clip + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menú desplegable con los entornos de párrafo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace -10mm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align left +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-new" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nuevo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "file-open" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Abrir +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-write" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Guardar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Imprimir +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show spellchecker" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Corrector ortográfico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "undo" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Deshacer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "redo" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rehacer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "cut" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cortar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "copy" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Copiar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "paste" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Pegar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show findreplace" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Encontrar y reemplazar +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +( +\lang english +Quick +\lang spanish +) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Encontrar y reemplazar +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +( +\lang english +Advanced +\lang spanish +) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marcadores\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Volver +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Aplica al texto el formato énfasis, función del diálogo Edit +\family sans +ar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Aplica al texto el formato versalitas, función del diálogo Edit +\family sans +ar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "textstyle-apply" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Aplica al texto el formato actual del diálogo Edit +\family sans +ar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-mode" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuación\SpecialChar \menuseparator +En +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +línea +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Imagen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "tabular-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cuadro/Tabla +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle toc" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Muestra/oculta la ventana del navegador, +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Navegador +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +contorno +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "toolbar-toggle math" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Muestra/oculta la barra de herramientas matemáticas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "toolbar-toggle table" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Muestra/oculta la barra de herramientas de cuadros +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Barra de herramientas Extra +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barras de herramientas ! Extra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los botones de la barra extra son, de izquierda a derecha: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Predeterminado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Enumerate" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lista numerada +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Itemize" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lista no numerada +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout List" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lista +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Description" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lista descripción +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Aumentar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +profundidad +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +lista +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Disminuir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +profundidad +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +lista +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert figure" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flotante\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Figura +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert table" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flotante\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cuadro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Etiqueta +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Referencia +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cruzada +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cita +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "index-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Entrada +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +índice +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "nomencl-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Entrada +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nomenclatura +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "footnote-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "marginalnote-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +margen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nota +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +X +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "box-insert Frameless" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "href-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Hyperlink +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Código +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +T +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ecuaciones\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Macro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset include" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Documento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +hijo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texto\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Editar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +párrafo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "thesaurus-entry" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tesauro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Barra de herramientas Ver / Actualizar +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barras de herramientas ! Ver/Actualizar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los botones de la barra ver +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +actualizar son, de izquierda a derecha: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ver +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Actualizar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Maestro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\lang english +Document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Actualizar Maestro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\lang english +Document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Salidas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Sincronizar con salida +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ver (Otros Formatos) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/update-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Ver\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Actualizar (Otros Formatos) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +* Estos iconos podrían tener un aspecto distinto si se cambia la colección + de iconos predeterminada. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Otras barras de herramientas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La barra de herramientas para el seguimiento de cambios se explica en la + sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Seguimiento-de-cambios" + +\end_inset + +, la barra de herramientas para cuadros +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barras de herramientas ! Cuadros +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + se explica en el manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +, la de macros +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barras de herramientas ! Macros +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + en el manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Configuración del documento +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cap:Configuración-del-documento" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El diálogo que se abre con el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración +\family default + contiene diversos submenús en los que se pueden establecer propiedades + para todo el documento. + Las características seleccionadas pueden guardarse como predeterminadas + con el botón +\family sans +Guardar +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +como +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +valores +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +predeterminados +\family default +. + Al hacer esto, se crea una plantilla llamada +\family typewriter +defaults.lyx +\family default + que se carga automáticamente cada vez que abres un nuevo documento sin + plantilla. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El botón +\family sans +Usar predeterminados de clase +\family default + restablece las opciones del documento a los valores predefinidos de la + clase de documento. + Esto afecta a la mayoría de las opciones de la clase, al diseño de página + y a la numeración e IG. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los submenús del diálogo se explican a continuación. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Clase del documento +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí se establece la clase de documento, las opciones de clase, un controlador + de gráficos y un documento maestro. + Las clases de documento se describen en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Clases-de-documento" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con el botón +\family sans +Formato local +\family default + puedes cargar tu propio archivo de formato, que al no estar en la carpeta + +\emph on +layouts +\emph default + no es reconocida por LyX como formato de clase de documento. + Más información sobre este asunto en el capítulo +\emph on +Instalación de nuevas clases de documento, formatos y plantillas +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Algunas clases usan algunas opciones de clase predefinidas. + Si este es el caso, se listan en el campo +\family sans +Predefinido +\family default + y puedes decidir si usarlas o no. + Si no sabes exactamente para qué sirven las opciones de clase predefinidas, + es recomendable no tocarlas. + El controlador de gráficos se usa para paquetes LaTeX de gráficos, color + y formato de página. + Cuando se usa +\family sans +Predeterminado +\family default + se utilizan los controladores predeterminados para los paquetes LaTeX. + Es conveniente dejar el controlador predeterminado, a menos que sepas lo + que haces. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Si quieres usar uno de los siguientes controladores +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +primero tienes que activarlos en tu distribución LaTeX, véase sección +\emph on +Driver support +\emph default + en +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Es necesario especificar un documento maestro cuando el actual documento + es un documento hijo o un subdocumento. + El documento maestro será utilizado por LyX si se abre un documento hijo + sin su maestro. + Así los documentos hijo son siempre compilables. + Sobre este asunto hay más información en la sección +\emph on +Documentos hijo +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además hay una opción para suprimir la fecha y otra para usar el paquete + LaTeX +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + en vez de +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + para las referencias cruzadas, véase la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Referencias-cruzadas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Documentos hijo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este submenú solo es visible si el documento incluye hijos. + Se explica en la sección +\emph on +Documentos hijo +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Módulos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los módulos se explican en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Módulos" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Formato local +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Formato-local" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Tipografías +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La configuración de las tipografías del documento se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Estilo-de-letra" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Diseño del texto +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí se establece el modo de separación de párrafos, sangrado o espacio + vertical. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +También el espacio entre líneas y el número de columnas, pero ten en cuenta + que esto no se ve en la pantalla de LyX, no es práctico ni cómodo de leer, + y no es parte del concepto WYSIWYM. + Sí se verá en la salida. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Diseño de página +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Este menú se describe en las secciones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Papel-tamaño-orientación" + +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Formato-de-documento" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Márgenes de página +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para establecer los márgenes del papel, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Márgenes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Idioma +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Idioma" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Idioma ! Codificación +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí se determina el idioma del documento y el estilo de las comillas. + La codificación determina cómo se exporta a LaTeX el contenido del documento + (el archivo LyX siempre se codifica en utf8). + Todos los caracteres que no puedan codificarse en la codificación especificada + se exportan como comandos LaTeX (esto puede fallar si el comando para algún + carácter es desconocido). +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Los comandos conocidos se definen en un archivo de texto ( +\emph on +unicodesymbols +\emph default +). + Puedes añadir comandos para símbolos desconocidos en ese archivo, como + se explica en el manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default +. + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si marcas la opción +\family sans +Idioma predeterminado +\family default +, LyX determina la codificación de cada porción de texto a partir del idioma + de dicho texto. + Si el documento contiene texto en más de un idioma podría haber más de + una codificación en el archivo LaTeX. + Si no usas esa opción, todo el documento usará sólo una codificación. + Lo más recomendable es marcar esta opción. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX soporta salida en Unicode, que es especialmente útil en el caso de tener + muchos símbolos especiales o no alfabéticos. + Si quieres usar esto (y en ese caso tu instalación LaTeX soporta Unicode), + elige una de las cuatro variantes utf8 de la lista de abajo. + Desgraciadamente, el soporte unicode del sistema LaTeX estándar es bastante + incompleto, y por tanto no es infrecuente que un archivo con muchos símbolos + unicode sea bien procesado con la opción +\family sans +Idioma predeterminado +\family default +, (cuando LyX usa su lista de comandos LaTeX conocidos), y sin embargo no + funcione con una codificación fija utf8, (cuando no se usa la lista de + comandos conocidos, pues todos los símbolos unicode se codifican en utf8). + La situación es mucho mejor con XeTeX y LuaTeX, dos nuevos motores alternativos + al estándar LaTeX. + Ambos motores soportan Unicode de forma nativa. + Ahora LyX también soporta estos dos motores (mediante los formatos de salida + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + y +\family sans +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTeX) +\family default +, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Formatos-de-salida" + +\end_inset + +); así, si las opciones de más arriba fallan, podrías intentar alguno de + estos nuevos motores. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El +\family sans +Paquete de idiomas +\family default + determina el paquete LaTeX que se usa para la división de palabras y la + traducción de cadenas de texto como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Part +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Las opciones posibles son: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Predeterminado usa el paquete de idioma seleccionado en +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferencias\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración del idioma +\family default +. + (Véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Idioma" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Automático selecciona el paquete de idiomas más adecuado para el formato + de ver/exportar. + En muchos casos será +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Si es más adecuado el nuevo paquete +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (es el caso cuando se usa XeTeX y/o tipografías no TeX), se usará este + en vez de +\series bold +babel +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Siempre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Babel usa +\series bold +babel +\series default + aunque +\series bold + polyglossia +\series default + fuera más adecuado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Personalizado permite elegir un comando de paquete de idiomas. + Por ejemplo, si quieres usar un paquete de idiomas específico como +\series bold +ngerman +\series default + (para textos en alemán), escribe +\series bold + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\backslash +usepackage{ngerman} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ninguno no se usará ningún paquete de idiomas. + Es necesario para ciertas clases de documentos científicos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +He aquí una lista con las codificaciones importantes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Idioma +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +predeterminado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(no +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +inputenc) +\family roman + +\family default +Lo mismo que +\family sans +Idioma predeterminado +\family default +, pero sin usar el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Si se usa esto probablemente haya que cargar manualmente algunos paquetes + adicionales en el preámbulo, y especificar la codificación usada para partes + de texto en idiomas foráneos en código TeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ASCII el código ASCII cubre sólo inglés simple (7-bit ASCII). + LyX convierte todos los caracteres en comandos LaTeX; puede resultar en + un archivo enorme porque pueden ser necesarios muchos comandos LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Árabe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1256) Código MS Windows para árabe y farsi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Árabe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-6) para árabe y farsi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Armenio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ArmSCII8) para armenio +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Báltico +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1257) Código MS Windows para estonio, letón y lituano, lo mismo que el código + ISO-8859-13 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Báltico +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-13) para estonio, letón y lituano, un superconjunto del código ISO-8859-4 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Báltico +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-4) (latin 4) para estonio, letón y lituano, un subconjunto del código + ISO-8859-13 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chino +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(simplificado) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-CN) para chino simplificado, usado especialmente en los SO UNIX; desde + 2001 este código se ha reemplazado oficialmente por el código GB18030, + como GB18030 no está disponible para LaTeX podrías probar a usar el código + Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chino +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(simplificado) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(GBK) para chino simplificado, es el mismo que Windows CP 936 excepto el + signo del euro; desde 2001 este código se ha reemplazado oficialmente por + GB18030, como GB18030 no está disponible para LaTeX podrías probar a usar + el código Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chino +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(traditional) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-TW) para chino tradicional +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cirílico +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1251) código MS Windows para cirílico +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cirílico +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-5) cubre bielorruso, búlgaro, macedonio, serbio, y ucranio +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cirílico +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(KOI8-R) cirílico estándar especialmente para ruso +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cirílico +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(KOI8-U) cirílico para ucranio +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cirílico +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +154) cirílico para kazajo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Coreano +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-KR) para coreano +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europeo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Central +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1250) Código MS Windows para ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2 (latin2) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europeo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Central +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2) (latin 2) cubre albano, croata, checo, alemán, húngaro, polaco, + rumano, eslovaco y esloveno +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europeo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Occidental +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1252) código MS Windows para ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1 (latin1) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europeo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Occidental +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1) (latin 1) cubre los idiomas albanés, catalán, danés, holandés, inglés, + faroe, finés, francés, gallego, alemán, islandés, irlandés, italiano, noruego, + portugués, español y sueco; es mejor utilizar el código ISO-8859-15 en + vez de éste. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europeo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Occidental +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-15) (latin 9) como el código ISO-8859-1, pero con el signo del Euro, + la ligadura œ y algunos caracteres para francés y finés +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europeo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Sur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-3) (latin 3) cubre esperanto, gallego, maltés y turco +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europeo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Sudoriental +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-16) (latin 10) cubre albano, croata, finés, francés, alemán, húngaro, + gaélico irlandés, italiano, polaco, rumano, esloveno, diseñado para muchos + idiomas con caracteres diacríticos +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Griego +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-7) para griego +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hebreo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1255) código MS Windows para hebreo, un superconjunto del código ISO-8859-8 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hebreo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-8) para hebreo +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japonés +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-JP) código EUC-JP para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en +\family sans +Japonés (CJK) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japonés +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(JIS) código JIS para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX +\series bold + CJK +\series default +, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en +\family sans +Japonés (CJK) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japonés +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(no-CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-JP) código EUC-JP para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +japanese +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en +\family sans +Japonés +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japonés +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(no-CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(JIS) código JIS para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +japanese +\series default +, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en +\family sans +Japonés +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japonés +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(no-CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(SJIS) código SJIS para japonés, usa el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +japanese +\series default +, para usarlo el idioma del documento se establece en +\family sans +Japonés +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Thai +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(TIS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +620-0) para thai +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Turco +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-9) (latin 5) para turco, es como el código ISO-8859-1 en el que las + letras islandesas son reemplazadas por letras turcas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) Unicode utf8 con el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (para los idiomas chino, japonés y coreano) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTeX) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) Unicode utf8 para usar con +\family sans +XeTeX +\family default + y +\family sans +LuaTeX +\family default +, que emplea Unicode directamente, sin la ayuda del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +inputenc +\series default +. + LyX selecciona automáticamente esta codificación si se exporta o se ve + con XeTeX o LuaTeX. + Normalmente no hace falta establecer manualmente esta codificación. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ucs-extendido) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8x) Unicode utf8 basado en el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +ucs +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! ucs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (global, incluyendo latín, griego, cirílico y guiones CJK). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) Unicode utf8 basado en el paquete LaTeX +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Actualmente sólo se soporta un rango limitado de caracteres (principalmente + para escritos en latín) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por último, el diálogo permite seleccionar un paquete de idioma específico + para el documento actual. + Véase +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand formatted +reference "sub:Idioma" + +\end_inset + + para más información sobre paquetes de idioma. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Colores +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! Texto principal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! Fondo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí puede cambiar el color para el texto principal (por omisión: negro) + y para las notas resaltadas en gris (por omisión: gris claro). + El botón +\family sans +Reiniciar +\family default + retorna los colores predeterminados. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +También puedes cambiar el color de fondo de las páginas (por omisión: blanco) + y de los marcos (por omisión: rojo). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Los colores no se muestran en LyX sino en la salida. + Esta nota Resaltado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +gris se ve azul en la salida. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nota, si cambias el color del texto principal y usas la opción +\family sans +Enlaces coloreados +\family default + en las +\family sans +Propiedades +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +PDF +\family default + de la configuración del documento, probablemente debas cambiar el color + de los enlaces en +\family sans +Opciones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +adicionales d +\family default +e +\family sans +Propiedades +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +PDF +\family default +. + Por ejemplo, la opción +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +establece negro para el color de los enlaces. + Para más información, véase el manual del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los colores del texto y de fondo se pueden establecer para cada página individua +lmente usando los siguientes comandos en código TeX detrás de un salto de + página forzado: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Para el color de la página: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +pagecolor{nombre de color} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Para el color del texto: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +color{nombre de color} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El nombre del color puede ser aquí uno de estos: +\series bold +black +\series default +, +\series bold +blue +\series default +, +\series bold +cyan +\series default +, +\series bold +green +\series default +, +\series bold +magenta +\series default +, +\series bold +red +\series default +, +\series bold +white +\series default +, +\series bold +yellow +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Si has cambiado el color de un texto o fondo, puedes usarlo bajo los nombres + siguientes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Para el color de la página: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +page_backgroundcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Para el color del texto: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +document_fontcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Para el fondo de los marcos: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +shadecolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Para el texto de notas Resaltado en gris: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +note_fontcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para la definición y uso de colores personalizados, véase la sección +\emph on +Celdas coloreadas +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Numeración e IG +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta opción permite ajustar la profundidad de numeración de los encabezados + de sección como se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Profundidad-de-numeración" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Bibliografía +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí se elige el estilo de las citas bibliográficas usando los paquetes + LaTeX +\series bold +natbib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! natbib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + o +\series bold +jurabib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! jurabib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, se pueden habilitar bibliografías subdivididas usando el paquete LaTeX + +\series bold +bibtopic +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! bibtopic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + y se puede personalizar la generación de la bibliografía en un documento + dado. + Hay una descripción de estas funciones en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliografía" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Índices +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí se puede personalizar la forma en que se genera el índice del documento + y definir índices adicionales. + Véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Indice-alfabético" + +\end_inset + + para los detalles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Propiedades PDF +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Propiedades-PDF" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Opciones para ecuaciones +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Permite escoger si habilitar o no los paquetes LaTeX para matemáticas +\family sans + +\family default +\series bold +amsmath +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! amsmath +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\series bold +esint +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! esint +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\series bold +mathdots +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! mathdots +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + y +\series bold +mhchem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! mhchem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, o si usarlos automáticamente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +amsmath +\series bold + +\series default +es necesario para numerosas estructuras; si recibes mensajes de error en + ecuaciones comprueba que has habilitado el uso de AMS. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +esint se usa para ciertos caracteres en integrales, véase +\emph on +Operadores grandes +\emph default + en el manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mathdots para escribir diversos grupos de puntos, véase +\emph on +Puntos +\emph default + en el manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mhchem para escribir ecuaciones químicas, véase +\emph on +Símbolos y ecuaciones químicas +\emph default + en el manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Posición de flotantes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las opciones de colocación de flotantes se describen en la sección +\emph on +Colocación de flotantes +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Listado de programa +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La configuración de listados se explica en el capítulo +\emph on +Listado de programa +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Objetos insertados +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Marcas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí se pueden elegir los símbolos para las marcas de los distintos niveles + del entorno de lista +\family sans +Enumeración* +\family default +, que se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Enumeración*" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Ramas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se explican en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Ramas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Salidas +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Salidas" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí puedes definir ciertos ajustes para la salida del documento actual: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Formato +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +salida +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +predeterminado: El formato a utilizar cuando pulsas +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Ver +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Actualizar +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Ver documento maestro +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Actualizar documento maestro +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + en el menú +\family sans +Ver +\family default + o en la barra de herramientas. + El valor predefinido se establece en +\family sans +Herramientas\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Preferencias\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Gestión de archivos\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formatos de archivo +\family default +, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sincronizar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +con +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +salida opción para el menú +\family sans +Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Búsqueda directa +\family default +. + Para una descripción detallada véase +\emph on +Búsqueda inversa DVI/PDF +\emph default + en el manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Opciones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +salida +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +XHTML funciones para el formato de exportación +\family sans +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +XHTML +\family default +. + +\family sans +XHTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.1 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +estricto +\family default + garantiza que la salida sigue el estándar de la version +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.1 de XHTML. + Las distintas opciones de +\family sans +Salida de ecuaciones +\family default + se describen en la sección +\emph on +Ecuaciones en XHTML +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. + La escala permite ajustar el tamaño de las ecuaciones en la salida. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Preámbulo LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Contiene un amplio campo de texto en el que se pueden introducir comandos + para cargar paquetes especiales de LaTeX o para (re)definir comandos LaTeX. + El preámbulo es algo para expertos en LaTeX. + No deberías introducir nada aquí hasta que no sepas exactamente lo que + haces. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-Sintaxis" + +\end_inset + + hay una introducción a la sintaxis de LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +El diálogo Preferencias +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cap:Diálogo-preferencias" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Preferencias +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El diálogo Preferencias se abre con el menú +\family sans +Herramientas +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Preferencias +\family default +. + Contiene diversos submenús que se explican a continuación. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Apariencia +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Interfaz de usuario +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Archivo de la interfaz de usuario +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Personalización ! de barras de herramientas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Personalización ! de menús +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El aspecto de los menús y de las barras de herramientas depende del archivo + de interfaz de usuario ( +\family typewriter +ui +\family default +) elegido. + Es un archivo de texto con una lista de los menús y de las barras de herramient +as. + +\lang english +The file +\emph on +default.ui +\emph default + loads three files +\lang spanish +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdmenus.inc +\lang english +specifies the menu entries for the standard menus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdcontext.inc +\lang english +specifies the menu entries in popup context menus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdtoolbars.inc +\shape italic + +\emph on +\lang english +specifies the toolbar buttons +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para crear tus propios formatos de menú y de barras de herramientas comienza + con una copia de estos archivos y edita las entradas. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La sintaxis de los archivos .inc es sencilla. + Las entradas +\family sans +Menubar +\family default +, +\family sans +Menu +\family default + y +\family sans +Toolbar +\family default + deben acabar con un +\family typewriter +End +\family default + explícito. + Pueden contener +\family sans +Submenus +\family default +, +\family sans +Items +\family default +, +\family sans +OptItems +\family default +, +\family sans +Separators +\family default +, +\family sans +Icons +\family default + y en el caso del Menu +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +file_lastfiles +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, una entrada +\family sans +Lastfiles +\family default +. + La sintaxis de estas entradas es: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Item "menu +\series default +o +\series bold + button name" "LyX-function" +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las funciones de LyX se listan en el menú +\family sans +Ayuda\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Funciones de Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default +. +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un ejemplo: Si usas con frecuencia el menú +\family sans +Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Marcadores +\family default + y quieres aumentar a seis el número de marcadores disponibles, añade esta + línea: +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Item "Guardar marcador 6" "bookmark-save 6" +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + +en la sección +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +navigate_bookmarks +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\emph on + +\emph default +del archivo +\emph on +stdmenus.inc +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con +\family sans +\lang english +Icon +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Set +\family default +\lang spanish + puedes cambiar el aspecto de los botones de las barras de herramientas + de LyX. + Las colecciones de iconos disponibles actualmente se muestran en +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "esta imagen" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ayuda automática +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Habilitar los recuadros emergentes en el área de trabajo principal +\family default + hace que se muestre el contenido de los recuadros insertados cerrados, + como notas al pie o entradas del índice alfabético. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Sesión +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con la opción +\family sans +Restaurar formatos y geometrías de la ventana, +\family default + la ventana principal de LyX se abrirá con el tamaño y diseño que tenía + en la última sesión. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Restaurar posiciones del cursor +\family default + hace que al abrir un archivo el cursor se coloque en la posición que tenía + cuando se cerró el archivo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Cargar los archivos abiertos de la última sesión +\family default + hace que se abran todos los archivos que estuvieran abiertos en la última + sesión de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El botón +\family sans +Limpiar la información de todas las sesiones +\family default + elimina la información de sesiones previas de LyX (posiciones del cursor, + nombres de archivos recientes, etc.). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Documentos +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Copias-de-seguridad" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Copias de seguridad +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Hacer copias de seguridad de los documentos originales al guardar +\family default +crea una copia de seguridad del archivo en el estado en que se abrió o se + guardó la última vez. + Se guarda en la +\family sans +Copias de seguridad +\family default + (véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rutas" + +\end_inset + +) o en la misma carpeta del documento +\lang english +if no +\lang spanish + +\family sans +Copias de seguridad +\family default + +\lang english +is specified +\lang spanish +. + Se guarda en la misma carpeta del documento o en el directorio +\family sans +Copias de seguridad +\family default +, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rutas" + +\end_inset + +. + La copia de seguridad tiene la extensión +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +.lyx~ +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si está marcada la opción +\family sans +Hacer copias de seguridad cada +\family default + puedes especificar el intervalo de tiempo entre copias de seguridad. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Guardar los documentos comprimidos por omisión +\family default + guarda siempre los archivos en formato comprimido. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Documentos recientes +\family default + es el número de últimos archivos abiertos que LyX mostrará en el menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Abrir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +reciente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si no se usa la opción +\family sans +Abrir documentos en pestañas +\family default + cada archivo se abrirá en su propia nueva ventana de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Instancia única +\family default + solo está activa si se ha especificado una tubería LyXServer. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rutas" + +\end_inset + + para información sobre tuberías LyXServer. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + En ese caso, los documentos se abrirán en la misma sesión actual de LyX. + De lo contrario, para cada archivo se crea una nueva instancia de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con la opción +\family sans +Botón único para cerrar pestañas +\family default + se mostrará solo un botón ( +\family sans + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/closetab.png + scale 75 + +\end_inset + + +\family default +) en el lado derecho de la barra de pestañas para cerrarlas. + De lo contrario, cada pestaña de documento tendrá su botón de cierre. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + la última opción requiere reiniciar LyX para que el cambio funcione. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tipografías de pantalla +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tipografías ! en pantalla +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Tipografías-en-pantalla" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Son las tipografías usadas para mostrar los documentos en la pantalla. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default +Se refiere a las tipografías mostradas en la +\emph on +pantalla +\emph default + de LyX, exclusivamente. + Las tipografías que aparecerán en el documento de +\emph on +salida +\emph default + son totalmente independientes de éstas y se determinan en el menú +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Por omisión, LyX usa +\family typewriter +Times +\family default + como tipo romano (serif), +\family typewriter +Arial +\family default + o +\family typewriter +Helvetica +\family default + (depende del sistema) como tipografía sans serif, y +\family typewriter +Courier +\family default + como tipo máquina de escribir. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El tamaño de letra se puede cambiar con +\family sans +Zoom. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Los tamaños de las tipografías se expresan como altura del carácter en puntos. + 72.27 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +puntos equivalen a 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pulgada, véase el Apéndice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tipografía-del-documento" + +\end_inset + +. + Los tamaños predeterminados corresponden a un tamaño de 10 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +puntos. + El tamaño de la tipografía se explica con detalle en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Tipografía-del-documento" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con la opción +\family sans +Usar Pixmap Cache para acelerar el rendimiento +\family default + marcada, LyX necesita refrescar la pantalla con menor frecuencia. + Esto conlleva un mejor rendimiento, especialmente en sistemas lentos. + Por otra parte, los caracteres podrían mostrarse más borrosos. + Así que activar o no esta opción depende de si prefieres velocidad o estética. + Esta opción sólo está disponible en Mac +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +OS o Windows. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Colores +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! Pantalla de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Color ! Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí puedes cambiar todos los colores que se ven en LyX. + Elige una opción de la lista y usa el botón +\family sans +Cambiar +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Con la opción +\family sans +Usar colores del sistema +\family default +, se usará el esquema de colores del SO o del gestor de ventanas. + En este caso no aparecen en la lista los colores de +\family sans +cursor +\family default +, +\family sans +selección +\family default +, +\family sans +línea de cuadro +\family default +, +\family sans +texto +\family default +, +\family sans +etiqueta URL +\family default + y +\family sans +texto URL. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Visualización +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Configuración ! Visualización +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta opción permite decidir si se mostrarán los gráficos en la pantalla + de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +El botón +\family sans +Vista +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +preliminar +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +inmediata +\family default + sirve para habilitar, o no, la vista en LyX de ciertas partes del documento. + Se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Vista-preliminar-inmediata" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Marcar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +final +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +párrafos +\family default + muestra un calderón (¶) al final de cada párrafo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Edición +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Edición +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Control +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Edición +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +El cursor sigue a la barra de desplazamiento +\family default + hace que el cursor se muestre siempre en la parte del documento que está + en pantalla cuando esta se desliza. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Anchura del cursor (pixels) +\family default + permite ajustar el grosor del mismo. + Un valor cero establece para el grosor del cursor un valor relativo al + zoom establecido para la tipografía en pantalla. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Deslizar por debajo del final del documento +\family default + es evidente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En LyX se puede saltar de palabra en palabra con las teclas +\family sans +Ctrl+flecha +\family default +. + La opción +\family sans +Usar estilo Mac\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\family default + hace que el cursor salte del final de una palabra al final de la siguiente. + Normalmente, el cursor salta de inicio a inicio de palabra. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Ordenar entornos alfabéticamente +\family default + ordena los entornos de párrafo en el menú desplegable. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La opción +\family sans +Agrupar entornos por categorías +\family default + agrupa las entradas del menú desplegable de los entornos de párrafo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Las opciones de edición de macros de ecuación determina el estilo de edición, + véase la sección +\emph on +Macros de ecuaciones +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Ecuaciones +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Pantalla completa +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí puedes determinar qué partes ocultar en el modo pantalla completa. + La opción +\family sans +Limitar anchura del texto +\family default + especifica la anchura del texto en pantalla completa. + De esta manera puedes mostrar el texto más pequeño que la pantalla; el + texto se ve centrado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Atajos de teclado +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Atajos de teclado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Archivos de asociaciones de teclas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +\lang english +Bind File +\family default + specifies the file +\lang spanish + se usa para asociar una función de LyX a una o varias teclas. + Hay varios archivos disponibles para asociaciones de teclas +\family sans +, +\family default +\lang english +among them +\lang spanish +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +cua.bind conjunto típico de asociaciones de teclas en los teclados PC. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +(x)emacs.bind conjunto de asociaciones de teclas usados en el editor +\family sans +(X)Emacs +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mac.bind conjunto de asociaciones de teclas para sistemas +\family sans +Mac +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además hay archivos de asociaciones de teclas para clases especiales de + documentos, como +\shape italic +broadway.bind +\shape default +, y para ciertos idiomas. + El nombre de los archivos para idiomas comienza con el código del idioma. + por ejemplo, «pt» para portugués. + Si usas LyX con determinados idiomas, LyX intentará usar el archivo de + teclas apropiado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Algunos archivos de asociaciones de teclas como +\shape italic +math.bind +\shape default +, son de pequeño alcance. + Si miras al final del archivo +\shape italic +cua.bind +\shape default + verás algunos de aquellos incluidos para mantener la información general + en el archivo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +The field +\family sans +Show +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ke +\bar under +y +\bar default +-bindings +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +containing +\family default + allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function + in the selected key binding file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Edición de los atajos de teclado +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Edición-de-los-atajos" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Atajos de teclado ! Edición +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para añadir o modificar asociaciones de teclas puedes usar la lista del + diálogo que recoge todas las funciones de LyX y sus correspondientes teclas. + Para encontrar fácilmente funciones están agrupadas por categorías y el + diálogo suministra el campo +\family sans +Mostrar asociaciones que contienen +\family default +:, en el que puedes insertar una clave para una función que quieras editar. + Escribe por ejemplo como clave «paste» y obtendrás las cuatro combinaciones + que hay para las tres funciones que contienen «paste» en su nombre. + Como puedes ver, una función puede tener más de una combinación. + Todas las funciones de LyX se listan además en el archivo +\emph on +LyX Functions +\emph default + disponible en el menú +\family sans +Ayuda +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para añadir, por ejemplo, el atajo +\family sans +Alt+Q +\family default + para la función +\family sans +textstyle-apply +\family default +, selecciona la función y pulsa el botón +\family sans +Modificar +\family default +. + Surge un diálogo en el que puedes añadir el atajo pulsando las teclas correspon +dientes, en este caso Alt+Q. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +De igual manera se modifica una combinación ya existente. + +\lang english +You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX + Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the + different function names as a semicolon separated list. + LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document + part. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If you don't like a a particular shortcut, you can remove it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alternativamente puedes modificar combinaciones de teclas editando los archivos + +\emph on +.bind +\emph default + con un editor de texto. + La sintaxis de las entradas es: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +bind +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +key combination +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +LyX-function +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\series default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Teclado / Ratón +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Teclado/Ratón" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Teclado ! Mapas de +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Configuración ! Mapa de teclado +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalmente la configuración del teclado se hace en el sistema operativo. + Para casos en los que no es posible, LyX suministra mapas de teclado. + Si tienes, por ejemplo, un teclado checo pero quieres escribir en él como + en un teclado rumano, puedes +\lang english +enable +\family sans +Use +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +keyboard +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +map +\family default + and select +\lang spanish + el mapa de teclado +\shape italic +romanian.kmap +\shape default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +You can specify a +\family sans +First +\family default + and a +\family sans +Second +\family default + keyboard map and, if you use the +\emph on +cua +\emph default + bindings, you can select the first and second with +\lang spanish + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-primary" +\end_inset + + y +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-secondary" +\end_inset + + +\lang english +respectively or toggle between them with +\lang spanish + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-toggle" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Los mapas de teclado son provisionales y no funcionan en todos los sistemas. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además de esto, puedes determinar aquí la +\family sans +Velocidad de desplazamiento de la rueda +\family default + del ratón. + El valor estándar es 1.0, valores mayores aumentan la velocidad y menores + la disminuyen. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la sección +\family sans +Zoom de deslizamiento de la rueda +\family default + se puede elegir una tecla para hacer zoom. + Con esta tecla pulsada, al girar la rueda del ratón varía el tamaño del + texto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Autocompletar +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La finalización de entradas se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Finalización-de-entradas/palabras" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Rutas +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Rutas" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Rutas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Configuración ! Directorios +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during + installation. + But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Directorio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +trabajo Es el directorio de trabajo de LyX. + El directorio predeterminado cuando haces +\family sans +Abrir +\family default +, +\family sans +Guardar +\family default + o +\family sans +Guardar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +como +\family default + con un archivo. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Plantillas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +documento Directorio que contiene las plantillas del menú +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nuevo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +desde +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +plantilla. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Archivos +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ejemplo Este directorio se abrirá al pulsar el botón +\family sans +Ejemplos +\family default + del diálogo +\family sans +Archivo\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Abrir +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + El botón +\family sans +Ejemplos +\family default + no existe en los sistemas Mac OS o Windows. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Copias +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +seguridad +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documentos ! Copias de seguridad +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Directorio donde se guardarán las copias de seguridad. + Si este campo está en blanco pero las copias de seguridad están habilitadas, + como se describe en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Copias-de-seguridad" + +\end_inset + +, éstas se guardarán en el +\family sans +Directorio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +trabajo +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Los archivos de seguridad tienen la extensión «.lyx~». +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Tubería +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +XServer Aquí puedes introducir el nombre de una tubería de UNIX. + Esta tubería se emplea para enviar datos desde programas externos a LyX. +\lang ngerman + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +\lang spanish +Ejemplo: +\series default + Añade una base de datos BibTeX +\emph on +test.bib +\emph default + al documento. + Puedes editar este archivo con el programa +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default +. + En las preferencias de +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default +, bajo +\family sans +External +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +programs +\family default +, tienes que usar la misma tubería Unix que en LyX. + Si quieres obtener una entrada de la base de datos como cita, selecciónala + en +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + y haz clic sobre el símbolo LyX. + La entrada se insertará ahora como cita en la posición actual del cursor + en el archivo LyX. + +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + y LyX deben ejecutarse al mismo tiempo, evidentemente. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +La tubería también se usa para la opción +\family sans +Instancia única +\family default + , véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Copias-de-seguridad" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Para usar LyXServer-Pipe en Windows hay que usar este nombre: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash + +\backslash +. +\backslash +pipe +\backslash +lyxpipe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Directorio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +temporal Directorio en el que se guardarán los archivos temporales generados + por LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Directorio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sinónimos Directorio en el que se localizan los diccionarios de sinónimos. + Solo es preciso indicarlo si el diccionario no funciona o si se desea usar + diccionarios alternativos o personalizados. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Directorio +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +hunspell Directorio del programa de revisión ortográfica +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default +. + Solo es preciso especificarlo si al usar +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + la corrección ortográfica no funcionara, o si deseas usar diccionarios + alternativos. + Para LyX en Windows +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + es el único disponible y debería funcionar sin tener que poner el directorio. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Prefijo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +PATH Este campo puede contener una lista de rutas («paths») a programas + externos. + Cuando LyX necesita usar uno de ellos, busca su ubicación en el sistema + en esta lista. + La lista de rutas es automáticamente configurada en sistemas Mac y Windows, + de modo que normalmente no debes modificarla. + En sistemas Unix/Linux, la lista de rutas debe ponerse en el caso de querer + usar programas externos que no estén en la rutas reconocidas por la variable + $PATH. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Prefijo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TEXINPUTS La variable de entorno TEXINPUTS permite incluir archivos externos + en un documento LyX vía comandos en código TeX o en el preámbulo LaTeX. + El prefijo incluye por omisión el directorio del documento (representado + por un '.'). + El prefijo se puede establecer como una lista de rutas separadas por el + separador habitual del SO (':' en sistemas UNIX y ';' en Windows). + Si los archivos son incluidos por LaTeX, las rutas listadas en el prefijo + TEXINPUTS serán escaneadas por los archivos de entrada. + Cualquier ruta no absoluta listada en el prefijo TEXINPUTS se considera + relativa al directorio del documento LyX. + Es recomendable incluir siempre el '.' como una de las rutas, de lo contrario + la compilación puede fallar en determinados documentos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Identidad +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En este campo puedes poner tu nombre y correo electrónico. + Esta identidad se usará cuando habilites el seguimiento de cambios, explicado + en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Seguimiento-de-cambios" + +\end_inset + +, para identificar tus cambios en el documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Configuración del idioma +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Idioma !Configuración +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Configuración ! Idioma +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Idioma +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Idioma" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Idioma +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +interfaz +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +usuario Aquí puedes seleccionar el idioma de los menús de LyX. + El estado actual de las traducciones se puede consultar en: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Paquete +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Idiom +\family default +a determina qué paquete LaTeX se debería cargar para manejar características + de los idiomas. + Características como patrones de división de palabras apropiados, traducción + de fechas y de cadenas de texto como +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Chapter +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + o +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Table +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + El paquete de idiomas más ampliamente usado es +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, que es el predeterminado en LaTeX clásico. + Sin embargo, motores de tipografía más recientes, como XeTeX y LuaTeX, + incorporan el paquete de idiomas alternativo +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + que es más adecuado para el soporte multi-guión de estos motores. + Además, también hay paquetes específicos para idiomas no cubiertos por + babel. + Las opciones disponibles se describen en la sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Idioma" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +inicial Cuando hace falta algún paquete LaTeX especial para escribir en + determinado idioma, aquí puedes poner el comando para cargarlo. + Un ejemplo es el comando +\series bold + +\backslash +begin{arabtext} +\family sans +\series default + +\family default +para cargar el paquete +\series bold +ArabTeX +\series default + (véase +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + +), necesario para escribir en árabe. + +\series bold + +\series default +Por omisión, es el comando de +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\series bold + +\backslash +selectlanguage{$$lang} +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +final El correspondiente a +\family sans +Comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +inicial +\family default +. + Algunos paquetes, como el predeterminado, no tienen comando para finalizar + porque el comando de inicio habilita o no el paquete. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Separador +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +decimal +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +predeterminado Define el símbolo por omisión para separar decimales en cuadros + (alineación del separador decimal). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Establecer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +idioma +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +globalmente Si se marca esta opción, los idiomas usados en el documento + se añadirán como opciones a la clase de documento, para que puedan usarse + por todos los paquetes LaTeX. + Si no, sólo serán utilizados como opciones para +\series bold +babel +\series default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Auto-iniciar Con esta opción los documentos comienzan con el idioma de documento + elegido. + Sin ella, el +\family sans +Comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +inicial +\family default + se establece explícitamente al inicio del documento en la salida de LaTeX. + Esto asegura que se usa el idioma correcto cuando pongas un +\family sans + Comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +inicial +\family default + distinto al predeterminado. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Auto-terminar Correspondiente a +\family sans +Auto-iniciar. + +\family default +Si no está marcado, el +\family sans +Comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +final +\family default + se establece al final del documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Marcar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +idiomas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +extranjeros El texto marcado con estilo de idioma distinto al del documento + se subraya en azul. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Soporte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +para +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +idioma +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +derecha-izquierda habilita el uso de idiomas que, como el hebreo, el árabe + o el farsi, se escriben de derecha a izquierda. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Movimiento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cursor Cuando se escribe de derecha a izquierda, aquí se puede definir si + las teclas de flecha izquierda y derecha mueven el cursor visualmente a + la izquierda o a la derecha, respectivamente, o lógicamente. + Movimiento lógico significa que el cursor se mueve a la izquierda cuando + pulsas la flecha derecha estando el cursor dentro de texto en un idioma + derecha-izquierda. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Corrector ortográfico +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Se explica en la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Corrector-ortográfico" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Salidas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +General +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Longitud +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +línea +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +salida +\family default + establece el número máximo de caracteres impresos en cada línea, cuando + el archivo se exporta como texto simple. + Si se pone valor 0, todo el texto se imprimirá en una sola línea sin fin. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Formato +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fecha +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fecha, formato de +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Configuración ! Formato de fecha +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + El formato de la fecha puede ser uno, o una mezcla, de los listados en: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Por ejemplo, el formato +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +%d/%m/%y +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +imprime la fecha como día/mes/año. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sobrescribir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +al +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +exportar Establece lo que está permitido sobrescribir al exportar el documento. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Búsqueda +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directa Comandos a usar para el menú +\family sans +Navegar\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Búsqueda directa +\family default +. + Para una descripción detallada véase +\emph on +Búsqueda inversa DVI/PDF +\emph default + en el manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Impresora +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Impresora" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Impresora +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Configuración ! Impresora +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Impresora +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +predeterminada En este campo puedes poner el nombre de tu impresora predetermina +da. + Este nombre se usará cuando se ejecute el +\family sans +Comando de Impresión +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Nota: +\series default + En Windows puedes dejar el campo en blanco porque no tiene efecto. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Impresión +\family default +es el comando que usan LyX +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +LaTeX para imprimir. + En la mayoría de sistemas el comando predeterminado es +\family sans +dvips +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Opciones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +impresión En la documentación del programa que suministra el +\family sans +Comando de impresión +\family default + que se use +\family sans + +\family default +puedes encontrar la explicación de las opciones que pueden configurarse + en estos campos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Adaptar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +salida +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +a +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +impresora Esta opción sólo funciona si el +\family sans +Comando de Impresión +\family default + es « +\family sans +dvips +\family default +». + Activa un archivo de configuración para dvips. + Esta opción es para expertos en dvips. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-Configuración" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Configuración ! LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Codificación +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X Esta es la codificación predeterminada de la tipografía del documento, + +\family sans +T1 +\family default +, que cubre los idiomas y símbolos occidentales. + +\family sans +T2A +\family default +, +\family sans +T2B +\family default +, +\family sans +T2C +\family default +, +\family sans +LCY +\family default +, y +\family sans +X2 +\family default +son para cirílico. + Se pueden combinar codificaciones, como +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +T1, T2B +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Normalmente la codificación se carga automáticamente cuando LyX configura + los paquetes de idioma. + Por tanto no hay por qué cambiarla. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Tamaño +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +predeterminado +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +papel Este será el tamaño del papel para documentos nuevos. + El valor +\family sans +Predeterminado +\family default +depende de la configuración del sistema LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Opciones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tamaño +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +del +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +papel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +para +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +el +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +visor +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +DVI Solo tienen efecto para el programa visor de DVI +\family sans +xdvi +\family default +; consulta su manual para saber más. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además, aquí puedes especificar opciones y comandos con parámetros para + las procesadores listadas. + Pero antes de cambiar algo, es muy recomendable leer los manuales de las + aplicaciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Generación +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bibliografía Parámetros para generar la bibliografía; véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bases-datos-bibliográficos" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Generación +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +índice Parámetros para generar el índice, véase la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Programas-para-índice" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +para +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nomenclatura Comando para el programa que genera la nomenclatura, véase + la sección +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Programa-para-la-nomenclatura" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Comando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +CheckTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X El programa +\family sans +CheckTeX +\family default +se explica en la sección +\emph on +Comprobar TeX +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Características adicionales +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además están las opciones: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Usar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +rutas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +estilo +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Windows +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +archivos +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTeX Utiliza rutas con la notación Windows, es decir, se emplea « +\backslash +» en vez de «/» para separar carpetas. + Esta opción está marcada por omisión cuando se usa LyX en Windows. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Rutas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Configuración ! Rutas +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Reiniciar +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +opciones +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +clase +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cuando +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +clase +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +documento +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cambie Si se cambia la clase de documento se eliminan todas las +\family sans +\lang english +Class options +\family default +\lang spanish + establecidas manualmente en el diálogo +\family sans +Documento\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuración\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Class +\family default +\lang spanish +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Gestión de archivos +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gestión de archivos +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Convertidores +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Convertidores" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Convertidores +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí está la lista de los comandos de los programas para convertir archivos + de un formato a otro. + Puedes modificar los convertidores o configurar otros nuevos. + Para modificar un convertidor lo seleccionas, cambias las entradas de los + campos +\family sans +Convertidor +\family default + y/o +\family sans +Indicador adicional +\family default +, y pulsas el botón +\family sans +Modificar +\family default +. + Para crear un convertidor nuevo, selecciona uno existente, cambia los formatos + en las listas desplegables, modifica el campo +\family sans +Convertidor +\family default +, y pulsa +\family sans +Añadir +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si se activa la opción +\family sans +Caché del convertidor +\family default +, las conversiones se conservarán durante el tiempo especificado en +\family sans +Tiempo máximo (en días) +\family default +. + Esto significa que las imágenes no necesitan ser convertidas de nuevo al + reabrir el documento, porque se usarán las almacenadas en la caché. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la sección +\emph on +Convertidores +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default + encontrarás más información sobre convertidores, como opciones que se pueden + poner en su definición. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formatos de archivo +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Formatos-de-archivo" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formatos de archivo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Copiadores +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aquí está la lista de los formatos de archivo que LyX puede manejar. + Puedes modificar los programas visor y editor para determinados formatos. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Además, puedes definir el +\family sans +Formato de salida predeterminado +\family default + a utilizar cuando pulses +\family sans +Ver, Actualizar, Ver documento maestro +\family default + o +\family sans +Actualizar documento maestro +\family default + en el menú Editar o en la barra de herramientas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En la sección +\emph on +Formatos +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default + encontrarás más información sobre formatos y sus opciones. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Puesto que todas las conversiones de un formato a otro tienen lugar en el + directorio temporal de LyX, a veces es preciso modificar un archivo antes + de copiarlo al directorio temporal, con el fin de que la conversión pueda + llevarse a cabo. + Esto se hace especificando un +\family sans +Copiador +\family default +. + En la sección +\emph on +Copiadores +\emph default + del manual +\emph on +Personalización +\emph default + hay más información sobre esto. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Unidades disponibles en LyX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unidades +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cap:Unidades-disponibles" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Para comprender las unidades utilizadas en este manual, el cuadro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Unidades" + +\end_inset + + describe todas las unidades disponibles en LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Unidades" + +\end_inset + +Unidades +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +unidad +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +nombre/descripción +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +milímetro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +centímetro +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +in +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pulgada +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +punto (72.27 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pica (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pc = 12 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +sp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +punto escalado (65536 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +sp = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +bp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +punto grande (72 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +bp = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +dd +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +didot (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +dd +\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ +\end_inset + + 0.376 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mm) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cicero (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cc = 12 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +dd) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +escala +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% del tamaño original de la imagen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +texto +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% del ancho de texto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +columna +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% del ancho de columna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +página +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% del ancho de página +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +línea +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% del ancho de línea +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +alt_texto +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% de altura de texto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +alt_página +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +% de altura de página +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +altura de la letra +\emph on +x +\emph default + en la tipografía actual +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ancho de la letra +\emph on +M +\emph default + en la tipografía actual +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mu +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +unidad matemática (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mu = 1/18 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Créditos +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cap:Créditos" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La documentación es un esfuerzo de colaboración de muchas personas (¡y os + animamos a que participéis!). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Alejandro Aguilar Sierra +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Amir Karger +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +David Johnson +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Hartmut Haase +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Ignacio García +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Ivan Schreter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +John Raithel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +John Weiss +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Lars Gullik Bjønnes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Matthias Ettrich +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Matthias Zenker +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Rich Fields +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Pascal André +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Paul Evans +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Paul Russel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Robin Socha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Uwe Stöhr +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +El Equipo LyX: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + + La bibliografía de la página siguiente se ha generado con el entorno +\family sans +Bibliografía +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +label "Créditos" +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + +El Equipo Lyx: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Créditos" +target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org/Credits +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens: +\emph on +The LaTeX Companion Second Edition. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 2004 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. + Daly: +\emph on +A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 2003 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexbook" + +\end_inset + +Leslie Lamport: +\emph on +LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "texbook" + +\end_inset + +Donald E. + Knuth. + +\emph on +The TeXbook. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 1984 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +The TeX Catalogue: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "LaTeXFAQ" + +\end_inset + +LaTeX FAQ: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" + +\end_inset + + del programa +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX-2" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" + +\end_inset + + acerca de cómo usar el programa +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "makeindex" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" + +\end_inset + + del programa +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "xindy" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" + +\end_inset + + del programa +\family sans +xindy +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" + +\end_inset + + de los paquetes AMS: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "caption" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf" + +\end_inset + + del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" + +\end_inset + + del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" + +\end_inset + + del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" + +\end_inset + + del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" + +\end_inset + + del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "prettyref" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" + +\end_inset + + del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "refstyle" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" + +\end_inset + + del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "tipa" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentación" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" + +\end_inset + + del paquete LaTeX +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX, paquetes ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para árabe: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Armenian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para armenio: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para idiomas cirílicos: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Farsi" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para farsi: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Hebrew" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para hebreo: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Japanese" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para japonés: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Latvian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para letón: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para lituano: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Mongolian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para mongol: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + cómo configurar LyX para vietnamita: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "NewInLyX20" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" + +\end_inset + + sobre características nuevas en +\family sans +LyX 2.0 +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "spanish" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Página web" +target "http://www.tex-tipografia.com/spanish.html" + +\end_inset + + del estilo +\family sans +spanish +\family default +del paquete +\series bold +babel +\series default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.tex-tipografia.com/spanish.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +let +\backslash +mybibname +\backslash +bibname +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +bibname}{ +\backslash +mybibname +\backslash +; 2} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +El comando +\series bold + +\backslash +bibname +\series default + es el nombre de la bibliografía en el idioma del documento actual. + Aquí se ha redefinido con el número 2 al final para declarar que la siguiente + bibliografía es la segunda: +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex +LatexCommand bibtex +bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs" +options "../biblio/alphadin" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Esta bibliografía se ha generado a partir de una base de datos BibTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print +LatexCommand printnomenclature +set_width "auto" + +\end_inset + + +\series default + +\begin_inset CommandInset index_print +LatexCommand printindex +type "idx" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_body +\end_document diff --git a/lib/doc/fr/UserGuide.lyx b/lib/doc/fr/UserGuide.lyx index 65658d3b48..a8e26781ee 100644 --- a/lib/doc/fr/UserGuide.lyx +++ b/lib/doc/fr/UserGuide.lyx @@ -1,47678 +1,47908 @@ -#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ -\lyxformat 413 -\begin_document -\begin_header -\textclass scrbook -\begin_preamble -% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!! -% -% This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints -% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble, -% parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you -% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact -% the documentation team -% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org - -\usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle -\ifpdf % if pdflatex is used - - % set fonts for nicer pdf view - \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} - -\fi % end if pdflatex is used - -% for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float -\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} - -% the pages of the TOC is numbered roman -% and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added -\let\myTOC\tableofcontents -\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \frontmatter - \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} - \myTOC - \mainmatter } - -% define a short command for \textvisiblespace -\newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace} - -% macro for italic page numbers in the index -\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} - -% for customized page headers/footers -% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document -\usepackage{fancyhdr} -% change header rule width -\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} - -% workaround for a makeindex bug, -% see sec. "Index Entry Order" -% only uncomment this when you are using makindex -%\let\OrgIndex\index -%\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}} - -% use normal list environments also in French documents -\frenchbsetup{StandardLayout} -\end_preamble -\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot -\use_default_options false -\begin_modules -customHeadersFooters -enumitem -logicalmkup -\end_modules -\maintain_unincluded_children false -\language french -\language_package default -\inputencoding auto -\fontencoding global -\font_roman default -\font_sans default -\font_typewriter default -\font_default_family default -\use_non_tex_fonts false -\font_sc false -\font_osf false -\font_sf_scale 100 -\font_tt_scale 100 - -\graphics default -\default_output_format default -\output_sync 0 -\bibtex_command default -\index_command default -\paperfontsize 12 -\spacing single -\use_hyperref true -\pdf_title "Guide de l'utilisateur de LyX" -\pdf_author "L'équipe LyX, Traduction: Adrien Rebollo et Siegfried Meunier-Guttin-Cluzel" -\pdf_subject "LyX" -\pdf_keywords "LyX" -\pdf_bookmarks true -\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true -\pdf_bookmarksopen false -\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 -\pdf_breaklinks false -\pdf_pdfborder false -\pdf_colorlinks true -\pdf_backref false -\pdf_pdfusetitle false -\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" -\papersize default -\use_geometry false -\use_amsmath 1 -\use_esint 1 -\use_mhchem 1 -\use_mathdots 1 -\cite_engine basic -\use_bibtopic false -\use_indices false -\paperorientation portrait -\suppress_date false -\use_refstyle 1 -\notefontcolor #0000ff -\branch Question -\selected 1 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #00ff00 -\end_branch -\branch Réponse -\selected 0 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #aa55ff -\end_branch -\index Index -\shortcut idx -\color #008000 -\end_index -\secnumdepth 3 -\tocdepth 2 -\paragraph_separation indent -\paragraph_indentation default -\quotes_language french -\papercolumns 1 -\papersides 2 -\paperpagestyle default -\tracking_changes false -\output_changes false -\html_math_output 0 -\html_css_as_file 0 -\html_be_strict false -\end_header - -\begin_body - -\begin_layout Title -Guide de l'utilisateur de LyX -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Informations de révision : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Traduction : Mise à jour pour 2.0.5 par JPChrétien, Date : 31/10/2012 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Quelques corrections de Uwe + remplacement de Éditer/Visionner/Insérer/Naviguer - par Édition/Affichage/Insertion/Navigation -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Original : Révision: 7fe5b65, Date : 22/10/2012 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Author -par l'Équipe LyX -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -Merci d'envoyer vos commentaires et corrections à la liste de diffusion - de la documentation de LyX -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - -, ou à la liste de diffusion de LyX en français -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "lyx-fr@lists.lyx.org" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Traduction en français par : -\noun on -Adrien -\noun default - -\noun on -Rebollo -\noun default - -\family typewriter - -\family default -. - Mise à jour de la traduction à partir de la version 1.5.2 : Siegfried -\noun on - -\noun default -M -\noun on -eunier-Guttin-Cluzel -\noun default -. - Revue finale 1.6 et mise à jour 2.0: Jean-Pierre -\noun on -Chrétien -\noun default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Version 2.0.x -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset toc -LatexCommand tableofcontents - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Si votre distribution LaTeX est un peu ancienne , -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Affichage -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Exporter -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en PDF ne fonctionnera pas du fait d'un conflit entre -\family typewriter -varioref/hyperref -\family default - et le caractère -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - apparaissant dans certaines étiquettes. - Frank Mittelbach a corrigé complètement ce bogue de -\family typewriter -varioref -\family default -, la correction est intégrée à partir de TeXLive 2011. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pour résoudre ce problème, vous pouvez mettre à jour votre distribution. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Vous pouvez trouver la dernière version au format PDF de ce manuel ici : -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -\series bold -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Introduction -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -L'option de classe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -numbers=noenddot -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (Documents\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Classe de document) évite qu'un point final apparaisse - dans la numérotation des sections dans la sortie, ce qui est implicite - pour la classe KOMA script. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Qu'est-ce que LyX ? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX est un système de préparation de documents. - C'est un outil pour produire de beaux manuscrits, des livres prêts à être - publiés, des lettres et documents professionnels, et même de la poésie. - Il diffère des autres -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -traitements de texte -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en ce que sa façon d'éditer des documents est conçue comme un langage à - balises. - Ça veut dire que quand vous tapez un titre de section, vous lui dites -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Section -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, et non pas -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Gras, 17 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -points, aligné à gauche, 5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mm d'espace en dessous -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - LyX s'occupe à votre place du rendu typographique, vous ne vous occupez - donc que des concepts, pas des détails. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces conceptions sont expliquées plus en détail dans le manuel d' -\emph on -Introduction -\emph default -. - Si vous ne l'avez pas encore lu, il serait bon de le faire maintenant. - Oui, maintenant: l' -\emph on -Introduction -\emph default - décrit plusieurs autres choses, et surtout le format de tous les manuels. - Si vous ne la lisez pas, vous aurez du mal à naviguer dans ce manuel. - Il est également possible qu'un des autres manuels vous soit plus utile. - L' -\emph on -Introduction -\emph default - vous guidera dans ce choix. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -À quoi LyX ressemble-t-il? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme la plupart des applications, LyX a l'habituelle barre de menus en - haut de sa fenêtre. - En dessous, il y a une barre d'outils avec un menu déroulant et divers - boutons. - Il y a, bien sûr, une barre de défilement vertical et une surface de travail - principale pour éditer des documents. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez qu'il n'y a pas de barre de défilement horizontal. - Ce n'est pas une erreur ou un oubli, c'est bien volontaire. - Quand vous lisez un livre, vous vous attendez à ce que la fin d'une ligne - longue soit reportée sur la ligne suivante. - Quand le texte déborde sur de nouvelles pages, c'est de façon verticale. - Il n'y a donc besoin que de la seule barre de défilement vertical. - Il y a trois cas dans lesquels vous pourriez vouloir une barre de défilement - horizontal. - Le premier cas, ce sont les grandes images: pour éviter ce débordement, - ouvrez le menu des paramètres de l'image et positionnez l'option -\family sans -Taille à l'écran -\family default - dans l'onglet -\family sans -Options LaTeX et LyX -\family default -. - Les deuxième et troisième cas sont les tableaux et les équations qui sont - plus larges que la fenêtre LyX. - Vous pouvez utiliser les flèches du clavier pour vous déplacer horizontalement - dans les tableaux, mais ça ne fonctionne pas encore avec les équations. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour une brève description de tous les menus et barres de boutons de LyX, - voyez l'appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Interface-Utilisateur" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -À l'aide ! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le système d'aide est constitué de l'ensemble des manuels. - Vous pouvez -\emph on -tous -\emph default - les lire depuis la fenêtre de LyX. - Vous n'avez qu'à choisir le manuel que vous voulez consulter à partir du - menu -\family sans -Aide -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Configuration de base de LyX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Config-LyX-de-base" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La plupart des fonctionnalités de LyX peuvent être configurées depuis le - menu -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Préférences -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Préférences -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -. - LyX est capable d'inspecter votre système pour voir quels programmes, quelles - classes de document LaTeX et quels paquetages LaTeX sont disponibles. - Il utilise cette information pour attribuer des valeurs implicites raisonnables - aux variables de préférences. - Bien que cette configuration ait déjà eu lieu au moment de l'installation - de LyX sur votre système, vous pourriez avoir certains fichiers installés - localement, par exemple des classes LaTeX, et qui n'auraient pas été vus - par LyX. - Pour forcer LyX à ré-inspecter votre système, faites -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reconfigurer -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Vous devez alors redémarrer LyX pour vous assurer que les changements ont - été pris en compte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Configuration LaTeX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Configuration-LaTeX" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez éditer des documents avec LyX sans que LaTeX soit installé, - mais vous ne pourrez pas créer de fichiers PDF ou imprimer vos documents - tant que ce ne sera pas fait. - Cependant, certains documents s'appuient sur DocBook, qui peut produire - du PDF ou similaire, et tout document LyX peut être exporté en texte brut - ou en XHTML. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certaines classes de document dépendent de classes ou de paquetages LaTeX - ou DocBook spécifiques. - De telles classes de documents peuvent être utilisées sans que les fichiers - requis soient installés, mais vous ne pourrez pas produire certains types - de sorties. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les paquetages que LyX a trouvé sur votre machine sont listés dans un fichier - que vous pouvez afficher via le menu -\family sans -Aide\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Configuration -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. - Vous devez installer les paquetages nécessaires qui seraient manquants, - puis reconfigurer LyX (menu -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reconfigurer -\family default -) -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Les deux accolades dans la boîte de code TeX empêchent que le terme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - soit imprimé avec des lettres en indice et en exposant. - Vous trouverez plus d'information sur le code TeX dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Code-TeX" - -\end_inset - -, l'impression des noms propres comme LaTeX est expliquée dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Noms-Propres" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Reportez-vous à la section 5.1 du manuel de -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default - pour les détails sur l'installation de paquetages LaTeX additionnels. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Comment travailler avec LyX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Opérations de base sur les fichiers -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Opérations sur les fichiers -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans le menu -\family sans -Fichier -\family default - et dans la barre d'outils standard, on retrouve les opérations de base - pour tout traitement de texte, et en plus quelques opérations plus élaborées - : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Nouveau -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-new" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Nouveau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -avec -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modèle -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Ouvrir -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "file-open" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Documents -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -récents -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Fermer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Enregistrer -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-write" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Enregistrer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sous -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Enregistrer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tout -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Revenir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sauvegarde -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Contrôle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -version -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Importer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Exporter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Imprimer -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Nouvelle fenêtre -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Fermer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fenêtre -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Quitter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ils font tous à peu près la même chose que dans les autres traitements de - texte, avec quelques différences mineures. - La commande -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nouveau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -avec -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modèle -\family default - vous demande un modèle à utiliser. - Choisir un modèle fixera automatiquement certaines options de mise en forme - du document, options que vous auriez dû autrement modifier à la main. - Elles peuvent servir pour certaines classes, spécialement celles utilisées - pour l'écriture de lettres (voir Section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Classes-de-doc" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Note : Il n'y a pas de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -fichier implicite -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ou de document appelé -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Titre -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vide -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - À moins que vous ne disiez à LyX d'ouvrir un fichier ou d'en créer un nouveau, - l'espace vide n'est que cela --- un grand espace vide. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les commandes -\family sans -Revenir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sauvegarde -\family default - et -\family sans -Contrôle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Version -\family default - sont utiles si plusieurs personnes travaillent sur le même document en - même temps -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Si vous prévoyez de faire cela, vous devriez aussi jeter un œil sur la fonction - de contrôle de version dans LyX, dans le manuel -\emph on -Options avancées -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - -\family sans -Revenir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sauvegarde -\family default - rechargera simplement le document à partir du disque. - Vous pouvez bien sûr aussi l'utiliser si vous regrettez d'avoir changé - le document et voulez le restaurer dans le dernier état sauvegardé. - Avec -\family sans -Contrôle -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Version -\family default -vous pouvez enregistrer les modifications que vous avez effectuées sur le - document de façon à ce que les autres puissent les identifier comme étant - les vôtres. - -\family sans - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Fonctions de base d'édition -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Édition -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Base-d'edition" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme la plupart des traitements de texte modernes, LyX peut opérer des - copier-coller sur des blocs de texte, on peut se déplacer d'un caractère, - d'un mot ou d'une page d'écran, et on peut effacer des mots entiers aussi - bien que des caractères individuels. - Les quatre prochaines sections couvrent les fonctions de base d'édition - de LyX et comment y accéder. - Nous allons commencer par le copier-coller. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme vous pouvez vous y attendre, le menu -\family sans -Édition -\family default - et la barre d'outils standard contiennent les commandes de copier-coller, - ainsi que diverses autres fonctions d'édition. - Quelques-unes sont spéciales et seront couvertes dans les prochaines sections. - Les commandes de base sont : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Couper -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "cut" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Copier -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "copy" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Coller -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "paste" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Coller -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -une -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Sélection -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Récente -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Coller -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Spécial -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Rechercher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Remplacer -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show findreplace" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les trois premières s'expliquent d'elles-mêmes. - Vous pouvez aussi copier du texte entre LyX et d'autres programmes par - coupé-copié-collé. - Le sous-menu -\family sans -Coller -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -une -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Sélection -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Récente -\family default - vous montre une liste des dernières chaînes de caractères que vous avez - collé. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Collage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -brut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -par -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -lignes -\family default - va insérer le texte du presse-papier de façon à ce qu'il ne forme qu' -\emph on -un seul -\emph default - paragraphe. - Avec -\family sans -Texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -brut -\family default - seul, le texte est inséré comme une suite de paragraphes, chaque saut de - ligne commençant un nouveau paragraphe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'élément -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rechercher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -remplacer -\family default - ouvre la fenêtre -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fenêtre ! rechercher et remplacer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Rechercher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -remplacer -\family default -. - Le texte que vous voulez trouver va dans le champ -\family sans -Rechercher -\family default -. - Une fois que vous avez trouvé un mot ou expression, LyX le sélectionne. - Appuyer sur le bouton -\family sans -Remplacer -\family default - remplace le texte sélectionné par le contenu du champ -\family sans -Remplacer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -par -\family default -. - Vous pouvez toujours sauter cette occurrence du mot et poursuivre la recherche - en appuyant sur le bouton -\family sans -Suivant -\family default -. - Appuyez sur -\family sans -Remplacer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tout -\family default - pour remplacer automatiquement toutes les occurrences du texte dans le - document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez cocher la case -\family sans -Selon -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -casse -\family default - si vous voulez que la recherche différencie les majuscules des minuscules - dans le mot recherché. - Si le bouton est coché, en recherchant -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Trouvé -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - vous ne trouverez pas -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -trouvé -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez cocher la case -\family sans -Mot -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Complets -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Seulement -\family default - si vous voulez forcer LyX à ne trouver que des mots complets. - Par exemple, en recherchant -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -trouvé -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - vous ne trouverez pas -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -trouvées -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default -. - LyX propose également une version élaborée de -\family sans -Rechercher et Remplacer -\family default - décrite dans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rechercher-et-Remplacer-élaboré" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les choses comme les notes, les flottants, etc. - ce que l'on appelle les inserts, peuvent être dissous. - Cela signifie que l'insert est détruit et que son contenu est laissé comme - du texte normal. - Pour dissoudre un insert, on place le curseur au début de l'insert et on - appuie sur la touche -\family sans -Ret.Arr -\family default - ou on place le curseur à la fin et on appuie sur -\family sans -Suppr. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le contenu d'un insert est sélectionné via le raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "inset-select-all" -\end_inset - -, le raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select" -\end_inset - - sélectionnant tout le document -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Annuler et Refaire -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Refaire -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annuler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Annuler-et-Refaire" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous faites une erreur, vous pouvez facilement la réparer, car LyX a - un tampon d'annulation de grande capacité. - Faites -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Annuler -\family default - ou utilisez le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "undo" -\end_inset - -de la barre d'outils pour corriger une erreur. - Si vous avez accidentellement annulé trop d'opérations, faites -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Refaire -\family default - ou utilisez le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "redo" -\end_inset - - pour -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -annuler l'annulation -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Le mécanisme d'annulation est actuellement limité à 100 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -étapes pour minimiser l'occupation de la mémoire. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que si vous annulez tous les changements et arrivez au document tel - qu'il était sauvegardé, celui-ci conservera malheureusement le statut de - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -modifié -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - C'est une conséquence de la limite de 100 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -étapes vue plus haut. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Annuler -\family default - et -\family sans -Refaire -\family default - fonctionnent avec presque tout dans LyX, mais elles ne procèdent pas caractère - par caractère pour du texte, mais par blocs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Opérations à la souris -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Opérations à la souris -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous n'allons pas entrer dans les détails de tous les raccourcis souris - ici. - Quelques-unes des autres sections de ce manuel couvrent les opérations - spécifiques. - À la place, nous allons plutôt traiter des opérations de souris les plus - élémentaires. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Se déplacer -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Cliquez sur le -\emph on -bouton gauche -\emph default - n'importe où dans la fenêtre d'édition. - Le curseur de déplace sur le texte sous le pointeur. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Sélectionner du texte -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Maintenez le -\emph on -bouton gauche -\emph default - et déplacez la souris. - LyX marque le texte entre les ancienne et nouvelle positions du pointeur. - Utilisez -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Copier -\family default - pour créer une copie du texte dans le presse-papiers de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Repositionnez le curseur et recollez le texte dans LyX en utilisant -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Coller -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Inserts (notes de bas de page, notes en marge, figures et tableaux flottants, - etc.) -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Cliquez avec le bouton droit pour modifier ses propriétés. - Voyez aussi la section correspondante de ce manuel pour plus de détails. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Section -Navigation -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Naviguer" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Navigation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX propose plusieurs façons de naviguer dans un document: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -le menu -\family sans -Navigation -\family default - liste toutes les sections du document sous la forme d'entrées de sous-menus - sur lesquelles vous pouvez cliquer pour sauter à la partie correspondante - du document; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Plan -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - accessible par le menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Plan -\family default - ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle toc" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -les signets, que vous pouvez poser depuis le menu -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Signets -\family default - et utiliser via le même menu. - Notez bien que les signets sont conservés d'une session à la suivante. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils (correspondant au menu -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Signets\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Naviguer en arrière -\family default -) va à la position dans le document à laquelle vous avez récemment touché. - Ceci est utile lorsque, dans un document important, vous avez navigué ou - parcouru un autre endroit du document pour vérifier quelque chose, et que - vous désirez revenir à vos modifications en cours. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une pression sur la touche F5 centre verticalement le curseur dans la fenêtre - LyX principale. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Le plan -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -plan -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - a été dénommé la -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -TdM -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans les versions antérieures de LyX , puisque son but était d'afficher - la table de matières. - Le plan est cependant devenu beaucoup plus puissant maintenant. - Dans le menu déroulant situé en haut de la fenêtre du plan, vous pouvez - choisir différentes listes, parmi lesquelles les objets du type TdM, comme - la liste des tableaux ou la listes des figures, mais aussi des listes de - notes de bas de page, d'étiquettes et de références croisées (voir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand formatted -reference "sec:Références-croisées" - -\end_inset - -), ou de notes, ou de citations (voir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand formatted -reference "sec:Bibliographie" - -\end_inset - -). - Cliquer sur un des éléments positionne le curseur à l'endroit correspondant - du document. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un clic droit sur un élément du plan ouvrira dans la plupart de cas un menu - contextuel permettant une modification directe du contenu de cet élément. - Par exemple, avec les citations, le menu contextuel ouvre la fenêtre de - dialogue de citation pour permettre de la modifier. - Un clic droit sur une modification permet de l'accepter ou de la rejeter, - et ainsi de suite. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le champ -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Filtre -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - situé en haut vous permet de restreindre les éléments apparaissant dans - le plan. - Par exemple, si vous affichez une liste des étiquettes et références et - souhaitez ne voir que les références dans les sous-sections, vous pouvez - saisir le texte -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -sub: -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans le filtre; et seuls les éléments contenant ce texte seront affichés. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Au bas du plan se trouvent plusieurs boutons ou actions permettant de mieux - contrôler l'affichage. - L'option -\family sans -Trier -\family default - trie la liste courante alphabétiquement, sinon les éléments apparaissent - dans l'ordre d'occurrence dans le document. - L'option -\family sans -Conserver -\family default - permet de conserver l'affichage de la liste dans l'état actuel. - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Conserver -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - signifie que par exemple si les sous-sections des sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -4 sont affichées et que vous cliquez sur la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3, les sous-sections des sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -4 resteront affichées. - Sans l'option -\family sans -Conserver -\family default - elles seraient cachées pour mettre en évidence la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 sur laquelle vous avez cliqué. - Enfin, la réglette située à gauche vous permet d'ouvrir le plan à une -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -profondeur -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - donnée, le mieux est d'essayer pour appréhender le fonctionnement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le bouton -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/reload.png - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - remet le plan à jour (bien que ce ne soit pas normalement nécessaire). - À côté se trouvent les boutons qui permettent de modifier la position des - sections dans le document. - Avec les boutons -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/down.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/up.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - - situés en bas de la fenêtre de plan, vous pouvez déplacer des sections - à l'intérieur de votre document. - Vous pouvez par exemple déplacer la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 pour qu'elle se trouve avant la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.4. - LyX va alors renuméroter automatiquement les sections pour refléter le - nouvel ordre. - Avec les boutons -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/promote.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/demote.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - (ou les raccourcis clavier correspondants -\family sans -Tab -\family default - et -\family sans -Maj-Tab -\family default -) vous pouvez modifier le niveau hiérarchique d'une section. - Vous pouvez par exemple transformer la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 en chapitre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 ou en sous-section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.4.1. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Complétion de saisie ou de mot -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Complétion-de-saisie" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Complétion de saisie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Complétion de mot|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Complétion de saisie -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX propose une fonction de complétion de mots en balayant tous les documents - qui sont actuellement ouverts. - Chaque mot qui apparaît dans un de ces documents est ajouté à une base - de données qui est utilisée pour proposer des complétions de mots. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La complétion de saisie peut être activée dans les préférences de LyX (menu - -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Préférences -\family default -), au paragraphe -\family sans -Saisie\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Complétion de saisie -\family default -. - Avec l'option -\family sans -Complétion automatique en ligne -\family default -, la complétion proposée est affichée immédiatement après le curseur. - Avec l'option -\family sans -Fenêtre auxiliaire automatique, -\family default - la complétion apparaît toujours dans une sous-fenêtre. - Le curseur auxiliaire de complétion peut être désactivé en dé-sélectionnant - l'option -\family sans -Indicateur curseur -\family default -. - Au moyen des options générales, vous pouvez définir la temporisation d'affichag -e de chacun des deux modes d'affichage et décider si les complétions longues - doivent tronquées. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Implicitement LyX affiche un petit triangle derrière le curseur pour signaler - qu'il y a des complétions disponibles. - Vous pouvez alors appuyer sur la touche -\family sans -Tab -\family default - pour utiliser ces complétions. - Quand plusieurs complétions sont possibles, une fenêtre auxiliaire s'ouvre - pour les afficher. - Vous pouvez utiliser la souris ou les flèches de déplacement pour sélectionner - une complétions dans la fenêtre, et valider le choix avec la touche -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les options de complétion pour les mathématiques fonctionnent comme les - options pour le texte. - L'option spécifique -\family sans -Auto-correction -\family default - autorise la composition des caractères: si vous voulez par exemple insérer - le caractère -\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ -\end_inset - -, vous pouvez saisir la séquence -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -=> -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - dans une formule pour l'obtenir. - Ceci est une alternative rapide à l'insertion de commandes ou à l'usage - de la barre d'outils mathématiques. - Une liste des combinaisons de caractères reconnues se trouve dans le fichier - -\family typewriter -autocorrect -\family default - qui se trouve dans le répertoire d'installation. - L'auto-correction peut être activée à tout moment en saisissant le point - d'exclamation -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -! -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\family sans -Espace -\family default - la désactive. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Raccourcis pour le clavier de base -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Raccourcis clavier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a au moins deux familles différentes de raccourcis clavier : -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cua -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -emacs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - LyX utilise implicitement -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cua -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, ceci peut être modifié via -\family sans - Saisie\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Raccourcis. - ( -\family default -Vous là pouvez aussi voir la liste des raccourcis et les modifier comme - c'est expliqué dans la section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Éditer-les-raccourcis" - -\end_inset - -.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quelques touches, comme -\family sans -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Haut -\family default -, -\family sans -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Bas -\family default -, -\family sans -Gauche -\family default -, -\family sans -Droite -\family default -, -\family sans -Haut -\family default -, et -\family sans -Bas -\family default -, font exactement ce que vous attendez d'elles. - D'autres non : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tab -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Tab" -description "Touche tabulation" - -\end_inset - - -\family default - il n'y a rien qui ressemble à une tabulation dans LyX. - Si vous ne comprenez pas cela, allez lire tout de suite les sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Intro-indent-par" - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Environnements-par" - -\end_inset - -, et spécialement la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Env-par-listes" - -\end_inset - -. - Oui oui, faites-le tout de suite. - Si vous avez encore des problèmes, voyez le -\emph on -Manuel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'apprentissage -\emph default -. - Avec LyX, la touche de tabulation n'est utilisée que pour accepter les - suggestions de la complétion de saisie, pour déplacer le curseur dans les - tables ou les matrices mathématiques ou -\lang english -to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate -\lang french -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Esc -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Esc" -description "Touche échappement" - -\end_inset - - -\family default - c'est la touche d'annulation. - Elle est utilisée de manière générique pour annuler des opérations. - D'autres parties de ce manuel entreront plus dans les détails à ce sujet; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Orig -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Fin -\family default - celles-ci déplacent le curseur, respectivement au début et à la fin de - la ligne, sauf si vous utilisez les raccourcis -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Emacs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, auquel cas elles vont au début et à la fin du fichier. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a trois touches de modification : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Contrôle -\family default - (elle est notée -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Ctrl -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Ctrl" -description "Touche Contrôle" - -\end_inset - - dans la documentation). - Celle-ci a des utilisations différentes, selon la touche avec laquelle - elle est utilisée : -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -avec -\family sans -Ret.Arr -\family default - ou -\family sans -Suppr. -\family default -, on efface un mot entier au lieu d'un seul caractère; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -avec -\family sans -Gauche -\family default - et -\family sans -Droite -\family default -, on se déplace par mots au lieu d'un caractère à la fois; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -avec -\family sans -Orig -\family default - et -\family sans -Fin -\family default -, on se déplace au début et à la fin du document, respectivement; -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Majuscule -\family default - (notée -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Maj -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Maj" -description "Touche Majuscule" - -\end_inset - - dans la documentation). - Utilisez-la avec une des touches de mouvement pour sélectionner le texte - situé entre les ancienne et nouvelle positions du curseur; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Alt -\family default - (noté -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Alt -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Alt" -description "Touche Alt ou Meta" - -\end_inset - - dans la documentation) C'est la touche -\family sans -Alt -\family default - sur de nombreux claviers, sauf si votre clavier a une touche -\family sans -Meta -\family default - dédiée. - Si vous avez ces deux touches, vous devrez faire des essais pour déterminer - laquelle se comporte effectivement comme une touche -\family sans -Alt -\family default -. - Cette touche fait plein de choses différentes, et active aussi les -\emph on -raccourcis de menu -\emph default -. - Si vous l'utilisez en combinaison avec l'une des lettres soulignées dans - un menu ou élément de menu, elle sélectionne cet élément; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Par exemple, la séquence -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Alt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -e -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -y -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -p -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - affiche la fenêtre de dialogue -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Style de texte -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Alt-f -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - ouvre le menu -\family sans -Fichier -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -NdT : ces séquences changent selon la langue des menus. - Selon l'avancement de la traduction, ces raccourcis sont, ou non, accessibles. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a encore d'autres choses à dire sur la touche -\family sans -Alt -\family default -, mais il vous faudra regarder le manuel -\emph on -Raccourcis -\emph default - pour obtenir plus d'informations. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Heureusement, vous apprendrez de plus en plus de raccourcis clavier au fur - et à mesure que vous utiliserez LyX, parce que la plupart des actions de - la souris afficheront un petit message dans le minibuffer qui décrit le - nom de l'action que vous venez d'effectuer, et les raccourcis existants - pour cette action. - Les menus de LyX listent aussi les raccourcis existants. - La notation pour les raccourcis est très similaire à celle adoptée dans - cette documentation, ainsi vous ne devrez pas avoir de problèmes pour la - comprendre. - Cependant, notez que les -\family sans -Maj- -\family default - sont explicitement mentionnés, ainsi -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Alt-P Maj-A -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - signifie -\family sans -Alt-P -\family default - suivi d'un -\family sans -A -\family default - majuscule. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez voir la liste des raccourcis et les modifier dans les préférences - de LyX dans la rubrique -\family sans -Saisie\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Raccourcis -\family default - comme c'est expliqué dans la section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Éditer-les-raccourcis" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Les bases de LyX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Les bases -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Types de documents -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Types -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avant toute chose, avant même de commencer à écrire un document, vous devez - décider quel -\emph on -type -\emph default - de document vous voulez éditer. - Les types de documents diffèrent par l'espacement, les en-têtes, la numérotatio -n, etc. - Ils diffèrent aussi par les environnements de paragraphe utilisés, et par - la présentation du titre de votre document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une -\emph on -classe de document -\emph default - décrit un groupe de propriétés communes à un ensemble donné de documents. - En choisissant la classe de document, vous sélectionnez automatiquement - ces propriétés, facilitant la création du type de document que vous voulez. - Si vous ne choisissez pas de classe de document, LyX en prendra une impliciteme -nt. - Il vous incombe donc de décider de la classe de votre document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les différentes classes de document -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Classes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Classes-de-doc" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez sélectionner une classe dans la fenêtre -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Ensuite sélectionnez la classe que vous voulez utiliser dans le champ -\family sans -Classe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -document -\family default - de la rubrique -\family sans -Classe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -document -\family default -, et ajoutez les options dont vous avez besoin. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -En bref -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a quatre classes standard de document dans LyX. - Ce sont : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Article pour des articles; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Report pour des rapports; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Book pour écrire un livre; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Letter pour une lettre à l'américaine. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a aussi quelques classes non standard, que LyX n'utilise que si vous - avez installé les classes LaTeX correspondantes, bien que la plupart des - distributions LaTeX les incluent. - En voici quelques-unes, la liste complète avec des explications détaillées - se trouve au chapitre -\emph on -Classes Spéciales de Documents -\emph default - dans le manuel -\emph on -Options avancées -\emph default - : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -A&A articles de publications dans le style et le format utilisés par -\lang english -Astronomy & Astrophysics; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ACS articles de publications dans le style et le format utilisés par l' -\lang english -American Chemistry Society; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -AGU articles de publications dans le style et le format utilisés par l' -\lang english -American Geophysical Union; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -AMS articles de publications et livres dans le style et le format utilisés - par l'AMS ( -\lang english -American Mathematical Society -\lang french -). - Il y a trois dispositions d'article possibles. - La disposition standard utilise un schéma de numérotation classique pour - les théorèmes et environnements similaires, qui préfixe le numéro du résultat - avec le numéro de la section. - Tous les énoncés de type résultat (propositions, corollaires etc...) sont - numérotés ensembles, mais les définitions, les exemples et les autres du - même genre ont leur propre numérotation. - Le schéma de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -numérotation séquentielle -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ne place pas le numéro de la section avec chaque résultat, mais numérote - ceux-ci en une seule séquence tout au long de l'article. - Chaque type de résultat a sa propre séquence. - Il y a aussi une disposition qui se passe de toute numérotation des proposition -s; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Beamer sert à faire des transparents pour des présentations; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Broadway disposition pour écrire des pièces de théâtre. - Ce n'est pas une classe qui existe dans LaTeX, mais une nouvelle qui est - distribuée avec LyX; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chess format pour écrire sur le jeu d'échecs; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Curriculum -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vitae classe utile pour écrire un curriculum vitæ; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Elsarticle disposition pour les revues publiées par le groupe Elsevier; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Foils sert à faire des transparents pour des présentations; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hollywood utilisé pour taper des scripts pour l'industrie cinématographique - des États-Unis. - Ce n'est pas une classe qui existe dans LaTeX, mais une nouvelle qui est - distribuée avec LyX; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -IEEEtran disposition pour les journaux publiés par l'IEEE ( -\lang english -Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -IOP disposition pour les journaux publiés par l'IOP (Institute of Physics); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Kluwer disposition pour les revues publiées par le groupe Kluwer. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -KOMA-Script remplace les classes standard, en offrant de nombreuses fonctions - intéressantes comme le formatage des légendes, le calcul automatique de - la taille de la zone d'impression etc. - Il est utilisé par le présent document; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Memoir remplace également les classes standard; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Powerdot sert à faire des transparents pour des présentations; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -REVTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X pour écrire des articles pour les publications de l' -\lang english -American Physical Society -\lang french - (APS), de l' -\lang english -American Institute of Physics -\lang french - (AIP), et de l' -\lang english -Optical Society of America -\lang french - (OSA). - Cette classe n'est pas entièrement compatible avec toutes les fonctions - de LyX; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Slides sert à faire des transparents pour des présentations; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -SPIE -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Proceedings disposition pour les journaux publiés par SPIE ( -\lang english -The International Society for Optical Engineering -\lang french -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Springer disposition pour les revues publiés par le groupe Springer. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous n'entrerons pas plus dans les détails ici sur l'utilisation de ces - différentes classes de document. - Vous pouvez trouver tous les détails sur les classes non-standard dans - le manuel -\emph on -Options -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -avancées -\emph default - (chapitre 6). - Ici, nous nous contenterons de faire la liste de quelques-unes des propriétés - communes à toutes ces classes de document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Disponibilité -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous remarquerez probablement que de nombreuses classes énumérées par le - menu déroulant -\family sans - Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Classes de document -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -sont marquées comme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Indisponibles -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Si vous ouvrez un document qui utilise l'une de celles-ci, vous verrez - un avertissement vous informant que certains fichiers requis pour créer - la sortie ne sont pas installés. - Vous penserez alors que quelque chose ne va pas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Tout va bien. - LyX inclut beaucoup plus de classes que vous n'utiliserez jamais, et certaines - d'entre elles, comme -\family sans -IOP -\family default -, sont très spécialisées. - LyX essaie de reconnaître des documents aussi variés que possible, et il - inclut une centaine de fichiers de format, ce nombre étant croissant. - Aucune distribution LaTeX n'installera implicitement tous les fichiers - qui peuvent être utilisés par telle ou telle classe de document, il y en - aurait trop. - Voilà pourquoi certaines classes sont indisponibles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous souhaitez utiliser une classe document marquée -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Indisponible -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, il vous suffit d'installer les paquetages appropriés. - La manière la plus aisée de trouver quels fichiers ont manquants est d'utiliser - la classe pour un nouveau document: LyX ouvrira une fenêtre de dialogue - listant les fichiers manquants. - Voyez la section -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Installation de nouveaux fichiers LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans le manuel de -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default - pour les détails de la procédure. -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bien que LyX reconnaisse un grand nombre de types de documents, il ne reconnaît - pas tous les types possibles. - Par exemple, de nombreuses universités fournissent des classes LaTeX obligatoir -es pour les mémoires soumis à ces universités. - L'équipe LyX ne peut pas écrire des fichiers de format pour reconnaître - toutes ces classes LaTeX, elles sont trop nombreuses. - Heureusement, les utilisateurs peuvent écrire leurs propres fichiers de - format, et nombreux sont ceux qui l'ont fait. - Le chapitre 5 du manuel de -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default - décrit comment créer des fichiers de format. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Modules -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Modules" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Modules -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les modules ajoutent des caractéristiques supplémentaires à un document, - ces dernières n'étant pas disponibles implicitement avec la classe choisie - pour le document. - Par exemple, vous pouvez vouloir utiliser l'écriture Braille dans un document. - Cette écriture n'est disponible dans aucune classe de document, vous devrez - donc charger le module correspondant dans la rubrique -\family sans -Modules -\family default - de la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Documents ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Sélectionner un module de la liste fait apparaître la description correspondant -e. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certains modules ont besoin de paquetages LaTeX ou de convertisseurs qui - ne sont pas toujours installés implicitement. - LyX vous préviendra si vous n'avez pas les paquetages ou convertisseurs - nécessaires, et vous dira exactement ce qui manque. - Vous pourrez toujours utiliser le module pour modifier votre fichier, mais - vous ne pourrez pas exporter en PDF ou imprimer le document, puisque LyX - ne pourra pas exécuter la compilation sans les éléments manquants. - Si vous souhaitez produire ce type de sortie, il vous faudra installer - les pré-requis manquants et reconfigurer LyX en sélectionnant -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Reconfigurer -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Voir la section -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Installer de nouveaux fichiers LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - du manuel de -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default - pour les détails sur l'installation de nouveaux paquetages. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Note : certains modules ont besoin d'autres modules et certaines paires - de modules sont incompatibles. - LyX vous informera sur ces contraintes. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Format local -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Format-local" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Format local -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les modules sont pour LyX ce que sont les paquetages pour LaTeX: ils sont - prévus pour une utilisation dans des documents variés, et si vous avez - besoin souvent des mêmes constructions dans différents documents, vous - devez envisager d'écrire un module dans ce but. - Quelquefois, cependant, un document présente des besoins très particuliers, - et il vous faut un insert spécifique ou un style de caractère, mais seulement - pour ce document. - Vous voulez en fait un élément de format qui ressemble à un préambule LaTeX: - le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Format local -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - de LyX est ce qu'il vous faut, voyez la section -\emph on -Format local -\emph default - du manuel de -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default - pour savoir comment l'utiliser. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Propriétés -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Au cas où vous vous demanderiez quelles sont les valeurs implicites pour - chaque classe de document, voici un tableau les décrivant brièvement : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mise en page -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pagination -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Colonnes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Niveau max. - de découpage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -article -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Simple -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Recto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Une -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Section -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -report -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Simple -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Recto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Une -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Chapitre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -book -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En-têtes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Recto-verso -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Une -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Chapitre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -letter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Simple -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Recto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Une -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -aucun -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous vous demandez sans doute aussi ce que signifie -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Niveau maximal de découpage -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Il y a plusieurs environnements de paragraphe utilisés pour créer des en-têtes - de section. - Des classes de document différentes permettent des types d'en-têtes de - section différents. - Seules deux d'entre elles utilisent l'en-tête -\family sans -Chapitre -\family default -; les autres ne l'autorisent pas et commencent par l'en-tête -\family sans -Section -\family default -. - Quelques classes de document, comme celles pour les lettres, n'utilisent - aucun en-tête de section. - En plus des en-têtes -\family sans -Chapitre -\family default - et -\family sans -Section -\family default -, il y a aussi des en-têtes de sous-section ( -\family sans -SousSection -\family default -), de sous-sous-section ( -\family sans -SousSousSection -\family default -), ainsi de suite. - Nous décrirons complètement ces en-têtes dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:En-tetes-env-par" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Apparence du document -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Apparence-du-document" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Apparence -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les propriétés les plus importantes des classes de documents sont modifiées - dans le menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres. - -\family default - Vous pouvez saisir, dans le champ -\family sans -Options -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -classe -\family default - sous -\family sans -Classe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -document, -\family default - des options spéciales pour votre classe de document sous forme d'une liste - séparée par des virgules. - C'est nécessaire uniquement si LyX ne gère pas les options spéciales que - vous voulez utiliser pour votre document. - Pour en apprendre plus sur votre classe LaTeX favorite et ses options, - vous devez lire son manuel. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default -, sous -\family sans -Format -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\family default - le menu déroulant -\family sans -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'en-têtes -\family default - permet de choisir quel type d'en-têtes et de numérotation on utilise sur - la page. - Vous avez le choix entre ces cinq options: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Implicite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -default -\emph default -) -\family default - utilise la mise en page implicite de la classe actuelle; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Vide -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -empty -\emph default -) -\family default - ne crée ni numéros de page ni en-têtes; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Ordinaire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -plain -\emph default -) -\family default - crée seulement des numéros de page; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -En-têtes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -headings -\emph default -) -\family default - crée des numéros de page et en en-tête le titre et le numéro, soit du chapitre, - soit de la section en cours. - LyX utilise le chapitre ou la section selon le niveau maximum de découpage; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Sophistiqué -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -fancy -\emph default -) -\family default - vous permet de créer des en-têtes et pieds de page personnalisables à volonté - si vous disposez du paquetage -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Voyez la documentation du paquetage -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - pour plus de détails.Leur définition est détaillé dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:En-têtes-et-pieds" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La -\family sans -Séparation -\family default - des paragraphes est décrite dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Intro-indent-par" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Dimensions du papier et orientation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Taille du papier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Taille-du-papier" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous trouverez les options suivantes dans la rubrique -\family sans -Format -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\family default - de la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default - : -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Taille -\family default - précise sur quelles dimensions de papier imprimer. - Les choix sont : -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Implicite -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -A0 - A6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -B0 - B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -C0 - C6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -lettre US, légal US, executive US -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -JIS B0 - JIS B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Réglable -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Orientation -\family default - permet de choisir l'impression de sortie dans le format -\family sans -Portrait -\family default - ou -\family sans -Paysage -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -recto-verso -\family default - ajuste la zone d'impression pour imprimer les deux face du papier. - Cela signifie que la zone d'impression n'est pas la même pour les pages - paires et les pages impaires. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Marges -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Marges" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Marges -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Marges -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les marges de la page sont modifiées dans -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous utilisez une classe de document -\series bold -KOMA-Script -\series default -, vous pouvez utiliser les -\family sans -Marges -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -implicites -\family default - car -\series bold -KOMA-Script -\series default - calcule la taille de la zone d'impression automatiquement en tenant compte - du format du papier et de la taille de la police de caractères. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Note importante -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous changez la classe d'un document, LyX doit -\emph on -tout -\emph default - convertir dans la nouvelle classe. - Ceci inclut les environnements de paragraphe. - Quelques-uns sont standard, du fait que toutes les classes de document - les possèdent. - Cependant, certaines classes ont des environnements de paragraphe spéciaux. - Si tel est le cas, et que vous changez de classe de document, LyX identifiera - comme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -inconnus -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - les environnements des paragraphes dont le style n'est plus reconnu. - Le nom du style est cependant préservé au cas où vous souhaiteriez revenir - à la classe originale, mais ces paragraphes apparaîtront sans mise en forme - particulière dans la version imprimable, et vous devrez donc soit créer - une nouveau style vous-même, soit convertir manuellement ces paragraphes - dans un style disponible dans la nouvelle classe de document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Indentation et séparation des paragraphes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraphe ! Indentation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Intro-indent-par" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avant de décrire tous les environnements de paragraphe possibles, nous voudrions - dire un ou deux mots sur l'indentation des paragraphes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Chacun semble avoir sa propre convention pour séparer les paragraphes. - La plupart des américains indentent la première ligne. - D'autres n'indentent pas mais mettent de l'espace supplémentaire entre - les paragraphes. - LyX utilise la même convention que les typographes. - Si vous choisissez dans -\family sans -Format -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte -\family default - l'option -\family sans -Séparer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paragraphes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -avec -\family default - et -\family sans -Indentation, -\family default - le -\emph on - premier -\emph default - paragraphe d'une section, ainsi qu'après une figure, une équation, un tableau, - une liste, etc., -\emph on -n'est pas -\emph default - indenté. - Seul un paragraphe en suivant un autre a une indentation. - Notez que la convention d'indentation peut être différente quand vous utilisez - une autre langue que l'anglais dans votre document -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -NdT: c'est en particulier le cas en français, voyez la documentation de - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "babel french" -target "http://www.google.com/url?sa=t&source=web&cd=1&ved=0CBoQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fdaniel.flipo.free.fr%2Ffrenchb%2Ffrenchb2-doc.pdf&rct=j&q=docimentation%20babel%20french&ei=4gtSTvnUE9OxhQf29eTDBg&usg=AFQjCNG9ANBp69Yi-oMNiKsFIzvUinm3qQ&sig2=vks2zUxQN7wEUzh2UB3fWA&cad=rja" - -\end_inset - - pour les détails sur la francisation. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - LaTeX s'assure que les indentations suivent les règles de la langue utilisée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'espacement entre les paragraphes, comme l'interligne, l'espacement entre - les en-têtes et le texte --- en fait, l'espacement entre quoi que ce soit - --- est prédéfini dans LyX. - Comme nous l'avons dit, vous n'avez pas à vous préoccuper de la quantité - d'espace libre à ajouter entre ceci et cela: LyX s'en charge. - En fait, ces espacements verticaux prédéfinis ne sont pas une simple quantité - mais une fourchette. - De cette façon, LyX peut rétrécir ou élargir l'espace entre les lignes - pour s'assurer que les figures s'insèrent dans une page avec du texte, - que les sections ne commencent pas tout en bas de la page, et ainsi de - suite -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En fait, c'est LaTeX qui s'en charge quand LyX lui demande de produire un - fichier imprimable. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Cependant, prédéfini ne veut pas dire que vous ne pouvez pas changer ces - valeurs. - LyX vous donne la possibilité de changer de manière globale -\emph on -tous -\emph default - ces espacements prédéfinis. - Nous expliquerons comment plus tard. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Séparation des paragraphes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraphe ! Séparation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour séparer les paragraphes vous pouvez choisir soit -\family sans -Indentation -\family default -, soit -\family sans -Espacement -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical -\family default - dans le sous-menu -\family sans -Format -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte -\family default - de la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans - Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\family default - il en résulte soit une indentation en début de paragraphe, soit un espace - supplémentaire entre les paragraphes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Réglage fin -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi changer la méthode de séparation d'un paragraphe donné. - Allez dans -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Paragraphe -\family default - pour ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue. - Cochez le bouton -\family sans -Indenter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Paragraphe -\family default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle" -\end_inset - -) pour changer le statut du paragraphe en cours. - Si les paragraphes sont indentés implicitement, ce bouton sera d'origine - actif. - Si les paragraphes ne sont pas indentés mais sont séparés par de l'espace - supplémentaire, ce bouton sera complètement ignoré (vous ne pourrez pas - indenter un paragraphe donné en le cochant). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous n'aurez besoin de changer la méthode d'indentation pour un paragraphe - isolé que si vous voulez faire de l'ajustement fin. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Changer l'interligne -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraphe ! Interligne -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans la fenêtre -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -vous pouvez changer, pour l'ensemble du document, l'espacement entre les - lignes dans la rubrique -\family sans -Format -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte -\family default -, champ -\family sans -Interligne -\family default -. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -setspace -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! setspace -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - doit avoir été installé pour utiliser cette fonction. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Vous pouvez le changer pour un seul paragraphe dans la fenêtre de dialogue -\lang english - -\family sans -\lang french -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Paragraphe -\family default - , mais ceci devrait être utilisé très exceptionnellement car l'espacement - vertical est normalement défini par le style de l'environnement concerné. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Environnements de paragraphe -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Environnements de paragraphe |( -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraphe ! Environnement -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Environnements-par" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -En résumé -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les environnements de paragraphe correspondent aux différentes séquences - de commandes -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -begin{ -\emph on -environnement -\emph default -} ... - -\backslash -end{ -\emph on -environnement -\emph default -} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -que l'on trouve dans un fichier LaTeX. - Si vous ne connaissez pas LaTeX, ou si le concept d'environnement de paragraphe - vous est complètement étranger, nous vous conseillons vivement de lire - le -\emph on -Manuel -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'apprentissage -\emph default -. - Ce dernier contient beaucoup plus d'exemples que cette section. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un environnement de paragraphe est, dit simplement, un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -récipient -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - pour un paragraphe qui donne à celui-ci certaines propriétés. - Ce peut être un style donné de police, un type de numérotation, des étiquettes, - l'autorisation d'hériter de certaines propriétés, et bien d'autres choses - encore. - Les différents environnements de paragraphe suppriment totalement tout - besoin de tabulations embrouillées, d'ajustement de marges à la louche, - et d'autres archaïsmes datant de l'ère des machines à écrire. - Il y a des environnements de paragraphe qui sont spécifiques à un type - de document particulier. - Nous ne traiterons ici que des plus communs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour choisir un nouvel environnement de paragraphe, utilisez le menu déroulant - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png - scale 70 - clip - -\end_inset - - situé à la gauche de la barre d'outils. - LyX change l'environnement pour -\emph on -tout -\emph default - le paragraphe dans lequel se trouve le curseur. - Vous pouvez aussi changer l'environnement d'un groupe de paragraphes si - vous les sélectionnez avant de choisir le nouvel environnement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que taper -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - crée -\emph on -en général -\emph default - un nouveau paragraphe dont l'environnement est -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - Nous disons -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -en général -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - car si vous êtes dans l'un de ces environnements : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Cite -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Citation -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Vers -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -ListePuces -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Énumération -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Description -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Liste -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX conservera celui-ci quand vous tapez -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -, plutôt que de le réinitialiser à -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - La profondeur d'emboîtement est également préservée (voir les détails sur - l'emboîtement dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Standard -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans la plupart des classes, l'environnement de paragraphe implicite est - -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - Il crée un paragraphe simple. - Si LyX réinitialise l'environnement de paragraphe, c'est celui-là qu'il - choisit. - D'ailleurs, le paragraphe que vous êtes en train de lire (comme la plupart - dans ce manuel) est dans l'environnement -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un paragraphe avec l'environnement -\family sans -Standard -\family default - peut être emboîté dans à peu près n'importe quoi d'autre, mais vous ne - pouvez rien emboîter dans un environnement -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Titre du document -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document !Titre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une page de titre LaTeX a trois parties : le titre lui-même, le nom du(des) - auteur(s) et une -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -note de bas de page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - pour les remerciements ou l'adresse. - Pour certains types de documents, LaTeX place tout ceci avec la date du - jour sur une page séparée. - Pour d'autres, la -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - de titre va en haut de la première page du document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX fournit une interface aux commandes de la page de titre par l'intermédiaire - des environnements de paragraphe -\family sans -Titre -\family default -, -\family sans -Auteur -\family default - et -\family sans -Date -\family default -. - Voici comment les utiliser : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -mettez le titre de votre document dans l'environnement -\family sans -Titre; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -mettez le nom de l'auteur dans l'environnement -\family sans -Auteur; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -si vous voulez que la date ait un format donné, ou si vous voulez entrer - une date fixée, ou si vous voulez autre chose à la place, mettez-le dans - l'environnement -\family sans -Date -\family default -. - Notez que cet environnement est facultatif. - Si vous n'en mettez pas, LaTeX insérera automatiquement la date du jour; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -si vous ne voulez pas de date du tout, utilisez l'option -\family sans -Supprimer la date implicite sur la première page -\family default - dans le menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Classe de document -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez utiliser des notes de bas de page pour insérer des remerciements - ou des informations supplémentaires. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -En-têtes -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:En-tetes-env-par" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En-têtes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a plusieurs environnements de paragraphe pour produire des en-têtes - de section. - LyX s'occupe à votre place de la numérotation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -En-têtes numérotés -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En-têtes ! Numérotés -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a 7 types d'en-têtes de section numérotés. - Ce sont : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Partie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Chapitre -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Section -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -SousSection -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -SousSousSection -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -Paragraphe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -SousParagraphe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX étiquette chaque en-tête avec une série de numéros, séparés par des - points. - Les numéros décrivent où vous êtes dans le document. - Contrairement aux autres en-têtes, les parties sont numérotées avec des - chiffres romains. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces en-têtes subdivisent votre document en parties. - Par exemple, supposons que vous êtes en train d'écrire un livre. - Vous découpez le livre en chapitres. - LyX fait un découpage similaire : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Les -\family sans -Partie -\family default -s sont divisées soit en -\family sans -Chapitre -\family default -s, soit en -\family sans -Section -\family default -s. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Les -\family sans -Chapitre -\family default -s sont divisé en -\family sans -Section -\family default -s. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Les -\family sans -Section -\family default -s sont divisées en sous-sections ( -\family sans -SousSection -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Les sous-sections sont divisées en sous-sous-sections ( -\family sans -SousSousSection -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Les sous-sous-sections sont divisées en paragraphes ( -\family sans -Paragraphe -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Les paragraphes sont divisés en sous-paragraphes ( -\family sans -SousParagraphe -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note : -\series default - tous les documents n'utilisent pas l'en-tête de -\family sans -Chapitre -\family default - comme niveau maximal de découpage. - Dans ce cas, la -\family sans -Section -\family default - est l'en-tête maximal. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ainsi, si vous utilisez l'environnement -\family sans -SousSousSection -\family default - pour dénommer une nouvelle sous-sous-section, LyX l'étiquettera avec son - numéro, ainsi qu'avec le numéro de la sous-section, de la section et, s'il - y a lieu, du chapitre dans lesquels elle est contenue. - Par exemple, la cinquième section du second chapitre de ce livre a l'étiquette - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -2.5 -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -En-têtes non numérotés -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En-têtes ! Non numérotés -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les en-têtes non numérotés sont dotés d'une étoile -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -* -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - à la fin de leur nom. - Sinon ils fonctionnent de la même façon que leurs homologues numérotés, - mais ils n'apparaissent pas dans la table des matières, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tdm" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Changer la numérotation -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Profondeur-section" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez également changer les niveaux de découpage qui seront numérotés - et ceux qui apparaîtront dans la table des matières. - Attention, cela n'enlève aucun de ces niveaux. - Ces paramètres sont définis par la classe de document. - Certaines classes commencent par -\family sans -Chapitre -\family default - et descendent jusqu'au niveau -\family sans -SousParagraphe -\family default -. - D'autres démarrent à -\family sans -Section -\family default -. - De même, toutes les classes de document ne numérotent pas les mêmes niveaux - de découpage. - La plupart ne numérotent pas -\family sans -Paragraphe -\family default - ou -\family sans -SousParagraphe -\family default -. - Vous pouvez changer ce comportement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ouvrez la fenêtre -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -sous -\family sans - Numérotation -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TdM -\family default - vous devriez voir deux glissières. - Celle intitulée -\family sans -Numérotation -\family default - contrôle jusqu'où LyX descend dans la hiérarchie du découpage pour numéroter - les en-têtes. - L'autre contrôle l'apparition ou non des en-têtes dans la table des matières. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Titres courts pour les en-têtes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En-têtes ! Titres courts -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Titres courts -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Titres-courts" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certaines sections ou chapitres, comme celle-ci, ont un titre qui peut être - un peu long. - Cela peut poser un problème si l'espace horizontal est limité. - Par exemple si les en-têtes de pages doivent contenir le titre de la section - courante, un titre trop long va dépasser dans les marges et sera horrible. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX vous permet de donner un titre court pour une en-tête de section, - en plus du titre normal. - Ce titre court est utilisé dans les entêtes de pages et dans la table des - matières, ce qui évite le problème cité. - Pour définir un titre court, utilisez le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Titre court -\family default -. - Cela va insérer une boîte marquée -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -opt -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (pour -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -optionnel -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir le texte de votre titre court. - Cette méthode fonctionne également pour les légendes à l'intérieur des - flottants. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le titre de cette section montre un bon exemple des l'utilisation de cette - fonction. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Information spéciale -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les informations qui suivent s'appliquent à tous les en-têtes de section - : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -vous ne pouvez pas y faire d'imbrication; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -vous ne pouvez pas utiliser de note en marge dans ces environnements; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -vous pouvez y insérer des math en ligne; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -vous pouvez utiliser les étiquettes et les références croisées pour faire - référence à leur numéro. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour des exemples de ces environnements de paragraphe : regardez autour - de vous ! Nous les utilisons partout dans les manuels. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Citations et poésie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX a trois environnements de paragraphe pour écrire de la poésie et des - citations. - Ce sont -\family sans -Cite -\family default -, -\family sans -Citation -\family default -, et -\family sans -Vers -\family default -. - Oubliez les jours sombres où vous deviez changer l'interligne et vous bagarrer - avec les marges. - Ces trois environnements de paragraphe incorporent ces changements. - Ils élargissent tous trois la marge de gauche et ajoutent un peu d'espace - supplémentaire au-dessus et au-dessous du texte qu'ils contiennent. - Ils permettent aussi l'emboîtement, ainsi vous pouvez mettre un vers ( -\family sans -Vers -\family default -) dans une citation ( -\family sans -Citation -\family default -), tout comme dans certains autres environnements de paragraphe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces trois environnements partagent une autre caractéristique: ils ne reviennent - -\emph on -pas -\emph default - à -\family sans -Standard -\family default - quand vous changez de paragraphe. - Vous pouvez donc écrire un poème et taper joyeusement -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - sans être ennuyé par des changements d'environnement. - Bien sûr, ça veut dire qu'une fois que vous en avez fini avec ce poème, - vous devez revenir vous-même à l'environnement -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Cite -\family default - et -\family sans -Citation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Citation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Citation" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Maintenant que nous avons décrit les similitudes entre ces trois environnements, - il est temps de dire ce qui les distingue. - -\family sans -Cite -\family default - et -\family sans -Citation -\family default - sont identiques sauf pour une chose: -\family sans -Cite -\family default - utilise de l'espace supplémentaire pour séparer les paragraphes et n'indente - jamais la première ligne. - -\family sans -Citation -\family default - indente -\emph on -toujours -\emph default - la première ligne d'un paragraphe et utilise le même interligne tout le - long. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici un exemple d'environnement -\family sans -Cite -\family default - : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Ceci est un environnement -\family sans -Cite -\family default -. - Je peux continuer à écrire, et allonger cette ligne de telle sorte qu'elle - revienne sur la ligne suivante. - Voyez : pas d'indentation ! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Voici le second paragraphe de cette citation. - Encore une fois, il n'y a pas d'indentation, mais il y a un interligne - élargi entre ici et le paragraphe précédent. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici finit notre exemple. - En voici un autre, cette fois avec l'environnement -\family sans -Citation -\family default - : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -C'est un environnement -\family sans -Citation -\family default -. - Si je continue à écrire, vous verrez l'indentation. - Si dans votre pays on utilise un style qui met en évidence un nouveau paragraph -e en indentant la première ligne, alors c'est l'environnement qu'il vous - faut ! En fait, vous ne devriez l'utiliser que si vous citez un texte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Voici un nouveau paragraphe. - Je pourrais continuer mon verbiage, comme un politicien en période d'élection. - Mais ça vous ennuierait sans doute. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -C'était notre deuxième exemple. - Comme le montrent les exemples, -\family sans -Cite -\family default - est fait pour ceux qui séparent les paragraphes avec un interligne supplémentai -re, et qui devraient utiliser -\family sans -Cite -\family default - pour leurs citations. - Ceux qui utilisent l'indentation pour la séparation des paragraphes devraient - citer avec -\family sans -Citation -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Vers -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Poésie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraphe ! Vers -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Vers" - -\end_inset - -Vers -\family default - est un environnement de paragraphe pour la poésie, les rimes, les vers... - Voici un exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -C'est un vers -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Que je n'ai pas écrit à l'envers ! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Ça pourrait être bien pire. - La ligne pourrait être longue, très longue, tellement longue, si longue - qu'elle déborde sur la ligne suivante. - Ça semble correct sur l'écran, mais dans la version imprimée, les lignes - supplémentaires sont un peu plus indentées que la première. - D'accord, c'est devenu de la prose et ça ne rime plus. - Je plaide coupable. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Pour retourner à la ligne -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Et avoir un texte digne -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -NdT : Désolé. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Utilisez -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme vous le voyez, -\family sans -Vers -\family default - n'indente pas les deux marges. - Chaque strophe d'un poème est dans son propre paragraphe. - Pour séparer les vers, utilisez la fonction -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default -, -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Listes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Env-par-listes" - -\end_inset - -LyX a quatre environnements de paragraphe pour créer différentes sortes - de listes. - Dans les environnements -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default - et -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -, LyX marque les éléments de votre liste avec respectivement des puces ou - des numéros. - Dans les environnements -\family sans -Description -\family default - et -\family sans -Liste -\family default -, LyX vous laisse utiliser votre propre marqueur. - Nous allons présenter les détails de chaque type de liste après avoir décrit - les principes généraux qui s'appliquent à tous. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Principes généraux -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les quatre environnements de paragraphe pour les listes diffèrent des autres - environnements sur plusieurs points. - Premièrement, LyX traite chaque paragraphe comme un élément de la liste. - Taper -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - ne réinitialise -\emph on -pas -\emph default - l'environnement à -\family sans -Standard -\family default - mais conserve l'environnement actuel et crée un nouvel élément de liste. - La profondeur d'emboîtement est de ce fait conservée. - Si vous voulez conserver l'environnement de paragraphe mais réinitialiser - la profondeur d'emboîtement courante, vous pouvez utiliser -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -. - Si vus faites ceci au premier niveau d'une liste, vous revenez à l'environnemen -t -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez emboîter des listes de tout type l'une dans l'autre. - En fait, LyX change les marqueurs de certains éléments selon l'imbrication. - Si vous comptez vous servir de l'un des environnements de liste, nous vous - conseillons de lire aussi toute la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -ListePuces -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes ! ListePuces -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:ListePuces" - -\end_inset - -Le premier type de liste que nous allons décrire en détail est l'environnement - -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -. - Il a les propriétés suivantes : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -chaque élément a une puce ou un symbole particulier comme marqueur; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -LyX utilise le même symbole pour tous les éléments à un niveau de profondeur - donné. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -le symbole apparaît au début de la ligne; -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -les éléments peuvent être de n'importe quelle longueur. - LyX décale automatiquement la marge de gauche de chaque élément. - Le décalage est toujours relatif à l'environnement dans lequel la liste - -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default - peut se trouver; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -si vous emboîtez un environnement -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default - dans un autre environnement -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -, le marqueur change; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -il y a quatre symboles différents pour gérer jusqu'à quatre niveaux d'emboîtemen -t. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -voyez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" - -\end_inset - - pour des explications détaillées sur l'emboîtement. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Bien sûr, ces explications étaient aussi un exemple de liste -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -. - Cet environnement est bien adapté aux listes dans lesquels l'ordre n'importe - pas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous avons dit que des niveaux différents utilisent comme marqueurs des - symboles différents. - Voici un exemple des quatre marqueurs possibles: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -le marqueur pour le premier niveau de -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default - est un gros point noir, ou puce -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -NdT: C'est toujours un point noir qui apparaît à l'écran, mais le résultat - imprimé peut différer en fonction de la langue du document, comme c'est - le cas en français. - Il en va de même pour les marqueurs des autres niveaux. - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -pour le deuxième niveau, c'est un tiret, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -pour le troisième, un astérisque, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -pour le quatrième, c'est un point centré, -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -retour au troisième niveau, -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -au deuxième, -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -au plus extérieur. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce sont les marqueurs implicites pour une -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -. - Vous pouvez personnaliser comme ces marqueurs -\lang english -are displayed in the output -\lang french -dans la fenêtre -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default -, dans le sous-menu -\family sans -Puces -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez comme l'espace entre les éléments décroît lorsque la profondeur augmente. - Nous expliquerons l'emboîtement et tout ce que vous pouvez faire avec plusieurs - profondeurs dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Énumération -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes ! Énumération -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Enumeration" - -\end_inset - -L'environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - est un outil qui sert à créer des listes ordonnées et des plans. - Il a les propriétés suivantes : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -chaque élément est marqué par un numéro; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -le type de numéro dépend de la profondeur d'imbrication, -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -LyX compte les éléments à votre place et met à jour les marqueurs quand - c'est nécessaire; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -chaque nouvel environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - remet le compteur à un; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -comme -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -, l'environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - : -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -décale les éléments par rapport à la marge de gauche. - Les éléments peuvent avoir n'importe quelle longueur, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -réduit l'espace entre les éléments quand la profondeur d'emboîtement augmente, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -utilise différents types de marqueurs selon la profondeur d'emboîtement, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -vous permet jusqu'à quatre niveaux d'emboîtement. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - affiche des marqueurs différents pour chaque élément. - Voici comment LyX marque les quatre niveaux d'une énumération : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -le premier niveau d'une énumération utilise des chiffres arabes suivis par - un point; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -le deuxième niveau, des lettres minuscules entre parenthèses, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -le troisième, des chiffres romains en minuscules suivis par un point, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -le quatrième, des lettres majuscules suivies par un point, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -encore une fois, remarquez la diminution de l'interligne quand on avance - dans l'imbrication, -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -retour au troisième niveau, -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -au deuxième, -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -au plus extérieur. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez personnaliser le type de numérotation utilisé par l'environnement - -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Listes-personnalisées" - -\end_inset - -. - Une telle personnalisation n'est visible que sur la version imprimée, pas - sur l'écran de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a encore des choses à dire sur l'emboîtement d'énumérations. - Vous devriez -\emph on -vraiment -\emph default - aller lire la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" - -\end_inset - - pour en savoir plus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Description -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes ! Description -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Contrairement aux deux environnements précédents, la liste de type -\family sans -Description, -\family default -n'a pas de marqueur fixé, à la place LyX utilise le premier -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -mot -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - de la première ligne comme marqueur. - Voici un exemple: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Exemple: C'est un exemple d'environnement -\family sans -Description -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX typographie le marqueur en gras et le sépare du reste de la ligne par - de l'espace. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous vous demandez sans doute ce que veut dire -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -utilise le premier mot -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - La touche -\family sans -Espace -\family default - n'ajoute pas un caractère espace, mais sépare les mots les uns des autres. - Au sein d'un environnement de -\family sans -Description -\family default -, la touche -\family sans -Espace -\family default - utilisée au début de la première ligne d'un élément, dit à LyX de quitter - le marqueur et de commencer le texte de la description . -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comment faire si vous avez besoin de plus d'un mot dans le marqueur d'un - environnement de -\family sans -Description -\family default - ? C'est simple : utilisez une -\family sans -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Insécable -\family default -. - (Soit avec -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - - soit avec -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -insécable -\family default -. - Voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espace-Insécable" - -\end_inset - - pour plus d'informations.). - En voici un exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Second -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -exemple: qui montre comment mettre une -\family sans -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Insécable -\family default - dans le marqueur d'une liste de -\family sans -Description -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Emploi: vous devriez employer l'environnement -\family sans -Description -\family default - pour des définitions ou des théorèmes. - Utilisez-le quand vous voulez qu'un mot donné ressorte dans un texte qui - le définit. - Ce n'est pas une bonne idée de s'en servir quand vous voulez parler d'une - phrase complète. - Vous ferez mieux de prendre un environnement -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default - ou -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - et d'y emboîter plusieurs paragraphes -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Emboîtement: vous pouvez bien sûr emboîter des environnements de -\family sans -Description -\family default - les uns dans les autres, les emboîter dans d'autres types de listes, et - ainsi de suite. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez qu'après la première ligne, LyX indente les lignes suivantes en les - décalant vers la droite. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Étiquetage -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes ! -\family sans -Étiquetage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'environnement -\family sans -Étiquetage -\family default - est une extension LyX de LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme l'environnement -\family sans -Description -\family default -, l'environnement -\family sans -Étiquetage -\family default - a des marqueurs définis par l'utilisateur pour chaque élément. - Il y a quelques différences fondamentales entre cet environnement de liste - et les trois autres : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -marqueurs -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'élément LyX utilise le premier -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -mot -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - de chaque ligne comme marqueur d'élément. - Si vous voulez plus d'un mot comme marqueur, séparez-les avec une -\family sans -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -insécable -\family default - comme décrit plus haut. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -marges Comme vous le voyez, LyX définit des marges différentes pour le marqueur - et pour le corps de l'élément. - Le corps du texte a une marge de gauche plus importante, égale à la largeur - implicite du marqueur plus un peu d'espace supplémentaire. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -largeur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'étiquette LyX compare la largeur effective du marqueur et la largeur implicite -, et prend en compte la plus grande des deux valeurs. - Si la largeur effective est plus grande, alors le marqueur déborde sur - la première ligne. - En d'autres termes, le texte de la première ligne n'est pas aligné à gauche - avec le reste du texte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -largeur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -implicite Vous pouvez la modifier très facilement. - Vous pouvez ainsi vous assurer sans dommage que le texte de tous les éléments - d'un environnement -\family sans -Étiquetage -\family default - partage la même marge de gauche. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Pour changer la largeur implicite, sélectionnez tous les éléments de la - liste. - Ensuite ouvrez le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paragraphe -\family default -(bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -) -\family sans -, -\family default -dans la rubrique -\family sans -Largeur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'étiquette -\family default - le texte dans la case -\family sans -Étiquette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -plus -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -longue -\family default - donne la taille implicite du marqueur. - Vous pouvez utiliser le texte de votre plus long marqueur, mais vous pouvez - aussi utiliser la lettre -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -M -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - tapée plusieurs fois à la place. - Le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -M -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est la lettre la plus large et est utilisée par LaTeX comme une unité de - largeur. - En utilisant -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -M -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - comme unité de largeur, vous n'avez pas besoin de modifier le contenu du - champ -\family sans -Étiquette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -plus -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -longue -\family default - à chaque fois que vous modifiez un marqueur dans un environnement Liste. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -La largeur implicitement prédéfinie dans LyX est la longueur de la chaîne - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -00.00.0000 -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, égale à 6 M. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Utilisez l'environnement -\family sans -Étiquetage -\family default - pour la même chose que l'environnement -\family sans -Description -\family default -: lorsque vous devez faire ressortir un mot du texte qui sert à l'expliciter. - L'environnement -\family sans -Étiquetage -\family default - vous donne un autre moyen de le faire, avec une apparence finale différente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez bien sûr emboîter des environnements -\family sans -Étiquetage -\family default - les uns dans les autres, les emboîter dans d'autres types de listes, et - ainsi de suite. - Ils fonctionnent de la même manière que les autres environnements de liste. - Lisez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" - -\end_inset - - à ce sujet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a encore un trait de l'environnement -\family sans -Étiquetage -\family default - dont nous devons vous entretenir. - Comme vous le voyez dans les exemples, LyX justifie à gauche implicitement - les marqueurs d'élément. - Vous pouvez insérer des -\family sans -Ressorts -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontaux -\family default - pour changer le positionnement du marqueur. - Nous traitons les -\family sans -Ressorts -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontaux -\family default - plus loin dans la Section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" - -\end_inset - -. - Voici quelques exemples : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -Gauche La valeur implicite pour les marqueurs d'élément de -\family sans -Étiquetage -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Droite Un -\family sans -Ressort -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal -\family default - au début du marqueur le justifie à droite. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Centre -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - Un -\family sans -Ressort -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal -\family default - au début du marqueur et un à la fin le centrent. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Listes personnalisées -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Listes-personnalisées" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes ! Personnalisée -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour utiliser les fonctionnalités décrites dans ce paragraphe, vous devez - activer le module -\family sans -Liste personnalisable (enumitem) -\family default -dans les paramètres du document. - Ceci active le paquetage -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Énumérations personnalisées -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes ! Énumération ! Personnalisée -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -La numérotation implicite des listes numérotées peut être modifiée en ajoutant - un argument optionnel (menu -\family sans -Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Titre court -\family default -) au premier élément de chaque niveau de la liste. - Vous ajoutez alors la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -roman{enumi} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -en code TeX (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pour en savoir plus sur le code TeX, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Code-TeX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\emph on - enumi -\emph default - est ici le compteur pour le premier niveau. - La commande -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default - produit des numéraux romains minuscules. - Pour obtenir des caractères numéraux romains en capitales, il faut la remplacer - par la commande -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman -\series default -. - Pour des caractères arabes, utiliser -\series bold - -\backslash -arabic -\series default -. - Pour -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -numéroter -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - avec des caractères latins alphabétiques en capitales ou en bas de casse, - utiliser respectivement -\series bold - -\backslash -Alph -\series default - or -\series bold - -\backslash -alph -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - vous ne pouvez numéroter que 26 éléments avec des caractères alphabétiques - parce que ce mode de numérotation est restreint à des lettres isolées. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour modifier la numérotation pour les sous-niveaux de liste, remplacer - le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -i -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans la commande par le caractère romain numéral du niveau (enumi, enumii, - enumiii, enumiv). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici un exemple de liste avec une numérotation personnalisée: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -niveau 1; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -niveau 2, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -niveau 2, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -niveau 3, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -niveau 4. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Pour cette liste, les commandes suivantes ont été employées: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -où la commande -\series bold - -\backslash -emph{} -\series default - met la marque en évidence et la commande -\series bold - -\backslash -bf{} -\series default - la met en gras. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - quand vous modifiez la marque de niveau d'une liste, la modification s'applique - à toutes les occurrences de ce niveau, tant que vous ne la re-modifiez - pas (NdT: ce serait une pratique typographique discutable). -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Reprise des énumérations -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes ! Énumération ! Reprise -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les énumérations peuvent être reprises après des paragraphes intermédiaires: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -arabic{enumi}. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -premier; -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -retour à la numérotation implicite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -second; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Texte normal -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume -reprise. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour reprendre une énumération, utiliser le style -\family sans -Énumeration-reprise -\family default -. - Sa numérotation apparaît en bleu dans LyX pour indiquer qu'il s'agit d'une - reprise de liste et que la numérotation n'est pas correcte dans la fenêtre - LyX, mais qu'elle le sera dans la sortie. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - s'il n'y a pas d'énumération à reprendre, vous obtiendrez une erreur LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous voudrez peut-être reprendre la numérotation avec une numéro différent - de l'ordre naturel, ou bien vous voudrez repartir avec une nouvelle énumération - normale avec un marqueur défini. - Ceci est possible an ajoutant un argument optionnel au premier élément - de la nouvelle énumération; insérez la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -start=nombre -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -où -\emph on -nombre -\emph default - est la valeur que vous désirez à la reprise. - Un exemple: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -premier élément; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -second élément -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Énumération reprenant à une valeur donnée: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -start=4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -cette énumération commence à 4. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Espacement de liste -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes!Espacement -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans certains cas, vous voudrez obtenir un espacement vertical plus ou moins - grand entre les éléments d'une liste. - Par exemple, l'espacement est trop grand à votre avis dans ce cas: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -une liste à puces; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -avec un espacement standard. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez faire diminuer cet espacement en ajoutant un argument optionnel - au premier élément de la liste. - Ici, ajoutez la commande -\series bold -nolistsep -\series default - pour supprimer l'espacement additionnel comme dans cet exemple: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -nolistsep -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -une liste à puces; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -sans espacement vertical; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -additionnel. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour augmenter l'espacement, vous pouvez employer plusieurs commandes disponible -s avec le paquetage -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Pour en savoir plus, voyez la documentation, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a également de nombreuses commandes pour modifier l'espacement horizontal - et les retraits. - Voici un exemple dans lequel le retrait a été réglé à celui des paragraphes - du document et la séparation de marqueur à 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm pour que le marqueur apparaisse dans la marge: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent= -\backslash -parindent, labelsep=2cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -une énumération; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -avec retrait négatif. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Autre personnalisation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listes!Description!Personnalisée -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez également personnaliser les descriptions. - La commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font= -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -modifie la police de l'étiquette de la description, la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -style= -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -positionne le style de la liste. - Voici un exemple, où la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -est utilisée: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ionizing -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -radiation: -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that - are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore - ionizing them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Reference -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing - the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an - object, block of memory, disk space or other resource. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a beaucoup d'autres commandes et fonctionnalités présentes dans la - paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Voyez la documentation -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - - pour les détails. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Lettres -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lettres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Le paragraphe qui suit est traduit de l'anglais et est fondé sur les propriétés - de la classe -\family typewriter -letter -\family default -. - La classe -\family typewriter -lettre, -\family default - qui respecte la typographie usuelle des lettres en français, a un menu - des styles qui diffère de celui de la classe -\family typewriter -letter -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - et -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default - : résumé -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bien que LyX ait des classes de document pour les lettres, nous avons aussi - créé deux environnements de paragraphe appelés -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - et -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default -. - Pour utiliser la classe lettre, vous devez mettre les environnements de - paragraphe requis dans un ordre précis, sinon LaTeX s'étouffera avec le - document. - En revanche, vous pouvez utiliser les environnements de paragraphe -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - et -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default - à n'importe quel endroit sans problème. - Vous pouvez même les emboîter dans d'autres environnements, mais vous ne - pouvez pas y emboîter quoi que ce soit. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Bien sûr, vous n'êtes pas limités à utiliser -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - et -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default - pour des lettres. - -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default -, en particulier, peut être utile pour créer des titres d'article comme - ceux de certaines publications de recherche européennes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Emploi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Emploi-adresse" - -\end_inset - -L'environnement -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - met le texte en forme comme une adresse, style aussi utilisé pour l'ouverture - d'une lettre et la signature dans certains pays. - De même, l'environnement -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default - met le texte en forme comme une adresse justifiée à droite, ce qui est - utilisé pour l'adresse de l'expéditeur et la date du jour dans certains - pays. - En voici un exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Address -Mon_adresse -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Qui je suis -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Où je suis -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Quel jour sommes-nous ? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -C'était -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default -. - Notez que les lignes ont toutes la marge à gauche, que LyX règle de manière - à faire tenir le plus grand bloc de texte sur une seule ligne. - Voici un exemple d'environnement -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Qui vous êtes -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Où je vous l'envoie -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Votre code postal et votre pays -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme vous le voyez, à la fois -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - et -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default - ajoutent de l'espace supplémentaire entre eux et le paragraphe suivant. - En parlant de ça, si vous tapez -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - dans l'un de ces environnements, LyX réinitialisera la profondeur d'imbrication - et remettra l'environnement à -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - Ceci est logique, cependant, puisque -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - est la fonction -\family typewriter -break-paragraph -\family default -, et les lignes d'une adresse, prises isolément, ne sont pas des paragraphes. - Ainsi, vous vous servirez de -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - ou -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Passage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\family default -) pour commencer une nouvelle ligne dans l'environnement -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - ou -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Documents de recherche -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans la recherche, la plupart des publications commencent par un résumé - et se terminent par une bibliographie ou une liste de références. - LyX contient les environnements de paragraphe correspondants. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Résumé -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Résumé -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Abstract|see -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Résumé -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'environnement -\family sans -Résumé -\family default - ( -\emph on -abstract -\emph default - en anglais) sert à insérer le résumé d'un article. - Techniquement, vous -\emph on -pouvez -\emph default - utiliser cet environnement n'importe où, mais il est -\emph on -vraiment -\emph default - préférable de l'insérer au début du document, après le titre. - Également, ne vous embêtez pas à essayer d'emboîter un -\family sans -Résumé -\family default - dans quoi que ce soit d'autre ou l'inverse. - Ça ne marchera pas. - L'environnement -\family sans -Résumé -\family default - n'est utile que dans les classes de document -\family sans -article -\family default - et -\family sans -report -\family default - (ainsi que -\family sans -amsart -\family default -, qui n'est autre qu'une version spécialisée de -\family sans -article -\family default -). - La classe de document -\family sans -book -\family default - ignore complètement la présence du -\family sans - Résumé -\family default -, et ça n'aurait pas grand sens de mettre un -\family sans -Résumé -\family default - avec la classe -\family sans -lettre -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'environnement -\family sans -Résumé -\family default - fait plusieurs choses pour vous. - D'abord, il écrit l'en-tête -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Résumé -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, centré au-dessus du texte. - L'en-tête et le texte du résumé sont séparés par une interligne agrandie. - Ensuite, il typographie le tout dans une police plus petite, comme il est - d'usage. - En dernier lieu, il élargit un peu l'intervalle vertical entre le résumé - et le texte qui suit. - Voilà comment le document apparaîtra dans la fenêtre LyX. - Si votre document est de la classe -\family sans -report -\family default -, à l'impression le résumé occupera une page séparée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Commencer un nouveau paragraphe en tapant -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - -\emph on -laisse -\emph default - le paragraphe dans l'environnement -\family sans -Résumé -\family default -. - Vous devrez donc changer l'environnement vous-même quand vous aurez fini - d'entrer le résumé de votre document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Paragraphe-dans-l'environnement" - -\end_inset - -Paragraphe dans l'environnement -\family sans -Résumé -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous aimerions vous donner un exemple de cet environnement, mais nous ne - le pouvons pas directement, car ce document est de la classe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -book -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Nous avons dû nous contenter de l'illustrer sous forme de la figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Paragraphe-dans-l'environnement" - -\end_inset - - . - Si vous n'avez jamais entendu le mot -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -résumé -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - auparavant, vous pouvez sans danger ignorer cet environnement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -Bibliographie -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliographie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Environnement-biblio" - -\end_inset - -L'environnement -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default - sert à faire la liste des références. - Techniquement, vous -\emph on -pouvez -\emph default - utiliser cet environnement n'importe où, mais il est -\emph on -vraiment -\emph default - préférable de l'insérer à la fin du document. - Également, ne vous embêtez pas à essayer d'emboîter -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default - dans quoi que ce soit d'autre ou l'inverse. - Ça ne marchera pas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand vous ouvrez pour la première fois un environnement -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default -, LyX ajoute un large espacement vertical, suivi par l'en-tête -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Bibliographie -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Références -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, selon la classe de document. - L'en-tête est dans une grande police grasse. - Chaque paragraphe de l'environnement -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default - est une entrée de bibliographie. - Donc, taper -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - -\emph on -laisse -\emph default - le paragraphe dans l'environnement -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a une autre méthode, souvent meilleure, pour inclure des références - dans votre document, c'est d'utiliser une base de données BibTeX. - Pour une description détaillée de la façon dont LyX gère les bibliographies, - voyez la section -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliographie" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection - -\family sans -LyX-Code -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LyX-Code" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraphe ! LyX-Code -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'environnement -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default - est une autre extension LyX de LaTeX. - Il typographie le texte dans le style à chasse fixe. - Il traite aussi la touche -\family sans -Espace -\family default - comme une espace de taille fixe -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dans l'environnement -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default -, la touche -\family sans -Espace -\family default - est traitée comme une -\family sans -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Insécable -\family default - au lieu d'un marqueur de fin de mot. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - ; c'est le seul cas où vous pouvez taper des espaces consécutives dans - LyX. - Si vous avez besoin d'insérer des lignes vides, vous devrez encore utiliser - -\family sans -Ctrl-Entrée -\family default - (la fonction -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default -). - -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - sépare les paragraphes. - Notez cependant que -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - ne réinitialise pas l'environnement à -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - Donc, quand vous avez fini d'utiliser l'environnement -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default -, vous devez changer d'environnement vous-même. - D'autre part, vous -\emph on -pouvez -\emph default - emboîter l'environnement -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default - dans d'autres environnements. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici quelques subtilités de cet environnement : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -vous ne pouvez pas utiliser -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - au début d'un nouveau paragraphe (c'est-à-dire faire suivre un -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - d'un -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -vous ne pouvez pas faire suivre -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - d'une -\family sans -Espace; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -utilisez -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - pour commencer un nouveau paragraphe, vous pourrez alors utiliser une -\family sans -Espace, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ou utilisez -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - - à la place, -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -vous ne pouvez pas avoir un paragraphe vide ou une ligne vide. - Vous devez mettre au moins une -\family sans -Espace -\family default - dans toute ligne que vous voulez voir vide. - Autrement, LaTeX générera des messages d'erreur; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -vous ne pouvez pas obtenir les guillemets doubles de machine à écrire en - tapant -\family typewriter -" -\family default - puisque cela insérera de -\emph on -vrais -\emph default - guillemets. - Vous pouvez obtenir les guillemets doubles de machine à écrire avec -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "self-insert \"" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici un exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -#include -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -int main(void) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -{ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - printf("Hello World -\backslash -n"); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - return 0; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce n'est rien d'autre que le programme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Hello world ! -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - standard. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default - a un but : typographier du code, comme des sources de programme, des scripts - shell, des fichiers de configuration rc, etc. - Ne l'employez que dans ces cas vraiment très spéciaux où vous voulez sortir - du texte comme s'il provenait d'une machine à écrire -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Environnements de Paragraphe |) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Pour typographier des morceaux importants de code de programmation, utilisez - l'insert de listing décrit au chapitre -\emph on -Listings de code source -\emph default - du manuel des -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Emboîter les environnements -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Environnements ! Emboîter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX, considère le texte comme un bloc unifié avec un contexte et des propriétés - données. - Ce qui permet de créer un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -bloc -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - qui hérite des propriétés d'un autre -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -bloc -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Un exemple : les listes. - Vous avez trois éléments principaux, mais le point n°2 a deux sous-éléments. - Vous avez donc une liste -\emph on -dans -\emph default - une autre liste, avec la liste secondaire -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -attachée -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - à l'élément n°2 : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -un; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -deux; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -sous-élément n°1, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -sous-élément n°2, -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -trois. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comment mettre une liste dans une liste ? Désormais la réponse devrait vous - paraître évidente : vous les emboîtez l'une dans l'autre. - C'est assez simple d'emboîter un environnement. - Faites -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Augmenter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -profondeur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -liste -\family default - ou -\family sans -Réduire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -profondeur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -liste -\family default - pour changer la profondeur d'emboîtement du paragraphe courant (la barre - d'état vous dira à quel niveau d'emboîtement vous vous situez). - A la place du menu, vous pouvez utiliser les boutons de la barre d'outils - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - -\end_inset - - ou les raccourcis clavier bien pratiques -\family sans -Tab -\family default - et -\family sans -Shift+Tab -\family default - ou -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - -\family sans - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ou -\family sans -Alt-p -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Gauche -\family default - et -\family sans -Alt-p -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Droite -\family default -, si vous préférez. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - pour changer la profondeur d'emboîtement. - Ce changement concernera la sélection courante s'il y en a une (ce qui - vous permet de changer le niveau d'emboîtement de plusieurs paragraphes - à la fois), ou le paragraphe courant. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que LyX ne change la profondeur d'environnement que si c'est possible. - Quand vous essayez rien ne se produit si cette opération n'est pas permise. - En outre, si vous changez la profondeur d'un paragraphe, le changement - affecte tous les paragraphes emboîtés dedans. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mais l'emboîtement n'est pas limité aux listes. - Avec LyX, vous pouvez emboîter à peu près tout dans n'importe quoi, comme - vous allez le voir. - C'est pourquoi les environnements emboîtés sont un outil puissant. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ce que vous pouvez et ce que vous ne pouvez pas emboîter -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ce que vous pouvez emboîter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avant de vous lancer à la figure une liste d'environnements de paragraphe, - nous devons vous expliquer un peu plus comme marche l'emboîtement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -À la question de savoir s'il est possible d'emboîter un environnement de - paragraphe, la réponse est un peu plus compliquée qu'un simple oui ou non, - vous pouvez ou vous ne pouvez pas. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les environnements de paragraphe de LyX peuvent avoir trois comportements - relativement à l'emboîtement : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -pas emboîtable du tout; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -complètement emboîtable, vous pouvez les emboîter dans autre chose et vous - pouvez y emboîter autre chose; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -un dernier type d'environnement, que vous pouvez emboîter dans d'autres - environnements, mais dans lesquels vous ne pouvez rien emboîter. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici une liste des environnements avec ces trois comportements -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pour une raison inconnue, LyX vous permet d'emboîter dans les deux sens - à la fois -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default - et -\family sans -Abstract -\family default -. - LyX vous permet aussi d'emboîter -\family sans -Titre -\family default -, -\family sans -Auteur -\family default - et -\family sans -Date -\family default - dans d'autres environnements. - Nous vous recommandons de ne pas le faire. - LaTeX pourrait s'en offusquer. - Même si ce n'était pas le cas, ça n'a aucun sens d'emboîter ces environnements, - alors pourquoi essayer ? -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Non -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -emboîtable on ne peut pas les emboîter, ni y emboîter quoi que ce soit. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Bibliographie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Abstract -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Titre -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Auteur -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Date -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -Complètement -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -emboîtables vous pouvez les emboîter et y emboîter. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Vers -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Cite -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Citation -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -ListePuces -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Énumération -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Description -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Liste -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -LyX-Code -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -Emboîtables -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -quelque -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -chose vous pouvez les emboîter dans autre chose, mais ne pouvez rien y emboîter. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Standard -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Partie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Chapitre -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Section -\family default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -SousSection -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -SousSousSection -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Paragraphe -\family default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -SousParagraphe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Partie* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Chapitre* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Section* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -SousSection* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -SousSousSection* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - bien qu'il soit possible d'emboîter des en-têtes de sections comme -\family sans -Chapitre -\family default -, -\family sans -Section -\family default -, etc. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dans des listes, par exemple, il est fortement recommandé de ne pas le faire. - La raison est que l'objectif est de créer des documents bien structurés - qui suivent les règles classiques de typographie, et emboîter les en-têtes - de section viole ces règles. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Emboîter d'autres objets : tableaux, math, flottants, etc. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Emboîtements ! Tableaux, maths etc... -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a plusieurs objets qui ne sont pas des environnements de paragraphe, - mais qui sont quand même concernés par l'emboîtement. - Ce sont : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -les équations; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -les tableaux; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -les figures. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -( -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note : -\series default - Les figures et tableaux placés dans -\family sans -des Flottants -\family default -ne sont pas concernés. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Voir plus bas ou dans les sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Figures-Flottantes" - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Flottant-de-tableau" - -\end_inset - - pour plus d'informations sur les -\family sans -Flottants -\family default -.) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX peut considérer ces trois objets soit comme un mot soit comme un paragraphe. - Certes, vous ne pouvez pas insérer un tableau en ligne, mais vous pouvez - le faire avec les math et les figures. - Si une figure ou une équation est en ligne, elle suit le paragraphe qui - la contient. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Inversement, si vous avez une équation, une figure ou un tableau dans un - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -paragraphe -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - à lui, il se comporte comme un environnement de paragraphe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -emboîtable dans quelque chose -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Vous pouvez l'emboîter dans un autre environnement, mais vous ne pouvez - évidemment rien y emboîter. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici un exemple avec un tableau : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Élément Un -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -C'est le (a) et il est emboîté, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -C'est le (b). - Le tableau est emboîté dans le (a). -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -On ressort. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si nous n'avions pas du tout emboîté le tableau, la liste serait ainsi : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Élément Un -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -C'est le (a) et il est emboîté. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -C'est le (b). - Le tableau n'est -\emph on -pas -\emph default - emboîté dans le (a). - En fait, il n'est pas emboîté du tout. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -On ressort. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que l'élément (b) n'est non seulement plus emboîté, mais qu'il est - aussi le premier élément d'une liste ! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a un autre piège dans lequel vous pouvez tomber : emboîter le tableau, - mais ne pas aller assez profond. - LyX commence un nouvelle (sous-)liste après le tableau. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Élément Un -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -C'est le (a) et il est emboîté. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -a -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -c -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -d -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -C'est le (b). - Le tableau est en fait emboîté dans l'élément Un, mais -\emph on -pas -\emph default - dans le (a). -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -On ressort. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme vous pouvez le voir, l'élément (b) est devenu le premier élément d'une - nouvelle liste, mais d'une liste -\emph on -dans -\emph default - l'élément 1. - La même chose se serait produite avec une figure ou une équation. - Si vous emboîtez des tableaux, des figures ou des équations, assurez-vous - donc de les mettre à la bonne profondeur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Emploi et propriétés générales -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX peut réaliser un emboîtement jusqu'à six niveaux. - Le niveau n°6 est le plus élevé possible. - Voici un exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -niveau n°1 - le plus extérieur -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -niveau n°2 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -niveau n°3 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -niveau n°4 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -niveau n°5 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -niveau n°6 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Là encore, LyX gère un maximum de 6 niveaux, quels que soient les environnements - de paragraphe utilisés à un niveau donné -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Malheureusement, LyX ne fait pas respecter cette limitation. - Si vous essayez de la dépasser, LaTeX renverra des erreurs quand vous voudrez - obtenir le rendu final. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Ça veut dire que vous pouvez emboîter sur six niveaux une liste -\family sans -Description -\family default -, ou un environnement -\family sans -Vers -\family default -, etc. - Vous pouvez aussi mélanger les environnements, comme nous allons le voir. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a deux exceptions à la limite de six niveaux, et les deux sont présentes - dans l'exemple. - Contrairement aux autres environnements complètement emboîtables, vous - ne pouvez obtenir qu'un emboîtement à quatre niveaux avec les environnements - -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - et -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -. - Par exemple, si nous essayions d'emboîter une autre liste -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - dans l'élément -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -A. -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, nous aurions des erreurs -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Là encore, LyX ne fait pas respecter cette limitation. - Si vous tentez de la dépasser, LaTeX renverra des erreurs quand vous voudrez - obtenir le rendu final. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Quelques exemples -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Emboîtements ! Exemples -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le meilleur moyen d'expliquer ce que vous pouvez faire avec l'emboîtement - est de l'illustrer. - Nous avons plusieurs exemples d'environnements emboîtés. - Dans chacun, nous expliquons comment nous avons créé cet exemple, pour - que vous puissiez le reproduire. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Exemple n°1 : six niveaux et emboîtement mixte -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -1-a Niveau le plus extérieur. - C'est un environnement -\family sans -Liste; -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -2-a Niveau n°2. - Nous l'avons obtenu avec -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - suivi de -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMM -3-a Niveau n°3. - Cette fois, nous avons juste fait -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -, puis -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - deux fois de suite. - Nous aurions pu le créer de la même manière que le précédent, avec -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - suivi de -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Un environnement -\family sans -Standard -\family default -, emboîté dans -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -3-a -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Il est donc au niveau n°4. - Nous l'avons obtenu avec -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -, puis -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -, puis en changeant l'environnement de paragraphe à -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - C'est ce qu'il faut faire pour créer des éléments de liste avec plus d'un - paragraphe – ça marche aussi avec les environnements -\family sans -Description -\family default -, -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - et -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default - ! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un autre paragraphe -\family sans -Standard -\family default -, également au niveau n°4, obtenu juste avec -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -4-a Niveau n°4. - Nous avons tapé -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - et remis l'environnement de paragraphe à -\family sans -Liste -\family default -. - Rappelez-vous : on ne peut rien emboîter dans un environnement -\family sans -Standard -\family default -, c'est pourquoi nous sommes encore au niveau n°4. - Mais nous -\emph on -pouvons -\emph default - emboîter des choses dans le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -3-a -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -5-a Niveau n°5... -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -6-a ...et nous voilà au niveau n°6. - Vous devez savoir comment nous les avons obtenus. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -5-b Retour au niveau n°5. - Tapez -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - puis -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -4-b Après un autre -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - suivi de -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -, retour au niveau n°4. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -3-b Retour au niveau n°3. - Les choses vont maintenant de soi. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -2-b Retour au niveau n°2. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -1-b Enfin, retour au niveau le plus extérieur, le n°1. - À la fin de cette phrase, nous allons taper -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - et remettre l'environnement de paragraphe sur -\family sans -Standard -\family default - pour marquer la fin de la liste. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voilà c'est fait ! Nous aurions aussi pu utiliser les environnements -\family sans -Description -\family default -, -\family sans -Cite -\family default -, -\family sans -Citation -\family default - ou même -\family sans -Vers -\family default - à la place de -\family sans -Liste -\family default -. - L'exemple aurait été exactement le même. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Exemple n°2 : Héritage -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -Voici un environnement LyX-Code, au niveau n°1, -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -le plus extérieur. - Nous allons taper -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -, -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -puis -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -, après quoi nous allons passer -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -à l'environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Voici l'environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -, au niveau n°2. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Notez comment l'environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -emboîté hérite non seulement des marges -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -de son environnement parent ( -\family sans -LyX-Code -\family default -), -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -mais aussi de sa police et de son interligne ! -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Nous avons terminé cet exemple en tapant -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -. - Ensuite nous avons remis l'environnement de paragraphe à -\family sans -Standard -\family default -, et réinitialisé la profondeur d'emboîtement avec -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Exemple n°3 : Marqueurs de liste et niveaux dans les environnements Énumération - et ListePuces -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Exemple n°3 : Marqueurs et niveaux dans d'autres Listes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Voici le niveau n°1 d'un environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -. - Nous allons en emboîter un paquet. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Voici le niveau n°2. - Nous avons fait -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - suivi de -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -. - Que se passe-t-il si nous y emboîtons un environnement -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -? Il sera au niveau n°3, mais quel marqueur aura-t-il ? Un astérisque ? -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Non ! C'est une puce. - C'est le -\emph on -premier -\emph default - environnement -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -, même s'il est au niveau n°3. - Son marqueur est donc une puce (NB : nous sommes arrivés ici en tapant - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -, puis -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -, puis en changeant l'environnement à -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -); -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -Voici le niveau n°4, obtenu avec -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -, puis -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -. - Nous allons recommencer... -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -...pour passer au niveau n°5. - Mais cette fois, nous avons aussi remis l'environnement de paragraphe à - -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -. - Notez le type de numérotation ! C'est un -\emph on -chiffre romain en minuscule -\emph default -, car c'est le -\emph on -troisième -\emph default - environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - (c'est-à-dire un -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - dans un -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - dans un -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Que se passe-t-il si nous ne changeons -\emph on -pas -\emph default - l'environnement de paragraphe, mais diminuons la profondeur d'emboîtement - ? Quelle type de numérotation LyX utilise-t-il ? -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Au fait, vous aurez deviné que nous utilisons -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - pour conserver le même environnement et la même profondeur mais créer un - nouvel élément. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Faisons -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - pour diminuer la profondeur après le prochain -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -C'est le niveau n°4. - Voyez quel marqueur utilise LyX ! -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -C'est le niveau n°3. - Même si nous avons changé de niveau, LyX utilise encore un chiffre romain - en minuscule comme marqueur. - Pourquoi ?! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Parce que, même si la profondeur d'emboîtement a changé, le paragraphe est - -\emph on -toujours -\emph default - le troisième environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -. - Notez que LyX a quand même remis le compteur de la numérotation à zéro. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Après un autre -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - suivi de -\family sans -Alt-p -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Gauche -\family default -, nous voilà de retour au niveau n°2. - Cette fois, nous n'avons pas seulement changé la profondeur d'emboîtement, - nous sommes en même temps retournés au deuxième environnement -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -Nous obtenons la même chose avec une autre suite -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - -\family sans - -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - et sommes revenus au niveau n°1, le plus extérieur. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enfin, nous remettons l'environnement à -\family sans -Standard -\family default -. - Comme vous le voyez, ce n'est pas le numéro du niveau qui détermine le - type de marqueur utilisé par LyX dans les environnements -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - et -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -. - C'est le nombre d'autres environnements -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - qui l'entourent qui détermine le type de numérotation dans un élément -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -. - La même règle s'applique aux environnements -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Exemple n°4 : péter les plombs -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Cette fois nous allons devenir complètement fous. - Nous n'allons pas aller aussi profond que dans les autres exemples, ni - n'allons entrer autant dans les détails de l'élaboration (niveau n°1 : - -\family sans -Énumération -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -( -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -, -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -, -\family sans -Standard -\family default - : niveau n°2) Nous allons mettre entre parenthèses la description du processus. - Par exemple, les deux raccourcis clavier montrent comment nous avons changé - la profondeur. - Le nom d'environnement est bien sûr celui de l'environnement actuel. - Nous indiquerons aussi le niveau, avant ou après. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -( -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -, -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - : niveau n°1) C'est l'élément suivant dans la liste. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Verse -Nous ajoutons des vers. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Ça n'arrange pas nos affaires. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -( -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -, -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -, -\family sans -Vers -\family default - : niveau n°2) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -PooPooPiDoo ! -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -Voici un tableau : -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -un poisson -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -deux poissons -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -poisson rouge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -poisson bleu -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Verse -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -, -\family sans -Tableau -\family default -, -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - 3 fois, -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -, -\family sans -Vers -\family default -, -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -( -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -, -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - : niveau n°1) Un autre élément. - Notez que sélectionner un -\family sans -Tableau -\family default - remet la profondeur au niveau n°1, nous avons donc dû augmenter la profondeur - 2 fois pour mettre le tableau dans l'environnement -\family sans -Vers -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Nous en avons terminé avec liste -\family sans -Énumération -\family default - et passons à -\family sans -Citation -\family default -. - Nous sommes toujours au niveau n°1. - Nous voulons vous montrer quelques-unes des choses que vous pouvez faire - en mélangeant les environnements. - Les paragraphes qui suivent constituent une -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -lettre citée -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Nous allons emboîter les environnements -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - et -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default - dans celui-ci, puis utiliser un autre -\family sans -Citation -\family default - emboîté pour le corps de la lettre. - Nous utilisons -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - pour préserver la profondeur. - Rappelez-vous que vous pouvez utiliser -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - pour entrer plusieurs lignes dans les environnement -\family sans -Envoi à l'adresse -\family default - et -\family sans -Mon_Adresse -\family default -. - Les voici : -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Right Address -123, allée de Nulle Part -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -01001 TRIFOUILLIS les Oies -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -01/01/2000 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -Cher M. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Dupont, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Nous sommes au regret de vous annoncer que nous ne pouvons faire suite à - votre commande de 50 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -L de gaz méthane comprimé, en raison de circonstances indépendantes de notre - volonté. - Une de nos vaches ayant explosé pour des raisons inconnues, nous commandes - de méthane ont pris un certain retard. - Nous vous avons placé sur la liste d'attente et vous expédierons votre - commande dès que possible. - Nous vous transmettons toutes nos excuses. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -Nous pouvons vous faire bénéficier de rabais importants sur le bœuf. - Si vous êtes intéressé, veuillez renvoyer le bon de commande ainsi que - le paiement à l'adresse indiquée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -En vous remerciant par avance, -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Tryphon Tournesol -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Quotation -Fin de l'exemple ! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous voyez que l'emboîtement d'environnements vous offre de nombreuses possibili -tés en peu de touches. - Nous aurions facilement pu emboîter une liste -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default - dans un -\family sans -Citation -\family default - ou un -\family sans -Cite -\family default -, ou mettre un -\family sans -Cite -\family default - dans une liste -\family sans -ListePuces -\family default -. - Vous avez une énorme variété d'options à votre disposition. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Espaces, pagination et sauts de lignes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espaces -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un blanc est-il un blanc? Pas si on fait de la bonne typographie. - Alors que vous êtes peut-être habitués à appuyer sur la barre d'espace - à chaque fois que vous voulez séparer deux mots dans un traitement de texte - ordinaire, LyX vous offre toute une variété d'espaces : des espaces de - largeur différentes, sécables ou insécables à la fin des lignes. - Les sections qui suivent vont vous montrer où ces espaces peuvent être - utiles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Espace insécable -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espace-Insécable" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espace ! Insécable -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'espace insécable est utilisé pour indiquer à LyX (et donc à LaTeX) de - ne pas insérer un saut de ligne à cet endroit. - Il peut être utilisé pour éviter les sauts de ligne malencontreux, comme - celui-ci: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -Pour plus de documentation voir dans la section -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliographie" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il semble évident qu'il serait judicieux de mettre une espace insécable - entre -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -section -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliographie" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - On crée une espace insécable grâce au menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espace -\bar under - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\bar default -insécable -\family default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Espacement horizontal -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espace ! Horizontal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Tous les espace horizontaux peuvent être insérés grâce au menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espacement horizontal -\family default -. - Les unités de longueur utilisées sont listées dans l'appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Unités-de-longueur" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Espace inter-mots -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espace-inter-mots" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espace ! Inter-mots -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certaines langues comme l'anglais suivent la convention typographique d'ajouter - un espace supplémentaire après la marque de ponctuation de fin de phrase - et LyX respecte cette règle, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Abbreviations" - -\end_inset - - pour examples. - -\lang english -However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation - followed by a period -\lang french -. - Dans ce cas, on en insère un avec le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -entre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mots -\family default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "space-insert normal" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Espace fine -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espace-Fine" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espace ! Fine -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -espace fine -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est un blanc qui fait la moitié de la taille d'une espace normale (en plus, - elle est aussi insécable). - Les conventions typographiques proposent dans de nombreux langues d'utiliser - des espaces fines quand une espace normale serait trop grande, comme par - exemple dans des abréviations : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -D. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -E. - Knuth a développé notre programme de typographie bien aimé, c. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -d. - TeX -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En principe on écrit c.-à-d., sans espace, mais bon ... - (NdT) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On l'utilise aussi entre une valeur numérique et son unité. - Comparez ces deux exemple : -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -10 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -kg (espace fine) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -10 kg (espace normale) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'espace fine s'insère en passant par le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espace -\bar under - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\bar default -fine -\family default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "space-insert thin" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Encore plus d'espaces -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi insérer les types d'espaces suivants: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fine -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -négative Une ligne avec -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - une espace fine négative entre les flèches. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) Une ligne avec une -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \enskip{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - espace En (0,5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) entre les flèches. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cadratin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) Une ligne avec une -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \quad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - espace cadratin (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) entre les flèches. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -double -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cadratin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) Une ligne avec une -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \qquad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - espace double cadratin (2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) entre les flèches. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -personnalisé Une ligne avec une -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hspace{} -\length 2cm -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - - espace de 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cm entre les flèches. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le tableau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Largeur-des-différents" - -\end_inset - - liste les tailles des différents espacements horizontaux. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Largeur-des-différents" - -\end_inset - -Largeur des différents espacements horizontaux. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -commande -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -largeur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Normal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Insécable -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fine -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espace en -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cadratin (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Double cadratin (2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Négative fine -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout --1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ressorts horizontaux -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacements ! Ressorts horizontaux -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les ressorts horizontaux sont des éléments spéciaux de LyX qui permettent - d'ajouter des espaces supplémentaires de façon uniforme. - Un Ressort est en fait une espace de taille variable, dont la longueur - est toujours égale à l'espace qui reste entre la marge de gauche et la - marge de droite. - S'il y a plus d'un ressort sur une ligne, ils se séparent l'espace restant - de façon égale entre eux. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici quelques exemple de ce que l'on peut faire avec ces ressorts : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Ça, c'est à gauche -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Ça, c'est à droite -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Gauche -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Milieu -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Droite -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -Gauche -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -1/3 Gauche -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -Droite -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -C'était un exemple en utilisant l'environnement -\family sans -. - -\family default -Ici -\begin_inset Formula $\to$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ -\end_inset - -on en a un en plein milieu d'un paragraphe standard. - C'est peut-être visible ou pas dans la version imprimée, mais il est bien - juste entre les deux flèches. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les ressorts horizontaux peuvent être rendus visibles en choisissant un - des -\family sans -Modèles de remplissage -\family default - dans la fenêtre de dialogue Paramètres d'espacement horizontal. - Les modèles suivants sont disponibles: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Points: -\begin_inset space \dotfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Filet: -\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Flèche gauche: -\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Flèche droite: -\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Accolade vers le haut: -\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Accolade vers le bas: -\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - si un ressort se trouve au début d'une ligne qui n'est -\emph on -pas -\emph default - la première ligne d'un paragraphe, LyX l'ignore. - Cela évite que des ressorts se retrouvent reportés accidentellement à la - ligne suivante. - Si vous avez vraiment besoin d'espace dans ce cas, vous devez utiliser - l'option -\family sans -Protégé -\family default - dans la fenêtre de dialogue des espacements horizontaux. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Espace fantôme -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espace-fantôme" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Parfois, vous avez besoin d'insérer un espace qui a exactement la même longueur - qu'une phrase donnée. - Par exemple vous voulez créer cette question à choix multiples: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -Quelle est la tournure anglaise correcte?: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge would have been jumps the gun. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\lang english -Mr. - Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -has to be jumped -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\lang english -Mr. - Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -jumps -\lang french - -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il faut que les choix apparaissent exactement après la phrase -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Pour obtenir cet effet, vous pouvez utiliser les insert fantômes accessibles - par le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fantôme. - -\family default -Dans notre exemple, il faut insérer un fantôme horizontal au début des deux - dernières lignes et insérer -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Mr -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans l'insert fantôme (notez l'espace après -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -). - Un insert fantôme n'imprime que l'espace occupé par son contenu (comme - un espace réservé), c'est pourquoi il est dénommé -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -fantôme -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Le fantôme normal occupe la largeur et la hauteur de son contenu, tandis - que les fantômes horizontal et vertical ne gèrent que la dimension concernée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Espacement vertical -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Espacement-Vertical" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour ajouter un espace supplémentaire au-dessus ou au-dessous d'un paragraphe, - utilisez la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espacement -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical -\family default -. - Vous aurez le choix dans les tailles suivantes : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Petit -\family default -, -\family sans -Moyen -\family default - and -\family sans -Grand -\family default - sont des tailles LaTeX qui dépendent de la taille de fonte du document. - -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - est l'espacement défini dans le dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\lang french - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - pour la séparation des paragraphes. - Si vous utilisez l'indentation pour séparer les paragraphes, alors -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - est égal à -\family sans -Moyen -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Ressort -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espacement ! Ressort vertical -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - est un espace de taille variable qui s'ajuste pour prendre le plus d'espace - possible sur la page. - Un exemple: Vous avez seulement deux paragraphes courts sur une page et - un ressort vertical entre les deux. - Le premier paragraphe sera alors placé tout en haut de la page et le second - tout en bas, de façon à ce que l'espace entre les deux soit maximal. - Le -\family sans -Ressort -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical -\family default - fonctionne comme le -\family sans -Ressort -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal -\family default -: il remplit l'espace vertical restant sur la page avec un espace vide -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Les -\family sans -ressorts -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontaux -\family default - sont décrits dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - S'il y a plusieurs -\family sans -Ressorts -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -verticaux -\family default - sur une page, ils des répartissent l'espace vertical restant en parts égales. - Vous pouvez donc utiliser des ressorts pour centrer du texte sur une page, - ou même pour le placer au 2/3 de la page. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Personnalisé -\family default - permet de donner la taille de l'espacement vertical en utilisant les unités - de longueur définies dans l'appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Unités-de-longueur" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - si l'espace vertical supplémentaire se retrouve à l'impression en haut - ou en bas de page, l'espace n'est réellement ajouté que si vous avez aussi - coché l'option -\family sans -Protégé -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Alignement des paragraphes -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraphe ! Alignement -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez modifier la justification des paragraphes avec la fenêtre de - dialogue -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres de paragraphe -\family default - (bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). - Il y a cinq possibilités: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Justifié -\family default -(raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align block" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -À -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Gauche -\family default -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align left" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -À -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Droite -\family default -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align right" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Centré -\family default -( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align center" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align default" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans la plupart des cas le comportement implicite est l'alignement justifié, - dans lequel l'espace entre les mots est variable et chaque ligne d'un paragraph -e remplit la région située entre la marge de gauche et la marge de droite. - Les trois autre types d'alignements devraient être explicites. - Il ressemblent à ceci: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align right -Ce paragraphe est aligné à droite, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -celui-ci est centré, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align left -et celui-là est aligné à gauche. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Sauts de page forcés -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Sauts-de-Page" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sauts de page -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous n'aimez pas la façon dont LaTeX fait les sauts de pages dans votre - document, vous pouvez forcer un saut de page à l'endroit où vous en voulez - un. - Normalement ce n'est pas nécessaire, vu que LaTeX est plutôt bon pour les - sauts de pages. - Il n'y a que si vous utilisez beaucoup de -\family sans -Flottants -\family default - que son algorithme peut se planter. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous recommandons de ne pas utiliser de sauts de pages forcés avant que - le texte soit fini et donc avant d'avoir vérifié avec le pré-visionnement - pour voir si vous avez -\emph on -vraiment -\emph default - besoin de changer les sauts de pages. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a deux sortes de sauts de page. - Le premier termine la page sans entreprendre d'action spéciale. - Il peut être inséré avant ou après un paragraphe avec le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Saut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page (fer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -haut) -\family default -. - Le second type, qui est inséré avec -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Saut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page (justifié), -\family default - termine la page, mais il étend le contenu de la page pour qu'il remplisse - la totalité de la page. - Ce type est utile pour éviter d'avoir un espace vide quand un saut de page - produit une page où il ne manque que quelques lignes. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pourriez essayer d'utiliser un saut de page pour être sûr qu'une figure - ou un tableau apparaisse bien en haut d'une page. - Bien sûr, ce n'est pas la bonne façon de faire. - LyX vous donne le moyen de vous assurer de façon automatique que vos figures - et vos tableaux apparaissent en haut de page ( ou en bas de page ou encore - sur une page à part ) sans avoir à se préoccuper au sujet de ce qui précède - ou de ce qui suit. - Voyez le chapitre -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Flottants-et-Notes" - -\end_inset - - pour en apprendre plus sur les -\family sans -Flottants -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Saut de page (vide le tampon) -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Saut-de-Page-vide-tampon" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Saut de page ! vide le tampon -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Alors que le saut de page forcé va placer tout ce qui suit l'instruction - de saut sur la page suivante, la mémoire peut aussi être vidée en même - temps que l'on fait le saut de page. - Cela signifie que le paragraphe courant est terminé et que tous les flottants - provenant de parties du document précédant le saut de page et n'auraient - pas encore été traités, sont placés à la suite, en ajoutant une ou plusieurs - pages si nécessaire. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous insérez un tel saut de page avec le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Saut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(vide -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tampon) -\family default -. - Quand vous avez un document imprimé en recto-verso comme un livre, vous - pouvez utiliser le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Saut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -impaire -\family default -qui insère un ou deux sauts de pages, pour assurer que la prochaine page - soit une page de droite, donc de numéro impair. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Saut de ligne forcé -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Saut de ligne -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Saut-de-ligne" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme pour les sauts de page, il y a deux types de sauts de ligne. - Le premier saute simplement à la ligne, on l'insère dans un paragraphe - grâce au menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Passage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\family default - ou avec le raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -. - Le deuxième type de saut de ligne, qui est inséré avec -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Passage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -justifié -\family default - ou avec le raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert linebreak" -\end_inset - - va allonger la ligne d'origine pour qu'elle prenne toute la largeur entre - les deux marges. - Ce type de saut est nécessaire pour éviter des créneaux dans les paragraphes - justifiés à cause des blancs insérés à l'occasion des sauts de lignes. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous ne devriez pas utiliser des sauts de lignes pour corriger ceux de LaTeX, - vu que LaTeX se débrouille plutôt bien avec les sauts de lignes. - En revanche, il y a un certain nombre de situations où il est nécessaire - de forcer des sauts de lignes, comme par exemple dans un poème ou dans - une adresse (voir les sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Citation" - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Vers" - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Emploi-adresse" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Lignes horizontales -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Lignes-Horizontales" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lignes horizontales -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - -A partir du menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ligne -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontale -\family default -vous pouvez insérer des lignes horizontales. - Le décalage est la distance verticale entre la ligne et la base de la ligne - courante dans le texte ou le paragraphe. - Les réglages de la ligne peuvent être modifiés par un clic droit sur la - ligne. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Caractères et symboles -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez entrer directement tous les caractères qui sont disponibles - sur votre clavier. - Vous pouvez aussi utiliser des cartes de clavier spéciales pour pouvoir, - par exemple, saisir des caractères français avec un clavier anglais. - Voir la section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Cartes-de-clavier" - -\end_inset - - pour voir comment ça marche. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans le cas où vous avez besoin d'un caractère qui n'est pas sur votre clavier, - vous pouvez utiliser la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Symboles -\family default - grâce au menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Caractère spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Symboles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - vous ne pourrez peut-être pas afficher tous les caractères que vous insérez - grâce à la fenêtre de dialogue symboles si vous utilisez une police de - caractère d'écran spéciale dans les préférences de LyX. - Mais dans tous les cas les caractères insérés seront imprimés dans la sortie - finale. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Polices et styles de texte -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Polices-et-Styles" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Types de polices -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Polices ! Types -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fontes |see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Polices -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a deux types de polices de caractères -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -On peut parler indifféremment de police ou de fonte de caractères. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -polices -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vectorielles -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Polices ! Vectorielles -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - sont des polices qui sont construites à partir du contour de chaque glyphes - (ou caractère). - Cela signifie que chaque glyphe est défini en utilisant des courbes mathématiqu -es qui vont pouvoir s'adapter quelque soit la taille demandée. - Cette définition mathématique est interprétée par le programme de rendu - et la courbe est remplie avec des pixels pour représenter le glyphe à la - bonne taille. - Cela signifie que ces polices vectorielles auront un très bel aspect quelque - soit la taille demandée. - Il n'y a que pour les très petites tailles qu'il peut être difficile de - conserver un bon rendu, quand chaque pixel doit être calculé soigneusement - pour fournir une bonne image. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -On pourrait croire que l'on se contente de définir une taille de police - qui va pouvoir s'adapter à toutes les situations, mais en fait, pour atteindre - une meilleure qualité de rendu, plusieurs polices définissent plusieurs - tailles. - Cela améliore le rendu final, vu que l'on a besoin de plus de détails pour - une police de grande taille que pour une plus petite. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Les polices de type -\family typewriter -TrueType -\family default -, -\family typewriter -OpenType -\family default -, et -\family typewriter -PostScript Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\family default -sont des polices vectorielles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -polices -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -matricielles -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Polices ! Matricelles -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Polices ! Bitmap |see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Matricielles -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - au contraire, sont définies dès le début par des graphiques matriciels - (bitmaps), ce qui fait qu'il auront un bon aspect dans la taille pour laquelle - ils sont prévus. - Par contre, ils ne s'adaptent pas bien, puisque pour augmenter la taille - du glyphe, la seule solution est de changer la taille des pixels, un pixel - étant remplacé par un petit carré formé de plusieurs pixels. - C'est le même problème que celui qui apparaît quand vous voulez agrandir - une image à l'aide d'un programme de retouche. - Pour contourner ce problème les polices sont fournies en plusieurs tailles - fixées, typiquement de 8 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pixels de haut jusqu'à 34 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pixels ou plus, avec des valeurs intermédiaires pour les tailles les plus - utilisées. - L'avantages des polices matricielles est qu'il n'y a pas de calculs compliqués - pour afficher chaque glyphe, ce qui fait qu'elles sont plus rapides à afficher - que les police vectorielles. - Le réglage implicite est que les tailles qui ne sont pas disponibles doivent - être obtenues en démultipliant les pixels, ce qui donne un mauvais aspect - final. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Les fontes matricielles sont nommées -\family typewriter -PostScript Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\family default - dans les documents PostScript et PDF. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En conclusion, les polices matricielles sont très bonnes pour les tailles - pour lesquelles elles ont été créées, alors que les polices vectorielles - donnent de bons résultats pour quasiment toutes les tailles. - On a donc besoin de moins de définitions différentes avec les polices vectoriel -les, ce qui est la raison qui explique que presque tous les programmes de - typographie ou de rendu de caractères utilisent des polices vectorielles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour voir quelles polices sont utilisées dans un document PDF, vous pouvez - aller voir dans les paramètres du document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Plusieurs programmes modernes de typographie et des langages de descriptions - de pages à balises on commencé à se mettre à spécifier le style des caractères - plutôt que des préciser une police précise. - Par exemple, plutôt que d'avoir à choisir une version italique de la police - courante, vous allez utiliser du -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -texte mis en évidence -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - à la place. - Ce concept convient parfaitement à la philosophie de LyX où vous faites - les choses à partir de contextes plutôt que de vous focaliser sur les détails - typographiques. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Gestion des polices de caractères par LaTeX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -D'habitude, LaTeX utilise ses propres polices de caractères. - C'est-à-dire que vous ne pouvez pas accéder directement aux polices qui - sont installées sur votre système d'exploitation et que vous devez utiliser - les polices spécifiques fournies par votre distribution LaTeX. - La raison est que LaTeX a besoin d'information supplémentaire sur les polices - qui sont fournies par des fichiers ou des paquetages additionnels. - Le principal inconvénient est que le choix de police est limité, comparé - à celui proposé par les traitements de textes classiques. - D'un autre côté, on a l'avantage que les polices fournies sont généralement - de très bonne qualité et que les fichiers LaTeX sont très facilement portables - d'une machine à l'autre. - De plus, le nombre de polices acceptées par le LaTeX traditionnel a augmenté - de façon importante ce qui fait que vous pouvez trouver des paquetages - pour plusieurs polices libres et commerciales. - Du côté de LyX, seule une partie de ces dernières est directement accessible - grâce à l'interface utilisateur (voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Document-Polices" - -\end_inset - - pour plus de détails). - Toutes les autres polices sont néanmoins accessibles si vous entrez les - codes LaTeX correspondants dans le préambule du document (veuillez consulter - la documentation de la police que vous voulez utiliser ). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En plus, des évolutions récentes on vu apparaître de nouveaux moteurs de - rendu LaTeX qui sont aussi capables d'accéder directement aux polices de - caractères qui sont installées sur votre système d'exploitation, ce sont - XeTeX et LuaTeX. - Ces deux moteurs sont acceptés par LyX. - En les utilisant, vous pouvez théoriquement utiliser n'importe quelle police - TrueType ou OpenType qui serait installée sur votre système. - La section suivante décrit comment utiliser ces polices système. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - en pratique, certaines polices pourront ne pas fonctionner à cause de mauvaises - informations de métrique ou d'autres défauts; vous devez donc expérimenter - un peu. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - XeTeX plus particulièrement LuaTeX, sont encore assez récents et donc pas - aussi mûrs que le LaTeX traditionnel ou que PDFLaTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les polices du document et les tailles de polices -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Document-Polices" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Polices ! Taille -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Polices -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez choisir les polices de caractères du document avec la fenêtre - de dialogue -\family sans - Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Dans la rubrique -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Polices -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - de la fenêtre de dialogue, vous pouvez définir quelle police utiliser pour - les trois familles de caractères: -\family sans -Romain -\family default - (sérif), -\family sans -Sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -empattement -\family default - (sans sérif) et -\family sans -Chasse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fixe -\family default - (machine à écrire); vous pouvez également spécifier la taille de base des - polices, et les facteurs d'échelle de (quelques) polices sans empattement - et à chasse fixe si cela est nécessaire pour qu'elles s'accordent aux polices - romaines. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous sélectionnez -\family sans -Utiliser des polices non-T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -, vous pourrez accéder aux polices installées sur votre système d'exploitation. - Ceci requiert que vous utilisiez -\family sans -PDF (XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF (LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - ou -\family sans -DVI (LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - comme format de sortie imprimable, ce qui signifie qu'il faudra que soit - XeTeX, soit LuaTeX soit installé (voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - -). - Vous n'aurez plus accès aux polices TeX (dont une sélection est décrite - ci-après). - Notez que LyX affiche les polices disponibles dans n'importe laquelle des - trois variantes (romaine, sans empattement, à chasse fixe), puisque LyX - ne peut déterminer la famille. - Notez également que la sortie peut être incorrecte avec certaines des polices - proposées, du fait de leur encodage ou de l'échec des polices. - LyX ne peut déterminer ceci à l'avance, vous devrez peut-être faire des - essais. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous utilisez les polices TeX, les options pour le choix des polices - sont -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - et une liste de polices de caractères disponibles dans votre distribution. - Si vous sélectionnez -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - , la police pré-sélectionnée par la classe du document est utilisée. - Dans la plupart des cas, ce sera la police TeX standard, connue sous les - noms de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -Computer Modern -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ( -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -) ou -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -European Computer Modern -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ( -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -), mais certaines classes pré-sélectionnent des polices différentes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme les polices -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - et -\family typewriter -ec -\family default - sont des polices matricielles, elles ont souvent un aspect -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -pixellisé -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans les sorties en PDF, surtout si vous lisez les PDF dans une taille - agrandie. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ce problème ne devrait pas apparaître si vous utilisez -\family typewriter -Adobe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Reader -\family default - version 6 ou ultérieure pour lire vos PDF, puisque ce programme inclut - un module spécial pour le rendu des caractères -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Pour ne pas être ennuyé par les polices pixellisées, il faut utiliser une - police vectorielle. - Suivant l'apparence désirée pour le document, vous pouvez: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -sélectionnez les polices -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latin Modern (lm): -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - ceci est le choix recommandé si vous souhaitez conserver l'apparence de - polices -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cm/ec -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latin Modern -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - a été développée pour la communauté d'utilisateurs LaTeX en vue de remplacer - implicitement la police -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Ce choix couvre un grand nombre de glyphes et plusieurs formes de polices. - À quelques détails près, où l'apparence a été améliorée, -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latin Modern -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - apparaît identique à -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En particulier, le crénage est meilleur. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -sélectionnez les polices -\family typewriter -AE (Almost European) -\family default - dans le cas (rare) où -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latin Modern -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - n'est pas disponible ou ne fonctionne pas, si vous voulez toujours obtenir - une apparence -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cm/ec -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -AE -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - est une police virtuelle. - Virtuelle signifie qu'elle -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -emprunte -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - les contours des glyphes -\family typewriter -cm -\family default - des autre polices. - Le principal inconvénient est que certains caractères manquent à l'appel, - comme les guillemets français ( -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -« -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -» -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En chargeant le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -aeguill -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! aeguill -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - avec cette ligne dans le préambule du document -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[ec]{aeguill} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series default -le problème de guillemets devrait être résolu. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et aussi que les caractères accentués ne sont pas constitués d'un seul - glyphe, ils sont construits à partir de -\emph on -deux -\emph default -caractères, la lettre et l'accent. - De ce fait, si vous faites une recherche dans un document utilisant des - polices -\family typewriter -AE -\family default -, vous ne pouvez pas chercher des caractères accentués: si vous cherchez - le mot -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -brève -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans le PDF, vous n'aurez aucun résultat, du fait que le programme va chercher - le glyphe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -è -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -et pas le groupement -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -e + -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - ̀ -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -si vous n'aimez pas l'apparence des polices cm/ec, sélectionnez une des - autres polices vectorielles fournies, par exemple -\family typewriter -Times Roman -\family default - ou -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Palatino -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - La plupart des polices vectorielles romaines sélectionnent automatiquement - les polices sans empattement ou à chasse fixe associées, mais vous pouvez - aussi sélectionner la vôtre. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Les différences entre les polices -\family sans -romaine -\family default -, -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -empattement -\family default -, et -\family typewriter -chasse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fixe -\family default - sont expliquées dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Réglage-fin-avec" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -La police -\family typewriter -Times Roman -\family default - a été crée à l'origine pour être utilisée pour les journaux. - Ceci signifie que ses glyphes sont plus petits que ceux des autres polices - pour pouvoir tenir plus facilement dans les petites colonnes des journaux. - La police -\family typewriter -Times Roman -\family default - n'est donc pas le choix optimal pour les document importants comme les - livres. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour les tailles de police, il y a quatre possibilités: -\family sans -Implicite, 10 -\family default -, -\family sans -11 -\family default -, et -\family sans -12 -\family default -. - Certaines classes proposent d'autres tailles. - La taille -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - dépend de votre système LaTeX mais elle est en principe égale à la taille - 10. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que ces tailles de police sont en fait les -\emph on -tailles de base -\emph default -. - Cela signifie que LyX va mettre à l'échelle toutes les tailles de caractères - qu'il utilise (comme celle qu'il utilise pour les notes de bas de page, - les indices et les exposants). - Vous pouvez effectuer des réglages fins pour la taille des caractères de - certaines portions du texte avec la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Texte -\family default - si c'est nécessaire. - Les différentes tailles de polices utilisables pour des portions de texte - sont décrites section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Réglage-fin-avec" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La sélection -\family sans -Famille implicite -\family default - vous permet de spécifier si la police de base de votre document doit être - romaine, sans empattement ou à chasse fixe. - La sélection -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - utilise ce qui est pré-sélectionné par la classe, les autres choix le remplacen -t. - Dans la plupart des cas, -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - veut dire -\family sans -romain -\family default -, mais certaines classes (comme celles permettant de créer des présentations) - utilisent d'autre choix implicites. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La sélection -\family sans -Encodage de polices LaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default - est un réglage pour utilisateurs experts, qui vous permet de modifier la - valeur transmise au paquetage LaTeX -\emph on -fontenc -\emph default - (voir aussi la section. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" - -\end_inset - -). - Normalement vous n'avez pas à changer (ni même à comprendre) ceci. - À moins de raisons particulières, sélectionnez -\family sans -Implicite -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec certaines polices, la case -\family sans -Utiliser des chiffres à l'ancienne -\family default - et -\family sans -Utiliser de vraies petites capitales -\family default - sont cochées. - Ce sont des fonctionnalités supplémentaires fournies par ces polices. - Si -\family sans -Utiliser des chiffres à l'ancienne -\family default -est coché, la police utilise un style ancien de chiffres (connu également - comme médiéval ou texte), i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des chiffres de hauteur variable qui s'accordent bien avec les lettres en - bas de casse. - -\family sans -Utiliser de vraies petites capitales -\family default - implique que de vraies petites capitales remplacent les petites capitales - simulées faites de capitales mises à l'échelle. - Les vraies petites capitales appartiennent souvent à des polices très élaborées -; elles ont une meilleure apparence que les petites capitales simulées, - mais peuvent devoir être achetées à part. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le champ -\family sans -CJK -\family default - permet aux utilisateurs des langues Chinoise, Japonaise et Coréenne (CJK) - de préciser une police pour afficher les -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -script characters -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -La police sera l'argument des commandes du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -CJK -\series default -. - Elle n'aura donc aucun effet sur un document en japonnais qui n'utiliserait - pas -\series bold -CJK -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - quand vous choisissez une nouvelle police ou une nouvelle taille de police, - LyX ne change -\emph on -pas -\emph default -la police utilisée à l'écran! Vous ne verrez la différence que dans la sortie - imprimée; c'est une conséquence du concept WYSIWYM. - Les polices d'écran de LyX peuvent être modifiées à partir de la fenêtre - de dialogue -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Préférences -\family default -, voir l'appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Fenêtre-Préférences" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Utiliser différents styles de caractères -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Styles de caractères -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dialogues ! Styles de caractères -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme nous l'avons déjà vu, LyX change automatiquement de style de caractère - pour certains environnements de paragraphes. - LyX gère aussi deux styles de caractères, -\family sans -Mise -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -évidence -\family default - et -\family sans -Nom -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -propre -\family default -. - Vous pouvez activer l'un ou l'autre de ces styles, en utilisant soit un - raccourci clavier, soit les menus, soit encore les bouton de la barre d'outils. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour activer le style -\family sans -Nom -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -propre -\family default -, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -cliquez sur le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -utilisez le raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces commandes sont toutes des bascules. - Ce qui fait que si le style -\family sans -Nom -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -propre -\family default - est déjà activé, elles vont le désactiver. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On utilise en principe le style -\family sans -Nom -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -propre -\family default - pour (devinez !) les noms propres, comme par exemple: -\noun on - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\noun default -Matthias -\noun on - Ettrich -\noun default - est l'auteur original de LyX. -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un style encore plus utilisé est le style de caractère -\family sans -Mis -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -évidence -\family default -. - Vous pouvez l'activer (ou le désactiver, ce sont aussi des bascules) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -en cliquant sur le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -en utilisant le raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En principe le style -\family sans -Mise -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -évidence -\family default - est l'équivalent d'une police italique, mais certaines classes de document - ou certains paquetages LaTeX utilisent une police différente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous utilisons assez souvent le style -\family sans -Mise -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -évidence -\family default - dans ce document. - En voici encore un exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation - -\emph on -N'abusez pas des styles de caractères! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En plus d'être un exemple, c'est un conseil. - Ce que l'on écrit doit ressembler à un dialogue ordinaire. - Et puisque nous ne passons pas tous notre temps à nous hurler dessus, nous - devrions aussi éviter la tendance naturelle à abuser des styles de caractères. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez à tout moment remettre la police au style implicite en utilisant - le raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-default" -\end_inset - - ou la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Personnalisé -\family default - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Réglage fin avec la fenêtre -\family sans -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Réglage-fin-avec" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dialogues ! Style de texte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Style de texte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a toujours des occasions où vous avez besoin de réglages fins, donc - LyX vous permet de créer des styles de caractères personnalisés. - Par exemple, une publication de recherche ou une entreprise peuvent avoir - une convention de style réclamant une police sans empattement dans certaines - situations. - De même, des auteurs utilisent parfois une police différente pour distinguer - les pensées d'un personnage du dialogue ordinaire. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avant de dire comment utiliser un style de caractères personnalisé, nous - voulons de nouveau répéter un avertissement : n'abusez pas des styles de - caractères. - Beaucoup de traitements de texte modernes disposent d'un vaste choix de - polices, vous offrant la puissance d'une presse d'imprimerie. - Malheureusement, on a tendance à abuser de cette puissance. - C'est comme utiliser un marteau-pilon pour écraser une mouche. - Les documents qui abusent des différentes polices et des différentes tailles - finissent par ne plus ressembler à grand chose. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Assez de récriminations. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour utiliser des polices personnalisées, ouvrez la fenêtre -\family sans -Personnalisé -\family default - en faisant -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Personnalisé\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\family default -. - Il y a plusieurs champs dans cette fenêtre, chacun correspondant à une - propriété de la police que vous pouvez ajuster. - Vous pouvez choisir une option pour chacune de ces sept propriétés, ou - sélectionner -\family sans -Inchangé -\family default -, qui laisse cette propriété telle quelle. - L'élément -\family sans -RàZ ( -\family default -Remise à Zéro -\family sans -) -\family default - remet la propriété à sa valeur implicite dans l'environnement de paragraphe - concerné. - Vous pouvez utiliser ceci pour faire une remise à zéro pour plusieurs environne -ments de paragraphe à la fois. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les sept propriétés de police et les choix possibles (en plus de -\family sans -Inchangé -\family default - et -\family sans -RàZ -\family default -) sont: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Famille -\family default - L'aspect général de la police. - Les choix possibles sont : -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Romain -\family default - C'est la police romaine implicite. - C'est une police avec empattements et c'est aussi la famille implicite - (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-roman" -\end_inset - -), -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -empattement -\family default - -\family sans -C'est la famille de polices sans empattement. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -(raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-sans" -\end_inset - -), -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Chasse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fixe -\family default - -\family typewriter -C'est la famille de polices à chasse fixe. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -(raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-typewriter" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Série -\family default - Correspond à l'épaisseur du caractère. - Choix : -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Maigre -\family default - C'est la série des polices maigres, -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -C'est aussi la série implicite. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Grasse -\family default - -\series bold -C'est la série des polices grasses. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -(raccourci clavier -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-bold" -\end_inset - -) -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Forme -\family default - Comme son nom l'indique. - Choix : -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Droite -\family default - C'est la forme droite. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -C'est aussi la forme implicite. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Italique -\family default - -\shape italic -C'est la forme italique, -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Inclinée -\family default - -\shape slanted -C'est la forme inclinée -\shape default -,(différente de l'italique, même si ce n'est pas très visible à l'écran), -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Petites -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -capitales -\family default - -\shape smallcaps -C'est la forme en petites capitales -\family sans -. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Couleur -\family default - vous permet d'ajuster la couleur du texte. - Notez que tous les visionneuses DVI ne sont pas capables d'afficher ces - couleurs. - En plus de -\family sans -Pas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -couleur -\family default -, -\lang english -which means that the document default color set in -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Color -\family default - for -\family sans -Main -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\family default - is used -\lang french -, vous pouvez choisir entre -\family sans -Noir -\family default -, -\family sans -Blanc -\family default -, -\family sans -Rouge -\family default -, -\family sans -Vert -\family default -, -\family sans -Bleu -\family default -, -\family sans -Cyan -\family default -, -\family sans -Magenta -\family default - et -\family sans -Jaune -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Couleur ! Texte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Langue -\family default - vous pouvez marquer des zones de texte comme étant rédigées dans une langue - autre que celle du document. - Le texte ainsi marqué sera souligné en bleu pour rappeler ce changement - (seulement dans LyX). -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Si vous avez par exemple un texte en langue allemande dans votre document, - LaTeX respectera les règles de césure allemandes automatiquement. - Lors de l'utilisation du correcteur orthographique (voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Correcteur-Orthographique" - -\end_inset - -), le texte marqué en allemand sera vérifié à l'aide du dictionnaire allemand. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Taille -\family default - Change la taille de la police. - Pas de valeurs numériques ici : toutes les tailles possibles sont en fait - proportionnelles à la taille de police implicite. - Là encore, vous ne donnez pas à LyX les détails, mais une description générale - de ce que vous voulez. -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Les choix (et leurs raccourcis clavier) sont: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Minuscule -\family default - -\size tiny -c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Minuscule -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\size default -(raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size tiny" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tout -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -petit -\family default - -\size scriptsize -c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Tout -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -petit -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\size default - (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size scriptsize" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Très -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -petit -\family default - -\size footnotesize -c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Très petit -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\size default - (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size footnotesize" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Petit -\family default - -\size small -c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Petit -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\size default - (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size small" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Normal -\family default - c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Normale -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - C'est aussi la taille implicite (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size normal" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Grand -\family default - -\size large -c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Grand -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\size default - (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size large" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Très -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -grand -\family default - -\size larger -c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Très grand(2) -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\size default - (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size larger" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Très -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -très -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -grand -\family default - -\size largest -c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Très -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -très -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -grand(3) -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\size default - (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size largest" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Énorme -\family default - -\size huge -c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Énorme -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\size default - (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size huge" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Très -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -énorme -\family default - -\size huge -c'est la taille -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Très énorme -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\size default - (raccourci = -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-size giant" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Augmenter -\family default - augmente la taille d'un niveau (par exemple, de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Très -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -très -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -grand -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - à -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Énorme -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size increase" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Diminuer -\family default - diminue la taille d'un niveau (par exemple, de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Normal -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - à -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Petit -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size decrease" -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous vous prévenons encore une fois: ne vous excitez pas avec cette fonction. - Vous ne devriez presque jamais avoir à changer la taille de la police. - LyX adapte automatiquement la taille aux différents environnements de paragraph -e. - Cette fonction n'est là -\emph on -que -\emph default - pour du réglage fin! -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Divers -\family default - Ici vous pouvez changer quelques autres propriétés des caractères. - Les choix sont: -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -En -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -évidence -\family default - -\emph on -du texte mis en valeur. - -\emph default - On peut croire que c'est la même chose qu' -\shape italic -Italique -\shape default -, mais en fait c'est un peu différent. - -\family sans -En -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -évidence -\family default -est un attribut -\emph on -logique. - -\emph default -Cela signifie que chaque classe de document peut définir sa propre police - pour le texte mis en évidence. - Normalement la police utilisée est la police italique; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Souligné -\family default - -\bar under -du texte souligné -\bar default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "font-underline" -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Évitez si possible d'utiliser les caractères soulignés! C'est un reste du - temps des machines à écrire, quand vous ne pouviez pas changer de police. - Nous n'avons plus besoin de faire ressortir du texte en le renforçant avec - le caractère de soulignement. - Il n'est inclus dans LyX que parce qu'il l'est aussi dans LaTeX, et que - certaines personnes peuvent en avoir besoin pour suivre les conventions - de style de certaines publications; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Souligné -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -doublement -\family default - -\uuline on -ceci est un texte avec soulignement double -\uuline default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-underunderline" -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Si nous avons émis de réserves sur l'usage du soulignement, vous vous doutez - de ce que nous pensons du soulignement double; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Vaguement -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -souligné -\family default - -\uwave on -ceci est un texte avec soulignement vague -\uwave default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-underwave" -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -N'utiliser que si la revue insiste absolument, et garder les comprimés contre - le mal de mer à portée de main; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Rayé -\family default - -\strikeout on -ceci est un texte rayé -\strikeout default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-strikeout" -\end_inset - -) Utilisé fréquemment pour marquer une version ancienne qui a changé depuis; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Nom -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Propre -\family default - -\noun on -du texte avec Nom -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Propre. - -\noun default - Comme -\family sans -En -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -évidence -\family default -, c'est un attribut logique. - Pour l'instant, il équivaut à -\family sans -Petites -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Capitales. -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -Vous avez donc le choix d'un grand nombre de combinaisons. - Quand vous avez choisi un nouveau style de caractères avec la fenêtre de - dialogue -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Personnalisé -\family default -( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -) -\family sans -, -\family default - les paramètres sont mémorisés et vous pouvez les réutiliser en utilisant - le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "textstyle-apply" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - Ce bouton applique de nouveau le dernier style de caractère que vous avez - utilisé, sans avoir à ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour retourner directement au style de caractères implicite, utilisez le - raccourci clavier -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-default" -\end_inset - -. - Si vous ne voulez rebasculer que les caractéristiques que vous venez juste - de modifier (supposons que vous venez de mettre la forme à -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -inclinée -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et la série à -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -grasse -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -), activez l'option -\family sans - Basculer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tout -\family default - et cliquez sur -\family sans -Appliquer -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est important que vous ayez une petite idée de la différence entre les - trois principaux types de polices : -\family sans -romaine, sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -empattement -\family default -, et -\family sans -chasse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fixe -\family default -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -chasse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fixe, -\family default -aussi appelée -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Machine -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -écrire -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est une police où tous les caractères ont la même largeur, le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -i -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - prenant autant de place que le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -m -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - C'est une police très utilisée pour les listings de code sources. - Voici un exemple: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family typewriter -no -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -texte à chasse fixe -\family default - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pour les détails sur les fantômes, voir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espace-fantôme" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -texte à chasse non fixe; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -romaine -\family default -, des polices qui utilisent des sérifs ou empattements, ces petits -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -appendices -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - que l'on voit à toutes les extrémités des caractères et qui en rendent - en principe la lecture plus facile et plus rapide. - C'est ce qui explique que ce soit la police implicite. - L'exemple suivant montre la différence: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -texte avec sérifs -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -texte sans sérifs -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -sans empattement, -\family default -des polices qui n'utilisent pas les sérifs, ce qui fait qu'elles sont plutôt - utilisées dans les titres et les en-têtes ou pour des textes courts. - Nous les utilisons dans ce document pour mettre en évidence les noms des - éléments de menus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Basculer -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - se rapporte au mécanisme de gestion des propriétés de polices. - Quand une propriété est marquée -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -à basculer -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans le dialogue des styles de caractères, appliquer le style à un texte - doté de la propriété aura pour effet de la supprimer. - Si vous appliquez un style doté des propriétés A, B et C à un texte qui - a les propriétés B, C, F et G, et si B est positionné sur basculer et C - n'est pas positionné sur basculer, le texte se retrouve doté des propriétés - A, C, F et G. - -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jamais basculés -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Toujours basculés -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - signifient que vous ne contrôlez pas le basculement. - Pour les propriétés situées à gauche de la fenêtre de dialogue ( -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Famille -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, etc.), le basculement dépend de vous. - Si -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Basculer tout -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - est coché, toutes les propriétés peuvent être basculées; implicitement, - aucune ne l'est. - Enfin, -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -RàZ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - n'est jamais basculé: si vous positionnez -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Série -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - sur -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -RàZ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et cochez -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Basculer tout -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, puis appliquez le style un texte en gras, le texte reviendra à la série - implicite ( -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maigre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -), quel que doit le nombre d'applications du style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous conclurons avec toujours le même conseil: n'abusez pas des polices - de caractères. - Elles peuvent rendre pénible la lecture de votre texte et en aucun cas - elle ne pourront remplacer un bon style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Imprimer et pré-visionner -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -En résumé -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Maintenant que nous avons traité certaines des opérations de base pour la - préparation d'un document avec LyX, vous voulez sans doute savoir comment - imprimer votre chef-d'œuvre. - Avant de vous le dire, nous voulons d'abord vous donner une brève explication - de ce qui a lieu dans les coulisses. - Nous en parlons aussi dans le manuel des -\emph on - Options -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -avancées -\emph default -, d'une manière beaucoup plus détaillée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX utilise en interne un programme appelé -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (en fait, LaTeX n'est rien d'autre qu'un ensemble de macros pour le système - typographique TeX, mais pour faire simple, nous allons appeler l'ensemble - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -). - Tout se passe ainsi: LyX est ce que vous utilisez effectivement pour écrire. - Puis LyX fait appel à LaTeX pour transformer votre écrit en sortie imprimable. - Il y a plusieurs étapes : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -d'abord, LyX convertit votre document en une série de commandes pour LaTeX, - générant un fichier avec l'extension -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -.tex -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -ensuite, LaTeX interprète les commandes dans le fichier -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default - pour produire une sortie imprimable. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formats des fichiers de sortie -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formats de fichiers -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Texte brut (ASCII) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formats de fichiers ! ASCII -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.txt -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Il contient votre document sous forme de texte simple suivant le codage - ASCII ( -\emph on -American Standard Code for Information Interchange -\emph default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez exporter votre document en ASCII grâce au menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -brut -\family default -. - -\lang english -However, this will not export any externally generated material such as - a BibTeX bibliography -\lang french - (section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bases-de-Données-Biblio" - -\end_inset - -). - -\lang english -If your document includes such material, use -\lang french - -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -More -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formats -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Options -\lang french - -\family default -\lang english -and then select -\family sans -\lang french - Texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -brut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii) -\family default -. - Cette faisant d'abord une conversion en PostScript -\lang english - (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to - ASCII. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -LaTeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formats de Fichiers ! LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et contient toutes les commandes qui sont nécessaires pour que le programme - LaTeX puisse traiter votre document. - Si vous connaissez LaTeX, vous pouvez utiliser ce dernier pour trouver - des erreurs LaTeX ou pour traiter votre document manuellement avec des - commandes en ligne. - Le fichier LaTeX est automatiquement créé dans le répertoire temporaire - de LyX à chaque fois que vous visualisez ou que vous exportez votre document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez exporter votre document comme un fichier LaTeX en utilisant - le menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX. - -\family default - Les différentes variantes d'exportation sont expliquées à la section -\family sans - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Exporter" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -DVI -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formats de Fichiers ! DVI -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.dvi -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Il est appelé -\emph on -indépendant de l'appareil -\emph default - ou -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -device independent (DVI) -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, car il est complètement portable; vous pouvez les recopier d'une machine - à l'autre sans avoir à faire de conversion. - Les fichiers DVI sont utilisés pour un visionnement rapide et comme une - étape préliminaire avant la conversion vers un autre format comme le PostScript. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les fichiers DVI ne contiennent pas d'images, elles sont seulement liées - au fichier. - N'oubliez donc pas de fournir vos images en même temps que vos DVI. - Cette caractéristique peut aussi ralentir votre ordinateur quand vous visualise -z le DVI puisque la visionneuse doit convertir les images en tâche de fond - pour les rendre visibles quand vous faites défiler votre document. - C'est pourquoi nous recommandons d'utiliser des fichiers PDF pour les documents - avec de nombreuses images. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez exporter votre document comme un fichier DVI en utilisant le - menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\family default - ou -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X). - -\family default - Cette dernière option utilise l'exécutable -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -. - -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - est un moteur TeX qui fournit la fonctionnalité Unicode directement, ainsi - que l'accès aux polices du système d'exploitation (voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - -). - -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LuaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - est en cours de développement, mais pourrait devenir le prochain moteur - TeX standard. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PostScript -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formats de Fichiers ! PostScript -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.ps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - PostScript a été développé par la société -\family typewriter -Adobe -\family default - comme un langage pour les imprimantes. - De ce fait le fichier contient toutes les commandes utilisées par l'imprimante - pour imprimer le document. - PostScript peut être considéré comme un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -langage de programmation -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ; vous pouvez en effet faire des calculs ou tracer des diagrammes ou des - images -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Si vous souhaitez en apprendre plus à ce sujet, jetez un coup d'œil au paquetage - LaTeX -\series bold -pstricks -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! pstricks -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - En partie à cause de toutes ces possibilités un fichier PostScript est - souvent plus gros qu'un PDF. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PostScript ne peut contenir que des images au format -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -PostScript Encapsulé -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ( -\emph on -encapsulated PostScript -\emph default - ou EPS, de suffixe -\family typewriter -.eps -\family default -). - Comme LyX vous permet n'importe quel format d'image connu dans votre document, - il doit les convertir en interne en EPS. - Si vous avez par exemple 50 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -images dans votre document, LyX doit faire 50 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -conversions la première fois que vous visualisez ou que vous exportez votre - document. - Cela risque de ralentir votre rythme de travail. - En conclusion, si vous prévoyez d'utiliser PostScript, vous pouvez insérer - vos images directement en EPS pour éviter ce problème. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez exporter votre document comme un fichier PostScript en utilisant - le menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator -PostScript. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PDF -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formats de Fichiers ! PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.pdf -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Ce -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -format de document portable -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (portable document format ou PDF) est développé par -\family typewriter -Adobe -\family default - comme une évolution de PostScript. - Il est plus comprimé et utilise moins de commandes que PostScript. - Comme son nom l'indique, il est -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -portable -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et peut donc être traité par n'importe quel ordinateur et la sortie imprimée - aura exactement le même aspect. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF peut contenir des images dans son propre format PDF et dans les formats - JPG (format du -\emph on - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Joint Photographic Expert Group -\emph default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - avec comme suffixe -\family typewriter -.jpg -\family default - ou -\family typewriter -.jpeg -\family default -) et PNG ( -\emph on - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Portable Network Graphics -\emph default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - avec le suffixe -\family typewriter -.png -\family default -). - Vous pouvez quand même utiliser d'autres formats puisque LyX les convertit - dans un de ces formats. - Mais comme il est dit dans la section sur PostScript, les conversions d'images - vont ralentir votre travail. - Nous recommandons donc l'utilisation de l'un des trois formats cités. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez exporter votre document comme un fichier PDF en utilisant le - menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter -\family default -de façons différentes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) utilise le programme -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default - qui convertit directement votre fichier en PDF; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) utilise le programme -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - qui convertit directement votre fichier en PDF. - -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default - est un moteur encore plus récent, dérivé de -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -, qui fournit aussi la fonctionnalité Unicode directement, ainsi que l'accès - aux polices du système d'exploitation (voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - -). - -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LuaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - est en cours de développement, mais pourrait devenir le prochain moteur - TeX standard. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) utilise le programme -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default - qui convertit directement votre fichier en PDF. - -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default - est un moteur TeX qui fournit la fonctionnalité Unicode directement, ainsi - que l'accès aux polices du système d'exploitation (voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" - -\end_inset - -). - Il est particulièrement adapté à la typographie de différentes écritures; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) utilise le programme -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default - qui convertit votre fichier en DVI avant de le convertir en PDF; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) utilise le programme -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default - qui créé un PDF à partir de la version PostScript de votre fichier. - Cette dernière est produite par le programme -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - qui utilise une version DVI comme étape intermédiaire. - Cette variante consiste donc en trois conversions; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous recommandons d'utiliser l'option -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - car -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default - accepte toutes les fonctionnalités des versions actuelles de PDF, et il - est rapide, stable et ne pose pas de problèmes. - Si vous dépendez d'un support multi-écritures ou sur des polices OpenType, - vous pourrez vouloir essayer -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - à la place, en sachant que ces deux programmes n'ont pas la même maturité - que -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pdflatex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -XHTML -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formats de Fichiers ! XHTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -HTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce type de fichier a le suffixe -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -.xhtml -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - C'est un fichier adapté à l'affichage par un navigateur web. - Il ne contient pas d'images, mais un lien vers celles-ci, et quand LyX - exporte en XHTML, il crée les images correspondantes dans un format approprié. - Les formules sont exportées en MathML, qui s'affiche bien dans les navigateurs - qui le supportent (tous ne le font pas). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -XHTML est un format d'exportation -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -en développement -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, et toutes les fonctionnalités de LyX ne sont pas encore intégrées. - Voir le chapitre -\emph on - Lyx et le Web -\emph default - dans le manuel des -\emph on -Options avancées -\emph default - pour les détails. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez exporter votre document en tant que fichier XHTML en sélectionnant - -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LyXHTML -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Pré-visionnement -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Prévisionnement -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour avoir une idée de l'aspect final de votre document, avec tous ses sauts - de pages à la bonne place, les notes de bas de page bien numérotées et - ainsi de suite, utilisez le menu -\family sans -Affichage -\family default - et choisissez Visionner ou le bouton de la barre d'outils -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - - Une visionneuse va s'ouvrir, affichant le résultat défini implicitement - dans le Préférences (voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" - -\end_inset - -), définition qui peut être modifiée pour un document particulier dans les - Paramètres (voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - -). - D'autres formats de sortie peuvent être sélectionnés par -\family sans -Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Visionner (autres formats) -\family default - ou le bouton de la barre d'outils -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous avez modifié votre document depuis votre dernier visionnement, inutile - de fermer la fenêtre de la visionneuse, appuyez juste sur un des boutons - de mise à jour ou utilisez le menu -\family sans -Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mettre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -jour -\family default -.ou -\family sans -Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mettre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -jour (autres formats). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand vous visionnez un fichier, le fichier généré par le programme est - placé dans le répertoire temporaire de LyX. - Si vous voulez une vraie sortie , exportez votre document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Imprimer un document depuis LyX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Imprimer" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Plutôt que d'exporter votre document et ensuite de l'imprimer, vous pouvez - aussi l'imprimer directement depuis LyX. - Pour imprimer le document courant, utilisez le menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Imprimer -\family default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - -) ou cliquez sur le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - LyX va appeler LaTeX en interne pour produire un fichier DVI. - Ce fichier sera ensuite traité par le programme -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - pour en faire un fichier PostScript, qui sera finalement imprimé en utilisant - le programme -\family typewriter -Ghostscript -\family default -. - À cause de toutes ces étapes intermédiaires, cette méthode n'est pas la - plus rapide. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans le champ -\family sans -Destination, -\family default - vous pouvez choisir: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Imprimante -\family default - est le nom de l'imprimante sur laquelle vous voulez imprimer votre document - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notez que ce nom est destiné au programme -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -, ce qui signifie que -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default - doit avoir été configuré pour cette imprimante-là. - L'imprimante implicite peut être définie dans le préférences de LyX, voyez - le chapitre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Fenêtre-Préférences" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, elle doit accepter le PostScript -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Fichier -\family default - est le nom à indiquer si vous voulez envoyer le résultat vers un fichier - pour l'imprimer plus tard. - La sortie est un fichier PostScript qui sera enregistré dans le répertoire - de travail de LyX, à moins que ne fournissiez le chemin complet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez choisir -\lang english -to print only a range of pages -\lang french -, de n'imprimer que les pages paires ou impaires -\lang english -or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options -\lang french - peut être utile pour pouvoir imprimer en recto-verso -\lang english -with a printer without a duplexer -\lang french -: Vous pouvez réinsérer les pages qui ont été imprimées d'un côté dans l'imprima -nte pour imprimer l'autre côté. - Certaines imprimantes sortent les pages face imprimée vers le haut, d'autres - vers le bas. - En choisissant l'ordre d'impression des pages, vous pourrez prendre toute - votre pile de feuilles, sans avoir à les remettre dans l'ordre. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Quelques mots sur la typographie -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Traits-d'union, tirets, et signe moins -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tirets et césures -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tirets -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans LyX, le caractère -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - existe dans trois longueurs, souvent appelées -\emph on -trait d'union -\emph default -, -\emph on -tiret -\emph default - et -\emph on -tiret -\emph default - long: -\emph on - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -NdT : respectivement -\emph on -hyphen -\emph default -, -\emph on -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dash -\emph default - et -\emph on -em -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dash -\emph default - en version originale. - Le tiret long a la longueur d'un cadratin, le tiret d'un demi-cadratin. - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\emph default - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -nom -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -résultat -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -inséré par -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -trait -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'union -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -tiret -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -– -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Caractère -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Symboles -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -tiret long -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -— -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Caractère -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Symboles -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -signe moins -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $-$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en mode mathématique -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi créer le tiret et le tiret long en utilisant le caractère - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - plusieurs fois de suite. - LyX les convertit automatiquement en un tiret de longueur appropriée dans - le rendu final. - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - engendre un tiret, -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - - -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - un tiret long. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les trois types de tiret sont distincts du signe moins, qui apparaît en - mode math et a une longueur différente. - Voici quelques exemples d'emploi des tirets : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -en-tête -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -trait -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'union -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -je crois que les tirets sont utiles – surtout ici. -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -tiret -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -— pour les dialogues. -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -tiret long -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -( -\emph on -signe moins -\emph default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Césure -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Cesure@Césure -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Césure" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les mots ne sont pas coupés dans LyX, mais ils le sont automatiquement à - l'impression. - La césure est effectuée par le paquetage -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - de LaTeX, en suivant les règles spécifiques à la langue du document. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pour les lecteurs utilisant l'allemand : C'est une des différences entre - les langages -\family sans -Allemand -\family default - et -\family sans -Allemand (nouvelle orthographe) -\family default - dans le menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX effectue les césures presque parfaitement ; il a seulement des problèmes - avec la police à -\family sans -chasse fixe -\family default - et avec des construction inhabituelles comme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -h3knix/m0n0wall -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Si, pour une raison quelconque, LaTeX n'arrivait pas à couper un mot correcteme -nt, vous pouvez disposer les points de césure à la main, avec -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Point -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -césure -\family default -. - Ces points de césure supplémentaires ne sont que des indications pour LaTeX. - Si aucune coupure n'est nécessaire, LaTeX les ignorera complètement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Parfois vous voulez empêcher qu'un mot ou une construction ne soit coupé. - Supposez que vous décrivez des raccourcis clavier dans votre document comme - ceci : -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -A-b c -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. - LaTeX considère le tiret comme une possibilité de césure, or une césure - à cet endroit serait peu judicieuse. - Pour empêcher le raccourci d'être coupé en deux, vous pouvez le mettre - dans une boîte comme expliqué à la section -\emph on -Empêcher la césure -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ponctuation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ponctuation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Abréviations et fins de phrase -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Abbreviations" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand LyX invoque LaTeX pour générer la version finale de votre document, - LaTeX fait tout seul la distinction entre les mots, les phrases et les - abréviations. - LaTeX ajoute alors la -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -quantité appropriée d'espace -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -: les phrases ont un peu plus d'espace entre le point final et le mot suivant. - Les abréviations ont autant d'espace après le point qu'entre deux mots. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Malheureusement, l'algorithme pour reconnaître une abréviation d'une fin - de phrase n'est vraiment pas très malin. - Si un -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - suit une lettre minuscule, c'est la fin d'une phrase ; s'il suit une lettre - majuscule, c'est une abréviation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici quelques exemples -\emph on -corrects -\emph default - d'abréviations et de fins de phrase : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -M. - Dupont -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Il fait beau. - Le soleil brille. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -...et voici un exemple où l'algorithme se trompe : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -par ex. - il y a trop d'espace ! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Je monte dans ma DS. - Je mets le contact. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -NdT : il m'en a fallu du temps pour trouver un exemple aussi intéressant - ! -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous ne verrez rien qui cloche avant d'avoir la version finale du document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour régler ce problème, vous pouvez : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -utiliser un -\family sans -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -entre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mots -\family default - après une abréviation en minuscules (voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espace-inter-mots" - -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espace ! Inter-mots -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -utiliser une -\family sans -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Fine -\family default - entre les deux éléments d'une abréviation (voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espace-Fine" - -\end_inset - -). -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Espace ! Fine -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -utiliser -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Caractère -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Point -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -final -\family default - pour forcer l'espacement entre phrases. - On l'obtient aussi avec -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence" -\end_inset - - -\family sans - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -NdT : le raccourci n'a pas l'air de fonctionner avec un clavier français. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec les corrections, nos exemples deviennent : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -par ex. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -il y a trop d'espace ! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Je monte dans ma DS\SpecialChar \@. - Je mets le contact. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certaines langues ne mettent pas plus d'espace entre les phrases qu'entre - les mots. - Si vous voulez écrire dans ces langues, vous n'avez pas à vous occuper - de tout ceci, puisque LaTeX va s'en occuper. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour les autres, on peut s'aider de la fonction -\family sans - Outils \SpecialChar \menuseparator -Correction -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TeX -\family default - pour repérer ces erreurs (fonction décrite dans le manuel de -\emph on -Options avancées -\emph default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Guillemets -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie ! Guillemets -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Guillemets | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Typographie -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX met en général les guillemets dans le bon sens : un ouvrant au début - et un fermant à la fin. - Par exemple, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -ouvert fermé -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, obtenu simplement avec la touche -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -" -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez changer le comportement de cette touche avec la fenêtre -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Dans le sous-menu -\family sans -Langue -\family default - vous avez un menu déroulant -\family sans -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -guillemets -\family default - où vous pouvez choisir directement le style de guillemets produits par - la touche -\family typewriter -" -\family default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a six possibilités : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMMMM - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Texte -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -double -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Quotes els -\end_inset - -simple -\begin_inset Quotes ers -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMMMM - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -Texte -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -double -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - ou 'simple -\begin_inset Quotes ers -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMMMM - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Texte -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -double -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Quotes gls -\end_inset - -simple -\begin_inset Quotes grs -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMMMM - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Texte -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -double -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Quotes pls -\end_inset - -simple -\begin_inset Quotes prs -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMMMM - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Texte -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -double -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Quotes fls -\end_inset - -simple -\begin_inset Quotes frs -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring MMMMM - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes ald -\end_inset - -Texte -\begin_inset Quotes ard -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes ald -\end_inset - -double -\begin_inset Quotes ard -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Quotes als -\end_inset - -simple -\begin_inset Quotes ars -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces options changent les caractères produits par la touche -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -" -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - . - D'un autre côté, si vous voulez produire des guillemets droits, tapez -\family sans -Ctrl-" -\family default -, ou utilisez -\family sans - Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Caractère spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Guillemet -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -droit -\family default -, cela produit un -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -" -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - dans tous les cas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -For single quotes you have to use the shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "quote-insert single" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ligatures -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie ! Ligatures -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ligatures | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Typographie -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Ligatures" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est commun en typographie de grouper certaines lettres ensemble et de - les imprimer comme un seul caractère. - Ces groupes s'appellent des -\emph on -ligatures -\emph default -. - Comme LaTeX sait s'en servir, vos documents LyX en contiendront aussi. - Voici les ligatures possibles: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ff -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -fi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -fl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ffi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ffl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certaines langues utilisent d'autres ligatures si les polices utilisées - dans le document les permettent. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Parfois cependant, vous ne voulez pas d'une ligature dans un mot. - Alors qu'une ligature convient dans le mot -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -graffiti -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, ce n'est pas le cas dans des mots composés comme l'allemand -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Dorffest -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - ou l'anglais -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -cufflink -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -NdT : faute d'idée d'exemple en français\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Pour empêcher une ligature, vous devez insérer un caractère spécial entre - les lettres, avec -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Séparation -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligature -\family default -, et -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Dorffest -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - devient -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -fest -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -cufflinks -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -links -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les noms propres en LyX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Noms-Propres" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Noms propres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous avez certainement remarqué que le mot -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - apparaissait à l'impression avec des caractères de positions et des tailles - différentes. - LaTeX est le nom du programme utilisé par LyX, il est donc reconnu comme - nom propre quand vous tapez -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -dans LyX -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Les accolades dans le code TeX sont là pour éviter que la -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -commande -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - apparaisse comme un nom propre dans la sortie finale, voir le dernier paragraph -e de cette section. - Pour créer des noms propres ne mettez pas les accolades. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, en respectant bien l'alternance de lettres majuscules et minuscules. - LyX reconnaît les noms propres suivants: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LyX est le nom du jeu, tapez -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - pour le produire. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -TeX est le programme utilisé par LaTeX, tapez -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeX est le programme utilisé par LyX, tapez -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeX2e est la version actuelle de LaTeX, tapez -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX2e -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez vous demander pourquoi la version de LaTeX est -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -2 -\begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - C'est une vieille tradition dans la communauté TeX que de donner des numéro - de version fantaisistes aux programmes, avec une logique réservée aux initiés. - Par exemple le numéro de version de TeX converge vers la nombre -\begin_inset Formula $\pi$ -\end_inset - -: la version actuelle est -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -TeX-3.141592 -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, la version précédente était -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -TeX-3.14159 -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous ne voulez pas utiliser les noms propres, par exemple dans un en-tête - de section, vous pouvez insérer une paire d'accolades vides en code TeX, - au milieu du mot. - Dans LyX, cela ressemblera à ceci: -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/LaTeX.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Pour en savoir plus sur le code TeX, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Code-TeX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les unités -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie ! Unités -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En principe, l'espace entre le symbole de l'unité et la valeur est plus - petit que l'espace normal entre deux mots. - Comme vous le voyez dans l'exemple qui suit, c'est plus joli quand l'espace - est plus petit. - Pour avoir ce -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -demi-espace -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - pour les unités, utilisez le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fine -\family default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "space-insert thin" -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici un exemple pour voir la différence: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -espace normale entre la valeur et l'unité -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -demi-espace entre la valeur et l'unité -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Veuves et orphelins -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Typographie ! Veuves et Orphelins -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Aux premiers temps des traitements de texte, les sauts de page intervenaient - quand la page en venait à se terminer. - Ils ne tenaient pas compte de ce qu'il y avait dans le texte. - Il vous est peut-être déjà arrivé d'imprimer un document, et de découvrir - l'en-tête d'une section imprimée tout en bas d'une page, la première ligne - d'un paragraphe toute seule en bas de la page, ou la dernière ligne d'un - paragraphe au sommet d'une nouvelle page. - Ces bouts de texte dépareillés devinrent connus sous le nom de -\emph on -veuves -\emph default - et d' -\emph on -orphelins -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX peut éviter de changer de page juste après un en-tête de section. - Ça fait partie des avantages des environnements de paragraphe. - Mais qu'en est-il des veuves et des orphelins, quand les sauts de page - ne laissent qu'une ligne d'un paragraphe toute seule au sommet ou au bas - d'une page ? LaTeX suit des règles concernant les sauts de page, et certaines - d'entre elles sont spécialement destinées à éviter les veuves et les orphelins. - C'est l'avantage d'utiliser LaTeX en interne. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous n'allons pas traiter de la façon de décider TeX ou LaTeX à changer - de page, ou de la façon d'influencer ce comportement. - Quelques livres sur LaTeX cités dans la bibliographie (comme -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -) peuvent contenir plus d'informations. - De toutes façons, vous n'aurez presque jamais à vous inquiéter de tout - cela. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Notes, figures, tableaux et flottants -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notes, figures et flottants -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:Flottants-et-Notes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les sujets de ce chapitre sont traités en détail dans le manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés. - -\emph default -Vous y trouverez aussi des trucs et astuces pour les cas spéciaux. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Notes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Notes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX offre plusieurs types de notes que vous pouvez ajouter à votre document: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Note -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LyX Ce type de note est à usage interne et n'apparaîtra pas sur la sortie - finale. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Le texte de cette note n'apparaîtra pas à l'impression. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Commentaire Ce type de note n'apparaît pas non plus à l'impression, mais - il est inséré comme un commentaire LaTeX quand vous exportez votre document - vers un fichier au format LaTeX avec le menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaTeX (pdflatex) / (standard) -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Comment -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Le texte de cette note n'apparaîtra que comme commentaire dans un fichier - LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Grisée Ce type de note apparaît à l'impression sous forme de texte grisé, - dans une couleur que vous pouvez positionner dans les paramètres du document - via le menu -\family sans -Couleurs\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Notes grisées -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Le texte -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ceci est un exemple de note de bas de page à l'intérieur d'une note en texte - grisé. - Dans ce document la couleur de ce type de note est définie comme étant - bleue. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - de ce commentaire apparaîtra à l'impression sous forme de texte grisé. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Comme vous pouvez le voir dans l'exemple, ce type de notes peut avoir des - notes de bas de page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les notes peuvent être insérées avec le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils ou grâce au menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note -\family default -. - Cliquez avec le bouton de droite de la souris sur la boîte de note qui - apparaît pour modifier le type de la note. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Notes de bas de page -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Notes-en-Bas" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notes en bas de page -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX utilise des boîtes pour saisir et afficher les notes en bas de page: - quand vous insérez une Note de bas de page avec -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\family default - ou en utilisant le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "footnote-insert" -\end_inset - - de la palette, vous voyez d'abord apparaître dans votre texte une boîte - grise avec une étiquette bleue -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -pied -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - qui ressemble à ceci : -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - - Cette boîte est la représentation de votre note dans LyX. - Vous pouvez y entrer votre texte. - Si vous cliquez sur le mot -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -bas -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, la boîte va se refermer. - Cliquer de nouveau sur le bouton -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -ouvrira -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - la Note de bas de page. - Dans LyX, pour fermer cette Note de bas de page, cliquez sur la boîte contenant - l'étiquette de la note.. - Si vous voulez transformer du texte déjà existant en Note de bas de page, - sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton -\family sans -Note -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\family default - de la barre d'outils. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici un exemple de Note de bas de page -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dans LyX, pour fermer cette Note de bas de page, cliquez sur la boîte contenant - l'étiquette de la note. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans la sortie finale, la note de bas de page apparaîtra comme un numéro - en exposant placé dans le texte à la position où la boîte de note a été - insérée. - Le texte de la note est placé en bas de la page courante. - Le numéro de la note est calculé par LyX -\lang english -according to the document class. - -\lang french - Pour l'instant, LyX ne gère pas d'un -\lang english -particular -\lang french - système de numérotation, mais vous pouvez utiliser d'autres méthodes en - utilisant des commandes LaTeX spéciales comme celles décrites dans le manuel - -\emph on -Objets -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Notes en marge -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notes en marge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Notes_en_Marge" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans LyX, les notes en marge ressemblent aux notes en bas de page et se - comportent de la même façon. - Quand vous insérez une note en marge avec -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -marge -\family default - ou avec le bouton de la barre d'outils -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "marginalnote-insert" -\end_inset - - , vous voyez apparaître dans votre texte une boîte grise avec une étiquette - rouge -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -marge -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Cette boîte est la représentation de votre note dans LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voyez ci-contre un exemple de note en marge -\begin_inset Marginal -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -C'est une note en marge. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les notes en marge apparaissent dans la marge de droite dans les documents - imprimés sur un seul côté. - Dans les documents imprimés recto-verso, elles apparaissent dans la marge - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -extérieure -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - – la gauche sur les pages paires et la droite sur les pages impaires. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour plus d'information sur les notes en marge, voyez la section -\emph on -Notes en marge -\emph default - dans le manuel des -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Graphiques et images -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Images -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Graphiques -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Graphiques" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour placer une figure dans votre document, cliquez sur le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - dans la barre d'outils, ou faites -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Graphique -\family default -. - Une fenêtre s'ouvre, qui vous permet de choisir le fichier à charger. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette fenêtre de dialogue contient de nombreux paramètres dont les noms - devraient être explicites. - L'onglet -\family sans -Graphique -\family default - vous permet de choisir le fichier contenant votre image. - L'image peut être transformée en donnant un angle de rotation et un facteur - d'échelle. - On peut aussi définir directement la taille de l'image en fixant une de - ses dimensions. - Les unités de longueurs utilisées sont décrites dans l'appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Unités-de-longueur" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'onglet -\family sans -Rogner -\family default - permet de définir la zone de l'image qui sera reproduite à l'impression. - Cette zone peut être calculée automatiquement à partir des données présentes - dans le fichier en appuyant sur le bouton -\family sans -Valeurs -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fichier -\family default -. - Avec l'option -\family sans -Rogner -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -boîte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -délimitation, -\family default -seule la portion de l'image qui est dans la zone définie sera imprimée. - En principe vous n'avez pas à vous occuper des coordonnées de l'image et - donc vous pouvez ignorer l'onglet -\family sans -Rogner -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les experts ès-LaTeX pourront préciser des options supplémentaires pour - LaTeX dans l'onglet -\family sans -Options -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LyX -\family default -. - Vous pouvez en particulier préciser l'apparence que devra avoir l'image - dans LyX. - L'option -\family sans -Mode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -brouillon -\family default - fait que les images ne seront pas représentées dans la sortie, seuls des - cadres de la même taille apparaîtront. - L'option -\family sans -Ne pas décompresser à l'exportation -\family default - est expliquée dans le manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -, dans la section -\emph on -La fenêtre de dialogue graphique -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La fenêtre de dialogue Graphique peut être rappelée à tout moment en cliquant - sur une image. - L'image apparaîtra dans la sortie finale à la position exacte qu'elle a - dans le texte. - Voici un exemple d'image qui se trouve dans son propre paragraphe, ce dernier - étant centré horizontalement: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/mobius.eps - scale 70 - rotateOrigin center - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous voulez ajouter une légende à votre image ou si vous voulez y faire - référence, vous devez la mettre dans un flottant, voyez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Figures-Flottantes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les formats d'images -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Images ! Formats -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Formats-d'images" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez insérer des images dans n'importe quel format connu. - Mais, comme nous l'avons expliqué dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" - -\end_inset - -, chaque format pour la sortie du document ne va accepter qu'un petit nombre - de formats d'images. - Pour s'en sortir LyX utilise le programme -\family typewriter -ImageMagick -\family default - en arrière plan pour convertir les formats que vous utilisez dans un des - formats acceptés par le format de sortie. - Ces conversions prenant forcément du temps, vous pouvez accélérer vos exportati -ons en n'utilisant que les formats listés dans les sous sections de la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme pour les polices de caractères, il y a deux grands types de formats - d'images: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -images -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -matricielles -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ou -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bitmap) dans lesquelles l'image est décomposée en une mosaïque des points - (ou pixels), souvent enregistrés sous un format compressé. - Elles ne sont pas facilement redimensionnables et on voit apparaître des - petits carrés quand on utilise des agrandissements trop importants (aspect - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -pixellisé -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -). - Les formats matriciels les plus connus sont le GIF ( -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Graphics Interchange Format -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -, avec comme suffixe de fichier -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.gif -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -GIF|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Format d'image -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, le PNG ( -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Portable Network Graphics, suffixe -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.gif -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PNG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Formats d'image -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et le JPG ( -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Joint Photographic Expert Group, suffixe -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.jpeg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -JPG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Formats d'image -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -images -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vectorielles -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ou -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -redimensionnables) dans lesquelles l'image est décrite sous forme d'objets, - ou vecteurs (lignes, courbes, formes géométriques, caractères...) et peut - donc être redimensionnée comme on le veut sans perte de précision. - La possibilité de redimensionner les images est très utilisé pour les présentat -ions, vu que le passage par un vidéo-projecteur entraîne forcément un redimensio -nnement. - Le redimensionnement permet aussi de présenter des documents en ligne où - le lecteur pourra agrandir les diagrammes comme il le souhaite pour en - étudier les détails. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Les principaux formats vectoriels sont le SVG ( -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Scalable Vector Graphics -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, suffixe -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -.svg -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -SVG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Format d'image -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, l'EPS ( -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -encapsulated PostScript -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, suffixe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.eps -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -EPS|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Format d'image -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et le PDF ( -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Portable Document Format -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, suffixe -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -.pdf -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Format d'image -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - En fait vous pouvez convertir n'importe quel format matriciel en PDF ou - en EPS, mais le résultat ne sera pas redimensionnable. - Dans ce cas seul une en-tête est réellement ajoutée à l'image initiale -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dans le cas du PDF l'image initiale est aussi compressée. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En principe il est quasiment impossible de convertir une image matricielle - en graphique vectoriel, seul le contraire est possible. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Groupement de paramétrisation pour les images -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Images ! Groupe de paramétrisation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Chaque image peut définir un nouveau groupe de paramètres d'image ou rejoindre - un groupe existant. - Les images qui appartiennent à un tel groupe partagent leurs paramètres, - ce qui fait que quand on modifie une image du groupe, on modifie aussi - automatiquement toutes les autres images du groupe de la même façon. - Vous pouvez par exemple changer la taille de tout un lot d'images, sans - avoir à répéter l'opération manuellement sur chaque image. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On crée un nouveau groupe -\lang english -by pressing the button -\family sans -Open -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -new -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -group -\family default - in the -\lang french - dialogue -\family sans - Graphique -\family default - -\lang english -in the -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X options -\family default - tab -\lang french -. - On rattache une image à un groupe existant en utilisant le menu contextuel - de l'image et en cochant le nom du groupe voulu -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -La liste des groupes n'apparaît que si au moins un groupe a été défini (NdT). -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Tableaux -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Tableaux" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tableaux -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez insérer un tableau en utilisant soit le bouton de la barre d'outils - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "tabular-insert" -\end_inset - - soit -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tableau -\family default -. - Une fenêtre apparaît, vous demandant le nombre de lignes et de colonnes. - Le tableau a implicitement une bordure au dessus et à gauche de chaque - case, une à droite de la colonne la plus à droite et une en bas de la rangée - du bas, qui forment une boîte autour du tableau. - En plus, la rangée supérieure a aussi une bordure en bas, ce qui fait qu'elle - apparaît séparée du reste du tableau. - Voici un exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -12 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -45 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -98 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -A -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -B -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -multi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -C -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -La fenêtre -\family sans -Tableau -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez agir sur un tableau en cliquant dessus avec le bouton droit - de la souris et ensuite sélectionner -\family sans -Plus\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default -, ce qui fait apparaître une fenêtre avec des options. - Dans cette fenêtre vous pouvez modifier les réglages concernant la cellule, - la colonne et la ligne dans laquelle le curseur se trouve. - La plupart des options peuvent s'appliquer à des sélections. - Ce qui signifie que si vous avez sélectionné plus d'une cellule, plus d'une - ligne ou plus d'une colonne, l'action demandée prendra en compte toute - votre sélection. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En plus de la fenêtre de dialogue, vous pouvez aussi utiliser la -\family sans -barre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'outils -\family default - -\family sans -tableau -\family default -. - Cette dernière apparaît lorsque votre curseur est dans un tableau. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec l'onglet -\family sans -Paramètres -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tableau -\family default - de la fenêtre de dialogue, vous pouvez choisir l'alignement horizontal - de la ligne. - Quand vous ajoutez une colonne ou une ligne, elle est insérée juste à droite - ou juste en dessous de la position de la cellule courante. - L'alignement vertical d'une colonne ne peut être défini que si sa largeur - est fixée. - Une largeur fixée va permettre aux cellules d'avoir des sauts de lignes - et donc, plusieurs paragraphes de texte, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Cellules-de-tableau" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez marquer plusieurs cellules d'une même ligne comme constituant - une cellule multi-colonne en utilisant l'option -\family sans -Multi-colonnes -\family default -. - Cette option fait que les cellules sont fusionnées en -\emph on -une seule -\emph default -cellule, répartie sur plusieurs colonnes. - Les cellules multi-colonnes sont traitées comme des lignes à part, ce qui - fait que leur alignement, leur largeur et la configuration de leur bordure - n'affectent que la cellule et elle seule. - Voici un exemple utilisant une cellule multicolonne dans sa première ligne - et une cellule sans bordure supérieure dans la dernière ligne -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -abc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -def ghi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -jkl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -A -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -B -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -C -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -D -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les utilisateurs compétents peuvent déclarer des paramètres LaTeX spéciaux - pour modifier leur tableau. - Ces derniers sont indispensables pour certaines mise en forme spéciales, - comme les cellules multi-lignes, ils sont expliqués dans le manuel -\emph on -Objets -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -insérés -\emph default -. - Vous pouvez aussi faire tourner la cellule courante ou même tout le tableau - de 90 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. - Ces rotations ne sont pas visibles dans LyX, mais devraient l'être dans - la sortie finale. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - la plupart des visionneuses DVI ne sont -\emph on -pas -\emph default - capables d'afficher ces rotations. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'onglet -\family sans -Bordures -\family default - vous permet d'ajouter ou de supprimer les bordures pour la ligne ou la - colonne courante. - L'option -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - met des bordures à toutes les cellules. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tableaux longs -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tableaux ! Tableaux Longs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tableaux longs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si un tableau est trop haut pour tenir sur un page, vous pouvez utiliser - l'option -\family sans -Utiliser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tableaux -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -longs -\family default - de l'onglet -\family sans -Tableau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -long -\family default - de la fenêtre -\family sans -Paramètres -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tableau -\family default - pour le répartir automatiquement sur plusieurs pages. - En cochant cette option, vous activez un certain nombre de cases d'option - et vous pouvez alors définir: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -En-tête: la ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessus et qui n'ont - pas d'attributs particuliers, sont définies comme faisant partie des lignes - d'en-tête utilisées pour toutes les pages du tableau long; sauf pour la - première page, si -\family sans -Premier -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en-tête -\family default - est défini. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Premier -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -En-tête: la ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessus et qui n'ont - pas d'attributs particuliers, sont définies comme faisant partie des lignes - d'en-tête utilisées pour la première page du tableau long. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Pied: la ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessous et qui n'ont - pas d'attributs particuliers, sont définies comme faisant partie des lignes - constituant les pieds de toutes les pages du tableau long ; sauf de la - dernière page si -\family sans -Dernier -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pied -\family default - est défini. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Dernier -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pied: la ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessous et qui n'ont - pas d'attributs particuliers, sont définies comme faisant partie des lignes - constituant le pied de la dernière page du tableau long. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Légende: la première ligne est transformée en une seule colonne. - Vous pouvez maintenant y mettre la légende du tableau grâce au menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Légende -\family default -\series bold -. - -\series default -Vous trouverez plus d'information sur les tableaux longs dans le manuel - -\emph on -Objets Insérés -\emph default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi préciser une ligne où la table devra être coupée. - Si vous activez plusieurs options pour une même ligne, vous devez être - conscients que seule la première sera prise en compte -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Il y a quelque chose que je n'ai pas compris : la deuxième option serait - mise automatiquement à -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -est vide -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -...(NdT) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Dans ce contexte, première veut dire première en suivant l'ordre -\family sans -Pied, Dernier -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Pied, -\family default -et -\family sans - En-tête, Premier -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -En-tête -\family default -. - Voyez le tableau long qui suit pour voir comment ça marche : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Exemple d'annuaire téléphonique (ignorez les noms) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -NOM -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Exemple d'annuaire téléphonique -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -NOM -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -suite ... -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -999 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Fin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Cellules de tableau -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tableaux ! Cellules -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Cellules-de-tableau" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une cellule de tableau peut contenir du texte, des équations en ligne, une - figure ou même un autre tableau. - Tous ces types d'objets peuvent être placés dans la même cellule. - La taille et le style de la police de caractère peuvent être modifiés. - Par contre, vous ne pouvez pas y mettre un environnement (comme une section), - ni changer les options de paragraphe comme l'interligne. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour pouvoir utiliser un texte sur plusieurs lignes dans une cellule, vous - devez fixer la largeur de la colonne dans la fenêtre de dialogue. - Votre texte sera alors automatiquement coupé en plusieurs lignes et la - cellule grandira verticalement pour s'adapter aux nouvelles lignes. - Voici un exemple: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entrée multi-ligne dans un tableau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -5 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -6 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Et ceci pour allonger. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -7 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -8 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entrée multi-ligne dans un tableau. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Et ceci pour allonger. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -9 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les opérations de coupé-collé entre des tableaux ou des cellules marchent - relativement bien. - Vous pouvez couper et coller plus d'une ligne -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notez que vous ne pouvez coller dans une sélection de plusieurs cellules - puisque dans les cas, par exemple de la copie d'un mot seul dans une sélection - 2×3, ce qu'il faut faire n'est pas clair. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Vous sélectionnez les cellules à copier avec la souris ou avec la touche - -\family sans -Shift -\family default - et les touches de déplacement, comme d'habitude. - Vous pouvez copier le tableau en entier et en un seul bloc, en commençant - la sélection juste en dehors du tableau. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Flottants -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flottants -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Flottants" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un flottant est une portion de document, qui peut être associé à une étiquette - et dont la position n'est pas fixée. - Il peut -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -flotter -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - d'une page ou deux en avant ou en arrière, pour trouver l'emplacement le - plus approprié. - Les -\family sans -Notes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\family default - et le -\family sans -Notes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -marge -\family default - sont aussi des flottants, puisqu'elles peuvent se retrouver sur la page - suivante quand il y a trop de notes sur la page courante. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Grâce aux flottants, on peut obtenir automatiquement une mise en page de - très grande qualité. - Les images et les tableaux peuvent être répartis sur plusieurs pages pour - éviter des lignes blanches ou des pages sans texte. - Comme le fait d'utiliser un flottant supprime la liaison entre le texte - et le tableau ou l'image, on va pouvoir faire référence au flottant dans - le texte. - Les flottants sont donc numérotés. - Les références croisées sont décrites dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Références-croisées" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour insérer un flottant, on utilise un des sous menus du menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flottant. - -\family default - Une boîte va être insérée dans votre document avec par exemple une étiquette - du genre -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -#: -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - (où # est un numéro). - L'étiquette est automatiquement traduite dans la langue du document dans - la sortie finale. - Après l'étiquette vous pouvez insérer du texte comme légende. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flottants ! Légendes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - L'image ou le tableau est inséré avant ou après la légende dans un paragraphe - séparé, à l'intérieur du flottant. - Pour améliorer la lisibilité de votre document dans LyX, vous pouvez fermer - ou ouvrir la boîte de votre flottant en cliquant avec le bouton de gauche - sur la boîte grise qui se trouve en haut à gauche de celui-ci. - Une boîte de flottant fermée ressemble à ceci : -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/floatQt4.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - - – une case grise avec un texte rouge. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est recommandé d'insérer les flottants comme des paragraphes séparés - pour éviter des erreurs avec LaTeX, quand le texte qui entoure le flottant - est formatté de façon particulière. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Exemples -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Figure flottantes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flottants ! Figures flottantes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Figures-Flottantes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Ornithorinque" - -\end_inset - - a été créée via le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flottant\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Figure -\family default - ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert figure" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - L'image a été insérée en positionnant le curseur au(-dessus de la légende - et en utilisant le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Graphique -\family default - ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - L'image a été centrée horizontalement en positionnant le curseur devant - ou derrière l'image et en appelant le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres de paragraphe -\family default - ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/platypus.eps - width 50col% - rotateOrigin center - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Ornithorinque" - -\end_inset - -Un ornithorynque sévèrement déformé dans un flottant de figure. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce flottant de figure montrent aussi comment ajouter une étiquette et créer - une référence croisée pointant sur elle : Insérez-vous une étiquette dans - la légende à l'aide du menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Étiquette -\family default - ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils, et ensuite y faire référence en utilisant le menu - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Référence -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -croisée -\family default -ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - Il est important d'utiliser des références pour les flottants de figures - plutôt que des locutions vagues du genre -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -la figure ci-dessous -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, puisque LaTeX va repositionner la figure dans le document final. - Votre figure risque de ne plus être -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -ci-dessous -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - du tout! Pour en savoir plus sur les références croisées, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Références-croisées" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En principe on met une figure dans un flottant, mais parfois vous pouvez - vouloir deux figures avec chacune sa sous-légende. - C'est possible en insérant des flottants d'image dans un flottant d'image - existant. - Notez que seule la légende principale du flottant sera ajoutée à la liste - des figures comme indiqué dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Liste-des-figures," - -\end_inset - -. - La figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." - -\end_inset - - est une exemple de flottant de figure avec deux images mises l'une à côté - de l'autre. - Vous pouvez aussi mettre les images les unes sous les autres. - Les figures -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Structure-indéfinissable" - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Ornithorynque" - -\end_inset - - sont des sous-figures. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Structure-indéfinissable" - -\end_inset - -Structure indéfinissable -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Ornithorynque" - -\end_inset - -Ornithorynque -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/platypus.eps - lyxscale 60 - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Deux images déformées. -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Deux-images-déformées." - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Flottant de tableau -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flottants ! Flottant de tableau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Flottant-de-tableau" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les flottants de tableau sont insérés en utilisant le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flottant\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tableau ou le bouton -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert table" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - Ils ont les mêmes propriétés que les flottants de figures -\lang english -that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not - above like for figures and that the label begins with -\lang french - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -tab: -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Le tableau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Flottant-de-tableau" - -\end_inset - - est un exemple de flottant de tableau. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Flottant-de-tableau" - -\end_inset - -Un flottant de tableau. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jules -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Marie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jean -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -a & b\\ -c & d -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Autres flottants -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Flottants ! Détails -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX propose d'autres types de flottants, ainsi que des rotations de flottants. - Il vous permet également de modifier le système de numérotation, de diriger - le placement, et de modifier la mise en page et le placement de la légende. - Toutes ces fonctionnalités sont expliquées dans le chapitre -\emph on -Flottants -\emph default -du manuel des -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Minipages -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Minipages -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Minipages" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeX fournit un mécanisme qui, en fait, permet de produire une page à l'intérie -ur d'une page. - On parle alors d'une minipage, et à l'intérieur de celle-ci, toutes les - règles d'indentation, de saut de ligne, etc. - s'appliquent. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les minipages de LyX ont leur propre boîte repliable qui peut être insérée - grâce au menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Boîte -\family default -. - En faisant un clic droit sur la boîte, vous pouvez changer la largeur de - la minipage et sa positions dans la page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "30col%" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -Ceci est une minipage. - Le texte est en italique. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -Les minipages sont souvent utilisées pour du texte dans une autre langue - ou nécessitant une mise en forme différente. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -Si vous placez deux minipages côte-à-côte, vous pouvez utiliser des -\family sans -Ressorts -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontaux -\family default - comme ceux décrits section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ceci est une mini page avec un texte bidon complètement stupide. - Ce texte stupide ne sert qu'à augmenter la taille de la minipage. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ceci est une mini page avec un texte bidon complètement stupide. - Ce texte stupide ne sert qu'à augmenter la taille de la minipage. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En cliquant avec le bouton de droite sur une minipage, vous pouvez aussi - changer le type de boîte, de la minipage. - Tous les types de boîtes et leurs paramètres sont décrits en détails dans - le chapitre -\emph on -Boîtes -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default - . -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Formules mathématiques -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:Formules-mathématiques" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formules | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Math -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les sujets de ce chapitre sont traités en détail dans le manuel -\emph on -Maths. - -\emph default -Vous y trouverez aussi des trucs et astuces pour les cas spéciaux. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Les bases -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Les bases -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour écrire une formule mathématique, vous pouvez simplement cliquer sur - l'icône -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-mode on" -\end_inset - - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-mode" -\end_inset - -). - Un petit carré bleu s'ouvrira, avec les coins d'un rectangle violet autour. - Ce carré bleu indique la position de la formule elle-même, et les coins - violets indiquent à quel niveau d'emboîtement vous êtes dans la formule. - Vous pouvez aussi choisir une type particulier de formule avec le menu - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez éditer les paramètres d'une formule et y ajouter d'autre structures - mathématiques avec la -\family sans -Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default -, qui apparaît automatiquement quand le curseur est dans une formule. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a deux types principaux de formules; les formules -\emph on -en ligne -\emph default - apparaissent au sein de la ligne de texte, comme dans ce cas : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette ligne contient une formule -\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ -\end_inset - - en ligne. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les formules -\emph on -hors-ligne -\emph default - apparaissent séparées du corps du texte, comme si elles avaient leur propre - paragraphe, comme dans cet exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -A=B -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous ne pouvez numéroter ou faire référence qu'à des formules hors-ligne. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX accepte aussi de nombreuses commandes mathématiques LaTeX. - Par exemple en tapant dans une formule -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -alpha -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - suivi d'un espace on insère la lettre grecque -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ -\end_inset - -. - Taper la commande LaTeX peut parfois être plus rapide que d'utiliser la - -\family sans -Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -C'est vrai en particulier pour tous ceux qui ont l'habitude de taper le - LaTeX dans le texte. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Naviguer dans une formule -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Navigation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour vous déplacer dans une formule existante, vous avez un meilleur contrôle - avec les flèches du clavier. - L'éditeur mathématique utilise des petits rectangles pour indiquer les - endroits où l'on peut insérer quelque chose. - Les flèches du clavier peuvent servir à naviguer dans les parties d'une - formule. - En appuyant sur -\family sans -Espace -\family default -, on quitte une fraction ou toute autre élément de formule (une racine carrée - -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ -\end_inset - -, ou des parenthèses -\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ -\end_inset - -, ou une matrice -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - -). - En appuyant sur -\family sans -Échap -\family default -, on quitte la formule et le curseur est placé à droite de la boîte. - -\family sans -Tab -\family default - peut servir à se déplacer horizontalement dans une formule, par exemple - dans les cases d'une matrice ou les positions d'une équation multi-lignes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Espace -\family default -, qui apparaît dans ce document sous la forme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, ne semble rien faire dans une formule, puisqu'en fait il n'ajoute pas - d'espace entre les caractères, mais sort d'une structure emboîtée. - Pour cette raison, vous devez faire attention en l'utilisant. - Par exemple, si vous voulez -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ -\end_inset - -, tapez -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -2x+1 -\series default -, et pas -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -2x -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -+ -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -1 -\series default -, puisque dans le dernier cas seul le -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Formula $2x$ -\end_inset - - -\family default - sera sous la racine, -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ -\end_inset - -. - Pour ceux qui ont appris à insérer des espaces dans les expressions, il - faut s'y déshabituer. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez laisser beaucoup de structures partiellement remplies dans une - formule, comme cette matrice : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -\lambda_{1}\\ - & \ddots\\ - & & \lambda_{n} -\end{array}\right) -\] - -\end_inset - -Si vous laissez une fraction partiellement remplie, ou un exposant sans - rien dedans, le résultat est imprévisible, mais la plupart des structures - font comme si de rien n'était. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Sélectionner du texte -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez sélectionner du texte dans une formule de deux façons différentes. - Placez le curseur à un bout de la chaîne de caractères que vous voulez, - et utilisez -\family sans -Maj -\family default - avec une flèche du clavier pour sélectionner le texte. - Il sera mis en valeur comme pour la sélection de texte normal. - Vous pouvez également sélectionner le texte avec la souris de la façon - habituelle. - Ce texte peut ensuite être coupé ou copié, puis collé dans n'importe quelle - formule (mais pas dans une zone de texte normal dans LyX). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Indices et exposants -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Exposants -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Indices -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez utiliser la palette mathématique pour mettre des indices et - des exposants (boutons -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-superscript" -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-subscript" -\end_inset - -), mais la façon de loin la plus simple est la méthode TeX standard. - Pour obtenir -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - -, tapez (dans une formule) -\series bold -x^2 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default -. - L' -\family sans -espace -\family default - finale remet le curseur en bas, sur la ligne de l'expression, le faisant - sortir de l'exposant. - Si vous tapez -\series bold -x^2y -\series default -, vous aurez -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ -\end_inset - -, pour avoir -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ -\end_inset - -, tapez -\series bold -x^2 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -y -\series default -. - Si vous utilisez dans l'exposant des caractères qui doivent être accentués - avec un accent circonflexe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -^ -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, vous devez utiliser une -\family sans -espace -\family default - supplémentaire pour séparer l'accent et le caractère. - Par exemple, si vous voulez -\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ -\end_inset - -, tapez -\series bold -x^ -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -a -\series default -. - Les indices marchent de la même manière, pour avoir -\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ -\end_inset - -, faites (dans une formule) -\series bold -a_1 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fractions -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Fractions -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Créez une fraction soit avec -\series bold - -\backslash -frac -\series default - soit en utilisant l'icône de fraction -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\frac" -\end_inset - - de la -\family sans -Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default -. - Vous aurez une fraction vide, avec deux carrés d'insertion, un en haut - et un en bas. - Le curseur va tout seul au numérateur de la fraction. - Pour passer au dénominateur, tapez simplement -\family sans -Bas -\family default -. - Pour remonter, tapez -\family sans -Haut -\family default - (flèches du clavier). - Toute structure mathématique peut être placée dans une fraction, comme - le montre cet exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} -2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 -\end{array}\right)}\right] -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Racines -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Racines -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les racines peuvent être créées en utilisant le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\sqrt" -\end_inset - - ou -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\root" -\end_inset - - de la -\family sans -Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default - ou tapant les commandes -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default - ou -\series bold - -\backslash -root -\series default -. - Avec la commande -\series bold - -\backslash -root -\series default - vous pouvez créer des racines cubiques ou d'ordre plus élevé, alors que - -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default - ne produit que des racines carrées. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Opérateurs avec des bornes -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Opérateurs-avec-bornes" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Sommes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Intégrales -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les signes somme ( -\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ -\end_inset - -) et intégrale ( -\begin_inset Formula $\int$ -\end_inset - -) sont très souvent ornés d'une ou plusieurs bornes. - Ces bornes sont entrées dans LyX juste après le symbole, comme s'il s'agissait - d'un indice et d'un exposant. - Les bornes de la somme seront automatiquement placées au-dessus et au-dessous - du symbole dans le style hors ligne, mais en ligne elles seront sur le - côté, comme dans -\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ -\end_inset - -, comparé à -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\sum_{n=1}^{\infty}\frac{x^{n}}{n}=\ln\left(\frac{1}{1-x}\right) -\] - -\end_inset - -En revanche, les signes -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -intégrale -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - décalent toujours les bornes sur le côté, en ligne : -\begin_inset Formula $\int_{a}^{x}f(t)dt:=F(x)$ -\end_inset - - comme hors ligne : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\int_{-\infty}^{\infty}\frac{dx}{1+x^{2}}=\pi -\] - -\end_inset - -Les deux symboles sont automatiquement mis à la bonne taille en mode hors - ligne. - L'emplacement des bornes (directement au-dessus et au-dessous, ou décalées - vers la droite) peut être changé en plaçant le curseur devant le signe - et en tapant -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-limits" -\end_inset - - ou en utilisant le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Changer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -limites -\family default -. - Le changement exact dépend du signe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certaines autres expressions mathématiques ont cette fonction d'indice mobile, - comme -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Limites -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x) -\] - -\end_inset - -qui place le -\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ -\end_inset - - sous la limite en mode hors ligne, mais pas en mode en ligne, -\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -lim -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - a été entré comme une fonction, en tapant -\family typewriter - -\backslash -lim -\family default - dans LyX en mode math, ou en le choisissant parmi les -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -fonctions -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans la -\family sans -Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default -, voir la Section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Fonctions-math" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les symboles mathématiques -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Symboles -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La plupart des symboles utilisés en mathématique se trouvent dans la -\family sans -Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default -, sous l'une des catégories proposées : -\family sans -Grec, Flèches, Opérateurs, Relations Binaires -\family default -... - Il y a aussi des catégories proposant les symboles de l'AMS ( -\lang english -American Mathematical Society -\lang french -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous connaissez la macro standard LaTeX pour un symbole donné que vous - voulez insérer, vous n'avez pas à vous servir de ces fenêtres, mais elles - vous seront utiles pour les symboles dont vous ne connaissez pas le nom - LaTeX. - Notez que les symboles AMS ne seront affichés graphiquement dans LyX que - si vous installez les polices adéquates, comme c'est décrit dans le manuel - correspondant. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Changer l'espacement -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Espacement -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous voudrez peut-être créer des espaces qui soient différents de l'espacement - proposé implicitement par LaTeX. - Pour cela, tapez -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - - -\family default - ou utilisez le bouton -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\space" -\end_inset - - -\family default - de la -\family sans -Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default -. - Cela génère un petit espace et cela affiche un petit marqueur à l'écran. - Voici un exemple obtenu en tapant la séquence -\series bold -a Ctrl-Espace b -\series default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ -\end_inset - - (ce qui apparaît sous la forme -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png - -\end_inset - -dans LyX). - Vous pouvez changer la taille de cet espace simplement en plaçant le curseur - juste après le marqueur d'espace et en appuyant de nouveau sur la barre - d'espace. - À chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la barre d'espace la taille change. - Le nombre de possibilités étant limité, la taille reviendra à sa valeur - initiale au bout d'un certain nombre de changements. - Certains marqueurs sont représentés en rouge car ils représentent des espaces - négatifs. - Voici deux exemples: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Ctrl-Espace b -\series default - et 3× -\family sans -Espace -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Ctrl-Espace b -\series default - et 5× -\family sans -Espace -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fonctions mathématiques -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Fonctions -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Fonctions-math" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La -\family sans -Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default - contient sous le bouton -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\functions" -\end_inset - - -\family default - un certain nombre de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -fonctions -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - comme -\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ -\end_inset - -, etc. - (vous pouvez les entrer dans une formule en tapant -\series bold - -\backslash -sin -\series default -, etc.) La pratique courante en mathématiques veut que les fonctions qui - sont des noms, comme -\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ -\end_inset - -, ne soit pas en italique pour éviter des confusions puisque -\begin_inset Formula $sin$ -\end_inset - - signifie normalement -\begin_inset Formula $s·i·n$ -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces macros spéciales vont aussi produire un espacement correct autour de - la fonction. - Par exemple l'expression -\begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$ -\end_inset - - sera typographiée différemment de -\begin_inset Formula $asinx$ -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour des mots qui correspondent à des objets mathématiques plus sophistiqués, - comme -\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ -\end_inset - -, la macro change la façon dont les indices sont placés, ce qui est décrit - dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Opérateurs-avec-bornes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Accents -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Accents -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous insérez des caractères accentués dans une formule de la même façon - qu'en mode texte. - Ça peut dépendre de votre clavier, ou des fichiers de profils de touches - que vous utilisez. - Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les macros TeX correspondantes. - C'est-à-dire que vous pouvez saisir -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - - même sans l'avoir sur votre clavier, en tapant -\series bold - -\backslash -hat -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -a -\series default -dans la formule. - Le tableau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Nom-des-accents" - -\end_inset - - reprend les correspondances entre les noms en mode texte et ceux en mode - math pour les divers accents. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Nom-des-accents" - -\end_inset - -Nom des accents et la commande correspondante. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nom -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Commande -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Exemple -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -circonflexe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -hat -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -aigu -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -acute -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -umlaut -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -ddot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -point -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -dot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -brève -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -breve -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -caron -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -check -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -macron -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -bar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -vecteur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -vec -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enfin, vous pouvez choisir un de ces accents parmi les -\family sans -Décorations -\family default - disponibles dans la palette mathématique avec le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\hat" -\end_inset - -, et il s'appliquera à toute sélection que vous aurez faite dans une formule. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Parenthèses et délimiteurs -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Parenthèses-et-Délimiteurs" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Parenthèses -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Délimiteurs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a plusieurs délimiteurs disponibles avec LyX. - Pour un usage courant, les touches -\family typewriter -[{]}()| -\backslash -<> -\family default - devraient suffire, mais l'effet est meilleur avec l'icône -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/math/delim.png - -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils math, surtout si vous voulez encadrer une grande structure -, comme une matrice ou une fraction, ou si vous avez plusieurs profondeurs - de parenthèses. - Par exemple, voici comment vous placeriez les crochets autour d'une matrice - standard : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right] -\] - -\end_inset - -pour rendre plus visibles les niveaux de parenthèses. - Ci-dessous, l'expression de gauche a été saisie en utilisant l'icône de - délimitation -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" -\end_inset - - et l'expression de droite a été saisie en utilisant les parenthèses -\family typewriter -() -\family default -. - -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))} -\] - -\end_inset - -Si vous utilisez l'icône de délimitation, les parenthèses et autres délimiteurs - choisis dans ce menu s'adaptent à la taille de ce qu'elles contiennent. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est très facile de construire les crochets que vous souhaitez. - Cliquez sur le crochet que vous voulez avoir à gauche dans la fenêtre de - gauche et sur celui que vous voulez à droite dans la fenêtre de droite, - et placez-les dans le document en appuyant sur le bouton -\family sans -Insertion -\family default -. - Si vous voulez un côté sans délimiteur, utilisez le bouton vide. - LyX affichera une ligne pointillée, mais n'imprimera rien. - Si vous cochez l'option -\family sans -Apparier -\family default -, vous ne choisissez qu'un seul délimiteur, LyX choisit pour vous le délimiteur - de même type pour l'autre côté. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous décidez après coup de placer des parenthèses (ou une autre structure - mathématique, comme une racine carrée, ou un autre ornement) autour d'une - structure mathématique déjà existante, c'est faisable. - Sélectionnez la structure en question (en maintenant la touche -\family sans -Shift -\family default - enfoncée tout en bougeant le curseur avec les flèches du clavier, ou en - sélectionnant avec la souris). - Ensuite, choisissez les délimiteurs gauche et droit appropriés, et cliquez - sur -\family sans -Insertion -\family default -. - Les parenthèses seront placées autour de la structure sélectionnée. - Les combinaisons les plus courantes (parenthèses, crochets et accolades - associées) peuvent être saisies via les raccourcis clavier. - Par exemple, pour insérer une paire de parenthèses flexibles, sélectionner - la structure à parenthéser et saisir -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-delim ( )" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Matrices et équations sur plusieurs lignes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Matrices -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Équations sur plusieurs lignes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est facile d'entrer un vecteur ou une matrice avec LyX, via la -\family sans -Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default -: il y a un bouton -\family sans -Matrice -\family default - -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" -\end_inset - - -\family default -, qui ouvre une fenêtre pour choisir le nombre de lignes et de colonnes. - Voici un exemple : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -1 & 2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 & 6\\ -7 & 8 & 9 -\end{array}\right) -\] - -\end_inset - -Les parenthèses ne sont pas automatiques, mais vous pouvez les ajouter avec - les -\family sans -Délimiteurs -\family default - comme c'est expliqué dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Parenthèses-et-Délimiteurs" - -\end_inset - -. - Quand vous créez la matrice, vous pouvez décider si les colonnes (ou seulement - certaines d'entre elles) seront alignées à gauche, à droite ou centrées. - Vous modifiez cet alignement avec la case -\family sans -Horizontal -\family default - avec les lettres -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -l -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -r -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, et -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -c -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Ce réglage est implicitement -\family typewriter - ccc -\family default -\SpecialChar \ldots{} - Chaque lettre correspond à une colonne: par exemple, -\family typewriter -lcr -\family default - signifie que la première colonne sera alignée à gauche ( -\family typewriter -l -\family default - pour -\emph on -left -\emph default -), la deuxième sera centrée ( -\family typewriter -c -\family default - pour -\emph on -center -\emph default -) et la troisième sera alignée à droite ( -\family typewriter -r -\family default - pour -\emph on -right -\emph default -). - Ça ressemble à ça : -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\begin{array}{lcr} -\textrm{cette} & \textrm{cette colonne} & \textrm{cette colonne}\\ -\textrm{colonne} & \textrm{est} & \textrm{est alignée}\\ -\textrm{est alignée à gauche} & \textrm{centrée} & \textrm{à droite} -\end{array} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez ajouter des lignes à une matrice déjà existante en tapant -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - dans la matrice, et vous pouvez ajouter des colonnes, et supprimer lignes - et colonnes, dans le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math -\family default -ou les boutons de la palette. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a d'autre tableaux qui peuvent être utilisés dans des formules, comme - la distinction des cas. - L'environnement -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -cas -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - peut être inséré directement avec le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Environnement -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cas, -\family default - ou en utilisant le bouton de la palette ou bien en tapant la commande -\series bold - -\backslash -cases -\series default -. - Voici un exemple : -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\begin{cases} --1 & x<0\\ -0 & x=0\\ -1 & x>0 -\end{cases} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - -Les équations sur plusieurs lignes sont obtenues en tapant -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - dans une formule. - Dans une formule vide, vous verrez apparaître trois boîtes bleues, une - pour chaque colonne. - Vous pouvez aussi transformer une formule hors ligne existante en formule - multi-lignes en tapant -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - - alors que le curseur se trouve dans la formule d'origine. - La partie de la formule se trouvant avant le signe de relation (signe égal - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -= -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - etc.) sera insérée dans la première colonne, le signe de relations sera - dans la seconde colonne et le reste de la formule sera dans la troisième - colonne. - Une nouvelle ligne sera ajoutée à chaque fois que vous appuirez sur -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -. - Les formules multi-lignes sont toujours des formules hors ligne. - En voici un exemple : -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\ -a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared} -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que la zone centrale est prévue pour les opérateurs de relation, les - structures qui sont placées dans cette colonne sont imprimées en plus petits - caractères: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray*} -\frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} -\end{eqnarray*} - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'environnement de formule multi-ligne qui vient d'être décrit se nomme - -\family typewriter -eqnarray -\family default -. - Il existe d'autres types de formules multi-lignes qui sont mieux adaptées - à certaines situations et que l'on peut utiliser pour améliorer l'espacement - entre les lignes de la formule -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand eqref -reference "eq:asquared" - -\end_inset - -. - Ces autres types sont détaillés dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Types-de-formules-AMS" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Numérotation et étiquetage des équations -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Numérotation-et-étiquetage" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Numérotation des Formules -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math !Référence à des formules -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour numéroter une formule, placez le curseur dedans et utilisez le menu - -\family sans -Editer\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Numéroter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -toute -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -formule -\family default - ou le raccourci clavier -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - -. - Le numéro de la formule apparaît dans LyX sous la forme entre parenthèses. - -\lang english -The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated. - -\lang french - Le positionnement et le format du numéro de formule dépend de la classe - du document. - Dans ce document les numéros sont en principe imprimés avec le numéro du - chapitre, séparés par un point: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{equation} -1+1=2 -\end{equation} - -\end_inset - -Utiliser -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - - sur une formule numérotée va supprimer sa numérotation. - On ne peut numéroter que des formules hors-ligne. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les formules multi-lignes peuvent être numérotées lignes par ligne: utiliser - le menu -\family sans -Editer\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Numéroter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -cette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ligne -\family default - ou le raccourci clavier -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-line-toggle" -\end_inset - - ne modifiera que la numérotation de la ligne où se trouve le curseur: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -1 & = & 3-2\\ -2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ -4 & \leq & 7 -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -Pour activer ou désactiver la numérotation de toutes les lignes en une seule - fois, utilisez le raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - - vu plus haut. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - -On peut faire référence à chaque formule hors ligne du document par son - numéro en utilisant une étiquette. - Comme d'habitude, on ajoute une étiquette en utilisant -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Étiquette -\family default - (bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - -) avec le curseur dans la formule. - Une fenêtre de dialogue s'ouvre pour taper le nom de l'étiquette. - Il est recommandé de garder le préfixe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eq: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - qui est proposé implicitement, car il peut vous aider plus tard à identifier - le type d'élément auquel fait référence cette étiquette, ce qui est utile - quand on a beaucoup d'étiquettes dans un document. - Dans l'exemple suivant nous avons inséré l'étiquette -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -eq:tanhExp -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans la deuxième ligne: -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ - & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -Toutes les lignes avec une étiquette sont numérotées, ce qui fait que LyX - affiche le nom de l'étiquette -\lang english -behind the formula -\lang french - numéro. - Comme pour toutes les étiquettes, vous pouvez faire référence à votre formule - en utilisant le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Référence -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -croisée -\family default -(bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -). - La fenêtre qui s'ouvre vous permet de choisir l'étiquette à laquelle vous - voulez faire référence. - La référence est matérialisée dans LyX par une boîte grise et dans la sortie - finale comme un numéro de formule: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ceci est une référence croisée vers une équation ( -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "eq:tanhExp" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les propriétés des boîtes de références croisées de LyX sont décrites dans - la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Références-croisées" - -\end_inset - -. - Pour réellement supprimer une étiquette, positionnez le curseur en fin - dans la formule et -\lang english -press -\family sans -Del -\family default -\lang french -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Macros définies par l'utilisateur en mode mathématique -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Macros définies par l'utilisateur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Macros -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX permet la définition de macros pour les formules, ce qui est très utile - quand vous avez plusieurs fois la même structure de formule dans votre - document. - Le macros du mode mathématique sont décrites dans le manuel -\emph on -Math -\emph default - dans la section -\emph on -Macros mathématique -\emph default -s. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Réglage fin -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Polices -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Polices -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La police standard pour du texte est l'italique, -\begin_inset Formula $texte$ -\end_inset - -, mais pour les nombres le standard est le romain. - Pour obtenir une police donnée dans une formule, choisissez-la dans la - palette mathématique en utilisant le bouton -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\font" -\end_inset - - -\family default -, ou entrez la commande LaTeX directement, comme c'est indiqué dans la table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Polices-et-commandes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Polices-et-commandes" - -\end_inset - -Polices et commandes correspondantes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Police -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Commande LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathrm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{Gras}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italique}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Chasse\, fixe}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathtt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{TABLEAU\, NOIR}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbb -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathfrak -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIQUE}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathcal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathsf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - vous ne pouvez utiliser que des lettres majuscules avec les polices -\family sans -Tableau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Noir -\family default - et -\family sans -Calligraphique -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand vous utilisez une police spéciale, une boîte bleue est insérée dans - la formule. - Tous les caractères qui seront entrés dans cette boîte seront imprimés - en utilisant cette police. - Si vous tapez -\family sans -Espace -\family default - à l'intérieur de la boîte, le curseur sera positionné à l'extérieur, vous - devez donc utiliser un espace insécable à chaque fois que vous voudrez - avoir un espace à l'intérieur de la boîte. - Voici un exemple où un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -N -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans la police -\family sans -Blackbold -\family default - représente l'ensemble des entiers naturels : -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les styles de police sont emboîtables, comme dans LaTeX. - Ça peut prêter un peu à confusion. - Vous pouvez par exemple mettre un caractère en police -\family sans -Fraktur -\family default - dans une boîte utilisant la police -\family sans -Chasse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fixe -\family default -: -\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Nous conseillons de ne pas utiliser trop souvent cette possibilité. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les changements de police n'ont pas d'effet sur les lettres grecques : -\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Vous pouvez seulement les mettre en gras en utilisant la commande -\series bold - -\backslash -boldsymbol -\series default -, cette commande fonctionne comme les autres commandes qui changent le type - de caractère, elle fonctionne pour tous les symboles, lettres et nombres: - -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un certain nombre d'options pour les polices de caractères sont disponibles - dans le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mode Texte-Math -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -texorpdfstring{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -NdT : Traduction moyenne de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Math Text Mode -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -}{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -texorpdfstring -\series default -est utilisée ici pour éviter que la note apparaisse dans le signet PDF. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Texte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les polices de caractères sont utiles pour entrer quelques caractères dans - une police donnée, mais pas pour saisir du texte. - Pour des portions de texte un peu plus longues, il faut utiliser le texte - mathématique, qui s'obtient à partir de la rubrique -\family sans -Mode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -normal -\family default - sous le bouton -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\font" -\end_inset - - -\family default -de la -\family sans - Palette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématique -\family default - (vous pouvez aussi utiliser le raccourci clavier -\family sans -Alt-M -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -M -\family default -). - Le texte mathématique apparaît dans LyX en noir plutôt qu'en bleu comme - les autres éléments de formules. - Dans le texte mathématique, vous pouvez utiliser des espaces et des accents - comme dans le texte normal. - Voici un exemple: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\begin{cases} -x & \textrm{dans ce cas là}\\ --x & \textrm{dans l'autre cas} -\end{cases} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Taille de police -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Taille de Police -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a quatre style de police (des tailles relatives) qui sont utilisées - dans le mode math et qui sont choisies automatiquement la plupart du temps. - Leurs noms sont : -\family sans -texte -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -normal ( -\family default -textstyle -\family sans -) -\family default -, -\family sans -hors -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne ( -\family default -displaystyle), -\family sans -script -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(petit) ( -\family default -scriptstyle), et -\family sans -scriptscript -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(plus petit) ( -\family default -scriptscriptstyle). - Pour la plupart des caractères, -\family sans -texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -normal -\family default - et -\family sans -hors -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\family default - sont en fait la même taille, mais dans le cas des fractions, des indices - et des exposants et de quelques autres structures, les caractères sont - plus grands en -\family sans -hors -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\family default -. - À part pour quelques opérateurs qui changent leur taille pour s'adapter - aux différentes situations, tous le texte va être mis dans le style que - LaTeX juge approprié. - On peut passer outre ces choix en utilisant le bouton -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\style" -\end_inset - - -\family default - de la palette mathématique. - Une boîte va être insérée dans laquelle vous pouvez utiliser la taille - choisie. - Par exemple, vous pouvez mettre -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ -\end_inset - -, qui est normalement en -\family sans -texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -normal -\family default -, en -\family sans -hors -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\family default - qui est plus grand: -\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ -\end_inset - -. - Les quatre styles sont ainsi utilisés dans l'exemple suivant: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula $hors\: ligne$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle texte\: normal}$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle script}$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscript}$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Toutes ces tailles de polices du mode mathématique sont relatives, ce qui - veut dire que si tout une structure est mise à une certaine taille avec - le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte -\family default -, toutes les tailles des formules qui le constituent vont s'adapter par - rapport à cette taille. - De la même manière, si la taille de base de tout le document est modifiée, - toutes les polices de caractères vont s'adapter pour conserver les rapports - entre les tailles des caractères. - Par exemple, une formule dans la taille de police -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Très très grand -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\size largest -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -à comparer avec la même formule utilisant la taille implicite: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -La différence ne saute pas aux yeux si vous utilisez l'aperçu. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LaTeX AMS -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -AMS math -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! AMS -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L' -\lang english -American Mathematical Society -\lang french - (AMS) fournit des paquetages LaTeX qui sont d'un usage courant. - LyX gère en partie ces paquetages. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Activer la gestion d'AMS -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En activant l'option -\family sans -Utiliser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paquetage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -math -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -AMS -\family default - du menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dans la rubrique -\family sans -Options -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Maths, -\family default -on inclue les paquetages AMS et on rend disponibles toutes leurs fonctionnalités. - AMS est nécessaire pour plusieurs constructions mathématiques, ce qui fait - que quand vous avez des erreurs LaTeX dans des formules, vérifiez d'abord - que vous avez activé l'AMS. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Types de formules AMS -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Types-de-formules-AMS" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Math ! Equations Multi-ligne -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -AMS fournit un choix de divers types de formules. - LyX vous permet de choisir entre -\family typewriter -align -\family default -, -\family typewriter -alignat -\family default -, -\family typewriter -flalign -\family default -, -\family typewriter -gather -\family default - et -\family typewriter -multline -\family default -. - Voyez la documentation d'AMS, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - -, pour les différences entre ces types de formules. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Autres outils -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Références croisées -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Références-croisées" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -References@Références croisées -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un des points forts de LyX, ce sont les références croisées. - Vous pouvez faire référence à n'importe quelle section, flottant, note - de bas de page, formule mathématique, ou encore liste présente dans votre - document. - Pour faire référence à un élément de votre document, il suffit d'y insérer - une étiquette. - L'étiquette sert à la fois de point d'ancrage pour identifier un endroit - dans le document, et de nom pour y faire référence. - Par exemple, nous voulons faire référence au second élément de la liste - suivante: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Premier élément -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "enu:Second-élément" - -\end_inset - -Second élément -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Troisième élément -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -D'abord nous ajoutons une étiquette dans le second élément, soit avec le - menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Etiquette -\family default - , soit en utilisant le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - - de la palette. - Une boîte grise de ce genre -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/labelQt4.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - est insérée à l'endroit du curseur et une fenêtre apparaît pour vous permettre - de saisir le nom de l'étiquette. - LyX propose implicitement un nom formé des mots de l'élément concerné, - précédés d'un préfixe décrivant le type d'élément concerné. - Dans notre exemple on aura le texte -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -enu:Second-élément -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Le préfixe -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -enu: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - indiquant que l'on a affaire à une -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -énumération -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Si on avait placé l'étiquette juste après une en-tête de section, le préfixe - aurait été -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -sec: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour faire référence à l'élément que l'on vient d'identifier, nous allons - utiliser le nom de son étiquette soit en activant le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Référence -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -croisée, -\family default -soit en utilisant le bouton -\family sans - -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -. - Une boîte grise de référence croisée de ce genre -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/referenceQt4.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - - est insérée et une fenêtre de dialogue s'ouvre et affiche la liste de toutes - les étiquettes du document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Plutôt que d'utiliser -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Référence -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -croisée -\family default -, vous pouvez faire un clic droit sur une étiquette et, dans le menu contextuel - qui apparaît alors, sélectionner -\family sans -Copier comme référence -\family default -. - La référence croisée à cette étiquette est copiée dans le presse-papier - et peut être collée à la position courante du curseur avec le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Coller -\family default -(raccourci clavier -\family sans -Ctrl+V -\family default -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici notre référence: l'élément -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "enu:Second-élément" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est recommandé de mettre un espace insécable -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -L'espace insécable est décrit en section -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espace-Insécable" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - entre le texte et le numéro de la référence pour éviter un éventuel saut - de ligne inesthétique entre les deux. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y six variétés de références croisées: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - affiche le numéro de l'élément, c'est le choix implicite: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." - -\end_inset - -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -() affiche le numéro de l'élément entre parenthèses, c'est le - style utilisé normalement pour faire référence à des formules mathématiques, - en particulier quand le mot -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Équation -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est omis: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand eqref -reference "eq:tanhExp" - -\end_inset - -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - affiche le numéro de la page sur laquelle se trouve l'élément: Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand pageref -reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." - -\end_inset - -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - affiche le mot -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - suivi du numéro de la page sur laquelle se trouve l'élément: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vpageref -reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." - -\end_inset - -; -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -If the label is on the same page, it prints -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -on this page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -on the facing page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -on the previous page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page, it prints -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -on the next page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - affiche le numéro de l'élément, le mot -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et le numéro de la page: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." - -\end_inset - -; -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like -\family sans -\series bold - -\family default -\series default -; otherwise it behaves like -\family sans -\series bold -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Référence -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mise -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -forme affiche une référence croisée qui définit son propre format. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - ce type de référence croisée n'est disponible que si vous avez installé - le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - ou -\series bold -refstyle -\series default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Vous pouvez sélectionner quel paquetage doit être utilisé pour cette fonctionnal -ité en sélectionnant l'option -\family sans -Utiliser refstyle (à la place de prettyref) pour les références croisées -\family default - dans le menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Classe de document -\family default -. - Le paquetage -\begin_inset Flex Strong -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - est implicite pour tout nouveau document car -\begin_inset Flex Strong -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - n'est pas internationalisé. - Le format est spécifié par LyX en ajoutant la commande -\series bold - -\backslash -newrefformat -\series default - (prettyref) ou -\series bold - -\backslash -newref -\series default - (refstyle) au préambule du document. - Par exemple, la directive suivante redéfinit toutes les commandes aux figures - (qui sont marquées dans les étiquettes par -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -fig -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -): -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -newref{fig}{refcmd={l'image on page -\backslash -pageref{#1}}} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Pour les détails sur la gestion des mises en forme, voyez la documentation - des paquetages, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "prettyref,refstyle" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Voici un exemple de référence mise ne forme utilisant -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (l'option est cochée dans le -\emph on -Guide de l'utilisateur -\emph default -, prettyref provoquant des erreurs en français): dans la -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand formatted -reference "sec:Citation" - -\end_inset - -, \SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Référence -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -textuelle affiche la contenu de la légende ou le nom de la référence, par - exemple un titre de section: -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand nameref -reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le numéro affecté à une étiquette et le numéro de la page sur laquelle elle - se trouve sont calculés automatiquement par LaTeX. - Vous choisissez une des six variétés de références dans le champ Format - de la fenêtre de référence croisée qui s'ouvre quand vous cliquez sur la - boîte de la référence croisée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous ne pouvez utiliser le style -\family sans - -\family default - que pour faire référence à des éléments numérotés de votre document, alors - que vous pouvez toujours utiliser le style -\family sans - -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous voulez faire référence à une section de votre document, placez l'étiquet -te dans l'entête de section, pour un flottant, mettez l'étiquette dans la - légende. - Pour les notes de bas de page, mettez l'étiquette n'importe où dans le - texte de la note. - Pour faire référence à une formule mathématique, voyez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Numérotation-et-étiquetage" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un clic droit sur une référence croisée ouvre un menu contextuel. - Le choix -\family sans - Aller -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'étiquette -\family default - positionne le curseur avant l'étiquette référencée. - Ce choix sera renommé -\family sans -Revenir -\family default - dans le menu contextuel de l'étiquette pour que vous puissiez repositionner - le curseur sur la référence croisée. - Vous pouvez aussi revenir au point de départ avec le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez modifier le nom d'une étiquette à tout moment en cliquant dessus. - Toutes les références croisées faisant référence à cette étiquette seront - automatiquement mises à jour, sans que vous ayez à vous en préoccuper. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si une référence croisée fait référence à une étiquette qui n'existe pas, - vous verrez -\lang english -in LyX -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -BROKEN -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - in the cross-reference label and -\lang french - et deux points d'interrogation à l'impression. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les références sont décrites en détail dans la section -\emph on -Faire référence à des flottants -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Table des matières et autres sommaires -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Table des matières -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Plan -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Tdm" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Table des matières -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Table-des-Matières" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La Table des Matières (TdM) est insérée à partir du menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TdM\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Table -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -matières -\family default -. - Dans LyX elle est affichée sous la forme d'une boîte grise. - Si vous cliquez dessus, la fenêtre -\family sans -Plan -\family default - s'ouvre et affiche toutes les entrées de la Table des matières. - Vous pouvez sauter à un endroit quelconque de votre document en cliquant - sur la ligne correspondante de la table des matières et vous pouvez déplacer - et réarranger les sections de votre document. - C'est une alternative à l'utilisation du menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Plan -\family default - qui est décrit dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Naviguer" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La table des matière reprend automatiquement dans la sortie imprimée toutes - les sections numérotées de votre document. - Si vous avez donné un titre court à une section, comme c'est décrit dans - la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Titres-courts" - -\end_inset - -, c'est lui qui sera utilisé dans la TdM, à la place de l'entête de section. - La section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Profondeur-section" - -\end_inset - - décrit comment ajuster la profondeur à laquelle les sections sont affichées - dans la TdM. - Vous pouvez aussi ajuster la profondeur affichée dans la fenêtre plan en - utilisant la glissière qui se trouve en bas de la fenêtre. - Les sections qui ne sont pas numérotées n'apparaissent pas dans la TdM. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Liste des figures, des tableaux et des algorithmes -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Liste-des-figures," - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les listes des figures, des tableaux et des algorithmes sont à peu près - comme la tables des matières. - Vous pouvez les insérer avec le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TdM -\family default -. - Si vous voulez que vos figures, tableaux ou algorithmes apparaissent dans - une liste, vous devez les placer dans les flottants correspondants et ajouter - une légende. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -URLs et hyperliens -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -URLs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hyperliens -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URLs (Universal Resource Locators) -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:URLs" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On peut insérer des liens vers des pages web ou des adresses mail grâce - au menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -URL -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici un exemple d'URL : la page d'accueil de LyX, -\begin_inset Flex URL -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous ne pouvez pas changer le style du texte de l'URL, il sera toujours - en style -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -chasse fixe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Pour pouvoir typographier le texte du lien, il faut utiliser des hyperliens - comme c'est expliqué dans la section qui suit. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - les URLs ne doivent pas se terminer par une barre de fraction inverse, - sinon vous aurez des erreurs LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hyperliens -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Hyperliens" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On insère des hyperliens avec le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Hyperlien -\family default -ou avec le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "href-insert" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - La fenêtre de dialogue qui apparaît possède deux champs: -\family sans -Cible -\family default - et -\family sans -Nom. - -\family default -Le nom est le texte qui est imprimé pour représenter le lien. - L'hyperlien peut être un lien vers une page web comme ceci: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Page d'accueil de LyX" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - -, ou une adresse mail comme celle-ci: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "liste de diffusion lyx-docs" -target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - -, ou encore un lien vers un fichier. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi lancer des applications via un hyperlien en insérant un - lien et en ajoutant le préfixe -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -run: -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - à la cible du lien. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les hyperliens seront coupés automatiquement en fin de ligne dans une sortie - PDF et deviendront cliquables dans une sortie DVI ou PDF. - Pour modifier le style du texte du lien, sélectionnez l'insert de l'hyperlien - et utilisez la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style de texte -\family default -. - Ceci est par exemple un hyperlien avec un texte en caractères gras sans - empattements: -\family sans -\series bold - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Page d'accueil de LyX" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On peut modifier la couleur des liens en activant l'option -\family sans -Couleur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -liens -\family default - dans la fenêtre de dialogue sur les paramètres PDF (menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Propriétés du PDF -\family default -). - Par exemple, dans ce document, le texte des liens est mis en bleu en ajoutant - l'option -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -urlcolor=blue -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -dans le champ -\family sans -Autres -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -options -\family default - dans la fenêtre de dialogue de propriétés du PDF. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Appendices -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Appendices -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Appendices" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les appendices sont créés avec le menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Début -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ici -\family default -. - Ce menu fait que la portion de document situé entre la position actuelle - du curseur et la fin devient la partie des appendices. - Dans LyX cette partie est soulignée par un cadre rouge. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Chaque chapitre (ou section) qui se trouve dans la partie appendice est - considéré comme un appendice et est numéroté avec un chiffre romain en - majuscule. - On peut faire référence à tous les appendices comme si c'étaient des sections - comme les autres, en voici deux exemples: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Remerciements" - -\end_inset - -; Appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Exporter" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Bibliographie -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliographie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Bibliographie" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a deux façons de créer une bibliographie dans un document LyX. - Vous pouvez utiliser une base de données bibliographique -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Connue sous le nom de base de données -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -BibTeX -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, ce qui est expliqué dans la sous-section suivante, ou vous pouvez entrer - la bibliographie à la main. - Pour la seconde méthode, l'environnement de paragraphe -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default -, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Environnement-biblio" - -\end_inset - -, sera utilisé. - Si vous voulez avoir autre chose que les citations numériques que vous - pouvez voir dans ce document, comme par exemple des citations auteur-année, - vous devez utiliser une base de données bibliographique. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -L'environnement Bibliographie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -À l'intérieur de l'environnement -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default -, chaque paragraphe commence avec une boîte grise de bibliographie avec - un numéro. - Si vous cliquez dessus, vous obtenez une boîte de dialogue où vous allez - pouvoir entrer une -\family sans -Clé -\family default - et une -\family sans -Étiquette -\family default -. - La clé est le nom symbolique que vous allez utiliser pour faire référence - à cette entrée bibliographique. - Par exemple, la seconde entrée de notre bibliographie est un livre sur - LaTeX et nous avons utilisé comme clé -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -latexcompanion -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, qui est une forme abrégée de son titre. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -A tout endroit de votre document vous pouvez faire référence à la clé de - votre entrée bibliographique, soit en utilisant le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Citation -\family default -, soit en utilisant le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" -\end_inset - -. - Une boîte de citation est alors insérée et une fenêtre de dialogue de citation - s'ouvre pour vous permettre de sélectionner une ou plusieurs clés dans - la liste des clés disponibles. - La boîte de citation sera étiquetée avec la clé à laquelle elle fait référence. - Si vous cliquez sur la boîte de citation, la fenêtre de dialogue réapparaît - et vous pouvez modifier la référence. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les citations apparaissent à l'impression comme un nombre entre deux crochets. - Si vous avez défini une -\family sans -Étiquette -\family default -, c'est elle qui va apparaître, à la place du nombre. - Voici deux exemples: le premier sans étiquette et le second avec l'étiquette - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Remerciements -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Lisez le livre -\family sans -LaTeX Companion Second Edition -\family default -: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les membres de l'équipe LyX sont listés dans les remerciements: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest - label via the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). - All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les bases de données bibliographiques (BibTeX) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliographie ! Bases de données -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliographie ! BibTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Bases-de-Données-Biblio" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les base de données bibliographiques sont utiles quand vous utilisez la - même bibliographie pour plusieurs documents -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Elles sont aussi utiles pour garder une base d'articles et les notes qui - les concernent. - La plupart des programmes de gestion de bases de données mentionnées plus - loin vous permettent d'enregistrer des annotations ou des rapports avec - vos données bibliographiques. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Elles permettent aussi d'avoir facilement une mise en forme uniforme pour - toutes les entrées de la bibliographie. - Vous pouvez rassembler dans une base de données tous les livres et tous - les articles concernant le domaine dans lequel vous travaillez. - Ensuite cette base peut être utilisée pour différents documents, puisque - seules les entrées auxquelles vous faites référence dans le document sont - incorporées à sa bibliographie. - Cela vous évite d'avoir à noter quels articles et quels livres vous avez - cité. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La base de donnée est un fichier texte dont l'extension est -\family typewriter - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -.bib -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et qui contient les informations bibliographiques sous un format spécial. - Ce format est expliqué dans les livres sur LaTeX ( -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" - -\end_inset - -). - En principe, on utilise un programme dédié pour créer et modifier les entrées - de la base de données. - Dans le Wiki de LyX, -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -vous trouverez une sélection de programmes pour gérer des bases de données - BibTeX.. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour utiliser une base de données dans votre document, utilisez le menu - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TdM\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Bibliographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -BibT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. - Une boîte grise sera insérée et une fenêtre de dialogue va s'ouvrir. - Dans cette fenêtre vous pourrez ajouter une ou plusieurs bases de données - et choisir un fichier de style. - L'option -\family sans -Ajouter la bibliographie à la TdM -\family default - ajoute une entrée de table des matières pour la bibliographie. - Dans la liste déroulante -\family sans -Contenu -\family default - vous pouvez sélectionner quelle partie de la base de donnée doit être imprimée: - la totalité des entrées ou juste les références citées dans le document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le fichier de style est un fichier texte possédant une extension -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -.bst -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - qui va définir la mise en forme de toutes les entrées de la bibliographie. - Votre distribution LaTeX devrait vous fournir plusieurs de ces fichiers - et de nombreux éditeurs fournissent leur propres fichiers de style spéciaux, - ce qui fait que vous n'avez en principe pas à vous occuper de la mise en - forme. - Il est bien sûr possible d'écrire votre propre fichier de style, mais c'est - plutôt une affaire d'experts -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pour avoir des informations sur la façon de le faire, voyez -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://www.ctan.org/get/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insérer une citation fonctionne exactement comme dans le cas précédent.. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour créer la bibliographie à partir de la base de donnée et des citations - que vous avez insérées dans votre document, LyX utilise le programme BibTeX. - Vous pouvez choisir quelle variante du programme doit être utilisée pour - le traitement, Ce programme peut être contrôlé par un certain nombre d'options - que vous pouvez ajouter dans -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bibliographie -\family default - ou dans -\family sans -\lang english -Tools -\lang french -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Preferences -\lang french -\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Sorties -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default - dans le champ -\family sans -Commande -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -BibT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -. - Les variantes suivantes sont autorisées: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -biber fournit une fonctionnalité Unicode complète, une mémoire sans limite, - mais ne fonctionne pas avec d'autres paquetages bibliographiques (comme - par exemple -\series bold -natbib -\series default -), que le paquetage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\series bold -biblatex -\series default -; cette option est recommandée pour les textes multilingues et pour les - langues qui n'utilisent pas l'alphabet latin; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex le standard, ne permet pas l'usage de caractères spéciaux dans les - entrées bibliographiques qui ne soient pas encodables sur 7 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bits, possède une mémoire limitée, fonctionne avec tous les paquetages bibliogra -phiques sauf -\series bold -biblatex; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex8 autorise tous les caractères encodables sur 8 bits, possède une - mémoire plus grande que -\family sans -bibtex -\family default -, fonctionne avec tous les paquetages bibliographiques. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce programme peut être contrôlé par un certain nombre d'options que vous - pouvez ajouter sous la spécification des variantes. - Avant d'ajouter des options, il est fortement recommandé de lire le manuel - de -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand vous activez l'option -\family sans -Bibliographie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sections -\family default - dans le menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Bibliographie -\family default -, il est possible d'avoir des bibliographies multiples et par section. - Ceci est expliqué avec d'autres particularités dans le manuel -\emph on -Options avancées, -\emph default - section -\emph on -Personnaliser les bibliographies avec BibTeX -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous avons utilisé deux bibliographies dans ce document pour montrer la - différence entre les deux méthodes utilisées pour les créer. - Comme vous pouvez le constater, la bibliographie qui a été créée à partir - d'une base de données ne reprend que les entrées qui sont citées dans le - corps du document. - Nous avons utilisé le fichier de style -\family sans -alphadin.bst -\family default - pour avoir dans notre bibliographie le système de clés de référence assez - complexe utilisé en Allemagne. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Format de bibliographie -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bibliographie ! Format -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans la boîte de dialogue de citation, vous pouvez choisir un format de - citation spécial. - Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous avez besoin d'activer l'option -\family sans -Natbib -\family default - dans la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dans la rubrique -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default -. - Donner un style de citation pour une référence donnée remplace le style - appliqué implicitement. - Pour le style appliqué à l'ensemble des citations de votre document, utilisez - les fichiers de styles BiBTeX, comme c'est expliqué dans la section précédente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Note: vous ne pouvez pas utiliser tous les styles bibliographiques énumérés - dans la fenêtre. - Si vous avez une erreur de compilation, changez de style. - Les styles finissant par -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -nat -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - sont sûrement compatibles. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi fournir, dans la fenêtre de citation, du texte qui apparaîtra - avant ou après votre citation. - Voici un exemple où nous fait que le texte -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Chapitre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - apparaisse après la référence: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voyez -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "Chapitre 3" -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Index -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Génération -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Index" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une entrée d'index est créée en utilisant le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Entrée -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'index -\family default - ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "index-insert" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - Une boîte est insérée contenant le texte qui apparaîtra dans l'index. - Le mot dans lequel le curseur se trouve ou la portion de texte qui est - actuellement sélectionnée est proposé comme entrée d'index par LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'index lui même est inséré dans le document avec le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TdM\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Index -\family default -. - Une boîte bleu clair étiquetée -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Index -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - apparaîtra à l'endroit où l'index sera imprimé dans la sortie finale. - La boîte de l'index n'est pas cliquable comme les autre boîtes de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Nous donnons une courte description des commandes d'indexation dans les - sections qui suivent. - Pour avoir une description détaillée des mécanismes d'indexation de LaTeX, - jetez un coup d'œil dans un des livres traitant de LaTeX -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Rassembler les entrées d'index -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Rassembrer les entrées -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les entrées d'index sont souvent rassemblées pour permettre au lecteur une - recherche plus rapide dans l'index. - Par exemple, nous voulons rassembler les entrées concernant les listes - à puces et les énumérations sous l'entrée -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Listes -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - D'abord, nous allons créer une entrée -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Listes -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Env-par-listes" - -\end_inset - - qui est la section sur les listes. - Nous insérons ensuite une entrée d'index dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Enumeration" - -\end_inset - - qui parle des énumérations. - Dans le champ de l'entrée d'index, nous insérons la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Listes ! Énumérations -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On fait la même chose avec les listes à puces (section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:ListePuces" - -\end_inset - -), et cette fois on met la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Listes ! Listes à puces -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le point d'exclamation -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -! -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - marque les niveaux de regroupement. - Vous pouvez avoir jusqu'à trois niveaux, chaque niveau d'index est décalé - un peu plus par rapport au précédent. - Il n'est pas obligatoire de créer une entrée d'index pour le niveau le - plus élevé. - Si nous n'avions pas d'entrée pour -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Listes -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, LaTeX en imprimerait une quand même, mais sans numéro de page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ensemble de pages consécutives -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Pages consécutives -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En principe une entrée d'index apparaît avec le numéro de la page où se - trouve la section indexée. - Mais parfois vous avez besoin d'indexer un ensemble de pages sous une même - entrée d'index. - Par exemple, si nous voulons indexer les environnements de paragraphes, - nous allons créer une entrée d'index dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Environnements-par" - -\end_inset - - avec la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Environnements de paragraphe|( -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -et une autre à la fin de la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LyX-Code" - -\end_inset - - avec la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -Environnements de paragraphes|) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les commandes -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|( -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|) -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - respectivement ouvrent et ferment la plage de pages indexées. - Vous pouvez aussi ajouter la même entrée d'index à plusieurs endroits de - votre document. - Elles apparaîtront toutes dans une seule entrée dans la liste d'index, - avec une liste de numéros de pages séparés par des virgules. - Un exemple est l'entrée d'index -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Document ! Paramètres -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans ce manuel. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Références croisées -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Références croisées -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est aussi possible de faire référence à une autre entrée d'index. - Nous faisons référence, par exemple, dans l'entrée d'index -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -GIF -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Formats-d'images" - -\end_inset - -) à l'entrée d'index -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Formats d'images -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - qui est dans la même section, en utilisant la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -GIF|see{Formats d'images} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les accolades doivent être insérées en code TeX. - Le texte qui se trouve entre les accolades est l'entrée d'index à laquelle - on fait référence. - La référence apparaîtra à l'impression sans numéro de page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ordre des entrées d'index -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Ordre des entrées -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez utiliser des caractères accentués dans vos entrées d'index, - mais dans ce cas les entrées risquent de ne plus suivre l'ordre correct. - Les entrées d'index sont triées par ordre alphabétique, mais LaTeX -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -La génération de l'index est réalisée en interne par un programme séparé, - voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Programme-d'indexation" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - ne sait pas comment ordonner les caractères accentués dans les différentes - langues. - Nous avons créé comme exemple trois entrées d'index bidons -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En français dans le texte (NdT) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maison -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maïs -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, et -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maître -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entrées bidons ! maïs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entrées bidons ! maître -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entrées bidons ! maïs@maison -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - elles seront triées dans l'ordre maïs, maître, maison, mais nous aurions - préféré l'ordre maïs, maison, maître. - Pour obtenir ce résultat, nous utilisons la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -entrée -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -précédente@entrée -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -courante -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans notre cas, nous voulons avoir -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maison -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - après -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maïs -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Nous écrivons donc comme entrée d'index pour le mot -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maison -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -maïs@maison -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'entrée précédente n'a pas besoin d'être une vraie entrée, présente dans - le document, vous pouvez utiliser un mot qui donne à LaTeX l'ordre dans - lequel il doit classer l'entrée courante. - Voyez la sous-section suivante pour un exemple. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans certains cas l'ordre des entrées d'index n'est pas correct quand vous - utilisez le programme -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -pour générer l'index (voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Programme-d'indexation" - -\end_inset - -). - -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - va par exemple imprimer l'entrée d'index pour le paquetage LaTeX aeguill - de la section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Document-Polices" - -\end_inset - - après les entrées des autres paquetages LaTeX bien que toutes ces entrées - pour des commandes commencent toutes par -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Paquetages LaTeX ! -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -. - La raison est que l'entrée d'index pour aeguill se trouve dans une note - de bas de page. - Pour contourner ce bogue de -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -, ajoutez ces commandes au préambule de votre document : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -let -\backslash -OrgIndex -\backslash -index -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand*{ -\backslash -index}[1]{ -\backslash -OrgIndex{#1}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Typographie des entrées d'index -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Format des entrées -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez changer l'apparence de vos entrées d'index grâce à la fenêtre - de dialogue de style du texte. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entrées bidons ! -\shape slanted -Ceci est une entrée en italique -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\shape slanted - -\shape default -Vous pouvez aussi changer le format du numéro de page en utilisant le caractère - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -| -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - suivi par une commande LaTeX sans sa barre de fraction inverse. - Par exemple, nous pouvons écrire -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -numéro de page en italique:|textit -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -pour obtenir le numéro de page en italique. -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entrées bidons ! numéro de page en italique :|textit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Normalement, toutes les commandes LaTeX commencent par une barre de fraction - inverse, mais dans ce cas spécial -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\series bold -|commande -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - signifie en fait -\series bold - -\backslash -commande{numéro -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page} -\series default -. - Voyez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" - -\end_inset - - pour en apprendre un peu plus sur la syntaxe des commandes LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - la typographie individuelle des entrées d'index ne fonctionne que si vous - utilisez le programme -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - pour générer l'index, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Programme-d'indexation" - -\end_inset - -. - Cependant, si vous utilisez -\family sans -xindy -\family default -, cela ne fonctionnera que pour le texte en gras ou en italique. - Cela vient du fait que -\family sans -xindy -\family default - demande de redéfinir les éléments sémantiques avant qu'ils puissent être - utilisés, voir -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "p. 678 ff." -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - - pour plus de détails. - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En général, nous vous déconseillons de typographier les numéros de pages - directement comme c'est décrit ci-dessus. - À la place, vous devriez écrire une macro dans le préambule et l'utiliser. - Peut-être voulez vous que toutes les pages qui font référence à la définition - du terme indexé soient en italique pour que le lecteur puisse retrouver - facilement les définitions. - Si c'est le cas, mettez ce qui suit dans le préambule -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -IndexDef}[1]{ -\backslash -textit{#1}} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -and write -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -mon entrée|IndexDef -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -dans l'entrée d'index -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Entrées bidons ! mon entrée|IndexDef -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - L'avantage est que si vous changez d'avis plus tard ou si votre éditeur - demande que les définitions ne soient pas en italique, mais en gras, vous - n'aurez qu'à modifier la macro qui se trouve dans le préambule, et pas - chacune des entrées d'index. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi changer la mise en forme de l'ensemble de votre index. - Par exemple, nous avons mis la boîte indiquant la position de l'index en - gras pour que toutes les entrées d'index soient en caractères gras. - Pour des situations plus complexes vous aurez à utiliser un fichier de - style d'index ( -\emph on -Index Style File -\emph default -), voyez la documentation de -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - ou de -\family sans -xindy -\family default - pour plus de détails, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Le programme d'indexation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index ! Le programme -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Programme-d'indexation" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand le programme de génération d'index -\family sans -xindy -\family default - est installé, LyX l'utilise implicitement, sinon il utilise le programme - -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -. - Ces deux programmes peuvent être contrôlés par des options qui sont modifiées - dans la fenêtre de dialogue des préférences de LyX , voyez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" - -\end_inset - -. - Les options disponibles sont listées et expliquées dans -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -. - Vous pouvez aussi préciser un autre programme pour générer l'index. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous avez besoin d'options spécifiques ou d'un programme d'indexation - pour un document particulier, vous pouvez définir les options ou le programme - dans -\family sans - Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Index. - -\family default -Ceci est particulièrement utile si vous devez transmettre des options spécifique -s au à la langue ou si vous avez besoin d'un format particulier. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Plusieurs index -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Index!Plusieurs index -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans de nombreux domaines, il est courant d'avoir plus d'un index. - Par exemple, vous pourrez avoir besoin de créer un -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Index des noms -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en plus de l'index standard. - LaTeX ne prévoit pas nativement cette possibilité, mais de nombreux paquetages - permettent d'ajouter cette fonctionnalité. - LyX utilise le paquetage -\series bold -splitidx -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! splitidx -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - pour créer des index multiples, paquetage inclus dans toutes les distributions - LaTeX récentes. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Si la vôtre ne l'inclut pas, consultez le catalogue TeX, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -. - Notez que le paquetage ne contient pas seulement un style LaTeX, mais également - des pré-processeurs spécifiques qui doivent être également installés. - Consultez le manuel du paquetage pour les détails. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La paramétrage de LyX pour l'utilisation de plusieurs index est accessible - via -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Index -\family default -, en cochant l'option -\family sans -Utiliser plusieurs index -\family default -. - Noter que le liste -\family sans -Index disponibles -\family default - contient implicitement l'index standard -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Index -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Pour ajouter d'autres index, ajouter un nom d'index (tel qu'il devra apparaître - dans l'en-tête) dans le champ -\family sans -Nouveau -\family default - et appuyer sur -\family sans -Ajouter -\family default -. - Le nouvel index doit apparaître dans la liste. - Si vous le désirez, vous pouvez attribuer une couleur LyX aux étiquettes - correspondantes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une fois ces modifications faites, vous devez retrouver le nouvel index - dans -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TdM -\family default -: le menu -\family sans -Insertion -\family default - doit faire apparaître une entrée pour chacun des index supplémentaires - que vous avez définis. - La tâche d'indexation est la même que pour l'index implicite, mais il y - a quelques fonctionnalités supplémentaires: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -si vous voulez changer l'attribution d'une entrée d'index particulière, - un clic droit sur l'étiquette de l'entrée ouvre une fenêtre dans laquelle - cette action est possible; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -avec un clic droit sur une index, vous pouvez modifier son type. - De plus, vous pouvez définir une liste d'index en tant que -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Sous-index -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Si vous choisissez cette action, l'en-tête de cette liste verra son niveau - diminué d'une unité: par exemple, si vous utilisez une classe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -book -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, où l'en-tête standard d'index est au niveau chapitre, les sous-index seront - définis en tant que sections et pourront alors être inclus dans des index - qui ne sont pas déclarés sous-index. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Glossaire -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Glossaire" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glossaire -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclature|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Glossaire -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On a parfois besoin de compiler une liste de tous les symboles utilisés - dans un document avec une brève description pour chacun – on appelle cela - un glossaire ou une nomenclature ou encore une liste des symboles. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour pouvoir créer des glossaires, vous avez besoin du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Vous le trouverez dans le catalogue TeX, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - ou en utilisant le gestionnaire de paquetages de votre installation LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une entrée de glossaire est créée en plaçant le curseur juste après le symbole - que l'on veut référencer en utilisant le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Entrée -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -glossaire -\family default - ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "nomencl-insert" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - Une boîte grise marquée -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Nom -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est insérée et une fenêtre de dialogue apparaît pour décrire l'entrée de - glossaire. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une entrée de glossaire consiste en deux éléments principaux. - Le premier est le symbole que vous voulez référencer et le deuxième est - la description que vous voulez lui attacher. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - il faut taper du code LaTeX valide dans tous les champs de la fenêtre de - dialogue de glossaire. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Définition et mise en forme du glossaire -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glossaire ! Mise en forme -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand votre symbole est utilisé dans des formules mathématiques, vous devez - le mettrez dans le champ -\family sans -Symbole -\family default - sous la forme d'une formule LaTeX. - par exemple pour référencer le symbole -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, tapez ceci: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series default -Le caractère -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -$ -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - indique le début et la fin de la formule. - La commande LaTeX pour une lettre grecque est obtenue en prenant son nom - (en anglais) et en ajoutant une barre de fraction inverse -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\backslash - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - devant. - Pour les lettres grecques majuscules, il suffit de mettre en majuscule - la première lettre du nom, comme par exemple -\series bold - -\backslash -Sigma -\series default - (une brève introduction à la syntaxe LaTeX est donnée dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte -\family default - pour mettre en forme le texte de description, vous devez utiliser des commandes - LaTeX. - Par exemple la description de l'entrée de glossaire du -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans ce document est: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -entrée bidon pour le symbole -\backslash -textsf{sigma} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -La commande -\series bold - -\backslash -textsf -\series default - sélectionne une police -\family sans -sans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -empattements -\family default -. - Pour obtenir une police -\series bold -grasse -\series default -, utilisez la commande -\series bold - -\backslash -textbf -\series default -, pour une police -\family typewriter -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -chasse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fixe, -\family default - utilisez -\series bold - -\backslash -texttt -\series default -, pour du texte mis en -\emph on -évidence, -\emph default - utiliser -\series bold - -\backslash -emph -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si les caractères | -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -! -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -, @ et -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -" apparaissent dans les entrées de la nomenclature, ils doivent être protégés - en ajoutant un caractère -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -double apostrophe -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - avant eux. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ordre de tri des entrées de glossaire -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glossaire ! Ordre des entrées -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les entrées de glossaire sont classées dans l'ordre alphabétique du code - LaTeX de la définition du symbole. - Cela peut donner des résultats indésirables quand vous utilisez des symboles - qui se trouvent dans des formules mathématiques. - Supposons que nous avons des entrées de glossaire pour les symboles -\emph on -a -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "a" -description "entrée illustrative pour le symbole \"a\"" - -\end_inset - - -\emph default - et -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -prefix "sigma" -symbol "$\\sigma$" -description "entrée illustrative pour le symbole \\textsf{sigma}" - -\end_inset - -. - Ils seront triés comme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -a -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - – le -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - sera rangé avant le -\emph on -a -\emph default - puisque le caractère -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -$ -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est placé avant le -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\emph on -a -\emph default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - quand on les compare. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour contrôler l'ordre de tri, vous pouvez changer le champ -\family sans -Classé -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -comme -\family default - dans la boîte de dialogue de glossaire. - Les entrées seront alors triées en utilisant cette entrée et non pas la - définition du symbole. - Dans notre exemple, on peut entrer -\family typewriter -sigma -\family default - dans ce champ pour le symbole -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -, et alors -\emph on -a -\emph default - sera rangé avant -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour faire des groupements ou pour des astuces pour classer les entrées, - voyez la documentation de -\series bold -nomencl -\series default -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Options de glossaire -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glossaire ! Options -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le paquetage -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - offre plusieurs options pour modifier l'apparence du glossaire. - Voici quelques-unes de ces options, pour plus d'options, voyez la documentation -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refeq ajoute -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, voir équation ( -\emph on -eq -\emph default -) -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - à chaque entrée de glossaire, avec -\family sans -\emph on -eq -\family default -\emph default - le numéro de la dernière équation située juste avant l'entrée de glossaire; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refpage ajoute -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -, page ( -\emph on -page -\emph default -) -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - à chaque entrée de glossaire, avec -\family sans -\emph on -page -\family default -\emph default - est le numéro de la page sur laquelle apparaît l'entrée de glossaire; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -intoc insère le glossaire dans la table de matières. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour utiliser une ou plusieurs de ces options, ajoutez-les, séparés par - des virgules, à la liste d'options de la classe de document de la fenêtre - de dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - Dans ce document, nous avons utilisé les options -\series bold -refpage, intoc -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les deux premières options seulement pour certaines - entrées de glossaires quand vous ajoutez une des commandes qui suivent - dans le champ -\family sans -Description -\family default - de la fenêtre de glossaire: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeq comme l'option -\series bold -refeq -\series default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefpage comme l'option -\series bold -refpage -\series default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeqpage notation abrégée de -\series bold - -\backslash -nomrefeq -\backslash -nomrefpage -\series default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomnorefeq, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefpage, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefeqpage désactive les options correspondantes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les mots tels que -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - sont automatiquement traduits pour cerianes langues de documents. - Sinon, ajoutez v)ces lignes au préambule LaTeX: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation -\backslash -nobreakspace(#1)} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -pagedeclaration}[1]{, page -\backslash -nobreakspace{}#1} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -en remplaçant -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\lang english -see equation -\lang french - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - par leur traduction. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Impression du glossaire -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glossaire ! Impression -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour imprimer le glossaire dans votre document, utilisez -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Listes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TdM\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Glossaire -\family default -. - Une boîte bleu clair marquée -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Glossaire -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est insérée pour montrer la place à laquelle le glossaire sera imprimé. - Via un clic droit dans la boîte, la taille des espacements pour les symboles - peut être modifiée. - Vous pouvez choisir parmi ces réglages: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Implicite un espacement de 1cm est inséré; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Taille -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'étiquette -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -plus -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -longue la largeur du symbole le plus large de tout le glossaire est insérée; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Réglable espacement paramétrable. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans la sortie imprimée le titre du glossaire devrait apparaître comme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Nomenclature -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Si ce nom ne vous plaît pas, vous pouvez le changer en redéfinissant la - commande -\series bold - -\backslash -nomname -\series default - dans le préambule. - Par exemple, si vous voulez utiliser -\emph on -Liste des Symboles -\emph default -, ajoutez la ligne suivante au préambule: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -nomname}{Liste des Symboles} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Moteur d'indexation pour un glossaire -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glossaire!Moteur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:programme-glossaire" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX utilise le programme -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - pour créer le glossaire. - Ce dernier fait partie de toutes les distributions LaTeX. - La fenêtre de dialogue de préférences de LyX permet de choisir un autre - programme ou de contrôler -\family sans -makeindex -\family default - en ajoutant des options, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" - -\end_inset - -. - Les options disponibles sont listées et expliquées dans -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl,makeindex" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Branches -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Branches -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Branches -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Branches" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est parfois utile de masquer une partie du document à l'impression. - Par exemple, un enseignant qui prépare un examen ne souhaite certainement - pas que les solutions soient distribuées aux élèves, mais avoir les questions - et les réponses dans le même document peut rendre la vie plus facile aux - correcteurs. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans ces cas, LyX permet de créer plusieurs branches pour le même document. - Le texte n'apparaîtra dans la sortie que si sa branche est activée. - Pour créer une branche, vous pouvez utiliser -\family sans - Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Branche\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Insérer une nouvelle branche -\family default - (si vous désirez simplement ajouter une nouvelle branche) ou aller à la - fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default -, rubrique -\family sans -Branches -\family default -: vous pouvez modifier dans cette fenêtre le nom de la branche, son état - d'activation (c'est-à-dire si le contenu est inclus ou non dans la sortie), - la couleur de fond qui sert à la distinguer dans le document et si la nom - de la branche doit être accolé au nom de fichier du document lors de l'exportat -ion (vois un exemple ci-dessous). - De plus, cette fenêtre de dialogue vous permet de fusionner deux branches - (il suffit de renommer une branche avec le nom de l'autre) et d'ajouter - des -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -branches inconnues -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (branches ajoutées au document par copier/coller sans avoir été définies - explicitement) à la liste des branches du document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le texte qui est spécifique à une branche est mis dans des boîtes de branche. - Ces boîtes sont insérées en passant par le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Branche -\family default - où vous pouvez choisir la branche à laquelle doit être rattaché le texte. - Vous pouvez par la suite modifier la branche à la quelle est affectée une - boîte en faisant un clic droit dessus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici un exemple, où seules les questions apparaissent à l'impression, la - branche -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Réponses -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est désactivée et donc n'apparaît pas dans la sortie. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Question -status open - -\begin_layout Standard -Question: Qui a été le premier prix Nobel de physique ? -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Réponse -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -Réponse: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous activez -\family sans -Suffixe du fichier -\family default - dans la fenêtre -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Branches -\family default -, le nom des branches actives sera accolé au nom de fichier du document - lors de l'exportation. - Soit par exemple un fichier -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen.lyx -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - doté des branches ci-dessus. - Si -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Suffixe du fichier -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est activé, l'exportation PDF du document sera dénommé -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen.pdf -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - si aucune des branches n'est active, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen-Question.pdf si la seule branche -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -question -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est active comme ici, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen-Réponse -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - si seule la branche -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Réponse -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est active, et enfin -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Examen-Question-Réponse -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - si les deux branches sont actives. - De cette façon, vous pouvez exporter différentes versions du document sans - trop de peine. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour utiliser la sortie conditionnelle à des endroits où vous ne pouvez - pas utiliser de branches, comme dans des équations, vous pouvez utiliser - des définitions LaTeX spéciales pour chaque branche. - Par exemple, vous pouvez définir pour la branche question -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pour une introduction à la syntaxe LaTeX, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -reponse}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -et pour la branche réponse -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -reponse}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Question -status open - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -reponse}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch Réponse -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -reponse}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est maintenant possible d'utiliser les commandes -\series bold - -\backslash -question{\SpecialChar \ldots{} -} -\series default - et -\series bold - -\backslash -reponse{\SpecialChar \ldots{} -} -\series default - pour obtenir une sortie conditionnelle. - Voici un exemple de formule où seule la partie -\series bold - -\backslash -question -\series default - apparaît: -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\reponse{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\reponse{-\sqrt{3}}. -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -À l'intérieur du mode math, on peut obtenir le même effet en utilisant des - macros, voir le manuel -\emph on -Math -\emph default -s. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Propriétés du PDF -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:propriétés-du-PDF" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDF ! Propriétés -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Paramètres du document -\family default - permet, dans la rubrique -\family sans -Propriétés du PDF -\family default -, d'activer des options spéciales pour la sortie PDF de votre document. - Toutes les options qui sont proposées viennent du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En utilisant -\series bold -hyperref -\series default -, toutes les références croisées seront transformées en liens dans les sorties - DVI et PDF. - Cela signifie que le lecteur de votre document pourra cliquer sur un élément - de la table de matières ou sur une référence pour voir la partie du document - référencée. - Dans l'onglet -\family sans -hyperlien -\family default - vous pouvez préciser l'aspect que devront avoir les liens et si des renvois - bibliographiques doivent être créés. - Ces renvois apparaîtront dans la bibliographie à la fin des différentes - entrées, indiquant le numéro de la section, de la diapositive ou de la - page du document où cette entrée est citée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans l'onglet -\family sans -Signets -\family default - vous pouvez indiquer si des signets PDF doivent être générés pour chaque - section pour faciliter la navigation dans votre document. - Vous pouvez décider si les signets doivent être numérotés comme les sections - de votre document ou non. - Avec la case -\family sans -Ouverture des signets -\family default - vous pouvez préciser le niveau de sectionnement des signets qui sera affiché - quand on ouvrira le PDF. - Par exemple, le niveau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 affichera toutes les sections et sous-sections, alors que le niveau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 n'affichera que les sections. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les informations d'en-tête que vous pouvez entrer dans l'onglet -\family sans -Général -\family default - sont enregistrées dans le fichier PDF comme propriétés du fichier. - De nombreux programmes sont capables d'extraire ces informations pour par - exemple reconnaître automatiquement qui est l'auteur ou quel est le sujet - d'un PDF donné. - C'est très utilisé pour trier, classer ou utiliser les PDF pour des recherches - bibliographiques. - Quand l'option -\family sans -Compléter automatiquement l'en-tête -\family default - est activée, LyX essaie d'extraire les informations de l'en-tête à partir - du titre de votre document et des données sur l'auteur. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Charger en mode plein écran -\family default - ouvrira le PDF en mode plein écran, ce qui est particulièrement utile pour - les présentations. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les propriétés du PDF sont aussi utilisées dans ce document. - Si vous regardez dans les paramètres du présent document, vous verrez que - quelques options supplémentaires de -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - sont utilisées. - Pour avoir une explication sur ces dernières nous vous référons au manuel - du paquetage hyperref -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Le code TeX et la syntaxe LaTeX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Code-TeX" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les boîtes de code TeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Code TeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Boites-code-TeX" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Comme LyX utilise LaTeX en interne, il accepte de nombreuses commandes ou - constructions LaTeX, mais pas toutes. - LaTeX est constitué de centaines de paquetages qui fournissent une grande - quantité de commandes. - Les paquetages sont souvent mis à jour et des nouveaux sont ajoutés. - Cela a comme conséquence que vous pouvez typographier à peu près n'importe - quoi, puisque chaque problème a son paquetage LaTeX. - Mais LyX, de son côté, ne peut suivre et être constamment à jour pour accepter - tous les paquetages avec toutes leurs commandes. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mais ne vous inquiétez pas, vous pouvez quand même utiliser votre paquetage - préféré en utilisant ses commandes LaTeX directement dans LyX. - Vous n'aurez qu'à les placer dans une boîte de code TeX. - On crée une boîte de code TeX soit en utilisant le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Code -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default - soit en cliquant sur le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - -). - La boîte de code TeX, peut être ouverte avec un clic gauche et refermée - avec un clic droit et en sélectionnant -\family sans -Fermer l'insert -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez mettre une commande complète ou incomplète dans une boîte de - code TeX. - Incomplète signifie que les arguments de la commande peuvent être du texte - LyX standard et donc se trouver hors de la boîte. - Un exemple pour comprendre: vous voulez tracer un cadre autour d'un mot - et donc utiliser la commande LaTeX -\series bold - -\backslash -fbox -\series default -, vous allez écrire la partie commande -\series bold - -\backslash -fbox{ -\series default - dans une première boîte de code TeX, ensuite vous écrivez votre mot et - pour finir vous mettez l'accolade fermante } dans une seconde boîte de - code TeX, derrière votre mot. - Le mot qui est entre les deux boîtes de code TeX est l'argument de la commande - et il va apparaître comme dans l'exemple suivant : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ERT.png - lyxscale 75 - scale 50 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ce qui va donner : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ceci est une ligne avec un mot -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fbox{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -encadré -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - après une commande LaTeX sans paramètres, vous devez ajouter une espace - pour informer LaTeX que la commande est terminée. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Brève Introduction à la syntaxe de LaTeX -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -La syntaxe de LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Syntaxe de LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand vous écrivez des documents un peu longs ou des livres, vous avez besoin - d'en savoir un peu plus sur les commandes LaTeX que LyX utilise en interne. - Puisque LaTeX est composé de commandes vous pouvez -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -programmer -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - votre document. - Ceci a comme avantage que vous pouvez changer à tout moment la mise en - page de votre document, si vous connaissez la bonne commande à utiliser. - Imaginez par exemple que vous ayez à écrire un manuel pour un certain produit - et que la date limite pour le terminer soit pour la fin de la journée. - Votre patron vous a félicité pour votre travail, mais il voudrait que toutes - les étiquettes de légendes soient en gras. - Le problème est que vous avez plus d'une centaine de légendes de figures - et de tableaux avec des légendes qui ne sont pas en gras dans votre manuel. - Il est donc impossible de changer toutes les légendes à la main en un jour. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -C'est là que LaTeX rentre en jeu. - Comme nous l'avons écrit plus haut, à chaque problème son paquetage LaTeX. - La première chose à faire est donc de trouver lequel et donc de chercher - dans le catalogue des paquetages LaTeX, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Catalogue" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Après une recherche plus ou moins longue, vous apprendrez que le paquetage - -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - correspond à ce que vous cherchez. - Pour utiliser un paquetage, vous devez le charger dans le préambule de - votre document (menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default -) avec la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[options]{nom du paquetage} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Toutes le commandes LaTeX commencent par une barre de fraction inverse ( -\emph on -backslash -\emph default -), les éventuels arguments de la commande sont placés entre deux accolades - et les éventuelles options entre deux crochets. - Notez que toutes les commandes n'ont pas des arguments ou des options. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans notre cas, le nom du paquetage est -\series bold -caption -\series default -. - Après avoir jeté un œil à sa documentation, vous avez appris que l'option - -\series bold -labelfont=bf -\series default - permet de changer la police de caractère de toutes les étiquettes de légendes - en gras. - Vous ajoutez donc à votre préambule la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -et votre problème est résolu. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pour les autres commandes proposées par le paquetage -\series bold -caption -\series default -, jetez un œil à sa documentation -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "caption" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Remarquez que certaines classes de documents ont des solutions toutes prêtes - à certains problèmes bien connus comme le vôtre. - Par exemple, si vous utilisez une classe -\family typewriter -KOMA-Script -\family default -, vous n'aurez pas besoin du paquetage -\series bold -caption -\series default -, à la place vous n'aurez qu'à insérer la commande -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont{captionlabel}{ -\backslash -bfseries} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -dans le préambule et le problème sera résolu. - Donc, si vous envisagez d'écrire un document assez long, vous devriez jeter - un œil à la documentation de la classe que vous souhaitez utiliser (au - passage -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont -\series default - est un exemple d'une commande qui a plus d'un argument). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les commandes qui sont placées dans le préambule affectent la totalité de - votre document, alors que les commandes placées dans le texte ne touchent - que le texte qui est placé après la commande ou le texte qui est utilisé - comme argument pour la commande. - Pour insérer une commande dans le texte, utilisez une boîte de code TeX, - comme c'est décrit dans la section précédente. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous voulez en apprendre plus sur LaTeX et sa syntaxe, voyez les livres - sur LaTeX -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexguide" - -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{fancy} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -bascule temporairement sur une mode avec en-têtes et pieds de pages personnalisé -s -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rightmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -définit l'en-tête comme décrit ci-après -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leftmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -thepage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -LyX: Guide de l'utilisateur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Code magique: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -En-têtes et pieds de page personnalisés -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:En-têtes-et-pieds" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document!En-têtes et pieds de page -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En-têtes et pieds de page -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour définir des en-têtes et des pieds de page personnalisés, vous devez - positionner le style d'en-tête sur -\family sans -Sophistiqué -\family default - dans la fenêtre -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default -, rubrique -\family sans -Format de la page -\family default -. - Une seconde étape consiste à ajouter dans le menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Modules -\family default - le module -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Personnalisation en-têtes/pieds de page -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Ce module propose les 6 styles suivants: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -En-tête -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -gauche, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -En-tête -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -central, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -En-tête -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -droit -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Pied -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -gauche, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Pied -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -central, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Pied -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -droit -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -pour paramétrer les différentes positions dans l'en-tête et le pied. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalement, les en-têtes et pied de page sont paramétrés dans le préambule - du document, mais vous pouvez les modifier n'importe où. - La figure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:Page-layout" - -\end_inset - - montre la mise en page et la position des en-têtes et pied de page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En-tête gauche -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En-tête central -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -En-tête droit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Le texte normal de la page est ici. - L'en-tête courant est au-dessus du texte et le pied est au-dessous (incluant - les notes de bas de page). - Les en-têtes et pieds de page contiennent typiquement les numéros de page, - les titres de chapitre, le logo de la société mais vous pouvez à peu près - tout mettre, sauf les flottants. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pied gauche -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pied central -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pied droit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:Page-layout" - -\end_inset - -Mise en page avec en-tête et pied de page -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Définition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour définir la ligne d'en-tête, il faut ajouter les -\emph on -trois -\emph default - styles d'en-tête. - Ce que vous ajouter aux styles apparaît sur les pages impaires, ce qui - est en argument optionnel apparaît sur les pages paires. - Pour les documents en recto seul, l'argument optionnel n'est pas utilisé - et peut être omis. - Si vous laissez un style ou un argument optionnel vide, rien n'est imprimé. - la définition de la ligne de pied fonctionne de la même façon. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour le paramétrage, vous aurez besoin de quelques commandes LaTeX insérée - en code TeX (menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Code -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default -): -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -thepage imprime le numéro de page courant; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -Roman{page} imprime le numéro de page courant en chiffres romains en capitales; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -roman{page} imprime le numéro de page courant en chiffres romains en bas - de casse; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -leftmark imprime le numéro de section courant avec son titre. - Si le document est doté de chapitres, il imprime le numéro de chapitre - courant et son titre à la place. - elle est dénommée -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -leftmark -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - parce qu'il se trouve d'habitude sur la page de gauche; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -rightmark imprime le numéro de sous-section courant avec son titre. - Si le document est doté de chapitres, il imprime le numéro de section courant - et son titre à la place. - Elle est utilisée habituellement sur la page de droite. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -En-têtes/pieds de page implicites -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'en-tête et le pied de page personnalisé n'est pas implicitement vide. - L'en-tête contient implicitement le titre de chapitre et de section et - le pied contient implicitement le numéro de page. - Pour supprimer des contenus que vous ne désirez pas voir apparaître, il - vous faut inclure le style d'en-têtes/pieds adéquat dans votre document - en laissant les contenus vides. - Ainsi, pour ne pas voir apparaître le numéro de page, insérer un style - -\family sans -Pied -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -central -\family default -vide. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Apparence -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'en-tête et le pied de page apparaîtront sur les pages normales. - Certaines pages sont différentes: la page de titre a sa mise en page propre, - ainsi que les page qui débutent un partie ou un chapitre de votre livre. - Ces pages n'ont pas d'en-tête et de pied personnalisé, mais ceci est normal. - Il n'y a pas besoin par exemple d'imprimer le titre du chapitre sur une - page ou il est déjà imprimé en grande taille et en gras. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ligne de décoration -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Implicitement, une ligne noire de 0,4mm d'épaisseur apparaît au-dessous - de l'en tête, et rien n'apparaît au-dessus du pied de page. - Ceci peut être modifié dans le préambule du document via les commandes - -\series bold - -\backslash -headrulewidth -\series default - et -\series bold - -\backslash -footrulewidth -\series default - de la manière suivante: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -headrulewidth}{épaisseur} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -où -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -épaisseur -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est une taille en unités standard comme -\family sans -pt -\family default - ou -\family sans -mm -\family default -. - Si vous ne voulez pas de ligne, positionnez l'épaisseur à 0 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pt. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les lignes peuvent également être mise en couleur, mais ceci requiert un - peu plus de connaissances en LaTeX. - Si vous en avez vraiment besoin, allez voir sur Internet ou consultez la - section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -4.4 du livre -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Plusieurs lignes d'en-tête/pied -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous avez besoin de plusieurs lignes dans les en-têtes ou dans les pieds - de page, vous pouvez le faire en ajoutant une rupture de ligne dans la - définition. - Cependant, la hauteur implicite des en-têtes et pieds de page est seulement - celle d'une ligne. - Pour augmenter cette hauteur, redéfinissez les dimensions LaTeX -\series bold - -\backslash -headheight -\series default - ou -\series bold - -\backslash -footheight -\series default - comme ceci dans le préambule de votre document: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -headheight}{hauteur} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -où -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -hauteur -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est une taille en unités standard. - Si vous ne savez pas quelle valeur mettre, définissez votre en-tête et - visionnez votre document en PDF. - Puis ouvrez le fichier journal LaTeX via -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fichier journal La -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -TeX -\family default - et vérifiez en appuyant sur le bouton -\family sans -Avertissement -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -suivant -\family default - si vous trouvez un message en provenance du paquetage -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Si vous trouvez un tel avertissement, il donne l'espacement nécessaire - pour votre en-tête. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Le présent exemple -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le présent exemple illustre ce qui peut être fait en personnalisant les - en-têtes et pieds de page. - Ne l'utilisez pas pour votre document puisque c'est jute un exemple. - On utilise les définitions suivantes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -En-tête -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -gauche -\series bold - -\backslash -rightmark -\series default -, argument optionnel vide -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -En-tête -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -central argument vide, argument optionnel vide -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -En-tête -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -droit argument vide, -\series bold - -\backslash -leftmark -\series default - en argument optionnel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Pied -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -gauche argument vide, -\series bold - -\backslash -thepage -\series default - en argument optionnel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family typewriter -Pied -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -central -\family default - -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -LyX's user guide -\family default -\series default -\color inherit -, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -code magique: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - en argument optionnel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Pied -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -droit -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\series default -, argument optionnel vide -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -headrulewidth positionné à 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En principe, vous pouvez utiliser presque tout dans les en-têtes et pieds - de page, sauf les flottants. - Pour les éléments plus spécifiques comme par exemple les marques de tranche, - voyez le manuel du paquetage -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage clearpage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{headings} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\lang english -switches back to page style with the default headings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Aperçu de morceaux de votre document -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Aperçu-de-morceaux" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Aperçu au vol -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Aperçu -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX vous permet de générer un pré-visionnement de portions de votre document - à la volée pour que vous ayez un aperçu de leur aspect final sans avoir - à perturber le fil de votre pensée avec des appels à -\family sans - -\family default -une visionneuse. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Pré-requis -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour faire fonctionner les aperçus, vous devez installer le paquetage LaTeX - -\series bold -preview-latex -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! preview-latex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (nommé simplement -\begin_inset Flex Strong -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -preview -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dans certains systèmes). - S'il n'est pas déjà installé, vous le trouverez dans le catalogue TeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - ou dans le gestionnaire de paquetages de votre distribution LaTeX. - Vous obtiendrez des résultats plus esthétiques si vous installez le programme - -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pnmcrop -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - du paquetage -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -netpbm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -; avec LyX sur Windows, le programme et le paquetage LaTeX sont installés - automatiquement avec LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Activer l'aperçu -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous désirez par exemple voir vos formules mathématiques en typographie - LaTeX, activez l'option -\family sans -Affichage écran des graphiques -\family default - dans la fenêtre -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Préférences -\family default -, sous -\family sans -Apparence\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Affichage écran. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Activez ensuit -\family sans -Aperçu -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vif. - -\family default -La -\family sans -Taille -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'aperçu -\family default - est le facteur multiplicatif pour la taille. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les aperçus sont générés quand vous chargez un document et quand vous avez - fini d'éditer un insert. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - les aperçus d'un document déjà chargé ne sont pas toujours créés en sélectionna -nt juste -\family sans -Aperçu -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vif -\family default -, vous devez le ré-ouvrir pour activer les aperçus. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Parties du document spécifiques -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En dehors des mathématiques, il y a d'autres cas qui peuvent nécessiter - un aperçu, par exemple les éléments que LyX ne sait pas afficher comme - ceux faisant l'objet d'une rotation, ou ceux qui ne sont pas encore interprétés - par LyX. - Pour ce faire, insérez un insert d'aperçu via -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Aperçu -\family default -, ou collez ce que vous voulez voir dans un tel insert. - Si vous cliquez sur l'insert, vous pouvez modifier le contenu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un exemple: pour créer des boîtes avec rotation, vous utilisez la commande - LaTeX -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default - que LyX ne reconnaît pas encore. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default - est expliquée dans la section -\emph on -Les boîtes pivotées et redimensionnées -\emph default - dans le manuel des -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - À la place des boîtes de code TeX, vous désirez voir la boîte pivotée telle - qu'elle apparaîtra dan le résultat, par exemple pour régler l'angle de - rotation et l'accorder avec le texte environnant. - Par conséquent vous créez un insert d'aperçu et copiez le texte avec les - boîtes pivotées à l'intérieur. - Voici le résultat: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -Ceci est un texte encadré -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Doublebox -position "c" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 0 -inner_pos "c" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1in" -special "width" -height "1in" -height_special "totalheight" -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -with rotated -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et une formule -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'aperçu fonctionne également avec les couleurs: ici une boîte spéciale - encadrée et colorée a été créée avec la commande LaTeX -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default -: -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default - est expliquée dans la section -\emph on -Boîtes colorées -\emph default - dans le manuel des -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fboxrule 1mm -\backslash -fboxsep 1mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Ceci est un texte dans une boîte encadrée et colorée. -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si LyX n'affiche pas d'aperçu, assurez-vous que vous l'avez activé comme - indiqué plus haut, et assurez-vous également que le code TeX dans l'insert - d'aperçu est valide, et que vous avez bien installé les paquetages LaTeX - requis par ledit code. - Si LyX ne peut pas créer d'aperçu, vous ne pourrez pas non plus visionner - votre document, dans la plupart des cas, du fait d'erreurs LaTeX. - Par conséquent si vous utilisez du code TeX dont vous n'êtes pas sûr, l'aperçu - est une méthode simple pour le tester sans visionner tout le document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Code source LaTeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi avoir un aperçu du code source LaTeX de tout ou d'une - partie de votre document. - Utilisez le menu -\family sans -Visualiser\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Afficher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -code -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\family default - et une fenêtre s'ouvre avec le code LaTeX. - La fenêtre affiche le code source du paragraphe où se trouve le curseur. - Si vous avez sélectionné une partie du document dans la fenêtre LyX, alors - seul le code correspondant à cette sélection sera affiché. - Si vous voulez que tout le document soit visible dans la fenêtre du code - LaTeX, activez l'option -\family sans -Code -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -source -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -complet -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Rechercher et remplacer (version élaborée) -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Rechercher-et-Remplacer-élaboré" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Rechercher -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Remplacer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Introduction -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La fonctionnalité -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Rechercher et remplacer -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - élaborée de LyX permet la recherche de segments de texte complexes, dotés - de style, et de contenus mathématiques dans les documents LyX; Il s'agit - d'une amélioration de la version standard (rapide) de la fonctionnalité - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Rechercher et remplacer -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Les points clés sont les suivants: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -la recherche de texte et de formules mathématiques est indifféremment autorisée, - les secondes étant saisies de la manière habituelle: on peut trouver non - seulement des formules entières, mais également des morceaux de formules - faisant partie de formules plus compliquées; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -la recherche peut être insensible au style, de telle sorte que le texte - est trouvé quel que soit le contexte ou le style (texte standard, titres - de section, notes, et même mathématiques), ou il peut être marqué par un - style, de sorte que, par exemple, un mot appartenant à un titre de section - ne sera trouvé que dans un titre de section; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -la recherche peut être étendue à une portée, i.e. - un ensemble de fichiers qui peuvent être des sous-documents du document - en cours de modification, tous les fichiers ouverts, ou tous les manuels - disponibles via le menu -\family sans -Aide -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -le remplacement peut préserver les capitales, de telle sorte que les capitales - du texte remplacé est adapté au texte trouvé (i.e. - tout en bas de casse, tout en capitales, capitale initiale). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Usage élémentaire -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La fonctionnalité -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Rechercher et remplacer -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - est activée par le menu -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rechercher et remplacer (élaboré) -\family default - (raccourci -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - -) ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outil. - Ceci ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Rechercher et remplacer (élaboré) -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Recherche de texte -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Saisissez un mot simple dans le mini-éditeur -\family sans -Rechercher -\family default -, et cherchez ses occurrences en cliquant sur le bouton -\family sans -Recherche suivante -\family default - en bas de la fenêtre (ou pressez simplement la touche -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -). - Le mot choisi est trouvé à la fois en texte standard et en mode mathématique, - s'il est en évidence, en police grasse ou en police normale, et à la fois - dans les titres de section et dans le texte normal. - En pressant -\family sans -Entrée -\family default -de manière répétitive la recherche se poursuit vers le bas -\family sans -. - -\family default - De manière similaire, presser -\family sans -Maj+Entrée -\family default - recherche vers le haut. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Durant la recherche, l'option -\family sans -Selon la casse -\family default - permet de restreindre l'accord aux seules chaînes se trouvant dans la même - casse que la chaîne saisie dans l'éditeur -\family sans -Rechercher -\family default -. - L'option -\family sans -Mots complets -\family default - restreint l'accord aux limites de mots. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Recherche dans les formules mathématiques -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les formules mathématiques peuvent être explorées en saisissant dans l'éditeur -\family sans - Rechercher -\family default - une formule, comme -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - - ou, plus complexe, comme -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - -. - Lors de la recherche d'une formule, elle est fructueuse à la fois quand - elle est isolée et quand elle se trouve insérée dans une sous-formule et - dans des parties encapsulées d'une sous-formule: par exemple les éléments - ci-dessus seraient trouvés dans -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Recherche marquée par le style -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est également possible de rechercher du texte dans un style déterminé. - Ceci se fait en passant à l'onglet -\family sans -Paramètres -\family default - de la fenêtre de dialogue et en décochant la case -\family sans -Ignorer le format -\family default -. - De cette façon, en saisissant dans l'éditeur -\family sans -Rechercher -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -un mot ordinaire, on ne trouvera pas les occurrences de ce mot mises en - évidence ou en police grasse; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -un mot mis en évidence ou en police grasse, on ne trouvera que les occurrences - dans la même police de caractères, et dans le même style de texte; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -un mot ordinaire dans un titre de section, on ne trouvera que les occurrences - dans un titre de section. - Également, si le texte à rechercher est en évidence ou en police grasse, - en plus d'être en style -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -titre de section -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, il ne sera trouvé que si le mot est dans le même style de caractères; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -un texte mathématique dans une formule hors ligne, on ne trouvera que les - occurrences de ce texte dans une formule hors ligne (et non pas en ligne). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Remplacer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les éléments de texte en accord avec le texte saisi dans l'éditeur -\family sans -Rechercher -\family default -peuvent être remplacés par les éléments de texte saisis dans l'éditeur -\family sans -Remplacer -\family default -.Pour trouver l'occurrence suivante et la remplacer, cliquez sur le bouton - -\family sans -Remplacer -\family default - ou pressez -\family sans -Entrée -\family default - ou -\family sans -Maj+Entrée -\family default - avec le curseur dans l'éditeur R -\family sans -emplacer -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez remplacer des éléments fonctionnelelment mis en forme à la place - des éléments en accord du document. - Des scénarios typiques peuvent être les suivants (parmi de nombreux autres): -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -remplacer les occurrences d'un mot avec un style personnalisé du même mot: - par exemple, remplacer les occurrences de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -fonction() -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - par sa version en chasse fixe -\family typewriter - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -fonction() -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -exécuter une réécriture de notation mathématique: par exemple, remplacer - les occurrences de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $R$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - par -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{\mathbb{R}}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (vous pouvez désirer activer -\family sans -Mots complets -\family default - et -\family sans -Selon la casse -\family default - et désactiver -\family sans -Ignorer le format -\family default - dans l'onglet -\family sans -Paramètres -\family default -, pour éviter de remplacer toutes les occurrences des lettres -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -R -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - apparaissant dans le texte normal), ou les occurrences de -\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ -\end_inset - - par -\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$ -\end_inset - -, ou les occurrences de -\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ -\end_inset - - par -\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Utilisation élaborée -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il existe une recherche fondée sur les expressions régulières (regexp) -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Une bonne explication de ce que sont les expressions régulières se trouve - dans cet article Wikipedia: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Vous pouvez rechercher des expressions régulières en l'insérant dans l'éditeur - -\family sans -Rechercher -\family default -. - Ceci se fait par le menu -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Insérer une expression régulière -\family default - quand le curseur est dans l'éditeur -\family sans -Rechercher -\family default -. - Les chaînes de caractères saisies dans les inserts d'expression régulière - sont accordés en fonction des règles -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sous la contrainte que toute (sous-)expression doive s'accorder à un segment - de texte LyX bien constitué, i.e. - que, en recherchant du code LaTeX, aucun segment avec des accolades non - appariées n'est autorisé dans la chaîne de caractères. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, alors que les chaînes en dehors des expressions régulières est accordé - exactement au même texte dans le document. - Notez qu'il est possible de couper/coller des inserts d'expression régulière - comme d'habitude. - Les exemples d'utilisation de cette fonctionnalité peuvent être: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -rechercher toutes les fractions avec un dénominateur donné: par exemple, - saisir la fraction -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - - (où la chaîne -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - au numérateur représente l'accord universel) dans l'éditeur -\family sans -Rechercher -\family default - trouve toutes les fractions avec le dénominateur indiqué; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -rechercher tout texte dans un style donné: par exemple, après avoir décoché - -\family sans -Ignorer le format -\family default - dans l'onglet -\family sans -Paramètres -\family default -, saisir une expression régulière -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, -\series default - la mettre en évidence ou la marquer en police grasse, permet de trouver - toutes les chaînes mises en évidence ou en police grasse, respectivement. - De la même manière, insérer une expression -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans une liste à puce, une énumération ou un titre de section permet de - trouver toutes les listes à puces, les énumérations ou les titres de section. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enfin, le référencement de (sous-)expressions dans les expressions régulières - peut être utilisé comme d'habitude, en mettant des parties de l'expression - entre parenthèses -\begin_inset Formula $()$ -\end_inset - -, et en se référant à ces parties par -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ -\end_inset - -, etc., où le symbole -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash$ -\end_inset - - est saisi en pressant deux fois la touche de barre oblique arrière. - Par exemple, essayez de rechercher l'expression -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -[[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]] -\backslash -1[[:space:]] -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -pour trouver les répétitions de mots, s'il y en a. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'utilisation du référencement arrière n'est pas (encore) implanté dans - la fonction -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Remplacer. -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -\color none -Note: -\series default - Le référencement arrière fonctionne à la fois dans le même expression régulière - ou dans différentes expressions indépendantes, lorsque la numérotation - du référencement est absolu, i. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -e. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - - se réfère toujours à la première occurrence de -\begin_inset Formula $()$ -\end_inset - - dans toutes les expressions saisies. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Correcteur orthographique -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Orthographe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Correcteur-Orthographique" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX est doté d'un correcteur orthographique intégré. - Le menu -\family sans - Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Correcteur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -orthographique -\family default -, le raccourci clavier -\family sans -F7 -\family default - ou le bouton de la barre d'outils -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show spellchecker" -\end_inset - - démarre le correcteur orthographique à partir de la position courante du - curseur ou du début de la sélection de texte courante. - Une fenêtre latérale s'ouvre et montre tout mot incorrect ou inconnu trouvé. - Elle vous permet de le corriger ou de le remplacer. - Dès qu'un mot inconnu est trouvé, il est sélectionné et le texte défile - pour le rendre visible. - Dans la fenêtre latérale du correcteur orthographique, il y a une case - qui vous propose des suggestions de correction, si il en existe. - En cliquant sur une de ces suggestions elle est recopiée dans le champ - -\family sans -Remplace -\family default -r, en double-cliquant on effectue directement le remplacement. - Un mot inconnu du correcteur, mais qui serait correctement écrit, peut - être ajouté à votre dictionnaire personnel. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Implicitement le dictionnaire qui est utilisé est déterminé par la langue - du document qui est fixée dans la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default -. - Vous pouvez utiliser un autre dictionnaire en donnant le nom d'une autre - langue dans le menu déroulant -\family sans -Langue -\family default - en haut de la fenêtre latérale du correcteur. - LyX peut effectuer la correction dans les documents multilingues, si vous - avez marqué le texte avec la langue appropriée et si les dictionnaires - adéquats sont installés: LyX commute automatiquement vers le bon dictionnaire. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here -\lang french -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -There are 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files for each language. - To install a dictionary, copy the 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files into LyX's installation subfolder -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -dicts -\family default - and restart LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Autres paramètres -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La rubrique -\family sans -Paramètres de langue\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Correcteur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -orthographique -\family default - de la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Préférences -\family default - possède quelques options supplémentaires: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Moteur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -correcteur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -orthographique permet de sélectionner les bibliothèques de dictionnaires - que LyX doit utiliser pour la correction. - En fonction de votre système, les bibliothèques -\family typewriter -aspell -\family default -, -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default - ou -\family typewriter -enchant -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Enchant est une bibliothèque d'encapsulation dotées de nombreuses références - configurable. - Vous pouvez consulter la documantation ou la page du manuel ( -\emph on -man-page -\emph default -) pour ne savoir pàlus. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - peuvent être disponibles. - Avec Windows, on ne trouve que -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Utiliser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -une -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -autre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -langue force l'utilisation de la langue indiquée si le champ n'est pas vide, - quelle que soit la langue sélectionnée pour le document; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Utiliser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -caractères -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -protégés vous permet de déclarer des caractères non standard que le correcteur - doit néanmoins traiter, comme par exemple des umlaut allemands.. - En principe cette option ne devrait pas être nécessaire; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Accepter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mots -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -composés Empêche le correcteur de se plaindre de mots composés comme -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -nonlinéaire -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - par exemple. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Correction -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -orthographique -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -volée permet de vérifier l'orthographe au fur et à mesure de la saisie. - Les mots mal orthographiés sont soulignés d'un trait pointillé rouge. - Avec un clic droit sur un mot souligné, les suggestions du correcteur apparaiss -ent dans le menu contextuel. - Choisir l'un d'entre eux effectue le remplacement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Orthographe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -notes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -commentaires effectue la vérification du contenu non imprimable du document, - si la case est cochée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Dictionnaire des synonymes -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dictionnaire des synonymes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Dictionnaire-de-synonymes" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX fournit un dictionnaires de synonymes multilingue. - Il utilise le même environnement que LibreOffice, OpenOffice et Firefox - (à savoir le dictionnaire -\family typewriter - MyThes -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, qui est inclus dans LyX). - De ce fait, LyX peut accéder directement au dictionnaire des synonymes - de OpenOffice, qui est disponible pour ne nombreuses langues. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette section décrit comment sont installés ces dictionnaires et comment - les utiliser. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Configurer le dictionnaire de synonymes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La bibliothèque -\emph on -MyThes/ -\emph default -OpenOffice -\emph on - -\emph default -est constituée de deux fichiers par langue: un fichier de suffixe -\emph on -.dat -\emph default - contenant les données et un fichier de suffixe -\emph on -.idx -\emph default -. - Le nom du fichier contient le code de la langue concernée (par exemple - -\family sans -fr_FR -\family default - pour français). - Par exemple, les fichiers pour français sont ainsi nommés : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_fr_FR_v2.idx -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_fr_FR_v2.dat -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si LibreOffice ou OpenOffice est déjà installé sur votre système, avec ses - dictionnaires de synonymes, ces fichiers devraient déjà être présents. - Si ce n'est pas le cas, vous pouvez récupérer les dictionnaires, soit à - partir du site -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/dictionaries/trunk/thes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, soit à partir du site -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://extensions.services.openoffice.org/en/search/node/thesaurus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notez que, depuis OpenOffice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3.0, les fichiers de -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://extensions.services.openoffice.org -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - sont habituellement stockés dans les archives d'extensions ( -\emph on -*.oxt -\emph default -) qui contiennent d'autres fichiers comme les dictionnaires orthographiques. - Ces archives sont des fichier zip, vous pouvez donc les décompresser comme - une archive zip ordinaire. - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Mettez les fichiers -\emph on -*.idx -\emph default - et -\emph on -*.dat -\emph default - de toutes les langues que vous voulez utiliser dans un répertoire (n'utilisez - pas de sous-répertoires), et indiquez le chemin vers ce répertoire dans - -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Préférences\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Répertoires -\family default -. - Maintenant, le dictionnaire de synonymes devrait être prêt à l'usage. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si LibreOffice ou OpenOffice -\lang english -and its thesaurus -\lang french - est déjà installé -\lang english -on a Linux system, these files should be already on your system. - On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be - installed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here -\lang french -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -To install a dictionary, copy the 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files into LyX's installation subfolder -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -thes -\family default - and restart LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Utiliser le dictionnaire de synonymes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour utiliser le dictionnaire de synonymes, sélectionnez un mot ou placez - le curseur juste après et utilisez le menu -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dictionnaire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -synonymes -\family default -ou le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "thesaurus-entry" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. - Une fenêtre de dialogue s'ouvre, affichant des mots dont le sens est probableme -nt proche et qui peuvent être utilisés comme synonymes. - Les propositions sont rassemblées en catégories. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que le dictionnaire, pour certaine langues, ne donne pas seulement - les synonymes, mais aussi des termes génériques (comme -\emph on -organisme -\emph default - pour -\emph on -plante -\emph default -), des termes connexes (comme -\emph on -politique -\emph default - pour -\emph on -anarchisme -\emph default -), les compositions (comme -\emph on -arbre à cames -\emph default - pour -\emph on -arbre -\emph default -) et les antonymes (comme -\emph on -femme -\emph default - pour -\emph on -homme -\emph default -). - Les termes génériques, connexes et antonymes sont identifiés en tant que - tels. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La langue est automatiquement choisie en fonction de la langue active à - l'endroit où se trouve le curseur, mais vous pouvez aussi la changer dans - la fenêtre de dialogue où vous pouvez aussi entrer directement de nouveaux - mots à rechercher. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que le dictionnaire n'accepte pas les phrases (seuls les composés - qui sont dans le dictionnaire comme -\emph on -arbre à cames -\emph default -cité plus haut, sont acceptés), et vous devez utiliser la forme dite canonique - ( -\emph on -lemma form -\emph default -en anglais), c'est à dire la forme qui est utilisée dans le dictionnaire - (pour de nombreuses langues, c'est la première personne du singulier à - l'indicatif pour les noms et l'infinitif pour les verbes). - Par exemple, interroger le dictionnaire de synonymes avec le mot -\emph on -rapports -\emph default - ne donnera pas de résultat alors qu'il y en aura pour -\emph on -rapport -\emph default -. - Pour contourner ce problème, vous pouvez ne sélectionner que la partie - -\emph on -rapport -\emph default - du mot -\emph on -rapports -\emph default - pour avoir des résultats sans avoir à modifier la demande dans la fenêtre - de dialogue. - Et de cette façon le remplacement proposé sera probablement correct (puisque - seule la partie sélectionnée sera modifiée, le reste étant inchangé). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Suivi des modifications -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Suivi de modification -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Suivi de modification -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Suivi-de-modifications" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand vous travaillez à plusieurs sur un même document, il est extrêmement - utile de pouvoir distinguer les modifications que les autres ont pu apporter - au document. - Vous pouvez alors décider d'accepter ces modifications ou non. - Ceci peut se faire en activant le suivi des modifications dans le menu - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivi -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les modifications effectuées sur le document seront mises en évidence par - des traits et des couleurs : -\color blue - -\bar under -du texte souligné -\bar default - -\color inherit -est un ajout -\color blue -, -\strikeout on -du texte barré -\strikeout default - -\color inherit -est une suppression. - La couleur dépend de l'auteur de la modification. - Vous pouvez changer les couleurs dans les préférences de LyX dans la rubrique - -\family sans -Apparence -\family default -, -\family sans -Couleurs -\family default -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Couleurs ! Suivi des modifications -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - L'auteur et la date de la modification sont affichés dans la barre d'état - de LyX quand le curseur se trouve sur le texte modifié. - La même information est affichée quand vous utilisez le bouton -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - - de la barre d'outils. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand le suivi des modifications est activé, la barre d'outil de revue est - rendue visible: -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barre d'outils ! Revue -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette barre d'outils, illustrée ci-dessus contient les boutons suivants: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-track" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivi -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-output" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivi -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Afficher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sortie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Modification -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -suivante -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivi -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Accepter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modification -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivi -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rejeter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modification -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivi -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fusionner -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivi -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Accepter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -toutes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Suivi -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rejeter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -toutes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -modifications -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -suivante -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La barre d'outils de suivi des modifications vous aide à accepter, rejeter - ou fusionner les modifications. - Sélectionnez la modification et cliquez sur le bouton voulu. - Quand vous fusionnez les modifications, une fenêtre s'ouvre et vous donne - des informations sur la modification qui suit la position du curseur. - Vous n'avez donc pas à sélectionner cette modification pour y accéder. - Avec la fenêtre de fusion, vous pouvez décider d'accepter ou de rejeter - une modification et aussi sauter à la suivante. - De cette façon vous pouvez parcourir toutes les modifications de votre - document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La barre d'outils a aussi deux boutons pour gérer les notes puisqu'il est - souvent utile de mettre une note pour expliquer une modification. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous voulez que les marques de modifications soient visibles sur la sortie - finale, vous avez besoin du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -dvipost -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! dvipost -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Vous le trouverez dans le catalogue TeX, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - ou avec le gestionnaire de paquetages de votre installation LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Comparaison de documents -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Comparaison de documents -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez comparer deux fichiers LyX différents vis le menu -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Compare -\family default -r.... - Le résultat est un fichier LyX doté du suivi de modifications mettant en - évidence les différences. - Dans la fenêtre de dialogue, vous pouvez choisir depuis quel document extraire - les paramètres pour le fichier résultant de la comparaison, grâce à l'option - -\family sans -Copier les paramètres du document depuis -\family default -. - Cocher -\family sans -Activer le suivi de modifications dans la sortie imprimable -\family default - active l'option de suivi de modifications -\family sans -Afficher les modifications dans la sortie -\family default - pour vous permettre visionner le suivi dans le PDF du fichier des différences. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Internationalisation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Internationalisation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette section vous montre comment utiliser LyX avec la langue que vous voulez. - Pour certaines langues, vous devrez vous référer à des pages Wiki sur internet - qui expliquent comment paramétrer LyX pour les utiliser. - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En plus des langues proprement dites LyX accepte aussi les symboles phonétiques, - voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Caractère-Spécial" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Options linguistiques -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Langue ! Options -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Langue -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Langue -\family default - vous permet de choisir la langue -\family roman -\lang english -, the quote style -\family default -\lang french - et l'encodage des caractères. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le champ -\family sans -Encodage -\family default - vous permet de choisir une page d'encodage des caractères que vous voulez - utiliser pour l'exportation LaTeX. - L'option -\family sans -Langue -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -implicite -\family default -est le meilleur choix et fonctionne bien dans la plupart des cas. - Les différents encodages sont décrits dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Paramètres" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les cartes de configuration du clavier -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Cartes-de-clavier" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous avez par exemple un clavier de style US et que vous voulez saisir - un texte dans une langue différente de l'anglais, vous pouvez utiliser - une carte clavier appropriée. - Par exemple, si vous voulez saisir de l'italien, vous pouvez configurer - LyX avec une carte de configuration clavier italienne. - La fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Préférences\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Saisie\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Clavier/Souris -\family default - vous permet de choisir jusqu'à deux cartes de réaffectation, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Clavier/Souris" - -\end_inset - -. - Vous pouvez sélectionner une carte primaire et une carte secondaire et - ensuite choisir laquelle mettre en service. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -D'autre part, vous pouvez juste souhaiter changer quelques correspondances - clavier ou bien définir une carte totalement différente (pour Vulcan, par - exemple). - Vous pouvez écrire d'habitude en italien sur un clavier US et vouloir inclure - une citation locale en allemand. - Dans ces situations, vous pouvez écrire votre propre carte de configuration - ou modifier une carte existante pour obtenir les caractères voulus. - Ceci et bien d'autre réglages sont expliqués dans le manuel de -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -\start_of_appendix -L'interface utilisateur -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:Interface-Utilisateur" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cet appendice liste tous les menus disponibles et décrit leur usage. - Il est destiné à être une référence rapide si vous cherchez un sujet précis - dans le manuel de l'utilisateur. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Le menu Fichier -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Fichier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans le menu -\family sans -Fichier -\family default - vous avez les opérations de bases ainsi que quelques opérations plus avancées. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nouveau -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Crée un nouveau document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nouveau avec modèle -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce menu vous demande le modèle à utiliser. - Choisir un modèle va automatiquement déterminer certains détails de disposition - pour le document, détails que vous auriez normalement dû modifier manuellement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ouvrir -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ouvre un document existant. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Documents récents -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce sous-menu affiche la liste des documents ouverts récemment. - Cliquez sur le fichier que vous voulez ouvrir. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fermer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ferme le document courant. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fermer tout -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ferme tous les documents ouverts. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Enregistrer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enregistre le document courant. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Enregistrer sous -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enregistre le document courant sous un nouveau nom pour en faire une copie. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Enregistrer tout -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Enregistre tous les documents ouverts. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Revenir à la sauvegarde -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Recharge le document courant à partir du disque. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Contrôle de version -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le contrôle de version est utilisé quand plusieurs personnes travaillent - en même temps sur le même document ou bien quand l'utilisateur souhaite - conserver une trace détaillée des modifications apportées au document. - Il est décrit dans la section -\emph on -Contrôle de version avec LyX -\emph default -du manuel -\emph on -Options avancées -\emph default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Importer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez importer à partir de ce sous-menu des fichiers créés avec des - versions anciennes de LyX, des fichiers HTML, des fichiers LaTeX, des fichiers - NoWeb, des fichiers de texte brut (fichiers ASCII) et des fichiers textes - de données séparées par des virgules, comme des tableaux (CSV pour -\emph on -\lang english -comma separated values -\emph default -\lang french -). - Le fichier est importé comme un nouveau document LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand on utilise -\family sans -Texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -brut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -par -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Lignes -\family default -, toutes les lignes présentes dans le fichier seront importées comme un - unique paragraphe. - Un nouveau paragraphe n'est créé que si on rencontre une ligne vide. - Avec -\family sans -Texte -\family default - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family sans -brut -\family default -, le texte est importé sous forme de paragraphes, chaque saut de ligne commençan -t un nouveau paragraphe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Exporter -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Exporter" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez exporter votre document vers des formats de fichier variés. - Le fichier exporté est placé dans le même répertoire que votre fichier - LyX. - Les entrées de menu ne sont pas les mêmes sur toutes les installations, - car les possibilités d'exportation dépendent des programmes que LyX a trouvé - sur votre machine lors de sa configuration. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici la liste de toutes les possibilités; elles sont détaillées dans la - section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" - -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -CJK -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX format de la version spéciale de LyX 1.4.x pour le chinois, le japonais - et le coréen (CJK). - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Depuis LyX 1.5.0 le support CJK est intégré à LyX; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DocBook fichier texte contenant du code au format SGML utilisé par le langage - à balises -\family typewriter -DocBook -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DocBook -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XML) fichier texte contenant du; code au format XML utilisé par le langage - à balises -\family typewriter -DocBook -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DraftDVI format DVI natif de LaTeX. - Ce format n'est pas approprié si vous avez des caractères spéciaux ou des - espaces dans le chemins d'accès ou les noms de fichiers dans votre document. - Lyx utilise ce format de manière interne lors du pré-traitement de l'exportatio -n DVI; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVI format DVI -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) format DVI utilisant le processeur -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -: il traite Unicode et les polices non-TeX; -\series bold - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - toutes les visionneuses DVI ne sont pas capables d'afficher ce format correctem -ent. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Graphviz -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Dot fichier texte contenant du code dans le langage de programmation -\family typewriter -Dot -\family default - utilisé pour créer des graphiques à l'aide du logiciel -\family typewriter -Graphviz -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -HTML format HTML (les convertisseurs HTML sont des applications indépendantes - de LyX et peuvent ne pas fonctionner dans tous les cas); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -HTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(MS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Word) format HTML spécialisé pour pouvoir être importé dans -\family sans -MS Word -\family default -. - Une conséquence est que les formules sont incorporées sous forme d'images - et non au format -\family sans -MathML -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX compilable avec le processeur - -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX. - Toutes les images utilisées dans le document sont converties dans un format - que peut lire le processeur -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default - (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(standard) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX. - Toutes les images utilisées dans le document sont converties au format - EPS, le seul que peut lire le processeur -\family typewriter -latex -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX compilable avec le processeur - -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Livre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LilyPond -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(La -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -TeX) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX ainsi que du code écrit - dans la syntaxe du logiciel de notation musicale -\family typewriter - LilyPond -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Archive -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(zip|tar.gz) crée une archive au format ZIP ou au format tar.gz (en fonction - de votre système) contenant le document et tous les fichiers auxiliaires - nécessaires à sa compilation (images, sous-documents,fichiers BiBTeX, etc.); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -z.y.x fichier LyX dans un format lisible par la version z.y.x ( -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -z -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -y -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - sont remplacés par un numéro de version) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yXHTML format HTML créé par le moteur interne de LyX; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -NoWeb fichier texte contenant un code au format du processeur de programmation - littéraire -\family typewriter -NoWeb -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -OpenDocument fichier au format OpenDocument compatible avec les applications - -\family sans -LibreOffice, OpenOffice -\family default -, -\family sans -KOffice -\family default -, -\family sans -Abiword -\family default -, etc. - (le convertisseur OpenDocument est une application indépendante de LyX - qui peut ne pas fonctionner dans tous les cas); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) format PDF en utilisant le programme -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default -, produit en interne un fichier DVI qui est ensuite converti au format PDF; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) format PDF en utilisant le processeur -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -, produit directement le fichier PDF; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) format PDF utilisant le processeur -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -, produit directement le fichier PDF; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) format PDF en utilisant le processeur -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default -, produit en interne un fichier PostScript qui est ensuite converti au format - PDF; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) format PDF en utilisant le processeur -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -, produit directement le fichier PDF; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -brut format texte simple; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Texte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -brut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii) format texte simple. - Le document est d'abord converti au format PostScript et ensuite il est - exporté sous forme de texte en utilisant le programme -\family sans - -\family typewriter -ps2ascii -\family default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Postscript format PostScript en utilisant le programme -\family typewriter -dvips -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Sweave fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX ainsi que du code écrit - dans la syntaxe du logiciel de programmation statistique -\family typewriter -R -\family default -. - Il est possible d'utiliser des commandes -\family typewriter -R -\family default - avec la -\family typewriter -R -\family default --fonction -\family typewriter -Sweave -\family default -de LaTeX; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si une des lignes de menu -\family sans -DVI -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - ou -\family sans -Postscript -\family default - manque, vous devriez mettre à jour votre configuration LaTeX. - Après cette mise à jour vous devez reconfigurer LyX, voyez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Config-LyX-de-base" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Imprimer -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec ce menu vous pouvez imprimer votre document dans un fichier PostScript - ou l'envoyer à une imprimante. - L'imprimante le recevra aussi sous forme PostScript. - La conversion en PostScript est faite en interne par LyX en utilisant le - programme -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -. - Pour plus d'informations, voyez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Imprimer" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fax -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette entrée de menu n'apparaît que si un programme de fax est installé - (sous Windows, vous devez en plus ajouter le chemin vers ce programme au - préfixe PATH de LyX, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Répertoires" - -\end_inset - -). - Avec cette entrée de menu, vous pouvez envoyer votre document à un programme - de fax comme -\family typewriter -hylapex -\family default - ou -\family typewriter -kdeprintfax -\family default -. - Le format utilisé par défaut pour le fichier qui est envoyé est le PostScript. - Ce format peut être changé dans les préférences de LyX comme cela est décrit - dans la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Convertisseurs" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Nouvelle fenêtre et Fermer la fenêtre -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ouvre ou ferme une nouvelle instance de LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Quitter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous propose d'enregistrer tous les documents non enregistrés et puis quitte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Le menu Édition -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Édition -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Annuler et Refaire -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Détaillé dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Annuler-et-Refaire" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Couper, Copier, Coller, Coller -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -une -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sélection -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -récente, Collage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spécial -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Couper, Copier, Coller ... -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Détaillé dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Base-d'edition" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Sélectionner tout l'insert -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sélectionne le contenu de l'insert dans lequel se trouve le curseur. - Si le curseur n'est pas dans un insert, sélectionne tout le document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Sélectionner -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Tout -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Sélectionne la totalité du document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Rechercher et remplacer (simple) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Détaillé dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Base-d'edition" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Rechercher et remplacer (avancé) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Détaillé dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Rechercher-et-Remplacer-élaboré" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Déplacer le paragraphe vers le haut/bas -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette commande déplace le paragraphe où se trouve le curseur d'un paragraphe - vers le haut ou vers le bas. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Style de texte -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dialogues ! Style du Texte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Détaillé dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Réglage-fin-avec" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Paramètres de paragraphe -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paragraphe ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Permet de modifier l'alignement, l'interligne et la largeur de l'étiquette. - Les modifications de paramètres n'affectent que le paragraphe dans lequel - se trouve le curseur. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi empêcher que la première ligne soit indentée, si vous - avez choisi de séparer les paragraphes avec une indentation dans la fenêtre - de dialogue -\family sans - Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres, -\family default -rubrique -\family sans - Format -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Texte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Paramètres de tableau et Math -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces deux menus ne sont actifs que si le curseur se trouve respectivement - dans un tableau ou une formule mathématique. - Les propriétés de ce tableau ou de cette formule peuvent alors être modifiées. - Les propriétés des tableaux sont détaillées dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tableaux" - -\end_inset - -, celles des formules mathématiques dans le chapitre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Formules-mathématiques" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Augmenter/Réduire la profondeur de liste -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces menus ne sont actifs que si le curseur se trouve dans un environnement - qui peut être emboîté. - Ils augmentent ou réduisent le niveau d'emboîtement de l'environnement - courant comme cela est expliqué dans les sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Profondeur-section" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Le menu Affichage -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Affichage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En bas du menu -\family sans -Visualiser -\family default -, il y a la liste des documents qui sont ouverts. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Ouvrir/Fermer tous les inserts -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ouvre ou ferme tous les inserts de votre document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Déplier/Replier la macro mathématique -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Déplie ou replie la macro mathématique courante. - Les macro mathématiques sont décrites dans le manuel -\emph on -Math. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Afficher le Code LaTeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ouvre une fenêtre montrant le code LaTeX du document courant, comme cela - est décrit dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Aperçu-de-morceaux" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Afficher les messages -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ouvre une fenêtre affichant les messages de service. - C'est utile pour déboguer LyX (i.e. - chercher les erreurs dans le programme lui-même) ou pour voir ce qui se - passe en arrière plan pendant le traitement LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Visionner -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette rubrique engendre la sortie spécifiée implicitement, soit dans les - préférences (voir la section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" - -\end_inset - -), soit dans les paramètres du document (voir section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - -), et l'ouvre dans la visionneuse adéquate. - La visionneuse peut être choisie dans les préférences, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" - -\end_inset - -. - Les visionneuses implicites sont déterminées par LyX à sa première configuratio -n et à chaque reconfiguration. - Le format de sortie implicite est -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Visionner (autres formats) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec ce sous-menu, vous pouvez voir votre document dans d'autres formats - de sortie. - Le menu contient une liste de formats que vous pouvez utiliser pour visionner - votre document, en utilisant un programme externe. - Les rubriques du menu ne sont pas forcément les mêmes sur toutes les installati -ons: elles dépendent des programmes de la distribution LaTeX que LyX a trouvés - lors de sa configuration. - Tous les formats possibles se trouvent parmi les formats listés dans la - section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Exporter" - -\end_inset - -. - Vous devriez au moins trouver la rubrique -\family sans -DVI -\family default -. - Si la venait à manquer, vous devriez mettre à jour ou réparer votre installatio -n LaTeX. - Après cette mise à jour, vous devez reconfigurer LyX; voyez comment faire - dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Config-LyX-de-base" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Activer un des menus va lancer une visionneuse. - Celle-ci peut être choisie dans les préférences, voir -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" - -\end_inset - -. - les visionneuses implicites sont déterminés par LyX à sa première configuration - et à chaque reconfiguration. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mettre à jour -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette rubrique du menu vous permet de mettre à jour la vue avec vos modification -s les plus récentes (dans le format de sortie implicite) sans ouvrir une - nouvelle fenêtre de visionnement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mettre à jour (autres formats) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec cette rubrique, vous pouvez mettre à jour la vue avec vos modifications - les plus récentes (dans un format de sortie autre) sans ouvrir une nouvelle - fenêtre de visionnement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Visionner le document maître -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette rubrique du menu n'est visible que si votre document est inclus dans - un autre document, qui est alors son document -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maître -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (voir la section -\emph on -Sous-documents -\emph default - dans le manuel des -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default - pour les détails sur ce sujet). - Cette rubrique permet alors de visionner le document maître depuis son - sous-document: ainsi, si vous travaillez sur un sous-document qui est le - chapitre d'un livre, -\family sans -Visionner le document maître -\family default - va afficher la vue de tout le livre, alors que -\family sans -Visionner -\family default - n'affichera que le chapitre seul. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le format utilisé par cette fonction est le format implicite spécifié dans - les préférences (voir section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" - -\end_inset - -) ou dans les paramètres du document (voir section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Mettre à jour le document maître -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette rubrique du menu n'est visible que si votre document est inclus dans - un autre document, qui est alors son document -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -maître -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - (voir la section -\emph on -Sous-documents -\emph default - dans le manuel des -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default - pour les détails sur ce sujet). - Cette rubrique permet alors de mettre à jour le document maître depuis - son sous-document, sans basculer vers le document maître lui-même.. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le format utilisé par cette fonction est le format implicite spécifié dans - les préférences (voir section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" - -\end_inset - -) ou dans les paramètres du document (voir section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Diviser la vue -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ceci va diviser la fenêtre principale de LyX verticalement ou horizontalement. - Cela permet de voir deux document en même temps pour les comparer, ou de - voir le même document mais à deux positions différentes. - Vous pouvez séparer la fenêtre plusieurs fois pour voir, par exemple, trois - documents ou plus en même temps. - Pour revenir à une fenêtre non divisée, utilisez le menu -\family sans -Fermer la vue active -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fermer la vue active -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ferme une fenêtre divisée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Plein écran -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En utilisant ce menu ou en appuyant sur la touche -\family sans -F11 -\family default -, vous supprimez la barre des menus et toutes les barres d'outils de façon - à n'avoir que votre texte à l'écran. - En plus, la fenêtre de LyX est affichée en plein écran. - Pour revenir du mode plein écran au mode normal, appuyez sur la touche - -\family sans -F11 -\family default -, ou faites un clic droit et désactivez le mode plein écran dans le menu - contextuel qui apparaît alors. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Barres d'outils -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Barres-d'outils" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barres d'outils -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec ce menu, vous pouvez déterminer les barres d'outils qui sont visibles. - Toutes les barres d'outils ainsi que la -\family sans -zone de commande -\family default - peuvent être activées ou désactivées. - L'état actif d'un élément est signalé dans la menu par une coche devant - son nom. - Les barres d'outils -\family sans -Suivi -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modifications -\family default -, -\family sans -Tableau -\family default -, -\family sans -Palettes -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Mathématiques -\family default -, -\family sans -Macros -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathématiques -\family default - et -\family sans -Maths -\family default - peuvent être mises en mode -\emph on -automatique, -\emph default -ce qui est indiqué par le mot -\family sans -(auto) -\family default - ajouté après leur nom. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand elle est -\emph on -active -\emph default -la barre d'outils est toujours visible, en mode -\emph on -automatique -\emph default -la barre n'est visible que si le curseur est dans un environnement approprié - ou que certaines fonctionnalités ont été activées. - Cela signifie que la barre d'outils de suivi des modifications ne sera - visible que si le suivi des modifications est activé, les barres d'outils - maths et tableau ne seront visibles respectivement que si le curseur se - trouve dans une formule mathématique ou un tableau. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les barres d'outils de LyX et leurs boutons sont décrits dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Barres-d'Outils" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Le menu Insertion -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Insertion -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Maths -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère des constructions mathématiques qui sont décrites dans le chapitre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Formules-mathématiques" - -\end_inset - - et dans le manuel -\emph on -Math. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Caractère -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -spécial -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Caractère-Spécial" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec ce menu, vous pouvez insérer les caractères suivants : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Symboles\SpecialChar \ldots{} - Insère tout caractère qui peut être imprimé par votre système LaTeX. - Cela signifie que le nombre de catégories de caractères présentes dans - ce dialogue et les caractères disponibles dépendent des paquetages LaTeX - que vous avez installé. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note -\series default - : Tous les caractères ne seront pas visibles dans la fenêtre de dialogue - -\family sans -Symboles -\family default - puisqu'aucune des polices de caractères que vous pouvez choisir dans la - fenêtre de dialogue des préférences (voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Polices-d'Écran" - -\end_inset - -) ne peut afficher tous les caractères. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Points -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -suspension Insère des points de suspension: \SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Point -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -final Insère un point final pour terminer une phrase, comme c'est décrit - dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Abbreviations" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Guillemet -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -droit Insère ce guillemet : ", sans tenir compte du type de guillemet choisi - dans la rubrique -\family sans -Langue -\family default - du menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default - . -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Guillemet -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -simple Insère un apostrophe : ' -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Césure -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -protégée Insère un tiret de césure qui est protégé contre les sauts de ligne - : \SpecialChar \nobreakdash- - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Barre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -oblique -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sécable Insère une barre oblique là où un saut de ligne peut aussi se produire - : \SpecialChar \slash{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Séparateur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -menus Insère le signe utilisé dans cette documentation comme séparateur - de menus: \SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Symboles -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Phonétiques -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Symboles phonétiques -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Langue ! Symboles phonétiques -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Crée une formule avec ce que l'on appelle un insert -\series bold -tipa -\series default -. - Vous pouvez y insérer des commandes pour créer des symboles phonétiques - IPA. - Pour utiliser ces possibilités, vous devez avoir installé le paquetage - LaTeX -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Pour plus d'information voyez la documentation de -\series bold -tipa, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "tipa" - -\end_inset - - -\series default - et cette page Wiki: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Typographie spéciale -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici vous pouvez insérer les constructions typographiques suivantes: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Exposant Insérer un exposant: test -\begin_inset script superscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -a, b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Indice Insérer un indice: test -\begin_inset script subscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3x -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -insécable Insérer une espace insécable comme indiqué dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espace-Insécable" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -entre -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mots Insère une espace entre mots comme décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espace-inter-mots" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espace -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fine Insère une espace fine comme décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espace-Fine" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ressort -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontal Insère un ressort de remplissage horizontal, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ligne -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -horizontale Insère une ligne horizontale, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Lignes-Horizontales" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Espacement -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vertical Insère un ressort de remplissage vertical, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espacement-Vertical" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fantôme Insère une espace fantôme, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Espace-fantôme" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Point -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -césure Insère un point de césure, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Césure" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Séparation -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligature Insère une séparation de ligature, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Ligatures" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Passage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(fer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -gauche) Insère un passage à la ligne forcé, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Saut-de-ligne" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Passage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(justifié) Insère un passage à la ligne forcé qui de plus étire la ligne - de texte interrompue jusqu'à la marge de la page, description section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Saut-de-ligne" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Saut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(fer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -haut) Insère un saut de page forcé, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Sauts-de-Page" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Saut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(justifié) Insère un saut de page forcé qui en plus étire le texte interrompu - jusqu'à la limite de page, description section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Sauts-de-Page" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Saut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(vide -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -tampon) Insère un saut de page et vide le tampon, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Saut-de-Page-vide-tampon" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Saut -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -impaire Insère un saut de page, vide le tampon et s'assure que la prochaine - page est impaire, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Saut-de-Page-vide-tampon" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Listes & TdM -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Plusieurs listes peuvent être insérées avec ce menu. - La table des matières, la table des algorithmes, des figures et des tableaux - sont décrits dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tdm" - -\end_inset - -. - L'index est décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Index" - -\end_inset - -, le glossaire section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Glossaire" - -\end_inset - -, et la bibliographie BibTeX section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bases-de-Données-Biblio" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Flottant -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour insérer un flottant, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Flottants" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Note -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour insérer des notes, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Notes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Branches -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour insérer des inserts de branche, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Branches" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Inserts personnalisables -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Crée des inserts qui sont spécifiques à une classe de documents. - De tels inserts sont définis dans le fichier layout pour une certaine classe - de documents. - Un exemple est la classe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -article (Elsevier) -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - qui a trois inserts personnalisés. - La section -\emph on -Inserts flexibles et InsetLayout -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default - explique comment sont définis les inserts personnalisés. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fichier -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Trucs Externes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette rubrique permet d'insérer des fichiers et inclure soit le fichier, - soit son contenu dans votre document. - Le chapitre -\emph on -Trucs externes -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -décrit en détail comment effectuer ces opérations. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Boîte -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Boîte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une mini-page décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Minipages" - -\end_inset - -. - Tous le types de boîtes acceptés par LyX sont décrits en détails dans le - chapitre -\emph on -Boîtes -\emph default -du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Citation -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une citation, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliographie" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Référence croisée -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une référence croisée, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Références-croisées" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Étiquette -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une étiquette, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Références-croisées" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Légende -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Legendes@Légendes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Tableaux longs ! Légende -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une légende dans un flottant ou un tableau long. - Les flottants sont décrits section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Flottants" - -\end_inset - -, les légendes pour le tableaux longs sont décrites dans la section -\emph on -Légendes pour tableaux longs -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Entrée d'index -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une entrée d'index, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Index" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Entrée de glossaire -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une entrée de glossaire, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Glossaire" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Tableau -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère un tableau. - Les tableaux sont décrits section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Tableaux" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Graphique -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère un graphique. - Les graphiques sont décrits section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Graphiques" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URL -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère un URL, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:URLs" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Hyperlien -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère un hyperlien comme décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Hyperliens" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Note de bas de page -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une note de bas de page, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Notes-en-Bas" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Note en marge -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une note dans la marge, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Notes_en_Marge" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Titre court -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère un titre court, décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Titres-courts" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Code TeX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une boîte de code TeX, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Boites-code-TeX" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Listing de code source -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Listing de Programme -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère une boîte de listing de programme. - Les listings de programmes sont décrits dans le chapitre -\emph on -Listings de codes sources -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Date -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Insère la date courante. - Le format dépend du format de date de la langue qui est utilisée pour les - menus de LyX. - LyX offre d'autres manières d'insérer une date qui sont expliquées dans - la section -\emph on -Objets externes -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. - Vous y trouverez une comparaison des différentes méthodes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Aperçu -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Crée un insert d'aperçu, décrit dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Aperçu-de-morceaux" - -\end_inset - - for a description. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Le menu Navigation -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Navigation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce menu liste tous les chapitres, sections, figures et tableaux présents - dans le document courant. - Il vous permet de naviguer au sein de votre document de façon simple et - rapide. - Il vous permet aussi de gérer des signets et de rechercher les notes, les - marques de modification et les références croisées. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les signets -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec ce menu, vous pouvez définir vos propres signets. - C'est utile quand vous travaillez sur un document long et que vous avez - souvent besoin de sauter par exemple entre les sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -6.3. - Pour créer un signet adapté à cet exemple, allez dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2.5 et utilisez le menu -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Signets\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Enregistrer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Signet -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -1. - Allez ensuite dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -6.3 et utilisez -\family sans -Enregistrer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Signet -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -2. - Maintenant vous pouvez facilement sauter entre ces deux sections en utilisant - le menu (tous les signets sont listés en bas du menu -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Signets -\family default -) ou les raccourcis claviers -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "bookmark-goto 1" -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "bookmark-goto 2" -\end_inset - -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez aussi sauter d'un document ouvert à un autre. - Les signets restent utilisables tant que le document reste ouvert. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Note suivante, Modification suivante, Référence croisée suivante -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Saute à la note suivante, à la marque de modification suivante ou à la référence - croisée suivante, en fonction de la position du curseur. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Aller à l'étiquette -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Actif seulement si les curseur est devant une référence croisée. - Ce menu vous place devant l'étiquette à laquelle on fait référence. - (ce qui est la même chose que si on avait cliqué avec le bouton droit sur - la boîte de référence croisée et activé -\family sans -Aller -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'étiquette) -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Recherche directe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette fonctionnalité vous permet d'aller directement au même endroit du - texte dans la sortie, voir la section -\emph on -Recherche directe -\emph default - du manuel des -\emph on -Options avancées -\emph default - pour une description détaillée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Le menu Document -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Suivi des modifications -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le suivi des modifications est décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Suivi-de-modifications" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Fichier journal LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Après avoir utilisé LaTeX en visionnant ou en exportant un document, ce - menu sera rendu actif. - Il montre le fichier de journalisation de la dernière exécution du programme - LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez y voir les détails du fonctionnement de LaTeX. - Les -\emph on -experts -\emph default -pourront y trouver la raison de certaines erreurs LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Plan -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ouvre la fenêtre plan/table des matières, décrite section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Naviguer" - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Table-des-Matières" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Début appendice ici -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce menu va commencer l'appendice du document à la position du curseur, comme - décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Appendices" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Comprimé -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Compresse ou décompresse le document courant. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Paramètres -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Paramètres" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les paramètres du document sont décrits dans l'appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:paramètres-du-document" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Le menu Outils -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Outils -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Correcteur orthographique -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le correcteur orthographique est décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Correcteur-Orthographique" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Dictionnaire de synonymes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le dictionnaire de synonymes est décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Dictionnaire-de-synonymes" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Statistiques -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Compteur de mots -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Compteur de caractères -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Statistiques -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Compte le nombre de mots et de caractères dans le document courant ou dans - la portion de document sélectionnée. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Informations TeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Informations TeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Montre une liste des classes et des styles qui sont installés dans votre - système LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Reconfigurer -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Reconfiguration de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyX ! Reconfigurer|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Reconfiguration de LyX -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce menu lance la reconfiguration de LyX, cela signifie que LyX vas rechercher - sur votre ordinateur les paquetages LaTeX et les programmes dont il peut - avoir besoin. - Voir pour plus d'information la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Config-LyX-de-base" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Préférences\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La fenêtre de dialogue préférence est décrite en détails dans le chapitre -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Fenêtre-Préférences" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Le menu Aide -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Menu ! Aide -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce menu permet d'ouvrir les fichiers qui constituent la documentation de - LyX, dans la langue de l'interface LyX. - Si un manuel n'est pas disponible dans cette langue, la version anglaise - reste accessible. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le menu -\family sans -Configuration -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTeX -\family default - affiche un document LyX avec des informations sur les paquetages et les - classes LaTeX que LyX a trouvées sur votre système. - (voir aussi la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Configuration-LaTeX" - -\end_inset - -). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Les Barres d'outils -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Barres-d'Outils" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Barres-d'outils" - -\end_inset - - montre comment activer ou désactiver les barres d'outils. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il est aussi possible de définir des barres d'outils personnalisées, ce - qui est décrit dans le manuel -\emph on -Options avancées. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -La barre d'outils Standard -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barre d'outils ! Standard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La barre d'outils standard illustrée ci-dessus contient les boutons suivants, - de gauche à droite : -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -LTleft}{0pt} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ceci est indispensable pour aligner les tableaux longs qui suivent. - Voyez le manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -pour plus d'informations. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png - clip - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -menu déroulant pour les environnements de paragraphes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace -10mm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align left -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/buffer-new.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nouveau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/file-open.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ouvrir -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/buffer-write.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Enregistrer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show_print.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Imprimer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show_spellchecker.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Correcteur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -orthographique -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/undo.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Annuler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/redo.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Refaire -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/cut.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Couper -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/copy.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Copier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/paste.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Coller -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show_findreplace.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rechercher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -remplacer -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -( -\lang english -Quick -\lang french -) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Rechercher -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -et -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -remplacer -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -( -\lang english -Advanced -\lang french -) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/bookmark-goto_0.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Signets\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Naviguer en arrière -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/font-emph.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mise en évidence, fonction du dialogue -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/font-noun.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Donner le style nom propre au texte, fonction du dialogue -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/textstyle-apply.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Donner au texte le dernier style sélectionné dans le dialogue -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/math-mode.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formule -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_graphics.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Graphique -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/tabular-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tableau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-toggle_toc.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Active ou désactive la fenêtre Plan, -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Plan -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/toolbar-toggle_math.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Active ou désactive la barre d'outils Maths -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/toolbar-toggle_table.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Active ou désactive le barre d'outils Tableau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -La barre d'outils Autres -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barre d'outils ! Autres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La barre d'outils supplémentaire illustrée ci-dessus contient les boutons - suivantes de gauche à droite: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Implicite -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout_Enumerate.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste numérotée -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout_Itemize.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste à puces -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout_List.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Liste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout_Description.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Description -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-increment.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Augmenter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -profondeur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Réduire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -profondeur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/float-insert_figure.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flottant\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Figure -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/float-insert_table.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Flottant\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Tableau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/label-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Étiquette -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_ref.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Référence croisée -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_citation.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Citation -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/index-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Entrée -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'index -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/nomencl-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Entrée -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -glossaire -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/footnote-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/marginalnote-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -en -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -marge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/note-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Note -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/box-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Boîte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/url-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Hyperlink -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/ert-insert.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Code T -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_include.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Sous-document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/dialog-show_character.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Style -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paragraphe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/thesaurus-entry.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbouton - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Dictionnaire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -synonymes -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -La barre d'outils Visionner/Mettre à jour -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barre d'outils ! Visionner/Mettre à jour -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La barre d'outils Visionner/Mettre à jour contient de gauche à droite les - boutons suivants: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Visionner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mettre à jour -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Visionner le document maître -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mettre à jour le document maître -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Sortie\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Synchroniser avec le résultat imprimable -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Visionner (autres formats) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/update-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Mettre à jour (autres formats) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -* Ces icônes peuvent être apparaître autrement si vous n'utilisez pas la - version implicite des icônes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Les autre barres d'outils -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La barre d'outils de suivi des modifications est détaillée dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Suivi-de-modifications" - -\end_inset - -, la barre d'outils tableau -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barre d'outils ! Tableau -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - est expliquée dans le manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. - et la barre d'outils macro mathématiques -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Barre d'outils ! Macros mathématiques -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - dans le manuel -\emph on -Math -\emph default -s. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Les paramètres du document -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:paramètres-du-document" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Document ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La fenêtre de dialogue des paramètres du document contient des sous-menus - pour définir des propriétés qui s'appliquent à tout le document. - On l'ouvre avec le menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres -\family default -. - Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres de votre document comme valeurs - implicites avec le bouton -\family sans -Enregistrer comme valeurs implicites -\family default - de la fenêtre de dialogue. - Cela va créer un fichier -\family typewriter -defaults.lyx -\family default - que LyX chargera automatiquement à chaque fois que vous créerez un nouveau - document sans utiliser de modèle. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le bouton -\family sans -Valeurs implicites de la classe -\family default - repositionne les réglages aux valeurs implicites de la classe du document. - Ceci affecte essentiellement les options de classe et les rubriques Format - de la page et Numérotation et TdM. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les différents sous-menus de cette fenêtre de dialogue sont décrits dans - ce qui suit. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Classe de document -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici, vous pouvez choisir la classe de votre document, les options de classe, - un pilote graphique et un document maître. - Les classes de documents sont décrites dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Classes-de-doc" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -À l'aide du bouton -\family sans -Format local -\family default -, vous pouvez charger votre propre fichier de format qui n'est pas dans - les répertoire des -\emph on -layouts -\emph default - de LyX, et n'est donc pas reconnu en tant que format pour une classe de - documents. - Pour en savoir plus sur les fichiers de format, voyez le chapitre -\emph on -Installer de nouvelles classes -\emph default - dans le manuel -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certaines classes utilisent des options de classe implicites. - Si c'est le cas, elles sont listées dans le champ -\family sans -Réglable -\family default - et vous pouvez décider de les utiliser ou non. - Si vous ne savez pas exactement à quoi servent les options de classe par - défaut, il est recommandé de ne pas y toucher. - Le pilote graphique est utilisé avec les paquetages LaTeX pour la couleur - et les graphiques. - En utilisant -\family sans -Implicite, -\family default - on utilise le pilote implicite des paquetages LaTeX. - Il est recommandé d'utiliser le pilote implicite, à moins de savoir ce - que l'on fait. -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Si vous voulez un des pilotes suivants -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -vous devez d'abord les activer au niveau de votre distribution LaTeX, voir - la section -\emph on -Driver support -\emph default - dans -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On doit préciser un document maître quand le document courant est un sous-docume -nt. - LyX va utiliser ce document maître quand le sous-document sera ouvert sans - son maître. - De cette façon, les sous-documents sont toujours compilables. - Plus d'explication sur les sous-documents et les documents maîtres se trouvent - dans la section -\emph on -sous-documents -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a également une option pour supprimer le date et une autre pour utiliser - le paquetage -\series bold -refstyle -\series default -à la place du paquetage -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - pour la gestion des références croisées, voir la section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Références-croisées" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Sous-documents -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ce sous-menu n'est visible que si votre document contient des sous-documents. - Voyez la section -\emph on -sous-documents -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -pour plus de détails. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Modules -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les modules sont expliqués dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Modules" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Format local -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Format-local" - -\end_inset - - pour une description de cette rubrique. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Polices -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les paramètres des polices de caractères du document sont décrits dans la - section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Polices-et-Styles" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Format du texte -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez préciser si les paragraphes doivent être séparés par des indentation -s ou en ajoutant un espacement vertical. - L'interligne et le nombre de colonnes peut aussi être modifié. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez que LyX n'affichera pas deux colonnes ou plus, ni ne modifiera l'interlign -e à l'écran. - Ces modifications d'affichages ne sont pas pratiques, sont souvent illisibles - et sont en contradiction avec le concept WYSIWYM. - Par contre tout sera comme vous l'avez voulu à l'impression. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Format de la page -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une description de ce menu est faite dans les sections -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Taille-du-papier" - -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Apparence-du-document" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Marges -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici vous pouvez modifier les marges de votre document, voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Marges" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Langue -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Langue" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Langue ! Encodage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La langue du document et le style des guillemet peuvent être définis ici. - L'encodage du document précise comment le contenu du document est exporté - vers LaTeX (le fichier de LyX est toujours codé en utf8). - Tous les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être encodés avec l'encodage spécifié - seront exportés comme des commandes LaTeX (ce qui échoue si on ne connaît - pas de commande LaTeX pour un caractère particulier). -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Les commandes connues sont définies dans un fichier texte ( -\emph on -unicodesymbols -\emph default -). - Vous pouvez donc ajouter vous-même à ce fichier des commandes pour un caractère - inconnu, voyez le manuel -\size normal -\emph on -\color none -Personnalisation -\emph default - pour plus de détails. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si vous utilisez l'option -\family sans -Langue implicite -\family default -, LyX détermine l'encodage d'une portion de texte à partir de la langue - utilisée. - Si le document contient du texte dans plus d'une langue, vous aurez plus - d'un encodage dans le fichier LaTeX. - Si vous n'utilisez pas cette option, alors tout le document utilisera toujours - un seul encodage. - Activer cette option est le meilleur choix. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX accepte aussi les sorties Unicode, ce qui est particulièrement utile - si vous avez besoin de beaucoup de symboles spéciaux ou d'une écriture - non alphabétique. - Si vous voulez l'utiliser (et que bien sûr, votre installation LaTeX accepte - Unicode), choisissez une des quatre variantes de l'utf8 de la liste ci-dessous. - Malheureusement le support Unicode du LaTeX standard est incomplet, ce - qui fait qu'il n'est pas rare qu'un fichier avec beaucoup de symboles Unicode - fonctionne bien avec -\family sans -Langue implicite -\family default - (quand LyX utilise sa propre liste de commandes LaTeX connues), mais ne - fonctionne pas avec un encodage utf8 fixé (quand la liste de commandes - LaTeX connues n'est pas utilisée, puisque tous les symboles Unicode peuvent - être encodés en utf8). - La situation est nettement améliorée avec XeTeX et LuaTeX, les deux nouvelles - possibilités de moteurs de rendu pour remplacer le LaTeX standard. - Ces deux moteurs acceptent Unicode de façon native. - LyX gère maintenant aussi ces deux moteurs (via les formats de sortie -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default -, -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - et -\family sans -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTeX) -\family default -; voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" - -\end_inset - -), donc si les options décrites plus haut échouent, vous pouvez toujours - essayer l'un de ces deux moteurs de rendu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La rubrique -\family sans -Paquetage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -linguistique -\family default - fixe le paquetage LaTeX utilisé pour les césures et la traduction des chaînes - de caractères comme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Partie -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Les réglages possibles sont: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Implicite utilise le paquetage sélectionné dans -\family sans - Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Préférences\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres de langue -\family default - (voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Langue" - -\end_inset - -); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Automatique sélectionne le paquetage linguistique le plus approprié pour - le format de visionnement/exportation que vous allez utiliser. - dans de nombreux cas ce sera -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Si le paquetage plus récent -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et plus approprié (comme dans avec XeTeX ou des polices non-TeX), ce dernier - sera utilisé à la place de -\series bold -babel -\series default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Toujours -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -utiliser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -babel appelle -\series bold -babel -\series default - même si -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - aurait été plus approprié; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Réglable permet de spécifier une commande d'appel de paquetage linguistique - de votre choix. - Par exemple, si vous voulez utiliser une paquetage linguistique spécifique - comme -\series bold -ngerman -\series default - (pour les texte en allemand), saisissez -\series bold - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\backslash -usepackage{ngerman} -\series default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Aucun n'utilisera aucun paquetage linguistique. - Ceci est nécessaire pour certaines classes de document pour articles scientifiq -ues. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Voici la liste avec les encodages les plus importants -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Langue -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -implicite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pas -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -recours -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -inputenc) identique à l'option -\family sans -Langue implicite -\family default -, mais le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - n'est pas utilisé. - Si vous utilisez cet encodage, vous aurez probablement à charger manuellement - quelques paquetages supplémentaires dans le préambule et à préciser l'encodage - utilisé pour les portions de texte en langue étrangère avec du code TeX; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ASCII l'encodage ASCII, qui ne couvre que l'anglais standard (ASCII 7 bits). - LyX convertit tous les autres caractères en commandes LaTeX, ce qui peut - produire un gros fichier si beaucoup de commandes LaTeX sont nécessaires; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Arabe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1255) page de code de MS Windows pour l'arabe et le farsi; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Arabe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-6) pour l'arabe et le farsi; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Arménien -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(AmSCII8) pour l'arménien; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Baltique -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-13) pour l'estonien, le letton, et le lithuanien, c'est un sur-ensemble - de l'encodage ISO-8859-4; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Baltique -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-4) (latin 4) pour l'estonien, le letton, et le lithuanien, c'est un - sous-ensemble de l'encodage ISO-8859-13; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chinois -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(simplifié) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-CN) pour le chinois simplifié, utilisé spécialement sur les systèmes - UNIX, depuis 2001 cet encodage est officiellement remplacé par l'encodage - GB18030, et comme le GB18030 n'est pas disponible pour LaTeX, vous devriez - essayer l'encodage Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chinois -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(simplifié) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(GBK) pour le chinois simplifié, est identique à la page de code Windows - CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -936 à part le symbole pour la monnaie Euro, depuis 2001 cet encodage est - officiellement remplacé par l'encodage GB18030, et comme le GB18030 n'est - pas disponible pour LaTeX, vous devriez essayer l'encodage Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Chinois -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(traditionnel) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-TW) pour le chinois traditionnel; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Coréen -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-KR) pour le coréen; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillique -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1251) page de code MS Windows pour le cyrillique; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillique -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-5) couvre le biélorusse, le bulgare, le macédonien, le serbe et l'ukrainien -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillique -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(KOI8-R) cyrillique standard spécialement pour le russe; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillique -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(KOI8-U) cyrillique pour l'ukrainien; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Cyrillique -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -154) cyrillique pour le kazakh; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DOS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -437) page de code MS DOS; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -centrale -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1250) page de code MS Windows pour l'ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2 (latin2); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -centrale -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2) (latin2) couvre l’albanais, le croate, le tchèque, l'allemand, le - hongrois, le polonais, le roumain, le slovaque et le slovène; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sud -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-3) (latin3) couvre l'espéranto, le galicien, le maltais et le turc; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sud-est -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-16) (latin10) couvre l'albanais, le croate, le finnois, le français, - l'allemand, le hongrois, le gaélique irlandais, l'italien, le polonais, - le roumain et le slovène. - Il est conçu pour couvrir de nombreuses langues et de nombreux caractères - avec des accents diacritiques; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -occidentale -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1252) page de code MS Windows pour l'ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1 (latin1); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -occidentale -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1) (latin1) couvre l'albanais, le catalan, le danois, le néerlandais, - l'anglais, le féroïen, le finnois, le français, le galicien, l'allemand, - l'islandais, l'irlandais, le norvégien, le portugais, l'espagnol et le - suédois. - Il vaut mieux utiliser à la place l'ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-15; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Europe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -occidentale -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-15) (latin9) comme l'encodage ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1, mais avec en plus le symbole de l'euro, la ligature œ et quelques - caractères utilisés en français et en finnois; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Grec -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-7) pour le grec; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hébreu -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1255) page de code MS Windows pour l'hébreu, un sur-ensemble de l'encodage - ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-8; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hébreu -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-8) pour l'hébreu; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japonais -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-JP) encodage EUC-JP pour le japonais, utilise le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, quand vous utilisez cet encodage, mettez la langue du document à -\family sans -Japonais -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japonais -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(JIS) encodage JIS pour le japonais, utilise le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -CJK, -\series default -quand vous utilisez cet encodage, mettez la langue du document à -\family sans -Japonais -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japonais -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(non -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(EUC-JP) encodage EUC-JP pour le japonais, utilise le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -japanese -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, quand vous utilisez cet encodage, mettez la langue du document à -\family sans -Japonais; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Japonais -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(non -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(JIS) encodage JIS pour le japonais, utilise le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -japanese, -\series default -quand vous utilisez cet encodage, mettez la langue du document à -\family sans -Japonais; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Thai -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(TIS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -620-0) pour le thaï; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Turc(ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-9) (latin5) pour le turc, identique à l'encodage ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1 avec les caractères islandais remplacés par les caractères turcs; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(CJK) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) encodage Unicode utf8 utilisant le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - pour le chinois, le japonais et le coréen; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTeX) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) encodage Unicode utf8 à utiliser avec -\family sans -XeTeX -\family default -et -\family sans -LuaTeX -\family default - qui utilisent Unicode directement, sans l'aide du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -inputenc -\series default -. - Lyx va choisir automatiquement cet encodage si vous exportez ou prévisualisez - en utilisant XeTeX ou LuaTeX. - En principe, vous n'avez pas à sélectionner cet encodage vous-même manuellement -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode(extension -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ucs) -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) encodage Unicode utf8 basé sur la paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -ucs -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! ucs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - (complet, incluant les écritures latines, grecque, cyrillique et CJK); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Unicode -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(utf8) encodage Unicode utf8 basé sur le paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Actuellement il ne supporte qu'un nombre limité de caractères (principalement - les écritures latines). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Couleurs -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Couleurs ! texte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Couleurs ! fond -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez via cette rubrique modifier la couleur de la police du texte - principal (implicitement noire) et du texte des notes grisées (implicitement - gris léger). - Le bouton -\family sans -RàZ -\family default -repositionne les couleurs sur les valeurs implicites. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez également modifier les couleur du fond pour les pages (implicitement - blanche) et pour le boîtes ombrées (implicitement rouge). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Les couleurs n'apparaissent pas dans la fenêtre LyX, seulement dans la sortie - imprimable (cette boîte grisée est rendue en bleu dans la sortie). -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Notez bien que si vous modifiez la couleur du texte principal en utilisant - l'option -\family sans -Couleur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -liens -\family default - dans les paramètres du document, rubrique -\family sans -Propriétés -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -PDF -\family default -, onglet -\family sans -Hyperlien -\family default -, vous devez probablement modifier la couleur des liens symboliques en utilisant - -\family sans -Autres -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -options -\family default -dans ces -\family sans -Propriétés -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -PDF -\family default -. - Par exemple l'option -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -linkcolor=black -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -met les liens en noir. - Pour plus d'informations, voyez le manuel du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pous pouvez modifier page par page la couleur du texte principal et la couleur - du fond dans votre document en mettant ces commandes en code TeX juste - après un saut de page forcé: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -pour la couleur de la page: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -pagecolor{color name} -\series default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -pour la couleur du texte: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -color{color name} -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les noms de couleur doivent être choisis parmi: -\series bold -black -\series default -, -\series bold -blue -\series default -, -\series bold -cyan -\series default -, -\series bold -green -\series default -, -\series bold -magenta -\series default -, -\series bold -red -\series default -, -\series bold -white -\series default -, -\series bold -yellow -\series default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Si vous avez modifié une couleur de texte ou de fond, vous pouvez les réutiliser - sous les noms suivants: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -pour la couleur du fond de la page: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -page_backgroundcolor -\series default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -pour la couleur du texte principal -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -document_fontcolor -\series default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -pour la couleur du fond des boîtes ombrées: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -shadecolor -\series default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -pour le texte des notes grisées: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -note_fontcolor -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour les détails sur la définition et l'utilisation des couleurs personnalisées, - voyez la section -\emph on -Tableaux colorés -\emph default - du manuel des -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Numérotation & TdM -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici vous pouvez ajuster la profondeur de numérotation des en-têtes de section, - comme c'est décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Profondeur-section" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Bibliographie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez choisir un style de citation utilisant les paquetages LaTeX - -\series bold -natbib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! natbib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - ou -\series bold -jurabib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! jurabib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Vous pouvez autoriser la création de bibliographies thématiques à l'aide - du paquetage -\series bold -bibtopic -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! bibtopic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et vous pouvez personnaliser la créatioçn de la bibliographie d'un document - particulier. - Pour plus d'information voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Bibliographie" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Index -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez régler ici comment doit être créé l'index de votre document, - et vous pouvez définir d'autres index. - Voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Index" - -\end_inset - - pour les détails. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Propriétés du PDF -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les propriétés du PDF sont expliquées section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:propriétés-du-PDF" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Options mode math -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces options vont forcer LyX à utiliser les paquetages LaTeX -\series bold -amsmath -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! amsmath -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\series bold -esint -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! esint -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, -\series bold -mathdots -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! mathdots -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - et -\series bold -mhchem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! mhchem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - ou alors à ne les utiliser que si nécessaire: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -amsmath est nécessaire pour plusieurs constructions mathématiques, donc, - si vous avez des erreurs LaTeX dans des formules, vérifiez que vous avez - autorisé les paquetages AMS; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -esint est utilisé pour des signes d'intégration spéciaux, voir la section - see section -\emph on -Grands opérateurs -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Maths -\emph default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mathdots est utilisé pour pour les ellipses particulières, voir la section - -\emph on -Ellipses -\lang english - -\emph default -\lang french -du manuel -\emph on -Maths -\emph default -; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mhchem est utili -\emph on -s -\emph default -é pour les équations en chimie, voir la section -\lang english - -\emph on -\lang french -Symboles et équations chimiques -\emph default -du manuel -\emph on -Maths. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Placement des flottants -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les options de placement des flottants sont décrites dans la section -\emph on -Placement des flottants -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Listings -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les réglages de l'environnement Listing sont décrits dans le chapitre -\emph on -Listings de code source -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Objets insérés -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Puces -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici, vous pouvez changer les caractères utilisés pour les listes à puces. - L'environnement liste à puces est décrit section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:ListePuces" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Branches -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les branches sont décrites section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Branches" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Sortie -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Doc-Output" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez définir ici quelques spécificités des sorties compilées à partir - du document courant: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Format -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -implicite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -résultat est le format utilisé quand vous sélectionnez -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Visonner -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Mettre à jour -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Visionner le document maître -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -mettre à jour le document maître -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans le menu -\family sans -Visionner -\family default - ou dans la barre d'outils. - La velur implicite est fixée dans -\family sans -Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Préférences\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Formats -\family default - de fichier, voir sec. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Synchroniser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -avec -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -le -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -résultat -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -imprimable positionne les réglages pour le menu -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Recherche -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directe -\family default -. - Pour les détails, voir la section -\emph on -Recherche inversée DVI/PDF -\emph default - dans le manuel des -\emph on -Options avancées -\emph default -. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Options -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -export -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -XHTML positionne les réglages pour le format d'exportation -\family sans -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -XHTML -\family default -. - -\family sans -XHTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.1 strict -\family default - garantira que l'exportation suivra exactement les spécifications de la - version 1.1 du standard XHTML. - Les différents réglages de l'entrée -\family sans -Traduction des maths -\family default - sont décrits en détail dans la section -\emph on -Formules mathématiques en XHTML -\emph default - du manuel des -\emph on -Options avancées -\emph default -. - La mise à l'échelle est utilisée pour fixer la taille des équations dans - le résultat. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Préambule LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans cette fenêtre de texte on peut entrer les commandes pour charger des - paquetages LaTeX spéciales ou pour définir des commandes LaTeX personnalisées. - La modification du préambule doit être réservée aux experts du LaTeX. - Vous ne devez pas y entrer des commandes, à moins de savoir exactement - ce que vous faites. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Une introduction à la syntaxe du LaTeX est donnée section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -La fenêtre Préférences -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:Fenêtre-Préférences" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Dialogues ! Préférences -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La fenêtre de dialogue préférence est appelée grâce au menu -\family sans -Outils -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Préférences -\family default -. - Elle contient plusieurs sous-menus qui sont détaillés dans ce qui suit. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Apparence -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Interface utilisateur -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Le fichier de description de l'interface utilisateur -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Personnalisation ! des barres d'outils -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Personnalisation ! des menus -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -On peut changer l'apparence des menus et des barres d'outils en choisissant - un fichier de description de l'interface utilisateur -\family typewriter - -\family default -(ui). - Un fichier ui est un fichier texte dans lequel les éléments des menus et - des barres d'outils sont listés. - -\lang english -The file -\emph on -default.ui -\emph default - loads three files -\lang french -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdmenus.inc -\shape italic - -\emph on -\lang english -specifies the menu entries for the standard menus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdcontext.inc -\shape italic -\emph on -\lang english -specifies -\shape default -\emph default - the menu entries in popup context menus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdtoolbars.inc -\shape italic - -\emph on -\lang english -specifies the toolbar buttons -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour créer une nouvelle disposition de menu ou de barre d'outils, partez - d'une copie de ces fichiers et éditez les éléments que vous voulez modifier. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La syntaxe des fichiers -\family sans - -\family default -.inc est simple. - Les éléments -\family sans -The Menubar -\family default -, -\family sans -Menu -\family default - et -\family sans -Toolbar -\family default - doivent se terminer par un -\family sans -End -\family default - explicite. - Ils peuvent contenir des éléments de type -\family sans -Submenu -\family default -, -\family sans -Item -\family default -, -\family sans -OptItem -\family default -, -\family sans -Separator -\family default -, -\family sans -Icon -\family default - et dans le cas particulier du menu -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -file_lastfiles -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -, un élément -\family sans -Lastfiles -\family default - . - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La syntaxe des éléments est la suivante: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Item -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -nom de menu ou de bouton -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -fonction LyX -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - -Toutes les fonctions de LyX sont listées dans le menu -\family sans -Aide\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Fonctions -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -Maintenant voyons un exemple: supposons que nous utilisions souvent le menu - -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Signets -\family default -et que de ce fait nous voulions un signet supplémentaire, vous pouvez ajouter - simplement la ligne -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Item "Enregistrer Signet 6" "bookmark-save 6" -\series default - -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - -à la section du menu -\emph on -navigate_bookmarks -\emph default - dans le fichier -\emph on -stdmenus.inc -\emph default -, pour disposer d'un sixième signet. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec -\family sans - -\lang english -Icon -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Set -\family default -\lang french - vous pouvez modifier l'apparence des boutons des barres d'outils. - Les ensembles d'icônes actuellement disponibles sont comparés ici: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "this image" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Aide automatique -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Autoriser l'affichage des bulles d'aide dans la zone de travail principale - -\family default -permet l'affichage de bulles d'aide ( -\emph on -tooltips -\emph default -) poour les insert fermés comme les entrées d'index et les notes de bas - de page. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Session -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec l'option -\family sans -Restaurer l'apparence et de la géométrie des fenêtres -\family default -, LyX sera ouvert avec sa fenêtre principale à la position et avec l'arrangement - qu'elle avait lors de la dernière utilisation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Restaurer la position du curseur -\family default - met le curseur à la position qu'il avait dans le fichier la dernière fois. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Charger les fichiers ouverts lors de la dernière session -\family default - ouvre tous les fichiers qui étaient ouverts lors de la dernière session - LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Le bouton -\family sans -Effacer toutes les informations sur la session -\family default - supprime toutes les informations des sessions LyX précédentes (position - du curseur, nom des fichiers récents, etc.). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Documents -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Documents de sauvegarde" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sauvegarde ! Documents -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Faire une sauvegarde des documents originaux lors de l'enregistrement -\family default -crée une copie de sauvegarde du fichier dans l'état où il était lorsqu'il - a été ouvert ou enregistré la dernière fois. - Cette copie est conservée dans le -\family sans -Répertoire de sauvegarde -\family default - voir la section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Répertoires" - -\end_inset - - ou dans le répertoire de votre document -\lang english -if no -\lang french - -\family sans -Répertoire de sauvegarde -\family default - -\lang english -is specified -\lang french -. - La copie de sauvegarde possède le suffixe -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -.lyx~ -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand l'option -\family sans -Sauvegarde automatique, toutes les x minutes -\family default - est activée, vous pouvez préciser le temps entre deux sauvegardes. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Enregistrer les documents sous forme compressée -\family default - enregistre toujours dans un format compressé. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Nombre maximum de fichiers récents -\family default - est le nombre de fichiers récents que LyX doit afficher dans le menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Documents -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -récents -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si l'option -\family sans -Ouvrir les documents en onglet -\family default - n'est pas cochée, chaque fichier sera ouvert dans sa propre instance de - LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Une seule instance -\family default - n'est active que si un tube de service pour LyX est spécifié -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Voir section. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Répertoires" - -\end_inset - - pour les détails sur les tubes du serveur LyX. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -. - Si la case est cochée, les documents seront ouverts dans la même instance - active de LyX. - Sinon, une nouvelle instance de LyX est activée pour chaque document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Si l'option -\family sans -Bouton unique pour fermer les onglets -\family default - est cochée, il n'y aura qu'un bouton ( -\family sans - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/closetab.png - scale 75 - -\end_inset - - -\family default -) à la droite de la barre des onglets pour fermer ceux-ci. - Sinon, chaque document a son propre bouton de fermeture. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default -pour la dernière option, il vous faut redémarrer LyX pour que la modification - soit prise en compte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Polices d'écran -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Polices ! d'écran -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Polices-d'Écran" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ces polices sont utilisées pour afficher votre document à l'écran. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Notez que cette section ne traite que des polices qui sont utilisées à -\emph on -l'intérieur -\emph default -de la fenêtre de LyX. - Les polices qui apparaissent sur la -\emph on -sortie papier -\emph default -sont indépendantes des polices de LyX et sont sélectionnées à l'aide du - menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Polices -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Implicitement LyX utilise -\emph on -times -\emph default -comme police -\family sans -romaine -\family default -, -\emph on -arial -\emph default -ou -\emph on -helvetica -\emph default -(cela dépend du système) comme police -\family sans -sans empattement -\family default - et -\emph on -courier -\emph default -comme police à -\family typewriter -chasse fixe -\family default - ou -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -machine à écrire -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez changer la taille des polices avec le réglage du -\family sans -Zoom -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les -\family sans -Tailles de police -\family default - sont données comme des hauteurs de lettre en points. - Une lettre de 72.27 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -points ayant une taille de 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pouce, voyez l'appendice -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:Unités-de-longueur" - -\end_inset - - pour les unités de longueur utilisées dans LyX. - Les tailles de polices implicites sont les mêmes que celles utilisées pour - une police de document de 10 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt. - Pour plus de détails voyez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Document-Polices" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec l'option -\family sans -Utiliser le cache pixmap pour accélérer le rendu des polices -\family default -, LyX a besoin de re-dessiner l'écran moins souvent. - Cela donne de meilleures performances, surtout sur des systèmes lents. - D'un autre côté, les caractères peuvent paraître un peu flous à l'écran. - Vous allez donc activer ou non cette option selon que vous préférez la - vitesse ou l'esthétique. - Notez que le cache pixmap n'est disponible et utile que sous Mac -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -OS et Windows. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Couleurs -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Couleurs ! Écran de LyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Préférences ! Couleurs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici, vous pouvez changer toutes les couleurs utilisées dans LyX. - Choisissez juste un élément dans la liste et appuyez sur le bouton -\family sans -Modifier -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En cochant l'option -\family sans -Utiliser les couleurs du système -\family default - la palette de couleurs de vote système d'exploitation ou de votre gestionnaire - de fenêtre est utilisée. - Les couleurs -\family sans -curseur, sélection, ligne de tableau, texte, étiquette d'URL -\family default - and -\family sans -texte d'URL -\family default - ne sont alors plus personnalisables et disparaissent de la liste. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Affichage écran -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Préférences ! Affichage écran -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici, vous pouvez préciser si LyX doit afficher les graphiques. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Aperçu sur le vif -\family default - permet le pré-visionnement de petits morceaux de votre document. - Voyez la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Aperçu-de-morceaux" - -\end_inset - - pour plus de détails. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Marquer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -paragraphes -\family default -affiche un pied-de-mouche (¶, -\emph on -pilcrow -\emph default - en anglais) à la fin de chaque paragraphe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Saisie -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Préférences ! Saisie -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Contrôle -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Saisie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Le curseur suit la barre de défilement -\family default - fait que le curseur se place en haut de la partie de document qui est actuellem -ent visible quand on fait défiler le texte. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez régler la largeur du curseur. - Si vous choisissez une valeur nulle, l'épaisseur du curseur s'adaptera - à la valeur de zoom de la police d'écran. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Défiler au-delà du bas du document -\family default - est explicite. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Avec LyX, on peut sauter d'un mot à l'autre en appuyant sur -\family sans -Ctrl+flèche -\family default -. - En cochant l'option -\family sans -Déplacements du curseur entre mots à la Mac -\family default - le curseur saute de la fin d'un mot au début du suivant, normalement il - saute du début au début. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Trier les environnements par ordre alphabétique -\family default - trie les entrées dans la liste déroulante des environnements de paragraphe. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option -\family sans -Regrouper les environnements par catégorie -\family default - regroupe les entrées dans la liste déroulante des environnements de paragraphe - (le menu des styles). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -L'option d'édition des macro mathématiques détermine le style d'édition, - voir la section -\emph on -Macros en mode mathématique -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Math -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Plein écran -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici vous pouvez préciser ce qui doit être caché en mode plein écran. - L'option -\family sans -Limitation de la largeur du texte -\family default - précise la largeur du texte en mode plein écran. - De cette façon, vous pouvez afficher un texte moins large que l'écran, - il apparaît alors centré. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Raccourcis -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Préférences ! Raccourcis -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Le fichier Bind -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -\lang english -Bind File -\family default -\lang french - -\lang english -specifies the file that is -\lang french - utilisé pour effectuer la liaison entre une fonction de LyX et une combinaison - de touches. - Plusieurs fichiers de liaisons sont disponibles, tout prêts: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -cua.bind ensemble de liaisons (avec les raccourcis claviers typiques sur - PC) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -(x)emacs.bind ensemble de liaisons comme celles utilisées par l'éditeur de - texte -\family sans -Emacs -\family default - ( -\family sans -XEmacs -\family default -) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mac.bind ensemble de liaisons pour les systèmes utilisant Mac -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -OS. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a aussi des fichier .bind qui ont été créés pour des classes de documents - particulières comme par exemple -\shape italic -broadway.bind -\shape default - et aussi pour des langues particulières. - Le nom des fichiers -\family typewriter -.bind -\family default - attachés à une langue commencent par le code de la langue, par exemple - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -pt -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - pour le Portugais. - Quand vous utilisez LyX dans une langue donnée, il va essayer d'utiliser - les fichiers .bind appropriés. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Certains fichiers -\family typewriter -.bind -\family default - ont un champ relativement limité, comme -\shape italic -math.bind -\shape default -. - Quand on regarde à la fin du fichier -\shape italic -cua.bind -\shape default -, on peut voir que ces derniers sont inclus pour conserver le contrôle dans - le fichier -\family typewriter -.bind -\family default - principal. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -The field -\family sans -Show -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ke -\bar under -y -\bar default --bindings -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -containing -\family default - allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function - in the selected key binding file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -Ajouter/modifier les raccourcis -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Éditer-les-raccourcis" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Raccourcis ! Ajouter/modifier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour ajouter des nouveaux raccourcis clavier ou modifier des raccourcis - existants à votre propre goût, vous pouvez utiliser le tableau de la fenêtre - de dialogue qui liste toutes les fonctions de LyX avec les raccourcis associés. - Pour pouvoir parcourir facilement les fonctions, elles sont rassemblées - par catégories et la fenêtre propose un champ -\family sans -Afficher les raccourcis clavier contenant -\family default -. - Vous pouvez taper dans ce champ un mot clé pour une fonction que vous voulez - éditer. - Par exemple mettez-y le mot -\emph on -paste -\emph default - et vous aurez quatre raccourcis différents pour les trois fonctions qui - contiennent le mot -\emph on -paste -\emph default - dans leur nom. - Comme vous pouvez le voir, une fonction peut être associée a plusieurs - raccourcis. - Toutes les fonctions de LyX sont aussi listées dans le fichier -\emph on -Fonctions LyX -\emph default - que vous trouverez dans le menu -\family sans -Aide -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Par exemple, pour ajouter le raccourci -\family sans -Alt+Q -\family default - pour la fonction -\family sans -textstyle-apply -\family default -, sélectionnez la fonction dans la liste, et appuyez sur le bouton -\family sans -Modifier -\family default -. - Une fenêtre de dialogue apparaît où vous pouvez ajouter le raccourci en - l'utilisant. - Vous appuyez sur les touches -\family sans -Alt+Q -\family default - pour définir le raccourci. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Modifier un raccourci existant se fait de la même manière. - Vous pouvez aussi associer plusieurs fonctions au même raccourci en modifiant - un raccourci existant et en -\lang english -starting the LyX Function definition with “command alternatives” and following - it with the -\lang french - différents noms de fonctions séparés par des point-virgules. - LyX utilisera alors la première fonction de la liste qui est autorisée - dans la partie courant du document. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -If you don't like a a particular shortcut, you can remove it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Un autre possibilité consiste à modifier les fichiers -\family typewriter -.bind -\family default - avec un éditeur de texte. - La syntaxe des fichiers -\family typewriter -.bind -\family default - est assez simple: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -bind -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -combinaison de touches -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -fonction-lyx -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Clavier / Souris -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Clavier/Souris" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carte de clavier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Préférence ! Carte de clavier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Clavier |see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Carte de clavier -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Normalement les réglages de clavier doivent se faire au niveau de votre - système d'exploitation. - Dans le cas où cela ne serait pas possible, LyX fournit des carte de réaffectat -ion clavier ( -\emph on -keyboard map -\emph default -). - Si par exemple, vous avez un clavier tchèque et que vous voulez l'utiliser - comme un clavier roumain, vous pouvez -\lang english -enable -\family sans -Use -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -keyboard -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -map -\family default - and select -\lang french - le fichier de carte de clavier nommé -\family sans - -\family default -\shape italic -romanian.kmap -\shape default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -You can specify a -\family sans -First -\family default - and a -\family sans -Second -\family default - keyboard map and, if you use the -\emph on -cua -\emph default - bindings, you can select the first and second with -\lang french - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-primary" -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-secondary" -\end_inset - - -\lang english -respectively or toggle between them with -\lang french - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-toggle" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default - ces cartes de clavier sont fournies seulement comme solution provisoire - et elles ne fonctionnent pas sur tous les systèmes. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En plus vous pouvez préciser dans cette fenêtre la -\family sans -Vitesse de défilement via la molette -\family default -. - La vitesse standard est 1,0, une valeur plus élevée accélérera le défilement, - une valeur plus basse le ralentira. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Dans la section -\family sans -Zoom via la molette -\family default - vous pouvez désigner une touche pour le zoom. - Si la touche est appuyée quand vous actionnez la molette, le texte est - agrandi ou diminué. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Complétion de saisie -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La complétion de saisie est décrite dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Complétion-de-saisie" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Répertoires -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Répertoires" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Repertoires@Répertoires -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during - installation. - But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Répertoire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -travail C'est le répertoire de travail de LyX. - C'est la valeur implicite pour les opérations -\family sans -Ouvrir -\family default -, -\family sans -Enregistrer -\family default - et -\family sans -Enregistrer sous -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Modèles -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -documents Ce répertoire sera ouvert quand vous utilisez le menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Nouveau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -avec -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modèle -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fichiers -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'exemple Ce répertoire sera ouvert quand vous utilisez le bouton -\family sans -Exemples -\family default - dans le menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ouvrir. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note : -\series default - le bouton -\family sans -Exemples -\family default - n'existe pas si vous utilisez LyX sous Mac OS ou Windows -\family sans -. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Répertoire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sauvegarde -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Sauvegarde ! Répertoire -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Les copies de sauvegarde seront enregistrées dans ce répertoire. - Si aucun nom de répertoire n'est donné, mais que les sauvegardes sont activées - comme c'est décrit dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Documents de sauvegarde" - -\end_inset - -, le -\family sans -Répertoire de travail -\family default - sera utilisé pour enregistrer les sauvegardes. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Les fichiers de sauvegarde ont l'extension -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex Code -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -.lyx~ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Tube -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -serveur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LyX Ici, vous pouvez entrer le nom d'un tube Unix. - Ce tube est utilisé pour transférer des informations à partir de programmes - externes vers LyX. -\lang ngerman - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -\lang french -Exemple: -\series default - vous ajoutez la base de données BibTeX -\emph on -test.bib -\emph default - à votre document. - Vous pouvez éditer ce fichier avec -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default -. - Dans -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - vous devez utiliser le même tube Unix pour LyX dans les préférences sous - la rubrique -\family sans -External -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -programs -\family default -. - Si vous voulez récupérer une entrée de la base de donnée en tant que citation, - sélectionnez-la dans -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - et cliquez sur le symbole LyX. - L'entrée apparaîtra alors comme citation à l'endroit où se trouve le curseur - dans le document LyX. - Il faut bien entendu que -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default - et LyX soient actifs en même temps. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Le tube est également utilisé dans le cas d' -\family sans -Une seule instance -\family default - de LyX, voir la section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Documents de sauvegarde" - -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Pour utiliser le tube sous Windows, vous devez utiliser le nom de tube suivant: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash - -\backslash -. -\backslash -pipe -\backslash -lyxpipe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Répertoire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -temporaire Les fichiers temporaires sont enregistrés dans ce répertoire. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Dictionnaire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -des -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -synonymes Répertoire où se trouvent les dictionnaires des synonymes. - Vous n'avez à le spécifier que si la fonction échoue nativement ou si vous - voulez utiliser des dictionnaires personnels ou différents des dictionnaires - standard. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Dictionnaire -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -hunspell Répertoire où se trouvent les dictionnaires du correcteur orthographiqu -e -\family typewriter -Hunspell. - -\family default - Vous n'avez à le spécifier que si vous utilisez -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - et que la correction orthographique échoue ou si vous voulez utiliser des - dictionnaires personnels ou différents des dictionnaires standard. - Avec LyX sur Windows -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default - est le seul dictionnaire orthographique disponible et devrait fonctionner - sans spécification de dictionnaire. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Préfixe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -PATH Ce champ contient une liste de chemins vers des programmes externes. - Quand LyX a besoin d'un programme externe, il cherche dans cette liste - pour savoir où le trouver sur le système. - Sous Windows ou Mac -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -OS, la liste des chemins est automatiquement remplie quand LyX est configuré, - de sorte que vous ne devriez pas avoir à la modifier. - Sous Unix -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -Linux, la liste des chemins ne devra être modifiée que si vous voulez utiliser - des programmes externes qui ne se trouvent pas dans le chemin normal de - votre système ($PATH). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Préfixe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TEXINPUTS La variable d'environnement TEXINPUTS permet d'utiliser des fichiers - externes inclus dans un document LyX par des commandes en code TeX. - Ce préfixe inclut implicitement le répertoire du document (représenté par - un point -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -). - Le préfixe peut inclure un nombre quelconque de chemins d'accès séparés - par le séparateur implicite du système d'exploitation ( -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - avec les systèmes Unix et -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -; -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - avec Windows). - Si des fichiers sont inclus, les chemins d'accès de TEXINPUTS seront explorés - pour les trouver. - Notez que tout chemin relatif de la liste sera considéré comme relatif - au répertoire du document LyX. - Il est recommandé de laisser toujours -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -. -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - dans la liste, sinon la compilation peut échouer pour certains documents. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Identité -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici vous pouvez ajouter votre nom et votre adresse de courriel ( -\emph on -email -\emph default -). - Cette identité sera utilisée quand vous aurez activé le suivi des modifications - comme c'est décrit dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Suivi-de-modifications" - -\end_inset - -, pour marquer les modifications que vous avez effectuées comme étant les - vôtres. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Paramètres de langue -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Préférences ! Langue -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Langue ! Paramètres -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Langue -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Langue" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Langue -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'interface -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -utilisateur Ici vous pouvez choisir la langue utilisée pour les menus de - LyX. - Vous trouverez l'état d'avancement des traductions ici : -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Paquetage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -linguistique fixe quel paquetage LaTeX doit être chargé pour gérer les paramètre -s de langue. - Ceci concerne les césures ainsi que les dates et les chaînes de caractères - comme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Chapitre -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - et -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Tableau -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Le paquetage le plus répandu est -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, c'est le paquetage implicite quand on utilise la version classique de - LaTeX. - Cependant, les moteurs typographiques récents comme XeTeX et LuaTeX sont - accompagnés du paquetage alternatif -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -, mieux adapté aux fonctionnalités multi-écritures de ces moteurs. - En outre, il existe des paquetages spécifiques pour des langues non couvertes - par -\series bold -babel -\series default -. - Les sélections possibles sont décrites dans la section -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Langue" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Commande -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -début -\family default -Quand on a besoin d'un paquetage LaTeX spécial pour écrire dans une langue - donnée, vous pouvez définir ici la commande qui est utilisée pour démarrer - le paquetage. - Par exemple, on a besoin de la commande de début -\family sans - -\backslash -begin{arabtext} -\family default -pour écrire en arabe avec le paquetage -\series bold -ArabTeX -\series default -, voir -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - -. - La valeur implicite est la commande -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\family sans - -\backslash -selectlanguage{$$lang} -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Commande -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fin Homologue de -\family sans -Commande de début -\family default -. - Certains paquetages, n'ont pas besoin de commande de fin puisque la commande - de début permet d'activer et de désactiver le paquetage. - C'est le cas pris implicitement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Caractère -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -décimal -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -implicite définit le caractère à utiliser pour les chiffres en tableau (aligneme -nt sur les décimales). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Utiliser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -babel détermine si babel est utilisé ou non. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Régler -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -langues -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -globalement Quand cette case est cochée, les langues utilisées dans le document - sont ajoutées comme options aux options de classes de document, de sorte - qu'elles puissent être utilisées par tous les paquetages LaTeX. - Dans le cas contraire, elles sont utilisées comme option du seul paquetage - -\series bold -babel -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Début -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -auto Quand cette case est cochée, le document commence avec la langue de - document choisie. - Quand elle n'est pas cochée, la -\family sans -Commande de début -\family default - est explicitement mise au début du document dans la sortie LaTeX. - Cela assure que l'on utilise la bonne langue quand on utilise une autre - -\family sans -Commande de début -\family default - que celle proposée implicitement. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Fin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -auto Homologue de -\family sans -Début auto. - -\family default -Quand elle n'est pas cochée, la commande -\family sans -Commande de fin -\family default - est mise à la fin du document dans la sortie LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Marquer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -langues -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -étrangères le texte qui a été déclaré comme étant dans une autre langue - que celle du document sera souligné en bleu. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Supporte -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -langues -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -écrites -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -droite -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -gauche permet l'utilisation de langues é\SpecialChar \- -cri\SpecialChar \- -tes de droite à gauche (RTL pour - -\emph on -right to left -\emph default -), comme l'arabe, l'hébreu ou le farsi. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Mouvement -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -curseur Quand vous écrivez en RTL, vous pouvez décider si les touches de - flèches gauche et droite déplacent le curseur visuellement respectivement - vers la gauche et la droite ou alors logiquement. - Logiquement signifie que le curseur va vers la gauche quand on appuie sur - la flèche droite et qu'il se trouve dans une portion de texte RTL. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Correcteur Orthographique -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Les paramètres du correcteur orthographique sont détaillés dans la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:Correcteur-Orthographique" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Sorties -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -General -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Longueur -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ligne -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -exportée -\family default - détermine le nombre maximum de caractères imprimés sur une ligne quand - on utilise le menu -\family sans -Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Texte brut. - -\family default - Mettre la longueur de la ligne à zéro signifie que le texte sera exporté - sous la forme d'une unique ligne sans fin. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Format -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -date -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Date |see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Format de la date -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Format de la date -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Préférences ! Format de la date -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - Le format de la date peut être un des formats listés ici ou un mélange - de ceux-ci : -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Par exemple, le format -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -%d/%m/%y -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -imprime la date avec le format jour/mois/année. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Écraser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -lors -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'exportation fixe ce que LyX est autorisé à écraser lors de exportations. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Recherche -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directe définit les commandes à utiliser pour la rubrique de menu -\family sans -Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Recherche -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directe -\family default -. - Pour les détails, voir la section -\emph on -Recherche inversée DVI/PDF -\emph default -dans le manuel des Options avancées. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Imprimante -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Imprimante -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paramètres ! Imprimante -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Imprimante -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -implicite Ici, vous pouvez préciser votre imprimante implicite. - Le nom sera utilisé quand on exécutera la -\family sans -Commande d'impression -\family default -. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Note: -\series default -vous pouvez laisser ce champ vide sous Windows puisqu'il n'a aucun effet - sur ces systèmes. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Commande -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -d'impression C'est la commande que LyX -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -LaTeX utilisent pour imprimer. - Pour la plupart des systèmes, c'est implicitement -\family sans -dvips -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Options -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -commande -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'imprimante C'est ici que vous pouvez préciser des options pour l'imprimante. - Vous pourrez trouver une liste des options d'imprimante avec des explications - dans la documentation du programme qui fournit la -\family sans -Commande d'impression -\family default - que vous utilisez. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Adapter -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -sortie -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -à -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'imprimante Cette option n'est active qu'avec la -\family sans -Commande d'impression -\family default -\series bold - -\family sans -\series default - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -dvips -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default -. - Elle active un fichier de configuration pour dvips. - C'est une option à réserver aux experts de dvips. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-settings" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paramètres ! LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Utiliser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'encodage -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -police -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -La -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -TeX C'est l'encodage implicite pour la police du document. - -\family sans -T1 -\family default - est l'encodage implicite et couvre les langues occidentales et les symboles. - -\family sans -T2A, T2B, T2C, LCY -\family default - et -\family sans -X2 -\family default - sont pour le cyrillique. - Des combinaisons d'encodages sont possibles, comme -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\family sans -T1, T2B -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -. - Les encodages de polices sont en principe chargés automatiquement par les - paquetages linguistiques que LyX mets en place en interne. - De sorte qu'il n'y a pas de raison de changer l'encodage implicite. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Taille -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -papier -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -implicite C'est la taille qui sera utilisée pour les nouveaux documents. - La valeur -\family sans -Implicite -\family default - dépend des paramètres de votre système LaTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Option -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -taille -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -du -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -papier -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -pour -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -visionneuse -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -DVI Ces commandes n'ont d'effet que quand on utilise le programme -\family sans -xdvi -\family default -comme visionneuse DVI, lire son manuel pour en savoir plus. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous pouvez spécifier ici des options et commandes avec des paramètres pour - les processeurs qui sont listés. - Avant de changer quoi que ce soit ici, il est fortement recommandé de lire - les manuels des applications concernées. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Construction -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -bibliographie Réglages pour la construction de la bibliographie, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Bases-de-Données-Biblio" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Construction -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -l'index Réglages pour la construction de -\lang english - -\lang french -l'index, voir section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:Programme-d'indexation" - -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Commande -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -nomenclature Commande pour le programme qui génère le glossaire (nomenclature), - voir la section -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:programme-glossaire" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Commande -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -CheckT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX Commande pour le programme -\family sans -CheckTeX -\family default - qui est décrit dans la section -\emph on -Vérifier TeX -\emph default -du manuel des -\emph on -Options avancées -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Il y a aussi éventuellement les options suivantes : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Utiliser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -chemins -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Windows -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -dans -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -fichiers -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -LaTeX Utilise la notation de Windows pour les chemins, ce qui signifie utiliser - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - - -\backslash - -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - au lieu de -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -/ -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - pour séparer les répertoires. - Cette option est activée implicitement quand vous utilisez LyX sous Windows. -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Chemins -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Préférences ! Chemins -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Réinitialiser -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -les -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -options -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -quand -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -la -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -classe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -de -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -change Retire toutes les -\family sans -\lang english -Class options -\family default -\lang french - mises manuellement dans la fenêtre de dialogue -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Class -\family default -\lang french - quand on change la classe de document. - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -Gestion des fichiers -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Fichiers ! gestion -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Convertisseurs -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:Convertisseurs" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Convertisseurs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici, vous allez trouver la liste des commandes de convertisseurs définies - pour convertir des fichiers d'un format vers un autre. - Vous pouvez modifier des convertisseurs ou en créer des nouveaux. - Pour modifier un convertisseur, sélectionnez-le, changez le contenu du - champ -\family sans -Convertisseur -\family default - ou du champ -\family sans -Autres options -\family default -, puis appuyez sur le bouton -\family sans -Modifier -\family default -. - Pour créer un nouveau convertisseur, sélectionnez un de ceux qui sont proposés, - choisissez un format différent dans la liste déroulante -\family sans -Vers le format -\family default -, modifiez le champ -\family sans -Convertisseur -\family default -, et appuyez sur le bouton -\family sans -Ajouter -\family default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Quand l'option -\family sans -Fichier cache du convertisseur -\family default - est activée, les conversions seront mise en cache pour une durée qui est - précisée par le champ -\family sans -Âge maximum (en jours). - -\family default - Ceci signifie que les fichiers n'ont pas besoin d'être reconvertis à chaque - fois que vous rouvrez votre document; les fichiers convertis qui se trouvent - dans le cache seront utilisés à la place. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous trouverez plus d'information sur les convertisseurs, en particulier - au sujet des drapeaux qui peuvent être utilisés dans la définition du convertis -seur, dans la section -\emph on -Convertisseurs -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -Formats de fichiers -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Formats de fichiers -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Copieurs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Ici, vous allez trouver la liste des formats de fichiers que LyX peut manipuler. - Vous pouvez modifier la visionneuse et le programme d'édition qui doivent - être utilisés avec certains formats. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -En outre, vous pouvez préciser le -\family sans -Format implicite du résultat -\family default - utilisé quand vous appelez les rubriques -\family sans -Visionner, Mettre à jour, Visionner le document maître -\family default -or -\family sans -Mettre à jour le document maître -\family default -du menu -\family sans -Affichage -\family default - ou de la barre d'outils -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Vous trouverez plus d'information dans la section -\emph on -Formats -\emph default -du manuel -\emph on -Personnalisation. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Toutes les conversions d'un format vers un autre ont lieu dans le répertoire - temporaire de LyX, ce qui fait qu'il est parfois nécessaire, pour modifier - un fichier, de le copier d'abord ,dans le répertoire temporaire pour que - la conversion puisse se faire. - On fait cela à l'aide d'un -\family sans -Copieur -\family default -, voir les informations dans la section -\emph on -Copieurs -\emph default - du manuel -\emph on -Personnalisation -\emph default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Unités de longueur utilisables avec LyX -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unités de longueur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:Unités-de-longueur" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Unités de longueur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Pour comprendre les unités de longueur utilisées dans cette documentation, - le tableau -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:Unités" - -\end_inset - - décrit les unités utilisées par LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:Unités" - -\end_inset - -Unités de longueur -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -unité -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -nom/description -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -millimètre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -centimètre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -in -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pouce (inch) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -point (72.27 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pica (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pc = 12 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -sp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -scaled point (65536 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -sp = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -bp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -gros point (72 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -bp = 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -dd -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -didot (72 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -dd -\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ -\end_inset - - 37.6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mm) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cicero (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cc = 12 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -dd) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Échelle graphique% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% de la largeur originale de l'image -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Largeur texte% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% de la largeur du texte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Largeur colonne% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% de la largeur de la colonne -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Largeur page% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% de la largeur du papier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Largeur ligne% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% de la largeur de la ligne -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hauteur texte% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% la hauteur du texte -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hauteur page% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -% hauteur du papier -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -hauteur de la lettre -\emph on -x -\emph default - dans la police courante -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -largeur de la lettre -\emph on - M -\emph default - dans la police courante -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mu -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -unité mathématique (1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -mu = 1/18 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -Remerciements -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:Remerciements" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -Cette documentation est le résultat de l'effort collectif de nombreuses - personnes différentes (et nous encourageons tous les volontaires à contribuer - !). -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Alejandro Aguilar Sierra -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Amir Karger -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -David Johnson -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Hartmut Haase -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Ignacio García -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Ivan Schreter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -John Raithel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -John Weiss -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Lars Gullik Bjønnes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Matthias Ettrich -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Matthias Zenker -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Rich Fields -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Pascal André -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Paul Evans -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Paul Russel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Robin Socha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Uwe Stöhr -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -L'équipe LyX: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - -La bibliographie de la page suivante a été créée avec l'environnement -\family sans -Bibliographie -\family default - : -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -label "Remerciements" -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - -L'équipe LyX: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Remerciements" -target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org/Credits -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens: -\emph on -The LaTeX Companion Second Edition. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 2004 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. - Daly: -\emph on -A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 2003 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexbook" - -\end_inset - -Leslie Lamport: -\emph on -LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "texbook" - -\end_inset - -Donald E. - Knuth. - -\emph on -The TeXbook. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 1984 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -Le Catalogue TeX: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "LaTeXFAQ" - -\end_inset - -LaTeX FAQ: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" - -\end_inset - - du programme -\family sans - BibTeX -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX-2" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" - -\end_inset - - comment utiliser le programme -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "makeindex" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" - -\end_inset - - du programme -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "xindy" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" - -\end_inset - - du programme -\family sans -xindy -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" - -\end_inset - - des paquetages AMS: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "caption" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf" - -\end_inset - - du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" - -\end_inset - - du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" - -\end_inset - - du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" - -\end_inset - - du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" - -\end_inset - - du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "prettyref" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" - -\end_inset - - du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "refstyle" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" - -\end_inset - - du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "tipa" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Documentation" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" - -\end_inset - - du paquetage LaTeX -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paquetages LaTeX ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -\SpecialChar \@. - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour l'arabe: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Armenian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour l'arménien: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour langues cyrilliques: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Farsi" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour le farsi: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Hebrew" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour l'hébreu: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Japanese" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour le japonais: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Latvian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour le letton: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour le lituanien: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Mongolian" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour le mongol: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - - comment configurer LyX pour le vietnamien: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "NewInLyX20" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "page Wiki" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" - -\end_inset - - au sujet des nouveautés de -\family sans -LyX 2.0 -\family default -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -let -\backslash -mybibname -\backslash -bibname -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -bibname}{ -\backslash -mybibname -\backslash -; 2} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -La commande -\series bold - -\backslash -bibname -\series default - est le nom de la bibliographie dans la langue actuelle. - Elle est redéfinie ici avec le numéro 2 à la fin pour signaler que cette - bibliographie est bien la seconde: -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex -LatexCommand bibtex -bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs" -options "../biblio/alphadin" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -La bibliographie ci-dessus a été créée à partir d'une base de données BibTeX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print -LatexCommand printnomenclature -set_width "auto" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset index_print -LatexCommand printindex -type "idx" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_body -\end_document +#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ +\lyxformat 413 +\begin_document +\begin_header +\textclass scrbook +\begin_preamble +% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!! +% +% This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints +% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble, +% parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you +% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact +% the documentation team +% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org + +\usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle +\ifpdf % if pdflatex is used + + % set fonts for nicer pdf view + \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} + +\fi % end if pdflatex is used + +% for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float +\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} + +% the pages of the TOC is numbered roman +% and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added +\let\myTOC\tableofcontents +\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% + \frontmatter + \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} + \myTOC + \mainmatter } + +% define a short command for \textvisiblespace +\newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace} + +% macro for italic page numbers in the index +\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} + +% for customized page headers/footers +% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document +\usepackage{fancyhdr} +% change header rule width +\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} + +% workaround for a makeindex bug, +% see sec. "Index Entry Order" +% only uncomment this when you are using makindex +%\let\OrgIndex\index +%\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}} + +% use normal list environments also in French documents +\frenchbsetup{StandardLayout} +\end_preamble +\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading,numbers=noenddot +\use_default_options false +\begin_modules +customHeadersFooters +enumitem +logicalmkup +\end_modules +\maintain_unincluded_children false +\language french +\language_package default +\inputencoding auto +\fontencoding global +\font_roman default +\font_sans default +\font_typewriter default +\font_default_family default +\use_non_tex_fonts false +\font_sc false +\font_osf false +\font_sf_scale 100 +\font_tt_scale 100 + +\graphics default +\default_output_format default +\output_sync 0 +\bibtex_command default +\index_command default +\paperfontsize 12 +\spacing single +\use_hyperref true +\pdf_title "Guide de l'utilisateur de LyX" +\pdf_author "L'équipe LyX, Traduction: Adrien Rebollo et Siegfried Meunier-Guttin-Cluzel" +\pdf_subject "LyX" +\pdf_keywords "LyX" +\pdf_bookmarks true +\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true +\pdf_bookmarksopen false +\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 +\pdf_breaklinks false +\pdf_pdfborder false +\pdf_colorlinks true +\pdf_backref false +\pdf_pdfusetitle false +\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" +\papersize default +\use_geometry false +\use_amsmath 1 +\use_esint 1 +\use_mhchem 1 +\use_mathdots 1 +\cite_engine basic +\use_bibtopic false +\use_indices false +\paperorientation portrait +\suppress_date false +\use_refstyle 1 +\notefontcolor #0000ff +\branch Question +\selected 1 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #00ff00 +\end_branch +\branch Réponse +\selected 0 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #aa55ff +\end_branch +\index Index +\shortcut idx +\color #008000 +\end_index +\secnumdepth 3 +\tocdepth 2 +\paragraph_separation indent +\paragraph_indentation default +\quotes_language french +\papercolumns 1 +\papersides 2 +\paperpagestyle default +\tracking_changes false +\output_changes false +\html_math_output 0 +\html_css_as_file 0 +\html_be_strict false +\end_header + +\begin_body + +\begin_layout Title +Guide de l'utilisateur de LyX +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Informations de révision : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Traduction : Mise à jour pour 2.0.5 par JPChrétien, Date : 31/10/2012 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Quelques corrections de Uwe + remplacement de Éditer/Visionner/Insérer/Naviguer + par Édition/Affichage/Insertion/Navigation +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Original : Révision: 7fe5b65, Date : 22/10/2012 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Author +par l'Équipe LyX +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +Merci d'envoyer vos commentaires et corrections à la liste de diffusion + de la documentation de LyX +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + +, ou à la liste de diffusion de LyX en français +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "lyx-fr@lists.lyx.org" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Traduction en français par : +\noun on +Adrien +\noun default + +\noun on +Rebollo +\noun default + +\family typewriter + +\family default +. + Mise à jour de la traduction à partir de la version 1.5.2 : Siegfried +\noun on + +\noun default +M +\noun on +eunier-Guttin-Cluzel +\noun default +. + Revue finale 1.6 et mise à jour 2.0: Jean-Pierre +\noun on +Chrétien +\noun default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Version 2.0.x +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset toc +LatexCommand tableofcontents + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Si votre distribution LaTeX est un peu ancienne , +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Affichage +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Exporter +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en PDF ne fonctionnera pas du fait d'un conflit entre +\family typewriter +varioref/hyperref +\family default + et le caractère +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + apparaissant dans certaines étiquettes. + Frank Mittelbach a corrigé complètement ce bogue de +\family typewriter +varioref +\family default +, la correction est intégrée à partir de TeXLive 2011. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pour résoudre ce problème, vous pouvez mettre à jour votre distribution. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Vous pouvez trouver la dernière version au format PDF de ce manuel ici : +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +\series bold +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Introduction +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +L'option de classe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +numbers=noenddot +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (Documents\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Classe de document) évite qu'un point final apparaisse + dans la numérotation des sections dans la sortie, ce qui est implicite + pour la classe KOMA script. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Qu'est-ce que LyX ? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX est un système de préparation de documents. + C'est un outil pour produire de beaux manuscrits, des livres prêts à être + publiés, des lettres et documents professionnels, et même de la poésie. + Il diffère des autres +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +traitements de texte +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en ce que sa façon d'éditer des documents est conçue comme un langage à + balises. + Ça veut dire que quand vous tapez un titre de section, vous lui dites +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Section +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, et non pas +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Gras, 17 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +points, aligné à gauche, 5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mm d'espace en dessous +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + LyX s'occupe à votre place du rendu typographique, vous ne vous occupez + donc que des concepts, pas des détails. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces conceptions sont expliquées plus en détail dans le manuel d' +\emph on +Introduction +\emph default +. + Si vous ne l'avez pas encore lu, il serait bon de le faire maintenant. + Oui, maintenant: l' +\emph on +Introduction +\emph default + décrit plusieurs autres choses, et surtout le format de tous les manuels. + Si vous ne la lisez pas, vous aurez du mal à naviguer dans ce manuel. + Il est également possible qu'un des autres manuels vous soit plus utile. + L' +\emph on +Introduction +\emph default + vous guidera dans ce choix. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +À quoi LyX ressemble-t-il? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme la plupart des applications, LyX a l'habituelle barre de menus en + haut de sa fenêtre. + En dessous, il y a une barre d'outils avec un menu déroulant et divers + boutons. + Il y a, bien sûr, une barre de défilement vertical et une surface de travail + principale pour éditer des documents. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez qu'il n'y a pas de barre de défilement horizontal. + Ce n'est pas une erreur ou un oubli, c'est bien volontaire. + Quand vous lisez un livre, vous vous attendez à ce que la fin d'une ligne + longue soit reportée sur la ligne suivante. + Quand le texte déborde sur de nouvelles pages, c'est de façon verticale. + Il n'y a donc besoin que de la seule barre de défilement vertical. + Il y a trois cas dans lesquels vous pourriez vouloir une barre de défilement + horizontal. + Le premier cas, ce sont les grandes images: pour éviter ce débordement, + ouvrez le menu des paramètres de l'image et positionnez l'option +\family sans +Taille à l'écran +\family default + dans l'onglet +\family sans +Options LaTeX et LyX +\family default +. + Les deuxième et troisième cas sont les tableaux et les équations qui sont + plus larges que la fenêtre LyX. + Vous pouvez utiliser les flèches du clavier pour vous déplacer horizontalement + dans les tableaux, mais ça ne fonctionne pas encore avec les équations. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour une brève description de tous les menus et barres de boutons de LyX, + voyez l'appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Interface-Utilisateur" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +À l'aide ! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le système d'aide est constitué de l'ensemble des manuels. + Vous pouvez +\emph on +tous +\emph default + les lire depuis la fenêtre de LyX. + Vous n'avez qu'à choisir le manuel que vous voulez consulter à partir du + menu +\family sans +Aide +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Configuration de base de LyX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Config-LyX-de-base" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La plupart des fonctionnalités de LyX peuvent être configurées depuis le + menu +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Préférences +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Préférences +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +. + LyX est capable d'inspecter votre système pour voir quels programmes, quelles + classes de document LaTeX et quels paquetages LaTeX sont disponibles. + Il utilise cette information pour attribuer des valeurs implicites raisonnables + aux variables de préférences. + Bien que cette configuration ait déjà eu lieu au moment de l'installation + de LyX sur votre système, vous pourriez avoir certains fichiers installés + localement, par exemple des classes LaTeX, et qui n'auraient pas été vus + par LyX. + Pour forcer LyX à ré-inspecter votre système, faites +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reconfigurer +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Vous devez alors redémarrer LyX pour vous assurer que les changements ont + été pris en compte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Configuration LaTeX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Configuration-LaTeX" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez éditer des documents avec LyX sans que LaTeX soit installé, + mais vous ne pourrez pas créer de fichiers PDF ou imprimer vos documents + tant que ce ne sera pas fait. + Cependant, certains documents s'appuient sur DocBook, qui peut produire + du PDF ou similaire, et tout document LyX peut être exporté en texte brut + ou en XHTML. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certaines classes de document dépendent de classes ou de paquetages LaTeX + ou DocBook spécifiques. + De telles classes de documents peuvent être utilisées sans que les fichiers + requis soient installés, mais vous ne pourrez pas produire certains types + de sorties. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les paquetages que LyX a trouvé sur votre machine sont listés dans un fichier + que vous pouvez afficher via le menu +\family sans +Aide\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Configuration +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. + Vous devez installer les paquetages nécessaires qui seraient manquants, + puis reconfigurer LyX (menu +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reconfigurer +\family default +) +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Les deux accolades dans la boîte de code TeX empêchent que le terme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + soit imprimé avec des lettres en indice et en exposant. + Vous trouverez plus d'information sur le code TeX dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Code-TeX" + +\end_inset + +, l'impression des noms propres comme LaTeX est expliquée dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Noms-Propres" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Reportez-vous à la section 5.1 du manuel de +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default + pour les détails sur l'installation de paquetages LaTeX additionnels. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Comment travailler avec LyX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Opérations de base sur les fichiers +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Opérations sur les fichiers +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans le menu +\family sans +Fichier +\family default + et dans la barre d'outils standard, on retrouve les opérations de base + pour tout traitement de texte, et en plus quelques opérations plus élaborées + : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Nouveau +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-new" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Nouveau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +avec +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modèle +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Ouvrir +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "file-open" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Documents +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +récents +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Fermer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Enregistrer +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-write" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Enregistrer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sous +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Enregistrer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tout +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Revenir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sauvegarde +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Contrôle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +version +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Importer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Exporter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Imprimer +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Nouvelle fenêtre +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Fermer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fenêtre +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Quitter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ils font tous à peu près la même chose que dans les autres traitements de + texte, avec quelques différences mineures. + La commande +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nouveau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +avec +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modèle +\family default + vous demande un modèle à utiliser. + Choisir un modèle fixera automatiquement certaines options de mise en forme + du document, options que vous auriez dû autrement modifier à la main. + Elles peuvent servir pour certaines classes, spécialement celles utilisées + pour l'écriture de lettres (voir Section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Classes-de-doc" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Note : Il n'y a pas de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +fichier implicite +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ou de document appelé +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Titre +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vide +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + À moins que vous ne disiez à LyX d'ouvrir un fichier ou d'en créer un nouveau, + l'espace vide n'est que cela --- un grand espace vide. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les commandes +\family sans +Revenir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sauvegarde +\family default + et +\family sans +Contrôle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Version +\family default + sont utiles si plusieurs personnes travaillent sur le même document en + même temps +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Si vous prévoyez de faire cela, vous devriez aussi jeter un œil sur la fonction + de contrôle de version dans LyX, dans le manuel +\emph on +Options avancées +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + +\family sans +Revenir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sauvegarde +\family default + rechargera simplement le document à partir du disque. + Vous pouvez bien sûr aussi l'utiliser si vous regrettez d'avoir changé + le document et voulez le restaurer dans le dernier état sauvegardé. + Avec +\family sans +Contrôle +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Version +\family default +vous pouvez enregistrer les modifications que vous avez effectuées sur le + document de façon à ce que les autres puissent les identifier comme étant + les vôtres. + +\family sans + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Fonctions de base d'édition +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Édition +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Base-d'edition" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme la plupart des traitements de texte modernes, LyX peut opérer des + copier-coller sur des blocs de texte, on peut se déplacer d'un caractère, + d'un mot ou d'une page d'écran, et on peut effacer des mots entiers aussi + bien que des caractères individuels. + Les quatre prochaines sections couvrent les fonctions de base d'édition + de LyX et comment y accéder. + Nous allons commencer par le copier-coller. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme vous pouvez vous y attendre, le menu +\family sans +Édition +\family default + et la barre d'outils standard contiennent les commandes de copier-coller, + ainsi que diverses autres fonctions d'édition. + Quelques-unes sont spéciales et seront couvertes dans les prochaines sections. + Les commandes de base sont : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Couper +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "cut" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Copier +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "copy" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Coller +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "paste" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Coller +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +une +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Sélection +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Récente +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Coller +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Spécial +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Rechercher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Remplacer +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show findreplace" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les trois premières s'expliquent d'elles-mêmes. + Vous pouvez aussi copier du texte entre LyX et d'autres programmes par + coupé-copié-collé. + Le sous-menu +\family sans +Coller +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +une +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Sélection +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Récente +\family default + vous montre une liste des dernières chaînes de caractères que vous avez + collé. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Collage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +brut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +par +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +lignes +\family default + va insérer le texte du presse-papier de façon à ce qu'il ne forme qu' +\emph on +un seul +\emph default + paragraphe. + Avec +\family sans +Texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +brut +\family default + seul, le texte est inséré comme une suite de paragraphes, chaque saut de + ligne commençant un nouveau paragraphe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'élément +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rechercher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +remplacer +\family default + ouvre la fenêtre +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fenêtre ! rechercher et remplacer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Rechercher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +remplacer +\family default +. + Le texte que vous voulez trouver va dans le champ +\family sans +Rechercher +\family default +. + Une fois que vous avez trouvé un mot ou expression, LyX le sélectionne. + Appuyer sur le bouton +\family sans +Remplacer +\family default + remplace le texte sélectionné par le contenu du champ +\family sans +Remplacer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +par +\family default +. + Vous pouvez toujours sauter cette occurrence du mot et poursuivre la recherche + en appuyant sur le bouton +\family sans +Suivant +\family default +. + Appuyez sur +\family sans +Remplacer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tout +\family default + pour remplacer automatiquement toutes les occurrences du texte dans le + document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez cocher la case +\family sans +Selon +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +casse +\family default + si vous voulez que la recherche différencie les majuscules des minuscules + dans le mot recherché. + Si le bouton est coché, en recherchant +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Trouvé +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + vous ne trouverez pas +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +trouvé +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez cocher la case +\family sans +Mot +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Complets +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Seulement +\family default + si vous voulez forcer LyX à ne trouver que des mots complets. + Par exemple, en recherchant +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +trouvé +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + vous ne trouverez pas +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +trouvées +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default +. + LyX propose également une version élaborée de +\family sans +Rechercher et Remplacer +\family default + décrite dans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rechercher-et-Remplacer-élaboré" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les choses comme les notes, les flottants, etc. + ce que l'on appelle les inserts, peuvent être dissous. + Cela signifie que l'insert est détruit et que son contenu est laissé comme + du texte normal. + Pour dissoudre un insert, on place le curseur au début de l'insert et on + appuie sur la touche +\family sans +Ret.Arr +\family default + ou on place le curseur à la fin et on appuie sur +\family sans +Suppr. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le contenu d'un insert est sélectionné via le raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "inset-select-all" +\end_inset + +, le raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select" +\end_inset + + sélectionnant tout le document +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Annuler et Refaire +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Refaire +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annuler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Annuler-et-Refaire" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous faites une erreur, vous pouvez facilement la réparer, car LyX a + un tampon d'annulation de grande capacité. + Faites +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Annuler +\family default + ou utilisez le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "undo" +\end_inset + +de la barre d'outils pour corriger une erreur. + Si vous avez accidentellement annulé trop d'opérations, faites +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Refaire +\family default + ou utilisez le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "redo" +\end_inset + + pour +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +annuler l'annulation +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Le mécanisme d'annulation est actuellement limité à 100 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +étapes pour minimiser l'occupation de la mémoire. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que si vous annulez tous les changements et arrivez au document tel + qu'il était sauvegardé, celui-ci conservera malheureusement le statut de + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +modifié +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + C'est une conséquence de la limite de 100 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +étapes vue plus haut. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Annuler +\family default + et +\family sans +Refaire +\family default + fonctionnent avec presque tout dans LyX, mais elles ne procèdent pas caractère + par caractère pour du texte, mais par blocs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Opérations à la souris +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Opérations à la souris +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous n'allons pas entrer dans les détails de tous les raccourcis souris + ici. + Quelques-unes des autres sections de ce manuel couvrent les opérations + spécifiques. + À la place, nous allons plutôt traiter des opérations de souris les plus + élémentaires. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Se déplacer +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Cliquez sur le +\emph on +bouton gauche +\emph default + n'importe où dans la fenêtre d'édition. + Le curseur de déplace sur le texte sous le pointeur. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Sélectionner du texte +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Maintenez le +\emph on +bouton gauche +\emph default + et déplacez la souris. + LyX marque le texte entre les ancienne et nouvelle positions du pointeur. + Utilisez +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Copier +\family default + pour créer une copie du texte dans le presse-papiers de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Repositionnez le curseur et recollez le texte dans LyX en utilisant +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Coller +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Inserts (notes de bas de page, notes en marge, figures et tableaux flottants, + etc.) +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Cliquez avec le bouton droit pour modifier ses propriétés. + Voyez aussi la section correspondante de ce manuel pour plus de détails. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Section +Navigation +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Naviguer" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Navigation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX propose plusieurs façons de naviguer dans un document: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +le menu +\family sans +Navigation +\family default + liste toutes les sections du document sous la forme d'entrées de sous-menus + sur lesquelles vous pouvez cliquer pour sauter à la partie correspondante + du document; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Plan +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + accessible par le menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Plan +\family default + ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle toc" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +les signets, que vous pouvez poser depuis le menu +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Signets +\family default + et utiliser via le même menu. + Notez bien que les signets sont conservés d'une session à la suivante. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils (correspondant au menu +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Signets\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Naviguer en arrière +\family default +) va à la position dans le document à laquelle vous avez récemment touché. + Ceci est utile lorsque, dans un document important, vous avez navigué ou + parcouru un autre endroit du document pour vérifier quelque chose, et que + vous désirez revenir à vos modifications en cours. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une pression sur la touche F5 centre verticalement le curseur dans la fenêtre + LyX principale. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Le plan +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +plan +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + a été dénommé la +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +TdM +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans les versions antérieures de LyX , puisque son but était d'afficher + la table de matières. + Le plan est cependant devenu beaucoup plus puissant maintenant. + Dans le menu déroulant situé en haut de la fenêtre du plan, vous pouvez + choisir différentes listes, parmi lesquelles les objets du type TdM, comme + la liste des tableaux ou la listes des figures, mais aussi des listes de + notes de bas de page, d'étiquettes et de références croisées (voir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand formatted +reference "sec:Références-croisées" + +\end_inset + +), ou de notes, ou de citations (voir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand formatted +reference "sec:Bibliographie" + +\end_inset + +). + Cliquer sur un des éléments positionne le curseur à l'endroit correspondant + du document. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un clic droit sur un élément du plan ouvrira dans la plupart de cas un menu + contextuel permettant une modification directe du contenu de cet élément. + Par exemple, avec les citations, le menu contextuel ouvre la fenêtre de + dialogue de citation pour permettre de la modifier. + Un clic droit sur une modification permet de l'accepter ou de la rejeter, + et ainsi de suite. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le champ +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Filtre +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + situé en haut vous permet de restreindre les éléments apparaissant dans + le plan. + Par exemple, si vous affichez une liste des étiquettes et références et + souhaitez ne voir que les références dans les sous-sections, vous pouvez + saisir le texte +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +sub: +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans le filtre; et seuls les éléments contenant ce texte seront affichés. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Au bas du plan se trouvent plusieurs boutons ou actions permettant de mieux + contrôler l'affichage. + L'option +\family sans +Trier +\family default + trie la liste courante alphabétiquement, sinon les éléments apparaissent + dans l'ordre d'occurrence dans le document. + L'option +\family sans +Conserver +\family default + permet de conserver l'affichage de la liste dans l'état actuel. + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Conserver +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + signifie que par exemple si les sous-sections des sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +4 sont affichées et que vous cliquez sur la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3, les sous-sections des sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +4 resteront affichées. + Sans l'option +\family sans +Conserver +\family default + elles seraient cachées pour mettre en évidence la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 sur laquelle vous avez cliqué. + Enfin, la réglette située à gauche vous permet d'ouvrir le plan à une +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +profondeur +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + donnée, le mieux est d'essayer pour appréhender le fonctionnement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le bouton +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/reload.png + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + remet le plan à jour (bien que ce ne soit pas normalement nécessaire). + À côté se trouvent les boutons qui permettent de modifier la position des + sections dans le document. + Avec les boutons +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/down.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/up.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + + situés en bas de la fenêtre de plan, vous pouvez déplacer des sections + à l'intérieur de votre document. + Vous pouvez par exemple déplacer la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 pour qu'elle se trouve avant la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.4. + LyX va alors renuméroter automatiquement les sections pour refléter le + nouvel ordre. + Avec les boutons +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/promote.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/demote.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + (ou les raccourcis clavier correspondants +\family sans +Tab +\family default + et +\family sans +Maj-Tab +\family default +) vous pouvez modifier le niveau hiérarchique d'une section. + Vous pouvez par exemple transformer la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 en chapitre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 ou en sous-section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.4.1. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Complétion de saisie ou de mot +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Complétion-de-saisie" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Complétion de saisie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Complétion de mot|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Complétion de saisie +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX propose une fonction de complétion de mots en balayant tous les documents + qui sont actuellement ouverts. + Chaque mot qui apparaît dans un de ces documents est ajouté à une base + de données qui est utilisée pour proposer des complétions de mots. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La complétion de saisie peut être activée dans les préférences de LyX (menu + +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Préférences +\family default +), au paragraphe +\family sans +Saisie\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Complétion de saisie +\family default +. + Avec l'option +\family sans +Complétion automatique en ligne +\family default +, la complétion proposée est affichée immédiatement après le curseur. + Avec l'option +\family sans +Fenêtre auxiliaire automatique, +\family default + la complétion apparaît toujours dans une sous-fenêtre. + Le curseur auxiliaire de complétion peut être désactivé en dé-sélectionnant + l'option +\family sans +Indicateur curseur +\family default +. + Au moyen des options générales, vous pouvez définir la temporisation d'affichag +e de chacun des deux modes d'affichage et décider si les complétions longues + doivent tronquées. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Implicitement LyX affiche un petit triangle derrière le curseur pour signaler + qu'il y a des complétions disponibles. + Vous pouvez alors appuyer sur la touche +\family sans +Tab +\family default + pour utiliser ces complétions. + Quand plusieurs complétions sont possibles, une fenêtre auxiliaire s'ouvre + pour les afficher. + Vous pouvez utiliser la souris ou les flèches de déplacement pour sélectionner + une complétions dans la fenêtre, et valider le choix avec la touche +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les options de complétion pour les mathématiques fonctionnent comme les + options pour le texte. + L'option spécifique +\family sans +Auto-correction +\family default + autorise la composition des caractères: si vous voulez par exemple insérer + le caractère +\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ +\end_inset + +, vous pouvez saisir la séquence +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +=> +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + dans une formule pour l'obtenir. + Ceci est une alternative rapide à l'insertion de commandes ou à l'usage + de la barre d'outils mathématiques. + Une liste des combinaisons de caractères reconnues se trouve dans le fichier + +\family typewriter +autocorrect +\family default + qui se trouve dans le répertoire d'installation. + L'auto-correction peut être activée à tout moment en saisissant le point + d'exclamation +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +! +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\family sans +Espace +\family default + la désactive. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Raccourcis pour le clavier de base +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Raccourcis clavier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a au moins deux familles différentes de raccourcis clavier : +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cua +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +emacs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + LyX utilise implicitement +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cua +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, ceci peut être modifié via +\family sans + Saisie\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Raccourcis. + ( +\family default +Vous là pouvez aussi voir la liste des raccourcis et les modifier comme + c'est expliqué dans la section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Éditer-les-raccourcis" + +\end_inset + +.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quelques touches, comme +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Haut +\family default +, +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Bas +\family default +, +\family sans +Gauche +\family default +, +\family sans +Droite +\family default +, +\family sans +Haut +\family default +, et +\family sans +Bas +\family default +, font exactement ce que vous attendez d'elles. + D'autres non : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tab +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Tab" +description "Touche tabulation" + +\end_inset + + +\family default + il n'y a rien qui ressemble à une tabulation dans LyX. + Si vous ne comprenez pas cela, allez lire tout de suite les sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Intro-indent-par" + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Environnements-par" + +\end_inset + +, et spécialement la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Env-par-listes" + +\end_inset + +. + Oui oui, faites-le tout de suite. + Si vous avez encore des problèmes, voyez le +\emph on +Manuel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'apprentissage +\emph default +. + Avec LyX, la touche de tabulation n'est utilisée que pour accepter les + suggestions de la complétion de saisie, pour déplacer le curseur dans les + tables ou les matrices mathématiques ou +\lang english +to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate +\lang french +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Esc +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Esc" +description "Touche échappement" + +\end_inset + + +\family default + c'est la touche d'annulation. + Elle est utilisée de manière générique pour annuler des opérations. + D'autres parties de ce manuel entreront plus dans les détails à ce sujet; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Orig +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Fin +\family default + celles-ci déplacent le curseur, respectivement au début et à la fin de + la ligne, sauf si vous utilisez les raccourcis +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Emacs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, auquel cas elles vont au début et à la fin du fichier. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a trois touches de modification : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Contrôle +\family default + (elle est notée +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Ctrl +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Ctrl" +description "Touche Contrôle" + +\end_inset + + dans la documentation). + Celle-ci a des utilisations différentes, selon la touche avec laquelle + elle est utilisée : +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +avec +\family sans +Ret.Arr +\family default + ou +\family sans +Suppr. +\family default +, on efface un mot entier au lieu d'un seul caractère; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +avec +\family sans +Gauche +\family default + et +\family sans +Droite +\family default +, on se déplace par mots au lieu d'un caractère à la fois; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +avec +\family sans +Orig +\family default + et +\family sans +Fin +\family default +, on se déplace au début et à la fin du document, respectivement; +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Majuscule +\family default + (notée +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Maj +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Maj" +description "Touche Majuscule" + +\end_inset + + dans la documentation). + Utilisez-la avec une des touches de mouvement pour sélectionner le texte + situé entre les ancienne et nouvelle positions du curseur; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Alt +\family default + (noté +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Alt +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Alt" +description "Touche Alt ou Meta" + +\end_inset + + dans la documentation) C'est la touche +\family sans +Alt +\family default + sur de nombreux claviers, sauf si votre clavier a une touche +\family sans +Meta +\family default + dédiée. + Si vous avez ces deux touches, vous devrez faire des essais pour déterminer + laquelle se comporte effectivement comme une touche +\family sans +Alt +\family default +. + Cette touche fait plein de choses différentes, et active aussi les +\emph on +raccourcis de menu +\emph default +. + Si vous l'utilisez en combinaison avec l'une des lettres soulignées dans + un menu ou élément de menu, elle sélectionne cet élément; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Par exemple, la séquence +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Alt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +e +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +y +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +p +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + affiche la fenêtre de dialogue +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Style de texte +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Alt-f +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + ouvre le menu +\family sans +Fichier +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +NdT : ces séquences changent selon la langue des menus. + Selon l'avancement de la traduction, ces raccourcis sont, ou non, accessibles. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a encore d'autres choses à dire sur la touche +\family sans +Alt +\family default +, mais il vous faudra regarder le manuel +\emph on +Raccourcis +\emph default + pour obtenir plus d'informations. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Heureusement, vous apprendrez de plus en plus de raccourcis clavier au fur + et à mesure que vous utiliserez LyX, parce que la plupart des actions de + la souris afficheront un petit message dans le minibuffer qui décrit le + nom de l'action que vous venez d'effectuer, et les raccourcis existants + pour cette action. + Les menus de LyX listent aussi les raccourcis existants. + La notation pour les raccourcis est très similaire à celle adoptée dans + cette documentation, ainsi vous ne devrez pas avoir de problèmes pour la + comprendre. + Cependant, notez que les +\family sans +Maj- +\family default + sont explicitement mentionnés, ainsi +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Alt-P Maj-A +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + signifie +\family sans +Alt-P +\family default + suivi d'un +\family sans +A +\family default + majuscule. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez voir la liste des raccourcis et les modifier dans les préférences + de LyX dans la rubrique +\family sans +Saisie\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Raccourcis +\family default + comme c'est expliqué dans la section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Éditer-les-raccourcis" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Les bases de LyX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Les bases +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Types de documents +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Types +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avant toute chose, avant même de commencer à écrire un document, vous devez + décider quel +\emph on +type +\emph default + de document vous voulez éditer. + Les types de documents diffèrent par l'espacement, les en-têtes, la numérotatio +n, etc. + Ils diffèrent aussi par les environnements de paragraphe utilisés, et par + la présentation du titre de votre document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une +\emph on +classe de document +\emph default + décrit un groupe de propriétés communes à un ensemble donné de documents. + En choisissant la classe de document, vous sélectionnez automatiquement + ces propriétés, facilitant la création du type de document que vous voulez. + Si vous ne choisissez pas de classe de document, LyX en prendra une impliciteme +nt. + Il vous incombe donc de décider de la classe de votre document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les différentes classes de document +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Classes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Classes-de-doc" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez sélectionner une classe dans la fenêtre +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Ensuite sélectionnez la classe que vous voulez utiliser dans le champ +\family sans +Classe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +document +\family default + de la rubrique +\family sans +Classe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +document +\family default +, et ajoutez les options dont vous avez besoin. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +En bref +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a quatre classes standard de document dans LyX. + Ce sont : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Article pour des articles; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Report pour des rapports; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Book pour écrire un livre; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Letter pour une lettre à l'américaine. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a aussi quelques classes non standard, que LyX n'utilise que si vous + avez installé les classes LaTeX correspondantes, bien que la plupart des + distributions LaTeX les incluent. + En voici quelques-unes, la liste complète avec des explications détaillées + se trouve au chapitre +\emph on +Classes Spéciales de Documents +\emph default + dans le manuel +\emph on +Options avancées +\emph default + : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +A&A articles de publications dans le style et le format utilisés par +\lang english +Astronomy & Astrophysics; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ACS articles de publications dans le style et le format utilisés par l' +\lang english +American Chemistry Society; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +AGU articles de publications dans le style et le format utilisés par l' +\lang english +American Geophysical Union; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +AMS articles de publications et livres dans le style et le format utilisés + par l'AMS ( +\lang english +American Mathematical Society +\lang french +). + Il y a trois dispositions d'article possibles. + La disposition standard utilise un schéma de numérotation classique pour + les théorèmes et environnements similaires, qui préfixe le numéro du résultat + avec le numéro de la section. + Tous les énoncés de type résultat (propositions, corollaires etc...) sont + numérotés ensembles, mais les définitions, les exemples et les autres du + même genre ont leur propre numérotation. + Le schéma de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +numérotation séquentielle +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ne place pas le numéro de la section avec chaque résultat, mais numérote + ceux-ci en une seule séquence tout au long de l'article. + Chaque type de résultat a sa propre séquence. + Il y a aussi une disposition qui se passe de toute numérotation des proposition +s; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Beamer sert à faire des transparents pour des présentations; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Broadway disposition pour écrire des pièces de théâtre. + Ce n'est pas une classe qui existe dans LaTeX, mais une nouvelle qui est + distribuée avec LyX; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chess format pour écrire sur le jeu d'échecs; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Curriculum +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vitae classe utile pour écrire un curriculum vitæ; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Elsarticle disposition pour les revues publiées par le groupe Elsevier; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Foils sert à faire des transparents pour des présentations; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hollywood utilisé pour taper des scripts pour l'industrie cinématographique + des États-Unis. + Ce n'est pas une classe qui existe dans LaTeX, mais une nouvelle qui est + distribuée avec LyX; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +IEEEtran disposition pour les journaux publiés par l'IEEE ( +\lang english +Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +IOP disposition pour les journaux publiés par l'IOP (Institute of Physics); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Kluwer disposition pour les revues publiées par le groupe Kluwer. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +KOMA-Script remplace les classes standard, en offrant de nombreuses fonctions + intéressantes comme le formatage des légendes, le calcul automatique de + la taille de la zone d'impression etc. + Il est utilisé par le présent document; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Memoir remplace également les classes standard; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Powerdot sert à faire des transparents pour des présentations; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +REVTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X pour écrire des articles pour les publications de l' +\lang english +American Physical Society +\lang french + (APS), de l' +\lang english +American Institute of Physics +\lang french + (AIP), et de l' +\lang english +Optical Society of America +\lang french + (OSA). + Cette classe n'est pas entièrement compatible avec toutes les fonctions + de LyX; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Slides sert à faire des transparents pour des présentations; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +SPIE +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Proceedings disposition pour les journaux publiés par SPIE ( +\lang english +The International Society for Optical Engineering +\lang french +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Springer disposition pour les revues publiés par le groupe Springer. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous n'entrerons pas plus dans les détails ici sur l'utilisation de ces + différentes classes de document. + Vous pouvez trouver tous les détails sur les classes non-standard dans + le manuel +\emph on +Options +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +avancées +\emph default + (chapitre 6). + Ici, nous nous contenterons de faire la liste de quelques-unes des propriétés + communes à toutes ces classes de document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Disponibilité +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous remarquerez probablement que de nombreuses classes énumérées par le + menu déroulant +\family sans + Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Classes de document +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +sont marquées comme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Indisponibles +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Si vous ouvrez un document qui utilise l'une de celles-ci, vous verrez + un avertissement vous informant que certains fichiers requis pour créer + la sortie ne sont pas installés. + Vous penserez alors que quelque chose ne va pas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Tout va bien. + LyX inclut beaucoup plus de classes que vous n'utiliserez jamais, et certaines + d'entre elles, comme +\family sans +IOP +\family default +, sont très spécialisées. + LyX essaie de reconnaître des documents aussi variés que possible, et il + inclut une centaine de fichiers de format, ce nombre étant croissant. + Aucune distribution LaTeX n'installera implicitement tous les fichiers + qui peuvent être utilisés par telle ou telle classe de document, il y en + aurait trop. + Voilà pourquoi certaines classes sont indisponibles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous souhaitez utiliser une classe document marquée +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Indisponible +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, il vous suffit d'installer les paquetages appropriés. + La manière la plus aisée de trouver quels fichiers ont manquants est d'utiliser + la classe pour un nouveau document: LyX ouvrira une fenêtre de dialogue + listant les fichiers manquants. + Voyez la section +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Installation de nouveaux fichiers LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans le manuel de +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default + pour les détails de la procédure. +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bien que LyX reconnaisse un grand nombre de types de documents, il ne reconnaît + pas tous les types possibles. + Par exemple, de nombreuses universités fournissent des classes LaTeX obligatoir +es pour les mémoires soumis à ces universités. + L'équipe LyX ne peut pas écrire des fichiers de format pour reconnaître + toutes ces classes LaTeX, elles sont trop nombreuses. + Heureusement, les utilisateurs peuvent écrire leurs propres fichiers de + format, et nombreux sont ceux qui l'ont fait. + Le chapitre 5 du manuel de +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default + décrit comment créer des fichiers de format. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Modules +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Modules" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Modules +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les modules ajoutent des caractéristiques supplémentaires à un document, + ces dernières n'étant pas disponibles implicitement avec la classe choisie + pour le document. + Par exemple, vous pouvez vouloir utiliser l'écriture Braille dans un document. + Cette écriture n'est disponible dans aucune classe de document, vous devrez + donc charger le module correspondant dans la rubrique +\family sans +Modules +\family default + de la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Documents ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Sélectionner un module de la liste fait apparaître la description correspondant +e. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certains modules ont besoin de paquetages LaTeX ou de convertisseurs qui + ne sont pas toujours installés implicitement. + LyX vous préviendra si vous n'avez pas les paquetages ou convertisseurs + nécessaires, et vous dira exactement ce qui manque. + Vous pourrez toujours utiliser le module pour modifier votre fichier, mais + vous ne pourrez pas exporter en PDF ou imprimer le document, puisque LyX + ne pourra pas exécuter la compilation sans les éléments manquants. + Si vous souhaitez produire ce type de sortie, il vous faudra installer + les pré-requis manquants et reconfigurer LyX en sélectionnant +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Reconfigurer +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Voir la section +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Installer de nouveaux fichiers LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + du manuel de +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default + pour les détails sur l'installation de nouveaux paquetages. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Note : certains modules ont besoin d'autres modules et certaines paires + de modules sont incompatibles. + LyX vous informera sur ces contraintes. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Format local +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Format-local" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Format local +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les modules sont pour LyX ce que sont les paquetages pour LaTeX: ils sont + prévus pour une utilisation dans des documents variés, et si vous avez + besoin souvent des mêmes constructions dans différents documents, vous + devez envisager d'écrire un module dans ce but. + Quelquefois, cependant, un document présente des besoins très particuliers, + et il vous faut un insert spécifique ou un style de caractère, mais seulement + pour ce document. + Vous voulez en fait un élément de format qui ressemble à un préambule LaTeX: + le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Format local +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + de LyX est ce qu'il vous faut, voyez la section +\emph on +Format local +\emph default + du manuel de +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default + pour savoir comment l'utiliser. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Propriétés +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Au cas où vous vous demanderiez quelles sont les valeurs implicites pour + chaque classe de document, voici un tableau les décrivant brièvement : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mise en page +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pagination +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Colonnes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Niveau max. + de découpage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +article +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Simple +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Recto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Une +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Section +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +report +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Simple +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Recto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Une +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Chapitre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +book +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En-têtes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Recto-verso +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Une +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Chapitre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +letter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Simple +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Recto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Une +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +aucun +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous vous demandez sans doute aussi ce que signifie +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Niveau maximal de découpage +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Il y a plusieurs environnements de paragraphe utilisés pour créer des en-têtes + de section. + Des classes de document différentes permettent des types d'en-têtes de + section différents. + Seules deux d'entre elles utilisent l'en-tête +\family sans +Chapitre +\family default +; les autres ne l'autorisent pas et commencent par l'en-tête +\family sans +Section +\family default +. + Quelques classes de document, comme celles pour les lettres, n'utilisent + aucun en-tête de section. + En plus des en-têtes +\family sans +Chapitre +\family default + et +\family sans +Section +\family default +, il y a aussi des en-têtes de sous-section ( +\family sans +SousSection +\family default +), de sous-sous-section ( +\family sans +SousSousSection +\family default +), ainsi de suite. + Nous décrirons complètement ces en-têtes dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:En-tetes-env-par" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Apparence du document +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Apparence-du-document" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Apparence +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les propriétés les plus importantes des classes de documents sont modifiées + dans le menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres. + +\family default + Vous pouvez saisir, dans le champ +\family sans +Options +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +classe +\family default + sous +\family sans +Classe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +document, +\family default + des options spéciales pour votre classe de document sous forme d'une liste + séparée par des virgules. + C'est nécessaire uniquement si LyX ne gère pas les options spéciales que + vous voulez utiliser pour votre document. + Pour en apprendre plus sur votre classe LaTeX favorite et ses options, + vous devez lire son manuel. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default +, sous +\family sans +Format +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\family default + le menu déroulant +\family sans +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'en-têtes +\family default + permet de choisir quel type d'en-têtes et de numérotation on utilise sur + la page. + Vous avez le choix entre ces cinq options: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Implicite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +default +\emph default +) +\family default + utilise la mise en page implicite de la classe actuelle; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Vide +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +empty +\emph default +) +\family default + ne crée ni numéros de page ni en-têtes; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Ordinaire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +plain +\emph default +) +\family default + crée seulement des numéros de page; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +En-têtes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +headings +\emph default +) +\family default + crée des numéros de page et en en-tête le titre et le numéro, soit du chapitre, + soit de la section en cours. + LyX utilise le chapitre ou la section selon le niveau maximum de découpage; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Sophistiqué +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +fancy +\emph default +) +\family default + vous permet de créer des en-têtes et pieds de page personnalisables à volonté + si vous disposez du paquetage +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Voyez la documentation du paquetage +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + pour plus de détails.Leur définition est détaillé dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:En-têtes-et-pieds" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La +\family sans +Séparation +\family default + des paragraphes est décrite dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Intro-indent-par" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Dimensions du papier et orientation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Taille du papier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Taille-du-papier" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous trouverez les options suivantes dans la rubrique +\family sans +Format +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\family default + de la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default + : +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Taille +\family default + précise sur quelles dimensions de papier imprimer. + Les choix sont : +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Implicite +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +A0 - A6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +B0 - B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +C0 - C6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +lettre US, légal US, executive US +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +JIS B0 - JIS B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Réglable +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Orientation +\family default + permet de choisir l'impression de sortie dans le format +\family sans +Portrait +\family default + ou +\family sans +Paysage +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +recto-verso +\family default + ajuste la zone d'impression pour imprimer les deux face du papier. + Cela signifie que la zone d'impression n'est pas la même pour les pages + paires et les pages impaires. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Marges +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Marges" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Marges +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Marges +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les marges de la page sont modifiées dans +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous utilisez une classe de document +\series bold +KOMA-Script +\series default +, vous pouvez utiliser les +\family sans +Marges +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +implicites +\family default + car +\series bold +KOMA-Script +\series default + calcule la taille de la zone d'impression automatiquement en tenant compte + du format du papier et de la taille de la police de caractères. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Note importante +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous changez la classe d'un document, LyX doit +\emph on +tout +\emph default + convertir dans la nouvelle classe. + Ceci inclut les environnements de paragraphe. + Quelques-uns sont standard, du fait que toutes les classes de document + les possèdent. + Cependant, certaines classes ont des environnements de paragraphe spéciaux. + Si tel est le cas, et que vous changez de classe de document, LyX identifiera + comme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +inconnus +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + les environnements des paragraphes dont le style n'est plus reconnu. + Le nom du style est cependant préservé au cas où vous souhaiteriez revenir + à la classe originale, mais ces paragraphes apparaîtront sans mise en forme + particulière dans la version imprimable, et vous devrez donc soit créer + une nouveau style vous-même, soit convertir manuellement ces paragraphes + dans un style disponible dans la nouvelle classe de document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Indentation et séparation des paragraphes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraphe ! Indentation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Intro-indent-par" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avant de décrire tous les environnements de paragraphe possibles, nous voudrions + dire un ou deux mots sur l'indentation des paragraphes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Chacun semble avoir sa propre convention pour séparer les paragraphes. + La plupart des américains indentent la première ligne. + D'autres n'indentent pas mais mettent de l'espace supplémentaire entre + les paragraphes. + LyX utilise la même convention que les typographes. + Si vous choisissez dans +\family sans +Format +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte +\family default + l'option +\family sans +Séparer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paragraphes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +avec +\family default + et +\family sans +Indentation, +\family default + le +\emph on + premier +\emph default + paragraphe d'une section, ainsi qu'après une figure, une équation, un tableau, + une liste, etc., +\emph on +n'est pas +\emph default + indenté. + Seul un paragraphe en suivant un autre a une indentation. + Notez que la convention d'indentation peut être différente quand vous utilisez + une autre langue que l'anglais dans votre document +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +NdT: c'est en particulier le cas en français, voyez la documentation de + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "babel french" +target "http://www.google.com/url?sa=t&source=web&cd=1&ved=0CBoQFjAA&url=http%3A%2F%2Fdaniel.flipo.free.fr%2Ffrenchb%2Ffrenchb2-doc.pdf&rct=j&q=docimentation%20babel%20french&ei=4gtSTvnUE9OxhQf29eTDBg&usg=AFQjCNG9ANBp69Yi-oMNiKsFIzvUinm3qQ&sig2=vks2zUxQN7wEUzh2UB3fWA&cad=rja" + +\end_inset + + pour les détails sur la francisation. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + LaTeX s'assure que les indentations suivent les règles de la langue utilisée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'espacement entre les paragraphes, comme l'interligne, l'espacement entre + les en-têtes et le texte --- en fait, l'espacement entre quoi que ce soit + --- est prédéfini dans LyX. + Comme nous l'avons dit, vous n'avez pas à vous préoccuper de la quantité + d'espace libre à ajouter entre ceci et cela: LyX s'en charge. + En fait, ces espacements verticaux prédéfinis ne sont pas une simple quantité + mais une fourchette. + De cette façon, LyX peut rétrécir ou élargir l'espace entre les lignes + pour s'assurer que les figures s'insèrent dans une page avec du texte, + que les sections ne commencent pas tout en bas de la page, et ainsi de + suite +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En fait, c'est LaTeX qui s'en charge quand LyX lui demande de produire un + fichier imprimable. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Cependant, prédéfini ne veut pas dire que vous ne pouvez pas changer ces + valeurs. + LyX vous donne la possibilité de changer de manière globale +\emph on +tous +\emph default + ces espacements prédéfinis. + Nous expliquerons comment plus tard. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Séparation des paragraphes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraphe ! Séparation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour séparer les paragraphes vous pouvez choisir soit +\family sans +Indentation +\family default +, soit +\family sans +Espacement +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical +\family default + dans le sous-menu +\family sans +Format +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte +\family default + de la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans + Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\family default + il en résulte soit une indentation en début de paragraphe, soit un espace + supplémentaire entre les paragraphes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Réglage fin +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi changer la méthode de séparation d'un paragraphe donné. + Allez dans +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Paragraphe +\family default + pour ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue. + Cochez le bouton +\family sans +Indenter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Paragraphe +\family default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle" +\end_inset + +) pour changer le statut du paragraphe en cours. + Si les paragraphes sont indentés implicitement, ce bouton sera d'origine + actif. + Si les paragraphes ne sont pas indentés mais sont séparés par de l'espace + supplémentaire, ce bouton sera complètement ignoré (vous ne pourrez pas + indenter un paragraphe donné en le cochant). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous n'aurez besoin de changer la méthode d'indentation pour un paragraphe + isolé que si vous voulez faire de l'ajustement fin. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Changer l'interligne +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraphe ! Interligne +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans la fenêtre +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +vous pouvez changer, pour l'ensemble du document, l'espacement entre les + lignes dans la rubrique +\family sans +Format +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte +\family default +, champ +\family sans +Interligne +\family default +. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +setspace +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! setspace +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + doit avoir été installé pour utiliser cette fonction. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Vous pouvez le changer pour un seul paragraphe dans la fenêtre de dialogue +\lang english + +\family sans +\lang french +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Paragraphe +\family default + , mais ceci devrait être utilisé très exceptionnellement car l'espacement + vertical est normalement défini par le style de l'environnement concerné. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Environnements de paragraphe +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Environnements de paragraphe |( +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraphe ! Environnement +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Environnements-par" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +En résumé +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les environnements de paragraphe correspondent aux différentes séquences + de commandes +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +begin{ +\emph on +environnement +\emph default +} ... + +\backslash +end{ +\emph on +environnement +\emph default +} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +que l'on trouve dans un fichier LaTeX. + Si vous ne connaissez pas LaTeX, ou si le concept d'environnement de paragraphe + vous est complètement étranger, nous vous conseillons vivement de lire + le +\emph on +Manuel +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'apprentissage +\emph default +. + Ce dernier contient beaucoup plus d'exemples que cette section. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un environnement de paragraphe est, dit simplement, un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +récipient +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + pour un paragraphe qui donne à celui-ci certaines propriétés. + Ce peut être un style donné de police, un type de numérotation, des étiquettes, + l'autorisation d'hériter de certaines propriétés, et bien d'autres choses + encore. + Les différents environnements de paragraphe suppriment totalement tout + besoin de tabulations embrouillées, d'ajustement de marges à la louche, + et d'autres archaïsmes datant de l'ère des machines à écrire. + Il y a des environnements de paragraphe qui sont spécifiques à un type + de document particulier. + Nous ne traiterons ici que des plus communs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour choisir un nouvel environnement de paragraphe, utilisez le menu déroulant + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png + scale 70 + clip + +\end_inset + + situé à la gauche de la barre d'outils. + LyX change l'environnement pour +\emph on +tout +\emph default + le paragraphe dans lequel se trouve le curseur. + Vous pouvez aussi changer l'environnement d'un groupe de paragraphes si + vous les sélectionnez avant de choisir le nouvel environnement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que taper +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + crée +\emph on +en général +\emph default + un nouveau paragraphe dont l'environnement est +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + Nous disons +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +en général +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + car si vous êtes dans l'un de ces environnements : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Cite +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Citation +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Vers +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +ListePuces +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Énumération +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Description +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Liste +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX conservera celui-ci quand vous tapez +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +, plutôt que de le réinitialiser à +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + La profondeur d'emboîtement est également préservée (voir les détails sur + l'emboîtement dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Standard +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans la plupart des classes, l'environnement de paragraphe implicite est + +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + Il crée un paragraphe simple. + Si LyX réinitialise l'environnement de paragraphe, c'est celui-là qu'il + choisit. + D'ailleurs, le paragraphe que vous êtes en train de lire (comme la plupart + dans ce manuel) est dans l'environnement +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un paragraphe avec l'environnement +\family sans +Standard +\family default + peut être emboîté dans à peu près n'importe quoi d'autre, mais vous ne + pouvez rien emboîter dans un environnement +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Titre du document +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document !Titre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une page de titre LaTeX a trois parties : le titre lui-même, le nom du(des) + auteur(s) et une +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +note de bas de page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + pour les remerciements ou l'adresse. + Pour certains types de documents, LaTeX place tout ceci avec la date du + jour sur une page séparée. + Pour d'autres, la +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + de titre va en haut de la première page du document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX fournit une interface aux commandes de la page de titre par l'intermédiaire + des environnements de paragraphe +\family sans +Titre +\family default +, +\family sans +Auteur +\family default + et +\family sans +Date +\family default +. + Voici comment les utiliser : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +mettez le titre de votre document dans l'environnement +\family sans +Titre; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +mettez le nom de l'auteur dans l'environnement +\family sans +Auteur; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +si vous voulez que la date ait un format donné, ou si vous voulez entrer + une date fixée, ou si vous voulez autre chose à la place, mettez-le dans + l'environnement +\family sans +Date +\family default +. + Notez que cet environnement est facultatif. + Si vous n'en mettez pas, LaTeX insérera automatiquement la date du jour; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +si vous ne voulez pas de date du tout, utilisez l'option +\family sans +Supprimer la date implicite sur la première page +\family default + dans le menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Classe de document +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez utiliser des notes de bas de page pour insérer des remerciements + ou des informations supplémentaires. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +En-têtes +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:En-tetes-env-par" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En-têtes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a plusieurs environnements de paragraphe pour produire des en-têtes + de section. + LyX s'occupe à votre place de la numérotation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +En-têtes numérotés +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En-têtes ! Numérotés +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a 7 types d'en-têtes de section numérotés. + Ce sont : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Partie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Chapitre +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Section +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +SousSection +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +SousSousSection +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +Paragraphe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +SousParagraphe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX étiquette chaque en-tête avec une série de numéros, séparés par des + points. + Les numéros décrivent où vous êtes dans le document. + Contrairement aux autres en-têtes, les parties sont numérotées avec des + chiffres romains. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces en-têtes subdivisent votre document en parties. + Par exemple, supposons que vous êtes en train d'écrire un livre. + Vous découpez le livre en chapitres. + LyX fait un découpage similaire : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Les +\family sans +Partie +\family default +s sont divisées soit en +\family sans +Chapitre +\family default +s, soit en +\family sans +Section +\family default +s. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Les +\family sans +Chapitre +\family default +s sont divisé en +\family sans +Section +\family default +s. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Les +\family sans +Section +\family default +s sont divisées en sous-sections ( +\family sans +SousSection +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Les sous-sections sont divisées en sous-sous-sections ( +\family sans +SousSousSection +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Les sous-sous-sections sont divisées en paragraphes ( +\family sans +Paragraphe +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Les paragraphes sont divisés en sous-paragraphes ( +\family sans +SousParagraphe +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note : +\series default + tous les documents n'utilisent pas l'en-tête de +\family sans +Chapitre +\family default + comme niveau maximal de découpage. + Dans ce cas, la +\family sans +Section +\family default + est l'en-tête maximal. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ainsi, si vous utilisez l'environnement +\family sans +SousSousSection +\family default + pour dénommer une nouvelle sous-sous-section, LyX l'étiquettera avec son + numéro, ainsi qu'avec le numéro de la sous-section, de la section et, s'il + y a lieu, du chapitre dans lesquels elle est contenue. + Par exemple, la cinquième section du second chapitre de ce livre a l'étiquette + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +2.5 +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +En-têtes non numérotés +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En-têtes ! Non numérotés +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les en-têtes non numérotés sont dotés d'une étoile +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +* +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + à la fin de leur nom. + Sinon ils fonctionnent de la même façon que leurs homologues numérotés, + mais ils n'apparaissent pas dans la table des matières, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tdm" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Changer la numérotation +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Profondeur-section" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez également changer les niveaux de découpage qui seront numérotés + et ceux qui apparaîtront dans la table des matières. + Attention, cela n'enlève aucun de ces niveaux. + Ces paramètres sont définis par la classe de document. + Certaines classes commencent par +\family sans +Chapitre +\family default + et descendent jusqu'au niveau +\family sans +SousParagraphe +\family default +. + D'autres démarrent à +\family sans +Section +\family default +. + De même, toutes les classes de document ne numérotent pas les mêmes niveaux + de découpage. + La plupart ne numérotent pas +\family sans +Paragraphe +\family default + ou +\family sans +SousParagraphe +\family default +. + Vous pouvez changer ce comportement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ouvrez la fenêtre +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +sous +\family sans + Numérotation +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TdM +\family default + vous devriez voir deux glissières. + Celle intitulée +\family sans +Numérotation +\family default + contrôle jusqu'où LyX descend dans la hiérarchie du découpage pour numéroter + les en-têtes. + L'autre contrôle l'apparition ou non des en-têtes dans la table des matières. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Titres courts pour les en-têtes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En-têtes ! Titres courts +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Titres courts +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Titres-courts" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certaines sections ou chapitres, comme celle-ci, ont un titre qui peut être + un peu long. + Cela peut poser un problème si l'espace horizontal est limité. + Par exemple si les en-têtes de pages doivent contenir le titre de la section + courante, un titre trop long va dépasser dans les marges et sera horrible. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX vous permet de donner un titre court pour une en-tête de section, + en plus du titre normal. + Ce titre court est utilisé dans les entêtes de pages et dans la table des + matières, ce qui évite le problème cité. + Pour définir un titre court, utilisez le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Titre court +\family default +. + Cela va insérer une boîte marquée +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +opt +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (pour +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +optionnel +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir le texte de votre titre court. + Cette méthode fonctionne également pour les légendes à l'intérieur des + flottants. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le titre de cette section montre un bon exemple des l'utilisation de cette + fonction. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Information spéciale +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les informations qui suivent s'appliquent à tous les en-têtes de section + : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +vous ne pouvez pas y faire d'imbrication; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +vous ne pouvez pas utiliser de note en marge dans ces environnements; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +vous pouvez y insérer des math en ligne; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +vous pouvez utiliser les étiquettes et les références croisées pour faire + référence à leur numéro. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour des exemples de ces environnements de paragraphe : regardez autour + de vous ! Nous les utilisons partout dans les manuels. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Citations et poésie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX a trois environnements de paragraphe pour écrire de la poésie et des + citations. + Ce sont +\family sans +Cite +\family default +, +\family sans +Citation +\family default +, et +\family sans +Vers +\family default +. + Oubliez les jours sombres où vous deviez changer l'interligne et vous bagarrer + avec les marges. + Ces trois environnements de paragraphe incorporent ces changements. + Ils élargissent tous trois la marge de gauche et ajoutent un peu d'espace + supplémentaire au-dessus et au-dessous du texte qu'ils contiennent. + Ils permettent aussi l'emboîtement, ainsi vous pouvez mettre un vers ( +\family sans +Vers +\family default +) dans une citation ( +\family sans +Citation +\family default +), tout comme dans certains autres environnements de paragraphe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces trois environnements partagent une autre caractéristique: ils ne reviennent + +\emph on +pas +\emph default + à +\family sans +Standard +\family default + quand vous changez de paragraphe. + Vous pouvez donc écrire un poème et taper joyeusement +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + sans être ennuyé par des changements d'environnement. + Bien sûr, ça veut dire qu'une fois que vous en avez fini avec ce poème, + vous devez revenir vous-même à l'environnement +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Cite +\family default + et +\family sans +Citation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Citation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Citation" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Maintenant que nous avons décrit les similitudes entre ces trois environnements, + il est temps de dire ce qui les distingue. + +\family sans +Cite +\family default + et +\family sans +Citation +\family default + sont identiques sauf pour une chose: +\family sans +Cite +\family default + utilise de l'espace supplémentaire pour séparer les paragraphes et n'indente + jamais la première ligne. + +\family sans +Citation +\family default + indente +\emph on +toujours +\emph default + la première ligne d'un paragraphe et utilise le même interligne tout le + long. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici un exemple d'environnement +\family sans +Cite +\family default + : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Ceci est un environnement +\family sans +Cite +\family default +. + Je peux continuer à écrire, et allonger cette ligne de telle sorte qu'elle + revienne sur la ligne suivante. + Voyez : pas d'indentation ! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Voici le second paragraphe de cette citation. + Encore une fois, il n'y a pas d'indentation, mais il y a un interligne + élargi entre ici et le paragraphe précédent. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici finit notre exemple. + En voici un autre, cette fois avec l'environnement +\family sans +Citation +\family default + : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +C'est un environnement +\family sans +Citation +\family default +. + Si je continue à écrire, vous verrez l'indentation. + Si dans votre pays on utilise un style qui met en évidence un nouveau paragraph +e en indentant la première ligne, alors c'est l'environnement qu'il vous + faut ! En fait, vous ne devriez l'utiliser que si vous citez un texte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Voici un nouveau paragraphe. + Je pourrais continuer mon verbiage, comme un politicien en période d'élection. + Mais ça vous ennuierait sans doute. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +C'était notre deuxième exemple. + Comme le montrent les exemples, +\family sans +Cite +\family default + est fait pour ceux qui séparent les paragraphes avec un interligne supplémentai +re, et qui devraient utiliser +\family sans +Cite +\family default + pour leurs citations. + Ceux qui utilisent l'indentation pour la séparation des paragraphes devraient + citer avec +\family sans +Citation +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Vers +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Poésie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraphe ! Vers +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Vers" + +\end_inset + +Vers +\family default + est un environnement de paragraphe pour la poésie, les rimes, les vers... + Voici un exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +C'est un vers +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Que je n'ai pas écrit à l'envers ! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Ça pourrait être bien pire. + La ligne pourrait être longue, très longue, tellement longue, si longue + qu'elle déborde sur la ligne suivante. + Ça semble correct sur l'écran, mais dans la version imprimée, les lignes + supplémentaires sont un peu plus indentées que la première. + D'accord, c'est devenu de la prose et ça ne rime plus. + Je plaide coupable. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Pour retourner à la ligne +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Et avoir un texte digne +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +NdT : Désolé. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Utilisez +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme vous le voyez, +\family sans +Vers +\family default + n'indente pas les deux marges. + Chaque strophe d'un poème est dans son propre paragraphe. + Pour séparer les vers, utilisez la fonction +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default +, +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Listes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Env-par-listes" + +\end_inset + +LyX a quatre environnements de paragraphe pour créer différentes sortes + de listes. + Dans les environnements +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default + et +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +, LyX marque les éléments de votre liste avec respectivement des puces ou + des numéros. + Dans les environnements +\family sans +Description +\family default + et +\family sans +Liste +\family default +, LyX vous laisse utiliser votre propre marqueur. + Nous allons présenter les détails de chaque type de liste après avoir décrit + les principes généraux qui s'appliquent à tous. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Principes généraux +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les quatre environnements de paragraphe pour les listes diffèrent des autres + environnements sur plusieurs points. + Premièrement, LyX traite chaque paragraphe comme un élément de la liste. + Taper +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + ne réinitialise +\emph on +pas +\emph default + l'environnement à +\family sans +Standard +\family default + mais conserve l'environnement actuel et crée un nouvel élément de liste. + La profondeur d'emboîtement est de ce fait conservée. + Si vous voulez conserver l'environnement de paragraphe mais réinitialiser + la profondeur d'emboîtement courante, vous pouvez utiliser +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +. + Si vus faites ceci au premier niveau d'une liste, vous revenez à l'environnemen +t +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez emboîter des listes de tout type l'une dans l'autre. + En fait, LyX change les marqueurs de certains éléments selon l'imbrication. + Si vous comptez vous servir de l'un des environnements de liste, nous vous + conseillons de lire aussi toute la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +ListePuces +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes ! ListePuces +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:ListePuces" + +\end_inset + +Le premier type de liste que nous allons décrire en détail est l'environnement + +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +. + Il a les propriétés suivantes : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +chaque élément a une puce ou un symbole particulier comme marqueur; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +LyX utilise le même symbole pour tous les éléments à un niveau de profondeur + donné. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +le symbole apparaît au début de la ligne; +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +les éléments peuvent être de n'importe quelle longueur. + LyX décale automatiquement la marge de gauche de chaque élément. + Le décalage est toujours relatif à l'environnement dans lequel la liste + +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default + peut se trouver; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +si vous emboîtez un environnement +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default + dans un autre environnement +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +, le marqueur change; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +il y a quatre symboles différents pour gérer jusqu'à quatre niveaux d'emboîtemen +t. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +voyez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" + +\end_inset + + pour des explications détaillées sur l'emboîtement. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Bien sûr, ces explications étaient aussi un exemple de liste +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +. + Cet environnement est bien adapté aux listes dans lesquels l'ordre n'importe + pas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous avons dit que des niveaux différents utilisent comme marqueurs des + symboles différents. + Voici un exemple des quatre marqueurs possibles: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +le marqueur pour le premier niveau de +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default + est un gros point noir, ou puce +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +NdT: C'est toujours un point noir qui apparaît à l'écran, mais le résultat + imprimé peut différer en fonction de la langue du document, comme c'est + le cas en français. + Il en va de même pour les marqueurs des autres niveaux. + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +pour le deuxième niveau, c'est un tiret, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +pour le troisième, un astérisque, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +pour le quatrième, c'est un point centré, +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +retour au troisième niveau, +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +au deuxième, +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +au plus extérieur. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce sont les marqueurs implicites pour une +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +. + Vous pouvez personnaliser comme ces marqueurs +\lang english +are displayed in the output +\lang french +dans la fenêtre +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default +, dans le sous-menu +\family sans +Puces +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez comme l'espace entre les éléments décroît lorsque la profondeur augmente. + Nous expliquerons l'emboîtement et tout ce que vous pouvez faire avec plusieurs + profondeurs dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Énumération +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes ! Énumération +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Enumeration" + +\end_inset + +L'environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + est un outil qui sert à créer des listes ordonnées et des plans. + Il a les propriétés suivantes : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +chaque élément est marqué par un numéro; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +le type de numéro dépend de la profondeur d'imbrication, +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +LyX compte les éléments à votre place et met à jour les marqueurs quand + c'est nécessaire; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +chaque nouvel environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + remet le compteur à un; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +comme +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +, l'environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + : +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +décale les éléments par rapport à la marge de gauche. + Les éléments peuvent avoir n'importe quelle longueur, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +réduit l'espace entre les éléments quand la profondeur d'emboîtement augmente, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +utilise différents types de marqueurs selon la profondeur d'emboîtement, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +vous permet jusqu'à quatre niveaux d'emboîtement. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + affiche des marqueurs différents pour chaque élément. + Voici comment LyX marque les quatre niveaux d'une énumération : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +le premier niveau d'une énumération utilise des chiffres arabes suivis par + un point; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +le deuxième niveau, des lettres minuscules entre parenthèses, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +le troisième, des chiffres romains en minuscules suivis par un point, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +le quatrième, des lettres majuscules suivies par un point, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +encore une fois, remarquez la diminution de l'interligne quand on avance + dans l'imbrication, +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +retour au troisième niveau, +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +au deuxième, +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +au plus extérieur. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez personnaliser le type de numérotation utilisé par l'environnement + +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Listes-personnalisées" + +\end_inset + +. + Une telle personnalisation n'est visible que sur la version imprimée, pas + sur l'écran de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a encore des choses à dire sur l'emboîtement d'énumérations. + Vous devriez +\emph on +vraiment +\emph default + aller lire la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" + +\end_inset + + pour en savoir plus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Description +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes ! Description +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Contrairement aux deux environnements précédents, la liste de type +\family sans +Description, +\family default +n'a pas de marqueur fixé, à la place LyX utilise le premier +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +mot +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + de la première ligne comme marqueur. + Voici un exemple: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Exemple: C'est un exemple d'environnement +\family sans +Description +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX typographie le marqueur en gras et le sépare du reste de la ligne par + de l'espace. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous vous demandez sans doute ce que veut dire +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +utilise le premier mot +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + La touche +\family sans +Espace +\family default + n'ajoute pas un caractère espace, mais sépare les mots les uns des autres. + Au sein d'un environnement de +\family sans +Description +\family default +, la touche +\family sans +Espace +\family default + utilisée au début de la première ligne d'un élément, dit à LyX de quitter + le marqueur et de commencer le texte de la description . +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comment faire si vous avez besoin de plus d'un mot dans le marqueur d'un + environnement de +\family sans +Description +\family default + ? C'est simple : utilisez une +\family sans +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Insécable +\family default +. + (Soit avec +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + + soit avec +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +insécable +\family default +. + Voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espace-Insécable" + +\end_inset + + pour plus d'informations.). + En voici un exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Second +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +exemple: qui montre comment mettre une +\family sans +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Insécable +\family default + dans le marqueur d'une liste de +\family sans +Description +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Emploi: vous devriez employer l'environnement +\family sans +Description +\family default + pour des définitions ou des théorèmes. + Utilisez-le quand vous voulez qu'un mot donné ressorte dans un texte qui + le définit. + Ce n'est pas une bonne idée de s'en servir quand vous voulez parler d'une + phrase complète. + Vous ferez mieux de prendre un environnement +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default + ou +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + et d'y emboîter plusieurs paragraphes +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Emboîtement: vous pouvez bien sûr emboîter des environnements de +\family sans +Description +\family default + les uns dans les autres, les emboîter dans d'autres types de listes, et + ainsi de suite. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez qu'après la première ligne, LyX indente les lignes suivantes en les + décalant vers la droite. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Étiquetage +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes ! +\family sans +Étiquetage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'environnement +\family sans +Étiquetage +\family default + est une extension LyX de LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme l'environnement +\family sans +Description +\family default +, l'environnement +\family sans +Étiquetage +\family default + a des marqueurs définis par l'utilisateur pour chaque élément. + Il y a quelques différences fondamentales entre cet environnement de liste + et les trois autres : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +marqueurs +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'élément LyX utilise le premier +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +mot +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + de chaque ligne comme marqueur d'élément. + Si vous voulez plus d'un mot comme marqueur, séparez-les avec une +\family sans +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +insécable +\family default + comme décrit plus haut. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +marges Comme vous le voyez, LyX définit des marges différentes pour le marqueur + et pour le corps de l'élément. + Le corps du texte a une marge de gauche plus importante, égale à la largeur + implicite du marqueur plus un peu d'espace supplémentaire. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +largeur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'étiquette LyX compare la largeur effective du marqueur et la largeur implicite +, et prend en compte la plus grande des deux valeurs. + Si la largeur effective est plus grande, alors le marqueur déborde sur + la première ligne. + En d'autres termes, le texte de la première ligne n'est pas aligné à gauche + avec le reste du texte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +largeur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +implicite Vous pouvez la modifier très facilement. + Vous pouvez ainsi vous assurer sans dommage que le texte de tous les éléments + d'un environnement +\family sans +Étiquetage +\family default + partage la même marge de gauche. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Pour changer la largeur implicite, sélectionnez tous les éléments de la + liste. + Ensuite ouvrez le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paragraphe +\family default +(bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +) +\family sans +, +\family default +dans la rubrique +\family sans +Largeur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'étiquette +\family default + le texte dans la case +\family sans +Étiquette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +plus +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +longue +\family default + donne la taille implicite du marqueur. + Vous pouvez utiliser le texte de votre plus long marqueur, mais vous pouvez + aussi utiliser la lettre +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +M +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + tapée plusieurs fois à la place. + Le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +M +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est la lettre la plus large et est utilisée par LaTeX comme une unité de + largeur. + En utilisant +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +M +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + comme unité de largeur, vous n'avez pas besoin de modifier le contenu du + champ +\family sans +Étiquette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +plus +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +longue +\family default + à chaque fois que vous modifiez un marqueur dans un environnement Liste. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +La largeur implicitement prédéfinie dans LyX est la longueur de la chaîne + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +00.00.0000 +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, égale à 6 M. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Utilisez l'environnement +\family sans +Étiquetage +\family default + pour la même chose que l'environnement +\family sans +Description +\family default +: lorsque vous devez faire ressortir un mot du texte qui sert à l'expliciter. + L'environnement +\family sans +Étiquetage +\family default + vous donne un autre moyen de le faire, avec une apparence finale différente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez bien sûr emboîter des environnements +\family sans +Étiquetage +\family default + les uns dans les autres, les emboîter dans d'autres types de listes, et + ainsi de suite. + Ils fonctionnent de la même manière que les autres environnements de liste. + Lisez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" + +\end_inset + + à ce sujet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a encore un trait de l'environnement +\family sans +Étiquetage +\family default + dont nous devons vous entretenir. + Comme vous le voyez dans les exemples, LyX justifie à gauche implicitement + les marqueurs d'élément. + Vous pouvez insérer des +\family sans +Ressorts +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontaux +\family default + pour changer le positionnement du marqueur. + Nous traitons les +\family sans +Ressorts +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontaux +\family default + plus loin dans la Section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" + +\end_inset + +. + Voici quelques exemples : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +Gauche La valeur implicite pour les marqueurs d'élément de +\family sans +Étiquetage +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Droite Un +\family sans +Ressort +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal +\family default + au début du marqueur le justifie à droite. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Centre +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + Un +\family sans +Ressort +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal +\family default + au début du marqueur et un à la fin le centrent. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Listes personnalisées +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Listes-personnalisées" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes ! Personnalisée +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour utiliser les fonctionnalités décrites dans ce paragraphe, vous devez + activer le module +\family sans +Liste personnalisable (enumitem) +\family default +dans les paramètres du document. + Ceci active le paquetage +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Énumérations personnalisées +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes ! Énumération ! Personnalisée +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +La numérotation implicite des listes numérotées peut être modifiée en ajoutant + un argument optionnel (menu +\family sans +Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Titre court +\family default +) au premier élément de chaque niveau de la liste. + Vous ajoutez alors la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +roman{enumi} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +en code TeX (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pour en savoir plus sur le code TeX, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Code-TeX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\emph on + enumi +\emph default + est ici le compteur pour le premier niveau. + La commande +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default + produit des numéraux romains minuscules. + Pour obtenir des caractères numéraux romains en capitales, il faut la remplacer + par la commande +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman +\series default +. + Pour des caractères arabes, utiliser +\series bold + +\backslash +arabic +\series default +. + Pour +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +numéroter +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + avec des caractères latins alphabétiques en capitales ou en bas de casse, + utiliser respectivement +\series bold + +\backslash +Alph +\series default + or +\series bold + +\backslash +alph +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + vous ne pouvez numéroter que 26 éléments avec des caractères alphabétiques + parce que ce mode de numérotation est restreint à des lettres isolées. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour modifier la numérotation pour les sous-niveaux de liste, remplacer + le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +i +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans la commande par le caractère romain numéral du niveau (enumi, enumii, + enumiii, enumiv). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici un exemple de liste avec une numérotation personnalisée: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +niveau 1; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +niveau 2, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +niveau 2, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +niveau 3, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +niveau 4. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Pour cette liste, les commandes suivantes ont été employées: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +où la commande +\series bold + +\backslash +emph{} +\series default + met la marque en évidence et la commande +\series bold + +\backslash +bf{} +\series default + la met en gras. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + quand vous modifiez la marque de niveau d'une liste, la modification s'applique + à toutes les occurrences de ce niveau, tant que vous ne la re-modifiez + pas (NdT: ce serait une pratique typographique discutable). +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Reprise des énumérations +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes ! Énumération ! Reprise +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les énumérations peuvent être reprises après des paragraphes intermédiaires: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +arabic{enumi}. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +premier; +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +retour à la numérotation implicite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +second; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Texte normal +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume +reprise. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour reprendre une énumération, utiliser le style +\family sans +Énumeration-reprise +\family default +. + Sa numérotation apparaît en bleu dans LyX pour indiquer qu'il s'agit d'une + reprise de liste et que la numérotation n'est pas correcte dans la fenêtre + LyX, mais qu'elle le sera dans la sortie. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + s'il n'y a pas d'énumération à reprendre, vous obtiendrez une erreur LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous voudrez peut-être reprendre la numérotation avec une numéro différent + de l'ordre naturel, ou bien vous voudrez repartir avec une nouvelle énumération + normale avec un marqueur défini. + Ceci est possible an ajoutant un argument optionnel au premier élément + de la nouvelle énumération; insérez la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +start=nombre +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +où +\emph on +nombre +\emph default + est la valeur que vous désirez à la reprise. + Un exemple: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +premier élément; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +second élément +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Énumération reprenant à une valeur donnée: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +start=4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +cette énumération commence à 4. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Espacement de liste +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes!Espacement +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans certains cas, vous voudrez obtenir un espacement vertical plus ou moins + grand entre les éléments d'une liste. + Par exemple, l'espacement est trop grand à votre avis dans ce cas: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +une liste à puces; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +avec un espacement standard. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez faire diminuer cet espacement en ajoutant un argument optionnel + au premier élément de la liste. + Ici, ajoutez la commande +\series bold +nolistsep +\series default + pour supprimer l'espacement additionnel comme dans cet exemple: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +nolistsep +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +une liste à puces; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +sans espacement vertical; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +additionnel. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour augmenter l'espacement, vous pouvez employer plusieurs commandes disponible +s avec le paquetage +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Pour en savoir plus, voyez la documentation, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a également de nombreuses commandes pour modifier l'espacement horizontal + et les retraits. + Voici un exemple dans lequel le retrait a été réglé à celui des paragraphes + du document et la séparation de marqueur à 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm pour que le marqueur apparaisse dans la marge: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent= +\backslash +parindent, labelsep=2cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +une énumération; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +avec retrait négatif. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Autre personnalisation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listes!Description!Personnalisée +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez également personnaliser les descriptions. + La commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font= +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +modifie la police de l'étiquette de la description, la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +style= +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +positionne le style de la liste. + Voici un exemple, où la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +est utilisée: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ionizing +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +radiation: +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that + are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore + ionizing them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Reference +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing + the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an + object, block of memory, disk space or other resource. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a beaucoup d'autres commandes et fonctionnalités présentes dans la + paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Voyez la documentation +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + + pour les détails. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Lettres +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lettres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Le paragraphe qui suit est traduit de l'anglais et est fondé sur les propriétés + de la classe +\family typewriter +letter +\family default +. + La classe +\family typewriter +lettre, +\family default + qui respecte la typographie usuelle des lettres en français, a un menu + des styles qui diffère de celui de la classe +\family typewriter +letter +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + et +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default + : résumé +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bien que LyX ait des classes de document pour les lettres, nous avons aussi + créé deux environnements de paragraphe appelés +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + et +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default +. + Pour utiliser la classe lettre, vous devez mettre les environnements de + paragraphe requis dans un ordre précis, sinon LaTeX s'étouffera avec le + document. + En revanche, vous pouvez utiliser les environnements de paragraphe +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + et +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default + à n'importe quel endroit sans problème. + Vous pouvez même les emboîter dans d'autres environnements, mais vous ne + pouvez pas y emboîter quoi que ce soit. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Bien sûr, vous n'êtes pas limités à utiliser +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + et +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default + pour des lettres. + +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default +, en particulier, peut être utile pour créer des titres d'article comme + ceux de certaines publications de recherche européennes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Emploi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Emploi-adresse" + +\end_inset + +L'environnement +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + met le texte en forme comme une adresse, style aussi utilisé pour l'ouverture + d'une lettre et la signature dans certains pays. + De même, l'environnement +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default + met le texte en forme comme une adresse justifiée à droite, ce qui est + utilisé pour l'adresse de l'expéditeur et la date du jour dans certains + pays. + En voici un exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Address +Mon_adresse +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Qui je suis +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Où je suis +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Quel jour sommes-nous ? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +C'était +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default +. + Notez que les lignes ont toutes la marge à gauche, que LyX règle de manière + à faire tenir le plus grand bloc de texte sur une seule ligne. + Voici un exemple d'environnement +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Qui vous êtes +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Où je vous l'envoie +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Votre code postal et votre pays +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme vous le voyez, à la fois +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + et +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default + ajoutent de l'espace supplémentaire entre eux et le paragraphe suivant. + En parlant de ça, si vous tapez +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + dans l'un de ces environnements, LyX réinitialisera la profondeur d'imbrication + et remettra l'environnement à +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + Ceci est logique, cependant, puisque +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + est la fonction +\family typewriter +break-paragraph +\family default +, et les lignes d'une adresse, prises isolément, ne sont pas des paragraphes. + Ainsi, vous vous servirez de +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + ou +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Passage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\family default +) pour commencer une nouvelle ligne dans l'environnement +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + ou +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Documents de recherche +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans la recherche, la plupart des publications commencent par un résumé + et se terminent par une bibliographie ou une liste de références. + LyX contient les environnements de paragraphe correspondants. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Résumé +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Résumé +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Abstract|see +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Résumé +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'environnement +\family sans +Résumé +\family default + ( +\emph on +abstract +\emph default + en anglais) sert à insérer le résumé d'un article. + Techniquement, vous +\emph on +pouvez +\emph default + utiliser cet environnement n'importe où, mais il est +\emph on +vraiment +\emph default + préférable de l'insérer au début du document, après le titre. + Également, ne vous embêtez pas à essayer d'emboîter un +\family sans +Résumé +\family default + dans quoi que ce soit d'autre ou l'inverse. + Ça ne marchera pas. + L'environnement +\family sans +Résumé +\family default + n'est utile que dans les classes de document +\family sans +article +\family default + et +\family sans +report +\family default + (ainsi que +\family sans +amsart +\family default +, qui n'est autre qu'une version spécialisée de +\family sans +article +\family default +). + La classe de document +\family sans +book +\family default + ignore complètement la présence du +\family sans + Résumé +\family default +, et ça n'aurait pas grand sens de mettre un +\family sans +Résumé +\family default + avec la classe +\family sans +lettre +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'environnement +\family sans +Résumé +\family default + fait plusieurs choses pour vous. + D'abord, il écrit l'en-tête +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Résumé +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, centré au-dessus du texte. + L'en-tête et le texte du résumé sont séparés par une interligne agrandie. + Ensuite, il typographie le tout dans une police plus petite, comme il est + d'usage. + En dernier lieu, il élargit un peu l'intervalle vertical entre le résumé + et le texte qui suit. + Voilà comment le document apparaîtra dans la fenêtre LyX. + Si votre document est de la classe +\family sans +report +\family default +, à l'impression le résumé occupera une page séparée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Commencer un nouveau paragraphe en tapant +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + +\emph on +laisse +\emph default + le paragraphe dans l'environnement +\family sans +Résumé +\family default +. + Vous devrez donc changer l'environnement vous-même quand vous aurez fini + d'entrer le résumé de votre document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Paragraphe-dans-l'environnement" + +\end_inset + +Paragraphe dans l'environnement +\family sans +Résumé +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous aimerions vous donner un exemple de cet environnement, mais nous ne + le pouvons pas directement, car ce document est de la classe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +book +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Nous avons dû nous contenter de l'illustrer sous forme de la figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Paragraphe-dans-l'environnement" + +\end_inset + + . + Si vous n'avez jamais entendu le mot +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +résumé +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + auparavant, vous pouvez sans danger ignorer cet environnement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +Bibliographie +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliographie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Environnement-biblio" + +\end_inset + +L'environnement +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default + sert à faire la liste des références. + Techniquement, vous +\emph on +pouvez +\emph default + utiliser cet environnement n'importe où, mais il est +\emph on +vraiment +\emph default + préférable de l'insérer à la fin du document. + Également, ne vous embêtez pas à essayer d'emboîter +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default + dans quoi que ce soit d'autre ou l'inverse. + Ça ne marchera pas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand vous ouvrez pour la première fois un environnement +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default +, LyX ajoute un large espacement vertical, suivi par l'en-tête +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Bibliographie +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Références +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, selon la classe de document. + L'en-tête est dans une grande police grasse. + Chaque paragraphe de l'environnement +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default + est une entrée de bibliographie. + Donc, taper +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + +\emph on +laisse +\emph default + le paragraphe dans l'environnement +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a une autre méthode, souvent meilleure, pour inclure des références + dans votre document, c'est d'utiliser une base de données BibTeX. + Pour une description détaillée de la façon dont LyX gère les bibliographies, + voyez la section +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliographie" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection + +\family sans +LyX-Code +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LyX-Code" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraphe ! LyX-Code +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'environnement +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default + est une autre extension LyX de LaTeX. + Il typographie le texte dans le style à chasse fixe. + Il traite aussi la touche +\family sans +Espace +\family default + comme une espace de taille fixe +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dans l'environnement +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default +, la touche +\family sans +Espace +\family default + est traitée comme une +\family sans +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Insécable +\family default + au lieu d'un marqueur de fin de mot. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + ; c'est le seul cas où vous pouvez taper des espaces consécutives dans + LyX. + Si vous avez besoin d'insérer des lignes vides, vous devrez encore utiliser + +\family sans +Ctrl-Entrée +\family default + (la fonction +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default +). + +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + sépare les paragraphes. + Notez cependant que +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + ne réinitialise pas l'environnement à +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + Donc, quand vous avez fini d'utiliser l'environnement +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default +, vous devez changer d'environnement vous-même. + D'autre part, vous +\emph on +pouvez +\emph default + emboîter l'environnement +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default + dans d'autres environnements. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici quelques subtilités de cet environnement : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +vous ne pouvez pas utiliser +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + au début d'un nouveau paragraphe (c'est-à-dire faire suivre un +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + d'un +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +vous ne pouvez pas faire suivre +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + d'une +\family sans +Espace; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +utilisez +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + pour commencer un nouveau paragraphe, vous pourrez alors utiliser une +\family sans +Espace, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ou utilisez +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + + à la place, +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +vous ne pouvez pas avoir un paragraphe vide ou une ligne vide. + Vous devez mettre au moins une +\family sans +Espace +\family default + dans toute ligne que vous voulez voir vide. + Autrement, LaTeX générera des messages d'erreur; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +vous ne pouvez pas obtenir les guillemets doubles de machine à écrire en + tapant +\family typewriter +" +\family default + puisque cela insérera de +\emph on +vrais +\emph default + guillemets. + Vous pouvez obtenir les guillemets doubles de machine à écrire avec +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "self-insert \"" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici un exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +#include +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +int main(void) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +{ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + printf("Hello World +\backslash +n"); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + return 0; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce n'est rien d'autre que le programme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Hello world ! +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + standard. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default + a un but : typographier du code, comme des sources de programme, des scripts + shell, des fichiers de configuration rc, etc. + Ne l'employez que dans ces cas vraiment très spéciaux où vous voulez sortir + du texte comme s'il provenait d'une machine à écrire +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Environnements de Paragraphe |) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Pour typographier des morceaux importants de code de programmation, utilisez + l'insert de listing décrit au chapitre +\emph on +Listings de code source +\emph default + du manuel des +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Emboîter les environnements +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Environnements ! Emboîter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX, considère le texte comme un bloc unifié avec un contexte et des propriétés + données. + Ce qui permet de créer un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +bloc +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + qui hérite des propriétés d'un autre +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +bloc +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Un exemple : les listes. + Vous avez trois éléments principaux, mais le point n°2 a deux sous-éléments. + Vous avez donc une liste +\emph on +dans +\emph default + une autre liste, avec la liste secondaire +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +attachée +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + à l'élément n°2 : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +un; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +deux; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +sous-élément n°1, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +sous-élément n°2, +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +trois. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comment mettre une liste dans une liste ? Désormais la réponse devrait vous + paraître évidente : vous les emboîtez l'une dans l'autre. + C'est assez simple d'emboîter un environnement. + Faites +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Augmenter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +profondeur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +liste +\family default + ou +\family sans +Réduire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +profondeur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +liste +\family default + pour changer la profondeur d'emboîtement du paragraphe courant (la barre + d'état vous dira à quel niveau d'emboîtement vous vous situez). + A la place du menu, vous pouvez utiliser les boutons de la barre d'outils + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + +\end_inset + + ou les raccourcis clavier bien pratiques +\family sans +Tab +\family default + et +\family sans +Shift+Tab +\family default + ou +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + +\family sans + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ou +\family sans +Alt-p +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Gauche +\family default + et +\family sans +Alt-p +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Droite +\family default +, si vous préférez. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + pour changer la profondeur d'emboîtement. + Ce changement concernera la sélection courante s'il y en a une (ce qui + vous permet de changer le niveau d'emboîtement de plusieurs paragraphes + à la fois), ou le paragraphe courant. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que LyX ne change la profondeur d'environnement que si c'est possible. + Quand vous essayez rien ne se produit si cette opération n'est pas permise. + En outre, si vous changez la profondeur d'un paragraphe, le changement + affecte tous les paragraphes emboîtés dedans. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mais l'emboîtement n'est pas limité aux listes. + Avec LyX, vous pouvez emboîter à peu près tout dans n'importe quoi, comme + vous allez le voir. + C'est pourquoi les environnements emboîtés sont un outil puissant. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ce que vous pouvez et ce que vous ne pouvez pas emboîter +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ce que vous pouvez emboîter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avant de vous lancer à la figure une liste d'environnements de paragraphe, + nous devons vous expliquer un peu plus comme marche l'emboîtement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +À la question de savoir s'il est possible d'emboîter un environnement de + paragraphe, la réponse est un peu plus compliquée qu'un simple oui ou non, + vous pouvez ou vous ne pouvez pas. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les environnements de paragraphe de LyX peuvent avoir trois comportements + relativement à l'emboîtement : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +pas emboîtable du tout; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +complètement emboîtable, vous pouvez les emboîter dans autre chose et vous + pouvez y emboîter autre chose; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +un dernier type d'environnement, que vous pouvez emboîter dans d'autres + environnements, mais dans lesquels vous ne pouvez rien emboîter. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici une liste des environnements avec ces trois comportements +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pour une raison inconnue, LyX vous permet d'emboîter dans les deux sens + à la fois +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default + et +\family sans +Abstract +\family default +. + LyX vous permet aussi d'emboîter +\family sans +Titre +\family default +, +\family sans +Auteur +\family default + et +\family sans +Date +\family default + dans d'autres environnements. + Nous vous recommandons de ne pas le faire. + LaTeX pourrait s'en offusquer. + Même si ce n'était pas le cas, ça n'a aucun sens d'emboîter ces environnements, + alors pourquoi essayer ? +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Non +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +emboîtable on ne peut pas les emboîter, ni y emboîter quoi que ce soit. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Bibliographie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Abstract +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Titre +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Auteur +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Date +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +Complètement +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +emboîtables vous pouvez les emboîter et y emboîter. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Vers +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Cite +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Citation +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +ListePuces +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Énumération +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Description +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Liste +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +LyX-Code +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +Emboîtables +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +quelque +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +chose vous pouvez les emboîter dans autre chose, mais ne pouvez rien y emboîter. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Standard +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Partie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Chapitre +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Section +\family default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +SousSection +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +SousSousSection +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Paragraphe +\family default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +SousParagraphe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Partie* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Chapitre* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Section* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +SousSection* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +SousSousSection* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + bien qu'il soit possible d'emboîter des en-têtes de sections comme +\family sans +Chapitre +\family default +, +\family sans +Section +\family default +, etc. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dans des listes, par exemple, il est fortement recommandé de ne pas le faire. + La raison est que l'objectif est de créer des documents bien structurés + qui suivent les règles classiques de typographie, et emboîter les en-têtes + de section viole ces règles. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Emboîter d'autres objets : tableaux, math, flottants, etc. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Emboîtements ! Tableaux, maths etc... +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a plusieurs objets qui ne sont pas des environnements de paragraphe, + mais qui sont quand même concernés par l'emboîtement. + Ce sont : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +les équations; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +les tableaux; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +les figures. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +( +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note : +\series default + Les figures et tableaux placés dans +\family sans +des Flottants +\family default +ne sont pas concernés. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Voir plus bas ou dans les sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Figures-Flottantes" + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Flottant-de-tableau" + +\end_inset + + pour plus d'informations sur les +\family sans +Flottants +\family default +.) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX peut considérer ces trois objets soit comme un mot soit comme un paragraphe. + Certes, vous ne pouvez pas insérer un tableau en ligne, mais vous pouvez + le faire avec les math et les figures. + Si une figure ou une équation est en ligne, elle suit le paragraphe qui + la contient. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Inversement, si vous avez une équation, une figure ou un tableau dans un + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +paragraphe +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + à lui, il se comporte comme un environnement de paragraphe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +emboîtable dans quelque chose +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Vous pouvez l'emboîter dans un autre environnement, mais vous ne pouvez + évidemment rien y emboîter. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici un exemple avec un tableau : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Élément Un +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +C'est le (a) et il est emboîté, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +C'est le (b). + Le tableau est emboîté dans le (a). +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +On ressort. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si nous n'avions pas du tout emboîté le tableau, la liste serait ainsi : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Élément Un +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +C'est le (a) et il est emboîté. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +C'est le (b). + Le tableau n'est +\emph on +pas +\emph default + emboîté dans le (a). + En fait, il n'est pas emboîté du tout. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +On ressort. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que l'élément (b) n'est non seulement plus emboîté, mais qu'il est + aussi le premier élément d'une liste ! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a un autre piège dans lequel vous pouvez tomber : emboîter le tableau, + mais ne pas aller assez profond. + LyX commence un nouvelle (sous-)liste après le tableau. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Élément Un +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +C'est le (a) et il est emboîté. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +a +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +c +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +d +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +C'est le (b). + Le tableau est en fait emboîté dans l'élément Un, mais +\emph on +pas +\emph default + dans le (a). +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +On ressort. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme vous pouvez le voir, l'élément (b) est devenu le premier élément d'une + nouvelle liste, mais d'une liste +\emph on +dans +\emph default + l'élément 1. + La même chose se serait produite avec une figure ou une équation. + Si vous emboîtez des tableaux, des figures ou des équations, assurez-vous + donc de les mettre à la bonne profondeur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Emploi et propriétés générales +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX peut réaliser un emboîtement jusqu'à six niveaux. + Le niveau n°6 est le plus élevé possible. + Voici un exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +niveau n°1 - le plus extérieur +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +niveau n°2 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +niveau n°3 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +niveau n°4 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +niveau n°5 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +niveau n°6 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Là encore, LyX gère un maximum de 6 niveaux, quels que soient les environnements + de paragraphe utilisés à un niveau donné +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Malheureusement, LyX ne fait pas respecter cette limitation. + Si vous essayez de la dépasser, LaTeX renverra des erreurs quand vous voudrez + obtenir le rendu final. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Ça veut dire que vous pouvez emboîter sur six niveaux une liste +\family sans +Description +\family default +, ou un environnement +\family sans +Vers +\family default +, etc. + Vous pouvez aussi mélanger les environnements, comme nous allons le voir. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a deux exceptions à la limite de six niveaux, et les deux sont présentes + dans l'exemple. + Contrairement aux autres environnements complètement emboîtables, vous + ne pouvez obtenir qu'un emboîtement à quatre niveaux avec les environnements + +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + et +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +. + Par exemple, si nous essayions d'emboîter une autre liste +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + dans l'élément +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +A. +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, nous aurions des erreurs +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Là encore, LyX ne fait pas respecter cette limitation. + Si vous tentez de la dépasser, LaTeX renverra des erreurs quand vous voudrez + obtenir le rendu final. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Quelques exemples +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Emboîtements ! Exemples +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le meilleur moyen d'expliquer ce que vous pouvez faire avec l'emboîtement + est de l'illustrer. + Nous avons plusieurs exemples d'environnements emboîtés. + Dans chacun, nous expliquons comment nous avons créé cet exemple, pour + que vous puissiez le reproduire. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Exemple n°1 : six niveaux et emboîtement mixte +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +1-a Niveau le plus extérieur. + C'est un environnement +\family sans +Liste; +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +2-a Niveau n°2. + Nous l'avons obtenu avec +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + suivi de +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMM +3-a Niveau n°3. + Cette fois, nous avons juste fait +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +, puis +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + deux fois de suite. + Nous aurions pu le créer de la même manière que le précédent, avec +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + suivi de +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Un environnement +\family sans +Standard +\family default +, emboîté dans +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +3-a +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Il est donc au niveau n°4. + Nous l'avons obtenu avec +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +, puis +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +, puis en changeant l'environnement de paragraphe à +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + C'est ce qu'il faut faire pour créer des éléments de liste avec plus d'un + paragraphe – ça marche aussi avec les environnements +\family sans +Description +\family default +, +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + et +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default + ! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un autre paragraphe +\family sans +Standard +\family default +, également au niveau n°4, obtenu juste avec +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +4-a Niveau n°4. + Nous avons tapé +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + et remis l'environnement de paragraphe à +\family sans +Liste +\family default +. + Rappelez-vous : on ne peut rien emboîter dans un environnement +\family sans +Standard +\family default +, c'est pourquoi nous sommes encore au niveau n°4. + Mais nous +\emph on +pouvons +\emph default + emboîter des choses dans le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +3-a +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +5-a Niveau n°5... +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +6-a ...et nous voilà au niveau n°6. + Vous devez savoir comment nous les avons obtenus. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +5-b Retour au niveau n°5. + Tapez +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + puis +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +4-b Après un autre +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + suivi de +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +, retour au niveau n°4. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +3-b Retour au niveau n°3. + Les choses vont maintenant de soi. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +2-b Retour au niveau n°2. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +1-b Enfin, retour au niveau le plus extérieur, le n°1. + À la fin de cette phrase, nous allons taper +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + et remettre l'environnement de paragraphe sur +\family sans +Standard +\family default + pour marquer la fin de la liste. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voilà c'est fait ! Nous aurions aussi pu utiliser les environnements +\family sans +Description +\family default +, +\family sans +Cite +\family default +, +\family sans +Citation +\family default + ou même +\family sans +Vers +\family default + à la place de +\family sans +Liste +\family default +. + L'exemple aurait été exactement le même. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Exemple n°2 : Héritage +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +Voici un environnement LyX-Code, au niveau n°1, +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +le plus extérieur. + Nous allons taper +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +, +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +puis +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +, après quoi nous allons passer +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +à l'environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Voici l'environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +, au niveau n°2. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Notez comment l'environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +emboîté hérite non seulement des marges +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +de son environnement parent ( +\family sans +LyX-Code +\family default +), +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +mais aussi de sa police et de son interligne ! +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Nous avons terminé cet exemple en tapant +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +. + Ensuite nous avons remis l'environnement de paragraphe à +\family sans +Standard +\family default +, et réinitialisé la profondeur d'emboîtement avec +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Exemple n°3 : Marqueurs de liste et niveaux dans les environnements Énumération + et ListePuces +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Exemple n°3 : Marqueurs et niveaux dans d'autres Listes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Voici le niveau n°1 d'un environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +. + Nous allons en emboîter un paquet. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Voici le niveau n°2. + Nous avons fait +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + suivi de +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +. + Que se passe-t-il si nous y emboîtons un environnement +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +? Il sera au niveau n°3, mais quel marqueur aura-t-il ? Un astérisque ? +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Non ! C'est une puce. + C'est le +\emph on +premier +\emph default + environnement +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +, même s'il est au niveau n°3. + Son marqueur est donc une puce (NB : nous sommes arrivés ici en tapant + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +, puis +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +, puis en changeant l'environnement à +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +); +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +Voici le niveau n°4, obtenu avec +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +, puis +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +. + Nous allons recommencer... +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +...pour passer au niveau n°5. + Mais cette fois, nous avons aussi remis l'environnement de paragraphe à + +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +. + Notez le type de numérotation ! C'est un +\emph on +chiffre romain en minuscule +\emph default +, car c'est le +\emph on +troisième +\emph default + environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + (c'est-à-dire un +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + dans un +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + dans un +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Que se passe-t-il si nous ne changeons +\emph on +pas +\emph default + l'environnement de paragraphe, mais diminuons la profondeur d'emboîtement + ? Quelle type de numérotation LyX utilise-t-il ? +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Au fait, vous aurez deviné que nous utilisons +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + pour conserver le même environnement et la même profondeur mais créer un + nouvel élément. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Faisons +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + pour diminuer la profondeur après le prochain +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +C'est le niveau n°4. + Voyez quel marqueur utilise LyX ! +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +C'est le niveau n°3. + Même si nous avons changé de niveau, LyX utilise encore un chiffre romain + en minuscule comme marqueur. + Pourquoi ?! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Parce que, même si la profondeur d'emboîtement a changé, le paragraphe est + +\emph on +toujours +\emph default + le troisième environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +. + Notez que LyX a quand même remis le compteur de la numérotation à zéro. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Après un autre +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + suivi de +\family sans +Alt-p +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Gauche +\family default +, nous voilà de retour au niveau n°2. + Cette fois, nous n'avons pas seulement changé la profondeur d'emboîtement, + nous sommes en même temps retournés au deuxième environnement +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +Nous obtenons la même chose avec une autre suite +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + +\family sans + +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + et sommes revenus au niveau n°1, le plus extérieur. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enfin, nous remettons l'environnement à +\family sans +Standard +\family default +. + Comme vous le voyez, ce n'est pas le numéro du niveau qui détermine le + type de marqueur utilisé par LyX dans les environnements +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + et +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +. + C'est le nombre d'autres environnements +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + qui l'entourent qui détermine le type de numérotation dans un élément +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +. + La même règle s'applique aux environnements +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Exemple n°4 : péter les plombs +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Cette fois nous allons devenir complètement fous. + Nous n'allons pas aller aussi profond que dans les autres exemples, ni + n'allons entrer autant dans les détails de l'élaboration (niveau n°1 : + +\family sans +Énumération +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +( +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +, +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +, +\family sans +Standard +\family default + : niveau n°2) Nous allons mettre entre parenthèses la description du processus. + Par exemple, les deux raccourcis clavier montrent comment nous avons changé + la profondeur. + Le nom d'environnement est bien sûr celui de l'environnement actuel. + Nous indiquerons aussi le niveau, avant ou après. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +( +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +, +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + : niveau n°1) C'est l'élément suivant dans la liste. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Verse +Nous ajoutons des vers. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Ça n'arrange pas nos affaires. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +( +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +, +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +, +\family sans +Vers +\family default + : niveau n°2) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +PooPooPiDoo ! +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +Voici un tableau : +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +un poisson +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +deux poissons +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +poisson rouge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +poisson bleu +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Verse +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +, +\family sans +Tableau +\family default +, +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + 3 fois, +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +, +\family sans +Vers +\family default +, +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +( +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +, +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + : niveau n°1) Un autre élément. + Notez que sélectionner un +\family sans +Tableau +\family default + remet la profondeur au niveau n°1, nous avons donc dû augmenter la profondeur + 2 fois pour mettre le tableau dans l'environnement +\family sans +Vers +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Nous en avons terminé avec liste +\family sans +Énumération +\family default + et passons à +\family sans +Citation +\family default +. + Nous sommes toujours au niveau n°1. + Nous voulons vous montrer quelques-unes des choses que vous pouvez faire + en mélangeant les environnements. + Les paragraphes qui suivent constituent une +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +lettre citée +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Nous allons emboîter les environnements +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + et +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default + dans celui-ci, puis utiliser un autre +\family sans +Citation +\family default + emboîté pour le corps de la lettre. + Nous utilisons +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + pour préserver la profondeur. + Rappelez-vous que vous pouvez utiliser +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + pour entrer plusieurs lignes dans les environnement +\family sans +Envoi à l'adresse +\family default + et +\family sans +Mon_Adresse +\family default +. + Les voici : +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Right Address +123, allée de Nulle Part +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +01001 TRIFOUILLIS les Oies +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +01/01/2000 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +Cher M. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Dupont, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Nous sommes au regret de vous annoncer que nous ne pouvons faire suite à + votre commande de 50 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +L de gaz méthane comprimé, en raison de circonstances indépendantes de notre + volonté. + Une de nos vaches ayant explosé pour des raisons inconnues, nous commandes + de méthane ont pris un certain retard. + Nous vous avons placé sur la liste d'attente et vous expédierons votre + commande dès que possible. + Nous vous transmettons toutes nos excuses. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +Nous pouvons vous faire bénéficier de rabais importants sur le bœuf. + Si vous êtes intéressé, veuillez renvoyer le bon de commande ainsi que + le paiement à l'adresse indiquée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +En vous remerciant par avance, +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Tryphon Tournesol +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Quotation +Fin de l'exemple ! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous voyez que l'emboîtement d'environnements vous offre de nombreuses possibili +tés en peu de touches. + Nous aurions facilement pu emboîter une liste +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default + dans un +\family sans +Citation +\family default + ou un +\family sans +Cite +\family default +, ou mettre un +\family sans +Cite +\family default + dans une liste +\family sans +ListePuces +\family default +. + Vous avez une énorme variété d'options à votre disposition. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Espaces, pagination et sauts de lignes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espaces +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un blanc est-il un blanc? Pas si on fait de la bonne typographie. + Alors que vous êtes peut-être habitués à appuyer sur la barre d'espace + à chaque fois que vous voulez séparer deux mots dans un traitement de texte + ordinaire, LyX vous offre toute une variété d'espaces : des espaces de + largeur différentes, sécables ou insécables à la fin des lignes. + Les sections qui suivent vont vous montrer où ces espaces peuvent être + utiles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Espace insécable +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espace-Insécable" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espace ! Insécable +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'espace insécable est utilisé pour indiquer à LyX (et donc à LaTeX) de + ne pas insérer un saut de ligne à cet endroit. + Il peut être utilisé pour éviter les sauts de ligne malencontreux, comme + celui-ci: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +Pour plus de documentation voir dans la section +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliographie" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il semble évident qu'il serait judicieux de mettre une espace insécable + entre +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +section +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliographie" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + On crée une espace insécable grâce au menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espace +\bar under + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\bar default +insécable +\family default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Espacement horizontal +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espace ! Horizontal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Tous les espace horizontaux peuvent être insérés grâce au menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espacement horizontal +\family default +. + Les unités de longueur utilisées sont listées dans l'appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Unités-de-longueur" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Espace inter-mots +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espace-inter-mots" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espace ! Inter-mots +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certaines langues comme l'anglais suivent la convention typographique d'ajouter + un espace supplémentaire après la marque de ponctuation de fin de phrase + et LyX respecte cette règle, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Abbreviations" + +\end_inset + + pour examples. + +\lang english +However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation + followed by a period +\lang french +. + Dans ce cas, on en insère un avec le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +entre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mots +\family default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "space-insert normal" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Espace fine +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espace-Fine" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espace ! Fine +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +espace fine +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est un blanc qui fait la moitié de la taille d'une espace normale (en plus, + elle est aussi insécable). + Les conventions typographiques proposent dans de nombreux langues d'utiliser + des espaces fines quand une espace normale serait trop grande, comme par + exemple dans des abréviations : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +D. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +E. + Knuth a développé notre programme de typographie bien aimé, c. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +d. + TeX +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En principe on écrit c.-à-d., sans espace, mais bon ... + (NdT) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On l'utilise aussi entre une valeur numérique et son unité. + Comparez ces deux exemple : +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +10 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +kg (espace fine) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +10 kg (espace normale) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'espace fine s'insère en passant par le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espace +\bar under + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\bar default +fine +\family default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "space-insert thin" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Encore plus d'espaces +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi insérer les types d'espaces suivants: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fine +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +négative Une ligne avec +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + une espace fine négative entre les flèches. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) Une ligne avec une +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \enskip{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + espace En (0,5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) entre les flèches. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cadratin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) Une ligne avec une +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \quad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + espace cadratin (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) entre les flèches. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +double +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cadratin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) Une ligne avec une +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \qquad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + espace double cadratin (2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) entre les flèches. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +personnalisé Une ligne avec une +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hspace{} +\length 2cm +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + + espace de 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cm entre les flèches. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le tableau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Largeur-des-différents" + +\end_inset + + liste les tailles des différents espacements horizontaux. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Largeur-des-différents" + +\end_inset + +Largeur des différents espacements horizontaux. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +commande +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +largeur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Normal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Insécable +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fine +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espace en +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cadratin (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Double cadratin (2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Négative fine +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +-1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ressorts horizontaux +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacements ! Ressorts horizontaux +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les ressorts horizontaux sont des éléments spéciaux de LyX qui permettent + d'ajouter des espaces supplémentaires de façon uniforme. + Un Ressort est en fait une espace de taille variable, dont la longueur + est toujours égale à l'espace qui reste entre la marge de gauche et la + marge de droite. + S'il y a plus d'un ressort sur une ligne, ils se séparent l'espace restant + de façon égale entre eux. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici quelques exemple de ce que l'on peut faire avec ces ressorts : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Ça, c'est à gauche +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Ça, c'est à droite +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Gauche +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Milieu +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Droite +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +Gauche +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +1/3 Gauche +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +Droite +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +C'était un exemple en utilisant l'environnement +\family sans +. + +\family default +Ici +\begin_inset Formula $\to$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\gets$ +\end_inset + +on en a un en plein milieu d'un paragraphe standard. + C'est peut-être visible ou pas dans la version imprimée, mais il est bien + juste entre les deux flèches. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les ressorts horizontaux peuvent être rendus visibles en choisissant un + des +\family sans +Modèles de remplissage +\family default + dans la fenêtre de dialogue Paramètres d'espacement horizontal. + Les modèles suivants sont disponibles: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Points: +\begin_inset space \dotfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Filet: +\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Flèche gauche: +\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Flèche droite: +\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Accolade vers le haut: +\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Accolade vers le bas: +\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + si un ressort se trouve au début d'une ligne qui n'est +\emph on +pas +\emph default + la première ligne d'un paragraphe, LyX l'ignore. + Cela évite que des ressorts se retrouvent reportés accidentellement à la + ligne suivante. + Si vous avez vraiment besoin d'espace dans ce cas, vous devez utiliser + l'option +\family sans +Protégé +\family default + dans la fenêtre de dialogue des espacements horizontaux. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Espace fantôme +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espace-fantôme" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Parfois, vous avez besoin d'insérer un espace qui a exactement la même longueur + qu'une phrase donnée. + Par exemple vous voulez créer cette question à choix multiples: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +Quelle est la tournure anglaise correcte?: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge would have been jumps the gun. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\lang english +Mr. + Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +has to be jumped +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\lang english +Mr. + Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +jumps +\lang french + +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il faut que les choix apparaissent exactement après la phrase +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Pour obtenir cet effet, vous pouvez utiliser les insert fantômes accessibles + par le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fantôme. + +\family default +Dans notre exemple, il faut insérer un fantôme horizontal au début des deux + dernières lignes et insérer +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Mr +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans l'insert fantôme (notez l'espace après +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). + Un insert fantôme n'imprime que l'espace occupé par son contenu (comme + un espace réservé), c'est pourquoi il est dénommé +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +fantôme +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Le fantôme normal occupe la largeur et la hauteur de son contenu, tandis + que les fantômes horizontal et vertical ne gèrent que la dimension concernée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Espacement vertical +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Espacement-Vertical" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour ajouter un espace supplémentaire au-dessus ou au-dessous d'un paragraphe, + utilisez la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espacement +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical +\family default +. + Vous aurez le choix dans les tailles suivantes : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Petit +\family default +, +\family sans +Moyen +\family default + and +\family sans +Grand +\family default + sont des tailles LaTeX qui dépendent de la taille de fonte du document. + +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + est l'espacement défini dans le dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\lang french + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + pour la séparation des paragraphes. + Si vous utilisez l'indentation pour séparer les paragraphes, alors +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + est égal à +\family sans +Moyen +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Ressort +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espacement ! Ressort vertical +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + est un espace de taille variable qui s'ajuste pour prendre le plus d'espace + possible sur la page. + Un exemple: Vous avez seulement deux paragraphes courts sur une page et + un ressort vertical entre les deux. + Le premier paragraphe sera alors placé tout en haut de la page et le second + tout en bas, de façon à ce que l'espace entre les deux soit maximal. + Le +\family sans +Ressort +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical +\family default + fonctionne comme le +\family sans +Ressort +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal +\family default +: il remplit l'espace vertical restant sur la page avec un espace vide +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Les +\family sans +ressorts +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontaux +\family default + sont décrits dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + S'il y a plusieurs +\family sans +Ressorts +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +verticaux +\family default + sur une page, ils des répartissent l'espace vertical restant en parts égales. + Vous pouvez donc utiliser des ressorts pour centrer du texte sur une page, + ou même pour le placer au 2/3 de la page. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Personnalisé +\family default + permet de donner la taille de l'espacement vertical en utilisant les unités + de longueur définies dans l'appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Unités-de-longueur" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + si l'espace vertical supplémentaire se retrouve à l'impression en haut + ou en bas de page, l'espace n'est réellement ajouté que si vous avez aussi + coché l'option +\family sans +Protégé +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Alignement des paragraphes +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraphe ! Alignement +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez modifier la justification des paragraphes avec la fenêtre de + dialogue +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres de paragraphe +\family default + (bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). + Il y a cinq possibilités: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Justifié +\family default +(raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align block" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +À +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Gauche +\family default +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align left" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +À +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Droite +\family default +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align right" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Centré +\family default +( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align center" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align default" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans la plupart des cas le comportement implicite est l'alignement justifié, + dans lequel l'espace entre les mots est variable et chaque ligne d'un paragraph +e remplit la région située entre la marge de gauche et la marge de droite. + Les trois autre types d'alignements devraient être explicites. + Il ressemblent à ceci: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align right +Ce paragraphe est aligné à droite, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +celui-ci est centré, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align left +et celui-là est aligné à gauche. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Sauts de page forcés +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Sauts-de-Page" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sauts de page +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous n'aimez pas la façon dont LaTeX fait les sauts de pages dans votre + document, vous pouvez forcer un saut de page à l'endroit où vous en voulez + un. + Normalement ce n'est pas nécessaire, vu que LaTeX est plutôt bon pour les + sauts de pages. + Il n'y a que si vous utilisez beaucoup de +\family sans +Flottants +\family default + que son algorithme peut se planter. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous recommandons de ne pas utiliser de sauts de pages forcés avant que + le texte soit fini et donc avant d'avoir vérifié avec le pré-visionnement + pour voir si vous avez +\emph on +vraiment +\emph default + besoin de changer les sauts de pages. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a deux sortes de sauts de page. + Le premier termine la page sans entreprendre d'action spéciale. + Il peut être inséré avant ou après un paragraphe avec le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Saut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page (fer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +haut) +\family default +. + Le second type, qui est inséré avec +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Saut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page (justifié), +\family default + termine la page, mais il étend le contenu de la page pour qu'il remplisse + la totalité de la page. + Ce type est utile pour éviter d'avoir un espace vide quand un saut de page + produit une page où il ne manque que quelques lignes. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pourriez essayer d'utiliser un saut de page pour être sûr qu'une figure + ou un tableau apparaisse bien en haut d'une page. + Bien sûr, ce n'est pas la bonne façon de faire. + LyX vous donne le moyen de vous assurer de façon automatique que vos figures + et vos tableaux apparaissent en haut de page ( ou en bas de page ou encore + sur une page à part ) sans avoir à se préoccuper au sujet de ce qui précède + ou de ce qui suit. + Voyez le chapitre +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Flottants-et-Notes" + +\end_inset + + pour en apprendre plus sur les +\family sans +Flottants +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Saut de page (vide le tampon) +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Saut-de-Page-vide-tampon" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Saut de page ! vide le tampon +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Alors que le saut de page forcé va placer tout ce qui suit l'instruction + de saut sur la page suivante, la mémoire peut aussi être vidée en même + temps que l'on fait le saut de page. + Cela signifie que le paragraphe courant est terminé et que tous les flottants + provenant de parties du document précédant le saut de page et n'auraient + pas encore été traités, sont placés à la suite, en ajoutant une ou plusieurs + pages si nécessaire. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous insérez un tel saut de page avec le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Saut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(vide +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tampon) +\family default +. + Quand vous avez un document imprimé en recto-verso comme un livre, vous + pouvez utiliser le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Saut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +impaire +\family default +qui insère un ou deux sauts de pages, pour assurer que la prochaine page + soit une page de droite, donc de numéro impair. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Saut de ligne forcé +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Saut de ligne +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Saut-de-ligne" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme pour les sauts de page, il y a deux types de sauts de ligne. + Le premier saute simplement à la ligne, on l'insère dans un paragraphe + grâce au menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Passage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\family default + ou avec le raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +. + Le deuxième type de saut de ligne, qui est inséré avec +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Passage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +justifié +\family default + ou avec le raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert linebreak" +\end_inset + + va allonger la ligne d'origine pour qu'elle prenne toute la largeur entre + les deux marges. + Ce type de saut est nécessaire pour éviter des créneaux dans les paragraphes + justifiés à cause des blancs insérés à l'occasion des sauts de lignes. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous ne devriez pas utiliser des sauts de lignes pour corriger ceux de LaTeX, + vu que LaTeX se débrouille plutôt bien avec les sauts de lignes. + En revanche, il y a un certain nombre de situations où il est nécessaire + de forcer des sauts de lignes, comme par exemple dans un poème ou dans + une adresse (voir les sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Citation" + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Vers" + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Emploi-adresse" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Lignes horizontales +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Lignes-Horizontales" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lignes horizontales +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + +A partir du menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ligne +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontale +\family default +vous pouvez insérer des lignes horizontales. + Le décalage est la distance verticale entre la ligne et la base de la ligne + courante dans le texte ou le paragraphe. + Les réglages de la ligne peuvent être modifiés par un clic droit sur la + ligne. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Caractères et symboles +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez entrer directement tous les caractères qui sont disponibles + sur votre clavier. + Vous pouvez aussi utiliser des cartes de clavier spéciales pour pouvoir, + par exemple, saisir des caractères français avec un clavier anglais. + Voir la section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Cartes-de-clavier" + +\end_inset + + pour voir comment ça marche. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans le cas où vous avez besoin d'un caractère qui n'est pas sur votre clavier, + vous pouvez utiliser la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Symboles +\family default + grâce au menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Caractère spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Symboles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + vous ne pourrez peut-être pas afficher tous les caractères que vous insérez + grâce à la fenêtre de dialogue symboles si vous utilisez une police de + caractère d'écran spéciale dans les préférences de LyX. + Mais dans tous les cas les caractères insérés seront imprimés dans la sortie + finale. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Polices et styles de texte +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Polices-et-Styles" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Types de polices +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Polices ! Types +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fontes |see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Polices +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a deux types de polices de caractères +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +On peut parler indifféremment de police ou de fonte de caractères. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +polices +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vectorielles +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Polices ! Vectorielles +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + sont des polices qui sont construites à partir du contour de chaque glyphes + (ou caractère). + Cela signifie que chaque glyphe est défini en utilisant des courbes mathématiqu +es qui vont pouvoir s'adapter quelque soit la taille demandée. + Cette définition mathématique est interprétée par le programme de rendu + et la courbe est remplie avec des pixels pour représenter le glyphe à la + bonne taille. + Cela signifie que ces polices vectorielles auront un très bel aspect quelque + soit la taille demandée. + Il n'y a que pour les très petites tailles qu'il peut être difficile de + conserver un bon rendu, quand chaque pixel doit être calculé soigneusement + pour fournir une bonne image. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +On pourrait croire que l'on se contente de définir une taille de police + qui va pouvoir s'adapter à toutes les situations, mais en fait, pour atteindre + une meilleure qualité de rendu, plusieurs polices définissent plusieurs + tailles. + Cela améliore le rendu final, vu que l'on a besoin de plus de détails pour + une police de grande taille que pour une plus petite. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Les polices de type +\family typewriter +TrueType +\family default +, +\family typewriter +OpenType +\family default +, et +\family typewriter +PostScript Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\family default +sont des polices vectorielles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +polices +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +matricielles +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Polices ! Matricelles +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Polices ! Bitmap |see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Matricielles +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + au contraire, sont définies dès le début par des graphiques matriciels + (bitmaps), ce qui fait qu'il auront un bon aspect dans la taille pour laquelle + ils sont prévus. + Par contre, ils ne s'adaptent pas bien, puisque pour augmenter la taille + du glyphe, la seule solution est de changer la taille des pixels, un pixel + étant remplacé par un petit carré formé de plusieurs pixels. + C'est le même problème que celui qui apparaît quand vous voulez agrandir + une image à l'aide d'un programme de retouche. + Pour contourner ce problème les polices sont fournies en plusieurs tailles + fixées, typiquement de 8 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pixels de haut jusqu'à 34 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pixels ou plus, avec des valeurs intermédiaires pour les tailles les plus + utilisées. + L'avantages des polices matricielles est qu'il n'y a pas de calculs compliqués + pour afficher chaque glyphe, ce qui fait qu'elles sont plus rapides à afficher + que les police vectorielles. + Le réglage implicite est que les tailles qui ne sont pas disponibles doivent + être obtenues en démultipliant les pixels, ce qui donne un mauvais aspect + final. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Les fontes matricielles sont nommées +\family typewriter +PostScript Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\family default + dans les documents PostScript et PDF. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En conclusion, les polices matricielles sont très bonnes pour les tailles + pour lesquelles elles ont été créées, alors que les polices vectorielles + donnent de bons résultats pour quasiment toutes les tailles. + On a donc besoin de moins de définitions différentes avec les polices vectoriel +les, ce qui est la raison qui explique que presque tous les programmes de + typographie ou de rendu de caractères utilisent des polices vectorielles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour voir quelles polices sont utilisées dans un document PDF, vous pouvez + aller voir dans les paramètres du document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Plusieurs programmes modernes de typographie et des langages de descriptions + de pages à balises on commencé à se mettre à spécifier le style des caractères + plutôt que des préciser une police précise. + Par exemple, plutôt que d'avoir à choisir une version italique de la police + courante, vous allez utiliser du +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +texte mis en évidence +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + à la place. + Ce concept convient parfaitement à la philosophie de LyX où vous faites + les choses à partir de contextes plutôt que de vous focaliser sur les détails + typographiques. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Gestion des polices de caractères par LaTeX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +D'habitude, LaTeX utilise ses propres polices de caractères. + C'est-à-dire que vous ne pouvez pas accéder directement aux polices qui + sont installées sur votre système d'exploitation et que vous devez utiliser + les polices spécifiques fournies par votre distribution LaTeX. + La raison est que LaTeX a besoin d'information supplémentaire sur les polices + qui sont fournies par des fichiers ou des paquetages additionnels. + Le principal inconvénient est que le choix de police est limité, comparé + à celui proposé par les traitements de textes classiques. + D'un autre côté, on a l'avantage que les polices fournies sont généralement + de très bonne qualité et que les fichiers LaTeX sont très facilement portables + d'une machine à l'autre. + De plus, le nombre de polices acceptées par le LaTeX traditionnel a augmenté + de façon importante ce qui fait que vous pouvez trouver des paquetages + pour plusieurs polices libres et commerciales. + Du côté de LyX, seule une partie de ces dernières est directement accessible + grâce à l'interface utilisateur (voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Document-Polices" + +\end_inset + + pour plus de détails). + Toutes les autres polices sont néanmoins accessibles si vous entrez les + codes LaTeX correspondants dans le préambule du document (veuillez consulter + la documentation de la police que vous voulez utiliser ). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En plus, des évolutions récentes on vu apparaître de nouveaux moteurs de + rendu LaTeX qui sont aussi capables d'accéder directement aux polices de + caractères qui sont installées sur votre système d'exploitation, ce sont + XeTeX et LuaTeX. + Ces deux moteurs sont acceptés par LyX. + En les utilisant, vous pouvez théoriquement utiliser n'importe quelle police + TrueType ou OpenType qui serait installée sur votre système. + La section suivante décrit comment utiliser ces polices système. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + en pratique, certaines polices pourront ne pas fonctionner à cause de mauvaises + informations de métrique ou d'autres défauts; vous devez donc expérimenter + un peu. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + XeTeX plus particulièrement LuaTeX, sont encore assez récents et donc pas + aussi mûrs que le LaTeX traditionnel ou que PDFLaTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les polices du document et les tailles de polices +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Document-Polices" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Polices ! Taille +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Polices +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez choisir les polices de caractères du document avec la fenêtre + de dialogue +\family sans + Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Dans la rubrique +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Polices +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + de la fenêtre de dialogue, vous pouvez définir quelle police utiliser pour + les trois familles de caractères: +\family sans +Romain +\family default + (sérif), +\family sans +Sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +empattement +\family default + (sans sérif) et +\family sans +Chasse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fixe +\family default + (machine à écrire); vous pouvez également spécifier la taille de base des + polices, et les facteurs d'échelle de (quelques) polices sans empattement + et à chasse fixe si cela est nécessaire pour qu'elles s'accordent aux polices + romaines. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous sélectionnez +\family sans +Utiliser des polices non-T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +, vous pourrez accéder aux polices installées sur votre système d'exploitation. + Ceci requiert que vous utilisiez +\family sans +PDF (XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF (LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + ou +\family sans +DVI (LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + comme format de sortie imprimable, ce qui signifie qu'il faudra que soit + XeTeX, soit LuaTeX soit installé (voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + +). + Vous n'aurez plus accès aux polices TeX (dont une sélection est décrite + ci-après). + Notez que LyX affiche les polices disponibles dans n'importe laquelle des + trois variantes (romaine, sans empattement, à chasse fixe), puisque LyX + ne peut déterminer la famille. + Notez également que la sortie peut être incorrecte avec certaines des polices + proposées, du fait de leur encodage ou de l'échec des polices. + LyX ne peut déterminer ceci à l'avance, vous devrez peut-être faire des + essais. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous utilisez les polices TeX, les options pour le choix des polices + sont +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + et une liste de polices de caractères disponibles dans votre distribution. + Si vous sélectionnez +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + , la police pré-sélectionnée par la classe du document est utilisée. + Dans la plupart des cas, ce sera la police TeX standard, connue sous les + noms de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +Computer Modern +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ( +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +) ou +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +European Computer Modern +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ( +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +), mais certaines classes pré-sélectionnent des polices différentes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme les polices +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + et +\family typewriter +ec +\family default + sont des polices matricielles, elles ont souvent un aspect +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +pixellisé +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans les sorties en PDF, surtout si vous lisez les PDF dans une taille + agrandie. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ce problème ne devrait pas apparaître si vous utilisez +\family typewriter +Adobe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Reader +\family default + version 6 ou ultérieure pour lire vos PDF, puisque ce programme inclut + un module spécial pour le rendu des caractères +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Pour ne pas être ennuyé par les polices pixellisées, il faut utiliser une + police vectorielle. + Suivant l'apparence désirée pour le document, vous pouvez: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +sélectionnez les polices +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latin Modern (lm): +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + ceci est le choix recommandé si vous souhaitez conserver l'apparence de + polices +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cm/ec +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latin Modern +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + a été développée pour la communauté d'utilisateurs LaTeX en vue de remplacer + implicitement la police +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Ce choix couvre un grand nombre de glyphes et plusieurs formes de polices. + À quelques détails près, où l'apparence a été améliorée, +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latin Modern +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + apparaît identique à +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En particulier, le crénage est meilleur. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +sélectionnez les polices +\family typewriter +AE (Almost European) +\family default + dans le cas (rare) où +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latin Modern +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + n'est pas disponible ou ne fonctionne pas, si vous voulez toujours obtenir + une apparence +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cm/ec +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +AE +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + est une police virtuelle. + Virtuelle signifie qu'elle +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +emprunte +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + les contours des glyphes +\family typewriter +cm +\family default + des autre polices. + Le principal inconvénient est que certains caractères manquent à l'appel, + comme les guillemets français ( +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +« +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +» +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En chargeant le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +aeguill +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! aeguill +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + avec cette ligne dans le préambule du document +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[ec]{aeguill} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series default +le problème de guillemets devrait être résolu. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et aussi que les caractères accentués ne sont pas constitués d'un seul + glyphe, ils sont construits à partir de +\emph on +deux +\emph default +caractères, la lettre et l'accent. + De ce fait, si vous faites une recherche dans un document utilisant des + polices +\family typewriter +AE +\family default +, vous ne pouvez pas chercher des caractères accentués: si vous cherchez + le mot +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +brève +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans le PDF, vous n'aurez aucun résultat, du fait que le programme va chercher + le glyphe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +è +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +et pas le groupement +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +e + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + ̀ +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +si vous n'aimez pas l'apparence des polices cm/ec, sélectionnez une des + autres polices vectorielles fournies, par exemple +\family typewriter +Times Roman +\family default + ou +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Palatino +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + La plupart des polices vectorielles romaines sélectionnent automatiquement + les polices sans empattement ou à chasse fixe associées, mais vous pouvez + aussi sélectionner la vôtre. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Les différences entre les polices +\family sans +romaine +\family default +, +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +empattement +\family default +, et +\family typewriter +chasse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fixe +\family default + sont expliquées dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Réglage-fin-avec" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +La police +\family typewriter +Times Roman +\family default + a été crée à l'origine pour être utilisée pour les journaux. + Ceci signifie que ses glyphes sont plus petits que ceux des autres polices + pour pouvoir tenir plus facilement dans les petites colonnes des journaux. + La police +\family typewriter +Times Roman +\family default + n'est donc pas le choix optimal pour les document importants comme les + livres. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour les tailles de police, il y a quatre possibilités: +\family sans +Implicite, 10 +\family default +, +\family sans +11 +\family default +, et +\family sans +12 +\family default +. + Certaines classes proposent d'autres tailles. + La taille +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + dépend de votre système LaTeX mais elle est en principe égale à la taille + 10. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que ces tailles de police sont en fait les +\emph on +tailles de base +\emph default +. + Cela signifie que LyX va mettre à l'échelle toutes les tailles de caractères + qu'il utilise (comme celle qu'il utilise pour les notes de bas de page, + les indices et les exposants). + Vous pouvez effectuer des réglages fins pour la taille des caractères de + certaines portions du texte avec la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Texte +\family default + si c'est nécessaire. + Les différentes tailles de polices utilisables pour des portions de texte + sont décrites section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Réglage-fin-avec" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La sélection +\family sans +Famille implicite +\family default + vous permet de spécifier si la police de base de votre document doit être + romaine, sans empattement ou à chasse fixe. + La sélection +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + utilise ce qui est pré-sélectionné par la classe, les autres choix le remplacen +t. + Dans la plupart des cas, +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + veut dire +\family sans +romain +\family default +, mais certaines classes (comme celles permettant de créer des présentations) + utilisent d'autre choix implicites. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La sélection +\family sans +Encodage de polices LaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default + est un réglage pour utilisateurs experts, qui vous permet de modifier la + valeur transmise au paquetage LaTeX +\emph on +fontenc +\emph default + (voir aussi la section. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" + +\end_inset + +). + Normalement vous n'avez pas à changer (ni même à comprendre) ceci. + À moins de raisons particulières, sélectionnez +\family sans +Implicite +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec certaines polices, la case +\family sans +Utiliser des chiffres à l'ancienne +\family default + et +\family sans +Utiliser de vraies petites capitales +\family default + sont cochées. + Ce sont des fonctionnalités supplémentaires fournies par ces polices. + Si +\family sans +Utiliser des chiffres à l'ancienne +\family default +est coché, la police utilise un style ancien de chiffres (connu également + comme médiéval ou texte), i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des chiffres de hauteur variable qui s'accordent bien avec les lettres en + bas de casse. + +\family sans +Utiliser de vraies petites capitales +\family default + implique que de vraies petites capitales remplacent les petites capitales + simulées faites de capitales mises à l'échelle. + Les vraies petites capitales appartiennent souvent à des polices très élaborées +; elles ont une meilleure apparence que les petites capitales simulées, + mais peuvent devoir être achetées à part. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le champ +\family sans +CJK +\family default + permet aux utilisateurs des langues Chinoise, Japonaise et Coréenne (CJK) + de préciser une police pour afficher les +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +script characters +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +La police sera l'argument des commandes du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +CJK +\series default +. + Elle n'aura donc aucun effet sur un document en japonnais qui n'utiliserait + pas +\series bold +CJK +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + quand vous choisissez une nouvelle police ou une nouvelle taille de police, + LyX ne change +\emph on +pas +\emph default +la police utilisée à l'écran! Vous ne verrez la différence que dans la sortie + imprimée; c'est une conséquence du concept WYSIWYM. + Les polices d'écran de LyX peuvent être modifiées à partir de la fenêtre + de dialogue +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Préférences +\family default +, voir l'appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Fenêtre-Préférences" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Utiliser différents styles de caractères +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Styles de caractères +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dialogues ! Styles de caractères +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme nous l'avons déjà vu, LyX change automatiquement de style de caractère + pour certains environnements de paragraphes. + LyX gère aussi deux styles de caractères, +\family sans +Mise +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +évidence +\family default + et +\family sans +Nom +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +propre +\family default +. + Vous pouvez activer l'un ou l'autre de ces styles, en utilisant soit un + raccourci clavier, soit les menus, soit encore les bouton de la barre d'outils. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour activer le style +\family sans +Nom +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +propre +\family default +, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +cliquez sur le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +utilisez le raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces commandes sont toutes des bascules. + Ce qui fait que si le style +\family sans +Nom +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +propre +\family default + est déjà activé, elles vont le désactiver. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On utilise en principe le style +\family sans +Nom +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +propre +\family default + pour (devinez !) les noms propres, comme par exemple: +\noun on + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\noun default +Matthias +\noun on + Ettrich +\noun default + est l'auteur original de LyX. +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un style encore plus utilisé est le style de caractère +\family sans +Mis +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +évidence +\family default +. + Vous pouvez l'activer (ou le désactiver, ce sont aussi des bascules) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +en cliquant sur le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +en utilisant le raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En principe le style +\family sans +Mise +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +évidence +\family default + est l'équivalent d'une police italique, mais certaines classes de document + ou certains paquetages LaTeX utilisent une police différente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous utilisons assez souvent le style +\family sans +Mise +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +évidence +\family default + dans ce document. + En voici encore un exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation + +\emph on +N'abusez pas des styles de caractères! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En plus d'être un exemple, c'est un conseil. + Ce que l'on écrit doit ressembler à un dialogue ordinaire. + Et puisque nous ne passons pas tous notre temps à nous hurler dessus, nous + devrions aussi éviter la tendance naturelle à abuser des styles de caractères. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez à tout moment remettre la police au style implicite en utilisant + le raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-default" +\end_inset + + ou la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Personnalisé +\family default + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Réglage fin avec la fenêtre +\family sans +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Réglage-fin-avec" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dialogues ! Style de texte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Style de texte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a toujours des occasions où vous avez besoin de réglages fins, donc + LyX vous permet de créer des styles de caractères personnalisés. + Par exemple, une publication de recherche ou une entreprise peuvent avoir + une convention de style réclamant une police sans empattement dans certaines + situations. + De même, des auteurs utilisent parfois une police différente pour distinguer + les pensées d'un personnage du dialogue ordinaire. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avant de dire comment utiliser un style de caractères personnalisé, nous + voulons de nouveau répéter un avertissement : n'abusez pas des styles de + caractères. + Beaucoup de traitements de texte modernes disposent d'un vaste choix de + polices, vous offrant la puissance d'une presse d'imprimerie. + Malheureusement, on a tendance à abuser de cette puissance. + C'est comme utiliser un marteau-pilon pour écraser une mouche. + Les documents qui abusent des différentes polices et des différentes tailles + finissent par ne plus ressembler à grand chose. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Assez de récriminations. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour utiliser des polices personnalisées, ouvrez la fenêtre +\family sans +Personnalisé +\family default + en faisant +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Personnalisé\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\family default +. + Il y a plusieurs champs dans cette fenêtre, chacun correspondant à une + propriété de la police que vous pouvez ajuster. + Vous pouvez choisir une option pour chacune de ces sept propriétés, ou + sélectionner +\family sans +Inchangé +\family default +, qui laisse cette propriété telle quelle. + L'élément +\family sans +RàZ ( +\family default +Remise à Zéro +\family sans +) +\family default + remet la propriété à sa valeur implicite dans l'environnement de paragraphe + concerné. + Vous pouvez utiliser ceci pour faire une remise à zéro pour plusieurs environne +ments de paragraphe à la fois. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les sept propriétés de police et les choix possibles (en plus de +\family sans +Inchangé +\family default + et +\family sans +RàZ +\family default +) sont: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Famille +\family default + L'aspect général de la police. + Les choix possibles sont : +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Romain +\family default + C'est la police romaine implicite. + C'est une police avec empattements et c'est aussi la famille implicite + (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-roman" +\end_inset + +), +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +empattement +\family default + +\family sans +C'est la famille de polices sans empattement. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +(raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-sans" +\end_inset + +), +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Chasse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fixe +\family default + +\family typewriter +C'est la famille de polices à chasse fixe. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +(raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-typewriter" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Série +\family default + Correspond à l'épaisseur du caractère. + Choix : +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Maigre +\family default + C'est la série des polices maigres, +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +C'est aussi la série implicite. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Grasse +\family default + +\series bold +C'est la série des polices grasses. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +(raccourci clavier +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-bold" +\end_inset + +) +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Forme +\family default + Comme son nom l'indique. + Choix : +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Droite +\family default + C'est la forme droite. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +C'est aussi la forme implicite. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Italique +\family default + +\shape italic +C'est la forme italique, +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Inclinée +\family default + +\shape slanted +C'est la forme inclinée +\shape default +,(différente de l'italique, même si ce n'est pas très visible à l'écran), +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Petites +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +capitales +\family default + +\shape smallcaps +C'est la forme en petites capitales +\family sans +. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Couleur +\family default + vous permet d'ajuster la couleur du texte. + Notez que tous les visionneuses DVI ne sont pas capables d'afficher ces + couleurs. + En plus de +\family sans +Pas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +couleur +\family default +, +\lang english +which means that the document default color set in +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Color +\family default + for +\family sans +Main +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\family default + is used +\lang french +, vous pouvez choisir entre +\family sans +Noir +\family default +, +\family sans +Blanc +\family default +, +\family sans +Rouge +\family default +, +\family sans +Vert +\family default +, +\family sans +Bleu +\family default +, +\family sans +Cyan +\family default +, +\family sans +Magenta +\family default + et +\family sans +Jaune +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Couleur ! Texte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Langue +\family default + vous pouvez marquer des zones de texte comme étant rédigées dans une langue + autre que celle du document. + Le texte ainsi marqué sera souligné en bleu pour rappeler ce changement + (seulement dans LyX). +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Si vous avez par exemple un texte en langue allemande dans votre document, + LaTeX respectera les règles de césure allemandes automatiquement. + Lors de l'utilisation du correcteur orthographique (voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Correcteur-Orthographique" + +\end_inset + +), le texte marqué en allemand sera vérifié à l'aide du dictionnaire allemand. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Taille +\family default + Change la taille de la police. + Pas de valeurs numériques ici : toutes les tailles possibles sont en fait + proportionnelles à la taille de police implicite. + Là encore, vous ne donnez pas à LyX les détails, mais une description générale + de ce que vous voulez. +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Les choix (et leurs raccourcis clavier) sont: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Minuscule +\family default + +\size tiny +c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Minuscule +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\size default +(raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size tiny" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tout +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +petit +\family default + +\size scriptsize +c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Tout +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +petit +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\size default + (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size scriptsize" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Très +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +petit +\family default + +\size footnotesize +c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Très petit +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\size default + (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size footnotesize" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Petit +\family default + +\size small +c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Petit +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\size default + (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size small" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Normal +\family default + c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Normale +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + C'est aussi la taille implicite (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size normal" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Grand +\family default + +\size large +c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Grand +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\size default + (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size large" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Très +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +grand +\family default + +\size larger +c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Très grand(2) +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\size default + (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size larger" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Très +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +très +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +grand +\family default + +\size largest +c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Très +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +très +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +grand(3) +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\size default + (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size largest" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Énorme +\family default + +\size huge +c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Énorme +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\size default + (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size huge" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Très +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +énorme +\family default + +\size huge +c'est la taille +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Très énorme +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\size default + (raccourci = +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-size giant" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Augmenter +\family default + augmente la taille d'un niveau (par exemple, de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Très +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +très +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +grand +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + à +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Énorme +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size increase" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Diminuer +\family default + diminue la taille d'un niveau (par exemple, de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Normal +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + à +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Petit +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size decrease" +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous vous prévenons encore une fois: ne vous excitez pas avec cette fonction. + Vous ne devriez presque jamais avoir à changer la taille de la police. + LyX adapte automatiquement la taille aux différents environnements de paragraph +e. + Cette fonction n'est là +\emph on +que +\emph default + pour du réglage fin! +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Divers +\family default + Ici vous pouvez changer quelques autres propriétés des caractères. + Les choix sont: +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +En +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +évidence +\family default + +\emph on +du texte mis en valeur. + +\emph default + On peut croire que c'est la même chose qu' +\shape italic +Italique +\shape default +, mais en fait c'est un peu différent. + +\family sans +En +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +évidence +\family default +est un attribut +\emph on +logique. + +\emph default +Cela signifie que chaque classe de document peut définir sa propre police + pour le texte mis en évidence. + Normalement la police utilisée est la police italique; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Souligné +\family default + +\bar under +du texte souligné +\bar default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "font-underline" +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Évitez si possible d'utiliser les caractères soulignés! C'est un reste du + temps des machines à écrire, quand vous ne pouviez pas changer de police. + Nous n'avons plus besoin de faire ressortir du texte en le renforçant avec + le caractère de soulignement. + Il n'est inclus dans LyX que parce qu'il l'est aussi dans LaTeX, et que + certaines personnes peuvent en avoir besoin pour suivre les conventions + de style de certaines publications; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Souligné +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +doublement +\family default + +\uuline on +ceci est un texte avec soulignement double +\uuline default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-underunderline" +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Si nous avons émis de réserves sur l'usage du soulignement, vous vous doutez + de ce que nous pensons du soulignement double; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Vaguement +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +souligné +\family default + +\uwave on +ceci est un texte avec soulignement vague +\uwave default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-underwave" +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +N'utiliser que si la revue insiste absolument, et garder les comprimés contre + le mal de mer à portée de main; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Rayé +\family default + +\strikeout on +ceci est un texte rayé +\strikeout default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-strikeout" +\end_inset + +) Utilisé fréquemment pour marquer une version ancienne qui a changé depuis; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Nom +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Propre +\family default + +\noun on +du texte avec Nom +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Propre. + +\noun default + Comme +\family sans +En +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +évidence +\family default +, c'est un attribut logique. + Pour l'instant, il équivaut à +\family sans +Petites +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Capitales. +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +Vous avez donc le choix d'un grand nombre de combinaisons. + Quand vous avez choisi un nouveau style de caractères avec la fenêtre de + dialogue +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Personnalisé +\family default +( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +) +\family sans +, +\family default + les paramètres sont mémorisés et vous pouvez les réutiliser en utilisant + le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "textstyle-apply" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + Ce bouton applique de nouveau le dernier style de caractère que vous avez + utilisé, sans avoir à ouvrir la fenêtre de dialogue. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour retourner directement au style de caractères implicite, utilisez le + raccourci clavier +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-default" +\end_inset + +. + Si vous ne voulez rebasculer que les caractéristiques que vous venez juste + de modifier (supposons que vous venez de mettre la forme à +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +inclinée +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et la série à +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +grasse +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +), activez l'option +\family sans + Basculer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tout +\family default + et cliquez sur +\family sans +Appliquer +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est important que vous ayez une petite idée de la différence entre les + trois principaux types de polices : +\family sans +romaine, sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +empattement +\family default +, et +\family sans +chasse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fixe +\family default +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +chasse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fixe, +\family default +aussi appelée +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Machine +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +écrire +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est une police où tous les caractères ont la même largeur, le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +i +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + prenant autant de place que le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +m +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + C'est une police très utilisée pour les listings de code sources. + Voici un exemple: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family typewriter +no +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +texte à chasse fixe +\family default + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pour les détails sur les fantômes, voir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espace-fantôme" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +texte à chasse non fixe; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +romaine +\family default +, des polices qui utilisent des sérifs ou empattements, ces petits +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +appendices +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + que l'on voit à toutes les extrémités des caractères et qui en rendent + en principe la lecture plus facile et plus rapide. + C'est ce qui explique que ce soit la police implicite. + L'exemple suivant montre la différence: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +texte avec sérifs +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +texte sans sérifs +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +sans empattement, +\family default +des polices qui n'utilisent pas les sérifs, ce qui fait qu'elles sont plutôt + utilisées dans les titres et les en-têtes ou pour des textes courts. + Nous les utilisons dans ce document pour mettre en évidence les noms des + éléments de menus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Basculer +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + se rapporte au mécanisme de gestion des propriétés de polices. + Quand une propriété est marquée +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +à basculer +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans le dialogue des styles de caractères, appliquer le style à un texte + doté de la propriété aura pour effet de la supprimer. + Si vous appliquez un style doté des propriétés A, B et C à un texte qui + a les propriétés B, C, F et G, et si B est positionné sur basculer et C + n'est pas positionné sur basculer, le texte se retrouve doté des propriétés + A, C, F et G. + +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jamais basculés +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Toujours basculés +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + signifient que vous ne contrôlez pas le basculement. + Pour les propriétés situées à gauche de la fenêtre de dialogue ( +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Famille +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, etc.), le basculement dépend de vous. + Si +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Basculer tout +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + est coché, toutes les propriétés peuvent être basculées; implicitement, + aucune ne l'est. + Enfin, +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +RàZ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + n'est jamais basculé: si vous positionnez +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Série +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + sur +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +RàZ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et cochez +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Basculer tout +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, puis appliquez le style un texte en gras, le texte reviendra à la série + implicite ( +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maigre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +), quel que doit le nombre d'applications du style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous conclurons avec toujours le même conseil: n'abusez pas des polices + de caractères. + Elles peuvent rendre pénible la lecture de votre texte et en aucun cas + elle ne pourront remplacer un bon style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Imprimer et pré-visionner +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +En résumé +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Maintenant que nous avons traité certaines des opérations de base pour la + préparation d'un document avec LyX, vous voulez sans doute savoir comment + imprimer votre chef-d'œuvre. + Avant de vous le dire, nous voulons d'abord vous donner une brève explication + de ce qui a lieu dans les coulisses. + Nous en parlons aussi dans le manuel des +\emph on + Options +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +avancées +\emph default +, d'une manière beaucoup plus détaillée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX utilise en interne un programme appelé +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (en fait, LaTeX n'est rien d'autre qu'un ensemble de macros pour le système + typographique TeX, mais pour faire simple, nous allons appeler l'ensemble + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). + Tout se passe ainsi: LyX est ce que vous utilisez effectivement pour écrire. + Puis LyX fait appel à LaTeX pour transformer votre écrit en sortie imprimable. + Il y a plusieurs étapes : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +d'abord, LyX convertit votre document en une série de commandes pour LaTeX, + générant un fichier avec l'extension +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +.tex +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +ensuite, LaTeX interprète les commandes dans le fichier +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default + pour produire une sortie imprimable. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formats des fichiers de sortie +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formats de fichiers +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Texte brut (ASCII) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formats de fichiers ! ASCII +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.txt +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Il contient votre document sous forme de texte simple suivant le codage + ASCII ( +\emph on +American Standard Code for Information Interchange +\emph default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez exporter votre document en ASCII grâce au menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +brut +\family default +. + +\lang english +However, this will not export any externally generated material such as + a BibTeX bibliography +\lang french + (section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bases-de-Données-Biblio" + +\end_inset + +). + +\lang english +If your document includes such material, use +\lang french + +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +More +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formats +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Options +\lang french + +\family default +\lang english +and then select +\family sans +\lang french + Texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +brut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii) +\family default +. + Cette faisant d'abord une conversion en PostScript +\lang english + (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to + ASCII. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +LaTeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formats de Fichiers ! LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et contient toutes les commandes qui sont nécessaires pour que le programme + LaTeX puisse traiter votre document. + Si vous connaissez LaTeX, vous pouvez utiliser ce dernier pour trouver + des erreurs LaTeX ou pour traiter votre document manuellement avec des + commandes en ligne. + Le fichier LaTeX est automatiquement créé dans le répertoire temporaire + de LyX à chaque fois que vous visualisez ou que vous exportez votre document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez exporter votre document comme un fichier LaTeX en utilisant + le menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX. + +\family default + Les différentes variantes d'exportation sont expliquées à la section +\family sans + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Exporter" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +DVI +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formats de Fichiers ! DVI +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.dvi +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Il est appelé +\emph on +indépendant de l'appareil +\emph default + ou +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +device independent (DVI) +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, car il est complètement portable; vous pouvez les recopier d'une machine + à l'autre sans avoir à faire de conversion. + Les fichiers DVI sont utilisés pour un visionnement rapide et comme une + étape préliminaire avant la conversion vers un autre format comme le PostScript. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les fichiers DVI ne contiennent pas d'images, elles sont seulement liées + au fichier. + N'oubliez donc pas de fournir vos images en même temps que vos DVI. + Cette caractéristique peut aussi ralentir votre ordinateur quand vous visualise +z le DVI puisque la visionneuse doit convertir les images en tâche de fond + pour les rendre visibles quand vous faites défiler votre document. + C'est pourquoi nous recommandons d'utiliser des fichiers PDF pour les documents + avec de nombreuses images. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez exporter votre document comme un fichier DVI en utilisant le + menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\family default + ou +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X). + +\family default + Cette dernière option utilise l'exécutable +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +. + +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + est un moteur TeX qui fournit la fonctionnalité Unicode directement, ainsi + que l'accès aux polices du système d'exploitation (voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + +). + +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LuaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + est en cours de développement, mais pourrait devenir le prochain moteur + TeX standard. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PostScript +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formats de Fichiers ! PostScript +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.ps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + PostScript a été développé par la société +\family typewriter +Adobe +\family default + comme un langage pour les imprimantes. + De ce fait le fichier contient toutes les commandes utilisées par l'imprimante + pour imprimer le document. + PostScript peut être considéré comme un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +langage de programmation +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ; vous pouvez en effet faire des calculs ou tracer des diagrammes ou des + images +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Si vous souhaitez en apprendre plus à ce sujet, jetez un coup d'œil au paquetage + LaTeX +\series bold +pstricks +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! pstricks +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + En partie à cause de toutes ces possibilités un fichier PostScript est + souvent plus gros qu'un PDF. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PostScript ne peut contenir que des images au format +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +PostScript Encapsulé +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ( +\emph on +encapsulated PostScript +\emph default + ou EPS, de suffixe +\family typewriter +.eps +\family default +). + Comme LyX vous permet n'importe quel format d'image connu dans votre document, + il doit les convertir en interne en EPS. + Si vous avez par exemple 50 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +images dans votre document, LyX doit faire 50 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +conversions la première fois que vous visualisez ou que vous exportez votre + document. + Cela risque de ralentir votre rythme de travail. + En conclusion, si vous prévoyez d'utiliser PostScript, vous pouvez insérer + vos images directement en EPS pour éviter ce problème. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez exporter votre document comme un fichier PostScript en utilisant + le menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator +PostScript. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PDF +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formats de Fichiers ! PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce type de fichiers a le suffixe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.pdf +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Ce +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +format de document portable +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (portable document format ou PDF) est développé par +\family typewriter +Adobe +\family default + comme une évolution de PostScript. + Il est plus comprimé et utilise moins de commandes que PostScript. + Comme son nom l'indique, il est +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +portable +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et peut donc être traité par n'importe quel ordinateur et la sortie imprimée + aura exactement le même aspect. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF peut contenir des images dans son propre format PDF et dans les formats + JPG (format du +\emph on + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Joint Photographic Expert Group +\emph default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + avec comme suffixe +\family typewriter +.jpg +\family default + ou +\family typewriter +.jpeg +\family default +) et PNG ( +\emph on + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Portable Network Graphics +\emph default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + avec le suffixe +\family typewriter +.png +\family default +). + Vous pouvez quand même utiliser d'autres formats puisque LyX les convertit + dans un de ces formats. + Mais comme il est dit dans la section sur PostScript, les conversions d'images + vont ralentir votre travail. + Nous recommandons donc l'utilisation de l'un des trois formats cités. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez exporter votre document comme un fichier PDF en utilisant le + menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter +\family default +de façons différentes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) utilise le programme +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default + qui convertit directement votre fichier en PDF; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) utilise le programme +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + qui convertit directement votre fichier en PDF. + +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default + est un moteur encore plus récent, dérivé de +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +, qui fournit aussi la fonctionnalité Unicode directement, ainsi que l'accès + aux polices du système d'exploitation (voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + +). + +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LuaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + est en cours de développement, mais pourrait devenir le prochain moteur + TeX standard. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) utilise le programme +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default + qui convertit directement votre fichier en PDF. + +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default + est un moteur TeX qui fournit la fonctionnalité Unicode directement, ainsi + que l'accès aux polices du système d'exploitation (voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support" + +\end_inset + +). + Il est particulièrement adapté à la typographie de différentes écritures; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) utilise le programme +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default + qui convertit votre fichier en DVI avant de le convertir en PDF; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) utilise le programme +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default + qui créé un PDF à partir de la version PostScript de votre fichier. + Cette dernière est produite par le programme +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + qui utilise une version DVI comme étape intermédiaire. + Cette variante consiste donc en trois conversions; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous recommandons d'utiliser l'option +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + car +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default + accepte toutes les fonctionnalités des versions actuelles de PDF, et il + est rapide, stable et ne pose pas de problèmes. + Si vous dépendez d'un support multi-écritures ou sur des polices OpenType, + vous pourrez vouloir essayer +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + à la place, en sachant que ces deux programmes n'ont pas la même maturité + que +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pdflatex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +XHTML +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formats de Fichiers ! XHTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +HTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce type de fichier a le suffixe +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +.xhtml +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + C'est un fichier adapté à l'affichage par un navigateur web. + Il ne contient pas d'images, mais un lien vers celles-ci, et quand LyX + exporte en XHTML, il crée les images correspondantes dans un format approprié. + Les formules sont exportées en MathML, qui s'affiche bien dans les navigateurs + qui le supportent (tous ne le font pas). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +XHTML est un format d'exportation +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +en développement +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, et toutes les fonctionnalités de LyX ne sont pas encore intégrées. + Voir le chapitre +\emph on + Lyx et le Web +\emph default + dans le manuel des +\emph on +Options avancées +\emph default + pour les détails. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez exporter votre document en tant que fichier XHTML en sélectionnant + +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LyXHTML +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Pré-visionnement +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Prévisionnement +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour avoir une idée de l'aspect final de votre document, avec tous ses sauts + de pages à la bonne place, les notes de bas de page bien numérotées et + ainsi de suite, utilisez le menu +\family sans +Affichage +\family default + et choisissez Visionner ou le bouton de la barre d'outils +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + + Une visionneuse va s'ouvrir, affichant le résultat défini implicitement + dans le Préférences (voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" + +\end_inset + +), définition qui peut être modifiée pour un document particulier dans les + Paramètres (voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + +). + D'autres formats de sortie peuvent être sélectionnés par +\family sans +Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Visionner (autres formats) +\family default + ou le bouton de la barre d'outils +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous avez modifié votre document depuis votre dernier visionnement, inutile + de fermer la fenêtre de la visionneuse, appuyez juste sur un des boutons + de mise à jour ou utilisez le menu +\family sans +Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mettre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +jour +\family default +.ou +\family sans +Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mettre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +jour (autres formats). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand vous visionnez un fichier, le fichier généré par le programme est + placé dans le répertoire temporaire de LyX. + Si vous voulez une vraie sortie , exportez votre document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Imprimer un document depuis LyX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Imprimer" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Plutôt que d'exporter votre document et ensuite de l'imprimer, vous pouvez + aussi l'imprimer directement depuis LyX. + Pour imprimer le document courant, utilisez le menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Imprimer +\family default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + +) ou cliquez sur le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + LyX va appeler LaTeX en interne pour produire un fichier DVI. + Ce fichier sera ensuite traité par le programme +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + pour en faire un fichier PostScript, qui sera finalement imprimé en utilisant + le programme +\family typewriter +Ghostscript +\family default +. + À cause de toutes ces étapes intermédiaires, cette méthode n'est pas la + plus rapide. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans le champ +\family sans +Destination, +\family default + vous pouvez choisir: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Imprimante +\family default + est le nom de l'imprimante sur laquelle vous voulez imprimer votre document + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notez que ce nom est destiné au programme +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +, ce qui signifie que +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default + doit avoir été configuré pour cette imprimante-là. + L'imprimante implicite peut être définie dans le préférences de LyX, voyez + le chapitre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Fenêtre-Préférences" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, elle doit accepter le PostScript +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Fichier +\family default + est le nom à indiquer si vous voulez envoyer le résultat vers un fichier + pour l'imprimer plus tard. + La sortie est un fichier PostScript qui sera enregistré dans le répertoire + de travail de LyX, à moins que ne fournissiez le chemin complet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez choisir +\lang english +to print only a range of pages +\lang french +, de n'imprimer que les pages paires ou impaires +\lang english +or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options +\lang french + peut être utile pour pouvoir imprimer en recto-verso +\lang english +with a printer without a duplexer +\lang french +: Vous pouvez réinsérer les pages qui ont été imprimées d'un côté dans l'imprima +nte pour imprimer l'autre côté. + Certaines imprimantes sortent les pages face imprimée vers le haut, d'autres + vers le bas. + En choisissant l'ordre d'impression des pages, vous pourrez prendre toute + votre pile de feuilles, sans avoir à les remettre dans l'ordre. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Quelques mots sur la typographie +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Traits-d'union, tirets, et signe moins +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tirets et césures +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tirets +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans LyX, le caractère +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + existe dans trois longueurs, souvent appelées +\emph on +trait d'union +\emph default +, +\emph on +tiret +\emph default + et +\emph on +tiret +\emph default + long: +\emph on + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +NdT : respectivement +\emph on +hyphen +\emph default +, +\emph on +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dash +\emph default + et +\emph on +em +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dash +\emph default + en version originale. + Le tiret long a la longueur d'un cadratin, le tiret d'un demi-cadratin. + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\emph default + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +nom +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +résultat +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +inséré par +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +trait +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'union +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +tiret +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +– +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Caractère +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Symboles +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +tiret long +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +— +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Caractère +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Symboles +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +signe moins +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $-$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en mode mathématique +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi créer le tiret et le tiret long en utilisant le caractère + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + plusieurs fois de suite. + LyX les convertit automatiquement en un tiret de longueur appropriée dans + le rendu final. + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + engendre un tiret, +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + - +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + un tiret long. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les trois types de tiret sont distincts du signe moins, qui apparaît en + mode math et a une longueur différente. + Voici quelques exemples d'emploi des tirets : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +en-tête +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +trait +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'union +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +je crois que les tirets sont utiles – surtout ici. +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +tiret +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +— pour les dialogues. +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +tiret long +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +( +\emph on +signe moins +\emph default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Césure +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Cesure@Césure +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Césure" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les mots ne sont pas coupés dans LyX, mais ils le sont automatiquement à + l'impression. + La césure est effectuée par le paquetage +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + de LaTeX, en suivant les règles spécifiques à la langue du document. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pour les lecteurs utilisant l'allemand : C'est une des différences entre + les langages +\family sans +Allemand +\family default + et +\family sans +Allemand (nouvelle orthographe) +\family default + dans le menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX effectue les césures presque parfaitement ; il a seulement des problèmes + avec la police à +\family sans +chasse fixe +\family default + et avec des construction inhabituelles comme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +h3knix/m0n0wall +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Si, pour une raison quelconque, LaTeX n'arrivait pas à couper un mot correcteme +nt, vous pouvez disposer les points de césure à la main, avec +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Point +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +césure +\family default +. + Ces points de césure supplémentaires ne sont que des indications pour LaTeX. + Si aucune coupure n'est nécessaire, LaTeX les ignorera complètement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Parfois vous voulez empêcher qu'un mot ou une construction ne soit coupé. + Supposez que vous décrivez des raccourcis clavier dans votre document comme + ceci : +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +A-b c +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. + LaTeX considère le tiret comme une possibilité de césure, or une césure + à cet endroit serait peu judicieuse. + Pour empêcher le raccourci d'être coupé en deux, vous pouvez le mettre + dans une boîte comme expliqué à la section +\emph on +Empêcher la césure +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ponctuation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ponctuation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Abréviations et fins de phrase +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Abbreviations" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand LyX invoque LaTeX pour générer la version finale de votre document, + LaTeX fait tout seul la distinction entre les mots, les phrases et les + abréviations. + LaTeX ajoute alors la +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +quantité appropriée d'espace +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +: les phrases ont un peu plus d'espace entre le point final et le mot suivant. + Les abréviations ont autant d'espace après le point qu'entre deux mots. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Malheureusement, l'algorithme pour reconnaître une abréviation d'une fin + de phrase n'est vraiment pas très malin. + Si un +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + suit une lettre minuscule, c'est la fin d'une phrase ; s'il suit une lettre + majuscule, c'est une abréviation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici quelques exemples +\emph on +corrects +\emph default + d'abréviations et de fins de phrase : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +M. + Dupont +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Il fait beau. + Le soleil brille. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +...et voici un exemple où l'algorithme se trompe : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +par ex. + il y a trop d'espace ! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Je monte dans ma DS. + Je mets le contact. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +NdT : il m'en a fallu du temps pour trouver un exemple aussi intéressant + ! +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous ne verrez rien qui cloche avant d'avoir la version finale du document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour régler ce problème, vous pouvez : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +utiliser un +\family sans +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +entre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mots +\family default + après une abréviation en minuscules (voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espace-inter-mots" + +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espace ! Inter-mots +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +utiliser une +\family sans +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Fine +\family default + entre les deux éléments d'une abréviation (voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espace-Fine" + +\end_inset + +). +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Espace ! Fine +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +utiliser +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Caractère +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Point +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +final +\family default + pour forcer l'espacement entre phrases. + On l'obtient aussi avec +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence" +\end_inset + + +\family sans + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +NdT : le raccourci n'a pas l'air de fonctionner avec un clavier français. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec les corrections, nos exemples deviennent : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +par ex. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +il y a trop d'espace ! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Je monte dans ma DS\SpecialChar \@. + Je mets le contact. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certaines langues ne mettent pas plus d'espace entre les phrases qu'entre + les mots. + Si vous voulez écrire dans ces langues, vous n'avez pas à vous occuper + de tout ceci, puisque LaTeX va s'en occuper. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour les autres, on peut s'aider de la fonction +\family sans + Outils \SpecialChar \menuseparator +Correction +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TeX +\family default + pour repérer ces erreurs (fonction décrite dans le manuel de +\emph on +Options avancées +\emph default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Guillemets +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie ! Guillemets +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Guillemets | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Typographie +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX met en général les guillemets dans le bon sens : un ouvrant au début + et un fermant à la fin. + Par exemple, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +ouvert fermé +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, obtenu simplement avec la touche +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +" +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez changer le comportement de cette touche avec la fenêtre +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Dans le sous-menu +\family sans +Langue +\family default + vous avez un menu déroulant +\family sans +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +guillemets +\family default + où vous pouvez choisir directement le style de guillemets produits par + la touche +\family typewriter +" +\family default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a six possibilités : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMMMM + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Texte +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +double +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Quotes els +\end_inset + +simple +\begin_inset Quotes ers +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMMMM + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +Texte +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +double +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + ou 'simple +\begin_inset Quotes ers +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMMMM + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Texte +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +double +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Quotes gls +\end_inset + +simple +\begin_inset Quotes grs +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMMMM + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Texte +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +double +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Quotes pls +\end_inset + +simple +\begin_inset Quotes prs +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMMMM + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Texte +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +double +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Quotes fls +\end_inset + +simple +\begin_inset Quotes frs +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring MMMMM + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes ald +\end_inset + +Texte +\begin_inset Quotes ard +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes ald +\end_inset + +double +\begin_inset Quotes ard +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Quotes als +\end_inset + +simple +\begin_inset Quotes ars +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces options changent les caractères produits par la touche +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +" +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + . + D'un autre côté, si vous voulez produire des guillemets droits, tapez +\family sans +Ctrl-" +\family default +, ou utilisez +\family sans + Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Caractère spécial\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Guillemet +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +droit +\family default +, cela produit un +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +" +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + dans tous les cas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +For single quotes you have to use the shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "quote-insert single" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ligatures +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie ! Ligatures +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ligatures | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Typographie +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Ligatures" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est commun en typographie de grouper certaines lettres ensemble et de + les imprimer comme un seul caractère. + Ces groupes s'appellent des +\emph on +ligatures +\emph default +. + Comme LaTeX sait s'en servir, vos documents LyX en contiendront aussi. + Voici les ligatures possibles: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ff +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +fi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +fl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ffi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ffl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certaines langues utilisent d'autres ligatures si les polices utilisées + dans le document les permettent. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Parfois cependant, vous ne voulez pas d'une ligature dans un mot. + Alors qu'une ligature convient dans le mot +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +graffiti +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, ce n'est pas le cas dans des mots composés comme l'allemand +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Dorffest +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + ou l'anglais +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +cufflink +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +NdT : faute d'idée d'exemple en français\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Pour empêcher une ligature, vous devez insérer un caractère spécial entre + les lettres, avec +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Séparation +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligature +\family default +, et +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Dorffest +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + devient +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +fest +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +cufflinks +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +links +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les noms propres en LyX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Noms-Propres" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Noms propres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous avez certainement remarqué que le mot +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + apparaissait à l'impression avec des caractères de positions et des tailles + différentes. + LaTeX est le nom du programme utilisé par LyX, il est donc reconnu comme + nom propre quand vous tapez +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +dans LyX +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Les accolades dans le code TeX sont là pour éviter que la +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +commande +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + apparaisse comme un nom propre dans la sortie finale, voir le dernier paragraph +e de cette section. + Pour créer des noms propres ne mettez pas les accolades. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, en respectant bien l'alternance de lettres majuscules et minuscules. + LyX reconnaît les noms propres suivants: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LyX est le nom du jeu, tapez +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + pour le produire. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +TeX est le programme utilisé par LaTeX, tapez +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeX est le programme utilisé par LyX, tapez +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeX2e est la version actuelle de LaTeX, tapez +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX2e +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez vous demander pourquoi la version de LaTeX est +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +2 +\begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + C'est une vieille tradition dans la communauté TeX que de donner des numéro + de version fantaisistes aux programmes, avec une logique réservée aux initiés. + Par exemple le numéro de version de TeX converge vers la nombre +\begin_inset Formula $\pi$ +\end_inset + +: la version actuelle est +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +TeX-3.141592 +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, la version précédente était +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +TeX-3.14159 +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous ne voulez pas utiliser les noms propres, par exemple dans un en-tête + de section, vous pouvez insérer une paire d'accolades vides en code TeX, + au milieu du mot. + Dans LyX, cela ressemblera à ceci: +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/LaTeX.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Pour en savoir plus sur le code TeX, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Code-TeX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les unités +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie ! Unités +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En principe, l'espace entre le symbole de l'unité et la valeur est plus + petit que l'espace normal entre deux mots. + Comme vous le voyez dans l'exemple qui suit, c'est plus joli quand l'espace + est plus petit. + Pour avoir ce +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +demi-espace +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + pour les unités, utilisez le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Typographie spéciale\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fine +\family default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "space-insert thin" +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici un exemple pour voir la différence: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +espace normale entre la valeur et l'unité +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +demi-espace entre la valeur et l'unité +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Veuves et orphelins +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Typographie ! Veuves et Orphelins +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Aux premiers temps des traitements de texte, les sauts de page intervenaient + quand la page en venait à se terminer. + Ils ne tenaient pas compte de ce qu'il y avait dans le texte. + Il vous est peut-être déjà arrivé d'imprimer un document, et de découvrir + l'en-tête d'une section imprimée tout en bas d'une page, la première ligne + d'un paragraphe toute seule en bas de la page, ou la dernière ligne d'un + paragraphe au sommet d'une nouvelle page. + Ces bouts de texte dépareillés devinrent connus sous le nom de +\emph on +veuves +\emph default + et d' +\emph on +orphelins +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX peut éviter de changer de page juste après un en-tête de section. + Ça fait partie des avantages des environnements de paragraphe. + Mais qu'en est-il des veuves et des orphelins, quand les sauts de page + ne laissent qu'une ligne d'un paragraphe toute seule au sommet ou au bas + d'une page ? LaTeX suit des règles concernant les sauts de page, et certaines + d'entre elles sont spécialement destinées à éviter les veuves et les orphelins. + C'est l'avantage d'utiliser LaTeX en interne. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous n'allons pas traiter de la façon de décider TeX ou LaTeX à changer + de page, ou de la façon d'influencer ce comportement. + Quelques livres sur LaTeX cités dans la bibliographie (comme +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +) peuvent contenir plus d'informations. + De toutes façons, vous n'aurez presque jamais à vous inquiéter de tout + cela. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Notes, figures, tableaux et flottants +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notes, figures et flottants +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:Flottants-et-Notes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les sujets de ce chapitre sont traités en détail dans le manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés. + +\emph default +Vous y trouverez aussi des trucs et astuces pour les cas spéciaux. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Notes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Notes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX offre plusieurs types de notes que vous pouvez ajouter à votre document: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Note +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LyX Ce type de note est à usage interne et n'apparaîtra pas sur la sortie + finale. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Le texte de cette note n'apparaîtra pas à l'impression. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Commentaire Ce type de note n'apparaît pas non plus à l'impression, mais + il est inséré comme un commentaire LaTeX quand vous exportez votre document + vers un fichier au format LaTeX avec le menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaTeX (pdflatex) / (standard) +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Comment +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Le texte de cette note n'apparaîtra que comme commentaire dans un fichier + LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Grisée Ce type de note apparaît à l'impression sous forme de texte grisé, + dans une couleur que vous pouvez positionner dans les paramètres du document + via le menu +\family sans +Couleurs\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Notes grisées +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Le texte +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ceci est un exemple de note de bas de page à l'intérieur d'une note en texte + grisé. + Dans ce document la couleur de ce type de note est définie comme étant + bleue. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + de ce commentaire apparaîtra à l'impression sous forme de texte grisé. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Comme vous pouvez le voir dans l'exemple, ce type de notes peut avoir des + notes de bas de page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les notes peuvent être insérées avec le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils ou grâce au menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note +\family default +. + Cliquez avec le bouton de droite de la souris sur la boîte de note qui + apparaît pour modifier le type de la note. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Notes de bas de page +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Notes-en-Bas" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notes en bas de page +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX utilise des boîtes pour saisir et afficher les notes en bas de page: + quand vous insérez une Note de bas de page avec +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\family default + ou en utilisant le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "footnote-insert" +\end_inset + + de la palette, vous voyez d'abord apparaître dans votre texte une boîte + grise avec une étiquette bleue +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +pied +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + qui ressemble à ceci : +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + + Cette boîte est la représentation de votre note dans LyX. + Vous pouvez y entrer votre texte. + Si vous cliquez sur le mot +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +bas +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, la boîte va se refermer. + Cliquer de nouveau sur le bouton +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +ouvrira +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + la Note de bas de page. + Dans LyX, pour fermer cette Note de bas de page, cliquez sur la boîte contenant + l'étiquette de la note.. + Si vous voulez transformer du texte déjà existant en Note de bas de page, + sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton +\family sans +Note +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\family default + de la barre d'outils. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici un exemple de Note de bas de page +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dans LyX, pour fermer cette Note de bas de page, cliquez sur la boîte contenant + l'étiquette de la note. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans la sortie finale, la note de bas de page apparaîtra comme un numéro + en exposant placé dans le texte à la position où la boîte de note a été + insérée. + Le texte de la note est placé en bas de la page courante. + Le numéro de la note est calculé par LyX +\lang english +according to the document class. + +\lang french + Pour l'instant, LyX ne gère pas d'un +\lang english +particular +\lang french + système de numérotation, mais vous pouvez utiliser d'autres méthodes en + utilisant des commandes LaTeX spéciales comme celles décrites dans le manuel + +\emph on +Objets +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Notes en marge +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notes en marge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Notes_en_Marge" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans LyX, les notes en marge ressemblent aux notes en bas de page et se + comportent de la même façon. + Quand vous insérez une note en marge avec +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +marge +\family default + ou avec le bouton de la barre d'outils +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "marginalnote-insert" +\end_inset + + , vous voyez apparaître dans votre texte une boîte grise avec une étiquette + rouge +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +marge +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Cette boîte est la représentation de votre note dans LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voyez ci-contre un exemple de note en marge +\begin_inset Marginal +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +C'est une note en marge. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les notes en marge apparaissent dans la marge de droite dans les documents + imprimés sur un seul côté. + Dans les documents imprimés recto-verso, elles apparaissent dans la marge + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +extérieure +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + – la gauche sur les pages paires et la droite sur les pages impaires. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour plus d'information sur les notes en marge, voyez la section +\emph on +Notes en marge +\emph default + dans le manuel des +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Graphiques et images +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Images +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Graphiques +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Graphiques" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour placer une figure dans votre document, cliquez sur le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + dans la barre d'outils, ou faites +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Graphique +\family default +. + Une fenêtre s'ouvre, qui vous permet de choisir le fichier à charger. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette fenêtre de dialogue contient de nombreux paramètres dont les noms + devraient être explicites. + L'onglet +\family sans +Graphique +\family default + vous permet de choisir le fichier contenant votre image. + L'image peut être transformée en donnant un angle de rotation et un facteur + d'échelle. + On peut aussi définir directement la taille de l'image en fixant une de + ses dimensions. + Les unités de longueurs utilisées sont décrites dans l'appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Unités-de-longueur" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'onglet +\family sans +Rogner +\family default + permet de définir la zone de l'image qui sera reproduite à l'impression. + Cette zone peut être calculée automatiquement à partir des données présentes + dans le fichier en appuyant sur le bouton +\family sans +Valeurs +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fichier +\family default +. + Avec l'option +\family sans +Rogner +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +boîte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +délimitation, +\family default +seule la portion de l'image qui est dans la zone définie sera imprimée. + En principe vous n'avez pas à vous occuper des coordonnées de l'image et + donc vous pouvez ignorer l'onglet +\family sans +Rogner +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les experts ès-LaTeX pourront préciser des options supplémentaires pour + LaTeX dans l'onglet +\family sans +Options +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LyX +\family default +. + Vous pouvez en particulier préciser l'apparence que devra avoir l'image + dans LyX. + L'option +\family sans +Mode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +brouillon +\family default + fait que les images ne seront pas représentées dans la sortie, seuls des + cadres de la même taille apparaîtront. + L'option +\family sans +Ne pas décompresser à l'exportation +\family default + est expliquée dans le manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +, dans la section +\emph on +La fenêtre de dialogue graphique +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La fenêtre de dialogue Graphique peut être rappelée à tout moment en cliquant + sur une image. + L'image apparaîtra dans la sortie finale à la position exacte qu'elle a + dans le texte. + Voici un exemple d'image qui se trouve dans son propre paragraphe, ce dernier + étant centré horizontalement: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/mobius.eps + scale 70 + rotateOrigin center + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous voulez ajouter une légende à votre image ou si vous voulez y faire + référence, vous devez la mettre dans un flottant, voyez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Figures-Flottantes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les formats d'images +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Images ! Formats +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Formats-d'images" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez insérer des images dans n'importe quel format connu. + Mais, comme nous l'avons expliqué dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" + +\end_inset + +, chaque format pour la sortie du document ne va accepter qu'un petit nombre + de formats d'images. + Pour s'en sortir LyX utilise le programme +\family typewriter +ImageMagick +\family default + en arrière plan pour convertir les formats que vous utilisez dans un des + formats acceptés par le format de sortie. + Ces conversions prenant forcément du temps, vous pouvez accélérer vos exportati +ons en n'utilisant que les formats listés dans les sous sections de la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme pour les polices de caractères, il y a deux grands types de formats + d'images: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +images +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +matricielles +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ou +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bitmap) dans lesquelles l'image est décomposée en une mosaïque des points + (ou pixels), souvent enregistrés sous un format compressé. + Elles ne sont pas facilement redimensionnables et on voit apparaître des + petits carrés quand on utilise des agrandissements trop importants (aspect + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +pixellisé +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). + Les formats matriciels les plus connus sont le GIF ( +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Graphics Interchange Format +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +, avec comme suffixe de fichier +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.gif +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +GIF|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Format d'image +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, le PNG ( +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Portable Network Graphics, suffixe +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.gif +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PNG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Formats d'image +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et le JPG ( +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Joint Photographic Expert Group, suffixe +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.jpeg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +JPG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Formats d'image +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +images +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vectorielles +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ou +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +redimensionnables) dans lesquelles l'image est décrite sous forme d'objets, + ou vecteurs (lignes, courbes, formes géométriques, caractères...) et peut + donc être redimensionnée comme on le veut sans perte de précision. + La possibilité de redimensionner les images est très utilisé pour les présentat +ions, vu que le passage par un vidéo-projecteur entraîne forcément un redimensio +nnement. + Le redimensionnement permet aussi de présenter des documents en ligne où + le lecteur pourra agrandir les diagrammes comme il le souhaite pour en + étudier les détails. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Les principaux formats vectoriels sont le SVG ( +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Scalable Vector Graphics +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, suffixe +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +.svg +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +SVG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Format d'image +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, l'EPS ( +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +encapsulated PostScript +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, suffixe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.eps +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +EPS|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Format d'image +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et le PDF ( +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Portable Document Format +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, suffixe +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +.pdf +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Format d'image +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + En fait vous pouvez convertir n'importe quel format matriciel en PDF ou + en EPS, mais le résultat ne sera pas redimensionnable. + Dans ce cas seul une en-tête est réellement ajoutée à l'image initiale +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dans le cas du PDF l'image initiale est aussi compressée. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En principe il est quasiment impossible de convertir une image matricielle + en graphique vectoriel, seul le contraire est possible. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Groupement de paramétrisation pour les images +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Images ! Groupe de paramétrisation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Chaque image peut définir un nouveau groupe de paramètres d'image ou rejoindre + un groupe existant. + Les images qui appartiennent à un tel groupe partagent leurs paramètres, + ce qui fait que quand on modifie une image du groupe, on modifie aussi + automatiquement toutes les autres images du groupe de la même façon. + Vous pouvez par exemple changer la taille de tout un lot d'images, sans + avoir à répéter l'opération manuellement sur chaque image. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On crée un nouveau groupe +\lang english +by pressing the button +\family sans +Open +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +new +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +group +\family default + in the +\lang french + dialogue +\family sans + Graphique +\family default + +\lang english +in the +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X options +\family default + tab +\lang french +. + On rattache une image à un groupe existant en utilisant le menu contextuel + de l'image et en cochant le nom du groupe voulu +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +La liste des groupes n'apparaît que si au moins un groupe a été défini (NdT). +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Tableaux +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Tableaux" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tableaux +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez insérer un tableau en utilisant soit le bouton de la barre d'outils + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "tabular-insert" +\end_inset + + soit +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tableau +\family default +. + Une fenêtre apparaît, vous demandant le nombre de lignes et de colonnes. + Le tableau a implicitement une bordure au dessus et à gauche de chaque + case, une à droite de la colonne la plus à droite et une en bas de la rangée + du bas, qui forment une boîte autour du tableau. + En plus, la rangée supérieure a aussi une bordure en bas, ce qui fait qu'elle + apparaît séparée du reste du tableau. + Voici un exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +12 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +45 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +98 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +A +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +B +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +multi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +C +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +La fenêtre +\family sans +Tableau +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez agir sur un tableau en cliquant dessus avec le bouton droit + de la souris et ensuite sélectionner +\family sans +Plus\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default +, ce qui fait apparaître une fenêtre avec des options. + Dans cette fenêtre vous pouvez modifier les réglages concernant la cellule, + la colonne et la ligne dans laquelle le curseur se trouve. + La plupart des options peuvent s'appliquer à des sélections. + Ce qui signifie que si vous avez sélectionné plus d'une cellule, plus d'une + ligne ou plus d'une colonne, l'action demandée prendra en compte toute + votre sélection. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En plus de la fenêtre de dialogue, vous pouvez aussi utiliser la +\family sans +barre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'outils +\family default + +\family sans +tableau +\family default +. + Cette dernière apparaît lorsque votre curseur est dans un tableau. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec l'onglet +\family sans +Paramètres +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tableau +\family default + de la fenêtre de dialogue, vous pouvez choisir l'alignement horizontal + de la ligne. + Quand vous ajoutez une colonne ou une ligne, elle est insérée juste à droite + ou juste en dessous de la position de la cellule courante. + L'alignement vertical d'une colonne ne peut être défini que si sa largeur + est fixée. + Une largeur fixée va permettre aux cellules d'avoir des sauts de lignes + et donc, plusieurs paragraphes de texte, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Cellules-de-tableau" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez marquer plusieurs cellules d'une même ligne comme constituant + une cellule multi-colonne en utilisant l'option +\family sans +Multi-colonnes +\family default +. + Cette option fait que les cellules sont fusionnées en +\emph on +une seule +\emph default +cellule, répartie sur plusieurs colonnes. + Les cellules multi-colonnes sont traitées comme des lignes à part, ce qui + fait que leur alignement, leur largeur et la configuration de leur bordure + n'affectent que la cellule et elle seule. + Voici un exemple utilisant une cellule multicolonne dans sa première ligne + et une cellule sans bordure supérieure dans la dernière ligne +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +abc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +def ghi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +jkl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +A +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +B +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +C +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +D +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les utilisateurs compétents peuvent déclarer des paramètres LaTeX spéciaux + pour modifier leur tableau. + Ces derniers sont indispensables pour certaines mise en forme spéciales, + comme les cellules multi-lignes, ils sont expliqués dans le manuel +\emph on +Objets +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +insérés +\emph default +. + Vous pouvez aussi faire tourner la cellule courante ou même tout le tableau + de 90 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +degrés dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d'une montre. + Ces rotations ne sont pas visibles dans LyX, mais devraient l'être dans + la sortie finale. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + la plupart des visionneuses DVI ne sont +\emph on +pas +\emph default + capables d'afficher ces rotations. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'onglet +\family sans +Bordures +\family default + vous permet d'ajouter ou de supprimer les bordures pour la ligne ou la + colonne courante. + L'option +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + met des bordures à toutes les cellules. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tableaux longs +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tableaux ! Tableaux Longs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tableaux longs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si un tableau est trop haut pour tenir sur un page, vous pouvez utiliser + l'option +\family sans +Utiliser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tableaux +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +longs +\family default + de l'onglet +\family sans +Tableau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +long +\family default + de la fenêtre +\family sans +Paramètres +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tableau +\family default + pour le répartir automatiquement sur plusieurs pages. + En cochant cette option, vous activez un certain nombre de cases d'option + et vous pouvez alors définir: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +En-tête: la ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessus et qui n'ont + pas d'attributs particuliers, sont définies comme faisant partie des lignes + d'en-tête utilisées pour toutes les pages du tableau long; sauf pour la + première page, si +\family sans +Premier +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en-tête +\family default + est défini. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Premier +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +En-tête: la ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessus et qui n'ont + pas d'attributs particuliers, sont définies comme faisant partie des lignes + d'en-tête utilisées pour la première page du tableau long. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Pied: la ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessous et qui n'ont + pas d'attributs particuliers, sont définies comme faisant partie des lignes + constituant les pieds de toutes les pages du tableau long ; sauf de la + dernière page si +\family sans +Dernier +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pied +\family default + est défini. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Dernier +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pied: la ligne courante et toutes celles situées au-dessous et qui n'ont + pas d'attributs particuliers, sont définies comme faisant partie des lignes + constituant le pied de la dernière page du tableau long. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Légende: la première ligne est transformée en une seule colonne. + Vous pouvez maintenant y mettre la légende du tableau grâce au menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Légende +\family default +\series bold +. + +\series default +Vous trouverez plus d'information sur les tableaux longs dans le manuel + +\emph on +Objets Insérés +\emph default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi préciser une ligne où la table devra être coupée. + Si vous activez plusieurs options pour une même ligne, vous devez être + conscients que seule la première sera prise en compte +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Il y a quelque chose que je n'ai pas compris : la deuxième option serait + mise automatiquement à +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +est vide +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +...(NdT) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Dans ce contexte, première veut dire première en suivant l'ordre +\family sans +Pied, Dernier +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Pied, +\family default +et +\family sans + En-tête, Premier +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +En-tête +\family default +. + Voyez le tableau long qui suit pour voir comment ça marche : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Exemple d'annuaire téléphonique (ignorez les noms) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +NOM +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Exemple d'annuaire téléphonique +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +NOM +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +suite ... +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +999 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Fin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Cellules de tableau +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tableaux ! Cellules +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Cellules-de-tableau" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une cellule de tableau peut contenir du texte, des équations en ligne, une + figure ou même un autre tableau. + Tous ces types d'objets peuvent être placés dans la même cellule. + La taille et le style de la police de caractère peuvent être modifiés. + Par contre, vous ne pouvez pas y mettre un environnement (comme une section), + ni changer les options de paragraphe comme l'interligne. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour pouvoir utiliser un texte sur plusieurs lignes dans une cellule, vous + devez fixer la largeur de la colonne dans la fenêtre de dialogue. + Votre texte sera alors automatiquement coupé en plusieurs lignes et la + cellule grandira verticalement pour s'adapter aux nouvelles lignes. + Voici un exemple: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entrée multi-ligne dans un tableau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +5 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +6 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Et ceci pour allonger. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +7 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +8 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entrée multi-ligne dans un tableau. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Et ceci pour allonger. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +9 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les opérations de coupé-collé entre des tableaux ou des cellules marchent + relativement bien. + Vous pouvez couper et coller plus d'une ligne +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notez que vous ne pouvez coller dans une sélection de plusieurs cellules + puisque dans les cas, par exemple de la copie d'un mot seul dans une sélection + 2×3, ce qu'il faut faire n'est pas clair. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Vous sélectionnez les cellules à copier avec la souris ou avec la touche + +\family sans +Shift +\family default + et les touches de déplacement, comme d'habitude. + Vous pouvez copier le tableau en entier et en un seul bloc, en commençant + la sélection juste en dehors du tableau. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Flottants +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flottants +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Flottants" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un flottant est une portion de document, qui peut être associé à une étiquette + et dont la position n'est pas fixée. + Il peut +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +flotter +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + d'une page ou deux en avant ou en arrière, pour trouver l'emplacement le + plus approprié. + Les +\family sans +Notes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\family default + et le +\family sans +Notes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +marge +\family default + sont aussi des flottants, puisqu'elles peuvent se retrouver sur la page + suivante quand il y a trop de notes sur la page courante. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Grâce aux flottants, on peut obtenir automatiquement une mise en page de + très grande qualité. + Les images et les tableaux peuvent être répartis sur plusieurs pages pour + éviter des lignes blanches ou des pages sans texte. + Comme le fait d'utiliser un flottant supprime la liaison entre le texte + et le tableau ou l'image, on va pouvoir faire référence au flottant dans + le texte. + Les flottants sont donc numérotés. + Les références croisées sont décrites dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Références-croisées" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour insérer un flottant, on utilise un des sous menus du menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flottant. + +\family default + Une boîte va être insérée dans votre document avec par exemple une étiquette + du genre +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +#: +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + (où # est un numéro). + L'étiquette est automatiquement traduite dans la langue du document dans + la sortie finale. + Après l'étiquette vous pouvez insérer du texte comme légende. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flottants ! Légendes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + L'image ou le tableau est inséré avant ou après la légende dans un paragraphe + séparé, à l'intérieur du flottant. + Pour améliorer la lisibilité de votre document dans LyX, vous pouvez fermer + ou ouvrir la boîte de votre flottant en cliquant avec le bouton de gauche + sur la boîte grise qui se trouve en haut à gauche de celui-ci. + Une boîte de flottant fermée ressemble à ceci : +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/floatQt4.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + + – une case grise avec un texte rouge. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est recommandé d'insérer les flottants comme des paragraphes séparés + pour éviter des erreurs avec LaTeX, quand le texte qui entoure le flottant + est formatté de façon particulière. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Exemples +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Figure flottantes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flottants ! Figures flottantes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Figures-Flottantes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Ornithorinque" + +\end_inset + + a été créée via le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flottant\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Figure +\family default + ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert figure" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + L'image a été insérée en positionnant le curseur au(-dessus de la légende + et en utilisant le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Graphique +\family default + ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + L'image a été centrée horizontalement en positionnant le curseur devant + ou derrière l'image et en appelant le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres de paragraphe +\family default + ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/platypus.eps + width 50col% + rotateOrigin center + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Ornithorinque" + +\end_inset + +Un ornithorynque sévèrement déformé dans un flottant de figure. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce flottant de figure montrent aussi comment ajouter une étiquette et créer + une référence croisée pointant sur elle : Insérez-vous une étiquette dans + la légende à l'aide du menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Étiquette +\family default + ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils, et ensuite y faire référence en utilisant le menu + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Référence +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +croisée +\family default +ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + Il est important d'utiliser des références pour les flottants de figures + plutôt que des locutions vagues du genre +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +la figure ci-dessous +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, puisque LaTeX va repositionner la figure dans le document final. + Votre figure risque de ne plus être +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +ci-dessous +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + du tout! Pour en savoir plus sur les références croisées, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Références-croisées" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En principe on met une figure dans un flottant, mais parfois vous pouvez + vouloir deux figures avec chacune sa sous-légende. + C'est possible en insérant des flottants d'image dans un flottant d'image + existant. + Notez que seule la légende principale du flottant sera ajoutée à la liste + des figures comme indiqué dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Liste-des-figures," + +\end_inset + +. + La figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." + +\end_inset + + est une exemple de flottant de figure avec deux images mises l'une à côté + de l'autre. + Vous pouvez aussi mettre les images les unes sous les autres. + Les figures +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Structure-indéfinissable" + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Ornithorynque" + +\end_inset + + sont des sous-figures. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Structure-indéfinissable" + +\end_inset + +Structure indéfinissable +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Ornithorynque" + +\end_inset + +Ornithorynque +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/platypus.eps + lyxscale 60 + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Deux images déformées. +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Deux-images-déformées." + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Flottant de tableau +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flottants ! Flottant de tableau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Flottant-de-tableau" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les flottants de tableau sont insérés en utilisant le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flottant\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tableau ou le bouton +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert table" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + Ils ont les mêmes propriétés que les flottants de figures +\lang english +that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not + above like for figures and that the label begins with +\lang french + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +tab: +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Le tableau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Flottant-de-tableau" + +\end_inset + + est un exemple de flottant de tableau. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Flottant-de-tableau" + +\end_inset + +Un flottant de tableau. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jules +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Marie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jean +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +a & b\\ +c & d +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Autres flottants +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Flottants ! Détails +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX propose d'autres types de flottants, ainsi que des rotations de flottants. + Il vous permet également de modifier le système de numérotation, de diriger + le placement, et de modifier la mise en page et le placement de la légende. + Toutes ces fonctionnalités sont expliquées dans le chapitre +\emph on +Flottants +\emph default +du manuel des +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Minipages +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Minipages +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Minipages" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeX fournit un mécanisme qui, en fait, permet de produire une page à l'intérie +ur d'une page. + On parle alors d'une minipage, et à l'intérieur de celle-ci, toutes les + règles d'indentation, de saut de ligne, etc. + s'appliquent. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les minipages de LyX ont leur propre boîte repliable qui peut être insérée + grâce au menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Boîte +\family default +. + En faisant un clic droit sur la boîte, vous pouvez changer la largeur de + la minipage et sa positions dans la page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "30col%" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +Ceci est une minipage. + Le texte est en italique. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +Les minipages sont souvent utilisées pour du texte dans une autre langue + ou nécessitant une mise en forme différente. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +Si vous placez deux minipages côte-à-côte, vous pouvez utiliser des +\family sans +Ressorts +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontaux +\family default + comme ceux décrits section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ceci est une mini page avec un texte bidon complètement stupide. + Ce texte stupide ne sert qu'à augmenter la taille de la minipage. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ceci est une mini page avec un texte bidon complètement stupide. + Ce texte stupide ne sert qu'à augmenter la taille de la minipage. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En cliquant avec le bouton de droite sur une minipage, vous pouvez aussi + changer le type de boîte, de la minipage. + Tous les types de boîtes et leurs paramètres sont décrits en détails dans + le chapitre +\emph on +Boîtes +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default + . +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Formules mathématiques +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:Formules-mathématiques" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formules | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Math +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les sujets de ce chapitre sont traités en détail dans le manuel +\emph on +Maths. + +\emph default +Vous y trouverez aussi des trucs et astuces pour les cas spéciaux. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Les bases +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Les bases +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour écrire une formule mathématique, vous pouvez simplement cliquer sur + l'icône +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-mode on" +\end_inset + + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-mode" +\end_inset + +). + Un petit carré bleu s'ouvrira, avec les coins d'un rectangle violet autour. + Ce carré bleu indique la position de la formule elle-même, et les coins + violets indiquent à quel niveau d'emboîtement vous êtes dans la formule. + Vous pouvez aussi choisir une type particulier de formule avec le menu + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez éditer les paramètres d'une formule et y ajouter d'autre structures + mathématiques avec la +\family sans +Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default +, qui apparaît automatiquement quand le curseur est dans une formule. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a deux types principaux de formules; les formules +\emph on +en ligne +\emph default + apparaissent au sein de la ligne de texte, comme dans ce cas : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette ligne contient une formule +\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ +\end_inset + + en ligne. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les formules +\emph on +hors-ligne +\emph default + apparaissent séparées du corps du texte, comme si elles avaient leur propre + paragraphe, comme dans cet exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +A=B +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous ne pouvez numéroter ou faire référence qu'à des formules hors-ligne. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX accepte aussi de nombreuses commandes mathématiques LaTeX. + Par exemple en tapant dans une formule +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +alpha +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + suivi d'un espace on insère la lettre grecque +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ +\end_inset + +. + Taper la commande LaTeX peut parfois être plus rapide que d'utiliser la + +\family sans +Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +C'est vrai en particulier pour tous ceux qui ont l'habitude de taper le + LaTeX dans le texte. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Naviguer dans une formule +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Navigation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour vous déplacer dans une formule existante, vous avez un meilleur contrôle + avec les flèches du clavier. + L'éditeur mathématique utilise des petits rectangles pour indiquer les + endroits où l'on peut insérer quelque chose. + Les flèches du clavier peuvent servir à naviguer dans les parties d'une + formule. + En appuyant sur +\family sans +Espace +\family default +, on quitte une fraction ou toute autre élément de formule (une racine carrée + +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ +\end_inset + +, ou des parenthèses +\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ +\end_inset + +, ou une matrice +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + +). + En appuyant sur +\family sans +Échap +\family default +, on quitte la formule et le curseur est placé à droite de la boîte. + +\family sans +Tab +\family default + peut servir à se déplacer horizontalement dans une formule, par exemple + dans les cases d'une matrice ou les positions d'une équation multi-lignes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Espace +\family default +, qui apparaît dans ce document sous la forme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, ne semble rien faire dans une formule, puisqu'en fait il n'ajoute pas + d'espace entre les caractères, mais sort d'une structure emboîtée. + Pour cette raison, vous devez faire attention en l'utilisant. + Par exemple, si vous voulez +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ +\end_inset + +, tapez +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +2x+1 +\series default +, et pas +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +2x +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + ++ +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +1 +\series default +, puisque dans le dernier cas seul le +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Formula $2x$ +\end_inset + + +\family default + sera sous la racine, +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ +\end_inset + +. + Pour ceux qui ont appris à insérer des espaces dans les expressions, il + faut s'y déshabituer. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez laisser beaucoup de structures partiellement remplies dans une + formule, comme cette matrice : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +\lambda_{1}\\ + & \ddots\\ + & & \lambda_{n} +\end{array}\right) +\] + +\end_inset + +Si vous laissez une fraction partiellement remplie, ou un exposant sans + rien dedans, le résultat est imprévisible, mais la plupart des structures + font comme si de rien n'était. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Sélectionner du texte +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez sélectionner du texte dans une formule de deux façons différentes. + Placez le curseur à un bout de la chaîne de caractères que vous voulez, + et utilisez +\family sans +Maj +\family default + avec une flèche du clavier pour sélectionner le texte. + Il sera mis en valeur comme pour la sélection de texte normal. + Vous pouvez également sélectionner le texte avec la souris de la façon + habituelle. + Ce texte peut ensuite être coupé ou copié, puis collé dans n'importe quelle + formule (mais pas dans une zone de texte normal dans LyX). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Indices et exposants +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Exposants +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Indices +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez utiliser la palette mathématique pour mettre des indices et + des exposants (boutons +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-superscript" +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-subscript" +\end_inset + +), mais la façon de loin la plus simple est la méthode TeX standard. + Pour obtenir +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + +, tapez (dans une formule) +\series bold +x^2 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default +. + L' +\family sans +espace +\family default + finale remet le curseur en bas, sur la ligne de l'expression, le faisant + sortir de l'exposant. + Si vous tapez +\series bold +x^2y +\series default +, vous aurez +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ +\end_inset + +, pour avoir +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ +\end_inset + +, tapez +\series bold +x^2 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +y +\series default +. + Si vous utilisez dans l'exposant des caractères qui doivent être accentués + avec un accent circonflexe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +^ +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, vous devez utiliser une +\family sans +espace +\family default + supplémentaire pour séparer l'accent et le caractère. + Par exemple, si vous voulez +\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ +\end_inset + +, tapez +\series bold +x^ +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +a +\series default +. + Les indices marchent de la même manière, pour avoir +\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ +\end_inset + +, faites (dans une formule) +\series bold +a_1 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fractions +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Fractions +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Créez une fraction soit avec +\series bold + +\backslash +frac +\series default + soit en utilisant l'icône de fraction +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\frac" +\end_inset + + de la +\family sans +Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default +. + Vous aurez une fraction vide, avec deux carrés d'insertion, un en haut + et un en bas. + Le curseur va tout seul au numérateur de la fraction. + Pour passer au dénominateur, tapez simplement +\family sans +Bas +\family default +. + Pour remonter, tapez +\family sans +Haut +\family default + (flèches du clavier). + Toute structure mathématique peut être placée dans une fraction, comme + le montre cet exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} +2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 +\end{array}\right)}\right] +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Racines +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Racines +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les racines peuvent être créées en utilisant le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\sqrt" +\end_inset + + ou +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\root" +\end_inset + + de la +\family sans +Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default + ou tapant les commandes +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default + ou +\series bold + +\backslash +root +\series default +. + Avec la commande +\series bold + +\backslash +root +\series default + vous pouvez créer des racines cubiques ou d'ordre plus élevé, alors que + +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default + ne produit que des racines carrées. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Opérateurs avec des bornes +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Opérateurs-avec-bornes" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Sommes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Intégrales +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les signes somme ( +\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ +\end_inset + +) et intégrale ( +\begin_inset Formula $\int$ +\end_inset + +) sont très souvent ornés d'une ou plusieurs bornes. + Ces bornes sont entrées dans LyX juste après le symbole, comme s'il s'agissait + d'un indice et d'un exposant. + Les bornes de la somme seront automatiquement placées au-dessus et au-dessous + du symbole dans le style hors ligne, mais en ligne elles seront sur le + côté, comme dans +\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ +\end_inset + +, comparé à +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\sum_{n=1}^{\infty}\frac{x^{n}}{n}=\ln\left(\frac{1}{1-x}\right) +\] + +\end_inset + +En revanche, les signes +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +intégrale +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + décalent toujours les bornes sur le côté, en ligne : +\begin_inset Formula $\int_{a}^{x}f(t)dt:=F(x)$ +\end_inset + + comme hors ligne : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\int_{-\infty}^{\infty}\frac{dx}{1+x^{2}}=\pi +\] + +\end_inset + +Les deux symboles sont automatiquement mis à la bonne taille en mode hors + ligne. + L'emplacement des bornes (directement au-dessus et au-dessous, ou décalées + vers la droite) peut être changé en plaçant le curseur devant le signe + et en tapant +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-limits" +\end_inset + + ou en utilisant le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Changer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +limites +\family default +. + Le changement exact dépend du signe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certaines autres expressions mathématiques ont cette fonction d'indice mobile, + comme +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Limites +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x) +\] + +\end_inset + +qui place le +\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ +\end_inset + + sous la limite en mode hors ligne, mais pas en mode en ligne, +\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +lim +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + a été entré comme une fonction, en tapant +\family typewriter + +\backslash +lim +\family default + dans LyX en mode math, ou en le choisissant parmi les +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +fonctions +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans la +\family sans +Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default +, voir la Section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Fonctions-math" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les symboles mathématiques +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Symboles +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La plupart des symboles utilisés en mathématique se trouvent dans la +\family sans +Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default +, sous l'une des catégories proposées : +\family sans +Grec, Flèches, Opérateurs, Relations Binaires +\family default +... + Il y a aussi des catégories proposant les symboles de l'AMS ( +\lang english +American Mathematical Society +\lang french +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous connaissez la macro standard LaTeX pour un symbole donné que vous + voulez insérer, vous n'avez pas à vous servir de ces fenêtres, mais elles + vous seront utiles pour les symboles dont vous ne connaissez pas le nom + LaTeX. + Notez que les symboles AMS ne seront affichés graphiquement dans LyX que + si vous installez les polices adéquates, comme c'est décrit dans le manuel + correspondant. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Changer l'espacement +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Espacement +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous voudrez peut-être créer des espaces qui soient différents de l'espacement + proposé implicitement par LaTeX. + Pour cela, tapez +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + + +\family default + ou utilisez le bouton +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\space" +\end_inset + + +\family default + de la +\family sans +Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default +. + Cela génère un petit espace et cela affiche un petit marqueur à l'écran. + Voici un exemple obtenu en tapant la séquence +\series bold +a Ctrl-Espace b +\series default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ +\end_inset + + (ce qui apparaît sous la forme +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png + +\end_inset + +dans LyX). + Vous pouvez changer la taille de cet espace simplement en plaçant le curseur + juste après le marqueur d'espace et en appuyant de nouveau sur la barre + d'espace. + À chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la barre d'espace la taille change. + Le nombre de possibilités étant limité, la taille reviendra à sa valeur + initiale au bout d'un certain nombre de changements. + Certains marqueurs sont représentés en rouge car ils représentent des espaces + négatifs. + Voici deux exemples: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Ctrl-Espace b +\series default + et 3× +\family sans +Espace +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Ctrl-Espace b +\series default + et 5× +\family sans +Espace +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fonctions mathématiques +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Fonctions +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Fonctions-math" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La +\family sans +Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default + contient sous le bouton +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\functions" +\end_inset + + +\family default + un certain nombre de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +fonctions +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + comme +\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ +\end_inset + +, etc. + (vous pouvez les entrer dans une formule en tapant +\series bold + +\backslash +sin +\series default +, etc.) La pratique courante en mathématiques veut que les fonctions qui + sont des noms, comme +\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ +\end_inset + +, ne soit pas en italique pour éviter des confusions puisque +\begin_inset Formula $sin$ +\end_inset + + signifie normalement +\begin_inset Formula $s·i·n$ +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces macros spéciales vont aussi produire un espacement correct autour de + la fonction. + Par exemple l'expression +\begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$ +\end_inset + + sera typographiée différemment de +\begin_inset Formula $asinx$ +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour des mots qui correspondent à des objets mathématiques plus sophistiqués, + comme +\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ +\end_inset + +, la macro change la façon dont les indices sont placés, ce qui est décrit + dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Opérateurs-avec-bornes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Accents +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Accents +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous insérez des caractères accentués dans une formule de la même façon + qu'en mode texte. + Ça peut dépendre de votre clavier, ou des fichiers de profils de touches + que vous utilisez. + Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les macros TeX correspondantes. + C'est-à-dire que vous pouvez saisir +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + + même sans l'avoir sur votre clavier, en tapant +\series bold + +\backslash +hat +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +a +\series default +dans la formule. + Le tableau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Nom-des-accents" + +\end_inset + + reprend les correspondances entre les noms en mode texte et ceux en mode + math pour les divers accents. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Nom-des-accents" + +\end_inset + +Nom des accents et la commande correspondante. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nom +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Commande +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Exemple +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +circonflexe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +hat +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +aigu +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +acute +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +umlaut +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +ddot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +point +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +dot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +brève +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +breve +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +caron +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +check +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +macron +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +bar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +vecteur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +vec +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enfin, vous pouvez choisir un de ces accents parmi les +\family sans +Décorations +\family default + disponibles dans la palette mathématique avec le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\hat" +\end_inset + +, et il s'appliquera à toute sélection que vous aurez faite dans une formule. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Parenthèses et délimiteurs +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Parenthèses-et-Délimiteurs" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Parenthèses +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Délimiteurs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a plusieurs délimiteurs disponibles avec LyX. + Pour un usage courant, les touches +\family typewriter +[{]}()| +\backslash +<> +\family default + devraient suffire, mais l'effet est meilleur avec l'icône +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/math/delim.png + +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils math, surtout si vous voulez encadrer une grande structure +, comme une matrice ou une fraction, ou si vous avez plusieurs profondeurs + de parenthèses. + Par exemple, voici comment vous placeriez les crochets autour d'une matrice + standard : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right] +\] + +\end_inset + +pour rendre plus visibles les niveaux de parenthèses. + Ci-dessous, l'expression de gauche a été saisie en utilisant l'icône de + délimitation +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" +\end_inset + + et l'expression de droite a été saisie en utilisant les parenthèses +\family typewriter +() +\family default +. + +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))} +\] + +\end_inset + +Si vous utilisez l'icône de délimitation, les parenthèses et autres délimiteurs + choisis dans ce menu s'adaptent à la taille de ce qu'elles contiennent. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est très facile de construire les crochets que vous souhaitez. + Cliquez sur le crochet que vous voulez avoir à gauche dans la fenêtre de + gauche et sur celui que vous voulez à droite dans la fenêtre de droite, + et placez-les dans le document en appuyant sur le bouton +\family sans +Insertion +\family default +. + Si vous voulez un côté sans délimiteur, utilisez le bouton vide. + LyX affichera une ligne pointillée, mais n'imprimera rien. + Si vous cochez l'option +\family sans +Apparier +\family default +, vous ne choisissez qu'un seul délimiteur, LyX choisit pour vous le délimiteur + de même type pour l'autre côté. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous décidez après coup de placer des parenthèses (ou une autre structure + mathématique, comme une racine carrée, ou un autre ornement) autour d'une + structure mathématique déjà existante, c'est faisable. + Sélectionnez la structure en question (en maintenant la touche +\family sans +Shift +\family default + enfoncée tout en bougeant le curseur avec les flèches du clavier, ou en + sélectionnant avec la souris). + Ensuite, choisissez les délimiteurs gauche et droit appropriés, et cliquez + sur +\family sans +Insertion +\family default +. + Les parenthèses seront placées autour de la structure sélectionnée. + Les combinaisons les plus courantes (parenthèses, crochets et accolades + associées) peuvent être saisies via les raccourcis clavier. + Par exemple, pour insérer une paire de parenthèses flexibles, sélectionner + la structure à parenthéser et saisir +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-delim ( )" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Matrices et équations sur plusieurs lignes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Matrices +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Équations sur plusieurs lignes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est facile d'entrer un vecteur ou une matrice avec LyX, via la +\family sans +Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default +: il y a un bouton +\family sans +Matrice +\family default + +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" +\end_inset + + +\family default +, qui ouvre une fenêtre pour choisir le nombre de lignes et de colonnes. + Voici un exemple : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +1 & 2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 & 6\\ +7 & 8 & 9 +\end{array}\right) +\] + +\end_inset + +Les parenthèses ne sont pas automatiques, mais vous pouvez les ajouter avec + les +\family sans +Délimiteurs +\family default + comme c'est expliqué dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Parenthèses-et-Délimiteurs" + +\end_inset + +. + Quand vous créez la matrice, vous pouvez décider si les colonnes (ou seulement + certaines d'entre elles) seront alignées à gauche, à droite ou centrées. + Vous modifiez cet alignement avec la case +\family sans +Horizontal +\family default + avec les lettres +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +l +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +r +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, et +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +c +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Ce réglage est implicitement +\family typewriter + ccc +\family default +\SpecialChar \ldots{} + Chaque lettre correspond à une colonne: par exemple, +\family typewriter +lcr +\family default + signifie que la première colonne sera alignée à gauche ( +\family typewriter +l +\family default + pour +\emph on +left +\emph default +), la deuxième sera centrée ( +\family typewriter +c +\family default + pour +\emph on +center +\emph default +) et la troisième sera alignée à droite ( +\family typewriter +r +\family default + pour +\emph on +right +\emph default +). + Ça ressemble à ça : +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\begin{array}{lcr} +\textrm{cette} & \textrm{cette colonne} & \textrm{cette colonne}\\ +\textrm{colonne} & \textrm{est} & \textrm{est alignée}\\ +\textrm{est alignée à gauche} & \textrm{centrée} & \textrm{à droite} +\end{array} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez ajouter des lignes à une matrice déjà existante en tapant +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + dans la matrice, et vous pouvez ajouter des colonnes, et supprimer lignes + et colonnes, dans le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math +\family default +ou les boutons de la palette. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a d'autre tableaux qui peuvent être utilisés dans des formules, comme + la distinction des cas. + L'environnement +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +cas +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + peut être inséré directement avec le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Environnement +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cas, +\family default + ou en utilisant le bouton de la palette ou bien en tapant la commande +\series bold + +\backslash +cases +\series default +. + Voici un exemple : +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\begin{cases} +-1 & x<0\\ +0 & x=0\\ +1 & x>0 +\end{cases} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + +Les équations sur plusieurs lignes sont obtenues en tapant +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + dans une formule. + Dans une formule vide, vous verrez apparaître trois boîtes bleues, une + pour chaque colonne. + Vous pouvez aussi transformer une formule hors ligne existante en formule + multi-lignes en tapant +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + + alors que le curseur se trouve dans la formule d'origine. + La partie de la formule se trouvant avant le signe de relation (signe égal + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + += +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + etc.) sera insérée dans la première colonne, le signe de relations sera + dans la seconde colonne et le reste de la formule sera dans la troisième + colonne. + Une nouvelle ligne sera ajoutée à chaque fois que vous appuirez sur +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +. + Les formules multi-lignes sont toujours des formules hors ligne. + En voici un exemple : +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\ +a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared} +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que la zone centrale est prévue pour les opérateurs de relation, les + structures qui sont placées dans cette colonne sont imprimées en plus petits + caractères: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray*} +\frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} +\end{eqnarray*} + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'environnement de formule multi-ligne qui vient d'être décrit se nomme + +\family typewriter +eqnarray +\family default +. + Il existe d'autres types de formules multi-lignes qui sont mieux adaptées + à certaines situations et que l'on peut utiliser pour améliorer l'espacement + entre les lignes de la formule +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand eqref +reference "eq:asquared" + +\end_inset + +. + Ces autres types sont détaillés dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Types-de-formules-AMS" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Numérotation et étiquetage des équations +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Numérotation-et-étiquetage" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Numérotation des Formules +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math !Référence à des formules +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour numéroter une formule, placez le curseur dedans et utilisez le menu + +\family sans +Editer\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Numéroter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +toute +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +formule +\family default + ou le raccourci clavier +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + +. + Le numéro de la formule apparaît dans LyX sous la forme entre parenthèses. + +\lang english +The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated. + +\lang french + Le positionnement et le format du numéro de formule dépend de la classe + du document. + Dans ce document les numéros sont en principe imprimés avec le numéro du + chapitre, séparés par un point: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{equation} +1+1=2 +\end{equation} + +\end_inset + +Utiliser +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + + sur une formule numérotée va supprimer sa numérotation. + On ne peut numéroter que des formules hors-ligne. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les formules multi-lignes peuvent être numérotées lignes par ligne: utiliser + le menu +\family sans +Editer\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Numéroter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +cette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ligne +\family default + ou le raccourci clavier +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-line-toggle" +\end_inset + + ne modifiera que la numérotation de la ligne où se trouve le curseur: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +1 & = & 3-2\\ +2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ +4 & \leq & 7 +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +Pour activer ou désactiver la numérotation de toutes les lignes en une seule + fois, utilisez le raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + + vu plus haut. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + +On peut faire référence à chaque formule hors ligne du document par son + numéro en utilisant une étiquette. + Comme d'habitude, on ajoute une étiquette en utilisant +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Étiquette +\family default + (bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + +) avec le curseur dans la formule. + Une fenêtre de dialogue s'ouvre pour taper le nom de l'étiquette. + Il est recommandé de garder le préfixe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eq: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + qui est proposé implicitement, car il peut vous aider plus tard à identifier + le type d'élément auquel fait référence cette étiquette, ce qui est utile + quand on a beaucoup d'étiquettes dans un document. + Dans l'exemple suivant nous avons inséré l'étiquette +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +eq:tanhExp +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans la deuxième ligne: +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ + & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +Toutes les lignes avec une étiquette sont numérotées, ce qui fait que LyX + affiche le nom de l'étiquette +\lang english +behind the formula +\lang french + numéro. + Comme pour toutes les étiquettes, vous pouvez faire référence à votre formule + en utilisant le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Référence +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +croisée +\family default +(bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +). + La fenêtre qui s'ouvre vous permet de choisir l'étiquette à laquelle vous + voulez faire référence. + La référence est matérialisée dans LyX par une boîte grise et dans la sortie + finale comme un numéro de formule: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ceci est une référence croisée vers une équation ( +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "eq:tanhExp" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les propriétés des boîtes de références croisées de LyX sont décrites dans + la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Références-croisées" + +\end_inset + +. + Pour réellement supprimer une étiquette, positionnez le curseur en fin + dans la formule et +\lang english +press +\family sans +Del +\family default +\lang french +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Macros définies par l'utilisateur en mode mathématique +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Macros définies par l'utilisateur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Macros +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX permet la définition de macros pour les formules, ce qui est très utile + quand vous avez plusieurs fois la même structure de formule dans votre + document. + Le macros du mode mathématique sont décrites dans le manuel +\emph on +Math +\emph default + dans la section +\emph on +Macros mathématique +\emph default +s. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Réglage fin +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Polices +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Polices +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La police standard pour du texte est l'italique, +\begin_inset Formula $texte$ +\end_inset + +, mais pour les nombres le standard est le romain. + Pour obtenir une police donnée dans une formule, choisissez-la dans la + palette mathématique en utilisant le bouton +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\font" +\end_inset + + +\family default +, ou entrez la commande LaTeX directement, comme c'est indiqué dans la table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Polices-et-commandes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Polices-et-commandes" + +\end_inset + +Polices et commandes correspondantes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Police +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Commande LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathrm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{Gras}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italique}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Chasse\, fixe}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathtt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{TABLEAU\, NOIR}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbb +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathfrak +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIQUE}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathcal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathsf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + vous ne pouvez utiliser que des lettres majuscules avec les polices +\family sans +Tableau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Noir +\family default + et +\family sans +Calligraphique +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand vous utilisez une police spéciale, une boîte bleue est insérée dans + la formule. + Tous les caractères qui seront entrés dans cette boîte seront imprimés + en utilisant cette police. + Si vous tapez +\family sans +Espace +\family default + à l'intérieur de la boîte, le curseur sera positionné à l'extérieur, vous + devez donc utiliser un espace insécable à chaque fois que vous voudrez + avoir un espace à l'intérieur de la boîte. + Voici un exemple où un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +N +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans la police +\family sans +Blackbold +\family default + représente l'ensemble des entiers naturels : +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les styles de police sont emboîtables, comme dans LaTeX. + Ça peut prêter un peu à confusion. + Vous pouvez par exemple mettre un caractère en police +\family sans +Fraktur +\family default + dans une boîte utilisant la police +\family sans +Chasse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fixe +\family default +: +\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Nous conseillons de ne pas utiliser trop souvent cette possibilité. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les changements de police n'ont pas d'effet sur les lettres grecques : +\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Vous pouvez seulement les mettre en gras en utilisant la commande +\series bold + +\backslash +boldsymbol +\series default +, cette commande fonctionne comme les autres commandes qui changent le type + de caractère, elle fonctionne pour tous les symboles, lettres et nombres: + +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un certain nombre d'options pour les polices de caractères sont disponibles + dans le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mode Texte-Math +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +texorpdfstring{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +NdT : Traduction moyenne de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Math Text Mode +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +}{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +texorpdfstring +\series default +est utilisée ici pour éviter que la note apparaisse dans le signet PDF. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Texte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les polices de caractères sont utiles pour entrer quelques caractères dans + une police donnée, mais pas pour saisir du texte. + Pour des portions de texte un peu plus longues, il faut utiliser le texte + mathématique, qui s'obtient à partir de la rubrique +\family sans +Mode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +normal +\family default + sous le bouton +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\font" +\end_inset + + +\family default +de la +\family sans + Palette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématique +\family default + (vous pouvez aussi utiliser le raccourci clavier +\family sans +Alt-M +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +M +\family default +). + Le texte mathématique apparaît dans LyX en noir plutôt qu'en bleu comme + les autres éléments de formules. + Dans le texte mathématique, vous pouvez utiliser des espaces et des accents + comme dans le texte normal. + Voici un exemple: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\begin{cases} +x & \textrm{dans ce cas là}\\ +-x & \textrm{dans l'autre cas} +\end{cases} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Taille de police +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Taille de Police +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a quatre style de police (des tailles relatives) qui sont utilisées + dans le mode math et qui sont choisies automatiquement la plupart du temps. + Leurs noms sont : +\family sans +texte +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +normal ( +\family default +textstyle +\family sans +) +\family default +, +\family sans +hors +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne ( +\family default +displaystyle), +\family sans +script +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(petit) ( +\family default +scriptstyle), et +\family sans +scriptscript +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(plus petit) ( +\family default +scriptscriptstyle). + Pour la plupart des caractères, +\family sans +texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +normal +\family default + et +\family sans +hors +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\family default + sont en fait la même taille, mais dans le cas des fractions, des indices + et des exposants et de quelques autres structures, les caractères sont + plus grands en +\family sans +hors +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\family default +. + À part pour quelques opérateurs qui changent leur taille pour s'adapter + aux différentes situations, tous le texte va être mis dans le style que + LaTeX juge approprié. + On peut passer outre ces choix en utilisant le bouton +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\style" +\end_inset + + +\family default + de la palette mathématique. + Une boîte va être insérée dans laquelle vous pouvez utiliser la taille + choisie. + Par exemple, vous pouvez mettre +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ +\end_inset + +, qui est normalement en +\family sans +texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +normal +\family default +, en +\family sans +hors +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\family default + qui est plus grand: +\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ +\end_inset + +. + Les quatre styles sont ainsi utilisés dans l'exemple suivant: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula $hors\: ligne$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle texte\: normal}$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle script}$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscript}$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Toutes ces tailles de polices du mode mathématique sont relatives, ce qui + veut dire que si tout une structure est mise à une certaine taille avec + le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte +\family default +, toutes les tailles des formules qui le constituent vont s'adapter par + rapport à cette taille. + De la même manière, si la taille de base de tout le document est modifiée, + toutes les polices de caractères vont s'adapter pour conserver les rapports + entre les tailles des caractères. + Par exemple, une formule dans la taille de police +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Très très grand +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\size largest +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +à comparer avec la même formule utilisant la taille implicite: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +La différence ne saute pas aux yeux si vous utilisez l'aperçu. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LaTeX AMS +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +AMS math +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! AMS +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L' +\lang english +American Mathematical Society +\lang french + (AMS) fournit des paquetages LaTeX qui sont d'un usage courant. + LyX gère en partie ces paquetages. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Activer la gestion d'AMS +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En activant l'option +\family sans +Utiliser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paquetage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +math +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +AMS +\family default + du menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dans la rubrique +\family sans +Options +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Maths, +\family default +on inclue les paquetages AMS et on rend disponibles toutes leurs fonctionnalités. + AMS est nécessaire pour plusieurs constructions mathématiques, ce qui fait + que quand vous avez des erreurs LaTeX dans des formules, vérifiez d'abord + que vous avez activé l'AMS. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Types de formules AMS +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Types-de-formules-AMS" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Math ! Equations Multi-ligne +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +AMS fournit un choix de divers types de formules. + LyX vous permet de choisir entre +\family typewriter +align +\family default +, +\family typewriter +alignat +\family default +, +\family typewriter +flalign +\family default +, +\family typewriter +gather +\family default + et +\family typewriter +multline +\family default +. + Voyez la documentation d'AMS, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + +, pour les différences entre ces types de formules. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Autres outils +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Références croisées +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Références-croisées" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +References@Références croisées +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un des points forts de LyX, ce sont les références croisées. + Vous pouvez faire référence à n'importe quelle section, flottant, note + de bas de page, formule mathématique, ou encore liste présente dans votre + document. + Pour faire référence à un élément de votre document, il suffit d'y insérer + une étiquette. + L'étiquette sert à la fois de point d'ancrage pour identifier un endroit + dans le document, et de nom pour y faire référence. + Par exemple, nous voulons faire référence au second élément de la liste + suivante: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Premier élément +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "enu:Second-élément" + +\end_inset + +Second élément +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Troisième élément +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +D'abord nous ajoutons une étiquette dans le second élément, soit avec le + menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Etiquette +\family default + , soit en utilisant le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + + de la palette. + Une boîte grise de ce genre +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/labelQt4.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + est insérée à l'endroit du curseur et une fenêtre apparaît pour vous permettre + de saisir le nom de l'étiquette. + LyX propose implicitement un nom formé des mots de l'élément concerné, + précédés d'un préfixe décrivant le type d'élément concerné. + Dans notre exemple on aura le texte +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +enu:Second-élément +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Le préfixe +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +enu: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + indiquant que l'on a affaire à une +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +énumération +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Si on avait placé l'étiquette juste après une en-tête de section, le préfixe + aurait été +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +sec: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour faire référence à l'élément que l'on vient d'identifier, nous allons + utiliser le nom de son étiquette soit en activant le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Référence +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +croisée, +\family default +soit en utilisant le bouton +\family sans + +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +. + Une boîte grise de référence croisée de ce genre +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/referenceQt4.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + + est insérée et une fenêtre de dialogue s'ouvre et affiche la liste de toutes + les étiquettes du document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Plutôt que d'utiliser +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Référence +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +croisée +\family default +, vous pouvez faire un clic droit sur une étiquette et, dans le menu contextuel + qui apparaît alors, sélectionner +\family sans +Copier comme référence +\family default +. + La référence croisée à cette étiquette est copiée dans le presse-papier + et peut être collée à la position courante du curseur avec le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Coller +\family default +(raccourci clavier +\family sans +Ctrl+V +\family default +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici notre référence: l'élément +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "enu:Second-élément" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est recommandé de mettre un espace insécable +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +L'espace insécable est décrit en section +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espace-Insécable" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + entre le texte et le numéro de la référence pour éviter un éventuel saut + de ligne inesthétique entre les deux. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y six variétés de références croisées: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + affiche le numéro de l'élément, c'est le choix implicite: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." + +\end_inset + +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +() affiche le numéro de l'élément entre parenthèses, c'est le + style utilisé normalement pour faire référence à des formules mathématiques, + en particulier quand le mot +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Équation +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est omis: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand eqref +reference "eq:tanhExp" + +\end_inset + +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + affiche le numéro de la page sur laquelle se trouve l'élément: Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand pageref +reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." + +\end_inset + +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + affiche le mot +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + suivi du numéro de la page sur laquelle se trouve l'élément: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vpageref +reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." + +\end_inset + +; +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +If the label is on the same page, it prints +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +on this page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +on the facing page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +on the previous page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page, it prints +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +on the next page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + affiche le numéro de l'élément, le mot +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et le numéro de la page: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." + +\end_inset + +; +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like +\family sans +\series bold + +\family default +\series default +; otherwise it behaves like +\family sans +\series bold +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Référence +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mise +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +forme affiche une référence croisée qui définit son propre format. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + ce type de référence croisée n'est disponible que si vous avez installé + le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + ou +\series bold +refstyle +\series default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Vous pouvez sélectionner quel paquetage doit être utilisé pour cette fonctionnal +ité en sélectionnant l'option +\family sans +Utiliser refstyle (à la place de prettyref) pour les références croisées +\family default + dans le menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Classe de document +\family default +. + Le paquetage +\begin_inset Flex Strong +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + est implicite pour tout nouveau document car +\begin_inset Flex Strong +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + n'est pas internationalisé. + Le format est spécifié par LyX en ajoutant la commande +\series bold + +\backslash +newrefformat +\series default + (prettyref) ou +\series bold + +\backslash +newref +\series default + (refstyle) au préambule du document. + Par exemple, la directive suivante redéfinit toutes les commandes aux figures + (qui sont marquées dans les étiquettes par +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +fig +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +): +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +newref{fig}{refcmd={l'image on page +\backslash +pageref{#1}}} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Pour les détails sur la gestion des mises en forme, voyez la documentation + des paquetages, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "prettyref,refstyle" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Voici un exemple de référence mise ne forme utilisant +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (l'option est cochée dans le +\emph on +Guide de l'utilisateur +\emph default +, prettyref provoquant des erreurs en français): dans la +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand formatted +reference "sec:Citation" + +\end_inset + +, \SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Référence +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +textuelle affiche la contenu de la légende ou le nom de la référence, par + exemple un titre de section: +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand nameref +reference "fig:Deux-images-déformées." + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le numéro affecté à une étiquette et le numéro de la page sur laquelle elle + se trouve sont calculés automatiquement par LaTeX. + Vous choisissez une des six variétés de références dans le champ Format + de la fenêtre de référence croisée qui s'ouvre quand vous cliquez sur la + boîte de la référence croisée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous ne pouvez utiliser le style +\family sans + +\family default + que pour faire référence à des éléments numérotés de votre document, alors + que vous pouvez toujours utiliser le style +\family sans + +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous voulez faire référence à une section de votre document, placez l'étiquet +te dans l'entête de section, pour un flottant, mettez l'étiquette dans la + légende. + Pour les notes de bas de page, mettez l'étiquette n'importe où dans le + texte de la note. + Pour faire référence à une formule mathématique, voyez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Numérotation-et-étiquetage" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un clic droit sur une référence croisée ouvre un menu contextuel. + Le choix +\family sans + Aller +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'étiquette +\family default + positionne le curseur avant l'étiquette référencée. + Ce choix sera renommé +\family sans +Revenir +\family default + dans le menu contextuel de l'étiquette pour que vous puissiez repositionner + le curseur sur la référence croisée. + Vous pouvez aussi revenir au point de départ avec le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez modifier le nom d'une étiquette à tout moment en cliquant dessus. + Toutes les références croisées faisant référence à cette étiquette seront + automatiquement mises à jour, sans que vous ayez à vous en préoccuper. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si une référence croisée fait référence à une étiquette qui n'existe pas, + vous verrez +\lang english +in LyX +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +BROKEN +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + in the cross-reference label and +\lang french + et deux points d'interrogation à l'impression. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les références sont décrites en détail dans la section +\emph on +Faire référence à des flottants +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Table des matières et autres sommaires +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Table des matières +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Plan +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Tdm" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Table des matières +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Table-des-Matières" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La Table des Matières (TdM) est insérée à partir du menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TdM\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Table +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +matières +\family default +. + Dans LyX elle est affichée sous la forme d'une boîte grise. + Si vous cliquez dessus, la fenêtre +\family sans +Plan +\family default + s'ouvre et affiche toutes les entrées de la Table des matières. + Vous pouvez sauter à un endroit quelconque de votre document en cliquant + sur la ligne correspondante de la table des matières et vous pouvez déplacer + et réarranger les sections de votre document. + C'est une alternative à l'utilisation du menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Plan +\family default + qui est décrit dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Naviguer" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La table des matière reprend automatiquement dans la sortie imprimée toutes + les sections numérotées de votre document. + Si vous avez donné un titre court à une section, comme c'est décrit dans + la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Titres-courts" + +\end_inset + +, c'est lui qui sera utilisé dans la TdM, à la place de l'entête de section. + La section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Profondeur-section" + +\end_inset + + décrit comment ajuster la profondeur à laquelle les sections sont affichées + dans la TdM. + Vous pouvez aussi ajuster la profondeur affichée dans la fenêtre plan en + utilisant la glissière qui se trouve en bas de la fenêtre. + Les sections qui ne sont pas numérotées n'apparaissent pas dans la TdM. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Liste des figures, des tableaux et des algorithmes +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Liste-des-figures," + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les listes des figures, des tableaux et des algorithmes sont à peu près + comme la tables des matières. + Vous pouvez les insérer avec le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TdM +\family default +. + Si vous voulez que vos figures, tableaux ou algorithmes apparaissent dans + une liste, vous devez les placer dans les flottants correspondants et ajouter + une légende. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +URLs et hyperliens +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +URLs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hyperliens +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URLs (Universal Resource Locators) +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:URLs" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On peut insérer des liens vers des pages web ou des adresses mail grâce + au menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +URL +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici un exemple d'URL : la page d'accueil de LyX, +\begin_inset Flex URL +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous ne pouvez pas changer le style du texte de l'URL, il sera toujours + en style +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +chasse fixe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Pour pouvoir typographier le texte du lien, il faut utiliser des hyperliens + comme c'est expliqué dans la section qui suit. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + les URLs ne doivent pas se terminer par une barre de fraction inverse, + sinon vous aurez des erreurs LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hyperliens +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Hyperliens" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On insère des hyperliens avec le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Hyperlien +\family default +ou avec le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "href-insert" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + La fenêtre de dialogue qui apparaît possède deux champs: +\family sans +Cible +\family default + et +\family sans +Nom. + +\family default +Le nom est le texte qui est imprimé pour représenter le lien. + L'hyperlien peut être un lien vers une page web comme ceci: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Page d'accueil de LyX" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + +, ou une adresse mail comme celle-ci: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "liste de diffusion lyx-docs" +target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + +, ou encore un lien vers un fichier. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi lancer des applications via un hyperlien en insérant un + lien et en ajoutant le préfixe +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +run: +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + à la cible du lien. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les hyperliens seront coupés automatiquement en fin de ligne dans une sortie + PDF et deviendront cliquables dans une sortie DVI ou PDF. + Pour modifier le style du texte du lien, sélectionnez l'insert de l'hyperlien + et utilisez la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style de texte +\family default +. + Ceci est par exemple un hyperlien avec un texte en caractères gras sans + empattements: +\family sans +\series bold + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Page d'accueil de LyX" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On peut modifier la couleur des liens en activant l'option +\family sans +Couleur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +liens +\family default + dans la fenêtre de dialogue sur les paramètres PDF (menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Propriétés du PDF +\family default +). + Par exemple, dans ce document, le texte des liens est mis en bleu en ajoutant + l'option +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +urlcolor=blue +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +dans le champ +\family sans +Autres +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +options +\family default + dans la fenêtre de dialogue de propriétés du PDF. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Appendices +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Appendices +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Appendices" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les appendices sont créés avec le menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Début +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ici +\family default +. + Ce menu fait que la portion de document situé entre la position actuelle + du curseur et la fin devient la partie des appendices. + Dans LyX cette partie est soulignée par un cadre rouge. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Chaque chapitre (ou section) qui se trouve dans la partie appendice est + considéré comme un appendice et est numéroté avec un chiffre romain en + majuscule. + On peut faire référence à tous les appendices comme si c'étaient des sections + comme les autres, en voici deux exemples: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Remerciements" + +\end_inset + +; Appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Exporter" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Bibliographie +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliographie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Bibliographie" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a deux façons de créer une bibliographie dans un document LyX. + Vous pouvez utiliser une base de données bibliographique +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Connue sous le nom de base de données +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +BibTeX +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, ce qui est expliqué dans la sous-section suivante, ou vous pouvez entrer + la bibliographie à la main. + Pour la seconde méthode, l'environnement de paragraphe +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default +, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Environnement-biblio" + +\end_inset + +, sera utilisé. + Si vous voulez avoir autre chose que les citations numériques que vous + pouvez voir dans ce document, comme par exemple des citations auteur-année, + vous devez utiliser une base de données bibliographique. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +L'environnement Bibliographie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +À l'intérieur de l'environnement +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default +, chaque paragraphe commence avec une boîte grise de bibliographie avec + un numéro. + Si vous cliquez dessus, vous obtenez une boîte de dialogue où vous allez + pouvoir entrer une +\family sans +Clé +\family default + et une +\family sans +Étiquette +\family default +. + La clé est le nom symbolique que vous allez utiliser pour faire référence + à cette entrée bibliographique. + Par exemple, la seconde entrée de notre bibliographie est un livre sur + LaTeX et nous avons utilisé comme clé +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +latexcompanion +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, qui est une forme abrégée de son titre. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +A tout endroit de votre document vous pouvez faire référence à la clé de + votre entrée bibliographique, soit en utilisant le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Citation +\family default +, soit en utilisant le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" +\end_inset + +. + Une boîte de citation est alors insérée et une fenêtre de dialogue de citation + s'ouvre pour vous permettre de sélectionner une ou plusieurs clés dans + la liste des clés disponibles. + La boîte de citation sera étiquetée avec la clé à laquelle elle fait référence. + Si vous cliquez sur la boîte de citation, la fenêtre de dialogue réapparaît + et vous pouvez modifier la référence. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les citations apparaissent à l'impression comme un nombre entre deux crochets. + Si vous avez défini une +\family sans +Étiquette +\family default +, c'est elle qui va apparaître, à la place du nombre. + Voici deux exemples: le premier sans étiquette et le second avec l'étiquette + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Remerciements +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Lisez le livre +\family sans +LaTeX Companion Second Edition +\family default +: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les membres de l'équipe LyX sont listés dans les remerciements: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest + label via the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). + All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les bases de données bibliographiques (BibTeX) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliographie ! Bases de données +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliographie ! BibTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Bases-de-Données-Biblio" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les base de données bibliographiques sont utiles quand vous utilisez la + même bibliographie pour plusieurs documents +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Elles sont aussi utiles pour garder une base d'articles et les notes qui + les concernent. + La plupart des programmes de gestion de bases de données mentionnées plus + loin vous permettent d'enregistrer des annotations ou des rapports avec + vos données bibliographiques. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Elles permettent aussi d'avoir facilement une mise en forme uniforme pour + toutes les entrées de la bibliographie. + Vous pouvez rassembler dans une base de données tous les livres et tous + les articles concernant le domaine dans lequel vous travaillez. + Ensuite cette base peut être utilisée pour différents documents, puisque + seules les entrées auxquelles vous faites référence dans le document sont + incorporées à sa bibliographie. + Cela vous évite d'avoir à noter quels articles et quels livres vous avez + cité. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La base de donnée est un fichier texte dont l'extension est +\family typewriter + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +.bib +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et qui contient les informations bibliographiques sous un format spécial. + Ce format est expliqué dans les livres sur LaTeX ( +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" + +\end_inset + +). + En principe, on utilise un programme dédié pour créer et modifier les entrées + de la base de données. + Dans le Wiki de LyX, +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +vous trouverez une sélection de programmes pour gérer des bases de données + BibTeX.. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour utiliser une base de données dans votre document, utilisez le menu + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TdM\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Bibliographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +BibT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. + Une boîte grise sera insérée et une fenêtre de dialogue va s'ouvrir. + Dans cette fenêtre vous pourrez ajouter une ou plusieurs bases de données + et choisir un fichier de style. + L'option +\family sans +Ajouter la bibliographie à la TdM +\family default + ajoute une entrée de table des matières pour la bibliographie. + Dans la liste déroulante +\family sans +Contenu +\family default + vous pouvez sélectionner quelle partie de la base de donnée doit être imprimée: + la totalité des entrées ou juste les références citées dans le document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le fichier de style est un fichier texte possédant une extension +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +.bst +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + qui va définir la mise en forme de toutes les entrées de la bibliographie. + Votre distribution LaTeX devrait vous fournir plusieurs de ces fichiers + et de nombreux éditeurs fournissent leur propres fichiers de style spéciaux, + ce qui fait que vous n'avez en principe pas à vous occuper de la mise en + forme. + Il est bien sûr possible d'écrire votre propre fichier de style, mais c'est + plutôt une affaire d'experts +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pour avoir des informations sur la façon de le faire, voyez +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://www.ctan.org/get/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insérer une citation fonctionne exactement comme dans le cas précédent.. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour créer la bibliographie à partir de la base de donnée et des citations + que vous avez insérées dans votre document, LyX utilise le programme BibTeX. + Vous pouvez choisir quelle variante du programme doit être utilisée pour + le traitement, Ce programme peut être contrôlé par un certain nombre d'options + que vous pouvez ajouter dans +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bibliographie +\family default + ou dans +\family sans +\lang english +Tools +\lang french +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Preferences +\lang french +\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Sorties +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default + dans le champ +\family sans +Commande +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +BibT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +. + Les variantes suivantes sont autorisées: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +biber fournit une fonctionnalité Unicode complète, une mémoire sans limite, + mais ne fonctionne pas avec d'autres paquetages bibliographiques (comme + par exemple +\series bold +natbib +\series default +), que le paquetage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\series bold +biblatex +\series default +; cette option est recommandée pour les textes multilingues et pour les + langues qui n'utilisent pas l'alphabet latin; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex le standard, ne permet pas l'usage de caractères spéciaux dans les + entrées bibliographiques qui ne soient pas encodables sur 7 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bits, possède une mémoire limitée, fonctionne avec tous les paquetages bibliogra +phiques sauf +\series bold +biblatex; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex8 autorise tous les caractères encodables sur 8 bits, possède une + mémoire plus grande que +\family sans +bibtex +\family default +, fonctionne avec tous les paquetages bibliographiques. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce programme peut être contrôlé par un certain nombre d'options que vous + pouvez ajouter sous la spécification des variantes. + Avant d'ajouter des options, il est fortement recommandé de lire le manuel + de +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand vous activez l'option +\family sans +Bibliographie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sections +\family default + dans le menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Bibliographie +\family default +, il est possible d'avoir des bibliographies multiples et par section. + Ceci est expliqué avec d'autres particularités dans le manuel +\emph on +Options avancées, +\emph default + section +\emph on +Personnaliser les bibliographies avec BibTeX +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous avons utilisé deux bibliographies dans ce document pour montrer la + différence entre les deux méthodes utilisées pour les créer. + Comme vous pouvez le constater, la bibliographie qui a été créée à partir + d'une base de données ne reprend que les entrées qui sont citées dans le + corps du document. + Nous avons utilisé le fichier de style +\family sans +alphadin.bst +\family default + pour avoir dans notre bibliographie le système de clés de référence assez + complexe utilisé en Allemagne. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Format de bibliographie +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bibliographie ! Format +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans la boîte de dialogue de citation, vous pouvez choisir un format de + citation spécial. + Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous avez besoin d'activer l'option +\family sans +Natbib +\family default + dans la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dans la rubrique +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default +. + Donner un style de citation pour une référence donnée remplace le style + appliqué implicitement. + Pour le style appliqué à l'ensemble des citations de votre document, utilisez + les fichiers de styles BiBTeX, comme c'est expliqué dans la section précédente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Note: vous ne pouvez pas utiliser tous les styles bibliographiques énumérés + dans la fenêtre. + Si vous avez une erreur de compilation, changez de style. + Les styles finissant par +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +nat +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + sont sûrement compatibles. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi fournir, dans la fenêtre de citation, du texte qui apparaîtra + avant ou après votre citation. + Voici un exemple où nous fait que le texte +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Chapitre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + apparaisse après la référence: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voyez +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "Chapitre 3" +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Index +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Génération +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Index" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une entrée d'index est créée en utilisant le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Entrée +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'index +\family default + ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "index-insert" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + Une boîte est insérée contenant le texte qui apparaîtra dans l'index. + Le mot dans lequel le curseur se trouve ou la portion de texte qui est + actuellement sélectionnée est proposé comme entrée d'index par LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'index lui même est inséré dans le document avec le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TdM\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Index +\family default +. + Une boîte bleu clair étiquetée +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Index +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + apparaîtra à l'endroit où l'index sera imprimé dans la sortie finale. + La boîte de l'index n'est pas cliquable comme les autre boîtes de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Nous donnons une courte description des commandes d'indexation dans les + sections qui suivent. + Pour avoir une description détaillée des mécanismes d'indexation de LaTeX, + jetez un coup d'œil dans un des livres traitant de LaTeX +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Rassembler les entrées d'index +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Rassembrer les entrées +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les entrées d'index sont souvent rassemblées pour permettre au lecteur une + recherche plus rapide dans l'index. + Par exemple, nous voulons rassembler les entrées concernant les listes + à puces et les énumérations sous l'entrée +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Listes +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + D'abord, nous allons créer une entrée +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Listes +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Env-par-listes" + +\end_inset + + qui est la section sur les listes. + Nous insérons ensuite une entrée d'index dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Enumeration" + +\end_inset + + qui parle des énumérations. + Dans le champ de l'entrée d'index, nous insérons la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Listes ! Énumérations +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On fait la même chose avec les listes à puces (section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:ListePuces" + +\end_inset + +), et cette fois on met la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Listes ! Listes à puces +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le point d'exclamation +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +! +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + marque les niveaux de regroupement. + Vous pouvez avoir jusqu'à trois niveaux, chaque niveau d'index est décalé + un peu plus par rapport au précédent. + Il n'est pas obligatoire de créer une entrée d'index pour le niveau le + plus élevé. + Si nous n'avions pas d'entrée pour +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Listes +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, LaTeX en imprimerait une quand même, mais sans numéro de page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ensemble de pages consécutives +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Pages consécutives +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En principe une entrée d'index apparaît avec le numéro de la page où se + trouve la section indexée. + Mais parfois vous avez besoin d'indexer un ensemble de pages sous une même + entrée d'index. + Par exemple, si nous voulons indexer les environnements de paragraphes, + nous allons créer une entrée d'index dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Environnements-par" + +\end_inset + + avec la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Environnements de paragraphe|( +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +et une autre à la fin de la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LyX-Code" + +\end_inset + + avec la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +Environnements de paragraphes|) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les commandes +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|( +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|) +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + respectivement ouvrent et ferment la plage de pages indexées. + Vous pouvez aussi ajouter la même entrée d'index à plusieurs endroits de + votre document. + Elles apparaîtront toutes dans une seule entrée dans la liste d'index, + avec une liste de numéros de pages séparés par des virgules. + Un exemple est l'entrée d'index +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Document ! Paramètres +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans ce manuel. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Références croisées +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Références croisées +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est aussi possible de faire référence à une autre entrée d'index. + Nous faisons référence, par exemple, dans l'entrée d'index +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +GIF +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Formats-d'images" + +\end_inset + +) à l'entrée d'index +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Formats d'images +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + qui est dans la même section, en utilisant la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +GIF|see{Formats d'images} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les accolades doivent être insérées en code TeX. + Le texte qui se trouve entre les accolades est l'entrée d'index à laquelle + on fait référence. + La référence apparaîtra à l'impression sans numéro de page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ordre des entrées d'index +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Ordre des entrées +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez utiliser des caractères accentués dans vos entrées d'index, + mais dans ce cas les entrées risquent de ne plus suivre l'ordre correct. + Les entrées d'index sont triées par ordre alphabétique, mais LaTeX +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +La génération de l'index est réalisée en interne par un programme séparé, + voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Programme-d'indexation" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + ne sait pas comment ordonner les caractères accentués dans les différentes + langues. + Nous avons créé comme exemple trois entrées d'index bidons +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En français dans le texte (NdT) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maison +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maïs +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, et +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maître +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entrées bidons ! maïs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entrées bidons ! maître +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entrées bidons ! maïs@maison +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + elles seront triées dans l'ordre maïs, maître, maison, mais nous aurions + préféré l'ordre maïs, maison, maître. + Pour obtenir ce résultat, nous utilisons la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +entrée +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +précédente@entrée +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +courante +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans notre cas, nous voulons avoir +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maison +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + après +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maïs +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Nous écrivons donc comme entrée d'index pour le mot +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maison +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +maïs@maison +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'entrée précédente n'a pas besoin d'être une vraie entrée, présente dans + le document, vous pouvez utiliser un mot qui donne à LaTeX l'ordre dans + lequel il doit classer l'entrée courante. + Voyez la sous-section suivante pour un exemple. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans certains cas l'ordre des entrées d'index n'est pas correct quand vous + utilisez le programme +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +pour générer l'index (voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Programme-d'indexation" + +\end_inset + +). + +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + va par exemple imprimer l'entrée d'index pour le paquetage LaTeX aeguill + de la section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Document-Polices" + +\end_inset + + après les entrées des autres paquetages LaTeX bien que toutes ces entrées + pour des commandes commencent toutes par +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Paquetages LaTeX ! +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +. + La raison est que l'entrée d'index pour aeguill se trouve dans une note + de bas de page. + Pour contourner ce bogue de +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +, ajoutez ces commandes au préambule de votre document : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +let +\backslash +OrgIndex +\backslash +index +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand*{ +\backslash +index}[1]{ +\backslash +OrgIndex{#1}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Typographie des entrées d'index +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Format des entrées +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez changer l'apparence de vos entrées d'index grâce à la fenêtre + de dialogue de style du texte. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entrées bidons ! +\shape slanted +Ceci est une entrée en italique +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\shape slanted + +\shape default +Vous pouvez aussi changer le format du numéro de page en utilisant le caractère + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +| +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + suivi par une commande LaTeX sans sa barre de fraction inverse. + Par exemple, nous pouvons écrire +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +numéro de page en italique:|textit +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +pour obtenir le numéro de page en italique. +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entrées bidons ! numéro de page en italique :|textit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Normalement, toutes les commandes LaTeX commencent par une barre de fraction + inverse, mais dans ce cas spécial +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\series bold +|commande +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + signifie en fait +\series bold + +\backslash +commande{numéro +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page} +\series default +. + Voyez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" + +\end_inset + + pour en apprendre un peu plus sur la syntaxe des commandes LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + la typographie individuelle des entrées d'index ne fonctionne que si vous + utilisez le programme +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + pour générer l'index, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Programme-d'indexation" + +\end_inset + +. + Cependant, si vous utilisez +\family sans +xindy +\family default +, cela ne fonctionnera que pour le texte en gras ou en italique. + Cela vient du fait que +\family sans +xindy +\family default + demande de redéfinir les éléments sémantiques avant qu'ils puissent être + utilisés, voir +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "p. 678 ff." +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + + pour plus de détails. + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En général, nous vous déconseillons de typographier les numéros de pages + directement comme c'est décrit ci-dessus. + À la place, vous devriez écrire une macro dans le préambule et l'utiliser. + Peut-être voulez vous que toutes les pages qui font référence à la définition + du terme indexé soient en italique pour que le lecteur puisse retrouver + facilement les définitions. + Si c'est le cas, mettez ce qui suit dans le préambule +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +IndexDef}[1]{ +\backslash +textit{#1}} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +and write +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +mon entrée|IndexDef +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +dans l'entrée d'index +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Entrées bidons ! mon entrée|IndexDef +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + L'avantage est que si vous changez d'avis plus tard ou si votre éditeur + demande que les définitions ne soient pas en italique, mais en gras, vous + n'aurez qu'à modifier la macro qui se trouve dans le préambule, et pas + chacune des entrées d'index. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi changer la mise en forme de l'ensemble de votre index. + Par exemple, nous avons mis la boîte indiquant la position de l'index en + gras pour que toutes les entrées d'index soient en caractères gras. + Pour des situations plus complexes vous aurez à utiliser un fichier de + style d'index ( +\emph on +Index Style File +\emph default +), voyez la documentation de +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + ou de +\family sans +xindy +\family default + pour plus de détails, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Le programme d'indexation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index ! Le programme +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Programme-d'indexation" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand le programme de génération d'index +\family sans +xindy +\family default + est installé, LyX l'utilise implicitement, sinon il utilise le programme + +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +. + Ces deux programmes peuvent être contrôlés par des options qui sont modifiées + dans la fenêtre de dialogue des préférences de LyX , voyez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" + +\end_inset + +. + Les options disponibles sont listées et expliquées dans +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +. + Vous pouvez aussi préciser un autre programme pour générer l'index. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous avez besoin d'options spécifiques ou d'un programme d'indexation + pour un document particulier, vous pouvez définir les options ou le programme + dans +\family sans + Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Index. + +\family default +Ceci est particulièrement utile si vous devez transmettre des options spécifique +s au à la langue ou si vous avez besoin d'un format particulier. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Plusieurs index +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Index!Plusieurs index +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans de nombreux domaines, il est courant d'avoir plus d'un index. + Par exemple, vous pourrez avoir besoin de créer un +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Index des noms +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en plus de l'index standard. + LaTeX ne prévoit pas nativement cette possibilité, mais de nombreux paquetages + permettent d'ajouter cette fonctionnalité. + LyX utilise le paquetage +\series bold +splitidx +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! splitidx +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + pour créer des index multiples, paquetage inclus dans toutes les distributions + LaTeX récentes. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Si la vôtre ne l'inclut pas, consultez le catalogue TeX, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +. + Notez que le paquetage ne contient pas seulement un style LaTeX, mais également + des pré-processeurs spécifiques qui doivent être également installés. + Consultez le manuel du paquetage pour les détails. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La paramétrage de LyX pour l'utilisation de plusieurs index est accessible + via +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Index +\family default +, en cochant l'option +\family sans +Utiliser plusieurs index +\family default +. + Noter que le liste +\family sans +Index disponibles +\family default + contient implicitement l'index standard +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Index +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Pour ajouter d'autres index, ajouter un nom d'index (tel qu'il devra apparaître + dans l'en-tête) dans le champ +\family sans +Nouveau +\family default + et appuyer sur +\family sans +Ajouter +\family default +. + Le nouvel index doit apparaître dans la liste. + Si vous le désirez, vous pouvez attribuer une couleur LyX aux étiquettes + correspondantes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une fois ces modifications faites, vous devez retrouver le nouvel index + dans +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TdM +\family default +: le menu +\family sans +Insertion +\family default + doit faire apparaître une entrée pour chacun des index supplémentaires + que vous avez définis. + La tâche d'indexation est la même que pour l'index implicite, mais il y + a quelques fonctionnalités supplémentaires: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +si vous voulez changer l'attribution d'une entrée d'index particulière, + un clic droit sur l'étiquette de l'entrée ouvre une fenêtre dans laquelle + cette action est possible; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +avec un clic droit sur une index, vous pouvez modifier son type. + De plus, vous pouvez définir une liste d'index en tant que +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Sous-index +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Si vous choisissez cette action, l'en-tête de cette liste verra son niveau + diminué d'une unité: par exemple, si vous utilisez une classe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +book +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, où l'en-tête standard d'index est au niveau chapitre, les sous-index seront + définis en tant que sections et pourront alors être inclus dans des index + qui ne sont pas déclarés sous-index. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Glossaire +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Glossaire" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glossaire +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclature|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Glossaire +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On a parfois besoin de compiler une liste de tous les symboles utilisés + dans un document avec une brève description pour chacun – on appelle cela + un glossaire ou une nomenclature ou encore une liste des symboles. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour pouvoir créer des glossaires, vous avez besoin du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Vous le trouverez dans le catalogue TeX, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + ou en utilisant le gestionnaire de paquetages de votre installation LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une entrée de glossaire est créée en plaçant le curseur juste après le symbole + que l'on veut référencer en utilisant le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Entrée +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +glossaire +\family default + ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "nomencl-insert" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + Une boîte grise marquée +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Nom +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est insérée et une fenêtre de dialogue apparaît pour décrire l'entrée de + glossaire. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une entrée de glossaire consiste en deux éléments principaux. + Le premier est le symbole que vous voulez référencer et le deuxième est + la description que vous voulez lui attacher. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + il faut taper du code LaTeX valide dans tous les champs de la fenêtre de + dialogue de glossaire. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Définition et mise en forme du glossaire +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glossaire ! Mise en forme +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand votre symbole est utilisé dans des formules mathématiques, vous devez + le mettrez dans le champ +\family sans +Symbole +\family default + sous la forme d'une formule LaTeX. + par exemple pour référencer le symbole +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, tapez ceci: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series default +Le caractère +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +$ +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + indique le début et la fin de la formule. + La commande LaTeX pour une lettre grecque est obtenue en prenant son nom + (en anglais) et en ajoutant une barre de fraction inverse +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\backslash + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + devant. + Pour les lettres grecques majuscules, il suffit de mettre en majuscule + la première lettre du nom, comme par exemple +\series bold + +\backslash +Sigma +\series default + (une brève introduction à la syntaxe LaTeX est donnée dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte +\family default + pour mettre en forme le texte de description, vous devez utiliser des commandes + LaTeX. + Par exemple la description de l'entrée de glossaire du +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans ce document est: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +entrée bidon pour le symbole +\backslash +textsf{sigma} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +La commande +\series bold + +\backslash +textsf +\series default + sélectionne une police +\family sans +sans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +empattements +\family default +. + Pour obtenir une police +\series bold +grasse +\series default +, utilisez la commande +\series bold + +\backslash +textbf +\series default +, pour une police +\family typewriter +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +chasse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fixe, +\family default + utilisez +\series bold + +\backslash +texttt +\series default +, pour du texte mis en +\emph on +évidence, +\emph default + utiliser +\series bold + +\backslash +emph +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si les caractères | +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +! +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +, @ et +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +" apparaissent dans les entrées de la nomenclature, ils doivent être protégés + en ajoutant un caractère +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +double apostrophe +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + avant eux. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ordre de tri des entrées de glossaire +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glossaire ! Ordre des entrées +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les entrées de glossaire sont classées dans l'ordre alphabétique du code + LaTeX de la définition du symbole. + Cela peut donner des résultats indésirables quand vous utilisez des symboles + qui se trouvent dans des formules mathématiques. + Supposons que nous avons des entrées de glossaire pour les symboles +\emph on +a +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "a" +description "entrée illustrative pour le symbole \"a\"" + +\end_inset + + +\emph default + et +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +prefix "sigma" +symbol "$\\sigma$" +description "entrée illustrative pour le symbole \\textsf{sigma}" + +\end_inset + +. + Ils seront triés comme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +a +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + – le +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + sera rangé avant le +\emph on +a +\emph default + puisque le caractère +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +$ +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est placé avant le +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\emph on +a +\emph default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + quand on les compare. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour contrôler l'ordre de tri, vous pouvez changer le champ +\family sans +Classé +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +comme +\family default + dans la boîte de dialogue de glossaire. + Les entrées seront alors triées en utilisant cette entrée et non pas la + définition du symbole. + Dans notre exemple, on peut entrer +\family typewriter +sigma +\family default + dans ce champ pour le symbole +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +, et alors +\emph on +a +\emph default + sera rangé avant +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour faire des groupements ou pour des astuces pour classer les entrées, + voyez la documentation de +\series bold +nomencl +\series default +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Options de glossaire +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glossaire ! Options +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le paquetage +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + offre plusieurs options pour modifier l'apparence du glossaire. + Voici quelques-unes de ces options, pour plus d'options, voyez la documentation +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refeq ajoute +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, voir équation ( +\emph on +eq +\emph default +) +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + à chaque entrée de glossaire, avec +\family sans +\emph on +eq +\family default +\emph default + le numéro de la dernière équation située juste avant l'entrée de glossaire; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refpage ajoute +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +, page ( +\emph on +page +\emph default +) +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + à chaque entrée de glossaire, avec +\family sans +\emph on +page +\family default +\emph default + est le numéro de la page sur laquelle apparaît l'entrée de glossaire; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +intoc insère le glossaire dans la table de matières. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour utiliser une ou plusieurs de ces options, ajoutez-les, séparés par + des virgules, à la liste d'options de la classe de document de la fenêtre + de dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + Dans ce document, nous avons utilisé les options +\series bold +refpage, intoc +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les deux premières options seulement pour certaines + entrées de glossaires quand vous ajoutez une des commandes qui suivent + dans le champ +\family sans +Description +\family default + de la fenêtre de glossaire: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeq comme l'option +\series bold +refeq +\series default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefpage comme l'option +\series bold +refpage +\series default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeqpage notation abrégée de +\series bold + +\backslash +nomrefeq +\backslash +nomrefpage +\series default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomnorefeq, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefpage, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefeqpage désactive les options correspondantes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les mots tels que +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + sont automatiquement traduits pour cerianes langues de documents. + Sinon, ajoutez v)ces lignes au préambule LaTeX: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation +\backslash +nobreakspace(#1)} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +pagedeclaration}[1]{, page +\backslash +nobreakspace{}#1} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +en remplaçant +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\lang english +see equation +\lang french + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + par leur traduction. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Impression du glossaire +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glossaire ! Impression +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour imprimer le glossaire dans votre document, utilisez +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Listes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TdM\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Glossaire +\family default +. + Une boîte bleu clair marquée +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Glossaire +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est insérée pour montrer la place à laquelle le glossaire sera imprimé. + Via un clic droit dans la boîte, la taille des espacements pour les symboles + peut être modifiée. + Vous pouvez choisir parmi ces réglages: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Implicite un espacement de 1cm est inséré; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Taille +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'étiquette +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +plus +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +longue la largeur du symbole le plus large de tout le glossaire est insérée; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Réglable espacement paramétrable. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans la sortie imprimée le titre du glossaire devrait apparaître comme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Nomenclature +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Si ce nom ne vous plaît pas, vous pouvez le changer en redéfinissant la + commande +\series bold + +\backslash +nomname +\series default + dans le préambule. + Par exemple, si vous voulez utiliser +\emph on +Liste des Symboles +\emph default +, ajoutez la ligne suivante au préambule: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +nomname}{Liste des Symboles} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Moteur d'indexation pour un glossaire +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glossaire!Moteur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:programme-glossaire" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX utilise le programme +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + pour créer le glossaire. + Ce dernier fait partie de toutes les distributions LaTeX. + La fenêtre de dialogue de préférences de LyX permet de choisir un autre + programme ou de contrôler +\family sans +makeindex +\family default + en ajoutant des options, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-settings" + +\end_inset + +. + Les options disponibles sont listées et expliquées dans +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl,makeindex" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Branches +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Branches +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Branches +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Branches" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est parfois utile de masquer une partie du document à l'impression. + Par exemple, un enseignant qui prépare un examen ne souhaite certainement + pas que les solutions soient distribuées aux élèves, mais avoir les questions + et les réponses dans le même document peut rendre la vie plus facile aux + correcteurs. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans ces cas, LyX permet de créer plusieurs branches pour le même document. + Le texte n'apparaîtra dans la sortie que si sa branche est activée. + Pour créer une branche, vous pouvez utiliser +\family sans + Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Branche\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Insérer une nouvelle branche +\family default + (si vous désirez simplement ajouter une nouvelle branche) ou aller à la + fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default +, rubrique +\family sans +Branches +\family default +: vous pouvez modifier dans cette fenêtre le nom de la branche, son état + d'activation (c'est-à-dire si le contenu est inclus ou non dans la sortie), + la couleur de fond qui sert à la distinguer dans le document et si la nom + de la branche doit être accolé au nom de fichier du document lors de l'exportat +ion (vois un exemple ci-dessous). + De plus, cette fenêtre de dialogue vous permet de fusionner deux branches + (il suffit de renommer une branche avec le nom de l'autre) et d'ajouter + des +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +branches inconnues +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (branches ajoutées au document par copier/coller sans avoir été définies + explicitement) à la liste des branches du document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le texte qui est spécifique à une branche est mis dans des boîtes de branche. + Ces boîtes sont insérées en passant par le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Branche +\family default + où vous pouvez choisir la branche à laquelle doit être rattaché le texte. + Vous pouvez par la suite modifier la branche à la quelle est affectée une + boîte en faisant un clic droit dessus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici un exemple, où seules les questions apparaissent à l'impression, la + branche +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Réponses +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est désactivée et donc n'apparaît pas dans la sortie. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Question +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +Question: Qui a été le premier prix Nobel de physique ? +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Réponse +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard +Réponse: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous activez +\family sans +Suffixe du fichier +\family default + dans la fenêtre +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Branches +\family default +, le nom des branches actives sera accolé au nom de fichier du document + lors de l'exportation. + Soit par exemple un fichier +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen.lyx +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + doté des branches ci-dessus. + Si +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Suffixe du fichier +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est activé, l'exportation PDF du document sera dénommé +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen.pdf +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + si aucune des branches n'est active, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen-Question.pdf si la seule branche +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +question +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est active comme ici, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen-Réponse +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + si seule la branche +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Réponse +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est active, et enfin +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Examen-Question-Réponse +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + si les deux branches sont actives. + De cette façon, vous pouvez exporter différentes versions du document sans + trop de peine. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour utiliser la sortie conditionnelle à des endroits où vous ne pouvez + pas utiliser de branches, comme dans des équations, vous pouvez utiliser + des définitions LaTeX spéciales pour chaque branche. + Par exemple, vous pouvez définir pour la branche question +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pour une introduction à la syntaxe LaTeX, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +reponse}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +et pour la branche réponse +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +reponse}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Question +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +reponse}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch Réponse +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +reponse}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est maintenant possible d'utiliser les commandes +\series bold + +\backslash +question{\SpecialChar \ldots{} +} +\series default + et +\series bold + +\backslash +reponse{\SpecialChar \ldots{} +} +\series default + pour obtenir une sortie conditionnelle. + Voici un exemple de formule où seule la partie +\series bold + +\backslash +question +\series default + apparaît: +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\reponse{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\reponse{-\sqrt{3}}. +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +À l'intérieur du mode math, on peut obtenir le même effet en utilisant des + macros, voir le manuel +\emph on +Math +\emph default +s. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout + files (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.). + For this advanced usage, see the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual, section +\lang french + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Flex insets and InsetLayout +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Propriétés du PDF +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:propriétés-du-PDF" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDF ! Propriétés +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Paramètres du document +\family default + permet, dans la rubrique +\family sans +Propriétés du PDF +\family default +, d'activer des options spéciales pour la sortie PDF de votre document. + Toutes les options qui sont proposées viennent du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +which will link +\lang french + toutes les références croisées seront transformées en liens dans les sorties + DVI et PDF. + Cela signifie que le lecteur de votre document pourra cliquer sur un élément + de la table de matières ou sur une référence pour voir la partie du document + référencée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les informations d'en-tête que vous pouvez entrer dans l'onglet +\family sans +Général +\family default + sont enregistrées dans le fichier PDF comme propriétés du fichier. + De nombreux programmes sont capables d'extraire ces informations pour par + exemple reconnaître automatiquement qui est l'auteur ou quel est le sujet + d'un PDF donné. + C'est très utilisé pour trier, classer ou utiliser les PDF pour des recherches + bibliographiques. + Quand l'option +\family sans +Compléter automatiquement l'en-tête +\family default + est activée, LyX essaie d'extraire les informations de l'en-tête à partir + du titre de votre document et des données sur l'auteur. + L'option +\family sans +Charger en mode plein écran +\family default + ouvrira le PDF en mode plein écran, ce qui est particulièrement utile pour + les présentations. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans l'onglet +\family sans +hyperlien +\family default + vous pouvez préciser l'aspect que devront avoir les liens et si des renvois + bibliographiques doivent être créés. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +The +\family sans +Break +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +over +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +lines +\family default + option allows long links to be split; +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +frames +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +around +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + and +\family sans +Color +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames; +\family sans +Color +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + colors the different links. + The default colors are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color magenta +\lang english +magenta +\color inherit + for hyperlinks and URLs +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color red +\lang english +red +\color inherit + for links +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color green +\lang english +green +\color inherit + for citations +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +but you can change these in the field +\family sans +Additional options +\family default +. + For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If the option +\family sans +Backreferences +\family default + is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different + entries +\lang french +, indiquant le numéro de la section, de la diapositive ou de la page du + document où cette entrée est citée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans l'onglet +\family sans +Signets +\family default + vous pouvez indiquer si des signets PDF doivent être générés pour chaque + section pour faciliter la navigation dans votre document. + Vous pouvez décider si les signets doivent être numérotés comme les sections + de votre document ou non. + Avec la case +\family sans +Ouverture des signets +\family default + vous pouvez préciser le niveau de sectionnement des signets qui sera affiché + quand on ouvrira le PDF. + Par exemple, le niveau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 affichera toutes les sections et sous-sections, alors que le niveau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 n'affichera que les sections. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les propriétés du PDF sont aussi utilisées dans ce document. + Si vous regardez dans les paramètres du présent document, vous verrez que + quelques options supplémentaires de +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + sont utilisées. + Pour avoir une explication sur ces dernières nous vous référons au manuel + du paquetage hyperref +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Le code TeX et la syntaxe LaTeX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Code-TeX" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les boîtes de code TeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Code TeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Boites-code-TeX" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Comme LyX utilise LaTeX en interne, il accepte de nombreuses commandes ou + constructions LaTeX, mais pas toutes. + LaTeX est constitué de centaines de paquetages qui fournissent une grande + quantité de commandes. + Les paquetages sont souvent mis à jour et des nouveaux sont ajoutés. + Cela a comme conséquence que vous pouvez typographier à peu près n'importe + quoi, puisque chaque problème a son paquetage LaTeX. + Mais LyX, de son côté, ne peut suivre et être constamment à jour pour accepter + tous les paquetages avec toutes leurs commandes. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mais ne vous inquiétez pas, vous pouvez quand même utiliser votre paquetage + préféré en utilisant ses commandes LaTeX directement dans LyX. + Vous n'aurez qu'à les placer dans une boîte de code TeX. + On crée une boîte de code TeX soit en utilisant le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Code +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default + soit en cliquant sur le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + +). + La boîte de code TeX, peut être ouverte avec un clic gauche et refermée + avec un clic droit et en sélectionnant +\family sans +Fermer l'insert +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez mettre une commande complète ou incomplète dans une boîte de + code TeX. + Incomplète signifie que les arguments de la commande peuvent être du texte + LyX standard et donc se trouver hors de la boîte. + Un exemple pour comprendre: vous voulez tracer un cadre autour d'un mot + et donc utiliser la commande LaTeX +\series bold + +\backslash +fbox +\series default +, vous allez écrire la partie commande +\series bold + +\backslash +fbox{ +\series default + dans une première boîte de code TeX, ensuite vous écrivez votre mot et + pour finir vous mettez l'accolade fermante } dans une seconde boîte de + code TeX, derrière votre mot. + Le mot qui est entre les deux boîtes de code TeX est l'argument de la commande + et il va apparaître comme dans l'exemple suivant : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ERT.png + lyxscale 75 + scale 50 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ce qui va donner : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ceci est une ligne avec un mot +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fbox{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +encadré +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + après une commande LaTeX sans paramètres, vous devez ajouter une espace + pour informer LaTeX que la commande est terminée. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Brève Introduction à la syntaxe de LaTeX +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +La syntaxe de LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Syntaxe de LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand vous écrivez des documents un peu longs ou des livres, vous avez besoin + d'en savoir un peu plus sur les commandes LaTeX que LyX utilise en interne. + Puisque LaTeX est composé de commandes vous pouvez +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +programmer +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + votre document. + Ceci a comme avantage que vous pouvez changer à tout moment la mise en + page de votre document, si vous connaissez la bonne commande à utiliser. + Imaginez par exemple que vous ayez à écrire un manuel pour un certain produit + et que la date limite pour le terminer soit pour la fin de la journée. + Votre patron vous a félicité pour votre travail, mais il voudrait que toutes + les étiquettes de légendes soient en gras. + Le problème est que vous avez plus d'une centaine de légendes de figures + et de tableaux avec des légendes qui ne sont pas en gras dans votre manuel. + Il est donc impossible de changer toutes les légendes à la main en un jour. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +C'est là que LaTeX rentre en jeu. + Comme nous l'avons écrit plus haut, à chaque problème son paquetage LaTeX. + La première chose à faire est donc de trouver lequel et donc de chercher + dans le catalogue des paquetages LaTeX, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Catalogue" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Après une recherche plus ou moins longue, vous apprendrez que le paquetage + +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + correspond à ce que vous cherchez. + Pour utiliser un paquetage, vous devez le charger dans le préambule de + votre document (menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +\lang english +LaT +\lang french + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preamble +\family default +\lang french +) avec la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[options]{nom du paquetage} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Toutes le commandes LaTeX commencent par une barre de fraction inverse ( +\emph on +backslash +\emph default +), les éventuels arguments de la commande sont placés entre deux accolades + et les éventuelles options entre deux crochets. + Notez que toutes les commandes n'ont pas des arguments ou des options. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans notre cas, le nom du paquetage est +\series bold +caption +\series default +. + Après avoir jeté un œil à sa documentation, vous avez appris que l'option + +\series bold +labelfont=bf +\series default + permet de changer la police de caractère de toutes les étiquettes de légendes + en gras. + Vous ajoutez donc à votre préambule la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +et votre problème est résolu. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pour les autres commandes proposées par le paquetage +\series bold +caption +\series default +, jetez un œil à sa documentation +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "caption" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Remarquez que certaines classes de documents ont des solutions toutes prêtes + à certains problèmes bien connus comme le vôtre. + Par exemple, si vous utilisez une classe +\family typewriter +KOMA-Script +\family default +, vous n'aurez pas besoin du paquetage +\series bold +caption +\series default +, à la place vous n'aurez qu'à insérer la commande +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont{captionlabel}{ +\backslash +bfseries} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +dans le préambule et le problème sera résolu. + Donc, si vous envisagez d'écrire un document assez long, vous devriez jeter + un œil à la documentation de la classe que vous souhaitez utiliser (au + passage +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont +\series default + est un exemple d'une commande qui a plus d'un argument). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les commandes qui sont placées dans le préambule affectent la totalité de + votre document, alors que les commandes placées dans le texte ne touchent + que le texte qui est placé après la commande ou le texte qui est utilisé + comme argument pour la commande. + Pour insérer une commande dans le texte, utilisez une boîte de code TeX, + comme c'est décrit dans la section précédente. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous voulez en apprendre plus sur LaTeX et sa syntaxe, voyez les livres + sur LaTeX +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexguide" + +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{fancy} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +bascule temporairement sur une mode avec en-têtes et pieds de pages personnalisé +s +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rightmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +définit l'en-tête comme décrit ci-après +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leftmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +thepage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +LyX: Guide de l'utilisateur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Code magique: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +En-têtes et pieds de page personnalisés +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:En-têtes-et-pieds" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document!En-têtes et pieds de page +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En-têtes et pieds de page +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour définir des en-têtes et des pieds de page personnalisés, vous devez + positionner le style d'en-tête sur +\family sans +Sophistiqué +\family default + dans la fenêtre +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default +, rubrique +\family sans +Format de la page +\family default +. + Une seconde étape consiste à ajouter dans le menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Modules +\family default + le module +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Personnalisation en-têtes/pieds de page +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Ce module propose les 6 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +styles suivants: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +En-tête +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +gauche, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +En-tête +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +central, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +En-tête +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +droit +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Pied +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +gauche, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Pied +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +central, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Pied +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +droit +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +pour paramétrer les différentes positions dans l'en-tête et le pied. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalement, les en-têtes et pied de page sont paramétrés dans le préambule + du document, mais vous pouvez les modifier n'importe où. + La figure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:Page-layout" + +\end_inset + + montre la mise en page et la position des en-têtes et pied de page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En-tête gauche +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En-tête central +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +En-tête droit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Le texte normal de la page est ici. + L'en-tête courant est au-dessus du texte et le pied est au-dessous (incluant + les notes de bas de page). + Les en-têtes et pieds de page contiennent typiquement les numéros de page, + les titres de chapitre, le logo de la société mais vous pouvez à peu près + tout mettre, sauf les flottants. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pied gauche +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pied central +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pied droit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:Page-layout" + +\end_inset + +Mise en page avec en-tête et pied de page +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +\lang english +Note +\series default +: some document classes implement their own customized page headers and + footers if +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +style +\family default + is set to “Default”. + Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers + and footers. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Définition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour définir la ligne d'en-tête, il faut ajouter les +\emph on +trois +\emph default + styles d'en-tête. + Ce que vous ajouter aux styles apparaît sur les pages impaires, ce qui + est en argument optionnel apparaît sur les pages paires. + Pour les documents en recto seul, l'argument optionnel n'est pas utilisé + et peut être omis. + Si vous laissez un style ou un argument optionnel vide, rien n'est imprimé. + la définition de la ligne de pied fonctionne de la même façon. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour le paramétrage, vous aurez besoin de quelques commandes LaTeX insérée + en code TeX (menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Code +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default +): +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +thepage imprime le numéro de page courant; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +Roman{page} imprime le numéro de page courant en chiffres romains en capitales; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +roman{page} imprime le numéro de page courant en chiffres romains en bas + de casse; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +leftmark imprime le numéro de section courant avec son titre. + Si le document est doté de chapitres, il imprime le numéro de chapitre + courant et son titre à la place. + elle est dénommée +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +leftmark +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + parce qu'il se trouve d'habitude sur la page de gauche; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +rightmark imprime le numéro de sous-section courant avec son titre. + Si le document est doté de chapitres, il imprime le numéro de section courant + et son titre à la place. + Elle est utilisée habituellement sur la page de droite. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +En-têtes/pieds de page implicites +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'en-tête et le pied de page personnalisé n'est pas implicitement vide. + L'en-tête contient implicitement le titre de chapitre et de section et + le pied contient implicitement le numéro de page. + Pour supprimer des contenus que vous ne désirez pas voir apparaître, il + vous faut inclure le style d'en-têtes/pieds adéquat dans votre document + en laissant les contenus vides. + Ainsi, pour ne pas voir apparaître le numéro de page, insérer un style + +\family sans +Pied +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +central +\family default +vide. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Apparence +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'en-tête et le pied de page apparaîtront sur les pages normales. + Certaines pages sont différentes: la page de titre a sa mise en page propre, + ainsi que les page qui débutent un partie ou un chapitre de votre livre. + Ces pages n'ont pas d'en-tête et de pied personnalisé, mais ceci est normal. + Il n'y a pas besoin par exemple d'imprimer le titre du chapitre sur une + page ou il est déjà imprimé en grande taille et en gras. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ligne de décoration +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Implicitement, une ligne noire de 0,4mm d'épaisseur apparaît au-dessous + de l'en tête, et rien n'apparaît au-dessus du pied de page. + Ceci peut être modifié dans le préambule du document via les commandes + +\series bold + +\backslash +headrulewidth +\series default + et +\series bold + +\backslash +footrulewidth +\series default + de la manière suivante: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +headrulewidth}{épaisseur} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +où +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +épaisseur +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est une taille en unités standard comme +\family sans +pt +\family default + ou +\family sans +mm +\family default +. + Si vous ne voulez pas de ligne, positionnez l'épaisseur à 0 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pt. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les lignes peuvent également être mise en couleur, mais ceci requiert un + peu plus de connaissances en LaTeX. + Si vous en avez vraiment besoin, allez voir sur Internet ou consultez la + section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +4.4 du livre +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Plusieurs lignes d'en-tête/pied +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous avez besoin de plusieurs lignes dans les en-têtes ou dans les pieds + de page, vous pouvez le faire en ajoutant une rupture de ligne dans la + définition. + Cependant, la hauteur implicite des en-têtes et pieds de page est seulement + celle d'une ligne. + Pour augmenter cette hauteur, redéfinissez les dimensions LaTeX +\series bold + +\backslash +headheight +\series default + ou +\series bold + +\backslash +footheight +\series default + comme ceci dans le préambule de votre document: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +headheight}{hauteur} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +où +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +hauteur +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est une taille en unités standard. + Si vous ne savez pas quelle valeur mettre, définissez votre en-tête et + visionnez votre document en PDF. + Puis ouvrez le fichier journal LaTeX via +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fichier journal La +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +TeX +\family default + et vérifiez en appuyant sur le bouton +\family sans +Avertissement +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +suivant +\family default + si vous trouvez un message en provenance du paquetage +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Si vous trouvez un tel avertissement, il donne l'espacement nécessaire + pour votre en-tête. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Le présent exemple +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le présent exemple illustre ce qui peut être fait en personnalisant les + en-têtes et pieds de page. + Ne l'utilisez pas pour votre document puisque c'est jute un exemple. + On utilise les définitions suivantes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +En-tête +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +gauche +\series bold + +\backslash +rightmark +\series default +, argument optionnel vide +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +En-tête +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +central argument vide, argument optionnel vide +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +En-tête +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +droit argument vide, +\series bold + +\backslash +leftmark +\series default + en argument optionnel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Pied +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +gauche argument vide, +\series bold + +\backslash +thepage +\series default + en argument optionnel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family typewriter +Pied +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +central +\family default + +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +LyX's user guide +\family default +\series default +\color inherit +, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +code magique: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + en argument optionnel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Pied +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +droit +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\series default +, argument optionnel vide +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +headrulewidth positionné à 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En principe, vous pouvez utiliser presque tout dans les en-têtes et pieds + de page, sauf les flottants. + Pour les éléments plus spécifiques comme par exemple les marques de tranche, + voyez le manuel du paquetage +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage clearpage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{headings} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\lang english +switches back to page style with the default headings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Aperçu de morceaux de votre document +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Aperçu-de-morceaux" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Aperçu au vol +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Aperçu +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX vous permet de générer un pré-visionnement de portions de votre document + à la volée pour que vous ayez un aperçu de leur aspect final sans avoir + à perturber le fil de votre pensée avec des appels à +\family sans + +\family default +une visionneuse. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Pré-requis +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour faire fonctionner les aperçus, vous devez installer le paquetage LaTeX + +\series bold +preview-latex +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! preview-latex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (nommé simplement +\begin_inset Flex Strong +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +preview +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dans certains systèmes). + S'il n'est pas déjà installé, vous le trouverez dans le catalogue TeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + ou dans le gestionnaire de paquetages de votre distribution LaTeX. + Vous obtiendrez des résultats plus esthétiques si vous installez le programme + +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pnmcrop +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + du paquetage +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +netpbm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +; avec LyX sur Windows, le programme et le paquetage LaTeX sont installés + automatiquement avec LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Activer l'aperçu +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous désirez par exemple voir vos formules mathématiques en typographie + LaTeX, activez l'option +\family sans +Affichage écran des graphiques +\family default + dans la fenêtre +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Préférences +\family default +, sous +\family sans +Apparence\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Affichage écran. + +\family default + Activez ensuit +\family sans +Aperçu +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vif. + +\family default +La +\family sans +Taille +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'aperçu +\family default + est le facteur multiplicatif pour la taille. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX, + set +\family sans +Instant +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preview +\family default + to +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +math +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les aperçus sont générés quand vous chargez un document et quand vous avez + fini d'éditer un insert. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + les aperçus d'un document déjà chargé ne sont pas toujours créés en sélectionna +nt juste +\family sans +Aperçu +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vif +\family default +, vous devez le ré-ouvrir pour activer les aperçus. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Parties du document spécifiques +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En dehors des mathématiques, il y a d'autres cas qui peuvent nécessiter + un aperçu, par exemple les éléments que LyX ne sait pas afficher comme + ceux faisant l'objet d'une rotation, ou ceux qui ne sont pas encore interprétés + par LyX. + Pour ce faire, insérez un insert d'aperçu via +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Aperçu +\family default +, ou collez ce que vous voulez voir dans un tel insert. + Si vous cliquez sur l'insert, vous pouvez modifier le contenu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un exemple: pour créer des boîtes avec rotation, vous utilisez la commande + LaTeX +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default + que LyX ne reconnaît pas encore. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default + est expliquée dans la section +\emph on +Les boîtes pivotées et redimensionnées +\emph default + dans le manuel des +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + À la place des boîtes de code TeX, vous désirez voir la boîte pivotée telle + qu'elle apparaîtra dan le résultat, par exemple pour régler l'angle de + rotation et l'accorder avec le texte environnant. + Par conséquent vous créez un insert d'aperçu et copiez le texte avec les + boîtes pivotées à l'intérieur. + Voici le résultat: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +Ceci est un texte encadré +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Doublebox +position "c" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 0 +inner_pos "c" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1in" +special "width" +height "1in" +height_special "totalheight" +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +with rotated +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et une formule +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'aperçu fonctionne également avec les couleurs: ici une boîte spéciale + encadrée et colorée a été créée avec la commande LaTeX +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default +: +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default + est expliquée dans la section +\emph on +Boîtes colorées +\emph default + dans le manuel des +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fboxrule 1mm +\backslash +fboxsep 1mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Ceci est un texte dans une boîte encadrée et colorée. +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si LyX n'affiche pas d'aperçu, assurez-vous que vous l'avez activé comme + indiqué plus haut, et assurez-vous également que le code TeX dans l'insert + d'aperçu est valide, et que vous avez bien installé les paquetages LaTeX + requis par ledit code. + Si LyX ne peut pas créer d'aperçu, vous ne pourrez pas non plus visionner + votre document, dans la plupart des cas, du fait d'erreurs LaTeX. + Par conséquent si vous utilisez du code TeX dont vous n'êtes pas sûr, l'aperçu + est une méthode simple pour le tester sans visionner tout le document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Code source LaTeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi avoir un aperçu du code source LaTeX de tout ou d'une + partie de votre document. + Utilisez le menu +\family sans +Visualiser\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Afficher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +code +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\family default + et une fenêtre s'ouvre avec le code LaTeX. + La fenêtre affiche le code source du paragraphe où se trouve le curseur. + Si vous avez sélectionné une partie du document dans la fenêtre LyX, alors + seul le code correspondant à cette sélection sera affiché. + Si vous voulez que tout le document soit visible dans la fenêtre du code + LaTeX, activez l'option +\family sans +Code +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +source +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +complet +\family default +. + +\lang english +If you check +\family sans +Automatic update +\family default +, you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you + have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates + them all, not just the one which is open at the time. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Rechercher et remplacer (version élaborée) +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Rechercher-et-Remplacer-élaboré" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Rechercher +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Remplacer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Introduction +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La fonctionnalité +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Rechercher et remplacer +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + élaborée de LyX permet la recherche de segments de texte complexes, dotés + de style, et de contenus mathématiques dans les documents LyX; Il s'agit + d'une amélioration de la version standard (rapide) de la fonctionnalité + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Rechercher et remplacer +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Les points clés sont les suivants: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +la recherche de texte et de formules mathématiques est indifféremment autorisée, + les secondes étant saisies de la manière habituelle: on peut trouver non + seulement des formules entières, mais également des morceaux de formules + faisant partie de formules plus compliquées; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +la recherche peut être insensible au style, de telle sorte que le texte + est trouvé quel que soit le contexte ou le style (texte standard, titres + de section, notes, et même mathématiques), ou il peut être marqué par un + style, de sorte que, par exemple, un mot appartenant à un titre de section + ne sera trouvé que dans un titre de section; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +la recherche peut être étendue à une portée, i.e. + un ensemble de fichiers qui peuvent être des sous-documents du document + en cours de modification, tous les fichiers ouverts, ou tous les manuels + disponibles via le menu +\family sans +Aide +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +le remplacement peut préserver les capitales, de telle sorte que les capitales + du texte remplacé est adapté au texte trouvé (i.e. + tout en bas de casse, tout en capitales, capitale initiale). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Usage élémentaire +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La fonctionnalité +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Rechercher et remplacer +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + est activée par le menu +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rechercher et remplacer (élaboré) +\family default + (raccourci +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + +) ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outil. + Ceci ouvre la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Rechercher et remplacer (élaboré) +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Recherche de texte +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Saisissez un mot simple dans le mini-éditeur +\family sans +Rechercher +\family default +, et cherchez ses occurrences en cliquant sur le bouton +\family sans +Recherche suivante +\family default + en bas de la fenêtre (ou pressez simplement la touche +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +). + Le mot choisi est trouvé à la fois en texte standard et en mode mathématique, + s'il est en évidence, en police grasse ou en police normale, et à la fois + dans les titres de section et dans le texte normal. + En pressant +\family sans +Entrée +\family default +de manière répétitive la recherche se poursuit vers le bas +\family sans +. + +\family default + De manière similaire, presser +\family sans +Maj+Entrée +\family default + recherche vers le haut. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Durant la recherche, l'option +\family sans +Selon la casse +\family default + permet de restreindre l'accord aux seules chaînes se trouvant dans la même + casse que la chaîne saisie dans l'éditeur +\family sans +Rechercher +\family default +. + L'option +\family sans +Mots complets +\family default + restreint l'accord aux limites de mots. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Recherche dans les formules mathématiques +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les formules mathématiques peuvent être explorées en saisissant dans l'éditeur +\family sans + Rechercher +\family default + une formule, comme +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + + ou, plus complexe, comme +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + +. + Lors de la recherche d'une formule, elle est fructueuse à la fois quand + elle est isolée et quand elle se trouve insérée dans une sous-formule et + dans des parties encapsulées d'une sous-formule: par exemple les éléments + ci-dessus seraient trouvés dans +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Recherche marquée par le style +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est également possible de rechercher du texte dans un style déterminé. + Ceci se fait en passant à l'onglet +\family sans +Paramètres +\family default + de la fenêtre de dialogue et en décochant la case +\family sans +Ignorer le format +\family default +. + De cette façon, en saisissant dans l'éditeur +\family sans +Rechercher +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +un mot ordinaire, on ne trouvera pas les occurrences de ce mot mises en + évidence ou en police grasse; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +un mot mis en évidence ou en police grasse, on ne trouvera que les occurrences + dans la même police de caractères, et dans le même style de texte; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +un mot ordinaire dans un titre de section, on ne trouvera que les occurrences + dans un titre de section. + Également, si le texte à rechercher est en évidence ou en police grasse, + en plus d'être en style +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +titre de section +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, il ne sera trouvé que si le mot est dans le même style de caractères; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +un texte mathématique dans une formule hors ligne, on ne trouvera que les + occurrences de ce texte dans une formule hors ligne (et non pas en ligne). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Remplacer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les éléments de texte en accord avec le texte saisi dans l'éditeur +\family sans +Rechercher +\family default +peuvent être remplacés par les éléments de texte saisis dans l'éditeur +\family sans +Remplacer +\family default +.Pour trouver l'occurrence suivante et la remplacer, cliquez sur le bouton + +\family sans +Remplacer +\family default + ou pressez +\family sans +Entrée +\family default + ou +\family sans +Maj+Entrée +\family default + avec le curseur dans l'éditeur R +\family sans +emplacer +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez remplacer des éléments fonctionnelelment mis en forme à la place + des éléments en accord du document. + Des scénarios typiques peuvent être les suivants (parmi de nombreux autres): +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +remplacer les occurrences d'un mot avec un style personnalisé du même mot: + par exemple, remplacer les occurrences de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +fonction() +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + par sa version en chasse fixe +\family typewriter + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +fonction() +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +exécuter une réécriture de notation mathématique: par exemple, remplacer + les occurrences de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $R$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + par +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{\mathbb{R}}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (vous pouvez désirer activer +\family sans +Mots complets +\family default + et +\family sans +Selon la casse +\family default + et désactiver +\family sans +Ignorer le format +\family default + dans l'onglet +\family sans +Paramètres +\family default +, pour éviter de remplacer toutes les occurrences des lettres +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +R +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + apparaissant dans le texte normal), ou les occurrences de +\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ +\end_inset + + par +\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$ +\end_inset + +, ou les occurrences de +\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ +\end_inset + + par +\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Utilisation élaborée +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il existe une recherche fondée sur les expressions régulières (regexp) +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Une bonne explication de ce que sont les expressions régulières se trouve + dans cet article Wikipedia: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Vous pouvez rechercher des expressions régulières en l'insérant dans l'éditeur + +\family sans +Rechercher +\family default +. + Ceci se fait par le menu +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Insérer une expression régulière +\family default + quand le curseur est dans l'éditeur +\family sans +Rechercher +\family default +. + Les chaînes de caractères saisies dans les inserts d'expression régulière + sont accordés en fonction des règles +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sous la contrainte que toute (sous-)expression doive s'accorder à un segment + de texte LyX bien constitué, i.e. + que, en recherchant du code LaTeX, aucun segment avec des accolades non + appariées n'est autorisé dans la chaîne de caractères. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, alors que les chaînes en dehors des expressions régulières est accordé + exactement au même texte dans le document. + Notez qu'il est possible de couper/coller des inserts d'expression régulière + comme d'habitude. + Les exemples d'utilisation de cette fonctionnalité peuvent être: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +rechercher toutes les fractions avec un dénominateur donné: par exemple, + saisir la fraction +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + + (où la chaîne +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + au numérateur représente l'accord universel) dans l'éditeur +\family sans +Rechercher +\family default + trouve toutes les fractions avec le dénominateur indiqué; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +rechercher tout texte dans un style donné: par exemple, après avoir décoché + +\family sans +Ignorer le format +\family default + dans l'onglet +\family sans +Paramètres +\family default +, saisir une expression régulière +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, +\series default + la mettre en évidence ou la marquer en police grasse, permet de trouver + toutes les chaînes mises en évidence ou en police grasse, respectivement. + De la même manière, insérer une expression +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans une liste à puce, une énumération ou un titre de section permet de + trouver toutes les listes à puces, les énumérations ou les titres de section. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enfin, le référencement de (sous-)expressions dans les expressions régulières + peut être utilisé comme d'habitude, en mettant des parties de l'expression + entre parenthèses +\begin_inset Formula $()$ +\end_inset + +, et en se référant à ces parties par +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ +\end_inset + +, etc., où le symbole +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash$ +\end_inset + + est saisi en pressant deux fois la touche de barre oblique arrière. + Par exemple, essayez de rechercher l'expression +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +[[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]] +\backslash +1[[:space:]] +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +pour trouver les répétitions de mots, s'il y en a. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'utilisation du référencement arrière n'est pas (encore) implanté dans + la fonction +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Remplacer. +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +\color none +Note: +\series default + Le référencement arrière fonctionne à la fois dans le même expression régulière + ou dans différentes expressions indépendantes, lorsque la numérotation + du référencement est absolu, i. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +e. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + + se réfère toujours à la première occurrence de +\begin_inset Formula $()$ +\end_inset + + dans toutes les expressions saisies. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Correcteur orthographique +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Orthographe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Correcteur-Orthographique" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX est doté d'un correcteur orthographique intégré. + Le menu +\family sans + Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Correcteur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +orthographique +\family default +, le raccourci clavier +\family sans +F7 +\family default + ou le bouton de la barre d'outils +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show spellchecker" +\end_inset + + démarre le correcteur orthographique à partir de la position courante du + curseur ou du début de la sélection de texte courante. + Une fenêtre latérale s'ouvre et montre tout mot incorrect ou inconnu trouvé. + Elle vous permet de le corriger ou de le remplacer. + Dès qu'un mot inconnu est trouvé, il est sélectionné et le texte défile + pour le rendre visible. + Dans la fenêtre latérale du correcteur orthographique, il y a une case + qui vous propose des suggestions de correction, si il en existe. + En cliquant sur une de ces suggestions elle est recopiée dans le champ + +\family sans +Remplace +\family default +r, en double-cliquant on effectue directement le remplacement. + Un mot inconnu du correcteur, mais qui serait correctement écrit, peut + être ajouté à votre dictionnaire personnel. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Implicitement le dictionnaire qui est utilisé est déterminé par la langue + du document qui est fixée dans la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default +. + Vous pouvez utiliser un autre dictionnaire en donnant le nom d'une autre + langue dans le menu déroulant +\family sans +Langue +\family default + en haut de la fenêtre latérale du correcteur. + LyX peut effectuer la correction dans les documents multilingues, si vous + avez marqué le texte avec la langue appropriée et si les dictionnaires + adéquats sont installés: LyX commute automatiquement vers le bon dictionnaire. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here +\lang french +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +There are 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files for each language. + To install a dictionary, copy the 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files into LyX's installation subfolder +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +dicts +\family default + and restart LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Autres paramètres +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La rubrique +\family sans +Paramètres de langue\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Correcteur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +orthographique +\family default + de la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Préférences +\family default + possède quelques options supplémentaires: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Moteur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +correcteur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +orthographique permet de sélectionner les bibliothèques de dictionnaires + que LyX doit utiliser pour la correction. + En fonction de votre système, les bibliothèques +\family typewriter +aspell +\family default +, +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default + ou +\family typewriter +enchant +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Enchant est une bibliothèque d'encapsulation dotées de nombreuses références + configurable. + Vous pouvez consulter la documantation ou la page du manuel ( +\emph on +man-page +\emph default +) pour ne savoir pàlus. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + peuvent être disponibles. + Avec Windows, on ne trouve que +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Utiliser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +une +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +autre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +langue force l'utilisation de la langue indiquée si le champ n'est pas vide, + quelle que soit la langue sélectionnée pour le document; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Utiliser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +caractères +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +protégés vous permet de déclarer des caractères non standard que le correcteur + doit néanmoins traiter, comme par exemple des umlaut allemands.. + En principe cette option ne devrait pas être nécessaire; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Accepter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mots +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +composés Empêche le correcteur de se plaindre de mots composés comme +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +nonlinéaire +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + par exemple. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Correction +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +orthographique +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +volée permet de vérifier l'orthographe au fur et à mesure de la saisie. + Les mots mal orthographiés sont soulignés d'un trait pointillé rouge. + Avec un clic droit sur un mot souligné, les suggestions du correcteur apparaiss +ent dans le menu contextuel. + Choisir l'un d'entre eux effectue le remplacement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Orthographe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +notes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +commentaires effectue la vérification du contenu non imprimable du document, + si la case est cochée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Dictionnaire des synonymes +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dictionnaire des synonymes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Dictionnaire-de-synonymes" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX fournit un dictionnaires de synonymes multilingue. + Il utilise le même environnement que LibreOffice, OpenOffice et Firefox + (à savoir le dictionnaire +\family typewriter + MyThes +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, qui est inclus dans LyX). + De ce fait, LyX peut accéder directement au dictionnaire des synonymes + de OpenOffice, qui est disponible pour ne nombreuses langues. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette section décrit comment sont installés ces dictionnaires et comment + les utiliser. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Configurer le dictionnaire de synonymes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La bibliothèque +\emph on +MyThes/ +\emph default +OpenOffice +\emph on + +\emph default +est constituée de deux fichiers par langue: un fichier de suffixe +\emph on +.dat +\emph default + contenant les données et un fichier de suffixe +\emph on +.idx +\emph default +. + Le nom du fichier contient le code de la langue concernée (par exemple + +\family sans +fr_FR +\family default + pour français). + Par exemple, les fichiers pour français sont ainsi nommés : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_fr_FR_v2.idx +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_fr_FR_v2.dat +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si LibreOffice ou OpenOffice est déjà installé sur votre système, avec ses + dictionnaires de synonymes, ces fichiers devraient déjà être présents. + Si ce n'est pas le cas, vous pouvez récupérer les dictionnaires, soit à + partir du site +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/dictionaries/trunk/thes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, soit à partir du site +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://extensions.services.openoffice.org/en/search/node/thesaurus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notez que, depuis OpenOffice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3.0, les fichiers de +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://extensions.services.openoffice.org +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + sont habituellement stockés dans les archives d'extensions ( +\emph on +*.oxt +\emph default +) qui contiennent d'autres fichiers comme les dictionnaires orthographiques. + Ces archives sont des fichier zip, vous pouvez donc les décompresser comme + une archive zip ordinaire. + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Mettez les fichiers +\emph on +*.idx +\emph default + et +\emph on +*.dat +\emph default + de toutes les langues que vous voulez utiliser dans un répertoire (n'utilisez + pas de sous-répertoires), et indiquez le chemin vers ce répertoire dans + +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Préférences\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Répertoires +\family default +. + Maintenant, le dictionnaire de synonymes devrait être prêt à l'usage. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si LibreOffice ou OpenOffice +\lang english +and its thesaurus +\lang french + est déjà installé +\lang english +on a Linux system, these files should be already on your system. + On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be + installed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here +\lang french +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +To install a dictionary, copy the 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files into LyX's installation subfolder +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +thes +\family default + and restart LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Utiliser le dictionnaire de synonymes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour utiliser le dictionnaire de synonymes, sélectionnez un mot ou placez + le curseur juste après et utilisez le menu +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dictionnaire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +synonymes +\family default +ou le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "thesaurus-entry" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. + Une fenêtre de dialogue s'ouvre, affichant des mots dont le sens est probableme +nt proche et qui peuvent être utilisés comme synonymes. + Les propositions sont rassemblées en catégories. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que le dictionnaire, pour certaine langues, ne donne pas seulement + les synonymes, mais aussi des termes génériques (comme +\emph on +organisme +\emph default + pour +\emph on +plante +\emph default +), des termes connexes (comme +\emph on +politique +\emph default + pour +\emph on +anarchisme +\emph default +), les compositions (comme +\emph on +arbre à cames +\emph default + pour +\emph on +arbre +\emph default +) et les antonymes (comme +\emph on +femme +\emph default + pour +\emph on +homme +\emph default +). + Les termes génériques, connexes et antonymes sont identifiés en tant que + tels. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La langue est automatiquement choisie en fonction de la langue active à + l'endroit où se trouve le curseur, mais vous pouvez aussi la changer dans + la fenêtre de dialogue où vous pouvez aussi entrer directement de nouveaux + mots à rechercher. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que le dictionnaire n'accepte pas les phrases (seuls les composés + qui sont dans le dictionnaire comme +\emph on +arbre à cames +\emph default +cité plus haut, sont acceptés), et vous devez utiliser la forme dite canonique + ( +\emph on +lemma form +\emph default +en anglais), c'est à dire la forme qui est utilisée dans le dictionnaire + (pour de nombreuses langues, c'est la première personne du singulier à + l'indicatif pour les noms et l'infinitif pour les verbes). + Par exemple, interroger le dictionnaire de synonymes avec le mot +\emph on +rapports +\emph default + ne donnera pas de résultat alors qu'il y en aura pour +\emph on +rapport +\emph default +. + Pour contourner ce problème, vous pouvez ne sélectionner que la partie + +\emph on +rapport +\emph default + du mot +\emph on +rapports +\emph default + pour avoir des résultats sans avoir à modifier la demande dans la fenêtre + de dialogue. + Et de cette façon le remplacement proposé sera probablement correct (puisque + seule la partie sélectionnée sera modifiée, le reste étant inchangé). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Suivi des modifications +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Suivi de modification +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Suivi de modification +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Suivi-de-modifications" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand vous travaillez à plusieurs sur un même document, il est extrêmement + utile de pouvoir distinguer les modifications que les autres ont pu apporter + au document. + Vous pouvez alors décider d'accepter ces modifications ou non. + Ceci peut se faire en activant le suivi des modifications dans le menu + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivi +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les modifications effectuées sur le document seront mises en évidence par + des traits et des couleurs : +\color blue + +\bar under +du texte souligné +\bar default + +\color inherit +est un ajout +\color blue +, +\strikeout on +du texte barré +\strikeout default + +\color inherit +est une suppression. + La couleur dépend de l'auteur de la modification. + Vous pouvez changer les couleurs dans les préférences de LyX dans la rubrique + +\family sans +Apparence +\family default +, +\family sans +Couleurs +\family default +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Couleurs ! Suivi des modifications +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + L'auteur et la date de la modification sont affichés dans la barre d'état + de LyX quand le curseur se trouve sur le texte modifié. + La même information est affichée quand vous utilisez le bouton +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + + de la barre d'outils. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand le suivi des modifications est activé, la barre d'outil de revue est + rendue visible: +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barre d'outils ! Revue +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette barre d'outils, illustrée ci-dessus contient les boutons suivants: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-track" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivi +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-output" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivi +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Afficher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sortie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Modification +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +suivante +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivi +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Accepter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modification +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivi +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rejeter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modification +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivi +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fusionner +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivi +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Accepter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +toutes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Suivi +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rejeter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +toutes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +modifications +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +suivante +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La barre d'outils de suivi des modifications vous aide à accepter, rejeter + ou fusionner les modifications. + Sélectionnez la modification et cliquez sur le bouton voulu. + Quand vous fusionnez les modifications, une fenêtre s'ouvre et vous donne + des informations sur la modification qui suit la position du curseur. + Vous n'avez donc pas à sélectionner cette modification pour y accéder. + Avec la fenêtre de fusion, vous pouvez décider d'accepter ou de rejeter + une modification et aussi sauter à la suivante. + De cette façon vous pouvez parcourir toutes les modifications de votre + document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La barre d'outils a aussi deux boutons pour gérer les notes puisqu'il est + souvent utile de mettre une note pour expliquer une modification. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous voulez que les marques de modifications soient visibles sur la sortie + finale, vous avez besoin du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +dvipost +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! dvipost +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Vous le trouverez dans le catalogue TeX, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + ou avec le gestionnaire de paquetages de votre installation LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Comparaison de documents +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Comparaison de documents +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez comparer deux fichiers LyX différents vis le menu +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Compare +\family default +r.... + Le résultat est un fichier LyX doté du suivi de modifications mettant en + évidence les différences. + Dans la fenêtre de dialogue, vous pouvez choisir depuis quel document extraire + les paramètres pour le fichier résultant de la comparaison, grâce à l'option + +\family sans +Copier les paramètres du document depuis +\family default +. + Cocher +\family sans +Activer le suivi de modifications dans la sortie imprimable +\family default + active l'option de suivi de modifications +\family sans +Afficher les modifications dans la sortie +\family default + pour vous permettre visionner le suivi dans le PDF du fichier des différences. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Internationalisation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Internationalisation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette section vous montre comment utiliser LyX avec la langue que vous voulez. + Pour certaines langues, vous devrez vous référer à des pages Wiki sur internet + qui expliquent comment paramétrer LyX pour les utiliser. + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En plus des langues proprement dites LyX accepte aussi les symboles phonétiques, + voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Caractère-Spécial" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Options linguistiques +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Langue ! Options +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Langue +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Langue +\family default + vous permet de choisir la langue +\family roman +\lang english +, the quote style +\family default +\lang french + et l'encodage des caractères. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le champ +\family sans +Encodage +\family default + vous permet de choisir une page d'encodage des caractères que vous voulez + utiliser pour l'exportation LaTeX. + L'option +\family sans +Langue +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +implicite +\family default +est le meilleur choix et fonctionne bien dans la plupart des cas. + Les différents encodages sont décrits dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Paramètres" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les cartes de configuration du clavier +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Cartes-de-clavier" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous avez par exemple un clavier de style US et que vous voulez saisir + un texte dans une langue différente de l'anglais, vous pouvez utiliser + une carte clavier appropriée. + Par exemple, si vous voulez saisir de l'italien, vous pouvez configurer + LyX avec une carte de configuration clavier italienne. + La fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Préférences\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Saisie\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Clavier/Souris +\family default + vous permet de choisir jusqu'à deux cartes de réaffectation, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Clavier/Souris" + +\end_inset + +. + Vous pouvez sélectionner une carte primaire et une carte secondaire et + ensuite choisir laquelle mettre en service. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +D'autre part, vous pouvez juste souhaiter changer quelques correspondances + clavier ou bien définir une carte totalement différente (pour Vulcan, par + exemple). + Vous pouvez écrire d'habitude en italien sur un clavier US et vouloir inclure + une citation locale en allemand. + Dans ces situations, vous pouvez écrire votre propre carte de configuration + ou modifier une carte existante pour obtenir les caractères voulus. + Ceci et bien d'autre réglages sont expliqués dans le manuel de +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +\start_of_appendix +L'interface utilisateur +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:Interface-Utilisateur" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cet appendice liste tous les menus disponibles et décrit leur usage. + Il est destiné à être une référence rapide si vous cherchez un sujet précis + dans le manuel de l'utilisateur. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Le menu Fichier +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Fichier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans le menu +\family sans +Fichier +\family default + vous avez les opérations de bases ainsi que quelques opérations plus avancées. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nouveau +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Crée un nouveau document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nouveau avec modèle +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce menu vous demande le modèle à utiliser. + Choisir un modèle va automatiquement déterminer certains détails de disposition + pour le document, détails que vous auriez normalement dû modifier manuellement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ouvrir +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ouvre un document existant. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Documents récents +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce sous-menu affiche la liste des documents ouverts récemment. + Cliquez sur le fichier que vous voulez ouvrir. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fermer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ferme le document courant. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fermer tout +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ferme tous les documents ouverts. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Enregistrer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enregistre le document courant. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Enregistrer sous +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enregistre le document courant sous un nouveau nom pour en faire une copie. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Enregistrer tout +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Enregistre tous les documents ouverts. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Revenir à la sauvegarde +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Recharge le document courant à partir du disque. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Contrôle de version +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le contrôle de version est utilisé quand plusieurs personnes travaillent + en même temps sur le même document ou bien quand l'utilisateur souhaite + conserver une trace détaillée des modifications apportées au document. + Il est décrit dans la section +\emph on +Contrôle de version avec LyX +\emph default +du manuel +\emph on +Options avancées +\emph default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Importer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez importer à partir de ce sous-menu des fichiers créés avec des + versions anciennes de LyX, des fichiers HTML, des fichiers LaTeX, des fichiers + NoWeb, des fichiers de texte brut (fichiers ASCII) et des fichiers textes + de données séparées par des virgules, comme des tableaux (CSV pour +\emph on +\lang english +comma separated values +\emph default +\lang french +). + Le fichier est importé comme un nouveau document LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand on utilise +\family sans +Texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +brut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +par +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Lignes +\family default +, toutes les lignes présentes dans le fichier seront importées comme un + unique paragraphe. + Un nouveau paragraphe n'est créé que si on rencontre une ligne vide. + Avec +\family sans +Texte +\family default + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family sans +brut +\family default +, le texte est importé sous forme de paragraphes, chaque saut de ligne commençan +t un nouveau paragraphe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Exporter +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Exporter" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez exporter votre document vers des formats de fichier variés. + Le fichier exporté est placé dans le même répertoire que votre fichier + LyX. + Les entrées de menu ne sont pas les mêmes sur toutes les installations, + car les possibilités d'exportation dépendent des programmes que LyX a trouvé + sur votre machine lors de sa configuration. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici la liste de toutes les possibilités; elles sont détaillées dans la + section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" + +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +CJK +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX format de la version spéciale de LyX 1.4.x pour le chinois, le japonais + et le coréen (CJK). + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Depuis LyX 1.5.0 le support CJK est intégré à LyX; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DocBook fichier texte contenant du code au format SGML utilisé par le langage + à balises +\family typewriter +DocBook +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DocBook +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XML) fichier texte contenant du; code au format XML utilisé par le langage + à balises +\family typewriter +DocBook +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DraftDVI format DVI natif de LaTeX. + Ce format n'est pas approprié si vous avez des caractères spéciaux ou des + espaces dans le chemins d'accès ou les noms de fichiers dans votre document. + Lyx utilise ce format de manière interne lors du pré-traitement de l'exportatio +n DVI; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVI format DVI +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) format DVI utilisant le processeur +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +: il traite Unicode et les polices non-TeX; +\series bold + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + toutes les visionneuses DVI ne sont pas capables d'afficher ce format correctem +ent. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Graphviz +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Dot fichier texte contenant du code dans le langage de programmation +\family typewriter +Dot +\family default + utilisé pour créer des graphiques à l'aide du logiciel +\family typewriter +Graphviz +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +HTML format HTML (les convertisseurs HTML sont des applications indépendantes + de LyX et peuvent ne pas fonctionner dans tous les cas); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +HTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(MS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Word) format HTML spécialisé pour pouvoir être importé dans +\family sans +MS Word +\family default +. + Une conséquence est que les formules sont incorporées sous forme d'images + et non au format +\family sans +MathML +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX compilable avec le processeur + +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX. + Toutes les images utilisées dans le document sont converties dans un format + que peut lire le processeur +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default + (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(standard) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX. + Toutes les images utilisées dans le document sont converties au format + EPS, le seul que peut lire le processeur +\family typewriter +latex +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX compilable avec le processeur + +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Livre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LilyPond +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(La +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +TeX) fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX ainsi que du code écrit + dans la syntaxe du logiciel de notation musicale +\family typewriter + LilyPond +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Archive +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(zip|tar.gz) crée une archive au format ZIP ou au format tar.gz (en fonction + de votre système) contenant le document et tous les fichiers auxiliaires + nécessaires à sa compilation (images, sous-documents,fichiers BiBTeX, etc.); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +z.y.x fichier LyX dans un format lisible par la version z.y.x ( +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +z +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +y +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + sont remplacés par un numéro de version) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yXHTML format HTML créé par le moteur interne de LyX; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +NoWeb fichier texte contenant un code au format du processeur de programmation + littéraire +\family typewriter +NoWeb +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +OpenDocument fichier au format OpenDocument compatible avec les applications + +\family sans +LibreOffice, OpenOffice +\family default +, +\family sans +KOffice +\family default +, +\family sans +Abiword +\family default +, etc. + (le convertisseur OpenDocument est une application indépendante de LyX + qui peut ne pas fonctionner dans tous les cas); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) format PDF en utilisant le programme +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default +, produit en interne un fichier DVI qui est ensuite converti au format PDF; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) format PDF en utilisant le processeur +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +, produit directement le fichier PDF; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) format PDF utilisant le processeur +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +, produit directement le fichier PDF; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) format PDF en utilisant le processeur +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default +, produit en interne un fichier PostScript qui est ensuite converti au format + PDF; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) format PDF en utilisant le processeur +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +, produit directement le fichier PDF; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +brut format texte simple; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Texte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +brut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii) format texte simple. + Le document est d'abord converti au format PostScript et ensuite il est + exporté sous forme de texte en utilisant le programme +\family sans + +\family typewriter +ps2ascii +\family default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Postscript format PostScript en utilisant le programme +\family typewriter +dvips +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Sweave fichier texte contenant le code source LaTeX ainsi que du code écrit + dans la syntaxe du logiciel de programmation statistique +\family typewriter +R +\family default +. + Il est possible d'utiliser des commandes +\family typewriter +R +\family default + avec la +\family typewriter +R +\family default +-fonction +\family typewriter +Sweave +\family default +de LaTeX; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si une des lignes de menu +\family sans +DVI +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + ou +\family sans +Postscript +\family default + manque, vous devriez mettre à jour votre configuration LaTeX. + Après cette mise à jour vous devez reconfigurer LyX, voyez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Config-LyX-de-base" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Imprimer +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec ce menu vous pouvez imprimer votre document dans un fichier PostScript + ou l'envoyer à une imprimante. + L'imprimante le recevra aussi sous forme PostScript. + La conversion en PostScript est faite en interne par LyX en utilisant le + programme +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +. + Pour plus d'informations, voyez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Imprimer" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fax +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette entrée de menu n'apparaît que si un programme de fax est installé + (sous Windows, vous devez en plus ajouter le chemin vers ce programme au + préfixe PATH de LyX, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Répertoires" + +\end_inset + +). + Avec cette entrée de menu, vous pouvez envoyer votre document à un programme + de fax comme +\family typewriter +hylapex +\family default + ou +\family typewriter +kdeprintfax +\family default +. + Le format utilisé par défaut pour le fichier qui est envoyé est le PostScript. + Ce format peut être changé dans les préférences de LyX comme cela est décrit + dans la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Convertisseurs" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Nouvelle fenêtre et Fermer la fenêtre +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ouvre ou ferme une nouvelle instance de LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Quitter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous propose d'enregistrer tous les documents non enregistrés et puis quitte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Le menu Édition +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Édition +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Annuler et Refaire +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Détaillé dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Annuler-et-Refaire" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Couper, Copier, Coller, Coller +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +une +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sélection +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +récente, Collage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spécial +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Couper, Copier, Coller ... +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Détaillé dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Base-d'edition" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Sélectionner tout l'insert +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sélectionne le contenu de l'insert dans lequel se trouve le curseur. + Si le curseur n'est pas dans un insert, sélectionne tout le document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Sélectionner +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Tout +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Sélectionne la totalité du document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Rechercher et remplacer (simple) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Détaillé dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Base-d'edition" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Rechercher et remplacer (avancé) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Détaillé dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Rechercher-et-Remplacer-élaboré" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Déplacer le paragraphe vers le haut/bas +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette commande déplace le paragraphe où se trouve le curseur d'un paragraphe + vers le haut ou vers le bas. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Style de texte +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dialogues ! Style du Texte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Détaillé dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Réglage-fin-avec" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Paramètres de paragraphe +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paragraphe ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Permet de modifier l'alignement, l'interligne et la largeur de l'étiquette. + Les modifications de paramètres n'affectent que le paragraphe dans lequel + se trouve le curseur. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi empêcher que la première ligne soit indentée, si vous + avez choisi de séparer les paragraphes avec une indentation dans la fenêtre + de dialogue +\family sans + Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres, +\family default +rubrique +\family sans + Format +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Texte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Paramètres de tableau et Math +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces deux menus ne sont actifs que si le curseur se trouve respectivement + dans un tableau ou une formule mathématique. + Les propriétés de ce tableau ou de cette formule peuvent alors être modifiées. + Les propriétés des tableaux sont détaillées dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tableaux" + +\end_inset + +, celles des formules mathématiques dans le chapitre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Formules-mathématiques" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Augmenter/Réduire la profondeur de liste +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces menus ne sont actifs que si le curseur se trouve dans un environnement + qui peut être emboîté. + Ils augmentent ou réduisent le niveau d'emboîtement de l'environnement + courant comme cela est expliqué dans les sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Emboîter-les-Environnements" + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Profondeur-section" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Le menu Affichage +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Affichage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En bas du menu +\family sans +Visualiser +\family default +, il y a la liste des documents qui sont ouverts. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Ouvrir/Fermer tous les inserts +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ouvre ou ferme tous les inserts de votre document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Déplier/Replier la macro mathématique +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Déplie ou replie la macro mathématique courante. + Les macro mathématiques sont décrites dans le manuel +\emph on +Math. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Afficher le Code LaTeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ouvre une fenêtre montrant le code LaTeX du document courant, comme cela + est décrit dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Aperçu-de-morceaux" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Afficher les messages +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ouvre une fenêtre affichant les messages de service. + C'est utile pour déboguer LyX (i.e. + chercher les erreurs dans le programme lui-même) ou pour voir ce qui se + passe en arrière plan pendant le traitement LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Visionner +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette rubrique engendre la sortie spécifiée implicitement, soit dans les + préférences (voir la section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" + +\end_inset + +), soit dans les paramètres du document (voir section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + +), et l'ouvre dans la visionneuse adéquate. + La visionneuse peut être choisie dans les préférences, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" + +\end_inset + +. + Les visionneuses implicites sont déterminées par LyX à sa première configuratio +n et à chaque reconfiguration. + Le format de sortie implicite est +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Visionner (autres formats) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec ce sous-menu, vous pouvez voir votre document dans d'autres formats + de sortie. + Le menu contient une liste de formats que vous pouvez utiliser pour visionner + votre document, en utilisant un programme externe. + Les rubriques du menu ne sont pas forcément les mêmes sur toutes les installati +ons: elles dépendent des programmes de la distribution LaTeX que LyX a trouvés + lors de sa configuration. + Tous les formats possibles se trouvent parmi les formats listés dans la + section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Exporter" + +\end_inset + +. + Vous devriez au moins trouver la rubrique +\family sans +DVI +\family default +. + Si la venait à manquer, vous devriez mettre à jour ou réparer votre installatio +n LaTeX. + Après cette mise à jour, vous devez reconfigurer LyX; voyez comment faire + dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Config-LyX-de-base" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Activer un des menus va lancer une visionneuse. + Celle-ci peut être choisie dans les préférences, voir +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" + +\end_inset + +. + les visionneuses implicites sont déterminés par LyX à sa première configuration + et à chaque reconfiguration. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mettre à jour +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette rubrique du menu vous permet de mettre à jour la vue avec vos modification +s les plus récentes (dans le format de sortie implicite) sans ouvrir une + nouvelle fenêtre de visionnement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mettre à jour (autres formats) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec cette rubrique, vous pouvez mettre à jour la vue avec vos modifications + les plus récentes (dans un format de sortie autre) sans ouvrir une nouvelle + fenêtre de visionnement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Visionner le document maître +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette rubrique du menu n'est visible que si votre document est inclus dans + un autre document, qui est alors son document +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maître +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (voir la section +\emph on +Sous-documents +\emph default + dans le manuel des +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default + pour les détails sur ce sujet). + Cette rubrique permet alors de visionner le document maître depuis son + sous-document: ainsi, si vous travaillez sur un sous-document qui est le + chapitre d'un livre, +\family sans +Visionner le document maître +\family default + va afficher la vue de tout le livre, alors que +\family sans +Visionner +\family default + n'affichera que le chapitre seul. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le format utilisé par cette fonction est le format implicite spécifié dans + les préférences (voir section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" + +\end_inset + +) ou dans les paramètres du document (voir section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Mettre à jour le document maître +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette rubrique du menu n'est visible que si votre document est inclus dans + un autre document, qui est alors son document +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +maître +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + (voir la section +\emph on +Sous-documents +\emph default + dans le manuel des +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default + pour les détails sur ce sujet). + Cette rubrique permet alors de mettre à jour le document maître depuis + son sous-document, sans basculer vers le document maître lui-même.. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le format utilisé par cette fonction est le format implicite spécifié dans + les préférences (voir section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" + +\end_inset + +) ou dans les paramètres du document (voir section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Diviser la vue +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ceci va diviser la fenêtre principale de LyX verticalement ou horizontalement. + Cela permet de voir deux document en même temps pour les comparer, ou de + voir le même document mais à deux positions différentes. + Vous pouvez séparer la fenêtre plusieurs fois pour voir, par exemple, trois + documents ou plus en même temps. + Pour revenir à une fenêtre non divisée, utilisez le menu +\family sans +Fermer la vue active +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fermer la vue active +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ferme une fenêtre divisée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Plein écran +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En utilisant ce menu ou en appuyant sur la touche +\family sans +F11 +\family default +, vous supprimez la barre des menus et toutes les barres d'outils de façon + à n'avoir que votre texte à l'écran. + En plus, la fenêtre de LyX est affichée en plein écran. + Pour revenir du mode plein écran au mode normal, appuyez sur la touche + +\family sans +F11 +\family default +, ou faites un clic droit et désactivez le mode plein écran dans le menu + contextuel qui apparaît alors. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Barres d'outils +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Barres-d'outils" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barres d'outils +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec ce menu, vous pouvez déterminer les barres d'outils qui sont visibles. + Toutes les barres d'outils ainsi que la +\family sans +zone de commande +\family default + peuvent être activées ou désactivées. + L'état actif d'un élément est signalé dans la menu par une coche devant + son nom. + Les barres d'outils +\family sans +Suivi +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modifications +\family default +, +\family sans +Tableau +\family default +, +\family sans +Palettes +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Mathématiques +\family default +, +\family sans +Macros +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathématiques +\family default + et +\family sans +Maths +\family default + peuvent être mises en mode +\emph on +automatique, +\emph default +ce qui est indiqué par le mot +\family sans +(auto) +\family default + ajouté après leur nom. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand elle est +\emph on +active +\emph default +la barre d'outils est toujours visible, en mode +\emph on +automatique +\emph default +la barre n'est visible que si le curseur est dans un environnement approprié + ou que certaines fonctionnalités ont été activées. + Cela signifie que la barre d'outils de suivi des modifications ne sera + visible que si le suivi des modifications est activé, les barres d'outils + maths et tableau ne seront visibles respectivement que si le curseur se + trouve dans une formule mathématique ou un tableau. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les barres d'outils de LyX et leurs boutons sont décrits dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Barres-d'Outils" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Le menu Insertion +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Insertion +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Maths +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère des constructions mathématiques qui sont décrites dans le chapitre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Formules-mathématiques" + +\end_inset + + et dans le manuel +\emph on +Math. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Caractère +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +spécial +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Caractère-Spécial" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec ce menu, vous pouvez insérer les caractères suivants : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Symboles\SpecialChar \ldots{} + Insère tout caractère qui peut être imprimé par votre système LaTeX. + Cela signifie que le nombre de catégories de caractères présentes dans + ce dialogue et les caractères disponibles dépendent des paquetages LaTeX + que vous avez installé. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note +\series default + : Tous les caractères ne seront pas visibles dans la fenêtre de dialogue + +\family sans +Symboles +\family default + puisqu'aucune des polices de caractères que vous pouvez choisir dans la + fenêtre de dialogue des préférences (voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Polices-d'Écran" + +\end_inset + +) ne peut afficher tous les caractères. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Points +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +suspension Insère des points de suspension: \SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Point +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +final Insère un point final pour terminer une phrase, comme c'est décrit + dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Abbreviations" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Guillemet +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +droit Insère ce guillemet : ", sans tenir compte du type de guillemet choisi + dans la rubrique +\family sans +Langue +\family default + du menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default + . +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Guillemet +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +simple Insère un apostrophe : ' +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Césure +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +protégée Insère un tiret de césure qui est protégé contre les sauts de ligne + : \SpecialChar \nobreakdash- + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Barre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +oblique +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sécable Insère une barre oblique là où un saut de ligne peut aussi se produire + : \SpecialChar \slash{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Séparateur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +menus Insère le signe utilisé dans cette documentation comme séparateur + de menus: \SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Symboles +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Phonétiques +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Symboles phonétiques +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Langue ! Symboles phonétiques +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Crée une formule avec ce que l'on appelle un insert +\series bold +tipa +\series default +. + Vous pouvez y insérer des commandes pour créer des symboles phonétiques + IPA. + Pour utiliser ces possibilités, vous devez avoir installé le paquetage + LaTeX +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Pour plus d'information voyez la documentation de +\series bold +tipa, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "tipa" + +\end_inset + + +\series default + et cette page Wiki: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Typographie spéciale +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici vous pouvez insérer les constructions typographiques suivantes: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Exposant Insérer un exposant: test +\begin_inset script superscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +a, b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Indice Insérer un indice: test +\begin_inset script subscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3x +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +insécable Insérer une espace insécable comme indiqué dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espace-Insécable" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +entre +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mots Insère une espace entre mots comme décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espace-inter-mots" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espace +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fine Insère une espace fine comme décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espace-Fine" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ressort +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontal Insère un ressort de remplissage horizontal, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ressorts-Horizontaux" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ligne +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +horizontale Insère une ligne horizontale, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Lignes-Horizontales" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Espacement +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vertical Insère un ressort de remplissage vertical, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espacement-Vertical" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fantôme Insère une espace fantôme, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Espace-fantôme" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Point +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +césure Insère un point de césure, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Césure" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Séparation +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligature Insère une séparation de ligature, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Ligatures" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Passage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(fer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +gauche) Insère un passage à la ligne forcé, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Saut-de-ligne" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Passage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(justifié) Insère un passage à la ligne forcé qui de plus étire la ligne + de texte interrompue jusqu'à la marge de la page, description section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Saut-de-ligne" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Saut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(fer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +haut) Insère un saut de page forcé, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Sauts-de-Page" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Saut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(justifié) Insère un saut de page forcé qui en plus étire le texte interrompu + jusqu'à la limite de page, description section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Sauts-de-Page" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Saut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(vide +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +tampon) Insère un saut de page et vide le tampon, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Saut-de-Page-vide-tampon" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Saut +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +impaire Insère un saut de page, vide le tampon et s'assure que la prochaine + page est impaire, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Saut-de-Page-vide-tampon" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Listes & TdM +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Plusieurs listes peuvent être insérées avec ce menu. + La table des matières, la table des algorithmes, des figures et des tableaux + sont décrits dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tdm" + +\end_inset + +. + L'index est décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Index" + +\end_inset + +, le glossaire section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Glossaire" + +\end_inset + +, et la bibliographie BibTeX section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bases-de-Données-Biblio" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Flottant +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour insérer un flottant, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Flottants" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Note +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour insérer des notes, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Notes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Branches +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour insérer des inserts de branche, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Branches" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Inserts personnalisables +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Crée des inserts qui sont spécifiques à une classe de documents. + De tels inserts sont définis dans le fichier layout pour une certaine classe + de documents. + Un exemple est la classe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +article (Elsevier) +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + qui a trois inserts personnalisés. + La section +\emph on +Inserts flexibles et InsetLayout +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default + explique comment sont définis les inserts personnalisés. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fichier +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Trucs Externes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette rubrique permet d'insérer des fichiers et inclure soit le fichier, + soit son contenu dans votre document. + Le chapitre +\emph on +Trucs externes +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +décrit en détail comment effectuer ces opérations. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Boîte +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Boîte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une mini-page décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Minipages" + +\end_inset + +. + Tous le types de boîtes acceptés par LyX sont décrits en détails dans le + chapitre +\emph on +Boîtes +\emph default +du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Citation +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une citation, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliographie" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Référence croisée +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une référence croisée, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Références-croisées" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Étiquette +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une étiquette, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Références-croisées" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Légende +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Legendes@Légendes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Tableaux longs ! Légende +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une légende dans un flottant ou un tableau long. + Les flottants sont décrits section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Flottants" + +\end_inset + +, les légendes pour le tableaux longs sont décrites dans la section +\emph on +Légendes pour tableaux longs +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Entrée d'index +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une entrée d'index, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Index" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Entrée de glossaire +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une entrée de glossaire, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Glossaire" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Tableau +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère un tableau. + Les tableaux sont décrits section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Tableaux" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Graphique +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère un graphique. + Les graphiques sont décrits section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Graphiques" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URL +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère un URL, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:URLs" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Hyperlien +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère un hyperlien comme décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Hyperliens" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Note de bas de page +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une note de bas de page, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Notes-en-Bas" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Note en marge +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une note dans la marge, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Notes_en_Marge" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Titre court +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère un titre court, décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Titres-courts" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Code TeX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une boîte de code TeX, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Boites-code-TeX" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Listing de code source +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Listing de Programme +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère une boîte de listing de programme. + Les listings de programmes sont décrits dans le chapitre +\emph on +Listings de codes sources +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Date +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Insère la date courante. + Le format dépend du format de date de la langue qui est utilisée pour les + menus de LyX. + LyX offre d'autres manières d'insérer une date qui sont expliquées dans + la section +\emph on +Objets externes +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. + Vous y trouverez une comparaison des différentes méthodes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Aperçu +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Crée un insert d'aperçu, décrit dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Aperçu-de-morceaux" + +\end_inset + + for a description. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Le menu Navigation +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Navigation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce menu liste tous les chapitres, sections, figures et tableaux présents + dans le document courant. + Il vous permet de naviguer au sein de votre document de façon simple et + rapide. + Il vous permet aussi de gérer des signets et de rechercher les notes, les + marques de modification et les références croisées. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les signets +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec ce menu, vous pouvez définir vos propres signets. + C'est utile quand vous travaillez sur un document long et que vous avez + souvent besoin de sauter par exemple entre les sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +6.3. + Pour créer un signet adapté à cet exemple, allez dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2.5 et utilisez le menu +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Signets\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Enregistrer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Signet +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +1. + Allez ensuite dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +6.3 et utilisez +\family sans +Enregistrer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Signet +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +2. + Maintenant vous pouvez facilement sauter entre ces deux sections en utilisant + le menu (tous les signets sont listés en bas du menu +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Signets +\family default +) ou les raccourcis claviers +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "bookmark-goto 1" +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "bookmark-goto 2" +\end_inset + +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez aussi sauter d'un document ouvert à un autre. + Les signets restent utilisables tant que le document reste ouvert. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Note suivante, Modification suivante, Référence croisée suivante +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Saute à la note suivante, à la marque de modification suivante ou à la référence + croisée suivante, en fonction de la position du curseur. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Aller à l'étiquette +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Actif seulement si les curseur est devant une référence croisée. + Ce menu vous place devant l'étiquette à laquelle on fait référence. + (ce qui est la même chose que si on avait cliqué avec le bouton droit sur + la boîte de référence croisée et activé +\family sans +Aller +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'étiquette) +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Recherche directe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette fonctionnalité vous permet d'aller directement au même endroit du + texte dans la sortie, voir la section +\emph on +Recherche directe +\emph default + du manuel des +\emph on +Options avancées +\emph default + pour une description détaillée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Le menu Document +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Suivi des modifications +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le suivi des modifications est décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Suivi-de-modifications" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Fichier journal LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Après avoir utilisé LaTeX en visionnant ou en exportant un document, ce + menu sera rendu actif. + Il montre le fichier de journalisation de la dernière exécution du programme + LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez y voir les détails du fonctionnement de LaTeX. + Les +\emph on +experts +\emph default +pourront y trouver la raison de certaines erreurs LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Plan +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ouvre la fenêtre plan/table des matières, décrite section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Naviguer" + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Table-des-Matières" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Début appendice ici +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce menu va commencer l'appendice du document à la position du curseur, comme + décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Appendices" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Comprimé +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Compresse ou décompresse le document courant. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Paramètres +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Paramètres" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les paramètres du document sont décrits dans l'appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:paramètres-du-document" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Le menu Outils +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Outils +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Correcteur orthographique +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le correcteur orthographique est décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Correcteur-Orthographique" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Dictionnaire de synonymes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le dictionnaire de synonymes est décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Dictionnaire-de-synonymes" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Statistiques +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Compteur de mots +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Compteur de caractères +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Statistiques +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Compte le nombre de mots et de caractères dans le document courant ou dans + la portion de document sélectionnée. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Informations TeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Informations TeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Montre une liste des classes et des styles qui sont installés dans votre + système LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Reconfigurer +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Reconfiguration de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyX ! Reconfigurer|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Reconfiguration de LyX +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce menu lance la reconfiguration de LyX, cela signifie que LyX vas rechercher + sur votre ordinateur les paquetages LaTeX et les programmes dont il peut + avoir besoin. + Voir pour plus d'information la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Config-LyX-de-base" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Préférences\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La fenêtre de dialogue préférence est décrite en détails dans le chapitre +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Fenêtre-Préférences" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Le menu Aide +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Menu ! Aide +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce menu permet d'ouvrir les fichiers qui constituent la documentation de + LyX, dans la langue de l'interface LyX. + Si un manuel n'est pas disponible dans cette langue, la version anglaise + reste accessible. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le menu +\family sans +Configuration +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTeX +\family default + affiche un document LyX avec des informations sur les paquetages et les + classes LaTeX que LyX a trouvées sur votre système. + (voir aussi la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Configuration-LaTeX" + +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Les Barres d'outils +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Barres-d'Outils" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Barres-d'outils" + +\end_inset + + montre comment activer ou désactiver les barres d'outils. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il est aussi possible de définir des barres d'outils personnalisées, ce + qui est décrit dans le manuel +\emph on +Options avancées. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +La barre d'outils Standard +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barre d'outils ! Standard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La barre d'outils standard illustrée ci-dessus contient les boutons suivants, + de gauche à droite : +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +LTleft}{0pt} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ceci est indispensable pour aligner les tableaux longs qui suivent. + Voyez le manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +pour plus d'informations. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png + clip + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +menu déroulant pour les environnements de paragraphes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace -10mm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align left +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/buffer-new.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nouveau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/file-open.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ouvrir +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/buffer-write.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Enregistrer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show_print.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Imprimer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show_spellchecker.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Correcteur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +orthographique +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/undo.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Annuler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/redo.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Refaire +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/cut.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Couper +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/copy.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Copier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/paste.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Coller +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show_findreplace.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rechercher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +remplacer +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +( +\lang english +Quick +\lang french +) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Rechercher +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +et +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +remplacer +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +( +\lang english +Advanced +\lang french +) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/bookmark-goto_0.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Signets\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Naviguer en arrière +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/font-emph.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mise en évidence, fonction du dialogue +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/font-noun.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Donner le style nom propre au texte, fonction du dialogue +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/textstyle-apply.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Donner au texte le dernier style sélectionné dans le dialogue +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/math-mode.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formule +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_graphics.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Graphique +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/tabular-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tableau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-toggle_toc.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Active ou désactive la fenêtre Plan, +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Plan +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/toolbar-toggle_math.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Active ou désactive la barre d'outils Maths +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/toolbar-toggle_table.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Active ou désactive le barre d'outils Tableau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +La barre d'outils Autres +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barre d'outils ! Autres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La barre d'outils supplémentaire illustrée ci-dessus contient les boutons + suivantes de gauche à droite: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Implicite +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout_Enumerate.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste numérotée +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout_Itemize.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste à puces +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout_List.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Liste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout_Description.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Description +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-increment.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Augmenter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +profondeur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Réduire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +profondeur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/float-insert_figure.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flottant\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Figure +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/float-insert_table.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Flottant\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Tableau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/label-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Étiquette +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_ref.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Référence croisée +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_citation.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Citation +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/index-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Entrée +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'index +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/nomencl-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Entrée +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +glossaire +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/footnote-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/marginalnote-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +en +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +marge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/note-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Note +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/box-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Boîte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/url-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Hyperlink +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/ert-insert.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Code T +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_include.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Insertion\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Sous-document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/dialog-show_character.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Style +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +texte\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/layout-paragraph.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Édition\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paragraphe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/thesaurus-entry.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbouton + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Dictionnaire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +synonymes +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +La barre d'outils Visionner/Mettre à jour +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barre d'outils ! Visionner/Mettre à jour +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La barre d'outils Visionner/Mettre à jour contient de gauche à droite les + boutons suivants: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Visionner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mettre à jour +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Visionner le document maître +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mettre à jour le document maître +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Sortie\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Synchroniser avec le résultat imprimable +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Visionner (autres formats) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/update-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Affichage\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Mettre à jour (autres formats) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +* Ces icônes peuvent être apparaître autrement si vous n'utilisez pas la + version implicite des icônes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Les autre barres d'outils +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La barre d'outils de suivi des modifications est détaillée dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Suivi-de-modifications" + +\end_inset + +, la barre d'outils tableau +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barre d'outils ! Tableau +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + est expliquée dans le manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. + et la barre d'outils macro mathématiques +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Barre d'outils ! Macros mathématiques +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + dans le manuel +\emph on +Math +\emph default +s. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Les paramètres du document +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:paramètres-du-document" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Document ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La fenêtre de dialogue des paramètres du document contient des sous-menus + pour définir des propriétés qui s'appliquent à tout le document. + On l'ouvre avec le menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres +\family default +. + Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres de votre document comme valeurs + implicites avec le bouton +\family sans +Enregistrer comme valeurs implicites +\family default + de la fenêtre de dialogue. + Cela va créer un fichier +\family typewriter +defaults.lyx +\family default + que LyX chargera automatiquement à chaque fois que vous créerez un nouveau + document sans utiliser de modèle. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le bouton +\family sans +Valeurs implicites de la classe +\family default + repositionne les réglages aux valeurs implicites de la classe du document. + Ceci affecte essentiellement les options de classe et les rubriques Format + de la page et Numérotation et TdM. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les différents sous-menus de cette fenêtre de dialogue sont décrits dans + ce qui suit. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Classe de document +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici, vous pouvez choisir la classe de votre document, les options de classe, + un pilote graphique et un document maître. + Les classes de documents sont décrites dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Classes-de-doc" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +À l'aide du bouton +\family sans +Format local +\family default +, vous pouvez charger votre propre fichier de format qui n'est pas dans + les répertoire des +\emph on +layouts +\emph default + de LyX, et n'est donc pas reconnu en tant que format pour une classe de + documents. + Pour en savoir plus sur les fichiers de format, voyez le chapitre +\emph on +Installer de nouvelles classes +\emph default + dans le manuel +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certaines classes utilisent des options de classe implicites. + Si c'est le cas, elles sont listées dans le champ +\family sans +Réglable +\family default + et vous pouvez décider de les utiliser ou non. + Si vous ne savez pas exactement à quoi servent les options de classe par + défaut, il est recommandé de ne pas y toucher. + Le pilote graphique est utilisé avec les paquetages LaTeX pour la couleur + et les graphiques. + En utilisant +\family sans +Implicite, +\family default + on utilise le pilote implicite des paquetages LaTeX. + Il est recommandé d'utiliser le pilote implicite, à moins de savoir ce + que l'on fait. +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Si vous voulez un des pilotes suivants +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +vous devez d'abord les activer au niveau de votre distribution LaTeX, voir + la section +\emph on +Driver support +\emph default + dans +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On doit préciser un document maître quand le document courant est un sous-docume +nt. + LyX va utiliser ce document maître quand le sous-document sera ouvert sans + son maître. + De cette façon, les sous-documents sont toujours compilables. + Plus d'explication sur les sous-documents et les documents maîtres se trouvent + dans la section +\emph on +sous-documents +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a également une option pour supprimer le date et une autre pour utiliser + le paquetage +\series bold +refstyle +\series default +à la place du paquetage +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + pour la gestion des références croisées, voir la section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Références-croisées" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Sous-documents +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ce sous-menu n'est visible que si votre document contient des sous-documents. + Voyez la section +\emph on +sous-documents +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +pour plus de détails. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Modules +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les modules sont expliqués dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Modules" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Format local +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Format-local" + +\end_inset + + pour une description de cette rubrique. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Polices +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les paramètres des polices de caractères du document sont décrits dans la + section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Polices-et-Styles" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Format du texte +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez préciser si les paragraphes doivent être séparés par des indentation +s ou en ajoutant un espacement vertical. + L'interligne et le nombre de colonnes peut aussi être modifié. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez que LyX n'affichera pas deux colonnes ou plus, ni ne modifiera l'interlign +e à l'écran. + Ces modifications d'affichages ne sont pas pratiques, sont souvent illisibles + et sont en contradiction avec le concept WYSIWYM. + Par contre tout sera comme vous l'avez voulu à l'impression. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Format de la page +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une description de ce menu est faite dans les sections +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Taille-du-papier" + +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Apparence-du-document" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Marges +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici vous pouvez modifier les marges de votre document, voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Marges" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Langue +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Langue" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Langue ! Encodage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La langue du document et le style des guillemet peuvent être définis ici. + L'encodage du document précise comment le contenu du document est exporté + vers LaTeX (le fichier de LyX est toujours codé en utf8). + Tous les caractères qui ne peuvent pas être encodés avec l'encodage spécifié + seront exportés comme des commandes LaTeX (ce qui échoue si on ne connaît + pas de commande LaTeX pour un caractère particulier). +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Les commandes connues sont définies dans un fichier texte ( +\emph on +unicodesymbols +\emph default +). + Vous pouvez donc ajouter vous-même à ce fichier des commandes pour un caractère + inconnu, voyez le manuel +\size normal +\emph on +\color none +Personnalisation +\emph default + pour plus de détails. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si vous utilisez l'option +\family sans +Langue implicite +\family default +, LyX détermine l'encodage d'une portion de texte à partir de la langue + utilisée. + Si le document contient du texte dans plus d'une langue, vous aurez plus + d'un encodage dans le fichier LaTeX. + Si vous n'utilisez pas cette option, alors tout le document utilisera toujours + un seul encodage. + Activer cette option est le meilleur choix. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX accepte aussi les sorties Unicode, ce qui est particulièrement utile + si vous avez besoin de beaucoup de symboles spéciaux ou d'une écriture + non alphabétique. + Si vous voulez l'utiliser (et que bien sûr, votre installation LaTeX accepte + Unicode), choisissez une des quatre variantes de l'utf8 de la liste ci-dessous. + Malheureusement le support Unicode du LaTeX standard est incomplet, ce + qui fait qu'il n'est pas rare qu'un fichier avec beaucoup de symboles Unicode + fonctionne bien avec +\family sans +Langue implicite +\family default + (quand LyX utilise sa propre liste de commandes LaTeX connues), mais ne + fonctionne pas avec un encodage utf8 fixé (quand la liste de commandes + LaTeX connues n'est pas utilisée, puisque tous les symboles Unicode peuvent + être encodés en utf8). + La situation est nettement améliorée avec XeTeX et LuaTeX, les deux nouvelles + possibilités de moteurs de rendu pour remplacer le LaTeX standard. + Ces deux moteurs acceptent Unicode de façon native. + LyX gère maintenant aussi ces deux moteurs (via les formats de sortie +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default +, +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + et +\family sans +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTeX) +\family default +; voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-des-fichiers-en-sortie" + +\end_inset + +), donc si les options décrites plus haut échouent, vous pouvez toujours + essayer l'un de ces deux moteurs de rendu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La rubrique +\family sans +Paquetage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +linguistique +\family default + fixe le paquetage LaTeX utilisé pour les césures et la traduction des chaînes + de caractères comme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Partie +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Les réglages possibles sont: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Implicite utilise le paquetage sélectionné dans +\family sans + Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Préférences\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres de langue +\family default + (voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Langue" + +\end_inset + +); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Automatique sélectionne le paquetage linguistique le plus approprié pour + le format de visionnement/exportation que vous allez utiliser. + dans de nombreux cas ce sera +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Si le paquetage plus récent +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et plus approprié (comme dans avec XeTeX ou des polices non-TeX), ce dernier + sera utilisé à la place de +\series bold +babel +\series default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Toujours +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +utiliser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +babel appelle +\series bold +babel +\series default + même si +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + aurait été plus approprié; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Réglable permet de spécifier une commande d'appel de paquetage linguistique + de votre choix. + Par exemple, si vous voulez utiliser une paquetage linguistique spécifique + comme +\series bold +ngerman +\series default + (pour les texte en allemand), saisissez +\series bold + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\backslash +usepackage{ngerman} +\series default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Aucun n'utilisera aucun paquetage linguistique. + Ceci est nécessaire pour certaines classes de document pour articles scientifiq +ues. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Voici la liste avec les encodages les plus importants +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Langue +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +implicite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pas +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +recours +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +inputenc) identique à l'option +\family sans +Langue implicite +\family default +, mais le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + n'est pas utilisé. + Si vous utilisez cet encodage, vous aurez probablement à charger manuellement + quelques paquetages supplémentaires dans le préambule et à préciser l'encodage + utilisé pour les portions de texte en langue étrangère avec du code TeX; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ASCII l'encodage ASCII, qui ne couvre que l'anglais standard (ASCII 7 bits). + LyX convertit tous les autres caractères en commandes LaTeX, ce qui peut + produire un gros fichier si beaucoup de commandes LaTeX sont nécessaires; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Arabe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1255) page de code de MS Windows pour l'arabe et le farsi; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Arabe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-6) pour l'arabe et le farsi; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Arménien +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(AmSCII8) pour l'arménien; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Baltique +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-13) pour l'estonien, le letton, et le lithuanien, c'est un sur-ensemble + de l'encodage ISO-8859-4; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Baltique +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-4) (latin 4) pour l'estonien, le letton, et le lithuanien, c'est un + sous-ensemble de l'encodage ISO-8859-13; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chinois +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(simplifié) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-CN) pour le chinois simplifié, utilisé spécialement sur les systèmes + UNIX, depuis 2001 cet encodage est officiellement remplacé par l'encodage + GB18030, et comme le GB18030 n'est pas disponible pour LaTeX, vous devriez + essayer l'encodage Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chinois +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(simplifié) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(GBK) pour le chinois simplifié, est identique à la page de code Windows + CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +936 à part le symbole pour la monnaie Euro, depuis 2001 cet encodage est + officiellement remplacé par l'encodage GB18030, et comme le GB18030 n'est + pas disponible pour LaTeX, vous devriez essayer l'encodage Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Chinois +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(traditionnel) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-TW) pour le chinois traditionnel; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Coréen +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-KR) pour le coréen; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillique +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1251) page de code MS Windows pour le cyrillique; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillique +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-5) couvre le biélorusse, le bulgare, le macédonien, le serbe et l'ukrainien +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillique +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(KOI8-R) cyrillique standard spécialement pour le russe; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillique +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(KOI8-U) cyrillique pour l'ukrainien; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Cyrillique +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +154) cyrillique pour le kazakh; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DOS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +437) page de code MS DOS; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +centrale +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1250) page de code MS Windows pour l'ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2 (latin2); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +centrale +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2) (latin2) couvre l’albanais, le croate, le tchèque, l'allemand, le + hongrois, le polonais, le roumain, le slovaque et le slovène; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sud +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-3) (latin3) couvre l'espéranto, le galicien, le maltais et le turc; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sud-est +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-16) (latin10) couvre l'albanais, le croate, le finnois, le français, + l'allemand, le hongrois, le gaélique irlandais, l'italien, le polonais, + le roumain et le slovène. + Il est conçu pour couvrir de nombreuses langues et de nombreux caractères + avec des accents diacritiques; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +occidentale +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1252) page de code MS Windows pour l'ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1 (latin1); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +occidentale +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1) (latin1) couvre l'albanais, le catalan, le danois, le néerlandais, + l'anglais, le féroïen, le finnois, le français, le galicien, l'allemand, + l'islandais, l'irlandais, le norvégien, le portugais, l'espagnol et le + suédois. + Il vaut mieux utiliser à la place l'ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-15; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Europe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +occidentale +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-15) (latin9) comme l'encodage ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1, mais avec en plus le symbole de l'euro, la ligature œ et quelques + caractères utilisés en français et en finnois; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Grec +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-7) pour le grec; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hébreu +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1255) page de code MS Windows pour l'hébreu, un sur-ensemble de l'encodage + ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-8; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hébreu +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-8) pour l'hébreu; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japonais +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-JP) encodage EUC-JP pour le japonais, utilise le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, quand vous utilisez cet encodage, mettez la langue du document à +\family sans +Japonais +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japonais +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(JIS) encodage JIS pour le japonais, utilise le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +CJK, +\series default +quand vous utilisez cet encodage, mettez la langue du document à +\family sans +Japonais +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japonais +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(non +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(EUC-JP) encodage EUC-JP pour le japonais, utilise le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +japanese +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, quand vous utilisez cet encodage, mettez la langue du document à +\family sans +Japonais; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Japonais +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(non +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(JIS) encodage JIS pour le japonais, utilise le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +japanese, +\series default +quand vous utilisez cet encodage, mettez la langue du document à +\family sans +Japonais; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Thai +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(TIS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +620-0) pour le thaï; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Turc(ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-9) (latin5) pour le turc, identique à l'encodage ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1 avec les caractères islandais remplacés par les caractères turcs; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(CJK) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) encodage Unicode utf8 utilisant le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + pour le chinois, le japonais et le coréen; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTeX) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) encodage Unicode utf8 à utiliser avec +\family sans +XeTeX +\family default +et +\family sans +LuaTeX +\family default + qui utilisent Unicode directement, sans l'aide du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +inputenc +\series default +. + Lyx va choisir automatiquement cet encodage si vous exportez ou prévisualisez + en utilisant XeTeX ou LuaTeX. + En principe, vous n'avez pas à sélectionner cet encodage vous-même manuellement +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode(extension +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ucs) +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) encodage Unicode utf8 basé sur la paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +ucs +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! ucs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + (complet, incluant les écritures latines, grecque, cyrillique et CJK); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Unicode +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(utf8) encodage Unicode utf8 basé sur le paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Actuellement il ne supporte qu'un nombre limité de caractères (principalement + les écritures latines). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Couleurs +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Couleurs ! texte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Couleurs ! fond +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez via cette rubrique modifier la couleur de la police du texte + principal (implicitement noire) et du texte des notes grisées (implicitement + gris léger). + Le bouton +\family sans +RàZ +\family default +repositionne les couleurs sur les valeurs implicites. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez également modifier les couleur du fond pour les pages (implicitement + blanche) et pour le boîtes ombrées (implicitement rouge). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Les couleurs n'apparaissent pas dans la fenêtre LyX, seulement dans la sortie + imprimable (cette boîte grisée est rendue en bleu dans la sortie). +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Notez bien que si vous modifiez la couleur du texte principal en utilisant + l'option +\family sans +Couleur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +liens +\family default + dans les paramètres du document, rubrique +\family sans +Propriétés +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +PDF +\family default +, onglet +\family sans +Hyperlien +\family default +, vous devez probablement modifier la couleur des liens symboliques en utilisant + +\family sans +Autres +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +options +\family default +dans ces +\family sans +Propriétés +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +PDF +\family default +. + Par exemple l'option +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +met les liens en noir. + Pour plus d'informations, voyez le manuel du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pous pouvez modifier page par page la couleur du texte principal et la couleur + du fond dans votre document en mettant ces commandes en code TeX juste + après un saut de page forcé: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +pour la couleur de la page: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +pagecolor{color name} +\series default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +pour la couleur du texte: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +color{color name} +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les noms de couleur doivent être choisis parmi: +\series bold +black +\series default +, +\series bold +blue +\series default +, +\series bold +cyan +\series default +, +\series bold +green +\series default +, +\series bold +magenta +\series default +, +\series bold +red +\series default +, +\series bold +white +\series default +, +\series bold +yellow +\series default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Si vous avez modifié une couleur de texte ou de fond, vous pouvez les réutiliser + sous les noms suivants: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +pour la couleur du fond de la page: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +page_backgroundcolor +\series default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +pour la couleur du texte principal +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +document_fontcolor +\series default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +pour la couleur du fond des boîtes ombrées: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +shadecolor +\series default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +pour le texte des notes grisées: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +note_fontcolor +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour les détails sur la définition et l'utilisation des couleurs personnalisées, + voyez la section +\emph on +Tableaux colorés +\emph default + du manuel des +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Numérotation & TdM +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici vous pouvez ajuster la profondeur de numérotation des en-têtes de section, + comme c'est décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Profondeur-section" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Bibliographie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez choisir un style de citation utilisant les paquetages LaTeX + +\series bold +natbib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! natbib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + ou +\series bold +jurabib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! jurabib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Vous pouvez autoriser la création de bibliographies thématiques à l'aide + du paquetage +\series bold +bibtopic +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! bibtopic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et vous pouvez personnaliser la créatioçn de la bibliographie d'un document + particulier. + Pour plus d'information voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Bibliographie" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Index +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez régler ici comment doit être créé l'index de votre document, + et vous pouvez définir d'autres index. + Voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Index" + +\end_inset + + pour les détails. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Propriétés du PDF +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les propriétés du PDF sont expliquées section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:propriétés-du-PDF" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Options mode math +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces options vont forcer LyX à utiliser les paquetages LaTeX +\series bold +amsmath +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! amsmath +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\series bold +esint +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! esint +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, +\series bold +mathdots +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! mathdots +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + et +\series bold +mhchem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! mhchem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + ou alors à ne les utiliser que si nécessaire: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +amsmath est nécessaire pour plusieurs constructions mathématiques, donc, + si vous avez des erreurs LaTeX dans des formules, vérifiez que vous avez + autorisé les paquetages AMS; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +esint est utilisé pour des signes d'intégration spéciaux, voir la section + see section +\emph on +Grands opérateurs +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Maths +\emph default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mathdots est utilisé pour pour les ellipses particulières, voir la section + +\emph on +Ellipses +\lang english + +\emph default +\lang french +du manuel +\emph on +Maths +\emph default +; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mhchem est utili +\emph on +s +\emph default +é pour les équations en chimie, voir la section +\lang english + +\emph on +\lang french +Symboles et équations chimiques +\emph default +du manuel +\emph on +Maths. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Placement des flottants +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les options de placement des flottants sont décrites dans la section +\emph on +Placement des flottants +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Listings +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les réglages de l'environnement Listing sont décrits dans le chapitre +\emph on +Listings de code source +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Objets insérés +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Puces +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici, vous pouvez changer les caractères utilisés pour les listes à puces. + L'environnement liste à puces est décrit section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:ListePuces" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Branches +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les branches sont décrites section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Branches" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Sortie +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Doc-Output" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez définir ici quelques spécificités des sorties compilées à partir + du document courant: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Format +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +implicite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +résultat est le format utilisé quand vous sélectionnez +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Visonner +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Mettre à jour +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Visionner le document maître +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +mettre à jour le document maître +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans le menu +\family sans +Visionner +\family default + ou dans la barre d'outils. + La velur implicite est fixée dans +\family sans +Outils\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Préférences\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Formats +\family default + de fichier, voir sec. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Synchroniser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +avec +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +le +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +résultat +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +imprimable positionne les réglages pour le menu +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Recherche +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directe +\family default +. + Pour les détails, voir la section +\emph on +Recherche inversée DVI/PDF +\emph default + dans le manuel des +\emph on +Options avancées +\emph default +. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Options +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +export +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +XHTML positionne les réglages pour le format d'exportation +\family sans +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +XHTML +\family default +. + +\family sans +XHTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.1 strict +\family default + garantira que l'exportation suivra exactement les spécifications de la + version 1.1 du standard XHTML. + Les différents réglages de l'entrée +\family sans +Traduction des maths +\family default + sont décrits en détail dans la section +\emph on +Formules mathématiques en XHTML +\emph default + du manuel des +\emph on +Options avancées +\emph default +. + La mise à l'échelle est utilisée pour fixer la taille des équations dans + le résultat. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Préambule LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans cette fenêtre de texte on peut entrer les commandes pour charger des + paquetages LaTeX spéciales ou pour définir des commandes LaTeX personnalisées. + La modification du préambule doit être réservée aux experts du LaTeX. + Vous ne devez pas y entrer des commandes, à moins de savoir exactement + ce que vous faites. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Une introduction à la syntaxe du LaTeX est donnée section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Syntaxe-de-Latex" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +La fenêtre Préférences +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:Fenêtre-Préférences" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Dialogues ! Préférences +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La fenêtre de dialogue préférence est appelée grâce au menu +\family sans +Outils +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Préférences +\family default +. + Elle contient plusieurs sous-menus qui sont détaillés dans ce qui suit. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Apparence +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Interface utilisateur +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Le fichier de description de l'interface utilisateur +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Personnalisation ! des barres d'outils +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Personnalisation ! des menus +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +On peut changer l'apparence des menus et des barres d'outils en choisissant + un fichier de description de l'interface utilisateur +\family typewriter + +\family default +(ui). + Un fichier ui est un fichier texte dans lequel les éléments des menus et + des barres d'outils sont listés. + +\lang english +The file +\emph on +default.ui +\emph default + loads three files +\lang french +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdmenus.inc +\shape italic + +\emph on +\lang english +specifies the menu entries for the standard menus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdcontext.inc +\shape italic +\emph on +\lang english +specifies +\shape default +\emph default + the menu entries in popup context menus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdtoolbars.inc +\shape italic + +\emph on +\lang english +specifies the toolbar buttons +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour créer une nouvelle disposition de menu ou de barre d'outils, partez + d'une copie de ces fichiers et éditez les éléments que vous voulez modifier. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La syntaxe des fichiers +\family sans + +\family default +.inc est simple. + Les éléments +\family sans +The Menubar +\family default +, +\family sans +Menu +\family default + et +\family sans +Toolbar +\family default + doivent se terminer par un +\family sans +End +\family default + explicite. + Ils peuvent contenir des éléments de type +\family sans +Submenu +\family default +, +\family sans +Item +\family default +, +\family sans +OptItem +\family default +, +\family sans +Separator +\family default +, +\family sans +Icon +\family default + et dans le cas particulier du menu +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +file_lastfiles +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +, un élément +\family sans +Lastfiles +\family default + . + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La syntaxe des éléments est la suivante: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Item +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +nom de menu ou de bouton +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +fonction LyX +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + +Toutes les fonctions de LyX sont listées dans le menu +\family sans +Aide\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Fonctions +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +Maintenant voyons un exemple: supposons que nous utilisions souvent le menu + +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Signets +\family default +et que de ce fait nous voulions un signet supplémentaire, vous pouvez ajouter + simplement la ligne +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Item "Enregistrer Signet 6" "bookmark-save 6" +\series default + +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + +à la section du menu +\emph on +navigate_bookmarks +\emph default + dans le fichier +\emph on +stdmenus.inc +\emph default +, pour disposer d'un sixième signet. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec +\family sans + +\lang english +Icon +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Set +\family default +\lang french + vous pouvez modifier l'apparence des boutons des barres d'outils. + Les ensembles d'icônes actuellement disponibles sont comparés ici: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "this image" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Aide automatique +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option +\family sans +Autoriser l'affichage des bulles d'aide dans la zone de travail principale + +\family default +permet l'affichage de bulles d'aide ( +\emph on +tooltips +\emph default +) poour les insert fermés comme les entrées d'index et les notes de bas + de page. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Session +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec l'option +\family sans +Restaurer l'apparence et de la géométrie des fenêtres +\family default +, LyX sera ouvert avec sa fenêtre principale à la position et avec l'arrangement + qu'elle avait lors de la dernière utilisation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option +\family sans +Restaurer la position du curseur +\family default + met le curseur à la position qu'il avait dans le fichier la dernière fois. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option +\family sans +Charger les fichiers ouverts lors de la dernière session +\family default + ouvre tous les fichiers qui étaient ouverts lors de la dernière session + LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Le bouton +\family sans +Effacer toutes les informations sur la session +\family default + supprime toutes les informations des sessions LyX précédentes (position + du curseur, nom des fichiers récents, etc.). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Documents +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Documents de sauvegarde" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sauvegarde ! Documents +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Faire une sauvegarde des documents originaux lors de l'enregistrement +\family default +crée une copie de sauvegarde du fichier dans l'état où il était lorsqu'il + a été ouvert ou enregistré la dernière fois. + Cette copie est conservée dans le +\family sans +Répertoire de sauvegarde +\family default + voir la section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Répertoires" + +\end_inset + + ou dans le répertoire de votre document +\lang english +if no +\lang french + +\family sans +Répertoire de sauvegarde +\family default + +\lang english +is specified +\lang french +. + La copie de sauvegarde possède le suffixe +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +.lyx~ +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand l'option +\family sans +Sauvegarde automatique, toutes les x minutes +\family default + est activée, vous pouvez préciser le temps entre deux sauvegardes. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Enregistrer les documents sous forme compressée +\family default + enregistre toujours dans un format compressé. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Nombre maximum de fichiers récents +\family default + est le nombre de fichiers récents que LyX doit afficher dans le menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Documents +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +récents +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si l'option +\family sans +Ouvrir les documents en onglet +\family default + n'est pas cochée, chaque fichier sera ouvert dans sa propre instance de + LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option +\family sans +Une seule instance +\family default + n'est active que si un tube de service pour LyX est spécifié +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Voir section. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Répertoires" + +\end_inset + + pour les détails sur les tubes du serveur LyX. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +. + Si la case est cochée, les documents seront ouverts dans la même instance + active de LyX. + Sinon, une nouvelle instance de LyX est activée pour chaque document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Si l'option +\family sans +Bouton unique pour fermer les onglets +\family default + est cochée, il n'y aura qu'un bouton ( +\family sans + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/closetab.png + scale 75 + +\end_inset + + +\family default +) à la droite de la barre des onglets pour fermer ceux-ci. + Sinon, chaque document a son propre bouton de fermeture. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default +pour la dernière option, il vous faut redémarrer LyX pour que la modification + soit prise en compte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Polices d'écran +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Polices ! d'écran +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Polices-d'Écran" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ces polices sont utilisées pour afficher votre document à l'écran. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Notez que cette section ne traite que des polices qui sont utilisées à +\emph on +l'intérieur +\emph default +de la fenêtre de LyX. + Les polices qui apparaissent sur la +\emph on +sortie papier +\emph default +sont indépendantes des polices de LyX et sont sélectionnées à l'aide du + menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Polices +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Implicitement LyX utilise +\emph on +times +\emph default +comme police +\family sans +romaine +\family default +, +\emph on +arial +\emph default +ou +\emph on +helvetica +\emph default +(cela dépend du système) comme police +\family sans +sans empattement +\family default + et +\emph on +courier +\emph default +comme police à +\family typewriter +chasse fixe +\family default + ou +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +machine à écrire +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez changer la taille des polices avec le réglage du +\family sans +Zoom +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les +\family sans +Tailles de police +\family default + sont données comme des hauteurs de lettre en points. + Une lettre de 72.27 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +points ayant une taille de 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pouce, voyez l'appendice +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:Unités-de-longueur" + +\end_inset + + pour les unités de longueur utilisées dans LyX. + Les tailles de polices implicites sont les mêmes que celles utilisées pour + une police de document de 10 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt. + Pour plus de détails voyez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Document-Polices" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec l'option +\family sans +Utiliser le cache pixmap pour accélérer le rendu des polices +\family default +, LyX a besoin de re-dessiner l'écran moins souvent. + Cela donne de meilleures performances, surtout sur des systèmes lents. + D'un autre côté, les caractères peuvent paraître un peu flous à l'écran. + Vous allez donc activer ou non cette option selon que vous préférez la + vitesse ou l'esthétique. + Notez que le cache pixmap n'est disponible et utile que sous Mac +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +OS et Windows. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Couleurs +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Couleurs ! Écran de LyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Préférences ! Couleurs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici, vous pouvez changer toutes les couleurs utilisées dans LyX. + Choisissez juste un élément dans la liste et appuyez sur le bouton +\family sans +Modifier +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En cochant l'option +\family sans +Utiliser les couleurs du système +\family default + la palette de couleurs de vote système d'exploitation ou de votre gestionnaire + de fenêtre est utilisée. + Les couleurs +\family sans +curseur, sélection, ligne de tableau, texte, étiquette d'URL +\family default + and +\family sans +texte d'URL +\family default + ne sont alors plus personnalisables et disparaissent de la liste. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Affichage écran +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Préférences ! Affichage écran +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici, vous pouvez préciser si LyX doit afficher les graphiques. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option +\family sans +Aperçu sur le vif +\family default + permet le pré-visionnement de petits morceaux de votre document. + Voyez la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Aperçu-de-morceaux" + +\end_inset + + pour plus de détails. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option +\family sans +Marquer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +paragraphes +\family default +affiche un pied-de-mouche (¶, +\emph on +pilcrow +\emph default + en anglais) à la fin de chaque paragraphe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Saisie +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Préférences ! Saisie +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Contrôle +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Saisie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option +\family sans +Le curseur suit la barre de défilement +\family default + fait que le curseur se place en haut de la partie de document qui est actuellem +ent visible quand on fait défiler le texte. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez régler la largeur du curseur. + Si vous choisissez une valeur nulle, l'épaisseur du curseur s'adaptera + à la valeur de zoom de la police d'écran. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Défiler au-delà du bas du document +\family default + est explicite. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Avec LyX, on peut sauter d'un mot à l'autre en appuyant sur +\family sans +Ctrl+flèche +\family default +. + En cochant l'option +\family sans +Déplacements du curseur entre mots à la Mac +\family default + le curseur saute de la fin d'un mot au début du suivant, normalement il + saute du début au début. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option +\family sans +Trier les environnements par ordre alphabétique +\family default + trie les entrées dans la liste déroulante des environnements de paragraphe. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option +\family sans +Regrouper les environnements par catégorie +\family default + regroupe les entrées dans la liste déroulante des environnements de paragraphe + (le menu des styles). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +L'option d'édition des macro mathématiques détermine le style d'édition, + voir la section +\emph on +Macros en mode mathématique +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Math +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Plein écran +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici vous pouvez préciser ce qui doit être caché en mode plein écran. + L'option +\family sans +Limitation de la largeur du texte +\family default + précise la largeur du texte en mode plein écran. + De cette façon, vous pouvez afficher un texte moins large que l'écran, + il apparaît alors centré. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Raccourcis +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Préférences ! Raccourcis +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Le fichier Bind +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +\lang english +Bind File +\family default +\lang french + +\lang english +specifies the file that is +\lang french + utilisé pour effectuer la liaison entre une fonction de LyX et une combinaison + de touches. + Plusieurs fichiers de liaisons sont disponibles, tout prêts: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +cua.bind ensemble de liaisons (avec les raccourcis claviers typiques sur + PC) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +(x)emacs.bind ensemble de liaisons comme celles utilisées par l'éditeur de + texte +\family sans +Emacs +\family default + ( +\family sans +XEmacs +\family default +) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mac.bind ensemble de liaisons pour les systèmes utilisant Mac +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +OS. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a aussi des fichier .bind qui ont été créés pour des classes de documents + particulières comme par exemple +\shape italic +broadway.bind +\shape default + et aussi pour des langues particulières. + Le nom des fichiers +\family typewriter +.bind +\family default + attachés à une langue commencent par le code de la langue, par exemple + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +pt +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + pour le Portugais. + Quand vous utilisez LyX dans une langue donnée, il va essayer d'utiliser + les fichiers .bind appropriés. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Certains fichiers +\family typewriter +.bind +\family default + ont un champ relativement limité, comme +\shape italic +math.bind +\shape default +. + Quand on regarde à la fin du fichier +\shape italic +cua.bind +\shape default +, on peut voir que ces derniers sont inclus pour conserver le contrôle dans + le fichier +\family typewriter +.bind +\family default + principal. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +The field +\family sans +Show +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ke +\bar under +y +\bar default +-bindings +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +containing +\family default + allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function + in the selected key binding file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +Ajouter/modifier les raccourcis +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Éditer-les-raccourcis" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Raccourcis ! Ajouter/modifier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour ajouter des nouveaux raccourcis clavier ou modifier des raccourcis + existants à votre propre goût, vous pouvez utiliser le tableau de la fenêtre + de dialogue qui liste toutes les fonctions de LyX avec les raccourcis associés. + Pour pouvoir parcourir facilement les fonctions, elles sont rassemblées + par catégories et la fenêtre propose un champ +\family sans +Afficher les raccourcis clavier contenant +\family default +. + Vous pouvez taper dans ce champ un mot clé pour une fonction que vous voulez + éditer. + Par exemple mettez-y le mot +\emph on +paste +\emph default + et vous aurez quatre raccourcis différents pour les trois fonctions qui + contiennent le mot +\emph on +paste +\emph default + dans leur nom. + Comme vous pouvez le voir, une fonction peut être associée a plusieurs + raccourcis. + Toutes les fonctions de LyX sont aussi listées dans le fichier +\emph on +Fonctions LyX +\emph default + que vous trouverez dans le menu +\family sans +Aide +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Par exemple, pour ajouter le raccourci +\family sans +Alt+Q +\family default + pour la fonction +\family sans +textstyle-apply +\family default +, sélectionnez la fonction dans la liste, et appuyez sur le bouton +\family sans +Modifier +\family default +. + Une fenêtre de dialogue apparaît où vous pouvez ajouter le raccourci en + l'utilisant. + Vous appuyez sur les touches +\family sans +Alt+Q +\family default + pour définir le raccourci. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Modifier un raccourci existant se fait de la même manière. + Vous pouvez aussi associer plusieurs fonctions au même raccourci en modifiant + un raccourci existant et en +\lang english +starting the LyX Function definition with “command alternatives” and following + it with the +\lang french + différents noms de fonctions séparés par des point-virgules. + LyX utilisera alors la première fonction de la liste qui est autorisée + dans la partie courant du document. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If you don't like a a particular shortcut, you can remove it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Un autre possibilité consiste à modifier les fichiers +\family typewriter +.bind +\family default + avec un éditeur de texte. + La syntaxe des fichiers +\family typewriter +.bind +\family default + est assez simple: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +bind +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +combinaison de touches +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +fonction-lyx +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Clavier / Souris +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Clavier/Souris" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carte de clavier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Préférence ! Carte de clavier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Clavier |see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Carte de clavier +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Normalement les réglages de clavier doivent se faire au niveau de votre + système d'exploitation. + Dans le cas où cela ne serait pas possible, LyX fournit des carte de réaffectat +ion clavier ( +\emph on +keyboard map +\emph default +). + Si par exemple, vous avez un clavier tchèque et que vous voulez l'utiliser + comme un clavier roumain, vous pouvez +\lang english +enable +\family sans +Use +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +keyboard +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +map +\family default + and select +\lang french + le fichier de carte de clavier nommé +\family sans + +\family default +\shape italic +romanian.kmap +\shape default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +You can specify a +\family sans +First +\family default + and a +\family sans +Second +\family default + keyboard map and, if you use the +\emph on +cua +\emph default + bindings, you can select the first and second with +\lang french + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-primary" +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-secondary" +\end_inset + + +\lang english +respectively or toggle between them with +\lang french + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-toggle" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default + ces cartes de clavier sont fournies seulement comme solution provisoire + et elles ne fonctionnent pas sur tous les systèmes. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En plus vous pouvez préciser dans cette fenêtre la +\family sans +Vitesse de défilement via la molette +\family default +. + La vitesse standard est 1,0, une valeur plus élevée accélérera le défilement, + une valeur plus basse le ralentira. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Dans la section +\family sans +Zoom via la molette +\family default + vous pouvez désigner une touche pour le zoom. + Si la touche est appuyée quand vous actionnez la molette, le texte est + agrandi ou diminué. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Complétion de saisie +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La complétion de saisie est décrite dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Complétion-de-saisie" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Répertoires +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Répertoires" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Repertoires@Répertoires +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during + installation. + But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Répertoire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +travail C'est le répertoire de travail de LyX. + C'est la valeur implicite pour les opérations +\family sans +Ouvrir +\family default +, +\family sans +Enregistrer +\family default + et +\family sans +Enregistrer sous +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Modèles +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +documents Ce répertoire sera ouvert quand vous utilisez le menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Nouveau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +avec +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modèle +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fichiers +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'exemple Ce répertoire sera ouvert quand vous utilisez le bouton +\family sans +Exemples +\family default + dans le menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ouvrir. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note : +\series default + le bouton +\family sans +Exemples +\family default + n'existe pas si vous utilisez LyX sous Mac OS ou Windows +\family sans +. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Répertoire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sauvegarde +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Sauvegarde ! Répertoire +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Les copies de sauvegarde seront enregistrées dans ce répertoire. + Si aucun nom de répertoire n'est donné, mais que les sauvegardes sont activées + comme c'est décrit dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Documents de sauvegarde" + +\end_inset + +, le +\family sans +Répertoire de travail +\family default + sera utilisé pour enregistrer les sauvegardes. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Les fichiers de sauvegarde ont l'extension +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex Code +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +.lyx~ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Tube +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +serveur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LyX Ici, vous pouvez entrer le nom d'un tube Unix. + Ce tube est utilisé pour transférer des informations à partir de programmes + externes vers LyX. +\lang ngerman + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +\lang french +Exemple: +\series default + vous ajoutez la base de données BibTeX +\emph on +test.bib +\emph default + à votre document. + Vous pouvez éditer ce fichier avec +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default +. + Dans +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + vous devez utiliser le même tube Unix pour LyX dans les préférences sous + la rubrique +\family sans +External +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +programs +\family default +. + Si vous voulez récupérer une entrée de la base de donnée en tant que citation, + sélectionnez-la dans +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + et cliquez sur le symbole LyX. + L'entrée apparaîtra alors comme citation à l'endroit où se trouve le curseur + dans le document LyX. + Il faut bien entendu que +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default + et LyX soient actifs en même temps. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Le tube est également utilisé dans le cas d' +\family sans +Une seule instance +\family default + de LyX, voir la section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Documents de sauvegarde" + +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Pour utiliser le tube sous Windows, vous devez utiliser le nom de tube suivant: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash + +\backslash +. +\backslash +pipe +\backslash +lyxpipe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Répertoire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +temporaire Les fichiers temporaires sont enregistrés dans ce répertoire. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Dictionnaire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +des +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +synonymes Répertoire où se trouvent les dictionnaires des synonymes. + Vous n'avez à le spécifier que si la fonction échoue nativement ou si vous + voulez utiliser des dictionnaires personnels ou différents des dictionnaires + standard. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Dictionnaire +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +hunspell Répertoire où se trouvent les dictionnaires du correcteur orthographiqu +e +\family typewriter +Hunspell. + +\family default + Vous n'avez à le spécifier que si vous utilisez +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + et que la correction orthographique échoue ou si vous voulez utiliser des + dictionnaires personnels ou différents des dictionnaires standard. + Avec LyX sur Windows +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default + est le seul dictionnaire orthographique disponible et devrait fonctionner + sans spécification de dictionnaire. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Préfixe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +PATH Ce champ contient une liste de chemins vers des programmes externes. + Quand LyX a besoin d'un programme externe, il cherche dans cette liste + pour savoir où le trouver sur le système. + Sous Windows ou Mac +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +OS, la liste des chemins est automatiquement remplie quand LyX est configuré, + de sorte que vous ne devriez pas avoir à la modifier. + Sous Unix +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +Linux, la liste des chemins ne devra être modifiée que si vous voulez utiliser + des programmes externes qui ne se trouvent pas dans le chemin normal de + votre système ($PATH). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Préfixe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TEXINPUTS La variable d'environnement TEXINPUTS permet d'utiliser des fichiers + externes inclus dans un document LyX par des commandes en code TeX. + Ce préfixe inclut implicitement le répertoire du document (représenté par + un point +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +). + Le préfixe peut inclure un nombre quelconque de chemins d'accès séparés + par le séparateur implicite du système d'exploitation ( +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + avec les systèmes Unix et +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +; +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + avec Windows). + Si des fichiers sont inclus, les chemins d'accès de TEXINPUTS seront explorés + pour les trouver. + Notez que tout chemin relatif de la liste sera considéré comme relatif + au répertoire du document LyX. + Il est recommandé de laisser toujours +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +. +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + dans la liste, sinon la compilation peut échouer pour certains documents. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Identité +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici vous pouvez ajouter votre nom et votre adresse de courriel ( +\emph on +email +\emph default +). + Cette identité sera utilisée quand vous aurez activé le suivi des modifications + comme c'est décrit dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Suivi-de-modifications" + +\end_inset + +, pour marquer les modifications que vous avez effectuées comme étant les + vôtres. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Paramètres de langue +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Préférences ! Langue +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Langue ! Paramètres +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Langue +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Langue" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Langue +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'interface +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +utilisateur Ici vous pouvez choisir la langue utilisée pour les menus de + LyX. + Vous trouverez l'état d'avancement des traductions ici : +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Paquetage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +linguistique fixe quel paquetage LaTeX doit être chargé pour gérer les paramètre +s de langue. + Ceci concerne les césures ainsi que les dates et les chaînes de caractères + comme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Chapitre +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + et +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Tableau +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Le paquetage le plus répandu est +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, c'est le paquetage implicite quand on utilise la version classique de + LaTeX. + Cependant, les moteurs typographiques récents comme XeTeX et LuaTeX sont + accompagnés du paquetage alternatif +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +, mieux adapté aux fonctionnalités multi-écritures de ces moteurs. + En outre, il existe des paquetages spécifiques pour des langues non couvertes + par +\series bold +babel +\series default +. + Les sélections possibles sont décrites dans la section +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Langue" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Commande +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +début +\family default +Quand on a besoin d'un paquetage LaTeX spécial pour écrire dans une langue + donnée, vous pouvez définir ici la commande qui est utilisée pour démarrer + le paquetage. + Par exemple, on a besoin de la commande de début +\family sans + +\backslash +begin{arabtext} +\family default +pour écrire en arabe avec le paquetage +\series bold +ArabTeX +\series default +, voir +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + +. + La valeur implicite est la commande +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\family sans + +\backslash +selectlanguage{$$lang} +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Commande +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fin Homologue de +\family sans +Commande de début +\family default +. + Certains paquetages, n'ont pas besoin de commande de fin puisque la commande + de début permet d'activer et de désactiver le paquetage. + C'est le cas pris implicitement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Caractère +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +décimal +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +implicite définit le caractère à utiliser pour les chiffres en tableau (aligneme +nt sur les décimales). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Utiliser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +babel détermine si babel est utilisé ou non. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Régler +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +langues +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +globalement Quand cette case est cochée, les langues utilisées dans le document + sont ajoutées comme options aux options de classes de document, de sorte + qu'elles puissent être utilisées par tous les paquetages LaTeX. + Dans le cas contraire, elles sont utilisées comme option du seul paquetage + +\series bold +babel +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Début +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +auto Quand cette case est cochée, le document commence avec la langue de + document choisie. + Quand elle n'est pas cochée, la +\family sans +Commande de début +\family default + est explicitement mise au début du document dans la sortie LaTeX. + Cela assure que l'on utilise la bonne langue quand on utilise une autre + +\family sans +Commande de début +\family default + que celle proposée implicitement. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Fin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +auto Homologue de +\family sans +Début auto. + +\family default +Quand elle n'est pas cochée, la commande +\family sans +Commande de fin +\family default + est mise à la fin du document dans la sortie LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Marquer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +langues +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +étrangères le texte qui a été déclaré comme étant dans une autre langue + que celle du document sera souligné en bleu. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Supporte +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +langues +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +écrites +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +droite +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +gauche permet l'utilisation de langues é\SpecialChar \- +cri\SpecialChar \- +tes de droite à gauche (RTL pour + +\emph on +right to left +\emph default +), comme l'arabe, l'hébreu ou le farsi. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Mouvement +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +curseur Quand vous écrivez en RTL, vous pouvez décider si les touches de + flèches gauche et droite déplacent le curseur visuellement respectivement + vers la gauche et la droite ou alors logiquement. + Logiquement signifie que le curseur va vers la gauche quand on appuie sur + la flèche droite et qu'il se trouve dans une portion de texte RTL. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Correcteur Orthographique +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Les paramètres du correcteur orthographique sont détaillés dans la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:Correcteur-Orthographique" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Sorties +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +General +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Longueur +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ligne +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +exportée +\family default + détermine le nombre maximum de caractères imprimés sur une ligne quand + on utilise le menu +\family sans +Fichier\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Exporter\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Texte brut. + +\family default + Mettre la longueur de la ligne à zéro signifie que le texte sera exporté + sous la forme d'une unique ligne sans fin. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Format +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +date +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Date |see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Format de la date +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Format de la date +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Préférences ! Format de la date +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + Le format de la date peut être un des formats listés ici ou un mélange + de ceux-ci : +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Par exemple, le format +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +%d/%m/%y +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +imprime la date avec le format jour/mois/année. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Écraser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +lors +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'exportation fixe ce que LyX est autorisé à écraser lors de exportations. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Recherche +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directe définit les commandes à utiliser pour la rubrique de menu +\family sans +Navigation\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Recherche +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directe +\family default +. + Pour les détails, voir la section +\emph on +Recherche inversée DVI/PDF +\emph default +dans le manuel des Options avancées. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Imprimante +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Imprimante +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paramètres ! Imprimante +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Imprimante +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +implicite Ici, vous pouvez préciser votre imprimante implicite. + Le nom sera utilisé quand on exécutera la +\family sans +Commande d'impression +\family default +. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Note: +\series default +vous pouvez laisser ce champ vide sous Windows puisqu'il n'a aucun effet + sur ces systèmes. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Commande +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +d'impression C'est la commande que LyX +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +LaTeX utilisent pour imprimer. + Pour la plupart des systèmes, c'est implicitement +\family sans +dvips +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Options +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +commande +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'imprimante C'est ici que vous pouvez préciser des options pour l'imprimante. + Vous pourrez trouver une liste des options d'imprimante avec des explications + dans la documentation du programme qui fournit la +\family sans +Commande d'impression +\family default + que vous utilisez. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Adapter +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +sortie +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +à +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'imprimante Cette option n'est active qu'avec la +\family sans +Commande d'impression +\family default +\series bold + +\family sans +\series default + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +dvips +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default +. + Elle active un fichier de configuration pour dvips. + C'est une option à réserver aux experts de dvips. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-settings" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paramètres ! LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Utiliser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'encodage +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +police +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +La +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +TeX C'est l'encodage implicite pour la police du document. + +\family sans +T1 +\family default + est l'encodage implicite et couvre les langues occidentales et les symboles. + +\family sans +T2A, T2B, T2C, LCY +\family default + et +\family sans +X2 +\family default + sont pour le cyrillique. + Des combinaisons d'encodages sont possibles, comme +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\family sans +T1, T2B +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +. + Les encodages de polices sont en principe chargés automatiquement par les + paquetages linguistiques que LyX mets en place en interne. + De sorte qu'il n'y a pas de raison de changer l'encodage implicite. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Taille +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +papier +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +implicite C'est la taille qui sera utilisée pour les nouveaux documents. + La valeur +\family sans +Implicite +\family default + dépend des paramètres de votre système LaTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Option +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +taille +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +du +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +papier +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +pour +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +visionneuse +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +DVI Ces commandes n'ont d'effet que quand on utilise le programme +\family sans +xdvi +\family default +comme visionneuse DVI, lire son manuel pour en savoir plus. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous pouvez spécifier ici des options et commandes avec des paramètres pour + les processeurs qui sont listés. + Avant de changer quoi que ce soit ici, il est fortement recommandé de lire + les manuels des applications concernées. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Construction +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +bibliographie Réglages pour la construction de la bibliographie, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Bases-de-Données-Biblio" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Construction +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +l'index Réglages pour la construction de +\lang english + +\lang french +l'index, voir section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:Programme-d'indexation" + +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Commande +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +nomenclature Commande pour le programme qui génère le glossaire (nomenclature), + voir la section +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:programme-glossaire" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Commande +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +CheckT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX Commande pour le programme +\family sans +CheckTeX +\family default + qui est décrit dans la section +\emph on +Vérifier TeX +\emph default +du manuel des +\emph on +Options avancées +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Il y a aussi éventuellement les options suivantes : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Utiliser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +chemins +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Windows +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +dans +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +fichiers +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +LaTeX Utilise la notation de Windows pour les chemins, ce qui signifie utiliser + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + + +\backslash + +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + au lieu de +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +/ +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + pour séparer les répertoires. + Cette option est activée implicitement quand vous utilisez LyX sous Windows. +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Chemins +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Préférences ! Chemins +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Réinitialiser +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +les +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +options +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +quand +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +la +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +classe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +de +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +change Retire toutes les +\family sans +\lang english +Class options +\family default +\lang french + mises manuellement dans la fenêtre de dialogue +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paramètres\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Class +\family default +\lang french + quand on change la classe de document. + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +Gestion des fichiers +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Fichiers ! gestion +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Convertisseurs +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:Convertisseurs" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Convertisseurs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici, vous allez trouver la liste des commandes de convertisseurs définies + pour convertir des fichiers d'un format vers un autre. + Vous pouvez modifier des convertisseurs ou en créer des nouveaux. + Pour modifier un convertisseur, sélectionnez-le, changez le contenu du + champ +\family sans +Convertisseur +\family default + ou du champ +\family sans +Autres options +\family default +, puis appuyez sur le bouton +\family sans +Modifier +\family default +. + Pour créer un nouveau convertisseur, sélectionnez un de ceux qui sont proposés, + choisissez un format différent dans la liste déroulante +\family sans +Vers le format +\family default +, modifiez le champ +\family sans +Convertisseur +\family default +, et appuyez sur le bouton +\family sans +Ajouter +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Quand l'option +\family sans +Fichier cache du convertisseur +\family default + est activée, les conversions seront mise en cache pour une durée qui est + précisée par le champ +\family sans +Âge maximum (en jours). + +\family default + Ceci signifie que les fichiers n'ont pas besoin d'être reconvertis à chaque + fois que vous rouvrez votre document; les fichiers convertis qui se trouvent + dans le cache seront utilisés à la place. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous trouverez plus d'information sur les convertisseurs, en particulier + au sujet des drapeaux qui peuvent être utilisés dans la définition du convertis +seur, dans la section +\emph on +Convertisseurs +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +Formats de fichiers +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:Formats-de-Fichiers" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Formats de fichiers +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Copieurs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Ici, vous allez trouver la liste des formats de fichiers que LyX peut manipuler. + Vous pouvez modifier la visionneuse et le programme d'édition qui doivent + être utilisés avec certains formats. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +En outre, vous pouvez préciser le +\family sans +Format implicite du résultat +\family default + utilisé quand vous appelez les rubriques +\family sans +Visionner, Mettre à jour, Visionner le document maître +\family default +or +\family sans +Mettre à jour le document maître +\family default +du menu +\family sans +Affichage +\family default + ou de la barre d'outils +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Vous trouverez plus d'information dans la section +\emph on +Formats +\emph default +du manuel +\emph on +Personnalisation. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Toutes les conversions d'un format vers un autre ont lieu dans le répertoire + temporaire de LyX, ce qui fait qu'il est parfois nécessaire, pour modifier + un fichier, de le copier d'abord ,dans le répertoire temporaire pour que + la conversion puisse se faire. + On fait cela à l'aide d'un +\family sans +Copieur +\family default +, voir les informations dans la section +\emph on +Copieurs +\emph default + du manuel +\emph on +Personnalisation +\emph default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Unités de longueur utilisables avec LyX +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unités de longueur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:Unités-de-longueur" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Unités de longueur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Pour comprendre les unités de longueur utilisées dans cette documentation, + le tableau +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:Unités" + +\end_inset + + décrit les unités utilisées par LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:Unités" + +\end_inset + +Unités de longueur +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +unité +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +nom/description +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +millimètre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +centimètre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +in +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pouce (inch) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +point (72.27 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pica (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pc = 12 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +sp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +scaled point (65536 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +sp = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +bp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +gros point (72 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +bp = 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +dd +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +didot (72 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +dd +\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ +\end_inset + + 37.6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mm) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cicero (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cc = 12 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +dd) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Échelle graphique% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% de la largeur originale de l'image +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Largeur texte% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% de la largeur du texte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Largeur colonne% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% de la largeur de la colonne +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Largeur page% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% de la largeur du papier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Largeur ligne% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% de la largeur de la ligne +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hauteur texte% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% la hauteur du texte +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hauteur page% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +% hauteur du papier +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +hauteur de la lettre +\emph on +x +\emph default + dans la police courante +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +largeur de la lettre +\emph on + M +\emph default + dans la police courante +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mu +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +unité mathématique (1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +mu = 1/18 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +Remerciements +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:Remerciements" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +Cette documentation est le résultat de l'effort collectif de nombreuses + personnes différentes (et nous encourageons tous les volontaires à contribuer + !). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Alejandro Aguilar Sierra +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Amir Karger +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +David Johnson +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Hartmut Haase +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Ignacio García +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Ivan Schreter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +John Raithel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +John Weiss +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Lars Gullik Bjønnes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Matthias Ettrich +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Matthias Zenker +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Rich Fields +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Pascal André +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Paul Evans +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Paul Russel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Robin Socha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Uwe Stöhr +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +L'équipe LyX: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + +La bibliographie de la page suivante a été créée avec l'environnement +\family sans +Bibliographie +\family default + : +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +label "Remerciements" +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + +L'équipe LyX: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Remerciements" +target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org/Credits +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens: +\emph on +The LaTeX Companion Second Edition. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 2004 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. + Daly: +\emph on +A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 2003 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexbook" + +\end_inset + +Leslie Lamport: +\emph on +LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "texbook" + +\end_inset + +Donald E. + Knuth. + +\emph on +The TeXbook. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 1984 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +Le Catalogue TeX: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "LaTeXFAQ" + +\end_inset + +LaTeX FAQ: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" + +\end_inset + + du programme +\family sans + BibTeX +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX-2" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" + +\end_inset + + comment utiliser le programme +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "makeindex" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" + +\end_inset + + du programme +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "xindy" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" + +\end_inset + + du programme +\family sans +xindy +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" + +\end_inset + + des paquetages AMS: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "caption" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf" + +\end_inset + + du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" + +\end_inset + + du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" + +\end_inset + + du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" + +\end_inset + + du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" + +\end_inset + + du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "prettyref" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" + +\end_inset + + du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "refstyle" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" + +\end_inset + + du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "tipa" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Documentation" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" + +\end_inset + + du paquetage LaTeX +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paquetages LaTeX ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +\SpecialChar \@. + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour l'arabe: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Armenian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour l'arménien: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour langues cyrilliques: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Farsi" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour le farsi: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Hebrew" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour l'hébreu: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Japanese" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour le japonais: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Latvian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour le letton: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour le lituanien: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Mongolian" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour le mongol: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + + comment configurer LyX pour le vietnamien: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "NewInLyX20" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "page Wiki" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" + +\end_inset + + au sujet des nouveautés de +\family sans +LyX 2.0 +\family default +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +let +\backslash +mybibname +\backslash +bibname +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +bibname}{ +\backslash +mybibname +\backslash +; 2} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +La commande +\series bold + +\backslash +bibname +\series default + est le nom de la bibliographie dans la langue actuelle. + Elle est redéfinie ici avec le numéro 2 à la fin pour signaler que cette + bibliographie est bien la seconde: +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex +LatexCommand bibtex +bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs" +options "../biblio/alphadin" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +La bibliographie ci-dessus a été créée à partir d'une base de données BibTeX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print +LatexCommand printnomenclature +set_width "auto" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset index_print +LatexCommand printindex +type "idx" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_body +\end_document diff --git a/lib/doc/ja/UserGuide.lyx b/lib/doc/ja/UserGuide.lyx index bbe2b17d06..d37ac8f570 100644 --- a/lib/doc/ja/UserGuide.lyx +++ b/lib/doc/ja/UserGuide.lyx @@ -1,37356 +1,37581 @@ -#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ -\lyxformat 413 -\begin_document -\begin_header -\textclass jbook -\begin_preamble -% Commands inserted by lyx2lyx for proper underlining -\PassOptionsToPackage{normalem}{ulem} -\usepackage{ulem} -\let\cite@rig\cite -\newcommand{\b@xcite}[2][\%]{\def\def@pt{\%}\def\pas@pt{#1} - \mbox{\ifx\def@pt\pas@pt\cite@rig{#2}\else\cite@rig[#1]{#2}\fi}} -\renewcommand{\underbar}[1]{{\let\cite\b@xcite\uline{#1}}} - -% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!! -% -% This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints -% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble, -% parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you -% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact -% the documentation team -% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org - -\usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle -\ifpdf % if pdflatex is used - - % set fonts for nicer pdf view - \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} - -\fi % end if pdflatex is used - -% for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float -%\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} - -% the pages of the TOC is numbered roman -% and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added -\let\myTOC\tableofcontents -\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \frontmatter - \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} - \myTOC - \mainmatter } - -% define a short command for \textvisiblespace -\newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace} - -% macro for italic page numbers in the index -\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} - -% for customized page headers/footers -% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document -\usepackage{fancyhdr} -% change header rule width -\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} - -\usepackage{t1enc} -\renewcommand{\seename}{→} - -\usepackage{subfig} -\DeclareCaptionOption{large}[]{\def\captionfont{\large}} -\DeclareCaptionOption{Large}[]{\def\captionfont{\Large}} - -%\ifnum 42146=\euc"A4A2 \AtBeginDvi{\special{pdf:tounicode EUC-UCS2}}\else -%\AtBeginDvi{\special{pdf:tounicode 90ms-RKSJ-UCS2}}\fi -%\AtBeginDvi{\special{pdf:tounicode EUC-UCS2}} -\end_preamble -\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading -\use_default_options false -\begin_modules -customHeadersFooters -enumitem -\end_modules -\maintain_unincluded_children false -\language japanese -\language_package none -\inputencoding JIS-pLaTeX -\fontencoding global -\font_roman default -\font_sans default -\font_typewriter default -\font_default_family default -\use_non_tex_fonts false -\font_sc false -\font_osf false -\font_sf_scale 100 -\font_tt_scale 100 - -\graphics default -\default_output_format default -\output_sync 0 -\bibtex_command default -\index_command default -\paperfontsize default -\spacing single -\use_hyperref true -\pdf_title "LyX Users Manual" -\pdf_author "LyX Team" -\pdf_subject "LyX" -\pdf_keywords "LyX" -\pdf_bookmarks true -\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true -\pdf_bookmarksopen false -\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 -\pdf_breaklinks false -\pdf_pdfborder false -\pdf_colorlinks true -\pdf_backref false -\pdf_pdfusetitle false -\pdf_quoted_options "unicode=false, linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" -\papersize a4paper -\use_geometry false -\use_amsmath 1 -\use_esint 1 -\use_mhchem 1 -\use_mathdots 1 -\cite_engine basic -\use_bibtopic false -\use_indices false -\paperorientation portrait -\suppress_date false -\use_refstyle 0 -\notefontcolor #0000ff -\branch 質問 -\selected 1 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #00ff00 -\end_branch -\branch 解答 -\selected 0 -\filename_suffix 0 -\color #aa55ff -\end_branch -\index 索引 -\shortcut idx -\color #008000 -\end_index -\secnumdepth 3 -\tocdepth 3 -\paragraph_separation indent -\paragraph_indentation default -\quotes_language english -\papercolumns 1 -\papersides 2 -\paperpagestyle default -\tracking_changes false -\output_changes false -\html_math_output 0 -\html_css_as_file 0 -\html_be_strict true -\end_header - -\begin_body - -\begin_layout Title -LyXユーザーの手引き -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Author -LyXプロジェクトチーム -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -なにかコメントや間違いの修正がある場合には、LyX文書化メーリングリスト -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - -までお知らせ下さい。この文書の翻訳は、当初人見光太郎氏が行った貢献に基づいています。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -第2.0.x版 -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -この文書の最新のPDF版は -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series default -にあります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset CommandInset toc -LatexCommand tableofcontents - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -はじめに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LyXとは何か -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは文書作成システムです。美しい原稿、出版可能な本、ビジネス書簡、企画書、そのうえ詩までも作成することができます。LyXが他の「ワードプロセッサ」と異なる点 -は、核となる編集スタイルとしてマークアップ言語のパラダイムを採用していることです。つまり、節の見出しを入力するときには、それを「ボールド体・17ポイント・左揃え -・下に5mmの空白」という風に指定するのではなく、「節」として指定してやるだけでいいのです。LyXが組版を考えるようにできているため、実現方法を気にすることなく -、構想を練るだけでいいのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この哲学は、『 -\shape italic -はじめの一歩 -\shape default -』に詳細にわたって説明してあります。まだお読みでなければ、お読みください。ええ、すぐ読まれた方がよいでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -『 -\emph on -はじめの一歩 -\emph default -』には、LyXの哲学以外にも説明されていることがあります。中でも重要なのは、すべての取扱説明書に共通な表記方法が書いてあることです。読まずにいると、取扱説明書を -読んでいくのが苦痛になってしまうでしょう。またこの取扱説明書を読む前に、別の取扱説明書を読んだ方がいいかもしれません。『 -\emph on -はじめの一歩 -\emph default -』にはそのことについても言及があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LyXの外観 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -他のアプリケーションと同様に、LyXには、ウインドウの上に見慣れたメニューバーがあります。その下には、プルダウンボックスと色々なボタンのついたツールバーがありま -す。もちろん、垂直スクロールバーと、文章を編集するための作業領域もあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -水平スクロールバーはないことにご注意ください。これはバグや手抜きではなく、意図的につけていないのです。書籍を読むときには、行が終わると次行の行頭に続くものと想定 -します。縦の長さがページからはみ出れば、文章は新しいページに続きますので、これゆえに垂直スクロールバーだけは必要となるのです。水平スクロールバーがないことが不便 -と感じられ得る場合が3つあります。第一は、大きな画像の場合です。画像が使用中の画面よりも大きく表示されるのを避けるためには、画像設定の -\family sans -LaTeXとLyXのオプション -\family default -タブにある -\family sans -画面上の縮尺 -\family default -オプションを使用してください。水平スクロールバーが必要となりうる第二・第三の場合は、LyXのウインドウよりも横幅が広い、表や数式がある場合です。表を水平方向にス -クロールするのには、矢印キーが使えます。しかし、これは現段階では数式には使えません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXの全メニューとツールバーボタンの簡潔な説明は、付録 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:ユーザーインタフェース" - -\end_inset - -を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ヘルプ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ヘルプシステムはLyXの取扱説明書を含んでいます。あなたはLyXの中から -\emph on -すべて -\emph default -の取扱説明書を読めるのです。 -\family sans -ヘルプ -\family default -メニューから読みたい取扱説明書を選ぶだけです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LyXの基本設定 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:LyXの基本設定" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXのほとんどすべての機能は、 -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -メニューで調整することができます。また、LyXは、システムにどんなプログラムが装備されているか、どんなLaTeX文書クラスやLaTeXパッケージが備わっているか -を検査することができます。LyXは、この検査で得た情報を、一部の -\family sans -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -項目に対して、ふさわしい既定値を与えるのに使用します。この検査は、LyXがシステムに装備された時に既に行われていますが、LyXが検査を行った後に、新しいLaTe -Xクラスなどのアイテムを、ローカルに導入することもあるでしょう。LyXに再検査を行わせるには、 -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -再初期設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さいしょきせってい@再初期設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を実行してください。その後、変更が認識されるようにLyXを再起動してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LaTeXの設定 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:LaTeXの設定" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXを導入していなくてもLyXで文書を編集することはできますが、この場合、PDFを生成したり文書を印刷したりすることはできません。しかしながら、LyX文書 -のうちにはPDFなどを生成するのにDocBookをバックエンドとして使用するものもありますし、すべてのLyX文書はつねに平文やXHTMLとして出力することができ -ます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書クラスのうちには、特定のLaTeX・DocBookクラスやパッケージに依存するものがあります。これらの文書クラスは、必要なファイルが導入されていなくても使用 -することができますが、生成することのできない出力形式が発生します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXがシステム上で検出したLaTeXパッケージは、メニュー -\family sans -ヘルプ\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eXの設定 -\family default -で見ることができるファイルに列挙してあります。必要なパッケージがない場合には、必要なパッケージを導入して、LyXを再設定してください（メニュー -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -再初期設定 -\family default -） -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -TeXコードボックス中の二つの中括弧は、「LaTeX」という単語が、上付きおよび下付き文字として印字されるのを防ぐためのものです。TeXコードに関してより詳しく -は第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:TeXコード" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられています。LaTeXなどの固有名称の印字については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LyXの固有名称" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyXのさいしょきせってい@LyXの再初期設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。LaTeXパッケージを追加導入するための詳しい情報は、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -カスタマイズ篇 -\emph default -』の第5.1節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -LyXでの作業のしかた -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -基本的なファイル操作 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるそうさ@ファイル操作 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -ファイル -\family default -メニューと標準ツールバーには、ワードプロセッサ共通の基本操作と、若干の複雑な操作が入っています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -新規 -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-new" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -新規(ひな型使用) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -開く -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "file-open" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -閉じる -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -保存 -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-write" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -名前を付けて保存 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -保存済み文書に復帰 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -バージョン管理 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -読み込み -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -書き出し -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -印刷 -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -終了 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらはわずかな違いを除いて、他のワードプロセッサの場合と同じように動きます。 -\family sans -新規(ひな型使用) -\family default -コマンドは新しいファイルのファイル名だけでなく、どのひな型を使うのかも聞いてきます。ひな型を使うと、使わなかった場合には自分で設定する必要のあるいくつかのレイア -ウト機能を自動的に設定してくれます。ひな型はいくつかのクラスで使えますが、特に書簡を書く場合に有効です（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:文書クラス" - -\end_inset - -節参照）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -【註】「既定ファイル」や「無題」、「下書き」というファイル名のファイルはありません。LyXにファイルを開くか新しいファイルを作るのを知らせるまでは、大きな何もな -いスペースがあるだけです。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -保存済み文書に復帰 -\family default -と -\family sans -バージョン管理 -\family default -コマンドは数人で同時に同じファイルを編集している場合に便利です -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -このような場合にはLyXのバージョン管理機能も見て下さい。 -\emph on -拡張機能 -\emph default -に説明してあります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。 -\family sans -保存済み文書に復帰 -\family default -は、単純に、ディスクからその文書をもう一度読み込みます。もちろんこの機能を、文書の変更を無効にして最後に保存した状態に戻すのにも使えます。 -\family sans -バージョン管理 -\family default -は、あなたが文書に対して行った変更を登録して、他の人たちに、それがあなたが行った変更であることを認識できるようにします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -基本的な編集機能 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -へんしゅう@ -\family roman -\series bold -\shape up -\size large -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -編集 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:基本的な編集機能" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -最近のほとんどのワードプロセッサと同様に、LyXは文章の塊を切り貼りすることができますし、文字・単語・ページ単位でのカーソル移動や、文字あるいは単語単位で削除を -することもできます。以下の4つの節では、LyXの基本的な編集機能とその使い方について説明します。まずは切り貼りから説明しましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ご想像のとおり、 -\family sans -編集 -\family default -メニューと標準ツールバーには、切り貼り用のコマンドや他のさまざまな編集機能が入っています。その一部は特殊なので後述するものとすると、基本的なものは以下のとおりで -す。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -切り取り -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "cut" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -コピー -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "copy" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -貼り付け -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "paste" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -直近のものを貼り付け -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -特別な貼り付け -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -検索／置換 -\family default - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show findreplace" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -はじめの3つに関しては自明でしょう。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -はりつけ@貼り付け -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -また、LyXと他のプログラムの間でも、切り取り・コピー・貼り付けを使って、文字列をコピーすることができます。 -\family sans -直近のものを貼り付け -\family default -サブメニューには、最近貼り付けを行った文字列の一覧が表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -特別な貼り付け\SpecialChar \menuseparator -平文（行を連結して） -\family default -メニューは、クリップボード中の文字列を、文字列全体を一段落として挿入します。ファイルに空白行がある状態の場合には、新しい段落が挿入されます。 -\family sans -平文（行を連結しないで） -\family default -では、文字列中の改行を新しい段落の開始と解釈して、複数の段落として挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ちかん@置換 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -けんさく@検索 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -検索／置換\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\family default -は、 -\family sans -検索及び置換 -\family default -ダイアログを開きます。単語や表現を見つけたならば、LyXはそれを選択した状態にします。 -\family sans -置換 -\family default -ボタンを押すと、選択された文字列は、 -\family sans -置換文字列 -\family default -フィールドの中身で置き換えられます。現在の文字列を飛ばしたい場合には、 -\family sans -次候補 -\family default -ボタンをクリックしてください。この文字列に一致する文書中すべての文字列を自動的に置換したい場合には、 -\family sans -全て置換 -\family default -ボタンを押してください。大文字と小文字を区別して検索したい場合には、 -\family sans -大文字/小文字を区別 -\family default -オプションを使うことができます。これを設定した場合には、「Test」で検索すると「test」には一致しません。 -\family sans -単語全体にのみ一致する -\family default -オプションを使うと、完全な単語として一致するもののみに一致するように、LyXに強制することができます。つまり、「star」で検索すると「starlet」には一致 -しなくなります。また、LyXには、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:詳細な検索と置換" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている詳細な -\family sans -検索・置換 -\family default -機能もあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -差込枠と呼ばれる、注釈・フロート等々は、解体することができます。つまり、差込枠を削除して、その中身を通常の本文に戻すことができるのです。差込枠の解体は、カーソル -を差込枠の先頭に置いて -\family sans -Backspace -\family default -を押すか、カーソルを差込枠の最後に置いて -\family sans -Delete -\family default -を押すことによって、実行できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -差し込み枠の中身は、短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "inset-select-all" -\end_inset - -を使用して選択することができます。また、短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select" -\end_inset - -は文書全体を選択します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -元に戻すとやり直す -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -もとにもどす@元に戻す -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -やりなおす@やり直す -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:元に戻すとやり直す" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXでは、何か失敗をしても、簡単にもとに戻すことができます。LyXは大容量のUndo（元に戻す）／Redo（やり直す）バッファを持っています。失敗を元に戻すと -きには、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -元に戻す -\family default -かツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "undo" -\end_inset - -を選択して下さい。もし元に戻しすぎた場合には、「元に戻すのを元に戻す」ために -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -やり直す -\family default -あるいはツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "redo" -\end_inset - -を使って下さい。元に戻すメカニズムは、メモリーオーバーへッドを押さえるために100ステップに制限されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -またファイルを開いてから行ったすべての変更を無効にしても、「変更された」という文章の状態はかわらないことに注意して下さい。これは元に戻すのを上記のように100ス -テップに制限したためです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -元に戻す -\family default -と -\family sans -やり直す -\family default -は、LyXの中のほとんどすべてのものについて働きます。しかしながら、入力された文章については、文字単位ではなくて文字の塊ごとに元に戻したりやり直したりすることが -できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -マウス操作 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -まうすそうさ@ -\family default -\series default -\shape default -\size default -\emph default -\bar default -\noun default -\color inherit -マウス操作 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下は、もっとも基本的なマウス操作です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -動き -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -編集ウインドウのどこかで -\emph on -左マウスボタン -\emph default -をクリックします。そうするとカーソルはマウスの所へ移動します。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -テキストの選択 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\emph on -左マウスボタン -\emph default -を押したままマウスをドラッグして下さい。LyXは前のマウスの位置と新しいマウスの位置の間の文字をマークします。これをLyXのバッファ（とクリップボード）にコピー -するには -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -コピー -\family default -を使います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -カーソルを移動した後、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -貼り付け -\family default -を使って、文字列をLyXに貼り付け直してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -差込枠（脚注・注釈・フロート等） -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -これらの特性を設定するには、右クリックしてください。詳しくはこの取扱説明書の対応する節を見て下さい。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Section -移動 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:移動" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いどう@移動 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXでは、文書内を動き回るのに二つの方法があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -移動 -\family default -メニューに、文書の全ての節が従属メニューとして表示されるので、それをクリックすれば、文書の対応する場所に移動することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文書構造 -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle toc" -\end_inset - -を使用します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator -しおり -\family default -で文書中にしおりをはさむことができ、このメニューでしおりをはさんだ場所に移動することもできます。しおりは、セッションを越えて記憶されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - -は、文書中であなたが直近に変更を加えた部分に移動します。これは、例えば大きな文書中で、何かを探して文書の他の部分に動いたり、スクロールしたりした後に、元の編集箇 -所に戻りたいときに便利です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcuts" -arg "screen-recenter" -\end_inset - -キーを押すと、カーソル位置が、LyXメインウィンドウの縦方向中央に来るようにすることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文書構造 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:文書構造" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書構造ウィンドウ上部のプルダウンボックスを使えば、図表一覧のような目次様オブジェクトだけでなく、脚注一覧や、ラベル・相互参照（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:相互参照" - -\end_inset - -節参照）・注釈・引用（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:書誌情報" - -\end_inset - -節参照）などの一覧も選択することができます。これらの一覧の上をクリックすれば、使用中の文書の対応するオブジェクトに移動することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書構造の要素を右クリックすると、多くの場合、これらの要素を直接修正することのできるコンテクストメニューが表示されます。例えば、引用の場合には、コンテクストメニ -ューを使うと引用ダイアログが表示され、引用の内容を修正することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上部の「フィルタ」フィールドを使うと、文書構造に表示される項目を制限することができます。例えば、ラベルと参照の一覧を表示しているときに、小節への参照のみを見たい -場合には、フィルタに「sub:」というテキストを入力すれば、このテキストを含む項目、すなわち小節のみが表示されるようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書構造の下部には、表示をさらに細かく制御できるボタン類が並んでいます。 -\family sans -整序 -\family default -オプションは、表示されている一覧を、アルファベット順に整序するためのものであり、これを指定しないと、要素は、文書中に現れる順に表示されます。 -\family sans -保持 -\family default -オプションは、一覧の現在の表示状態を保持するためのものです。ここで保持するとは、例えば、第2節と第4節の小節が表示された状態から第3節をクリックしたときに、第2 -節と第4節の小節を表示されたままの状態に保持することです。もし -\family sans -保持 -\family default -オプションが有効にされていなければ、クリックされた第3節を強調するために、第2節と第4節は閉じられるようになっています。最後に、左側のスライダは、文書構造を特定 -の「深さ」まで開くのに用います。どのように動作するかを知るには、いじってみるのがいいでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/reload.png - -\end_inset - -ボタンは、（通常必要でないはずですが）目次を再描画します。その隣のボタンは、節の文書中の位置を変えるためのボタンです。 -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/down.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -および -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/up.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -を使うと、節の文書中の位置が、前方に移動したり後方に移動したりします。つまり、例えば第2.5節を、第2.4節の前に持っていったり第2.6節の後に移動したりすることがで -きるわけです。それに伴い、LyXは、節番号を自動的に新しい順序に振り直してくれます。 -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/promote.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -ないし -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/demote.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -ボタン（または対応する短絡キー -\family sans -Tab -\family default -ないし -\family sans -Shift+Tab -\family default -）は、節の階層を変更するものです。つまり、例えば第2.5節を、第3節にしたり第2.4.1節にしたりすることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -入力補完・単語補完 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:入力補完" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -にゅうりょくほかん@入力補完 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -たんごほかん@単語補完|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -にゅうりょくほかん@入力補完 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、現在開かれている全ての文書を走査して、単語の補完案を提示してくれます。開かれている各文書に現れる単語は、全てデータベースに保管されて、補完案を提示する -のに使用されるようになっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -入力補完は、LyX設定（ -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -メニュー）中の -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -入力補完 -\family default -セクションで、有効にすることができます。 -\family sans -自動補完入力 -\family default -オプションは、補完の提案が、カーソル直後に直接表示されるようにします。 -\family sans -自動ポップアップ -\family default -では、補完は常にポップアップで表示されます。また、補完カーソル表示器は、 -\family sans -カーソル表示器 -\family default -オプションを無効にすれば、表示されなくなります。一般オプションの項では、補間入力や補間ポップアップの遅延時間を定義したり、長い補完候補を切り詰めるかどうかを選択 -したりすることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、補完候補がある場合には、カーソル直後に小さな三角形をインジケーターとして表示します。提案されている補完を受け入れる場合は、 -\family sans -Tab -\family default -キーを押してください。補完候補が複数ある場合には、ポップアップでそれらが表示されます。ポップアップ中でマウスや矢印キーを使用して補完候補を選び、 -\family sans -Return -\family default -キーを押せば、それを受け入れることになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -設定中の数式用補完オプションは、テキスト用補完オプションと同様に動きます。数式に特有な -\family sans -自動修正 -\family default -オプションでは、文字を構成することを可能にします。例えば、 -\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ -\end_inset - -という文字を挿入したい場合に、数式中で「 -\series bold -=> -\series default -」と入力すれば、この文字を入れることができるようになるのです。つまり、コマンドを入力したり、数式ツールバーを使うよりも速い、もうひとつの入力手段となります。サポ -ートされている文字の組み合わせは、LyXの導入されたフォルダのどこかにある -\family typewriter -autocorrect -\family default -というファイルに、列挙されています。数式自動修正機能は、感嘆符キー「!」を押せば、いつでも有効にすることができます。無効にするには、 -\family sans -スペース -\family default -キーを押します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -基本的なキー割り当て -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -きーわりあて@ -\family default -\series default -\shape default -\size default -\emph default -\bar default -\noun default -\color inherit -キー割り当て -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -わりあて@割り当て|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -きーわりあて@キー割り当て -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -たんらくきー@短絡キー|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -きーわりあて@キー割り当て -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょーとかっと@ショートカット|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -きーわりあて@キー割り当て -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXには、 -\family typewriter -cua -\family default -と -\family typewriter -emacs -\family default -という、少なくとも二つの主だったキー割り当てがあります。LyXの既定値は、 -\family typewriter -cua -\family default -ですが、LyX設定の -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -短絡キー -\family default -で変更することができます。 -\lang english -(You can list or change any key bindings as explained in -\lang japanese -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:短絡キーの編集" - -\end_inset - -。) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Up -\family default -・ -\family sans -Page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Down -\family default -・ -\family sans -← -\family default -・ -\family sans -→ -\family default -・ -\family sans -↑ -\family default -・ -\family sans -↓ -\family default -のようないくつかのキーは、予想どおりの動作をしますが、そうでないキーもあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Tab -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Tab" -description "タブキー" - -\end_inset - - -\family default - LyXにはタブストップのようなものはありません。これがどういう意味かわからなかったら、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:段落の字下げと分け方" - -\end_inset - -節と第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:段落環境" - -\end_inset - -節、その中でも特に第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:箇条書き" - -\end_inset - -節を読んで下さい。それでもまだわからないときは『 -\emph on -入門篇 -\emph default -』を参照してください。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -LyXでは、タブキーは、入力補完で候補を受諾するときにのみ使用されます -\lang english -, to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting - level in Itemize or Enumerate -\lang japanese -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Esc -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Esc" -description "エスケープキー" - -\end_inset - - -\family default - これは「取り消しキー」です。これは、一般的に、操作を取り消す場合に使います。詳しくは、この取扱説明書の他の場所で説明されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Home -\family default -および -\family sans -End -\family default - これらはカーソルを行の先頭または最後に移動させます。ただし、Emacsキーバインドを使っている場合には、文章の先頭または最後にカーソルを移動させます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -修飾キーは3つあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Control -\family default - （文書ファイルでは「 -\family sans -Ctrl -\family default -」 -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Ctrl" -description "コントロールキー" - -\end_inset - -で表されます。）これはどのキーと組み合わせるかによって、いくつかの異なった使い方があります： -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Backspace -\family default -や -\family sans -Delete -\family default -と一緒に使うと、1文字ではなく一つの単語を削除します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -← -\family default -や -\family sans -→ -\family default -と使うと文字単位ではなく、単語単位で移動します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Home -\family default -や -\family sans -End -\family default -と使うと文章の初め、または終りに移動します。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Shift -\family default - （文書ファイルでは「 -\family sans -Shift -\family default -」 -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Shift" -description "シフトキー" - -\end_inset - -で表されます。）これをどの移動キーと一緒に使っても、前のカーソルの位置と新しいカーソルの位置の間のテキストを選択できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -Alt -\family default - （文書ファイルでは「 -\family sans -Alt -\family default -」 -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "Alt" -description "メタキーまたはAltキー" - -\end_inset - -で表されます。）キーボードにAltキーと独立してMetaキーがない限りは、多くのキーボードにおいて、これはAltキーです。両方のキーがある場合には、どちらのキー -が、実際に -\family sans -Alt+ -\family default -機能を果たしているのかを確かめる必要があります。このキーは多くのさまざまな役割を果たしますが、そのうちの一つに、 -\emph on -メニュー高速化キー -\emph default -を有効にする役割があります。もしこのキーを、メニューやメニュー項目で下線が引いてある文字と一緒に押すと、そのメニュー項目を選ぶことができるのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -例えば、キーを「 -\family sans -Alt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -e -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -s -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -c -\family default -」の順で押すと、「文字形式」メニューが呼び出されます。「 -\family sans -Alt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -f -\family default -」の順で押すと、 -\family sans -ファイル -\family default -メニューが開かれます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -『 -\emph on -短絡キー -\emph default -』説明書には、 -\family sans -Alt -\family default -鍵に割り当てられているすべての機能が掲げてあります。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -何らかの動作を行うと、ほとんどの場合、LyXのメインウィンドウ下にあるステータスバーに、いま行った動作名と、その動作に結びつけられたキー割り当てが表示されますの -で、LyXを使っていくにしたがって、次第にキー割り当てと短絡キーを覚えていくことができるでしょう。LyXのメニューにも定義されているキー割り当てが表示されます。 -キー割り当ての表記は、この文書の表記とたいへん似ているので、理解するのに困難はないでしょう。ただ、Shift修飾キーは、明示的に表記されるようになっていますので -、「 -\family sans -Alt+P Shift+A -\family default -」と表示された場合は -\family sans -、Alt+P -\family default -の後に大文字の -\family sans -A -\family default -を押すという意味です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -LyXの基本 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lyx@LyX ! きほん@基本 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -文書型 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書 ! がた@------型 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -はじめに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文章を書く前に、まず一番最初に -\emph on -どのような型 -\emph default -の文章を編集するかを決める必要があります。異なる型の文章は、余白取りもヘッダや番号のつけ方も異なりますし、使うことのできる段落環境や文書のタイトルの書式も異なり -ます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\emph on -文書クラス -\emph default -は、その種類の文章に共通なタイプセットのやり方を記述しています。文書クラスを設定すると、自動的にそのような特性を設定したことになり、自分の作りたいタイプの文章を -簡単に作れます。もし文書クラスを設定しなかったら、LyXが既定の文書クラスを選びます。それよりも自分で文章のクラスを設定した方がいいでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXで使える文書クラスの情報、そしてそれをどう変えるかについてはこの続きを読んで下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文書クラス -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -ぶんしょ@ -\family default -\series default -\shape default -\size default -\emph default -\bar default -\noun default -\color inherit -文書 ! くらす@------クラス -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:文書クラス" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -クラスは、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書 ! せってい@設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ダイアログで選択することができます。使用したいクラスを選択し、必要なオプションの微調整を行ってください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -概観 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXには、以下の4つの標準文書クラスがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Article 論文用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Report レポート用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Book 本を書くためのクラス -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Letter 英文の書簡用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これら以外にも非標準のクラスがありますが、LyXでは、それらがすでに装備されているときにかぎり、それらを使うことができます。以下に主要な非標準クラスを挙げますが -、完全な一覧と詳しい説明は、取扱説明書『高度な機能篇』の -\emph on -特別な文書クラス -\emph default -の章にあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -A&A -\family default - 学術誌『 -\emph on -Astronomy and Astrophysics -\emph default -（天文学と天体物理学）』で用いられる形式および書式を備えた学術論文 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -ACS -\family default - アメリカ化学学会（American Chemistry Society: ACS）発行の学術誌投稿用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -AGU -\family default -アメリカ地球物理学会（American Geophysical Union: AGU）発行の学術誌投稿用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -AMS -\family default - アメリカ数学会（American Mathematical Society：AMS）で用いられる形式および書式を備えた、論文用および書籍用のレイアウト。論文用 -レイアウトには3つの種類があります。標準のものは、定理番号等の前に節番号を付加する、定理等に典型的な連番スキームを使用します。結果に関する叙述（定理、命題、系等 -）には、共通した通し番号がつけられますが、定義や例の類には個別の通し番号がつけられます。「通し番号」スキームでは、節番号を付加せずに論文全体を通じた通し番号が付 -けられます。また、結果に関する叙述には、それぞれ別の通し番号が用いられます。また連番をまったくつけないレイアウトもあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Beamer -\family default - プレゼンテーション用レイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Broadway -\family default - 戯曲を書くためのレイアウト。既存のLaTeXの文書クラスではなく、LyXとともに新たに頒布されているものです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Chess -\family default - チェスゲームについて記すためのレイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Curiculum -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -vitae -\family default - 履歴書作成用のクラス -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Elsarticle -\family default - Elsevier出版グループの学術誌向けのレイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Foils -\family default - OHPシート作成用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Hollywood -\family default - アメリカ映画産業向けのスペック・スクリプト（持ち込み原稿）を書くのに使われます。既存のLaTeXの文書クラスではなく、LyXとともに新たに頒布されているもので -す。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -IEEEtran -\family default - IEEE（電気電子学会）が発行する学術誌向けのレイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -IOP -\family default - イギリス物理学会(IOP)出版グループの学術誌向けのレイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Kluwer -\family default - Kluwer出版グループの学術誌向けのレイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -KOMA-Script -\family default - 標準クラスの代替クラスであり、キャプション書式や印刷余白の自動計算など、多くの便利な機能を持っています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Memoir -\family default - もう一つの標準クラスの代替クラス -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Powerdot -\family default - プレゼンテーション用レイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -RevTe -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -X -\family default - アメリカ物理学会（APS）やアメリカ物理学協会（AIP）、アメリカ光学会（OSA）の学術誌に投稿する論文を執筆するのに用いられます。このクラスは、 - LyXの全機能と互換性があるわけではありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Slides -\family default - OHPを作成するのに使用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -SPIE学会報 -\family default - 国際光工学会（SPIE）発行学術誌用のレイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Springer -\family default - Springer出版グループの学術誌向けのレイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここではこれらの文書クラスをどのように使うかについての詳細は説明しません。取扱説明書『 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -』にこのような標準的でないクラスについての説明があります。ここでは次にすべての文書クラスに共通する性質を説明します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -利用可能性 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文書クラス -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書 ! せってい@設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -に列挙されている文書クラスの多くが、「利用不能」と記されていることにおそらく気付かれたのではないでしょうか。それらのクラスを使用した文書を開くと、出力を生成する -ために必要なファイルが導入されていませんという警告が表示されます。これを見て、何か設定がおかしいのではないかと思われるかもしれません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -しかし、これは何も異常なことではありません。LyXには、あなたが必要とする以上の文書クラスが収録されており、 -\family sans -IOP -\family default -など、そのうち一部は特定の目的に高度に特化したものです。LyXは、できる限り多様な種類の文書をサポートしようと努力しており、およそ100種にも及ぶレイアウトファ -イルを収録して、その数はなお増加し続けています。これらの文書クラスに必要とされるすべてのファイルを、既定で導入するLaTeX頒布版は存在しません。あまりにも種類 -が多いのです。これが文書クラスのうち一部が利用不能となっているゆえんです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もし使用したい文書クラスのうち「利用不能」と記されているものがある場合には、適切なパッケージファイルを導入してやる必要があります。どのファイルを導入する必要があ -るかを確認する最も易しい方法は、その文書クラスを使った新規ファイルを作成することです。するとLyXは、不足しているファイルを列挙したダイアログを表示します。これ -らを導入する方法については、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -カスタマイズ篇 -\emph default -』の『新しいLaTeXファイルの導入』節をご覧ください。 -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、多様な文書に対してサポートを提供していますが、人々が使用したいと思う文書クラスすべてに対してサポートを行っているわけではありません。たとえば、多くの大 -学が、大学への博士論文提出用のLaTeXクラスファイルを提供しています。LyX開発チームは、これらを一つずつサポートするためにレイアウトファイルを書くわけにはい -きません。あまりにも多すぎるのです。さいわい、ユーザーは自分自身のレイアウトファイルを書くことができ、実際に多くのユーザーがそうしています。取扱説明書『カスタマ -イズ篇』の第5章に、レイアウトファイルの作成のしかたに関する情報があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -モジュール -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:モジュール" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書 ! もじゅーる@モジュール -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -モジュールは、選択した文書クラスでは既定では利用できない機能を文書に追加します。例えば、点字を文書中で書きたいものとしましょう。点字はもちろんどの文書クラスでも -利用可能ではありませんので、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ダイアログの -\family sans -モジュール -\family default -面で対応するモジュールを読み込ませなくてはなりません。ダイアログでモジュールを選択状態にすると、そのモジュールの説明が表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -モジュールのうちには、既定では必ずしも導入されていないLaTeXパッケージやファイル書式変換子を必要とするものがあります。必要とされるパッケージやファイル書式変 -換子がない場合には、LyXは警告を発して、具体的に何が足りないかを示します。これを無視しても、ファイルを編集している間は、モジュールを使用することができますが、 -必要な構成物なしには、LyXがLaTeXファイルをコンパイルすることができないので、PDFに書き出したり文書を印刷したりすることはできません。出力を生成したい場 -合には、必要な構成物を導入した後、 -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -再初期設定 -\family default -を選択して、LyXを再初期設定する必要があります -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyXのさいしょきせってい@LyXの再初期設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。必要なパッケージを導入する方法については、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -カスタマイズ篇 -\emph default -』の『新しいLaTeXファイルの導入』節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -モジュールのうちには、他のモジュールを必要とするものがある一方で、お互いに互換性のないモジュールもあります。LyXは、これらの問題がある場合には、その情報を表示 -します。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -ローカルレイアウト -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:ローカルレイアウト" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書 ! ろーかるれいあうと@ローカルレイアウト -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXにとってのモジュールは、LaTeXにおけるパッケージのようなものです。これらは、いろいろな文書で用いられることを意図したもので、別の文書で頻繁に同じような -ことを必要とすることがわかった場合には、その目的用のモジュールを書くことを考えたほうが良いでしょう。しかしながら、特定の文書が非常に特別なものを必要としており、 -特殊な差込枠や文字様式を必要としているけれども、一度限りしか使わないということもあるでしょう。つまり、文書にLaTeXプリアンブルのようなものを欲しいわけです。 -この時に便利なのが、LyXの「ローカルレイアウト」です。この使い方については、『取扱説明書カスタマイズ篇』の「ローカルレイアウト」の項をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -特性 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -各クラスには、既定のオプションの組があります。以下の一覧表は、その簡単な説明です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -Pagestyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -両面／片面 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -段組 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -節分け最上位階層 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -article -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -プレーン（Plain） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -片面 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -1段 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -節 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -report -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -プレーン（Plain） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -片面 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -1段 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -ç«  -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -book -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -設定（Headings） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -両面 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -1段 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -ç«  -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -letter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -プレーン（Plain） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -片面 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -1段 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -なし -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -おそらく「節分け最上位階層」とはどういう意味だろうと思っているでしょう。節の見出しを使える段落環境は、いくつかあります。異なった文書クラスでは、異なった節の見出 -しを使うことが出来ます。2つの文書クラスだけが -\family sans -ç«  -\family default -を使うことができて、残りは -\family sans -ç«  -\family default -を使うことができず、そのかわりに -\family sans -節 -\family default -から始まります。letter文書クラスでは、節の見出しは使えません。 -\family sans -ç«  -\family default -と -\family sans -節 -\family default -に加えて、 -\family sans -小節 -\family default -や -\family sans -小々節 -\family default -もあります。これらの詳しい説明は第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:見出し" - -\end_inset - -節にあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文書レイアウト -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:文書レイアウト" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!れいあうと@------レイアウト -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書クラスの重要な特性のほとんどは、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -メニューで設定されます。 -\family sans -文書クラス -\family default -の中にある -\family sans -オプション -\family default -フィールドには、現在の文書クラスに与える特別なオプションを、コンマ区切りの形で列挙することができますが、この方法は、現在の文書で使いたい特別なオプションをLyX -がサポートしていないときのみ必要になります。ご使用になりたいLaTeXクラスとそのオプションの詳細を知るには、そのLaTeXクラスの取扱説明書を読む必要がありま -す。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログの -\family sans -ページレイアウト -\family default -にある -\family sans -ヘディング形式 -\family default -ドロップボックスは、どのようなヘディングとページ番号が各ページに現れるかを制御します。以下の5つの選択肢があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -既定値 -\family default - 現在のクラスの既定のページ形式を使います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -空 -\family default - ページ番号もヘッダーもつけません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -プレーン（plain） -\family default - ページ番号だけつけます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -設定（headings） -\family default - ページ番号と、そのページの章か節の名前と番号をいれます。現在の章を使うか節を使うかは、そのクラスの節分け最上位階層に依存します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -装飾的（fancy） -\family default - -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -パッケージが装備されていれば、完全にカスタマイズできるヘッダとフッタを生成することができます。定義の内容については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ユーザ設定ページヘッダ" - -\end_inset - -節で言及されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落の分け方については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:段落の分け方" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -用紙寸法と方向 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!ようしすんぽう@用紙寸法 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:用紙寸法と方向" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -メニューで現れるダイアログの -\family sans -ページレイアウト -\family default -メニューには、以下のオプションがあります。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -用紙書式 -\family default - 印刷する用紙寸法を選びます。選べるのは、次のサイズです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -既定値 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -A0 - A6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -B0 - B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -C0 - C6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -USレター, USリーガル, USエグゼクティブ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -JIS B0 - JIS B6 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -ユーザ設定 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -用紙方向 -\family default - 出力を -\family sans -横向き -\family default -にするか -\family sans -縦向き -\family default -にするかを選択します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -両面文書 -\family default - 印刷の余白を両面印刷用に調整します。これは、奇数ページと偶数ページで余白が変わることを意味します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -余白 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!のよはく@------の余白 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:余白" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -よはく@余白 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -用紙の余白は、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -メニューで設定します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -KOMA-Script文書クラスをお使いの時は、既定値で使って構いません。KOMA-Scriptは、用紙書式とフォント寸法を考慮に入れて、印刷余白を自動的に計算 -するからです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -重要な覚書 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書クラスが変更されると、LyXは -\emph on -すべてのもの -\emph default -を新しいクラス用に変換する必要があります。変換が必要なものには、段落環境も含まれます。段落環境のいくつかは標準的なもので、すべての文書クラスに備わっていますが、 -文書クラスによっては、特殊な段落環境を持っている場合があります。このような場合に、文書クラスが変更されると、LyXはもはや未知のものとなった段落を「解釈不能」と -マークします。旧文書クラスに戻りたいと思ったときのために、段落様式名は維持されます。しかしこれらの段落は、特別な整形をされることなしに出力されてしまうので、新し -い段落様式を自分で作り出すか、新しい文書クラスに既存の段落様式に手動で変更する必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -段落の字下げと分け方 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だんらく@段落!のじさげ@------の字下げ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -はじめに -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:段落の字下げと分け方" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -色々な段落環境を説明する前に、段落の字下げについて少し説明しておきましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落の分け方については、すべての人がそれぞれの慣習を持っているようです。ほとんどのアメリカ人は、段落の最初の行を字下げします。一方で、字下げをせずに、段落間にス -ペースを入れる人もいます。段落を字下げすることを選択した場合には、節の -\emph on -最初の -\emph default -段落や、図・数式・表・リストなどの後の段落では、字下げは -\emph on -行われません -\emph default -。ある段落の後の段落のみ字下げされます。しかし、英語でない文書言語を用いるときには、字下げの挙動は異なることに注意してください。LaTeXが、使用言語のルールに -したがって字下げを調整します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -行間や、ヘッダと本文の間の余白など、段落間の余白—実のところ、ほとんどすべてのことに関する余白—は、LyXに前もって組み込まれています。これまで述べてきたように -、あれこれのあいだにどれだけ余白を空けるかといったことに、あなたが気を使う必要はまったくありません。それはLyXがやることです。実は、それらの組み込まれた余白は -、固定値ではなく範囲で与えられています。これによってLyXは、図がページの中で本文とうまく収まるようにしたり、節がページの最後から始まったりしないようにするため -に、行間を伸ばしたり縮めたりすることができるのです -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、LyXが印刷可能なファイルを生成する時に LaTeXが行います。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。しかし、組み込まれているといっても、ユーザーが余白を変えることができないということを意味するわけではありません。LyXは、これらの組み込まれた余白の -\emph on -全て -\emph default -を、全般的に変更できる余地を提供しています。これについては後に詳述します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -段落の分け方 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:段落の分け方" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だんらく@段落!のわけかた@------の分け方 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落の分け方を選ぶには、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@ -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -文書!せってい@------設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -のダイアログの -\family sans -本文レイアウト -\family default -サブメニューの中で、段落を字下げするか段落間に余白を追加するかにしたがって、 -\family sans -行頭下げ -\family default -か -\family sans -垂直スペース -\family default -を選んでください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -微調整 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文章全体ではなく、一つの段落だけに対して段落の区切り方を変えることもできます。現在の段落の状態を変更するには、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -段落設定 -\family default -ダイアログを開いて、 -\family sans -段落の行頭下げ -\family default -オプションを切り替えてください。段落が、行頭下げではなく余白で区切られている場合には、このボタンは無視されます（これを切り替えることによって、個別の段落を字下げ -することはできません）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -何らかの微調整が必要な場合以外には、個別の段落の字下げ方法を変更する必要はないはずです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -行間 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -だんらく@ -\family default -\series default -\shape default -\size default -\emph default -\bar default -\noun default -\color inherit -段落!のぎょうかん@------の行間 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ダイアログの -\family sans -本文レイアウト -\family default -サブメニューで行間を設定することができます -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -この機能を使うためには、LaTeXパッケージのsetspaceが装備されている必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。 -\lang english -You can set it for a single paragraph in the -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing - is normally defined in the environment's style. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -段落環境 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:段落環境" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だんらく@段落!かんきょう@------環境 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だんらくかんきょう@段落環境|( -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -概観 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落環境は、LaTeXファイルにおける -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -begin{ -\emph on -環境名 -\emph default -} ... - -\backslash -end{ -\emph on -環境名 -\emph default -} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -コマンドに対応するものです。もしLaTeXを知らなかったり、段落環境がどういうものか見当もつかない場合は -\emph on -、 -\emph default -『 -\emph on -入門篇 -\emph default -』を読んで下さい。『 -\emph on -入門篇 -\emph default -』にはこの節よりも多くの例も含まれています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落環境とは、その段落に特定の性質を与える、段落の「入れもの」に過ぎません。ここでいう性質には、特定の様式のフォントやいろいろな余白、連番の振り方、ラベルなどが -含まれます。さらに、ある段落環境を別の段落環境の中に「入れ子」状に入れて、上位段落環境から性質の一部を継承させることができます。一連の段落環境を使うことによって -、ややこしいタブストップや執筆作業中の余白調整や、その他タイプライタ時代からの遺物を一掃することができるようになります。特定の文章型にのみ使われる段落環境もあり -ますが、ここでは最も一般的なものだけを取り上げることにします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -新しい段落環境を選ぶためには、ツールバーの左端のプルダウンボックス -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png - scale 70 - -\end_inset - -を使って下さい。LyXは、カーソル位置の -\emph on -段落全体 -\emph default -の環境を変更します。また、新しい環境を選ぶ前に複数の段落を選択しておくと、選択した段落全ての環境を変えることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押すと、 -\emph on -一般的 -\emph default -には -\family sans -、 -\family default -新しい段落は -\family sans -標準 -\family default -段落環境で作られます。「一般的には」と言うのは、以下の環境の中では、 -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押すと、 -\family sans -標準 -\family default -にリセットされずに、前の段落の環境が維持されるからです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -詩句 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -リスト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ただし、入れ子階層の深さは -\size small -リセット -\size default -されることに注意してください。通常の場合は、新しい段落を開始すると、段落環境も入れ子階層の深さもリセットされます（入れ子については第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:入れ子" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください）。今のところ、これらは全て文脈に依存しますので、 -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押すと、段落環境も入れ子の深さもリセットされると考えておいた方が安全でしょう。新規の段落に、現在の環境と階層を維持させたいときには、 -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - -\family default -をお使い下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -標準 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ほとんどのクラスの既定の段落環境は、標準です。これは特別な性質を持たない、普通の段落を作ります。もしLyXがある段落環境をリセットして新しい段落を作る場合は、こ -れが選ばれます。実際あなたが読んでいるこの（そしてこの取扱説明書のほとんどの）段落が -\family sans -標準 -\family default -環境です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -どの環境の中にも -\family sans -標準 -\family default -環境を入れることができますが、他の環境を標準環境の中に入れることはできません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文書タイトル -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!たいとる@------タイトル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXのタイトルページは3つの部分を持っています。タイトルそれ自身と著者の名前、それと著者の連絡先や謝辞を書いた脚注です。あるタイプの文章では、LaTeXは -これらすべてと今日の日付を独立したページに印刷します。また別のタイプの文章では「タイトル」ページは文章の一番はじめのページの上の方に印刷されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXはタイトルページ用のコマンドへのインターフェイスを -\family sans -タイトル -\family default -、 -\family sans -著者 -\family default -、 -\family sans -日付 -\family default -という3つの段落環境の形で用意しています。使い方は、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -文章のタイトルを -\family sans -タイトル -\family default -環境に入れる。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -著者の名前を -\family sans -著者 -\family default -環境に入れる。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -もし特定の日付を入れたい場合や、今日の日付の場所に別のテキストを入れたい場合には、それを -\family sans -日付 -\family default -環境に入れる。この -\family sans -日付 -\family default -環境はオプションです。入れる必要はありません。 -\family sans -日付 -\family default -環境がない場合には、LaTeXは自動的に今日の日付を入れます。 -\lang english -If you don't want a date, use the option -\family sans -Suppress default date on front page -\family default - in the menu -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -class -\family default -. -\lang japanese -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また脚注を使って、謝辞や著者の連絡先を入れることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -見出し -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せつみだし@節見出し -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:見出し" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -節見出しを作るために、いくつかの段落環境があります。LyXが見出しの番号を自動的につけてくれます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -番号付きの見出し -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せつみだし@節見出し!ばんごうつき@番号付き------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -次の7種類の番号付きの見出しがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -部 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -ç«  -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -節 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -小節 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -小々節 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -段落 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -小段落 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、これらの見出しに一連のピリオドで分けられた番号をつけます。この番号はあなたが読んでいるのは、文章のどこであるかを表しています。他の見出しと異なって、部 -の見出しはラテン数字で番号がつけられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらの見出しによって文章はいくつかの部分へ分けられます。例えば本を書く場合を考えて下さい。一冊の本をいくつかの章へ分けるでしょう。LyXはこれと同じようなグル -ープ分けをします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -部 -\family default -は、 -\family sans -ç«  -\family default -か節に分けられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -ç«  -\family default -はいくつかの -\family sans -節 -\family default -に分けられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -節 -\family default -はいくつかの -\family sans -小節 -\family default -に分けられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -小節 -\family default -はいくつかの -\family sans -小々節 -\family default -に分けられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -小々節 -\family default -はいくつかの -\family sans -段落 -\family default -に分けられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -段落 -\family default -はいくつかの -\family sans -小段落 -\family default -に分けられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -すべての文章タイプが、 -\family sans -ç«  -\family default -を節分けの一番高いレベルとして使っているわけではありません。その場合には -\family sans -節 -\family default -が一番高いレベルになります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -つまり新しい小節に -\family sans -小節 -\family default -環境を使って見出しを作る場合には、（章番号.）節番号.小節の番号という形で番号をつけます。例えば、この取扱説明書の第2章の5番目の節の場合は「2.5」という番号が付け -られています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -番号を付けない見出し -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せつみだし@節見出し!ばんごうをつけない@番号を付けない------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -番号を付けない見出しは、名称の終わりに「*」が付いています。これらは、目次に載らないこと以外は、番号付きの見出しと同じように働きます（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:目次と一覧" - -\end_inset - -節を参照）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -番号の付け方の変更 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:番号の付け方-深度" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -どの節レベルまで番号をつけるか、また目次ではどのレベルまで番号をつけるかを変更することができます。これは文書クラスで決まっている節のレベルを変えるものではありま -せん。あるタイプの文章は -\family sans -ç«  -\family default -から始まって -\family sans -小段落 -\family default -までの節レベルを持っています。また別のクラスでは -\family sans -節 -\family default -から始まります。同じように、すべての文書クラスがすべての節レベルに対して番号をつけるのではありません。ほとんどの文書クラスは -\family sans -段落 -\family default -と -\family sans -小段落 -\family default -には番号はつけません。しかし、この設定は変えることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@ -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ダイアログを開いて下さい。 -\family sans -連番と目次 -\family default -の中に2つのカウンタがあります。 -\family sans -連番 -\family default -と名づけられたものは、節分けのどの階層の節見出しにまでLyXが番号を付けるべきかを制御します。もう一つのものは、目次に節見出しが現れるようにするかどうかを制御し -ます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -見出しの短縮タイトル -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せつみだし@節見出し!のたんしゅくたいとる@------の短縮タイトル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -短縮タイトル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:短縮タイトル" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この節のように、ある節や章のタイトルは、ひじょうに長くなることもあります。これは、水平方向の余地が少ない場合、問題になることがあります。例えば、ページのヘッダが -現在の節のタイトルを表示するように設定されている場合、長いタイトルは、ページ余白にはみ出してひどい仕上がりになりかねません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXは、節見出しに短縮タイトルを設定することを容認しています。短縮タイトルは、上記の問題を避けるためにヘッダと目次で使用されます。、短縮タイトルを設定する -には、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -短縮タイトル -\family default -メニューを使用してください。このメニューは、「オプション」というラベルのついたボックスを挿入し、短縮タイトルの文字列を入力できるようになります。これは、フロート -内のキャプションにも使うことができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -本節のタイトルは、この機能を使った一例になっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -特別な情報 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -次のことはすべての節見出し環境に共通することです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -節見出し環境を入れ子にすることはできません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -節見出し環境では傍注は使えません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -節見出し環境では、文中数式しか使えません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -見出し番号を参照するのに、ラベルと相互参照を使うことができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -引用と詩行の空白取り -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは詩を書いたり引用文を挿入するための、3つの段落環境を持っています。 -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -と -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -および -\family sans -詩句 -\family default -です。他のワードプロセッサなら引用文を挿入する場合には余白の調整、行間の変更が必要でしたが、この3つの段落環境を使えば自動的にやってくれます。この3つの環境はす -べてマージンを広くして、挿入するテキストの上と下にスペースを追加します。これらは、入れ子にすることもできるので、例えば、 -\family sans -詩句 -\family default -を -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -や他の段落環境に入れることもできます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この3つの環境の特徴として、新しい段落をはじめても -\family sans -標準 -\family default -環境にリセット -\emph on -されない -\emph default -ことがあります。そのため詩を書いてる最中に環境が変わるのを心配すること無しに気楽に -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押すことができます。ただし、そのかわりに詩を書き終ったら、自分で -\family sans -標準 -\family default -環境に変える必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -引用（字下げなし）と引用（字下げあり） -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:引用" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いんよう@引用 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -さて今までは3つの環境の共通点を説明してきましたが、ここで違いについて説明しましょう。 -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -と -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -は、一つの違いを除くと同じものです。 -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -は段落を分けるのに段落間にスペースを入れますが、 -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -は -\emph on -常に -\emph default -最初の行を字下げすることで段落を分けます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これは -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -環境の例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -ここは -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -環境です。どんどん書いていってあげましょう。この行をどんどん延ばして、改行するところまで持っていきましょう。ほら、字下げしないでしょう？ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -ここは、同じ引用の第2段落です。ここでも字下げはありません。ただし、私のいるこの段落と上の段落の間には、余白が設けられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -さて今度は -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -環境の例を見てみましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -ここは -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -環境です。どんどん書いていくと、字下げしていることが分かるでしょう。もしあなたが、第一行を字下げして新しい段落が始まったことを示すような記法を使っている国にいる -場合、 -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -はあなた向けの環境です！もちろん、どこかの文章を引用すると仮定しての話です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -ここは新しい段落です。選挙のときの政治家みたいにくだらないことをぐだぐだと書き続けてみましょう。本当にそうしたら、きっとあなたは退屈するでしょうが。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これでわかるように、 -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -は段落を分けるのにスペースを使う人のための環境で、 -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -は、字下げを段落を分けるのに使う人のための環境です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -詩句 -\family sans - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だんらく@段落!しく@詩句 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -し@è©© -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:詩句" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -詩句 -\family default -は、詩や韻文などを書くための段落環境です。次の例を見て下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -これは詩篇なり -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -われは一度たりとも手習いもせず -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -あしきものはさらにあしきものとならざるべからず。その流れはとどまるところをしらざるものとなり、倦むことをしらざるほどに、ながく、またながく、うたかたの流れもたえ -ざるほどに、またこの行も改行せんほどにながくのびていく。画面においてはよからん、されど印字した場合にはいかほどや。そこにおいては、後の行は最初の行よりも少しだけ -字下げされん。だんだん散文になってきて韻も踏めないのでやめましょう。叱ってん -\begin_inset Formula $\heartsuit$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -行を改行するには -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -そして見栄えをよくするには -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -をつかうべし -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -見てわかるように、 -\family sans -詩句 -\family default -は段落を分けるのに字下げをしません。また詩の一連が一つの段落になっています。一連の中で行を分けるには、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -を押して -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default -関数を使って下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -箇条書き -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:箇条書き" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、箇条書きを作るために4つの段落環境を持っています。 -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -と -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境では、LyXは各々の項目の前に小さい印か番号をつけます。 -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -と -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境では、自分で各項目のラベルをつけることができます。まずこの4つの環境に共通することを説明して、それから各々の環境について説明することにしましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -一般的な性質 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この4つの箇条書きを作る環境は、さまざまな面で他の環境と異なります。まず初めに、LyXは各々の段落を箇条書きの項目として扱います。 -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押しても環境は -\family sans -標準 -\family default -に -\emph on -変わるのではなく -\emph default -、新しい箇条書きの項目が作られます。ここで、環境の入れ子の階層は維持されます。段落環境は変えないで、現在の階層だけをリセットしたい場合は、 -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - - -\family default -を使って改行します。 -\lang english -If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the -\family sans -Standard -\family default - environment. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらの環境の中に、任意の箇条書き環境を入れることもできます。実際、いくつかの箇条書き環境では、入れ子の深さによってLyXがラベルを変えます。リスト環境を入れ子 -にしたい場合は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:入れ子" - -\end_inset - -節をぜひ読んで下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かじょうがき@箇条書き!きごう@------（記号） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:箇条書き（記号）" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -一番初めに -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -段落環境を説明しましょう。この段落環境は次のような性質を持っています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -各々の項目は小さい印（シンボル）をラベルとして使います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -同じ入れ子の深さの場合、同じシンボルが使われます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -シンボルは一行目の一番初めにつきます。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -項目の長さは制限されません。LyXは自動的に各項目の左余白を調整します。そして、左余白の大きさは -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -が含まれている環境によって変わります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -もし他の -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境の中に別の -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境を入れると項目のラベルのシンボルが変わります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -4つの異なるシンボルがあって、4段階の入れ子の深さに対応しています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -画面上では、つねに同じシンボルを表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -入れ子になった環境の詳しい説明は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:入れ子" - -\end_inset - -節を見て下さい。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -上の説明は -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -を使ったリストの例になってます。 -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境は順序が問題にならないようなリストを作るのに向いた環境です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -違うレベルでは違うシンボルがラベルとして使われると言いましたが、それを見てみましょう。次の例では4つのすべてのシンボルを使っています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -初めのレベルの -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -のラベルは黒丸です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -2番目のレベルのシンボルはダッシュ(-)です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -3番目のレベルのラベルはアステリスク(*)です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -4番目のレベルのラベルは小さな黒丸です。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -3番目のレベルに戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -2番目のレベルに戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -一番外側のレベルに戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらが既定の -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -のラベルです。 -\lang english -You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings -\family default - dialog in the submenu -\family sans -Bullets -\family default -. -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@ -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\lang english - These customizations are not displayed in LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上の例を見ると、項目間の距離もレベルが増すに連れ減って行くのもわかると思います。環境を入れ子にする方法と、そうした場合のヒントが第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:入れ子" - -\end_inset - -節で説明されてます。読むのを忘れないで下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かじょうがき@箇条書き!ばんごう@------（番号） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:箇条書き（番号）" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境は番号付きのリストやアウトラインを作るための道具です。これは次のような性質を持っています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -各々の項目は数字またはアルファベットをラベルとして使います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -ラベルの種類は入れ子の深さによって異なります。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -LyXが項目の数を数えてラベルを自動的につけ、必要ならば更新します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -新しい -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境に入ると項目の番号は1にリセットされます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境と同様に、 -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境は -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -項目のレベルに応じて左マージンが変わります。項目の長さはどんな長さでも大丈夫です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -入れ子の深さに応じて項目間のスペースを減らして行きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -入れ子の深さに応じて異なるラベルを使います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -環境を4段階まで入れ子にできます。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境と違い、LyXでは -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -は各項目に異なったラベルをつけます。次の例で -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -の4段階のレベルにLyXがつけるラベルを見て下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -一番目のレベルでは後ろにピリオド(.)が付いたアラビア数字がラベルに使われます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -2番目のレベルでは括弧で囲まれた小文字のアルファベットが使われます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -3番目のレベルでは後ろにピリオドが付いた小文字のローマ数字が使われます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -4番目のレベルでは後ろにピリオドの付いた大文字のアルファベットが使われます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -項目間の距離は入れ子の深さが深くなるに連れて狭くなって行くのに注意して下さい。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -3番目のレベルに戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -2番目のレベルに戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -1番外側のレベルです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -You can customize the type of numbering used in the -\family sans -Enumerate -\family default - environment, see -\lang japanese -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:箇条書きの微調整" - -\end_inset - -。 -\lang english -Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境を入れ子にすることに関しては、さらに述べるべきことがあります。より詳しくは、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:入れ子" - -\end_inset - -節をご参照ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection - -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かじょうがき@箇条書き!きじゅつ@------（記述） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -今までの2つの環境と違って、 -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -環境では項目に付けるラベルは決まっていません。そのかわりにLyXは項目の1行目の1番初めの「単語」をラベルに使うのです。例を見て下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -例: これは -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -環境の例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXはラベルをボールド体にして、ラベルと残りの部分の間にスペースを入れます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -1番初めの「単語」という意味は、ある項目の1行目にいるとき、最初に -\family sans -Space -\family default -キーが打たれたところでラベルが終了するということです。もしラベルに2語以上を使う必要がある場合には、 -\family sans -保護された空白 -\family default -を使用します（ -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - -と入力するか、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -保護された空白 -\family default -メニューを使用してください。詳細は第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:水平方向の空白" - -\end_inset - -節参照）。以下が使用例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Second -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Example: これは -\family sans -保護された空白 -\family default -をラベルに使った例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -使い方： -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -環境は定義、定理のようなものに使ったらいいでしょう。ある言葉を残りのテキストより目立つようにしたい場合に使えばいいのです。あることを説明する文章全体を -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -環境にいれるのはやめた方がいいでしょう。その場合には -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -か -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -を使って、その中にいくつかの -\family sans -標準 -\family default -環境をいれた方がいいでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -入れ子にする： -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -環境を他の -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -環境の中に入れたり、他のリストや別の環境の中に入れることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -注意ですが、LyXは2行目以降を1行目に対してオフセットするのに気をつけて下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -LyX -\family sans -リスト -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かじょうがき@箇条書き!LyXりすと@------（LyXリスト） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境はLyXがLaTeXを拡張したものです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -環境と同じように、 -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境はそれぞれの項目にユーザーが決めたラベルをつけます。 -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境と他の3つの環境の違いを説明しましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -項目ラベル LyXは項目の最初の「単語」をラベルに使います。最初の行の初めての -\family sans -スペース -\family default -がラベルと残りのテキストとの区切りになります。もし2つ以上の単語をラベルに使いたい場合は以前に説明した -\family sans -保護された空白 -\family default -を使って下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -余白 見ればわかるように、LyXはラベルと項目の本文とでは違う余白を使います。項目の本文にはより大きな余白がつかわれ、それは既定のラベルの幅に少しスペースを追加 -したものになっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -ラベル幅 ラベルの幅には、LyXは実際のラベルの幅と既定のラベルの幅を比べて大きい方を使います。もし実際の幅の方が大きければラベルは本文の1行目に食い込みます。 -つまり、1行目はそれ以降の行と異なる左余白になります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -既定の幅 -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境のすべての項目の本文が、同じ左余白を持つように、既定のラベル幅を設定することができます。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -既定の幅を変更するには、リストのすべての項目を選択して、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -段落設定 -\family default -ダイアログを開いてください。 -\family sans -最長のラベル -\family default -と書かれたボックス内の文字列が既定のラベル幅を決定します。もっとも長いラベルの文字列をそのまま入力するか、あるいは文字「M」を複数個入れてもいいでしょう。文字「 -M」はアルファベット中でもっとも幅の広い文字なので、LaTeXでは幅を表す標準単位として用いられているのです。「M」を幅の単位として用いていれば、 -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境内でラベルを変更する度に -\family sans -最長のラベル -\family default -の内容を書き換える必要がなくなります。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -あらかじめ定められた既定幅は、「00.00.0000」の文字列と同じ長さ（6M相当）になっています。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ラベル幅を変えるためだけにリスト項目にカーソルを設定しても、LyX内での幅が変わるだけで、出力には変わりありません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境は、 -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -と同じように、ある単語をその説明文から目立つようにしたい場合に使用してください。 -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境は、 -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -と同じことを別のレイアウトで実現する方法です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境は、それ自身や別の型の -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境の中に入れ子にすることができます。これは、他の箇条書き環境と同様の動作をします。入れ子についての詳細は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:入れ子" - -\end_inset - -節をお読みください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -リスト -\family default -環境には、もう一つ特徴があります。例でわかるように、LyXは、既定で項目ラベルを左揃えにします。 -\family sans -水平フィル -\family default -を追加すれば、LyXのラベルのそろえ方を変更することができます。 -\family sans -水平フィル -\family default -については、後ほど第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:水平方向の空白" - -\end_inset - -節で説明します。いくつかの例を見てみましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -å·¦ 既定 -\family sans -リスト -\family default -項目のラベルです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -右 ラベルの初めに -\family sans -水平フィル -\family default -を一つ入れると右揃えになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -中央 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - ラベルの初めと終わりに一つづつ -\family sans -水平フィル -\family default -を入れると中央揃えになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -箇条書きの微調整 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:箇条書きの微調整" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かじょうがき＠箇条書き! びちょうせい＠微調整 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -本節で述べられている機能を使用するには、文書設定で -\family sans -調整可能な箇条書き(enumitem) -\family default -モジュールを読み込まなくてはなりません。これは、LaTeX-packageの -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を読み込むものです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -調整可能な連番箇条書き -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かじょうがき＠箇条書き! れんばん＠連番 ! ちょうせい＠調整 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -連番箇条書きの番号の振り方の既定値は、箇条書きの各階層における最初の項目に、非必須引数を加えることで( -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -短縮タイトル -\family default -メニュー)変更することができます。そこに、TeXコードで(短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -TeXコードについての詳細は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:TeXコード" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -roman{enumi} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -というコマンドを書き加えてください。ここで、 -\emph on -enumi -\emph default -は、第1階層の連番のカウンタです。コマンド -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default -は、このカウントを、小文字のローマ数字で出力します。大文字のローマ数字を使うには、上記コマンド中の -\series bold - -\backslash -roman -\series default -を -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman -\series default -に置き換えてください。アラビア数字にするには、 -\series bold - -\backslash -arabic -\series default -を使用します。項目に、大文字もしくは小文字のラテン文字で「連番」を付けたい場合には、それぞれ -\series bold - -\backslash -Alph -\series default -もしくは -\series bold - -\backslash -alph -\series default -を使用してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -連番は1文字に限られているので、ラテン文字では26項目までしか連番を振ることはできません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -箇条書きの下位階層の連番を変更するには、コマンド中の「i」を、階層番号の小文字ローマ数字で置き換えてください(enumi, enumii, enumiii, - enumiv)。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -下記は、調整した連番箇条書きの例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -第1階層 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -第2階層 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -第2階層 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -第3階層 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -第4階層 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -上記リストでは、以下のようなコマンドが使用されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\series bold -label= -\backslash -# -\backslash -Alph{enumi} -\backslash -# -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -Alph{enumi}. -\backslash -arabic{enumii} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -bf{ -\backslash -arabic{enumiii}} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -label= -\backslash -emph{ -\backslash -roman{enumiv})} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここで、コマンド -\series bold - -\backslash -emph{} -\series default -は、ラベルを強調文字にし、 -\series bold - -\backslash -bf{} -\series default -はボールド体にします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -リスト階層のラベルを変更したときには、再度定義を変更するまで、それ以降のすべてのリストで、それがずっと使われます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -連番の復帰 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かじょうがき＠箇条書き! れんばん@連番 ! ふっき@復帰 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下のように、あいだに段落をはさんで、連番を復帰させることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -label= -\backslash -arabic{enumi}. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -1つめ -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -既定の連番に戻す -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -2つめ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -通常のテキスト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume -復帰した連番 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -連番を復帰させるには、スタイル -\family sans -箇条書き(連番)-復帰 -\family default -を使用してください。連番がLyX中に青色で表示されて、これが復帰連番であることを示し、LyX中での番号は正しくないけれども、出力中では正しくなることを強調します -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -前に復帰すべき連番がない場合には、LaTeXエラーが発生します。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -箇条書きの連番を復帰させる際、次の番号ではない番号に復帰させたかったり、新しい連番を、指定した番号から始めたいことがあるかもしれません。これも、通常の連番箇条書 -きの最初の項目に、非必須引数を加えることで実現できます。非必須引数として、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -start=番号 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -というコマンドを入力してください。ここで、「番号」は箇条書きを開始したい番号です。例： -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -第1項目 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -第2項目 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -指定した番号で始める連番： -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -start=4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -この連番は4から始まります -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -箇条書きの余白 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かじょうがき＠箇条書き ! よはく＠余白 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ときには、箇条書きの項目間の垂直方向の余白を、調整したい場合があります。例えば、以下の例の既定の余白が、大きすぎると感じたとしましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -標準余白の -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -記号付き箇条書き -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上記箇条書きの最初の項目に、非必須引数を加えることで余白を詰めることができます。下記の例のように、箇条書きに追加される余白をなくすには、非必須引数にコマンド -\series bold -nolistsep -\series default -を加えます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -nolistsep -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -箇条書きに追加される -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -垂直余白をなくした -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -記号付き箇条書き -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -余白を広げるには、LaTeXパッケージの -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -で提供されている、いくつかのコマンドを使用することができます。詳しくは、取扱説明書 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - -をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -水平方向の余白や行頭下げを変更するためにも、多くのコマンドが使えます。下記の例は、行頭下げを、文書中の段落の行頭下げと同じにし、ラベル分離幅を2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cmにして、番号がページ余白に置かれるようにしたものです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent= -\backslash -parindent, labelsep=2cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -負の行頭下げを持つ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -連番箇条書き -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -さらなる調整 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かじょうがき＠箇条書き ! びちょうせい＠微調整 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -記述箇条書きのスタイルを変更することも可能です。コマンド -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font=definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -は、記述ラベルのフォントを変更し、コマンド -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -style=definition -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -は、箇条書きのスタイルを設定します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -下記は、コマンド -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -を使用した例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -電離放射線: -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= -\backslash -itshape, style=nextline -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -電離放射線は、電子を原子や分子から分離させるに十分なエネルギーを持つ、素粒子や電磁波から成ります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -参照カウント: コンピュータ科学において、参照カウントは、オブジェクト・メモリブロック・ディスク容量・その他のリソースへの、参照やポインタやハンドルの数を保管し -ておくための技術です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeXパッケージの -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -で提供されるコマンドや機能は、他にもたくさんあります。詳細は、取扱説明書 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - -をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -書簡 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -訳注: ここでは英文書簡の書き方について説明しています。日本語の書簡の場合とは違いますが、英文で書簡を書く必要がある場合には便利です。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょかん@書簡 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -住所と右寄せ住所： 概観 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXには書簡向け文書クラスもありますが、それとは別に私たちは、 -\family sans -住所 -\family default -と -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -という2つの段落環境も追加することにしました。LaTeXでletterクラスを使う場合には、決まった順序で決まった段落環境を使う必要がありました。これを間違える -とLaTeXは文章を無茶苦茶にしてしまうのです。これに比べて -\family sans -住所 -\family default -と -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -環境は文章のどこにでも問題なく使うことができます。また他の環境の中に入れることもできるのです。ただし、他の環境を -\family sans -住所 -\family default -や -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -環境の中に入れることはできません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もちろん -\family sans -住所 -\family default -と -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -環境を書簡以外にも使えます。特に -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -環境はいくつかのヨーロッパの学術雑誌で使われる論文のタイトルを作るのに便利です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -使い方 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:住所の使い方" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -住所 -\family default -環境は、書簡の受取人の住所用に文章を整形します。この書式は、国によっては、（例えばDear Leslieのような）書簡の書き出しや差出人のサインのための名前を書 -くのに使われます。 -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -環境は、差出人の住所や国によっては今日の日付を書くために、文章を右に寄せて整形します。 -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -環境の例を見てみましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Address -右寄せ住所 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -自分の名前 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -自分の住所 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -日時 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上が -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -です。これを見ればわかるようにすべての行の左余白が揃っています。この左余白は、一番長い行が一行に収まるように、LyXが調整します。今度は -\family sans -住所 -\family default -環境の例を見てみましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -受取人の名前 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -住所 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -郵便番号と国名 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらの例からわかるように、 -\family sans -住所 -\family default -も -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -も次の段落との間に余白を追加します。これらの環境の中で -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押すと、LyXは入れ子の階層を戻して、環境も -\family sans -標準 -\family default -に戻します。 -\family sans -Return -\family default -とは -\family typewriter -break-paragraph -\family default -関数のことであって、一方で住所の各行は段落ではありませんから、これは自然な挙動です。したがって、もし -\family sans -住所 -\family default -や -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -環境で新行を開始するには、 -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default -関数（ -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -か -\family sans -挿入 -\family default -メニューから -\family sans -整形文字\SpecialChar \menuseparator -改行 -\family default -を選んで下さい）を使わなければなりません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -学術論文 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ほとんどの学術論文は、概要に始まり参考文献で終わります。LyXには、この2つのための段落環境もあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -概要 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -がいよう@概要 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -概要 -\family default -環境は、文字通り論文の概要を書くための環境です。この環境は文章のどこにでもおけるのですが、実際上はタイトルのすぐ後ろの本文の前におくべきです。 -\family sans -概要 -\family default -環境はarticleまたはreport文書クラスにのみ有効です。bookクラスでは -\family sans -概要 -\family default -は完全に無視されますし、letter文書クラスで概要を使うのも、まったく馬鹿げたことでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -概要 -\family default -環境がやってくれることを説明しましょう。第一に、「概要」というラベルを文章の上の中央につけてくれます。このラベルと要約との本文の間は広めのスペースによって分けら -れます。第二に、概要には小さなフォントが使われます。最後に、概要とそれに続く文章の間にスペースを入れてくれます。以上は、LyX画面上での見え方です。実際の出力は -、使っているのがarticleクラスであるかreportクラスであるかに依存します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押して新しい段落をはじめても環境は変わりません。新しい段落も -\family sans -概要 -\family default -環境の中です。だから概要を書き終った場合には、自分で段落環境を変える必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:概要環境内の段落" - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -概要 -\family default -環境内の段落 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここで -\family sans -概要 -\family default -環境の例を見せたいのですが、この取扱説明書が「book」クラスなのでできません。したがって第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:概要環境内の段落" - -\end_inset - -図として挿入しておきます。もし今まで概要を見たことも使ったことも無いのならこの環境を無視して大丈夫です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -参考文献 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さんこうぶんけん@参考文献 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:参考文献環境" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -参考文献 -\family default -環境は参考文献のリストを作るための環境です。この環境は文章のどこにでもおけるのですが、実際上は文章の終わりにおくべきです。 -\family sans -参考文献 -\family default -環境を他の環境の中に入れたり、他の環境を -\family sans -参考文献 -\family default -環境の中に入れたりすると、動きません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -初めて -\family sans -参考文献 -\family default -環境を開くと、LyXはその上の段落との間に大きなスペースを開けてBibliographyかReferencesという名前の見出しをボールド体の大きなフォントでつ -けます。見出しの名前がどちらになるかは、文書クラスによって決まっています。 -\family sans -参考文献 -\family default -環境の一つの段落は一つの文献に対応しています。したがって、 -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押しても段落環境は変わらずに -\family sans -参考文献 -\family default -環境のままです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXにおける参考文献の取扱いに詳細については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:書誌情報" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection - -\family sans -LyXコード -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だんらく@段落!Lyxこーど@LyXコード -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LyXコード" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -LyXコード -\family default -環境はLaTeXのLyXでの拡張です。これはテキストをtypewriterフォントでタイプセットします。またこの環境の中では、 -\family sans -スペース -\family default -は固定した長さを持つ空白として扱われます -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -正確にいうとLyXコード -\family default -環境の中では、 -\family sans -スペース -\family default -キーは単語の区切りではなくて -\family sans -Protected -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Blank -\family default -として扱われます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。この環境がLyXの中でいくつも空白を入れることのできる唯一の環境です。ただし空白行を入れたい場合には -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -（ -\family typewriter -break-line -\family default -関数）が必要です。 -\family sans -Return -\family default -では段落が終わってしまいます。けれども -\family sans -Return -\family default -で段落環境がリセットされるわけではありません。そのため -\family sans -LyXコード -\family default -環境を終わる場合には、自分で段落環境を変える必要があります。また -\family sans -LyXコード -\family default -環境を他の環境の中へ入れることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この環境には、少しわかりにくい、いくつかの癖があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -新しい段落の初めでは -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -を使えません。（つまり、 -\family sans -Return -\family default -のすぐ後に -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -を入れることができません。） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -のすぐ後に -\family sans -Space -\family default -を入れることができません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Return -\family default -を使って新しい段落を始めて、それから -\family sans -Space -\family default -を使って下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -または、 -\family sans -Space -\family default -の代わりに -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - -を使って下さい。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -何も入っていない段落や何も入っていない行を作ることはできません。空白にしたい行には、少なくとも一つの -\family sans -Space -\family default -を入れて下さい。さもないと LaTeXがエラーを起こします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\family default -を入力すると、 -\emph on -本当の -\emph default -引用符が入力されてしまうので、タイプライタの二重引用符は入力できません。タイプライタの二重引用符を入力したい場合には -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "self-insert \"" -\end_inset - -を使って下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -例を見て下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -#include -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -int main(void) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -{ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - printf("Hello World! -\backslash -n"); -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code - return 0; -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これは標準的な Hello world!のプログラムです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -LyXコード -\family default -の目的はただ一つ、プログラムソースやシェルスクリプト、rcファイルなどのコードを植字することです。この環境は、タイプライタを使ったような文字列を生成する必要があ -るような、非常に特別な場合にのみ使って下さい。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だんらくかんきょう@ -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -段落環境|) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -長いプログラムコードについては、取扱説明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』のプログラムコードリストの節に説明されているリスト差込枠を使用してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -環境を入れ子にする -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いれこ@入れ子!かんきょうの@環境の------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:入れ子" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -はじめに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、本文を特定の文脈と性質をもった統合されたかたまりとして取り扱います。これによって、あるかたまりが他のかたまりの性質の一部を引き継ぐようにすることができ -ます。たとえば、文書構造に3つの論点があるものとして、第2の論点には2つの小論点があるものとしてください。つまり、あるリストの中に別のリストが入っていて、内部リ -ストは第2項目に「組み込まれて」いるのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -論点1 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -論点2 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -小論点その1 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -小論点その2 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -論点3 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -一つのリストに他のリストを入れ子で入れれば、リストの中にリストを入れることができます。環境を入れ子にするのはたいへん簡単です。現在の段落の入れ子の階層を変えるに -は、 -\family sans -編集 -\family default -メニューから -\family sans -リストの階層を下げる -\family default -か -\family sans -リストの階層を上げる -\family default -を選びます（ステータスバーに入れ子の階層が表示されます）。メニューの代わりに、ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -ないし -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -や、キー割り当て -\family sans -Tab -\family default -・ないし -\family sans -Shift+Tab -\family default -、あるいは -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -ないし -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -を使用することができます。この変更は、事前に選択した部分があれば、その部分に対して作用し（これによって複数の段落の入れ子の階層を一度に変えることができます）、そ -うでなければ現在の段落に対して働きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、入れ子の階層を変えることが有効な場合にしか、変更を許さないことに注意してください。有効でない場合には、入れ子の階層を変えようとしても何も起こりません。 -また、ある段落の階層を変更すると、その段落に入れ子として入っているすべての段落の階層にも影響を与えます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -入れ子が可能なのは、リストに限られているわけではありません。LyXでは、これから見て行くようにほとんどの環境の中に、ほとんどの環境を入れることができます。これが -環境を入れ子にすることの本当の利点なのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -入れ子にできるものとできないもの -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落環境の一覧をお見せする前に、どのように入れ子が機能するか、もう少しお話しする必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落環境を入れ子にできるかどうかという質問は、単純にイエス・ノーで答えられるよりも、もう少し複雑なのです。段落環境には、3つの型があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -まったく入れ子にできないもの -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -完全に入れ子にできる、すなわち、自分の中へ他の環境を入れることも、他の環境の中に入ることも可能なもの -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -第3の型、すなわち、他の環境の中に入れることはできるが、自分の中に他の環境を入れることができないもの -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下は、入れ子の挙動の3つの型と、それぞれに属する段落環境の一覧です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -入れ子にできないもの 他の環境を入れることも、他の環境に入ることもできないもの。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -参考文献 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -概要 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -タイトル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -著者 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -日付 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -完全に入れ子にできるもの 他の環境を入れることも、他の環境に入ることもできるもの。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -詩句 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -引用(字下げなし) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -引用(字下げあり) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -リスト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -LyXコード -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Description -他の環境に入れるもの 他の環境には入れるが、他の環境を入れることができないもの。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -標準 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -部 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -ç«  -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -節 -\family default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -小節 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -小々節 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -段落 -\family default - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -小段落 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -部* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ç« * -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -節* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -小節* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -小々節* -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -住所 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\family sans -\series default -ç«  -\family default -や -\family sans -節 -\family default -などのように番号の振られた節見出しを箇条書きなどに入れ子にすることはできますが、それは行わないことを強く推奨します。通常の植字のガイドラインに従って、正しく構造 -化された文書を作成するのが目的ですから、節見出しを入れ子にすることはそれに反するのです。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -他のものを入れ子にする：表・数式・フロートなど -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いれこ@入れ子!ひょうなどの@表などの------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落環境ではないけれども、入れ子化によってなんらかの影響を受けるものがあります。それらは、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -数式 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -表 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -図 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -です（ -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -図や表を -\family sans -フロート -\family default -の中に入れる場合は影響を受けません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -フロート -\family default -に関する詳細は第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:フロート" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXはこれら3つのオブジェクトを、単語または段落として扱います。図表や数式を行中に入れた場合は、これらは属する段落が行くところに一緒についていきます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -けれども、図表や数式がそれ自身の「段落」を構成している場合には、「他の段落環境に入れる」段落環境として扱われます。つまり、他の段落環境に入れることはできますが、 -他の段落環境を中に入れることは当然ながらできません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表を例にとって見てみましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -項目1 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -これは(a)、入れ子になってます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -甲 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -乙 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -丙 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -丁 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -これは(b)。表は(a)の中に入れ子になってます。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -もとのレベルに戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もし表を(a)の中に入れ子にしなければ次のようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -項目1 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -これは(a)、入れ子になってます。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -甲 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -乙 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -丙 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -丁 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -これは(b)。表は(a)の中に入れ子になっていません。どの環境の中にも入っていないのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -もとのレベルに戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上の例では項目(b)は入れ子になっていません。新しいリストの一番初めの項目になってしまっているのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表を入れ子にしたが入れ子の深さが十分ではなかったというのもよくある失敗です。LyXは表の後ろのものをすべて新しい（サブ）リストにしてしまいます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -項目1 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -これは(a)。入れ子になってます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -甲 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -乙 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -丙 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -丁 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -これは(b)。表が、項目1には入れ子にはなっていますが、(a)の入れ子にはなっていません。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -もとのレベルに戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以上からわかるように、項目(b)は、 -\emph on -項目1の中の -\emph default -新しいリストの初めの項目になってしまいました。これと同じことは図でも数式でも起こります。したがって、図表や数式を入れ子にする場合は、正しい階層に設定するように気 -をつけてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -使い方と一般的な性質 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -入れ子の上限 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -階層に関しては、LyXは6段階の階層の入れ子まで扱うことができます。つまり、「第6階層」がもっとも内側の階層です。例で見てみましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -第1階層 − もっとも外側 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -第2階層 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -第3階層 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -第4階層 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -第5階層 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -第6階層 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -6段階という入れ子の上限には2つの例外があり、それはすでに上の例に示されています。完全に入れ子にできる他の環境と違って、 -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境と -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境では、4段階までしか入れ子にできません。例えば、上の例で項目Aの中に、さらに -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境を入れようとするとエラーになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -いくつかの例 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いれこ@入れ子!のれい@------の例 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -入れ子で何ができるのかを説明するには、例をお見せするのが一番でしょう。以下にいくつかの入れ子の例を挙げます。これらでは、真似をしやすいように、私たちがどうやって -これらの例を作ったかが説明してあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -例1： 6段階の入れ子と異なった環境の入れ子 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#1-a ここはもっとも外側の階層で、 -\family sans -箇条書き（一覧） -\family default -環境になっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#2-a ここは第2階層です。 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -を押してそれから -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -を使って作りました。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#3-a ここは第3階層です。今度は -\family sans -Return -\family default -だけを押してから -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - -\family default -を2回続けて押しました。前の階層で行ったように、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -を押してから -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -を使っても作ることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -ここは「#3-a」の中に入れ子になっている -\family sans -標準 -\family default -環境です。つまり第4階層になります。私たちはこれを作るのに、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -を押してから -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -を押し、それから段落環境を -\family sans -標準 -\family default -にしました。1段落を超えるリスト項目を作りたいときは、このようにしてください。この方法は、 -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -・ -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -・ -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境でも使えます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここは同じく第4階層の -\family sans -標準 -\family default -環境です。 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -を押して作りました。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#4-a ここは第4階層です。 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -を押してから、段落環境を -\family sans -箇条書き（一覧） -\family default -に戻しました。前にも言ったように、 -\family sans -標準 -\family default -環境の中には他の環境を入れることはできません。そのため、ここではまだ第4階層に留まらざるを得ないのです。しかし以下のように、「#3-a」の中にさらに深い階層を作 -りつづけることは -\emph on -可能 -\emph default -です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#5-a ここは第5階層です\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{} -そして第6階層です。もうこの2つをどうやって作ったかは、想像できるでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#5-b 第5階層に戻りました。 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -を押した後に -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -を押します。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#4-b もう一度 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -を押した後に -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -を押して第4階層に戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#3-b. - 第3階層に戻りました。もうこれをどうやって作ったかは、明らかでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#2-b 第2階層に戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 -#1-b ついにもっとも外側の階層に帰って来ました。この文章の後に -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押して、段落環境を -\family sans -標準 -\family default -に戻すとリストが終了します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -箇条書き（一覧） -\family default -環境の代わりに、 -\family sans -箇条書き（記述） -\family default -・ -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -・ -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -あるいは -\family sans -詩句 -\family default -環境を使っても、まったく同じようにできます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -例2：継承 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout LyX-Code -ここはLyXコード環境で、第1階層すなわちもっとも外側の階層です。これから私たちは -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押した後に -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -を -\family default -押して、それから -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境に変更します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -ここは -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境で第2階層です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -内側に入れ子にした -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -が、親環境（ -\family sans -LyXコード -\family default -）から余白を継承しただけでなく、フォントや行間も継承したことに留意してください！ -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -最後に -\family sans -Return -\family default -を押して上の例を終わりました。その後、段落環境を -\family sans -標準 -\family default -にリセットして -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -を一回押して入れ子の階層をリセットする必要がありました。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -例3：ラベルと階層、および箇条書き（連番）と箇条書き（記号）環境 -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -例3：ラベルと階層および他のリスト環境 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -ここは -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -段落環境の第1階層です。ここへ箇条書きを入れ子にしていきます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -ここは第2階層です。 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -の後に -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -を押して作りました。この中に -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境を入れるとどうなるでしょうか。第3階層になるはずですが、ラベルはどうなるでしょうか。星印でしょうか。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -いいえ！黒丸です。第3階層でも -\emph on -初めて -\emph default -の -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境なので、ラベルが黒丸になるのです（ここに来るには、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -の後に -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -を押した後、環境を -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -に変えました）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Itemize -ここは第4階層です。 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -の後に -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -を押しました。また同じことをして… -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -…第5階層に来ます。しかし今度は段落環境を -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -に戻しました。この項目の連番が -\emph on -小文字のローマ数字 -\emph default -になっていることに留意してください。3重めの -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境だからです（つまり -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -の中の -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -の中の -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -だからです）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate - -\emph on -段落環境を変えずに -\emph default -入れ子の階層を減らしていくと、どうなるでしょうか。どの型の連番をLyXは使うでしょうか。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -おっと、その前に -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -だけを押して現在の環境と階層を維持しながら新しい項目を作ってみましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -次に -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -と押してから -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -で階層を下げてみましょう。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -ここは第4階層です。どの型のラベルをLyXが使っているか見てください！ -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -ここは第3階層です。階層を変更したのに、LyXはまだ小文字のローマ数字をラベルとして使用しています。なぜでしょうか。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -それは入れ子の階層が変わっても、この段落は -\emph on -まだ -\family sans -\emph default -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境の3重めだからです。ただし、LyXは連番のカウンタを -\emph on -リセットした -\emph default -ことに注意してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -もう一度 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -と -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -を使って第2階層に戻りました。今度は入れ子の階層を変更しただけでなく、2重めの -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境に戻りました。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -もう一度 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -と -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -を押してもっとも外側の第1階層に戻ると、同じことが起こります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -最後に、環境を -\family sans -標準 -\family default -にリセットしました。この例でわかるように、階層番号は、LyXが -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -と -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境でどの型のラベルを使うかには対応していません。 -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境の場合は、他の -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -環境が外側にいくつあるかに依存してラベルが選ばれます。このルールは -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -環境にも当てはまります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -例4： 極端な例 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -ここではおたくと化してみましょう。他の例のように何段階にも入れ子にはしませんし、詳細に作り方の説明はしません（第1階層： -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -） -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -（ -\family sans -Return -\family default -、 -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - -\family default -、 -\family sans -標準 -\family default -：第2階層）この例をどのように作ったかは、要約した説明を括弧の中に入れてどこかに置いておくことに留めることにします。例えば、この段落では2つのキー割り当ては、階 -層の変更のしかたを示し、環境名は、現在の環境の名前を示しています。その前か後に階層を示すことにします。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -（ -\family sans -Return, 箇条書き（連番） -\family default -：第1階層）ここはリスト中、第2の項目です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Verse -ここにわれらは詩句を入れん。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -詩作はますますひどくなるであらう。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -（ -\family sans -Return -\family default -、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -、 -\family sans -詩句 -\family default -：第2階層） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -ぎこぎこ　ぎぃ、　ぎこぎこ　ぐぅ。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -びびで　ばびで　ぶぅ！ -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -（ -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Verse -そして表を入れましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -魚が一匹 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -魚が二匹 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -赤魚 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -青魚 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Verse -（ -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -、 -\family sans -表 -\family default -、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -を3回、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - -、 -\family sans -詩句 -\family default -、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Enumerate -（ -\family sans -Return -\family default -、 -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -：第1階層）ここは第3の項目です。上では、 -\family sans -表 -\family default -を選んだときに入れ子の階層が第1階層にリセットされてしまうので、入れ子の階層を3段階下げて、表を -\family sans -詩句 -\family default -環境に入れたことに注意して下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -ここで -\family sans -箇条書き（連番） -\family default -を終了して -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -へ変更しました。まだ第1階層のままです。これから、環境を複合的に使うことでできることをいくつかお見せしたいと思います。以下の各段落は「引用書簡」です。この段落の -中に、 -\family sans -住所 -\family default -と -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -を両方入れ子にして、書簡の本体には、入れ子にした別の -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -環境を使います。階層を保持するためには -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "break-paragraph inverse" -\end_inset - -を使うことにします。 -\family sans -住所 -\family default -と -\family sans -右寄せ住所 -\family default -環境の中に複数の行を入れるには、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -を使う必要があることを忘れないで下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Right Address -1234 Nowhere Rd. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Moosegroin, MT 00100 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -9-6-96 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -フィツルヴィッツ様 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -不慮の事故のために、ご注文頂いた圧縮メタンガス50リットルを期日中にお届けできないことをお許し下さい。不幸にして、我が社の牛が数匹、まったく不可思議なことに爆発 -してしまったため、メタンの注文処理に時間を要しております。お名前を出荷待ちリストに登録しておりますので、できるかぎり早くお届け致したく思っております。ご迷惑をお -掛けしてたいへん申し訳ありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -お詫びに、今回特別に牛肉を特別価格で販売致しております。お入り用の際は、同封の注文用紙に御記入の上、小切手とともにお送りください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation -最後に、ご迷惑をお掛けしておりますことを深くお詫びいたします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Address -敬具 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -ビル・ヘック -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Quotation -これで例を終わります！ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以上から、LyXで環境の入れ子を使えば、たった数キーで、さまざまなことができるのがおわかりいただけると思います。 -\family sans -引用（字下げあり） -\family default -や -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -環境の中に -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -をいれたり、 -\family sans -箇条書き（記号） -\family default -の中に -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -を入れることも簡単にできます。膨大な選択肢を自由にお使いいただけるのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -余白取りとページ付けおよび改行 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -よはくどり@余白取り -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -空白とは何でしょうか。通常のワードプロセッサでは、二つの単語を分離したいと思ったときには、いつでもスペースキーを押すことに慣れてしまったかもしれませんが、LyX -はもっと多様な空白を提供します。すなわち、さまざまな幅の空白と、行末で分割可能な空白および分割不可能な空白です。以下の各節では、これらの空白が有用な例をお見せし -ましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -保護された空白 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:保護された空白" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くうはく@空白!ほごされた@保護された------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -保護された空白とは。LyX（およびLaTeX）に、行をこの場所で分割しないように指示するために用いられます。これは、次のような「ツイていない」改行を避けるのに必 -要になることがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -詳細な説明は、英文文書の -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -Section -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:書誌情報" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -明らかに、「Section」と「 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:書誌情報" - -\end_inset - -」のあいだに保護された空白を挿入した方がよいでしょう。保護された空白は、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -保護された空白 -\family default -（短絡キーは -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - - -\family default -）で挿入することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -水平方向の空白 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:水平方向の空白" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くうはく@空白!すいへいほうこうの@水平方向の------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -水平方向の空白は、すべて -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -水平方向の空白 -\family default -メニューで挿入することができます。長さの単位の一覧が、付録 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" - -\end_inset - -にあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -単語間の空白 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:単語間の空白" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くうはく@空白!たんごかんの@単語間の------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -言語によっては（例えば英語）、文末の句読点の後に、少し広い空白を入れる印刷上の慣習があり、LyXはこのような慣習を遵守します（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:略語" - -\end_inset - -節を参照）。しかしながら、ときによっては、このような場合にも通常の空白がほしい場合があるでしょう。その場合には、単語間の空白を挿入してください（短絡キーは -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "space-insert normal" -\end_inset - - -\family default -）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -小空白 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:小空白" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くうはく@空白!しょう@小------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -「小空白（thin space）」は、通常の空白の半分の大きさを持つ空白です（そして同時に「保護されて」います）。多くの言語において、例えば略語内部でのように、 -通常の空白では広すぎる場合に小空白を用いることが、印刷上の慣習として推奨されています。例えば、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -D. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -E. - Knuthは、我々の愛する組版プログラムを開発しました。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -のような場合や、数値と単位の間の空白などです。次の例を比較してください。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -10 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -kg（小空白） -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -10 kg（通常の空白） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -小空白は、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -小空白 -\family default -メニュー（短絡キーは -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "space-insert thin" -\end_inset - -）で挿入できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -その他の空白 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -さらに、以下のような型の空白が使用できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -負の小空白 この行は、矢印の間に負の小空白 -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - -を含んでいます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -8分の1空白（enspace; -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em） この行は、矢印の間に8分の1空白（0.5em） -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \enskip{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - -を含んでいます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -4分の1空白（quad; -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em） この行は、矢印の間に4分の1空白（1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em） -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \quad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - -を含んでいます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -2分の1空白（qquad; -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em） この行は、矢印の間に2分の1空白（2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em） -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \qquad{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - -を含んでいます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ユーザ設定の空白 この行は、矢印の間に2センチの空白 -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hspace{} -\length 2cm -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - -を含んでいます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:空白の幅" - -\end_inset - -に各空白の大きさを整理しておきます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:空白の幅" - -\end_inset - -水平方向の各空白の幅 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -空白の種類 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -幅 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -通常 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -保護された空白 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/3 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -小空白 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -負の小空白 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout --1/6 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -8分の1空白（0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -0.5 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -4分の1空白（1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2分の1空白（2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -水平フィル -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くうはく@空白!ふぃる@フィル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -水平フィル（HFill）は、統一された方法で空白を追加する特別な機能です。水平フィルは、左余白と右余白の間に残されている空白部分とつねに等しい長さの、可変式の空 -白を生成します。もし2つ以上の水平フィルを同一行に入れると、残されている余白を各水平フィルで均等に分割します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -水平フィルでできる例をいくつか示しましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -ここは左側にあります -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -ここは右側にあります -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -å·¦ -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -中央 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -右 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quote -\noindent -å·¦ -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -左から3分の1 -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -右 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以上は、 -\family sans -引用（字下げなし） -\family default -環境での例でした。これ -\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ -\end_inset - -は、標準段落の中での例です。印刷した取扱説明書でははっきりと分からないかもしれませんが、2つの矢印の -\emph on -間に -\emph default -水平フィルが挿入されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -空白ダイアログでフィルパターンを選ぶと、水平フィルを見えるようにすることができます。使用できるパターンは以下のとおりです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -点線： -\begin_inset space \dotfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -目盛： -\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -左矢印： -\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -右矢印： -\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上括弧： -\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -下括弧： -\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -備考：もし水平フィルが行頭にあり、しかも段落の1行目ではない場合、LyXはそれを無視します。これは、水平フィルが間違って新規行に折り返すことを防ぐためです。この -ような場合に、どうしても空白を入れたい場合には、空白ダイアログで -\family sans -保護 -\family default -オプションを選択してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -埋め草 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:埋め草" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くうはく@空白!うめくさ@埋め草 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ときには、あるフレーズと同じ長さの空白がほしい場合があるでしょう。例えば、次のような三択問題を作りたいと思うかもしれません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -正しい英語は次のどれですか? -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge would have been jumps the gun. -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mr. - Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -has to be jumped -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Mr. - Edge -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -jumps -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -すると、選択肢は「Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -」というフレーズの直後に表示されます。このようにするには、メニュー -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -埋め草 -\family default -で挿入される埋め草差込枠を使用します。この例では、最後の2行の最初に水平埋め草を挿入し、埋め草差込枠に「Mr. -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Edge -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -」と挿入します（「Edge」の後に空白があることに注意）。埋め草差込枠は、その内容と同じ空白のみを（場所取りとして）出力します。これが「埋め草」の名の由来です。 -通常の埋め草は、内容と同じ幅と高さの空白を出力し、水平埋め草や垂直埋め草は、その方向の空白のみを出力します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -垂直方向の空白 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:垂直方向の空白" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くうはく@空白!すいちょくほうこうの@垂直方向の------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落の前後に空白を追加するには、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -垂直方向の空白 -\family default -ダイアログを使って下さい。そこでは以下のような各寸法が利用可能です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -小スキップ -\family default -・ -\family sans -中スキップ -\family default -・ -\family sans -大スキップ -\family default -は、文書のフォント寸法に依存したLaTeX寸法です。 -\family sans -既定のスキップ -\family default -は、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログ -\family sans -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Text -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Layout -\family default -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@ -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -で段落の分離用に指定したスキップの大きさです。もし段落の区切りに字下げを使用していれば、 -\family sans -既定のスキップ -\family default -は -\family sans -中スキップ -\family default -と同じです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -垂直フィル -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -くうはく@空白!ふぃる@フィル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -は、1ページの中で空白が最大になるように設定される可変空白です。例えば、1ページ内に2つだけ短い段落があり、間に垂直フィルがあるとしましょう。すると、段落間の空 -白は最大化されるように調整されるので、第1段落はページの最上部に配置され、第2段落は最下部に配置されます。 -\family sans -垂直フィル -\family default -は、 -\family sans -水平フィル -\family default -と同様の動作をするのです -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -水平フィル -\family default -については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:水平方向の空白" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられています。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。1ページ内に残っている垂直方向の余白を空白で埋めるのです。複数の -\family sans -垂直フィル -\family default -が同一ページ内にある場合には、それらの垂直フィル間に余白が均等に配分されます。ですから -\family sans -垂直フィル -\family default -は、文章をページの中央に配置したり、あるいはページの上から2/3の所に配置したりするのに用いることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -ユーザ設定 -\family default -は、付録 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" - -\end_inset - -にある単位で指定された任意の長さの空白です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -備考：もし水平フィルが、出力されたページの先頭や最後にきてしまう場合、 -\family sans -保護 -\family default -オプションが選択されているときのみ、空白が出力されます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -段落の配置 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落の配置は、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -段落設定 -\family default -ダイアログで変更することができます。選択肢は5つあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -両端揃え -\family default -（短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align block" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -左揃え -\family default -（短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align left" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -右揃え -\family default -（短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align right" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -中央揃え -\family default -（短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align center" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -既定値 -\family default -（短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "paragraph-params \\align default" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ほとんどの場合、既定値は -\family sans -両端揃え -\family default -です。この場合、単語間の空白の長さは、段落の各行がちょうど左余白から右余白までの領域を埋めるように自動調整されます。他の3つの配置は、ほぼ自明ですが以下のように -なります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align right -この段落は右揃えで、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -この段落は中央揃え、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align left -この段落は左揃えです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -強制改頁 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -かいぺーじ@ -\family default -\series default -\shape default -\size default -\emph default -\bar default -\noun default -\color inherit -改頁!きょうせい@強制------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:強制改頁" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もしLaTeXが決定する改頁の位置が気に入らなければ、希望の箇所で強制的に改頁することができます。たいていLaTeXの改頁は適切なので、これが必要になることは通 -常はありません。ただし、 -\family sans -フロート -\family default -を多用しすぎた場合に限っては、LaTeXの改頁アルゴリズムがうまく行かないことがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -強制改頁は、文章を書き終わって、プレビューで -\emph on -ほんとうに -\emph default -改頁を変更する必要があることを確認するまでは、行なわないことをお勧めします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -改頁には2つの種類があります。一つは、特定の動作をすることなく頁を終えるものです。これは、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -新規頁 -\family default -メニューを使って、段落の前または後に挿入することができます。 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -改頁 -\family default -メニューを使って挿入することができる、もう一つ型は、ページの内容をページ全体を埋めるように引き延ばしてから頁を終えるものです。この型は、改頁によって最後の二三行 -だけが足らない頁ができてしまうときに巨大な空白ができるのを避けられるので、便利です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -図や表が、確実に頁の一番上にくるようにするために改頁を使おうと思うかもしれませんが、これは明らかに間違った方法です。LyXには、図表の前後に何が来ようとも、頁の -一番上（あるいは一番下や独立した頁）に、図表を確実に自動配置する方法があるのです。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:フロートと注釈" - -\end_inset - -章の -\family sans -フロート -\family default -に関する部分をご参照下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -改段改頁 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:改段改頁" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かいぺーじ@改頁!かいだん@改段 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -改頁をした後の内容が、次頁からすぐ始まる強制改頁のようでなく、改頁をすると同時に頁を改段することができます。改段するとはつまり、現在の段落を終了すると同時に、そ -の後にここまでの全てのフロートを、まだ処理されていないものを含めて、また必要ならば頁を追加して、すべて出力することをいいます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -改段改頁は、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -改段改頁 -\family default -メニューで挿入することができます。bookのような両面文書の場合に、改段改頁を挿入すると同時に、次の頁が右頁（奇数頁）から始まるように、必要に応じて頁を追加する -ようにするためには、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -改段改丁 -\family default -メニューを使うとよいでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -強制改行 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かいぎょう@改行 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:強制改行" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -改頁と同様に、改行にも2つの種類があります。一つは単純に行を代えるものです。 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形なし改行 -\family default -を選択するか、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -を押すと、段落内でこの改行を強制することができます。もう一つの種類は、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -両端揃え改行 -\family default -メニューから挿入できるもので、 -\lang english -or with -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert linebreak" -\end_inset - -改行すると同時に、その行を頁余白の間の空間をちょうど埋めるように伸長させます。これは、改行によって生み出されてしまう余白によって、両端揃えの段落に「へり」ができ -てしまうのを避けるために必要なのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXの改行はひじょうによくできているので、LaTeXの改行を正そうと強制改行を使うのは止めた方がよいでしょう。しかしながら、詩や住所などのように、改行を多 -用設定することが必要であるような状況は多く存在します（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:引用" - -\end_inset - -節・第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:詩句" - -\end_inset - -節・第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:住所の使い方" - -\end_inset - -節をご参照ください）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -水平線 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:水平線" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すいへいせん@水平線 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -水平線 -\family default -のダイアログで水平線を挿入することができます。オフセットは、線と現在の本文行あるいは段落のベースラインとの間の垂直距離です。水平線の設定は、線上で左クリックをす -れば変更することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent -\begin_inset CommandInset line -LatexCommand rule -offset "0.5ex" -width "100line%" -height "1pt" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -文字と記号 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -お使いのキーボードから入力することのできる全ての文字は、直接入力することができます。また、例えばフランス語に必要な文字を英語キーボードで入力することができるよう -に、特別なキーボード配置表を使用することもできます。これを実現するための情報は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:キーボード配置表" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -お使いのキーボードにない文字が必要な場合には、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -特殊文字\SpecialChar \menuseparator -記号 -\family default -メニューから -\family sans -記号 -\family default -ダイアログを使用してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -LyX設定で特定の画面フォントを使用している場合、記号ダイアログで挿入した文字がうまく表示できないことがあります。しかし出力においては、どんな場合も、挿入した記 -号は正しく表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -フォントと文字形式 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:フォントと文字形式" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -フォントの種類 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぉんと@フォント ! のしゅるい@------ の種類 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フォントには二つの種類があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ベクターフォント -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぉんと@フォント ! べくたー@ベクター ------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - は、フォント内の単一グリフ（すなわち文字）の輪郭（アウトライン）から生成されたフォントです。各グリフは、要求のあったどんなフォント寸法にもうまく伸縮することが -できるような、数学的に定義された曲線で定義されています。この数学による定義は、フォント解析器によって解釈され、寸法やグリフに応じて曲線部分がピクセルで埋め尽くさ -れます。これによって、輪郭フォントは、全ての寸法においてたいへん美しい出力を得ることができます。ひじょうに小さい寸法においては、よいイメージを得るためには各ピク -セルがたいへん注意深く計算されなくてはならないので、そのようなひじょうに小さい寸法においてだけは、よいレンダリング（解析結果）を得ることは難しいかもしれません。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -すると、一つのフォント寸法のみを定義して、それを伸縮するだけでいいと思われるかもしれませんが、よい品質を得るために、多くのフォントはいくつかのフォント寸法を定義 -しています。大きいフォントにおいては、小さいフォントよりも細部の情報を必要とするので、これによって出力を改善することができます。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -TrueType -\family default -・ -\family typewriter -OpenType -\family default -・ -\family typewriter -Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1 -\family default -といった種類のフォントが、ベクターフォントになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ビットマップフォント -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぉんと@フォント ! びっとまっぷ@ビットマップ ------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - は、反対に最初からビットマップ画像として定義されているので、定義されている寸法に対しては、すべてよい出力を得ることができます。しかしながら、グリフを伸長しよう -と思うと、一ピクセルが数ピクセル分に拡大されてしまうので、ビットマップフォントは伸長に対しては強くありません。これは、画像編集プログラムで、画像を拡大しようとし -たときに起こるのと同じ現象です。この現象を軽減するために、ビットマップフォントは通常、8ピクセルあたりから34ピクセル程度まで段階的に、必要に応じていくつかの固 -定寸法で提供されています。ビットマップフォントの利点は、各グリフを表示するのに複雑な計算を必要としないので、伸縮可能フォントよりも表示速度が速い点です。欠点は、 -フォントに固定寸法がない大きさでは、ピクセルを等倍して拡大表示しなくてはならないので、表示が汚くなる点です。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -ビットマップフォントは、PostScript文書やPDF文書では、 -\family typewriter -Type -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -3 -\family default -という名前がついています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらのことから、指定した大きさがフォント寸法として用意されている場合にはビットマップフォントが最適ですが、ほとんどすべての大きさに対して良好な結果をもたらすの -は、伸縮可能フォントであることが分かります。伸縮可能フォントでは、少数のフォント寸法に対して定義が必要となるだけです。ほとんどすべてのテキスト表示プログラム・組 -版プログラムが、伸縮可能フォントを用いているのはそのためです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF文書でどのフォントが用いられているかを確かめるためには、文書特性を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -最近の組版言語やマークアップ言語の多くでは、特定のフォントを指定するよりも文字形式を指定するようになってきています。例えば文章を強調するのに、現在のフォントのイ -タリック体版に変更する代わりに、「強調形式」を用います。この考え方は、LyXに完璧に適合しています。なぜなら、LyXでは組版の微細な点に焦点を合わせるのではなく -、文脈に基づいて操作を行うからです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaTeXフォントサポート -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -伝統的に、LaTeXは固有のフォントを使用します。つまり、お使いの基本ソフトウェアに導入されているフォントに直接アクセスすることはできず、LaTeX頒布版が提供 -する特定のフォントを使用する必要があります。これは、LaTeXではフォントに関する追加的な情報が必要とされるため、これらを追加的なファイルやパッケージとして提供 -する必要があるためです。この方法の欠点は、通常のワードプロセッサに較べて、フォントの選択肢がある程度制限されてしまうことです。その一方で、提供されているフォント -は一般的に非常に高品質であり、システムが異なってもLaTeXファイルを容易に移転できるという利点が付いてきます。また一方で、伝統的なLaTeXでサポートされてい -るフォントの範囲は大幅に増加し、多くの有償無償のフォントを扱うパッケージが存在します。LyXのユーザーインタフェースからは、これらの一部しか直接選択することがで -きません（詳細は第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文書フォント" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください）。しかしながら、他のフォントも文書プリアンブルにLaTeXコードを入力すれば、すべて使用することができます（使用したいフォントの取扱説明書を参 -照してください）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -さらに最近の発展により、お使いの基本ソフトウェア（OS）に導入されているフォントに直接アクセスすることのできる、XeTeXやLuaTeXのような新しいLaTeX -エンジンももたらされています。これらのエンジンも、LyXは現在サポートしています。これらを使えば、理論的には、システムに導入されているすべてのOpenType・ -TrueTypeフォントを使用することができます。次節で、これらのOSフォントの使用法を説明します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -実際には、粗悪なメトリックや、フォントが持つ他の欠損によって使えないフォントもあります。したがって、まずは試験してみる必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -XeTeXと特にLuaTeXは、比較的新しいので、伝統的なLaTeXやPDFLaTeXほどは成熟していません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文書フォントとフォント寸法 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:文書フォント" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぉんと@フォント ! すんぽう@------ 寸法 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書フォントは、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ダイアログで設定することができます。ダイアログの -\family sans -フォント -\family default -セクションでは、3つのフォント族 — ローマン（セリフ）体・ -\family sans -サンセリフ -\family default -体・ -\family typewriter -タイプライタ -\family default -（等幅）体 — に使用するフォントを指定することができ、サンセリフ体・タイプライタ体フォントをローマン体フォントと合わせる必要があるときのための縮尺因子と、ベー -スフォント寸法を指定することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -非T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eXフォントを使用 -\family default -を有効にすると、ご使用の基本ソフトウェアに導入されているフォントにアクセスすることができるようになります。このためには、出力書式として、 -\family sans -PDF (XeT -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eX) -\family default -か -\family sans -PDF (LuaT -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eX) -\family default -、 -\family sans -DVI (LuaT -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eX) -\family default -を使用する必要があるため、XeTeXかLuaTeXが導入済でなくてはなりません（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" - -\end_inset - -節参照）。この際、TeX自身のフォント（後述）にはアクセスできなくなります。LyXはフォント族を同定することができないので、利用可能なフォントすべてが、ローマン -体・セリフ体・タイプライタ体の3つのリストすべてに列挙されてしまっていることに注意してください。また、リスト中のフォントの一部には、フォントのエンコーディングや -フォントの瑕疵のせいで、出力を失敗させてしまうものがあるかもしれません。これも、LyXは事前に同定することができないので、ユーザーが試験してみる必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フォントの選択肢としては、 -\family sans -既定値 -\family default -とお使いのシステムで利用可能なフォントの一覧が表示されます。 -\family sans -既定値 -\family default -は、「 -\family typewriter -Computer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -」（ -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -）または「 -\family typewriter -European Computer Modern -\family default -」（ -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -）と呼ばれる TeXの標準フォントを使います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -や -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -はビットマップフォントですので、PDF出力では、とりわけ拡大して読むときに、出力のぎざぎざがめだつことがよくあります -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family typewriter -Adobe -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Reader -\family default -第6版以降でPDFを読むようにすれば、特別なビットマップフォントレンダラーを備えているので、この問題は発生しません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。ぎざぎざフォントをなくすには、ベクターフォントを用いなくてはなりません。以下の3つの方法がありますので、いずれかを選択してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -フォントを使用する方法。これは、 -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -や -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -の外見を維持したい場合に推奨される方法です。 -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -フォントは、LaTeXコミュニティにおいて、 -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -に代わる既定フォントとするべく開発されたものです。これは、非常に広い範囲のグリフと複数のフォント形を含んでおり、外観の改善された若干の細部を除き、 -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -は、ほとんどの場合 -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -と同一の外観を持ちます。 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -One difference is improved kerning。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -AE -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(Almost -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -European) -\family default -を使用する方法。これは、 -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -フォントが使用できないか、うまく動作しない（稀な）ケースにおいて、 -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -や -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -の外見をエミュレートしたいときに選択してください。 -\family typewriter -AE -\family default -は仮想フォントです。仮想というのは、これが他のフォントから -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -輪郭グリフを「拝借」してくるからです。これには、フランス語のギュメ（「«」や「»」）をはじめとするいくつかの文字が欠落していること -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeXパッケージの -\series bold -aeguill -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! aeguill -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -をプリアンブル行で -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\backslash -usepackage[ec]{aeguill} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -として読み込むと、ギュメの問題は解消されます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -や、アクセント付き文字が -\emph on -一つの -\emph default -グリフではなく、アクセントと文字との -\emph on -二 -\emph default -文字から構築されるという欠点があります。したがって、 -\family typewriter -AE -\family default -フォントを用いた文書では、アクセント付き文字を含む単語を検索することはできません。例えば、仮にPDFで「brève」という仏単語を検索したとしても、PDFビュー -アは「è」というグリフを検索するのであって、「 e + -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -` 」というグリフを検索するわけではないので、検索結果としては何も得られないでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family typewriter -cm -\family default -や -\family typewriter -ec -\family default -の外見を好まない場合には、 -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default -や -\family sans -Palatino -\family default -のような、提供されている他のベクターフォントを選択することももちろんできます。ほとんどのローマン体ベクターフォントは、対応するサンセリフ体やタイプライタ体フォン -トを自動的に選択しますが -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、ときに単に他のフォントを対応させることもあれば（ -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default -は、 -\family sans -Helvetica -\family default -をサンセリフ体の文章に使用します）、 -\family sans -Latin -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -や -\family sans -Computer -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Modern -\family default -のように、同じフォントの他の形、すなわち真のフォント -\emph on -族 -\emph default -を対応させることもあります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -、自分自身で指定することもできます。ローマン体・ -\family sans -サンセリフ -\family default -体・ -\family sans -タイプライタ -\family default -体の違いは、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文字微調整" - -\end_inset - -節で述べられています。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default -フォントは、元々新聞用にデザインされたものです。したがって、狭い新聞の列幅に納まるように、そのグリフは他のフォントのグリフよりも小さくなっています。そのため、 -\family sans -Times -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Roman -\family default -は書籍のような大規模な文書には適していません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フォント寸法としては、一般的に -\family sans -既定値 -\family default -・ -\family sans -10 -\family default -・ -\family sans -11 -\family default -・ -\family sans -12 -\family default -の4つの値が使用可能です。クラスによっては、他の寸法を提供しているものもあります。 -\family sans -既定値 -\family default -の寸法は使用するクラスに依存します。標準的なクラスでは、これはフォント寸法10になっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このフォント寸法は、 -\emph on -基本寸法 -\emph default -を指しています。LyXは、この寸法を基準に、（脚注や上付き・下付き文字などの）他のすべてのフォント寸法を決めます。必要ならば、文章部分のフォント寸法は、 -\family sans -文字形式 -\family default -ダイアログで微調整することができます。文章部分で使うことができるフォント寸法は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文字微調整" - -\end_inset - -節に述べてあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -既定のフォント族 -\family default -では、文書の基本フォントをローマン体にするのか、サンセリフ体にするのか、あるいはタイプライタ体にするのかを指定することができます。これを -\family sans -既定値 -\family default -にすると、クラスの事前設定値を使用し、他のものを選択するとこれを上書きします。ほとんどの場合、 -\family sans -既定値 -\family default -は -\family sans -ローマン体 -\family default -ですが、（プレゼンテーションクラスなどの）クラスのうちには他の既定値を使用するものもあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eXフォントエンコーディング -\family default -は、熟練者用の設定項目であり、これによってLaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -fontenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! fontenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -に渡す値を変更することができます(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-設定" - -\end_inset - -節も参照のこと)。通常、これを変更する必要は（理解する必要も）ありません。特別な理由がない限り、 -\family sans -既定値 -\family default -を使用してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フォントによっては、 -\family sans -旧様式数字を使う -\family default -と -\family sans -真性スモールキャップ体を使う -\family default -のチェックボックスが有効になっていることがあります。これは、一部のフォントが提供する追加機能です。もし -\family sans -旧様式数字を使う -\family default -にチェックを付けると、フォントは旧様式数字(中世数字やテキスト数字とも呼ばれます)、すなわち小文字とうまくマッチするような、多様な高さを持つ数字を使用します。 -\family sans -真性スモールキャップ体を使う -\family default -を指定すると、大文字を縮小した疑似スモールキャップ体ではなく、真のスモールキャップ体を使用します。真のスモールキャップ体は、熟練者用フォントセットにはよく含まれ -ています。これらは、疑似スモールキャップ体よりも見栄えがよいですが、一方お金を払って購入しなくてはなりません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -CJK -\family default -フィールドでは、日中韓言語ユーザーが文字を表示するのに使用するフォントを指定することができます。 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -このフォントは、 -\series bold -CJK -\series default - LaTeXパッケージのコマンドに対する引数になります。したがって、 -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を使用しない -\family sans -日本語 -\family default -文書言語に対しては、影響をもちません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -備考：新しくフォントやフォント寸法を選んでも、LyXの画面上のフォントは変化 -\emph on -しません -\emph default -。印字出力をして初めて、変化がわかるようになっています。これはWYSIWYMの考え方の一部なのです。LyXの画面フォントは、 -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログで調整することができます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:画面フォント" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -異なる文字形式を使う -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -もじけいしき@文字形式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -もじけいしき@文字形式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -すでに見たように、LyXは、ある特定の段落環境では自動的に文字形式を変更します。LyXは、 -\family sans -強調 -\family default -と -\family sans -名詞 -\family default -の2つの文字形式をサポートしています。これらは、キー割り当て・メニュー・ツールバーのいずれかを使って有効にすることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -名詞 -\family default -形式を有効にするには、以下のいずれかを行ってください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - -をクリックする -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - -を使う -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらのコマンドは、すべて入切切り替えになっています。つまり、 -\family sans -名詞 -\family default -形式がすでに有効になっている場合に、これらのコマンドを使うと、 -\family sans -名詞 -\family default -形式は無効になります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -一般に -\family sans -名詞 -\family default -形式は、固有の人名を表記するのに使われます。例えば、 -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - - -\noun on -Matthias Ettrich -\noun default - is the original author of LyX. -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -のように用います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これよりもよく使われる文字形式は、 -\family sans -強調 -\family default -形式です。 -\family sans -強調 -\family default -形式を有効にする（または無効にする - これも入切切り替えです）には、以下のようにしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - -をクリックする -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - -を使う -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -通常、 -\family sans -強調 -\family default -形式は、イタリック体（日本語ではゴシック体）と同じですが、文書クラスやLaTeXパッケージによっては、別のフォントが用いられることもあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この文書のいたるところで、すでに -\family sans -強調 -\family default -形式を使ってきましたが、もう一つ例を挙げておきます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation - -\emph on -Don't overuse character styles! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Quotation - -\emph on -文字形式を濫用してはいけません! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これは例であると同時に、文字通りの警告でもあります。文章は日常会話と同じように考えられなくてはなりません。お互いにつねに叫びあって話をしないように、文字形式をつ -ねに濫用するような傾向は避けなくてはなりません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -既定フォントに戻すには、キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-default" -\end_inset - -を用いるか、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文字形式\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\family default -\lang japanese - ( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -)ダイアログを使えば、いつでも戻せます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文字形式ダイアログを使った微調整 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:文字微調整" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -もじけいしき@文字形式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -なにか微調整を行わなくてはならない状況はつねに起こり得ますので、LyXは特製文字形式を作る方法を備えています。例えば、学術雑誌や企業によっては、特定の状況ではサ -ンセリフフォントを使うように要求する書式を指定しているかもしれませんし、ある作家は、登場人物の心の声を通常の会話と区別するために、別のフォントを用いるようにして -いるかもしれません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -特製文字形式について説明を残すにあたって、いま一度、注意を促しておきたいと思います------文字形式は濫用しないでください！ -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -様々なフォントやフォント寸法を多用した文書は、けっして読みやすくなく、誰かが大穴を打ち込んだかのように見えるものです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -特製文字形式を使用するには、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文字形式\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ユーザ設定 -\family default -ダイアログを開くかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -を押してください。このダイアログには、各フォント特性を選択できるようにいくつかのボックスがあります。これらの特性について選択肢を選ぶか、現在の特性を維持したい項 -目については -\family sans -変更なし -\family default -を選択してください。 -\family sans -リセット -\family default -を選ぶと、その特性を既定値に戻します。これは、複数の段落環境にわたる属性を一度にリセットするのにも使用することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フォント特性と、各フォント特性の( -\family sans -変更なし -\family default -と -\family sans -リセット -\family default -以外の）選択肢は以下の通りです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -フォント族 -\family default - フォントの「概観」です。選択肢は -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -ローマン体 -\family default - This is the Roman font family.　これがローマン・フォント族です。 通常はセリフフォントです。またこれが既定のフォント族になっていま -す。（キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-roman" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -サンセリフ体 -\family default - -\family sans -This is the Sans Serif font family. - -\family default - これがサンセリフ・フォント族です。（キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-sans" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -タイプライタ体 -\family default - -\family typewriter -This is the Typewriter font family. - -\family default - これがタイプライタ・フォント族です。（キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-typewriter" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -太さ -\family default - これは印字の太さに対応しています。選択肢は -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -ミディアム体 -\family default - This is the Medium font series. - これがミディアム体の太さです。これが既定の太さです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -ボールド体 -\family default - -\series bold -This is the Bold font series. - これがボールド体の太さです。（ -\series default -キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-bold" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -字形 -\family default - 名の示す通りです。選択肢は -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -アップライト体 -\family default - This is the Upright font shape. - これがアップライト体の字形です。またこれが既定の字形になっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -イタリック体 -\family default -\shape italic -This -\shape default - -\family sans -\shape italic -i -\family default -s the Italic font shape -\shape default -\emph on -. - これがイタリック体の字形です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -斜体 -\family default - -\shape slanted -This is the Slanted font shape. - -\shape default -（LyXの画面では 同じに見えるかもしれませんが、イタリック体ではありません。） -\shape slanted -これが斜体の字形です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -スモールキャップ体 -\family default - -\shape smallcaps -This is the Small caps font shape -\shape default -\noun on -.　これがスモールキャップ体の字形です。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -色 -\family default - このスイッチで文字色を調整することができます。ただし、すべてのDVIビューアがカラーを表示できるわけではないことに注意してください。 -\lang english -Besides -\family sans -No -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -color -\family default -, which means that the document default color set in -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Color -\family default - for -\family sans -Main -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -text -\family default - is used, you can choose between -\family sans -Black -\family default -, -\family sans -White -\family default -, -\family sans -Red -\family default -, -\family sans -Green -\family default -, -\family sans -Blue -\family default -, -\family sans -Cyan -\family default -, -\family sans -Magenta -\family default - and -\family sans -Yellow -\family default - text -\lang japanese -。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -からー@カラー ! てきすと@テキスト -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -言語 -\family default - これは、選択範囲の文章が、文書の言語とは異なることを指定するのに使います。このようにして指定された部分には青い下線が（LyX上でのみ）引かれて、言語が変更され -ていることを表示します。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -例えば、文書中に長いドイツ語指定のテキストを入れると、LaTeXは自動的にドイツ語のハイフネーション規則を遵守します。スペルチェックを行うときには(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:スペルチェック" - -\end_inset - -節参照)、ドイツ語にマークされたテキストは、ドイツ語辞書を使用して検査されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -寸法 -\family default - これはフォントの大きさを変更します。ここでは数値を指定するのではなく、選択可能な選択肢は、すべて文書フォント寸法に対する相対的な大きさになっています。ここでも -LyXに詳細な指定をわたすようにはなっておらず、何をしたいか一般的な意図をLyXに示すだけです。選択肢は以下の通りです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -最小 -\family default - -\size tiny -これは「最小（Tiny）」フォント寸法です。 -\size default -（キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size tiny" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -極小 -\family default - -\size scriptsize -これは「極小（Smallest）」フォント寸法です。 -\size default -（キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size scriptsize" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -小 -\family default - -\size footnotesize -これは「小（Smaller）」フォント寸法です。 -\size default -（キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size footnotesize" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -やや小 -\family default - -\size small -これは「やや小（Small）」フォント寸法です。 -\size default -（キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size small" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -ふつう -\family default - これは「ふつう（Normal）」フォント寸法です。既定のフォント寸法です。（キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size normal" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -やや大 -\family default - -\size large -これは「やや大（Large）」フォント寸法です。（ -\size default -キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size large" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -大 -\family default - -\size larger -これは「大（Larger）」フォント寸法です。 -\size large -（ -\size default -キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size larger" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -極大 -\family default - -\size largest -これは「極大（Largest）」フォント寸法です。 -\size large -（ -\size default -キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size largest" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -極々大 -\family default - -\size huge -これは「極々大（Huge）」フォント寸法です。 -\size large -（ -\size default -キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size huge" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -最大 -\family default - -\size giant -これは「最大（Huger）フォント寸法です。 -\size large -（ -\size default -キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-size giant" -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard - -\emph on -繰り返し -\emph default -念を押しますが、この機能は使いすぎないでください。フォント寸法を変更する必要はほとんど生じないはずです。LyXが、段落環境ごとに自動的にフォント寸法を変更します -ので、それを使うようにしてください。この機能は、微調整のためだけにあるにすぎません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -その他 -\family default - これはその他、文字レベルで変更可能なものです。選択肢は以下の通りです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_deeper -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -強調 -\family default - -\emph on -This is text with emphasize on. - これは強調された文章です。 -\emph default -これは -\shape italic -イタリック体 -\shape default -と同じように思われるかもしれませんが、実は意味するところが多少異なります。強調は、 -\emph on -論理 -\emph default -属性なのです。ですから、強調された文章に用いるフォントは、文書クラスがそれぞれに指定することができます。多くの場合は、このフォントはイタリックに指定されています -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -下線 -\family default - -\bar under -This is text with Underbar on. - これは下線を引いた文章です。 -\bar default -（キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-underline" -\end_inset - -） -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -ただし可能な限り下線を引くことは避けてください。下線は、フォントを変更することができなかったタイプライタ時代の遺物です。いまの時代にあっては、文章を強調するのに -下線を引かなくてはならない理由はありません。これがLyXに備えられているのは、学術誌の投稿規程として必要とされることがある -\emph on -かも -\emph default -しれないからです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -二重下線 -\family default - -\uuline on -This is text with Double underbar on. - これは二重線を引いた文章です。 -\uuline default -(キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-underunderline" -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -下線の使用について警告したことから、二重下線についての考えもお分かりでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -波下線 -\family default - -\uwave on -This is text with Wavy underbar on. - これは波下線を引いた文章です。 -\uwave default - (キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-underwave" -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -学術誌が絶対にこれを使わないといけないと主張している場合以外は、使用しないでください。酔い止め薬が必要ですな。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -取消線 -\family default - -\strikeout on -This is text with Strikeout on. - これは取消線を引いた文章です。 -\strikeout default - (キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-strikeout" -\end_inset - -) -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -これは、変更した文章の元の文章を示すためによく用いられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -名詞体 -\family default - -\noun on -This is text with Noun on. - これは名詞体の文章です。 -\family sans -\noun default -強調 -\family default -と同様、これも論理属性です。多くの場合、これは -\family sans -スモールキャップ体 -\family default -に指定されています。 -\end_layout - -\end_deeper -\begin_layout Standard -このように、膨大な組合わせの中から選択をすることができます。いったん -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文字形式\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\family default -\lang japanese -( -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - -) -\family sans -ユーザ設定 -\family default -ダイアログで新しい文字形式を選択すると、その設定は保存されます。それを有効にするには、ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "textstyle-apply" -\end_inset - -を押してください。このボタンを使えば、作成した特製文字形式の有効化・無効化を、ダイアログが見えないときでも切り替えることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文字形式を完全に既定の状態に戻すには、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "font-default" -\end_inset - -を用いてください。もし、たったいま変更したフォント属性だけを切り替えたい場合（例えば、字形は「斜体」に、太さは「ボールド体」に設定したところだとします）には、 -\family sans -全て切換にする -\family default -スイッチを有効にしてから -\family sans -適用 -\family default -ボタンを押してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、 -\family sans -セリフ -\family default -・ -\family sans -サンセリフ -\family default -・ -\family sans -タイプライタ -\family default -の三大フォント型の違いについても多少知っておく必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -タイプライタ体 -\family default -はいわゆる「等間隔」フォントで、すべての文字が同じ幅、例えば「i」と「m」が同じ幅を持ちます。例： -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -no -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -typewriter text タイプライタ体の -\family default - -\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -はない -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family typewriter -文章 -\family default - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -phantom（埋め草）について詳細は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:埋め草" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -no type writer text タイプライタ体ではない文章 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -セリフ体 -\family default -フォントは、セリフ付き文字を使用します。セリフとは、文字を形作る線のすべての端につける、小さな「付録」です。以下の例を見ると違いが分かるかと思います。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -text with serifs （セリフ付き文字） -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -text without serifs （セリフなし文字） -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -セリフがある方が、簡単に速く読む助けとなります。それゆえ、セリフ体が既定フォントとして用いられています（ -\family sans -ローマン体 -\family default -と呼称されます）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\family sans -サンセリフ体 -\family default -は、セリフのないフォントです。このフォント型は、それゆえ見出しや短い文によく用いられます。この文書では、サンセリフ体はメニュー名を強調するのに用いられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -「切換にする」とは、フォント特性を適用したり取り除いたりするようにすることを意味します。文字様式ダイアログで、ある特性を切換にマークした場合に、既にその特性を持 -つテキストに様式を適用すると、その特性が削除されることになります。例えば、現在B・C・F・Gのフォント特性を持つテキストに、A・B・Cの特性を持つ様式を適用する -ものとし、Bが切換で、Cが切換ではないものとすると、適用後の特性は、A・C・F・Gとなります。「常に非切換」と「常に切換」は、切換の挙動を制御しないことを意味し -ます。ダイアログ左側の特性(「フォント族」など)では、切換にするかどうかはあなた次第です。左側にある特性は、既定では切換ではありませんが、 -\family sans -全て切換にする -\family default -にチェックをつけると、その全てが切換になります。「リセット」は切換になることはありません。例えば、「太さ」を「リセット」にして -\family sans -全て切換にする -\family default -を選択してから、ボールド体の文章に様式を適用すると、何回様式を適用したとしても、文章は既定の太さ(「ミディアム体」)に戻ります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -最後にいま一度、同じ注意をして終わりたいと思います。フォントは多用しないでください。フォントを多用した文章は、よい文章になるどころか、不調和で粗悪な文章になるこ -との方がはるかに多いのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Description -訳注：和文の場合 -\series medium - -\series default -pLaTeX2eでは書体ファミリーとして明朝体とゴシック体の2種類しか標準では提供されていません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -印刷とプレビュー -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -概観 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXを使った文書作成の基本的な操作については、だいたい説明し終えたので、労作の印字出力のしかたについてお知りになりたいところでしょう。説明にあたって、まず舞台 -裏で何が行われているかを説明します。この件に関する詳しい情報は、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -』も参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、LaTeXというプログラムを裏方に使っています。LaTeXは、TeX組版システムのマクロパッケージにすぎないのですが、混乱を避けるために、まとめてLa -TeXと呼ぶことにします。LyXは、実際に書き物をするのに、あなたがお使いになるプログラムです。それを印刷可能な出力に変換する段になると、LyXはLaTeXを呼 -び出します。これには二段階を経る必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -まずLyXは、お使いの文書をLaTeX用のコマンド群に変換し、「 -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default -」という拡張子のついたファイルに保存します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -次に、LaTeXは -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default -ファイルにあるコマンドを読んで、印字可能な出力を作成します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -出力ファイル形式 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:出力ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -平文 (ASCII) -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Ascii@ASCII -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このファイル型の拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.txt -\family default -」です。この型は、お使いの文書を「アメリカ情報交換標準コード（ASCII）」の規則にそった平文として保存しています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -お使いの文書をASCIIに書き出すには、メニュー -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator -平文 -\family default -を用いるか。 -\lang english -However, this will not export any externally generated material such as - a BibTeX bibliography (section -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文献データベース" - -\end_inset - - -\lang english -). - If your document includes such material, use -\family sans -\lang japanese -ファイル -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し -\family sans -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -More -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formats -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -& -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Options -\family default - and then select -\lang japanese -平文 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii). -\lang english -This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating - thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to -\lang japanese -ASCII。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -LaTeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Latex@LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このファイル型の拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.tex -\family default -」で、LaTeXプログラムがお使いの文書を処理するのに必要なコマンドをすべて含んでいます。もしLaTeXをご存知であれば、このファイルをLaTeXエラーを見つけ -だすために用いることもできますし、コンソールからコマンドで手動で処理することもできます。LaTeXファイルは、使用中の文書をプレビューしたり書き出したりするとき -には、つねにLyXの作業ディレクトリ内に生成されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -お使いの文書をLaTeXファイルとして書き出すには、メニュー -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X -\family default -を使用します。その他の型のLaTeXへの書き出しは、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:書き出し" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -DVI -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Dvi@DVI -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このファイル型の拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.dvi -\family default -」です。このファイル型は「デバイス独立型」（DVI）と呼ばれ、ひじょうに高い可搬性を持っています。ひとつのコンピュータから他のコンピュータへ、何の変換も行うこと -なしに移動することができるのです。DVIは、プレビューや、PostScriptのような他の出力形式への中間形式として使用されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -DVIファイルは、画像を内部に保持してはおらず、画像にリンクを張るだけです。ですから、DVIと一緒に画像ファイルも持ち出すことを忘れないでください。DVIをスク -ロールする際には、DVIビューアは、画像を表示する前にバックグラウンドで変換しなくてはならないので、DVIを見る際にはコンピュータが遅くなるかもしれません。です -から、画像を多用したファイルの場合は、PDFを使用することをおすすめします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -お使いの文書をDVIファイルとして書き出すには、メニュー -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\family default -を使用するか -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default -を使用します。後者のオプションは、プログラム -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -を使用します。 -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -は、直接的なUnicodeサポートを提供し、直接フォントアクセスをサポートしたエンジンです（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" - -\end_inset - -節参照）。LuaTeXは、まだ進行中のプロジェクトですが、次世代標準TeXプロセッサに成長するやもしれません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PostScript -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Postscript@PostScript -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このファイル型の拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.ps -\family default -」です。PostScriptは、Adobe社によってプリンタ言語として開発されました。それゆえ、このファイル型には、プリンタがファイルを印刷するのに使うコマンド -が含まれています。PostScriptは「プログラミング言語」としても見ることができます。これを使って計算をすることもできますし、図表や画像を描くこともできます -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -この点について詳細をお知りになりたければ、LaTeXパッケージの -\series bold -pstricks -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! pstricks -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を見てみてください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。この能力ゆえ、PostScriptファイルはおうおうにしてPDFよりも大きくなります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PostScriptには、画像を「Encapsulated PostScript」（EPS、ファイル拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.eps -\family default -」）形式でのみ入れることができます。一方、LyXでは、既知の画像形式ならば何でも文書内に入れていいことになっていますので、LyXは、バックグラウンドで画像をEP -Sに変換してやらなくてはなりません。たとえば、文書中に50の画像があるならば、最初に文書の閲覧ないし書き出しを行う際、LyXは50回の画像変換を行わなくてはなら -ないのです。これは、LyXを使った仕事の流れを滞らせることになりかねません。もしPostScriptを利用することをお考えならば、画像を直接EPSとして挿入すれ -ば、この問題を回避することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -お使いの文書をPostScriptファイルとして書き出すためには、メニュー -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator -PostScript -\family default -を使用します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -PDF -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Pdf@PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Pdf@PDF -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このファイル型の拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.pdf -\family default -」です。「Portable Document Format（可搬文書形式）」（PDF）は、 -\family typewriter -Adobe -\family default -がPostScriptの派生として開発したものです。PDFは、PostScriptよりも圧縮されていて、少ないコマンドしか用いません。「可搬」の名の示す通り、P -DFはどのコンピュータでも処理することができ、印字もまったく同じように出力することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDFは、その中に画像を、PDF形式かあるいは「Joint Photographic Experts Group（写真専門家連合組織 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -訳注：ISOに設置された専門家会合の名称がそのままファイル形式に使われています。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -）」（JPG・ファイル拡張子「 -\family typewriter -.jpg -\family default -」または「 -\family typewriter -.jpeg -\family default -」）形式、または「Portable Network Graphics（可搬性ネットワーク画像ファイル）」（PNG・ファイル拡張子「 -\family typewriter -.png -\family default -」）形式のいずれかの形式で埋め込むことができます。LyXは、いずれにしても、任意の画像形式をバックグラウンドでこれらの形式に変換するので、どの画像形式でも使うこ -とができるようになっています。ただし、PostScriptの節で述べたように、画像変換は作業の流れを滞らせます。したがって、上に述べた３つの形式のいずれかの画像 -を使うことをおすすめします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -お使いの文書をPostScriptファイルとして書き出すには、 -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し -\family default -メニューを開いた後に以下の5つのいずれかを選択します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - これを選択すると、 -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default -プログラムによって、ファイルが直接PDFに変換されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - これを選択すると、 -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -プログラムによって、ファイルが直接PDFに変換されます。 -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -は、 -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -から派生したさらに新しいエンジンであり、同様にUnicodeの直接サポートを提供し、フォントへの直接アクセスをサポートします（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" - -\end_inset - -節参照）。LuaTeXは、まだ進行中のプロジェクトですが、次世代標準TeXプロセッサに成長するやもしれません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default - これを選択すると、 -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -プログラムによって、ファイルが直接PDFに変換されます。 -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -は、Unicodeの直接サポートを提供し、フォントへの直接アクセスをサポートする新しいエンジンです（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" - -\end_inset - -節参照）。これは、例えば縦書きの日本語など、様々なスクリプト体を組版するのに特に優れています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) -\family default - これを選択すると、お使いのファイルをバックグラウンドでDVIに変換したものを、 -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default -プログラムが2段階めでPDFに変換します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) -\family default - これを選択すると、お使いのファイルのPostScript版からPDFを作るのに -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default -プログラムが用いられます。このPostScript版は、途中段階として作られるDVI版を元に、 -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -プログラムが生成するものです。すなわち、この書き出しでは3回の変換を経ることになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default -は、PDF版が持ちうるすべての機能をサポートし、高速で、問題を起こさずに安定して動作しますので、 -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default -を使用することをおすすめします。複数の書体サポートを利用したり、特定のOpenTypeフォントを使用している場合には、 -\family typewriter -pdftex -\family default -ほど成熟してはいないことには留意しなくてはなりませんが、代わりに -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default -や -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X) -\family default -を用いた方が良いかもしれません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -XHTML -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Xhtml@XHTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\lang english -HTML -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このファイル形式は、拡張子「 -\family typewriter -.xhtml -\family default -」を持ち、ウェブブラウザでの閲覧に適したファイル形式です。このファイル自身には、画像類は含まれておらず、それらへのリンクしか含むことができないので、LyXがXH -TMLを生成する際には、適切なファイル形式の画像も同時に生成します。数式の出力に関しては、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -出力 -\family default -メニューで、出力形式を選ぶことができます。これについては、取扱説明書 -\emph on -『高度な機能篇』 -\emph default -の -\emph on -「XHTMLでの数式出力」 -\emph default -の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -XHTML出力は、未だ「発展途上」であり、全てのLyXの機能がサポートされているわけではありません。これに関しては、取扱説明書 -\emph on -『高度な機能篇』 -\emph default -の -\emph on -「LyXとインターネット網」 -\emph default -の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書をXHTMLファイルに出力するには、 -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LyXHTML -\family default -メニューを使用します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection - -\family typewriter -プレビュー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!ぷれびゅー@プレビュー -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -作成した文書の完成版—つまりすべての改頁が実際に行われ、脚注は正しく連番を振られ、その他諸々のことが完成しているもの—を画面で確認したい場合には、 -\family sans -表示 -\family default -メニューから -\family sans -表示 -\family default -を選ぶかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - -を押してください。すると、プレビュープログラムがポップアップして、事前に定義した既定の出力形式で出力が表示されます。これは、グローバルに設定もできます(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節参照)し、文書設定で文書ごとに変更することもできます(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:出力" - -\end_inset - -節参照)。他の出力形式は、 -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -他の形式 -\family default -かツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -で選ぶことができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書に変更を加えたときには、 -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -更新 -\family default -メニューか -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -更新(他の形式) -\family default -メニューを使えば、同じビューア内で出力を更新することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ファイルのプレビューをしている間は、出力ファイルはLyXの作業ディレクトリ内に生成されているにすぎません。実際の出力を得るには、作業中の文書を書き出してください -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ファイルをLyXから印刷する -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:ファイルを印刷" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -お使いのファイルを書き出してから印刷に取りかかる代わりに、LyXから直接ファイルを印刷することができます。ファイルを印刷するには、 -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -印刷 -\family default -メニューを選択するか( -\lang english -shortcut -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - -)、ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - -をクリックしてください。LyXは、DVIを生成するのに、内部的にLaTeXを呼び出します。こうしてできたDVIファイルが、 -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -プログラムによって処理されてPostScriptファイルとなり、それが -\family typewriter -Ghostscript -\family default -プログラムによって、最終的に印刷されるのです。これらの各段階がバックグラウンドで行われるので、この方法は最速ではありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -印刷先 -\family default -ボックスのパラメータを以下のように設定することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -プリンタ -\family default - これは印刷先のプリンタ名です。 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -このプリンタ名は -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -用のものです。つまり、 -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -がこのプリンタ名を使えるように設定されていなくてはなりません。既定プリンタは、LyXの設定ダイアログで設定することができます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:プリンタ" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -ファイル -\family default - 印刷先のファイル名です。出力はPostScriptファイルになります。完全パスを指定しないかぎり、LyXの作業ディレクトリに書き込まれます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、奇数頁あるいは偶数頁のみを印刷することを選ぶこともできます。これは両面印刷をするために使うことができます。片面をひととおり印刷したあとに、その紙を裏返して -、もう一度プリンタに差し込めばいいのです -\lang english -with a printer without a duplexer -\lang japanese -。プリンタによっては、印字面を上に出力するものもあれば、印字面を下にするものもあります。印刷する順序を適切に選択すれば、出力された紙の束をソートしなおすことなし -に、そのまま使うことができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -その他組版について -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くみばん@組版 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ハイフン・ダッシュ・マイナス記号 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -はいふん@ハイフン -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だっしゅ@ダッシュ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXには、 -\emph on -ハイフン -\emph default -／ -\emph on -エヌ・ダッシュ -\emph default -／ -\emph on -エム・ダッシュ -\emph default -と呼ばれる、3つの長さのダッシュ（ -\family typewriter -- -\family default -）文字があります。 -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -名称 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -出力 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -挿入方法 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ハイフン -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -- -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -文字の『 -\family typewriter -- -\family default -』 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -エヌ・ダッシュ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -– -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -特殊文字\SpecialChar \menuseparator -記号 -\family default -で挿入 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -エム・ダッシュ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -— -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -特殊文字\SpecialChar \menuseparator -記号 -\family default -で挿入 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -マイナス記号 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $-$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -数式モードで『 -\family typewriter -- -\family default -』 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -「 -\family typewriter -- -\family default -」文字を続けて複数入力することによって、エヌ・ダッシュやエム・ダッシュを生成することもできます。これらは、最終的な出力では、自動的に適切な長さのダッシュとして出 -力されますが、LyXの中ではそうなりません。 「- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - --」 でエヌ・ダッシュ、 「- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -- -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - --」でエム・ダッシュが出力されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これら3つのダッシュは、それ独自の長さを持つ、数式モードのマイナス記号とは異なります。「 -\family typewriter -- -\family default -」が使われている例をご覧に入れましょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -line- and page-breaks -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -（ハイフン） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -From A–Z -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -（エヌ・ダッシュ） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -Oh — there's a dash. -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -（エム・ダッシュ） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - -（マイナス記号） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ハイフネーション -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -はいふねーしょん@ハイフネーション -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:ハイフネーション" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX内では単語のハイフネーション（行末におけるハイフン区切り）は行われませんが、出力においては自動的になされます。ハイフネーションは、LaTeXパッケージのb -abel -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -が、文書言語のルールに基づいて行います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXは、ハイフネーションをほとんど完璧にこなしますが、 -\family sans -タイプライタ体 -\family default -フォントで書かれた字句と、通常ではありえないような複合語、たとえば「h3knix/m0n0wall」のような単語では問題が生じます。LaTeXが正しく単語を分割 -できないときには、手動でハイフネーション位置を挿入します。これは、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ハイフネーション位置 -\family default -メニューで行うことができます。ただし、このハイフネーション位置は、LaTeXに対する勧奨にすぎません。ハイフネーションが必要でないときには、LaTeXはこれを無 -視します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -場合によっては、単語などがハイフネートされることを防止したいことがあります。たとえば、文書中で「A-b c」のような形でキー割当てや短絡キーの説明をしたいとしま -しょう。LaTeXは、ハイフン「-」をハイフネートしても良い場所と判断します。しかし、この場所でハイフネートされると読みにくくなってしまいます。短絡キーがハイフ -ネートされることを防ぐためには、これをボックスの中に入れる方法があります。取扱説明書『 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -』の『ハイフネーションの回避』節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -句読点 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くとうてん@句読点 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -略語と文の終わり -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:略語" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -執筆中の文書の完成版を生成するためにLyXがLaTeXを実行する際、LaTeXはまず自動的に、単語と文と略語を識別します。その上で、LaTeXは「適切な大きさの -空白」を加えるのです。つまり、文末の句点と次に来る単語のあいだには広めの空白を挿入し、略語を示す句点のあとには、単語間に用いられる空白と同じ大きさの空白を挿入す -るのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -残念ながら、どれが略語であるのかを判別するアルゴリズムは、すべての場合においてうまくいくわけではありません。もし「.」が小文字のあとに付く場合には文末であると自動 -的に判断され、大文字のあとに付くならば略語と判断されるのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下は、略語と文末が -\emph on -正しく -\emph default -判別される例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -M. - Butterfly -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -Don't worry. - Be happy. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -そして、以下がこのアルゴリズムがうまく動作しない例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -e. - g. - this is too much space! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -This is I. - It's okay. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上の不具合は、この文書の完成版を出力してみないとわからないはずです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この不具合を正すには、次のいずれかのようにしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -小文字を使った略語の後には -\family sans -単語間の空白 -\family default -を使ってください（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:単語間の空白" - -\end_inset - -節を参照）。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くうはく@空白!たんごかんの@単語間の------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -略語内の句点の後には -\family sans -小空白 -\family default -を使ってください（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:小空白" - -\end_inset - -節参照）。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -くうはく@空白!しょう@小------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -文のあいだ用の空白があとに入るように強制するには、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -特殊文字 -\family default -メニューにある -\family sans -句点 -\family default -を使うようにしてください。この機能は、短絡のために -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence" -\end_inset - -に割り当てられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以上の方法を採用することで、前出の例は次のようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -e. -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -g. -\begin_inset space \space{} -\end_inset - -this is too much space! -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -This is I\SpecialChar \@. - It's okay. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -言語によっては、文のあいだに空白を用いないものもあります。仮にそのような言語をお使いだとしても、LaTeXがうまく調整を行いますので、心配なさる必要はありません -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -それでも心配性なあなたのためには、これらのかくれたエラーを捕捉するツールがあります。取扱説明書『高度な機能篇』の -\emph on -Checking TeX -\emph default -の節に述べられている -\family sans -Check -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -TeX -\family default -の機能をお試しください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -引用符 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょくじ@植字!いんようふ@引用符 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いんようふ@引用符|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -植字 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは通常、引用符を正しく配置します。具体的には、引用文の開始部分には開く引用符、終了部分には閉じる引用符をつけます。例えば、 -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -開く、閉じる -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -という具合です。これは、キーボードの「 -\family sans -" -\family default -」キーが押されると自動的に処理されます -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログの -\family sans -言語 -\family default -サブメニューを用いると「 -\family sans -" -\family default -」キーの振舞いを変更することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また -\family sans -引用形式 -\family default -選択ボックスでは、各言語用の引用符を選択することができます。選択肢は次の 6つです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -double -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -または -\begin_inset Quotes els -\end_inset - -single -\begin_inset Quotes ers -\end_inset - -という引用符を用います -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes sld -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes srd -\end_inset - - または 'this -\begin_inset Quotes ers -\end_inset - -という引用符を用います -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes gld -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes grd -\end_inset - -または -\begin_inset Quotes gls -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes grs -\end_inset - -という引用符を用います -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes pld -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes prd -\end_inset - - または -\begin_inset Quotes pls -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes prs -\end_inset - -という引用符を用います -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes fld -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes frd -\end_inset - -または -\begin_inset Quotes fls -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes frs -\end_inset - -という引用符を用います -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Labeling -\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 - -\family sans -\begin_inset Quotes ald -\end_inset - -Text -\begin_inset Quotes ard -\end_inset - - -\family default - -\begin_inset Quotes ald -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes ard -\end_inset - -または -\begin_inset Quotes als -\end_inset - -this -\begin_inset Quotes ars -\end_inset - -という引用符を用います -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらの設定は、 -\family sans -「" -\family default -」キーを押すと、どの文字を配置されることになるかを決定します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -For single quotes you have to use the shortcut -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "quote-insert single" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -合字 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょくじ@植字!ごうじ@合字 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ごうじ@合字|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -植字 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:合字" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -欧文の植字における標準的な慣習として、特定の複数の文字を一まとめにして一つの文字として印字することがあります。このようにまとめられた文字を -\emph on -合字 -\emph default -といいます。LaTeXは合字処理を行いますので、作業中の文書の出力にも合字が現れることになります。標準的な合字は以下のようなものです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ff -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -fi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -fl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ffi -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ffl -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -言語によっては、文書フォントがサポートしていれば、これと異なる合字を使用することもあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -場合によっては、単語内で合字を用いたくないこともあるはずです。例えば、「graffiti」のような単語内で合字を用いることは自然でしょうが、「cufflink（ -カフスボタン）」やドイツ語の「Dorffest」のような複合語で合字を使ってしまうと、ひじょうに変な印象を与えます。合字を分離するためには、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形 -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -合字回避指定 -\family default -を使用してください。これを使用すると、「cufflinks」は「cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -links」のようになり、「Dorffest」は「Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} -fest」のようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LyXの固有名称 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lyx@LyX!こゆうめいしょう@固有名称 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LyXの固有名称" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここまでで、「LaTeX」という単語が、つねにばらばらの寸法と高さを持つ文字で表されていることに気づかれたはずです。LaTeXとは、LyXが用いるプログラムの名 -称で、LyX内で「LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX」 -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ここでTeXコードボックス中に中括弧が入れてあるのは、この「コマンド」が固有名称として出力に現れるのを防ぐために挿入してあります（本節の最終段落を参照）。固有名 -称を生成するには、TeXコードボックスを削除してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -と入力すれば、固有の名称として認識されます。大文字と小文字の配列順を間違えないようにしてください！LyXは、以下の固有名称を識別します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LyX 本体の名称。生成するには、「L -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -yX」と入力してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -TeX LaTeXが使用するプログラム。生成するには、「T -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX」と入力してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeX LyXが使用するプログラム。生成するには、「LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX」と入力してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeX2e LaTeXの実のバージョン。生成するには、「LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX2e」と入力してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXのバージョンがどうして「2 -\begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$ -\end_inset - -」なのか不思議に思われるかもしれません。TeXの世界では、プログラムに通好みのバージョン番号を与えるのが古くからの通例なのです。例えば、TeXのバージョン番号は -\begin_inset Formula $\pi$ -\end_inset - -に収束していくようになっています。実際のバージョンは「TeX-3.141592」であり、一つ前のバージョンは「TeX-3.14159」です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -例えば節見出しなどにおいて、固有名称を使用したくないときは、単語中に空の中括弧の対をTeXコードで埋め込むとよいでしょう。これは画面上では、 -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/LaTeX.png - -\end_inset - -のように見えます。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -TeXコードについて詳しくは、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:TeXコード" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -単位 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょくじ@植字!たんい@単位 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -一般的に、単位と数字のあいだの空白は、二つの単語のあいだの通常の空白よりも狭くなっています。以下の例から分かるように、空白が狭い方が見映えがよいのです。単位向け -のこのような「半分の空白」を得るには -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator -小空白 -\family default -（短絡キーは -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "space-insert thin" -\end_inset - -）メニューを使ってください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下がこの違いを示す例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -数字と単位のあいだに入れた通常の空白 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -24 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -kW -\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ -\end_inset - -h -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -数字と単位のあいだ用の半分の空白 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -孤立行 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょくじ@植字!こりつぎょう@孤立行 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -初期のワードプロセッサでは、ページがいっぱいになりさえすれば、ところかまわず改頁をしていました。文章が実際にどのように進んでいるかについては、まったく考慮が払わ -れていなかったのです。かつて、文書を印刷した後になって初めて、次の節見出しがページのいちばん下に印刷されてしまっていたり、新しい段落の一行めだけがページの最後に -残されてしまったり、あるいは段落の最後の行だけが次のページの最初に印刷されてしまっているのを、見つけた経験がおありのことでしょう。これらのはみ出てしまった文章は -、 -\emph on -前方孤立行（widow） -\emph default -あるいは -\emph on -後方孤立行（orphan） -\emph default -と呼ばれています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXでは原理的に、節見出しの直後に改頁が起こることを避けることができることはあきらかです。これは段落環境を採用していることの利点なのです。しかし、改頁によって -段落のうち一行だけをページの冒頭や末尾に取り残してしまう、孤立行に関してはどうでしょう。実はLaTeXには、改頁を制御する規則が埋め込まれていて、これらに含まれ -ている規則の一部が、孤立行の発生を明示的に防いでいるのです。これは、LaTeXをバックエンドとして使うことによって、LyXが獲得している利点です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、TeXやLaTeXが改頁を決定する方法や、その挙動の変更方法について、詳述する紙幅がありません。参考文献に引用してあるLaTeX関連書籍（ -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -や -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -）などに詳しい説明をしているものがあります。しかしながら、この点を気にしなくてはならなくなることは、まずないでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -注釈・図・表・フロート -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:フロートと注釈" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -本章の題材は、取扱説明書『高度な機能篇』に詳細に述べられています。そちらでは、特殊な場合のヒントとテクニックについても述べられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -注釈 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ちゅうしゃく@注釈 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:注釈" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXには、文書に追加できる注釈として、複数の型が存在します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LyX注釈 この注釈型は、内部用途の注釈で出力には現れません。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、出力には現れない注釈ボックスに書かれた文章です。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -コメント この注釈も出力には現れませんが、 -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaTeX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(xxx) -\family default - メニューを使って文書をLaTeXに書き出す際には、LaTeXコメントとして出力されます。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Comment -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、LaTeXファイルのコメントのみに現れる注釈ボックスに書かれた文章です。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -淡色表示 この注釈は、出力中では、文書設定の -\family sans -色\SpecialChar \menuseparator -淡色表示注釈 -\family default -で設定した色で文章が表示されます。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、出力に薄灰色の文章として現れるコメントに書かれた文章 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、淡色表示注釈内に脚注を用いた例です。この文書では、この注釈型の色は青色に設定されています。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -です。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes -\lang japanese -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -注釈は、ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/note-insert.png - scale 85 - scaleBeforeRotation - -\end_inset - -か、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -注釈 -\family default -メニューで挿入することができます。注釈型を選択するには、それで現れた注釈ボックスを右クリックしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -脚注 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -きゃくちゅう@脚注 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:脚注" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、脚注をボックスを使って表示します。 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -脚注 -\family default -メニューあるいはツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "footnote-insert" -\end_inset - -を使用して脚注を挿入すると、 -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png - scale 80 - -\end_inset - -ボックスが表示されます。このボックスがLyXにおいて脚注を示すものです。「脚注」と書いてあるラベルを左クリックすると、ボックスが展開されて、中に脚注の本文を入力 -することができるようになります。ボックスラベルをもう一度左クリックすると、ボックスは閉じられます。既存の本文を脚注に変更したいときは、その部分を選択して脚注ツー -ルバーボタンを押せばよいのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -右は脚注の例です。 -\begin_inset Foot -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -脚注を閉じるには左端のラベルボックスをクリックします。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -脚注は、出力では、本文中の脚注ボックスが配置された場所に上付きの数字として表示されます。脚注の文章は、そのページの下端に配置されます。 -\lang english -The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class -\lang japanese -。LyXは、まだ他の付番スキームをサポートしていませんが、特定のLaTeXコマンドを使用すれば他の付番スキームを使用することができます。この点に関しては、取扱説 -明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -傍注 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぼうちゅう@傍注 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:傍注" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -傍注は、LyXの脚注と同様の外観と挙動を示します。 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -傍注 -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "marginalnote-insert" -\end_inset - -を使って傍注を挿入すると、文中に「傍注」というラベルのついたボックスが現れます。このボックスが、LyXにおいては傍注を表します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この脇に傍注の例があります。 -\begin_inset Marginal -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これが傍注です。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -傍注は、片面文書では右側に印字されます。両面文書では、外側の余白、すなわち偶数ページでは左側、奇数ページでは右側に現れます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -傍注についての詳細な情報は、取扱説明書 -\emph on -『埋め込みオブジェクト篇』 -\emph default -の -\emph on -「傍注」 -\emph default -の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -図と画像 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -がぞう@画像 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ず@図 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:図" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書に図を挿入するには、カーソルを希望する本文中の位置に合わせて、ツールバーアイコン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - -をクリックするか、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -図 -\family default -メニューを選択してください。すると、読み込むファイルを選択するダイアログが現れます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このダイアログには、ひじょうに多くの—しかしほとんど説明を要しない—パラメータがあります。 -\family sans -図 -\family default -タブでは、画像ファイルを選択することができます。LyX内での画像表示と、出力での画像表示は、それぞれ独立して調整することができます。画像は、回転角や縮尺を指定す -ることで変換を行うことができます。縮尺単位に関しては、付録 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" - -\end_inset - -に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -切り抜き -\family default -タブでは、出力における画像の縦横の長さを調整するために、画像座標の設定をすることができます。座標は、 -\family sans -ファイルから取得 -\family default -ボタンを押すことによって、自動的に計算することもできます。 -\family sans -境界枠で切り抜く -\family default -オプションは、指定された座標内の画像領域のみ印字します。通常は、画像座標を気にする必要はないので、 -\family sans -切り抜き -\family default -タブは無視して構いません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -LaTeXとLyXのオプション -\family default -タブでは、LaTeXのエキスパート向けにLaTeXオプションを追加することができるようになっています。また、ここでLyX内での画像表示法を指定することができます -。 -\family sans -下書きモード -\family default -オプションを指定すると、画像は出力には現れず、画像と同じ大きさの枠だけが表示されます。 -\family sans -書き出す際に解凍しない -\family default -オプションについては、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -Graphics Dialog -\emph default -の節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -図ダイアログは、画像をクリックすることによって、いつでも呼び出すことができます。図は、出力では、それが置かれている本文中の位置に正確に配置されます。以下は、独立 -した中央揃えの段落に置かれたPDF形式の画像の例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/mobius.eps - scale 70 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -画像のキャプションや参照画像が必要な場合は、画像をフロート中に収めなくてはなりません（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:図フロート" - -\end_inset - -節参照）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -画像形式 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -がぞう@画像 ! けいしき@形式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:画像形式" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -画像は、既知のファイル形式であれば、どのような形式でも挿入することができます。しかし、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節で説明したように、出力に関しては、どの出力文書形式も、いくつかの画像形式しか受け付けません。したがってLyXは、画像を正しい形式に変換するのに、バックグラウン -ドで -\family sans -ImageMagick -\family default -というプログラムを使用しています。バックグラウンドで変換が発生することを避けて作業能率を上げようとお考えならば、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節内の各小節に挙げてある画像形式のみを使用するとよいでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フォントと同じく、画像形式にも以下の二つの型があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ビットマップ画像 は、ピクセル値を（時により圧縮された形で）保持しています。したがって、この画像形式は完全に伸縮可能ではなく、拡大するとピクセルが目立つようにな -ります。よく知られたビットマップ画像形式には、「Graphics Interchange Format（画像交換形式）」（GIF・ファイル拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.gif -\family default -」） -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -GIF|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -画像形式 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -、「Portable Network Graphics（可搬性ネットワーク画像ファイル）」（PNG・ファイル拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.png -\family default -」） -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PNG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -画像形式 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -、「Joint Photographic Experts Group（写真専門家連合組織）」（JPG・ファイル拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.jpg -\family default -」または「 -\family typewriter -.jpeg -\family default -」） -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -JPG|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -画像形式 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -などがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -伸縮可能画像 はベクトル値を保持しているので、データ損失なしに任意の寸法の伸縮させることができます。プレゼンテーションは、beamerがかならず伸縮操作を行うこ -とになるので、プレゼンテーションを作成したいときには画像が伸縮できることが必須です。また、伸縮性は、オンライン文書でユーザーが図の拡大ができるようにするのに便利 -です。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -伸縮可能画像形式には、「Scalable Vector Graphics（伸縮可能ベクトル画像ファイル）」（SVG・ファイル拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.svg -\family default -」）、「Encapsulated PostScript（カプセル化ポストスクリプト）」（EPS・ファイル拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.eps -\family default -」）、「Portable Document Format（可搬文書形式）」（PDF・ファイル拡張子は「 -\family typewriter -.pdf -\family default -」）がありえます。「ありえます」と言ったのは、ビットマップ画像はいつでもPDFやEPSに変換することができますが、この場合には伸縮可能ではなくなるからです。この -ような場合には、画像特性を示すヘッダが元々の画像に付け加えられるだけなのです -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDFの場合には、元の画像を圧縮することもあります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -通常、ビットマップ画像を伸縮可能画像には変換できず、その逆のみが可能です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -画像設定のグループ化 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -がぞう@画像 ! せっていのぐるーぷか@設定のグループ化 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -すべての画像は、画像設定のグループを新しく定義させるか、既存のグループに属させることができます。同一のグループに属する画像は、同一の設定を共有するので、グループ -内のひとつの画像の設定を変更すれば、グループ内の他のすべての画像が同じ変更を反映します。ですから、例えば、大量の画像の大きさを変えたい場合、ひとつひとつ手動で変 -更せずに行うことができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -A new group can be set by pressing the button -\family sans -Open -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -new -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -group -\family default - in the -\family sans - Graphics -\family default - dialog in the -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X options -\family default - tab -\lang japanese -。既存のグループに加えるには、コンテキスト・メニューから望むグループ名をクリックすれば、そのグループに加えることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -表 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ひょう@表 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:表" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表を挿入するには、ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "tabular-insert" -\end_inset - -か、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -表 -\family default -メニューを選択します。するとダイアログが現れ、行数と列数を訊いてきます。既定の表では、各セルの周囲に罫線が引かれ、第一行が表の他の部分から分離して表示されます。 -この分離が起こるのは二重線のためです。第一行のセルが下に罫線を伴っているのと同時に、第二行のセルも上に罫線を伴っているのです。以下は表の一例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -い -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ろ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -は -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -表ダイアログ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表を右クリックすると、表ダイアログが表示されて、表を変更することができます。ここでは、現在カーソルが置かれているセルないし行・列の設定を調節することができます。 -また、ダイアログオプションのほとんどは、選択範囲に対しても動作します。つまり、複数のセルや行・列を選択していれば、操作は選択範囲の全てに対して行われます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表ダイアログのほかに、カーソルが表内にある時に表示される -\family sans -表ツールバー -\family default -も表の特性を設定するのに役立ちます。例えば、いまのところ、行を追加したり削除したりすることは、表ツールバーからのみ実行することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表ダイアログの -\family sans -表の設定 -\family default -タブでは、現在の行の水平揃えを設定することができます。また行や列を追加すると、新規行・新規列は、現在のセルのすぐ下か右に追加されます。列の垂直揃えは、列幅が指定 -されている時のみ、指定することができます。列幅を指定すると、セル内で改行したり、セルに複数の段落を挿入したりすることができるようになります（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:表のセル" - -\end_inset - -節を参照）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -チェックボックス -\family sans -連結列 -\family default -や -\family sans -連結行 -\family default -を使うと、同一行あるいは同一列にある複数のセルを連結列セルあるいは連結行セルとして指定することができます。こうすると、複数のセルを一つのセルに連結し、2列あるい -は2行以上にまたがって表示されます。連結列はそれ自体独立した行として取り扱われるので、連結列における水平揃えや列幅や罫線などの設定は、連結列のセルのみに有効です -。以下は、第一行に連結列があり、最終行に上罫線がない（1列のみの）連結列がある表の例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -イロハ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ニホヘトチリ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ヌルヲ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -い -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ろ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -は -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -に -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これは、取扱説明書『高度な機能篇』の表の節に説明されているように、連結行セルのように表に特別な整形を行うときに必要になるでしょう。また、現在のセルや表全体を90 -度左向きに回転させることもできます。この回転はLyX上には表示されませんが、出力では正しく表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -ほとんどのDVIビューアは回転を表示することが -\emph on -できません -\emph default -。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -罫線 -\family default -タブでは、現在の行あるいは列の罫線を書き加えたり削除したりすることができます。 -\family sans -既定 -\family default -ボタンを押すと、全てのセルの周りに罫線が引かれます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -長尺表 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ひょう@表!ちょうしゃく@長尺------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ちょうしゃくひょう@長尺表 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Longtable|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -長尺表 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表が長すぎて1ページに収まりきらないときには、表ダイアログの -\family sans -長尺表 -\family default -タブにある -\family sans -長尺表を使う -\family default -オプションを使用して、複数ページに自動的に分割させることができます。このオプションを有効にすると、いくつかのチェックボックスが使えるようになり、以下のものを定義 -することができるようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ヘッダ： カーソル位置の行とその上の全ての行で、特別なオプションが定義されていないものは、長尺表の全てのページのヘッダ行として定義されるようになります。ただし、 -\family sans -冒頭ヘッダ -\family default -が定義されているときは、冒頭ページを除きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -冒頭ヘッダ： カーソル位置の行とその上の全ての行で、特別なオプションが定義されていないものは、長尺表の冒頭ページのヘッダ行として定義されるようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -フッタ： カーソル位置の行とその下の全ての行で、特別なオプションが定義されていないものは、長尺表の全てのページのフッタ行として定義されるようになります。ただし、 -\family sans -末尾フッタ -\family default -が定義されているときは、末尾ページを除きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -末尾フッタ： カーソル位置の行とその下の全ての行で、特別なオプションが定義されていないものは、長尺表の末尾ページのフッタ行として定義されるようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -キャプション： 第１行は単一列にリセットされますので、ここに -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -キャプション -\family default -メニューで表キャプションを挿入することができます。長尺表のキャプションについては、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -に詳述されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -加えて、表が分割される行を指定することができます。もし同一行に二つ以上のオプションを指定すると、その行の最初のオプションだけが用いられることに留意してください。 -その他のオプションは -\emph on -空 -\emph default -として定義されます。ここで「最初の」とは、 -\family sans -フッタ -\family default -・ -\family sans -末尾フッタ -\family default -・ -\family sans -ヘッダ -\family default -・ -\family sans -冒頭ヘッダ -\family default -の順のうち、最初という意味です。長尺表の動作を見るために以下の例を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -例示用電話帳（名前は無視してください） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -氏名 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -例示用電話帳 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -氏名 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -TEL. -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -つづく… -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -111 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Annovi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Silvia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bertoli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Stefano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Bozzi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Walter -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cachia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Cinquemani -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giusi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Colin -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Bernard -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Concli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Gianfranco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dal Bosco -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Carolina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Dalpiaz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Annamaria -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Feliciello -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Domenico -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Focarelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Galletti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oreste -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Gasparini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franca -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Rizzardi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paola -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Lassini -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Giancarlo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Luciano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Malfatti -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Valeriano -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Meneguzzo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Mezzadra -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Roberto -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pirpamer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Erich -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Pochiesa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Paolo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555, 222 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Radina -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Claudio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Stuffer -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Oskar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tacchelli -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Ugo -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Tezzele -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Margit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Unterkalmsteiner -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Frieda -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vieider -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Hilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Vigna -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Jürgen -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -999 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Weber -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Maurizio -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -Winkler -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Franz -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -555 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -おわり -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -表のセル -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ひょう@表!のせる@------のセル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:表のセル" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表のセルの中には、テキスト、行内数式、図、別の表などを入れることができます。これらのすべての種類のオブジェクトを同一セルに置くことも可能です。フォント寸法や字型 -を変更することもできますが、セルに特別な環境（例えば -\family sans -節* -\family default -など）を入れたり、セルの段落に空白を指定するオプションを設定することはできません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表のセルに複数行にわたる項目を入れるには、表ダイアログで当該列に固定列幅を宣言しなくてはなりません。すると、文章が指定した列幅よりも長くなると、自動的に複数行に -改行され、セル高も高く調整されます。以下の例をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -4 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、表内の複数行項目です。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -5 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -6 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -もう少し付け加えます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -7 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -8 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、表内の複数行項目です。もう少し付け加えます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -9 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表どうしやセルどうしの切り貼りはうまく動作します。二行以上にわたっても切り貼りは可能です -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -複数のセルを選択した状態で貼り付けをすることはできません。なぜなら、ひとつの単語を2行3列の選択範囲に貼り付けるとは、具体的に何をすればいいのか明らかではないか -らです。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。マウスや、シフトを押しながらの矢印キーによる選択も通常どおり機能します。表全体の切り貼りも、表の外側から選択を始めることで行うことができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -フロート -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふろーと@フロート -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:フロート" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -はじめに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フロート -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -訳註：浮遊するものの意。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -とは、位置の固定していない、なんらかのラベルを伴った文章の塊のことで、指定した位置から一二ページ前後のあいだでもっとも良い場所へ「漂う」ことができます。 -\family sans -脚注 -\family default -や -\family sans -傍注 -\family default -も、当該ページに注が多すぎるときには次のページに浮遊していくことができますから、これらもフロートと言ってよいでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フロートを使用すると、高品質のレイアウトを得ることができます。画像や表は、文章のないページや空白部分ができないように、各ページに分散して配置されます。フロート化 -することによって、本文と画像や表のあいだにある文脈が途切れてしまうことがあるので、各フロートは本文中で参照することができるようになっています。したがってフロート -には付番がなされます。参照に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:相互参照" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フロートを挿入するには、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -フロート -\family default -を使用してください。すると文書に「図 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -#:」（#は実際には番号）というキャプションの付いたボックスが挿入されます。ラベルは、出力時に自動的に文書言語に翻訳されます。ラベルの後にはキャプション文 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふろーと@フロート!きゃぷしょん@キャプション -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を挿入することができます。画像ないし表は、キャプションの上か下に、フロート内の別の段落として挿入します。また、LyX文書を読みやすくするために、ボックスラベルを -左クリックすれば、フロートボックスを開いたり閉じたりすることができます。閉じたフロートボックスは -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/floatQt4.png - -\end_inset - -のように赤いラベルの付いた灰色のボタンとして表されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -周囲の本文に特別な整形がなされているときに起こりうるLaTeXエラーを回避するために、フロートは独立した段落として挿入することを推奨します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -用例 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -図フロート -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふろーと@フロート!ず@図------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:図フロート" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -図 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:カモノハシ-1" - -\end_inset - -は、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -フロート\SpecialChar \menuseparator -図 -\family default -メニューまたはツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert figure" -\end_inset - -を使って生成しました。フロート生成後、キャプションラベルの上方にカーソルを持って行き、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -画像 -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - -を使って、画像を挿入します。その後、画像の前か後にカーソルを持って行き、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -段落設定 -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -を使用して、フロート内の画像を中央揃えにしてあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -placement htbp -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/platypus.eps - lyxscale 50 - width 50col% - rotateOrigin center - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:カモノハシ-1" - -\end_inset - -フロート中の激しく歪んだカモノハシ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この図フロートは、ラベルの付け方と相互参照の作り方も示しています。まず、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ラベル -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - -を用いてラベルを付けた上で、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -相互参照 -\family default -メニューないしはツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -を使って、このラベルを参照します。図フロートを参照する場合には、「上図」のようにあいまいな参照をするのではなく、相互参照を使用することが重要です。LaTeXは、 -文書の最終版でフロートの再配置を行うため、図が「上」に来るかどうかはまったくもって定かではないからです。相互参照については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:相互参照" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -通常、図フロートには一つの画像だけを挿入しますが、場合によっては、二つの画像に別々の副キャプションをつけて挿入したいこともあるかもしれません。その場合は、既存の -図フロートの中に図フロートを入れ込むことによって、実現することができます。ただし、図一覧にはフロートの主キャプションのみが表示されることに留意してください。図 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" - -\end_inset - -は、二つの画像が横に並んでいる図フロートの例です。二つめの画像を一つめの下に持ってくることも可能です。図 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:何かわからない" - -\end_inset - -と図 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:カモノハシ" - -\end_inset - -が下位図になります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:何かわからない" - -\end_inset - -何かわからない -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Float figure -wide false -sideways false -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:カモノハシ" - -\end_inset - -カモノハシ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/platypus.eps - lyxscale 60 - width 45col% - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:歪められた二つの像" - -\end_inset - -歪められた二つの像 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -表フロート -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふろーと@フロート!ひょう@表------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -表フロートは、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -フロート\SpecialChar \menuseparator -表 -\family default -メニューあるいはツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert table" -\end_inset - -を使うと挿入することができます。 -\lang english -They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in - the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures - and that the label begins with -\lang japanese -「tab:」。表 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:表フロート" - -\end_inset - -は表フロートの一例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -placement htbp -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:表フロート" - -\end_inset - -表フロート -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -1 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -2 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -3 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -森嶋 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -宇沢 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -二階堂 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -a & b\\ -c & d -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -詳しい情報 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふろーと@フロート ! しょうさい@詳細 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXには、他にも回転フロートなどのフロート型があります。他にも、フロートの連番スキームを変更したり、フロートの配置を調整したり、フロートキャプションの書式や配 -置を変更することができます。これらの機能は、取扱説明書 -\emph on -『埋込オブジェクト篇』 -\emph default -の -\emph on -「フロート」 -\emph default -の章に、多くの用例とともに、詳しく説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ミニページ -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -みにぺーじ@ミニページ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:ミニページ" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXには、ミニページという、ページの中にページを事実上作ってしまう機構があります。ミニページの中では、字下げや行折返しなどの通常の規則がすべて有効です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ミニページはLyXにおいては、折りたたみ可能なボックスとして表され、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ボックス -\family default -メニューで挿入できます。ボックスを右クリックすると、ミニページの幅やページ内部での配置を変更することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\align center -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "30col%" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -これはミニページです。本文はイタリック(Italic)体に設定されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\shape italic -ミニページは、本文と異なる言語の文章や、別の整形方法を要する文章などによく用いられます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - -二つのみにページを横に並べるときには、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:水平方向の空白" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられているように、 -\family sans -水平フィル -\family default -を使用すると良いかもしれません。 -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、まったく意味のないダミーの文章を含むミニページです。このダミーの文章は、ミニページが十分な大きさを持つようにするためのものです。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset space \hfill{} -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Frameless -position "t" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 1 -inner_pos "t" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1.5in" -special "none" -height "1pt" -height_special "totalheight" -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、まったく意味のないダミーの文章を含むミニページです。このダミーの文章は、ミニページが十分な大きさを持つようにするためのものです。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ミニページボックスを右クリックすると、ボックスをミニページから他のボックス型に変更することができます。ボックスの全型とその設定については、取扱説明書『埋込みオブ -ジェクト篇』の -\emph on -ボックス -\emph default -の章に詳細な説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -数式 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しき@式|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -数式 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:数式" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -本章の題材は、取扱説明書『数式篇』に詳細な記述があります。そちらには、特殊な場合のヒントとコツも収録されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -数式編集の基本 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!のきほん@------の基本 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式を作成するには、ツールバーアイコン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-mode on" -\end_inset - -( -\lang english -shortcut -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-mode" -\end_inset - -)をクリックするだけでできます。すると、四隅を紫のマーカーで囲まれた青い箱が現れます。この青い箱が数式それ自身で、紫のマーカーは数式内の現在地の入れ子の深さを表 -します。また、 -\family sans -挿入 -\bar under -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\bar default -数式 -\family default -メニューを使えば、挿入する数式の型を選ぶこともできます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式のパラメータの編集や、数式の構成物の追加は、カーソルが数式内にある時に現れる、 -\family sans -数式ツールバー -\family default -を使って行うことができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式には主に二つの型があります。そのうちの一つ、行内数式は本文の行内に現れる数式で以下のように表現されます： -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この行は行内数式 -\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ -\end_inset - -を含んだ行です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もう一つの別行立て数式は、本文の外側に単独の段落であるかのように表現されるもので、以下のようにみえます： -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -A=B -\] - -\end_inset - -番号を振ったり参照をしたりするのは、別行立て数式しかできません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、多くのLaTeX数式コマンドをサポートしています。例えば、「 -\series bold - -\backslash -alpha -\series default -」と入力してスペースを押せば、数式の中にギリシア文字 -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ -\end_inset - -が作られます。つまり往々にして、 -\family sans -数式パネル -\family default -を使うよりもコマンドを打った方が速いことがあるでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -数式内の移動 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!いどう@移動 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -既存の数式内でカーソル位置をコントロールする一番いい方法は矢印キーを使うことです。LyXは、何かを挿入できる場所を小さな箱で示します。矢印キーは数式内の各部品の -あいだを移動するのに使うことができます。 -\family sans -スペース -\family default -キーは、数式の構成要素（平方根 -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ -\end_inset - -や、括弧 -\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ -\end_inset - -、行列 -\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right]$ -\end_inset - -等）から脱出するのに使うことができます。 -\family sans -エスケープ -\family default -を押すと、数式から脱出してカーソルは数式の直後に移動します。 -\family sans -Tab -\family default -は、数式内を水平に移動するのに使います。例えば、行列中のセルの移動や複数行の数式中の移動などです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -スペース -\family default -—本文書では「 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - 」 -\begin_inset Note Note -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -このコマンドは、出力では空白文字（可視空白）を表す標準的な文字で表現されます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -と印刷されます—は、数式中では何もしないように見えますが、実は入れ子構造から脱出するのに使われるのです。このため、 -\family sans -スペース -\family default -を使うときには注意しなくてはなりません。例えば、 -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ -\end_inset - -と入力したい場合には -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series bold -2x+1 -\series default -と入力すべきであって、 -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series bold -2x -\series default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series bold -+1 -\series default -ではありません。このようにすると、 -\begin_inset Formula $2x$ -\end_inset - -のみが平方根の中に入ってしまって -\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ -\end_inset - -のようになってしまいます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下の行列のように、数式の多くの構成要素は、一部だけ入力した状態で置いておくことができます。例： -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -\lambda_{1}\\ - & \ddots\\ - & & \lambda_{n} -\end{array}\right) -\] - -\end_inset - -分数の一部しか入力しなかったり、上付き文字に何も入力しなかった場合には、何が起こるかは予想できませんが、ほとんどの構成要素はすべて入力しなくとも大丈夫です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文字の選択 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式中で文字を選択するには二つの方法があります。一つは、選択したい文字列の端にカーソルを置いて -\family sans -、シフト -\family default -キーを押しながらカーソル移動キーで文字列を選択する方法です。すると、通常の文字列選択と同じように、選択部がハイライト表示されます。もう一つの方法は、他と同じよう -にマウスを使って選択することです。選択部は、切り取りやコピーをして任意の数式中に貼り付けすることができますが、LyX中の通常の本文領域には貼り付けできません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -指数と下付き文字 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!しすう@指数 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!したつきもじ@下付き文字 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上付き文字や下付き文字を入力するには(buttons -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-superscript" -\end_inset - -and -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-subscript" -\end_inset - -)、数式パネルを使うこともできますが、コマンドを使用する方がより簡単です。つまり、 -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - -が欲しいときには -\series bold - x^2 -\series default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - と入力すればよいのです。最後の -\family sans -スペース -\family default -で、カーソルが上付き文字の位置から数式のベースライン位置に戻ります。もし -\series bold -x^2y -\series default -と入力してしまうと -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ -\end_inset - -になってしまいます。 -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ -\end_inset - -が欲しい場合には -\series bold - x^2 -\family typewriter -\series default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series bold -y -\series default - と入力して下さい。上付き文字を入力する時には、「^」で移行することができ、上付き部分から戻る際には -\family sans -スペース -\family default -を入力します。例えば、 -\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ -\end_inset - -が欲しければ、 -\series bold - x^a -\series default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - と入力します。下付き文字も同様です。 -\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ -\end_inset - -を得るには、 -\series bold - a_1 -\series default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - と入力します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -分数 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!ぶんすう@分数 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -分数を作るには、コマンド -\series bold - -\backslash -frac -\series default -を使うか、 -\family sans -数式パネル -\family default -の -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\frac" -\end_inset - -アイコンを使用してください。空の分数が現れて、カーソルが分数の横棒の上方に置かれます。横棒の下に移動するには -\family sans -↓ -\family default -を、また元に戻るには -\family sans -↑ -\family default -を押して下さい。以下の例に示されているように、分数には任意の数式要素を入れることができます。 -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} -2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 -\end{array}\right)}\right] -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -根号 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!へいほうこん@平方根 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -根号は、数式パネルの -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\sqrt" -\end_inset - -or -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\root" -\end_inset - -ボタンか、 -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default -あるいは -\series bold - -\backslash -root -\series default -コマンドを使って作成することができます。 -\series bold - -\backslash -root -\series default -コマンドでは、立方根のような高次の根を生成することができますが、 -\series bold - -\backslash -sqrt -\series default -はつねに平方根を生成します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -範囲付き演算子 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!わ@和 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!せきぶん@積分 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:範囲付き演算子" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -和記号（ -\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ -\end_inset - -）と積分記号（ -\begin_inset Formula $\int$ -\end_inset - -）には、しばしば和や積分の上限・下限を書き加えることがあります。これらの上限下限は、記号の直後で上付き文字や下付き文字を入力するときと同じようにすれば入力するこ -とができます。和記号の場合は、別行立て数式では上限は記号の上に下限は記号の下に自動的に配置され、行内数式の場合は記号の横に配置されます。つまり行内数式は -\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ -\end_inset - - と表記され、別行立て数式では -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\sum_{n=1}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e -\] - -\end_inset - -となります。一方、積分記号の場合は、上限下限はどちらの数式型でも積分記号の横に配置されます。全ての範囲付き演算子は、別行立てモードでは自動的に大きさが調整されま -す。上限下限の位置は、カーソルを記号の直後に置いて、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-limits" -\end_inset - -と押すか、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator -極限の表記を変更 -\family default -メニューを使えば変更することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -他の数式表現にも、この「移動する上限下限」機能を持つものがあります。例えば -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!じょうげんかげん@上限下限 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!はんい@範囲|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -数式!上限下限 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x), -\] - -\end_inset - -は、別行立てモードでは -\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ -\end_inset - -を記号の下に配置しますが、行内モードでは -\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ -\end_inset - - のようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでlim関数は、関数マクロ -\series bold - -\backslash -lim -\series default -を使って入力されたものであることに注意してください。関数マクロに関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:関数" - -\end_inset - -節を参照して下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -数式記号 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!きごう@記号 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式記号のほとんどは、 -\family sans -数式パネル -\family default -にあるギリシャ文字・演算子・関係子・矢印等の各カテゴリの中に収録されています。また、アメリカ数学会(AMS: American Mathematical - Society) が提供している記号も加えてあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もし使いたい数式要素や記号のLaTeXコマンドを知っているならば、数式パネルを使う必要はなく、数式に直接コマンドを入力すればよいでしょう。LyXが、それを対応す -る記号や数式要素に変換します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -余白を変更する -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!よはく@余白 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!くうはく@空白|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -数式!余白 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXの提供する標準的な余白取りとは異なる余白を使いたいことがあるかもしれません。この場合は、 -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" -\end_inset - - -\family default -を押すか、 -\family sans -数式パネル -\family default -のボタン -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\space" -\end_inset - - -\family default -を使用してください。これは小さな空白を追加するもので、画面上には小さなマーカーが表示されます。例えば、 -\series bold -a Ctrl+Space b -\series default - というキー列、すなわち -\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ -\end_inset - -は、LyX上では -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png - -\end_inset - -のように表示されます。空白マーカーの直後にカーソルを置いて空白をさらに何度か押すと、空白を異なる長さに変えることができます。一度空白を押す度に長さが変わります。 -負の長さを持ついくつかの空白は、LyX上では赤色で表示されます。以下に例を二つ上げます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Ctrl+Space b -\series default -と入力した後に -\family sans -Space -\family default -を3回入力： -\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -a Ctrl+Space b -\series default -と入力した後に -\family sans -Space -\family default -を3回入力： -\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -関数 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!かんすう@関数 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:関数" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -数式パネル -\family default -の -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\functions" -\end_inset - - -\family default -ボタンの中には、 -\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ -\end_inset - -・ -\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ -\end_inset - -など多くの関数が含まれています（数式中で -\series bold - -\backslash -sin -\series default -などと入力して挿入することも可能です）。通常、 -\begin_inset Formula $sin$ -\end_inset - -は -\begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$ -\end_inset - -を意味することになってしまうので、数学の標準的な慣習では、混乱を避けるため関数はアップライト体で印字されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、関数マクロは関数の周りに適切な余白を設定します。 -\begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$ -\end_inset - -の余白は単に -\begin_inset Formula $asinx$ -\end_inset - -と入力したときとは異なります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ -\end_inset - -のようないくつかの数式オブジェクトでは、マクロが下付き文字の位置を、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:範囲付き演算子" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられているような方法で変更します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -アクセント -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!あくせんと@アクセント -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式中においても、通常の本文と同じ方法で、アクセントの付いた文字を挿入することができます。方法は、使用しているキーボードとキー設定ファイルによって異なります。ま -た、キーボードがアクセントを使うように設定されていないでも、例えば -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - -を挿入するのにLaTeXコマンドを使用することができます。この例では、数式中で -\series bold - -\backslash -hat -\series default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -spce -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series bold -a -\series default - と入力することによって作成しています。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:アクセント名とそれに対応するコマンド" - -\end_inset - -表はアクセント名とコマンドの対照表を示しています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:アクセント名とそれに対応するコマンド" - -\end_inset - -アクセント名とそれに対応するコマンド -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -名称 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -コマンド -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -印字例 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -circumflex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -hat -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -grave -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -acute -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -acute -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -umlaut -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -ddot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -tilde -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -dot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -dot -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -breve -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -breve -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -caron -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -check -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -macron -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -bar -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -vector -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -vec -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらのアクセントは、数式パネルの -\family sans -上下装飾 -\family default -記号設定ボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\hat" -\end_inset - -から項目を選ぶことで選択することもできます。この方法は、数式内で選択したものなら何にでも適用することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -括弧と区分記号 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!かっこ@括弧 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!くぶんきごう@区分記号 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:括弧と区分記号" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXで使える括弧には、いくつかのものがあります。ほとんどの場合、単に -\family typewriter -[]{}()|<> -\family default -などのキーを使うだけで十分ですが、行列や分数のような大きな数式要素の周りを括弧で囲みたい場合や、幾重もの括弧を使いたい場合には、 -\family sans -数式パネル -\family default -の区分記号アイコン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" -\end_inset - -を使うべきです。例えば、行列周りの括弧を作るには -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left[\begin{array}{cc} -1 & 2\\ -3 & 4 -\end{array}\right] -\] - -\end_inset - -のようにします。下記の表現の左側は、区分記号アイコン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" -\end_inset - -を使用して入力したもので、右側は -\family typewriter -() -\family default -鍵を使用して入力したものです。 -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -区分記号アイコンを使用すると、括弧は、中身の大きさに応じて自動的に大きさが変わります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -括弧を作成するには、左側と右側に使う括弧のボタンをクリックしてください。左右対称オプションを使用すると、選択した括弧型が左右両方に使用されます。選択した括弧は、 -ボタンフィールドの下に表示されます。片側に括弧をつけたくない場合は、空白ボタンを使用してください。LyX上では破線が表示されますが、印刷時には何も印字されなくな -ります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -既存の数式要素に括弧をつけたい場合は、根号と同様に、括弧の中に入れる要素を選択状態にし、左右に適切な括弧を選んで -\family sans -挿入 -\family default -をクリックしてください。選択した要素の周りに括弧が描かれます。最もよく使われる括弧対(両側とも丸括弧・角括弧・波括弧のもの)は、短絡キーを使用して、素早く入力す -ることができます。例えば、両側を伸縮可能な丸括弧にするには、括弧をつける対象を選択して -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-delim ( )" -\end_inset - -を打鍵してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -配列と多行数式 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!はいれつ@配列 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!ぎょうれつ@行列 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!ふくすうぎょう@複数行------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXでは、行列は数式パネルの行列ボタン -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" -\end_inset - - -\family default -を使用して入力します。これを押すとダイアログが表示されますので、行数と列数を指定してください。以下が作例です。 -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\left(\begin{array}{ccc} -1 & 2 & 3\\ -4 & 5 & 6\\ -7 & 8 & 9 -\end{array}\right) -\] - -\end_inset - -括弧は自動ではつきませんので、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:括弧と区分記号" - -\end_inset - -節で述べられている方法でつけてください。行列を作成する際には、各列を左揃えにするか、右揃えにするか、中央揃えにするかを指定することができます。この配置は、 -\family sans -æ°´å¹³ -\family default -ボックスに「 -\family sans -l -\family default -」「 -\family sans -c -\family default -」「 -\family sans -r -\family default -」の各文字を入力することで指定できます。LyXの既定値は各列とも「 -\family sans -c -\family default -」になっています。例えば、「 -\family sans -lrc -\family default -」という文字列を入れると、各文字がそれぞれの列に対応するので、第1列を左揃え、第2列を中央揃え、第3列の右揃えにすることになります。この出力は以下のようになりま -す。 -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -\begin{array}{lcr} -\mbox{この} & \mbox{この} & \mbox{この}\\ -\mbox{列は} & \mbox{列は} & \mbox{列は}\\ -\mbox{左揃えです} & \mbox{中央揃えです} & \mbox{右揃えです} -\end{array} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -既存の行列に行を追加するには、カーソルを行列内に置いて -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -を押してください。列の追加や削除は -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -数式 -\family default -メニューか数式ツールバーを使用してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式には、他にも場合分けのような配列を使用することができます。これは、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Cases環境 -\family default -メニューか -\series bold - -\backslash -cases -\series default -コマンドで作成することができます。以下がその例です。 -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\begin{cases} --1 & x<0\\ -0 & x=0\\ -1 & x>0 -\end{cases} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - -多行数式は、数式内で -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -を押すことで作成することができます。空の数式では、各列を表す3つの青い枠が表示されます。空でない数式内で -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -を押すと、関係子（等号「＝」など）の前の部分は自動的に第1列に入れられ、関係子が第2列、残りが第3列に入れられます。新規の行は、さらに -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "newline-insert newline" -\end_inset - -を押すたびに追加されます。多行数式は、つねに別行立てです。以下がその例です。 -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\ -a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared} -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -中央の列は関係子用にデザインされていますので、この列の要素は、以下のように少し小さい大きさで印字されることに注意してください。 -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray*} -\frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} -\end{eqnarray*} - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここで述べた多行数式の型は -\family typewriter -eqnarray -\family default -と呼ばれるものです。例えば、 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand eqref -reference "eq:asquared" - -\end_inset - -式よりも美しい行間が欲しい場合など、状況によっては、より適した複数行型が他にあります。他の型に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:AMS数式型" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -数式番号と参照 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!ばんごう@------番号 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!さんしょう@------参照 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:数式番号と参照" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式に番号をつけるには、数式内にカーソルを置いて、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Number -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Whole -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Formula -\family default -\lang japanese -ーか短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - -を使用してください。 -\lang english -The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses. - The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated -\lang japanese -。出力における数式番号の配置と形式は、文書クラスに依存します。この文書では、数式番号は、章番号とともに、ピリオドのあとに印字されます。 -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{equation} -1+1=2. -\end{equation} - -\end_inset - -付番数式の中で -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - -と押すと、番号を消すことができます。番号付けは別行立て数式でしかできません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -多行数式では、行ごとに番号をつけることができます。 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Number -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -This -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Line -\family default -\lang japanese -ーや短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-line-toggle" -\end_inset - -を使用すると、以下のように、カーソルがある行の番号だけを付けたり消したりすることができます。 -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -1 & = & 3-2\\ -2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ -4 & \leq & 7 -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -全てに行に番号をつけるには、 -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "math-number-toggle" -\end_inset - -を使用します。別行立て数式の番号はすべて、ラベルを使って参照することができます。ラベルは、カーソルが数式内にあるときに、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ラベル -\family default -メニューを使うと( -\lang english -toolbar button -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - -)、ラベルを入力するダイアログが開きますので、そこで挿入することができます。このとき、ラベルの冒頭部を表示のとおり「 -\family sans -eq: -\family default -」にしておく方が、文書内にたくさんのラベルがあふれてしまったときにラベル型を判別する助けとなるので、望ましいでしょう。以下の例では、第2行に「eq:tanhEx -p」というラベルをつけています。 -\begin_inset Formula -\begin{eqnarray} -\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ - & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} -\end{eqnarray} - -\end_inset - -ラベル行はすべて自動的に付番されますので、LyX中では、ラベルは数式番号の場所に位置取りを示す「#」で表示されます。ラベルのついた数式は、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -相互参照 -\family default -メニューを開くと( -\lang english -toolbar button -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -)、参照したいラベルを選択するダイアログが現れますので、これを使って参照することができます。参照は、以下のように、LyX中では灰色の相互参照ボックスとして表示さ -れ、出力では数式番号が出力されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これは第( -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "eq:tanhExp" - -\end_inset - -)式の相互参照です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXの相互参照ボックスの設定については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:相互参照" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。ラベルを削除するには、ラベル付きの数式の終端にカーソルを置き、 -\family sans -Del -\family default -を打鍵してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ユーザー定義の数式マクロ -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!まくろ@------マクロ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXでは、数式用に自前のマクロを定義することができるので、同じ形の数式が文書中に何度も現れるときには、たいへん便利です。数式マクロは、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -数式篇 -\emph default -』の -\emph on -数式マクロ -\emph default -の節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -微調整 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -書体 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式 ! しょたい@書体 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文字の標準フォントはイタリック体であり、数字の標準フォントはローマン体です。数式中でフォントを指定するには、数式パネルの -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\font" -\end_inset - - -\family default -ボタンを使用するか、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:書体とそれに対応するコマンド" - -\end_inset - -表に掲げてあるコマンドを直接入力してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:書体とそれに対応するコマンド" - -\end_inset - -書体とそれに対応するコマンド -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -フォント -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeXコマンド -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathrm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathtt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathbb -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathfrak -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\emph on -\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathcal -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -mathsf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\family sans -\series default -Blackboard体 -\family default -と -\family sans -Calligraphic体 -\family default -では、大文字しか印字できないことに注意してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -書体を指定すると、青い枠が数式中に表示されます。この枠中の文字はすべて、指定した書体で印字されます。枠中で -\family sans -スペース -\family default -を押すとカーソルが枠外に出てしまうので、枠中で空白が欲しい場合には、保護された空白を使用しなくてはなりません。以下は、自然数の集合を表すのに -\family sans -Blackboard体 -\family default -の「N」が使用されている例です。 -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\sqrt{x}\;;\; x\in\mathbb{N} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -書体は入れ子にすることが可能ですが、混乱の元になることがあります。例えば -\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$ -\end_inset - -のように、 -\family sans -タイプライタ体 -\family default -の枠内に -\family sans -Fraktur体 -\family default -の文字を入れることは可能ですが、この機能は使用しない方が望ましいでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -書体は -\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$ -\end_inset - -に見られるように、ギリシャ文字には効力がありません。またギリシャ文字を太字にするには、 -\series bold - -\backslash -boldsymbol -\series default -コマンドのみが有効です。これは、他の書体コマンドと同様に動作します。例： -\begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$ -\end_inset - -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -boldsymbol -\series default -コマンドは、すべての記号や文字・数字に有効です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -他にも -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文字形式 -\family default -メニューから、多くのフォント・オプションが利用できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -数式内文章 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式 ! ぶんしょう@文章 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -書体は、いくつかの文字をある特定のフォントにするには便利ですが、文章を入れるには向いていません。比較的長い文章を入力するには、 -\family sans -数式パネル -\family default -の中の -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\font" -\end_inset - - -\family default -ボタンにある項目「 -\family sans -標準テキストモード -\family default -」（あるいは短絡キー -\family sans -Alt-M -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -M -\family default -）を選択して得られる、数式内文章を使用してください。LyX内では、数式内文章は、青色ではなく黒色で表示されます。数式内文章では、通常の本文と同様に空白やアクセン -トが使用できます。以下の例をご覧ください。 -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -f(x)=\begin{cases} -x & \mbox{もし私がそう言った場合}\\ --x & \textrm{unter Umständen（場合によっては）} -\end{cases} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -フォント寸法 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式 ! ふぉんとすんぽう@フォント寸法 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式モードで使用されるフォントには、4つのフォント形式（相対寸法）がありますが、ほとんどの状況下で、これらは自動的に選択されます。これらのフォント形式は、それぞ -れ -\family sans -textstyle -\family default -・ -\family sans -displaystyle -\family default -・ -\family sans -scriptstyle -\family default -・ -\family sans -scriptscriptstyle -\family default -と呼ばれています。 -\family sans -textstyle -\family default -と -\family sans -displaystyle -\family default -においては、ほとんどの文字が同じ大きさですが、関数・下付き文字・上付き文字などは -\family sans -displaystyle -\family default -の方が大きくなっています。状況に応じて伸縮するいくつかの演算子を除くすべての文字は、LaTeXが適切と判断する形式に設定されます。これらの設定は、数式パネルボタ -ン -\family sans - -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-insert \\style" -\end_inset - - -\family default -を使用することで上書きすることができます。選択した寸法用の枠が生成されるので、その中に数式要素を入力します。例えば、通常 -\family sans -textstyle -\family default -で表示される -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ -\end_inset - -を、 -\family sans -displaystyle -\family default -で大きく -\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ -\end_inset - -と表示するように設定することができます。4つの形式の例を以下に挙げます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -(1) -\begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$ -\end_inset - - (2) -\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$ -\end_inset - - (3) -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$ -\end_inset - - (4) -\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらの数式モードのフォント寸法は、すべて相対的なものです。すなわち、数式挿入枠全体が、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文字形式 -\family default -メニューを使用して特定の寸法に変更されると、数式中のすべての大きさのフォントが、この寸法を基準にして調整されます。同じように、文書全体の基本フォント寸法が変更さ -れれば、すべてのフォントがこれに応じて調整されます。以下は、「極大」フォント寸法の中に挿入された数式の例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\size largest -\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -AMS-LaTeX -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -AMSすうしき@AMS 数式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!AMS -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、アメリカ数学会（AMS: The American Mathematical Society ）の提供するパッケージをサポートしています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -AMSサポートを有効にする -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ダイアログの -\family sans -数学オプション -\family default -の下にある -\family sans -AMS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -mathパッケージを使う -\family default -チェックボックスを選択状態にすると、AMSパッケージが文書にインクルードされ、その機能が有効になります。AMSは、多くの数式要素に必要とされているので、数式部で -LaTeXエラーが出る場合には、AMSが有効になっていることを確認してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -AMS数式型 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:AMS数式型" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すうしき@数式!ふくすうぎょう@複数行------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -AMS-LaTeXは、数式型を複数提供しています。LyXでは、 -\family typewriter -align -\family default -・ -\family typewriter -alignat -\family default -・ -\family typewriter -flalign -\family default -・ -\family typewriter -gather -\family default -・ -\family typewriter -multline -\family default -を選択することができるようになっていますこれらの数式型の説明に関しては、AMSの取扱説明書をご参照ください -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -他のツール -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -相互参照 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -そうごさんしょう@相互参照 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:相互参照" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXの強みの一つは、強力な相互参照機能です。文書中のすべての節・フロート・脚注・数式・箇条書きを参照することが可能です。文書の一部を参照するには、文書にラベル -を挿入しなくてはなりません。ラベルは、参照位置を固定するとともに、参照用の名前をつけるのに使われます。例として、以下の箇条書きの第2項目を参照したいものとしまし -ょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -第1項目 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "enu:第2項目" - -\end_inset - -第2項目 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -第3項目 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -まず、挿入ラベルメニューを使うかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - -を押して、第2項目にラベルを挿入します。 -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/labelQt4.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - -のような灰色のラベル枠が挿入され、ラベルウィンドウがポップアップして、ラベル用文字列を入力するように促します。LyXは、項目の最初の単語に前置詞をつけたもの、こ -こでは「 -\family sans -enu:第2項目 -\family default -」を文字列の候補として表示します。ここで前置詞「 -\family sans -enu: -\family default -」は、「enumerate（連番箇条書き）」を表します。前置詞は、ラベルが挿入される文書内の場所によって異なるものが付き、例えばラベルを節見出しに挿入すると、前 -置詞はsection（節）の「 -\family sans -sec: -\family default -」となります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -項目を参照するには、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -相互参照 -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - -を使用して、そのラベル名を参照してください。 -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/referenceQt4.png - scale 85 - -\end_inset - -のような灰色の枠が挿入され、相互参照ウィンドウが現れて文書内のすべてのラベルが表示されます。見やすくラベルをアルファベット順に整列するなどして、「 -\family sans -enu:第2項目 -\family default -」という項目を見つけ選択してください。出力では、相互参照枠の位置に項目番号が印字されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -相互参照 -\family default -の代わりに、ラベルをクリックすると現れるコンテクストメニューにある -\family sans -参照としてコピー -\family default -を使うこともできます。すると、このラベルに対する相互参照がクリップボードにコピーされるので、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -貼り付け -\family default -（短絡キーCtrl+V）メニューを使って、現在のカーソル位置に貼り付けることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -右が相互参照の例です：第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "enu:第2項目" - -\end_inset - -項目（英語例：Item -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "enu:第2項目" - -\end_inset - -） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -英文などの場合は、改行が汚くなるのを防ぐため、相互参照名とその前の単語とのあいだには保護された空白 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:保護された空白" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を用いることを推奨します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -相互参照には、以下の6つの種類があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -<参照> フロート番号を印字します。これが既定値です。（例） -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -(<参照>) フロート番号をかっこの中に印字します。これは通常、数式を参照するのに使われる形式で、特に参照接頭辞「式」を省略するときに使われます。（例） -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand eqref -reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -<参照ページ> ページ番号を印字します。（例） -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand pageref -reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -<参照ページ> 「on page」という文とページ番号を印字します。（例） -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vpageref -reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label - is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”; - if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on - the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page, - it prints “on the next page”. - The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -<参照> -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -<参照ページ> フロート番号、「on page」という文、ページ番号の順に印字します。（例） -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand vref -reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like -\family sans -\series bold - -\family default -\series default -; otherwise it behaves like -\family sans -\series bold -on -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -page -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -\series default -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -整形参照 自己定義の相互参照形式で印字します。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【注釈】 -\series default -この機能は、LaTeXパッケージの -\series bold -prettyref -\series default -または -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -が導入されているときのみ、使用できます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文書クラス -\family default -メニューにある -\family sans -相互参照に(prettyrefではなく)refstyleを使用 -\family default -オプションを使えば、この機能に使用するLaTeXパッケージを変更することができます。既定では -\series bold -refstyle -\series default -パッケージが使われており、 -\series bold -prettyref -\series default -は英語しかサポートしないので、こちらの方が望ましい設定になっています。書式は、文書のLaTeXプリアンブルで、 -\series bold - -\backslash -newrefformat -\series default - ( -\series bold -prettyref -\series default -の場合)か -\series bold - -\backslash -newref -\series default - ( -\series bold -refstyle -\series default -の場合)コマンドを使用して指定することができます。例えば、図への参照(ラベル接頭辞 -\family sans - -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -fig -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\family default -を持つもの)を全て変更するには、 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -newref{fig}{refcmd={ -\backslash -pageref{#1}ページにある図}}} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -のようなコマンドを使うことができます。書式についての詳細は、パッケージ取扱説明書 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "prettyref,refstyle" - -\end_inset - -をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -名称参照 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand nameref -reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" - -\end_inset - -のように参照のキャプションを印字します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書中参照されている部分の出力における参照番号と参照ページ番号は、LaTeXが自動的に計算します。参照の種類は、相互参照枠をクリックすると出てくる相互参照ウィン -ドウの -\family sans -形式 -\family default -フィールドで指定することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、 -\family sans -<参照ページ> -\family default -形式は、いつでも使用することができますが、 -\family sans -<参照> -\family default -形式は、文書中の付番されている部分でしか使用することができません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -節を参照したい場合には、ラベルは節見出しの中に置き、フロートを参照したいときには、ラベルをキャプションの中に置いてください。脚注の場合は、ラベルは脚注中どこにお -いても構いません。数式の参照は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:数式番号と参照" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -相互参照ウィンドウにある -\family sans -ラベルに移動 -\family default -ボタンは、カーソルを参照されているラベルの直前に移動します。すると、ボタンの文が -\family sans -戻る -\family default -に変わりますので、相互参照部にカーソルを戻したいときには、それを使うことができます。相互参照枠を右クリックすることによっても、カーソルを参照されているラベルの直 -前に持っていくことができ、ツールバーボタンの -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - -を押すと戻ることができます。。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ラベルを変更したいときは、いつでもラベル枠をクリックすることで変更することができます。変更されたラベルへの参照は、自動的にリンクを新しいラベル文に変更しますので -、この点を気にかける必要はありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もし相互参照が存在しないラベルを参照していると、出力では、 -\lang english -you will see in LyX “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and -\lang japanese -参照の代わりに二つのクエスチョンマークが印字されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -相互参照に関しては、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -』の「フロートの参照」の章に詳述されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -目次と他の一覧 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -もくじ@目次 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!こうぞう@------構造 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -あうとらいん@アウトライン|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -文書!構造 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:目次と一覧" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -目次 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:目次" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -目次は -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -一覧／目次\SpecialChar \menuseparator -目次 -\family default -メニューで挿入することができ、LyX中では灰色の枠として表示されます。枠をクリックすると文書構造ウィンドウが開かれて、目次項目が文書構造として表示され、各節を文 -書内で移動したり再配置したりすることができるようになります。したがって、この操作は第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:移動" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されている -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文書構造 -\family default -メニューの代わりとして使えます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -目次は、出力文書においては、自動的にすべての付番された節を列挙します。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:短縮タイトル" - -\end_inset - -節に述べたように、節見出しに短縮タイトルを宣言した場合、目次中では、それが節見出しの代わりに使用されます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:番号の付け方-深度" - -\end_inset - -節に、目次中にどの深さの節見出しまで載せるかを調整する方法が挙げてあります。付番されていない節は、目次には載せられません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -目次ウィンドウは、文書内の節を移動したり配置し直したりする文書構造エディタとしても使用することができます。それゆえ、目次ウィンドウは、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文書構造 -\family default -メニューを使用しても表示されるようになっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -図・表・アルゴリズム一覧 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:図・表・アルゴリズム一覧" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -図・表・アルゴリズム一覧は目次によく似ています。これらは、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -一覧／目次 -\family default -従属メニューを使って挿入することができます。一覧項目は、フロートキャプションとフロート番号になります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -URLとハイパーリンク -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -URL -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -はいぱーりんく@ハイパーリンク -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URL -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:URL" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -URL -\family default -メニューを使えば、ウェブページや電子メールアドレスへのリンクを挿入することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -右がURLの例です。（例）LyXのホームページは -\begin_inset Flex URL -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -URL文はつねに -\family typewriter -タイプライタ体 -\family default -で表示され、リンク文の形式を変更することはできません。URL文の形式を指定したい場合には、次節に説明するハイパーリンクを使用してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -URLはバックスラッシュで終わってはなりません。さもないと、LaTeXエラーになります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ハイパーリンク -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:ハイパーリンク" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ハイパーリンクは、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ハイパーリンク -\family default -メニューか、ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "href-insert" -\end_inset - -で挿入することができます。現れるダイアログには、ターゲットと名前の二つのフィールドがあります。名前は、ハイパーリンクに印字される文です。ハイパーリンク型は、 -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "LyXのホームページ" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - -のようなウェブリンク型か、 -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Lyx-docsメーリングリスト" -target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation" -type "mailto:" - -\end_inset - -のような電子メールリンク型か、ファイルへのリンクのいずれかです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ウェブリンクを挿入する際に、ハイパーリンクを通じてアプリケーションを起動するようにすることができます。この場合は、リンクターゲットに「 -\family sans -run: -\family default -」という前置詞を加えてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF出力において、ハイパーリンクは必要ならば自動的にハイフンで区切られ、DVI出力とPDF出力ではクリック可能になります。リンク文の形式を設定するには、ハイパ -ーリンク挿入枠を選択した状態にして、文字形式ダイアログを使用してください。以下は、ボールド・サンセリフ体のハイパーリンクです。（例） -\family sans -\series bold - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "LyXのホームページ" -target "http://www.lyx.org" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF特性ダイアログ（ -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -PDF特性 -\family default -メニュー）において -\family sans -色付きリンク -\family default -オプションが有効になっていれば、リンク文の色を変更することができます。例えば、この文書においてリンク文は、 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -urlcolor=blue -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -というオプションをPDF特性ダイアログの -\family sans -追加オプション -\family default -フィールドで指定することによって、青色に設定されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -付録 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふろく@付録 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:付録" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -付録は、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ここから付録を開始 -\family default -メニューで作ることができます。このメニューは、現在のカーソルのある文書位置から最後までを付録領域として指定します。この領域は、赤い枠線で表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -付録領域内のすべての章（あるいは節）は、付録として扱われ、大文字のラテン文字で付番されます。付録の小節は、この章番号の後にピリオドと小節番号をつけて表示されます -。すべての付録の節は、通常の節と同様に相互参照をすることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -（例）付録 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:謝辞" - -\end_inset - -、付録 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:書き出し" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -書誌情報 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょしじょうほう@書誌情報 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さんこうぶんけん@参考文献 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:書誌情報" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyX文書で書誌情報を生成するには、二つの方法があります。次小節で説明するように文献データベース -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -「BibTeXデータベース」として知られています。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -をインクルードするか、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:参考文献環境" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように -\family sans -書誌情報 -\family default -段落環境を使用して、手動で書誌情報を挿入するかです。この文書で使用されているような連番による引用以外、例えば著者・発行年による引用などを用いたい場合は、文献デー -タベースを使用しなくてはなりません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -書誌情報環境 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -書誌情報 -\family default -環境では、すべての段落のはじめに、番号のついた灰色の書誌情報枠がついています。これをクリックすると、ダイアログが開いて、 -\family sans -キー -\family default -と -\family sans -ラベル -\family default -を入力することができるようになります。 キーは、この文献項目を参照するのに使うシンボリック名です。例えば、この文書の書誌情報の二つめの項目はLaTeXに関する書 -籍ですが、本文書ではこの書籍のキーとして、その題名を縮めた「latexcompanion」を使っています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文献項目のキーは、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文献引用 -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" -\end_inset - -を使用して、参照することができます。こうすると引用参照枠が挿入されて、文献引用ウィンドウが開くので、選択できるキーの一覧から一つ以上のキーを選択します。挿入され -た引用参照枠には、その参照キーが表示されます。この枠を再度クリックすると、文献引用ウィンドウが開いて、参照先を変更できるようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -引用参照は、出力では角括弧に囲まれた文献項目番号として印字されます。もし項目に -\family sans -ラベル -\family default -が設定してあると、番号の代わりにラベルが印字されます。以下の二つの例は、最初がラベルなし、二番目が「謝辞」というラベル付きです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -（例1）LaTeXコンパニオン第2版 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -を見てください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -（例2）LyXプロジェクトチームのメンバーは謝辞 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - -に列挙してあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest - label via the menu -\family sans -Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Paragraph -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Settings -\family default - (toolbar button -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - -). - All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文献データベース（BibTeX） -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょじじょうほう@書誌情報!でーたべーす@データベース -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょしじょうほう@書誌情報!BibTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんけんでーたべーす@文献データベース -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:文献データベース" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ひとつの書誌情報をいろいろな文書で使用する場合には、文献データベースを使うのが便利です。 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -文献データベースは、単に論文データベースとそれぞれそのメモを管理するにも便利です。以下に言及したデータベースプログラムのほとんどは、文献情報に加えて、注釈や論評 -を保管しておくことが可能です。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -また、これを使うと、文献項目をすべて同じレイアウトに維持することがたいへん簡単にできるようになります。仕事の関連領域のすべての関係書と論文をひとつのデータベース -に収集しておくことも一案でしょう。このデータベースは、いろいろな文書から利用することができて、特定の文書の書誌情報一覧には、この文書で引用された項目のみが表示さ -れます。これによって、あなたは、どの論文・書籍を引用したかを記録しつづける労苦から解放されるのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このデータベースは、書誌情報を特定の形式で載せた、拡張子が「 -\family sans -.bib -\family default -」のテキストファイルです。形式は、 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "BibTeX-2" - -\end_inset - -やLaTeX関連書籍（ -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" - -\end_inset - -）に説明されています。このファイルはテキストエディタで作成することもできますが、通常は、データベースの項目を生成したり編集したりするには、特別なプログラムを使用 -します。 -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -に、そのような文献データベース用のプログラムの一覧があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -データベースを利用するには、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -一覧／目次\SpecialChar \menuseparator -BibT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX書誌情報 -\family default -メニューを使用します。灰色の枠が挿入されてウィンドウが表示されますので、そこで読み込む一つ以上のデータベースとスタイルファイルを指定します。 -\family sans -文献一覧を目次に追加する -\family default -オプションは、目次に書誌情報を追加します。 -\family sans -内容 -\family default -ドロップボックスでは、データベースのどの範囲を出力するかを選択することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -スタイルファイルは、すべての文献項目のレイアウトを宣言した、ファイル拡張子が「 -\family sans -.bst -\family default -」のテキストファイルです。お使いのLaTeX頒布版には複数のスタイルファイルが収められており、出版社の多くが特定のスタイルファイルを提供しているので、それを利用 -すれば、レイアウトの心配をする必要はありません。もちろん、自作のスタイルファイルを作成することもできますが、それは熟練者向けの仕事です。 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -スタイルファイルの作成に関する情報は、 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文献参照の挿入は、前節の説明したように機能します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -データベースから書誌情報を生成するのに、LyXはBibTeXというプログラムを使用します。文書設定の -\family sans -書誌情報 -\family default -面か、LyX設定の -\family sans -出力\SpecialChar \menuseparator -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\family default -面で指定すれば、BibTeXの派生版のうち、どれを用いるかを選ぶことができます。以下の派生版のいずれかを選ぶことができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -biber これは、完全なUnicodeサポートと、制限のないメモリを提供しますが、(例えば -\series bold -natbib -\series default -のような)他の書誌情報パッケージでは動作せず、 -\series bold -biblatex -\series default -パッケージでのみ動作します。多言語テキストやラテン文字を使用しない言語に推奨されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex これが既定値です。7ビットでエンコードできない特殊文字を文献項目に使用することはできず、メモリに制限があり、 -\series bold -biblatex -\series default -以外の全ての書誌情報パッケージで動作します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -bibtex8 8ビットエンコーディングにエンコードできる全ての文字を使うことができます。 -\family sans -bibtex -\family default -よりも大きいメモリを使用することができ、全ての書誌情報パッケージで動作します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -BibTeXは、派生版を指定する部分の下にオプションを指定することで、制御することができます。オプションを書き加える前に、 -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -の取扱説明書 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - -を一読することを強くお勧めします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログで -\family sans -区分した書誌情報 -\family default -オプションを選択すると、節分けされた複数の書誌情報を入れることができます。この件と他のオプションに関しては、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -』の -\emph on -BibTeXによる参照文献のカスタマイズ -\emph default -の節に詳述されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -本文書では、書誌情報を生成する二つの方法の違いを示すために、書誌情報が二つ使用してあります。ご覧いただいてわかるように、データベースから生成された書誌情報は、文 -書内で参照されたデータベース項目しか列挙していません。ここでは、書誌情報中でドイツ語の複雑な参照キーを利用可能とするために -\family sans -alphadin.bst -\family default -というスタイルファイルを使用しています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -書誌情報レイアウト -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -しょじじょうほう@書誌情報!れいあうと@レイアウト -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -引用参照ダイアログでは、特定の引用体裁を設定することができます。この機能を使うには、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ダイアログの -\family sans -書誌情報 -\family default -の項にある -\family sans -Natbib -\family default -オプションを有効にしておかなくてはなりません。引用形式が設定されると既定値は上書きされます。引用形式全体を設定するには、前節の説明のようにBibTeXスタイルフ -ァイルを使用してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、引用参照ウィンドウでは、引用参照の前後につける文を設定することもできます。以下は、参照の直後に「第3章」という文を設定しています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -（例） -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "第3ç« " -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -索引 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さくいんのせいせい@索引の生成 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:索引" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -索引登録 -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "index-insert" -\end_inset - -を使用すると、索引項目が生成されます。「 -\family sans -索引 -\family default -」というラベルがついた灰色の枠が挿入されるので、その中に索引に現れる文字列を入力します。そのとき、カーソル位置の単語あるいは現在選択されている文字列が、索引項目 -の候補として表示されているはずです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -索引一覧は、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -一覧／目次\SpecialChar \menuseparator -索引一覧 -\family default -メニューで文書に挿入します。「 -\family sans -索引 -\family default -」というラベルのついた水色の枠が、出力中で索引が印字される位置を示します。索引一覧枠は、他のLyX枠とちがってクリック可能ではありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下の小節で、索引コマンドの概要を短く説明します。LaTeXの索引機構に関して詳細な説明が欲しい場合には、LaTeX関連書籍 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook" - -\end_inset - -を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -索引項目のグループ化 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さくいん@索引!ぐるーぷか@グループ化 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -索引項目は、読者が索引中をすばやく検索できるように、しばしばグループ化されます。例えば、記号付き箇条書きと連番箇条書きの検索項目を、ともに「箇条書き」という項目 -の下にグループ化したいものとしましょう。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:箇条書き（番号）" - -\end_inset - -節の箇条書き（記号）という索引項目のテキストフィールドには -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -箇条書き ! 記号 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -と入力し、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:箇条書き（記号）" - -\end_inset - -節の箇条書き（連番）という索引項目のテキストフィールドには -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -箇条書き ! 連番 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -と入力します -\series bold - -\begin_inset Foot -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -訳注： -\series default -和文の場合に、実際にこのような索引項目を作ってしまうと、索引一覧の各項目が、読みのあいうえお順ではなく、漢字コード順に並んでしまうために、索引の機能を果たさなく -なってしまいます。索引項目が読みによって整序されるようにするためには、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:索引項目の整序" - -\end_inset - -節の機能を使って、以下のようにつねに読みとともに索引項目を作成します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -（例） -\series default -かじょうがき@箇条書き!れんばん@連番 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\series default -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここで、エクスクラメーションマーク「!」がグループ化階層の区切りを示します。階層は3段階まで可能で、各索引階層は少しずつ字下げされます。上部階層の索引項目をあえ -て作る必要はありません。上の例で「箇条書き」の索引項目を作っていなくても、ページ番号なしで出力されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ページ範囲 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さくいん@索引!ぺーじはんい@ページ範囲 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -通常、索引項目は、索引登録された節のページ番号とともに印字されます。しかし場合によっては、ひとつの索引項目でより広い範囲のページを示したいときがあるかもしれませ -ん。例えば、本文書で段落環境を索引登録したいときに、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:段落環境" - -\end_inset - -節のはじまりに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -段落環境|( -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -というコマンドを含んだ索引項目を作り、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LyXコード" - -\end_inset - -節の終わりに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -段落環境|) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -というコマンドを含んだ索引項目を作成します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -「 -\series bold -|( -\series default -」および「 -\series bold -|) -\series default -」というコマンドは、それぞれ索引範囲の開始と終了を表します。また、同一の索引項目を文書中のべつべつの場所で登録することもできます。すると、ひとつの索引項目の下に -、索引登録された部分の各ページがコンマで区切られて列挙されます。本文書の「文書!設定」という索引項目が、その例です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -相互参照 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さくいん@索引!そうごさんしょう@相互参照 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、他の索引項目を相互参照することも可能です。例えば、本文書で「GIF」という索引項目（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:画像形式" - -\end_inset - -節）は、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -GIF|see{画像形式} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -という項目（中括弧はTeXコードとして挿入しなくてはなりません）を使用して、「画像形式」という索引項目を参照しています。中括弧に囲まれた文が参照される項目です。 -参照は、出力においてはページ番号なしで出力されます -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -訳註：「see 〜」（〜を見よ）は、これ自体コマンドになっているので、日本語の文脈でもこのまま入力しなくてはなりません。そうすると、出力においても英語で「see - 〜」となってしまうので、例えばこれを「→ 〜」に変更するには、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -メニューの -\family sans -LaTeXプリアンブル -\family default -において「 -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -seename}{→}」と宣言します。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -索引項目の整序 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さくいん@索引!こうもくのせいじょ@項目の整序 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:索引項目の整序" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -索引項目にアクセント付き文字を使用することは可能ですが -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -訳註： -\series default -文書言語が「日本語」になっているときは、アクセント付き文字を、アクセントを直接入力できる欧州言語用のキーボードなどで直接入力して使用することはできません。その代 -わりに、この小節で行っているように、LaTeXコマンドを使用してアクセントを入力してやる必要があります。しかし、ここで書かれていることは、漢字コード順と索引順が -一致しない日本語全般にそのまま当てはめることができます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -、こうすると項目が索引順の規則に従わなくなる可能性があります。索引項目はアルファベット順に整序しますが、LaTeX -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -索引の生成は、バックグラウンドで追加プログラムによって実行されます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:索引プログラム" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -には、各言語がアクセントをどのような順序で並べているのかがわかりません。例として、3つのダミーの索引項目「maison」「ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -" -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -is」「ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -^ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -itre」 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -" -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -is -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -^ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -itre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! mais@ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -^ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -itre -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を作りました。これらは、「ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -" -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -is」「ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -^ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -itre」「」の順序で整序されますが、これを「ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -" -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -is」「maison」「ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -^ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -itre」の順序にしたいのです。そのためには、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -前項目@現在の項目 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -というコマンドを使用します。ここの例では、「maison」を「ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -" -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -is」の後にしたいので、maisonの索引項目を -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -ma -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -" -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -is@maison -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -とします。前項目は実際に存在する項目でなくてもかまわないので、LaTeXに項目順序を告げる単語であればどんな単語を使ってもかまいません。例として次の小節を参照し -てください。 -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -索引の生成に -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -プログラムを使用している場合には、索引項目の順序が正しくないことがあります（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:索引プログラム" - -\end_inset - -節を参照）。たとえば、 -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文書フォント" - -\end_inset - -節のaeguill LaTeXパッケージの索引項目を、他のLaTeXパッケージの索引コマンドも「 -\series bold -LaTeXパッケージ ! -\series default -」で始まっているにもかかわらず、これらの項目の後に印字してしまいます。そのわけは、aeguillの索引項目が脚注にあるからです。この -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -のバグを修正するには、使用中の文書のプリアンブルに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -let -\backslash -OrgIndex -\backslash -index -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand*{ -\backslash -index}[1]{ -\backslash -OrgIndex{#1}} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -というコマンドを書き加えて下さい。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -索引項目のレイアウト -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さくいん@索引!こうもくれいあうと@項目レイアウト -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -索引項目の外観は、文字形式ダイアログを使用して変更することができます。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! これ@ -\shape italic -これはイタリックitalic体のダミー項目です -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -また、「|」という文字のあとにLaTeXコマンドをバックスラッシュなしで入れることによってページ番号を整形することができます。例えば -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -イタリック体のページ番号:|textit -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -と書くと、イタリック体のページ番号を得ることができます。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! いたりっくたいのぺーじばんごう@イタリック体のページ番号:|textit -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -通常、LaTeXコマンドはすべてバックスラッシュで始まりますが、ここの場合に限っては、「 -\series bold -|command -\series default -」は「 -\series bold - -\backslash -command{ページ番号} -\series default -」を意味します。LaTeXの文法について詳細を学ぶには、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX文法" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -単独の索引項目の書式変更は、索引生成プログラムに -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -を使用しているときにのみ機能します。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:索引プログラム" - -\end_inset - -節をご参照ください。 -\family sans -xindy -\family default -を使用している時には、これはボールド体またはイタリック体以外には動作しません。これは、 -\family sans -xindy -\family default -はそれが実行される前にセマンティックスが定義されている必要があるからです。詳細については、 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -after "p. 678 ff." -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -をご参照ください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -一般的にいって、上述のように直接ページ番号を整形することは望ましくありません。その代わりに、プリアンブルでマクロを定義し、それを使用するべきです。例えば、索引項 -目の定義を参照しているすべてのページ参照をイタリック体にしたいとすれば、それはユーザが簡単に定義を見つけられるようにするためかもしれません。だとすれば、プリアン -ブルに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -IndexDef}[1]{ -\backslash -textit{#1}} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -と書いて、索引項目には -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -索引項目|IndexDef -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -と書いてください。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! さくいんこうもく@索引項目|IndexDef -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -このようにする利点は、あとで気が変わったり、出版社が定義はイタリック体ではなくボールド体にしてくださいと注文をつけてきたりしたときに、すべての索引項目の各々では -なく、プリアンブルのマクロのみを修正すればよいからです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、索引全体のレイアウトを変更することもできます。例えば、本文書の索引一覧枠はボールド体に指定されているので、すべての索引項目はボールド体で表示されます。 - さらに複雑な要請に対しては、いわゆる -\emph on -索引様式ファイル -\emph default -（ -\emph on -Index Style File -\emph default -）を構成しなくてはなりません。詳しくは -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -あるいは -\family sans -xindy -\family default -の取扱説明書をご参照ください（ -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -索引プログラム -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さくいん@索引 ! ぷろぐらむ@プログラム -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:索引プログラム" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もし -\family sans -xindy -\family default -が導入済みならば、LyXは索引生成にこれを使用しますが、そうでなければすべてのLaTeX頒布版に含まれている -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -プログラムを使用します -\begin_inset Foot -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -は非常に古く、開発が停止しており、たくさんの欠陥があります。中でも、 -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -は英語だけを念頭に開発されているため、英語のみで書かれた単一言語原稿しか、項目を正しく整序することができません。この整序を修正する方法は、上述したとおりですが、 -英語以外で執筆することがある場合には、 -\family sans -xindy -\family default -を使用することをご検討ください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。これらのプログラムは、どちらもLyX設定ダイアログからオプションを渡すことによって制御することができます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:LaTeXの設定" - -\end_inset - -節をご参照ください。使用できるオプションの一覧と説明は、 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "makeindex,xindy" - -\end_inset - -にあります。このダイアログでは、索引を生成するのに第三のプログラムを指定することも可能です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -複数の索引 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -多くの分野において、2つ以上の索引を作成することが行われています。例えば、通常の索引の前に「氏名索引」を別に作る必要がある場合があります。LaTeXは、そのまま -ではこの機能を提供していませんが、この機能を追加するパッケージがあります。LyXは、複数の索引を生成するのに、splitidx -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeXぱっけーじ @ LaTeXパッケージ ! splitidx -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -というパッケージを使用しています。このパッケージは、最近のLaTeX頒布版には全て収録されています。ご利用の頒布版にない場合には、TeXカタログ -\lang english - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - - -\lang japanese -を参照してください。パッケージには、LaTeXスタイルが収録されているだけでなく、導入が必要な特定のプリプロセッサも含まれていることに注意してください。詳細は、 -パッケージの取扱説明書をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXが複数の索引を使用できるようにするためには、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -索引 -\family default -を開き、「複数の索引を使用する」を有効にしてください。その下の「利用可能な索引」一覧には、標準の索引は既に含まれていることに注意してください。索引を追加するには -、索引名を(見出しに現れるのと同じ形で)「新規」入力フィールドに入力し、「追加」ボタンを押してください。すると、新しい索引が一覧中に表示されます。お望みならば、 -一覧中の索引を選択してから「色を変更」ボタンを押し、新しい索引のラベル色を変更することができます。ラベル色は、LyX作業領域で、索引項目を索引別に区別するのに役 -立ちます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書変更を適用すると、新しい索引一覧が -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -一覧/目次 -\family default -に現れ、 -\family sans -挿入 -\family default -メニューには、定義した索引のそれぞれの索引項目が現れます。作業手順は、基本的に標準の索引と同じですが、以下のような追加機能があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -特定の索引項目の属性を変更したい時は、項目を右クリックしてダイアログを開くことで行えます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -索引を右クリックすると、索引型を変更することができます。さらに、索引一覧を「従属索引」として指定することもできます。こうすると、索引一覧の見出しが一階層下げられ -ます。例えば、bookクラスを使用している場合、標準索引の見出しの様式は「章」ですが、従属索引は「節」として定義され、他の非従属索引に入れ子にすることができます -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -記号一覧／用語集 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -きごういちらん@記号一覧|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -用語集 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ようごしゅう@用語集 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Nomenclature|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -用語集 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Glossary|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -用語集 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:用語集" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -場合によっては、文書中で使われている記号一覧や用語集を、短い説明とともに掲げておく必要があるかもしれません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -記号一覧や用語集を生成するためには、LaTeXパッケージの -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -が導入されている必要があります。これは、TeX Catalogue -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -か、お使いのLaTeXシステムのパッケージマネージャから見つけることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -記号一覧・用語集の項目は、カーソルを記号項目のあとに置いて -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -用語集登録 -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "nomencl-insert" -\end_inset - -を使用することで生成することができます。「用語」というラベルのついた灰色の枠が挿入されて、ウィンドウが現れ、用語項目の入力を促します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -用語項目には、主要な項目が2つあります。ひとつは参照したい記号・用語であり、二つめは記号・用語の説明です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -用語集ダイアログのすべてのフィールドに有効なLaTeXコードを入力しなくてはなりません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -用語の定義とレイアウト -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -きごういちらん@記号一覧 ! れいあうと@レイアウト -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式に記号が使われているとき、 -\family sans -記号 -\family default -フィールド中には、LaTeX数式と同じようにして定義をしなくてはなりません。例えば、「 -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -」を得るには、 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -と挿入します。記号「$」は数式の始まりと終わりを示します。ギリシャ文字用のLaTeXコマンドは、バックスラッシュ「 -\backslash -」で始まるその文字の名前です。大文字のギリシャ文字は、コマンドを -\series bold - -\backslash -Sigma -\series default -のように大文字で始めます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -（LaTeXの文法に関する短い入門が第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX文法" - -\end_inset - -節にあります。） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -説明文を整形するのに -\family sans -文字形式 -\family default -ダイアログは使えないので、LaTeXコマンドを使用しなくてはなりません。例えば、本文書での「 -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -」の記号項目の説明は -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -文字 -\backslash -textsf{sigma}のためのダミー項目 -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -となっています。コマンド -\series bold - -\backslash -textsf -\series default -はフォントを -\family sans -サンセリフ体 -\family default -にします。もし -\series bold -ボールド体 -\series default -が得たければ、 -\series bold - -\backslash -textbf -\series default -コマンド、 -\family typewriter -タイプライタ体 -\family default -を得るには -\series bold - -\backslash -texttt -\series default -コマンド、 -\emph on -強調体 -\emph default -は -\series bold - -\backslash -emph -\series default -コマンドを使用します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -用語集項目の整序順 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ようごしゅう@用語集 ! せいじょじゅん@整序順 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -用語項目は、記号定義のLaTeXコードによってアルファベット順に整序されます。これは、例えば数式記号の場合には、望ましくない結果を得ることがあります。仮に記号 -\emph on -a -\emph default - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -symbol "a" -description "文字「a」のダミー項目" - -\end_inset - -と -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature -LatexCommand nomenclature -prefix "sigma" -symbol "$\\sigma$" -description "文字\\textsf{sigma}のダミー項目" - -\end_inset - -の用語項目があったとしましょう。両者は、「 -\family sans -a -\family default -」と「 -\family typewriter -$ -\backslash -sigma$ -\family default -」によって整序され、文字「$」は整序順が「 -\family sans -a -\family default -」よりも前ですから、 -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -は -\emph on -a -\emph default -よりも前に並ぶことになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -整序順を制御するには、用語集ダイアログの -\family sans -整列用文字列 -\family default -フィールドを編集します。用語項目は、記号定義ではなく、この項目によって整序されます。ここの例では、 -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -のこのフィールドに -\family typewriter -sigma -\family default -と入力すれば、 -\emph on -a -\emph default -は -\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ -\end_inset - -の前に来るようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -グループ化や整序項目の便利な利用法については、 -\series bold -nomencl -\series default -の取扱説明書 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - -を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -用語集オプション -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ようごしゅう@用語集 ! おぷしょん@オプション -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -nomencl -\series default -パッケージは、記号一覧や用語集の外観を調整するオプションを提供しています。以下は、それらのオプションの一部です。他のオプションに関してはパッケージの取扱説明書を -ご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refeq すべての用語項目に「 -\family sans -, see equation (eq) -\family default -」という文を加えます。ここで -\family sans -eq -\family default -は用語項目より前の最後の数式の番号です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -refpage すべての用語項目に「 -\family sans -, page (page) -\family default -」という文を加えます。ここで -\family sans -page -\family default -は用語項目が現れるページの番号です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -intoc 用語集を目次に加えます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -オプションをひとつないしそれ以上使用するには、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログの文書クラスオプションにコンマ区切りの列挙の形で加えてください。本文書では、 -\series bold -intoc -\series default -と -\series bold -refpage -\series default -オプションが使われています。 -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、以下のコマンドを用語集ダイアログの記述フィールドの最後に使用することで、上記の最初の二つのオプションと同じ動作を、特定の用語項目に対してのみ行うことができ -ます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeq -\series bold -refeq -\series default -オプションと同様 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefpage -\series bold -refpage -\series default -オプションと同様 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomrefeqpage -\series bold - -\backslash -nomrefeq -\backslash -nomrefpage -\series default -の短縮形 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -nomnorefeq, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefpage, -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\backslash -nomnorefeqpage 対応するオプションを解除する -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -「page」のような単語は、自動的に他の文書言語に翻訳されます。そうならない場合には、LaTeXプリアンブルに以下のように追記してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\noindent - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -eqdeclaration}[1]{, -\backslash -nobreakspace(#1) -\backslash -nobreakspace 式を参照} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -pagedeclaration}[1]{, -\backslash -nobreakspace{}#1 -\backslash -nobreakspace{}ページ} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -用語集の出力 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ようごしゅう@用語集 ! しゅつりょく@出力 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -記号一覧や用語集を出力するには、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -一覧／目次\SpecialChar \menuseparator -用語集 -\family default -メニューを使用します。 -\family sans -「用語集」 -\family default -というラベルのついたボックスが、出力中に用語集が印字される位置を指し示します。これを右クリックすると、記号の余白を変更することができます。以下の設定をすることが -できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -既定値 1 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -cmの空白が使用されます -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -最長のラベル幅 用語集の全項目中、最大の幅が使用されます -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ユーザ設定 任意に設定できる空白 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -印字出力においては、用語集の見出しは「Nomenclature」となります。この名前が満足でない場合には、プリアンブルで -\series bold - -\backslash -nomname -\series default -コマンドを再定義することで変更することができます。例えば、この名前を -\emph on -記号一覧 -\emph default -に変更するには、以下の行をプリアンブルに加えてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -nomname}{記号一覧} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -用語集プログラム -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ようごしゅう@用語集 ! ぷろぐらむ@プログラム -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:用語集プログラム" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、すべてのLaTeX頒布版に含まれている -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -プログラムを、用語集を生成するのに使用します。LyXの設定ダイアログを使って、他のプログラムを指定したり、 -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -にオプションを追加して制御したりすることができます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX-設定" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。使用できるオプションは、 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "nomencl,makeindex" - -\end_inset - -に説明とともに列挙されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -派生枝 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -はせいし@派生枝 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書 ! はせいし@派生枝 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:派生枝" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -出力において、文書の一部を隠した方が便利なことがあります。例えば、試験を課そうとしている教師は、とうぜん学生たちに答を見られたくないわけですが、質問と解答が同じ -文書にあれば、試験の採点者の仕事ははるかに楽になります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このような場合に、LyXでは、文を派生枝に分けて置いておくことができます。すると当該文は、その派生枝が有効にされたときのみ出力に現れるようになります。派生枝を作 -成するには、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -派生枝\SpecialChar \menuseparator -新規派生枝を挿入 -\family default -メニューを選択する(新規派生枝を指定するだけの時)か、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログの -\family sans -派生枝 -\family default -に行きます。後者の場合には、派生枝の名前を変更したり、その有効状態やLyX内部での派生枝の背景色を指定することができるほか、派生枝有効時にファイルを書き出す際、 -ファイル名に派生枝名をつけるかどうかを指定できます。さらにこのダイアログでは、二つの派生枝を統合したり(一方の派生枝名を他方の派生枝名に改名するだけです)、文書 -の派生枝一覧に「未知の派生枝」(つまり、定義しないまま他の文書からコピーアンドペーストで文書に付け加えた派生枝)を加えたりすることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -派生枝の中に入るべき文は、派生枝差込枠の中に入れます。これらの枠は、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -派生枝 -\family default -メニューから派生枝を選択して挿入することができます。派生枝の有効状態は、あとから枠を右クリックすることで変更することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下の例では、質問文だけが現れて、解答派生枝は無効にされ、したがって出力には現れません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch 質問 -status open - -\begin_layout Standard -質問：最初のノーベル物理学賞受賞者は誰でしょう？ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch 解答 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -解答：Wilhelm Conrad R -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -" -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ontgenです。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -派生枝 -\family default -で -\family sans -ファイル名後置句 -\family default -を有効にした場合には、書き出しの際、ファイル名に有効な派生枝名が追記されます。上記の派生枝を持つ「Exam.lyx」というファイルがあるものと考えてみましょう。「 -ファイル名後置句」が有効な場合には、「質問」派生枝と「解答」派生枝がともに無効ならば、PDFに書き出したファイルは「Exam.pdf」となり、「質問」派生枝のみが -有効ならば「Exam-質問.pdf」、「解答」派生枝のみが有効ならば、「Exam-解答.pdf」、両方が有効ならば、「Exam-質問-解答.pdf」となります。これに -よって、あまり労力をかけずに、文書の違う版をたやすく書き出すことができます。 -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式内など、派生枝を挿入することができない場所で条件付き出力を使用するには、各派生枝に特別なLaTeX定義を書くとよいでしょう。例えば、質問派生枝用に以下のよう -に定義し -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeXの文法への入門は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX文法" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -answer}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -解答派生枝用には -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -answer}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -のように定義します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch 質問 -status open - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -answer}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Branch 解答 -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -question}[1]{} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -newcommand{ -\backslash -answer}[1]{#1} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -すると、条件付き出力を得るのに -\series bold - -\backslash -question{ -\series default -\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\series bold -} -\series default -と -\series bold - -\backslash -answer{ -\series default -\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\series bold -} -\series default -を使用することができるようになります。以下の例では、 -\series bold - -\backslash -question -\series default -部分のみが現れます。 -\begin_inset Formula -\[ -x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}} -\] - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式中では、同様のことを数式マクロを使用して実現することができます。取扱説明書『 -\emph on -数式篇 -\emph default -』をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -PDF特性 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:PDF特性" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -PDFとくせい@PDF特性 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書設定ダイアログは、PDF特性メニューのなかで、お使いの文書のPDF出力用の特別なオプションを指定できるようになっています。ここで指定されるオプションのすべて -は、LaTeXパッケージの -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を利用します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -hyperref -\series default -を使うと、DVI出力とPDF出力中で、すべての相互参照がリンクとして現れます。つまり、あなたの文書の読者は、目次や参照をクリックして、文書の参照されている部分へ -と移動することができるのです。ダイアログタブにある -\family sans -ハイパーリンク -\family default -では、リンクの外観や書誌情報の逆参照リンクを生成するかどうかを指定することができます。逆参照は、書誌情報の各項目のうしろに、項目が引用された節やスライド、ページ -を表示するものです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -しおり -\family default -ダイアログタブでは、読者が文書内を動き回るのに便利なように、文書の各節のPDFしおりを設定するかどうかを指定することができます。しおりが、文書の節見出しと同様に -番号を振るかどうかを指定することもできます。開くしおりの階層では、PDFを開いたときにどの節階層まで表示するかを指定することができます。例えば、階層を2にしたと -きには、すべての節と小節が表示され、階層を１にすると節のみが表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -一般 -\family default -ダイアログタブのヘッダ情報は、PDFにファイル特性としてともに保存されます。多くのプログラムでは、例えば著者が誰であり、PDFが何についてのものであるかなどを自 -動的に判別するのに、これらの情報を引き出すことができます。これは、PDFを文献整理目的で整序したり仕分けしたり使用したりするのに、ひじょうに便利です。 -\family sans -自動的にヘッダを補完 -\family default -オプションを有効にすると、LyXはヘッダ情報を、文書のタイトルと著者の設定から自動的に抽出しようと試みます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -全画面モードで読み込む -\family default -オプションは、PDFを全画面モードで開きますので、プレゼンテーションに便利です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF特性は、この文書でも使用されています。この文書の文書設定を見ると、 -\series bold -hyperref -\series default -の追加オプションが使われていることがわかるでしょう。これらの意味については、hyperrefの取扱説明書 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -をご参照ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -TeXコードとLaTeX文法 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:TeXコード" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -TeXコード枠 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Texこーど@TeXコード -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:TeXコード枠" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXはバックグラウンドでLaTeXを使用しているので、LaTeXコマンドおよび要素の多くをサポートしていますが、すべてではありません。LaTeXは、さまざまな -コマンドを提供するパッケージを数百も含んでいます。つねに多くのパッケージが更新され、新しいものが追加されます。事実上すべての問題に対してLaTeXパッケージが存 -在するので、これにはほとんどすべてのことを植字できるという利点があります。しかし、もちろんLyXは、最新の状態に付いていっているわけではなく、すべてのパッケージ -とそれらの全コマンドをサポートできるわけではありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -しかし心配は要りません。LyXではTeXコード枠の中で任意のLaTeXコマンドを使用することができるのです。TeXコード枠は、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Xコード -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - -を使用して挿入することができます(短絡キー -\lang english - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - - -\lang japanese -)。枠は左クリックで開き、右クリックから -\family sans -差込枠を閉じる -\family default -で閉じることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -TeXコード枠には、完全なコマンドを挿入することもできますし、不完全なコマンドを入れることもできます。不完全というのは、通常のLyXの本文を引数として使うことが -できるという意味です。例えば、単語の周りに枠を描きたいので、 -\series bold - -\backslash -fbox -\series default -というLaTeXコマンドを使用するものとしましょう。コマンド部分 -\series bold - -\backslash -fbox{ -\series default -をTeXコード枠に書き、枠を書きたい単語のあとに、閉じ中括弧 -\series bold -} -\series default -を二つめのTeXコード枠として書きます。二つのTeXコード枠の単語が、以下の例に示すように引数になっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ERT.png - scale 89 - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -と書くと -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これは -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fbox{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -枠付き -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - } -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -の単語を含む行です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -となります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -パラメタのないLaTeXコマンドの終わりでは、LaTeXがコマンドが終了したことを認識できるよう、スペースを挿入しなくてはなりません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -簡単なLaTeX文法入門 -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeX文法 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぶんぽう@LaTeX文法 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX文法" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -比較的大きな文書や書籍を執筆するとき、LyXがバックグラウンドで使用するLaTeXコマンドを若干は知っておくことが必要になります。LaTeXはコマンドに基づいて -いるため、あなたは文章を「プログラム」することができます。このことは、もしコマンドを正しく知っていれば、文書のレイアウトを毎回変えることができるという利点があり -ます。例えば、あなたがある製品の取扱説明書を書いていて、その締切が今日中だったとしましょう。しかし上司は、あなたの仕事の出来を褒めてくれたけれども、すべてのキャ -プションラベルを太字にしてくれと言うのです。取扱説明書には、太字になっていない図表のキャプションが何百もあります。もちろん、手動ですべてのキャプションラベルを一 -日で変えることは不可能です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -そこでLaTeXが力を発揮します。上に述べたように、すべての問題に対してLaTeXパッケージが存在します。まずどれを使うか見つけなくてはならないので、LaTeX -パッケージデータベース -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Catalogue" - -\end_inset - -を使って探すことになるでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -その結果、 -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -パッケージが必要とするものであることを知ります。パッケージを使用するには、文書プリアンブル（ -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -メニュー）で -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[オプション]{パッケージ名} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -というコマンドを使用して、パッケージを読み込まなくてはなりません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXコマンドは、かならずバックスラッシュで始まり、コマンド引数を中括弧の中に入れ、オプションを大括弧の中に挿入することになっています。また、すべてのコマン -ドが引数やオプションをとるわけではないことに注意してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここの例ではパッケージ名は -\series bold -caption -\series default -です。パッケージの取扱説明書を見たところ、 -\series bold -labelfont=bf -\series default -というオプションを与えると、すべてのキャプションラベルをボールド体に変更できることがわかりましたので、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -というコマンドをプリアンブルに挿入したところ、問題は解決しました -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -captionパッケージが提供する他のコマンドについては、その取扱説明書 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "caption" - -\end_inset - -を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この例のようなよく知られた問題については、文書クラスによっては、組込の解決策が用意されていることがあることに注意してください。例えば、 -\family sans -KOMA-Script -\family default -クラスを使用すると、 -\series bold -caption -\series default -パッケージは必要なく、代わりにプリアンブルに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont{captionlabel}{ -\backslash -bfseries} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -と書けば問題は解決します。したがって、比較的大きな文書を執筆しようとしているときには、使用しようと考えている文書クラスの取扱説明書を見てみた方がいいでしょう（ -\series bold - -\backslash -setkomafont -\series default -はひとつ以上の引数をとるコマンドの一例です）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -本文中に置かれたコマンドがコマンド以降の本文のみ、あるいはコマンド引数にとられた文のみに影響を与えるのに対し、プリアンブル内に置かれたコマンドは、文書全体に影響 -します。本文中にLaTeXコマンドを挿入するには、前節で述べたようにTeXコード枠を使用してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXとその文法について、さらに詳細を知りたい場合には、LaTeX関連書籍 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "latexcompanion,latexguide" - -\end_inset - -を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{fancy} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -一時的にページ様式をカスタムヘッダ行・フッタ行に変更する -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Header -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rightmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ヘッダ行を下記のように定義する -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Header -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Header -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -leftmark -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Left Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -thepage -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Center Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -LyXユーザーの手引き -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -マジックコード: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Right Footer -\begin_inset Argument -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ユーザ設定のページヘッダ及びページフッタ -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:ユーザ設定ページヘッダ" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書 ! へっだ・ふったぎょう@ヘッダ・フッタ行 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -へっだ・ふったぎょう@ヘッダ・フッタ行 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書にユーザ設定のヘッダ行やフッタ行を定義したい時は、まず、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログ中、 -\family sans -ページレイアウト -\family default -の中で、ヘディング様式を -\family sans -装飾的(fancy) -\family default -に設定する必要があります。次に、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -モジュール -\family default -メニューの中で、「ユーザ設定ヘッダ/フッタ行」モジュールを追加してください。このモジュールは、ヘッダ及びフッタの位置によって、以下の６つの様式を提供します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -左ヘッダ・中央ヘッダ・右ヘッダ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -左フッタ・中央フッタ・右フッタ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -通常、ヘッダとフッタは文頭で設定しますが、お望みならば、どこででも変更することができます。図 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "fig:ページレイアウト" - -\end_inset - -は、ページのレイアウトと、ヘッダ及びフッタ様式に設定した行がどこに表示されるかを示したものです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float figure -placement h -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\noindent -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -左ヘッダ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -中央ヘッダ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -右ヘッダ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ページ上の通常の本文はここに入ります。ランニングヘッダは本文の上に、(脚注を含む)ランニングフッタは本文の下に来ます。ヘッダやフッタは、多くの場合、ページ番号や -章見出しや会社のロゴ等が入りますが、フロートを除き、凡そなんでも使用することができます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -左フッタ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -中央フッタ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -右フッタ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "fig:ページレイアウト" - -\end_inset - -ユーザ設定のヘッダ行およびフッタ行を伴ったページレイアウト -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -定義 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ヘッダ行を定義する際は、３つのヘッダ様式をすべて指定してください。様式に書き込んだものは、奇数ページに表示され、そのオプション引数に書き込んだものは偶数ページに -表示されます。片面文書においては、オプション引数は使用されずに無視されます。様式の内容やその引数を空欄にしたままの場合は、出力中には何も表示されません。フッタの -定義も、ヘッダと同様に行います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -定義するに際しては、いくつかのLaTeXコマンドをTeXコードで入力する必要があります( -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Xコード -\family default -メニュー)。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -thepage 現在のページ番号を出力します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -Roman{page} 現在のページ番号を大文字ローマ数字で出力します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -roman{page} 現在のページ番号を小文字ローマ数字で出力します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -leftmark 通常は、現在の節番号と節見出しを出力しますが、章がある文書の場合には、現在の章番号と章見出しを出力します。これらは、通常左ヘッダに入れるので、 -「leftmark」というコマンドになっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -rightmark 通常は、現在の小節番号と小節見出しを出力しますが、章がある文書の場合には、現在の節番号と節見出しを出力します。これらは、通常右ヘッダに入れる -ので、「rightmark」というコマンドになっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -既定ヘッダ・既定フッタ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ユーザ設定のヘッダやフッタの既定値は、空ではありません。既定のヘッダには、章及び節のタイトルが入り、中央フッタにはページ番号が入ります。ヘッダやフッタから必要の -ない項目を取り除くには、そのヘッダ様式やフッタ様式を文書に設定し、空のままに放っておきます。つまり、フッタにページ番号が必要ない場合には、空の -\family sans -中央フッタ -\family default -様式を文書内に作成してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -外観 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ヘッダ及びフッタは通常のページには表示されますが、そうでないページもあります。例えば、表題ページや、書籍の部見出し・章見出しは、それ自身の様式を持っているので、 -これらのページにはユーザ設定ヘッダやユーザ設定フッタは存在しませんが、これはまっとうなことです。例えば、章見出しページには、章見出しが太い文字ででかでかと書かれ -ていますから、章の名前が入ったヘッダを印字する必要はないわけです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -ヘッダ及びフッタの装飾線 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -既定では、ヘッダの下に0.4 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ptの太さの線が引かれ、フッタ線は描かれません。これは、文書プリアンブル中に、 -\series bold - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -headrulewidth}{太さ} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -のようなスキームで、 -\series bold - -\backslash -headrulewidth -\series default -コマンド及び -\series bold - -\backslash -footrulewidth -\series default -コマンドを使用すれば、変更することができます。ここで、「太さ」は、 -\family sans -pt -\family default -や -\family sans -mm -\family default -のような標準単位を用います。線を消したい場合には、太さを0 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ptに設定してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -装飾線には色をつけることもできますが、これにはLaTeXの知識が要ります。どうしても必要な場合には、インターネットか書籍 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Mittelbach" - -\end_inset - -の第4.4節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -複数のヘッダ行・フッタ行 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ヘッダ行やフッタ行として２行以上が必要な場合、様式での定義に通常の改行を入れることで実現することができますが、既定のヘッダ高やフッタ高は１行分しかありません。そ -こで高さを広げるには、文書プリアンブル中で -\series bold - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -headheight}{高さ} -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -のようにして、LaTeX高の -\series bold - -\backslash -headheight -\series default -や -\series bold - -\backslash -footheight -\series default -を再定義してください。ここで「高さ」は、標準単位での高さです。どのくらいの高さが必要かがわからない場合には、とりあえずヘッダやフッタを定義して、PDFで文書をプ -レビューしてみてください。それから、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -La -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -TeXログ -\family default -メニューからLaTeXログファイルを開き、次の警告ボタンを押して、 -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -パッケージからの警告がないかどうか探してください。もし警告があれば、そのヘッダやフッタに必要な最小限の高さが報告されているはずです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -本用例 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この例は、ユーザ設定ヘッダ及びフッタで何ができるかをお見せするためのものです。これは例に過ぎませんので、実際の文書では使わないでください。この例では以下の定義を -行なっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -左ヘッダ -\series bold - -\backslash -rightmark -\series default -・非必須引数は空欄 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -中央ヘッダ 空欄・非必須引数も空欄 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -右ヘッダ 空欄・非必須引数に -\series bold - -\backslash -leftmark -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -左フッタ 空欄・非必須引数に -\series bold - -\backslash -thepage -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -中央フッタ -\family sans -\series bold -\color red -LyXユーザーの手引き -\family default -\series default -\color inherit -・非必須引数に「マジックコード: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ -\end_inset - -」 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -右フッタ -\series bold - -\backslash -Roman{page} -\series default -・非必須引数は空欄 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\backslash -headrulewidth 2 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -ptに設定 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ヘッダやフッタには、フロート以外ならば、原則として何でも使用することができます。爪掛けのような特殊なものについては、 -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - パッケージの取扱説明書 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - -をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage clearpage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -pagestyle{headings} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\lang english -switches back to page style with the default headings -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -文書の断片プレビュー -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:文書の断片プレビュー" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -どうじぷれびゅー@同時プレビュー -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!ぷれびゅー@プレビュー -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXでは、完成文書がどのようになるかを、出力を見るための煩労でユーザーの思考を中断させることなく、見ることができるように、作業中の文書の各節を同時進行でプレビ -ューさせることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -必要要件 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -プレビューが動作するためには、 -\series bold -preview-latex -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! preview-latex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -（システムによっては単に -\series bold -preview -\series default -と命名されています）というLaTeXパッケージが導入されていることが必要です。もしこれがすでに導入されていなければ、TeX Catalogue - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -か、ご利用のLaTeXのパッケージマネージャで見つけることができます。 -\family typewriter -netpbm -\family default -パッケージから -\family typewriter -pnmcrop -\family default -プログラムを導入すれば、さらに美しい出力を得ることができます。Windows版LyXでは、このプログラムとLaTeXパッケージは、LyXと共に自動で導入されてい -ます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -プレビューの有効化 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もしLyX中に、例えば、数式のLaTeX出力を表示させたいとすると、 -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログの -\family sans -操作性\SpecialChar \menuseparator -表示 -\family default -にある -\family sans -画像を表示 -\family default -オプションを有効にし、 -\family sans -自動プレビュー -\family default -を -\family sans -有効 -\family default -にしてください。 -\family sans -プレビューの大きさ -\family default -とあるのは、大きさの倍率因子のことです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -すると、LyXに文書を読み込んだり挿入枠を編集し終わったりすると、プレビューが生成されるようになります。すでに読み込まれた文書のプレビューは、 -\family sans -自動プレビュー -\family default -を有効にするだけでは生成され -\emph on -ない -\emph default -ので、プレビューを有効にするには、文書を開き直さなくてはなりません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -既に読み込まれた文書のプレビューは、 -\family sans -画像を表示 -\family default -オプションを有効にしても、直ちに生成されるとは限りません。この場合には、文書を開きなおせば、プレビューが生成されます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文書の任意の箇所 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式以外にも、例えば、LyXがまだサポートしていない文書の一部の回転などのように、プレビューを見たい場合があるかもしれません。この場合には、 -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -プレビュー -\family default -メニューでプレビュー差込枠を挿入し、プレビューしたいものを、この差込枠中に挿入するか貼り付けてください。カーソルをプレビュー差込枠の外に移すと、プレビューが生成 -されます。プレビューをクリックすると、プレビューを行ったものを編集することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -一例：回転させたボックスを生成するには、LyXがまだサポートしていないLaTeXコマンド -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default -を使用します -\begin_inset Foot -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -rotatebox -\series default -は、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -ボックスの伸縮回転 -\emph default -の節で説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。例えば、周囲の本文に合うように回転角を調整したいなどの理由で、LyX中に、TeXコードボックスではなく、回転させたボックスの最終出力を見たいものとしましょう。 -そこで、プレビュー差込枠を作成し、回転させたボックスに入れる文章を中にコピーします。下記がその結果です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -この行には、 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Box Doublebox -position "c" -hor_pos "c" -has_inner_box 0 -inner_pos "c" -use_parbox 0 -use_makebox 0 -width "1in" -special "width" -height "1in" -height_special "totalheight" -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -回転させた -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -枠付き文章と 数式 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -があります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -プレビューは、着色にも機能します。以下の例では、特殊な枠付き・色付きボックスが、LaTeXコマンド -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default -を使用して作られています -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -fcolorbox -\series default -は、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -着色ボックス -\emph default -の節で説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Preview - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fboxrule 1mm -\backslash -fboxsep 1mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -これは、色付きかつ枠付きのボックスの中にある文章です。 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXにプレビューが表示されないときには、上述の通り、プレビューが有効化されていて、プレビュー差込枠内のTeXコードが有効であることを確認し、そのTeXコードが -要求するLaTeXパッケージが、文書プリアンブル中で読み込まれているかどうか、確認してください。LyXがプレビューを生成できないとすると、ほとんどの場合、文書を -閲覧することも、LaTeXエラーによってできなくなっているはずです。TeXコードを使わなくてはならないけれども、コードが正しいかどうか自信のない場合、プレビュー -差込枠は、文書全体を閲覧しないまま、コードが正しいかどうかチェックするのに最適の方法です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaTeXソースコード -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -さらに、文書全体あるいは一部のLaTeXソースをプレビューすることもできます。 -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ソースを閲覧 -\family default -メニューを使用すると、ウィンドウが開いてLaTeXコードを見ることができるようになります。このウィンドウには、現在カーソルがある段落全体のソースを表示します。L -yXのメインウィンドウで文書の一部を選択すれば、（1段落以上を選択しているときには）選択部分のみがソースコードとして表示されます。文書全体をソースとして閲覧した -いときには、ソース閲覧ウィンドウにある、そのオプションを有効にしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -詳細な検索と置換 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:詳細な検索と置換" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ちかん@置換 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -けんさく@検索 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -はじめに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXの詳細検索・置換機能を使用すれば、LyX中の複雑で書式を含んだ文章の断片や、数式の内容を検索することができるようになります。これは、標準（簡易）の検索・置 -換機能の機能向上と位置づけられます。主な機能は、以下のとおりです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -平文検索と数式検索の両方が可能ですが、後者の場合には、LyXユーザーが通常行っている方法で数式を入力することによって為されます。数式全体を検出できるだけでなく、 -複雑な数式の一部分を検出することも可能です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -検索を書式非感応にして、検索文字列を任意の文脈・様式上（標準的本文・節見出し・注釈のほか数式も）で検出することもできますし、書式感応的にして、たとえば節見出しに -入力された単語のみを検出することもできます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -検索は、対象を指定した -\emph on -範囲 -\emph default -に広げることができ、編集中の文書の子文書すべてや、開かれている全ファイル、 -\family sans -\noun on -ヘルプ -\family default -\noun default -メニューから開くことのできる全説明書などを指定することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -置換は、大文字・小文字関係を保持することができます。すなわち、置換文字列の大文字・小文字が、検索に一致した文字列の大文字・小文字に合うように、調整することができ -ます（つまり、すべて小文字か、すべて大文字か、最初の文字だけ大文字で後は小文字か、など）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -基本的な使用法 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXの詳細検索・置換機能は、 -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -検索・置換(詳細) -\family default -メニュー(短絡キー -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - -)またはツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - -で起動することができます。すると、 -\family sans -詳細な検索および置換 -\family default -ダイアログが現れます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -文字列の検索 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -検索対象 -\family default -欄のLyXミニエディタに簡単な単語を入力し、その下の -\family sans -次候補 -\family default -ボタンをクリックして（あるいは単に -\family sans -リターン -\family default -キーを押して）その単語を検索してください。入力された単語は、平文モードと数式モードの両方で検出されるだけでなく、強調体・ボールド体・標準体のすべてと、節見出しと -本文の両方で検出されます。 -\family sans -リターン -\family default -を繰り返し押すと前方検索をし続けます。同様に、 -\family sans -シフト -\family default -+ -\family sans -リターン -\family default -を押すと後方検索を行います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -大文字/小文字を区別 -\family default -オプションは、検出中に、検索エディタに入力したのと同じ大小文字を持つものにだけ一致するようにします。 -\family sans -単語全体 -\family default -オプションを指定すると、単語の切れ目ごとにのみ一致します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -数式の検索 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ -\end_inset - -であれ、より複雑な -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - -であれ、数式は、 -\family sans -検索 -\family default -エディタ中に数式を入力することによって検索することができます。数式検索中には、単独の数式も検出されますし、数式の一部や、その一部が入れ子になっている部分にも一致 -します。例えば、前出の各式は -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$ -\end_inset - -のような式の一部にも一致します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -様式感知検索 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、特定の様式を持った文章を検索することも可能です。そのためには、ダイアログ中の -\family sans -設定 -\family default -タブを表示させて -\family sans -様式を無視 -\family default -オプションを無効にした上で、 -\family sans -検索 -\family default -エディタに入力を行います。すると、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -通常の単語を入力して検索を行うと、強調体やボールド体の単語は検出しません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -強調体またはボールド体の単語を入力して検索を行うと、同じフェイスかつ同じ文字様式を持つ単語にのみ一致します。ただし、例えば強調文字は、単独で検出されるだけでなく -、より長い強調文に含まれる部分にも一致することに注意してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -節見出しに通常の単語を入力し、検出を行うと、節見出しに含まれる同じ単語にのみ一致します。また、節様式に加えて強調体やボールド体が検索文字に指定されると、これらと -同じ様式を持つ部分のみが検出されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -別行立て数式中の数式の一部には、別行立て数式中のものにのみ一致し、行中数式には一致しないものがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -置換 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -検索 -\family default -エディタに入力した文字列に一致する字句は、 -\family sans -置換 -\family default -エディタに入力した字句で置き換えることができます。次候補を見つけて置換するには、、 -\family sans -置換 -\family default -ボタンをクリックするか、 -\family sans -置換 -\family default -エディタの中で -\family sans -リターン -\family default -を押すか -\family sans -シフト+リターン -\family default -を押してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書中の一致する字句の場所に、LyXのあらゆる書式を用いた字句を置き換えることができます。この能力を用いた典型例は以下のとおりです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -ある単語を、特定の書式を持った同じ単語に置換します。例えば、「func()」という単語を、タイプライタ体の「 -\family typewriter -func() -\family default -」に置換します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -数式記号の表記法の書き変えを行います。例えば、「 -\begin_inset Formula $R$ -\end_inset - -」をすべて「 -\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$ -\end_inset - -」にしたり(標準文の中に現れる「R」がすべて置き換えられてしまうのを防ぐために、 -\family sans -単語全体 -\family default -と -\family sans -大文字/小文字を区別 -\family default -オプションを有効にして、 -\family sans -設定 -\family default -タブで -\family sans -書式を無視 -\family default -オプションを無効にするとよいでしょう)、 -\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ -\end_inset - -を -\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,j}$ -\end_inset - -に、 -\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ -\end_inset - -を -\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ -\end_inset - -に変更したりします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -進んだ使い方 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -正規表現(regexp)に基づいた検索機構が備わっています -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -正規表現のよい説明がWikipediaの以下の項目にあります。 -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。 -\family sans -検索 -\family default -エディタにregexp差込枠を挿入することで、正規表現検索を行うことができます。これは、カーソルが -\family sans -検索 -\family default -エディタ中にある時に -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -正規表現を挿入 -\family default -メニューを選択することで実行できます。regexp差込枠に入力した文字列は、正規表現一致規則にしたがって一致し -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ただし、表現は、整ったLyX中の語句に一致しなくてはならないという制約があります。つまり、LaTeXコードに一致するときに、{}の片側だけが含まれるような部分は -、一致させる表現に含まれてはなりません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -、regexp差込枠外の文字列は、文書中のまったく同一の文字列に対して一致します。regexp差込枠は、通常どおりカットアンドペーストできることに注意してくださ -い。この機能を使った例としては、以下のようなものがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -決まった分母を持つ全ての分数を検索する。例えば、 -\family sans -検索 -\family default -エディタに分数 -\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ -\end_inset - -を入力すると(分子の -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - -は全てに一致するという正規表現です)、この分母を持つ全ての分数が検出されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Enumerate -決まった様式を持つ全ての文章を検索する。例えば、 -\family sans -設定 -\family default -タブの -\family sans -書式を無視 -\family default -オプションを無効にして、正規表現 -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - -を入力し、それに強調体やボールド体を設定すると、全ての強調体やボールド体に一致します。また、記号付きないし連番箇条書きや節見出しに正規表現 -\begin_inset Formula $.*$ -\end_inset - -を入力すると、全ての記号付きないし連番箇条書きや節見出しに一致します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -最後に、regexp中の表現への参照は、通常どおり行うことができます。つまり、表現の一部を丸括弧()で囲むと、これは -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - -や -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ -\end_inset - -で参照することができます(regexpモードでの -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash$ -\end_inset - -記号は、バックスラッシュ鍵を2回押すことで入力することができます)。たとえば、 -\begin_inset Formula $([a-z]+)[[:blank:]]\backslash1$ -\end_inset - -という表現は、単語の繰り返しがあればそれに一致します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -後方参照は、同じregexp内で使われるときでも、異なる複数のregexp内で使われるときでも機能することに注意してください。後者の場合、後方参照表現は絶対表現 -あり、例えば -\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ -\end_inset - -は、つねに入力されている全てのregexpのうち、最初の部分に一致します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -置換文字列での後方参照は、(まだ)実装されていないことに注意してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -スペルチェック -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:スペルチェック" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -すぺるちぇっく@スペルチェック -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXには、組込のスペルチェッカーがあります。 -\family sans -ツール -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -スペルチェック -\family default -メニューか -\family sans -F7 -\family default -キー、あるいはツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show spellchecker" -\end_inset - -を使用すると、現在のカーソル位置からスペルチェックが始まります。誤った(或いは未知の)単語が検出されるとサイドバーが現れるので、2行目の欄で、それを編集したり置 -換したりすることができます。未知の単語が検出された時には、その単語がハイライト表示され、その部分が見えるところまで本文がスクロールします。スペルチェッカーサイド -バーには、修正候補がある場合には、それを表示するボックスがあります。修正候補の一つをクリックした場合には、それが -\family sans -置換 -\family default -フィールドに転記されますが、ダブルクリックした場合には、その候補で直ちに置換が実行されます。未知ではあるけれども正しくタイプされた単語は、個人辞書に登録すること -ができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -既定では、使用される辞書ファイルは、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログで設定される文書言語によって決定されます。文書言語用の辞書を持っていない場合には、スペルチェックを実行しようとするとエラーメッセージが表示されます。ス -ペルチェッカーダイアログの一番上の欄で、いずれかの言語を選ぶことで、単語の言語を指定することができます。LyXは複数の言語を含む文書でも正しくスペルチェックを行 -うことができます。これは、各言語の箇所を正しくマークしており、対応するスペルチェッカー辞書が導入済みでなくては、機能しません。それが為されていれば、LyXは、自 -動的に適当な辞書ファイルを切り替えて用います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Foot -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -（訳註） -\series default -通常、日本語用のスペルチェック用辞書はないので、日本語はこの場合に該当します。例えば、スペルチェッカーが -\family sans -aspell -\family default -のときに -\family sans -代替言語 -\family default -を「 -\family sans -en -\family default -」にしておくと、文書言語が日本語でも英語版の -\family sans -aspell -\family default -を実行することはできます（ただし、 -\family sans -aspell (library) -\family default -では代替言語は使えません）。しかしながら、単語の区切りは空白で判断されるため、この方法では、英単語と周りの日本語のあいだに空白がないと、英単語が正しく検出されま -せん。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here -\lang japanese -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -There are 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files for each language. - To install a dictionary, copy the 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files into LyX's installation subfolder -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -dicts -\family default - and restart LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -さらに詳細な設定 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXの設定ダイアログの -\family sans -言語設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -スペルチェッカー -\family default -面では、以下の設定を行うことができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -綴り検証エンジン LyXでスペルチェックに使用させるライブラリを選択します。使用中のプラットホームに依存しますが、 -\family typewriter -aspell -\family default -・ -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default -・ -\family typewriter -enchant -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -enchant自体は、いろいろなバックエンドを設定できるラッパーライブラリです。詳しくは、enchantの取扱説明書ないしmanページをご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -が使用出来ます。Windowsでは、 -\family typewriter -hunspell -\family default -のみ利用できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -代替言語 本フィールドが空でないときは、LyXは、文書言語の如何にかかわらず、ここで指定された言語を、つねにスペルチェックに使用するようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -エスケープ文字 ここで、スペルチェッカーがエスケープする必要がある非標準文字を指定できます(例： ドイツ語のウムラウト)。これは通常必要ではありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -複合単語を受け入れる スペルチェッカーが「passthrough」のような複合単語を綴り間違いと判断しないようにします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -連続スペルチェック 入力するのと同時進行で綴りを検証します。綴り間違いには、赤点線で下線が引かれます。下線の引かれた単語を右クリックすると、綴り候補がコンテクス -トメニューに表示されます。そのうち一つを選択すると、綴り違いの単語が提案された単語で置換されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -注釈とコメントの綴りを検証する 有効にすると、出力されない文書内容の綴りも検証されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -類語辞典 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -るいごじてん@類語辞典 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Thesaurus|see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -類語辞典 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - } -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:類語辞典" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、多国語の類語辞典を提供し、LibreOffice,OpenOfficeやFirefoxと同じ類語辞典フレームワークを使用しています(つまり、 -\family typewriter -MyThes -\family default - -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -類語辞典ライブラリをLyXの一部として使用しています)。よって、LyXは、多言語で利用可能なOpenOfficeの類語辞典に直接アクセスすることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -本節では、新しい辞書の導入の仕方と、それをLyXで利用する方法を解説します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -類語辞典の準備 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family typewriter -MyThes -\family default -/OpenOffice類語辞典は、1言語あたり2つのファイルから成り、1つはデータを含む拡張子 -\emph on -*.dat -\emph default -のファイルと拡張子 -\emph on -*.idx -\emph default -のインデックスファイルです。ファイル名は、特定の言語の言語コード(例えば、英語の場合は -\family sans -en_EN -\family default -)を含むように標準化されています。例えば、英語ファイルは -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_en_EN_v2.idx -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -th_en_EN-v2.dat -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed on a Linux - system, these files should be already on your system. - On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be - installed. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here -\lang japanese -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\lang english -To install a dictionary, copy the 2 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -files into LyX's installation subfolder -\family sans -~ -\backslash -Resources -\backslash -thes -\family default - and restart LyX. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -類語辞書を使う -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -類語辞典を使うには、単語を選択するか、単語の直後にカーソルを置いて、 -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -類語辞典 -\family default -メニューかツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "thesaurus-entry" -\end_inset - -を使うと、ダイアログが現れて、関連しているとみなされる単語が表示されるので、単語の置換に使用することができます。提案語はカテゴリごとに分類されています。類語辞典 -は、同義語を表示するだけでなく、包摂語や被包摂語( -\emph on -tree -\emph default -に対する -\emph on -plant -\emph default -など)、複合語( -\emph on -tree diagram -\emph default -など)、反対語( -\emph on -men -\emph default -に対する -\emph on -women -\emph default -など)も分類とともに表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -言語はカーソル位置の言語によって自動的に選択されますが、ダイアログ中で切り替えることもできます。ダイアログ中ではまた、直接検索する単語を新しく入れることもできま -す。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -類語辞典は、フレーズを取り扱うことはできず(前出のtree diagramのように辞書にある複合語しか取り扱えません)、いわゆる見出し語形、すなわち辞書に現れる -形を使用しなくてはなりません(名詞については一人称単数直説法能動態、動詞については不定詞)。例えば、 -\emph on -reports -\emph default -や -\emph on -reporting -\emph default -のような単語形を引いても結果は得られませんが、 -\emph on -report -\emph default -では結果が表示されます。もっともよい方法は、単語の見出し語部分のみを選択すれば(例えば -\emph on -reports -\emph default -のうち -\emph on -report -\emph default -)、ダイアログの検索文字列を調整することなしに提案を得ることができ、おそらく置換も正しく動作するでしょう(選択部分のみが置換されるので残りの部分は元のままです) -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -変更追跡機能 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -へんこうついせききのう@変更追跡機能 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!へんこうついせききのう@変更追跡機能 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:変更追跡機能" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ひとつの文書を共同して作成するときには、他の人々が文書に加えた変更が強調表示され、変更を受け入れるかどうか決めることができると、この上なく便利です。この機能は、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更を追跡 -\family default -メニューで変更追跡を有効にすることによって利用することができるようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -すると文書に加えられた変更点は、下線とカラーで強調されるようになり、追加部分は -\bar under -\color blue -下線付き文章 -\bar default -\color inherit -、削除部分は -\strikeout on -\color blue -取り消し文章 -\strikeout default -\color inherit -のように表示されるようになります。色は、変更した執筆者によって異なります。色は、LyX設定ダイアログの -\family sans -操作性・色 -\family default -面で変更できます -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いろ@色 ! へんこうついせき@変更追跡 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -。執筆者と変更の日時は、カーソルを変更箇所にあわせると、LyXのステータスバーに表示されます。ツールバーボタン -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - -を押したときも同じ情報が表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -変更追跡が有効にされると、以下のような校閲ツールバーがLyXに表示されるようになります。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -つーるばー@ツールバー ! こうえつ@校閲 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上の校閲ツールバーは、左から右へ順に以下のボタンを含んでいます。 -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-track" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更を追跡 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-output" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator -出力に変更を表示 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -次の変更へ移動 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更を承認 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "change-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更を却下 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "changes-merge" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更を統合 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-accept" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator -全変更を承認 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "all-changes-reject" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator -全変更を却下 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -注釈\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X注釈 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-next" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator -次の注釈 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -校閲ツールバーは、変更を承認・却下したり統合したりするのに便利です。変更点を選択して、希望するツールバーボタンを押してください。変更を統合する際には、ウィンドウ -が現れて、現在のカーソル位置の次の変更に関する情報を表示しますので、特定の変更点をわざわざ選択する必要がありません。統合ウィンドウでは、変更を承認するか却下する -かを決定して次の変更点へ移動することができますので、この方法を使って、文書中の全ての変更点を確認することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ツールバーに注釈関連のボタンが二つあるのは、変更点を説明するのに注釈の利用が不可欠なためです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -加えられた変更を出力に表示するためには、 -\series bold -dvipost -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! dvipost -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -というLaTeXパッケージが導入されていることが必要です。これはTeX Catalogue -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -またはお使いのLaTeXシステムのパッケージマネージャから見つけることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -文書比較 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -ぶんしょひかく@文書比較 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -比較 -\family default -メニューを使用すると、異なる２つのLyXファイルを比較することができます。比較結果は、差異が表示され、かつ変更追跡機能が有効化された、LyXファイルとして出力さ -れます。比較ダイアログでは、 -\family sans -文書設定の複写元 -\family default -オプションを用いて、出力される差異表示ファイルに、どの文書から文書設定を引き継がせるのかを指定することができます。 -\family sans -出力における変更追跡機能を有効にする -\family default -オプションを有効にすると、変更追跡オプションの -\family sans -出力に変更を表示 -\family default -が有効になり、差異表示ファイルのPDF出力にも差異が表示されるようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -国際化サポート -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -こくさいかさぽーと@国際化サポート -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この節では、お使いになりたい言語でLyXを使う方法を説明します。西欧言語以外の言語の中には、当該言語用にLyXを設定する方法を説明したWikiページがあるものも -あります -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese,Lithuanian,Latvian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、言語以外に発音記号もサポートしています。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:特殊文字" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -言語オプション -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -げんご@言語!おぷしょん@オプション -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!げんご@言語 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログでは、お使いの言語用に、言語と文字コードを設定することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文字コード -\family default -ボックスでは、LaTeX出力用に使用したい文字コード表を選択することができます。言語既定値オプションは、ほとんどの場合適切に機能しますので、通常はこれを選択して -おくのがよいでしょう。他の文字コードオプションについては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:特殊文字" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -キーボード配置表の設定 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -例えば、米国向けキーボードを持っていて、英語ではない言語で執筆したい場合、別のキー配置を使用することができます。米国向けキーボードでイタリア語を書きたい場合には -、LyXでイタリア語キー配置を使うように設定できます。設定ダイアログでは、二つまでのキーボード配置表を選ぶことができます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:キーボード配置表" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。第1及び第2キーボード言語を選択することができるので、その後どちらを使用するかを指定してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -最後に、いくつかのキー配置だけを変更したり、あるいはまったく別のキー配置（例えばバルカン語、とか -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -（訳註） -\series default -よくわからない人は『Star Trek』を参照のこと。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -）を作りたいことがあるかもしれません。例えば、通常は米国向けキーボードでイタリア語を書いているけれども、ときおりドイツ語からの引用を入れたいかもしれません。その -ような場合には、自分専用のキーボード配置表を書いたり、既存の配置表を欲しい文字をサポートするように修正したりすることができます。この点やその他のカスタマイズに関 -しては、取扱説明書 -\emph on -カスタマイズ篇 -\emph default -に記載があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -\start_of_appendix -ユーザーインタフェース -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:ユーザーインタフェース" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この付録は、使用できるメニュー全ての一覧と、その各機能を説明しています。これは、ユーザーの手引で特別なトピックを探している場合の早見表として作られています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ファイルメニュー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -めにゅー@メニュー!ふぁいる@ファイル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -ファイル -\family default -メニューの下には、基本操作といくつかの応用操作が含まれています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -新規 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -新規文書を生成します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -新規（雛形使用） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニューを使うと、使用する雛形を尋ねられます。雛形を選択すると、本来、手動で設定しなくてはならないレイアウトの組み合わせが、自動的に文書に設定されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -開く -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書を開きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -直近のファイルを開く -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここの従属メニューは、最近開いたファイルの一覧を表示します。ファイルを開くには、そのうち一つをクリックしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -閉じる -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -現在の文書を閉じます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -全て閉じる -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -すべての開かれた文書を閉じます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -保存 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -現在の文書を保存します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -名前を付けて保存 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -現在の文書に新しい名前をつけて別のファイルとして保存します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -全て保存 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -すべての開かれた文書を保存します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -保存済み文書に復帰 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -現在の文書をディスクから読み直します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -バージョン管理 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -複数人で同じ文書を作業するときに使用しますor when one person wants to keep a careful archive - of changes。取扱説明書 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -LyXにおけるバージョン管理 -\emph default -の節で説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -読み込み -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -古いバージョンのLyXファイル・HTMLファイル・LaTeXファイル・NoWebファイル・平文ファイル・コンマ区切りの表形式平文ファイル（CSV）を新規LyX文 -書として読み込むことができます。これらのファイルは、新規のLyX文書として読み込まれます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -メニュー項目の -\family sans -平文 -\family default -を使うと、テキスト中の改行は新しい段落となります。メニュー項目の -\family sans -平文（行を連結して） -\family default -を使用すると、一続きの全ての行が、ひとつの大きな段落として読み込まれます。ファイル中に空白行があると、そこから別の段落になります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -書き出し -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:書き出し" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書は、さまざまなファイル形式に書き出すことができます。書き出したファイルは、元のLyXファイルのあるディレクトリに置かれます。メニュー項目は、導入状態によって -異なります。これは、LyXがシステム走査をしたときにどんなプログラムが見つかったかに依存します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下は、利用可能な項目のすべてです。これらのいくつかに関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節に詳述されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -CJK -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -L -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -yX -\family default - 日中韓（CJK）版LyX 1.4.xの形式 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -LyX 1.5.0以降、CJKサポートは完全にLyXに統合されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -DocBook -\family default - マークアップ言語 -\family typewriter -DocBook -\family default -で使用されるSGML言語で書かれたテキストファイル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -DocBook -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XML) -\family default - マークアップ言語 -\family typewriter -DocBook -\family default -で使用されるXML言語で書かれたテキストファイル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -DraftDVI -\family default - LaTeXのネイティブDVI形式。この形式は、文書中のファイルパスやファイル名に特殊文字や空白がある場合には適切ではありません。LyXでは、この形式は、 -\family sans -DVI -\family default -に書きだす前の前処理として内部的に使用されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -DVI -\family default - DVI形式 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - プログラム -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -を使用したDVI形式。UnicodeとTeXフォント以外の使用をサポートしています。 -\series bold - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default - いまのところ、すべてのDVIビューアがこの出力形式を適切に表示できるわけではありません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Graphviz -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Dot -\family default - プログラム -\family typewriter -Graphviz -\family default -経由でグラフによる可視化を行うのに用いられる、プログラミング言語 -\family typewriter -Dot -\family default -で書かれたテキストファイル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -HTML -\family default - HTML形式（HTML変換子は第三者製であり、すべての場合に機能するとは限りません） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -HTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(MS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Word) -\family default - -\family sans -MS Word -\family default -に読み込み可能なHTML形式。このため、数式はビットマップフォントとして埋め込まれ、 -\family sans -MathML -\family default -形式にはなりません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -( -\family default -LuaT -\family sans - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family default -eX -\family sans -) -\family default -プログラム -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -と互換性のあるLaTeXソースで書かれたテキストファイル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - テキストファイルに書かれたLaTeXソース。くわえて、文書中に使われているすべての画像は、 -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -プログラムが読み込み可能な形式（GIF・JPG・PDF・PNG）に変換されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(plain) -\family default - テキストファイルに書かれたLaTeXソース。くわえて、文書中に使われているすべての画像は、 -\family typewriter -latex -\family default -プログラムが読み込み可能な唯一の形式であるEPS形式に変換されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\family default -( -\family sans -XeT -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eX -\family default -) -\family sans - -\family default -プログラム -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -と互換性のあるLaTeXソースで書かれたテキストファイル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -LilyPond -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -book -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(La -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -TeX) -\family default - 音楽記譜ソフトウェア -\family typewriter -LilyPond -\family default -の文法に沿ったLaTeXソースで書かれたテキストファイル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -L -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -yX書庫 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(zip|tar.gz) -\family default - 文書と、そのコンパイルに必要なすべてのファイル(画像・子文書・BibTeXファイル等)を含んだ、zip圧縮ファイルまたはtar.gz圧縮ファイルを生成します -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -L -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -yX -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -z.y.x -\family default - LyX z.y.x版（「z」 and 「y」はバージョン番号に変換して表示されます）が読み込み可能なLyX文書形式 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -L -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -yXHTML -\family default - LyX内蔵のXHTMLエンジンを使用したHTML形式 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -NoWeb -\family default - 文芸的プログラミング言語 -\family typewriter -NoWeb -\family default -の書式に則ったテキストファイル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -OpenDocument -\family default - OpenDocument形式のテキストファイル。 -\family sans -LibreOffice -\family default -・ -\family sans -OpenOffice -\family default -・ -\family sans -KOffice -\family default -・ -\family sans -Abiword -\family default -などで開くことが可能（OpenDocument変換子は第三者製であり、すべての場合に機能するとは限りません）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(dvipdfm) -\family default - -\family typewriter -dvipdfm -\family default -プログラムを使用して変換するPDF形式。内部的にDVIファイルを生成し、それからPDFファイルに変換します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - プログラム -\family typewriter -LuaTeX -\family default -を使用したPDF形式。直接PDFファイルを生成します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default - -\family typewriter -pdflatex -\family default -プログラムを使用して変換するPDF形式。直接PDFファイルを生成します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2pdf) -\family default - -\family typewriter -ps2pdf -\family default -プログラムを使用して変換するPDF形式。内部的にPostScriptファイルを生成し、それからPDFファイルに変換します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default - プログラム -\family typewriter -XeTeX -\family default -を使用したPDF形式。直接PDFファイルを生成します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -平文 -\family default - テキスト形式 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -平文 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(ps2ascii) -\family default - テキスト形式。まず文書をPostScript形式に変換し、そこから -\family typewriter -ps2ascii -\family default -プログラムを使用してテキスト形式に書き出されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Postscript -\family default - -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -プログラムを使用して変換するPostScript形式 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description - -\family sans -Sweave -\family default - 統計プログラミング言語 -\family typewriter -R -\family default -を使用したLaTeXソースで書かれたテキストファイル。 -\family typewriter -R -\family default -関数 -\family typewriter -Sweave -\family default -を使用することで、LaTeX中で -\family typewriter -R -\family default -コマンドを使用することが可能になります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -もしDVI・PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex)・Postscriptのうち、ひとつでもメニュー項目から漏れていたならば、導入されているLaTeXを更新する必要があります。更新したあとには -LyXの再設定を行わなくてはなりません。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:LaTeXの設定" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lyxのさいせってい@LyXの再設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -印刷 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニューでは、文書をPostScript形式のファイルへ書き出したり、それをプリンタに送ったりすることができます。プリンタもPostScript形式の文書を -使用します。PostScriptへの変換は、LyXがバックグラウンドで -\family typewriter -dvips -\family default -プログラムを使用して行います。詳しい情報については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:ファイルを印刷" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -FAX -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニュー項目は、ファックスプログラムが導入されているときのみ表示されます（Windowsでは、さらにこのプログラムをLyXのPATH前置詞に登録しなくてはな -りません。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:パス" - -\end_inset - -節をご参照ください）。このメニュー項目を使用すると、 -\family typewriter -hylaptex -\family default -や -\family typewriter -kdeprintfax -\family default -のようなファックスプログラムへ使用中の文書を転送することができます。転送されるファイルの既定書式は -\family sans -PostScript -\family default -です。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:変換子" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、書式はLyX設定で変更することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -新規ウィンドウ・ウィンドウを閉じる -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXの新規インスタンスを開いたり閉じたりします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -終了 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -保存していないすべての文書を保存するように促してから、終了します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -編集メニュー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -めにゅー@メニュー ! へんしゅう@編集 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -元に戻すとやり直す -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:元に戻すとやり直す" - -\end_inset - -節に解説されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -切り取り・コピー・貼り付け・直近のものを貼り付け・特別な貼り付け -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:基本的な編集機能" - -\end_inset - -節に解説されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -差込枠全体を選択 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -カーソルの置かれている差込枠の内容を選択します。カーソルが差込枠の外にある場合には、文書全体が選択されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -全てを選択 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書全体を選択します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -検索／置換(簡易) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:基本的な編集機能" - -\end_inset - -節に解説されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -検索／置換(詳細) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:詳細な検索と置換" - -\end_inset - -節に解説されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -段落を上（下）へ移動 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これは、現在カーソルがある段落を一段落分、上に上げたり下に下げたりします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文字形式 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文字微調整" - -\end_inset - -節に解説されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -段落設定 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -だんらく@段落 ! せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落の配置や行間、ラベル幅の設定ができます。これらの設定は、カーソルのある段落に対してのみ有効です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、段落の第一行が字下げされるのを止めることができます。このオプションは、前もって、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログの -\family sans -本文レイアウト -\family default -面で、段落区切りに字下げを選択したときにのみ有効です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -表の設定と数式 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これら二つのメニューは、カーソルが表ないし数式の中にあるときにのみ、完全に有効化されます。ここでは、当該表ないし数式の特性を、変更することができます。表の特性は -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:表" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられており、数式の特性に関しては第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:数式" - -\end_inset - -章に述べられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -リストの階層を上げる／下げる -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この二つのメニューは、入れ子にすることのできる環境の上にカーソルがあるときにのみ有効化されます。これらは、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:入れ子" - -\end_inset - -節および第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:番号の付け方-深度" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、環境の入れ子の階層を上げたり下げたりします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -表示メニュー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -めにゅー@メニュー ! ひょうじ@表示 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -表示 -\family default -メニューの最下部には、開かれている文書が一覧表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -すべての差込枠を展開／閉じる -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書中のすべての差込枠を展開したり、閉じたりします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -数式マクロを展開／畳む -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -現在の数式マクロを展開したり、畳んだりします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式マクロは、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -数式篇 -\emph default -』に記述があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ソースを閲覧 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:文書の断片プレビュー" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられているように、現在の文書のソースコードを表示するウィンドウを開きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -メッセージを表示 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -コンソールメッセージを表示するウィンドウを開きます。これは、LyXのデバッグ(つまりこのプログラムのエラーを捕まえる)や、バックグラウンドでLaTeXが文書を処 -理するのに何が起こっているかを見るのに便利です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -表示 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニュー項目は、全体の設定(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節参照)か文書設定(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節参照)で指定した既定出力形式(例えばPDF)で出力を生成し適切なビューアでそれを表示します。閲覧プログラムは、設定で変更することができます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。既定の閲覧プログラムは、LyXが最初にシステム走査をしたときに、自動的に設定されています。既定の出力形式は、 -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default -です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -表示(他の形式) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この従属メニューでは文書を他の出力形式で見ることができます。には、文書の実際の出力を、外部プログラムで閲覧することができる各ファイル形式が一覧表示されます。出力 -形式を閲覧するためのメニュー項目は、システムの導入のしかたによって異なります。これは、LyXがシステム走査をしたときに見つかったLaTeXプログラムに依存するの -です。潜在的に出力しうる全形式は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:書き出し" - -\end_inset - -節に掲げてあります。少なくとも -\family sans -DVI -\family default -と -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(pdflatex) -\family default -のメニュー項目は、メニューに登場するはずです。これらのうち一つでも欠けているようならば、導入されているLaTeXを更新する必要があります。更新したあとにはLyX -の再設定を行わなくてはなりません。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:LaTeXの設定" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lyxのさいせってい@LyXの再設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -メニューを実行すると、閲覧プログラムが実行されます。閲覧プログラムは、設定で変更することができます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。既定の閲覧プログラムは、LyXが最初にシステム走査をしたときに、自動的に設定されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -更新 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニュー項目は、新しいビューアウィンドウを開くことなしに、既存の閲覧表示を(前節で述べられているとおり既定の出力形式で)更新します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -更新(他の形式) -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この従属メニューでは、新しいビューアウィンドウを開くことなしに、他の出力形式の閲覧表示を更新します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -親文書を表示 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニュー項目は、使用中の文書が他の文書、すなわちこの文書の「親」にインクルードされているときのみ表示されます(このトピックについての詳細は、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -子文書 -\emph default -の節をご覧下さい。この項目を使用すると、子文書からその親文書を見ることができるようになります。つまり、ある書籍の一章分である子文書で作業をしている場合、 -\family sans -表示 -\family default -はその章だけを出力するのに対して、 -\family sans -親文書を表示 -\family default -は書籍全体の出力を生成します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この関数で使用される形式は、全体の設定(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節参照)か文書設定(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節参照)で指定した既定出力形式となります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -親文書を更新 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニュー項目は、使用中の文書が他の文書、すなわちこの文書の「親」にインクルードされているときのみ表示されます(このトピックについての詳細は、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -子文書 -\emph default -の節をご覧下さい。この項目を使用すると、子文書からその親文書に切り替えることなしに、その表示を更新します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この関数で使用される形式は、全体の設定(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節参照)か文書設定(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節参照)で指定した既定出力形式となります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -画面を分割 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これは、LyXの画面を垂直または水平に分割します。これによって、異なる文書を比較するために同時に表示したり、同じ文書の違う場所を表示したりすることができます。三 -つ以上の文書を同時に表示するのに、複数回分割することもできます。分割表示をやめるには、 -\family sans -現在の表示を閉じる -\family default -メニューを使用してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -現在の表示を閉じる -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -分割表示を閉じます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -全画面表示 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニューを使用するかF11キーを押すと、メニューバーとすべてのツールバーが消え、本文だけが表示されます。さらに、LyXメインウィンドウが全画面表示されます。 -全画面表示から通常の表示に戻るには、F11を押すか、右クリックしてコンテクスト・メニューから全画面表示を解除してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ツールバー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -つーるばー@ツールバー -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:ツールバー" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニューでは、さまざまなツールバーの表示を設定することができます。すべてのツールバーと -\family sans -コマンドバッファ -\family default -は、表示したり非表示にしたりすることができます。 -\emph on -表示 -\emph default -の状態は、メニューに付くチェックマークで表されます。 -\family sans -校閲 -\family default -・ -\family sans -表 -\family default -・ -\family sans -数式パネル -\family default -・ -\family sans -数式マクロ -\family default -・ -\family sans -数式 -\family default -の各ツールバーは、これに加えて、 -\emph on -自動 -\emph default -の状態にすることができ、メニュー中で項目の後ろに -\family sans -(自動) -\family default -と表示されることで表されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\emph on -表示 -\emph default -状態では、ツールバーはつねに表示され、自動状態では、カーソルが特定の環境にいるときや特定の機能が有効になっているときにのみ、ツールバーが表示されます。つまり自動 -状態においては、校閲ツールバーは、追跡機能が有効になっているときにのみ表示され、数式ツールバーと表ツールバーは、カーソルが数式や表の中にあるときにのみ表示されま -す。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXツールバーとその中の各ボタンは、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ツールバー" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -挿入メニュー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -めにゅー@メニュー!そうにゅう@挿入 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -数式 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:数式" - -\end_inset - -章と取扱説明書 -\emph on -数式篇 -\emph default -に説明されているように、数式要素を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -特殊文字 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:特殊文字" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、以下の文字を挿入することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -記号 お使いのLaTeXシステムで出力することのできる任意の文字を挿入します。したがって、このダイアログの文字カテゴリの数と利用できる文字は、導入済みのLaTe -Xパッケージに依存します。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -設定ダイアログ（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:画面フォント" - -\end_inset - -節を参照）で指定できる画面フォントには、すべての文字を表示できるものがないので、記号ダイアログですべての文字が表示されるわけではありません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -省略符号 省略符号を挿入します\SpecialChar \ldots{} - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -句点 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:略語" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられているように句点を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -通常の引用 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -ダイアログの -\family sans -言語 -\family default -部でどのような引用形式が選択されているかに関わらず、引用符「 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - -」を挿入する。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -シングルクォート 引用符「 -\begin_inset Quotes ers -\end_inset - -」を挿入する。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -保護されたハイフン 改行から保護されたハイフン「\SpecialChar \nobreakdash- -」を挿入する。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -可改行スラッシュ 改行を許可されたスラッシュ「\SpecialChar \slash{} -」を挿入する。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -メニュー区切り メニュー区切りマーク「\SpecialChar \menuseparator -」を挿入する。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -発音記号 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -はつおんきごう@発音記号 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -げんご@言語 ! はつおんきごう@発音記号 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - いわゆるtipa差込枠を含む数式が生成されますので、そこにIPA発音記号を生成するコマンドを挿入することができます。この機能を使うには、 -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -というLaTeXパッケージが導入されていなくてはなりません。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -この機能に関する詳しい情報は、 -\series bold -tipa -\series default -の取扱説明書 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "tipa" - -\end_inset - -と以下のWikiページをご参照ください。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -整形 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、以下の整形要素を挿入することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -上付き文字 上付き文字を挿入します。（例）テスト -\begin_inset script superscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\lang english -a, b -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -下付き文字 下付き文字を挿入します。（例）テスト -\begin_inset script subscript - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\lang english -3x -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -保護された空白 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:保護された空白" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている保護された空白を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -単語間の空白 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:単語間の空白" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている単語間の空白を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -小空白 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:小空白" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている小空白を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -水平方向の余白 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:水平方向の空白" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている水平方向の余白を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -水平線 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:水平線" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている水平線を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -垂直方向の空白 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:垂直方向の空白" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている垂直方向の空白を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ハイフネーション位置 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:ハイフネーション" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられているハイフネーション位置を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -埋草 埋草を挿入します。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:埋め草" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -合字回避指定 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:合字" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている合字回避指定を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -整形なし改行 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:強制改行" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている強制改行を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -両端揃え改行 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:強制改行" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられているように、強制改行をして、改行された文章をページ枠まで広がらせる改行を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -新規頁 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:強制改頁" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている強制改頁を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -改頁 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:強制改頁" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられているように、強制改頁をして、改行された文章をページ枠まで広がらせる改頁を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -改段改頁 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:改段改頁" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている改段改頁を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -改段改丁 第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:改段改頁" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられている改段改丁を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -一覧／目次 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニューでは、さまざまな一覧を挿入することができます。目次およびアルゴリズム・図・表一覧に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:目次と一覧" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられています。索引一覧に関しては第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:索引" - -\end_inset - -節、記号一覧に関しては第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:用語集" - -\end_inset - -節、BibTeX書誌情報に関しては第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文献データベース" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -フロート -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フロートの挿入に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:フロート" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -注釈 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -注釈の挿入に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:注釈" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -派生枝 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:派生枝" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、派生枝差込枠を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ユーザ設定差込枠 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書クラスに依存した差込枠を挿入します。これらの差込枠は、ある文書クラスのレイアウトファイルに定義されているときのみ存在します。一つの例は、三つのユーザ設定差込 -枠を持つ文書クラス「article (elsevier)」です。取扱説明書 -\emph on -カスタマイズ篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -Flex insets and InsetLayout -\emph default -の節に、ユーザ設定差込枠の定義の仕方が述べられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ファイル -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -がいぶまてりある@外部マテリアル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、文書に他のLyXファイルの内容をインクルードしたり挿入したりすることができます。その詳しいやりかたについては、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -External Stuff -\emph default -の章にあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ボックス -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぼっくす@ボックス -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ミニページ" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているミニページ・ボックスを挿入します。LyXでサポートされているボックスの全型は、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -Boxes -\emph default -の章に詳述されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文献引用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:書誌情報" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、文献引用を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -相互参照 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:相互参照" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、相互参照を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ラベル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:相互参照" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、ラベルの挿入を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -キャプション -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -きゃぷしょん@キャプション -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ちょうしゃくひょう@長尺表 ! きゃぷしょん@キャプション -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -キャプションをフロートや長尺表に挿入します。フロートに関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:フロート" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。長尺表のキャプションについては、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -Longtable Captions -\emph default -の章に述べられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -索引登録 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:索引" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、索引登録を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -用語集登録 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:用語集" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、記号一覧または用語集を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -表 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:表" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、表を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -図 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:図" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、図を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -URL -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:URL" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、URLを挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ハイパーリンク -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:ハイパーリンク" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、ハイパーリンクを挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -脚注 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:脚注" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、脚注を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -傍注 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:傍注" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、傍注を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -短縮タイトル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:短縮タイトル" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、短縮タイトルを挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -TeXコード -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:TeXコード枠" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、TeXコード枠を挿入します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -プログラムリスト -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぷろぐらむりすと@プログラムリスト -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -プログラムリスト枠を挿入します。プログラムリストについては、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -Program Code Listing -\emph default -の章に述べられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -日付 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -現在の日付を挿入します。表示形式は、LyXのメニューで使用されている言語の日付形式に依存します。LyXにはさまざまな日付の挿入方法があり、取扱説明書 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -External Material -\emph default -の節に説明と比較があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -プレビュー -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -プレビュー差込枠を挿入します。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:文書の断片プレビュー" - -\end_inset - -節の説明をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -移動メニュー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -めにゅー@メニュー ! いどう@移動 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニューは、現在の文書に存在する章・節・図・表などを一覧表示します。これによって、文書内をすばやく移動することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -移動メニューには、以下の各項目もあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -しおり -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニューを使うと、ご自身のしおりを定義することができます。これは、大きな文書で作業をしていて、例えば第2.5節と第6.3節のあいだをよく行ったり来たりするような -ときに便利です。このような例でしおりを定義するには、まず第2.5節に移動して、 -\family sans -しおり1を保存 -\family default -メニューを使用します。次に第6.3節に移動して、 -\family sans -しおり2を保存 -\family default -メニューを使用します。すると以後、 -\family sans -しおり -\family default -メニューを使うか、キー割り当て -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "bookmark-goto 1" -\end_inset - -ないし -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "bookmark-goto 2" -\end_inset - -を使用することによって、簡単に移動できるようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -またしおりは、すでに開かれている別々の文書のあいだを移動することもできます。保存したしおりは、文書が閉じられるまで有効です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -次の注釈・変更点・相互参照 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -現在のカーソル位置の次の注釈や変更点、相互参照へ移動します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ラベルへ移動 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これは、カーソルが相互参照の前にあるときのみ有効です。カーソルを参照されているラベルの前に移動します(相互参照ボックスを右クリックして、 -\family sans -ラベルへ移動 -\family default -を選択するのと同じ動作です)。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -順検索 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この機能は、出力中の対応する箇所に直接移動することができるようにするものです。詳しい説明は、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -』の「 -\emph on -順検索 -\emph default -」の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -文書メニュー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -めにゅー@メニュー!ぶんしょ@文書 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -変更追跡機能 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -変更追跡機能に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:変更追跡機能" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eXログ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書を閲覧したり書き出すことによってLaTeXが実行されると、このメニューは有効になります。これは、使用したLaTeXプログラムのログファイルを表示します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これを使うと、バックグラウンドでLaTeXがどう動作したかを見ることができます。 -\emph on -熟練者 -\emph default -は、ここでLaTeXエラーの原因を見つけることができるでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -文書構造 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:移動" - -\end_inset - -節および第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:目次" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、目次・文書構造ウィンドウを開きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ここから付録を開始 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:付録" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されているように、このメニューは、現在のカーソル位置から付録を開始します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -圧縮 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -現在の文書を圧縮したり解凍したりします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -設定 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書設定は、付録 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:文書設定" - -\end_inset - -に述べられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ツールメニュー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -めにゅー@メニュー ! つーる@ツール -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -スペルチェック -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -スペルチェックに関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:スペルチェック" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -類語辞典 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -類語辞典に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:類語辞典" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -統計 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -たんごすう@単語数 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -もじすう@文字数 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -現在の文書あるいは選択部分の単語数および文字数を勘定します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -TeX情報 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Texじょうほう@TeX情報 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -お使いのLaTeXシステムに導入されているクラスとスタイルの一覧を表示します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -再設定 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Lyx@LyX ! さいせってい@再設定 | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -再設定 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -さいせってい@再設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニュー項目はLyXを再設定します。すなわちLyXが、LaTeXパッケージと必要なプログラムを検索します。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:LyXの基本設定" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -設定 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -設定ダイアログに関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:設定ダイアログ" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ヘルプメニュー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -めにゅー@メニュー ! へるぷ@ヘルプ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニューは、LyXメニューと同じ言語で、LyXの取扱説明書ファイルを開きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -LaTeXの設定 -\family default -メニューは、LyXが検知したLaTeXパッケージおよびクラスの情報を含んだLyX文書を表示します（第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:LaTeXの設定" - -\end_inset - -節もご覧ください）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ツールバー -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:ツールバー" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ツールバーの表示・非表示のしかたに関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:ツールバー" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、カスタム・ツールバーを定義することも可能です。この点は、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -』に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -標準ツールバー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -つーるばー@ツールバー ! ひょうじゅん@標準 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上掲の標準ツールバーは、左から右に向かって以下の各ボタンを含んでいます。 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -setlength{ -\backslash -LTleft}{0pt} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -これは、以下の長尺表で左揃えにするために必要です。詳しくは、取扱説明書埋込オブジェクト篇をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -段落環境のためのプルダウンメニュー -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace -10mm -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-new" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -新規 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "file-open" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -開く -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-write" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -保存 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show print" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -印刷 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show spellchecker" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -スペルチェック -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "undo" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -元に戻す -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "redo" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -やり直す -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "cut" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -切り取り -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "copy" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -コピー -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "paste" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -貼り付け -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show findreplace" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -検索／置換 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -( -\lang english -Quick -\lang japanese -) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -検索／置換 -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -( -\lang english -Advanced -\lang japanese -) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "bookmark-goto 0" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator -しおり\SpecialChar \menuseparator -元の位置に戻る -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-emph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -文字を強調（ -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文字形式 -\family default -ダイアログの機能） -\family sans -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "font-noun" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -文字を名詞形式に設定（ -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文字形式 -\family default -ダイアログの機能） -\family sans -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "textstyle-apply" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -現在の -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文字形式 -\family default -ダイアログの設定を使って文字を装飾 -\family sans -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-mode" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator -行内数式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -図 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "tabular-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -表 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-toggle toc" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -文書構造ウィンドウの入切切替（ -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文書構造 -\family default -） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "toolbar-toggle math" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -数式ツールバーの入切切替 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "toolbar-toggle table" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -表ツールバーの入切切替 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -追加ツールバー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -つーるばー@ツールバー ! ついか@追加 ------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png - width 100col% - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上掲の追加ツールバーは、左から右に向かって以下の各ボタンを含んでいます。 -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -既定値 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Enumerate" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -箇条書き（連番） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Itemize" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -箇条書き（記号） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout List" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -リスト -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout Description" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -箇条書き（記述） -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-increment" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -階層を下げる -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "depth-decrement" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -階層を上げる -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert figure" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -フロート\SpecialChar \menuseparator -図 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "float-insert table" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -フロート\SpecialChar \menuseparator -表 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "label-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ラベル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -相互参照 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文献引用 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "index-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -索引登録 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "nomencl-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -用語集登録 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "footnote-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -脚注 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "marginalnote-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -傍注 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "note-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -注釈\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Ly -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -X注釈 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "box-insert Frameless" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ボックス -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "href-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Hyperlink -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "ert-insert" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -T -\family default - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -eX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator -マクロ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show-new-inset include" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -子文書 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "dialog-show character" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -文字様式\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\lang english -Customized -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "layout-paragraph" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator -段落設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "thesaurus-entry" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -類語辞典 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -表示／更新ツールバー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -つーるばー@ツールバー ! ひょうじこうしん@表示／更新 ------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上掲の表示／更新ツールバーは、左から右に向かって以下の各ボタンを含んでいます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace defskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -表示 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -更新 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-view" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -親文書を表示 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\lang english -Document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "master-buffer-update" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -親文書を更新 -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - - -\lang english -Document -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -\begin_inset Info -type "icon" -arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -出力\SpecialChar \menuseparator -出力と同期 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/view-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -表示(他の形式) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/update-others.png - scale 85 - groupId toolbarbuttons - -\end_inset - -* -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator -更新(他の形式) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -* これらのアイコンは、既定のアイコンセットを使用していない場合には、表示が異なることがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -その他のツールバー -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -変更追跡ツールバーに関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:変更追跡機能" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。表ツールバー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -つーるばー@ツールバー ! ひょう@表 ------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -に関しては、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -』に説明があります。数式マクロツールバーに関しては、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -数式篇 -\emph default -』に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -文書設定 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:文書設定" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書設定ダイアログには、文書全体の特性を設定する従属メニューがあり、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -メニューで呼び出せます。ダイアログ中の -\family sans -文書の既定値として保存 -\family default -ボタンを押せば、好みの文書設定を既定値として保存することができます。こうすると、 -\family typewriter -defaults.lyx -\family default -という名前のひな形が生成されて、ひな形を使用せずに新規ファイルを作ると、LyXがこのファイルを自動的に読み込むようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -このクラスの既定値を使う -\family default -というボタンを押すと、文書設定が、現文書クラスの既定値にリセットされます。この操作は、なかんずくクラスオプションやページレイアウト、連番、目次に作用します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ダイアログ中の各従属メニューを以下に説明します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -文書クラス -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、文書クラス・クラスオプション・グラフィックドライバ・親文書を設定することができます。文書クラスに関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:文書クラス" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -ローカルのレイアウト -\family default -ボタンを押すと、LyXの -\emph on -レイアウト -\emph default -フォルダにない、したがってLyXが文書クラスのレイアウトとして認識していない自製のレイアウトファイルを読み込ませることができます。レイアウトファイルについての詳 -細は、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -カスタマイズ篇 -\emph default -』の「 -\emph on -文書クラス・レイアウト・ひな形の新規導入 -\emph default -」にあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -クラスによっては、既定で特定のクラスオプションを使うものがあります。その場合には、 -\family sans -事前定義 -\family default -フィールドにこれらのクラスオプションが提示され、それらを使うかどうか決めることができます。既定のクラスオプションが何を意味するのか正確に理解していない場合には、 -いじらないことをお勧めします。グラフィックドライバは、LaTeXのcolorおよびgraphicsパッケージと、ページレイアウトパッケージに使用されます。 -\family sans -既定値 -\family default -を選ぶと、LaTeXパッケージの既定ドライバが使用されます。よくわからないうちは、既定値を使用することをお勧めします。 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\family sans -dvi2ps -\family default -・ -\family sans -dvialw -\family default -・ -\family sans -dvilaser -\family default -・ -\family sans -dvitops -\family default -・ -\family sans -psprint -\family default -・ -\family sans -pubps -\family default -・ -\family sans -ln -\family default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -のいずれかのドライバを使用したい場合には、まずお使いのLaTeX頒布版でこれらを有効にしなくてはなりません。 -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" - -\end_inset - -の -\emph on -Driver support -\emph default -の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -使用中の文書が、子文書ないし下位文書である場合には、親文書を指定することが必要です。親文書を開かずに子文書が開かれた場合、LyXはここで指定した親文書を使用しま -す。親文書・子文書に関して、詳しくは、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -』の『 -\emph on -子文書 -\emph default -』の節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、日付を抑制したり、相互参照用のLaTeXパッケージに -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -ではなく -\series bold -refstyle -\series default -を用いるオプションもあります。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:相互参照" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -子文書 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この細目メニューは、文書中に子文書があるときにのみ表示されます。詳細については、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -埋込オブジェクト篇 -\emph default -』の「 -\emph on -子文書 -\emph default -」の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -モジュール -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -モジュールに関しては第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:モジュール" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ローカルレイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -解説は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:ローカルレイアウト" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -フォント -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書フォント設定に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:フォントと文字形式" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -本文レイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -段落を字下げで区切るか行間を広げて区切るかを指定することができます。また、行間と本文の段組数もここで指定することができます。また、文章がLyX中で整形されて表示 -するようにするかどうか決めることができます。これは、出力中で文章が整形されるかどうかを決めるのではないことに注意してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、二段組や行間を画面には反映しないことに注意してください。これは実用的ではなく、しばしば読み辛い上に、WYSIWYMの概念に反するのです。しかし、出力に -おいては指定したとおりに反映されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ページレイアウト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このメニューの説明は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:用紙寸法と方向" - -\end_inset - -節および第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文書レイアウト" - -\end_inset - -節に説明されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ページ余白 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、用紙の余白を調整することができます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:余白" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -言語 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:言語" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -げんご@言語 ! もじこーど@文字コード -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -文書言語と引用形式がここで設定できます。文字コードは、文書の内容がどのようにLaTeXに書き出されるかを指定します（LyXファイルはつねにUTF-8でコード化さ -れています）。指定された文字コードにコード化できない文字は、すべてLaTeXコマンドとして書き出されます（LaTeXコマンドが対応していない文字がある場合には失 -敗します）。 -\begin_inset Foot -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -既知のコマンドは、テキストファイルで定義されていますから、ユーザー自身でこのファイルに未知の記号用のコマンドを加えることができます( -\emph on -unicodesymbols -\emph default -)。詳細は、取扱説明書カスタマイズ篇をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -言語既定値 -\family default -オプションを選択すると、本文の言語から本文部分の文字コードを決定します。このとき、文書が二つ以上の言語を含んでいると、LaTeXファイルに二つ以上の文字コードを -含ませることになるかもしれません。このオプションを使用しないときには、文書全体はつねに一つの文字コードだけを使用することになります。このオプションを有効にするの -が望ましい設定です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXは、Unicodeでの出力もサポートしているので、たくさんの特別な記号やアルファベット以外の文字が必要なときに、特に便利です。これを利用したい（そしてお使 -いのLaTeXシステムがUnicodeをサポートしている）場合には、以下の一覧から、四つのutf8関連選択肢のうち一つを選んでください。残念ながら、標準LaTe -XのUnicodeサポートははなはだ不完全であるため、たくさんのUnicode記号を含むファイルが、 -\family sans -言語既定値 -\family default -の文字コードで動くものの（このとき、LyXは既知のLaTeXコマンド一覧を使用します）、utf8文字コード固定では動かないということは、珍しいことではありません -（このとき、LyXは既知のLaTeXコマンド一覧を使用しません。なぜならUnicode記号はすべてutf8でコード化できるからです）。標準的LaTeXの代替的エ -ンジンたるXeTeXやLuaTeXでは、状況はもっと良くなっています。どちらのエンジンもUnicodeをネイティブにサポートしており、LyXも現在（出力形式 -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(XeT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default -・ -\family sans -PDF -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default -・ -\family sans -DVI -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -(LuaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX) -\family default -を通じて）これらのエンジンをサポートしています。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -節を参照してください。仮に上記のオプションがうまく動かない場合には、これらの新しいエンジンを試すと良いかもしれません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -言語パッケージ -\family default -では、ハイフネーションと「第〜部」のような文字列の翻訳に使用されるLaTeXパッケージを指定します。使用できる設定は以下のとおりです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -既定値 -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -言語設定 -\family default -で選択された言語パッケージを使用します(第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:言語設定" - -\end_inset - -節参照)。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -自動 使おうとしている閲覧形式ないし書き出し形式に最も適した言語パッケージを選択します。多くの場合、これは -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -になります。もし新しいパッケージ -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -の方が適当であれば(XeTeXや非TeXフォントを使用している場合など)、 -\series bold -babel -\series default -の代わりにこちらのパッケージが使用されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -常にBabel -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default -の方が適切な場合でも -\series bold -babel -\series default -を用います。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ユーザ設定 自分で選択した言語パッケージを指定することができます。例えば、 -\series bold -ngerman -\series default - (ドイツ語文用)のような言語依存パッケージを使用したい場合には、 -\series bold - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\backslash -usepackage{ngerman} -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series default -と書き込んでください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -なし 言語パッケージを使用しません。科学論文用文書クラスの一部には、このように指定する必要のあるものがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -以下は主要な文字コードの一覧です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeX既定値（inputenc不使用） 文字コードに -\family sans -言語既定値 -\family default -を使用するのと同じですが、 -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - LaTeXパッケージは使用されません。そのため、これを使用するときには、プリアンブルに他の適当なパッケージを読み込んで、外国語で書かれている部分の文字コードを -TeXコードで指定する必要があるでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ASCII ASCII文字コード。通常の英語（7ビットASCII）しかカバーしていません。LyXはそれ以外の文字をすべてLaTeXコマンドに変換するので、多量の -LaTeXコマンドが必要な場合には、ファイルが大きくなる可能性があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -アラビア語（CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1256） アラビア語及びペルシア語用MS Windowsコードページ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -アラビア語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-6） アラビア語及びペルシア語用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -アルメニア語（ArmSCII8） アルメニア語用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -キリル文字（CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1251） キリル文字用MS Windowsコードページ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -キリル文字（KOI8-R） 標準キリル文字。特にロシア語向け。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -キリル文字（KOI8-U） ウクライナ語用キリル文字 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -キリル文字（pt -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -154） カザフ語用キリル文字 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ギリシア語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-7） ギリシア語用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -タイ語（TIS -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -620-0） タイ語用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -トルコ語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-9） （latin 5）トルコ語用。ISO-8859-1に近いが、アイスランド文字をトルコ語に置き換えてある。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -バルト語（CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1257） エストニア語・ラトビア語・リトアニア語用MS Windowsコードページ。ISO-8859-13文字コードと同等。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -バルト語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-13） エストニア語・ラトビア語・リトアニア語用。ISO-8859-4文字コードの上位集合。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -バルト語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-4） （latin 4）エストニア語・ラトビア語・リトアニア語用。ISO-8859-13文字コードの下位集合。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ヘブライ語（CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1255） ヘブライ語用MS Windowsコードページ。ISO-8859-8文字コードの上位集合。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ヘブライ語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-8） ヘブライ語用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ユニコード（CJK）（utf8） -\series bold - CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - LaTeXパッケージ（日中韓言語用）を使用したUnicode utf8 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ユニコード（XeTeX）（utf8） Unicodeを直接使用する -\family sans -XeTeX -\family default -や -\family sans -LuaTeX -\family default -とともに使用することを意図したUnicode utf8。LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -inputenc -\series default -は援用しません。XeTeXやLuaTeXを書き出したりプレビューしたりすると、LyXは自動的にこのエンコーディングを選択します。通常、このエンコーディングを手動 -で選択する必要はありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ユニコード（UCS拡張版）（utf8x） -\series bold -ucs -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! ucs -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -LaTeXパッケージに基づいたUnicode utf8（包括的。ラテン文字・ギリシャ文字・キリル文字・日中韓文字を含む）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ユニコード（utf8） -\series bold -inputenc -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! inputenc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - LaTeXパッケージに基づいたUnicode utf8。いまのところ、限られた文字範囲（主にラテン文字）しかサポートしていません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -中国語（簡体字）（EUC-CN） 簡体字中国語用。ユーロ貨幣記号を除いては、WindowsコードページCP936と同じ。2001年以降、この文字コードは、正式に -文字コードGB18030に取って代わられました。GB18030はLaTeXでは使用できないため、Unicode（CJK）（utf8）を使用するようにしてください -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -中国語（簡体字）（GBK） 簡体字中国語用。特にUNIX OS向け。2001年以降、この文字コードは、正式に文字コードGB18030に取って代わられました。GB -18030はLaTeXでは使用できないため、Unicode（CJK）（utf8）を使用するようにしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -中国語（繁体字）（EUC-TW） 繁体字中国語用。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -中欧語（CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1250） ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2用のMS Windowsコードページ（latin 2） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -中欧語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-2） （latin 2）アルバニア語・クロアチア語・チェコ語・ドイツ語・ハンガリー語・ポーランド語・ルーマニア語・スロバキア語・スロベニア語を収録 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -南ヨーロッパ語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-3） （latin 3）エスペラント語・ガリシア語・マルタ語・トルコ語を収録。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -南東ヨーロッパ語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-16） （latin 10）アルバニア語・クロアチア語・フィンランド語・フランス語・ドイツ語・ハンガリー語・アイルランドゲール語・イタリア語・ポーラン -ド語・ルーマニア語・スロベニア語を含む。区分的発音符を持つ文字と言語の多くを収録。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -日本語（CJK）（EUC-JP） 日本語用EUC-JP文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -CJK -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! CJK -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を -\family sans -日本語（CJK） -\family default -にしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -日本語（CJK）（JIS） 日本語用JIS文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -CJK -\series default -を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を -\family sans -日本語（CJK） -\family default -にしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -日本語（CJK不使用）（EUC-JP） 日本語用EUC-JP文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -japanese -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を -\family sans -日本語 -\family default -にしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -日本語（CJK不使用）（JIS） 日本語用JIS文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -japanese -\series default -を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を -\family sans -日本語 -\family default -にしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -日本語（CJK不使用）（SJIS） 日本語用SJIS文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -japanese -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を -\family sans -日本語 -\family default -にしてください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -西欧語（CP -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1252） latin1用MS Windowsコードページ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -西欧語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-1） （latin 1） ISO-8859-1文字コード。アルバニア語・カタロニア語・デンマーク語・オランダ語・英語・フェロー語・フィンランド語・フラ -ンス語・ガリシア語・ドイツ語・アイスランド語・アイルランド語・イタリア語・ノルウェー語・ポルトガル語・スペイン語・スウェーデン語を含む。latin9に移行すべき -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -西欧語（ISO -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -8859-15） （latin 9） ISO-8859-15文字コード。ISO-8859-1文字コードと同様だが、ユーロ記号や -\lang english - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -oe -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\lang japanese -合字、その他フランス語とフィンランド語で用いられる文字を含む。latin9はlatin1の後継。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -韓国語（EUC-KR） 韓国語用 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このダイアログでは、現在の文書用に特定の言語パッケージを選択することができます。言語パッケージについての詳細は、 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:言語設定" - -\end_inset - -をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -色 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いろ@色 ! ほんぶん@本文 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いろ@色 ! はいけい@背景 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、本文のフォント色(既定値:黒)と、淡色表示注釈のフォント色(既定値:淡灰色)を変更することができます。 -\family sans -リセット -\family default -ボタンを押すと、色は既定値に戻ります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、頁の背景色(既定値:白)と影付きボックスの背景色(既定値:赤)を変更することもできます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -色はLyX中の表示には反映されず、出力中にのみ表れます(この淡色表示注釈は出力中では青で表示されます)。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -本文フォント色を変更した上、さらに文書設定の -\family sans -PDF特性 -\family default -で -\family sans -色付きリンク -\family default -オプションを有効にした場合、おそらく -\family sans -PDF特性 -\family default -の -\family sans -追加オプション -\family default -でリンクフォント色も変更する必要があります。例えば、オプションに -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold -linkcolor=black -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -と指定すれば、リンクフォント色が黒に設定されます。詳しくは、LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - -の取扱説明書をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace bigskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -強制改頁の直後に、TeXコードで以下のコマンドを用いると、文書中のページ毎に本文フォント色と頁背景色を変えることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -頁色を変えるには -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -pagecolor{色名} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -本文色を変えるには -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash -color{色名} -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここで、色名は次のいずれかです: -\series bold -black -\series default -, -\series bold -blue -\series default -, -\series bold -cyan -\series default -, -\series bold -green -\series default -, -\series bold -magenta -\series default -, -\series bold -red -\series default -, -\series bold -white -\series default -, -\series bold -yellow -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -本文色や背景色を変更した場合、これらを次の名称で用いることができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -頁背景色については -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -page_backgroundcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -本文色については -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -document_fontcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -影付きボックス背景色については -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -shadecolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -淡色表示注釈本文色については -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -note_fontcolor -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -自製の色を定義し使用する方法については、取扱説明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』の「色付きのセル」の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -連番と目次 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:番号の付け方-深度" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられているように、ここでは連番をつける節見出しの階層と、目次内に表示される節の階層を調整することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -書誌情報 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -natbib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! natbib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -または -\series bold -jurabib -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! jurabib -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を使用して引用形式を指定したり、LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -bibtopic -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! bibtopic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を使用して節分けされた書誌情報を使用可能にしたり、文書の書誌情報をどのように生成するかを微調整することができます。詳しくは、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:書誌情報" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -索引 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、文書の索引をどのように生成するかを微調整したり、索引を追加で定義したりすることができます。詳細については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:索引" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -PDF特性 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -PDF特性に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:PDF特性" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -数式オプション -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -これらのオプションは、LaTeXパッケージの -\series bold -amsmath -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! amsmath -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -・ -\series bold -esint -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! esint -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -・ -\series bold -mathdots -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! mathdots -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -・ -\series bold -mhchem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! mhchem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -を強制的に使用するようにするか、必要なときにこれらを自動的に使用するようにするかを指定します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -amsmath これは、多くの数式要素に必要とされているので、数式中にLaTeXエラーがでるときには、AMSを有効にしていることを確認してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -esint これは、特別な積分記号に使われます。取扱説明書『数式篇』の「大演算子」の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mathdots これは、特殊な省略符号に用いられます。取扱説明書『数式篇』の「省略符号」の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mhchem これは、化学式に用いられます。取扱説明書『数式篇』の「化学記号と化学式」の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -フロートの配置 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フロートの配置は、取扱説明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』の「フロートの配置」の節に解説があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -リスト -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -リストの設定は、取扱説明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』の「プログラムコードリスト」の章に解説があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ブリット -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、箇条書きの各階層で用いられる記号を調整することができます。箇条書き(記号)環境は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:箇条書き（記号）" - -\end_inset - -節に解説があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -派生枝 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -派生枝に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:派生枝" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -出力 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:出力" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、以下のように現在の文書の出力の仕方を定義することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -既定出力形式 -\family sans -表示 -\family default -メニューやツールバーで「表示」「更新」「親文書を表示」「親文書を更新」を選んだときに使用される形式。既定値は、ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -ファイル形式で設定されます。 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - -をご参照ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -出力と同期 -\family sans -移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator -順検索 -\family default -メニュー用の設定。詳細については、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -』の「 -\emph on -DVIとPDFの遡及検索 -\emph default -」の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -XHTML出力オプション 書き出し形式 -\family sans -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -XHTML -\family default -用の設定。 -\family sans -厳密型XHTML -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -1.1 -\family default -は、出力がXHTML標準の第1.1版に忠実に沿うようにします。 -\family sans -数式出力 -\family default -のそれぞれの設定については、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -』の「 -\emph on -XHTMLでの数式出力 -\emph default -」の節に詳細な解説があります。伸縮は、出力における数式の大きさを調整するのに用いられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eXプリアンブル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -このテキストフィールドには、特別なLaTeXパッケージを読み込むコマンドや、LaTeXコマンドの定義が入れられます。プリアンブルは、LaTeX熟練者向けです。よ -くわからないうちは、ここにコマンドを入れるべきではありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LaTeXの文法の入門は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:LaTeX文法" - -\end_inset - -節にあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -設定ダイアログ -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:設定ダイアログ" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -設定ダイアログは、 -\family sans -ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定 -\family default -メニューで呼び出すことができます。このダイアログには、以下の従属メニューが含まれています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -操作性 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -操作画面 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かすたまいず@カスタマイズ!つーるばーの@ツールバーの------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かすたまいず@カスタマイズ!めにゅーの@メニューの------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -操作画面設定ファイル -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かすたまいず@カスタマイズ!つーるばーの@ツールバーの------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -かすたまいず@カスタマイズ!めにゅーの@メニューの------ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -メニューやツールバーの外観は、操作画面設定（UI）ファイルを選ぶことで、変更することができます。UIファイルは、ツールバーやメニューが列挙してあるテキストファイ -ルです。 -\lang english -The file -\emph on -default.ui -\emph default - loads three files -\lang japanese -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdmenus.inc -\lang english -specifies the menu entries for the standard menus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdcontext.inc -\lang english -specifies the menu entries in popup context menus -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -stdtoolbars.inc -\shape italic - -\emph on -\lang english -specifies the toolbar buttons -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ご自身のメニュー及びツールバーレイアウトを作成するには、まずこれらのファイルをコピーして、中の項目を編集してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -.incファイルの文法は単純です。 -\family sans -Menubar -\family default -・ -\family sans -Menu -\family default -・ -\family sans -Toolbar -\family default -の各項目は、 -\family sans -End -\family default -で明示的に終わらなくてはなりません。これらの中には、 -\family sans -Submenu -\family default -・ -\family sans -Item -\family default -・ -\family sans -OptItem -\family default -・ -\family sans -Separator -\family default -・ -\family sans -Icon -\family default -、および「ファイル」メニューの場合には加えて -\family sans -Lastfiles -\family default -の各項目が含まれています。各項目の文法は、 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\series bold -Item -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -メニュー -\series default -あるいは -\series bold -ボタン名 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -LyX関数 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - -全LyX関数がメニュー -\family sans -ヘルプ -\family default -\SpecialChar \menuseparator - -\family sans -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X関数 -\family default -に列挙してあります。 -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -例： -\family sans -移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator -しおり -\family default -メニューをひじょうによく使うので、6つのしおりが欲しいものとしましょう。以下の行 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - - -\series bold - Item -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -しおり6を保存 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -bookmark-save 6 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* -\end_inset - -を -\emph on -stdmenus.inc -\emph default -ファイルの「navigate_bookmarks」（移動）メニュー部分に書き加えると、しおりが6つになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -\lang english -Icon -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Set -\family default - allows you to -\lang japanese -ここでは、LyXのツールバーの外観を変更することができます。現在使用できるアイコンセットは、 -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "この画像" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" - -\end_inset - -で比較できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -自動ヘルプ -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -メイン作業領域でツールチップスを有効にする -\family default -オプションは、索引項目や脚注などの差込枠で、閉じられているものの中身を表示するツールチップスを有効にします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -セッション -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -ウィンドウレイアウトと座標を復元 -\family default -オプションを指定すると、LyXのメインウィンドウは、最後のLyXセッションで用いられていた大きさとレイアウトで開くようになります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -カーソル位置を復元 -\family default -オプションは、最後にファイル内にカーソルがあった位置にカーソルを配置します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -最後のセッションで開いていたファイルを読み込む -\family default -オプションは、最後のLyXセッションで開かれていたファイル全てを開きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -セッション情報をすべて削除 -\family default -ボタンを押すと、最後のLyXセッションから引き継がれた情報(カーソル位置や最後に開かれていた文書名など)をすべて削除します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -文書 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:文書のバックアップ" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ばっくあっぷ@バックアップ ! ぶんしょ@文書 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -保存する際に元の文書をバックアップする -\family default -を有効にすると、ファイルが開かれた時の状態か、最後に保存された時の状態のバックアップコピーを作成します。 -\lang english -It is stored in the -\family sans -Backup -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directory -\family default - (see -\lang japanese -第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:パス" - -\end_inset - -) -\lang english - or in the same folder as your document if no -\family sans -Backup -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -directory -\family default - is specified -\lang japanese -。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書バックアップ:毎 -\family default -オプションを指定すると、バックアップ保存動作の間隔を指定することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -既定で文書を圧縮保存 -\family default -を有効にすると、ファイルは常に圧縮形式で保存されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -直近のファイルの数 -\family default -は、 -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -直近のファイルを開く -\family default -メニューに表示する最後に開いたファイルの数です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文書をタブ内に開く -\family default -オプションが有効になっていないときには、すべてのファイルは、LyXの新しいインスタンスの中に開かれます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -単独インスタンス -\family default -オプションは、LyXサーバパイプ -\begin_inset Foot -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -LyXサーバパイプについての情報は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:パス" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -が指定されているときにのみ、アクティブになります。これが有効の時には、LyX文書は、既に走っているLyXインスタンスの中に開かれるようになります。無効の場合は、 -新たなLyXインスタントが、それぞれのファイルごとに生成されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -単一タブ閉ボタン -\family default -オプションが有効の場合には、タブバーの右端にタブを閉じるためのボタンがひとつだけ( -\family sans - -\begin_inset Graphics - filename ../../images/closetab.png - scale 75 - -\end_inset - - -\family default -)現れるようになります。無効の場合には、各文書タブごとに閉ボタンが付きます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -【註】 -\family sans -単一タブ閉ボタン -\family default -オプションを有効にするには、変更が効くようになる前に、LyXを再起動する必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -画面フォント -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぉんと@フォント!がめん@画面 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:画面フォント" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここで指定したフォントが、画面上で文書を表示するのに使われます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -本節は、LyXウィンドウの -\emph on -中の -\emph default -フォントだけを取り扱います。出力に表示されるフォントは、これらのフォントとは違うもので、 -\family sans -文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator -設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator -フォント -\family default -メニューで指定されます。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -既定では、LyXは、 -\family typewriter -Times -\family default -フォントをローマン（セリフ）フォントとして用い、 -\family typewriter -Arial -\family default -または -\family typewriter -Helvetica -\family default -（システムに依存します）を -\family sans -サンセリフ -\family default -フォント、 -\family typewriter -Courier -\family default -を -\family typewriter -タイプライタ -\family default -フォントとして使用します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フォントの大きさは、 -\family sans -拡大 -\family default -の設定で変更することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -フォント寸法は、ポイント単位で測られた文字高で表されます。72.27ポイントが1インチの大きさになります。付録 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" - -\end_inset - -を参照してください。既定のフォント寸法は、文書フォント寸法で10ポイントが使用されたときと同じです。寸法に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文書フォント" - -\end_inset - -節に詳細があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -フォントレンダリングの速度を向上させるためにPixmapキャッシュを使う -\family default -オプションを有効にすると、LyXが画面を再描画する必要が減ります。これによって、特に遅いシステムでは、パフォーマンスが向上します。一方、画面上の文字は少し毛羽立 -って見えるかもしれません。したがって、これを有効にするか否かは、スピードをお求めになるか美しさをお求めになるかに依存します。Pixmapキャッシュは、Mac -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -OSとWindowsでのみ使うことができ、また意味があることにご注意ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -色 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -いろ@色 ! Lyxがめん@LyX画面 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 ! いろ@色 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、LyXが使うすべての色を変更することができます。一覧の中の項目を選んで、 -\family sans -変更 -\family default -ボタンを押してください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -システム色を使用 -\family default -オプションを有効にすると、お使いのOSないしはウィンドウマネジャの色スキームが使用されます。その場合、 -\family sans -カーソル -\family default -・ -\family sans -選択 -\family default -・ -\family sans -表罫線 -\family default -・ -\family sans -本文 -\family default -・ -\family sans -URLラベル -\family default -・ -\family sans -URL本文 -\family default -の色は設定できなくなり、一覧に表示されなくなります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -表示 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 ! ひょうじ@表示 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、LyX内で図がどのように表示されるかを指定できます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -自動プレビュー -\family default -は、使用中文書の部分プレビューを可能にします。この機能については、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:文書の断片プレビュー" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -段落の終わりに印 -\family default -オプションは、各段落の終わりに段落標（¶）を表示します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -編集 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -制御 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -編集 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -カーソルはスクロールバーに追随 -\family default -オプションを有効にすると、スクロールする際に、カーソルがつねに、文書の現在表示されている部分のいちばん上に置かれるようにします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -カーソル幅は変更することができます。カーソル幅を0に設定すると、画面フォントで設定した拡大率に応じて、カーソル幅も調整されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -文末を超えてスクロールする -\family default -は自明でしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -LyXでは、 -\family sans -CTRL+矢印キー -\family default -を押すことで単語から単語へジャンプすることができます。 -\family sans -単語間の移動にMac流のカーソル移動を使用 -\family default -オプションを使用すると、カーソルは単語末から次の単語末へとジャンプします。通常は、単語頭から単語頭への移動です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -環境をアルファベット順に整序 -\family default -オプションは、段落環境のプルダウンボックスの項目を整序します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -環境をカテゴリ毎にまとめる -\family default -オプションは、段落環境のプルダウンボックスの項目をグループ化します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -数式マクロ編集オプションは編集様式を決定します。取扱説明書 -\emph on -数式篇 -\emph default -の -\emph on -数式マクロ -\emph default -の節をご覧ください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -全画面 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、全画面モードで隠すものを指定できます。 -\family sans -本文幅を制限 -\family default -オプションは、全画面モードでの本文幅を指定します。こうすると、本文を画面よりも小さく表示できて、本文は中央部に表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -短絡キー -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -きーせってい@キー設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ばいんど@バインド | see -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -キー設定 -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 ! たんらくきー@短絡キー -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -キー設定ファイル -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -\lang english -Bind File -\family default - specifies the binding file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key. - Several binding files are available, among them -\family sans -\lang japanese -: -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -cua.bind PCキーボードでの典型的な短絡キーパターン -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -(x)emacs.bind エディタプログラム -\family sans -Emacs -\family default -（ -\family sans -XEmacs -\family default -）で用いられているキー設定 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -mac.bind -\family sans -Mac -\begin_inset space \thinspace{} -\end_inset - -OS -\family default -システム用のキー設定 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -また、 -\shape italic -broadway.bind -\shape default -のように、特定の文書クラス用にデザインされたキー設定ファイルや、特定の言語用のキー設定ファイルもあります。言語用キー設定ファイルの名前は、例えばポルトガルならば -「pt」のように、言語コードで始まります。LyXを特定の言語の下で使うと、LyXは適切なキー設定ファイルを使用しようとします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\shape italic -math.bind -\shape default -のようないくつかのキー設定ファイルは、限られた範囲の定義しか含んでいません。 -\shape italic -cua.bind -\shape default -ファイルの終わりを見れば、キー設定ファイルの見通しをよくするために、 -\emph on -math.bind -\emph default -がインクルードされる形になっているのを確認できるはずです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -The field -\family sans -Show -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -ke -\bar under -y -\bar default --bindings -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -containing -\family default - allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function - in the selected key binding file. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsubsection -短絡キーの編集 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:短絡キーの編集" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -きーせってい@キー設定 ! へんしゅう@編集 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -新しいキー設定を追加したり、既存のキー設定をご自分の好みに合うように修正するには、すべてのLyX関数とそれに結びつけられた短絡キーを列挙したダイアログ中の表を使 -用することができます。関数を容易に見つけられるように、関数はカテゴリごとにまとめられ、 -\family sans -以下を含むキー設定を表示する -\family default -フィールドがダイアログに備わっています。このフィールドに編集したい関数のキーワードを入力することができます。たとえば、ここに「paste」と入力すると、名称に「 -paste」を含む3つの関数に対するぜんぶで4つの既存の短絡キーが表示されます。このように、一つの関数は二つ以上の短絡キーを持つことができます。LyX関数の全覧 -は、 -\family sans -ヘルプ -\family default -メニュー内の『 -\emph on -LyX関数 -\emph default -』ファイルにもあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -たとえば、 -\family sans -textstyle-apply -\family default -関数に -\family sans -Alt+Q -\family default -という短絡キーを加えるには、この関数を選択して、 -\family sans -修正 -\family default -ボタンを押します。短絡キーを追加するためのダイアログが現れますので、Alt+Qを押して短絡キーを定義します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -既存の短絡キーの修正も、これと同様に行います。 -\lang english -You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX - Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the - different function names as a semicolon separated list -\lang japanese -。するとLyXは、現在の文書部分で有効な関数のうち最初のものを使用します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -If you don't like a a particular shortcut, you can remove it. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -他に、キー設定ファイルをテキストエディタで編集することによって、短絡キーを編集することもできます。。各項目の文法は -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\series bold - -\backslash -bind -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -キーの組み合わせ -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Quotes eld -\end_inset - -LyX関数 -\begin_inset Quotes erd -\end_inset - - -\series default - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -のようになっています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -キーボード/マウス -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:キーボード配置表" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -きーぼーどはいちひょう@キーボード配置表 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 ! きーぼーどはいちひょう@キーボード配置表 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -通常、キーボードの設定は、お使いのオペレーティングシステムのメニューで行います。これができない場合のために、LyXではキーボード配置表を使用することができます。 -例えば、チェコ語キーボードを持っているけれども、ルーマニア語用のもののように動作させるには -\lang english -enable -\family sans -Use -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -keyboard -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -map -\family default - and select -\lang japanese -、 -\shape italic -romanian.kmap -\shape default -というファイル名のキーボード配置表を使うとよいでしょう。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -You can specify a -\family sans -First -\family default - and a -\family sans -Second -\family default - keyboard map and, if you use the -\emph on -cua -\emph default - bindings, you can select the first and second with -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-primary" -\end_inset - - -\lang english -and -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-secondary" -\end_inset - - -\lang english -respectively or toggle between them with -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset Info -type "shortcut" -arg "keymap-toggle" -\end_inset - -. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -キーボード配置表はありあわせとして提供されているもので、全てのシステムで動作するわけではありません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この他に、ここでは -\family sans -ホイールスクロール速度 -\family default -を指定することができます。標準の値は1.0となっており、数値を上げるとスクロール速度が上がり、数値を下げるとスクロール速度が下がります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -スクロールホイールによる拡大 -\family default -セクションでは、拡大に使用するキーを選択することができます。このキーが押されたままマウスホイールを回転させると、文章が拡大します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -入力補完 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -入力補完は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:入力補完" - -\end_inset - -節に記述があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -パス -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:パス" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぱす@パス -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 ! でぃれくとり@ディレクトリ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\lang english -The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during - installation. - But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -作業ディレクトリ これはLyXの作業ディレクトリです。ファイルを -\family sans -開く -\family default -・ -\family sans -保存 -\family default -・ -\family sans -名前をつけて保存 -\family default -するときの既定値です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -ひな形文書 これ -\family sans -は、ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -新規（ひな形使用） -\family default -メニューを使用したときに開かれるディレクトリです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -用例ファイル -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -開く -\family default -ダイアログで -\family sans -用例 -\family default -ボタンを押すと、ここに指定したディレクトリが開かれます。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -MacOSやWindowsシステムでLyXを使用しているときには、用例ボタンはありません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -バックアップディレクトリ -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ばっくあっぷ@バックアップ ! でぃれくとり@ディレクトリ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - バックアップコピーはこのディレクトリに保存されます。この欄が空白で、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文書のバックアップ" - -\end_inset - -節にあるようにバックアップが有効にされていると、作業ディレクトリがバックアップを保存するのに使用されます。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -バックアップファイルは、「.lyx~」という拡張子を持ちます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Ly -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Xサーバーパイプ ここには、Unixパイプ名を入れることができます。このパイプは、外部プログラムからLyXにデータを送るのに使用されます。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold -例: -\series default - 文書に -\emph on -test.bib -\emph default -というBibTeXデータベースを付加します。このファイルは、 -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default -というプログラムで編集が可能です。 -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default -側では、設定の -\family sans -外部プログラム -\family default -の中で、LyX側で設定したのと同じUNIXパイプを指定しなくてはなりません。データベースの一項目を引用として索きたい場合には、 -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default -中でその項目を選択して、LyXマークをクリックしてください。使用中のLyXファイルの、カーソルのある位置に、その項目が引用として挿入されます。もちろん、 -\family typewriter -JabRef -\family default -とLyXは同時に実行されている必要があります。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -パイプは、 -\family sans -単独インスタンス -\family default -の機能にも使用されます。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文書のバックアップ" - -\end_inset - -節をご覧ください。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -LyXサーバーバイプをWindowsで使用するには、下記のパイプ名を使用しなくてはなりません。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\series bold - -\backslash - -\backslash -. -\backslash -pipe -\backslash -lyxpipe -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -一時ディレクトリ 一時ファイルはこのディレクトリに保存されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -類義語辞書 類義語辞書が置いてあるディレクトリです。これは、指定なしだと類義語機能が動作しない場合や、自製ないし別の辞書を使用したい場合以外では、指定する必要は -ありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Hunspell辞書 スペルチェックプログラム -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default -の辞書が置いてあるディレクトリです。これは、 -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default -を使用していて、指定なしだと類義語機能が動作しない場合や、自製ないし別の辞書を使用したい場合以外では、指定する必要はありません。Windows版LyXでは、 -\family typewriter -Hunspell -\family default -は唯一使用できるスペルチェッカーであり、ディレクトリを指定しなくても動作するはずです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -PATH前置句 このフィールドには、外部プログラムへのパスのリストを書き込みます。LyXが外部プログラムを使用する必要があるとき、システム上でそれを見つけるのに -、LyXはこのリストを参照します。WindowsとMacシステムでは、パス・リストはLyX設定時に自動的に設定されますので、通常修正する必要はありません。Uni -xあるいはLinuxシステムにおいては、通常のシステムパス（$PATH）にない外部プログラムを使いたいときのみ、このパスを設定する必要があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -TEXINPUTS前置句 TEXINPUTS環境変数を用いると、TeXコードか文書プリアンブルに書き込んだコマンドによって、LyX文書に外部ファイルをインクルー -ドさせて利用することができるようになります。この前置句には、既定では、文書ディレクトリが含まれています(ピリオド記号「.」として表されます)。前置句には、OSの既 -定区切り(UNIX派生システムでは「:」、Windowsでは「;」)で区切ることによって、いくつものパスを並べることができます。ファイルがインクルードされると、 -TEXINPUTS前置句に列挙されたパスで、インプットファイルが検索されます。TEXINPUTS前置句に列挙されたもののうち、絶対パスでないものは、LyXファイ -ルのあるディレクトリからの相対パスとして解釈されるので注意してください。文書によってはコンパイルに失敗する可能性があるので、パスの一つには、常に「.」を含めること -をお勧めします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -利用者情報 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここには、ご自身の名前と電子メールアドレスを入力することができます。利用者情報は、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:変更追跡機能" - -\end_inset - -節で説明されている変更追跡機能を有効にしているときに、あなたが変更を加えたことを示すために使用されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -言語設定 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -げんご@言語 ! せってい@------ 設定 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 ! げんご@------ 言語 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -言語 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:言語設定" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -操作画面用言語 ここではLyXのメニューで使用される言語を選択することができます。現在の翻訳状況については、 -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -target "http://www.lyx.org/l18n" - -\end_inset - -でご覧になれます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -言語パッケージ これは言語関連項目を取り扱うのに読み込むべきLaTeXパッケージを定義します。ここで指定したパッケージが取り扱うべき言語関連項目は、適切なハイフ -ネーションのほか、「章」や「表」などの文字列や日付などの現地語化が含まれます。もっともよく使われる言語パッケージは -\series bold -babel -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! babel -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -であり、これは古くからLaTeXの標準言語パッケージとなっています。しかしながら、XeTeXやLuaTeXのような比較的新しい組版エンジンでは、これらのエンジン -のマルチスクリプトサポートに適した別の言語パッケージ -\series bold -polyglossia -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! polyglossia -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -が使用されています。さらに、babelでカバーされていない言語向けの言語パッケージもあります。使用できるものは、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:言語" - -\end_inset - -節に述べられています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -開始コマンド ある文書言語を書くときに特別なLaTeXパッケージが必要とされる場合、ここにそのパッケージを開始するコマンドを指定することができます。例えば、 -\series bold -ArabTeX -\series default -パッケージを使用してアラビア語を書くときに必要とされる開始コマンド -\family sans - -\backslash -begin{arabtext} -\family default -がその例です。 -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - -を参照してください。既定値は -\series bold -babel -\series default -コマンド -\family sans - -\backslash -selectlanguage{$$lang} -\family default -です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -終了コマンド コマンド開始の反対です。既定値のようにいくつかのパッケージは、開始コマンドがパッケージの入切を行うので、終了コマンドを必要としません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -既定小数点 表で使用する小数点を定義します(小数点揃え用)。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -言語を大域的に設定 このオプションを有効にすると、この文書で使われている言語は、文書クラスオプションとして追加され、すべてのLaTeXパッケージで使用されるよう -になります。有効にしなければ、言語は -\series bold -babel -\series default -パッケージのオプションとして使用されるのみです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -自動開始 このオプションを有効にすると、文書は選択した文書言語で開始されます。このオプションが有効でないときには、LaTeX出力において、 -\family sans -開始コマンド -\family default -が文書の最初で明示的に使用されます。これによって、既定値でない -\family sans -開始コマンド -\family default -を使用しているときに、正しい言語が使用されることを確実にします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -自動終了 自動開始の反対です。これが有効でないときには、終了コマンドが文書の最後で使用されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -外国語をマークする 文書言語と異なる言語に指定されている文章は、青い下線で表示されます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -右から左書きの言語をサポート アラビア語・ヘブライ語・ペルシア語のように、右から左へ書く言語(RTL言語)を使用できるようにします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -カーソルの動き RTL言語で、左(右)矢印キーが視覚的に左(右)に動くようにするのか、それとも論理的に動くようにするのかを定義することができます。論理的とは、カ -ーソルがRTL言語で書かれた文章の中にあるときに、例えば、右矢印キーを押すとカーソルが左に動くということです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -スペルチェッカー -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -スペルチェッカーの設定に関しては、第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sec:スペルチェック" - -\end_inset - -節に説明があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -出力 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -一般 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -出力の行幅 これは、 -\family sans -ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator -書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator -平文 -\family default -メニューを使用したときに、一行に印字する最大の文字数を設定します。行幅を0にすると、すべての文章が、改行なしに一行に印字されることを意味します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -日付書式 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ひづけしょしき@日付書式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 ! ひづけしょしき@日付書式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - 日付の書式は、 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -に挙げてある書式のひとつないしは組み合わせです。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -例えば、 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -%y/%m/%d -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - -という書式は、「年/月/日」の形式の日付を印字します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -書き出し時の上書き LyXの書き出し時に、何を上書きして良いかを設定します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -順検索 -\family sans -移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator -順検索 -\family default -メニューで使用されるコマンドです。詳細については、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -』の「DVI/PDFの逆検索」という節にあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -プリンタ -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:プリンタ" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぷりんた@プリンタ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定!ぷりんた@プリンタ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -既定プリンタ ここではお使いの既定プリンタ名を指定できます。プリンタ名は、 -\family sans -印刷コマンド -\family default -が実行されるときに使用されます。 -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Greyedout -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold -【註】 -\series default -Windowsシステムでは効力がないのでこのフィールドは空でかまいません。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -印刷コマンド これはLyXすなわちLaTeXが印刷に使用するコマンドです。既定値は、ほとんどのシステムで -\family sans -dvips -\family default -です。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -印刷コマンドオプション ここでは印刷コマンド用オプションを指定できます。お使いの印刷コマンドを提供するプログラムの取扱説明書に、印刷オプションの全覧と説明があり -ます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -出力をプリンタに合わせる このオプションは、 -\family sans -印刷コマンド -\family default -が「 -\family sans -dvips -\family default -」のときのみ機能します。これはdvips用の設定ファイルを有効化します。これはdvips熟練者専用のオプションです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -LaT -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -eX -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:LaTeX-設定" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 ! LaTeX -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -Te -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -X文字コード これは文書フォントの既定文字コードです。 -\family sans -T1 -\family default -が既定値で、西欧諸言語と記号を含んでいます。 -\family sans -T2A -\family default -・ -\family sans -T2B -\family default -・ -\family sans -T2C -\family default -・ -\family sans -LCY -\family default -・ -\family sans -X2 -\family default -はキリル語用です。「 -\family sans -T1, T2B -\family default -」のように文字コードを組み合わせることも可能です。フォント文字コードは、通常、LyXがバックグラウンドで設定する言語パッケージによって自動的に読み込まれます。で -すから、既定の文字コードを変更する必要はありません。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -既定の用紙寸法 これは新規文書で使用される用紙寸法です。既定値はお使いのLaTeXシステムの設定に依存します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -DVIビューア用紙寸法設定 これは -\family sans -xdvi -\family default -がDVIビューアとして使用されているときのみ有効です。詳細については、 -\family sans -xdvi -\family default -の取扱説明書をお読みください。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、処理プログラムのオプションとパラメータ付きコマンドを指定することもできます。しかし、ここで何かを変更する前に、当該アプリケーションの取扱説明書を読むこ -とを強くお進めします。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -書誌情報の生成 書誌情報を生成するための設定。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:文献データベース" - -\end_inset - -節参照。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -索引の生成 索引を生成するための設定。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:索引プログラム" - -\end_inset - -節参照。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -用語集コマンド 用語集を生成するプログラムのコマンド。第 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "sub:用語集プログラム" - -\end_inset - -節を参照。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -CheckTe -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -{} -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -Xコマンド 取扱説明書『 -\emph on -高度な機能篇 -\emph default -』の -\emph on -Checking TeX -\emph default -の章に述べられている -\family sans -CheckTeX -\family default -プログラムのコマンド。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -さらに以下のオプションがあります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -LaTeXファイルでWindows流のパス表記を使う Windowsのパス記法を使用します。すなわち、フォルダを区切るのに「/」ではなく「 -\backslash -」を使用します。このオプションは、LyXをWindows上で使用する際には、既定で有効化されています。 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ぱす@パス -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -せってい@設定 ! ぱす@パス -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Description -文書クラス変更時にクラスオプションをリセットする -\lang english -Removes all manually set -\family sans -Class options -\family default - in the -\family sans -Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator -Document -\begin_inset space ~ -\end_inset - -Class -\family default - dialog when changing the document class. -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Section -ファイル処理 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるしょり@ファイル処理 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -変換子 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sub:変換子" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -へんかんし@変換子 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここには、一つの形式から別の形式へ変換する定義済み変換コマンドが一覧表示されます。これらは修正したり新しいものを作ったりすることができます。変換子を修正するには -、変換子を選択してから、 -\family sans -変換子 -\family default -フィールドと -\family sans -追加フラグ -\family default -フィールドの中身を変更し、 -\family sans -修正 -\family default -ボタンを押します。新しい変換子を作るには、既存の変換子をどれか選択してから、 -\family sans -変換元の書式 -\family default -ドロップダウンリストで別の形式を選択し、 -\family sans -変換子 -\family default -フィールドを修正し、 -\family sans -追加 -\family default -ボタンを押します。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family sans -変換子のファイルキャッシュ -\family default -が有効になっているときには、 -\family sans -最大日数 -\family default -フィールドで指定されている期間のあいだ、変換がキャッシュされます。つまり、キャッシュの変換済み画像が代わりに使用されるため、文書を再度開いたときに画像を再変換す -る必要がないのです。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -変換子定義で使うことのできる変数やフラグなど、変換子についての詳細は、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -カスタマイズ篇 -\emph default -』の -\emph on -Converters -\emph default -の節に記述があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Subsection -ファイル形式 -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "sec:ファイル形式" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ここでは、LyXが扱うことのできる定義済みファイル形式が一覧表示されています。特定のファイル形式に使用する、閲覧プログラムや編集プログラムを変更することができま -す。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -さらに、 -\family sans -既定出力形式 -\family default -を定義することができ、これは、 -\family sans -表示 -\family default -メニューやツールバーで、 -\family sans -表示 -\family default -・ -\family sans -更新 -\family default -・ -\family sans -親文書を表示 -\family default -・ -\family sans -親文書を更新 -\family default -を選択した時に、用いられます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -さらに、編集メニューやツールバーで「表示」「更新」「親文書を表示」「親文書を更新」を選んだときに使用される「既定出力形式」を定義することができます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -形式定義で使うことのできるオプションなど、ファイル形式について詳しくは、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -カスタマイズ篇 -\emph default -』の -\emph on -Formats -\emph default -の節に記述があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -ある形式から他の形式への変換は、すべてLyXの一時ディレクトリで行われているので、変換がうまく行くためには、一時ディレクトリにファイルをコピー（複写）する前に、 -ファイルに変更を加える必要があることがあります。これは、 -\family sans -複写子 -\family default -を指定することによってなされます。複写子について詳しく＜は、取扱説明書『 -\emph on -カスタマイズ篇 -\emph default -』の -\emph on -Copiers -\emph default -の節に記述があります。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -LyXで使用できる単位 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -たんい@単位 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -この文書で用いられる単位の理解のために、表 -\begin_inset CommandInset ref -LatexCommand ref -reference "tab:単位" - -\end_inset - -に、LyXで使うことのできる単位をまとめておきます。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Float table -placement t -wide false -sideways false -status open - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset Caption - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "tab:単位" - -\end_inset - -単位 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\begin_inset VSpace medskip -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -\align center -\begin_inset Tabular - - - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -単位 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -名称／摘要 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ミリメートル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cm -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -センチメートル -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -in -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -インチ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pt -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ポイント (72.27 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -pt = 1 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -パイカ (1 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -pc = 12 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -sp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -スケールポイント (65536 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -sp = 1 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -pt) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -bp -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ビッグポイント (72 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -bp = 1 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -in) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -dd -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ディドー (72 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -dd -\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ -\end_inset - - 37.6 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -mm) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -cc -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -シセロ (1 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -cc = 12 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -dd) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Scale% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -元の画像幅の% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -text% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -テキスト幅の% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -col% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -組段幅の% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -page% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -用紙幅の% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -line% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -行幅の% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -theight% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -テキスト高さの% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -pheight% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -用紙高さの% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -ex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -現在のフォントの文字「x」の高さ -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -em -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -現在のフォントの文字「M」の幅 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -mu -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Text - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -数式単位 (1 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -mu = 1/18 -\begin_inset Formula $\,$ -\end_inset - -em) -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - - - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Chapter -謝辞 -\begin_inset CommandInset label -LatexCommand label -name "cha:謝辞" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard - -\family roman -\series medium -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -この取扱説明書は、さまざまな人たちの共同作業によって作られました（そしてあなたにも貢献してほしいのです）。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Alejandro Aguilar Sierra -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Amir Karger -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -David Johnson -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Hartmut Haase -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Ignacio García -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Ivan Schreter -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -John Raithel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -John Weiss -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Lars Gullik Bjønnes -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Matthias Ettrich -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Matthias Zenker -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Rich Fields -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Pascal André -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Paul Evans -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Paul Russel -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Robin Socha -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize - -\noun on -Uwe Stöhr -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -LyXプロジェクトチーム: -\begin_inset CommandInset citation -LatexCommand cite -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Paragraph - -\family roman -\series bold -\shape up -\size normal -\emph off -\bar no -\noun off -\color none -日本語訳 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -小浪 吉史 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -高宮 安仁 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -人見 光太郎 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -人見 久恵 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Itemize -横田 宏治 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -次ページの書誌情報は、 -\family sans -書誌情報 -\family default -環境を使って作成されています。 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -label "Credits" -key "lyxcredit" - -\end_inset - -LyXプロジェクトチーム: -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Credits" -target "http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyx-devel/trunk/lib/CREDITS" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyx-devel/trunk/lib/CREDITS -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexcompanion" - -\end_inset - -Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens: -\emph on -The LaTeX Companion Second Edition. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 2004（邦訳 「The LaTeXコンパニオン」アスキー書籍編集部監訳、アスキー出版局、1998） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexguide" - -\end_inset - -Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. - Daly: -\emph on -A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 2003 -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "latexbook" - -\end_inset - -Leslie Lamport: -\emph on -LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994（第1版の邦訳は 「LaTeX〜文書処理システム〜」大野俊治他訳、アスキー出版局、19 -90） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "texbook" - -\end_inset - -Donald E. - Knuth. - -\emph on -The TeXbook. - -\emph default - Addison-Wesley, 1984（邦訳 「TeXブック〜コンピュ−タによる組版システム〜（改訂新版）」鷺谷好輝訳 、アスキー出版局、1992） -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "TeXCatalogue" - -\end_inset - -The TeX Catalogue: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "LaTeXFAQ" - -\end_inset - -The LaTeX FAQ: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX" - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -プログラムの -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "BibTeX-2" - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -BibTeX -\family default -プログラムの使い方を記した -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "makeindex" - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -makeindex -\family default -プログラムの -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "xindy" - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -xindy -\family default -プログラムの -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "AMS" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" - -\end_inset - - -\lang english -of the AMS LaTeX-packages -\lang japanese -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "caption" - -\end_inset - -LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -caption -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! caption -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -の -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "enumitem" - -\end_inset - -LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -enumitem -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! enumitem -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -の -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "fancyhdr" - -\end_inset - -LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -fancyhdr -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! fancyhdr -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -の -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "hyperref" - -\end_inset - - LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -hyperref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -の -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "nomencl" - -\end_inset - -LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -nomencl -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! nomencl -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -の -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "prettyref" - -\end_inset - -LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -prettyref -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! prettyref -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -:の -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "refstyle" - -\end_inset - -LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -refstyle -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! refstyle -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -:の -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "tipa" - -\end_inset - -LaTeXパッケージ -\series bold -tipa -\series default - -\begin_inset Index idx -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout -Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! tipa -\end_layout - -\end_inset - -の -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "取扱説明書" -target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Arabic" - -\end_inset - -アラビア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Armenian" - -\end_inset - -アルメニア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - - -\lang english -how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages -\lang japanese - -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Farsi" - -\end_inset - -ペルシア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Hebrew" - -\end_inset - -ヘブライ語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Japanese" - -\end_inset - -日本語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Latvian" - -\end_inset - - ラトビア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - - リトアニア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Mongolian" - -\end_inset - - モンゴル語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - -ベトナム語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Bibliography -\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem -LatexCommand bibitem -key "NewInLyX20" - -\end_inset - - -\family sans -LyX 2.0 -\family default -の新機能に関する -\begin_inset CommandInset href -LatexCommand href -name "Wikiページ" -target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" - -\end_inset - -: -\begin_inset Newline newline -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Flex URL -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -\begin_inset Newpage newpage -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset ERT -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -let -\backslash -mybibname -\backslash -bibname -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - - -\backslash -renewcommand{ -\backslash -bibname}{ -\backslash -mybibname 2}% -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset Note Note -status collapsed - -\begin_layout Plain Layout - -\series bold - -\backslash -bibname -\series default -コマンドは、現在の文書言語での書誌情報名です。ここでは最後に、以下の書誌情報が第二書誌情報一覧であることを示すために、それを番号2でもって再定義しています。 -\end_layout - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex -LatexCommand bibtex -bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs" -options "../biblio/alphadin" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\begin_layout Standard -上記の文献一覧は、BibTeXデータベースから生成されたものです。 -\series bold - -\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print -LatexCommand printnomenclature -set_width "auto" - -\end_inset - - -\begin_inset CommandInset index_print -LatexCommand printindex -type "idx" - -\end_inset - - -\end_layout - -\end_body -\end_document +#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/ +\lyxformat 413 +\begin_document +\begin_header +\textclass jbook +\begin_preamble +% Commands inserted by lyx2lyx for proper underlining +\PassOptionsToPackage{normalem}{ulem} +\usepackage{ulem} +\let\cite@rig\cite +\newcommand{\b@xcite}[2][\%]{\def\def@pt{\%}\def\pas@pt{#1} + \mbox{\ifx\def@pt\pas@pt\cite@rig{#2}\else\cite@rig[#1]{#2}\fi}} +\renewcommand{\underbar}[1]{{\let\cite\b@xcite\uline{#1}}} + +% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!! +% +% This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints +% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble, +% parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you +% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact +% the documentation team +% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org + +\usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle +\ifpdf % if pdflatex is used + + % set fonts for nicer pdf view + \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} + +\fi % end if pdflatex is used + +% for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float +%\usepackage[figure]{hypcap} + +% the pages of the TOC is numbered roman +% and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added +\let\myTOC\tableofcontents +\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% + \frontmatter + \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{} + \myTOC + \mainmatter } + +% define a short command for \textvisiblespace +\newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace} + +% macro for italic page numbers in the index +\newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}} + +% for customized page headers/footers +% only needed because they are only used in one section of the document +\usepackage{fancyhdr} +% change header rule width +\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt} + +\usepackage{t1enc} +\renewcommand{\seename}{→} + +\usepackage{subfig} +\DeclareCaptionOption{large}[]{\def\captionfont{\large}} +\DeclareCaptionOption{Large}[]{\def\captionfont{\Large}} + +%\ifnum 42146=\euc"A4A2 \AtBeginDvi{\special{pdf:tounicode EUC-UCS2}}\else +%\AtBeginDvi{\special{pdf:tounicode 90ms-RKSJ-UCS2}}\fi +%\AtBeginDvi{\special{pdf:tounicode EUC-UCS2}} +\end_preamble +\options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading +\use_default_options false +\begin_modules +customHeadersFooters +enumitem +\end_modules +\maintain_unincluded_children false +\language japanese +\language_package none +\inputencoding JIS-pLaTeX +\fontencoding global +\font_roman default +\font_sans default +\font_typewriter default +\font_default_family default +\use_non_tex_fonts false +\font_sc false +\font_osf false +\font_sf_scale 100 +\font_tt_scale 100 + +\graphics default +\default_output_format default +\output_sync 0 +\bibtex_command default +\index_command default +\paperfontsize default +\spacing single +\use_hyperref true +\pdf_title "LyX Users Manual" +\pdf_author "LyX Team" +\pdf_subject "LyX" +\pdf_keywords "LyX" +\pdf_bookmarks true +\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true +\pdf_bookmarksopen false +\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1 +\pdf_breaklinks false +\pdf_pdfborder false +\pdf_colorlinks true +\pdf_backref false +\pdf_pdfusetitle false +\pdf_quoted_options "unicode=false, linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false" +\papersize a4paper +\use_geometry false +\use_amsmath 1 +\use_esint 1 +\use_mhchem 1 +\use_mathdots 1 +\cite_engine basic +\use_bibtopic false +\use_indices false +\paperorientation portrait +\suppress_date false +\use_refstyle 0 +\notefontcolor #0000ff +\branch 質問 +\selected 1 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #00ff00 +\end_branch +\branch 解答 +\selected 0 +\filename_suffix 0 +\color #aa55ff +\end_branch +\index 索引 +\shortcut idx +\color #008000 +\end_index +\secnumdepth 3 +\tocdepth 3 +\paragraph_separation indent +\paragraph_indentation default +\quotes_language english +\papercolumns 1 +\papersides 2 +\paperpagestyle default +\tracking_changes false +\output_changes false +\html_math_output 0 +\html_css_as_file 0 +\html_be_strict true +\end_header + +\begin_body + +\begin_layout Title +LyXユーザーの手引き +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Author +LyXプロジェクトチーム +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +なにかコメントや間違いの修正がある場合には、LyX文書化メーリングリスト +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + +までお知らせ下さい。この文書の翻訳は、当初人見光太郎氏が行った貢献に基づいています。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +第2.0.x版 +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +この文書の最新のPDF版は +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series default +にあります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset CommandInset toc +LatexCommand tableofcontents + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +はじめに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LyXとは何か +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは文書作成システムです。美しい原稿、出版可能な本、ビジネス書簡、企画書、そのうえ詩までも作成することができます。LyXが他の「ワードプロセッサ」と異なる点 +は、核となる編集スタイルとしてマークアップ言語のパラダイムを採用していることです。つまり、節の見出しを入力するときには、それを「ボールド体・17ポイント・左揃え +・下に5mmの空白」という風に指定するのではなく、「節」として指定してやるだけでいいのです。LyXが組版を考えるようにできているため、実現方法を気にすることなく +、構想を練るだけでいいのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この哲学は、『 +\shape italic +はじめの一歩 +\shape default +』に詳細にわたって説明してあります。まだお読みでなければ、お読みください。ええ、すぐ読まれた方がよいでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +『 +\emph on +はじめの一歩 +\emph default +』には、LyXの哲学以外にも説明されていることがあります。中でも重要なのは、すべての取扱説明書に共通な表記方法が書いてあることです。読まずにいると、取扱説明書を +読んでいくのが苦痛になってしまうでしょう。またこの取扱説明書を読む前に、別の取扱説明書を読んだ方がいいかもしれません。『 +\emph on +はじめの一歩 +\emph default +』にはそのことについても言及があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LyXの外観 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +他のアプリケーションと同様に、LyXには、ウインドウの上に見慣れたメニューバーがあります。その下には、プルダウンボックスと色々なボタンのついたツールバーがありま +す。もちろん、垂直スクロールバーと、文章を編集するための作業領域もあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +水平スクロールバーはないことにご注意ください。これはバグや手抜きではなく、意図的につけていないのです。書籍を読むときには、行が終わると次行の行頭に続くものと想定 +します。縦の長さがページからはみ出れば、文章は新しいページに続きますので、これゆえに垂直スクロールバーだけは必要となるのです。水平スクロールバーがないことが不便 +と感じられ得る場合が3つあります。第一は、大きな画像の場合です。画像が使用中の画面よりも大きく表示されるのを避けるためには、画像設定の +\family sans +LaTeXとLyXのオプション +\family default +タブにある +\family sans +画面上の縮尺 +\family default +オプションを使用してください。水平スクロールバーが必要となりうる第二・第三の場合は、LyXのウインドウよりも横幅が広い、表や数式がある場合です。表を水平方向にス +クロールするのには、矢印キーが使えます。しかし、これは現段階では数式には使えません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXの全メニューとツールバーボタンの簡潔な説明は、付録 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:ユーザーインタフェース" + +\end_inset + +を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ヘルプ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ヘルプシステムはLyXの取扱説明書を含んでいます。あなたはLyXの中から +\emph on +すべて +\emph default +の取扱説明書を読めるのです。 +\family sans +ヘルプ +\family default +メニューから読みたい取扱説明書を選ぶだけです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LyXの基本設定 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:LyXの基本設定" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXのほとんどすべての機能は、 +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +メニューで調整することができます。また、LyXは、システムにどんなプログラムが装備されているか、どんなLaTeX文書クラスやLaTeXパッケージが備わっているか +を検査することができます。LyXは、この検査で得た情報を、一部の +\family sans +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +項目に対して、ふさわしい既定値を与えるのに使用します。この検査は、LyXがシステムに装備された時に既に行われていますが、LyXが検査を行った後に、新しいLaTe +Xクラスなどのアイテムを、ローカルに導入することもあるでしょう。LyXに再検査を行わせるには、 +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +再初期設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さいしょきせってい@再初期設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を実行してください。その後、変更が認識されるようにLyXを再起動してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LaTeXの設定 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:LaTeXの設定" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXを導入していなくてもLyXで文書を編集することはできますが、この場合、PDFを生成したり文書を印刷したりすることはできません。しかしながら、LyX文書 +のうちにはPDFなどを生成するのにDocBookをバックエンドとして使用するものもありますし、すべてのLyX文書はつねに平文やXHTMLとして出力することができ +ます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書クラスのうちには、特定のLaTeX・DocBookクラスやパッケージに依存するものがあります。これらの文書クラスは、必要なファイルが導入されていなくても使用 +することができますが、生成することのできない出力形式が発生します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXがシステム上で検出したLaTeXパッケージは、メニュー +\family sans +ヘルプ\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eXの設定 +\family default +で見ることができるファイルに列挙してあります。必要なパッケージがない場合には、必要なパッケージを導入して、LyXを再設定してください（メニュー +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +再初期設定 +\family default +） +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +TeXコードボックス中の二つの中括弧は、「LaTeX」という単語が、上付きおよび下付き文字として印字されるのを防ぐためのものです。TeXコードに関してより詳しく +は第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:TeXコード" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられています。LaTeXなどの固有名称の印字については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LyXの固有名称" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyXのさいしょきせってい@LyXの再初期設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。LaTeXパッケージを追加導入するための詳しい情報は、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +カスタマイズ篇 +\emph default +』の第5.1節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +LyXでの作業のしかた +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +基本的なファイル操作 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるそうさ@ファイル操作 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +ファイル +\family default +メニューと標準ツールバーには、ワードプロセッサ共通の基本操作と、若干の複雑な操作が入っています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +新規 +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-new" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +新規(ひな型使用) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +開く +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "file-open" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +閉じる +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +保存 +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-write" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +名前を付けて保存 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +保存済み文書に復帰 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +バージョン管理 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +読み込み +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +書き出し +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +印刷 +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +終了 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらはわずかな違いを除いて、他のワードプロセッサの場合と同じように動きます。 +\family sans +新規(ひな型使用) +\family default +コマンドは新しいファイルのファイル名だけでなく、どのひな型を使うのかも聞いてきます。ひな型を使うと、使わなかった場合には自分で設定する必要のあるいくつかのレイア +ウト機能を自動的に設定してくれます。ひな型はいくつかのクラスで使えますが、特に書簡を書く場合に有効です（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:文書クラス" + +\end_inset + +節参照）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +【註】「既定ファイル」や「無題」、「下書き」というファイル名のファイルはありません。LyXにファイルを開くか新しいファイルを作るのを知らせるまでは、大きな何もな +いスペースがあるだけです。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +保存済み文書に復帰 +\family default +と +\family sans +バージョン管理 +\family default +コマンドは数人で同時に同じファイルを編集している場合に便利です +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +このような場合にはLyXのバージョン管理機能も見て下さい。 +\emph on +拡張機能 +\emph default +に説明してあります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。 +\family sans +保存済み文書に復帰 +\family default +は、単純に、ディスクからその文書をもう一度読み込みます。もちろんこの機能を、文書の変更を無効にして最後に保存した状態に戻すのにも使えます。 +\family sans +バージョン管理 +\family default +は、あなたが文書に対して行った変更を登録して、他の人たちに、それがあなたが行った変更であることを認識できるようにします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +基本的な編集機能 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +へんしゅう@ +\family roman +\series bold +\shape up +\size large +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +編集 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:基本的な編集機能" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +最近のほとんどのワードプロセッサと同様に、LyXは文章の塊を切り貼りすることができますし、文字・単語・ページ単位でのカーソル移動や、文字あるいは単語単位で削除を +することもできます。以下の4つの節では、LyXの基本的な編集機能とその使い方について説明します。まずは切り貼りから説明しましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ご想像のとおり、 +\family sans +編集 +\family default +メニューと標準ツールバーには、切り貼り用のコマンドや他のさまざまな編集機能が入っています。その一部は特殊なので後述するものとすると、基本的なものは以下のとおりで +す。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +切り取り +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "cut" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +コピー +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "copy" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +貼り付け +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "paste" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +直近のものを貼り付け +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +特別な貼り付け +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +検索／置換 +\family default + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show findreplace" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +はじめの3つに関しては自明でしょう。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +はりつけ@貼り付け +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +また、LyXと他のプログラムの間でも、切り取り・コピー・貼り付けを使って、文字列をコピーすることができます。 +\family sans +直近のものを貼り付け +\family default +サブメニューには、最近貼り付けを行った文字列の一覧が表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +特別な貼り付け\SpecialChar \menuseparator +平文（行を連結して） +\family default +メニューは、クリップボード中の文字列を、文字列全体を一段落として挿入します。ファイルに空白行がある状態の場合には、新しい段落が挿入されます。 +\family sans +平文（行を連結しないで） +\family default +では、文字列中の改行を新しい段落の開始と解釈して、複数の段落として挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ちかん@置換 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +けんさく@検索 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +検索／置換\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\family default +は、 +\family sans +検索及び置換 +\family default +ダイアログを開きます。単語や表現を見つけたならば、LyXはそれを選択した状態にします。 +\family sans +置換 +\family default +ボタンを押すと、選択された文字列は、 +\family sans +置換文字列 +\family default +フィールドの中身で置き換えられます。現在の文字列を飛ばしたい場合には、 +\family sans +次候補 +\family default +ボタンをクリックしてください。この文字列に一致する文書中すべての文字列を自動的に置換したい場合には、 +\family sans +全て置換 +\family default +ボタンを押してください。大文字と小文字を区別して検索したい場合には、 +\family sans +大文字/小文字を区別 +\family default +オプションを使うことができます。これを設定した場合には、「Test」で検索すると「test」には一致しません。 +\family sans +単語全体にのみ一致する +\family default +オプションを使うと、完全な単語として一致するもののみに一致するように、LyXに強制することができます。つまり、「star」で検索すると「starlet」には一致 +しなくなります。また、LyXには、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:詳細な検索と置換" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている詳細な +\family sans +検索・置換 +\family default +機能もあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +差込枠と呼ばれる、注釈・フロート等々は、解体することができます。つまり、差込枠を削除して、その中身を通常の本文に戻すことができるのです。差込枠の解体は、カーソル +を差込枠の先頭に置いて +\family sans +Backspace +\family default +を押すか、カーソルを差込枠の最後に置いて +\family sans +Delete +\family default +を押すことによって、実行できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +差し込み枠の中身は、短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "inset-select-all" +\end_inset + +を使用して選択することができます。また、短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select" +\end_inset + +は文書全体を選択します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +元に戻すとやり直す +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +もとにもどす@元に戻す +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +やりなおす@やり直す +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:元に戻すとやり直す" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXでは、何か失敗をしても、簡単にもとに戻すことができます。LyXは大容量のUndo（元に戻す）／Redo（やり直す）バッファを持っています。失敗を元に戻すと +きには、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +元に戻す +\family default +かツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "undo" +\end_inset + +を選択して下さい。もし元に戻しすぎた場合には、「元に戻すのを元に戻す」ために +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +やり直す +\family default +あるいはツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "redo" +\end_inset + +を使って下さい。元に戻すメカニズムは、メモリーオーバーへッドを押さえるために100ステップに制限されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +またファイルを開いてから行ったすべての変更を無効にしても、「変更された」という文章の状態はかわらないことに注意して下さい。これは元に戻すのを上記のように100ス +テップに制限したためです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +元に戻す +\family default +と +\family sans +やり直す +\family default +は、LyXの中のほとんどすべてのものについて働きます。しかしながら、入力された文章については、文字単位ではなくて文字の塊ごとに元に戻したりやり直したりすることが +できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +マウス操作 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +まうすそうさ@ +\family default +\series default +\shape default +\size default +\emph default +\bar default +\noun default +\color inherit +マウス操作 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下は、もっとも基本的なマウス操作です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +動き +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +編集ウインドウのどこかで +\emph on +左マウスボタン +\emph default +をクリックします。そうするとカーソルはマウスの所へ移動します。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +テキストの選択 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\emph on +左マウスボタン +\emph default +を押したままマウスをドラッグして下さい。LyXは前のマウスの位置と新しいマウスの位置の間の文字をマークします。これをLyXのバッファ（とクリップボード）にコピー +するには +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +コピー +\family default +を使います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +カーソルを移動した後、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +貼り付け +\family default +を使って、文字列をLyXに貼り付け直してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +差込枠（脚注・注釈・フロート等） +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +これらの特性を設定するには、右クリックしてください。詳しくはこの取扱説明書の対応する節を見て下さい。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Section +移動 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:移動" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いどう@移動 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXでは、文書内を動き回るのに二つの方法があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +移動 +\family default +メニューに、文書の全ての節が従属メニューとして表示されるので、それをクリックすれば、文書の対応する場所に移動することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文書構造 +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle toc" +\end_inset + +を使用します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator +しおり +\family default +で文書中にしおりをはさむことができ、このメニューでしおりをはさんだ場所に移動することもできます。しおりは、セッションを越えて記憶されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + +は、文書中であなたが直近に変更を加えた部分に移動します。これは、例えば大きな文書中で、何かを探して文書の他の部分に動いたり、スクロールしたりした後に、元の編集箇 +所に戻りたいときに便利です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcuts" +arg "screen-recenter" +\end_inset + +キーを押すと、カーソル位置が、LyXメインウィンドウの縦方向中央に来るようにすることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文書構造 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:文書構造" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書構造ウィンドウ上部のプルダウンボックスを使えば、図表一覧のような目次様オブジェクトだけでなく、脚注一覧や、ラベル・相互参照（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:相互参照" + +\end_inset + +節参照）・注釈・引用（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:書誌情報" + +\end_inset + +節参照）などの一覧も選択することができます。これらの一覧の上をクリックすれば、使用中の文書の対応するオブジェクトに移動することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書構造の要素を右クリックすると、多くの場合、これらの要素を直接修正することのできるコンテクストメニューが表示されます。例えば、引用の場合には、コンテクストメニ +ューを使うと引用ダイアログが表示され、引用の内容を修正することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上部の「フィルタ」フィールドを使うと、文書構造に表示される項目を制限することができます。例えば、ラベルと参照の一覧を表示しているときに、小節への参照のみを見たい +場合には、フィルタに「sub:」というテキストを入力すれば、このテキストを含む項目、すなわち小節のみが表示されるようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書構造の下部には、表示をさらに細かく制御できるボタン類が並んでいます。 +\family sans +整序 +\family default +オプションは、表示されている一覧を、アルファベット順に整序するためのものであり、これを指定しないと、要素は、文書中に現れる順に表示されます。 +\family sans +保持 +\family default +オプションは、一覧の現在の表示状態を保持するためのものです。ここで保持するとは、例えば、第2節と第4節の小節が表示された状態から第3節をクリックしたときに、第2 +節と第4節の小節を表示されたままの状態に保持することです。もし +\family sans +保持 +\family default +オプションが有効にされていなければ、クリックされた第3節を強調するために、第2節と第4節は閉じられるようになっています。最後に、左側のスライダは、文書構造を特定 +の「深さ」まで開くのに用います。どのように動作するかを知るには、いじってみるのがいいでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/reload.png + +\end_inset + +ボタンは、（通常必要でないはずですが）目次を再描画します。その隣のボタンは、節の文書中の位置を変えるためのボタンです。 +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/down.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +および +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/up.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +を使うと、節の文書中の位置が、前方に移動したり後方に移動したりします。つまり、例えば第2.5節を、第2.4節の前に持っていったり第2.6節の後に移動したりすることがで +きるわけです。それに伴い、LyXは、節番号を自動的に新しい順序に振り直してくれます。 +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/promote.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +ないし +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/demote.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +ボタン（または対応する短絡キー +\family sans +Tab +\family default +ないし +\family sans +Shift+Tab +\family default +）は、節の階層を変更するものです。つまり、例えば第2.5節を、第3節にしたり第2.4.1節にしたりすることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +入力補完・単語補完 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:入力補完" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +にゅうりょくほかん@入力補完 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +たんごほかん@単語補完|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +にゅうりょくほかん@入力補完 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、現在開かれている全ての文書を走査して、単語の補完案を提示してくれます。開かれている各文書に現れる単語は、全てデータベースに保管されて、補完案を提示する +のに使用されるようになっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +入力補完は、LyX設定（ +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +メニュー）中の +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +入力補完 +\family default +セクションで、有効にすることができます。 +\family sans +自動補完入力 +\family default +オプションは、補完の提案が、カーソル直後に直接表示されるようにします。 +\family sans +自動ポップアップ +\family default +では、補完は常にポップアップで表示されます。また、補完カーソル表示器は、 +\family sans +カーソル表示器 +\family default +オプションを無効にすれば、表示されなくなります。一般オプションの項では、補間入力や補間ポップアップの遅延時間を定義したり、長い補完候補を切り詰めるかどうかを選択 +したりすることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、補完候補がある場合には、カーソル直後に小さな三角形をインジケーターとして表示します。提案されている補完を受け入れる場合は、 +\family sans +Tab +\family default +キーを押してください。補完候補が複数ある場合には、ポップアップでそれらが表示されます。ポップアップ中でマウスや矢印キーを使用して補完候補を選び、 +\family sans +Return +\family default +キーを押せば、それを受け入れることになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +設定中の数式用補完オプションは、テキスト用補完オプションと同様に動きます。数式に特有な +\family sans +自動修正 +\family default +オプションでは、文字を構成することを可能にします。例えば、 +\begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$ +\end_inset + +という文字を挿入したい場合に、数式中で「 +\series bold +=> +\series default +」と入力すれば、この文字を入れることができるようになるのです。つまり、コマンドを入力したり、数式ツールバーを使うよりも速い、もうひとつの入力手段となります。サポ +ートされている文字の組み合わせは、LyXの導入されたフォルダのどこかにある +\family typewriter +autocorrect +\family default +というファイルに、列挙されています。数式自動修正機能は、感嘆符キー「!」を押せば、いつでも有効にすることができます。無効にするには、 +\family sans +スペース +\family default +キーを押します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +基本的なキー割り当て +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +きーわりあて@ +\family default +\series default +\shape default +\size default +\emph default +\bar default +\noun default +\color inherit +キー割り当て +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +わりあて@割り当て|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +きーわりあて@キー割り当て +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +たんらくきー@短絡キー|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +きーわりあて@キー割り当て +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょーとかっと@ショートカット|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +きーわりあて@キー割り当て +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXには、 +\family typewriter +cua +\family default +と +\family typewriter +emacs +\family default +という、少なくとも二つの主だったキー割り当てがあります。LyXの既定値は、 +\family typewriter +cua +\family default +ですが、LyX設定の +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +短絡キー +\family default +で変更することができます。 +\lang english +(You can list or change any key bindings as explained in +\lang japanese +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:短絡キーの編集" + +\end_inset + +。) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Up +\family default +・ +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Down +\family default +・ +\family sans +← +\family default +・ +\family sans +→ +\family default +・ +\family sans +↑ +\family default +・ +\family sans +↓ +\family default +のようないくつかのキーは、予想どおりの動作をしますが、そうでないキーもあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Tab +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Tab" +description "タブキー" + +\end_inset + + +\family default + LyXにはタブストップのようなものはありません。これがどういう意味かわからなかったら、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:段落の字下げと分け方" + +\end_inset + +節と第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:段落環境" + +\end_inset + +節、その中でも特に第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:箇条書き" + +\end_inset + +節を読んで下さい。それでもまだわからないときは『 +\emph on +入門篇 +\emph default +』を参照してください。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +LyXでは、タブキーは、入力補完で候補を受諾するときにのみ使用されます +\lang english +, to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting + level in Itemize or Enumerate +\lang japanese +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Esc +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Esc" +description "エスケープキー" + +\end_inset + + +\family default + これは「取り消しキー」です。これは、一般的に、操作を取り消す場合に使います。詳しくは、この取扱説明書の他の場所で説明されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Home +\family default +および +\family sans +End +\family default + これらはカーソルを行の先頭または最後に移動させます。ただし、Emacsキーバインドを使っている場合には、文章の先頭または最後にカーソルを移動させます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +修飾キーは3つあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Control +\family default + （文書ファイルでは「 +\family sans +Ctrl +\family default +」 +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Ctrl" +description "コントロールキー" + +\end_inset + +で表されます。）これはどのキーと組み合わせるかによって、いくつかの異なった使い方があります： +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Backspace +\family default +や +\family sans +Delete +\family default +と一緒に使うと、1文字ではなく一つの単語を削除します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +← +\family default +や +\family sans +→ +\family default +と使うと文字単位ではなく、単語単位で移動します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Home +\family default +や +\family sans +End +\family default +と使うと文章の初め、または終りに移動します。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Shift +\family default + （文書ファイルでは「 +\family sans +Shift +\family default +」 +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Shift" +description "シフトキー" + +\end_inset + +で表されます。）これをどの移動キーと一緒に使っても、前のカーソルの位置と新しいカーソルの位置の間のテキストを選択できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +Alt +\family default + （文書ファイルでは「 +\family sans +Alt +\family default +」 +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "Alt" +description "メタキーまたはAltキー" + +\end_inset + +で表されます。）キーボードにAltキーと独立してMetaキーがない限りは、多くのキーボードにおいて、これはAltキーです。両方のキーがある場合には、どちらのキー +が、実際に +\family sans +Alt+ +\family default +機能を果たしているのかを確かめる必要があります。このキーは多くのさまざまな役割を果たしますが、そのうちの一つに、 +\emph on +メニュー高速化キー +\emph default +を有効にする役割があります。もしこのキーを、メニューやメニュー項目で下線が引いてある文字と一緒に押すと、そのメニュー項目を選ぶことができるのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +例えば、キーを「 +\family sans +Alt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +e +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +s +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +c +\family default +」の順で押すと、「文字形式」メニューが呼び出されます。「 +\family sans +Alt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +f +\family default +」の順で押すと、 +\family sans +ファイル +\family default +メニューが開かれます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +『 +\emph on +短絡キー +\emph default +』説明書には、 +\family sans +Alt +\family default +鍵に割り当てられているすべての機能が掲げてあります。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +何らかの動作を行うと、ほとんどの場合、LyXのメインウィンドウ下にあるステータスバーに、いま行った動作名と、その動作に結びつけられたキー割り当てが表示されますの +で、LyXを使っていくにしたがって、次第にキー割り当てと短絡キーを覚えていくことができるでしょう。LyXのメニューにも定義されているキー割り当てが表示されます。 +キー割り当ての表記は、この文書の表記とたいへん似ているので、理解するのに困難はないでしょう。ただ、Shift修飾キーは、明示的に表記されるようになっていますので +、「 +\family sans +Alt+P Shift+A +\family default +」と表示された場合は +\family sans +、Alt+P +\family default +の後に大文字の +\family sans +A +\family default +を押すという意味です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +LyXの基本 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lyx@LyX ! きほん@基本 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +文書型 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書 ! がた@------型 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +はじめに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文章を書く前に、まず一番最初に +\emph on +どのような型 +\emph default +の文章を編集するかを決める必要があります。異なる型の文章は、余白取りもヘッダや番号のつけ方も異なりますし、使うことのできる段落環境や文書のタイトルの書式も異なり +ます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\emph on +文書クラス +\emph default +は、その種類の文章に共通なタイプセットのやり方を記述しています。文書クラスを設定すると、自動的にそのような特性を設定したことになり、自分の作りたいタイプの文章を +簡単に作れます。もし文書クラスを設定しなかったら、LyXが既定の文書クラスを選びます。それよりも自分で文章のクラスを設定した方がいいでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXで使える文書クラスの情報、そしてそれをどう変えるかについてはこの続きを読んで下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文書クラス +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +ぶんしょ@ +\family default +\series default +\shape default +\size default +\emph default +\bar default +\noun default +\color inherit +文書 ! くらす@------クラス +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:文書クラス" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +クラスは、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書 ! せってい@設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ダイアログで選択することができます。使用したいクラスを選択し、必要なオプションの微調整を行ってください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +概観 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXには、以下の4つの標準文書クラスがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Article 論文用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Report レポート用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Book 本を書くためのクラス +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Letter 英文の書簡用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これら以外にも非標準のクラスがありますが、LyXでは、それらがすでに装備されているときにかぎり、それらを使うことができます。以下に主要な非標準クラスを挙げますが +、完全な一覧と詳しい説明は、取扱説明書『高度な機能篇』の +\emph on +特別な文書クラス +\emph default +の章にあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +A&A +\family default + 学術誌『 +\emph on +Astronomy and Astrophysics +\emph default +（天文学と天体物理学）』で用いられる形式および書式を備えた学術論文 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +ACS +\family default + アメリカ化学学会（American Chemistry Society: ACS）発行の学術誌投稿用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +AGU +\family default +アメリカ地球物理学会（American Geophysical Union: AGU）発行の学術誌投稿用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +AMS +\family default + アメリカ数学会（American Mathematical Society：AMS）で用いられる形式および書式を備えた、論文用および書籍用のレイアウト。論文用 +レイアウトには3つの種類があります。標準のものは、定理番号等の前に節番号を付加する、定理等に典型的な連番スキームを使用します。結果に関する叙述（定理、命題、系等 +）には、共通した通し番号がつけられますが、定義や例の類には個別の通し番号がつけられます。「通し番号」スキームでは、節番号を付加せずに論文全体を通じた通し番号が付 +けられます。また、結果に関する叙述には、それぞれ別の通し番号が用いられます。また連番をまったくつけないレイアウトもあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Beamer +\family default + プレゼンテーション用レイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Broadway +\family default + 戯曲を書くためのレイアウト。既存のLaTeXの文書クラスではなく、LyXとともに新たに頒布されているものです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Chess +\family default + チェスゲームについて記すためのレイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Curiculum +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +vitae +\family default + 履歴書作成用のクラス +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Elsarticle +\family default + Elsevier出版グループの学術誌向けのレイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Foils +\family default + OHPシート作成用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Hollywood +\family default + アメリカ映画産業向けのスペック・スクリプト（持ち込み原稿）を書くのに使われます。既存のLaTeXの文書クラスではなく、LyXとともに新たに頒布されているもので +す。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +IEEEtran +\family default + IEEE（電気電子学会）が発行する学術誌向ã‘のレイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +IOP +\family default + イギリス物理学会(IOP)出版グループの学術誌向けのレイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Kluwer +\family default + Kluwer出版グループの学術誌向けのレイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +KOMA-Script +\family default + 標準クラスの代替クラスであり、キャプション書式や印刷余白の自動計算など、多くの便利な機能を持っています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Memoir +\family default + もう一つの標準クラスの代替クラス +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Powerdot +\family default + プレゼンテーション用レイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +RevTe +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +X +\family default + アメリカ物理学会（APS）やアメリカ物理学協会（AIP）、アメリカ光学会（OSA）の学術誌に投稿する論文を執筆するのに用いられます。このクラスは、 + LyXの全機能と互換性があるわけではありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Slides +\family default + OHPを作成するのに使用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +SPIE学会報 +\family default + 国際光工学会（SPIE）発行学術誌用のレイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Springer +\family default + Springer出版グループの学術誌向けのレイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここではこれらの文書クラスをどのように使うかについての詳細は説明しません。取扱説明書『 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +』にこのような標準的でないクラスについての説明があります。ここでは次にすべての文書クラスに共通する性質を説明します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +利用可能性 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文書クラス +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書 ! せってい@設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +に列挙されている文書クラスの多くが、「利用不能」と記されていることにおそらく気付かれたのではないでしょうか。それらのクラスを使用した文書を開くと、出力を生成する +ために必要なファイルが導入されていませんという警告が表示されます。これを見て、何か設定がおかしいのではないかと思われるかもしれません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +しかし、これは何も異常なことではありません。LyXには、あなたが必要とする以上の文書クラスが収録されており、 +\family sans +IOP +\family default +など、そのうち一部は特定の目的に高度に特化したものです。LyXは、できる限り多様な種類の文書をサポートしようと努力しており、およそ100種にも及ぶレイアウトファ +イルを収録して、その数はなお増加し続けています。これらの文書クラスに必要とされるすべてのファイルを、既定で導入するLaTeX頒布版は存在しません。あまりにも種類 +が多いのです。これが文書クラスのうち一部が利用不能となっているゆえんです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もし使用したい文書クラスのうち「利用不能」と記されているものがある場合には、適切なパッケージファイルを導入してやる必要があります。どのファイルを導入する必要があ +るかを確認する最も易しい方法は、その文書クラスを使った新規ファイルを作成することです。するとLyXは、不足しているファイルを列挙したダイアログを表示します。これ +らを導入する方法については、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +カスタマイズ篇 +\emph default +』の『新しいLaTeXファイルの導入』節をご覧ください。 +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、多様な文書に対してサポートを提供していますが、人々が使用したいと思う文書クラスすべてに対してサポートを行っているわけではありません。たとえば、多くの大 +学が、大学への博士論文提出用のLaTeXクラスファイルを提供しています。LyX開発チームは、これらを一つずつサポートするためにレイアウトファイルを書くわけにはい +きません。あまりにも多すぎるのです。さいわい、ユーザーは自分自身のレイアウトファイルを書くことができ、実際に多くのユーザーがそうしています。取扱説明書『カスタマ +イズ篇』の第5章に、レイアウトファイルの作成のしかたに関する情報があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +モジュール +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:モジュール" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書 ! もじゅーる@モジュール +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +モジュールは、選択した文書クラスでは既定では利用できない機能を文書に追加します。例えば、点字を文書中で書きたいものとしましょう。点字はもちろんどの文書クラスでも +利用可能ではありませんので、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ダイアログの +\family sans +モジュール +\family default +面で対応するモジュールを読み込ませなくてはなりません。ダイアログでモジュールを選択状態にすると、そのモジュールの説明が表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +モジュールのうちには、既定では必ずしも導入されていないLaTeXパッケージやファイル書式変換子を必要とするものがあります。必要とされるパッケージやファイル書式変 +換子がない場合には、LyXは警告を発して、具体的に何が足りないかを示します。これを無視しても、ファイルを編集している間は、モジュールを使用することができますが、 +必要な構成物なしには、LyXがLaTeXファイルをコンパイルすることができないので、PDFに書き出したり文書を印刷したりすることはできません。出力を生成したい場 +合には、必要な構成物を導入した後、 +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +再初期設定 +\family default +を選択して、LyXを再初期設定する必要があります +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyXのさいしょきせってい@LyXの再初期設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。必要なパッケージを導入する方法については、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +カスタマイズ篇 +\emph default +』の『新しいLaTeXファイルの導入』節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +モジュールのうちには、他のモジュールを必要とするものがある一方で、お互いに互換性のないモジュールもあります。LyXは、これらの問題がある場合には、その情報を表示 +します。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +ローカルレイアウト +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:ローカルレイアウト" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書 ! ろーかるれいあうと@ローカルレイアウト +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXにとってのモジュールは、LaTeXにおけるパッケージのようなものです。これらは、いろいろな文書で用いられることを意図したもので、別の文書で頻繁に同じような +ことを必要とすることがわかった場合には、その目的用のモジュールを書くことを考えたほうが良いでしょう。しかしながら、特定の文書が非常に特別なものを必要としており、 +特殊な差込枠や文字様式を必要としているけれども、一度限りしか使わないということもあるでしょう。つまり、文書にLaTeXプリアンブルのようなものを欲しいわけです。 +この時に便利なのが、LyXの「ローカルレイアウト」です。この使い方については、『取扱説明書カスタマイズ篇』の「ローカルレイアウト」の項をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +特性 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +各クラスには、既定のオプションの組があります。以下の一覧表は、その簡単な説明です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +Pagestyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +両面／片面 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +段組 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +節分け最上位階層 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +article +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +プレーン（Plain） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +片面 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +1段 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +節 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +report +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +プレーン（Plain） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +片面 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +1段 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +ç«  +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +book +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +設定（Headings） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +両面 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +1段 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +ç«  +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +letter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +プレーン（Plain） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +片面 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +1段 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +なし +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +おそらく「節分け最上位階層」とはどういう意味だろうと思っているでしょう。節の見出しを使える段落環境は、いくつかあります。異なった文書クラスでは、異なった節の見出 +しを使うことが出来ます。2つの文書クラスだけが +\family sans +ç«  +\family default +を使うことができて、残りは +\family sans +ç«  +\family default +を使うことができず、そのかわりに +\family sans +節 +\family default +から始まります。letter文書クラスでは、節の見出しは使えません。 +\family sans +ç«  +\family default +と +\family sans +節 +\family default +に加えて、 +\family sans +小節 +\family default +や +\family sans +小々節 +\family default +もあります。これらの詳しい説明は第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:見出し" + +\end_inset + +節にあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文書レイアウト +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:文書レイアウト" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!れいあうと@------レイアウト +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書クラスの重要な特性のほとんどは、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +メニューで設定されます。 +\family sans +文書クラス +\family default +の中にある +\family sans +オプション +\family default +フィールドには、現在の文書クラスに与える特別なオプションを、コンマ区切りの形で列挙することができますが、この方法は、現在の文書で使いたい特別なオプションをLyX +がサポートしていないときのみ必要になります。ご使用になりたいLaTeXクラスとそのオプションの詳細を知るには、そのLaTeXクラスの取扱説明書を読む必要がありま +す。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログの +\family sans +ページレイアウト +\family default +にある +\family sans +ヘディング形式 +\family default +ドロップボックスは、どのようなヘディングとページ番号が各ページに現れるかを制御します。以下の5つの選択肢があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +既定値 +\family default + 現在のクラスの既定のページ形式を使います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +空 +\family default + ページ番号もヘッダーもつけません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +プレーン（plain） +\family default + ページ番号だけつけます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +設定（headings） +\family default + ページ番号と、そのページの章か節の名前と番号をいれます。現在の章を使うか節を使うかは、そのクラスの節分け最上位階層に依存します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +装飾的（fancy） +\family default + +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +パッケージが装備されていれば、完全にカスタマイズできるヘッダとフッタを生成することができます。定義の内容については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ユーザ設定ページヘッダ" + +\end_inset + +節で言及されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落の分け方については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:段落の分け方" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +用紙寸法と方向 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!ようしすんぽう@用紙寸法 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:用紙寸法と方向" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +メニューで現れるダイアログの +\family sans +ページレイアウト +\family default +メニューには、以下のオプションがあります。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +用紙書式 +\family default + 印刷する用紙寸法を選びます。選べるのは、次のサイズです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +既定値 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +A0 - A6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +B0 - B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +C0 - C6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +USレター, USリーガル, USエグゼクティブ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +JIS B0 - JIS B6 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +ユーザ設定 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +用紙方向 +\family default + 出力を +\family sans +横向き +\family default +にするか +\family sans +縦向き +\family default +にするかを選択します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +両面文書 +\family default + 印刷の余白を両面印刷用に調整します。これは、奇数ページと偶数ページで余白が変わることを意味します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +余白 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!のよはく@------の余白 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:余白" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +よはく@余白 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +用紙の余白は、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +メニューで設定します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +KOMA-Script文書クラスをお使いの時は、既定値で使って構いません。KOMA-Scriptは、用紙書式とフォント寸法を考慮に入れて、印刷余白を自動的に計算 +するからです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +重要な覚書 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書クラスが変更されると、LyXは +\emph on +すべてのもの +\emph default +を新しいクラス用に変換する必要があります。変換が必要なものには、段落環境も含まれます。段落環境のいくつかは標準的なもので、すべての文書クラスに備わっていますが、 +文書クラスによっては、特殊な段落環境を持っている場合があります。このような場合に、文書クラスが変更されると、LyXはもはや未知のものとなった段落を「解釈不能」と +マークします。旧文書クラスに戻りたいと思ったときのために、段落様式名は維持されます。しかしこれらの段落は、特別な整形をされることなしに出力されてしまうので、新し +い段落様式を自分で作り出すか、新しい文書クラスに既存の段落様式に手動で変更する必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +段落の字下げと分け方 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だんらく@段落!のじさげ@------の字下げ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +はじめに +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:段落の字下げと分け方" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +色々な段落環境を説明する前に、段落の字下げについて少し説明しておきましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落の分け方については、すべての人がそれぞれの慣習を持っているようです。ほとんどのアメリカ人は、段落の最初の行を字下げします。一方で、字下げをせずに、段落間にス +ペースを入れる人もいます。段落を字下げすることを選択した場合には、節の +\emph on +最初の +\emph default +段落や、図・数式・表・リストなどの後の段落では、字下げは +\emph on +行われません +\emph default +。ある段落の後の段落のみ字下げされます。しかし、英語でない文書言語を用いるときには、字下げの挙動は異なることに注意してください。LaTeXが、使用言語のルールに +したがって字下げを調整します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +行間や、ヘッダと本文の間の余白など、段落間の余白—実のところ、ほとんどすべてのことに関する余白—は、LyXに前もって組み込まれています。これまで述べてきたように +、あれこれのあいだにどれだけ余白を空けるかといったことに、あなたが気を使う必要はまったくありません。それはLyXがやることです。実は、それらの組み込まれた余白は +、固定値ではなく範囲で与えられています。これによってLyXは、図がページの中で本文とうまく収まるようにしたり、節がページの最後から始まったりしないようにするため +に、行間を伸ばしたり縮めたりすることができるのです +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、LyXが印刷可能なファイルを生成する時に LaTeXが行います。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。しかし、組み込まれているといっても、ユーザーが余白を変えることができないということを意味するわけではありません。LyXは、これらの組み込まれた余白の +\emph on +全て +\emph default +を、全般的に変更できる余地を提供しています。これについては後に詳述します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +段落の分け方 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:段落の分け方" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だんらく@段落!のわけかた@------の分け方 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落の分け方を選ぶには、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@ +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +文書!せってい@------設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +のダイアログの +\family sans +本文レイアウト +\family default +サブメニューの中で、段落を字下げするか段落間に余白を追加するかにしたがって、 +\family sans +行頭下げ +\family default +か +\family sans +垂直スペース +\family default +を選んでください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +微調整 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文章全体ではなく、一つの段落だけに対して段落の区切り方を変えることもできます。現在の段落の状態を変更するには、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +段落設定 +\family default +ダイアログを開いて、 +\family sans +段落の行頭下げ +\family default +オプションを切り替えてください。段落が、行頭下げではなく余白で区切られている場合には、このボタンは無視されます（これを切り替えることによって、個別の段落を字下げ +することはできません）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +何らかの微調整が必要な場合以外には、個別の段落の字下げ方法を変更する必要はないはずです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +行間 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +だんらく@ +\family default +\series default +\shape default +\size default +\emph default +\bar default +\noun default +\color inherit +段落!のぎょうかん@------の行間 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ダイアログの +\family sans +本文レイアウト +\family default +サブメニューで行間を設定することができます +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +この機能を使うためには、LaTeXパッケージのsetspaceが装備されている必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。 +\lang english +You can set it for a single paragraph in the +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing + is normally defined in the environment's style. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +段落環境 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:段落環境" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だんらく@段落!かんきょう@------環境 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だんらくかんきょう@段落環境|( +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +概観 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落環境は、LaTeXファイルにおける +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +begin{ +\emph on +環境名 +\emph default +} ... + +\backslash +end{ +\emph on +環境名 +\emph default +} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +コマンドに対応するものです。もしLaTeXを知らなかったり、段落環境がどういうものか見当もつかない場合は +\emph on +、 +\emph default +『 +\emph on +入門篇 +\emph default +』を読んで下さい。『 +\emph on +入門篇 +\emph default +』にはこの節よりも多くの例も含まれています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落環境とは、その段落に特定の性質を与える、段落の「入れもの」に過ぎません。ここでいう性質には、特定の様式のフォントやいろいろな余白、連番の振り方、ラベルなどが +含まれます。さらに、ある段落環境を別の段落環境の中に「入れ子」状に入れて、上位段落環境から性質の一部を継承させることができます。一連の段落環境を使うことによって +、ややこしいタブストップや執筆作業中の余白調整や、その他タイプライタ時代からの遺物を一掃することができるようになります。特定の文章型にのみ使われる段落環境もあり +ますが、ここでは最も一般的なものだけを取り上げることにします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +新しい段落環境を選ぶためには、ツールバーの左端のプルダウンボックス +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png + scale 70 + +\end_inset + +を使って下さい。LyXは、カーソル位置の +\emph on +段落全体 +\emph default +の環境を変更します。また、新しい環境を選ぶ前に複数の段落を選択しておくと、選択した段落全ての環境を変えることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押すと、 +\emph on +一般的 +\emph default +には +\family sans +、 +\family default +新しい段落は +\family sans +標準 +\family default +段落環境で作られます。「一般的には」と言うのは、以下の環境の中では、 +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押すと、 +\family sans +標準 +\family default +にリセットされずに、前の段落の環境が維持されるからです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +詩句 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +リスト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ただし、入れ子階層の深さは +\size small +リセット +\size default +されることに注意してください。通常の場合は、新しい段落を開始すると、段落環境も入れ子階層の深さもリセットされます（入れ子については第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:入れ子" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください）。今のところ、これらは全て文脈に依存しますので、 +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押すと、段落環境も入れ子の深さもリセットされると考えておいた方が安全でしょう。新規の段落に、現在の環境と階層を維持させたいときには、 +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + +\family default +をお使い下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +標準 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ほとんどのクラスの既定の段落環境は、標準です。これは特別な性質を持たない、普通の段落を作ります。もしLyXがある段落環境をリセットして新しい段落を作る場合は、こ +れが選ばれます。実際あなたが読んでいるこの（そしてこの取扱説明書のほとんどの）段落が +\family sans +標準 +\family default +環境です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +どの環境の中にも +\family sans +標準 +\family default +環境を入れることができますが、他の環境を標準環境の中に入れることはできません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文書タイトル +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!たいとる@------タイトル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXのタイトルページは3つの部分を持っています。タイトルそれ自身と著者の名前、それと著者の連絡先や謝辞を書いた脚注です。あるタイプの文章では、LaTeXは +これらすべてと今日の日付を独立したページに印刷します。また別のタイプの文章では「タイトル」ページは文章の一番はじめのページの上の方に印刷されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXはタイトルページ用のコマンドへのインターフェイスを +\family sans +タイトル +\family default +、 +\family sans +著者 +\family default +、 +\family sans +日付 +\family default +という3つの段落環境の形で用意しています。使い方は、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +文章のタイトルを +\family sans +タイトル +\family default +環境に入れる。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +著者の名前を +\family sans +著者 +\family default +環境に入れる。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +もし特定の日付を入れたい場合や、今日の日付の場所に別のテキストを入れたい場合には、それを +\family sans +日付 +\family default +環境に入れる。この +\family sans +日付 +\family default +環境はオプションです。入れる必要はありません。 +\family sans +日付 +\family default +環境がない場合には、LaTeXは自動的に今日の日付を入れます。 +\lang english +If you don't want a date, use the option +\family sans +Suppress default date on front page +\family default + in the menu +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +class +\family default +. +\lang japanese +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また脚注を使って、謝辞や著者の連絡先を入れることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +見出し +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せつみだし@節見出し +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:見出し" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +節見出しを作るために、いくつかの段落環境があります。LyXが見出しの番号を自動的につけてくれます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +番号付きの見出し +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せつみだし@節見出し!ばんごうつき@番号付き------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +次の7種類の番号付きの見出しがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +部 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +ç«  +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +節 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +小節 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +小々節 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +段落 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +小段落 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、これらの見出しに一連のピリオドで分けられた番号をつけます。この番号はあなたが読んでいるのは、文章のどこであるかを表しています。他の見出しと異なって、部 +の見出しはラテン数字で番号がつけられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらの見出しによって文章はいくつかの部分へ分けられます。例えば本を書く場合を考えて下さい。一冊の本をいくつかの章へ分けるでしょう。LyXはこれと同じようなグル +ープ分けをします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +部 +\family default +は、 +\family sans +ç«  +\family default +か節に分けられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +ç«  +\family default +はいくつかの +\family sans +節 +\family default +に分けられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +節 +\family default +はいくつかの +\family sans +小節 +\family default +に分けられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +小節 +\family default +はいくつかの +\family sans +小々節 +\family default +に分けられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +小々節 +\family default +はいくつかの +\family sans +段落 +\family default +に分けられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +段落 +\family default +はいくつかの +\family sans +小段落 +\family default +に分けられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +すべての文章タイプが、 +\family sans +ç«  +\family default +を節分けの一番高いレベルとして使っているわけではありません。その場合には +\family sans +節 +\family default +が一番高いレベルになります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +つまり新しい小節に +\family sans +小節 +\family default +環境を使って見出しを作る場合には、（章番号.）節番号.小節の番号という形で番号をつけます。例えば、この取扱説明書の第2章の5番目の節の場合は「2.5」という番号が付け +られています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +番号を付けない見出し +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せつみだし@節見出し!ばんごうをつけない@番号を付けない------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +番号を付けない見出しは、名称の終わりに「*」が付いています。これらは、目次に載らないこと以外は、番号付きの見出しと同じように働きます（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:目次と一覧" + +\end_inset + +節を参照）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +番号の付け方の変更 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:番号の付け方-深度" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +どの節レベルまで番号をつけるか、また目次ではどのレベルまで番号をつけるかを変更することができます。これは文書クラスで決まっている節のレベルを変えるものではありま +せん。あるタイプの文章は +\family sans +ç«  +\family default +から始まって +\family sans +小段落 +\family default +までの節レベルを持っています。また別のクラスでは +\family sans +節 +\family default +から始まります。同じように、すべての文書クラスがすべての節レベルに対して番号をつけるのではありません。ほとんどの文書クラスは +\family sans +段落 +\family default +と +\family sans +小段落 +\family default +には番号はつけません。しかし、この設定は変えることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@ +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ダイアログを開いて下さい。 +\family sans +連番と目次 +\family default +の中に2つのカウンタがあります。 +\family sans +連番 +\family default +と名づけられたものは、節分けのどの階層の節見出しにまでLyXが番号を付けるべきかを制御します。もう一つのものは、目次に節見出しが現れるようにするかどうかを制御し +ます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +見出しの短縮タイトル +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せつみだし@節見出し!のたんしゅくたいとる@------の短縮タイトル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +短縮タイトル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:短縮タイトル" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この節のように、ある節や章のタイトルは、ひじょうに長くなることもあります。これは、水平方向の余地が少ない場合、問題になることがあります。例えば、ページのヘッダが +現在の節のタイトルを表示するように設定されている場合、長いタイトルは、ページ余白にはみ出してひどい仕上がりになりかねません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXは、節見出しに短縮タイトルを設定することを容認しています。短縮タイトルは、上記の問題を避けるためにヘッダと目次で使用されます。、短縮タイトルを設定する +には、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +短縮タイトル +\family default +メニューを使用してください。このメニューは、「オプション」というラベルのついたボックスを挿入し、短縮タイトルの文字列を入力できるようになります。これは、フロート +内のキャプションにも使うことができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +本節のタイトルは、この機能を使った一例になっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +特別な情報 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +次のことはすべての節見出し環境に共通することです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +節見出し環境を入れ子にすることはできません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +節見出し環境では傍注は使えません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +節見出し環境では、文中数式しか使えません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +見出し番号を参照するのに、ラベルと相互参照を使うことができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +引用と詩行の空白取り +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは詩を書いたり引用文を挿入するための、3つの段落環境を持っています。 +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +と +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +および +\family sans +詩句 +\family default +です。他のワードプロセッサなら引用文を挿入する場合には余白の調整、行間の変更が必要でしたが、この3つの段落環境を使えば自動的にやってくれます。この3つの環境はす +べてマージンを広くして、挿入するテキストの上と下にスペースを追加します。これらは、入れ子にすることもできるので、例えば、 +\family sans +詩句 +\family default +を +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +や他の段落環境に入れることもできます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この3つの環境の特徴として、新しい段落をはじめても +\family sans +標準 +\family default +環境にリセット +\emph on +されない +\emph default +ことがあります。そのため詩を書いてる最中に環境が変わるのを心配すること無しに気楽に +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押すことができます。ただし、そのかわりに詩を書き終ったら、自分で +\family sans +標準 +\family default +環境に変える必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +引用（字下げなし）と引用（字下げあり） +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:引用" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いんよう@引用 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +さて今までは3つの環境の共通点を説明してきましたが、ここで違いについて説明しましょう。 +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +と +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +は、一つの違いを除くと同じものです。 +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +は段落を分けるのに段落間にスペースを入れますが、 +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +は +\emph on +常に +\emph default +最初の行を字下げすることで段落を分けます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これは +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +環境の例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +ここは +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +環境です。どんどん書いていってあげましょう。この行をどんどん延ばして、改行するところまで持っていきましょう。ほら、字下げしないでしょう？ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +ここは、同じ引用の第2段落です。ここでも字下げはありません。ただし、私のいるこの段落と上の段落の間には、余白が設けられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +さて今度は +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +環境の例を見てみましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +ここは +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +環境です。どんどん書いていくと、字下げしていることが分かるでしょう。もしあなたが、第一行を字下げして新しい段落が始まったことを示すような記法を使っている国にいる +場合、 +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +はあなた向けの環境です！もちろん、どこかの文章を引用すると仮定しての話です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +ここは新しい段落です。選挙のときの政治家みたいにくだらないことをぐだぐだと書き続けてみましょう。本当にそうしたら、きっとあなたは退屈するでしょうが。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これでわかるように、 +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +は段落を分けるのにスペースを使う人のための環境で、 +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +は、字下げを段落を分けるのに使う人のための環境です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +詩句 +\family sans + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だんらく@段落!しく@詩句 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +し@è©© +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:詩句" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +詩句 +\family default +は、詩や韻文などを書くための段落環境です。次の例を見て下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +これは詩篇なり +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +われは一度たりとも手習いもせず +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +あしきものはさらにあしきものとならざるべからず。その流れはとどまるところをしらざるものとなり、倦むことをしらざるほどに、ながく、またながく、うたかたの流れもたえ +ざるほどに、またこの行も改行せんほどにながくのびていく。画面においてはよからん、されど印字した場合にはいかほどや。そこにおいては、後の行は最初の行よりも少しだけ +字下げされん。だんだん散文になってきて韻も踏めないのでやめましょう。叱ってん +\begin_inset Formula $\heartsuit$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +行を改行するには +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +そして見栄えをよくするには +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +をつかうべし +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +見てわかるように、 +\family sans +詩句 +\family default +は段落を分けるのに字下げをしません。また詩の一連が一つの段落になっています。一連の中で行を分けるには、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +を押して +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default +関数を使って下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +箇条書き +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:箇条書き" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、箇条書きを作るために4つの段落環境を持っています。 +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +と +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境では、LyXは各々の項目の前に小さい印か番号をつけます。 +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +と +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境では、自分で各項目のラベルをつけることができます。まずこの4つの環境に共通することを説明して、それから各々の環境について説明することにしましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +一般的な性質 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この4つの箇条書きを作る環境は、さまざまな面で他の環境と異なります。まず初めに、LyXは各々の段落を箇条書きの項目として扱います。 +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押しても環境は +\family sans +標準 +\family default +に +\emph on +変わるのではなく +\emph default +、新しい箇条書きの項目が作られます。ここで、環境の入れ子の階層は維持されます。段落環境は変えないで、現在の階層だけをリセットしたい場合は、 +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + + +\family default +を使って改行します。 +\lang english +If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the +\family sans +Standard +\family default + environment. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらの環境の中に、任意の箇条書き環境を入れることもできます。実際、いくつかの箇条書き環境では、入れ子の深さによってLyXがラベルを変えます。リスト環境を入れ子 +にしたい場合は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:入れ子" + +\end_inset + +節をぜひ読んで下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かじょうがき@箇条書き!きごう@------（記号） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:箇条書き（記号）" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +一番初めに +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +段落環境を説明しましょう。この段落環境は次のような性質を持っています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +各々の項目は小さい印（シンボル）をラベルとして使います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +同じ入れ子の深さの場合、同じシンボルが使われます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +シンボルは一行目の一番初めにつきます。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +項目の長さは制限されません。LyXは自動的に各項目の左余白を調整します。そして、左余白の大きさは +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +が含まれている環境によって変わります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +もし他の +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境の中に別の +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境を入れると項目のラベルのシンボルが変わります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +4つの異なるシンボルがあって、4段階の入れ子の深さに対応しています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +画面上では、つねに同じシンボルを表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +入れ子になった環境の詳しい説明は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:入れ子" + +\end_inset + +節を見て下さい。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +上の説明は +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +を使ったリストの例になってます。 +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境は順序が問題にならないようなリストを作るのに向いた環境です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +違うレベルでは違うシンボルがラベルとして使われると言いましたが、それを見てみましょう。次の例では4つのすべてのシンボルを使っています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +初めのレベルの +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +のラベルは黒丸です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +2番目のレベルのシンボルはダッシュ(-)です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +3番目のレベルのラベルはアステリスク(*)です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +4番目のレベルのラベルは小さな黒丸です。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +3番目のレベルに戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +2番目のレベルに戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +一番外側のレベルに戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらが既定の +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +のラベルです。 +\lang english +You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings +\family default + dialog in the submenu +\family sans +Bullets +\family default +. +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@ +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english + These customizations are not displayed in LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上の例を見ると、項目間の距離もレベルが増すに連れ減って行くのもわかると思います。環境を入れ子にする方法と、そうした場合のヒントが第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:入れ子" + +\end_inset + +節で説明されてます。読むのを忘れないで下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かじょうがき@箇条書き!ばんごう@------（番号） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:箇条書き（番号）" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境は番号付きのリストやアウトラインを作るための道具です。これは次のような性質を持っています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +各々の項目は数字またはアルファベットをラベルとして使います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +ラベルの種類は入れ子の深さによって異なります。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +LyXが項目の数を数えてラベルを自動的につけ、必要ならば更新します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +新しい +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境に入ると項目の番号は1にリセットされます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境と同様に、 +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境は +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +項目のレベルに応じて左マージンが変わります。項目の長さはどんな長さでも大丈夫です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +入れ子の深さに応じて項目間のスペースを減らして行きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +入れ子の深さに応じて異なるラベルを使います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +環境を4段階まで入れ子にできます。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境と違い、LyXでは +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +は各項目に異なったラベルをつけます。次の例で +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +の4段階のレベルにLyXがつけるラベルを見て下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +一番目のレベルでは後ろにピリオド(.)が付いたアラビア数字がラベルに使われます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +2番目のレベルでは括弧で囲まれた小文字のアルファベットが使われます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +3番目のレベルでは後ろにピリオドが付いた小文字のローマ数字が使われます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +4番目のレベルでは後ろにピリオドの付いた大文字のアルファベットが使われます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +項目間の距離は入れ子の深さが深くなるに連れて狭くなって行くのに注意して下さい。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +3番目のレベルに戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +2番目のレベルに戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +1番外側のレベルです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +You can customize the type of numbering used in the +\family sans +Enumerate +\family default + environment, see +\lang japanese +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:箇条書きの微調整" + +\end_inset + +。 +\lang english +Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境を入れ子にすることに関しては、さらに述べるべきことがあります。より詳しくは、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:入れ子" + +\end_inset + +節をご参照ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection + +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かじょうがき@箇条書き!きじゅつ@------（記述） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +今までの2つの環境と違って、 +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +環境では項目に付けるラベルは決まっていません。そのかわりにLyXは項目の1行目の1番初めの「単語」をラベルに使うのです。例を見て下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +例: これは +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +環境の例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXはラベルをボールド体にして、ラベルと残りの部分の間にスペースを入れます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +1番初めの「単語」という意味は、ある項目の1行目にいるとき、最初に +\family sans +Space +\family default +キーが打たれたところでラベルが終了するということです。もしラベルに2語以上を使う必要がある場合には、 +\family sans +保護された空白 +\family default +を使用します（ +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + +と入力するか、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +保護された空白 +\family default +メニューを使用してください。詳細は第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:水平方向の空白" + +\end_inset + +節参照）。以下が使用例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Second +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Example: これは +\family sans +保護された空白 +\family default +をラベルに使った例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +使い方： +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +環境は定義、定理のようなものに使ったらいいでしょう。ある言葉を残りのテキストより目立つようにしたい場合に使えばいいのです。あることを説明する文章全体を +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +環境にいれるのはやめた方がいいでしょう。その場合には +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +か +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +を使って、その中にいくつかの +\family sans +標準 +\family default +環境をいれた方がいいでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +入れ子にする： +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +環境を他の +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +環境の中に入れたり、他のリストや別の環境の中に入れることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +注意ですが、LyXは2行目以降を1行目に対してオフセットするのに気をつけて下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +LyX +\family sans +リスト +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かじょうがき@箇条書き!LyXりすと@------（LyXリスト） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境はLyXがLaTeXを拡張したものです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +環境と同じように、 +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境はそれぞれの項目にユーザーが決めたラベルをつけます。 +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境と他の3つの環境の違いを説明しましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +項目ラベル LyXは項目の最初の「単語」をラベルに使います。最初の行の初めての +\family sans +スペース +\family default +がラベルと残りのテキストとの区切りになります。もし2つ以上の単語をラベルに使いたい場合は以前に説明した +\family sans +保護された空白 +\family default +を使って下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +余白 見ればわかるように、LyXはラベルと項目の本文とでは違う余白を使います。項目の本文にはより大きな余白がつかわれ、それは既定のラベルの幅に少しスペースを追加 +したものになっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +ラベル幅 ラベルの幅には、LyXは実際のラベルの幅と既定のラベルの幅を比べて大きい方を使います。もし実際の幅の方が大きければラベルは本文の1行目に食い込みます。 +つまり、1行目はそれ以降の行と異なる左余白になります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +既定の幅 +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境のすべての項目の本文が、同じ左余白を持つように、既定のラベル幅を設定することができます。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +既定の幅を変更するには、リストのすべての項目を選択して、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +段落設定 +\family default +ダイアログを開いてください。 +\family sans +最長のラベル +\family default +と書かれたボックス内の文字列が既定のラベル幅を決定します。もっとも長いラベルの文字列をそのまま入力するか、あるいは文字「M」を複数個入れてもいいでしょう。文字「 +M」はアルファベット中でもっとも幅の広い文字なので、LaTeXでは幅を表す標準単位として用いられているのです。「M」を幅の単位として用いていれば、 +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境内でラベルを変更する度に +\family sans +最長のラベル +\family default +の内容を書き換える必要がなくなります。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +あらかじめ定められた既定幅は、「00.00.0000」の文字列と同じ長さ（6M相当）になっています。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ラベル幅を変えるためだけにリスト項目にカーソルを設定しても、LyX内での幅が変わるだけで、出力には変わりありません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境は、 +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +と同じように、ある単語をその説明文から目立つようにしたい場合に使用してください。 +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境は、 +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +と同じことを別のレイアウトで実現する方法です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境は、それ自身や別の型の +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境の中に入れ子にすることができます。これは、他の箇条書き環境と同様の動作をします。入れ子についての詳細は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:入れ子" + +\end_inset + +節をお読みください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +リスト +\family default +環境には、もう一つ特徴があります。例でわかるように、LyXは、既定で項目ラベルを左揃えにします。 +\family sans +水平フィル +\family default +を追加すれば、LyXのラベルのそろえ方を変更することができます。 +\family sans +水平フィル +\family default +については、後ほど第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:水平方向の空白" + +\end_inset + +節で説明します。いくつかの例を見てみましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +å·¦ 既定 +\family sans +リスト +\family default +項目のラベルです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +右 ラベルの初めに +\family sans +水平フィル +\family default +を一つ入れると右揃えになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +中央 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + ラベルの初めと終わりに一つづつ +\family sans +水平フィル +\family default +を入れると中央揃えになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +箇条書きの微調整 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:箇条書きの微調整" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かじょうがき＠箇条書き! びちょうせい＠微調整 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +本節で述べられている機能を使用するには、文書設定で +\family sans +調整可能な箇条書き(enumitem) +\family default +モジュールを読み込まなくてはなりません。これは、LaTeX-packageの +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を読み込むものです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +調整可能な連番箇条書き +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かじょうがき＠箇条書き! れんばん＠連番 ! ちょうせい＠調整 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +連番箇条書きの番号の振り方の既定値は、箇条書きの各階層における最初の項目に、非必須引数を加えることで( +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +短縮タイトル +\family default +メニュー)変更することができます。そこに、TeXコードで(短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +TeXコードについての詳細は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:TeXコード" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +roman{enumi} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +というコマンドを書き加えてください。ここで、 +\emph on +enumi +\emph default +は、第1階層の連番のカウンタです。コマンド +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default +は、このカウントを、小文字のローマ数字で出力します。大文字のローマ数字を使うには、上記コマンド中の +\series bold + +\backslash +roman +\series default +を +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman +\series default +に置き換えてください。アラビア数字にするには、 +\series bold + +\backslash +arabic +\series default +を使用します。項目に、大文字もしくは小文字のラテン文字で「連番」を付けたい場合には、それぞれ +\series bold + +\backslash +Alph +\series default +もしくは +\series bold + +\backslash +alph +\series default +を使用してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +連番は1文字に限られているので、ラテン文字では26項目までしか連番を振ることはできません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +箇条書きの下位階層の連番を変更するには、コマンド中の「i」を、階層番号の小文字ローマ数字で置き換えてください(enumi, enumii, enumiii, + enumiv)。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +下記は、調整した連番箇条書きの例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +第1階層 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +第2階層 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +第2階層 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +第3階層 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +第4階層 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +上記リストでは、以下のようなコマンドが使用されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\series bold +label= +\backslash +# +\backslash +Alph{enumi} +\backslash +# +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +Alph{enumi}. +\backslash +arabic{enumii} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +bf{ +\backslash +arabic{enumiii}} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +label= +\backslash +emph{ +\backslash +roman{enumiv})} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここで、コマンド +\series bold + +\backslash +emph{} +\series default +は、ラベルを強調文字にし、 +\series bold + +\backslash +bf{} +\series default +はボールド体にします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +リスト階層のラベルを変更したときには、再度定義を変更するまで、それ以降のすべてのリストで、それがずっと使われます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +連番の復帰 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かじょうがき＠箇条書き! れんばん@連番 ! ふっき@復帰 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下のように、あいだに段落をはさんで、連番を復帰させることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +label= +\backslash +arabic{enumi}. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +1つめ +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +既定の連番に戻す +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +2つめ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +通常のテキスト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate-Resume +復帰した連番 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +連番を復帰させるには、スタイル +\family sans +箇条書き(連番)-復帰 +\family default +を使用してください。連番がLyX中に青色で表示されて、これが復帰連番であることを示し、LyX中での番号は正しくないけれども、出力中では正しくなることを強調します +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +前に復帰すべき連番がない場合には、LaTeXエラーが発生します。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +箇条書きの連番を復帰させる際、次の番号ではない番号に復帰させたかったり、新しい連番を、指定した番号から始めたいことがあるかもしれません。これも、通常の連番箇条書 +きの最初の項目に、非必須引数を加えることで実現できます。非必須引数として、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +start=番号 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +というコマンドを入力してください。ここで、「番号」は箇条書きを開始したい番号です。例： +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +第1項目 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +第2項目 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +指定した番号で始める連番： +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +start=4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +この連番は4から始まります +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +箇条書きの余白 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かじょうがき＠箇条書き ! よはく＠余白 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ときには、箇条書きの項目間の垂直方向の余白を、調整したい場合があります。例えば、以下の例の既定の余白が、大きすぎると感じたとしましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +標準余白の +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +記号付き箇条書き +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上記箇条書きの最初の項目に、非必須引数を加えることで余白を詰めることができます。下記の例のように、箇条書きに追加される余白をなくすには、非必須引数にコマンド +\series bold +nolistsep +\series default +を加えます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +nolistsep +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +箇条書きに追加される +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +垂直余白をなくした +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +記号付き箇条書き +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +余白を広げるには、LaTeXパッケージの +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +で提供されている、いくつかのコマンドを使用することができます。詳しくは、取扱説明書 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + +をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +水平方向の余白や行頭下げを変更するためにも、多くのコマンドが使えます。下記の例は、行頭下げを、文書中の段落の行頭下げと同じにし、ラベル分離幅を2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cmにして、番号がページ余白に置かれるようにしたものです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent= +\backslash +parindent, labelsep=2cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +負の行頭下げを持つ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +連番箇条書き +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +さらなる調整 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かじょうがき＠箇条書き ! びちょうせい＠微調整 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +記述箇条書きのスタイルを変更することも可能です。コマンド +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font=definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +は、記述ラベルのフォントを変更し、コマンド +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +style=definition +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +は、箇条書きのスタイルを設定します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +下記は、コマンド +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +を使用した例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +電離放射線: +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font= +\backslash +itshape, style=nextline +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +電離放射線は、電子を原子や分子から分離させるに十分なエネルギーを持つ、素粒子や電磁波から成ります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +参照カウント: コンピュータ科学において、参照カウントは、オブジェクト・メモリブロック・ディスク容量・その他のリソースへの、参照やポインタやハンドルの数を保管し +ておくための技術です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeXパッケージの +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +で提供されるコマンドや機能は、他にもたくさんあります。詳細は、取扱説明書 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + +をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +書簡 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +訳注: ここでは英文書簡の書き方について説明しています。日本語の書簡の場合とは違いますが、英文で書簡を書く必要がある場合には便利です。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょかん@書簡 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +住所と右寄せ住所： 概観 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXには書簡向け文書クラスもありますが、それとは別に私たちは、 +\family sans +住所 +\family default +と +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +という2つの段落環境も追加することにしました。LaTeXでletterクラスを使う場合には、決まった順序で決まった段落環境を使う必要がありました。これを間違える +とLaTeXは文章を無茶苦茶にしてしまうのです。これに比べて +\family sans +住所 +\family default +と +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +環境は文章のどこにでも問題なく使うことができます。また他の環境の中に入れることもできるのです。ただし、他の環境を +\family sans +住所 +\family default +や +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +環境の中に入れることはできません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もちろん +\family sans +住所 +\family default +と +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +環境を書簡以外にも使えます。特に +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +環境はいくつかのヨーロッパの学術雑誌で使われる論文のタイトルを作るのに便利です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +使い方 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:住所の使い方" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +住所 +\family default +環境は、書簡の受取人の住所用に文章を整形します。この書式は、国によっては、（例えばDear Leslieのような）書簡の書き出しや差出人のサインのための名前を書 +くのに使われます。 +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +環境は、差出人の住所や国によっては今日の日付を書くために、文章を右に寄せて整形します。 +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +環境の例を見てみましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Address +右寄せ住所 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +自分の名前 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +自分の住所 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +日時 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上が +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +です。これを見ればわかるようにすべての行の左余白が揃っています。この左余白は、一番長い行が一行に収まるように、LyXが調整します。今度は +\family sans +住所 +\family default +環境の例を見てみましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +受取人の名前 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +住所 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +郵便番号と国名 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらの例からわかるように、 +\family sans +住所 +\family default +も +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +も次の段落との間に余白を追加します。これらの環境の中で +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押すと、LyXは入れ子の階層を戻して、環境も +\family sans +標準 +\family default +に戻します。 +\family sans +Return +\family default +とは +\family typewriter +break-paragraph +\family default +関数のことであって、一方で住所の各行は段落ではありませんから、これは自然な挙動です。したがって、もし +\family sans +住所 +\family default +や +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +環境で新行を開始するには、 +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default +関数（ +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +か +\family sans +挿入 +\family default +メニューから +\family sans +整形文字\SpecialChar \menuseparator +改行 +\family default +を選んで下さい）を使わなければなりません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +学術論文 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ほとんどの学術論文は、概要に始まり参考文献で終わります。LyXには、この2つのための段落環境もあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +概要 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +がいよう@概要 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +概要 +\family default +環境は、文字通り論文の概要を書くための環境です。この環境は文章のどこにでもおけるのですが、実際上はタイトルのすぐ後ろの本文の前におくべきです。 +\family sans +概要 +\family default +環境はarticleまたはreport文書クラスにのみ有効です。bookクラスでは +\family sans +概要 +\family default +は完全に無視されますし、letter文書クラスで概要を使うのも、まったく馬鹿げたことでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +概要 +\family default +環境がやってくれることを説明しましょう。第一に、「概要」というラベルを文章の上の中央につけてくれます。このラベルと要約との本文の間は広めのスペースによって分けら +れます。第二に、概要には小さなフォントが使われます。最後に、概要とそれに続く文章の間にスペースを入れてくれます。以上は、LyX画面上での見え方です。実際の出力は +、使っているのがarticleクラスであるかreportクラスであるかに依存します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押して新しい段落をはじめても環境は変わりません。新しい段落も +\family sans +概要 +\family default +環境の中です。だから概要を書き終った場合には、自分で段落環境を変える必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:概要環境内の段落" + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +概要 +\family default +環境内の段落 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここで +\family sans +概要 +\family default +環境の例を見せたいのですが、この取扱説明書が「book」クラスなのでできません。したがって第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:概要環境内の段落" + +\end_inset + +図として挿入しておきます。もし今まで概要を見たことも使ったことも無いのならこの環境を無視して大丈夫です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +参考文献 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さんこうぶんけん@参考文献 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:参考文献環境" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +参考文献 +\family default +環境は参考文献のリストを作るための環境です。この環境は文章のどこにでもおけるのですが、実際上は文章の終わりにおくべきです。 +\family sans +参考文献 +\family default +環境を他の環境の中に入れたり、他の環境を +\family sans +参考文献 +\family default +環境の中に入れたりすると、動きません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +初めて +\family sans +参考文献 +\family default +環境を開くと、LyXはその上の段落との間に大きなスペースを開けてBibliographyかReferencesという名前の見出しをボールド体の大きなフォントでつ +けます。見出しの名前がどちらになるかは、文書クラスによって決まっています。 +\family sans +参考文献 +\family default +環境の一つの段落は一つの文献に対応しています。したがって、 +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押しても段落環境は変わらずに +\family sans +参考文献 +\family default +環境のままです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXにおける参考文献の取扱いに詳細については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:書誌情報" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection + +\family sans +LyXコード +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だんらく@段落!Lyxこーど@LyXコード +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LyXコード" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +LyXコード +\family default +環境はLaTeXのLyXでの拡張です。これはテキストをtypewriterフォントでタイプセットします。またこの環境の中では、 +\family sans +スペース +\family default +は固定した長さを持つ空白として扱われます +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +正確にいうとLyXコード +\family default +環境の中では、 +\family sans +スペース +\family default +キーは単語の区切りではなくて +\family sans +Protected +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Blank +\family default +として扱われます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。この環境がLyXの中でいくつも空白を入れることのできる唯一の環境です。ただし空白行を入れたい場合には +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +（ +\family typewriter +break-line +\family default +関数）が必要です。 +\family sans +Return +\family default +では段落が終わってしまいます。けれども +\family sans +Return +\family default +で段落環境がリセットされるわけではありません。そのため +\family sans +LyXコード +\family default +環境を終わる場合には、自分で段落環境を変える必要があります。また +\family sans +LyXコード +\family default +環境を他の環境の中へ入れることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この環境には、少しわかりにくい、いくつかの癖があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +新しい段落の初めでは +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +を使えません。（つまり、 +\family sans +Return +\family default +のすぐ後に +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +を入れることができません。） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +のすぐ後に +\family sans +Space +\family default +を入れることができません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Return +\family default +を使って新しい段落を始めて、それから +\family sans +Space +\family default +を使って下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +または、 +\family sans +Space +\family default +の代わりに +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + +を使って下さい。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +何も入っていない段落や何も入っていない行を作ることはできません。空白にしたい行には、少なくとも一つの +\family sans +Space +\family default +を入れて下さい。さもないと LaTeXがエラーを起こします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\family default +を入力すると、 +\emph on +本当の +\emph default +引用符が入力されてしまうので、タイプライタの二重引用符は入力できません。タイプライタの二重引用符を入力したい場合には +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "self-insert \"" +\end_inset + +を使って下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +例を見て下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +#include +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +int main(void) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +{ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + printf("Hello World! +\backslash +n"); +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code + return 0; +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これは標準的な Hello world!のプログラムです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +LyXコード +\family default +の目的はただ一つ、プログラムソースやシェルスクリプト、rcファイルなどのコードを植字することです。この環境は、タイプライタを使ったような文字列を生成する必要があ +るような、非常に特別な場合にのみ使って下さい。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だんらくかんきょう@ +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +段落環境|) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +長いプログラムコードについては、取扱説明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』のプログラムコードリストの節に説明されているリスト差込枠を使用してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +環境を入れ子にする +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いれこ@入れ子!かんきょうの@環境の------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:入れ子" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +はじめに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、本文を特定の文脈と性質をもった統合されたかたまりとして取り扱います。これによって、あるかたまりが他のかたまりの性質の一部を引き継ぐようにすることができ +ます。たとえば、文書構造に3つの論点があるものとして、第2の論点には2つの小論点があるものとしてください。つまり、あるリストの中に別のリストが入っていて、内部リ +ストは第2項目に「組み込まれて」いるのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +論点1 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +論点2 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +小論点その1 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +小論点その2 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +論点3 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +一つのリストに他のリストを入れ子で入れれば、リストの中にリストを入れることができます。環境を入れ子にするのはたいへん簡単です。現在の段落の入れ子の階層を変えるに +は、 +\family sans +編集 +\family default +メニューから +\family sans +リストの階層を下げる +\family default +か +\family sans +リストの階層を上げる +\family default +を選びます（ステータスバーに入れ子の階層が表示されます）。メニューの代わりに、ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +ないし +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +や、キー割り当て +\family sans +Tab +\family default +・ないし +\family sans +Shift+Tab +\family default +、あるいは +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +ないし +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +を使用することができます。この変更は、事前に選択した部分があれば、その部分に対して作用し（これによって複数の段落の入れ子の階層を一度に変えることができます）、そ +うでなければ現在の段落に対して働きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、入れ子の階層を変えることが有効な場合にしか、変更を許さないことに注意してください。有効でない場合には、入れ子の階層を変えようとしても何も起こりません。 +また、ある段落の階層を変更すると、その段落に入れ子として入っているすべての段落の階層にも影響を与えます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +入れ子が可能なのは、リストに限られているわけではありません。LyXでは、これから見て行くようにほとんどの環境の中に、ほとんどの環境を入れることができます。これが +環境を入れ子にすることの本当の利点なのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +入れ子にできるものとできないもの +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落環境の一覧をお見せする前に、どのように入れ子が機能するか、もう少しお話しする必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落環境を入れ子にできるかどうかという質問は、単純にイエス・ノーで答えられるよりも、もう少し複雑なのです。段落環境には、3つの型があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +まったく入れ子にできないもの +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +完全に入れ子にできる、すなわち、自分の中へ他の環境を入れることも、他の環境の中に入ることも可能なもの +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +第3の型、すなわち、他の環境の中に入れることはできるが、自分の中に他の環境を入れることができないもの +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下は、入れ子の挙動の3つの型と、それぞれに属する段落環境の一覧です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +入れ子にできないもの 他の環境を入れることも、他の環境に入ることもできないもの。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +参考文献 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +概要 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +タイトル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +著者 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +日付 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +完全に入れ子にできるもの 他の環境を入れることも、他の環境に入ることもできるもの。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +詩句 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +引用(字下げなし) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +引用(字下げあり) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +リスト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +LyXコード +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Description +他の環境に入れるもの 他の環境には入れるが、他の環境を入れることができないもの。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +標準 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +部 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +ç«  +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +節 +\family default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +小節 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +小々節 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +段落 +\family default + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +小段落 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +部* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ç« * +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +節* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +小節* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +小々節* +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +住所 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\family sans +\series default +ç«  +\family default +や +\family sans +節 +\family default +などのように番号の振られた節見出しを箇条書きなどに入れ子にすることはできますが、それは行わないことを強く推奨します。通常の植字のガイドラインに従って、正しく構造 +化された文書を作成するのが目的ですから、節見出しを入れ子にすることはそれに反するのです。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +他のものを入れ子にする：表・数式・フロートなど +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いれこ@入れ子!ひょうなどの@表などの------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落環境ではないけれども、入れ子化によってなんらかの影響を受けるものがあります。それらは、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +数式 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +表 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +図 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +です（ +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +図や表を +\family sans +フロート +\family default +の中に入れる場合は影響を受けません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +フロート +\family default +に関する詳細は第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:フロート" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXはこれら3つのオブジェクトを、単語または段落として扱います。図表や数式を行中に入れた場合は、これらは属する段落が行くところに一緒についていきます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +けれども、図表や数式がそれ自身の「段落」を構成している場合には、「他の段落環境に入れる」段落環境として扱われます。つまり、他の段落環境に入れることはできますが、 +他の段落環境を中に入れることは当然ながらできません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表を例にとって見てみましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +項目1 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +これは(a)、入れ子になってます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +甲 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +乙 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +丙 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +丁 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +これは(b)。表は(a)の中に入れ子になってます。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +もとのレベルに戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もし表を(a)の中に入れ子にしなければ次のようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +項目1 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +これは(a)、入れ子になってます。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +甲 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +乙 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +丙 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +丁 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +これは(b)。表は(a)の中に入れ子になっていません。どの環境の中にも入っていないのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +もとのレベルに戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上の例では項目(b)は入れ子になっていません。新しいリストの一番初めの項目になってしまっているのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表を入れ子にしたが入れ子の深さが十分ではなかったというのもよくある失敗です。LyXは表の後ろのものをすべて新しい（サブ）リストにしてしまいます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +項目1 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +これは(a)。入れ子になってます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +甲 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +乙 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +丙 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +丁 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +これは(b)。表が、項目1には入れ子にはなっていますが、(a)の入れ子にはなっていません。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +もとのレベルに戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以上からわかるように、項目(b)は、 +\emph on +項目1の中の +\emph default +新しいリストの初めの項目になってしまいました。これと同じことは図でも数式でも起こります。したがって、図表や数式を入れ子にする場合は、正しい階層に設定するように気 +をつけてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +使い方と一般的な性質 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +入れ子の上限 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +階層に関しては、LyXは6段階の階層の入れ子まで扱うことができます。つまり、「第6階層」がもっとも内側の階層です。例で見てみましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +第1階層 − もっとも外側 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +第2階層 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +第3階層 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +第4階層 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +第5階層 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +第6階層 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +6段階という入れ子の上限には2つの例外があり、それはすでに上の例に示されています。完全に入れ子にできる他の環境と違って、 +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境と +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境では、4段階までしか入れ子にできません。例えば、上の例で項目Aの中に、さらに +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境を入れようとするとエラーになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +いくつかの例 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いれこ@入れ子!のれい@------の例 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +入れ子で何ができるのかを説明するには、例をお見せするのが一番でしょう。以下にいくつかの入れ子の例を挙げます。これらでは、真似をしやすいように、私たちがどうやって +これらの例を作ったかが説明してあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +例1： 6段階の入れ子と異なった環境の入れ子 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#1-a ここはもっとも外側の階層で、 +\family sans +箇条書き（一覧） +\family default +環境になっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#2-a ここは第2階層です。 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +を押してそれから +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +を使って作りました。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#3-a ここは第3階層です。今度は +\family sans +Return +\family default +だけを押してから +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + +\family default +を2回続けて押しました。前の階層で行ったように、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +を押してから +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +を使っても作ることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +ここは「#3-a」の中に入れ子になっている +\family sans +標準 +\family default +環境です。つまり第4階層になります。私たちはこれを作るのに、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +を押してから +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +を押し、それから段落環境を +\family sans +標準 +\family default +にしました。1段落を超えるリスト項目を作りたいときは、このようにしてください。この方法は、 +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +・ +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +・ +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境でも使えます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここは同じく第4階層の +\family sans +標準 +\family default +環境です。 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +を押して作りました。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#4-a ここは第4階層です。 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +を押してから、段落環境を +\family sans +箇条書き（一覧） +\family default +に戻しました。前にも言ったように、 +\family sans +標準 +\family default +環境の中には他の環境を入れることはできません。そのため、ここではまだ第4階層に留まらざるを得ないのです。しかし以下のように、「#3-a」の中にさらに深い階層を作 +りつづけることは +\emph on +可能 +\emph default +です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#5-a ここは第5階層です\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{} +そして第6階層です。もうこの2つをどうやって作ったかは、想像できるでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#5-b 第5階層に戻りました。 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +を押した後に +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +を押します。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#4-b もう一度 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +を押した後に +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +を押して第4階層に戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#3-b. + 第3階層に戻りました。もうこれをどうやって作ったかは、明らかでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#2-b 第2階層に戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 +#1-b ついにもっとも外側の階層に帰って来ました。この文章の後に +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押して、段落環境を +\family sans +標準 +\family default +に戻すとリストが終了します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +箇条書き（一覧） +\family default +環境の代わりに、 +\family sans +箇条書き（記述） +\family default +・ +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +・ +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +あるいは +\family sans +詩句 +\family default +環境を使っても、まったく同じようにできます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +例2：継承 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout LyX-Code +ここはLyXコード環境で、第1階層すなわちもっとも外側の階層です。これから私たちは +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押した後に +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +を +\family default +押して、それから +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境に変更します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +ここは +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境で第2階層です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +内側に入れ子にした +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +が、親環境（ +\family sans +LyXコード +\family default +）から余白を継承しただけでなく、フォントや行間も継承したことに留意してください！ +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +最後に +\family sans +Return +\family default +を押して上の例を終わりました。その後、段落環境を +\family sans +標準 +\family default +にリセットして +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +を一回押して入れ子の階層をリセットする必要がありました。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +例3：ラベルと階層、および箇条書き（連番）と箇条書き（記号）環境 +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +例3：ラベルと階層および他のリスト環境 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +ここは +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +段落環境の第1階層です。ここへ箇条書きを入れ子にしていきます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +ここは第2階層です。 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +の後に +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +を押して作りました。この中に +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境を入れるとどうなるでしょうか。第3階層になるはずですが、ラベルはどうなるでしょうか。星印でしょうか。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +いいえ！黒丸です。第3階層でも +\emph on +初めて +\emph default +の +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境なので、ラベルが黒丸になるのです（ここに来るには、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +の後に +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +を押した後、環境を +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +に変えました）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Itemize +ここは第4階層です。 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +の後に +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +を押しました。また同じことをして… +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +…第5階層に来ます。しかし今度は段落環境を +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +に戻しました。この項目の連番が +\emph on +小文字のローマ数字 +\emph default +になっていることに留意してください。3重めの +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境だからです（つまり +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +の中の +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +の中の +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +だからです）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate + +\emph on +段落環境を変えずに +\emph default +入れ子の階層を減らしていくと、どうなるでしょうか。どの型の連番をLyXは使うでしょうか。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +おっと、その前に +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +だけを押して現在の環境と階層を維持しながら新しい項目を作ってみましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +次に +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +と押してから +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +で階層を下げてみましょう。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +ここは第4階層です。どの型のラベルをLyXが使っているか見てください！ +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +ここは第3階層です。階層を変更したのに、LyXはまだ小文字のローマ数字をラベルとして使用しています。なぜでしょうか。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +それは入れ子の階層が変わっても、この段落は +\emph on +まだ +\family sans +\emph default +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境の3重めだからです。ただし、LyXは連番のカウンタを +\emph on +リセットした +\emph default +ことに注意してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +もう一度 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +と +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +を使って第2階層に戻りました。今度は入れ子の階層を変更しただけでなく、2重めの +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境に戻りました。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +もう一度 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +と +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +を押してもっとも外側の第1階層に戻ると、同じことが起こります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +最後に、環境を +\family sans +標準 +\family default +にリセットしました。この例でわかるように、階層番号は、LyXが +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +と +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境でどの型のラベルを使うかには対応していません。 +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境の場合は、他の +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +環境が外側にいくつあるかに依存してラベルが選ばれます。このルールは +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +環境にも当てはまります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +例4： 極端な例 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +ここではおたくと化してみましょう。他の例のように何段階にも入れ子にはしませんし、詳細に作り方の説明はしません（第1階層： +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +） +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +（ +\family sans +Return +\family default +、 +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + +\family default +、 +\family sans +標準 +\family default +：第2階層）この例をどのように作ったかは、要約した説明を括弧の中に入れてどこかに置いておくことに留めることにします。例えば、この段落では2つのキー割り当ては、階 +層の変更のしかたを示し、環境名は、現在の環境の名前を示しています。その前か後に階層を示すことにします。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +（ +\family sans +Return, 箇条書き（連番） +\family default +：第1階層）ここはリスト中、第2の項目です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Verse +ここにわれらは詩句を入れん。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +詩作はますますひどくなるであらう。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +（ +\family sans +Return +\family default +、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +、 +\family sans +詩句 +\family default +：第2階層） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +ぎこぎこ　ぎぃ、　ぎこぎこ　ぐぅ。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +びびで　ばびで　ぶぅ！ +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +（ +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Verse +そして表を入れましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +魚が一匹 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +魚が二匹 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +赤魚 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +青魚 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Verse +（ +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +、 +\family sans +表 +\family default +、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +を3回、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + +、 +\family sans +詩句 +\family default +、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Enumerate +（ +\family sans +Return +\family default +、 +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +：第1階層）ここは第3の項目です。上では、 +\family sans +表 +\family default +を選んだときに入れ子の階層が第1階層にリセットされてしまうので、入れ子の階層を3段階下げて、表を +\family sans +詩句 +\family default +環境に入れたことに注意して下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +ここで +\family sans +箇条書き（連番） +\family default +を終了して +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +へ変更しました。まだ第1階層のままです。これから、環境を複合的に使うことでできることをいくつかお見せしたいと思います。以下の各段落は「引用書簡」です。この段落の +中に、 +\family sans +住所 +\family default +と +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +を両方入れ子にして、書簡の本体には、入れ子にした別の +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +環境を使います。階層を保持するためには +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "break-paragraph inverse" +\end_inset + +を使うことにします。 +\family sans +住所 +\family default +と +\family sans +右寄せ住所 +\family default +環境の中に複数の行を入れるには、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +を使う必要があることを忘れないで下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Right Address +1234 Nowhere Rd. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Moosegroin, MT 00100 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +9-6-96 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +フィツルヴィッツ様 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +不慮の事故のために、ご注文頂いた圧縮メタンガス50リットルを期日中にお届けできないことをお許し下さい。不幸にして、我が社の牛が数匹、まったく不可思議なことに爆発 +してしまったため、メタンの注文処理に時間を要しております。お名前を出荷待ちリストに登録しておりますので、できるかぎり早くお届け致したく思っております。ご迷惑をお +掛けしてたいへん申し訳ありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +お詫びに、今回特別に牛肉を特別価格で販売致しております。お入り用の際は、同封の注文用紙に御記入の上、小切手とともにお送りください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation +最後に、ご迷惑をお掛けしておりますことを深くお詫びいたします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Address +敬具 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +ビル・ヘック +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Quotation +これで例を終わります！ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以上から、LyXで環境の入れ子を使えば、たった数キーで、さまざまなことができるのがおわかりいただけると思います。 +\family sans +引用（字下げあり） +\family default +や +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +環境の中に +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +をいれたり、 +\family sans +箇条書き（記号） +\family default +の中に +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +を入れることも簡単にできます。膨大な選択肢を自由にお使いいただけるのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +余白取りとページ付けおよび改行 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +よはくどり@余白取り +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +空白とは何でしょうか。通常のワードプロセッサでは、二つの単語を分離したいと思ったときには、いつでもスペースキーを押すことに慣れてしまったかもしれませんが、LyX +はもっと多様な空白を提供します。すなわち、さまざまな幅の空白と、行末で分割可能な空白および分割不可能な空白です。以下の各節では、これらの空白が有用な例をお見せし +ましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +保護された空白 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:保護された空白" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くうはく@空白!ほごされた@保護された------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +保護された空白とは。LyX（およびLaTeX）に、行をこの場所で分割しないように指示するために用いられます。これは、次のような「ツイていない」改行を避けるのに必 +要になることがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +詳細な説明は、英文文書の +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +Section +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:書誌情報" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +明らかに、「Section」と「 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:書誌情報" + +\end_inset + +」のあいだに保護された空白を挿入した方がよいでしょう。保護された空白は、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +保護された空白 +\family default +（短絡キーは +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + + +\family default +）で挿入することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +水平方向の空白 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:水平方向の空白" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くうはく@空白!すいへいほうこうの@水平方向の------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +水平方向の空白は、すべて +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +水平方向の空白 +\family default +メニューで挿入することができます。長さの単位の一覧が、付録 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" + +\end_inset + +にあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +単語間の空白 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:単語間の空白" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くうはく@空白!たんごかんの@単語間の------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +言語によっては（例えば英語）、文末の句読点の後に、少し広い空白を入れる印刷上の慣習があり、LyXはこのような慣習を遵守します（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:略語" + +\end_inset + +節を参照）。しかしながら、ときによっては、このような場合にも通常の空白がほしい場合があるでしょう。その場合には、単語間の空白を挿入してください（短絡キーは +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "space-insert normal" +\end_inset + + +\family default +）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +小空白 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:小空白" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くうはく@空白!しょう@小------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +「小空白（thin space）」は、通常の空白の半分の大きさを持つ空白です（そして同時に「保護されて」います）。多くの言語において、例えば略語内部でのように、 +通常の空白では広すぎる場合に小空白を用いることが、印刷上の慣習として推奨されています。例えば、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +D. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +E. + Knuthは、我々の愛する組版プログラムを開発しました。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +のような場合や、数値と単位の間の空白などです。次の例を比較してください。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +10 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +kg（小空白） +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +10 kg（通常の空白） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +小空白は、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +小空白 +\family default +メニュー（短絡キーは +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "space-insert thin" +\end_inset + +）で挿入できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +その他の空白 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +さらに、以下のような型の空白が使用できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +負の小空白 この行は、矢印の間に負の小空白 +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \negthinspace{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + +を含んでいます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +8分の1空白（enspace; +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em） この行は、矢印の間に8分の1空白（0.5em） +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \enskip{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + +を含んでいます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +4分の1空白（quad; +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em） この行は、矢印の間に4分の1空白（1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em） +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \quad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + +を含んでいます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +2分の1空白（qquad; +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em） この行は、矢印の間に2分の1空白（2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em） +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \qquad{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + +を含んでいます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ユーザ設定の空白 この行は、矢印の間に2センチの空白 +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hspace{} +\length 2cm +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + +を含んでいます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:空白の幅" + +\end_inset + +に各空白の大きさを整理しておきます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:空白の幅" + +\end_inset + +水平方向の各空白の幅 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +空白の種類 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +幅 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +通常 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +保護された空白 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/3 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +小空白 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +負の小空白 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +-1/6 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +8分の1空白（0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +0.5 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +4分の1空白（1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2分の1空白（2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +水平フィル +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くうはく@空白!ふぃる@フィル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +水平フィル（HFill）は、統一された方法で空白を追加する特別な機能です。水平フィルは、左余白と右余白の間に残されている空白部分とつねに等しい長さの、可変式の空 +白を生成します。もし2つ以上の水平フィルを同一行に入れると、残されている余白を各水平フィルで均等に分割します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +水平フィルでできる例をいくつか示しましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +ここは左側にあります +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +ここは右側にあります +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +å·¦ +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +中央 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +右 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quote +\noindent +å·¦ +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +左から3分の1 +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +右 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以上は、 +\family sans +引用（字下げなし） +\family default +環境での例でした。これ +\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\leftarrow$ +\end_inset + +は、標準段落の中での例です。印刷した取扱説明書でははっきりと分からないかもしれませんが、2つの矢印の +\emph on +間に +\emph default +水平フィルが挿入されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +空白ダイアログでフィルパターンを選ぶと、水平フィルを見えるようにすることができます。使用できるパターンは以下のとおりです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +点線： +\begin_inset space \dotfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +目盛： +\begin_inset space \hrulefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +左矢印： +\begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +右矢印： +\begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上括弧： +\begin_inset space \downbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +下括弧： +\begin_inset space \upbracefill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +備考：もし水平フィルが行頭にあり、しかも段落の1行目ではない場合、LyXはそれを無視します。これは、水平フィルが間違って新規行に折り返すことを防ぐためです。この +ような場合に、どうしても空白を入れたい場合には、空白ダイアログで +\family sans +保護 +\family default +オプションを選択してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +埋め草 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:埋め草" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くうはく@空白!うめくさ@埋め草 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ときには、あるフレーズと同じ長さの空白がほしい場合があるでしょう。例えば、次のような三択問題を作りたいと思うかもしれません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +正しい英語は次のどれですか? +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge would have been jumps the gun. +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mr. + Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +has to be jumped +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Mr. + Edge +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +jumps +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +すると、選択肢は「Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +」というフレーズの直後に表示されます。このようにするには、メニュー +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +埋め草 +\family default +で挿入される埋め草差込枠を使用します。この例では、最後の2行の最初に水平埋め草を挿入し、埋め草差込枠に「Mr. +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Edge +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +」と挿入します（「Edge」の後に空白があることに注意）。埋め草差込枠は、その内容と同じ空白のみを（場所取りとして）出力します。これが「埋め草」の名の由来です。 +通常の埋め草は、内容と同じ幅と高さの空白を出力し、水平埋め草や垂直埋め草は、その方向の空白のみを出力します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +垂直方向の空白 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:垂直方向の空白" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くうはく@空白!すいちょくほうこうの@垂直方向の------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落の前後に空白を追加するには、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +垂直方向の空白 +\family default +ダイアログを使って下さい。そこでは以下のような各寸法が利用可能です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +小スキップ +\family default +・ +\family sans +中スキップ +\family default +・ +\family sans +大スキップ +\family default +は、文書のフォント寸法に依存したLaTeX寸法です。 +\family sans +既定のスキップ +\family default +は、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログ +\family sans +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Text +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Layout +\family default +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@ +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +で段落の分離用に指定したスキップの大きさです。もし段落の区切りに字下げを使用していれば、 +\family sans +既定のスキップ +\family default +は +\family sans +中スキップ +\family default +と同じです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +垂直フィル +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +くうはく@空白!ふぃる@フィル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +は、1ページの中で空白が最大になるように設定される可変空白です。例えば、1ページ内に2つだけ短い段落があり、間に垂直フィルがあるとしましょう。すると、段落間の空 +白は最大化されるように調整されるので、第1段落はページの最上部に配置され、第2段落は最下部に配置されます。 +\family sans +垂直フィル +\family default +は、 +\family sans +水平フィル +\family default +と同様の動作をするのです +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +水平フィル +\family default +については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:水平方向の空白" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられています。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。1ページ内に残っている垂直方向の余白を空白で埋めるのです。複数の +\family sans +垂直フィル +\family default +が同一ページ内にある場合には、それらの垂直フィル間に余白が均等に配分されます。ですから +\family sans +垂直フィル +\family default +は、文章をページの中央に配置したり、あるいはページの上から2/3の所に配置したりするのに用いることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +ユーザ設定 +\family default +は、付録 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" + +\end_inset + +にある単位で指定された任意の長さの空白です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +備考：もし水平フィルが、出力されたページの先頭や最後にきてしまう場合、 +\family sans +保護 +\family default +オプションが選択されているときのみ、空白が出力されます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +段落の配置 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落の配置は、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +段落設定 +\family default +ダイアログで変更することができます。選択肢は5つあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +両端揃え +\family default +（短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align block" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +左揃え +\family default +（短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align left" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +右揃え +\family default +（短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align right" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +中央揃え +\family default +（短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align center" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +既定値 +\family default +（短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "paragraph-params \\align default" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ほとんどの場合、既定値は +\family sans +両端揃え +\family default +です。この場合、単語間の空白の長さは、段落の各行がちょうど左余白から右余白までの領域を埋めるように自動調整されます。他の3つの配置は、ほぼ自明ですが以下のように +なります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align right +この段落は右揃えで、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +この段落は中央揃え、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align left +この段落は左揃えです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +強制改頁 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +かいぺーじ@ +\family default +\series default +\shape default +\size default +\emph default +\bar default +\noun default +\color inherit +改頁!きょうせい@強制------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:強制改頁" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もしLaTeXが決定する改頁の位置が気に入らなければ、希望の箇所で強制的に改頁することができます。たいていLaTeXの改頁は適切なので、これが必要になることは通 +常はありません。ただし、 +\family sans +フロート +\family default +を多用しすぎた場合に限っては、LaTeXの改頁アルゴリズムがうまく行かないことがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +強制改頁は、文章を書き終わって、プレビューで +\emph on +ほんとうに +\emph default +改頁を変更する必要があることを確認するまでは、行なわないことをお勧めします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +改頁には2つの種類があります。一つは、特定の動作をすることなく頁を終えるものです。これは、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +新規頁 +\family default +メニューを使って、段落の前または後に挿入することができます。 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +改頁 +\family default +メニューを使って挿入することができる、もう一つ型は、ページの内容をページ全体を埋めるように引き延ばしてから頁を終えるものです。この型は、改頁によって最後の二三行 +だけが足らない頁ができてしまうときに巨大な空白ができるのを避けられるので、便利です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +図や表が、確実に頁の一番上にくるようにするために改頁を使おうと思うかもしれませんが、これは明らかに間違った方法です。LyXには、図表の前後に何が来ようとも、頁の +一番上（あるいは一番下や独立した頁）に、図表を確実に自動配置する方法があるのです。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:フロートと注釈" + +\end_inset + +章の +\family sans +フロート +\family default +に関する部分をご参照下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +改段改頁 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:改段改頁" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かいぺーじ@改頁!かいだん@改段 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +改頁をした後の内容が、次頁からすぐ始まる強制改頁のようでなく、改頁をすると同時に頁を改段することができます。改段するとはつまり、現在の段落を終了すると同時に、そ +の後にここまでの全てのフロートを、まだ処理されていないものを含めて、また必要ならば頁を追加して、すべて出力することをいいます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +改段改頁は、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +改段改頁 +\family default +メニューで挿入することができます。bookのような両面文書の場合に、改段改頁を挿入すると同時に、次の頁が右頁（奇数頁）から始まるように、必要に応じて頁を追加する +ようにするためには、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +改段改丁 +\family default +メニューを使うとよいでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +強制改行 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かいぎょう@改行 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:強制改行" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +改頁と同様に、改行にも2つの種類があります。一つは単純に行を代えるものです。 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形なし改行 +\family default +を選択するか、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +を押すと、段落内でこの改行を強制することができます。もう一つの種類は、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +両端揃え改行 +\family default +メニューから挿入できるもので、 +\lang english +or with +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert linebreak" +\end_inset + +改行すると同時に、その行を頁余白の間の空間をちょうど埋めるように伸長させます。これは、改行によって生み出されてしまう余白によって、両端揃えの段落に「へり」ができ +てしまうのを避けるために必要なのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXの改行はひじょうによくできているので、LaTeXの改行を正そうと強制改行を使うのは止めた方がよいでしょう。しかしながら、詩や住所などのように、改行を多 +用設定することが必要であるような状況は多く存在します（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:引用" + +\end_inset + +節・第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:詩句" + +\end_inset + +節・第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:住所の使い方" + +\end_inset + +節をご参照ください）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +水平線 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:水平線" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すいへいせん@水平線 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +水平線 +\family default +のダイアログで水平線を挿入することができます。オフセットは、線と現在の本文行あるいは段落のベースラインとの間の垂直距離です。水平線の設定は、線上で左クリックをす +れば変更することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent +\begin_inset CommandInset line +LatexCommand rule +offset "0.5ex" +width "100line%" +height "1pt" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +文字と記号 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +お使いのキーボードから入力することのできる全ての文字は、直接入力することができます。また、例えばフランス語に必要な文字を英語キーボードで入力することができるよう +に、特別なキーボード配置表を使用することもできます。これを実現するための情報は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:キーボード配置表" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +お使いのキーボードにない文字が必要な場合には、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +特殊文字\SpecialChar \menuseparator +記号 +\family default +メニューから +\family sans +記号 +\family default +ダイアログを使用してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +LyX設定で特定の画面フォントを使用している場合、記号ダイアログで挿入した文字がうまく表示できないことがあります。しかし出力においては、どんな場合も、挿入した記 +号は正しく表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +フォントと文字形式 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:フォントと文字形式" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +フォントの種類 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぉんと@フォント ! のしゅるい@------ の種類 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フォントには二つの種類があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ベクターフォント +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぉんと@フォント ! べくたー@ベクター ------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + は、フォント内の単一グリフ（すなわち文字）の輪郭（アウトライン）から生成されたフォントです。各グリフは、要求のあったどんなフォント寸法にもうまく伸縮することが +できるような、数学的に定義された曲線で定義されています。この数学による定義は、フォント解析器によって解釈され、寸法やグリフに応じて曲線部分がピクセルで埋め尽くさ +れます。これによって、輪郭フォントは、全ての寸法においてたいへん美しい出力を得ることができます。ひじょうに小さい寸法においては、よいイメージを得るためには各ピク +セルがたいへん注意深く計算されなくてはならないので、そのようなひじょうに小さい寸法においてだけは、よいレンダリング（解析結果）を得ることは難しいかもしれません。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +すると、一つのフォント寸法のみを定義して、それを伸縮するだけでいいと思われるかもしれませんが、よい品質を得るために、多くのフォントはいくつかのフォント寸法を定義 +しています。大きいフォントにおいては、小さいフォントよりも細部の情報を必要とするので、これによって出力を改善することができます。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +TrueType +\family default +・ +\family typewriter +OpenType +\family default +・ +\family typewriter +Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1 +\family default +といった種類のフォントが、ベクターフォントになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ビットマップフォント +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぉんと@フォント ! びっとまっぷ@ビットマップ ------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + は、反対に最初からビットマップ画像として定義されているので、定義されている寸法に対しては、すべてよい出力を得ることができます。しかしながら、グリフを伸長しよう +と思うと、一ピクセルが数ピクセル分に拡大されてしまうので、ビットマップフォントは伸長に対しては強くありません。これは、画像編集プログラムで、画像を拡大しようとし +たときに起こるのと同じ現象です。この現象を軽減するために、ビットマップフォントは通常、8ピクセルあたりから34ピクセル程度まで段階的に、必要に応じていくつかの固 +定寸法で提供されています。ビットマップフォントの利点は、各グリフを表示するのに複雑な計算を必要としないので、伸縮可能フォントよりも表示速度が速い点です。欠点は、 +フォントに固定寸法がない大きさでは、ピクセルを等倍して拡大表示しなくてはならないので、表示が汚くなる点です。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +ビットマップフォントは、PostScript文書やPDF文書では、 +\family typewriter +Type +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +3 +\family default +という名前がついています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらのことから、指定した大きさがフォント寸法として用意されている場合にはビットマップフォントが最適ですが、ほとんどすべての大きさに対して良好な結果をもたらすの +は、伸縮可能フォントであることが分かります。伸縮可能フォントでは、少数のフォント寸法に対して定義が必要となるだけです。ほとんどすべてのテキスト表示プログラム・組 +版プログラムが、伸縮可能フォントを用いているのはそのためです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF文書でどのフォントが用いられているかを確かめるためには、文書特性を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +最近の組版言語やマークアップ言語の多くでは、特定のフォントを指定するよりも文字形式を指定するようになってきています。例えば文章を強調するのに、現在のフォントのイ +タリック体版に変更する代わりに、「強調形式」を用います。この考え方は、LyXに完璧に適合しています。なぜなら、LyXでは組版の微細な点に焦点を合わせるのではなく +、文脈に基づいて操作を行うからです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaTeXフォントサポート +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +伝統的に、LaTeXは固有のフォントを使用します。つまり、お使いの基本ソフトウェアに導入されているフォントに直接アクセスすることはできず、LaTeX頒布版が提供 +する特定のフォントを使用する必要があります。これは、LaTeXではフォントに関する追加的な情報が必要とされるため、これらを追加的なファイルやパッケージとして提供 +する必要があるためです。この方法の欠点は、通常のワードプロセッサに較べて、フォントの選択肢がある程度制限されてしまうことです。その一方で、提供されているフォント +は一般的に非常に高品質であり、システムが異なってもLaTeXファイルを容易に移転できるという利点が付いてきます。また一方で、伝統的なLaTeXでサポートされてい +るフォントの範囲は大幅に増加し、多くの有償無償のフォントを扱うパッケージが存在します。LyXのユーザーインタフェースからは、これらの一部しか直接選択することがで +きません（詳細は第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文書フォント" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください）。しかしながら、他のフォントも文書プリアンブルにLaTeXコードを入力すれば、すべて使用することができます（使用したいフォントの取扱説明書を参 +照してください）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +さらに最近の発展により、お使いの基本ソフトウェア（OS）に導入されているフォントに直接アクセスすることのできる、XeTeXやLuaTeXのような新しいLaTeX +エンジンももたらされています。これらのエンジンも、LyXは現在サポートしています。これらを使えば、理論的には、システムに導入されているすべてのOpenType・ +TrueTypeフォントを使用することができます。次節で、これらのOSフォントの使用法を説明します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +実際には、粗悪なメトリックや、フォントが持つ他の欠損によって使えないフォントもあります。したがって、まずは試験してみる必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +XeTeXと特にLuaTeXは、比較的新しいので、伝統的なLaTeXやPDFLaTeXほどは成熟していません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文書フォントとフォント寸法 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:文書フォント" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぉんと@フォント ! すんぽう@------ 寸法 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書フォントは、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ダイアログで設定することができます。ダイアログの +\family sans +フォント +\family default +セクションでは、3つのフォント族 — ローマン（セリフ）体・ +\family sans +サンセリフ +\family default +体・ +\family typewriter +タイプライタ +\family default +（等幅）体 — に使用するフォントを指定することができ、サンセリフ体・タイプライタ体フォントをローマン体フォントと合わせる必要があるときのための縮尺因子と、ベー +スフォント寸法を指定することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +非T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eXフォントを使用 +\family default +を有効にすると、ご使用の基本ソフトウェアに導入されているフォントにアクセスすることができるようになります。このためには、出力書式として、 +\family sans +PDF (XeT +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eX) +\family default +か +\family sans +PDF (LuaT +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eX) +\family default +、 +\family sans +DVI (LuaT +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eX) +\family default +を使用する必要があるため、XeTeXかLuaTeXが導入済でなくてはなりません（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" + +\end_inset + +節参照）。この際、TeX自身のフォント（後述）にはアクセスできなくなります。LyXはフォント族を同定することができないので、利用可能なフォントすべてが、ローマン +体・セリフ体・タイプライタ体の3つのリストすべてに列挙されてしまっていることに注意してください。また、リスト中のフォントの一部には、フォントのエンコーディングや +フォントの瑕疵のせいで、出力を失敗させてしまうものがあるかもしれません。これも、LyXは事前に同定することができないので、ユーザーが試験してみる必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フォントの選択肢としては、 +\family sans +既定値 +\family default +とお使いのシステムで利用可能なフォントの一覧が表示されます。 +\family sans +既定値 +\family default +は、「 +\family typewriter +Computer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +」（ +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +）または「 +\family typewriter +European Computer Modern +\family default +」（ +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +）と呼ばれる TeXの標準フォントを使います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +や +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +はビットマップフォントですので、PDF出力では、とりわけ拡大して読むときに、出力のぎざぎざがめだつことがよくあります +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family typewriter +Adobe +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Reader +\family default +第6版以降でPDFを読むようにすれば、特別なビットマップフォントレンダラーを備えているので、この問題は発生しません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。ぎざぎざフォントをなくすには、ベクターフォントを用いなくてはなりません。以下の3つの方法がありますので、いずれかを選択してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +フォントを使用する方法。これは、 +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +や +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +の外見を維持したい場合に推奨される方法です。 +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +フォントは、LaTeXコミュニティにおいて、 +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +に代わる既定フォントとするべく開発されたものです。これは、非常に広い範囲のグリフと複数のフォント形を含んでおり、外観の改善された若干の細部を除き、 +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +は、ほとんどの場合 +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +と同一の外観を持ちます。 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +One difference is improved kerning。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +AE +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(Almost +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +European) +\family default +を使用する方法。これは、 +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +フォントが使用できないか、うまく動作しない（稀な）ケースにおいて、 +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +や +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +の外見をエミュレートしたいときに選択してください。 +\family typewriter +AE +\family default +は仮想フォントです。仮想というのは、これが他のフォントから +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +輪郭グリフを「拝借」してくるからです。これには、フランス語のギュメ（「«」や「»」）をはじめとするいくつかの文字が欠落していること +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeXパッケージの +\series bold +aeguill +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! aeguill +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +をプリアンブル行で +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\backslash +usepackage[ec]{aeguill} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +として読み込むと、ギュメの問題は解消されます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +や、アクセント付き文字が +\emph on +一つの +\emph default +グリフではなく、アクセントと文字との +\emph on +二 +\emph default +文字から構築されるという欠点があります。したがって、 +\family typewriter +AE +\family default +フォントを用いた文書では、アクセント付き文字を含む単語を検索することはできません。例えば、仮にPDFで「brève」という仏単語を検索したとしても、PDFビュー +アは「è」というグリフを検索するのであって、「 e + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +` 」というグリフを検索するわけではないので、検索結果としては何も得られないでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family typewriter +cm +\family default +や +\family typewriter +ec +\family default +の外見を好まない場合には、 +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default +や +\family sans +Palatino +\family default +のような、提供されている他のベクターフォントを選択することももちろんできます。ほとんどのローマン体ベクターフォントは、対応するサンセリフ体やタイプライタ体フォン +トを自動的に選択しますが +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、ときに単に他のフォントを対応させることもあれば（ +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default +は、 +\family sans +Helvetica +\family default +をサンセリフ体の文章に使用します）、 +\family sans +Latin +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +や +\family sans +Computer +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Modern +\family default +のように、同じフォントの他の形、すなわち真のフォント +\emph on +族 +\emph default +を対応させることもあります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +、自分自身で指定することもできます。ローマン体・ +\family sans +サンセリフ +\family default +体・ +\family sans +タイプライタ +\family default +体の違いは、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文字微調整" + +\end_inset + +節で述べられています。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default +フォントは、元々新聞用にデザインされたものです。したがって、狭い新聞の列幅に納まるように、そのグリフは他のフォントのグリフよりも小さくなっています。そのため、 +\family sans +Times +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Roman +\family default +は書籍のような大規模な文書には適していません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フォント寸法としては、一般的に +\family sans +既定値 +\family default +・ +\family sans +10 +\family default +・ +\family sans +11 +\family default +・ +\family sans +12 +\family default +の4つの値が使用可能です。クラスによっては、他の寸法を提供しているものもあります。 +\family sans +既定値 +\family default +の寸法は使用するクラスに依存します。標準的なクラスでは、これはフォント寸法10になっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このフォント寸法は、 +\emph on +基本寸法 +\emph default +を指しています。LyXは、この寸法を基準に、（脚注や上付き・下付き文字などの）他のすべてのフォント寸法を決めます。必要ならば、文章部分のフォント寸法は、 +\family sans +文字形式 +\family default +ダイアログで微調整することができます。文章部分で使うことができるフォント寸法は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文字微調整" + +\end_inset + +節に述べてあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +既定のフォント族 +\family default +では、文書の基本フォントをローマン体にするのか、サンセリフ体にするのか、あるいはタイプライタ体にするのかを指定することができます。これを +\family sans +既定値 +\family default +にすると、クラスの事前設定値を使用し、他のものを選択するとこれを上書きします。ほとんどの場合、 +\family sans +既定値 +\family default +は +\family sans +ローマン体 +\family default +ですが、（プレゼンテーションクラスなどの）クラスのうちには他の既定値を使用するものもあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eXフォントエンコーディング +\family default +は、熟練者用の設定項目であり、これによってLaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +fontenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! fontenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +に渡す値を変更することができます(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-設定" + +\end_inset + +節も参照のこと)。通常、これを変更する必要は（理解する必要も）ありません。特別な理由がない限り、 +\family sans +既定値 +\family default +を使用してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フォントによっては、 +\family sans +旧様式数字を使う +\family default +と +\family sans +真性スモールキャップ体を使う +\family default +のチェックボックスが有効になっていることがあります。これは、一部のフォントが提供する追加機能です。もし +\family sans +旧様式数字を使う +\family default +にチェックを付けると、フォントは旧様式数字(中世数字やテキスト数字とも呼ばれます)、すなわち小文字とうまくマッチするような、多様な高さを持つ数字を使用します。 +\family sans +真性スモールキャップ体を使う +\family default +を指定すると、大文字を縮小した疑似スモールキャップ体ではなく、真のスモールキャップ体を使用します。真のスモールキャップ体は、熟練者用フォントセットにはよく含まれ +ています。これらは、疑似スモールキャップ体よりも見栄えがよいですが、一方お金を払って購入しなくてはなりません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +CJK +\family default +フィールドでは、日中韓言語ユーザーが文字を表示するのに使用するフォントを指定することができます。 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +このフォントは、 +\series bold +CJK +\series default + LaTeXパッケージのコマンドに対する引数になります。したがって、 +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を使用しない +\family sans +日本語 +\family default +文書言語に対しては、影響をもちません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +備考：新しくフォントやフォント寸法を選んでも、LyXの画面上のフォントは変化 +\emph on +しません +\emph default +。印字出力をして初めて、変化がわかるようになっています。これはWYSIWYMの考え方の一部なのです。LyXの画面フォントは、 +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログで調整することができます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:画面フォント" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +異なる文字形式を使う +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +もじけいしき@文字形式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +もじけいしき@文字形式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +すでに見たように、LyXは、ある特定の段落環境では自動的に文字形式を変更します。LyXは、 +\family sans +強調 +\family default +と +\family sans +名詞 +\family default +の2つの文字形式をサポートしています。これらは、キー割り当て・メニュー・ツールバーのいずれかを使って有効にすることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +名詞 +\family default +形式を有効にするには、以下のいずれかを行ってください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + +をクリックする +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + +を使う +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらのコマンドは、すべて入切切り替えになっています。つまり、 +\family sans +名詞 +\family default +形式がすでに有効になっている場合に、これらのコマンドを使うと、 +\family sans +名詞 +\family default +形式は無効になります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +一般に +\family sans +名詞 +\family default +形式は、固有の人名を表記するのに使われます。例えば、 +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + + +\noun on +Matthias Ettrich +\noun default + is the original author of LyX. +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +のように用います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これよりもよく使われる文字形式は、 +\family sans +強調 +\family default +形式です。 +\family sans +強調 +\family default +形式を有効にする（または無効にする - これも入切切り替えです）には、以下のようにしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + +をクリックする +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + +を使う +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +通常、 +\family sans +強調 +\family default +形式は、イタリック体（日本語ではゴシック体）と同じですが、文書クラスやLaTeXパッケージによっては、別のフォントが用いられることもあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この文書のいたるところで、すでに +\family sans +強調 +\family default +形式を使ってきましたが、もう一つ例を挙げておきます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation + +\emph on +Don't overuse character styles! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Quotation + +\emph on +文字形式を濫用してはいけません! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これは例であると同時に、文字通りの警告でもあります。文章は日常会話と同じように考えられなくてはなりません。お互いにつねに叫びあって話をしないように、文字形式をつ +ねに濫用するような傾向は避けなくてはなりません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +既定フォントに戻すには、キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-default" +\end_inset + +を用いるか、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文字形式\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\family default +\lang japanese + ( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +)ダイアログを使えば、いつでも戻せます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文字形式ダイアログを使った微調整 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:文字微調整" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +もじけいしき@文字形式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +なにか微調整を行わなくてはならない状況はつねに起こり得ますので、LyXは特製文字形式を作る方法を備えています。例えば、学術雑誌や企業によっては、特定の状況ではサ +ンセリフフォントを使うように要求する書式を指定しているかもしれませんし、ある作家は、登場人物の心の声を通常の会話と区別するために、別のフォントを用いるようにして +いるかもしれません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +特製文字形式について説明を残すにあたって、いま一度、注意を促しておきたいと思います------文字形式は濫用しないでください！ +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +様々なフォントやフォント寸法を多用した文書は、けっして読みやすくなく、誰かが大穴を打ち込んだかのように見えるものです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +特製文字形式を使用するには、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文字形式\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ユーザ設定 +\family default +ダイアログを開くかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +を押してください。このダイアログには、各フォント特性を選択できるようにいくつかのボックスがあります。これらの特性について選択肢を選ぶか、現在の特性を維持したい項 +目については +\family sans +変更なし +\family default +を選択してください。 +\family sans +リセット +\family default +を選ぶと、その特性を既定値に戻します。これは、複数の段落環境にわたる属性を一度にリセットするのにも使用することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フォント特性と、各フォント特性の( +\family sans +変更なし +\family default +と +\family sans +リセット +\family default +以外の）選択肢は以下の通りです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +フォント族 +\family default + フォントの「概観」です。選択肢は +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +ローマン体 +\family default + This is the Roman font family.　これがローマン・フォント族です。 通常はセリフフォントです。またこれが既定のフォント族になっていま +す。（キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-roman" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +サンセリフ体 +\family default + +\family sans +This is the Sans Serif font family. + +\family default + これがサンセリフ・フォント族です。（キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-sans" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +タイプライタ体 +\family default + +\family typewriter +This is the Typewriter font family. + +\family default + これがタイプライタ・フォント族です。（キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-typewriter" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +太さ +\family default + これは印字の太さに対応しています。選択肢は +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +ミディアム体 +\family default + This is the Medium font series. + これがミディアム体の太さです。これが既定の太さです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +ボールド体 +\family default + +\series bold +This is the Bold font series. + これがボールド体の太さです。（ +\series default +キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-bold" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +字形 +\family default + 名の示す通りです。選択肢は +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +アップライト体 +\family default + This is the Upright font shape. + これがアップライト体の字形です。またこれが既定の字形になっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +イタリック体 +\family default +\shape italic +This +\shape default + +\family sans +\shape italic +i +\family default +s the Italic font shape +\shape default +\emph on +. + これがイタリック体の字形です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +斜体 +\family default + +\shape slanted +This is the Slanted font shape. + +\shape default +（LyXの画面では 同じに見えるかもしれませんが、イタリック体ではありません。） +\shape slanted +これが斜体の字形です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +スモールキャップ体 +\family default + +\shape smallcaps +This is the Small caps font shape +\shape default +\noun on +.　これがスモールキャップ体の字形です。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +色 +\family default + このスイッチで文字色を調整することができます。ただし、すべてのDVIビューアがカラーを表示できるわけではないことに注意してください。 +\lang english +Besides +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +color +\family default +, which means that the document default color set in +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Color +\family default + for +\family sans +Main +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +text +\family default + is used, you can choose between +\family sans +Black +\family default +, +\family sans +White +\family default +, +\family sans +Red +\family default +, +\family sans +Green +\family default +, +\family sans +Blue +\family default +, +\family sans +Cyan +\family default +, +\family sans +Magenta +\family default + and +\family sans +Yellow +\family default + text +\lang japanese +。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +からー@カラー ! てきすと@テキスト +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +言語 +\family default + これは、選択範囲の文章が、文書の言語とは異なることを指定するのに使います。このようにして指定された部分には青い下線が（LyX上でのみ）引かれて、言語が変更され +ていることを表示します。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +例えば、文書中に長いドイツ語指定のテキストを入れると、LaTeXは自動的にドイツ語のハイフネーション規則を遵守します。スペルチェックを行うときには(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:スペルチェック" + +\end_inset + +節参照)、ドイツ語にマークされたテキストは、ドイツ語辞書を使用して検査されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +寸法 +\family default + これはフォントの大きさを変更します。ここでは数値を指定するのではなく、選択可能な選択肢は、すべて文書フォント寸法に対する相対的な大きさになっています。ここでも +LyXに詳細な指定をわたすようにはなっておらず、何をしたいか一般的な意図をLyXに示すだけです。選択肢は以下の通りです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +最小 +\family default + +\size tiny +これは「最小（Tiny）」フォント寸法です。 +\size default +（キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size tiny" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +極小 +\family default + +\size scriptsize +これは「極小（Smallest）」フォント寸法です。 +\size default +（キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size scriptsize" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +小 +\family default + +\size footnotesize +これは「小（Smaller）」フォント寸法です。 +\size default +（キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size footnotesize" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +やや小 +\family default + +\size small +これは「やや小（Small）」フォント寸法です。 +\size default +（キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size small" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +ふつう +\family default + これは「ふつう（Normal）」フォント寸法です。既定のフォント寸法です。（キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size normal" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +やや大 +\family default + +\size large +これは「やや大（Large）」フォント寸法です。（ +\size default +キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size large" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +大 +\family default + +\size larger +これは「大（Larger）」フォント寸法です。 +\size large +（ +\size default +キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size larger" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +極大 +\family default + +\size largest +これは「極大（Largest）」フォント寸法です。 +\size large +（ +\size default +キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size largest" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +極々大 +\family default + +\size huge +これは「極々大（Huge）」フォント寸法です。 +\size large +（ +\size default +キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size huge" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +最大 +\family default + +\size giant +これは「最大（Huger）フォント寸法です。 +\size large +（ +\size default +キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-size giant" +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard + +\emph on +繰り返し +\emph default +念を押しますが、この機能は使いすぎないでください。フォント寸法を変更する必要はほとんど生じないはずです。LyXが、段落環境ごとに自動的にフォント寸法を変更します +ので、それを使うようにしてください。この機能は、微調整のためだけにあるにすぎません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +その他 +\family default + これはその他、文字レベルで変更可能なものです。選択肢は以下の通りです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_deeper +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +強調 +\family default + +\emph on +This is text with emphasize on. + これは強調された文章です。 +\emph default +これは +\shape italic +イタリック体 +\shape default +と同じように思われるかもしれませんが、実は意味するところが多少異なります。強調は、 +\emph on +論理 +\emph default +属性なのです。ですから、強調された文章に用いるフォントは、文書クラスがそれぞれに指定することができます。多くの場合は、このフォントはイタリックに指定されています +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +下線 +\family default + +\bar under +This is text with Underbar on. + これは下線を引いた文章です。 +\bar default +（キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-underline" +\end_inset + +） +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +ただし可能な限り下線を引くことは避けてください。下線は、フォントを変更することができなかったタイプライタ時代の遺物です。いまの時代にあっては、文章を強調するのに +下線を引かなくてはならない理由はありません。これがLyXに備えられているのは、学術誌の投稿規程として必要とされることがある +\emph on +かも +\emph default +しれないからです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +二重下線 +\family default + +\uuline on +This is text with Double underbar on. + これは二重線を引いた文章です。 +\uuline default +(キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-underunderline" +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +下線の使用について警告したことから、二重下線についての考えもお分かりでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +波下線 +\family default + +\uwave on +This is text with Wavy underbar on. + これは波下線を引いた文章です。 +\uwave default + (キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-underwave" +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +学術誌が絶対にこれを使わないといけないと主張している場合以外は、使用しないでください。酔い止め薬が必要ですな。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +取消線 +\family default + +\strikeout on +This is text with Strikeout on. + これは取消線を引いた文章です。 +\strikeout default + (キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-strikeout" +\end_inset + +) +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +これは、変更した文章の元の文章を示すためによく用いられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +名詞体 +\family default + +\noun on +This is text with Noun on. + これは名詞体の文章です。 +\family sans +\noun default +強調 +\family default +と同様、これも論理属性です。多くの場合、これは +\family sans +スモールキャップ体 +\family default +に指定されています。 +\end_layout + +\end_deeper +\begin_layout Standard +このように、膨大な組合わせの中から選択をすることができます。いったん +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文字形式\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\family default +\lang japanese +( +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + +) +\family sans +ユーザ設定 +\family default +ダイアログで新しい文字形式を選択すると、その設定は保存されます。それを有効にするには、ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "textstyle-apply" +\end_inset + +を押してください。このボタンを使えば、作成した特製文字形式の有効化・無効化を、ダイアログが見えないときでも切り替えることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文字形式を完全に既定の状態に戻すには、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "font-default" +\end_inset + +を用いてください。もし、たったいま変更したフォント属性だけを切り替えたい場合（例えば、字形は「斜体」に、太さは「ボールド体」に設定したところだとします）には、 +\family sans +全て切換にする +\family default +スイッチを有効にしてから +\family sans +適用 +\family default +ボタンを押してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、 +\family sans +セリフ +\family default +・ +\family sans +サンセリフ +\family default +・ +\family sans +タイプライタ +\family default +の三大フォント型の違いについても多少知っておく必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +タイプライタ体 +\family default +はいわゆる「等間隔」フォントで、すべての文字が同じ幅、例えば「i」と「m」が同じ幅を持ちます。例： +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +no +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +typewriter text タイプライタ体の +\family default + +\begin_inset Phantom HPhantom +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +はない +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family typewriter +文章 +\family default + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +phantom（埋め草）について詳細は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:埋め草" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +no type writer text タイプライタ体ではない文章 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +セリフ体 +\family default +フォントは、セリフ付き文字を使用します。セリフとは、文字を形作る線のすべての端につける、小さな「付録」です。以下の例を見ると違いが分かるかと思います。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +text with serifs （セリフ付き文字） +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +text without serifs （セリフなし文字） +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +セリフがある方が、簡単に速く読む助けとなります。それゆえ、セリフ体が既定フォントとして用いられています（ +\family sans +ローマン体 +\family default +と呼称されます）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\family sans +サンセリフ体 +\family default +は、セリフのないフォントです。このフォント型は、それゆえ見出しや短い文によく用いられます。この文書では、サンセリフ体はメニュー名を強調するのに用いられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +「切換にする」とは、フォント特性を適用したり取り除いたりするようにすることを意味します。文字様式ダイアログで、ある特性を切換にマークした場合に、既にその特性を持 +つテキストに様式を適用すると、その特性が削除されることになります。例えば、現在B・C・F・Gのフォント特性を持つテキストに、A・B・Cの特性を持つ様式を適用する +ものとし、Bが切換で、Cが切換ではないものとすると、適用後の特性は、A・C・F・Gとなります。「常に非切換」と「常に切換」は、切換の挙動を制御しないことを意味し +ます。ダイアログ左側の特性(「フォント族」など)では、切換にするかどうかはあなた次第です。左側にある特性は、既定では切換ではありませんが、 +\family sans +全て切換にする +\family default +にチェックをつけると、その全てが切換になります。「リセット」は切換になることはありません。例えば、「太さ」を「リセット」にして +\family sans +全て切換にする +\family default +を選択してから、ボールド体の文章に様式を適用すると、何回様式を適用したとしても、文章は既定の太さ(「ミディアム体」)に戻ります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +最後にいま一度、同じ注意をして終わりたいと思います。フォントは多用しないでください。フォントを多用した文章は、よい文章になるどころか、不調和で粗悪な文章になるこ +との方がはるかに多いのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Description +訳注：和文の場合 +\series medium + +\series default +pLaTeX2eでは書体ファミリーとして明朝体とゴシック体の2種類しか標準では提供されていません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +印刷とプレビュー +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +概観 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXを使った文書作成の基本的な操作については、だいたい説明し終えたので、労作の印字出力のしかたについてお知りになりたいところでしょう。説明にあたって、まず舞台 +裏で何が行われているかを説明します。この件に関する詳しい情報は、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +』も参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、LaTeXというプログラムを裏方に使っています。LaTeXは、TeX組版システムのマクロパッケージにすぎないのですが、混乱を避けるために、まとめてLa +TeXと呼ぶことにします。LyXは、実際に書き物をするのに、あなたがお使いになるプログラムです。それを印刷可能な出力に変換する段になると、LyXはLaTeXを呼 +び出します。これには二段階を経る必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +まずLyXは、お使いの文書をLaTeX用のコマンド群に変換し、「 +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default +」という拡張子のついたファイルに保存します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +次に、LaTeXは +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default +ファイルにあるコマンドを読んで、印字可能な出力を作成します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +出力ファイル形式 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:出力ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +平文 (ASCII) +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Ascii@ASCII +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このファイル型の拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.txt +\family default +」です。この型は、お使いの文書を「アメリカ情報交換標準コード（ASCII）」の規則にそった平文として保存しています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +お使いの文書をASCIIに書き出すには、メニュー +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator +平文 +\family default +を用いるか。 +\lang english +However, this will not export any externally generated material such as + a BibTeX bibliography (section +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文献データベース" + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +). + If your document includes such material, use +\family sans +\lang japanese +ファイル +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し +\family sans +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +More +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formats +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +& +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Options +\family default + and then select +\lang japanese +平文 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii). +\lang english +This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating + thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to +\lang japanese +ASCII。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +LaTeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Latex@LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このファイル型の拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.tex +\family default +」で、LaTeXプログラムがお使いの文書を処理するのに必要なコマンドをすべて含んでいます。もしLaTeXをご存知であれば、このファイルをLaTeXエラーを見つけ +だすために用いることもできますし、コンソールからコマンドで手動で処理することもできます。LaTeXファイルは、使用中の文書をプレビューしたり書き出したりするとき +には、つねにLyXの作業ディレクトリ内に生成されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +お使いの文書をLaTeXファイルとして書き出すには、メニュー +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X +\family default +を使用します。その他の型のLaTeXへの書き出しは、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:書き出し" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +DVI +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Dvi@DVI +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このファイル型の拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.dvi +\family default +」です。このファイル型は「デバイス独立型」（DVI）と呼ばれ、ひじょうに高い可搬性を持っています。ひとつのコンピュータから他のコンピュータへ、何の変換も行うこと +なしに移動することができるのです。DVIは、プレビューや、PostScriptのような他の出力形式への中間形式として使用されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +DVIファイルは、画像を内部に保持してはおらず、画像にリンクを張るだけです。ですから、DVIと一緒に画像ファイルも持ち出すことを忘れないでください。DVIをスク +ロールする際には、DVIビューアは、画像を表示する前にバックグラウンドで変換しなくてはならないので、DVIを見る際にはコンピュータが遅くなるかもしれません。です +から、画像を多用したファイルの場合は、PDFを使用することをおすすめします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +お使いの文書をDVIファイルとして書き出すには、メニュー +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\family default +を使用するか +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default +を使用します。後者のオプションは、プログラム +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +を使用します。 +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +は、直接的なUnicodeサポートを提供し、直接フォントアクセスをサポートしたエンジンです（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" + +\end_inset + +節参照）。LuaTeXは、まだ進行中のプロジェクトですが、次世代標準TeXプロセッサに成長するやもしれません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PostScript +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Postscript@PostScript +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このファイル型の拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.ps +\family default +」です。PostScriptは、Adobe社によってプリンタ言語として開発されました。それゆえ、このファイル型には、プリンタがファイルを印刷するのに使うコマンド +が含まれています。PostScriptは「プログラミング言語」としても見ることができます。これを使って計算をすることもできますし、図表や画像を描くこともできます +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +この点について詳細をお知りになりたければ、LaTeXパッケージの +\series bold +pstricks +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! pstricks +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を見てみてください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。この能力ゆえ、PostScriptファイルはおうおうにしてPDFよりも大きくなります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PostScriptには、画像を「Encapsulated PostScript」（EPS、ファイル拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.eps +\family default +」）形式でのみ入れることができます。一方、LyXでは、既知の画像形式ならば何でも文書内に入れていいことになっていますので、LyXは、バックグラウンドで画像をEP +Sに変換してやらなくてはなりません。たとえば、文書中に50の画像があるならば、最初に文書の閲覧ないし書き出しを行う際、LyXは50回の画像変換を行わなくてはなら +ないのです。これは、LyXを使った仕事の流れを滞らせることになりかねません。もしPostScriptを利用することをお考えならば、画像を直接EPSとして挿入すれ +ば、この問題を回避することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +お使いの文書をPostScriptファイルとして書き出すためには、メニュー +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator +PostScript +\family default +を使用します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +PDF +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Pdf@PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Pdf@PDF +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このファイル型の拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.pdf +\family default +」です。「Portable Document Format（可搬文書形式）」（PDF）は、 +\family typewriter +Adobe +\family default +がPostScriptの派生として開発したものです。PDFは、PostScriptよりも圧縮されていて、少ないコマンドしか用いません。「可搬」の名の示す通り、P +DFはどのコンピュータでも処理することができ、印字もまったく同じように出力することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDFは、その中に画像を、PDF形式かあるいは「Joint Photographic Experts Group（写真専門家連合組織 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +訳注：ISOに設置された専門家会合の名称がそのままファイル形式に使われています。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +）」（JPG・ファイル拡張子「 +\family typewriter +.jpg +\family default +」または「 +\family typewriter +.jpeg +\family default +」）形式、または「Portable Network Graphics（可搬性ネットワーク画像ファイル）」（PNG・ファイル拡張子「 +\family typewriter +.png +\family default +」）形式のいずれかの形式で埋め込むことができます。LyXは、いずれにしても、任意の画像形式をバックグラウンドでこれらの形式に変換するので、どの画像形式でも使うこ +とができるようになっています。ただし、PostScriptの節で述べたように、画像変換は作業の流れを滞らせます。したがって、上に述べた３つの形式のいずれかの画像 +を使うことをおすすめします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +お使いの文書をPostScriptファイルとして書き出すには、 +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し +\family default +メニューを開いた後に以下の5つのいずれかを選択します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + これを選択すると、 +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default +プログラムによって、ファイルが直接PDFに変換されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + これを選択すると、 +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +プログラムによって、ファイルが直接PDFに変換されます。 +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +は、 +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +から派生したさらに新しいエンジンであり、同様にUnicodeの直接サポートを提供し、フォントへの直接アクセスをサポートします（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" + +\end_inset + +節参照）。LuaTeXは、まだ進行中のプロジェクトですが、次世代標準TeXプロセッサに成長するやもしれません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default + これを選択すると、 +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +プログラムによって、ファイルが直接PDFに変換されます。 +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +は、Unicodeの直接サポートを提供し、フォントへの直接アクセスをサポートする新しいエンジンです（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeXフォントサポート" + +\end_inset + +節参照）。これは、例えば縦書きの日本語など、様々なスクリプト体を組版するのに特に優れています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) +\family default + これを選択すると、お使いのファイルをバックグラウンドでDVIに変換したものを、 +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default +プログラムが2段階めでPDFに変換します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) +\family default + これを選択すると、お使いのファイルのPostScript版からPDFを作るのに +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default +プログラムが用いられます。このPostScript版は、途中段階として作られるDVI版を元に、 +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +プログラムが生成するものです。すなわち、この書き出しでは3回の変換を経ることになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default +は、PDF版が持ちうるすべての機能をサポートし、高速で、問題を起こさずに安定して動作しますので、 +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default +を使用することをおすすめします。複数の書体サポートを利用したり、特定のOpenTypeフォントを使用している場合には、 +\family typewriter +pdftex +\family default +ほど成熟してはいないことには留意しなくてはなりませんが、代わりに +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default +や +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X) +\family default +を用いた方が良いかもしれません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +XHTML +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式!Xhtml@XHTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\lang english +HTML +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このファイル形式は、拡張子「 +\family typewriter +.xhtml +\family default +」を持ち、ウェブブラウザでの閲覧に適したファイル形式です。このファイル自身には、画像類は含まれておらず、それらへのリンクしか含むことができないので、LyXがXH +TMLを生成する際には、適切なファイル形式の画像も同時に生成します。数式の出力に関しては、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +出力 +\family default +メニューで、出力形式を選ぶことができます。これについては、取扱説明書 +\emph on +『高度な機能篇』 +\emph default +の +\emph on +「XHTMLでの数式出力」 +\emph default +の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +XHTML出力は、未だ「発展途上」であり、全てのLyXの機能がサポートされているわけではありません。これに関しては、取扱説明書 +\emph on +『高度な機能篇』 +\emph default +の +\emph on +「LyXとインターネット網」 +\emph default +の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書をXHTMLファイルに出力するには、 +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LyXHTML +\family default +メニューを使用します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection + +\family typewriter +プレビュー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!ぷれびゅー@プレビュー +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +作成した文書の完成版—つまりすべての改頁が実際に行われ、脚注は正しく連番を振られ、その他諸々のことが完成しているもの—を画面で確認したい場合には、 +\family sans +表示 +\family default +メニューから +\family sans +表示 +\family default +を選ぶかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + +を押してください。すると、プレビュープログラムがポップアップして、事前に定義した既定の出力形式で出力が表示されます。これは、グローバルに設定もできます(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節参照)し、文書設定で文書ごとに変更することもできます(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:出力" + +\end_inset + +節参照)。他の出力形式は、 +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +他の形式 +\family default +かツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +で選ぶことができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書に変更を加えたときには、 +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +更新 +\family default +メニューか +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +更新(他の形式) +\family default +メニューを使えば、同じビューア内で出力を更新することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ファイルのプレビューをしている間は、出力ファイルはLyXの作業ディレクトリ内に生成されているにすぎません。実際の出力を得るには、作業中の文書を書き出してください +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ファイルをLyXから印刷する +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:ファイルを印刷" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +お使いのファイルを書き出してから印刷に取りかかる代わりに、LyXから直接ファイルを印刷することができます。ファイルを印刷するには、 +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +印刷 +\family default +メニューを選択するか( +\lang english +shortcut +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + +)、ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + +をクリックしてください。LyXは、DVIを生成するのに、内部的にLaTeXを呼び出します。こうしてできたDVIファイルが、 +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +プログラムによって処理されてPostScriptファイルとなり、それが +\family typewriter +Ghostscript +\family default +プログラムによって、最終的に印刷されるのです。これらの各段階がバックグラウンドで行われるので、この方法は最速ではありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +印刷先 +\family default +ボックスのパラメータを以下のように設定することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +プリンタ +\family default + これは印刷先のプリンタ名です。 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +このプリンタ名は +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +用のものです。つまり、 +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +がこのプリンタ名を使えるように設定されていなくてはなりません。既定プリンタは、LyXの設定ダイアログで設定することができます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:プリンタ" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +ファイル +\family default + 印刷先のファイル名です。出力はPostScriptファイルになります。完全パスを指定しないかぎり、LyXの作業ディレクトリに書き込まれます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、奇数頁あるいは偶数頁のみを印刷することを選ぶこともできます。これは両面印刷をするために使うことができます。片面をひととおり印刷したあとに、その紙を裏返して +、もう一度プリンタに差し込めばいいのです +\lang english +with a printer without a duplexer +\lang japanese +。プリンタによっては、印字面を上に出力するものもあれば、印字面を下にするものもあります。印刷する順序を適切に選択すれば、出力された紙の束をソートしなおすことなし +に、そのまま使うことができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +その他組版について +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くみばん@組版 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ハイフン・ダッシュ・マイナス記号 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +はいふん@ハイフン +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だっしゅ@ダッシュ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXには、 +\emph on +ハイフン +\emph default +／ +\emph on +エヌ・ダッシュ +\emph default +／ +\emph on +エム・ダッシュ +\emph default +と呼ばれる、3つの長さのダッシュ（ +\family typewriter +- +\family default +）文字があります。 +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +名称 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +出力 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +挿入方法 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ハイフン +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +- +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +文字の『 +\family typewriter +- +\family default +』 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +エヌ・ダッシュ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +– +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +特殊文字\SpecialChar \menuseparator +記号 +\family default +で挿入 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +エム・ダッシュ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +— +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +特殊文字\SpecialChar \menuseparator +記号 +\family default +で挿入 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +マイナス記号 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $-$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +数式モードで『 +\family typewriter +- +\family default +』 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +「 +\family typewriter +- +\family default +」文字を続けて複数入力することによって、エヌ・ダッシュやエム・ダッシュを生成することもできます。これらは、最終的な出力では、自動的に適切な長さのダッシュとして出 +力されますが、LyXの中ではそうなりません。 「- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +-」 でエヌ・ダッシュ、 「- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +- +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +-」でエム・ダッシュが出力されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これら3つのダッシュは、それ独自の長さを持つ、数式モードのマイナス記号とは異なります。「 +\family typewriter +- +\family default +」が使われている例をご覧に入れましょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +line- and page-breaks +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +（ハイフン） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +From A–Z +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +（エヌ・ダッシュ） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +Oh — there's a dash. +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +（エム・ダッシュ） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + +（マイナス記号） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ハイフネーション +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +はいふねーしょん@ハイフネーション +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:ハイフネーション" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX内では単語のハイフネーション（行末におけるハイフン区切り）は行われませんが、出力においては自動的になされます。ハイフネーションは、LaTeXパッケージのb +abel +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +が、文書言語のルールに基づいて行います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXは、ハイフネーションをほとんど完璧にこなしますが、 +\family sans +タイプライタ体 +\family default +フォントで書かれた字句と、通常ではありえないような複合語、たとえば「h3knix/m0n0wall」のような単語では問題が生じます。LaTeXが正しく単語を分割 +できないときには、手動でハイフネーション位置を挿入します。これは、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ハイフネーション位置 +\family default +メニューで行うことができます。ただし、このハイフネーション位置は、LaTeXに対する勧奨にすぎません。ハイフネーションが必要でないときには、LaTeXはこれを無 +視します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +場合によっては、単語などがハイフネートされることを防止したいことがあります。たとえば、文書中で「A-b c」のような形でキー割当てや短絡キーの説明をしたいとしま +しょう。LaTeXは、ハイフン「-」をハイフネートしても良い場所と判断します。しかし、この場所でハイフネートされると読みにくくなってしまいます。短絡キーがハイフ +ネートされることを防ぐためには、これをボックスの中に入れる方法があります。取扱説明書『 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +』の『ハイフネーションの回避』節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +句読点 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くとうてん@句読点 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +略語と文の終わり +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:略語" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +執筆中の文書の完成版を生成するためにLyXがLaTeXを実行する際、LaTeXはまず自動的に、単語と文と略語を識別します。その上で、LaTeXは「適切な大きさの +空白」を加えるのです。つまり、文末の句点と次に来る単語のあいだには広めの空白を挿入し、略語を示す句点のあとには、単語間に用いられる空白と同じ大きさの空白を挿入す +るのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +残念ながら、どれが略語であるのかを判別するアルゴリズムは、すべての場合においてうまくいくわけではありません。もし「.」が小文字のあとに付く場合には文末であると自動 +的に判断され、大文字のあとに付くならば略語と判断されるのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下は、略語と文末が +\emph on +正しく +\emph default +判別される例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +M. + Butterfly +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +Don't worry. + Be happy. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +そして、以下がこのアルゴリズムがうまく動作しない例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +e. + g. + this is too much space! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +This is I. + It's okay. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上の不具合は、この文書の完成版を出力してみないとわからないはずです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この不具合を正すには、次のいずれかのようにしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +小文字を使った略語の後には +\family sans +単語間の空白 +\family default +を使ってください（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:単語間の空白" + +\end_inset + +節を参照）。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くうはく@空白!たんごかんの@単語間の------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +略語内の句点の後には +\family sans +小空白 +\family default +を使ってください（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:小空白" + +\end_inset + +節参照）。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +くうはく@空白!しょう@小------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +文のあいだ用の空白があとに入るように強制するには、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +特殊文字 +\family default +メニューにある +\family sans +句点 +\family default +を使うようにしてください。この機能は、短絡のために +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence" +\end_inset + +に割り当てられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以上の方法を採用することで、前出の例は次のようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +this is too much space! +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +This is I\SpecialChar \@. + It's okay. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +言語によっては、文のあいだに空白を用いないものもあります。仮にそのような言語をお使いだとしても、LaTeXがうまく調整を行いますので、心配なさる必要はありません +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +それでも心配性なあなたのためには、これらのかくれたエラーを捕捉するツールがあります。取扱説明書『高度な機能篇』の +\emph on +Checking TeX +\emph default +の節に述べられている +\family sans +Check +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +TeX +\family default +の機能をお試しください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +引用符 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょくじ@植字!いんようふ@引用符 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いんようふ@引用符|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +植字 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは通常、引用符を正しく配置します。具体的には、引用文の開始部分には開く引用符、終了部分には閉じる引用符をつけます。例えば、 +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +開く、閉じる +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +という具合です。これは、キーボードの「 +\family sans +" +\family default +」キーが押されると自動的に処理されます +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログの +\family sans +言語 +\family default +サブメニューを用いると「 +\family sans +" +\family default +」キーの振舞いを変更することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また +\family sans +引用形式 +\family default +選択ボックスでは、各言語用の引用符を選択することができます。選択肢は次の 6つです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +double +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +または +\begin_inset Quotes els +\end_inset + +single +\begin_inset Quotes ers +\end_inset + +という引用符を用います +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes sld +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes srd +\end_inset + + または 'this +\begin_inset Quotes ers +\end_inset + +という引用符を用います +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes gld +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes grd +\end_inset + +または +\begin_inset Quotes gls +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes grs +\end_inset + +という引用符を用います +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes pld +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes prd +\end_inset + + または +\begin_inset Quotes pls +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes prs +\end_inset + +という引用符を用います +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes fld +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes frd +\end_inset + +または +\begin_inset Quotes fls +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes frs +\end_inset + +という引用符を用います +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\family sans +\begin_inset Quotes ald +\end_inset + +Text +\begin_inset Quotes ard +\end_inset + + +\family default + +\begin_inset Quotes ald +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes ard +\end_inset + +または +\begin_inset Quotes als +\end_inset + +this +\begin_inset Quotes ars +\end_inset + +という引用符を用います +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらの設定は、 +\family sans +「" +\family default +」キーを押すと、どの文字を配置されることになるかを決定します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +For single quotes you have to use the shortcut +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "quote-insert single" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +合字 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょくじ@植字!ごうじ@合字 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ごうじ@合字|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +植字 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:合字" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +欧文の植字における標準的な慣習として、特定の複数の文字を一まとめにして一つの文字として印字することがあります。このようにまとめられた文字を +\emph on +合字 +\emph default +といいます。LaTeXは合字処理を行いますので、作業中の文書の出力にも合字が現れることになります。標準的な合字は以下のようなものです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ff +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +fi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +fl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ffi +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ffl +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +言語によっては、文書フォントがサポートしていれば、これと異なる合字を使用することもあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +場合によっては、単語内で合字を用いたくないこともあるはずです。例えば、「graffiti」のような単語内で合字を用いることは自然でしょうが、「cufflink（ +カフスボタン）」やドイツ語の「Dorffest」のような複合語で合字を使ってしまうと、ひじょうに変な印象を与えます。合字を分離するためには、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形 +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +合字回避指定 +\family default +を使用してください。これを使用すると、「cufflinks」は「cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +links」のようになり、「Dorffest」は「Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{} +fest」のようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LyXの固有名称 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lyx@LyX!こゆうめいしょう@固有名称 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LyXの固有名称" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここまでで、「LaTeX」という単語が、つねにばらばらの寸法と高さを持つ文字で表されていることに気づかれたはずです。LaTeXとは、LyXが用いるプログラムの名 +称で、LyX内で「LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX」 +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ここでTeXコードボックス中に中括弧が入れてあるのは、この「コマンド」が固有名称として出力に現れるのを防ぐために挿入してあります（本節の最終段落を参照）。固有名 +称を生成するには、TeXコードボックスを削除してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +と入力すれば、固有の名称として認識されます。大文字と小文字の配列順を間違えないようにしてください！LyXは、以下の固有名称を識別します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LyX 本体の名称。生成するには、「L +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +yX」と入力してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +TeX LaTeXが使用するプログラム。生成するには、「T +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX」と入力してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeX LyXが使用するプログラム。生成するには、「LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX」と入力してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeX2e LaTeXの実のバージョン。生成するには、「LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX2e」と入力してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXのバージョンがどうして「2 +\begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$ +\end_inset + +」なのか不思議に思われるかもしれません。TeXの世界では、プログラムに通好みのバージョン番号を与えるのが古くからの通例なのです。例えば、TeXのバージョン番号は +\begin_inset Formula $\pi$ +\end_inset + +に収束していくようになっています。実際のバージョンは「TeX-3.141592」であり、一つ前のバージョンは「TeX-3.14159」です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +例えば節見出しなどにおいて、固有名称を使用したくないときは、単語中に空の中括弧の対をTeXコードで埋め込むとよいでしょう。これは画面上では、 +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/LaTeX.png + +\end_inset + +のように見えます。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +TeXコードについて詳しくは、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:TeXコード" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +単位 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょくじ@植字!たんい@単位 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +一般的に、単位と数字のあいだの空白は、二つの単語のあいだの通常の空白よりも狭くなっています。以下の例から分かるように、空白が狭い方が見映えがよいのです。単位向け +のこのような「半分の空白」を得るには +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +整形\SpecialChar \menuseparator +小空白 +\family default +（短絡キーは +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "space-insert thin" +\end_inset + +）メニューを使ってください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下がこの違いを示す例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +数字と単位のあいだに入れた通常の空白 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +24 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +kW +\begin_inset Formula $\cdot$ +\end_inset + +h +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +数字と単位のあいだ用の半分の空白 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +孤立行 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょくじ@植字!こりつぎょう@孤立行 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +初期のワードプロセッサでは、ページがいっぱいになりさえすれば、ところかまわず改頁をしていました。文章が実際にどのように進んでいるかについては、まったく考慮が払わ +れていなかったのです。かつて、文書を印刷した後になって初めて、次の節見出しがページのいちばん下に印刷されてしまっていたり、新しい段落の一行めだけがページの最後に +残されてしまったり、あるいは段落の最後の行だけが次のページの最初に印刷されてしまっているのを、見つけた経験がおありのことでしょう。これらのはみ出てしまった文章は +、 +\emph on +前方孤立行（widow） +\emph default +あるいは +\emph on +後方孤立行（orphan） +\emph default +と呼ばれています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXでは原理的に、節見出しの直後に改頁が起こることを避けることができることはあきらかです。これは段落環境を採用していることの利点なのです。しかし、改頁によって +段落のうち一行だけをページの冒頭や末尾に取り残してしまう、孤立行に関してはどうでしょう。実はLaTeXには、改頁を制御する規則が埋め込まれていて、これらに含まれ +ている規則の一部が、孤立行の発生を明示的に防いでいるのです。これは、LaTeXをバックエンドとして使うことによって、LyXが獲得している利点です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、TeXやLaTeXが改頁を決定する方法や、その挙動の変更方法について、詳述する紙幅がありません。参考文献に引用してあるLaTeX関連書籍（ +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +や +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +）などに詳しい説明をしているものがあります。しかしながら、この点を気にしなくてはならなくなることは、まずないでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +注釈・図・表・フロート +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:フロートと注釈" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +本章の題材は、取扱説明書『高度な機能篇』に詳細に述べられています。そちらでは、特殊な場合のヒントとテクニックについても述べられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +注釈 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ちゅうしゃく@注釈 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:注釈" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXには、文書に追加できる注釈として、複数の型が存在します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LyX注釈 この注釈型は、内部用途の注釈で出力には現れません。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、出力には現れない注釈ボックスに書かれた文章です。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +コメント この注釈も出力には現れませんが、 +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaTeX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(xxx) +\family default + メニューを使って文書をLaTeXに書き出す際には、LaTeXコメントとして出力されます。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Comment +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、LaTeXファイルのコメントのみに現れる注釈ボックスに書かれた文章です。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +淡色表示 この注釈は、出力中では、文書設定の +\family sans +色\SpecialChar \menuseparator +淡色表示注釈 +\family default +で設定した色で文章が表示されます。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、出力に薄灰色の文章として現れるコメントに書かれた文章 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、淡色表示注釈内に脚注を用いた例です。この文書では、この注釈型の色は青色に設定されています。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +です。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes +\lang japanese +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +注釈は、ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/note-insert.png + scale 85 + scaleBeforeRotation + +\end_inset + +か、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +注釈 +\family default +メニューで挿入することができます。注釈型を選択するには、それで現れた注釈ボックスを右クリックしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +脚注 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +きゃくちゅう@脚注 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:脚注" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、脚注をボックスを使って表示します。 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +脚注 +\family default +メニューあるいはツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "footnote-insert" +\end_inset + +を使用して脚注を挿入すると、 +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png + scale 80 + +\end_inset + +ボックスが表示されます。このボックスがLyXにおいて脚注を示すものです。「脚注」と書いてあるラベルを左クリックすると、ボックスが展開されて、中に脚注の本文を入力 +することができるようになります。ボックスラベルをもう一度左クリックすると、ボックスは閉じられます。既存の本文を脚注に変更したいときは、その部分を選択して脚注ツー +ルバーボタンを押せばよいのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +右は脚注の例です。 +\begin_inset Foot +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +脚注を閉じるには左端のラベルボックスをクリックします。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +脚注は、出力では、本文中の脚注ボックスが配置された場所に上付きの数字として表示されます。脚注の文章は、そのページの下端に配置されます。 +\lang english +The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class +\lang japanese +。LyXは、まだ他の付番スキームをサポートしていませんが、特定のLaTeXコマンドを使用すれば他の付番スキームを使用することができます。この点に関しては、取扱説 +明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +傍注 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぼうちゅう@傍注 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:傍注" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +傍注は、LyXの脚注と同様の外観と挙動を示します。 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +傍注 +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "marginalnote-insert" +\end_inset + +を使って傍注を挿入すると、文中に「傍注」というラベルのついたボックスが現れます。このボックスが、LyXにおいては傍注を表します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この脇に傍注の例があります。 +\begin_inset Marginal +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これが傍注です。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +傍注は、片面文書では右側に印字されます。両面文書では、外側の余白、すなわち偶数ページでは左側、奇数ページでは右側に現れます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +傍注についての詳細な情報は、取扱説明書 +\emph on +『埋め込みオブジェクト篇』 +\emph default +の +\emph on +「傍注」 +\emph default +の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +図と画像 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +がぞう@画像 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ず@図 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:図" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書に図を挿入するには、カーソルを希望する本文中の位置に合わせて、ツールバーアイコン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + +をクリックするか、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +図 +\family default +メニューを選択してください。すると、読み込むファイルを選択するダイアログが現れます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このダイアログには、ひじょうに多くの—しかしほとんど説明を要しない—パラメータがあります。 +\family sans +図 +\family default +タブでは、画像ファイルを選択することができます。LyX内での画像表示と、出力での画像表示は、それぞれ独立して調整することができます。画像は、回転角や縮尺を指定す +ることで変換を行うことができます。縮尺単位に関しては、付録 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" + +\end_inset + +に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +切り抜き +\family default +タブでは、出力における画像の縦横の長さを調整するために、画像座標の設定をすることができます。座標は、 +\family sans +ファイルから取得 +\family default +ボタンを押すことによって、自動的に計算することもできます。 +\family sans +境界枠で切り抜く +\family default +オプションは、指定された座標内の画像領域のみ印字します。通常は、画像座標を気にする必要はないので、 +\family sans +切り抜き +\family default +タブは無視して構いません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +LaTeXとLyXのオプション +\family default +タブでは、LaTeXのエキスパート向けにLaTeXオプションを追加することができるようになっています。また、ここでLyX内での画像表示法を指定することができます +。 +\family sans +下書きモード +\family default +オプションを指定すると、画像は出力には現れず、画像と同じ大きさの枠だけが表示されます。 +\family sans +書き出す際に解凍しない +\family default +オプションについては、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +Graphics Dialog +\emph default +の節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +図ダイアログは、画像をクリックすることによって、いつでも呼び出すことができます。図は、出力では、それが置かれている本文中の位置に正確に配置されます。以下は、独立 +した中央揃えの段落に置かれたPDF形式の画像の例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/mobius.eps + scale 70 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +画像のキャプションや参照画像が必要な場合は、画像をフロート中に収めなくてはなりません（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:図フロート" + +\end_inset + +節参照）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +画像形式 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +がぞう@画像 ! けいしき@形式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:画像形式" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +画像は、既知のファイル形式であれば、どのような形式でも挿入することができます。しかし、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節で説明したように、出力に関しては、どの出力文書形式も、いくつかの画像形式しか受け付けません。したがってLyXは、画像を正しい形式に変換するのに、バックグラウン +ドで +\family sans +ImageMagick +\family default +というプログラムを使用しています。バックグラウンドで変換が発生することを避けて作業能率を上げようとお考えならば、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節内の各小節に挙げてある画像形式のみを使用するとよいでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フォントと同じく、画像形式にも以下の二つの型があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ビットマップ画像 は、ピクセル値を（時により圧縮された形で）保持しています。したがって、この画像形式は完全に伸縮可能ではなく、拡大するとピクセルが目立つようにな +ります。よく知られたビットマップ画像形式には、「Graphics Interchange Format（画像交換形式）」（GIF・ファイル拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.gif +\family default +」） +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +GIF|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +画像形式 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +、「Portable Network Graphics（可搬性ネットワーク画像ファイル）」（PNG・ファイル拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.png +\family default +」） +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PNG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +画像形式 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +、「Joint Photographic Experts Group（写真専門家連合組織）」（JPG・ファイル拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.jpg +\family default +」または「 +\family typewriter +.jpeg +\family default +」） +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +JPG|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +画像形式 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +などがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +伸縮可能画像 はベクトル値を保持しているので、データ損失なしに任意の寸法の伸縮させることができます。プレゼンテーションは、beamerがかならず伸縮操作を行うこ +とになるので、プレゼンテーションを作成したいときには画像が伸縮できることが必須です。また、伸縮性は、オンライン文書でユーザーが図の拡大ができるようにするのに便利 +です。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +伸縮可能画像形式には、「Scalable Vector Graphics（伸縮可能ベクトル画像ファイル）」（SVG・ファイル拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.svg +\family default +」）、「Encapsulated PostScript（カプセル化ポストスクリプト）」（EPS・ファイル拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.eps +\family default +」）、「Portable Document Format（可搬文書形式）」（PDF・ファイル拡張子は「 +\family typewriter +.pdf +\family default +」）がありえます。「ありえます」と言ったのは、ビットマップ画像はいつでもPDFやEPSに変換することができますが、この場合には伸縮可能ではなくなるからです。この +ような場合には、画像特性を示すヘッダが元々の画像に付け加えられるだけなのです +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDFの場合には、元の画像を圧縮することもあります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +通常、ビットマップ画像を伸縮可能画像には変換できず、その逆のみが可能です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +画像設定のグループ化 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +がぞう@画像 ! せっていのぐるーぷか@設定のグループ化 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +すべての画像は、画像設定のグループを新しく定義させるか、既存のグループに属させることができます。同一のグループに属する画像は、同一の設定を共有するので、グループ +内のひとつの画像の設定を変更すれば、グループ内の他のすべての画像が同じ変更を反映します。ですから、例えば、大量の画像の大きさを変えたい場合、ひとつひとつ手動で変 +更せずに行うことができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +A new group can be set by pressing the button +\family sans +Open +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +new +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +group +\family default + in the +\family sans + Graphics +\family default + dialog in the +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X options +\family default + tab +\lang japanese +。既存のグループに加えるには、コンテキスト・メニューから望むグループ名をクリックすれば、そのグループに加えることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +表 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ひょう@表 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:表" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表を挿入するには、ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "tabular-insert" +\end_inset + +か、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +表 +\family default +メニューを選択します。するとダイアログが現れ、行数と列数を訊いてきます。既定の表では、各セルの周囲に罫線が引かれ、第一行が表の他の部分から分離して表示されます。 +この分離が起こるのは二重線のためです。第一行のセルが下に罫線を伴っているのと同時に、第二行のセルも上に罫線を伴っているのです。以下は表の一例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +い +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ろ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +は +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +表ダイアログ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表を右クリックすると、表ダイアログが表示されて、表を変更することができます。ここでは、現在カーソルが置かれているセルないし行・列の設定を調節することができます。 +また、ダイアログオプションのほとんどは、選択範囲に対しても動作します。つまり、複数のセルや行・列を選択していれば、操作は選択範囲の全てに対して行われます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表ダイアログのほかに、カーソルが表内にある時に表示される +\family sans +表ツールバー +\family default +も表の特性を設定するのに役立ちます。例えば、いまのところ、行を追加したり削除したりすることは、表ツールバーからのみ実行することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表ダイアログの +\family sans +表の設定 +\family default +タブでは、現在の行の水平揃えを設定することができます。また行や列を追加すると、新規行・新規列は、現在のセルのすぐ下か右に追加されます。列の垂直揃えは、列幅が指定 +されている時のみ、指定することができます。列幅を指定すると、セル内で改行したり、セルに複数の段落を挿入したりすることができるようになります（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:表のセル" + +\end_inset + +節を参照）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +チェックボックス +\family sans +連結列 +\family default +や +\family sans +連結行 +\family default +を使うと、同一行あるいは同一列にある複数のセルを連結列セルあるいは連結行セルとして指定することができます。こうすると、複数のセルを一つのセルに連結し、2列あるい +は2行以上にまたがって表示されます。連結列はそれ自体独立した行として取り扱われるので、連結列における水平揃えや列幅や罫線などの設定は、連結列のセルのみに有効です +。以下は、第一行に連結列があり、最終行に上罫線がない（1列のみの）連結列がある表の例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +イロハ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ニホヘトチリ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ヌルヲ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +い +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ろ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +は +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +に +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これは、取扱説明書『高度な機能篇』の表の節に説明されているように、連結行セルのように表に特別な整形を行うときに必要になるでしょう。また、現在のセルや表全体を90 +度左向きに回転させることもできます。この回転はLyX上には表示されませんが、出力では正しく表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +ほとんどのDVIビューアは回転を表示することが +\emph on +できません +\emph default +。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +罫線 +\family default +タブでは、現在の行あるいは列の罫線を書き加えたり削除したりすることができます。 +\family sans +既定 +\family default +ボタンを押すと、全てのセルの周りに罫線が引かれます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +長尺表 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ひょう@表!ちょうしゃく@長尺------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ちょうしゃくひょう@長尺表 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Longtable|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +長尺表 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表が長すぎて1ページに収まりきらないときには、表ダイアログの +\family sans +長尺表 +\family default +タブにある +\family sans +長尺表を使う +\family default +オプションを使用して、複数ページに自動的に分割させることができます。このオプションを有効にすると、いくつかのチェックボックスが使えるようになり、以下のものを定義 +することができるようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ヘッダ： カーソル位置の行とその上の全ての行で、特別なオプションが定義されていないものは、長尺表の全てのページのヘッダ行として定義されるようになります。ただし、 +\family sans +冒頭ヘッダ +\family default +が定義されているときは、冒頭ページを除きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +冒頭ヘッダ： カーソル位置の行とその上の全ての行で、特別なオプションが定義されていないものは、長尺表の冒頭ページのヘッダ行として定義されるようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +フッタ： カーソル位置の行とその下の全ての行で、特別なオプションが定義されていないものは、長尺表の全てのページのフッタ行として定義されるようになります。ただし、 +\family sans +末尾フッタ +\family default +が定義されているときは、末尾ページを除きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +末尾フッタ： カーソル位置の行とその下の全ての行で、特別なオプションが定義されていないものは、長尺表の末尾ページのフッタ行として定義されるようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +キャプション： 第１行は単一列にリセットされますので、ここに +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +キャプション +\family default +メニューで表キャプションを挿入することができます。長尺表のキャプションについては、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +に詳述されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +加えて、表が分割される行を指定することができます。もし同一行に二つ以上のオプションを指定すると、その行の最初のオプションだけが用いられることに留意してください。 +その他のオプションは +\emph on +空 +\emph default +として定義されます。ここで「最初の」とは、 +\family sans +フッタ +\family default +・ +\family sans +末尾フッタ +\family default +・ +\family sans +ヘッダ +\family default +・ +\family sans +冒頭ヘッダ +\family default +の順のうち、最初という意味です。長尺表の動作を見るために以下の例を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +例示用電話帳（名前は無視してください） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +氏名 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +例示用電話帳 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +氏名 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +TEL. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +つづく… +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +111 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Annovi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Silvia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bertoli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Stefano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Bozzi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Walter +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cachia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Cinquemani +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giusi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Colin +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Bernard +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Concli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Gianfranco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dal Bosco +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Carolina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Dalpiaz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Annamaria +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Feliciello +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Domenico +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Focarelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Galletti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oreste +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Gasparini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franca +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Rizzardi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paola +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Lassini +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Giancarlo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Luciano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Malfatti +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Valeriano +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Meneguzzo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Mezzadra +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Roberto +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pirpamer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Erich +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Pochiesa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Paolo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555, 222 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Radina +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Claudio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Stuffer +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Oskar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tacchelli +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Ugo +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Tezzele +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Margit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Unterkalmsteiner +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Frieda +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vieider +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Hilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Vigna +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Jürgen +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +999 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Weber +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Maurizio +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +Winkler +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Franz +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +555 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +おわり +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +表のセル +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ひょう@表!のせる@------のセル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:表のセル" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表のセルの中には、テキスト、行内数式、図、別の表などを入れることができます。これらのすべての種類のオブジェクトを同一セルに置くことも可能です。フォント寸法や字型 +を変更することもできますが、セルに特別な環境（例えば +\family sans +節* +\family default +など）を入れたり、セルの段落に空白を指定するオプションを設定することはできません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表のセルに複数行にわたる項目を入れるには、表ダイアログで当該列に固定列幅を宣言しなくてはなりません。すると、文章が指定した列幅よりも長くなると、自動的に複数行に +改行され、セル高も高く調整されます。以下の例をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +4 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、表内の複数行項目です。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +5 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +6 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +もう少し付け加えます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +7 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +8 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、表内の複数行項目です。もう少し付け加えます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +9 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表どうしやセルどうしの切り貼りはうまく動作します。二行以上にわたっても切り貼りは可能です +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +複数のセルを選択した状態で貼り付けをすることはできません。なぜなら、ひとつの単語を2行3列の選択範囲に貼り付けるとは、具体的に何をすればいいのか明らかではないか +らです。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。マウスや、シフトを押しながらの矢印キーによる選択も通常どおり機能します。表全体の切り貼りも、表の外側から選択を始めることで行うことができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +フロート +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふろーと@フロート +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:フロート" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +はじめに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フロート +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +訳註：浮遊するものの意。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +とは、位置の固定していない、なんらかのラベルを伴った文章の塊のことで、指定した位置から一二ページ前後のあいだでもっとも良い場所へ「漂う」ことができます。 +\family sans +脚注 +\family default +や +\family sans +傍注 +\family default +も、当該ページに注が多すぎるときには次のページに浮遊していくことができますから、これらもフロートと言ってよいでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フロートを使用すると、高品質のレイアウトを得ることができます。画像や表は、文章のないページや空白部分ができないように、各ページに分散して配置されます。フロート化 +することによって、本文と画像や表のあいだにある文脈が途切れてしまうことがあるので、各フロートは本文中で参照することができるようになっています。したがってフロート +には付番がなされます。参照に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:相互参照" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フロートを挿入するには、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +フロート +\family default +を使用してください。すると文書に「図 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +#:」（#は実際には番号）というキャプションの付いたボックスが挿入されます。ラベルは、出力時に自動的に文書言語に翻訳されます。ラベルの後にはキャプション文 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふろーと@フロート!きゃぷしょん@キャプション +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を挿入することができます。画像ないし表は、キャプションの上か下に、フロート内の別の段落として挿入します。また、LyX文書を読みやすくするために、ボックスラベルを +左クリックすれば、フロートボックスを開いたり閉じたりすることができます。閉じたフロートボックスは +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/floatQt4.png + +\end_inset + +のように赤いラベルの付いた灰色のボタンとして表されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +周囲の本文に特別な整形がなされているときに起こりうるLaTeXエラーを回避するために、フロートは独立した段落として挿入することを推奨します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +用例 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +図フロート +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふろーと@フロート!ず@図------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:図フロート" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +図 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:カモノハシ-1" + +\end_inset + +は、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +フロート\SpecialChar \menuseparator +図 +\family default +メニューまたはツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert figure" +\end_inset + +を使って生成しました。フロート生成後、キャプションラベルの上方にカーソルを持って行き、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +画像 +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + +を使って、画像を挿入します。その後、画像の前か後にカーソルを持って行き、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +段落設定 +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +を使用して、フロート内の画像を中央揃えにしてあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +placement htbp +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/platypus.eps + lyxscale 50 + width 50col% + rotateOrigin center + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:カモノハシ-1" + +\end_inset + +フロート中の激しく歪んだカモノハシ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この図フロートは、ラベルの付け方と相互参照の作り方も示しています。まず、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ラベル +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + +を用いてラベルを付けた上で、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +相互参照 +\family default +メニューないしはツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +を使って、このラベルを参照します。図フロートを参照する場合には、「上図」のようにあいまいな参照をするのではなく、相互参照を使用することが重要です。LaTeXは、 +文書の最終版でフロートの再配置を行うため、図が「上」に来るかどうかはまったくもって定かではないからです。相互参照については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:相互参照" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +通常、図フロートには一つの画像だけを挿入しますが、場合によっては、二つの画像に別々の副キャプションをつけて挿入したいこともあるかもしれません。その場合は、既存の +図フロートの中に図フロートを入れ込むことによって、実現することができます。ただし、図一覧にはフロートの主キャプションのみが表示されることに留意してください。図 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" + +\end_inset + +は、二つの画像が横に並んでいる図フロートの例です。二つめの画像を一つめの下に持ってくることも可能です。図 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:何かわからない" + +\end_inset + +と図 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:カモノハシ" + +\end_inset + +が下位図になります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:何かわからない" + +\end_inset + +何かわからない +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Float figure +wide false +sideways false +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:カモノハシ" + +\end_inset + +カモノハシ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/platypus.eps + lyxscale 60 + width 45col% + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:歪められた二つの像" + +\end_inset + +歪められた二つの像 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +表フロート +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふろーと@フロート!ひょう@表------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +表フロートは、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +フロート\SpecialChar \menuseparator +表 +\family default +メニューあるいはツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert table" +\end_inset + +を使うと挿入することができます。 +\lang english +They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in + the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures + and that the label begins with +\lang japanese +「tab:」。表 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:表フロート" + +\end_inset + +は表フロートの一例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +placement htbp +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:表フロート" + +\end_inset + +表フロート +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +1 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +2 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +3 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +森嶋 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +宇沢 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +二階堂 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +a & b\\ +c & d +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +詳しい情報 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふろーと@フロート ! しょうさい@詳細 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXには、他にも回転フロートなどのフロート型があります。他にも、フロートの連番スキームを変更したり、フロートの配置を調整したり、フロートキャプションの書式や配 +置を変更することができます。これらの機能は、取扱説明書 +\emph on +『埋込オブジェクト篇』 +\emph default +の +\emph on +「フロート」 +\emph default +の章に、多くの用例とともに、詳しく説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ミニページ +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +みにぺーじ@ミニページ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:ミニページ" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXには、ミニページという、ページの中にページを事実上作ってしまう機構があります。ミニページの中では、字下げや行折返しなどの通常の規則がすべて有効です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ミニページはLyXにおいては、折りたたみ可能なボックスとして表され、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ボックス +\family default +メニューで挿入できます。ボックスを右クリックすると、ミニページの幅やページ内部での配置を変更することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\align center +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "30col%" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +これはミニページです。本文はイタリック(Italic)体に設定されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\shape italic +ミニページは、本文と異なる言語の文章や、別の整形方法を要する文章などによく用いられます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + +二つのみにページを横に並べるときには、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:水平方向の空白" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられているように、 +\family sans +水平フィル +\family default +を使用すると良いかもしれません。 +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、まったく意味のないダミーの文章を含むミニページです。このダミーの文章は、ミニページが十分な大きさを持つようにするためのものです。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset space \hfill{} +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Frameless +position "t" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 1 +inner_pos "t" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1.5in" +special "none" +height "1pt" +height_special "totalheight" +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、まったく意味のないダミーの文章を含むミニページです。このダミーの文章は、ミニページが十分な大きさを持つようにするためのものです。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ミニページボックスを右クリックすると、ボックスをミニページから他のボックス型に変更することができます。ボックスの全型とその設定については、取扱説明書『埋込みオブ +ジェクト篇』の +\emph on +ボックス +\emph default +の章に詳細な説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +数式 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しき@式|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +数式 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:数式" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +本章の題材は、取扱説明書『数式篇』に詳細な記述があります。そちらには、特殊な場合のヒントとコツも収録されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +数式編集の基本 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!のきほん@------の基本 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式を作成するには、ツールバーアイコン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-mode on" +\end_inset + +( +\lang english +shortcut +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-mode" +\end_inset + +)をクリックするだけでできます。すると、四隅を紫のマーカーで囲まれた青い箱が現れます。この青い箱が数式それ自身で、紫のマーカーは数式内の現在地の入れ子の深さを表 +します。また、 +\family sans +挿入 +\bar under +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\bar default +数式 +\family default +メニューを使えば、挿入する数式の型を選ぶこともできます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式のパラメータの編集や、数式の構成物の追加は、カーソルが数式内にある時に現れる、 +\family sans +数式ツールバー +\family default +を使って行うことができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式には主に二つの型があります。そのうちの一つ、行内数式は本文の行内に現れる数式で以下のように表現されます： +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この行は行内数式 +\begin_inset Formula $A=B$ +\end_inset + +を含んだ行です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もう一つの別行立て数式は、本文の外側に単独の段落であるかのように表現されるもので、以下のようにみえます： +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +A=B +\] + +\end_inset + +番号を振ったり参照をしたりするのは、別行立て数式しかできません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、多くのLaTeX数式コマンドをサポートしています。例えば、「 +\series bold + +\backslash +alpha +\series default +」と入力してスペースを押せば、数式の中にギリシア文字 +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha$ +\end_inset + +が作られます。つまり往々にして、 +\family sans +数式パネル +\family default +を使うよりもコマンドを打った方が速いことがあるでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +数式内の移動 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!いどう@移動 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +既存の数式内でカーソル位置をコントロールする一番いい方法は矢印キーを使うことです。LyXは、何かを挿入できる場所を小さな箱で示します。矢印キーは数式内の各部品の +あいだを移動するのに使うことができます。 +\family sans +スペース +\family default +キーは、数式の構成要素（平方根 +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$ +\end_inset + +や、括弧 +\begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$ +\end_inset + +、行列 +\begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right]$ +\end_inset + +等）から脱出するのに使うことができます。 +\family sans +エスケープ +\family default +を押すと、数式から脱出してカーソルは数式の直後に移動します。 +\family sans +Tab +\family default +は、数式内を水平に移動するのに使います。例えば、行列中のセルの移動や複数行の数式中の移動などです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +スペース +\family default +—本文書では「 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + 」 +\begin_inset Note Note +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +このコマンドは、出力では空白文字（可視空白）を表す標準的な文字で表現されます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +と印刷されます—は、数式中では何もしないように見えますが、実は入れ子構造から脱出するのに使われるのです。このため、 +\family sans +スペース +\family default +を使うときには注意しなくてはなりません。例えば、 +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$ +\end_inset + +と入力したい場合には +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series bold +2x+1 +\series default +と入力すべきであって、 +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series bold +2x +\series default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series bold ++1 +\series default +ではありません。このようにすると、 +\begin_inset Formula $2x$ +\end_inset + +のみが平方根の中に入ってしまって +\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$ +\end_inset + +のようになってしまいます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下の行列のように、数式の多くの構成要素は、一部だけ入力した状態で置いておくことができます。例： +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +\lambda_{1}\\ + & \ddots\\ + & & \lambda_{n} +\end{array}\right) +\] + +\end_inset + +分数の一部しか入力しなかったり、上付き文字に何も入力しなかった場合には、何が起こるかは予想できませんが、ほとんどの構成要素はすべて入力しなくとも大丈夫です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文字の選択 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式中で文字を選択するには二つの方法があります。一つは、選択したい文字列の端にカーソルを置いて +\family sans +、シフト +\family default +キーを押しながらカーソル移動キーで文字列を選択する方法です。すると、通常の文字列選択と同じように、選択部がハイライト表示されます。もう一つの方法は、他と同じよう +にマウスを使って選択することです。選択部は、切り取りやコピーをして任意の数式中に貼り付けすることができますが、LyX中の通常の本文領域には貼り付けできません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +指数と下付き文字 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!しすう@指数 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!したつきもじ@下付き文字 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上付き文字や下付き文字を入力するには(buttons +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-superscript" +\end_inset + +and +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-subscript" +\end_inset + +)、数式パネルを使うこともできますが、コマンドを使用する方がより簡単です。つまり、 +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + +が欲しいときには +\series bold + x^2 +\series default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + と入力すればよいのです。最後の +\family sans +スペース +\family default +で、カーソルが上付き文字の位置から数式のベースライン位置に戻ります。もし +\series bold +x^2y +\series default +と入力してしまうと +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$ +\end_inset + +になってしまいます。 +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$ +\end_inset + +が欲しい場合には +\series bold + x^2 +\family typewriter +\series default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series bold +y +\series default + と入力して下さい。上付き文字を入力する時には、「^」で移行することができ、上付き部分から戻る際には +\family sans +スペース +\family default +を入力します。例えば、 +\begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$ +\end_inset + +が欲しければ、 +\series bold + x^a +\series default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + と入力します。下付き文字も同様です。 +\begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$ +\end_inset + +を得るには、 +\series bold + a_1 +\series default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + と入力します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +分数 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!ぶんすう@分数 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +分数を作るには、コマンド +\series bold + +\backslash +frac +\series default +を使うか、 +\family sans +数式パネル +\family default +の +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\frac" +\end_inset + +アイコンを使用してください。空の分数が現れて、カーソルが分数の横棒の上方に置かれます。横棒の下に移動するには +\family sans +↓ +\family default +を、また元に戻るには +\family sans +↑ +\family default +を押して下さい。以下の例に示されているように、分数には任意の数式要素を入れることができます。 +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc} +2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 +\end{array}\right)}\right] +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +根号 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!へいほうこん@平方根 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +根号は、数式パネルの +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\sqrt" +\end_inset + +or +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\root" +\end_inset + +ボタンか、 +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default +あるいは +\series bold + +\backslash +root +\series default +コマンドを使って作成することができます。 +\series bold + +\backslash +root +\series default +コマンドでは、立方根のような高次の根を生成することができますが、 +\series bold + +\backslash +sqrt +\series default +はつねに平方根を生成します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +範囲付き演算子 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!わ@和 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!せきぶん@積分 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:範囲付き演算子" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +和記号（ +\begin_inset Formula $\sum$ +\end_inset + +）と積分記号（ +\begin_inset Formula $\int$ +\end_inset + +）には、しばしば和や積分の上限・下限を書き加えることがあります。これらの上限下限は、記号の直後で上付き文字や下付き文字を入力するときと同じようにすれば入力するこ +とができます。和記号の場合は、別行立て数式では上限は記号の上に下限は記号の下に自動的に配置され、行内数式の場合は記号の横に配置されます。つまり行内数式は +\begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$ +\end_inset + + と表記され、別行立て数式では +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\sum_{n=1}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e +\] + +\end_inset + +となります。一方、積分記号の場合は、上限下限はどちらの数式型でも積分記号の横に配置されます。全ての範囲付き演算子は、別行立てモードでは自動的に大きさが調整されま +す。上限下限の位置は、カーソルを記号の直後に置いて、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-limits" +\end_inset + +と押すか、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator +極限の表記を変更 +\family default +メニューを使えば変更することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +他の数式表現にも、この「移動する上限下限」機能を持つものがあります。例えば +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!じょうげんかげん@上限下限 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!はんい@範囲|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +数式!上限下限 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x), +\] + +\end_inset + +は、別行立てモードでは +\begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$ +\end_inset + +を記号の下に配置しますが、行内モードでは +\begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$ +\end_inset + + のようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでlim関数は、関数マクロ +\series bold + +\backslash +lim +\series default +を使って入力されたものであることに注意してください。関数マクロに関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:関数" + +\end_inset + +節を参照して下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +数式記号 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!きごう@記号 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式記号のほとんどは、 +\family sans +数式パネル +\family default +にあるギリシャ文字・演算子・関係子・矢印等の各カテゴリの中に収録されています。また、アメリカ数学会(AMS: American Mathematical + Society) が提供している記号も加えてあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もし使いたい数式要素や記号のLaTeXコマンドを知っているならば、数式パネルを使う必要はなく、数式に直接コマンドを入力すればよいでしょう。LyXが、それを対応す +る記号や数式要素に変換します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +余白を変更する +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!よはく@余白 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!くうはく@空白|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +数式!余白 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXの提供する標準的な余白取りとは異なる余白を使いたいことがあるかもしれません。この場合は、 +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space" +\end_inset + + +\family default +を押すか、 +\family sans +数式パネル +\family default +のボタン +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\space" +\end_inset + + +\family default +を使用してください。これは小さな空白を追加するもので、画面上には小さなマーカーが表示されます。例えば、 +\series bold +a Ctrl+Space b +\series default + というキー列、すなわち +\begin_inset Formula $a\, b$ +\end_inset + +は、LyX上では +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png + +\end_inset + +のように表示されます。空白マーカーの直後にカーソルを置いて空白をさらに何度か押すと、空白を異なる長さに変えることができます。一度空白を押す度に長さが変わります。 +負の長さを持ついくつかの空白は、LyX上では赤色で表示されます。以下に例を二つ上げます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Ctrl+Space b +\series default +と入力した後に +\family sans +Space +\family default +を3回入力： +\begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +a Ctrl+Space b +\series default +と入力した後に +\family sans +Space +\family default +を3回入力： +\begin_inset Formula $a\! b$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +関数 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!かんすう@関数 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:関数" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +数式パネル +\family default +の +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\functions" +\end_inset + + +\family default +ボタンの中には、 +\begin_inset Formula $\sin$ +\end_inset + +・ +\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ +\end_inset + +など多くの関数が含まれています（数式中で +\series bold + +\backslash +sin +\series default +などと入力して挿入することも可能です）。通常、 +\begin_inset Formula $sin$ +\end_inset + +は +\begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$ +\end_inset + +を意味することになってしまうので、数学の標準的な慣習では、混乱を避けるため関数はアップライト体で印字されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、関数マクロは関数の周りに適切な余白を設定します。 +\begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$ +\end_inset + +の余白は単に +\begin_inset Formula $asinx$ +\end_inset + +と入力したときとは異なります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula $\lim$ +\end_inset + +のようないくつかの数式オブジェクトでは、マクロが下付き文字の位置を、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:範囲付き演算子" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられているような方法で変更します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +アクセント +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!あくせんと@アクセント +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式中においても、通常の本文と同じ方法で、アクセントの付いた文字を挿入することができます。方法は、使用しているキーボードとキー設定ファイルによって異なります。ま +た、キーボードがアクセントを使うように設定されていないでも、例えば +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + +を挿入するのにLaTeXコマンドを使用することができます。この例では、数式中で +\series bold + +\backslash +hat +\series default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +spce +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series bold +a +\series default + と入力することによって作成しています。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:アクセント名とそれに対応するコマンド" + +\end_inset + +表はアクセント名とコマンドの対照表を示しています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:アクセント名とそれに対応するコマンド" + +\end_inset + +アクセント名とそれに対応するコマンド +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +名称 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +コマンド +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +印字例 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +circumflex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +hat +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +grave +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +acute +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +acute +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +umlaut +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +ddot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +tilde +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +dot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +dot +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +breve +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +breve +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +caron +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +check +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +macron +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +bar +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +vector +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +vec +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらのアクセントは、数式パネルの +\family sans +上下装飾 +\family default +記号設定ボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\hat" +\end_inset + +から項目を選ぶことで選択することもできます。この方法は、数式内で選択したものなら何にでも適用することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +括弧と区分記号 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!かっこ@括弧 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!くぶんきごう@区分記号 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:括弧と区分記号" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXで使える括弧には、いくつかのものがあります。ほとんどの場合、単に +\family typewriter +[]{}()|<> +\family default +などのキーを使うだけで十分ですが、行列や分数のような大きな数式要素の周りを括弧で囲みたい場合や、幾重もの括弧を使いたい場合には、 +\family sans +数式パネル +\family default +の区分記号アイコン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" +\end_inset + +を使うべきです。例えば、行列周りの括弧を作るには +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left[\begin{array}{cc} +1 & 2\\ +3 & 4 +\end{array}\right] +\] + +\end_inset + +のようにします。下記の表現の左側は、区分記号アイコン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter" +\end_inset + +を使用して入力したもので、右側は +\family typewriter +() +\family default +鍵を使用して入力したものです。 +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +区分記号アイコンを使用すると、括弧は、中身の大きさに応じて自動的に大きさが変わります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +括弧を作成するには、左側と右側に使う括弧のボタンをクリックしてください。左右対称オプションを使用すると、選択した括弧型が左右両方に使用されます。選択した括弧は、 +ボタンフィールドの下に表示されます。片側に括弧をつけたくない場合は、空白ボタンを使用してください。LyX上では破線が表示されますが、印刷時には何も印字されなくな +ります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +既存の数式要素に括弧をつけたい場合は、根号と同様に、括弧の中に入れる要素を選択状態にし、左右に適切な括弧を選んで +\family sans +挿入 +\family default +をクリックしてください。選択した要素の周りに括弧が描かれます。最もよく使われる括弧対(両側とも丸括弧・角括弧・波括弧のもの)は、短絡キーを使用して、素早く入力す +ることができます。例えば、両側を伸縮可能な丸括弧にするには、括弧をつける対象を選択して +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-delim ( )" +\end_inset + +を打鍵してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +配列と多行数式 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!はいれつ@配列 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!ぎょうれつ@行列 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!ふくすうぎょう@複数行------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXでは、行列は数式パネルの行列ボタン +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show mathmatrix" +\end_inset + + +\family default +を使用して入力します。これを押すとダイアログが表示されますので、行数と列数を指定してください。以下が作例です。 +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\left(\begin{array}{ccc} +1 & 2 & 3\\ +4 & 5 & 6\\ +7 & 8 & 9 +\end{array}\right) +\] + +\end_inset + +括弧は自動ではつきませんので、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:括弧と区分記号" + +\end_inset + +節で述べられている方法でつけてください。行列を作成する際には、各列を左揃えにするか、右揃えにするか、中央揃えにするかを指定することができます。この配置は、 +\family sans +æ°´å¹³ +\family default +ボックスに「 +\family sans +l +\family default +」「 +\family sans +c +\family default +」「 +\family sans +r +\family default +」の各文字を入力することで指定できます。LyXの既定値は各列とも「 +\family sans +c +\family default +」になっています。例えば、「 +\family sans +lrc +\family default +」という文字列を入れると、各文字がそれぞれの列に対応するので、第1列を左揃え、第2列を中央揃え、第3列の右揃えにすることになります。この出力は以下のようになりま +す。 +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +\begin{array}{lcr} +\mbox{この} & \mbox{この} & \mbox{この}\\ +\mbox{列は} & \mbox{列は} & \mbox{列は}\\ +\mbox{左揃えです} & \mbox{中央揃えです} & \mbox{右揃えです} +\end{array} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +既存の行列に行を追加するには、カーソルを行列内に置いて +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +を押してください。列の追加や削除は +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +数式 +\family default +メニューか数式ツールバーを使用してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式には、他にも場合分けのような配列を使用することができます。これは、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Cases環境 +\family default +メニューか +\series bold + +\backslash +cases +\series default +コマンドで作成することができます。以下がその例です。 +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\begin{cases} +-1 & x<0\\ +0 & x=0\\ +1 & x>0 +\end{cases} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + +多行数式は、数式内で +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +を押すことで作成することができます。空の数式では、各列を表す3つの青い枠が表示されます。空でない数式内で +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +を押すと、関係子（等号「＝」など）の前の部分は自動的に第1列に入れられ、関係子が第2列、残りが第3列に入れられます。新規の行は、さらに +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "newline-insert newline" +\end_inset + +を押すたびに追加されます。多行数式は、つねに別行立てです。以下がその例です。 +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\ +a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared} +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +中央の列は関係子用にデザインされていますので、この列の要素は、以下のように少し小さい大きさで印字されることに注意してください。 +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray*} +\frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} +\end{eqnarray*} + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここで述べた多行数式の型は +\family typewriter +eqnarray +\family default +と呼ばれるものです。例えば、 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand eqref +reference "eq:asquared" + +\end_inset + +式よりも美しい行間が欲しい場合など、状況によっては、より適した複数行型が他にあります。他の型に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:AMS数式型" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +数式番号と参照 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!ばんごう@------番号 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!さんしょう@------参照 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:数式番号と参照" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式に番号をつけるには、数式内にカーソルを置いて、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Number +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Whole +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Formula +\family default +\lang japanese +ーか短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + +を使用してください。 +\lang english +The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses. + The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated +\lang japanese +。出力における数式番号の配置と形式は、文書クラスに依存します。この文書では、数式番号は、章番号とともに、ピリオドのあとに印字されます。 +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{equation} +1+1=2. +\end{equation} + +\end_inset + +付番数式の中で +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + +と押すと、番号を消すことができます。番号付けは別行立て数式でしかできません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +多行数式では、行ごとに番号をつけることができます。 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Number +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +This +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Line +\family default +\lang japanese +ーや短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-line-toggle" +\end_inset + +を使用すると、以下のように、カーソルがある行の番号だけを付けたり消したりすることができます。 +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +1 & = & 3-2\\ +2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\ +4 & \leq & 7 +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +全てに行に番号をつけるには、 +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "math-number-toggle" +\end_inset + +を使用します。別行立て数式の番号はすべて、ラベルを使って参照することができます。ラベルは、カーソルが数式内にあるときに、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ラベル +\family default +メニューを使うと( +\lang english +toolbar button +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + +)、ラベルを入力するダイアログが開きますので、そこで挿入することができます。このとき、ラベルの冒頭部を表示のとおり「 +\family sans +eq: +\family default +」にしておく方が、文書内にたくさんのラベルがあふれてしまったときにラベル型を判別する助けとなるので、望ましいでしょう。以下の例では、第2行に「eq:tanhEx +p」というラベルをつけています。 +\begin_inset Formula +\begin{eqnarray} +\tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\ + & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp} +\end{eqnarray} + +\end_inset + +ラベル行はすべて自動的に付番されますので、LyX中では、ラベルは数式番号の場所に位置取りを示す「#」で表示されます。ラベルのついた数式は、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +相互参照 +\family default +メニューを開くと( +\lang english +toolbar button +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +)、参照したいラベルを選択するダイアログが現れますので、これを使って参照することができます。参照は、以下のように、LyX中では灰色の相互参照ボックスとして表示さ +れ、出力では数式番号が出力されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これは第( +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "eq:tanhExp" + +\end_inset + +)式の相互参照です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXの相互参照ボックスの設定については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:相互参照" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。ラベルを削除するには、ラベル付きの数式の終端にカーソルを置き、 +\family sans +Del +\family default +を打鍵してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ユーザー定義の数式マクロ +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!まくろ@------マクロ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXでは、数式用に自前のマクロを定義することができるので、同じ形の数式が文書中に何度も現れるときには、たいへん便利です。数式マクロは、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +数式篇 +\emph default +』の +\emph on +数式マクロ +\emph default +の節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +微調整 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +書体 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式 ! しょたい@書体 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文字の標準フォントはイタリック体であり、数字の標準フォントはローマン体です。数式中でフォントを指定するには、数式パネルの +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\font" +\end_inset + + +\family default +ボタンを使用するか、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:書体とそれに対応するコマンド" + +\end_inset + +表に掲げてあるコマンドを直接入力してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:書体とそれに対応するコマンド" + +\end_inset + +書体とそれに対応するコマンド +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +フォント +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeXコマンド +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathrm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathtt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathbb +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathfrak +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\emph on +\begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathcal +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +mathsf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\family sans +\series default +Blackboard体 +\family default +と +\family sans +Calligraphic体 +\family default +では、大文字しか印字できないことに注意してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +書体を指定すると、青い枠が数式中に表示されます。この枠中の文字はすべて、指定した書体で印字されます。枠中で +\family sans +スペース +\family default +を押すとカーソルが枠外に出てしまうので、枠中で空白が欲しい場合には、保護された空白を使用しなくてはなりません。以下は、自然数の集合を表すのに +\family sans +Blackboard体 +\family default +の「N」が使用されている例です。 +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\sqrt{x}\;;\; x\in\mathbb{N} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +書体は入れ子にすることが可能ですが、混乱の元になることがあります。例えば +\begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$ +\end_inset + +のように、 +\family sans +タイプライタ体 +\family default +の枠内に +\family sans +Fraktur体 +\family default +の文字を入れることは可能ですが、この機能は使用しない方が望ましいでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +書体は +\begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$ +\end_inset + +に見られるように、ギリシャ文字には効力がありません。またギリシャ文字を太字にするには、 +\series bold + +\backslash +boldsymbol +\series default +コマンドのみが有効です。これは、他の書体コマンドと同様に動作します。例： +\begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$ +\end_inset + +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +boldsymbol +\series default +コマンドは、すべての記号や文字・数字に有効です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +他にも +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文字形式 +\family default +メニューから、多くのフォント・オプションが利用できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +数式内文章 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式 ! ぶんしょう@文章 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +書体は、いくつかの文字をある特定のフォントにするには便利ですが、文章を入れるには向いていません。比較的長い文章を入力するには、 +\family sans +数式パネル +\family default +の中の +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\font" +\end_inset + + +\family default +ボタンにある項目「 +\family sans +標準テキストモード +\family default +」（あるいは短絡キー +\family sans +Alt-M +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +M +\family default +）を選択して得られる、数式内文章を使用してください。LyX内では、数式内文章は、青色ではなく黒色で表示されます。数式内文章では、通常の本文と同様に空白やアクセン +トが使用できます。以下の例をご覧ください。 +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +f(x)=\begin{cases} +x & \mbox{もし私がそう言った場合}\\ +-x & \textrm{unter Umständen（場合によっては）} +\end{cases} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +フォント寸法 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式 ! ふぉんとすんぽう@フォント寸法 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式モードで使用されるフォントには、4つのフォント形式（相対寸法）がありますが、ほとんどの状況下で、これらは自動的に選択されます。これらのフォント形式は、それぞ +れ +\family sans +textstyle +\family default +・ +\family sans +displaystyle +\family default +・ +\family sans +scriptstyle +\family default +・ +\family sans +scriptscriptstyle +\family default +と呼ばれています。 +\family sans +textstyle +\family default +と +\family sans +displaystyle +\family default +においては、ほとんどの文字が同じ大きさですが、関数・下付き文字・上付き文字などは +\family sans +displaystyle +\family default +の方が大きくなっています。状況に応じて伸縮するいくつかの演算子を除くすべての文字は、LaTeXが適切と判断する形式に設定されます。これらの設定は、数式パネルボタ +ン +\family sans + +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-insert \\style" +\end_inset + + +\family default +を使用することで上書きすることができます。選択した寸法用の枠が生成されるので、その中に数式要素を入力します。例えば、通常 +\family sans +textstyle +\family default +で表示される +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$ +\end_inset + +を、 +\family sans +displaystyle +\family default +で大きく +\begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$ +\end_inset + +と表示するように設定することができます。4つの形式の例を以下に挙げます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +(1) +\begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$ +\end_inset + + (2) +\begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$ +\end_inset + + (3) +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$ +\end_inset + + (4) +\begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらの数式モードのフォント寸法は、すべて相対的なものです。すなわち、数式挿入枠全体が、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文字形式 +\family default +メニューを使用して特定の寸法に変更されると、数式中のすべての大きさのフォントが、この寸法を基準にして調整されます。同じように、文書全体の基本フォント寸法が変更さ +れれば、すべてのフォントがこれに応じて調整されます。以下は、「極大」フォント寸法の中に挿入された数式の例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\size largest +\begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +AMS-LaTeX +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +AMSすうしき@AMS 数式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!AMS +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、アメリカ数学会（AMS: The American Mathematical Society ）の提供するパッケージをサポートしています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +AMSサポートを有効にする +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ダイアログの +\family sans +数学オプション +\family default +の下にある +\family sans +AMS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +mathパッケージを使う +\family default +チェックボックスを選択状態にすると、AMSパッケージが文書にインクルードされ、その機能が有効になります。AMSは、多くの数式要素に必要とされているので、数式部で +LaTeXエラーが出る場合には、AMSが有効になっていることを確認してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +AMS数式型 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:AMS数式型" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すうしき@数式!ふくすうぎょう@複数行------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +AMS-LaTeXは、数式型を複数提供しています。LyXでは、 +\family typewriter +align +\family default +・ +\family typewriter +alignat +\family default +・ +\family typewriter +flalign +\family default +・ +\family typewriter +gather +\family default +・ +\family typewriter +multline +\family default +を選択することができるようになっていますこれらの数式型の説明に関しては、AMSの取扱説明書をご参照ください +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +他のツール +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +相互参照 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +そうごさんしょう@相互参照 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:相互参照" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXの強みの一つは、強力な相互参照機能です。文書中のすべての節・フロート・脚注・数式・箇条書きを参照することが可能です。文書の一部を参照するには、文書にラベル +を挿入しなくてはなりません。ラベルは、参照位置を固定するとともに、参照用の名前をつけるのに使われます。例として、以下の箇条書きの第2項目を参照したいものとしまし +ょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +第1項目 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "enu:第2項目" + +\end_inset + +第2項目 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +第3項目 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +まず、挿入ラベルメニューを使うかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + +を押して、第2項目にラベルを挿入します。 +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/labelQt4.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + +のような灰色のラベル枠が挿入され、ラベルウィンドウがポップアップして、ラベル用文字列を入力するように促します。LyXは、項目の最初の単語に前置詞をつけたもの、こ +こでは「 +\family sans +enu:第2項目 +\family default +」を文字列の候補として表示します。ここで前置詞「 +\family sans +enu: +\family default +」は、「enumerate（連番箇条書き）」を表します。前置詞は、ラベルが挿入される文書内の場所によって異なるものが付き、例えばラベルを節見出しに挿入すると、前 +置詞はsection（節）の「 +\family sans +sec: +\family default +」となります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +項目を参照するには、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +相互参照 +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + +を使用して、そのラベル名を参照してください。 +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/referenceQt4.png + scale 85 + +\end_inset + +のような灰色の枠が挿入され、相互参照ウィンドウが現れて文書内のすべてのラベルが表示されます。見やすくラベルをアルファベット順に整列するなどして、「 +\family sans +enu:第2項目 +\family default +」という項目を見つけ選択してください。出力では、相互参照枠の位置に項目番号が印字されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +相互参照 +\family default +の代わりに、ラベルをクリックすると現れるコンテクストメニューにある +\family sans +参照としてコピー +\family default +を使うこともできます。すると、このラベルに対する相互参照がクリップボードにコピーされるので、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +貼り付け +\family default +（短絡キーCtrl+V）メニューを使って、現在のカーソル位置に貼り付けることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +右が相互参照の例です：第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "enu:第2項目" + +\end_inset + +項目（英語例：Item +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "enu:第2項目" + +\end_inset + +） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +英文などの場合は、改行が汚くなるのを防ぐため、相互参照名とその前の単語とのあいだには保護された空白 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:保護された空白" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を用いることを推奨します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +相互参照には、以下の6つの種類があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +<参照> フロート番号を印字します。これが既定値です。（例） +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +(<参照>) フロート番号をかっこの中に印字します。これは通常、数式を参照するのに使われる形式で、特に参照接頭辞「式」を省略するときに使われます。（例） +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand eqref +reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +<参照ページ> ページ番号を印字します。（例） +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand pageref +reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +<参照ページ> 「on page」という文とページ番号を印字します。（例） +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vpageref +reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label + is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”; + if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on + the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page, + it prints “on the next page”. + The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +<参照> +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +<参照ページ> フロート番号、「on page」という文、ページ番号の順に印字します。（例） +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand vref +reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like +\family sans +\series bold + +\family default +\series default +; otherwise it behaves like +\family sans +\series bold +on +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +\series default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +整形参照 自己定義の相互参照形式で印字します。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【注釈】 +\series default +この機能は、LaTeXパッケージの +\series bold +prettyref +\series default +または +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +が導入されているときのみ、使用できます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文書クラス +\family default +メニューにある +\family sans +相互参照に(prettyrefではなく)refstyleを使用 +\family default +オプションを使えば、この機能に使用するLaTeXパッケージを変更することができます。既定では +\series bold +refstyle +\series default +パッケージが使われており、 +\series bold +prettyref +\series default +は英語しかサポートしないので、こちらの方が望ましい設定になっています。書式は、文書のLaTeXプリアンブルで、 +\series bold + +\backslash +newrefformat +\series default + ( +\series bold +prettyref +\series default +の場合)か +\series bold + +\backslash +newref +\series default + ( +\series bold +refstyle +\series default +の場合)コマンドを使用して指定することができます。例えば、図への参照(ラベル接頭辞 +\family sans + +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +fig +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\family default +を持つもの)を全て変更するには、 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +newref{fig}{refcmd={ +\backslash +pageref{#1}ページにある図}}} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +のようなコマンドを使うことができます。書式についての詳細は、パッケージ取扱説明書 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "prettyref,refstyle" + +\end_inset + +をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +名称参照 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand nameref +reference "fig:歪められた二つの像" + +\end_inset + +のように参照のキャプションを印字します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書中参照されている部分の出力における参照番号と参照ページ番号は、LaTeXが自動的に計算します。参照の種類は、相互参照枠をクリックすると出てくる相互参照ウィン +ドウの +\family sans +形式 +\family default +フィールドで指定することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、 +\family sans +<参照ページ> +\family default +形式は、いつでも使用することができますが、 +\family sans +<参照> +\family default +形式は、文書中の付番されている部分でしか使用することができません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +節を参照したい場合には、ラベルは節見出しの中に置き、フロートを参照したいときには、ラベルをキャプションの中に置いてください。脚注の場合は、ラベルは脚注中どこにお +いても構いません。数式の参照は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:数式番号と参照" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +相互参照ウィンドウにある +\family sans +ラベルに移動 +\family default +ボタンは、カーソルを参照されているラベルの直前に移動します。すると、ボタンの文が +\family sans +戻る +\family default +に変わりますので、相互参照部にカーソルを戻したいときには、それを使うことができます。相互参照枠を右クリックすることによっても、カーソルを参照されているラベルの直 +前に持っていくことができ、ツールバーボタンの +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + +を押すと戻ることができます。。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ラベルを変更したいときは、いつでもラベル枠をクリックすることで変更することができます。変更されたラベルへの参照は、自動的にリンクを新しいラベル文に変更しますので +、この点を気にかける必要はありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もし相互参照が存在しないラベルを参照していると、出力では、 +\lang english +you will see in LyX “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and +\lang japanese +参照の代わりに二つのクエスチョンマークが印字されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +相互参照に関しては、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +』の「フロートの参照」の章に詳述されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +目次と他の一覧 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +もくじ@目次 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!こうぞう@------構造 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +あうとらいん@アウトライン|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +文書!構造 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:目次と一覧" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +目次 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:目次" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +目次は +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +一覧／目次\SpecialChar \menuseparator +目次 +\family default +メニューで挿入することができ、LyX中では灰色の枠として表示されます。枠をクリックすると文書構造ウィンドウが開かれて、目次項目が文書構造として表示され、各節を文 +書内で移動したり再配置したりすることができるようになります。したがって、この操作は第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:移動" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されている +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文書構造 +\family default +メニューの代わりとして使えます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +目次は、出力文書においては、自動的にすべての付番された節を列挙します。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:短縮タイトル" + +\end_inset + +節に述べたように、節見出しに短縮タイトルを宣言した場合、目次中では、それが節見出しの代わりに使用されます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:番号の付け方-深度" + +\end_inset + +節に、目次中にどの深さの節見出しまで載せるかを調整する方法が挙げてあります。付番されていない節は、目次には載せられません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +目次ウィンドウは、文書内の節を移動したり配置し直したりする文書構造エディタとしても使用することができます。それゆえ、目次ウィンドウは、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文書構造 +\family default +メニューを使用しても表示されるようになっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +図・表・アルゴリズム一覧 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:図・表・アルゴリズム一覧" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +図・表・アルゴリズム一覧は目次によく似ています。これらは、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +一覧／目次 +\family default +従属メニューを使って挿入することができます。一覧項目は、フロートキャプションとフロート番号になります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +URLとハイパーリンク +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +URL +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +はいぱーりんく@ハイパーリンク +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URL +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:URL" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +URL +\family default +メニューを使えば、ウェブページや電子メールアドレスへのリンクを挿入することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +右がURLの例です。（例）LyXのホームページは +\begin_inset Flex URL +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +URL文はつねに +\family typewriter +タイプライタ体 +\family default +で表示され、リンク文の形式を変更することはできません。URL文の形式を指定したい場合には、次節に説明するハイパーリンクを使用してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +URLはバックスラッシュで終わってはなりません。さもないと、LaTeXエラーになります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ハイパーリンク +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:ハイパーリンク" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ハイパーリンクは、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ハイパーリンク +\family default +メニューか、ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "href-insert" +\end_inset + +で挿入することができます。現れるダイアログには、ターゲットと名前の二つのフィールドがあります。名前は、ハイパーリンクに印字される文です。ハイパーリンク型は、 +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "LyXのホームページ" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + +のようなウェブリンク型か、 +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Lyx-docsメーリングリスト" +target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation" +type "mailto:" + +\end_inset + +のような電子メールリンク型か、ファイルへのリンクのいずれかです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ウェブリンクを挿入する際に、ハイパーリンクを通じてアプリケーションを起動するようにすることができます。この場合は、リンクターゲットに「 +\family sans +run: +\family default +」という前置詞を加えてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF出力において、ハイパーリンクは必要ならば自動的にハイフンで区切られ、DVI出力とPDF出力ではクリック可能になります。リンク文の形式を設定するには、ハイパ +ーリンク挿入枠を選択した状態にして、文字形式ダイアログを使用してください。以下は、ボールド・サンセリフ体のハイパーリンクです。（例） +\family sans +\series bold + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "LyXのホームページ" +target "http://www.lyx.org" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF特性ダイアログ（ +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +PDF特性 +\family default +メニュー）において +\family sans +色付きリンク +\family default +オプションが有効になっていれば、リンク文の色を変更することができます。例えば、この文書においてリンク文は、 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +urlcolor=blue +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +というオプションをPDF特性ダイアログの +\family sans +追加オプション +\family default +フィールドで指定することによって、青色に設定されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +付録 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふろく@付録 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:付録" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +付録は、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ここから付録を開始 +\family default +メニューで作ることができます。このメニューは、現在のカーソルのある文書位置から最後までを付録領域として指定します。この領域は、赤い枠線で表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +付録領域内のすべての章（あるいは節）は、付録として扱われ、大文字のラテン文字で付番されます。付録の小節は、この章番号の後にピリオドと小節番号をつけて表示されます +。すべての付録の節は、通常の節と同様に相互参照をすることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +（例）付録 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:謝辞" + +\end_inset + +、付録 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:書き出し" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +書誌情報 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょしじょうほう@書誌情報 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さんこうぶんけん@参考文献 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:書誌情報" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyX文書で書誌情報を生成するには、二つの方法があります。次小節で説明するように文献データベース +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +「BibTeXデータベース」として知られています。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +をインクルードするか、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:参考文献環境" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように +\family sans +書誌情報 +\family default +段落環境を使用して、手動で書誌情報を挿入するかです。この文書で使用されているような連番による引用以外、例えば著者・発行年による引用などを用いたい場合は、文献デー +タベースを使用しなくてはなりません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +書誌情報環境 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +書誌情報 +\family default +環境では、すべての段落のはじめに、番号のついた灰色の書誌情報枠がついています。これをクリックすると、ダイアログが開いて、 +\family sans +キー +\family default +と +\family sans +ラベル +\family default +を入力することができるようになります。 キーは、この文献項目を参照するのに使うシンボリック名です。例えば、この文書の書誌情報の二つめの項目はLaTeXに関する書 +籍ですが、本文書ではこの書籍のキーとして、その題名を縮めた「latexcompanion」を使っています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文献項目のキーは、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文献引用 +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" +\end_inset + +を使用して、参照することができます。こうすると引用参照枠が挿入されて、文献引用ウィンドウが開くので、選択できるキーの一覧から一つ以上のキーを選択します。挿入され +た引用参照枠には、その参照キーが表示されます。この枠を再度クリックすると、文献引用ウィンドウが開いて、参照先を変更できるようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +引用参照は、出力では角括弧に囲まれた文献項目番号として印字されます。もし項目に +\family sans +ラベル +\family default +が設定してあると、番号の代わりにラベルが印字されます。以下の二つの例は、最初がラベルなし、二番目が「謝辞」というラベル付きです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +（例1）LaTeXコンパニオン第2版 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +を見てください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +（例2）LyXプロジェクトチームのメンバーは謝辞 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + +に列挙してあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest + label via the menu +\family sans +Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Paragraph +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Settings +\family default + (toolbar button +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + +). + All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文献データベース（BibTeX） +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょじじょうほう@書誌情報!でーたべーす@データベース +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょしじょうほう@書誌情報!BibTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんけんでーたべーす@文献データベース +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:文献データベース" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ひとつの書誌情報をいろいろな文書で使用する場合には、文献データベースを使うのが便利です。 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +文献データベースは、単に論文データベースとそれぞれそのメモを管理するにも便利です。以下に言及したデータベースプログラムのほとんどは、文献情報に加えて、注釈や論評 +を保管しておくことが可能です。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +また、これを使うと、文献項目をすべて同じレイアウトに維持することがたいへん簡単にできるようになります。仕事の関連領域のすべての関係書と論文をひとつのデータベース +に収集しておくことも一案でしょう。このデータベースは、いろいろな文書から利用することができて、特定の文書の書誌情報一覧には、この文書で引用された項目のみが表示さ +れます。これによって、あなたは、どの論文・書籍を引用したかを記録しつづける労苦から解放されるのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このデータベースは、書誌情報を特定の形式で載せた、拡張子が「 +\family sans +.bib +\family default +」のテキストファイルです。形式は、 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "BibTeX-2" + +\end_inset + +やLaTeX関連書籍（ +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport" + +\end_inset + +）に説明されています。このファイルはテキストエディタで作成することもできますが、通常は、データベースの項目を生成したり編集したりするには、特別なプログラムを使用 +します。 +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +に、そのような文献データベース用のプログラムの一覧があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +データベースを利用するには、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +一覧／目次\SpecialChar \menuseparator +BibT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX書誌情報 +\family default +メニューを使用します。灰色の枠が挿入されてウィンドウが表示されますので、そこで読み込む一つ以上のデータベースとスタイルファイルを指定します。 +\family sans +文献一覧を目次に追加する +\family default +オプションは、目次に書誌情報を追加します。 +\family sans +内容 +\family default +ドロップボックスでは、データベースのどの範囲を出力するかを選択することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +スタイルファイルは、すべての文献項目のレイアウトを宣言した、ファイル拡張子が「 +\family sans +.bst +\family default +」のテキストファイルです。お使いのLaTeX頒布版には複数のスタイルファイルが収められており、出版社の多くが特定のスタイルファイルを提供しているので、それを利用 +すれば、レイアウトの心配をする必要はありません。もちろん、自作のスタイルファイルを作成することもできますが、それは熟練者向けの仕事です。 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +スタイルファイルの作成に関する情報は、 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文献参照の挿入は、前節の説明したように機能します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +データベースから書誌情報を生成するのに、LyXはBibTeXというプログラムを使用します。文書設定の +\family sans +書誌情報 +\family default +面か、LyX設定の +\family sans +出力\SpecialChar \menuseparator +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\family default +面で指定すれば、BibTeXの派生版のうち、どれを用いるかを選ぶことができます。以下の派生版のいずれかを選ぶことができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +biber これは、完全なUnicodeサポートと、制限のないメモリを提供しますが、(例えば +\series bold +natbib +\series default +のような)他の書誌情報パッケージでは動作せず、 +\series bold +biblatex +\series default +パッケージでのみ動作します。多言語テキストやラテン文字を使用しない言語に推奨されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex これが既定値です。7ビットでエンコードできない特殊文字を文献項目に使用することはできず、メモリに制限があり、 +\series bold +biblatex +\series default +以外の全ての書誌情報パッケージで動作します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +bibtex8 8ビットエンコーディングにエンコードできる全ての文字を使うことができます。 +\family sans +bibtex +\family default +よりも大きいメモリを使用することができ、全ての書誌情報パッケージで動作します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +BibTeXは、派生版を指定する部分の下にオプションを指定することで、制御することができます。オプションを書き加える前に、 +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +の取扱説明書 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + +を一読することを強くお勧めします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログで +\family sans +区分した書誌情報 +\family default +オプションを選択すると、節分けされた複数の書誌情報を入れることができます。この件と他のオプションに関しては、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +』の +\emph on +BibTeXによる参照文献のカスタマイズ +\emph default +の節に詳述されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +本文書では、書誌情報を生成する二つの方法の違いを示すために、書誌情報が二つ使用してあります。ご覧いただいてわかるように、データベースから生成された書誌情報は、文 +書内で参照されたデータベース項目しか列挙していません。ここでは、書誌情報中でドイツ語の複雑な参照キーを利用可能とするために +\family sans +alphadin.bst +\family default +というスタイルファイルを使用しています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +書誌情報レイアウト +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +しょじじょうほう@書誌情報!れいあうと@レイアウト +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +引用参照ダイアログでは、特定の引用体裁を設定することができます。この機能を使うには、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ダイアログの +\family sans +書誌情報 +\family default +の項にある +\family sans +Natbib +\family default +オプションを有効にしておかなくてはなりません。引用形式が設定されると既定値は上書きされます。引用形式全体を設定するには、前節の説明のようにBibTeXスタイルフ +ァイルを使用してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、引用参照ウィンドウでは、引用参照の前後につける文を設定することもできます。以下は、参照の直後に「第3章」という文を設定しています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +（例） +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "第3ç« " +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +索引 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さくいんのせいせい@索引の生成 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:索引" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +索引登録 +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "index-insert" +\end_inset + +を使用すると、索引項目が生成されます。「 +\family sans +索引 +\family default +」というラベルがついた灰色の枠が挿入されるので、その中に索引に現れる文字列を入力します。そのとき、カーソル位置の単語あるいは現在選択されている文字列が、索引項目 +の候補として表示されているはずです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +索引一覧は、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +一覧／目次\SpecialChar \menuseparator +索引一覧 +\family default +メニューで文書に挿入します。「 +\family sans +索引 +\family default +」というラベルのついた水色の枠が、出力中で索引が印字される位置を示します。索引一覧枠は、他のLyX枠とちがってクリック可能ではありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下の小節で、索引コマンドの概要を短く説明します。LaTeXの索引機構に関して詳細な説明が欲しい場合には、LaTeX関連書籍 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook" + +\end_inset + +を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +索引項目のグループ化 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さくいん@索引!ぐるーぷか@グループ化 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +索引項目は、読者が索引中をすばやく検索できるように、しばしばグループ化されます。例えば、記号付き箇条書きと連番箇条書きの検索項目を、ともに「箇条書き」という項目 +の下にグループ化したいものとしましょう。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:箇条書き（番号）" + +\end_inset + +節の箇条書き（記号）という索引項目のテキストフィールドには +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +箇条書き ! 記号 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +と入力し、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:箇条書き（記号）" + +\end_inset + +節の箇条書き（連番）という索引項目のテキストフィールドには +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +箇条書き ! 連番 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +と入力します +\series bold + +\begin_inset Foot +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +訳注： +\series default +和文の場合に、実際にこのような索引項目を作ってしまうと、索引一覧の各項目が、読みのあいうえお順ではなく、漢字コード順に並んでしまうために、索引の機能を果たさなく +なってしまいます。索引項目が読みによって整序されるようにするためには、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:索引項目の整序" + +\end_inset + +節の機能を使って、以下のようにつねに読みとともに索引項目を作成します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +（例） +\series default +かじょうがき@箇条書き!れんばん@連番 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\series default +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここで、エクスクラメーションマーク「!」がグループ化階層の区切りを示します。階層は3段階まで可能で、各索引階層は少しずつ字下げされます。上部階層の索引項目をあえ +て作る必要はありません。上の例で「箇条書き」の索引項目を作っていなくても、ページ番号なしで出力されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ページ範囲 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さくいん@索引!ぺーじはんい@ページ範囲 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +通常、索引項目は、索引登録された節のページ番号とともに印字されます。しかし場合によっては、ひとつの索引項目でより広い範囲のページを示したいときがあるかもしれませ +ん。例えば、本文書で段落環境を索引登録したいときに、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:段落環境" + +\end_inset + +節のはじまりに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +段落環境|( +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +というコマンドを含んだ索引項目を作り、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LyXコード" + +\end_inset + +節の終わりに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +段落環境|) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +というコマンドを含んだ索引項目を作成します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +「 +\series bold +|( +\series default +」および「 +\series bold +|) +\series default +」というコマンドは、それぞれ索引範囲の開始と終了を表します。また、同一の索引項目を文書中のべつべつの場所で登録することもできます。すると、ひとつの索引項目の下に +、索引登録された部分の各ページがコンマで区切られて列挙されます。本文書の「文書!設定」という索引項目が、その例です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +相互参照 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さくいん@索引!そうごさんしょう@相互参照 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、他の索引項目を相互参照することも可能です。例えば、本文書で「GIF」という索引項目（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:画像形式" + +\end_inset + +節）は、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +GIF|see{画像形式} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +という項目（中括弧はTeXコードとして挿入しなくてはなりません）を使用して、「画像形式」という索引項目を参照しています。中括弧に囲まれた文が参照される項目です。 +参照は、出力においてはページ番号なしで出力されます +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +訳註：「see 〜」（〜を見よ）は、これ自体コマンドになっているので、日本語の文脈でもこのまま入力しなくてはなりません。そうすると、出力においても英語で「see + 〜」となってしまうので、例えばこれを「→ 〜」に変更するには、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +メニューの +\family sans +LaTeXプリアンブル +\family default +において「 +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +seename}{→}」と宣言します。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +索引項目の整序 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さくいん@索引!こうもくのせいじょ@項目の整序 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:索引項目の整序" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +索引項目にアクセント付き文字を使用することは可能ですが +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +訳註： +\series default +文書言語が「日本語」になっているときは、アクセント付き文字を、アクセントを直接入力できる欧州言語用のキーボードなどで直接入力して使用することはできません。その代 +わりに、この小節で行っているように、LaTeXコマンドを使用してアクセントを入力してやる必要があります。しかし、ここで書かれていることは、漢字コード順と索引順が +一致しない日本語全般にそのまま当てはめることができます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +、こうすると項目が索引順の規則に従わなくなる可能性があります。索引項目はアルファベット順に整序しますが、LaTeX +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +索引の生成は、バックグラウンドで追加プログラムによって実行されます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:索引プログラム" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +には、各言語がアクセントをどのような順序で並べているのかがわかりません。例として、3つのダミーの索引項目「maison」「ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +" +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +is」「ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +^ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +itre」 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +" +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +is +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +^ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +itre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! mais@ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +^ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +itre +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を作りました。これらは、「ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +" +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +is」「ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +^ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +itre」「」の順序で整序されますが、これを「ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +" +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +is」「maison」「ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +^ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +itre」の順序にしたいのです。そのためには、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +前項目@現在の項目 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +というコマンドを使用します。ここの例では、「maison」を「ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +" +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +is」の後にしたいので、maisonの索引項目を +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +ma +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +" +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +is@maison +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +とします。前項目は実際に存在する項目でなくてもかまわないので、LaTeXに項目順序を告げる単語であればどんな単語を使ってもかまいません。例として次の小節を参照し +てください。 +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +索引の生成に +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +プログラムを使用している場合には、索引項目の順序が正しくないことがあります（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:索引プログラム" + +\end_inset + +節を参照）。たとえば、 +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文書フォント" + +\end_inset + +節のaeguill LaTeXパッケージの索引項目を、他のLaTeXパッケージの索引コマンドも「 +\series bold +LaTeXパッケージ ! +\series default +」で始まっているにもかかわらず、これらの項目の後に印字してしまいます。そのわけは、aeguillの索引項目が脚注にあるからです。この +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +のバグを修正するには、使用中の文書のプリアンブルに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +let +\backslash +OrgIndex +\backslash +index +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand*{ +\backslash +index}[1]{ +\backslash +OrgIndex{#1}} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +というコマンドを書き加えて下さい。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +索引項目のレイアウト +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さくいん@索引!こうもくれいあうと@項目レイアウト +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +索引項目の外観は、文字形式ダイアログを使用して変更することができます。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! これ@ +\shape italic +これはイタリックitalic体のダミー項目です +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +また、「|」という文字のあとにLaTeXコマンドをバックスラッシュなしで入れることによってページ番号を整形することができます。例えば +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +イタリック体のページ番号:|textit +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +と書くと、イタリック体のページ番号を得ることができます。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! いたりっくたいのぺーじばんごう@イタリック体のページ番号:|textit +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +通常、LaTeXコマンドはすべてバックスラッシュで始まりますが、ここの場合に限っては、「 +\series bold +|command +\series default +」は「 +\series bold + +\backslash +command{ページ番号} +\series default +」を意味します。LaTeXの文法について詳細を学ぶには、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX文法" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +単独の索引項目の書式変更は、索引生成プログラムに +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +を使用しているときにのみ機能します。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:索引プログラム" + +\end_inset + +節をご参照ください。 +\family sans +xindy +\family default +を使用している時には、これはボールド体またはイタリック体以外には動作しません。これは、 +\family sans +xindy +\family default +はそれが実行される前にセマンティックスが定義されている必要があるからです。詳細については、 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +after "p. 678 ff." +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +をご参照ください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +一般的にいって、上述のように直接ページ番号を整形することは望ましくありません。その代わりに、プリアンブルでマクロを定義し、それを使用するべきです。例えば、索引項 +目の定義を参照しているすべてのページ参照をイタリック体にしたいとすれば、それはユーザが簡単に定義を見つけられるようにするためかもしれません。だとすれば、プリアン +ブルに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +IndexDef}[1]{ +\backslash +textit{#1}} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +と書いて、索引項目には +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +索引項目|IndexDef +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +と書いてください。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だみーこうもく@ダミー項目 ! さくいんこうもく@索引項目|IndexDef +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +このようにする利点は、あとで気が変わったり、出版社が定義はイタリック体ではなくボールド体にしてくださいと注文をつけてきたりしたときに、すべての索引項目の各々では +なく、プリアンブルのマクロのみを修正すればよいからです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、索引全体のレイアウトを変更することもできます。例えば、本文書の索引一覧枠はボールド体に指定されているので、すべての索引項目はボールド体で表示されます。 + さらに複雑な要請に対しては、いわゆる +\emph on +索引様式ファイル +\emph default +（ +\emph on +Index Style File +\emph default +）を構成しなくてはなりません。詳しくは +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +あるいは +\family sans +xindy +\family default +の取扱説明書をご参照ください（ +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +索引プログラム +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さくいん@索引 ! ぷろぐらむ@プログラム +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:索引プログラム" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もし +\family sans +xindy +\family default +が導入済みならば、LyXは索引生成にこれを使用しますが、そうでなければすべてのLaTeX頒布版に含まれている +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +プログラムを使用します +\begin_inset Foot +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +は非常に古く、開発が停止しており、たくさんの欠陥があります。中でも、 +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +は英語だけを念頭に開発されているため、英語のみで書かれた単一言語原稿しか、項目を正しく整序することができません。この整序を修正する方法は、上述したとおりですが、 +英語以外で執筆することがある場合には、 +\family sans +xindy +\family default +を使用することをご検討ください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。これらのプログラムは、どちらもLyX設定ダイアログからオプションを渡すことによって制御することができます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:LaTeXの設定" + +\end_inset + +節をご参照ください。使用できるオプションの一覧と説明は、 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "makeindex,xindy" + +\end_inset + +にあります。このダイアログでは、索引を生成するのに第三のプログラムを指定することも可能です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +複数の索引 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +多くの分野において、2つ以上の索引を作成することが行われています。例えば、通常の索引の前に「氏名索引」を別に作る必要がある場合があります。LaTeXは、そのまま +ではこの機能を提供していませんが、この機能を追加するパッケージがあります。LyXは、複数の索引を生成するのに、splitidx +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeXぱっけーじ @ LaTeXパッケージ ! splitidx +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +というパッケージを使用しています。このパッケージは、最近のLaTeX頒布版には全て収録されています。ご利用の頒布版にない場合には、TeXカタログ +\lang english + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + + +\lang japanese +を参照してください。パッケージには、LaTeXスタイルが収録されているだけでなく、導入が必要な特定のプリプロセッサも含まれていることに注意してください。詳細は、 +パッケージの取扱説明書をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXが複数の索引を使用できるようにするためには、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +索引 +\family default +を開き、「複数の索引を使用する」を有効にしてください。その下の「利用可能な索引」一覧には、標準の索引は既に含まれていることに注意してください。索引を追加するには +、索引名を(見出しに現れるのと同じ形で)「新規」入力フィールドに入力し、「追加」ボタンを押してください。すると、新しい索引が一覧中に表示されます。お望みならば、 +一覧中の索引を選択してから「色を変更」ボタンを押し、新しい索引のラベル色を変更することができます。ラベル色は、LyX作業領域で、索引項目を索引別に区別するのに役 +立ちます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書変更を適用すると、新しい索引一覧が +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +一覧/目次 +\family default +に現れ、 +\family sans +挿入 +\family default +メニューには、定義した索引のそれぞれの索引項目が現れます。作業手順は、基本的に標準の索引と同じですが、以下のような追加機能があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +特定の索引項目の属性を変更したい時は、項目を右クリックしてダイアログを開くことで行えます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +索引を右クリックすると、索引型を変更することができます。さらに、索引一覧を「従属索引」として指定することもできます。こうすると、索引一覧の見出しが一階層下げられ +ます。例えば、bookクラスを使用している場合、標準索引の見出しの様式は「章」ですが、従属索引は「節」として定義され、他の非従属索引に入れ子にすることができます +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +記号一覧／用語集 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +きごういちらん@記号一覧|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +用語集 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ようごしゅう@用語集 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Nomenclature|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +用語集 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Glossary|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +用語集 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:用語集" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +場合によっては、文書中で使われている記号一覧や用語集を、短い説明とともに掲げておく必要があるかもしれません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +記号一覧や用語集を生成するためには、LaTeXパッケージの +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +が導入されている必要があります。これは、TeX Catalogue +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +か、お使いのLaTeXシステムのパッケージマネージャから見つけることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +記号一覧・用語集の項目は、カーソルを記号項目のあとに置いて +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +用語集登録 +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "nomencl-insert" +\end_inset + +を使用することで生成することができます。「用語」というラベルのついた灰色の枠が挿入されて、ウィンドウが現れ、用語項目の入力を促します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +用語項目には、主要な項目が2つあります。ひとつは参照したい記号・用語であり、二つめは記号・用語の説明です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +用語集ダイアログのすべてのフィールドに有効なLaTeXコードを入力しなくてはなりません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +用語の定義とレイアウト +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +きごういちらん@記号一覧 ! れいあうと@レイアウト +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式に記号が使われているとき、 +\family sans +記号 +\family default +フィールド中には、LaTeX数式と同じようにして定義をしなくてはなりません。例えば、「 +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +」を得るには、 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +と挿入します。記号「$」は数式の始まりと終わりを示します。ギリシャ文字用のLaTeXコマンドは、バックスラッシュ「 +\backslash +」で始まるその文字の名前です。大文字のギリシャ文字は、コマンドを +\series bold + +\backslash +Sigma +\series default +のように大文字で始めます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +（LaTeXの文法に関する短い入門が第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX文法" + +\end_inset + +節にあります。） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +説明文を整形するのに +\family sans +文字形式 +\family default +ダイアログは使えないので、LaTeXコマンドを使用しなくてはなりません。例えば、本文書での「 +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +」の記号項目の説明は +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +文字 +\backslash +textsf{sigma}のためのダミー項目 +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +となっています。コマンド +\series bold + +\backslash +textsf +\series default +はフォントを +\family sans +サンセリフ体 +\family default +にします。もし +\series bold +ボールド体 +\series default +が得たければ、 +\series bold + +\backslash +textbf +\series default +コマンド、 +\family typewriter +タイプライタ体 +\family default +を得るには +\series bold + +\backslash +texttt +\series default +コマンド、 +\emph on +強調体 +\emph default +は +\series bold + +\backslash +emph +\series default +コマンドを使用します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +用語集項目の整序順 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ようごしゅう@用語集 ! せいじょじゅん@整序順 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +用語項目は、記号定義のLaTeXコードによってアルファベット順に整序されます。これは、例えば数式記号の場合には、望ましくない結果を得ることがあります。仮に記号 +\emph on +a +\emph default + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +symbol "a" +description "文字「a」のダミー項目" + +\end_inset + +と +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature +LatexCommand nomenclature +prefix "sigma" +symbol "$\\sigma$" +description "文字\\textsf{sigma}のダミー項目" + +\end_inset + +の用語項目があったとしましょう。両者は、「 +\family sans +a +\family default +」と「 +\family typewriter +$ +\backslash +sigma$ +\family default +」によって整序され、文字「$」は整序順が「 +\family sans +a +\family default +」よりも前ですから、 +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +は +\emph on +a +\emph default +よりも前に並ぶことになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +整序順を制御するには、用語集ダイアログの +\family sans +整列用文字列 +\family default +フィールドを編集します。用語項目は、記号定義ではなく、この項目によって整序されます。ここの例では、 +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +のこのフィールドに +\family typewriter +sigma +\family default +と入力すれば、 +\emph on +a +\emph default +は +\begin_inset Formula $\sigma$ +\end_inset + +の前に来るようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +グループ化や整序項目の便利な利用法については、 +\series bold +nomencl +\series default +の取扱説明書 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + +を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +用語集オプション +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ようごしゅう@用語集 ! おぷしょん@オプション +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +nomencl +\series default +パッケージは、記号一覧や用語集の外観を調整するオプションを提供しています。以下は、それらのオプションの一部です。他のオプションに関してはパッケージの取扱説明書を +ご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refeq すべての用語項目に「 +\family sans +, see equation (eq) +\family default +」という文を加えます。ここで +\family sans +eq +\family default +は用語項目より前の最後の数式の番号です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +refpage すべての用語項目に「 +\family sans +, page (page) +\family default +」という文を加えます。ここで +\family sans +page +\family default +は用語項目が現れるページの番号です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +intoc 用語集を目次に加えます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +オプションをひとつないしそれ以上使用するには、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログの文書クラスオプションにコンマ区切りの列挙の形で加えてください。本文書では、 +\series bold +intoc +\series default +と +\series bold +refpage +\series default +オプションが使われています。 +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、以下のコマンドを用語集ダイアログの記述フィールドの最後に使用することで、上記の最初の二つのオプションと同じ動作を、特定の用語項目に対してのみ行うことができ +ます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeq +\series bold +refeq +\series default +オプションと同様 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefpage +\series bold +refpage +\series default +オプションと同様 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomrefeqpage +\series bold + +\backslash +nomrefeq +\backslash +nomrefpage +\series default +の短縮形 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +nomnorefeq, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefpage, +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\backslash +nomnorefeqpage 対応するオプションを解除する +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +「page」のような単語は、自動的に他の文書言語に翻訳されます。そうならない場合には、LaTeXプリアンブルに以下のように追記してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\noindent + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +eqdeclaration}[1]{, +\backslash +nobreakspace(#1) +\backslash +nobreakspace 式を参照} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +pagedeclaration}[1]{, +\backslash +nobreakspace{}#1 +\backslash +nobreakspace{}ページ} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +用語集の出力 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ようごしゅう@用語集 ! しゅつりょく@出力 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +記号一覧や用語集を出力するには、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +一覧／目次\SpecialChar \menuseparator +用語集 +\family default +メニューを使用します。 +\family sans +「用語集」 +\family default +というラベルのついたボックスが、出力中に用語集が印字される位置を指し示します。これを右クリックすると、記号の余白を変更することができます。以下の設定をすることが +できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +既定値 1 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +cmの空白が使用されます +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +最長のラベル幅 用語集の全項目中、最大の幅が使用されます +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ユーザ設定 任意に設定できる空白 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +印字出力においては、用語集の見出しは「Nomenclature」となります。この名前が満足でない場合には、プリアンブルで +\series bold + +\backslash +nomname +\series default +コマンドを再定義することで変更することができます。例えば、この名前を +\emph on +記号一覧 +\emph default +に変更するには、以下の行をプリアンブルに加えてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +nomname}{記号一覧} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +用語集プログラム +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ようごしゅう@用語集 ! ぷろぐらむ@プログラム +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:用語集プログラム" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、すべてのLaTeX頒布版に含まれている +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +プログラムを、用語集を生成するのに使用します。LyXの設定ダイアログを使って、他のプログラムを指定したり、 +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +にオプションを追加して制御したりすることができます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX-設定" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。使用できるオプションは、 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "nomencl,makeindex" + +\end_inset + +に説明とともに列挙されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +派生枝 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +はせいし@派生枝 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書 ! はせいし@派生枝 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:派生枝" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +出力において、文書の一部を隠した方が便利なことがあります。例えば、試験を課そうとしている教師は、とうぜん学生たちに答を見られたくないわけですが、質問と解答が同じ +文書にあれば、試験の採点者の仕事ははるかに楽になります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このような場合に、LyXでは、文を派生枝に分けて置いておくことができます。すると当該文は、その派生枝が有効にされたときのみ出力に現れるようになります。派生枝を作 +成するには、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +派生枝\SpecialChar \menuseparator +新規派生枝を挿入 +\family default +メニューを選択する(新規派生枝を指定するだけの時)か、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログの +\family sans +派生枝 +\family default +に行きます。後者の場合には、派生枝の名前を変更したり、その有効状態やLyX内部での派生枝の背景色を指定することができるほか、派生枝有効時にファイルを書き出す際、 +ファイル名に派生枝名をつけるかどうかを指定できます。さらにこのダイアログでは、二つの派生枝を統合したり(一方の派生枝名を他方の派生枝名に改名するだけです)、文書 +の派生枝一覧に「未知の派生枝」(つまり、定義しないまま他の文書からコピーアンドペーストで文書に付け加えた派生枝)を加えたりすることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +派生枝の中に入るべき文は、派生枝差込枠の中に入れます。これらの枠は、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +派生枝 +\family default +メニューから派生枝を選択して挿入することができます。派生枝の有効状態は、あとから枠を右クリックすることで変更することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下の例では、質問文だけが現れて、解答派生枝は無効にされ、したがって出力には現れません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch 質問 +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +質問：最初のノーベル物理学賞受賞者は誰でしょう？ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch 解答 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard +解答：Wilhelm Conrad R +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +" +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ontgenです。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +派生枝 +\family default +で +\family sans +ファイル名後置句 +\family default +を有効にした場合には、書き出しの際、ファイル名に有効な派生枝名が追記されます。上記の派生枝を持つ「Exam.lyx」というファイルがあるものと考えてみましょう。「 +ファイル名後置句」が有効な場合には、「質問」派生枝と「解答」派生枝がともに無効ならば、PDFに書き出したファイルは「Exam.pdf」となり、「質問」派生枝のみが +有効ならば「Exam-質問.pdf」、「解答」派生枝のみが有効ならば、「Exam-解答.pdf」、両方が有効ならば、「Exam-質問-解答.pdf」となります。これに +よって、あまり労力をかけずに、文書の違う版をたやすく書き出すことができます。 +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式内など、派生枝を挿入することができない場所で条件付き出力を使用するには、各派生枝に特別なLaTeX定義を書くとよいでしょう。例えば、質問派生枝用に以下のよう +に定義し +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeXの文法への入門は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX文法" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +answer}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +解答派生枝用には +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +answer}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +のように定義します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch 質問 +status open + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +answer}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Branch 解答 +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +question}[1]{} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +newcommand{ +\backslash +answer}[1]{#1} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +すると、条件付き出力を得るのに +\series bold + +\backslash +question{ +\series default +\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\series bold +} +\series default +と +\series bold + +\backslash +answer{ +\series default +\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\series bold +} +\series default +を使用することができるようになります。以下の例では、 +\series bold + +\backslash +question +\series default +部分のみが現れます。 +\begin_inset Formula +\[ +x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}} +\] + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式中では、同様のことを数式マクロを使用して実現することができます。取扱説明書『 +\emph on +数式篇 +\emph default +』をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout + files (e. +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +g. +\begin_inset space \space{} +\end_inset + +any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.). + For this advanced usage, see the +\emph on +Customization +\emph default + manual, section +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +Flex insets and InsetLayout +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +). +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +PDF特性 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:PDF特性" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +PDFとくせい@PDF特性 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書設定ダイアログは、PDF特性メニューのなかで、お使いの文書のPDF出力用の特別なオプションを指定できるようになっています。ここで指定されるオプションのすべて +は、LaTeXパッケージの +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を利用します +\lang english +which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output. + This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a + table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced + part of the document +\lang japanese +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +一般 +\family default +ダイアログタブのヘッダ情報は、PDFにファイル特性としてともに保存されます。多くのプログラムでは、例えば著者が誰であり、PDFが何についてのものであるかなどを自 +動的に判別するのに、これらの情報を引き出すことができます。これは、PDFを文献整理目的で整序したり仕分けしたり使用したりするのに、ひじょうに便利です。 +\family sans +自動的にヘッダを補完 +\family default +オプションを有効にすると、LyXはヘッダ情報を、文書のタイトルと著者の設定から自動的に抽出しようと試みます。 +\family sans +全画面モードで読み込む +\family default +オプションは、PDFを全画面モードで開きますので、プレゼンテーションに便利です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +You can specify in the dialog tab +\family sans +Hyperlinks +\family default + how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences + are created. + The +\family sans +Break +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +over +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +lines +\family default + option allows long links to be split; +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +frames +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +around +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + and +\family sans +Color +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames; +\family sans +Color +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +links +\family default + colors the different links. + The default colors are: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color magenta +\lang english +magenta +\color inherit + for hyperlinks and URLs +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color red +\lang english +red +\color inherit + for links +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Labeling +\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000 + +\color green +\lang english +green +\color inherit + for citations +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +but you can change these in the field +\family sans +Additional options +\family default +. + For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If the option +\family sans +Backreferences +\family default + is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different + entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section, + slide or page where the entry is referenced. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +しおり +\family default +ダイアログタブでは、読者が文書内を動き回るのに便利なように、文書の各節のPDFしおりを設定するかどうかを指定することができます。しおりが、文書の節見出しと同様に +番号を振るかどうかを指定することもできます。開くしおりの階層では、PDFを開いたときにどの節階層まで表示するかを指定することができます。例えば、階層を2にしたと +きには、すべての節と小節が表示され、階層を１にすると節のみが表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF特性は、この文書でも使用されています。この文書の文書設定を見ると、 +\series bold +hyperref +\series default +の追加オプションが使われていることがわかるでしょう。これらの意味については、hyperrefの取扱説明書 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +をご参照ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +TeXコードとLaTeX文法 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:TeXコード" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +TeXコード枠 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Texこーど@TeXコード +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:TeXコード枠" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXはバックグラウンドでLaTeXを使用しているので、LaTeXコマンドおよび要素の多くをサポートしていますが、すべてではありません。LaTeXは、さまざまな +コマンドを提供するパッケージを数百も含んでいます。つねに多くのパッケージが更新され、新しいものが追加されます。事実上すべての問題に対してLaTeXパッケージが存 +在するので、これにはほとんどすべてのことを植字できるという利点があります。しかし、もちろんLyXは、最新の状態に付いていっているわけではなく、すべてのパッケージ +とそれらの全コマンドをサポートできるわけではありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +しかし心配は要りません。LyXではTeXコード枠の中で任意のLaTeXコマンドを使用することができるのです。TeXコード枠は、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Xコード +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + +を使用して挿入することができます(短絡キー +\lang english + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + + +\lang japanese +)。枠は左クリックで開き、右クリックから +\family sans +差込枠を閉じる +\family default +で閉じることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +TeXコード枠には、完全なコマンドを挿入することもできますし、不完全なコマンドを入れることもできます。不完全というのは、通常のLyXの本文を引数として使うことが +できるという意味です。例えば、単語の周りに枠を描きたいので、 +\series bold + +\backslash +fbox +\series default +というLaTeXコマンドを使用するものとしましょう。コマンド部分 +\series bold + +\backslash +fbox{ +\series default +をTeXコード枠に書き、枠を書きたい単語のあとに、閉じ中括弧 +\series bold +} +\series default +を二つめのTeXコード枠として書きます。二つのTeXコード枠の単語が、以下の例に示すように引数になっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ERT.png + scale 89 + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +と書くと +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これは +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fbox{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +枠付き +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + } +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +の単語を含む行です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +となります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +パラメタのないLaTeXコマンドの終わりでは、LaTeXがコマンドが終了したことを認識できるよう、スペースを挿入しなくてはなりません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +簡単なLaTeX文法入門 +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeX文法 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぶんぽう@LaTeX文法 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX文法" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +比較的大きな文書や書籍を執筆するとき、LyXがバックグラウンドで使用するLaTeXコマンドを若干は知っておくことが必要になります。LaTeXはコマンドに基づいて +いるため、あなたは文章を「プログラム」することができます。このことは、もしコマンドを正しく知っていれば、文書のレイアウトを毎回変えることができるという利点があり +ます。例えば、あなたがある製品の取扱説明書を書いていて、その締切が今日中だったとしましょう。しかし上司は、あなたの仕事の出来を褒めてくれたけれども、すべてのキャ +プションラベルを太字にしてくれと言うのです。取扱説明書には、太字になっていない図表のキャプションが何百もあります。もちろん、手動ですべてのキャプションラベルを一 +日で変えることは不可能です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +そこでLaTeXが力を発揮します。上に述べたように、すべての問題に対してLaTeXパッケージが存在します。まずどれを使うか見つけなくてはならないので、LaTeX +パッケージデータベース +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Catalogue" + +\end_inset + +を使って探すことになるでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +その結果、 +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +パッケージが必要とするものであることを知ります。パッケージを使用するには、文書プリアンブル（ +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +メニュー\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +\lang english +LaT +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preamble +\family default +\lang japanese +）で +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[オプション]{パッケージ名} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +というコマンドを使用して、パッケージを読み込まなくてはなりません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXコマンドは、かならずバックスラッシュで始まり、コマンド引数を中括弧の中に入れ、オプションを大括弧の中に挿入することになっています。また、すべてのコマン +ドが引数やオプションをとるわけではないことに注意してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここの例ではパッケージ名は +\series bold +caption +\series default +です。パッケージの取扱説明書を見たところ、 +\series bold +labelfont=bf +\series default +というオプションを与えると、すべてのキャプションラベルをボールド体に変更できることがわかりましたので、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +というコマンドをプリアンブルに挿入したところ、問題は解決しました +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +captionパッケージが提供する他のコマンドについては、その取扱説明書 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "caption" + +\end_inset + +を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この例のようなよく知られた問題については、文書クラスによっては、組込の解決策が用意されていることがあることに注意してください。例えば、 +\family sans +KOMA-Script +\family default +クラスを使用すると、 +\series bold +caption +\series default +パッケージは必要なく、代わりにプリアンブルに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont{captionlabel}{ +\backslash +bfseries} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +と書けば問題は解決します。したがって、比較的大きな文書を執筆しようとしているときには、使用しようと考えている文書クラスの取扱説明書を見てみた方がいいでしょう（ +\series bold + +\backslash +setkomafont +\series default +はひとつ以上の引数をとるコマンドの一例です）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +本文中に置かれたコマンドがコマンド以降の本文のみ、あるいはコマンド引数にとられた文のみに影響を与えるのに対し、プリアンブル内に置かれたコマンドは、文書全体に影響 +します。本文中にLaTeXコマンドを挿入するには、前節で述べたようにTeXコード枠を使用してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXとその文法について、さらに詳細を知りたい場合には、LaTeX関連書籍 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "latexcompanion,latexguide" + +\end_inset + +を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{fancy} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +一時的にページ様式をカスタムヘッダ行・フッタ行に変更する +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Header +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rightmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ヘッダ行を下記のように定義する +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Header +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Header +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +leftmark +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Left Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +thepage +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Center Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +LyXユーザーの手引き +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +マジックコード: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Right Footer +\begin_inset Argument +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ユーザ設定のページヘッダ及びページフッタ +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:ユーザ設定ページヘッダ" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書 ! へっだ・ふったぎょう@ヘッダ・フッタ行 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +へっだ・ふったぎょう@ヘッダ・フッタ行 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書にユーザ設定のヘッダ行やフッタ行を定義したい時は、まず、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログ中、 +\family sans +ページレイアウト +\family default +の中で、ヘディング様式を +\family sans +装飾的(fancy) +\family default +に設定する必要があります。次に、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +モジュール +\family default +メニューの中で、「ユーザ設定ヘッダ/フッタ行」モジュールを追加してください。このモジュールは、ヘッダ及びフッタの位置によって、以下の６つの様式を提供します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +左ヘッダ・中央ヘッダ・右ヘッダ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +左フッタ・中央フッタ・右フッタ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +通常、ヘッダとフッタは文頭で設定しますが、お望みならば、どこででも変更することができます。図 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "fig:ページレイアウト" + +\end_inset + +は、ページのレイアウトと、ヘッダ及びフッタ様式に設定した行がどこに表示されるかを示したものです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float figure +placement h +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\noindent +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +左ヘッダ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +中央ヘッダ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +右ヘッダ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ページ上の通常の本文はここに入ります。ランニングヘッダは本文の上に、(脚注を含む)ランニングフッタは本文の下に来ます。ヘッダやフッタは、多くの場合、ページ番号や +章見出しや会社のロゴ等が入りますが、フロートを除き、凡そなんでも使用することができます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +左フッタ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +中央フッタ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +右フッタ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "fig:ページレイアウト" + +\end_inset + +ユーザ設定のヘッダ行およびフッタ行を伴ったページレイアウト +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +\lang english +Note +\series default +: some document classes implement their own customized page headers and + footers if +\family sans +Page +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +style +\family default + is set to “Default”. + Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers + and footers. +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +定義 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ヘッダ行を定義する際は、３つのヘッダ様式をすべて指定してください。様式に書き込んだものは、奇数ページに表示され、そのオプション引数に書き込んだものは偶数ページに +表示されます。片面文書においては、オプション引数は使用されずに無視されます。様式の内容やその引数を空欄にしたままの場合は、出力中には何も表示されません。フッタの +定義も、ヘッダと同様に行います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +定義するに際しては、いくつかのLaTeXコマンドをTeXコードで入力する必要があります( +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Xコード +\family default +メニュー)。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +thepage 現在のページ番号を出力します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +Roman{page} 現在のページ番号を大文字ローマ数字で出力します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +roman{page} 現在のページ番号を小文字ローマ数字で出力します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +leftmark 通常は、現在の節番号と節見出しを出力しますが、章がある文書の場合には、現在の章番号と章見出しを出力します。これらは、通常左ヘッダに入れるので、 +「leftmark」というコマンドになっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +rightmark 通常は、現在の小節番号と小節見出しを出力しますが、章がある文書の場合には、現在の節番号と節見出しを出力します。これらは、通常右ヘッダに入れる +ので、「rightmark」というコマンドになっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +既定ヘッダ・既定フッタ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ユーザ設定のヘッダやフッタの既定値は、空ではありません。既定のヘッダには、章及び節のタイトルが入り、中央フッタにはページ番号が入ります。ヘッダやフッタから必要の +ない項目を取り除くには、そのヘッダ様式やフッタ様式を文書に設定し、空のままに放っておきます。つまり、フッタにページ番号が必要ない場合には、空の +\family sans +中央フッタ +\family default +様式を文書内に作成してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +外観 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ヘッダ及びフッタは通常のページには表示されますが、そうでないページもあります。例えば、表題ページや、書籍の部見出し・章見出しは、それ自身の様式を持っているので、 +これらのページにはユーザ設定ヘッダやユーザ設定フッタは存在しませんが、これはまっとうなことです。例えば、章見出しページには、章見出しが太い文字ででかでかと書かれ +ていますから、章の名前が入ったヘッダを印字する必要はないわけです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +ヘッダ及びフッタの装飾線 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +既定では、ヘッダの下に0.4 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ptの太さの線が引かれ、フッタ線は描かれません。これは、文書プリアンブル中に、 +\series bold + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +headrulewidth}{太さ} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +のようなスキームで、 +\series bold + +\backslash +headrulewidth +\series default +コマンド及び +\series bold + +\backslash +footrulewidth +\series default +コマンドを使用すれば、変更することができます。ここで、「太さ」は、 +\family sans +pt +\family default +や +\family sans +mm +\family default +のような標準単位を用います。線を消したい場合には、太さを0 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ptに設定してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +装飾線には色をつけることもできますが、これにはLaTeXの知識が要ります。どうしても必要な場合には、インターネットか書籍 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Mittelbach" + +\end_inset + +の第4.4節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +複数のヘッダ行・フッタ行 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ヘッダ行やフッタ行として２行以上が必要な場合、様式での定義に通常の改行を入れることで実現することができますが、既定のヘッダ高やフッタ高は１行分しかありません。そ +こで高さを広げるには、文書プリアンブル中で +\series bold + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +headheight}{高さ} +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +のようにして、LaTeX高の +\series bold + +\backslash +headheight +\series default +や +\series bold + +\backslash +footheight +\series default +を再定義してください。ここで「高さ」は、標準単位での高さです。どのくらいの高さが必要かがわからない場合には、とりあえずヘッダやフッタを定義して、PDFで文書をプ +レビューしてみてください。それから、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +La +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +TeXログ +\family default +メニューからLaTeXログファイルを開き、次の警告ボタンを押して、 +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +パッケージからの警告がないかどうか探してください。もし警告があれば、そのヘッダやフッタに必要な最小限の高さが報告されているはずです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +本用例 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この例は、ユーザ設定ヘッダ及びフッタで何ができるかをお見せするためのものです。これは例に過ぎませんので、実際の文書では使わないでください。この例では以下の定義を +行なっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +左ヘッダ +\series bold + +\backslash +rightmark +\series default +・非必須引数は空欄 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +中央ヘッダ 空欄・非必須引数も空欄 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +右ヘッダ 空欄・非必須引数に +\series bold + +\backslash +leftmark +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +左フッタ 空欄・非必須引数に +\series bold + +\backslash +thepage +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +中央フッタ +\family sans +\series bold +\color red +LyXユーザーの手引き +\family default +\series default +\color inherit +・非必須引数に「マジックコード: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$ +\end_inset + +」 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +右フッタ +\series bold + +\backslash +Roman{page} +\series default +・非必須引数は空欄 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\backslash +headrulewidth 2 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +ptに設定 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ヘッダやフッタには、フロート以外ならば、原則として何でも使用することができます。爪掛けのような特殊なものについては、 +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + パッケージの取扱説明書 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + +をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage clearpage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +pagestyle{headings} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\lang english +switches back to page style with the default headings +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +文書の断片プレビュー +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:文書の断片プレビュー" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +どうじぷれびゅー@同時プレビュー +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!ぷれびゅー@プレビュー +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXでは、完成文書がどのようになるかを、出力を見るための煩労でユーザーの思考を中断させることなく、見ることができるように、作業中の文書の各節を同時進行でプレビ +ューさせることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +必要要件 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +プレビューが動作するためには、 +\series bold +preview-latex +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! preview-latex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +（システムによっては単に +\series bold +preview +\series default +と命名されています）というLaTeXパッケージが導入されていることが必要です。もしこれがすでに導入されていなければ、TeX Catalogue + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +か、ご利用のLaTeXのパッケージマネージャで見つけることができます。 +\family typewriter +netpbm +\family default +パッケージから +\family typewriter +pnmcrop +\family default +プログラムを導入すれば、さらに美しい出力を得ることができます。Windows版LyXでは、このプログラムとLaTeXパッケージは、LyXと共に自動で導入されてい +ます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +プレビューの有効化 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もしLyX中に、例えば、数式のLaTeX出力を表示させたいとすると、 +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログの +\family sans +操作性\SpecialChar \menuseparator +表示 +\family default +にある +\family sans +画像を表示 +\family default +オプションを有効にし、 +\family sans +自動プレビュー +\family default +を +\family sans +有効 +\family default +にしてください。 +\family sans +プレビューの大きさ +\family default +とあるのは、大きさの倍率因子のことです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX, + set +\family sans +Instant +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Preview +\family default + to +\family sans +No +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +math +\family default +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +すると、LyXに文書を読み込んだり挿入枠を編集し終わったりすると、プレビューが生成されるようになります。すでに読み込まれた文書のプレビューは、 +\family sans +自動プレビュー +\family default +を有効にするだけでは生成され +\emph on +ない +\emph default +ので、プレビューを有効にするには、文書を開き直さなくてはなりません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +既に読み込まれた文書のプレビューは、 +\family sans +画像を表示 +\family default +オプションを有効にしても、直ちに生成されるとは限りません。この場合には、文書を開きなおせば、プレビューが生成されます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文書の任意の箇所 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式以外にも、例えば、LyXがまだサポートしていない文書の一部の回転などのように、プレビューを見たい場合があるかもしれません。この場合には、 +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +プレビュー +\family default +メニューでプレビュー差込枠を挿入し、プレビューしたいものを、この差込枠中に挿入するか貼り付けてください。カーソルをプレビュー差込枠の外に移すと、プレビューが生成 +されます。プレビューをクリックすると、プレビューを行ったものを編集することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +一例：回転させたボックスを生成するには、LyXがまだサポートしていないLaTeXコマンド +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default +を使用します +\begin_inset Foot +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +rotatebox +\series default +は、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +ボックスの伸縮回転 +\emph default +の節で説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。例えば、周囲の本文に合うように回転角を調整したいなどの理由で、LyX中に、TeXコードボックスではなく、回転させたボックスの最終出力を見たいものとしましょう。 +そこで、プレビュー差込枠を作成し、回転させたボックスに入れる文章を中にコピーします。下記がその結果です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +この行には、 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Box Doublebox +position "c" +hor_pos "c" +has_inner_box 0 +inner_pos "c" +use_parbox 0 +use_makebox 0 +width "1in" +special "width" +height "1in" +height_special "totalheight" +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +回転させた +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +枠付き文章と 数式 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$ +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +があります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +プレビューは、着色にも機能します。以下の例では、特殊な枠付き・色付きボックスが、LaTeXコマンド +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default +を使用して作られています +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +fcolorbox +\series default +は、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +着色ボックス +\emph default +の節で説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Preview + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fboxrule 1mm +\backslash +fboxsep 1mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +これは、色付きかつ枠付きのボックスの中にある文章です。 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXにプレビューが表示されないときには、上述の通り、プレビューが有効化されていて、プレビュー差込枠内のTeXコードが有効であることを確認し、そのTeXコードが +要求するLaTeXパッケージが、文書プリアンブル中で読み込まれているかどうか、確認してください。LyXがプレビューを生成できないとすると、ほとんどの場合、文書を +閲覧することも、LaTeXエラーによってできなくなっているはずです。TeXコードを使わなくてはならないけれども、コードが正しいかどうか自信のない場合、プレビュー +差込枠は、文書全体を閲覧しないまま、コードが正しいかどうかチェックするのに最適の方法です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaTeXソースコード +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +さらに、文書全体あるいは一部のLaTeXソースをプレビューすることもできます。 +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ソースを閲覧 +\family default +メニューを使用すると、ウィンドウが開いてLaTeXコードを見ることができるようになります。このウィンドウには、現在カーソルがある段落全体のソースを表示します。L +yXのメインウィンドウで文書の一部を選択すれば、（1段落以上を選択しているときには）選択部分のみがソースコードとして表示されます。文書全体をソースとして閲覧した +いときには、ソース閲覧ウィンドウにある、そのオプションを有効にしてください。 +\lang english +If you check +\family sans +Automatic update +\family default +, you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you + have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates + them all, not just the one which is open at the time. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +詳細な検索と置換 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:詳細な検索と置換" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ちかん@置換 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +けんさく@検索 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +はじめに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXの詳細検索・置換機能を使用すれば、LyX中の複雑で書式を含んだ文章の断片や、数式の内容を検索することができるようになります。これは、標準（簡易）の検索・置 +換機能の機能向上と位置づけられます。主な機能は、以下のとおりです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +平文検索と数式検索の両方が可能ですが、後者の場合には、LyXユーザーが通常行っている方法で数式を入力することによって為されます。数式全体を検出できるだけでなく、 +複雑な数式の一部分を検出することも可能です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +検索を書式非感応にして、検索文字列を任意の文脈・様式上（標準的本文・節見出し・注釈のほか数式も）で検出することもできますし、書式感応的にして、たとえば節見出しに +入力された単語のみを検出することもできます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +検索は、対象を指定した +\emph on +範囲 +\emph default +に広げることができ、編集中の文書の子文書すべてや、開かれている全ファイル、 +\family sans +\noun on +ヘルプ +\family default +\noun default +メニューから開くことのできる全説明書などを指定することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +置換は、大文字・小文字関係を保持することができます。すなわち、置換文字列の大文字・小文字が、検索に一致した文字列の大文字・小文字に合うように、調整することができ +ます（つまり、すべて小文字か、すべて大文字か、最初の文字だけ大文字で後は小文字か、など）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +基本的な使用法 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXの詳細検索・置換機能は、 +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +検索・置換(詳細) +\family default +メニュー(短絡キー +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + +)またはツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + +で起動することができます。すると、 +\family sans +詳細な検索および置換 +\family default +ダイアログが現れます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +文字列の検索 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +検索対象 +\family default +欄のLyXミニエディタに簡単な単語を入力し、その下の +\family sans +次候補 +\family default +ボタンをクリックして（あるいは単に +\family sans +リターン +\family default +キーを押して）その単語を検索してください。入力された単語は、平文モードと数式モードの両方で検出されるだけでなく、強調体・ボールド体・標準体のすべてと、節見出しと +本文の両方で検出されます。 +\family sans +リターン +\family default +を繰り返し押すと前方検索をし続けます。同様に、 +\family sans +シフト +\family default ++ +\family sans +リターン +\family default +を押すと後方検索を行います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +大文字/小文字を区別 +\family default +オプションは、検出中に、検索エディタに入力したのと同じ大小文字を持つものにだけ一致するようにします。 +\family sans +単語全体 +\family default +オプションを指定すると、単語の切れ目ごとにのみ一致します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +数式の検索 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$ +\end_inset + +であれ、より複雑な +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + +であれ、数式は、 +\family sans +検索 +\family default +エディタ中に数式を入力することによって検索することができます。数式検索中には、単独の数式も検出されますし、数式の一部や、その一部が入れ子になっている部分にも一致 +します。例えば、前出の各式は +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$ +\end_inset + +のような式の一部にも一致します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +様式感知検索 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、特定の様式を持った文章を検索することも可能です。そのためには、ダイアログ中の +\family sans +設定 +\family default +タブを表示させて +\family sans +様式を無視 +\family default +オプションを無効にした上で、 +\family sans +検索 +\family default +エディタに入力を行います。すると、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +通常の単語を入力して検索を行うと、強調体やボールド体の単語は検出しません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +強調体またはボールド体の単語を入力して検索を行うと、同じフェイスかつ同じ文字様式を持つ単語にのみ一致します。ただし、例えば強調文字は、単独で検出されるだけでなく +、より長い強調文に含まれる部分にも一致することに注意してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +節見出しに通常の単語を入力し、検出を行うと、節見出しに含まれる同じ単語にのみ一致します。また、節様式に加えて強調体やボールド体が検索文字に指定されると、これらと +同じ様式を持つ部分のみが検出されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +別行立て数式中の数式の一部には、別行立て数式中のものにのみ一致し、行中数式には一致しないものがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +置換 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +検索 +\family default +エディタに入力した文字列に一致する字句は、 +\family sans +置換 +\family default +エディタに入力した字句で置き換えることができます。次候補を見つけて置換するには、、 +\family sans +置換 +\family default +ボタンをクリックするか、 +\family sans +置換 +\family default +エディタの中で +\family sans +リターン +\family default +を押すか +\family sans +シフト+リターン +\family default +を押してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書中の一致する字句の場所に、LyXのあらゆる書式を用いた字句を置き換えることができます。この能力を用いた典型例は以下のとおりです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +ある単語を、特定の書式を持った同じ単語に置換します。例えば、「func()」という単語を、タイプライタ体の「 +\family typewriter +func() +\family default +」に置換します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +数式記号の表記法の書き変えを行います。例えば、「 +\begin_inset Formula $R$ +\end_inset + +」をすべて「 +\begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$ +\end_inset + +」にしたり(標準文の中に現れる「R」がすべて置き換えられてしまうのを防ぐために、 +\family sans +単語全体 +\family default +と +\family sans +大文字/小文字を区別 +\family default +オプションを有効にして、 +\family sans +設定 +\family default +タブで +\family sans +書式を無視 +\family default +オプションを無効にするとよいでしょう)、 +\begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$ +\end_inset + +を +\begin_inset Formula $x_{i,j}$ +\end_inset + +に、 +\begin_inset Formula $x[k]$ +\end_inset + +を +\begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$ +\end_inset + +に変更したりします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +進んだ使い方 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +正規表現(regexp)に基づいた検索機構が備わっています +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +正規表現のよい説明がWikipediaの以下の項目にあります。 +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。 +\family sans +検索 +\family default +エディタにregexp差込枠を挿入することで、正規表現検索を行うことができます。これは、カーソルが +\family sans +検索 +\family default +エディタ中にある時に +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +正規表現を挿入 +\family default +メニューを選択することで実行できます。regexp差込枠に入力した文字列は、正規表現一致規則にしたがって一致し +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ただし、表現は、整ったLyX中の語句に一致しなくてはならないという制約があります。つまり、LaTeXコードに一致するときに、{}の片側だけが含まれるような部分は +、一致させる表現に含まれてはなりません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +、regexp差込枠外の文字列は、文書中のまったく同一の文字列に対して一致します。regexp差込枠は、通常どおりカットアンドペーストできることに注意してくださ +い。この機能を使った例としては、以下のようなものがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +決まった分母を持つ全ての分数を検索する。例えば、 +\family sans +検索 +\family default +エディタに分数 +\begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$ +\end_inset + +を入力すると(分子の +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + +は全てに一致するという正規表現です)、この分母を持つ全ての分数が検出されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Enumerate +決まった様式を持つ全ての文章を検索する。例えば、 +\family sans +設定 +\family default +タブの +\family sans +書式を無視 +\family default +オプションを無効にして、正規表現 +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + +を入力し、それに強調体やボールド体を設定すると、全ての強調体やボールド体に一致します。また、記号付きないし連番箇条書きや節見出しに正規表現 +\begin_inset Formula $.*$ +\end_inset + +を入力すると、全ての記号付きないし連番箇条書きや節見出しに一致します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +最後に、regexp中の表現への参照は、通常どおり行うことができます。つまり、表現の一部を丸括弧()で囲むと、これは +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + +や +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$ +\end_inset + +で参照することができます(regexpモードでの +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash$ +\end_inset + +記号は、バックスラッシュ鍵を2回押すことで入力することができます)。たとえば、 +\begin_inset Formula $([a-z]+)[[:blank:]]\backslash1$ +\end_inset + +という表現は、単語の繰り返しがあればそれに一致します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +後方参照は、同じregexp内で使われるときでも、異なる複数のregexp内で使われるときでも機能することに注意してください。後者の場合、後方参照表現は絶対表現 +あり、例えば +\begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$ +\end_inset + +は、つねに入力されている全てのregexpのうち、最初の部分に一致します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +置換文字列での後方参照は、(まだ)実装されていないことに注意してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +スペルチェック +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:スペルチェック" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +すぺるちぇっく@スペルチェック +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXには、組込のスペルチェッカーがあります。 +\family sans +ツール +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +スペルチェック +\family default +メニューか +\family sans +F7 +\family default +キー、あるいはツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show spellchecker" +\end_inset + +を使用すると、現在のカーソル位置からスペルチェックが始まります。誤った(或いは未知の)単語が検出されるとサイドバーが現れるので、2行目の欄で、それを編集したり置 +換したりすることができます。未知の単語が検出された時には、その単語がハイライト表示され、その部分が見えるところまで本文がスクロールします。スペルチェッカーサイド +バーには、修正候補がある場合には、それを表示するボックスがあります。修正候補の一つをクリックした場合には、それが +\family sans +置換 +\family default +フィールドに転記されますが、ダブルクリックした場合には、その候補で直ちに置換が実行されます。未知ではあるけれども正しくタイプされた単語は、個人辞書に登録すること +ができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +既定では、使用される辞書ファイルは、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログで設定される文書言語によって決定されます。文書言語用の辞書を持っていない場合には、スペルチェックを実行しようとするとエラーメッセージが表示されます。ス +ペルチェッカーダイアログの一番上の欄で、いずれかの言語を選ぶことで、単語の言語を指定することができます。LyXは複数の言語を含む文書でも正しくスペルチェックを行 +うことができます。これは、各言語の箇所を正しくマークしており、対応するスペルチェッカー辞書が導入済みでなくては、機能しません。それが為されていれば、LyXは、自 +動的に適当な辞書ファイルを切り替えて用います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Foot +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +（訳註） +\series default +通常、日本語用のスペルチェック用辞書はないので、日本語はこの場合に該当します。例えば、スペルチェッカーが +\family sans +aspell +\family default +のときに +\family sans +代替言語 +\family default +を「 +\family sans +en +\family default +」にしておくと、文書言語が日本語でも英語版の +\family sans +aspell +\family default +を実行することはできます（ただし、 +\family sans +aspell (library) +\family default +では代替言語は使えません）。しかしながら、単語の区切りは空白で判断されるため、この方法では、英単語と周りの日本語のあいだに空白がないと、英単語が正しく検出されま +せん。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here +\lang japanese +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +There are 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files for each language. + To install a dictionary, copy the 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files into LyX's installation subfolder +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +dicts +\family default + and restart LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +さらに詳細な設定 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXの設定ダイアログの +\family sans +言語設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +スペルチェッカー +\family default +面では、以下の設定を行うことができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +綴り検証エンジン LyXでスペルチェックに使用させるライブラリを選択します。使用中のプラットホームに依存しますが、 +\family typewriter +aspell +\family default +・ +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default +・ +\family typewriter +enchant +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +enchant自体は、いろいろなバックエンドを設定できるラッパーライブラリです。詳しくは、enchantの取扱説明書ないしmanページをご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +が使用出来ます。Windowsでは、 +\family typewriter +hunspell +\family default +のみ利用できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +代替言語 本フィールドが空でないときは、LyXは、文書言語の如何にかかわらず、ここで指定された言語を、つねにスペルチェックに使用するようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +エスケープ文字 ここで、スペルチェッカーがエスケープする必要がある非標準文字を指定できます(例： ドイツ語のウムラウト)。これは通常必要ではありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +複合単語を受け入れる スペルチェッカーが「passthrough」のような複合単語を綴り間違いと判断しないようにします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +連続スペルチェック 入力するのと同時進行で綴りを検証します。綴り間違いには、赤点線で下線が引かれます。下線の引かれた単語を右クリックすると、綴り候補がコンテクス +トメニューに表示されます。そのうち一つを選択すると、綴り違いの単語が提案された単語で置換されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +注釈とコメントの綴りを検証する 有効にすると、出力されない文書内容の綴りも検証されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +類語辞典 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +るいごじてん@類語辞典 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Thesaurus|see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +類語辞典 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + } +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:類語辞典" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、多国語の類語辞典を提供し、LibreOffice,OpenOfficeやFirefoxと同じ類語辞典フレームワークを使用しています(つまり、 +\family typewriter +MyThes +\family default + +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +類語辞典ライブラリをLyXの一部として使用しています)。よって、LyXは、多言語で利用可能なOpenOfficeの類語辞典に直接アクセスすることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +本節では、新しい辞書の導入の仕方と、それをLyXで利用する方法を解説します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +類語辞典の準備 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family typewriter +MyThes +\family default +/OpenOffice類語辞典は、1言語あたり2つのファイルから成り、1つはデータを含む拡張子 +\emph on +*.dat +\emph default +のファイルと拡張子 +\emph on +*.idx +\emph default +のインデックスファイルです。ファイル名は、特定の言語の言語コード(例えば、英語の場合は +\family sans +en_EN +\family default +)を含むように標準化されています。例えば、英語ファイルは +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_en_EN_v2.idx +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +th_en_EN-v2.dat +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed on a Linux + system, these files should be already on your system. + On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be + installed. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here +\lang japanese +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\lang english +To install a dictionary, copy the 2 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +files into LyX's installation subfolder +\family sans +~ +\backslash +Resources +\backslash +thes +\family default + and restart LyX. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +類語辞書を使う +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +類語辞典を使うには、単語を選択するか、単語の直後にカーソルを置いて、 +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +類語辞典 +\family default +メニューかツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "thesaurus-entry" +\end_inset + +を使うと、ダイアログが現れて、関連しているとみなされる単語が表示されるので、単語の置換に使用することができます。提案語はカテゴリごとに分類されています。類語辞典 +は、同義語を表示するだけでなく、包摂語や被包摂語( +\emph on +tree +\emph default +に対する +\emph on +plant +\emph default +など)、複合語( +\emph on +tree diagram +\emph default +など)、反対語( +\emph on +men +\emph default +に対する +\emph on +women +\emph default +など)も分類とともに表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +言語はカーソル位置の言語によって自動的に選択されますが、ダイアログ中で切り替えることもできます。ダイアログ中ではまた、直接検索する単語を新しく入れることもできま +す。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +類語辞典は、フレーズを取り扱うことはできず(前出のtree diagramのように辞書にある複合語しか取り扱えません)、いわゆる見出し語形、すなわち辞書に現れる +形を使用しなくてはなりません(名詞については一人称単数直説法能動態、動詞については不定詞)。例えば、 +\emph on +reports +\emph default +や +\emph on +reporting +\emph default +のような単語形を引いても結果は得られませんが、 +\emph on +report +\emph default +では結果が表示されます。もっともよい方法は、単語の見出し語部分のみを選択すれば(例えば +\emph on +reports +\emph default +のうち +\emph on +report +\emph default +)、ダイアログの検索文字列を調整することなしに提案を得ることができ、おそらく置換も正しく動作するでしょう(選択部分のみが置換されるので残りの部分は元のままです) +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +変更追跡機能 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +へんこうついせききのう@変更追跡機能 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!へんこうついせききのう@変更追跡機能 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:変更追跡機能" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ひとつの文書を共同して作成するときには、他の人々が文書に加えた変更が強調表示され、変更を受け入れるかどうか決めることができると、この上なく便利です。この機能は、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更を追跡 +\family default +メニューで変更追跡を有効にすることによって利用することができるようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +すると文書に加えられた変更点は、下線とカラーで強調されるようになり、追加部分は +\bar under +\color blue +下線付き文章 +\bar default +\color inherit +、削除部分は +\strikeout on +\color blue +取り消し文章 +\strikeout default +\color inherit +のように表示されるようになります。色は、変更した執筆者によって異なります。色は、LyX設定ダイアログの +\family sans +操作性・色 +\family default +面で変更できます +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いろ@色 ! へんこうついせき@変更追跡 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +。執筆者と変更の日時は、カーソルを変更箇所にあわせると、LyXのステータスバーに表示されます。ツールバーボタン +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + +を押したときも同じ情報が表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +変更追跡が有効にされると、以下のような校閲ツールバーがLyXに表示されるようになります。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +つーるばー@ツールバー ! こうえつ@校閲 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上の校閲ツールバーは、左から右へ順に以下のボタンを含んでいます。 +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-track" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更を追跡 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-output" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator +出力に変更を表示 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +次の変更へ移動 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更を承認 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "change-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更を却下 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "changes-merge" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更を統合 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-accept" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator +全変更を承認 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "all-changes-reject" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +変更追跡機能\SpecialChar \menuseparator +全変更を却下 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +注釈\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X注釈 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-next" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator +次の注釈 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +校閲ツールバーは、変更を承認・却下したり統合したりするのに便利です。変更点を選択して、希望するツールバーボタンを押してください。変更を統合する際には、ウィンドウ +が現れて、現在のカーソル位置の次の変更に関する情報を表示しますので、特定の変更点をわざわざ選択する必要がありません。統合ウィンドウでは、変更を承認するか却下する +かを決定して次の変更点へ移動することができますので、この方法を使って、文書中の全ての変更点を確認することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ツールバーに注釈関連のボタンが二つあるのは、変更点を説明するのに注釈の利用が不可欠なためです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +加えられた変更を出力に表示するためには、 +\series bold +dvipost +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! dvipost +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +というLaTeXパッケージが導入されていることが必要です。これはTeX Catalogue +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +またはお使いのLaTeXシステムのパッケージマネージャから見つけることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +文書比較 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +ぶんしょひかく@文書比較 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +比較 +\family default +メニューを使用すると、異なる２つのLyXファイルを比較することができます。比較結果は、差異が表示され、かつ変更追跡機能が有効化された、LyXファイルとして出力さ +れます。比較ダイアログでは、 +\family sans +文書設定の複写元 +\family default +オプションを用いて、出力される差異表示ファイルに、どの文書から文書設定を引き継がせるのかを指定することができます。 +\family sans +出力における変更追跡機能を有効にする +\family default +オプションを有効にすると、変更追跡オプションの +\family sans +出力に変更を表示 +\family default +が有効になり、差異表示ファイルのPDF出力にも差異が表示されるようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +国際化サポート +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +こくさいかさぽーと@国際化サポート +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この節では、お使いになりたい言語でLyXを使う方法を説明します。西欧言語以外の言語の中には、当該言語用にLyXを設定する方法を説明したWikiページがあるものも +あります +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese,Lithuanian,Latvian,Mongolian,Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、言語以外に発音記号もサポートしています。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:特殊文字" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +言語オプション +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +げんご@言語!おぷしょん@オプション +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!げんご@言語 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログでは、お使いの言語用に、言語と文字コードを設定することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文字コード +\family default +ボックスでは、LaTeX出力用に使用したい文字コード表を選択することができます。言語既定値オプションは、ほとんどの場合適切に機能しますので、通常はこれを選択して +おくのがよいでしょう。他の文字コードオプションについては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:特殊文字" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +キーボード配置表の設定 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +例えば、米国向けキーボードを持っていて、英語ではない言語で執筆したい場合、別のキー配置を使用することができます。米国向けキーボードでイタリア語を書きたい場合には +、LyXでイタリア語キー配置を使うように設定できます。設定ダイアログでは、二つまでのキーボード配置表を選ぶことができます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:キーボード配置表" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。第1及び第2キーボード言語を選択することができるので、その後どちらを使用するかを指定してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +最後に、いくつかのキー配置だけを変更したり、あるいはまったく別のキー配置（例えばバルカン語、とか +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +（訳註） +\series default +よくわからない人は『Star Trek』を参照のこと。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +）を作りたいことがあるかもしれません。例えば、通常は米国向けキーボードでイタリア語を書いているけれども、ときおりドイツ語からの引用を入れたいかもしれません。その +ような場合には、自分専用のキーボード配置表を書いたり、既存の配置表を欲しい文字をサポートするように修正したりすることができます。この点やその他のカスタマイズに関 +しては、取扱説明書 +\emph on +カスタマイズ篇 +\emph default +に記載があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +\start_of_appendix +ユーザーインタフェース +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:ユーザーインタフェース" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この付録は、使用できるメニュー全ての一覧と、その各機能を説明しています。これは、ユーザーの手引で特別なトピックを探している場合の早見表として作られています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ファイルメニュー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +めにゅー@メニュー!ふぁいる@ファイル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +ファイル +\family default +メニューの下には、基本操作といくつかの応用操作が含まれています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +新規 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +新規文書を生成します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +新規（雛形使用） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニューを使うと、使用する雛形を尋ねられます。雛形を選択すると、本来、手動で設定しなくてはならないレイアウトの組み合わせが、自動的に文書に設定されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +開く +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書を開きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +直近のファイルを開く +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここの従属メニューは、最近開いたファイルの一覧を表示します。ファイルを開くには、そのうち一つをクリックしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +閉じる +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +現在の文書を閉じます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +全て閉じる +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +すべての開かれた文書を閉じます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +保存 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +現在の文書を保存します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +名前を付けて保存 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +現在の文書に新しい名前をつけて別のファイルとして保存します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +全て保存 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +すべての開かれた文書を保存します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +保存済み文書に復帰 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +現在の文書をディスクから読み直します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +バージョン管理 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +複数人で同じ文書を作業するときに使用しますor when one person wants to keep a careful archive + of changes。取扱説明書 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +LyXにおけるバージョン管理 +\emph default +の節で説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +読み込み +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +古いバージョンのLyXファイル・HTMLファイル・LaTeXファイル・NoWebファイル・平文ファイル・コンマ区切りの表形式平文ファイル（CSV）を新規LyX文 +書として読み込むことができます。これらのファイルは、新規のLyX文書として読み込まれます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +メニュー項目の +\family sans +平文 +\family default +を使うと、テキスト中の改行は新しい段落となります。メニュー項目の +\family sans +平文（行を連結して） +\family default +を使用すると、一続きの全ての行が、ひとつの大きな段落として読み込まれます。ファイル中に空白行があると、そこから別の段落になります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +書き出し +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:書き出し" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書は、さまざまなファイル形式に書き出すことができます。書き出したファイルは、元のLyXファイルのあるディレクトリに置かれます。メニュー項目は、導入状態によって +異なります。これは、LyXがシステム走査をしたときにどんなプログラムが見つかったかに依存します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下は、利用可能な項目のすべてです。これらのいくつかに関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節に詳述されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +CJK +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +L +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +yX +\family default + 日中韓（CJK）版LyX 1.4.xの形式 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +LyX 1.5.0以降、CJKサポートは完全にLyXに統合されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +DocBook +\family default + マークアップ言語 +\family typewriter +DocBook +\family default +で使用されるSGML言語で書かれたテキストファイル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +DocBook +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XML) +\family default + マークアップ言語 +\family typewriter +DocBook +\family default +で使用されるXML言語で書かれたテキストファイル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +DraftDVI +\family default + LaTeXのネイティブDVI形式。この形式は、文書中のファイルパスやファイル名に特殊文字や空白がある場合には適切ではありません。LyXでは、この形式は、 +\family sans +DVI +\family default +に書きだす前の前処理として内部的に使用されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +DVI +\family default + DVI形式 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + プログラム +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +を使用したDVI形式。UnicodeとTeXフォント以外の使用をサポートしています。 +\series bold + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default + いまのところ、すべてのDVIビューアがこの出力形式を適切に表示できるわけではありません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Graphviz +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Dot +\family default + プログラム +\family typewriter +Graphviz +\family default +経由でグラフによる可視化を行うのに用いられる、プログラミング言語 +\family typewriter +Dot +\family default +で書かれたテキストファイル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +HTML +\family default + HTML形式（HTML変換子は第三者製であり、すべての場合に機能するとは限りません） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +HTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(MS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Word) +\family default + +\family sans +MS Word +\family default +に読み込み可能なHTML形式。このため、数式はビットマップフォントとして埋め込まれ、 +\family sans +MathML +\family default +形式にはなりません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +( +\family default +LuaT +\family sans + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family default +eX +\family sans +) +\family default +プログラム +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +と互換性のあるLaTeXソースで書かれたテキストファイル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + テキストファイルに書かれたLaTeXソース。くわえて、文書中に使われているすべての画像は、 +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +プログラムが読み込み可能な形式（GIF・JPG・PDF・PNG）に変換されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(plain) +\family default + テキストファイルに書かれたLaTeXソース。くわえて、文書中に使われているすべての画像は、 +\family typewriter +latex +\family default +プログラムが読み込み可能な唯一の形式であるEPS形式に変換されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\family default +( +\family sans +XeT +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eX +\family default +) +\family sans + +\family default +プログラム +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +と互換性のあるLaTeXソースで書かれたテキストファイル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +LilyPond +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +book +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(La +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +TeX) +\family default + 音楽記譜ソフトウェア +\family typewriter +LilyPond +\family default +の文法に沿ったLaTeXソースで書かれたテキストファイル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +L +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +yX書庫 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(zip|tar.gz) +\family default + 文書と、そのコンパイルに必要なすべてのファイル(画像・子文書・BibTeXファイル等)を含んだ、zip圧縮ファイルまたはtar.gz圧縮ファイルを生成します +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +L +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +yX +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +z.y.x +\family default + LyX z.y.x版（「z」 and 「y」はバージョン番号に変換して表示されます）が読み込み可能なLyX文書形式 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +L +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +yXHTML +\family default + LyX内蔵のXHTMLエンジンを使用したHTML形式 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +NoWeb +\family default + 文芸的プログラミング言語 +\family typewriter +NoWeb +\family default +の書式に則ったテキストファイル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +OpenDocument +\family default + OpenDocument形式のテキストファイル。 +\family sans +LibreOffice +\family default +・ +\family sans +OpenOffice +\family default +・ +\family sans +KOffice +\family default +・ +\family sans +Abiword +\family default +などで開くことが可能（OpenDocument変換子は第三者製であり、すべての場合に機能するとは限りません）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(dvipdfm) +\family default + +\family typewriter +dvipdfm +\family default +プログラムを使用して変換するPDF形式。内部的にDVIファイルを生成し、それからPDFファイルに変換します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + プログラム +\family typewriter +LuaTeX +\family default +を使用したPDF形式。直接PDFファイルを生成します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default + +\family typewriter +pdflatex +\family default +プログラムを使用して変換するPDF形式。直接PDFファイルを生成します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2pdf) +\family default + +\family typewriter +ps2pdf +\family default +プログラムを使用して変換するPDF形式。内部的にPostScriptファイルを生成し、それからPDFファイルに変換します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default + プログラム +\family typewriter +XeTeX +\family default +を使用したPDF形式。直接PDFファイルを生成します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +平文 +\family default + テキスト形式 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +平文 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(ps2ascii) +\family default + テキスト形式。まず文書をPostScript形式に変換し、そこから +\family typewriter +ps2ascii +\family default +プログラムを使用してテキスト形式に書き出されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Postscript +\family default + +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +プログラムを使用して変換するPostScript形式 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description + +\family sans +Sweave +\family default + 統計プログラミング言語 +\family typewriter +R +\family default +を使用したLaTeXソースで書かれたテキストファイル。 +\family typewriter +R +\family default +関数 +\family typewriter +Sweave +\family default +を使用することで、LaTeX中で +\family typewriter +R +\family default +コマンドを使用することが可能になります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +もしDVI・PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex)・Postscriptのうち、ひとつでもメニュー項目から漏れていたならば、導入されているLaTeXを更新する必要があります。更新したあとには +LyXの再設定を行わなくてはなりません。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:LaTeXの設定" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lyxのさいせってい@LyXの再設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +印刷 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニューでは、文書をPostScript形式のファイルへ書き出したり、それをプリンタに送ったりすることができます。プリンタもPostScript形式の文書を +使用します。PostScriptへの変換は、LyXがバックグラウンドで +\family typewriter +dvips +\family default +プログラムを使用して行います。詳しい情報については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:ファイルを印刷" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +FAX +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニュー項目は、ファックスプログラムが導入されているときのみ表示されます（Windowsでは、さらにこのプログラムをLyXのPATH前置詞に登録しなくてはな +りません。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:パス" + +\end_inset + +節をご参照ください）。このメニュー項目を使用すると、 +\family typewriter +hylaptex +\family default +や +\family typewriter +kdeprintfax +\family default +のようなファックスプログラムへ使用中の文書を転送することができます。転送されるファイルの既定書式は +\family sans +PostScript +\family default +です。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:変換子" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、書式はLyX設定で変更することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +新規ウィンドウ・ウィンドウを閉じる +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXの新規インスタンスを開いたり閉じたりします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +終了 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +保存していないすべての文書を保存するように促してから、終了します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +編集メニュー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +めにゅー@メニュー ! へんしゅう@編集 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +元に戻すとやり直す +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:元に戻すとやり直す" + +\end_inset + +節に解説されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +切り取り・コピー・貼り付け・直近のものを貼り付け・特別な貼り付け +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:基本的な編集機能" + +\end_inset + +節に解説されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +差込枠全体を選択 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +カーソルの置かれている差込枠の内容を選択します。カーソルが差込枠の外にある場合には、文書全体が選択されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +全てを選択 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書全体を選択します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +検索／置換(簡易) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:基本的な編集機能" + +\end_inset + +節に解説されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +検索／置換(詳細) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:詳細な検索と置換" + +\end_inset + +節に解説されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +段落を上（下）へ移動 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これは、現在カーソルがある段落を一段落分、上に上げたり下に下げたりします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文字形式 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文字微調整" + +\end_inset + +節に解説されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +段落設定 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +だんらく@段落 ! せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落の配置や行間、ラベル幅の設定ができます。これらの設定は、カーソルのある段落に対してのみ有効です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、段落の第一行が字下げされるのを止めることができます。このオプションは、前もって、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログの +\family sans +本文レイアウト +\family default +面で、段落区切りに字下げを選択したときにのみ有効です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +表の設定と数式 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これら二つのメニューは、カーソルが表ないし数式の中にあるときにのみ、完全に有効化されます。ここでは、当該表ないし数式の特性を、変更することができます。表の特性は +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:表" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられており、数式の特性に関しては第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:数式" + +\end_inset + +章に述べられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +リストの階層を上げる／下げる +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この二つのメニューは、入れ子にすることのできる環境の上にカーソルがあるときにのみ有効化されます。これらは、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:入れ子" + +\end_inset + +節および第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:番号の付け方-深度" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、環境の入れ子の階層を上げたり下げたりします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +表示メニュー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +めにゅー@メニュー ! ひょうじ@表示 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +表示 +\family default +メニューの最下部には、開かれている文書が一覧表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +すべての差込枠を展開／閉じる +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書中のすべての差込枠を展開したり、閉じたりします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +数式マクロを展開／畳む +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +現在の数式マクロを展開したり、畳んだりします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式マクロは、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +数式篇 +\emph default +』に記述があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ソースを閲覧 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:文書の断片プレビュー" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられているように、現在の文書のソースコードを表示するウィンドウを開きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +メッセージを表示 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +コンソールメッセージを表示するウィンドウを開きます。これは、LyXのデバッグ(つまりこのプログラムのエラーを捕まえる)や、バックグラウンドでLaTeXが文書を処 +理するのに何が起こっているかを見るのに便利です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +表示 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニュー項目は、全体の設定(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節参照)か文書設定(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節参照)で指定した既定出力形式(例えばPDF)で出力を生成し適切なビューアでそれを表示します。閲覧プログラムは、設定で変更することができます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。既定の閲覧プログラムは、LyXが最初にシステム走査をしたときに、自動的に設定されています。既定の出力形式は、 +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default +です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +表示(他の形式) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この従属メニューでは文書を他の出力形式で見ることができます。には、文書の実際の出力を、外部プログラムで閲覧することができる各ファイル形式が一覧表示されます。出力 +形式を閲覧するためのメニュー項目は、システムの導入のしかたによって異なります。これは、LyXがシステム走査をしたときに見つかったLaTeXプログラムに依存するの +です。潜在的に出力しうる全形式は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:書き出し" + +\end_inset + +節に掲げてあります。少なくとも +\family sans +DVI +\family default +と +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(pdflatex) +\family default +のメニュー項目は、メニューに登場するはずです。これらのうち一つでも欠けているようならば、導入されているLaTeXを更新する必要があります。更新したあとにはLyX +の再設定を行わなくてはなりません。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:LaTeXの設定" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lyxのさいせってい@LyXの再設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +メニューを実行すると、閲覧プログラムが実行されます。閲覧プログラムは、設定で変更することができます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。既定の閲覧プログラムは、LyXが最初にシステム走査をしたときに、自動的に設定されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +更新 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニュー項目は、新しいビューアウィンドウを開くことなしに、既存の閲覧表示を(前節で述べられているとおり既定の出力形式で)更新します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +更新(他の形式) +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この従属メニューでは、新しいビューアウィンドウを開くことなしに、他の出力形式の閲覧表示を更新します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +親文書を表示 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニュー項目は、使用中の文書が他の文書、すなわちこの文書の「親」にインクルードされているときのみ表示されます(このトピックについての詳細は、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +子文書 +\emph default +の節をご覧下さい。この項目を使用すると、子文書からその親文書を見ることができるようになります。つまり、ある書籍の一章分である子文書で作業をしている場合、 +\family sans +表示 +\family default +はその章だけを出力するのに対して、 +\family sans +親文書を表示 +\family default +は書籍全体の出力を生成します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この関数で使用される形式は、全体の設定(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節参照)か文書設定(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節参照)で指定した既定出力形式となります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +親文書を更新 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニュー項目は、使用中の文書が他の文書、すなわちこの文書の「親」にインクルードされているときのみ表示されます(このトピックについての詳細は、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +子文書 +\emph default +の節をご覧下さい。この項目を使用すると、子文書からその親文書に切り替えることなしに、その表示を更新します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この関数で使用される形式は、全体の設定(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節参照)か文書設定(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節参照)で指定した既定出力形式となります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +画面を分割 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これは、LyXの画面を垂直または水平に分割します。これによって、異なる文書を比較するために同時に表示したり、同じ文書の違う場所を表示したりすることができます。三 +つ以上の文書を同時に表示するのに、複数回分割することもできます。分割表示をやめるには、 +\family sans +現在の表示を閉じる +\family default +メニューを使用してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +現在の表示を閉じる +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +分割表示を閉じます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +全画面表示 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニューを使用するかF11キーを押すと、メニューバーとすべてのツールバーが消え、本文だけが表示されます。さらに、LyXメインウィンドウが全画面表示されます。 +全画面表示から通常の表示に戻るには、F11を押すか、右クリックしてコンテクスト・メニューから全画面表示を解除してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ツールバー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +つーるばー@ツールバー +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:ツールバー" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニューでは、さまざまなツールバーの表示を設定することができます。すべてのツールバーと +\family sans +コマンドバッファ +\family default +は、表示したり非表示にしたりすることができます。 +\emph on +表示 +\emph default +の状態は、メニューに付くチェックマークで表されます。 +\family sans +校閲 +\family default +・ +\family sans +表 +\family default +・ +\family sans +数式パネル +\family default +・ +\family sans +数式マクロ +\family default +・ +\family sans +数式 +\family default +の各ツールバーは、これに加えて、 +\emph on +自動 +\emph default +の状態にすることができ、メニュー中で項目の後ろに +\family sans +(自動) +\family default +と表示されることで表されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\emph on +表示 +\emph default +状態では、ツールバーはつねに表示され、自動状態では、カーソルが特定の環境にいるときや特定の機能が有効になっているときにのみ、ツールバーが表示されます。つまり自動 +状態においては、校閲ツールバーは、追跡機能が有効になっているときにのみ表示され、数式ツールバーと表ツールバーは、カーソルが数式や表の中にあるときにのみ表示されま +す。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXツールバーとその中の各ボタンは、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ツールバー" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +挿入メニュー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +めにゅー@メニュー!そうにゅう@挿入 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +数式 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:数式" + +\end_inset + +章と取扱説明書 +\emph on +数式篇 +\emph default +に説明されているように、数式要素を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +特殊文字 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:特殊文字" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、以下の文字を挿入することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +記号 お使いのLaTeXシステムで出力することのできる任意の文字を挿入します。したがって、このダイアログの文字カテゴリの数と利用できる文字は、導入済みのLaTe +Xパッケージに依存します。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +設定ダイアログ（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:画面フォント" + +\end_inset + +節を参照）で指定できる画面フォントには、すべての文字を表示できるものがないので、記号ダイアログですべての文字が表示されるわけではありません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +省略符号 省略符号を挿入します\SpecialChar \ldots{} + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +句点 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:略語" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられているように句点を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +通常の引用 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +ダイアログの +\family sans +言語 +\family default +部でどのような引用形式が選択されているかに関わらず、引用符「 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + +」を挿入する。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +シングルクォート 引用符「 +\begin_inset Quotes ers +\end_inset + +」を挿入する。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +保護されたハイフン 改行から保護されたハイフン「\SpecialChar \nobreakdash- +」を挿入する。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +可改行スラッシュ 改行を許可されたスラッシュ「\SpecialChar \slash{} +」を挿入する。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +メニュー区切り メニュー区切りマーク「\SpecialChar \menuseparator +」を挿入する。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +発音記号 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +はつおんきごう@発音記号 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +げんご@言語 ! はつおんきごう@発音記号 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + いわゆるtipa差込枠を含む数式が生成されますので、そこにIPA発音記号を生成するコマンドを挿入することができます。この機能を使うには、 +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +というLaTeXパッケージが導入されていなくてはなりません。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +この機能に関する詳しい情報は、 +\series bold +tipa +\series default +の取扱説明書 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "tipa" + +\end_inset + +と以下のWikiページをご参照ください。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +整形 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、以下の整形要素を挿入することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +上付き文字 上付き文字を挿入します。（例）テスト +\begin_inset script superscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\lang english +a, b +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +下付き文字 下付き文字を挿入します。（例）テスト +\begin_inset script subscript + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\lang english +3x +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +保護された空白 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:保護された空白" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている保護された空白を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +単語間の空白 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:単語間の空白" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている単語間の空白を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +小空白 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:小空白" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている小空白を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +水平方向の余白 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:水平方向の空白" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている水平方向の余白を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +水平線 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:水平線" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている水平線を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +垂直方向の空白 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:垂直方向の空白" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている垂直方向の空白を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ハイフネーション位置 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:ハイフネーション" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられているハイフネーション位置を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +埋草 埋草を挿入します。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:埋め草" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +合字回避指定 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:合字" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている合字回避指定を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +整形なし改行 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:強制改行" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている強制改行を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +両端揃え改行 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:強制改行" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられているように、強制改行をして、改行された文章をページ枠まで広がらせる改行を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +新規頁 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:強制改頁" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている強制改頁を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +改頁 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:強制改頁" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられているように、強制改頁をして、改行された文章をページ枠まで広がらせる改頁を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +改段改頁 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:改段改頁" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている改段改頁を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +改段改丁 第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:改段改頁" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられている改段改丁を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +一覧／目次 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニューでは、さまざまな一覧を挿入することができます。目次およびアルゴリズム・図・表一覧に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:目次と一覧" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられています。索引一覧に関しては第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:索引" + +\end_inset + +節、記号一覧に関しては第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:用語集" + +\end_inset + +節、BibTeX書誌情報に関しては第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文献データベース" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +フロート +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フロートの挿入に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:フロート" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +注釈 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +注釈の挿入に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:注釈" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +派生枝 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:派生枝" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、派生枝差込枠を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ユーザ設定差込枠 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書クラスに依存した差込枠を挿入します。これらの差込枠は、ある文書クラスのレイアウトファイルに定義されているときのみ存在します。一つの例は、三つのユーザ設定差込 +枠を持つ文書クラス「article (elsevier)」です。取扱説明書 +\emph on +カスタマイズ篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +Flex insets and InsetLayout +\emph default +の節に、ユーザ設定差込枠の定義の仕方が述べられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ファイル +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +がいぶまてりある@外部マテリアル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、文書に他のLyXファイルの内容をインクルードしたり挿入したりすることができます。その詳しいやりかたについては、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +External Stuff +\emph default +の章にあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ボックス +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぼっくす@ボックス +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ミニページ" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているミニページ・ボックスを挿入します。LyXでサポートされているボックスの全型は、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +Boxes +\emph default +の章に詳述されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文献引用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:書誌情報" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、文献引用を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +相互参照 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:相互参照" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、相互参照を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ラベル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:相互参照" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、ラベルの挿入を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +キャプション +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +きゃぷしょん@キャプション +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ちょうしゃくひょう@長尺表 ! きゃぷしょん@キャプション +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +キャプションをフロートや長尺表に挿入します。フロートに関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:フロート" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。長尺表のキャプションについては、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +Longtable Captions +\emph default +の章に述べられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +索引登録 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:索引" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、索引登録を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +用語集登録 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:用語集" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、記号一覧または用語集を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +表 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:表" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、表を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +図 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:図" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、図を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +URL +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:URL" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、URLを挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ハイパーリンク +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:ハイパーリンク" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、ハイパーリンクを挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +脚注 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:脚注" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、脚注を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +傍注 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:傍注" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、傍注を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +短縮タイトル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:短縮タイトル" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、短縮タイトルを挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +TeXコード +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:TeXコード枠" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、TeXコード枠を挿入します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +プログラムリスト +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぷろぐらむりすと@プログラムリスト +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +プログラムリスト枠を挿入します。プログラムリストについては、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +Program Code Listing +\emph default +の章に述べられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +日付 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +現在の日付を挿入します。表示形式は、LyXのメニューで使用されている言語の日付形式に依存します。LyXにはさまざまな日付の挿入方法があり、取扱説明書 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +External Material +\emph default +の節に説明と比較があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +プレビュー +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +プレビュー差込枠を挿入します。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:文書の断片プレビュー" + +\end_inset + +節の説明をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +移動メニュー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +めにゅー@メニュー ! いどう@移動 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニューは、現在の文書に存在する章・節・図・表などを一覧表示します。これによって、文書内をすばやく移動することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +移動メニューには、以下の各項目もあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +しおり +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニューを使うと、ご自身のしおりを定義することができます。これは、大きな文書で作業をしていて、例えば第2.5節と第6.3節のあいだをよく行ったり来たりするような +ときに便利です。このような例でしおりを定義するには、まず第2.5節に移動して、 +\family sans +しおり1を保存 +\family default +メニューを使用します。次に第6.3節に移動して、 +\family sans +しおり2を保存 +\family default +メニューを使用します。すると以後、 +\family sans +しおり +\family default +メニューを使うか、キー割り当て +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "bookmark-goto 1" +\end_inset + +ないし +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "bookmark-goto 2" +\end_inset + +を使用することによって、簡単に移動できるようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +またしおりは、すでに開かれている別々の文書のあいだを移動することもできます。保存したしおりは、文書が閉じられるまで有効です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +次の注釈・変更点・相互参照 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +現在のカーソル位置の次の注釈や変更点、相互参照へ移動します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ラベルへ移動 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これは、カーソルが相互参照の前にあるときのみ有効です。カーソルを参照されているラベルの前に移動します(相互参照ボックスを右クリックして、 +\family sans +ラベルへ移動 +\family default +を選択するのと同じ動作です)。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +順検索 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この機能は、出力中の対応する箇所に直接移動することができるようにするものです。詳しい説明は、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +』の「 +\emph on +順検索 +\emph default +」の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +文書メニュー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +めにゅー@メニュー!ぶんしょ@文書 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +変更追跡機能 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +変更追跡機能に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:変更追跡機能" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eXログ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書を閲覧したり書き出すことによってLaTeXが実行されると、このメニューは有効になります。これは、使用したLaTeXプログラムのログファイルを表示します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これを使うと、バックグラウンドでLaTeXがどう動作したかを見ることができます。 +\emph on +熟練者 +\emph default +は、ここでLaTeXエラーの原因を見つけることができるでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +文書構造 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:移動" + +\end_inset + +節および第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:目次" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、目次・文書構造ウィンドウを開きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ここから付録を開始 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:付録" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されているように、このメニューは、現在のカーソル位置から付録を開始します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +圧縮 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +現在の文書を圧縮したり解凍したりします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +設定 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書設定は、付録 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:文書設定" + +\end_inset + +に述べられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ツールメニュー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +めにゅー@メニュー ! つーる@ツール +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +スペルチェック +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +スペルチェックに関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:スペルチェック" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +類語辞典 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +類語辞典に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:類語辞典" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +統計 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +たんごすう@単語数 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +もじすう@文字数 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +現在の文書あるいは選択部分の単語数および文字数を勘定します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +TeX情報 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Texじょうほう@TeX情報 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +お使いのLaTeXシステムに導入されているクラスとスタイルの一覧を表示します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +再設定 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Lyx@LyX ! さいせってい@再設定 | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +再設定 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +さいせってい@再設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニュー項目はLyXを再設定します。すなわちLyXが、LaTeXパッケージと必要なプログラムを検索します。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:LyXの基本設定" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +設定 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +設定ダイアログに関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:設定ダイアログ" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ヘルプメニュー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +めにゅー@メニュー ! へるぷ@ヘルプ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニューは、LyXメニューと同じ言語で、LyXの取扱説明書ファイルを開きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +LaTeXの設定 +\family default +メニューは、LyXが検知したLaTeXパッケージおよびクラスの情報を含んだLyX文書を表示します（第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:LaTeXの設定" + +\end_inset + +節もご覧ください）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ツールバー +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:ツールバー" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ツールバーの表示・非表示のしかたに関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:ツールバー" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、カスタム・ツールバーを定義することも可能です。この点は、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +』に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +標準ツールバー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +つーるばー@ツールバー ! ひょうじゅん@標準 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上掲の標準ツールバーは、左から右に向かって以下の各ボタンを含んでいます。 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +setlength{ +\backslash +LTleft}{0pt} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +これは、以下の長尺表で左揃えにするために必要です。詳しくは、取扱説明書埋込オブジェクト篇をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +段落環境のためのプルダウンメニュー +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace -10mm +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-new" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +新規 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "file-open" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +開く +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-write" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +保存 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show print" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +印刷 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show spellchecker" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +スペルチェック +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "undo" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +元に戻す +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "redo" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +やり直す +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "cut" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +切り取り +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "copy" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +コピー +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "paste" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +貼り付け +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show findreplace" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +検索／置換 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +( +\lang english +Quick +\lang japanese +) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +検索／置換 +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +( +\lang english +Advanced +\lang japanese +) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "bookmark-goto 0" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator +しおり\SpecialChar \menuseparator +元の位置に戻る +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-emph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +文字を強調（ +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文字形式 +\family default +ダイアログの機能） +\family sans +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "font-noun" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +文字を名詞形式に設定（ +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文字形式 +\family default +ダイアログの機能） +\family sans +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "textstyle-apply" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +現在の +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文字形式 +\family default +ダイアログの設定を使って文字を装飾 +\family sans +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-mode" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator +行内数式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +図 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "tabular-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +表 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-toggle toc" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +文書構造ウィンドウの入切切替（ +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文書構造 +\family default +） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "toolbar-toggle math" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +数式ツールバーの入切切替 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "toolbar-toggle table" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +表ツールバーの入切切替 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +追加ツールバー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +つーるばー@ツールバー ! ついか@追加 ------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png + width 100col% + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上掲の追加ツールバーは、左から右に向かって以下の各ボタンを含んでいます。 +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +既定値 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Enumerate" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +箇条書き（連番） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Itemize" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +箇条書き（記号） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout List" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +リスト +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout Description" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +箇条書き（記述） +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-increment" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +階層を下げる +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "depth-decrement" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +階層を上げる +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert figure" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +フロート\SpecialChar \menuseparator +図 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "float-insert table" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +フロート\SpecialChar \menuseparator +表 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "label-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ラベル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +相互参照 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文献引用 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "index-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +索引登録 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "nomencl-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +用語集登録 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "footnote-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +脚注 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "marginalnote-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +傍注 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "note-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +注釈\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Ly +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +X注釈 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "box-insert Frameless" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ボックス +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "href-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Hyperlink +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "ert-insert" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +T +\family default + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +eX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +数式\SpecialChar \menuseparator +マクロ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show-new-inset include" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +挿入\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +子文書 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "dialog-show character" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +文字様式\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\lang english +Customized +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "layout-paragraph" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +編集\SpecialChar \menuseparator +段落設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "thesaurus-entry" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +類語辞典 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +表示／更新ツールバー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +つーるばー@ツールバー ! ひょうじこうしん@表示／更新 ------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上掲の表示／更新ツールバーは、左から右に向かって以下の各ボタンを含んでいます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace defskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +表示 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +更新 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-view" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +親文書を表示 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\lang english +Document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "master-buffer-update" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +親文書を更新 +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + + +\lang english +Document +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +\begin_inset Info +type "icon" +arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync" +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +出力\SpecialChar \menuseparator +出力と同期 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/view-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +表示(他の形式) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/update-others.png + scale 85 + groupId toolbarbuttons + +\end_inset + +* +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +表示\SpecialChar \menuseparator +更新(他の形式) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +* これらのアイコンは、既定のアイコンセットを使用していない場合には、表示が異なることがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +その他のツールバー +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +変更追跡ツールバーに関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:変更追跡機能" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。表ツールバー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +つーるばー@ツールバー ! ひょう@表 ------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +に関しては、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +』に説明があります。数式マクロツールバーに関しては、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +数式篇 +\emph default +』に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +文書設定 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:文書設定" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぶんしょ@文書!せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書設定ダイアログには、文書全体の特性を設定する従属メニューがあり、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +メニューで呼び出せます。ダイアログ中の +\family sans +文書の既定値として保存 +\family default +ボタンを押せば、好みの文書設定を既定値として保存することができます。こうすると、 +\family typewriter +defaults.lyx +\family default +という名前のひな形が生成されて、ひな形を使用せずに新規ファイルを作ると、LyXがこのファイルを自動的に読み込むようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +このクラスの既定値を使う +\family default +というボタンを押すと、文書設定が、現文書クラスの既定値にリセットされます。この操作は、なかんずくクラスオプションやページレイアウト、連番、目次に作用します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ダイアログ中の各従属メニューを以下に説明します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +文書クラス +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、文書クラス・クラスオプション・グラフィックドライバ・親文書を設定することができます。文書クラスに関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:文書クラス" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +ローカルのレイアウト +\family default +ボタンを押すと、LyXの +\emph on +レイアウト +\emph default +フォルダにない、したがってLyXが文書クラスのレイアウトとして認識していない自製のレイアウトファイルを読み込ませることができます。レイアウトファイルについての詳 +細は、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +カスタマイズ篇 +\emph default +』の「 +\emph on +文書クラス・レイアウト・ひな形の新規導入 +\emph default +」にあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +クラスによっては、既定で特定のクラスオプションを使うものがあります。その場合には、 +\family sans +事前定義 +\family default +フィールドにこれらのクラスオプションが提示され、それらを使うかどうか決めることができます。既定のクラスオプションが何を意味するのか正確に理解していない場合には、 +いじらないことをお勧めします。グラフィックドライバは、LaTeXのcolorおよびgraphicsパッケージと、ページレイアウトパッケージに使用されます。 +\family sans +既定値 +\family default +を選ぶと、LaTeXパッケージの既定ドライバが使用されます。よくわからないうちは、既定値を使用することをお勧めします。 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\family sans +dvi2ps +\family default +・ +\family sans +dvialw +\family default +・ +\family sans +dvilaser +\family default +・ +\family sans +dvitops +\family default +・ +\family sans +psprint +\family default +・ +\family sans +pubps +\family default +・ +\family sans +ln +\family default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +のいずれかのドライバを使用したい場合には、まずお使いのLaTeX頒布版でこれらを有効にしなくてはなりません。 +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf" + +\end_inset + +の +\emph on +Driver support +\emph default +の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +使用中の文書が、子文書ないし下位文書である場合には、親文書を指定することが必要です。親文書を開かずに子文書が開かれた場合、LyXはここで指定した親文書を使用しま +す。親文書・子文書に関して、詳しくは、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +』の『 +\emph on +子文書 +\emph default +』の節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、日付を抑制したり、相互参照用のLaTeXパッケージに +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LaTeXぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +ではなく +\series bold +refstyle +\series default +を用いるオプションもあります。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:相互参照" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +子文書 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この細目メニューは、文書中に子文書があるときにのみ表示されます。詳細については、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +埋込オブジェクト篇 +\emph default +』の「 +\emph on +子文書 +\emph default +」の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +モジュール +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +モジュールに関しては第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:モジュール" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ローカルレイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +解説は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:ローカルレイアウト" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +フォント +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書フォント設定に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:フォントと文字形式" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +本文レイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +段落を字下げで区切るか行間を広げて区切るかを指定することができます。また、行間と本文の段組数もここで指定することができます。また、文章がLyX中で整形されて表示 +するようにするかどうか決めることができます。これは、出力中で文章が整形されるかどうかを決めるのではないことに注意してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、二段組や行間を画面には反映しないことに注意してください。これは実用的ではなく、しばしば読み辛い上に、WYSIWYMの概念に反するのです。しかし、出力に +おいては指定したとおりに反映されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ページレイアウト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このメニューの説明は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:用紙寸法と方向" + +\end_inset + +節および第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文書レイアウト" + +\end_inset + +節に説明されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ページ余白 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、用紙の余白を調整することができます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:余白" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +言語 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:言語" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +げんご@言語 ! もじこーど@文字コード +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +文書言語と引用形式がここで設定できます。文字コードは、文書の内容がどのようにLaTeXに書き出されるかを指定します（LyXファイルはつねにUTF-8でコード化さ +れています）。指定された文字コードにコード化できない文字は、すべてLaTeXコマンドとして書き出されます（LaTeXコマンドが対応していない文字がある場合には失 +敗します）。 +\begin_inset Foot +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +既知のコマンドは、テキストファイルで定義されていますから、ユーザー自身でこのファイルに未知の記号用のコマンドを加えることができます( +\emph on +unicodesymbols +\emph default +)。詳細は、取扱説明書カスタマイズ篇をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +言語既定値 +\family default +オプションを選択すると、本文の言語から本文部分の文字コードを決定します。このとき、文書が二つ以上の言語を含んでいると、LaTeXファイルに二つ以上の文字コードを +含ませることになるかもしれません。このオプションを使用しないときには、文書全体はつねに一つの文字コードだけを使用することになります。このオプションを有効にするの +が望ましい設定です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXは、Unicodeでの出力もサポートしているので、たくさんの特別な記号やアルファベット以外の文字が必要なときに、特に便利です。これを利用したい（そしてお使 +いのLaTeXシステムがUnicodeをサポートしている）場合には、以下の一覧から、四つのutf8関連選択肢のうち一つを選んでください。残念ながら、標準LaTe +XのUnicodeサポートははなはだ不完全であるため、たくさんのUnicode記号を含むファイルが、 +\family sans +言語既定値 +\family default +の文字コードで動くものの（このとき、LyXは既知のLaTeXコマンド一覧を使用します）、utf8文字コード固定では動かないということは、珍しいことではありません +（このとき、LyXは既知のLaTeXコマンド一覧を使用しません。なぜならUnicode記号はすべてutf8でコード化できるからです）。標準的LaTeXの代替的エ +ンジンたるXeTeXやLuaTeXでは、状況はもっと良くなっています。どちらのエンジンもUnicodeをネイティブにサポートしており、LyXも現在（出力形式 +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(XeT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default +・ +\family sans +PDF +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default +・ +\family sans +DVI +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +(LuaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX) +\family default +を通じて）これらのエンジンをサポートしています。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:出力ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +節を参照してください。仮に上記のオプションがうまく動かない場合には、これらの新しいエンジンを試すと良いかもしれません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +言語パッケージ +\family default +では、ハイフネーションと「第〜部」のような文字列の翻訳に使用されるLaTeXパッケージを指定します。使用できる設定は以下のとおりです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +既定値 +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +言語設定 +\family default +で選択された言語パッケージを使用します(第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:言語設定" + +\end_inset + +節参照)。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +自動 使おうとしている閲覧形式ないし書き出し形式に最も適した言語パッケージを選択します。多くの場合、これは +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +になります。もし新しいパッケージ +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +の方が適当であれば(XeTeXや非TeXフォントを使用している場合など)、 +\series bold +babel +\series default +の代わりにこちらのパッケージが使用されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +常にBabel +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default +の方が適切な場合でも +\series bold +babel +\series default +を用います。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ユーザ設定 自分で選択した言語パッケージを指定することができます。例えば、 +\series bold +ngerman +\series default + (ドイツ語文用)のような言語依存パッケージを使用したい場合には、 +\series bold + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\backslash +usepackage{ngerman} +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series default +と書き込んでください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +なし 言語パッケージを使用しません。科学論文用文書クラスの一部には、このように指定する必要のあるものがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +以下は主要な文字コードの一覧です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeX既定値（inputenc不使用） 文字コードに +\family sans +言語既定値 +\family default +を使用するのと同じですが、 +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + LaTeXパッケージは使用されません。そのため、これを使用するときには、プリアンブルに他の適当なパッケージを読み込んで、外国語で書かれている部分の文字コードを +TeXコードで指定する必要があるでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ASCII ASCII文字コード。通常の英語（7ビットASCII）しかカバーしていません。LyXはそれ以外の文字をすべてLaTeXコマンドに変換するので、多量の +LaTeXコマンドが必要な場合には、ファイルが大きくなる可能性があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +アラビア語（CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1256） アラビア語及びペルシア語用MS Windowsコードページ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +アラビア語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-6） アラビア語及びペルシア語用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +アルメニア語（ArmSCII8） アルメニア語用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +キリル文字（CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1251） キリル文字用MS Windowsコードページ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +キリル文字（KOI8-R） 標準キリル文字。特にロシア語向け。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +キリル文字（KOI8-U） ウクライナ語用キリル文字 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +キリル文字（pt +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +154） カザフ語用キリル文字 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ギリシア語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-7） ギリシア語用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +タイ語（TIS +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +620-0） タイ語用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +トルコ語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-9） （latin 5）トルコ語用。ISO-8859-1に近いが、アイスランド文字をトルコ語に置き換えてある。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +バルト語（CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1257） エストニア語・ラトビア語・リトアニア語用MS Windowsコードページ。ISO-8859-13文字コードと同等。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +バルト語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-13） エストニア語・ラトビア語・リトアニア語用。ISO-8859-4文字コードの上位集合。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +バルト語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-4） （latin 4）エストニア語・ラトビア語・リトアニア語用。ISO-8859-13文字コードの下位集合。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ヘブライ語（CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1255） ヘブライ語用MS Windowsコードページ。ISO-8859-8文字コードの上位集合。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ヘブライ語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-8） ヘブライ語用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ユニコード（CJK）（utf8） +\series bold + CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + LaTeXパッケージ（日中韓言語用）を使用したUnicode utf8 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ユニコード（XeTeX）（utf8） Unicodeを直接使用する +\family sans +XeTeX +\family default +や +\family sans +LuaTeX +\family default +とともに使用することを意図したUnicode utf8。LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +inputenc +\series default +は援用しません。XeTeXやLuaTeXを書き出したりプレビューしたりすると、LyXは自動的にこのエンコーディングを選択します。通常、このエンコーディングを手動 +で選択する必要はありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ユニコード（UCS拡張版）（utf8x） +\series bold +ucs +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! ucs +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +LaTeXパッケージに基づいたUnicode utf8（包括的。ラテン文字・ギリシャ文字・キリル文字・日中韓文字を含む）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ユニコード（utf8） +\series bold +inputenc +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! inputenc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + LaTeXパッケージに基づいたUnicode utf8。いまのところ、限られた文字範囲（主にラテン文字）しかサポートしていません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +中国語（簡体字）（EUC-CN） 簡体字中国語用。ユーロ貨幣記号を除いては、WindowsコードページCP936と同じ。2001年以降、この文字コードは、正式に +文字コードGB18030に取って代わられました。GB18030はLaTeXでは使用できないため、Unicode（CJK）（utf8）を使用するようにしてください +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +中国語（簡体字）（GBK） 簡体字中国語用。特にUNIX OS向け。2001年以降、この文字コードは、正式に文字コードGB18030に取って代わられました。GB +18030はLaTeXでは使用できないため、Unicode（CJK）（utf8）を使用するようにしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +中国語（繁体字）（EUC-TW） 繁体字中国語用。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +中欧語（CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1250） ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2用のMS Windowsコードページ（latin 2） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +中欧語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-2） （latin 2）アルバニア語・クロアチア語・チェコ語・ドイツ語・ハンガリー語・ポーランド語・ルーマニア語・スロバキア語・スロベニア語を収録 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +南ヨーロッパ語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-3） （latin 3）エスペラント語・ガリシア語・マルタ語・トルコ語を収録。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +南東ヨーロッパ語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-16） （latin 10）アルバニア語・クロアチア語・フィンランド語・フランス語・ドイツ語・ハンガリー語・アイルランドゲール語・イタリア語・ポーラン +ド語・ルーマニア語・スロベニア語を含む。区分的発音符を持つ文字と言語の多くを収録。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +日本語（CJK）（EUC-JP） 日本語用EUC-JP文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +CJK +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! CJK +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を +\family sans +日本語（CJK） +\family default +にしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +日本語（CJK）（JIS） 日本語用JIS文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +CJK +\series default +を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を +\family sans +日本語（CJK） +\family default +にしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +日本語（CJK不使用）（EUC-JP） 日本語用EUC-JP文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +japanese +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を +\family sans +日本語 +\family default +にしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +日本語（CJK不使用）（JIS） 日本語用JIS文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +japanese +\series default +を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を +\family sans +日本語 +\family default +にしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +日本語（CJK不使用）（SJIS） 日本語用SJIS文字コード。LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +japanese +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を使用。これを使用する際には、文書言語を +\family sans +日本語 +\family default +にしてください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +西欧語（CP +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1252） latin1用MS Windowsコードページ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +西欧語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-1） （latin 1） ISO-8859-1文字コード。アルバニア語・カタロニア語・デンマーク語・オランダ語・英語・フェロー語・フィンランド語・フラ +ンス語・ガリシア語・ドイツ語・アイスランド語・アイルランド語・イタリア語・ノルウェー語・ポルトガル語・スペイン語・スウェーデン語を含む。latin9に移行すべき +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +西欧語（ISO +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +8859-15） （latin 9） ISO-8859-15文字コード。ISO-8859-1文字コードと同様だが、ユーロ記号や +\lang english + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +oe +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\lang japanese +合字、その他フランス語とフィンランド語で用いられる文字を含む。latin9はlatin1の後継。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +韓国語（EUC-KR） 韓国語用 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このダイアログでは、現在の文書用に特定の言語パッケージを選択することができます。言語パッケージについての詳細は、 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:言語設定" + +\end_inset + +をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +色 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いろ@色 ! ほんぶん@本文 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いろ@色 ! はいけい@背景 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、本文のフォント色(既定値:黒)と、淡色表示注釈のフォント色(既定値:淡灰色)を変更することができます。 +\family sans +リセット +\family default +ボタンを押すと、色は既定値に戻ります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、頁の背景色(既定値:白)と影付きボックスの背景色(既定値:赤)を変更することもできます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +色はLyX中の表示には反映されず、出力中にのみ表れます(この淡色表示注釈は出力中では青で表示されます)。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +本文フォント色を変更した上、さらに文書設定の +\family sans +PDF特性 +\family default +で +\family sans +色付きリンク +\family default +オプションを有効にした場合、おそらく +\family sans +PDF特性 +\family default +の +\family sans +追加オプション +\family default +でリンクフォント色も変更する必要があります。例えば、オプションに +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold +linkcolor=black +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +と指定すれば、リンクフォント色が黒に設定されます。詳しくは、LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + +の取扱説明書をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace bigskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +強制改頁の直後に、TeXコードで以下のコマンドを用いると、文書中のページ毎に本文フォント色と頁背景色を変えることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +頁色を変えるには +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +pagecolor{色名} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +本文色を変えるには +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash +color{色名} +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここで、色名は次のいずれかです: +\series bold +black +\series default +, +\series bold +blue +\series default +, +\series bold +cyan +\series default +, +\series bold +green +\series default +, +\series bold +magenta +\series default +, +\series bold +red +\series default +, +\series bold +white +\series default +, +\series bold +yellow +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +本文色や背景色を変更した場合、これらを次の名称で用いることができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +頁背景色については +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +page_backgroundcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +本文色については +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +document_fontcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +影付きボックス背景色については +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +shadecolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +淡色表示注釈本文色については +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +note_fontcolor +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +自製の色を定義し使用する方法については、取扱説明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』の「色付きのセル」の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +連番と目次 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:番号の付け方-深度" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられているように、ここでは連番をつける節見出しの階層と、目次内に表示される節の階層を調整することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +書誌情報 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +natbib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! natbib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +または +\series bold +jurabib +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! jurabib +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を使用して引用形式を指定したり、LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +bibtopic +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! bibtopic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を使用して節分けされた書誌情報を使用可能にしたり、文書の書誌情報をどのように生成するかを微調整することができます。詳しくは、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:書誌情報" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +索引 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、文書の索引をどのように生成するかを微調整したり、索引を追加で定義したりすることができます。詳細については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:索引" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +PDF特性 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +PDF特性に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:PDF特性" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +数式オプション +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +これらのオプションは、LaTeXパッケージの +\series bold +amsmath +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! amsmath +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +・ +\series bold +esint +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! esint +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +・ +\series bold +mathdots +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! mathdots +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +・ +\series bold +mhchem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! mhchem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +を強制的に使用するようにするか、必要なときにこれらを自動的に使用するようにするかを指定します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +amsmath これは、多くの数式要素に必要とされているので、数式中にLaTeXエラーがでるときには、AMSを有効にしていることを確認してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +esint これは、特別な積分記号に使われます。取扱説明書『数式篇』の「大演算子」の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mathdots これは、特殊な省略符号に用いられます。取扱説明書『数式篇』の「省略符号」の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mhchem これは、化学式に用いられます。取扱説明書『数式篇』の「化学記号と化学式」の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +フロートの配置 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フロートの配置は、取扱説明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』の「フロートの配置」の節に解説があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +リスト +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +リストの設定は、取扱説明書『埋込オブジェクト篇』の「プログラムコードリスト」の章に解説があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ブリット +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、箇条書きの各階層で用いられる記号を調整することができます。箇条書き(記号)環境は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:箇条書き（記号）" + +\end_inset + +節に解説があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +派生枝 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +派生枝に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:派生枝" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +出力 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:出力" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、以下のように現在の文書の出力の仕方を定義することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +既定出力形式 +\family sans +表示 +\family default +メニューやツールバーで「表示」「更新」「親文書を表示」「親文書を更新」を選んだときに使用される形式。既定値は、ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +ファイル形式で設定されます。 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + +をご参照ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +出力と同期 +\family sans +移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator +順検索 +\family default +メニュー用の設定。詳細については、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +』の「 +\emph on +DVIとPDFの遡及検索 +\emph default +」の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +XHTML出力オプション 書き出し形式 +\family sans +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +XHTML +\family default +用の設定。 +\family sans +厳密型XHTML +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +1.1 +\family default +は、出力がXHTML標準の第1.1版に忠実に沿うようにします。 +\family sans +数式出力 +\family default +のそれぞれの設定については、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +』の「 +\emph on +XHTMLでの数式出力 +\emph default +」の節に詳細な解説があります。伸縮は、出力における数式の大きさを調整するのに用いられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eXプリアンブル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +このテキストフィールドには、特別なLaTeXパッケージを読み込むコマンドや、LaTeXコマンドの定義が入れられます。プリアンブルは、LaTeX熟練者向けです。よ +くわからないうちは、ここにコマンドを入れるべきではありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LaTeXの文法の入門は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:LaTeX文法" + +\end_inset + +節にあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +設定ダイアログ +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:設定ダイアログ" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +設定ダイアログは、 +\family sans +ツール\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定 +\family default +メニューで呼び出すことができます。このダイアログには、以下の従属メニューが含まれています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +操作性 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +操作画面 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かすたまいず@カスタマイズ!つーるばーの@ツールバーの------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かすたまいず@カスタマイズ!めにゅーの@メニューの------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +操作画面設定ファイル +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かすたまいず@カスタマイズ!つーるばーの@ツールバーの------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +かすたまいず@カスタマイズ!めにゅーの@メニューの------ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +メニューやツールバーの外観は、操作画面設定（UI）ファイルを選ぶことで、変更することができます。UIファイルは、ツールバーやメニューが列挙してあるテキストファイ +ルです。 +\lang english +The file +\emph on +default.ui +\emph default + loads three files +\lang japanese +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdmenus.inc +\lang english +specifies the menu entries for the standard menus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdcontext.inc +\lang english +specifies the menu entries in popup context menus +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +stdtoolbars.inc +\shape italic + +\emph on +\lang english +specifies the toolbar buttons +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ご自身のメニュー及びツールバーレイアウトを作成するには、まずこれらのファイルをコピーして、中の項目を編集してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +.incファイルの文法は単純です。 +\family sans +Menubar +\family default +・ +\family sans +Menu +\family default +・ +\family sans +Toolbar +\family default +の各項目は、 +\family sans +End +\family default +で明示的に終わらなくてはなりません。これらの中には、 +\family sans +Submenu +\family default +・ +\family sans +Item +\family default +・ +\family sans +OptItem +\family default +・ +\family sans +Separator +\family default +・ +\family sans +Icon +\family default +、および「ファイル」メニューの場合には加えて +\family sans +Lastfiles +\family default +の各項目が含まれています。各項目の文法は、 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\series bold +Item +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +メニュー +\series default +あるいは +\series bold +ボタン名 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +LyX関数 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + +全LyX関数がメニュー +\family sans +ヘルプ +\family default +\SpecialChar \menuseparator + +\family sans +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X関数 +\family default +に列挙してあります。 +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +例： +\family sans +移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator +しおり +\family default +メニューをひじょうによく使うので、6つのしおりが欲しいものとしましょう。以下の行 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + + +\series bold + Item +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +しおり6を保存 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +bookmark-save 6 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset VSpace smallskip* +\end_inset + +を +\emph on +stdmenus.inc +\emph default +ファイルの「navigate_bookmarks」（移動）メニュー部分に書き加えると、しおりが6つになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +\lang english +Icon +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Set +\family default + allows you to +\lang japanese +ここでは、LyXのツールバーの外観を変更することができます。現在使用できるアイコンセットは、 +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "この画像" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png" + +\end_inset + +で比較できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +自動ヘルプ +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +メイン作業領域でツールチップスを有効にする +\family default +オプションは、索引項目や脚注などの差込枠で、閉じられているものの中身を表示するツールチップスを有効にします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +セッション +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +ウィンドウレイアウトと座標を復元 +\family default +オプションを指定すると、LyXのメインウィンドウは、最後のLyXセッションで用いられていた大きさとレイアウトで開くようになります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +カーソル位置を復元 +\family default +オプションは、最後にファイル内にカーソルがあった位置にカーソルを配置します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +最後のセッションで開いていたファイルを読み込む +\family default +オプションは、最後のLyXセッションで開かれていたファイル全てを開きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +セッション情報をすべて削除 +\family default +ボタンを押すと、最後のLyXセッションから引き継がれた情報(カーソル位置や最後に開かれていた文書名など)をすべて削除します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +文書 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:文書のバックアップ" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ばっくあっぷ@バックアップ ! ぶんしょ@文書 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +保存する際に元の文書をバックアップする +\family default +を有効にすると、ファイルが開かれた時の状態か、最後に保存された時の状態のバックアップコピーを作成します。 +\lang english +It is stored in the +\family sans +Backup +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directory +\family default + (see +\lang japanese +第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:パス" + +\end_inset + +) +\lang english + or in the same folder as your document if no +\family sans +Backup +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +directory +\family default + is specified +\lang japanese +。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書バックアップ:毎 +\family default +オプションを指定すると、バックアップ保存動作の間隔を指定することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +既定で文書を圧縮保存 +\family default +を有効にすると、ファイルは常に圧縮形式で保存されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +直近のファイルの数 +\family default +は、 +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +直近のファイルを開く +\family default +メニューに表示する最後に開いたファイルの数です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文書をタブ内に開く +\family default +オプションが有効になっていないときには、すべてのファイルは、LyXの新しいインスタンスの中に開かれます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +単独インスタンス +\family default +オプションは、LyXサーバパイプ +\begin_inset Foot +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +LyXサーバパイプについての情報は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:パス" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +が指定されているときにのみ、アクティブになります。これが有効の時には、LyX文書は、既に走っているLyXインスタンスの中に開かれるようになります。無効の場合は、 +新たなLyXインスタントが、それぞれのファイルごとに生成されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +単一タブ閉ボタン +\family default +オプションが有効の場合には、タブバーの右端にタブを閉じるためのボタンがひとつだけ( +\family sans + +\begin_inset Graphics + filename ../../images/closetab.png + scale 75 + +\end_inset + + +\family default +)現れるようになります。無効の場合には、各文書タブごとに閉ボタンが付きます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +【註】 +\family sans +単一タブ閉ボタン +\family default +オプションを有効にするには、変更が効くようになる前に、LyXを再起動する必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +画面フォント +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぉんと@フォント!がめん@画面 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:画面フォント" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここで指定したフォントが、画面上で文書を表示するのに使われます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +本節は、LyXウィンドウの +\emph on +中の +\emph default +フォントだけを取り扱います。出力に表示されるフォントは、これらのフォントとは違うもので、 +\family sans +文書\SpecialChar \menuseparator +設定\SpecialChar \menuseparator +フォント +\family default +メニューで指定されます。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +既定では、LyXは、 +\family typewriter +Times +\family default +フォントをローマン（セリフ）フォントとして用い、 +\family typewriter +Arial +\family default +または +\family typewriter +Helvetica +\family default +（システムに依存します）を +\family sans +サンセリフ +\family default +フォント、 +\family typewriter +Courier +\family default +を +\family typewriter +タイプライタ +\family default +フォントとして使用します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フォントの大きさは、 +\family sans +拡大 +\family default +の設定で変更することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +フォント寸法は、ポイント単位で測られた文字高で表されます。72.27ポイントが1インチの大きさになります。付録 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" + +\end_inset + +を参照してください。既定のフォント寸法は、文書フォント寸法で10ポイントが使用されたときと同じです。寸法に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文書フォント" + +\end_inset + +節に詳細があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +フォントレンダリングの速度を向上させるためにPixmapキャッシュを使う +\family default +オプションを有効にすると、LyXが画面を再描画する必要が減ります。これによって、特に遅いシステムでは、パフォーマンスが向上します。一方、画面上の文字は少し毛羽立 +って見えるかもしれません。したがって、これを有効にするか否かは、スピードをお求めになるか美しさをお求めになるかに依存します。Pixmapキャッシュは、Mac +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +OSとWindowsでのみ使うことができ、また意味があることにご注意ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +色 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +いろ@色 ! Lyxがめん@LyX画面 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 ! いろ@色 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、LyXが使うすべての色を変更することができます。一覧の中の項目を選んで、 +\family sans +変更 +\family default +ボタンを押してください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +システム色を使用 +\family default +オプションを有効にすると、お使いのOSないしはウィンドウマネジャの色スキームが使用されます。その場合、 +\family sans +カーソル +\family default +・ +\family sans +選択 +\family default +・ +\family sans +表罫線 +\family default +・ +\family sans +本文 +\family default +・ +\family sans +URLラベル +\family default +・ +\family sans +URL本文 +\family default +の色は設定できなくなり、一覧に表示されなくなります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +表示 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 ! ひょうじ@表示 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、LyX内で図がどのように表示されるかを指定できます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +自動プレビュー +\family default +は、使用中文書の部分プレビューを可能にします。この機能については、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:文書の断片プレビュー" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +段落の終わりに印 +\family default +オプションは、各段落の終わりに段落標（¶）を表示します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +編集 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +制御 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +編集 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +カーソルはスクロールバーに追随 +\family default +オプションを有効にすると、スクロールする際に、カーソルがつねに、文書の現在表示されている部分のいちばん上に置かれるようにします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +カーソル幅は変更することができます。カーソル幅を0に設定すると、画面フォントで設定した拡大率に応じて、カーソル幅も調整されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +文末を超えてスクロールする +\family default +は自明でしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +LyXでは、 +\family sans +CTRL+矢印キー +\family default +を押すことで単語から単語へジャンプすることができます。 +\family sans +単語間の移動にMac流のカーソル移動を使用 +\family default +オプションを使用すると、カーソルは単語末から次の単語末へとジャンプします。通常は、単語頭から単語頭への移動です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +環境をアルファベット順に整序 +\family default +オプションは、段落環境のプルダウンボックスの項目を整序します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +環境をカテゴリ毎にまとめる +\family default +オプションは、段落環境のプルダウンボックスの項目をグループ化します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +数式マクロ編集オプションは編集様式を決定します。取扱説明書 +\emph on +数式篇 +\emph default +の +\emph on +数式マクロ +\emph default +の節をご覧ください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +全画面 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、全画面モードで隠すものを指定できます。 +\family sans +本文幅を制限 +\family default +オプションは、全画面モードでの本文幅を指定します。こうすると、本文を画面よりも小さく表示できて、本文は中央部に表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +短絡キー +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +きーせってい@キー設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ばいんど@バインド | see +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +キー設定 +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 ! たんらくきー@短絡キー +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +キー設定ファイル +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +\lang english +Bind File +\family default + specifies the binding file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key. + Several binding files are available, among them +\family sans +\lang japanese +: +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +cua.bind PCキーボードでの典型的な短絡キーパターン +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +(x)emacs.bind エディタプログラム +\family sans +Emacs +\family default +（ +\family sans +XEmacs +\family default +）で用いられているキー設定 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +mac.bind +\family sans +Mac +\begin_inset space \thinspace{} +\end_inset + +OS +\family default +システム用のキー設定 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +また、 +\shape italic +broadway.bind +\shape default +のように、特定の文書クラス用にデザインされたキー設定ファイルや、特定の言語用のキー設定ファイルもあります。言語用キー設定ファイルの名前は、例えばポルトガルならば +「pt」のように、言語コードで始まります。LyXを特定の言語の下で使うと、LyXは適切なキー設定ファイルを使用しようとします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\shape italic +math.bind +\shape default +のようないくつかのキー設定ファイルは、限られた範囲の定義しか含んでいません。 +\shape italic +cua.bind +\shape default +ファイルの終わりを見れば、キー設定ファイルの見通しをよくするために、 +\emph on +math.bind +\emph default +がインクルードされる形になっているのを確認できるはずです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +The field +\family sans +Show +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +ke +\bar under +y +\bar default +-bindings +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +containing +\family default + allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function + in the selected key binding file. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsubsection +短絡キーの編集 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:短絡キーの編集" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +きーせってい@キー設定 ! へんしゅう@編集 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +新しいキー設定を追加したり、既存のキー設定をご自分の好みに合うように修正するには、すべてのLyX関数とそれに結びつけられた短絡キーを列挙したダイアログ中の表を使 +用することができます。関数を容易に見つけられるように、関数はカテゴリごとにまとめられ、 +\family sans +以下を含むキー設定を表示する +\family default +フィールドがダイアログに備わっています。このフィールドに編集したい関数のキーワードを入力することができます。たとえば、ここに「paste」と入力すると、名称に「 +paste」を含む3つの関数に対するぜんぶで4つの既存の短絡キーが表示されます。このように、一つの関数は二つ以上の短絡キーを持つことができます。LyX関数の全覧 +は、 +\family sans +ヘルプ +\family default +メニュー内の『 +\emph on +LyX関数 +\emph default +』ファイルにもあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +たとえば、 +\family sans +textstyle-apply +\family default +関数に +\family sans +Alt+Q +\family default +という短絡キーを加えるには、この関数を選択して、 +\family sans +修正 +\family default +ボタンを押します。短絡キーを追加するためのダイアログが現れますので、Alt+Qを押して短絡キーを定義します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +既存の短絡キーの修正も、これと同様に行います。 +\lang english +You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX + Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the + different function names as a semicolon separated list +\lang japanese +。するとLyXは、現在の文書部分で有効な関数のうち最初のものを使用します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +If you don't like a a particular shortcut, you can remove it. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +他に、キー設定ファイルをテキストエディタで編集することによって、短絡キーを編集することもできます。。各項目の文法は +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\series bold + +\backslash +bind +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +キーの組み合わせ +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Quotes eld +\end_inset + +LyX関数 +\begin_inset Quotes erd +\end_inset + + +\series default + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +のようになっています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +キーボード/マウス +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:キーボード配置表" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +きーぼーどはいちひょう@キーボード配置表 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 ! きーぼーどはいちひょう@キーボード配置表 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +通常、キーボードの設定は、お使いのオペレーティングシステムのメニューで行います。これができない場合のために、LyXではキーボード配置表を使用することができます。 +例えば、チェコ語キーボードを持っているけれども、ルーマニア語用のもののように動作させるには +\lang english +enable +\family sans +Use +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +keyboard +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +map +\family default + and select +\lang japanese +、 +\shape italic +romanian.kmap +\shape default +というファイル名のキーボード配置表を使うとよいでしょう。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +You can specify a +\family sans +First +\family default + and a +\family sans +Second +\family default + keyboard map and, if you use the +\emph on +cua +\emph default + bindings, you can select the first and second with +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-primary" +\end_inset + + +\lang english +and +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-secondary" +\end_inset + + +\lang english +respectively or toggle between them with +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset Info +type "shortcut" +arg "keymap-toggle" +\end_inset + +. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +キーボード配置表はありあわせとして提供されているもので、全てのシステムで動作するわけではありません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この他に、ここでは +\family sans +ホイールスクロール速度 +\family default +を指定することができます。標準の値は1.0となっており、数値を上げるとスクロール速度が上がり、数値を下げるとスクロール速度が下がります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +スクロールホイールによる拡大 +\family default +セクションでは、拡大に使用するキーを選択することができます。このキーが押されたままマウスホイールを回転させると、文章が拡大します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +入力補完 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +入力補完は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:入力補完" + +\end_inset + +節に記述があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +パス +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:パス" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぱす@パス +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 ! でぃれくとり@ディレクトリ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\lang english +The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during + installation. + But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +作業ディレクトリ これはLyXの作業ディレクトリです。ファイルを +\family sans +開く +\family default +・ +\family sans +保存 +\family default +・ +\family sans +名前をつけて保存 +\family default +するときの既定値です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +ひな形文書 これ +\family sans +は、ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +新規（ひな形使用） +\family default +メニューを使用したときに開かれるディレクトリです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +用例ファイル +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +開く +\family default +ダイアログで +\family sans +用例 +\family default +ボタンを押すと、ここに指定したディレクトリが開かれます。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +MacOSやWindowsシステムでLyXを使用しているときには、用例ボタンはありません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +バックアップディレクトリ +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ばっくあっぷ@バックアップ ! でぃれくとり@ディレクトリ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + バックアップコピーはこのディレクトリに保存されます。この欄が空白で、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文書のバックアップ" + +\end_inset + +節にあるようにバックアップが有効にされていると、作業ディレクトリがバックアップを保存するのに使用されます。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +バックアップファイルは、「.lyx~」という拡張子を持ちます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Ly +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Xサーバーパイプ ここには、Unixパイプ名を入れることができます。このパイプは、外部プログラムからLyXにデータを送るのに使用されます。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold +例: +\series default + 文書に +\emph on +test.bib +\emph default +というBibTeXデータベースを付加します。このファイルは、 +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default +というプログラムで編集が可能です。 +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default +側では、設定の +\family sans +外部プログラム +\family default +の中で、LyX側で設定したのと同じUNIXパイプを指定しなくてはなりません。データベースの一項目を引用として索きたい場合には、 +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default +中でその項目を選択して、LyXマークをクリックしてください。使用中のLyXファイルの、カーソルのある位置に、その項目が引用として挿入されます。もちろん、 +\family typewriter +JabRef +\family default +とLyXは同時に実行されている必要があります。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +パイプは、 +\family sans +単独インスタンス +\family default +の機能にも使用されます。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文書のバックアップ" + +\end_inset + +節をご覧ください。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +LyXサーバーバイプをWindowsで使用するには、下記のパイプ名を使用しなくてはなりません。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\series bold + +\backslash + +\backslash +. +\backslash +pipe +\backslash +lyxpipe +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +一時ディレクトリ 一時ファイルはこのディレクトリに保存されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +類義語辞書 類義語辞書が置いてあるディレクトリです。これは、指定なしだと類義語機能が動作しない場合や、自製ないし別の辞書を使用したい場合以外では、指定する必要は +ありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Hunspell辞書 スペルチェックプログラム +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default +の辞書が置いてあるディレクトリです。これは、 +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default +を使用していて、指定なしだと類義語機能が動作しない場合や、自製ないし別の辞書を使用したい場合以外では、指定する必要はありません。Windows版LyXでは、 +\family typewriter +Hunspell +\family default +は唯一使用できるスペルチェッカーであり、ディレクトリを指定しなくても動作するはずです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +PATH前置句 このフィールドには、外部プログラムへのパスのリストを書き込みます。LyXが外部プログラムを使用する必要があるとき、システム上でそれを見つけるのに +、LyXはこのリストを参照します。WindowsとMacシステムでは、パス・リストはLyX設定時に自動的に設定されますので、通常修正する必要はありません。Uni +xあるいはLinuxシステムにおいては、通常のシステムパス（$PATH）にない外部プログラムを使いたいときのみ、このパスを設定する必要があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +TEXINPUTS前置句 TEXINPUTS環境変数を用いると、TeXコードか文書プリアンブルに書き込んだコマンドによって、LyX文書に外部ファイルをインクルー +ドさせて利用することができるようになります。この前置句には、既定では、文書ディレクトリが含まれています(ピリオド記号「.」として表されます)。前置句には、OSの既 +定区切り(UNIX派生システムでは「:」、Windowsでは「;」)で区切ることによって、いくつものパスを並べることができます。ファイルがインクルードされると、 +TEXINPUTS前置句に列挙されたパスで、インプットファイルが検索されます。TEXINPUTS前置句に列挙されたもののうち、絶対パスでないものは、LyXファイ +ルのあるディレクトリからの相対パスとして解釈されるので注意してください。文書によってはコンパイルに失敗する可能性があるので、パスの一つには、常に「.」を含めること +をお勧めします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +利用者情報 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここには、ご自身の名前と電子メールアドレスを入力することができます。利用者情報は、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:変更追跡機能" + +\end_inset + +節で説明されている変更追跡機能を有効にしているときに、あなたが変更を加えたことを示すために使用されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +言語設定 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +げんご@言語 ! せってい@------ 設定 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 ! げんご@------ 言語 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +言語 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:言語設定" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +操作画面用言語 ここではLyXのメニューで使用される言語を選択することができます。現在の翻訳状況については、 +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +target "http://www.lyx.org/l18n" + +\end_inset + +でご覧になれます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +言語パッケージ これは言語関連項目を取り扱うのに読み込むべきLaTeXパッケージを定義します。ここで指定したパッケージが取り扱うべき言語関連項目は、適切なハイフ +ネーションのほか、「章」や「表」などの文字列や日付などの現地語化が含まれます。もっともよく使われる言語パッケージは +\series bold +babel +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! babel +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +であり、これは古くからLaTeXの標準言語パッケージとなっています。しかしながら、XeTeXやLuaTeXのような比較的新しい組版エンジンでは、これらのエンジン +のマルチスクリプトサポートに適した別の言語パッケージ +\series bold +polyglossia +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! polyglossia +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +が使用されています。さらに、babelでカバーされていない言語向けの言語パッケージもあります。使用できるものは、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:言語" + +\end_inset + +節に述べられています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +開始コマンド ある文書言語を書くときに特別なLaTeXパッケージが必要とされる場合、ここにそのパッケージを開始するコマンドを指定することができます。例えば、 +\series bold +ArabTeX +\series default +パッケージを使用してアラビア語を書くときに必要とされる開始コマンド +\family sans + +\backslash +begin{arabtext} +\family default +がその例です。 +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + +を参照してください。既定値は +\series bold +babel +\series default +コマンド +\family sans + +\backslash +selectlanguage{$$lang} +\family default +です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +終了コマンド コマンド開始の反対です。既定値のようにいくつかのパッケージは、開始コマンドがパッケージの入切を行うので、終了コマンドを必要としません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +既定小数点 表で使用する小数点を定義します(小数点揃え用)。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +言語を大域的に設定 このオプションを有効にすると、この文書で使われている言語は、文書クラスオプションとして追加され、すべてのLaTeXパッケージで使用されるよう +になります。有効にしなければ、言語は +\series bold +babel +\series default +パッケージのオプションとして使用されるのみです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +自動開始 このオプションを有効にすると、文書は選択した文書言語で開始されます。このオプションが有効でないときには、LaTeX出力において、 +\family sans +開始コマンド +\family default +が文書の最初で明示的に使用されます。これによって、既定値でない +\family sans +開始コマンド +\family default +を使用しているときに、正しい言語が使用されることを確実にします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +自動終了 自動開始の反対です。これが有効でないときには、終了コマンドが文書の最後で使用されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +外国語をマークする 文書言語と異なる言語に指定されている文章は、青い下線で表示されます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +右から左書きの言語をサポート アラビア語・ヘブライ語・ペルシア語のように、右から左へ書く言語(RTL言語)を使用できるようにします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +カーソルの動き RTL言語で、左(右)矢印キーが視覚的に左(右)に動くようにするのか、それとも論理的に動くようにするのかを定義することができます。論理的とは、カ +ーソルがRTL言語で書かれた文章の中にあるときに、例えば、右矢印キーを押すとカーソルが左に動くということです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +スペルチェッカー +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +スペルチェッカーの設定に関しては、第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sec:スペルチェック" + +\end_inset + +節に説明があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +出力 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +一般 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +出力の行幅 これは、 +\family sans +ファイル\SpecialChar \menuseparator +書き出し\SpecialChar \menuseparator +平文 +\family default +メニューを使用したときに、一行に印字する最大の文字数を設定します。行幅を0にすると、すべての文章が、改行なしに一行に印字されることを意味します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +日付書式 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ひづけしょしき@日付書式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 ! ひづけしょしき@日付書式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + 日付の書式は、 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +に挙げてある書式のひとつないしは組み合わせです。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +例えば、 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +%y/%m/%d +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + +という書式は、「年/月/日」の形式の日付を印字します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +書き出し時の上書き LyXの書き出し時に、何を上書きして良いかを設定します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +順検索 +\family sans +移動\SpecialChar \menuseparator +順検索 +\family default +メニューで使用されるコマンドです。詳細については、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +』の「DVI/PDFの逆検索」という節にあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +プリンタ +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:プリンタ" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぷりんた@プリンタ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定!ぷりんた@プリンタ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +既定プリンタ ここではお使いの既定プリンタ名を指定できます。プリンタ名は、 +\family sans +印刷コマンド +\family default +が実行されるときに使用されます。 +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Greyedout +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold +【註】 +\series default +Windowsシステムでは効力がないのでこのフィールドは空でかまいません。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +印刷コマンド これはLyXすなわちLaTeXが印刷に使用するコマンドです。既定値は、ほとんどのシステムで +\family sans +dvips +\family default +です。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +印刷コマンドオプション ここでは印刷コマンド用オプションを指定できます。お使いの印刷コマンドを提供するプログラムの取扱説明書に、印刷オプションの全覧と説明があり +ます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +出力をプリンタに合わせる このオプションは、 +\family sans +印刷コマンド +\family default +が「 +\family sans +dvips +\family default +」のときのみ機能します。これはdvips用の設定ファイルを有効化します。これはdvips熟練者専用のオプションです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +LaT +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +eX +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:LaTeX-設定" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 ! LaTeX +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +Te +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +X文字コード これは文書フォントの既定文字コードです。 +\family sans +T1 +\family default +が既定値で、西欧諸言語と記号を含んでいます。 +\family sans +T2A +\family default +・ +\family sans +T2B +\family default +・ +\family sans +T2C +\family default +・ +\family sans +LCY +\family default +・ +\family sans +X2 +\family default +はキリル語用です。「 +\family sans +T1, T2B +\family default +」のように文字コードを組み合わせることも可能です。フォント文字コードは、通常、LyXがバックグラウンドで設定する言語パッケージによって自動的に読み込まれます。で +すから、既定の文字コードを変更する必要はありません。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +既定の用紙寸法 これは新規文書で使用される用紙寸法です。既定値はお使いのLaTeXシステムの設定に依存します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +DVIビューア用紙寸法設定 これは +\family sans +xdvi +\family default +がDVIビューアとして使用されているときのみ有効です。詳細については、 +\family sans +xdvi +\family default +の取扱説明書をお読みください。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、処理プログラムのオプションとパラメータ付きコマンドを指定することもできます。しかし、ここで何かを変更する前に、当該アプリケーションの取扱説明書を読むこ +とを強くお進めします。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +書誌情報の生成 書誌情報を生成するための設定。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:文献データベース" + +\end_inset + +節参照。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +索引の生成 索引を生成するための設定。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:索引プログラム" + +\end_inset + +節参照。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +用語集コマンド 用語集を生成するプログラムのコマンド。第 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "sub:用語集プログラム" + +\end_inset + +節を参照。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +CheckTe +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +{} +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +Xコマンド 取扱説明書『 +\emph on +高度な機能篇 +\emph default +』の +\emph on +Checking TeX +\emph default +の章に述べられている +\family sans +CheckTeX +\family default +プログラムのコマンド。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +さらに以下のオプションがあります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +LaTeXファイルでWindows流のパス表記を使う Windowsのパス記法を使用します。すなわち、フォルダを区切るのに「/」ではなく「 +\backslash +」を使用します。このオプションは、LyXをWindows上で使用する際には、既定で有効化されています。 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ぱす@パス +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +せってい@設定 ! ぱす@パス +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Description +文書クラス変更時にクラスオプションをリセットする +\lang english +Removes all manually set +\family sans +Class options +\family default + in the +\family sans +Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator +Document +\begin_inset space ~ +\end_inset + +Class +\family default + dialog when changing the document class. +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Section +ファイル処理 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるしょり@ファイル処理 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +変換子 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sub:変換子" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +へんかんし@変換子 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここには、一つの形式から別の形式へ変換する定義済み変換コマンドが一覧表示されます。これらは修正したり新しいものを作ったりすることができます。変換子を修正するには +、変換子を選択してから、 +\family sans +変換子 +\family default +フィールドと +\family sans +追加フラグ +\family default +フィールドの中身を変更し、 +\family sans +修正 +\family default +ボタンを押します。新しい変換子を作るには、既存の変換子をどれか選択してから、 +\family sans +変換元の書式 +\family default +ドロップダウンリストで別の形式を選択し、 +\family sans +変換子 +\family default +フィールドを修正し、 +\family sans +追加 +\family default +ボタンを押します。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family sans +変換子のファイルキャッシュ +\family default +が有効になっているときには、 +\family sans +最大日数 +\family default +フィールドで指定されている期間のあいだ、変換がキャッシュされます。つまり、キャッシュの変換済み画像が代わりに使用されるため、文書を再度開いたときに画像を再変換す +る必要がないのです。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +変換子定義で使うことのできる変数やフラグなど、変換子についての詳細は、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +カスタマイズ篇 +\emph default +』の +\emph on +Converters +\emph default +の節に記述があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Subsection +ファイル形式 +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ふぁいるけいしき@ファイル形式 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "sec:ファイル形式" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ここでは、LyXが扱うことのできる定義済みファイル形式が一覧表示されています。特定のファイル形式に使用する、閲覧プログラムや編集プログラムを変更することができま +す。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +さらに、 +\family sans +既定出力形式 +\family default +を定義することができ、これは、 +\family sans +表示 +\family default +メニューやツールバーで、 +\family sans +表示 +\family default +・ +\family sans +更新 +\family default +・ +\family sans +親文書を表示 +\family default +・ +\family sans +親文書を更新 +\family default +を選択した時に、用いられます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +さらに、編集メニューやツールバーで「表示」「更新」「親文書を表示」「親文書を更新」を選んだときに使用される「既定出力形式」を定義することができます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +形式定義で使うことのできるオプションなど、ファイル形式について詳しくは、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +カスタマイズ篇 +\emph default +』の +\emph on +Formats +\emph default +の節に記述があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +ある形式から他の形式への変換は、すべてLyXの一時ディレクトリで行われているので、変換がうまく行くためには、一時ディレクトリにファイルをコピー（複写）する前に、 +ファイルに変更を加える必要があることがあります。これは、 +\family sans +複写子 +\family default +を指定することによってなされます。複写子について詳しく＜は、取扱説明書『 +\emph on +カスタマイズ篇 +\emph default +』の +\emph on +Copiers +\emph default +の節に記述があります。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +LyXで使用できる単位 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:LyXで使用できる単位" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +たんい@単位 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +この文書で用いられる単位の理解のために、表 +\begin_inset CommandInset ref +LatexCommand ref +reference "tab:単位" + +\end_inset + +に、LyXで使うことのできる単位をまとめておきます。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Float table +placement t +wide false +sideways false +status open + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset Caption + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "tab:単位" + +\end_inset + +単位 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\begin_inset VSpace medskip +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +\align center +\begin_inset Tabular + + + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +単位 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +名称／摘要 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ミリメートル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cm +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +センチメートル +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +in +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +インチ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pt +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ポイント (72.27 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +pt = 1 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +パイカ (1 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +pc = 12 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +sp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +スケールポイント (65536 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +sp = 1 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +pt) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +bp +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ビッグポイント (72 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +bp = 1 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +in) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +dd +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ディドー (72 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +dd +\begin_inset Formula $\approx$ +\end_inset + + 37.6 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +mm) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +cc +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +シセロ (1 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +cc = 12 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +dd) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Scale% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +元の画像幅の% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +text% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +テキスト幅の% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +col% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +組段幅の% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +page% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +用紙幅の% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +line% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +行幅の% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +theight% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +テキスト高さの% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +pheight% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +用紙高さの% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +ex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +現在のフォントの文字「x」の高さ +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +em +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +現在のフォントの文字「M」の幅 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +mu +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Text + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +数式単位 (1 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +mu = 1/18 +\begin_inset Formula $\,$ +\end_inset + +em) +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + + + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Chapter +謝辞 +\begin_inset CommandInset label +LatexCommand label +name "cha:謝辞" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard + +\family roman +\series medium +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +この取扱説明書は、さまざまな人たちの共同作業によって作られました（そしてあなたにも貢献してほしいのです）。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Alejandro Aguilar Sierra +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Amir Karger +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +David Johnson +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Hartmut Haase +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Ignacio García +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Ivan Schreter +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +John Raithel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +John Weiss +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Lars Gullik Bjønnes +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Matthias Ettrich +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Matthias Zenker +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Rich Fields +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Pascal André +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Paul Evans +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Paul Russel +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Robin Socha +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize + +\noun on +Uwe Stöhr +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +LyXプロジェクトチーム: +\begin_inset CommandInset citation +LatexCommand cite +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Paragraph + +\family roman +\series bold +\shape up +\size normal +\emph off +\bar no +\noun off +\color none +日本語訳 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +小浪 吉史 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +高宮 安仁 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +人見 光太郎 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +人見 久恵 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Itemize +横田 宏治 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +次ページの書誌情報は、 +\family sans +書誌情報 +\family default +環境を使って作成されています。 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +label "Credits" +key "lyxcredit" + +\end_inset + +LyXプロジェクトチーム: +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Credits" +target "http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyx-devel/trunk/lib/CREDITS" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyx-devel/trunk/lib/CREDITS +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexcompanion" + +\end_inset + +Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens: +\emph on +The LaTeX Companion Second Edition. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 2004（邦訳 「The LaTeXコンパニオン」アスキー書籍編集部監訳、アスキー出版局、1998） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexguide" + +\end_inset + +Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. + Daly: +\emph on +A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 2003 +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "latexbook" + +\end_inset + +Leslie Lamport: +\emph on +LaTeX: A Document Preparation System. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994（第1版の邦訳は 「LaTeX〜文書処理システム〜」大野俊治他訳、アスキー出版局、19 +90） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "texbook" + +\end_inset + +Donald E. + Knuth. + +\emph on +The TeXbook. + +\emph default + Addison-Wesley, 1984（邦訳 「TeXブック〜コンピュ−タによる組版システム〜（改訂新版）」鷺谷好輝訳 、アスキー出版局、1992） +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "TeXCatalogue" + +\end_inset + +The TeX Catalogue: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "LaTeXFAQ" + +\end_inset + +The LaTeX FAQ: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX" + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +プログラムの +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "BibTeX-2" + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +BibTeX +\family default +プログラムの使い方を記した +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "makeindex" + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +makeindex +\family default +プログラムの +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "xindy" + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +xindy +\family default +プログラムの +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "AMS" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex" + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +of the AMS LaTeX-packages +\lang japanese +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "caption" + +\end_inset + +LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +caption +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! caption +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +の +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "enumitem" + +\end_inset + +LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +enumitem +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! enumitem +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +の +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "fancyhdr" + +\end_inset + +LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +fancyhdr +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! fancyhdr +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +の +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "hyperref" + +\end_inset + + LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +hyperref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +の +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "nomencl" + +\end_inset + +LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +nomencl +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! nomencl +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +の +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "prettyref" + +\end_inset + +LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +prettyref +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! prettyref +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +:の +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "refstyle" + +\end_inset + +LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +refstyle +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! refstyle +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +:の +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "tipa" + +\end_inset + +LaTeXパッケージ +\series bold +tipa +\series default + +\begin_inset Index idx +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout +Latexぱっけーじ@LaTeXパッケージ ! tipa +\end_layout + +\end_inset + +の +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "取扱説明書" +target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Arabic" + +\end_inset + +アラビア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Armenian" + +\end_inset + +アルメニア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + + +\lang english +how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages +\lang japanese + +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Farsi" + +\end_inset + +ペルシア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Hebrew" + +\end_inset + +ヘブライ語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Japanese" + +\end_inset + +日本語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Latvian" + +\end_inset + + ラトビア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + + リトアニア語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Mongolian" + +\end_inset + + モンゴル語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + +ベトナム語用にLyXを設定する方法を述べた +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Bibliography +\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem +LatexCommand bibitem +key "NewInLyX20" + +\end_inset + + +\family sans +LyX 2.0 +\family default +の新機能に関する +\begin_inset CommandInset href +LatexCommand href +name "Wikiページ" +target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20" + +\end_inset + +: +\begin_inset Newline newline +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Flex URL +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +\begin_inset Newpage newpage +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset ERT +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +let +\backslash +mybibname +\backslash +bibname +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + + +\backslash +renewcommand{ +\backslash +bibname}{ +\backslash +mybibname 2}% +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset Note Note +status collapsed + +\begin_layout Plain Layout + +\series bold + +\backslash +bibname +\series default +コマンドは、現在の文書言語での書誌情報名です。ここでは最後に、以下の書誌情報が第二書誌情報一覧であることを示すために、それを番号2でもって再定義しています。 +\end_layout + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset bibtex +LatexCommand bibtex +bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs" +options "../biblio/alphadin" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\begin_layout Standard +上記の文献一覧は、BibTeXデータベースから生成されたものです。 +\series bold + +\begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print +LatexCommand printnomenclature +set_width "auto" + +\end_inset + + +\begin_inset CommandInset index_print +LatexCommand printindex +type "idx" + +\end_inset + + +\end_layout + +\end_body +\end_document -- 2.39.2